difference where mc is the moisture content ma the mass of sample after humidity exposure and md the mass of the dry sample results and discussion chemical composition of the fibers it is well known that the chemical composition of the lignocellulosic fibers investigated the amount of the different fiber components quantified does not add up to simply because only the major components are reported we did not determine the amount of pectin pentosan and proteins as well as the extractable organic matter such as waxes fatty alcohols fatty acids and different esters similarly the cellulose content of henequen fibers is approx wt which is in good agreement to the value reported by valadez gonzalez et al flax and hemp fibers have the highest cellulose content of around wt abaca fine has the highest lignin content of around wt cornhusk has the greatest percentage lechuguilla and henequen fibers have a very similar chemical composition because they are all extracted using the same process from different varieties of the agave plant family grown in the same geographical region wetting properties and fiber surface tension figure shows exemplarily a set of weight gain the cell walls of the fibers will swell to a maximum due to contact with polar liquids after a finite time which reduces the average capillary radii and will thus have an effect on the rate of capillary rise in the packed fiber bed however non polar liquids are not expected to cause swelling of the cell walls furthermore the absorption of liquid into the pores and the interaction function of time and column height however we found that it is still possible to extract valuable information from the capillary rise measurements because the relevant wetting data are the initial wetting rates it is highly unlikely that the initial wetting rates are affected by any dimensional changes of the fibers or even whereas as can be seen from figure the wetting process was completed after only s and then the curve levels off furthermore our measurements were always performed on fresh samples under controlled temperature conditions thus eliminating the effect caused by swelling due to previous contact with polar liquids corresponding to the normalized wetting rate was obtained by multiplying the fiber wetting rate with the factor containing the liquid properties the data points shown are averaged values of at least five repeated measurements the maximum in figure equals the critical solid vapor surface tension cc which in analogy to a zisman plot corresponds to fibers can be estimated form a gaussian fit to the normalized wetting rate which equals cl cosh as function of the liquid surface tension cl the points to the left hand side of the maximum correspond to liquids which wet the fiber surfaces completely the points to the right hand side of the maximum indicate liquids that only partially wet the fibers table the regenerated cellulose fibers to be mn the literature reports values for pure cellulose between mn and mn it seems that the actual surface tension value depends on the purity and degree of crystallinity of the cellulose for the flax fibers we et al and between mn and mn for untreated flax fibers the rest of the fibers sisal henequen and lechuguilla have very similar surface tension values which is not surprising since they have very similar chemical compositions comparing the surface tensions of abaca bold of the fibers abaca bold fibers have a lower cellulose and hemicelluloses content as compared to abaca fine the availability of the polar groups contributing to the hydrophilic character of the fibers is usually a direct result of the efficiency of the retting process as suggested in the literature for abaca bold to mn for abaca fine a similar trend was reported by van hazendonk et al who showed that the analyzing the data presented in tables and we find that the surface tension increases almost linearly with increasing cellulose content of the lignocellulosic fibers extrapolating the linear fit to content it yields a hypothetical surface tension of mn for pure cellulose which is in excellent agreement with of the fibers figure shows the measured for the leaf fibers sisal henequen and lechuguilla figure the for the bast fibers abaca fine abaca bold flax and hemp and figure the for the fruit fibers cornhusk and luffa as can be seen from figures the value of the potential decreases rapidly to approach a much smaller value flax and cornhusk the potential of the fibers increases from a value on different time scales asymptotically to a constant but larger value for flax fibers and cornhusk the potential was initially positive and decreases with time to a much smaller potential moreover as the measurements advanced and the plateau developed by for jute fibers and green hemp the positive f potentials measured for flax and cornhusk is most likely due to the presence of proteins and amino acids in the surfaces of these fibers cornhusk contains up to the relative ratio of the acid base groups present in these compounds but also on the superstructure of the fiber which determines which of the functional groups is actually exposed at the fiber electrolyte interface will determine the surface charge of the fibers in aqueous solutions some amino acids and proteins with relatively serine proline tyrosine asparagine glutamine tryptophan histidine and arginine the potential measured as function of time is area to increase but the concentration of the dissociable groups does not change which leads to a reduction of the potential in other words the plane of shear between the solid and the liquid is pushed into the electrolyte solution which excludes the diffuse part of the electrochemical double layer from mechanical interactions the dissolution of certain components and the re adsorption of charged species into the electrochemical double layer might also reduce the potential the presence of salts is confirmed as ash content of the fibers the potential and the different quotients which are summarized table the fibers have different degrees
of a more complex theoretical view of how nations are born the role of the presbyterian missionaries was diminished but they are still regarded as a meaningful factor in this this ambivalence in the american theological view between a millenarianist vision and identification with the awakening arab peoples continued until the first world war we find at the end of the nineteenth blackstone who in the famous protestant convention of demanded of president benjamin harrison that the us should consider the condition of the israelites and their claims to palestine as their ancient on the other side stood the american consul in jerusalem selah merrill who attempted to counterbalance the growing influence of the return of the jews notion merrill jerusalem zionism was neither a holy nor a religious phenomenon but rather a colonialist project that he predicted would not last because it pertained to the jewish eastern european world while the definition is apt the prediction seems in hindsight to be the millenarianists seemed to gain the upper hand as the years went by within the american evangelical scene the voices of the merrills lackstones whose numbers increased enormously in the twentieth century their positive view of zionism was reinforced by the growing tension between the missionaries and the islamic religious establishments in the eastern mediterranean the missionaries who once preached for liberation from european colonialism hoped that american christianity and not the islamic tradition would become the leading light of the new nations as indeed would become the case in of missionaries became the first orientalists in the full negative meaning of the term but even before edward said attracted our attention to this group another edward was warning forty years before said s orientalism appeared of the dubious impact of the orientalist missionary this was edward earle who like said also taught at columbia university and who wrote in foreign affairs in that formed by missionaries if american opinion has been uninformed misinformed and prejudiced the missionaries are largely to blame interpreting history in terms of the advance of christianity they have given an inadequate distorted and occasionally a grotesque picture of moslems and the missionaries presented an even more distorted picture when they focused on palestine their biased and negative descriptions faithfully physical encounters with the holy land like mark twain they found it difficult to digest the gap between what they discovered and the vision that the holy scriptures had led them to imagine like the zionists who would follow them as well as the british and germans who came with them they did not perceive the locals as a people or a group with rights or claims to the country but rather as at best an exotic a similar view immediately won their support although it would take years before this link became a solid alliance between christian fundamentalism and the state of israel an alliance that would greatly affect american policy in the middle east as a whole that alliance was forged when israel was established in in the about to materialize in front of their eyes the return of the jews their conversion to christianity and the second coming of the messiah cyrus scofield a preacher from dallas texas was another link in the chain that connected missionary theology on both sides of the atlantic this violent priest produced an annotated fundamentalist version of the bible that was published by oxford university press in basis for us policy today the return of the jews the decline of islam and the rising fortunes of the us as a world parts of scofield s sermons sound like contemporary speeches by george bush the zionist movement could not have asked for more the enthusiasm that now gripped protestants in britain and the us was what it most needed to push forward an idea that had before the second world war failed to enthuse most jews it became a spouting fountain of fundamentalist hallucinations that today have turned into the policies of another texan george bush as the twentieth century marched on the southern preachers pushed aside their eastern colleagues and wrote and prophesied like the famous hal lindsey that after armageddon millions of jews would kneel before the returning christ this sermon reappears in the ceremonies tel megiddo where the final battle between good and evil is supposed to be played out the delegations are received in israel as the state s new saviors lindsey s book the late great planet earth is today a hit an apocalyptic bestseller and the bible of the average christian in it unconditional support for an aggressive and destructive israel is a divine law what israel wants is what god jerusalem in the mid and thus in september a century after scofield s bible appeared his phantasm became a real policy when the us administration faced a small group of terrorists who came from saudi arabia and egypt and were trained in afghanistan the american leadership did not send forces to seek or arrest the terrorists but instead waged a total war against islam using destructive military force substantial the most significant part of the war on terror the ideological infrastructure of this bush policy is very much the legacy of scofield and his fundamentalist friends it is possible that the hidden but staunch anti semitic element within millenarian dogma deterred the pro israeli lobby at first from associating too strongly with the expanding network of christian fundamentalist organizations but in the all this changed the israeli menachem begin led the way with the help of an enthusiastic young likudnik binyamin netanyahu in the likud government declared its intention of strengthening the connection with the christian fundamentalists it allowed them to open a tv station in southern lebanon when it was occupied by israel in operation litani more important was the consent of the government for the opening in of the international israel today it was built in what must have been the best seat in town an excellent
occur at the beginning or end of a sampling interval they will lead to an underestimated turn or vocalized state duration or an overestimated turn switching pause attributed to either partner depending on the location of the disfluency it is here that any measurement error had the most influence the present results as such errors may have been disproportionately distributed across the groups of children however as feldstein has shown the sound and silence sequences derived from avta analysis yield a measure that is quite significantly related to global speech rate where global rate is a measure of words per minute with all pauses and disfluencies included as such the current results suggest presence of disfluencies in the speech of cws in this study did not serve to distinguish their vocal state durations from either cwdns or the four groups of parents nor did they likely result in a significantly slower speaking rate for these children if such were the case one might expect to find less evidence of coordinated interpersonal timing for the group of cws and such was not the case finally it should be noted that seven of the ten cws produced sound syl as their primary disfluency type and thus there was relative consistency in the type of stuttering behavior produced across the group of cws as such one might assume that the stuttering children in this study produced disfluencies that were roughly equivalent in type and duration and the number and severity of physical concomitants or associated behaviors if that is in fact the case then the likelihood of any measurement error being equally distributed across the children who stutter would be increased these potential sources of error are obvious limitations of the avta system and need to be taken into account in any study using this methodology that being said it is important to reiterate that the avta was developed to create an admittedly over simplified version of speech in dialogue for the specific purpose of looking at the phenomenon of synchrony or attunement in conversation and nothing more the numerous studies that have used the avta so called spin off systems have shown that this method yields robust replicated findings for reciprocal influence in on off patterns of vocalization and silence across ages dyads and populations as discussed previously the reliability of the avta system for measuring vocal state durations has been assessed a number of times in different ways further while results might differ as a function of the duration of used for analysis different sampling frequencies ranging from to s have yielded highly correlated measures of vocal state duration in other words as warner convincingly showed vocal activity from the same conversations sampled at both three times per second and once every s were so highly correlated as to be virtually indistinguishable an additional limitation of this study has to do with the relatively small sample size and the resulting reduction in statistical power typically thought to be associated with small samples one way to evaluate the extent to which this may be salient for a particular study is to consider effect size whether or not an effect is consequential depends on consideration of two things the specific context in which it occurs and the value assigned the cit coefficient used in the present study is arguably one of the most versatile and widely used measures of effect size it was used to examine the proportion of the variance shared by two variables which is the standard way to assess the phenomenon of reciprocal influence in conversational dyads the observed strength of those correlations found significant in the present study are very similar to those reported in almost all of the prior studies that have been described in the literature review in considering these factors our view is that the significant results of this study make sense for the purposes of this study and we speculate that using a larger sample size would yield at least similar if not more robust future research earlier in this paper the logical next step in studying the importance of cit to childhood stuttering is to examine its relationship to the behavior of stuttering using avta analysis the first question of interest is to what extent do the frequency type and duration of stuttering effect cit in either a reciprocal or compensatory manner for example are there differences in cit across subgroups of cws who differ according to frequency type and duration of disfluency and if so is such influence reciprocal or compensatory the use of subgroups can also be used to answer questions about how stuttering may effect the extent to which one s own behavior can be predicted from the past behavior of the same speaker a contingency referred to as an internal determinant for example is cit differentially affected by either very high or very low levels of stuttering in conversations with his or her parent that has been discussed in several places in this paper has to do with the influence that parent speech rate across a conversation and across time may have on the rate of cws and whether any change in rate affects stuttering one way to begin to address this question is through the experimental manipulation of parent speaking rate using the same or similar methods employed in previous work besides the lagged cit coefficients themselves additional dependent variables might include a measure of global or overall speaking rate derived from avta analysis as well as standard measures of disfluency across an interaction or within utterances further as previously suggested the findings from this study support the notion that temperament and other psychological or psychosocial traits are important to the attainment of cit given that the characteristics observed for cws may impact cit in such a way that it negatively affects social interaction further research should include additional measures of temperament that have been used in previous research with cws to see whether specific temperamental profiles can predict the presence and strength of
of mpa fig a presents a comparison for gfrp beams mpa and the unified response eq provide reasonable predictions over a wide range of reinforcing ratios from to the earlier aci method aci begins to underpredict deflection for reinforcing ratios less than about ig whereas the original branson equation does not work well for a reinforcing ratio less than ig fig compares a reasonable prediction of deflection for reinforcing ratios greater than about ig icr the original branson proposal and earlier aci approach underpredict deflection for lower reinforcing ratios improved agreement occurs because of the higher bar stiffness leading to lower values of ig icr but the comparison is not as good for lower d ratios observe how in both instances the gfrp and cfrp beams have an eb fu ratio and respectively and d ratio within the range that applies to the aci recommended eq fig presents a worst case scenario for afrp beams mpa and gpa with eb and in this case the present aci approach eq underpredicts deflection compare also with has reached its upper limit of differences between the unified approach eq and modified branson approach using eq or only occur at very low reinforcing ratios this case when the service load just exceeds the cracking moment in summary the earlier aci equation using underpredicts deflection for beams with and works well for beams reinforced with gfrp bars that typically have an eb fu ratio of about some caution is advisable however since the eb fu ratio for gfrp bars can range anywhere from a low of up to depending on the size of bar see for instance trade literature for aslan gfrp bars manufactured by hughes brothers seward neb deflection of cfrp beams is the other hand certain types of aramid bars afrp have an eb fu ratio appreciably less than as low as and deflection of these beams will be underestimated when using the aci approach gfrp grids can also have an eb fu ratio less than finally it is important to note that since the aci proposed equation for d was empirically derived from a statistical fit of beam deflection data frp bars when eb and can be closely approximated by using mcr ma and that the tension stiffening factor is comparable for both steel and frp this means that frp reinforced members do not necessarily have less tension stiffening than conventional steel reinforced members as commonly assumed in the past conclusions frp reinforced beams typically have an ig icr ratio between and and deflection is underpredicted because the tension stiffening component using branson s model is grossly overestimated for beams with ig icr greater than about a general expression based on the concept of a tension stiffening factor independent of bar type is proposed for the effective moment of inertia giving ie icr frp reinforced concrete beams however a modified form of the existing branson equation given by ie mcr is recommended by aci and can be used in lieu of the more general proposed approach to maintain consistency with aci the modified branson equation uses a correction factor d that reduces tension stiffening to reasonable levels by decreasing the the correction factor d and ig the first equation works well for rectangular sections only while the second more simple equation works for all cross sectional shapes and types of frp bar the latter is recommended these two equations compare well with the most recent aci correction factor for rectangular beams reinforced caution needs to be exercised with the aci proposed factor since calculated deflection values are affected by the eb and d ratios and deflection is underestimated for beams using frp bars with the eb less than about this is the case for afrp reinforced concrete when used with the either gfrp or cfrp all three of these correction factors typically give a tension stiffening factor that is comparable to what has been used does not have less tension stiffening than steel as commonly assumed in the past tensegrity active control multiobjective approach abstract a multiobjective search method is adapted for supporting structural control of an active tensegrity structure structural control is carried out by modifying the self stress state of the structure in order to satisfy a serviceability objective and additional robustness robustness objectives control commands are defined as sequences of contractions and elongations of active struts to modify the self stress state of the structure a two step multiobjective optimization method involving pareto filtering with hierarchical selection is implemented to determine control commands experimental testing on a full scale active tensegrity structure demonstrates validity of the method in most cases control commands are more robust when identified by a multiobjective method as compared to a single objective one this robustness leads to better control over successive loading events evaluation of multiple objectives provides a more global understanding of tensegrity structure behavior than any single objective finally results reveal opportunities for self adaptive structures that evolve in unknown environments stability is assured by self stress tensegrities are very flexible small loads can induce large displacements we thus focus on serviceability control in order to provide new opportunities for large structures control is carried out by modifying the self stress state of the structure through contracting or elongating active struts of a full scale active tensegrity structure built at ecole polytechnique federale de top surface edge are measured with displacement sensors previous studies have revealed that many combinations of contractions and elongations of active members can satisfy the serviceability objective of maintaining top surface slope when the structure is subjected to a loading situation fest et al domer and smith therefore this control task could be improved by employing multiple objectives to select the best control focused mainly on applying multiobjective optimization methods to design tasks aguilar madeira et al maute and raulli park and koh fonseca and fleming kramer and grierson solving a design task involves building a set
positive and significant coefficient on the ceo parameter indicates the existence of a complementary monitoring effect between auditors and the managerial group this effect however was found is accompanied by an increase in auditor relationship for a level of managerial ownership up to beyond this threshold the number of auditor relationships is accompanied by a decline in the level of managerial ownership suggesting a lowering of moral hazard resulting from managerial private benefits beyond the threshold external monitoring by auditors managerial ownership and firm valuation are jointly determined with the each serving to reinforce the other more specifically the percentage of managerial ownership is a nonlinear determinant of the number of auditor relationships second auditor monitoring is a positive determinant of managerial ownership consistent with the is a significant and positive determinant of managerial ownership while managerial ownership is also a statistically significant determinant of adjusted after controlling for external monitoring third for low leveraged firms there is evidence of a complementary monitoring effect between auditors and managers of exogenous variables the results reveal the existence of a substitution monitoring effect between auditors and the managerial group in addition the results indicate that increased external monitoring by auditors will simultaneously raise the incentive for managers to engage in internal monitoring also firm valuation is found to be a company value is low when promoters have a low stake in the company since control of such companies can still be in the promoters hands because of the dispersed nature of shareholding such companies need to be subjected to more vigilant external monitoring by auditors for example and to the discipline of an active market for corporate second the analysis suggests that external monitoring can perform an important governance role however as has been much of the experience in germany and japan external monitors in india have been perceived by and large to be extremely passive in corporate governance with the envisaged revisions in the companies act and the chartered accountants act which provide explicit accounting jeopardy non public information and insider trading around sec and filings abstract evidence contrasting us insider trades in high and low jeopardy periods and across firms at high and low risk for litigation indicates that insiders condition their trades on foreknowledge of price relevant public disclosures but avoid profitable trades when the jeopardy associated with such trades is high such as immediately before earnings announcements insiders avoid profitable trades such as immediately before earnings announcements insiders avoid profitable trades before quarterly earnings are announced and sell after good news earnings announcements insiders trade most heavily after earnings announcements and profit from foreknowledge of price relevant information in the forthcoming form or filing introduction information releases that occur in every fiscal quarter the earnings announcement which is a summary measure of firm performance that is highly price relevant and the subsequent form or filing which contains more detailed financial results and also represents price relevant information we replicate earlier findings of a weak association between insider trades shortly before the earnings announcement and the subsequent earnings we provide new evidence before earnings announcements are relatively infrequent and occur when the magnitude of the earnings announcement abnormal return is small in sharp contrast insiders trade relatively heavily after the earnings announcement and these trades are significantly associated with the stock returns over narrow windows around both the forthcoming or filing and the preceding earnings returns over these windows are proxies for the price relevant information released to the market by the the market by the disclosure that occurs within the window the pattern of associations is consistent with the interpretation that variation in jeopardy over a fiscal quarter restrains insiders seeking to profit from foreknowledge of corporate disclosures more before earnings announcements than before and filings buttressing this interpretation we present evidence that insider trading across firms is associated with firm specific variation in the ex ante risk of litigation collectively these findings are consistent with insiders conditioning their trades on foreknowledge of price relevant public disclosures but limiting their trades to periods when the jeopardy they face due to trade is low since it does not seem possible to elicit from insiders directly and unbiasedly the motives behind their trades evidence on the litigation avoidance hypothesis necessarily is is circumstantial this paper offers evidence drawn from two related settings that plausibly differ in the seriousness of the jeopardy trade that shortly precedes and is conditioned upon a forthcoming earnings announcement has resulted in prosecutions and so is legal advice that insiders should avoid trading in the period immediately before an earnings announcement is widespread many corporations stipulate blackout periods that during which insiders may not trade in contrast we know of no complaint filed against an insider for trading improperly on foreknowledge of the contents of a or relatedly bettis et al document that blackout periods typically end on the second trading day after the earnings announcement so corporate policy typically permits trades in this period this suggests that the risk stemming from trade after the earnings announcement are lower than the risks from trade announcement according to kelson and allen a well designed insider trading policy that is properly followed creates an effective prophylactic against inadvertent insider trading and provides a defense for a company insiders against any allegation that such trading has occurred adoption and enforcement of a written insider trading policy also provide a method for the corporation to demonstrate that appropriate steps have been and to assert a defense against ontrolling person liability for trades made by its insiders under sections and of the securities exchange act of they further point out that only a minority of companies keep trading windows closed until after the filing of their qs and ks neither legislation nor sec rules require firms to restrict insider trades to particular periods or circumstances thus firm policies that prohibit or discourage trade at specific times are an endogenous and voluntary response by firms to
and survival of a hard and tough people on the rock talk of nerves was inextricable from women s lives as the wives mothers and sisters of fishermen as the embodiment of newfoundland history and traditions the middle aged women of the whose had bridged the traditional and modem eras used the language of nerves and blood to express high self esteem a sense of personal and collective importance and accomplishment locals reasoned as follows it is a good woman s duty to worry about her menfolk who make a dangerous living as fishers coping with the demands and hardships of newfoundland fisher life requires a great deal of physical and emotional strength before the women had a hard life and worked hard worry as well labor was a form of women s work women s worry was instrumental to the health of the fishery and well being of its workers a lifetime of hardship worry self sacrifice and stoic endurance however wears out or uses up one s nerves worn out nerves causes problems on the change therefore women with nerves on the change who have sacrificed their own health for the benefit of others were and are good women the language of nerves validated women s roles and tied them to all important fishery middle aged women of the all shared these socially elaborated values or point of view they saw themselves as holding a high and valued status in their community and this was reflected in their discourse about blood and nerves a discourse that could be both abstract and concrete and that shaped both self reflection and social action there was also an element of protest or rebellion in the portrayal of nerves the wider circumstances and multiple meanings of folk biology psychology and of their lives as members of fisher families who lived in a cold and cruel environment and who had endured life histories of exploitation poverty deprivation and tragedy no matter what adversity could be dished out newfound landers were a tough race bred for strong nerves survival of the individual was linked to survival of the community survival was expressed positively as helping each other negatively as keeping everyone equal at that time the government had made a commitment to the development of small rural fishing communities there was much criticism of this program from those who lived in larger population centers and those who advocated streamlining of the fisheries unlike the rebellious nature of nerves as anger noted among the disadvantaged peoples of latin america the newfoundlander rebellion was an everyday resistance expressed as a defensive sense of entitle ment in the local view this tough enduring character and people s status as primary producers made newfoundlanders inherently deserving of new schools improved roads moder fish plants sewage systems and all the benefits of a welfare state they felt that they had paid their dues through past hardships and were now entitled to negotiate the future on their own terms the present during my first fieldwork in old friends would welcome me into their kitchens and could not wait to give me tea in mugs that depicted rather distressed fishermen trying to row a sinking boat saying oh menerves with newfoundland printed in bold letters underneath shirts that said oh me nerves could be purchased in local stores women would gasp oh me nerves in a parody of the parody of them represented on these mugs and shirts nerves had become local color a joke for the i found it ironic that in the no one had actually said oh me nerves instead they sometimes said oh my nerves but most often referred to their nerves as being bad or gone nor did anyone in this english anglican community seem to notice that the me was associated with the irish dialect in they thought that they had actually used the phrase oh me in the past the tourist trade was redefining their not being medicalized they were being commercialized talk of nerves was still salient but nerves had become a joking matter teens would go around constantly repeating the phrases oh me nerves or oh me verbs dissolving into collective laughter after each utterance this in group language was a parody of what they saw as old lady talk younger people preferred to refer to themselves as being stressed out freaked or depressed at darts a woman who could not hit the said oh me nerves is barbecued i feel my nerves is barbecued tonight at first i thought it was a rather nice metaphor for modernized nerves but i eventually came to realize that she was making fun of traditions in the women also joked about their nerves at darts but conversation would often delve into the more serious elements of a woman s nerves in gossip and sexual joking dominated conversation at darts serious a women s health were considered too personal for a public recreational activity like darts talk about nerves was no longer talk about everything else but had become talk about being old fashioned the polysemic character of nerves had become compromised by changes in values as the following three examples illustrate first nerves had become suspect because of women s recognition of the apparent inability of physicians to understand what they meant when they complained of nerves women med speak because physicians just seemed to be beyond nerves speak for example a young women told me that she had gone to a doctor who diagnosed her complaint as nerves and as a result she had spent several months heavily medicated in a mental hospital when she suffered from the same complaints again she went to a different doctor and did not mention her nerves this time she felt she was successfully diagnosed with and treated for asthma and experienced remission of all complaints again she went to a different doctor and did not mention her nerves this time she felt she was successfully
point of this paper this should be differentiated from the trade outcome which describes the physical trade action and monetary transfer to achieve public randomization over trade actions using forcing contracts a public randomization device must be included in the model this is done in the working paper in fact allowing such randomization does not expand the set of implementable value functions here except in the case of no renegotiation we could also assume a is a mixture space but this implies that the external enforcer can observe how the players randomize contracted mechanisms holding the issue of renegotiation aside for now the players contracting problem can be stated as a standard mechanism design problem the players contract specifies a mechanism which maps messages sent at date to outcomes induced in the trade and enforcement phase the revelation principle we can restrict attention to direct revelation mechanisms each of which is defined by a message space and a function with such a mechanism at date the parties simultaneously and independently report the state for any report profile the mechanism specifies an element which then determines the payoffs conditional on the state we can concentrate on equilibria of the mechanism in which the parties report as public and so focus on forcing contracts we constrain attention to the subset of mechanisms in which maps to any mechanism can be translated back into the notation of contract in the basic model with specified appropriately for each message profile we define where is a transfer function that supports in expression forcing contracts some game theory models such as that of bernheim and whinston also take this view renegotiation contract renegotiation at dates and can be viewed as an opportunity for the players to discard their originally specified mapping and replace it with another mapping i assume the players divide the renegotiation surplus according to fixed bargaining weights and the generalized nash bargaining solution more precisely i let denote the maximal joint payoff that can be obtained in state max a a clearly we have max because the trade action that solves the maximization problem in equation can be specified in a forcing contract to yield the outcome that solves original mechanism would lead to outcome in state if is inefficient in state then the players have a joint incentive to renegotiate the mechanism the renegotiation surplus is the players will select a new mapping that induces an efficient outcome furthermore the surplus will be divided according to the players bargaining weights so that player obtains wi kir they replace the transfer function with one that achieves an outcome that satisfies kr equation and lemma imply that such an outcome exists and is supported by a forcing contract the revelation principle usually requires a public randomization device to create lotteries over outcomes but it is not needed here to elaborate it is neither required to achieve the ex post efficient outcome on the equilibrium path nor required for the construction of the most severe punishments following out of equilibrium message profiles to take care of the no renegotiation case i focus on pure strategy equilibria of the message phase so the revelation principle applies without need for public randomization implementation conditions in this section i define and characterize the set of implementable value i group the analysis into three categories distinguished by whether the players have the opportunity to renegotiate at dates and or the characterization lemmas in this section are all straightforward variations of well known theorems from the contract theory literature in particular maskin maskin and moore and moore and repullo no renegotiation a message game in which the players engage at date the message game has action profiles given by and payoffs specified by as discussed in the previous section by using the revelation principle we can focus on truthful reporting in direct revelation mechanisms so that in state the players will send message profile in equilibrium thus hereinafter i refer to a mechanism as with no renegotiation mechanism is said to implement value function if and for each state is a nash equilibrium of the message game and it leads to the payoff vector value function is said to be implementable if there is a mechanism that implements it let be the set of implementable value functions for the setting in which the players cannot renegotiate message profile be sufficient to simultaneously dissuade player from declaring the state to be when the state is actually and discourage player from declaring in state thus letting and denote the outcomes specified for message profiles and respectively implementation relies on the existence of an outcome that satisfies and lemma value function is an element of if and only if for every there is an outcome such that and for every pair of states there is an outcome such that also the set is closed under constant transfers in reference to this characterization i call the punishment value for no loss of generality in modeling trade actions as public as the next lemma confirms lemma if value function is implementable then there is a mechanism that implements and has the property that for every the intuition behind this lemma is standard any strategic elements in the actual trading game can be mimicked through the use of messages the mechanism can be designed so that the players announce what trade actions they external enforcer forces them to take these actions i focus on implementation in the weak sense of not requiring uniqueness of equilibrium in each state in fact equilibrium utilities are always unique in the setting in which the players can renegotiate at date because ex post renegotiation implies a constant sum message game in every state thus strong implementation is implied for the case of renegotiation at date consider the setting in which renegotiation is possible at date but not at date in other words the players can renegotiate between the time that they jointly learn the state and when the message game
could not compute regression based growth rates because many countries do not have data for every year and therefore lack sufficient observations while our growth rates are thus subject to measurement error in the endpoints we confirm our findings using an alternative sample period these data are available at http research worldbank org while poverty limited overlap with financial development data limits the sample econometric methodologies basic regression specifications ordinary least squares regressions we begin by using cross country regressions calculating growth rates of income share inequality and poverty over the longest available time period and averaging financial intermediary development and other explanatory variables over the corresponding time period we use the following specification xi t this can be re written as follows in this regression yi is either the logarithm of share of lowest income quintile the gini coefficient or headcount for country in period fdi is the private credit measure of financial development and xi is a set of conditioning information for country in period in the ols specifications we use one defined as the range of years for which we have data for that country we allow for the possibility that lagged values of the lowest income share the gini coefficient and poverty influence present values as we demonstrate below allowing for these dynamics is important empirically however setting does not alter our findings on the relationship between financial development income inequality and the poor growth in the growth of lowest income share and growth of gini regressions and for mean income growth in the growth of headcount regressions in line with the cross country growth literature we also control for the logarithm of the average years of school attainment in the initial year as an indicator of the initial human capital stock in the economy the growth rate of the gdp deflator over the sample period to control for the macroeconomic environment and sample period average of the sum of exports and imports as share of gdp to capture the degree of international openness further in the headcount growth regressions we include population growth and the ratio of the population below the age of and above the age of to the population between the ages of and as additional regressors as a robustness check we also computed the poverty gap which is a weighted measure of the the population living on less than one dollar per day and how far below one dollar per day incomes lie thus poverty gap measures both the breadth and depth of poverty nonetheless growth of the poverty gap and growth of headcount are extremely highly correlated and the results hold using the poverty gap measure dynamic panel instrumental variables regressions the relationship between financial intermediary development and changes in income driven by reverse causation for example reductions in poverty may stimulate demand for financial services as another example reductions in income inequality might lead to political pressures to create more efficient financial systems that fund projects based on market criteria not political connections to control for potential biases we use a dynamic panel besides endogeneity considerations ols regressions have other shortcomings estimator first cross country regressions do not fully control for unobserved country specific effects second even when using standard two stage least squares regressions and using instruments for financial development this does not control for the endogeneity of other explanatory variables which may bias the coefficient estimates on financial development third the specification in eqn includes a lagged dependent variable which could bias the pure cross country regression does not exploit the time series dimension of the data thus we use a generalized methods of moments panel estimator developed for dynamic models by holtz eakin newey and rosen arellano and bond and arellano and bover in moving to a panel specification we use data averaged over five year periods rather than averaging over the entire span of the dependent specifically we estimate a system of the panel regression in differences and in levels we difference regression and use the lagged values in levels of all explanatory variables as instruments similarly we use the lagged differences of all explanatory variables as instruments for the level version of regression we then combine difference and level regressions in a system thus the panel estimator uses instrumental variables based on previous realizations of the explanatory variables such a system gives consistent results under the assumptions that there is no second order serial correlation and the instruments are uncorrelated with the error terms we test for the validity of these assumptions and present these test results below descriptive statistics and correlations table presents descriptive statistics and correlations for the and samples consistent with the earlier work financial development is positively and growth financial development is not however significantly correlated with mean income growth from household surveys which is consistent with ravallion s finding of large discrepancies between average income growth numbers from national accounts and from household surveys private credit is positively and significantly correlated with the growth of poorest income share but negatively correlated with growth of gini and growth with more developed financial systems experienced a faster reduction in the number of people living in poverty we confirm the panel results using standard two stage least squares regressions to select instrumental variables for financial development we focus on exogenous national characteristics that theory and past empirical work suggest influence financial development we follow the finance and growth literature and use the legal origin of countries and the absolute value of latitude of the capital city normalized between zero and one as instrumental variables we also tried alternative instrument sets including the religious composition of countries and ethnic fractionalization based on research by beck et al and easterly and levine and obtained very similar results since data for income of the poor and the gini coefficient are not necessarily a five year frequency we follow dollar and kraay and start out with the first available observation
a according to the diccionario de autoridades cumbe was a baile of blacks to the sound of a joyful tune of the same name which consisted of many swings of the body from one side to the other still there is some controversy as to the origin of the word and the interpretations include rituals of coming of age bravery physical skills and roaring among others the terms paracumbe and cumbe surely refer to the same dance type the first is used in the gulbenkian codex the second in the coimbra and conde de redondo volumes they all share important melodic and harmonic features with those found in spanish and mexican sources for guitar and harp as seen in the cubancos the cumbes and paracumbes seem to follow a modular structure caozinho de sofala carlos juliao coroacao de um rei nos festejos de reis detail carlos juliao cortejo da rainha negra na festa de reis around the mid century the cumbe was already going out of fashion in the face of new dances this is shown in a the fofa is a fine dance it makes you tap your feet it with the feet and makes better harmony than dancing the cumbe neither mattos s writings nor portuguese guitar sources help us understand what this dance called fofa was possibly because its popularization was a later phenomenon notably there is explicit mention of the bahian origin of the fofa in a pamphlet as jose ramos tinhorao first noticed the sarambeque has been the most common dance of african influence in the iberian american the last four centuries being mentioned in portuguese spanish mexican and brazilian sources the diccionario de autoridades defines zarambeque as an instrumental piece tanger and a very joyful and lively bulliciosa dance very common among the blacks again there is reason to believe that the introduction of this dance in spain and its colonies was mediated by portugal not only do the earliest references to this dance appear in portuguese sources but its is also reaffirmed in an century entremez peter fryer argues that even before its appearance in portugal the dance could be found in its african colony of mozambique for among the chuabo yao and nyungwe the terms saramba salamba and sarama mean practically the same as the portuguese sarambeque a dance with swinging motions of the hip already in in the carta de guia de casados francisco manuel de melo warned husbands that if a wife knew how to dance the carried castanets in her purse those were dangerous signs of gregorio de mattos also used the word in some of his poems but always with an erotic connotation rather than a musical one in brazil the dance persisted into the early century when music historian guilherme de almeida mentioned it and ernesto nazareth composed and published a sarambeque for the piano the coimbra and gulbenkian codexes register ten sarambeques one of them in the codex is assigned to a certain frei joao who is also the author of several fantasias and one batalha in the same volume although the codex seems to originate from the santa cruz de coimbra monastery frei joao is the only composer referred to as a monk gregorio de mattos placed the gandu in contexts of debau chery even rhyming it with berzabu or he mentioned it once in connection with the brothel he used to visit alluding to the viola the house a certain fernao roiz vassalo jose ramos tinhorao and peter fryer suggested that the gandu was a forerunner of a later and much better documented african brazilian dance the lundu however the music of five early century gandus notated in the coimbra and gulbenkian guitar codexes does not appear to confirm that connection these settings lack most of the features that define the late century lundu such as the perpetual and lundus or lunduns with african religious practices that were often regarded as witchcraft by the europeans of those times the last line of a sonnet by jose cardoso da costa talks about the dark realms of gandu and in a inquisition report lundus are identified as demons or malignant spirits always in the plural the word lundus was sometimes used as a synonym of calundus deriving from the kimbundu word quilundo a generic name for any spirit that malignant spirits always in the plural the word lundus was sometimes used as a synonym of calundus deriving from the kimbundu word quilundo a generic name for any spirit that possessed the living as shown in a recent book by james sweet rituals of cure were often conducted in the form of feasts honoring the quilundos accompanied by dances and drumbeats the african brazilian calundus were rituals of possession and divination often attended by whites as joao calmon in bahia the witchcraft and merriment that the negroes make which they call lundus or calundus are scandalous and superstitious without it being easy to avoid them since even many whites can be found in them whites appear to have resorted to the calundus when their own religion seemed ineffective as when they wanted to undo some feitico or witchcraft cast upon them additional reasons would include finding lost objects gaining sexual favors or curing their slaves ill besides the calundus provided excellent opportunities for socializing and having some fun in a freer and in the white man s perception more sexualized environment as white brazilians were cured and received answers from black diviners their contact with african styles of music and dance was marked by a similar attraction for what was forbidden sinful and pleasant the music associated with the calundus and the tolerant attitude of white landowners provoked the indignation moralist writers such as nuno marques pereira who i could not sleep the whole night because of the blasts of atabaques pandeiros canzas bottles and castanets with such horrible outcries that they sounded to me like the confusion of hell and the owner told me there was
of postinjection practice the therapists did not complete measurement of functional outcomes following intervention nor did they particularly focus on achieving functional outcomes with the evidence that ot enhances the functional outcomes of btx a injections it is incumbent upon therapists to routinely elicit and promote the families and child s goals during post btx a intervention of upper limb function across the full age range of participants would provide more meaningful information about this important outcome full blinding of outcomes assessors is desirable the sample size was inadequate to undertake subgroup analysis by diagnosis to determine any differences in the responses of children with different types of cp most studies to date have evaluated btx a in children with hemiplegia of children with quadriparesis however are also required to answer important clinical questions about their management responsiveness and the measurement of meaningful outcomes valuable information could be provided by examining outcomes of btx a injections in relation to the extent of upperlimb involvement determined by a tool such as the manual sensation cognitive ability and severity of motor involvement to functional outcomes in order to target children most likely to benefit by intervention future research may also explore the aspects of therapy that contribute to enhanced outcomes specific approaches such as motor learning principles or constraint induced movement therapy are worthy of evaluation as specific techniques to enhance function combination of ot and btx a injections enhances the self reported individualized functional outcomes of children with cp service providers can be confident that resource allocation toward provision of therapy that is goal directed and family focused following injections is worthwhile associated with not seeking medical care for traumatic brain injury research design internet survey methods and procedures the survey consisted of questions related to demographics tbi case ascertainment location and mechanism of injury type of treatment sought and post concussive symptoms logistic regression was used to identify factors associated with not seeking medical care main outcome and results of the survey respondents with tbi seek medical care tbi respondents were less likely to seek care if they were older suffered a mild tbi grade or were injured in the home tbi is defined by the centers for disease control and prevention as a blow to the head with an alteration of consciousness a skull fracture or evidence of brain injury codes in office and hospital charts to identify cases and thus do not detect patients who fail to seek medical care these but not of those who do nt seek care the internet may be a feasible way to obtain information on patients with tbi who do not seek medical care while the internet has been used as a tool for sharing information on disease and infection outbreaks between communities or countries some researchers have begun to explore its potential for individual level describe the characteristics of near miss auto accidents and understand the mechanism of windsurfing injuries these efforts support the feasibility of using the internet to collect patient level information on injuries the objective of the current study was to describe the characteristics of patients not seeking medical tbi was gathered via self report on the internet between march and march a survey was used to elicit self reported tbi experiences and was placed on the patient oriented website of the university of rochester medical center the survey itself consisted of multiple choice questions related to tbi case identification survey questions were adapted from the cdc s second injury control and risk survey and the national health interview survey they were written at a to grade reading level racial and ethnic categories were those prescribed by department of health and human services sites were provided at the end of the survey each of these sites in turn provided a link to our survey this survey did not contain medically or legally sensitive questions surveys were available in both spanish and english these languages were chosen for the large number of internet users who speak these languages to protect patient confidentiality such as address telephone number or mail address the first page of the website explained the research nature of the survey consent was inferred by participants completing the survey the study was approved by the university of rochester research subjects review board local tv and newspaper covered the start of the study and the website additionally a weekly nationally syndicated medical advice column discussed concussion the survey and listed the website address finally users could link to the survey via any one of tbi sites listed at the end of the survey without having to go through the strong health this necessitated the development of a privately hosted website to provide a portal to the survey study population inclusion exclusion criteria the study population consisted of people who voluntarily filled out the survey our analysis was confined to the subset of survey respondents who met the study definition of tbi that is to the tbi case definition a loss of consciousness amnesia or feeling stunned after an injury to the head injury subjects were excluded if they were less than years of age the second web page asked for participants age and instructed those less than years old not to proceed this was done to protect the confidentiality of young subjects who might not group of tbi respondents who did not seek medical care for their injury was compared to those who did seek care using chi square test in ten areas age gender race ethnicity tbi severity income level mechanism of injury location of injury symptoms at time of injury and presence of pc symptoms more than a regression was performed of the independent variables available nine were chosen for their potential to impact on the decision to seek medical care after tbi ethnicity was not included because virtually all of survey respondents were non latino hispanic statistical significance was defined as all analyses were performed reported loc less than minutes or amnesia less than hours were
also the highest surface temperatures are reached the only mentionable inventory in the outer divertor in was at the lower cm of tile where the strike point was not positioned the strike this area after that campaign some retention was also observed on tile close to the corner to tile while the rest of tile was a net carbon erosion area with only small inventories the campaign integrated ion fluence to the outer divertor was determined with langmuir probes during the discharge campaign and is shown in figure the inventory was almost identical at the plasma exposed and the plasma shadowed tile sides and decreased with a decay length of about mm the inventory deeper gaps so that the inventory in gaps of outer strike point tiles is also assumed to be small the total inventory trapped in gaps in the outer divertor is therefore negligible compared with the inventory in the inner divertor these results differ from where a gap sample was exposed with the divertor manipulator between tiles more than datoms for the whole discharge campaign which is by two orders of magnitude higher than the amount which we observe on tile this difference may be due to the different materials in the surrounding the gap sample was exposed at the outer strike point tile which consisted of carbon while tiles and deposition the inventory in the gap of a single tile is about gg this has to be compared with the amount of which would have been deposited without a gap ie if the tile were continuous this amount can be derived from the amount of deposited at the tile surface and the gap width and is about gg ie larger than with the existing gap for tile the amount of deposited in the gap is about gg gaps between inner divertor tiles do not increase the inventory in asdex upgrade but only result in a different spatial distribution the inventory trapped in gaps during the campaign was derived by using the measured values for tiles and from the campaign and by extrapolating the amount of at the tile surface with a decay length of the and campaigns see figure a decay length of about was observed on tiles and see above the gap inventory is about which is less than the amount trapped on the tile surfaces below the roof baffle the co deposition of hydrocarbon layers below the roof baffle and in other remote areas without direct plasma contact was the carbon deposition can be found in amorphous deuterated hydrocarbon layers with are found on the samples in total about were co deposited below the roof baffle during the campaign as can be seen in figure the largest inventories are observed on samples with direct line of sight to the divertor strike points samples facing the with cavity samples layers in remote areas are mainly formed by particles with high surface loss probabilities ie layers are mainly formed at the surface where the first wall collision takes place because these particles originate mainly from the divertor strike points co deposited layers are formed predominantly tile and on all surfaces below the roof baffle with direct line of sight to the inner and outer strike points in addition to these particles with high surface loss probability a flux of particles with lower surface loss probability is observed particles with low surface loss probability can survive several wall collisions and are responsible for hydrocarbon layer growth hydrocarbon layer growth is also observed in shadowed areas see figure but the layer thicknesses and the total inventory in these shadowed areas are much smaller than in areas with direct line of sight to the strike points pump ducts the layer co deposition in the pump ducts of asdex upgrade with another set of samples during the discharge period where a total amount of deuterium of about was deposited during the campaign a piece from a flange located in a pump duct and exposed from for about years showed a inventory of only atoms which is in line with the small co deposition observed on the ltss from these negligible upper divertor the retention of in the upper divertor and on the upper psl protection tiles was studied by analyzing a poloidal section of upper limiter and psl protection tiles the tiles were exposed in the campaign during which s of plasma in upper divertor configuration were performed the deuterium inventory of these tiles is shown in figure inventory on most of the tiles reaches only atoms boronizations are effective in the upper divertor and deposit about nm a layers on the tiles during each boronization so that some fraction of the detected originates from boronizations and not from layer deposition during plasma operation the upper strike point areas show of the inner and outwards of the outer strike point the total inventory in the upper divertor is about see table which is less than the total inventory of asdex upgrade gaps between inner heat shield tiles the inner heat shield is a net erosion area but large influxes of carbon were observed there even after coating with tungsten shield tiles was measured during the campaign with five lts the lts were placed in the tile gaps where a total of about deuterium is found in co deposited layers main chamber limiters auxiliary limiters asdex upgrade has four auxiliary limiters at the low field side in the main chamber from the limiter in sector and on one tile of the limiter in sector the deuterium distributions are shown in figure for the tiles from sector these limiters are net erosion areas so only minor inventories are expected the measured inventory is in the range the d was always associated with boron which may indicate that the detected and are at least partly remnants of layers deposited during boronizations the limiters are tilted by in the toroidal direction see figure tile shows a dip in the inventory at the cusp of the limiter where the limiter is closest to
vice versa as early as mclaren found decisions on a similar proportion if given the opportunity to reassess standard and batch pairs an improvement in the quality of color matching in terms of accuracy consistency and reproducibility could only be achieved by the use of instrumental methods based on spectrophotometry and a color difference equation which gave results that correlated with visual assessment by mclaren at the start of the there were many different equations in use within and between different industries with no possibility of accurate interconversion of color difference units it was estimated that there were over equations used in the usa alone all of these were based on a non uniform color solid a major advance was the development of the color solid the most important of these was the jpc equation introduced by jp coats the jpc equation was suggested as a viable alternative to visual color matching and a comparison of various color difference equations published by mclaren based on figures for instrumental assessment and visual wrong decisions control of bulk production using single number shade passing with minor modifications the jpc equation became the color measurement committee equation which gained the status of a british standard and eventually became an international standard similar equations were developed by datacolor and marks and spencer but unfortunately the details of a number of further color difference equations have been derived namely the bfd the cie and the ciede formulae despite claims that these equations gave improvements comparisons of different formulae indicated that they were not significantly better than the cmc equation the difficulties of changing from an established and valuable availability of optimized color difference equations the difficulties associated with visual assessment can be eliminated and this was a major factor in the development of engineered standards leading to major improvements in color quality snsp was established which allows a single numerical tolerance to be applied to any component of color difference the cotton be reproduced accurately in bulk scale procedures and of the necessary fastness further equally spaced colors can be readily inserted between existing colors colors illustrated on cotton are readily matched on other substrate types using the appropriate class of dye a major high street retailer found that by using this color specifier the time taken generation the methodology for palette creation and master standard production by the traditional approach consists of two phases as outlined in table the master standards from phase are issued to the suppliers by the retailer these suppliers must match the master standard on the substrates required for the product using dyes to meet the dye specifications listed in table recipe prediction and correction together with quality control of colored materials against a standard in addition to the contribution that ccm makes to quick response and right first time processing considerable financial savings are possible and these were demonstrated physical standards become quickly soiled and the concept of using a non physical standard based on accuracy in ccm and lab dyeing have allowed npss in the form of reflectance data to be communicated by fax or email as part of the matching process when spectrophotometers from different manufacturers are involved the variability between instruments is an average of only decmc when assessed by means of ceramic tiles the repeatability and same spectral data would be obtained when measuring a sample at different times and with different instruments the use of reflectance data is thus a feasible method of specifying color provided that measurement techniques and the condition of the instruments are standardized and controlled self approval and accreditation becomes possible high quality predictions search and correct techniques smart match give rapid color matching all of the above leads to a quick response in color specification high levels of color acceptance are achieved provided that a match of decmc below is obtained in the primary illuminant and color constancy is achieved in secondary illuminants in a study involving colors matching difficulties were experienced with only three a third was a multifibre mixture of dye classes this first approach to coloring by numbers allowed a significant shortening of lead times and a quicker turn round in matching digital color communication the so called digital color communication has become established as another means of achieving quick response in product development including color selection time savings and cost benefits are achieved in color communication for matching standard generation communication with suppliers and quality control in the end product from either the laboratory or bulk production distance quality control an outline of the procedure is as follows precise color is generated on a calibrated screen by within minutes by email to retailer retailer assesses virtual match which is accepted or modified laboratory dyeing within agreed tolerances is produced of approved virtual match approved laboratory dyeing is identified as master standard and remains so until this color is discontinued a sufficient quantity of engineered standards is lab dyeings on other substrates or carried out by different coloration processes or using different dye formulations are assessed against the engineered standard and distance quality control procedures can be used the standards can be loaded on to a website and password protected giving availability to only authorized users a further advantage of this procedure is that the matched using the commercially available dyes contained in the prediction programmes of the ccm system this avoids attempts to obtain colors that are unattainable using these dyes digital color communication and the equipment required have been reviewed in the literature the necessary hardware and software are available but ultimate success depends on adequate training of the web based color management software involves relatively low installation and running costs however as with much technology of this kind acceptance and market penetration have been slow calibration of spectrophotometers monitor screens viewing booths and color printers enables color to be viewed and evaluated in various formats the intensity and longer lifetimes the introduction of digital image capture rather than spectrophotometry could revolutionize color measurement
instituted limited cash benefits for the elderly poor and about half the states offered cash benefits to the blind some governments tried to provide and local officials who tried to assess the recipients needs and to some extent their moral worthiness prior to the federal government played almost no role in providing relief spending beyond aid to veterans as the depression deepened and tax revenues dropped between and state and local social welfare in to in with the aid of loans from the newly created reconstruction finance corporation in the average had risen to faced with national unemployment rates near the roosevelt administration accepted responsibility for relief arguing that unemployment and poverty had become a national problem as the federal from all sources in the sample of cities jumped to in and then to in the first full year of the new deal the annual average benefit payments to a relief household during this early phase of the new deal replaced between average annual manufacturing earnings figure plot of differences in differences between and for sample cities administration federal fera officials distributed funds to state governments through an opaque process in which officials seem to have paid attention to economic distress in the state the state s entreaties to fera administrators the state s own efforts to fund relief and likelihood of funds influencing roosevelt s state governments then distributed relief direct relief included programs that had no specific work requirements and assistance was provided in cash or in kind including subsistence items such as food shelter clothing and household necessities or medical care and hospitalization work relief required labor on a government project the fera set a series of broad guidelines for its programs but relied heavily on state and local officials to administer receive applicants for relief applied to local offices where officials met with them and determined their eligibility for relief based on the budget deficit between the family s total income and hypothetical expected spending for a family of that size this budget deficit was the basis for the family s direct relief benefits or the work relief payment on a fera project the actual relief cases and lowered benefits per case to aid more households in response to a harsh winter and high levels of unemployment fera activities were supplemented temporarily by the civil works administration work relief program from november through march large numbers on the fera relief rolls were transferred to cwa employment where they received wages that were not the cwa shut down two months later and many cwa workers were shifted on to new fera work relief in mid the roosevelt administration redesigned the relief system the federal government continued to provide work relief for the employable unemployed through the works progress administration and returned much of the responsibility for direct relief of unemployables to considered a family s budget deficit when assessing its need for relief employment the federal wpa then hired people from the certified rolls the wpa like its fera predecessor used no hard and fast set of rules to distribute the funds but econometric studies have found that local economic distress the lobbying of state and local governments presidential contributed matching funds for aid to unemployables as the social security act of introduced state federal versions of many states prior old age assistance mothers pensions and aid to the blind by the end of all but eight states were receiving federal grants the shift in federal relief efforts and the eventual reductions in wpa spending caused the federal government s share of relief spending to and meanwhile average per capita relief spending in the cities rose to in fell to in spiked to in the downturn of and declined to by relief benefits rose to between average annual manufacturing earnings after in performing the analysis we focus on the combined course of the making it hard to isolate each program s effect in addition categorical programs like adc and state mothers pensions are too narrowly focused when matched with our measures of demographic outcomes in many states mothers pensions and the later aid to dependent children programs were limited to households with children with at least one parent infants received relief from the general programs the measure of per capita relief spending for the cities in the analysis and in this section combines direct relief work relief and private relief funds from all levels of government the federal relief data includes the cwa fera wpa and social security programs for aid to dependent children aid to blind and old age assistance the sample average of per average annual manufacturing earnings are from us bureau of the census and average relief expenditures per household are based on data in us national resources planning board the federal share of relief spending is from the us national resources planning board fishback kantor and wallis and fleck analyze the board describe the administration of the fera and cwa see fishback kantor and wallis and the numerous references cited therein the reported in the integrated public use microdata series from the empirical model and infant mortality rates our goal is to examine the relationship between relief and the general fertility rate we use the same basic modeling procedures for each demographic outcome we establish the template for all the analyses by first working through the estimations for infant mortality rates and then examine the remaining demographic outcomes we estimate the following reduced form infant mortality equation capita relief spending in city in year economic activity a vector of demographic characteristics and random error because income data at the city level do not exist for the we use per capita retail sales in the county where the city was located as the measure of economic the vector contains a series of socioeconomic factors these include the percent black income and cultural practices toward raising infants to control for the differences in health and maturity among the potential childbearing population in the infant mortality and general fertility
recognition and recall involve different cognitive processes thus it is not surprising that the correlation between the correct incorrect and the fill in the high though positive and significant therefore our analysis treated raw scores of the correct incorrect and the fill in the blank tests separately following previous research that examined recall and recognition as separate dependent variables for assessing memory procedure the experiment session consisted of four parts instructions a brief video skit which presented a dialogue between two individuals an idiom lesson and a posttest questionnaire at the beginning of the experiment participants received instruction on how to use the software application the participants were then asked to watch a brief video skit presented on the computer screen in the video two individuals carried out detail in the idiom lesson that followed when the participants finished watching the video they were asked to click on the continue button which initiated the idiom lesson first the teacher agent asked a question regarding a given idiom and offered a statement that included the idiom in question three answer choices for example lucy hurt and lucy is annoying were displayed when the participant selected one of the three answer choices he she received feedback from the teacher agent concerning whether the chosen answer was correct or incorrect the teacher agent then provided a detailed explanation about the correct answer and the specific usage of the given idiomatic expression when the idiom lesson ended the participants were given a set of questionnaires to assess and learning process although this general structure was shared by all the three conditions the specific features of the idiom lesson varied across conditions in the control condition which did not have a colearner agent the teacher agent called on the participant to select an answer choice for the given question when the participant finished responding the teacher agent informed the participant whether his or her answer was correct or in both the experiment conditions however the teacher agent asked either the participant or the colearner agent to give an answer to the question alternating between the two the teacher agent then indicated whether the answer choice was correct or incorrect the caring colearner and noncaring colearner conditions varied with respect to and made highly person centered comforting remarks that is messages that acknowledge elaborate legitimize and contextualize the feelings of the other more specifically when the participant gave a correct answer to the teacher agent the caring colearner agent showed positive emotional expressions and provided complimentary feedback such as good job that was hard and you got it you re good at this i m you d get it right and you are doing very well when the participant provided an incorrect answer the caring colearner agent gave empathic feedback such as that was a hard one i did nt know that one either do nt worry you are really good at these i would have given the same answer this is hard and good try in contrast in the noncaring colearner condition the colearner agent did not say anything to the participant out a questionnaire which included items regarding their experience with the idiom learning application the items that asked specifically about the colearner agent were not included in the questionnaire for the participants in the control condition upon completion of the questionnaire participants took correct incorrect and fill in the blank tests on the idiomatic expressions they learned during the lesson it took approximately hour for the participants to complete the experiment when the session was over the participants were debriefed and thanked by the experimenter results to examine whether the intended manipulation was successful that is the caring colearner agent was actually perceived as expressing caring orientations we composed an index for a manipulation check participants rated how well each of the four adjectives described the colearner agent from to the index was reliable we then compared participants ratings of the colearner agents based on the manipulation check index although the mean score of the caring colearner agent was only slightly higher than the midpoint value a one tailed t test revealed that the caring colearner agent received significantly higher ratings than the noncaring agent in testing our first hypothesis we conducted a one tailed t test the analysis showed that the caring colearner received higher trustworthiness ratings than the noncaring colearner agent which was consistent with the hypothesis that caring colearner agent would have a positive effect on learning we compared recall and recognition scores on the idiom tests across the three conditions based on a one way analysis of variance the one way anova for the recall memory test given in the fill in the blank question format was statistically significant a post hoc test demonstrated that the participants in the caring better on the recall memory test compared to those who were in the noncaring colearner condition and the control condition the latter two conditions did not differ significantly from each other therefore hypothesis was supported for the recall memory task the mean scores of the recognition memory test given in the correct incorrect were not found ns the recognition test mean scores however revealed a pattern similar to that of the recall test scores participants in the caring colearner condition had the highest mean score followed by those in the control condition and in the noncaring colearner condition with hypotheses and supported for recall memory the next step was to test a significant mediator should satisfy three key conditions first it should demonstrate a significant relationship with the independent variable of the model second it should have a significant relationship with the dependent variable of the model finally the originally significant relationship between the independent and the dependent variables of the model should no longer be significant when controlling for the mediating variable based on multiple regressions was conducted to test the hypotheses involving mediation for regression analyses the experiment conditions were dummy coded consistent with hypotheses and simple regression analyses confirmed
regulations the concept of a performance based regulatory approach has been widely embraced by the fire safety community a major impetus for this has been the efforts of the society of fire protection engineers a professional association of engineering this group sponsored a series of workshops beginning in that became important forums for identifying relevant issues and advocating regulatory changes closely related were the efforts of the national fire protection association an international nonprofit association dedicated to fire prevention in incorporating the performance based concepts into the development of a new set of consensus code documents published in approach to fire safety has been mostly limited to assessments of the fire safety of nontraditional structures like the luxor hotel in las vegas public officials have been reluctant to discuss potential loss of life from fires particularly after the fire related life losses at the world trade center towers on september that experience also underscores the lack of reliable methods for predicting the performance of protective systems for potential fire situations although a number of computer programs for modeling the ignition and spread of fire and guidelines have been produced by the society of fire protection engineers for carrying out such evaluations much of the commentary in technical forums about predictive modeling underscores the difficulties and inherent limits the prediction difficulties in part stem from the complexity of potential ignition sources spread and other physical and engineering factors one complicating factor particularly the world trade center towers experience is the unpredictability of human behavior in responding to fire as with the other cases considered here the performance based approach to fire safety shifts the emphasis for accountability from bureaucratic to professional based accountability mechanisms in the case of fire safety the shift is more one of emphasis than wholesale change fire protection engineers have for a long time been involved in analyzing and evaluating fire protection for nontraditional structures the performance based approach emphasizes their role and the state of practice in evaluating whether a given structure provides adequate protection from fires this places these engineers in a similar role of that of building certifiers in new zealand who turned out to be a very weak link in the accountability structure for performance based approaches to building regulation a notable difference however is the greater degree of fire protection engineers comparing accountability shortfalls a variety of potential accountability shortfalls are suggested by the case studies of system based and performance based regulatory regimes table depicts these with respect to the different levels of regulatory accountability while illustrating key accountability shortfalls illustrated by cases potential accountability problems for prescriptive regulation are also indicated for comparative purposes the shortfalls are purposely labeled as potential given the limitations of diagnosing them from the brief case materials and the fact that they are not inevitable potential shortfalls in legal accountability concern the applicability of rules and standards as elaborated upon in the concluding section a key issue is the potential for some form of regulatory capture for which the traditional form is noted under prescriptive regulation the key limitation identified for system based approaches is to the use of system defects as a basis for taking regulatory action as illustrated by the haccp inspection process limits the key limitation identified for performance based regulation is the difficulty of prescribing goals and standards as illustrated by the failure in new zealand to provide adequate building durability goals and standards potential shortfalls in bureaucratic accountability concern the application of regulations by regulators and shortfalls in respective compliance by regulated entities a key issue for prescriptive regulation is nitpicky and capricious enforcement that can result in missing larger compliance issues system based regulation places emphasis on monitoring adequacy of regulated firms systems that as illustrated by the haccp case is undermined if inspectors do not have the expertise to fulfill their monitoring roles potential shortfalls in bureaucratic accountability for performance based regimes stem as illustrated by the difficulties of predicting the fire safety performance of individual structures potential shortfalls in professional accountability concern the lack of well established professional norms and abuse of professional responsibilities both are sometimes a problem with prescriptive regulation although corruption for regulatory programs is more of a problem in developing countries than in advanced countries the brief case illustrations of system based and performance based regulations the difficulties of establishing a professional culture of safety for security and emergency planning for nuclear power plants illustrates the lack of established safety norms and potential for subterfuge on the part of some power plant operators shortfalls in new zealand building practices were directly attributed to lack of licensing requirements for builders and substandard building practices on the part of a large number of builders political accountability is concerned with the responsiveness of officials to regulatory problems the haccp and new zealand cases illustrate visible regulatory shortfalls that conclusions the discussion of regulatory regimes and accountability in this article stresses different levels of accountability and the accountability issues that arise for prescriptive system based and performance based regulatory regimes each regulatory regime has potential accountability shortfalls at one or more levels however they differ in the specifics and what they suggest about consequences for regulatory outcomes regulatory capture revisited a long standing concern of regulatory scholars is the potential for regulatory capture the classic forms under prescriptive regulation are when some private interests win out if they are able to enact standards that promote particular products or technologies and entire industries are favored if they gain from exclusionary practices that are embedded in regulations the former is a local form of regulatory capture and the latter is a more global form an appealing aspect of system based and performance based approaches is that they provide a more level playing field by not prescribing particular methods or materials the public interest indeed the newer forms of regulation are aimed at promoting competition to provide better and more cost effective ways of complying with regulations but the cases considered here show that
project is completed project data with a pmp structure are stored into a historical pmp depository by analyzing the historical pmp contents and trends new standards can be easily determined at present updates should be performed by an experienced head office engineer through regular such as case based reasoning will be developed in order to facilitate this process another feature of the proposed system is that different sets of spmps can be used in order to fit different types of construction projects for example spmp apartment spmp office and spmp hospital can be separately defined for easier use nevertheless standard budget items assigned in the same standard pmp may vary this issue is related to corporate wide integrity regardless of type of construction a case study and implications in order to examine the practicability of the proposed system initial spmps for office buildings are developed and pmps for a case study project are formulated first architectural pmps excluding earthwork electrical and mechanical packages are analyzed of spmp office contains spmps and standard budget items generally applicable to office building projects for the case company as shown in table these budget items are allocated into standard pmps each standard pmp has a predefined duration type complexity type and other properties as shown in table the case project is an office building as described in the introduction case project in table and pmp activities are generated by applying the locators these pmp activities are the cpm activities for integrated cost and schedule control four hundred thirty three budget items of the case project are allocated to pmp activities resulting in budget items with locators physical breakdown note that this case is a slightly modified version of scenario the and oas and respectively from scenario of table in jung and woo correspond to the number of pmps activities cas budget items bas and budget items allocated to pmp activities oas and respectively in this paper budget weights are calculated and evaluation indices are obtained the process of in fig throughout several workshops with the managers of the case company practicality and applicability in terms of progress measurement requirements for the case study company in fig the numbers of pmps and pmp activities were also verified as being reasonable considering the characteristics of korean general contractors jung and woo thus it also accommodates scheduling without cpm applications if there is a practical barrier to cpm tool usage saw of all pmps was found to be in table where is ideally the highest score without considering required workload partial weighted accuracy scores paix were also examined as shown in fig for pai work section the temporary work eg scaffoldings and others showed the lowest score the first and second months of the case project had very low pai period scores because most pmp was reevaluated in a different manner by using another workshop accuracy scores in this workshop were determined by expert discussion and judgment without utilizing the proposed scoring system in table most of the pmps showed no significant difference between these two scores pmps with considerably different scores were reviewed and modified throughout these evaluations and simulations identifying which is one of the major research objectives in this paper the results of the case project evaluation were directly used to update the properties of the initial standard for spmp office even though the case project does not include all packages in fig in this manner the default values of standard pmps can be repeatedly tested and adjusted through additional simulations and compared with the standard pai and standard paix in order to evaluate the overall appropriateness of the project pmps in fig this process can effectively distinguish the pmps those need to be adjusted in order to fit project specifics conclusions tool especially under multiproject management requirements or for inexperienced site engineers this study proposed an apms that utilizes corporate wide spmps based on a historical database and knowledge research objectives making standards alleviating workload enhancing accuracy and sustaining adaptability of this study were attained by the proposed concepts and tools the case study reveals that the ongoing exploration of data acquisition technology applications will soon equip this system with a more efficient data collection engine the earthwork mechanical and electrical divisions have not been completed for the case study and the guideline scores for the accuracy factors and indices sd and paix are still under further updates through additional case based simulations divisions work sections for any construction organization spmps will also serve as a self evolving data repository for progress measurement as well as historical database reuse the writers believe that systematic measurement of construction project progress as knowledge based management is of great importance in this competitive industry enhancing the accuracy including scheduling cost control materials management and other related construction business functions corporate venture capital as a means of radical innovation relational fit social capital and knowledge transfer barbara weber a christiana weber they continue with an empirical analysis of the influence that relational fit between german corporate venture capital units and their innovative portfolio companies has on knowledge transfer and knowledge creation in the cvc pcdyad and subsequently on the pc s organizational performance pc success is found to have dual significance for the corporation high returns for the cvc unit and strategic potential for radical innovation integrating two hitherto neglected social capital conative fit and affective fit into their framework of relational fit the authors extend social capital theory by combining the latter with the knowledge based view of the firm they thereby demonstrate the interrelatedness and combined importance of the two concepts hence relational fit proves to facilitate knowledge transfer and creation which enhance organizational performance innovation that is changes with a high degree of innovativeness in several dimensions they may be based on a totally new technological principle allowing a significant leap in performance they satisfy new needs create new markets redefine whole industries and change existing value chains connor and mcdermott suggest that radical innovations
that the facilitation effects observed for repeated words do not occur with when different meanings are primed on separate trials this result which is in contrast to the strong repetition priming effects that are usually seen in lexical decision tasks suggests that separate entries of the ambiguous word are processed on the two trials parallel distributed processing models which have become the dominant process have tried to explain the so called ambiguity advantage effect by assuming that there is both feedforward and feedback activation between orthography phonology and semantics hino and lupker theorized that because ambiguous words have multiple semantic representations corresponding to their multiple meanings they create more this semantic activation in turn could provide stronger feedback to the orthographic units which would lead to higher activation levels for ambiguous than unambiguous words joordens and his colleagues actually suggested that the ambiguity advantage effect in word recognition arises from a blend state in the semantic units which represents multiple learned meanings ambiguous words are assumed to reach a threshold level of semantic activation earlier than unambiguous words thus a processing advantage is expected in lexical decision tasks nevertheless although joordens and his colleagues managed to simulate an ambiguity advantage due to blend states this did not generalize to larger networks furthermore their simulations had a very high number of errors failing thus to replicate the so called ambiguity advantage effect reported in lexical model along similar lines was offered by borowsky and masson who attempted to simulate the results of behavioral experiments using a version of the distributed memory model described by masson with a very restricted set of words namely two ambiguous and two unambiguous words they were able to simulate an advantage for ambiguous words for lexical decision tasks due to faster settling of the meaning units into attractor basins for these words arguing that it arises a proximity advantage in other words when the orthography of a word is presented to the network the initial state of the semantic units is randomly determined the network then must move from this state to a valid finishing state corresponding to the meaning of the word the researchers argued that for ambiguous words there are multiple valid finishing states and on average the initial state of the network will be closer to one of these states than for an unambiguous word where there is only one valid finishing state however one limitation of these models is that the settling performance of the networks is poor as mentioned above joordens and besner report an error rate of while borowsky and masson resolve this issue by not considering these blend states which are a mixture of the ambiguous word s different meanings as errors an alternative explanation in terms of activation models was offered by kawamoto et the ambiguity advantage effect would arise mostly in tasks that emphasize orthographic processing while in tasks that emphasize semantic processing such an advantage should be lost kawamoto and his colleagues actually suggested that the activation of units representing the orthography of a word is used to mark the word recognition time and not the activation of units representing the semantics of a word the researchers focused on the orthographic level and created a model in which the weights of the connections between orthographic units were enacted differently for ambiguous and unambiguous words in particular for ambiguous words for which the mapping between orthography and meaning units is inconsistent the learning algorithm makes the connection weights the different learning trials particularly strong on the other hand for unambiguous words for which the mapping between orthography and meaning units is consistent the learning algorithm leads to more moderate connection weights both within and between the different units comparing ambiguous balanced words and unambiguous words kawamoto et al argued that the ambiguity effect would depend on the nature of the task if performance depended on task then there would be a processing advantage for ambiguous words however if performance depended on semantics such as a semantic categorization task then there would be a processing disadvantage for ambiguous words overall then it seems that although there have been several attempts to simulate the evasive ambiguity advantage effect observed in behavioral studies of word recognition there have been difficulties one possible explanation for these difficulties may fact that most of the studies that reported this ambiguity advantage effect did not distinguish among the different types of lexical ambiguity treating thus lexical ambiguity as an allor nothing phenomenon nevertheless lexical ambiguity is not a uniform phenomenon in theoretical linguistics a distinction is made between two types of lexical ambiguity namely homonymy and polysemy in homonymy a word form carries two distinct and unrelated which means financial institution and bank which means river side on the other hand in polysemy a single lexical item has several different but related senses such as rabbit which refers to the animal and to the meat of that animal a number of studies focusing on the semantics of ambiguous words provide evidence for differences in processing between homonymy and polysemy for example in a study explicitly compared the reading of ambiguous words with multiple meanings with the reading of ambiguous words with multiple senses in context when disambiguating information preceded the target word frazier and rayner found that fixation times for the target word and the post target region were longer for all sentences with ambiguous words however when the disambiguating information followed the target disambiguating region were longer for homonymous target words than unambiguous words probably due to the cost of reanalysis when the assignment of meaning possibly due to frequency proved to be incompatible with the subsequent context no such differences were found for polysemous words suggesting that there was no reanalysis effect based on their results frazier and rayner suggested that in the case of polysemy since the multiple senses are not incompatible with one another immediate selection of one sense may not be necessary for processing to proceed thus there is
policy so too is the notion of community indeed the promotion of football in a public policy context is based largely on the contribution it could make to community regeneration recent regulatory measures in the football industry are also concerned with community issues including similarly developments in club governance center on mutual ownership and community involvement yet although there is now widespread adoption of the word community in the official discourse of the football world there is little formal evaluation of the community work this situation was altered somewhat by the development in of football in the community schemes these schemes proliferated and expanded and now operate at all premier league football league and some football conference clubs the leyton orient community sports programme for argued that football in the community represents the most appropriate point of contact between clubs local authorities and surrounding communities he concluded that these relationships will become increasingly significant since global clubs will anchor themselves to their immediate communities as they expand their support overseas until now focused predominantly on the ownership and operation of individual schemes ie whether or not the schemes should be closely integrated with the clubs while these issues are significant the importance of project evaluation as a basis for understanding football s role in the community or no effect perkins alluded to this when he pointed out that local authorities often need convincing about what might actually be possible by seeing or hearing about something actually working positively in a similar location in another part of the country however the need for rigorous evaluation that the introduction of formal evaluation of football in the community should be explored indeed the ifc refers to a number of initiatives that have taken up this recommendation including a review of football in the community conducted by manchester metropolitan university discussions in pay tv and related media industries hamil recently argued that the influence of market forces is now felt critically throughout the football industry these commercial forces have exacerbated the basic tension between the sporting and economic objectives of football clubs this is an issue that has been discussed at assumption that professional sports teams act as profit maximizers sloane argued that historically profit making football clubs were very much the exception it may be more descriptively accurate to view the objective of the football club as one of utility maximization subject to the constraint of financial solvency utility in this case may mean some or any of the following security playing success attendance health of the league or providing a focus for communities however conn argued that the incorporation of football clubs into the leisure and media sectors has now diminished the importance of sporting and community objectives and has shifted the focus of football clubs towards profit this debate over the objectives of football clubs has also come to the attention of between purely sporting situations and wholly commercial situations to which treaty provisions would apply the nice declaration a document that noted the specific characteristics of sport and its social function followed in more recently the independent european sport review concluded becomes more commercialized clubs are more open to legal challenge over practices considered standard within football but anti competitive in conventional business for example the european commission s objections to the joint selling of media rights by the premier league focused on whether or not it was anti competitive a cultural justification for their activities understanding the contribution that football clubs can make to society by evaluating football based social inclusion projects is one way of achieving this robust evidence from evaluation studies that can isolate the effect of football on particular social exclusion processes identify three levels of project evaluation milestones outputs and outcomes milestones refer to requirements of funding agents such as consultation meetings that are designed to ensure proper project management outputs are short term products for example numbers of participants or numbers of clubs formed interventions for example improved participation or reduction in healthcare costs while milestones and outputs are easier to measure than outcomes and effects it is the latter that actually indicate the impact a project can have on social inclusion processes collins et al conducted an outcomes with anything approaching rigorous evaluations the schemes themselves were diverse employing many different outcome measures and methodologies for example roberts and brodie s study of inner city sport used life history analysis to examine participation behavior over a year period others such as the active lifestyles sports training scheme used questionnaires to examine respectively post school intentions regarding sport participation and the impact of taster and improver courses nichols and taylor s evaluation of the west yorkshire sports counseling project employed both quantitative and qualitative methods comparing a few similar examples the general picture of sport based social inclusion projects drawn by collins et al was one where either no evaluation was carried out or monitoring took the form of recording outputs these findings echo those of previous reviews that also leisure services and interviews with sport development officers and leisure center managers while respondents were able to substantiate social inclusion outcomes with multiple examples they were unwilling to press the claim of a clear link between sport and community development this reflects the gap between anecdotal evidence al concluded evaluation is tentative indicative and anecdotal because insufficient resources are given to it and insufficient intellectual attention in most cases is expended to identify outcomes and gather the necessary evidence to demonstrate them indeed there are hindered evaluation since outcomes are rarely specified when projects are set up there are often no reference points against which later measures can be compared furthermore outcome measures are often difficult to obtain for example attempting to determine the extent to which young people re offend may be complicated by the frequency through administering questionnaires can interfere with the sensitive nature of project delivery moreover effects may occur beyond the duration of the project and in different contexts for example in schools or workplaces in fact these difficulties apply just as much to the assessment of sporting outcomes as they among traditionally excluded groups such as
charles to counter any kind of penalty that could be imposed on him and his son the duke of najera purchased from charles the office of household expenditures at a price of charles always in need of money was easily persuaded to accept the offer taking the side of the duke of count of valencia tried to liquidate his estate to provide his illegitimate son with assets he failed to prevent luisa from obtaining his entailed estate which included a recent purchase made by the count of valencia of the town of toral which charles confiscated from a comunero in the end manrique and luisa won regained their reputation and lived long lives luisa raising three children and administering her estate as well as her many years abroad fighting along with charles in tunis and other mediterranean campaigns he fathered a handful of illegitimate sons obtaining for them annuities and royal offices as commanders of the military orders and as chaplains in the royal chapel the law required that he support illegitimate children in particular his son with aldonza de urrea manrique received royal stipends for his military contributions and he laboriously his conclusion family patriarchs such as the count of valencia and the count of aranda petitioned the king and his ministers to formalize marriage strategies marriages were mechanisms that permitted families to designate legal heirs and they were also strategies controlled by the legal and religious system executive judicial and clerical powers intervened in such cases they were intermixed and synchronized to principles equitably the aristocracy well knew that the king could break the law in unique situations to return favors to particular members of the aristocracy who had demonstrated their loyalty through many sacrifices but charles chose not to apply his absolute power to legitimize the count of valencia s bastard son and formalize the count of valencia s wish to disinherit his daughter luisa charles allowed the legal system to resolve the planned charles was not in spain but he had institutionalized a functional government that operated according to management procedures formulated by the castilian parliament the cortes the legal recognition of the marriage between manrique and luisa and of the dissolution between manrique and aldonza could only take place after a complex legal battle over inheritance institutions such as the dowry ecclesiastical principles such as consent and loyalty the intervention of the judicial state ultimately certified the dissolution of the first marriage and the validity of the second marriage remained one of the best mechanisms for transferring wealth and property but with the church state bureaucrats monopolizing marriage with the requirement of consent and public rituals of union marriage as a partnership based on mutual feelings such as love slowly evolved to override family and patriarchal the state s function was to ensure public order and the achievement of internal equilibrium in patriarchal societies justified the legitimacy of a royal government the principle of consent also permitted a change in the way that individuals came to frame their options within legal parameters articulated by the council of castile and by the administration presided by prelates the clan lost some of its power to the individual but much more to the state from arranged marriages which legally reject to marriages freely chosen which church authorities often sanctioned marriage evolved as a legal procedure prioritizing self regarding agency as part of the privileged system sustained by royal government the intervention of ecclesiastical authorities presiding in the highest appellate courts of the realm facilitated an agency to individuals that the patriarchal clan did not easily tolerate fathers were not stronger than the paternal state marriage was still a public matter of interest to family clans but it was being clarified and processed by authorities in a way that prioritized individual choice and amorous sentiments especially if those motives were supported by loyalty and service to the crown and tested by the litigation process that had inculcated religious principles prior to the council of trent the spanish absolute monarchy had already begun to interfere in the private lives of families enforcing standards of marriage on the mutual and parental consent recognizing proper sexual relations and punishing transgressors with penalties the decision of the couple to disobey their families set in motion an array of operations exercised by religious and judicial authorities to resolve a breakdown of patriarchal initiatives a range of expectations held by families ecclesiastical authorities and children came to the surface when two amorous individuals rebuked their parents family honor and survival strategies were played out in the drama of actors with a high degree of agency and with a resourceful knowledge of the legal system this scandalous elopement reveals self regarding behaviors the importance of mutual affection challenges to patriarchy and the critical regulatory role of the absolutist nation state that elites knew how to manipulate the catholic monarchy applied its institutional mechanisms to control behaviors and discipline clarify marriage as a sacrament based on mutual consent and respectful of familial strategies of prosperity abundant legal intervention facilitated the formation of regulatory institutions courts developed as the basic building blocks of states and the royal legal system transformed medieval monarchies into confessional states in effect the institutional application of religious principles and restorative rulings became a foundational element of coalescing nation states history of sexuality female mutability and male anxiety in an early buddhist legend serinity young american museum of natural history in cf a chinese monk named fa hsien began a fourteen year pilgrimage to south asia in order to visit buddhist pilgrimage sites and to gather buddhist texts to bring back to china in his account of that remarkable journey he related a story that was told to what is now north central india sarnkasya has been an important buddhist pilgrimage site since the second century bce it marks the spot where the buddha is said to have descended from trayastrinisa heaven the heaven of the thirty three gods after having gone there
of literature and literary theory geertz suddenly saw culture as texts read with difficulty by anthropologists and across cultures but only within them this analogy of cultural analysis to the reading of literary symbolism clearly has utility indeed this article owes to his insight its interpretation of the images of bosnia presented by european union observers and politicians as expressing life as those people most deeply do not want it at the same time if my own analysis has any power it is due to its being society now is it is not as international observers would imagine it as being what is the solution to the ethical problem geertz ended his consideration of it by restating the need to maintain detachment as a moral stance of its own detachment comes not from a failure to care but from a kind of caring resilient enough to withstand an enormous tension between moral to subjectivism as a sign that the tension had become unbearable but also considered both of these escapes pathologies values are indeed values and facts alas indeed facts this statement is of course a reiteration of the classic position on the need to separate as much as it is possible to do one s scientific work from one s political positions the coincidental that todorov has made the opposite movement from that of geertz from literary criticism to empirically grounded research though going farther than geertz into the realm explicitly of moral philosophy in what seems a reference to the consider intensely painful social situations todorov says that truth it would seem is incompatible with inner comfort for his part weber saw the best moral service that science could offer as uncovering facts contrary to dominant political sentiment recognizing the enormous tension and personal discomfort in doing this weber suggested that the appropriate response for someone while certainly defensible and no one can insist that any scholar continue to study subjects that are unbearable to see this is not in itself a moral position if a goal of social science is to gain understanding in order to try to prevent the recurrence of tragedy understanding the conditions under which such tragedies arise is a moral position on this point the forces which animate it is an essential element in understanding it and that to judge without understanding constitutes an offence against morality is geertz s position todorov for his part counters the objection that to understand is to accept with if i understand nothing i cannot be a good judge so that we may be spared the horror of repeating the past we must not hesitate to set about that often an understanding of a social problem does not suffice to permit correcting it in such cases the better the understanding the more personally tragic the curse of cassandra whose warnings were accurate but contrary to what others were willing to accept this is not only a psychological problem for the one who knows what will happen but cannot prevent it but also may yet i believe that anthropologists have no choice but to risk these consequences if anthropologists have any greater claim to authority or even relevance than anyone else it is not because their morality is necessarily so much superior to everybody else s but because their knowledge of the dominant modes of representation of the peoples that they study is more the association of social anthropologists web page seems to reflect this commitment to reliance on the specificity of anthropological expertise since it calls for ethical debates to be grounded on a belief in the ethical integrity of our profession and trust in our expert knowledge at the same time however they say that ethical considerations should be politically conscious and aware of the political conditions under which our nez but what if political consciousness impedes perception of situations and thus the very grounding of our expertise with this problem in mind the tendency of existing codes of ethics to emphasize values such as the obligation to abide by the scientific community s standards governing adequacy of research honesty general availability of the results and so on may not be misplaced the but about our contributions to public debates about ethical principles and practice in the world is to ensure that such discussions do not undercut the reliability of anthropologists claims to expertise it is especially worrisome that giving primacy to the political may lead to allegations against reputable anthropologists who have done careful ethical research vii the central problem identified by hayden is that many serbs and croats in bosnia do not share the understandings of themselves put forth by western observers outsider sentiments of ethical rightness may be based on false assumptions and therefore mislead on these points i agree but i would frame the issues otherwise but in most cases i look forward to presenting evidence that challenges native doxa i sympathize with hayden and others who were subject to personal attacks during the different yugoslav wars but a community free from such attacks is a utopic vision we must work toward what hayden objects to is not the result of bringing forth forbidden knowledge as he claims but of a lack of receptiveness national residence and hatred but they did not agree about how to interpret or resolve the conflicts resulting from local differences it would be naive to think that people generally understand themselves correctly the status of their self understandings is a point of departure not a conclusion the cross disciplinary evidence of the capacity for self deception is overwhelming leaders if not also a large portion of the population were fanatics and it seems to me reasonable to ask whether during the bosnian war half the population may be seen as fanatics for rejecting the notion of a civil society that included cultural pluralism the consequences of that rejection at least semiconsciously acknowledged by many bosnians as hayden himself makes clear were genocide and cultural and economic such
it to be endowed with significance and meaning he acknowledges that this meaning is not pre given closed and fixed but plural and needing to be negotiated mikhail bakhtin s aesthetics of dialogism caute in his quest for truth resists the temptation to off er a totalizing point of view or to strive for a coherent unified description of social reality and prefers to stage contesting voices perspectives and value systems he is particularly concerned with showing the dialectical interplay between subjective experiences and objective social reality and consequently interweaves private stories and public history the diggers views through speeches dialogue debates interior reflections and memories as well as by intertextual reference to their publications large parts of the novel therefore manifest a very low degree of fictionalization and evoke the impression of being dramatized conversations between historical characters on religion and politics there can be no doubt that winstanley was not only the outstanding theorist and chief spokesman of the diggers but also one of thinkers of his and in the historiographical publications available to caute it was common practice to equate his philosophy with the wider movement s programme and gloss over the substantial internal tensions and incoherences in his own writings which reflect his rapid intellectual spiritual and political development prior to his engagement with the diggers he published four mystical theological tracts the highly symbolic language of which makes them the modern his later writings in particular the manifestos he wrote for the diggers display a stronger secular tone and orientation towards this world but as was characteristic of the dialectical interdependence of the political and the religious discourses in seventeenth century pamphlet literature they are still heavily embedded in a religious context and couched in a biblical idiom lacking a consistent and precise political terminology winstanley and other radicals used religious forms and christian myths as the most accessible way of expressing profound truths about man society and the universe in a way that would inspire to the transition from a religious mysticism and visionary utopianism to a humanist and materialist philosophy largely freed from its theological contexts culminated in winstanley s last and most systematic work the law of freedom evaluation of the religious political and economic elements in winstanley s thought some ignore his politics in favor of his theological ideas see him as a mystic and a millenarian thinker who had no intention to effect social change but wanted to fulfil god s will as revealed to him in a divine vision and therefore dismiss the digging as a merely symbolic eschatological others neglect the significance of winstanley s religious belief for his political philosophy social analysis stress his materialism and modernity and identify him as primarily a rational socialist and social revolutionary christopher hill steers a middle course and off ers a convincing synthesis of the two extreme approaches to winstanley s religion which he upbraids as too static and one dimensional charging their adherents with removing him from his historical context hill in contrast points out the a clear cut break between his theological and his communist writings he traces the theological origins of winstanley s ideas in the radical heretical tradition illustrates how he fused his millenarian theology with his political ideas and his communist theory and at the same time pinpoints the secularizing trend of winstanley s thinking in which the millenarian aspect faded into the background as economic and political considerations became more important and as a result his became steadily less theological and more materialist as he learned from the power of the enemies he was up caute obviously follows the path shown by hill challenging the authority and doctrines of traditional christian theology and the institutionalized church winstanley allegorizes and topicalizes religious and theological terms biblical figures and conflicts in order to explain contemporary political and social constellations with in a london tavern in chapter bears testimony to this blend of mystical and materialistic elements this mixture of both old testament language and secular arguments and the mythological use of biblical material winstanley here deploys the argumentative rhetorical device of antithetically contrasting the forces of good and evil of rulers and ruled in the figures of jacob and esau to underline the strong chiliastic apocalyptic protagonist s sentiments caute anachronistically refers to the pamphlet fire in the bush which winstanley wrote in the middle of march in the face of the final defeat of the diggers and which as hill points out does not treat merely religious in comrade jacob it serves as a leitmotif fire in the bush the spirit burning not consuming but purging mankind winstanley s first communist writing the new law of righteousness the true levellers standard and a declaration from the poor oppressed people of england contain the essential elements of the diggers ideology which is anything but a coherent set of ideas and firstly the repudiation of private property and the principles of economic individualism and competition with the concomitant demand for a society based on common ownership of the land and the means of production secondly the rejection of the state the the institutions that lead to underpin and perpetuate domination and exploitation thirdly the expectation of an imminent spontaneous revolution fourthly the voluntaristic belief in the possibility and necessity of human agency their view of history political philosophy and analysis of society have their roots in the antinomians chiliastic theology the popular theory of the norman yoke and the idea of communism which thomas more and tommaso campanella had and civitas solis in his reflections on an ideal system of social organization that is in harmony with human nature winstanley starts from the assumption of a state of nature in which the land was a common treasury and social ethics brought into accord personal interests of self preservation the desire for social solidarity and the welfare of all in the beginning of time the great creator reason made the earth to
well as a menu id another application of combining position and id recognition is paper dialogue box cards called cyber dialogue a user can add marks on this card in order to customize it when a user puts a card in front of the camera the the markings added by the user the position and orientation of cybercode is also recognized and used to collectedly locate positions of markings on the card indoor navigation systems some museums have a navigation system that gives guidance information to visitors these systems determine the current location of the visitor by asking the visitor to manually enter numbers or else determine the location automatically do so is cumbersome and for the latter case the cost for installation and maintenance of ir beacons might be a problem cybercode can also be used in such indoor guidance systems if a cybercode were printed on every label identifying the items in the museum a visitor would be able to retrieve id numbers and get guidance information if the same ids were printed on the physical guide book visitors could also actual exhibitions figure for example is a snapshot from an exhibition in tokyo of the works of the architect neil denari writings design sketches and computer graphics by neil denari were virtually installed in the physical gallery space by attaching icons to the surfaces of the room visitors walked around the space carrying a browsing device called the cybercode system identifies a real world object from the attached code the corresponding annotation information is retrieved from a database the estimated camera position is used to superimpose this information on the video image the annotation data is stored on the local server and when the user first encounters a new cybercode id the system automatically downloads the corresponding using this technique an algorithm for this overlay is described in the implementation section of this paper combining cybercode with other sensing technologies cybercode recognition technology can also be enhanced by combining it with other sensing technologies figure shows an experimental navigation system based on a gyro enhanced id recognition device it demonstrates a typical use of first puts the device in front of a nearby cybercode tag on the wall the system determines the global location including orientation information from the recognized id and its shape then the user can freely look around the environment by moving the device even when the cybercode tag is out of sight of the camera the system continues to track the relative motion of the device by using environments cybercode can also be an operand for manipulating physical environments for example one can click on an id or can virtually pick up an item from one id and drop it on another id these operations are an extension of the concept of direct manipulation techniques into physical environments since these ids can be embedded in the real world context drop operation between a paper id and an id attached on the real printer then a hard copy of that document would be printed this is a more direct and natural way to specify the source and destination than in the use of traditional guis particularly when the user is away from the desktop computer naohiko kohtake and the present authors have developed a it is a wand type device with a ccd camera for id recognition buttons for operation and a lcd display for showing information about an object a typical use of this device is for pointing it to a physical object selecting from the display one of the available actions and activating that action by pressing a button in this sense to a recognized id it can also be used to perform direct manipulation techniques more complicated than this simple point and click operation such as drag and drop in a physical environment the user can presses a button to designate the source id tag then move toward a destination id and then drop it on the destination id tag by releasing the button this technique can be used in real world contexts for example one can drag and drop between a projector and a notebook pc in order to transfer information about the currently projected slide to the computer in this case the projector is used as physical landmark to designate the information source and the actual data transfer occurs in the network similarly one document id transmission in tv programs the visual nature of cybercode allows it to be transmitted as a normal tv signal for example a tv screen can display a cybercode pattern as well as a url instead of manually jotting down a displayed url a user with a camera equipped mobile device can simply point it at the tv screen and the device will recognize the cybercode id the user can then will appear on the screen one advantage of this method is that we do not have to change any of existing broadcasting systems or tv sets figure shows experimental id transmission and figure shows an example of an tv program using this technique object recognition and registration in ubiquitous computing environments called inforoom consisting of a digital table and a wall a camera mounted above the table is used to recognize objects on the table physical objects such as vcr tapes for example can be used as links to the digital space when a tagged object is placed on the table its related information appears on the table automatically it is also possible to dynamically bind digital data to the physical object by simply pointer or a normal mouse a similar technique can also be used to make a physical booklet a catalog of digital information figure shows how a printed catalog can be used to retrieve a model each page has an attached cybercode tag and the camera recognizes page position on the table as well as the page number then the system indicates embedded links on the orientation of physical functional objects
layers these outcomes pointed out that the underwater light climate and temperature water structure are like in marine systems very important factors distribution of phytoplanktonic organisms introduction phytoplankton absorption spectra have been extensively used in regional comparison different works have shown that changes in pigment composition and pigment package effects are the primary source of variability in specific absorption of phytoplankton the analysis of in vivo and specific absorption spectra is difficult considering that they are complex spectra due to high overlapping bands of absorption spectra the package effect predicts that the absorption spectrum is flattened due to increasing cell or colony size or pigment concentration so changes in these features along the water column will drive the specific absorption of phytoplankton to different chemical and physical properties basically these pigments can be divided into three groups chlorophylls carotenoids and biliproteins pigments can also be separated according to their function in phytoplankton cells a second group of accessory pigments are the photoprotecting ones these pigments are mainly carotenoids sun screens and providing protection against photooxidative stress in natural environments absolute levels of radiation and underwater light spectra vertical temperature and density gradients and nutrient availability determine phytoplankton distribution along the water column in oligotrophic oceans photoprotective pigments have shown a decrease with increasing depth in contrast both chlorophyll a and photosynthetic accessory pigment concentrations have shown an increase with increasing depth in response to lower light levels in deep waters a raise in chl a concentration with depth was observed in different oligotrophic and very transparent morris et al perez et al queimalin os et al important differences in the accessory pigment structure between surface and deep layers could be expected during summer when thermal stratification occurred we studied a set of lakes belonging to both atlantic and pacific watersheds we analyzed the vertical variations of the in vivo absorption spectra in all structures in addition we calculated specific absorption spectra in order to estimate the magnitude of package effect the aim of the present work was to analyze phytoplankton specific absorption spectra in relation to changes in pigment composition and package effects under contrasting optical scenarios of deep andean lakes the glacial lakes district of the southern andes the climate is temperate cool with predominance of westerly winds and annual precipitation of the vegetation corresponds to the andean patagonic temperate forest represented in the lakes shores mainly by nothofagus national parks nahuel huapi puelo and los alerces and is characterized by a profuse hydrographic system including large deep lakes the main rivers fed from these andean waters cross the plateau steppe and outflow to the atlantic ocean but there are also other rivers that cross the andes flowing towards the pacific ocean gutierrez of atlantic watershed and lakes mascardi catedral mascardi tronador puelo rivadavia and futalaufquen of pacific watershed the two arms of mascardi lake were considered as two lakes since this system has a different hydrology from the other study basins due to the three main glaciers par and uvr transparency is high in north patagonian andean lakes with low dissolved organic carbon concentration the trophic status was described as ultra oligotrophic or oligotrophic in a central sampling point of each lake vertical profiles of uv bands and par downward irradiance and temperature were measured with a puv submersible radiometer underwater light quality was measured with the transmittance at and nm respectively while the red one was a high pass filter with a maximum transmittance over nm separate profiles were conducted with the each filter in situ chlorophyll a profiles were determined with the puv calibrated against measurements in the laboratory on the basis of ethanol extractions water samples of containers were kept in darkness and thermally isolated and were carried immediately to the laboratory all sampling was carried out in triplicates at mid day before astronomic noon optical properties diffuse vertical attenuation coefficients of par downward irradiance uv blue green and red radiations matter components were carried out on each water sample within after sampling optical densities were measured with a metrolab spectrophotometer in the spectral range of at nm intervals light absorption spectra by lake particles ap were determined after concentration of the particles on gf filtered and optical densities were measured directly on the wet filters against a blank clean filter wetted with distilled water used as reference instead of analyzing the amplification factor as a function of optical densities of particles retained in the filters we examined optical densities of suspended particles as a function of wetness of the filters remained unchanged the absorption at nm where absorption can be considered negligible was assumed to be due to residual scattering in the filtrate and was subtracted from the absorbance values at all other wavelengths in order to calculate ap after measuring the absorption of total particulate matter the spectral case the gf filter was placed in absolute methanol at for min in order to extract pigments the bleached filter was dried and then soaked again in filtered lake water for the same treatment was applied in parallel to a reference filter used as blank the absorption coefficients of viable phytoplankton were obtained of subtracting the absorption by test differences in dcm depth and vertical attenuation coefficients between deep lakes of atlantic and pacific watersheds prior to analysis a kolmogorov smirnov test and a levene median test were applied to test data for normality and homoscedasticity respectively analyses of in vivo and specific absorption dividing them by extracted chlorophyll a concentration chlorophyll a concentration was immediately determined for samples carried from the field a volume of ml of water of each level was filtered onto gf filters and extracted with hot ethanol chl a concentrations were determined with a fluorometer the true absorption of phytoplankton community the absorption spectra of phytoplankton are complex due to the mixtures of pigments and associated proteins to solve this problem the derivative analysis of spectra curves proved to be a powerful method
the journals are listed in appendix a the journals with five or more papers on software cost estimation are displayed in table together with the corresponding number proportion and cumulative proportions of papers these journals include the most relevant journals means that important research results may be missed researcher awareness of relevant journals we were interested in the degree to which software estimation researchers were aware of and systematically searched for related research in more than a small set of journals an indication of this awareness was derived with in appendix the reference lists of each of these papers were examined from this examination we found that the typical software cost estimation study relates its work to and or builds on cost estimation studies found in only three different journals we examined the topics of the papers and found that some of the papers did not refer to previously on software cost estimation are based on information derived from a rather narrow search for relevant papers the most referenced journal with respect to related cost estimation work was the ieee transactions on software engineering estimation papers from this journal were referred to in as many as percent of the papers relative to the number of acm fully percent of the papers made references to at least one of the journal s nine papers on software cost estimation there were relative to the number of cost estimation papers available few references to papers in information and software technology or the software quality journal journals mainly contained references to other se journals the only exception here was ieee tse this journal was referred to frequently by both communities to communicate software cost estimation results to other researchers from both communities results may benefit from being published in ieee tse few papers referred to estimation results outside the of references to sources outside the software community seems to be to literature on statistics we made a separate test on references to two journals outside the software engineering field the international journal of forecasting and the international journal of project management the former includes many relevant results on how to predict is the major journal on project management and provides results related to the project context of software cost estimation as well as project cost estimation results out of the journal papers only one referred to the international journal of project management and none to the international journal of forecasting both journals can be accessed by using digital libraries indicates that several authors use narrow criteria when searching for relevant cost estimation papers the most important issue however is whether papers on software cost estimation miss prior results that would improve the design analysis or interpretation of the study this cannot be derived from our review alone our impression however based on the review presented in this is the lack of identification and integration of results from journals outside the top five journals in table this is exemplified by the documented lack of reference to relevant papers in the international journal of forecasting and the journal of project management an example of the incomplete summary of related work can be found in one of the authors own analogy with generally quite encouraging results this claim was based on references to studies of the studies were conducted by one of the authors including all relevant studies would have led to less optimism out of the studies were in favor of estimation by analogy four were inconclusive and seven were in favor of regression based that are biased toward the researcher s own vested interests most important software cost estimation journal ieee tse was found to be the dominant software cost estimation research journal when considering both the number of papers and citations made by other researchers it is therefore an interesting question whether ieee tse has publication topics a strong publication bias in ieee tse could for example have the unfortunate consequence of directing software cost estimation researchers focus towards the topics most easily accepted by the journal to analyze this we compared the distribution of research topics estimation approaches and research methods of ieee tse with the total set of estimation papers published and research methods were similar to the corresponding distributions of the total set of papers ieee tse papers had a somewhat stronger focus on function point based estimation methods and less focus on expert judgment but even here the difference was small moreover there may be a time effect since this topic was more popular in the and while not all other journals eg empirical software cost estimation papers reflect the total set of software cost estimation papers reasonably well notice that we have only studied high level types of publication bias and do not exclude the possibility that there are other types of difference regarding journal publication for example differences in the formalism used when describing estimation methods we have are not visible from a study of only the published papers identification of relevant software cost estimation research journal papers our search for estimation papers was as described earlier based on a manual issue by issue search of about potentially relevant journals this is we believe an accurate method of identifying relevant research papers given that it should be replaced with more automated search and identification methods the main tool for this is the use of digital libraries to indicate the power of the digital libraries we conducted the following evaluation the search term software cost estimation or software effort estimation was applied in the digital research libraries google scholars resulted in records however only out of the journal papers were identified ie a recall rate of only about percent the search in inspec identified journal ie a recall rate of about percent the joint set of google scholar and inspec led to the identification of of the papers ie a recall rate of almost percent nevertheless even the use of both libraries missed a substantial part of relevant papers a
the eu is the development risk defence it enables a company to prevail against a strict liability or negligence claim by proving in issue could not have been detected at the time the harmful product was sold given the state of scientific and technical knowledge at that time eu nations have discretion as to whether to allow this defence to be used or to define it differently french courts for example have excluded this defence in cases involving contaminated blood transfusion products after a national scandal involving the deliberate sale of such products was revealed and the exclusion has been legislative action in france to cases which involve the producers of any products derived from the human body somewhat similar is the state of the art defence allowed in many states in the usa however courts have used at least three different definitions of state of the art some have said it means merely showing that the manufacturer followed the customary practice of its industrial sector others have more stringently defined the defence requiring that the that it did what was technically and economically feasible at the time of sale and other courts have applied the most stringent definition requiring the company to establish that it did what was technically doable irrespective of economic feasibility or other business considerations industry and government strongly support this type of defence as necessary to prevent liability from stifling technological innovation critics of this defence claim that it has created industry sectors which have not sought to advance safety or reduce uncertainties regarding their products the defence is likely to become especially controversial in the context of future cases involving biotechnology products which pose many uncertainties such as genetically modified crops foods and pesticidal micro organisms intended for agricultural use an industrial process or by process malfunction upset explosion fire or other accidental occurrence in such cases several liability scenarios may develop as the injured seek damages in court in one scenario the injured seek to recover damages from the company which designed and made the processand sold it asa product for use by other companies since the ensuing lawsuit will likely be based on tort liability theories of negligence and strict liability as these theories have been applied to manufacturers of injurious products thus tort law applicable to this scenario is essentially that which has been discussed earlier in this paper and is not discussed further in this section in a second scenario the company designed and made the process for a particular customer by its customer company whose subsequent use of the process proved to be injurious here a complex situation emerges in which each company will try to avoid liability by blaming the other company for negligence and breach of contract depending on the applicable laws persons who have been injured may be able to sue either company or join both as defendants in a single lawsuit or sue each company in separate actions but to minimize complexity it seems that the most efficient course of action for the person harmed is to sue the customer company which operated the process this option is outlined in the third scenario below the third scenario which is the most likely is one in which the injured go to court to against the company which operated the process in a harm causing manner irrespective of whether this company purchased the process or developed or co developed the process itself here the ensuing lawsuit will likely be based on multiple theories of liability negligence strict liability for conduct of an unreasonably dangerous activity and nuisance theory in each scenario the process may also have caused harm to the environment natural this introduces the prospect of additional liability and losses for the company which operated the process public officials usually have authority to impose penalties on the process operator recover damages to compensate the government and impose various restraints on further operation of the process these actions would be taken pursuant to special liability laws for harm to the environment and other public interests and usually do not require proving company negligence as discussed earlier in this paper for each of these scenarios the liability theories exceptions and defences that apply will differ from nation to nation and in some nations between its political subdivisions inaddition a multitude of other laws in each jurisdiction may control certain aspects of a claimant s case for example if company employees have been harmed in the course of employment their ability to bring a negligence or other action against their employer may be precluded by workers compensation law which limits redress for employees to scheduled payments from company purchased insurance coverage according to disability or injury as in germany and the usa thus the influence of liability on process design will vary in accordance with highly particularized legal and factual circumstances liability theories been injured by routine or non routine aspects of a company operated process as previously discussed it requires proving that the company was at fault in that its behavior failed to meet a legally defined standard of care owed to the claimant and that the behavioral fault was the proximate or substantial cause of the harm suffered thus the company may be held liable if it is established that it failed to follow appropriate practices in designing maintaining or operating its to expert knowledge known to it or to others and that following such practices would have prevented the harm at issue in addition the company may incur vicarious liability for harm caused by an employee who deviated from company procedures by the professional negligence of its design or engineering consultant or by a supplier who provided defective materials or components such vicarious liability is supported by long standing public policy in many nations and is increasingly being applied to cases involving harm caused by the negligence of the company s independent contractors if held vicariously liable under such circumstances the company or its insurer may subsequently seek recovery of its liability from the consultant supplier or contractor in a
will summarize them in the form of three ideal types based on the key results of the statistical analysis presented before many cases of individual neighborhoods being more or less intermediate between them the process which characterizes the largest group of working class neighborhoods under study about one third of them is the incorporation of those neighborhoods into which the newcomers are overwhelmingly private business professionals cadres d entreprise some of these neighborhoods are in the central city but the vast majority are in the suburbs in the dense part of the banlieues hauts de seine and yvelines in the west and val de marne in the east it is the logic of proximity with existing concentrations of upper class areas which is clearly predominant and not the attraction of centrality as such the reasonable hypothesis is that a residential choice means an effort of integration into the upper class through the social networks the urban way of life and use of urban services the symbolic identification and the isolation from the working class and poor immigrants who are rapidly evicted from such areas the upper middle class groups here would have higher incomes and even without belonging directly to the capitalist through their professional responsibilities and ideologies to designate this process the word embourgeoisement seems definitely more adequate even if it requires an updating of the definition of the dominant class the bourgeoisie the second type of process is characterized by a similar predominance of private business professionals but by a different spatial logic those neighborhood so about quite distant from upper class ones and they are conversely close to many working class areas and middle mixed areas in that case i shall hypothesize that beyond the statistical similarity in the profile of upper class and upper middle class residents there are significant social differences with the ones in the former group in terms of income type of education and job and social origin even belonging to the same social categories they would be part of the top management and highly paid jobs and often be of working class or low middle class social background it seems that an adequate name for this process would be something like upward social mobility of working class neighborhoods upper middle class groups there would maintain a social as well as spatial proximity to the working class and the neighborhoods would become middle mixed ones but would not jump up to upper class status one fifth of the neighborhoods under study is the one closest to the usual narrative of gentrification the attraction of centrality is clearly a strong factor and the more culture oriented upper middle classes are overrepresented in the newcomers but even that type does not fit the model very tightly the centrality factor is strong compared with the other types but in a loose sense a minority only of the neighborhoods in that case are in the central city the being in the dense parts of the first ring of suburbs rather close to paris and the upper middle classes whose numbers are increasing comprise a significant proportion of professionals in public scientific media and artistic occupation so much higher than in the other cases but professionals in private business are quite present too about half of the influx may the use of the term gentrification be considered an adequate mode of against it due to the homogenization of the upper middle class actors of the process under the metaphorical denomination of gentry and what it implies in terms of stressing the social distance to the working class particularly strong in smith s revanchist reading of gentrification which has been very influential what case studies of various neighborhoods of paris or nearby suburbs corresponding to that type have shown is more a upper middle classes one group of private business professionals willing to push the transformation further for social and real estate interests the other of professionals in public scientific media and artistic occupations who valorize the mix with working class and immigrant groups and ways of life centered less exclusively on private commodity consumption and more on collective services and public goods whether the tension is being resolved by the incorporation the values and politics of the first or whether conversely the second group joined by some in the first may be an actor in public policies maintain ing working class and immigrant groups in those areas thanks to housing policies urban planning and public services is an open question for the future of such neighborhoods it may also be a key issue to understand differences between apparently similar processes of urban social change in different cities and countries seeing them superficially as homogenous manifestations of one global process of gentrification corporations and the governance of environmental risk andrew gouldson jan bebbington attempts to govern environmental risks the discussion is divided into three sections first they discuss the factors that have led to the emergence of new ways of governing those corporate activities that are associated with the generation or management of environmental risks second they problematize these new forms of governance adopting the united nation s global compact as an example and drawing particularly on the insights derived from the contrasting perspectives associated with communicative and strategic action as an alternative to both of these perspectives they next focus on the foucauldian concept of governmentality the need for analyses to consider the nature of the ways in which different risks are problematized the character of different governance regimes the significance of the organizing ideals that guide the operation and the evolution of the multidimensional processes through which risks are governed are highlighted they suggesting that new governmental technologies are unlikely to enable either governance at a distance for instance by creating opportunities for new forms of engagement and new spaces of accountability or governance of the self for example by instilling values and developing technologies which allow corporations to govern their own
for the relationship between child maltreatment and attenuated social competence other research has also noted that the representations maltreated children form regarding themselves and their caregivers place them at risk for dysregulated emotion as well as concomitant difficulties in their relationships with peers given that maltreated children are at risk for difficulties in addition to the evidence linking emotional regulation to children s social functioning we hypothesize that emotion regulation will also mediate the relationship between experiences of maltreatment and maladaptive behavior exhibited in the peer arena integration of cognitive and emotional processes although research on social cognition provides clear evidence of a relationship affective processes play a significant role through their influence on social interactions researchers in the area of social cognition have recognized the important influence that emotion has on social competence and the exhibition of behavioral problems despite this recognition there remains a relative paucity of work examining the relative effects of cognitive and in predicting the development of aggression and disruptive behavioral problems this is particularly true with respect to investigations of the mechanisms underlying the long term impact of child maltreatment research that has attempted to account for the importance of both the emotion and cognition in understanding the development of problematic behavior with peers has focused on the experience of negative affect the present study builds upon this existing literature by examining the broader process of emotion regulation as opposed to the experience of negative affect alone in addition to social information processing we believe that the joint investigation of these cognitive and affective processes in children with varying maltreatment experiences will advance the understanding of how aversive child rearing promotes the behavior our hypotheses in this study were as follows maltreated children would receive more nominations of aggressive and disruptive behavior from peers than would non maltreated children this was expected to be particularly true for physically abused children maltreated children would display more social information processing errors typical of aggressive children than would non maltreated children aggressive children in accordance with prior research on maltreatment maltreated children were expected to receive lower ratings of emotion regulation than their non maltreated peers physically abused children were not necessarily expected to receive lower ratings of emotion regulation relative to other maltreated children aggressive patterns of processing social information and poor emotion regulation would independently mediate the relationship between maltreatment experiences peers nominations of aggression and disruptiveness aggressive processing patterns were expected to be primarily operative in explaining aggressive and disruptive behavior for physically abused children method participants documented cases of child maltreatment as well as a group of non maltreated comparison children maltreated children were recruited through the massachusetts department of social services for cohort and through the monroe county ny department of social services for cohort non maltreated comparison children in each cohort were recruited through fliers posted in low income urban neighborhoods comparable to the neighborhoods where children in the maltreatment groups resided were representative of families receiving services through both the massachusetts and monroe county department of social services all participating families signed release forms granting access to their dss records the presence or absence of maltreatment was subsequently verified through interviews with social workers and extensive examinations of each family s case history a number of demographic variables given the demographic equivalence of these groups across cohorts the samples were combined in order to increase the power of analyses conducted in this investigation particularly for analysis of maltreatment subtype effects children included in the study ranged in age from six to years percent of whom were male children s race ethnicity was converted into a dichotomous variable representing minority and non minority group membership with percent of participants classified as non minority given the evidence associating the experience of physical abuse in particular with aggressive social information processing styles as well as heightened aggression and externalizing behavior we expected to see the most severe disruptions in social emotional and cognitive functioning in this children were split into three groups consisting of physically abused children children only experiencing other forms of maltreatment and non maltreated comparison children groups were found comparable with respect to age and gender but significant differences arose when considering race ethnicity with the other maltreatment group evidencing more two groups there were also significant differences in terms of the number of children in the family although the groups were comparable on a number of other family demographic features because the number of children in the family did not correlate with any variables of interest in the study however it was not considered further maltreatment classification a modified version of the item checklist of maltreatment events developed by giovannoni and becerra this checklist provides information regarding the specific subtypes of maltreatment that children experienced the social workers had worked closely with the families and reported on the nature of maltreatment based upon intimate knowledge of each family s history and case record the maltreatment classification system developed by monroe county dss records of families in cohort trained doctoral students and clinical psychologists carefully reviewed each family s dss case history in order to determine the parameters of maltreatment that had occurred barnett et al derived definitions of maltreatment subtypes based largely on the work conducted by giovannoni and becerra thus the criteria used by was rated as present if a child sustained injury from a caregiver through non accidental means physical neglect was indicated if caregivers failed to provide for medical nutritional cleanliness educational needs or adequate supervision sexual abuse was designated if there was evidence of inappropriate sexual contact emotional maltreatment was identified if a child s basic emotional needs had been thwarted prior research has the identification of pure maltreatment subtypes is far less common than cases of maltreatment with co morbid subtypes consistent with the previous work on maltreatment the majority of maltreated subjects in the current study were found to have experienced multiple forms of maltreatment with percent experiencing physical abuse percent experiencing percent
spending less on british goods than their counterparts in western europe if the empire had become a drag relative advantage and british export growth the findings of the last section indicate that imperial advantage did seemingly have a role to play in explaining the consumption habits of the major empire markets platt was therefore correct in asserting that no market was truly neutral by nature psychic distance does seem to matter however such a anding in itself does not the was driven by such non market advantages a distinction must be drawn between the level of relative advantage enjoyed by british exporters and the rate at which that advantage changed although a strong advantage measured by a high ra may account for a nation s greater consumption of british products at any point in time given the presence of other factors that affect demand such as for the growing proportion of british exports being dispatched to these markets to draw this conclusion it is necessary to determine the contribution of ra to the growth of exports in other words to estimate ra elasticities of demand and hence demand functions for british imports in each of the key following our earlier discussion the demand functions estimated ut where imports is the sterling value of british imports to market in year expressed in constant prices gdpjt the level of real gdp in in pounds rajt an instrument variable for the index of relative advantage for british imports in pricest a measure of the relative price competitiveness of british exports and a series of dummies used to capture structural error pricest is constructed as the ratio of average british to us export prices a measure that has been used to gauge changes in the price competitiveness of british industrial exports such a comparison between british and american prices is justified because for the entire period under consideration the united states was consistently the most technologically dynamic and productive the standards of cost effectiveness and productivity against which the british had to compete indeed in most of britain s empire markets especially the wealthy dominions the united states was the only serious rival to britain s dominance dummy variables are included in the demand function to acknowledge the possible effect of structural changes in the world inter alia exchange rate regimes the form and scope of protectionism and macroeconomic policy in britain and else where dramatically altered the nature of the international economy given the integrated nature of many of these transformations however isolating the effects of any specific change is problematical for example when markets are noncompetitive or when the extent of protective measures both of the tariff and exchange rate pass through of an appreciation will not be perfect in other words a percent appreciation of the pound can be expected to result in a less than percent decrease in british price competitiveness in foreign markets in such circumstances dummies that gauge the net effect of all of the concomitant changes in process may capture the impact of the transformation in exchange this article thus represents britain s return to the gold standard at the prewar parity between and the impact of the depression and its consequences between and and the postwar world until the result of ordinary least squares estimations of the demand functions for six important british markets for all of the can account for between and percent of the variation in british import volumes to those markets during this period moreover these regressions are also fairly robust exhibiting no significant signs of autocorrelation hetereoscedasticity multicollinearity or specification the key independent variables are all significant and of the expected sign in every regression in table some differences between respect to changes in the level of gdp and india the least price competition was at its most acute in canada argentina and the united states though seemingly less of a pressing issue in australasia and british india variation is also found in the ra elasticities of demand which range from in new zealand to in the united states thus according to these estimates the growth of british exports to new zealand the country unresponsive to alterations in the imperial advantage that the british experienced there this anding emphasizes the need to draw a distinction between the level and the rate of change in the ra of any particular empire market conversely the united states relatively high ra elasticity of demand indicates not an american preference for british wares per se but the fact that commercial policies and industrial development in non empire markets also of british exporters to penetrate different markets the degree of advantage enjoyed in a market is neither an attribute restricted to formal and informal empire nor one that can be truly studied in isolation finally the coefficients on the dummy variables in each regression suggest that structural realignments of the global economy especially between and and after had major these findings are also consistent with the belief that the overvaluation of the pound between and had a negative impact on british exporters during this how important were non market advantages to britain s drift toward certain empire markets after the estimates of longrun elasticity derived from table and the growth rates of each of the key variables permit a determination of the approximate contribution in each of the six markets considered for different periods these estimations are presented in tables through to the periods reported have been chosen because they represent intervals of either uninterrupted growth or decline in british export volumes to those markets since these contributions are calculated on the basis of estimated elasticities and average growth rates they cannot figures presented give a clear indication of the relative contribution of the different variables to british export growth four stories emerge from tables to in the australasian markets gdp growth accounted for the vast majority of british import growth until indeed between and gdp was over fifteen times more important in new zealand and
the pointcheval stern reduction is the random oracle assumption bad for practice to random functions intuitively this seems like a reasonable thing to do after all in practice a well constructed hash function would never have any features that distinguish it from random functions that an attacker could exploit however over the years many researchers have expressed doubts about the wisdom of relying on the random oracle model for example canetti et al constructed examples of cryptographic schemes that are provably secure under the random model but are insecure in any real world implementation even though their examples were contrived and unlike any system that would ever be designed in practice many felt that this work called into question the reliability of security results based on the random oracle assumption and showed a need to develop systems whose security is based on weaker assumptions about the hash function thus the cramer shoup encryption scheme in section aroused great interest at the time was a practical system for which a reductionist security argument could be given under a weaker hash function assumption recently bellare et al obtained a striking result they constructed an example of a type of cryptographic system that purportedly is practical and realistic and that has a natural and important security property under the random oracle model but not with any concrete hash function the aim of and was to bring concerns raised by work closer to practice and thereby show that in real world cryptography it might be wise to replace cryptosystems whose reductionist security depends on the random oracle assumption by those whose security argument uses a weaker hash function model in this section we look at the construction in and and explain why we believe that the papers support a conclusion that is exactly the opposite of that of the authors the setting in and is a hybrid system this means asymmetric encryption scheme is used to establish a common key for a certain symmetric encryption scheme after which messages can be sent back and forth the efficiently using the symmetric system hybrid systems are important in real world cryptography in fact most electronic commerce and other secure internet communications use such a system for example and merchant after which a credit card number and other sensitive information are transmitted quickly and securely using a symmetric encryption method with the session key it is important to note that in practice the symmetric and asymmetric systems must be constructed independently of one another in remark of it is emphasized that both the keys and the hash function that are used in the symmetric system must have no connection with any keys or hash functions in the public key system otherwise a symmetric and an asymmetric system might be insecure together even if they are each secure in isolation this observation generalizes to a fundamental principle of sound cryptographic practice for a hybrid system none of the parameters and none of the ingredients in the construction of one of the two systems should incorporate elements of the other system an essential way on a violation of this principle namely inside the private key encryption algorithm is a step involving verification of a valid key and valid cipher text for the public key system that is the argument in fails completely if the above principle of sound cryptographic practice is observed this is clear from remark in where the authors explain the central role played by the public key verification steps in their private thus one way to interpret their result is that it serves merely as a reminder of the importance of strictly observing the above principle of independence of the two parts of a hybrid system however we believe that there is a much more interesting and valuable conclusion to be drawn the inability of the authors of to obtain their results without using a construction that violates standard cryptographic practice could be interpreted as evidence in support of the random our reasoning here is analogous to what one does in evaluating the real world intractability of a mathematical problem such as integer factorization or the elliptic curve discrete logarithm problem if the top experts in algorithmic number theory at present can factor at most a bit rsa modulus then perhaps we can trust a bit modulus if the best implementers of elliptic curve discrete logarithm algorithms have been able to attack at most a bit then perhaps we can have confidence in a bit group size by the same token if one of the world s leading specialists in provable security puts forth his best effort to undermine the validity for practical cryptography of the random oracle assumption and if the flawed construction in is the best he can do then perhaps there is more reason than ever to have confidence in the random oracle what about other papers that call the random oracle model into question in all cases the constructions are at least as far removed from real world cryptography as the one in and we briefly discuss a recent example of this type of work that is concerned with signatures rather than encryption in and goldwasser and tauman claim to have found a difficulty with pointcheval and stern s use of the random oracle assumption to show security of signature schemes the method of fiat and shamir that is suppose that we have an identification protocol this means that alice proves her identity to bob by sending him a message a then receiving from him a random sequence and finally responding with a sequence that bob is convinced only alice could have sent in an in it is shown that if the identification protocol is secure in a strong sense then the corresponding signature scheme is secure against chosen message attack under the random oracle model in and goldwasser and tauman show that a certain modification of the and this anyone can do since is computed by a publicly known algorithm the main
government decision makers from different government tiers common pool them when making independent tax and expenditure decisions problems when it comes to the enforcement of implicit contracts between the government and private investors and moral hazard problems from joint accountability of politicians from different vertical tiers these problems affect a country s attraction as a location for fdi in several ways suppose governments are tempted to extract revenue from existing investment projects that are owned by foreigners if governments tiers are able to extract revenue from the same investment project a common pool problem emerges that may increase the amount of extractive activity governments may also subsidize or make bids for attracting investment projects that are future targets for extractive policy or benefit the host country in other ways if local regional and federal governments can make such bids they may free ride on one another at the end of the day only empirical evidence can tell whether and its different dimensions has positive or negative effects on the level of fdi inflows our econometric analysis provides novel evidence in this respect introducing measures of decentralization in a knowledge capital model and using firm data on cross border acquisitions our findings suggest in line with our theoretical perspective that a one dimensional and positive view of decentralization is not appropriate employing various decentralization measures in our we derive insights as to which aspects of decentralization are conducive to fdi and which turn out to be rather problematic the vertical dimension of decentralization measured by the number of government tiers in a country is found to affect fdi negatively on the other hand fiscal decentralization can have significant positive effects expenditure decentralization is found to be correlated with more fdi while revenue decentralization appears to on fdi our results are highly relevant for policy makers as policy reforms that change the degree of decentralization of governance have been high on the policy agenda both for the developed and the developing world poor economic performance of many developing countries is often attributed to the failure of centralized bureaucracy and centralized decision making and many consultants advocate decentralization of policy decision making as a way to sustain or increase growth and prosperity decentralization is also a frequent advice given by international organizations substantial resources have been geared towards programs that promote decentralization of policy decision making recently for instance the oecd the world bank the council of europe the open society institute the undp and us aid have joined forces and introduced the fiscal decentralization initiative to assist developing countries in carrying out intergovernmental reforms the of this initiative are to encourage local democracies to improve the capacity of local governments to plan and administer expenditures and raise revenues and to support local governments in their efforts to become more responsive and accountable this tendency is expected to continue well into the future practitioners and academics have not been unaware of potential pitfalls of decentralization for example the world bank states that sub national governments governance problems and in some contexts may be more vulnerable to them than national authorities similarly bardhan and mookherjee discuss the incidence of corruption in centralized and decentralized systems from our perspective the question whether local or central governments are more corrupt easier captured better informed etc is only one aspect of the decentralization debate albeit an important one still our this view remains incomplete it is not sufficient to consider just the incentives and capabilities of each individual government we stress that the distribution of power responsibilities and accountability across different government levels within a federal system has important effects these effects interact and typically reinforce the governance problems that exist at each individual level of government this paper is not the first to highlight problematic aspects of decentralization and that tries to single out more precisely the specific conditions and institutional provisions that are necessary for federalism to unleash its potential for improving the countries economic performance for instance an important feature of the usual efficiency argument for decentralization is that it is developed in a system within which there is a clear division of powers between the different government tiers in which all spillovers including vertical fiscal externalities are assumption or are contracted away vertical fiscal externalities have recently been identified as a source of inefficiency in the context of tax competition and it has been argued that they are difficult to avoid even if seemingly different tax bases are assigned to different tiers of government and regardless whether politicians and bureaucrats are assumed to be benevolent or treisman has put forward a number of further arguments why decentralization may lead to a less satisfactory performance and cai and treisman show that the disciplinary effect of inter regional competition even where it could be at work in principle may lead to adverse effects if regions are asymmetric making some of them drive out all mobile capital and specialize on a high level of oppression this and other consequences of a federal also reduce fdi decentralization and foreign direct investment the analysis of the benefits and costs of decentralization has generated a number of important general insights we provide a brief overview in box while the conclusions from this work also have a bearing on countries ability to attract fdi we seek to go beyond these established results and to dwell deeper into the specific relationship between decentralization and the attractiveness of host countries for investors in particular we focus on two questions first can the potentially beneficial effect of inter regional fiscal competition really unfold its effectiveness on fdi second are there potentially harmful effects of the vertical dimension of decentralization on fdi and how do they operate the nature of fdi and the hold up problem consider the timing of decision making between the investor and the government which creates what is called the hold up problem in the context of fdi an investor can freely choose where to locate its fdi once the investment is
system might be built and deliberately so as many of these constellations were believed to be too divisive the elites we might say were successful not because they chose a structure that served their interests but because they set up an arena for the sorts of fights they wanted to have and could have within the framework of a nation the arrangement of states in our last period is not an arrangement of alliances or coalitions it is however an arrangement in terms of state level differences of these elites what was the basis for the party division it would be absurd to derive an argument from our simple figures indeed this is a question that still leads to debate among specialists but it is interesting that participants themselves concluded that it was if anything about aristocracy as always one is confronted here with the maddening combination of accuracy slander and that participants themselves concluded that it was if anything about aristocracy as always one is confronted here with the maddening combination of accuracy slander and convenience that always comes with political ideologies while no federalist would claim to be for aristocracy many were deeply troubled at the demagoguery of their opponents and the rising disinclination to attend to common principles of gentlemanly dignity thus there may be an element of truth to the importance of aristocracy on the other hand one could not escape noticing that poor farmers and seamen might support the federalists while the most highborn scions of the idle rich might be leaders of the anti aristocratic factions of the republicans perhaps the best we can say is that aristocracy became a useful way of describing the emerging patterns of alliances no more or less useful than other simple cultural devices that allowed political actors to get a handle on the divisions in the polity such as francophiles versus anglophiles or republicans versus federalists substantive considerations involved issues of taxes trade debt foreign alliances and western expansion these issues varied in the way they cut through the different dimensions on which the polity might be structured such as regional location geographic position economic base ethnic and religious backgrounds and the convention coming from the aggregation of individuals who shared some interests or ideals and not others would tend to reflect state level interests this same premise holds true when we move from the convention to congress the future locus of party formation in congress state level interests were both weighty in the minds of delegates and politically divisive for example some states had incurred large amounts of debt during the war of independence unlike the other large were both weighty in the minds of delegates and politically divisive for example some states had incurred large amounts of debt during the war of independence unlike the other large southern states south carolina had an outstanding debt and so would tend to favor a plan whereby the federal government assumed responsibility for states debts south carolina also differed from the other large states because it had georgia to its immediate west it had no substantial claims to western the other large colonies whose western borders were unfixed and had conflicting claims to land consequently saw their relationship to the federal government through the prism of their putative land rights it is in hindsight therefore not surprising that south carolina joined the emerging federalist side with a little effort a similar story could probably be told for each state it is would be nearly a decade before the set of issues that would orient the first party system was finally defined the act of constitution writing had already put important boundaries on this set because the constitution settled questions regarding representation and slavery for at least the immediate future these issues did not become pivotal for the emerging party system when they eventually did become unsettled they provoked a constitutional crisis for at least the immediate future these issues did not become pivotal for the emerging party system when they eventually did become unsettled they provoked a constitutional crisis that led to a civil war we see the emergence of the future party system in the final period of the constitutional convention and only then because many of the previously divisive issues had already been resolved parties were and we argue are established in reference to a particular institutional defines interests conditional on possible alliances and avenues of future political action production regimes and the quality of employment in europe introduction in the continuing debate between universalist theories of convergence and neoinstitutionalist theories of difference in in the late this came of age primarily from the mid to late by howell was able to argue that in the analysis of the institutional organization of capitalism the varieties of capitalism approach has achieved a level of theoretical sophistication explanatory scope and predictive ambition that has rapidly made such as sex inequalities in employment its arguments have become steadily more pivotal to discussions about differences in european social structure theories of production regimes are perhaps most naturally seen as heirs of the corporatism tradition but shifting the focus from national level to meso or on the characteristics of welfare states theories of production systems underlined the central importance of patterns of employer coordination and the structure of skill formation regimes in creating distinctive country patterns of economic organization the central argument is that quite different employment dynamics can be found between capitalist societies depending on the way that firms try to solve their coordination problems with respect to industrial relations vocational training corporate governance interfirm relations and the cooperation of their employees very broadly it is suggested that competitive market arrangements and coordinated market economies which depend more heavily on nonmarket arrangements although there are variants of coordinated market economies those in which coordination takes place through the industrial sector are characteristic of certain european societies within a distinction could be drawn between a centralized egalitarian model of coordination more characteristic
of anthropological tendencies to disregard christianity for they have asserted that conversion is not a significant analytic category in its own right they essentially level four arguments against it first it is a theological construct borrowed in most cases from christian ideology second it conflates individual with cultural change third it reifies that may in some ways contest or complicate it and fourth it is bound up with the western notion of the autonomous economic individual who chooses where to spend his or her resources in this case spiritual in this last respect the notion of conversion is western ideology plain and simple and to dress it up as an analytic category or explanatory always been part of its apparatus of cultural coercion i am not inclined to disagree with any of the comaroffs four charges against the notion of conversion it is after all a cultural notion with a particular history but even if all these charges are true that does not mean that people might not pick up the christian notion of conversion and come to see and collective history as we have seen furthermore in the wake of conversion they have reified a realm of christian religion taken to be apart from the rest of their culture and they have begun in complex and contested ways to develop a sense of individual autonomy their experience of conversion thus presents the very qualities guide change and the perception of it where the notion of conversion has taken root as it has in urapmin we will need some analytic notion that highlights people s investment in discontinuity if we are to make comparative observations and develop theoretical accounts of how such ideas operate when people adopt them whether or not we keep the term conversion to label that analytic notion we must be careful turning from anthropological skepticism about conversion to that concerning millenarianism we can note that the problem millenniarianism presents for continuity thinking is different from the one presented by conversion faced with conversion what anthropologists tend to doubt is that the changes that have occurred are as radical as converts claim in the millenarian case what is suspect is people s assertion relationship to today the upshot of anthropologists doubts on this score is that for them only people who participate full time in radical millenarian movements count as committed millenarians everyone else is when it comes to their millenarian beliefs just toying with the idea of radical change we can move beyond this narrow view by recognizing a kind of everyday millenarianism times in which they seem to be part of millennial movements and during times in which they might be described as simply living their daily lives i have made this argument more fully elsewhere and do not want to rehearse it here rather i want to point out that the general incredibility of millenarian statements another way to ignore christians claims to be living in discontinuous time and thus to assert the insubstantial nature of their christian commitments and as fabian has it the superiority of the anthropologists own view of time and change we might summarize the argument i have been making about time by saying that anthropologists assume that people s a medium in which the continuity of belief unfolds christians by contrast tend to imagine their religion as historically constituted by jesus s rupturing of earthly time by his birth and by the deep rent this eventually made in the fabric of jewish belief moreover they expect such change to occur in their own experience at conversion and again at the second coming since these christian ideas it is hardly surprising that anthropologists have been quick to argue that christians claims as regards these matters are false even about their own lives and therefore that people who make the truth of such claims a criterion of their christianity are not really christian at all or are not primarily or coherently so in the summary i have just presented i indicated that in what anthropologists refer to when they make assertions about the non christian character of particular peoples even if such people engage in what appear to be christian ritual practices they do not really believe in christianity the argument goes or their christian beliefs are only lightly held or their real coherently organized beliefs are traditional in the next section i look at both anthropological reliance on continuity thinking we need to reconsider them just as we have our notions of time i have discussed elsewhere the ways in which i think the anthropology of islam can serve as something of a model for a nascent anthropology of christianity my point is not that all anthropologists of islam agree on a single definition of the object they are studying or that they share a single approach to it but that in spite dominant approach they have managed to develop a productive comparative conversation that crosscuts regions and diverse islamic traditions a good indication of the comparatively inchoate state of the anthropology of christianity can be found in the titles of several of the chapters the anthropology of religion part of the handbook entitled little and great traditions includes the following four chapters the anthropology of islam hinduism in context approaching a religious tradition through external sources buddhist communities historical precedents and ethnographic paradigms and the pilgrimage to magdalena it is not hard to see which of these things is not like the others in its lack of ambition to represent by a well formed subdiscipline such avoidance has until recently been commonplace in melanesia the region i know best and is amply attested in conversation with anthropologists who have worked there it would be interesting to collect similar oral historical evidence from other regions but even in the absence of positive evidence the relative lack until quite recently of ethnographies focused on the religious lives of christians in many areas in in other places as well anthropologists interested in religion
the chosen pastes and the wn of the pastes made with cm of which were cured for a much longer duration the experimentally modified pastes respectively it can be seen that the overall degrees of hydration are lower for most of the modified pastes this could be easily explained using eq the first term on the right hand side of this equation is reduced because of the reduced cement content and since wn of the replacement material is lower than that of cement the second term is not able to compensate for the reduction plateaus after days for the fly ash modified pastes the values are found to increase which is expected predicting degrees of hydration using the model the total non evaporable water contents of the pastes have been determined experimentally and shown in fig and the bogue composition of the cement calculated using the oxide contents along with the reported chemically bound water content of cement which for this cement is the ultimate non evaporable water content of fly ash is taken as though it can be seen from fig that the non evaporable water contents of glass powder modified pastes are higher than those of fly ash modified pastes it is mostly the result of enhancement in cement hydration and not necessarily due to increased secondary reaction of glass powder hence the glass powder is also assumed to be it is well known that fly ash hydration in cement pastes begins only after a certain period of time hence values are taken as zero until days so that eq is simplified after that the pozzolanic reaction is mainly responsible for the change in nonevaporable water content hence from eq mr similarly for glass powder modified pastes fig little indication of secondary reaction hence the values for those mixtures at those times can be neglected since the mass fraction of the replacement material also is lower the term rmr is very small comparison of the measured and predicted degrees of hydration a comparison of the experimentally determined and predicted even though the predicted values are lower than the measured degrees of hydration by about one reason for this could be the following for experimentally determined degrees of hydration the values of the pastes are divided by wn of high cm pastes at complete hydration at this time the hydration of the cementing materials is not complete in the high cm paste as evidenced by a measured non evaporable instead of the value being closer to thus leading to lower wn values and consequently higher measured degrees of hydration of the pastes at varying ages the assumptions used in arriving at the values of and in the model could have also contributed to the discrepancy using the experimentally obtained value of in eq instead of has been found to bring the data points of a fine glass powder on cement hydration the pozzolanicity of the cement replacement materials the alkali release characteristics from glass powder and the non evaporable water contents of the hydrated pastes were experimentally determined a model has been developed to predict the degree of hydration of pastes containing supplementary cementing materials or hydration enhancing fillers of fly ash at all the ages studied the strength activity index of a coarser variety of glass powder was also investigated so as to bring out the changes in pozzolanic behavior of the glass powder with change in particle sizes using flame emission spectroscopy and electrical conductivity studies it has been shown that the glass powder releases only early age strength of cement pastes as was observed from a companion study in general the non evaporable water contents of modified pastes were found to be lower than that of the plain paste the glass powder modified pastes showed higher non evaporable water contents than the fly ash modified pastes of the same replacement level of cement because of the enhancement in cement hydration as a result of enhancement in cement hydration and the hydration of the cement replacement material this term serves as an indicator of the combined effects of enhancement in cement hydration in a paste modified with a filler and the secondary hydration in a paste modified with a pozzolanic material and can be used as an index for the efficiency of any cement replacement material in the paste system a contributing in the matrix this is observed for pastes modified with high replacement levels of glass powder where as pastes with low replacement levels show beneficial effect it is seen that the values of fly ash modified pastes increase after days indicating secondary reaction a model based on a mixture equation is developed in this paper to determine the combined degree of hydration of pastes of plain and modified pastes at various ages the ultimate non evaporable water contents of the replacement materials and the mass fraction of the replacement materials are the only parameters required to predict the combined degree of hydration degrees of hydration determined from the model agree well with those measured experimentally abstract this article addresses the problem of a traffic network design problem under demand uncertainty the origin destination trip matrices are taken as random variables with known probability distributions instead of finding optimal network design solutions for a given future scenario we are concerned with solutions that are in some sense good for a variety of demand realizations ner s required degree of robustness we propose a formulation of the robust network design problem and develop a methodology based on genetic algorithm to solve the rndp the proposed model generates globally near optimal network design solutions based on the planner s input for robustness the study makes two important contributions to the network design them could potentially underestimate the network wide impacts second systematic evaluation of the performance of the model and solution algorithm is introduction network design is pervasive in many application contexts due to its ability to influence the full hierarchy of strategic tactical and operational decision
suggest that the flow of goods and services between households may be governed by several mechanisms figure proportional balance and giving intensity consume are provided by other households and our analysis suggests that to some extent reciprocal altruism governs these exchanges we feel that meal sharing may not be intelligible without reference to the entire web of exchanges that occur in ye kwana society as noted above garden labor and childcare are governed by kinship other collaborative activities such as house and canoe construction are common as well as food transfers between households from hunting fishing gardening and gathering trade may underlie reciprocal altruism given the multiple ways in which individuals assist one another more to the point we feel that future researchers need to focus on all relevant exchanges of resources and services in their evaluation of evolutionary models of exchange this will undoubtedly prove to be a difficult task requiring refined methods and a broader consideration of giving and receiving and relevant time periods open boundaries the long term development of a peasant community in rural mexico wolf s dichotomy between open and closed corporate communities has become axiomatic for the study of social organization in rural communities in mesoamerica in this paper i argue that this dichotomy is of limited use for vital dynamics behind the evolution of social groups typically classified by anthropologists as peasants to overcome the conceptual limitation of wolf s original classification i propose a network model that focuses on social relations this approach can more adequately capture the variability and complexity we observe in everyday practice in rural communities in past and contemporary times the paper examines aspects of the social organization of bel a rural mexico using data from parish registers and two ethnographic surveys i demonstrate how the social networks of compadrazgo and marriage can be reconstructed back into the seventeenth century since the beginning of the eighteenth century bel os have formed most of their compadrazgo relationships with people from outside indicating that social boundaries had started to collapse long before industrialization led to the change was a severe epidemic shock these findings have substantial theoretical implications for the model of peasant society commonly applied in mesoamerica especially for earlier historical periods when blom and la farge returned from their expedition to southern mexico and guatemala in they wrote with surprise that the tribes they had found were very different from those which anthropologists had studied before kinship it in non western societies and the group was bound simply by similar customs common interests and geographical proximity tax followed this line of thought and concluded that the territorial unit would be a more appropriate focus for ethnographic description and analysis than kinship structures in the and redfield and camara were the first to offer an analytic typology to compare local communities redfield s rural urban continuum and camara s classification of centrifugal versus centripetal villages were attempts to develop a comparative basis for the study of social organization in mesoamerica the concept of the closed corporate community introduced by eric wolf resembles these earlier terminologies although wolf builds on many ideas of his intellectual predecessors he goes a step further he takes history into account and asks how these types of social organization wolf defined the closed corporate community as a bounded social system with clear cut limits in relation to both insiders and outsiders those limits correspond to the territorial boundaries they enable the community to resist external penetration by the state and guarantee the highest possible level of internal integration in most of his analysis wolf focuses on the economy and political relations with the outside world as closed corporate communities almost sounds nostalgic when it comes to a migration shaken country like mexico today global flows of people goods and money shape the social organization of most rural communities in mesoamerica most communities are deterritorialized and situated at the intersection of experiences both in the us and mexico the aim of this paper is to trace back of moving connecting and sharing in so doing i highlight a dimension of community that wolf and others largely neglected social relations and social networks i tackle the question of whether our understanding of the long term development of the community changes when compadrazgo and kinship are given equal weight in the analysis my analysis reveals that community edges were blurred long before epidemics and mortality shocks are crucial events that explain these early openings of the community boundaries recent research on the nature of epidemics suggests that their impact on social economic and religious organization has long been underestimated moreover epidemics seem to elicit quite similar patterns of response across different spatial and temporal scales historians have shown that the black death of new economic and demographic regimes but also changed the academic landscape of europe by shifting the focus away from bologna and paris to universities emerging north of the alps and east of the rhine anthropologists investigating hiv aids and social transformations in different regions of sub saharan africa observe that family organization inheritance and ritual practices are undergoing similar changes in oleke blystad and rekdal i present my argument in eight sections after a brief introduction focusing on the mesoamerican community model and the study of communities as networks i review the basic characteristics of the three most fundamental social institutions in many mesoamerican communities the cargo system compadrazgo and kinship the next section provides a brief ethnographical and historical introduction to bel the which the fieldwork was conducted the following section lays down the historical and ethnographical data that describe the integration of the community from the late seventeenth century until once these patterns are established i show that the two waves of opening up of the community go hand in hand with two demographic crises in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries the results and their consequences for our understanding of the community and processes of social change in general are discussed in the conclusion
ultimately self interests this is true but strong reciprocity is not self regarding behavior at all although it may maximize inclusive fitness which is a completely different matter a parent who sacrifices for its offspring is not exhibiting enlightened self interest for example unless one wants to redefine self interest to mean anything with which one shares if costly other regarding preferences have evolved in response to selection then somehow or another they are ultimately in the constrained relative self interests of the individuals who express these traits this is exactly what i am asserting is not the case the analytical empirical bases of the traditional bias of biologists against multi level selection in general and gene culture coevolution in particular getty goes on to say that hagen and hammerstein provide a critique of gintis s interpretation of the seemingly selfless behavior of human subjects in contrived experimental games however hagen and hammerstein do not claim to provide a critique rather they entertain alternative interpretations to our results and suggest future research that might resolve these issues nor do important point where he quotes me as saying a moral sense helps us be reasonable prosocial and prudential concerning our long term interests and says that this seems like a sensible hypothesis to him the paper that attempts to make this point however does not conclude that our moral sense is limited to defending our longterm and enlightened self interests gene culture coevolutionary theory is incorrect he observation of such behavior is not a sufficient basis on which to conclude that the behavior evolved for the purpose of producing a fitness damaging outcome first i do not believe and i did not argue that behavior evolves for a purpose second i did not argue that strong reciprocity is fitness damaging i argued that it is other regarding and i behavior third as i explained above adaptations cannot be on balance fitness damaging to the genes that account for the behavior although they may reduce the fitness of some individuals who carry the adapted genotype price et al following the cosmides tooby paradigm in evolutionary psychology are hostile to gene culture coevolutionary theory and indeed to any model of selection above cannot be adaptations but rather are fitness reducing behaviors due to novel environments they compare the other regarding behaviors exhibited in laboratory settings to environmental novelty alone giving the example of pornography this is quite a poor example first the capacity to be motivated by artificial visual material may well be an adaptation as to why strong reciprocity is an adaptation based on our understanding of the organization of social life in pleistocene hunter gatherer groups based on the neuroanatomy of the human prefrontal cortex the orbitofrontal cortex and the superior temporal sulcus and based on our understanding of the physiological basis of human emotions the evolutionary psychology critique we are all evolutionary psychologists but we do not all subscribe to the particular set of doctrines espoused by tooby cosmides these authors recognize the many communalities between my framework and the ideas they developed in their seminal work my proposed framework al that the fruit of their labors are necessary and sufficient to unify the behavioral sciences the ep evolutionary psychology framework they write is an encompassing framework for unifying the behavioral sciences this is not the case the claim of universality for evolutionary psychology ep flows from the virtually exclusive value its proponents explanatory mechanism adaptation by natural selection assert price et al is a necessary and sufficient framework for unifying the social and natural sic sciences they do not attempt to justify this assertion and indeed i do not believe it can be justified for one thing many behavioral disciplines stress proximate causality and are indifferent to ultimate issues unless in how things work not how they got that way evolutionary theory is incapable even in principle of supplying answers to such proximate questions for another human society is a complex adaptive system with the emergent properties and forms of stochasticity that defy explanation in terms of natural selection alone the evolutionary psychologists working in the tradition framework by identifying it with the bpc model despite the fact that i clearly state that it is one of several fundamental unifying principles the bpc model should not be compared with these authors adaptationist program for the simple reason that the former deals with proximate and the latter with ultimate causality tooby cosmides claim that evolution created by the bpc model they suggest that computational descriptions of these evolved programs are the genuine building blocks of behavioral science theories because they specify their input output relations in a scientific language that can track their operations precisely this is incorrect if payoffs to various decisions are frequency dependent this generalized capacity for solving novel problems allows experimentalists to vary the parameters that summarizes their decision making structures the extreme modularity proposed by ep is an impediment to ep serving as a bridge across disciplines past attempts at a unification of the behavioral sciences my proposed unification project accepts and respects that the various behavioral disciplines define their particular of interdisciplinary consistency currently not met generally this is in the area of human decision making and strategic interaction while my concept of unification is limited to providing interdisciplinary consistency its major value is likely to be the increase in explanatory power of both trans and intradisciplinary work some commentators hold a different ironclad commitment to a methodology that prevents valid generalization i argue that no single methodological commitment is sufficient to unify a set of disciplines that have conflicting models of human behavior colman offers the theory of operant conditioning as an alternative i cannot conceive of how this principle might resolve conflicts among the disciplines as candidates i did not include these thinkers because their model of the individual does not so much solve as sweep under the table the contradictions among models of decision making and strategic interaction by asserting the standard
there have been very few studies of children s development of the prosodic properties of sign language over reduplication of signs by children is a common occurrence through the addition of reduplications to single movement and multiple movement signs clibbens and harris noted that children sometimes improved on a sign form making it more like the adult target over the series of additional reduplications turning to the present study we ask how theoretical models of sign language phonology shed light on developmental data and also how developmental processes in children s first signs compare with those previously described for the development of first words of data collection had no other siblings all of gemma s grandparents are hearing she was identified as deaf in the first weeks of life through targeted screening this meant that her parents knew from the outset that their child was deaf and used bsl with her from birth onward at the start of data collection gemma was months old and had attended a private nursery days a week from the age of months the staff had a developing vocabulary of bsl signs and used these to gemma although there are no available norms for bsl development for a child of this age her language at months was similar to other reported studies for same age deaf children learning asl and also similar to typically developing hearing children acquiring spoken language gemma received regular assessments by speech and language therapists who reported no intellectual or social impairments ages of and months was recorded in the family home with recordings each of min the language sample consisted of a total of sign tokens all of these data were based on naturalistic interaction between the child and her mother in free play a general methodological issue in sign language acquisition research is what should be counted as a sign and what is nonlinguistic gesture a sign whereby manual productions are evaluated on form semantic content linguistic content the child s age and native signer intuition data coding took place in two rounds all possible signs were identified with times on the videotape recorded once the child s signs were identified they were then described with respect to the three main phonological segments as well as coding for the timing and reduplication of the sign any differences between the adult target and the child s sign were noted using a written shorthand description of the child coding of handshape features was based on kyle and woll and throughout the coding of handshape description was phonologically based codes were used that most matched the child s form rather than creating extra phonetic labels for every possible configuration between a and a handshape for example the mother s sign bird is produced with an index finger and thumb closing movement at the nose were several differences to this target which were recorded as in table as convention intercoder reliability was carried out on the data and agreement was established at over coders discussed any disagreements until a consensus was reached if this was not possible the form was discounted results handshape development varied greatly across the child s data several attempted target handshapes were never used appropriately by the child during the period of data collection figures for each type of handshape are shown in table the unmarked bsl handshapes and the neutral handshape were the most frequently attempted and produced most appropriately by the one to one substitutions of handshapes for example g always for h substitutions fell within groups this pattern is shown in table movement development gemma changed the target movement of her signs in three ways by using a different path of movement by changing the sign s hand internal movement and by changing the combination of path and hand internal movements each of these is described in turn path changes there were signs with changes in the movement signs with complex circular movement were produced least accurately across the data table shows the range of movement paths that gemma used in her first signs as well as the frequency and appropriateness of each movement there were signs in the corpus that required a primary hand internal movement but no path movement nearly half of these were produced differently to the adult target by the child the most frequent type of target hand internal movement attempted was open close but the hand internal movement wrist bend was most accurately used by the child child errors were through omissions proximalizations and substitutions gemma s overall use of hand internal movements is shown in table path and secondary hand internal movement combination changes gemma attempted signs that required a simultaneous path and hand internal movement in of the signs gemma made an error compared with the adult target and the rest were produced correctly the error types observed were through the child producing the two components sequentially rather than simultaneously producing one movement appropriately but not both or components inappropriately the numbers of signs produced with different types of errors are shown in figure location this was the most accurate part of the child s signs and produced with only errors or signs this is somewhat higher than in reported asl data within these sign errors through enlargement of the location from the target to the child form for example from the a rate difficulty in getting the location correct varied systematically the neck with a small size of target space and minimum visual feedback for the child was the most difficult prosodic structure reduplication many of gemma s signs were produced with the unadultlike addition of reduplication signs that in the adult target had one movement two or three identical movements for example horse or bird were also produced with reduplications of the whole sign from the signs there was an improvement in the sign s target form during the reduplications in only cases and conversely in cases the over reduplication caused the sign s form to deteriorate compared to the target timing we observed
fig the contact experiences the pve regime first and then moves to the pvr regime instead of the ivr regime the two charts give different results in the observed hl region to further identify the pizeoviscous effect in the observed hl region the variations of the measured minimum thickness hmin and the central film thickness in fig line a represents the minimum film thickness under ivr conditions according to eq line represents that under the pvr regime according to eq line is the minimum film thickness under pve conditions according to eq line d is the minimum film thickness along the center line in the pve regime according to eq line represents the be clearly seen that the measured hmin versus ue consists of two line segments of different slopes in the pve regime the measured minimum film thickness is always larger than that of line which is attributed to the fact that the measured minimum film thickness is the minimum film thickness along the centerline whereas line from eq is the minimum film thickness for the whole contact line d and it presents a speed exponent larger than that in the measurement when the speed enters zone iii the measured minimum thickness occurs between lines a and the speed exponents of eqs and and are quite different and therefore the speed exponent is used as a criterion to distinguish the pvr regime from the ivr regime the speed exponent of the zone iii is in the pvr regime as predicted by ohno but there is a significant difference between the absolute values of the measured hmin and line this difference can be attributed to the uncertainty of the measurement of pressure viscosity coefficient and the viscosity pressure relationship that was used to formulate eq the variation in the central film thickness with the entrainment of the minimum film thickness it can be divided into three zones i ii and iii in zone i the film thickness changes linearly with the entrainment speed and the contact is in the typical pve regime however when the entrainment speed increases further the surface deformation recovers quickly which leads to a reduction of the film gap when this occurs the region but the central film thickness cannot be predicted by the classical ehl theory with further increases in entrainment speed the minimum film thickness in zone iii occurs at the contact center and the variation of the film thickness is the same as that shown in fig about the central film thickness in the transition region observed in fig not many equations are available in to pvr it can be seen that qualitatively line gives two segments of different speed exponents representing the two lubrication regimes in region i it correlates the measure data well and in region iii the line gives a speed exponent similar to that in the experiment however in the transition region ii line cannot satisfactorily predict the decrease of film thickness varying the loads from to as shown in fig it can be seen that when light loads are applied concentric fringes appear which indicate there is no surface deformation and hl prevails with increasing loads the deformation occurs first at the inlet and then gradually forms a horse shoe shape which indicates ehl the denote the lubrication regime under the conditions in fig as with the solid lines the two regime charts give different results fig shows that the contact is initially in the ivr regime and then changes to the pve regime with increasing loads whereas the chart of ohno finds that the contact starts from the pvr regime and then moves to the pve regime dashed line in figs and some theoretical lines are also plotted for comparison line a is from eq line from eq line from eq lines and from eqs and on a log log scale the measured film thickness can be divided into three zones two of which are linear zones and one is nonlinear zone in zone iii in which the load is light and the surface deformation negligible the minimum the minimum film thickness decreases linearly and the contact is subject to hl in zone ii the load is sufficient to generate evident surface deformation and the minimum film thickness moves away from the center of the contact the central film thickness first decreases and then increases which is attributed to the elastic effect the minimum film thickness and line cannot be used for the film thickness calculation even though the elastic effect still works in zone i the minimum and central film thickness show linear variations with the load and their dependence on the load displays typical ehl characteristics similar to the speed exponent the load exponent defined eq gives a load exponent of and in the pvr regime eq gives a load exponent of in zone iii the measured film thickness has a slope of which indicates that zone i is completely under the pvr regime similar to fig fig also shows that when the lubrication changes from pve to pvr the transition zone reproduce the transition region in that the elastic effect was not been well evaluated the transition zone of the central film thickness was studied under different working parameters and with different lubricants it can be seen from fig that there is only a small difference between and for the same dimensionless load and speed when the load is load under two entrainment speeds using the transition region is also observed the figure demonstrates that the transition region occurs under a heavier load at higher speeds results under sliding conditions in the authors previous studies with the same lubricants it was found that sliding has a significant influence on the film profiles under ehl conditions as a further paper it can be seen from fig that with a slide roll ratio of a shallow inlet dimple and a wedge shaped gap occur rather than the parallel film gap under pure rolling conditions it is
right hand column of fig we can check that the vertical stripe pattern appearing for the hi is not observed anymore however a horizontal band of approximately pixels in vignetting is observed figure shows the average value of each responsivity frame versus the exposure time and the response level now the variation of responsivity is much lower than for the hi case and no hyperbolic dependence appears this is because the nonlinearity related to the exposure time has been a smoother fashion than the hi ones when changing the time of exposure this fact can be checked by comparing the plots of the mean of each frame the variance of the frames also behaves with the same trend it varies from to along the frames for the hi case and it remains stable at a value of approximately for the li data frames in both cases the variance becomes more stable with longer exposure times as we will discuss in subsection this fact has inspired the choice of the last frame of each series of data as the iprnu on the other hand the results obtained from the pca can be used by themselves to describe an alternative way for finding the iprnu with respect to the time of exposure before going into the discussion of the results obtained from the analysis we include a brief description of the pca method further insight into the basics of the method can be found in the literature about multivariate a basic introduction to the principal component data this method has been successfully applied to different kinds of data and scenarios providing physical insight about the origin of a variety of noise contributions and extracting meaningful signals from a wide variety of situations for an imaging system the data are typically formed as a concatenation of frames fi each having exposure time for a constant irradiance the collection of data is arranged as a matrix having columns and rows each column contains the relative photoresponse of all the pixels of the matricial detector for a given exposure time the pca method produces three types of element eigen values eigen vectors and eigen frames variance of the data actually is the variance due to eigen frame the relative importance of an eigen value within the data can be defined as the following percentage the eigen vectors can be seen as the coefficients of the transformation from the correlated variables given describe uncorrelated data that provide spatial insight about the location within the bidimensional ccd arrangement of the different contributions by using the eigen vectors it is possible to change from the frame coordinate system fn to the eigen frame coordinate system an and vice versa this transformation can from eq we can obtain a filtered version of frames by selecting a customized subset of eigen vectors and their associated eigen frames the variance of the original frames can be calculated as a combination of the variances explained by the eigen frames then the variance of frame is given as after including the previous equation into the variance calculation it is possible to move the sum along the pixels labeled with superscripts into the double sum in and the result is given by where we have canceled all the terms having because the associated eigen frames are uncorrelated is a column vector containing the values of the variance of the original frames fi is a column vector containing the eigen values and is a matrix whose elements are the squares of the components of the eigen vectors following the previous derivation we may conclude original frame due only to eigen frame is given as owing to the fact that e the elements of are the relative contributions of the variance of the eigen frames obtained by the pca method to the variance of the original frames invariant photoresponse nonuniformity one of the objectives of this contribution is the estimation we may define the iprnu as the component that remains unchanged along the frames being independent from the exposure time and response level this iprnu is probably attributable to the variation of the external quantum efficiency among pixels that is at work in a previous stage of the charge transfer the iprnu is important because after subtracting it some more also invariant this can be proved as follows the prnu can be expressed as where a represents the standard deviation of a therefore from a iprnu should fulfill the following relation which occurs only at constant now we will see how the pca method can help to the original ones a constant eigen vector will mean a constant contribution moreover the eigen vectors are unitary then the ideal iprnu will be associated with the following eigen vector where is the number of frames and the sign corresponds to the possible orientations of the bisectrix in the dimensional space of frames and in the left hand column of fig from table we see that the iprnu for the hi case explains the variance and as much as the li data set this is by these findings with another more conservative approach to define the iprnu on the other hand we may check that by using only the first two principal components obtained for the hi and li data sets we would be reconstructing by using eq a collection of data explaining approximately the variance of the original data the observed evolution of the frames for an increasing high and low irradiance cases then it also makes sense to define the iprnu as the last spatial distribution for each series of data these last frames are plotted in the last row of fig and they correspond to an exposure time of s and s as an added proof of the iprnu identification we have again applied the pca to a modified set of sets as lf and lf for the hi and li sets respectively this operation is equivalent to the substraction of the iprnu if we define it as the last frame the results obtained from the pca method for these modified
this decomposition may bring adaptivity for the visualization we use the segmentation method presents two distinct complementary steps a region based segmentation which decomposes the object into near constant curvature patches and a boundary rectification based on curvature tensor directions which corrects boundaries by suppressing their artifacts or discontinuities this rectification step which is critical for our fitting algorithm is illustrated in figure and disposition of the segmented regions boundaries are often jagged and present artifacts the rectification algorithm will analyze the coherency between curvature directions of the object and boundaries of the segmented regions to suppress incorrect boundary edges and extend good boundary edges resulting segmented subdivision surface fitting boundaries approximation once the object has been segmented our algorithm approximates the network of patch boundaries with subdivision curves at first pieces of boundary are extracted a piece of boundary is a polyline corresponding to the boundary between two distinct patches then each piece of boundary is approximated with a subdivision curve associated are tagged as sharp to give a control polygon network the purpose of this network is to simplify and optimize the further subdivision surface fitting algorithm this approach bears some similarities with lofting algorithms like that proposed by schaefer et al which aims at building a subdivision surface over a network of curves then considering according to subdivision properties these control polygons will represent the boundaries of the control polyhedron of the approximating subdivision surface subdivision curve presentation a subdivision curve is created using iterative subdivisions of a control polygon in this paper we use the subdivision rules defined for surfaces by hoppe et al for the particular case of sharp or boundary edges new vertices new positions pi for the control points pi are computed using their old values and those of their two neighbors using the mask with these rules the subdivision curve corresponds to a uniform cubic spline except for its end segments we also consider specific rules to handle sharp parts and catmull clark loop or the quad triangle scheme from stam and loop the approximation algorithm this curve fitting algorithm approximates efficiently a polygonal curve with a piecewise smooth subdivision curve while minimizing the control points number it is an extension for subdivision rules including sharp vertex processing analyzing curvature properties of subdivision curves which computes a near optimal evaluation of the number and positions of the control points describing this curve approximation method is beyond the scope of this paper thus we request readers to refer to for complete explanations and details about this algorithm a result is illustrated on figure surface is created for each patch the purpose of the initialization process is dual transmit the topology from the target surface patch to the initial control polyhedron and optimize the connectivity of this control polyhedron regarding the anisotropy of the target surface the initialization algorithm is the following first for each patch the corresponding control polygons representing its boundaries are connect control points from these control polygons in order to create the better set of facets that will represent the initial control polyhedron these edges will be chosen according to the curvature directions of the target patch according to these edges the topology is then reconstructed in a simple and efficient manner a cylinder the curve approximation will produce two square like control polygons for example however since these boundaries are approximated independently nothing guaranties that control polygons are aligned hence we process a synchronization closed control polygons associated with constant curvature target curves are aligned together we rotate them so as to move their first control point to create edges and facets by connecting the boundary control points in such a way that the corresponding created initial subdivision surface is the better approximation of the target surface for these given control points regarding the resulting error for this purpose we consider the lines of curvature of the target surface represented by local directions of minimum and maximum curvature these control lines are strongly linked to the lines of curvature indeed the topology of a control polyhedron will strongly influence the geometry information of the associated limit surface which is also carried by lines of curvature this coherency between control lines and lines of polygons a coherency score is calculated taking into account the coherency of the corresponding potential control line with the lines of curvatures of the corresponding area on the target surface the mechanism is illustrated on figure for each potential edge we consider its vertices and the projections of their respective limit positions on the control line by applying the dijkstra algorithm on the vertices of the target surface finally we consider the curvature tensors of the vertices vi of this path and particularly their curvature directions the coherency score sc for this potential edge is account concerning the nature of vertices vi belonging to the path if vi owns an isotropic curvature tensor hence the directions of curvature do not carry information in these cases cmini and cmaxi are set to to not influence the final score if vi is on a boundary recovering the correct topology for the construction of the initial control polyhedron is not a trivial problem because the target surface patch can have multiple holes alliez et al for topology reconstruction we aim at avoiding such complex processes knowing that moreover parameterization does not always work on surfaces with multiple holes we propose the following solution we create a single oriented contour including every boundary control polygons that we call the topological contour and then we cut this contour along the best edges to recover the correct topological contour topological contour construction the objective is to extract a single oriented contour including every boundary control polygons in the case of a single boundary target surface the determination of the topological contour is automatic however in the case of a multiple boundaries target surface we have several control polygons edges by choosing those associated with smallest scores sc the process is illustrated in
the ssdp esp model which incorporates monthly updates from esp forecasts is superior to other models developed in this study table and fig hence is also likely useful for determining actual operating policy of the three operational objectives minimizing downstream much of total water volume the dams store in october tables and and figs clearly illustrate that downstream water shortages occurring in the simulations are a function of the initial storage volumes of yongdam dam and daecheong dam interestingly it is also apparent from figs and that downstream water shortages occurring in both ssdp models are more sensitive to the initial storage of yongdam dam ie the and indicate that downstream water shortages remain almost the same until the initial storage of daecheong dam at the end of the month flood season drops below million below this storage volume the probability of downstream water shortages increases significantly additionally downstream water shortages decrease gradually as the initial storage volume of yongdam dam increases therefore these results indicate that with greater than million el by the end of the month flood season fig shows the performance difference between ssdp hist and ssdp esp regarding downstream water shortages first differences between the two ssdp models are significant when daecheong dam stores less than approximately million by the end of the month flood season ssdp esp outperforms ssdp hist considerably ie updating the initial storage of yongdam dam ranges from to million and that of daecheong dam is very low fig also presents the reliability of minimum in stream flows at gongju the most important downstream control point in the geum river basin reliability indicates how many times the minimum water supply requirement at gongju is achieved among the simulation results calculating reliability at this downstream previously uses scenarios historical or esp that incorporate lateral inflows from the subbasins as in table fig also demonstrates that ssdp esp is superior to both ssdp hist and ddp ave in this specific criterion comparison between models demonstrates similar results at each of the other three downstream control points of okcheon gyuam and ganggyeong since the performance of the ssdp esp model in actual res this study also analyzes performance of the model given the possibility of variable forecasting accuracy in this inquiry a probabilistic forecasting accuracy measure called the hit score is used because conventional accuracy measures such as bias and mean square error are not suitable for probabilistic forecasts consider that a probabilistic flow forecast is issued every month with occurrence actually occurs during the month where below normal normal or above normal flow then a hit score becomes where pi is the probability assigned to the category in which the flow occurred we also tested two additional accuracy measures such as the half brier score and the ranked probability score but the hit score and the ranked probability score showed a very similar result therefore this study accuracy on the ssdp esp performance we selected two representative drawdown periods the period from october to june period and from october to june period then we examined the forecast accuracies for both periods on a monthly basis within each subbasin a well forecasted month for a subbasin is defined as a month whose hit score is greater than while a poorly forecasted the numbers of well forecasted months for the two periods are and throughout the entire subbasins respectively out of cases months subbasins note that the historical based or naive forecasts are expected to hit times out of because of three flow forecast categories and thus the forecasts for the first period are considerably superior to the historical for period than for period total runoff volumes for the entire geum river system in the well forecasted period and poorly forecasted period are not significantly different ie and million respectively in other words the available water resources in both periods are similar but the forecasting accuracies for the two periods are considerably different shown in table comparing ssdp hist with ssdp esp for two periods with different forecast accuracies the differences of water shortage for two periods between ssdp hist and ssdp esp are and mcm respectively however the differences in deviation from the ending target storage where the penalty in eq was set to half of the water shortage penalty are and mcm respecively more improvement mcm in water shortage against ssdp hist than for the poorly forecasted year mcm in addition the difference in hydroelectric power generation demonstrates that the first period show more improvement gw ph than that for poorly forecasted year as expected therefore sdp esp is more valuable than ssdp hist when the esp forecast is good in addition compared to ssdp of all performance indices although more water resources ie million million million are available for period than period this comparison demonstrates that variability in forecast accuracy may have a considerable effect on operational results conclusion and future studies during the drawdown period in korea monthly esp forecasts are generated using the ssarr rainfall runoff model and then incorporated into the ssdp esp optimization model to derive an on line operating policy the future value function of the ssdp esp model is obtained from the ssdp hist model which employs historical flow scenarios as an off line model in actual operations ssdp hist at the beginning of the drawdown period ie october subsequently the ssdp esp model may be used to update the annual operating policy derived from ssdp hist as new esp forecasts become available at the beginning of every month to alleviate problems consequent from relying on the short record of historical flows in the geum river basin a cross validation each reservoir generating a total of unique simulations in addition deterministic dp models with perfect inflow ddp perf and average inflow ddp ave were developed and compared against the proposed ssdp models performance of the developed dp models are assessed with four criteria size of downstream water shortages total number of downstream water shortages deviations from ending target storage from the
measured as the overall amount of interaction intensity as the kind and formality of interaction for instance i spend percent of my time managing this investment was given a frequency rating of as a measurement of intensity financial reporting was rated on a five point likert scale by contrast having a beer together after the board meeting was rated instances in which the interviewee deemed the relationship to be a close and very intimate friendship were assigned a score of by now i have a quite close relationship with and his wife we go golfing together once in a while and i have also invited them to my place in africa knowledge transfer and creation interviewees were not able to separate clearly between transfer and creation because these concepts are interdependent and reiterative we combined the two aspects interviewees were asked what value added they delivered to their partners and what they or their organizations could learn from or newly develop with the partner when measuring knowledge transfer and creation we focused not only on the transfer of explicit and tacit knowledge but also on the social network ties data new technological and financial information joint workshops and strategic support were categorized as know what experiences skills and procedural knowledge were classified as know how collaboration in terms of common specific products and projects fell into both categories contacts to new or potentially new investors clients suppliers or experts in specific fields new board members key executives and alliance partners were classified as know who in terms of scaling a was given when the respondent was of the opinion that he or she did not learn anything or did not get any relevant or valuable information or contact from the other of know who the prompt read it was terribly disappointing they told us they had many contacts for us but these contacts turned out to be of absolutely no value for us when the interviewee mentioned that almost all relevant contacts came from the other party or that the knowledge exchange with the other party led to a substantial rise in value a was given we the corporation gained an enormous competitive advantage through the collaboration with this pc the corporation does silicium and the pc is responsible for the systems development for our business unit it was extremely interesting to collaborate with this young company because the intention was to discover and enter a completely new market their technological development seemed extremely suitable pc organizational performance we measured performance in terms of sales sales growth return and growth in market share of these measures when applicable about the growth rates in comparison to the previous year and about the business plan for very young pcs hard facts were often not available yet or not particularly meaningful additional information from the interviewee such as the company is developing very well or we expect to break even in milestones are achieved etc was also taken into account and rated for instance pcs that performed badly with no improvement and to insolvency received a rating of pcs with high sales large market shares and even a high return were rated we computed the variable pc organizational performance by using the first component of a principal component analysis that included the three individual performance measures named above independent variables we worked primarily with seven independent variables each one was categorized as either and knowledge relatedness in turn were regarded as constituting relational fit all variables were rated on a five point likert scale social capital structural dimension social networks this dimension pertained to personal contacts with and networks of specialists potential clients suppliers additional financiers and the like to whom direct or indirect access exists we asked about the prevalence of different networks that the partners activated and made the other party a rating of was assigned a statement such as we gave them everything laboratories in our own department contacts to the right business units in the corporation our patents for little money services from our press department simply everything it meant that the overlap between the social networks of cvc and pc was very low that the networks differed substantially by contrast a statement such as even though we did expect them to have more valuable contacts for us we realized they did nt have so much more in this particular field than we had already before was rated a was not assigned relational dimension conative fit we measured statements that reflected a compatibility of intention to interact and either a willingness to cooperate or actual cooperation we paid attention to whether short medium or long term goals and the strategy for the pc s general development were aligned a on the scale was assigned when an interviewee explained he had the impression that conflicting interests and a power game marked the partnership to which he was a party and when they have you in the bag you have to cut your own seat on which you are sitting this is how it works you cannot get out of it anymore you have to dance with the devil by contrast a was assigned when the respondents perceived compatible goals and a strong willingness to cooperate they described their partnership as a marriage where you have to find a compromise and where you do not give up before you find a solution they told us about their impression that they were sitting in the same boat which they wanted to guide into the same harbor and could either succeed or all drown together such as first impression perceived chemistry and sympathy and the question of whether the interviewee could imagine having a relationship with the partner outside this business relationship sentences such as he came in and i had a very bad feeling from the very first moment i do nt know why it was more a gut feeling but i did not like the guy were rated on the scale
material parameters it is possible to however in a complex structure the effective stress depends on the multiaxial stress state fracture criterion and flaw shape the effect of multiaxial stresses on the strength can be predicted by using either the principle of independent action or the weibull normal stress averaging method or batdorf theory eqs and lead to be equal to the area or volume of a tensile specimen subjected to uniform axial tensile stress equal to the maximum effective stress in that component these values can be calculated for a particular geometry loading and weibull exponent using numerical approaches based on a three dimensional stress distribution and the known shape of the probability distribution is the stau software developed by the research center karlsruhe in cooperation with industrial partners including robert bosch gmbh experimental material the investigated material was fabricated using bosch mass production micromechanical processes the bosch achieved using an epitaxial deposition of polysilicon a special bosch trench technique allows the formation of vertical side walls with high aspect ratio in addition to the functional polysilicon layer a second thin poly si layer is deposited underneath and serves as an interconnect or counter electrode the buried poly layer is isolated from the epipoly by the gm thick sacrificial oxide from the substrate no galvanic effects similar take place during etching process a transmission electron microscopy image of the thin polysilicon film can be seen in fig above a seed layer at the interface with the sacrificial layer where the grains are only a few nanometers large the grains grow in a columnar structure nearly perpendicular to the interface with the sacrificial layer with the use of all grains have a out of plane texture strength measurement tensile tests of straight notched and holed tensile specimens the overall shape of the developed tensile test specimen is shown in the scanning electron microscopy image one end of the sample is fixed to the silicon substrate at the beginning and end of the beam is three times bigger than the width of the gage section of the specimen the tensile specimens with a central hole and double half circular notch were fabricated they were gm thick gm wide and gm long the stress distribution calculated with fem is presented in fig the test course the sample is placed on the aluminium holder connected to the horizontally placed piezo displacement unit the pin is connected to the force sensor the displacement unit and the load cell are connected to the pc for controlling of the test and data acquisition with the use of an optical microscope observation and recording of the test is possible the alignments to avoid the parasitic bending by central placement of the pin in the ring the position of the pin in the ring during the initial phase of the test is shown in fig the force is applied parallel to the surface of the chip a typical force displacement record is shown in fig type test samples one end of the sample is anchored to the silicon substrate side in order to obtain different stress profiles in the samples specimens with two different layouts were produced as shown in fig the pad and the ring were designed to enable the force to be applied in the direction parallel to the surface of the sample beams with similar shapes are often used in changes and fracture mechanisms in real sensors the width of test specimens varied between and gm and the radius at the mounting point between and gm the force was applied by displacing the movable ring with a pin placed on a high resolution micro manipulator all measurements were conducted under a microscope which was equipped with a ccd camera allowing for the archiving means of standard graphics software by analyzing the record frame by frame and reading out the position of the vernier scale with a maximum resolution of gm the stress field in the structure was calculated using a finite element model of the tested structure three point bending specimen is gm the described method is one of the simplest ways of testing often used for macroscopic size specimens the polysilicon beam is separated from the foundry die and manually placed with the micromanipulator on the support plate fabricated with fib in silicon wafer the testing load was always applied to the etched side wall of the specimens the stress in the or with the use of an fe model where is the applied force is the maximum bending moment is the half of the specimen s thickness and i is the moment of inertia of cross section results strength measurements results obtained for different test specimens difficult taking into account the difference in size and geometry one can predict the fracture strength of different specimens using the statistical method described in the introduction within this work three different geometries of specimens have been tested in order to estimate the fracture strength of polysilicon with a help of fe models weibull weakest link theory was applied to calculate the characteristic fracture strength and the weibull modulus calculated values including intervals are shown in table the fracture strength for the notch type of shaped specimens is approximately than for the specimens with the smooth anchor type the tensile the middle of the structure show strength in the range of mpa the strength of tested three point bending specimens is in the range of notch structures the weibull modulus calculated for all test specimens varies from to the statistical strength analysis of all specimens has been conducted for an value of taking into account intervals no considerable are various failure criteria for cracks subjected to mixed mode loading available in the literature statistical calculations presented in this work have been based on the empirical criterion of richard implemented in the stau software the equivalent mode i stress intensity factor kieq is given using a criterion for mixed mode failure of the form given in eq the software calculates the effective volume eff and
acting on it in fluid dynamics equations have been developed to quantify the drag forces on smooth circular cylinders which are analogous to hair given by where density of the air vt relative velocity between air and hair for transverse airflow vl relative velocity between air and hair for longitudinal airflow st projected area of hair for transverse airflow dh sl projected area of hair for longitudinal airflow acts related to reynolds number re vl dh where dh the diameter of the hair the viscosity of air is the length of the hair we considered the bending of hair over the yarn is occurring at an angle to the yarn axis as decided by the direction of resultant air velocity so the resultant air velocity is used for transverse drag calculation because of the transverse air drag force acting on a vertical hair is due to the average of these resultant air velocities that is subtracting the value of yarn velocity from this value the relative velocity between air and hair vt can be obtained for the transverse airflow now the hair is folded and lying on the yarn surface force acting on a folded hair over the yarn body is due to the presence of resultant air velocity on the yarn surface under standard testing conditions and hence for a given hair diameter and relative speed between air and hair re can be calculated for the above equations once re is known cd can be for circular cylinders the transverse and longitudinal drag forces acting on hairs at the divergent section of the nozzle is shown in table results and discussion reduction of yarn hairiness is at an angle to the axis of the nozzle at the divergent section termed as direction distance corresponds to the neck of the nozzle distances from to represent the divergent section of the nozzle vry and vrh represent resultant velocity of air acting on yarn surface and at the wall respectively similarly plots are obtained for other nozzles from the neck and up through the divergent section of the nozzle the airflow is in direction that is counter clockwise facing the nozzle exit highest resultant air velocity is found at the neck of the nozzle where the air streams from the four air inlets are issued this implies that yarn and hairs are subjected to maximum drag forces at the neck the drag forces found to decrease drastically from the neck to exit of the nozzle resultant air velocity inside the nozzle is resolved into three components viz axial tangential and radial swirling action is created by the tangential and axial velocity components of air velocity since the resultant air velocity is at an angle to the axis of the nozzle the com ponent of tangential air velocity subjects a twisted yarn and is then followed by untwisting at the divergent section of the nozzle due to this false twisting action of the yarn inside the nozzle yarn retains its original twist majority trailing hairs formed during ring spinning become leading hairs when the yarn goes through the nozzle placed at winding machine during first winding operation the and especially the swirling airflow create sufficient transverse air drag forces on some of the leading hairs folding them over the yarn upon folding them the presence of longitudinal the nozzle due to the action of air vortex hairs are wrapped over the yarn body while the yarn is untwisted reducing yarn hairiness so bending of a hair can be considered as a prerequisite for it to be wrapped over the yarn surface and hence the reduction in yarn hairiness most of on hairs are considerable hairiness length of as spun yarns spun from and denier fibers are and respectively for the as spun yarns as the fibers become coarser the hairiness increases coarser fibers have higher bending and torsional rigidities than the finer fibers rigid fibers have more tendencies to protrude from yarn surface from denier fibers is more than that for the yarn spun from denier fibers the bending and torsional rigidities of the fibers are the major influencing factors contributing to yarn hairiness during spinning optimization of axial angle of air inlets and yarn channel diameter on percentage reduction in values and this reduction in hairiness values is statistically significant the response surface equation for the same is given in table along with the square of correlation coefficients between the experimental values and calculated values obtained from the response surface equations some selective contours using the factorial design are presented in the following sections shows the interactive effect of fiber fineness and air pressure on percentage reduction in hairiness values from that of the corresponding as spun yarns with the increase in fiber denier more reduction in values is observed presence of coarser fibers during yarn formation generates more hairiness yarn spun from coarser fibers presents a greater number of hairs to the airflow inside reduction is observed during nozzle winding for the yarns spun from coarser fibers transverse drag forces acting on hair constituted by fibers of different deniers is shown in figure the calculated diameters of and denier fibers are and gm the transverse drag force acting on a hair constituted by denier fiber is higher in comparison to between and distance along the length of the nozzle as the air velocity is higher in these regions than found in the other regions the transverse drag forces acting on different denier fibers are nearly the same from to planes air drag force acting on a protruding fiber depends on the projected area of the fiber which linearly varies with fiber varies with fiber diameter as the ratio of drag forces acting on a fiber to its bending rigidity this ratio decreases as the fiber becomes coarser indicating the difficulty of bending the fiber hence one would expect a lower percentage reduction in hairiness on yarns spun from coarser fibers provided the transverse air drag forces are insufficient to more hairs
al research the key to the contribution of this study is the quality of the stayers in the sample by ensuring we had a sample being a passing notion we were able to generate the real staying reasons we achieved this in three ways first we stated in both the qualitative and quantitative research that the respondent must choose a service provider they seriously considered leaving second we asked about actions they had taken while they were making the decision to stay or go contacted another service provider friends for recommendations about a new alternative and other things it is important that only thought about switching overall this indicates that the had seriously considered leaving but where they had made the decision to stay this was important as a sample member currently making a decision to leave a service provider would not give us a complete understanding of why the customer stayed with his or her service provider at the end of the survey we asked respondents about the likelihood or somewhat likely to now stay with their service provider only were very likely to leave indicating that for most this switching dilemma was in the past another contribution of this research is to offer a more complete understanding of the switching process roos looked very closely at the switching process and identified that the process embeds an interaction of factors another service provider the pulling determinant is a factor that pulls the customers back to the service provider from which the customer recently switched swaying factors either mitigate or strengthen the switching decision roos s research which looked solely at the decision to leave a service provider demonstrated swaying factors were not enough to prevent customers from switching the customer with their current service provider in this respect we extend roos s research on swaying factors although we look at the process of staying from a static perspective rather than analyzing the process of switching itself this research also builds on keaveney s inventory of switching motivations keaveney s work enabled us to understand together these studies can create a picture of why customers stay and leave service providers this picture is painted at the end of this article the final contribution of this research is to gain insights into two different managerial issues managers seeking to attract customers from competitors will gain an understanding of the reasons why customers stay this organization conversely managers with many potential switchers or who operate in an industry where there are few barriers to switching can use this research of reasons to stay to develop plans that ensure these customers do not switch to their competitors terminology switching barriers switching costs and staying reasons however there is much confusion between these terms jackson popularized the term switching costs defining them as the psychological physical and economic costs a customer faces when switching since then authors have used the term switching costs to describe a variety of different dimensions but with very little consistency in particular some switching barriers two recent examples highlight this issue well wathne biong and heide are careful to distinguish interpersonal relationships from switching costs whereas sharma and patterson include social bonds as a switching cost bansal and taylor use the terms interchangeably which further illustrates this uncertainty customers choose to stay after a serious consideration to leave both have negative connotations yet it is likely that customers will stay because of positive reasons as well as negative ones patterson and smith distinguish switching barriers from customer satisfaction and burnham frels and mahajan separate switching costs from customer satisfaction a strong reason to stay with that service provider when faced with the decision to stay or leave in this respect we agree with bendapudi and berry who state that to fully appreciate the reasons for relationship maintenance we must not only examine the negative motivations but the positive ones too in light of the above we deem that the term staying reasons considering switching to an alternative conceptual background this research has its roots in the exit voice loyalty neglect and opportunism framework originally developed by hirschman and subsequently expanded on by other researchers in the management field in this case we are interested in the loyalty aspect of the framework and in particular the potential switcher s decision spurious loyalty spurious loyalty exists when customers show behavioral loyalty but not attitudinal loyalty businesses with many spuriously loyal customers often face problems of reduced profitability and potential negative word of mouth although no research has explored the many dimensions of staying reasons a close examination of the literature reveals several themes that appear consistently in previous work that enable us to have an initial understanding of these staying reasons these themes are satisfaction are briefly discussed next customers respond with more consistent and greater repurchase intentions toward firms that provide high satisfaction bendapudi and berry further assert that satisfaction with past interactions is a key determinant of customers receptivity to relationship maintenance thus satisfaction similarly several studies have also found that satisfaction with a firm s service recovery efforts significantly improves all facets of behavioral intentions including higher repurchase intentions by dissatisfied customers thus customer satisfaction with a firm s service recovery efforts becomes a major determinant of a customer service provider when they offer a particular service which an alternative competitor cannot match similarly a dissatisfied customer motivated to seek an alternative service provider because of service failure or to break free from a constrained relationship may choose to stay because adequate alternatives are either perceived acceptable alternatives bendapudi and berry holmlund and kock relationships may also act as a barrier to exit as customers commit themselves to long term relationships relational benefits are realized these benefits include psychological benefits social bonds customization and personalization of services and economic benefits relational benefits there are three types of primary bonds usually associated with relationships financial social and structural not only can these promote customer loyalty but they also prevent
the fourier transform in can be modeled as the sum of eight phasors where the following substitutions were made the four parallel component phasors add to give a sinusoidally varying luminance at the given pair of horizontal and vertical frequencies and respectively these phasors reside in the plane at the same pair of frequencies these phasors however reside in the plane which is orthogonal to the first set in space symmetry properties of the fourier coefficients will force the luminance variation to be straight line motion along the gray line which is the imaginary axis of the plane the chrominance variation however will be an elliptical orbit in the chrominance plane a straight line path through the mid gray point this chrominance variation is identical to the behavior described by mccabe et al for complex spatio chromatic image processing using a complex fourier transform for example if instead of encoding the image in rgb color space as a pure quaternion we encode the image in cieluv color space with along the axis then the entire this hypercomplex spectrum a demonstration of the color orbit interpretation of the spectral components is done through the use of a color cube scatter plot if each pixel value of an image is plotted in color space the resulting scatter plot shows the distribution of the image s color contents in color space the first rowof fig shows an example of the lena image and its color cube scatter plot if the original one direction extracted and inverse transformed the resulting imagell show a rainbow grating pattern due to harmonic oscillations in luminance and chrominance the scatter plot of this rainbow grating image should draw an elliptic orbit about the center of the cube fig also shows the results of this process against the lena image for the first five harmonics in both the horizontal and vertical directions as expected the resulting is distributed in an orbital path about the mid gray point notice the magnification scale factor used to zoom into the center of the cube since the higher harmonics are typically smaller in absolute magnitude the scatter plot for a combined vertical and horizontal harmonic draws out a toroid shaped surface or hypercomplex mask coefficients later two additional filters and an alternative to the first were presented by the authors in these filters are a generalization of classical grayscale edge detecting filters attributed to prewitt sobel and kirsch vector linear filtering can be implemented by convolution in the spatial domain but the key to understanding the frequency response of convolution operational formula provides the avenue for this understanding owing to the noncommutative multiplication of quaternions there are three general convolution definitions available left right and bi convolution defined respectively as context warrants the distinction unlike complex convolution care must be taken when defining quaternion convolution filters as convolution equations must map vectors into vectors in general the product of a vector with another vector is a full quaternion hence there are constraints on the convolution definition the three color edge detection filters mentioned earlier are vectors into vectors the other two convolution forms can be used to construct filters but require subtle geometric understanding which is beyond the scope of this paper left and right convolution operator formulas using the quaternion fourier transform and one sided convolution definitions the spectral domain formulae for the onesided convolution are given as or right fourier transform is used the proofs for these formulas are given in appendix the right handed transform has the disadvantage of requiring both the forward and reverse transforms of the image on the other hand the left transform uses the image function in decomposed form making the final reconstruction step in the implementation schema of section iv use on multiple images bi convolution operator formula as will be shown a direct operational formula for the bi convolution equation is unnecessary since any bi convolution can instead be rewritten as a finite sum of one sided convolutions the first step in this conversion is to use symplectic decomposition to break one of the masks into the sum of three axially invariant components for instance a left mask can be parts of the decomposition such as and if this decomposition is done element wise across the entire mask then each component s axis is constant across the mask if we write each in polar form then ie each component has varying magnitude and phase but fixed axis since the bi convolution operator is a linear operation with respect to the mask we may rewrite it as axis as where and for each this is the key step to the derivation instead of looking for a single split that works for all components of the mask we split the image multiple times applying each split to the correct location in the bi convolution equation which is also a linear operator with respect to the image it can be rewritten as this last equality can now be rewritten as a sum of one sided either parallel or perpendicular to the corresponding left mask component so the component either commutes or conjugate commutes with the image component this same process can be applied to the right mask yielding similar results now it is a straightforward matter of applying the one sided spectral convolution and to each of the six convolutions to the masks this reduces the number of transforms to seven instead of the brute force count of twelve as with the one sided convolution the six mask transforms can be precomputed for use on multiple images it should be noted that many of the linear vector filters designed to date are single axis invariant hence when decomposing the masks two of the components vanish conversion from bi convolution to one sided convolution gives insight into the frequency response of these filters as an example we will analyze the color edge detection filter presented in this prewitt inspired color chromatic edge detection filter is defined via
and reporting the third generation of mcgahey took overall control of the company in the late in the form of the current chairman peter mcgahey by the time that peter became chairman nearly the firm was divided between two family members so under the guidance of peter the company grew very quickly so that by the end of the the company operated out of stores and by the end of the mcgahey sons had outlets under the chairmanship of peter the firm remained owned entirely by mcgahey family members and by operated branches hey s are employed within the firm however hit hard by recessionary forces between profits plummeted sales began to decline and a cash crisis loomed after a series of family meetings it was decided that to cope with the developing crisis and to save the firm from closure a professional manager should be promoted to a senior manager claims the family were obviously in total panic they knew that they d messed up and that they did nt have the guts to sort it all out to their credit they knew that they were out of their depth what they needed was a professional hard nosed hatchet man to take over and sort it all out it takes guts to admit you do nt have the courage to make the big decisions senior agreed that john merton a lifelong serving employee should be elected the first non family general manager by froze wages and cut back radically on family expenditure today john is widely attributed with saving weeks since guided by the general manager john merton the firm has turned around its performance with consistently above industry average profit levels and phenomenal growth that has seen the firm expand from to branches currently sales are per annum for each of the employees the divided between largely distant family members mainly second third and fourth cousins four of whom are twice removed the three family members who control voting rights do not work for the firm but sporadically attend board meetings of the family members who have a smaller stake in the firm four work for the firm two of whom are the general manager the legal and de facto control of mcgahey sons throughout the history of the firm mcgahey sons has been owned entirely by family members who are in close and frequent contact furthermore the firm has remained what may be labelled closely held in that currently the firm is strategic decision making is believed to occur at the monthly board meetings which are attended by at least one of the three major shareholders and invariably by the four additional family members who work day to day in the firm and john merton during such meetings mr merton reports to the board and advises on potential the vote being dependent on the proportion of the firm owned on the surface it would appear that mcgahey sons is fully owned and controlled by its family owners indeed using the berle and means benchmark of by single entities mcgahey sons is strongly owner controlled of family ownership is such that all conventional gauges of ownership control indicate that mcgahey sons is controlled by its owners in some respects mcgahey sons is indeed controlled by its owners ultimately in all firms the owners have final control even in the case of firms with widely dispersed ownership wherein managers have taken control ultimately if owners firms viewed by berle and means as manager controlled were ultimately owner controlled in the same sense the current case finds a closely held firm wherein managers have de facto control over strategic and operational decisions but where owners if they chose and organized accordingly could control the firm this is not to suggest that de facto such scenarios managers will have the freedom to choose as they see fit while the circumstances are very different the core issue in both scenarios is that managers exert de facto control since owners choose not to or find it difficult to exercise their legal rights as theorized by both nyman and silberston and by francis case analysis finds firm believe that they have some control over the strategic direction objectives policies and procedures of the firm through controlling the votes on the board of directors the family maintains control of the company through the board the board does the planning and the strategy and that is then executed by those who have an executive function in the business john merton years service however discussions with john merton and other non family senior executives suggest that this is not the case and that de facto control of mcgahey sons rests with management and in particular john merton who claims i am in title a general manager but i behave like a managing director i do nt have problems with that vote let s not be mistaken here i run the company john merton general manager years service in this way john merton exerts de facto control by the judicious management of the issues raised and the information provided and presented to the board of directors such is the extent of control by john merton that senior executives his team this is a form of benevolent authoritarianism wherein the highly skilled and manipulative general manager presents an appearance of choice to family owners but the choices are constrained by the manipulation of the variables and ensuing alternatives a senior manager somewhat wary of john s power argues good just the way it is and later well i speak to peter mcgahey most times he comes in we ve known each other for forty years he knows he s just rubberstamping the real decisions are made by john before the meeting senior manager years service in this regard it would appear that although the monthly meetings elect not to exert their legal rights and do not exert de facto strategic control these insights show that the actual strategic control
fees which regulators permit to be loaded onto fund investors performance distribution over market cycles performance distribution relative to sector means the importance of fund names as reflecting investment styles and the problem of style drift undermined with the uncovering of major scandals in and involving late trading and market timing in the shares of mutual funds with the knowledge and sometimes participation of the fund managers the disclosures legal proceedings and settlements led to extensive further investigations of mutual fund practices and governance procedures late trading allows a favored investor to illegally execute trades at the fund as late as pm the same evening enabling the investor to et on yesterday horse race by profiting from news released domestically after the closing or released overseas in different time zones ordinary fund investors are obliged to trade at the pm price until it is reset at pm the following day the practice in effect transfers wealth from ordinary shareholders to sophisticated hedge fund investors who had agreed to invest eticky assets in lucrative high performance fees for the fund manager hedge funds to be sold to sophisticated buyers for a fund management group to allow late trading is a major regulatory violation and a serious breach of fiduciary duty owed to the group investors one study has suggested that late trading cost investors about million per year between and or annual returns for international mutual funds and domestic practice not in itself illegal involves rapid fire trading by favored investors in shares primarily of international mutual funds across time zones this practice skims the returns from the mutual fund shareholders increases mutual fund expenses and requires them to hold large cash balances to meet abrupt withdrawals costs which have to be borne by all investors not just the market timers investors permitted to engage in market eticky assets with the fund management companies in their own hedge funds in effect kicking back some of their questionable market timing gains to the fund management companies not to the shareholders of the mutual fund market timing trades were estimated to have cost long term us mutual fund investors about billion of dilution per year in the early by july prosecutors in the us had extracted over billion in fines companies in settlements in which those charged admitted no guilt the funds managed by the investment groups that were named in the scandals suffered considerably more redemptions than firms that were not charged including the industry largest fund managers some observers argued that profit making mutual fund managers earnings are a function of the volume of assets under management and so there is relentless variety of fund products to investors who benefit from their performance liquidity and originality such pressure can cause fiduciary violations in all but mutually owned fund managers and index funds and perhaps should be seen as an unwelcome but tolerable friction to be endured in an industry that has benefited millions of people otherwise unable to invest safely in financial markets in any event the late trading and market timing scandals were not seen to cause enough damage to seriously impair mutual to seriously impair mutual funds as investment vehicles but they did raise serious questions among regulators policy advocates and prosecutors regarding conflicting interests between mutual fund investors and the fund management companies that invest the fund managers want independent directors who comply with the rules but are cooperative supportive and not difficult to work with investors want shareholders fund managers want maximum fees and expense reimbursements investors want their fund directors to negotiate minimum total costs and for those costs to be fully disclosed fund managers want to ensure that they are reappointed investors want boards that act vigorously in their interests in selecting managers capable of top flight after expenses and taxes fund managers want to promote their funds through brokers and financial advisers who need to be compensated investors do not want to pay these fees if they receive no benefits from them fund managers want to lower unreimbursed costs through soft dollar commissions from broker dealers investors want best price execution of trades while investors want access through brokers to the best and most appropriate funds for them fund managers want to be able organize funds to assist other business interests of the firm such as investment banking and promoting investments in particular stocks investors want all investment decisions by the managers to be arm length and these are generic conflicts of interest with which the mutual fund industry an enduring part of the financial architecture containing exploitation of these conflicts will invariably depend on a combination of market discipline and effective regulation failure in either domain will drive assets onto the balance sheets of banks and into alternative investment vehicles mutual fund regulation in advanced financial markets requires strict fit and proper the national securities markets improvement act of makes the securities and exchange commission responsible for overseeing investment advisers with over million under management with state regulators alone responsible for investment advisers with smaller amounts under management advisers who had previously been co regulated together with the sec the large investment advisers falling under sec jurisdiction account for vast majority of abusive practices and enforcement problems occur among the smaller a great deal of mutual fund information is in the public domain which helps market discipline along with the aforementioned high degree of transparency with respect to fund performance and ample media coverage and vigorous competition among funds and fund managers this means that investors today face a generally fair and efficient market in which to make their asset choices overall the mutual the mutual fund business at least in the more developed markets is probably a good example of how regulation and competition can come together to serve the retail investor about as well as is possible in contrast to the us eu rules governing the operation and distribution of mutual funds have traditionally been highly fragmented as of the definitions of
according to the us census or percent of mexican origin population is foreign born unlike garden city however mexican immigration to santa maria was constant throughout the century although there was a hiatus of immigration in kansas california became an increasingly popular destination for mexican immigrants in the and agricultural work has always attracted mexican immigrants to santa year round demand for the inexpensive labor that mexican immigrants provide mexican immigrants are practically the only source of agricultural labor in the fields around the city the interviews from garden city and santa maria are part of a larger study examining the effects of mexican immigrant replenishment on mexican american ethnic identity i chose these two cites for theoretical reasons might yield differences in ethnic identity formation which includes mexican americans perceptions about the costs and benefits of mexican immigration although not as pronounced as i expected this variation does yield some differences in the identity formation as well as in variation how mexican americans perceive these costs and benefits i also chose garden city and santa maria because both cities are geographically between mexican immigrants and mexican americans mexican americans in garden city and santa maria are not statistically representative of mexican americans nationwide both these communities are semi rural and mexican americans are predominantly an urban and suburban population nevertheless the overall experiences of mexican americans in garden city and santa maria are consonant with research conducted on later generation furthermore the experiences of mexican americans in this study with regard to intergenerational advancement in education income and intermarriage reflect national trends respondents range in age from to i interviewed people from a wide access a broad cross section of mexican americans in each city i obtained respondents using the snowball sampling technique i minimized sample selection bias by utilizing several different networks of individuals i analyzed interviews using a software package that allows users to attach coding categories to relevant parts of transcripts in order to compare similarly coded portions of text across interviews data collection and analysis were simultaneous processes in this project i began analyzing my interviews during data collection in order to explore in future interviews theoretical insights and nuances i identified in earlier interviews giving us all a bad name similar to research on later generation mexican americans in other settings and santa maria rarely compete for jobs or other economic resources mexican americans are by and large firmly planted in the middle while the bulk of mexican immigrants concentrate in low wage jobs in beef packing plants and agriculture that have been tagged as mexican immigrant work the native born population including mexican americans shuns these jobs what happens among their immigrant co ethnics reflects poorly on all people of mexican descent many said that mexican immigrants have a largely negative influence on the overall image of mexican origin individuals and pointed to the national and local media as a root cause garden city s local television station and newspaper frequently display the names and photos of the most wanted criminals in the county among the most be mexican immigrants because the names and faces are unfamiliar to longtime residents garden city respondents believe that these reports cast the entire mexican origin population in a negative light reflecting this belief were the words of ellen iturbe a year old secretary in garden city you started reading things in the paper and it would upset me because i m thinking it makes us look bad and we re the locals from here and yeah i we re not all like that i mean you know i felt sometimes i would think that then everybody thinks that we re all like that and we re not local residents pervasive anti mexican immigrant ire also acts on respondents belief that mexican immigrants negatively affect their image local residents often loudly voice complaints about what they perceive to be unsavory lifestyle characteristics displayed by foreign born mexicans overall cleanliness and poor etiquette in public spaces keenly aware of these complaints from local residents some mexican americans fear that these lifestyle characteristics contribute to negative stereotypes that local residents apply to mexican americans in the process of voicing their concerns some respondents echo the ire of non mexicans the comments of johnny rinco a year old liquor store owner in santa other people probably say look at those guys they re all the same because the way these guys are living it kind of hurts us in some ways the housing how they live leaving their cars what they re driving the way they dress their overall rudeness too a lot of people complain they re real rude people the ones that come from over there you know something happens i say excuse me or something like that a lot of times these lot of that especially in stores they let their little kids run in the aisles eating all the food and opening packages and todos mocosos with the diapers they should keep those kids a little cleaner most mexican americans who voiced concerns about status degradation however expressed a degree of ambivalence the majority are sympathetic toward the plight of immigrants even if they express disappointment about on mexican americans lupe bustamante a year old office manager in santa maria is among the most sympathetic respondents to mexican immigrants yet she expressed frustration about how the housing strategies immigrants employ may dampen others views of mexican americans well i think one of the ways mexican immigration influences mexican americans is i hear more negative things about mexicans now i mean you s about it and sometimes they make me angry because i think a lot of them if they tried they could do a little better but i think mostly it just makes me angry i wish that it was nt that so many of them had to live together like that because if you live two to three families in a house or in one
series in the ministere des relations exterieures in paris there has been useful work on parts of other series most obviously the reports of louis michell the prussian envoy during the seven years war but no complete run to take prussia there is need for a study of the reports of the especially by degenfeld by the british government as sympathetic and by his hostile successor borck who sought to develop links with frederick prince of wales and whom george ii refused to the prussian holdings will also be important for family politics as will be those in wolfenbuittel the papers of the house of ansbach the relatives of george s wife caroline also require study while family politics are also at issue in relations with the courts of hesse cassel and denmark the of the five of george s daughters who married did so into the houses of hesse cassel denmark and orange irrespective of this it is necessary to consider the dispatches of the hessian and danish envoys some of whom especially the hessian ernst diemar were exceptionally well connected in britain the diplomatic holdings of other german principalities offer much for relations with hanover as well as britain and particular interest is owed to those that were for long behind the iron relatively neglected especially those in dresden and schwerin aside from princely correspondence the reports of envoys contain descriptions of the court and court life and details of nego tiations thus in when george ii visited hanover the saxon envoy who had pressed for the renewal of the defensive treaty between hanover and saxony reported that because it was an electoral matter horatio walpole the actinj secretary of state with george ii was not kept informed negotiations i in addition to formal reports it is necessary to note the value of private correspondence thus for example aside from diemar s reports in the hessian state archive in marburg the haus hof und staatsarchiv contains among prince eugene s papers in the grosse korrespondenz his useful correspondence with diemar indeed diemar had been sent to london in part in order to support austrian to point out that the archival work has not really been done does fully answer the question of the ends to be served by a scrutiny of the sources a political study of george ii would focus on the role of the monarch at this point and two aspects are of particular concern first the extent to which the king directed foreign policy a question that centers on the operation of the hanoverian link and secondly the nature of constitutional monarchy in his case both questions have attracted attention but it is no reflection on the work available to note there is no full study for either topic there is however a more serious conceptual problem the extent to which these issues have been treated as separate this reflects modern professional divides rather than the reality of the period in practice the issue of constitutional practice focused on that of hanoverian commitments this reflected the working out of the serious doubts expressed in the act of settlement of the act under which the hanoverian dynasty had come to the foreign policy was held by critics to prove that the king was in breach of constitutional arrangements a charge denied by government supporters without an understanding of this link it is impossible to appreciate the domestic political significance of foreign policy and the hanoverian link furthermore without a knowledge of foreign policy the accuracy of the charge cannot be evaluated and we are left in a morass of competing claims with no way forward other than the unhelpful of delineating these claims as rhetorical strategies this approach has principally been from a perspective that is critical of op position charges this is in large part because foreign policy is tackled by diplomatic historians whose perspective is that of the official mind but also because the opposition is associated with the tories while the majority of his torians are whiggish in sympathy the major treatment of the tories during the reign of george ii that by linda to say about the debate over foreign policy while the major treatment of political thought from a tory perspective that by jonathan also largely neglects the subject and in addition despite its presentation of england as an ancien re gime society was essentially insular in its concerns an apparent dualism is thus created with an interventionist foreign policy linked to a whig government and hanoverian rule that was in apparent accordance with national interests and validated by a mindless xeno phobic isolationism trumpeted by the tories this approach characterized hat ton s treatment of george and it is one that serves the interests of scholars of diplomatic history and domestic politics alike the first can focus on the details of diplomacy treating critical voices in the public debate as those of the ignorant and prejudiced while scholars of domestic politics need apparently give no attention to foreign policy as there validity in the opposition critique this approach however is misleading not least because it is based on a failure to understand the debate in particular a focus on public discussion en sures a fundamental simplification as it misses out the sustained criticism of policy voiced from within government and the diplomatic corps this degree of expertise is at variance with any characterization of criticism as ignorant thus in newcastle wrote critically about his state john lord carteret then with george ii in germany the scheme abroad certainly is to set ourselves at the head of the empire to appear a good german and to prefer the welfare of the germanic body to all other considerations in order to do this the emperor charles vii charles albert of bavaria must be gained that is bought related to this is the point that in addition many opposition critics of foreign policy were experienced figures who had
give her doll like presence the inanimate animated is central to a ventriloquist at a birthday party in october as the speaking doll takes on the properties of the human the watching children seem drained of life while the balloons taking on a life of their own are hovering or floating to the ceiling this fusion between incompatible states of being is displaced into another kind of dramatic tension in those pictures in which something suddenly erupts to disturb an inappropriate violence disorders the order of everyday life the relation between movement and stillness recurs again a sudden movement produces shocked stillness on the simplest level this tension is epitomized in milk a young man shrinks away as the liquid substance bursts from its container taking on a life of its own in outburst and an eviction an eruption of violence stills the onlookers as a moment of drama materializes time is held in suspense these dramatic moments echo the process that transforms the gestures of the animate protagonists into an image in which the instant is extended into infinity in this sense wall displaces the stillness of the scene beyond the incidental attribute of the photographic machine in a sudden gust of wind this intertwining of elements is perfectly balanced the wind stills the human figures and animates things that should have stayed still this interest in confusing boundaries between the elements of his dramas leads back to the question of technology and to a conceptual space that wall has described as the improbable i have whose state of being was not that fixed he says of the computer and digital montage it makes a spectrum of things possible and helps soften the boundary line between the probable and the improbable but it did not create that threshold that was already there both in my own proclivities and the nature of i have described my reaction to a sudden gust of wind in terms of a technological uncanny partly in order to create the sense of standing on a threshold paused between the historic period of the photograph and the uncertain future of digital imaging wall s work however occupies the boundary in which the old and the new meet opening up and excavating this particular moment in the history proposing as it were an aesthetic threshold in which two eras merge this is particularly so in the case of a sudden gust of wind in most of wall s pictures the drama is produced in this picture however the wind is the cause of the event and its fleeting gestures which creates a dialectic between the instant derived from nature and the instant derived from the photograph emphasizing the indexical natural relation between light and photosensitive material the picture fuses the old and the new through a conjuring up of a collective memory of the photographic aesthetic not by means of indexical inscription but by its representation but the process of photographic reference is cited or evoked in this sense the picture is a reminder of the photograph s paradoxical relation to time described by roland there is a nostalgic element to a sudden gust of wind its aesthetic attributes pull back into the past of photography rather than driving forward towards the digital technology on the image as though it were an idealized memory of an impossible past it suggests homesickness for instantaneous photography as a collective lost childhood a mother even since abandoned and overtaken by history my encounter with a sudden gust of wind took place just before the centenary of cinema in while this experience of technological stood at a threshold between past and future although it had of course been possible to freeze the movement of film electronically for some time the conjuncture between the cinema s centenary and the arrival of the digital era dramatized the blurring of boundaries between a collective historic experience of film as movement and its new improbable mutation into stillness this temporal boundary of confused transition between eras was uncannily materialized in newly visible temporality of the cinema itself barthes had denied that the cinema could have the magical element of the encounter with that has been as its flow allowed no time to pause and think once the cinema could be held in arrest not only could the that has been of photographic time emerge but it could also be brought back into motion and extended into duration the cinema at its crossroad brings a further uncanny fusion of movement and stillness a frozen instant and the in flow as a medium based on the animation of its still frames into the appearance of movement the cinema brings people long dead back to the appearance of life these fusions of the animate and the inanimate necessarily lead to the ultimate boundary between the two the boundary between life and death that wall celebrates in dead troops talk and the in both these pictures the uncanny is located in the impossible fantasy of the living dead the ultimate fusion of incompatibles that is actualized by the cinema this is the boundary threshold between life and death that freud identified as the ultimate source of intellectual uncertainty for the human mind after the exhilarating thrill of the technological uncanny in a sudden gust of wind for me these tableaux transformed a chain of incompatible oppositions the organic the inorganic the animate the inanimate life death into an imaginative enactment of the paradox of cinema yet they also occupy the ultimate space of uncertainty death apparently wall once worked as a projectionist the process of checking a print inevitably involves witnessing the cinema s fusion of stillness with movement and the imaginary reanimation of the inanimate the pictures literalize the uncanny as barthes puts it that rather terrible thing which is there in every photograph the return of the dead some of wall s dramatic tableaux seem to depict fleeting encounters in the street some seem more like moments extracted from
a number of problems that had to be dealt with in order for germany and austria to be able to attract as many students economists and other experts or interested scholars as possible not only from the reich but also from the balkans in agronomic studies in germany were neither as intensive nor as broad as they had previously been nor as they had been in the south east countries or italy insufficient as the balkan countries offered four year courses of studies as for the practical application of theory this was something lacking in germany in contrast to the balkans the high fees compared to france charged at vienna university and its poor equipment also made the institution nevertheless it seems that in order to meet the reich s wishes at least to some extent the soeg took some measures for promoting germany s cultural balkan states the cultural political undertakings of the organization gained almost equal importance to the theoretical scientific and the practical economic projects most of these initiatives took place in the framework of the cultural activity of the city of vienna even though they had or they should have had their own character one of the closest relationships the soeg had developed with vienna s cultural organizations was with the in the city of vienna the soeg and the german academy established the south east seminar the director of the seminar was otto kunz and its stated aim was to familiarize those who were interested in south east europe with the region through language courses lectures expeditions and other cultural and scholarly economic the extension of the programme to foreigners was also anticipated the soeg affiliated with the department of south east union of the vienna universities and the laboratories of vienna universities in order to study the scientific problems of the the department of south east union embraced about twelve universities in austria and the protectorate and its role was to centralize and manage scientific work of every kind related to the south east and conducted at a week included a series of lectures on agricultural and economic issues but also a number of cultural activities dedicated not only to the reich but also to one or more balkan countries at a time scientists from several german universities and research institutes usually lectured in front of students but very often their audience also comprised military officers and soldiers it is interesting to note that to cater to the needs of the seminar the authorities of the german academy and the soeg signed an agreement for the establishment of another institute the prinz eugen institut the role of this new institute was to co ordinate the scientific and cultural activities of the above three partners namely to promote joint propaganda initiatives through courses the organization of big cultural events and other cultural political and scientific in the framework of the prinz eugen of education and the ministry of foreign affairs offered language courses for foreign students at vienna universities and technical schools the increase in the number of foreign students who took language courses from to is quite impressive the seminar was divided into two sections one for foreigners and a second for germans and austrians the latter offered a series of courses in almost all the balkan as well as introductory seminars on the land the people of the region the foreigners on the other hand could take similar courses for language organized by the personnel of the german academy and the ministry of as well as for politics economy and the culture of the great german reich language learning was the first step the soeg should take in order to attract foreigners to enroll in the universities in vienna and to continue their studies there subsequently usually in trade and the related sciences these young scientists were expected to become germany s extending hand after returning to their homelands strengthening at the same time the ties with germany and eventually being well disposed towards the reich s the number of young balkans who visited the reich s universities seemed to be quite big given the fact that the war was in progress and germany exercised brutal occupation the economic political significance of granting scholarships to young scientists from the balkans basically to do ph research at the university for agronomy was well acknowledged by the director of the soagrar institut and professor at the above university even though prizes and grants were funded for german students like the prinz eugen preis of the goethe stiftung and the prinz eugen studienstiftung that strong cultural propaganda tool applied to foreigners at least at the beginning something that troubled the authorities of the soeg very early however it is unlikely that similar grants were later given to balkan scholars directly by the soeg as the granting of scholarships to foreigners was the responsibility of the foreign ministry the soeg tried to avoid any conflicts with it thus the cultural political programme of the soeg was only involved in occasional and carefully selected cultural activities if the argument that culture alone does not justify the eagerness of any power to expand abroad seems to be distinct focusing on a totalitarian regime as it was nazi germany and the complex organization of its foreign cultural policy makes it more evident if not apocalyptic driven by its nationalistic ideology hitler s germany developed an acute cultural nationalism that it was eager to impose on the rest of europe hitler used the existing cultural propaganda mechanism had been developed in the weimar republic however unlike that period in which only two ministries were involved in the country s foreign cultural policy the third reich involved a number of institutions in propagating german culture abroad these included the ministry of the interior amt rosenberg the ahnenerbe office of the reichsfuhrer ss and the national socialist organization for issues abroad the globe and the british columbia based victoria times during this period a form of
transcript the subtitles which appeared at the bottom of each video segment were synchronized with the video and the participants used the play and pause buttons to control the video and the subtitles they could also rewind and fast forward the video using the video controller the transcript for each segment appeared next to the video which was controlled in the same manner when on the transcript page the learners could choose play the video or not but the transcript was displayed even if the video was not played figure progression through the astronomy unit the participants could interact with the help option for as long as they wanted to then when they were ready a slightly modified version of comprehension question was presented ie the answer choices were presented in a different order if the correct answer was chosen they went on to segment if they were given the same help options until they got the correct answer the activity ended once they had correctly answered all ten questions and received the score for the four post listening questions as a part of each help option the participants had access to an online english english dictionary which they could keep open or hidden originally this research also aimed at investigating the use of the dictionary which has been previously researched as a help option however because the participants in this study did not access it at all the use of the dictionary is not examined here when designing the astronomy unit special care was given to the following issues primary users user navigation and control options the primary users were the intact class of academic listening students who interacted with the unit for only one class period the navigation and control issues were implemented to realm of investigation and to control for variables since previous research has shown that students vary in their use of help help use in the astronomy unit was encouraged through linear navigation and an inability to skip help to ensure this navigation the right mouse click was disabled the toolbar with the back button removed and each new page opened in the same window furthermore after each multiple choice question students feedback which made them notice the input on help option pages better because of added redundancy and mode change as for control options the users did not have any control over the first viewing of the video but could choose the help option and could control the video as a part of help options during a second viewing procedures the classroom or the computer lab depending on the activities while interviews were scheduled outside of class time since the computer lab had only ten computers equipped with the data collection software the participants were divided into two groups using the alphabetical class list after all participants had completed the pre listening questionnaire the first group did the initial listening comprehension test while the second worked on the astronomy unit the next class groups switched places before participants started the astronomy unit they were given verbal instructions on how to use the unit and were directed to explore the tutorial with written instructions and a sample video segment the screen recording program camtasia recorder was used to capture participants moves through the activity in addition the whole group was observed by one of the authors the screen recordings were the core data collection instrument while the select participants for interviews and helped explain sometimes atypical behavior noted in the recordings since the participants were using headphones to listen to the lecture in order not to disturb one another the screen recordings did not contain audio but only video of participants interaction with the astronomy unit once the participants completed the astronomy unit they proceeded to the post in the third week of study they completed the recall test after reviewing the questionnaires tests and several screen recordings six participants were invited to retrospective interviews because they switched between two help options or did not use help at all only three of the participants agreed to meet for an interview during which they were shown parts of their screen recordings and questionnaire answers to elicit details about their choice of help options when all the data were collected the screen recordings of all participants were transcribed analysis to answer the four research questions in this study the data were analyzed using quantitative and qualitative data analysis approaches to address research question about the frequency and time of participants interaction with help options the number of times each participant opened each help page and number of seconds spent on the page a question had to go to the page with the help options the screen recordings revealed that some learners did not use the help options rather they simply clicked on the link to the help page and as soon as the page loaded they proceeded to the question page where they chose another option ie they were fishing for the correct answer using the trial and error method for learners who engaged in such behavior no useful interaction was possible based loading times of the video clips embedded in the help pages and the rapid progression of participants the researchers determined that to usefully interact with the help option approximately seven seconds needed to elapse the same criterion was applied to the frequency of interaction so that only the help openings that involved useful interaction with help were examined once this criterion was set the following variables were examined help page openings interaction and time spent on the help page then descriptive statistics were obtained for these variables and paired tests were performed to compare the two help options the list of all the variables in the study is given in table table variables examined in the study variable name explanation subtitles instances of interaction number of times subtitle help pages were opened and participants usefully interacted with them transcript instances of interaction number of
contexts in organizations culture can be described as collective programming of the mind or as hofstede has called it software of the mind this collective software of the mind distinguishes the use of power and learned strategies for answering fundamental questions organizational cultures should describe the shared mental programming of those within the same organization particularly if they share the same nationality according to schein there are three main sources that form members as the organization evolves and grows can also influence culture third organizational cultures can change as a result of new beliefs values and assumptions brought into the organization from new members and leaders the most profound of these tends to be the founding leaders they have strong theories about how things should be done and beliefs and assumptions of that founder exert a profound influence on the culture of the organization if circumstances change and those assumptions are no longer viable then the organization must change its culture or die organizational or corporate cultures can have a profound impact on their long term economic impact kotter and heskett companies were studied over a ten year period and those that managed their culture had a percent increase in revenue compared to percent for those that did not stock prices of the companies that managed their culture increased percent compared to percent for those that did not net income increased percent versus only percent for ganization s context climate is defined as the recurring patterns of behavior attitudes and feelings that characterize life in the organization at the individual level of analysis the concept is called psychological climate at this level the concept of climate refers to the intrapersonal perception climate these are the objectively shared perceptions that characterize life within a defined work unit or in the larger organization climate is distinct from culture in that it is more observable at a surface level within the organization and more amenable to change and improvement efforts and change is the organization as such it is influenced by the culture and a variety of other factors together these factors create the larger context within which climate is one key intervening variable the climate for creativity and change is that assimilation and utilization of new and different approaches practices and concepts organizational climate is an intervening variable that affects individual and organizational performance due to its modifying effect on organizational and psychological processes the climate is influenced by many factors within the organization and in turn coordination psychological processes include learning individual problem solving creating motivating and committing these components exert a direct influence on the performance and outcomes in individuals working groups and the organization we believe that climate is more easily observed and influenced than culture as to go deep into cultural change you have to be talking about beliefs and values and these go to the very soul of the organization and its people it is much easier to change the climate and language of the business leader s role in climate creation unless leaders are totally invisible to others what they say and do is observed by others and is the greatest influence on the perceived patterns of behavior that characterize life and the atmosphere within the organization of all the factors that influence climate leadership behavior is generally the most percent of the variance in many of his studies creating a workplace atmosphere that allows for creative behavior is one of the greatest opportunities for those who choose to meet the innovation and transformation challenge davis studied companies from seven countries in order to determine the the higher performers demonstrated a more inclusive and creative kind of leadership took deliberate steps to manage their creative and idea management processes and did not leave their climate or working atmosphere to chance the study also clearly illustrated the value of taking a more systemic approach to change those with the highest of organizations in the sample those organizations earning more from new products and services were nurturing on average ideas per day the average organizations captured and managed ideas per day the lowest performing organizations only nurtured about one idea per day support for an idea rich environment is also successful new product although their research applied to most industries they indicated that for others including drug companies the number of raw ideas may actually be higher leaders create the working climate by using a variety of levers within the organization for very often to create change in the way people interact by providing clear task requirements for projects and tasks they can set the tone for the kind of change required we have already reported that founding leaders and managers of organizations have a profound effect on the culture and therefore or entire organizations when it comes to meeting the challenge of organizational change the interaction of people with their situation is a key leadership issue when leaders want to focus clearly and deliberately on creating the climate that supports change creativity and innovation they can apply a deliberate measure of the climate outlook questionnaire in a deliberate change effort these case studies are not offered as absolute proof of the effectiveness of the soq but are shared to help you better understand what it will likely take to make meaningful and significant changes in your climate leadership behavior in implementing a change effort for this case study we observed clear examples of how leaders dealt with the entire system of change as well as differences in their scores on the soq the second and third case studies described not only the need for change and the actions taken to make the change happen they examine and understand the climate surrounding the change effort each case includes a description of the organization or division as well as the actions undertaken and the results to date the soq is based on years of research and development it is based on ekvall s early research and experience as an
he or she would also according to casey have no coherent sense of place itself implacement and grounding cement he claims gives stability and direction and identity whether physical imaginary relational or emotional a sense of place gives human beings an immediate context and affirms who they are and that they are to be in the world he writes to be situated at all is to be in place place is the phenomenal particularization of being in the world emptiness disorientation or homesickness the void frightens people according to casey as that which is utterly empty and vacuous that which lacks presence form memory and sensation the idea of a cosmic abyss the nothingness or nonbeing of infinite space creates terror and panic a haunting sense of atopia with a certain ethnocentric to deny the void and to fill up to populate the empty field with as much determinate being as possible this argument is problematic in terms of indian spiritualities in which emptiness and void are generally seen as positive states suggesting that cultural ideas of void are multiple and complex rather than defined exclusively by anxiety and dread leaving aside this critique for a moment of satyananda yoga practice according to casey it is because humans are among the most mobile of animals that place is so essential we are beings of the between always on the move between places unlike the sedentary existence of plants he argues human metabolism and constitution passions and drives and imagination and restlessness all conspire to keep us because of such forces people continually get out of place they change move and get lost and thus continually jeopardize their sense of implacement their sense of self so intimately linked with place consequently casey insists people must keep connecting back to place to that which is subsistent and enveloping to the bedrock of existence or else they suffer in the world never venture outside the boundaries of their village his antimodernism has also been critiqued yet i wish to pursue his notion of recurrent indispensable moments of implacement in a discussion of the satyananda practice of grounding if as casey suggests embodiment is the very source of place a person s body is in a sense the primary or attention inside to take stock touch base or as tapas a university student in his early thirties described it put the stuffing back in it is an act of re collection in which a sense of being all over the place spaced out out of it not with it or out there to use common metaphors is replaced by a more precisely demarcated and acutely felt self it is a coming back to oneself as finding mirabai observed describing a kind of phenomenological process of reembodiment i know i need to pull myself together every day in one way or another i have to check in with myself to see where i am at i need that still point where i am really focusing and drawing everything in and reclaiming me i have to make a body out of myself and have a clear definition of who i am earlier to help her manage chronic fatigue syndrome but she subsequently became involved in the community and became a yoga teacher i use yoga and meditation as a tool to contact myself i have to keep that going or i ll start to feel like i am getting lost like i am not in touch i have a tendency to whoosh out there and really be in tune with people s and meditation to find out what is going on with me so i use it in that way which is a sort of strengthening a sort of clarifying of boundaries with myself and the world i feel stronger through that and more capable in the world geographer edward relph offers a valuable insight when he suggests that basic to place is the creation of an as neurologist and psychoanalyst paul schilder argues a person s body image regularly expands into the world beyond physical boundaries thus placing the sense of self at stake the conception of an inside counteractively contains and confines grounding can partly be understood as the creation of an inside that is full of being and self a delimited sphere providing a secure space being inside is knowing where you are writes relph it is the difference between safety and danger cosmos and chaos enclosure and exposure or simply here and there from this perspective grounding can be conceived as a practice that aims toward a sense of place and by extension a sense of definite and integrated being this process of implacement finds other expressions in satyananda yoga not of cloth that is wrapped around the body prior to meditation provides a protective membrane signifying the temporary separation of a meditator from the everyday circumstances of life and from the stimuli of the surrounding environment moreover when the guru enfolds an initiate in a dhoti during the initiation ceremony the guru confirms the initiate s new identity and defines his or her place in the community tradition and lineage of satyananda with casey s notion that a sense of placeanda sense of self go hand in hand yet the process of grounding in satyananda yoga has philosophical and spiritual underpinnings which revolve around logic tantric theories of embodiment that point toward the possibility of an expansive self ultimately unfettered by place tantric incarnation of christian ideals although liberation from physical existence is the ideal or classical aim what is seemingly involved in satyananda yoga is partly a process of descent of incarnation of course one could argue that this interpretation too is symptomatic of contemporary cultural and academic trends away from transcendent categories such as mind reason rationality and objectivity indeed to read them as corroborating evidence that one must turn from as henri lefebvre puts it the cartesian body in space to the space of the body from translucency to opacity and from
study of the dynamics of simple and generalized simple signaling games in sections and where the main new results can be found section concludes by reconsidering the explanatory value of my results problems between states and acts the simplest situation of this kind consists of two states of the world and and two corresponding acts and each act is a proper response to exactly one of the states an individual who chooses the wrong act gets no positive payoff this payoff structure is illustrated in table let us call a situation like this one a state act coordination problem receiver chooses an act the latter cannot observe the state the sender can send two messages and to indicate which state has occurred the receiver might respond to each of the signals by choosing a particular act if the receiver chooses the right act then both players get the same payoff a since the sender and the receiver always associate the signal with the right act so they need a common understanding about the two signals in order to coordinate their actions the situation outlined above constitutes a simple signaling game with two players the sender and the receiver two states of the world two messages and two acts a sender strategy specifies for each state what signal to send a receiver strategy specifies which act will be chosen as a four sender strategies and four receiver strategies the sender might send one of the two signals if occurs and the other one if occurs or she might always send the same signal regardless of which state occurs the receiver might choose one of the two acts as a response to and the other act as a response to or she might ignore the message and always choose the same act payoffs for ap these payoffs are illustrated in table notice that we have assumed that each state occurs with probability each entry represents the signaler s as well as the receiver s payoff thus our simple signaling game is a pure coordination game involving more then two states acts and messages let pnp as a be an state act coordination problem if sp is a set of distinct states of the world ap an is a set of distinct acts and is a function that determines the utility of each state act pair such that for ip definition let pnbe an state act coordination problem let mbe a set of distinct messages and let be a probability distribution over such that is the set of strategies generated from pnas follows sfs is the set of sender strategies and kk is the set of receiver strategies and the players utility functions are the same and are generated by pnas follows that the payoffs to each player are generated by the underlying payoff function of the state act coordination problem by averaging each player s payoff in each of the states j according to ji s probability of occurrence thus the payoff from a particular strategy combination is the expected value of the payoffs associated with the state act pairs that result from this relative to the probability distribution signaling systems are combinations of sender strategies and receiver strategies that deserve special attention they guarantee that both players get the maximum payoff regardless of which state of the world occurs if the players employ a signaling system they are fully coordinated by virtue of the signals in the example above let snbe a simple signaling game then is a signaling system if equivalently we may call a signaling system if and only if for all jp then siis part of a signaling system if and only if siis one to one and rjis part of a signaling system if and only if rjis one to one according to lewis skyrms vanderschraaf and young a behavioral regularity is conventional if everybody has an interest to act in accordance with it and if it has an alternative this intuition can be quite naturally a combination of strategies in which no player would gain by unilaterally deviating from her part of the equilibrium a strict nash equilibrium is a nash equilibrium in which each player would do worse by unilaterally choosing a strategy different from her equilibrium strategy in a pure coordination game with at least two strict nash equilibria each of the two strict nash strictly better in a signaling system equilibrium and no player has an interest that the other player deviates from it since she would also be worse off in this in the example above there are two strict nash equilibria and and four pure nonstrict nash equilibria the two strict nash equilibria are also the game this result holds with some generality proposition let sn be a simple signaling game then is a signaling system if and only if is a strict nash equilibrium proof if is a signaling system then it is clear that unilateral deviation leads to a worse payoff conversely if is not a signaling strategy that yields no lower payoff the details are left to the reader thus if conventions in signaling games are strict nash equilibria the only candidates for conventions in simple signaling games are signaling systems in a population of individuals who are repeatedly playing a simple signaling game a signaling system is a simple conventional language the population could have adopted another signaling system that same job but whatever signaling system they have they understand each other by virtue of a convention stability and emergence of language conventions at this point two questions become pressing how is a conventional language maintained in a population and how might a conventional language be established in the first place these two questions concern conventions in general it is not enough to state what the candidates for conventions in a particular want to explain why one of the possible conventions is in fact a convention in a population to do this we have to
arab world to ascertain the peoples aspirations there the survey included palestine and king was his favored candidate to head the king s partner for the mission came from a very different place in the north eastern part of istanbul the university of bogazici overlooks the straits of the bosphorus its buildings clinging to the hill slopes that college which is no surprise as they were built by american clergymen too this campus was opened in and was first named roberts it survived the great war which positioned the us and turkey as enemies remaining an american cultural center at the heart of istanbul charles crane a businessman from chicago and a diplomat of sorts was the campus s main trustee he was about to invest more time in it as arab world when he too was called on by president wilson to assist king in his middle east peace crane gladly agreed to take part in what was an effort to enhance the independence of the arab peoples according to the principle of self determination as articulated by the president in his famous speech at mount vermont already been divided into new nation states by the colonialist powers even before versailles had been convened only one area remained without clear definition the levant the british and french had already carved it out between themselves in the sykes picot agreement of however president wilson hoped to calm colonialist hunger by peppering the dish with a bit of liberalism it was still necessary to know what were the real ambitions of the britain and france coveted and thus despite demonstrable hostility from britain and france the peace conference agreed to delay the establishment of mandate regimes in syria lebanon and palestine king and crane enlisted seven experts in different fields and set out for the area on june staying there for forty two days they visited more than locations an amazing achievement for such a small delegation they met urban they were in jaffa rishon le zion jerusalem ramallah nablus jenin nazareth haifa and acre until they returned to turkey on board the us navy destroyer hazelwood they were surprised by the sincerity of the urban and rural inhabitants of palestine they discovered that most of them were happy to be part of an all syrian arab state although quite a few of the urban inhabitants hoped that an independent palestine a zionist presence the balfour declaration and a british or french mandate king and crane s final report was undecided except on one point the negative impact the balfour declaration would have on the people of their report troubled the governments in paris and london ever since both had toiled over a network of secret agreements that divided up the greater syria area can tell us something about potential changes to american policy in the near and more distant future the scene for the last success of the arabists was the town of lake success on long island contrary to what its name suggests it is an ancient arena of defeat that of the native american montauketts who were destroyed in the us genocide like so many other locations since the end of colonization the area has been a military industrial complex which armed us forces in both world wars in the fledgling united nations addressed quite unexpectedly the mayor of the little town of lake success and asked to rent some of the industrial areas including huge hangars as a temporary home in one of them in november the ungeneral assembly announced the establishment air when a few months later in the very same hangar a different spectacle took place on february the american delegate to the un warren austin declared that his government wished to annul the partition resolution as it wrought havoc and destruction instead of enhancing peace austin suggested imposing an international trusteeship over palestine pending a better solution this was a step rethinking in the state department in the face of the new reality unfolding in palestine the arabists saw how under the umbrella of the un partition resolution the zionist movement had begun ethnically cleansing palestine of its native population and so on that day in february within a week of the first significant israeli ethnic cleansing operation focusing on five coastal villages and a massacre in the north austin gave his store for him he had already developed an antipathy towards the zionist leaders in his country such as aba hillel silver whom his jewish advisers invited into his chambers every now and then to complain about the state department this troubling activity was part of the new pro zionist campaign that jews in the us had initiated after david ben gurion visited them in in that year the zionist leader convened a meeting pro zionist lobby in the us and indeed the zionist retaliation was not long in coming aba hillel silver arrived followed by chaim weizmann and although the president told his advisers that he would not be shouted at any more the ploy worked well it had after all been an election year the us retracted its policy and israeli ethnic cleansing raged under its guidance the palestinian right of return was the backbone of a new un peace initiative attempted throughout then as they had in february the white house and other bodies involved in formulating us policy on the question of palestine at first accepted the department s lead one month was noteworthy may in that month the us demanded that israel allow the repatriation of hundreds and not even pending the conclusion of a final settlement on may the us ambassador to israel james mcdonald conveyed a very sharp letter from president truman to david ben gurion which made an explicit threat of severe sanctions if israel did not adjust its polices this was accompanied by the suspension of a promised loan of the request in the meantime conflicts broke out in different parts of the globe as the cold war began to heat up hence until the end of truman s administration that pressure
context the court s way of doing so was novel the court could not avoid its anguish by marshaling leave the matter entirely in the hands of other authorities because the other authorities were subordinate institutions for which the court was responsible and whose products it reviewed on a daily basis so instead of entirely offloading lawmaking responsibility the court devised an ingenious system for sharing responsibility with jurors lower court judges and drafters of the criminal law the justificatory load proved unbearably dissonant with the court s instincts to shun violence whenever that happened the court abandoned its backup responsibility for the underlying proportionality based doctrines and dared states to execute enough people to provide the brutally clear retributive and deterrent justification for state killing that justice white s competing approach the a result of the court s inability to choose between discretion and on the contrary the court devised a brilliant system for harnessing discretionary decisions by jurors judges and legislators to inform its constitutional rule making the system came apart because the court refused to play its own substantive part in the justificatory exercise doctrinal churning it is the failure to provide the proportionality based justification for state killing that the court recognizes is indispensable clearly the court has failed to provide that justification on its own in the july cases and lockett the court held directly that it could not provide a blanket justification for executing all or subcategories of deliberate in cases like cartwright and johnson it declined review and in mccleskey and creech it declined even to repeat furman s pattern focused justificatory exercise that lies at the source of the court s entire capital jurisprudence nor however did the necessary justification emerge from the court s decentralized system of constitutional interpretation rather the court s withdrawal from the substantive monitoring that system required caused its delegates to default as well there are three reasons the court it exercised firm control over procedural requirements in the area those requirements were demanding insofar as they compelled local actors to provide serious proportionality judgments and the court s holdings were mediated by two sets of well organized and committed legal adversaries given these circumstances the court s directives to local officials were ferociously enforced both ways if the court ruled that a particular procedure was required hundreds of capital the procedure likewise the moment the court held that a particular procedure however advisable was not constitutionally mandated the message the states heard was that the supreme court strongly advised against the procedure because the trend of the court s moods was strongly toward relaxing justificatory demands on its delegates and thus itself the result was a systemwide withdrawal from serious proportionality to cause just enough narrowing to occur along justice stewart s lines and just enough numerousness along justice white s lines to replicate almost perfectly the arbitrary capricious and discriminatory patterns of death verdicts the court condemned in furman true the circle of capital eligible offenses and offenders is slightly smaller now than in the density of death sentences within the circle is slightly greater and the pockets of discriminatory over sentencing are defined by the race of the victim not the race of the but otherwise the court s waffling has brought it full circle back to the patently unjustifiable pattern of state violence that it found in its most forceful if partial fit of justificatory decision making in furman summary and conclusion the deployer s role thrust on the court by its superintendence of the tribunals that dispense the death penalty and eloquently reinforced by a committed defense bar has compelled the court to provide a convincing justification for the fact pattern and each instance of state killing in struggling to do so the court has made the measure of that justification the proportionality of punishment questions posed by any substantive test of cruel and unusual punishment the cognitive dissonance entailed in peace loving judges attempts to justify this particularly raw form of state violence and the struggle with the political branches that banning the violence would ignite thus buffeted the court has been unable to back away from its interpretive responsibilities to justify the penalty in a manner convincing to itself or to entirely futile in the process the court devised an imaginative scheme for sharing its justificatory burden with local democratic institutions the system provided the court with a passable if perilous way between the horns of the dilemma robert cover described by pressing local democratic institutions into service as provisional interpreters and implementers of the constitution subject to the court s supervision and final say the system could satisfy it could generate the responsible head on justifications for state violence that the court s role in this violence and the cruel and unusual punishment clause irresistibly demand and it could ease the unbearable dissonance that jurispathic approval of state violence visits on judges more specifically after soliciting certiorari petitions raising constitutional the court interpreted the constitution in quick succession to deny it the power to review the death penalty then to require it to void all extant capital statutes and sentences furman s nine separate opinions identified three troubling patterns generated by the wholly lawless death sentencing procedures it struck down racial disparity the absence of any connection between how aggravated an offense was and probability of a death sentence and the deterrence and retribution destroying rarity with which the penalty was imposed for nominally capital crimes the decision triggered a three question national referendum was the public committed enough to the death penalty to reinstate it under the constitutional cloud furman created if so what crimes did state legislatures believe were capital and could the states devise law bound imposing the penalty that somehow avoided the troubling patterns found in richly informed by the responses furman elicited from state legislators jurors and state appellate judges the court concluded that the death penalty was not unconstitutional for deliberate murder but was unconstitutionally
model ii uses spatially smoothed values based on the magnitude and above events since this model assumes that future events will occur near where in the past this model is intended to account for the possibility of very localized seismogenic structures which repeatedly generate moderate earthquakes it also addresses the observation that events have occasionally occurred in areas that exhibit few magnitude events since such as the karak fayha fault and the palmyra fold belt figure admittedly the historic record is probably incomplete for earthquakes of since and in that regard this model will be will be incomplete however model ii assigns higher hazard in areas that have had moderate or large earthquakes in the past since we do not know with certainty the cause of major earthquakes in the dst area it is prudent to address the possibility of near repeats of historic moderate earthquakes this is also supported by results of paleoseismic studies eg gomez et al ken tor et al by near repeat we refer to the possible occurrence of a future moderate earthquake within about km of a historic earthquake model ii also ensures that the hazard map reflects the local historic rate of events kafka concluded that at least two thirds to three fourths of the future large earthquakes in intraplate regions such as the central and eastern united states will occur in zones delineated by historical earthquakes specifically future earthquakes in the central and eastern united states including large and damaging earthquakes of occurring within km of past earthquakes and about of occurring within km of past earthquakes kafka since the results of kafka were based on analysis of regions around the world including the middle east we apply this conclusion to the dst a kafka pers comm with first author the historical earthquakes and the instrumentally recorded events used in this study oss checking for redundancy quality and authenticity of data sources as well as for homogenous reporting of basic parameters the historical portion of the catalog covers the time span between and a and is compiled from previously published catalogs namely abou karaki al tarazi ambraseys and white ambraseys and jackson amrat et al and sbeinati et al other paleo and archaeoseismological studies al ken tor et al and meghraoui et al figure the instrumental part covers the time span and is compiled from the published bulletins of the isc jordan seismological observatory jso the geophysics institute of israel gii and the syrian national network snn in addition to the published catalogues of abou karaki al tarazi amrat et al and ambraseys the local magnitude ml was determined for all the earthquakes that ranged between magnitudes and using the model of al tarazi this model was derived depending on several relationships determined between intensity and different magnitude types assigned namely ml ms and mb for earthquakes that occurred along the dst while for the larger events the moment magnitude was calculated using abou karaki s model this model was derived from a relationship between ml and the intensity of the historical earthquakes then proposing a relationship between ml and moment magnitude for the dst to select the appropriate magnitude especially for the historical earthquakes the procedures proposed by abou karaki were followed abou karaki concluded that the magnitudes assigned for the historical earthquakes along the dst in previous published catalogues were overestimated a similar conclusion was reached by ekstrom and dziewonski especially for the continental earthquakes in the world overestimated magnitudes in previous catalogs may in part explain the high pga values resulted from previous studies for the dst such as al tarazi the catalog completeness was tested by plotting the cumulative number of events against time for different regions when events with magnitudes between and are used these plots are approximately linear for times after figure therefore we conclude that the catalog is roughly complete down to magnitude since since note that the earthquakes with magnitude before were not used in this study ie in model i owing to incompleteness similar analysis is performed for the magnitude intervals and as shown in figures and based on the completeness tests shown in figures and and the progress in the installation of seismic stations near the dst the earthquake data used in this study were table furthermore the accuracy in the magnitude and epicentral location of the historical and instrumentally recorded earthquakes are listed in table these ranges are based on the development in the installation of seismic stations near and around dst table foreshocks and aftershocks were removed using a procedure based on the spatial and temporal clustering of events that was also used by seeber and armbruster and the resulting earthquake data are shown figure displays locations of earthquakes with ml since the period from to a for the most part these earthquakes occurred at or near where there are concentrations of magnitude earthquakes since examples of this include the dead sea basin jordan valley gulf of aqaba northern faults near lebanon western syria and cyprus first we count the number of earthquakes ni with magnitude greater than mref in each cell of a grid with spacing of in latitude and in longitude about km on a side this count represents the maximum likelihood estimate of for that cell weichert bender for earthquakes above mref the values of ni are converted from cumulative values ie number of events above mref to incremental values ie number of events from mref to mref using the formula of herrmann a regional value of was calculated from the earthquake data used in this study for the time period to a see figure and used in the calculations of the first and second hazard models figures the grid of ni values is then smoothed spatially by multiplying by a gaussian function with correlation distance for each cell the smoothed value is obtained from frankel the total number of events and ij is the distance between the ith and jth cells the sum is taken over cells
controversies dealing with the exact question state constitutional law on the right to bear arms the states have applied a reasonable regulation test to a wide array of gun with surprisingly little variation in reasoning or results oliver wendell holmes famously taught that he life of the law has not been logic it has been experience the american constitutional experience with the individual right to bear arms has taken place primarily in the states if one wants to imagine what second amendment scrutiny will look like under an individual rights reading state constitutional law is the place to begin state constitutional practice of applying deferential review in right to bear arms cases extends back well over a century in the late nineteenth century state supreme courts began asking whether gun safety regulations were reasonable in state shelby the missouri supreme court upheld a prohibition on possession of firearms by intoxicated individuals against a challenge under the state s constitution while explaining that the state constitution right to bear arms in the defense of his home person and property the court argued that the statute is designed to promote personal security and to check and put down lawlessness and is thus in perfect harmony with the constitution are of the opinion the act is but a reasonable regulation of the use of arms and to which the citizen must yield the court concluded in the decades since the reasonable guaranteeing an individual right to bear arms the reasonable regulation test should not be mistaken for a rational basis test such as that found in equal protection cases under rational basis review the question is whether the law is a rational means of furthering legitimate governmental ends the court applying rational basis review does not formally consider the extent of the burden on the individual what matters is whether there are reasonable by the law the explicit grant of a fundamental right to bear arms courts insist clearly requires something more because the right must not be allowed to become illusory under the reasonable regulation test applied to gun control the question is whether the challenged law is a reasonable method of regulating the right to bear arms even a law backed by legitimate governmental ends though can burden the right too much and be unconstitutional under the reasonable if a state attempted to disarm its citizenry completely such a law might well survive rational basis review assuming the goal is public safety and that a rational legislator could conclude that banning all firearms furthers public safety under a reasonable regulation standard however a complete ban on firearms would effectively do away with the underlying right and as a result such a law could not be a reasonable regulation of the the polity or of society but not of the right ordinary forms of gun control such as licensing laws bans on concealed carry and prohibitions on particular types of weapons are by contrast attempts to regulate the right rather than eliminate it and are routinely upheld so long as a gun control measure is not a total ban on the right to bear arms the courts will consider it a mere regulation of the right the language used in state court opinions to describe the limits of reasonableness embodies the unique focus of the test used in right to bear arms cases state courts explain that the difference between reasonable and unrea sonable regulation of the arms right is that any law that eviscerates renders nugatory or results in the effective destruction of the right is unreasonable a law that so excessively burdens the right as to destroy it will be invalidated in this way the reasonable regulation standard adopts a the right such as by disarmament is per se unconstitutional in some decisions the state courts also hold a gun law to be unreasonable where the law is arbitrary or irrational short of nullifying the right to bear arms or being arbitrary gun control laws consistently survive the reasonableness test courts applying the reasonable regulation standard go through the formal motions of identifying the goals against the burden on the individual he reasonableness test focuses on the balance of the interests at stake one court notes but this balancing is decidedly tipped in favor of the government so much so that the individual almost never wins the large scale problem of violence in society which includes gun violence virtually always overwhelms the individual challenger s interest in self defense or recreation the burden on the to be minimal so long as there are alternative means of exercising the right according to the ohio supreme court any gun control measure imposes a restraint or burden upon the individual but the interest of the governmental unit is on balance manifestly paramount there has been no comprehensive empirical study of state right to beararms right but that number is somewhat deceptive the majority of these decisions are from the nineteenth century predating the rise of modem constitutionalism since world war ii the published opinions of the state courts include nine decisions invalidating laws on the basis of the right to bear arms of those nine six were gun control laws this is but a fraction of the hundreds if not at the state level during this period under the reasonable regulation standard courts uphold all but the most arbitrary and excessive laws in thirty six of the forty two states with individual right to bear arms guarantees no gun control measure has been invalidated in over half a century under those provisions while there is a difference in focus between reasonable regulation and has been characterized as virtually none in fact because nearly every law subject to it survives judicial scrutiny similarly nearly all laws survive the reasonable regulation standard thus giving wide latitude to legislatures as the illinois supreme court noted the right to bear arms is subject to substantial infringement like rational basis the reasonable regulation standard tends to be more than anything else shorthand for broad judicial deference deference the paucity of contemporary
theory and cannot be derived from it in any case i have seen bohm s work which shows how his mathematical limit in a natural way in contrast to conventional methods that arbitrarily insert planck s constant into the mathematical expression so that the effect of uncertainty vanishes in the limit bohm s concept of holo movement experience as already stated this is a key native concept about the totality of existence as an unbroken whole consisting of the visible world and the unseen world of spirit it also converges with bohm s worldview and his theory of cosmology which refers to the visible world of ordinary time space continuity and causality as the explicate order and the unseen world of the quantum which is profoundly different as implicate order these two aspects of the universe are complementary existing together in ceaseless movement which he calls the holomovement in an endless process of unfolding and enfolding as a non native physicist he stopped short of saying that the universe is alive lee smolin states quantum processes are best described through stories because of their histories of transformations occurring at the subatomic level he also emphasizes that the world is a network of relationships it is significant that native languages consist mostly of verbs not nouns which emphasize action author joseph rael says that the tiwa language has no nouns or the tiwa language has no nouns or pronouns so things do nt exist as concrete distinct objects everything is a motion and is seen in its relationship to the other motions there is an obvious connection between quantum transformations and the actions and flux described through native languages nature contain substructures that continue to lead to new discoveries nature seems to contain layer upon layer of rich qualities that meet at seamless domains each substructure has qualities that differ from the one above yet things that exist still exhibit autonomy and stability whereas physical laws are valid only within their limited domains have more than one meaning quantum theory has led to ambiguities and new questions about the nature of reality from the uncertainty principle we know that the simultaneous measurement of a quantum property such as a particle s position momentum or spin always involves a degree of uncertainty because the light used in probing always perturbs the system being measured when physicists began to discuss quantum actions they used terms like wave particle position trajectory and uncertainty these words have well defined meanings in newtonian physics but they are ambiguous in quantum physics due to the different nature of reality this ambiguity was problematic during the early days of quantum mechanics for example the phenomenon of wave particle duality seems to imply that classical terms like position momentum and trajectory no longer have a clear meaning a wave does not have position but a particle does heisenberg uncertainty to mean that although a particle possesses well defined properties they could not be exactly determined but niels bohr disagreed insisting adamantly that the precise path of a particle should not be called uncertain implying that it exists but cannot be determined rather he claimed it should be called ambiguous just as temperature is inherently ambiguous because it is a measure of the amount of kinetic energy of an ensemble of molecules but it has no meaning for individual molecules the problem lies in the fact that the entire phenomenon cannot be analyzed at the lower level of detail in the same manner he argued it makes no sense to talk about position particle or momentum as if they were real entities to reality bohr and einstein used the same language but their notions about the nature of truth and reality were in serious conflict once close friends the two men eventually separated the rift was so deep that when a mutual colleague arranged a party for them to associate and come together bohr congregated his students and einstein with his the concepts presented here are still in raw form and need further interpretation the authentic conveyance of indian realities into a western scientific context requires knowing how to walk in both worlds which few people can do because it depends on a good understanding of indian philosophy having to surrender the meaning of the realities of the indian world was a specific concern expressed premise that indigenous traditional knowledge corresponds to factual science indian realities involve more than conceptual understandings for they are inseparably linked to experience they evoke deep feelings that stem from a sense of connectedness such as during tribal community events which typically follow the natural cycles a single word in a native language can have a vast meaning derived from memory and experience the missing element in many discussions about science religion and philosophy james lovelock author of the gaia theory provides substantial evidence that the earth is a single living organism yet here again when indians refer to mother earth it is personal and experiential not in terms of a deity or physiology renewal is also evident everywhere and need only to be observed in daily life hidden realities what remains is for us to learn to walk in it beyond negativity the effects of incivility on the electorate there is much concern among pundits and political observers that incivility undermines our electoral process yet we have little evidence that actually documents whether incivility has such pernicious effects this article seeks to advance our understanding of the influence of incivility on the electorate we argue that three dimensions are central to argue that three dimensions are central to understanding both the perceptions and effects of different types of campaign messages tone civility and focus using an experimental manipulation on a large national sample that examines these three dimensions we find that uncivil attacks in campaigns do not appear to be as worrisome as its detractors fear while uncivil messages in general and trait based messages in particular are usually seen by the public as being
dna for a particular gene this cdna arrays however several problems arise the complexity of the genome is several orders of magnitude greater than the complexity of the transcriptome mers or designed to bind mrna sequences may lack the specificity to uniquely bind single copy genomic dna a biological context we feel that an actual controlled biological example would speak volumes we present data from pooled commercial rna extracted from several healthy human tissues that show diverse expression patterns and we show the effects of normalization on the differential expression several approaches have been used comparisons of healthy tissues or cell lines or diseased versus healthy paradigms have been the predominant categories we favor experiments that utilize healthy tissues so that one can examine the cause and effect relationship between normalization array tissue type and biological interpretation without having to deal with the underlying alteration in the cell s regulatory these complex interactions are worth of study without additional nuisance factors most importantly specialized tissues have such carefully regulated processes that the expression profile tends to be very stable especially when examining pooled samples both agilent and affymetrix expression arrays were run using commercially available is usually presented as ratios we extracted the and channels separately to compare with single channel affymetrix data this may tend to underestimate the agilent precision but enables comparisons to be as direct as possible the agilent data is examined in the context of three normalizations mean processed and bsub corresponding to columns and respectively over all pixels with no background subtraction bsub is the averaged signal minus the averaged local background signal and processed is the loess normalized background subtracted signal with the agilent spatial detrending error algorithm applied affymetrix data is examined in the context of gc rma and raw signals generated from the chp and cel files output from data were generated using the cel files and their respective software or algorithms figure shows the diversity of comparisons we can make the scatterplots of single channel and ratio data are plotted to convey a feel for reproducibility for both platforms to make impartial comparisons we generated ratios from the affymetrix data and extracted each of the and channels independently from agilent affymetrix data to introduce a background of moderate technical variation the impact of which is encompassed in the complete analysis for the agilent experimental design tissues were assigned or labels randomly the associated dye flips were then selected to complete the design this experimental design allows single channel analysis of the effect of channel crossover on reproducibility since some of descriptive statistics of cross platform analysis inter and intrachip ratios were computed and analyzed for precision across replicate measures on average the minimum detectable fold change which is calculated by the ratio at the percentile of ratios from all pairs of replicate arrays where the expected ratio is the imprecision of the data caused by the normalization methods and the precision of measurement quantified by the performance metric which is obtained by distributional power analysis with fixed and performed for each probe the metric at and sample size be the number of replicates for each platform in these figures one can directly visualize the change in replicate precision caused by a particular normalization in supplemental figures and any deviation from the diagonal indicates a systematic change in the expression values as significant using a t test at visualization of effect of expression measurement choice of normalization algorithms and the variation of tissues is seen in figure which is a hierarchical dendrogram that shows the component is from the normalization for agilent the strongest variance component is from the tissues indicating that the normalization methods for affymetrix are quite different and much more pronounced than the agilent normalizations there are a number of interpretations possible here but simply note that the impact of data manipulations does have an a set of values that would provide a common estimate of relative error we analyzed data from public data sets that identified from genes that distinguish the functions of liver spleen and lung based on biological pathways and metabolic networks the estimate of false positive and match the literature we consider it a true positive if we miss any genes at our significance threshold of pgilent processed data and to lead in the lowest cumulative error rate followed by affymetrix dchippm mm and dchippm the highest fp error was done to try to pinpoint the source of variance between two or more commercial and or cdna platforms at the probe level experience has shown several important issues that must be addressed first the source of mrna must be of high quality intact mrna from a biological source that is stable such as healthy organ tissues or cell lines second the position and length of the probe must be typically use probes nucleotides long the position of the probe relative to the gene s coding sequence plays an important role in obtaining reproducible expression data differential mrna degradation and subsequent crna amplification steps can bias apparent mrna content this plays a major role in comparing the performance of and we followed the manufacturer s protocol closely to get optimal sensitivity and specificity the differences we see in the expression results seem to be related to the differences in probe content length and position typically array manufacturers select probes that bind to the most portion of a gene usually selecting regions in the utr although there are several thermodynamically equivalent the manufacturer uses a set of normal tissues to validate probe performance in most instances probe design is a compromise figure in the supplemental material shows best and worst inter and intraplatform correlation in which locations of probes from affymetrix genechip and agilent microarray platform were plotted against their corresponding genes and vertically spaced by their melting or are tiled near the probe selected by agilent provide highly correlative data the major differences are mostly due to thermodynamic reasons that reflect the differences of probes to
two groups of subjects wore two sets of clothing they performed mental tasks inside a climate chamber for hours the tasks included calculation tests word memory tests and cue utilization tests during the testing period they were allowed to adjust the air temperature the group with lighter clothing preferred the temperature to be xc while the preferred temperature of another group was xc it was found that both groups attained the same level of mental performance as well as thermal comfort this implied that the test subjects performed mental tasks equally under the same level of thermal comfort however the thermal environment adjusted by the subjects did not corresponded to the zero predicted mean vote the neutral thermal comfort condition estimated by fanger s comfort equation in fact wyon s valuable experimental results were employed later researchers to discover the important finding of a relationship between thermal environment and human working efficiency in jokl defined four hygrothermal microclimates and discussed their effects on human performance the zones were cold microclimate optimal microclimate hot perspiration climate and hot microclimate the optimal microclimate corresponded to the balance of heat generation and heat consumption inside a human body the imbalance of heat would result in other microclimates there would be an increase in human performance in the optimal microclimate while a loss in performance occurred in others jokl realized that environmental conditions affected the efficiency of workers also he called for an economic study to evaluate the impact of working environments on human efficiency in lorsch and abdou investigated the effect of air temperature on occupant productivity working conditions in both industrial and office work locations to raise occupant productivity by however temperatures providing optimum comfort might not necessarily give rise to maximum efficiency this matched with wyon s previous research finding they did not mention how to adjust the air temperature to improve the working efficiency one major reason was that no well defined relationship between thermal environment and human performance had at that time also no economic study had been developed for the evaluation urged by jokl two years later wyon summarized his previous findings on the effect of air temperature on human performance he recalled that thermal conditions providing optimal comfort might not give rise to maximum efficiency testing subjects had better performance in typing tasks and mental tasks at xc he also suggested that productivity loss was a both air temperature and the type of activity a set of experimental data was created that was useful for later research into human productivity in fisk and rosenfeld carried out a literature review to conclude a solid relationship between indoor environments and the working performance of occupants they estimated that there would be an annual productivity gain of billion by improving working environments such improvement also reduced the occurrence of sick building syndrome allergies asthma and respiratory infection inside a building which contributed to potential annual savings of billion a similar study was conducted in finland by seppanen who emphasized the negative consequence of poor indoor thermal environments he estimated that euro billion was lost due to a reduction in productivity under poor indoor environments these researchers reported the economic impact of poor thermal environments on human productivity there was no analytical method developed for quantitative evaluation on the productivity in niemela et al conducted a field test to evaluate the effect of air temperature on human productivity in two call centers of a telecommunication office in one of the centers there were two zones with different average room air temperatures the north zone had an air temperature of xc while the south zone s temperature was xc it was found that the productivity of workers in the zone was about in another center an extra cooling unit was installed to lower the room air temperature from the original setting of xc to the value close to the temperature in the north zone of the first center a similar rise of productivity of observed site results obtained in this research served as a useful reference in this study up to that moment all these studies suggested that there was a strong relationship between thermal environment and productivity the relationship was qualitative in nature it could not be used to set an air conditioning system to optimize human productivity as well as thermal comfort this could be realized by previous research findings in air conditioning control macarthur scheatzle henderson et al simmonds and tse and so proposed new air conditioning control that considered human comfort they claimed that such control had superior performance for human comfort energy consumption as compared to the conventional approach however human productivity was not a concern in their control algorithms for example simmonds proposed maintaining the pmv value of occupied zones within and without concern for the impact of this pmv range on human productivity he did not guarantee that it was the most competitive environment for occupants inside moreover it was necessary to justify the effort to create the favorable condition for human from the economic point of view which was strongly recommended by jokl this led to a study to investigate the impact of human productivity on air conditioning control as well as human comfort and energy consumption recently kosonen and tan made use of the experimental data from wyon and wyon et al to develop empirical formulae to quantitatively determine human two types of office activities namely thinking and typing two formulae were developed by using curve fitting techniques equation estimated the productivity loss of a typing task while equation estimated the loss of a thinking task which corresponded to the air temperature of xc mentioned by wyon to assess the credibility of the formulae the measured results from another research site were employed as reported by niemela et al there would be a productivity rise of the temperature changed from xc to xc in this case the occupants mainly performed physical work that was quite a typing task without information given by niemela et al it was assumed that the
soil decomposers and should thus be detrimental for them is that really the case to answer this question both the trophic and nontrophic effects of earthworms on nutrient cycling were included in the same compartment through their effect on nutrient cycling can nontrophic effects increase plant production as well as trophic effects does this occur under the same type of conditions as trophic effects and do nontrophic effects of decomposers on mineralization always decrease their own biomass methods throughout the paper for heuristic simplicity earthworms are also perhaps one of best examples of soil ecosystem engineers and are also quantitatively very important it is estimated that there are more than species of earthworms in the world they are present in most terrestrial ecosystems they often have very high biomasses plants plant detritus earthworms and three pools of inorganic nutrients resulting from the mineralization of plant detritus independently of earthworms and uptake rates by plants in the three recycling pathways denoted respectively by the subscripts d and without earthworm earthworm trophic effects and earthworm nontrophic effects these different leaching and uptake rates allow for differences in recycling efficiency between the pathways denitrification is not explicit in an output of nutrient for ecosystems earthworm nontrophic effects encompass all earthworm activities as ecosystem engineers that may lead to the mineralization of nutrients they do not assimilate this involves changes in soil structure consequent changes in soil hydrodynamics stimulation of soil microflora fragmentation of organic matter and incorporation of in turn plant biomass mortality and herbivory lead to a flux from the plant compartment to the plant detritus compartment for simplicity we consider that this compartment contains all soil organic matter ie litter dead roots and humus this organic matter is mineralized via the three pathways mentioned above in addition to leaching leading to losses of nutrients from the mineral of plant detritus due to erosion movements of litter along toposequences and fires and loss of plant biomass mainly due to fires there are four sources of nutrients inputs to the ecosystem atmospheric depositions of inorganic and organic nutrients brought by winds and rains fixation of atmospheric nitrogen by rhizospheric bacteria and weathering of the parent emigration of earthworms was excluded similarly only the input of inorganic nutrients into the compartment resulting from mineralization independent of earthworms was considered as the detritus compartment contains both the litter and the humified fraction of soil organic matter the model holds for any ecological type of earthworm most of them are donor controlled functions both the consumption of organic matter and the nontrophic effects of earthworms on mineralization are considered to be proportional to both the earthworm and soil organic matter compartments atmospheric deposits of organic and mineral nutrients are assumed to be constant also takes into account the to depend linearly nitrogen fixation is assumed to depend entirely on symbiotic fixation and is thus considered to be proportional to the size of the plant compartment which is composed of a fixed proportion of leguminosae for an ecosystem at equilibrium the model equations read as follows to display the results concisely and to make them more readily comprehensible they are expressed as a function of four expressions that can be interpreted as recycling efficiencies of the different recycling loops main recycling pathway without earthworms and were then interpreted as recycling efficiencies eqn each ratio composing d is the fraction of nutrients transmitted between compartments of the main recycling loop without being lost for the ecosystem thus the product of the three ratios is the fraction of nutrients recycled inside the ecosystem compartment to the detritus compartment for the two earthworm pathways eqn ee is the mean of ie and ai weighted by the fluxes of nutrients going through the earthworm trophic and nontrophic pathways although ne depends on the rates of mineralization due to trophic and nontrophic effects it reflects the recycling efficiency of requiring determination of cases for which an equilibrium exists it was shown that when fp an equilibrium can be attained when dp the plant compartment can never reach equilibrium because more nitrogen is fixed by symbiotic bacteria than plants can lose immediately recycled in this case equilibrium might be reached depending on the outputs and inputs of nutrients to the detritus and mineral nutrient compartments we now focus on situations where equilibrium can be attained to determine the effect of the different recycling loops the system must be studied with or without earthworms and with or without earthworm equilibrium stocks of the compartments can be expressed as a function of the model parameters the solutions to the system with the earthworms but without their nontrophic effects can be obtained taking the limit of the solution of the general system when med goes to be obtained by taking the limit of the solutions of the general system when ced goes to using the routh hurwitz criterion the equilibrium found for the system without earthworms was shown to be stable for the system with the earthworms the necessary condition for the stability of the equilibrium is met is always met however numerical simulations made with randomized parameters showed that the equilibrium is always stable finally at equilibrium all compartments of the model must be positive in order to be biologically meaningful we get eqn this condition means that the fraction of nutrients coming from the plant compartment and recycled back to this compartment must be smaller than otherwise if the considered nutrient is nitrogen and the fixation of atmospheric nitrogen is high enough and losses small enough the net nitrogen balance is positive whatever the size of the plant ecosystem accumulates nitrogen and cannot reach equilibrium similarly we can find the condition for using the expressions of and eqn with eqn earthworms can remain in the ecosystem in two circumstances depending on their effect on the detritus compartment and the efficiency to the detritus does not compensate for the losses from the detritus compartment when earthworms are present in this case
no evidence of this in quarter and no evidence that the value of shares traded varies with the abnormal return at the announcement the lack of any significant association with aret fd in period suggests that the value of insiders trades in period is not increased by the desire to profit from foreknowledge information in the filing not conveyed the results for period are sharply different the pattern of insider trades in this period suggests that insiders use their private information to derive both active and passive profits consistent with the realization of active profits insider trades measured in panel a by the signed frequency of trade is positively associated at better than the with the abnormal return of the forthcoming filing note from panel a that the coefficient on aret fd in specifications and are more than times the coefficient on aret ea in specifications and which implies that for a given abnormal return at the disclosure the effect on insider trades is more than times greater in period compared to period the significantly positive coefficient estimate on aret fd in period implies that insiders buy before filings interpreted by the market as good news and sell before filings interpreted as bad bad we turn next to panel where the dependent variable is the signed value of shares traded when all quarters are pooled the coefficient estimate on aret fd is significantly positive at the using a two tailed test thus there is evidence that the value of shares purchased by insiders is higher before a good news filing when the observations for quarters and quarter are analyzed separately the sign and magnitude of the coefficient estimates on aret fd is similar but the coefficient estimates on aret fd is similar but the relationship is insignificant consistent with the realization of passive profits insider trades measured either by the signed frequency or signed value of trade is negatively associated at the with the abnormal return at the preceding announcement the significantly negative coefficient estimate on aret ea in period is consistent with the notion that insiders sell after announcements interpreted by the market as good news and buy after announcements and buy after announcements interpreted as bad for period the coefficient estimates on the abnormal returns at the preceding filing and announcement both are significantly negative which is consistent with trade in period being driven in part by insiders passive use of private information such an association with past news also could arise from a contrarian trading strategy under which insiders condition their on past stock price movements so that they buy after bad news events and sell after good news events we control partially for the possibility of contrarian trading by including in the regressions prior retp the return over the six months before the beginning of period despite this contrarian trading with respect to the past filing or earnings announcement cannot be ruled out the coefficient estimates on aret ea and aret fd in specification of table for instance the coefficient estimate of on aret fd in panel a specification implies that an abnormal return of the filing increases the net number of insider purchases in period by an average of this coefficient implies that if firms experience abnormal returns at the filing of at one of those firms there would be one more insider purchase transaction than would be expected if those firms had experienced returns of of the filing this effect should be interpreted in light of the rarity of insider tradesi our data insider trade occurs in only firm quarters furthermore trades are spread over the days of the quarter while period is days at most turning to the coefficient estimate of in panel specification an abnormal return of the filing implies that the value of stock purchased by insiders in that from table the mean value of the net stock trades by firm insiders in period over all firm quarters is sold this implies that a at the filing is associated with an increase of in the value of stock purchased by insiders thus the associations documented in table while highly significant in a statistical sense are less significant from an economic standpoint before the earnings announcement so that insiders are not informed about earnings until the latter part of period in contrast at the start of period insiders likely know how the earnings figure was achieved although this information may not be publicly revealed until the filing date hence insiders may know at the beginning of period whether there is likely some further reaction by investors around the filing date to address this concern we reperform the analysis in specifications and and of table after shortening the periods over which we examine trades from days to days the results reported in table are qualitatively unchanged when we focus on just the days before and the days after the announcement window also in table the coefficient estimates on the prior retp and ln are consistent with prior findings in all periods consistent with rozeff and zaman the in panel a where the dependent variable is freqp in contrast in panel wherever the coefficient estimate is significantly different from zero it is negative so the value of insider net purchases decreases in the book to market ratio we note that rozeff and zaman evidence is based on the proportion of trades that are purchases not on the value of trades additional tests documented in table may be due in part to the paucity of insider trades in period as noted earlier all trades occur in period as compared to trades in periods and across firm quarters the mean values of total insider trades in periods and are and respectively one cause of the lower frequency and value of trades in period may be the higher jeopardy that attaches to the higher jeopardy that attaches to trades in this period however another explanation for fewer insider trades in period than in other periods may be
his great hydraulic and irrigation works are changing the geography of spain the backbone for a nationally integrated system for cycle was also under construction at the time of franco s death if the ideas of joaquin costa were based on the unity of the river basin as the framework for the implementation of hydraulic projects hydrologic planning after extended this framework to the national scale by advancing as one of its objectives the correction of the existing disequilibria on the iberian peninsula by means of interconnecting the political decision to go ahead with the transfer was taken by the council of ministers in but the actual works did not start before in its first phase hm would be transferred annually to the reservoirs of the the center for hydrographical studies one of its first missions was to undertake preliminary studies for the tajo segura and other possible water transfers this vision announced the end of the old concept of the hermetic boundaries of river basins water was from now july the government ordered the preparation of a transfer project proposal on february the project was formally approved and the council of ministers approved the beginnings of the works on september of the same year water is pumped over a height of meters and flows over a distance of kilometers basins at a depth of meters kilometers in aqueduct and the remainder in an open air canal in the then minister of public works gonzalo fern ndez de la mora invoked again the metaphor of hydraulic surgery to refer to these most important works in the hydraulic history of spain him as the great builder of great dams and an example unique in the world of a statesman who creates the hydraulic foundations for the progress of his people paco rana had indeed directed and overseen the complete socio hydraulic revolution of his fatherland of course this achievement depended crucially on the loyal support of a series of powerful interlocked often overlapped partially were occasionally antagonistic and required careful massaging and managing within an overall falangist programme and ideology i shall now turn to these national networks of interests that supported and consolidated the franco regime and together with the mobilization of water produced the assemblages that would and volume of reservoir water in spain sources diaz marta pinilla direcci general de obras hidraulicas toran and herreras mart mendiluce ministerio de medio ambiente producing networks of interest the socio economic and religious alliances that franco forged generated a maze of power relations imprisonment or exile the most activist parts of the oppositional movements while securing the loyalty of many royalists nationalists the church hierarchy the military and significant parts of the national industrial bourgeoisie the falange became the only legal political party and the conduit for franco s political support closely tied up with the state s investment flows the importance of some of these regimesupporting networks has been well documented however in the context of this paper i shall concentrate on those networks that have been neglected in the literature yet were vital for revolutionizing spain s hydro social geography these were networks of key ideologues and and symbolically the expanding national and integrated networks of dams pipes hydro machinery and irrigation systems in a unified and fascist spain these groups are the large landowners the electricians the engineers and the media water for the latifundistas while the rise of popular movements early in the particularly but not exclusively in southern spain while there was a technocratic engineering continuity the socially reformist republican agenda was radically altered in particular the defeat of the left in the civil war had broken the relationship between social reform and hydraulic infrastructure development major land redistribution programmes stopped the instituto de colonizaci set up originally to provide land to landless peasants became a great propagandistic tool but realized relatively little ultimately the inc acquired only hectares of irrigated land and settled colonists on these lands between and another hectares of non irrigated land of million hectares of newly or improved irrigated lands were serviced by the state during the franco era indeed the earlier socially motivated hydraulic regeneracionism was transformed into an ultraprotectionism of the latifundistas without much counterpart other than to support the regime something they unfailingly offered indeed the state covered the cost of infrastructure while the landowners reaped the benefits with an estimated per cent improvement of their economic return it is hardly surprising that large landowners became one of the social land problem would still be rhetorically mobilized franco s hydro politics has to be characterized as an agricultural counter reform that guaranteed the long term stability of the latifundia system however while large landowners would be able to expand irrigating the south hydro electrifying the north however a closer analysis suggests that the emphasis on irrigation was actually only one aspect of a much larger and arguably more important project the hydro electrification of spain indeed pez and pez ortiz until the late more than per cent of the energy needs of spain were generated through hydro electrical power between and installed hydro electric capacity increased from mw to mw generating a total production of million kwh in expanding to million kwh in after the relationship between irrigation and hydraulic works was further severed in favor of hydro electrical developments only of the dams constructed between and were destined for irrigation purposes while per cent of the created capacity was earmarked for energy generation in addition of franco s rule total energy capacity was over mw and production had reached gwh although the contribution of hydroelectricity had fallen from per cent in to a still significant per cent in hydro energy was absolutely vital for spain s modernization moreover the industrialization of from the rest of spain to the north and diluted further the remaining anti fascist regionalist cultures in these two regions the electricity production sector was closely allied with the network of interests that produced the fascist
thickness of the ocular layers and the physical properties of the corneal tissues these hypothetical mathematical models were used in an attempt to predict the relative impact of contact lens wear on corneal oxygenation however they were limited by the analytical and computational tools theoretical approach fem uses a geometric framework and a series of mathematical equations to compute the spatial distributions of the value of interest boundary conditions external loads and environmental conditions may also be included in the model a typical fem analysis breaks down the geometry of interest into arbitrarily small subregions or these elements are connected spatially and also be included in the model a typical fem analysis breaks down the geometry of interest into arbitrarily small subregions or these elements are connected spatially and through appropriate mathematical equations such that an overall system response to given inputs can be computed a rigorous discussion and derivation of the fem for diffusion is outside the scope of this article readers who are interested in the details of the underlying mathematics are referred to the inputs of the neighboring elements in this particular example fick s first law of passive diffusion describes the relationship between these inputs and outputs the fem is applicable for both dimensional problems and transient analysis furthermore coupled effects such as biofeedback loops can also be modeled efficiently with traditional analytical methods modeling these types of complex systems quickly becomes unmanageable because of the vast number of such as biofeedback loops can also be modeled efficiently with traditional analytical methods modeling these types of complex systems quickly becomes unmanageable because of the vast number of degrees of freedom available to each an additional advantage of fea is that explicit analytic solutions for differential equations are not needed instead numerical solutions are solved through the use of well established differential equation numerical algorithms computational burdens of analytic solutions thus fea permits the researcher to focus on properly representing a system s physical properties geometry and behavior of the system rather than worrying about setting up the system so that the mathematical presentation is easily solved therefore excessive simplifying assumptions such as slab geometry are not needed further giving the researcher freedom to explore additional real life considerations to wholly accept any results theoretical mathematical models one will need to validate those results against in vivo data brennan compared the anterior flux predicted from the bel model to the anterior flux predicted from an earlier eop based model derived from the in vivo eop data of the results were remarkably similar and seemed to offer evidence of the credibility of those models the similarity may be real or simply coincidental however serious concerns have been raised regarding the in vivo data of benjamin for this in this paper we develop a dimensional model intended to duplicate the bel model the fea model is intended to show only that these finite element methods can generate results that are equivalent to previously published mathematical models this does not imply that we validate or agree with the conclusions of any prior work rather we are establishing a starting point for the development of an improved model showing that this fea approach can duplicate prior results using previously asserted parameters assumptions and data we will use these equivalent results to extrapolate the previous model into dimensions to explore the effects of varied contact lens thickness and corneal geometry which are implicit in the previously asserted model assumptions and parameters fatt and irving predicted that the contact lens thickness variation would be an important parameter in these types effect of varied thickness profiles therefore a dimensional axisymmetric model was created using the applicable parameters from the bel model to look at the total thickness profile and effect this model includes the effect of thickness variation in both the contact lens and the cornea which was not previously explored by others this finite element model has also required us to assess the influence of the oxygen supply from the blood vessels near the the cornea which was not previously explored by others this finite element model has also required us to assess the influence of the oxygen supply from the blood vessels near the cornea sclera interface the findings of this model largely support the assertion of fatt and others that the lens thickness variation plays a critical role in corneal oxygenation because the full range of lens and corneal thickness variations have been largely ignored in previous models those data will be presented herein huang et al considered an average thickness for the contact lens but limited their analysis to a central mm diameter of the lens and did not consider thickness changes in the cornea in our model we will consider the entire contact lens diameter and thickness profile in combination with the overall cornea shape size and corneal thickening profile materials and methods our fems were developed in femlab the steady state diffusion application mode simply speaking the basic procedure for setting up a finite element diffusion analysis model is create the geometry define the physics of the system generate a finite element mesh and solve for the parameters of interest creating the geometry can be done in femlab or in a computer aided design program and imported into femlab defining the physics of the problem includes steps such as defining material permeability calculating oxygen consumption rates within the materials presented and defining known boundary conditions meshing is the process of dividing the geometry into small elements femlab typically handles this meshing process automatically but it can be performed under the control of the user to optimize the results femlab reduces the problem to a matrix representation from the model geometry and parameters to compute the solution computation can take anywhere from milliseconds depending on the complexity of the system and the computer hardware used one dimensional steady state model a fea model was created to emulate the bel model to show equivalence in approach the layers of the
effect on the expression of externalizing and internalizing symptoms in the israeli group according to culture specific models of human development context the present findings are consistent with these models and suggest that the resources living conditions child rearing attitudes and parenting practices available within the infant s ecology are likely to shape the effects of risk conditions on the development of competence and adaptation israeli and palestinian parents differed on a factors to child outcomes findings from the palestinian sample were consistent with abudabbeh s model on the special type of collectivism observed in arab families parents in this group adhered to more traditional gender role philosophies fathers were less involved in child rearing mothers perceived their work as motivated by the family s financial goals mothers reported caring for infants siblings as girls approximately two thirds of palestinian infants were cared for by a kin and all young couples lived within close quarters to their family of origin within this multigenerational extended family context specific effects of social support and maternal depression growth and adaptation particularly at the transition from infancy to early childhood keller et al consistent with this perspective social support an important feature of the collectivistic context had a more beneficial impact on child adaptation in the palestinian society where young working mothers rely on help from that a central predictor of children s behavior problems at years was the mother s lack of social support particularly among immigrant mothers these findings are also consistent with those of cutrona and colleagues who showed that social support had a more positive impact on mother and child s functioning in the family s status in the community and this factor may serve as a proxy for a range of growth promoting conditions in the child s environment the negative effects of maternal postpartum depression on the emergence of behavior problems have been demonstrated in numerous studies carter et al feldman may account for the culture specific effects of maternal depression on behavior problems for children growing in nuclear family settings the mother is often the infant s primary caregiver the nature of the mother infant relationship is critical for optimal growth and the infant s exposure to caregiving females of a multiple caregivers on a daily basis levine sharma fischer the impact of the mother s depressed mood may be somewhat attenuated another possibility is that in societies that stress self expression creativity and initiative as seen here in the child rearing goals of israeli parents child adaptation may be more susceptible elf sufficiency feldman reznick kochanska kuczynski or in providing sufficient external regulation for the development of self regulatory capacities field as a result the mother s depressive symptoms may be more crucial to child adaptation in such societies than in cultures that emphasize compliance and respect for elders for western children this hypothesis however is preliminary and requires replication in larger samples and various cultures to further specify the links between culture maternal depressive symptomatology and child adaptation longitudinal associations between the child s symbolization and tool use through special moments of play that are organized around face to face interactions parents in more traditional societies are less inclined to set a special time for play and periods of play are less distinguished from the stream of daily life klein rogoff et al in cultures that engage in face to face play the melstein damast et al slade still the fact that no cultural differences were found in levels of symbolic complexity indicates that parents in collectivistic societies find effective ways to facilitate child symbolization and future research is required to chart these pathways more fully the greater effect of maternal depressive in cultures that rely on affect matching maternal depression which compromises the development of mother infant synchrony feldman field has a more negative impact than in societies that rely on other modes of parent infant relatedness limitations of the findings should be noted the two groups were not of equal size and matched on a range of demographic variables some unknown or unmeasured factor may have contributed to the reported outcomes this study presents the first effort to follow the development of infants and families in the palestinian society and much further research is required to chart the growth trajectories of children in that society adverse conditions luthar cicchetti resilience has generally been studied in relation to interpersonal and social factors and recently its biological underpinnings have been addressed curtis cicchetti the present findings underscore the need to include culture in the study of resilience in addition to its biological roots and factors in the face of adversity in certain cultural or subcultural contexts but not in others resilience therefore need to be studied in relation to the core features of the culture and its availability for a specific child or family at important nodes further research is require to elucidate the theoretical empirical and better understanding of early ecological risk and its accumulation may enable the construction of more efficient interventions that are suited to the child s social context and can help promote competence and adaptation in the early years in ways that are consistent with the cultural goals and meaning systems is anchored on the sociocultural side by distributed cognition and participation and on the cognitive side by information structures we interpret information structures as the contents of distributed knowing and interaction in activity systems conceptual understanding is considered as achievement of discourse in activity systems and conceptual growth is change in discourse practice that supports more effective conceptual understanding we also introduce a concept of in which accounts of cognition including conceptual understanding include points of view this concept generalizes the concept of schema by hypothesizing that a perspectival understanding can be constructed by constraint satisfaction when a sufficient schema is not known or recognized we provide an example in which perspectival understanding was jointly constructed illustrating an interactional process we call constructive listening the title of this special issue
methods advocated in the target article generate vigorous and empirically successful explanations wither and deeper cross disciplinary understanding will flourish the psychology of decision making in a unified behavioral science by highlighting the fact that decisions result from multiple systems in the mind it also adds to the unified view the idea that the potential to self critique preference structures is a unique feature of human cognition gintis is right that psychology has largely missed the insight that decision making is the central brain function in humans he is right again that his unification of the behavioral sciences theory and game theory could help greatly to drive this insight home putting aside the past sins of the discipline though i think that psychology can add detail to the unified theoretical structure that gintis lays out with such skill the juncture where the unified view needs elaboration is explicitly pointed to by gintis it is the juncture in our ecology as gintis notes the bpc model is based on the premise that choices are consistent not that choices are highly correlated with welfare itness cannot be equated with well being in any creature humans in particular live in an environment so dramatically different from that in which our preferences evolved that it seems to be miraculous that we are as capable as we are of achieving high levels of individual well being ur preference caught up with our current environment a role for psychology in the unified view is that of emphasizing that mismatches between the modern environment and the eea necessitate a distinction between subpersonal and personal optimization a behavior that is adaptive in the evolutionary sense is not necessarily instrumentally rational for the organism the processes that generate the biases may actually be optimal evolutionary adaptations but they nonetheless might need to be overridden for instrumental stanovich west of course talk of one set of cognitive processes being overridden by another highlights the relevance of multiple process views in cognitive science including the dual process theories now enjoying a resurgence in psychology theories that differentiate autonomous phenomenal aspect of human decision making that any unified view must at some point address that humans in the modern world often feel alienated from their choices the domains in which this is true are not limited to situations of intertemporal conflict this alienation although emotionally discomfiting is actually a reflection of an aspect of analytic processing that can contribute to human welfare analytic allow us to mark a belief as a hypothetical state of the world rather than a real one decoupling abilities prevent our representations of the real world from becoming confused with representations of imaginary situations that we create on a temporary basis in order predict the effects of future actions thus the world so that they can be reflected upon and potentially improved decoupling abilities vary in their recursiveness and complexity at a certain level of development decoupling becomes used for so called meta representation thinking about thinking itself meta representation the representation of one s own representations is what enables the self critical well we are forming beliefs become possible because of meta representation as does the ability to evaluate one s own desires to desire to desire differently humans alone appear to be able to represent not only a model of the actual preference structure currently acted upon the second order preference then becomes a motivational competitor for the first order preference the resulting conflict signals what nozick terms a lack of rational integration in a preference structure such a mismatched first order secondorder preference structure is one reason why humans are often less rational than bees are in an axiomatic sense has constituted an interdisciplinary nucleus around which a single unified theoretical and empirical behavioral science has been crystallizing while progressively resolving problems that bedevil gintis s beliefs preferences and constraints framework although both frameworks are similar ep is empirically better supported theoretically richer and offers deeper unification we applaud gintis s call for the unification of the behavioral sciences within an evolutionary framework and his objections to the parochialism and lack of seriousness that have allowed however gintis comments that prior to his proposal the last serious attempt at developing an analytical framework for the unification of the behavioral sciences was by parsons and shils gintis s proposal might be clearer if he had addressed evolutionary psychology as a fully formulated alternative framework is not serious or the name evolutionary psychology misleads him into thinking it is only a branch of psychology rather than an encompassing framework for unifying the behavioral sciences evolutionary psychology started with the same objections to the same ambition gintis expresses the eventual seamless theoretical unification of the behavioral sciences gintis says psychology could be the centerpiece of the human behavioral sciences by providing a general model of decision making for the other behavioral disciplines to use and elaborate for their various purposes the field fails to hold this position because its core theories do not take the fitness enhancing character of the human brain its capacity complex environments as central this exact rationale drove the founding of evolutionary psychology decades ago but such statements sound time warped in when countless researchers across every behavioral science subfield both within and beyond psychology take the the brain as a decision making organ and the fitness enhancing character of the human brain as the central starting point for their research but it is illuminating to examine where they diverge for example ep would consider evolutionary game theory an ultimate not a proximate theory more importantly ep rests on the recognition that in cause and effect terms it is the information processing structure of our evolved neurocomputational mechanisms that is actually responsible computational decision making devices accordingly computational descriptions of these evolved programs are the genuine building blocks of behavioral
and geographically with the minimum of friction and increasingly performance oriented pools of managed assets grow disproportionately as part of the asian financial landscape the implications for corporate governance and economic restructuring is likely to be inescapable summary and conclusions the focus of this paper has been the structure conduct and performance of the a domestic and global flow of funds framework as collective investment vehicles with the emphasis on its three principal components mutual funds and hedge funds pension funds and assets under management for high net worth individuals and their interlink ages evolution of the three asset management domains was then linked to the development of asian capital markets and the process of corporate governance and economic restructuring several conclusions can be drawn management industry in asia is likely to grow substantially in the years ahead institutionalization and professional management of household discretionary assets through mutual funds has probably run its course for the time being in terms of market share in some countries but has barely begun in many of the asian countries that have traditionally been dominated by bank assets demographic and structural problems in national pension systems will require asset pools as pay as you go systems become increasingly unsupportable fiscally and alternative means of addressing the problem show themselves to be politically difficult or impossible to implement as a matter of global concern there are however substantial differences of view as to the timing of these developments within national environments since pension reform is politically difficult to carry out and the political willingness to do so in both mutual funds and pension funds and their linkage through participant influenced defined contribution pension schemes the center of global growth is likely to be highly intense in the near term in western europe and then shift to asia in the medium term second proliferation of asset management products will no doubt increase in asia as financial markets become more fully integrated among asian asset managers and in some cases changing levels of concentration especially in the fast growing pension fund sector as new players are allowed to enter there may also be consolidation in some markets in view of the importance of economies of scale in fund management and fund distribution however as in the us the role of fund supermarkets low cost distribution via the internet as well as a large contingent of universal banks insurance companies and foreign fund management companies is likely to prevent market structure from becoming monopolistic to any significant degree fund performance is likely to become a commodity in some markets with few differences among the major players and the majority of actively managed funds underperforming the indexes this implies a competitive playing field that will be heavily conditioned by branding advertising and distribution channels third despite the prospects for rapid growth the asset management industry in asia is likely to be increasingly competitive in addition to normal commercial rivalry among established local players in each country the larger markets should be aggressively targeted by foreign suppliers of asset management services natural barriers to entry in the asset management industry which include the need for capital investment in infrastructure human resources technology and the realization of economies of scale and scale are not excessively difficult for newcomers to surmount so the degree of internal external and intersectoral competition in this industry is likely to promote market efficiency for the benefit of the end users in managing discretionary household asserts pension funds the wealth of high net worth individuals and other types of asset pools fourth the evolution of the asian institutional asset management industry will a major impact on financial markets the needs of highly performance oriented institutional investors will accelerate the triage among competing debt and equity markets in favor of those that can best meet their evolving requirements for liquidity execution efficiency transparency and efficient regulation in turn this will influence where firms and public entities choose to issue and trade securities in their search for cost effective financing and execution at the same time the growing presence of institutional investors will increase the degree of liquidity due to their active trading patterns create a ready market for new classes of securities and enhance opportunities for the sales and trading activities of banks and securities firms and for the role of product development and research in providing useful investment ideas fifth cross border asset allocation will grow disproportionately as a product of portfolios through international portfolio diversification this is inherently a global process so that the gains will depend on intermarket correlations of interest rates exchange rates equity markets and other asset classes worldwide sixth the development of a deeper and broader capital market in asia spurred by the development of the institutional asset management industry will have a more fluid one focused on financial performance and shareholder value this should facilitate economic restructuring and creating industries that are encouraged to disengage from uncompetitive activities through the denial of capital and at the same time promoting leading edge industries though venture capital and other forms of start up financing such a transformation will hardly be painless and will depend critically on political will and public support for a more process finally developments in institutional asset management will pose strategic challenges for the management of financial institutions in extracting maximum competitive advantage from this high growth sector in structuring and motivating their organizations and in managing the conflicts of interest and professional conduct problems that can arise in asset management and can easily cause major problems for the value of an institution competitive franchise the fact that institutional institutional asset management requires a global perspective both on the buy side and on the sell side reinforces the need to achieve a correspondingly global market positioning for a few major financial institutions although technology and the changing economics of distribution virtually assures the survival of a healthy cohort of asset management boutiques and specialists in quantitative terms the effects
a concisely written strategy statement as a blueprint for all subsequent decision making and resource allocation over a specific time period the development of various informal partnering initiatives with customers suppliers and other external parties purpose of communicating with various members of a prospective customer s decision making unit the systematic use of comprehensive sales force reporting procedures the systematic use of new business win and lose reviews follow ups the setting up of customer advisory panels as a source of feedback information and ideas the occasional use of short term company wide marketing intelligence setting the higher performers apart can be summed up in one phrase staff involvement without question for the higher performers strategic marketing is a truly cross functional activity to the point that traditional inter departmental boundary lines become somewhat blurred beyond its two specific objectives this research has served a number of purposes besides providing further validation for the general applicability of the basic textbook previously identified it has offered practical guidelines and insights into the how to of effective strategic marketing in manufacturing firms which it is hoped will be of value to both marketing practitioners and educators alike in the process it has shown that there remains much scope for further and more detailed studies while it is recommended that such research would do well to employ our approach of higher and lower performing firms operating in the same market hindsight shows that it could be refined first in order to be more confident that findings are truly indicative of the differences between the marketing practices of higher and lower performing medium sized firms it would be necessary to increase the sample size secondly insights could be enriched by more involving qualitative research methods such as necessitate a considerable additional investment of time effort and commitment however if we are serious about bridging what has been called the gap or divide between marketing academe and marketing practice the time has come as suggested by tapp for strategic marketing success researchers to meet the challenge head on agency firm relationship abstract purpose this paper aims to focus on the advertising agency firm relationship and aims at understanding and analyzing its dynamics in particular it digs deep into the reasons behind success and failure of the relationship and attempts to unveil their determinants this investigation is deemed important because a breaking of the advertising agency firm relationship is costly for both parties design methodology approach an exploratory study is conducted among partners of the relationship in a tunisian small to medium sized business context in depth interviews were conducted among key executives from the ad agency industry and from clients content analysis made it possible to extract factors related to ad agency performance others related to client management and still others related to interactive processes involved in the relationship findings results led to the development of theoretical framework summarizing the three components of the relationship these are performance of the ad agency internal policy of the firm and interpersonal factors this framework is deemed relevant for both ad agencies and firms in understanding the dynamics of the relationship and in managing eventual conflicts originality value the originality of the research lies in the fact that it focuses on the interactive aspects of the relationship and takes into account not only the role of the advertising agency but also that of the client in developing and maintaining such a relationship this approach allows one to unveil areas of convergence and areas of divergence between both parties roles perceptions introduction the transition from transactional to relational conceptualizations represents a true as a continuous interdependent long term relational exchange process this is why researchers are more and more geared towards investigating the benefits generated from the durability of the relationship the advertising agency firm relationship represents the main focus of this study the rapid increase in the number of professional service providers and the volume of costs that may accrue from the breaking of the advertising agency firm relationship of the present paper both advertising agencies and firms are believed to desire strong long term beneficial relationship and will avoid activities that will jeopardize this relationship the main aim of the present research is to identify factors of success or failure of the advertising agency firm relationship and to analyze its dynamics in order to attain such an objective a review of the literature about professional services and about ad agency firm relationship is conducted and an exploratory study of the relationship is performed literature review the advertising agency firm relationship was studied as an interactive relationship as an agency relationship and as a professional service because of the roles involved in the process of the advertising agency firm relationship development interdependency is of utmost importance to the system trends in the literature that are deemed relevant to the subject matter are professional service relationships role conceptualizations the service provider selling approach and the advertising agency firm relationship professional services relationships the service marketing focuses in general on the differences between products and services the theoretical and practical implications of such differences on marketing and service firms need to be investigated this is why researchers are more and more geared towards the study of marketing relationships in the service sector the revolution witnessed by service marketing has led to the interactionist approach this approach labelled relationship marketing was spread throughout the it is a new vision of exchange relationships between partners relationship marketing perceives marketing as a bundle of relations and as a interactions and focuses on long term relationships interaction is at the core of the relationship it is defined as an open system in which an organization has a direct influence on its client and is itself influenced by its client s behavior and characteristics interaction focuses on mutuality confidence and social distance between actors involved in the relationship both buyer and seller are perceived as active parties
morse smale functions we discuss these relations in remark cobordism of morse functions basic constructions this subsection is concerned with the basic definitions and properties of morse cobordisms a manifold with boundary our definition is designed to ensure that the standard construction of the chain complex in the closed case extends to a construction of a chain complex for a morse smale function on a manifold with boundary let be a compact manifold possibly with non empty boundary a morse function is a smooth function with nondegenerate critical points ind of such a function and we let crit be the set of all critical points of given a morse function and a riemannian metric aon let be the gradient vector field of let ft be the flow on induced by so that on a compact manifold with boundary is a morse function together with a riemannian metric such that for each boundary component of one of the two following conditions is satisfied is regular on meaning that for all boundary if remark the classical definition of a morse smale function assumes the boundary behavior of let be defined when condition is satisfied then crit normal to the boundary is null for all and if crit we have index by criti for crit the space of flow lines of f that join to is homeomorphic to any intersection wu nws where a is some regular value of such that a the space tx by demanding that the orientation on tx and that on tx give that fixed on tx moreover as ws wu are contractible these orientations induce orientations of the tangent spaces to the whole stable and unstable manifolds for a point we now let be equal to if the orientation of tz and that of tz in this order give the orientation induced on tz from tp finally let of a morse smale function is defined by the coefficient morse complex is defined for a morse smale function and a regular cover of with group of covering translations let and let a be the pullback of the critical points are the lifts of the critical points of fix two of critical points criti and crit as each path in that originates at lifts to a unique path in of origin the space of flow lines of that join to one of the points is homeomorphic to in particular for the sum below is well defined and satisfies and this clearly depends on the choices of the lifts more invariantly the coefficient morse complex can be written as remark in the classical situation is a morse smale function on a cobordism this fits into our definition of a morse smale function provided that is regular on ni and its negative a handle decomposition the handle decomposition of gives the structure of a relative cw pair with one cell for each handle franks paper identifies the morse complex of with the associated cellular chain complex it is easy to verify that the definition gives a chain complex also in our more general context with limit then is situated on a possibly broken flow line originating at in fact one of the proofs that the morse complex is indeed a complex is obtained by understanding precisely the natural compactifications of the spaces of flow lines choice of metric a is clear from the context also by an abuse of terminology we shall write as and as definition a cobordism from a morse smale function to a morse smale function remark we denote a morse cobordism as before by clearly and play different roles in the definition above however because we only work here with compact manifolds it follows from lemma below that morse smale functions are cobordant if and only if the manifolds are cobordant and therefore the morse cobordism relation is an equivalence that no negative gradient flow lines of can leave towards m similarly no trajectory can enter from the interior due to condition example an dimensional cobordism admits an embedding and such that the height function is morse smale on m as is constant on and it is not a cobordism of restricts to morse smale functions on and this is not yet a cobordism of morse smale functions as in because the component of the gradient of the height function that is normal to does not generally vanish as we shall see in lemma below it is possible to perturb the height function in a neighborhood of such that the resulting function becomes a cobordism of morse smale functions mapping cone of a chain map is the chain complex defined by a chain homotopy determines an isomorphism of the algebraic mapping cones if are based free module chain complexes then is a simple isomorphism of based free module chain complexes let be a cobordism of morse smale functions there are types of critical points of the morse complex of is given by is simple chain equivalent to with homology the quotient complex of is simple chain equivalent to with homology the subquotient complex of is simple chain equivalent to with homology the two entries df in the second column of dc for any corresponding to the three entries in the third column of dc slightly extend to a manifold by pasting to collars homeomorphic to and we also extend the function and the metric ato is regular on then by standard morse theory is simple chain equivalent to on the other hand we have the projection from to is given by the kernel of this projection is precisely and this complex is therefore to the chain inclusion is a chain representative of the inclusion combine and a particular type of morse cobordism will play an important role further on definition a cobordism of morse smale functions the identity extends to a diffeomorphism the inclusions induce simple chain equivalences with the coefficient cellular chain complex of any cw structure on the chain map a neighborhood of such that the
and fowler and significantly reinterprets milton s seven continued nights twelve rather than twenty four hour units as a result satan s journey occupies only three and a half days in his epic time scheme however by not correlating milton s cosmography with his geographical description crump offers a reading that suffers from underdevelopment and inconsistency pace crump milton does on occasion use day to mean a twenty four hour period crump s favorite prooftext for the rebels nights is one which in fact refers to their stupor for crump consequently the fall of satan and his crew should be allocated four and a half days with satan returning before sunset that is more than half of a twelve hour unit before his due time at midnight while crump critiques the arguments of qvarnstrom and fowler because they bring the fiend a higher degree of precision under scrutiny all three critics do appear to agree that the colures are great circles on the surface of the earth a position rejected by the next two challengers to the orthodox interpretation malabika sarkar and sherry lutz zively sarkar and zively take the colures to be lines in the sky rather than on the surface of the globe the first to postulate celestial colures sarkar offers a meticulous satan s sojourn challenging some long held assumptions while adhering to a temporal outline identical with fowler s she does not correlate any other findings with milton s geographical details but because she has satan re enter paradise on the eighth night the information given in must fit within the seven day cycle already described in astronomical terms her novel reading insists that satan spends a great deal of time in the sky several difficulties because the fiend begins his journey at the aperture in the cosmos s protective shell the radial component of his trip requires fuller moreover abiding by sarkar s conditions makes it difficult if not impossible to keep satan in darkness throughout his there is the additional problem that cross ing the car of night makes little sense when the fiend does not even touch is perhaps mere detail we might concede with qvarnstrom yet his standard of precision remains applicable if our analysis is to claim a firm textual basis we cannot afford to be less exact than the poet himself even if sarkar s model is adjusted to meet such objections it breaks down regarding the ambiguity of the celestial sphere an issue at the very heart of her interpretation as any dictionary of astronomical terms will explain the celestial the colures is an imaginary sphere of which the earth is usually considered the center but whose radius is not it is used as an aid to define the virtual position of celestial bodies in the sky considered as a two dimensional expanse thus every feature of the celestial sphere is on it only by virtue of projection to designate the celestial sphere as the physical location of satan s astronomical travels is a tremendous oversimplification at best at worst sarkar s reinterpretation of the grand circles as celestial rather than earthly receives expansion and development in zivley s hypothesis she argues not only that satan is in orbit through the heavens but also that his geographically described rounds can only be sequentially related to his space travels moreover she finds textual evidence for another day s journey at the beginning of the episode in zivley comments regarding satan s first orbit in compassing the earth satan orbits the earth and remains hidden in darkness for a period of one night and day thus zivley reads and as two consecutive events adding up on a linear chronology as days a distinction which proves in the end highly suspect by the same logic could be considered subsequent to instead readers including zivley understand returned in as a repetition of the line the same should apply to the rest of the passage with the verb returned in referencing the same event as in and is there is but one excursion of seven orbits ending in a single return with the details of that journey being only gradually revealed satan returned at night he returned at midnight he returned on the eighth night at midnight more importantly zivley s reading does violence to milton s text evident milton s description of orbits for zivley s reading to hold thence in must be taken to refer to satan s supposed first return from compassing the earth rather than to uriel s discovery of his entrance and forewarning of the angels on guard which is syntactically much more proximate and plausible furthermore why would satan be driven full of anguish through his second to eighth orbits but not the first while milton s descriptions are consecutive the events to they refer are not a point that cannot be forgotten milton speaks of a single journey of seven days and when he says that satan returned he always refers to one and the same return on the eighth night zivley also suggests that the geographically described orbits of should be added to the previous tally of one plus seven rounds rather than read as a repeated description of them another argument that loses force once examined distinguishing between seven astronomically and two geographically described rounds in terms of satan s distance from the surface of the earth lacks textual support zivley differs from sarkar in that she places satan on the sun s sphere rather than on the outermost layer of the cosmos but she does not explain her choice and it is hard to see how her declaration is more than an arbitrary fiat besides the colures are on the celestial sphere and not on the identity of the two is at least highly questionable likewise the descriptions do not necessarily entail satan s perspective thus there is no need to suppose that he sees the earth from astronomical distances in the former
instrumentalism integration as social inclusion is a world apart from classic nation building as cultural homogenization however there is still a perfectionist dimension to it and one with paternalist obligation imposing possibilities in the sense that being in work is not just a means for an income but is seen as of intrinsic importance to an individual s well being and thus to be pursued or social inclusion is social cohesion that is order not justice this distinguishes social inclusion as a foucauldian liberalism from the rawlsian liberalism of equal opportunities which had been the lode star of the classic welfare state whereas the aim of equality of opportunity seeks to put people in a position in which they are able to participate in the economy and other aspects of social life the aim of social inclusion also seems to include people to become included there are no rights without responsibilities social inclusion is not about equality social inclusion does not seek the same outcomes for citizens it concentrates its attention on the absolute disadvantage of particular groups in society it is thus obvious that social inclusion like the entire project of integrating immigrants is still a statist project perhaps to rescue the post nationalism the labor market focus of social inclusion fits in with this because autonomous individuals increase the competitiveness of states as axiomatically assumed survival units in the global context interestingly while the state elites devising such policies are increasingly part of cross border spanning professional networks and affiliations the ow skilled immigrant more firmly into established state borders consonant with alan milward s original european rescue of the nation state scenario even ec migration policies are serving member states purpose of locking in the immigrants article of the long term residents directive of november allows member states to apply their integration measures to long term residents from another eu state if only with respect to which of course do not exist for eu citizens erect a significant hurdle on free movement for europe s settled immigrant populations and this within a measure whose declared purpose had been to remove such hurdles however a foucauldian perspective of repressive liberalism should not be pushed too far rather than springing from generic features of a neoliberal state that is seen as fla lchendeckend engaged in a coercive policies are not all of one piece instead the different contours of these policies in different states reflect other than statist variables the left right balance of the political forces or the demographic profile of migrants among other possibilities the netherlands pressured by a uniquely strong right wing populist movement went further than other european states in expanding the the obligatory thrust of this policy has remained more subdued the policy bearing more resemblance to remedial settlement aids for newcomers moreover only in the netherlands has the policy became truly privatised as neoliberalism would have it in making migrants fully responsible and paying for their integration in france by contrast there was no question that in the re founding of integration the superficial contractual element in civic integration even allowed the policy to be associated with a rejuvenation of french republicanism creating a space for opposing the obligatory and repressive trend of the policy moreover if one asks why long established newcomer reception policies in classic immigrant nations like canada and australia have remained area are overall marked by a repressive tone an alleged logic of the neoliberal state cannot be an answer to this instead a plausible explanation must center on the different ways of selecting newcomers in the transoceanic immigrant nations and in europe canada and australia select predominantly highly skilled resourceful and language competent immigrants which removes the point of coercive integration the majority all but they enter on the basis of rights through family reunification and asylum because a majority of these migrants are unskilled and not proficient in the language of the receiving societies and often directly become dependent on welfare they pose serious adjustment problems in sum the obligatory and repressive dimension of civic integration in europe cannot be decoupled from the non selected quality of most of its civic integration policies in the netherlands france and germany revealed significant variation in their respective national interpretations and implementations does this not confirm the persistence of national models of integration and thus refute the central claim of this paper unsurprisingly the answer must be no most of the observed variation runs counter to what the national models that shuns cultural assimilation while its pragmatic stress on the principle of becoming rapidly autonomous betrays an acceptance of the otherwise despised tenets of neoliberalism adopted the least control minded most canadian variant of civic integration even the nastier possibilities that seem to be brewing there would only bring germany more firmly in line with its european neighbors most notably the netherlands a framework for the unification of the behavioral sciences developments have created the conditions for rendering coherent the areas of overlap of the various behavioral disciplines the analytical tools deployed in this task incorporate core principles from several behavioral disciplines the proposed framework recognizes evolutionary theory covering both genetic and cultural evolution as the integrating principle of behavioral science moreover if decision theory and game theory are broadened to encompass other regarding preferences they of modeling all aspects of decision making including those normally considered psychological sociological or anthropological the mind as a decision making organ then becomes the organizing principle of psychology introduction the behavioral sciences encompass economics biology history legal studies and philosophy these disciplines have many distinct concerns but each includes a model of individual human behavior these models are not only different which is to be expected given their distinct explanatory goals but also incompatible nor can this incompatibility be accounted for by the type of causality involved although adopting the beliefs techniques and cultural practices of successful individuals is a major mechanism of cultural transmission there is constant cultural mutation and individuals may
example is preterm birth defined as birth before completed weeks of gestation it is the number being the leading cause of neonatal mortality prematurity contributes to lifelong morbidity for many children including vision and hearing problems chronic medical conditions and neurodevelopmental impairment the incremental rise in preterm birth in the us continued in reaching the highest rate ever reported are known to predict preterm birth and fewer clinical interventions to prevent preterm birth new and promising research directions are very much needed to attack this problem and the emerging field of genomics offers that promise preterm birth is increasingly understood to result from genetic epidemiology and applied genomic research the environmental contributors to preterm birth have been extensively studied including multifetal gestation infection stress and many others but a strategy aimed exclusively at eliminating environmental risk factors has not been in the rate of preterm birth several studies of twin and familial aggregation have indicated a genetic component to preterm birth between a quarter and a third of the variation in the risk of preterm expand their knowledge about genetic influences on preterm birth including the molecular methods of studying this genetic link and the implications for practice many important questions require attention such as use of information about genetic susceptibility to preterm birth and devising genomic approaches in research and clinical care benefit but new risk assessment strategies that take into account personal or family history might be useful a previous preterm birth increases one s risk for prematurity in subsequent pregnancies increasing literature shows that risk for prematurity is partly heritable and thus family history if studied fully would likely be a valuable predictor of risk how family history affects perinatal outcomes research the family history is such an important and critical tool that every nurse should feel comfortable in taking a thorough family history and creating at least a three generation pedigree web based tools now exist to facilitate this skill and process a hypothetical algorithm that shows risk stratification and would include questions regarding whether first and second degree relatives ever had a preterm birth or were born prematurely themselves a scoring system would have to be designed in research protocols to codify that risk but the risk could likely be graded generally as average moderate or high genomics is part of this risk stratification can serve as the cornerstone for individualized disease prevention for average risk the routine components of preconception and prenatal care would be recommended this set would include the many aspects of assessing risk and modifying modifiable risk factors such as taking over the counter supplements and making sure they are safe during pregnancy optimally managing medical conditions such as diabetes and hypertension to limit their effects on pregnancy avoiding all alcohol smoking and illicit drug use maintaining a healthy weight and limiting stress if risk assessment does nothing else but drive more women into the routine aspects of preconception children s lives improved for those with moderate risk based on personal or family history modifiable risk factors such as targeted smoking cessation counseling or intensive diabetes management might be recommended follow up may be more frequent and enrollment in community based programs for support might be an added option to decrease the risk of another preterm birth would be warranted progesterone has been shown in several studies to reduce the recurrence risk of preterm birth in women carrying singleton pregnancies by approximately this approach of risk stratification based on personal and family history is shown in the figure and it exemplifies of such an approach require further study no aspect of health care is more important than the preconception and prenatal periods as the critical time to intervene and improve birth outcomes a variety of other perinatal outcomes such as small for gestational age or intrauterine growth restriction preeclampsia sziller et al are beginning to be studied as to their genetic basis thus the trend toward a genomic approach is growing research is also showing the relationships among genomic proteomic and metabalomic predictors and environmental interactions that may place some women at greater risk of adverse pregnancy outcomes than others be able to more effectively use this personal risk information in their patient education efforts for example although smoking is a risk factor for all pregnant women its effects may be more profound for those who have genetic polymorphisms in the cytochrome or the glutathione systems that modulate the biotransformation of the toxicants in cigarette born to women without these genetic polymorphisms a personal or family history of smoking during pregnancy and a preterm birth as shown in the figure might provide valuable insight into the possible genetic susceptibility that a family might share through its genetic connection this information can be used by nurses applying motivational interviewing techniques with the trans theoretical in the future genetic testing might be validated for use in predicting susceptibility and thus genetic testing might stimulate behavior change more research is needed to see if knowledge of genetic susceptibility will enhance motivation and behavior change and nurses can play a key role in leading such research will last a lifetime this approach is needed now and nursing research education and advocacy are strong and integral activities toward that goal surgical considerations in early pregnancy ectopic pregnancy and ovarian torsion will discuss the physiology and pathophysiology evaluation diagnosis clinical management options and nursing considerations for ovarian torsion and ectopic pregnancy both conditions require timely diagnosis to prevent mortality and minimize morbidity and both may require surgical management key words ectopic pregnancy ovarian torsion pregnancy complications early pregnancy evaluation of these symptoms in the first trimester should lead to a differential diagnosis that includes appendicitis ectopic pregnancy and ovarian torsion appendicitis is considered the leading cause of acute abdominal pain in pregnancy and its treatment during pregnancy is well described in the medical the first trimester but as a cause of acute abdominal pain it occurs more often in the pregnant patient than in the both conditions can
comprised of seneca and the stoics the lives of the catholic saints the continuing popularity of the medieval treatises on the art of dying patient griselda stories and the careers and tribulations of both protestant and jewish martyrs to conclude that by the end of the seventeenth century the heroics of endurance ultimately takes of action thus oroonoko s heroic agency is manifested in the non suicidal endurance of suffering but the student objection is not completely misguided as resistance to the term shows self mutilation to be valor if and only if it is judged as such passive valor like novelty is interpreted not intrinsic even in the narrator s most complete assessment of it when any war was waging two men were chosen out by some old captain could only teach the theory of war these two men were to stand in competition for the generalship or great war captain and being brought before the old judges now past labour they are ask d what they dare do to shew they are worthy to lead an army when he who is first ask d making no reply cuts off his nose and throws it contemptably on the ground and the other does something to himself that he thinks surpasses him and perhaps deprives himself of lips and an eye so until one gives out and many have died in this debate and tis by a passive valour they shew and prove their activity while stoicism is traditionally stagey the sufferer need act as if an external audience were watching him behn s passive valor does away with stoicism s as if without an audience it does not exist and even with an audience it may not context of a contest it is consciously presented to be judged in another departure from traditional stoicism behn s self mutilation is a necessary stepping stone to militaristic exploits a kind of endurance that exists to foreshadow the captains potential to prove their activity through courageous deeds ideally self mutilation is a precursor to the mutilation of another yet in contrast to a militaristic prowess denoted by conquest and defeat gains its meaning from the spectators who evaluate actions from which they are removed passive valor protects its defining audience from dictatorial violence both physical and semantic despite its stoic associations it must be interpreted as opposed to endured in a sense the above is true of any spectacle which by definition involves a split between observer and observed even the active valor of a warrior the described warrior might find himself in a spectacular position he does not consciously place himself there whereas the captains who demonstrate passive valor do so quite purposefully for the benefit of an audience passive valor thus advertises its own dependence on interpretation valor displayed passively promotes active engagement on the part of the spectator who is asked to read courage into markers that do not enact it on another person self contained these passive spectacles require audience involvement in an intellectual if not a physical sense readers are frustrated by what they see as oroonoko s passivity his inability to kill others his inability even to kill himself they want him to learn then do something to master a concept or skill that will enable him to exact revenge and exert vengeance yet such mastery would destroy novelty such activity would destroy a receptive instead the lesson provided by the war captains that oroonoko learns and implements is one of process more than precept the practice of self mutilation is repeated as the audience and audience evaluations of it shift like the kiss it constantly creates the space for a variable novel response as a spectator to these displays oroonoko learns how to read the war captains then how to be read like them the importance of these spectacles is that they prompt characters to read providing an explicit lesson that would foreclose the interpretative process on which novelty is founded show do nt tell passivity as behn treats it thus invokes familiar theories of pedagogy and visuality in teaching and writing we deploy the classic formulation show do nt tell to encourage a facilitative as opposed to directive approach to communication this method forbids dictatorial pronouncements and advocates on their own terms and novelty within oroonoko seems especially dependent on the show do nt tell formulation since the truly exotic must be seen to be believed and definitions and linguistic representations can describe the new only in terms of the familiar and yet of course all these spectacles the tiger s heart the circulated body parts the war captains scars are visual markers trapped within the very spectacles that defy description the linguistic emphasis on the necessity of sight produces within the tale the debates about its veracity that many readers project onto it a mere account of the bullet addled tiger heart is by the narrator s own admission a thing that will possibly find no credit among men yet she gives such an account in vivid detail reports of oroonoko do him no justice the narrator is as first meeting as if she had heard nothing of him yet the narrative presents exactly the type of report her prefatory statement should force us to view with skepticism and the narrator demands credibility as an eye witness to events that she admits cannot be conveyed credibly in writing the novel s written form consciously undermines its own veracity its own spectacular effectiveness would not be alone in the dedicatory epistle to his play oroonoko thomas southerne observes that aphra behn had a great command of the stage and i have often wonder d that she would bury her favourite hero in a novel when she might have reviv d him in the scene in southerne s terms the novel becomes a grave the theater a christlike sacrifice of his final execution onstage behn could have showed us what she tells us she can
renal function the converts biologically inactive angiotensin i into angiotensin ii a potent vasopressor whose actions are mediated by the angiotensin ii type receptor these actions include mobilization of intracellular calcium vasoconstriction renal sodium reabsorption and aldosterone production in population studies genetic variants of the ras are associated with an post exercise hypotension or the immediate decrease in bp that occurs after a bout of aerobic exercise is an accepted physiologic response to exercise with the largest bp decreases seen in those with the highest resting bp yet not all people with hypertension demonstrate post exercise hypotension for reasons that are not clear we recently reported that the ace i and a elevated bp dietary calcium intake and the ras are important regulators of bp via their influence on calcium metabolism and vascular reactivity low dietary calcium intake paradoxically increases intracellular calcium concentration and is associated with high bp angiotensin ii regulates intracellular calcium concentration and peripheral vascular resistance by its actions on the associated with high bp on post exercise hypotension has not been studied the present investigation was designed to assess the effects of dietary calcium intake alone and in combination with the ace i and a polymorphisms on post exercise hypotension among men with the elevated bp since exercise induced bp reductions are greatest in those with bp reductions following a bout of aerobic exercise than men consuming higher amounts of dietary calcium in addition we postulated the exercise induced bp effects associated with dietary calcium intake would be further modulated by the ace i and a polymorphisms consistent with our hypotheses we found that interactions among dietary calcium intake exercise men between and yr with high normal to stage hypertension subjects completed an informed consent approved by the institutional review boards of the university of connecticut and hartford hospital if potential volunteers were taking medications or dietary supplements known to influence the bp response to exercise were monitored for evidence of accelerated hypertension men with the excessive resting bp were excluded from further participation procedures the study design and procedures have been described elsewhere briefly potential subjects completed an orientation session to familiarize them with the study ensure their bp met the study inclusion criteria in addition waist circumference was measured and height and weight were taken on a standard balance beam scale to calculate body mass index during the orientation session participants were told to maintain their usual diet for the duration of the study prior to all testing sessions subjects consumed a standard or a in diameter bagel this meal was accompanied by oz of skim milk and oz of orange juice the entire meal was consumed prior to any testing session participants were also instructed to refrain from any caffeinated beverage the morning of all testing sessions and to drink caffeinated and alcoholic beverages in moderation registered dietitian on the mornings of the orientation session and graded cardiopulmonary exercise test an example of an incomplete and a complete dietary record were shown to subjects in addition to verbal instruction on proper recording portion sizes were reviewed using food models as visuals subjects provided d dietary records on five occasions and analyzed by the registered dietitian for all subjects weight maintenance throughout the study was also used as an indication that volunteers were adhering as prior to the graded cardiopulmonary exercise test and the three experiments to monitor weight maintenance at the completion of the orientation session volunteers were attached to an ambulatory bp monitor the monitor was calibrated with a mercury sphygmomanometer until record bp approximately every min all subjects left the laboratory with instructions to proceed with their typical daily activities except for formal exercise and to return the monitor the following day the computerized recordings were considered acceptable if at least the bp readings were obtained via the manufacturer s quality control criteria if awake ambulatory bp a graded cardiopulmonary exercise test on a cycle ergometer to determine the experimental exercise workloads maximal oxygen consumption was measured by breath by breath analysis of expired gases via an open circuit respiratory apparatus at the conclusion of the graded further acquaint them with the equipment volunteers performed three min experiments that were conducted in random order performed at the same time of day and were separated by a minimum of the experiments included a non exercise control session of seated rest and two exercise bouts on a cycle ergometer performed at low and moderate intensity the conclusion of the baseline period the exercise bouts consisted of min of cycling at the designated exercise intensity with a min warm up and min cool down to total min of exercise experiments then concluded with a min recovery period of seated rest in the laboratory during the experiments heart rate was measured with a heart rate monitor because repeated measures analysis of variance revealed dietary calcium intake did not differ among the five monitoring the sample median as low ca and dietary calcium intake level the ace i and polymorphisms were distributed in accordance with the hardy weinberg equilibrium having frequencies of ace ii id dd aa of ac differences in the bp responses among carriers of the i allele of the ace i and the allele of the a polymorphisms these genotypes were combined reducing the number of genotype classes in each ras polymorphism from three to two repeated measures analysis of covariance then tested if bp level and the combined ras genotype groups covariates entered singularly in these analyses included average dietary intake of sodium potassium and magnesium daily energy intake total calcium derived from dairy sources age body mass index and waist circumference none of these covariates altered the primary bp outcomes data are presented all statistical analyses were performed with the statistical package for social sciences base for windows with level of significance results dietary nutrient intake subjects consumed an average of kcal d of which from carbohydrates total fat recommendations and average magnesium intake was below recommended levels all other nutrients were within recommended ranges subjects
aesthetic crossing effected by the institution of echo as the mythicophysical condition of possibility for hearing musing on the intensely personal nature of zampano s consideration of echo in the orientation of the blind truant goes on to recount his own visual capacities but i saw a strange glimmer everywhere confined to the sharp oscillations of yellow blue as if my retinal view suddenly included along with the reflective blessings of light an unearthly collusion with scent sound registering all possibilities of harm every threat every move even with all that grinning and meeting and din this synaesthetic transfiguration gives truant the possibility to hear and see in a noisy environment where we are his friend lude were prevented from hearing correctly and where lude remained blind truant s modeling of his response on the analogics of echo anticipates later sections of the book where he is led to postulate his symbiotic relationship with zampano s narrative in the most striking of these truant depicts himself as the nurturer and pro vider for the text the very source without which it would not even exist i wash the sweat off my face do my best to suppress a shiver return to the body spread out across the table like papers and let me tell you there s more than just the davidson record lying there bloodless and still but not at all dead calling me to it needing me now like a child depending on me despite its age after all i m its source the one who feeds it nurses it back to health but not life i fear bones of bond paper transfusions of ink genetic encryption in xerox monstrous maybe inaccurate correlates but nonetheless there and to animate it all for is that not an ultimate the ultimate goal not some heaven sent blast of electricity but me and not me unto me but me unto it if those two things are really at all different which is still to say to state the obvious without me it would perish almost immediately however in yet another testament to the text s medial self reflexivity this thought is abruptly turned around there s something else more and more often i ve been overcome by the strangest i ve gotten it all turned around by which i mean to say to state the not so obvious without it i would perish a moment comes where suddenly everything seems impossibly far and confused my sense of self idealized depersonalized the disorientation so severe i actually believe and let me tell you it is an intensely strange instance of belief that this terrible sense of relatedness to s work implies something that just ca nt be namely that this thing has created me not but now it unto me where i am nothing more than the matter of some other voice intruding through the folds of what even now lies there agape possessing me with histories i should never recognize as my own inventing me defining me directing me until finally every association i can claim as my own is relegated to nothing forcing me to face the most terrible suspicion of all that all of this has just been made up and what s worse not made up by me or even for that matter though by whom i have no idea here then is the traditional equation of novel and body now recon figured for a media or more precisely for a post orthographic age in place of the epistemological frisson generated by the mise en scene of say borges s garden of forking paths what we encounter here is a thorough recursivity between text and body where it makes no difference which is the container and which the contained since in either case the fictional narrative reality effect through the reality affects it stimulates its readers to produce from this subtle reconfiguration of postmodern reflexivity we can draw two important conclusions first truant s transformation figures the response of every reader showing both how it encompasses the entirety of the bodily processing involved in reading the text and also how it is necessarily undocumentable utterly singular second truant s experience locates the correlation of the novel and the of the bodily processing involved in reading the text and also how it is necessarily undocumentable utterly singular second truant s experience locates the correlation of the novel and the body outside the frame of the novel traditionally considered thereby trans forming it into something like an index of the creativity of embodied reading just as the novel undergoes bodily deformation as a result of its confrontation with recording media so too does the reader undergo an embodied in this most curious of mediations manages to stand in for the referential absence at the core of the novel and thereby to confer reality on the physically materially and perhaps even logically impossible fictional world projected by this truly curious house of leaves david quint the narrative of its hero s wanderings may appear random in sequence and endlessly deployable but in fact it is shaped by an elaborate design the book tips off the reader to the presence of this design in chapter the midpoint of its fifty two chapters here don quijote decides not to imitate the madness of orlando in ariosto s orlando furioso and to think only the best of the chaste dulcinea she is today as her mother brought her into the world and i should do her a grave injury were i to imagine otherwise and go crazy after the manner of orlando the furious que se esta hoy como la madre que la pario hariale agravio manifiesto si imaginando otra cosa della me volviese loco de aquel genero de locura de roldan el furioso mad though he is don quijote resolves not to go mad in the manner of orlando the central placement of this episode owes its model to the orlando furioso for ariosto s orlando goes
australia in that they constitute narratives that are published and circulated in other ways they also fit the lines of the respective ancestral cultures with which each identifies they do this by performing the significance of their ancestors lives the mysteries of the forces of life and death and the desire for loved ones in ways that are accurate as well as individually and collectively appropriate sol foster following jon hendricks defines vocalese as the setting of lyrics to established jazz orchestral instrumentals or singing new words to a pre arranged tune two predominant threads in vocalese lyrics are storytelling and tributes frequently lyrics are a tribute to the musician who originally recorded the tune in question for crawford langford ginibi and brett the are storytelling and tributes frequently lyrics are a tribute to the musician who originally recorded the tune in question for crawford langford ginibi and brett the metaphorical tune in question is that of commemoration of ancestors lives and of links with the dead their new words in the forms of australian english the modernist diasporic kaddish celtic folk and or country music are set to the pre arranged tunes of respect for ancestral lives these entangled transpositions are part of the transactions through which individuals and groups reproduce cultural knowledge in blum s words in this sense the performances of crawford langford ginibi and brett contribute much to the dynamic structures of cultural knowledge reproduction in postcolonial and diasporic contexts the influence of music style and conductor race on perceptions of ensemble and conductor performance abstract the purpose of this study was to examine music style and conductor race on perceptions of ensemble and conductor performance results found that conductor race and music style significantly affected ratings of ensemble and conductor performance evaluators rated a white conductor group higher than a black conductor group conducting the same prerecorded western art music excerpt likewise the black conductor group was rated higher than the white conductor group when same pre recorded spiritual music excerpt music style and conductor race were also significant factors in evaluations of conductors body expressions higher eye contact facial expression and posture ratings were given to the white conductor group when conducting the western art excerpt and the black conductor group was rated higher on the three body expressions when conducting the spiritual excerpt race of the evaluator was not a significant factor in evaluations of or conductor body expressions research examining nonverbal communication cues of conductors and solo performers has received much attention over the past several years these studies may be broken into two categories of nonverbal communication those investigating a musician s body expressions and those investigating a musician s appearance for the first category researchers have found eye contact facial expressions and posture to be important in of conducting effectiveness because such nonverbal cues are behavioral systematic practice to improve these skills can be applied to possibly change perceived deficiencies within these expressions these implications can be seen within music education conducting textbooks that advocate developing these skills for among whom pre service music educators are a part nonverbal cues within the second category which include race gender physical attractiveness and body type are cues that make up a musician s physical appearance and are not usually subject to change to date the implications of this category of research have yet to be introduced into music education textbooks which focus primarily on training pre service teachers to conduct most notably with the ensembles at therefore this set of nonverbal physical appearance cues and the effect they have on perceptions of performance are of particular importance to the current article music researchers have examined the influence of race and gender on preferences for and judgments of performers and performances for the category of gender a person is generally considered to be either male or female the factor of race is somewhat more complex race is defined as a division of the population distinguished by physical characteristics transmitted by genes a person s skin color and other physical traits may not be fully indicative of his or her race and those with multiple racial backgrounds may claim more than one race or heritage still for the purpose of this current study as well as those perception studies already published and described herein the term race will be used since it is often the conclusion drawn however correctly or incorrectly from a first impression of certain physical features and frequently affects subsequent perceptions for example killian found that when black and white students saw and heard performers they preferred those of the same race as themselves while gender preferences were most noticeable in males similarly morrison found that white students preferred same race performers whether they or saw and heard the performances and black students preferred same race performers when they saw or saw and heard the performers research has also found that when black and white students were asked to evaluate performances through listening only black students gave higher ratings to performers they perceived were of the same race as themselves though white students displayed greater variability in a study closely related to the current paper elliott influence of race and gender on judgments of musical performances four trumpeters and four flautists comprised of one white male one black male one white female and one black female for each instrument were videotaped performing two pre recorded performances one for the trumpets and one for the flutes college music majors rated each performance on a likerttype scale results revealed that black performers for both instruments and genders were white performers physical attractiveness studies have also received recent attention from music researchers three studies which used the same methodology examined whether the physical attractiveness of singers adult violinists and child pianists influenced evaluations of their performances for each study the researchers divided the evaluators into three groups audio visual results found that singers who were rated higher on the physical attractiveness scale by the
suggested that the observed peak at ev might not be associated with a multipole surface plasmon an alternative spectroscopy technique to investigate multipole surface plasmons is provided by angle and energy resolved photoyield experiments in fact more suitable than electron energy loss spectroscopy to identify the multipole surface plasmon since the monopole surface plasmon of clean flat surfaces is not excited by photons and thus the weaker multipole surface mode can be observed a large increase in the surface photoyield was observed at s sp from al and al recently the electronic structure and optical response of ag has been studied using this technique in these experiments the ag multipole surface plasmon is observed at ev while no signature of the multipole surface plasmon is observed above the plasma frequency in disagreement with the existing theoretical prediction hence further theoretical work is needed on the surface electronic response of ag that go beyond the polarization model described another collective electronic excitation at metal surfaces is the so called acoustic surface plasmon that has been predicted to exist at solid surfaces where a partially occupied quasi two dimensional surface state band coexists with the underlying three dimensional continuum this new low energy collective excitation exhibits linear dispersion at low wave vectors and might therefore affect electron hole and phonon dynamics near the fermi it has been demonstrated it is a combination of the nonlocality of the dynamical screening and the spill out of the electron density into the vacuum which allows the formation of electron density acoustic oscillations at metal surfaces since these oscillations would otherwise be completely screened by the surrounding substrate this novel surface plasmon mode has been observed recently at the surface of be showing a linear energy dispersion that is in very good agreement with finally we note that metal dielectric interfaces of arbitrary geometries also support charge density oscillations similar to the surface plasmons characteristic of planar interfaces these are localized mie plasmons occurring at frequencies which are characteristic of the interface geometry the excitation of localized plasmons on small particles has attracted great interest over the years in scanning transmission electron microscopy and near field field optical spectroscopy recently new advances in structuring and manipulating on the nanometer scale have rekindled interest in this field in nanostructured metals and carbon based structures such as fullerenes and carbon nanotubes localized plasmons can be excited by light and can therefore be easily detected as pronounced optical resonances furthermore very localized dipole and multipole modes in the vicinity of highly coupled structures are responsible for surface enhanced raman scattering and other striking properties like for example the blackness of colloidal silver collective electronic excitations in thin adsorbed overlayers semiconductor heterostructures and parabolic quantum wells have also attracted attention over the last years the adsorption of thin films is important because of the drastic changes that they produce in the electronic properties of the substrate and also because of related phenomena such as promotion however the understanding of adsorbate induced collective excitations is still incomplete the excitation spectrum of collective modes in semiconductor quantum wells has been described by several authors these systems which have been grown in semiconductor heterostructures with the aid of molecular beam epitaxy form a nearly ideal free electron gas and have been therefore a playground on which to test existing many body theories major reviews on the theory of collective electronic excitations at metal surfaces have been given by ritchie feibelman and liebsch experimental reviews are also available which focus on high energy eels experiments surface plasmons on smooth and rough surfaces and on gratings and angle resolved low energy eels investigations an extensive review on plasmons and magnetoplasmons in semiconductor heterostructures has been given recently by kushwaha this review will focus on a unified theoretical description of the many body dynamical electronic response of solids which underlines the existence of various collective electronic excitations at metal surfaces such as the conventional surface plasmon multipole plasmons and the acoustic surface plasmon we also review existing calculations experimental measurements and some of the most recent applications including particle solid interactions microscopy and surface plasmon based photonics ie plasmonics surface plasmon polariton classical approach semi infinite system the surface plasmon condition we consider a classical model consisting of two semi infinite nonmagnetic media with local dielectric functions and separated by a planar interface at the full set of maxwell s equations in the absence of external sources can be expressed as follows and where the index describes the media at solutions of equations can generally be classified into s polarized and p polarized electromagnetic modes the electric field and the magnetic field being parallel to the interface respectively for an ideal surface if waves are to be formed that propagate along the interface there must necessarily be a component of the electric field normal to the surface hence s polarized surface oscillations do not exist instead we seek conditions under which a travelling wave with the magnetic field parallel to the interface may propagate along the surface with the fields tailing off into the positive and negative directions choosing the axis along the propagating direction we write and into equations one finds and the boundary conditions imply that the component of the electric and magnetic fields parallel to the surface must be continuous using equations and one writes the following system of equations and ie hence the surface plasmon condition can also be expressed as follows where s represents the magnitude of the light wave vector for a metal dielectric interface with the dielectric characterized by the solution s of equation has slope equal to at the point and is a monotonic increasing function of which is always smaller than and for large is asymptotic to the value given by the solution of of this is the nonretarded surface plasmon condition with which is valid as long as the phase velocity s is much smaller than the speed of light energy dispersion in the case of a
a radical break with winstanley s earlier socio political views seeing his development in terms of a continuous theoretical and political christopher hill reads the law of freedom which appeals to cromwell as the center of state power to impose its proposals from the top down as a possibilistic describing a transition period the compromises of which he justifies as a manifestation of political maturity and a heightened sense of what hill and others dismiss as only a shift in is nevertheless an irrefutable sign of a fundamental change in winstanley s thought contesting hill s thesis of a compromise davis rightly characterizes the law of freedom as a disciplinary totalitarian the next point of his argument however and the diggers never held anti authoritarian or anarchist views but always accepted state authority political power and domination in all its personal and institutional forms stands in need of qualification equally untenable is his suggestion that the diggers objection to physical force signals an authoritarian ethos and a voluntary subjection to the authorities davis completely misses the point for it is this very advocacy of a non violent revolutionary strategy attests to the diggers idealism and places them in the anarchist tradition with its demand to reconcile one s aims with one s methods darren webb also questions the thesis that the experience of the defeat of the diggers caused a reversal of winstanley s position he rejects the distinction between the law of freedom and his digger pamphlets which he takes to have been written at the same time and suggests that the book remains consistent transformation in his thought took far too lighly passing off the apparent differences as mere questions of form and style which stem from winstanley s choice of the utopian genre conclusion in jack lindsay s a novel of a year written in the in support of the politics of a popular front will scamler a forerunner of the twentieth century class conscious proletarian hero formulates the vision of an organized and unified source of positive and co operative action comrade jacob appeared at a time when the revolutionary role of the working class was being questioned it ends on a much more cautious note with an arrested and fettered winstanley recognizing that his dream and social reality are worlds apart th is should not mislead us however into thinking that caute fosters an excessive pessimism for his representation of the diggers is in full accord with a dialectical not whitewashing the evils of repression exploitation and defeat he supports the view that in the seventeenth century circumstances the triumph of capitalism was inevitable and the bourgeoisie constituted a progressive historical force at the same time he also shows that collective resistance although isolated and marginalized was possible and the emergent social revolutionary tendencies embodied by the diggers give grounds for hope even though victory adopts a marxist interpretation of history but bernard bergonzi s criticism of comrade jacob for being shackled by a rigid marxist schema does not bear closer examination since caute disowns a crude determinism and avoids both flat argumentation and hollow while lindsay places special emphasis on the levellers and in keeping with more orthodox marxist doctrines disqualifies the diggers as utopian it caute treats them both critically and with an undisguised sympathy he pioneered the renaissance the diggers have witnessed since the late when countercultural and alternative social and political movements reclaimed them as their ancestors and made a lasting contribution to their reappraisal comrade jacob served as a basis for both a play of the same title by john mcgrath and the film winstanley directed by kevin brownlow in collaboration with andrew mollo caryl churchill s play on the english revolution light shining in buckinghamshire devotes some space to the ranters and also includes a short scene on the diggers in the autumn of roy hanney shot the world turned upside down in commemoration of the anniversary of the diggers occupation of st george s hill exploring the parallels that can be drawn between the history of the diggers and current struggles for ownership of land by travellers and squatters finally the political folk singer leon rosselson the rock singer billy bragg and the anarchist rock band chumbawamba helped to sustain the renewed interest in the diggers and popularize their history and ideas through songs like the world turned upside down and the diggers song of all these cultural spin off s of the diggers revival winstanley is probably the most interesting in the concluding paragraphs i shall therefore look more was brought to brownlow and mollo s attention by miles halliwell a teacher who had acted a small part in their first film it happened here and then played the title role in winstanley the initial plan to make the film which was sponsored by the british film institute production board and the first screen tests date back to the mid when countercultural and socialist ideas and activities and the universal revolutionary fervour among students began to gather yet it took eight years until the final shootings took place in when the film which was produced under great financial constraint was eventually released and reached the screen in aft er considerable eff ort to find a distributor it failed commercially for both thematic and aesthetic reasons and received little predominantly positive critical attention although some including marxist film theorists criticized it as naive and winstanley deals with a subject matter highly relevant to left and alternative currents and immediately reached cult status in the squatters movement but the fictionalized account of a seventeenth century anarchist commune proved to be too arcane for the general public brownlow and mollo s uncompromising refusal to make concessions to the formulas of mainstream entertainment did not attract popular audiences and could not compete with the at the time winstanley is certainly inspired by caute s comrade jacob from which it retains some key scenes and draws some of its dialogue but
whole seasons without playing a concerto with an american orchestra serkin flourished in america but busch earned barely enough to get by and relied instead on a modest international schedule in both the busches and the serkins spent the summer in to the european countryside the vienna woods or the jura foothills for the serkins eventually bought acres of farmland in guilford and in the busches purchased a smaller property nearby guilford lies along the two lane guilford service road which extends about seven miles out from the more urban brattleboro then vermont s fourth largest city irene serkin wrote about the move years later our feeling toward vermont is one not only have a house but a place for the children to grow up in security mental i mean and learning real values in life vermont is for us not the end of nowhere but the beginning of retired from solo performances and living year round in guilford busch set his energies on a project he had long dreamed of a with greater success was the realization of busch s vision using the facilities of the newly founded marlboro college the school filled the gap in american musical life that busch perceived upon his arrival in the country as biographer tully potter writes busch had long wanted to create an environment in which professional players would be professionals and rank amateurs chamber literature in depth and giving concerts only when and if they wished to do but busch would only see the school in its infancy in june he died from heart troubles at his home in guilford serkin who had co founded the school with busch and the members of the moyse trio continued running marlboro until his death in s op was certainly available in the united states and busch could easily have gotten a copy to rockwell by one means or another if the opportunity ever presented itself likewise rockwell could have come across the piece through encounters with local musicians who might have known busch and his trio perhaps he even heard a performance of arlington is about a seventy minute drive from brattleboro first into the town of bennington then fifteen miles north along route this trip over the mountains is not a lark and it would have made any happenstance encounter between artist and musician improbable nor does it seem likely that busch would have been especially interested in rockwell as busch s regarded rockwell s work as low culture and dismissed it as he dismissed peanut butter and pop music american although there is no evidence that busch and rockwell knew each other personally there were several instances in the late when rockwell might have encountered deutsche ta lnze on july the book cellar on brattleboro s main street hosted a book signing with norman rockwell for arthur guptill s norman was that trip to brattleboro that inspired rockwell to return to brattleboro early the next month on a search for models and locations for the post cover that would eventually become breakfast table political busch performed dvorak s violin concerto op with the vermont symphony conducted by alan carter at the green mountain festival of the arts in the festival celebrated vermont s music fashion crafts and art and featured a museum exhibition of contemporary vermont painting among the artists represented was norman if rockwell was also in attendance in burlington though born in kansas fisher lived in arlington on the land her ancestors had claimed in throughout her adult life and became indelibly associated with both town and state through her writings including two full of arlington she knew norman rockwell well and greatly admired his work in her preface to arthur guptill s norman rockwell illustrator fisher was one of the earliest commentators to compare rockwell s style of painting to that of seventeenth century flemish perhaps to return the favor of fisher s preface rockwell later painted a widely circulated john around the time of shuffleton s barbershop fisher presented a manuscript copy of her children s book paul revere to rockwell s son and though rockwell had his private reservations about fisher his wife mary almost idolized her and the two families interacted frequently and cordially at many social functions fisher adored classical music and came to know a great many professionals throughout the course of her life note how she fervently describes the recorded music that her husband played for her when she was forced to remain immobile while recovering from an injury what magnificence came triumphantly up vibrating through those wood panels all the bach mass in minor all the beethoven quartets some of the quartets of haydn mozart s haydn quartets the lovely lovely schubert trio the st john passion her she was a dear friend of carl and charlotte ruggles such passion for classical music surely accounted for some of the attraction she would lend them money in times of need help find them an arlington home make appeals on carl s behalf when he applied for a job at bennington deeply personal correspondence with whether ruggles knew busch is pure speculation as two of the most prominent musicians living in vermont at the time it is tempting to imagine them crossing paths though i have found no evidence of fisher was also heavily involved in activist projects concerning and and so meeting a world famous german violinist who had immigrated to vermont after taking so principled a stand against nazism was surely an irresistible prospect for the socially adept fisher it is difficult to say how or when the two families met their first contact was likely the founding of marlboro college in both fisher and rudolf serkin were trustees though they were celebrity sometime between august and august she appeared at marlboro college as a speaker at the first annual marlboro fiction writers this would have placed her enticingly close to brattleboro just two and a half months before rockwell
from these compensations including sharp anomalies in surface finishing it was also shown that the performance of the fts improves with slower spindle speed while the feedrate seems to have very little effects on actuator a feedforward controller was implemented based on a simple feedforward predictor to improve tracking performance crudele and kurfess published the design of integrating a piezo based fts servo with repetitive control for facing applications in repetitive control a controller is designed a function of the expected pattern coupled with any errors from the previous cycles this technique is particularly applicable to machining where the material and tool conditions change relatively slowly and the process is relatively repeatable the benefit of the repetitive controller was the tracking ability of surface waviness a piezo actuator with a nominal expansion of mm was used and a great control was somewhat detrimental to the waviness rasmussen et al designed a piezo driven cutting tool system capable of dynamically controlling depth of cut that can be used to machine slightly non circular workpieces with an amplification mechanism the tool was able to produce mm of travel with a bandwidth of hz tool motion error less than mm was achieved using a for improving the surface finish kim and nam and kim and kim developed a piezo based micro depth control system that does not rely on an external position sensor instead they utilize the piezoelectric voltage feedback signals from the actuator as an indicator of position based on the self sensing actuation concept the applied voltage to the actuator was subtracted by a the details on how to provide an accurate reference voltage to achieve the rigorous self sensing actuation were not provided however the authors reported improved stability and decreased response time as compared to using an external gap sensor gao et al constructed an fts using a piezoelectric tube actuator with a bandwidth of khz and a tool displacement bandwidth of several nanometers an amplitude of nm over a diameter of area the effectiveness of the fts was confirmed however the authors noted that the thermal deformation of the workpiece during machining adversely affected the overall accuracy of the surface finish while the fts is traditionally used as an independently operating positioning device several researchers have attempted to combine the fts with standard motion a way the advantages of both servos can be fully utilized while compensating for their drawbacks lee and kim developed a dual servo stage mechanism the global stage produced coarse three dimensional motions using three linear motors while the micro stage compensated for the position errors of the global stage using three piezoelectric actuators the dual mechanism employed a pid nm over a working area of ku et al designed a nano positioner in which a piezo based fts and a conventional lead screw mechanism were combined a neural network based control algorithm was used to compensate for the large friction in the lead screw tool while the fts was used to further reduce the tracking error by over a factor of pahk et al developed a combined a piezo actuator for the micro stage in order to smoothly link the two motions from the global and micro stages a dual servo loop control algorithm was implemented in order to reject vibration and noise present in sub micrometer range a chebyshev digital filtering technique was employed to improve the positioning accuracy an accuracy of nm over the stroke was reported a two parameter robust repetitive control design to a dual stage fts a piezoelectric actuator was installed inside the hollow piston of an electrohydraulic actuator the error from the first stage electrohydraulic actuator was fed to the second stage piezoelectric actuator as an input the interaction between the two actuators was assumed to be negligible a of maximum error in surface al used a dual stage fts consisting of an electromagnetic linear actuator and a piezo actuator with mm stroke the feedforward and robust repetitive control for the electromagnetic actuator produced less than mm errors their ongoing effort is to further reduce the error by using the piezoelectric actuator elfizy et al developed a model based controller for the model based feedforward controller incorporated both a disturbance observer module and an anti windup module they reported significant improvement in the performance of the coarse stage using the linear motor as compared to using pid control a switching control technique was also used to accommodate changes in system dynamics and associated uncertainties relative to which requires relatively small chip loads and small cutting force disturbances zhu et al and woronko et al addressed the use of a piezo based fts for precision shaft machining in conventional cnc turning machines they employed an adaptive sliding mode controller to compensate for uncertainties due to cutting disturbances and hysteresis in the stack actuator a stack actuator with a amplification the author s promise for their approach was to provide rough semi finish and ultra precision cutting using a conventional cnc machine the rough and semi finish operations were performed on a tool with a conventional cnc machine and the ultra precision cutting was accomplished by the same machine with a piezo based fts on the cnc traditional cnc machine woronko et al further improved the performance achieving a cut position accuracy of under an average radial cutting force of for the piezo based fts operation in a conventional cnc machine the final finishing depth of cut is executed solely by the actuator within the actuator stroke with no change of the cnc a piezo based fts is reported by kinetic ceramics inc and is illustrated in fig their systems are able to produce and mm stroke depending on the design with hz bandwidth currently their systems cannot achieve both the maximum stroke and frequency band width simultaneously a pair of triangular pzt stacks is used to create widely used in fts although the sensing mechanical design and control algorithms vary depending on the applications the majority of sensors used
wrote to robert keith envoy in vienna about george s concern with criticism of his opposition to giving his guarantee of the austro modenese treaty the king has no objection to the being a party to the treaty provided that can be done majesty s becoming guarantee of it and indeed it was for that reason that it was objected to but if it be expressed in such a manner as to leave no room for any future demand of the king s guaranty his majesty will agree to the inserting his name as a the aggregation of governmental authority and power in the shape of the crown and the concomitant lack of clarity about whose views were at issue was challenged by the practice of politics not least the role of this was particularly apparent when george ii s visits to hanover helped ensure that the correspondence of the secretary of state who accompanied him very much reflected the personal views of the king as in during the war of the polish succession thus the sense of george as anxious to justify his position and as at the end of his tether was captured in harrington s most secret letter to newcastle from hanover of june george who had seen the report of the recent british and dutch ministers was concerned about the justification of his own past and future conduct and was resolved either to join with the dutch if they were ready to take immediate steps for the preservation of the balance of europe or that failing to advise the emperor charles vi to settle with his opponents there was little doubt from harrington s letter of where the king saw virtue lying with spirit and vigor his concerns were also apparent an anxiety that either be diverted from pursuing such methods of accommodating his disputes with one or other of the allies as he may still probably have in his power and upon which the safety of all europe may depend or tempted to exclude the maritime powers entirely from any share in such an accommodation or even to conclude it as in the year directly to their prejudice this appearing to the king to be the most prudent and honourable way of proceeding in the present un happy his majesty has commanded me to put it immediately in execution by giving count kinsky a free and confidential account of the king s sentiments upon his master s the emphasis in this correspondence was very much on the king s while at this juncture the press also stressed his role the whitehall evening post of june noting his majesty is observed particularly to be locked up for several hours every day with my lord foreign observers george s moves or their absence as of significance thus the king s failure in to notify frederick william i of his arrival in hanover or to compliment the king on his convalescence was seen as aside from constitutional issues there was a more direct royal politics that in part focused on traditional issues and signs of favor such as access to the monarch this was seen as an important indication of political views in george twelfth the earl of morton his son from london i believe you ll see in the prints that the earl of stair had waited on his majesty and the queen but i am informed that neither the king nor queen took notice of him or spoke one word to george s not talking to the french envoy at hanover in attracted in the last years of the reign the combination of the pitt newcastle ministry with its two experienced and determined principals and of george s age grow ing ill health and a degree of suggested a monarch who was weak it would be as unwise however to use these years to judge george s reign as a whole as it would be to consider george iii s reign in light of his situation in his later years or william iv s in light of his failure to sustain sir robert peel in each example was different but in sum they underline the need for caution in confronting the important issue of the assessment of royal influence an emphasis on george ii s continued importance need for a careful consideration of george iii s policies on the one hand it undermines claims about the novelty of george iii s expectations but on the other it helps explain why ministers so strongly wished to persuade the king to cooperate with them the conclusion may seem to be merely an elaboration of a view that monarchy was significant but this is an important point and one that requires discussion a stress on the role of the monarch ensures a presentation of politics that clashes with the one that is currently fashionable it is instructive to note how far ministers were concerned with the royal mood newcastle writ ing to henry pelham from hanover in i gave the king a general account of your letters he is in extreme good and reasonable humor willing to hear and disposed to do what is a stress on the crown may appear to have little to offer to scholars concerned with other fields but that is no reason to neglect subject furthermore this stress can encourage a re examination of the role of the monarch in political thought as well as of concepts and images of authority in lay and religious life in so far as the issue encourages a re consideration of the nature of change in political life it contributes to the post dating of modernity the latter under stood in terms of the conventional meta narrative of development which is very much progressive in character such a post dating is many commentators but in this case it should encourage a rethinking of the period the debate over the issue in the was somewhat limited because it
because it is one of the logical determinations and these are presupposed we can express it here as a fact that this absolute universality proceeds to the internal distinction of itself it proceeds to the primal division or to the point of positing itself as in the manner discussed earlier at least as the clearly states here the distinction that elevates human consciousness from substance is part of a primal division that is presupposed the lectures according to hegel is not the place to discuss the presupposition yet it is the opinion here that this presupposition is central to understanding the entire project of hegel s concept of god as it occurs after the philosobreak from spinozism and pantheism relationship between god and humanity unfolds brilliantly it rests on a essay therefore concludes understanding hegel s argument for the concept of god and for god s existence as a valid argument but not as a sou seclusion limitation and control theories of privacy although each theory includes one or more important insights regarding the concept of privacy i argue that each falls short of providing an adequate account of privacy i then examine and defend a theory of privacy that incorporates elements of the classic theories into one unified theory the restricted access limited control theory of privacy using an example involving data mining technology on the internet i show how ralc can help us to frame an online privacy policy that is sufficiently comprehensive in scope to address a wide range of privacy concerns that arise in connection with computers and information technology introduction defining privacy requires a familiarity with its ordinary usage but this is not language so that capable speakers of english will not be genuinely surprised that the term privacy should be defined in this way but which also enables us to talk consistently clearly and precisely about the family of concepts to which privacy belongs fw a parent framing a definition of privacy that satisfies the conditions specified by claims about the threat to privacy including the threat posed by computers and information technology one aim of this essay is to articulate a definition of privacy that responds to parent s challenge and serves as the foundation for an adequate theory of another related aim is to show how this theory enables us to frame online privacy policies that are clear transparent and consistent begins with a brief analysis of the concept of privacy and draws some preliminary distinctions between rights based and interests based conceptions of privacy it then offers a critical evaluation of some classic or standard philosophical and legal theories of privacy i organize these accounts of privacy into four broad categories referring to them as the nonintrusion seclusion limitation and control theories that incorporates key elements of the classic theories into one unified theory referred to as the restricted access limited control theory of i then defend the ralc theory arguing that it includes some important distinctions that are critical for an adequate theory of privacy for example i show how ralc successfully differentiates between descriptive and normative aspects of privacy privacy and claims alleging a violation or invasion of privacy i also show how ralc differentiates the concept of privacy from both the justification and the management of privacy in part i show how the ralc theory provides a procedure for determining whether and how to protect certain kinds of personal describes as the challenge of protecting privacy in public i also show how this problem is at the heart of privacy controversies involving the use of information technologies including computerized data mining although the data mining case that i examine illustrates only one way in which ralc can be used to frame an adequate online privacy policy affecting computer information technologies i conclude by arguing that the scope to be applied to a wide range of privacy concerns associated with contemporary information technologies part theories of privacy what exactly is personal privacy because privacy is difficult to define it is often described in terms of and sometimes confused with such notions as liberty autonomy secrecy and solitude privacy has been described as something that can be intruded upon invaded violated these metaphors reflects a conception of privacy that can be found in one or more standard models or theories of privacy whereas some privacy theories are essentially descriptive in nature others are normative many normative theories are rights based such as those that analyze privacy in terms of a zone or space that can be intruded upon or invaded by others however not all normative accounts privacy in connection with confidentiality that can be breached or trust that can be betrayed descriptive accounts of privacy on the contrary sometimes suggest that privacy can be understood in terms of a repository of personal information that when accessed by others can lead to one s privacy being diminished or perhaps even lost altogether some authors have argued that it is more useful to view privacy in privacy as a for example roger clarke believes that privacy is best defined as the interest individuals have in sustaining a personal space free from interference by other people and organizations while a detailed description and analysis of the differences between interests based and rights based conceptions of privacy is beyond the scope of this essay it is worth noting that a number of arguments have some authors have suggested that privacy can be thought of in terms of a property interest that individuals have with respect to their personal others who defend an interests based conception of privacy have suggested that privacy protection schemes can simply be stipulated rather than having to be grounded in philosophical and legal theories noting that discussions involving a right to privacy slide back and forth between rights based and interests based conceptions of privacy others confuse aspects of privacy that are essentially descriptive in nature with those that are primarily we will see how some of these confusions are
extreme vowels and since these produced with a small constriction area coupling effects are thus minimal and formant cavity affiliations can be considered based on previous studies we then discuss the effects of nonuniform growth of the cavities on the acoustic pattern related to these vowels the formant cavity affiliations provided below are based on fant s tube model stevens quantal theory and boe s model of vocal tract vowel space growth note that these descriptions are simplified for for the sake of clarity a qualitative description of the acoustic consequences of the gestures involved in the vowels for adults the articulatory gestures underlying the vs contrast in french for adult speakers are well known for besides spreading of the lips the tongue is in a high and front position creating a wide back cavity including the pharynx and a narrow front cavity formed by the constriction of the tongue towards part of the the front and back cavities act as simple tube resonators and their resonant frequencies are very close to the formants the configuration created by the whole vocal tract corresponds to a helmholtz resonator and is affiliated to is the half wavelength resonance of the back cavity and is the half wavelength resonance of the front cavity compared to the basic gesture associated with the vowel is rounding protrusion of the lips the still being in a high and front position such a movement of the lips lengthens the front cavity resulting in a decrease of the affiliated if the front cavity remains shorter than the back cavity does not change and stays affiliated to the half wavelength resonance of the back cavity while the half wavelength resonance of the front cavity decreases however if the front cavity becomes longer than the back cavity its resonant frequency becomes lower than that of the back cavity in such a case both and decrease from to and in is affiliated to the front cavity and to the back cavity for the first formant is affiliated to the helmholtz resonator created by the front cavity and the labial tube whereas the second formant is affiliated to the second helmholtz resonator created by the back cavity and is related to the quarter wavelength resonance of the back cavity finally for an adult male the first and third formants of the low vowel are affiliated to the first and second resonances of the back cavity whereas the second formant is affiliated to the front cavity a schematic representation of these formant patterns is depicted in fig the dotted lines correspond to adult values whereas the solid lines represent the child values the influence of nonuniform vocal tract growth a qualitative analysis as previously mentioned the adult s vocal tract is not a uniform scaled up version of the infant s vocal tract at birth the infant has a very short pharynx compared to the length of the oral cavity whereas the pharynx for the adult male is comparatively much longer and roughly of the same size as the oral cavity for the adult female the pharynx is still than the oral cavity but the difference is less acute than for the infant these cavity length differences have important effects on the resulting values of the resonant frequencies as depicted in fig indeed for a helmholtz resonator this frequency can be calculated by the following formula where is sound velocity aco is the constriction area lco is constriction length and vca is the cavity volume as for single tube resonators the nth half wavelength and nth quarter wavelength resonant frequencies of a tube correspond respectively to and where lca is the cavity length as can be predicted by the formulae presented above the shorter the cavity the higher the formant the effects of growth can be observed by comparing the solid line and the dotted line in fig two vowels and described in the previous section all the articulatory gestures remaining unchanged it can be predicted that the difference between formant values affiliated to the back cavity from the child to the adult will be greater than the difference between formant values affiliated to the front cavity as a result for increases more than in the child productions hence decreasing the difference between and and increasing the difference between and in the case of most of the front cavity lengthening due to lip rounding involves a decrease of the resonances affiliated to the front cavity those values being much lower than those of the back cavity as a result increases more than in the child productions hence the difference between and in should be greater for the child compared to the adult male fig schematizes the cases discussed above fig also shows the formant cavity affiliations for and and it appears that besides overall increase of all formant frequencies the distance patterns between and for remain similar for the child like vocal tract and the adult like vocal tract thus a small pharyngeal cavity compared to the front cavity for the child does not affect the formant ratios this pattern can be related to the fact that and are affiliated to helmholtz resonators for which the resonant frequency is affected not only by cavity length but cavity volume constriction length and constriction area finally for compared with the adult male the increase of affiliated to the back cavity for the young child is much greater than the increase of and affiliated to the front cavity as a result and are farther apart for the child than for the adult altogether these predictions suggest that among the four vowels and the vowels and are more likely to be affected by of the vocal tract cavities indeed compared to the adult male vocal tract the distance for the distance for and the distance for are increased for a child like vocal tract since these patterns referred to as focalization have been found to be a criteria of local stability in vowel systems of
longer range dependencies that predict that image gradients along one side of a network arm will be parallel while image gradients on opposite sides of a network arm will be anti parallel thanks to this prior knowledge the model produces good results using gradient descent to minimize the contour energy starting from a generic initialization that renders the method quasi automatic the primary failure mode of the interruptions in the image of the road these interruptions are caused by various types of geometric noise in the case of road networks for example trees and buildings close to the network that change its appearance either via occlusion or because of cast shadows the method fails to close these gaps for three reasons two related to the model and one to the algorithm two distant arms that each comes to an end and two arms that form a gap once the extremities are more than a few pixels apart thus the model does not capture our prior knowledge that road networks for example usually do not possess such gaps the prior knowledge concerning the image to be expected from a given network does not allow close the gap even if the configuration with the gap closed has lower energy than the configuration with the gap present due to the shape of the energy surface between the two configurations rochery et al made a preliminary attempt to address the gap closure problem they introduced a gap closure force making nearby opposing network extremities attract the results obtained with this force are similar in quality to those obtained via the new work in this paper the force was not a total functional derivative ie it could not be obtained from an energy this complicates analysis and more seriously means that convergence is not guaranteed it is the purpose of this to present a solution to all these problems and hence to the gap closure problem by describing gaps while at the same time changing the shape of the energy surface so that it no longer obstructs the algorithm more specifically based on the geometry of gaps in networks we design a quadratic hoac energy for gap closure that penalizes nearby opposing extremities these extremities are identified by pairs of points that have high positive curvatures lie outside the contour with respect to one are close attract extend towards one another and join thus closing the gap between them the new energy leads to a complicated force in the gradient descent equation a function of third and fourth derivatives of the region boundary the computation of these terms necessitates careful numerical treatment in order to keep the evolution stable we use the level set framework to evolve the hoac terms in the energy previous work on road extraction has also encountered the problem of interruptions of course and has dealt with it in different ways often without addressing it explicitly tracking methods and methods minimizing the optimal path between endpoints generally constrain the topology so that gaps are not possible the same applies to active et al use a road tracking method with an inertia term that allows a road extremity to extend a short distance despite lack of support from the data but do not address gaps as such a number of methods attempt to close gaps in the extracted network after the fact laptev et al use ziplock snakes to connect gap endpoints while zhang et al use morphological operators the field labelling the segments as road or non road some of these line segments are extracted from the image by a line detector while the rest consist of all reasonable potential connections between the extracted segments a map estimate is computed from a model containing the prior geometric knowledge that for example roads are long and relatively gaps but they have the advantage of stochastic algorithms that allow the energetic barrier mentioned above to be overcome the current method differs from the above methods in two ways first it concentrates on gap closure by directly penalizing configurations containing gaps rather than penalizing isolated extremities second while many of the above methods work with line segments the method described in sect we first recall the model proposed by rochery et al and then go on to describe the new energy in detail in sect including an analysis of the thin road case in sect we develop the level set method used to evolve the contour we present results on real aerial images showing the benefits of the new energy in sect we discuss possible extraction as discussed in sect rochery et al a hoac energy as a model for automatic line network extraction in this section we briefly review this model and comment on its advantages and deficits we will parameterize the space of regions using boundaries a generic boundary being denoted we will also call respectively here i is an image being the image domain the prior energy eg is the sum of three terms two linear and one quadratic hoac term which defines an interaction between points where the integrals are over the contour parameterized by unprimed quantities are supposed evaluated at or and primed quantities at or is the contour length is the euclidean distance from to and is a function with the form of a smoothed hard core potential given by the function is plotted as a dashed line in fig for the values of the parameters we use in the experiments dmin and a few comments on the prior energy eg are necessary length and area are classical regularizing terms the the expansion of the contour the most important part of the model is the hoac term this introduces an interaction between pairs of points on the contour the interaction causes pairs of nearby points with antiparallel tangent vectors to repel each other and pairs of nearby points with parallel tangent vectors to attract each other this has two effects it prevents pairs of points with anti parallel
been given this lacuna in the understanding of timbre would be filled by hermann von helmholtz in the and a decade after magendie both diday and petrequin and garcia would come to in different ways that controlling timbre is the role of the vocal tract that magendie s two big unsolved questions were in fact one and the the me moire or duprez as experiment so the question of the production of the voice had progressed from asking how the the trend in the life sciences in france after was away from systematic observation and taxonomies towards laboratory experiment and the formulation of general such laws were to be formulated after the model of the physical sciences whose newtonian revolution in the eighteenth century had left some in the life sciences feeling behind the times the experimental ideal of which franc mois magendie was perhaps the most powerful but also to intervene actively in the laboratory controlling the individual parameters of a given process and observing the results judged according to this ideal the descriptive and speculative writing of authors like savart would obviously be found wanting but even magendie s own experience with the vivisected dog would be incomplete since it was capable of drawing conclusions only about the glottal mechanism in isolation the human voice in which changes in the glottis accompanied by changes in the vocal tract could be systematically compared to the voice when the vocal tract remained fixed as described by diday and petrequin duprez provided just such an experimental subject his low fixed larynx serving to factor out changes in the vocal tract allowing conclusions to be drawn about the vocal mechanism as a whole using a naturally occurring subject as a living experiment in this way was an part of the experimentalist project in a monograph on the nervous system magendie wrote what we do not dare to do on man nature a less scrupulous experimenter takes it upon herself to magendie s journal made this double project explicit in its title journal de physiologie experimentale et pathologique in the me moire diday and petrequin declared a similar allegiance by way of an unattributed epigraph consists of two complementary modes of investigation vivisection and the observation of living man induced results and spontaneous results if there are secrets that nature allows one to seize when one forces her to speak there are others she does not reveal until one knows how to listen to her la methode experimentale comporte deux modes d investigation qui se completent un spontane s il est des secrets que la nature se laisse arracher quand on la force a parler il en est d autres qu elle ne re ve le que lorsqu on sait couter while the subtle joke of beginning an article about singing with a quotation about knowing how to listen should not go unremarked the primary purpose of the epigraph was to respond preemptively to why the article had appeared under the heading physiologie experimentale and why it was submitted to the academie sciences for the prize in experimental physiology when the investigators principal research activity seems to have been nothing more than going to the opera the me moire to turn finally to a detailed reading of this source is built almost entirely on a single observation that the new singing was characterized by the low fixed larynx which was to become the obsession of singers later in the century the rest of the essay is presented as the rational deduction the consequences of this fact diday and petrequin begin with a physiological account of the voix sombree assuming that three factors affect the pitch of a sung note airflow glottal closure and larynx height and observing that voix sombree requires that the larynx remain fixed they conclude that the degree of the other two factors must be correspondingly greater this deduction is confirmed by both the greater volume of voix sombree and the fatigue it causes the singer from these fairly plausible arguments the authors move on to more outlandish assertions for example that the role of the larynx affects acting style the old tenor needing to keep his neck straight to allow the larynx to ascend and descend was forced into stiff formal postures the new tenor whose fixed larynx allows his neck to move freely can are confirmed either directly or indirectly by observations from the opera house as proof the authors consider it sufficient simply to mention the names of duprez voix sombree dynamic postures and louis ponchard voix blanche formal all of the me moire s arguments follow an identical rhetorical path diday and through logical reasoning they reach some conclusion about singing generally crucially each section ends when this conclusion ostensibly the result of rational deduction is confirmed through observations made in the opera house this is true of even the most abstract section the new theory of sons files in which the authors ask how a singer manages to decrescendo while maintaining a steady pitch given that changes which involves a hypothetical system of compensation linking glottis and breath was confirmed very recently by an unnamed famous tenor who displayed an inability to decrescendo on high notes a short third section on the sound of the voix sombree employs the same rhetorical strategy one would predict that the timbres of voix sombree and voix blanche would differ increasingly as pitch increases since the difference in larynx position becomes correspondingly more pronounced sure enough observation in the opera house confirms this in a final section on the musical use of the voix sombree and the sombrer mixte the tone changes markedly the reader is addressed directly given a list of instructions on how to produce the different voice types and the new technique is analysed almost sociologically teachers are seducing young singers into adopting the new method with false promises of an extended upper range and transformation baritone to tenor diday and petrequin propose an
multiplier defined as where dpf is the frictional pressure drop for the liquid the two phase frictional multiplier defined in above equation can be considered as the mean value for the converging microchannel single phase liquid flow prevails for the case of the mol the pressure drop for mol is therefore chosen as the reference for and mol respectively with mixture viscosity evaluated based on the equation given in is also selected as the reference though small bubbles may be produced intermittently in the outlet region fig illustrates the two phase frictional multiplier as a function of the mean void fraction in the channel ie the average of void fraction in the inlet and outlet regions for the converging microchannel the multiplier is from to indicating drop this may be owing to the over prediction of acceleration pressure drop assuming homogeneous twophase flow for the diverging microchannel the two phase multiplier is from to for both types of microchannel the two phase frictional multiplier may be positively correlated with the mean void fraction in the channel linearly within show in the fig however in the present study only the void fractions at the channel inlet and outlet regions were measured by assuming homogeneous two phase flow ie a unity slip ratio the quality of may be evaluated by the following fundamental equation where q is the density of the liquid mixture and g is the for the present study the average quality of in the converging and diverging microchannel range from to and to respectively since the flow rate in the present study is relatively small the flow for each phase alone will be laminar the lockhart martinelli parameter may be expressed as respectively it is interesting to note that the correlations of hwang et al were developed for adiabatic two phase flow in converging and diverging microchannels the data of the converging microchannel may also be predicted well by the correlation of mishima and hibiki flow above being laminar summary and conclusions the present study investigates experimentally the evolution of two phase flow pattern void fraction in the inlet and outlet regions and pressure drop in the converging and diverging silicon based microchannels with bubbles produced by the chemical reactions of sulfuric acid and sodium bicarbonate the effects of the reactants concentrations be drawn from the results of the present work flow visualization demonstrates that the present design of microchannel with the inlet chamber results in much more intensive chemical reactions in the diverging microchannel than that in the converging one the appearance of bubbles without bubble generation in the inlet chamber near the exit of the diverging the converging one indicates that irrespective of the design of inlet geometry the deceleration effect in the diverging microchannel may intensify chemical reactions possibly due to better mixing effect and flow reversal caused by boundary layer separation the latter effect is also evident as many small bubbles are generated near the channel wall for high inlet concentrations and result in significant mixing effect and generation of bubbles in the inlet chamber itself especially for the diverging microchannel with narrow inlet the measurement and analysis of the void fraction in the inlet and outlet regions indicate that the presence of small void fraction at the inlet may promote generation in the microchannel irrespective of the for low inlet concentrations there are no or little bubbles generated and the corresponding single phase flow frictional pressure drop may be well predicted by the hagen poiseuille equation with frictional factor depending on the aspect ratio the increase of inlet concentration of reactants does not increase the pressure drop significantly in the converging pressure drop in the diverging microchannel as bubbles generation is greatly intensified the increase of pressure drop due to significant bubble generation in the diverging microchannel is counter balanced by the deceleration effect therefore the pressure drop multiplication due to bubbles is quite mild this shows a merit of a diverging microchannel design the mean void fraction in the channel linearly and the data agree well with predictions from the correlations in the literature mechanical models of cellular solids parameters identification from experimental tests massimiliano avalle giovanni belingardi andrea ibba impact of the involved energy amount and of the maximum admissible load the choice of the most suitable density for the selected type of foam is based on stress strain behavior obtained by means of experimental tests and or models only a few micro mechanical models as the gibson model take into account the density effects these models could result quite complex to manage because of the need of at least a rough analysis of the actual foam structure conversely most of for numerical simulations are phenomenological models and have simple parameter identification based on fitting of experimental data but they do not account for density effect experimental uniaxial compression tests performed for several types of foams namely epp pur eps and ppo ps at different density levels are used in order to identify with an optimization procedure devoted to the minimization of the fitting residual evaluated by the least square the parameters of four cellular solid models the considered models are four the gibson model gibson lj ashby mf cellular solids structure and properties the rusch model rusch kc load compression behavior of flexible foams appl polym sci rusch kc energy absorbing characteristics of foamed polymers appl polym sci rusch kc load compression behavior of brittle foams appl polym sci a modified version of the gibson model and a new empirical model the third and fourth models have been developed in order to better fit the experimental stress strain curve the obtained improvements in terms of weighted sum of the squared errors are shown the experimental data are a good representation of the typical behavior of these kinds of foams and can be useful for the validation of models and the comparison of their performance moreover the large basis of different types of foams at different densities could
way of acting while the first part of this observation might be correct the second part raises the question of whether the force of persuasion to which people are susceptible is limited to logic not restricted itself to logic and reason at all we have already suggested that there is an implicit model of moral motivation at work in geography one that turns on the idea that people can be moved to practical action by a combination of empirically demonstrating their implication in distant consequences with an emotionally charged imputation of guilt geographers have also focussed primarily on providing refers to extending care and responsibility over distance now any attempt at the justification of practical conduct necessarily implies some model of how ethical motivation works as already noted the theories of ethics and morality that geographers have developed are not merely addressed at other academics they are embedded in pedagogic programmes that the motivational problems of practical action require one to find a robust principle by which people will be justifiably persuaded to act presumes that this consideration whatever it might be can be successfully conceived by theorists and then communicated through one form or other of pedagogic practice we suggest that people are motivated in all sorts of ways by all sorts of different to which people are susceptible if these assumptions are not true of those to whom a moral argument is addressed of those about whom it is meant to apply if not directly persuade then the justification will have neither validity or persuasive force so one question that arises for us is just what types of is that there is an excessive investment in the influence of causal knowledge but another question that arises in so far as this first answer seems plausible is just what is the motivational problem to which geographers accounts of caring at a distance and the geographies of responsibility are meant to provide a solution it seems to us that across the range of debates reviewed in sections and there is a is to overcome entrenched tendencies towards acting in self interested ways and according to a geographically restricted horizon of obligation self interest and egoism are routinely aligned with having a restricted geographical imagination and are counter posed to moral goods such as altruism which is in turn aligned with more expansive geographical and hence nothing personally to claim he further claims that the task of geography is to assist in justifying why people should be less self centered and more altruistic why is it that geographers fall so easily into assuming that people are naturally self interested egoists why is it that caring being responsible acting out of concern for strangers acting out of altruistic motivations should be considered wholly at odds with self regarding concerns these are of course rhetorical questions in order to shift attention away from the assumption that self interest is a natural disposition that needs to be countered and that moral actions such as altruism need to be motivated by providing cast iron justifications we are drawn towards the altruism because it provides a way into this theme of generosity it is true that most models of altruism remain resolutely monological they tend to keep the focus of moral agency squarely on the giver who is ascribed all the active attributes of moral subjectivity at the cost of the receiver who is thereby rendered a rather passive subject furthermore by discounting of an altruistic act can be wholly determined by reference to the intention behind it irrespective of the outcomes of any such act both these problems arise from the assumption that altruism and egoism are related in zero sum terms that being altruistic requires one to gainsay various self regarding motivations but one cannot account for other regarding conduct without considering the co implication of self interest for one thing the goods valued by the recipient or beneficiary of any altruistic act must be taken into consideration by the generous subject the generous act is after all meant to augment their capacities and capabilities we cannot coherently imagine a world in which everyone had exclusively altruistic motivations the goal of a gift if nobody had first order selfish pleasures nobody could have higher order altruistic motives either it turns out that altruism only makes sense if one supposes that other people the objects of one s generosity have a quite valid interest in their own pleasures in augmenting their own capacities if this instrumental outcome oriented oneself would turn out to be self negating it would be little more than an act done to augment the moral righteousness of the generous subject so rather than supposing that altruism and egoism are opposed versions of selfhood we might think instead of the co existence of two different perspectives that go together to make up ethical subjectivity a subjective partial personal adopt an objective position on states of affairs we have learnt to be rightly suspicious of accounts that privilege an abstracted detached perspective and to recognize the validity of the affections concerns and goals that people experience from their own partial personal perspective but we should not suppose that these two perspectives are opposed to one another nor that the subjective personal the possibility of self less virtues like prudence and altruism is testament to the capacity to view oneself as persisting through time and of recognizing the reality of other persons while altruism depends on the full recognition of other persons this also depends on having a conception of oneself as merely one person among others it is this impersonal it is the condition for acting in relation to the insistent demand of practical reason that is of acting in the expectation of having to give an understandable account or offer a normative justification for one s conduct before others assuming that moral action follows solely from the personal perspective of the i would be to to view oneself as a benevolent bureaucrat distributing
was present because null or small results associated with small sample sizes were missing only for two variables we conducted both unweighted and weighted analyses of effect sizes for nonverbal behaviors visible in the head and in the body area in unweighted analyses each study is given equal weight sample size whereas in weighted analyses each effect size is weighted by sample size as both unweighted and weighted analyses produced very similar results we present only the weighted analyses here in detail the calculation of combined effect sizes and variabilities was completed using the meta analysis programs of schwarzer we used pearson s as an effect and mullen but in addition we report cohen s d for the main analyses weighted analyses for the analyses of weighted effect sizes we used two different metaanalytical approaches namely the approach of hedges and olkin and the method of schmidt hunter although the latter was introduced mainly by hunter schmidt and jackson it became widely known as the schmidt hunter effect size by its sample size however hedges and olkin s approach uses fisher s transformations of study effect sizes in an attempt to outweigh the nonlinear bias of values whereas the schmidt hunter method does not therefore the latter method should slightly underestimate although we calculated all analyses both ways we report only the results obtained using the approach of hedges and olkin as the schmidt hunter method results as a cross check on accuracy some analyses were run using selfdesigned programs that produced identical outcomes only one behavior in the head area was significantly associated with deception liars nodded less than truth tellers contrary to common beliefs there was no association with deception in the body area the reduction of hand movements and foot and leg movements was significantly related to deception in contrast to the unweighted method the association of adaptors with deception was not reliable as a prerequisite to further analyses of moderator variables the homogeneity statistics are particularly important according to the and nodding adaptors and illustrators were heterogeneous indicating that the search for moderator variables is worthwhile although our search for moderator variables was primarily theory driven we also inspected the estimated error and residual variances relative to the observed variance if a large proportion of the observed variance in correlations is accounted for by artefacts such as sampling error moderators are hunter schmidt for a thorough discussion of these issues finally the raw residual amount of variability may also indicate whether or not a search for moderators might be fruitful this was the case for smiling head movements and hand movements thus moderator variable analyses were conducted when sufficient hypothesis tests were available in the respective subgroups for the head area this applied to eye contact head movements nodding and smiles for the body area this applied to adaptors illustrators and hand movements moderator variables focused comparisons of effect sizes to test the effects of moderator variables we chose the technique of classification blocking means that we conducted hypothesis tests within subgroups determined by the levels of the predictor under consideration which resulted in a mean and its confidence interval for each behavior within each category of a predictor if the confidence interval around an effect size within a given block did not include zero it was considered significant for this set of studies to compare the extent to which study outcomes differed between blocks of studies the difference was tested as the for the difference between effect sizes in each block for each block we report the number of studies the total the effect size and the associated value within discussion this meta analysis sought to present a quantitative summary of the evidence of nonverbal indicators of deception that may be particularly relevant in forensic settings when evaluating defendants or witnesses statements in police interviews or before courts of law of course the results are also important for other legal settings for example in tort law in family courts or with insurance as well as outside the law in business settings and negotiations and in interpersonal relationships only a dozen indicators were selected that can be observed online by interaction partners without any technical aid we conducted a meta analytic quantitative summary guided by predictions derived from major theoretical approaches summarized by zuckerman depaulo and rosenthal as these indicators showed only small associations with deception and as most of the results were heterogeneous we also tested the impact of a series of moderator variables most of which are also likely to be operative in practical settings first we summarize the major findings by contrasting them with those of past meta analyses drawing conclusions regarding the theoretical approaches and outlining their practical implications to gauge the practical importance of our findings we contrast the results of this meta analysis of observed correlates of deception with the results of several prior studies that have investigated beliefs about these behaviors held by students thinking about a specific crime situation police officers and lay people and lay people versus professionals we discuss these differences turn to some of the practical implications of our findings at the end we address some methodological issues that have implications for future research overall effects and support for theoretical approaches overall analyses weighted by sample size indicated that out of behaviors investigated only were reliably associated with deception nodding hand movements and foot and leg movements there was also a significant decrease in smiles and an increase in adaptors the effect sizes of these behaviors however were small except for hand and finger movements which were small to medium according to cohen s guidelines for interpreting effect sizes of the predictions provided by the arousal approach only the findings of the unweighted analyses for adaptors were corroborated by the size was quite small and was investigated most extensively in our database the moderator analyses performed as a function of motivation revealed no increase but rather a decrease in adaptors under high motivation as all
as a first order autoregressive process pcses and fixed effects are used to account for heteroskedasticity and heterogeneity respectively the results from this model are presented in the fourth column of table across all four model specifications and net of a battery of control variables dicator f combined with the presence of an imf program is found to have a pronounced effect on capital account policy however the coefficients for the neoliberal imf staff and imf program variables are found to be insignificant suggesting that the dissemination of neoliberal ideas depends on the presence of an imf program to illustrate how much these neoliberal ideas matter figure plots the predicted change in capital account openness based on the models that provide intermediate magnitude the lines represent two conditionsfone in which an imf program is present and another in which an imf program is absent all other variables are held at their means with the exception of dichotomous variables which are set to zero the mid imf programs are predicted to lead states to adopt a more restrictive capital account policy than those states without a program the difference in the predicted policy change between program and non program states however is less than the diamond line suggests that in the absence of a program the fund staff can be expected to exert at best a marginal impact on a state s capital account policy moderating the intensity of the triangle line suggests that an imf program offers a critical conduit through which the staff can disseminate their ideas when the neoliberal imf staff variable is set to its observed maximum a program state s capital account policy is predicted to become almost liberal than when the staff variable is set to its minimum a similar predicted difference separates imf program and non imf program states when the neoliberal imf staff variable is set to its maximum qualitative evidence also supports the conclusion that the fund staff s ideas were disseminated via numerous channels and likely shaped state policy although the imf did not indiscriminately promote liberalization on several occasions there is evidence that the staff encouraged governments to liberalize via bilateral surveillance technical assistance and discussions regarding imf programs future qualitative research should seek to trace these more fully thus complementing the quantitative evidence provided here for our purposes it is reasonable to conclude that the findings provide preliminary evidence for construct nomological validation and perhaps more importantly that quantitative methods can serve as a useful tool for ideational researchers conclusion this paper has examined two principal methodological problems facing ideational ideational researchers have not dealt with these problems adequately even those researchers who have sought to deal explicitly with these problems have failed to consider fully all the issues at stake in terms of the how much problem existing approaches fail to address the issue at all or propose strategies that neglect the bias efficiency trade off existing strategies for constructing quantitative measures of ideas using content analysis are also problematic as they tend face practical problems of developing and identifying cross nationally equivalent indicators and texts for analysis by contrast the recommendations offered here provide advantages that offset the weaknesses of these existing approaches in particular quantitative methods provide the benefit of formal evaluation of the bias efficiency trade off and the causal weight of norms and ideas a growing number of studies attest to the benefits that these terms of evaluating these issues these are benefits that qualitative research designs are unlikely to offer suggesting that this recommendation should prove quite useful in helping us to better understand the relative importance of ideas this line of argument also suggests that the methodological issues facing ideational researchers should also be of interest to those concerned with the advantages quantitative methods more generally recently there has been growing recognition of the great potential for complementarities between these methods however the existing ideational literature particularly in political science relies almost exclusively on qualitative methods to deal with the how much and how to problems although effective in tracing causal mechanisms this paper shows that these single provide only limited answers to these methodological problems this paper however offers new guidance that provides a way around some of these limitations allowing researchers to use quantitative methods which may be more suitable to dealing with these problems in doing so this paper opens up a new area of inquiry where the complementarities of qualitative and quantitative methods may be further explored and in terms of measurement the new approach offered to deal with the how to problem also facilitates new lines of research for scholars of ios the new approach to measurement opens up the possibility of developing new tests of hypotheses about these actors for instance claims that ios play a key role in diffusing ideas can now be empirically tested in a new manner in particular one could develop additional tests that seek to determine whether the rise of neoliberalism within the imf is associated with changes in state policy that are in accordance with these ideas those interested in changes within ios could also design tests to determine whether principals and or principles shape changes to io contracts and culture more broadly for ideational researchers the new approaches offer a means to provides on the imf s influence on capital account policy is one step in that direction the conventional wisdom tends to be that the imf s influence on capital account policy was largely coercive that is pressuring members to liberalize via its lending arrangements yet this paper offers evidence suggesting that the imf s influence on member state policies likely extends beyond coercion and includes persuasion this finding thus helps refine for a more sociologically informed view of the imf as an institution that serves as an agent of socialization and a disseminator of knowledge as to what constitutes appropriate policy in a given context critics may object that these approaches do violence to the ideational research program on the
week for fifth and sixth the syllabus is designed to stimulate enthusiasm for english rather than prepare them for exams and so role shows the fifth year children with their general subject teacher playing a word game based on rules that assign points according to the number of english words in a string rather as the game scrabble assigns points according to the number of letters in a word we might expect that it would be a good opportunity to showcase the grammatical creativity that allows children to make long complex strings to help each other win this is not what the data shows however extract jy js how are you ga nagetta jy mueorago js gi how are you jy how are you ho i so so js why lot neither long grammatical sentences nor keen competition are much in evidence here what is in evidence is a great deal of discoursal cooperation and co construction js uses korean meta language to offer language for the use of her opponent jy and both js and gi model it for jy to repeat the children provide their help just in time only the teacher s advice is a little ex post facto the next extract features just in time assistance of a different kind as in the children have been taught to construct turns by repeating the topic with a slight up intonation and then extending it however the game that follows this is a role play the same child who offered help in the word string game js is playing a reporter from the english broadcasting station and the other is playing an elephant that has escaped from a nearby children s park the elephant of the audience members during their performance we might justly expect that the result will be a lengthy cooperatively constructed exchange consisting of short highly interdependent terms but children at play appear to delight in frustrating our expectations extract js hello i m an ebc reporter how are you break js you are bad there seems to be much less cooperation and co construction going on here there is no metalinguistic framing or modeling of utterances instead topic repetition is directed toward the speaker s own turn which lends the insistent repetition of angry and why a slightly indignant touch instead of co construction the participants appear to be competing to project different versions of the incident on each other even the grammar appears one fairly error free english and the other error strewn elephantine a typical teacherly response to these two extracts might be simply to marvel at the apparent difference in quality of the language produced by the same class in what is physically at least the same situation separated by only days in time the first extract contains three utterances in korean and the target language and only four in english of which just three are error free the second extract contains neither korean nor code mixing and nine english utterances are error free nor is this difference attributable to the use of longer and more complex utterances in the first utterance building game if anything the english utterances in the second extract are longer and more complex than in the first instead of exchange of long grammatical strings in the first extract and a tall thin exchange of short grammatical strings in the second extract what we see is almost exactly the opposite the first extract has a more complex discourse structure while the second displays more complex grammar if these tendencies are consistent ones they require theoretical explication transcriptions of ten games and sixteen role plays totaling turns of talk because both the games and the role plays are slightly modified versions of the activities let s play and let s role play which normally appear in their textbooks the linguistic syllabus underlying the different activities is identical the rule based games include the word scrabble already described games based on volleyball rules that require prolonging sentences or exchanges and dice games used to prompt suggestions and rejections role play situations involved the elephant escapade sketched above inviting friends to a birthday party or to one s home a dog stealing ham a fight between friends making preparations for a musical trying to get along with a previously excluded experiment all games took place after the presentation and practice of target language in the form of dialogues as the syllabus requires and no attempt was made to manipulate the groupings data gathering was made as non invasive as possible although the subjects were informed of the recordings all the recordings took place in the same school term that is within a period of roughly four months of activities we calculated the proportion of particular turn types to total turns instead of simply looking at raw totals however because the data are not normally distributed we did not attempt any parametric tests of significance free pairs and frozen pairs least one such utterance are coded frozen on examining the whole database we find a higher proportion of frozen pair parts in role plays than in rule based games distributed as shown in table table shows what the most frequent frozen pair parts in each type of game were note that while similar numbers of frozen pair parts are used for openers there is a huge discrepancy the rule based game the children have a strong reason to start an interaction but once the points have been earned there is no reason to continue the dialogue the difference between occurrences of how are you and i m fine is a little harder to explain how are you stands somewhere between free and frozen pairs in our data sacks points out that unlike greetings how are you can admit and answer perhaps surprisingly there are many examples of these melted pairs beginning how are you in our data for example in both the extract and extract thus in both types of game
new peer to peer model called hybrid chord or simply hybrid system which has the following two key features multiple chord rings overlayed one on top of the other and multiple successor lists of constant size the multiple chord rings system and the successor list system could be we describe the hybrid system obtained by combining the two ideas and resulting in an enhancement of chord a multiple chord rings in our system we generate a virtual network by overlaying chord rings one on top of the other our goal is to speedup data lookup and make the system more robust the idea is based on the fact that if several chord rings are overlayed performance each node has identifiers and every identifier logically corresponds to a location in one chord each data item has a unique key and is mapped into the same location on different virtual chord rings in other words there are identifiers for a node and the node is located in logical chord rings with different location since in each chord every data item owns only one each data item distributed in different nodes that are in charge of its location on different chord rings in the overlay network we will often refer this as chord model figure shows the example of a chord topology for in this figure every node has two identifiers where is the identifier in the first chord ring and is the identifier in the second chord ring for example node identifier pairs two virtual chord rings are organized on the other hand each data item has two replicas which are distributed in these two logical chord rings for example if a data item has key then this data item is stored in nodes with identifier pair and which means that if any identifier of a node s identifiers matches a data item s key this node will have a replica of that data item rings a lookup request will try to find the numerically closest one to satisfy the query at each hop during a lookup the local routing information is used to select the current closest replica to route the request thus a search may switch from one chord to another to speedup routing by choosing the closest replica of the desired data item at each step permutation of name spaces in overlaying chord each node assuming the size of identifier name space is the nodes identifier name space can be expressed as and we consider the name space of the first chord ring to be thus we can view all the possible nodes identifiers on the other chord rings as a permutation of a well chosen permutation which could make routing more efficient is desirable in the functionality reverse permutation assuming the name space of the first chord is the permutation for the second chord ring can be the reverse of ie thus for any node identifier in the first chord ring we can obtain the identifier in the second chord ring this permutation unfortunately limits the number of chord rings to just two s name is we can obtain its identifier in the first chord ring by hashing its name hash based on this identifier we can derive other identifiers of this node by adding a constant thus from the entire name space perspective other chord rings can be viewed as simply chord rings derived by shifting the original chord ring let the name space of the first chord be the shift we can construct chord system based on equidistance shift permutations etc thus the identifiers of node rp in the chord system will be in the ring a full mapping table is needed to keep track of complete permutations for each chord ring each node in this case can get its identifiers by querying the mapping table it is expensive to maintain the mapping table for each node in practice we can obtain the permutations by applying a minimal perfect hashing function to generate the identifiers of a node recursively a perfect hash function is a collision free a minimal perfect hash function can map different keys to distinct integers and has the same number of possible integers as keys which means that keys will map to without any collision if a node s name is we can get the identifiers as hash hash pk hash in this way the values of pi will be different with high probability is a prime number and is an arbitrary integer the modular permutation is obtained by skipping consecutive elements ie mod since and are coprime it is guaranteed that r mod is a permutation of to obtain different chord rings we can choose different values of desired data item efficiently is an extremely important criteria in a system chord can route to the destination node by decreasing the distance by half after each hop in the chord system we leverage virtual chords to speedup the routing process each node sets up a finger table for each chord ring like chord and maintains a dimensional finger table for efficient routing range of its position and its successor on each chord ring if the destination is located within one of those ranges it finds the desired node and just jumps to that node directly if not it applies a greedy strategy to forward the query the greedy strategy scans the dimensional finger table finds the predecessors of the destination on chord rings and then the chords to speedup finding the closest replica of the desired data we will see later that the approach of overlaying topologies to improve performance is case sensitive if the interval between each hop is the same and long enough it can work efficiently however the routing algorithm of chord guarantees that the distance between the target and the location to the destination becomes very short and it has little chance to switch between the chords this means that our chord model can contribute a lot in the
curves isolates the effect of pmd and increases sensitivity at a bit error rate of we observed a penalty db in the constructive arm in comparison to direct detection for ook and dpsk which indicates that the signal through the constructive port can be used for standard detection although dgd affects the clock tone power it does not affect the change in power versus cd experimental results are using and the results of figs and we obtain pmd insensitive cd measurements to within db for nrz ook the monitoring sensitivity is increased by from db for standard clock tone detection to db using our method for dpsk the sensitivity is increased by db using a single clock tone detection to db with our method to ps of dgd with an average sensitivity of db ps for both ook and dpsk as illustrated in fig for ook and fig for dpsk iv conclusion we have demonstrated a simultaneous cd and firstorder pmd monitoring method using a partial bit delay mach zehnder interferometer assisted rf clock tone monitoring which isolates the two effects while improving two for nrz and five for dpsk in the constructive arm the mzi acts as an optical bandpass filter reducing the ase noise without deteriorating the data signal expression technology a review of the performance and highly parallel measurements of gene expression was once restricted to pure research laboratories it has now taken its place next to pathology reports as a tool to validate and elaborate upon cellular phenotypes that provide clues to disease status and progression predictive biomarkers of gene expression are often selected to estimate disease progression or development it is molecular profiling technologies to improve the reliability and precision of these molecular detection platforms we need to apply some form of data normalization and prefiltering first however we must understand even anecdotally the basic mechanisms of the profiling technologies themselves from detection and scanning to gridding image processing and data with some attention paid to other technologies such as bead based devices and detection we will also examine the characteristics of this technology that makes it so dependent upon robust data normalization and we will examine the biological consequence of error introduction consist of a high quality glass slide or other nonreactive substrate made suitable for gene transcript hybridization by eliminating surface imperfections reactive groups trace oxidants fluorescent residuals and microscopic fractures some competing technologies rely on fluorescent beads gel based separation electronic detection sequencing based methods such as sage in this discussion we will focus on the typical glass surface oligomer based expression microarray the need for precision manufacturing is apparent when one of the actual number of photons to provide an estimate of transcript abundance these spots or features as they are known average gm in diameter with to upwards of millions of features per slide as technology moves the field forward these arrays will accommodate more features and the corresponding feature size will continue to shrink in the major expression platforms are manufactured see table and in terms of the probe density the new affymetrix exon array will exceed million features per slide at gm feature and agilent has indicated a company policy of doubling feature numbers every few quarters to obtain meaningful data this the readings auto fluorescence changes local and global background estimates thereby adding random and systematic noise to the overall signal the surface of the slide is also exposed to myriad reactive chemicals during processing and wash steps the coating on the slide surface must not interfere with hybridization or binding of probe and target yet it must provide a surface where the probe binds strongly enough to the during wash steps all of these factors play a role in the resulting technical variance of the array the ultimate goal is to create an environment where noise is mitigated where the device will provide the highest signal to noise ratio and subsequently high reproducibility and sensitivity when exposed to labeled mrna even in complex biological mixtures the ideal situation is technology however the achilles heel of commercial arrays is the heavy dependence upon high quality starting mrna through many years research and development efforts both agilent and affymetrix have made substantial gains in performance price and market share enabling them to essentially dominate the field custom cdna arrays are still the most prevalent expression technology in academia due to price data quality but these arrays are not standardized in any way and make it difficult to utilize historical data public data repositories have paralleled market prevalence reflecting a near split between custom cdna arrays and the two major commercial arrays due to this valuable resource of historical data the impetus for better normalization never ends older data is often supplied with the the experiment may not be the best available today and users have the option to re grid and reanalyze original scanned images to get better data expression platform types agilent leveraged their expertise in ink jet technology to build a robust cdna array with over features in collaboration with scientists at national human genome research institute in these arrays were very reproducible but presented a two channel loess normalization to accommodate variances in the performance of the two dyes within a few years agilent introduced a method of applying nucleosides via ink jet applicators to enable in situ synthesis of mer oligonucleotides on the surface of the array the synthesis is complete through rounds of synthesis yielding length mer probes the physical characteristics with increases in density occurring at regular quarterly intervals agilent offers single and dual color modes for their array for the two channel mode they require two dyes and mixed together in a competitive hybridization and for their single channel products for any two channel array several physical characteristics of the dyes play a role in causing an intensity based deviation from perfect correlation energy output bleaching chemical degradation and other factors cause biases although hybridizing two specimens simultaneously in one solution
contrast to the atom atom for an atom in an excited energy eigen state was found to show an oscillatory behavior in the retarded limit thereby making the effect of the transverse electromagnetic field more explicit in addition atoms interacting with bodies of different shapes and materials have been considered such as perfectly conducting planar and parabolic cavities metal electric and magneto electric half spaces electric planar and spherical cavities needless to say that the pioneering work of casimir and polder on dispersion forces has also stimulated further studies of the problem of body body interactions apart from confirming and interpreting the original results normal mode techniques have been employed to include effects that arise from finite temperatures surface roughness the presence of a dielectric medium and even virtual electron positron pairs as in the case of atom body interactions various other geometries and materials have been considered such as two electric dielectric locally and non locally responding metal plates two plates that are polarizable and magnetizable the faces of a perfectly conducting rectangular cavity two electric multilayer stacks plate and cylinder two electric spheres a perfectly conducting plate and a small electric sphere a sphere and a surrounding spherical cavity the results qualitatively resemble the findings for the atom atom and atom body interactions in particular retardation was found to lead to a stronger asymptotic decrease of the forces which is softened due to thermal effects as soon as the separations exceed the thermal wavelengths and a magnetizable one was found to be repulsive perhaps a more surprising result is the fact that two birefringent plates may exert a non vanishing dispersion torque on each other moreover the problem of casimir energies of single has been addressed motivated by a conjecture made by casimir according to which an attractive casimir energy of an electron should be able to counterbalance the of the electron charge and thus explain its however the energy of a perfectly conducting sphere was found to be repulsive with similar findings for a weakly dielectric sphere on the contrary the casimir energy of a weakly dielectric cylinder was found to be attractive in agreement with the expectations the physical significance of casimir energies of single objects is yet unclear in particular it was shown by pairwise summation dispersion energies that dispersion energies of macroscopic objects are in fact dominated by the always attractive volume and surface energies and may hence never be observed in standard calculations of casimir energies these volume and surface energies are either not considered from the very beginning or discarded during regularization procedures normal mode techniques have proved to be a powerful tool for studying dispersion nevertheless some principal limitations of the approach have become apparent recently in particular in view of the new challenges in connection with recent improvements on the experimental side so normal mode calculations can become extremely cumbersome when applied to object geometries relevant to practice or when a realistic description of the electromagnetic properties of the interacting objects is required the limitations are also illustrated by the controversy regarding the low of dispersion forces on bodies the answer to this question requires detailed knowledge of the complicated interplay of positional thermal and spectral factors to see this one has to bear in mind that in general a large range of frequencies contributes to the forces where the relative influence of different frequency intervals is determined by the object object separation temperature dependence of the object properties as a consequence approximations such as long short range high low temperature or perfect reflectivity limits become intrinsically intertwined a typical material property relevant to dispersion forces is the permittivity which is a complex function of frequency with the real and the imaginary part being responsible for dispersion and absorption respectively in particular absorption which introduces additional noise into a system application of normal mode expansion on a macroscopic level this point was first taken into account by lifshitz in his calculation of the dispersion force between two electric half spaces at finite temperature where he derived the force from the average of the stress tensor of the fluctuating electromagnetic field at the surfaces of the half spaces with the source of the field being the fluctuating noise current within the dielectric matter the required average was noting that the current fluctuations are linked to the imaginary part of the permittivity via the fluctuation dissipation theorem in this way lifshitz could express the force per unit area in terms of the permittivities of the two half spaces where in particular in the non retarded limit the force per unit area was obtained to be the influence of different frequency ranges effects of finite temperatures and surface roughness and other planar structures such as electrolytic half spaces separated by a dielectric magnetoelectric half spaces metal plates of finite thickness metal half spaces exhibiting non local properties and electric multilayer systems a typical approximation for treating small planar structures is the proximity force approximation where it is assumed that the interaction of two objects with gently curved surfaces can be obtained by simply integrating the force per unit area along the surfaces while the debate regarding the temperature dependence of the force between realistic metal half spaces still seems unsettled general consensus is reached that material absorption leads to the disagreeing results it is worth noting that the forces in a planar structure can be reexpressed in terms of reflection coefficients directly accessible from experiments this formulation of the theory has been applied to metal and electric half spaces metal half spaces with non local properties electric multilayer stacks and in some to rough perfectly conducting and metal half spaces where the surface roughness can give rise to a tangential force component and a torque lifshitz s idea of expressing dispersion forces in terms of response functions is of course not restricted to planar systems but can be extended to arbitrary geometries this can be achieved by expressing the results obtained by normal mode
and is called quoted service time this means that the model might indicate that a particular stage should quote a different service time to the next tier customers for example retail stores are constrained to quote a service time of zero because end customers need immediate product availability consequently if this analysis is performed in a supply chain with multiple independent firms each firm needs to be willing to implement the promised delivery time as prescribed by the mathematical analysis the optimization model used demand lead time inventory and cost data obtained from the manufacturers the distributor and the retailer demand data included forecasts at the store level and included the time for all activities in the model procurement and manufacturing for the manufacturers transportation to manufacturer s and distributor s dcs handling at the dcs and preparation time at the stores daily inventories for validation of the model were calculated using shipments to and from each location cost data included the inventory carrying cost rate for each firm the transportation costs the variable cost to make the products the manufacturer s selling prices the distributor s selling the distributor s selling prices and the acquisition costs for each member of the supply chain findings to assess the benefits from interorganizational time based postponement we compared the existing inventory levels in the supply chain with those prescribed by the optimization modeling framework for clarity we describe in detail the results of the quantitative analysis for one manufacturer one dc and one store which are presented in figures and the results for all stocking locations studied jire included in appendix in the existing situation each member of the supply chain determined inventory levels based only on local information figure shows that manufacturer used postponement by delaying manufacturing until the customer placed an order this resulted in holding no safety stock of finished goods to delay both manufacturing and procurement activities manufacturer i would need manufacturer i would need to quote the next tier customer a lead time of days since this was an unacceptably long lead time in the industry manufacturer opted to hold inventory of raw materials and no inventory of finished goods thus the procurement stage held seven days of inventory to quote immediate product availability to the manufacturing stage since the manufacturing stage time was days the manufacturer quoted the distributor days plus the transit time which equaled a total lead time of days a total lead time of days for the distributor s dc shown in figure the dc stage time was one day for breaking bulk and other handling activities and the quoted service time to the stores is two days the inbound service time of days plus one day for handling minus the two days quoted to the stores equaled days of exposure for the dc the dc had to hold days of safety stock which is the size of the decoupling inventory the stores were quoted two days plus there was one day for handling the stores were quoted two days plus there was one day for handling and preparing the merchandise which resulted in three days of exposure because stores quoted immediate product availability to end customers the size of the decoupling inventory at the stores was three days figure shows the same supply chain network structure optimized across firm boundaries the stores must hold the same amount of safety stock because the dc is configured to quote a two day lead time plus stores require a day for receiving and preparing products for sale and they need to offer immediate product availability to customers the dc has seven days of exposure instead of the original days this seven day lead time is the lowest possible because dcs have a review period of seven days while the inventory reduction at this dc is four days of slock when all nine dcs are considered a day reduction in the key difference between figure and figure is that the manufacturing stage hold s days of safety stock of finished product which enables the manufacturer to offer immediaie product availability plus the transit time this decoupting inventory allows the manufacturer to hold no safety stock of raw materials our research results indicate that by implementing postponement at the manufacturing level hold more inventory of the products of manufacturer and with interorganizational time based postponement the inventory investment at manufacturer increases this is the result of raw materials going from seven days of inventory to zero and finished goods going from zero to days the seven days of raw materials were valued at purchased price plus acquisition costs and the days of finished goods inventory are valued at the out of pocket cost associated with manufacturing the products but this increased cost is relatively small when compared but this increased cost is relatively small when compared to the savings at the distributor s level where inventory for all nine dcs has fallen from days to days a savings of days which is valued at the manufacturer s selling price plus the distributor s acquisition costs similar results were found for the products of manufacturer as shown in figure the cash value of inventory increases as it moves closer to the point of consumption and the cash value of a day of inventory is not the same at different tiers of of a day of inventory is not the same at different tiers of the supply chain implications the research revealed a number of factors that must be considered when implementing postponement time based postponement should include both manufacturing and logistics activities the use of postponement needs to be a supply chain wide initiative focused on the end customer and include multiple organizations context a supply chain might need multiple decoupling points and the concept of a decoupling point is different from the point of product differentiation time based postponement time based postponement is implemented by determining the best locations of the decoupling inventories and by coordinating activities
strengthen the three trombones and the bass resolves not to but bb if we examine the three other moments mahler considered for hammerblows yet excised we see none of them involve a moment in which heroic tonal struggle is needed to counteract the lure of the subdominant if i am correct that the pull towards represents a tonal crisis throughout the symphony a false security a false point of repose then we see why the only hammer blows to survive mahler s excisions were placed exactly where they were to highlight these very moments of crisis earlier i had written that the key of was present by implication at the recapitulation of this finale fully what i mean is also to see in a new light the awesome tonal drama of this movement for mahler brings a new marker of fate to it we hear it in the very first measure a german built on ab over a by implication this is clearly in the tonality of and the chord reappears transposed down to a as the coda to this movement to a this is tonal closure the movement achieves the final motion on the descending tonal arc of eb second half of the symphony in fact so important is the motion from to a that the exposition of this finale travels it three times with no other tonal center having any structural significance but the disruptive force of will not retire from the battlefield so easily twice in the center of this finale that new fate chord intervenes but now asserting as its bass at the opening of the development and at the opening of the recapitulation thus yet again threatens to overwhelm the true tonic the struggle is perhaps most obvious at the moment of recapitulation for the chord above is the german of while the bass is that disruptive as previously mentioned it is noteworthy how little use mahler makes of the true dominant key the one extended use if it being in actuality fb is constantly upstaged by the semitonally inflected flatted dominant eb this is part work s tragic design made as ironic as can be for in the third movement we seem to reach a haven of peace after the storms and mockery of the opening two movements yet it is illusion for this world of peace is built on the quick sand of a tritone eb relative to a the most unstable harmonic relation in western tonality the diabolus in musica on the subject of this tritone it is notable how often on a melodic basis mahler chooses to highlight a and eb to draw it forth immediate consciousness one such moment occurs at the very beginning of the development section of the fist movement and we also hear though most often in transposition many moments where the tritonal relation becomes harmonic or simultaneous for example this conflation of bb and major early in the same movement quite a new sonority for and it is also a striking fact that once the key of eb was so heartbreakingly lingered with in the third movement it is heard again except for the briefest of passages in the midst of the vast development section of the finale nor is the key of which preceded the final eb tonality of the third movement heard again perhaps the reason why is that at the end of the third movement mahler in a technical tour de force merges the two keys at we recapitulate melodically in yet as the recapitulation continues we move in to the home key of eb we have arrived tonally yet in this home we do not hear the main melody the two keys then share the recapitulation we now are in a position to see why mahler eschews not only eb but also the key of in his finale they have merged in our minds to sound would be to evoke eb and it is critical for mahler s large scale design not to backtrack in his arc from eb through to a he needs to press forward thus any mention of either eb or would hurt the power and the structural clarity of his ultimate triadic what is the correct order of the symphony s four movements from the foregoing it is plain i agree with those who take the position that mahler s initial plan for the symphony scherzo preceding andante is correct a weighty structural bit of evidence is that this order allows mahler to mirror on a larger scale the dramatic essence of the fate motif the sudden presence of a minor after a triumphant statement of a major that is exactly what we hear as the second enters in a minor after the brassy blaze of a major with which the first movement ends no victory here says the fate motif in miniature no victory here says the mocking second movement as a these matters of tonal design are powerful evidence for the scherzo andante configuration of the inner movements meanwhile there is other evidence though some of what follows is admittedly speculative as already remarked there is a general tendency in this symphony for things first a smaller scale to be met with again on a larger one for example the a minor major sonority that arrests us in the symphony s opening measures prefigures the fundamental tonal contrast of the entire exposition of the first movement now might it be that the symphony as a whole is meant to reflect on a grander scale the design of its first movement let s consider the first movement begins with a double exposition so does the symphony for the scherzo in both its and its motivic essence repeats the first movement the third movement an idyllic release then corresponds to the idyllic heart of the development section of movement one complete with a return of the herdeglocken the grand fourth movement returning to the key of a and
been characterized by large public freedoms which have given it a the region a place where different ideas currents and trends can thrive and interact peaceful multicultural coexistence however collapsed into violent warfare in the years the conclusion of the taef accord of brought an end to violence and destruction and led to the reinstatement of security however the war which lebanon endured interrupted the normal course of development leading to an overall now in the phase of reconstituting its political economic and social structures and institutions the first phase of reconstruction and development namely the rehabilitation of the physical infrastructure has been completed and has largely reestablished normal operations of public services daunting challenges however lie ahead particularly when it comes to economic recovery postwar governments have pursued monetary stabilization in the national currency recent governments have had to go further in their stabilization policy to finance the growing deficit in the budget the main economic challenge confronted by successive governments in recent years has indeed been large recurring budget deficits averaging more than estimated gdp over efforts to restore fiscal balance have generally been undermined by the fiscal issues have therefore tended to dominate policy making in the postwar years limiting the government s scope to adopt more growth oriented measures and accentuating the need for greater reliance on the private sector to promote growth generate employment and improve standards of living while the lebanese private sector has traditionally been the dominant engine of growth in a relatively open and liberal economic reemergence of lebanon as a preeminent regional hub for trade and services the private sector is rising to the challenge but the constraints imposed by fiscal macroeconomic realities are real and the scope for private sector maneuver seems limited at best the csr initiatives which will be explored in the following sections therefore need to be viewed within this general contextual framework of paper comprised a primary research which was conducted in the lebanese context during the months of april and may the sample consisted of eight companies operating in lebanon that were selected because of their reputation and csr involvement some of the companies were identified through their previous involvement in a united nations volunteers program which represented a first attempt in to document information companies were selected because of the visibility of their csr programs for example the two banks that participated in this study are renowned in lebanon for their community involvement and philanthropic contributions the selected companies spanned different industries the sample therefore comprised two banks one insurance company one hotel one manufacturer of hygienic products one bottler to note that four of the companies are subsidiaries of international corporations the remaining four companies are local in origin and scope such sample composition is potentially interesting allowing a comparison of the extent to which the csr practices of these local companies differ from their international counterparts operating in lebanon as well as the extent to the philosophy and csr approach of their mother firms comparisons along these lines can indeed potentially enrich the discussion the companies were contacted first by phone and then a formal introductory letter highlighting the aims of the research and its queries were sent to the companies an in depth interview was then scheduled and conducted by the author and one graduate student in their respective organizations the interviews consumed an average of two hours were conducted in english tape recorded and transcribed the research used semi structured interviews whereby an interview guide was prepared outlining topics issues to be covered but the course of the interview while different aspects of the corporate social interventions of the companies participating in the study were explored the next section will focus on findings pertaining to the main issues raised in this paper relating to the type of csr performed and whether it can best be qualified as altruistic or strategic the differing dynamics of altruistic and strategic csr will be highlighted and implication drawn relating approach in the context of developing countries research findings all eight companies participating in this study adhered to a voluntary action or philanthropic type conception of csr the understanding of csr in the lebanese context thus seems anchored in the context of voluntary action with the economic legal and ethical dimensions assumed as taken for granted indeed when asked about the type of mention of ethical considerations legal compliance or economic interventions csr in the lebanese context is therefore largely understood to comprise the philanthropic contributions that business firms make over and above their mandatory mainstream contributions and activities the distinction between altruistic and strategic csr on the other hand was indirectly gauged by examining the nature of social companies unique capabilities in this respect the scope spectrum of social interventions was extremely diversified ranging from donations programs involving the orphans and handicapped to art and cultural development type activities to sports and music events to educational and learning programs table gives a flavor of the social programs mostly emphasized by the different aspects of these findings are deserving of attention the first observation pertains to the prevalence of altruistic type csr with strategic csr practiced by only two companies namely microsoft and tetra pak that happen to be subsidiaries of international firms within the altruistic batch the majority of corporate contribution programs although generally integrated under a coherent theme the interviews the nature of social contributions is determined in all cases as a result of enlightened entrepreneurship exercised by owners managers of the enterprise it is interesting to note in this respect that none of the companies had a dedicated csr official office most of the companies managed responsibility issues through an ad hoc committee comprising marketing public relations and management representatives in some responsibility for social issues management in accordance to guidelines set by top management the management of csr thus continues to be considered in the lebanese context a public corporate affairs function with the public relations department assuming responsibility for devising
rise to greater caution on the part of risk managers such caution might also stem from the absence of historical data on risk management strategies for a common currency where the performance of the currency is contingent on aggregate economic performance with less control over the international value of its currency french firms may have been motivated to devote more of monetary independence the primary reason why other eu countries have not yet joined the euro could engender a greater dependency on hedging instruments thirdly in the light of the evidence that managers can have differing attitudes and policies regarding fx risk management there could be a behavioral explanation for the continued use of derivatives once the euro was introduced fourthly despite the apparent hedging relation we observe between the reduction and lower fx exposure post euro we cannot rule out the possibility that the french firms in the sample could be using fx derivatives for speculation rather than for hedging purposes by way of comparison joseph and hewins and glaum report very different risk management strategies ranging from selective hedging through to hedging all risks as soon as they manufacturing firms typically have more overseas business and are thus more prominent in the initial sample there is some variation across industries in the extent to which firms use fx derivatives for the business sector there is a less than average use of fx derivatives consistent with studies in the us and the uk factors that explain the change in fx derivative use observed in table was influenced by characteristics that reflect the extent of firms fx exposures these characteristics relate to euro and non euro currency sales the number of foreign subsidiaries and the industry sector the variables we use are outlined below euro and non euro currency sales there should be a substantial decline in fx derivative use for french firms where a high proportion of are located within the euro zone our proxy for this is the difference between euro sales in and french franc sales in scaled by average total sales over and this represents a change in fx exposure and therefore the greater this decline in exposure the greater should be the decline in fx derivative use similarly we also suggest that the change in fx derivative usage will be this as sales outside euro zone in scaled by total sales in this relation is further analysed by considering the sales outside europe scaled by total sales in for a sub sample of firms where disclosure in the notes to the financial statements provides that subsidiaries the number of non french subsidiaries in is a we contend that the decrease in fx derivative use will be greatest for those french firms where the forsub are also part of the euro zone our proxy considers the number of non french subsidiaries that moved from their home currency to the euro between and and therefore now have the same currency as the french holding firm for french firms expanding internationally outside the euro zone the greater the number of noneuro impact of the euro on fx derivative use our proxy forsub measures the number of nonhome currency subsidiaries in and the greater the number the lower the expected decrease in fx derivative industry sector the impact of the euro on fx derivative use can vary across firms if the industry sector influences the extent to which sales purchasing and production occur within or outside of the euro business mainly involves intra euro transactions such as transport and utilities the extent of exports should be captured at the firm level by our sales variables however one aspect not considered so far is the extent to which inputs to the production process are imported from outside the euro zone and therefore some fx purchasing risk will remain after the introduction as this information is not disclosed in financial statements however we have information on imports at the industry level and match the firms in our sample based on their two digit or four digit code to the industry codes on the united nations comtrade database le minefi database and insee database for each industry sector of the sample firms following the adoption of the euro we suggest that the change in fx derivative usage will be less for firms that still have a significant amount of imports that remain outside the euro zone table contains the definitions of the above proxy variables their values are reported in table the data in table shows that the denomination to the euro also the mean number of forsub a proxy measuring the extent of fx exposure from subsidiaries operating in currencies other than the home currency declined significantly between and testing method and results the impact of the euro on derivative use is examined by means of multivariate regressions using the independent variables listed in table french firms this variable is measured as the notional value minus the notional value scaled by the average sales over the period owing to the nature of the independent variables we estimate tobit regressions appendix a shows that the pearson correlation between our independent variables should not create significant problems of fx exposure the larger the reduction in the level of fx derivative use the proxy for the proportion of sales outside the euro zone has the expected negative relation and is statistically significant indicating that the decline in hedging was not as great for firms that had significant remaining fx exposure as measured by sales outside the euro zone we also find a significant negative relation between the change in fx derivative use and our proxy for the amount of importing from outside the home currency hence for our sample of french firms the amount of business they continue to have outside the euro zone appears to be an fx derivative use over the period of the introduction of the euro the relations between the change in fx derivative use and the fx exposure measured
two cantilevers shown with black filled area located in the middle and two electrodes for electrostatic actuation are located at the sides of cantilevers when voltage the deflection of the beams allows the edges of the cantilevers to approach each other the separation gap between tips located at the cantilever edge decreases as shown in the close view schematic when the voltage is applied to right electrode gap size between tips increases and retraction is obtained high resolution displacements at nanometer level can be obtained by this approach retract mechanism about nm towards the actuation electrode the separation gap between tips shows a change of approximately nm by using this mechanism it is possible to approach and contact two electrodes separated by a distance of tens of nanometers fig shows the scanning electron microscope picture of the fabricated device by using this concept two cantilevers in the middle can be seen a close on the right the initial gap is on the order of nm high voltage electrode on the left is used for tip approach while the one on the right is used for retraction in order to prevent cantilevers from contacting with high voltage electrodes four stopper structures denoted by can be seen at the center cantilevers have the length of while the width and the thickness are fig shows a device that is fabricated an electron beam to pass through and let the user to see the tips during operation in tem the size of the hole is adjusted such that it will not affect mechanical stability of the cantilever beams the overall chip size is also adjusted such that it can fit into a tem sample holder fig is showing an illustration of the tem holder with five contact pins and how device chip is placed the sem top view of the whole chip can be seen in the tem holder iii fabrication fig shows the fabrication process flow for a regular device as well as a device for operation in tem silicon on insulator wafer is used as starting material silicon thickness is and buried oxide thickness is with handle wafer thickness of the silicon surface is first cleaned by diluted hf and then electron beam is exposed with a dose of cm development was done with a developer at after development a nm au layer is evaporated by thermal evaporation with cr adhesion layer of nm liftoff is performed in a zdmac remover with sonication for min then silicon is etched by anisotropic dry etching finally vapor phase hf oxide etching is performed to release cantilevers wafer from the back side after liftoff process after deep etching the front side silicon is etched by using the liftoff gold layer as a mask finally wet etching of oxide with hf for min is performed the fabrication process has high yield and reproducibility mainly depends on the development step in electron beam lithography which defines the initial gap between the tips fabricated for operation in tem are used to measure initial gap and the change in the gap size when voltage is applied to actuation electrodes to approach tips the displacements were measured from the video image which is calibrated by the magnification factor finite element analysis software intellisuite was used to evaluate definition iteration number of four automatic mesh creation method of the software is used with maximum mesh size of fig shows the experimentally measured change in gap size with black filled circles error bars are showing the uncertainty in displacement measurement which is mainly due to the edge roughness of the tips that are on the order of nm simulation results with assumed values image of the tips and instances from tem vide images from which displacement measurements are performed edge roughness of the tips can be seen in high magnification view conductance measurements with tips during retract and approach conductance measurements are made by applying a small constant bias to one of the cantilevers while grounding is monitored a typical measurement result obtained from initially connected tips can be seen in fig first retraction electrodes are used to separate connected tips as the actuation voltage is increased the decrease in the flowing current is observed mainly due to the decrease in contact cross section area the close up view just before the complete rupture is shown in fig the discrete steps of conductance quantization final conduction channels these are well known steps that are interpreted as preferable configurations at atomic level when a metal neck formed between two metal surfaces is being deformed during elongation after the tips are completely separated the actuation voltage is reduced and tips are allowed to contact again the experiment was done at room temperature is kept fixed previous tunneling studies are showing that the expected resistance between tips is on the order of gigaohms when the gap is nm in this experiment tips are approached such that the tips are still not in contact namely resistance is greater than and the gap is less than nm the bias voltage is swept to characterize i behavior of the device in this experiment the same device is used for all can be used to control the resistance between tips that are separated by a gap of less than nm electrical measurements with self assembled monolayer coated tips experimentation with gold tips coated with self assembled monolayer is also performed after the last step of fabrication process the chips are dipped into mm of ben zene dithiol solution in tetra hydro furan and dried in ar atmosphere with thf for min by dipping measurements are made by applying a constant bias voltage of mv while increasing the voltage at actuation electrode to approach tips until current is greater than na after that point the tips are allowed to separate from each other by slowly decreasing the actuation voltage fig shows the measured data during the experiment as reference fig is showing the negative current is the leak current flowing from
spines with a pitch were used to route over test chip measurements fig shows the measured current and inferred energy dissipation in the clock generator supply of the test chip over a range of operating frequencies from mhz to ghz by scaling to correct operation was verified up to ghz the clock generator supply together with the dc supply voltage accounts for the total energy dissipation in and the clock generator replenishing switches as well as the buffers needed to drive them not shown in the figure is the measured energy dissipation in the voltage scaled power supply for logic which remains nearly constant at pj per computation each point in the plot corresponds to the minimum energy dissipation obtained over the entire range of possible values for the chip was measured to be approximately mhz at this frequency the minimum energy per cycle in the test chip was measured at pj with and since the dissipation in switching the same load capacitance with an identical amplitude would be pj it can be inferred that approximately the energy provided to the system is recovered as the operating frequency shifts from the shown in fig fig shows a textured shmoo plot of the energy dissipation of the test chip at and as the duty cycle of the pulse generator and the clock generator switch width are varied in this figure points with the same symbol fall in the same energy dissipation band of pj higher energy dissipation occurs at larger values of and which reflect the higher a trade off that can be made between and from our measurements the region of efficient operation of the clock generator is for pulse duty cycles between for the minimum switch width that allows correct operation fig illustrates the total energy dissipation in the test chip as a function of and each point on the surface corresponds very low values of this observation demonstrates the importance of pre resolved output nodes before charge recovery for efficient operation at higher frequencies as increases beyond a certain point however the increased dissipation as well as the leakage from boost into logic nullifies the power savings of improved charge recovery due to better output node resolution the optimal value of this paper we have presented boost logic a charge recovery logic family which is capable of efficient operation at ghz class clock frequencies this efficient operation is achieved through the combined use of aggressive voltage scaling gate overdrive and charge recovery techniques in post layout simulations of bit carry save multipliers at ghz the boost logic implementation achieves energy savings at the expense of a threefold increase in computational latency considerable performance benefits can be achieved from the use of low devices in the evaluation tree of boost logic gates the use of low threshold devices enables the logic depth of a gate to be approximately doubled resulting in designs with lower latency and energy dissipation than regular threshold devices the correct operation of a boost logic prototype chip with on chip inductors in a bulk silicon process our measurements show that approximately charge recovery was achieved at the resonant frequency of mhz a widely distributed network it is important that these systems can efficiently locate in as few hops as possible the node storing the desired data in a large system thus it is worth consuming some extra storage to obtain better routing performance in this paper we propose redundant strategies to improve the routing performance and data availability on chord and de to improve the routing performance the proposed systems can reduce the number of lookup hops significantly compared to the original ones and have better fault tolerance capabilities with a small storage overhead i introduction few hops as possible the node that stores the desired data in a large system in other words reducing the hop count is extremely important from the cost and performance point of view furthermore nodes must be able to join and leave the system frequently without affecting the robustness or the efficiency of the system and the load must be balanced across the available nodes to search desired data which are not suitable for large systems most latest systems use distributed hash tables to support scalability load balancing and fault tolerance these systems are based on different virtual topologies and they all employ a distributed hash table that maps names keys to values and and allow nodes to contact any participating node in the network to find stored resources by keys in systems the number of lookups for desired data is significant high which means that locating data efficiently can save huge network communication resource on the other hand with the development of computer technology local storage expense becomes negligible thus it is worth consuming on reducing the number of hops that are needed to locate a data item we present a new model for a peer to peer system called hybrid chord to improve the routing performance and data availability of through simulations we demonstrate the improvement of the routing performance and fault tolerance capabilities of the proposed system and compare them with the original chord system here are some highlights by up to to chord it is robust and handles node failures better than chord it can always find the desired data within few hops with high probability and has better data availability than chord from scalability point of view the total joining leaving cost is where is the number nodes in the we observe that we can significantly reduce the number of lookups improving also data availability the paper is organized as follows in section ii we describe various features of the proposed peer to peer system data lookup and routing scheme are given in section ii section ii and ii describe the scalability and fault tolerance issues respectively all hybrid chord experimental results are in section iv we propose the redundant system and describe the experimental results in section ii hybrid chord system we propose a
current avian influenza scare hpai or highly pathogenic avian influenza is the name given by virologists to a number of influenza a viruses that cause high mortality and morbidity both in animal populations and among infected humans of most is a particular type of hpai virus known as the most recent in a series of emerging infectious diseases that have received growing attention since the mid from molecular immunology we learn that viruses consist of genetic material encased in surface proteins that stick out from the viral envelope hemagglutinin proteins determine how and whether a virus can penetrate human cells once in a cell the virus can replicate neuraminidase the exit strategy ie whether the replicated viral matter can escape the cell to infect other cells viruses are named on the basis of these proteins the designation then corresponds to the type of ha and na proteins found in the virus among influenza a viruses there are believed to exist ha subtypes and na subtypes of the known ha subtypes all are thought to infect birds while only some are known to infect humans except in rare cases viruses do not it is even more rare for an virus to be transmitted from one human to another as we hear repeatedly however the problem with influenza viruses is that they mutate at an alarming rate such transformations are caused by changes to the viral genome which is segmented into separate rna molecules and thought to mutate in two ways genetic drift refers to a slow process of mutation that occurs as viruses replicate genetic shift refers to the of genes that is thought to occur when different viruses come into contact with the each other such as when an virus and a virus are found in the same host changes to the genome are of great significance virologists believe because they can result in changes to the ha and na the mutation of hpai viruses are said to have two potential outcomes of great significance for humans genetic reassortment and accompanying changes to ha a virus giving it the capacity to infect new hosts mutation can also change the virulence of the virus and thus affect morbidity and mortality rates in the infected population the widely reported worry is that with the right kind of mutation could mutate into a virulent form that is transmissible between humans plunging the world into a catastrophic global pandemic immunology s account of viral mutation or the probability of whether a pandemic will occur than how this understanding of molecular life and the discourse of emerging infectious diseases that has emerged with it has transformed our understanding of our own biological existence and given rise to new forms of political rationality we can begin with the simple observation that with on such things as avian flu the ebola virus mad cow disease and other zoonotic diseases molecular life has been recoded as inherently unpredictable as always in a sense uncanny human life in turn is understood to be thrown into or exposed to this molecular world of chaotic change far from a self contained body with a clear genetic code the fantasy of the essential self stored as information on a cd what we find in the medical and political discourse of emergi diseases is a body that is radically open to the world thrown into the flux of an inherently mutable molecular life where reassortment is not what we control but what we fear this post genomic world is not understood in terms of one s genetic inheritance nor is it primarily about care of the self or genetic citizenship it is instead understood in terms of a global economy of circulation and exchange that at once precedes and transcends the individual body by this biomolecular life is not governed by fixed taxonomies or known in terms of genetic essences it is instead a dynamic world characterized by ever novel combinations where entities jump between bodies and cross between species and where life itself continuously confronts us with the new and the unknown the philosopher brian massumi has succinctly captured the temporal and affective dimensions of this epistemic shift operate on an inhuman scale the enemy is not simply indefinite in the infinity of its here and to come it is elsewhere by nature it is humanly ungraspable it exists in a different dimension of space from the human and in a different dimension of time the pertinent enemy question is not who where when or even what the enemy is a what not an unspecifiable may come to pass in another dimension in a word the enemy is virtual for massumi the virtual has a precise meaning taken from henri bergson and gilles deleuze it refers not to a nonexistent or immaterial entity as in popular usage but to a potentiality that is immanent in every object and in every situation unlike the possible which is opposed to the real the virtual is real which is to say that it exists as concretely in the present it is immaterial yet real abstract yet concrete a future to come that is already with us but which to relate this to we might say that the virtual has to do with all the potential mutations that could occur given what the virus presently is and the heterogeneous associations into which it may enter this molecular future is immanent in the present although it cannot be known in what is the significance of recoding molecular life in terms of virtuality most immediately it transforms our relation to the future which is in a sense already with future is radically open of the same nature as a throw of the dice full of surprises and unexpected yet as evident in the discourse of emerging infectious diseases this future can also be defined in terms of the imminence of a generalized yet nondescript catastrophe as bird flu expert michael osterholm is fond of putting it in relation
racism may be internalized and turned against the self and others of one s oppressed group this definition of racism begins to establish a possible conceptual link between racism and more specific potential mental health the effects but the reference to the violence of oppression is so broad and undefined that it fails to provide a foundation for linking specific types of racism to particular mental health far capture important elements of racism in general they do not convey a way to connect particular experiences to mental health the effects omi and winant argued that more than anything race is a sociohistorical concept they asserted that the meaning assigned to racial categories and the particular form of expression surrounding race and racism as reflected in social relationships is determined by the historical context and time in history in this way the variations in meaning attributed to race over time and circumstances can be understood for these scholars race and racism are shaped by politics and social relationships omi and winant contended that scholars have sought to understand race as a concept related primarily to ethnicity class or nation therefore such models es we attempt to develop an alternative concept which does not treat race epiphenomenally or subsume it within a supposedly more fundamental category for omi and winant race is used as an organizing principle for social relations at the micro and macro levels they coined the term racial formation to capture the process of how racial meaning is shaped and altered to determine social relationships omi and winant highlighted nature of race its meaning and manifestations in society their construction is useful for understanding the central and changing nature of racial meaning and racism but it does not provide a connection between racism or racial formations and mental health related effects moreover their analysis is primarily political and historical and is therefore somewhat removed from the direct reactions of racism that focuses on the actual experience of targets thus capturing its complex and systematic nature in her qualitative study of dutch and american black women she documented described and defined everyday racism as a process in which socialized racist notions are integrated into meanings that everyday situations everyday racism is enacted through direct and indirect means in which indirect enactments occur in the development and application of policy and procedures as well as in media portrayals of blacks and people of color essed wrote that everyday racism is a coherent complex of oppression continuously present and systematically and through the daily awareness of racial injustice in society essed did an excellent job of describing individual variation in recognition of everyday racism and in documenting the types of events and experiences that characterize women s lives however she did not discuss or describe how the women were impacted psychologically and emotionally by the different manifestations of everyday racism system that leads to the subjugation of some human groups the ranking of a group s worth relative to other groups leads to the development of negative beliefs and attitudes toward the out group which is deemed inferior these negative beliefs generate and justify differential treatment of out group members by other individuals and social institutions their discussion emphasizes the systemic or institutional aspects of actions and beliefs rather clark et al put it this way racism is operationally defined as beliefs attitudes institutional arrangements and acts that tend to denigrate individuals or groups because of phenotypic characteristics thompson and neville agreed with the structural emphasis presented structural and ideological and operates on individual institutional and cultural levels in addition racism has changed its form and application over time and place and has shifted from legal overt and direct acts of violence discrimination harassment and denigration to illegal subtle and indirect acts of aversion and hostility structural racism is perpetuated through a social system of stratification that limits people of color s access to and opportunity from educational economic and political participation marger described this process from a sociological perspective as denial of primary structural assimilation that operates as a system of impediments that limit access to power it is possible that this denial to access and opportunity produces psychological effects but it is not clear what types and at mental health affect might occur racism as ideology is contained in ideas about race and race relations which serve to protect the status quo the system of racial domination in which racial minorities experience institutional discrimination the racial ideology of out group inferior status or stereotypes is communicated through the media science social policy and direct and indirect policies practices and acts of hostility that people of color endure research on stereotype threat suggested that blacks cognitive ability in some situations is hampered by the threat of the stereotype of them as less able thus this aspect of racism may lead to particular mental health reactions but there has been little research to support this contention individual prejudice jones observed that individual racism was distinct from prejudice in that it included the use of power by the dominant group to oppress out group members this theme is captured in many of the definitions discussed previously institutions are collections of individuals and the culture they represent is the cumulative experience of individuals over time yet institutions and the social culture operate independently of individuals systems have lives of their own racism goes beyond the individual and includes institutions and the culture jones puts it this way it is clear that prejudice functions to create immediate and direct discrimination based on race it is also clear that discrimination is all the more meaningful when it co occurs with a societal structure that aligns choice and chances with racial group membership when this alignment privileges one centuries with the accompaniment of theories rationales and beliefs this recurring dynamic transcends simple race prejudice thus the cumulative effects of race prejudice over time combine with the cultural rationales and beliefs about racial essences to enable the institutions
outside of the recommendations no matter which schema was used many gained more than is recommended which is similar to the pattern seen in adult women with the end result being a larger percentage of adolescents gained more than is recommended this pattern of gaining above the recommendations no matter which schema is used has implications for practice if adolescents are gaining more than they should during pregnancy what is the explanation there are multiple possible explanations regarding healthy weight gain during pregnancy the current guidelines may not be ideal for adolescents but until there is further evidence regarding the best gestational weight gain the prevention of excess weight gain is an important place to focus clinical efforts for this black adolescent sample there were slight differences in birthweight when they were reclassified with to pursue a refined recommendation for adolescents at the same time it provides assurance that a shift to cdc bmi percentiles for adolescents when determining gestational weight gain is not likely to increase the risk of lbw infants however changing only the categorization does not provide insight into what optimal weight gain for each of those categories should be it may be that adolescents should gain differently mother and infant further evidence is needed to determine if weight gain recommendations specifito adolescents would improve maternal and neonatal outcomes the development of the best weight gains to coincide with each of the adolescent cdc bmi percentiles is what is really needed based on both maternal and neonatal outcomes ultimately creating a whole new schema specifito classified for gestational weight gain based on cdc bmi percentiles for adolescents the results of this study challenge health care providers to look more closely at the current gestational weight gain recommendations for adolescents encouraging adolescents to gain similar to adults or at the higher end of the recommendations if they are young may not be sufficiently however much of what has been learned is confined to adult women and further refinement for adolescents may be overdue adult bmi categories do misclassify adolescents if the cdc bmi growth curves are considered the norm for adolescents use of the cdc bmi percentiles to create an adolescent schema is now possible creation of a schema specifito adolescents based on bmi for age cdc bmi percentiles in adolescent health care settings gestational weight gain is one piece of a large puzzle of what results in optimal pregnancy outcomes but with recommendations based on prepregnant bmi there may be a reason to classify adolescents by adolescent criteria an alternative to creation of an entirely new schema might be further examination of adolescent gestational weight gain adolescents with refinements addressing the upper end recommendation for younger adolescents systematic reviews of bladder training and voiding programmes in adults a synopsis of findings on theory and methods using metastudy techniques brenda jill joan sheila techniques aim this paper reports a comparison of four cochrane systematic reviews on bladder training and voiding programmes for the management of urinary incontinence using metastudy descriptive techniques it presents a synopsis of findings on theory and methods for interventions background from the mid bladder training prompted voiding habit retraining and timed voiding have been developed and form the basis of nursing adults in institutional and community settings methods a synopsis of four cochrane systematic reviews was undertaken using metastudy techniques developed for qualitative research and has provided a discursive comparison and contrast of the selection and appraisal of primary research meta theory and meta method findings all programmes share a therapeutic focus on voiding and the degree and restoration of continence while prompted voiding habit retraining and timed voiding focus on the avoidance of incontinence bladder training and prompted voiding share the two characteristics of cognitive behavioral modification and active client participation habit retraining and timed voiding pre empt episodes and avoid incontinence using operant conditioning rather than modifying behavior variability of methods and operational terminology makes comparison use of cognitive behavioral approaches and operant conditioning need to be better understood in relation to future theory interventions and study design bladder training is aimed at people who are cognitively and physically able while the other voiding programmes are mainly used with for people with cognitive and physical impairments reliant on caregivers conclusion the theoretical approaches underpinning bladder training and voiding need to be re considered when designing future studies there is a need for long term follow up in future studies future trials should adhere to recognized standards of good practice and incorporate outcomes from existing systematic reviews to enable future meta analysis to be undertaken metastudy techniques for the synthesis of qualitative research provide useful methods for the descriptive synopsis of quantitative clinical practice and its dissemination has become a major endeavour for governments health services and health professionals demonstrated by evidence based medicine evidence based practice use of guidelines and systematic reviews this is to ensure that health services and health care are efficient and effective population demography and technological developments for the last two decades the methods for synthesizing and meta analysis of quantitative research notably randomized controlled trials has developed the cochrane collaboration is a major international endeavour for systematic review of evidence for health care synthesis and integration of qualitative research involving meta synthesis and metastudy metastudy is a form of metasynthesis using a tripartite analytical process it focuses on studies with the elements of research reports being the primary data and the orientation to data being discursive the metastudy processes include selection and appraisal of primary research meta theory meta method and meta data analysis these are brought together and discussed as a metasynthesis to interpret strengths and limitations uncover assumptions underlying theory explain contradictions identify theoretical stances that are not comparative and why the purpose being to propose alternative theoretical approaches current practice more recently systematic reviews and methods have been developed that integrate both quantitative and qualitative research studies and evidence these endeavors not only contribute to identifying the evidence for practice and future research but
that they those who do not while downloaders may in fact buy fewer records this could simply reflect a selection effect file sharing is attractive to those who are time rich but cash poor and these individuals would purchase fewer cds even in the absence of networks a handful of academic studies rely on microdata to address the issue of unobserved heterogeneity among file rob and waldfogel for hit albums that sold more than million copies since they find no relationship between downloading and sales when the set of albums is expanded to include all music the students acquired in downloading five albums displaces the sale of one cd these results could mean that piracy does not affect hit albums but hurts smaller artists or it is also possible that file sharing had less of an effect students attend everyone at penn has broadband access whereas this is not true for the other schools the resulting estimates are too imprecise to draw any firm conclusions zentner employs european survey data to study the relation between file sharing and sales using measures of internet sophistication and access to broadband as instruments zentner finds some displacement unfortunately neither the rob and waldfogel study nor zentner s work allows inferences total impact of file sharing on record sales because neither paper studies a representative sample of file sharers zentner also lacks information about the number of downloads and cd purchases our approach differs from the current literature in that we directly observe file sharing our results are based on a large and representative sample of downloads and individuals are generally unaware that their in a symposium on file sharing in our working paper discusses these studies and additional work file sharing networks file sharing relies on computers forming networks that allow the transfer of data each computer may agree to share some files and has the ability to search for and download files from other computers in the network our data come from the opennap network an open source descendant network in which users log on to a central server that tracks all search requests and file downloads during our study period in the fall of networks were already quite large fast track had grown to million simultaneous users by december the second largest network was winmx which had about million simultaneous users in even the choice of about percent of all users had at least simultaneous users sharing over million files napster no longer operated in the fall of data we use two main data sources for this study logs for two opennap servers allow us to observe what files users download weekly album level sales data come from nielsen soundscan soundscan tracks music purchases the united states nielsen soundscan data are the source for the well known billboard music charts to develop our instruments we rely on a large number of additional data sources which we discuss in the next subsection file sharing data our data were collected from two opennap servers which operated their actions are being observed and recorded an excerpt of a typical log file follows pm user evnormski logged in pm search evnormski file name contains kid rock devil max results bit rate equal to size equal to file shows user evnormski downloading the song devil without a cause by kid rock from user bobo joe information on downloads forms the building blocks of our analysis we focus on downloads because these are the files users actually obtain and they can potentially displace sales over the sample period we observe million file downloads or about percent of all downloads in the world we restrict the analysis to audio files by users in the united the internet protocol address for each client which we use to identify our users home country an important question is whether our sample is representative of data on all while we are unaware of any database spanning the universe of music downloads we were able to compare the data from our servers with a sample of more than downloads from fasttrack kazaa the leading network at the time we find that the the two networks using a standard homogeneity test based on unique songs we cannot reject a null that the two download samples are drawn from the same population the resemblance of files is not surprising individuals in our data are similar to those on the most popular networks because the user experience is quite similar and many individuals employ software that allows them to simultaneously participate one third of opennap participants use the winmx software which allows them to simultaneously access the two largest networks during our study period we also find that users on these larger networks and those on our servers have access to a comparable number of files and that network size has little effect on the distribution of downloads on the basis of these tests we conclude that our sample is representative of the file transfers on the major networks during our study period comprehensive discussion of this point is in app a of oberholzer gee and strumpf sales data and album sample in this study we focus on a sample of albums sold in us stores in the second half of the sample is representative of all commercially relevant albums allowing us to draw meaningful inferences about s impact on overall music the sample is drawn from a population positions hard music top overall jazz current latin overall rhythm and blues current albums rap current albums top country albums top soundtracks top current new artists and catalogue albums the charts are published on a weekly basis and we include an album in the population if it appears on any chart in any week during the second half of the original population is extensive we also reject this null comparing each of our original charts with the sample sales for that particular chart in order to compare sales and downloads we match the songs that us users successfully
acting as in sum after a decade or more of trying the court could do no better than a predictable but double negative tempered and adverbially qualified response to the type question that explicitly begged all manner of and type questions it remained to be seen whether the retail level of case by case or at least pattern focused analysis the wholesale type question it had only weakly decided in the july cases or was replacing all types of substantive review with close statute by statute or case by case procedural scrutiny of the or at least type or truly was intending to resurrect the a type option of blanket deference to state legislatures mandatory death sentencing rejected the court hinted at where in two july cases overturning mandatory death sentences the court s first two reasons for doing so did not indicate its future intentions the third did retracing justice harlan s historical analysis from mcgautha the stewart powell stevens plurality relied initially on history s rejection of mandatory death it discounted the countervailing evidence of several states post furman enactment of mandatory sentencing court s multiopinioned decision in mcgautha had rejected legally guided sentencing as unworkable and furman had rejected discretionary sentencing as arbitrary leaving only the mandatory approach that mcgautha had criticized but not mandatory death sentences for all murderers were also directly responsive to justice white s infrequency concerns in notwithstanding the false positives generated by as atavistic and inconsistent with evolving standards of moving from categorical to pattern focused analysis the plurality next relied on mcgautha s description of the historical foibles of mandatory sentencing to predict that it would invite standardless jury nullification replicating the arbitrary capricious and discriminatory sentencing patterns invalidated in furman the deference it gave the guided discretion statutes on separation of powers and federalism grounds notwithstanding mcgautha s recent criticism of them did not extend to mandatory statutes and their potential to generate outcomes different from those mandatory sentencing produced when it was last in still the plurality s decision was noncommittal about how interventionist it intended years because of misunderstandings about the modesty of its intentions in furman and mcgautha did not commit the court to intrusive regulation of statutes that honored furman by abandoning unalloyed discretion nor did the historical ground ensnare the court very deeply in the doctrinal difficulties created by justice white s and justice stewart s contradictory more is better versus less is better analyses in however drew the court directly into that doctrinal thicket history aside the plurality concluded mandatory death sentencing is unconstitutional because it takes no account of the possibility of compassionate or mitigating factors stemming from the diverse frailties of at the least this conclusion embodied an type requirement that mitigating factors be considered in capital cases though no such requirement the future is a passage supporting this conclusion a passage the court has cited more frequently than any other in the july cases because the penalty of death is qualitatively different from a sentence of imprisonment however long there is a corresponding difference in the need for reliability in the determination that death is the appropriate punishment in a specific case defendant as a constitutionally indispensable mechanism for achieving had three broad implications first it suggested that the eighth amendment required not just that the penalty of death generically fit the crime of deliberate murder but that each application of the penalty reliably fit the aggravating and mitigating facets of the character and record of the individual offender or the circumstances of the particular required type constitutional analysis of the proportionality of the death penalty in each case was evident second the assumption that there are murderers for whom death is appropriate and many others for whom it is and the demand that capital sentencing statutes establish procedures requiring sentencers to reliably identify the factors pulling in either direction in each case suggested a desire to transform each sentencing jury into a mini supreme assuring that any death sentence it imposed was proportionate to the particularized aggravating and mitigating factors delegating the type constitutional analysis to the jury might get the court off the hook for that kind of analysis but the delegation seemed to commit the court to ongoing type scrutiny of specialized death sentencing standards and procedures to make sure that they channeled jury decision making a need for ongoing type scrutiny of the pattern of outcomes the court s surrogates were generating as justice white and his more is better allies pointed out in the most strident portions of their angry the plurality s reasoning portended review of every statute procedure and pattern of sentencing outcomes for consistency with justice stewart s less is better approach the plurality s reasoning compelled the and type questions component standards and procedures can target and whether over time they effectively have targeted death sentences on the relatively small number of deliberate murders in which aggravation net of mitigation is the court s decision to make this third intervention inviting argument when the other two less ambitious points sufficed poses anew the overarching question we have been considering repeatedly in boykin witherspoon maxwell mcgautha furman and the july cases the court found the death penalty waters uncomfortably cold whenever it dipped in its toe why then did the court keep promising and pantomiming a swan dive the late during the late the court continued making capital constitutional law a number of its decisions were terse summary per curiam reversals that advanced only modest and type propositions and revealed no major effort to expand the court s two late issues in coker georgia a four person plurality ruled that georgia s reinstated death penalty for rape violated the eighth amendment because georgia was one of only a few states permitting death for nonhomicidal thus violating the evolving standards of decency and the justices own judgment that death was excessive for offenders who did not whether the court s apparently intrusive type review
of the frontal lobes and the perceptual motor cortex these areas are involved in the formation storage and retrieval of memories for motor procedures like juggling these memories tend to be formed more slowly taking many repeated trials the relationship of visual imagery to spatial working memory has not been fully determined appears to be the non dominant speech hemisphere and inferior frontal and occipital cortex rossano has recently proposed that the deliberate practice required in becoming a skilled performance against a more proficient model this self monitoring process would require goal setting voluntary control over actions and error detection and correction it would also require the recall from long term memory of hierarchically organized retrieval structures that have been previously demonstrated to be useful to the task at hand which we implicit direct and indirect declarative and procedural semantic and episodic source memory recency memory and others to some extent explicit direct declarative and semantic long term memories overlap they are names for memories of facts names for things and are often verbal the hippocampus appears to be essential for their transference to subvocalized through phonological storage and then relegated to long term memory by way of the hippocampus if that thought has been repeated enough or has a particularly strong emotional valence the hippocampus is not the place of storage but the site that forms the memory traces that are stored elsewhere and the site where long term memories are in the hippocampus and the phonological loop implicit indirect and procedural memories are largely unconscious automatic often non verbal and apparently do not require an intact hippocampus in order to be relegated to long term memory learned motor skills and cognitive skills priming and classically conditioned responses are examples and thus as we noted earlier may be part of a much older memory system in our evolutionary history episodic source and recency memories are the conscious recollections of our personal experiences they may be encoded consciously or unconsciously and again the emotional valence of the experience will affect the strength of the encoding and its subsequent between related events an episodic learning mechanism would form rapid links between things formed at the same time this would allow one link in an episode to evoke another link in the same episode thus forming a complete episodic memory source and recency memory allows for the organization and segregation of these items and links in time and these processes just shortened episodic memories that is in baddeley s conception of them whether semantic memories are episodic memories with far fewer links or whose source or recency information has been lost or forgotten whether the working memory stores constitute a separate anatomical and functional system from longterm ong term memory storage and retrieval is an integral part of working memory reilly et al have theorized that the primary role of the prefrontal cortex is the active maintenance of information which is self regulated and dynamically updated akin to baddeley s central executive and they also propose that it arises as an emergent property the hippocampal system serves rapid than the posterior and perceptual motor cortex which is involved in the formation storage and retrieval of implicit and procedural memories the latter tend to be formed more slowly although there are exceptions once formed however they may be that are relatively stable over time they define learning as the modification of the encoded weights between neurons through repetition the controlled processing of the prefrontal cortex maintains constraints and retrieves appropriate knowledge consonant with these constraints in their view part of the controlling mechanism is attention phonological loop in the maintenance of relevant stimuli they view language as an exceptionally powerful representational system for encoding verbal and non verbal information as well as abstract spatial and numerical information it is also important to note that reilly et al postulate that all of the working memory mechanisms are highly likely to be genetically based their two recent genetic studies have provided preliminary evidence that a single gene and its alteration may have had a profound effect upon language comprehension and production it is well accepted that speech and language development are genetically influenced recently lai et al found that a single gene they were able to identify this gene in a three generation pedigree and in an unrelated individual with similar articulation linguistic and grammatical impairments there is still debate however about whether this gene affects a more general or hierarchical brain function or whether it is a gene specific to language disabilities enard et al recently determined that two functional copies the complementary dnas that encode in different primates and compared them to humans they surmised that this gene has been the target of natural selection during recent human evolution beginning approximately years ago again however whether the gene is highly specific to language or controls more general developmental neural processes that support our hypothesis for a genetic mutation in the executive functions of working memory and its effects upon language development anthropologists have long recognized that understanding the neural basis for cognition is important to understanding the evolution of behavior and culture some have even drawn sources mithen ambrose and klein edgar mithen proposed three phases for the evolution of the mind first the period when minds were dominated by a domain of general intelligence second the period when general intelligence was supplemented by multiple yet segregated specialized intelligences he labelled the latter process cognitive fluidity which he thought was a greater accessibility between specialized intelligences mithen also postulated that the latter two phases may parallel two levels of consciousness a lower level with awareness of bodily sensations mithen suspected that neanderthals lacked this higher level of consciousness and endorsed dennett s vision of a rolling consciousness with swift memory loss and no introspection as characteristic of neanderthals mithen however did not link his intelligences to specific neural substrates nor did he specify its cause as genetically determined he for the application of
faculty of design architecture and university of technology sydney box broadway nsw australia mail web site the essence of a computer is that it can change function under the influence of its programming although there have been programmable mechanical systems and analogue electronic computers the digital computer has had the biggest impact on society and therefore forms a separate category what can be seen in this historical development is a decrease in visibility everything becomes visibility everything becomes smaller and less tangible while at the same time complexity increases this contradiction urges developers to pay more attention to the design of the interface a whole field of research and design has emerged in the last few decades offering us methodological and structured approaches in human computer interaction musical instrument classification the oldest artifacts that are identified as musical instruments are flutes made of hollow bird bones form of musical instrument pieces of material that sound when hit must have been first employed much earlier such instruments are objects examples of instruments in this category are still widely used percussion instruments from drums and cymbals to the marimba most instruments in classical music are passive mechanical systems movements of the player are transported and converted fig the adjustable hands for basel into part of the examples are the mechanics of a flute or saxophone and the mechanical systems in the piano the pneumatic organ is an example of an active mechanical system an example of an electric instrument fig the first midi conductor baton fig michel waisvisz s hands ii around a magnetic core this signal is further amplified and processed by electronics the earliest synthesizers are examples of analogue electronic systems and later digital electronic synthesizers as well as samplers were introduced the possibility of recording sounds and playing them back had a great impact on musical development from player pianos and musique concrete to djs and sampling the computer is an omnipresent tool in electronic music for both the and manipulation of digital sound as well as for composing and even as a generative system of algorithmic composition as most instruments are combinations of technologies it is not easy to classify them not only the sound source is important but so is the way it is controlled and in some cases the way the signal is transduced instruments are often also grouped by their appearances particularly of their means of control thus there are keyboard plucked instruments etc existing organologies the common system for categorizing musical instruments does not place the electric electronic and further developed instruments very well in the hornbostel sachs model from instruments are divided by their way of producing sound into idiophones membranophones chordophones and aerophones to cover this new class of instruments the hornbostel sachs model was extended with the electrophones in and hugh davies discerned the combinations of electronic electro mechanical and electro acoustical however i think the distinction between electrical and electronic is important with the further development of digital and computer based instruments with their inherent freedom for the design of the interface musical often compounds of various technologies the electric guitar is therefore actually much more than just the guitar with all its extensions it is a compound instrument that includes many technological categories the instrument itself is passive mechanical the transducing of the vibration of the string is electric and the amplification and effects machines were first analogue later digital electronic i think the essence of the the way the vibration is fig wart wamsteker playing a sonoglove picked up which is electric and which influences the way it can be played including various extended techniques new electronic musical instruments the interaction between player and instrument is partially determined by the technological category mechanical systems are directly influenced by the player s actions the musical instrument is a unity of sound source and interface electronic systems need a translation in order to be mechanically manipulated by humans of course it is possible to interact directly with the circuits as in an electric fence for instance or connect directly to the electrical signals of the human brain and nervous system generally however an interface is needed one designed in such a way that it enables and facilitates a rich and profound interaction in electronic and computer systems the system and this can be clearly seen in electronic musical instruments in which the instrument is technically and conceptually split in two sound source and interface the instrument should be designed as a whole in traditional instruments these two elements are often one part and tightly coupled although in mechanical instruments in some cases the sound source is remote such as in a church organ or touched indirectly such as with the bow of a cello with the electronic instruments the in some cases be developed entirely independently the interface would communicate with the sound generating electronics through control voltages in the case of analogue electronic instruments and through midi in the case of digital electronic instruments in this section i will describe some instruments in the category of digital electronic technology based on my experiences as a designer of such interfaces since in the final section i will reflect and discuss not sufficient the experiences with his development of the crackle synthesizers which were played by touching the electronics of the analogue circuits directly with the hands could not be applied for influencing digital electronic circuits through the midi protocol however the digital domain could be entered together with the engineers at steim waisvisz started to experiment with aluminum plates strapped to the player s hands mounted with various switches dials and other sensors be entered together with the engineers at steim waisvisz started to experiment with aluminum plates strapped to the player s hands mounted with various switches dials and other sensors a small microcontroller worn on the back converted the sensor signals into midi commands the hands are sensitive to gestures on different planes and scales enabling an
kitoi males may have experienced substantially more logistical mobility than contemporary females furthermore amount of degenerative changes exhibited by their joints may have been substantially higher than that of females by contrast more equitable overall mobility resulting from increased reliance on residential foraging among serovo glaskovo individuals may have resulted in decreased sexual disparity in osteoarthritic prevalence does not readily support the above interpretation of low residential and high logistical mobility among the kitoi however there are two explanations that have yet to be considered first mobility both residential and logistical may have varied considerably throughout the mid holocene as a result of seasonal and annual fluctuations in environmental conditions the kitoi focus on aquatic accessible during the rest of the year when fish harvesting was more difficult and resource acquisition focused on terrestrial resources residential mobility may have been substantially higher lowering the level of sexually disparate logistical mobility over the course of individuals lives this variation may have balanced out the effects of differing adaptive strategies resulting it is likely that pre hiatus occupants of the cis baikal engaged in physically stressful occupationally related activities despite their low levels of residential mobility again resulting in more sexually equitable osteoarthritic prevalence if this is accurate then the kitoi and serovo glaskovo should exhibit distinctive osteoarthritic distribution patterns the pre and post hiatus groups they also reveal several significant differences vertebral degeneration occurred less frequently among pre hiatus females than post hiatus ones while knee degeneration was more common among pre hiatus males than their post hiatus counterparts furthermore kitoi males exhibited higher osteoarthritic involvement of both vertebrae and knees compared with that by contemporary data suggest consistency in activity levels throughout the mid holocene osteoarthritic distribution data reveal distinctions in the particular patterns of activity employed by pre and post hiatus peoples reconstructing activities from the distribution of osteoarthritis among joints has met with some success by other scholars indeed associations between physical activity and osteoarthritis are far from straightforward reflecting the complex and multifactorial nature of the condition biomechanical stressors and the activities that cause them are only partly responsible are discouraged by these inconsistent findings and consider osteoarthritis an unreliable indicator of activity others continue to regard the condition as a valuable tool in behavioral reconstruction but recognize its limitations and exercise caution particularly when interpreting specific activities undertaken in the past it is the latter approach that will be is generally least correlated with activity levels and most correlated with age while the opposite is true for the ginglymus and trochoid joints of the elbow and knee as such degenerative changes of the elbows and knees may best represent the activity patterns undertaken in the mid holocene cis baikal especially those reflecting high physical exertion or repetitive glaskovo males than among those of the other four sites as well as females from the same site it was typically represented by degenerative changes to the trochlea capitulum radial head and olecranon and coronoid processes reflecting overuse and stress during pronation supination flexion and extension thus strenuous activities involving these movements such as spear throwing paddling and skin scraping i glaskovo males unfortunately as high elbow degeneration was only associated with individuals from one site few general conclusions can be drawn from these data regarding specific activities in the cis baikal osteoarthritis of the knee occurred more frequently ust ida i glaskovo and ust ida i serovo counterparts furthermore significant differences in the sexual distribution of osteoarthritis were noted for the two pre hiatus sites with males exhibiting considerably more knee degeneration than females osteoarthritic changes to the knee generally involved the medial and lateral articular surfaces of the femoral condyle tibial condyle and patella joint surfaces such as squatting kneeling and walking over rough steep and snow covered terrain particularly while carrying heavy loads appear to have been undertaken more frequently by pre hiatus males than both post hiatus males and pre hiatus females this is particularly true when the condition is located at points of maximum curvature and thus weight bearing stress within each vertebral segment the vast majority of vertebral arthritis observed at all five cemetery sites was represented by osteophytic development on vertebral bodies and periarticular despite its common association with advancing age and bipedal stress vertebral degeneration can still provide a number of insights into the specific activities undertaken in the cis baikal after all the most plausible explanation for differences that cannot be accounted for by sex and age at death is variation in activity patterns osteoarthritis of the cervical spine often results from extension and load bearing stress on the back data suggest that activities such as these were engaged in more frequently by post hiatus females than their pre hiatus as well as the frequent hunting forays undertaken by kitoi males since both activities foot osteoarthritis warrants discussion here because of its high prevalence among two of the skeletal populations considered shamanka ii and khuzhir nuge xiv as mentioned previously its relatively low occurrence at the other three cemeteries is most likely a reflection of the under representation of pedal elements resulting from poor curation techniques was common for both the pre and posthiatus occupants of the cis baikal males and females alike at shamanka ii and khuzhir nuge xiv where pedal elements were adequately represented among the skeletal remains osteoarthritis of the ankles and feet affected the distal tibia tarsals metatarsals and phalanges more or less myriad of possible strenuous activities such as extensive walking particularly over steep or uneven terrain squatting and kneeling with dorsiflexion as locomotion involves major biomechanical stress throughout the ankle and foot it is likely responsible for much of the osteoarthritis affecting this joint region for all cis baikal individuals parallels in the levels of activity undertaken by the pre and post hiatus occupants of the cis baikal prevalence data alone provide little direct support for interpretations of different adaptive strategies involving distinct mobility patterns between the kitoi and serovo glaskovo peoples however it
drilled at each end of the microchannels microfluidic chips were then ultrasonicated in solution for min rinsed with di water ultrasonicated in di water for min again rinsed with di water and dried with compressed air the microchannels were examined under a microscope to ensure they were free from any debris for the final assembly a thin pmma cover plate and the cover plate were clamped between two glass plates using binder clips and placed inside a convection oven at for numerical modeling of sample injection numerical simulations were conducted to examine the detailed characteristics of a material plug generated electrokinetically through a standard cross channel had uniform channel widths of lm and the same length of channels but differed by the radii of curvature in the corners the diffusion coefficient of the test species was initial concentration of the plug was mol and effective electrophoretic mobility of the species and leof is the electroosmotic mobility the value of leff was based on our initial experimental data for transport of alexa fluor in pmma devices for simplicity the simulations were two dimensional ie the channel depth was infinite while this is not the case in practice this assumption is not critical because it does not compromise in view of the objectives of the present investigations the same assumption has been used in several other computational investigations the equations solved during the simulations are the laplace equation governing the electrical potential distribution and is the electrical field calculated from the definition a zero species flux condition rc was imposed on the channel walls to which the electrical field vector is set to be tangent the simulations were performed using coventorware analyzertm software the electroosmotic flow in assembled devices was measured using the method described elsewhere the procedure involved filling the entire chip with a mm buffer after filling the chip one reservoir was emptied and filled with the same type of buffer but of lower ionic strength an electric field was then applied to the reservoirs a multimeter interfaced to a personal computer the time required for the current to reach a plateau was measured from the plot and the linear velocity calculated dividing the linear velocity by the electric field strength produced eof values the electric field was supplied by a spellman high voltage power buffer ph dna separations a linear polyacrylamide sieving matrix was prepared from high viscosity average molecular mass powder and dissolved in buffer for electrophoretic separations of double stranded dna fragments the lpa was replaced between each run from the anodic end each run was obtained from abgene inc and labeled with lmto pro dye the dna ladders were loaded by applying cm across the injection channel for s with the anodic and cathodic buffer reservoirs floating electrophoretic separations were run at cm sample leakage into the pmma and had a dual type injector with lm offset between the sample and waste channels all microchannels were lm wide and lm or lm deep fluorescence detection was performed using an inhouse constructed near ir laser induced fluorescence system the excitation source consisted of a diode laser microscope objective the resulting emission was collected through the same objective routed through the dichroic beam splitter and filtered using a stack of optical filters the filtered fluorescence emission was ultimately detected by a photomultiplier tube the high voltage power supply was assembled inhouse the high voltage power supplies and relays were controlled by a computer using an analog output card software written in labview was used for both collection of lif signal and control of the high voltage power supply caution the electrophoresis uses high voltages and special care should be taken when handling fabricated using micromilled mold masters high precision micromilling is capable of producing in just one fabrication cycle multi level structures with highly vertical sidewalls and aspect ratios exceeding however the micromilling process is unable to make sharp inside corners due to the intrinsic feature of the process itself finite size of the milling bit at the same time the achievable height of the structure is limited by the useful flute length of the milling bit for example aspect ratios of commercially available micromilling bits are typically less than which means that milling bits with diameters of lm have useful flute lengths of lm and thus the maximum height of the microstructures is lm is not possible due to curvature of the corners introduced by the milling process the presence of curved corners creates an additional injection volume since the radius of the curvature is equal to the radius of the milling bit the magnitude of the additional volume is proportional to the square of the milling bit radius for a given channel height and can be calculated as lm high channels is and pl for cross structures micromilled with and lm milling bits respectively one should also note that since the radius of curvature is a finite value determined by the size of the milling bit used to fabricate the mold master the relative effect of the curvature of the corners will be higher for narrower than for wider are lm high is nl for lm wide channels and only pl for lm wide channels therefore the radius of curvature to channel width ratio is a good metric for characterizing the performance of cross injectors of microchips molded from micromilled masters to investigate the differences between size and shape performed figure presents the results of numerical simulations for cross injectors with radii of curvature ranging from to lm as expected the sample plug injected into the separation channel becomes longer with increasing radii of curvature in the corners the fwhm of the electrophoretic peaks generated by a moving plug were the plugs measured at height were and lm for and lm radii of curvature respectively additional peak areas for different radii values after subtracting the area of the peak for were and lmol s for and lm respectively these results indicate that the effect of round
was no evidence that online boundary rules are formulated on the basis of gender or general online privacy concerns which is somewhat surprising given past findings in the interpersonal and commerce research literatures that the nature of disclosure in commerce contexts is quite different from that in most interpersonal relationships research on disclosure within interpersonal relationships finds that females tend to disclose more intimate and emotional information than do men the lack of gender differences for withholding information found in this study might be explained by the fact that commerce transactions require disclosure non emotional information the results of this study agree with some prior commerce research that failed to find a relationship between gender and online deception in spite of studies showing that women are more concerned about their privacy online than are men an explanation for the lack of findings with regard to concern for privacy in this study is the existence of a privacy paradox when it comes to online disclosure expressing high levels of concern about privacy and security online consumers are still willing to provide personal information to commercial websites commerce incentives such as giveaways lower prices greater selection the convenience of online shopping and consumers feelings of powerlessness to protect their personal data on the web have all been advanced as explanations for this study furthermore this is not dissimilar to studies using cpm that have observed that people are sometimes willing to give up privacy when they seek security in other words that dialectical tensions sometimes shift from privacy disclosure to privacy security a second possible explanation is variable measurement privacy concern had low variance and acceptable yet less than ideal reliability making for an extremely conservative measure on prior research and the face validity of the items comprising the scale future studies must develop better operationalizations of this concept there are other limitations of this study although the experimental design afforded many benefits it forced participants to look at the stimulus website it is possible that if respondents had come across the site naturally while shopping for cds more would have been interested in ordering a cd or taking advantage of the offer consequently they might have disclosed more information to the website and or they might have been motivated to read the privacy policy indeed some participants indicated that they probably would have disclosed more information if they had found the site on their own as discussed earlier this study then may provide a somewhat conservative view of online disclosure and information seeking however there is no indication that participants use of deception should be this study since participants were not forced to provide their information to the website and because the motivation for lying to the site was no different than it would be to a similar commerce site it would be ideal to replicate this study using a greater variety of commerce sites and with a larger more representative sample of internet users for example brand name is likely a factor in online consumers privacy and disclosure behavior help to eliminate problems of statistical power seen in the analysis of indeed the discrepancy in findings for the clickstream and self report data demonstrates that results may differ depending on the method of observation which highlights the need for researchers to measure actual online behavior in addition to self reports similarly evidence that many participants lied about reading the privacy policy is indicative of social desirability this topic and shows that to judge their effectiveness researchers should go beyond self report data to gauge how many people are reading privacy policies implications of the research for policy and practice since the late the federal government has struggled to respond to public outcry over online privacy issues oscillating between forcing etailers to post privacy policies on their websites and encouraging etailers to protect online consumers the finding here that only a small percentage of site visitors bothered to read the privacy policy argues against the need for strict government mandates requiring etailers to post policies on the other hand results show that ensuring effective privacy protection may be important to those who do read privacy policies an implication is that government efforts might be better spent and certainly better a comprehensive policy to standardize privacy and security protections for all commerce transactions rather than forcing or relying on individual etailers to post policies that will inevitably vary in their assurances and practices this is among the first studies to examine how the content of privacy policies impacts consumers willingness to disclose personal information online which has the finding that disclosure was higher in both the strong and no privacy policy conditions compared to the weak condition suggests that etailers should take an all or nothing approach to privacy protection indeed having no policy at all may be preferable to offering weak privacy protections because weak protections may cue site visitors to privacy concerns while failing to address them adequately the results showing that few people read privacy policies also may interest online it signals that etailers assurances of privacy and security regardless of their content may not be very effective in stimulating customers to disclose personal information together the implications of these findings are that etailers striving to increase business by offering strong privacy protection should make their policies short explicit and clearly visible to users of their website of information requested by the website implies that marketers need to be aware of and sensitive to consumers perceptions of risk when asking for users personal information for example results suggest that online marketers will likely have greater success eliciting less threatening information from consumers indeed etailers may do well to wait until after a relationship has been established and trust proven perhaps after a satisfactory been completed to request more sensitive information although this would hinder efforts toward customized marketing in the short run it may provide significant payoff in the long term with regard to eliciting disclosure from consumers finally
people often use a combination of these methods which improves semantic accuracy and ease of use a simple example may help to make the point my son goes to school about three miles from my house in tabular format and shows the route as a map the table format appears at first sight to contain more information than the map but most people find the map to be far easier to use unified modelling language for integration projects we can use uml modelling difficult but has to be learned and uml should be part of any health informatics curriculum on the other hand the production of uml models is a skilled task that requires the use of a specialized uml tool such tools support detailed definitions of each element hyperlinked documentation and xml representation using xml metadata interchange diagrams for representing data content terminology terminology is the set of expressions used by people involved in a specialized activity traditional medical terminology contains many ways of saying the same thing and terms that mean different things depending on context computers cannot cope with ambiguity and so computerized terminologies argued that ordinary users do not need to become involved in the details of clinical terminology and that this should be left to the experts this may be partly true but shared terminology is an inescapable aspect of shared understanding users have to agree what terms to use a large clinical terminology such as snomed ct jobin hand the only precondition is to know how to map read users need to have a basic understanding of clinical terminology development life cycle the development life cycle is shown in figure as a simple waterfall model our attention here is on the first three or four steps in the life cycle these processes are iterative and might involve substantial revisions as scope statement the scope statement provides a management summary and clarifies what is to be done and why the objectives the case for action and the boundaries process analysis and design i keep six honest serving men their names are what and where and when and how and the features of electronic systems this process includes the development of storyboards use case descriptions a glossary activity diagrams and conceptual class diagrams this stage specifies how the system is to work in terms of the business processes rules and information flows tools used include storyboards use case descriptions a glossary and uml activity diagrams it is a precise specification of the information to be exchanged in each transaction in technologically neutral form it includes details of the terminology to be used all stakeholders need to share and agree the conceptual design specification this is the focus of this paper the conceptual design specification comprises a set that users should with help be able to understand comment on review and sign off it can be part of a contract for the technical work to be done later the conceptual design specification should meet the following criteria comprehensive and complete within scope stringent detailed rigorous and precise represented in a computer readable language each use case or transaction can be modelled as a single view into a larger comprehensive uml model which can represent a number of different use cases and can be output as a set of consistent diagrams hyperlinked documents or xml technology specific design designs change much more slowly the mapping from the conceptual design specification to any specific technology should not involve any changes either by addition or constraint to the meaning of the specification the technology specific design is the deliverable from stage of the development life cycle and specifies precisely what is to be implemented tested deployed and supported users and developers share the use of the conceptual design specification but only developers use the technology specific design if developers have any doubt as to the meaning of any part of the specification then they need to consult the whole specification the conceptual design is the ago after discovering first hand that it was much harder to develop clinical systems for use in several different hospital specialties than for the single specialty of general practice initially i thought that most of these difficulties could be explained by the absence of and scalability these play a part but the problems of human to human level not at the physical level because different computer applications never hold data in precisely the same way the rosetta stone now in the british museum represents the same proclamation in three languages used by the ancient egyptian priests the court and the people in our context the languages are the two languages network between them the physical rendering of each language is different as it is on the rosetta stone but the meaning at the conceptual level needs to be precisely the same others such as glushko and working in the business sector have identified much the same problems and a similar way forward which they call document engineering combining the techniques of to conduct business is that their business systems interoperate interoperability does not require that two systems be identical in design or implementation only that they can exchange information and use the information they exchange interoperability requires that the information being exchanged is conceptually equivalent once this equivalence is established transforming different implementations the approach set out in this paper is complementary to that of version and cen which provide sophisticated ways of handling almost any conceivable healthcare both and cen may be regarded as lingua franca used to support the interoperability of heterogeneous healthcare systems each is based on the principle of difficult to understand unless the reader is already familiar with the underlying reference model the reference model is inherently simpler but less straightforward to use than the cen reference model using the same system in morethan one specialty is hard has its own way of looking at the world reflected in specialist terminology and procedures for professional certification and development many it
icu ct and us based on figures from the radiology department and the financial administration of the hospital the volume of film use is established next a description of the current workflow and information flow is made on the basis of a detailed analysis of the role of all actors and the use of information in the radio diagnostic process this analysis is based on a list fig shows as an example the workflow of the clinician at the icu ward in a paradigm model to visualize and analyze the changes in the working methods in this model every node represents an activity and has a number which refers to the list of radiodiagnostic functions the model in fig should be read as follows if a patient inquiry the clinician usually consults existing alphanumerical information it often occurs that the clinician has to search for this information if a radiological examination is required the clinician writes a request if not the clinician can call for another patient after the request has been written the clinician clinician is expected to change as follows searching for information is no longer needed as information is now available through the pacs and his workstations the placement of workstations partly eliminates the need for the clinician to consult the radiologist by phone in the situation is expected to take less time after the installation of pacs the way clinical diagnosing is done will change because of the fact that this activity is now carried out by aid of a workstation here no time changes are expected in fig an isac a analysis is given of which require and produce information isac a diagrams should be read from top to bottom fig demonstrates the importance of integrating his ris and pacs as this allows a substantial reduction in the number of sources of information on the basis of the descriptions of all current workflows and current of film approximately one archiver is needed for the archiving of of film there will be an impact for radiologists especially where diagnosing is done from screen whether this has personnel consequences is difficult to predict on beforehand and needs to be studied pacs allows short cuts in the information the icu clinician for medical decision making to the benefit of time for patient care to gain more insight into the actual performance of the radiology department a tracking study is carried out to analyze the time period between acquisition and availability of images and reports by referring physicians for weeks each request for a office the results of this tracking study show that in the current situation it takes on average for icu images to be distributed an unacceptable delay however the results showed that in fact the turn around time between radiology and icu anesthesiology is fairly good as compared to the turn around time for other having images and reports quickly available at these wards hence a more efficient distribution procedure for icu could also benefit other departments in this hospital image files are stored in the archive for each procedure separately to investigate for what period existing image information needs to be on line the retrieval years after acquisition definition of objectives after the detailed analysis of the current situation the hospital management defines the following objectives for a trial in which pacs are installed for the three targets icu anesthesiology ct and ultrasound to shorten the turn around time between radiology and icu anesthesia from ultrasound images to save radiographer and archiver time allowing a more efficient use of this personnel to use this pacs with the same radiologist staff to operate the pacs with the existing staff of the computer center not to disturb the daily routine in the clinics based on the following principles to meet the eight objectives of the management to limit costs where possible eg by careful definition of who needs what and where to consider the trial pacs as part of a potentially larger pacs in the future as a result the system should make use of the existing infrastructure and should be islands are distinguished radiology and icu anesthesiology in the radiology island three sub islands are distinguished the ct workplace ultrasound and the icu support each of these makes use of the already present backbone network to minimize extra costs during the introduction phase digitization of old images years after this period a stable situation is assumed based on these principles a number of pacs design scenarios is compared finally it is decided to carry out the trial implementation in three phases year one establishment of icu and ultrasound islands independent from each other the hospital information system providing alphanumerical information on the pacs through his emulation on the workstation year three introduction of the stable phase as images are no longer used at ultrasound and icu further elimination of film related resources in the three islands i phase establishment of the three each with pixels and image adjustment possibilities these as well as the mobile ray unit are connected to radiology in the first phase two simple network interfaces to the backbone network suffice for this purpose in the first and second phase the radiographer at the icu support will need approximately full time equivalent images have to be archived digitally approximately optical disks per year will be needed ultrasound one workstation is installed that is equipped with reporting facilities a local disk drive and optical disks per year are needed the production of film is immediately because of film elimination in ultrasound phase integration icu two his connections are needed to emulate the his on the pacs workstations giving access to radiological reports the simple interfaces installed in the first phase are replaced by more intelligent interface support units that allow placed allowing access to images for ct including optical disks the reporting station and the ct acquisition module are connected to the backbone through an interface support unit one of the two film copies is
overall low time on help for the lower group could be due to the fact that two of the participants did not use help at all and that four of the eight participants in this group belonged to the non interaction group as well when looking at time and frequency of useful interaction with the each help option data show that the higher group made more use of the subtitles though the average difference between the means of two not statistically significant interestingly time and frequency of interaction with the transcript did not vary much between groups the lower group on average opened help pages more times than the higher group but the higher group had more useful instances of interaction another proof that the higher group used help options more effectively this result is similar to the finding of hegelheimer and tower who suggest that lower proficiency students may not only lack the to take advantage of help options but also may not know which help options may be more beneficial to them table performance of the higher and lower proficiency groups on the activity table performance of the higher and lower proficiency groups on the activity note time is displayed in minutes and seconds higher group post listening questions and recall test questions as could be expected the means in table show that the higher group had better comprehension and recall obviously the weaker students did not comprehend the content of the lecture well and did not answer many comprehension questions correctly immediately after the lecture their comprehension is even lower while a week after the activity on the recall test many of them could not remember any ideas from the activity the reason may be that the lecture was too difficult for the students or that the help options were not employed effectively to compensate for comprehension breakdowns which consequently resulted in low learning outcomes finally as already noted some of the weaker students did not interact with the material at all since half of the group exhibited the non interaction pattern of help use this result supports pujol who also found that some of the lower group participants never as in all call research the result can be interpreted in the light of motivation and student attitudes but the effects of those variables were minimized by the way the task was set up and integrated into the course table comprehension and recall data for the higher and lower proficiency groups research question attitudes towards help options to look at attitudes towards help options participants answers from pre and post listening preferred over the transcript thirteen students chose the subtitles and five chose the transcript both before and after the activity although the ratio between the preference for subtitles and the transcript did not change only one student kept to the transcript and nine students to the subtitles this means that students changed their preferences after they encountered help changed from transcript to subtitles and from subtitles to transcript table participants preferences of help options as reported in questionnaires a possible explanation for this shift in preferences could be that the participants realized which help option worked better for them a comment from participant supports this i think i switch my answer because i realized that it was easy for me to follow the lecture and understanding the speaking using subtitles also it can be speculated that the participants chose the type of help were most exposed to in everyday life this was supported by answers to the question about familiarity with transcripts and subtitles out of participants were familiar with subtitles with both subtitles and transcripts and with none conclusion and limitations the results of this study about the use of subtitles and transcripts as help options in cases of listening time than the transcript the subtitles were also the preferred help option before and after the activity and it appears that the participants picked the help option they were predisposed to in daily life the higher proficiency group also used subtitles more frequently and for longer amounts of time than the lower proficiency group although both groups exhibited very similar behavior on the transcript overall the results show that the participants spent less time interacting options than was anticipated when the study was set up since the help pages were used only the time they were opened the failure of participants to make use of help options could be because of the task characteristics such as the degree of control and time pressure it appears that some of the participants did not like the fact that they could not skip help after answering a comprehension question incorrectly moreover time on task was limited to one class period minutes which may have forced some of the participants to finish quicker and did not allow them to use help to the extent they wanted a factor that could be controlled in future studies additionally it could be speculated that external factors such as motivation and attitudes towards the task could have influenced students behavior as well in the course of the activity the participants exhibited great variation in the time spent on help and a large variation was also noted in help page openings and instances of useful interaction with help these findings support hegelheimer and tower and pujol who also found variations in the use of help this research also identified four patterns of participants interaction with help options and described behavior of participants following those patterns the analysis showed major differences between subtitles and transcript one side and the non interaction group on the other in terms of performance help page openings and instances of useful interaction with help while the subtitles and the transcript groups performed similarly on comprehension questions during and after the activity as well as on time and frequency of help use the non interaction group varied the most in behavior and performance from all other groups probably due to task
agents is widespread in dyeing processes many studies have been devoted to improve the fastness properties of anionic dyes by pretreating or after treating the fibers with amines or reactive cationic agents most of these studies have used monomeric or polymeric quaternary ammonium salts having different ammonium chloride mono and bis reactive haloheterocyclic compounds and poly epichlorohydrin dimethylamine derivatives the mechanisms of dyeing cotton textiles pretreated with quaternary compounds of epoxypropyl type and mono and bis reactive chlorotriazine type were studied the high reactivity and better thermal stability of chlorotriazine type agents than epoxypropyl type agents and gave effective enhancement of reactive dye uptake later on it was found that the pretreatment of cotton fabric with bis reactive cationic agent promoted higher extents of dye exhaustion and fixation than that with mono reactive cationic agent the presence of heterocyclic ring and imino groups in the chloroazine type agents contributes poor thermal stability of epoxypropyl agents made them unsuitable for exhaust application and was also responsible for the poor dye penetration due to significant migration of agent during the thermal reaction step of pad bake process leading to nonuniform distribution of cationic dye sites on the fiber the reactivity of cotton with such types of compounds has that cotton cationized through a pad batch process gave excellent dye penetration indicating the uniform distribution of cationic dye sites through this process thus a pad batch process seems to be good for achieving high yields of cationically modified cotton with uniform distribution of dye sites the pad batch dyeing technique has now become an important dyeing method ammonium salts the use of cationic agents in the form of primary secondary tertiary and quaternary amino residues has been known since to investigate systematically the effect of attaching a variety of amines to the cellulose fiber cotton was modified by pretreatment with nmethylolacrylamide to introduce a pendant activated double bond by introducing dyes were achieved at ph in the absence of electrolyte but light fastness was lowered cellulose modified with only methylolacrylamide also gave high color yields with dyes containing pendant aliphatic amino residues in the presence of electrolyte under alkaline conditions recently a new fiber reactive quaternary compound containing an acrylamide residue was synthesized and dyed with reactive dyes without the addition of salt or alkali the reactive dyes were almost completely exhausted and showed a high degree of covalent bonding with the pretreated cellulose cationic starch had also been used for the modification of cotton fabrics dyeing of this modified fiber with reactive dyes using a continuous dyeing method gave improved dye fixation and level dyeing without the and rub fastness azetidinium chloride an investigation of the direct dyeing of cotton cationized with dimethyl hydroxy azetidinium chloride diethyl hydroxy azetidinium chloride or sandene showed improved dye absorption and firmness of color in the absence of salt in a neutral medium the in the absence of salt in a neutral medium the effect of alkali pretreatment followed by dimethyl hydroxyazetidinium chloride treatment on the dyeability of cotton yarn with reactive dyes has been reported to produce a much stronger color yield than by dmac treatment without alkali pretreatment epoxy and halohydroxy propyl derivatives attempts have been made to fix epoxy and halohydroxy propyl derivatives to cellulose via an ether linkage epoxypropyl derivatives of ammonium chloride react with cellulose under alkaline conditions to form ethers however when halohydroxypropyl derivatives have been used for the cationization of cellulosic fabrics under alkaline alkaline conditions alkali is required both for the formation of epoxide ring and for its reaction with cellulose thus both the epoxy and halohydroxy propyl derivatives have the same reactive group the first product of this type was glytac a which reacted with cellulose via the glycidyl group at alkaline ph chloro hydroxypropyltrialkyl were used for the cationization of cellulosic fibers under alkaline conditions cationized fibers showed slightly better light fastness than those on nylon or wool dyed with the same acid dye but their wash fastness decreased with increasing length of hydrocarbon chain the use of epoxypropyltrimethyl ammonium chloride as of direct dyes on cotton textiles it has been observed that a pretreatment generally produced better results than an after treatment an increase in the number of solubilizing groups on the direct dye molecules generally resulted in a deterioration of the rubbing fastness of pretreated fabrics and an improvement in the case of after treated fabrics this dyed fabrics a comparative study of the reactive dyeing of unmodified cotton and cotton cationized with compound with dyes having four different reactive groups showed that cationic cotton gave the same color fastness as the unmodified cotton but usually with higher color yields cotton modified with this agent through a cold pad batch process has s reactive and acid dyes without the use of electrolytes or multiple rinses which are normally employed in cotton dyeing the dyeing behavior of cotton cationized with chloro hydroxypropyltrimethyl ammonium chloride with direct dyes was investigated findings revealed that cationized cotton could be dyed with fiber reactive dyes showed deeper shades moreover nonlinear color behavior occurred with cationized cotton at lower concentrations than with unmodified cotton suggesting that predicting shades on cationized cotton requires caution significant differences in dyeing rates and dye uptake of acid dyes on this cationic cotton were somewhat lower than the values for nylon the printing properties of cationized cotton that had been pretreated with compound were found to be very effective in reducing fixation times and washing off processes and in increasing color yield and wet fastness properties for a number of reactive and direct dyes printing on cationic cotton ph values avoiding the need for a ph regulator in the print paste and for neutralization during washing this technique did not need an intensive washing procedure and thus appeared to be a more environmentally friendly printing process the effect of cationization on the quality of ink jet printing on cotton fabrics was also investigated ink jet printing printing method using less dye less thickener and less alkali without relinquishing
obtain a lookup performance improvement d seems to be a good combination for the hybrid system effect of distribution density in chord the nodes are distributed uniformly along the chord ring hence the lookup performance depends only on the number of nodes in the network which means that if is fixed the node density has little effect on the routing performance we will see that this is also true for the hybrid is varied from to the number of chord rings is varied from to and the length of the successor list is fixed as shown in table ii the experiment indicates that the lookup path length increases very little with for each value of we therefore conclude that under uniform node distribution the routing cost of the hybrid system depends mostly on the number of nodes node failures after a node in the hybrid system fails some time will pass before the remaining nodes react to the failure by correcting their finger tables and successor pointers and by copying replicas to maintain the replication the hybrid system is able to perform lookups correctly and efficiently before this recovery process starts even in the event of massive failure d a fraction of all nodes were randomly chosen as failure nodes after that we performed random lookups for each lookup we recorded if the lookup was a success and if it was we calculated the lookup path length we then derived statistics of the lookup success rate and the average lookup path length that store the data replicas the size of the successor list is d in both systems the result shows that our hybrid system can always find the desired data with high probability and has a similar data availability as chord table iv shows the average lookup path length when failures occur the result indicates that the our hybrid system has better lookup performance when failures occur based on the above chord in handling node failures chord considers that if the successor list has length d both the success rate and the performance of chord lookups will not be affected even by massive simultaneous failures furthermore it has been shown that if the successor list of length d and every node fails with independent probability the system can find the closest a node cannot know the exact number of nodes existing in the network at a certain time more practically in our model we use a reasonable constant number as the length of the successor list assuming the independent failure probability of a node is the full failure for a successor list is which is very small it means that the data items are always successor failure nodes will result in incorrect successor pointers and incorrect successor will lead to incorrect lookup to increase robustness in the same way as chord each node maintains a successor list of size d containing the node s first d successors if a node s immediate successor does not respond the node can substitute the second entry in its successor list all d successors would have to very improbable with modest values of d assuming each node fails independently with probability the probability that all d successors fail simultaneously only pd increasing the size d of successor list can strengthen system robustness iv redundant construct overlay networks with constant degrees and can achieve routing performance in this section we propose a variation of the system which improves the lookup performance and data availability while maintaining a small degree a overview of de bruijn graph we first briefly describe the de bruijn graph which is the d and there is an edge form any node xk to the d nodes xk for d has db nodes in degree and out degree d and diameter in the following we will consider boolean alphabets that is d routing from xb to yb is achieved by following the route xb for a shorter route is obtained by looking for the longest sequence that is suffix of xb and prefix of yb if there is such a sequence xi xb then the shortest path from xb to yb is xb yb for example if we want to route from to in a complete de bruijn graph the system aims to maintain a dynamic de brujin graph to create a topology where routing is still simple and efficient redundant in there is no fault tolerance for a specified start node and a key the lookup path is unique if a node in the lookup path fails that lookup process is unavailable furthermore all lookup paths through that node are unavailable in this section the lookup performance let us call successors of a node the set of nodes that can reach in hops or less clearly in a full de bruijn each node has two successors and successors similar to hybrid chord we maintain a successor list for each node in the system to improve the routing performance and data availability since the number of successors successors of constant length in this paper we have studied the cases and and have observed substantial improvements in routing data replication and fault tolerance node joining and leaving is managed exactly in the same way as in routing proceeds in a similar way exploiting the additional connections for each hop a message is forwarded in a greedy way to the node closest to destination in doing so a message can skip nodes in its original routing path if successors are kept if the routing performance is then the which means each node will maintain a set of successors the number of out going link for each node is then assume there is a lookup initiated from the node with label and the destination node is the original routing would forward the request in hops in successor routing each node is connected also to the nodes that it can reach at distance and can forward the original routing one node will be skipped
mobility anchor point constitute a single domain the gateway connects multiple maps to offer faster connectivity and data transfer during interdomain handoffs every domain is maintained by an administrative body and service agreement is assumed to exist among to the internet pstn and other data networks the ar map and gw can be construed as functionally similar to the radio network controller the serving gprs support node and the gateway gprs support node of the umts with enhanced capability of connecting together multiple access networks micromobility protocols such as cellular ip and in conjunction with the resource management mechanism is adopted to localize handoff and reduce the handoff latency a common control signaling mechanism is utilized to assist access network discovery location management and vertical handoff by periodically compiling and broadcasting a list of available radio access networks the list includes surrounding bs ids and their associated ar ids and existing bss aps can resolve the common signaling problem they cannot guarantee the integrity of critical signaling information which may be affected by channel impairments such as fading therefore a dedicated signaling scheme is required subject to narrowband spectrum availability and monetary investment by the network operator located at the map the home subscriber server respectively store user profiles and service policy and authentication and accounting information a distributed bandwidth broker based resource management architecture is proposed inside the domain where each router is capable of becoming a bb selected through an election process such as based on time were to fail the functional elements of the bb include service level agreement service level specification admission control service authentication and authorization policy decision point and so on the routers at the edge of the domain identify deduce themselves to be the edge routers based on the hierarchical source address obtained from their neighboring identification for end toend qos admission control is carried out through interactions between edge routers the inter bb path can use a virtual private network tunnel with the encryption so as to provide additional security resource reservation protocol is used at the network edges with diffserv being used in the core network for fixed network connections furthermore a subnetwork traffic flow aggregation is carried out at ars to provide better qos and aggregated flows are treated on a per hop behavior basis by the intradomain routers the intradomain routers also provide policing and traffic shaping the setting up of qos enabled interdomain communication session between peer end terminals includes the following steps of neighboring bbs that control different networks by constructing forwarding tables as in ospf incorporate a policy decision point to carry out admission control in its domain negotiate with neighboring bb for provisioning of the requested traffic for end to end qos integrity based on sla agreement among participating internet service providers is presented in other notable schemes include qos enhancements to bgp the eu ist mescal project and so forth cross layer coordination similar to the global internet interoperability of multivendor there are exceptions to this norm such as direct access of physical layer by radio resource management in gsm while layer independence within the protocol stack advocates interoperability the unpredictable nature of the wireless interface makes it difficult to guarantee acceptable service quality prove to be inefficient necessitating some form of modification to the protocol stack in order to offer a comprehensive solution for performance improvement a shift from the traditional layering paradigm to cross layer coordination across effect of such paradigm shift the general trend is to confine the cross layer coordination within the mobile terminal structure the issue that needs to be defined and subsequently standardized is how to carry out this information exchange and what parameters need to be jointly considered in the layer specific decision process in the protocol stack the cross layer information is stored in the wireless extension header of an based packet the progression of the ip packet through each layer makes direct access by the higher layers difficult an alternate solution will be to have direct connectivity are translated into parametric quantities or how the decision process is optimized figure depicts a cross layer mechanism for ad hoc networks that exchanges layer specific information through external servers unfortunately coordination cannot support time critical services and is limited to application and network mark based mechanism is incorporated to initiate icmp messages whenever network conditions change here network conditions refer to a set of parameters such as latency bandwidth energy and so forth that define the network environment similar to fig encapsulation of the icmp message within the ip header makes direct access by the higher layers difficult to achieve regardless of which scheme is eventually adopted are joined by the cross layer connectivity and external values higher layer decision processes need to jointly optimize these quantities multistep vertical handoff analysis terminal mobility across diminished cell sizes in ngmn will result in multiple handoffs during the lifetime of an ongoing call supporting these handoffs in a similar to legacy networks handoff triggering in ngmn will be primarily caused by the received signal strength falling below an acceptable level near the cell boundary the strong possibility of this form of handoff occurring between dissimilar networks predisposes the adoption of the term forced vertical handoff in this article to differentiate it from horizontal handoffs becomes available to enhance the current service quality as would be the case in a co located heterogeneous environment however there may be considerable delay in handoff initiation and connection setup due to the inability in detecting vertical handoffs as a result it may inadvertently degrade the application qos leading to dropped sessions to guarantee service continuity a predictive mechanism is therefore required to minimize the overall handoff period or alternatively incur a handoff time that is at least comparable to the legacy networks in this article we propose a periodical vertical handoff algorithm that addresses accurately predicting a forced handoff based on the terminal coordinates the knowledge of the terminal s precise location is
most users opt to make their profiles public the primary concern is that this openness puts youth at risk making them particularly vulnerable to predators and pedophiles in the usa recent federal aid to protect minors from commercial social networking websites and chat web and the semantic web the semantic web also known as web will simplify human computer interfaces by attaching machine readable metadata to web content to enable computers to understand the actual intended meanings of this in more control over how information is accessed and aggregated to best serve the purpose at applied to micro content chunks and social communication exchanges in web this could also mean better information search and retrieval algorithms that overcome some or most of the limitations of folksonomic metadata while still benefiting from produce novel social semantic search engines is a strong possibility but it is more likely that we will see combined web solutions that are application and community specific rather than a universal all purpose set of health care semantic descriptions however we are still far from understanding how web and the semantic web will exactly relate to each other become the focus of high profile conference panels for example and the workshop on social and collaborative construction of structured were both conceived to exclusively discuss semantic social networks and a combination of web and semantic web strategies and how this can be achieved conclusion web is here to stay and is an evolutionary enhancement to web rather than a correction of previous shortcomings web services will doubtless increase in complexity and scale during and build social the operation and success of web tools are worthy of study in numerous disciplines from media studies sociology and computer announcing his new web science research initiative sir tim berners lee declared he wished to attract multidisciplinary researchers to study the web as a scientific technical and social challenges underlying the growth of the web of particular interest is the growing volume of information that documents cumulative knowledge and human activity the project will examine how information is accessed and assess its in the context of health and health care services and education there is a need to raise awareness of use of web applications applying bandelli concepts to health and health care settings one can say that patients and their carers want more than information from providers they also wish to interact and exchange information with the each other therefore health care providers should aim to become social enablers providing situations that become positively patients must be empowered to build their needs into any technology on offer aptly summarizes the current situation health professionals might not like what s going on in the world of the internet but they must get socially networked as if their jobs and their patients health depended on it because they do collection methods in the context of a large nationally representative survey of general practice consultations in new zealand methods the national primary medical care survey carried out over was a nationally representative multistage probability sample of general practitioners and patient visits the primary purpose of the survey was to collect data on the content of patient visits in a pilot sub study of data collection methods data were the course of consultations using practice management software enhanced with supplementary electronic forms these data were compared with data from the main natmedca survey which were collected using paper collection methods this analysis focuses on a subset of the sub study data comprising data from community governed non profit practices results the patient visits data from the four practices in the electronic data collection arm of the study provide evidence for practitioner data reporting when compared with data from the six practices employing paper collection methods despite similar patient characteristics reasons for visit and problems per visit data from the electronic arm of the study appeared to be less complete than data from the paper arm by way of contrast practitioners using electronic data collection methods had comparatively high rates of recording prescription items per problems the very low number of reasons for the electronic arm indicates a high likelihood of systematic bias in the practices employing electronic data collection methods as every visit should have had at least one reason for the encounter conclusions the findings of the comparison of electronic and paper survey data collection methods are important for researchers intending to carry out general practice based surveys survey data generated routinely via practice management systems may differ tailored paper collection instruments introduction the use of computers in a primary health care setting has increased markedly over the past decade in for example new the and the computers are used for a variety of purposes including business management electronic patient records population health management and patient recall the potential of computer based information systems to provide a tool for epidemiological morbidity and needs is well recognized surveys based in the general practice setting are a common and important research modality particularly so for clinical and health services research a number of such surveys have been conducted in new zealand yielding numerous publications and a wealth of information relevant to clinical practice management and organization and to primary health care policy three surveys conducted over the past two decades are the comedca waimedca and natmedca surveys while differing somewhat in their depth and breadth of coverage each of these surveys sought to collect information on the content and organizational characteristics of a sample of new zealand general practices each survey was conducted using paper collection methods consisting of pre printed pads kept on the desks of participating general practitioners and nurses given the revolutionary change in the way data are collected stored and analysed in primary health care settings researchers in new zealand are naturally interested in the potential for survey based research data to be generated automatically via routinely collected patient and administration data collections within electronic records rather than via paper collection methods which
for error is the uncertainty in the bathymetry particularly over the canyon and particularly for northwesterly waves the bathymetric database used is comprised to nearshore surveys from airborne lidar from the us geological survey measurement system each has different coverage and quality kaihatu ando reilly performed some sensitivity studies for model runs over various bathymetric databases and demonstrated significant sensitivity of the nearshore wave heights on the details of the canyon bathymetry additionally long et al the canyon particularly the crenellations of the depth contours the biases seen in table are generally lower than the above estimates however and may indicate that the wave model is less sensitive to bathymetry errors than other types of errors at least over the shelf we do not specifically investigate sensitivity to bathymetric errors herein to do this properly it would be necessary to adjust the bathymetry stationary hindcast simulations with forcing identical to the forcing of the stationary realtime system it was found that positive bias occurs which did not occur with the realtime system by default swan stationary computations use the prior stationary computation as a first guess for the iterative solution procedure with many stationary computations in sequence the hindcasts presented by initializing each stationary computation with a low energy condition as the first guess as mentioned above in section the problem with under convergence was confirmed by running two hindcasts identical except for method of initializing computations dramatic difference in bias occurs note that we have not proven that levels that are artificially slightly low the reader is referred to zijlema and van der westhuysen for further reading dissipation at specific times during the hindcasts there is significant local wind sea generated inside and just west of the grid energy from this wind sea is well predicted outside the islands of the bight but is overpredicted at due to a not enough energy being blocked by bathymetry topography or not enough dissipation of these relatively short waves as they propagate from west to east across the grid more comprehensive metrics it is obviously desirable to evaluate model performance based on metrics other than total energy in fact is also included however due to the very large quantity of measurement locations and the duration of the time series it was not possible to perform more than cursory inspection of these comparisons validation of directional spreading for long time series is possible but is difficult to reduce to average quantities directional spreading is not very meaningful in cases where wave climate of this region other forcing sets there was some interest in using operational navy products to force the hindcasts the regional wind and wave products were assembled for this purpose the ncep and fnmoc wind products were compared directly to winds measured at buoy this comparison suggested a possible too close to be conclusive one product reproduced some wind events better the other reproduced other events better ncep gfs had lower rms error coamps had lower bias preliminary hindcasts were performed for the outer swan grid with various forcing combinations however the comparisons to data indicated a moderate advantage to using the ncep forcing this is the primary reason why ncep forcing is used for the hindcasts presented in this paper however these issue the preliminary hindcasts were not hot started re initialized with low sea state prior to each computation thus these simulations would need to be repeated to confirm an actual advantage to the ncep forcing refraction computations at coarse resolution swan has known problems calculating refraction in cases in the lee of the shoals east of where aphysical increase in wave height is predicted by swan the refraction issue was confirmed to be the culprit the high wave heights do not occur if either a high geographic resolution is used or refraction is disabled of course neither is a good solution for a wave model a test case was created which covers that used in the grid the test case was run with a number of refraction limiters and a limiter of was chosen as best replicating the results obtained with high geographic resolution this limiter was used in some of the preliminary hindcasts but was not used in the hindcasts presented since it was felt that more study of the to swan the outer grid could have been computed with a large scale wave model such as we expect that would be a bit more efficient than nonstationary swan at this geographic resolution note that in our hindcast nonstationary hindcasts swan is a conditionally stable model since the conditionally stable garden sprinkler correction is employed for the high resolution choice during hindcast design swan in this case has no real computational advantage over the difference in efficiency is not great however so model choice at this scale can be governed by other concerns distribution of boundary forcing is critical it is not enough to evaluate the accuracy of boundary forcing simply by comparing significant wave height the forcing may be consistently under predicting swells from one direction and over predicting swells from another direction in this case wave height may be accurate at offshore locations but may be strongly biased in nearshore locations depending or another this demonstrates that time invested in getting as accurate deepwater directional spectra as possible is time well spent using stationary computations for an area the size of the southern california bight will lead to a moderate increase in root mean square error primarily due to phase error the aphysical instantaneous travel time of swells across the gx in a sub regional scale area where sheltering effects are important might be expected to carry penalties in the model to model comparisons here we found modest sensitivity to resolution in terms of agreement with observations there is little or no improvement derived from higher resolution this may be due with the swan model stationary computations extreme care must be taken with convergence criteria especially for simulations with a long series of stationary computations failure to do this may lead to
that the income required return growth rate and yields are all related to the features of a subject property also it is taken that variables like financing terms conditions of sale and market conditions all relate to the time of valuation and will impliedly inform the assessment of value implication of the features of the property identified patterned after ratchiff and swan but modified by way of pilot survey amongst few of the respondent firms the following characteristics were identified as value enhancing elements in a residential property of the type under study school shopping facilities recreational facilities churches centers of employment and public transportation neighborhood attractiveness harmonious land uses characteristics of neighborhood communications and facilities general level of rents and values in the district and their stability property lot size shape plot plan horticulture landscaping site stability attractive of improvements physical condition structural soundness of improvements exterior and interior and surfaces interior plan accommodation details functionality spaciousness number and arrangement of rooms or offices span and storage interior attractiveness decoration and fenestration mechanical equipment adequacy appearance a property owner cannot charge a greater interest than what he she has environmental quality of the neighborhood in terms of drainage and sewage treatment facilities arising from the forgoing the equations of open market valuation for sale as given above can be rewritten and drafted in very general terms as follows mvt a d where mvt expected open market value of a property at time and a d of property which affect valuation as explained from to above the factors to above were ranked as follows and the valuer for each respondent firms were then asked to rank the features in order of importance particularly their contributions to value of the subject property in analyzing the data emanating from the study while frequency tables were employed in explaining the profile of the respondent firms and their valuation officers as in the t test a ratio of observed differences error term was used to test whether valuation firms interpret the value implication of features of property identified the same way this ratio called the ratio employs the variance of group means as a measure of observed differences among groups this means that anova is a more versatile technique than the t test a t test can be used only to test a difference between two means anova can test the difference between or more means also the general rationale of anova is that the total variance of all subjects in an experiment can be analyzed into two sources variance between groups and variance within groups variance between groups is incorporated into the numerator in the ratio while variance within groups is incorporated into the error term or denominator as it is in the t test their valuers interprete the contribution of features of residential property taken as a sample in ikoyi the same way profile of respondent valuation firms table i shows that per cent per cent per cent per cent and per cent of the respondent valuation firms have been practicing in ikoyi for some years ranging respectively between and above the respondent firms are well distributed among the age groups and by table ii all the valuers the valuers in the respondent firms who participated in the valuation experiment are all registered estate surveyors and valuers they are either head of agency valuation and principal partner head of valuation and head of valuation and agency also of the respondents per cent are both heads of valuation and agency by this it can be concluded that they are familiar with the state of the property market in the neighborhood under besides as indicated in table iii all the respondent firms have been involved in property sale transactions in the same neighborhood the table shows that per cent per cent per cent per cent and per cent of respondent firms respectively have undertaken residential property sale transactions of the type under consideration numbering between and above in the recent past and not more than the last iron their opinions on the value enhancing elements in a property within the neighborhood may therefore be relied upon again all firms rely on their pool of data in carrying out their valuation functions valuers judgment in residential property valuation in ikoyi tables iv and shows at a glance the responses of the estate surveying and valuation firms through their valuation surveyors in their assessment of the importance of in anova the ratio which is the ratio of observed differences error term the total variance and value are very important in drawing inference given the variance between and within samples of and respectively and statistic of in tables iv and it indicates there are differences in the means and interpretation of the variables by respondents estate surveying and valuation firms this is because the differences as reflected by the statistic is statistically at as it is less than it shows that the respondent firms did not interpret the variables the same way indicating the bias or prejudice of valuers in the valuation process it further explains why selected estate surveyors and valuers in participating firms cannot arrive at the same value estimate for the same property notwithstanding the adoption of similar valuation method and access to identical information on the subject property valuer s expertise as influenced by organization s practice standards and varying years of establishment of the participating firms the experience of participating firms in recent sale transactions of similar property to the subject property in the neighborhood under consideration could also result in different value estimates this therefore confirmed the assertion in the literature that there are many aspects of valuation in which legitimate differences of interpretation may be made in which some facts may be considered more important by one valuer than by another and in which slightly different conclusions may be reached by two or more valuers from the same set of facts this may affect the way opinion of value may
is concerned with public choice processes and rent seeking the third is studying organizations and transaction costs the economics of property rights or the law and economics of movement argued that property rights arise when it becomes economic for those affected by externalities to internalize benefits and costs alchian defined the discipline of economics as the study of property rights over scarce resources for him the allocation of scarce resources is the assignment of rights to uses of resources the question of economics is the question of how property rights should be exchanged cheung argued that exclusive property rights grant their owner a limited authority to make decisions on resources use so as to derive income there from posner defined the function of property rights to be to create incentives to use resources efficiently north and thomas related different rates of economic growth to different sets of property rights they argued that changes in property rights can be rational eggertsson defined property the rights of individuals to the use of resources the most important figure behind the development of the economics of the property rights movement is ronald coase who received the nobel prize in the theorem bearing his name is a famous and influential one and it was formulated in its text book version by another nobel prize economist george stigler the coase theorem states that if costless negotiation is possible rights are well specified and redistribution does not affect marginal values then the allocation of resources will be identical whatever the allocation of legal rights and the allocation will be efficient so there is no problem of externality furthermore if a tax is imposed in such a situation efficiency will be lost the point of this theorem is to question government intervention and the concept of externalities the initial entitlement of rights does not matter but the efficiency is gained if we let negotiate freely what the government can do is to assign initial rights to those parties that are the most willing to negotiate coase received the nobel prize in for the articles he wrote several decades earlier the year is perhaps not a coincidence the iron curtain had fallen down in europe and yeltsin was dancing on a tank post socialist countries were looking for guidance in privatization liberalization and introducing the market system the coase and hypothetical had a tremendous influence as coase himself in his alfred nobel memorial prize lecture suggested the approach he introduced in his article the problem of social cost will ultimately transform the structure of microeconomics in that article he criticizes pigou who thought like several economists that government intervention is required to restrain externalities coase showed that in a regime of zero transaction costs negotiations between the parties would lead to those arrangements that will maximize wealth and this irrespective of the initial assignment of rights the significance of that idea coase thought is that it undermines the pigouvian system the coase theorem demonstrates that the pigouvian solutions are unnecessary coase s conclusion is to call on the market are not as is often supposed by economists physical entities but the rights to perform certain actions and the rights which individuals posses are established by the legal system it is obviously desirable that rights should be assigned to those who can use them most productively and with incentives that lead them to do so idea that a very flexible land use planning system subject to bargaining inevitably brings about rent seeking and prevalent rent seeking makes the land market the commons implies a belief in rent seeking and the tragedy of the commons over utilization of resources these same assumptions are made in zhu in whatever scenario vaguely defined property rights over urban land will leave valued assets in the public domain for to externalities will be exacerbated as a result also kung begins with the property rights paradigm which he claims has guided the institutional change in china and talks about the current property rights regime that deregulates into licensed open access and as such is clearly inefficient the ideas subscribed to by zhu and kung that ambiguous property rights lead to rent seeking and over utilization of resources are not however a conviction that is not shared by everyone even institutionalists criticize and doubt the theory of rent seeking some of them like samuels and mercuro reject it and argue convincingly that rent seeking theory is an artificial misguided normative theory there are no signs of such reservations in the writings of chinese property rights scholars schools of thought approach has also invaded other fields not just economics lawyers and judges examine legal decisions through the eyes of alfred marshall and law and economics scholars have forced judges to recognize the effects of their legal decisions on real property the property rights perspective has been applied also in analyzing zoning the advocates of this perspective claim that if the defect in zoning is seen to be an incomplete assignment of the property rights approach leads one to ask how entitlements ought to be assigned if the defect is high transaction costs the approach leads one to ask how to reduce such costs if the defect is one of fairness it leads one to ask how entitlements should be distributed or protected so as to promote fairness the advocates of the property rights school doubt the capability of planners and policymakers to know how to plan and are skeptical of reveal their preferences without incentives to do so the ideas of the property rights school have been challenged by two other schools of thought first liberals accepting pigou s idea that government intervention is legitimate in the case of externalities criticize the politically conservative ideas of the property rights school they defend intervention and argue that the market mechanism will not solve problems the second school challenging the tenets of the property rights contests the ideas of pigou it does not accept the utilitarian argument as the only valid
article i develop an alternative economically informed approach to the reasonable expectation of privacy test in contrast to the moral approach which treats privacy as a fundamental right the economic approach views it as an to use the technique without first obtaining a warrant or establishing individualized suspicion when there is a reasonable warrant based on probable cause before conducting the search unfortunately the jurisprudence that american and canadian courts have developed in applying the reasonable expectation of privacy test is notoriously circular imprecise and unpredictable in this article i argue that this indeterminacy stems in large measure from the tendency of judges to think of privacy in non instrumentalist terms courts typically view autonomy identity personality or liberty and while they often acknowledge the existence of countervailing interests they generally treat privacy as an unalloyed social good there are several problems with this approach which i refer to as the moral conception of privacy first casting privacy as a moral right is normatively questionable it is not at all clear that privacy is as central to human flourishing as most deontologically oriented jurists claim second is important the moral approach does a poor job of identifying the circumstances in which privacy should prevail over countervailing interests such as the deterrence of crime third neither the fourth amendment nor of the charter protects privacy in a fundamental manner they protect only the right to be free from unreasonable searches and seizures even gross privacy invasions may crimes as courts in both countries have recognized constitutional search and seizure decisions call for some kind of instmmentalist cost benefit calculation yet by conceptualizing privacy in moral terms courts have largely failed to perform this calculation with rigor clarity or transparency the intent of this article then is to develop a fully instrumentalist the obvious place to start is economic analysis there is a flourishing literature on the law and economics of privacy drawing mostly from the economics of information legal economists have taken on a wide variety of privacy issues there have been few attempts however to apply economic insights to search and seizure law this article aims to help fill this gap i provide an accounting of the costs and benefits of governmental privacy reasonable expectation of privacy decisions that maximize social welfare in contrast to the prevailing moral approach which treats privacy as a fundamental right the economic approach views it as a normatively neutral aspect of self interest the desire to conceal and control potentially damaging personal information in this view privacy should not be protected when its primary effect is to impede the optimal deterrence of surveillance may enhance social welfare by encouraging productive transactions diminishing the costs of non legal privacy barriers and limiting suboptimal policing practices such as discriminatory profiling and the enforcement of inefficient criminal prohibitions economics and public choice theory can also help to minimize decision making error by predicting which legal actors police legislatures or courts are best crime control the article proceeds as follows in section ii i briefly describe the american and canadian supreme courts reasonable expectation of privacy doctrines and highlight their chief inadequacy the indeterminacy of the public exposure and intimacy doctrines that the courts have used to decide whether to regulate novel search technologies section outlines the economic approach to the reasonable expectation of privacy test novel search technologies infrared imaging and location tracking this analysis suggests that courts should recognize a reasonable expectation of privacy in the latter case but not the former section vi concludes ii reasonable expectation of privacy doctrine and novel search technologies the use of the reasonable expectation of privacy test dates from the fourth amendment searches as physical trespasses into constitutionally protected areas in deciding that the placement of an electronic listening and recording device outside a public telephone booth was a search justice stewart declared for the majority that the fourth amendment protected people not places and the surreptitious interception of the petitioner s conversation violated the privacy upon which he justifiably relied the stems from justice harlan s concurring opinion harlan stated in language later adopted by a majority of the court that to be considered a search it must be shown both that a person exhibited an actual expectation of privacy and that the expectation be one that society is prepared to recognize as reasonable in its first decision interpreting of the charter the supreme court of canada adopted the same approach how then have courts gone constitutes a reasonable expectation of privacy this is not the place to summarize the reams of doctrine on the question it will be helpful however to provide some sense of how the american and canadian supreme courts have applied the test to novel search technologies not surprisingly courts have not considered the existence of a subjective expectation of otherwise police could simply advertise their intention to monitor everything capable of being monitored moreover people who were more suspicious or aware of governmental surveillance would receive less constitutional protection than those more trusting or ignorant the focus has instead been on the second component of harlan s formula whether an expectation of privacy is reasonable is extremely vague insofar as it gauges expectations of privacy in relation to prevailing social and technological conditions it is also tautological as wasserstrom and seidman have put it reasonable expectations are defined by reference to a current reality that includes the very practices under attack rather than by reference to the kinds of expectations people would have in a normatively attractive society the test s language implies that we less and less constitutional protection for privacy as technology continues to enhance the power and lower the costs of surveillance to be sure courts have attempted to suffuse the test with normative content they have pointed out many virtues of privacy and catalogued myriad factors influencing reasonable expectation of privacy decisions but the key conceptual tools that the courts have developed to aid these little jurisprudential consistency predictability or consensus
to the electron energy distribution function and to this subject also because of the experimental difficulty to detect the non equilibrium vibrational distributions specially in the plateau and tail regions strong attention has been devoted to the elementary processes entering in the state to state vibrational kinetics in particular and energy transfer processes largely as well as the dissociation process induced by atoms from each rovibrational state of ie the processes represent a formidable problem in this kinetics some simplified methods have been developed in order to cope with this problem as reported in ref a good compromise between reliability of results and computational resources lagana et al for the first process and by esposito et al for both processes the data of lagana et al are not complete specially for low lying and high lying vibrational levels and are to be extrapolated for temperatures greater than on the other hand the data recently improved by esposito et al can be now considered a complete set of rates in rates both obtained on a leps surface shows a good agreement into the common range of initial vibrational states and temperature the aim of this paper is to present the rates for both processes by means of interpolating formulas to be readily implemented in kinetic and fluid dynamic codes as well as to improve our previous models the structure of the paper is as follows in section we briefly describe in section we indirectly validate the rates by comparing the whole dissociation rate of the process with the existing rates in section we propose a set of state to state dissociation rates induced by molecular nitrogen molecular dynamics calculations wkb approximation we found vibrational states with a maximum number of rotational states equal to for the vibrational quantum number the software used for these extensive calculations has been totally developed by one of us largely improved in these last years by adding support for parallel and distributed computations and by applying an error check on trajectory calculation some improvements have been applied to original qct data presented both in ref and successively in ref we used a continuous range of translational energy from to ev a density of trajectories per a of impact parameter and per ev of kinetic energy in the low energy range up to ev up to ev of importance when calculating rate coefficients particularly for the dissociation process and for temperatures higher than we have computed approximately from to millions of trajectories for each vibrational state considered including all the rotational states associated to starting from one vibrational state in ten has been considered plus some new discretizing the energy axis into subintervals in order to have sufficiently good determinations of thresholds considering all the possible rovibrational states as final states is impossible from a practical point of view because of the unacceptable number of trajectories required but also for the enormous kinetic code which should be set up vibrational state summing contributions from any final rotational state compatible with then we calculated rate coefficients from a given vibrational state to each possible final vibrational state averaging initial rotation on a given rotational temperature in all the presented calculations rotational temperature is equal to translational temperature have been successfully interpolated by means of three different formulas the fit has been performed in the vibrational range of the reactant on three variables the translational rotational temperature the vibrational state of the molecule before the collision and the vibrational quantum jump dv the rates corresponding to the last vibrational to trends related to other vibrational levels the vibrational quantum jump dv runs from to remaining rates have been discarded because of the unacceptable statistical noise due to the the extremely low typical value of them a temperature range has been considered this range holds for each formula and couple of on temperature and on initial vibrational level has been performed keeping dv fixed in a second step also the dv dependence has been interpolated the simplest way to put together all the relevant trends was to where where and finally where formula has been used to interpolate the rates with and dv actually due to the huge spread in the magnitude of the rates five different sets of coefficients and have been tabulated one for dv one for dv one for dv one for rates in the range and dv finally formula has been used to interpolate the rates with and dv note that formula and are equal but not the coefficients in and relevant interpolation coefficients have been reported in have been reported versus in figs the curves obtained by the interpolation formulas well reproduce the qct results as can be appreciated by inspection of the root mean square of the logarithm of the fit error where is the number of the terms in the sum rvt are the qct rates kvt the fitted rates or in another case have been neglected this being justified by the fact that too small rates do not affect the kinetics the second criterion regards the vibrational quantum jump the two different ranges of dv and dv have been selected the third criterion concerns the translational temperature range that has been in table depending on the adopted ranges the rms changes significantly the maximum rms is approximately a factor with respect to the rate value whereas the minimum rms is the rate value this means that the rates in the higher temperature range have been interpolated better than the others generally speaking inspecting table brings to the conclusion that the higher the rate values the lower the fit errors this is a positive feature because the rates are affected by statistical errors too with the same behavior therefore large fit errors occur just where original rate of the reaction can be satisfactorily interpolated as a function of the translational temperature and of the vibrational level by the formula where the coefficients are reported on the last column of table note that formula
means to avoid non differentiabilities in bilevel optimization smoothing refers to a methodology by which a constraint in the mpec model implying a non differentiability such as the complementarity condition in the context of the problem is transformed into a sequence of smooth constraints that eventually tend to the original non smooth one in the context of the traffic equilibrium model we have access to a possible such smoothing instrument namely by replacing the ue condition by a sue condition suppose for example that the logit sue condition is introduced then the equilibrium solution is differentiable with respect to cf patriksson and algorithms for differentiable optimization can be applied to the resulting mpec problem problem as the parameter tends to infinity we approach the ue condition and hence we tend to attack a problem that although differentiable resembles more and more the original problem while the advantage is that we work with a sequence of differentiable mpec problems instead of a non differentiable one we also require the enumeration of every route in the network network such algorithms could however be a viable alternative for small scale networks airport management a strategic approach abstract in this paper a dynamic balanced scorecard is used for the main purpose of indicating strategy implementation avenues to managers so as to equip technical support in formulating a cause and effect system and fuzzy strategic indicators this methodological instrument brings a strategic vision to performance analysis and is designed to furnish a tool for evaluating the impacts of management action on the bsc fuzzy indicators the proposed analytical methodology is applied to brazil s seven main international airports such analyses have made use of various methodologies including total factor productivity and data envelopment analysis these tools however indicate each airport s situation relative to that of others although such tools do point to possible measures to be taken for improvements they fail to provide managers with a cause and effect system for evaluating the impact of management actions on the measures would enable a given airport to achieve a degree of outstanding excellence excellence in this paper means outstanding performance within the perspectives of organizational learning operations and client and financial results and a good knowledge of the cause and effect system of these perspectives productivity based studies point to practical improvements that have been identified substantial flexibility in the process of managing such organizations in addition to which these environments are becoming more complex every day this complexity results from a series of factors that are changing in both the external and internal environments of these organizations however this paper will focus only on internal indicators customers are better informed and are becoming increasingly sophisticated and demanding in their requirements society is critical of the cost of inefficiency and lack of quality it is not enough to identify the avenues to success for the organization mechanisms are also needed for evaluating the choices and for tracking progress ie a step by step cause and effect system late evaluation of the impact of an organization s actions may lead to major difficulties in the future airports are organizations with particular characteristics of their own whether in or security terms and even as a basic infrastructure for regional development this paper seeks to add the strategic view to the airport manager s outlook by furnishing a multicriteria management tool based on a set of balanced strategic indicators which here will be called a dynamic balanced scorecard and which involves fuzzy multicriteria analysis this tool provides a systematization that enables the manager to evaluate an airport s competitive of balanced dimensions of the decision making process we also provide a short review of the literature on airport performance analysis balanced scorecards and fma finally we apply our tool to a demonstration case study of brazil s seven main international airports literature on airport performance the aircraft parking areas are located where passengers embark and disembark and where aircraft related technical services are carried out such as cargo and luggage loading and unloading fueling and catering supplies and any other activities required to prepare the aircraft for flight the landside comprising the airport terminal access roads parking areas and the passenger terminals are an essential element of airport infrastructure report on airport benchmarking conducted by the air transport research society this report measures and compares the productive efficiency of a relative sample of airports located on the pacific rim europe and north america their study considers a number of factors that are outside the control of airport managements such as ownership structure airport size average aircraft size and the composition of traffic at the airport the atrs has systematically updated and expanded its study to include more airports pacheco and fernandes used dea in a bidimensional study to analyze the managerial efficiency of of brazil s domestic airports together with these same airports physical efficiency sarkis and talluri evaluated the operational efficiency of the main north american airports using dea and cluster methods and in doing so they developed a methodology to evaluate the performance of these airports and suggest improvements park applied a fuzzy linguistic approach to analyzing competitiveness among the nine main airports in east asia this analysis considered eight factors with the most important influence on airport competitiveness being considered to be geographical location followed by accessibility park also analyzed the competitiveness of asian airports using multicriteria analysis in a study that defined demand as the major factor in airport competitiveness based on this study the new hong kong airport evaluated as the most competitive in northeast and southeast asia this short review illustrates that some analytical avenues in earlier published studies were under explored especially with respect to strategic issues and a cause and effect analysis of decision making in an endeavour to find robust managerial tools the study reported here explores the use of a dbsc as a managerial tool for achieving the strategic goals set by
of power through individuals feeling that orders given should be obeyed because they were right and legitimate what marx earlier had delineated as the ideological ability of ruling political factions to make their perspective on the world appear as part of the in the early century four analytics of culture begin to take on methodological rigor culture and linguistics culture and hermeneutics culture social structure and personhood and culture and the comparative method culture and linguistics the structural linguistics of fernand de saussure leonard bloomfield nikolay trubetzkoy roman jakobson edward sapir benjamin whorf and the semiotics of anthropological theories of culture from century efforts by sir henry maine and louis henry morgan to deal with systems of kinship terms and totemic systems as ordered linguistic and jural sets the movement was toward the model that saussure classically formulated meaning is established by a system of differences just as each language selects but a few phonemes from the possible set of phonetic sounds so too languages the sapir whorf hypothesis generalized the recognition that native american languages expressed mood place aspect and tense in radically different ways than do indo european languages and that therefore common sense presuppositions and world views would be quite different pierce s notions of icons signs and symbols and how both relations among referential become one source of thinking both about the pragmatics of language use sociolinguistics and about the relations among communicative units not reducible to morphology grammar or semantics in midcentury this thinking would be combined with work on cybernetics and information theory with further work in sociolinguistics and pragmatics and in the with structuralism ethnosemantics the emic etic distinction the kuhnian notion of all of these elaborations is the probing of the interconnected systematicities of binary distinctions and complementary distribution creating meaning or and the distinction between native knowledge and structural rules that can operate beneath the consciousness of the native speaker for example a native speaker can correct grammatical mistakes and thereby teach a novice without being able to articulate the grammatical rules being used evi strauss would make it a rule of thumb not to trust native models or explanations but to systematically analyze for the underlying structural rules however equally important for the study of knowing how actors understand their worlds is eliciting their native points of view their hermeneutical modalities of interpretation and their critical evaluation culture and hermeneutics the late century debates about the methodology of the social sciences in distinction to the natural sciences turned on the paradox that if actors become aware of the description of their actions by an observer they may well alter their actions to make those descriptions appear nonpredictive sentient actors do not behave like crystals or atoms the geisteswissenschaften became defined as the study of meaning to the actors something that could be objective because dependent on the public nature of language and communication all social action by individuals is intersubjective and can be analyzed like any other linguistic phenomena in terms of message sender and receiver context and pragmatics although the roots of these formulations go back to vico were then elaborated by schiller herder and other german romantics and were then reformulated for the human sciences by wilhelm dilthey it is the generation of classical germany sociology that provided a groundwork for the notion of culture used by symbolic and interpretive anthropology contributing to their formulations were the sharp contrastive contexts of germany vis a vis england and france and of the accelerated pace of social change in germany formulated as a transformation from feudal rural and customary gemeinschaft to industrial urban more impersonal contractual commoditized and bureaucratic gesellschaft weber the master sociologist of the period worked out a methodology that paid attention both to causally adequate explanations and explanations adequate at the level of meaning to the actors his study of the interaction between the protestant ethic and the spirit of capitalism political economic formation the texts journals letters accounts of church methods of the early protestants provided access to the cultural forms through which the actors felt themselves compelled to act and by justified their actions weber also lays ground for recognition that predictive models good for governance require understanding of cultural patterns systematic enough to be at least predictive ideal types or as if accounts weber here is not as fully hermeneutic as later scholars armed with tape recorders and engaging in longer term participant observation might be but he provides the beginnings of an intersubjective methodology that can lay claim to empirical objectivity and that can be iteratively tested and corrected freud the other master hermeneuticist of the period provided a set of elicitation and story structuring techniques there were first of all his theatrics of elicitation the sofa the analyst outside the vision of the analysand the fixed time free association and dream reporting there were the dramatic markers of emotional truth the way in which a suggestion would either be confirmed by vigorous further elaboration changes of subject there was the hunt for clues in slips of the tongue rebus visualizations word substitutions and the like there was the production of the case history as a literary form that weaves together different plots story lines and temporalities those of the order of discovery the order of presentation of symptoms and development of illness and the reconstructed etiology or causal sequence there were the cultural templates for patient and use as analogues often drawn from the greek mythologies on which the educated middle class was raised such as oedipus and there were the social issues of the day the shell shock of wwi bourgeois sexual repression and status anxiety finally there was the metaphysical topology of das ich das es and das ber ich functioning differently in the colloquial german from the more latinate english but again functioning as a cultural template to think about the way the unconscious works its uncanny and subterranean tricks figure in return i give water etching and aquatint print by germaine
shown to differ on a variety of important dimensions and although the possible differential relationship of empathy to proactive and reactive aggression has not yet been investigated relevant theory suggests that empathy would be more likely to inhibit proactive aggression than reactive aggression studies that have examined specific types of aggression have not chosen types that are theoretically relevant finally much research on the empathy aggression relationship has employed groups that differ in a status that is correlated with differences in aggression but is certainly not constitutive of those differences therefore standardized assessments of aggression which are not always present we cannot be sure whether the groups actually differed in aggression per se future research directions measurement issues when we compare clinical and control groups in experimental psychopathology research we can use either raw scores or norm referenced standardized scores affective empathy is one of the few constructs that is hypothesized to have important implications for clinical that has no existing standardized nationally normed measure with which to make sense of an individual s raw score because of this any particular study is always compromised by the necessarily restricted sample a first step then would be the development of a standardized measure with a large representative norming sample given the general agreement over the definition and conceptualization of affective empathy this may not prove a difficult task conceptually but logistical abound especially if the developed measure is behavioral such as strayer s well regarded instrument the measurement of aggression as we have noted suffers most from a lack of measuring theoretically distinct subtypes this is particularly surprising when one considers that we have psychometrically adequate measures of aggression that are comprehensive in sampling from different domains of aggression and yield separate scores different domains moreover recent advances in the conceptualization of aggression have led to more specific constructs that may show stronger relationships with the empathy in this connection the construct of juvenile or fledging psychopathy may have a close connection to affective empathy given that callous unemotional traits have been associated with children who resemble adults with psychopathy for research on the empathy aggression relationship we have reason to believe that the age and gender composition of the sample will influence the probability that a relationship is found if measures of empathy were found to have adequate validity across different age groups the analysis of a two way interaction between age and gender would be important it is notable that only two of the studies reviewed here examined more than one age group and one of was part of a scale validation the possibility raised by the findings of gill and calkins that empathy and aggression might be positively related at some ages and inversely related at others is especially intriguing attention to developmental processes a final recommendation for future research is to exploit known information about the development of empathy and aggression in studying their relationship research on the development of empathy has prerequisites socialization influences and behavioral correlates similar information is known about the development of aggression research that examines aggression and empathy in a sample that also varies on these associated features can use prior test specific hypotheses moreover longitudinal research that makes repeated measurements of both the empathy and aggression can make more reasonable causal claims about the empathy aggression relationship in ecologically valid settings the literature currently available then does not suggest a firm conclusion about the relationship between affective empathy and aggression the expected negative relationship is by no although it is more often than not found in adolescent samples the methodological limitations of previous studies identified here make clear the promise that future research holds when these problems are remedied widespread concern about youth aggression is an important enough reason to work toward better studies so that a more refined understanding of clinically aggressive children and adolescent might lead to more effective interventions the role of culture in moderating the links between early ecological risk and young children s adaptation abstract to examine the effects of risk on infant development within cultural contexts dual earner israeli and palestinian couples and their first born child were observed at months and again at months eight ecological determinants were examined as potential risk factors including the infant s observed and parent reported difficult temperament the mother s depressive work family interference and experience of childbirth the parents marital satisfaction and social support and observed maternal and paternal sensitivity symbolic play and behavior problems were assessed at months culture specific effects of risk and protective factors were found parent sensitivity facilitated symbolic competence to a greater extent in the israeli group culture moderated the effects of maternal depression and family social support on toddlers behavior maternal depressive symptoms had a negative impact on the behavior adaptation of israeli children and social support buffered against behavior problems in the arab group implications for research on risk and resilience and the role of culture in moderating the effects of ecological risk are discussed among the central questions in the study of that alters the child s development to a maladaptive trajectory the specific parameters that add up to a substantial risk the way contexts exacerbate or attenuate the effects of risk on child outcomes and the level at which independent risk factors cross a critical cutoff are issues of theoretical and clinical importance belsky cicchetti the role of culture in shaping child adaptation has received surprisingly little attention culture as a set of beliefs attitudes practices and behaviors pertaining to child rearing and the family exerts the most significant impact on the infant s rearing environment kagan keller yet the contribution of culture to the child s propensity for psychopathology of risk in the infant s ecology and two types of developmental outcomes in young children symbolic competence and behavior adaptation specifically we examined two sets of culture related hypotheses with regard to the relations of risk and development the first set considered culture specific links between infant parent and contextual
single engagement but while comanches overwhelmed mexicans informants assured their readers the indians became craven wretches in the presence of armed anglo american men care little for the spaniards but they dread the americans gregg agreed insisting that comanches appeared timid and cowardly when they encountered americans another author added that comanches recede as fast as encroachments are made upon their territory a historian of texas observed that as they were incapable of united and skillful action in self defense or otherwise comanches must melt away before their anglo american enemies by inches kennedy the great authority dismissed these indians as a nation of robbers even a single american armed with the rifle has been known to keep large parties of them at bay he explained their depredations are always committed upon the defenseless so it was still another author insisted that comanches chose to attack mexicans an enemy more cowardly than themselves and who has been long accustomed to permit them to ravage the country with impunity so efficiently dismantled northern mexico supposedly dissolved into hapless cowards in the presence of anglo americans this idea was as essential as it was self serving by denigrating comanches critics excoriated the mexican men who allowed themselves to be bested by such contemptible enemies as in the texas creation myth american discourse about northern mexico made indians into the great signifiers of rather than the reason for mexico s failures like texas prior to northern mexico was in tatters not because indians were strong but because mexicans were weak and why were mexicans weak many commentators emphasized deficiencies of courage or intelligence writing about apache depredations in chihuahua for example gregg insisted that occasional efforts at pursuing indian attackers did nothing but illustrate the imbecility of the mexicans who were always sure to make a precipitate retreat generally without even obtaining a glimpse of the american observers also tried to explain mexico s indian problem as a consequence of mexican sloth physical weakness and stupidity more holistic thinkers gathered all of these condemnations together under the roof of what during the jacksonian period had become increasingly sophisticated pseudo scientific theories about racial difference so in a fundamental physical sense mexican blood was to blame for the indian featured mixed blood mexican zamboes who from either their dread of indians or their want of personal prowess or military skill had been too lazy to cultivate the soil and too cowardly to resist the aggressions of the northern indians stories about indian raids from elsewhere in northern mexico had the similar effect of rhetorically invalidating mexico s claim to the land only on a much larger scale waddy thompson who had nothing but contempt for comanches thought mexico s unending ordeal with indian raids presented the best evidence against that nation s future in north america that the indian race of mexico must recede before us is quite as certain as that that is the destiny of our own indians who in a military point of view if in no other are superior to them by the mid such amateurish ethnographic comparisons had become commonplace in american thinking about mexicans and their enticing northern territories a rough consensus on why indians had done such damage to the northern third of their nation but it took them more than a decade to get there everyone acknowledged that the once formidable spanish defenses had declined and that indians found it easier to raid than before but that opportunity spoke more to how indians accomplished their raids than to why they launched them in the first place in reaching for ultimate causes northern mexicans tended initially to attribute what they saw as the base animalistic evil nature of los salvajes whereas prominent authorities in mexico city pointed to the indians disadvantaged pitiable condition undoubtedly northerners held a range of shifting views about raiders still by the early most northern policymakers and writers began framing the war against the barbarians as one pitting civilization religion and political organization against savagery faithlessness and chaotic individualism a from chihuahua for example asked whether the same people who had cast off spanish rule would now consent to become slaves to some wandering barbarian tribes who have no more policy than robbery and assassination another observer demanded to know what is a miserable handful of fearful cannibals that they should keep an organized society in constant anxiety some in the north argued for negotiation and insisted on a shared humanity but they were in the minority i could agree that they are like us who live in society profess a religion and recognize all the rights established in it a lieutenant governor of sonora informed an advocate for negotiation the apaches are not similar to us except in their human shape los barbaros were animal elemental something in the words of political geographer jose agustin escudero that the ground seems to vomit forth in its pain editors wrote that the enemy strikes without reason or warning kill poor shepherd wretched woodcutter washer women little children hence the only rational indeed the only possible response according to sonora s legislature was destruction and eternal war against these barbarians presidents and prominent ministers in the nation s capital thought the northern rhetoric excessive and insisted not just that apaches comanches navajos and of the constitution of that everyone born inside mexico s territorial limits was mexicano but it was also important because mexican political elites contrasted their own enlightened inclusive benevolence with the aggressive exclusionism of the united states and especially with remembered spanish cruelties when northerners dehumanized indians in deed as well as word by promoting state funded scalp bounties for example national officials intervened northern to be helped not hunted in after four years of intense violence president antonio lopez de santa anna optimistically affirmed this notion that apaches and comanches were mexicans he admonished his northern subordinates that these wandering groups of forest men demand the attention of al friends of
ratio calculated by monitoring the sample volume change from preparation saturation consolidation and shearing even though there were large volume changes was good agreement with the void ratio determined by accurate tracking of sample volume and that determined by the sample freezing method no membrane penetration corrections have been applied to the calculated void ratio data these procedures complied in all respects with the methodology presented by been et al for accurate determination of a csl together with the stress strain behavior measured during shear the csl has been estimated by fitting a semilogarithmic trend line through the end points of the void ratio versus mean effective stress and on the mean effective stress versus deviator stress as shown in figs and the csl is well defined suggesting that any nonuniformity of the moist tamped samples had little effect on the final critical were and mtc the layer of principal interest depth has an in situ mean effective stress range of approximately kpa kpa the mean stress for critical conditions determined in the laboratory triaxial tests lie within the range kpa kpa hence the semilogarithmic idealization for the csl shown in fig was assumed reasonable is noteworthy that it was not possible to test these reconstituted silt samples at anywhere near their in situ void ratio as estimated from in situ water contents there was substantial contraction of the samples during sample saturation with additional contraction occurring during consolidation as shown in fig the samples were therefore tested in shear starting from void ratios in the range fig which lie in the range about and thus the in situ state parameter is about such very positive states are normally catastrophically liquefiable under minor static triggering and they are liquefaction follows from the nceer method based on robertson and wride s cpt specific liquefaction methodology this prescribes the soil as likely nonliquefiable if ic rw and as can be seen from fig the cpt results indicate that the robertson and wride based inference of liquefaction is likely no liquefaction potential in the laboratory show very contractive behavior even though they only exhibit a small post peak reduction in undrained strength also bq is consistent with an essentially complete loss of strength from shearing around the cpt tip there is no need for recourse to the chinese criteria this conclusion it may seem appealing to model the actual geometry of a cpt in finite element simulations and a few workers have attempted this there are still difficulties with large displacement formulations to date most of these simulations have focused on very simple soil constitutive models with unrealistic dilatancies understanding is therefore based on the space dimension and allows elegant and simple large displacement analysis within fast numerical codes there is also no difficulty with using advanced soil models in large strain spherical cavity expansion and undrained liquefaction induced by cavity expansion is readily modelled the extent to which spherical cavity expansion is an analogue is compared to the limiting cavity expansion pressure across a range of sand strengths penetrometer resistance and cavity pressure are similar functions of friction angle but the two are not equal there is approximately a factor of two between the two situations similarly in the case of a total stress approach using the tresca model it is rarely found in practice relating undrained strength to cpt penetration resistance a common range is and reality as found with the drained experiments of ladanyi and roy in summary cavity expansion is only an analogue for the cpt calibration is required to obtain the appropriate parameter values neverthe to develop the framework in which cpt data should be evaluated and normalized the reduction of the problem from a true to spherical symmetry necessarily removes any role for geostatic stress ratio in the computed results this may not be a deficiency however as the data obtained with sands in calibration chamber studies show that there is negligible influence al been et al it is assumed that this experimental result continues to be true in the undrained situation semiclosed form large strain spherical cavity solutions have been developed for drained cavity expansion in nonassociated mohr coulomb materials drained spherical cavity expansion solutions in realistic soil models have been provided by collins to the trend inferred by been et al from chamber testing of sands the chamber data of the cpt penetration of sand indicates that dimensionless cpt resistance is related to the soil s in situ state parameter by the simple equation it has been criticized on the grounds that the reference chamber test data indicate significant bias with stress level at least and possibly are functions of stress level detailed numerical simulations by shuttle and jefferies showed that eq provides an accurate representation of the relationship between drained penetration resistance these parameters should be functions of this was neglected in the work of been et al the question of how to estimate in undrained cpt soundings was addressed independently by been et al and houlsby noted that the group of dimensionless cpt variables where mv corresponded to a simplification of the is equivalent to normalizing cpt resistance by the vertical effective stress established during penetration as a consequence of cpt induced excess pore pressure been et al suggested that was related to the soils state parameter analogously to eq as the spectrum of behaviors caused by changes in the soil s void ratio and confining stress level there are now several such models in the literature all of which are based on the state parameter norsand was the first of such models and is used here norsand is a critical state model and is based on some is a special case of the more general norsand model perhaps the most striking feature of norsand is its recognition of an infinity of normal compression loci an infinity of ncl forces two parameters to characterize the state of a soil and the state parameter is a measure of the location of an
a pipe in bed she asked knew what bill smokes in bed subordinate clause in again but the subordinate clauses in which lacking inversion despite the initial wh form cannot constitute an independent predication seem thus to be non finite even though they depart less from indicative structure than some of those in all the examples in involve the wh construction and and ectopicity the wh form in no longer occurs in main clauses in english however the subordinate wh constructions in all including differ in interpretation from those in they are not necessarily associated with questions whether a question is involved or not is signalled by the superordinate verb in contrast the interpretations associated with asked and knew they both introduce a reported predication marked or unmarked in modality and they signal the mood of that predication does not signal a non prototypical mood but a modality predicational or argumental under both the ask and the know interpretations of the wh construction is non finite despite the retention of markers that also accompany indicativeness the wh construction can be finite or non finite differentiated as such by its interpretation as well as the other differences between and likewise the relative clause of is marked as non finite by ectopicity of the wh form without inversion this is the pipe which bill smokes in bed this is the man who smokes a pipe in bed this is the pipe that bill smokes in bed this is the man that smokes a pipe in bed and both relatives in differ in interpretation from the corresponding sequence when used finitely the form of the relative in is that of a finite a question whatever semantic properties there may be in common as a main clause the sequence which bill smokes in bed can only be interpreted as a question about the identity of the several bills involved in smoking some unspecified entity and the sequence bill smokes in bed can be used finitely but in that case the absence of the expected object is interpreted indefinitely or characteristically whereas the absence of so too with both the absence of object and subject is interpreted anaphorically even though once more the sequence bill smokes in bed can be used finitely the simple anaphoric gap construction of is also non finite the same sequence cannot be interpreted as a main clause but unlike the wh construction this anaphoric gap construction is not normally embedded declaratives but in an interpretation that cannot be used in a finite main clause these observations should not be interpreted however as leading to the conclusion that every clause preceded by a clausal subordinator should be treated as non finite i have not myself here invoked the subordinator in deciding on the finiteness status of the predication the relationship between mood finiteness and construction in subordinate clauses is a complex one as discussion will reveal but it does not invoke extrapredicational elements such as independent subordinators the status of subordinating words and the role of word order the that in and does indeed mark the clauses following it as subordinate unlike the contact clause in we said that bill smokes a pipe in bed we said bill smokes a pipe in bed but this does not warrant attributing non finiteness to as well as suggestion would drain finiteness of almost any independent content it might have the only subordinate finites would be contact clauses like moreover both and differ from all of in not showing any clause internal departure from the prototypical manifestation of finiteness associated with main clause indicatives in this they differ from the expression of other moods sentence but this embedded assertion status is signalled by their indicative structure whereas although the subordinates in may involve a reported question whether or not this is the case is indicated by the superordinate verb say asked vs knew the non prototypical mood of the utterance reported by the subordinate clause is imposed by this verb both main clause and subordinate indicatives may be qualified by modal unlike non prototypical mood is compatible with declarativeness even though as with negation its expression may depart from prototypical indicative expression but a subordinate indicative has the same value as a main clause it makes an assertion declaratives like other moods are associated with constructions that are finite but other moods are not expressed in subordinate clauses by this finite construction it is reported questions for instance but not in english by the construction dedicated to finite expression of that mood conversely unmarked reported declaratives are indicative and finite and non finite expression of them is often not by a dedicated construction consider the infinitive which may express either a reported declarative or a reported imperative subordinators that do not impinge on the internal structure of the clause they are extrapredicational so not pertinent to questions of finiteness unlike the above wh forms that is not integrated into the predication it announces the subordinate clause in is thus finite er sagte das er ihn gesehen ha ltte he said that he him saw had sbjv he said that he had seen him ich hatte den hut vergessen den hut hatte ich vergessen i had the hat forgotten the hat had i forgotten i had forgotten the hat er sagte er ha ltte ihn gesehen he said he had sbjv him saw he said he had seen him signalled by word order which is reinforced by presence vs absence of the subordinator the subordinate clause in without subordinator and with main clause order is finite in this respect however and this finiteness is determined by the positional syntax without necessary reference to the presence or absence of with this i note in passing that the relation between absence presence of subordinator and word order is more complex than some advocates of accounts involving movement have assumed thus for instance in old english we find inversion as well as its absence in clauses introduced by
accounted for a in net profit this was totally unacceptable as it would greatly deteriorate the competitive power of the company which is considered to be very important nowadays in order to minimize the financial loss the pmv based control was employed in the simulation using the same input conditions with this control the pmv values inside the office were intentionally pushed to the region of the lowest from table the mean pmv within the hottest period was found to be this figure was very close to the target value in fact the corresponding thermal environments were more thermally comfortable from the viewpoint of human comfort with a ppd value of with such thermal environments the productivity loss of occupants was much lower ranging from the financial loss was greatly reduced to with a net profit loss of only thus a substantial improvement was was observed regarding this aspect however this control did consume more energy compared to conventional setpoint control with a xc temperature setting based on the results the pmv control consumed extra energy of mj for the six month operation using the existing price of about per kwh electricity consumption the extra operating expense was found to be obviously this cost was well below the financial loss of the conventional control this justified the use of the pmv control in commercial offices based on the concerns of human comfort human productivity and energy consumption from figures and one may argue that the conventional control can attain the same performance as the pmv based control by lowering the temperature setpoint value to xc another computer simulation was carried out using the conventional control with the new temperature setpoint it was found that the mean pmv value was equal to and and the total energy consumption for six months operation was mj the latter figure was very close to the energy consumption of the pmv control for the same operating period the slight discrepancy was due to the fact that the pmv control did not maintain the room temperature at xc all the time the productivity loss was within this caused a total financial loss of the net profit loss was which was still higher than the expected obviously the new temperature setpoint did not bring the conventional control to the same performance as the pmv based control it was because the mean pmv value was higher than the value for the minimum productivity loss in the pmv control localized airflow was created around each occupant by a desk fan to enhance cooling in hot conditions together with the energy saving strategy the mean air speed always tended to reach its upper limit of ms as seen seen in figure however the conventional control did not employ desk fans for further cooling the only way to lower the pmv value was to further reduce the temperature setpoint value in this way more energy would be consumed to obtain the same financial loss this implies that the pmv based control has better performance than the conventional control in terms of human productivity human comfort and energy consumption an air conditioning system is always employed to provide thermally comfortable environments to people so far human thermal comfort and energy consumption are the operating criteria for the system one example is the selection of the room temperature setpoint for an air conditioned space in hong kong the selection is based on the percentage of occupants feeling thermally comfortable and on energy conservation by doing so it is generally believed that acceptable thermal environments to are created in an economical way however this paper pointed out that this approach would jeopardize human productivity which is very important in a commercial office a case study was conducted to investigate the importance of this factor to air conditioning control the performance of two control methods operating in the same commercial office was compared in terms of human comfort energy consumption and human productivity the two methods were conventional setpoint control and pmv based pmv based control the former method followed current practice its algorithms only considered human comfort and energy consumption for the pmv control human productivity was considered as well computer simulation techniques were employed to obtain the thermal environments created by the two control methods the simulation results led to the comparison of human comfort and energy consumption then a financial analysis was developed in which the total financial loss under each simulated was derived to reflect the performance in human productivity poorer human productivity would result in a larger financial loss it was found that the conventional control would cause significant reduction in human productivity even though an acceptable thermal comfort level was achieved in the office this in turn triggered severe financial loss in this control a drop in the net profit resulted on the other hand the pmv control performed well for both human productivity only a in profit was observed that well covered the extra energy consumption this control yielded much better overall performance therefore it is strongly recommended to consider human productivity in the design of future air conditioning controls as well as human comfort and energy consumption abstract in this paper we investigated the pollutant exposure reduction and thermal comfort that can be achieved with personalized ventilation design when a pv system is combined with two types of background air conditioning systems for the investigation of inhaled air quality pollutants emitted from building materials are the targeted pollutants and for the investigation of these investigations were performed by combining cfd simulation of the air flow and a multi nodal humanbody thermo regulation model the results reveal some new characteristics of the three typical air distribution designs ie mixed ventilation displacement ventilation and pv and provide insight into the possible optimization of system combinations pv has been advocated which is expected to accommodate individual thermal preference and improve inhaled air quality in a pv system cool and fresh personalized air is supplied directly to the breathing zone creating
diffusion equation the concept of accelerating qdsmc by deterministic sampling of a probability density function of high kurtosis has been demonstrated finally another benefit in using an exponentially distributed random timestep over a fixed timestep is that the intersection of a particle path with a given point can be determined exactly from excursion theory this may be important for simulations involving special boundary conditions for example consider the case of gas or fluid motion in a region bounded by a fixed wall using dsmc the particle position is known and by the update eq at a time dt later there are cases for which the boundary was penetrated by the particle between and dt although at the end of the timestep the particle position is on the same side of the boundary as this case cannot be determined exactly by using fixed timestep methods but can be determined from excursion theory for exponentially distributed timesteps temperature responsive molecular brushes prepared by atrp molecular brushes with side chains consisting of two copolymers ethyl methacrylate with methyl methacrylate and dimethylacrylamide with butyl acrylate were prepared by grafting from via atom transfer radical polymerization poly ethyl methacrylate and poly studies were performed for aqueous solutions of molecular brushes below and above the lower critical solution temperature and an unusual concentration dependent lcst was observed due to the compact structure of molecular brushes intramolecular collapse can occur when the average distance between molecules is much larger than the solution of molecular brushes is increased to the level in which the separation distance is comparable with the brush hydrodynamic dimensions intermolecular aggregation occurs as typically observed for solutions of linear polymers introduction densely grafted copolymers also known as molecular a high density of side chains separated by a distance much smaller than their unperturbed dimensions this leads to significant congestion and entropically unfavorable extension of the backbone and side chains which prevents the polymer from adopting a random coil conformation conformational behavior of molecular brushes in solution and at interfaces has been studied theoretically and and conformational changes of single molecules were observed and the mechanism and driving forces for the conformational variation can be unique for a specific brush recently we reported the synthesis of copolymer brushes containing azobenzene methacrylate and ethyl methacrylate monomer units in the side chains which allowed the macromolecules with poly side chains was also within the context of the current study we were primarily interested in how water soluble molecular brushes respond to changes in solution temperature polymers that undergo a transition from hydrophilic to hydrophobic upon heating demonstrate lower critical solution temperature behavior changes in hydrophilic is responsible for the thermoreversible phase transition individual chains are dehydrated and collapse intramolecularly which eventually leads to intermolecular aggregation of the atom transfer radical polymerization and other controlled radical polymerization mechanisms are suitable for the synthesis of multifunctional macromolecules inter and intramolecularly terminated chains this is especially important for the preparation of brush macromolecules due to the high concentration of chains that exist in the vicinity of the backbone polymer and to the propensity for cross linking when intermolecular termination occurs between multifunctional polymers due to the wide range of monomers that can be polymerized by by grafting from via atrp have involved the polymerization of and monomers poly ethyl methacrylate and poly display an lcst at approximately and above respectively copolymerization of hydrophilic and hydrophobic monomers allow fine tuning of the in this study dmaema with methyl methacrylate and dma with butyl acrylate from a macroinitiator backbone the solution behavior of these responsive brushes was studied by dynamic light scattering at higher and lower concentrations ethyl methacrylate were purified by vacuum distillation before use copper chloride and copper bromide were purified by stirring with glacial acetic acid followed by filtering and washing the resulting solids with ethanol and diethyl ether tris ethyl amine was synthesized measured by gel permeation chromatography with a waters hplc pump three waters ultrastyragel columns and a waters differential refractive index detector poly standards were used to construct a conventional calibration employing wingpc software monomer conversion was determined by nmr spectroscopy or by gravimetry average hydrodynamic diameters were determined by dynamic light scattering in water at various temperatures with a malvern high performance particle sizer three measurements were taken for each temperature temperature was changed every min in order to reach an equilibrium state butyryloxy ethyl methacrylate and poly ethyl methacrylate were synthesized as previously poly ethyl methacrylate graft ethyl methacrylate poly was prepared as follows hmteta and pbibm was added and oxygen was removed by three freeze pump thaw cycles next cucl was added under nitrogen flow after placing in a oil bath samples were withdrawn periodically to monitor conversion and molecular weight the polymerization was stopped by opening the flask and exposing the catalyst the polymer was precipitated by addition to hexane filtered and dried under high vacuum for at room temperature poly ethyl methacrylate graft ethyl methacrylate stat methyl methacrylate poly brushes were prepared at two comonomer feed ratios under methacrylate graft poly was prepared by atrp according to the following general procedure ethyl amine and toluene were added to a ml schlenk flask was added under nitrogen flow the copolymerization was conducted at for the reaction was stopped by opening the flask to air and the catalyst was removed by passing through alumina figure demonstrates the evolution of molecular weight distribution during the polymerization of dmaema from a pbibm backbone mma or ba respectively are illustrated in scheme a poly ethyl methacrylate macroinitiator served as the backbone for the grafting from polymerization for the methacrylates and poly ethyl methacrylate for the acrylate acrylamides monomer conversion during side chain synthesis was limited to less than order to halogen exchange was employed by using a cucl catalyst along with the bromine containing macroinitiator to facilitate well controlled polymerizations and reduce the rate of propagation with respect to molecular weight distributions remained relatively narrow throughout the polymerizations the true
exist positive real constants such that if then along the solutions of the systems with the boundary conditions the proofs of lemmas and follow a line that is entirely similar to the proof given in appendix for lemma we therefore omit these proofs because we believe that they would be superfluous and would just needlessly lengthen the paper we are now in a position to complete our lyapunov convergence analysis we start with the analysis of the global lyapunov and such that if then along the solutions of the closed loop system proof see the appendix we then have our main convergence result theorem there exist positive real constants such that for any initial conditions in satisfying the compatibility conditions and such that in an horizontal reach of an open channel in the field of hydraulics the flow in open channels is generally represented by the so called saint venant equations which are a typical example of a system of conservation laws we consider the special case of a reach of an open channel delimited by two overflow spillways as represented in fig we assume that are neglected the flow dynamics are described by a system of two laws of conservation namely a law of mass conservation and a law of momentum conservation where represents the water level and the water velocity in the reach while denotes the gravitation constant the system is written under the form as follows the pool and related to the state variables and by the following expressions where denotes the water level above the pool and is a characteristic constant of the spillways for constant spillway positions and there is a unique steady state solution which satisfies the following relations the control objective is to regulate the level and the velocity the jacobian matrix are generally called characteristic velocities the flow is said to be fluvial when the characteristic velocities have opposite signs the riemann invariants can be defined as follows by using the relations and for the control definition combined with the spillway characteristics and the following boundary control laws are obtained in addition it can be emphasized that the implementation of the controls is particularly simple since only measurements of the levels and at the two spillways are required this means that the feedback implementation does not require neither level measurements inside the pool nor any velocity or flow rate measurements and to analyze the convergence of the closed loop system towards the equilibrium we have the following additional comments the lyapunov function that we have used in this paper is similar to the lyapunov function used in it should however be stressed that in this lyapunov function is used to analyze the stability of a special class of linear symmetric in order to analyze the stability of nonlinear hyperbolic systems of conservation laws by proving a convergence in norm in the special case where the lyapunov function is just an entropy function of the system under characteristic form linearized in the space of the riemann coordinates in and the interested reader will find an alternative approach of the boundary control design where space of the system physical coordinates it must however be emphasized that the entropy is not a strict lyapunov function because its time derivative is not negative definite but only semi negative definite as we can see by setting in theorem follows from the previous works on the stability of the classical solutions of quasilinear hyperbolic systems as it is well known an interest of having an explicit lyapunov function is that it is a guarantee of control robustness indeed we could extend our analysis to the more general system with and for small enough perturbations simple boundary conditions and however obviously many other forms are admissible provided they make negative for instance it can be interesting to use controls at a boundary which depend on the state at the other boundary hence introducing some useful feedforward action in the control for the sake of simplicity our presentation was restricted can be directly extended to any system of conservation laws which can be diagonalized with riemann invariants it is in particular the case for networks where the flux on each arc is modelled by a system of two conservation laws and type fuzzy sets utilizing computational geometry to achieve this our approach borrows ideas from the field of computational geometry and applies these techniques in the novel setting of fuzzy logic we provide new algorithms for various operations on type and type fuzzy sets and for defuzzification results of experiments indicate that this approach reduces the execution speed of these operations a successful method of modelling uncertainty vagueness and imprecision in a way that no other technique has been able the use of fuzzy sets in real computer systems is extensive particularly in consumer products and control applications typically the fuzzy sets employed in real world systems are discrete ie are defined over a discrete domain this has some implications there is obviously a loss in accuracy if we assume that the application are accurate then discretization will inevitably produce an inaccurate result for many applications this may not matter but surely any move towards more accurate systems has to be explored the level of discretization is yet another choice to be made by the developer along with choosing the rules choice of operators etc this is true for both the type and type for the primary and secondary membership functions in the case of generalized type membership functions where the secondary is a type fuzzy number the computational complexity is very large this has in our view held back the exploitation of the real power of type fuzzy systems by forcing researchers to only use interval secondary membership functions from a type approach for the generalized type case where the secondary membership functions the third dimension are of any type there is a significant computational complexity that has curtailed their deployment and type applications predominately deploy interval valued fuzzy
the stopping criterion in active contour models is also an important issue whether using fast marching methods or level boundary and keep an equilibrium at the boundary only with appropriate energy functionals now we analyze the evolution convergence properties of dual front active contours first the dual front evolution provides an automatic stopping criterion in each iteration since all initial contours are classified into two groups all contours evolute simultaneously but based on different potentials on the other hand if two contours from different groups meet both contours stop evolving and a common boundary is formed by the meeting points automatically this automatic stopping criterion is similar to that in region growing methods in and multilabel fast marching methods the comparison of those methods with dual front active capability to handle topology changes second the iteration process of dual front active contours may be stopped automatically by comparing results from consecutive iterations in each iteration the result of the dual front evolution is a global minimum partition curve within the current narrow active region after a finite number iterations by taking significant jumps each time the evolving as that of last iteration or the difference between them is less than a predefined tolerance the procedure may be stopped because in each iteration the global minimum partition curve is confined to the active region the size of active regions decides the degree of globalness localness of the minimizer the result using a narrow active region may eventually to the result in a large property in this figure the segmentation result after iterations is the same as that after iterations from dual front active contours we set the stopping criterion such that the algorithm terminates when a curve reoccurs exactly in consecutive iterations the potential at a point was chosen as ji lj where is the mean value of points having the same this section we compare and contrast dual front active contours with some other active contours for boundary extraction since dual front active contours combine region and boundary constraints as well as a number of properties from both level set methods and minimal path based fast marching methods we compare our method to such edge based approaches as geodesic active contours se s model and the more general mumford shah model finally because of their evolution properties we also compare dual front active contours with region growing methods such as watershed algorithms and multilabel fast marching methods comparison with the edge based and region based approaches generated by noise may stop the evolution of curves yield undesirable local minimizers therefore initializations must be chosen very carefully the minimal path technique proposed by cohen and kimmel instead captures global minimizers of the same energy between two user defined points however these two initial points must be located precisely on the desired boundary considering a possibly noisy image with image domain i and segmenting curve mumford and shah proposed to decompose an image into piecewise smooth functions by minimizing the following energy where denotes the length of and are positive energy where and are constants and in and out denote the interior and exterior of respectively and are positive parameters in fig we compare geodesic active contours the minimal path technique chan vese s method and mumford shah method with dualfront and the objective is to find the interface of gray matter and white matter the image size is pixels the structuring element for the morphological dilation step of the dual front active contour model was chosen to be a circle mask the gradient information used in panel figs and is shown in fig the top row shows the original image and the the neither completely local nor completely global minimum found by dual front active contours yields much more desirable boundaries compared to the local minimum of the geodesic active contour and the global minimum of the minimal path technique in fig we give two examples which compare chan and vese s method and the mumford shah method with from chan vese s model after iterations figs and are the results from mumford shah model after iterations figs and are the results using dual front active contours with a circular structuring element and after iterations because chan and vese s method and mumford s method use global terms in the evolution equation sometimes these methods cannot find the correct boundaries be controlled by the size of the active regions thereby yielding more flexibility to cope with images with more complicated structure while still avoiding purely local minimizers due to noise the potential at a point for the dual front active contour model was chosen as ji lj where is the mean value of points having the same label as the point the parameters in chan and vese s method and in mumford and comparison with morphological watershed transform and multilabel fast marching method the watershed transform proposed by vincent and soille is a well known segmentation technique which is based on immersion simulation and allows the partitioning of an image into regions this technique is based on the assumption that image contours correspond to the crest of watershed segmentation is that it produces a unique solution for a particular image and can be easily adapted to any kind of digital grid or extended to dimensional images and graphs however the watershed transform typically leads to an over segmentation because the flowing process strongly relies on the quality of the gradient and the choice of seed points but very often local minima are extremely numerous for noisy images and it is a hard task to choose appropriate local minima seeds another interesting region growing approach is the multilabel fast marching method presented by sifakis and tziritas for motion analysis in video processing it is an extension of fast marching methods the contour of each region is of labeled contours are based on statistical descriptions of the propagated classes deschamps and coauthors also proposed a similar multilabel fast marching method in which the speed function is
supra note at see eg john manning constitutional structure and judicial deference to agency interpretations of agency rules colum rev hereinafter manning judicial deference robert stern review of findings of administrators judges and juries a comparative analysis harv rev see louis jaffe judicial control of administrative action with the court s independent reading of that term three years later in packard motor car co nlrb us john osborn legal philosophy and judicial review of agency statutory interpretation harv on legis executive precedent yale hereinafter merrill judicial deference cf stephen breyer judicial review of questions of law and policy admin rev courts may impute on the basis benefit from agency expertise and whether the timing of the agency interpretation suggested a fealty to congress s if for example congress indicated explicitly or implicitly that it wanted an administrative agency to resolve a particular matter if congress had not expressed any such intent the court still might assume that the agency would be the more effective agent for congress if for example the question fell within the agency s special subject matter or the agency had participated recently in the formulation of the statutory program now subject to if however there was no special reason for the court to defer then it would interpret contextual regime described recently by the court as skidmore the court would defer to an administrative agency interpret a statute itself depending upon whether it found the agency to be a more or less effective agent of congress in the case at hand the court framed the deference question as a principal agent problem and focused on allocating power to whichever entity would be the superior agent of congress court s multifactored inquiry did a very poor job allocating power among agents the uncertainty inherent in the pre chevron approach gave judges a great deal of leeway to displace the decisions of administrative agencies indeed some scholars suspected that the regime was so flexible that a court could first decide whether it liked an agency rule and then justify a deferential or non deferential standard pointed out the pre chevron case by case approach to deference was assuredly a font of uncertainty and in chevron the court shifted gears finally acknowledging that its doctrine should be structured not just to promote fidelity to a principal but also to limit judicial power vis a vis congress s other agents the chevron court for the first time based judicial defer rather than on their superior ability to implement congress s legislative instructions unlike judges must in some cases reconcile competing political interests but not on the basis of the judges personal policy preferences the court explained administrators may properly rely upon the incumbent administration s views of wise policy to inform its i is entirely appropriate the court reasoned for this political branch of the government to make such policy choices resolving the competing interests or intentionally left to be resolved by the agency charged with the administration of the statute in light of everyday to prevent politically insulated judges from substituting their views for those of politically accountable agencies the court discarded its malleable multi factored approach and substituted a more constraining more formal step i of the chevron judge s role in promoting fidelity is limited by chevron to enforcing congress s clear statutory commands at chevron step i a court is supposed to ask whether congress has directly spoken to the precise question at if the intent of congress is clear chevron instructs that is the end of the matter for the court as well as the agency must give effect to the unambiguously expressed intent of where a the court proceeds to chevron step ii at which point it merely monitors the agency s interpretation for reasonableness if the statute is ambiguous with respect to the specific issue the question for the court is whether the agency s answer is based on a permissible construction of the by limiting judicial power at step i to enforcing clear statutory commands and by framing step ii rather chevron makes it much more difficult for politically to displace the decisions of politically accountable agencies in the decades following chevron the court further elaborated on the chevron framework clearing up some of the uncertainty that surrounded it when it was first handed down and reinforcing its formal in united states mead for example the court eliminated some of the confusion regarding chevron s typically through notice and comment rule making or formal moreover where chevron does apply the court shifted in the years after chevron from asking whether congress has addressed the question at issue or formed a specific intention on that issue to asking instead whether the statutory text is clear or has a plain this shift in emphasis toward the text of a statute furthered chevron s a rather messy contextual search for legislative it also highlights the parallels between chevron s formal rule and the trend toward formal rules in the statutory interpretation literature appeals courts and scholars recently have used chevron s formal structure to clean up not only the messy contextual approach to agency interpretations of statutes that had prevailed in prior at around the time that the court had become more deferential to agencies on matters of law which is traditionally an area of judicial competence the court also had become seemingly less deferential to agencies on matters of policy where agencies seem to be on firmer in the early in motor vehicle manufacturers association of the united states state farm mutual automobile insurance co and related cases the under which judges would probe administrative exercises of delegated lawmaking authority to ensure that administrators engaged in reasoned more recently however courts and scholars have sought to regularize hard look review by incorporating it into the chevron as chevron step ii courts and scholars sensibly have included in that inquiry an examination of the agency s reasoning process to ensure that the including state farm review in step
of optisim include efficient component modeling each optical component or device is modeled independently at a level of abstraction that minimizes the while attaining the required system level simulation accuracy and precision accurate latency modeling transmission propagation and receiver delays are accumulated to provide accurate optical packet latency optoelectronic modeling as future hpc systems will consist of optical components and electronic components our proposed methodology incorporates both technologies in the network design to cost performance trade offs optoelectronic power modeling power modeling of optical interconnects evaluates the power consumed in the links the different transmitters and receiver designs and at varying bit rates expandability active passive optical components can be easily added to the simulator based on number of inputs outputs and expected functionality and extensibility the designed optical interconnect simulation framework can be easily integrated with computer architecture system simulators for distributed and parallel computers for any given optical interconnect architecture with optical transceivers wavelength assignment and traffic patterns optisim provides end users with network throughput average latency power loss power consumption and signal strength as the output in what follows the system simulation methodology of optical interconnects is explained in detail with a case study optical interconnects the proposed conceptual modeling and simulation framework for optical interconnects is shown in fig parameterized optical passive active components devices are modeled as a black box with a set of input and output functions these modular optical components are recalled from the network library to design the user specified network topology to this network model we add optical power consumption models of the link the traffic from a synthetic traffic distribution is extracted both the modeled network topology and the traffic pattern are embedded into a system simulation engine this discrete event simulation engine could be run independently or could be a part of a complete computer architecture simulator the discrete event simulator chosen was the yacsim netsim simulator developed by rice university yacsim provides several simulation objects such as processes basic utilities required for any discrete event simulator netsim is an electrical network component and simulation library yacsim and netsim can be combined to construct a wide range of direct indirect electrical interconnects using yacsim as the simulator engine we augment the netsim library with optical components and optical simulation we first explain the design of optical components and architecture and then we explain the power models components and architecture from fig the first step in designing a system level optical interconnect based simulator is to generate network components netsim includes a library of several electrical components including ports buffers electronic routing units and electronic switching units the netsim library is augmented with several active passive optical components such as wavelength converters waveguides fibers multiplexers demultiplexers and photodetectors from the link functional modeling of each of these components four relevant parameters are extracted for the system level modeling length to determine the propagation latency through the component attenuation to determine the signal loss due to component wavelength to determine the routing within a component and power to determine the power each optical component is designed with a set of input parameters optical component fan in fan out length attenuation wavelengths power where fanin provides the number of inputs to the component fanout provides the number of outputs from the component length parameter specifies the length in meters attenuation refers to the signal loss in decibels due to the component wavelengths specifies the number of channels the component can transmit and power calculates to the component in certain optical components such as wavelength converters output wavelength will be a function of the received input wavelength the power consumed is calculated based on the type of optical component specified this value is added only for active optical components such as transmitters receivers and other electro optic devices in optisim optical components are abstracted by capturing key attributes needed a single output device emitting at a given wavelength with a certain coupling loss between the laser and the coupling device therefore a laser can be designed as optical transmitter where is the power consumed by the laser and driver circuitry for example fig shows a coupler an electro optic switch and a demultiplexer while fig shows the sample code snippets consider a coupler which has the different inputs to the single output a coupler is a passive device and therefore can transmit most of the wavelengths originating from its inputs it has a largely fixed attenuation and is approximately dependent on the number of inputs log db the length of a coupler is of the order of mm therefore the coupler can now be characterized as optical coupler log db similarly a splitter has the outputs and can be characterized as log db moreover these splitters can be extended to design optical switches using some additional device parameter that can be controlled as shown from fig a electrooptic switch is shown in which the switching is performed based on the applied voltage v control these simple can be extended to form large and more complex a switching device that switches based on the transmitted wavelength similarly we have designed a waveguide fiber arrayed waveguide gratings and wavelength converters two important features of any component are nextmodule and channel both of which will be explained below from fig the next step is to connect the various network components modularly destindex here the src is the originating component that is connected to the dest component from fig the nextmodule function embedded within the design of the component is used to form this connection if multiple components have to be connected then depending on whether the concerned component is the src or the dest the srcindex and destindex is used for example consider a demultiplexer which routes the packet based on the wavelength of the optical is associated with a particular wavelength the srcindex is used to indicate the correct next module the demultiplexer s output should be connected to the third step from fig is to create simulation objects and the fourth step
signal in phase with the optical feeding we designed the electrical output pads to be almost in line with the optical input hence the electrical and optical paths between the the optical and electrical signal velocities in order to decouple the bias voltage from rf ground and to avoid the short circuit current at the termination resistor bias mim capacitors were implemented on the device the fabrication process is identical to the one described in section ii we chose a cpw on subjacent insulator for interconnection of the pds compared to air bridges the two layered as a passivation layer and the compatibility of the device to flip chip bonding techniques is enhanced since all electrical interconnections are on top of the structure the optical design starts with an estimation of the mmi dimensions using the theory of self imaging then numerical device modeling was carried out using commercially available software the insets in fig show an mmi cross sectional the dimensions gm gm we calculated a maximum power imbalance between the mmi outputs of db in dependence of the states of polarization the mmi excess loss can be defined as the ratio of the responsivity of a single pd without mmi splitter to the responsivity of a twpd thereby it is assumed that the quantum efficiency of the single device equals the efficiencies of the pds measured data on the minimum excess loss versus mmi length the experimental data were obtained by measuring the responsivity of the twpd for optimum state of polarization compared to a single pd without mmi splitter from the same wafer an excess loss of only db was determined for numerous devices which leads to a responsivity of a in the case of a twpd with dabs nm pro described as a transmission line then for an optimum performance the resulting characteristic impedance of the pd loaded cpw should equal the impedance of the environment in order to achieve an impedance matching of the capacitively loaded cpw we designed a high impedance line of by using the expressions for two layered cpw transmission lines given in the width of the center layer of gm thickness a substrate thickness of gm and a metal thickness of gm the distance d between two pds on the cpw was chosen to be or gm the optical signal velocity in the singlemode waveguide has been derived from measurements using a fabry perot resonance method and amounts to gm ps up to ghz fig shows the results of devices with d gm and dabs nm at bias the twpd with integrated termination resistor reveals an electrical output reflection of less db up to ghz by increasing the bias a slight improvement of the impedance match can be observed this behavior can be attributed to the decreasing capacitance of the individual pd in the twpd indicates that an unterminated twpd is shown which represents essentially no return loss the frequency characteristics of the photodetectors were determined by an on wafer optical heterodyne measurement setup employing a fixed and a tunable laser around gm the electrical output power was measured by a power meter with three different power sensors for the respective rf bands ghz and band in the band we used of the experimental setup was taken into account by subtracting the losses of the rf probe adapters etc from the measured values the losses were deduced from parameter measurements up to ghz we estimated the uncertainty of this calibration method to be less than db up to ghz and db for frequencies above ghz fig compares the results of two twpds with identical design but one without ghz is obtained which is mainly limited due to the interaction of the forward and the reflected backward traveling wave at higher frequencies these interference leads to strong oscillations by implementing the matching resistor at the input of the cpw the backward traveling wave is terminated and the bandwidth can be significantly enhanced up to ghz however is less affected by changes of the transmission line parameters since measurements of devices with different pd spacings between d and gm did not reveal significant changes in the frequency response up to ghz at moderate input powers the variation of the reverse bias less than did not change the response however at the bandwidth decreases from the samewaferwith dabs nm are shown all devices contain an internal matching resistor in the case of the lumped photodetector with an active area of a db bandwidth of ghz is achieved which is primarily limited due to the rc limit the responsivity amounts to a by minimizing the active area to the bandwidth is dras ghz which suggests that this pd is mainly limited by the transit time due to the optimized matching layer a notable responsivity of a with a pdl of db can be maintained the twpd consisting of four discrete pds each with an active area of exhibits a bandwidth of ghz especially at frequencies above ghz the twpd profits from a partial compensation as shown in fig for instance in the ghz range the difference in their responses amounts to db for the benefit of the twpd thus the traveling wave concept has been demonstrated however compared to the single miniaturized pd the bandwidth of the twpd turns out to be definitely smaller together with the cpw properties and the experimentally the characteristic impedance amounts to which reveals as expected from the data in fig a sufficient impedance match to the environment the phase velocity is gm ps corresponding to a velocity match between the optical and electrical signals of the bragg frequency was determined to be ghz which is sufficiently high to provide a smooth frequency response up to more than to the observed bandwidth we believe that the cpw losses noticeably exceed the expectations of about db mm at ghz for a detailed understanding further investigations of the transmission line properties stray capacitances and pd series resistance are necessary therefore the data will
imitations in photography i can never thing has been there there is a superimposition here of reality and of the past this conjunction of reality and the past is the principle of photo graphic certainty and the very basis for its specific intentionality photography s noema barthes tells us is that has been ga a ete whereas barthes takes pains to distinguish photography from other media philosopher bernard stiegler deploys barthes s analysis as the basis for an account of orthography in or straight writing has been adopted by stiegler as a paradigm for technical recording as such from writing to more recent real time literal inscription technologies like phonography and according to stiegler orthographic recording allows for the exact inscription of events and thus for their exact repetition as well as the ensuing possibility to experience the same exact thing more than once in his analysis of barthes however stiegler sug gests that photography should be distinguished less for its technical singularity than for its exemplary resistance to phonocentrism the photo will in effect place us at a remove from phonocentric temptations and it will also permit us to discover that alongside ortho graphic writing there exist other types of exact registrations an ensemble of orthothetic supports orthothetiques de la memoire what stiegler has in mind here is the host of technical recording instruments from photography to the digital computer straight positing memory supports that today function to inscribe our experience or in stiegler s neo husserlian phenomenological account the memory of experience precisely because of its dual principle the past the photograph forms something of a paradigm for orthography as such because it makes present a past that however can not be a part of my past that cannot be lived by me photography insulates the past the that has been even as it allows for its representification photography thus preserves the past in a way that avoids the phonocentric privilege of the present put another way photography precisely because its orthographic force stems from a technical source assures the autonomy of the past in the face of its inherent potential for representification in this way it forms a model that can help us conceptualize orthographic writing in its proper sense as the inscription of the past as past and not simply the copy of the voice the writing down of the phone the meaning of literal orthothesis orthothese litterale is not fidelity to the phone as self presence but the literal registration of the past as passage of the letter or of the word parole by the letter a certain mode of repeatability of the having taken place of the play of writing with his realization that it makes no difference whether the film is a fiction what johnny truant effectively pronounces is precisely the waning of the orthothetic function in general at stake here is more than simply the contamination of photographic orthothesis by the of discourse it is not just that in the age of photoshop the alleged certainty of the photographic finds itself subject to generalized suspicion in question is the very possibility for accurate recording per se the capacity of technical inscription to capture what danielewski celebrates like thomas pynchon before him as the singularity of experience in an age marked by the mas sive proliferation of apparatuses for cap turing events of all sorts from pynchon before him as the singularity of experience in an age marked by the mas sive proliferation of apparatuses for cap turing events of all sorts from the most trivial to the most monumental house of leaves asserts the nongeneralizability of experience the resistance of the singular to orthography to technical inscription of any sort this is precisely why house of leaves is particularly well suited to theorize the medial function of the novel as a corporeal palimpsest of the effects of mediation including the mediation that it performs itself house of leaves practices what it preaches always yielding one more singular experience each time it is the digital danielewski observes that most people if asked what house of leaves is about would say it s about a house which is bigger on the inside than the outside put another way the novel is about an impossible object a up house of leaves is a real ist novel about an object that for precise technical reasons cannot belong to the reality we inhabit as embodied beings even the fictional existence of this house is in some sense if we locate house of leaves at the end of a long line of antimimetic novels from laurence sterne s tristram shandy to italo calvino s if on a winter s night a traveler we can better grasp its novelty here the referential impossibility based and epistemologically focused so much as it is material at bottom it stems from an incompatibility between the topo logic of digital processing and the phenomenal dimension of human experience house of leaves is a narrative in short that forthrightly admits the void at its center so as better to foreground the role of belief in its reality claim and embodied belief is precisely the allegorical object of the hyperactive proliferation of mediation that comes to novel s central void despite its referential impossibility it remains the case that the house as katherine hayles has astutely pointed out nevertheless enters the space of representation in a quite literal sense it is the intrusion of the house into the lives of the novel s characters not to mention those of its readers that generates the narrative as such this fact should not however be taken as license to interpret the house too narrowly as the novel in which it figures while it certainly is that the house must also and more fundamentally be viewed as a figure for the otherness of the digital both as it enters thematically into the world of the novel and also as it
not take actions that are inconsistent with the plan s guidelines judge becker bolstered this argument by sagely pointing out that nothing in the language of prohibits the administrator from consulting other documents insofar as those documents do not conflict with the language of the plan indeed an administrator must consult other documents to determine whether a participant has obtained a valid qdro in the wake of egelhoff some argue that the view that the plan documents approach does not specifically address beneficiary waivers has been invalidated but this argument confuses the preemption of state law with the preemption of federal common law and there is no reason to believe egelhoff intended the latter given erisa s broad preemption clause there will be many cases in which erisa relates to an issue but does not specifically address the issue this is arises rejecting the efficiency and uniformity of administration argument the efficiency and uniformity of administration argument claims that plan administrators will be overburdened by having to look at property settlement agreements and decide if they contain a valid waiver of a beneficiary s rights to erisa plan benefits there are two primary counterarguments to this view first such additional administrator must investigate the marital history of a participant and determine whether any domestic relations orders exist that could affect the distribution of benefits second since there appears to have been no significant litigation in the circuits adopting the federal common law approach over plan administrators improper interpretation of waivers perhaps the task presents no serious difficulty for plan administrators if administrative burdens are minimal uniformity of administration argument provides little support for choosing the minority rule over the federal common law approach rejecting the anti alienation argument the circuits adopting the federal common law approach have rejected the anti alienation argument by asserting that a waiver is not an assignment or alienation waiver does not involve a transfer of rights it is merely a relinquishment the most plausible counterargument is that in certain situations a waiver combined with a subsequent beneficiary designation functions as an indirect assignment judge easterbrook noted this possibility in his fox valley dissent the designated beneficiary may give away the money the instant she receives it waiver is an anticipatory gift to whoever is next in line under the fund s rules judge fuentes dissenting in mcgowan recognized the problem with this argument such a reading allows valid waivers indeed the majority would appear to prohibit all waivers even though in many cases there will be no denomination at issue an examination of erisa policy further supports a rejection of the anti alienation argument in estate of altobelli international business machines corp the fourth circuit observed that waiver is consistent with the erisa s purposes we agree with the seventh circuit that the and alienation clause does not apply to a beneficiary s waiver as the supreme court has noted the purpose of the clause is to safeguard a stream of income for pensioners to bar a waiver in favor of the pensioner himself would not advance that purpose furthermore the courts have interpreted the legislative intent behind the anti alienation provision to be the protection of plan benefits from creditors and unscrupulous predators preying upon gratification in exchange for the long term benefits erisa is designed to guarantee these concerns are not nearly as strong with respect to waiver as they are with respect to assignment where the benefits are transferred to a third party the anti alienation argument does not provide support for a bright line rule preventing the recognition of all beneficiary waivers of erisa plan benefits the optimal approach waivers of erisa plan benefits because it is in accord with erisa s statutory language and provides equitable results consistent with the erisa s purpose moreover from a practical perspective the federal common law approach is the best of the available options and does not generate the absurd consequences of the minority rule a the federal common law approach provides equitable results the minority rule because it is consistent with the overriding purpose of erisa to ensure that employees receive the pensions and other benefits that they were led to believe they would receive upon retirement by adhering to this principle erisa is intended to generate equitable outcomes an aim that is reflected in both the legislative history and the statute itself the legislative history indicates that erisa is concerned plans in their vital role of providing retirement income erisa s titled congressional findings and declaration of policy clearly states that congress enacted the statute because it is desirable in the interests of employees and their beneficiaries for the protection of the revenue of the united states and to provide for the free flow of commerce that minimum standards be provided assuring soundness the retirement equity act of confirms erisa s equitable focus by stating that rea s purpose in amending erisa was to pro vide for greater equity under private pension plans for workers and their spouses the greatest benefit of the federal common law approach is that it furthers erisa s primary purpose by ensuring that plan participants any claim to retirement benefits now seeks those benefits at the expense of a surviving spouse the deceased spouse and the surviving spouse likely planned their retirement with the expectation that the surviving spouse would receive the benefits at issue upon the deceased spouse s death in contrast the ex spouse could not reasonably expect to receive the benefits after having waived any claim to them applying the of receiving the benefits actually receives them there are several colorable responses to the expectations argument first one might argue that although erisa s primary purpose is to ensure that participants and beneficiaries receive the benefits they are expecting the person whose expectations might otherwise be frustrated is the surviving spouse and a surviving spouse is neither a the fact that erisa places the spouses of participants in a protected class the qpsa and qjsa demonstrate congress s intent to protect participants spouses moreover the argument ignores the fact that not recognizing the waiver would
a re ranking of the top three predicted pockets by the degree of conservation of the closest surface residues the average conservation of the residues within a of the center of a predicted pocket is not a purely geometric approach to pocket prediction as it considers conservation scores obtained from the consurf hssp database as an additional source of information a refinement of the pre dictions made by surfnet using conservation scores for re ranking is also available from a subsequent recent study finder evaluate shape and physicochemical properties for identification of ligand binding envelopes an energy based method for protein pocket detection is q sitefinder which uses the interaction energy between the protein and a van der waals probe to detect energetically favorable binding sites in this study we present a new geometric pocket prediction comparisons a similar approach was pursued by stahl et al with the aim to classify matrix metalloproteinase active sites the pocket detection routine is based on a regular rectangular grid and employs a sophisticated scanning process to locate protein surface depressions the scanning procedure comprises the calculation of buriedness of probe points installed in the grid to determine index the enhanced information content of both the buriedness and the shape of a predicted binding pocket is summarized in a shape descriptor this descriptor has been designed to conduct automated comparisons between different binding site conformations the essential steps of our method can be summed up as follows calculation of buriedness values of grid probes the structure to find potential binding sites preparation of shape descriptors to enable comparisons of different pocket shapes materials and computational methods protein data collection to evaluate the accuracy of binding site predictions performed by pocketpicker we used a test set comprising ligand receptor complexes from the rcsb protein database compare success rates of pocket predictions by the programs cast pass surfnet ligsite ligsitecs and ligsitecsc we used this protein collection to validate the predictions made by pocketpicker compared to the findings of these algorithms all protein structures were downloaded from the rcsb pdb database and ligands denoted with the het identifier were unbound structures were aligned with the corresponding complex using the align command of pymol structural alignments were performed to compare active site predictions for the unbound structures with the actual binding pocket given by the protein ligand complex structures discussed by sotriffer and coworkers this selection contained nine structures of human aldose reductase the mutant and the double mutant additional four structures were from the porcine enzyme and carried one mutation each and the crystal sequence identity of the reference and had resolution of at least a coordinates of and were rotated around the axis to meet the orientation of the other aldose reductase structures pocket predictions were performed for structures in complex with the cofactor nadph or nadp all other ligands were removed prior to computation protein adjusted to its spatial extent the pocket detection routine is focused on grid points that are located closely above the protein surface grid points that exceed a maximal distance of a to the closest protein atom or are situated under the protein surface are excluded from further calculations note that these areas can be omitted from further investigation since they are not to examine their accessibility on the protein surface the buriedness value indicates whether a grid point is situated next to a convex part of the surface or locates in a less accessible part of the surface this information can be used for the identification of clefts and surface concavities a straightforward clustering algorithm is applied to combine neighboring grid points with an appropriate buriedness parts of the protein surface cavities and pockets identified in this manner are afterwards sorted by the number of the consisting grid points to specify the largest existing protein concavity calculation of buriedness the buriedness index is calculated by investigating the of vectors in three dimensional space is not a trivial problem and resembles the task of equally distributing points on a sphere in fact there are only three completely symmetric arrangements of points on the sphere the vertices of the tetrahedron the octahedron and the icosahedron are equally distributed on a commemorated vectors on each face these newly added vectors are elongated toward the surface of a virtual sphere to adopt the length of the primary vectors of the octahedron running along the cartesian axes the vectors created in this manner can be reflected in the z plane which is required for a subsequent part of the computation the accessibility of a grid probe is calculated by scanning a whenever a protein atom is encountered within the dimensions of a search ray the buriedness index of the probe is increased by one and the next direction vector is regarded as a result the calculated indices range from to indicating a growing buriedness of the probe in a protein the clustering of grid probes for pocket identification is restricted to those arranged by octahedron triangulation and scaled to the length of one search rays scanning the molecular environment of a grid probe are arranged along the direction vectors and scaled to the proposed dimensions a neighboring protein atom is detected during scanning when the length of its orthogonal projection d onto the actual direction vector does not the search ray the distance between and the actual grid point can be determined as the length of the direction vector scaled by factor was calculated as follows the scanning process is summarized in figure position vectors of all atoms and grid points use the cartesian origin as their reference point in order to avoid distance calculations to all protein denoting the geometric center of a cuboid in a first step neighboring centroids are detected in an extended search radius along the actual direction vector distance calculations are then performed solely to protein atoms assigned to the cuboids of the regarded centroids comparison of pocket shapes a descriptor was designed to describe the shape of a coordinates
and communication environment refers to the personal interaction with different business stakeholders such as co workers management and clients mental task content refers to mental activities that of the design of the job physical task content refers to activities that use physical properties of the body such as strength endurance range of motion or agility in order to execute the job experienced compatibility four domains are included as part of the experienced compatibility as follows effort refers to the level of workload perceived by the person to complete the requirements of the job health as a result of the execution of the job performance refers to the influence of reaching or not reaching the standards of productivity quality and safety set by the job psychological impact relates to the satisfaction or dissatisfaction caused by the overall work environment it reflects the perceived effect of environment variables on the psychological state of the person the difference between acting and experienced compatibility results in different outcomes that can function in the human at work system cooper and marshall conducted a literature review linking environmental and individual sources of stress to physical and mental disease or illness they identified individual differences in coping with stress such as level of anxiety level of neuroticism tolerance for ambiguity and coronary prone behavioral pattern cole and rivilis identified individual factors such as demographic variables age work style anthropometry lifestyle prior exposure to health problems past history and social elements all of which seem to be associated with stress health disorders symptoms of occupational ill health are diastolic blood pressure cholesterol level heart rate smoking depressive mood escapist drinking job dissatisfaction and reduced aspiration among others most of the studies use two primary indices of occupational disease coronary heart diseases and mental ill health leboeuf yde stated reduced aspiration among others most of the studies use two primary indices of occupational disease coronary heart diseases and mental ill health leboeuf yde stated that individual and genetic factors should be taken into account for health analysis they suggest that the identification of populations at risk would contribute to identify groups of people that are more sensitive to strain disorders system measurement the wcm has developed a few indicators to comprise the state of the system and monitor changes in the system across the spectrum of work environment variables genaidy et al defined the scales to measure energy expenditure or demand level and energy replenishment or energizer level those levels are measured using a point scale genaidy et al reported the demand as a vehicle to record the demand and energizer coordinates for each of work characteristics and gave examples on how to measure the demands and energizers briefly each work characteristic such as time pressure is assessed in terms of demand or energizer as univariate measures genaidy et al pointed out that the reliability of the majority of the scales were good to excellent and fewer scales were in the moderate range the main the wcm has been to develop a quantitative model expressing the relationship between demand and energizer levels studies in physical performance show that there is no linear relationship between energy supply and performance for example figure shows a relationship between oxygen uptake and exercise rather than a steady line there are different phases during the cycle from immediate increase to gradual increase and ultimately to the steady state the assumption that there is a linear relationship between intake and depletion will result in suboptimal conditions that overlook the transition between different levels of energy that are unique to human features such as in this case metabolism starting from the assumption of non linearity abdallah et al introduced a solution for work compatibility based on an expert model in this case the values of are introduced in a matrix if the demand level is less than or equal to the energizer level the level of compatibility is determined by the demand level if the demand level is greater than the energizer level the level of compatibility is determined by the imbalance of energizer and demand levels special conditions apply to extreme values which represents very low compatibility and which might not be a sustainable area those rules result in the the work compatibility values consist of five levels namely very low low moderate high very high it should be noted that the levels of work compatibility are different from the levels of demands and energizers because work compatibility is a function of both demands and energizers not necessarily as one to one transformation this matrix is an extension of the matrix introduced by the demand control model for a group of work factors the mean value of demand and energizer levels will not be a discrete variable for this purpose the resultant matrix is represented as a section in the plane in which different compatibility levels define five contours on the plane the operating zones are areas on the plane that represent different performance areas not meeting meeting and exceeding performance the performance will be determined by the region into which most measures the distribution of the mean score for each work area across all respondents two regions are set as a high demand region where work characteristics have higher expenditure than replenishment and a high energizer region where work characteristics have higher energy replenishment than expenditure or are the same starting from the optimal point the force vectors are drawn representing each of replenishment than expenditure or are the same starting from the optimal point the force vectors are drawn representing each of the two regions the combination of the two vectors provides the solution the state of the system is defined in terms of yield ratio and efficiency ratio the yield ratio is inversely proportional to the magnitude of addition of the two vector forces the efficiency ratio is inversely proportional between the two forces salem et al s model resembles the cognitive model developed by vroom in which valences and expectancies are
zealand s market identity the iconic link between kiwifruit and their it is suggested that gm commercial production of any crop or food product in new zealand might adversely impact on sales of kiwifruit because of guilt by association zespri s submission to the royal commission is notable for its single focus on market issues and the repetition of key terms representing the importance of the markets interestingly the deliberate simplicity of the zespri policy was identified as a rhetorical strategy that was less likely to and more likely to be understood unequivocally by international consumers indeed a zespri spokesperson states it s important that we have a simple clear statement of policy it was important to us that we influenced the royal commission but i do nt know that we want to be out there banging a drum on a global basis because all banging drums does is draws more attention to potential flaws in your argument management strategy in relation to gm was to minimize any possibility that their international markets might link the industry with gm practices or products to avoid the possibility that these markets would reject new zealand kiwifruit zespri chose deliberate tactics of silence rather than engaging significantly in debate about gm in new zealand or even within the industry the industry was keen to prevent misunderstanding of their ge free the advantages or disadvantages of gm per se so that the concept of gm would not be associated with kiwifruit in the minds of their consumers this was particularly important since following the release of the new fruit variety zespri gold in international customers and consumers were frequently concerned that the new cultivar was the result of gm we ve had to state time and time and time again that it zespri gold kiwifruit involved an early media statement that describes the kiwifruit industry policy on gm is clearly market driven in that it comments at length on consumer concerns in international markets yet the first paragraph of the statement also aligns the industry s caution over gm with its commitment to safeguarding the environment kiwifruit new zealand has aligned its research and development policy with its production practices by rejecting any involvement in genetic engineering as cheney and tompkins have argued words or paragraphs positioned first or last in a document can sometimes be seen as a rhetorical strategy indicating the essence of an argument in the media statement quoted above zespri immediately draws on environmental discourses to facilitate identification with this is also consistent with the industry commitment to sustainability zespri is a member of the sustainable business network and acknowledges growing concerns about sustainability and environmental issues in new zealand and internationally in the next two paragraphs of the zespri media statement the food safety concerns not producing gm kiwifruit for example as part of our commitment to further strengthening food safety practices kiwifruit new zealand has resolved not to fund research include within its inventory or market genetically modified kiwifruit the kiwifruit industry sees the introduction of gm foods as a potential risk in losing market share because food safety is a major concern in europe and japan markets the handling of food scares has created significant consumer distrust of both food industries and government and frequently increased support for policies which minimise damage to the environment the media statement can be seen as a tactic to reassure these major international markets that new zealand kiwifruit are not gm in this positioning the kiwifruit industry s gm policy draws on neoliberal political discourses underpinned by rational choice theory and public choice theory rational choice theory argues that in a free market consumers will make choices based on self interest using the instrumental rationality of cost benefit analysis and public choice theory further argues that public policy decisions should be made with the least possible violation of individual self interest in this sense consumer becomes conflated and kiwifruit consumers are constructed as public policy decision makers the neoliberal political and economic discourses drawn on by the kiwifruit industry gm policy are those that already dominate new zealand s social culture as albrow suggested rationality can be clearly linked to the framework of knowledge and belief evident in the symbolic systems of a particular culture and time the industry policy is thus strategically positioned as politically credible consistent with government policy and likely to find favor with government and to foster identification with the policy by industry stakeholders by drawing on these normalized discourses the policy is also strategically positioned to influence the attitudes of the voting public and other corporate industry and science interest groups the market rationality for gm public policy decision making they prioritize a macro economic approach which privileges the economic value of new zealand s primary production industries and draw on neoliberal discourses emphasizing public choice and rational choice to highlight the importance of international customer perceptions the historical value of new zealand s primary produce exports is further emphasized in the submission to the royal commission arguing that not be at the expense of existing successful export earnings adverse consumer opinion caused by the perception of new zealand as an exporter of gm foods could jeopardize a significant proportion of the kiwifruit industry s contribution to the national economy this rhetorical positioning suggests that market values are prioritized above other concerns a strategy of enhancement that is an attempt to highlight the when market values are taken for granted as a sea of neutrality the market itself is exempted from moral judgement yet the kiwifruit industry additionally acknowledges food safety and environmental concerns that suggest some ambivalence about the primary role of a free market approach to gm policy during the period of this research investigation the kiwifruit industry has has become the kiwifruit market leader internationally in the documents referring to the industry position on gm this hard won status is specifically identified valued and respected highlighting an overall theme that centers on the
authors would like to thank the staff of the cusichaca by nerc small research grant no and nerc radiocarbon dating allocation the authors would like to thank archaeo scape royal holloway geography department for a grant to purchase the radiocarbon dates from beta analytic inc and waikato radiocarbon dating laboratory contributed information to this paper during her nerc esrc studentship neolithization a dutch case study abstract multiple detailed settlement excavations in the delfland region in the dutch coastal area have shown that local communities of the hazendonk group chose to follow different trajectories in an advanced phase of the neolithization process the rijswijk community led a fully agrarian life while the others extensively exploited the rich aquatic resources the multi us long continuity up to the time when the dune on which it lay became submerged and a strong sense of collectiveness represented by its fences and concentrated wells whereas other house sites were short lived and wide apart this demonstrates that the neolithization as a whole should be seen as the outcome of small scale interaction processes between the native population and the farming communities in the loess zone further south few decades a long series of excavations has step by step enhanced our understanding of the neolithization process in the lower rhine area the western part of the large fluvial plain to the north of the loess zone we now have a picture of a long lasting static frontier between farming communities on the southern loess soils and communities further north which very gradually over a period of roughly two millennia incorporated the new achievements into their own way of life in a from the late mesolithic via the swifterbant culture to the hazendonk group there was no case of any interruption in cultural development quite the contrary the whole process was characterized by marked continuity it was no package deal but a long succession of adoptions beginning with technology in the form of ground stone woodcutting tools pottery and large blade implements followed by subsistence elements first this turned the late mesolithic subsistence system into what is known as an extended broad spectrum economy other aspects changed too a new deposition tradition evolved with depositions being made both near the settlements and out in the wilderness beyond them and more attention was paid to the burial of the deceased in formal cemeteries it is generally assumed that the population became more sedentary in the context of the neolithization process increased in size and more socially differentiated until recently however we had only very little evidence of changes in the settlement system and hence social organization in our study area it would seem that hodder s domus agrios contrast does not hold for the communities in the lower rhine area fig location of sites referred to in the text the problem on local communities obtained in excavations this evidence is dominated by information provided by sites in the wetlands of the rhine we use delta because those sites are so very well preserved in marked contrast to sites on the surrounding sandy soils the sites cover the entire expanse of the vast dutch wetlands are characterized by diverse palaeoecological conditions and most probably also had different functions they enable us to follow the entire process in its spatial in particular with respect to the introduction of stock keeping and crop cultivation two key questions however are how representative these sites are of the period from which they date and the area in which they lie and what role the local communities played in the process the neolithization process was after all not a sauce that was poured over the people as it were but a process of interaction involving the choices made by people living on either side of the the agricultural world in prehistoric times too people did not just observe or express the rules that applied in their society in a stereotype manner they were people of flesh and blood with their own desires and preferences who made choices within the margins applying in their community due to the restricted nature of our archaeological evidence those choices can usually not or virtually not be specified recent concentrated and intensive research carried out within the of the dutch delfland region however provided the conditions under which we were able to gain an understanding of rather unexpected differences in the adoption of various aspects of neolithic life different local practices in the sense defined by bourdieu generally referred to as agency in the archaeological literature in relation to the general principle of neolithization the concept of agency is here used in an extended way to apply to than individuals this can be justified by the notion that choices made by and in such a group which will have consisted of a few households will have been based on the consensus of a few individuals or even one dominant person the stage of the hazendonk group appears to be particularly suitable for such a study because it coincided with a turning point in the neolithization process in geographical terms between the michelsberg culture of the southern loess belt and the late of the northern sandy soils and in chronological terms between the classical phase of the swifterbant culture around bc and the phase of the vlaardingen group there are more than enough arguments for interpreting all the sites as permanent settlements of complete households the sites all had the same basic function so there is no case of any functional differentiation nevertheless there are some conspicuous differences in particular in the composition of the faunal assemblages and in burial rites thanks to their wetland conditions these sites are of high informational value the sites were buried and have been preserved in a sealed state as it were including differentiated data on landscape and subsistence based on organic remains and last but not least the sites have been recently excavated according to the latest standards we now
led to the lawmaking was induced internally and regionally but lawmaking itself was triggered externally and through quasi coercive since indonesia was highly vulnerable to global institutions and since those institutions had the enormous leverage of conditionality over release of loans been compelled to enact law issue regulations and erect institutional frameworks in bewildering profusion in part the struggle is ideological because the reforms pit a universalistic model of bankruptcy law which would allow pure market forces to determine the fates of indonesian corporations against nationalist identity which abhors the loss of indonesian control over its flagship corporations and critical economic sectors internalized within the bankruptcy a veiled ethnic and political struggle within indonesia between the chinese whose businesses dominate many sectors of the economy and the ethnic indonesians who dominate politics many ethnic chinese view the corporate restructuring reforms as a political weapon to undermine chinese business dominance on both counts each reform internalizes conflicts that have not been resolved reforms can also be seen in the ambiguities or inefficacies of laws and regulations themselves much to the surprise of foreign observers some early cases foundered in the courts on the seemingly straightforward definition of debts no one anticipated that newly appointed ad hoc judges would refuse to serve it was expected that corruption would undermine court reforms though the imf underestimated and jitf reveal a connection between diagnostic failures and mismatch of players the diagnosis of the problem was an amalgam of ifi ideology and local knowledge by indonesian academics and practitioners who brokered prescriptions for reform the short time horizons forced by crisis events and inherent biases in the diagnostic phase of reforms completely excluded integral players in practice many private banks and the chinese commercial the prescription itself was substantially driven by ifi models although it got some support from an earlier indonesian report since the diagnosis of the problem reflected the biases of the professionals and those actors that were parties to reform it is not surprising that the prescriptions that were translated into statutes and regulations were effectively resisted by excluded players who moved the grounds of struggle from lawmaking to implementation where they used great ingenuity inertia professional expertise and raw financial power to frustrate the imf induced reforms at every point the politics of implementation therefore became a site of outright resistance in two respects when the government of indonesia had no capacity to resist external pressures it shifted the battleground to one where it had more advantage and when domestic whatever weapons they had available legal and extralegal in the courts and restructuring agencies together the ideological contradictions mismatch of players in implementation and lawmaking and an exclusion of certain facts and perspectives from the diagnosis intensified the indeterminacies of laws enacted and institutions constructed in crisis circumstances with the as each cycle of lawmaking seeks to close the gap between practice and lawmakers intent the peculiar circumstances of deep financial crisis and intense ifi intervention make the indonesian and korean cases particularly useful for analytic purposes because they both the exemplify a rapid sequence of cycles that in less stressful circumstances might have taken decades to unfold powerful economic pressures create time pressures that in turn because the time pressures themselves led to faulty diagnosis failure to bring all parties into lawmaking and insufficient time to permit orderly implementation korea the korean crisis contrasts with indonesia in some important ways in korea s economy was the eleventh largest in the world and korea itself had recently become a member of the oecd korea possessed a highly developed banking sector even if it was heavily controlled by the korea s financial crisis was triggered by foreign currency shortage at the real epicenter of the crisis were debt ridden firms and especially the chaebols the large usually family controlled conglomerates that had driven the korean economic miracle quickly with major law firms in seoul the banking sector academics and economists judges and government officials although again not extensively with the corporate sector or debtors compared to indonesia the ifis could take advantage of korea s well developed scholarly and research institutions such as the korea development institute ample high quality data and government officials with us universities said a senior world bank official who was on the original korea crisis team clearly we recognized that it was not going to be possible to be prescriptive at that early stage about what it is that was needed to be done in an area as complex as insolvency but what we wanted to do was to first of all gain an initial validation of the premise and then to sketch out some actions that could be taken within a very short period of time to both start to ease constraints on the insolvency system and to sketch out further work that could be done over following months because we were anticipating as in fact eventuated a succession of operations each of which could build on the preceding one it needed to unleash a reform process and so really what we were doing was identifying quickly which direction the reform process should go itself the courts and out of court solutions to corporate restructuring it was immediately obvious that none of korea s three bankruptcy laws were much in consultations with the imf and world bank the korean government agreed upon a series of reforms but in contrast to indonesia the reforms were made the subject of conditionalities only in general terms at the outset thereafter the ifis depended on persuasion and modeling reforms are particularly interesting because they reveal a fundamental conflict between economists and lawyers views of law s capacity to effect change the economists dominated the ministry of finance and economy the government ministry that had spear headed korea s extraordinary economic development the lawyers staffed the ministry of justice the courts and as mofe nevertheless would be primary implementers of a reformed insolvency regime each profession had its own theory about
the skewed angled death s head at the base of the picture is a momento mori to which even the most wealthy and educated of renaissance men will ultimately succumb berg s lyric suite similar to schumann s encrypting many of his works with ciphers has a coded subtext a secret personal meaning that underpins the work s structural plan and overt expressive if expansions of meaning emerge from purposeful modifications of technique then we can identify several ways that composers and other and complex with formal layers superimposed within the structure as in medieval sacred polyphony with its polytextual motets or in high gothic architecture and through the mastery and personal interpretation of existing norms of compositional technique as with haydn or in a different way stravinsky the most radical route that mahler chooses is a kind of seconda prattica oppositional interpolative contrasting different norms of expression but whose elements are left deliberately stark and confrontational klimt comes to mind here as much as mahler in delineating the strata that formed mahler s highly individual style floros identified beethoven wagner schumann and berlioz as forming mahler s compositional superimposed on this are formal and affective patterns of marches waltzes and haunting folk like melodies that are like archetypes drawn and grafted onto the symphonic tradition but the fit may nevertheless not be exact and at times the imported material sticks out and grates against its context when interpolation occurs nearer the end of a movement as suspension or subversion rather than at the center it poses different questions about meaning and closure in the slow movement of the fourth symphony the strophes and interludes which have gradually increased in impassioned and return to the movement s quiet serene opening character this almost mystical return is underscored by pure root position diatonic harmonies in the softest dynamics momentum dissolves away to virtual stasis over a sustained glimmering major suddenly this luminous dissolution is cracked open by an enormous powerful major outburst with timpani and double basses repeatedly hammering out an open fourth to just dimmed and a diminuendo arcs from to then even more softly comes a return to the sustained major harmony over its dominant which will link into and anticipate the finale the climax of this intense outburst is the pounding open fourth in the timpani and pizzicato basses but as well as the culmination of major interpolation it is a rhythmic diminution of the pizzicato bass line that intense dramatic focus the articulated major pizzicato motif both gathers up the preceding outburst and refers back to the opening of the movement background has become foreground prior to the major interpolation the opening pizzicato bass figure had already undergone two stages of rhythmic diminution the first in the minor episode and the second in the anmutig rather than time just prior to the major outburst fragments of the opening motif pianissimo pizzicato cellos and basses set up implications for the movement s closure or at least dissolution these implications suspended by the interpolation are fulfilled with the return of major and the dissolving out into stasis at the end of the movement if the major section could be considered unanticipated from what has preceded it nevertheless yields a remarkable range of connections across the work it links back to the minor episode and the leidenschaftlich section in major earlier the but on a larger scale it refers back to the very opening of the work to the chiming open fifths ambiguous as either minor or an implied dominant of minor major until they resolve onto the but as a kind of prescience it anticipates the tonal planning of the finale which will open in major and close in major by means of highly polarized contrast the major outburst acts as a foil to the serene stillness of the major music it both disrupts and leads back to but it also opens up a resonant network of associations within the movement and the work that links to both its past and its future the original meaning of the term subversion as provoking a change of direction from underneath rather than deconstructing the structural processes in a movement or work as fractures in the musical surface these interpolations challenge the paradigms of logical continuity and tonal coherence that brahms had been at such pains to shore up against beethoven s more radical innovations and the looser formal structures of but mahler s refractive techniques are more than dislocations in the logical fulfillment of expectations or dramatic techniques of subversion surprise or digression in symphonic action like geological fault lines these cracks in the musical surface open up multiple and forking paths of time which provide a plurality of possible continuations whose meanings can only be garnered in characteristic not only of music and literature but are features prevalent in society at large in identifying the defining features of contemporary social structures anthony giddens has described anxiety disconnection risk taking and the plurality of histories as distinct from a single line of history as prime characteristics of where social processes or musical structures are rendered ambiguous or indeterminate as nietzsche had so strongly advocated showing both his and mahler s essential modernity such changes may have been effected through radical disruption or like the distant reverberations of cowbells in the first movement of the sixth symphony filtered through the resonance of such reconstructed meanings stem from a post facto understanding that revises and updates implications through suspension they differ from the ongoing digressive procedures janet schmalfeldt discusses in works of the tonal repertory such as chopin s minor etude op where the final resolving cadence is delayed three times by a diversionary tactic related in principle like the beethoven example to the interrupted cadence as the means of delay in arriving at the final cadence chopin s tonal digression like the haydn embedded in it whereas for the most part mahler s interpolations are not through the referencing of sounds of nature windows are opened onto the external physical world but those references are remote sublimated idealized typologies of sound
to if not to compose sections of this book of the authorship of book i should make readers more alert to the possibility of multiple authorship in utopia in the letter cited above for example consider what immediately follows erasmus reference to marliano s accusation there erasmus refers to that dialogue of julius and peter as though the controversial work julius exclusus were a text authored by someone else as huizinga informs us the fear of retribution in the early days of the reformation of a text or in retrospect to have regretted publishing a text that proved controversial he most sedulously denied his authorship of the julius dialogue for fear of the consequences even to more and always in such a way as to avoid saying outright i did not write it in a convincingly exasperated tone erasmus complains to more will these slanderers never stop they leave no stone unturned to do harm to erasmus they ve convinced outrageous little book was written by me and they would have convinced many more if i had not blunted the edge of their treacherous lies erasmus denial of authoring julius to his english friend may have been intended more for public consumption than as a legitimate grievance to more for kelley sowards argues more had intimate and certain knowledge that his friend had written the dutch humanist s complicity between them even in their private correspondence both were capable of carrying on an elaborate subterfuge at the very least erasmus denial of any hand in the writing of book i followed by an artful dodging of having authored a text that he is now widely thought to have written should raise some suspicions about his trustworthiness in such matters erasmus certainly had reasons for disassociating himself from charges he was the author of potentially controversial speaking of in praise of folly huizinga observes that erasmus airy play with the texts of holy scripture had been too venturesome for many such as martin van dorp erasmus writes in that he would not have published the book if he had known so many would be offended during the time that nusquama utopia was being edited more himself writes to erasmus admonishing him to be careful about publishing in my dearest erasmus who have formed a conspiracy in our midst to read what you write in a very different frame of mind and this horrible plan of theirs gives me some concern do not therefore be in a hurry to publish as for what you have published already since it is too late for second thoughts i would urge you one thing at least you know my devotion and concern for you i do beg and beseech you to lose no time in going through and least possible scope for misrepresentation more proceeds to warn erasmus that henry standish and a formidable following of franciscan friars have pledged to sift carefully through erasmus writings for any hint of heresy no friend to such friars erasmus certainly had cause to avoid being tarred by attacks from them marliano may very well have arrived at his conclusion about erasmus authorship toward the mendicant friar and erasmus own derisory attitudes expressed in the antibarbari this would not be the only time that material and concerns from erasmus own writing had crossed over into utopia wootton finds the bond between these two friends so close and interchangeable that in taking up the adages you will find yourself suddenly entirely unexpectedly on a voyage to utopia hexter s in utopia when hythloday speaks it is often in the voice of erasmus as hexter points out in raphael s expose of court politics all these wiles and machinations of the french king seem to be a watered down version and adaptation of the magnificent confession made by julius ii in julius exclusus erasmus prudence in dangerous times seems to have led him to speculation following the publication of one of the more popular fabricated texts of the day johannis reuchlin s letters of obscure men francis griffin stokes tallies at least twenty eight critics who attributed the scandalous work to one writer or another erasmus among the underscoring erasmus caution over authorial attributions at the threshold of the reformation stokes points out that even though erasmus preface of the third edition there is good reason to think that the sensitive scholar demurred to being depicted dans cette galere he knew that great events were imminent and he felt some doubt as to the part he would be found playing in them it seemed scarcely prudent to commit himself unreservedly to a party who expressed their opinions with such heedless exuberance in retrospect erasmus caution was well advised for as stokes notes euchlin s satire gave the victory to reuchlin over the begging friars and to luther over the court of rome more is identified along with fisher colet linacre latimer and tunstall among the englishmen of light and leading who supported reuchlin against the attacks of what hamilton describes as those mendicant fraternities who under the mantle of humility reigned omnipotent over the christian world enjoyed playing tricks not only on their contemporary audience but also on readers yet to come as an editor erasmus was not above jesting even in the hallowed print shop george faludy recounts an incident of such humor that occurred in arriving at last in basle he entered the printing shop of johannes joke by delivering a letter from himself to froben introducing himself as an intimate friend of the humanist and explaining that erasmus had entrusted him with the business of publishing his books so that whatever he did froben could take as being done on the authority of erasmus himself then to froben s horror he set to work as if he were taking over the himself by himself one wonders how far he might have gone when the authority had actually been granted by another party his good friend more certainly
solutions potential pathogens of keratitis such as aureus serratia spp and pseudomonas aeruginosa were cultured from the tested samples the predominant contaminants were serratia spp followed by aureus acinetobacter spp and flavobacterium spp aureus was the most frequently isolated contaminant case extracts were associated with the highest incidence of mixed contamination more than one species of ocular pathogen was isolated from of contaminated case extracts up to three different species of bacteria being found in a single case extract sample mixed contamination was observed in and contaminated lens extracts and contaminated contaminated they were found either in both lens extract and case extract or from both case extract and solution but not from lens extract and lens care solution of the same subject lens and case extracts correlation usually involved aureus whereas case extracts and solutions involved either aeruginosa or serratia marcescens of our subjects had at least one contaminated item and at least one item associated with ocular pathogenic microorganisms the contamination rates of lens extract case extract and lens care solution by ocular pathogenic microorganisms were and comparison between occasional and regular users contact lenses having less opportunity to practice hands and lower eyelids are the recognized sources of contaminants and contaminants from these sites may easily be transported onto contact lenses and lens cases through hand contacts significant differences in the number of days of lens wear per week were found between subjects with or contact lenses used by occasional wearers were more likely to be associated with ocular pathogenic microorganisms this may be because contact lenses that are left in the case without being used for a period of time provide a more favorable environment for the attachment of microorganisms and build up of biofilm there was an indication that the lens care solutions of but this did not reach significance experienced contact lens users tend to become complacent over time and may keep their solutions for a longer period after opening however the results did not indicate such an effect with respect to the contamination rates of lens and case extracts using saline or mps to rinse lenses before use was of contact lenses helps to prevent contamination of contact lenses by helping to remove contaminants more effectively before inserting the lens into the eye although not reaching statistical significance regular use of cleaner or enzymatic protein removal appeared to have a protective effect comparison of contamination rates of lens extracts and but this did not reach statistical significance both discarding solution and air drying lens cases and regular cleaning of lens cases appeared to have a protective effect though not reaching statistical significance surprisingly regular replacement of the lens case did not significantly reduce contamination although not statistically significant was simply used for rinsing whereas mps are designed for multiple purposes including cleaning rinsing and storing of contact lenses generally contamination is associated with handling so mps solutions would be more likely to be contaminated than saline even though they contain disinfectant this suggests that there is a need for better handling skills the analyses was somewhat limited by our sample size as only nine of subjects had contaminated lens extracts and had contaminated lens care solutions nearly all subjects with contaminated lens extracts were also found to have contaminated case extracts while most subjects with contaminated solutions also had contaminated cases this case and lens care solutions this was further supported by the frequent isolation of the same species of bacteria from the lens extract and the case extract and from the case extract and the solution used by the same contact lens wearers however no such correlation was found between contact lenses and the lens care solution our results imply that the lens case in this study included pathogens which may induce contact lens associated microbial keratitis normal flora of the ocular surfaces the gastrointestinal tract the skin and the environment serratia spp cns and aureus were the most common contaminants isolated as in the study conducted by mayo et al serratia spp were the mps solutions in addition some organisms may be able to utilize lens solution ingredients as nutrients whilst saline would not provide such nutrient supply other potential keratitis inducing pathogens such as aureus and pseudomonas spp were also isolated from the contaminated samples it is worth noting that only a few subjects had items the absence of aeruginosa may be because this organism is particularly targeted by manufacturers of mps who are aware of its pathogenic potential contaminants including acinetobacter spp flavobacterium spp and xanthomonas maltophilia which are widely distributed in nature and gastrointestinal tract flora such as escherichia coli and klebsiella spp were isolated from the lens case was the most frequently contaminated item and up to three different species of bacteria were found in some contaminated case extracts this may be because contact lens wearers usually pay less attention to case hygiene than lens hygiene according to our interview over half of our subjects did not discard lens care solution and air dried their lens cases lens cases regularly this allows the lens cases to become a stationary environment which is more favorable for the formation of biofilm than contact lenses biofilm on the case surface provides attachment sites for the adhesion of further microorganisms and physically protects bacteria from disinfectants lipener et al and velasco and bermudez reported rates of respectively in their contact lens wearers the case contamination rate in our study was lower than those reported in most previous studies though higher than that of either rosenthal et al or midelfart et al who both reported a rate of around affected by the sampling method used as contamination of the nozzle is higher than that of the solution in the container lipener et al also demonstrated a high rate of contamination of bottle nozzles the results of these studies are summarized in table it should also be noted that most studies of contamination rates were performed more than years ago and mpss in addition
culpability of militant action outside of a state framework in appealing to national jurisdiction and in retrospectively legitimating the militarily achieved israeli state the a precedent faithfully followed in major representations of the holocaust well beyond the courtroom invocations of the holocaust s moral authority work today to inscribe us foreign policy and that of its allies including germany in a righteous narrative in other words contingent policy is naturalized by an appeal to universal moral sentiment thus the nato led wars that ended the twentieth century such as those in iraq and yugoslavia are often justified as a of war than those that inaugurated the century with reference to both the holocaust and international law given the ambiguous genealogy of the term s universal significance that we have been exploring it is ironic that the leading superpower today uses it in the same capacity in which it emerged at the eichmann trial as a blurs the distinction between justice in all its complex articulations and raison during the nato interventions in yugoslavia for example elie wiesel traveled to kosovo at the behest of the us administration to focus attention according to the new york times on the moral argument that they say underpins nato s bombing campaign against the holocaust repeatedly occupies the position of exhibit a in the case for a militarily enforceable global law universal human rights a case supported by such influential thinkers as habermas and john rawls at the same time as we have seen in arendt s account the popular sense of the holocaust originated not in the uncoerced consensus of a self legislating law of international subjects but in the cauldron of legal political interests accompanying the establishment of the postwar political order of nation of course this is not to argue that the injustice of the holocaust as we understand it should not awaken human hopes for political justice as expressed by the idea of what rawls calls a realistic utopia and kant s foedus the problem is rather that the holocaust s current institutional memory does not clearly convey habermas s and rawls s utopian ideas but instead the confused perception that our dominant international institutions already embody those ideas in between facts and norms ha bermas recognizes that the relationship between a morality and positive law is complicated with positive law not simply sub ordinate to moral law his rational reconstruction of contractarian law however needs an epistemological notion of democracy as being a discus sion leading to uncoerced and thus valid consensus on legal principles the democratic process he writes bears the entire burden of legitima the problem with habermas s attempt to reconstruct cosmopolitan law as neither derived from a platonic nor empirically reducible to contingent legislative decisions is that the democratic process that would legitimate it has virtually no institutional presence in interstate or suprastate relations its presumptive emergence in the victory of parliamentary democracies over socialist dictatorships as discussed in habermas and also in rawls s the law of peoples is undermined by the substantive inequality between nations as either contracting people or discussing the so important here because its historical institutional setting and political circumstances embody a conflict that might otherwise be abstracted as a philosophical one between moral universalism and legal realism with the eichmann trial we see that the issue is not whether the idealist or realist narrative is emphasized as a matter of philosophical principle but that both are subordinate to the institutional advantages of those militarily enforced sovereignties who exercise the enormity of the holocaust crime does not give us a way out of a critical legal and moral historicism that questions the authority of its judges enforcers and chroniclers from evidence to self evidence the specialist s return to aesthetic judgment while the film medium is no stranger to the eichmann story from the initial television coverage to an excellent bbc and the orthodox abc pbs documentary what makes sivan and brauman s film exceptional intervenes in the public perception of the holocaust to question the authority of the judges not that is to mitigate the crime but to see the judgment as an exercise of state sovereignty in the preceding sections i hope i have raised significant questions about the trial itself and the trial s secondary representations as an event in regard to the trial i asked whether the courtroom established a clear precedent for a universal judgment on crimes against humanity and whether sovereign jurisdiction of a nation can serve to address the moral issues of inequality and force between nations in regard to the trial s subsequent representation in policy arenas outside of the juridical framework i have considered whether the moral exemplarity of passing judgment on such a crime confers on state prosecutors and their allies a moral exemplarity in inverse proportion to the moral atrocity of the crime in reconsidering the specialist here i want to ask what the film s as well as noting key limitations to its strategy after describing some of the film s powerful effects i consider the political weakness of the film s aesthetic model of judgment which follows closely arendt s late political thought and runs the risk of obscuring consideration of the very sort of questions the film has otherwise admirably raised the political dangers of symmetrically projecting the retrospective judgment of a crime into the prospective a pre cedent as the specialist begins we the jury of spectators hear a babble of languages almost liturgical in sound uttering the charges against eichmann in the tongues of the lands where he is accused of committing his crimes the plain though condensed images set us into a cinematic framework of immediacy similar to what heidegger has called a ge stell a technological ordering that challenges us to forget what we presume so that we might be open to what will be we are encouraged by the direct but impassive camera gaze to look at the
pronounced differences in evapotranspiration regimes thus leeward zones are typically arid with a negative net water balance for several months at a time constraining the range of crops that could be cultivated in leeward regions as well as overall agricultural productivity the lower mean annual precipitation varying intensity introducing a further element of risk to agricultural systems in the dryland zones prior to the arrival of humans a truly remarkable array of natural ecosystems evolved over this canvas of biogeochemical gradients indeed the degree of microenvironmental variation present in hawaiian ecosystems may exceed that found in any other comparably sized area on earth distinct types of primary hawaiian plant communities ranging from coastal dry grass and herblands through lowland and mesic wet and dry forests up to montane subalpine and on the highest mountains alpine communities hawaiian biogeography strongly reflects both the isolation of the archipelago and the groups of organisms found on continents the hawaiian biota is typically characterized as disharmonic for example land vertebrates were restricted to about species of birds and one species of bat at the same time those organisms capable of long distance over water dispersal often encountered an absence of predators and their descendants typically exhibit classic patterns of ziegler table enumerates the best current estimate of numbers of species level terrestrial taxa present in the main archipelago prior to polynesian arrival from the perspective of colonizing polynesians arriving in hawaii from other islands in the central eastern pacific the hawaiian that of their immediate homeland familiar in that this was still an oceanic biota and hence many of the generic level taxa were identical yet different because of the high degree of local endemism moreover the hawaiian chain lacked plants suitable to domestication for foodstuffs and was poor even in plants with the edible fruits although it was abundant in timber and some other kinds of species of large flightless geese and seabirds marine resources including fish mollusks crustacea and turtles were relatively abundant on the older westerly islands with developed fringing reefs but their diversity and overall biomass was more restricted on the younger islands with cliff bound dynamic shorelines polynesian colonization of hawaii with the arrival of one or more double hulled polynesian voyaging canoes most likely originating in the marquesas islands dating the expansion of polynesians into eastern polynesia including hawaii has engaged the efforts of archaeologists for nearly half a century but a consensus is now emerging thanks to a greatly expanded hawaii a date of around seems likely for such initial colonization from central eastern polynesia as indexed both by direct dates from habitation sites and by increased charcoal fluxes in sediment cores some continued contact between the hawaiian islands and other groups to the south such two way voyaging is presumed to have been relatively infrequent however and ceased altogether at least five centuries prior to the arrival of europeans in roger green and i applied the triangulation approach in the period prior to the expansion of polynesian populations out of the western polynesian homeland into eastern polynesia including hawaii these early polynesians were socially organized with a form of house society as is widely the case among austronesian speaking peoples their economy was based on cultivation of a suite of tropical root and important tree crops including breadfruit coconut and bananas during the early stage of polynesian expansion into the eastern archipelagoes the sweet potato was added to this roster of crops most likely as a result of polynesian transfer from south america i invoked edgar anderson s concept of transported landscapes to convey the impact of polynesian colonization on hawaiian ecosystems and to this we may add as well andrew crosby s notion remote of archipelagoes but also a diverse array of domestic plants and animals purposively transported to recreate the economic basis for a new society along with inadvertently transported animals such as rats geckos and insects and weeds a partial enumeration of the numbers of such species known to have been transferred to hawaii by polynesians canoe load but by around the full complement of this portmanteau biota was well established in the islands it is instructive to briefly conceptualize the diverse ways in which the newly arrived human population in hawaii modified the archipelago s natural ecosystems in terms of both direct and indirect impacts direct impacts are those decision making and choice of strategy in other words human agency was necessary indirect impacts stemmed from the introduction of the host of other domesticated commensal ruderal and similar species that accompanied humans the portmanteau biota summarized in table both kinds of impacts helped to shape the socioecosystems that were to emerge across the relative impact of any preindustrial society on its environment will be conditioned in part by the level and character of technology in part by such considerations as whether its economy is embedded in regional trade but also fundamentally in part by the size and density of its population base other things being equal the smaller the population vice versa in seeking to understand the dynamic trajectory of hawaiian human ecodynamics over the millennium between initial polynesian colonization and the intrusion of europeans the first topic we must consider is population size and density it is reasonable to assume that the size of the founding population at about was small probably less than persons given at that time there may have been some continued augmentation of the hawaiian population through limited immigration during the first years after colonization but the main factor in population increase would have been internal growth after about extra archipelago immigration is believed to have declined to zero at the time of initial european contact there is abundant with respect to the lowland zones dense despite debate over the veracity of initial european estimates of population size there is good reason to believe that lieutenant king s estimate of persons for the entire archipelago is not far off the mark the distribution of population was as one might
order to enhance the original image with respect to pores we employ a band pass filter to capture the high negative frequency response as intensity values change abruptly from white to black at the pores wavelet transform is known for its highly localized property in both frequency and spatial domains hence we apply the mexican hat scale factor a are the shifting parameters essentially this wavelet is a band pass filter with scale s after normalizing the filter response using min max normalization pore regions that typically have high negative frequency response are represented by small blobs with low intensities by adding the responses of gabor and wavelet filters we obtain the optimal enhancement finally an empirically determined threshold is applied to extract pores with blob size less than pixels an example of pore extraction is shown in fig where pores both open and closed are accurately extracted along the ridges note that our proposed pore extraction algorithm is simple and more efficient than the commonly used skeletonization ridge contour extraction as pointed out earlier while pores are visible in ppi fingerprint images their presence is not consistent on the other hand ridge contours which contain valuable level information including ridge width and edge shape are observed to be more reliable features than pores hence we also extract ridge contours for the purpose of the use of ridge contours and what is proposed in in edgeoscopy the edge of a ridge is classified into seven categories as shown in fig in practice however the flexibility of the friction skin and the presence of open pores tend to reduce the reliability of ridge edge classification in contrast to edgeoscopy our method utilizes the ridge contour points on the ridge contours classical edge detection algorithms can be applied to fingerprint images to extract the ridge contours however the detected edges are often very noisy due to the sensitivity of the edge detector to the presence of creases and pores hence we again use wavelets to enhance the ridge contours and linearly combine them with a gabor enhanced image as follows first the image is enhanced using gabor filters as in then we apply a wavelet transform to the fingerprint image to enhance ridge edges it needs to be noted that the scale s in is now increased to in order to accommodate the intensity variation of ridge contours the wavelet response is subtracted from the gabor enhanced image such that ridge contours are further threshold finally ridge contours can be extracted by convolving the binarized image fb with a filter given by where filter the number of neighborhood edge points for each pixel a point is classified as a ridge contour point if or fig shows the extracted ridge contours or level features are similar between the template and the query that is experts take advantage of an extended feature set in order to conduct a more effective latent matching a possible improvement of current afis systems is then to employ a similar hierarchical matching scheme which enables the use of an extended feature set for matching at a higher level each layer in the system utilizes features at the corresponding level all the features that are used in the system are shown in fig given two fingerprint images the system first extracts level and level features and establishes alignment of the two images using a string matching algorithm agreement between orientation fields of the two images is then calculated using dotproduct the query and stops at level otherwise the matcher proceeds to level where minutia correspondences are established using bounding boxes and the match score is computed as where and the weights for combining information at level and level ntq is the number of matched minutiae and nt threshold to be such that if ntq the matching terminates at level and the final match score remains as otherwise we continue investigating level features the threshold is chosen based on the point guideline that is considered as sufficient evidence for making positive identification in many courts of law as the matching proceeds to level the matched minutiae given a pair of matched minutiae we compare level features in the neighborhood and recompute the correspondence based on the agreement of level features assume an alignment has been established at level let xi yi ntq be the location of the ith matched minutia and be the mean location of all note that it is possible for the minutiae to be outside of its associated region but the selection ensures a sufficiently large foreground region for level feature extraction to compare level features in each local region we need to take into consideration the fact that the numbers of detected features in practice will be different between query and algorithm is a good solution for this problem because it aims to minimize the distances between points in one image to geometric entities in the other without requiring correspondence another advantage of icp is that when applied locally it provides alignment correction to compensate for nonlinear deformation assuming that ntq we define its associated regions from and to be rti and rq respectively and the extracted level feature sets pt ai bi ti nt and pq ai bi ti nq accordingly each feature set includes triplets representing the location of each feature point using the icp algorithm are given below the initial transformation in step was set equal to the identity matrix i as pt and pq have been prealigned at level in steps and d denotes the euclidean distance between point sets note that icp requires nq the number of level features in query region rq larger size to be the template fast convergence of the icp algorithm is usually assured because the initial alignment based on minutiae at level is generally good when the algorithm converges or is terminated when the match distance e is obtained given ntq matched minutiae between and q at level e each score is defined as where nt and nq and level in
be a common and man the lord that was to govern this creation for man had domination given to him over the beasts birds and fishes but not one word was spoken in the beginning that one branch of mankind should rule over another winstanley was the only thinker of his time to sever the close connection between the notions of liberty and property and to highlight the inseparability of political the levellers and john locke who all define private property as an inalienable natural right an essential component of individual freedom and necessary foundation of social relations winstanley emphasizes the socio economic preconditions for the realization of individual freedom maintaining that liberty presupposes the abolition of private property and all political judicial economic social and ideological structures that nurture uphold and legitimate the oppressive system exclusive appropriation of common goods by the few as a violation of the divine order and the source of all evils he promotes the common ownership and cultivation of the land as the basis of individual freedom economic and social equality true commonwealths freedom lies in the free enjoyment of the earth whereas john milton in his history of britain inveighs against the patriotic up but also transcend the popular seventeenth century theory of the norman yoke which contends that the norman conquest by destroying ancient rights liberties and institutions of the anglo saxons marked the end of england s golden age and the beginning of a kind of post lapsarian identifying as the root cause of all social ills not specific political structures but the institution of private property itself they extend this myth from the political to the religious spheres this radicalism informs both their assessment of the republican commonwealth as a manifestation of the type of kingly power with the church the law and property as its main pillars and their interpretation of the civil war as a conflict between different factions of the ruling elite the dragon hath fought against the dragon and one part conquered another while welcoming the republican reforms as a step in the right direction they argue that the revolution had not been completed since the old hierarchical power structures and property relations were not encroached upon and the current system of economic exploitation social and political domination continued to exist in comrade jacob winstanley and everard ask the crucial question of whose interests the revolution served concluding that instead of restoring lost rights and liberties it exhausted itself in a mere exchange of the rulers winstanley articulates his fears that the future republic will be as oppressive as the old kingdom and anticipating rousseau declares for man was born free and everywhere he is enslaved in the new law of righteousness winstanley explicitly denies the self proclaimed saints among the independents the right to rule and dominate the supposedly godless and sinful rest of the nation in caute s novel he charges the former revolutionaries with assuming old privileges and justifying their rule by the very arguments to legitimate his power this accusation of having only reimposed another form of despotism is underlined by a quote from milton s sonnet on the new forcers of conscience under the long parliament new presbyter is but old writ large and substantiated by the grandee fairfax a member of the military social and political elite government was as before autocratic and in the hands of the propertied classes tom haydon who considers economic be of paramount importance also foregrounds the class aspect taking this proposition to its logical conclusion winstanley and his followers regarded the liquidation of the monarchical system not as the end but as the beginning of a comprehensive social revolution which will overturn not only property relations and the class structures but all forms of hierarchy and power and thus restore the pure law of righteousnesse before the fall this implies the liberation of individual and society from the aggressive external power of the state which he sees as repressive of the innately good naturally social human subject and of society s natural tendency towards mutual aid the diggers diff er from most utopian movements in that they reflected on the tactical and strategic methods of social transformation paying particular attention to the role of violence in the revolutionary process as the question winstanley revolution going to be necessary whilst they were conscious of the gap that existed between social reality and their utopia the diggers nevertheless trusted in the people s capacity to fashion their present and future in harmony with rational insights and ethical norms the last verse of every stanza of the diggers song calls on the poor to organize themselves for practical and resist the powers that be stand up stand up now stand up now their vision was not just a regulative idea in the kantian sense but it turned into practice when they set about implementing their ideal of communal life in the here and now and their practice in turn became part of their theory caute avoids any temptation to idealize the diggers as generally hostile to hierarchical institutionalized leadership structures and paints a differentiated picture these disagreements about the means they envisaged in order to achieve their ends can be summarized in the antitheses of force vs reason violence vs passive resistance pragmatism vs spiritualism in comrade jacob winstanley himself figures as the most ardent champion of a non violent strategy preferring the persuasive power of rational argumentation and direct action he abjures the use of force to advance their cause and disallows we will conquer by love and patience or else we count it no freedom freedom gotten by the sword is an established bondage to some part or other of the creation firmly convinced that violence breeds violence and gives rise to tyranny he asserts that reason not the sword must prevail a message that the diggers christmass caroll also accentuates seeking to break the vicious cycle of violence
supply procedure the operation of the head ditch is as described above and the return flow surge must be considered summarizing flexible supply systems facilitate the installation of runoff return flow systems where required or desired the elimination of low side storage reservoirs and the use of small initial streams reduce labor and the needed precision of flow sets and economically eliminate runoff allowing moving water surface irrigation methods to have high application efficiencies the equivalent program for all cases can be obtained from individual on farm reservoirs as the flexible source merriam labor resources irrigation must be coordinated with other aspects of the farming operation supply restraints on the control of flexibility of frequency rate and duration must be economically minimized daytime only irrigation is nearly essential a partially flexible system is of limited value for the mechanical pressurized irrigation methods rate is selected and remains fixed management controls are through variations be varied to correspond to variable soil intake conditions the large capital intensive main water supply portion of a project system operates most effectively near capacity and continuously but almost all on farm distribution systems operate intermittently at field levels the irrigation intervals for surface methods are large typically one to several weeks of nonuse to reconcile these extremes requires storage such storage is best located between to the point of application as practical to permit the steady flow supply system area to be as large as is economical this favors the use of centrally located service area reservoirs and requires the use of pipelines to permit local control while allowing supply canal operations to be upstream controlled essential items are farmer and operator education water user associations limited rate arranged demand by the us liaison and coordination unit state that an underground pipeline system should take the place of open channel lined or unlined for the delivery system in the command as this alternative allows the farmer to remit water in the field free from transit losses and the problems and last but not least involves practically half the cost of the normal open channel system and that it takes less than half the time to and optimizing operational policies of a korean multireservoir system using sampling stochastic dynamic programming with the ensemble streamflow prediction abstract this study presents state of the art optimization techniques for enhancing reservoir operations which use sampling stochastic dynamic programming ssdp with the ensemble streamflow prediction esp ssdp used with historical inflow scenarios ssdp hist hist derives an off line optimal operating policy through a backward moving solution procedure in contrast ssdp used with monthly forecasts of esp sssdp esp reoptimizes the off line policy these stochastic models are used to derive a monthly joint operating policy during the drawdown period of the geum river multireservoir system in korea a cross validation test of simulation runs demonstrates that proposed stochastic models that explicitly include inflow uncertainty are those that do not updating policy with the esp forecasts is appropriate in this reservoir system the lower dam of the geum river multireservoir system should maintain elevation of during the beginning of the drawdown period to avoid significant increase in the downstream water shortages and forecasting accuracy may result in considerable effects on joint reservoir operations introduction average of approximately mm precipitation annually korea institute of construction technology which is than the world average management of water resources is greatly important to korea because of the hydrologic pattern of the asia monsoon climate two thirds of korea s annual precipitation falls during the month flood season late june to late september thus only of the annual drawdown period beginning in october moreover korea s extremely high population density makes management of the water supply critical the average annual precipitation per capita in korea is only of the world average korea is currently classified as a water deficit country and is expected to become a water scarce country in the near future gardner outlaw and engelman transportation of korea by the country may suffer from a water shortage of year however the report suggested that one third of the expected water deficit might be offset by increasing efficiency of existing water resource systems it also emphasized that reservoirs within a single basin should be operated jointly hence enhancing operational effectiveness and efficiency dams will be constructed to provide new water supply sources currently large dams exist within the five major river basins of korea but since only five dams have been built or are under construction this project investigates methods for increasing the efficiency of multireservoir operations in the geum river basin of korea by coordinating a monthly operating policy that considers the hydrologic has been undertaken as a part of a nationwide long term water resources plan for increasing the efficiency of multireservoir operations within all five major river basins of korea previous attempts have been made mostly by the korea water resources corporation to develop optimization models that derived operating policies for korean multireservoir systems a typical example is han river coordinated multireservoir operating based on a multiperiod network flow algorithm for water supply planning in the han river basin most optimization models developed in korea including h comom are deterministic they assume that future streamflows are perfectly known performance of deterministic optimization models is generally overestimated and operating policies derived from these models would likely not be are rarely identical to the assumed streamflows a deterministic model incorporates for example streamflow forecasts as short as month ahead are very uncertain in korea except during a few months of the dry season when streamflows are primarily derived from groundwater sources which results in moderately persistent streamflows therefore this study investigates optimization models the stochastic nature of streamflow can be incorporated into optimization models implicitly or explicitly in linear programming and dynamic programming the implicit approach often iteratively uses a deterministic optimization model for a large number of historical or synthetic streamflows followed
by an
year the implementation of this rule change see sec release no note however that qualitatively similar results obtain if we relax the data requirements so that the is filed no later than days after the quarter s end and the is filed no more than days after year s end opportunity to profit from foreknowledge of disclosures consider how an insider may profit from short lived private information about the contents of a forthcoming public disclosure when the disclosure good news the insider ought to buy before the disclosure further when the insider must sell stock for such reasons as personal liquidity needs but he nevertheless has some discretion over when to trade the insider benefits from postponing the sale until after good news is released likewise when the insider must purchase stock for such reasons as achieving a stock ownership target established by his compensation contract the insider benefits by purchase until after bad news is released the insider s opportunity to profit from the price impact of a public disclosure ends when the disclosure is made since at that point the insider has either traded or postponed his intended trade however if the insider strategically delays purchases until after bad news is released then trades will be correlated with past stock returns our tests for an association between insider trades before and after the earnings announcement and filings with the short window stock returns around those events are tests of whether and how insiders exploit specific pieces of short lived private information namely foreknowledge of the contents of the announcements and filings assuming that insiders know in advance the contents of the disclosure and can predict the price reaction that will occur when the disclosure is made larger absolute returns imply trades on the to assess whether the profit opportunity before the announcement is comparable to the profit opportunity before the filing table presents summary statistics on the distributions of the raw market adjusted and the absolute value of market adjusted stock returns around the earnings announcement and the subsequent sec filing we choose the and event windows to be brief periods of concentrated price and reports filed electronically with the sec using the edgar system griffin observes that the edgar document will normally reside in the public domain at zero or low cost within one or two business days following the filing date using the absolute excess stock return as a measure of investor response to the filing he finds that the response is concentrated on the day of and the two days after the filing date accordingly we define days to relative to the filing and call these days the filing window we choose an earnings announcement window that is the same length as the filing window namely three trading days since morse finds that the price response to earnings announcements is largest on days to relative to the announcement accordingly we define ret ea to be the return over days to relative to the announcement and call these days window aret ea and aret fd are the corresponding abnormal returns computed as the difference between the buy and hold raw returns and buy and hold value weighted market index not surprisingly the mean and median values of these returns are near zero the active component of an insider s trading gain from a stock purchase is the product of the value of the shares he buys and the subsequent abnormal return likewise the value of shares he sells times the subsequent abnormal return to assess the frequency with which insiders are faced with the opportunity to receive a gain by buying or avoid a loss by selling and to make potential gains comparable to potential losses in table we also report the absolute value of returns comparing the magnitude of the trading opportunity insiders face before the announcement with the opportunity they face before the filing observe that the absolute value of market adjusted return over the earnings announcement abs has a mean of a median of while the absolute value of the return over days to relative to the or filing abs has a mean of a median of comparing the ratio of either the means or medians it is apparent that the average or typical profit opportunity at the filing is about the profit opportunity at the announcement the smaller implies that all else equal insiders incentive to trade on foreknowledge of the filing is smaller than the incentive to trade on foreknowledge of the announcement this makes it less likely that our test will detect an association between insider trades and the return at the filing than at the announcement nevertheless large returns at the filing are frequent for the observations the abnormal return at the filing is less than and for the is more than the magnitude of these returns implies that insiders potential gains from well timed trade are significant it is useful to compare the profit opportunity at these events with the opportunities at other events jensen and ruback point out that the abnormal return of target firms subject to a merger or acquisition is more than the month leading up to the announcement case law establishes a clear obligation for insiders to avoid trade in this bradley point out that the abnormal return experienced by a firm in the year leading up to a bankruptcy filing is about that insider selling during this period is abnormally high ke et al document increased insider selling before breaks in a string of consecutive earnings increases the average abnormal return over the days before and including this event is which is comparable to the means of abs and abs measured days thus the announcements around which we study insider trades are associated with price movements that in many cases are as large as those associated with major corporate events like mergers bankruptcy filings and extreme earnings surprises therefore these events should be large enough to prompt insiders to trade moreover the events
special lagrangian cones for cone on a cone in cn is regular if there exists as above so that in which case we call the link of the cone is an embedded smooth submanifold but has an isolated singularity at unless is a totally geodesic sphere sometimes it will also be convenient to allow to be just immersed not embedded in which case is no longer embedded then we call let denote the radial coordinate on cn and let be the liouville vector field the unit sphere inherits a natural contact form from its embedding in cn there is a one to one correspondence between regular lagrangian cones in cn and legendrian submanifolds of the lagrangian angle or the phase of a lagrangian cone in cn is homogeneous of degree we define the lagrangian angle of a legendrian submanifold of to be the lagrangian cone we call a submanifold of special legendrian if the cone over is special lagrangian in cn in other words is special legendrian if and only if its lagrangian phase is identically or its lagrangian angle is identically modulo aspecial legendrian submanifold of is minimal that is it hasmean curvature conversely up to rotation by a constant phase e any legendrian using this language the goal of our paper is to construct special legendrian immersions of surfaces of odd genus into the invariant minimal legendrian tori introduction this section introduces the one parameter family of conformal special legendrian immersions invariant under the action where is the parameter of the family and are defined later in for a dense set of these cylinders factor through embedded special legendrian tori when is sufficiently small any such embedded torus is composed of a large number of identical almost spherical regions connected to each of its two neighboring almost spherical regions by a small neck these surfaces form the basic building blocks of our construction remark the invariant special legendrian immersions studied are special cases of those constructed in thm in the terminology of that paper they are the immersions where this family is distinguished among all invariant special legendrian tori because it is the only one for which the action has nontrivial fixed points as a result it is the only family which can limit to a two sphere be the conformal factor of the metric induced on by the immersion given any define to be the unique solution of the initial value problem where ymax denotes the largest solution of the cubic equation it is straightforward to check that the equation admits the first integral and that ymax is the maximum value attained by the solution for notational convenience we will usually drop the and refer simply to the cubic has three real roots ymin ymax all three roots are distinct except for the extreme values and in which case we have ymin ymax and ymin ymax respectively proposition n ymin ymax is a smooth the even function depending smoothly on for for n and for n of the roots ymin ymax of and the jacobi elliptic function sn by where ymax and ymin and ymax satisfy as ymin ymax and are periodic of period where is the complete elliptic integral of the first kind and as satisfies n so that for all sufficiently small we have note that is then controlled everywhere by its evenness and periodicity the proof of this proposition is not difficult here is an outline standard properties of elliptic functions show that the expression given for in the proposition satisfies the correct initial conditions and has the period and symmetry stated for close to zero we write the three roots and respectively it is easy to see that the modulus of the elliptic integral tends to as in this limit the jacobi elliptic function sn tends to tanh and the period the claimed asymptotics for the period follow by expanding and in terms of and then using standard properties for the asymptotics of in the limit as described in appendix a the ck bounds for will follow from equations and a crucial role later in the paper we now give a more detailed proof the reader who is satisfied with the above sketch of the proof may prefer to return to these details at a later stage proof we concentrate on proving and the smooth dependence of on since the other parts are easily verified using standard properties of the elliptic function sn smooth dependence of solutions of the initial value problem to prove and it is convenient to treat ymin as the parameter instead of since one root ymin of the cubic is now specified the two remaining roots and ymax are determined in terms of ymin by solving a quadratic equation as increases from to ymin increases monotonically from to from now solving the quadratic equation discussed above leads to power series expansions in ymin for both ymax and and from which the second half of follows from the expansions for ymax and we obtain the following expansions for and in terms of ymin combining these expansions with and we obtain using and the previous expressions for and we have between and ymin given by lower bound it follows from that d dt holds on the interval hence n for upper bound since is increasing on sufficiently small ck upper bounds the and upper bounds for follow from the a polynomial in n using these equations we can obtain inductively ck upper bounds for in terms of upper bounds discrete and continuous symmetries this subsection defines various symmetries of and needed in the discussion of the special legendrian immersions these symmetries play a key role throughout our construction a reflection and use a tilde to denote isometries of as in the next definition definition for we define by taking their matrices with respect to the standard basis of to be respectively we also to be orthogonal reflections with respect refer to sx as a rotation with axis this circle and to
of cultural fabrics genomics is one of several life sciences that has already begun to transform basic cultural constructs our understanding of illness has changed from being a deviation from health toward instead being the recognition that we are all carriers of defective genes with variable predispositions for disease under the appropriate conditions we are all patients in and thus are compelled to examine the cultural logics of our condition both positively positively genomics and other information biosciences provide critical metaphors for cultural understanding drawing out the creative possibilities of the virtual symbiotic morphing and experimental negatively or with pragmatic precaution we are all probing the logics of life and death that the technoscientifically intense life sciences have produced medicine has as byron good points out a soteriological daily moral struggles of life and death in the clinic or hospital along with what can be called a procedural dimension illustrated by cases where regimes to test new therapies exist in places where standards of care do not match best practices and where participation in clinical trials is often the only means of access to any care medicine s biotechnical embrace as mary jo delvecchio good argues can be at the expense of the good death or other humane values in first world settings and deserves cultural analysis the contradictions of high tech medicine in countries where infectious disease and primary care are still the principal public health priorities also deserve attention exemplifying how the struggle between the positivist sciences and appropriate human sciences highlighted by husserl remains in play today not itself be pathologized the lotus can arise from the mud although the analytic demands are often intense in the often fast paced contradictory or double edged space that has emerged around the contemporary life sciences as cultural analysts we need to see scientists as creative cultural producers and to account for the ways the tools and material infrastructures of science shape what we understand perceive and conceptualize because most real world problems in the life sciences involve multiple disciplines the spaces of interactions among these technosciences become particularly complex and interesting sites for cultural analysis not only for understanding emergent technologies themselves but also more importantly for tracking implications carried over into culture at large ethical plateaus terrains in which decisions about life and death what matters and what is triaged as less important are made not just for individuals but also with ramifications downstream for later turns in decision making just as the new fields of synthetic and systems biologies and regenerative medicine are attempting experimentally to develop new understandings of biological interactions so too emergent cultural models relations transcending simplistic oppositions such as hype versus truth similarly just as today s informatics intensive life sciences are a key site for developing ways of understanding and establishing complex causalities so too cultural analysts need to continue the development of the rich tradition of dealing with causality begun by marx weber and freud spencer put it nicely in the century causation should not be denied because it is hard to determine but to put its isolation into the forefront of the endeavor as if we in old fashioned mechanics is na ve open endings just as lyotard might say there is no jew and we are all jews so there is no culture and all we do is cultural culture is not a variable culture is relational it is elsewhere or in passage it is where meaning is woven and renewed often through gaps and silences and forces beyond the of individuals and yet serves as the space where individual and institutional social responsibility and ethical struggle take place at issue are not just better methods but a return to some of the most fundamental moral and cultural issues that anthropology and cultural analysis have addressed over the past century and a half issues of class differences culture wars social warrants social reform and social justice of individual rights human rights cultural tolerance multicultural ethics of mental health and subjectivation of democratic checks and balances institutions of ethical debate regulation and the slow negotiation of international law and of access to information and the formation of new kinds of public spheres as ann belinda preis says in the years to come some of the most crucial intellectual moral and ideological battles about human rights issues are likely to turn on their cross cultural intelligibility and justifiability a radically new and far more dynamic approach to remind ourselves of the work that anthropologists have been doing over the past century to create such a layered and dynamic approach to cultural analysis that this article has been written cultural analysis has become increasingly relational plural and aware of its own historicity its openness to the historical moments in which it is put to work makes it capable like experimental systems of creating new epistemic things it is the jeweler s eye for ethnographic detailing and that often provides insight into the excruciating impassioned and conflicted local crucibles of cultural conflict and the multisited detailing of networks and transduction from localities to transnational players testing and contesting the efforts to assert canonic universal formulations by those players or by philosophers and literary critics karen engle in a review of formal statements of the aaa since argues that one of the most troubling issues is the charge of cultural relativism which is often said to lead to moral nihilism and the inability to defend the principles of the enlightenment and of the un declaration of human rights and other ethics conventions from nuremburg to helsinki but this is a fundamental misunderstanding conflicts involved in negotiating political and legal regimes and of the cultural resources in any society for claiming and contesting legitimacy methodological relativism obligates an investigator first to explore the native point of view the motivations intentions and understandings of the actors as well as native models modes of cultural accounting and models of and models for cultural contestations within societies struggles to form public
problem lies with the personal attacks especially of the uncivil variety even when the substantive content of a message is exactly the same the public views personal uncivil messages as being significantly less valuable than alternative forms of communication these results at this point suggest we need to be but these data are just about perceptions of the messages the next section looks at the potential effects that these different types of campaign messages have on political engagement political engagement concerns begin to arise and the critics of our current political dialogue need to be taken more seriously we analyze this general issue by looking at an array of different questions including intention to vote interest in politics political trust and efficacy voter turnout has been the main dependent variable a chance to influence the course of government if attacks depress turnout it is easy to see why there would be concern the initial and pioneering research on the effects of negative advertising found that attacks demobilized the electorate yet it now appears that negativity either does geer goldstein and freedman lau and pomper however it is still possible that incivility could have a strong depressive effect on turnout to assess the effect on likelihood to vote we asked how likely is it that you will vote in the next presidential election which refers to the election that took place a few months after the administration of our experiment experiment with randomized condition assignment is that the overreport bias should affect our treatment groups in a random fashion and therefore not bias our assessment of the effects of our independent variables of interest if negativity incivility and or a trait based focus in campaign messages have soon after exposure to our when the relationship between negativity incivility and trait issue focus is examined the main effect for tone falls just short of statistical significance but even holding aside the normal standard positive tone and civil negative tone are quite similar with means of and respectively on a point scale negative messages appear to be somewhat more likely to vote although the difference is modest and not statistically significant moreover a statistically significant difference exists for the interaction between tone and trait table shows that the type of campaign message least likely to enhance voting intentions is the positive issue condition a type of messages that generate the highest turnout intentions are the classic mudslinging uncivil negative trait type of message the warm and fuzzy civil positive trait type of message and the mean and focused uncivil negative issue type of message these are fairly modest differences and the differences between the most different groups fall just short of statistical significance at using the conservative even so the key finding is that uncivil messages generate reasonably strong interest in voting the larger lesson is that the doom and gloom scenarios of some observers about the effects of incivility seem premature at best and perhaps even outright wrong one s likelihood to engage in other forms of political action and the level of political information one might bring to politics so while political interest is indeed related to voter turnout it also goes further by allowing us to understand the effects of campaign incivility on the public s broader political engagement might accentuate the least attractive aspects of politicians and thereby turn people off to the whole process negativity reminds voters that the options are inherently flawed and that the political world is full of imperfect people making imperfect decisions moreover conflict is an undesirable state of affairs for most people tuning out may be natural speaking how interested are you in politics and elections with reference to political interest we see mixed results the dimensions in question do not have a significant effect on political interest at conventional levels with a value for the corrected model of it is sufficiently close however that it is worthwhile to examine the means on that front a potentially interesting relationship does politics than either civil negative or positive messages in fact table shows that the highest levels of political interest are generated by uncivil trait based negative messages an analysis of just the negative message conditions shows that the difference between civil and uncivil negative messages is significantly different with respect to political interest the interaction but a difference of that magnitude means that about the respondents in the uncivil negative trait condition were at least one point more interested hypothesis that negativity stands out and attracts notice but with a few caveats it may be that in the current campaign environment one that is clearly awash with negative campaigning the kinds of standard attacks about opponents do nt pique voters interest in the process even uncivil issue based messages might fade into but combine incivility with a focus on personal traits and that vitriolic combination becomes a colorful exciting display that reminds voters that politics is nt boring and dull just as people are drawn to celebrity disagreements in tabloids or the viewing of car accidents on freeways it may be that malicious personal politics garners interest from people who would not otherwise notice the electoral seem to depress turnout one could still worry that the longer term effects of negativity could still be detrimental uncivil attacks could make politicians as a class appear unseemly by casting aspersions on their character qualifications and or policy preferences and uncivil attacks could make people feel that they are vulnerable to untrustworthy caustic exchanges between candidates that makes them interested in politics and also makes them more likely to vote in the next election but makes them feel cynical about politicians and the process of politics overall rahn and of incivility political ads to children specifically they found that campaign attacks soured the public mood of children while it did not affect their desire to with reference to adults mutz and reeves did not study intentions to vote political interest or efficacy but they did study political trust and found
feigned his ailments only to plot escape while en route to the capital to substantiate the curaca s duplicitous character the prosecutor informed sarmiento of his commitment to the sin of idolatry and impertinent use of the quechua name apo when filing petitions before address in traditional andean society apo designated the supreme creator as well as the idols of various mountain peaks in the huamantanga region it was according to rodriguez a title unbefitting a graduate of the jesuit school for noble lords be advised that the aforesaid don rodrigo signs the aforesaid petition don rodrigo de guzma apo rupaychagua and this surname apo means lord of all rather he gave it to himself and he does not sign with it ordinarily except when he writes to the indians of his district but not when he writes to the corregidores and other legal authorities which indicates malice in the prosecutor s judgment rupaychagua was a janus faced calculator serving his own interests by looking both ways at once to his spanish superiors he was don but to native constituents he was a divine lord who claimed ancestral ties to regional deities in a false bid for local authority noting the cacique s guile and well known legal acumen rodriguez insisted that rupaychagua was more ladino than necessary and could not be trusted to represent himself in court instead he should be required to make future appeals by mediation of a spanish defense attorney of the inspector s choosing sarmiento governor s continued incarceration in huamantanga stipulating additional punishment of lashes for any further use of the traditional quechua title the duration of his imprisonment is uncertain but it did not signal rupaychagua s defeat or soften his activist resolve by his clash with the forces of extirpation appears to have reached a fragile truce as evidenced by a personal letter of that year here in a seeming about face the idolatry inspector reserved high praise for the cacique s renewed devotion to the virgin mary and assistance to the rigorous visita efforts in canta which had led to the destruction of more than idols in the town of ihuari alone he also vowed to pray for the native lord s continued health and to help him secure the cancellation of unjust debts he had incurred with the corrupt authorities of the local corregimiento however documents same file show that the visitador accused him soon after of religious crimes jailing him this time in lima s house of reclusion yet not before the governor formally charged sarmiento now his chief enemy with the exploiting the district s workforce through unauthorized labor and forced payments totaling pesos the various stances assumed by rupaychagua in his continual movement between spanish and andean society illustrates well what the multiple subject positions that the colonial subject seemed destined to take not merely sequentially but most often simultaneously certainly his tumultuous dealings with various groups including the local mercedarians the traveling extirpators and the aspiring native adversaries within the parish belie the straightforward versions of strict accommodation that customarily have been used to describe the experience of the lettered del principe rupaychagua may have filed the counter suit in an attempt to neutralize the legal proceedings against him or to defend a constituency that was ill treated by church personnel during their extended sojourn in canta whether he sought to serve the interests of his own welfare the native peoples or both is not clear it is certain however that in early rupaychagua won release from prison and soon brought charges of linguistic ignorance against the mercedarian friar these parish records show that andean priest relations were nothing if not ambiguous in the litigious climate of huamantanga but the quantity of legal actions does not invalidate rupaychagua s case or the others to which i now turn in which a complaint of substandard quechua offered indigenous officials a viable means to defend the community s professed catholic integrity against a priest they deemed unqualified for ministry experience of indios ladinos of the central peruvian highlands raises crucial questions regarding the practical application of the third council s quechua language policy these parish officials inhabited the provinces of chinchaysuyu which church authorities associated with corrupt uses of quechua throughout the seventeenth century indigenous officials of the region were frequently censured for incorporating lexical borrowings into their speech in violation of conciliar norms in the franciscan friar diego de molina doctrinero of santa mar a del valle near the settlement of hua nuco expressed the unease shared by many clerics erroneous concepts are so naturalized particularly in the chinchaysuyos that they ignore the cuzco terms in which christian doctrine was translated chinchaysuyu speakers violated the supposed purity of the ecclesiastical language and by extension its authority to express the truths of christian doctrine it was there according to the doctrina christiana that andeans changed the letters of quechua words whereby they created different meanings some pronouncing the language more gutturally than others or removing or adding or changing letters and failing at times to maintain proper sentence structure instead committing solecisms if andeans of the central highlands deviated from the language of the basic catechism what values did they attribute to the quechua in which it was published what is currently known about the linguistic situation of the mid colonial andes relies on valuable clues from the work of the quechua linguists cesar itier and gerald taylor their investigations have significantly advanced understandings of how the usage of southern quechua in the central provinces was conditioned by underlying patterns of local speech generally speaking they contend that language was characterized by a double diglossia the polarization of spanish and standardized quechua on the one hand and that of standardized quechua and local languages on the other for andean parishioners living outside the immediate environs of cuzco ecclesiastical quechua was often a second or even third language for a sharper portrait of this linguistic landscape
naturally private situation privacy can be lost but not violated or invaded because there are no norms conventional legal or be protected this is not the case however with normatively private situations which can include the following locations such as a person s house relationships such as religious confessions activities such as voting and information such as medical records in normatively private situations one s privacy can be violated or invaded in addition to being lost have been established to protect those situations because the ralc theory links the concept of privacy with the notion of protecting individuals by limiting or restricting access to persons or information about persons ralc might initially appear to be simply a variation of the limitation theory in fact dag elgesem interprets ralc as articulated in an earlier formulation in this way when he some degree of privacy since there will always be billions of people who have physically restricted access to us and precisely because all situations are private to some degree it is difficult to see how the private situations are distinguished from the public ones on this theory moor and i have responded to elgesem s criticism by pointing out that the relevant public private distinction involving situations is one that descriptively as elgesem seems to infer in his interpretation of in our reply to elgesem we show as well why the ralc theory is not merely another variation of the restricted access theory by pointing out that ralc also recognizes the role that control plays in the theory of privacy viz in the justification and management of privacy are established to restrict access not in terms of control over information in our analysis of the control theory of privacy we saw some of the difficulties of trying to define privacy in a way that requires one to have control over one s information for example we saw that there were both theoretical and practical difficulties with such a definition furthermore we saw that it was possible for one to have privacy without having having privacy yet the notion of limited control plays an important role in the overall scheme in the ralc theory of privacy to see how the notion of control works in the ralc framework consider the example of one s medical information that information is private because a normative zone has been established to restrict people from accessing the information not because an individual has complete medical setting doctors nurses financial administrators and insurance providers may have legitimate access to various pieces of it but why does information included in one s medical records deserve normative protection one justification is that individuals seek to avoid embarrassment and discrimination another related justification is that individuals seek control over their lives they need some degree of control even if limited over and what insurance plans they select privacy policies that protect information in a particular situation by normatively restricting others from accessing that information provide individuals with limited control is also important for the management of privacy in managing one s privacy however one need not have absolute control over information about oneself monitoring individuals that exchange information over the internet via file sharing systems and and gaining information about persons and groups by mining the internet while each of these situations could serve as a test case for the ralc we will limit our analysis here to the example of data mining data mining on the internet data mining is a computerized technique that uses pattern matching algorithms derived from research and development in the field of artificial intelligence to analyze vast amounts of the use of and nonobvious when applied to information about persons data mining can generate new and sometimes nonobvious classifications or categories of people thus individuals whose personal information is accessible to data mining tools can become identified or associated with newly created groups including groups whose existence those individuals might never have it is in this sense that data laws offer individuals little to no protection with respect to how information about them acquired through datamining activities is subsequently used the practice of mining personal data raises some serious challenges for protecting personal for one thing data mining tools have provided many information merchants with a wealth of data about individuals which can be sold to third parties for another thing the process used to acquire this kind of information is to the people affected we should first of all ask whether the practice of mining personal data on the internet necessarily violates or invades an individual s privacy applying the ralc theory we find that an individual may indeed lose some privacy whenever data about is accessed however we have seen that the mere loss of privacy by an individual in a particular situation does not necessarily constitute an so it is not yet clear whether s privacy has been violated or invaded in a normative sense should all personal information currently accessible to data mining technology be declared normatively private in other words does it constitute a situation in which that information should be protected in some normative sense alternatively should all personal information that is currently available online to those who mine data be viewed as public information is something in the nature of personal information itself that is some inherent feature or characteristic of that information that could help us to answer this question according to the ralc theory there is nothing in personal information per sefas a particular category or kind of information for example that can help us to determine whether it should be classified as public or private rather it is the context or situation in which others that we must take into consideration in determining whether some particular kind of personal information should or should not be declared normatively private because of the role that specific contexts play in determining when personal information should be granted normative protection it might seem that privacy standards in the ralc theory are simply arbitrary moor however
other attributions would be expected this method draws on the inferential correction model the original model posited that it is more effortful and requires more cognitive to use situational information in our judgments because we are initially predisposed to characterize events in dispositional terms the model was later refined by krull who argued that the use of situational or dispositional information could vary in sequence depending on the perceiver s motivations and goals intrinsically or extrinsically induced orientations can redirect perceivers attentional and cognitive resources to situational causes initially the inculcation of such orientations has been successfully used to reduce dispositional biases in different ftf settings situational inferential prompts should facilitate redirection of distributed partners attention the most salient of which may be the sociotechnological aspects groups instilled with a situational goal make more cmc attributions for their behavior than those without methods participants two hundred fifty two individuals were assigned to four person groups for decision making discussions via the internet they were offered partial course credit for their participation as well as entry in a drawing to win four ipods among those who derived the best solution some of the original groups experienced attrition affecting the final sample contained groups of and groups of this sample included participants from cornell university from ohio state university from rensselaer polytechnic from texas tech from merritt community college and from mcmaster university one individual s scores indicated she misunderstood instructions and was removed from further analysis fifty seven percent of the participants year in school was equivalent across seniors juniors and sophomores freshmen and master s students participants mean age was with a mode of participants were predominantly caucasian asian african american hispanic european native american and the remaining themselves as other or did not indicate their ranking of three community development programs competing for a limited funding information was provided individually to group members describing positive and negative attributes of each program information distribution followed a hidden profile with the each participant receiving some common and some unique items related to the choices so that group discussion would uncover conflicting information and perspectives thereby generating a meaningful and involving participants were instructed that there was an objectively best decision to be made and that the group as a whole possessed sufficient information to do so computer mediated communication each group communicated asynchronously through the internet using an online discussion board created for each group in the blackboard courseware system groups were provided weeks to arrive at the decision they were instructed to order to maintain complete records of the discussion face to face communication was not explicitly discouraged but the transcripts indicated that no ftf interactions took place distribution conditions groups communicated in one of three geographic distribution conditions to which participants were assigned using a randomized blocked procedure in the collocated condition all of the group members were from the same school in the fully distributed a different school in the mixed condition two members were from the same school and the remaining two were from two different schools in order to make salient participants awareness of the locations of each group member each member s name and school logo appeared on the opening page of the group s discussion board of the groups retained for analysis were collocated were distributed and were randomly assigned to different inferential goal inductions situational dispositional or no goal a dispositional goal was included in the analysis as a matter of thoroughness and it was used as another control treatment for a situational goal the inferential goals were presented three times through the initial written instructions sent to the participants on the opening web page and embedded in mail participation reminders sent to all the participants twice during the study in the situational goal condition the following text was used different situational factors can explain how people behave and communicate as you work on this project please try to note what role different situational factors may play in your group discussion afterward we will be asking you to evaluate the impact of your partners behavior in the dispositional goal condition the following text was used communication can be different with different people as you interact with your partners please try to note what you are learning about their personalities and traits afterward we will be asking you to tell us about your impressions of each partner and how their personalities affected their behavior in the conversation outcome data upon completion of the task or the end of weeks participants answered a questionnaire administered via the world wide web participants were asked to write in separate text box forms what was the worst thing you did during the project and why do you think you did that participants were also asked the one best thing they did and why and the same questions regarding each of their partners in those cases in which more than one behavior was mentioned only one attributional statement was given two coders checked the classification of the mentioned behaviors as positive negative or other only two statements were reclassified both from negative to positive based on their apparent pragmatic implications of the behavior for the group one of the authors used very simple parsing rules to unitize the gave for behaviors unlike identifying units from a stream of speech the responses written into the web form lent themselves to straightforward identification of idea units in most cases participants offered only one explanation punctuation and conjunctions cued unitization of multiple explanations in cases coders then categorized those explanations in attributional terms because different factors may affect behavior and judgments in virtual groups analyses weiner s recommendation that attribution research take into account specific causal factors appropriate for the situation under study therefore dispositional classifications included individual disposition and collective disposition situational classifications included partner influences cmc geography study parameters outside incentive competing demands on participants time and generic situational influences some examples of negative behavior accompanying explanations sorted by attribution
most vnox male hamsters an androgen surge when exposed to an estrous female in the present study the testing apparatus used prevented physical contact and hence transfer of non volatile stimuli between the test male and the two stimulus animals furthermore vnox males continued to show a preference for a receptive female this result may reflect the relative in response to volatile odor cues this is the behavior approximated by our partner preference test non volatile stimuli detected by the vomeronasal organ may play a more important role in the transition from investigation to copulation compared with rats it appears that hamsters show substantially less behavioral flexibility at least with regard to for food reward even in castrated male hamsters similarly both gonad intact and castrated male hamsters will form a conditioned taste aversion to vaginal secretions paired with licl induced gastrointestinal illness furthermore kollack walker and newman demonstrated anticipatory fos activation in neural circuits for sexual behavior of sexually experienced male hamsters together these observations response to reinforcing or aversive stimuli it may be that the relative importance of prior sexual experience for sexual attraction in rats and hamsters reflects the biology of the two species while rats are social animals hamsters are solitary as such hamsters have limited opportunities for learned social interactions thus an attraction to females that does not depend on prior sex experience should enhance reproductive facilitate both partner preference and sexual behavior in hamsters loss of sexual motivation after castration and restoration by exogenous hormone replacement has been demonstrated in male rats by second order responding conditioned place preference and partner preference furthermore it has previously been observed that copulatory behaviors which sexual motivation is relatively more responsive to hormone deprivation and relatively more resistant to hormone reinstatement in particular partner preference was not restored after weeks of testosterone treatment in orchx orchx males although copulation was significantly increased by weeks this supports the finding by powers et al that low levels of castrated males can nonetheless detect fhvs even at low concentrations suggesting that castration selectively reduces attraction to chemosensory cues but not their detection again the differential hormonal control of appetitive and consummatory sexual behavior can be understood in a natural setting when endogenous testosterone levels are low as at the beginning or end of the breeding season under these estrus however he is less likely to undertake the risk of searching for females that may or may not be sexually receptive resisting recently acted on cues compatibility of go no go responses to response history modulates event related potentials abstract using event related potentials to investigate compatibility between past and present cue response interactions an selective attention part of each trial participants responded to one of two visible numerical digits immediately afterward in the go no go part of each trial one of the same two digits appeared with participants required to press the corresponding key on go trials and to withhold responding on no go trials higher amplitude anterior responses on no go than on go trials emerged when participants withheld responding to a recently selected cue but were greatly diminished when responding to a recently ignored cue the findings suggest that episodic traces of past go no go responses guide future action decisions such that increased response control is needed to overcome bias to respond to recently acted on no go cues descriptors go no go episodic retrieval categorization event related potentials action control cognitive control decades of behavioral and neurophysiological research have examined how compatibility between intentions and environmental cues impacts action control in a related vein research in cognitive neuroscience recently has begun to examine see fecteau munoz schacter dobbins schnyer what cognitive and neurophysiological processes facilitate responding to cues differently from how one has responded to them in the past the current work addressed this question in the context of a basic aspect of response control deciding whether or not to act response control has been studied extensively with the withholds responses to another stimulus recent research has examined the effects of the local and global context of generating versus withholding responses on brain function during go no go tasks in both fmri studies and electrophysiological studies and categorization can help explain go no go electrophysiological responses logan s instance theory proposes that each episode of behavior generates a separate episodic trace that is stored in memory in this sense encoding of behavior environment interactions is said to be obligatory behavior are generated cued retrieval of episodic traces also is said to be obligatory in that encountering a stimulus cues all traces associated with it with the most recently created traces retrieved most rapidly neuroimaging data supporting these assumptions come from evidence of reductions in cortical activity as a function of response moreover activation of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex often has been linked to episodic memory retrieval accordingly the finding that responding to a recently ignored color word increases dlpfc activation has been interpreted as consistent with the view that particular interactions with a stimulus generate hirsch also neill rothermund wentura de houwer cf tipper finally responding to a recently ignored auditory tone was associated with a late positive electrophysiological signal often linked to episodic retrieval of old new stimulus information a finding also interpreted to suggest that responses to a stimulus generate action records that are response control and no go event related potentials following an episodic retrieval account then instances of responding or withholding responding to a particular cue should generate action records that are retrieved upon subsequent exposures to the cue thus impacting future go no go decisions a cue responded to recently should prompt more rapid retrieval of instances of having responded to the cue one s present action decision in favor of generating a response in contrast a cue ignored recently should prompt more rapid retrieval of instances of having withheld responding to the cue than of having responded to it thus biasing one s present action decision in favor of withholding should require a greater degree of response control than
was having the countess reveal herself to me his palms skimmed down her naked back to cup her she had ridden in sports cars with bobby who was truly a giant and had never felt a bit of the wariness eagerness and sense of sensual risk that was simmering in her blood now as chase watched nicole hesitate about moving up to front seat he wondered what was going on in her calculating little mind and sexual feelings hardly negative in themselves in the following example again from fiction the simple past form simmered is used in a positive co text ellel wishes me to announce that she is only days away from having in her custody the gaddir child no the gaddir young woman ander simmered delightedly under their incredulous stares you re fibbing whispered berkli at the very least you re fiction nevertheless the positive associations for the past tense clearly contrast with the negative associations of the perfect progressive use auxiliary been simmering in hard news and neutral associations in recipes they thus provide an indication of how the lexicogrammar of simmering can potentially realize meaning in a genre sensitive way as well as in a register sensitive way for much more empirical evidence in the bank of english thus given the different context dependent values for the lemma simmer instead of thinking in terms of a semantic prosody i judge instead that it is better for hard news reporting to think of simmer in terms of a register prosody so has been simmering has a negative register prosody for hard news erupted africans erupted again today collocates for erupted as he did with simmer lakoff refers to erupted when discussing heat of fluid in a container as the source domain and to anger as the target domain for the metaphor anger is heat he gives examples such as when i told him he just exploded she blew up at me we wo nt tolerate any more of your outbursts he goes on to say that this we see the characteristic lakoffian macro inference volcano from an instance she erupted which is mirrored in lee s analysis lakoff s perspective on erupted would seem to bolster lee s interpretation that the people of soweto are being metaphorized as a volcano in the hard news text the corpus evidence however would suggest otherwise let me begin once again with a collocate search in in the soweto text since the collocate search can only look for the form erupted this will include collocates for the past participle erupted as well the following collocates were found shown here with their frequency and score violence row fighting fury scandal war crisis riots dispute clashes furore protests conflict feud protest revolt tensions chaos killing struggle this time there are more instances of volcano there are also eight instances of vesuvius and five of nyiragongo but still the number of instances of volcano and names of volcanoes as collocates actually amounts of the total the largest score is for violence whereas the score for volcano is much lower at since the score for violence is over it is very significant these instances of violence refer to human phenomena so overwhelmingly erupted has a semantic preference for human phenomena as with simmering the newspaper corpus evidence initially raises doubt about reading erupted in are instances of erupted in the million news corpus around per cent of the instances of erupted are in the past tense a random sample of lines of erupted in the past tense from the million word news corpus can be seen in figure around per cent of the instances are from the hard news register and again overwhelmingly show a semantic preference for human phenomena a phraseology of abstract noun for human phenomenon erupted in the past tense erupted in the past tense in hard news could well be understood prototypically by regular readers of this register in terms of violence conflict etc rather than volcanoes since these meanings are overwhelmingly negative one can say there is a negative prosody for erupted in the past tense but is it a register prosody or does that is to say a semantic prosody one example of erupted in the past tense which has positive associations and which is not from the hard news register is the pub erupted this example is from the sports report register here is the expanded co text just as another undeserved german victory loomed up popped robbie keane to score a dramatic last minute equalizer the pub erupted another heroic draw for the irish to celebrate i suspect failed to win what is interesting about this football report example is that there is no modification of erupted for example with a postmodifier such as with joy however we would understand erupted here in a positive sense since football supporters are celebrating a goal other collocates in the sports report register such as press box ground room and stadium all relate explicitly to eruptions of applause joy etc in relation to the the non metonym crowd is particularly marked in this usage there are collocates with a significant score of in the million word news corpus indeed the fact that erupted in the past tense has largely positive associations in the sports report register but largely negative ones in the hard news register provides evidence for seeing erupted in register prosody terms rather than semantic prosody terms while the meanings around erupted in the past tense in hard news are overwhelmingly negative there are a small number of instances of erupted in the past tense in hard news which carry positive meanings biber et al comment that the need for economy affects is novel this is why biber et al argue the short passive is common in news similar things could be said with regard to erupted in the sports report register here erupted would seem to have a positive register prosody and so communicate joy without it
main conclusions of the previous sections there is no need for the pss or katz wang versions of rsa one might as well use just the basic hash and exponentiate signature scheme encryption scheme is the boneh rabin simplified oaep even though the reductionist security results for the schnorr signature scheme are quite weak from the standpoint of practical guarantees it is nevertheless surprising that the opponents of dsa in found only very minor objections to dsa and failed to notice that the modifications of the schnorr scheme used to get dsa had caused all of the reductionist security to disappear give evidence against the random oracle model actually is inadvertently providing evidence in support of that model finally we end with some informal comments an art or a science in his useful and wonderfully written survey bellare draws a sharp distinction between two phases in the development of a cryptographic system the design and study of the underlying mathematical one way function and the design and study of secure methods of using such a primitive to achieve specific objectives he argues that the former is an art because intuition and experience play a large role and the choice between two primitives is ultimately a judgment call in contrast according to bellare the selection and analysis of protocols can be a science it can almost be mechanized if provable security techniques are used he writes a science on the other hand i d like to claim that the design of protocols can be made a science in our opinion this is a spurious distinction the protocol stage is as much an art as the atomic primitive stage the history of the search for provable security is full of zigzags misunderstandings disagreements reinterpretations and subjective judgments for example all of our four assertions in the previous section are highly controversial and can neither be proved nor disproved later in the same article bellare makes a comment about terminology that we found helpful what is probably the central step is providing a model and definition which does not involve proving anything and one does not prove a scheme secure one provides a reduction of the security of the scheme to the security of some underlying atomic primitive ie to the hardness of an underlying mathematical problem for that reason i sometimes use the term reductionist to refer to this genre of work we have taken his suggestion and used the term reductionist security instead of provable security there are two unfortunate connotations of proof that come from mathematics and make the word inappropriate in discussions of the security of cryptographic systems the first is the notion of most people not working in a given specialty regard a theorem that is proved as something that they should accept without question of an intricate highly technical sequence of steps from a psychological and sociological point of view a proof of a theorem is an intimidating notion it is something that no one outside an elite of narrow specialists is likely to understand in detail or raise doubts about that is a proof is something that a nonspecialist does not really expect to have to read and think about the word argument which we prefer here has very different connotations an something that should be broadly accessible and even a reasonably convincing argument is not assumed to be in contrast to a proof of a theorem an argument supporting a claim suggests something that any well educated person can try to understand and perhaps question regrettably many provable security papers seem to have been written to meet the goal of semantic security against comprehension by anyone outside the field a is followed by a formalistic proof that is so turgid that other specialists do not even read it as a result proof checking has been a largely unmet security objective leaving the papers vulnerable to attack indeed stern has proposed adding a validation step to any security proof also the fact that proofs themselves need time to be validated through public the public finds the purported proof to be completely opaque theoreticians who study the security of cryptographic systems should not try to emulate the practices of the most arcane branches of mathematics and science mathematicians who study adic differential equations physicists who work on quantum chromodynamics and chemists who investigate paramagnetic spin orbit interactions do not seem bothered that their work is inaccessible to everyone outside a tiny circle of this is to be expected since their results and methods are intrinsically highly technical and out of reach to anyone who is not totally immersed in the narrow subfield moreover only a negligible proportion of the world s people somewhere between and have any interest in what they are doing the rest of us do not care one iota about any of it cryptography is different a lot of people in industry government and academia can have confidence in the systems used to protect encrypt and authenticate data the major theoretical advances such as probabilistic encryption the first good definition of secure digital signatures the random oracle model and the idea of public key cryptography itself are simple natural and easy to understand or at least become so with the passage of time in retrospect they look inevitable and perhaps even obvious at the time of course they were not at all obvious the the fact that these fundamental concepts seem natural to us now does not diminish our appreciation of their importance or our high esteem for the researchers who first developed these ideas this brings us to another way in which theoretical cryptography is more an art than a science its fruits and even its innerworkings should be accessible to a broad public one can say that something looks easy without meaning any disrespect top notch ballet could do it but the audience knows that their achievement is possible only through great talent and hard work by the same token researchers in provable
with collaborating centers that circle the globe at least in principle these collaborating centers agree to share knowledge disseminate strains facilitate the movement of reagents needed for laboratory research develop databases of virus genomes through image of shift and drift presented in testimony to congress by dr anthony fauci director of national institute of allergy and infectious diseases national institutes of health united states department of health and human services on march available at http figure global flyways as vectors of environmental risk uc davis avian influenza website everyday avian flu risks biology as virtuality image presented in testimony to congress by dr anthony fauci director of national institute of allergy and infectious diseases national institutes of health united states department of health and human services on july available at when it comes to surveillance the impulse is to rush to judgement since the very word connotes the extension and exercise of sovereign power but such networks are not necessarily bad in and of themselves they must be evaluated in terms of their effects what are these effects the first thing to note is perhaps the obvious point that these networks are increasingly global in reach as nicholas king comments we are long past the days of nationally bounded surveillance systems whose goal was to monitor and protect the population of any particular state what we are witnessing instead are familiar techniques of medical surveillance globally where the monitoring of individual bodies in specific places is augmented by the surveillance of the global population in the de territorialized space of informatics databases and the today these surveillance networks are being extended to animal populations including wildlife as animals are reclassified as biohazards both to each other and to humans the us department of the interior for instance has begun sampling adding to the growing influenza gene bank maintained by the nih and with the us departments of agriculture and health and human services has begun an interagency strategic plan for the early detection of hpai the european union is doing the same and the un s fao in conjunction with the usgs has recently unveiled an ambitious programme that will fit wild birds with tiny backpacks carrying communication technologies linked to a system of radio and disseminate real time migration data to ecologists virologists and epidemiologists around the while the image is comical it represents both the capacity and the desire to extend the unending examination of global populations across the animal kingdom in order to govern the global biological as a single integrated system containing emergent risks ultimately these surveillance systems seek to manage time and space on the one rapid response continuously striving to reduce the time between detection diagnosis and action in order to contain outbreaks and to accelerate the production of antivirals and vaccines needed to protect more distant populations analogies to fighting forest fires abound at still another level they are about anticipating the future through the development of immense gene banks of influenza viruses more than at the last count which can be quickly mined for corporations research labs and state agencies in the race to discover and patent pharmaceutical solutions in important respects then these networks presume that the answer to biology as virtuality is technology better surveillance better laboratories better vaccines and their advocates frame emergence as a logistical problem that demands a technological answer rather than as an existential problem that requires a philosophical response or a social or an economic problem a political solution perhaps most important for my purposes these networks involve efforts by states to act extraterritorially this geopolitical dimension was made explicit in the august statement of tommy thompson the former director of health and human services in the united states although it begins by framing health security as a humanitarian concern about america s mission of compassion abroad it becomes different as secretary of health and human services it is my privilege to run a department that performs a critical role in america s mission of compassion abroad public health knows no borders and no politics in recent memory alone we have seen aids leap from africa into our own cities we have seen severe acute respiratory syndrome spread with shocking rapidity from southern china to north america we have seen the west nile virus somehow cross the atlantic and begin a slow spread across our continent and we have seen that a key to controlling tuberculosis in the united states is controlling it in potential visitors to and from it should come as no great surprise that even in its post westphalian manifestation public health remains a geopolitical exercise concerned with the sanctity of borders dangerous migrations and foreign risks what has changed under the regime of biosecurity is the geography of health security for in an age of is not enough to protect borders the fight must be taken over there before it reaches here like the war on terror amorphous viral networks require a global strategy of preemption for such a strategy america needs allies other countries and international organizations such as the who fao and oie indispensable to our public health the efforts then is the cooperation leadership and engagement of our global health but cannot accomplish its mission alone a prime example of our cooperation with fellow nations was seen in our response to the sars epidemic to fight this disease us health officials cooperated with and worked in places like china singapore thailand taiwan and vietnam we swiftly undertook several measures designed to turn the tide and defeat the epidemic before it became a serious threat on us soil as the cdc put it in in an age of global networks it was far more effective to help other countries control or prevent dangerous diseases at their source than try to prevent their thompson s comments remind us that security even in a biological or medical register is a geopolitical discourse that simultaneously names the
with the e d assume that we are given the high order bits of s the observed running time for a single execution of is denoted by the total running time for factoring is then estimated as we obtain that the would take a few days for a bit modulus and a few years for a bit modulus this contrasts with miller s algorithm whose running time is only a fraction of a second for a bit modulus the experiments with prime factors of unbalanced size and with the e d are summarized in table in this case it was not necessary to know the high order bits of s and one recovers the factorization of n after a single application of lll the factorization of is easier when the prime factors are unbalanced conclusion we have shown the first deterministic polynomial time algorithm that factors an rsa modulus given the pair of public and secret exponents and d provided that pd the algorithm is a variant of coppersmith s technique for finding small roots of univariate modular polynomial equations we have also provided a generalization to the case of unbalanced prime factors finally we note that of the deterministic polynomial time equivalence between finding d and factoring is not entirely solved in this paper because finding an algorithm for remains an open problem new field trial distance record of km abstract verizon successfully carried juniper oc traffic on its richardson tx field trial network to and km respectively using mintera s gb s and transponders over xtera s all raman ultra long haul system loaded with gb s channels verizon xtera and mintera teamed up for a gb s ulh field trial at a record distance of km on verizon s dallas metro ssmf fiber ring in november this field trial was conducted under high loss conditions because of the numerous metro optical distribution frame connectors for every km span the fiber loss is about db including an average of db loss for connectors no special the ulh system with its nm operation spectrum window covering to extended band can provide gb s channels at ghz channel spacing or gb s channels at ghz channel spacing the system also provides flexible raman gain ranging from to db this field investigation of a gb s overlay carrying an oc application demonstrates that gb s is at gb s was also tested out to km without oeo regeneration this is the first demonstration of cs over this distance in a field environment the basic gb s ulh trial setup environments are shown in figs to fig the verizon dallas metro fiber cable loop of km is shown in fig the xtera km all raman based ulh system is in fig and the mintera invested substantial resources toward ulh technology development one part of the ulh technical development focuses on numerical simulation and conducting practical theoretical predication on capacity and distance software developed by vpi systems provided the opportunity to use an advanced simulation tool with the flexibility to design emulate and modify the simulations to fit verizon s research and development physical setups are correct all the simulation results were comparable with leading telecom vendors simulations and lab and field trail results for the last three years test and research concentrated on the precise design needed to upgrade ulh from the current to gb s without requiring major changes in verizon s optical network infrastructure it is known that a gb s signal not only has all the inherent impairments also has a much tighter tolerance over these impairments with the existing network fibers the primary concern was the gb s signal s tighter pmd margins here a simulation prediction on a gb s system upgrade to a gb s system is shown with special attention paid to the osnr variation in order to predict the potential for gb s deployment the test involves a simulation reference circuit with an an extremely long single span with dcf will stretch the transmission osnr to its limit the existing wdm system has channels at gb s the three center channels were modulated and the other channels were parameterized in order to save computation time it is assumed that the floor threshold limit of osnr is around db the system setup starts with pure gb s signals with the edfa only and then amplifier to pure raman amplification the raman pump power is strictly limited at mw to match the industry class laser recommendations the following five figures show which technical steps are required for successful upgrade from to gb s while keeping the same potential distance it is important to remember that this simulation is only based on osnr in a real deployment that with the utilization of a raman amplifier the upgraded gb s signals will have higher osnr than pure edfa based gb s signals to count fit the tight tolerance on gb s fig is an osa spectrum of channel wdm signals only three nrz channels in the middle were modulated fig shows the terminal gb s nrz eye diagram over km of ssmf transmission some distortion only showing a fairly closed eye fig shows the gb s eye diagram with the same propagation distance with the assistance of a raman amplifier the eye is opened up again fig shows the comparison of osnr mapping of the wdm channels the middle curve is the gb s channels with the edfa only the bottom curve is the gb s channels with the edfa only as a result it is very much on the borderline of being gb s channels after the raman amplifier is used the average osnr is about db which is enough to ensure a successful gb s upgrade and deployment it can be deduced that using raman amplifier in the gb s deployment is highly recommended another way to look at the advantage of using the raman amplifier is to use the
start when it recontracts with the entrepreneur at the start of period bankruptcy plays a role in helping the parties commit to a efficient contract the law may intervene in period by allowing the entrepreneur to trigger bankruptcy after a failure rather than renegotiating privately the role of bankruptcy in the model is twofold first the law provides protection to lenders the court guarantees the entire liquidation proceeds to the lender and ensures that the lender receives at least this much even if the project continues second bankruptcy allows for partial debt forgiveness that grants the viable but entrepreneur a sufficient stake in his her future output the court achieves this by mandating the entrepreneur s repayment obligation to the bank in period if the firm continues operating this characterization of bankruptcy closely resembles the existing chapter in that the entrepreneur s obligations to the bank are capped by the law rather than the result of negotiations backed by apr ex ante efficiency losses will occur due to lower period effort these losses however are smaller than the gains from greater effort ex post stemming from the additional debt forgiveness in a world with heterogeneous entrepreneur types i consider the possibility that enforcing greater debt forgiveness for the entrepreneur will cause the bank to screen projects more carefully setting a higher standard for entrepreneur quality before extending quality entrepreneurs access to startup funds in period and or the lender s desire to liquidate in period i find that both these potential problems are mitigated by the protection afforded to creditors and the parties ability to renegotiate in the shadow of bankruptcy under the assumptions in the model a standard best interests of creditors test is sufficient to prevent the fresh start policy damage to the lending market at the startup stage if the marginal entrepreneur type that receives startup funds is one that will be liquidated in bankruptcy in any case then the fresh start policy has no effect on the bank s payoff for this marginal type the bank will continue to liquidate and receive all the proceeds greater debt relief which only applies to high quality entrepreneurs who continue reduces the bank s interim profit on only the most profitable entrepreneur with respect to the decision to liquidate or continue the firm in bankruptcy a court imposed debt level that is too low may indeed distort the bank s preference toward liquidation it is in this environment that private workouts will provide a critical complementary role to a fresh start policy lower quality entrepreneurs who would be otherwise liquidated because of excessive debt forgiveness have an incentive to negotiate with the bank prior to filing for allow the bank to take a larger debt claim in a workout because it gives them a chance to continue the project when bankruptcy would result in a shutdown this article contributes to existing theoretical research on bankruptcy in considering the postbankruptcy incentives that laws affect which has been overlooked in the literature in my model the optimal bankruptcy policy will weigh the postbankruptcy benefits of debt relief against the potential prebankruptcy costs of credit at the startup stage and lower effort to avoid failure along with the within bankruptcy costs of distorted liquidation reorganization decisions all of which have been analyzed before in isolation adding the postbankruptcy benefit of debt relief combined with a relationship lending environment challenges pro to prebankruptcy incentives and perfectly competitive capital markets of existing approaches to bankruptcy law design the most similar to this article is povel which explores the trade off between the prebankruptcy moral hazard benefits of a tough procreditor law and the within bankruptcy benefits of a soft prodebtor law which encourages managers to reveal negative information at an earlier date as with most theoretical models of bankruptcy rules policies that the creditor and debtor would write into the contract themselves ex ante a second important contribution of this model is to demonstrate that optimal bankruptcy outcomes need not arise from pure private contracting in my model the overall efficiency gain from debt relief entails an interim wealth transfer from lender to entrepreneur which the lender cannot commit to provide this means bankruptcy providing justification for this real world feature of bankruptcy law which is often questioned on theoretical grounds the rest of the article will proceed as follows section introduces the setup and timing of the model the participants and the main assumptions to generate intuition section considers a simplified version of the model with a single entrepreneur type i then allow for heterogeneous entrepreneurs in section the screening activity of lenders in section i consider a robustness check on the analysis allowing for perfectly competitive lending markets throughout when banks face perfect competition ex interim and ex post i find that the fresh start policy has no impact on social surplus positive or negative since the bank has no interim market power it will voluntarily provide the optimal amount of ex post debt forgiveness making with analysis and policy implications model setup to make the setup of the model clear i begin by introducing in turn the available projects followed by the three groups of players in the game entrepreneurs banks and the bankruptcy investment projects entrepreneurial investment projects can last for at most three periods in period entrepreneurs choose a bank to create a lending relationship in this period entrepreneur and the chosen bank learn about the entrepreneur s ability by the end of the in period an investment project requires startup financing in order to proceed unworthy projects can be shut down after the project is financed and the entrepreneur chooses his her action the project will be revealed as a success or a failure success in period yields cash flow if success occurs in period the game ends at that point if the project fails and the game continues to period at this stage the project can be continued with no further investment or it can be liquidated for
position of respect and status within the group other functions identified include more overtly power based strategies such as controlling and as well as psychological strategies such as defending coping or relieving tension one function of humor not restricted to business contexts is considered to relate to feelings of superiority we laugh at others misfortunes or errors in other words humor is at the expense of someone a joke always holds someone up to ridicule in in this sense there is an inevitable trade off between the affiliative or positive face aspect of humor associated with those who share the joke and the distancing or negative face associated with being the butt of the joke related to this a second function of humor is said to be relief from tension where humor or laughter can provide a release of repressed emotion such as anger or frustration from her study of danish and spanish simulated negotiations grindsted concludes humor probably plays an important part in actual business negotiations particularly with regard to facework grindsted found that humor was commonly used to relieve tension in both spanish and danish groups although joking was more frequent in the spanish group and the strategies and patterns used to develop jokes were different between the two groups reflecting differences in priorities concerning participants face needs the amount of research done in the use of humor in is limited but the interaction based studies carried out analyzing workplace humor suggest a relationship between humor and workplace cultures for instance holmes et al claim that humor can provide insights into the distinctive culture which develops in different workplaces or communities of practice holmes suggests that humor varies in both quality and quantity in the various new zealand work environments she investigated and that different styles of humor emerge in workplaces such as the factory floor and meetings in both private and public institutions despite variations in the frequency and type of humorous episodes in these workplaces holmes concludes that there are some basic functions that humor performs in such professional contexts to summarize these are that humor contributes to social cohesion in the workplace increasing feelings of solidarity or collegiality between co workers to defuse the pressure when they know they have nt acted as they should have or have done something stupid humor in the workplace can have a more aggressive side it can be used as a repressive discourse device ie managers often use humor to soften directives or criticisms making it harder for subordinates to contest them subordinates can also use humor to contest their superiors challenging their views or light of the erosion of the superior s authority adapted from holmes et al s summary of their research on language in the workplace at a more anecdotal level humor has been seen as having a positive function in business contexts for instance kushner states that the real objective of meetings is to exchange information or solve a problem if humor contributes to a free flow of information then it can actually speed things up humor can be a valuable asset in many meeting situations for example it can be used to help put people at ease make bad news easier to accept or introduce a sensitive subject nevertheless such a positive view of the role of humor in business may well be anglocentric as lewis points out lewis claims that humor is used most systematically in business in anglo most intertwined in business talks the british hate heavy or drawn out meetings and will resort to various forms of humor and distracting tactics to keep it all nice and lively lewis suggests that while introducing humor into international talks may have advantages in terms of putting people at their ease breaking the ice and speeding up issues it can also have negative consequences due to cultural differences in its use if all values are relative and culture based then these include humor tolerance and truth itself and remember that laughter more often than not symbolises embarrassment nervousness or possibly scorn it would seem then that how humor is used and indeed interpreted in business talk is complex and while there is a considerable amount of anecdotal evidence to suggest that this is an issue in international business contexts there is limited interaction based analysis of authentic business events to support this the current study aims to add to this body of research investigating the occurrence and role of humor in a series of intercultural business meetings analytical framework research into business communication in the last two decades has turned upside down earlier ideas of how organizations work and what managers do for instance the work of those such as mintzberg stinchombe and weick have highlighted the considerably fragmented nature of managerial work on verbal interaction and the centrality of information in organizations this growing interest in business communication and particularly international business communication is also apparent in the increasing number of studies from a range of language related backgrounds such studies represent a change in emphasis away from the structural organization of professional talk generally favored by and discourse analytic research towards a more pragmatic or functional analysis focusing on the strategic use of linguistic resources to achieve certain outcomes this view of language as a resource for creating or maintaining power relations has been gaining ground within sociolinguistics from fields such as critical discourse analysis social psychology and conversation analysis the view put forward is that in the course of verbal interaction we necessarily collaborate but we also frequently collude or compete with others as we pursue our personal or organizational interests or goals and use particular strategies to fulfil these goals in this sense most talk is influential as well as informative it is strategic and potentially powerful the approach in this study has been influenced and stimulated by these in management and linguistic research which see
so widespread has become the practice of weaving the word various critiques of the subject of western humanism and the politics of representation that the word now seems to signify a universalized descriptor of subjectivity however as defined by chandra talpade mohanty colonization almost invariably implies a relation of structural domination and a suppression often violent of the heterogeneity of the subject in question this reminder of the self evident but often suppressed of structures derived or appropriated from european or colonial and non european sources depending on the particular choices and impositions of their histories in the australian context peter dunbar hall and chris gibson argue that attempts to define aboriginal expressions through western concepts such as traditional and contemporary are futile rejecting notions of a dichotomy between music deriving from the pre colonial past and the present dunbar gibson suggest that aboriginal music is a thread of expression that has always and is continually changing indigenous australian musicians live in very diverse contexts and perform in a wide range of styles for example musically speaking there seems to be no logic in placing traditional northern territory wadjiginy songman bobby lane and urban rap group native ryme syndicate in the same category however there are aspects of a shared indigenous postcolonial link such artists similarly crawford and langford ginibi are from two very different parts of australia s eastern state new south wales crawford s baarkanji country is in the state s dry south west while langford ginibi s bundjalung country is in the lush north the east new south wales was colonized before other parts of australia with the result that indigenous languages and musical forms changed than in northern central and western australia crawford was multilingual with a knowledge of baarkanji musical traditions but her work required her to move often she spent most of her life away though not far from baarkanji country and she was most familiar with the english language folk and country music as a baby langford ginibi heard her parents speak bundjalung but she grew up away from the language and found that she could remember only some words phrases in adulthood english language popular music especially country is the form she knows best the postcolonial experiences of crawford and langford ginibi are clearly different from those of some indigenous musicians in northern australia where musical forms have survived with different levels and kinds of disruption and where many indigenous languages are spoken as first languages however crawford and langford ginibi identify and represent themselves as primarily indigenous the kinds of disruption and where many indigenous languages are spoken as first languages however crawford and langford ginibi identify and represent themselves as primarily indigenous the ways they perform and use the musical forms they know are inextricably related to other aspects of their lives as indigenous australian women in effect by claiming their respective baarkanji and bundjalung identities as well as their chosen western musical forms they bring those musical brett represents her parents as preferring to identify with culture not seen unequivocally as jewish after their survival of auschwitz brett recounts a childhood and youth in which she had minimal contact with jewish traditional music or orthodox religious practice however as she in her texts brett turns to explicitly jewish traditions such as the kaddish and musical forms such as klezmer alongside the popular music of her australian generation the music heard in brett s world is most often western rock and art music two forms with implicit links to secular jewish traditions ruptures in cultural practice including perceived moves from religious to secular do not negate brett s jewish identity rather they may be seen as embodying it through ruptures in cultural practice including perceived moves from religious to secular do not negate brett s jewish identity rather they may be seen as embodying it through her writing brett identifies herself primarily as a child of jewish holocaust survivors the ways she uses and responds to rock and art music relate to her parents and her own histories in effect she writes back to europe the site of her family s devastation while also performing the role of others are sudden violent and extreme the changes wrought by colonialism and diasporic movement are often extreme but they do not erase the histories of surviving colonized decolonizing and displaced communities rather than being silenced those histories continue to reverberate in different forms as dynamic cultural practices continue to be renegotiated and reconstructed on their traces brett langford ginibi and crawford all had forms of memoir published in the early until this period narratives of imperial progress productive settlement and acquiescent assimilation had enjoyed the highest frequency and volume in century australia the three women s texts may be read as diverting the flow of such narratives as they interrupt supercultural the period around when australia commemorated the bicentenary of the founding of new south wales as a british penal colony saw an unprecedented supercultural the period around when australia commemorated the bicentenary of the founding of new south wales as a british penal colony saw an unprecedented public demand both for stories of indigenous dispossession and for stories of century immigrants experiences as more australians began to address gaps in previous representations of the nation s postcolonial history relations with the past were unsettled and renegotiated in their texts crawford recall silences associated with dispossession separation and loss and use references to or citations of music to evoke the sites of their memories brett uses musical imagery and references to articulate her family s memory traces her texts sometimes unsettle notions of australia as a migrant haven in which new australians cheerfully bloom and the second generation silently assimilates bhabha s contrapuntal notion of evocation and erasure of the nation s totalizing is useful to the reading of crawford langford ginibi and however bhabha s emphases on the models of hybridity and the third space are arguably less useful despite his
factor optical sensors with a resolution of ppi are already commercially available more excitingly optical sensors with resolutions of ppi are being developed which not only allow capturing level use of level features in an automated fingerprint identification system has been studied by only a few researchers existing literature is exclusively focused on the extraction of pores in order to establish the viability of using pores in high resolution fingerprint images to assist in fingerprint identification stosz and alyea proposed a skeletonization based pore and branch points in the skeleton image are extracted and each end point is used as a starting location for tracking the skeleton the tracking algorithm advances one element at a time until one of the following stopping criteria is encountered another end point is detected a branch point is detected and the path length exceeds a maximum allowed value condition implies that open pore finally skeleton artifacts resulting from scars and wrinkles are corrected and pores from reconnected skeletons are removed the result of pore extraction is shown in fig during matching a fingerprint image is first segmented into small regions and those that contain characteristic features such as core and delta points are selected the match score between a given image pair is template regions wherens is the total number of regions in the template np is the number of pores detected in template region and nmp is the number of matching pores in region note alignment is first established based on maximum intensity correlation and two pores are considered matched if they lie within a certain bounding box finally experimental results based on information a lower frr of percent can be achieved at a far of percent based on the above algorithm roddy and stosz later conducted a statistical analysis of pores and presented a model to predict the performance of a pore based automated fingerprint system one of the most important contributions of this study is that it mathematically demonstrated the pores having the same relative spatial position with another two pores is the probability of occurrence of a particular combination of consecutive intraridge pores is and the probability of occurrence of a particular combination of ridge independent pores is in general this study provides statistics about pores and demonstrates the efficacy of using more recently kryszczuk et al studied matching fragmentary fingerprints using minutiae and pores the authors presented two hypotheses pertaining to level features the benefit of using level features increases as the fingerprint fragment size or the number of minutiae decreases and given a sufficiently high resolution the discriminative information contained in a small fragment is point out that there exists an intrinsic link between the information content of ridge structure minutiae and pores as a result the anatomical constraint that the distribution of pores should follow the ridge structure is imposed in their pore extraction algorithm which is also based on skeletonization specifically an open pore is only identified in a skeleton image when distance from an end based on the geometric distance was employed for pore matching although the hypotheses in previous studies by stosz et al and kryszczuk et al are well supported by the results of their pilot experiments there are some major limitations in their approaches skeletonization is effective for pore extraction only when the image quality is very good as the image comparison of small fingerprint regions based on the distribution of pores requires the selection of characteristic fingerprint segments which was performed manually in the alignment of the test and the qurey region is established based on intensity correlation which is computationally expensive by searching through all possible rotations and displacements the presence of correlation value only custom built optical sensors rather than commercially available live scan sensors were used in these studies the database is generally small we propose a fingerprint matching system that is based on ppi fingerprint images acquired using cross match are also extracted in our algorithm we introduce a complete and fully automatic matching framework by efficiently utilizing features at all three levels in a hierarchical fashion our matching system works in a more realistic scenario and we demonstrate that inclusion of level features leads to more accurate fingerprint matching for example the distribution of pores is not random but naturally follows the structure of ridges also based on the physiology of the fingerprint pores are only present on the ridges not in the valleys therefore it is essential that we identify the location of ridges prior to the extraction of pores besides pores ridge contours are also considered as level information during image acquisition we observe ppi than the pores especially in the presence of various skin conditions and sensor noise in order to automatically extract level features namely pores and ridge contours we have developed feature extraction algorithms using gabor filters and wavelet transform pore detection valley lying between the two ridges however it is not useful to distinguish between the two states for matching since a pore may be open in one image and closed in the other image depending on the perspiration activity one common property of pores in a fingerprint image is that they are all naturally distributed along the friction ridge as long as the ridges are identified the locations of pores are also gabor filters which has the form where and are the orientation and frequency of the filter respectively and are the standard deviations of the gaussian envelope along the and axes respectively here represents the position of a point after it has undergone a clockwise rotation by an angle an example of enhanced fingerprint image after gabor filtering is shown in fig it is clear that ridges are well separated from the valleys after enhancement the above procedure suppresses noise by filling all the holes on the ridges and highlights only the ridges by simply adding it to the original fingerprint image we observe that both open and closed pores are retained as ridges is low in fig in
criticism in any of the cultural symmetrical given the high correlation between the two cultures effect sizes it is not surprising that westerners also self enhance more in the bae and the fbaen methods these methods yielded some of the strongest effects for westerners the weighted average the fbaen yield qb stronger self enhancement effects than the other methods for both cultures considering the bae and the fbaen methods in evaluating the question of whether east asians self enhance the particular method thus is an important variable for consideration why do east asians show clear evidence for self enhancement in the bae determine the strength of self enhancement whereas the other methods are artificially suppressing the full extent of individuals self enhancing motivations this possibility would suggest that east asians genuinely possess self enhancing motivations albeit weaker than those of westerners and the bae and the fbaen are the only methods that are sensitive one could challenge the validity of the benchmark of peer evaluations used in heine renshaw or one could question whether persistence on tasks that lead to success as used in heine kitayama lehman takata et al is a strong test of self enhancement it seems unlikely to us that the divergent set of methods that have been applied to the fbaen are artificially inflating people s self enhancement whereas the other methods are providing reasonably accurate assessments of people s motivations to the extent this possibility is true it suggests that east asians do not possess self enhancing motivations and they appear to possess them group s average some research maintains that the bae and the fbaen designs do not measure self enhancing motivations per se but instead reveal cognitive biases regarding how people process singular versus distributional information klar giladi and colleagues have proposed one the tendency for people to believe that ebta that is it is not just the case that people view themselves to be better than average they also view randomly chosen specific others as better than average klar and giladi argued that in making a comparative judgment between a singular target and a generalized target evaluations reflect their absolute evaluations of the singular target which is themselves in the bae and fbaen designs this means that people will tend to view desirable objects as better than average whereas they view undesirable objects as worse than their group s average their evaluations largely ignore the distributional target to bae have been known for some time sears identified a person positivity bias in which any randomly chosen individual was seen to be better than average alicke et al found that the bae was attenuated dramatically if instead of comparing themselves to a generalized target people instead compared themselves to a randomly chosen singular target giladi and klar demonstrated a randomly selected soap fragrance to be more desirable than its group average it would be absurd to conclude that people are viewing randomly selected objects and others to be better than average because of self enhancing motivations although the ebta effect is implicated in bae studies it is not the sole cause of significant effects in those studies in addition that the self is better than average for example although the bae is reduced when individuals compare themselves with specific others americans still tend to view themselves more positively than they view specific others judgments of how the self is better than average thus can be seen as being composed of the cognitive bias involved in comparing a singular target to similar to the bae method the fbaen method requires participants to evaluate themselves in contrast to a generalized target usually the average person from their school as such the same cognitive difficulties in comparing a singular target to the generalized target should contaminate people s relative to be unlikely to happen to them leading them to indicate that their likelihood is less than average for example klar et al found that people viewed a randomly chosen specific target to be less likely to experience a future negative event than the generalized target of the average peer furthermore because the optimism bias in relative likelihood estimates on their own perceived likelihood and largely ignore the likelihood of others klar et al price pentecost voth the ebta effect is much weaker for estimates of positive future life events that is not implicated in other methods of unrealistic optimism other research on unrealistic optimism reveals a much weaker bias for members of both cultures although table reveals that the weighted average effects in the fbaen design were these differences were significant qb for east asians and qb chang asakawa sanna heine lehman or for absolute likelihood estimates of future life events in contrast westerners have been found to show unrealistic optimism for not only negative events but also positive ones some evidence that the ebta effect is behind the significant self enhancing tendency among east asians for the fbaen design can be seen in two studies in the metaanalysis unlike the other cross cultural studies of the fbaen chang and asakawa had participants evaluate their relative likelihood of experiencing a random target as has been explored in other studies of the ebta effect it is a specific target consistent with the predictions that east asian self enhancement in the fbaen is driven by the ebta effect and not a motivation for self enhancement east asians demonstrated evidence for unrealistic pessimism when comparing themselves to a sibling and the difference was significant qb elves to a sibling than when comparing themselves to the average student and the difference was significant qb east asians do not show self enhancement in the fbaen when they compare themselves with a concrete target it remains to be seen however whether east asians would show a significant optimism bias in the fbaen when they compare themselves to a concrete target with whom they do not have a relationship and the fbaen are especially sensitive measures of self enhancement motivations this conclusion loses
their performance the adb initiatives bear some resemblance to the ebrd s emphasis on evaluation and diagnosis of law on the books however while the for the design of insolvency regimes at least the substantive side of insolvency law unlike the ebrd it does not try to measure implementation of formal law thus the adb balances diagnosis with prescription but at the cost of the frequency and depth of the diagnosis itself imf international financial system that compelled the imf legal department toward creation of a broader policy product that would simultaneously be diagnostic and prescriptive in this shift of emphasis from a reactive to a preventive orientation the imf moved from its iterations of country initiatives to a higher level of rationalization the code could be applied both inside the imf and among member countries in the imf published a small book entitled orderly and effective insolvency procedures the blue book begins with general objectives and a list of common issues that all insolvency regimes of whatever legal and historical provenance must confront it maintains that every insolvency system must provide two frameworks a tacit claim to a broad scope of intervention comparable to the economists mandate to manipulate economic levers such as interest rates while also building economic institutions such as restructuring and banking systems the blue book organizes its normative model very simply with chapters on liquidation of companies reorganization of companies institutions which summarizes the preference of the imf s legal department the imf takes a distinctive position in the international division of labor it is the international institution with the most powerful economic sanctions especially as it usually acts hand in hand with the us treasury field it strikes just the opposite balance than the ebrd instead of extensive evaluation with a limited normative template it offers an extensive normative template without public assessments world bank create norms or principles for substantive insolvency law and all the institutions upon which it rests this defined an ambitious agenda that would come to include both prescriptive frameworks and assessment tools procedurally the insolvency initiative set out to combat the world bank s reputation for heavy handedness and imperative diktats by the bank initiative has followed an iterative process where successive drafts are circulated and discussed in forums throughout the world while this was intended to give the appearance of inclusiveness and thus solve a besetting legitimation problem of the world bank in fact neither the mode of deliberation nor drafting have been systematically representative of the world s contrast to the united nations commission on international trade law earlier drafts of the world bank s principles emphasized the systemic nature of its enterprise while it includes the substantive topics common to other enterprises it goes far beyond the imf s and adb s black letter law focus to include all the institutions necessary for the functioning of a fully defined insolvency regime whereas the adb offered standards conclusions the world bank presents principles and guidelines the world bank styles these principles as a distillation of international best practice alongside its principles the world bank has designed an assessment template that offers an extensive set of standards for any country keyed into the principles the template proceeds successively to raise bank s purportedly global standards the template therefore offers a normative model in another guise the world bank complements internal self evaluations by nations with external bank staffed evaluations of a country s insolvency system in a four year program set up by the bank the insolvency staff often in cooperation with officials from other multilaterals and consultants intends to undertake some reviews of developing countries all carry more the implication that favorable outcomes or favorable adjustments will affect future lending decisions by the bank of all the international institutions therefore the bank goes farthest to develop both diagnostic instruments of law on the books and law in action and to balance these with an extensive list of principles that cover both substantive law and legal institutions normative templates and diagnostic instruments have gone through several rounds of refinement most notably in the case of the world bank whose respective drafts of the principles have been under revision since and still remain to be released in their final approved version the reforms among the institutions also display a cyclical quality for each subsequent template or assessment instrument is made not only with the awareness of those other ifis but with the intent of building upon prior efforts either by tailoring them to particular organizational mandates or by expanding their scope in this sense more than a division of labor has emerged the cycles of reform across institutions have the effect of ratcheting up the sophistication of global instruments and of pressing them toward a global consensus in which all ifis subscribe to broadly similar of cooperation and competition cooperation because the institutions are aware of each other s efforts and may even collaborate competition for the prize of being the institution able to claim authorship of the preeminent global standard professions the metabargaining that occurs during lawmaking offers a prime opportunity to fix jurisdictional rights in place similarly we might expect that conflict among professions for jurisdictional rights will occur when divisions of labor among professions are being built into global normative codes of insolvency practitioners which is a peak association of national organizations and the international bar association which is a membership organization of lawyers to overstate the case slightly each thrives in rather different types of bankruptcy regime lawyers in rule and court governed regimes and insolvency practitioners in private market based schemes workout specialists from banks bankruptcy judges and some lawyers who specialize in bankruptcy into an energetic ingo that has partnered closely with international institutions to turn its expertise into global standards it does so by allying with international institutions and by providing technical assistance to global initiatives for instance insol was perhaps the most important single ngo in the development trade law to
as having beliefs implicit in its intelligent in order to take the members of a community as members of a community of discursive scorekeepers whose activity confers conceptual content the interpreter that is the subject maintaining what i have marked as the second stance must be capable of giving an account of what the members of the community are doing as brandom says such interpreters properties that are implicit in their scorekeeping interpreting a community as a scorekeeping community interpreting it as expressing an original intentionality means being able not just to attribute to others the role of discursive scorekeeper that which we implicitly do in order to be considered a member of community in the first place but also in interpreting a community as a scorekeeping we must be able to recognize the community s members acknowledgement of discursive commitment this is as it were not merely to know how to play the game but to also know that it is played in such and such a manner of this complex but essential point brandom writes interpreting a community as exhibiting original intentionality is taking it that the broadly inferential proprieties that articulate the conceptual contents of their expressions their deontic scorekeeping practices the proprieties of scorekeeping are then in the interpretive stance understood as proprieties of practical reasoning the result of taking up the interpretive stance is that members of the discursive scorekeeping community are equipped with the means by which they can express that is say just what it is that they have been doing as members of the said community much of the account of logical and the smaller more approachable articulating reasons aims at providing the reader with the tools necessary to see how taking such an interpretive stance is possible indeed i think that brandom s systematic philosophical project can be understood in terms of these two broad dimensions on the one hand brandom presents us with a story of explication philosophy is essentially conceptual explication the making explicit of concepts we apply which we are responsible and to which we commit ourselves on the other hand the second dimension of brandom s theoretical project the expressive dimension the flip side of the coin makes it possible for we members of the discursive community to give an account of ourselves our practices in virtue of which we are members of the community the theory of discursive practices becomes available expressively to those to whom bow is what brandom calls expressive completeness in one of his most elegant aphoristic phrasings in making it explicit a book in which there are more than a few he writes having been all along implicitly normative beings at this stage of expressive development we can become explicit to ourselves as normative beings aware both of the sense in which we are creatures of the norms and of discursive beings at this state of expressive development we can become explicit to ourselves as discursive beings aware both of the sense in which we are creatures of our concepts and of the sense in which they are creatures of having access to the expressive resources supplied by the discursive theory itself allows the members of the discursive community to make expression of those same claims as expressed according to brandom this reflexivity is a kind of self consciousness and insofar as concepts are for him as they are for kant and hegel norms for judgment situating ourselves in a position to be able to make claims about concepts is situating ourselves in a position from which we expressive dimension to bear upon our own concept using capabilities and capacities such an activity requires we members of the community however to tell stories or tales about how it is that we have come to use the concepts which we do and have come to be guided by the norms to which we discursively adhere in novel cases this is to say that making explicit just how it is that we do act requires of us an account of how we have acted in the past an account of the precedent setting applications of concepts while the need for such a detailing of past conceptual applications would be necessary for any project which consists of both the dimension of explication and account of our own discursive capacities the history of the application of concepts consists in nothing other than the history of philosophy in tales of the mighty dead brandom writes the model i find most helpful in understanding the sort of rationality that consists in retrospectively picking out an expressively progressive trajectory through past applications of a concept so as to determine a norm one future is that of judges in a common law gathering evidence concerning the past application of concepts and thereby determining how one ought to apply concepts in the future is a rational process but is so in a distinctive sense brandom writes the rationality of the current decision its justifiability as a correct application of a concept is secured by rationally reconstructing the tradition of its applications cumulative expressively progressive genealogy of rationally reconstructing a tradition according to a certain model is brandom s project in tales of the mighty dead but according to what model is this tradition made in chapter three of part one of tmd brandom offers his readers an account of just what it is that he takes himself to be doing what leibniz hegel frege heidegger and sellars now as i hope this introduction has so far made clear brandom s historical project does not as i see it represent a kind of second or side interest as i have suggested we can sketch brandom s theoretical project in terms of two dimensions the dimension of explication and the expressive dimension the dimension of explication characterized by the recognition of the normative character we are responsible for things to which we are entitled and by which we express rational commitments this dimension
this notation was not formally to non randomized settings until by rubin as discussed in the intuitive idea behind the use of potential outcomes to define causal effects is very old nevertheless in the context of non randomized observational studies prior to everyone appeared to use the observed outcome notation when discussing causal inference more explicitly letting index units and be the column vector for the treatment assignments for the units the observed outcome notation replaces the potential outcomes with yobs where for the th component of yobs yobs wiyi yi the observed outcome notation is inadequate in general and can lead to serious errors see for example the discussion by holland and rubin on lord s paradox and rubin where errors are explicated that fisher made because of his eschewing the potential outcome notation part the assignment the second part of the rcm is the formulation or positing of an assignment mechanism which describes the reasons for the missing and observed values of and using a probability model for given the science pr although this general formulation with the possible dependence of assignments on the yet to be are unconfounded pr pr and they are probabilistic in the sense that their propensity scores e are bounded between where when the assignment mechanism is both probabilistic and unconfounded it generally can be written as proportional to the product of the unit level propensity scores which emphasizes the importance of propensity scores in design the term propensity scores was coined by rosenbaum and rubin where an assignment mechanism satisfying and is called strongly ignorable a stronger version of ignorable mechanisms coined by rubin which implies possible dependence on observed values of the potential outcomes such as in a sequential experiment but until randomized experiments were not defined using equations which explicitly show such experiments freedom from any dependence on observed or missing potential of assignment mechanisms were also discussed prior to but without the benefit of explicit equations for the assignment mechanism showing possible dependence on the potential outcomes for example in economics roy described without equations or notation self optimizing behavior where each unit chooses the treatment with the optimal outcome and another well known example from economics is haavelmo s formulation of supply and demand behavior but these and other economics and elsewhere did not use the notation of an assignment mechanism nor did they have methods of statistical inference for causal effects based on the assignment mechanism instead regression models were used to predict yobs from xi and wi with possible restrictions on some regression coefficients and or error terms where particular regression coefficients were interpreted as causal effects analogous approaches were used in other social sciences as well as in epidemiology and medical research such models were based on assumptions about the assignment mechanism and about the science which were typically only vaguely explicated and therefore could and sometimes did lead to mistakes inferential methods based only on the assumption of a randomized assignment mechanism were proposed by fisher and neyman and further developed by others values for null hypotheses significance tests and confidence intervals all defined by the distribution induced by the assignment mechanism the collection of propensity scores defined by equation is the most basic ingredient of an unconfounded assignment mechanism and its use for objectively designing observational studies will be developed and illustrated here in sections and part full probability model on the science the third and final part of the rcm is optional it is a model specification for the science the quantities treated as fixed in the assignment based approach and conditioned on in the assignment mechanism pr as random variables and so is the bayesian approach as defined first by rubin and further developed by rubin and in other places such as imbens and rubin the model for the science when combined with the model for the assignment mechanism and the observed data leads to the posterior predictive distribution of the science and thus also leads to direct posterior inference for all causal effects because the topic here is design in observational studies rather than the the analysis of observational studies this very brief section is our only digression into analysis of the observed outcome data yobs here to obtain the posterior predictive distribution of the missing potential outcomes ymis with th component ymis wiyi yi it is important to realize that in this formulation the model for the assignment mechanism which is with unconfounded designs essentially a propensity score model as in equation is not a model involving is here called the science but is conditional on the science conceptualizing an observational study objectively to approximate a randomized experiment an observational study should be conceptualized as a broken randomized experiment that is parts and of the rcm just described should be structured just as carefully in an observational study as in an experiment where in an observational study we view the observed data as having arisen from a hypothetical complex randomized randomized experiment with a lost rule for the propensity scores whose values we will try to reconstruct no outcome data in sight of critical importance in randomized experiments the design phase takes place prior to seeing any outcome data and this critical feature of randomized experiments can be duplicated in observational studies for example using propensity score methods and we should objectively approximate or attempt to replicate a randomized experiment when designing observational study propensity score methods are the observational study equivalent of complete randomization in a randomized experiment that is these methods are intended to eliminate bias but are not intended to increase precision of course propensity score methods can only perfectly eliminate bias when the assignment mechanism is truly unconfounded given the observed covariates and when the propensity scores are effectively known whereas randomization bias due to all covariates both observed and unobserved blocking and matching on particular covariates are methods for eliminating extraneous variation due to those covariates whether in the context of a randomized experiment
rachel kranton i should emphasize that these insights have been developed jointly the initial instigation or wordings are mine and which are hers see pareto george homans and charles curtis give an excellent summary of pareto that is fully consistent with the emphasis here jon elster also presents a similar conception of norms of course there are many interpretations of the gospel and some of them are even contradictory but that does her interpretation of the gospel a importance of norms in motivation some examples but religion is only one of the many realms where people have such an ideal to appreciate the ubiquity of norms in motivation it is useful to see some further examples those examples will demonstrate that people tend to be happy when they live up to how they think they should most of whom are professors teaching provides an especially familiar example we have a view of what it means to be a good teacher on our lucky days when we live up to our standards and our classes go well we tend to be happy on our off days when something goes awry in class we may even feel quite miserable such motivation in the workplace is the rule of the us workplace found that most employees care about their dignity at work they want to conceive of what they do as useful and they feel a lack of dignity if they are thwarted either by their own actions or by the actions of others those who are unable to get such satisfaction are likely to show their displeasure by acting up in some way or other terkel interviews people from many different occupations about their feelings about their jobs and concludes that people search for daily meaning as well as daily bread some of the interviewees are successful in this search like the stone mason who cruises his indiana county and basks in pride as he not infrequently passes his being disrespectful and after hours by getting into tavern brawls most workers are somewhere between these extremes but in all cases following terkel they have a feeling for how they should behave at work it is not just about the money it is also about living up to an ideal about who they think they should be such belief regarding how people should behave to life in the family betty friedan s feminine mystique gives what may be as good a description of norms and their impact on people s lives as can be found anywhere in this case regarding the norms for middle class women of the previous generation here is a brief sample of her description millions of women lived their lives in their stationwagonsful of children at school and smiling as they ran the new electric waxer over the spotless kitchen floor their only dream was to be perfect wives and mothers their highest ambition was to have five children and a beautiful house their only fight to get and keep their husbands they gloried in their role as like friedan herself who disagreed with them but felt compelled nevertheless to follow a norm with which they disagreed friedan says they suffered from the problem without a name in our terms they were losing utility because they were failing to live up to what one part of them thought they should do we may appeal to religious texts to work that indicates the importance of norms the sociologist erving goffman has found such an example he observed the behavior of children of different ages when they were brought to the local merry go round because appropriate activity differs by age the children should have predictably different reactions for the for older children there is a gap between their conception of how they should behave and riding the merry go round however much they may enjoy it they also feel the need to distance themselves from an activity that is so age inappropriate they manifest this distance by riding a frog rather than a serious animal like a horse alternatively they show off of course just the stuff of kids but goffman supplements it with a totally serious example in surgical operations because of their inexperience medical students are given tasks that are ridiculously they respond in the same way as the older children at the merry go round they also act the it is not identified in exactly our language gary becker s economics of discrimination offers an example of now standard economics that can also be interpreted in terms of such norms becker s theoretical innovation was to modify plain vanilla economic utility by the introduction of a discrimination coefficient he defined that as the loss in utility incurred by interpretation is that the discrimination coefficient represents the loss in utility for the white from physically engaging in an exchange with a black but this representation of the utility function can also be interpreted in terms of norms there is a code as to how blacks and whites should behave toward each other the white has a view that she should but ipso facto from the violation of the code there is reason to believe that such norm based interpretation better reflects the nature of discrimination than a physical exchange based theory in the pre civil rights period when becker was writing there can be no doubt that discrimination and the code that upheld it was stronger in the statistic reflects such a difference there were significantly lower levels of residential segregation by race in the south than in the goffman observed the behavior of such students in medical operations another example the milgram experiment demonstrates the strength of such only one of many ways of viewing it it is useful to give a brief description on arrival subjects were told that they were involved in a learning experiment they were put in the role of the teacher who should administer shocks to a learner whenever he gave a
has engaged in a paradoxical double move of withdrawal from and increased presence in the integration autonomy and self sufficiency underlying civic integration is now extended to its actual provision in that migrants are required to pay for the integration courses in full in addition the provision of integration courses has been farmed out to private organizations and state involvement in the whole affair is now reduced to the holding of standardized tests at the very end the dutch state thus does not care whether the courses are only the result counts it thus has quite literally become true that everyone is responsible for his own integration as an official in the justice ministry characterized the philosophy of civic integration however in a counterpoint to the privatization of integration coercive state involvement has massively increased while a controversial extension integration law at the last a crucial innovation on the coercive side has been to tie the granting of permanent residence permits to the successful passing of an integration test this creates a linkage between the previously separate domains of migration control and immigrant integration it also constitutes an entirely new view on immigrant integration so far the prevailing view had been that a secure legal status enhances integration now the lack of the refusal of admission and residence accordingly the entire integration domain is potentially subordinated to the exigencies of migration control the most drastic expression of this development is the new policy of integration from abroad which entered into force in march applicants for family reunification are now required to take an integration permit integration from abroad is no dutch invention it was first introduced in the context of the german aussiedler policy which is a preferential immigration scheme for ethnic germans at the moment that the ethnic credentials of ethnic german migrants had become questionable however the crucial difference is that the german government has supported german language acquisition abroad with massive exist integration from abroad thus boils down to no integration whatsoever making the integration test a perfect tool of preventing unwanted immigration overall what began as an immigrant integration policy has thus turned into its opposite a no immigration policy what has caused this evolution as suggested earlier the dutch domestic imbroglio after the killing of fortuyn rapidly followed by that of film maker theo van gogh certainly dutch style civic integration however the connecting of the previously separate agendas of integration and migration control is clearly a european wide trend european states are everywhere crafting sharply dualistic immigration policies in which for highly skilled immigrants a red carpet of relaxed entry and residence requirements is laid out while low skilled family migrants are meant to be fended off by toughened thresholds together with cohabitation and pre entry integration requirements civic integration is really targeting these low skilled family migrants whose numbers are to be reduced while those of high skilled immigrants are to be increased for more than three decades europe had not had significant programmes for labor migration so that still today the large majority of newcomers are host society language competence the harshest new measure dutch style integration from abroad explicitly targets only family migrants so that this measure is really an indirect way of preventing family migration among people with low skills but that is not all most of the family migrants targeted by the dutch policy are muslims of turkish and moroccan origins as elsewhere in europe turkish and moroccan muslims in the netherlands have a high in effect this means that even second and third generation migrants look for a marriage partner in their parents country of origin a recent dutch report on imported marriages claims that per cent of turkish youngsters marry a partner from their parents home country while in the case of moroccan youngsters per cent of females and per cent of males do the offspring of such unions grow up in that characterises the turkish and moroccan communities in the netherlands endogenous marriage migration perpetuates the problem of ill adapted ethnics preventing especially the dutch born offspring of intraethnic unions from melting into the host society that is the precise problem that the civic integration policy had originally set out to resolve providing a continuity with its latest heavily restriction minded incarnation quickly become a model for europe and variants of it are now practiced in sweden finland denmark germany france belgium austria portugal and spain if initially one could distinguish between countries in which civic integration was more right than obligation this is increasingly less so as the obligatory and coercive thrust of civic integration is moving to the fore a good example for this is france which has moved from initial voluntarism toward the obligatory and coercive pole though stopping short of the dutch extreme while the influence of the dutch example is explicit and incontrovertible the principle of civic integration in which newcomers are asked to adopt a shared standard of language and values certainly resonates closely with the traditional philosophy of the more astonishing and epitomizing the previous inaction of the state in matters of immigrant integration that the earliest incarnation of french civic integration appeared only in the late the plates formes d accueil voluntary half day instruction for certain categories of newcomers which were introduced by the socialist jospin government in more ambitious contrats d accueil et de inte gration programme which has evidently taken its cue from the dutch example it consists of one day of civics instruction followed by hours of french language instruction interestingly only about onethird of the expected newcomers in are targeted for enrolment in a french the majority of newcomers to france evidently is an asset that positively distinguishes the french from the dutch or german civic integration challenges where language acquisition is a much more pressing concern while this might lead to a lesser emphasis on the earlier phase of immigrant integration there has also been a countervailing consideration as the cour des comptes
be utilized in order to identify the twpd equivalent circuit including all parasitic elements by means of parameter fitting of the detected electrical output power of a twpd versus the dc photocurrent at a signal frequency of ghz a maximum electrical output power of dbm has been measured compared to the single pd from the same wafer with an active area of this is an improvement of db available power the db compression point amounts to and ma for the single pd and dc photocurrent increased linearly with the optical input power while the twpd reached a photocurrent ma the lumped pd was limited to ma due to a thermal failure a corresponding measurement at ghz signal frequency using a terminated twpd showed a maximum output power of dbm and a compression point of ma that compares favorably to a lumped element pd with a ps optical pulse source with ghz repetition rate followed by an optical amplifier fig depicts the detected pulse response of a twpd in comparison with the results of two lumped element pds at a constant output peak voltage of depending on the responsivity of the individual detector the average optical input power was adjusted to values between and dbm that amounts to ps ps and respectively while the miniaturized pd is already saturated the pd with an area of shows a considerably increased undershoot of in contrast the twpd is still operated in its linear regime and exhibits only small ringing due to its high power handling capability broadband impedance match and linear phase response for enhanced responsivity is presented used as a stand alone photodetector the reduced capacitance enables a transit time limited db bandwidth of ghz resulting in a bandwidth efficiency product of ghz at effective load the miniaturized pd represents a basic building block of the periodic parallel fed traveling wave photodetector the twpd based on four discrete pds a db bandwidth of ghz and shows a superior performance at higher frequencies when compared to a lumped element pd the return loss is determined to be better than db up to ghz demonstrating an ultrabroadband impedance match to the load an electrical output power of more dbm at ghz is achieved with a ghz twpd in the time domain an instrument limited recommend the parallel fed twpd for high speed and high power applications energy efficient ghz class charge recovery logic abstract in this paper we present boost logic a charge recovery on a combination of aggressive voltage scaling gate overdrive and charge recovery techniques in post layout simulations of bit multipliers with a cmos process at ghz a boost logic implementation achieves times higher energy efficiency than its minimum energy pipelined voltage scaled static cmos counterpart at the expense of times longer latency in a fully integrated test chip implemented using a bulk boost logic gates operate at clock frequencies up to ghz with a supply when resonating at mhz with a supply the boost logic test chip achieves charge recovery i introduction power minimization has become a primary concern in vlsi design several conventional techniques are utilized to curb dynamic and leakage power in conventional cmos circuits a given operating frequency at high operating frequencies however the energy and delay overhead of pipeline registers becomes significant and degrades overall system efficiency in systems with significant switching activity charge recovery circuits have the potential to dissipate less energy than their pipelined voltage scaled cmos counterparts several charge recovery logic styles have been proposed over megahertz these charge recovery techniques have been shown to achieve lower energy dissipation when compared to voltage scaled cmos achieving energy savings over cmos at higher operating frequencies has remained elusive however although performance limits of charge recovery circuits are fundamentally determined by the need for gradually transitioning power clocks prevalent operating frequencies in some of the main factors that lead to lower speeds in charge recovery circuits are the use of diode connected transistors the use of pmos devices in evaluation trees and the excessive time required to resolve the complementary outputs of the dual rail gates during evaluation in this paper we present a novel dynamic charge recovery across a range of frequencies much higher than currently demonstrated in charge recovery literature a unique feature of boost logic gates that enables energy efficient and high throughput operation is an aggressively scaled conventionally switching logic stage that operates in tandem with a charge recovery boost stage logic performs the logical evaluation of a boost logic pre resolves the differential outputs of a boost logic gate to the level of about one threshold voltage boost amplifies the difference between the outputs nodes to the full rail in an energy efficient charge recovery manner providing a large gate overdrive to fanout gates and thereby reducing delay in their logic stages thus boost logic achieves lower energy dissipation without incurring the concept behind boost logic each boost logic gate consists of two parts operating in tandem over nonoverlapping time intervals a conventionally switching logical evaluation stage and a charge recovering stage fig shows simplified voltage waveforms of a boost logic gate output in the first phase of its operation logic resolves the output nodes to supply rails and in making them track complementary resonating clock signals and oscillating with peak voltage these clocks will henceforth be referred to as power clocks this full rail swing provides fanout logic stages with a gate overdrive of allowing them to perform evaluation at frequencies much higher than expected of such aggressively voltage scaled logic although boost itself does not nullify these advantages to that end an initial voltage difference is provided to boost by logic greatly aiding its sense amplifying action and resulting in efficient charge recovery although previously proposed logic families have used the idea of increased gate overdrive through the use of bootstrapping overdrive more recently lvs logic has been proposed where sense amplifiers are used to amplify low swing gate
the mental act of comprehension is still active finally the verb grasp is a conventionalized metaphor whose senses are both alive to current speakers this observation illustrates that the fact that a word s meaning is highly conventional does not necessarily make its meaning dead in our case study we aimed to mark as metaphorical any word that has an active metaphorical basis in the sense of there being a widespread knowable comparison meanings of course depending on one s specific research interests an analyst could adopt a more liberal scheme and identify as metaphorical any word that currently has or once possessed a metaphorical comparison and contrast between its basic and contextual meanings this could be done for example for the contextual meaning of pedigree family tree if the historically original basic meaning crow s foot is considered acknowledging the bases for their decisions at specific points in applying the procedures in mip metaphor and polysemy corpus research has shown that a vast number of words especially the most frequent are polysemous metaphor is not the only mechanism that leads to polysemy for instance life and life are related meanings of the same word but the parts of step that require researchers to identify contextual meaning and decide whether there is a more basic meaning are intended to separate out cases of nonmetaphorical polysemy for nonmetaphorical polysemy a more basic meaning cannot be identified other meanings can be identified but these cannot be said to be more basic clearly the decision as to whether a meaning is more basic is ultimately subjective our guidelines as to the nature of basic meanings are make this part of the procedure more reliable metaphor and metonymy metaphor and metonymy are often confused even in scholarly discussions of figurative language the mip was designed to correctly discriminate metaphor from other types of meaning including metonymy through the application of step if the lexical unit has a more basic current contemporary meaning in other contexts than the given context decide whether the contextual meaning contrasts with can be understood in comparison with it the key term here is comparison there are heated debates over whether metaphors are understood via comparison as opposed to some other kinds of processes we do not employ the term comparison to necessarily support comparison theories of metaphor instead the word comparison and the decision whether the contextual meaning of a lexical but in comparison to the basic meaning is simply intended as a way of roughly identifying metaphorically used words as distinct from those that express other kinds of meaning including metonymy metonymic words typically express a stand for or part for whole relationship that differs from comparison processes of course as the literature of metonymy clearly shows there are many examples turn into metonymy in the sentence indira gandhi was cut down by her own bodyguards the words cut down appear to be metaphoric because the contextual meaning is killed and possibly that she fell in the process but the basic meaning of both cut and cut down requires the act of physical cutting however had she been literally cut with swords or cuirasses rather than shot the contrast would disappear the cutting would be one aspect of the act of down would be coded as nonmetaphoric however there is again a degree of complexity to the situation if it was felt that there were also resonances of cut down a tree or even cut down an enemy in battle then the like test using the domains of plants or battle would indicate a metaphor such cases need to be decided on an individual basis by looking hard at the context in which the word is used use of procedures such as check the cotext or apply the like test serve in most cases to resolve the problem once more even if a word is ultimately determined to be nonmetaphorical mip does not presently provide a mechanism for then suggesting whether the word may have metonymic meaning metaphor and simile metaphoric whether one defines them formally as a comparison marked by like as as if or as though or rhetorically as a metaphoric comparison that has a marker consider a simile from the novel purple hibiscus by the nigerian author chimanda ngosi adichie it was the same way i felt when he smiled his face breaking open like a coconut with the brilliant white meat inside at one corner and the water groaned like a man in pain as it drained the words a coconut with the brilliant white meat inside all have their basic meanings as do the words a man and pain because no different senses are evident from the context they are therefore treated as nonmetaphorical the verbs break open and groan and the preposition in on the other hand do have more concrete meanings and would be coded as metaphorically used at a higher level analysis the coconut and pain comparisons may be construed as metaphorical but in terms of this procedure the individual words themselves except for in are not metaphorically used the marker like itself might be coded as metaphorical at times if the basic meaning is considered to be marking a concrete physical similarity then linking the concrete coconut with the more abstract smiling would represent a similar but contrasting use however if the basic meaning of like is simply marking some sort of similarity then it is not usually metaphorical mip and other metaphor identification procedures there have been several other metaphor identification methods proposed in the interdisciplinary study of figurative language although some progress has been made in the development of programmes for the automatic identification of metaphors most existing methods are concerned with the manual analysis of linguistic data which remains the most flexible and widely used approach to metaphor identification perhaps the most popular of these is barlow kerlin and pollio s training manual designed to teach raters to identify figurative language in contexts ranging from
learning by doing structure meaning that industry and regulator continually revise both the ends and their own process through their participation in it transparency and accountability including accountability for adhering to non negotiable participatory norms are in the account supervision case above each firm in question was running its own live experiment with supervision processes considerably disciplined by real fears of civil liability and adverse reputational effects in the event of failure the regulator collected their experience and analyzed the ways in which different actors reached different solutions to the problem of supervision simultaneously learning about effective means for this demonstrates the need for firms to disclose information about their methods and experience more particularly where one or another actor encountered difficulty in developing a workable supervision system the regulator would be able to draw on others successful examples to help the struggling actor or pressure it to achieve better results the regulator could also better identify and then query firms that seemed to be relying on pro forma and potentially suboptimal appeared imperfect relative to the particular environment and capacities of that firm importantly as the account supervision case demonstrates regulation is not the only force pushing firms toward compliance on the contrary the shift toward outcome oriented and principles based regulation reflects the reality that rules are fashioned in an iterative way through a polycentric process in which regulation is only one in other component going into what scholars neil gunningham robert kagan and dorothy thornton have called an organization s license to in the account supervision case reputational effects network effects and concerns about civil liability had already driven the firms in question to establish independent supervisory systems to address the failings of the mandated checks that said a credible enforcement function writ large is a necessary component of principles based and outcome oriented regulation new governance theory is to be distinguished from industry self regulation and also from so called soft law in fact meaningful and effective enforcement capacity is a precondition to new governance an important component of credible enforcement is the regulator s own ability to specify measure and monitor its outcomes interrogate and tinker and learn from and adapt to challenges the regulator should operate along the same outcome oriented problem solving self reflexive lines that it requires from industry outcome oriented practice in its best form must mean something substantially different from unbridled regulatory discretion to interpret principles in any way the frontline regulator sees fit the outcome oriented approach then responds or amount to regulatory overreaching the continued investigatory mindset is also the principle minded regulator s defense against regulatory ossification over time malcolm sparrow s model of problem solving regulation is instructive both the externally in terms of the regulator s relationship to industry and internally in terms of the regulator s relationship to its own practices another promising analytical framework described as root cause system as a problem solving technique it involves asking a series of nested why questions about a particular failure each of which is meant to deepen the response to the it has clear application to organizational contexts such as securities law for example when the superficial reason for a regulatory failure is that a particular process was not in place by asking subsequent why questions one can access underlying causes for example a firm s not operate effectively to prevent wrongdoing because the firm had not turned its mind to the scenario that occurred it had not turned its mind to that scenario because its compliance department did not understand enough about its business processes its compliance department did not understand enough because it was institutionally isolated it was institutionally isolated because it was seen as a cost center making the numbers at any cost root cause analysis on the heels of a compliance failure also illustrates the important role that enforcement learning and other forms of on the ground learning play in enhancing overall regulatory capacity returning to the model certain fundamental priorities need to be kept in mind if the bcsc s outcome oriented approach is to remain as transparent as possible in addition to being good regulatory policy transparency fosters credibility and trust it reinforces the notion that bcsc action will not be arbitrary which in turn encourages responsible firms to believe that they will be rewarded for their responsibility relatedly the bcsc must resist the temptation to seize the low hanging fruit of easy technical violation cases in favor of more important resources wisely bcsc staff should cooperate with responsible firms where those firms continue to behave responsibly the bcsc has multiple remedies available to it and staff should tailor the nature of their response to the severity of the conduct at they should be creative and pragmatic within the limits of statutory power in devising effective remedial or enforcement such measures may respond to the punishment as a regulator should hold its greatest fire for the firms against whom deterrent action is necessary yet it should not hesitate to use that sanctioning power where necessary just as importantly it should be able to tell the difference the regulator s credibility and the so called enforcement pyramid approach is premised on the regulator s ability to identify problem firms and noncompliance accurately and to distinguish them respectively firms that periodically make mistakes as well as from market failures not associated with law risk analysis is a central tool here the use and continual revisiting of appropriate risk factors will also make the bcsc better at identifying bad actor firms and at imposing its regulatory pyramid over industry appropriately publication of the bcsc s risk factors would further transparency and credibility another part of this equation in fact each side has incentives to be trustworthy and open with the other the regulator needs industry s knowledge to remain credible and apprised of current industry practices regulated firms seek the legitimacy that regulatory approval confers not only for culturally expressive reasons but also
be the most stable adsorption sites the optimized configurations are shown in fig while the binding rules can be inferred from the theoretical results adsorption at fcc sites is preferred by ev to adsorption at hcp ones coherently with what was observed for pt adatoms gain chemisorption energy in rough proportion to the number of nearest neighbors which are step pt atoms this reflects the demand of under coordinated substrate atoms to be passivated a good agreement with the experimental ones when available the results by feibelman and coworkers are confirmed by a subsequent investigation on stepped pt stm images of the surface reveal that following adsorption at adatoms fully saturate steps they appear as depressions at the upper step edge the terraces if the step edges are decorated by monoatomic ag chains the surface reactivity towards dissociation drops very fast so that a times larger dose is necessary to achieve saturation at the steps the behavior of the initial sticking coefficient with ag coverage was monitored by has the specular reflectivity for the he beam shows a linear decrease during the formation of the first ag row and ag monolayer such behavior which repeats for indicates that the dissociation rate is proportional to the probability of finding an ag free region at the step edge and that ag locally modifies the reactivity of step pt atoms for a precise determination of the dissociation sites exposure was performed at at which the mobility of the precursor is still high but that of the adatoms is site for dissociation with the near edge fcc site in full agreement with previous results to further support this experimental evidence dft calculation for the molecular precursor and transition states on flat and stepped pt surfaces were performed again the pt pt and pt surfaces are employed to model adsorption at terraces and at and like steps respectively the and ts geometries for pt pt and ag pt the local molecular chemisorption potential energy minima emps and transition state potential energy et as a function of the energy of the center of the dband the calculated energies are in agreement with those of ref for the mps of on extended pt terraces moreover the emps decreases from ev at steps dissociation proceeds via elongation of the molecule as shown by the location of ts in the upper panels of fig computation of the final adsorption state confirms that terrace fcc sites are preferred by ev to terrace hcp ones and that bonding at edge bridge sites is ev stronger than that at terraces in absolute numbers the authors find dissociative chemisorption energies at the most stable site steps to ev at like steps these results were interpreted in terms of the so called d band model compared to the reference situation at pt the pt bands shift to higher energy at the ag decorated steps and to even higher energy at bare step sites this reflects the lower coordination of step pt atoms which leads to band narrowing and through local charge neutrality to an upshift of the local d bands since metal the mps and st potential energy correlates with the d band center as shown in fig enhanced photoreactivity of on stepped pt surfaces the photochemistry of on pt surfaces has attracted much interest since the first time it was detected in fact it is one of the few photochemical processes occurring on a metal surface and leading to photodissociation and were observed on pt at and under uv irradiation by hreels and stm defects are expected to influence the photochemistry of adsorbed molecules by increasing the lifetime of excited electrons and or by modifying the chemical state of admolecules with respect to those adsorbed at a flat surface a first indication in this sense is given by photo induced ar desorption experiments on coverage two ar depletion processes were identified the cross section of which differs by one order of magnitude ar depletion arises from collisional desorption induced by hot oxygen photofragments if they are produced more efficiently by uv irradiation of admolecules at defects the smaller cross section can be attributed to photochemistry at terraces while the larger one to hot fragments generated of on pt reported two regimes of photodepletion in the nm photon range the former occurring at the beginning of the irradiation process and having a total cross section of was ascribed to photodepletion on steps the latter showing a times lower cross section was attributed to photodepletion of terrace sites and pt surfaces exhibiting the same stepped structure but characterized by and atomic row wide terraces respectively fig shows the tpd spectra recorded after exposing the substrates at to a fixed amount of followed by controlled uv irradiation for no irradiation two peaks are present in the range corresponding on the contrary arise from the recombinative desorption of dissociated oxygen the effect of uv irradiation on molecules at step and terrace sites is monitored by comparing the reduction of terr and step peaks it is evident that photodepletion of at steps is two to three times faster than the detailed mechanisms at the basis of the photoexcitation process are still debated chemisorbs on pt with the molecular axis parallel to the surface the chemical bond forms essentially by interaction of the orbital of the molecule with the orbitals of the metal but all the molecular orbitals interact to some extent and undergo hybridization the vacant molecular orbitals located ev above ef for most molecular oxygen states but only ev above ef for the peroxide species at present it is not clear whether photodissociation and photodesorption on pt are direct or indirect processes mieher and ho estimated a threshold of ev for both the effects then if the mechanism were direct photodesorption would be easily explained as a transition and why its cross section increases monotonically with photon energy instead of showing a resonance at the transition energy a second possibility is that photodissociation is induced by uv
eight years following the nomination coefficient on the previous left third party vote in the pre post new deal regression is substantially larger relative to the coefficient on previous democratic vote than the coefficient on the previous left third party vote in the pre post bryan or pre post wilson regressions these results are consistent with the claim that the literature on us third parties is filled with various arguments for why the united states has a stable two party system this section briefly reviews some of the most common alternative claims about why us voters may or may not support third parties the review provides some justification for why we focus on electoral law and co optation explanations of party is that institutional arrangements such as the single member district the electoral college and the presidential system do not provide incentives for voters to support third parties or for high quality candidates to join third parties rosenstone et al write the single member district plurality system not only explains two party dominance it also ensures short lives for third parties the claim that simple plurality rule reduces the number of competing political the logic is that a strategic voter will not want to waste her vote on a third party candidate who will not win voting for a third party candidate who is sure to lose increases the risk that a voter s least preferred major party candidate may be elected explain the variation in third party electoral support across time since they have remained stable throughout the period illustrated in figure another claim in the literature is that third party electoral success is linked to the state of the economy however the evidence for a connection between short term economic economic depression the lack of a significant third party vote during the great depression and the success of third party candidates during periods of economic prosperity raises doubts about the connection between the economy and third party electoral the evidence seems more consistent with the conclusion in al a third claim in the literature is that the lack of resources and media exposure available to a third party relative the major parties limits the ability of third party candidates to compete effectively if this were true then we would expect to observe a rise in campaign expenditures around ansolabehere de figueiredo and snyder illustrates that the if the campaign resources were in fact causing the pattern of third party furthermore some historians have noted that the resource difference between the third party candidates and the two major parties was a significant problem even in the nineteenth century when third parties were relatively more successful at attracting electoral support media exposure was protected by government under the communication act of which made it mandatory for the media to provide equal access to third party candidates thus it seems unlikely that the resource and media explanation alone can explain the decline in the third party electoral support a more recent claim in the literature is that the and rosenstone et al which focus on third party presidential candidates argue that these mass third party movements were supplanted by individual third party campaigns in addition we know that the ratio of independents to third party candidates has increased during the twentieth century if the rise of candidate centered politics contributed to the decline of third party support then declined however as figure illustrates the electoral support for non left third party candidates did not replace the loss of electoral support by the left wing third finally chibber and kollman argue that the true effect of the new deal on third parties was through centralization and not co optation while the that centralization alone could explain the disappearance of third parties chibber and kollman claim that the centralization of economic and political power at the national level reduced the incentives for candidates and voters to affiliate with third parties since these parties tended to focus on local issues with little power to influence national the idea that third party with the historical literature the left third parties prior to which account for most of the electoral support for third parties during the early period had platforms that focused on national policies such as expansionary monetary policy and government control of various industries conclusion show that most of this decline is due to changes in electoral support for third parties on the left the second and main contribution of this paper is to provide evidence that much of the decline in third party voting in the united states was due to leftward shift in democratic party following the new deal previous scholars have discussed the ability of major and provide quantitative evidence that the overall decline in third party electoral support in late twentieth century was facilitated by the democratic party s adoption of a left wing position during and following the new deal one potential extension of this paper is to take advantage of the variation in when state democratic this would allow us to further identify the effect of democratic co optation of the left the disappearance of third parties should be correlated with the leftward movement of state democratic platforms although we highlight the role of the democratic party s adoption of the new deal agenda for explaining the decline in third party electoral support other noted above although we find no evidence that changes in electoral laws had an immediate affect on third party electoral support outside the south the effect of these changes may have manifested itself several years later for example the introduction of the direct primary may have helped the democratic party move to the left by electing candidates not connected ballot access later on thus the institutional changes may have had a lagged effect not necessarily captured in the estimation technique used in this paper the results also suggest that the changes in electoral laws may have had amore significant effect in the south this result matches the historical accounts regarding
above may prove fruitful in other regions with a rich archaeological record the past few years for example the former uniform interpretation of the lbk has given way to a new approach in which the emphasis is on the diversity observable at all levels from europe as a whole to within the southern part of the dutch province of limburg note although barbadian occupied the forests were mostly removed and there were no opportunities for the establishment of maroon communities how were the maroons using the landscape of northwestern st croix this seems like a pretty basic question to remain unanswered at this late date yet it is an important question in understanding slave resistance as forefront is archaeology prepared for this task the present paper is the result of an evolving proposal to archaeologically study sites of maroon refuge activity in the maroon ridge area of northwestern st croix in reviewing the archaeological literature it became clear that little work has been done on maroon camp sites where the that were tolerated or condoned by the euro caribbeans furthermore in considering the nature of maroon refuges it is evident that typical archaeological survey methods may fail to properly find recognize and interpret such sites we offer a preliminary paper at this juncture rather than awaiting field results has been pushing for the purchase and development of the area as a territorial park to commemorate the maroon experience on st croix under either scenario it will become necessary to assure that the maroon sites are discovered or unrecorded ground figure portion of a navigation chart showing topography and place names maroon ridge and maroon hole historic context marronage existed in various forms in every slave holding society in the western hemisphere although marronage is commonly referred to as maroons is categorized in one of two ways petite marronage also referred to as truancy or absenteeism where an individual left their plantation or other place of enslavement for a short period of time tending to return on their own or grand marronage an act of permanent escape accompong and nannytown both located in jamaica were also highly ensure their continued existence despite these examples most maroon communities were ephemeral and short lived under constant pressure from the militarily dominant european societies in which they existed marronage within the danish west indies was similarly varied although the historic centered around escape from the islands along what hall has identified as the marine underground to puerto rico vieques and tortola islands held by european powers that were often hostile to danish policy the maroons that miles combined the bulk of that retained by st croix did so at a place identified as maroon mountain or maroon ridge on st croix maroons of northwest st croix were discussed by oldendorp a moravian missionary and visitor to the danish west indies in oldendorp left a detailed account of island culture including a brief st croix rely on rainwater caught in rock crevices or basins for their drinking water oldendorp reports that the fruit of the susack tree was a major subsistence item of the maroons who often live exclusively on them a resident of st croix writing a decade before oldendorp s visit noted that kplanter families were being ruined by the running away of slaves in groups of as many as twenty to twenty five in a single night oldendorp provides details on the maroon hill people they are there protected by impenetrable bush and by their own wariness they keep every approach safe by attempting carefully to conceal small pointed stakes of poisoned wood so that the unwary pursuer might wound his foot on them and therefore be prevented from continuing the chase as a result of the unbearable can steal them from plantations on st croix they are so bold that they often venture down from their hills during the day and go into the negro markets in order to procure the necessities it is not at all easy to identify them among the great numbers of negroes in the market highfield and barac possibly wild foodstuffs in exchange at the market the market contacts also suggest that kin ties may have been important in supplying maroons oldendorp notes that the maroon problem was often addressed through organized hunts for the runaways yet states hunts such as these however are not organized to track down best champion of the permanent population school of thought dookhan offers a somewhat different interpretation of maroon mountain runaways never comprised a permanent body in the virgin islands such as the maroons in jamaica for when the slavehunt became too successful the slaves escaped to puerto rico that island had the island for one year after which they were pronounced free and given a plot of land to cultivate slaves escaping to puerto rico became lost to the virgin islands slave owners a loss which was more strongly felt since only the most robust slaves were prepared to hazard the dangers of the odd miles of ocean separating the slaves from st thomas and st croix had escaped to puerto rico the traffic became highly organized by the runaways themselves and in st croix there was a mountain hideout called maroons hole just east of hamm s bluff where hideaways were safely hidden in a cave whose entrance was protected by poles of poisonous wood society reports among them lies the so called maroon mountain where a few run away negroes still hide themselves maroon ridge remains a historically significant location to st cruzans it has generally remained a rugged remote place from the seventeenth century through today it is mentioned on heritage tours of the island scholars of the african diaspora not only would it provide information regarding the internal social structure of maroon communities themselves but archaeology may also shed light on questions concerning identity agency creolization and internal economies to name just a few arenas of scholarly focus is important to the cultural identity
the staff continued to view short term flows as undesirable and in cases where governments imposed capital controls they could expect no disagreement between the fund and member the fund staff also became increasingly concerned about the effectiveness of controls in the context of high capital mobility as well as the impact this might have on the maintenance of a system of relatively fixed exchange rates issues that had also troubled keynes and although not cast in the contemporary language of sequencing the er staff also raised the issue of whether the fund agreement implies some order of priority in liberalizing the current and capital accounts and claimed that fund policy needed to be established in this but by and large the issue of capital account liberalization was a field into which the fund staff ventured very the organizational contract also for the most part remained unchanged in terms of capital controls in the executive board decision reaffirmed that members are free to adopt a policy of regulating capital and they may for that purpose exercise such controls as are necessary without approval of the fund reforming the international financial architecture the closing of the gold window in led to several rounds of reform negotiations among the member states there were conflicting views about the place of europeans japanese and the imf s managing director pierre paul schweitzer supported the use of controls us policy makers began for the first time to advocate for their removal in this context the fund staff continued to favor controls as one of several means the fund staff has been convinced for several years that disruptive capital movements were the single most important cause of the collapse of the bretton woods system and had been studying ways of controlling such capital movements in the reformed system even after the move to generalized floating in the staff in their proposal for guidelines for the management of floating rates recommended controls as one of several means that states should use to normal zones for their exchange rate the result of the reform negotiations was agreement on a compromise position capital controls would continue to play a role in the post bretton woods system but there would also be limits on their use for balance of payment reasons us policy makers however were successful in securing agreement on amending the imf s articles in such essential purposes of the international monetary system was now to promote the free exchange of capital reflecting us interests the imf s board also reached a decision that directed the staff to initiate special consultations with a member state if capital controls were introduced for payment yet both of these changes to the fund s organizational contract had little operational significance for the staff and failed to lead the staff to encourage liberalization moreover in practice the fund staff rarely initiated these special consultations and there was little change in their support for controls as part of the international financial architecture rise of neoliberals within the imf of controls and emphasize the desirability of liberalization although capital account issues were not the principal focus of the fund during this period imf sources show a definite shift toward viewing liberalization favorably at roughly the same time expected by the indicator beginning in the mid and continuing until the asian crisis the imf staff stressed the costs of controls and the benefits of opening up to icms while underemphasizing staff research also suggested that capital controls were largely an ineffective policy instrument area and functional departments also confirm the mid as a period of significant ideational change within the moreover although the fund staff did not promote liberalization indiscriminately there is also evidence that the staff did encourage it in many countries why did this ideational shift occur critics of the imf view the development of demands from the private financial community the evidence however does not support this proposition first by all accounts the imf s management failed to provide any ideational or operational guidance to the staff on capital account liberalization until the mid in the context of initiatives to amend the imf s articles it is only after this guidance and support kick in career incentives within the fund played a role reinforcing the ideational change that had already come from us policy makers were also cast in a supporting rather than leading role to be sure in the us policy makers did view liberalization as desirable and sought to promote it in specific countries but the issue was not viewed as a top priority or one on which to expend resources within the us policy makers were more exchange rate and the latin american debt crisis and thus little attention or effort was devoted to shaping the imf s views on it is only in the mid that the us treasury funder rubin and summers began to make its views known within the us policy makers may not have seen a need to block the emergence of these neoliberal views within the fund but they did not actively reflect upon their development or encourage their emergence its move to capital account liberalization in the early european policy makers also became supportive of this policy goal like us policy makers the europeans also at best played a supporting role placing emphasis on liberalization only after the staff s views had developed it should also be noted that the imf s board although generally supportive of liberalization in the mid could never reach a consensus on the place of international monetary system and issued no directives on the issue until the europeans and other member states were thus generally supportive of the idea of liberalization but not the source of the staff s views it is also clear from the evidence that the private financial community had little influence on the views of the fund staff the private financial community represented consider the issue of liberalization until upon consideration of the issue the imf came
schroeder an attack on the entire civilized world as the war rhetoric developed drawing on innate civilizational differences war become a civilizing mission one that would rescue afghani women and bring freedom and democracy to iraqi people max boot of the wall street journal went so far as to claim that a dose of us imperialism may be the best response to terrorism afghanistan and other troubled lands today cry out for the sort of enlightened foreign administration once provided by self confident englishmen pith helmets the uncivilized there fore could be civilized and some of the most violent and gruesome methods in history colonization and war stand as proof of the claim while the distorting of time and history provides a rationale for dealing with threat security is restored in the production of spatial boundaries space is being carved up in the either you re with us or with the terrorists rhetoric which draws and between here and there and shifts in crucial ways the political configurations of the world these boundaries occur at different scales so that entire regions of the world specific nation states and marked bodies are considered threats to security within this context security is being constructed as monochromatic and sectarian structured through shifts in political economies and nuclear arsenal in this new economy pluralism and mongrel histories have no place in the months after september the doctrines of threat and security entailed mapping the threat within and without external threat was vested in those countries identified as the axis of evil a list that continues to be updated internal threat was vested in the bodies of men from twenty five countries who were subject to a special registration process and in the early detention of arab muslim and south asian immigrants reinstating security required that the threat be identified and policed externally in distant lands as well as internally within the homeland in the discourse of external threat the geometry of us versus them set us up as the good guys based on the repeated identification of americans as good god fearing people who value democracy and freedom in his state of the union address bush said on september the enemies of freedom act of war against our country where freedom itself is under attack they hate our freedoms our free dom of religion our freedom of speech our freedom to vote and assemble and disagree with the each other in contrast to such freedom the enemies of freedom are barbaric and undeveloped and perpetuate atrocities against their people particularly women such as the manner in which the difference between us and them was orchestrated by of afghani women under the taliban regime the treat ment of women was used as the barometer through which to gauge civilizational prosperity this use of women is not new as lata mani shows in her intricate reading of social reform around sati in colonial india mani deftly argues that women became the ground over which tradition came to be debated between british colonial authority and the indian male elite consequently the social rather women were the symbolic economy over which civilizational progress could be determined echoing this colonial framework laura bush in her infamous radio address sought to garner support for the war in afghanistan by suggesting that the american military and capital intervention in the region would liberate afghani women from the taliban the somewhat similar positions taken by both the pre dominantly white liberal feminist groups and the republican party in seeking to liberate afghani women starkly expose the racism in the belief that western white feminists can teach third world women about liberation freedom and modernity in this context to borrow gayatri chakravorty spivak s famous phrase it is white women saving brown women from brown men such first world feminist political positions are not only racist but also complicit in the structures of imperialism in late capital the conjuncture between white liberal feminist organizing and the us state requires a serious rethinking of discourse surrounding third world women this narrative is persistently overdetermined by a third world women as victims discourse which fuels rescue fantasies that serve the empire and fundamentalist regimes afghani women were being rescued from a regime stuck in the past and were being rescued into modernity thus not only were the place and people of far and distant lands but also they were also stuck in premodern times from which the helpless vulnerable women needed to be rescued description of the landscapes as remote harsh and primitive of american military intervention as smoking them out of their caves and of the punitive punishments for disobeying laws as being symbolic of primitive governance all set out to create an uncivilized place the contrast between the civilized world and the uncivilized world was bush in his address to the nation what is at stake is not just america s freedom this is the world s fight this is civilization s fight what is remarkable about the civilization and modernity narrative is its relentless reiteration over the last several hundred years this narrative was evidenced in a range of works from those discourses that justified colonial dominion to samuel huntington s clash of civilizations thesis to its most recent manifestation in a report the national intelligence council for the central intelligence agency released in december entitled mapping the global future throughout its pages the report consistently intertwines muslim with terrorist and with the likely threat that is posed to the civilized world by radical islam in the report four fictional scenarios imagine the geopolitical landscape in the year one of these fictional scenarios entitled a new caliphate is grotesquely dramatized in the form of a letter written by a hypothetical grandson of osama bin laden to a family member who comments on a clash of civilizations between those in the muslim world and those outside it the scenario is used to depict radical religious ideology and the havoc it could
a high value of our agreement proxy forecast actual eps for equity issuers and thus bias the results in favor of our model we control for this by including the change in eps from two quarters prior to the quarter the latter is when agreement is measured eps run up we repeat this analysis for the two three and four quarters and years preceding the issuance information asymmetries may also be related to the business cycle choe masulis and nanda show that the volume of equity issuances is higher during periods of economic growth and after periods of a stock market run up for the direct measure they show that greater firm specific stock price and thus less information asymmetry we use their measure of firm specific variation psi as our measure of information asymmetry it is a relatively clean measure of asymmetric information that is not confounded by any apparent links to agreement and it is increasingly employed durnev et al and bushman piotroski and from a regression of firm specific weekly returns on value weighted market and value weighted industry indices the industry is defined at the three digit sic code details of this variable are in durnev et al based on the predictions of the time varying adverse selection theory firms are more likely to issue equity when psi is high denoting low information asymmetry insider trading provides an indirect measure of asymmetric information since may trade on their superior information we therefore use insider trading defined as the net purchases or sales of stock by insiders during the and months prior to the issuance divided by the number of common shares outstanding as a measure of information asymmetry this variable may also reflect misvaluation such that insiders may sell when the stock is overvalued and can thus control for overvaluation based market we use are described in seyhun and they are sourced from sec filings that are required of insiders the number of shares outstanding is from compustat although we are not directly testing our model against the tradeoff and pecking order theories we do want to make sure that evidence in support of our model is not driven by tradeoff or pecking order considerations thus we introduce control variables used previously all of are measured as of the fiscal year end prior to the issue date the natural log of sales is a measure of firm size larger firms often have lower costs of debt and may prefer debt to equity for this reason return on assets defined as operating income divided by total assets is a measure of profitability many capital structure studies have shown that more profitable firms have lower leverage ratios perhaps due to higher greater growth opportunities using return on assets as a control variable should account for this however the documented relationship between leverage and profitability is also sometimes attributed to an implication of the pecking order hypothesis that firms with high profitability generate high retained earnings and use these to finance projects internally thereby precluding the need to borrow and producing the inverse relation between we use financial slack to control for this cash and equivalents divided by assets is a measure of the firm financial slack and firms with greater financial slack are expected to rely less on external financing in addition to profitability research and development expenses divided by sales are also a measure of firms growth opportunities so again using the argument that the agency costs of debt are higher for firms with higher growth would expect firms with higher to sales ratios to be more likely to issue equity many firms do not separately report expenses and thus the variable is missing in compustat for many firms we assume that any firm that reports total assets but not expenses had no expenses in that year further the firm choice of debt versus equity is also presumed to be affected by the tangibility of assets rajan and zingales propose that firms with more tangible assets are more likely to to use debt we control for this by measuring asset tangibility as net fixed assets divided by assets we also control for a firm book leverage ratio defined as total debt divided by total assets based on the tradeoff theory an overlevered firm is more likely to issue equity and an underlevered firm is more likely to issue table i provides summary statistics panel a summarizes the full sample and have more expense fewer intangible assets more cash and less debt than other firms panels and provide similar statistics for high agreement and low agreement firms in panel high agreement is defined as the highest quartile of the agreement measure actual forecast eps in panel high agreement is defined as the lowest quartile of the agreement parameter dispersion the subsample results mirror except that high agreement equity issuers are not less profitable panel breaks the sample into highest and lowest quartile marketto book firms here we see that most of the results apparent for the full sample are quite strong for the high market to book firms however low market to book equity issuers are not less profitable do not have fewer fixed assets and do not display significantly lower leverage ratios as we show in tables ii and higher agreement and higher market to book ratios consistent with the model predictions results a testing predictions and prediction firms will issue equity when their stock prices are high and either debt or no security when their stock prices are low table ii presents summary statistics for the price variables for debt and equity issuers firms that issue equity have significantly higher raw and market issue additionally equity issuers have significant higher market to book ratios and industry adjusted market to book ratios than debt issuers these results are consistent with our model market timing and time varying adverse selection however they are obviously inconsistent with the tradeoff theory they are also inconsistent with the pecking order hypothesis which
and a urine analysis are conducted cxr is performed on individuals with a positive mantoux test clinical symptoms suggestive of tb an overseas exam with class a class class class and sent to the state department of health where it is stored electronically for the purpose of this study a primary refugee is defined as a refugee whose initial state of resettlement after arriving to the united states is mn the study was deemed exempt by the institutional review board as the data were located in a data available and extracted from the mn initial refugee health assessment form for the purpose of this study included gender age continent and country of origin year of arrival induration size in response to the mantoux test cxr results and whether or not treatment was prescribed and completed for tb for the purpose of this study refugees were considered to they were prescribed treatment for ltbi the number of refugees diagnosed with active tb on arrival was based on the number of refugees documented as receiving treatment for active tb cxr results were abstracted from the mn department of health database these were described in the database as normal abnormal but without tb old tb noncavitatory square tests and logistic regression analyses were used to evaluate the association between demographic variables and tb the total number of refugees varied for some of the demographic variables due to missing data as noted in the tables results men a high percentage of refugees were between the ages of and the majority of refugees were from africa of the study refugees had a documented mantoux screening or had treatment for ltbi prescribed of the with documented mantoux results had a positive test and in the to age group of the refugees with a positive mantoux refugees underwent cxr of these were documented as normal documented as abnormal but without tb documented as abnormal but without any additional information documented refugees the remaining who did not undergo cxr were either documented as not done or were unknown or missing among refugees with to mm mantoux tests had noncavitatory tb had stable old tb had cavitatory tb on a cxr and were abnormal with no other information of those with to mm mantoux tests had noncavitatory tb had a stable that were pending at the time of the study two had a cxr that was abnormal with no other information of those who did not have a mantoux test had evidence of noncavitatory tb on a cxr and had abnormal results with no other information one refugee with unknown mantoux results had noncavitatory tb on a cxr and two of those with unknown results had stable old tb about refugees did not receive treatment for ltbi about of these refugees had declined treatment for ltbi and had received treatment out of the country the most common documented reasons for not receiving treatment for ltbi are shown in figure of the refugees in this study the majority of refugees with active tb were from africa followed by europe and asia none were from south or central america all refugees with active tb were from the eight countries depicted in figure of the refugees with active tb only one was hiv positive to around the same time the proportion of foreign born tb cases in the united states increased to about reported cases a significant proportion of the screened refugees in this study had a positive mantoux test this rate is similar to that noted among newly arrived refugees in other studies about and bosnia the average tb case rate in the united states during the same period was significantly lower at reflecting a higher prevalence of tb infection and disease among refugees to the state akin to other studies in this study tb infection was more commonly seen in men greater mobility and paralleling the incidence of tb in the native countries african refugees in this study had a higher association with positive mantoux tests and active tb mn has an especially high influx of african refugees who constituted all refugees to the state in and a heightened provider awareness of the state and county specific epidemiology preventive therapy only primary refugees who settled in mn with positive mantoux tests received appropriate treatment for ltbi although not an endorsed policy it is often noted in clinical settings that providers are hesitant to treat adults aged years and older for ltbi for fear of liver complications this may have contributed to the numbers reflected in the many active tb cases among the foreign born are attributable to the reactivation of ltbi reactivation of tb usually occurs within the first years of migration to a new country and tb deaths in first years of infection since refugee status has been shown to be an independent predictor of failure to seek evaluation for tb timely diagnosis and management this is especially key as outside of this visit refugees do not have an organized access to health care and many of them get lost to follow up overseas screening detects up to verified tb cases evaluated within year of arrival to the united states passive case finding and contact tracing have been recommended as an effective and is times the yield of screening contact investigations with significant cost savings if they receive preventive therapy newer tests including quantiferon tb gold that have higher specificity rates may also assist with targeting preventive screening and therapy for refugees including those with hiv although our study did not have ltbi completion thought to be predominantly related to lack of immediate benefits of treatment in asymptomatic patients as well as an influence of other cultural social and language barriers cultural case management as described by goldberg and coworkers where case management cultural leaders from the community work closely with providers can improve support multidisciplinary teams empowerment integration of refugees into the local system of health care involvement of appropriate community organizations and addressing structural
from the day after infection after initial infection a cell may exhibit either a typical infection in which all species become populated or an aborted infection in which all species are eliminated from the cell we start to run simulation from the day assuming that the cell is typically infected and using the following initial condition the respectively the mean of these molecular numbers obtained from simulation runs and the results of one simulation run are shown in figure it is seen that molecular numbers in one simulation run fluctuate around the mean numbers approximate ssa although the exact ssa that simulates every reaction event exactly and one at time is easy to implement and produces methods have been developed to significantly speed up simulation by giving up some of the exactness of the ssa the basic idea behind these approximate methods is that instead of simulating a single reaction per step a number of reactions can occur in each simulation step as one step leaps over many reactions these approximate methods are known as leap methods including exact ssa is based on the fundamental premise one would expect that a leap method can provide an excellent approximation to the exact ssa if the propensity functions am remain approximately constant in each leap the leap method in the leap method the step size of each leap is a deterministic is approximately a poisson random variable with mean am as shown earlier and the state vector can be updated using the question now is how to select the value of to satisfy the leap condition given letting am am am gillespie imposed the following constraint to satisfy the leap condition impossible to find a directly satisfying gillespie proposed to use a first order taylor expansion of am to approximate am and then bound the absolute mean and standard deviation of this approximate am by which we will describe next in detail since we have we can find the approximate mean and variance of am as where if we impose the following requirements am we obtain the value of that approximately satisfies the leap condition the accuracy of leaping will depend upon how well the functions significantly in this case we should be able to satisfy the leap condition with a choice for that allows for many reaction events to occur in t on the other hand if satisfying the leap condition turns out to require to be less than some small multiple of that is the expected step size in the exact ssa only a very few reactions can be leaped over and it would be leap method as follows algorithm approximate ssa leap method initialization calculate the propensity function am calculate from and if the value is less than some small multiple of then reject it and execute instead a moderate for each independently generate km according to a poisson distribution with mean am set t and update the state vector vector hmkm go to step or else stop an efficient method for selecting step size for the leap method of and was recently proposed in instead same amount am am they further show that these inequalities are approximately equivalent to the following set of inequalities xn max nxn where can be found from as discussed in then they choose the step size to satisfy the above inequalities appreciably it is demonstrated in that this step size selection method is leap method in the leap method the number of firings of each reaction channel km in each leap is approximated by a poisson random variable as realizations of a poisson random variable can be any nonnegative integer we always run the risk that a reaction channel rm fires so many times in one leap that more molecules of one of its reactants will be consumed than those are clearly undesirable tian and burrage and independently chatterjee et al proposed the binomial leap method to cope with the problem of negative population the binomial leap method approximates the poisson random variable in step of algorithm by a binomial random variable with parameters km max and pm am km max all other steps are the molecules although the binomial leap method improve simulation accuracy in some cases the method in cannot handle the case where more than two reaction channels share certain reactants while the method in may introduce bias in an alternative approach cao et al modified the leap method to avoid the problem of negative population typical value for nc is between two and a tentative step size is calculated from as in the leap method another tentative step size is generated from an exponential distribution with parameter channels then the actual step size is chosen as min n for all noncritical reaction channels rm we generate km as a sample of poisson random variable with mean am for critical reaction channels rm if n then km if n then we generate reaction index according to the probability the problem of negative population and is easier to implement than the binomial leap method the leap method in the leap method the number of firings of each reaction channel during a leap is unbounded and thus there is always a probability that the state vector undergoes a significantly large change during one leap which will inevitably cause large changes in the propensity functions thereby violating the leap a preselected step size without knowing at least an upper bound on the number of reactions that will occur in the next leap satisfy the leap condition well we recently developed a leap method to avoid this dilemma by simulating the occurrence of reactions during each leap here is a deterministic constant chosen to satisfy the leap condition and after is chosen reaction channel as km we proved in that is independent from km under the constraint km that is let us define cm and km then we have if we define a matrix with mm cm cm for m and mm
applying a layer of opposite color paint over their clothes their plan to provoke in each other an identity crisis succeeds wonderfully and they both the end up on the same psychoanalyst s couch the strip ironically emphasizes that despite appearances no black vs white ethical distinction can be drawn between the two main heroes at the peak of main heroes instead of being either good or bad are simply and most importantly equally irrational these characters engage in a nonsensical and endless conflict for which few reasons are given and in which they both win and lose to the same extent thus the spy vs spy satiric repositioning of the pro west cold war protagonist asserts that simplistic judgments of character bipolar oppositions and ready made answers should be seen as equally period of time that consolidated the spy narrative this is the age that first saw in print ian fleming s famous james bond novels casino royale from russia with love and goldfinger the movies inspired by the novels altered fleming s character by making him more arrogant misogynistic and unambiguously pro west bond appeared first on television in when casino royale was adapted by charles bennett as an episode for a cbs mini series to the episode starred barry nelson and peter lorre and was directed by william brown jr the first bond film dr no was released eight years later in and was followed in by another bond movie from russia with love both movies starred sean connery were directed by terence young and were instrumental not only in imposing bond as a cold war superhero but also in strengthening the spy genre young s movies was an equipment for living that romantically emplotted the cold war narrative formulas are structures of narrative s or dramatic conventions whose ubiquity within a culture or genre at a particular moment in time establishes recognizable modes of representing images symbols themes and myths these conventional representations are cultural products which they originate in this sense the bond narrative influenced the collective imaginary of the western world by simplifying the cold war conflict and articulating it in highly salient bipolar terms first it polarized the world in a good vs bad dichotomy and explicitly argued that the evil endangers the existence of the entire world second it depicted the good in the guise of a conflict no matter how complicated thus the bond narrative strengthened the political beliefs of the west by making it even easier for the audience to identify with the good side of the polarity in addition the bond formula also instituted a new version of hegemonic masculinity that of a cool good looking white and heterosexual male spy whose sexy appearance and sexist attitude could the situation thus increasing his charisma regardless of the unfavorable circumstances in which his desire to save the world places him the spy in the gray flannel suit manages by the end of the story to have it his way no matter what the odds saving both the world and the girl in the meantime no wonder then that his image quickly became a very appealing popular culture moreover bond s elitist behavior encapsulated in his dress code the condescending way he introduced himself to others and stiff upper lip requests such as that of having his drinks shaken not stirred enhanced the character s popularity as a cold war spy action hero prototype consequently for the and subsequent decades the james bond symbol was not only a manner of hero and the way to be a man by contrast the mad spies are two bird like creatures who do not engage in an explicit and uncompromising endeavor to thwart wicked plans devised by unambiguously malevolent minds they do not embark on a noble quest to punish evil transgressors and restore universal harmony safeguarding western values in the process unlike the colorful james bond superman or wonder woman the black and and white are equally problematic and in which conflict exists for the sake of conflict alone their irrational behavior debunks the conventions of popular culture plots but ultimately points to the irrationality of cold war rhetoric by waging a nonsensical endless war against one another the mad spies mimic the two sides involved in the cold war exist a recognizable cliche of spy action hero narratives is the finding of a solution that concludes the story by resolving dramatic tension and eliminating a hubris that menaces the order of the world action heroes in popular culture go to war in order to defend normalcy and the positive values embedded in everyday life one of the underlying assumptions on which the action and has to be safeguarded at all costs as wicked minds always conspire to change the world and change is always a worse alternative action superheroes go to war to preserve the status quo which by comparison to the gruesome transformations envisioned by the bad guys always seems to be the best alternative the mad spies however carry out a fight that instead of restoring universal fight is the status quo and the heroes work hard to preserve it no matter what the consequences they are forever chasing each other and devising strategies to eliminate one another their plans for reciprocal destruction however end up in mutual loss in draws or in minor temporary victories of one or the other of the two protagonists no final settling of the conflict occurs at the end of a strip two heroes injure each other they appear unharmed and ready for action again at the beginning of the following strip comics action characters such as superman and wonder woman defend the status quo not simply by fighting against the evils that menace normalcy but also through their identities and life stories off lands an old planet and an old island respectively both of which are sufficiently remote from the shores of the new world to sound exotic although immigrants both superman and
characteristics of the blended pp pet fibers at crystallization were determined as well as their physical mechanical properties the various compatibilizers have a different influence on the crystallization of pp in the pp pet fiber blend edsa behaves as a nucleating agent and increases the crystallization of pp the compatibilizer evac decreases the crystallization of pp in the pp pet fiber blend for the crystallization of pp heterogeneous nucleation with a tridimensional spherulitic free energy of crystal creation me of the blended pp pet fibers at crystallization were determined as well as their physical mechanical properties the various compatibilizers have a different influence on the crystallization of pp in the pp pet fiber blend edsa behaves as a nucleating agent and increases the crystallization of pp the compatibilizer evac decreases the crystallization of pp in the pp pet fiber blend for the crystallization of pp heterogeneous nucleation with a tridimensional spherulitic growth of crystallites is characterized the aforementioned additives emphasize this heterogeneous nucleation of crystallites in the crystallization of pp in the blended pp pet fibers the tensile strength and elongation of the blended pp pet fibers were changed by the influence of pet and compatibilizers increases the crystallization of pp the compatibilizer evac decreases the crystallization of pp in the pp pet fiber blend for the crystallization of pp heterogeneous nucleation with a tridimensional spherulitic growth of crystallites is characterized the aforementioned additives emphasize this heterogeneous nucleation of crystallites in the crystallization of pp in the blended pp pet fibers the tensile strength and elongation of the blended pp pet fibers were changed by the influence of pet and compatibilizers introduction and compatibilizers introduction semi crystalline polymers can exhibit a wide range of different morphological features depending on the precise composition of the system and its processing history of particular importance are molecular mass distribution co monomer content the presence of additives and the thermal history many of these factors are exploited as a general means of controlling structure and the fibers properties the preparation of blended pp pet fibers with variable properties is a new production pet fibers with variable properties is a new production method the blended pp pet fibers were prepared to improve the dyeability of pp fibers by the exhaust process polyester dispersed in a pp matrix of the blended pp pet fibers influences the supermolecular structure of these fibers the pp pet interphase the crystalline and amorphous portions and the dyeability of the blended fibers pp and pet in the blended pp pet fibers behave as individual and immiscible components the technological miscibility of the pp and pet components can be increased with the addition of compatibilizers the compatibilizers assure homogenous dispersion of the minor component and provide sufficient mechanical properties of blended pp pet fibers reactive or non reactive compatibilizers for pp and pet blends can be used to improve mutual interaction at the interphase the reactive graft copolymer polypropylene maleic anhydride was used but with a minimal the technological miscibility of the pp and pet components can be increased with the addition of compatibilizers the compatibilizers assure homogenous dispersion of the minor component and provide sufficient mechanical properties of blended pp pet fibers reactive or non reactive compatibilizers for pp and pet blends can be used to improve mutual interaction at the interphase the reactive graft copolymer polypropylene maleic anhydride was used but with a minimal effect much better results in the processing of pp pet fibers were achieved by reactive compatibilizers on the basis of and oxazoline reactive compatibilizers decrease the interphase stress between components they also regulate the molecular a minimal effect much better results in the processing of pp pet fibers were achieved by reactive compatibilizers on the basis of and oxazoline reactive compatibilizers decrease the interphase stress between components they also regulate the molecular weight and flow of dispersed pet properties as well as increase the color strength of dyed fibers the simultaneous influence of pet and one of two compatibilizers on thermal properties and the crystallization of pp in the blended pp pet fibers presented in this work is evaluated by a differential scanning calorimetry experimental pp in the blended pp pet fibers presented in this work is evaluated by a differential scanning calorimetry experimental materials the following polymers were used for the preparation of the blended polypropylene polyethylene terephtalate fibers ethylene distearamide and ethylene vinyl acetate copolymer were used as interphase agents compatibilizers the blended pp pet fibers were prepared in two steps preparation of pp pet concentrates and pp pet blended fibers the composition of the pp pet concentrates and the blended pp pet fibers is given in table thermal analysis the thermal properties of the blended pp pet fibers and crystallization kinetics of pp and pp pet blended fibers were studied by dsc perkin elmer in these measurements a nitrogen atmosphere was applied isothermal measurements of the blended fibers were performed in the following procedure samples of about mg were heated at a rate of xc min up to xc they were then kept at this temperature for min to eliminate any previous thermal history after that they were rapidly cooled to xc at a rate of xc min the isothermal crystallization behavior of the pp pet fibers was observed at this temperature nonisothermal measurements of the blended fibers were performed in the foll owing procedure heating cooling and heating the samples were melted and cooled with a temperatures range of between xc to xc with a constant heating and cooling rate of a xc min were performed in the foll owing procedure heating cooling and heating the samples were melted and cooled with a temperatures range of between xc to xc with a constant heating and cooling rate of a xc min melting and crystallization temperatures were obtained from the maximum of endothermic or minimum of exothermic peaks melting and crystallization enthalpies were determined from the surface of endothermic or exothermic
and gaming behaviors the state where the study was conducted had four native american casinos miles away from the campus and the other three casinos were situated within a mile radius from the institution compared to neighboring states where gaming development had been actively pursued the state s gaming growth was deemed rather stagnant in terms of the number of casinos during the past six years yuan et al questionnaire comprised three sections with questions to assess respondents perceptions of legalized gaming casino and other gaming behaviors and demographic characteristics the perceptions of legalized gaming were measured on a point likert type scale with disagree and sales and marketing class at a mid western university to assure the clarity of the cover letter and the questionnaire the questionnaire was revised based on their comments and feedback for better understanding of the questions data collection a self administered mail survey was used to draw a total of undergraduate students the subjects were stratified by classification to ensure representativeness of the student population and sufficient sample size for data analysis three weeks after the initial mailing which consisted of a copy of the questionnaire the perception variables were computed and frequency and descriptive analyses were conducted for all survey items a two stage cluster analysis was employed to minimize the disadvantages of using a single cluster method a combination of hierarchical and nonhierarchical cluster a hierarchical cluster analysis with the ward s method was performed to determine the adequate number of clusters by examining the dendrogram subsequently a nonhierarchical cluster analysis or quick cluster analysis was conducted to segregate respondents into mutually exclusive groups based on their perceptions of ed the groups derived from the cluster analysis were used as the independent variable and the perceptions were the dependent variables a series of analysis of variance was used as a post hoc test to identify specific differences between groups also a series of chi square analyses was performed to examine differences results and discussions demographic profile of the questionnaires mailed were undeliverable of the returned questionnaires were usable for data analysis yielding a rate the majority of respondents were female and approximately three fourths were between of the respondents reported a grade point average of or higher casino gaming behaviors slightly less than half of the respondents had visited a casino even though most states have a minimum age of to engage in gaming activities some states do allow minors in a or older visited a casino the main reasons for not visiting a casino included age restriction no desire and not having the opportunities because respondents ages were mainly between and years old and the minimum age of casino entrance in the state where the university from other studies in reporting major reasons of not visiting a casino among college students on the other hand the main purpose of visiting a casino was entertainment followed by curiosity and winning money hira et al and yuan et al reported similar findings activity which supported the entertainment value reported here another possibility for entertainment being a primary reason could be the lack of leisure venues in the rural area where the study was conducted hence students viewed visiting casinos as a form of leisure activity monetary reward with the hope of winning big also was one of the frequently reported reasons for students to seek casino gaming in previous research involvement in other gaming activities activity among students also was reported in previous studies nearly half of the respondents also indicated that they had participated in bingo followed by poker or video poker and sports betting perceptions of legalized gaming among three clusters hierarchical cluster analysis indicated that three was a suitable number of clusters to be designated in the subsequent non hierarchical cluster analysis therefore the nonhierarchical cluster analysis generated three groups the first group represented respondents in the three groups showed significant differences in their perceptions of legalized gaming with all respondents perceiving the use of state ming thus cluster respondents were labeled gaming proponents on the other hand respondents in cluster showed the strongest agreement on negative aspects of gaming therefore cluster respondents were named gaming opponents respondents in cluster did not agree or disagree on most perception statements reported casino visitation purpose for visiting a casino and reasons for not visiting a casino over two thirds of gaming proponents had visited a casino while only gaming opponents had such an experience when asked why they visited a casino almost everyone in the gaming proponent cluster indicated that for entertainment almost two thirds of gaming proponents also visited casinos to win money while only gaming opponents reported the same reason in addition more gaming proponents visited casinos for the challenge compared to their counterparts in the neutrals group and the gaming gaming proponents indicated that their age restriction was a main barrier for not visiting a casino with respectively however the majority of gaming opponents indicated they had no desire to visit a casino members of the three clusters also showed differences in their engagement in in particular more than three quarters of gaming proponents and neutrals had purchased a lottery ticket overall gaming opponents reported the lowest level of involvement in all gaming activities investigated with the most experience in lottery no significant differences were detected among the three clusters based on segment college students into mutually exclusive groups based on their perceptions of legalized gaming and to portray each group s demographic characteristics and gaming related behaviors in general results of the study provided insight into how university students perceived legalized gaming in a state where gaming development occurred or reside in spatial proximity of gaming facilities three distinguishable groups with different perceptions of legalized gaming were detected in addition to the existing literature on gaming dependency theory and the spatial distance of residency that gaming activities the more students supported gaming as a legitimate activity to enjoy the more likely for them to have experience in gaming
how to talk the significance of this early work is that it provided researchers and clinicians with the first glimpse into the relationship between stuttering and the child s and parent s language implicating such factors as communicative demand and language complexity the notion of communicative demand in the form of time pressure was an outgrowth of these early studies of parent child verbal interaction and has a significant attention in the clinical literature time pressure has been broadly defined as the perception of being rushed to talk during conversation such perception on the part of a child has been speculated to arise from the parents use of such temporal speech behaviors as a rapid speaking rate short turn switching pauses and a tendency to frequently interrupt the child or talk simultaneously when talking with him or her a number of researchers and clinicians have proposed a child who stutters who is chronically exposed to such a rapid parental speech tempo develops strategies to keep up with the conversation and that such strategies include increases in speech rate decreases in turn switching pause duration or both over time this habitual approach to communication as the child s language is becoming more adult like interacts with other risk factors resulting in the exacerbation of speech stuttering the notion that an accelerated speaking rate leads to increased frequency in fluency disruptions has also received indirect support from the well documented observation that therapy that incorporates rate reduction consistently leads to increased fluency for people who stutter if it can be assumed that rate reduction leads to fluency and communicative time pressure can lead to increased rate and therefore a higher likelihood of stuttering then a link between rate and fluency can also be assumed researchers began to investigate the validity of communicative time pressure and its potential relationship to stuttering in children by focusing on the temporal aspects of the conversations between young stutter and their parents the main goal of these studies was to examine timing behaviors that occur during parent stuttering child interactions and compare observations from these dyads to those observed in conversations between young nonstuttering children and their parents the timing behaviors of interest included speaking rates of children and parents number of the duration of simultaneous talking or simultalk and the durations of switching pauses in parent stuttering child conversation overall findings from these studies yielded equivocal results but in general notion that the temporal aspects of parent stuttering child conversations do not differ significantly from those observed in parent nonstuttering child conversations there are a number of obvious factors that likely contributed to inconsistent findings including differences in subject age and stuttering severity measurement procedures and other sources of within and between group variability in response to the results of these and related investigations and meyers and freeman argued that any parent s or child s temporal behavior during conversation whether it be speaking rate number and duration of interruptions or switching pauses is not as clinically relevant as the relative difference between the vocal behavior of the child and parent as they talk with the each other kelly described this relative difference between parent and child speaking rate as dyadic rate and noted that in some parent child dyads to be what might be considered a clinically significant mismatch between the parent and child in terms of speaking rate and that similar differences might also be seen in switching pause durations and rate and duration of interruptions for example meyers and freeman reported that the stuttering children in their study and their mothers exhibited a dyadic rate of syllables s whereas the nonstuttering child mother pairs differed in speaking rate by les s kelly and conture on the other hand observed the opposite trend that is the dyadic or difference rate for their stuttering child mother pairs was smaller than that of the nonstuttering child mother pairs in their study finally kelly reported that in stuttering child father dyads there tended to be a larger dyadic rate than in stuttering child mother pairs and a significant and positive correlation between the severity of child s stuttering and the dyadic rate that is the larger the difference between father and child speaking rates the more severe the child s stuttering tended to be with the recognition of individual differences in so called turn management timing behaviors in the late research in the temporal aspects of parent stuttering child interaction shifted to investigations of the effects of parental manipulation of speech rate and turn switching pause duration on the speech and speech of children who stutter that is given that the parent of a child who stutters does not exhibit a faster than normal speaking rate or shorter turn switching or inter turn durations in conversation is there evidence that slowing rate and increasing the durations of the silences between conversational turns will lead to decreases in the child s disfluent speech this became an important research focus which continues to the present day and is especially relevant given the large published therapy approaches for young children who stutter that call for the use of a slowed parental speaking rate as a way to assess the validity of this practice several investigators examined the effects of training parents to slow their speech rate increase the duration of their switching pauses and use shorter simpler utterances when talking with their children who stutter the most consistent finding in this work was that for the most part parents can reduce their speaking rate following instruction and for some children who stutter a slowed parent speech rate leads to decreased stuttering even if the child does not slow his or her speaking rate perhaps the most salient finding from this work is that the exists between the speech of parents and the speech and fluency of children who stutter is highly individualistic this line of research has provided some insight into what parents do when talking with their child who
relational perspective has direct bearing on how the nature of knowing processes is conceptualized instead of needing each individual to construct a private subjective environment the individual such an analysis would provide the grounds for the possibility that features of the environment are directly perceived by an individual even while these properties exist independently of the individual if directly perceivable environmental features exist independently of an individual they can be viewed as features of a common environment that are accessible in principle to and the common grounds for shared mutual understanding although still leaving vast freedom for differences between knowers becomes a possibility the last section of the last chapter entitled ecological psychology and its prospects in many ways epitomises the ambitious scope and yet largely unrealized promise of the book while heft certainly and eloquently articulate s two of the major ecological programs in psychology the place of ecological psychology in the discipline of psychology more generally remains less clear and at a confusing remove from much collaborative work being undertaken across psychology and ecology of particular note are a number of seemingly critical omissions here and throughout the latter part of the book experience and meaning for a book and set of arguments which underscore the fundamental importance of human experience of the environment and the individual environment transaction there is surprisingly very little in this book about actual experience or the phenomenological or how radical empiricism might relate to an environmental phenomenology while heft repeatedly asserts that ecological psychology can provide a common ground for human experience the intellectual history covered is very selective and the discussion is very experience far rather than experience near as well the experience discussed invariably relates to experienced actions and functional relations and the meaning discussed invariably relates to the intentions and actions of asserts that the relations providing the structure in our experience of the world are intrinsic to the experiencey the object s meaning derives from a particular set of intrinsic properties that it possesses in relation to the perceiver and are perceived in the context of a goal directed action the intrinsic characteristics of any particular action environment person relation such a consideration of direct and immediate experience makes some sense from the explicitly functional natural science based framework being espoused but it ignores and pre empts multiple other ways of considering and describing the nature of such relations and attendant experience systems and discovery versus creation of environmental meanings are largely unaddressed yet seem central to arguments that it is the discovery rather than the construction of meaning that more accurately characterises human motivation and environmental involvement these omissions ignore of course large diverse more contemporary and arguably golledge lunt rodaway seamon seamon mugerauer shepard shore tuan while heft does address meaning and utilizes a meaning language meaning in this context appears to be far more circumscribed specific object or action focused and immediate context or field bounded features of the environment affordances are environmental features that are enfolded in goal directed actions that is they are constitutive features of actions the object s meaning derives from a particular set of intrinsic properties that it possesses in relation to the perceiver and is perceived in the context of a goal directed action in principle affordances are specified by stimulus artefacts representations and places behavior settings are perceivable dynamic environmental structures of collective interdependent actions and milieu while reference is clearly made to the meaning of environments and places it is clear that this is a meaning of functional significance and meaning in action seemingly quite removed from a more holistic and encompassing and landscape this use and gloss of meaning also falls considerably short of the more intersubjective experience encounter and relationship of phenomenological and transactional theorists drawing in koch s features of experience and value properties this structures of meaning approach and rationale does not address or justify what is lost at a system level this approach also fails to encompass and capture the find expression and reflection in the differing assumptive and experiential worlds of nonwestern and indigenous cultures and their respective cultural landscapes and built environments in environmental psychology but to psychology as a whole that of the nature and specification of environment and or situation and of the necessarily interactional and mutually impacting and defining character of the nexus between individual and environment heft does pose the problem in his introduction to barker s discussions and considerations a science of psychology requires a way of conceptualizing the environment that is adequate both to standards of science and to the qualities of human phenomena this is a rather tall order to fill in order to do so psychology needs to have at its disposal a way of thinking about and describing the environment that is that individuals experience typically the traditional framework of the physical sciences has been appropriated into psychology because it meets the first criterion objectivity however this physicalist framework falls rather short when it comes to conveying the qualities of psychological experience of course there have been long standing such protests elevate the subjective taking the qualities of individuals psychological experience as primary but then these subjectivist positions are faced with the explaining how individuals psychological experience can be connected to a common world that stands independently of each perceiver these two problems are mirror images of one another and they arise because the discipline lacks a psychologically is perhaps unfair to heft and the scholarly and enormously helpful view he provides on the intellectual history visions and compass of perception theory and ecological psychology to raise this perennial and vexed matter here this does nonetheless underscore a chasm of sorts between the histories and contexts of models of perception and parallel interactionist situationist transactional the social sciences and the natural sciences generally need a framework that can provide a common environmental ground and grounding for human experience and psychosocial environmental impacts and change one wonders whether the ecological psychology explicated
resorts themselves form hotel becomes a sort of self contained village defining place for the tourist it is ironic that the structure which has become an image of tahiti as place is exactly the opposite of what is presented the fare particularly the over water fare indicates a commercial tourist structure for anyone who lives on the islands or spends more than a few days there the cluster of thatched bungalows is immediately recognizable as a resort not a village since few on the main islands live thatched houses and people no longer live over water therefore the hut has come to symbolize exactly what is not a house this inverted symbolism also expands into other structures such as stores signs or visitor s centers on the most populous islands if the structure is thatched it is generally not domestic this interesting inversion may or may not be evident to the tourist considering that their hut is called a house and the fares are marketed as being although the tourist knows it is nt anyone else s house the fares are presented as houses built in traditional vernacular style giving an impression of the domestic as well as travel in time and space to another culture the hut structure evokes the primitive and the use of the tahitian word fare links it to tahitian tradition the resort fares exhibit difference and otherness in the tradition of romantic colonialera fantasies although the vision of the primitive is filtered a nineteenth century colonial vision there are few colonial style hotel buildings gauguin escaped from the colonial to the primitive and it is the reliving of this experience that is central to the resort design in this way the resort setting caters to fantasies of escape difference and authenticity the level of perceived authenticity in terms of traditional materials and building techniques increases with price at the hotel bora bora which is currently owned by the amanresorts manager lionel alvarez emphasized how the thatch had been tied to the roof in traditional tahitian tradition he also noted the complex tying techniques used by local builders to attach beams and other wooden structures this painstaking process of hand tying is shown in detail at the musee de tahiti et des iles on tahiti and looks very similar to what was done at the resort even this supposed nod to authenticity is complicated however when one examines it more closely monty brown former manager of the hotel bora bora informed me that the traditional material of senate rope used for tying beams had to be substituted by nylon outdoors because the senate rope rots too quickly also the natural wood beams are almost all ironwood a non indigenous wood substituted for the rare tou and miro woods originally used in building inside the bungalows natural wood rattan and bamboo give the room a rustic feel and and traditional sink also imply colonial era luxury the colonial element added to the primitive structure of the fare allows the resort to evoke difference without sacrificing familiar comforts one can live like a colonial official amongst the natives which make up the hotel staff modern structures that do nt fit in with the colonial model such as the air conditioning units outside the bungalows or water systems are hidden or disguised out that a false thatched ceiling was added to the bungalows during renovations underneath the thatched roof in order to keep all the cool air from leaking out through the roof when the air conditioning is on the luxury and the authentic details at the hotel bora bora may be found to lesser degrees at less luxurious resorts the former bali hai hotel on raiatea features thatched huts but the beams are nailed and the a locally owned small hotel on moorea has only some thatched structures on the property today it is too expensive to build and maintain thatched structures so a less expensive hotel will limit thatched roof buildings conclusion as well as romantic fantasies of a benign colonial relationship with non western peoples the resort is the location of dreams designed to cater to perceived tourist expectations rooted in the myths of difference exoticism and wonder resorts with tahitian themes are found outside the islands themselves when they exist in a removed location they often offer an experience emphasizing kitsch rather than authenticity as in the original club med resorts and may portray polynesian theme as in the disney polynesian resort in orlando and the kona village resort on hawaii the kona village is of course located on a polynesian island but the resort features building styles from melanesian and micronesian cultures as well as tahitian and hawaiian bungalows the atmosphere and activities offer an old fashioned family campsite atmosphere rather than one of cultural education and the marketing of colonial culture have defined place for the tourist how might place be defined for the tahitian this is too complex a question for the author of this paper to address thoroughly and would surely elicit many different responses from members of the population certainly the colonial past are part of place for the tahitian tourist structures and tourist marketing are also part always viewed from a different perspective precontact culture has mixed with that of the colonizer and these have further been altered by the culture of migrant workers from asia and the pacific tahitian sense of place may also be modified by tourism to other places just as other places have served to define home place for the tourist who visits french polynesia although many tahitian tourists have historically visited new zealand or australia increasing numbers are angeles and las vegas for a different kind experience that taste of authentic americana defining place is like peeling the layers off an onion even tourist places so derided as shallow and simplistic reveal much about histories perceptions and power there are many myths created by tourism but the biggest myth perpetuated by theory is that
has poles at the classical bulk and surface plasmon conditions dictated by and by equation respectively spheres in the case of a sphere of radius a and local dielectric dielectric function embedded in a host medium of local dielectric function we first expand the screened interaction in spherical harmonics and we then derive the coefficients of this expansion by imposing the boundary conditions one finds where is the smallest of and and equations has poles at the classical bulk and surface plasmon conditions which in the case of a single sphere in a host medium are dictated by and by equation respectively introducing equations into equation one finds the following expression for the effective inverse dielectric function this equation represents the dilute limit of the effective inverse dielectric function derived by barrera and fuchs for a system composed of identical interacting spheres in a host medium in the limit as qa an expansion of equation yields which is precisely the long wavelength the effective inverse dielectric function obtained in this result demonstrates the expected result that in the limit as qa a broad beam of charged particles interacting with a single sphere of dielectric function in a host medium of dielectric function can only create collective excitations at the dipole resonance where with which for a drude sphere in vacuum yields s sp cylinders in the case of an infinitely long cylinder of radius a and local dielectric function embedded in a host medium of local dielectric function we expand the screened interaction in terms of the modified bessel functions im and km as follows where and represent the projections of the position vector along the axis of the cylinder and in a plane perpendicular to the cylinder respectively qz denotes the magnitude of a wave s are then derived by imposing the boundary conditions ie by requiring that the total scalar potential and the normal component of the displacement vectors be continuous at the interface one finds or equivalently and nm for all in the limit as equation yields nm for all for the behavior of the depolarization factors nm of equation as a function of see figure this figure shows that the energies of all modes are rather close to the planar surface plasmon energy except for the mode which corresponds to a homogeneous the cylindrical surface shifts downwards from the planar surfaceplasmon energy as the adimensional quantity qza decreases as occurs with the symmetric low energy mode in thin films and introducing equations into equation one finds the following expression for the effective inverse dielectric function the axis of the cylinder and in a plane perpendicular to the cylinder respectively the volume fraction filled by the cylinder is denoted by and jm are cylindrical bessel functions of the first kind a spectral representation of the effective inverse dielectric function of equations was reported in in the limit as qa an expansion of equations yields and the corresponding depolarization factors being and respectively equation demonstrates that in the limit as qa and for a wave vector normal to the cylinder moving charged particles can only create collective excitations at the dipole resonance where ie which for a drude cylinder in vacuum yields ritchie s frequency ss sp conversely still in the limit as qa but for wave vector along the axis of the cylinder moving charged particles can only excite the bulk mode of the host medium dictated by the condition ie in agreement with the discussion of section nonlocal models planar surface nonlocal effects that are absent in the classical model described above can be incorporated in a variety of semiclassical and quantal approaches which we here only describe for a planar planar surface hydrodynamic model semiclassical hydrodynamic approach within a semiclassical hydrodynamic approach the screened interaction can be obtained from the linearized hydrodynamic equations for a semi infinite metal in vacuum consisting of an abrupt step of the unperturbed electron density we can assume translational invariance in the plane of the surface and noting that the normal of the hydrodynamical velocity should vanish at the interface equations yield the following expression for the fourier transform where is the smallest of and an inspection of equations shows that the hydrodynamic surface response function and therefore the hydrodynamic screened interaction become we also note that the second moment of the imaginary part of the hydrodynamic surface response function is found to be where represents the electron density finally we note that in the long wavelength limit the hydrodynamic screened interaction of equations reduces to the classical screened interaction of equations and with the dielectric functions and being replaced by the drude dielectric function and unity and unity respectively the same result is also obtained by simply assuming that the electron gas is nondispersive ie by taking the hydrodynamic speed equal to zero quantum hydrodynamic approach within a quantized hydrodynamic model of a many electron system one first linearizes the hydrodynamic hamiltonian with respect to the induced electron density and then quantizes this hamiltonian on the basis of the normal modes of oscillation corresponding to and one finds where hg represents the thomas fermi ground state of the static unperturbed electron system and hb and hs are free bulk and surface plasmon hamiltonians respectively and represent the dispersion of bulk and surface plasmons and hence within this approach one can distinguish the separate contributions to the imaginary part of the hydrodynamic surface response function of equation coming from the excitation of either bulk or surface plasmons one finds where in the limit as the bulk contribution to the so called energy loss function img vanishes and the imaginary part of both the equations and yields the classical result which can also be obtained from equation with replaced by the drude dielectric function of equation and set equal to unity equation shows that in the classical of energy ss sp as predicted by ritchie specular reflection model an alternative scheme to incorporate nonlocal effects which has the virtue of expressing the
straw bale side through visual discourse visual arguments during this period the sbca raised funds for testing by they did a formal presentation including not only the test results in graph format but also a color video of the testing process the segment in which the door of the furnace is opened to reveal the stucco covered wall against which an industrial grade torch has been applied for over an hour is dramatic the bale under direct blast is pulled out and falls on the floor nearly a century ago were also presented in large formats to illustrate the durability of the technique conclusion in design engineering sketches serve to capture initial and shared ideas for the straw bale movement as a whole welsch s and hammond s sketches drawings and photographs in shelter and fine homebuilding served as sketches for a fertile period those representations also share the characteristics of the prototype as a recruiting device in engineering design and the cascade of drawing prototype dyads because they were followed almost immediately by experimental play at workshops such as the one at oracle indeed a bay area architect who initiated straw bale arches said that to describe refinement of the prototype details the two publications also generated more representations as straw bale enthusiasts went seeking additional historic structures from which to learn photographed them and published them along with technical sketches for the growing readership of the last straw journal concern with codes enters at this early juncture with misunderstandings between straw bale advocates and code officials when they began to collaborate on writing a standard together the code officials and the straw bale advocates had very different expectations of the experiment permits the building code officials expected consistent measurement testing and numbers the straw bale advocates gave them very similar to what in the turbine industry were called build books a compilation of sequential instructions incorporating both in house drawings and assembly instructions from vendors whose components would be integrated these are also of the same family as build it with bales the first straw bale how to manual the point of putting things into words convincing arguments accepted by code officials had been primarily visual ones even when numeric data were also present the initial load bearing tests calculated by a university of arizona graduate were based on the use of home made apparatus constructed by the straw bale community with the advice of local the photographic documentation of historic straw bale houses still in good repair and conceded the durability of the technique several also admitted being more convinced of the fire resistant qualities of a plastered straw bale wall after viewing the video footage of the test more than by the numeric read out in the straw bale community tacit knowledge of the technique was conveyed last straw journal kept straw bale builders abreast of emerging refinements in articles with supporting photographs and sketches having made successful buildings and successful arguments for the initiation of a building code straw bale advocates did not approach the code making process from the conventions and discourse of that field thus problems of communication ensued during the years margins by mediators perhaps the best example of the resolution of differences is the manner finally agreed upon to standardize a bale of straw described by tony perry head of the new mexico straw bale construction association and the cid started off saying we need to get the farmers to certify every bale tag put on it can there are wheat rye oats barley and rice straw bales and there are probably or hundred different climatic conditions in which it might be cut and baled no way so we ended up with a very practical thing and the cid came up with it they said all right pick up a string bale by one string and if you can walk feet without it falling practice can be barriers to organizational change in the new mexico cid office organizational change has taken place the cid liaison who translated discourses by sketching in the margins of understanding is now consulted as the expert on incorporating indigenous building techniques into code he was recently visited by a delegation from one that uses visual discursive practice to mediate competing use of perlite as a pozzolanic addition in producing blended cements erdem meral tokyay erdog an abstract there are million tons of perlite reserves in the world and two thirds of this amount takes place in turkey although perlite of natural perlites in blended cement production for this purpose after examining the suitability of the perlites as pozzolans and their ease of grindability types of blended cements having or blaine fineness were produced by using additions production of the blended cements were accomplished either by intergrinding or separate grinding the performance of the cements was evaluated by conducting the following tests particle size laser diffraction normal consistency setting time soundness and compressive strength the results showed that perlites possess sufficient pozzolanic characteristics to be used in production of blended cement introduction perlite is a glassy volcanic rock that contains approximately perlite is used in various constructional horticultural and industrial applications due to its glassy structure and high and contents perlite is a pozzolan obviously although its pozzolanic characteristics have been mentioned in some limited numbers of technical papers no investigation has so far been made on the use of natural perlite in manufacturing using mineral admixtures in cement and concrete industry depending on the type and amount one or more of the following advantages can be achieved through their use reduction in portland cement consumption improved workability lower permeability higher durability higher strength etc moreover each of these items can result in further benefits for during calcining and grinding since over of the total electrical energy consumption during cement production is used for grinding raw materials and clinker improvements in the grinding operation should be appreciated the overall objectives of this study can be summarized as
source of strength many of the experiences of discrimination that people of color encounter especially blacks and native americans have powerful historical and salience to symbolic subtle verbal and nonverbal messages that alone can produce race based stress racial harassment racial harassment is defined as a type or class of experiences characterized by hostile racism that involves feelings thoughts actions strategies behaviors and policies that are intended to communicate or make salient the target s subordinate or inferior status because of his or her membership in this would be similar to essed s containment and problematization categories racial harassment can reflect explicit and implicit institutional permission to commit acts of racism as evidenced in the absence of explicit policies and procedures for filing and handling claims of racial harassment or in the well documented existence of community violence that disproportionally traumatizes black and hispanic children this form of racial harassment involves quid pro quo arrangements in which the person of color remains silent or does not act or file formal complaints in return for continued access jones kovel one may be pressured with losing their home job or education if they report acts of racism feagin vera and batur described an incident that illustrates an instance of quid pro quo racial harassment white employees found out their black female coworker sheryl had a birthday and learned that she was expecting a child the white coworkers gave her a party and the cake was inscription happy birthday sheryl it must have been the watermelon seeds sheryl said of the experience when i saw the inscription i just kind of stared at it and said oh thank you i did nt feel i could get angry i had just found out i was pregnant and i needed my job the parallel for racial harassment to quid pro quo sexual harassment is in work or live many types of race based encounters that participants reported in discrimination studies could be grouped into the class of acts that would be considered racial harassment researchers cited in the discrimination literature review have found lazy lacks ability and assuming one is a criminal or is dangerous emotional reactions to hostile treatment include anger rage powerlessness shame guilt helplessness low self esteem or persistent self doubt suspiciousness and distrust other reactions have been positive and adaptive such as resolving to prove people wrong confronting the person or persons or using the feelings as a source of personal or group strength feagin middle class blacks that most hite americans do not have any inkling of the rage over racism that is repressed by african americans repressed rage over maltreatment is common the psychological costs of widespread prejudice and discrimination include rage humiliation frustration resignation and depression discrimination many of the respondents described complex or multiple experiences or structural racism reflected in health and mental health disparities that were not easily identified as either avoidance or hostility but were combinations and complex mixtures of both therefore the encounters that people reported discriminatory harassment is a type or class of experiences or encounters with racism that are best defined as aversive hostile racism which involves thoughts behavior actions feelings or polices and procedures that have strong hostile elements intended to create distance among racial group members after a person of color has gained entry into an environment from once a person of color enters a system he or she is avoided in hostile ways thus discrimination as aversion and hostility as harassment are combined the aversion may occur at individual institutional and cultural levels consider the situation of a person who has been given access to a job yet after being hired is treated with distain and is not trained to do her job well subsequently she is often subjected to poor evaluations and is reprimanded for minor this situation contains both avoidance and acts of hostility green wrote about a court case that applied to the racial discrimination and harassment a black female bank teller train or promote her some types of discriminatory harassment are captured in the work of dovidio and gaertner and other scholars they noted that over time racism has changed and become more symbolic subtle and hidden within the guise of nonprejudicial or nonracist behavior thought and justification according to these scholars strong negative feelings toward people of color operate on the subconscious level of awareness while they often not communicated as open hostility such feelings and beliefs exist and manifest themselves in colorblind beliefs and practices as well as by expressions of discomfort disgust and fear when people or organizational leaders can justify their actions by claiming that factors other than race were responsible for their acts or decisions place is then made to look foolish or overly sensitive dovidio gaertner kawakami and hodson pointed to research that has shown that some forms of racism do not occur in situations when justification can be offered that is not racial the reality is that the behavior appears to people who it is directed at as inconsistent and unpredictable and as such could erode blacks or any person of color s confidence which because the behavior is not conscious the actor will deny any hostile or discriminatory intent thereby intensifying possible racial conflict the potential for miscommunication is high in these instances and the behaviors most influenced by the aversive hostile racism are often but not always subtle indirect and nonverbal the result is that mixed messages an african american math student s experience at a predominately white university that reflects the type of mixed message that communicates both aversion and hostility the student describes the event this way we took a first quiz and i got a the professor was like said we think you ve cheated we just do nt know so we think we re gonna make you take the exam again i took it with just the graduate student instructor in the room and i got a on the exam the new
enough system state information on one hand apa needs the traffic load pattern in a wimax subscriber s local network if fairness constrained optimal revenue criterion is employed to allocate power resource on downlink the cac can provide this information since it estimated on the other hand when the cac module makes admission decisions it has to know the downlink data transmission rate which is decided by the apa module therefore the apa module and cac module have to depend on each other to accomplish their missions from another perspective radio and bandwidth resources are the two most important combines the radio resource management and bandwidth resource management together the apa module is responsible for radio resource management while the cac module is responsible for bandwidth resource management in this article we design the apa module and cac module with the same criteria that is to balance the expectations of service providers and sub revenue policy for cac optimization simulation results prove that our optimization approaches can achieve good performance when apa module and cac module work individually it is reasonable to expect that if our apa and cac optimization approaches work together for cross layer resource management we can achieve satisfying overall system performance since the current standardization activities of ieee leave service providers a chance to have their own selections in these two technical aspects distinct designing criteria that follows can be chosen from the perspective of service providers optimal revenue is the major concern of both apa and cac design from the perspective of subscribers fairness is the system we have to take into account the demands of both service providers and subscribers accordingly we have developed fairness constrained optimal revenue criteria for downlink apa optimization as well as utility constrained optimal revenue policy for downlink cac optimization in addition to make apa and cac work cooperatively a cross layer resource control networks for manufacturing control diagnostics and safety data there is wide use of ethernet for system diagnostics and control and inclusion of safety features on the same network is being debated the trend is towards wireless communications by james moyne member ieee and dawn tilbury senior member ieee factory infrastructure networks provide higher reliability visibility and diagnosability and enable capabilities such as distributed control diagnostics safety and device interoperability at higher levels networks can leverage internet services to enable factory wide automated scheduling control and diagnostics improve data storage and visibility and open the door to manufacturing diagnostics and safety network performance characteristics such as delay delay variability and determinism are evaluated in the context of networked control applications this paper also discusses future networking trends in each of these categories and describes the actual application of all three categories of networks on a reconfigurable factory testbed at the university of michigan technology including device net profibus opc wired and wireless ethernet and safetybus this paper concludes with a discussion of trends in industrial networking including the move to wireless for all categories and the issues that must be addressed to realize these trends important advantage is the reduced volume of wiring fewer physical potential points of failure such as connectors and wire harnesses results in increased reliability another significant advantage is that networks enable complex distributed control systems to be realized in both horizontal and vertical systems these networked diagnostics along with other factory floor and operations information however networks are being used at all levels of the manufacturing hierarchy loosely defined as device machine cell subsystem system factory and enterprise within the manufacturing domain the application of networks can be further divided into subdomains of control diagnostics and safety control network closed loop control the control may be time critical such as at a computer numeric controller or servo drive level or event based such as at a programmable logic controller level in the control subdomain networks must guarantee a certain level of response time determinism to be effective diagnostics network operation usually refers to the communication of sensory information as necessary to which refers to deducing the health of the network systems diagnostics solutions may close the loop around the diagnostic information to implement control capabilities such as equipment shutdown or continuous process improvement however the performance requirements of the system are primarily driven by the data communicate large amounts of data determinism is usually less important than in control networks issues of data compression and security can also play a large role in diagnostic networks especially when utilized as a mechanism for communication between user and vendor to support equipment diagnostics safety is the newest of the three network with an emphasis on determinism network reliability and capability for self diagnosis driven by a desire to minimize cost and maximize interoperability and interchangeability there continues to be a movement to try to consolidate around a single network technology at different levels of control and across different application domains for example ethernet utilized as a lower level control network this has enabled capabilities such as web based drill down to the sensor level also the debate continues on the consolidation of safety and control on a single network this movement towards consolidation and indeed the a limited network bandwidth and they must strike a balance with factors related to the time to deliver information end to end between components two parameters that are often involved in this balance are network average speed and determinism briefly network speed is a function of the network access time and bit transfer rate while determinism is a measure of the ability to communicate to provide end to end data delivery the differentiation could be at the lowest physical level up through the mechanism at which network access is negotiated all the way up through application services that are supported protocol functionality is commonly described and differentiated utilizing the international standards organization open systems interconnection network transport session presentation and application the network protocol specifically the media access control protocol component defines the mechanism for delegating this bandwidth in such a
to either state although we outline both oxygen consumption modalities it both may be occurring simultaneously in any given tissue under consideration however we will consider only one at a time in this discussion another serious failure of these approaches is the lack of appreciation of how the cell actually responds to stress and external loads or the real issue survival by oxidative metabolism laboratory tests on cells and mitochondria fail to adequately address survival of a compromised cell or tissue consider that a healthy person s tissue cells a of mm hg or less this is freely available oxygen in the fluid plasma that goes into our cells to keep them alive and well however measuring just available tissue oxygen does not give a true picture of the actual oxygen available for tissues and cells injuries infections and diseases can cause a drop in tissue oxygen level down to almost zero all while the plasma reflects nearly normal levels swelling can cause excessive pressure that cuts off healthy circulation swollen tissue not only causes a loss of oxygen circulation to areas of the body called ischemia but also pushes fluids away from the affected area resulting in fluid nutrient and oxygen flow away from the swollen tissue area this problem drops the dangerously low destroys tissue and slows healing hyperbaric oxygen research has shown that optimal tissue healing of this type of problem occurs only if can rise to mm hg oxygen given in a normal room is not enough slows healing hyperbaric oxygen research has shown that optimal tissue healing of this type of problem occurs only if can rise to mm hg oxygen given in a normal room is not enough to raise tissue oxygen levels that high because cells cannot solubilize and release enough extra oxygen also some disease conditions or toxic states can impair oxygen use even where plasma oxygen levels are normal near the cells for people to heal well under these adverse conditions they need boosts under higher body pressure higher pressure oxygen can deliver much needed relief to oxygen starved cells that are barely suffering through toxic anaerobic metabolism given enough oxygen the cells will resume normal oxidative metabolism therefore a mere discussion of the available atmospheric oxygen is never adequate but a consideration of the tissue need and the transport available to fill that need is required monod consumption model a monod consumption also known as michaelis menton model can be a useful kinetic model for biologic systems this model is a ratio expressed as for this equation to simulate biologic systems important cell properties must be adequately simulated at low metabolic activity decreases however in this lower oxygen pressure region large changes in the consumption rate are experienced as the cell attempts to compensate for oxygen s relative absence at oxygen consumption does not occur at elevated oxygen consumption cannot exceed a maximum consumption rate qmax values for each corneal layer s qmax are assumed to be equal to the constant consumption values shown in table the monod constant mm hg which was selected for this study is a reasonable first approximation and gave us consistent behavior in the model sigmoidal and linear proportional consumption models fem software can also solve oxygen distributions through corneal tissue by using a sigmoidal oxygen consumption function to determine the coefficients the sigmoidal equation was fit to bonanno s versus in vivo data by using commercial curve fitting the linear equation was also fit to the bonanno s versus in vivo data both of these curve fits are shown in figure eye geometry and fea because total consumption rates are from tissue volume the geometry of the tissue is critical to the overall system model because the cornea and lens are approximately rotationally symmetric this system will be represented using a axisymmetric fem this simplification takes advantage of rotational symmetry of the cornea and contact lens to reduce the number of elements needed to reach a solution for the purposes of this model the solution is equivalent to a full simulation if all boundary conditions and geometry are radially furthermore the geometric model represents the placement of an geometry on a representative corneal geometry an additional area for future research and consideration would be the contact lens deformation on the eye the cornea and typical contact lens were drawn in a commercial cad program important dimensions of the model are parameterized so that they can be changed without redrawing the entire model these include the center thickness values for all tissue layers and the contact lens as front and back radii of curvature for the cornea the central corneal tissue thicknesses in this geometry are identical to that of the model the model is effectively a special case of the geometry a corneal back surface radius of curvature of mm results in corneal peripheral thickness of this geometry considers only corneal average values the actual shape of any individual cornea may deviate significantly from these values but can be specifically a later time as needed desired a parametric contact lens geometry is defined that allows the creation of virtually any symmetric lens shape control points are created at equal distances along on the base curve of the lens a spline is fit through these points to define the front curve the particular contact lens geometry used is from our measured profile of a acuvue advance lens in which we chose to use our measured center of the thickness increases to a maximum of at a radius of mm from the center the average thickness for the entire lens volume is the cornea increases in thickness toward the limbus the epithelium and endothelium are modeled as constant thickness layers that follow the overall corneal shape only the stroma increases in thickness the thickness values along the central corneal axis are identical to those used in tear film layers into layer that is thick this expedient simplification should still be more representative of hydrogel contact lenses
bid ask spreads informed traders might find it worthwhile to trade on private information even with modest profit overall all of the evidence is consistent with our proposed increases in liquidity facilitate efficiency via two distinct channels first return predictability from order flows is diminished during periods of high liquidity because arbitrageurs are better able to assist specialists in absorbing order flows during such periods second a reduction in the minimum price change allows for the collection of more information that in turn increases informational efficiency by allowing prices to reflect more information about fundamentals conclusions in an efficient market return predictability from past information should be short lived and minimal given the evidence that such predictability does exist in the short run understanding its time variation and its relation to other financial market attributes such as liquidity are of fundamental importance based on this motivation we examine how the predictive relation between returns and order flow varies over time and across different liquidity regimes on a continuous series of short horizon returns for a comprehensive sample of all nyse stocks that traded every day during the ten year period from to return predictability from order flows has declined substantially over time with reductions in the minimum tick size such predictability is markedly diminished during liquid periods within each tick regime prices are closer to random walk benchmarks during the more recent decimal tick size regime than in earlier ones the the overall evidence is consistent with the hypothesis that increased arbitrage activity during more liquid periods enhances market efficiency distinct from the fama notion that efficiency implies a lack of return predictability the microstructure literature also considers informational efficiency which is defined as the amount of private information revealed in prices we shed light on this measure of a financial market s quality by considering patterns in per hour open to close cl ose close to open variance ratios variance ratios generally have increased while first order return autocorrelations have declined as the minimum tick size was reduced this pattern is particularly strong for smaller firms this suggests that the observed increase in variance ratios is not due to increased mispricing but to more private information being reflected in prices following the tick size reductions in sum this evidence is consistent with greater liquidity engendering a informational efficiency an extension of this analysis would be to study the relation between return predictability and illiquidity for fixed income and currency markets considering the forecastability of returns from order flows prior to important announcements would also be interesting pursuit of such topics appears to be a worthwhile agenda for future research does provision of public rental housing crowd out private housing investment a panel var approach abstract using province level panel data on housing investment this paper examines the effects of public housing provision on private responses using panel data and a proper specification allows us to look at dynamic interactions between public and private investment while controlling for province specific fixed effects and year specific effects we first examine rental housing investment has changed in response to the public counterpart we performed a panel var estimation of the crowding out effect to examine the efficacy of housing support programs for low income families our empirical results reveal that public and private housing investment granger cause each other with an asymmetric pattern and the crowding out effect rises with the housing availability ratio it grows rapidly as the housing availability ratio gets closer to to which offers useful policy implications for public housing policies in fast growing regions or countries introduction as highlighted by keynes analysis of government spending s effect on private investment one of the classic topics in government expenditure analyses is whether and to what extent public investment crowds out private investment studies on this fundamental topic include whether public insurance crowds out private insurance government grants crowd out private donations and whether public provision of research funds crowds out the private counterpart a similar motivation applies to a large scale expenditure program public provision of rental houses for low income families the literature on this issue has begun to emerge in the fields of public finance and housing economics but little research has been conducted using region level panel data on housing investment this paper examines the crowding out in housing markets from the perspective of the short run interaction between public and private rental housing investment using province level panel data on housing investment for the period in a fast growing economy south korea previous studies of crowding out in housing markets can be classified into two strands out in the standard demand supply framework for instance murray proposes a standard housing demandsupply model and estimates it using ivs in subsequent studies reduced form housing models are considered as an alternative to the structural models in the first strand of studies using appropriate ivs is crucial meanwhile the second strand uses var models that directly rely on the theories of housing markets using the recent development in time series analyses murray uses a var model that includes equations for subsidized and unsubsidized housing stocks his var model is motivated by a long run equilibrium relationship between subsidized and unsubsidized housing stocks and real income to address crowding out from the perspective of the long run equilibrium relationship among key in the period he estimates an error correction model and tests crowding out with restrictions on the error correction this paper advances the literature by dealing with the issues unresolved in previous studies or by combining the advantages of the approaches adopted in previous studies the main contribution comes from the use of panel data which uses both cross sectional and time series variations despite many advantages using cross sectional data would in in some instances complicate statistical inference on the true public housing policy effects a usually cited problem is that cross sectional studies are not able to control for the unobserved fixed
of compared with the amount for the control group any savings in admissions to acute care did not compensate for the coordination costs and additional community services relaxed to include patients that clinicians considered to be at risk of hospital admission as a result only percent of the enrolled patients had at least one hospital admission before their enrollment and percent had a hospital admission during the live phase this therefore reduced the population s potential hospitalization base from which the savings could be generated one of in entry criteria was that many enrolled patients had less need for coordination than anticipated table shows the costing data from the analysis of those intervention and control patients having at least one admission in the twelve months before enrollment combining the savings from hospital admissions for all subtrials for the twelve month group changed the net savings in the hospital sector which the cost neutrality modeling was based similarly the overall deficit fell from million to million demonstrating the importance of appropriately targeting a particular patient group for coordinated care the reduction in the overall deficit was generated not only from greater hospital savings but also from the substantially lower costs of coordination that coordinated care could reduce unplanned admissions to pay for substituted services predictors of unplanned admissions were determined by using data on admissions for the two years before coordination and during the intervention phase we used an intention to treat approach and chi squared automatic interaction detector analysis for all patients enrolled in the trial age group marital status language spoken at home employment status type of pension received retirement status health care card status veteran status need for a caregiver ownership of private health insurance number of comorbidities and number of hospital admissions during the historical period the greatest predictor of unplanned admissions was a history of three or more hospital admissions in the previous two years this group accounted for had a percent chance of one or more unplanned admissions per year within this group the greatest probability of unplanned admissions was for those who also had four or more comorbidities discussion in regard to the national trial hypothesis the first element of improved able to determine precisely which trial components were associated with improvements in well being the let concluded that addressing the fragmentation of care through the patient centered approaches of monitoring and service coordination in partnership with gps was a more successful strategy for sa healthplus than was the structured care plan or funds pooling strategies management case management and coordinated care but using a broad definition of disease management weingarten and colleagues found in a meta analysis that patients education providers education and feedback were the most commonly used interventions sa health plus added to the evidence that incorporating a psychological and behavioral component rather than just a focus on disease was an important associated motivational skills enabled the patients to be at the center of the gp service coordinator interactions this approach was supported by a review of successful coordinated care interventions by chen and colleagues although the patient s life problem rather than a disease specific problem was not used in previous trials using the patient s problem engages the patient in his or her own care and determines whether issues other than the approach works at an individual level but the trial also showed that aggregated scores can measure the progress of a group of patients over time and that the degree of goal change can be used to monitor the success of a program of care the approach also enables the practitioners competence in behavioral change techniques to be supported and monitored the greatest lesson that emerged from the trial was that coordination not just the severity of his or her disease that is self management capacity may provide a method of determining who requires coordinated care the flinders model of self management support has become the basis of chronic disease self management education for health professionals in the national sharing health care demonstration projects this care planning more than one condition in the same patient for instance it has been applied in mentally ill patients and resident training in the united states the commonwealth states and territories have announced a million strategy to address chronic illness in australia of which education of clinicians in selfmanagement support is a key component assumptions underpinning the evaluation did not reflect the reality of conducting such an ambitious trial the costs attributed to coordination are largely those of service coordination service coordinators had three overlapping roles as clinicians research officers and change agents accordingly an accurate cost comparison with usual care would require the time that the service coordinators spent developing the tools and and managing change to be separated from that they spent on their purely clinical role what we did discover is the considerable cost of facilitating system change further research on coordinated systems of care should try to disaggregate the costs of change management and research from those of providing care in addition we had no explicit decision making process to link the fewer hospital admissions the savings that were generated were automatically absorbed into the costs of providing both coordinated care services and allied health services to everyone in the trial a number of coordination programs and health service reforms have described the failure to reduce hospital admissions significantly in the united kingdom coulter found little evidence that developments in fund holding scheme led to investment by fund holders in new practice based services without lowering the demand for specialist care rates of outpatient referral or hospital admissions furthermore improvements in primary care may increase demand because new needs are identified that previously would not have been met in the united states managed care for medicaid beneficiaries resulted there were no differences between the intervention and control groups in their overall use and costs of resources similarly a review of disease management programs by bodenheimer macgregor and stothart
an example each roll of prepared cotton fabric is routinely tested for ph of aqueous extract size and hardness content together with dyeability in preparation as assessed by other factors short term variations in dyeability across the width and along the length in decmc of at least units and color strength variations of been found dye application methods standard operating procedures are required for the various parameters of dye application including weighing usefully be employed to improve accuracy and reproducibility master standards the approved laboratory dyeing is the master standard against which all future production of engineered standards is assessed the master standard is measured by the sop and retained on computer physical standards should be stored in conditioned and darkroom facilities as mentioned the card used for mounting standards must also be selected with care production methods for engineered standards following approval of laboratory dyeings engineered standards are produced and following quality control these are chipped and mounted on to suitable card together with reflectance data in the early years many standards were produced by carrying out dyeings on but up to cards were also rejected against the master standard for off shade or unlevelness in the production of an important textile color selector bulk scale exhaust dyeing and continuous paddyeing methods were rejected in favor of dyeings on small scale winches and jets with the exception of small scale machines based on the package dyeing components relative positions of reels or rollers and the time for a complete passage of the substrate result in unlevelness creases and running marks in fabrics dyed in these smallscale winches and jets thus longer lengths must be dyed in the range with increases in costs of machinery and product rger size tubes depending on the amount of fabric required the increasing use of digital communication methods and the need for only small dyed samples as a visual guide means that sufficient quantities of fabric of the necessary quality can be produced by the latter method giving increased productivity the quality of dyeings is more consistent between tubes in a rotodyer machine retailers demand a high level of personal service and attention the optimum service in terms of color matching quality speed of delivery and acceptability of the price structure appears to be achieved from small laboratories based on a staff of no more than five producing between and color matches and the associated engineered standards per year an that the service and quality deteriorate as the size of the operation increases significantly above this critical level a number of factors can be involved including the quality of management the training of staff and the level of automation and control cleanliness and accuracy are high priorities in such a facility the design of such a facility based on laboratory being emphasized the cost of setting up a laboratory to carry out this level of activity is about for capital expenditure on dyeing color measurement and ancillary equipment but excluding the purchase of a building the cost of preparing a database and establishing the necessary intellectual property must also be added it is estimated that there are already uk and europe to the usa and the far east the facilities available from selected companies producing engineered standards have been described a number of such small laboratories situated relatively near the clients may thus provide a more effective service compared with a few large laboratories small laboratories may also be able to cope better with the and the production of engineered standards is thus a relatively small independent laboratory capable of high quality reproducible and accurate dyeing to tight instrumental color tolerances based on the philosophy outlined earlier market size it is estimated that there are worldwide about retail to engineered standards standards the problems successes and uses of these by various retailers the requirements for producing engineered standards and various aspects of color communication and management have been discussed in a recent multi authored publication looking forward seem to them to be simply another added cost as the benefits that can be obtained as already discussed above are not appreciated or understood this means that a realistic and adequate financial recompense is difficult to obtain for this exacting service and the profitability of some of the laboratories providing this service is in doubt this it is difficult to define whether this service achieves either additional sales or even a profit a major management distraction is the time spent on seeking payment that diverts resources from production and quality issues many suppliers of merchandise to retailers supplying engineered standards take issue with and do not wish to be pressured by the a number of laboratories to provide this service is likely to be a feature of the future these must be able however to give the quality and service which have now been established by the leaders in this field to some extent the size of these operations the quality of both staff and management may dictate the quality and service provided the inability to achieve a operations and force retailers to revert to less satisfactory methods of obtaining color standards larger retailers could of course establish an in house coloration laboratory but this requires capital expenditure and the availability of specialist staff as many such organizations already subcontract important technical services such as food analysis an involvement in a coloration laboratory establish jointly an independent dyeing laboratory as an external resource to carry out palette generation and standard production conclusion the generation of color palettes and the production of engineered master standards have become a mature activity carried out by independent matching laboratories this is an exacting service in terms of quality and speedy this is a cost effective service for the provision of standards to which suppliers must produce colors for the continued success of both the supplier and the retailing organization role of quaternary ammonium salts in improving the fastness properties of place during regarding the use of quaternary ammonium salts as dye
study of bangladesh in broadly corroborated sen s findings for bengal and found that excess mortality in bangladesh was in no small measure the effect of a speculative crisis rice prices rose dramatically because merchants badly underestimated a harvest that turned out to supply during this famine the law of one price implies that as long as transport costs remain constant the variation in food prices across markets traffic due to wartime restrictions markets became more segmented during the famine but only marginally so apart from brief intervals in november and march figure describes quite a different outcome in bangladesh three decades later the spike in the standard deviation in late and early markets in faminethreatened botswana and kenya in the early shows that across eighteen markets in botswana where the average price of maize meal rose from to pula per bag between august and april the standard deviation fell from to whereas across eighteen markets in kenya where the average retail price of maize rose according to patrick webb and joachim von braun famines in sudan and ethiopia in the mid were also exacerbated by weak spatial market integration in normal times in ethiopia prices moved in tandem but in the mid other regional capitals von braun and webb link such anomalies to restrictions on private traders buttressed by quotas and roadblocks trends in the spreads of teff and sorghum prices across ethiopia in tell a slightly different story however the rise in the coefficient of variation of teff prices across ten of ethiopia s provinces from an average of in to in the coefficient of variation of sorghum prices changed little during the same period in in and in formal studies of how markets worked during pre twentieth century famines are few although evidence from nineteenth century ireland and finland and from monthly price data to estimate whether famines led to increasing price dispersion between regions whether markets were slower to adjust to disequilibria during famines and whether markets systematically overestimated the harvest shortfall in times of famine and therefore led to excessive storage finnish and irish towns imply strong comovements between pairs of markets in crisis years and in general speeds of adjustment to disequilibria no slower than in noncrisis years finally the particularly sharp seasonal price rises recorded during famines in preindustrial europe fail to support the view that producers and traders sen and ravallion overpessimism in the event of a harvest shortfall is absent in the data why did markets work better in nineteenth century ireland and finland than in twentieth century bengal and bangladesh a key difference is the political context bangladesh was emerging from civil war in while bengal was responses to spatial and intertemporal disequilibria were no slower than in noncrisis times in practice markets may adjust too slowly in the midnineteenth century for example before the telegraph and long distance bulk carriage by steamship could have made the difference global grain markets could not prevent mass always benefit the poor as sen s classic contribution emphasizes it is easy to imagine how they might allow inhabitants of less affected areas endowed with the requisite purchasing power to attract food away from faminethreatened areas much depends on the extent to which such exports are used to finance cheaper imported substitutes figure rice prices in bengal mean and coefficient of variation figure regional variation in rice prices in bangladesh figure refers to the coefficient of variation to adjust for wartime inflation the bengali data are taken from the records mss further information desired by the commission on sept prices the bangladeshi data are taken from mohiuddin alamgir the same could be argued for the failure of prices to plummet below their prefamine norm as hoarded stocks were sold off forced migration such as that associated with the price data are taken from gregory clark paolo malanima d government action throughout history a shifting mix of solidarity and fear has led ruling classes to accept a degree of responsibility to those at risk during most analytical attention has focused on how relief from the central appropriate yardstick for effective famine relief is an abiding issue in the past because governing elites were remote from those at they often relied on subbureaucracies and landowners to identify worthy recipients of relief history is full of examples of trade offs between red tape on the one hand and corrupt agents on the other consider qing china for relief to have any hope of success the central bureaucracy needed to bypass them at local level at first sight the finding that during the kangxi emperor s reign the size of a province s grain stocks varied inversely with the amount of relief granted suggests a well functioning relief mechanism provinces receiving relief were most likely the richest the central bureaucracy relied on corrupt local agents to identify and relieve those most at risk and the resultant allocation reflected a moral hazard problem arising out of asymmetric information periodic monitoring of grain stocks and penalties been amply discussed in dr ze and sen ravallion and transfers of food at below market prices may risk corruption and hoarding hence the frequent focus on the provision of nontradable and highly perishable food rations income transfers are less likely to distort food a further problem with public works is that fiscal stringency or fears of distorting labor markets as in ireland in the and in southern india in the may entail below subsistence wages and consequent excess mortality in india mass mortality the rhetoric of famine relief policy softened thereafter and jos antonio ortega osona attributes the reduction in year to year fluctuations in mortality in bengal after to a combination of better weather and more effective social safety nets local histories of the irish famine of the highlight the mismanagement of the public works the impossible burden placed on local taxpayers and the appalling conditions facing workhouse inmates measurable yardsticks of workhouse performance are available a poorly managed workhouse might have been relatively slow to begin admitting paupers or might have been associated with relatively high mortality from
neighborhoods in the albany new york area and all were selected on the basis of measures evaluating oral reading of narrative text intelligence and the following exclusionary criteria uncorrected sensory acuity problems social physical and neurological problems and frequent absences from school the gilmore oral reading test form was used to evaluate reading achievement and the wechsler intelligence scale for children revised was used to evaluate intelligence exclusionary criteria were evaluated through questionnaires completed by appropriate school personnel there were four levels of reading ability within each grade moderately impaired average and good readers severely impaired readers scored at or below the percentile on the oral reading test moderately impaired readers scored between the and percentiles on the test average readers scored between the and percentiles and good readers scored at or above the percentile all of these children had to have an iq of or above on either the verbal or the performance subscales of the wisc to be included in the sample none had any problems in the areas defined by the exclusionary criteria outlined previously each participating school contributed participants to both the impaired and normal reader groups and an effort was made to select comparable numbers of children from each ability stratum within a school because these children were selected schools the possibility of sampling bias was minimized participants in this study were children in a larger study evaluating the etiology of reading disability preliminary results from this study are discussed by vellutino et al and vellutino et al results reported in the article presented here are based on the final data set for the study materials and procedures for all the measures described next maximum scores means standard deviations are presented in table all the maximum scores are raw scores reflecting the total number of correct responses summed across items and or trials administration and scoring procedures for published tests were taken from the test manuals as were reliability coefficients for those tests administration and scoring procedures for experimental tests are specified subsequently reliability estimates for experimental tests were calculated on randomly selected participants from each age grade group using the odd even method of computing internal consistency coefficients in all instances are based on cronbach s alpha with the exception of reading and language comprehension all latent constructs were initially evaluated using at least two observed measures however because some of these measures produced disparate variability estimates in the younger and older groups we were forced to select the measure of the construct that produced comparable estimates in the two groups in cases in which latent constructs were defined by a single indicator the error variance associated with a given measure was estimated from the reliability coefficient for that measure and this estimate was used in all analyses evaluating true score variance and model fit in cases where reliability coefficients were relatively low we conducted in which error variances were set to zero and in no instance did this procedure produce any substantial change in model fit note also that the standardized tests used to measure given latent constructs all have well established validity as measures of those constructs the experimental tests used to measure the remaining latent constructs were selected on the basis of their convergent and discriminant validity in terms of relationships to other measures that have well established construct and empirical validity exogenous latent constructs visual coding visual coding was evaluated using an experimental test of visual memory memory for spatial locations this test was found in previous research to correlate significantly with other measures of visual processing ability and more highly with these measures it entailed memory for the spatial locations of dots forming individual visual patterns presented on a matrix consisting of either or cells each matrix was presented for sec and the child s taskwas to reproduce the dot pattern from memory on a blank matrix drawn on a transparency that overlaid a magnetic drawing board a round magnet was used to reproduce dot patterns measures of phonological coding phonological memory and memory for abstract words both these measures involved storage and retrieval of spoken syllables devoid of concrete referential meaning thus given theory and research documenting the importance of speech coding processes for holding information in working memory both were assumed to rely heavily on phonological coding ability moreover both types of measures have skills especially in beginning readers and both have been found to correlate more highly with these latter measures than with nonverbal measures finally tests evaluating phonological memory and memory for abstract words have also been found to reliably discriminate between poor and normal readers this is notable because poor readers tend to have weak phonological skills on the phonological memory test children were given eight trials to learn a list of six phonologically redundant nonsense syllables presented orally using the presentation test format on each trial there were two lists of nonsense syllables and each list was randomly assigned to a given participant stimuli within a list were randomly on each trial the presentation and test components of a given trial were separated by a sec hiatus during which the child counted backward from a randomly selected number the syllables on a list were presented at a rate of one per second and on each trial the child was given sec to recall as many as he or she could remember a word memory test that included both concrete and abstract words on this test the children were given six trials to learn a list of common words concrete words and abstract words equated for meaning and frequency of occurrence in children s basal readers all words were presented orally on each trial and the concrete and abstract words were randomly interspersed the t ion test format was used on each trial and there was a sec interval between words between list presentation and testing the child counted backward for sec and was thereafter given sec for recall separate tallies were made for each word
response to experience these effects could reflect priming an account that has been put forth priming is a mechanism in which apparent adjustments to particular speakers and listeners do not mean that such information has been represented by the linguistic system instead according to this view those linguistic forms and concepts that have recently been used simply enjoy a temporary increase in their level of activation representations themselves the implication is that any observed adaptation to a speaker is a by product of a system that is designed to use forms and concepts that have recently been accessed thereby increasing communicative efficiency priming would not be a sufficient explanation if the perceptual system could be shown to simultaneously and do in fact occur on the logical side if the purpose of perceptual learning is to make communication more efficient then it would make sense for the system to maintain dynamic representations that adjust to different speakers given that we continuously encounter speech from different people sometimes many times within a single conversation perceptual learning for a particular speaker persists even after hearing a new speaker with different pronunciations of the critical sounds empirically in addition to the findings using fricatives which resulted in speaker specific learning evidence at other levels of language processing suggests that listeners and that this experience exerts an influence extremely early in processing these findings suggest that the linguistic system does keep track of what information is relevant to our interactions with different conversational partners these analyses suggest a critical test what happens speaker specific phonemic representations if this were the case we would expect to see significant but opposite perceptual learning effects for each speaker whom listeners were exposed to listeners might retune the same phonemic representation each time they encounter a particular pronunciation of a phoneme resulting in no perceptual learning effect this final possibility is what would be predicted by a priming account of perceptual learning given the findings reviewed previously it appears that perceptual experience may lead to very different of the representation itself and on the nature of the information provided locally in the acoustic signal that is for stop consonant voicing for which perceptual learning seems to result in general phonemic adjustments we may find that hearing multiple pronunciations will result in a net absence of perceptual learning because the same representation has been tuned in two directions which can be speaker specific may result in the maintenance of distinct adjustments that are applied to the appropriate speaker the present experiments test these hypotheses listeners were exposed to two speakers in the context of a lexical decision task in experiment the critical sound was a stop consonant midway between d and this sound replaced the d for the other speaker thus for successful perception to occur listeners must learn to perceive dt as d when hearing one voice but as when hearing the other voice after this exposure participants categorized items on an idi iti continuum in both voices experiment was identical except that the critical sounds were the fricatives s the continuum items should be different for the two voices they have trained on if however perceptual learning is applied more speaker generally it will be interesting to see the pattern of perceptual learning will the representations reflect an average of the two pronunciations that have been heard or will they reflect the from the state university of new york at stony brook participated for a research credit or for payment all participants were years of age or older and all were native english speakers with normal hearing design participants were randomly assigned to one of four heard during exposure participants in the control groups heard a single voice during exposure and a single mispronounced phoneme that occurred in critical words crossing the voice at exposure with the ambiguous phoneme thus resulted in the four control groups paradigm have used critical items during the lexical decision exposure phase therefore the purpose of the control conditions here was to ensure that exposing listeners to only critical items assigned to one of the two experimental groups participants in the experimental groups were exposed to both the male and the female voice during the lexical decision task and to both mispronounced d s and mispronounced s each participant in the experimental group heard critical items in the male voice and critical items in the female voice the order of presentation of the which the d was ambiguous and one block in which the was ambiguous thus each experimental participant either heard male and female or the alternative combination order of voice was included as a factor for counterbalancing purposes although the experimental participants were thus opposite directions for each voice if the perceptual system is not able to make changes in a voice specific manner the net result for the experimental groups would be no perceptual learning effect in the categorization test phase all participants categorized phonemes on two idi iti continua one in the male voice and one in the female voice continua exposure two experimental lists were created for use in the auditory lexical decision task each with words and nonwords the lists were identical except for critical words stimulus selection the critical words ranged in length from two to five syllables twenty of the words d these each had a single instance of the phoneme each control subject heard half of the critical items with the choice of items counterbalanced across subjects each experimental subject heard all of the critical items half in a male voice and half in a female voice we also selected filler words that had no occurrences of d or as in kraljic and samuel the fillers were matched to the critical words in term of stress pattern number of syllables and word frequency of these words were used in the lexical decision task finally filler nonwords were created each experimental participant thus and filler nonwords for the block there were words intact d words filler
are very close to the desired toll values the trained neural network is then tested over several traffic scenarios and the results are shown in figs table in fig the absolute residuals are plotted for all the instances this plot further illustrates the accuracy of neural network predictions approximately the are less than in fig the axis denotes the desired tolls and the axis denotes the neural network predicted tolls it should be noted that in fig the results for many instances overlap with each other all these tests show that the results obtained during on line tests are found to be very close to the best solution obtained off line assuming that the arrival pattern is known the results of neural networks be in terms of approximating the relationship and predicting the output when completely new input data is presented to them conclusions in this paper an intelligent real time road pricing tool to charge variable tolls on highways was developed the developed intelligent system makes real time decisions about tolls on the road the results obtained in real time are found to be very close to the best solution obtained off line assuming that the vehicle known the system applications appear to be very promising the model developed is based on the combination of the dynamic programming and neural networks the proposed process learns from the solutions obtained from the past scenarios all pairs the performance of the network can easily be checked against the result of the best solution many tests show that the outcome of the proposed model is nearly equal to the best possible solution practically negligible cpu times were achieved and were thus absolutely acceptable for the real time application of the developed algorithm this research has suggested a methodology to analyze a two node network with one entry and one exit and time varying tolls the same methodology can be used to vehicle lanes on the road network to study the scenario in which all the road users are not equipped with electronic toll collection systems and tolls can be paid manually or to study the scenario in which there is more than one entry exit on the corridor in the case of a bigger network the offline phase using dynamic programming might not be efficient instead the offline phase can be modeled using meta heuristic algorithms such as genetic algorithms simulated annealing tabu search variable neighborhood search and ant colony systems however the overall framework suggested in this paper remains unchanged even for larger networks the problem considered has two basic characteristics uncertainty and need for on line control the proposed methodology could be used to solve other complex traffic and transportation problems characterized by uncertainty and need for on line control the impacts of product modularity on competitive capabilities and performance an empirical study abstract recent theories propose that modular product design is a key enabler for product success in global competition recent research has explored the impact of modular products on competitive manufacturing capabilities including price product quality customer service flexibility and delivery however there is limited empirical that simultaneously examines their relationships with performance this paper aims to fill this gap through quantitative research into hong kong s manufacturing industry results indicate that product modularity influences the capabilities of delivery flexibility and customer service and the capabilities of delivery and flexibility positively relate to product performance these findings show that modular product design cannot improve each capability simultaneously as existing multiple trade offs and future research are specified in this study introduction modular product design which is considered a key enabler for efficient mass customization and cycle time reduction often increases the manufacturers strategic flexibility the product has moved through the distribution channels and is ready to be distributed to clients this reduces inventory costs while quickly meeting client orders thus the application of modular product design has become a hot topic for both al hargadon and eisenhardt baldwin and clark fine thomke and reinertsen modular products are designed as a set of independent modules which can be reused and interchanged to maximize product variety thus firms can flexibly assemble the modules to develop new products develop independent and quickly test and replace defective modules to improve customer service for example hewlett packard used modular design to postpone the task of differentiating its inkjet printers so it could greatly reduce inventory costs with better customer service sony used modular product design to continuously these case studies represent best practice of applying modular product design no large scale empirical testing has been done to verify these practices the objective of this paper is to test the impacts of product modularity on competitive capabilities and product performance this research builds on and extends existing works in two ways first the and product performance a significant body of previous studies indicates that competitive capabilities positively influence performance a number of research studies have also suggested that modular product design improves multiple competitive capabilities no attempt has been made to test the impact of product modularity on multiple competitive capabilities and product performance in a large scale empirical study without empirical testing of this issue one can argue that product modularity helps only large manufacturers to develop complex product systems and to control standards it is also questionable whether modular product design can simultaneously enhance multiple competitive capabilities across industries as literature mainly focuses on one industry at any one time eg electronics automobiles and home appliances this study to test theories preliminarily developed in a western management environment frohlich and dixon propose that different strategies may be found to be prevalent in different regions tsui et al ask the question which elements of western management have chinese firms absorbed and which have been rejected answers to questions will require a one region to another helps accumulate knowledge of strategy theory development this study therefore tests the arguments from western literature in a chinese context ie the
tenuis of the new plain style of late early imperial given the importance of servius for the medieval interpretation of virgil it seems possible that fortunatus agnes and radegund would have known his also virgil describes his poems as taking part in love and the season this too may have fired fortunatus imagination as in the last example the gift here does not assert the dominance of male can be viewed in the light of the christian love for one s fellow human being which is simultaneously love for god the gift brings fortunatus and radegund and agnes into the interchange of human and divine love the basket is woven from willow shoots the basket also seems to refer to the poem which may help explain why the poet is at pains to tell his friends which the tree gave to the fields the poet and his gift are part of the pattern that includes tree and fields and friends like the earth the poet s gift is perennially renewed and supplemented as the times of sowing and reaping loss and rebirth allow his friends to remember the moment of and the occasion of remembering love is the moment of being open to its reappearance the basket is refilled and filled to overflowing by elvis costello from the album blood and in order to reflect what you actually hear on the recording for the purpose of discussion below my transcription makes a number of alterations to what might be considered a conventional lyrics layout though not affecting the i want you lines i make some local changes of spelling mainly by dropping the final my transcription indicates where the song is divided indicated the stress pattern of the phrase i want you as it is sung each time with the exception of lines and each of which is a special case i have not supplied any punctuation i want you my baby baby i love you more than i can tell i do nt think i can live without you nt get well no more i want you your fingernails go draggin down the wall be careful darlin you might fall i want yo i woke up and one of us was cryin i want you you said young man i do believe you re dyin i want you if you need a second opinion as you seem to do these days i want you you can look in my eyes and you can count the ways nt you it s the stupid details that my heart is breaking for it s the way your shoulders shake and what they re shaking for i want you it s knowing that he knows you now after only guessin it s the thought of him undressin you or you undressin i want yo see things clear and stark i want you go on and hurt me then we ll let it drop i want you i m afraid i wo nt know where to stop i want you i m not ashamed to say i cried for you i want you i want to know the things you did that we do too i want you that clown i want you i want you i want yo you ve had your fun you do nt get well no more i want you no one who wants you could want you more i want you i want you i want yo every night when i go off to bed and when i wake up i want you i m goin to say it once again til i instil it intimate final bars were achieved by switching off each of the instrumental tracks until all that can be heard is the sound of the band s performance bleeding into my vocal he uses the word intimate again when he says that the song s intimate if not almost pornographic tone was typical of my mood at this time the album was a pissed off year old the band had now soured almost beyond repair this was one reason for the single take the producer nick lowe was keen to get the music recorded before the band and i fell out completely no wonder their tones are bleeding into his mike personal and professional relationship breakdown are both implied in the song the recurring i want you perversely reminding those in the know that husband and wife singer perversity is woven into the very fabric of the phrase i do nt know when i first heard the song but i first properly listened to it a couple of years ago i m not actually a big elvis costello fan and did nt buy blood and chocolate when it came out i knew nothing of the song s history i was on a long car trip on my own and an elvis costello greatest hits tape was the only one in the glove box and i want you was the last song on the tape as soon as i heard it i rewound it and it again and then again and then again i knew there was something extraordinary about it and that it was connected to the title phrase which pounded in my brain for days afterwards this essay is my attempt to negotiate with my obsession so to speak to find out what it was about this phrase i want you which had got hold of me i already knew two songs with the title i want you by bob dylan and websites and letssingit among others and entered a world in which air supply cheap trick concrete blonde elastica fat joe great white hanoi rocks moloko massive attack no curfew pulp and savage garden vied for my custom i also did some digging into the linguistic and literary history of i want you more of that later on including plato who turns out to be responsible for the whole thing but i want to have my say first about elvis costello s song which has some striking and i think symptomatic features the first eight lines of the song are musically distinct from the rest and sung with a kind of breathy sincerity i take this opening to be an ironic 
internally managed in the past although the schedules were busy operations were generally executed smoothly with very few major hiccups however the current situation can be described as fire fighting some of the problems become apparent firstly the communications between the mainland manufacturing plants the hong kong the hong kong headquarter and customers suppliers became a major source of a variety of problems although managers and engineers from the headquarter visited the manufacturing plants regularly the effectiveness and efficiency were not impressive because of long journey telephone calls faxes and email messages have been used to compensate the face to face communications the problem of effectiveness and efficiency of these communication methods was even more serious very often data sent through faxes faxes and sometimes email messages have to be processed again before sensible analyses can be conducted secondly the new product designs developed at the hong kong headquarter tend to have more errors related to downstream business processes for example manufacturing difficulties and quality defects exist in many new designs and were not identified promptly this was because the manufacturing expertise and test labs by the hong kong development team thirdly it was evident that the purchasing and sales departments spend significantly more time and efforts in clarifying purchase and sales orders with the suppliers and customers respectively this problem has significantly affected the new product development team because they have to modify their new designs too often to cope with order changes requests for making changes to the product designs and manufacturing plans this has not only affected the lead time but also the total costs finally the product range has increased significantly from a limited few in to several hundreds at present every product is a different product but all the products look similar the increased product variety has further stretched the increasingly more expensive resources of commerce around the turn of the century the company was naturally advised to look into the potentials of the latest web and internet solutions the top management was very open minded supportive but skeptical cautious as long as it ebs truly deliver their promises in improving the competitive and efficiency significantly they were prepared to invest in such solutions the company was seriously considering getting a suite of sophisticated ebs from a major vendor were invited to give an overview of its ebs during the talk the aggressive promotion by the consultants actually scared the engineers involved in the project firstly the consultants talked about the evolving history of their ebs over one and half decade this period may be long enough to the it vendor but short to an it user their systems evolved from early standalone system through networked client server to fat client web based systems will launch a fully web based thin client system shortly secondly the consultants pledged that their ebs would contribute to the reengineering and rationalization of the business processes and operations if they were fully implemented this was in fact imposed by their solutions whether willing or unwilling changes must be made to suit the methodologies embedded in the solutions thirdly the consultants offered intensive training for the company staff members the basic training was included in the initial acquisition price of the suite however extra charges would be made to advanced training for features such as customization after the installation and implementation fourthly the consultants mentioned their joint venture with a service provider for an opportunity for the company to subscribe to their ebs with the application service provider without purchasing the solutions to reduce the acquisition and maintenance announce that they provide a suite of solutions encompass the entire business operations and these solutions can be introduced in different phases according to individual needs after the consultants promotion talk the company decided not to continue along this direction for the following reasons the solutions themselves have been evolving too fast to follow as an it user the fundamental question is can we keep up with the changes made by this vendor would be attractive but any fundamental major changes to the user interfaces and underlying methodologies might cause significant problems the business and operation models incorporated in the solutions were not readily compatible with the existing ones of the company and significant changes must be made in order to implement the solutions this may potentially lead to more fundamental traps operational chaos and significant resistance the solutions to suit the company s unique features might take too long and too much specialist skills may be required to customize and maintain the customized systems chaos might occur in case of personnel turnovers training and maintenance costs might be unpredictable and thus unmanageable after a few years with uncertain commitment and benefits in addition this approach introduces a third party whose commitment is yet a major concern for the above reasons the company decided to abandon the previous approach instead they decided to conduct an exercise of business process reengineering for the sake of improving the business operational performance instead of jumping into ebs directly following this industrial engineering before information technology approach key business processes were identified and then analysed one after then analysed one after another problems with the each business process were examined and then determined what it solutions were appropriate suitable it solutions would then be acquired and implemented the company however experienced the following dilemma very few it solutions that suit the company s requirements were readily available in the commercial market most such vendors were small it firms from completely different third parties their interfaces were completely different they had different user management after all they were separate systems if the company really wanted a solution that best suits its requirements the best approach was to develop it on its own several questions arise immediately do we have the necessary it expertise and skills can we afford the time and efforts is this a commercially viable approach created to illustrate concerns that typically represent those of
distress more important the mental health impact of racism is not considered or captured by traditional counseling psychology or psychiatric theory or assessment models existing and and counseling psychologists with no guidance in recognizing the often subtle and indirect incidents of racism and discrimination and provide little guidance in assessing the specific effects of race based encounters that produce psychological distress and perhaps traumatic injury therefore there is a need to help counseling psychologists and mental health professionals assess and recognize the effects of specific acts of race based to illustrate how racism may result in trauma butts presented the following example of a trauma reaction that resulted from discrimination a light skinned hispanic male was treated courteously when he made application for an apartment in new york city however when he returned with his african american wife the renting agent became aloof and informed them that the apartment was rented in response to the denial of the apartment became depressed insomniac and hypervigilant she had repeated nightmares at the time of the alleged discrimination she noticed that her hair had begun to fall out that her skin was dry and she was constipated there were no hallucinations delusions or ideas of reference and there was a mild paranoid trend all of her symptoms were causally related to the discrimination stress reaction to racism that was caused by an injury to her emotional and psychological state clearly the event triggered a crisis it is not known what personal factors were at play in her life prior to the event and it is not possible to know how these contributed to her vulnerability regardless she suffered from an act of racism and it seems more reasonable to assess her reaction as the result of the situational event that produced emotional her reactions as a mental disorder reliance on the dispositional approach seems to hold the target responsible for situational factors outside her or his control it may be more accurate to employ the notion of injury which does a better job of capturing the external violations and assaults inherent in racism or in race based encounters and experiences moreover the person who is injured has had his or her rights violated and therefore has the legal right to pursue damages for these violations thus injury characterizes the reactions that are linked to specific aspects of racism as nonpathological external and situational factors that affect one s mental health rather than as a mental disorder yet as noted previously to be effective in determining how race based encounters and psychological injury it is necessary to specify the particular aspects of racism that bring about reactions of stress or perhaps trauma racism has been defined in many ways however for the most part as will be discussed in more depth later the definitions do not offer a way to connect specific acts and experiences of racism to particular emotional and psychological reactions and carter forsyth mazzula et al they contend that identifying specific types of experiences with racism such as avoidance or racial discrimination hostility or racial harassment aversive hostility or discriminatory harassment directly with particular types of emotional and psychological reactions their definitions of these common terms depart somewhat from the everyday professional and legal uses of similar terminology the goals for introducing new ways to recognize and assess race based forms of racism guide counseling psychiatric and psychological analysis and assessment investigate and gain a more accurate understanding of the perceptions experiences of targets of racism who lodge claims or complaints as well as those who work on their behalf and provide a framework for future research in this area that would support the previously stated objectives several sections follow in each section i will review and discuss a particular area of research and scholarship the first section begins with definitions and a discussion of some key terms and concepts the second section presents a selective review of the stress literature and its relation to mental health the brief review of the stress research is followed by a discussion and selective review of the research on trauma and ptsd the next section presents a of literature on discrimination race related stress and racial identity the last section offers a review of mental health standards and trauma scholarship i present definitions of types of racism that can be connected to mental health the effects and discuss how to recognize and assess race based traumatic stress injury by offering a review of mental health standards and trauma scholarship be defined here and discussed in the following subsection race is defined as a social construction in which people in the united states are identified by their skin color language and physical features and are grouped and ranked into distinct racial groups the groups include whites and people of color including refugees and immigrants as well as biracial people who have at least one parent who has been people of color refers to historically disenfranchised americans black african hispanic latino asian pacific islanders native indigenous indians and biracial people racial group rankings are used in multiracial societies to distribute social rewards economic resources and access and opportunity american racial groups were socially and legally separated for centuries and therefore were able to retain and sustain distinct cultural patterns and preferences therefore race is associated with a group s culture culture is defined as a system of meaning with values norms behaviors language and history that is passed on from one generation to the next through socialization and participation in the group s organizations and institutions racial group membership refers to one s social demographic and presumed cultural group when a person indicates that his her this is thought to be a reflection of one s race identity which is sometimes called racial identity as it is typically used race has social implications and people infer psychological meaning from sociodemographic group membership when used in this way race has no psychological meaning rather the psychological meaning
and the gulf of aqaba the values are around cm the pga ranged between and cm the recent lack of seismicity in the northwestern part of syria does not reflect the capability and potentiality of this area to produce large destructive earthquakes as can be seen in the results of models i ii and iii figures and respectively the seismic hazard maps resulting from this study can provide an improved basis for the building codes for earthquake resistant designs of common or conventional engineering probabilistic steel stress crack width relationship in frames with smooth rebars abstract structural assessment of existing reinforced concrete constructions results from a combination of experimental constructions results from a combination of experimental ie determination of material properties and rebar detailing and numerical evaluations ie static and or dynamic nonlinear analyses under design loads according to recent european seismic codes the nature and extension of among other non destructive testing seems to be a promising tool especially if related to a comprehensive simulation of the global and local structural behavior evaluation of steel stress in critical regions of the constructions can obviously be of interest for current applications and structural monitoring but generally needs complex and expensive work steel stresses however common procedures may be ineffective when existing constructions with smooth bars are concerned due to the presence of specific end details used in such buildings to balance poor bond performance in fact the local response of the structure is strongly dependent upon the strength and deformability of end details in this paper a method to assess the steel stress in the critical to the steel stress and is based on numerical simulation of the smooth bars anchored with hook details results of an extensive experimental program are used for the model calibration moreover in order to consider relevant uncertainties that affect the problem a probabilistic approach is proposed so that investigation of the different involved parameters on the problem solution can be discussed factors most of which can be related to bond quality and to the effective area where concrete steel bond interaction may develop in order to model this phenomenon it is necessary to account for suitable constitutive laws of materials and for problem geometry the analysis of a concrete sub element the mechanical approach to investigate the crack opening this assumption is reliable because experimental evidence shows that cracks tend to form at the stirrup s location where the effective concrete cover is lower moreover for monitoring purposes that is the present case it may be assumed that cracks already exist and that their evolution needs to be assessed reported together with some issues related to the boundary conditions the sub elements can be analysed according to an effective numerical procedure able to solve in an explicit way the tension stiffening effect in members and assess the role of reinforcement ductility on rotation capacity it is assumed that reinforcing rebars can slip with respect to concrete strain is negligible compared to the corresponding steel one this assumption introduces a certain approximation at very low strain levels but is reliable as the steel strain approaches yielding however an optimization of the computational effort can be obtained since the solution can be achieved referring only to the translational equilibrium of the rebar by global equilibrium equations in the cracked sections in eqs and s and s are the reinforcement stress and strain is the tangential bond stress at the steel concrete interface s the slip between bars and the surrounding concrete and the bar diameter it is easy to recognize that eqs and relate the stress in the steel rebar with the bar slip that gives rise to the crack opening applied to the differential equation system and for a cracked section can be expressed either in terms of bar slip s and s in terms of strain s and s or by mixed boundary conditions the numerical approach is quite general and allows to introduce general constitutive laws and even relationships derived from experimental tests either for steel reinforcement finite difference method is adopted and the sub element is divided in subintervals of small length the shooting technique is then used so that a boundary value problem is converted in the iterative solution of an initial value one in particular given boundary conditions in terms of and s the solution is found giving a tentative slip value section the finite difference form of eqs and is as follows it is possible to evaluate at the generic iteration the unknown values at the node depending on their value at node in fact given tentative value s bond stress finally gives the slip s the process is then iterated at each node until the last abscissa is reached the scatter between calculated value s and s is the control parameter of the convergence process from an analytical standpoint the problem corresponds to identifying the zero of the following function procedure a tentative slip value s has to be chosen accounting that its upper bound is given by the product of steel strain in the crack and the sub element length once the convergence is achieved the distribution of steel strain the bond stress and steel concrete slippage along the sub element is completely known the model of the hooked anchored rebar with the end anchoring devices if proper boundary conditions are selected in particular the behavior of smooth bars anchored with angle hooks may be analysed considering two different sources of deformation the straight region of the rebar whose response is governed by a bond with surrounding concrete and the end anchoring device improve the overall performances of the anchored bar and lead to slippage of the hook end that are generally not negligible from a theoretical point of view the end anchorage results in a restraint for the inner end of the straight rebar therefore two boundary conditions can be identified if anchorage is not present the straight rebar
style beauty pageants in tanzania and from this comparison i was able to see what orders of indexicality they had created to interpret the cartoon as well through the tactic of distinction both jimama and the cartoon mock discourses from the west that promote slim figures as beautiful simultaneously displaying a rejection of the modern and a preference for the traditional again through the tactic of distinction the cartoon clearly demonstrates a preference for traditional ideologies of female beauty a dichotomy is established through hairstyles clothing skin color and footwear the different ideologies also apparent in the physical positioning of the women the full figured woman s backside is the focus of attention while the slender woman is presented frontally the men in the audience are clearly drawn to the woman who embodies the traditions and her full figure is one of the factors that make her more desirable this image together with the other texts that rely on the phrase ku maintain figure reveals that western values and ideologies are tanzanians all of these data show how the tactics of distinction and denaturalization can be powerful means for enacting the tactic of authorization thus establishing legitimacy through contesting the natural order of westernization by distinguishing western and african cultural forms and through denaturalizing western practices these texts display a use of power to legitimate certain social identities as culturally intelligible the analysis of conversation provides insights into the entextualization processes speakers use to attain intersubjectivity with their co conversationalists the example of mbwilo s joke reveals how speakers continually attend to one another s utterances and in order to achieve shared meaning one tactic they can use is to shift their own subjectivities so that they overlap with those of their co participants in the above data we see that mbwilo skillfully shifts tactics to the discourses available to the younger generation thereby creating the opportunity for mutual understanding of course not all participants are equally willing to shift their own subjectivities to accommodate others while mbwilo s conversational moves transformed the talk to an interaction that might include noreen s indexical orders noreen s tactics remained largely fixed finally this article has implications for research on english in a postcolonial historically linked to discourses of the other the journalists orientations to the concept of watching one s weight reveal the ongoing tensions between tradition and globalizing modernity as the phrase ku maintain figure is linked to new conceptions of appealing body size for women however this linkage does not necessarily indicate that english is a language that marks an allegiance of any the dominant culture of the west instead the data demonstrate that the participants are able to hybridize the language of the other to resist these forces in a manner that is reflexive of the difference that english and its western discourses have brought in appropriating english in this way the journalists entextualize what ku maintain figure means through tactics that resist and even mock western aesthetics as common sense through their intersubjective the many layers of meaning the journalists actively relocate the very categories that have historically yielded otherness for them appropriating english along the way ge selective integration of linguistic knowledge in adult second language learning errors in a self paced reading task their sensitivity was determined by observing whether there was a delay in reading ungrammatical sentences native and nonnative speakers of english read grammatical and ungrammatical sentences that contained errors involving plural s and verb subcategorization their reading times were measured and compared the results showed that native speakers were sensitive to errors involving both structures but nonnative speakers were only sensitive to errors errors involving verb subcategorization the results confirmed that the development of second language automatic competence or integrated knowledge is selective alternative explanations of this selectivity are discussed integrated knowledge and automatic competence in sla from a cognitive perspective the essence of learning lies in the changes in mental representation that occur in the learner s mind these changes which is often measured as an index or evidence of learning thus understanding mental representation and its changes involved in the learning process lies at the very center of all major issues related to learning including second language acquisition in the context of sla the changes in mental representation often mean the formation of new linguistic knowledge or the reorganization or consolidation is that not all linguistic knowledge represented in a second language learner s mind is equal in terms of how readily it can be retrieved and applied in spontaneous communication as has been pointed out by many researchers some of learners knowledge might be retrieved without deliberate effort or conscious awareness on the learner s part but the application of other knowledge might require many attentional one might consider the former type of linguistic knowledge to be integrated knowledge in the sense that it has become an integral part of the learner s mental representation that is automatic in its activation and functioning integrated knowledge is a term referring to mental representation its processing counterpart is automatic competence which refers to the ability to apply one s linguistic knowledge spontaneously in both the productive and receptive underlies and brings about automatic competence in other words they go hand in hand thus when one discusses the development of integrated knowledge one is also discussing the development of automatic competence and vice versa similarly knowledge integration and the development of automatic competence refer to the same process from two different perspectives automaticity automaticity has been defined in various ways in cognitive psychology for the purpose of the present study it is defined as the ability to perform without conscious awareness or while utilizing minimum attentional resources the best illustration of automatic competence is our ability to use our first error free sentences without paying attention to grammatical accuracy in our native languages thus integrated knowledge refers to the information that a learner can retrieve and put to use without paying attention to
one another for robert hughes el pelele represents the culmination of this clash a petimeter jounced up and down at the whim of the four amused ladies goya s acid comment on the power of women over men and on what seemed to him the waning of traditional spanish masculinity a theme repeated throughout the caprichos and the disparates goya was on the side of the homegrown majo whom he considered an endangered species as against the imported fopperies of the petimeter and never more explicitly so than here because hughes touches on the national aspects present in the cartoon there seem to be two collective characters at work the majas the more spanish of the two and the effeminate frenchified petimeter as suggested by hughes the majas and majos must triumph in this cultural battle and their victory is foreshadowed in el pelele almost a quarter of a century later goya returns to the carnival game in an femenino suggests that the women are in control and that here is another example of a carnivalesque inversion of gender roles however in neither work does the popular pre lenten celebration have the liberating communal character described by bakhtin instead carnival suggests indifference and cruelty as much as freedom and camaraderie although el pelele and the etching are similar in their subject matter there are dressed like majas with the traditional basquina and in contrast the characters of disparate femenino wear a more generic european style their dresses show an elevated waistline in the empire fashion which was imported from france and in vogue when goya created the etching in addition all the women wear the same hairstyle one with strong greek and roman influences that was popular in the early nineteenth century furthermore the footwear of the characters in the two works are quite different showing the passage of some twenty five years the majas in el pelele wear shoes with metal buckles and a slightly elevated heel the shoes that can be seen in the engraving represent a new style that began in one with no buckle or elevation aileen ribeiro explains that it took a while for flat heeled shoes in fashion in the rest of europe from the mid in spanish women still wore high heels and ridiculed frenchwomen who wore the new style although the change to flat shoes progressed slowly in spain it did occur goya always an acute observer of his surroundings began using the new style in los desastres de la guerra and continued in los disparates in the contemporary style they sported in disparate femenino the women could represent a more international female of the period in contrast to the spanish and folkloric attire of the majas in the tapestry cartoon goya s removal of national symbolism and the creation of a more european woman of the early nineteenth century may have freed him to criticize women without impugning the national character and honor in el pelele the foppish male s lack of masculinity is to blame for the situation in which he finds himself in the engraving however the women are guilty goya s critique of women s cruelty toward men cynical and reveals an evolving representation of the subject at hand but exactly what does goya criticize in the ladies of disparate femenino what is their peculiar disparate or instead of the cheerful sunlit majas who grace the scene of el pelele we have flirtatious and coy ladies in the darker atmosphere of the engraving the innocence of the cartoon has disappeared and in its place goya has inscribed more somber qualities of heartlessness and perhaps deceit six women who dominate the visual plane in the preparatory drawing goya includes an audience who views the scene before them which involves only four women however before committing it to the copper plate he removes the spectators and adds two more female participants his alterations bring the women into the spotlight it is toward them that we direct our critical gaze just as goya did the females look away from the mannequins and glance at each other making them appear to be oblivious to the suffering of their victims moreover their expressive faces and mannerisms provide keys to their underlying personalities the ladies have an expression of slyness which can be seen especially in the woman on the far left because of the detailed execution of her clothing and jewelry she immediately draws the viewer s eye the woman to her appears to be looking at us and her coquettish hairdo is unique in the group her dress is suggestive since the bust line is slightly lower than her friends and her slightly inclined posture also reveals more of her breasts the beauty of these two women proves to be deadly upon close observation their lips appear to be curled in a deceitful smile disclosing their true nature and intentions they have seduced their male victims the other four women are harder to analyze one has her back to us another is in profile one is almost entirely hidden and one looks down however they too could be said to contribute to goya s critique of women unlike the majas in el pelele who stand firmly rooted to the ground in static positions these women are dynamic with hands and feet in motion in fact the two ladies in the front center profile leaning back appear to be talking to each other it is through a collaborative effort then that the women of disparate femenino appear so dangerous in contrast to these threatening females the puppets are almost indefinable although they seem to represent tiny men like their feminine counterparts they dress according to the fashion of the time their pants buttons and jackets are characteristic of male attire in the early nineteenth century in this article i have tried to show the trajectory in goya s work between when he painted el pelele and when he etched disparate femenino the engraving
much at the center of roman life feasts centered around the gods some of whom were identified with hospitality celebration consumption and hunting these feasts provided much of the cultural impetus to reinforce the importance of indulgence values owing to the social interactions and hierarchies of the time food and eating as part of the roman hospitality function was certainly an essential part of their daily life and was rich in semiology artistic parallels and symbolism the romans are both ideal and interesting subjects to facilitate an analysis of patterns of belief that food and eating is an art form that punctuates everyday life and can therefore provide a rich tapestry of information on life in classical times unlike other social data anyone who would know something worth while about the private and public lives of the ancients should be well acquainted with their table man is what he eats was apicius is unclear hornblower and spawforth note that apicius was the proverbial cognomen for several connoisseurs of food according to groag et al the most famous was marcus gavius apicius who lived in the early empire much to the disgust of the moralist seneca this lived in the late or early century and redacted the surviving roman cookbook bearing his name pliny the elder and tacitus both note that the famous gavius apicius moved in the circles of emperor tiberius pliny considered that apicius was born to enjoy every was taken to eccentric extremes according to athenaeus having heard of the boasted size and sweetness of the shrimps taken near the libyan coast apicius commandeered a boat and crew but when he arrived disappointed by the ones he was offered by the local fishermen who came alongside in their boats turned round that they were written to enhance the mysticism of the roman cook and did not provide recipes that were easy to follow vehling has suggested that this is an attempt at self preservation and that the secret codes required to decipher the text were a way to protect the cook s earning power and place in society went about their business lunch and dinner which was considered most important and almost a reward for the day s toil dupont notes that commodities and quantities eaten varied according to ritual and these were based on social standing income age and gender slaves for this large group of romans their living accommodation typically did not have the basic utilities required to permit safe domestic preparation and consumption the impacts of these hierarchically driven service needs and requirements of early commercial hospitality provision fueled development growth and entrepreneurial provided much to the consumption gossip and trend setting of the day the infamous petronius was the arbiter elegantiae at the court of the emperor nero tacitus describes petronius as hedonistic and witty petronius also wrote the cena trimalchionis trimalchio s dinner or the swapping of one food stuff for another with the direct intent to pass this off as fish to delighted guests typical commodities mentioned in the apicius cookbook include ostrich goat the food however was probably inedible or certainly indigestible due to the emphasis placed on creation and art form peas with pieces of gold lentils with onyx beans with amber and rice with pearls lavish food events were the preoccupation of the upper classes in their own types of feasting commercialization of hospitality in the roman empire the roman empire itself was a vast center of consumption it imported much of its food from its many colonies under exclusive agreements and expected unusual food gifts for the aristocracy in addition there conquered lands contemporary western cuisine still has evidence of the culinary practices and commodities of classical rome included in the staple meat and vegetation which was originally introduced to sustain the invading armies early forms of commercialization did much to aid the growth of the roman hospitality in celebration of their successes in the expansion and growth of the empire the result was a historical celebration of indulgence with activities sanctioned it seems by the many gods dedicated to the cause roman baths were a daily retreat for most of the population in the intense heat of midday as an early form of leisure based on health motivations these not of company at the most important meal event of the day dinner the importance of hospitality was not to be taken lightly and restaurants bars and brothels were also common leisure respites the act of cooking itself was said to be a popular pastime due to the lack of literature however the woman of the house was not expected to cook roman events ranged from the orgy to the arena where everyone had a right to attend leisure activities took up most of the roman s time they took holy days so many in fact that they spent more days at leisure than we do with our summer breaks and weekends world and hospitality existed in a highly organized fashion it also provides conclusive case evidence in a concentrated and preserved way which is ideal for the examination of elements of hospitality in order to enable the construction of a collective paradigm the treasure has been uncovered to show how pompeians catered for themselves provided many highly preserved puzzle pieces to illustrate the importance of the hospitality function to the wealthy and cosmopolitan citizens indeed vehling has reported that they were enjoying a sporting event in their local amphitheater when vesuvius erupted kleberg defined four principal categories archaeological categorization of classical hospitality businesses hospitia were establishments that offered rooms for rent and often food and drink to overnight guests packer asserts that hospitia were expressly fabricated for business purposes although a number of them represent secondary uses gates were smaller than those in the countryside due to pressure of space casson observed that in rome stabulae were probably the most common type of overnight accommodation they were hospitia with facilities to shelter animals often found just outside
the preposition of does not have a more basic meaning contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning metaphorically used no the that the referent of the noun phrase of which it is part is uniquely identifiable in the situation evoked by the text in this case this is the ghandi family as a major player in recent indian politics basic meaning the definite article the does not have a more basic meaning contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning property of being related to politics and particularly power influence and government in india basic meaning the adjective does not have a different more basic meaning contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning metaphorically used no dynasty in indian politics and ruled the country for considerable periods of time basic meaning it can be argued that dynasty has the more basic meaning of a royal family in a monarchic system where power is inherited from one generation to the next contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning contrasts with the basic meaning and can be understood by comparison with it we in a democracy in terms of the way in which successive members of a royal family inherit the throne within a monarchic system metaphorically used yes into contextual meaning in this context the preposition into introduces a family group that sonia ghandi has become a member of via marriage basic meaning the preposition into has the more basic meaning of introducing a container or bounded area that is entered via physical movement as in drove away contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning contrasts with the basic meaning and can be understood by comparison with it we can understand social kinship groups as containers and the process of becoming a member of a group as entering a container or a space metaphorically used yes which of the noun phrase within which the relative clause is embedded dynasty basic meaning as a relative pronoun which does not have a different more basic meaning if we consider the lexeme which as a whole the pronoun determiner also has an interrogative meaning which may be regarded as more basic contextual meaning versus basic meaning if we consider which as a relative pronoun the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning if we consider a whole the pronoun determiner has a more basic interrogative meaning however we have not found a way in which the contextual meaning can be understood by comparison with the basic meaning metaphorically used no she contextual meaning in this context she indicates a female referent who is is the same as the basic meaning metaphorically used no married contextual meaning in this context married refers to the process whereby sonia maino became rajiv ghandi s spouse and thereby a member of their family basic meaning the verb marry does not have a different more basic meaning contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning let alone introduces a hypothetical scenario in which sonia ghandi becomes prime minister of india that is presented as even less likely to happen than the previously mentioned hypothetical scenario in which sonia ghandi is fit to take on the political inheritance of other members of the ghandi family basic meaning as a single lexical unit let alone does not have a different as the basic meaning metaphorically used no to contextual meaning in this context to has the purely grammatical function of signaling the infinitive form of the verb hence it has a very abstract and schematic meaning basic meaning as an infinitive marker to does not have a more basic meaning as a preposition to has the more basic meaning of introducing the end point or contextual meaning versus basic meaning if we consider to as an infinitive marker the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning if we consider the lexeme to as a whole the contextual meaning contrasts with the basic spatial meaning of the preposition to however we have not found a way in which the contextual meaning can be understood by comparison with the basic meaning metaphorically used no of change whereby sonia ghandi acquires a particular political role basic meaning it can be argued that become has a more basic meaning to do with starting to have different properties as in people are becoming increasingly angry about the delay but we do not regard this meaning as substantially different from the contextual meaning contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning is the in this context premier refers to the position of prime minister of india that is leader of the government basic meaning the noun premier does not have a different more basic meaning contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning units of a single sentence of written text is intended to illustrate how the procedure works and some of the decisions researchers must make in judging whether any word is used metaphorically in discourse of course we realize that some people might make different decisions than we did the nine of us also disagreed over certain cases and sometimes had different reasons for supporting the same judgments as to whether a specific word should be judged as metaphorical one of the most of mip is that its explicit set of steps allows scholars to pinpoint the locus of their disagreements as to why or why not a word is presumed to convey metaphorical meaning in context but the mip would not serve much purpose if it produced highly variable judgments across individual metaphor analysts in the next section we provide a template for reporting the results of any analysis based on the mip and then present a case study based on the complete analysis of from our collaborative work on metaphor identification
level even if they did provide historic examples of still standing straw bale buildings myhrman and knox who made several such trips in the report that most participants who assisted in raising original straw bale buildings are now deceased and those few that remain were too without harming the structure hence the experimentation of contemporary straw bale innovators was crucial in developing a viable contemporary technology reports of some of those who lived in the historic straw bale structures however raised an issue that has become part of the value structure of the straw bale movement lower energy use due to conservation provided by the super insulation of the green or conservation values and rhetoric of straw bale advocates the intentional recycling of waste or readily available natural material and reduced energy use so too from the historical accounts come the first sketches and photos of straw bale buildings like sketches capturing an idea for further development the historic representations themselves were also to play a role the arizona and new mexico straw bale code negotiations respectively from the perspective of actor network theory which grants agency to non humans their use draws on clarke s mapping technique to show how visual discourse was enmeshed in the fractured and multicentered discourses of the negotiation process in arizona and new mexico not even close there s a big big difference in drawing it and making it make clear why the early experimental straw bale post and beam cottage built by northern california architect jon hammond featured in fine homebuilding was so influential the fine homebuilding article inspired a number of future leaders of the contemporary straw bale movement many of were shared and refined collectively this was a crucial juncture in the development and exchange of tacit knowledge along with the development of a fairly consistent practice it was also the initiation of a network for dissemination and advocacy of the technique reintroduced as an expression of green ethics putting conservation values into building also held the group together the mutual co construction of a technology and network that actor network theory describes the saw a proliferation of straw bale buildings of all shapes and sizes throughout north american european and asian countries built by professionals and non professionals along with the move to standardize the technique and make it more widely available in tucson arizona through the collaboration of straw bale advocates and a friendly building code culture the code development process was started at almost the same time in new mexico in a building code culture in disarray because of fiscal neglect and state politics comparison of the two processes reveals the importance of local situational context it the testing process was locally contingent and influenced by the values practices and composition of local straw bale associations their professional status economic resources relationships with the local office of building officials and the interpretation of safety ethics in those offices to as off the grid outside city or town limits often in unincorporated areas where building codes do not apply and city amenities such as power sewerage and water lines are not available for early innovation and experimentation this was advantageous as innovators did not have to contend with codes designed for timber based construction permission but for a code of their own for at least three significant reasons cognizant of what had happened to the early us solar energy movement discredited by unskilled and sometimes unscrupulous entrepreneurs promoting inferior and sometimes non functional technology and incorrect or misleading information straw bale activists wanted to ensure that reputation beyond building permits bank loans and insurance availability are usually tied to building code requirements a standardized building code would lend credibility to the technique in all building sectors ethics mediation and boundary workers in myhrman and knox decided to employ the values that have permeated their activism and leadership in the straw bale movement in terms of ecological responsibility for the next generation knox we need to dramatically change the way we meet our basic needs as human beings because we are consuming the planet there will not be enough of the planet left for our beautiful in itself and a very interesting technology but its real power and excitement is it relates so well to many of the planetary problems these are examples of the ecological sustainability discourse spoken by strawbale advocates david eisenberg a tucson engineer turned straw bale advocate and mediator laid the foundation for negotiation between this sort of image of building officials as being these petty bureaucrats and tyrants etc and basically forcing people to do all sorts of things they do nt want to do and in many cases that is what s going on they also are as we have begun to call them a caring community a group of people who takes extremely seriously exploring something new for ecological and economic reasons captured the values of both the building office and the straw bale actors from the beginning building officials after initial rather jovial amazement engaged in a willingness to consider straw bale technology seriously and to advise on home made testing straw bale advocates told that they needed test results managed with a very leroy sayre then tucson chief building official recounts his first encounter with myhrman and the first time he heard of seriously building with straw bales i spent my summers as a youngster in ohio at my grandfather s farm and we used to stack up bales of hay and it was nice and cool inside the structure in the summer so the more i thought about with any kind of material i think a building official should be willing to at least consider the possibility of whatever the alternative material is aside from his cultural sympathy for straw bales based on his boyhood farm days when sayre says if things were done so the structural forces referred to in the codes were accounted for he is referring to
the stock market in the words of pindyck when investment is irreversible and future demand or cost conditions are uncertain an investment expenditure involves the exercising or killing of an option the option to productively invest at any time in the future one gives up the possibility of waiting for new information that might affect the desirability or this lost option value must be included as part of the cost of the investment dixit and pindyck show that in the case of industry wide uncertainty the option value to waiting for individual firms disappears but that increased uncertainty still depresses investment by raising the threshold price that justifies investment above the marshallian long run average cost all these results hold even if firms are risk neutral therefore spillovers from rice price instability into the rest of the economy can affect investment in many other sectors when there are sunk costs to investing finally the signals provided by market prices in all sectors of the economy will be weakened by spillovers caused by transitory price instability under conditions of imperfect information this was first shown by lucas in his analysis of the signal extraction problems created by highly variable inflation price changes in non rice sectors of the economy can be either permanent or temporary if all price changes for non rice commodities were a result of shifts in the fundamental technology and preferences underlying the economy these price changes would represent useful information where rice is a large share of the economy however price changes for non rice commodities a result of temporary weather shocks economic agents are aware of these influences but because changes in rice expenditures will affect demand in other sectors with long and variable lags that are difficult to model or predict a signal extraction problem arises there will be confusion about whether observed price signals represent shifts in technology and preferences that should influence long term decisions or whether they are simply the result of transitory forces whose influence influence will disappear shortly the consequence of this reduced information flow is that investment funds will not be directed to the sectors of the economy where future returns at the margin are greatest the quality of investment as measured by the real rate of return will decline with a negative effect on economic growth this is consistent with the results in dawe who finds that instability in export earnings has a large negative effect on the efficiency of investment the macroeconomic benefits described in this section can be quantitatively significant timmer determines that rice price stabilization added percentage point of growth in gdp per year to the indonesian economy in the when rice was still a large share of the economy and the world rice market was particularly unstable timmer estimates are consistent with the work of rodrik who stresses the importance of macroeconomic stability for the major argument in dawe is that food price stability is a key ingredient of macro stability in asia therefore food price stabilization as a policy measure can bring about and sustain stable conditions for private investment and growth although they invoke wage and price rigidities that are not discussed here newbery and stiglitz also conclude from their analysis that here are some significant macroeconomic stabilization iv managing the transition to market mediated food security efficient paths to providing food security that are politically feasible have been hard to find any such path will involve greater diversification of agricultural production and consumption including a greater role for international trade continued commercialization and market orientation and a balance between the roles of the public and private sectors at the core will be the welfare of farm households as they struggle with these issues mechanisms to enhance asset accumulation including land consolidation and larger farm enterprises will be needed for at least some of these households to remain competitive as agricultural producers others will exit agriculture more effective rural credit systems will help this process but institutional changes in land tenure are also likely to be needed even if these are mostly in the form of long term rental arrangements government the new emphasis in development economics on governance as a key factor affecting the rate and distribution of economic growth brings the opportunity to link powerful political forces such as the deep desire on the part of both urban and rural populations for food security to the growth process itself the obvious link is through policy analysis where the analysis systematically utilizes neoclassical political economy to use srinivasan nomenclature role of markets and the state and their mutual interaction will be key within a framework where economic decision makers are free to make choices based on their own knowledge and conditions the role of government remains critical in particular government investments that allow markets to function efficiently are essential to fostering a dynamic rural economy especially in agriculture unfortunately the provision of price stabilization has conflicted with this goal in many countries as a result of excessive government intervention in the marketing chain in asia india has also intervened strongly in domestic marketing however several asian countries have been able to avoid this mistake indonesia for example successfully stabilized domestic rice prices around the mean of world prices for nearly decades defend a floor price and an import monopoly that shielded the domestic market from large price fluctuations on the world rice market during this time domestic procurement averaged only approximately percent of total production price stabilization with such limited procurement shielded the domestic economy from an unstable world market second only small changes in the market quantities traded are necessary to have a large effect on market prices because demand for staple foods such as rice is price inelastic in years when domestic production was plentiful imports were reduced and domestic stocks accumulated and conversely in years of production shortfalls limited interventions into private marketing systems like indonesia the philippines has successfully stabilized domestic rice prices and its procurement rate
even needed to facilitate access into any organization thus choosing qualitative data collection methods required the researchers to spend more time on gaining access and collecting data which in turn had implications for the overall plan of work and the necessary resources required and well justified sampling strategies a non probability sampling method was employed there were about companies worldwide which can be defined as international hotel groups therefore for both projects considering the resource and time implications it was preferable that head offices of the sample hotel groups had to be either in the united kingdom or europe it was also decided that the official could communicate with relevant informants and look at relevant company documents without experiencing any language barriers for the first study eight companies were approached by sending them a letter explaining the project s background aims and potential benefits as well as issues of confidentiality and resource and time requirements follow up phone calls were made and further explanations were unable to participate in the project since they did not have any relevant change cases the existing ones were too sensitive or the company was going through major structural changes so they could not allow any outsider in eventually after four months of intensive formal and informal communication three hotel groups showed interest one of them later withdrew without giving any reason initial access was gained first into in the field and a research fellow who was working for the company however in an email the professor reminded the first author that your findings must provide added value to britco through the guidance of the research fellow relevant parties were approached and briefed about the project and its aims finally the company executives agreed to participate in and support the study in return for receiving a selected as the focus of the investigation overall it took more than four months to actually gain permission to begin collecting empirical data in this group while collecting the data from britco contacts were made with other international hotel groups access was gained into globalco through its senior vice president of sales he had completed his masters of business administration degree at the authors university were interested in the project but were also concerned about the confidentiality and commitment of company executives in terms of time and resources further to a satisfactory compromise on these specific issues the deployment of a key client management strategy was identified for investigation for the second study initial access into brewerco was gained through a professor from the university who project it took several months to formalize the agreement similar to the other case study companies formal and informal communications took place before the second author could enter the organization for data collection purposes the gatekeepers from the participating companies identified potential informants to approach and interview some of the suggested informants agreed to be interviewed but provided very little information in and disbelievers some informants declined to be interviewed without any genuine reason thus perhaps an additional category can be added to laurila s groupings rejecters on the other hand many of the suggested informants agreed to be interviewed they not only provided detailed information but also suggested further potential interviewees relevant documents to study and appropriate meetings to attend interviewees were found this type of sampling is often described in the literature as theoretical purposive or snowball sampling however similar to miller s arguments regardless of the theoretical justification concerning the selection of participant companies and the sampling of informants the feeling was that the use of the word sample for both projects was perhaps misleading the group of organizations any rigorous procedures in fact the companies selected themselves or rather some of their senior executives and managers did by agreeing to support each project in terms of interviews despite the researchers and the gatekeepers attempts to reach and interview all key informants at different management levels and locations in some cases this was not possible only those who were willing to take part in the research could be interviewed this suggests systemically select companies and informants but the researcher is the one who is selected by organizations inevitably it is the project the researcher s personality and skills and the internal dynamics of the participant organization which all influence gaining and maintaining research access planning or dumb luck following previous studies the participant organizations were it was clear that prior preparations and planning paid off the researchers were asked about aims of their projects how the company and the respondents could assist them how the project could help the company and what type of support and resources were required from the company the briefing information and verbal discussions provided answers to these sorts of questions thereby creating a sign of professionalism by the existing contacts and they subsequently became confident about the involvement of their companies in the proposed projects however these preparation activities were not the only factors that eased the process there was also a combination of planning and dumb luck for example researchers from other institutions were also working on similar research plans and held meetings with their organization members however their requests for entry were declined because the companies were not interested in devoting time to their projects they were told that the companies had analysts or consultants who could undertake such investigations for them it is clear that no matter how good the preparation there are variables associated with gaining entry which and research fellows of the university acted not only as motivated insiders but also as important catalysts between the academic and industrial worlds timing is also important in the case of the first project britco was taken over one year before the data collection process began and the new owners were supportive of the yield management initiative if this company was approached two to three months earlier or indeed several in the final stage of the data collection process globalco was acquired and
fact the only thing that clearly is not form is the logic of christianity for this rather constitutes the content whose rejection appears to motivate orm content distinction strikes me as untenable where culture is concerned forms are as hayden white would tell us part of the content what the comaroffs actually argue throughout this book is that the tswana took on much of the culture of capitalism while rejecting the culture of christianity and that the former was in part communicated to them nonverbally form content distinction at least as the comaroffs deploy it does not add much beyond confusion to this argument more troubling however is that it implies that contents are often rejected in the colonial process while forms are often taken up and that christianity must always be content it is clear that in some places people have taken up the content of christianity as a coherent if not always explicit verbal messages and they may also find themselves drawn into it through the largely nonverbal or inexplicit channels that brought the tswana into capitalism but by defining christianity as content and thus suggesting that this process is unlikely to happen in its case the comaroffs decidedly direct attention away from it in barker s terms they masterfully erect a theoretical edifice of christianity then the comaroffs work is not so much an exciting beginning as a mature and unprecedentedly sophisticated late flowering of the discipline s long standing tendency to treat christianity as unimportant this discussion of the comaroffs work should not be read as arguing that their monumental historical anthropology of of christianity its prominence does not mark a new dawn for a topic that the discipline has long relegated to the shadows to the extent that the comaroffs intend their work to be read as an account of the formation of a culture engaged with capitalism in a particular way and not as a work primarily about christianity at all my discussion should perhaps not even count as a critique of it but anthropologists to consider it a work focused on christianity the task of showing the way in which it has further refined the techniques by which anthropology has generally rendered christianity unimportant is a necessary one in concluding the discussion of the comaroffs work it is worth noting that considering its strengths as an account of of the paper i will claim that anthropology has in large part disregarded christianity because it has neither been interested in nor theorized discontinuity one way to read of revelation and revolution as a truly innovative project is to see it as charting for the political economic realm the way in which important discontinuities were introduced into tswana culture read in this way the comaroffs work does theorizing radical culture change the irony is however that they deny in the realm of religion precisely the kinds of changes they so carefully track in the rest of tswana culture given the anthropological tendency to see religion as at the core of authentic traditional culture the comaroffs split perspective in this to engage change elsewhere in tswana life only serves to make more striking their treatment of the culture of christianity as unimportant in the process of transformation continuity and the problem of christianity having documented an anthropological tendency to discount the importance of christianity the next step is to account for imagine that those attracted to exploring cultural difference would have to studying a religion that is dominant at home others such as those uncovered in harding s path breaking article representing fundamentalism the problem of the repugnant cultural other are less obvious to modernist scientific outlooks presents an affront to disciplinary self understanding such that for anthropologists to say that those christians make sense in their own terms is to question whether anthropologists make sense in theirs another would be the tense mix of disdain and dependence that often marks the relationships anthropologists have had with missionaries in the field i review some of these cultural impediments to more detail in the hope that by taking a reflexive stance with regard to our own resistance to the study of christianity we can work to overcome it as important as these cultural obstacles have been in stunting the development of an anthropology of christianity however i focus here on a different set of problems that feed into what is surely an overdetermined history of neglect these i will call the deep structure of anthropological theorizing of course problems of anthropological theory are from one perspective also problems of culture but for present purposes i want to isolate deep seated theoretical problems from the more obviously cultural problems i alluded to above i do this because i think the theoretical problems will prove in the long run to be the hardest to solve a science of continuity i mean by this that cultural anthropologists have for the most part either argued or implied that the things they study symbols meanings logics structures power dynamics etc have an enduring quality and are not readily subject to change this emphasis is written into theoretical tenets so fundamental as to underlie anthropological work on culture from almost all theoretical it is even at definitions of culture in an article that identified the bias toward continuity thinking in the early smith quotes the influential definition of culture that appears in the final chapter of kroeber and kluckhohn s famous study of the culture concept culture consists of patterns explicit and implicit of and traditional ideas and especially their attached values culture systems may on the one hand be considered as products of action on the other as conditioning elements of further action on this definition culture comes from yesterday is reproduced today and shapes tomorrow it is an inherited tradition change and certainly not for radical change it is as smith says in her commentary implicit in our thinking that sociocultures are derived from an individual and collective concern with continuity
easier than simply constructing a master plan i will take this question up in a preliminary way in section but before addressing this question let us consider a simpler one earlier we encountered the purely logical problem of how to evaluate a newly constructed local plan given that we must take account both of its effect on the agent s other plans and the effect of the agent s other plans on the new plan we are now in a position to answer that question the only significance of local plans is as constituents of the master plan when a new local plan is constructed what we want to know is whether the master plan can be improved by adding the local plan to it thus when a new plan is constructed it can be evaluated in terms of its impact on the master plan we merge it with the master plan and see how that affects the expected value of the master plan let us define expected value of the local plan to be the difference its addition makes to the master plan if the marginal expected value is positive adding the local plan to the master plan improves the master plan and so in that context the local plan is a good plan furthermore if we are deciding which of two local plans to add to the master plan the better one is the one that adds more value to the master plan so viewed as potential additions to master plan local plans should be evaluated in terms of their marginal expected values not in terms of their expected values simpliciter locally global planning stating it more precisely my proposal is that the better plan relation is a three place relation comparing the marginal expected values of plans relative to master plans but how exactly do we use this relation to choose between plans it appears that the aim of plan search is to construct local plans and to improve the master plan it may at first occur to one that the objective should be to find an optimal master plan however that cannot be right for two reasons first it is unlikely that there will ever be optimal master plans that are smaller than universal plans if a master plan leaves some choices undetermined it is likely that we can improve upon it by adding decisions regarding those choices however as we have seen it is not possible for real agents to construct plans so that cannot be required for plan adoption the idea that rationality requires choosing optimal master plans is a holdover from classical decision theory classical decision theory envisages a kind of ideal rationality where an agent can survey all possible courses of action and choose an optimal one however that is a computationally impossible ideal real rationality the rules governing rational cognition in real agents operating in complex standards most work in ai has assumed that an agent can complete all relevant reasoning before deciding how to act but outside of toy problems that will never be the case assuming that the agent s reasoning about the world involves at least full first order logic and more likely some defeasible reasoning about its environment that reasoning will not produce a recursive set of conclusions and so will in general be even if the only engaging in classical planning if it has to reason about its environment to detect threats to causal links then the set of threats will not generally be recursive and i showed in pollock that this makes the set of pairs not even recursively enumerable in general reasoning will be non terminating there will be no point at which an agent has exhausted all possibilities in searching for plans despite this agents must take action they cannot wait for the end of a the end of a nonterminating search before deciding what to do so their decisions about how to act must be directed by the best plans found to date not by the best possible plans that could be found the upshot is that plan adoption must be defeasible agents must work with the best knowledge currently available to them and as new knowledge becomes available they may have to change some of their earlier decisions if we only test agent designs on toy problems even big toy apt to be led to architectures that cannot handle this rather fundamental observation this point is fairly obvious and yet it completely changes the face of decision theoretic planning the objective cannot be to find optimal master plans first nonterminating reasoning may produce better and better master plans without limit so there may be no optimal master plans second even if there were optimal master plans the agent would have no way of knowing it has found one until of the nonterminating reasoning is completed planning and plan adoption must be done defeasibly and actions must be chosen by reference to the current state of the agent s reasoning at the time it has to act rather than by appealing to the idealized but unreachable state that would result from the agent completing all possible reasoning and planning agents begin by finding good plans the good plans are good enough to act upon but given more time to reason good plans by better the agent s master plan evolves over time getting better and better and the rules for rationality are rules directing that evolution not rules for finding a mythical endpoint accordingly a decision theoretic planner should implement rules for continually improving the master plan rather than implementing a search for the endpoint ie a search for optimal master plans we might put this by saying that a decision theoretic planner should be an not an optimizing planner an evolutionary planner will be implemented as an infinite loop rather than a terminating search program a program for evolutionary planning will systematically direct an agents entire life rather
such as being able to fully explain symptoms and being engaged in discussion and decision making were largely positive most believed they had the opportunity to do this as part of their prescribing consultations with nurses most also considered that they had been given previous studies into patients more general views of nurse prescribing which have found that patients hold positive views about their prescribing interactions with nurses valuing such features as the nurse patient relationship and the nurse s style of consultation and information provision therefore patient perceptions can be compared with the findings from the research team members observation of practice for example the fact that many patients were observed not to have been given information about the risks and benefits of treatment options and or were judged not to have been assisted in making an informed choice about the management of their health problem did not appear had taken place within the consultation patients responses may have been influenced by a desire to give a positive response to the research team they had however been assured of confidentiality and anonymity of their responses a further possible explanation might be that patients have limited expectations about and preferences for participation in interactions and decision making preferences are complex and dynamic latter et al have also suggested that patients views on information sharing and decision making are likely to be bound up with their previous experiences of these and it is possible that exposing patients to more decision making and greater information sharing might raise the ceiling on their expectations and therefore modify their reported satisfaction large scale evaluation of independent nurse prescribing in england it provides evidence about the extent to which nurses are conducting their prescribing consultations within a framework of concordance which is widely considered to enhance the effectiveness of prescribing consultations and medicines management findings from the study have relevance for both nurse prescribers and those in other countries in which nurse prescribing is established or currently under consideration the findings indicate that nurses and patients are positive about their experiences of concordance in prescribing interactions however observation of practice and detailed questioning of patients highlighted that a paradigm shift to a concordance model that emphasizes partnership about treatment options was not yet integrated into practice clearly this presents further challenges to those responsible for the education and professional development of nurse prescribers the study also highlights areas for further research for example it would seem important to identify educational approaches and other contextual factors that with fully informed patients choosing their preferred treatment options its impact on both health professionals and patients and their medicine taking behaviors and clinical outcomes would also be worthy of investigation disclaimer the views expressed in this paper are those of the authors and are not necessarily those of the susan groth objective to explore the use of centers for disease control and prevention body mass index percentiles for adolescents to classify adolescents for gestational weight gain recommendations design a descriptive study using secondary data analysis setting memphis tennessee gestational weight gain patterns and neonatal birthweight results adolescents especially smaller adolescents were misclassified when the current institute of medicine adult body mass index categories were used to classify them for gestational weight gain when compared to the use of the centers for disease control and prevention body mass index percentiles schema was used a large proportion of adolescents gained more than is recommended by the institute of medicine conclusions the current gestational weight gain recommendations based on adult body mass index categories may not be sufficiently specific to attain the best maternal and neonatal outcomes for adolescents creation of gestational weight gain recommendations in counseling adolescents regarding gestational weight gain there is concern that high gestational weight gain could contribute to higher levels of obesity for adolescents with minimal improvement of infant birthweight it appears that many adolescents gain more than is currently recommended by body mass index both increase the risk of postpartum weight retention the potential detriment of large weight gains for adolescents is concerning this is especially important as bmi appears to become programmed during childhood and prevention of overweight during dietz using an adult bmi classification schema to recommend gestational weight gain for adolescents may be doing adolescents a disservice many adolescents are still growing and likely smaller especially the younger adolescents compared to their adult counterparts the goal of this study was to take a beginning look at use of centers for disease control and prevention recommendations background the current recommendations regarding gestational weight gain during pregnancy were published by the iom in the primary goal of these recommendations was to attain delivery of a full term infant with an optimal birthweight the iom recommendations indicate that adolescents who become pregnant should encouraged to gain at the upper end of the recommendations the iom incorporated prepregnant bmi into the recommendations due to recognition that there is a differential impact of gestational weight gain on infant mortality that is dependent on maternal bmi for women who are underweight there is lower perinatal mortality when they gain more weight while perinatal mortality begins to increase gain categories the bmi ranges incorporated into the existing iom bmi classification schema were based on the cutoff points of and the nonpregnant adult weight for height standards established by the metropolitan life insurance company the iom gestational weight gain recommendations were based on observational studies of women who delivered infants that but it is likely that a percentage of adolescents especially young adolescents are misclassified since adolescent bmi is age dependent adolescent bmi body mass index varies with age during adolescence thinness is bmi for age dc consequently a bmi for age between the percentile and the percentile would be considered a normal weight range for adolescents the cdc standardized bmi growth curves based on national adolescents in the united states and are currently used for all us children regardless of ethnicity intuitively usage of the cdc bmi percentiles to classify
effective teamwork inside an organization he considers the fit between the parties along with knowledge and power to be one of the fundamental concepts of social interaction he differentiates between five fits conative affective cognitive competence and normative the conative fit is defined as the partners inten cooperate and follow compatible goals this conative agreement or cooperative motivation is said to be particularly suitable in instances entailing conflict of interest the affective fit describes the functional compatibility of emotions it encourages mutual trust and openness which contribute to a free exchange of opinions and thus foster knowledge creation the cognitive fit and competence fit describe the degree of content similarity of the partners cognitions and abilities cognitive fit refers to shared explicit knowledge competence fit to shared implicit knowledge and normative fit to the similarity of values and norms for our own exploration of the relational aspects between the partners in a cvc pc dyad we create a detailed framework of relational fit it incorporates social capital consisting of social network ties norms trust conative fit and affective fit and knowledge relatedness consisting of know what we argue that the above dimensions jointly referred to as relational fit directly and indirectly aid knowledge transfer and creation and ultimately pcs organizational performance through knowledge sharing routines if our model can explain knowledge transfer within a cvc pc dyad with this set of variables then it can also be applied we hope to any other comparable set up for these dimensions are prevalent and crucial in any kind of relationship for the sake of clarity the impact that each variable of relational fit has is analyzed independently of the other dimensions although we separate these dimensions analytically many of the features we describe are in fact likely to be interrelated in important and complex ways organizational performance the performance of any organization is eventually affected by its ability to establish and preserve its competitive advantage a company s success at this task depends on multiple factors in addition to overall market conditions management marketing and sales strategy operational efficiency and the like radical innovation assisted by outstanding technology is one way to outperform competitors the organizational performance of new ventures largely depends on their ability to innovate and to turn technology into business in keeping with previous definitions of performance and our present objective we define the organizational performance of pcs in terms of sales return on investment and market share knowledge lane and lubatkin from the knowledge based view of the firm knowledge is strategically the most significant resource for organizations striving for innovation and competitive advantage new knowledge as well as knowledge transfer and creation are critical since they open new productive opportunities and enhance the firm s ability to exploit them one way for an organization to explore new knowledge and exploit existing knowledge is through exchange with other organizations grant holds that heterogeneous knowledge bases and capabilities among firms are the main determinants of sustained competitive advantage and superior corporate performance the development and growth of highly innovative new ventures crucially depend on the external knowledge acquisition by these organizations and on their ability to combine their specific knowledge and resources although young firms rely on a constant inflow of new knowledge their resources are greatly restricted experience shows that young technology firms not only save time and money from a cvc pc partnership but can benefit substantially from it by gaining access to unique and complementary external resources accelerate the learning curves and growth rate of these in exchange the corporation acquires equity from the young venture firm and thereby participates in upward financial valuation of the venture if it succeeds at least equally important though is the corporation s early access to the venture s new ideas and technologies and the exchange of external complementary knowledge all of which carries the potential for truly radical innovation within the corporation knowledge based literature distinguishes between at least two kinds of knowledge explicit knowledge about facts which can easily be codified and transferred and tacit knowledge which is derived from experience such as skills and intuition tacit knowledge is often subjective and unconscious difficult to separate from the owner of the knowledge and hard to transfer tacit knowledge is said to lead to a sustainable the partners in cvc pc relationships try to exploit this fact by contributing different often highly tacit knowledge to the relationship aside from financial backing the most important value adding activity of any cvc is therefore the effective transfer of relevant knowledge to the new venture creation are closely related to the concepts of organizational learning and absorptive capacity given those concepts and the aim of this article we follow huber and consider knowledge transfer and creation within or between organizations to occur if any company or any of its business units acquires knowledge that it recognizes as potentially useful to the organization this definition relates to all relevant knowledge in the above sense that is in addition to facts and skills it includes networks and other valuable and complementary resources knowledge transfer and creation are regarded as interdependent and reiterative knowledge creation and innovation result from new combinations of knowledge and other resources by the same token knowledge transfer is a prerequisite for resource combination in other words for knowledge creation consequently we henceforth use the expression knowledge transfer interchangeably with knowledge transfer and creation researchers have studied various aspects that influence the transferability of knowledge across organizational boundaries in this work knowledge sharing routines social capital and knowledge relatedness have all emerged as important factors affecting interorganizational knowledge transfer ledge sharing routines the knowledge based view finds that interorganizational knowledge transfer and creation takes place more effectively when knowledge sharing routines are in place than when they are absent according to homans and de clercq and sapienza the quality of knowledge sharing routines is described by its frequency and intensity knowledge sharing routines are defined as repe that represent the mechanisms for
automotive step rim innovation developed by general motors and the lessons learned during the development of the analogy are also discussed the difficulties of pushing an innovation through the development process companies recognize the importance of promoting innovation in order to survive in a rapidly changing global environment however there can be a significant appears to be endemic across industries we have directly observed this phenomenon in our combined experiences working at research labs academia and companies that include disney general electric nasa and general motors this has been the case even though the people working in these environments are intelligent creative supportive reasonable and value innovation why is it then that so few innovations the disconnect lies in part in the inherent difficulty of communicating innovative ideas to decision because an innovation is new and unusual it is difficult to describe in such a way that decision makers fully understand the innovation and the benefits it offers gregan paxton and john this lack of understanding may cause decision makers to discredit the innovation before it enters the development process furthermore if the innovation is developed lack of of understanding during the development process may cause the product vision to drift ultimately failing to meet the end consumers needs frequently the result of this drift is a product that is more similar to existing products than the innovation would have been had its vision been maintained in essence the innovation gets lost in translation an effective communication tool such as analogy is needed for pushing an to communicate about the unfamiliar an analogy helps to overcome initial resistance to an innovation an analogy then maintains the vision of the innovation as it passes from workgroup to workgroup during the product development process using analogy as a communication tool analogy has a long history as an effective communication tool with aristotle himself praising its usefulness as a rhetorical device a large empirical knowledge and its use for communication and innovation what is missing is how this knowledge can be used to develop an effective technique for constructing analogies to communicate about specific innovations the current article discusses the development and application of such a technique including the barriers overcome through use of analogy to communicate about innovation the steps necessary to develop a communication analogy and the process by which the technique was created developing and refining a structured methodology for developing analogies research and development work teams at general motors have been using the method of cross domain analogical analysis to facilitate bommarito the design and technology fusion team within is a work team specifically tasked with leveraging advanced technologies and design and finding beneficial strengths between the two consequently the team was familiar with the practice of using analogies to generate new product ideas like many innovators they also realized the usefulness of analogy for describing innovations to others this led the team to an important realization if a cdaa could be developed allowing people to use analogy to generate ideas perhaps a structured methodology could be developed for creating analogies to describe those innovations this led to a partnership between and academia to develop such a methodology the resulting seven step process for developing analogies to communicate about innovation is still in the experimental stages the design and technology fusion product and process innovations in doing so the analogy development process has been refined and streamlined so as to be applicable to a wide a range of innovations the effectiveness of the analogies developed for pushing innovations through the development process is still being assessed however results to date suggest that the analogies generated using the seven step process function are effective for overcoming typical barriers faced by innovative ideas during the development barriers to innovation overcome by using analogy the analogy development process has been used by gm s design and technology fusion team to communicate about innovations ranging from total vehicle systems to conceptual approaches for automotive design analogies generated using this process allow a communicator to overcome three barriers to innovation when first introducing an innovation to an audience a well constructed analogy the audience out of a problem finding mindset by allowing people to use familiar knowledge to structure their understanding of the innovation the analogy allows people to more fully understand the innovation and the potential benefits it offers finally the analogy ensures that the key message associated with the innovation does not drift as the innovation travels through the product development process we have a set of expectations and guidelines for behaving in that situation for example when we go into a restaurant we expect to see tables order from a menu and eat we also know that we are expected to pay for our food and to refrain from yelling loudly at those around us cognitive psychologists refer to the expectations associated with familiar events as scripts galambos galambos and rips schank and ableson hundreds of scripts including scripts for birthday parties restaurants and business presentations these scripts develop over time through repeated experiences with the common events the more experience a person has with a particular situation the more developed the script for that situation ross and berg when a person has a well developed script they will automatically engage in innovators face when pitching a new initiative most executives have well developed business meeting scripts in these meetings there are typically a score of problems to solve and limited resources with which to solve them unfortunately the very act of attending a business meeting causes these people to immediately engage in problem finding and decision making behaviors this is true even if the meeting is explicitly directed towards providing information about an innovation executives and other decision makers are not necessarily close minded or are in the habit of adopting a negative mindset it is simply the case that such problemfinding behaviors are
inflectional morphemes seem to be developmentally constrained and their development follows a so called natural little evidence suggesting that the learning of verb subcategorization knowledge is developmentally constrained thus these two hypotheses would predict the integration of subcategorization knowledge but not the morpheme knowledge at certain stages of sla however a closer examination renders these hypotheses unsatisfactory first these hypotheses are intended to explain under what circumstances formal instruction or knowledge is beneficial to sla although the participants of the likely to have been acquainted with grammatical rules such as the use of plural forms in a formal setting in their early stages of english learning they have also lived and worked in an english speaking environment for a period of time and should have received ample contextualized input thus these hypotheses do not particularly apply to these participants or the findings of the present study second even when one extends the hypotheses to learners there is no reason or principled explanation in these models to assume that the advanced esl speakers in this study or the participants in longitudinal studies who had lived in an english environment for decades were not developmentally ready a third explanation can be found in dekeyser s study in replicating the johnson and newport study he found that late learners produced a declarative sentences do support in yes no questions and pronoun gender whereas other structures showed a strong effect of age of learning dekeyser attributed such differential effects of age to the perceptual salience of the structures involved on the assumption that adult learners rely on explicit analytical learning processes he suggests that errors involving these structures were perceptually more salient and that perceptual salience makes them particularly good candidates for explicit learning perceptual salience seems to be a good candidate for explaining learners inability to integrate knowledge related to the number morpheme which is generally considered a nonsalient one however perceptual salience is a construct hard to define in dekeyser s study likelihood of correction was a criterion for pronoun gender errors and error positions were used for the other two structures defining and operationalizing perceptual salience in a consistent way for a variety of structures is a challenge yet to be met for example it is not immediately clear whether verb subcategorization errors are perceptually salient for this reason whether perceptual salience offers a viable explanation for the differential results on the two structures in this study and for selective integration in general is yet to be determined frequency based model of language acquisition in this model language learning whether it is the or is exemplar based and associative in nature it is the piecemeal learning of many thousands of constructions and the frequency biased abstraction of regularities within them a learner s linguistic knowledge is not grammar in the sense of abstract rules or structure but a huge collection of memories of previously experienced utterances this model can explain the integration of verb categorization knowledge comfortably when the verb encourage takes an object and an object complement the complement is always an infinitive verbal phrase when insist is to be followed by an object and a complement they take the form of a clause these patterns are quite consistent and favorable for establishing associations based on numerous examples in the input learners are able to build two different patterns or simply by following the power law of practice such associations can be strengthened to such an extent that the learners language processor automatically expects an infinitive verbal phrase to follow encourage but a clause to follow insist when an inconsistent pattern was encountered in an ungrammatical sentence during the experiment the inconsistency would be caught and cause a delay in sentence processing agreement between subjects and verbs there is little consistency in number between a noun in the subject position and the main verb the sentences an adult learner hears are much more complicated than the dogs are barking a plural verb might follow a singular noun as in the words on the screen were hard to recognize or the watch and the tie are in the drawer a singular verb might follow a plural noun as in going to these presentations was helpful to english verbs do not usually have a number morpheme as a result an association for number agreement is much harder to establish this model however seems less capable of explaining learners insensitivity to the number errors involved in the present study such as several of the board member the input should be consistent in the cases of these structures whenever one encounters a phrase such as two of a few of and noun thus such associations are not difficult to build however our participants were not sensitive to such errors furthermore it is not clear how this model can explain adult learners failure and child learners success in learning the number morpheme at the same time conclusion the study confirmed that the integration of knowledge is selective specifically the participants knowledge about verb subcategorization seemed to be integrated in that it is readily available in language processing but their knowledge about the plural morpheme is not to the extent that the research method used in this study allows one to tap learners integrated knowledge with minimum involvement of explicit knowledge nonintegratable linguistic knowledge in adult acquisition and for studying knowledge integration in general this method can be easily adapted to test other linguistic structures such as past tense articles and word orders by using sentences with different types of error however i want to end with a note of caution this method can be used to examine if the learners knowledge is integrated at a particular point of time when results suggest that certain knowledge is not integrated they do not necessarily mean that that particular knowledge is not integratable consider the plural morpheme nonintegratable on the basis of the compelling evidence from both this study and the existing literature however such evidence might not always
that prevent something happening alter the way something happens or make something happen in the cellular processes themselves the result is that our ethical relation to our bodies has changed dilemmas about what we are what we are capable of what we may hope for now have a molecular translated into the language of biopolitics rose argues that it is increasingly our corporeality life itself and not just our conduct which has become subject to what hical political relation to our bodies which are now defined in terms of open ended futures but there is more to rose s account than merely a shift in the target of political rationalities from the behavior of bodies to their actual make up for rose ethopolitics also relates to crucial changes in the relation between the individual and the state rose develops this point in response to critics of biotechnology for whom the molecularization of life is newfound capacity to diagnose genetic conditions in embryos for instance we can now make choices about whether to continue a pregnancy or to accept an embryo for implantation in ivf therapies based upon the knowledge of future risks for a number of critics this has raised the unsettling possibility of political rationalities directed toward eliminating taints or weaknesses in populations based on some bodies being calculated to have less biological worth than come as little surprise as we are all too aware from events in the twentieth century biopolitics defined as the care of life can just as readily invest in the life of the collective body through purging defective bodies as through improving training or selecting healthy it is partly in response to these anxieties that rose spells out his account of a historical shift from a biopolitics of populations to an ethopolitics characterized by the individual the somatic self while he readily agrees that political rationalities are still organized around risks to health he claims that the nature of these political rationalities has changed in such a way that eugenics is no longer the threat it once was biopolitical practices in the past he argues were directed toward improving the national stock and took two forms which contained the potential for eugenics hygienics which was concerned with maximizing the health and productive powers of the national body in the present and the regulation of reproduction which was concerned with improving the national stock by eliminating risks to its wellbeing in the future these were matters of concern for state policy as well as for individuals who understood their biological lives in terms of an ethical responsibility to the national body thus blurring the boundaries between coercive and voluntary eugenics is markedly different to begin with it is not at all apparent that we are still in an age where the state seeks to take charge of the lives of each in the name of the destiny of in other words for rose the idea that the state should coordinate and manage the affairs of all sectors of society that it should attach importance to the fitness of the national body en masse has fallen into disrepute since the question of fitness is no longer framed in terms of a struggle populations but instead posed in economic terms such as the cost of days off from work that are caused by ill health hence when it comes to national health the state seeks to enable or facilitate the health of individuals rather than govern bodies in any direct way the difference between old eugenics and what some have today labelled liberal eugenics then can be seen as the difference between state led programmes that in the past sought to produce a particular population with particular traits and capabilities and the ethical decisions of individuals in the present who are exercising choice in reproductive matters although forms of pastoral power clearly shape these reproductive choices the state remains neutral for rose this is a crucial difference and symptomatic of a larger shift whereby health is increasingly a matter of individual rather than state responsibility and citizens are asked to take responsibility for securing their through such things as purchasing private health insurance being informed citizens actively investigating health conditions joining with others in support groups contributing to lobby groups and seeking genetic counseling it is here at the intersection of the molecularization of life with the individualization of risk that rose locates ethopolitics as the dominant biopolitical regime of the present within such a biopolitical order he argues individuals are presented with new ways of rendering their bodies to themselves in thought and language making judgements about them and ultimately acting upon them whether these decisions are based on dna samples from amniotic fluid in the case of reproductive health or susceptibility to alzheimer s due to the presence or absence of particular genes thus the individual who takes responsibility for her health is at the same time the individual who thinks her body through its genetic inheritance an be managed wisely or potentially improved this government of the genetic self is thus decidedly not about following general programmes aimed at the population at large but about understanding and making wise choices about the risks that are peculiar to one s self risk becomes individualized the individual becomes intrinsically somatic and ethical practices increasingly take the body as a key site for work on the formulation of the biopolitical present predominates as is evident in a great deal of work on the social and cultural aspects of biomedicine and biotechnology from anthropologists and sociologists for example we learn that the molecularization of life and the individualization of risk have given rise to new forms of identity and sociality around disease and individuals are said to increasingly recognize the self as the bearer of this or that genetic risk around future plans must be prudently organized likewise researchers have begun to attend to the myriad of ways that our genetic lives are lived and ethical decisions about
a function of the tax laws thus changes in the tax code can have significant drastic and immediate influence on incremental value from debt financing the numerical example in the next section incorporates the first three sources either at the investors unlevered equity rate of return or the risk free rate rf depending on the source of the cash flow while cash flows comprising npvf are discounted at the market s cost of debt thus every possible effect of leverage is explicitly built into the value computation through a series of net present value of debt financing calculations equations also assume that there will not be an equity reversion at the important caveats ik note that equation has to be modified to deduct any costs of having outstanding debt such as the costs of liquidating the project s assets if it is unable to service the debt these are called costs of financial distress which tend to increase as the amount of debt financial intermediaries which provide funds to real estate investors have established rules and guidelines by which they check the credit riskiness of a given thus these institutions determine ex ante how risky a project and its undertakers are and extend a loan to an investor conditional on this risk assessment thus if a loan is extended at the ongoing market rate for a project this can be taken as a signal that the costs of financial distress of this project are not too high thus we assume here that these costs are negligible equation assumes that the debt service is fixed and independent of the the project ik point out that in many lbo transactions debt covenants require that the entire cash flow be dedicated to interest and principal payment and that therefore the amount of debt outstanding and the interest tax shields at any point in time are a direct function of the unlevered cash flows of the project under these conditions the debt balance becomes as risky as the cash flows thus not rb becomes the an important source of incremental value as per equation is that of interest tax shields the tax deductibility of mortgage interest has been an important housing policy tool in the usa and many countries it is important to point out that interest tax shields are not money machines as the credit risk assessment practices of financial intermediaries place an upper boundary for how much debt an investor can obtain for a given real estate project this also of the interest tax shields another important point to keep in perspective is that if the tax subsidy to debt financing is the only source of incremental value from using debt financing one must be careful about the stability of the tax regime in a given country this is especially so if the npvae is negative while the apv is positive governments can change tax laws suddenly eliminating or reducing the incremental value from using the debt financing it is interesting to note that of the mortgage interest s tax deductibility became an important issue for debate during the early stages of the us presidential election campaign another related issue is that a company should be paying taxes in order to benefit from the tax side effects it is possible that the company may enter into a non tax paying period this in turn will lead to a carry back carry forward procedure altering the timing of any of the interest and flotation tax shelters thus the stability of the tax regime in a country and a company s tax paying status are reasons to evaluate carefully the value of the project under all equity buying a home a numerical illustration a single family residential property currently the annual rent for such a property is and this amount is quite consistent with market conditions we assume annual rent payments to simplify our work here extension of our work to monthly rent payments is quite easy the rent is expected to increase as a function of inflation in the years ahead ie it is constant in real terms analysts forecasts indicate that inflation will be two years and will then stabilize at per cent for the foreseeable future although the utility costs of this property fluctuate based on the season on average they are around per cent of the rent the johnsons realize that they currently pay about the same amount for their utility costs the owner of the property currently undertakes maintenance and assumes repair expenses as well as all other expenses including property taxes around and we will assume for simplicity that these expenses will remain stable for the foreseeable future the johnsons really like this property and decide to investigate its purchase of course a capital gain of from selling their previous house taxable if not reinvested within two years is also a factor in their purchase decision the owner indicates to the johnsons that a price of johnsons have no desire to move anywhere else and intend to occupy this house for as long as they live the johnsons shop around for financing options and find that the best option is a year mortgage with a rate of per cent and no points the cost of obtaining a loan above is fixed at mr johnson is a freelance writer and uses per cent of the space in the house as his office thus they are entitled to some depreciation and can lower their the property they will also buy title and homeowners insurance the total annual insurance cost is expected to be around they will pay annually in property taxes for simplicity we assume that insurance premiums and property taxes will not change for the foreseeable future since the johnsons and the property owner deal directly there are no brokerage fees the johnsons will pay legal fees of to complete this they should earn per cent return on their unlevered equity and that the risk free rate is per
are found in the northern diatexite outcrop they are composed of fine grained biotite orthopyroxene and quartz early quartz veins and evidence for are preserved in this unit euhedral cordierite both orthopyroxene and garnet commonly have inclusions of biotite magnetite and ilmenite biotite flakes are mm in length and rarely define a foliation at hand specimen scale biotite in diatexite commonly encloses other minerals consistent with a neocrystalline origin no early biotite is found in the diatexite west flanks of the gorge the rocks are dominated by quartz feldspar plagioclase and biotite with or without orthopyroxene and rare garnet an impersistent foliation is defined by trains of biotite and orthopyroxene in weakly migmatized domains leucosome patches up to cm in across are composed of quartz feldspar and orthopyroxene pegmatitic leucosomes occur as dykes more than in width and several tens of meters in length that cut they are formed from very coarse grained feldspar and quartz with large rounded intergrowths of garnet and orthopyroxene psammitic gneiss flanks diatexite outcrops on two sides of the gorge and the diatexites are contained within the nose of successive upright quartz grains are anhedral with grains mm in diameter feldspar and plagioclase are modally less significant than in the stromatic migmatite and are always fine grained perthite occurs rarely as small grains biotite is rare and occurs as fine grained flakes orthopyroxene in psammitic are commonly the only distinguishing features biotite and retrogressed orthopyroxene together define a weak local foliation that can be difficult to discern at the outcrop scale garnet occurs as rare sub rounded aggregates that line up in trains biotite inclusions are common in these grains some psammitic gneiss units contain a small amount of patch leucosome that forms sub rounded isolated and have a granitic texture similar to leucosomes in the stromatic migmatite euhedral orthopyroxene and garnet are common in patch leucosomes and grain size varies from to mm inclusions of magnetite and ilmenite in orthopyroxene and garnet are common biotite is much more abundant in patch leucosomes and commonly occurs either as isolated prograde performed on a cameca sx camebax microprobe at the university of new south wales operating with an accelerating voltage of kv a beam width of lm and pap data reduction software supplied by the manufacturer representative analyses from two of the modelled samples are presented in table compositions of garnet and orthopyroxene key minerals in this limited compositional variation with fe garnet grains are mostly compositionally homogeneous subtle compositional zoning in almandine and psammitic gneiss has a broader compositional range with xsp and xgr the broader compositional range is a result of subtle bulkrock variations in psammitic gneiss and at least two compositions of garnet are identified garnet in psammitic gneiss samples with patch leucosome is relatively spessartine rich pyrope is relatively spessartinepoor pyrope poor and almandine rich garnet in psammitic gneiss has xfe garnet in psammitic gneiss with no apparent leucosomes has higher xfe values than psammitic gneiss with patch leucosomes orthopyroxene is hypersthene with xfe grains have a small proportion of ferric iron based on cation constraints within sample chemical variation is limited though there are subtle changes with textural setting alumina content in mesosome orthopyroxene tends to be slightly lower than that of adjacent leucosomal orthoproxene orthopyroxene in bulk rock composition alumina content in stromatic gneiss orthopyroxene is slightly higher than that from psammitic gneiss samples with less variation within individual samples biotite has a moderately large range in composition caused by both variations in bulk rock composition and retrograde effects biotite has xfe and ti cations pfu biotite in samples with psammitic gneiss ranges from oligoclase xan ca to andesine plagioclase in patch leucosome samples is mostly andesine psammitic gneiss sample is leucosome free unretrogressed and contains oligocase plagioclase compositions in samples that do not display patch leucosome tend to be though na ranges up to plagioclase in stromatic migmatite is invariably oligoclase xan feldspar is abundant in stromatic migmatite both as a fine grained constituent of mesosome and coarse grained subhedral grains in leucosome it is predominantly orthoclase and strongly potassic occasional large perthite grains occur in variation magnetite contains small proportions of spinel were cut for laicpms mineral trace element analysis lam icpms trace element analyses on minerals was performed at macquarie university using the in house assembled the laser had a wavelength of nm and was mostly operated at hz to produce cylindrical flat bottomed pits of um diameter on the targeted minerals data were acquired for s with acquisition commencing s after ablation was initiated in analyzing feldspar a frequency of hz and data acquisition time of s are used to prevent the laser from drilling through the using glass as the external standard and refined by analyzing and mongol garnet internal standards at analysis intervals precision is in the range of relative be and and relative all other elements al content obtained from microprobe analyses was used as the calibration element for garnet orthopyroxene standards in the glitter software representative garnet and orthopyroxene analyses are presented in table and chondrite normalized plots in fig fourteen samples were chosen for whole rock geochemical analysis rock chips were crushed in a tungsten carbide mill and powder splits were taken from each sample for analysis major element pseudosections below reproducibility data for xrf analyses can be obtained from http gemoc trace element determinations were performed by xrf and neutron activation analysis in the becquerel laboratories at lucas heights results are presented in table care was exercised in using results for elements near all garnet analyses were conducted on grains in leucosome garnet is homogeneous with respect to trace element content and with respect to the wholerock composition shows the typical depletion in light ree and enrichment in heavy ree variability of trace element content between psammitic gneiss stromatic were cut from samples that contained orthopyroxene in both the mesosome and leucosome
words and filler nonwords stimulus construction each of the critical words filler words and filler nonwords was recorded by both a male and a female speaker the recording procedure as well as the procedure for creating the ambiguous of and d in the mixture the length of dt after the voicing burst onset and the length of silence before the burst onset for use in the experiment we calculated the total duration of dt for the critical items for each speaker we measured the time from the end of the vowel immediately preceding each critical d and to the end of the aspiration note that this measure no difference in the average length of dt across the male and female voices we also calculated two spectral measures for each critical dt to ensure that the burst energy for the stops did not differ systematically across voices we measured the spectral mean and the root mean square between the male and the female voices in either frequency of the burst energy or in rms amplitude of burst energy as explained above participants in the control groups heard only one of these voices and therefore for half of the control participants the d s were replaced with the ambiguous dt version of the item for the other half the d words remained unchanged but the s were replaced with the ambiguous dt mixture these two conditions were crossed with voice of presentation participants in the experimental groups however ale female and the other heard the alternative combination of male female in order to maximize any effect of each voice s pronunciation the voices were blocked an important advantage of blocking voices is that it allows control over which voice pronunciation combination each participant had been exposed to immediately before the categorization test this ones or whether the two simply cancel one another out regardless of order phase ii category identification in the second phase of the experiment all participants heard six items on a vowel consonant vowel continuum presented in two voices the two endpoints of the continuum were recorded by the same male and female raters chose six consecutive tokens for each continuum these stimuli ranged from relatively d like to relatively like with four ambiguous points in between as for the exposure items we calculated the total dt duration for each item for the male voice the selected ambiguous range was ms for the female voice the range was one another with no significant difference in the means across the test items for rms amplitude male female items were presented in a random order and blocked by voice the order of voice was counterbalanced procedure participants were randomly assigned to one of the lexical decision conditions up to three participants were tested simultaneously in a soundproof booth in the lexical decision task participants were instructed to respond word or non word to each item by pressing the corresponding button on a response panel for the experimental groups items were blocked by voice data for each type of critical item for participants in the experimental had mean accuracy of over in both groups accuracy was significantly higher for the natural versions of the critical items than for the ambiguous versions the experimental groups had a mean accuracy of the natural versions and the ambiguous versions had a mean accuracy of natural versions compared to ambiguous versions addition participants in both groups correctly labeled ambiguous items as words more quickly than they labeled natural items suggesting that the lowered accuracy for such items might be the result of a speedaccuracy was significant for the experimental groups minf for the control conditions the difference was not significant minf these results are quite consistent with previous perceptual learning perceptual learning differences that we might see between the two groups are not due to their performance in the lexical decision phase instead any subsequent differences on the category identification task would have to be attributed to the fact that the experimental group heard a second ambiguous pronunciation during phase i while the control group did not identified as d for the control groups there was a clear effect of lexical decision exposure condition on phonemic categorization performance listeners who were exposed to the ambiguous dt phone in words that normally have a d categorized more items on our continua as d than those who heard dt in words which normally have a demonstrating that the size of the effect was just as large across voices as it was within voice the significant training effect for the control conditions confirms that people do use lexical knowledge to adjust their perceptual representations even for categorically perceived stop consonants further it establishes that hearing only critical items is sufficient that perceptual learning generalizes to new voices for these stop based stimuli in that study the across voice shift and the within voice shift were based on twice as many critical items but the effects are clearly very similar to those generated with only ten for comparison purposes fig shows the labeling functions for the effect we obtained in the present experiment effect we obtained using critical items given the reliable effects for the controls we can now ask whether these effects are preserved when a listener has heard different voice specific interpretations of the ambiguous dt if perceptual learning is speaker specific then conflicting information in a very different because participants had initially been trained in both voices but with opposite pronunciations for each voice therefore we must rely on the with invoice test as a measure of whether there was perceptual learning that was consistent with training the results are clear despite the reliable shifts found for the controls no perceptual learning was observed for listeners in d contexts did not categorize more items on the voice consistent continuum as d than those who learned it in contexts when we separate the voices there is a perceptual learning trend in the male voice but not in the female voice
also the learning assistants were asked to pay special attention to good problem solving strategies in recitations at the end of that semester out of respondents admitted that they always against better knowledge used bad problem solving strategies to get the correct result as soon as possible stated they often did so and stated that they rarely or never did so were not sure outcomes that are only minimally different from the previous group of students so about half of the students claim that their online discussion behavior reflects their epistemological views about physics problem solving but the other half either aren t sure or explicitly admit that their strategies reflect expediency rather than their views about how best to learn physics these findings correspond to the study by elby who found that students can perceive trying to understand physics deeply and pursuing good grades to be a different activities they also again underline the difference between public and personal epistemologies the students know that their strategy is bad public epistemology but decide it works best for them personal epistemology gets results quickly expediency and good problem solving behavior does not give them more points as long as they get the correct result reward structure therefore for the class as a whole online discussion behavior reflects a combination of students personal epistemological beliefs expediency and expectations about what s rewarded in the class to directly compare the attitudes and beliefs measures we calculated correlations between the prominence of discussion behavior classes and the mpex clusters and generally found them to be very low as an example the correlation between the score on the concepts cluster and the prominence of conceptual discussion contributions turned out to be n when considering all students and n when considering all students and when only considering those who made at least five discussion contributions the confidence intervals given in square brackets include zero thus we conclude that discussion behavior and the individual mpex cluster scores are if at all only weakly correlated correlations between discussions and learning figure shows the correlation between the prominence of physics related discussions and the course grade percentage for better statistics only students who contributed at least five discussion entries over the course of the semester were considered figure shows how the percentage of a particular student s discussion contribution that was classified as physics related correlates with their final fci score while physics related discussions positively correlate with fci scores and grades fig solution oriented discussions negatively correlate correlations between mpex and learning correlations between the mpex and measures of student learning are generally weak considering final exam fci and course grade between the score on the coherence cluster and the course grade percentage is the highest correlation found dancy found similarly low correlations with the performance on homework tests and final exams direct comparison with the performance on the final exams found for the correlation with the total mpex score here concept cluster here with the reality link cluster here with the math link cluster no significant correlation found here and no significant correlation with the effort cluster here figure shows how the final mpex and fci scores correlated with the each other ie coletta and found a strong correlation between the much lower in this study the correlations reported here are in the same range that perkins et found when investigating the influence of beliefs on conceptual learning using the class ref and the force and motion conceptual evaluation fmce ref instruments vii discussion of possible causal physics oriented discussion behavior positive and the final fci score it is an interesting question whether the students learned physics better because of their more expertlike approach as argued by lising and or vice versa in an attempt to answer this question we are considering the fci gain as a rough measure of how much physics the students learned versus for example knew already we in half and calculating the the difference between the prominence of discussion behaviors in the first and the second half of the semester we then calculated the following two correlations fci gain versus prominence of solution oriented and physics related postings fci gain versus gain in prominence of solution oriented and physics related postings and for fci gain versus physics related discussions such significant correlations do not occur for fci gain versus any of the mpex cluster scores on the other hand the correlations with discussion gain are not significant for fci gain versus gain in solution oriented discussions and for fci gain versus gain in physics related expected however the confidence intervals include zero in both cases when looking at the absolute values the average gain in solution oriented discussions between the two halves of the semester is and the gain in physics oriented discussions other words the students did not really change their discussion behavior over the course of the semester and their discussion behavior does behavior appears to be a property of the students that is almost constant over the course of the semester just like already pointed out that it is unlikely that epistemological beliefs are changed implicitly by physics instruction we also ran a linear regression analysis of the fci scores versus discussion behavior in the equations below post and physics are the percentage solution oriented and physics related discussion over the course of the semester for the physics oriented discussion we found post fci pre fci physics with an explained variance of the post fci score the effect of the pre test fci is significant the effect of the physics discussion is not explained variance of the post fci score both coefficients are significant the solution oriented discussion has thus controlling for pre test fci score for each in solution oriented discussion the predicted post test fci score goes down by points students who do not make any solution oriented contributions would on the average gain points on the item fci due would on the average only gain points less than half fig correlation of percentage solution oriented discussions with final fci score fig correlation of the final fci score with the mpex score viii conclusions this behavior however reflects how students actually approach their physics homework problems students who exhibit more expertlike approaches have higher learning success even when controlling for prior physics knowledge indeed the correlation between
power and rule hesiod is especially emphatic about the honours given to hecate but rather than seeing this as the expression of her evangelist and we should see the passage in terms of the structure of the world order according to hesiod hecate is dwelt upon not because hesiod had a personal cult of the goddess but because to stand for the gen eral process of zeus s canny negotiations with the gods who preceded him hesiod s zeus is no more advanced in moral terms than homer s both poets present a series of decisions made by a powerful and unknowable god in hesiod s account zeus punishes mankind with pandora to get back at prometheus however to dwell on the morality of zeus s motives or his treatment of humanity would be mis leading since the point of hesiod s to display zeus s power and its connection to cosmic order which is a direct result of olympian power politics nevertheless as in homer there is as far as humans are concerned a positive value to the world order established by the gods for zeus has given humans the gift of justice which sets them apart from animals and hesiod like homer reflects the process of personifying and allegorizing such positive social norms both aicrl and the atzai which sets them apart from animals and hesiod like homer reflects the process of personifying and allegorizing such positive social norms both aicrl and the atzai are daughters of zeus who seek redress from their father when they are abused or refused by mortals moreover the basileus who is just is favored by the gods whether by zeus the muses or hecate finally if we ask what social functions hesiod s poetry might have fulfilled we find that it communicates the same basic ideas and values as homeric epic zeus s order is supreme his will is inscrutable to mortals but inescapable humans should avoid excess and respect legitimate claims to honour and justice the homeric hymns or the world according to zeus a central theme of the major homeric hymns as of homer and hesiod is the played by zeus s supremacy in the evolution of divine and human as zeus determines the extent to which demeter and persephone can play the of eternal mother and daughter and curbs aphrodite s power by turning it back on the goddess herself zeus sets in train the plots of both hymns approving hades abduction of persephone and making aphrodite fall in love with the mortal anchises the hymn to demeter reflects the pervasiveness of greek gender fertility of gods humans and nature itself are interlinked under the patronage of zeus who controls not only the sexual maturation of his daughter persephone but also the division of the agricultural year since girls must be made useful by mar riage and child bearing persephone cannot remain a virgin forever moreover demeter has not asked zeus for eternal virginity for and so she must daughter s inevitable progress to marriage and motherhood demeter s fixation on her own maternal role is no less problematic than her hostility to her daughter s since she is not only resistant to persephone s maturation but acts as a bad mother even in her grief at persephone s absence for she seeks to make the baby demophon immortal as if to create a divine surrogate to replace her own child yet her actions are once more doomed to fail ure since she acts without the permission of zeus whose agree ment to the crossing of the boundary between mortal and immortal is essential finally demeter s dreadful wrath puts the nascent olympian in jeopardy since it threatens to destroy humanity and so end the timai paid to the gods zeus s solution is to confirm and expand demeter s own status and privileges the hymn ends with both demeter and persephone joining zeus on olympus and with their powers confirming his in the hymn to aphrodite the goddess ability to lead astray even the mind of zeus poses a threat to his supremacy as soon as aphrodite has slept with anchises under zeus s influence she regrets the resulting diminution of her power similar pat terns of rivalry hierarchy and control are found in the hymns to apollo and hermes in the hymn to apollo hera delays the new god s birth out of jealousy in the hymn to hermes the conflict between old and new gods is transposed to older and younger olympians as zeus s own children apollo and hermes bring their dispute to trial before their once zeus reconciles them the baby hermes is able to secure his rightful timai and place among the impressing apollo with the newly invented lyre and a song that ingeniously and appropriately celebrates the divine order that he is about to enter thus the major homeric hymns display the same conception of the cosmos and the gods as the rest of early greek hexa meter poetry eastern contexts recent comparative studies have greatly enriched our understanding of the interaction between greece and the various cultures of the ancient near yet even if one accepts that greek literature is a near eastern it remains to ask how the greeks have transformed these near eastern in or rather to ask how a common inheritance has been given a particular articulation and meaning in greek culture for while scholars can point to many striking they do not always consider how the greek example has been made uniquely and specifically greek that is how it has been changed and assimilated to a wider pre existing and distinctively greek world view yet such a process of assimilation is a fundamental aspect of all cultural transmission and its changed and
on the day after the earnings announcement date in the and ends on the day before the earnings announcement date for the current quarter lag value is defined analogously to examine how the short swing rule affects the intensity of passive and active insider trades we examine the coefficient estimates on the interactions of aret ea and aret fd with lag freq or lag value the short swing rule leads us to predict a positive coefficient on the interaction terms table on the abnormal return at the filing interacted with past insider trade frequency in panel a the dependent variable is in panel the dependent variable is variables are defined as follows ind aret fd is an indicator variable that is if and otherwise pos aret fd is defined as max and neg aret fd is defined as min lag freq is computed like freqp except that the period over which lag freq is computed begins on the day after the date in the previous quarter and ends on the day before the earnings announcement date for the current quarter lag value is computed analogously other variables are defined in tables and except that ln is the natural logarithm of mv cook s distance statistic is used to eliminate influential observations regressions control for firm calendar year quarter and fiscal quarter fixed effects significance levels of and based on two tests are and respectively as predicted the coefficient estimates on lag freq aret fd lag freq aret ea lag freq lag value aret fd lag value and aret ea lag value are significantly positive in specification of table thus insider purchases in the past quarter imply further purchases in the current quarter moreover insider purchases in the current quarter for a given abnormal return at the filing or earnings announcement are increasing of table suggesting that past insider trades are important predictors of current insider trades nearly identical results obtain if the period over which lag freq and lag value are computed by aggregating transactions in the previous two quarters distribution of insider trades between the announcement and the filing we earlier noted that insider trades are distributed unevenly across periods and we now examine whether insider trades are distributed evenly over the interval between the announcement and the filing and how the intensity with which insiders make use of over this period define period to be the days between the announcement window and the filing window in general two countervailing factors may affect insiders trades in relation to a forthcoming disclosure first as the disclosure approaches the precision of insiders information about the content of the disclosure increases an insider therefore may be expected to trade most intensely on his private information right before its release if as increases as the time between the trade and the event becomes shorter then the insider may refrain from trade immediately before the which of these two effects dominates is an empirical question but we note that after the earnings announcement the insider is likely to have precise information about the content of the filing so that the precision of the insiders information with respect to the filing may not increase much over the period jeopardy on the other hand would seem to increase as the filing date approaches this leads us to conjecture that insider trades are concentrated early in period and that the intensity with which insiders trade on private information about the disclosure is highest early in period turning to the data we note first that insider trades within period are concentrated early in the period consistent with our conjecture recall that the median number of days the filing window in the case of an interim quarterly announcement is days over the trading activity in period occurs in the first days of this period there is a similar concentration of insider trades in the first part of the period following an annual earnings announcement the median number of days between the end of the announcement window and the beginning of the filing window is days over all trading activity in period occurs in the first this period across firm quarters the mean values of total insider trades in the first and second halves of period are and respectively while lower jeopardy may drive the higher mean value of insider trades in the first half of period it could also be that all traders avoid trade in second half of period to address this possibility we express insider trades in each half of period in each firm a fraction of all stock trades in that half of period for the firm quarter the mean values of insider trades as a fraction of all trade in the first and second halves of period are respectively thus relative to shares traded by all market participants trade by insiders is disproportionately concentrated in the first half of period which is consistent with the explanation that lower jeopardy in the first half of period serves to panel a of table reports the results of regressions identical to those reported in specification of table except that the dependent variable is redefined in specification the dependent variable is measured over the first half of period in specification the dependent variable is measured over the second half of period that is for each firm quarter period is divided into two sub periods of equal duration the dependent each sub period are recomputed over each subperiod and regression of table is rerun for each sub period the signs and significance levels of the coefficient estimates in table are consistent with the corresponding regressions in table except that the coefficient estimate on aret in panel for the latter part of period is indistinguishable from zero notably the coefficient estimates on aret fd are greater for the first half regression than for the for both freq and value again this is consistent with the conjecture that insider trading intensity is greater when jeopardy is lower in panels a and the
fruitfulness of the traditional notional approach to grammar in articulating the systematic relations among finiteness of an expression the occurrence of morphosyntactic markers of finiteness for instance varies with the mood of the sentence and the same form may be finite or non finite depending on its interpretation the importance of meaning to the identification and description of constructions was apparent to bloomfield in this respect so too bloomfield acknowledged the syntactic relevance of intonation such as we have observed here in more general terms i suggest that the traditional strategy of viewing morphosyntax and prosodic phonology as complementary manifestations of structures that interpret or express notionally based categories as in principle adopted here warrants further investigation a hall abstract in german the complementary distribution of and motivate a process of glide formation according to which surfaces as when situated to the left of a vowel the present study examines german words in which a prevocalic occurs after two consonants and demonstrates that the process is blocked from applying if the two consonants show a sonority rise these data can be accounted for most elegantly in an optimality theoretic approach in the constraint onset is dominated by a local conjunction involving the syllable contact law and constraints militating against an onset consisting of a sonorant plus an additional set of examples shows that glide formation applies after two obstruents but is blocked after two nasals it will be argued that the contrast between these two types of plateaus requires no added stipulation but instead falls out from the same ranking stand in complementary distribution in german in such a way that surfaces when adjacent to a vowel and elsewhere the assumption in the literature is that german requires a rule of glide formation whereby converts to in prevocalic position a hall the in a word like studium stu djum studies is usually assumed to be derived from which converts to by gf see for example kloeke for analyses of german gf in various approaches this process is stated as a linear rule in glide formation in a rule based framework in is blocked for certain consonants in context a in the present study i examine words in which a prevocalic is preceded by in a word like bosnien bosni bosnj bosnia whereas other combinations allow the rule to apply freely the goal of this article is to account for why certain sequences of consonants inhibit the process in from applying and why others do not this article presents an optimality theoretic require local conjunctions between the syllable contact law and onset well formedness constraints penalizing specific cj sequences eg lateral nasal obstruent rule based approaches which by definition refer to earlier stages in the derivation the reason the ot approach succeeds is that it employs universal markedness constraints on syllable structure which do not belong to more traditional rule based accounts more significantly my proposed treatment succeeds because it focuses on output representations as opposed to abstract stages which do not surface second within local conjunctions between the syllable contact law and the constraints referring to onset well formedness referred to above it will be demonstrated that the proposed treatment is the only one which accounts for all of the german facts a third theoretical point made below concerns the featural specification of german in particular it will be shown that gf goes into effect after any sequence of two obstruents unless the second of these two obstruents is is blocked it will be proposed that post obstruent in such words is a sonorant and not an obstruent finally i demonstrate that my analysis makes a number of clear typological predictions concerning possible vs impossible blocking contexts which are not made in other models future research will determine whether or not these predictions are correct this article is organized as follows in section i provide some preliminary and how they differ from the ones commonly used in the literature on german phonology in section i discuss the surface complementary distribution of and which motivate the process of gf in and in section i posit a simple ot treatment which accounts for the change from to in terms of the ranking onset cj section consists of three subsections in section i lay out the facts from german illustrating the context in and show that certain inhibit gf whereas others do not in section i present a formal ot analysis of the german data in which i show the necessity of the constraint conjunctions referred to above in section it is shown that a prevocalic does not undergo gf if it is preceded by a cv sequence and it will be argued that these data make sense if in this position is a sonorant and not an obstruent in section i present data from a register i refer to as casual speech analysis thereof in section i make some remarks concerning the typological ramifications of the proposed analysis in section i discuss and reject several alternative analyses of german gf and in section i conclude preliminary remarks on german glides in the literature on german phonology there are said to be three phonetically fricative following moulton kloeke and mangold hall and wiese argue that these three sounds are in complementary distribution in such a way that surfaces in absolute syllable initial position as the second member of an onset cluster or as the consonant an additional reason for collapsing the three types of sounds as in is that even the pronunciation dictionaries cannot agree on how to transcribe simple german words impressionistically german is not pronounced with friction hall wiese and hamann observe that and those that can surface as or as whether or not a word contains an obligatory or an optional glide is both lexically determined and speaker dependent for example native speakers agree that the in union in is pronounced as but in the variety of german described by wiese the word spanien spain surfaces as spa ni or spa nj
income share of focuses on the poorest quintile while the gini coefficient includes information on the entire distribution of income hence we examine both in equality measures along with the percentage of the population living on less than per day as a measure of absolute poverty there are three key inter related findings first financial development reduces income inequality specifically there is a negative relationship between financial development which holds when controlling for real per capita gdp growth lagged values of the gini coefficient a wide array of other country specific factors and when using panel instrumental variable procedures to control for endogeneity and other potential biases second financial development exerts a disproportionately positive impact on the relatively poor financial development boosts the growth rate of the income share impact of financial development on aggregate growth more specifically about the impact of financial development on the income growth of the poorest quintile is the result of reductions in income inequality while the remainder of the impact of financial development on the poor is due to the effect of financial development on aggregate economic growth these results are robust to conditioning on many country traits and when employing a panel instrumental variable to control for potential endogeneity bias third financial development is strongly associated with poverty alleviation greater financial development is associated with faster reductions in the fraction of the population living on less than a day for the median country we find that half of the impact of financial development on this headcount measure of poverty is due to financial development accelerating economic growth and half of the reduction in income inequality due to data limitations however we are unable to use the panel estimator to control for potential endogeneity thus these results on people living on less than a day are subject to more qualifications than our findings that financial development reduces income inequality and disproportionately helps those in the bottom fifth of the distribution of income growth while not without its critics considerable work finds that income inequality hurts growth while capital market imperfections are often at the center of theoretical and empirical explanations of the negative relationship between inequality and growth most researchers have focused on redistributive policies to reduce inequality with positive repercussions for economic as reviewed by aghion caroli and garcia pe alosa some models suggest that public policies that redistribute income from the rich to the poor will alleviate the adverse growth the effects of income inequality and boost aggregate growth though the adverse incentive effects of redistributive policies may temper their growth the effects our paper highlights an alternative policy approach financial sector reforms that reduce market frictions will lower and boost growth without the potential incentive problems associated with redistributive policies our research also relates to work on how capital market imperfections influence child labor and schooling using household data from peru jacoby finds that lack of access to credit perpetuates poverty because poor households reduce their kids education jacoby and skoufias show that households from indian villages without access to credit markets tend to reduce children s schooling when they receive transitory shocks more than households with greater access to financial markets similarly dehejia and gatti find that child labor rates are higher in countries with under developed financial systems while beegle dehejia and gatti show that transitory income shocks lead to greater increases in child labor in countries with poorly functioning financial systems in contrast we show that financial on changes in relative and absolute poverty rates our analyses also contribute to cross country studies dollar and kraay find that in a regression where the dependent variable is income growth of the poor aggregate growth the enters with a coefficient of about one and find that indicators of changes in national institutions and policies including changes in financial development do not explain income growth of the poor beyond their effects on aggregate extend the data six years examine growth of the income share of the poor and allow lagged values of the income share of the poor to influence present values in our analyses financial development boosts the growth rate of the lowest income share thus improving income growth of the poor beyond its effect on aggregate growth in an analysis of income inequality clarke xu and zou study the relationship between financial development and the level of the gini coefficient financial development reduces income inequality in our analyses we allow for potential dynamics in the gini coefficient and show that the level of financial development reduces the growth rate of the gini coefficient even when conditioning on average growth and lagged values of income inequality furthermore distinct from both of these studies we show that financial development is robustly linked with declines in the fraction of the population living on less than summary statistics and econometric methods to conduct our analyses we need measures of financial development income distribution and poverty as well as econometric methods for ascertaining the relationship between finance and the poor this section describes the variables discusses the econometric methods and provides summary statistics and correlations data financial development ameliorates information and transactions costs and facilitates the mobilization and efficient allocation of capital we would like indicators of how well each country s financial system researches firms and identifies profitable projects exerts corporate control facilitates risk management mobilizes savings and eases transactions unfortunately no such measures are available across countries consequently we rely on a commonly used measure of financial development that is to economic growth private credit equals the value of credit by financial intermediaries to the private sector divided by gdp this measure excludes credits issued by the central bank and development banks furthermore it excludes credit to the public sector credit to state owned enterprises and cross claims of one group of intermediaries on another thus private credit captures the amount of credit channeled from savers through financial intermediaries to private private credit is a comparatively comprehensive measure of credit issuing intermediaries since it also includes the
investment in at least one subsequent round of the experiment for every increase of mu in s investment each subject in her group receives by experimental design an additional units therein lies the benefit for others the satisfaction of the benefit condition therefore presupposes a causal link between a s punishing and s subsequent increase in investment which redounds to intend that raise her investment and may be unaware of the causal link between his punishing and s future behavior whether the benefit condition holds depends solely on s subsequent behavior if a punishes and thereby reforms such that does not free ride in subsequent rounds of the experiment then a s punishment transpires to be altruistic but if does not increase her investment having been punished then a s act of punishment experimental results confirm the causal connection between a s punishing and s subsequent behavior when a subject was punished before period the final period that subject raised investment in the next period on average by mus thus the benefit condition is confirmed empirically it is similar with the ultimatum game here punishment consists in the condition because the receiver relinquishes a positive payoff the benefit condition is again fulfilled empirically if the proposer increases his offer in subsequent rounds of the game this is the case a rejection in any given round leads to an average increase in the offer of the next round hence punishment in ultimatum games is altruistic punishment toward another actor the altruism of is independent of a s motives for doing and depends on its consequences for third parties and so on who might not fall into a s motivational purview let us call the person toward whom a is motivated to act the motivational target of the act and let us call the third party who benefits from a s act the beneficiary in fehr s experiments with punishment motivational target and distinct as i show in the following section this distinction allows for acts done from apparently nonaltruistic motives to be classed as altruistic on account of their consequences for others before pursuing the point i consider methodological aspects of experiments in economics and their rationale a critic might remark that experimental situations in which sr is manifested are not sufficiently lifelike to tell us something about behavior in situations in the world outside the laboratory situations in which players anonymity is upheld are examples situations in which encounters are one shot in nature are also cases in point situations in which by experimental design players can never be matched against the same player more than once provide further examples then does fehr engineer such experimental conditions the answer is that he wishes to rule out the possibility that subjects expect some material benefit from their own strongly reciprocal behavior consider for example the condition of one shotness fehr imposes the condition to forestall the view that subjects manifest sr not because they value such behavior for its own sake as fehr holds they do but because they bank on meeting in a public goods game for instance player a could be held to punish others in the hope that their future investments will rise a player a who could meet the same players again would profit therefrom and his desire for this gain could be his motive to punish if this expectation lay behind a s punishment the latter would be self regarding a punishes in the expectation of increasing his own payoff in the future fehr rules this out by excluding the possibility that the meet more than once consider also the anonymity condition which ensures subjects know neither the identity of those they play against nor how they have behaved in previous rounds of the experiment again the condition is not realistic but fehr imposes anonymity to prevent subjects punishing to form a reputation from which they gain in the future a subject in an ultimatum game for instance might reject all offers below early rounds a reputation for being hard on those who propose anything less than a split future opponents of would take s reputation into account when they propose a division of the money and would not dare offer less than half the sum of course profits from these offers and hence in the absence of the anonymity condition has a selfish motive to reject offers in early rounds that sr is nevertheless manifested under the sr is not motivated by self regarding concerns fehr does relax these conditions to ascertain the effect of doing so the ability to form a reputation for instance tends to increase receivers acceptance thresholds in ultimatum games and proposers react by increasing their offers but reputation effects do not alone account for punishment this is clear when subjects are denied the possibility of forming reputations but punish nevertheless this demonstrates advantage of experimental methods they allow researchers to isolate certain causal influences by excluding others isolating phenomena in the laboratory nevertheless has limits this is apparent when one considers the frames that subjects bring into the laboratory how subjects interpret the experimental situation affects their behavior and these interpretations cannot be kept out of the laboratory point for instance the orma a nomadic group in northern kenya participated in public goods experiments without punishment members contributions were high subjects dubbed the experiment the harambee game because of its similarity to an institution of that name in which villagers contribute to public projects critics of fehr claim that this frame vitiates the anonymity and nonrepetition because subjects identify the game with a situation in which such conditions do not apply subjects might therefore be playing the game as if they could acquire a reputation that might be useful to them in the future high rates of contribution to public goods might therefore be based on the self interested expectation that subjects increase their own future reward if they contribute at a high rate looked at differently experimental subjects frames
the output vs ojv which satisfies the scl but in voliv there would be a violation of the scl if gf were to apply ie voliv if the syllable boundary were situated to the left of the obstruent then ccc would be violated in the preceding section in particular these two constraints do not explain why gf applies after a plateau of two obstruents but that it is blocked after a plateau of two nasals for this reason i argue in the remainder of this section that my analysis needs to take onset well formedness into consideration in particular my treatment needs to consider the type of cj onset created by gf cluster consisting of a nonsyllabic segment and the palatal glide my analysis requires that this constraint be decomposed into the specific constraints in whose first member corresponds to the various slots in the sonority hierarchy in i assume the constraints in are ranked universally as in for reasons to be described below five markedness constraints referring to onset well formedness rj sound plus in onset position is disallowed lj lateral plus in onset position is disallowed d nj nasal plus in onset position is disallowed oj obstruent plus in onset position is disallowed a universal ranking of onset well formedness constraints language specific ranking kiparsky and van de vijver posit a general constraint penalizing all cj onsets although none of these linguists makes the fine grained distinction among cj onsets as in the specific onset cj constraints in derive support as sonority based constraints which have the function of penalizing combinations of segments in the onset which are too close together on the sonority hierarchy the constraint gj is therefore ranked ahead of rj because between and is zero but the distance between and is one by the a hall same logic rj outranks lj and lj outranks nj which in turn outranks oj green similarly argues on the basis of data from several languages that the onset well formedness constraint stop nasal ranks ahead of stop liquid because the former has a shallower sonority in the analysis of german presented in section general constraint cj if cj is broken down into the five constraints in then three of them are outranked by onset this ranking can be ascertained by considering the tableaux in above for prinzipiell in which the correct parsing was shown to be cjv as opposed to vc jv this implies that onset outranks oj words like spanien and familie from illustrate that this parsing also holds if the c is a nasal or a lateral therefore onset outranks nj and lj an examination of reveals that gj and rj both outrank onset recall from the discussion after that surface oj onsets are nonoccurring in words like materie matter in a formal treatment has no surface oj onsets i also assume that gj is undominated because there are no surface onsets consisting of two glides eg why does gf apply after an obstruent obstruent plateau but not after a plateau consisting of two nasals the analysis i posit below penalizes output forms which show a bad syllable contact and a nasal onset eg in a sequence like nj by contrast a sequence with a bad syllable onset are allowed to surface that an output form must violate two constraints requires that these two constraints be locally conjoined in particular my treatment requires the local conjunctions in it will be demonstrated below that a form incurs a violation of a conjunction if it violates both of the constraints that are conjoined i argue in section that the contrast between gf in and its blockage in requires that scl nj and scl lj outrank onset which in turn outranks scl oj in section i present evidence that the conjunction scl gj outranks in the literature on constraint conjunctions referred to above the point is repeatedly made that for any conjunction a domain needs to be specified otherwise various unattested long distance effects are predicted the intention behind the conjunctions in is to penalize output forms which have a bad is the first member of the cj onset thus the domain of the conjunctions in is the sequence cj analysis consider now tableaux and which are representative of all voliv and voniv words in note that the analysis correctly selects the candidates with if ccc scl lj and scl nj dominate onset in these tableaux candidates and fatally while candidates and are not harmonic because they violate scl lj and scl nj respectively the reason the constraint conjunctions are violated in the candidates is that the two candidates bip ljo te and bos nj violate both the scl and lj in and the respective inputs contain the vowel an analysis in line with richness of the base should be able to select the correct output given illustrated in tableau in this tableau we can observe that the correct winner in is selected even if one were to assume as the input an anonymous referee suggests that the data presented in section do not crucially require the conjunction between the scl and the onset well formedness constraints in instead the data can be captured equally well if the conjunction involves the scl and the faithfulness constraint max alternative because it fails to select the correct output form in tableau the reason is that the ungrammatical candidate in satisfies the conjunction max scl and is therefore incorrectly selected as the following two tableaux are representative of the examples in and they illustrate that gf applies when is preceded by so or ln nj and oj which are violated by the respective winners but i have omitted scl lj in the respective candidates in are selected because the candidates fatally violate onset note that all of the candidates in satisfy lj and nj consider now an alternative analysis which requires the ranking of the constraints lj nj from applying in and allows gf to apply in the problem with
describes the upper limit for the distribution may provide a better estimate of the true relationship the range of group sizes observed below this level can be interpreted as being due to other contributing social and or environmental factors for fig the upper bound slope provides a much improved fit suggesting that the level of intentionality might only limit the maximum possible clique size rather than determine it discussion the results confirm the core finding of kinderman et al that there is an upper limit intentionality in the study by kinderman et al the proportion of all participants correctly answering a question at a given level of intentionality declined precipitously when questions contained more than five levels of perspective taking in the present study we demonstrate that this result holds for individuals as well as populations the major finding of this study however is that perspective taking competence correlates number of core contacts that an individual can maintain as a coherent social entity clique size was here indexed as the support clique defined by dunbar and spoors as the number of individuals on whose advice and or help one would depend at times of great social or financial trouble the significant correlation between clique size and performance on the mentalising task that there is an association between perspective taking ability and clique size that is independent of performance of memory tasks the fact that there is a distinct upper bound to the observed relationship might be taken to suggest that one s perspective taking ability imposes a limit on the maximum possible clique size that one can maintain rather than actually dictating the typical clique size below this bound a broad range of clique sizes would be expected with observed clique sizes being subject to social demographic lifehistory and other circumstantial factors clique size represents the number of people that an individual will turn to with a personal problem and therefore represents the core social group for that person cliques are embedded within a larger network of about people who form the core of an individual s social world at any given moment these constitute individuals who are contacted at least once a month and with whom stable social relationships are maintained over a period of time our findings suggest that this grouping is much less dependent on perspective taking capacities but instead correlates with memory performance our index of memory performance is a measure of short term memory rather than long term memory moreover in order to clearly from mentalising abilities it focuses deliberately on memory for basic facts about the world rather than social facts since social facts are more likely to be remembered than non social facts this could have important implications nonetheless we imagine that these two forms of memory are likely to be correlated if only because social phenomena themselves necessarily also involve facts about events there are of course well known cognitive the number of pieces of information that can be processed at any one particular time participant performance in memory tasks such as that those used by kinderman et al and in the present study could therefore be affected by cognitive limits on the amount of information that can be held in mind miller suggested that there was a limit of seven plus or minus two items that can be stored in the short term memory however in a subsequent meta analysis henderson suggested that realistically the cognitive limit probably lay at four items a view echoed by cowan who suggested that in short term memory recall there is a limit of four chunks of information plus or minus one baddeley has argued that the cognitive constraint might not be in short term memory as such but rather in the episodic buffer and the central executive the episodic buffer allows for the integration of information from the short and the central executive it is in principle possible that in a perspective taking task the episodic buffer might limit the number of perspectives that can be taken and mentally rotated at any one moment however the lack of any significant relationship between memory capacity and clique size when performance on intentionality tasks is partialled out tends to argue against this possibility in contrast the fact that the size of the primary social network predicted by memory capacity suggests that the ability to retain information about relationships when these are not physically present may be important in managing the wider network of relationships within which individuals are embedded the relationship between the processing capacities of the mind and perspective taking competencies and their consequences clearly merit further investigation what remains unclear at this stage is how perspective taking acts to constrain the size of one s social clique in part the problem itself arises because despite more than a decade of intensive work on the topic we do not really understand what is involved in theory of mind we have a good understanding of its natural history but not its nature the fact that achievable level of intentionality correlates with the size of the social clique is suggest that we urgently need studies that can unpack the cognitive processes involved in intentionality however one possibility is that the limit is set on the innermost circle by the fact that as we have shown here humans can cope only with five orders of intentionality in other words the limit is set by the fact that ego has to hold simultaneously in his her mind the mental perspectives of five that cluster to be coherent and remain so through time it is then possible that the higher layers are emergent small world properties of this inner core of relationships fig distribution of support clique sizes for male and female participants males black bars females white bars fig level of intentionality at which participants failed perspective taking questions ng males black bars females white bars fig proportion of mindreading questions answered correctly plotted against the proportion of memory
for data acquisition gmbh the strain gage measurement system is completely independent and during the tests the axial force from the mts testing system was recorded as an external channel to synchronize the data with the stress strain data triaxial kyowa kfg wire cable strain gages and kyowa kfg was kyowa cc acoustic emission measuring system in addition to the stress strain measurements ae measurements gave direct information on micro cracking the two channel ae measurement system was used for the uniaxial tests it is manufactured by physical acoustics corporation the system included two piezoelectric transducers two khz the ae measurement system is a completely independent system during the tests the axial force from the mts test system was recorded as an external channel to synchronize the ae data with the stress strain data in the system used the data acquisition could be controlled by the following factors the pre amplification level can be changed between and db in the and amplification of the signal a threshold for an event and count detection is set and finally the selected death time assigns the time span for one event ie the first hit from any channel above the threshold value starts the count collection time period for one event after the death time all sensors are ready to detect the next event in all dead time was ms based on selected acquisition control equipment and values the system records the following timing between channels duration sum of counts energy maximum amplitude rise time and three external channel values for each event during the tests the axial force from the mts test system was recorded as an external channel to synchronize the ae data with the stress strain data ae reference source produced by breaking a diameter long pencil lead using a teflon guide ring for an acceptable configuration approximately db maximum amplitude is required this test is generally known as the pen test uniaxial compression tests uniaxial compression tests with specimens of and over a gage length the radial strain was measured with a single circumferential extensometer connected to the roller chain assembly wrapped around the specimen all extensometers were held around the specimen by contact force produced by mounting springs the actuator movement was also measured at the specimen ends nonlubricated steel end caps of the same diameter as the spherical seat in addition to the extensometer measurements strains were also measured by strain gages each specimen was equipped with four triaxial strain gage rosettes the direction of the rosettes was chosen such that one gage measured axial strain the second gage radial strain and the third gage measured strain in direction two rosettes on opposite sites of specimen were on the line of perpendicular all strain gages were at the same distance from the end of the specimen the ae sensor was located on the upper part of the sample and fixed on the specimen with a rubber band an aluminum spacer was used to fit the transducer with a round specimen surface silicone grease couplant shown in fig the uniaxial compression tests were conducted under radial strain rate control corresponding to an elastic axial loading rate of mpa s the isrm suggestion for the uniaxial loading rate is the uniaxial compression tests with a loading rate were conducted according to table the specimen is driven to completed to ensure a well settled sample before loading it to failure in both of these loading steps axial load control was used first to overcome the radial extensometer hysteresis and after that the control was changed to radial strain to ensure a controlled test condition in the post failure phase indirect brazilian tensile tests to the specimen circumferential surface inducing a lateral tension to the specimen the load was applied through two wide flat steel jaws to extend the contact area from the theoretical point contact a thick paper tape was used around the specimen this loading configuration is not however according to the isrm suggestion in which the specimen is loaded between two the modified system used was because it is the standard practice of the test laboratory two strain gage rosettes were mounted on all the brazilian test specimen the orientation of the rosettes was chosen such that one gage measured axial strain in the loading direction and the other measured the strain perpendicular to the loading then the third gage measured after that the tensile test was conducted with constant compressive rate of the actuator movement quality control to assure that all test phases were undertaken on each specimen in the planned order and to make it possible to re analyze possible errors and deviations in the results all the preparation and test phases of each specimen were recorded on a test information form last time was in the end of year when the whole system was remounted after renoval of the laboratory between the calibrations the extensometer readings were regularly checked using a aluminum calibration specimen the reference values for the aluminum specimen were obtained immediately after the extensometer calibration this calibration checking was poisson s ratio both values were determined as a secant from the range of strain to axial stress in this study single axial extensometer was used instead of three averaging axial extensometers which were used in posiva oy s previous rock mechanics tests the calibration values for the single axial extensometers were a little higher than the averaged values of the three axial extensometers until the year the mean value for the young s modulus of the aluminum calibration specimen was and the limits for standard deviation were the associated values for poisson s ratio were and compared to these confidence limits occasional peaks in the young s moduli values exist but no clear reason for these observed peaks exists but one probable reason is related to how accurately the axial and circumferential extensometers can be mounted on the specimen surface so that they are accurately parallel to and perpendicular to the specimen axis
means almost not at all if this is true we can quietly continue our debate in an if not if scientific debate has an influence on the ongoing development of things if we can help with our research then i side with hayden yes the western countries are trying to build a state system that the majority of bosnia s population fundamentally rejects so one can doubt that it will ever work but then i recall that bosnia s main resource to this day is financial help from the west as we know how is exactly what all new members of the european union would like to say but grinding their teeth they have to refrain the european bargain is clear enough wealth and democratic pluralism the bosnians can understand this as other peoples in eastern europe have slobodan naumovic department of ethnology and anthropology faculty of deconstructs western academic and political imagings of bosnia and in so doing throws down the gauntlet in two directions the first is that of a vocal but heterogeneous anthropological camp of antiobjectivists antirealists dogmatic normativists moral militants and occasional propagandists in disguise the second is that of supposedly well intentioned representatives of the international invented tradition of multiculturalism contrary to the wishes of many bosnian citizens hayden s argument against the first camp is that if anthropologists set as their primary goal the confirmation of their own ideological or moral convictions they will most probably supply bad research and worse advice his argument against the second is that if international administrators base be arranged and disregard the traditions interests and intentions of local groups they will most certainly obstruct the reconstruction of war torn regions while both camps may invoke good moral reasons they risk failing in their tasks because their convictions push them straight against the hard surfaces of life the answer is to overcome illusions regional hard surfaces and by practicing geertz s concerned detachment the second by shedding double standards and adopting a realistic balanced and inclusive approach by letting communities re imagine themselves while my experiences with antirationalism antiobjectivism and moral militancy on the one hand and the sheer hypocrisy of some humanitarian interventionists push me towards accepting most of hayden s arguments i must voice two objections the first is aimed at the ways in which hayden supports his theses first for someone who sets out to describe what reality really looks like he is surprisingly silent on what reality is and on how can one know it next i fail to see the reasons apart from literary rhetorical ones look by turning to census data voting patterns intermarriage rates and other data on what people do but it is not clear what by invoking selimovic s metaphor of the cripple jemail a drunkard who was his own executioner or andric s famous passage that starts with bosnia is a country of hatred finally we are left to wonder what an alternative realistic approach to the future of bosnia and herzegovina would actually look like the second objection concerns hayden s mistaken choice moral disapprobation he associates him with an anti boasian breed of anthropologists supposedly arrogant enough to pretend to know that the natives beliefs might be wrong while jansen is indeed a principled antinationalist who critically distances himself from the everyday nationalist knowledge of some of his informants he has also offered penetrating criticism of the systematic practices of antinationalists are prone jansen thus practices exactly what hayden is advocating the conscious effort to keep one s ideals from twisting one s analysis he does so in order to reaffirm the authority of the anthropologist as knowing subject a necessary precondition for principled criticism according to hayden i therefore take both hayden and jansen to be representatives of a relatively the authority of knowledge moral concerns and principled rational criticism the turn promises to strengthen extant antidotes against various forms of contemporary antirationalism moral militancy and fundamentalism if it does not instigate new forms of arrogance of knowledge hayden is right that the real threat to realist strivings is less so are telling them an even greater contemporary menace is the wrath caused by publicly presenting forbidden knowledge evidence that goes contrary to what many wish to believe hayden s reply might very well be that of anyone amongst us anthropologists have no chance but to risk their fates klaus roth insightful article goes against the grain it runs counter to prevailing anthropological and political sentiments and is provocative in a positive sense the example is bosnian multiculturalism but the real point is the foundations of ethnological work taking an article by a colleague as his point of departure hayden asks whether ethnologists should study real realities or base their research on value tolerant multiethnic bosnia is well chosen and has implications for southeast europe should western anthropologists and politicians force peoples into a community they do not want should outsiders impose their moral visions on a deeply divided society which has fought a cruel civil war the western vision of bosnian peaceful multiculturalism and religious tolerance is hayden a lot to do with western ideologies and political wishful thinking indeed bosnian multiculturalism existed more in the eyes of well meaning beholders than in historical reality the premodern multiethnic ottoman empire was based on a complex system of interreligious and interethnic coexistence with strict rules on clearly defined on muslim raya on the segregation of ethnic and religious groups on a complex system of loyalties and strictly regulated neighborhood relations and on a set of social norms and rules attitudes and practices which maintained a fragile balance in other words on a system not suitable for modern societies of modernization and the nationstate both strengthened ethnic and religious affiliations hatreds and nationalisms in a region that was least well suited for the establishment of nation states thus the unregulated ethnic diversity celebrated by the west can hardly be a solution for bosnia particularly as the for modern
to their in terms of its own processes the fsa has moved to a risk based regulatory approach and it emphasizes consultation with the public and industry the fsa consults on many aspects of its operations and it even began consulting on streamlining its own enforcement and decision making manuals in early also it has shifted some of the industry for example in challenging industry to propose a credible solution to conflict of interest issues arising from soft commission and bundled brokerage the fsa considers its work unfinished its business plan for which sets out its priorities for the coming year focuses on the organization s ongoing drive toward more principles based significantly the fsa s move toward a principles based approach is outsourcing or reduced regulation john tiner the fsa s chief executive recently described his organization s principles based approach to include he heightened significance of communication in a principle based system our efforts to rationalize and focus the fsa handbook our enhanced risk based approach and managing down regulatory he argued that principles based regulation produced simply better regulation meaning simultaneously a are secured lower cost and more stimulus to competition and like proponents of the fsa approach proponents of the model argued that its principles based regime could produce both more effective and less costly regulation the model as principles based and outcome oriented bill is principles based relative to other north american securities law in bill would have replaced existing prospectus disclosure rules short form prospectus provisions the entire exempt market transaction structure and existing continuous disclosure obligations with an overarching continuing market access structure continuous market access simply would require all companies accessing the capital markets to disclose all material information as at the fsa each provision is accompanied by nonbinding regulatory guidelines the first two of the seven compliance related provisions which will be discussed later in an example involving dealer firm account supervision state maintain an effective system to ensure compliance with this code all applicable regulatory and other legal requirements and your own internal policies and procedures risks associated with your business that are additional to regulatory risks and design your compliance system to account for those additional risks in support of its approach the bcsc argues that prescriptive requirements emphasize the wrong things that is they encourage firms to focus on detailed compliance rather than to exercise sound judgment with a view to the best interests of their clients and the markets detailed and top down to reflect one size fits all industry practice in a particular point in time by contrast the bcsc argues general obligations subject to industry driven reflection and amendment ensure sustainability in that industry can evolve unhindered by overregulation they also ensure flexibility in that emerging issues that should be regulated are addressed in the general course because market securities regulation when making compliance the bcsc also argues that compliance will increase if rules are fewer easily understood and adequately the second essential component of the model f implicit in its operation but not found on the face of bill an outcome oriented approach and the attendant rolling in of some new learning about compliance and enforcement best industry involvement in developing will be subject is integral to outcome oriented regulation the roots of outcome oriented regulation are with the insights of the reinventing government or new public management movements in public service in broad strokes those approaches advocated a more results oriented approach to public administration including substantial devolution to industry risk based management and transparency and accountability through continual reevaluation on performance one scholar who emerged in response to the reinventing government movement in the united states had a direct impact on the model malcolm sparrow s contribution was to incorporate the new learning processes mutatis mutandis into regulatory his approach illustrates the application of outcome oriented principles to the regulatory task sparrow described how the use sophisticated problem solving methods and self reflective analysis to do the difficult work of pick ing important problems and solv ing them he found that certain common elements characterized the best innovations in regulation a clear focus on results and effectiveness based on an expanded and more specific set of indicators including big picture high level impacts behavioral outcomes and resource efficiency a disciplined problem solving approach and an investment in collaborative partnerships where sparrow was an explicit muse for the bcsc in devising the examples investment dealers account supervision and cartaway in november the bcsc published a useful regulatory impact analysis that compared account supervision systems mandated by the current rule based approach with those of the proposed model and two were regional dealers while account supervision was regulated both under the existing system and the model the firms believed they would change their practices significantly under the according to the bcsc s analysis existing ida account supervision and business risk factors the ida mandated reviews are transactional in nature moreover ida policy requires the daily reviews to assess each trade against nineteen criteria the policy contains many thresholds that define which trades need to be reviewed for example every account with over of commissions in a given month must be reviewed the ida enforced its the firms however did not find the transaction based daily and monthly reviews useful in detecting abuses characterized by patterns of behavior which is where they thought the biggest risks arose front running and stock manipulation for example may be ascertainable only by way of a review of trading patterns which are not readily visible with the transactional focus mandated by the ida s daily and monthly reviews the that the policy derived thresholds governing the daily reviews were both too low and too rigid for example the threshold caught thousands of self directed trades trades in blue chip stocks and other sales transactions that did not carry large risks yet the threshold failed to catch mutual fund trades which do not generate commissions even though very active trading
scores controlling for parity age and education however antenatal attitudes did not remain significant predictors once known intrapartum correlates of operative and instrumental birth were included in the model it was postulated that this relationship was found between the willingness to accept intervention score and experiencing either induction or acceleration of labor however willingness to accept intervention score was a significant predictor of epidural analgesia use and epidural use was strongly related to mode of birth compared with women who did not have an epidural those who did have one had education induction acceleration of labor and antenatal willingness to accept intervention this finding is in keeping with numerous other studies that have shown use of epidural analgesia to be associated with higher rates of instrumental birth although debate continues about the relationship with unplanned cesarean section we must of course be cautious a cause however the strength of our data lies in its prospective design women s attitudes were assessed in late pregnancy so these attitudes clearly predate the events of labor we have shown that these attitudes were a significant predictor of epidural use thus although some epidural use is undoubtedly a response to intrapartum events it cannot be a complete explanation more likely to do so at least in the case of epidural analgesia and instrumental or operative birth this finding may seem predictable but it is intriguing that no such relationship was found within the data one possible interpretation is that the ethos of women s choice that is now espoused in the united kingdom after publication of changing childbirth necessary given these differences between and we must of course be cautious in generalizing the findings to other settings it would indeed be of interest to explore these kinds of relationships in other contexts where the caregivers ethos may be very different another interesting aspect of the data was the persistent significance of parity and age these variables we have subsequently found that the increasing odds of an operative or instrumental birth with increasing age are limited to nulliparous women this relationship was not present in the data these issues will be explored in a subsequent article surprisingly little research has been conducted on women s attitudes to obstetric intervention and even a general desire for quick and easy labors although a high level of agreement with the statements i want to avoid a caesarean section in labor and i want to avoid a forceps or vacuum delivery was also present no data on intrapartum events were presented goldberg et al considered nulliparas antenatal preference for epidurals and demonstrated that as in the present study those reported two further small studies have looked postnatally at the characteristics of women who used epidurals both reporting differences in locus of control compared with women who did not use epidurals we had anticipated that willingness to use an epidural might indeed be a marker for different attitudes toward the process of birth which however as we saw once actual epidural use was included in the model antenatal attitude to epidural use made relatively little contribution to the odds of an operative or instrumental birth conclusions this investigation lends support to anderson s suggestions seem to be a mediating factor especially since it is much more a result of individual choice than other intrapartum interventions on the basis of these data it would appear that having a negative antenatal attitude toward birth interventions has a highly protective effect if health practitioners wish to stem the decline in rates of unassisted vaginal births it may favor epidurals may be unaware of the disadvantages associated with the epidural analgesia use including doubling their odds of an assisted or operative birth greater awareness of these associations may temper women s enthusiasm especially if they have the support and encouragement to pursue other strategies life studies at the university of nebraska medical center and similar studies in the nursing literature were compared regarding family distress to illness scores as reported by long term cancer survivors all studies were cross sectional mail surveys and used city of hope national medical center questionnaires participants represented a broad range of survivorship in terms of diagnosis and length of survival single item scores the item how distressing has your illness been for your family significant levels of patient reported family distress to illness were reported in all studies patient survivors may have been able to recall past levels of significant family distress despite prolonged survival or they may have reported significant ongoing family distress as a result of their disease and treatment longitudinal assessment of patients and families quality of life is future studies should identify and compare the types distress experienced by patient survivors and families over time and also measure the intensity of their distress interventions designed to meet their individual and collective needs thereby decreasing their distress are needed to improve quality of life for survivors and families the past several decades and is considered to be an important clinical outcome in terms of treatment success and quality of life is defined as an individual s perception of their current life and many of the instruments used to measure qol are multidimensional encompassing and emotional and or psychological well being in addition qol more recently qol research has begun to focus on the impact of cancer and treatment on families as well as patients family systems theory provides the necessary background to examine the effect of cancer on a family can be defined as a social unit with shared beliefs history and and within a family each member acts individually have serious impact on the other family therefore the distress experienced by the cancer patient will likely extend to other members of the family as well the patient s and family s adjustment to the disease has been shown to be and also has considerable impact on how the disease is family members often assume responsibility for providing the healthcare team taking on new roles
the errors is that the variance decomposition is not feasible so it is important to important to understand the role of such decomposition for interpretation first consider the case where the specificities are not disentangled in general the interpretation of the factor structures at the two levels does not depend on the decomposition of the specificities and the communalities can be computed as well as in standard factor models the communality is the proportion of the variance of a given response explained by the factors as usual with ordinal the communalities are referred to as the latent responses for example the total communality of the hth item is and the communality of the hth item due to the mth subject level factor is moreover the decomposition of the specificities is not required for the correlation between two latent responses of the same subject at a given level for example the total communality at subject level of the hth item is and the communality at subject level of the hth item due to the mth subject level factor is moreover for a given item the correlation between two distinct subjects belonging to the same cluster is just the icch so it is computable only if the cluster level item specific errors are omitted each scale factor represents the square root of the item total specificity leading to smaller estimable quantities nevertheless the communalities are unaffected by the item scale as they are ratios of parameters within the same item phases of the analysis characterize the development of a complex model moreover fitting the two level factor model for ordinal variables outlined in the previous section is computationally intensive in fact the marginal likelihood involves multiple integrals with respect to gaussian densities that cannot be solved analytically several estimation methods have been proposed such as ml with adaptive gaussian quadrature and bayesian carlo algorithms but other methods can be successfully applied as discussed in the final section the computational burden is heavy so it is crucial to base model selection on suitable exploratory analyses thus limiting the number of fitted models and supplying the algorithms with good starting values univariate two level models as a first step it is advisable to fit a set of univariate ordinal random intercept models one for each item with the following specification in terms of latent responses where are cluster level errors with standard deviation and the probit and s for the logit the estimable parameters are then the thresholds and with the related icch the point estimates and significance of the icch allow one to evaluate if a two level analysis is worthwhile and a comparison of the thresholds among the items should give some hints about possible restrictions to be imposed in the multivariate model useful to estimate the matrix of product moment correlations among the latent responses and to use this matrix to perform an exploratory nonhierarchical factor analysis by means of standard software exploratory between and within factor analyses more specific suggestions for the two level model specification can be obtained from separate exploratory matrices of the latent responses the results of this two stage procedure are expected to be similar to those obtained from the full two level analysis as in the continuous case the decomposition of the latent response correlation matrix into the between and within components can be obtained by means of a multivariate two level ordinal model with unconstrained covariance structure for each item the equation for the latent response is just equation but now the items are jointly modeled with an unconstrained between covariance matrix var and an unconstrained within covariance matrix var specify one or more confirmatory two level ordinal factor models as defined by equation these models can be fitted by means of likelihood or bayesian methods and compared on the basis of appropriate indicators the exploratory two stage factor analysis of step provides fine initial values for the chosen estimation procedure which may allow a substantial gain in computational time note that a large amount of computational time can be saved by omitting the cluster level item so that the variances of the subject errors are in fact the total specificities as illustrated earlier this simplification prevents a full variance decomposition and the computation of the related quantities but it is expected to be of minor importance because the interest of the researcher centers on the factor structure graduates of the university of florence from to years after they obtained their degree the question on job satisfaction was asked to the employed graduates altogether the considered data set includes graduates from degree programs with a highly unbalanced structure the minimum median and maximum number of employed graduates per degree program are and respectively job required a response on a point scale ranging from the five considered items were earnings career consistency professionalism and interests the univariate distributions of the items are reported in table note that the number of responses for each item is different due to item nonresponse the multilevel factor model adopted here allows for missing item values ml estimates are consistent under the usual missing at random assumption the main aim of the analysis is to describe and summarize the aspects of satisfaction measured by the five considered items separately for the graduate and degree the model is quite complex and whichever algorithm is used the fitting process is very time consuming so it is advisable to follow the exploratory steps outlined earlier univariate two level models the analysis begins by fitting the univariate ordinal random intercept models using the logit link for consistency with the confirmatory factor latent responses icch is significantly different from zero for all items as shown by the likelihood ratio test comparing the models with and without random intercept note that when the lrt is testing on the boundary of the parameter space as in this case the limiting distribution of the lrt statistic is not the usual but instead a mixture of a and
selected developing and emerging market economies in the eu all member states except denmark ireland and the uk charge vat on domestic aviation services although and arrival departure taxes it is in many cases unclear to which of these two categories the thus best focused on the sum of the two shown in the rightmost pair of columns per passenger charges are evidently commonplace though the detail varies in some high income countries charges are substantial they are highest in the uk at for first class travellers to destinations outside the eu charges are typically higher for international than for domestic in some emerging market and developing countries charges for international travellers are near the highest levels found in high income countries this differentially heavier taxation of international trips will tend to offset particularly for shorter journeys and at the top end of the rates treatment of international aviation in respect of ticket taxes and aviation fuel clearly though trip taxes will have very different incentive all these instruments it should be noted encounter potential problems of international tax competition to the extent that planes are technically able to do so and to the extent that safety rules allow so high fuel taxes in any country could be avoided by tanking in lower tax jurisdictions even if legal obstacles to explicit fuel taxes were overcome incipient tax competition might thus lead to their being set at inefficiently low levels countries may also fear that a unilateral increase in any of these aviation taxes would jeopardize their attractiveness as a tourist destination collective action in rate setting may then be appropriate key argument in favor of taxing aviation is that it generates adverse environmental externalities creating a case for purely corrective taxation since the concern here is with taxing international aviation it is only border crossing externalities that are at issue purely domestic damage from domestic aviation can in principle be dealt with at least for the most part by countries unilaterally even given the legal obligations described above the emissions from burning aviation fuel are nox carbon monoxide hydrocarbons sulphates and soot aerosols a complicating factor is that some of these emissions such as nox also affect the concentrations of other substances such as ozone and methane through complex chemical processes and while nox increases ozone other aviation emissions reduce it so that the in more populated areas and emissions relative to distance travelled are greater in the vicinity of airports since many more international than domestic flights are long and over sea or deserted land areas international aviation on average involves less air pollution than domestic global warming global carbon emissions but the share is growing on one this figure will rise by to at least and perhaps as much as per cent with absolute effect times that of the value other pollutants emitted by airplanes may also contribute to global warming although the effects and often even their signs are uncertain by airport location and nearby population density noise problems far from airports are small at least for jet flight at km noise pollution is thus essentially local which implies that it can in general be dealt with at country level pollution and congestion at airports pollution at airports includes local and other substances used for clearing or cleaning runways congestion at airports has two components first the air transport system may be congested in runways and airspace second there may be congestion in terminals road and airport transport systems and parking congestion is usually of a peak load character and may be particularly serious when it is difficult to scale up airport size is fully dominant so that internalization cannot generally be presumed again however this is than border crossing matter congestion due to passenger overcrowding at or near airports is also of little relevance to the case for international aviation taxes since it can be corrected by purely domestic means such as road user charges in principle local airport administrations should deal with the externality costs arising at airports by charging such costs to users through fuel consumption and local noise created by airplanes and other congestion related charges most airports do indeed charge substantial fees only the fees in excess of costs of constructing and operating airports however can serve to correct for externalities it is unclear whether these are set at such a level and this may estimates of environmental harm from aviation there have been few attempts to quantify the external damages associated with aviation a careful study by pearce and pearce estimates overall marginal air and noise externalities from aviation in the uk to be about per liter of aviation fuel or about per gallon see table the great bulk of this comes a central estimate for the latter quite widely used of per ton or about us cents per gallon of aviation fuel externalities from aviation may be higher in the uk than elsewhere since incomes and population densities are relatively high and noise pollution is more a matter for local and national policy as noted above than for international on the other hand the pearce and pearce estimates exclude the cost of some air pollution compounds in the discussion below we therefore focus for brevity on three illustrative values of marginal environmental damage per gallon as a plausible estimate for higher income countries and particularly within europe per gallon effectively valuing only carbon emissions and zero which must be a lower bound fuel inputs and ticket taxes on final consumption that enables a basic analysis and later simulation of optimal indirect taxes on aviation no cross border damage for clarity we start with the case in which environmental damage does not cross borders and in which there is no international mobility of the tax base this means that the optimal policy of each country can be examined in isolation travelled by this is taxed at a specific rate of the market is assumed to be perfectly competitive so that this
of was replaced in by the vmp of it was shown however that although the cu surface exhibits a wide band gap around the fermi level and a well defined shockley surface state the energy loss expected from this model does not differ significantly from its jellium counterpart this is due to the fact that the presence of the surface state compensates the reduction of the energy loss due to the band gap existing first principles calculations of the interaction of charged particles with solids invoke periodicity of the solid in all directions and neglect therefore surface effects and in particular the excitation of surfaces plasmons an exception is a recent first principles calculation of the energy loss of ions moving parallel with a mg surface which accounts naturally for the finite width of the surface plasmon resonance that is present neither in the self consistent jellium calculations of nor in the model calculations which charged particles can be approximately assumed to move along a trajectory that is parallel to a solid surface occurs in the glancing incidence geometry where ions penetrate into the solid they skim the outermost layer of the solid and are then specularly repelled by a repulsive screened coulomb potential as discussed by gemell by first calculating the ion trajectory under the combined influence of the repulsive planar potential and the attractive image potential the total the total energy loss can be obtained approximately as follows x and z denoting the turning point and the value of the component of the velocity normal to the surface respectively which both depend on the angle of incidence accurate measurements of the energy loss of ions being reflected from a variety of solid surfaces at grazing incidence have been reported by several authors in particular winter et al carried out measurements of the energy loss of protons being from al from the analysis of their data at kev these authors deduced the energy loss de dx and found that at large distances from the surface the energy loss follows closely the energy loss expected from the excitation of surface plasmons later on rpa jellium calculations of the energy loss from the excitation of valence electrons were combined with a first born calculation of the energy loss due to the excitation of the inner shells and reasonably the experimental data was obtained for all angles of incidence normal trajectory let us now consider a situation in which the probe particle moves along a normal trajectory from the vacuum side of the surface and enters the solid at the position of the projectile relative to the surface is then vt assuming that the electron gas at can be described by the drude dielectric function of equation and introducing equation into equation yields where with being given by the following expression equation shows that when the probe particle is moving outside the solid the effect of the boundary is to cause energy loss at the surface plasmon energy ss and when the probe particle is moving inside the solid the effect of the boundary is to cause both a decrease in loss at the bulk plasmon energy sp and an additional loss at the surface plasmon energy ss as predicted by ritchie now we consider the real situation in which a fast charged particle passes through a finite foil of thickness a assuming that the foil is thick enough for the effect of each boundary to be the same as in the case of a semi infinite medium and integrating along the whole trajectory from minus to plus infinity one finds the total energy that the probe particle loses to collective excitations him to the realization that surface collective excitations exist at the lowered frequency ss the first term of equation which is proportional to the thickness of the film represents the bulk contribution which would also be present in the absence of the boundaries the second and third terms which are both due to the presence of the boundaries and become more important as the foil thickness decreases represent the decrease in the energy loss at the plasma frequency the energy loss at the lowered frequency ss respectively equation also shows that the net boundary effect is an increase in the total energy loss above the value which would exist in its absence as noted by ritchie amore accurate jellium self consistent description of the energy loss of charged particles passing through thin foils has been performed recently in the rpa and alda stem valence eels mie plasmons on small particles has attracted great interest over the years in the fields of scanning transmission electron microscopy and near field optical spectroscopy eels of fast electrons in stem shows two types of losses depending on the nature of the excitations that are produced in the sample atomically defined core electron excitations at energies s ev and valence electron excitations at energies up occur when the probe moves across the target and provide chemical information about atomic size regions of the target conversely valence electron excitations provide information about the surface structure with a resolution of the order of several nanometers one advantage of valence eels is that it provides a strong signal even for non penetrating trajectories and generates less specimen damage the central quantity in the interpretation of valence eels experiments is the total probability for the stem beam to exchange energy s with the sample in terms of the screened interaction and for a probe electron in the state with the energy first order perturbation theory yields where the sum is extended over a complete set of final states pf of energy for probe the form of equation with no beam recoil the total energy loss of equations and can be expressed in the expected form ritchie and howie showed that in eels experiments where all the inelastic scattering is collected treating the fast electrons as a classical charge of the form of equation is indeed adequate nonetheless quantal effects due to
issue on new product launch published by the journal of product innovation strategic and tactical launch decisions and their effects on performance later studies expanded on this literature base to investigate related issues such as the role of logistics and supply chain relationships in successful launch differences in competitive reactions the moderating role of product innovativeness and the role of market orientation most of the empirical and conceptual studies of product launch in table i distinguish two groups of launch decisions strategic and tactical launch decisions leader vs follower decisions and decisions on relative innovativeness launch management is often ignored in the handoff of products between the team developing the commercial entity managers despite much literature showing benefits of speed to market and early entry advantage many firms do not develop pragmatic heavily monitored and flexible launch programs in this article we focus on a narrow perspective of the launch management process pricing and its relationship to overall launch management in order to dredge up patterns of good and of the management dilemma falling prices generally stimulate demand and drive the volume cost decreases that most new product programs depend on to realize and capitalize on the advantages of early market entry yet falling prices reduce revenues and margins for all concerned in the new product commercial enterprise unless costs fall even faster the payoff to better product launch programs better the established marketing literature is quite clear about the need to coordinate pricing decisions with all other elements of the marketing mix a firm may choose to set a premium price on its product in order to skim the market or to establish the product as a quality leader in each case the product quality the higher price so that it is justified similarly if production and distribution costs can be contained a penetration price strategy would be effective in addition managers must take cost volume profit considerations into account when making the skim vs penetration price decision see also guiltinan the price strategy made in coordination with the rest of the marketing mix is essential some academic research has recently focused on the interactions among the various activities conducted at the time of the launch stage in this study we examine the interactions support organizations throughout the distribution channel as well as the effect of industry structure and environment despite the evidence of the need to coordinate price with other marketing mix elements managers still will make faulty pricing decisions focusing only on the revenues generated by high prices a skimming strategy is most effective where the product is perceived to have a relative competitive advantage penetration pricing may be appropriate in situations where the manufacturer can reduce production and distribution costs sufficiently and capture a price leadership position or if low price is needed to overcome adoption barriers and speed diffusion skimming and penetration pricing are both sound strategies the choice between them at the time of launch as barriers to adoption may exist the new product is incompatible with the buyer s experiences or values is perceived to be overly complex or offers no relative advantage a price discount rewards the buyer for bearing the risk of trial furthermore the pricing decision is not restricted to the skim cost volume profit relationships to determine the net profit impact of reducing price and stimulating demand firm resources skills and npd activities many empirical studies demonstrated that for new products adequate marketing and to new product success were marketing and technical synergies and proficiencies this research stream also investigated the effects of carrying out specific activities related to the marketing and launch of new products including customer selection in use testing with customers test marketing finalizing marketing and manufacturing plans sales force training and executing advertising and distribution the specific marketing and launch activities for npd projects and that better performance of marketing and launch activities were tied to ultimate success work group structure cross functional team activity is important throughout the new product development process firms that actively gupta et al griffin griffin and hauser towner song and dyer song and parry if cross functional teams have significant input in manufacturing distribution logistics or marketing and sales strategy the ultimate success of the launch should be positively influenced in terms of both higher quality products and speedier development interdepartmental committees task forces and other temporary groups and liaison personnel specifically assigned to interdepartmental coordination are all mechanisms that have been successfully employed in increasing cross functionality whenever necessary this requires excellent integration of the logistics function with marketing manufacturing and operations the likelihood of successful product launch should increase if the logistics strategy seeks to become more efficient in terms of logistics facilities number of suppliers and number of products and stock keeping units and if lean launch quick response bowersox et al market orientation the firm s market orientation should also have an impact on its execution of launch tactics and on ultimate performance market orientation has been defined as organization wide generation and dissemination of market information on customer needs and wants and organizational response to this information a launch activities the firm will conduct more frequent meetings with customers hold more interdepartmental meetings to discuss market trends periodically check new product development against changing customer needs take quicker corrective action to satisfy customers and so on launch timing there are switchout costs due to learning of new systems or technology on the part of buyers empirical research suggests a close relationship between product performance delivered customer value launch timing and success rate the appropriateness of launch timing can be assessed on industry structure and environment managers must consider industry structure and environment when planning a product launch strategy the intensity of the competition bargaining power of suppliers and customers threat of product substitution and entry exit barriers all affect firm performance uncertainties in the market environment can arise relatively unpredictable leading to high uncertainty these sources of uncertainty must be taken into account when developing launch
of data units in relation to the base unit soas the form in which they were spatially represented and the underlying distribution of the data shape in deciding how to assign data values to soas one consideration was the scale at which the data exist where soas nested within larger units the data values for those units needed to be somehow disaggregated to soa level this situation arose for example when we had a data value for an administrative ward in which an soa was wholly situated or when we knew the number of bird species for a grid square that completely enclosed an soa however where collection units were smaller data needed to be aggregated together in computing soa values in either case where unit boundaries were not coterminous with soa boundaries it was necessary to decide on the most appropriate means for allocating data values to each soa this in turn depended on the underlying distribution of the data while data collected at soa level are represented by polygons in a gis other data exist are spatially represented as points while roads and rivers are vectors or lines many environmental datasets on numbers of plant or animal species for example use grid squares as their base units while other data such as topography and some aspects of weather are spatially represented as surfaces interpolated from points the creation of some variables for the secra dataset demanded the combination of data with a variety of spatial representations the calculation of travel times to by various transport modes for example required the use of soa polygons service location points and road network vectors the fact that socio economic data are most often represented spatially as polygons and many kinds of environmental data are collected on square grids has been cited as a reason for their incompatibility however we argue here that the shape of the data unit a polygon or a grid square has little bearing on the problem of integrating the data values to soa level a more intransigent obstacle to the integration of social and natural science data is the difficulty of assigning values to an soa when the data units which it intersects whether squares or polygons have different values distribution of data the problem is how to achieve an appropriate combination of values from the data units together with a substantive understanding of what the data represent that dictate the most appropriate method for deriving soa values the distribution of values for some variables can sensibly be assumed to be uniform at the scale of soas in our study these included for example the party political control of the local authority subsuming an soa designation as a nitrate sensitive area or the number of hours of sunshine each year in many cases however such an assumption was appropriate land cover and land use categories for example vary irregularly within soas a major group of variables that also exhibit patchy distributions are those related to human or animal settlement patterns such as voter or foraging behavior respectively a third type of distribution occurs when data values vary continuously across an soa for example air or water pollution in summary the ways in which data vary in their collection and spatial representation underlying distributions had to be taken into account in making choices about the techniques employed to integrate them into a single dataset however as we shall see the relative importance of these considerations depended on the data in question as much as on whether the data stemmed from the natural or social sciences there is probably as much variation in the nature of data within disciplines as between them in the following sections we give four example cases each of a different approach to data integration case bird species richness data on the numbers of bird species present in england are captured by species counts over a km square grid the grid squares are larger than most soas and have boundaries that intersect the polygonal soa boundaries the bird species count data were assigned to soas using area weighted a key assumption made here was that species counts vary continuously across each grid square this is a since it is known that habitat variation within km grid squares can affect the use of these squares by bird species gillings et al also showed that some farmland bird species may move between km squares depending on the distribution of key habitats however there are few data on the spatial mobility of individuals of many bird species at the landscape scale and there is also an absence of at a high resolution on which to base any disaggregation of the grid attributes to a finer resolution fig shows maps of bird species numbers at the original km grid square level and integrated to soa level the distributional pattern appears similar on both maps showing high species counts in the same broad localities in order to assess how much accuracy was lost in converting the the soa results to produce a table of paired points the calculated values and the original values were highly correlated when numbers of bird species were transformed into groups of a similarly high linear correlation was found between the areas of land on each map with the same numbers of species the integration of gridded bird count data onto soas has successfully replicated values in the same places and has conserved the representation of areas attributed to each value intersection between boundaries of rural soas and grid squares generated a new file giving the percentage of each grid square in different soas for example one grid square may intersect with two rural soas the grid area lying in one soa and the remainder in the other using this area percentage as a weighting allows the attributes of the grids to be combined to assign a value to each soa fig at grid square level and soa level source huby owen and cinderby based
been surprising that a natural disaster and a terrorist attack would be considered part of the same problematic and the image three weeks after katrina struck of george bush flying to the headquarters of us northcom a military installation designed for use in national security crises to follow the progress of hurricane rita as it hurtled toward texas might have been even more perplexing the aftermath of katrina also pointed forward to other possible emergencies such as a novel and deadly infectious disease in announcing its billion pandemic preparedness program the following month the bush administration declared avian flu an urgent matter of national this grouping of types of possible catastrophe under a shared rubric of security threats is exemplary of the rationality of preparedness preparedness marks out a limited but agreed upon terrain for the management of collective life its techniques focus on a certain set of possible events operating to bring them into the present as potential future catastrophes that point to current vulnerabilities the probabilistic future insurance preparedness can be usefully contrasted with another form of security rationality insurance as francois ewald points out insurance is an abstract technology that can take concrete form in a variety of institutions including mutual associations private insurance firms and state based social welfare agencies it is a means of distributing risk here the term risk does not refer to a danger or peril ewald specifies but rather to a specific mode of treatment of certain events of happening to a group of this treatment involves first tracking the occurrence of such events over time across a population and second applying probabilistic techniques to gauge the likelihood of a given event occurring over a given period of time insurance is thus a way of reordering reality what had been exceptional events that disrupted the normal order become predictable occurrences transforms them into manageable risks the events that insurance typically takes up are dangers of relatively limited scope and statistically regular occurrence illness injury accident and fire when taken individually such events may appear as contingent misfortunes but when their occurrence is plotted over a population they show a normal rate of incidence knowledge of this rate gained through carefully plotted actuarial tables makes it possible to rationally distribute risk insurance removes accidents and other misfortunes from a moral legal domain of personal responsibility and places them in a technical frame of calculability as an abstract technology insurance can be linked to diverse political objectives beginning in the nineteenth century insurance was harnessed to a politics of solidarity in the development of state based social welfare programs what can be called population security population security aims to foster the health being of human beings understood as members of a national population it works to collectivize individual risk of illness accident or infirmity paul rabinow describes the distinctiveness of this approach to future threats a security apparatus takes up the problem of how to manage an indefinite series of elements that are in motion this motion is understood within a logic of probable through calculation of the rates of such events across populations over population security seeks regularities such as birth and death rates illness prevalence and the occurrence of accidents planners can then target intervention into the social milieu that will improve collective well examples of population security mechanisms include mass vaccination urban water and sewage systems guaranteed pensions and health and safety regulations as analysts of the european welfare state have argued this social form of security was based on the technical rationality would be increasingly capable of managing collective by the mid twentieth century such risk management had taken on a relatively stable form in the west in the various forms of collective security provision associated with the welfare state developments in science and technology such as food production or industrial hazard mitigation promised to further improve and stabilize the health and well being century however this stability began to break down and many of the population security mechanisms associated with social welfare either were dispersed outside of the state or were allowed to fall into disrepair meanwhile another challenge to the capacity of insurance mechanisms to provide adequate security came from the emergence of novel threats a series in some cases these new vulnerabilities were generated by the extent power and uncontrollability of the life supporting systems that had been developed in the context of population security these new hazards were characterized by their unpredictability and by their catastrophic potential the limits of insurance precaution ulrich beck contrasts the optimism associated with the development of the european calculation with current perceptions of these new forms of vulnerability the speeding up of modernization has produced a gulf between the world of quantifiable risk in which we think and act and the world of nonquantifiable insecurities that we are according to beck society has entered a condition of reflexive modernity in which the very industrial and technical developments that were initially put in the service of guaranteeing threats our very dependence on critical infrastructures systems of transportation communications energy and so on has become a source of vulnerability his examples include ecological catastrophes such as bhopal and chernobyl global financial crises and mass casualty terrorist attacks such hazards can cause global irreparable damage and their effects may be of unlimited duration these dangers shape a perception that uncontrollable risk is now irredeemable and into all the processes that sustain life in advanced they outstrip our ability to calculate their probability or to insure ourselves against them according to beck the noninsurability of these megahazards is exemplary of a new social world in which technical expertise cannot calculate and manage the risks it building on beck s analysis ewald suggests that this new sense of vulnerability under conditions of uncertainty from the european vantage environmental and health hazards such as global warming mad cow disease and genetically modified food indicate that technical expertise has lost its certain grasp on the future these are
of the law by the state xu notes that while in china there has been considerable progress in creating organizational structures and passing relevant laws the development of respect for law and belief in the consistent and stable enforcement of the law have not been achieved a comparison with the europe illustrates that educating a law abiding citizen was a long process with the fall of the roman empire famous for its developed legal system respect for the law disappeared making the early middle ages a chaotic period respect for the legal system however revived slowly from the thirteenth century onward an important role in this was played by european universities where scholars began studying roman law after years of teaching and examining roman law and educating jurists people began to understand the rule of law and to accept it as the development how then to create an efficient legal system in china and make people believe in the stability and enforcement of laws xu argues that beliefs do not derive from habit or morality but rather that the establishment of viable property rights characteristic of a market economy depends on the popular belief in the state s precommitment to a credible respect of the property rights itself xu emphasizes the role that state assets stripping in china has eroded an already weak legal system worsened the problem of legal uncertainty and delayed the construction of a genuine property rights structure referring to north he argues that the reform must concern political social economic and legal structures and must cover the property rights structure the role of the state and ideological beliefs the sixth problem is the wrong target of criticism by the property their unreserved belief in rent seeking theory and their assumptions that public ownership leads to the tragedy of the commons for example xie parsa and redding write that the continued dominance of administrative land allocation in the dual track of land supply has fostered the black market and recommend restricting the use of the administrative allocation of land because it will help to eradicate the black market for land the mistake in this reasoning that the reason for the black market in which land users transfer their administratively allocated land to other users is not the administrative allocation but the misuse of the system the tragic experience of socialism described for example by an eastern european satirist and nobel prize winner czeslaw milosz for whom the lesson of the years of socialism was resistance against stupidity can make the popularity of these assumptions understandable an uncontested basis for policy recommendations public landownership has no causal powers and eradicating it should be done only after careful consideration phy transport geography and new european realities a critique derek hall visiting professor hamk university of applied sciences mustiala and forssa finland critical observations on the sub discipline from the past two decades and endeavors to illustrate how the engagement of transport geography belies at least some criticisms arguing that both positivist and new mobilities approaches have validity in a transport geography research agenda the paper goes onto exemplify this through brief discussions of areas where transport geography could gain a higher profile and where clear mutual benefit would result from greater engagement notably at the interface between transport and tourism focusing on mobilities in post transition central and eastern europe and climate change issues finally conclusions are drawn and suggestions are made to inform a transport geography research agenda introduction if transport geography is the study of the spatial aspects of sub discipline for the current author transport geography should not be thought of as being confined to spatiality whether real or imagined actual or virtual but should embrace and accommodate theories and methodologies from other social and physical sciences that can better assist our holistic understanding of the nature and impacts of transport and communication processes and the mobilities spatial social and an inter disciplinary framework and while the above interpretation of what transport geography is or should be may strike some transport geographers as nihilistic and or too all embracing at its core remains the belief that geography s role is as an integrating synthesizing facilitator of holistic understanding that often works best when in an inter disciplinary context its profile as a distinctive have always been porous with discipline fragmentation and re grouping and with issue rather than discipline led research the constantly changing interdigitations between and within disciplines render concepts of bounding redundant at best there are cores and overlapping even nested peripheries while a the journal of transport geography does mostly what it geographically transport and obversely those wishing to publish english language research at the nexus between transport and geography would not wish to necessarily restrict their output to one journal no journal can be co terminus with a sub discipline however defined nor should it be yet clearly for some sub disciplines in some cultures there may well be a natural re evaluated cores of such a sub discipline this may well reflect the quality and prestige both of the journal and the sub discipline the main aim of this paper is to offer a brief evaluation of recent transport geography research and publication that is both analytical and polemical first it examines under five headings critical observations on the sub discipline from the past two decades and it and especially more recently belies at least some of the previous criticisms second arguing that both positivist and new mobilities approaches have validity in a transport geography research agenda the paper goes onto exemplify this through brief discussions of areas where transport geography could gain a higher profile and where clear mutual benefit would result from greater engagement the choice of topics for this section is consciously author s own general research interests at the interface between transport and tourism and specifically focusing on mobilities in post transition central and eastern europe and climate change issues third conclusions are drawn and in the
there are no why this influence should be important in fact the life cycle of the airline industry may very well account for the changes in airline travel which we often link to globalization it could be that the changes which we attribute to globalization could just as easily be explained within the conceptual framework of the product or industry life cycle the product being the commercial jet airplane there is no reason to believe that globalization should have any particular influence on the importance of on the validity of the industry life cycle model or on our hypotheses as presented in earlier sections of this paper concluding remarks in this paper we have attempted to verify the applicability of the theory of the product or of statistics were used to construct time series of the number of hotels output and price the data were then confronted with the stylized facts of the industry life cycle we found that the theory could well explain the evolution of the swiss hotel industry we were able to verify this for the evolution of the number of firms as well as the output we produced only very limited evidence concerning innovative activities it would appear from this evidence that innovation occurs life of a product but the most important and radical innovations occur earlier rather than later whereas the findings have gone some way in shedding light on the applicability of life cycle analysis in the hotel industry some questions remain unanswered these may be the object of further research first there is the question of industry concentration and what we should be measuring industry concentration may in fact be greater than we measure using this unit although most hotels are independently owned and operated many are also jointly owned some even belonging to industry conglomerates the accor group for example operates hotels in switzerland franchises and marketing based co operations are further examples of concentration the golden tulip chain today operates hotels and best western hotels the real competitive picture then may well be from the one we get by looking only at the number of establishments based on figures available from the swiss hotel over swiss hotels are members of groups active in switzerland these include integrated groups franchising and marketing co operations getting detailed historic information about ownership and partnerships within the hotel industry would however be very difficult if not impossible on a national basis sales and prices further research needs to be done in order to establish time series on the sales within the industry as well as the average room prices in order to make a meaningful full life cycle analysis these data must extend back to at least a third possible avenue of research is exit risk with respect to the age of the firm quantifying exit risk over the life cycle of the hotel industry requires detailed data of the number as their age at exit we did not locate such data for all of switzerland it should however be possible to conduct a meaningful survey in order to estimate the risk this survey could also be used to get more detailed information about innovative activities over the life cycle of the hotel industry finally we wish to make a comment concerning the scale which one uses to examine the life cycle there has been some argument among scholars as to what scale can to examine an industry this is perhaps more important in a service industry than in manufacturing we have simply used the nation as a scale for our analysis we could have alternatively used the resort or city this would be in line with the tourist area life cycle model we could also have used some form of industry cluster in the case where a country is sufficiently large that there are clearly identifiable and individual resorts or clusters which are have different life cycles then the scale used could be the resort or cluster switzerland being a small country with a fairly uniform product to offer the tourist we believe that using a different scale would not change our results very much in addition to this we would contend that the industry life cycle model seeks to explain something entirely different than does the tourist are life cycle model the tourism resort is in fact made up of a number of different industries within a distinct evolutionary industry life cycle and competitive environment building bali hai tourism and the creation of place in tahiti elaine haldeman davis abstract thatched hut resorts today play a significant role in creating a sense of place within a given against this background the aim of this paper is to examine how such resorts define place for tourists construct myths of authenticity and simultaneously create the sense of familiarity and difference the method employed to this end combines examination of resort design and analysis of promotional material the paper starts by discussing perspectives in tourism and postcolonial theories followed by an outline of the thatched hut typology in resort design and its relationship to then moves to the tahiti as a specific example the analysis demonstrates how the resorts have become symbols of authenticity or authenticity constructed as place it is argued that the image of tahiti as primitive yet tamed paradise is perpetuated today by those in the tourism industry as well as by many of the theorist that critique the myths but myths are not all encompassing nor do they necessarily mask an authentic truth commented on one american city the trouble with oakland is that once you get there there is nt any there there stein s famous remark may be mocking a particular place but it seems appropriate for a discussion related to placeness as it is designed for the tourist place is given value to human beings through a belief in the existence and importance of a given location compared to another it is also given significance based upon a set of
time and looking for work but not currently looking for work retired on permanent disability homemakers and students the median reported monthly household income was with an evenly distributed range between less than and over per month adaptation to disability as measured with the ladder of adjustment scale was moderately correlated with overall qol as measured using both the delighted terrible scale and the mean of the domain satisfaction ratings as hypothesized perceived impact was negatively correlated with overall qol domain satisfaction and domain control in addition both perceived control and qol mediation analysis to test the mediating role of domain satisfaction between domain impact and overall qol domain satisfaction was first regressed on domain impact this relationship was significant second qol was regressed on impact this relationship was also significant third qol was regressed on and qol was significant further indicating the mediating role of satisfaction in the relationship between impact and qol to test the mediating role of domain control between domain significant and the previously significant relationship between impact and qol was no longer significant the sobel test for this mediation model was significant control in the relationship between impact and qol the multiple regression analyses conducted to assess mediation are presented in table moderation analysis the test of the proposed moderating role of importance in the relationship between domain satisfaction and overall qol was conducted using a two step multiple regression analysis in step one domain satisfaction and domain importance term representing the product of the two main effects was entered into the equation with the main effects the hypothesized moderating effect of importance was supported by the significant path from the interaction term to overall qol and by the significant change in when the interaction term entered the regression equation the results of this analysis are presented in the relationships proposed within the disability centrality model including the mediating roles of satisfaction and perceived control between the impact of ms and qol and the hypothesized moderating role of domain importance between domain satisfaction and overall qol a statistically significant positive correlation was found between on the ladder of adjustment scale and both an existing measure of overall qol and qol when represented as an aggregate of satisfaction across domains these results support the contention that overall qol represents an appropriate measure of psychosocial adaptation by the present findings clinical implications it has frequently been suggested that psychosocial adaptation or the individual s adaptive response to living with chronic illness is a critical factor in the success of the rehabilitation process the correlation between qol and psychosocial adaptation found in this and previous research qol assessment such as was used in the present study can provide a valid and useful method of assessing psychosocial adaptation such an assessment can provide a clear picture of the client s experience across important life domains and a means of prioritizing rehabilitation interventions the present study also suggests that such an assessment is improved with the inclusion of a role of perceived satisfaction and control suggest two specific routes of clinical intervention that may result in increased client qol the first is interventions that enhance perceived control several forms of intervention have been proposed in this area and found to be effective these include client education about the illness and its treatment helping the client to develop self management increased control over his or her environment and teaching time management and problem solving skills the evidence of a correlation between self management and the broader concept of multidimensional control also has significant clinical implications it may suggest that engaging in self management a number of domains of course because a causal relationship cannot be assumed longitudinal assessment of this relationship is necessary the second route amenable to clinical intervention involves assisting the client to expand his or her perspective about the the counselor can educate the client about alternative ways of achieving satisfaction in the same domain by learning new ways of participating alternately the counselor may assist the individual to explore new interests new social outlets and new ways of engaging life such that clients learn to find satisfaction in previously peripheral domains demographically restricted with only a small proportion of respondents from racial or ethnic minority backgrounds the response rate was also relatively low internal validity was threatened by the operationalization of the variables in the study quality of life satisfaction control and impact are all broad constructs that may be assessed by numerous other means rehabilitation goal the model assessed in this study provides a potentially useful approach to improved understanding and clinical intervention although further research with the model is clearly needed the results of this study provide a number of directions for clinical intervention and particularly highlight the importance of self management knowledge and behaviors in psychosocial well being provides a rather mechanistic and mathematical view of what is in reality a much messier and more complicated reality the idea for example that high satisfaction in a highly central domain may by extension of the theories behind this model negate dissatisfaction in two domains that are half as important appears to suggest that complex experiences to assess such concepts as satisfaction and importance are not well aligned with the sort of highly fluid and complex weighting that occurs in the human mind however despite its simplistic and analytical nature so apparently incongruous with reality the ideas underlying the model do appear to have basis in the machinations of adaptive cognitions and behavior there is evidence from the present and more important domains does indeed have a stronger relationship with overall qol than satisfaction in less important domains there is evidence from research with this model as well as with the illness intrusiveness model that the impact of chronic illness on one s qol is mediated through indirect mechanisms by reducing domain based satisfaction and one s sense of control over reducing this impact and because this for enhanced understanding and for preventive and curative interventions further
it is then difficult to counter children children if one does not agree with their response at times the richardson children try to counter or negotiate with their mother who rarely even gives them choices with regards to cleaning and who has an entirely different approach from her husband of getting her children to accomplish tasks because they have been socialized into negotiation and debate by their father the richardson children attempt the same discourse strategies with their mother mother is faithful to her approach however and does not allow for much negotiation in her interactions with her children mother s repetition and escalation of directives during the moments her children attempt to negotiate results in relatively shorter activity trajectories yet while the richardson mother uses directives and does not give her children many choices she does expect them to take care of themselves and their morning duties therefore giving no options is not necessarily in opposition to offering autonomy again two socialization goals can be met within one interaction or activity in families where the content and order of children s activities are under stronger parental supervision it is common for children to go and ask a parent for direction as illustrated in the next excerpt where andrea stops in the kitchen to ask mother about getting dressed on his way to the bathroom example the very next activity namely washing in a repair form andrea tries to have his mother understand that he is in fact doing things in the right sequence but that it would be better if he also had his clothes in the bathroom with him in line mother says that she will take care of the clothes and bring them to him and then reiterates her instruction such a brief and condensed exchange using the lengthy ones seen above clearly illustrates that parents can exert much control over children s duties and self governing actions be present at every punctuation of the flow of activities and keep cognitive as well as practical control on the what how and when of task execution conclusion silent assistance and parental control all of these components may be performed in various ways not only giving different meanings to the activities and practices but also contributing to the moral understandings of the family as well specifically while parents attend to their children s cleaning practices they adopt modes of behavior that either emphasize children s agency thus downplaying the parental role in the accomplishment of actions or involvement in execution and outcome to the extent of restraining their children s decisional sphere and individual responsibility the modes of behavior are somewhat different when seen in the area of personal hygiene in comparison to household cleaning and tidying as for the latter preoccupation with proper accomplishment can go from serious to virtually none as demonstrated in the bed making sequences more often visible have children take on responsibility for their own spaces as soon as possible and encourage children to do chores by downplaying tasks difficulties and constructing them as competent performers parents are seen to sustain children s effort with positive assessments sometimes regardless of the results and monitoring and control and even sheer presence during the task accomplishment are often absent while conveying a one s own property such an approach does not develop a detailed technicality nor an attachment to the material objects or environment involved in the process scenes from the roman recordings show with greater frequency higher parental investment of attention to and preoccupation with household cleaning tasks involving their children s belongings more discussions of tasks specific characteristics and difficulties children observing parents clean and tidy the home and verbal mentioning or hinting at parental sacrifice and responsibility when cleaning duties are approached in this way a stronger interdependence is built both among family members and also between family members and their physical objects and environments children s spaces see a more frequent and significant presence of parents the cleaning or tidying processes are presented as complex and in need of expertise and children are to perform them the ethics of the socialization domain does not seem to request the hiding of parental involvement but on the contrary provides space for displays of family bonds as instantiated in help and efficient control regarding personal hygiene parental monitoring and care for results is consistently high no signs of carelessness have been found in this area in any through differences in interactional patterns and bodily dispositions overall parents tend to stay physically closer to the child instead of leaving the scene especially with small children parents inspect processes and results more often and are in general more attentive during hygiene tasks yet even when children need step by step instructions as shown in example where isaiah brushes his teeth the scaffolding can be fashioned in such parental engagement and to structure moments wherein children can perform autonomously limiting verbal explicitness of parental action and establishing an interactional rhythm that allows for children to proceed at their own pace are the apt practical strategies to such outcomes mitigation of directives is consistent within this set of options parents however can be less concerned about a tactful attitude toward children s both their co participation and their control during hygiene tasks as seen in the ripe stink example additionally the resulting psychological space is different the body space is more public and there seems to be an easy switch from ordinarily alternate dialogue to verbal confrontation where participants for instance through loud tones and overlaps try to establish their own view at the expense of the other s humor can exploit the looming danger of children s savage state similarly to what was done in the bed making scene in example with the obligation of parental care and the everyday burden it represents directing children throughout cleaning duties can be done by relatively open or more limited option strategies asking children about their preferences concerning many details of an
structural behavior of the support further it is important to emphasize the fact that the method from ec needs previous knowledge of the amount of reinforcement of the column so that an iterative process is required when the method is applied exists between both flexural axes in the structural behavior of the column and it is applicable for both normal and high strength concretes in addition it is a direct method because it does not depend on the value of the mechanical reinforcement ratio the columns studied here are isolated elements with loading conditions and lateral supports are accounted for in the draft of the ec through the use of the effective length factor and the equivalent first order end moment objectives the present paper has two objectives the first is to propose a new equation to calculate the second order eccentricity of slender reinforced concrete columns d for designing slender columns with the equal effective lengths in both directions that are subjected to axial loads and biaxial bending and which is based on the calculus of the second order eccentricity taking into account the interaction between both bending axes this is an extension for biaxial bending of the column model method and for normal and high strength concretes the current paper is the second part of a research study conducted by the present authors bonet et method the proposed method is based on the calculation of the total design eccentricity obtained from the addition of the vector modulus of the first order eccentricity and the second order eccentricity where for sinusoidal curvature distribution as it is stated in the model column method and is nominal curvature in the sections that follow the equation of will be obtained from a numerical simulation and will later be compared with the experimental tests from the literature the cross section is designed for a factored axial will have the same bending direction as the first order bending moment applied numerical simulation the equation of the nominal curvature was inferred from using a general method of structural analysis for reinforced concrete using finite elements this numerical method includes the following main issues geometric nonlinearity large displacements and large deformations time dependent effects creep and a more thorough description of the model can be found in bonet et the foregoing numerical model was used here to perform the analysis of the main variables that exert an influence on nominal curvature cover was fixed at the height and the width of the section this table is similar to that in bonet et but in this case the nominal curvature is the objective of the research for the particular case of rectangular sections with reinforcement equal at the four faces only one octant of the interaction surface has to be studied for of the interaction surface need to be studied for this case the following angles were selected the boundary angles and the angle corresponding to the load where relative bending moments are equal and two intermediate angle values where kc is a correction factor of the curvature represents base curvature y is strain correspondent with the yielding stress of steel es is the elastic modulus of the longitudinal reinforcement is the height of the section following the bending direction of the column is is the radius of gyration of the reinforcements with respect to the centroid of for bending and axial load art ec or from table and f is the characteristic compressive strength of concrete the base curvature selected for the particular case where reinforcement is concentrated at the opposite faces of the section corresponds to the critical state by which the longitudinal reinforcement bar under tension yields and the concrete reaches from the proposal of the draft of ec for any of the design stress strain diagrams the curvature correction factor kc was obtained by means of an equation that incorporated the relative eccentricity and the geometric slenderness from the results of the numerical simulation thus for following steps first the second order eccentricity is obtained where ns is the ultimate bending moment of the cross section for an axial force ned computed from the numerical simulation ns is the first order ultimate bending moment of the support for an axial load ned computed from the numerical simulation finally the curvature correction factor is obtained by solving equation where is the base curvature computed from equation as an example fig shows the curvature correction factor ns obtained through the numerical simulation in terms of the first order relative eccentricity ns ned and the geometric and a strength of the concrete of mpa the correction factor kc depends on the relative eccentricity as can be inferred from fig and its value concurs noticeably when the relative eccentricity is equal to for any geometric slenderness in this paper this point is termed pivot correction factor and defines the border between two different although the correction factor kc depends appreciably on the mechanical reinforcement ratio the proposed equation was formulated independently of this parameter in order to simplify the application of the method the accuracy will be demonstrated later on in this paper an upper envelope parabola was adjusted an ordinate in the origin kc and a value of kc for therefore the equation of the parabola is the next branch of kc was assumed to be linear crossing the point k for and having a slope that varies in terms of n it was observed that the slope of the straight line decreases if the geometrical slenderness increases the value of kc is stopped at to prevent high values of from producing extremely high values of this equation nominal curvature of a column for axial loads and uniaxial bending under sustained loads as is known for the case of sustained loads the second order effects are increased when the strain owing to creep grows hence the nominal curvature of is augmented with a correction factor kj in order to take into account the long term effects
inspect his relics and jealously watch over them harassing them the sovereign s love for this collection went so far that in an effort to imitate the holy martyrs and transfer their thaumaturgie power to his own person he asked during his final days to have relics corresponding to his aching limbs directly applied to his open wounds he claimed that the presence as well as the contact with a part of saint sebastian s knee one of saint alban s ribs or the arm of saint vincent eerrer soothed his pains and sufferings to come thus it could be said that while mapping a geography of royal suffering the relics of the escorial were thought to contribute to the regeneration of the king s body the obvious apologetic and hagiographie intentions that lay behind these stories should not stop us from believing that philip ii s passion for relics reflected his genuine belief in their efficacy he did after all credit the relics of the monk san diego de alcala with saving his heir don carlos a nearly fatal head injury and he did resort to what we would call today clinically tested and proven relics to cure his bouts of gout but this does not necessarily mean that philip ii was uncritical when it came to relics he knew full well that a good number of the relics that were sent to him were probably fake when one day his secretary cristobal de moura suggested manufacturing relics in order to bribe a courtier the king answered there should nt be any shortage of head bones there in the escorial or anywhere else so that it wo nt be necessary to forge some something i found quite amusing even if i do believe that those that are brought from germany or at least a good number of them are indeed counterfeit furthermore as philip ii himself contended it was not so much the authenticity of the relic that mattered as it was the devotion that one had for the saint represented by it they wo nt fool us we do nt lose by revering his saints in bones even if they are not theirs such circumspection forces us to search beyond the simplistic portrayal of philip as an obsessively pious and devout catholic king in view of the considerable amount of time energy and money invested over the course of his life in building up his collection we cannot help but question the role played by relics and the place given to them in the conceptual architecture of his monarchy s most emblematic monument ii dying in the escorial in while surrounded by an army of relics has powerfully shaped our perception of the monarch as a zealous defender of catholicism and as a champion of the counter reformation claimed by his advocates as well as by his detractors either to illustrate his devotion to the saints or to prove his idolatry and his superstition this aspect of the spanish king s already complex and mysterious personality has persistently puzzled historians for the centuries so far the few studies dedicated to the king s impressive collection of nearly relics gathered from the four corners of europe have only served to demonstrate and reaffirm his profound respect for the catholic church and the cult of saints as well as his wholehearted support for the principles of the council of trent even by those who have pondered the signification of the immense ex voto motivations underlying its construction the theme of relics has been treated in a rather conventional way as the epitome of the counter reformist or tridentine nature of the monument and its builder this article will demonstrate how the acquisition display and use of these sacred objects expressed not just religious and devotional but also specifically royal needs its aim is to sketch some of the functions philip ii the construction of a monarchical spiritual and national identity in sixteenth century spain first as a foundation for the legitimacy of the spanish monarchy and second as a tool for the formation of a collective identity through the christian past through each of these representations or incarnations the king of spain manifested his desire to sacralize the three pillars upon which his temporal power rested dynasty faith and knowledge such a concentration of sanctity leads us to envision the escorial as the ultimate synthesis and grandiose embodiment of philip s combined religious and political aims in keeping with traditional historiography though for altogether different reasons thus if we consider the relic no longer as a mere object or vessel to express one s devotion but rather as an active instrument of a broader rhetoric of power as a tool for shaping the king s for the sacred that animated the catholic monarch throughout his life and pushed him to erect such a gigantic dynastic reliquary suddenly takes on an entirely different meaning indeed philip ii s collection of relics a term that did not exclusively refer to bones of saints but which could also apply to a variety of sacralized objects served to establish his authority as a christian ruler and helped him project a coherent image of to posterity monarchy and relics foundations of a ew power when he came to power in philip ii inherited an empire exhausted by incessant wars although no one challenged his succession to the crown it seemed natural that after as decisive a reign as that of his father the new sovereign would have to establish a certain credibility inside as well as outside of spain his victory in over the french at saint quentin build his own reputation this was essential for the son of an emperor who in good medieval fashion had earned his glory on the battlefields of europe yet philip ii never became a great warrior himself the young king quickly adopted a governing style different from that of his father looking for new weapons with which to
and circumstantial informational that could help the infant be own for infants born of slave mothers the registration would include the owner s name date and place of birth sex and color of the newborn and parents names or only the mother s name if she were single the escriva would also record if the child were granted freedom at birth death registers required similar information along with indication of cause of death as in the case of births decree required that color be recorded in death registers slaves the escriva es were to report aggregate numbers of births and deaths to the government every six months the model tables provided for this purpose reveal the distinctions amongst the population that most interested the state legal status and legitimacy of color was notably absent from the forms for reporting aggregate data by the brazilian state would become very interested in the color of its population as a whole and aggregate racial statistics would be marshaled to make claims about prospects for the nation but on the heels of the ban of slave imports the distinction between freepersons and slaves overshadowed distinction by color for those concerned with the future of the brazilian while color was not prioritized in the collection of population statistics by the imperial government in on paper the projects of implementing obligatory civil registration and six months later carrying out the first general census of the brazilian empire appeared meticulously planned and thoroughly rational by all appearances brazil would soon join other civilized nations whose collection and use of population statistics made possible enlightened governance but the day decree was supposed to take effect it quickly became clear that the brazil imagined by the imperial political elite did not yet exist in reality a vast gulf divided the official brazil of the imperial court and the real brazil where conditions of life had not improved since the beginning of the century which is to say they remained miserable the revolt against the execution of decree testified to this fact from administrative failure to violent opposition efforts to implement decree got off to a rocky start the government had not managed to distribute the official forms to escriva es in time making compliance with the law impossible parish priests complained that they should not have to withhold baptism under the the imperial government responded quickly with an official circular allowing priests to continue performing sacred rites where the proper forms had not this glitch revealed the limited administrative reach of the central brazilian state if poor means of communication inadequate funding and unqualified personnel made it difficult to establish civil registers in france in the obstacles were multiplied several fold for brazil though the architects of decree seemed unaware of this as it turned out inadequate administrative capacity was only the first obstacle to the introduction of civil registration in brazil in the first days of january local papers began to mention seemingly isolated incidents of popular unrest in relation to the implementation of decree the provincial president of pernambuco meanwhile began receiving letters from priests who feared their compliance with decree would have grave repercussions one priest reported for example that the population of timbau ba was attacking the decree and that even women to assassinate him if he demanded the official certificate to perform baptisms another wrote from his parish in bom jardim the povo without exception of a single individual was possessed by a panicky terror at the rumors circulating about the intent of the decree and that as a consequence his life was in considerable at first the rioters focused especially on those who would read the decree aloud an act that would make the words on paper into the law of the land in one for example it was reported that more than two hundred people of both sexes raided the property of the juiz de paz and almost assassinated him because they believed he was hiding the paper the judge s sexagenarian mother in law dropped to her knees and with a crucifix in her hands assured them in the name of jesus christ that her son in law did not have such a other authorities as well many abandoned their posts and fled to neighboring towns or the provincial capital the provincial government of pernambuco tried to downplay the disorders the partisan newspaper diario de pernambuco reported on january that peace had been restored throughout the province even as troops were dispatched to pau d alho to pacify the population the provincial president also called upon secular and religious authorities to do everything in their power to dispel misunderstandings reaffirm the good intentions of the imperial government the infantry battalion a rag tag unit of ninety some men commanded by lt colonel hygino jose coelho was sent to put down the uprising the lt colonel wrote diligently to his commanding officer on his way to pau d alho declaring that he would use all means at his disposal to pacify the populace following an ambush that left two of his men dead and five that the use of force would be necessary to reestablish order to the in public statements the provincial president expressed faith in the army s ability to restore order to the interior but he also hedged his bets calling upon religious authorities to use persuasive means to defuse the uprising the capuchin missionary frei caetano de messina arrived in pau d alho before the armed he had made considerable headway convincing to lay down their arms and return to their homes when rumors of the infantry s approach re ignited the rebellion apparently although the battalion commander knew the missionary had been sent to defuse the uprising frei caetano was never informed that his kind words would be backed by the threat of brute force to the rebels it appeared the priest had betrayed them and frei caetano found himself in the awkward position of trying to
action geographers too often fail to give adequate attention to what one might call after korsgaard the sources of normativity by this we refer to the closely linked questions of why normative claims should be acted upon at all and of how conduct in relation to norms principles and values is actually motivated in practice to illustrate why it might be looking arguments of young and neill on global justice both authors propose a geographically expansive account of moral and political obligations in terms of their geographical content both arguments seem to support geographers assertions about the stretching of responsibility over globalized networks of action however under closer scrutiny they mobilize the acting they provide and presume are significantly different young s account of global labor solidarity does more than tell a geographical story about the responsibilities we have by way of our being connected into wider spatial systems her aim is rather to establish some basic principles through which people can reason about their actions her account stresses questions of our point here is that young s guiding normative principle is the idea that people are likely to be moved by a concern to avoid their unwitting implication in the reproduction of harm to others in neill s work one can find a similar looking argument and one that comes to similar looking conclusions regarding the widened geographical scope of responsibility distant others because in our everyday activities we presume and take for granted their status as moral agents therefore we owe justice and moral standing to distant strangers as well as to those close at hand hence if we owe justice to all whose capacities to act experience and suffer we take for granted in acting we will owe it to the important point here is that neill s guiding principle of moral motivation is not the avoidance of harm as in young it is instead a revised constructivist account of kantian universalizability according to which actors are beholden by their practical actions to treat others as pure ends in themselves the point of contrasting neill and young is twofold any motivating force in and of itself this is precisely why in both cases appeals are also made to aspects of self interest and to a sense of fairness as well as to geographical connections second focussing only on the geographical content of these accounts on the assumption that it is geographical knowledge that can and must fulfil the motivating function has the effect of hiding from view the different the avoidance of harm expressions of solidarity or autonomy what both young and neill demonstrate is that on its own the mere fact of being bound into relationships with distant others does not actually provide any compelling reason that could account for or motivate relationships of care concern or obligation nor in either case is it actually meant to and places questions of practical motivation only get ov the ground once issues of direct liability or blame are left behind therefore it is important to attend more closely to the sorts of claims made about why being geographically implicated should lead to any type of practical action in their engagements with moral philosophy and political theory perhaps geographers should take a little sorts of motivations and influences people are and should be susceptible to these assumptions can of course be assessed empirically but they are also subject to normative assessment in their own right what both young and neill demonstrate is that at the very least the reasons one might have for acting differently in light of causal knowledge are not likely to be reasons is a deep strain of thinking that imagines that understandings of responsibility could be arrived at monologically outside of any encounter with others this is a disposition which in presuming that it is possible or preferable to take on the suffering of the world inadvertently arrogates to itself the perspective of impartial observer there is a degree of detachment implied by thinking that or unintended of one s actions could or should provide the criteria for normatively evaluating one s conduct in the case of both care and responsibility a crucial aspect in the motivation of action is attending to and responding to the expressions and claims of others the fixation on chains of causality hides from view the degree to which responsible caring action is motivated motivation and disposition geographers have tended to assume a particular model of moral agency in their discussions of care and responsibility it is a model that is widespread perhaps even foundational of a whole weld of social science endeavor it presumes that agency is a vector of blame shame and guilt and that causal explanation is a prerequisite for that people need to be shown the consequences of their actions in order to be motivated to change behavior to take responsibility to become more caring for the world around them not only does this pedagogy assume that such motivation works by tracking the consequences of action more worryingly it assumes that people do not do not already care are not already acting responsibly the exhortatory register of so much of geography s discussion of morality and politics certainly fits with the temper of the times in which there is a widespread assumption that people are naturally inclined to be self interested egoists some people think this is a good thing and that more people should behave like this many more across the political spectrum think that more and in order to suggest that this base line assumption of egoism and self interest might not be the best starting point from which to approach questions of practical normative action and we want to suggest that despite whatever moral overtones it might possess generosity be thought of primarily as a political concept generosity is a modality of power akin to forgiving or promising that is a practice and space sack argues that a moral theory cannot force us to behave well it can only persuade us through logic and reason that it discloses a better
and convex cone in with nonempty interior int then and reduce to the problems considered in chen and yang and yang established some equivalence results between the vector complementarity problem and the vector extremum problem and also sufficient conditions for the existence of a solution of the vector extremum problem in this section we extend some of their results to cases involving a variable ordering relation let be an ordered banach space be a banach space and be a family of closed let a be a subset of a point is said to be a minimal point of the set a if there exists no a such that a and point is said to be a weakly minimal point of the set a if a jintp for all a we denote the set of all minimal points of a by minp a and the set of all weakly minimal points of a by minintp a see let be a map we now consider the following vector complementarity problem finding such that tx jint tx iint a feasible set of is tx iint co let for all we consider the following vector optimization problem minp subject to a point is called a weakly minimal solution of if is a weakly minimal point of ie minint we denote the set of all weakly minimal solutions of by exists ew such that jintp then the vector complementarity problem is solvable proof let ew and jintp then and tx jint tx iint it follows that is a solution of this completes the proof definition let we say that satisfies an inclusive condition if for any int implies that closed pointed and convex cone in then satisfies the inclusive condition example let and define and cos sin cos sin x if then int int and so condition if there exist at most a finite number of solutions for then is solvable if and only if and there exists ew such that jintp proof let be a solution of then and we are done if ew by the definition of a weakly minimal solution there exists such that x and this implies that since and satisfies the inclusive condition it follows that and so xn is a solution of and xn ew since has at most a finite number of solutions therefore f and f the only if part follows from theorem and we complete the proof remark if for all where is a closed pointed and convex cone in then satisfies the inclusive condition and theorem is the same as theorem of chen and yang if for all where is a closed pointed and convex cone in then we cone in then we obtain the results in borwein we next consider the positive vector complementarity problem finding such that consider the following vector optimization problem is to see that hp similarly we can prove the following results theorem if and there exists ep such that jintp then is solvable theorem suppose that satisfies the inclusive condition if there exist at most a finite number of solutions of then is solvable if and only if and there exists ep such that jintp let be an ordered banach space with intc be a banach space and be a family of closed pointed and convex cones in such that intp for all let be a given map and be a given operator define the feasible set associated with fx the weak minimal element problem finding such that minintcf the vector complementarity problem finding such that jintp the vector variational inequality problem finding such that tx iint the vector unilateral optimization problem finding such that minintp definition a linear operator is called weakly positive if for any jintc implies that jintp definition let and be two banach spaces and be a linear operator from to if the image of any bounded set in is a self sequentially compact set in then is called completely continuous a map is said to be convex if kx kf for all and kf df kxk in this case df is said to be the frechet derivative of at the map is said to be frechet differentiable on if is frechet differentiable at each point of lemma if is convex and frechet differentiable on then pp df proof since is convex for any and since is frechet differentiable and is closed we have df this completes the proof definition let be an ordered banach space the norm in is called strictly monotonically increasing on if for each fyg intc implies kxk let x and kxk for all then it is easy to see that is strictly x and fx then is an ordered banach space and intc fx we now show that the norm is strictly monotonically increasing on in fact for each and fyg int there exists int such that theorem let be an ordered banach space with int be a banach space and be a family of closed pointed and convex cones in such that int for all suppose df is the frechet derivative of a convex operator is a weakly positive linear operator on if is solvable then and are also solvable remark if for all where is a closed pointed and convex cone in then theorem coincides with theorem of chen and yang we need the following propositions to prove theorem proposition let df be the frechet derivative of an operator then solves solves implies solves proof let be a solution of then and minintpf ie jintp for all since is a convex cone jint it follows that convex by lemma pp df iint and so iint which is the this completes the proof a map is called co negative if holds for all let and tx for all then it is easy to see that is a co negative mapping example let and let sin xg for all then is a co negative
constructed region s sedentary agriculturalists may have traded their prey to people living in the arable zones for cereals or other considerations there is ample evidence for long distance ppnb contacts and trade both in the form of exotic stones and shells and in the form of interregional similarities in material culture these is subsumed within a general reliance on sickle blades axes long bladed knives burins borers scrapers and a variety of arrowheads the level of skill reflected in the production of some of these tools may indicate the existence of specialized knappers craft specialists also appear to to occur during the middle and late ppnb settlements west of the jordan river had begun to shrink while those to the river s east had grown to massive proportions in the ppnc these eastern settlements also became depopulated some shrank to mere fractions of their previous sizes while population agglomeration toward disaggregation the changes were not limited to settlement patterns art architecture technology and mortuary practices altered as well lithics became less standardized and their manufacture appears to have been more expedient or casual a trend that continued this does not indicate a loss of social complexity or communal planning however since at the ppnc type site of ain ghazal spatial compartmentalization was even more pronounced than it had been in the preceding ppnb moreover new construction included a massive wide wall and a wide a well and secondary interments became standard practices pig remains were placed in some burials at ain few figurines have been recovered economically reliance on both plant and animal domesticates continued to increase and it is possible that nomadic pastoralism arose at this sedentary agriculturalists several hypotheses have been advanced to account for the cultural discontinuity between the ppnb and the ppnc and this discontinuity has often been seen as a collapse some current scholars cite environmental deterioration either or in origin others attribute the changes to social stresses climatic episode occurred midway through the neolithic if this episode coincided with the ppnc it could well account for much of the upheaval unfortunately the dating of this climatic interruption is imprecise pollen evidence places it ca bp while correlations with greenland ice cores indicate a date of ca places the dry period in the early pn and the ice core and speleothem date puts it in the late ppnb furthermore site abandonment patterns do not correlate with ecological situations as would be expected if aridification were solely responsible for the changes sites located in the relatively dry jordanian as evidence of such stress is scarce and indeed contraindicated by faunal remains from some lppnb this model also cannot explain the widespread nature of the change with settlements of varying sizes economies and ecological contexts all affected probably some ppn sites did suffer that social factors played a key role in the end of the ppn a range of issues may have contributed one possibility is that populations dispersed in order to live closer to their fields and pastures than they could in lppnb style unfortunately data to support this model are lacking another theory is that as populations proved unable to cope with the hugely expanded demands placed on them and populations this model is supported by the preponderance of data indicating expanding population levels and social segmentation over the course of the ppnb contrasted with a decline in both during the ppnc bc the pn is more poorly understood than is the ppn although recent research has expanded our knowledge clearly ways of life changed significantly after the ppnc although some sites are large and rich the general impression of the pn is one of comparative material impoverishment the southern levantine ppnb was lost during the pn which saw the development of myriad localized cultural entities the best known of these is also the earliest the yarmukian which is found only in a broad band roughly north of the dead sea and south of lake other pn variants include jericho ix which which is transitional between the late neolithic and the chalcolithic in the the division between the ppn and the pn is traditionally marked by the appearance of ceramics it is true that ppn populations had ample experience with clay working clay figurines and tokens abound as do there is no evidence in the ppn for regular or standardized use of clay to make such practices were new to the pn most pn ceramics were crude and poorly fired but sophistication and variety do appear even in early assemblages historically many archeologists assumed that southern levantine clay they had also mastered pyrotechnology as seen in the enormous amounts of burnt lime plaster found in ppn architecture these skill sets presumably enabled a rapid transition to full fledged pottery production the economic centrality of domesticates continued to increase in the pn people relied heavily on domesticated strategy might explain pn settlement dispersal individual households needing access to large amounts of land distributed themselves across the landscape in many small settlements pn architecture and settlement layouts were far less standardized later pn structures are commonly rectangular ain ghazal and sha ar hagolan have organized site plans with streets and courtyards but other yarmukian and later pn sites have scattered ritual practices also differed from those of the ppn there are no indications and without grave goods and or crania burials under floors in cists and in the case of infants in jars burials in houses and burials away from figurines are abundant at some sites and absent from others new forms of stylization appear particularly notable are yarmukian anthropomorphic figurines with the eyes resembling of figurines had changed or perhaps pottery had become the dominant art the pn is thus characterized by a diversity of adaptations within a general pattern of population dispersal and intensive food production its lithics architecture and mortuary practices are on average less sophisticated continued social and the heterogeneous pn sites ap pear to have been linked in an intricate regional interaction the
beams and reporting the temperature dependence of the exchange reaction for different angles of incidence this study confirmed that adsorption and dissociation of on pt are not activated hd production rate is present for pt they showed moreover that after dissociation recombinative desorption of hd and follows a similar mechanism for both the flat and the stepped crystals different reaction channels were found the main one operative between and one acting in parallel with the main channel between and and the other in series with it from to it was also recognized that adsorption is activated on the extended surface but not on the terraces of the stepped crystal thus indicating unambiguously that the presence of steps not only introduces new sites for adsorption but also modifies the reactivity of the terrace sites for bond depends on their specific geometry a general answer is tricky since it depends on the level of accuracy with which the reactivity of different surfaces can be measured there are systems for which the geometry of the step causes even qualitative differences in the adsorption state while for others only quantitative differences are present this is the case of the like steps was compared with the one of pt like step structure similar results were found this indicates that the hd formation rate is a function of the flux of reactant molecules that strike the open side of the step structure which is the most active for bond breaking then at least for pt the steps no matter what their structure is are the main cause of the high exchange probability the breaking activity which demonstrated that the most active site is the one associated with the inner corner atom of the step influence of steps on rotational translational energy conversion and diffusion for some of the systems mentioned above eg it was shown that the presence of steps may influence the some authors concentrated on the influence of the step on the rotational translational energy conversion others devoted their efforts to unravel the role of steps in adatom diffusion using a potential energy surface for the pt system luppi et al showed that the dissociation reaction is dominated by non activated sites atop the step the at non reactive sites between the step and the terrace the outcome of the calculations for the reaction probability for different rotational quantum numbers is shown in fig it was found to depend strongly on the initial rotational state slowly rotating molecules do not exhibit thereby the enhancement of the reaction at low e typical of molecules in the rotational ground state reaction mechanism by rotational energy for fast rotating molecules on the other hand an indirect mechanism is again operative at low e in this case the energy transfer occurs not to rotations as for but to motion parallel to the surface although trapping occurs at an unreactive site above the lower edge of the step the time spent on the surface increases the likelihood that the molecules proceed comparing the behavior of cartwheels and helicopters it was found that cartwheeling molecules have a higher trapping probability but their chance to react once trapped is not enhanced energy conversion from rotation into bond stretching is quite effective at high thus enhancing the reactivity at low e recently it has been shown that cu and even au adatoms deposited on a cold cu surface the systems discussed above hydrogen is physisorbed since its vibrational modes are close to their gas phase values other researchers concentrated instead on the fate of adsorbed atoms after dissociation ie on diffusion by applying laser induced thermal desorption methods the diffusion parallel and normal to the step direction was measured the activation energy for diffusion of on rh was found to be mol normally to it such values are somewhat higher than for the similar rh surface and the results were attributed to the additional energy barrier associated with the step there are however experiments performed by the linear optical diffraction method showing an opposite and unexpected phenomenon ie that diffusion of on stepped pt is not impeded but enhanced compared to the flat the direction parallel to the step the diffusion was affected by steps only to a small extent diffusion perpendicular to the step came out surprisingly to be faster on samples with miscut angles of and only for a miscut of a slowing was detected at low for on pt such effect was found to be suppressed by the presence of the step an interesting non metallic case on si the effect of steps on hydrogen chemisorption is not limited to metal surfaces second harmonic generation experiments allowed one to discriminate between step and terrace contributions for adsorbed at vicinal si surfaces the sticking probability is enhanced by up to six orders of magnitude indicating that they provide efficient pathways while adsorption at terraces is hindered by a larger barrier as shown by the measurements reported in fig the shg signal shows a rapid drop followed by a more gradual decay the fast hydrogen uptake corresponding to is due to special dissociation sites of the stepped surface a terrace sites activation energies of ev and ev were deduced for adsorption at steps and terraces respectively from the temperature dependence and by arrhenius analysis it was found that dissociation at three fold coordinated step atoms proceeds involving two neighboring sites and leading to monohydride formation by dft it was proposed that the increase in the reactivity is close to a step is indeed able to modify substantially the barrier to adsorption although it causes only a moderate change in the adsorption energy the reaction pathway was also calculated and is shown schematically in fig the energy dependence of the sticking probability for on pre covered stepped si surfaces is shown in fig where on the preparation conditions can occupy different sites on the surface and quench some of the dangling bonds at a coverage of ml and after the pre covered surface
the mighty son of peleus thus although athena has her own reasons to hate troy her actions are also pre sented as part of zeus s larger plan for the city s fall her closeness to zeus is evident when she restrains ares from seeking vengeance for his dead son ascalaphus like her father elsewhere she acts here to preserve order on olympus athena alone is called and always in contexts where zeus is foregrounded whether in the destruction of troy or the nostoi of the athena thus works again and again as an extension of the will of and her crucial in the preservation of cosmic order is best illustrated by hesiod s account of her birth where zeus swallows metis athena s mother and so ends the generational conflicts of the gods in his favor zeus has his most important children odyssean seriousness versus divine frivolity returning to the odyssey and its alleged theological differences from the iliad we are now in a better position to consider the episode that is frequently highlight the poem s ethically more serious divine world demodocus song of ares and aphrodite s adultery according to burkert demodocus song makes an unbridgeable contrast with the conception of the gods in odyssey book as well as with the sublimity of the gods of the yet such an analysis of the scene is misleading since it assumes too rigid a model of divinity in the odyssey and implies that zeus s opening speech denies the gods anthropomorphism above on burkert s influential reading the odyssey poet composed his work in the light of the iliad but with a new ethico religious attitude and saw that in his model there remained a vacuum in his own far too serious image of the world and its there is however no such vacuum nor is the odyssey poet s pres entation of the gods excessively serious for as in the iliad the gods are seen to be deeply con cerned behavior while at the same time ready to assert their interests and desires at the expense of oth ers scholars often describe the gods display of moral anthropomorphism in demodocus song as an instance of divine frivolity which is intended to contrast with the action on the human level there is some point to this since that the divine action aphrodite s adultery should echo in tones of fun what is deeply serious among men penelope s potential adultery is typical of the yet the unquenchable laughter of the gods as they look upon ares and aphrodite caught in hephaestus trap should not be allowed to obscure the more serious aspects of the scene itself for hephaestus draws attention to his demands proper compensation which he is solemnly promised by poseidon should ares fail to pay all that is right in the presence of the immortal gods the scene thus underlines the importance of justice among the gods ob et iote tog is hephaestus s response to poseidon even as it revels in the bawdy humor of apollo and hermes the other olympian scenes in both the epics and is neither out of step with the rest of the odyssey nor does it prove iliadic influence since there was humorous potential in many divine myths and these can scarcely have been limited to the iliad and book of the odyssey errors and consequences odysseus and his men the idea that the odyssey poet aims to present a clear cut tale of crime and punishment is belied not only by the odysseus but also by odysseus own account of his wan derings for odysseus describes both himself and his men committing disastrous errors and ignoring warnings but only odysseus survives and the audience perceive the crucial difference made by divine though his comrades urge him to depart odysseus insists on meeting the cyclops with horrific results for them as odysseus himself admits but i would not listen to them it would have been far better if i had since i wanted to see the man and whether he would give me gifts of friendship but in fact when he appeared he would not prove a lovely host to my companions having escaped from the cyclops cave odysseus cannot resist boasting of his victory and thereby revealing his name despite his comrades warning that get away without notice as a result polyphemus is able to pray to poseidon that if odysseus reach es ithaca he will do so after losing all his comrades although it is his companions own decision to kill helios cattle which ensures their destruction it is clear that odysseus own mistakes have endangered those around him and that his men are caught up in the curse laid upon their the cyclops and while it may be too extreme to say that the men are actually driven to the act by the very gods who punish them for it makes no difference to helios or his vengeful response that the men s fatal error is the product of exhaustion and star vation for as with poseidon s anger zeus respects helios right to punish those who offend the god or transgress in his domain moreover threat to descend to hades and shine among the dead threatens the cosmic order zeus s response is immediate helios keep shining among the immortals and among mortal men upon the grain giving earth as for these men i shall soon strike with a flashing thunderbolt and shatter it in small pieces in the midst of the sparkling sea thus zeus s promise to see to the men s destruction is motivated not only by a respect for helios demand to punish dishonour but also by zeus s own as the guarantor of universal order as the god prepares to unleash the storm that will kill odysseus men the the poet draws attention to odysseus unusual knowledge of zeus s motivation a unique qualification that underlines odysseus authority
is the remaining water vapor fraction for the event being expressed as can be given by dv computed from eq finally by assigning appropriate values for and we can predict event based or daily isotopic compositions of precipitation using eqs and based on tc pr and pw in the present study we have assumed that tc can be approximated by the temperature at the hpa level for initial values we have further assumed that they global atmospheric water vapor this results in a typical value of over the region and regionally averaged precipitation from surface observation and precipitable water data from ncep ncar reanalysis were utilized in calculating eq median between tc and in eq and tc in eq for simplification the phase change from vapor to solid was not taken into consideration in this computation or in computing esat all the assumptions included in the model will be validated in the following application fig compares day to day variations of predicted and observed predictions are presented one is computed using eqs and and the other uses eqs and involving only the temperature effect both the predictions reproduce the observed results very well the two predictions are not very different whereas the reproducibility of fm is better than in tm to in fm for dd and in tm to in fm for thus while the on site precipitation process cannot be negligible the isotopic composition of precipitation is primarily controlled by the rainout history during transportation from the vapor source area to eastern mongolia similarity between the tm outputs and the observed results not only the correlation but also the variation range and slope value supports the idea that isotopic variation of precipitation over mongolia can be explained by global or continental scale rainout history from a single vapor source reservoir rather than by a local precipitation system it should be noticed that the initial conditions of temperature and isotopic composition correspond also produce the same result however such conditions themselves should be of an air mass that originated in a subtropical ocean region as they are predicted by our model thus the present result suggests that the ultimate origin of mongolian precipitation is a subtropical marine atmosphere however we cannot reject the possible contribution from re evaporation draw a concrete conclusion only in july do the models exceptionally overestimate precipitation d values potential causes of this overestimation are threefold underestimation in overestimation in and contribution of continental recycling water with a strong isotopic signal it is difficult using the first two causes to explain the reason for the fact a continental recycling process fig is a rose diagram for the hpa wind for each month showing that the steady northwesterly wind weakened only in july in contrast a southerly wind occurred more frequently in july than in other months fig demonstrates that the observed d tends to have much smaller values than predicted when water vapor comes from the south in particular although there are not many southeasterly probability we can infer from these facts that continental vapors originating in the south of mongolia contribute to a considerable portion of the atmospheric moisture in july and provide smaller d values than those expected from the rayleigh model for eastern mongolian precipitation one of the most likely source areas may be southeast china where evaporation occurs most intensively the amount effect due to the strong monsoon activity the precipitating water is stored in flooded rice paddy fields which is the most dominant land cover in the region and then re evaporates into the atmosphere the evaporation from the water surface in paddy fields is subject to isotopic fractionation and produces water vapor further depleted in heavy isotopes figs mongolia by transient eddies not by mean flow although the monthly mean value of the transient eddy flux is not always greater than the mean flow component rainfall events with low d are strongly associated with southerly or southeasterly winds which are caused by transient eddies indicating that the transient eddy is important for transporting water vapor of observations from the model predictions is caused by the contribution of water vapor originating in southeast china unfortunately we lack direct evidence for identifying vapor source areas and thus cannot reject other possibilities for specifying them deuterium excess is usually more useful than d however in the present study it has been altered for many events by the evaporation climate in the study area in addition d of water vapor evaporating from rice paddy fields or any other land cover is still unknown so that it is difficult in the present state to specify source areas of precipitation using d further investigations will be necessary to solve the above problems and examine our findings throughout the present analysis the new and most interesting mongolia at not only monthly but also daily time scales although there are some uncertainties the present result may be related to the unique geographical conditions of mongolia since mongolia is situated far from any ocean the effects of the source region s meteorology and isotopic variations would be averaged during long range transport by mixing of vapors having different sources and histories so in july and the original signal from the main source reservoir can stand out in addition to this because of the high altitude of the mongolian plateau temperature and isotopic variations are likely to be insensitive to water and energy exchanges between land surfaces and the atmosphere during the transportation process over surrounding regions therefore the initial condition on local temperature that reflects the mean rainout history of the parcel coming day by day to verify this speculation the correlative variation in global temperature and isotope fields should be reexamined at a shorter time scale summary and conclusions summarized as follows seasonal and day to day variations of isotopic composition in precipitation are characterized by a strong correlation with air temperature and a weak correlation with precipitation amount temporal variation patterns are almost uniform among sites within
needs of affected people both these papers then return to the argument outlined above that thinking about the geography of generosity opens up new horizons for understanding the receptive responsive and attentive relationships through which practical action is provoked school of geography planning and architecture the university of queensland st lucia brisbane australia the variability of demographic trends at the subnational scale particularly internal and international migration renders subnational population forecasting more difficult than at the national scale illustrating the uncertainty of the demographic future for subnational regions is therefore a crucial element of any set of subnational population currently prepared using deterministic models which fail to properly address the issue of demographic uncertainty the traditional high medium and low variants approach employed by many national statistical offices poses a number of problems probabilistic population forecasting models have the potential to overcome many of these problems but these models have so far been limited to national level forecasts this article reports a first attempt to subnational population forecasting using a biregional projection framework the article sets out the forecasting framework outlines the approach adopted to formulate each of the assumptions and presents probabilistic forecasts for for queensland and the rest of australia the forecasts show a two thirds probability that queensland s population in will be between and million while the same range for the rest of the country is and million to what extent greater uncertainty exists about the demographic future at the subnational compared with the national scale introduction deterministic population forecasts frequently turn out to be rather inaccurate sometimes within the embarrassingly short period of just or years of their publication this inaccuracy arises from a number of sources such as an incomplete understanding of the drivers of demographic trends an inherent randomness in renders a precise prediction impossible even if the trend prediction is correct and errors in the jump off population the conventional method of illustrating the uncertainty of the demographic future is to produce variant population forecasts with different assumptions about the future of fertility mortality and migration many national statistical offices and international organizations take combinations of the variant fertility mortality and produce high medium and low forecast variants but while this approach would seem a sensible way of dealing with the uncertainty issue closer inspection reveals several major shortcomings first no indication is given as to the likelihood of the low and high variants coming true are the high and low variants quite likely or very unlikely will the future population almost certainly be within the high low second the future trajectories of fertility mortality and migration are nearly always assumed to be linear or to change smoothly over time this simply does not match what is known about past trends cyclical behavior and random fluctuations are ruled out if as is often the case the high and low variants of fertility mortality or migration are slowly trended in over many years from the most recently observed value then the the chance of actual trends exceeding that high low range in the early years of the forecast is therefore quite high third the fixed relationships between the fertility mortality and migration assumptions in variant population forecasts give high low ranges which will vary in their probabilistic coverage from one output variable to another a fixed combinations of fertility life expectancy at birth and international migration preclude the many alternatives that could exist in the future probabilistic population forecasts overcome these limitations over the last decade probabilistic population forecasting methods have been progressively developed and applied to a number of countries including australia finland the netherlands sweden the united states and for world regions to date however there have been very few attempts to apply the probabilistic approach to population forecasting at the subnational scale exceptions include the work of rees and turton gullickson and moen gullickson lee miller and edwards and smith and tayman rees and turton were probably the first to produce subnational probabilistic population forecasts when they used a multiregional model to prepare forecasts for the regions of the european union in a further innovation these researchers handled the huge computational task by employing parallel processing on a supercomputer limited past time series of data however forced the authors the predictive intervals for the input variables and perfect correlation between regions was assumed for fertility mortality and migration gullickson and moen extended subnational probabilistic forecasting methods beyond just population numbers by forecasting population and emergency hospital admissions for a two region system in minnesota using net migration rates due to data limitations in another article gullickson discusses population forecasts in a probabilistic framework suggesting the use of log linear models to simplify the forecasting of internal migration in our view this approach holds much promise for multiregional forecasting and we hope to investigate this approach in a subsequent article more recently lee miller and edwards presented probabilistic population and fiscal forecasts for the state of california but their approach employed interstate and net international migration focusing on just total population size smith and tayman employed autoregressive integrated moving average models to forecast the populations of selected us states their research did not convince them that arima models at least in the form used in their experiments could provide suitable predictive intervals for population forecasts a slightly different approach involves the production of point forecasts using models and then the application of predictive intervals based on past forecast errors smith and sincich discovered sufficient temporal stability in forecast errors for us states for them to be used as an indication of future forecast uncertainty this is difficult however when few forecasts have been made tayman schafer and carter overcame this limitation by sampling errors from one forecast period but a large relationship between population size and forecast error and thus providing a guide to forecast uncertainty there appears to be little other work on subnational probabilistic population forecasting at one level this lack of attention is not surprising as the addition
because it appeals to their internalized social ideologies the result is that aggressive respondents but not nonaggressive to the problem by selecting alternative aggressive respondents indirectly reveal their implicit hostile attribution biases alternative is therefore referred to as the aggressive answer of course some respondents may select alternatives and for reasons that differ from those above for example a respondent might have had negative experiences with a lawyer that influenced any single problem what is important for measurement is whether a respondent consistently selects answers based on jms for aggression across a set of problems that vary in terms of inductive argument and subject matter consistent selection of these types of alternatives indicates that jms for aggression are strongly instrumental in shaping the reasoning of the respondent in appendix that is to reach a conclusion the respondent must make additional assumptions not contained in the stem of the item however making such assumptions is the essence of inductive reasoning multiple general conclusions can derive logically from the same set of specific premises there is no requirement that these alternative logical conclusions be consistent or even related indeed they may be respondents take the logical analysis one step further by drawing an inference that logically extends some aspect of the analysis basically with inductive reasoning the premises of an argument support the conclusion but do not necessarily guarantee it however with deductive reasoning the premises of an argument support and guarantee the conclusion the premises but with inductive reasoning the inferred answer is of greater generality than the premises with respect to the item presented in appendix it is clear that there are no deductively valid solutions however these items were designed not as deductive problems but as inductive problems conditional reasoning problems do contain inductively valid inferences in fact as illustrated by the sample problem in appendix inductively valid inferences one that is built around one or more jms and one that is devoid of such biases it is true that test takers must make assumptions about the scenario in conditional reasoning problems but that is simply a definitional quality of inductive inference the process described above is labeled conditional reasoning because which of the two inductively personality of the respondent illogical answers conditional reasoning problems are meant to appear to respondents as traditional inductive reasoning problems the objective is to have respondents focused totally on finding logical answers to reasoning problems this allows the intended implicit processes namely conditional reasoning to operate free from the self protective self deception to maintain the appearance of traditional inductive reasoning problems it is necessary to include illogical responses in the problems two illogical alternatives are included in each problem however one might question whether it is really necessary to include these illogical responses how are illogical responses to be interpreted and scored does the inclusion of illogical answers confound problems be correlated with cognitive ability or race to counter these potential troubles conditional reasoning problems purposely use distractor answers that are clearly illogical at least to individuals with cognitive skills consistent with a seventh grade reading level consequently virtually no one attempts to solve conditional reasoning problems problem rather experience with thousands of administrations indicates that one of the logical answers is virtually always selected to solve the problem in summary conditional reasoning problems are first and foremost inductive reasoning problems consequently by definition measure cognitive ability have one logical response and three or four illogical responses these items and their distractors vary in degree of difficulty which implies that for the difficult items many respondents will choose an illogical response in contrast the conditional reasoning application of inductive reasoning problems involves two logical responses and two values indicating that they are very easy and that virtually everyone chooses a logically correct answer consequently the strategy used to build conditional reasoning items makes them poor choices for measures of cognitive ability because all items are simple and thus almost everyone would get a perfect score if the items were rescored for cognitive crt a plus three traditional inductive reasoning problems respondents obtain high scores on the crt a by selecting a moderately large number of answers based on jms for aggression thus high scores indicate that jms for aggression are instrumental in shaping an individual s reasoning such individuals yet still think of themselves as moral and prosocial these individuals are referred to as justifiers and the measurement scale is referred to as the justification of aggression scale values on the jags are referred to as justification of aggression scores low scores on the jags indicate that jms are not instrumental in shaping an individual s reasoning the lack of an implicit is weak and that on average these individuals are unlikely to engage in future acts of aggression these respondents are referred to as nonaggressives scores ranging between the weak and strong poles on the jags indicate that jms for aggression are only infrequently used in shaping reasoning implicit defenses for justifying aggression are not well developed in individuals who score engage in aggressive acts in either the past or the future scores measuring implicit preparedness to justify aggression from the crt a and its predecessors have been subjected to a number of empirical analyses fourteen samples from diverse populations furnished the data for these analyses and highlights of these results are summarized below more complete several recent publications as well as in the test manual for the crt a justification of aggression scores from the crt a and its predecessors are strong predictors of aggression and counterproductivity empirical validities obtained in studies indicate that the average uncorrected validity is comparisons of validities using dominance analysis show that scores on the jags account for an average of the variance in aggressive and counterproductive behavior that is predictable by for the other the predictable variance eight percent to respondents are considered to be moderately to strongly aggressive that is the vast majority of people are not aggressive estimates of internal consistency test retest
specified as where dj is a presence absence dummy for each of the options age and inc are the mean centered age and income variables respectively and arbitrarily set to zero the usual random utility assumption that respondents prefer the option that offers the highest utility applies because the response data represent stated income allocations instead of only discrete choices the mother logit model was estimated in the following manner the choice option in each choice set was used as the dependent variable in the estimation a weight responses by the allocation proportions with a slight adjustment such that none of the weights equals zero a maximum likelihood procedure was used to estimate the model the results are shown in the appendix the chi square value and mcfadden s pseudo show that the model fit is very good for each alternative the estimated parameters are the against the average observed choice set with the age and income effects at the sample means the expenditure category donations to charity is the reference case the presence absence effects are more easily interpreted if the parameters are reorganized in a matrix as depicted in table the parameters on the diagonal are the own effects whereas the off diagonals are the cross effects the own effects are logit model they represent the shares of the alternatives as shown above in table all significant cross effects are negative which implies that the odds of money being allocated to a choice option relative to the base option are lower if the cross effect source option is also available in the choice vacation indicates that the odds of allocating money to the domestic vacation category relative to the base option are smaller if the overseas vacation category is also present in the set the more negative the parameter the more similar are the two expenditure categories relative to the donations to charity base option in other words larger negative parameter values indicate greater levels of substitution the be asymmetric that asymmetry is probably due to different segments having different preferences consider the cross effect of household debt reduction on home renovations the first row in table indicates that when the choice set contains the option of reducing household debt allocating discretionary resources to home renovations is significantly negatively affected the converse is not true however choice set there is no significant effect on household debt reduction the pattern of results displayed in table shows that the significant substitution effects are generally observed within two groups of expenditure categories the first group consists of reducing household debt financial investment home renovations and home entertainment expenditure whereas the are significant cross effects within these two groups all but one of the cross effects between the two groups categories are insignificant in other words the presence of an expenditure category from one group in the choice set does not significantly affect the allocation of discretionary income to a category from the other group this leisure allocations is on average insignificant it should be noted however that this result applies across the sample the effect may be significant for certain segments the estimated parameters for age and income show the significant relationships of these covariates with the propensity to spend among the various categories according to the model as income and age increase expenditure on most categories home entertainment and charity decreases the model for example predicts that the highest expenditure on domestic vacations will be observed for consumers aged with a pretax household income of the utility functions can be used in the conventional way to calculate the aggregate probabilities for each of the options according to the multinomial logit model a function of the utility of option and the utility of all other options the resulting aggregate probabilities can be interpreted as the predicted shares of how respondents would spend the for each of the options at the sample means for age and income one of the main benefits of our model is that it can be used to predict the aggregate shares in cases in which not the for the scenario in which households are considering the choice between leisure activities a domestic vacation and an overseas vacation the model predictions are based on the model with only those parameters that are significant at an alpha of the implied shares based on table are different compared to the predicted shares from the experimental choice model the simple inference from the share of the allocations with domestic vacations taking only by comparison the experimental choice model however predicts a slightly higher expenditure for domestic vacations at the expense of overseas vacations this difference results from the cross effects in the universal logit model allowing for nonproportional substitution between the categories apparently categories only more consumers opt to switch to domestic vacations than to overseas vacations conclusions and discussion this study aimed to identify how tourism competes against six other main categories of discretionary expenditure it found that tourism attracts discretionary income when such expenditure is measured as the average amount that respondents would spend on domestic and overseas that a larger amount would be spent on overseas travel than on domestic travel when forced to choose among only leisure activities domestic vacations and overseas vacations however a majority of the expenditure would be directed toward domestic vacations across all choice conditions the largest portion of discretionary spending went to reducing household debt in amounts on average were financial investments home improvements overseas vacations and domestic vacations each accounting for between about and discretionary expenditure home entertainment accounted for leisure activities took and charity received in australia various tourism marketing campaigns in the past have endeavored to encourage australians to vacation indicate that domestic tourism expenditure competes relatively strongly but not exclusively with international tourism expenditure other major competing categories in our study are leisure activities and home renovations and although to a lesser extent also the remaining categories of savings investments and home entertainment this highlights that the also
from the ontology network to markup its data if we cluster those information systems committing the same ontology together the whole information system network can be partitioned into many clusters each cluster of information systems is associated with one vertex in the ontology network on the other side from the ontology network s view every information system is a markup instance of a specific ontology and each cluster is a set of markup instances of a specific vertex in the ontology network the relationship between the ontology network and the information system network shown in fig in the ontology network layer the edge between two vertices represents that there exist ontology mappings between two associated ontologies in the system network layer the edge between two nodes represents that the associated two information systems are semantically interoperable the edge between two clusters represents that the information systems in these two clusters are semantically interoperable ie every pair of information systems from these two clusters is interoperable since all information systems in the same cluster commit to the same ontology straightforwardly they re semantically interoperable and therefore all nodes in the same cluster are fully meshed note that in the following sections a node in the ontology network always refers to an individual ontology while a node in the system network always refers to an individual information system for the semantic web to reach the internet scale ontology to act analogously to the routers in the internet while large numbers of nodes share backbone routers to achieve global network connectivity information systems have to cooperatively share ontology mapping resources to achieve global semantic interoperability two ontologies in the ontology network may only have partial mappings between them which lead to information loss during the mapping process however various information systems may demand different mapping the data represented in other ontologies while some information systems may need accuracy to process data others may only need partial mappings to extract the required portion of information in fact one ontology mapping could consist of several partial mappings ie one ontology can be split to several parts which are independently mapped to the target ontology via different mapping paths in the ontology network therefore partial mappings could needs of some information systems in this paper we focus our analysis on the information fluidity or reachability that results from mapping activities ie how information can flow in the information system network with regard to semantic interoperability though a partial mapping between ontologies could cause information loss it could still enable certain amount of information to flow from one information system to another as discussed above quality of an ontology mapping is acceptable should be determined by individual systems however it is not realistic and possible to include each individual system s mapping requirement and each mapping s accuracy in our massive network analysis instead in this paper we evaluate the maximum coverage of semantic interoperability that an information system network could have by accepting partial mappings and information loss in practice some mapping be introduced for information systems menaet proposed some approaches to estimate the loss of information when a query is translated across different ontologies kashyap and defined a concept of semantic proximity and further used this concept to determine qualitative measures of semantic similarity between database objects we believe that similar approaches could be taken to determine whether a mapping is acceptable semantically interoperable in the information system network we say that information can flow from one system to the other and vice versa for the sake of this paper we will abstract away the details of how the interoperability works the analysis is the same whether we assume wrappers web services agents or any other mechanisms that allow for loosely coupled distributed computing across network our model will analyze how information fluidity of the web is of distributed information systems as introduced in sec in the information system network two semantically interoperable nodes are connected with an edge if any pair of information systems in the network is semantically interoperable then this network is fully connected if the network is not fully connected it must consist of several or many networks information systems are semantically interoperable within each individual components but not beyond the boundary of components as shown in fig in fact information flow is confined within the boundary of these components here we propose a new metric called information fluidity to quantify the semantic interoperability level of an information system network assume that an information system network includes systems with regard partitioned into components and each component includes mi systems straightforwardly we have mi define the number of systems in the largest component as mmax ie mmax maxmi here we use the ratio mmax to represent the information fluidity of the information system network in other words we measure the use the size of the largest component to compute the information fluidity because it is hard to calculate the average size of all components in a massive network as the ratio mmax increases the network is claimed to have better information fluidity for example every cluster of systems that commit to the same ontology has fluidity within that cluster since any two systems are semantically interoperable straightforwardly ontology mappings can dramatically fluidity in a heterogeneous web since it connects different clusters in the information system network note that information fluidity is used to measure the interoperability level of the information system network but not the ontology network for convenience in the following sections we prove several simple propositions lemma if two nodes in the ontology network are connected the associated two clusters of information systems in the system network are semantically interoperable proof if two nodes in the ontology network are connected there exists at least one path that links these two nodes the two ontologies represented by these two nodes can be mapped into each other via a sequence of ontology mappings which are represented by the sequence of edges
the importance of the cultural facet of the supermalt brand was further stressed by the fact that the interviews revealed religious and ceremonial connotations to another that supermalt was offered as a tribute to the gods in tribal ceremonies in ghana apart from being black and belonging to the afro caribbean culture it is not possible to describe the facet of reflection in detail that is the projective profile of the prototypical supermalt consumer the single most common characteristic of the supermalt consumers as seen by as trying to profile themselves as mature and as being health conscious religious friendly and congenial these characteristics very much reflect the self image facet that is informants see themselves as prototypical consumers regarding the latter the self image facet of identified with the supplied description which was the case for most informants keeping in mind that our informants although from different corners of the world and in different life stages were more homogenous than the target group as defined by royal unibrew they all had a clear identification with the brand hence the receiver end of the brand identity prism is clearly defined producer of supermalt reflected that informants could not care less realizing that we had introduced ourselves as danish researchers one of the informants replied that i do nt know anything about the people behind supermalt is it danish or what other typical reactions to the origin probe involved comments such as whoever manufactures it must be making money of the interviews we conclude that the construction of supermalt is far from unanimous there is a common set of connotations to afro caribbean culture creolization and inter generational socialization but apart from that the supermalt brand seems to be able to take on any guise the individual consumer would prefer to summarize absence of references to the company behind the brand along supermalt is a family thing discussion our study does not allow us to conclude whether the success of the supermalt brand was just a lucky strike or whether the case involves a lesson that can be used to guide other brands aiming at a strong identity within a cultural minority target the case indicates however that an effort to understand the culture of minority customers paired with the creation of when targeting such customers than more traditional no space in your face brand strategies when targeting an ethnic niche one advantage of a branding strategy based on consumers cultural values and co constructive efforts is that such a strategy requires fewer resources compared to one which aims at conveying values that are more or less alien to the target group as a the culture of the ethnic niche in question has several advantages but it is also clear that such a strategy has certain drawbacks most importantly it would normally be more difficult to extend the brand to culturally diverse market segments than if the brand was based on mainstream western or corporate values this would be the case unless the lifestyle of the minority niche in question has another point worth considering is the potential for using brands with identities that are strongly related to the cultural values of the target niche to market other products to this niche that is internal brand extensions whether such a strategy is expedient requires research specifically targeted at the particular segment and products ie as with any attempt to create a brand identity within an ethnic relations between the targets self identity needs and the cultural embeddedness of the product categories in question although our study clearly exposed that some of the facets of the brand identity prism of supermalt ie the facets related to the sender are clearly lacking from the targets construction of the supermalt brand we recommend the brand identity prism for other attempts to prism kapferer adds some normative elements for instance when stressing that a strategy of pursuing consumer ideals and preferences jeopardizes the creation of a differentiated brand identity and that firms should therefore begin to focus more on the sending side of brand marketing and less on the receiving side although this may sending side of brand identity when targeting ethnic niche consumers may lead to new forms of marketing myopia the study reported in this article indicates that when branding products to an ethnic niche marketers can benefit from a conceptualization of brand identity as a coconstructive process of marketer efforts and consumer urban development a multiagent simulation paul hanley lewis hopkins abstract a multiagent simulation model is used to assess the impact on single family residential development patterns of plans for size location and timing of sewer line extensions policies for extension timing and of responses to these plans and policies by landowners and developers the simulation constructs the sewer network over time in relation to the sewerage provider s plans to the construction sewers and housing in previous periods and to the expectations of landowners and developers regarding plans in comparing the temporal and spatial patterns produced by the simulation we found scenario which was the historical policy in the study area most closely replicated the historical development pattern the location of single family residential development was not constrained by the capacity of the sewer network but was constrained the timing policy of sewer expansion and the developers could afford to pay for early sewer expansion when allowed on the basis of expected revenues from single family residential development the model succeeded in incorporating multiagent behaviors of landowners and developers sufficient to compare different sewer expansion policies agents involved in the land development process the simulation we present is designed for working out the implications of infrastructure expansion plans and responses to the information in these plans in order to understand how planning behavior affects patterns of urban development over space and time the two research tasks we address in this paper are is it feasible to develop a tractable simulation model of land development processes that is sensitive responding
proportionality and to admit its own inability to do what long experience has shown it must to acknowledge that it cannot interpret the constitution convincingly enough to justify for itself the public and the executioner the crude violence administered every day by courts the supreme court oversees if that justificatory task is indeed beyond present human then the court itself is condemned it is trapped compulsions to embrace and to escape unless unless the court can somehow muster the strength to face up to the public and political branches and announce what its failings and those of its innovative review technologies would then prove the constitution cannot be interpreted to justify the death penalty and the penalty must be abolished unless the court has the courage to slay its deadly partner courts and social justice the honorable jack jacobs demonstrates that state corporate law sometimes acquires an extraterritorial reach the federalist model of corporation law assumes that each state s law only reaches to that state s border but reality has diverged from that model through state anti takeover statutes the internal affairs doctrine and state corporate outreach statutes that impose internal governance requirements on companies incorporated in other states anti takeover statutes the internal affairs doctrine and state corporate outreach statutes that impose internal governance requirements on companies incorporated in other states anti takeover statutes are essentially grounded upon the internal affairs doctrine which holds that such affairs are governed by a company s state of incorporation but the corporate outreach statutes attempt to supersede the law of the state of incorporation exposing companies to conflicting the supreme court could resolve this conflict by deeming the internal affairs doctrine either a choice of law rule or a rule of constitutional law the former choice could lead to economic disruption while the latter would increase interstate competition for incorporation business and sustain the current diversity of legal choices available to corporations introduction that the united states s federal system consists of fifty states each governed only by its own law and not by the law of any other state overlying this state law tapestry is a structure of federal law that operates in its own distinct sphere someone from another planet viewing this structure for the first time might wonder how fifty separate jurisdictions can operate harmoniously without getting in each other s way the answer we would tell our extraterrestrial visitor is each state s law reaches only to that state s border but no further in theory at least that is how our federalist model is supposed to work but as with much in life the reality is more complex than the theory this is particularly true in the case of corporate law because in that arena state law will often acquire an extraterritorial reach that is at odds with the theory this topic is of more than academic interest my subject how the corporate law and governance our states interact with the each other in a federal system bears importantly on the efficient operation of the american economy in this current economic environment this is a subject that concerns us all in this short essay i will cover three topics first i will develop the historical background behind the current model of how state corporate laws are supposed to interact next i will discuss how reality has come to diverge from the model through efforts to endow state corporate through anti takeover statutes the internal affairs doctrine and corporate outreach statutes finally i will attempt to answer the so what question what are the practical implications of this divergence and where might those developments take us in the future i columbia all overlaid by a separate body of federal law by corporate law i mean state statutes and judicial decisions that regulate matters such as forming a corporation the powers and duties of officers and directors the rights of stockholders the corporate decision making process raising capital by issuing stock and other securities corporate elections corporate mergers sales of assets and the like corporate law must be distinguished from comm law which is the body of rules that governs the corporation s external economic relationships with parties outside the corporate family such as suppliers and customers a key characteristic of this corporate federalist model is that a state s corporate law governs only those corporations that are formed under that particular state s corporate law the main reason for this is historical until the twentieth century all american corporate law was local in fact until the nineteenth century state corporate statutes did not even exist to form a corporation in any state a special act of that state s legislature was required this regime was problematic because it tethered economic expansion to access to the political system in our political system tradeoffs are often required to persuade a legislature to act for nineteenth century entrepreneurs those tradeoffs imposed delays and other costs that burdened the development of large private enterprise industrial revolution our country had reached the stage of economic development where huge amounts of capital were needed to finance railroads steel foundries and other basic industries that would form our national economic infrastructure raising capital of that magnitude required creating incentives to invest significant sums of money in firms over which investors would have little or no control a key incentive turned out to be a new easily available business entity form that liability of investors and also enabled them to exit their investment easily and relatively cost free by selling their interest to a different investor that entity form was the publicly held stock corporation by this point it also had become clear that requiring entrepreneurs to resort to the political process to form these new stock corporations was highly inefficient eventually the requirement that corporations be created by special legislative act was jettisoned and in its the states adopted general corporation laws that allowed any citizen who followed the prescribed statutory rules to form
pay for this treachery and invokes zeus as the protector of oaths there is certainly an ironic disjunction between his perspective and that of the audience since they know that zeus far from enforcing the oath in this case has consented to its being broken scholars focus on this aspect and in doing so often overlook the fact that zeus sanctions the oath breaking for an ulterior purpose and one less exclusively personal than that of hera and athena who are eager to avenge paris for besides his personal debt to thetis and his promise to honour her son s wishes by favoring the trojans in battle zeus has a further reason to encourage the breaking of the truce the wider narrative indicates that he approves of troy s fall both because of the trojans errors and because it is part of a larger cosmic order which is his to thus hera and athena s personal hatred of troy operates within a larger moral of the trojans errors and because it is part of a larger cosmic order which is his to thus hera and athena s personal hatred of troy operates within a larger moral framework that extends through out the narrative and the universe it the trojans responsibility for the broken truce is compounded by priam s personal failure to return helen after the duel the advice given by wise antenor not only constitutes an admission of trojan guilt but also us give argive helen and all her possessions with her to the sons of atreus to take away now we are fighting after cheating over our sworn oaths so i do not see any good outcome for us unless we do as i say when paris declares himself willing to return only the goods taken from sparta priam s complicity is culpable the trojan herald idaeus charged with relaying the response of the trojan yopil which is no more than the gii underlines the king s egregious error in denying his son s guilt the possessions that alexander brought in his hollow ships to troy if only he had died before that all these he is willing to give back and to add yet more from his own but the wedded wife of glorious menelaus he says he will not give back though the trojans in fact urge him to do precisely that it could not be clearer that priam has made a disastrous mistake allowing paris to defy the oath and doing so in the face of popular no less than paris priam is responsible for the destruction of troy his city he acts wrongly and he and everyone else who depends on him must suffer the as the poem progresses there are priam is responsible for the destruction of troy his city he acts wrongly and he and everyone else who depends on him must suffer the as the poem progresses there are several more indications of trojan deceit during agamemnon s major aristeia in book he comes upon two sons of antimachus who in expectation of gold from alexander splendid gifts was most helen back to fair haired menelaus paris bribery of his fellow trojans brings disgrace on his entire community but antimachus own conduct emerges as particularly blameworthy for as agamemnon says if you are indeed the sons of wise ather s abominable outrage antimachus reception of the embassy contrasts strongly with that of antenor but the pattern of trojan crimes calling forth punishment is re enforced agamemnon kills antimachus sons one of them in a peculiarly brutal manner hippolochus leapt down and him he killed on the ground slicing off his arms and head with his sword and sent him the throng like a the pattern of trojan deceit and punishment is also shown to extend back beyond the current generation poseidon puzzled by apollo s continuing support for the trojans reminds him of how laomedon had cheated them both of proper payment after they built a wall around troy and tended the king s cattle though poseidon sent a sea monster to punish the trojans heracles destroyed it yet he in turn was defrauded of his reward by and by sacking troy nevertheless poseidon s anger against troy remains unappeased so that here we have a case of divine anger extending over more than one the descendants of laomedon pay for his crimes as well as their own and the narrative shows that divine justice is not always instantaneous an idea that is often treated as if it first surfaced in hesiod and solon zeus and the fall of troy in determine zeus s own attitude to troy scholars are often misled by the fact that zeus nowhere expresses explicit anger at the city or happiness at its fall thus with regard to agamemnon s prediction that troy will be destroyed by zeus in anger at the trojans deceit a recent discussion observes that we unlike agamemnon can see zeus s real attitude when this zeus brings about the fall of troy it will be with sorrow and not with righteous yet such a confusing two very different ideas for zeus s pre sumed feelings of pity at the city s destruction and his conviction that the fall of troy is right are not mutually exclusive zeus speaks on one occasion as if he wants to save troy but his real motive is evidently to annoy hera and athena and so facilitate the breaking of the truce he also makes clear in the same context his strong affection for the trojans because they offer him lavish sacrifices but change the fact that he approves of troy s fall thus one scholar seeks to connect the fact that zeus makes no attempt to conceal his love of troy with the god s alleged ambivalence about the punishment of the oath yet this is to create a false opposition since zeus can love troy and still
understand the factors contributing to young nurses exodus from their first job the medical center s nursing recruitment and retention committee reviewed the job satisfaction of new graduate nurses during the first months of their employment the findings revealed that career adjustment beyond mastering clinical skills mentoring and professional development opportuni ties were very important factors for their job satisfaction as a result the committee decided to benchmark how other organizations were addressing the on boarding of novice nurses at a national association for children s hospitals and related institutions conference a year long rn residency model was presented by a california children s hospital that reduced rn turnover in the first year of based on this report medical center leaders decided to redesign nursing orientation to support both competency development and role transition of new graduate nurses a design team comprising nursing leaders educators advanced practice nurses nursing preceptors and social workers developed a new approach for supporting recent graduate nurses in their first year of employment before the rn internship before the internship program was novice and experienced nurses attended the same nursing orientation classes these classes were held in the first few weeks of employment nursing preceptors individualized the orientation for new nurses with a job specific orientation the preceptor taught clinical skills and tasks that were documented in an orientation checklist this approach put more emphasis on learning specific skills rather than on becoming competent in caring for patients and families with different acuity the nurse s experience and specialty area nursing orientation averaged weeks to months the operating room was an outlier to this average lasting months orientation was offered twice a month throughout the year and was coordinated by area based clinical nurse educators these instructors coordinated the classes made preceptor assignments and monitored the new nurses progression through orientation rn internship the internship program was designed as a program s theoretical underpinnings are based on benner s novice to expert research knowles adult learning principles and marlene kramer s classic research on reality shock the resulting program begun in was partially funded by a year health resources and services administration nursing practice education and retention grant the year long orientation supports the competency and professional development of novice nurses in medical surgical inpatient areas practice education and retention grant the year long orientation supports the competency and professional development of novice nurses in medical surgical inpatient areas critical care areas the operating room emergency department and resource team the length of the precepted orientation increased in all areas except the operating room this internship program is offered quarterly in march july september and november include classroom learning and skills labs a precepted orientation professional transitioning sessions clinical learning exchanges clinical mentors and a code debriefing program classroom learning the rn internship program classroom instruction focuses on the development of clinical competence to support the delivery of family centered care in a tertiary care setting the goal is to advance the rn intern s clinical practice experience and build the undergraduate nursing program the core curriculum is approximately hours of classroom content and includes topics such as family centered care patient family education pediatric physical assessment patient safety pain management sedation management child abuse and neglect cultural diversity and car seat safety the courses are taught by advanced practice nurses expert clinical nurses and other members of the allied health team as well as parent members of the family advisory board these class days are scheduled during the first couple weeks of orientation at intervals of month months months and year in addition to the core curriculum specialty curriculums for the inpatient units and critical care areas provide population specific education varying in length from to hours interns have the flexibility of completing pediatric courses such as age specific care online educational web based subscription program emergency management skills are developed as well rn interns are required to attend pediatric advance life support classes within their first year of employment depending on the nurse s pediatric subspecialty area other courses are required such as the neonatal resuscitation program sugar temperature artificial breathing lab emotional support national child assessment satellite training and emergency nursing pediatric course clinical mentor guiding these young nurses through their orientation are experienced rns who are committed to the development of the rn intern through a mentor program the rn interns become integrated into their first professional nursing position mentors provide a listening ear an objective voice and valuable insights for balancing work life priorities novice nurses are introduced to this clinical mentoring program during their first week of orientation the mentoring the process outlines guidelines for a mentoring relationship and supplies concrete examples of how a mentor can assist with career development the mentoring coordinator recruits nursing mentors from experienced staff nurses advanced practice nurses administrative leaders and educators the coordinator provides the rn interns with a list of mentors described by areas of expertise from this list the rn intern selects a mentor mentors do not work on the new rn s unit subsequent meetings occur in several different venues such as meeting for lunch or for coffee exchanging mails talking on the phone and sharing off site social activities the coordinator of the mentor program oversees and supports the development of each relationship through consultation support education and resources that include a handbook for the mentor and mentee some of the issues of concern to new graduate nurses and addressed by their mentors include education and resources that include a handbook for the mentor and mentee some of the issues of concern to new graduate nurses and addressed by their mentors include adjusting to shift work living on one s own for the first time commuting to work fear of making mistakes or not doing well wanting to fit in on the unit and learning to live in a new city mentees often describe the mentor as someone who made a difference and is available to celebrate their
of the reasons for the difference between the actual and perceived level of support for these students slps are rarely employed by schools within nsw whether in the public or private sector slps are predominantly employed within the nsw health sector but a number of these services are only provided for preschool children once these children go to school their access to speech language pathology services often is limited clinical implications implications these data indicated that australian teachers identified children in their primary school classrooms as either stuttering or having a voice or speechsound disorder they also indicated that more than half of these children needed curriculum adaptations and additional support to enhance their educational outcomes however in many cases these additional supports were not able to be provided it would be of incidence of and support for children with speech disorders and to determine whether these were complementary for example law et al discussed the lower reporting of communication disorders in jamaica and suggested that because that country had fewer resources they were more stringent in the identification criteria for documenting cases with speech disorders who required more intensive communication support than they were receiving the data also highlighted that within the school district there were procedures that limited the prompt identification of students consequently a number of positive changes have occurred within the school district since these data were collected the special needs survey created conditions within the catholic schools office to implement better with communication disorders now classroom teachers work in consultation with learning support teachers and education officers to identify students with communication disorders before employing a consultant slp to collaborate in their assessment and development of intervention strategies the current situation is more expedient allowing the designated education students should be assessed by an slp at the time of the data collection this process could have taken a number of months this catholic school system can be seen as a model for catering to the needs of children with speech disorders in a broader state education system where support is not available it also suggests that slps might play a role in the collaborative team who is charged with constructing educational programs for children wider educational community conclusion to summarize the students in this study were identified as stuttering identified as having a voice disorder and identified as having a speech sound disorder identification occurred initially via classroom teachers and was confirmed by evidence from speech language pathology reports the pattern of prevalence of the three speech disorders was significantly decreasing prevalence of identified speech disorders with increasing grade level and there was no significant difference in the pattern of prevalence across the three speech disorders and four socioeconomic groups however students who were identified with a speech disorder were more likely to be in the higher ses groups the special needs survey serves as a specific example of how large scale studies can procedures to facilitate support for teachers in including children with speech disorders within their classrooms raising and grammar competition in korean evidence from negation and quantifier scope chung hye han then scope facts concerning negation and a quantified object np could provide evidence regarding the height of the verb even so such facts are rare especially in the input to children and so we might expect that not all speakers exposed to a head final language acquire the same grammar as far as raising is concerned here we present evidence supporting this expectation using experimental data concerning the year old children we show that there are two populations of korean speakers one with raising and one without introduction the argument from the poverty of the stimulus has maintained a central place in the development of generative grammar at least since chomsky the argument runs like this there is a piece of grammatical knowledge that can be attributed to adult speakers of a language examination of the input to the child shows that the ambient language does not uniquely determine that is the primary linguistic data that the child is exposed to are compatible with a range of hypotheses that includes given that adults know and that represents only one point in a range of hypotheses compatible with the experience it follows that must be determined innately in other words all of the other hypotheses compatible with the primary linguistic data are a priori learners acquire because it is the unique point of intersection between the primary linguistic data and the innate hypothesis space in this article we present a novel consequence of the poverty of the stimulus we will consider a case in which the learner s innate hypothesis space arguably provides at least two hypotheses that are compatible with the primary linguistic data in this case experience does not determine which of these is the correct grammar consequently some learners acquire one grammar and others acquire the other in short even given a restricted and innately determined hypothesis space experience is sometimes insufficient for grammar transmission from one generation to the next in particular we will examine the position of the verb in korean in a head final language like korean raising is hard to detect since there is no evidence from simple sov strings that in which it has raised to i this is so both for children acquiring the language and for linguists developing an analysis of it indeed syntacticians examining korean have made claims in both directions some arguing that there is no raising and others arguing that raising does occur as we will show neither the evidence for a raising the evidence for an analysis without raising is definitive all of the data used in the argumentation in the literature have explanations consistent with the either analysis one potential source of information that would be more instructive concerns the syntax of negation because korean has a cliticlike negation that associates with the verb in syntax scope facts concerning negation and a quantified object np could provide evidence
all the global standards by ifis to this degree the global template for reforms that has emerged from international organizations bears more than a little resemblance to a globalized localism namely an elevation of certain principles in us law to the world at large this has occurred partly because us lawyers headed the imf the world bank and the ebrd initiatives and the us treasury was privy to each phase of global reforms particularly those led by the imf world bank and uncitral the us state department led by far the most high powered delegation to uncitral s working group on insolvency often coordinating many us experts before each meeting to reach a negotiating influential in crafting uncitral s legislative guide yet this influence must be carefully parsed because counterbalancing influences adjustments and alternative orientations came from other international organizations such as the abd from other delegations to uncitral and from other professional groups such as insol nonetheless it remains safe to conclude that while the us could not and did and depth of its influence over the broad principles that govern the global template the intersection of global iterations and national cycles of lawmaking we have argued that the globalization of bankruptcy law is expressed in a set of three cycles at the national level through recursive cycles of lawmaking at the global level through iterative cycles of norm making and at the intersection of the two where a variable and uneven balance experiences influence global norm making and global norms constrain national lawmaking we style patterns of norm making at the global level not as recursivity but as instances of iterative negotiations that are exogenous to national recursive lawmaking like national lawmaking global norm making is often driven by crises ifis proceed inductively drawing selectively on their engagement with national lawmaking in response to market problems recursive loops across countries by selectively aggregating lawmaking experiences in one country or another their filtering process has strong regional and national biases for countries are not equal in their import whereas latin american experiences influenced initial solutions in asia african countries are almost never used as exemplars big transitional countries offer commensurately big lessons but most smaller countries offer little geopolitically important weigh more heavily as models for ifis than small or marginal nations altogether the accumulation of lawmaking experiences from systemically important countries drives a global learning curve that informs the institutionalization of global standards alongside lessons inductively learned by repeated interventions of from across a region to describe their experiences not only to each other but to global norm makers on the other hand and more systematically agencies of the united nations provide a parliamentary forum in which a representative cross section of the world s nations can directly participate in the crafting of global scripts to protect themselves from accusations of imposing one size fits all solutions on hapless nation states increasingly however the global norms championed by particular institutions have been made visible through publications conferences and diagnostic appraisals in the cases of indonesia and korea the implicit global norms in and had become explicit by and thereafter more recently as a global consensus the global norms have been articulated as a unified standard to guide national lawmaking already national lawmakers feel compelled to show how their prospective reforms conform principle by principle to the global standards of the world bank or uncitral since uncitral in mid reached agreement on a legislative guide to insolvency the single global standard is likely be propagated by all of the five clusters of players in the global at their disposal relations between the global and national are both cooperative and contested an asymmetry of knowledge and power exists in which global actors can more strongly influence enactment while national actors more effectively control implementation thus one prime motor of legal change in insolvency reforms results from the inherent tension between exogenous supra national institutions and within national lawmaking changes in bankruptcy law have followed a recursive pattern as four mechanisms of change push forward cycles of reform within global constraints first indeterminacy of law exists in rule making of any kind but can be compounded when the interpretation and application of that law proceeds on a terrain of struggle between winners and losers in the law reforms or between those actors integrated may be amplified by a poor fit between imported law and indigeneous legal traditions leading to the so called transplant effect second it matters who gets to define situations of practice and to craft the diagnoses of the problem to be solved by lawmaking diagnosis in respective principals but professions also act in their own right for lawmaking always provides potential opportunity for the establishment of jurisdictional rights over work other actors also contest diagnoses but frequently they too must rely on expert services to legitimate their definitions of situations the diagnostic phase usually involves exclusion of some actors whether because they did not various incapacities or they were deliberately excluded to exclude actors means that facts and interpretations are also excluded which in turn distorts and contrains the colligation and classification processes that constitute diagnosis third actor mismatch occurs when parties to practice are missing from at other times they may have provided a diagnosis but did not participate when prescriptions are developed a double effect occurs that affects implementation the quality of the prescription is likely to be lower since it rests on an a weaker foundation and disenfranchisement from participation in the design of treatment will lower its legitimacy for certain parties reduce compliance and engender resistance at the point of get internalized within the law these emanate both from tensions between the global and the local and from the compounding effect of these on efforts to reconcile domestic conflicting ideologies and policies in pieces of law or the institutions that administer law thus developing countries have sought to negotiate their way among conflicting ideologies structural contradictions and contesting actors to erect insolvency regimes that
way powell posed this question in considering the appropriate standard of review the brennan four insisted that oppression and remediation were constitutionally distinct with the consequence that race conscious state action should not appropriate standard of review the brennan four insisted that oppression and remediation were constitutionally distinct with the consequence that race conscious state action should not be subject to the same stringent review reserved for caste powell concluded however that the government s reasons for using race must in all cases meet the most exacting judicial examination in advocating the same standard in all cases powell effectively argued that for constitutional first the carotene products footnote four question whether the harmed group comprised a discrete and insular minority requiring extraordinary protection from the majoritarian political process in carolene products justice stone famously distinguished between ordinary social legislation that merited judicial deference and legislation targeting vulnerable minorities that required heightened powell in in san antonio independent school district rodriguez had this approach insisting that heightened review depended upon demonstrating that the purportedly harmed group was saddled with such disabilities or subjected to such a history of purposeful unequal treatment or relegated to such a position of political powerlessness as to command extraordinary protection from the majoritarian political but in bakke powell contended that this inquiry was superfluous in race cases racial and ethnic distinctions of any sort are and thus call for the most exacting judicial he explained that his perception of racial and ethnic distinctions is rooted in our nation s constitutional and demographic invoking as the fourteenth amendment s pervading purpose the freedom of the slave race and the protection of the newly made freeman and citizen from the oppressions of those who had formerly exercised dominion over according to powell any state employment of racial and the protection of the newly made freeman and citizen from the oppressions of those who had formerly exercised dominion over according to powell any state employment of racial criteria rendered an initial inquiry into the social status of the targeted group unnecessary instead the application of strict scrutiny followed automatically in such circumstances but if the state s use of race deserved the highest level of scrutiny because of slavery and racial oppression same level of justification for affirmative action ethnicity provided powell s answer immediately after referencing the nation s constitutional and demographic history powell introduced a revised narrative evoking a new nation of minorities that supposedly emerged in the twentieth century powell observed that after reconstruction the equal protection clause fell into a period of desuetude not again attaining vitality until in carotene during the of the equal protection clause powell wrote the nation had changed he united states had become a nation of minorities each had to struggle and to some extent struggles still to overcome the prejudices not of a monolithic majority but of a majority composed of various minority groups of whom it was said perhaps unfairly in many cases that a shared characteristic was a willingness to disadvantage other groups as the nation filled with the stock of many lands the reach of the groups purportedly protected celtic irishmen chinese austrian resident aliens japanese and powell omitted blacks preferring to reference other non whites denominated in terms of country of origin yet the facts of the race cases powell cited yick wo overturning an ordinance administered with an evil eye and an unequal hand against chinese korematsu upholding the mass internment of japanese americans in a crusade denounced by ordinance administered with an evil eye and an unequal hand against chinese korematsu upholding the mass internment of japanese americans in a crusade denounced by justice murphy as falling into the ugly abyss of racism and hernandez texas striking down jim crow laws excluding mexican americans from texas do not exhibit the dynamics of ethnic pluralism so much as the virulence of racism targeting groups on the nether side of the color line in s usage however these non black minorities helped make more plausible the claim that race operated similarly for all ethnic groups that the experiences of the irish and austrians resembled that of the chinese japanese and mexicans in the united states and by extension tracked the fate of blacks as well powell used ethnicity to rewrite the american history of race in the twentieth century he disaggregated the white majority into various minority groups who struggle against prejudice while converting racial minorities into groups that shared an identical american experience with white ethnics the color line erased the united states now progressed harmoniously as a nation filled with the stock of many lands and the constitution gave equal concern to all ethnic groups seeking protection from official discrimination ethnic groups in powell s usage constituted no casual synonym for race but instead a heavily laden term signifying a conception of group discrimination against members of the white majority once more with majority in invoking again the felicitous story of twentieth century ethnic competition powell asseverated that is far too late to argue that the guarantee of equal protection to all persons permits the recognition of special wards entitled to a degree of protection greater than that accorded he buttressed this sentence with a footnote reprinting alexander bickel s entire whose ox paragraph powell s reference to special wards oddly echoed the language of justice bradley when he chastised blacks for seeking to be the special favorite of the laws in the civil rights cases the reconstruction era decision concocting the state action doctrine to defeat remedial legislation aimed at protecting blacks in the public this echo intimates that though powell wrote almost a century after bradley and in a very different racial context he not only lacked at protecting blacks in the public this echo intimates that though powell wrote almost a century after bradley and in a very different racial context he not only lacked understanding of or sympathy for the iniquitous reality confronting blacks but he too may
and most choruses involve the incorporation of new instrumental rather than vocal parts only three movements have both types of where pindar inserts extra wood purcell s odes for more details on purcell s scoring innovations of the and their apparent relationship to draghi s ode from harmony from heavenly harmony see peter holman henry purcell and fiddlers the violin at the english court table scoring changes made by pindar in hail bright cecilia welcome to all the pleasures and the yorkshire feast song ode movement purcell s scoring pindar s scoring up your voices no verse marking of old when heroes the bashful thames and in each tract choruses originally with thou tun st this world welcome to all the pleasures in a consort of voices of old when heroes let music join in a chorus choruses originally with accompaniment by strings and other instruments hail bright cecilia hail bright cecilia of old when heroes sound all sound to him table ode movement purcell s scoring pindar s scoring large scale instrumentald movements without oboehail bright cecilia overture welcome to all the pleasures symphony large scale instrumentale movements originally including trumpet but no timpaniof old when heroes symphony fanfare after sound ensemble movements of old when heroes the pale and the purple rose abbreviations bass soprano continuo tenor bassoon kettledrum countertenor trumpet chorus viola oboe violin purcell s choruses in these three odes is left unaltered and pindar s additions fall into three categories in choruses originally written for accompaniment by continuo alone pindar adds string parts principally doubling the vocal parts but with frequent swapping between parts and transposition to higher octaves the passage from then lift up your voices shown in ex is typical of of the string parts since it retains the pairing of violin with soprano violin with countertenor and viola with tenor while incorporating octave transposition in both first and second violins pindar s musical limitations are shown in the rather awkward melodic shape in the first violin part and it is also notable that he retains purcell s original tenor part in the viola in bars where he changes the corresponding vocal part for which purcell provided string accompaniment pindar adds oboe parts in hail bright cecilia and includes oboes with further additions in the two later entries into lcm the final chorus of welcome to all the pleasures in a consort of voices has a bassoon part which unlike in purcell s sources is notated separately from the continuo and is independent of and let music join in a chorus from the yorkshire feast song has a third which mainly shares the material of purcell s second violin and viola doubling some passages at pitch more significant for our study of come ye sons of art however are pindar s added oboe parts apart from in thou tun st this world where oboes share staves with the violins pindar always places his added oboes on two staves immediately above the vocal parts so below the where purcell includes separately notated oboe lines however they are placed above and pindar follows purcell s ordering where original oboe parts occur in lcm pindar s added oboes often double or are close to purcell s violin parts which themselves frequently double the voices but where purcell writes independent passages for strings pindar s oboes virtually always follow the chorus rather than the violins as can be seen in ex from soul of the limited further additions and these examples are restricted to the final movements of hail bright cecilia and of old when heroes in the former chorus where purcell uses his largest ever orchestra of trumpets oboes strings continuo and kettledrums pindar adds bassoons initially within the continuo part but with a separate stave placed beneath the oboes for the final rendition of the tutti section hail bright cecilia these parts use some material the original continuo part and some independent writing apparently of his own composition since they include parallel fifths and other part writing problems in the final chorus of the yorkshire feast song sound all sound to him he adds two oboes and kettledrums to purcell s scoring for trumpets strings and ex continuo the oboe parts follow the same pattern as the movements described in section above while the added kettledrums part uses the repeated semiquaver figuration of purcell s continuo which clearly emulates the sound of the with one exception all pindar s other scoring changes in these three odes are made to large scale movements for instruments alone all three of have additional and the short instrumental fanfare ex added oboe parts in soul of the world from hail bright cecilia lcm pp following the announcement sound trumpet sound in the yorkshire feast song also contains scoring pindar s additions are of two types he indicates that oboes should double the violin parts in the symphony of welcome the yorkshire feast song in hail bright cecilia oboes share staves with the trumpets the other parts being for strings continuo and he adds kettledrums in movements already including trumpet and strings where no timpani part is provided by purcell the original symphony from of old when heroes and the fanfare later the same ode the most notable characteristic of pindar s kettledrum parts particularly in the symphony is that drum phrases do not always take account of the underlying phrase structure either harmonically or rhythmically with the predominant rhythm quaver semiquaver semiquaver passages such as bars appear to have almost random alternation of tonic and dominant notes
snyder show that it is not commonly used in the subfield journals however the situation is again very different with the disciplinary journals formal methods are commonly used in comparative articles in apsr and not uncommon in ajps as a consequence scholars who use these methods or may command disproportionate influence in the field in addition cps publishes an increasingly large percentage of articles that use informal or formal deductive methods these facts may explain the great attention that rational choice theory in comparative politics has received an occurrence that otherwise would seem puzzling in light of its relative absence in certain subfield journals right to call on scholars to take methods seriously and to put methodological issues on center stage in future debates about comparative politics nevertheless i argue that some of their specific criticisms of qualitative research methods are based on partial or problematic indicators i suggest that better measurement itself requires a more qualitative approach observation and thus fail to employ within case analysis in their research yet their measurement of within case analysis as the percentage of articles that employ country time periods or subnational regions seems problematic as a large methodological literature suggests the fundamental basis of within case analysis is the identification of causal process observations with causal away from the country level of analysis nor to substantially increase the to achieve powerful leverage for causal inference in fact a small number of causal process observations at the country level may lend decisive support for or against a given theory regarding the scope of generalization munck and snyder conclude that conclusion from evidence that shows that most researchers analyze only a small number of cases however they do not code the domain of cases to which comparativists believe their arguments are applicable it is quite possible that scholars who analyze single cases or small ns occasionally or even frequently attempt to provide broader generalizations than the cases under analysis in fact some methodologists kinds of generalizations one may be skeptical of the validity of these generalizations by case study and small researchers but that concern raises a separate set of methodological issues about how best to generalize many previous efforts at analyzing within case analysis and causal process observations have taken place though the in depth analysis of particular pieces of research the basic process of measurement has involved a close reading of particular works in a way that is akin to qualitative data analysis likewise to the extent that methodologists have assessed the scope of generalization in case study and small research they have done so by in particular exemplary works are intended to apply more generally or only to the cases at hand in the future it would certainly be desirable to accumulate a large number of these close inspections at present however firm conclusions about the extent of within case analysis and the scope of generalization in comparative research seem premature certain methodological impediments one can hardly disagree with them that the field would benefit if data were better linked to concepts hypotheses were more explicitly and clearly formulated and variable scores were more systematically reported to the extent that qualitative research falls short in the last two of these areas the remedy probably involves better training in qualitative methods at the graduate level two other challenges linked to qualitative research are more controversial the infamous small problem and the infamous data mining problem the small problem has been extensively debated elsewhere with opinions differing widely my own view is that munck and snyder s data do that animate this debate for example scholars who defend the use of small comparisons often emphasize causal process observations hypotheses about necessary and or sufficient causation and the data requirements for testing complex theories these issues are not picked up in the munck snyder database however the practice can be better defended if one s goal is as it often is in qualitative research identifying the causes of specific outcomes as opposed to estimating the average effects of independent variables modifying one s theory in the course of making multiple passes through the data may be condemnable given the goal of estimating average effects it is particular cases conclusion setting an agenda in addition to teaching us much about contemporary comparative politics munck and snyder s work should be taken as a call for future scholars to better ground their characterizations of the subfield in systematic data i have argued here that these future efforts could benefit by examining a larger range of journals by developing some alternative measures and by measuring close reading of individual studies in addition i believe that future efforts could benefit by measuring a series of other research practices for example in statistical research one might wish to study questions such as what percentage of articles employ interaction effects what is the average number of independent variables used in statistical models what specific statistical techniques are used to test hypotheses these researchers develop deterministic arguments how often do they formulate path dependent arguments how frequently do they emphasize leadership and choice as key explanatory factors these questions are merely suggestive of some of the directions that one might wish to take this kind of analysis in the future nevertheless they do illustrate the better promise for characterizing the subfield by following the fine example of munck and of political research thalidomide bse and the single market an historical institutionalist approach to regulatory regimes in the european union abstract the success of the european union in regulating the safety of products in the single market differs widely in the last decade the regulatory regime for pharmaceuticals has functioned without raising public concerns the establishment of a european agency for pharmaceuticals in the early has been evaluated positively by both consumers and there have been no large scandals so far at the same time the food sector was subject to a whole range of crises of which the bse scandal was
presented here i conclude does not follow one monological order it can not be reduced to a single raison d tre this does not exclude but rather promotes discursive unity the three modes in changing combinations provide the legal procedure with discursive facts that turn all these problems into one determinable matter of tanzanian journalists employ various tactics of intersubjectivity to achieve mutual understanding during a conversation at work the analysis focuses on one particularly challenging episode of talk wherein political figures and clothing styles from the early days of african independence are referenced and an ensuing joke about body image is made using the phrase kumaintain figure to maintain figure in of the phrase and challenges the relevance of western body aesthetics for africans all participants laugh at the joke but the basis for their laughter is ambiguous the participants interpretations of the joke are examined through ethnographic methods within the framework of entextualization the analysis shows that the participants have produced somewhat different indexical orders introduction the situated and dynamic nature of context is well illustrated in multilingual settings particularly those in the postcolonial world where language alternation that involves indigenous and previously colonial languages often carries a variety of meanings in urban tanzania the use of swahili and english or swahinglish that language mixing creates quite well for example the juxtaposition of swahili and english may be nothing out of the ordinary but rather may reveal the establishment of what auer calls a fused lect a phenomenon also demonstrated by blommaert maschler and swigart among the same set of speakers however the use of these two languages in other interactional contexts may constitute what auer pragmatic meaning at the level of sequence such alternation in tanzania may also carry macro linguistic significance by recounting the history of british rule in east africa at other times the mixture may relate more clearly to the globalizing forces of modernity more often than not though the larger contexts triggered by the talk are not made audible within a conversation for they are typically in abstract realm of discourse the mostly unspoken ways of thinking acting interacting valuing feeling believing and using symbols that speakers integrate with language because these unspoken contexts are potentially multiple and contradictory they are an interactional challenge for listeners and speakers alike although language mixing is a seemingly difficult interactional challenge to better understand the processes involved in achieving intersubjectivity this article examines how a group of tanzanian journalists find common ground in one particularly challenging episode of talk wherein a joke is made using swahinglish all of the participants laugh at the joke but the basis for their shared laughter is ambiguous at best the humor can be said to draw upon several different discourses in urban tanzanian society including those of western are connected to the historical and political discourses of african socialism and those of urban modernity which are linked to contemporary discourses of globalization the context in which the journalists interpret the humorous moment is further complicated by these speakers swahili english repertoires which include uses of swahinglish that are sometimes classifiable as a fused lect and other times as code switching therefore it remains directly results from the juxtaposition of these languages tanzania past and present in contexts such as tanzania there is great potential for language mixing to illuminate the current symbolic value of english and swahili tanzania provides a particularly interesting case because of drastic changes in official policy and in public attitudes toward english and the west in the past years since gaining independence from britain in tanzania has shifted from economic autonomy and what can be broadly characterized as an anti english language policy to capitalism economic liberalization and institutionalized swahili english bilingualism these economic political and linguistic shifts have significantly altered the sociopolitical context in which language mixing is produced and interpreted previously ruled by the germans tanzania was handed league of nations english became the medium of instruction in secondary and tertiary education as well as a language of parliament high courts and other contexts such as hospitals in practice though english was accessible to only a minority of tanzanians because of limited resources fewer than students were enrolled in secondary schools in and by only tanzanians held secondary school diplomas use in tanzania prior to european rule as a result of caravan routes and the arab slave trade it was officially installed by julius nyerere tanzania s first president after independence as a language for unifying the ethnolinguistic groups in the nation in the nyerere championed the use of swahili in education arguing that swahili was a transmitter for tanzanian and pan africanist values that could be met nyerere established ujamaa familyhood a plan that would economically transform the nation by basically withdrawing from the world market through establishing an economy of kujitegemea self reliance and through a villagization scheme that would create cooperative farming communities nyerere was clearly inspired by marxism leninism but his version of socialism was based on traditional african practices secondary to these goals as it did not factor into the country s policies since the however the symbolic value of english has been steadily growing stronger and currently english is seen as one of the primary means for achieving success in a globalizing world increasing reliance on aid from western donors has required the tanzanian government to liberalize and privatize its many previously government run industries and these economic transformations have increased the perceived importance of english as a tool for success in the global marketplace while only the school aged tanzanian population is currently enrolled in secondary schools many tanzanians believe english to be crucial for educational and socioeconomic this can be seen in the growth in number of nation only primary schools were registered in but by schools were listed as english medium bilingual humor societies that have experienced tensions in the political economy of languages have provided rich contexts for sociolinguistic and linguistic anthropological studies to investigate the degree
of his paintings that attempt to capture the spirit of rural america are often loaded with local history and folklore that can tell us much about the society in which he lived in the case of shuffleton s barbershop this would be the artist s adopted arlington and east arlington is nestled just west of the green taken together these three towns had a population of about in in many respects a typical even quintessential small self sufficient new england and yet beginning in the arlington distinguished itself with an influx of several high profile residents of national and international fame in addition to rockwell arlington was home to writer and philanthropist composer carl ruggles painter rockwell kent and several other post illustrators who followed rockwell to vermont among them george hughes mead schaeffer and jack atherton these culturally significant figures likewise attracted an impressive array of prestigious guests to the remote and yet rockwell lived in arlington without glitz or glamour embracing small town life and integrating himself seamlessly into it living on a farm in a covered bridge joining friends at the green mountain diner downtown acting in community plays and serving on the dance committee but perhaps most of all rockwell enjoyed the solitude that arlington provided having been raised on the upper west side of manhattan he was now free from the crowds and clamor of the city and could pursue his busy illustrating schedule with minimal also able to find much inspiration in the people places and situations found in small town vermont life inspiration that was ideal for the everyday anecdotal illustrations that the editors of the saturday evening post scrap of paper eventually used to propose the idea to his editors gathering models props and set pieces taking dozens or even hundreds of photographs of the models as arranged in the aforementioned projecting these photographs onto a full sized sheet of paper with the aid of a balopticon and drawing them one by one into the composition in color the final illustration which would later be reduced to fit onto the cover of the according to rockwell an ideal cover would contain an element of humor and pathos making the viewer smile and sigh at the same not necessarily play themselves in paintings instead rockwell typically selected his models based on the suitability of a subject s facial features and expressions for example round faced gene pelham rockwell s photography assistant for many years appears costumed in many different guises as a cigar smoking onlooker at a boxing match in strictly a and a mischievous mustachioed plumber in plumbers in a boudoir but there are also plenty of instances in which rockwell allowed reality to spill into his illustrations indeed he believed that capturing the essence of his environment was one of the primary aims of his homecoming marine a real automobile repair shop in arlington and its real owner bob benedict jr posed as himself in full mechanic s duane peters posing in uniform was indeed a former marine whom rockwell first met at a local square dance but there is a bit of quaint rockwellian fiction in this painting which is otherwise faithful to local history a newspaper clipping hangs on the back wall with peters s image it reads marine joe a mechanic s jacket labeled joe dangles nearby duane peters was as just noted a former marine and he surely returned with stories to tell his arlington neighbors but his name was not joe he was not an ex garageman and there never was such a front page this raises a key point the line between fact and fiction in a rockwell painting is often very porous rockwell s scenarios during the were typically drawn from his own imagination directly from real life for the sake of realism then bits and pieces of his local surroundings were rearranged and assembled according to his artistic we may now turn to shuffleton s barbershop in the norman rockwell exhibition at the arlington gallery conducted an oral history project with local residents one of many efforts over the years to speak who had become closely associated with shuffleton s barbershop thanks to this interview the models that rockwell used in this painting have been identified grocery clerk german a warner posed as the clarinetist and railroad worker bernard health at the time as they had had overlapping stays of several weeks at the putnam memorial hospital in bennington in april of warner did not know how to play the clarinet but twitchell played the violin and holds it with more confidence as hayden noted in his interview at loaned it to bernard twitchell of east arlington a country fiddler she later decided to sell it and bernie was ill and unable to buy it and the violin used in the painting is currently in the possession of his son in his back to us we know the identity of the broadly built cellist he is hayden s cousin robert shuffleton yes the shuffleton of shuffleton s as rockwell himself tells us in the caption that accompanies the since shuffleton owned the only barbershop in east arlington and though there was another barbershop down the road in arlington shuffleton s was the place to be despite the extra two mile drive it may bypassed the arlington barbershop and got his hair cut at shuffleton s heralding him as a tonsorial the east arlington barbershop was a social hub for both men and women who could catch up on local gossip and enjoy what one lifelong east arlington resident remembers as the vibrant as dorothy canfield fisher writes in her book memories barber is apt to be a social event with a chance to talk over neighborhood news with other men waiting for their turn in the barber s indeed shuffleton s position as the east arlington correspondent for the bennington evening banner the town who was sick with the flu who was receiving
can even obscure the very search for significant phenomenological patterns in this paper we try to clarify a possibility offered by the nmssm to comply with the lep lep in a weakly fine tuned and not too narrow region of its parameter space while insisting on a relatively light stop a key point is that such possibility rests on the largest possible values of the usual coupling of the nmssm consistent with manifest perturbative unification including the possible existence of extra matter multiplets filling complete su representations at intermediate energies even and two cp odd neutral fields with the standard definition of the higgs doublets and the only scalar with tree level coupling to the vector boson pairs vv often called since it is the closest to the standard model higgs boson has the and tree level diagonal mass squared because in practice for moderate mixing it is compensated by a further negative correction at the two loop order thus the one loop result remains a reasonable approximation note that equation is valid for any scalar potential of the form ie in particular for any nmssm which stays perturbative up to the gut scale the phenomenology of the nmssm in relation with the higgs boson searches at lep with the two other cp even scalars since being a diagonal entry of a positive definite squared mass matrix gives only an upper bound on the mass squared of the lightest physical cp even scalar with this in mind this paper consists of two logically independent but also complementary parts in the first one we discuss the maximum possible values of the coupling furthermore based on the values that we find for mh we consider a simple and generic mixing model between and the lightest among the two remaining cp even scalars which before mixing with do not couple at all with vv in the second part we describe a fully detailed and motivated version of the nmssm with an approximate peccei quinn symmetry that realizes the phenomenological pattern outlined in the first part this approximate symmetry restricts the the number of effective parameters and makes possible an analytic description of most of the relevant features we want to underline on the maximal value of the coupling from eq mh is especially sensitive to the value of the coupling at the weak scale which is constrained by demanding that stays perturbative in its rge evolution all the way up to the gut scale more specifically since grows with the energy from the weak to the gut scale we require for its value at the gut scale gut value at the gut scale gut nce at intermediate energies of vector like supermultiplets filling complete su representations these multiplets increase the gauge couplings at higher energies which in turn slows down the growth of both x and y delaying the onset of nonperturbative behavior this effect is figure which shows as function of tan the maximum value of at the weak scale without or with the extra matter effects of su at the weak scale for the current value of mt consequently from eqs figure gives the maximum value of mh for a moderate stop mass the upper blue curves for are again with three of su at the fermi scale whereas the lower red curve for includes in the rge evolution the standard matter evolution the standard matter effects only several features in these figures are worth being observed all the curves in figure go for large tan to a common asymptotic value which is the upper bound on mh in the mssm relative to this value the increment in mh due to the extra three is clearly significant especially since without extra matter the maximum value of mh barely touches the lep bound on the sm about this is even more so since the upper limit on mh is essentially saturated for wide variations of gut in its upper range as shown by the close upper curves in figure both figure and are for vanishing coupling in the superpotential but they are all insensitive to any choice of since is rapidly driven to zero at lower energies by the rge evolution a larger gut would however reduce the maximum at without any extra matter start at tan because at lower tan unlike in the case with the extra matter the top yukava coupling hits by itself the perturbative bound of before getting to the unification scale recently dine seiberg and thomas have claimed that in a singlet extension of mssm based on the superpotential one can raise the higgs at intermediate scales one of their examples had mh for tan and no mixing which is in clear contradiction with figure as is stressed in the introduction our bound on mh applies to any higgs potential of the form and in particular to the superpotential of we believe that the expansion analysis of based on integrating out and analyzing the spectrum of light states in terms of coefficients of dimension operators must be breaking operators must be breaking down and this explains the discrepancy we conclude this section by analyzing the effect of extra su multiplets on the gauge coupling unification in table we show the prediction of for from the running of the gauge couplings at one and two loops compared with the standard case without any threshold effect in the same table we give for the two cases the the one loop prediction is very close to the experimental value and of course this conclusion is left unchanged by the addition of extra matter in full su multiplets at two loops the prediction for is brought closer to the experiment compared to the standard table prediction for in the standard case and for at we and which can later be included perturbatively the input ms values are we do not include any threshold corrections the last line of the table is obtained by treating the loop terms as perturbative corrections to the
their degrees of hydration fig and show wn per gram of binder for glass powder and fly ash pastes either glass powder or fly ash have lower wn per gram of binder compared to plain pastes this trend has been observed earlier this is because of the combined effect of lesser cement taking part in the hydration reaction and the cement replacement materials using lesser amount of water for hydration the paste ement replacement by glass powder exhibits a wn very close to that of the plain paste at later ages further on evaporable water content per unit mass of binder is higher for pastes modified with glass powder than those with fly ash this is an indication that glass powder modified pastes are using more water for hydration than fly ash modified pastes at similar mass replacements it can possibly be a result of the increased cement hydration due to the presence of glass powder and are the non evaporable water contents of the cement and replacement material respectively and mc and mr are their mass fractions if the replacement material is purely a filler then a cement replacement material in a paste system might content of the cement can be stated as ewntc ewntc is the non evaporable water content of a cement paste with no cement replacement material and is the non evaporable water content as a result of the enhancement in cement hydration due to the presence of the replacement material when there is no replacement material can be restated as ewntt the right hand side of eq gives an expression for the change in non evaporable water content in a modified paste as a result of the hydration of the cement replacement material and the enhancement in hydration of the cement grains resulting from the presence of the replacement material edwntr effective in a paste modified with a filler and the secondary hydration in a paste modified with a pozzolanic material since all the terms in the left hand side of eq are known determination of is straightforward for a plain paste will always be zero it should be noted here that does not separate the individual effects of enhancement in hydration and secondary reaction much of water at early ages the influence of is likely to be more prominent in at later ages the effect of will dominate if the replacement material is pozzolanic when the values decrease with time after a certain age diminishes and the pozzolanic reaction does not compensate for that the replacement material is not effective in the system during those times a of less than zero means that is less than pmc which also shows that the replacement material is not effective at that age figs and show the values of plotted against hydration age for the glass powder and fly ash modified pastes the cement grains because of the higher effective beyond days is seen to decrease showing that the secondary reaction of the replacement material if any is not compensating for the dilution effect however for the paste modified with powder increases consistently with time this shows that a of cement with glass powder at a cm of can be considered cement with fly ash shows a beneficial effect at later ages which is attributable to the secondary reaction change in wn for high cm pastes hydrated for a longer time fig depicts the change in non evaporable water content of cm glass powder and fly ash modified pastes hydrated for days for the that of the ash modified paste similar to the trend of the cm pastes with in fig from eq it is obvious that the enhancement in cement hydration is responsible for the higher value of glass powder since the term rmr is expected to be very small and mr are small however for for replacement level this indicates that pozzolanic reaction is dominant in those mixtures degree of hydration modeling the degree of hydration of pastes with more than one cementing material in pastes containing one or more cement replacement materials quantification of cement hydration and the replacement material reaction is rendered difficult by the same reason that was with both the reactions the degree of reaction of fly ash has been experimentally determined using a selective dissolution procedure which is based on the principle that the hydration products of cement and fly ash and the unreacted cement could be dissolved leaving behind the unreacted fly ash a model that uses the amount of calcium hydroxide the porosity of the hardened cement paste chemical the cement and fly ash hydration products to determine the hydration degree of cement and pozzolanic reaction degree of fly ash has been reported however this is an involved procedure requiring the determination of the above mentioned parameters which are quite complex therefore this section details the development of a model based on mixing equation for the total material cannot be separated using this method rather it provides the overall degree of hydration of the binder in the paste using an equation of the form similar to eq for the combined degree of hydration of the paste incorporating the replacement material at acmc in eq being stated as at ewntc where at ewntt and are the ultimate nonevaporable water contents of the mixture plain cement and the replacement material respectively substituting eq in eq gives at substituting eq in eq and rearranging the terms give as at ewntt the above expression is a concise means of representing the combined degree of hydration of pastes containing cement replacement materials this equation accounts for the enhancement in the degree of hydration which may be the result of a material this expression could be modified to account for more than one cement replacement material experimentally measured overall degree of hydration the degrees of hydration of the modified pastes were experimentally determined from the wn of
are bounded this concludes the proof performance analysis theorems we will present and compare between the two cases of known and unknown bounds on the delay functions of delayed states for ease of notation define mn general case unknown bounds of functions of delayed states theorem consider the closed loop system consisting of the plant under assumptions and control law and adaptation law given that the initial conditions are bounded the error signal will remain in the mean square sense within a compact set defined by case z the last summation term of is case z for for the subsystem consisting of zk we obtain from lemma and that where is defined in which yields for the subsystem consisting of z we know corollary the closed loop error signal eventually converges to the set zs zms zs where proof the proof is straightforward by taking the limit of in as to obtain zs in theorem for the same closed loop system as that described in theorem the nn weights error remain in the mean square sense within a compact set defined by from the above analysis it can be seen that the bounds of the mean square signal zms is proportional to the initial conditions vm mn and inversely proportional to time this means that the worst possible performance of the signals as represented by the bounds will decrease as time increases such that the signal always remain within the compact set and eventually not the initial conditions therefore the transient and steady state tracking errors can be made smaller by appropriate choice of parameters lj and special case known bounds of functions of delayed states it has been reported that characterizing transient performance in the mean square sense does not eliminate the possibility of intervals of time in a cyclic manner due to unmodeled dynamics or other factors not accounted for in the design by exploiting knowledge of the bounds of the functions of delayed states the following results show that the exponential form lyapunov inequality can be obtained which not only ensures boundedness of all closed loop signals but also allows better quantification of the transient and asymptotic bounds of helps to reduce unexpected intermittent degradation of performance such as bursting however the controller complexity has increased considerably and the practitioner needs to assess the trade off between the gain in performance and the increased difficulty in implementation theorem consider the closed loop system consisting of the are known given that the initial conditions are bounded the error signal remains within the compact set defined by with corollary the closed loop error signal eventually converges to the set zs zs where theorem for the same closed loop system as that described section and are omitted for brevity simulation in this section a simulation study is presented to verify the effectiveness of the adaptive nn control design for the general case where the bounds on the functions of delayed states are not known consider the following two input two output system in block triangular form be tracked by the controller are given by sin and sin sin we consider the centers for and to be evenly spaced in a regular lattice in and that for and to be evenly spaced in regular lattices in and respectively employing three nodes for each input dimension we end up with nodes for networks t the design parameters are chosen as ij ij and ij while the initial conditions are xj ij ij and ij for ij where and ij as observed in fig the tracking performance is fairly can be improved as desired by choosing larger values for and or by increasing the number of nn nodes conclusion this paper has proposed adaptive nn control for a class of block triangular mimo nonlinear systems with interconnected states carrying multiple constant delays it has been shown that the tracking errors remain bounded within a neighborhood of for the special case whereby the bounds on the functions of delayed states are known we show that this information can be exploited to obtain better quantification of performance bounds ellipsoidal techniques for reachability analysis of and ellipsoidal bounds on the controls and initial conditions the algorithms construct external and internal ellipsoidal approximations that touch the reach set boundary from outside and from inside recurrence relations describe the time evolution of these approximations an essential part of the paper deals with singular discrete time linear systems discrete time linear systems we also deal with systems with a singular state transition matrix and show how to approximate the reach set with any given accuracy using regularization and provide the means for picking the appropriate regularization parameters that guarantee this accuracy over a specified finite time interval we make no controllability assumptions regarding the system thus the suggested regularization technique in the case of singular state transition matrix or if the system is not controllable at every time step the exact representation of the reach set on every time step by external ellipsoidal approximation is not possible however the exact representation is possible for the regularized reach set that overapproximates the actual one and whose boundary can be made arbitrarily close to on the other hand it is always possible to exactly represent the actual reach set however the concept of good curves that was introduced in and without which the computation process becomes heavy and complicated can only be applied for systems with nonsingular state transition matrix therefore in order to make use of good curves in the singular case we perform the internal approximation work on reachability in section iii basic definitions and results from are translated to the discrete time case in section iv the recurrence relation for the external approximating ellipsoids is derived here it is assumed that the system
solution of stable cht inversion formula we begin with the cht of the filtered backprojection solution that was first developed let gn be the cht of the projection sinogram and let fn be the cht of the object the ramp filtering of gn is denoted by gn and is given by where is the hilbert transform and is convolution next the cht of the backprojection operator is taken the stable cht inverse has the form on the other hand the unstable inverse is becomes exponentially unbounded as or any numerical or measurement inaccuracies in the data will be exponentially multiplied by the kernel resulting in complete loss of numerical accuracy according to ref a solution to the unstable inverse is the pair inverse hankel fourier transform they were able to invert projection data using a circular harmonic transform of the data and recursion formulas developed directly from the stable inverse the key here was that the stable inverse lent itself to quadrature and subsequent numerical implementation here we prove that the chebyshev zernike polynomial pair is also a solution of the stable inverse goal is to show that a reconstruction of a chebyshev polynomial with inverse yields the desired zernike polynomial by using the fact that for even gn and gn are even and tn are even then the mellin transform of this equation is from ref the last equation uses marichev s compact notation for rational combinations of gamma functions and we will use it from this point to apply the ramp filter we need the fourier transform of the orthogonal basis functions of eq on the finite interval the fourier transform of the functions is defined as we show in the appendix that the transformed result is given by this can be shown to have the result after much algebra we then have where we have written the last formula to emphasize the factor of two in using eqs and a result from ref eq we obtain the mellin transform of given here for even and odd we obtain in the appendix the result more important is the motivation for doing so while is undoubtedly a correct representation for a zernike polynomial it will not easily yield the familiar hypergeometric representation for instance see ref we need a mellin transform that will yield a lowest polynomial power of rn equation will provide this using slater s we obtain polynomials we finally have we also use the short hand notation a that is often used in mathematics literature we can also use the standard result from ref for jacobi polynomials with n m we have we need some rules for mellin transforms if is the mellin transform of to summarize with gn given by this proves relations and the details between steps are left to an appendix numerical experiments and validation in addition to the shepp logan phantom shown in fig we have reconstructed a number of projection harmonics by using the chebyshev zernike correspondence eqs and with finite upper bounds and directly by the use of standard filtered backprojection these results are shown in fig an rmse comparison reconstruction by each method shows negligible error a solution based on gridding we may use a gridding algorithm by taking the fourier transform of the result of from ref this is given by thus the series becomes the fourier transform in refs and thus there are no practical problems using to compute the fourier transform on a radial grid and then using any of several gridding algorithms to complete the reconstruction we do not do so here but merely outline its development an application to mri reconstruction it was shown in ref that an arcsine gradient can produce the interpolation free by a real magnetic gradient that must satisfy laplace s equation the arcsine gradient does not easily satisfy laplace s equation interestingly however a real gradient which is a sum of a linear gradient and a cubic gradient is closely approximated by a scaled arcsine function a scaled arcsine gradient provides a better fit to an actual gradient field and coil design that was intended to produce a transverse linear gradient the equivalent of a scaled arcsine in the fan beam reconstructions of ref though it was not recognized at the time having any application to mri these gradients are shown in fig thus it has the potential to provide better imaging than standard fourier reconstruction based on the assumption of a linear gradient discussion of results pair is a solution of filtered backprojection by comparing the cht algorithm to that produced by filtered backprojection with no low pass filtering there are some differences but these can be explained by the claim that filtered backprojection has a natural low pass filter built in because of the interpolation in backprojection see fig is accompanied by a substantial body of numerical experimental evidence this solution is based on the chebyshev transform of the projection data it should be straightforward though laborious to show that all orthogonal function pairs that cormack showed are solutions of the unstable inverse are also solutions of the stable form of the inverse these transforms are based on the hermite and laguerre transforms more importantly this not a fundamental property of the harmonic form of the radon transform of course direct quadrature of the unstable inverse is still not possible that the polynomial pair should also be a solution of conventional filtered backprojection is intuitively necessary for the logical consistency of harmonic form of the radon transform if the inverse of the harmonic form of the radon transform cannot be represented as a stable integral measurement and cannot be realized as an operator that can be approximated to arbitrary accuracy by finite linear combinations of bounded operators automation technology decision making decision traps and competence dynamics in changeable spaces yu their psychological states information inputs from the environment and self suggestion etc at any moment of time some of these parameters can catch our attention called alerted parameters
from this study can be generalized only to the subjects enrolled white middle aged and overweight men with high normal to stage hypertension who are not taking medication for their high bp exercise intensity and ras polymorphisms specifically with lowca sbp was reduced after among those less predisposed to cardiovascular disease risk based upon their ras genotype and after among those more predisposed to cardiovascular disease risk based upon their ras genotype with highca bp was lower after among ace dd and insight into why most people manifest postexercise hypotension but some do not further investigation is needed to validate our findings in a larger more ethnically diverse sample of men and women in which dietary calcium intake is manipulated so that definitive conclusions can be made about the complex relationships we observed among dietary calcium intake exercise intensity proteomic analysis of tyrosine phosphorylation during human liver transplantation anouk peter fariba tarek daniel and eric abstract background ischemia reperfusion causes a dramatic reprogramming of cell metabolism during liver transplantation and can be linked to an alteration of the phosphorylation level of several a pivotal role in a variety of important signalling pathways and was linked to a wide spectrum of diseases functional profiling of the tyrosine phosphoproteome during liver transplantation is therefore of great biological significance and is likely to lead to the identification of novel targets for drug discovery and provide a basis for novel therapeutic strategies results using liver biopsies collected during the early phases of organ procurement and we aimed at characterizing the global patterns of tyrosine phosphorylation during hepatic i a proteomic approach based on the purification of tyrosine phosphorylated proteins followed by their identification using mass spectrometry allowed us to identify nck a adaptor as a potential regulator of i injury using immunoblot cell fractionation and immunohistochemistry we demonstrate that nck phosphorylation expression and localization were affected in liver tissue upon i in addition mass spectrometry identification of nck binding partners during the course of the transplantation also suggested a dynamic interaction between nck and actin during i conclusion taken together our data suggest that nck may play a role in i induced actin reorganization which was previously reported to be detrimental for the hepatocytes of the transplanted graft nck could therefore represent a target of choice for the design of new organ preservation which could consequently help to reduce post reperfusion liver damages and improve transplantation outcomes background protein phosphorylation is considered to be one of the major determinants regulating a large spectrum of biological processes it is a key reversible modification occurring mainly on serine threonine and tyrosine residues by acting as a switch to turn on or off a protein activity or tyrosine phosphorylation plays a key role in regulating many different processes in eukaryotic organisms such as growth or cell cycle control differentiation cell shape and movement gene transcription synaptic transmission and insulin action phosphotyrosine residues are recognized by specialized binding domains on other proteins such as initiate and promote intracellular signalling tyrosine phosphorylation therefore plays a prominent role in signal transduction but yet these signalling pathways have been difficult to identify in part because of their complexity and in part because of low cellular levels of tyrosine phosphorylation recent advances including the availability of the complete emerging as a reliable and sensitive tool for protein identification and protein phosphorylation site determination and now represents a method of choice for the large scale analysis of protein phosphorylation after affinity based enrichment of tyrosine phosphorylated proteins using specific anti py antibodies phosphorylation analysis by mass spectrometry and the resulting peptides are analyzed to determine those which are phosphorylated separation of tryptic peptides using liquid chromatography is an efficient strategy to decrease sample complexity subsequently peptides are further analyzed by tandem mass spectrometry to identify the corresponding proteins and ii to determine the precise location of the masses for mass increases of da compared with the list of expected peptide masses ischemia reperfusion constitutes a major injury in a variety of circumstances including as myocardial infraction cerebral ischemia stroke hemorrhagic shock and organ transplantation during liver transplantation donor organs experience some degree of preservation processes that may lead to cell death and organ failure during the ischemic phase it represents therefore one of the most fundamental component of successful organ preservation during transplantation but also leads to specific secondary damages the magnitude of preservation injury is a critical determinant for the success of liver transplantation however reperfusion remains unclear in an attempt to uncover novel aspects of this intricate response we have used a proteomic approach to characterize the cellular pathways regulated upon i during human liver transplantation this led us to identify the adaptor protein nck as a major py containing protein whose phosphorylation level is regulated upon i moreover actin cytoskeleton our data provide the first evidence for nck tyrosine phosphorylation upon i in human liver and suggest that this protein may represent an important player in hepatocytes stress response results identification of tyrosine phosphorylated proteins upon i end we used liver biopsies collected as described in figure protein extracts were prepared as described in the methods section and processed for immunoblot analyses using anti py antibodies this allowed us to obtain a global tyrosine phosphorylation pattern during the proteins protein detected a major protein with a molecular weight of approximately kda was subjected to a dramatic change in its tyrosine phosphorylation status during both phases of the transplantation an important tyrosine phosphorylation increase during the ischemic phase and a consecutive decrease during reperfusion were observed in order ischemia and min reperfusion were chromatographed on anti py antibodies coupled to agarose beads as schematically represented in figure proteins were then eluted resolved by sdspage and stained using coomassie blue noteworthy a major coomassie blue stained band in the tyrosine phosphorylated fraction was no longer may most likely correspond to the major protein detected in figure each band visualized on the gel was then excised trypsin digested and the resulting peptides analyzed
experimenters gave for not continuing to drink likewise a number of those who continued to drink especially some of the girls did so only because they were able to mask the taste of the alcohol and thereby enjoy the effects without having to endure what was for them an unpleasant taste in the potential for alcopops to encourage drinking by young children by making alcohol palatable to them is obvious other research has identified the increasing popularity of alcopops amongst year olds especially girls however while alcopops were popular with some of the children it was more common for them to dilute spirits with a soft drink as this offered better value for money in terms of alcoholic and others one consequence of this is that given their high alcoholic content the consumption of spirits in this way has the potential to increase considerably the amount of alcohol which children consume thereby heightening their risks obtaining alcohol appeared to present few problems for the children most of the time it was procured or supplied by older youths stricter control and surveillance of vendors might help to restrict their access to alcohol when this is under aged youths however there is also a case for seeking to devise interventions that might encourage older youths not to support younger children in their drinking finally in addition to helping them to deal with peer pressure it is also extremely important that the risks associated with alcohol consumption continue to be discussed with these children in the context of school health the education programmes architectural debates in the new berlin george a murray berlin represents an unusual case vis a vis the international architectural debate about rebuilding cities the debate generally takes place between neotraditionalists on the one hand and various avant gardists on the other but in berlin the main representatives of the first camp are not for once members of the new urbanism movement nor are they neotraditionalists tout court they are at least on their own understanding pioneers of a kind of third way between the two extremes of neotraditionalism and avant gardism nevertheless a closer look at their rhetoric reveals deeper lying affinities with the cultural conservatism characteristic of new urbanism the image of the city that they favor for berlin is one of clarity order permanence weightiness etc a surprising image given the city s troubled past i examine the architektenstreit that a debate on the representations and images of the city is not a distraction from but rather an essential element in the politics of the city in berlin today the substitution of culture for politics is particularly manifest one sometimes has the impression that architectural form is the most important form of political expression introduction and the subsequent reunification of the two germanys what is commonly referred to as diewende or the change could have returned the luster to this well worn cliche parts of the city resembled vast wastelands the result of bombing unfinished urban renewal projects or abandonment due to proximity to the wall taken together they represented what one internationally prominent architectural critic characterized as the biggest challenge to architecture century if perhaps our ideas about the magnitude of this particular challenge have changed in the wake of and hurricane it is nevertheless true that in the debates and controversies surrounding the development of reunified berlin we have a foretaste of the strange and extreme emotion that can inhere in such historically pregnant rebuilding phases the discussion of what where and in what style erupted into a polemic in which saw whole worldviews implicated in the construction materials chosen and the histories invoked in which the employment of neoclassical columns was likened to the deployment of neo nazi hoodlums and in which yet others viewed the whole interpretive debate as a sinister misdirection play i examine these debates drawing on extensive research as well as interviews i have been conducting in berlin since this particular case is an exemplar of those situations in rebuild their cities while negotiating very powerful temptations to mere scenography what the berliner sociologist werner sewing calls bildregie the reduction of architecture to mere stagesets for the pursuit of various urban lifestyles and experiences this is a dilemma we are accustomed to discussing in a north american context what important similarities do we find when we expand our purview planning and architectural doctrine known as critical reconstruction that came to dominate the debates over the new berlin and i pay special attention to the architectural virtues that are celebrated in its rhetoric several commentators have seen in the critical reconstructionist invocations of the european city an urgent need to transcend the particular demons of berlin s recent past yet some of the critical reconstructionist rhetoric in calling for as solidity severity rigor and so on practically conjures up these demons by name i argue that this rhetoric does not augur some return of the repressed nazi past the political philosophy expressed is more of a piece with a conservative reaction to the uncertainties of modern life that is itself a modern phenomenon in a world that has seemingly done away with social scripts the critical reconstructionist rhetoric of readability with its and its attendant calls for an aesthetic of solidity clarity simplicity order etc represents an attempt to provide long lost bearings by means of architecture and the organization of urban space ultimately the disappointments of the new ought to make us wary of similar attempts taking place in cities around the world for example in the post katrina storm zone beirut one cannot invent the city critical reconstruction it is in the center of the city particularly in those areas that once constituted the heart of the former east berlin that new construction has been the most ideologically charged the most burdened by problems of dealing with the historical past and the most subject to public attention and regulatory zeal faced with these challenges some leading local planners a
by like zernike polynomials the lukosz zernike functions are each expressed as the product of a radial and azimuthal function using the same dual index and numbering scheme they can be defined as by the normalization in eq has been chosen so that the contribution of each mode to the rms transverse aberration is independent of its indices the phase aberration mbn mln gives a mean square spot radius of value of the wavefront phase the lz polynomials are defined to minimize the rms spot radius we therefore employ an intensity measurement that is related to the spot radius for a large detector whose sensitivity varies across its area the detected signal is given by the complex field in the lens pupil the radial coordinate is normalized such that the first intensity zero of the diffraction limited focal spot for a circular aperture lies at if the detector sensitivity is chosen such that then eq is equivalent in the geometrical optics regime to a measurement of the have a representation with the desired spherical symmetry however this representation provides a minimum rather than a maximum for zero aberration furthermore in practice we require that the detector be finite in extent if instead we choose the quadratic sensitivity for and zero otherwise where is a suitably chosen on figure shows the calculated response of to for modes and a detector of radius for comparison the equivalent response for a pointlike detector and zernike polynomials is also shown the points and error bars represent the mean and percentiles from a sample of random aberrations of a given magnitude the graphs show for demonstration the system was implemented experimentally by using a he ne laser as the light source and a ferroelectric liquidcrystal spatial light modulator configured as a wavefront this acted as both aberration source and adaptive element introducing a single aberration that was the sensitivity was implemented by the weighting of pixels within software to verify the performance of this system the variation of output signal with was measured for and the experimentally determined response calculated as the mean value of from ten random aberrations of a given magnitude is shown in fig and corresponds closely to the theoretical of bias aberrations represented by the vectors was applied to the adaptive element and the input aberration was then calculated from the resulting detector measurements it was shown that the most efficient scheme for measuring modes uses that are the vertices of a regular dimensional simplex a similar arrangement of biases was employed the biases were added in turn to the input aberration giving the total aberration bin and the corresponding detector measurements wi were recorded the measured aberration vector was then calculated as where in advance and do not require recalculation for each measurement the measured aberration bout was then subtracted from the input aberration this process reduced the lateral aberration of the spot if the resultant wavefront aberration was sufficiently small a similar process could be followed using the zernike series representation of the aberration and a small pinhole detector function of modes the first column shows the initial focal spot with bin and bin correction of the lateral aberration by using lz polynomials resulted in the spots shown in the second column the third column shows the focal spot after correction of the wavefront aberration by using zernike polynomials each correction cycle required detector of radius and were used the second cycle used a circular uniform detector of radius and we note that in certain cases the aberration is almost fully corrected even after the first cycle figure shows results of calculations that demonstrate the variation of with for different detector using larger detector radii and correspondingly larger for example a doubling of the detector radius leads to a doubling of the width of the response an effect that is apparent in the figure this scalability leads to the possibility of wavefront sensorless adaptive optics systems for arbitrarily large aberrations the method can also be modes are orthogonal to those measured retains its spherical symmetry if more modes are included in the correction procedure while the same are used the accuracy tends to decrease particularly for larger values of bin this can be rectified by employing a different biasing scheme using more bias aberrations for patients is undertreated by medical professionals allergies are pervasive in today s society according to accounts in the literature at least the us population suffers from allergies the gallup study of allergies places the prevalence at and suffer is the operative word on quality of life surveys people consistently rank allergy as a leading cause of discomfort and misery gallup also reports that allergy sufferers experience in the organization s study of allergies allergy medication users rank itchy eyes as a top symptom and watery eyes as a top symptom as a main component of allergy ocular symptoms contribute significantly to reduced quality of life interfering with visual tasks sleep patterns social interactions and productivity at work and school a study published in the journal ophthalmic epidemiology directly correlates ocular allergy symptoms with diminished in the study a group of people in england age to with a year history of seasonal allergic conjunctivitis and a group of age and sex matched controls completed four quality of life questionnaires covering both general and ocular issues people in the sac group reported lower weekly earnings due to fewer hours worked they also experienced a greater degree of ocular pain and discomfort and had a lower perception of their health than the control group the results led the conclude that sac is a highly prevalent chronic costly condition associated with significant reductions in both ocular and general quality of life in spite of their impact the ocular effects of allergies have not been a focus of treatment according to gallup oral therapies nasal sprays and inhalants are the most commonly prescribed allergy therapies and eye drops are prescribed less than the time furthermore ironically optometrists and ophthalmologists
has effectively eliminated the single piece of evidence upon which such a notion could be supported time of the ch atelperronian the geographically closest area inhabited by modern humans was the near east this is too far away for close contact acculturation but leaves open the possibility of long distance bow wave diffusion along the lines suggested by hublin mcbrearty and brooks and mellars to explain the cultural innovations documented eurasian neanderthals after ka bp in the biological and cultural geography of eurasia before the time of the proto aurignacian what long distance diffusion from the near east to western europe effectively means is that before arriving in neanderthal france such innovations would have to travel across vast expanses of terrain where only other neanderthals lived ie through exchange networks uniting those different neanderthal populations from the french charente in the west to closest potential neanderthal modern contact zones in the black sea and the eastern mediterranean it is clear however that the practice of wearing beads could not have survived the innumerous episodes of information exchange necessarily involved in such a process if the individuals transmitting and receiving the information did not fully understand its underlying meaning the implication is that long distance diffusion is a viable explanation only if one accepts that cognitive equivalent at the two ends of the chain ie among both the modern human sources and the neanderthal recipients such an acceptance however generates two major logical inconsistencies for bow wave diffusion first the model was suggested as a way to bring the empirical evidence for symbolic artifacts among neanderthals in line with the notion that because they were not modern they must have lacked the cognitive capabilities required for their use in a fully symbolic social whereas in reality it carries the implication that they did have those capabilities put another way it requires the exact kind of behavior whose putative absence it proposed to explain second the model is based on the notion that neanderthals and moderns were separate at the species level their differentiation having been driven by isolation through distance followed by the establishment of long lasting barriers to gene flow however if such they have been only biological not cultural as well if burials and ornaments represent the acquisition by neanderthals of innovations gradually developed in africa over tens of thousands of years how can such a level of contact be reconciled with the notion that after ka bp neanderthals had become isolated to the point of evolving into a separate species clearly either neanderthals were a different species and the implication is that symbolism emerged independently among or their symbolic artifacts were a by product of diffusion from africa and then they cannot have been a different species you simply cannot have it both ways ie complete biological isolation leading to speciation but at the same time complete cultural interconnectedness leading to long distance diffusion of innovations at the empirical level long distance diffusion faces the additional problem that it also however the earliest uncontroversial instance of burial so far known is not that of a modern human but that of the tabun neanderthal woman bar yosef and callander argue that this is an intrusive interment from overlying level but the fact that the loose right hand and wrist bones recovered in level are mirror images of the same left bones in the articulated skeleton is not consistent with their hypothesis nor is the direct sampled from the human skeleton itself which indicates an age between and ka cal bp independent invention since long distance diffusion requires that neanderthals had the same cognitive capabilities as moderns as a potential explanation for the facts it is not intrinsically superior to the alternative view of independent invention put forward by d errico et al zilh ao and d errico zilh ao and d errico choosing between the two therefore should be based solely on their respective empirical merits and although future research may change the picture the data currently available are more consistent with independent invention than with long distance diffusion in fact one of the most striking features of the record for early ornaments is that in the iup of the near east it is entirely made up of perforated shells for the most part and they are not represented in the subsequent early ahmarian either in contrast dentalium tubes are the only securely documented ornaments in the uluzzian where marine gastropods are entirely absent this contrast is puzzling because uluzzian sites have the same coastal location as those from the near eastern iup and if the ornaments had been introduced to their cultural context through diffusion from the latter one would expect that the same kinds of objects had been the purpose for instance that some the shell beads in the iup levels of ag izli and ksar akil are nassarius is a strong argument in favor of the notion that this technocomplex stands for a cultural tradition of ultimate african origin the earlier south african beads from blombos are all made from another nearly identical species of that genus that the makers of these ornaments were selecting for a particular shape and that this similarity of are also suggested by the fact that the other gastropod used at ksar akil columbella rustica is of broadly similar morphology that traditions relating to the choice of ornaments are long lasting is further indicated by the fact that in the long proto aurignacian to epigravettian sequence of the mochi rockshelter people consistently favored a very narrow range of shell sizes and shapes suggesting some kind of shared aesthetic yet one that lasted more than thus where sites in interior locations are concerned if the earliest upper paleolithic of europe was related to diffusion from the near east one might further expect that fossil shells of similar appearance to those used for ornamental purposes in the iup would be considered as adequate replacements and sought after in the appropriate geological exposures or alternatively that imitations of appropriate shape
in carbohydrate binding sites of proteins these binding sites are characterized by a placement of a carbohydrate moiety in a stacking orientation to an aromatic ring this arrangement is an example of ch pi interactions which have been shown to play an important role in carbohydrate recognition by glycosidases and carbohydrate binding proteins our study determines exact role and contribution of each residue to carbohydrate binding highest propensity score in the carbohydrate binding sites is observed from figure and table for tryptophan which is in accordance with many reported mutational studies this and other studies have provided experimental and theoretical additionally the conservation of aromatic residues such as tyrosine and phenylalanine on an exposed surface is common in carbohydrate binding modules from families and highlighting the role of aromatic residues in carbohydrate binding the modification of tryptophan residues has also been shown to cause a compete loss of hemagglutinating activity involvement of two tryptophan residues in carbohydrate binding site was also shown to be essential in the same study similarly lafora disease related mutation of to glycine has also been shown to disrupt results are well reflected in the high propensity of trp in carbohydrate binding sites presented in this work if the propensity scores of carbohydrate binding are compared with other ligand binding residues identified by database trp remains the most prominent high propensity residue however high propensity for carbohydrates but his in general being an active site shows high propensity of binding to any ligand including carbohydrates next important residue is arg whose propensity for carbohydrate binding is less than trp within yet the propensity is even higher than what is observed for arg in dna binding proteins of transmutagenesis experiments reporting crucial role of arg residues in some protein carbohydrate interactions lower propensity scores for the other basic residue lys indicate that the interaction between arg and sugar is not purely electrostatic in nature dahms et al in also report that the substitution of arg residues by lys in insulin like conservation of structure upon this mutation these results were interpreted that the proteins utilize residues with planar side chains for their interaction with sugars higher propensity scores of asp and glu which are also negatively charged residues also support this argument these propensity scores are higher than what is observed for other ligands seem to have higher mean asa values in the binding regions this result contrasts with similar binding sites analysis on dna binding proteins where asa of charged residues showed a better discrimination between binding and binding and non binding regions presumably because their probability to be on the surface is higher irrespective of their role in binding for a quick comparison of role of asa in binding regions of and databases with ratio of mean asa in binding to non binding regions of the three databases have been plotted in figure as discussed above aliphatic residues frequent binder trp very low values of cys and val residues are not significant as there are very few binding residue of this type role of secondary structure we tried to explore if certain residues prefer any secondary structure for binding to carbohydrates results of these statistics are resented in additional file as tables and figures assigned to each category this leaves the resulting data to be insufficient for any statistical conclusions these results are therefore not discussed here but only provided in additional file for reference packing density we also tried to find out the difference between the packing density of the binding and non binding residues and clear preferences of residues for binding carbohydrates we sought to develop a prediction method which could take the predisposition of residues and their sequence environments as an input and thereby identify binding residues from the information of proteinsequence to do so sequence environment at each residue level could be represented either as binary bit vectors environment could be added as the corresponding rows of this matrix on either side schemes of these representations have been extensively developed for the problem of solvent accessibility and other residue wise features of proteins table summarized the results of predictions obtained in this way using a leave one out method this prediction performance of sequence only predictors has been compared with those using pssms the best performance for data set was found to be a modest indicating that the sequence and evolutionary information do not decisively determine a binding site this not so good prediction performance for is is apparently because carbohydrates are diverse and finding overall general rules for have we need to have large data with sufficient representation of all types of sugars to ensure that the low performance is caused by the diversity of sugars we tried to develop a prediction model for only one type of sugar we tried many differently classified carbohydrates but due to further small size of data could only use galactose binding proteins data set note that pssm based predictions were somewhat poorer than single sequences in however in the case of the situation in reversed lower values of prediction in pssm based methods could be due to two reasons first of all the number of sequences which gave significant alignments with was roughly may lead to higher conservation scores to some residues and hence there would be many false positive predictions by this in the case of the situation is reversed because the carbohydrates are more similar and hence conservation of a residue within them does convey positive information about its binding behavior thus although some of the results presented in this work may be obvious to some experienced biologists yet this work is the first attempt to summarize the sequence and structure features of carbohydrate binding proteins in such a comprehensive way previous studies have either focused on a small set of proteins aiming to analyze one or a few types of residues or tried to focus either on the this is also the first attempt to use sequence and evolutionary information
rate the mass flow rate in the current investigation spanned a range between min mass flow rates larger than min were measured using the micromotion flow rate meter with an uncertainty of to the calibration weighting method has been used to verify this uncertainty range as shown in fig the flow rates below min were measured with the digital balance the uncertainties for flow rates below min and above min were within for flow rate less than min at least min of data were taken for a stable state and the uncertainties were determined with the digital balance as shown in fig with an accuracy of the experimental data within the operational region of rheotherm were cross checked with the flow rates determined from the balance reading and the discrepancies were within in addition the continuous readings of this instrument provided an important means in addition to the pressure and temperature versus time curves to check whether outlet of the test section were measured with two type thermocouples the test section inlet and outlet pressures were measured with two pressure transducers the pressure drop across the test section was measured with three differential pressure transducers all three transducers were used new and calibrated within an accuracy were cross checked in their overlapping region of operation the cross checking results confirmed the calibration results measurements were recorded with a hewlett packard data logger and a microcomputer the sampling frequency was times per minute and the sampling time was no less than min for each data point all the data were recorded in microsoft excel for future processing prior to each experiment air was bled from the test section with particular attention being paid to remove air from the pressure tap ports since trapped air may induce noise in the measured pressure drop for liquid test in order to make sure that the refrigerant was in a pure liquid state most of the data points had inlet outlet subcooling no less than with the remaining no than with the remaining no less than each channel was tested with several runs of experiments for a certain run the reynolds number changed either from smaller flow rates to larger ones or vice versa since the reynolds number is a similarity parameter it is expected that the versus re relationship should not be a function of experimental conditions such as absolute pressure well as whether the experiment is running from larger reynolds numbers to smaller ones or vice versa in addition it should not matter if the channel is taken apart and put together again these experimental conditions were kept unchanged in a certain experimental run but varied extensively between different runs no systematic differences observed between different the microchannel surface may have been deflected during the experiments because of high test section pressure since the height of the microchannel was as small as lm even a deflection of lm in height may introduce noticeable differences in measured friction factors the deflection is a strong functions of the fluid pressure ie the higher the pressure the larger the deflection to be negligible during the current experiment the averaged test section pressure for liquid data varied between kpa and kpa for different runs no indications of friction factor dependence on the test section pressure were observed for min the digital balance is used to measure the mass flow rate the accuracy of this approach valve the flow rates would have a tendency of increasing or decreasing before a stable state has been established if the data were taken at this stage systematic errors could be observed different runs of data were compared for the current investigation and no systematic errors were observed if the fine channel was contaminated with particles were observed all these efforts verified our design of experiments and greatly improved the quality of the experimental data experimental results the experimental facility instrumentation experimental procedure data reduction and uncertainties as well as the characterization of the microchannel test sections are described in tu and hrnjak in fully developed laminar flow through rectangular ducts the experimental results for all the test sections are shown in figs in each figure part represents the friction factor for the entire reynolds number range in the form of versus re log log plot and part presents the product re as a function of the reynolds number for data with re the circles and the crosses the dashed lines in part show the theoretical results for fully developed laminar flow in rectangular channels eq the solid lines are the churchill equations for round tubes with different relative roughness as seen from figs the liquid data and the vapor data collapse on the same curve considering two data times that of the vapor one additionally the measured frictional pressure drop for the liquid state is normally about three times larger than that of the vapor data in addition the test section pressure for the liquid state is much higher than that of the vapor state thus the consistency of the data for liquid and vapor state verified the soundness of the experimental methods it should be noted that two reynolds numbers with differences within considered equal the difference of the measured friction factors was calculated for each pair and shown as a function of reynolds number in fig the data label liquid liquid and vapor vapor represent both data points in liquid state or vapor state respectively liquid vapor means two data points one in liquid and runs as addressed in the experimental procedure section for data pairs with the same state in fig the points are within for liquid vapor pairs the points lay within considering the maximum uncertainty of measured friction factor and the variety of experimental conditions that has been changed for different runs as well most of the large errors reside in the region of of the data points analysis and discussions flow regions this is the laminar flow region at re the measured friction factors reach the local minimum
each other to death and be their own executioners but rather that the image of bosnian self destruction was at least as salient and current as that of bosnia the good the period had seen terrible interethnic victims at the hands of the croatian and muslim forces of the independent state of croatia which included bosnia but with muslims having been massacred by serb forces in eastern bosnia this slaughter was known to all in part because well orchestrated campaigns to recall the massacres were used to incite nationalist antagonisms real for too many people after all between and people had been killed in yugoslavia in the period and in bosnia very much within living memory as several people who had lost family members during the national freedom struggle told me in and had brought about the slaughter were forbidden but once the nationalists returned they could no longer repress what they had never forgotten and indeed memories of past atrocities drove some of the worst actions of including the massacre of thousands of muslim men and boys at srebrenica in july in order to construct states by the political figures who wished to bring about the unification the creation of the tradition of bosnia the good is interesting because that image seems to have succeeded much more outside of bosnia than it did within the country after all the war was really driven by the rejection of a bosnian state by the bosnian serbs and herzegovinian croats since the bosnian almost entirely of croats from bosnia and herzegovina even within bosnia then the promulgation of bosnia the good was an attempt at the invention of a tradition for those bosnians who insisted on seeing themselves as other than bosnian as serbs and croats this is not to adopt the ancient hatreds position if these in and yet coexistence did not mean that the peoples of bosnia considered themselves to be one nation a collective body with common interests instead these peoples were constantly in competition with the each other competition that was controlled by various larger polities that contained bosnia but became violent whenever the larger political structure collapsed there also seems to be a common belief similar perhaps to the premise of psychotherapy that bringing a mental pathology to consciousness cures it or perhaps that since communities are imagined they can also be unimagined thus one writer has invoked derrida and foucault to propose that since is why deconstructive thought is a necessary prerequisite for historical and political progress this analysis claims to engage in the problematization of the problematizations that reduce bosnia to a problem thereby bringing to the fore the necessary concern with the ethics politics and responsibility contained by more traditional accounts this simply to go to war to escape it such disregard for the ways in which local parties do think and act in favor of the ways that they should reverses the agency of the imagining of community anderson s famous phrase puts the act of imagining into the minds of the people who consider themselves fellow members in the minds of each lives the image in the minds the source he cites on the point hugh seton watson sees what anderson calls this imagining as an active condition a nation exists when a significant number of people in a community consider themselves to form a nation or behave as if they formed one in bosnia it has been quite clear since that the image of communion with other nations has many people who do not themselves live there or plan to do so and therefore are not part of the community that they imagine one of the major reasons for imagining a bosnian community was to avoid the violence that almost always follows partition of a heterogeneous territory the likelihood of violence if the federation were to collapse was clear enough to many yugoslavs in a phrase i heard often then was fierce fighting and mutual ethnic cleansing had begun in croatia but during that time bosnians were resigned thus black humor in bosnia in late asked why is nt bosnia involved in the war between serbia and croatia because that s only the semifinals and we ve been passed directly into the finals thus the imagining of a bosnian community was morally the image of their communion will live in the minds of many of bosnia s citizens has become more remote than it was even in according to a world bank study while internally displaced bosniaks wished to return to their prewar homes in areas in which they would be members of local minorities only internally displaced serbs and internally displaced to return may be well placed one of the best ethnographers of sarajevo with the experience before during and after the war reports that in there was widespread popular reluctance among sarajevo bosniacs to see serbs return to the city and this in the city that had five years earlier been declared by the highest representative of the international community to be a multi ethnic but there are national differences in feelings of connection to bosnia because most bosnian serbs and croats refuse to celebrate the bosnian statehood day that the bosniaks and the international community recognize letting communities reimagine changed from the way it is now and that the only possible solution would be this for nothing to have happened so much the worse because that alone is impossible in essence the efforts of the international community that have been directed at trying to restore bosnia to what it posedly was before the war have aimed at achieving the solution that alone is impossible this is the meaning of rebuilding the symbolic bridge at mostar but ignoring the decay of the bridge on the drina bosnian memories and literature hold both good and bad images of ethnic relations the social links between them have as people see the need to interact with the each other and come to depend
use of the phrase cultural transmission gintis seemingly overemphasizes conformist horizontal cultural transmission and mislabels other transmission biases as conformist we agree that humans are often extremely susceptible to conformity effects as shown by classic social psychology experiments nonetheless the extent of conformist transmission in actual societies has yet to be empirically determined in sufficient detail particularly relative to the numerous other ethnographic studies often conclude that cultural transmission is vertical rather than horizontal or that considerable individual idiosyncrasy exists in culturally acquired beliefs belying any strong conformity effect many of the proposed problems with the bpc model and be boundedly rational and exhibit various decision making errors and biases which often leads them to suboptimal behavior but in large enough groups a simple strategy of copying successful neighbors behaviors can allow individuals to reach global optima quickly and cheaply recent experiments demonstrate that participants readily use and benefit from a notes that scientists do not exhibit biases such as the representativeness heuristic presumably this is because scientists have acquired the right solution from others rather than having been born without such biases these criticisms aside we endorse gintis s scheme and hope the human sciences selection of human prosocial behavior through partner choice by powerful individuals and institutions abstract cultural group selection seems the only compelling explanation inspired by descriptions of sanctioning in mutualistic interactions between members of different species i propose partner choice by powerful individuals or institutions as an alternative explanation for the evolution of behavior typical for team players i applaud gintis for a brave and erudite attempt to unify the diverse and often contrasting approaches of the numerous scientific seemingly irrational or fitness reducing contributions towards public goods shared with unrelated individuals altruistic punishment an essential element of strong reciprocity seems gintis s favorite example of a strategy with an irrational flavor here and elsewhere gene culture coevolution with an essential element of selection at the group level i am sympathetic to this line of thought but nevertheless propose more reflection on other forms of cooperation before deciding that phenomena or evolutionary mechanisms require unique explanations cooperation can be found in a breathtaking number of forms in a wide range of organisms because here we also find both unrelated partners and multiple players gintis points at the stabilizing effect of punishment in cooperating human groups this reminds of a mechanism called sanctioning typically large and long living individuals of one species dispose of mechanisms that allow them to reject the least profitable a short generation time examples are interactions between yuccas and yucca moths and between various plants and mycorrhizal fungi or rhizobia sanctioning is an extreme case of partner choice which is a potent force of selection for cooperative behavior there is an essential difference between punishment and sanctioning changes the behavior of the punished to the benefit of the punisher the same is true for altruistic punishment except that the benefit is shared by all members of the punisher s group whereas the punisher ends up with a net cost punishing only pays because the punished individual is likely to interact with the punisher and or his group again a plant sanctioning unprofitable partners will typically not interact with the rejected immediate benefits which makes sanctioning akin to getting rid of parasites strong selection on the sanctioned partners is a by product of this self regarding strategy the punishment concept stresses effects on individual behavior over intervals ranging from seconds to lifetimes the sanctioning literature emphasizes the selective effect on sanctioned species at evolutionary time the fitness of punished individuals rejection of partners in favor of more profitable ones in turn can shape the partners behavior in favor of the chooser just like punishment as long as the partners are not eliminated in the process can plants sanctioning insects or fungi suggest explanations for the evolution of forms of cooperation that seem uniquely human ignored either a strong selective force exists when single powerful individuals or institutions favor group members on the basis of their prosocial behavior such selection may take place during the formation of hunting parties raiding teams warfare and the like partner choice can only be evolutionarily stable of the hunt should be able to increase his individual returns by choosing the right hunters and the participants should have higher benefits than those excluded from the hunt this mechanism can contribute to the selection of altruistic behavior relevant to the production of public goods when partners are chosen on the basis of characteristics that make them good team players rather than good sharing and so on a recent study found that such traits are still highly relevant in modern societies being a team player is of paramount importance in the workplace according to both the employers and employees being perceived as a team player is considered to be more important than doing a good job being intelligent being creative making money for the organization and many other good qualities confirms this the five ethnic groups classified as living in villages or chiefdoms act more altruistically than the five living in more egalitarian family based societies by recruiting new members even in egalitarian societies the uniquely human ability to report performances of team members to the rest of the community increases the necessity to acquire a good reputation as a team player and reinforces individual partner preferences some elements of cooperative behavior essential for the creation of public goods can also be selected in the context of dyadic interactions a selection for prosocial behavior is possible in the mating arena as well partners may be chosen by their mates their families or their clans on the basis of cooperative attitudes whatever form partner choice takes i think it can rival with group selection as an explanation for typically human forms of cooperation and is better at explaining its selection at
and the other popular print dealers in the october number he first extols the virtues of giulio romano then gives a list of the best prints from his paintings and where to buy them the hours leading out the horses of the sun in a very high taste of poetry famous by the criticism of sir joshua is available at or while jupiter the nymphs is three or four shillings but if you can spare the cash i advise you to buy bonosone s print taken as i should imagine from a drawing you will find it at either woodburne s or colnaghi s to a certainty for or there is something disconcertingly direct in the manner in which he gives art is conceived of as a reproducible commodity desirable because it is fashionable and yet because of the modest cost of prints it is a pursuit available to a wide social spectrum in response to the articles under the name of cornelius van vinkbooms called dogmas for dilettanti senex poses as a provincial lover of the fine arts and remarks that i read among the articles in the london magazine and that i learn enough from them to set me up as a connossieur the periodical can educate but the dilettantes it produces are rather dubious they only set themselves up as connoisseurs the love of art becomes a social skill something one can develop with cash and the guidance of the periodical press metropolitan form magazines and the gallery developed a distinctive prose method to deal with what jeffrey called the perplexity and distraction which is generally complained of in such exhibitions the first article sentimentality on the fine arts is an account of an illustrated edition of goethe s faustus and it is dull in comparison with his later work because it does not focus on the things that make metropolitan art consumption distinctive it is contained linear conclusive and without wainewright came to assume by the end of the first volume of the magazine however the personality of janus weathercock had become so strongly defined that he seemed three dimensional and he frequently carried on conversations with his his dialogue on the exhibition at somerset house does criticise the art works on show but the type of criticism he offers is quirkily individual a pulpy marrowy touch he had but here are several more that you must see here s a most capital landscape by constable which deserves very great attention and this is fuseli s incantation in which you will find janus weathercock plenty of food for an entire day s recreation which i intend to devote to it and to the cathedral scene yonder enticing objects and hurries on wainewright s digressive style exemplifies the nature of viewing in the modern metropolis when not talking to an imagined friend he is talking to his dog to his editor or most commonly to his reader consuming art he recognizes is a social activity and the effect this has on criticism is significant for wainewright the magazine text should aspire to the condition of chitchat and off hand method comes into its own at the art one of the best examples is his account of the british institution it begins my money paid my book bought here goes for the feast of belshazzar sir you must wait a full hour it is the fashion he notices painting after painting pausing at some dashing past others always noting the number of the painting as it appeared in the catalogue now to something pleasant give civet good apothecary he exclaims on seeing a pretty fragrant landscape by miss landseer and immediately adds there is a portrait next to it by jackson but i must hurry on otherwise i would compliment more at large the pace is frenetic and he stops only when he runs out of space gentle reader my pen is at the bottom of the page as beppo says and i dare be sworn thou art glad of what he offers is not criticism of the exhibition experience of attending it no work exists in itself but is seen as part of a show jackson is next to landseer and wainewright s account of the exhibition is linear only in the sense that it records what he sees in the order that he sees it this is breathless spectacular commentary unlikely to leave much in the memory but a sense of exhilaration and it is wholly appropriate to the type of exhibition he is commenting on two prints by the cruikshanks way in which viewing art had become a social spectacle open to a wide range of social groups the first made for egan s life in london shows a colorful fashionable crowd enjoying the latest spectacle in a louche but orderly the art itself seems secondary to the conversations the crowd enjoy and the presence of egan s somewhat unreflective heroes suggests that the art on show might be consumed in a less than discriminating fashion that the exhibition as argued may have more value as a social spectacle than as an intellectual pursuit there are elements of the disorientating modernistic blurring of the senses that martin myrone has identified as a feature of the nineteenth century gallery but the scene retains its order by virtue of its fashionability a black face talking to a turk in the crowd suggests a degree of social diversity but the wrong classes are largely kept out a later print of art appreciation whereas tom and jerry mingled with the finely dressed here viewing art has become the occupation of the crowd in both pictures paintings fill the walls but the later picture gives a sense of the confusing distracting inundation of objects to view the consumers too are of a much more diverse social range there are some top hats but their owners are caricatures with none of the elegant lines of the other scene a open mouthed
the doing of our own identities rather than others finally beyond academia nongovernmental organizations that focus around particular equality strands such as race gender disability or sexuality are often set up in competition with one another for resources to win more funding or secure a more powerful political position each group is under pressure to focus research on its dominant category studies represent the most effective way of empirically researching the complexity of the way that the intersection of categories are experienced in subject s everyday lives she suggests starting with an individual group event or context then working outward to unravel how categories are lived and experienced this approach and disidentify with other groups how one category is used to differentiate another in specific contexts and how particular identities become salient or foregrounded at particular moments such an analysis means asking questions about what identities are being done and when and by whom evaluating how particular identities are unsettle undo or cancel out other categories such as sexuality intersectionality as a lived experience what follows is a modest attempt to reflect on the ways gender sexuality class motherhood disability and the cultural linguistic identity deaf become salient disappear are claimed rejected and are made relevant irrelevant in the investment in these different subject positions jeanette s sense of self constantly emerges and unfolds in different spatial contexts and at different biographical moments jeanette s account attempts to capture the complexity and dynamism of intersectionality as she has lived it to make the narrative comprehensible a strategy used in an article by moser and law in which they present a series of stories and passages to explore the relation between subjectivities materialities and bodily competencies to highlight through a set of stories the specific identifications disidentifications that emerge for jeanette in particular spatial and temporal moments the united kingdom a study that was funded by the economic and social research council deaf is written in this way to reflect that there are two dominant constructions of deafness deafness as a medical matter and the deaf as a linguistic minority rather than sign language in contrast deaf is linked to the construction of a linguistic identity and culture it is commonly used by those whose first or preferred language is signing and whose identity and behavior are fluent signers might be considered part of the deaf community a deaf identity however is not just something that can be claimed by an individual as a self identity rather a deaf identity is also dependent at least in part on an individual being ascribed or accepted as deaf by the community the boundary between what are known as individual s self identity from deaf to deaf likewise in different deaf spaces an individual s behavior might be regarded by others as more or less consistent with the social practices of deaf culture and therefore the individual s identity might be ascribed in different contexts as deaf or deaf here i use singular form deaf or deaf when i am referring to the specific differentiated meanings outlined above first story when jeanette was nine months old her family recognized that she was deaf shortly after her birth her mother was very ill and jeanette went to live first with her grandparents and later with her uncles as a result of living in a male household in this subject position like most deaf young people jeanette had difficulties communicating with the hearing world including her family as such she had limited information about different subject positions available to her because deaf young people do not pick up information about adult issues from television overheard skelton moreover because jeanette was living in an entirely hearing environment she had no awareness or understanding of the possibility of identifying as deaf in this spatial context home rules and the domestic social relations weighted the importance of her gender identity second story use oral forms of communication and identified as deaf as the self ascribed head of the household he defined the home as an oral space and banned jeanette from attending her local deaf club isolated from a space in which to live her language jeanette s competence at signing declined in the specific context of her marital home her deaf identity was being undone by anette well when i got married to donald he would nt let me go to the deaf club i had to stay at home all the time i would never mix with the deaf community he was a very jealous possessive person people would talk to me he d get jealous when we d get home he d beat me up so the only way i could protect myself was to stay at home asked about their origin or offered her any support then by chance what giddens would term a fateful moment she met an old friend from the deaf club who picked up on her domestic situation and supported jeanette to leave her husband her reconnection through this individual with the emotional and institutionalized support she emotionally reinvested in the particular identity position of deaf third story jeanette met a woman at the deaf club fell in love and had a lesbian relationship this marked a discontinuity in her identity as a heterosexual woman but a reinforcement of her deaf identity because her lesbian partner in contrast to her husband was a sign language found out about jeanette s sexual relationship the couple was subject to homophobic abuse and harassment in this sense although jeanette claimed a deaf identity it was not ascribed to her by the community because of her identity as a lesbian the deaf community is no different from any other in that the very notion of community tends to privilege production of particular spatial orderings within the community as such jeanette s sexuality overshadowed and threatened to undo her identity as culturally deaf within the specific space of the deaf club although the weight jeanette herself
workplace struggles as fights for union recognition equal pay and a living wage have captured their attention in these studies low wage workers often in the service sector have been key figures of analysis especially in us studies of hotel janitors firing and hiring practices promotion and other workplace practices in work on a different spatial scale economic geographers have also extended understanding of the interconnections between socioeconomic technological and political structural changes in transforming the nature of the demand for and expansion of global investment networks as well as significant changes in the nature size and origins of migration within and between nation states have transformed the supply of labor across occupational hierarchies within nation states the expansion of women s labor market participation new forms of regulation and deregulation workfare policies especially in the united ct based employment in the now dominant service sector and new forms of competition have all added to the transformation of both labor and working practices however as freeman and salzinger have argued these latter studies the larger scale analyses of globalization have tended to ignore the more nuanced cultural approaches of local places even though it is widely accepted within economic geography that the local is constituted by social and economic processes that work out over multiple spatial scales and despite the cultural turn in economic geography this criticism the challenge for future work is to bring the two foci together showing how embodied local work both affects and reflects globalization one way of constructing such a coincidence of approaches is through a multiple focus on the interactions between categorical inequalities the discursive constructions of idealized workers and daily practices in not enter their site of employment witli their social characteristics firmly in place rather gender and ethnicity race and skin color are imbued with particular meanings as the interactions between workers managers and clients produce particular versions of embodied service workers as salzinger argued this constitution in mood conversation relationship gesture and style in the next section we locate the concept of interpellation in its theoretical origins in althusserian marxism showing how through new uses especially in feminist inspired work it has the potential to become a way of combining the is an althusserian concept initially applied to labor market analysis by burawoy in his book manufacturing consent to capture the ways in which employers managers construct idealized or stereotypical notions of idealized workers this naming of others in the workplace is in turn internalized by are constituted in and take meaning from social relations he recognized that identity is not an inherent attribute of the individual but a social construction in part a simulacrum yet insisted on die class based nature of these constructions workers who come to embody managerial assumptions or images or visions that nevertheless take material shape in daily interactions in the workplace in recent work the concept of interpellation has been extended in its confrontation with feminism and postmodernism and their recognition that identities are more fluid and malleable as well as multiple than burawoy and other identities are multiple and often contradictory the site of resistance as well as conformity to managerial namings wright for example like salzinger drew on research with women working in mexican maquiladoras to show how women employees in different workplaces interpellation is a contested process paralleled by strategies of resistance as workers challenge the dissonances between their own desires and self identities and managerial client expectations it is important however to recognize that workers own desires do not always conflict on their conformity to these managerial imaginings it is also important to recognize that the fantasies of managers and employers are multiple fluid and subject to change these fantasies are also located within organizational structures that produce and reproduce certain versions of managerial while these recent reworkings of the construct of interpellation have obvious parallels to notions of performativity drawing on butler s work they are based on a more grounded and more specific notion of identity formed through particular and limited interactions within the workplace rather than through a broader empirical work thinking through the connections between the different theoretical traditions and ways to combine structural inequalities with concepts of performance and difference in nonmanufacturing employment a second set of actors enters the picture clients customers or guests also construct we argue the process of interpellation is particularly significant in those parts of the service sector that offer a consumer experience to customers workers in interactive occupations have to look the part for clients and customers as well as adapt to and collude with managerial beliefs about the appropriateness of different categories of work for dual form of interpellation at work since employees have to conform not only to managers imaginations of an idealized embodiment of service but also to the expectations of customers in this case to the guests of the hotel who expect service with a smile to accompany a speedy check in process efficient but authoritative service in consumer based industries enchanting the clients has become a key part of providing a service and modern workplaces have increasingly had to become more oriented towards the fantasizing consumer than the toiling worker and as guerrier and adib have noted in hotel employment interaction case studies are a necessary method for both the empirical and theoretical development of an understanding of the intersection of economic globalization and new patterns of global migration in different labor markets it is to a case study that we now turn the case study selection kingdom and has the highest representation of both foreign bom and native black and minority ethnic workers in employment although percent of greater london s population was born outside the united kingdom migrants who are more likely to be of working age than the population as a whole constituted percent of london s this is a particularly apposite time to explore the recruitment and employment practices of a london hotel not only has the contraction in demand following the
also functionally related in aphasia individuals with aphasia who have difficulty understanding one often have difficulty understanding the other and treatment targeting production and comprehension of one has been shown to improve performance for the other based on sussman and sedivy s previous results successful element at the position of the verb in sentences with wh movement for example in a story context in which a boy kissed a girl participants should look to a picture of the girl when hearing the verb kiss in the wh question who did the boy kiss that day at school kiss signals the presence of a trace these fixations on the object picture at the verb should not appear for not have a moved element which listeners will be trying to associate with a trace and a thematic role assigner in this case a verb based on dickey and thompson s previous results we expect that at least some agrammatic aphasic individuals will show visual evidence of associating a moved element with a verb consistent with gap filling and with their being able to successfully comprehend wh movement sentences ve we might expect that the appearance of the object looks associated with linking a wh element and a verb or trace would be delayed for aphasic listeners perhaps not appearing at the position of the verb itself but somewhere downstream from the verb such a pattern of results would be consistent with slowed processing accounts of aphasic comprehension problems the impaired representation and slowed processing accounts described above if the slowed processing account is correct people with aphasia should be generally slowed in their processing of movement sentences and they should be particularly slow for trials in which their comprehension has failed dependency and the slower the comprehension the more likely it is to fail however the pattern of comprehension should be qualitatively similar for cases of successful and unsuccessful comprehension in both cases people with aphasia should show delayed looks to the picture corresponding to the moved element and those movement related looks should be more delayed when they fail to fixations seen for aphasic individuals should be qualitatively different from those seen for unimpaired individuals aphasic individuals should apply guessing strategies based on incomplete syntactic representations and these guessing strategies should diver from the automatic processing done by typical comprehenders for the same sentences it is less fixations to competitor pictures as well as the target moved element picture however they should be different from the patterns seen for unimpaired individuals methods participants twelve individuals with agrammatic broca s aphasia and eight healthy age matched individuals served as participants language testing data as assessed by the western aphasia battery with the exception of one participant in table their mean wab aq was they were between and years post onset and between and years of age at the time of grammatical morphology and was non fluent the control participants were between and years of age all subjects were premorbidly right handed and all were well educated native monolingual speakers of english and demonstrated good visual and hearing acuity demographic data for all participants are presented in table all participants for this study consisted of pairs of brief stories and panels depicting objects mentioned in the stories the stories were presented monoaurally over a loudspeaker while the panels were presented on a computer screen placed at a comfortable viewing distance for participants thirty of the story panel pairs served as experimental items while the remaining served as fillers more stories for all stimulus pairs had the same structure each story was four sentences long and was followed by a comprehension probe a sample story with comprehension probes is found in below this story is about a boy and a girl one day they were at school the girl was pretty so the boy kissed the girl boy kissed that day at school each story contained one transitive event described in sentence three sentence one of each story introduced two animate nps who were the agent and patient or theme of this event in half the stories the agent was mentioned first as in above and in half the stories the patient or theme was mentioned first sentence two introduced the location in of both actors or some state of affairs resulting from the transitive event in sentence three the stories were kept deliberately simple with only four sentences and a single transitive event to reduce working memory burdens for aphasic participants each story was followed by a comprehension probe the only difference between experimental and filler items was in event introduced in sentence three for of the experimental items the probe appeared in one of two forms either an object wh question or a yes no question as illustrated in above the object wh question contains an unambiguously transitive verb followed by a gap in contrast to the temporarily ambiguous wh questions used by sussman and sedivy may affect aphasic individuals comprehension of these items assuming aphasic individuals are extremely delayed in their gap filling they may well encounter the np in temporarily wh element and the verb this might well cause them to suspend or alter their gap filling routines in addition little is known about how aphasic individuals respond to temporary syntactic ambiguities with or without wh movement therefore the simpler unambiguous structures illustrated in were used answering aloud for the object wh questions the correct heard were followed by an object cleft as in above for these sentences the correct response to the cleft sentence was yes or true in all each participant heard experimental trials ending with an object wh question and ten experimental trials ending with a yes no question and an additional ten experimental trials ending with an object cleft all experimental stories along with the comprehension probes appeared in one of four forms a where wh question asking about the location in which the transitive event took place a subject wh question asking about the subject of the transitive event an object
any account establishing strong causation of agents this is that those who benefit from the structure of institutions have the duty if the causation is structural then the causal role of agents will always be largely indeterminable what can be seen more readily without being detained by an is that a large number of agents the affluent of the world draw benefits in virtue of that institutional order so there is a prima facie case for saying that compensation or recompense to the losers should be provided by these beneficiaries yet pogge does not unequivocally embrace this view he presents the fact that we benefit as an additional or strengthening reason for our compensatory duties he does not present it as a self standing source of duty it is only wrong he argues if we do not also compensate for doing so but he does not unequivocally say that we must compensate because we benefit perhaps the reason pogge cannot simply embrace the beneficiary pays principle as i shall call it is that this principle considered in and of itself as a sufficient or stand alone principle implies a duty to pay which is positive not negative it is not negative in either the not harm or not act sense for the beneficiary may not and therefore not contravened a negative duty not to harm and to ask the beneficiary to pay is to ask her not to stop doing something but to start doing something viz pay if the bpp is not accepted as a stand alone principle however it cannot add any weight to the application of a different principle this is a point that norbert anwander has made in criticism of pogge and although pogge has developed a anwander takes the unexceptional view that if someone incurs a wrongful loss from which nobody benefits they are in principle owed compensation exactly as if somebody did benefit the amount of compensation due is properly calculated by reference to the loss or harm suffered he disagrees with pogge s view that if someone benefits from causing the loss then they owe greater compensation to the victim than if they had not no reason to assume that a taker who benefits does greater harm to the victim simply in virtue of benefiting than one who does not so if compensation is for harm no greater compensation is of course if as a consequence of the benefit the victim suffers some further disadvantage then this harm constitutes a further injustice this further injustice will require rectification but in its own right not as an inflation of the original compensatory duty insist on this point is that the benefit may actually accrue to someone who was not in any way causally responsible for the original deprivation the beneficiary in this case has not contravened the negative duty not to harm any duty of compensation this beneficiary may have therefore is not a consequence of a breach of any negative duty on their part the question then is what duty does the beneficiary have the only relevant think it is realistic to invoke that duty in fact he does not even believe it is wrong to benefit he says that it is only wrong to benefit without compensating but that way of construing matters brings us back to the point we previously reached that in the absence of a strong causal account we could only conceive of compensating being due on the basis of benefiting yet why would anything be due from the beneficiary if has not been adequately determined on what basis can the claim of a requirement of compensation rest other than that of a positive duty to assist something has to give if pogge s position is to be maintained if we simply say that beneficiaries should fund recompense for the poor it is for pogge saying that they have a positive duty and that is not what he wants to say however i think that is exactly what we do have to say unless we are ready and able to offer how beneficiaries directly in virtue of benefiting are in fact doing harm i shall return to this proposal meanwhile i suggest that the problem with pogge s view on this score is that he seeks to use the bpp to bolster the negative duty not to uphold the structural causes of injustice but without maintaining that benefiting in itself is unjust this means that he cannot ground a satisfactory account of compensation radically transforming the institutional order can modest reform eradicate global poverty the obligation to work to reform the unjust global institutional order is the other main obligation pogge presents as the way of not collaborating in imposing it again there is some awkwardness in the way this obligation is conceived the first point i shall make a relatively minor one is that once more this seems to be an alternative to rather than a derivation of the not to collaborate since it cannot literally be a requirement on us to stop collaborating in imposing it the next and more crucial point however is that in order to operationalize the headline duty as a negative duty not to harm a causal account of harm is required this pogge does not offer his position is therefore vulnerable to attack for its failure to do so and lacks resources to strongly counter conflicting causal accounts that maintain the global order does not therefore harm such problems i argue would not arise if pogge just allowed and fastened on the point that the beneficiaries of the global order are in virtue of benefiting doing harm this conception even flows from his own argument about uncompensated exclusion as i shall go on to show in the next section but to appreciate that certain assumptions that he shares with his critics at least with those who take the general line of mathias risse need to be called into first though some brief
site commenced which was completed in new satellite structures as well as full excavation of the interior of the long hall after the initial seasons of excavation it was argued that hofsta ir was primarily a chieftain s settlement and that although it may have hosted religious ceremonies this was of secondary importance to its political status the site becomes comparable to several other monumental halls from nordic countries such as borg uppsala which have been interpreted as feasting halls the residences of chieftains or kings where pagan rituals also took place now that the project is complete and final publication is in preparation it seems that a reconsideration of the ritual element cannot be ignored especially given the finds of cattle skulls it can be argued that this ritual was integral to the political nature of the site avoiding the dichotomy of ritual functional and similarly not conflating ritual with religion we will begin by discussing the specific details of the skulls and their context of deposition and then to help contextualize their interpretation we will look at cases of ritual deposition in the archaeological record of tenth century northwestern explore the historical references to viking ritual involving animal sacrifice placing this within broader anthropological theories finally we will return to the hofsta ir material and attempt to provide a rich interpretation of the meaning of these skulls in the social context of the site and tenth century iceland the skulls osteology and taphonomy normal refuse generated by a viking age working farm some cattle skull fragments discovered in and around the great hall appear very different from those found elsewhere on site or in other icelandic archaeofauna a minimum of individual cattle skulls recovered outside the great hall show evidence of specialized butchery and prolonged display on the outside of a structure butchery marks include depressed fracture of the frontals between the eyes and a powerful shearing blow which would have beheaded the animal horn cores were left attached and not removed for horn craftworking marked surface weathering is present on the upper surfaces of skull bones with lower interior surfaces remaining unweathered suggesting differential exposure to wind and represented by these specimens one comprising the full face of a skull with only the lower jaw removed the other comprising a horn rack with only the frontal bones and attached horn cores present and the lower face cut away prior to mounting differential weathering indicates that the specimens were displayed face outwards and that they remained exposed to weathering for months or years after the soft tissue had decayed most or all of the key characteristics with location horn core basal minimum diameter notes and the available ams dates as uncalibrated radiocarbon years bp all of the fragments were tested for inter connection and all refits have been combined under a single specimen number at least different fragments not included in this table may in fact represent pieces of additional skulls too fragmented to identify positively table thus probably presents a minimum rather than a maximum listing of prepared skulls present at hofsta ir where tooth rows are attached the age of death ranges from just fully grown to middle aged adult a pattern very different from the dairy economy profile of many newborn and a few very old animals normally observed on icelandic farm presents the tooth the eruption and wear for the seven skulls with maxillary bones and upper tooth rows present the maxillary tooth wear stages have not been so heavily studied by zoo archaeologists as the mandibular tooth rows but they can be broadly grouped into light wear medium wear and heavy wear these eruption and wear patterns indicate were not yet fully mature with some adult dentition still erupting these young cattle would have been near their full adult size and would have provided approximately the same dressed meat weight as a full adult the other cattle show only lightly worn second and third adult molars indicating that these were adult but still fairly young animals these cattle are thus not simply elderly dairy cows at the end of take of the normal dairy economy but animals in their prime with many potentially productive years ahead of them in conventional zoo archaeological terms these animals would better fit a meat production rather than a dairy production harvest profile finally the skulls include both two naturally polled cattle and seven individuals with measurable horn core bases the measurable horn cores produce were bulls sexing animal bones in zoo archaeology depends largely on the morphology of pelvis and horns combined with overall stature reconstruction as many workers have noted modern animals often provide a poor analogue to ancient breeds and size and morphological differences between both modern and ancient cattle populations can be extreme norse north atlantic cattle from iceland the hebrides and greenland known from be small with sexual dimorphism much reduced from their wild ancestors overall the hofsta ir cattle resemble other icelandic and north atlantic cattle in reconstructed size and overall skeletal conformation five of the seven skulls carrying measurable horn cores are relatively robust with broad frontals and core bases a broader perspective may be provided by a comparison with viking age to early medieval anglo saxon cattle from winchester in southern england these anglo saxon cattle are also a comparatively small bodied early medieval type but come from a far richer farming environment so the placement of the larger hofsta ir horn cores near the upper end of the winchester distribution may be particularly are almost certainly mature bulls and appear to be large bulls by the standards of both the norse north atlantic and contemporary wessex this concentration of bull skulls is particularly surprising in the light of the dairy economy profile of the other viking age icelandic sites and in most other norse north atlantic archaeofauna as dairy bulls were expensive and rare animals in most pre modern agricultural settings particularly after they had reached a certain the jar ab lists
dimensions that comprised satisfaction view satisfaction with communicative participation might inform future research exploring satisfaction as a subjective metric for participation instruments when asked about a variety of communicative situations participants were able to describe their satisfaction and provide detailed explanations for their ratings for these community dwelling adults with ms satisfaction with communicative participation is multidimensional involving comfort success of outcome and of participation the following discussion compares the results of the present study with dimensions assessed in current scales of communicative function clinical implications and directions for future research are also provided comparison with scales in current use the dimensions of satisfaction with communicative participation identified in the current study can be compared with those assessed in self report scales in the speech language instruments suggests that most current scales ask respondents to rate their ease or difficulty with communication for example the communication items from the burden of stroke scale are rated according to how difficult they are items from the voice symptom scale and the voice handicap scale are rated according to the frequency of difficulty from the voice related quality of life scale are rated according to the extent of the problem the current study is in agreement that ease is an important dimension of satisfaction with communicative participation but ease is only one of several salient dimensions that emerged from this research other dimensions such as those associated with how individuals define success of communication and personal meaning of communication do not appear to present in most existing instruments it appears therefore that there are gaps between current measurement tools and the information that is important to people with communication disabilities associated with ms it would be useful to investigate whether asking about satisfaction in addition to or in place of asking about ease could provide more information one recent communication related scale does appear to capture several dimensions of satisfaction the asha quality of scale is a brief scale in which responses to questions are represented with simple pictographs the questions appear to represent multiple dimensions of satisfaction such as confidence and personal preference however the items are simple and designed to compensate for moderate to severe communication problems they likely do not adequately address the diverse and sometimes communication situations encountered by many community dwelling adults with a broad range of disorder severities one interesting finding in this research was the topics that did not appear in participants responses the most striking example was the dimension of frequency of activities participants were encouraged to discuss anything about situations that made them more or less satisfied and they tended to focus on the concepts described in the themes but not on how often they were involved in different activities these findings support prior research suggesting that a tally of how often someone does an activity might not be the most important indicator of successful or satisfactory participation for example the frequency or intensity of community activities had only slight inconsistent relationships with individuals expressed satisfaction with these activities of satisfaction in the current study may have several explanations some items may be difficult to quantify for example it may be difficult to count the number of times one performs such activities as giving your opinion to family or friends another explanation may be that frequency is not strongly related to satisfaction for example the frequency with which one communicates in an emergency may be less critical than the ability to do so quickly and not asked to talk specifically about frequency but they were encouraged to talk about any issues related to satisfaction that were important to them they had the opportunity to introduce the topic of frequency as an indicator of satisfaction but did not do so despite these suggestions that frequency might not be the most meaningful measure of participation one common approach to measuring participation in the rehabilitation related to how often activities occur for example the community integration questionnaire measures participation in rehabilitation populations and asks respondents to rate the frequency with which they perform certain activities eg how often do you travel outside the home an example related to communication is approximately how many times a month do you usually visit your relatives based on the results of this study questions arise as to whether such frequency ratings collect information that adequately addresses communicative participation clinical implications the findings of the current study have clinical implications both in terms of outcome measurement and targets for intervention our findings are consistent with other research in rehabilitation for example johnston and colleagues suggest that both activities and them must be assessed to understand whether a successful outcome has been attained in comparing community integration and satisfaction with functioning in individuals with traumatic brain injury cicerone et al suggest community functioning and satisfaction with functioning are distinct and separable aspects of participants experience that must be considered in the design and evaluation of rehabilitation programs preferably in the speech language pathology outcome measures should take into account the perspectives of individuals with communication disorders and the many different ways that they might define satisfaction for themselves researchers in the field of occupational therapy have described the process of reframing their practice when they advocate the need to move beyond setting goals to achieve functional independence and into a client centered approach that makes the individual s to the treatment process and has participation as an outcome like other fields of rehabilitation speech language pathology has focused rather narrowly on just a few dimensions when assessing treatment outcomes probably the most commonly used benchmark for successful communication is that function is achieved while it is reasonable to argue that this is important other dimensions of satisfaction may also be important to the client while an initial target outcome of intervention may be to achieve function an important next step might be comfort with the activity as our participants suggested participation is satisfactory when activities can be carried out easily and confidently without excess stress
in the course of analytic engagement is not nonanalytic but is in the service of analytic work facing the end the power for symbolic representation and language and the ability to delay action long enough to play with ideas these gifts bring with them the curse of the knowledge of our individual deaths it has been said that every man knows he will die yet no man believes it the knowledge distance it though we try will not disappear because poetry is not a universe external to us but is like the psychoanalytic venture a human creation the story of a clock s going tick tock and that of millennial catastrophes are also human creations our minds shape endings not solely for the sake of reality testing but to make experience digestible we learn from examining poetry and analysis because in them we see the working of our own minds mirrored sunday we want even greek tragedies to end and they all went to the seashore the fundamental adaptive principle learned from long psychoanalytic experience is that each person functions the way he does because it is the best way of getting along in the world as that person sees it so every aim manifestly cruel or self destructive though it may seem takes adaptive gratification a happy ending as our smallness and our helplessness as caston puts it we take the anguish of the world as random and disordered or we face the terror and awfulness of death itself putting an ending on things comforts us about safe conclusions whatever other meanings are also implied we love joyce not only for what he says of the human condition but also for his holding randomness to a place within human connectedness and continuing sexuality kafka also tells us about our human world but how many love him he forces us to face intolerable helplessness with no safe ending encouraging inspiration and a bit more respect for the verities of loss and death those are questions not only for psychoanalytic technique but for living life itself the narcissism of our being no mere vanity is at stake wondrously and wonderfully prisoners did play music in death camps yet such amazing behavior was not miraculous the prisoners were killed they died even if their music lingered on our own narcissism has we try to forget that it is death who says et in arcadia ego sum it is death who says and in paradise there too am i narcissism can tolerate only so much in the battle of eros against thanatos as humans we need to know love to be able to survive and even flourish in the presence of death the conversation of human life happily goes on my own maneuvering as if bargaining with reality now seems evident to me even in that footnote i tell myself that death will not conquer me because i will think of the humanity that survives my own ending a terrible compromise but the best i can contrive and fortunately for humanity true one s mind in the face of dreaded dissolution we survive little endings as if to show ourselves we will somehow go on endlessly with wit and with sobriety with cruelty and with love with symptoms and with faith with anything we humans can devise we try to distract death from us or at the least distract ourselves from death usage of the word poiesis steiner wrote his essays as a post holocaust response to eliot s earlier parallel set of essays in which the poet looked at the postwar world and seemed to find a halcyon scene making art making poetry yes even analyzing these create meaning and value perhaps best not as a denial of horror but defiantly in the face of horror equivocations between poiesis because their very negation proclaims the existence of what they would deny coltart whatever the particulars of her personal tragedies may not have been amiss in her reading of yeats s the second coming that rough beast slouching to be born in bethlehem reminds us of the imperishability of death in its very act of offering the hope of continuing life the existence of eros implies the existence of thanatos just as the existence existence of eros beginnings imply endings and the rough beast slouching to be born carries both we indeed are such stuff as dreams are made on and like dreams we are by nature transient we would have it otherwise but unable to make it so despite science or art we come to cherish what matters most transience bears with it poignancy a sharpening of emotional sensitivity what grows more vulnerable grows more dear mattered deeply and the loss is real a wise analysand once touchingly commented i ll look at reality but only as a tourist that is as good as it gets as good as we have reason to hope for even for ourselves we must be cautious that we do not for our own needs exaggerate the hopefulness in successful analytic terminations after the are to be honored but not converted into magical amulets for mutual reassurance i do not believe my terminating analysands misunderstand the words that accompany my final handshakes when i say i wish you well by then they know well that i regard them that is that i try to see them for themselves and they know that i genuinely regard them that is that i hold them in regard valuing them for themselves and to alter either their situations or their futures that is that my regard includes the caring not of a ministering parent or powerful physician but of a separate equal other person one who shares the human condition so they even know that no matter how they might also wish that my wish had magical power it is not such magical power that i imply the love that is at the center of eros that which allows one to
a special account principally for old age provisions medisave account to pay for hospital treatment medical care and approved medical insurance and from age a retirement account to finance periodic benefit payments starting at age employees in singapore contribute earnings if monthly earnings are over the amount over if monthly earnings are between and and no contributions if monthly earnings are under the employer pays payroll if monthly earnings are and provides no contribution for monthly earnings under maximum earnings for contribution purposes are for both the employee and the employer the singapore supplementary retirement scheme is a tax advantaged voluntary scheme and was introduced in srs permits singapore citizens to save in a special individual account their total labor compensation the singapore government withdrew plans to introduce low cost voluntary private as a way to increase retirement savings the decision in march followed consultations with pension fund experts and the public about the lack of industry incentives and the potential for investment losses under the proposed system thailand pension system consists of three basic components the social welfare fund a mandatory pay as you go system covering virtually the entire the government pension fund covering approximately million civil servants with reserves in excess of tbt billion and provident funds covering million workers in private companies and certain state agencies with reserves worth about tbt billion a compulsory defined benefits old age pension scheme for private sector employees was introduced in thailand on december the scheme called old age pension fund operates under the thai social welfare fund the social security act defines the combined contribution rate for old age pension and child allowance to be collected from three parties employer employee and the government at a rate which altogether does not exceed wage the actual contribution rate for the old age pension is he employer contributes the employee contributes and the government contributes the government the government pension fund was established in for government employees and operates on a defined contribution basis the gpf had million members and held assets worth tbt billion at the end of making it the country largest institutional investor there are two kinds of private pension funds in thailandi rovident funds and retirement mutual funds the provident fund act was promulgated in to for retirement the fund is based on voluntary defined benefit system a fund committee comprised of employer and employee representatives chooses the fund managers and oversees the provident fund the provident fund is regulated by the securities and exchange commission of thailand employees and employers both contribute and fund regulations currently allow public and private sector salaried workers to save up to tbt the employee contribution is the salary and employers contribute at a level equal to or higher than the employee if employers wish to contribute at a higher rate than they must seek approval from the ministry of finance the concept of the retirement mutual fund was established in thailand in march aiming to provide a means for voluntary retirement savings for employees not in the provident fund or who want to make the additional pension fund size and asset allocation public sector pension systems are much larger in asian countries compared to the private pension plans they are heavily invested in government bonds and bank deposits the social security fund in china controlled about billion in assets at the end of the latest data available the scope acceptable liquidity including tradable securities investment funds stocks corporate bonds and financial institution bonds whose credit rating is above that of the issuer additional regulations introduced in allowed the fund to invest up to equities and an additional corporate bonds the revised rules also allocated at least bank deposits and a total of at least bank deposits and government bonds fund management companies to manage the social security fund the six fund management companies began investing in chinese equities in june china ministry of labor and social security issued regulations in to establish a framework for china new system of voluntary corporate retirement plans to safeguard the investment of occupational pension fund assets in molss gave approval for financial institutions to manage voluntary under china the enterprise annuity program the first operating licenses were awarded in august to chinese investment managers four of which are joint ventures with foreign companies an additional licenses were awarded to companies providing administrative services such as custodians trustees and administrators voluntary corporate pension plans in china are intended stringent oversight the governance structure requires a plan trustee to oversee the pension fund and appoint a plan administrator a custodian and an investment manager a separate license is required for each of these functions guidelines for enterprise annuity service providers to obtain operating licenses were issued in early february enterprise annuity fund managers oversee the portfolio selection and there is no employee choice investment restrictions require that at least invested in liquid assets a maximum of fixed income products and convertible bonds including a minimum of government bonds and a maximum of equities in addition investment managers are be required to put administrative fees into a separate trust fund as a contingency against possible investment losses at the assets stood at about rmb billion in indonesia jamsostek had a membership of million employees and assets of rp trillion as of end in terms of asset allocation equity investments comprised rp billion bonds made up trillion and other mutual fund investments made up trillion taspen had rp trillion in funds under management as of may as of end net assets of private pension funds trillion investment portfolios consist largely of bank deposits bonds short term securities real estate and mutual funds pension funds may invest all their funds in mutual fundsi to any pension fund total investment is permitted in any single mutual fund investments in time deposits and certificates of deposit may be placed only with a bank that is neither the founder nor an affiliate of the founder of the pension fund and pension funds are not permitted to invest offshore
in this regime specifically the buyer prefers simultaneous investment when this inequality reduces to xj the right hand side of this inequality is always negative because so the inequality is always satisfied in contrast to the buyer s preferences the seller s preferences are parameter specific she prefers simultaneous investment when it sequential investment is efficient when the left hand side of this inequality is negative and the right hand side is positive that is when the seller will reject the simultaneous regime but can realize a positive return in the sequential regime the seller can earn a positive return in the sequential regime because she is not subject to holdup in this regime she will invest only projects to be done that would otherwise be forgone the availability of the sequential regime nevertheless creates an opportunity for the seller to behave strategically to see why a seller might choose to defect suppose that simultaneous investment is more efficient than sequential investment and the parties agree to function in the simultaneous regime solving inequality for the surplus variables that affect the seller s incentive to comply with an agreement to invest simultaneously the seller will comply when the left hand side of inequality the project s surplus is larger than the right hand side the righthand side of in turn is increasing in and and is decreasing in inequality therefore shows that the seller is more likely to defect to sequential investment if her costs are high because she would no profitable project to pursue inequality also shows that the seller is more likely to defect when she is more patient the seller trades off the value of the option to delay and see how things turn out against the cost of delaying a possibly positive return the more patient the seller is the more likely she is to make that tradeoff in favor of delay finally the inequality shows that the seller is more likely to comply with her agreement if there is a high she will recover her investment costs the probability of cost recovery gets larger as the parties project becomes more likely to succeed to be sure the seller s incentive to breach an agreement to invest simultaneously can be overcome if a successful project will generate a large enough gain that is if is large nevertheless breach is always a possibility and it is inefficient when some efficient projects from being pursued the buyer s expected return from sequential investment can be negative when his return from simultaneous investment is positive in such cases the buyer will participate only if the seller agrees to simultaneous investment even if the seller agrees however a sophisticated buyer will still not participate if his costs will be high and the seller s defection is a serious possibility the seller prefers to commit to simultaneous this circumstance whenever her expected gain is positive but she cannot as section shows sellers sometimes have an incentive to wait and the parties cannot contract on the timing or level of investment hence the seller s promise to begin by a certain date and then to invest up to the optimal level will not be credible as a consequence efficient projects will sometimes be forgone this is the ex post holdup problem to examine whether the law can help denote the buyer s expected return in the simultaneous regime denote the buyer s expected return in the sequential regime as section c shows in the case we consider in this section h is negative and g is positive also let the subjective probability that the buyer assigns to seller defection from the simultaneous regime be finally recall that though parties cannot contract on investment or on a portion of the buyer s investment cost a is verifiable ex post if the law permitted the buyer to recover the verifiable portion of his reliance then at the buyer s expected return from an agreement to invest simultaneously would be or xj the first term a xj is the buyer s expected return if the seller does defect it equals the loss from being forced into the sequential seller defection the second term is the buyer s expected return if the seller complies with her agreement the probability of compliance i times the expected gain when the buyer s expected return in the simultaneous investment regime is negative without the reliance offset and positive with it a buyer who expects to recover reliance will make a preliminary agreement that he otherwise would have rejected hence awarding verifiable promisors exploit them will increase the number of efficient preliminary agreements such awards also may deter parties from breaching these agreements if a seller expects that a nontrivial fraction of her buyer s reliance will become verifiable her incentive to comply increases materially we make five elaborating comments about our recommendation that the law should protect the buyer s reliance interest in this the buyer s expectation in the simultaneous regime is is verifiable under our assumptions the legal requirement that damages must be reasonably certain and foreseeable precludes expectation recoveries in the cases we consider project is efficient to pursue and the buyer agrees to the exploitative renegotiation price delay by the seller should be treated as an instance of duress and the buyer should be permitted later to sue for reliance if the seller delays investing and the buyer s investment shows that the project would be inefficient the seller will exit although the project should not be pursued the seller still should be liable for the buyer s buyers to make efficient preliminary agreements and will sometimes deter strategic behavior by sellers nevertheless although protecting the buyer s reliance interest will increase efficiency it will not achieve the firstbest outcome in some cases the verifiable portion of the buyer s reliance will be too small to sustain his incentive to make a preliminary agreement moreover recall that we have normalized each party s buyer s option is positive the base return of verifiable reliance in the deal may
validity nonverbal cues can be subdivided into two broad classes nonverbal visual cues and paraverbal cues rs here the focus is on nonverbal visual cues in a recent comprehensive meta analysis depaulo et al analyzed different cues to deception including a large variety of nonverbal deceptive and truthful the present article investigates only a small subset of nonverbal visual behaviors that we consider particularly important from an applied perspective namely blinking eye contact gaze aversion head movements nodding smiles adaptors hand movements illustrators foot and leg movements and postural shifts lay people and professionals pay attention to these aspects of demeanor to gauge whether a person is telling the truth or lying example in cross examination or in police interviews of these nonverbal behaviors none showed a reliable association with deception across studies in depaulo et al s meta analysis in fact the only nonverbal indicators that showed effect sizes d were overall nervousness and tension pupil dilation and a raised chin however the latter two estimates were based on only across three liars were perceived to be less cooperative however one may critically ask what particular aspects of nonverbal behavior should one look for to classify a behavior as cooperative arguably if a behavior cannot be observed objectively it can hardly be used as a clue to deception in contrast police training packages often include nonverbal and paraverbal important cues to deception ever since freud s influential writings in lay people and professionals alike have believed that these behaviors are particularly helpful in catching a liar although there seem to be no reliable cues a closer look reveals that some studies have found reliable differences truth tellers under certain conditions which may account for the overall inconsistency in findings an explanation for the contradictory findings obtained across individual studies might be that studies differ regarding experimental method the type of sample or the operationalizations used to measure the nonverbal behaviors of interest a host of moderator variables may blur the association between nonverbal cues and deception some researchers gave their prepare deceptive messages others did not also it is quite difficult to motivate participants to lie in a laboratory setting where the consequences appear minimal compared with real life situations especially in criminal proceedings and before courts of law therefore motivation and opportunity to prepare an account may be important moderator variables regarding the ecological validity of deception cues a variety of practically relevant moderator variables to account for differences in findings we focus on those aspects that may be particularly relevant in a legal context the choice of nonverbal behaviors investigated here was dictated by particularly strong beliefs regarding the diagnostic value of these behaviors in detecting lies in contrast the comprehensive meta analysis by depaulo et al centered on self presentation and lies in everyday life and investigated paraverbal and verbal cues ever studied in the present metaanalysis in addition to motivation and preparation the following variables were investigated as potential moderators content features of the deceptive message sanctioning of lies degree of interaction between experimenter and participant type of experimental design and operationalizations of the variables in the following section we outline several theories that have account for behavioral differences when lying in contrast to telling the truth theories to predict nonverbal correlates of deception many researchers have followed the four factor model of behavioral cues to deception proposed by zuckerman depaulo and rosenthal and zuckerman and driver according to zuckerman and his colleagues deception involves authors freely acknowledged the behavioral correlates of deception may be determined by more than one factor and it is not possible to isolate any of these factors as causally responsible nevertheless it is illuminating to note that these different theories lead to contradictory predictions with respect to different nonverbal behaviors we summarize these predictions in table table also contains lay persons and professional lie catchers changes in these nonverbal behaviors when people are lying it is worth noting that there seem to be few if any differences in beliefs between studies conducted with students the general public police officers and various legal professionals or across countries and cultures in the following section we describe these theories and the predictions that can be derived from them arousal the notion that lying is associated with physiological arousal can be traced back to ancient times and is also at the heart of any psychophysiological approach to detecting deception although there seems to be explanations for this phenomenon are disputed there is the general notion that whenever faced with an unusual threatening or complex situation individuals experience a greater degree of arousal the assumption is that physiological responses associated with arousal are rarely subject to control and therefore may provide relatively consistent cues to deception as a consequence one to see an increase in frequency of signs of autonomic activity and also of various types of movements particularly in the extremities these movements seem to be carried out semiautomatically without much conscious control illustrators which unlike other hand movements are used deliberately by communicators to underscore or explain what is being are a possible exception perhaps partially as a consequence of the widespread absorption of freud s writings his claim that these nonverbal behaviors betray a liar is a common assumption among many intellectuals worldwide cross cultural comparisons have confirmed that beliefs about these indicators of deception are universally shared one of the problems perhaps due to personality differences in the amount of movement displayed irrespective of deception also the relationship between arousal and the production of these behaviors may not be linear that is these behaviors may not increase as stress increases the relationship may be curvilinear such that under extreme stress interviewees may freeze like a soldier in kind of sympathetic activation is different from arousal attributable to a source other than deception there is also the question whether it is a general form of arousal that may be responsible for some of the behavioral reactions observed when lying or whether these
von hippel and tyre claim that learning by doing is responsible while implementing the new process specifications operators and engineers learn how to do it the circumstances present in the production environment force them to find a way to deal with problems at hand the workforce present in the production environment needs to increase their learning effort the authors treat this as an endogenous learning effect it appears in their model that even without spending additional resources on learning management consider knowledge generated through training and preparation for and implementation of process changes to include the empirically established short term negative effect of process change implementations the authors consider a short term capacity reduction effect proportional to the size of the process change project terwiesch and xu paid more attention to the disruptions caused by process of the accumulated experience becomes obsolete because the unit production cost is a decreasing function of the knowledge level the implementation of a process change causes an immediate performance reduction remember that carrillo and gaimon modeled this as a reduction of the effective capacity in comparison terwiesch and xu consider more knowledge generated through sustained production and deliberate learning efforts such as training or additional engineering the authors do not treat as endogenous the circumstantial effects that arise due to process change implementations and increased learning the additional learning needed is induced by management through exerting additional effort on learning a more general model includes the effects described in both models the differentiation of the general stock of knowledge into multiple types of knowledge stocks knowledge generated through sustained production activities and knowledge generated through deliberate managerial action the first type of knowledge accumulates in the stock of autonomous learning the second type of knowledge accumulates in the stock of induced learning rgensen and kort indicate that it is more realistic to include mixed dynamics but that limits the possibilities for analysis to numerical techniques an important problem of numerical additional assumptions that are difficult to check have to be made to obtain structural results problem structure in this section the decision problem is structured in a formal way with a single decision variable two state variables a system equation for each state variable a period reward function and an optimality criterion decision variable period an overview of types of process changes can be found in carrillo and gaimon they propose changes of manufacturing equipment the inclusion of information technology and procedural changes as the three most important categories in this model to measure the total size of the process change activities to be performed in the current period we use an upper bound is included to represent a budget constraint the is represented by larger than zero the level of process change activities can be interpreted as the projected increase of the effective capacity level of the production system in absolute terms the effective capacity is used in the sense of carrillo and gaimon state variables gulledge the concept of the stock of process knowledge present in the production environment as a state variable to capture the dynamics of learning and process change implementations the concept originates from the learning curve literature where the effect of experience generation through sustained production activities on production unit cost is captured using the measure of cumulative output including results from empirical organizational research later work broadened the experience generated through production to knowledge generation activities such as engineering inspection quality improvement and training of the workforce contribute to an increase of the stock of process knowledge present in the production environment as such the measures for the accumulated level of process knowledge proposed in the literature are the accumulated level of production output the cumulated investment in engineering process quality improvement etc the cumulated hours spent on knowledge generating activities is another measure used in the literature in the model of section the planner can choose the type or size of a process change project the long term average size and learning effort of the workforce is treated as fixed working with the production process and the transfer of knowledge from the project engineers increases the stock of experience applied knowledge part although theoretical knowledge is also present this section focuses on the dynamics of applied knowledge the accumulated experience s be interpreted to include the routines and procedures developed to implement the current process specifications and perform the resulting production activities section considers as in carrillo and gaimon and terwiesch and xu the case where direct investments in process knowledge activity or training the second measure is also used in carrillo and gaimon under the condition that demand exceeds capacity which frequently occurs during ramp up the managerial objective of changing the process specifications is to increase the effective capacity level of the production system this level is measured with several types of process changes increase the effective capacity level as an example consider the replacement of by equipment offering technology with lower variability as a result less out of spec products leave the manufacturing stage that reduces the number of additional starts and rework thus contributing to an increase of the effective capacity bohn and terwieshch provide more insights into the effects of yield on effective capacity spence and porteus report on the positive effect of a reduction of setup times on the effective capacity level of a production system equations the system equations describe the effect of the decision variable on the state variables two phenomena are included that influence the stock of experience with the production process experience generation through production activities and changes of the process specifications both have an impact on the stock of experience first the effect of experience generation is discussed due to training by project engineers or consultants and the repetitive execution of production activities the workforce gains experience with the current production process and accumulates experience in its memory or in information systems the experiences are mostly constituted of applied knowledge this process of accumulating applied
an elastomeric network in general one of the critical aspects of sbs modified asphalt chemical in the latter case the chemical modification of sbs through the grafting of carboxylic acid groups and epoxy pb has been studied to improve the storage the end functionalization of sbs by in situ anionic polymerization technology is an effective method for attaching polar groups to the end of the sbs molecular commercial and academic the end functionalization of synthetic polymers is of great interest because the reactive polymers are highly valuable intermediates for the synthesis of copolymers of complex and compatibilizers for polymer the methodology of living anionic polymerization is particularly suitable for the synthesis of well defined and quantitative degrees of end in this study we synthesized sbs copolymers using carbon dioxide and epoxy ethane as capping agents the introduction of carboxy groups at the end of polymer chain ends is of considerable interest because these groups undergo a variety of reactions and the rene isoprene styrene triblock copolymers end capped with carboxylic acid groups or sodium carboxylate groups and further investigated the strong ionic associations and increased repulsive segment segment interactions in the block copolymers prepared star block styrene butadiene copolymers having carboxylic acid groups associated with the nucleus and found that they were preparation of end hydroxyl ps using anionic polymerization and found that epoxy ethane was an effective capping agent for the synthesis of the end functionalized polymer the end hydroxyl polymer was also applied to improve the compatibility of polymer blends by jerome et although numerous studies have focused on the anionic koning et al and klaus studies have shown that is an effective end capping agent for anionic polymerization but to the best of our knowledge little has been reported on the synthesis of end amino functionalized sbs triblock copolymers in this study we report a kind of end functionalized and epoxy ethane as capping agents according to anionic polymerization technology amino carboxylic acid and hydroxyl groups were designed for the molecular end of sbs we study their special transmission electron microscopy and dynamic mechanical properties at the same time end functionalized sbs is applied to improve the storage stability of sbs modified asphalt modified asphalt is compared experimental materials butadiene styrene cyclohexane and butyllithium were obtained from beijing yanshan petrochemical corp styrene and cyclohexane were dried with molecular sieves to keep the water concentration below ppm and were purged with highly purified nitrogen for more than min before then distilled under the protection of the purity of thf was checked with gas chromatography the concentration of buli was calibrated by the gilman double titration for the synthesis of see refs and the purity was analyzed by gas chromatography mass spectrometry and it was as follows penetration dmm and softening point the composition of ah asphalt could be described as follows saturates aromatics resins and asphaltenes polymerization procedures a stainless reactor which was dried and purged a syringe to first polymerize the styrene monomer about min after the addition of buli the temperature of the water bath was increased to and butadiene monomer was added to the reactor after the copolymerization of the styrene and butadiene monomers for at a designated amount of styrene was added to the reactor and the polymerization proceeded was added to the reactor at and reacted for min then the color of the solution changed from red to pink a small amount of ethanol was added to terminate the living polymers at which point the color of the solution changed from pink to colorless an aging resistant agent was added was dried in a vacuum oven at to a constant weight the overall polymerization is shown in scheme sbs copolymers initiated with buli were further subjected to carbonation to end cap the ps end blocks the following procedures after polymerization a polar additive n tetramethylethylenediamine was added to the solution of sbs by a syringe and the polymerization solution was lowered to about gas at a constant pressure of mpa was passed into the reactor after which the gas reacted with the polymeric organolithium after the solution was pressured out of the reactor by pressure immediately after that about ml of hydrochloric acid methanol was added to the polymer solution and the mixture was stirred to hydrolyze the polymeric lithium carboxylate salt yielding the sbs copolymer end capped with the cooh group the precipitated polymer end carboxylic acid shown in scheme the hydroxylation of sbs was carried out with the epoxy ethane as a capping agent after the copolymerization of sbs the temperature of the polymerization solution was lowered to about epoxy ethane was added to the polymerization solution after the solution was pressured out of the reactor by pressure immediately and the mixture was stirred to produce endhydroxyl styrene butadiene styrene preparation of sbs modified asphalt asphalt was heated to in a small container until it flowed fully sbs was mixed into asphalt at a stirring rate of rpm for min sulfur was added to the blends to improve the storage stability and weight was determined by gel permeation chromatography with three waters styragel columns at a nominal flow rate of ml min with a sample concentration of the solvent thf the gpc instrument was calibrated with monodisperse ps standards was dissolved in chloroform to prepare a solution with a concentration of mg ml nmr spectra were used to calculate the contents of the vinyl and microstructures of the percentages of the styrene block and the microstructure of the butadiene portion were calculated according to ref the concentration of the amine at the polymer chain and glacial acetic acid and the solution was titrated with standard in glacial acetic acid with crystal violet as the indicator the degree or functionality of amination was evaluated by a combination of the amine content by the titration and the number average molecular weight was determined by gpc to the phenolphthalein end dynamic mechanical properties were measured with a ta dma dynamic mechanical analyzer with
the civil service it pointed out the negative effects of the low profile policy centered on the rms and gvt the hostility of civil service trade unions their disagreements with the public the budget directorate s whole strategy was implicitly criticized the recommendations argued for greater publicity and transparency in the terms of negotiation for a better definition of the measurement indicators and for a real comparison with the private sector in order to ensure that the civil service was not disadvantaged public service renewal echoed the criticisms directed at the low profile use of the rms and its delegitimization in the late very recently in february the issues linked to gvt were taken up again in similar terms in the context of a debate on overhauling the wage negotiation the question of the methodological framework for wage negotiation was raised again the civil service minister jean paul delevoye responsible for creating an objective shared statistical base the seven civil service trade unions denounced the idea and this led to the project s failure on this point the terms of the debate recall exchanges in the mid in which government and trade unions were opposed the tension between the three intrinsic properties of the rms a tool for acquiring knowledge an instrument of spending control and an element in stabilizing the terms sustaining both contradictions and conflicts new strategies for retrenching civil service wages expenditure at the turn of the century at the end of the century in a context where public expenditure still remained a crucial issue the strategy of decreasing civil service wages by working within the existing framework with a low profile instrument appeared ineffective at this time both other internal the demographic analysis of civil service population trends provided evidence for stronger initiatives on the overall public sector personnel system in the commissariat general au plan published an alarming report on public employment trends which revealed that public servants will be retired from the state civil service by that is all state employees the report presented the french state to make hard choices about its personnel management and recruitment strategy both in quantitative terms and in qualitative terms these figures were made public and they transformed budget directorate and government strategies on personnel policies the governments of both prime minister jospin and prime minister stabilize the overall number of staff by balancing out retirement departures and new recruitment the budget directorate asserted its objective of not replacing one retired public servant in two and this now frames all negotiations with ministries this nonreplacement strategy that is an approach that delegitimizes and blocks any compensatory interventions in the of the hidden politics of social policy reform at the same time the core idea of the rms has been reframed within a big external legislative change and its ubiquity thus reinforced indeed the passage of a new institutional act on budget legislation adopted on august retained the main significance of the rms while encapsulating it in a by set up a results oriented budget redesigning the overall budget architecture by organizing credit items into assignment groups and programs each a consistent set of measures coming under the same ministry and involving both specific objectives and expected results that would be subject to review within each program public managers will be given a great deal of room to maneuver in the use of appropriations appropriations between types of expenditure a wage bill ceiling and a jobs ceiling were to be defined for each program and for each ministry detailing jobs on the state payroll these new global frameworks require demanding overall wage bill measurement at every level along with forecasts that will optimize total wage bill the hidden politics of administrative change what a low profile instrument tells us about the transformation of bureaucracies for those interested in institutional changes in administrative systems this case study demonstrates three significant arguments about retrenchment policies that use low profile instruments of techniques for calculating measuring classifying and indexing linked to the construction of reliable information on the activities of contemporary government an examination of how the rms was invented and perfected throws a spotlight on the importance of knowledge as stakes in administrative reform the attention paid to the administrative population from the two perspectives of number devices to provide knowledge of the number of public employees and a precise measure of their demands on state expenditure the conditions in which this measuring tool was created and used and the knowledge issues related to them illustrate the importance of a technocratic perspective that raises the value of techniques in administrative policy as a way of rationalizing policy making and providing a calculation the instrument matters all the more as measurement once launched and backed by powerful institutions becomes real fateful and autonomous seemingly the rms may be viewed as a neutral instrument showing the various components of the overall civil service wage bill once such a mode of calculation was institutionalized it became extremely robust but also paradoxically an instrument for learning in a context where the rationality of the state was being questioned the rms then came to be seen as a possible foundation for trust in a keynesian inspired incomes policy before finally being used as a crucial tool in imposing economic stringency in all cases the instrument provides new capacities for government interventions by creating new objective realities by allowing itself to become an object of investigation becomes an object of public intervention however as nicely illustrated by the rms an instrument also refracts power relations although the rms like all measurement instruments has produced depersonalized public forms of knowledge it is not uncontroversial the categorizations and methods of calculation wage increase mechanisms were discussed and contested from the late to the point where long lasting opposed positions crystallized the second and fourth parts of this article have analyzed the controversies of the and around the rms privileging the conflict that brought trade unions and employers into opposition
the first time thus novelty stimulates interest these findings are contrary to earlier reports which showed that persons acquainted with the visited site find it easier to learn something new the influence of group composition depends on the attraction visiting a large crowded fete provides knowledge to those who visit it in a small group of group the connection between the interests in information sources and gained knowledge proved to be weak is this a result of the lack of any modern multimedia interactive forms of interpretation this may be the case a lot of research shows that such forms attract visitors attention it is not a coincidence that the strongest connection was identified in the zoo motivation is another significant factor for acquisition of knowledge as it could be presumed an educational motive was significant in affecting the process of knowledge acquisition however a connection was also found for the other two motives the prestige and the social one both of which have an adverse effect merimann s observations not have to be accompanied by the interest in the presented themes and thus by education such visitor s by the very fact of being in a given place fulfill their needs of prestige and self satisfaction cf social interactions in a group of visitors which was noted also by other authors distract visitors attention from the educational content process at heritage sites the most important factors were location novelty motivation and composition of the visitors group regrettably these factors can be modelled by the management of heritage sites only to a very small extent perhaps a more interesting educational offer in the form of interactive multimedia presentations educational games and facilities the most important conclusion resulting from the conducted research which can be applied in practice is the fact that visitors do not attach much importance to the knowledge offered to them by the attractions museums to a greater extent become places of recreation entertainment and social interaction rather than places of acquiring to them in fact it is rather the opposite certain types of museums are visited by certain types of visitors for defined purposes sometimes the purpose is education sometimes it is recreation or entertainment therefore it seems that the modern museum will succeed if it can satisfy the needs of both types of visitors the ones aiming at recreation eu accession ivo kunst abstract the aim of the article is to examine the implications of the eu integration process on croatian tourism analyzing the experience of the countries which took part in the two last eu accession rounds and focusing especially on malta cyprus and slovenia as most interesting cases for croatia integration process impact areas relevant for tourism sector have been pointed out on the basis of this analysis numerous areas of potential benefits costs have also been defined and classified the emphasis in the selected countries case study analyses has been directed primarily to identify characteristic features of the tourism sector before the commencement of the eu negotiation process modifications and or possible turnarounds in the tourism development strategy as a result of the eu negotiation process and or adaptations of the legal framework as well as increases decreases in the pre negotiation levels of tourism demand supply and receipts during the eu accession period the analyses for all three countries strongly indicate that new tourism strategies that have been adopted as well as dynamic growth of tourism receipts coincide with the eu accession process the new tourism development strategies lean strongly towards environment friendly development as well as towards more efficient usage and preservation of space in year croatia has become the official candidate for eu membership however croatia is aiming to fully join the eu during the year and is hence conducting an intensive international campaign regardless of whether croatia is going to join the eu within the planned time frame or somewhat later especially in context of recent problems with the eu constitution and some member states attitudes concerning the future eu membership implies significant changes in all spheres of croatian including the tourism since the tourism sector represents a vital sector of the croatian economy especially due to its positive effects on the balance of payment and foreign trade balance it is only logical to question how the eu accession process is going to affect the overall tourism sector performance and in particular there is the need to understand and objectively analyze various tourism sector related direct and indirect benefits and costs associated with the eu accession process although it is at this stage almost impossible to accurately quantify various benefits and costs associated to this process the recent experiences of the last accession round countries should provide a multitude of useful insights and among the last accession round countries during their eu candidacy stage all these countries have been characterized by economic political and or social transition processes in other words in comparison to other eu member states these were the countries with insufficiently competitive stabilized political systems and insufficiently transparent legislative systems due to these reasons in order to fulfil the complex eu membership requirements and in order to prepare themselves best for the new much more competitive economic environment all the countries of the last accession round had been simultaneously working on two levels the demanding process of eu legislation harmonization and structural adjustments of their the tourism sector as well having all this in mind and in order to contribute to a smooth and effective adjustment of croatian tourism sector to the new market environment characterized by more pronounced competitive terms and eu related rules of the game this article aims to point out key trends that have marked the tourism sector development in costs in the tourism sector associated with the eu accession process analyze key implications that the eu membership is likely to have on the tourism sector in croatia based on the above goals the article will rely on the following methodological setup
in equation results conventional setpoint control as mentioned before there were six sets of mean weather data serving as six sets of input to the computer simulation the two air conditioning control methods were applied in turn to control six sets of results were produced each set of results contained the information of the thermal environments in a particular month between may and october the simulation was first conducted using conventional setpoint control in each set of results five pmv values inside the office were estimated they represented the thermal environments in five different locations which were the director s room the manager s room column column and column as shown in figure figure shows the pmv values recorded from to in june the values lay within and a slightly warm thermal feeling occurred in the director s room and that pmv value was always higher than the others on the other hand the manager had a pmv value of about a more thermally neutral condition in the morning and then experienced a slightly warm thermal sensation in the afternoon for the other staff an opposite situation occurred a slightly warm thermal sensation in the morning a more thermally neutral condition in the afternoon figures and show the corresponding room temperature the mean air speed and the mean radiant temperature respectively it was found that the conventional control could maintain the room temperature at the setpoint value of xc with a mean air speed of around ms in this case the air speed was due to the airflow from the air diffuser above each occupant figure shows that the mean radiant temperature in the the director s room had a relatively large value throughout the day due to penetration of solar radiation through both windows in the room with a higher mean radiant temperature the pmv value in the director s room was thus higher even when the other conditions such as room temperature and air speed were the same for the manager s room sunshine only appeared in the afternoon as its window faced northwest which explains why the manager felt warmer in the afternoon with a northeast in the large compartment the other staff felt warmer in the morning similar situations occurred in the other five sets of results statistical analysis was then carried out to calculate the minimum value the maximum value and the mean value of pmv table lists these values as well as the monthly energy consumption with this control the total energy consumption was found to be mj for the six month operation with the pmv values financial analysis was conducted the pmv value in value in column was used to create three sets of productivity loss for three kinds of staff senior staff ordinary staff and junior staff the same situation occurred with columns and together with the productivity loss of the director and the manager there were sets of productivity loss in each month each loss was equal to p think which is one of the terms appearing in equation there was some staff sharing the same loss for example four ordinary staff in column had the same productivity loss due to the same grade and the same pmv value by using equation the yearly average productivity loss was determined and then the individual financial loss was found by using equation all these financial losses are listed in table a total financial loss of about million was found which accounted for a reduction in the net profit for the company sets of simulation results were obtained figures and show the pmv values the corresponding room temperature the mean air speed and the mean radiant temperature in june respectively all the pmv values were controlled within and more thermally neutral conditions were achieved by this control due to better control of room air temperature and mean air speed first the pmv control adjusted the air temperature to about xc which was xc below the setting the conventional control also the air speed was raised to the upper limit of ms by using a desk fan for each occupant due to the energy saving strategy of the pmv based control the amount of the elevation of the air speed was much bigger than the decrease in the room temperature when the pmv was positive during start up this pushed the air speed to the upper limit close examination of figure reveals that the mean radiant temperature was slightly lower than that under conventional it was due to the lower unirradiated mean radiant temperature in the surroundings which was also affected by room air temperature these combined effects collectively lowered the pmv values toward the thermally neutral condition table showed the statistical values of pmv and the monthly energy consumption a total of mj was consumed the pmv control increased the energy consumption by compared to the conventional control with the temperature xc financial analysis was conducted to determine the total financial loss to the company table lists the results of the analysis the total financial loss of the company was found to be accounting for only in the net profit regarding human productivity pmv control offered much better performance discussion a temperature setting of xc slight thermal discomfort existed to assess the severity the concept of predicted percentage dissatisfied was employed from table the mean value of pmv in the office within the hottest period of hong kong was corresponding to the ppd value of this represented occupants in a thermally comfortable state the simulated situation matched the recommendation made by the authority which was to be acceptable from a human comfort point of view more importantly this control did conserve energy by pushing the pmv toward the region for slightly warm thermal sensation under cooling environments on the other hand the conventional control did not perform well for human productivity even when the thermal environments were acceptable there would be significant productivity the yearly financial loss of million to the company which
recently ignored cues which are assumed to prompt the no go response which brain responses will change as a function of the above hypothesized changes in task demands for response control among the most studied phenomena in psychophysiology is the component an endogenous late positive component of the latency and scalp topography this component has proved an important predictor of numerous cognitive and behavioral phenomena in go no go tasks in particular one important correlate of response control appears to be the finding of higher amplitude responses at fronto central electrodes peaking between strik given its distinct association with response suppression rather than response generation and given its source localization to frontal brain areas associated with the executive control the no go may be interpreted as functionally related to responsecontrol processes including assessing and suppressing off task reasoning however suggest alternative functional characterizations of the no go one intriguing study contrasted event related potentials in a typical go no go task in which participants generated amotor response to a frequent stimulus but withheld responding to an infrequent stimulus to erps in two types of oddball tasks a silent count oddball task in which participants silently counted occurrences task in which participants generated a motor response for an infrequent stimulus but not a frequent stimulus the critical finding was that prominent anterior effects emerged not only on no go responses relative to motor responses but also on silent count responses relative to motor responses to the extent that a silent count response can be considered an active equally increases the amplitude of anterior responses raises the possibility that anterior responses may reflect brain processes other than response control however humans may have an overlearned tendency to respond actively to targets rather than to silently count them if so prominent anterior responses on silent count oddball tasks relative to motor response oddball tasks could reflect increased response must be rejected in favor of the silent count although speculative this interpretation would appear to suggest that further work is needed to assess the functional relationship between no go responses and response control the no go also has been viewed to occur too late to relate causally to response control moreover concerning go no go responses in particular withholding responding is required throughout the entire response window not only at the withholding a response may be a longer duration brain event than is generating a response for these reasons the latency of the no go appears insufficient to assess its functional role in response control an alternative strategy of assessing the functional role of the no go in response control is to test whether the no go is particularly pronounced when response control processes are go no go responses among distinct subject populations boys diagnosed with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder whose propensity for response control is greatly diminished exhibit diminished no go responses relative to matched control participants similarly children of alcoholics who are presumed to be at increased genetic risk of diminished ability to inhibit inappropriate control participants likewise parkinson s disease patients whose symptoms include compromised executive control exhibit lower amplitude no go responses relative to matched controls in the latter study moreover individual differences on a measure of set switching and inhibitory function correlated positively with response control of the above findings in each of studies reviewed above differences between populations of interest emerged only with respects to no go responses finally developmental data also highlight the functional association of the no go with response control in that relative to adults year old children demonstrate higher impulsivity scores lansbergen stauder taken together these findings across different subject populations are consistent with the view that no go responses relate functionally to response control besides comparing members of preexisting populations that vary in propensity to exert response control manipulating situational demands on response control can be a powerful means that no go responses are greatly enhanced when the response one must suppress is being enacted in real time by a study participant seated beside oneself this finding suggests that fronto central no go responses index neural processes functionally related to response control in that suppressing highly accessible actions degree of response control than suppressing actions for which situational cues do not prompt action generation following the general strategy of manipulating situational demands for response control in go no go tasks the present study tested whether participants own response histories would modulate their no go responses as discussed above from an episodic retrieval perspective recently acted on no go cues by of response control than should recently ignored cues which are assumed to prompt the no go response accordingly we hypothesized that larger no go effects will emerge when withholding a response to a recently selected cue than when withholding a response to a recently ignored cue support for this hypothesis would support interpreting fronto central no go brain responses as functionally how and when past go no go responses to particular cues impact future ones toward these ends we conducted an experiment combining elements of selective attention and go no go tasks in the selective attention part of each trial participants responded to one of two visible numerical digits immediately afterward in the go no go part of each trial one of the same two digits appeared with participants required to press the trials method participants thirteen undergraduates with normal or corrected to normal vision received course credit for participating in the experiment data from two additional subjects were unusable due to insufficient artifact free trials experimental task the experimental task combined selective attention and in a different color participants used a four button response box to press the key corresponding to whichever one of the two digits appeared in a particular target color participants were instructed to and to use their left thumb to press the and keys and their right thumb to press the and keys the stimuli remained on the screen until participants responded after this initial response a ms pause ensued in which the screen was blank next in the go no go part of each trial one of the same two digits participants had viewed immediately previously to digits encased in one
exclusivist and accommodating modes runs through much of christian history robbins s ideal type is just too constraining if we are talking about christianity in general institutions and expressions both in recent times and over the long term this calls for an interdisciplinary effort engaging with historians theologians sociologists and missiologists this is in fact what the best amongst the anthropologists now studying christianity are doing perhaps none so creatively as robbins himself it may by others i ca nt think of anyone better positioned to do this than robbins and i look forward to his next essay on the subject robbins s article is a welcome contribution to the evolving robbins s talent for making it easy to read about difficult subjects indeed he even makes it look easy to debate the multiple varieties of christian practice without disappearing into an abyss of definitional contradictions this clear mindedness can only encourage those whom he invites to join in the endeavour of creating a systematic comparison of different are his refusal to treat the content of christianity as less important than its social and institutional mode of delivery and his determination to think ethnographically about how people experience change paying attention to the content of christian teaching has in the past often been done better by historians than by anthropologists as robbins s account of the comaroffs work demonstrates even the that anyone could really be interested in or motivated by christianity it is not of course that the comaroffs are wrong to ask us to understand the context of practical religion and it is certainly true that some christian variants stress the inner life more than others but like robbins i am not convinced that this implies that converts still less missionaries were indifferent to christian teaching as a newly introduced christianity or a new colonial language may sometimes be manifested through extremely subtle forms of behavior equally subtle and just as easy to misinterpret are the clues to the experience of people who like missionaries may be striving to conform perfectly to models of orthodox christian thought and action anthropologists often produce a of specialists in other religious traditions robbins s emphasis on an ethnography of change is equally helpful for it effects a key shift away from much sociological writing on conversion in which the adoption of christianity is explained as a secondary aspect of social and economic transformations in capitalist modernity that modernity was restlessly under its weight wondering with david martin for example why protestant pentcostalism in particular should be so appealing in latin america as to produce mass conversions one strength of robbins s approach is that he wants to describe converts as persons whose conversion to christianity is not a kneejerk response to the dislocations of modernity but involves the religion brings thus robbins suggests that protestantisms of the armenian kind may tend to construct a long lasting focus on the ethical dilemmas of old and new ideas in tension an interesting suggestion which opens up possibilities for empirical comparison robbins recognizes that all christianity may be good to think about change being itself founded on the idea of radical that anthropologists have been adherents of continuity thinking he is generally right in pointing to a disciplinary resistance to the conception of cultures as less than enduring at the same time to my mind this resistance is bracketed within a tacit disciplinary acceptance of the immense power of a certain salvage ethnography implies this as does the globalization debate assertions about enduring culture may attempt an intellectual and political defense against the idea of homogeneous world transformation but this view of modernity as irreversible and unrepeatable change is itself an ideological assertion modeled on christian tropes including that of transcendence and in some places may be treated as essentially forgettable while other cultures may themselves be premised on a continuous prediction of radical surprise with the result that the newness of christianity is only to be expected in that case the comparative exercise which robbins proposes would extend to an not only through christianity but also in ways not solely attributable to it simon coleman department of anthropology arts university of sussex falmer brighton uk ix robbins aims to clear some theoretical space for ethnographers of christianity to cultivate grounds of debate but his real depth of the apparent religious ruptures prompted by reformed christianity in post medieval europe or we might consider the novel way robbins presents for tackling a perennial question for anthropology how we are to find a satisfactory ethnographic vocabulary to describe even to acknowledge radical cultural transformation if robbins is right in saying that what considerable irony in his stance we might assume that our informants see the world through broadly stable categories of perception but it is we who are the conceptual conservatives using ethnography to naturalize fields as sites of cultural reproduction the argument then is that we need a reformation in anthropology while robbins s piece focuses on temporality and christianity it is also surely about the broader cosmology need to understand global processes our assertions of continuities over time are still often complemented by assumptions of discontinuities in space or at least by descriptions of cultures as distinct islands of perceptual and conceptual stability this point recalls that made by palmie quoted towards the end of robbins s paper referring methodological to represent social realities as authentically different one might almost rephrase palmie s words as different and therefore authentic here then is another reason for christianity s being an anthropological anomaly its spiritually motivated emphasis on temporal rupture combines with a relative disregard for the spatial confining of culture as the shift from old testament given more room there would probably have been a more complex story for robbins to tell about the apparent homogeneity and secularity of anthropological temporality to what extent have theoretical tropes ranging from the
text but when interpreters are called upon to apply a centuries old document to current problems context is likely to be much less constraining than when interpreters the modern administrative era because textualism is an admittedly static approach to statutory interpretation one that focuses on meaning at the time of enactment and resists evolutions in meaning over time its strategy is much more promising with texts of more recent this is not to say that constitutional interpretation is always an open ended exercise of broad discretion adjudication can resolve bit as binding as precedents in the statutory context but if the development of binding rules over time tends to constrain judges in constitutional matters it renders them faithful agents of the judges who created those constitutional precedents rather than of the founders who actually drafted and ratified the constitution indeed the power that early judges wield over later ones underlies agent relations rather than principal agent relations any time we rely on formal rules to try to cabin judicial leeway we affect not only the discretion of judges in cases of first impression but also the power those judges enjoy to bind future generations of judges and political actors if formalism may give principals more power over agents as textualists suggest in statutory interpretation it may also give early agents more power over subsequent agents after all formalist judges must announce the rules they purport to follow and in so doing they may bind not only themselves but also their this problem is more significant in constitutional interpretation than in statutory interpretation because the longevity and impact of any single judicial interpretation is potentially far greater the constitution is an enduring document designed to last as long as our nation not merely to address the problems of a single generation crafted to address the problems of the day and the statutory interpretation problems that obsess one generation may become obsolete for the more important if times change and the people come to believe that judicial decisions need revision it is much more difficult to overrule judicial decisions in the constitutional context while it may be difficult to amend or repeal a the constitutionally prescribed amending the constitution if the supreme court makes a mistake interpreting the constitution or if the political climate changes and the people come to prefer a different interpretation there is a distinct possibility that the problem will last for generations given the dangers associated with permitting a court to decide a constitutional question once and for all it makes sense that constitution and more on ensuring that judges do not unduly constrain other constitutional constitutional theory s different strategy given constitutional theory s different goals it is not surprising that constitutional theorists also have emphasized different tools to achieve their goals where scholars in statutory interpretation rely on formal rules to cabin judicial discretion scholars in constitutional discretion of other constitutional actors a growing number of prominent constitutional theorists are less concerned than statutory scholars with making sure that judges follow the law they focus instead upon getting judges to tread lightly and to leave as much as possible for the political process to resolve where formalism has been on the rise in statutory interpretation minimalism has come to dominate constitutional socalled over the extent of the problem and may vary in their prescriptions but they seem almost uniformly to focus on the risk of judicial overreaching and the need to prevent or at least reduce judicial intrusions upon the political process in sharp contrast to scholars of statutory interpretation constitutional scholars may even embrace judicial discretion as an important part of their struggle with the countermajoritarian difficulty intrusions into the political process and that leaves some discretion to other constitutional agents constitutional theorists view judicial flexibility as a positive rather than a negative a prominent example of minimalism s influence and one that reveals the sharp contrast with formalism in statutory interpretation is the work of cass sunstein who coined the phrase judicial democratic deliberation about the issue at he defends a judicial practice of saying no more than necessary to justify an outcome and leaving as much as possible undecided as a way to promote more democracy and more deliberation more important than whether judges are bound by law is whether they exercise their discretion with due respect for the political implications of their decisions and for the freedom of true sunstein does not take minimalism to such an extreme as to eliminate legal constraints from the judicial process altogether he concedes that judges must still justify outcomes using existing legal materials but in his zeal for minimalism sunstein does not emphasize these legal constraints legal constraints may have a place in judicial lies in minimalism rather than adherence to law he seems to accept legal principle grudgingly rather than to embrace it as part of the solution to the countermajoritarian difficulty in his view placing too much emphasis on legal principle would foreclose too many and so such legal constraints should not be overemphasized sunstein would prefer that judges keep their options open and retain some discretion to for future courts and future political administrations to decide he emphasizes judicial flexibility as an integral part of his response to the countermajoritarian difficulty although sunstein may offer the most prominent example of minimalism his work is best viewed as capturing a trend rather than driving it a wide array of constitutional theorists today share sunstein s goal of limiting judicial power over other constitutional on a number of important matters when michael dorf envisions experimentalist courts that avoid establishing binding legal principles and rarely resolve contested questions of law in the sense of choosing one rather than another meaning of authoritative text he shares sunstein s project of limiting judicial control over the decisions of political actors and other though he may resist the dorf in this respect is fairly characterized as when michael seidman urges judges to unsettle rather than settle disputes leaving open
mulattos having heard news of the paper of slavery that today was supposed to be read we wish to know from you sir as the superior authority in charge if it is or is not the truth this declaration an unusual piece of direct evidence of the concerns of the confirms official accounts that the threat of captivity was a central motivation for the uprising why did the rumor that decree was a law of captivity ring true for the northeastern rural populace the bishop of pernambuco surmised that the idea that the government could entertain such abominable perverse intentions was outside the realm of common a spokesman of the liberal party clamored that the permanbucan povo even the least learned has not to be deceived by those who would have him believe in the tales of a thousand and one but contrary to these sorts of claims and despite them the idea that the government would pass a decree designed to enslave the free poor of color proved perfectly conceivable to the northeastern rural poor in the most detailed published account of the war of the wasps to date and symbolic status as freepersons in a slave society against changes wrought by the shifting political economy of the region brazil definitively banned the importation of african slaves in responding to british political pressure and threats of naval intervention the end of the international traffic promised to tighten the domestic slave market forcing large agricultural producers to rely registration decrees according to palacios were the poor cousins of a spree of laws that aimed to restrict the social and economic mobility of the free poor most notable among these were the land law which placed new restrictions on access to land and a law making advancement to officer in the national guard appointive rather than elective which removed what may have been an important measures palacios suggests the idea that decree was a law of captivity seemed consistent with what could only have been conceived as a broader agenda by the powerful to secure a fixed labor supply by exerting total control over the lives of the free poor as palacios explains the protagonists sublevados of the war of the wasps rose up against a series of events which began to take place around and which represented to them and that that change whose significance they clearly and correctly perceived with startling foresight would ultimately be concretized at their expense they the free poor men and women of northeastern brazil autonomous rural cultivators were the first line of reserves for the plantations at the onset of the terminal crisis of slavery the revolt against civil registration registro showed that they were plainly conscious of this palacios suggests that the revolt against decree was also in a sense a revolt against the extinction of slavery as miserably poor as they might be as long as there were slaves the free poor were saved from complete subjection to labor on the plantations and could at least be grateful for their legal freedom the end of the slave trade threatened this source of status honor for the free poor opposition to the rumored law of captivity reinforced the distinction slave and free therefore on palacios account the revolt was an indirect defense of the continued existence of slavery palacios account is complicated however by three considerations first although the international slave traffic was extinguished in slavery continued to exist domestically until from the perspective of the free rural poor the extinction of slavery per se was still nowhere in sight in northeastern remained confident about the future of slavery into the at least their outlook shifted gradually over time if marked the beginning of the terminal crisis of slavery it seems that it did so for the inhabitants of the sugar producing regions of the northeast only in retrospect looking back from at least the and possibly even later second it is unlikely that the free rural poor in the northeastern sugar regions material consequences of the ban on slave imports by contrary to the conventional story in brazilian historiography the northeastern sugar plantations did not lose large numbers of slaves through inter regional trade to the increasingly profitable southeastern coffee regions from as robert slenes concluded based on intensive scrutiny of available primary sources it would seem that slavery remained profitable the post period as a consequence the inter regional slave traffic remained quite small did not really peak until the and then consisted mostly of non plantation slaves in fact pernambucan sugar munic pios were probably net importers of slaves into the thus in the the northeastern sugar plantations remained slave based and profitable only several years after the ban on slave imports onset of steadily declining profits would the fazendeiros become fixated on further limiting the mobility of the free rural poor finally palacios argument also contains a problematic assumption even if the freedoms of the free poor were in fact increasingly restricted following the ban on slave imports that they opposed restrictions on their own freedom is not sufficient evidence to argue that their protest signified support for the continued enslavement of others of course the end of the international slave trade in may well have made the free poor uneasy about the future and this uneasiness may have made them more receptive to rumors about a law of captivity in the early days of palacios account of the war of the wasps is a vast improvement on monteiro s palacios explicitly recognizes the rural poor as protagonists of their own history fully capable of assessing potential threats to their security however palacios protagonists are projected into a master narrative not of their own making existing land tenure relations the ban on slave imports and the gradually shifting political economy of the region certainly set the stage for the war of the wasps but the threats identified by palacios in retrospect to be looming large over the northeastern rural
tubes were desorbed by ml of methylene chloride and were were measured butanol isobutanol methyl butanol methyl butanol pentanol octen ol isobutylacetate ethyl isobutyrate etyl methylbutyrate hexanone heptanone octanone dimethyldisulfide methylfuran and pentylfuran the total concentration of the selected mvoc was also calculated by adding the concentrations and a sampling rate of min for the filters were washed and some part of the liquid were used to determine the total concentration of airborne molds and bacteria respectively by the collection of airborne microorganisms on nucleopore filters estimation and analysis method this method is based on acridine orange staining and agar malt extract agar and at the incubation time was days for all media and all microorganisms except for streptomyces sp then the incubation time was days for statistical reasons the number of viable microorganisms per of air is only reported by the laboratory if there are at least three colonies per plate when there is one or ony forming units per of air the detection limit for total molds or bacteria was organisms per of air two measurements of formaldehyde mvoc and microorganisms were performed in each building statistical methods differences in vas scales nasal patency and lung function before and after exposure to damp buildings were analyzed by wilcoxon matched pairs signed rank test changes in symptoms measured as a dichotomous outcome variable were measured by the mcnemars test results personal factors the mean employment time in the current building was years and the year of employment ranged from to in total of the participants were had hay fever and three had doctor s diagnosed asthma one had a previous asthma diagnosis but no current asthma symptoms or asthma medication the two other asthmatic subjects had current asthma medication current symptoms and vas scales after two days of re exposure in the damp building there was a pronounced increase of ocular when analyzing the mm vas scales the results were similar if the significance tests were performed by student s t test or by a non parametric test a similar pattern was seen when analyzing the more specific yes no answers on different symptoms the most common symptoms after re exposure were sore eyes itching in for different organs a significant increase was found for ocular nasal and throat symptoms lower respiratory symptoms and general symptoms no significant effect was seen for dermal symptoms seven persons without previous symptoms developed at least one eye symptom after exposure to the damp building six developed at least one nasal symptom six while none developed dermal symptoms signs acoustic rhinometry lung function test tear film stability and nal biomarkers no significant difference after re exposure was seen for nasal patency or any lung function parameter in contrast there was an effect on tear film stability and biomarkers in nal the on wednesday the maximum values were higher for all biomarkers for ecp four samples on monday and five samples on wednesday were below the detection limit for mpo six samples on monday and seven samples on wednesday were below the detection limit for lysozyme all samples were well above the detection limit for albumin samples were below the detection wednesday by the percentage values given above an increase of both the cp and albumin after re exposure in the damp building was observed environmental measurements room temperature and relative air humidity were similar in the reference building and the damp workplace building both buildings were well ventilated with levels well below the current ventilation both buildings and similar as in the outdoor air moreover the indoor concentration of formaldehyde was also low in both buildings well below the air who quality guideline of maximum formaldehyde when comparing the concentration of specific voc of possible microbial origin numerical differences concentrations were higher in the damp building despite the fact that the ventilation was better in this building the total concentration of mvoc excluding the butanols was in the control building in the damp building and in outdoor air the highest total concentrations of mvoc was measured in the frontal part of the case book archive where the floor in the damp building and in the outdoor air butanols are normally treated separately in the analysis of mvoc as these compounds are found in much higher concentrations and are not specifically produced by microorganisms the concentration of total and viable molds and bacteria were very low in both buildings viable bacteria were in the in the damp one total molds and total bacteria were archive while the mold species trichoderma sp could only be detected in the damp building and only in the distal part of the archives with the textile floor were repeated in the archive the levels of air pollutants were similar as in except that no viable molds could be identified the sum of butanols was indoors and outdoors the sum of mvoc indoors were and the same nine mvoc were identified as in the formaldehyde level was below the detection limit as a separate test did not reveal any increase of symptoms or signs from monday to wednesday when staying in the same workplace we conclude that the observed effects are less likely to be due to variations between week days it was not possible to perform a blinded study and it could be expected that response bias would have caused a general increase of all symptom reporting but for dermal symptoms there were no increase the study was small which might motivate to be cautious about the interpretation of the results but it is one of the few intervention studies in damp buildings the participation rate was high among those currently few months after the flooding selection effects in relation to workplace exposures have previously been described as the healthy worker effect selection effects in relation to asthma could be suspected in occupations with irritant or respiratory allergen exposure such selection effects have been described in a longitudinal study in house painters ours but the loss of one subjects
the equivalence in practice of rsa and is at least as plausible as the equivalence of rsa and factoring notice that in neither case is the word equivalence meant in the sense of a reduction argument because of it is not reasonable to hope for a tight reduction from rsa to and because of it is not reasonable to hope for a reduction from factoring to rsa however in both cases it is reasonable to believe that in the foreseeable one will find a way to solve without being able to solve rsa in essentially the same amount of time and no one will find a way to solve rsa without being able to factor the modulus tight formal reductions are nice to have however sometimes in cryptography one wants to assume that is as hard as even if there is no prospect of constructing such a reduction from to pass on pss then one consequence is that the probabilistic signature scheme version of rsa signatures which was constructed in order to have a tight reduction argument between the rsa problem and chosen message existential forgery gives no more security against chosen message attacks than does the original full domain hash version let us take an informal look at the question of the relative security of the two signature schemes we first describe pss here the signer first pads the message with a random sequence of bits and then proceeds as before that is she applies the hash function to and then gets s by raising to the power of her decryption exponent d modulo her signature is not just s but the pair since bob has to know in order to verify that se the basic reason why one can make a tight reductionist security argument for pss of hash function queries those that follow a signature query and are needed in order to verify the signature and those that do not in the former case the in the that is queried was supplied by the simulator and in the latter case it is chosen by the adversary the simulator answers the first type of hash query by setting se he answers the second type of query by choosing random and setting ze where is at the beginning of section the reduction argument is tight because the simulator no longer has to guess which message the adversary will end up signing he knows that it will be one of the messages for which the adversary not the simulator chooses the random padding if all we care about is formalistic proofs then we might easily be misled into thinking signature scheme if we use the language of practice oriented provable security then we might say that by switching to pss we have gained a factor of q in the time a forger requires to complete its nefarious task as we have seen such a conclusion is highly debatable unless one believes that there is a difference in real world intractability between the rsa problem and the problem there is no point in wasting time and energy on one possible reason in fact for not adopting pss is that it requires an additional cryptographic assumption randomness of some value that is absent from the original full domain hash rsa since randomness is often poorly implemented in practice it is wise to avoid such a step if it is easy to do so as in this case our conclusion is that despite a quarter century of research on rsa the simple hash and exponentiate signature protocol that has been known since seems still to be the one to a variant of pss before leaving the topic of rsa signature schemes we look at a recent construction of katz and wang that is similar to pss but more efficient they show that instead of the random string one need only take a single random bit more to sign a message alice chooses a random bit and evaluates the she then computes modulo her signature is the pair to verify the signature bob checks that se remarkably katz and wang show that the use of a single random bit is enough to get a tight reduction from the rsa problem to the problem of producing a forgery of a katz wang signature namely suppose that we have a forger in the random oracle model that asks for the signatures of some messages and then produces a valid signature message given an arbitrary integer the simulator must use the forger to produce such that x without loss of generality we may assume that when the forger asks for the hash value it also gets now when the forger makes such a query the simulator selects a random bit and two random integers and if then the simulator responds with te te and te if the forger later asks the simulator to sign the message the simulator responds with the corresponding value of at the end the forger outputs a signature that is either an e th root of te or an e th root of te for some or that the simulator root after running the forger times this gives us a tight reduction from the rsa problem to the forgery problem in order to better see the relationship between katz wang pss and the basic rsa signature we consider the following variant of the rsa problem which we call given and a set of qs pairs of values chosen at random from the set qs of those pairs for which you will be given the e th root modulo of exactly one element of the pair you must produce an e th root of either element in one of the remaining pairs the problem has the same relationship to katz wang as the problem has to the basic rsa signature the above argument gives a tight reduction from the rsa problem to but we have no tight reduction from the rsa problem to thus hard as the rsa problem whereas
and stores in many cities but the authorities did not crusade against the hard covers until later because they were not available in so many locations or so cheaply that teenagers could buy them early that year the aforementioned msgr mccaffrey of the holy cross church finished compiling a list of titles he thought actionable wagner had written off times square as an irredeemable vice zone and his contempt was echoed by the ny world telegram and sun which had been conducting a year long campaign to close tourist bookshops selling obscenity the police got an injunction from the state supreme court and raided fifty four bookstores which included lewis and company where the press had its offices there over books representing titles were indecent and must not be sold this was prior restraint a draconian tactic also used that year regarding the fetish booklets nights of horror which a times square smut king eddie mishkin distributed wagner s police commissioner justified the raids as an inevitable response to the rise in violent and sex related crimes reading the woodford publications and others of a similar nature it is therefore incumbent on me to do all in my power to eliminate the crime by eradicating the cause wagner did not invoke prior restraint in the case of popular films and tv shows where the sex and violence were much more graphic than woodford s prose could ever make them mainstream media reached far chief cause of sociopathic behavior neither the mayor nor his commissioner had to delve into complex causes for contemporary social problems they certainly had no intention of requesting parents teachers and religious advisors to reassess why they were being ignored or to wonder what young people learned about power and violence from looking around them as the korean war ended people were dismissed from their jobs through blacklisting cities were being abandoned by the middle classes in favor of suburbs school students were taught how to duck and cover in case of atomic attack and hydrogen bombs were being tested in the western deserts apparently the post office did not share the new york police commissioner s insights regarding the chief cause of juvenile crime its postal inspectors never challenged the woodford press when it books were the chief reason philadelphia police seized over books at the bookazine bookstore the assistant district attorney opining they would arouse any man unless he were made of stone the police knew that bookazine a store which carried a variety of popular novels how to magic and astrology texts was one of the largest philadelphia outlets for woodford books it cost wilson over to deal with the matter and to promise that citadel would press titles in the city in the future he meant the near future exit jack woodford followed by the sex pulp in woodford press published michael de forrest s novel the gay year about the homosexual seduction of a young man in new york city on the top of the front panel of the dust jacket the banner a woodford book appeared woodford blew his top he because of his contempt for homosexuals but because out of his untested impression of how gay people thought and acted he felt his lesbian readership which it pleased him to think was as vast as it was loyal would abandon him so he said but surely more significant was his unhappiness with the press decision to solicit manuscripts of which he did not successful sex publishing venture ever if its owners had increased the number of titles by allowing him to have solicited manuscripts from other established writers of titillating novels instead the kremlin belles decide that much money is immoral and begin to turn their minds entirely developing nuclear reactors as shapiro s demeanor and reputation conformed to the pattern of the amoral smut dealer he was an easy target for woodford s indignation early in their relationship he had met the man cordially in california to woodford he was a two bit jerk for not expanding the press but what woodford really wanted was to find a publisher with whom he might make more money in royalties and over whom he might exercise more control he had no trouble finding one during and the arco publishing company issued between seven and twelve novels cowritten by woodford as part of their arco sophisticates series milton gladstone its founder had made a publishing breakthrough how to genre he did not publish much fiction but obviously woodford was too tempting to pass up there were several other writers in the series whose titles styles and themes imitated woodford s the print runs were approximately if woodford s contract was like that of other writers he got an advance of a book and percent of all subsidiary in gladstone was subpoenaed by the gathings committee and reprimanded for several touched on nymphomania drug use gambling and perversions one committee member felt he could not even mention many of the titles they were filthy and terrible it may have been such pressure that made gladstone stop issuing the sophisticate line in woodford founded the signature press the novels published by signature press collaborators a facsimile of his signature also appeared on the dust jacket by that time in bookstores cigar stores and novelty stores in times square and elsewhere other sex pulp presses were on the bandwagon elite key vixen balzac and toga among others in the writers publishers distributors and booksellers of popular above the counter sex pulps were all struggling to keep ahead of the game against creditors moral police and district attorneys and against each other for the attention of a diverse set of readers who wanted a bit of fun salacious entertainment and practical instruction in how to please potential lovers but the whole landscape of borderline erotica publishing was about to be excavated and remodeled by with the liberalization of censorship laws complete booksellers could carry any sexually
the smoothness of the meeting is reflected not only in the topic flow and turn taking procedures but also in the apparent convergence of interactive strategies with a general preference for the use of a deference politeness system with the frequent use of mitigation and reservation to establish rapport and a notable lack of interdependence strategies as volubility intensity or exaggeration regarding humor several of the humorous episodes in meeting ap appear to take a similar form commonly associating humor with the interactive strategy of reservation realized through the use of understatement giving the perception that the humor is rather gentle and dry compared with the rather more brash episodes in the other meetings again this view is supported by the fact that in all of these humorous episodes the understatement that is marked lexically is echoed in the low key or understated prosody for example in extract below the speaker uses the pattern of understatement ie not particularly happy which he also explicitly marks as an understatement robert then goes on to use understatement as the basis of a humorous comment about x airlines forecasted loss of profits in lines and in both the extracts and below the humor is also achieved collaboratively between both in the exchange as is evidenced by the use of repetition in both the extracts such collaborative interactions suggest an element of style convergence in this meeting between some of the speakers as they attempt to establish rapport through the shared use of independence strategies such as reservation and mitigation unlike the intensity and volubility which reflects the style of rapport in other si the rapport that seems to develop in meeting ap is expressed through the generally serious and deferential tone which is interspersed with occasional episodes of lightly bantering humor as in extracts and below and similarly in below where barry mocks the chair gently for his use of wastage in a technical sense this combination of deference and camaraderie which seems to typify the interactive style of extract which occurs at the close of the meeting as highlighted in the extract above the humor in this episode derives largely from the mock formality to put people at their ease and create a sense of solidarity and cohesion meeting ai both meeting ai and share a generally relaxed tone with many episodes of ironic humor and casual free for alls together with occasional outbursts of intensity from the chair in contrast to meeting ap with its dominant there does not seem to be a single overall tone to meeting ai but rather variations in the level of formality marked by frequent shifts in interactive rhythm these style shifts reflect episodes of style convergence and divergence between speakers for instance style convergence is evident in the speech of some participants particularly ronald barry alfred and to a lesser extent andrew who use a similar involved style apparently to signal their their identity and solidarity with the each other these speakers therefore emerge as an influential in group in the meeting this in group bonding is realized by a range of discursive devices signalling rapport through for instance the use of jargon idiom pace and prosody in extract below for example barry and andrew describe a problem with toiletry supplies on one type of plane in a series of short exchanges incorporating smooth speaker switches and uncontested interruptions they collaboratively create a humorous metaphor about the toiletry mad max kits drawing on the brutal violence of the s action movie mad max thereby turning a minor mundane item into an amusingly dramatic account as in meeting ap this type of episode with its jointly constructed ironic humor is not marked by prosodic intensity such as increases in volume or shifts up in key but largely by as screwed up and cut yourself to ribbons the humor seems to derive therefore mainly from the contrast between the rather unremarkable delivery of such exchanges with their relatively slow pace and narrow pitch range and smooth turn negotiations and the insertion of unexpectedly intense phrases this is again evidenced in extract below where barry shifts from a straightforward account of the quality of child seats by inserting the ironic phrase run over by an elephant in line nt in line the humor is marked by the contrast of this phrase to the surrounding discourse with its jargon heavy lexically dense phrases such as restrain devices integrity and cacophony contrasting rather precise formal language with a shift to more informal casual speech this pattern contrasting formal and informal stretches of speech is used commonly in this meeting by various speakers but particularly by barry as above and by ronald in humor is being used frequently as a positive face strategy to signal solidarity through contextualization that is requiring participants to make sense of an utterance by having access to shared knowledge as is similarly the case with clusters of linguistic devices such as other figures of speech metaphor and ellipsis the positive constructive tone of these and other similar humorous episodes is reinforced by the fact that the participants are laughing at a situation rather than a person meeting meeting is generally smooth flowing and fast paced with lots of examples of style convergence between the in group speakers who create a sense of camaraderie and involvement through the use of a range of interdependence strategies such as contextualization personalization and exaggeration furthermore the group that uses such strategies seem often to be mirroring the behavior of the chair ronald such mirroring behavior has been noted as a commonly used device to signal solidarity particularly by women but also by men interdependence is also created by the frequent use of humor by some speakers particularly through metaphor and irony as in meeting ai this is illustrated in extract below by the combination of irony understatement and idiom in the exchanges between barry and the chair when humor seems to function to mask their criticism of an absent colleague the combined use of such features
the left this phenomenon is reasonable when one considers that the strongest component remaining is the third harmonic and that it moves by deg or deg of its own period when the square wave jumps figures and show the spatiotemporal stimuli produced by the ordinary and fluted square waves as they make the fluted square wave appears to be jumping to the left figures and show the output of a motion channel which is sensitive to spatial frequencies in the range containing most of the stimulus energy in the case of a normal square wave rightward motion is signaled as indicated by the bright field of fig in the case of the other frequency bands will give different responses but they will be of lower amplitude the spatiotemporal energy analysis although not offering a full account of the effect is qualitatively consistent with it the fluted square wave effect brings up another problem in motion perception how is the extracted motion perceptually and one sees the motion and one erroneously perceives the entire grating as moving with that motion the motion percept is correct in the sense that there is real left ward energy in the stimulus and the form percept is correct in that at any instant the pattern consists of a square wave minus its fundamental however it is simply not true that the entire pattern is moving to the left the only simple percept percept of a rightward motion but this is rarely seen so motion assignment in this case leads to a percept that contradicts information that is readily available in the stimulus summary and conclusions we have discussed a class of motion models that arise from a simple spatiotemporal conceptualization of motion a moving pattern may be considered to reside in a three dimensional space where the dimensions are and in this time so that its representation is slanted the problem of detecting motion is then entirely analogous to the problem of detecting orientation in space the orientation exists in space time rather than just in space filters with appropriately oriented impulse responses will selectively respond to motion in particular directions such thought to be present in the visual system to extract spatiotemporal energy filters can be chosen as quadrature pairs and their outputs squared and summed thus one can derive a phase independent motion energy response by combining the outputs of two linear filters each sensitive to motion in the same direction but with sensitivities deg out of phase a compressive nonlinearity detector gives a positive response to rightward motion and a negative response to leftward motion a steady motion of an edge or bar leads to a nonoscillating response the sign of which depends on the direction of the motion and not on the polarity of the stimulus the resulting system has many desirable properties system the system gives a motion response that is localized in space time and spatial frequency thus a unit s output can be taken as evidence about the direction of motion within a given frequency band at a given location at a given moment in time the model can be used as a framework in which to understand many basic phenomena in motion perception including the perception of continuous motion the perception of so called apparent motion seen in sampled displays and the perception of various motion illusions such as the fluted square wave and reverse phi energy based models lead to a way of thinking about motion that is rather different from some other approaches energy models do not solve but rather bypass the correspondence problem moving stimuli contain motion energy whether they are displayed continuously or stroboscopically of extracting motion energy rather than as an illusion actively constructed by a matching mechanism neither does one have to think of a motion detector as computing a change of position over time no edges are identified no peaks are localized and no landmarks are tagged in the extraction of motion energy instead spatiotemporal orientation can be considered to be a local property of spatiotemporal are used for extracting spatial orientation it is also noteworthy that energy models are closely related to van santen and sperling s type of reichardt model and in some cases are formally identical the two kinds of model are thus computing essentially the same thing in different ways the models suggest complementary ways of thinking about the same issues in motion perception braddick and others have identified with a long range mechanism it may well be that more traditional matching concepts are needed to understand these conditions and energy models cannot deal with the motion of the energyless beat patterns that arise when two moving gratings are but the models do allow one to make sense of that may be useful in analyzing a variety of problems in motion perception error free gb s all optical wavelength conversion using a single semiconductor optical amplifier by employing a semiconductor optical amplifier that fully recovers in error free operation is achieved without using forward error correction technology we employ optical filtering to select the blue sideband of the spectrum of the probe light to utilize fast chirp dynamics introduced by the amplifier and to overcome the slow gain recovery this leads to an effective recovery a simple configuration and is implemented by using fiber pigtailed components the concept allows photonic integration i introduction all optical wavelength converters have attracted considerable research interest as they can be useful in rapidly reconfigurable optical interconnects and switching fabrics in future wavelength division multiplexed networks optical in terms of integration potential power consumption and optical power efficiency a number of soa based wavelength converters have been demonstrated monolithically integrated devices that contain a gb s optical wavelength converter and a subnanosecond tunable laser have been realized as the realization of high speed electronic devices on the road toward high speed operation of soa
fraud at first blush adult impersonation might seem to fall under the rubric of all s fair in love and war and not constitute a serious enough form of fraud to be rape but adult impersonation exposes the victim to very criminal liability for statutory rape which may be punished by twenty years of incarceration this fraud does not engender under any standard consequences too trivial to be rape by fraud ii adult impersonation constituting rape by fraud this part presents a typology of standards tests and rationales that various jurisdictions use to determine whether obtaining intercourse by general standards of fraud context specific types of fraud and conceptions of consent each of the various standards is then applied to our scenario of adult impersonation the scenario assumes the following the juvenile reasonably appears to be and affirmatively misrepresents his or her age as being above the age of consent and in reliance on the misrepresentation the adult reasonable belief that the juvenile is above the age of consent although each jurisdiction imposes its own requirements for rape by fraud liability an instance of adult impersonation not satisfying one of the above conditions might well not qualify as rape by fraud after anticipating and answering possible objections this part concludes that obtaining intercourse by adult impersonation constitutes rape by fraud under existing standards in over thirty satisfying specific existing legal standards adult impersonation satisfies perhaps the most fundamental basis for rape by fraud liability serious harm befalling the defrauded victim this prospect of severe criminal punishment for the defrauded victim unique to adult impersonation among types of fraud makes hollow the oft voiced concern of line drawing difficulties in recognizing new forms of rape by fraud as a result adult impersonation more convincingly qualifies as rape by than currently accepted forms of rape by fraud a general standards of fraud this section explains various jurisdictions general standards of fraud sufficient for rape liability and applies these standards to adult impersonation some jurisdictions refrain from imposing any apparent limitation on the type of fraud that will suffice for rape liability other jurisdictions limit liability to situations where the fraud renders the victim unaware of the the essential characteristics or fundamental aspects of the act or a material fact fraud without limitation numerous jurisdictions criminalize obtaining intercourse by any fraud for example under an alabama statute intercourse where consent was obtained by the use of any fraud or artifice constitutes the crime of sexual misconduct hawaii tennessee and virginia prohibit intercourse induced by deception accomplished by ruse respectively these prohibitions place no limitation on the requisite type of fraud for example tennessee defines fraud as used in normal parlance and includes but is not limited to deceit trickery misrepresentation and subterfuge and shall be broadly construed three jurisdictions michigan rhode island and utah have largely identical statutes criminalizing intercourse obtained by concealment ruled in mcnair state that the language of nevada s sexual assault statute is sufficiently broad and explicit to encompass conduct occurring as a result of fraud and deceit hawaii and tennessee seemingly have removed all of the historically recognized limitations on fraud by abolishing the fraud in the factum fraud in the inducement distinction in state oshiro a hawaiian court observed that although this distinction is recognized in many jurisdictions hawaii is not one of them a tennessee court s comment also suggests that in effect the distinction has been abolished with respect to the offense of rape the legislature has provided that fraud in either the act of sexual penetration or in the inducement of the sexual act so vitiates the victim s consent that the act of sexual penetration is considered non consensual obtaining intercourse by adult impersonation convincingly qualifies as by placing no express limitation on the requisite fraud each of these jurisdictions adopts a broad view of the fraud sufficing for rape by fraud even if we might suspect that the standard of fraud is not quite as broad as these jurisdictions represent adult impersonation is sufficiently serious to constitute rape by fraud in these eight jurisdictions limitations on fraud the following standards limit the types of of the aspects of the act beyond sexual intercourse itself these comparatively thicker or broader descriptions of the act encompass situations where the victim is aware that s he is engaging in sexual intercourse but is unaware of some aspect or circumstance of the act sufficiently significant to be deemed an integral part of or constitutive of the act itself or thing done adult impersonation satisfies these standards by rendering the victim unaware a nature of the act obtaining intercourse by a fraud that renders the victim unaware of the nature of the act constitutes rape by fraud for example arizona criminalizes nonconsensual intercourse as the offense of sexual assault nonconsensual intercourse includes where he victim is intentionally deceived as to the nature of the act in addition california and idaho as well as nebraska utilize this standard the model penal code commentary perhaps best underlying premise of liability in these types of provisions by explaining that a person who is deceived as to the nature of the act does not give meaningful consent to intercourse therefore adult impersonation readily qualifies as rape by fraud in the above four jurisdictions the victim of adult impersonation is certainly unaware of the nature of the act the defrauded victim believes that s he is essential characteristics of the act fraud rendering the victim unaware of essential characteristics of the sexual intercourse constitutes rape by fraud in california rape includes engaging in intercourse with a victim who is not aware knowing perceiving or cognizant of the essential characteristics of the act due to the perpetrator s fraud in fact this statutory language was construed in people chang in which a massage digitally penetrated a patient despite the victim s awareness of the digital penetration the defendant was convicted of rape by fraud on appeal the defendant contended that the evidence
small enough and using that the proof of the estimate is then completed by applying the results of appendix and upgrading the to estimates by using the uniformity of the geometry of and standard linear theory interior estimates to ensure the continuous dependence of on a we choose to be the closest element of the approximate kernel to in the metric we also need to understand the approximate kernel for proposition acting on appropriately symmetric functions on has no eigen values in proof the proof is similar to the one for only simpler the comparison is with the spectrum of acting on functions on satisfying the symmetries in except for the second one that is functions satisfying is trivial the extended substitute kernel as discussed earlier in the introduction solving the linearized equation globally on the initial surface according to the general methodology of requires us to appropriately modify the inhomogeneous term by elements of the extended substitute kernel the extended substitute kernel which we denote by is the direct sum of two dimensional spaces each corresponding to definition following define the extended substitute kernel by functions on determined as follows is supported on and on in the notation of we have where ci are normalization constants defined by and cos on for as in wi is supported on gs and satisfies ci depend on a and are determined by the requirements as we discussed in the introduction the extended substitute kernel is used in two ways first since the approximate kernel on is nontrivial when we have to solve modulo to ensure that the inhomogeneous term is orthogonal to the approximate kernel more precisely we have which allows us to solve semilocally in and which we call the substitute kernel because it is used instead of the approximate kernel to ensure orthogonality to the approximate kernel in before we discuss the second use of the extended substitute kernel we record the basic properties including the one related to its first use lemma for as in the following hold wi is supported on and if on gs there is a unique such that is orthogonal to the approximate kernel on moreover if is supported on then proof and follow from the definitions and follows then from and the second use of the extended substitute kernel is to ensure appropriately of the solution on this requires that we modify the semi local solutions on by appropriate functions in a way that the inhomogeneous term is modified by elements of the extended substitute kernel more systematically we define kv in in a way that for kv we have lv and the elements of kv allow us to prescribe the lower harmonics in it is interesting that for the substitute kernel which was of its first use can also be used to allow the correction of the solutions so they have the appropriate decay this requires the careful definition of kv which is presented in and is along the lines of lemma on the other hand the substitute kernel corresponding to is trivial and we had to define the extended substitute kernel which is only used in the arrangement of the decay we proceed to give the exact definition of kv we definekv where vi are smooth appropriately symmetric in the sense of functions on determined as follows is supported on and on we have ci vi where ci was defined in for as in is defined by on with vanishing boundary data and where wi n is determined by so that the the inhomogeneous term is orthogonal to the approximate kernel on in the next lemma we record the main properties of the functions defined in the previous definition and which allow their use in arranging appropriate decay for the solutions in and in are smooth on and satisfy the following lvi n and therefore lvi and qvi are supported on on and moreover on we have and cos proof the case follows from the definitions and in the case and follow from the definitions using now we have which implies using that the estimate gives then interior estimates which together with imply and together with imply solving the linearized equation semi locally lemmas and provide us with what we need to solve with appropriate estimates the linearized problem on extended spherical regions as usual we impose the appropriate definition we use the subscript to denote the subspace of a space of functions on defined by requesting the following if the functions should be appropriately symmetric in the sense of if then the functions should satisfy the above definition is consistent with the fact that invariant under the action of while the stabilizer of for under the action of the linearized equation on the necks it is enough see the proof of proposition to assume in the next lemma that the inhomogeneous term is supported on the range of is as usual as in lemma there is a linear map is supported on such that the following hold for in the domain ofr above and uniquely to find vanishing on and such that on or equivalently we define then where kv is chosen as follows consider the decomposition low on where low cos and is an element of the domain ofr defined in with is uniquely determined by requesting low on which solving the linearized equation globally in order to solve the linearized equation globally on and provide estimates for the solutions we paste together the semi local solutions provided by and in a construction we proceed to present we start by defining various cut off functions we will need in the next definition n and assume the ranges specified in by requesting the following they are invariant in the sense of rs is supported on is supported on and is supported on and on and on note that the functions rs and form a is identically one on except close to the boundary where it transits smoothly to in order to state the
choquette fellow ieee abstract we measure and compare the coherence properties of arrays of photonic crystal vertical cavity surface emitting lasers antenna array theory applied to the measured far field intensity patterns is used to determine the phase of the complex degree of coherence which is found to vary with current injection the amplitude of the complex degree of coherence is determined field measurements of the relative intensities between lasing defects we find that the amplitude and phase of the complex degree of coherence are correlated such that coherence is maximized near in phase and out of phase coupling conditions and controllable by independent current injection to each array element optical imaging and beamsteering evanescent optical coupling between two dimensional array elements of vcsels has been studied extensively one of the major disadvantages with this coupling approach is that large inherent loss between cavities typically causes the laser phases to lock together out of phase this condition corresponds to the emission from one cavity being on axis null for most applications one would prefer that the coupled lasers emit with the same phase to produce an in phase far field profile with an on axis central lobe or have a variable phase difference which would produce electronic beam steering antiguided vcsels and phase corrected arrays have been developed as an alternative approach to achieve in phase coupling but wo dimensional photonic crystal vcsels may provide solutions for these limitations by defining separate cavities with reduced loss between regions to allow for both in phase operation and possible tuning of the relative phase conventional vcsels are transformed into phc vcsels by etching a periodic pattern of holes into the top facet the absence of a hole creates a defect which can define an area where of photons in the defect can be accomplished multiple defects allow for multiple lasing regions in close proximity such that evanescent coupling between the defect cavities occurs in this paper we show that the change in bias current to a phc vcsel array alters the coherence of the light emitted which is measured using the visibility of the far field combined that the relative phase between the light emitted from each defect varies this change causes a shift in the angle of peak far field emission by comparing the magnitude of the complex degree of coherence versus relative phase between defects we find the coherence is maximized near the in phase and out of phase conditions which has implications for the device operation etched into the surface of a vcsel defects are formed by leaving out holes from the pattern which produces a region of higher refractive index and thus lasing occurs within these regions an example of a near field image from a phc vcsel array with two lasing defects is shown in fig fig is a schematic showing the cross sectional view of a device with two defects as well as the effective refractive index within and ide confined vcsels were first fabricated following the fabrication a layer of sio was left on the top facet for a focused ion beam etch process step a pattern with a triangular lattice similar to that shown in the image in fig was etched through the top layer of oxide and partially into the top mirror the patterned oxide then was used as a mask to fully transfer etching gas the remaining top oxide was then removed with a freon process in a reactive ion etching system after device testing an additional fibe was performed on some of the arrays parts of the metal contacts were removed using a fibe as can be seen in fig in addition a thin line was also etched through the top layer of the facet which is highly doped and therefore highly conductive defects are not completely electrically isolated it is possible to preferentially inject current to each four devices are considered which each have a array of defects in a triangular lattice of holes with a pitch of the phc dimensions were chosen to create single mode operation in the case of a single defect and the key parameters for these lasers are summarized in table i each device has periods respectively as shown in the table the hole between the defects has been reduced in diameter to promote optical coupling all of the lasers emit nominally at nm the epitaxial differences as well as the small differences in the phc structures between these devices do not significantly influence the coherence behavior described in the next section the lasers the near field intensities were measured by monitoring the output of the attenuated camera image on an oscilloscope a goniometric radiometer was used to measure the interference pattern in the far field iii phase and coherence properties presented in using basic antenna array theory the beam pattern may be separated into the individual element pattern times the array factor the array factor would be the resultant beam pattern in the event of isotropic point sources from the array factor is given by the form where is the number of elements in the array is given by is the angle measured from parallel to the vcsel facet along the axis containing the defects and is the relative phase difference of the emission between adjacent elements the array factor in produces many grating lobes but only lobes falling within the emission pattern of a single element will radiate in our case we use a gaussian envelope to approximate the diffraction limited radiation from each defect radians we do not observe more than two main lobes because the gaussian envelope is selecting out only the portion of the array factor near perpendicular to the vcsel changes in wavelength with current injection have a minimal effect on the beam pattern when is zero a main on axis lobe is emitted in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the vcsel as is varied away from zero the angle containing the line of array elements the
this approach has already begun to spread as european white power activists have responded by creating european counterparts of prussian blue such as saga also referred to as the swedish madonna of the far right the german annett and the italian francesca ortolani also known as viking pro white cause needs to achieve its goals the money raised and donated to resistance and the national alliance is used for a multitude of daily expenses and functions that our activists need for spreading our message and expanding our media if you find yourself short on time for participating in any public activism or you would rather remain anonymous raising and donating money or even supplies to the activists of resistance and the white power music often portrays itself as art rather than product implying that it operates independently from market forces when in fact it works much like any other business enterprise yet behind the production of white power music and its marketing strategies lie politically engaged individuals that use the money generated not only for their own financial gain but also to fund racist political parties and the business side of white power music follows a financial logic in order to raise capital to support the broader white power movement thus a somewhat symbiotic relationship exists between the success of white power music and the success of racist political parties and groups according to stieg larsson political groups of the far right formerly funded by contrast white power music provides a comparatively low risk opportunity to generate millions of dollars despite being illegal in many european countries in interpol estimated that the european white power music industry generated about million a year much of that income directly funds racist political parties and movement organizations against holocaust denial drive white power music into the underground economy this creates a black market where proceeds avoid taxation and bootlegging runs rampant the money is used both by local political organizations as well as by individual entrepreneurs and fierce competition is stimulated between the different white power producers second unlike the mainstream record industry where bands contract exclusively with specific recording companies non exclusive rights prevail in the white power record business white power record labels pay individual bands for non exclusive one time rights to market their music thus white power bands commonly release the same album on multiple white power labels third and perhaps most significant is the higher profit margin on white power music a white power cd can be produced for just over yet bring a selling price by interpol and reported by the southern poverty law center the profit margin for white power music in europe exceeds the margin for hashish social movements of all kinds including the white power movement depend on a wide variety of important resources to undertake their actions money is only one type of resource yet money is a unique resource because it can be converted into just about any other type of resource needed organizations can be formed staff can be hired volunteers recruited materials purchased artists and musicians supported and web sites developed events promoted even an ersatz moral legitimacy can be purchased by hiring a public relations firm as is nearly universal in the corporate sector as a significant source of money white power music plays a crucial role in the current mobilization of racist political parties and organizations because that money comes from inside the movement itself there are no attached conclusion the research presented here has sketched out the growth and development of white power music and its role in the mobilization of racist movements we began with its earliest emergence in connection with the british national front in the late and its embrace of the internet in the current efforts to penetrate different musical genres and become more accessible to more diverse audience especially analysis utilized a broad resource mobilization theoretical perspective to examine three specific roles white power music plays in supporting racist movements recruiting adherents cultivating a collective identity and obtaining financial resources white power music continues to be an important organizing resource that draws not only rational basis the notion of belonging to a white power group locally and being tied to an imagined worldwide community of the white nation appeals to many youths on a number of levels white power music fuels the establishment and maintenance of an international communications infrastructure providing access to public events web sites publications and related symbolic paraphernalia which is crucial to the cultivation and nourishment of a white power white power music record labels event promoters and publishers generate substantial financial resources used directly by racist political parties and organizations to fund continued white power recruitment efforts as well as traditional racist white supremacist political and other activities white power activists have cleverly sought to attract youth by imitating the strategy alternative sub cultural styles to enhance its perceived legitimacy and enlarge its adherent pool white power activists have also appropriated existing alternative styles or specific popular non racist songs and re framed them to resonate within the white power movement for example white power music publicizes itself as an independent music scene in which not being played by mtv and not being signed by a major record label confers legitimacy this posture helps legitimize the white power message to certain youth who see it as a sign of authenticity that valorises both the bands and the fans the desire to recruit more widely also explains white power efforts to use music to reframe their core message from one of racial hatred to one of racial survival pride and self love clearly this sort of framing is more accessible to the world s contemporary white youth than the traditional white supremacist position of so called inferior races white power music has been a key tool in shifting from a solidarity and identity based exclusively in archaic biological or genetic notions of race toward a more contemporary socially based
roundness and rolling come to mark the features of the novel s end etymology establishes this roundness with linguistic circularity it marks a line leading to a conclusion in which ishmael bobs up on a whirlpool that consumes everyone else a survivor s narrative which extends from call me ishmael to the it also terms of the whale and vice versa while reading the wales that serve as marks tracing the line from etymology to the last lines of the chase third day the very figure of the whale seems to undermine or literally overwhelm the personal narrative that appears to begin in loomings by starting with etymology we see a moby dick that is not the tale of a world of error of uncertainty and of horror the story of one ishmael cannot as such achieve the goal of a global round and rolling representation rather the evocative image of melville s epic is the supra individual whale as world itself the languages in which etymology presents the word whale reflect the tremendous breadth of this world and the scope of the historically thus etymology begins to trace a line of thought quite distinct from the narrative trajectory of an ishmael centered plot for the very multiplicity of languages like the multiple renderings of the text of the doubloon later suggests that no one language and by extension no one speaker is alone the indeterminacy of a true name a true language or a true voice prefigures the interpretations of moby dick which posit ishmael as the narrator and which thereby invest in ishmael a singular authority must ignore this profound indeterminacy but etymology makes visible by its very excesses the bankruptcy of a reading of moby dick that requires a spokesperson able to speak a universal representative language of fixed and stable meanings by would present an imagined community of readers or listeners etymology substitutes an image of a multinational world system for the nationalist image with its whale in thirteen languages ordered chronologically and ranging widely over the globe et etymology attempts to capture the entire world of nations the world in a word in extracts the philological project expands to a general discourse of the whale affording a glancing bird s eye view of what has been promiscuously said thought fancied and sung of leviathan by many nations and generations including our own if etymology ushers the whale into being discovering the outline as in etymology the ordering is basically chronological such that the extracts promulgate the notion of a universal history from ancient to modern the geographical movement also appears to be largely the same from the orient to the west and north and farther afield until one finds oneself singing with the its historical and geographical scope extracts also introduces the bakhtinian multiformal character of moby dick inasmuch as it represents all manner of forms or stylistic unities literary and non literary poetic and scientific travelogue oratory law and so these various forms combining the sublime and the mundane or commonplace a sprawling image of the world including of course the literary world of these forms the collection of extracts says a good deal about whales there is one exception however among the extracts a quotation that deals with nothing cetological at all by art is created that great leviathan called a commonwealth or state which is but an see the most famous use of the word leviathan since the book of job included among the extracts the reference to the state rather than to the whale is striking here melville or that poor devil of a sub sub has buried this line from hobbes s treatise on sovereignty amid a vast textual history of the whale extending from genesis to the mid nineteenth century expansive both geographically and historically the nation state that embodiment and aim of national narrative is subsumed within this world melville s leviathan is thus not hobbes s hobbes is concerned with the nature and functioning of sovereignty and moby dick disrupts and calls into question the ideas of sovereignty and in particular the sovereign subject the extensive multinational frame which is constructed in the first two unnumbered chapters both space and time and displaces the supposed centrality of the sovereign subject and of the nationalist project in other words moby dick through its very excess through its outreaching comprehensiveness of sweep announces in its opening pages that it is not and cannot be the representative american national narrative that it has become for many rather it is a cartography of a world of ambiguity within which the american are subsumed by taking etymology and extracts as the beginning of moby dick i have been arguing for a line of thought in the novel that runs counter to the ishmael centered line which extends from the first three words of loomings to the epilogue as i suggest above many critics have imposed a coherence and narrative authority on these critics have also overlooked the frequent unraveling of the narrative acts the subversion of the narrator s authority and the ambiguities of the text in favor of an overarching master code as spanos s reading makes clear however ishmael need not be viewed as that monologic authority indeed ishmael need not even be considered a singular presence in moby dick ishmael personae to borrow a term from deleuze and his persona is not that of a character in the traditional sense rather he is a figure that accompanies concepts a figure through whom thought moves like nietzsche s zarathustra or dionysus for example ishmael is not the only such figure in moby dick before anyone has us call him ishmael in loomings etymology introduces us to the pale extracts introduces us to the poor devil of a sub sub librarian whose extracts culled from the long vaticans and street stalls of the earth locate the whale in an expansive history and geography of discourse already placed in brackets the typography
firm assets in place it would fall short of i viewed at the probability that the opportunity will arrive at the manager decides whether to issue a security to raise the i for the project and whether it should be debt or equity we assume that if there is no project to invest in but the manager raises i at anyway it will be worth only i at where one can attribute this value loss to free cash flow problems or other idle cash inefficiencies at there is a common signal about the innovative project assuming this signal contains information about the date payoff on the innovative project after observing this common signal the manager decides in which of the three projects to invest the payoff on the project is observed at all payoffs are taxed at a rate we view the mundane project as an extension of the firm existing operations therefore it is familiar to everybody with unanimous agreement it will pay off is bad so it may create asset substitution moral hazard with debt we assume that while investors can tell whether the manager is investing in the mundane project or risky project they cannot distinguish ex ante between the two risky projects in that they cannot tell which the manager is investing in we view the innovative project as being different from the firm existing potential disagreement about its value examples are a new business design such as bay launching of an on line auction business a company market entry into a new country a biotech company researching a new drug and so on the basic idea is that the innovative project is a break from the past so that its prospects cannot be predicted based on historical data the way one would predict the future value of the firm existing assets that is the a lot of soft information that is particularly susceptible to subjective evaluation that can potentially differ across individuals disagreement over future payoffs everybody agrees that the assets in place at expected value of at the mundane project will pay off at and the lemon will pay off according to the density function if the innovative project is available at management as well as investors receive a common signal at about the on the project the interpretation of this signal may about the on the project the interpretation of this signal may differ across management and investors management will interpret the signal and investors will interpret it as the interpretations are private assessments not observed by anyone other than the agent making the assessment viewed at and are random variables whose conditional probabilities capture potential disagreement between management one could view and as posterior means arrived at via different prior beliefs on the part of the manager and investors about either the value of the innovative project or the precision of and these prior beliefs are drawn randomly from two probability distributions exhibiting a particular correlation structure we assume pr pr and as follow if then and are perfectly correlated signifying komplete agreement between management and investors if then and are perfectly negatively correlated signifying komplete disagreement when the views of management and investors are uncorrelated we have pr pr the greater is the likelihood that management and investors will agree on the value of the new project at note that there is only potential disagreement at all payoffs are publicly observed at so there is no disagreement then is common knowledge once it is realized note that the manager investor difference in opinions is not due to asymmetric information nor is it due to incomplete information aggregation since is a difference in beliefs about what means that leads to possibly divergent assessments of project value think of this divergence as the residual disagreement left over after all possible exchange of information between the manager and investors moreover there is no managerial self interest here either since the manager is maximizing the interim stock price and terminal shareholder value that is there is no choice before he knows how investors interpret that is he interprets as computes his expectation about how investors will interpret and then makes a project choice it is the stock price reaction to this choice that reveals to him how investors interpreted manager objective function the manager objective is to maximize a weighted average of the stock prices shareholders but also cares about how this terminal wealth is perceived by investors at when the project choice is made specifically given a positive weighting constant the manager set by investors based on their assessment of the firm terminal value at using their interpretation of the signal after they have noted the firm investment decision at manager choice of security at the manager can issue either debt or equity at if equity is chosen we assume that a fraction a of the firm will have to be sold so the initial chosen repayment will have to be made at manager actions in the face of disagreement we assume equity does not contractually restrict the manager project choice debt may restrict it depending on the manager choice of covenants consider equity first the manager will clearly have a stronger incentive to invest in the innovative project when than when if the manager was concerned solely with the firm terminal value he would always invest in when and the mundane project when but his concern with the interim stock price at makes him consider the expected stock price reaction to his decision given and the agreement parameter it is clear that the manager will never invest in the lemon if he issues equity now consider debt the manager can either issue debt with no covenant restrictions on his project choice at can issue debt with a covenant that choice at figure summarizes the sequence of events in our model which is a special case of the more general framework in boot and thakor parametric restrictions we restrict the exogenous parameters to focus
self interest alone but also by trust norms power and other social dynamics as well as the fact that economic action does not take place in abstract space but within a broader social context that influences such action portes contends that these considerations are particularly important when it comes to understanding the workings of the and constraining participation and the only method of sanctioning malfeasance is enforceable trust rooted in group membership in other words informal economic action is fundamentally dependent upon the bonds of friends kin and community and those lacking such relationships are greatly constrained in their ability to participate in many forms of informal work further compliance with informal exclusion from key social networks rather than any form of legal or institutional sanctioning as exists in the formal economy for these reasons untangling the dynamics of informal economic action is an inherently sociological enterprise despite widespread agreement regarding the social significance the informal economy there remains a marked lack of consensus concerning of informality conceptually the distinction between the formal and informal economy hinges on the presence or absence of state regulation respectively however since state intervention is socially defined and varies across space and time the boundaries of the informal economy can also vary substantially depending on the social and historical context this reality makes it especially important that researchers be clear in their conceptual approach to the study of informal work the notion of the informal economy has its origins in the study of urban labor markets in africa in its original formulation the formal informal dichotomy was based primarily on the distinction between regulated wage employment and the unregulated work of self employed micro entrepreneurs which typified a substantial share of the economic activity in african cities while hart stressed the sector the use of the term came to be synonymous in development circles with poverty and capitalist underdevelopment soon however analysts began to recognize that the informal economy was not simply relegated to cities in the developing world but was an increasingly salient feature of modern society as well societies with highly regulated markets pahl notes that the conflation of work and formal employment in advanced capitalist societies is in historical terms a very odd idea scholars particularly in britain have argued for a broader conceptualization of work that includes a more holistic range of activities that individuals and households pursue to make ends meet and that recognizes that even in highly commoditized labor and consumption rely on informal activities both out of economic necessity and choice for the purpose of this research i conceptualize informal work as any work done for money barter or savings that occurs outside the boundaries of the formal labor market and that people view as part of their household s livelihood strategy greater detail regarding the measurement of informal work is provided later in the paper findings from past studies despite scholarly interest in the informal economy empirical research to date has provided few definitive answers regarding the socioeconomic correlates of informal work for example there is little agreement regarding the relationship between social class and informal economy to be primarily a survival strategy pursued by the poor in their study of livelihood strategies in the ozarks campbell et al provide support for this view finding an inverse relationship between formal sector income and reliance on informal work people were shown to essentially rely on informal activities as a last resort in contrast others have argued that informal cut across the social class spectrum empirical support exists for this view as well for example in their study of informal work in rural pennsylvania jensen et al found a curvilinear relationship between income and the prevalence of informal work with the poorest being the least likely to participate or complement to participation in the formal labor market for example duncan showed that when poor appalachian families faced persistent underemployment they often turned to informal work to fill in the gaps however jensen et al found a significant positive correlation between formal labor supply and participation in informal work and in a corresponding study in rural vermont nelson and paying with fringe benefits were better able to underwrite informal activities compared to those who held bad jobs still other studies suggest that social statuses that serve as conventional predictors of formal labor market stratification such as gender and age are also the dynamics of informal work however due to a lack of generalizable data the verdict remains very much out as to how these factors operate across broader populations and demographic subgroups as well as how they may differentially influence informal work pursued for income generation versus savings or self provisioning correlates of informal work among family households in rural pennsylvania more specifically this research seeks to outline the prevalence and types of informal work undertaken by households in rural pennsylvania how participation in informal work is shaped by household income how informal work is combined with formal work as a household livelihood strategy and how these correlates differ between informal work done for income generation versus savings the paper concludes with a discussion of implications for future research and public policy data and methods the vast majority of sociological research on the informal economy has of informal work across broader regions and populations perhaps the primary reason for the dearth of research that would allow such generalizations is that the topic has often not been viewed as amenable to survey research the assumption has been that respondents will be unable because of a lack of everyday conceptual currency or unwilling because of dubious legality to answer survey questions about informal work these assumptions and demonstrated the feasibility of using surveys to collect information on informal economic activities tickamyer and wood in particular have advocated the use of telephone survey techniques for capturing such information arguing that the advantages of telephone easier accessibility to a broad population greater respondent anonymity and the ability to target samples based on the demographic
be computed at a cost that is independent of n and dependent only on the cost associated with the pde stencil in the remainder of this note we refer to once and hence has been computed that is to compute the jacobian associated with a particular time step we require only that the simulation has progressed up to this time step we do not require the derivatives of previous time steps thus with processors these individual timestep jacobians can be generated in the parallel fashion shown in fig here we precompute and store all time steps and the matrices in a roundrobin fashion alternatively processes can be dynamically assigned the time steps whose jacobian they are responsible for at any processor my id is the unique label of a particular process between and suitable invocations of to exploit the sparsity of the timestep jacobian are detailed for this particular example in and in general in the scheme outlined in fig allows us to generate all timestep jacobians point and memory complexity is a fixed multiple of that of the complexity for computing depending on the particular stencil but not the size of the grid we also note that a production version of this approach would incorporate the checkpointing approach suggested by griewank to decrease the memory requirements associated with storing timestep jacobians we omitted this aspect in our implementation in order to concentrate on the novel ideas given the timestep jacobians for all time steps the adjoint quantity can be computed recursively we first derive a recursion for the leapfrog scheme which is then turned into a recursive one step scheme the leapfrog scheme recall from that we are interested in computing the derivatives of with respect to this adjointis given by denotes a zero matrix and subscripts indicate the size of matrices notice that the last factor in the representation of wt stems from the relation for clarity we also indicate the arguments for which the partial derivatives are computed note that and are vectors while is a vector of size the computation of x and y each involves a left multiplication of a sparse n matrix by a row vector of length whereas the computation a dense matrix by a row vector of length note further that gives a recursion for dz d which occurs solely in the form of left multiplications by an vector if we recursively apply this approach to the computation of x and y down to computed in fig the resulting algorithm is shown in fig the complete approach to compute the adjoint dr d first precomputes all timestep jacobians by executing the algorithm in fig and then invokes the function given in fig more precisely if the computational work associated with the dense matrix an vector in the statement for x and y as well as the generation of two recursive processes thus a total of matrix vector multiplications involving sparse n matrices will be computed the one step scheme we can reduce the number of matrix vector multiplies by turning the leapfrog scheme into a one step scheme to this end we adjoint successive new update operator differentiating with respect to results in which is the extended state analogue of we formally define the cost function for extended states as leading to then additionally considering the recursion for is converted to last level of the recursion the relation is satisfied while all the extended state vectors are of length the exploitation of the structure of implies that the amount of linear algebra work per time step in comparison to the recursive leapfrog scheme given in fig remains to first order unchanged however since we now have a linear recursion the overall number of matrix vector multiplications is involving sparse n matrices execute the algorithm in fig followed by an invocation of the algorithm in fig namely recall from the previous section that the work required for the generation of the timestep jacobians as illustrated in fig is a fixed multiple of the work to evaluate and does not depend on the dimension of the system this holds with respect to both runtime and memory because we employ a sparse variant of the forward mode with predictable memory requirements in fig in contrast is a version of the reverse mode of automatic differentiation for a one step scheme at a level where we consider to be an elementary operator in summary the second order leapfrog difference scheme is converted to a one step scheme by adjoining successive time steps efficiency is maintained by exploiting the special structure of the jacobians of the resulting one step scheme rederive the pseudo adjoint approach by a hierarchical reverse mode approach showing that the pseudo adjoint approach can also be extended to processes different from the leapfrog method we further improve the scope of applicability by generalizing the pseudo adjoint approach to a different time stepping operator and to a different cost function derivation by hierarchical reverse mode derivation shows that at each time step the pseudo adjoint approach first computes and stores the jacobian of the timestepping operator using the forward mode of automatic differentiation this strategy is feasible as long as the the resulting jacobians are sparse and one exploits the sparsity in the computation in its second phase the pseudo adjoint approach traverses the scheme given in fig in reverse order accumulating the gradient of the cost function by left multiplying the by gradients the second phase corresponds to the reverse sweep of the reverse mode of automatic differentiation traditionally the forward and reverse modes of automatic differentiation are explained by considering functions in the form of a sequence of elementary operations however both modes work as well with non elementary operations if we consider the time stepping operator as an elementary fig would consisto a loop running from down wit ht he body where the symbol denotes the usual assignment operator and underlining is used for adjoint quantities associated to a corresponding
something of an industry the messiah was already an easter time phenomenon performing the work at christmas with hundreds of messiah groups societies and festivals proclaiming their performance as a beloved tradition involving hundreds of voices performance of the messiah is an important factor in the economic success of countless concert halls orchestras and community choral groups has recognized gong music as a world heritage music the ministry conferences festivals television broadcasts and education whether traditional vietnamese gong cultures can survive as a living tradition in the communities of their origin is an open question the specialist on the eichmann precedent morality law and military sovereignty for the epochal eichmann trial she argues that the unjust and anti semitic prosecution of captain alfred dreyfus in and emile zola s impassioned and now proverbial counter accusation against dreyfus s persecutors supply a model for an individual speaking out against a state legal apparatus in the name of a victim of mis carried justice not only the enormity of the crimes being judged in jerusalem but the jurisdiction of the court the nature of the criminality the the legal code with respect to the crimes the relevance of the evidence and the spirit of the precedent to be set all contributed to what felman characterizes as the later trial s monumental repetition of a primal legal scene in which traumas of the past were radically revisited and re dressed the scene monumentally revisited in the eichmann trial is according to felman the dreyfus affair s quintessential persecution of the jew in and through civilized means of the law for felman the dreyfus affair is a nineteenth century inheritance repeated and intensified throughout the twentieth century and finally overturned in by a zionism that has provided a tribunal in which the jew s victimization can be for the first time legally articulated in doing justice and in exercising sovereign israeli jurisdiction the eichmann trial tries to legally reverse the long tradition of traumatization of the jew by means of law while i share felman s sense of the relevance of the dreyfus affair my analysis of the eichmann trial and several remarkable commentaries on and representations of it leads me to suggest a different relationship be tween the trial and the dreyfus affair than the one felman proposes zola s challenge to the state and to justice that is not constitutionally account able was is sued in the name of a universal humanism that zola believed took priority over the real political interests of state sovereignty as felman emphasizes the key outcome of the eichmann trial was to subordinate questions of international law to those of international sovereignty sovereign israeli jurisdiction law in this view shapes what felman borrowing from robert cover calls a folktale of justice the word folk here is an obvious object of concern in light of the third reich s legal theorization of volkisch justice especially in the work of carl even if one em braces a salutary whitmanesque idea of the folk the problem goes deeper than the word s unfortunate etymological echo raising questions about what kind of institutions and tales constitute a folk and its justice here is where the most vexing issue of the eichmann trial arises the relationship of national law to extranational or stateless individuals and to other states themselves variously conceived as demos or ethnos and equipped with vastly differing degrees of military potency felman s ultimate argument that the trial was about the acquisition of semantic authority by victims depends on her equating victims with the israeli state for as she notes it is not the victims individual testimony and experience but the new collective story that did not exist trial that separates the story of the victims from the political and military story of the second world war the eichmann trial as felman emphasizes thus identifies the victims to whom it sought to give voice not with the either legally or historically articulated individuals but with a collective ethnic identity composed ex post facto that is it assimilates the victims to a folktale in particular to a zionist narrative that arendt summarizes as explaining how degenerated until they went to their death like sheep and how only the establishment of a jewish state had enabled jews to hit back as israelis had done in the war of independence in the suez adventure and in the almost daily incidents on israel s unhappy bor this uniquely potent folktale on the international stage has needless to say continued to have enormous consequences in the conduct of american and israeli foreign affairs consequences that i argue are far from equitable or just like felman i consider the eichmann trial a living powerful event an event whose impact is defined and measured by the fact that it is not the same for all to explore more closely the ongoing inequitable impact of the eichmann event i revisit both the trial and arendt s critical account of it taking as my starting point the specialist a remarkable documentary feature on the trial by eyal sivan an israeli dissident filmmaker and rony arendt s critical account of it taking as my starting point the specialist a remarkable documentary feature on the trial by eyal sivan an israeli dissident filmmaker and rony brauman the former head of the paris based nongovernmental organization doctors without borders through the critical optic of sivan and brauman s film i will take up the issues i see as central to the eichmann trial the question of how the particular holocaust narrative constructed in israeli and brauman s french israeli german production the specialist is based on hundreds of hours of documentary footage taken by the american leo hurwitz during eichmann s it edits shapes and digitally manipulates this archival film but does not supplement it with talking heads photographs or other material its goal is not authenticity with the suspect overtones of unquestionable authority that claims to authenticity evoke
real estate is to keep an eagle eye on academic grandstanding sadly least aim for self interest properly understood as de tocqueville coined it as we mastermind the latest greatest theorem or proclaim yet another paradigm shift in arts pedagogy and practice let us always keep in the forefront the survival and health of the field the survival and health of the means to educate students secures the place of the arts in the core curricula a half century ago jacques barzun wrote he very reason why art is worth teaching at all is that it gives men the best sense of how rich how diverse how miraculous are the expressions of the human spirit through the ages who can question the arts primacy is advocating for the arts on their own terms a good idea only if we can deliver what is promised only if we have the knowledge skill and will to help our students make and build on the rich diverse and miraculous connections between art and life for that noble task we need to do something to be included in the general curriculum adjust our teaching goals and practices and prepare to adapt to a fundamentally different form and function whichever path we choose it is restorative to know that the survival of art is not dependent on us only the opportunity for large numbers of americans to see art as using empathy to research creativity collaborative investigations into distributed digital textile art and design practice dr cathy treadaway this paper describes the use of practice based distributed collaborative investigations to examine ways in which digital technology can support creative visual art practice the development of artworks through digital collaboration has impacts upon the creative strategies deployed by art practitioners and the resulting effect on creative cognition data gathered through qualitative ethnographic research methods has been verified through a series of practical investigations findings from this research indicate the importance of mutual experience and memory in the collaborative process the investigations demonstrate how enabling common values language and trust to be developed concurrently introduction new models of creative practice are emerging in a world that has become increasingly connected through the power of digital communications technology digital tools are being integrated into the artist s studio and are used increasingly to innovate visual concepts manipulate ideas creative practice and explain ways in which digital technology is able to support creative cognition this paper presents selected strands of a recently completed doctoral research project investigating the impact of digital imaging technology on the creative practice of printed textile artists and designers the research examines how digital technology can be used to assist the stimulation review and from practical collaborative investigations involving distributed creative practice these findings reflect the specialist nature of the domain where tactile qualities handcrafting and visual stimulation are fundamental to creative action nevertheless issues that have arisen as a result of the research are of significance beyond the visual arts field providing insight into how digital and collaborative practice observations of art practice can yield insight into the ways in which digital tools support creative processes as well as providing a deeper understanding of individual approaches to heuristic tasks to actively participate in the creative act as a collaborator provides the researcher with an empathic experience illuminating how it feels to be physically research methods a collaborative creative investigation is able to reveal issues that might escape notice in a more formal research environment by using the studio as laboratory and utilizing the mutual creative experience of artist and artist researcher it is possible to make an analysis of observed and experienced creative processes this approach facilitates understanding of the that exhibit the creative act background problem definition considerable changes in the working practice of those artists involved in this study have occurred over the last ten years the process of creating artwork for printed textiles has until recently been constrained by the limitations of the manufacturing and craft processes used to translate visual dimensions of the substrate have until recently defined the visual characteristics of a printed artifact textile artists and designers have traditionally worked with paint brushes and paper to create artwork in repeat and with identifiable and restricted numbers of colors that can be separated with ease for print production purposes until recently cad has been used in industry and design algorithmic and uncreative generation of visual concepts and subsequent preliminary artwork development has routinely taken place in the artist s studio via hand rendering techniques using traditional wet media watercolor and gouache paint at this generative stage of design development textile art and design practice is fundamentally a solitary process it is not usually until a other designers occurs and product development begins production of printed textiles will become increasingly dominated by digital ink jet printing in the very near future due to the recent development of high speed machines capable of meeting the demands of mass production inevitably this will impact on the type of artwork required by manufacturers and consequently it will affect the work textile there is no longer any economic advantage for artwork to be in repeat or have reduced colors there are also no economies of scale it is equally cost effective to produce a short run of a design as to manufacture huge lengths individual products can be designed and digitally printed reducing waste and providing the potential for innovative customized products printed on print on demand services files can be uploaded over the internet and the printed product returned to the artist by post there is now significant advantage to using digital imaging technology in the development of artwork for printed textiles and practitioners are beginning to embrace the technology and explore ways of working creatively with it digital tools are no longer useful solely for pre print design development visual idea generation to date there has been little quantitative research into the ways in which technology can support creative thinking in textile
to inconsistencies in interpretation of the provisions by local building authorities especially as they applied to new building materials that were the source of many of the leaks when improperly applied a second shortfall was a lapse in bureaucratic accountability that resulted from lessening reliance on the bureaucratic controls as a means for ensuring adequate construction of buildings indeed the act did not require inspections of building although local governments could require them as put by one review of the situation and in hand with the service or product provider being given the ability to determine and provide design and construction solutions must go a responsibility and accountability to guarantee their performance against the building code s requirements this has not happened builders were fulfilling their professional obligations but reviews of the crisis noted the lack of licensing requirements for builders exacerbated the weaknesses in regulatory oversight as put by a different review of the situation although the framework for building work in new zealand may in part be adequately designed a wide range of participants have not complied with it the therefore inadequate in preventing undesirable outcomes such as the leaky buildings crisis not surprisingly the building act revisions tightened bureaucratic accountability with the emphasis on greater specification of performance standards stronger monitoring of building inspection practices and tighter licensing provisions for building certifiers nuclear safety seeking a safety culture under risk nuclear power plant accident at the three mile island unit reactor near harrisburg pennsylvania usa brought the issue of safety of nuclear power plants onto the public and policy agenda this was not a new issue given that the nuclear regulatory commission was created to provide a greater focus on safety than that provided by the atomic agency commission the traditional regulatory approach has been the use of prescriptive regulations governing licensing and operation nuclear power plants that one expert characterizes as a long fragmented checklist of requirements that safety related systems in a plant must satisfy for which he consistency of this checklist and its ability to promote uniform levels of safety among different power stations is questionable that approach is being transformed with what the nrc labels as risk informed regulation as a basis for setting priorities for regulatory standards and activities this approach is an outgrowth of efforts that began in the and was endorsed by nrc leadership in a series of steps in the late at present the approach is better considered as a desired regulatory philosophy rather than as actual practice the risk informed approach is in essence a system based regulatory approach it evolved from the efforts to develop and employ probability based risk analyses in setting standards and evaluating nuclear power plant performance the system is evident from the nrc description of risk informed regulation a risk informed approach enhances the traditional approach by explicitly considering a broader range of safety challenges prioritizing these challenges on the basis of risk significance operating experience and or engineering judgment considering a broader range of counter measures against these challenges explicitly identifying and quantifying uncertainties in analyses and sensitivity of the results to key assumptions the approach was characterized by the chairman of the nrc in as perhaps the most significant change occurring at the nrc today and is a theme central to the nrc s activities this effort represents a significant shift away from our traditional approach the nrc risk informed approach shifts the emphasis in accountability from bureaucratic plants to greater emphasis on professional accountability of plant operators for adequate safety systems as overseen by nrc inspectors and staff under traditional prescriptive approaches the long checklist of safety requirements and the thousands of hours of monitoring individual plants leads to power plant owners according to one experienced nuclear engineering expert to commonly treat satisfaction of the nrc s requirements as being a sufficient mitigation thereby placing emphasis on nrc bureaucratic controls in determining the adequacy of safety the risk informed approach attempts to shift this balance toward greater responsibility of nuclear power plant operators for identifying potential safety issues and for nrc inspectors to focus on noteworthy potential risks a concern for overall accountability is the extent to which the shift in emphasis from degree of overall safety the usgao found that nrc staff responding to questions about the oversight process thought that the risk informed approach would reduce the margins of safety at nuclear power plants and the staff thought utility and industry groups had too much input in developing the processes the difficulty of increased professional accountability for nuclear power plant there seems to be little doubt that a culture of safety is critical to instill to avoid potentially catastrophic consequences as noted in comments by a former nrc chair obtaining this is a leap of faith we believe that it is unnecessary to assess a licensee s safety culture as a distinct component because the concept of safety culture is similar if not integral to the licensee s more specific responsibilities if a licensee has a poor safety culture occur at that facility either causing various performance indicators to exceed their thresholds or surfacing during the nrc s baseline inspection activities at issue is the extent to which system based approaches and regulatory mechanisms that emphasize professional accountability can help bring about the desired safety culture these are central issues for security and emergency preparedness programs that have been major contentions in plant licensing skeptics the risk informed approach suggest that the lack of established professional standards for such things as emergency preparedness provisions and a history of safety lapses on the part of nuclear power plant operators undermine the ability to instill a safety culture fire safety engineering performance based regulation the regulation of structures for fire safety has historically evolved in response to devastating the iroquois theater fire in chicago the triangle shirtwaist factory fire in new york city and the coconut grove nightclub fire in boston protecting lives has become the focal objective of fire
that the field of self study of teacher educators and the continuing development of our pre service teachers as professional educators conclusion zeichner noted that many teacher educators who conduct research on their own courses and programs argue that they benefit greatly from these inquiries and that this visible commitment to self inquiry provides a model for from these self studies there is little doubt that those teacher educators who adopt a self study methodology for inquiring into their teacher education practices are indeed serious about seeking to better understand the complex nature of teaching and learning about teaching however if the outcomes of self studies are to genuinely affect the work of to demonstrate a scholarship central to research more generally in the context of sla the changes in mental representation often mean the formation of new linguistic knowledge or the reorganization or consolidation of existing linguistic knowledge however a unique aspect of sla is that not all linguistic knowledge represented in a second language learner s mind is equal in terms of how readily it can be retrieved and applied in spontaneous communication as has been pointed out by many researchers some of learners knowledge might be retrieved without deliberate effort or conscious awareness on the learner s part but the application of other knowledge might require many attentional resources one might consider the former type of linguistic knowledge to be integrated knowledge in the sense that it has become an integral part of the learner s mental representation that is automatic in its activation and functioning its processing counterpart is automatic competence which refers to the ability to apply one s linguistic knowledge spontaneously in both the productive and receptive use of integrated knowledge underlies and brings about automatic competence in other words they go hand in hand thus when one discusses the development of integrated knowledge one is also discussing the development of automatic competence and vice versa similarly knowledge integration and development of automatic competence refer to the same process from two different perspectives integrated knowledge and automatic competence in this context are defined in terms of a single criterion automaticity automaticity has been defined in various ways in cognitive psychology for the purpose of the present study it is defined as the ability to perform awareness or while utilizing minimum attentional resources the best illustration of automatic competence is our ability to use our first language we are able to produce error free sentences without paying attention to grammatical accuracy in our native languages thus integrated knowledge refers to the information that a learner can retrieve and put to use without paying attention to it similarly automatic competence in an refers or certain aspects of it without attending to grammatical accuracies defined in terms of automaticity integrated knowledge or automatic competence is similar to some other constructs or terms used in the sla literature such as acquired competence unanalyzed automatic forms of representation integrated linguistic competence performative knowledge and automatic processing the distinction between integrated and nonintegrated linguistic knowledge is also similar to the earlier distinction of implicit and explicit knowledge by bialystok in her earlier model implicit knowledge is defined as information that is automatic and is used spontaneously in language tasks and explicit knowledge is conscious facts that do es not necessarily imply an ability to use this information effectively some more recent uses of these terms however have abandoned the automaticity criterion instead they placed more emphasis on the consciousness criteria for example in bialystok s later theorizing explicitness becomes more related to the level of conscious awareness of or the ability to articulate a rule automaticity is taken care of by another construct control similarly ellis s distinction of explicit and implicit knowledge focuses on conscious awareness with the explicit knowledge referring to the representation that learners will be conscious of and implicit knowledge being intuitive in the sense that the learner is unlikely to be aware of having ever learned it and is probably unaware of its existence automaticity is no longer an intrinsic characteristic of the distinction because of such changes in the definition of explicit and implicit knowledge i use the distinction of integrated in this article to differentiate knowledge that can and cannot be used automatically in language processing and communication i consider the emphasis on automaticity in defining integrated knowledge well justified on the basis of the goals of research as pointed out by many researchers the ultimate goal of learning and teaching is spontaneously and efficiently this requires the development of knowledge that can be retrieved and applied automatically in real time communication thus sla can be viewed essentially as a process of knowledge integration a central goal in studying sla then is to understand the nature of integrated knowledge and the processes involved in knowledge integration in contrast whether learners are consciously aware of involvement of explicit knowledge is still a worthwhile topic for inquiry but only to the extent that it might be a means to the acquisition of integrated knowledge rather than in its own right three processes of knowledge integration one might look at the processes of knowledge integration in terms of the type of linguistic knowledge available to the learner conceivably a n learner s knowledge about the it might be internalized through exposure to input and interaction and in the case of adult or classroom learners it might begin as explicit knowledge obtained in the process of instruction or these different sources might contribute to the formation of integrated knowledge in different ways learners might rely on or apply their knowledge in use when their knowledge is not sufficient for their communicative between and structures repeated and particularly successful use of knowledge might result in the transfer of knowledge to in the sense the initial the sporadic and opportunistic use of a structure influenced by knowledge might become regular and stabilized in because the preexisting knowledge is integrated its revelation in the is likely to be automatic such use of
bi convolution with a pair of left and right masks shown pictorially as where the masks are arrays of quaternions for this filter by this gives according to in order to apply the right handed convolution of the image must be decomposed into and corresponding to luminance and chrominance parts respectively this yields the simplified bi convolution equation hence the luminance part is convolved with a smoothing mask due to the action of on whereas the chrominance function would be decomposed in this new direction but the filter would smooth in this new direction and difference in a plane normal to it fig shows the lena image at various stages of the convolution process the image was decomposed per then each part was filtered using the one sided convolutions of these partial results are each displayed with the final image constructed part is smoothed whereas the perplex part shows typical edge detection results for display purposes the perplex part is enhanced by scaling before conversion into a grayscale image viii conclusion this work demonstrates that the proposed quaternion fourier basis functions have a corresponding geometrical interpretation as harmonic oscillations these basis functions can further be unfolded into two harmonic oscillation one for luminance variation the other for chrominance variation in the spatial domain this results in oriented rainbow gratings which include different chrominance and luminance modulations over the extent of the image this interpretation of various color image filtering operations directly in the spectral domain at multiple levels alternatively it becomes a tool for understanding the spectral response of linear color convolution filters all vector color image convolution filters designed by the authors to date can now be analyzed directly in the spectral domain carrying with it this geometric interpretation as such this hypercomplex technique has yet to be exploited to its full potential but the depth of its abilities appears to be far reaching tracking myocardial motion from cine dense images using spatiotemporal phase unwrapping and temporal fitting encodes myocardial tissue displacement into the phase of the mr image cine dense allows for rapid quantification of myocardial displacement at multiple cardiac phases through the majority of the cardiac cycle for practical sensitivities to motion relatively high displacement encoding frequencies are used and phase wrapping typically occurs in order to obtain absolute measures of displacement a two dimensional quality guided spatially and temporally both a fully automated algorithm and a faster semi automated algorithm are proposed a method for computing the trajectories of discrete points in the myocardium as they move through the cardiac cycle is introduced the error in individual displacement measurements is reduced by fitting a time series to sequential displacement measurements along each trajectory this improvement is in turn reflected in strain maps these methods were validated both in vivo and on a rotating phantom further measurements were made to optimize the displacement encoding frequency and to estimate the baseline strain noise both on the phantom and in vivo the fully automated phase unwrapping algorithm was successful for out of images and the semi automated algorithm was successful for out of is mm the optimal displacement encoding frequency is in the region of cycles mm and for scans of s duration the strain noise after temporal fitting was estimated to be end diastole end systole and mid diastole the improvement in intra myocardial strain measurements due to temporal fitting is apparent in strain histograms and also in i introduction myocardial wall motion abnormalities occur in nearly all cardiac diseases wall motion imaging therefore plays an integral role in the diagnosis prognosis and clinical management of heart disease accordingly quantitative myocardial motion tracking potentially has great clinical significance the earliest myocardial motion tracking technique was based on a related technique involved implanting ultrasonic crystals but had similar disadvantages cine angiography has been used to monitor the bifurcations of coronary arteries although noninvasive this method is also limited by the paucity of the features being tracked other noninvasive methods involve monitoring features in images from electron beam computed methods all rely on the movement of the epicardial and endocardial borders and give no insight into the motion of discrete material points within the myocardium both magnetic resonance imaging and ultrasound allow for the measurement of intra myocardial motion ultrasound methods include tissue doppler imaging which measures instantaneous myocardial velocity and speckle tracking which cardiac cycle mri boasts a selection of techniques for quantifying intra myocardial motion including myocardial tagging velocity encoded phase contrast imaging and more recently displacement encoded imaging using stimulated echoes myocardial tagging has the advantage that displacement and strain are measured with high accuracy the main disadvantages for some degree of manual intervention for detection of tag lines during magnitude image analysis the latter disadvantage has essentially been eliminated with the advent of harmonic phase analysis however the relatively low spatial resolution remains velocity encoded phase contrast imaging measures the instantaneous tissue velocity using the phase of the acquired signal velocity encoding each pixel the primary disadvantage of velocity encoding is that velocity measurement errors propagate during displacement and strain analysis dense which measures tissue displacement from a fixed encoding time using the phase of the acquired signal has both advantageous properties of high spatial resolution and measurement of displacement rather than velocity cine dense sequences that trade signal to noise ratio for temporal resolution have recently been developed to date the analysis of dense images has occurred on a frame by frame basis and has entailed conversion of phase to displacement followed by the computation of strain using finite element techniques cine dense data however presents the opportunity to track elements of myocardium through time as they move unwrapping of cine dense images followed by material point tracking and temporal fitting of the trajectories with the exception of manual contouring of the endocardial and epicardial borders these methods are shown to achieve automatic and accurate displacement and strain analysis of motion phantoms and the human left ventricle a spatial modulation of magnetization sequence which is
the study of marital relationships with well demonstrated reliability and validity gottman markman marital satisfaction showed individual stability from to months validating the use of the mat in assessing a stable component in the couple s relationship risk factor social support two measures were used to assess social support networks the social support scale cutrona is a item scale that provides information worth with good reliability and validity internal consistency cronbach s a was mothers and fathers scores were averaged into a single score in the second measure adapted from crockenberg and litman parents list names of people with whom they have contact within nested circles according to the frequency of contact the two social support scales were correlated and their standardized scores were averaged into a social support composite a social support was similarly measured at months and was highly stable risk factor work family interference parents were interviewed with the parental the average of six questions rated from low to high that considered the balance between the work and family roles following childbirth eg how well mother is performing at work how post birth job performance compares with pre birth performance the degree to which thoughts of the infant interfere with work a self esteem effects of childbirth on marriage and the degree of recovery from childbirth a several additional items were extracted from the pli that address the parents attitudes beliefs child rearing goals child care practices and living arrangements these were used to validate the individualistic versus collectivistic stay home when infants are young a mother s early return to work is harmful for infants raising children is the purpose of a woman s life men and women should receive equal job opportunities negative and parents should share child care responsibilities negative a child care arrangements parents rated number of infants being cared for by the caregiver father involvement parents rated on a scale from low to high the degree of father involvement in household chores and in child care responsibilities and the mothers and fathers scores were averaged into a father involvement composite a elf fulfillment experience with infant care two items considered the level of involvement the mother had with infant siblings and her general experience with infants role model mothers rated whether their mothers worked outside the home when they were growing up for those whose mothers did work mothers rated the degree to which of the following a child rearing goal self expression respect for elders creativity compliance to rules and positive relations with others parents also rated the degree to which they consider each of the following as an important attribute in a child kind assertive polite quiet and smart applies to almost always applies three summary scores are extracted a total behavior score an externalizing symptoms scores and an externalizing symptoms score mothers and fathers scores were highly correlated and were averaged into a single score the has been previously validated in samples of parent sensitivity mother infant and father infant interactions were coded using the coding interactive behavior manual cib feldman the cib is a global rating system that includes codes each rated on a point scale low high the cib has been validated on samples from several cultures and has shown sensitivity sirota weller feldman keren gross rozval tyano feldman klein feldman weller eidelman sirota the parent sensitivity factor was used mother a father a which includes parent acknowledgement of infant signals visual contact warm and positive affect appropriate vocal culture who spoke hebrew and arabic coded the interactions and each coded sessions from the two cultures coders were trained to interrater reliability conducted for sessions had an averaged intraclass value of range mothers and fathers scores were interrelated her infant interaction using the cib codes mother a father a codes included were infant shows fatigue and tiredness emits fuss cry vocalization withdraws shows discontentment infant negative emotionality during infant mother and infant father interactions were correlated and were integration into a single score coding months child symbolic play symbolic play was coded separately for child and parent along eight hierarchical levels of symbolization and a default for each s epoch one out of the following nine mutually exclusive codes was applied in line with previous research feldman eidelman et al feldman no play object manipulation eg touching throwing and functional play use of a toy in its intended way for example moving a car on the floor two simple symbolic levels were coded d self pretend unitary symbolic acts around the self for example sleeping or combing hair and other pretend unitary symbolic acts that include others in the pretend play schemes into a single act in one of the following three types a single scheme is played with several objects eg feeding doll and then feeding dog several schemes are played with the same object eg feeding doll then putting it to bed or different schemes are organized in order eg dressing doll putting it inside a car driving car hierarchical roles and substitutional pretend a child substitutes one object for another in a deliberate fashion for example a stick is used instead of a car coding of children s symbolic play was conducted by israeli and arab coders who did not participate in the month coding and each coded interactions from the two cultures level was computed and three composites were created functional play manipulation functional play simple symbolic play self pretend other pretend and complex symbolic play combinatorial hierarchical and substitutional pretend the complex symbolic play composites in the mother child and father child a criterion variable results as a first step we examined parental attitudes beliefs and practices to validate the individualistic versus collectivistic orientation of the two societies only data from couples participating in the two assessment points are reported here cultural differences in parental attitudes and within a walking distance to at least one set of grandparents confirming to the nuclear versus extended living arrangements of the two societies data pertaining to traditional
is retained for future planting and response inhibition is one of the hallmarks of executive functions in general agricultural villages were well established in the levant by years ago with the earlier examples such as netiv hagdud dating to perhaps a millennium earlier but as complex are managed systems classic ethnographic examples include foragers of the northwest coast of america the arctic and australia archaeological evidence for such systems extends back to the end of pleistocene in the guise of mesolithic epipalaeolithic and archaic adaptations an especially good example is on gathering a wide variety of local plants and hunting that emphasized gazelle with the increasing desiccation associated with the younger dryas climatic interval of to years ago these people did not simply modify the focus of their gathering they changed the very basis of the system itself by beginning to cultivate rye the smoking gun must have been using the planning abilities enabled by ewm we believe that it is uncontroversial to characterize early holocene foraging systems from around the world as managed earlier evidence is harder to document the best example continues to be the western european reindeer hunters of the late pleistocene straus describes the magdalenian foraging that included the interception and massive slaughter of migrating rangifer herds as well as more individualized killing on summer and winter pastures the system included sites located near funnelling points where large numbers of individuals were killed and smaller hunting camps though other resources were produced a reliable technology of barbed antler points and harpoons their yearly pattern of mobility would have included extensive down time for maintenance and production of tools we think that it is fair to describe this system as managed and therefore evidence of ewm with its associated abilities of contingency planning and ability to project and plan future action contemporary some similarities as do the late pleistocene hunters who appeared on the plains of north america after years ago evidence from earlier than the late glacial maximum is harder to interpret we have already seen that early upper palaeolithic groups produced bone and antler sagaies though these were a bit simpler than those of the magdalenian evidence from but the evidence for massive slaughter and specialization is not as clear as it is for the late upper palaeolithic and more telling a pattern that included smaller seasonal hunting camps is not evident a slightly better argument for managed foraging in the early upper palaeolithic relies on evidence for storage at upper palaeolithic sites on the russian plain future consumption the earliest examples of such pits precede the late glacial maximum and increase in frequency during the subsequent late upper palaeolithic where they were coterminous with the rise of complex base camps use of storage and delayed consumption is as compelling as the evidence for later upper palaeolithic reindeer hunting in sw france and it extends evidence for managed foraging bp it does not however encompass the very earliest upper palaeolithic sites in eurasia middle palaeolithic and middle stone age evidence is weaker still there is evidence for specialized hunting at some mp sites the best example is probably saltzgitter lebenstedt in northern germany which dates to about bp a similar picture emerges from the kenyan site of where faunal assemblages indicate a mass kill site where the small extinct alcelaphine antelope was repeatedly killed in late pleistocene lsa and msa times what makes this case provocative is the sheer size and ferocity of the beast whoever killed it must have had an effective tactic gaudzinski roebroeks and mcbrearty brooks believe such evidence compares well a managed approach to foraging that would implicate ewm reluctantly we think not specialized hunting and reuse of sites implicate tactical hunting to use marean s term but effective tactics can exist without the kinds of contingency planning and flexible scheduling that are true of managed systems indeed the reuse of sites over centuries or millennia suggests testify to very effective hunting tactics but these were systems that did not require the services of modern ewm what distinguishes the european late upper palaeolithic system is not specialization per se but the evidence for flexibility in the guise of the variety of later upper palaeolithic reindeer hunting sites and storage this may simply be a reflection of over time information processing an algorithm is a device for solving problems it can be a set of rules for manipulating information or an actual artefact that can be used to calculate solutions true algorithms are learned every generation and once learned become part of the corpus of cultural knowledge carried al s working memory capacity and the faster the individual could execute the retrieval and carrying process the better his or her performance on arithmetical word problems studies of pre schoolers reveal that their difficulties in basic arithmetic calculation can be attributed to the number of elements that must be held true of other algorithms they are deployed in working memory to help solve specific problems but algorithms also ease the load on working memory thereby enhancing the ability to solve problems when confronted with a problem one can first choose an appropriate algorithm and hold it in working memory as a simple token rather than reason through the relationships better still are algorithms that take up no working memory at all that are in fact physically separate from the brain itself these are computational artefacts of all sorts calendars oracle bones and graphing calculators it is clear that algorithms enhance working memory what is not as obvious is that they rely on ewm even as a simple token the algorithm takes up hypothesize that ewm enables the expanded attention window necessary to access and process algorithms and content at the same time as such evidence of algorithms is compelling evidence for ewm and luckily some computational devices are preserved in the archaeological record marshack called attention to these devices in his controversial claims for lunar calendars in the european palaeolithic and even pointed
more to pindar than we had realized fac similes of celebrated composers printed in thomas busby s concert room and orchestra anecdotes of the plates seem to be lithographic reproductions of tracings from composers manuscripts and include a short extract from purcell s ode come ye sons of art apparently copied from an autograph that is no longer extant fascinatingly the scoring of this fragmentary passage differs from the corresponding section in the only surviving complete in by one robert pindar the discrepancy appears to confirm bruce wood s suspicions noted in his edition of the ode that pindar made a number of improvements to his copy of come ye sons of art we know indeed that pindar tampered with the other three purcell odes he entered in the same manuscript welcome to all the pleasures the yorkshire feast song and hail bright cecilia since these survive elsewhere in reliable sources surprisingly however his adaptations have never been investigated thoroughly in this article detailed analysis of pindar s reworkings to the scoring structure part writing and other characteristics of these three odes is used alongside the evidence of busby s fragment in order to identify the alterations pindar is likely to have made to come ye sons of art culminating in an attempt to reconstruct a version of the ode closer to purcell s own conception of the piece tonal space in webern s six bagatelles for string quartet op but here it is not possible to prove anything it is however possible to be imagine that just when the conventions governing musical syntax have broken down when almost everything composers had depended on upon for the past few hundred years to support their musical expression is in doubt you decide to write a string how might you start perhaps with the most basic scale to move beyond absolute homogeneity you perform two simple operations on this scale reverse one half of it and superimpose the two resulting segments this results in six pairs of pitches or dyads with an intrinsic ordering that fans out from a semitone to a major seventh in a wedge shape dyads and are intervallic inversions of and respectively the wedge is identical to its own retrograde transposed by a tritone and thus there are only six possible transpositions your quartet is to start traditionally enough with a melody in the first violin accompanied by the other instruments when allocating the six dyads to one or other textural strand you exploit the inherent symmetry of the wedge dyads and will form the melody and the remaining four the accompaniment to distinguish the melody clearly to provide greater melodic sweep you symmetrically expand dyad maintaining its pitch class content in ordering the notes you place dyad at the opening to establish the origin of the entire structure thereafter you nest the remaining three accompaniment dyads so that dyad has one note from dyad immediately before and after it and the components of dyad are placed where the outer registral dyad is and dyad is in the central position finally to bind the two textural strands you reallocate one component of dyad from the accompaniment to the melody instrumentation of the accompaniment is based on consecutive notes the first two overlap in the cello and viola respectively and the remaining notes form these significant musical units do not articulate the dyadic structure instead both dyads and wedge are subsumed into the general texture if this bare framework is then afforded further musical substance through the addition of dynamics tone color and rhythmic contour the result might resemble something like the excerpt reproduced in ex ex webern op no bars speculative reconstruction of compositional bars the foregoing account of the composition of the opening of webern s six bagatelles for string quartet op is entirely speculative however on the basis of what has already been sketched here i should like to propose the potential recovery of a crucial aspect of the composer s creative praxis following ethan haimo s definition my argument will largely involve a series of type one statements that is a sequence of observations intended to describe how a composer put a work together my claim is that webern consciously and consistently used chromatic wedge formations to structure the registral and sequential pitch disposition of the bagatelles a thesis that has far reaching consequences for our historiographic and theoretical understanding of these pieces in the present the opening of op no is here represented in terms of an unfolding of the total chromatic involving three internally re ordered segments to ew aw to and to in bar the which appears in the second violin evidently falls outside this scheme nonetheless its anomalous status might be explained motivically as forming both a and a rising major second with the first three notes and may also be heard as unfolding a nascent klangfarbenmelodie on account of the different tone colors employed a gesture which is later balanced and complemented by the second violin s violin s on the other ex brackets these three note figures terms the exposition and separately beams ex webern op no bars summary of analytical interpretations both tritones and major seconds over bars on such a reading closure of however this interpretation amounts to little more than a paraphrase of the score neglecting as it does to account for such vital features as the internal ordering of the chromatic segments the registral disposition of the pitch content the assignment of notes to specific instruments and the overall effects of articulation brought about by both texture and phrasing for his part richard chrisman sought to provide a more thoroughgoing approach to ern s compositional grammar in these and other respects by invoking the apparatus of fortean pitch class set his interpretation of this same passage entails a segmentation of the last six pitches in bar based on the reversed sequence bw a and aw which supposedly discloses a technique that is thus utterly simple
her husband would be consulted but otherwise it was a matter between herself and her physician she felt that hormones would almost surely be in her future because she was now under treatment for premenstrual syndrome and therefore that she must be prone to biological and this woman was also under the care of a nutritionist in order to handle her weight problem the second example concerns a woman who regularly went to physicians but was chronically dissatis fied with them unlike in the when women turned to each other and their own sense of values to pass moral judgment on or to critique medical care this woman simply went from doctor to doctor in an attempt to find not the best but the least of physicians who might meet her most minimal needs a third example lies in the fact that although there have been numerous attempts from outside the village to organize women s health care information networks and support groups they have all failed at the onset with only the outside organizer showing up at the designated and well publicized meeting places nothing has emerged in the village to replace the earlier informal health related communication networks that dominated the female although locals are very critical of medical professionals and the provincial health care system that keeps reducing the number of services available to them local youngsters desire to become physicians and nurses there are now four nurses who reside in the community their knowledge acquired through education and professional training is respected regardless of their youth personal failings or character women today are ready to defer to the expertise of others i am a case in here in the even though in my thirties i was seen as the proverbial innocent with great confidence and surety of their knowledge as being based in personal experience local experts laid out the newfoundland facts of life for me in with my menopause book and experience of teaching in a medical school i was viewed as a teacher rather than as a student instead of being seen as hopelessly naive and untried by life as i was in the women in saw me as a quasi someone they could exchange confidences with and ask for advice on matters they felt unable to pursue with anyone else privatization the body public the body private this brings me to the third point which concerns changes in the collective domains of community life these changes involve not only a hardening of boundaries between the individual and society but also the emergence of divisive factions that have caused the dissolution of the collective community what was once a community with a viable fishery and a strong tradition oriented collective identity dominated by a moral order that enforced sameness consensus and equality has become a radically altered postindustrial or welfare community although local women would largely agree with my assessment of them in the they are less aware of the changes i observed in it is only in retrospect that i have come to realize the fluidity that once characterized local constructions of the society and the moral order in grey rock harbour the past in the my attempt to capture culture in action or how the body presents itself in substance and action focused on the dynamic qualities of the idioms of nerves and blood as a woman employed them publicly and privately to actively validate her identity to others as a good woman and public spheres of village life the nature or character of one s blood and nerves was public knowledge and one s body and its processes were subject to critical public evaluation and moral judgment nerves and blood were inextricable from complex and well mastered rules for impression management in this small face to face community they were the language of gossip and local drama what you revealed about your nerves was grist for the mill of public debate what you told who you were talking to blood and nerves could be a language of social intimacy as well as social distancing code switching could be quite dramatic dependent on whether you were conversing with your sister or your mother in law or whether you were casually passing on the lessons of life to the anthropologist as dutiful daughter while learning to make bread or sitting with her in a formal interview in the through the language of nerves and blood a woman actively a psychological physical and social being with a past and a present in a way that was writ large for the evaluation of the entire community the vast majority of women were successful at this kind of impression management presenting themselves in a positive light for the moral evaluation of the middle aged women who dominated the moral order of the community the body was a public phenomena and body boundaries were permeable in the sense that rhetoric about the body conflated private spheres of life and the body was a window to the very nature of the self the present in contrast by accepting the medical model today s women are now prone to psychologize what they are coming to see as personal failures and bad life choices they castigate themselves for being too fat too thin or for looking too old for becoming sick or for an inability to control their emotions they look to the medical and helping professions for treatment and advice a women s a matter between herself and her physician or her immediate and closest kin and friends the strength of women s networks and collective culture has been undermined material possessions education and income physical attractiveness rather than inner strength or shared hardships provide women with self esteem today unlike the language of blood and nerves which encoded social power and action the medical language of menopause is a language of giving resistance it is neither empowering nor conducive to social action and it defers control over one
of this measure follows from the direct connection between concurrence and entanglement of formation it has been shown that the entanglement of formation of an arbitrary state is related to the concurrence ce t by a function if we could write the general bipartite pure state as in this case the concurrence can be calculated as the concurrence ce t as a measure of the degree of entanglement ensures the scale between and and monotonously increases as entanglement grows a note of caution about how to interpret the state of a physical system in terms of quantum entanglement may be in place here the previous standard definitions of quantum entanglement tacitly in the bipartite or multi partite hilbert space is in principle available as a physical state and local as well as global quantum operations measurements and unitary transformations can be performed on the hilbert space a comparison of the entanglement measures negativity and concurrence has been given in ref also it has been shown that the concurrence for systems with an arbitrary number of subsystems can be expressed in terms of all reduced density matrices in form where the multi index runs over all of the subsystems a theoretical model describing the time evolution of a two two level qubits interacting with a single field can be written as this model differs from the standard micromaser set up in that instead of a single qubit we have assumed a pair of qubits interacting with a single mode of the cavity field in which dbmnw where is the dipole coupling constant and ko and they connect with the effective coupling constant of the second qubit with the field as also it has been considered that second qubit is weakly coupled to the field in the sense that we assume that both qubits initially in the following state jc ia cos sin and the initial state of the field is a coherent state using the dispersive approximation above system can having obtained the explicit form of the final state of the system under consideration one therefore can discuss the statistical properties of the system in fig we plot the time evolution of entanglement for the one photon resonance of both atoms with the field and for the different values of the mean photon number where for fig and for fig the maximum value of the entanglement decreases as the mean photon number is decreased but vanish as the time goes on for large values of the mean photon number this is not the case when takes small values it is interesting to note that the maximum entanglement is achieved when while ce t for put differently with a large value of the number of quanta such as a very small amount of entanglement is seen at the initial period of the interaction time and this on indeed the comparison of plots figs and where and respectively demonstrates that the entanglement in both cases has somewhat similar behavior corresponding to different values of the number of quanta effect on the entanglement is particularly pronounced as this number is much larger in fig the entanglement is plotted as a function of and for one can see that the shape of the entanglement changes significantly when we is weakly coupled to the field ie however we note from this plot that the maximum amount of the two atom entanglement indeed does move closer to the point at instead of for the previous cases again we notice some similarities with other plots in the sense that there is no entanglement for and maximum value at from our further calculation it is clear that we can get the same amount of entanglement using present measure and the negativity as a measure of entanglement of a pure state on other words we remark that for two atom pure states the negativity and the concurrence ce t give the same value sudden death of entanglement the decay of entanglement cannot be restored by local operations and classical entanglement quite recently by using vacuum noise two qubit entanglement terminated abruptly in finite time has been performed and the entanglement dynamics of a two two level atoms model have been discussed they called the nonsmooth finite time decay entanglement sudden death although entanglement can be realized in different ways in experiments how we can preserve it is still a big challenge for current technology because for open system entanglement is decays exponentially it is often thought as similar as quantum decoherence most of the authors who have treated this problem have dealt with the case in which the stark shift has been ignored however in reality it cannot be ignored this question has been addressed in ref also some new features of quantum entanglement in a single three level trapped ion confined in a two dimensional harmonic potential have been observed in ref that either sudden death of entanglement or survivability of quantum entanglement can be obtained with a specific choice of the initial state parameters by allowing the instantaneous position of the center of mass motion of the ion to be explicitly time dependent conclusion course of time this paper completes the analytical treatment of two and three level trapped ions interacting with a laser field in particular under certain conditions the system becomes solvable and the analytical solution is obtained and has been used to discuss the mixedness and entanglement measures we have presented an overview of the theory of the interaction between trapped ions and laser field and some of the many extensions and generalizations that have appeared we studied how the entropy and entanglement are influenced by different regions of the parameters in the phenomenon of the collapses and revivals the coherent state causes two basic effects the revival amplitude is strongly suppressed and the revival time is halved the results obtained in the present work focused on using initially factored and entangled states to measure the entanglement degree we would especially like to draw attention
perspective marking the transmission of the cultural heritage to a new generation the effects of cultural practices support of and years the infant s world expands as language develops mastery of symbol use grows and the self emerges as the locus of internal thoughts and feelings cicchetti beeghley kagan piaget abilities that indicate that cognitive competencies develop along the line of increasing symbolic distance symbolic play has been shore tamis lemonda bornstein and its maturation follows a similar line from concrete to decontextualized expression fenson ramsay mc cune during the third year symbolic play becomes more complex play sequences grow more elaborate and individual variability in symbolic complexity reflects both cognitive and social support children s symbolic expression is shaped by the cultural context it has been suggested that every society must prepare its children to comprehend and use symbols but cultures employ different methods to reach that goal rogoff vygotsky in more traditional societies children learn tool use through guided focuses on verbal and affective exchange rogoff mistry goncu mosier thus with regard to the culture specific pathways to symbolization parents in individualistic societies may support symbolic skills through behavioral coordination with the infant communicative signals feldman greenbaum slade symbolic and eapen zoubeidi yunis still the correlations found between maternal verbal responsiveness and child play for egyptian toddlers wachs et al suggest both main and moderating effects in the relations of parent sensitivity and symbolic complexity as to the universal hypothesis because symbol use is among the defining features of the homo sapiens it is likely that under normative rearing conditions all children would develop adequate symbolic skills and play would be organized by a similar process similarly lower levels of symbolic play are likely to be associated with higher levels of cumulative risk in parallel to the maturation of symbolic capacities children begin at this age to display behavior problems that clearly deviate conditions stemming from each level of the ecology including difficult infant temperament maternal depression low social support and less optimal parent child relations dawson et al holden ritchie mahoney jouriles scavone studies of children s behavior problems in cultures guided by individualistic factors and the validity of the instrument are retained across a wide range of cultures including the israeli and the palestinian societies auerbach yirmiya kamel eapen yunis zoubeidi sabri thus with regard to the culture specific pathway it is possible that social support may have a stronger buffering effect on child adaptation in cultures organized by multigenerational living conditions where support availability is high in addition infant dysregulated temperament may it is likely that higher levels of behavior problems would correlate with more cumulative risk across cultures the present study in light of the above the present study examined the moderating role of culture on the relations of risk conditions in infancy and the development of symbolic play and behavior adaptation participants were dual earner israeli infants at this age are already familiar with the culture specific patterns of parent infant interaction and the family has typically recovered from the experience of childbirth the age of months the last quarter of the third year is a point when the child s symbolic play reaches a certain complexity and behavior problems are beginning to emerge in the externalizing cumulative and interactive effects were tested consistent with the ecological perspective belsky bronfenbrenner we hypothesized that risk originating in the infant parent and context would predict less optimal outcomes in the toddler stage that culture would moderate the effects of risk on development and that risk and behavior adaptation these included infant observed and parent reported difficult temperament as the child s factors maternal depression work family interference and the experience of childbirth as the mother s factors mother infant and father infant interactions as the observed indices of the microsystem and the parents marital satisfaction and social emotional outcomes because of their close dependence on environmental conditions it was expected that difficult temperament maternal depression work overload and negative childbirth experience low parent sensitivity and less marital and social support would predict low symbolic competence and more behavior problems re specific hypotheses according to this perspective the parenting experiences offered by the culture differentially support child competence and adaptation and parents use the resources available in their ecology to achieve developmental milestones marked differences in parental attitudes believes and child rearing practices exist between the israeli and have found for this sample at months feldman masalha nadam the israeli society is primarily urban and its orientation is clearly individualistic young couples live in nuclear family arrangements gender role philosophies are more egalitarian and parenting goals are framed in terms of autonomy and self actualization active involvement with toys behaviors that support the development of competence in individualistic societies keller et al the arab palestinian society is collectivistic in its orientation and several aspects characterize its specific version of collectivism according to the abudabbeh s model arab family life is defined by three main features of power that stress deference to authority and the superiority of the family goals to those of the self extended family living which stresses the inseparateness of the young family from the family of origin the deemphasis on motivations of self fulfillment particularly among women and the emphasis on child compliance as a central early interactions are based on physical contact between parent and child rather than on patterns of visual and affective coordination levine tronick morelli ivey the aforementioned differences in parenting practices and living conditions were expected to chart different pathways to the on the emergence of symbolic play in the israeli group as to behavior problems several culture moderated effects were hypothesized social support was expected to have a more positive impact in the context of extended family settings and to have a stronger buffering effect on the development of behavior problems among arab children maternal depression was and infant negative emotionality was expected to have a more negative impact on the development of behavior problems in arab children
partnerships this article applies concepts from the sociological branch of new institutionalism to the field of sexualities equalities partnership work in local government drawing on findings from a large empirical project notions of norms ritual templates and isomorphism all have purchase in value laden field providing insight into the organizational dynamics associated with inter agency and partnership working the article introduces the notion of institutional hybridization as a means of understanding the collaborative and sometimes conflicting processes associated with governance in the field of sexualities equalities work most of this work had been downgraded due to a severe right wing backlash the introduction of section and other factors such as the conservative s attack on local government a second wave of sexualities work has subsequently developed involving equal opportunity policies for staff and service users and initiatives in a number of service areas including housing adoption and fostering education leisure support for people with hiv provision and symbolic initiatives and community safety equalities work is increasingly supported by local government modernization from onwards the comprehensive performance assessment includes attention to diversity and service users perspective the equalities standard is now adopted by per cent of uk local authorities the employment equalities regulations and the gender recognition bill place requirements on local authorities concerning sexual orientation and transgender equality and the abolition of s in has enabled work to be taken forward in local authorities in a way that has previously been difficult in england and wales other changes such as the civil partnerships bill support equality more widely however sexualities and transgender equality work has remained uneven both across authorities and within them lesbian gay bisexual and in a number of ways this article aims to explore the field of local government lesbian gay and bisexual equalities work using concepts drawn from the sociological branch of new institutionalist theory new institutionalists share a core concern with institutions as formal and informal structures which affect individual behavior over time and which involve a certain amount of shared new institutionalist theory include rational choice approaches political science approaches normative institutionalism historical institutionalism economic new institutionalism organizational new institutionalism and there are a variety of positions regarding issues such as the relative importance of micro and macro processes as well as a varied use of new institutionalist theory there is also cross fertilization between the disciplines so that for example brinton and nee develop a form of sociological institutionalism that draws on economic and rational choice approaches this institutionalist theory although it draws on organizational approaches to an extent it will follow peters in defining institutions as the cognitive normative and regulative structures and activities that give meaning and stability to social behavior the article focuses in particular on the way in which institutions are systems of meaning and their behavior and the behavior of individuals within them depend on the meanings incorporated and the symbols manipulated this article addresses a gap in the literature there has been some work in the field of local government and governance but there is a lack of research concerning local government equalities work partnership working and new institutionalism in addition local sexualities equalities initiatives that were previously located in the boundaries of local authorities are increasingly addressed via partnership institutionalist literature often assumes that organizations are discrete discrete organizational boundaries are problematized by partnerships concerning sexualities equalities this raises interesting questions about the concepts developed by new institutionalists and provokes the development of notions of institutional hybridization to describe the ways in which organizational cultures in the sexualities equalities the article argues that whilst governance involves shifting allegiances and agendas and colliding organizational norms there may be some level of institutional hybridization taking place the article adopts an interpretivist constructivist approach that is perhaps in line with that taken by bevir and rhodes in their analysis of governance however broader engagement with the many debates within the burgeoning field of governance studies rhodes salamon stoker is outside the remit of this piece the article begins with an overview of the methodology of the research it then provides a brief account of sociological new institutionalism in order to situate the following analysis subsequently it outlines some of the concepts used in sociological new institutionalism before examining their relevance to the data on sexualities equalities initiatives in local government the article concepts in relation to governance and sexualities equalities work and discusses institutional hybridization the article foregrounds analysis of subjective processes rather than the link between informal norms and formal institutions it will not deal with the frameworks associated with different political parties development of lesbian and gay local government equalities work between and the project involved case studies of local authorities that were conducting some sexualities equalities work semi structured interviews were conducted with approximately councillors community members and employees in partner agencies spread across case study localities the sample was primarily purposive rather wales and the midlands as well as northern and southern england we ensured that urban rural and metropolitan authorities were represented as well as those that engaged in equalities work in the and those that did not authorities of different political colors and two tier and unitary authorities we also interviewed key national figures accessed through snowballing and via calls placed in the national lgb community press interviews were in note form prior to analysis dissemination included the production of a brief of findings for contributors and the organization of a national workshop sociological forms of new institutionalism sociological new institutionalism can be understood by comparing it briefly to other forms of new institutionalism economic and political new institutionalisms have emphasized formal norms such as rules and statutes economic as utilitarian with people choosing to act in certain ways based on rational choice sociological new institutionalists also see individual action as being purposive but emphasize the way in which people make choices based on incomplete information and social pressures as well as economic ones nee traces the origins of sociological new institutionalism to
emphasized that academics must move beyond representation toward the scholarly examination of experience if they are a greater understanding of real new women studies focusing on experience will allow academics to determine whether or not textual depictions were accurate in relation to the women they supposedly represented although ledger has claimed that new woman fiction and critiques did not always characterize new womanhood accurately the statement is by no means definitive meaning that at times these writings may have been representative historiographically however there is a lack of womanhood accurately the statement is by no means definitive meaning that at times these writings may have been representative historiographically however there is a lack of inquiry into the lives of individual new women to either support or undermine ledger s claim this is especially true in the canadian context while we know something of the new woman tendencies of some well known canadian writers such as sara jeannette duncan and lily lewis more biographical study of studying new women sally mitchell has recently called for the inclusion of texts other than novels in order to identify recover and consider the political and social writing by those women examining it not only for information and opinions but also as texts as historian marjory lang has clearly demonstrated in women who made the news by the end of the nineteenth century canadian women were gaining employment in the periodical industry writing women s columns for clearly demonstrated in women who made the news by the end of the nineteenth century canadian women were gaining employment in the periodical industry writing women s columns for newspapers such as the globe some such as robertson also wrote for women s interest magazines therefore the work of these female journalists should also be examined when studying new women carole gerson agrees on a need to study new woman texts beyond novels she argued that by privileging books and periodicals researchers privilege authors who could afford book publication over authors who sold their work to periodicals many of whom were women broadening the textual base of our inquiry makes room for women like robertson who would otherwise not be included in the canon of new women in canada by examining robertson s texts in the student newspaper the varsity the women s interest periodical ladies pictorial weekly the globe and the victoria times clearly new woman ideals her conception of new womanhood was at times conservative however as she incorporated elements of victorian female gender norms into her work when she pursued her writing career after her marriage she continued to assert many tenets of new woman thinking but her ideas about marriage were complex by examining her life experiences and published works it is possible to determine that robertson did consider herself a new woman career while her conception of new womanhood was far less radical than fictional representations of the new woman found in the novels of the day her writings reflect a tension between modernizing trends and traditional values madge robertson watt a brief biography society the robertsons comfortable middle class existence and progressive views about women meant that madge the elder of two children was afforded the rare privilege of a university education while she was a co ed at the university of toronto from to robertson wrote under the pen name greta and contributed to the varsity and other toronto papers including saturday night after graduation she taught at parkdale collegiate for a short time up writing full time robertson became the editor of toronto s ladies pictorial weekly in and took a position with frank leslie s weekly in new york the following year during this period her work also appeared in the globe and the mail as well as several american publications including harper s monthly truth and the new york evening post when her mother became ill in the spring of robertson returned to canada later that year after her mother s death she married watt whom she knew from her student days in toronto and the couple moved to british columbia where dr watt was practicing medicine the watts had two sons born in and yet robertson watt continued her writing career from despite the busy demands of her life as a wife mother and socialite her main writing activity during this period was reviewing books for the victoria times when her husband was posted to william head bc as the inspector of quarantine for in robertson watt was introduced to rural living and she continued to write from her new home outside of victoria by robertson watt became involved in the women s institute movement as a lecturer and organizer of rural women s clubs she took up the responsibility of advising the provincial government on women s institutes and traveling extensively to establish local branches she was one of the first women named to the senate of the university of british with these new interests consuming so much of her time robertson s writing career came to an end sometime after when dr watt died prematurely in she moved to england with her two sons where she continued to be active in the leadership of rural women s organizations both in britain and internationally for more than thirty years madge robertson watt died in montreal in at years of age madge robertson her toronto writing in many ways robertson s own life be the epitome of new womanhood in particular her student experience at the university of toronto set her apart as a member of a small but growing group she was among the earliest co eds to set foot on campus the pages of the varsity attest to robertson s full participation in campus life through her involvements with the modern languages club a variety of campus events and her noteworthy academic achievements robertson was not a silent participant in co education but a women s right to access higher education she made her views
faster than unambiguous control words in this experiment the division within polysemy is observed again namely the processing advantage which is observed in metonymous words is lost in metaphors it should be noted that the reaction times in this experiment were much faster than those in the auditory experiment and the effects were generally much smaller in this respect our findings are parallel and those of rodd et al who also found similar differences between their visual and auditory tasks it is conceivable that the speeded lexical decisions in the visual word recognition actually masked the processing advantage that was observed in the auditory study for metaphors thus it is possible that participants were processing the visual forms very fast without in fact allowing time to proceed to deeper semantic processing masking therefore the facilitatory effects for as in experiment both types of homonymous words did not show any facilitation effects demonstrating no indication of the so called ambiguity processing advantage general discussion the present set of studies addressed the issue of whether homonymous ambiguous words to clarify further the so called ambiguity advantage effect in word recognition overall the results supported our hypothesis of a sense relatedness advantage effect as opposed to an ambiguity advantage effect in that a processing advantage was found for ambiguous words with multiple related senses but not for ambiguous words with multiple unrelated meanings the present results suggest that contrary to the common view in literature there is no processing advantage for ambiguous words with multiple unrelated meanings rather the advantage seems to stem from ambiguous words that have multiple related senses in particular the auditory study revealed that ambiguous words with both metaphorically and metonymically related senses showed faster processing to unambiguous frequency control words in contrast both balanced and unbalanced homonymous words did not show any processing differences from unambiguous control words in that respect our findings are consistent with recent findings that reported a processing advantage for words with multiple related senses importantly though our findings extend such previous research by demonstrating a and metonymy experiment demonstrated that both types of polysemous words were processed faster than control words nevertheless a distinction within polysemy was also evident in particular metonymically polysemous words were processed significantly faster than metaphorically polysemous words thus the distinction between metaphor and metonymy emerges even when a processing advantage relative to control observed for both types of polysemous words these differential processing patterns within polysemy were also evident in experiment metonymous words which have senses that are very closely related were indeed processed significantly faster than unambiguous control words metaphorical words however did not show such a processing advantage experiment thus provides additional a distinction within polysemy by indicating that the processing advantage for metaphors is less robust than the processing advantage observed for metonymous words this finding is consistent with observations in the theoretical linguistics literature that metaphorical polysemy is quite unsystematic and unconstrained in nature there are cases where the senses are sufficiently related but there in meaning is not so obvious however given that in the present set of experiments the same stimuli were used for both the auditory and the visual experiments it seems that the modality in which the metaphorically ambiguous words were presented differentially affected the recognition process in this respect our findings are parallel to those of rodd et al who also found differences across the visual and auditory modalities in particular in our study when the presented in the auditory modality metaphors showed facilitation in processing relative to control words however when the words were presented in the visual modality this processing advantage was lost for metaphors it is conceivable that the fact that visual word processing is a learned activity as opposed to the more natural auditory differentially affects word processing for metaphors by eliminating the processing advantage that is observed in the auditory task metaphors are probably the most vulnerable set of ambiguous words to any differences that may arise due to modality because of the fact that they do nt seem to have a fixed status in the lexical ambiguity continuum rather although metaphor is grouped under polysemy it seems to lie somewhere between pure homonymy and pure polysemy thus it is possible that metaphors are more prone to any processing differences that may arise from the presentation of words in different modalities in that respect the present findings are consistent with those of an earlier study which used a cross modal priming task and showed that metonymous words had significantly greater priming effects and were processed than homonymous words while metaphors lay somewhere in the middle and were not statistically different from either homonymous or metonymous words in addition it is also conceivable that the observed differences between the auditory and visual experiments could be due to the increased speed of the lexical decisions in the visual experiment relative to those in the auditory experiment which could actually mask the processing advantage that was observed in the auditory study metaphors as described earlier the results of the present study have important implications for models of lexical processing as well as for the nature of the mental representations of ambiguous words they seem to be mostly consistent with models that allow for differential representation of homonymy and polysemy in the mental lexicon as originally suggested in klepousniotou for polysemous words only a basic sense which has the meaning of the word may be assumed to be stored in the lexicon polysemous words thus have a single semantically rich representation in the mental lexicon the extended senses which are closely related to the basic sense are generated from the basic sense possibly by means of lexical rules these rules are assumed to be stored in the lexicon and they can operate on a basic sense of a lexical which is also stored in the lexicon in order to derive an extended sense of that item this process is known as sense extension although sense extension accompanies many
also examined classroom authority across a range of educational contexts wills explored the thorny educational dilemmas that state mandated testing has created for teachers he documented how a fourth grade teacher in a school that promoted a moral order of care managed to adopt a form of positive authority that allowed her to juggle the demands of state testing which entailed coverage of the curriculum with the goal of fostering through knowledge production bixby showed how detracking motivated by egalitarian impulses can be undermined by teachers reliance on subject matter expertise and resistance to addressing the needs of diverse learners rosenblum revealed the different strategies used by college teachers to handle the incessant demands of students who want standards adjusted so they can succeed while juggling life circumstances and mullooly and varenne against backdrop of bourdieu and passeron s model of pedagogical authority explained how playfulness among mexican immigrant middle school students highlights the indeterminacy and unpredictability of authority other scholars have considered the elements of power and morality in authority relations buzzelli and johnston conceptualized authority as teachers possession of the knowledge students need to prosper as individuals and also the power they argued that the specific exercise of teachers power must take the existence of conflicting moral agendas into account for example teachers who confront the paradox of regulating students behavior and nurturing students voices may use forms of soft power to reconcile disparate goals these teachers become politically conscious moral agents who effectively wield their authority in the face and community well being oyler investigated how a first grade teacher forged resolution by sharing authority with students the teacher followed rather than controlled students initiations in book discussions and other classroom activities although other teachers would have treated such initiations as digressions from educational goals the progressive first grade teacher saw them as positive ways for children to help oyler claimed were able to bring their knowledge to bear in ways that challenged the authority of texts and occasionally that of their teacher instead of undermining teacher s authority she contended that the sharing of authority actually strengthened it both buzzelli and johnston and oyler promoted an ideologically progressive approach to the resolution of the tension between order and engagement and their conclusions are not generalizable because they are based on data gathered in elementary classrooms in which young children are developmentally predisposed to go along with adults as other research indicates juggling the goals of order and engagement is far more difficult in middle and high school settings where students are older and more inclined to challenge adult authority adolescent students are at a stage in life at which they shift their allegiances from adult to age mates they are much more likely than younger children to mount individual and collective resistance to teachers authority qualitative research has been essential to understanding the complex and dynamic social constructions that constitute these authority relationships these recent studies bode well for the future of qualitative research on classroom authority many more investigations are needed to expand on and update prior research the general lack of theoretical ideological and empirical understanding of authority relations in the larger more consequential realm of educational policy and other lines of school based inquiry remains problematic and potentially debilitating for both teachers and students it is we argue imperative that classroom authority and the many factors that shape it in different settings be explicitly considered and investigated to inform practice and policy for research classroom authority relations are fundamental to the success of formal educational endeavors and yet conceptions and enactments of these relations have been poorly understood and are underresearched especially in the contexts of public schools to generate better understandings we have reviewed and critiqued scholarship on social theories educational ideologies and empirical qualitative research it is our hope that such understandings will lead to more informative perspectives on and more educationally beneficial renditions of classroom authority the general understanding we have derived from social theory is that the legitimacy of teachers as authority figures is not something that can be assumed but rather is granted during the course of ongoing interactions with students classroom authority is above all else a social construction that is built taken apart and rebuilt by teachers and students these relations function in a variety of to varying degrees in the service of a moral order that may be composed of shared norms values and purposes but more often than not is complicated by competing and contradictory values such theoretical insights should be but often are not considered in educational ideologies that have shaped academic content and processes the legacies of these ideologies continue to influence educational politics and policies in ways that have had a notable impact on teachers students conservatives are adamant that teachers exercise their authority in a manner that ensures the transmission of western academic knowledge and common american values liberals gravitate toward visions of progressive education in which teachers and students share authority to realize individual potential and build more just democratic communities radicals under the influence of neo marxist feminist poststructuralist or modernist authority figures and hierarchies dominated by privileged groups they promote changes in classroom relations to transform oppressive social systems and empower marginalized students although these ideologies have been hotly debated especially in academe they have been trumped by the ideology of bureaucratic social efficiency infused into national state and local educational policies and reform movements although standardized testing and other products profound and sometimes unintended effects on teacher student relations the consequences of this ideology and for that matter other ideologies are often overlooked or obscured to the point at which their actual impact on classroom teaching and learning is hidden and or ignored that is why research conducted in classroom settings that investigates the impact of policy particularly in the wake of the passage of the no child left behind act in is so vital in the and illuminated the highly complex socially constructed nature of
accounts nf training as any other psychotherapeutic method should be introduced and later on supervised by a clinician but also address the topic of the central nervous mechanisms underlying successful training the cnv increase in children with adhd after scp training as well as the increase in healthy adults after beta training may reflect specific neurophysiological effects of these two training paradigms these findings erps recorded in cognitive tasks are an appropriate tool for it applying functional imaging approaches may reveal additional knowledge about the neural networks modulated by a successful nf training levesque beauregard and mensour provide preliminary data for this approach they report changes in the anterior cingulate cortex of and the mechanisms underlying successful nf training in neuropsychiatric disorders remain to be solved however this does not argue against nf the same holds true for psychopharmacological interventions despite the fact that large resources have been spent for quite a long time to address these issues these questions should rather serve as motivation for further clinical psychology school based prevention of depressive symptoms a randomized controlled study of the effectiveness and specificity of the penn resiliency program the authors investigated the effectiveness and specificity of the penn resiliency program a cognitive behavioral depression prevention program children from middle schools were randomly assigned to prp control or the penn enhancement program an alternate intervention that controls for nonspecific intervention ingredients children s depressive symptoms were assessed through years of follow up there was no intervention effect on average levels of depressive symptoms in the full sample findings varied by school in schools prp significantly reduced depressive symptoms across the follow up relative to both con and pep in the school not prevent depressive symptoms the authors discuss the findings in relation to previous research on prp and the dissemination of prevention programs several cognitive behavioral interventions show promise in preventing depressive symptoms in youths among these are the coping with stress holland the lisa program and the penn resiliency despite this promise however depression prevention programs that demonstrate positive effects are rarely incorporated into school or clinical settings and little is known about the effectiveness of most programs it is usually unclear whether the cognitive behavioral therapy skills or other nonspecific factors are responsible the majority of depression prevention studies compare cognitive behavioral interventions with a no intervention control only a few studies have compared prevention programs with attention control found that prp did not significantly reduce or prevent depressive symptoms relative to both no intervention and attention control groups the small sample size may have limited power to detect effects however merry mcdowell wild bir and cunliffe compared rap with a placebo control group consisting primarily of group arts and crafts activities and found some support for the efficacy of rap relative to placebo but the across different measures of depressive symptoms the placebo condition used by merry et al controlled for several factors that are not specific to cognitive behavioral interventions including adult attention and opportunities to interact with peers a stronger test of the cognitive behavioral model would control for additional nonspecific factors such as the discussion of stressors and topics relevant which compared prp with an alternate intervention and a no intervention control a total of middle school students were randomly assigned to one of the three conditions group leaders were school teachers school counselors and psychology graduate students not affiliated with the research team prp and pep both reduced depressive symptoms relative to the no intervention control prp and pep at most of the follow up assessments the lack of differences may reflect limited power as very large cell sizes are often needed to detect differences between active interventions in addition it is possible that differences would have emerged had the researchers followed participants for more than year postintervention in the present study we evaluated prp s effectiveness as compared year follow up period our major goals were as follows to investigate the effectiveness of prp when delivered in schools by school teachers school counselors and other group leaders not affiliated with a research team and to evaluate intervention specificity we examined two conceptualizations of depression prevention reduced levels of symptoms across an extended period of time method participants this study was approved by the institutional review board and by school administrators and school boards in each of the participating school districts figure shows the participant flow from recruitment through the year follow up starting in two consecutive cohorts of students participated in this study each year the research team sent letters and three middle schools in a suburban metropolitan area in the united states recruitment materials described the study as an investigation of two interventions designed to help students cope with day to day stressors that are common in adolescence we informed parents that those children who reported elevated symptoms at baseline would first be offered spots in the project and that other children parents of approximately children received recruitment materials because the response rate was lower than anticipated we decided to evaluate prp with all children for whom we received consent as long as they were not suffering from a depressive disorder at baseline a total of children and their parents consented to participate in the project response rates ranged from the three schools inventory the children with baseline cdi were administered the depressive disorders section of the diagnostic interview for children and adolescents eight children scored positive for major depressive disorder on the diagnostic interview for children and adolescents and were referred to therapy thirteen families dropped from the study after baseline and prior to intervention phase within cohort and school we stratified children by grade gender and baseline cdi score and then used a computer generated random numbers sequence to randomly assign participants to one of three study conditions prp pep or control within each school and across all three schools combined there were no significant between conditions differences depressive symptoms at baseline children s mean age was years a
second moments of dividends after removal of an exponential trend we choose units such that the price index in equals market capitalization mean dividend reflects the size of the stock market preliminary specification analysis of the dynamic behavior of dividends reveals two features first the autocorrelation function switches from positive to negative values after three to four quarters second while the first two partial autocorrelation coefficients are significant for all countries except canada all countries exhibit several significant partial autocorrelation coefficients beyond the first two our model we would like a dividend process that accommodates both properties in a parsimonious way we thus decompose dividends dt into a persistent cyclical component fd captured by an ar process and a transitory shock dt fd that is typical of variables affected by the business cycle the presence of the transitory noise that cannot be distinguished from the underlying business cycle movement implies that lags longer than two are still helpful in forecasting dividends the true dividend process follows a truncated distribution which we approximate by modelling the dividend as normally distributed in levels table confirms that the approximation is sensible as mean dividends are more above zero for all countries except italy table presents the estimated moments for the persistent component fd is stationary the roots of the autoregressive polynomial are outside the unit circle for most countries the roots are complex which accounts for oscillations in the correlogram in addition the persistent component has persistent differences indeed the process of changes in fd satisfies we have that changes in the same direction although at a decreasing rate since if this was the only effect the level fd would be non stationary however the second term causes mean reversion in the level by pulling fd toward its mean of zero whenever it is positive and by pulling it is negative for the impulse response of the level the first effect dominates early on before the second effect takes over the result is a hump shaped impulse response function the persistent component explains almost all the variation in dividends its share of total variance is larger than all countries except italy for three of the seven countries the volatilities of the shocks hitting the persistent component in any given quarter are also higher than that of shocks still changes in dividends are typically less persistent than changes in the persistent component changes in dividends can be decomposed into changes in fd which are positively serially correlated and changes in the temporary component which are negatively serially correlated and thus reduce overall persistence table summary statistics of dividends the estimation method is explained in the appendix available at the review s website the autoregressive parameters and are statistically significant for all countries at the except for japan s table estimated dividend process facts on equity flows and returns data on international equity flows of us investors are from the treasury international capital reporting system of the us treasury trading volume data are from datastream s global equity indices both flow and volume data report all transactions in a given quarter figure plots the net purchases and gross flows of foreign stocks by us investors divided by total market capitalization at the beginning of the period for net purchases of foreign stocks by us investors as well as excess returns on the indices for the countries we consider the mean excess returns in this table are based on detrended data which means that the effects of dividend growth are already removed this explains why excess returns are smaller than the mean equity premia usually reported from raw data and why sharpe ratios implied by the table are unusually low in our set of countries changes in american holdings are small relative to total market capitalization within a given quarter it is rare to see a change in position of more than market capitalization figure displays serial correlograms of net purchases of us investors and cross correlograms of net purchases and local stock returns it documents three stylized facts about the joint distribution of net inflows and excess returns first net inflows are persistent the autocorrelation coefficient ranges from for italy to for canada the autocorrelation coefficient is statistically significant at the in all second the serial correlogram of flows further indicates a reversal of flows five to six quarters out for all countries except the third fact is return chasing us investors net purchases in a country are positively correlated with both current and lagged local collects summary statistics for holdings gross flows and volume us investors hold significant fractions of the market in all countries except italy gross purchases and sales are of the same order of magnitude in all countries the stylized fact that gross sales and purchases are highly positively correlated holds both in the time series for every country and in the cross section of countries importantly the time series results do not only reflect trend behavior while there are gross flows over the whole sample behavior over a five year period is mostly driven by volatility that is common to both series this is illustrated in the second column of figure finally volume varies widely across countries however holdings of us investors turn over less frequently than holdings of other investors within the country except for canada and the the persistence of net inflows is not due to trends the first column in figure plots the net inflow all our countries it is apparent that the main feature is slow transitions from periods of high to low net inflows albuquerque et al international equity flows us investors net purchases as well as gross purchases and gross sales to the six non us countries all flows are quarterly and stated as a percentage of beginning of quarter market capitalization table net purchases notes means and first autocorrelations for us excess returns rd and net purchases by us investors is the contemporaneous correlation of excess returns
containing indirect object relatives plus filler sentences similar in length to the experimental ones as indirect prepositional objects in english the hypothesized gap in our experimental sentences is not directly adjacent to the subcategorizing verb note that only the trace reactivation hypothesis but not the direct association hypothesis predicts that we should find antecedent priming effects at the position of the indirect object gap thus allowing for the two hypotheses to be empirically dissociated to prevent participants from focusing their attention on specific points during the were structurally similar to the experimental sentences but with visual targets presented at positions other than the critical test points the remaining fillers included constructions of different types all sentences were read by a female native speaker of english with natural intonation and pre recorded on a digital tape recorder pictures of animals and inanimate objects the pictures were scanned and their presentation linked to the experimental at the offset of the direct object np and at a pre gap control position ms earlier this design yielded four different experimental conditions as illustrated in a complete list of experimental sentences and targets is provided in appendix the experimental sentences were distributed across four counterbalanced presentation lists so as to ensure that each participant listened to each sentence only once and with all presentation of identical and related targets the experimental sentences in each list were pseudo randomized and mixed with the fillers procedure each participant was tested individually in one of our experimental laboratories they were seated in front of a pc monitor and asked to listen carefully to the pre recorded sentences over headphones and to watch the screen for pictures that would appear at some point during appeared on the screen they had to decide as quickly as possible whether the animal or object in the picture was alive or not alive by pushing either the left or the right hand button of a dual push button box participants response times were measured from the point at which the picture appeared on the screen to their pressing one of the response buttons stimulus presentation and the recording of rts was made an active effort to comprehend the stimulus sentences they additionally had to answer a total of auditory comprehension questions randomly interspersed throughout the experiment to allow the participants to familiarize themselves with the cross modal aliveness decision task the main experiment was preceded by a short practice phase the experiment was presented over two brief sessions of no more than minutes each with a short break learners answered of the end of trial comprehension questions correctly in the on line task participants were also highly accurate in the aliveness decision task with the learners correctly identifying of the picture targets as either alive or not alive the data from one participant who performed close to chance and to in the aliveness decision task these results demonstrate that the learners had no difficulty comprehending the experimental sentences or coping with the dual task demands of the cross modal priming experiment the reaction time data applying the same data trimming criteria as in roberts et al s study we also removed trials that exceeded the set timeout of ms from the learners data set as well as individual outliers beyond sd from each participant s mean rt per condition statistical analyses were performed on the remaining rt data from learners and high span and low span children from roberts et al s study the learners response times were shorter to identical than to unrelated targets at both the pre gap and the gap position figure shows the learners mean rts to the visual targets at the two test points to determine whether the learners performance in the cross modal a preliminary anova with the within participants factors position and target type and reading span as a covariate on the data the factor reading span did not interact with the either position or target type nor was there a significant three way interaction indicating that individual wm differences as a covariate again there were no significant interactions with the either experimental factor suggesting that individual differences in proficiency did not affect the learners rt pattern either recall that for the high span participants in roberts et al s study rts to identical targets were faster than those to unrelated targets at the gap position whereas there was no such advantage for identical targets at the earlier control position this rt pattern is expected if the aliveness decision task is facilitated by the presence of a wh gap at the later low span nss on the other hand had shown no facilitation for identical targets at all to determine whether the learners performance pattern resembled that of either the high span or the low span adult nss or of the high span or low span children we went on to compare the group with the each of the four subgroups from roberts et al s study separately participants factor group and the within participants factors position and target type this analysis revealed significant main effects of group reflecting the fact that the learners rts were higher overall than the nss and a main effect of target type and which indicates that the learners rt pattern differed from the pattern seen in the high span nss the two groups differed in that only the nss showed a position specific advantage for identical targets at the point of the gap subsequent pairwise comparisons confirmed that significantly shorter rts than unrelated ones both at the gap and at the pre gap control position in other words the learners could identify pictures showing the referent of a wh filler more easily than pictures that were unrelated to any of the sentence s participants but the size of this facilitation effect was at which these pictures were presented in a parallel anova we also compared the group with the low span nss this analysis also showed significant main effects of
the ancestry of a research animal from two breeding centers in china as being of indochinese descent an expanded snp discovery effort would readily identify more population markers making it possible to identify hybrid fascicularis as well the finding that approximately half of the snps found in fascicularis overlap with those found in mulatta is remarkable given that previous analysis showed that only the overlap ping snps in fascicularis include ones that are private to chinese or indian rhesus as well as those that are shared between indian and chinese populations while there are more snps from the chinese rhesus than indian rhesus macaques present in cynomolgus macaques there are about twice as many snps present in the chinese rhesus population as whole an evolutionary bottleneck that and such a contraction could also have reduced the representation of ancestral macaque snps in indian rhesus monkeys there are several possible explanations for the high percentage of shared variants in these two macaque species the snps identified in both fascicularis and mulatta could represent that the most ancient snps in the fascicularis group those that predate the divergence of rhesus and chinese rhesus macaques were also found in fascicularis interestingly although mtdna analysis supports the divergence of these two species mya the few studies to date of nuclear dna loci have suggested a closer relationship our findings also suggest a more complex evolutionary history than that suggested by mtdna alone mulatta and fascicularis snps the chromosome sequence studies of tosi et al suggest interspecies hybridization though only within the current overlapping range of chinese rhesus macaques and indochinese cynomolgus macaques however in this study we found that indonesian cynomolgus macaques also share a high percentage of snps with the rhesus periods of glaciation when land bridges could have permitted the migration of macaques as far south as indonesia nonetheless gene flow between chinese rhesus and fascicularis does not explain all of the overlapping snps since there is also evidence of indian specific rhesus variants in fascicularis due to the geographic barriers that separate india and indonesia snps selective pressure to maintain some of the sequence variants could have contributed to the retention of some snps in both fascicularis and mulatta possible evidence of selective pressure can be found within this study by both direct sequence comparisons and snp array genotyping we found that one snp locus had a high detected a striking departure from hardy weinberg equilibrium this finding could be the consequence of inadequate sample size or a technical issue that was resolved neither by direct sequencing nor by the snp array however it is also possible that a heterozygous genotype at or at alleles tightly linked to this locus is associated with decreased survival this is not implausible since encodes the response to pathogenic infections the locus has fixed alleles in the indian and chinese rhesus macaque populations and was included in this study of fascicularis the allele present in indian rhesus was also found in almost all of the fascicularis with the only exceptions being a few individuals from the indochinese population this skewed presence oxidase a a protein that is involved in the breakdown of neurotransmitters including norepinephrine and serotonin some alleles of maoa are thought to influence aggressive and impulsive behaviors in primates perhaps selective pressure favors different maoa alleles in varying macaque populations or environments there were no fixed alleles detected in this study that distinguish based upon the morphological and anatomical differences between the macaques one would expect some gene replacement to be present additional sequencing of larger regions of genomic dna will be needed to resolve the rate of allele fixation between these two macaque species conclusion be closer than that suggested by previous morphological and mtdna analysis it also indicates that future snp discovery efforts in either macaque species will generate information that will be useful for both species future efforts to identify cynomolgus snps would not only advance genetic research in this widely used animal model but would also generate tools used in this study were obtained from at least sources for each geographic region from indochina from indonesia sconsin from the philippines manila luzon island jan vacek located in iloilo on the island of panay from china dna analysis inc hanover md in accordance with the manufacturers protocol along with primers designed from the rhesus macaque genomic sequence amplification products were separated by agarose gel electrophoresis and isolated using montage gel extraction kit the dna fragments were sequenced using the pcr amplification primers and big dye chemistry ca sequence electropherograms were visually inspected and compared using sequencher a custom snp array was used to genotype previously identified rhesus snps using iplex reagents and protocols for multiplex pcr single base primer extension and generation of mass spectra in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions work were deposited in dbsnp and monkeysnp databases obesity and pre hypertension in family medicine implications for quality improvement james rohrer gregory anderson and joseph furst abstract background prevention of pre hypertension is an important goal for primary care patients was to assess the degree to which obesity independently is associated with risk for pre hypertension in family medicine patients methods this study was a retrospective analysis of information abstracted from medical records of adult patients multivariable logistic regression was used to test the relationship between body mass index and pre hypertension after adjustment for comorbidity and demographic characteristics pre hypertension was defined as systolic pressure and mm hg or diastolic pressure between and mm hg results in our sample patients were pre hypertensive logistic regression analysis revealed that in comparison to patients with normal body mass patients with bmi had higher adjusted odds of being pre hypertensive bmi between and also was significant as was overweight family medicine patients elevated bmi is a risk factor for prehypertension especially bmi this relationship appears to be independent of age gender marital status and comorbidity weight loss intervention for obese patients including patient education or referral to weight loss programs might
using then and we conclude that we apply now with the e to obtain on pi vanishes on log pi and wi are unique by their construction and depend continuously on a and it remains to prove by green s second identity we have where is an appropriate domain in and is the unit conormal to pointing to we apply this with n using the invariance of the right hand side under conformal changes of the metric that pi wi which is supported on that by and fj and that by and fj on we and the estimates on we establish note that implies that pi grows exponentially towards the previous spherical region the rate of growth however is only two which is not as strong as the rate of decay we usually arrange for solutions this allows us to combine these functions in the next proposition to obtain a global statement to construct sym we assume that and we take and define where and for where is as in and wi as in we apply then to obtain we define then and we have the following proposition proposition sym and defined as above for the immersion a where a is as in depend continuously on and satisfy the log where nwi proof using the definitions and we clearly have the following nmin log using then the estimates provided in and we complete the proof lemma consider where and satisfy let be a disc of radius with respect to and center some if satisfy then the legendrian perturbations are well defined as in appendix and satisfy where and are the lagrangian angles of respectively and such that satisfies the assumptions of where since by taking and we have where and are the lagrangian angles of and respectively and is the laplacian induced by as in the lemma follows by applying and using the local estimate for the nonlinear terms we just proved it is easy universal constant such that if sym satisfy then the legendrian perturbations and of a are well defined as in appendix and satisfy where and are the lagrangian angles of and respectively and is as in proof using the definitions of the norms involved and the corollary follows are well defined as in appendix and satisfy where and are the lagrangian angles of and respectively and nis as in proof using the definitions of the norms involved and the corollary follows correcting to a special legendrian immersion legendrian moreover depends continuously on and satisfies proof applying we find which satisfies then sym log where we used also applying then w th and in place of and respectively we conclude sym log we define now a map we have that if then qv sym log applying then again we define which then satisfies by and that qjv qv jv sym log which implies that we obtain sym log sym it follows that is a contraction and since is complete there is a unique fixed point of which we call by defining then we complete the proof the main theorem we are ready to state and prove our main theorem while the proof depends on more or less everything in this paper the and the construction in appendix theorem there is a constant such that if is large enough there is a with a ch that is well defined as in appendix and is a special legendrian immersion satisfying the symmetries in proof we assume fixed and small enough as in and which is and and a as in sect we define sym by requiring on and on c dislocation c gluing sym log we apply now to obtain rm which satisfies c dislocation on where we used and to estimate c dislocation c gluing we define and we have then by appealing to x where for this we have to choose large enough in terms of and constants which depend on we apply to obtain rm which satisfies by using lu lu using then and we conclude that we have then by and by defining then we have by and that therefore is well defined is clearly a compact convex subset of sym for some and it is easy to check that is a continuous map in the induced topology by schauder s fixed that since the smoothness follows by standard regularity theory the proof is completed by taking and remark it is interesting to try to carry out a construction similar to the one leading to the theorem above where the symmetry group is replaced by one based on the symmetries of a platonic solid the role of the vertices of the regular gon inscribed in discussed in the a platonic solid inscribed in similarly the role of the vertices of the regular gon that is the vertices of the gon together with their opposites should be played by the vertices of the platonic solid together with their opposites which have to be distinct from the original vertices as in the earlier construction this condition unfortunately excludes all platonic solids with the exception of the tetrahedron many special legendrian surfaces of genus we proceed to outline the construction we fix a regular tetrahedron inscribed in and whose vertices include consider the group of symmetries of this tetrahedron that is the subgroup of which preserves the set of its vertices we extend its action to in the usual way and we define g tetrahedron to be the group of isometries of generated by the group of symmetries to modify the construction of this paper where instead of fusing the original special legendrian torus with its images under the powers of we fuse it with its images under the action of gtetrahedron this action creates four copies of the original torus including the original one and hence the resulting surface is of genus four the construction proceeds then along the lines of the construction presented that the approximate kernel corresponding to the central spherical region is trivial as before while the one corresponding to the non
the cch and can be estimated by fitting either a damped gabor function or a cosine function is in the visual cortex the magnitude and direction of phase offsets can depend on stimulus properties and this opens the possibility that phase offsets play a functional role in cortical computations in this case the stimulus related information carried by phase offsets would need to be extracted by the the realm of sensory responses and the spike latencies that vary as a function of stimulus properties offsets extracted from a larger number of simultaneously recorded units are often mutually dependent as they adhere to the principle of additivity for any three units a and the offset between units a and al the additivity of phase offsets can be used to determine the temporal order in which individual units tend to fire action potentials thus for units the information from pairwise cchs can be condensed into a linear arrangement of positions on a single time axis such that each position indicates the preferred times at which each complexity of the data a parametric method by schneider et al can test whether the arrangement on the time axis is not arbitrary but emerges from genuine temporal structure reflected in consistent relationships between phase offsets here the description of the data is based on the mean and variance offering high test power and relying on standard and well understood parametric method is that it is not always robust against the violation of assumptions about the data properties thus it is sometimes necessary to use so called non parametric statistical methods which pose fewer requirements on the of additivity across phase offsets the method considers only the directions of phase offsets rather than their magnitudes investigates whether the directions of phase offsets are consistent across pairs of units and investigates the degree to which the resulting networks of phase offsets are transitive nodes and the directions of the phase offsets are indicated by arrows oriented according to the signs of the delays which are estimated for pairs of units and thus the arrows in the network indicate the flow of time the units at the dull ends of the arrows firing action potentials earlier than the units at the sharp ends nodes a cch is computed and a phase offset is estimated by convention a positive value of indicates that unit fires on average earlier than if the offsets are additive for any pair of units ij the following holds where is the index of any other unit in the network note that and thus in eq the order of the indexes needs to be taken such a network by following the directions of arrows each node can be visited at most once and the travel is possible in one direction only examples of transitive and non transitive networks are shown in fig in appendix a one can see various equations describing the properties of transitive networks for more information on tournaments a network of nodes the first node is connected to the rest of the network exclusively by out going arrows whose number is the next node in the sequence has one in going arrow and out going arrows this continues until the last node where all the arrows are in going for an example thus in transitive networks the nodes can be ordered according to the number of in going for example in fig the transitive relations in a four node network indicate the following firing order and in contrast in the nontransitive network in fig three of the units share the same number of in going arrows and thus the firing order cannot be established unambiguously anetwork that is perfectly additive and thus the network lacks perfect additivity nevertheless the transitivity of a network indicates also a high degree of additivity to illustrate this point consider a network in which the delays are in reality perfectly additive but due up exactly such a network can remain transitive only if the measurement errors are sufficiently small so as not to exceed the magnitudes of the delays otherwise the errors would change the directions of arrows unsystematically resulting in a loss of transitivity thus the errors of additivity must be in a transitive network smaller than the sizes errors with which phase offsets are estimated are similar irrespective of whether the delays are short or long transitivity can be achieved only if these errors are smaller than the smallest delays in the network as the estimated delays are in cortex often shorter than ms and can be short even over large cortical distances it follows that the transitivity of a shortly transitivity is in practice too strong a requirement because the networks obtained experimentally are likely to contain at least a few additivity errors that exceed the sizes of the delays and that thus render the networks non transitive for an example for this reason it is also necessary to consider the partial transitivity of a network and investigate whether the degree to additive partial transitivity partial transitivity can be defined as the transitivity of subnetworks that constitute the global network the larger the number of transitive sub networks the higher is the degree of partial transitivity in the global network in a partially transitive network some units will have a unique position in the firing order while the positions of others will be ambiguous times cannot be resolved unambiguously for every single pair of units a measure of partial transitivity is proposed in section and here we motivate the use of statistical analysis to determine the likelihood that partial transitivity within a network is obtained by chance depending of the particular arrangements of action potentials the positions of center peaks in cchs can express relations other than additivity thus additivity is not given by default and hence partial transitivity may in principle arise also by chance the simulations presented in section show that even in networks in which the directions of arrows are assigned randomly one
neapolitan area the data about the ceramic and stones materials may shed some lights on the centers of by the ships according to the ports of call therefore the possible routes followed by the hellenistic ship for the carriage of foodstuffs and other materials are in the high middle tyrrhenia area the data about the stone ballast of ship reveal probable routes along the southern tuscany coast as far as latium or ponza island and the tyrrhenian coast in the calabria peloritani area whereas the ship reveal routes within the high middle southern tyrrhenia area finally the data obtained in this study allow us to confirm the production area of the amphorae at different sites between tarquinia and naples whereas the stowage and the ballast materials could give two different kinds of information stowage allows the identification of the main port of call from where the ships left with their load of amphorae in fact the stowage material was used to balance the ships and was probably not removed during unloading whereas the ballast can give information on the places where the ships unloaded but it is important to underline that the stone ballast data do not allow positive identification of the route and of the provenance of each ship because the ballast was loaded in the ports of call frequently after discharge by other ships therefore the type of stone ballast very heterogeneous and of different origins then it is only possible to hypothesize short trade routes along the tyrrhenia area touching liguria tuscany elba and giglio as far as latium possibly ponza island campania and the calabrian tyrrhenian coast and probably as far as sicily table a summary of the load of each ship and the provenance of the rock materials acknowledgements our hearts and gloria vaggelli for allowing access to microprobe facilities and elena boari and chiara petrone for helping in the measurement of some trace element data we also thank claudio amico and an anonymous referee for thoughtful peer reviews that greatly improved the original manuscript associations and ideologies in the locations of urban craft production at harappa pakistan miller university of toronto abstract a number of factors can affect spatial associations among production areas for different crafts surprisingly survey and excavation of craft production areas from the harappan phase at the indus urban site of harappa have revealed no evidence that production locations were related to control by nonproducers instead the distributional groupings of craft production areas were at least partially related to manufacturing processes the three craft categories were extractive reductive crafts such as lithic and shell working pyrotechnologically transformative crafts such as metal and pottery production and bridging crafts like talc steatite and faience production that have both reductive and high heating stages the patterns of association may relate to knowledge relationships between the producers or to requirements of manufacturing other factors in production location may have of what constituted distinct crafts the value of the goods produced and the likely consumers a further factor hinted at by the location of production areas on the various mounds of harappa may have been indus ideological beliefs about civic structure and the proper placement of manufacturing within city centers archaeologists have had considerable success in using the locations of craft working areas as a source of information about control of craft production by buildings likely reflect control of production by elites or by the ruling political power production locations widely dispersed across a settlement or landscape particularly if composed of small scale production are usually seen as evidence for independent producers not controlled by social or political powers of course many exceptions and refinements to this correlation between concentration location and control of production have been discussed in the literature costin cautions us again that we must refer to attached and independent situations of production not attached and independent producers since individual producers can work in both situations a point that has been emphasized in in india by bhan kenoyer and vidale and the team led by roux however the examination of this relationship the relationship between location and control of production by nonproducers is still the main use of location of production by archaeologists within the indus as elsewhere can be applied to many other questions about craft production besides control of production by nonproducers for example i employ large scale locational data from the indus urban site of harappa to address two quite different social and ideological topics that are central to this collection of essays first i examine the spatial associations between different crafts looking for possible relationships between different crafts and craftspeople as part of this process i discuss of grouping crafts according to their technological processes second i discuss possible ideological aspects of the location of production areas as part of harappan phase conceptions of civic structure throughout i have provided abundant citations to give readers access to the widely scattered literature on indus civilization craft production my focal point in this examination of production location is the craftspeople who worked in these locations the producers themselves i would know more about the relationships between craftspeople as well as their relations with consumers managers and other nonproducers i have focused on crafts in the urban cores of the indus civilization not only because these working areas were the most likely to have been controlled by elites but also because these craftspeople were the most likely to be in frequent contact with other producers as per costin s concentration of production category in addition i am interested fit into the indus peoples use of the physical space within the dense city cores as a clue to the social and ideational space occupied by craft production and craft producers all of this information would be helpful in understanding how production of the harappan phase cultural style was maintained encouraged or regimented across this large area and long time period background and data sources the harappan phase of the indus valley tradition was
christmas and these entities contribute to the concept of christmas spirit referred to as a global attitude furthermore combined perceived meanings and judgment statements to form an attitude toward family cars and sunglasses as consumption objects specifically attitudes center on an object and when attitudes toward that object are strong consistent and based then it is convenient to classify advertisements products and brands as consumption objects furthermore if feelings and semantic judgments relate to both television advertisements and brands as consumption objects then it is conceivable that people would hold similar feelings about other consumption objects such attending church services and other occasions such as easter holidays or christmas relationships between feelings judgments and consumption objects christmas spirit is an attitude the argument follows that behaviors associated with celebrations around christmas result from cognitive appraisals and feeling states the observations of belk suggest that people become suffused with a christmas spirit which we avowedly regret cannot last utilitarianism the literature and the popular press openly refer to the christmas spirit as feeling good and happy and in the context of this study christmas spirit is reasoned to be a combination of bonhomie dejected and gay abandon feelings together with those evaluations of the christmas ritualist and shopper activities therefore christmas spirit is defined as an attitude toward christmas edell and burke described toward advertisements the adaptation of these three factors to a christmas setting represents the feelings component of the christmas spirit concept since feelings and affective judgments are intertwined the traditional christmas loverstyle evaluations of laroche et al are the affective judgment input into the concept of christmas spirit gathered from the respondents via a self administered survey method the focus of the study is on parents the sample frame is described as a parent with at least one child between the ages of three and eight years and this age span has been designated in previous parent child sample the literature features a number of studies as sources for respondents in parent child research instructions for completion of questionnaires need to be short and precise to avoid confusion but succinct enough to describe the cognitive mindset that respondents are encouraged to be in when responding to each component of the questionnaire a set of instructions about christmas how do you feel about christmas overall please respond to these following statements the item statements came from two studies the first concerns the power of feelings and the other draws from in store information search strategies for the purchase of christmas gifts negative or warm feelings that accrue toward the christmas period christmas makes me feel happy is an expression of personal feelings because a consumer can feel happy or be happy consequently the structure of the questions relating to the items was within a christmas makes me feel framework such feelings disappointment boredom or irritation these are examples of the feelings items used in the study on the other hand a statement such as christmas is a happy occasion says something about christmas and is an evaluative judgment the traditional christmas lover is a specific measure of affective judgments relating to the tradition of the content validity an alpha reliability of and therefore constitutes a borrowed unmodified measure within the survey instrument procedure during the month of november a survey questionnaire package containing two instruments instructions and a self addressed return envelope was delivered to five participating schools and seven reply paid postage and university sponsorship were made to encourage responses the response rate for the study was at the lower end of expectations there were surveys returned of which individual cases were suitable for analysis and the various return rates are presented in table i anonymity meant follow ups were not possible and the factor analyzed through a principal components oblimin rotation extraction since various designations of feelings should be related and the use of a non orthogonal rotation means simplification of the pattern matrix and extraction of factors that are correlated with the each other exploratory factor analysis is appropriate to theory building the reliability of measures confirmatory factor analysis is normally used in the advanced stages of the research process to evaluate the extent to which a data set confirms what is theoretically believed to be its underlying structure in essence a factor model is imposed on the data to see how well it explains the data and efa however a cfa concerns validity and therefore simplifies refines and confirms the basic model efa and cfa are often used in tandem this complementary approach is the key process in many studies such as the triadic measures for children s purchase influence socialization and developmental timetables in the united states and japan and development of this christmas spirit measure employed a principal components method to obtain an efa solution followed by a cfa on those results cfa assesses both validity and reliability of a measure and there are a number of indicators and fit indices that are appropriate to assess a cfa because modification indices are an important tool to produce a the overall fit of the model to the data and seeks nonsignificant chi square values measures of the specific fit of the model are through the goodness of fit index and the adjusted goodness of fit a gfi greater than is an excellent fit the adjusted goodness of fit is the gfi adjusted for the degrees of freedom each of the bonhomie dejection and ritual factors at the third or minimization of error level is the root mean square error of approximation which has values less than indicate a close fit and this is the case for the three factors results per cent between and years and the older parents constituted per cent of the respondents the household weekly income ranged from a minimum of up to per week where per cent of the sample had a combined income up to per week per cent reported an income between and and per cent earned in excess
an effective section whose ultimate moment is calculated as the yield moment of the effective section the plastic which for i sections in minor axis bending may be assumed to have a maximum strain of three times the yield strain at the ultimate condition the ultimate moment may be calculated from the sum of the moments of the stress blocks about the neutral axis of the effective section the design method for i sections in minor axis bending may thus be represented by eqs and in slightly conservatively to the i section test data in fig the calculated capacities are tabulated in table and are on average an example calculation is shown in appendix a eqs represent a higher tier approach which may be applied to i sections in minor axis bending producing less conservative results than the general effective width method eccentricity to the supported edge given by where is given by eqs and the resulting effective section is shown in fig and for all section geometries the capacity may be calculated using cy in accordance with or may be used as a higher tier approach for i sections in minor axis bending producing less conservative results than the general effective width method alternatively the general plastic effective width method of bambach and rasmussen may be used as an annex in eurocode for calculating effective widths of flange outstands under stress gradients and ultimate capacities of sections in line with the eurocode the general method is shown to compare well with i sections and channel sections in minor axis bending in and conclusions capacities of slender i sections in minor axis bending have been compared with those calculated from the current international steel specifications and have been shown to be unduly conservative due to their inability to capture the been presented including plastic effective width methods and yield line mechanism analyses design proposals for hot rolled and cold formed international specifications have been presented and shown to compare well with the experimental data the plastic effective width method derived by bambach and rasmussen is shown to be applicable as a general design tool for both the hot rolled management of fluid mud in estuaries bays and lakes present state of understanding on character and behavior william mcanally carl douglas earl parmeshwar hugo alexandru and allen asce task committee on management of fluid mud it constitutes a significant management problem in rivers lakes estuaries and shelves by impeding navigation reducing water quality and damaging equipment fluid mud accumulations have been observed in numerous locations worldwide including savannah harbor us the severn estuary and the amazon river delta brazil this paper describes the present state of knowledge on fluid mud characteristics processes and modeling fluid mud consists of water clay sized particles and and organic material and displays a variety of rheological behaviors ranging from elastic to pseudo plastic it forms by three principle mechanisms the rate of sediment aggregation and settling into the near bottom layer exceeds the dewatering rate of the suspension soft sediment beds fluidized by wave agitation and convergence of horizontally advected suspensions once formed fluid mud is transported vertically by entrainment and horizontally by shear flows gravity and streaming and streaming if not resuspended it slowly consolidates to form bed material quantitative relationships have been formulated for key fluid mud formation and movement mechanisms but they rely on empirical coefficients that are often siteor situation specific and are not generally transferable research to define general relationships is needed introduction of sediment grains and flocs but which has not formed an interconnected matrix of bonds strong enough to eliminate the potential for mobility fluid mud is often associated with a lutocline a sudden change in sediment concentration with depth and typically forms in near bottom layers in lakes and estuaries but can occur in any water body with sufficient fine sediment supply and periods of crame de vase fluid mud typically exhibits concentrations of tens to hundreds of grams per liter and bulk densities between and kg site specific definitions usually kg for an upper bulk density limit have been posed based on navigation and or dredging management concerns fluid mud can flow down bottom slopes as a density current or horizontally as streaming under current or wave the channels of europoort in the netherlands and savannah harbor and san francisco bay in the united states however it now appears to be a common perhaps even ubiquitous feature of water bodies laden with fine grained sediment it has been detected in at least thin layers in a number of locations including inland waterways eg haydel and mcanally fig shows the sediment plume on an inland waterway as a tow resuspends term mud is commonly used to describe a mixture of fine grained mineral sediments and organic material the composition of mud and fluid mud is further described in a following section impacts of fluid mud fluid mud in thin layers as an intermediate stage in deposition before the layer consolidates to form bed material or bed erosion by liquefaction before entrainment occurs appears to be a can represent a critical management problem as it buries benthic communities impedes navigation and contributes to eutrophication for example in some ports and channels fluid mud accumulates so rapidly that it exceeds the capacity of available dredges to keep the channel clear as has happened in savannah harbor united states cth europoort the netherlands parker and kirby san francisco in the st lucia estuary fla and elsewhere are believed to be responsible for severe water quality degradation sfwmd these examples illustrate that management of fluid mud is a matter of considerable and at times critical interest in hydraulic and environmental engineering practice the need to understand the generation transport and deposition of fluid mud in regard to others with increasing urbanization and use of watercourses the role of fluid mud in nutrient dynamics and contaminant transport requires far greater understanding the way in which high concentration mud moves and across the
that his use of the clef in this chorus merely reflects the choice of clef in his source if the evidence for scoring alterations in the vocal parts is lacking indications that to all the pleasures and the yorkshire feast song and there is no reason to suppose that he would have adopted a different approach to purcell s ode all the choruses presented with parts for violin i violin ii and viola in lcm were written by purcell for accompaniment by continuo only so it is highly likely that pindar also added the string parts to the chorus version of the day that such a blessing gave and that purcell intended it for continuo alone since the string parts pindar provides for this chorus exactly duplicate those occurring above the previous bass which in any case largely double the vocal lines though with much smoother crossing between parts than pindar is able to produce the task would have been straightforward pindar s tendency to leave solo and ensemble movements unaltered means that it is much more likely that he added strings to the chorus than to also noted purcell s fondness for string accompaniment above bass solos in his odes from there are examples in eight of his ten subsequent which obviously increases the probability that his original solo version of the day that such a blessing included strings unfortunately none of purcell s positively attributed bass solos in the later odes is followed by a chorus based on the same material so it is not possible to ascertain the likelihood that he juxtaposed a solo movement including obbligato strings with a chorus accompanied only by in the absence of any positive evidence relating to purcell s scoring habits the consistency of pindar s additions to the choruses in lcm must be taken as strong evidence that the notated string parts for this chorus are not original pindar s given scoring for the choruses come ye sons of art and thus nature comprising two trumpets two oboes strings and in the case of the final chorus timpani since these are the largest forces used in the ode and therefore determine the maximum number of players required it is probably most useful to consider possible additions to their scoring together the instrumentation given by pindar precludes the possibility that either chorus originally had accompaniment by continuo only since we know he adds only strings bearing in mind pindar s habits as described in categories and we can therefore be confident that the string parts in these choruses were original to purcell although i will argue below that minor alterations have been made in both movements this interpretation strengthens the reading of the instrumental introduction to come ye sons of art given above since pindar could have taken the string phrases he added to that from pre existing material by purcell in this the positioning of the oboe parts in the two choruses allows us to make some confident assertions about their authenticity i noted in section above that where pindar adds a pair of oboes in purcell s choruses he always places the oboe parts below the strings whereas he follows purcell s own practice of writing them above the strings where they are original as table demonstrates the oboe parts notated in com come ye sons of art occur below the strings whereas those in thus nature rejoicing are above so the implication is that only those in the final chorus were indicated by purcell such an interpretation is supported by the fact that in come ye sons of art the oboe parts which normally double first and second violins follow the voices where the violins have independent writing on the repeat of tune all your instruments exactly as in pindar s other added in thus nature rejoicing however they continue to double the strings apart from one very obvious pindaric alteration at a cadence on the repeat of the rondo refrain in fact it is highly likely that purcell originally notated the first oboe and first violin on the same stave and the second oboe and second violin together in this movement a would probably have avoided this pitch in a separately notated part and indeed does not use it in his independent oboe parts in other odes it is easy to see how it might have been included in a part primarily designed for violins it has been suggested mainly on the basis of evidence from the theater music that oboes may habitually have been employed doubling strings in as come ye sons of art without primarily independent trumpet but pindar s interpretation of his source for this ode which clearly implies that purcell indicated violin and hautboy on each of the string staves in the final movement but did not do so for the first chorus perhaps suggests that at least in this ode we need to discriminate between movements rather than employing such an overarching rule choruses are the trumpets and it is here that the unreliability of the symphony as an indicator of scoring in the ode as a whole becomes problematical since we cannot be sure that this symphony was original and therefore cannot assume that there was one trumpet part in purcell s opening instrumental material there are several anomalies that defy easy explanation on the one hand purcell includes as least one trumpet in every ode of the except great written for trinity college dublin for a performance with limited resources and love s goddess sure was blind the subdued birthday ode ex the balance of probabilities therefore suggests that come ye sons of art which retains the exuberance of most of the other birthday odes must also have contained at least one trumpet part we can hardly fail to notice moreover that the principal melodic lines of both choruses are constructed in a way that makes them playable on natural trumpet in they both use only triadic tones below d
the employees hold again even in today s economy most individuals choose jobs with at least some mind toward their own interests the largest effect size difference was for importance high turnover was associated with lower levels of importance to the degree that a job is part of an employee s self definition or self understanding to the degree that an employee can gain personal validation from a job that employee commits to the job this and the above mentioned findings have implications for the selection of intervention techniques take them seriously inefficacious employees for example are not merely dissatisfied they do not persist do not exert enough effort and generally are less likely to remain on the job in other words there are real consequences that ensue from employee motivation so what is an employer to do each of the major predictor variableswill be discussedwith recommendations for corrective action whether their perceptions are accurate or not employees who perceive be unfair and or unreliable will withdraw retreat protest and possibly quit support is the perception that the environment is permissive and supportive employees who lack a positive sense of support need evidence that the system is there to help them be effective if in fact the employee s negative perceptions are correct then management needs to adjust the system to ensure that employees are receiving the kind of support and assistance employees perceptions are incorrect management needs to work with the employee to discover where the gaps in perception and reality are until the gaps are resolved employees will leave the job either mentally or physically regarding task value the easiest of the three to manipulate is utility it is almost impossible to argue or command someone into accepting a task as being self defining it is easier but still not easy to make a task interesting can do much to provide evidence that task engagement is useful or worth the employee s while targeted incentives are an excellent method for building utility value for work of even a mundane sort allowing individual choice regarding tasks often heightens interest when tasks are being avoided or devalued often a carefully targeted incentive while it is not possible for a manager to anticipate every stimulus that might anger frighten or disgust an employee the general work environment ought to be emotionally satisfying when negative emotions do arise it is useless to argue against them emotions are biological responses to perceived stimuli they cannot be wrong the perception of the cause might be erroneous but the emotion itself is not subject to such analysis when negative emotions take corrective steps fortunately emotions do not last very long but regardless of how long they do last a wise manager should allow a little pressure release time once an emotionally distracted employee has calmed down somewhat they are in a much better position to discuss and reason the conversation ought to be on the perceived cause if the employee s perceptions are correct then action needs to be taken to remedy the situation and an apology offered if the employee s perceptions are incorrect then the correct information needs to be offered along with appropriate assurances they cannot perform tasks tend to avoid those tasks and persons associated with those tasks it is generally agreed upon by efficacy researchers that the only way to build efficacy is to reduce the size and or complexity of the assigned task this does not mean assigning only the most menial tasks to individuals who think they re too incompetent to handle the really important jobs it means that a large complex task needs to be broken down into smaller more manageable chunks so the inefficacious employee can perceive himself capable relative to what is presently before him for example instead of giving an employee one month to balance the company s books the manager could instead assign sections of the task each week the outcome would be identical a complete balancing of all books in one month s time but the quality of the results if management wants employees to choose tasks persist at performing them in the face of difficulties and exert effort in seeing things through they will have to take steps to ensure that their employees believe they can do the task are convinced that they are supported in their efforts are not emotionally distracted and have some level of value for engaging in task performance the argues that when motivation levels fall there are definite negative effects on employee turnover and on other business outcomes hospitality practitioners play an important overall role in the motivation level in their organizations by creating supportive environments and situations there are components of motivation that are internal to the employee but creating a positive work environment through the use of the through choice persistence and effort of employees future directions more research needs to be done in order to determine if other business performance measures such as the quality of service provided to guests speed of service financial performance measures cost controls etc are impacted by motivation in a similar way as turnover is it would also be important for future research to determine if various other segments of the hospitality or service the same way regarding motivation and turnover this research can help practitioners formulate ideas for how to improve the motivation level in their organization along with improving the turnover rate in order to compete in the current economy it is important for organizations to get the most production in a positive way from their employees managers motivation levels can be changed and enhanced and organizations need to be able to objectively measure the motivation in their units and work to provide a better environment in order to help enhance motivation and thus enhance the business performance of the location and careers have been widely documented although the development of the tourism industry can create new employment opportunities it is often criticized for providing primarily
influence of test initial conditions on sample compressibility can be seen when granular and global compression indices of set are smaller than the ones of set this is due to the greater initial void ratios of the samples of set compression indices of set increase linearly with fines behavior although this trend may be attributed to the initial conditions such a comment is questionable for the time being since there are relatively few data points when fig is inspected both cc and cc s follow a nonlinear increment trend with fines content compression behavior of kaolinite sand mixtures fines content zone which is drawn according to fct values at the beginning and at the end of the pressure range used in the calculation of compression parameters through zone coarser grain matrix can be assumed to have almost a continuous framework with grain to grain contacts and fines are mostly located in the intergranular voids hence a less compressive behavior is observed that formation of skeletal contacts among the nonclay matrix might reduce the settlement of clay sand mixtures due to the increasing frictional resistance with an increase in fines content coarser grain matrix is arranged in a looser state and the number of grain contacts decrease initiating from the beginning of transition zone sand grain contacts start to diminish because of the infilling kaolinite therefore especially for set starting with the transition zone with further increase in fines content sand grains become more dispersed so that there exist almost no grain contacts between them at this stage compressibility of the soil continues to increase and this compressibility is expected to be mainly controlled by the finer grain matrix since the increases with an increase in fines content reaching to a maximum at the end of zone direct shear test results and strength characteristics the interaction between finer and coarser grain matrices should also affect the overall strength behavior in order to inspect this effect and whether there is a relation with the oedometer findings a series of direct is an inexpensive and a relatively practical test moreover it may be used as an effective tool for geotechnical design and the circular shear box most closely simulates the conditions that are maintained in the oedometer cell the mixtures were consolidated under three different effective stress values of kpa kpa the direct shear apparatus fig shows the variation of maximum shear stresses with fines content it is observed in the figure that the shear strength of mixtures does not change significantly up to a particular fines content value and then decreases the dashed lines in fig denote the transition fines content values obtained from oedometer tests that is the infilling kaolinite at intergranular voids separates the coarser grains and diminishes their contact points since there are no or very few mechanism therefore one can observe a noticeable decrease in shear strength when the fines content of mixtures exceeds fct in addition to this for samples with high fines content the strength loss might be influenced by combined effects of arrangement of the coarser grain matrix and drainage conditions as the normal stress rises the noticeable decrement results obtained from the oedometer tests with the indication that transition of state occurs at progressively higher fines content as effective stress increases in the literature it was previously mentioned that the theoretical boundary between a sand controlled and a clay controlled mixture is represented by the minimum explanation of strength alteration for binary granular mixtures of sand and gravel however such an approach may not be always valid minimum porosity should occur at minimum void ratio of the mixtures considering that porosity is a function of void ratio when fig is considered it can be seen that void ratio continues to decrease with increasing fines content at fines contents between of stress these values are different and higher than the transition fines content values given in table this study points out that unlike previously stated opinions global void ratio may reach its experimental minimum value even after es becomes higher than emax a state where coarser grains are already separated and control of soil behavior with various other factors such as minerology of the mixture and chemical state of the clay mineral plasticity characteristics pore fluid and gradation of the coarse material which deserve further study in order to better develop a of clayey sands can be examined with the help of submatrices forming them the effectiveness of coarser grain matrix on compressional behavior can be determined with oedometer tests by utilizing intergranular void ratio rather than global void ratio the fines content value at which intergranular void transition fines content fct transition fines content is not unique even for reconstituted samples of same minerals but should be expected to depend mainly on stress conditions and initial conditions for a given initial condition and a predetermined stress one dimensional compression content for soils containing fines greater than fct on the other hand the compression behavior is controlled by the finer grain matrix it is also shown that fct is independent of the experimental minimum void ratio granular compression index can be used as an indicative parameter to assess the role of coarser grain matrix on overall compression behavior transition fines content and the shear strength of mixtures exceeding a transition fines content value for a given stress condition the shear strength of mixtures tend to decrease the fct values determined are generally in good agreement with the previously published findings related with the alteration of shear strength however the results of this to investigate transition fines content with its effects on one dimensional compression behavior of sandy soils and its reflections on shear strength the concept of transition fines content has been shown to be dependent on initial conditions of the test specimen and consolidation stress it can be useful in various geotechnical and geoenvironmental engineering finer or coarser grain matrix would control the overall engineering behavior authors believe that further macro and microfabric studies such as
magnetic field at larmor frequencies of a few hundred mhz for protons a limited chemical shift resolution makes it possible to detect rdcs specifically for the resolved resonances even in static spectra olefinic proton methine resonance in natural rubber when compared to the rdcs detected at the signal positions the effect can be inspected for the resolved hahn echo data plotted in fig these observations are again in marked contrast to the results of mq experiments which indicate virtually identical dres the explanation is as follows the methine resonance methyl protons rather than its own kind one monomer unit away apart from the dipolar couplings between ch and the chemical shift separation of ppm amounts to hz at mhz which clearly exceeds the average dipolar coupling of a few hundred hz experienced by the ch group since the homonuclear dipolar and the chemical shift difference to the weak coupling limit by the chemical shift difference this amounts to a factor of for the apparent dipolar coupling in agreement with the observation of the hahn echo decay at high field when the chemical shift difference is effectively removed by either performing experiments at low larmor frequency experiment which we apply in a repetitive fashion at high field for exactly this reason does provide this rapid refocussing as chemical shifts are compensated over a single cycle alternatively cpmg experiments can be performed where of course always the last echo of an incremented train needs to be fourier transformed to note that this result is not much dependent on the pulse spacing in the cpmg trains slight differences arise only for the apparent values of the sol contributions detected at the different resonances and after sdq the resulting two and higher spin antiphase coherences are converted into various mq coherences by the second pulse free dipolar evolution during sdq features the common prefactor of rendering spin pairs are considered the theory discussed in section is fully valid apart from this multiplicative correction in order to improve the long time performance of the two pulse sequence a refocussing pulse needs to be added in the center and the version with the equal phases on the order of khz in this regime the intensity decays almost completely during a single cycle of the baum pines sequence whose minimum duration is around ls under favorable conditions the two pulse segment has been used extensively in many applications of mq spectroscopy by the aachen group they are reviewed in ref and not go into too much detail as to the actual data treatment the fitting procedure and its limitations in this section i therefore present some as yet unpublished results concerning a detailed comparison of the two alternative experiments theoretically as well as two pulse segment the sign of the average hamiltonian of the baum pines sequence eq is easily inverted by a shift of the carrier phase this provides the possibility of assembling a fully dipolar refocussed sum intensity irmq to be used for point by point normalization and removal of relaxation effects this strategy may not be straightforwardly applicable to the multi spin homonuclear dipolar evolution the same effect is also responsible for the well known inability of the solid echo to refocus multiple dipolar couplings the baum pines experiment in turn can in that sense be compared to a magic sandwich echo which does provide full dipolar time reversal fig shows build up data based on spin simulations details the lines are for the baum pines mq experiment where it is seen that the dq build up curve reaches the expected intensity plateau at the full magnetization in the absence of motion idq therefore equals indq and irmq is always unity to the contrary dephasing a normalization may nevertheless be attempted and it is seen that apart from oscillations arising from the limited number of simulated spins indq also approaches as expected from the higher prefactor of free dipolar evolution this curves rises faster than idq of the baum pines sequence and their initial parts coincide once the time axis is scaled of irmq from the baum pines experiment is mainly caused by molecular dynamics while for the two pulse segment a strong additional dephasing is apparent this means that information about dynamic timescales cannot straightforwardly be extracted from the latter experiment consequently demco and coworkers have introduced the analysis of the fully shift and dipolar refocussed decay their theory provides a basis for the more reliable joint analysis of intensity build up and decay in the baum pines mq experiment discussed in section the build up of indq of the two pulse segment is delayed at intermediate times in accordance with dephasing effects that cannot be normalized away completely this means that single parameter fits using eq with the correct yet a bias towards large values must be expected for networks with broader distributions of residual couplings as is however apparent from the observation of an intensity plateau at indq the arguments concerning an equal intensity distribution among and higher order coherences over idq and iref remain valid whereby the analysis of fraction this aspect is crucial because when idq is to be fitted without point by point normalization its intensity scale must be adjusted to network components only otherwise an uncontrolled average over network chains and non coupled sol is obtained initial build up data from the two pulse segment is commonly fitted to the first parabolic term relaxation and dephasing effects however no information about the fitting limit is given in refs an increased validity range can be expected from a damped version of eq where the first term on the right hand side then properly describes the intensity plateau note that the analogous eq in ref is incorrect by a prefactor of for the residual couplings from the two pulse segment surpass the values from the baum pines experiment by indeed yields decreased values of and hz for at the two temperatures this systematic error is due to
composite hedonic variable in particular we use the log of the value per square foot reported by ncreif two quarters prior to the transaction sale this was found to be necessary to ensure that the explanatory variable is independent of the dependent as noted in theory and methodology the result is that the time dummy coefficients in the model represent the difference each period between the appraisals and the transaction the price model specification includes some additional hedonic type explanatory variables besides the appraised value it includes metropolitan area dummy variables also included are sub categories within the four major property types apartment office industrial and retail keep in mind that in principle there is no reason why additional property specific location and property characteristic variables beyond the composite hedonic variable labeled ait cannot be incorporated into the hedonic price model going back to the underlying reservation price models in eqs and such additional hedonic variables would be hedonic vector that are not adequately captured in the composite hedonic variable ait the annual model results are presented at the specification is the same as for the quarterly model presented in appendix except that it has annual not quarterly time dummies the annual results are corrected for transaction sample selection bias using the the specification of the stage probit selection model and a constant term while the annual selection model performs well as a model of property sales probability the selection bias indicator variable lambda is not significantly different from zero indeed when we compare the representative property index based on the selection corrected price model with a similar representative property index based on the price model without sample selection bias correction the two indices are almost identical thus in contrast to findings in the previous literature on commercial property transactions based indices sample selection bias does not appear to be an issue with our annual model on the other hand the probit model contains some interesting results regarding sales characteristics in the ncreif database the strongly significant and negative coefficients on both value sf and the square foot variables suggests that not only do larger properties sell less frequently but also higher quality properties the next step in transaction price index development is to construct a longitudinal price index based on the hedonic price model here we use the representative property method defined in eq the representative property of all the properties in the ncreif data base in that year this computation is carried out for every year reflecting the changing composition of the ncreif member holdings this makes our indexes with the income component of returns more accurate because the method we are using to determine income returns is based on the ncreif computation of income returns we use these mean characteristics in our pricing model to determine the variable liquidity valuation and thus the variable liquidity returns to determine the apt log lagged appraised value composite hedonic variable for the representative property we start out with the average appraised value per square foot of all properties in the first year of our index and grow this value at the npi equal weighted cash flow based capital returns value level index can then be constructed by compounding the annual appreciation returns starting from an arbitrary initial value this can be compared to the npi appreciation value index over the same the transaction based index is slightly more volatile than the npi and appears to slightly lead the npi in time with major turning points occurring to years earlier it is important to note that the annual frequency index does not show any of random estimation error noise the index has low annual return volatility reasonable first order autocorrelation in the returns and a relatively smooth appearance in levels all of these are characteristics of an absence of noise the next step in creating the tbi is to move from the annual frequency model to quarterly frequency this step of course results in a reduction by a factor of four in the average number of sales transaction observations per period to less than to less than transactions on average per quarter this results in a problem of estimation error noise in the index this gives the quarterly index a spiky appearance especially during the earlier history when there were fewer transaction observations to address the noise problem at the quarterly frequency we employ an extension of the bayesian noise filtering technique developed by goetzmann gatzlaff and geltner and geltner and goetzmann this the use of a ridge regression as a method of moments estimator the estimator minimizes the squared errors of the predicted values subject to moment restrictions in the results the moment restrictions characterizing the return time series statistics of the resulting estimated index are based on a priori information about the nature of the results that should obtain in the present case the moment restrictions are employed as a noise filter the ridge noise in the estimated index without inducing a temporal lag in the index returns in the present context the moment restrictions are defined to produce a quarterly index whose annual end of year return time series characteristics approach those of the manifestly noise free annual index which was estimated at the annual frequency classically without the bayesian filter the mechanics of applying the ridge procedure are described in appendix a deciding when the moment restrictions are met the first two criteria are quantitative moment comparisons between the quarterly index and the index estimated at the annual frequency first we compare the annual volatility of the quarterly index to that of the annual index second we compare the annual first order autocorrelation of the two indices our third criterion we look at the resulting annualized quarterly index and compare it visually to the annual index we select the lowest value of for which all three of these criteria show a close similarity between the annualized quarterly index and
due to the lack of a significant improvement with the previous cases it was clear to them a plan for short term climate change they committed to increase communication by holding monthly all employee meetings sharing quarterly reviews on performance and using cross functional strategy review sessions they implemented mandatory skip level meetings to allow more direct interaction between senior managers and all levels invited and feedback and recognition was required to be immediate a new monthly recognition and rewards programme was launched across the division for both managers and employees that was based on peer nomination at a time when making the division profitable was the highest priority the management all employees another category of initiatives included providing a clear and compelling mission strategy and values for the division the management team formed employee review teams to challenge and craft the statements in the hope of encouraging more ownership and involvement in the overall strategic direction to be taken they modified rules regarding the dress code adapted more flexible working hours and allowed plants and flowers in the workplace they scheduled parties and social events and fostered open debate and feedback without repercussions managers who could not follow the new behavioral norms were coached and some flow of the business so they did extensive work on detailing the definition of roles and process ownership their stated aim was to create an unstoppable bubble of excellence in north america and to challenge the tyranny of the average in september the leadership team wanted feedback on how they were doing in are included in table again we computed one way analyses of variance on the means of the dimensions as well as cronbach s alpha to assess internal consistency the four dimensions they targeted improved significantly in addition two additional dimensions the more positive direction to make the necessary changes and improvements leaders targeted key dimensions in each and themes in response to what is helping or hindering creativity and what specific actions need to be taken to improve the situation this amount of information could overwhelm an already overburdened management team the teams in these cases certainly paid attention to all the data but they were able to take advantage on a selected number of high priority dimensions and actions that helped them achieve results and improve the climate leaders demonstrated follow through each of these cases demonstrated the value of taking actions over time rather than using the soq as a report card or a short executive intellectual exercise the management teams understood the organization rather than thinking that climate creation was a single event they knew that this kind of work was a process or journey and they stayed the course in each of the cases leaders maintained the focus on their climate improvement efforts even when their teams were busy with other important day to day tasks and issues maintaining resources although the ultimate value of any climate assessment must be internally relevant to the organization each of these organizations saw value in using an external assessment that was normative and having the results presented and interpreted by an objective outsider each of the senior leaders and members of results having access to clear benchmarks and often results from other organizations in similar industries helped the management teams and employees understand the importance and value of the climate creation efforts our experience has shown that it is helpful to work with a qualified user of the soq which they scored below the more productive norm what they missed was the most significant difference that they were scoring well above an appropriate score for debate the heart of their need for improvement turned out to be the productive avoidance created by too many diverse opinions and no clear work having a qualified user apply the results of the soq to help a management team understand and then act on their results provide a more objective perspective and in each of these cases was a factor in their success limitations there are numerous limitations to using a case study approach to derive suggestions for the soq support the insights gleaned from these case studies but they are offered here as preliminary results and should be the subject of further research further only two of these case studies were analysed quantitatively for significance levels and internal consistency the insights gleaned from these examples may not be generalizable help leaders transform their organizations but we did not have direct control over all of the events and activities within the organizations we examined factors other than those we observed could have had influence over the changes in the climate within these organizations if anything this limitation argues for taking a systemic approach the results and suggestions must be considered exploratory and preliminary there is much more research that needs to be accomplished in order to provide more definitive answers to our central question conclusions improve the situation rather than focus on only one strategy it may be helpful to have a number at your disposal the key is to examine the situation this examination can be done from a cultural perspective and from the point of view of values such as those surrounding the use of power dealing with uncertainty the tension between be done through the lens of climate particularly when the assessment incorporates multiple methods from this examination of the culture and climate a better decision regarding the use of any particular strategy can be made knowing more about the situation will help leaders decide how quickly they need to take action the necessary level of preplanning and the degree of involvement from others the experiences outlined above indicate that the soq helps leaders and managers understand the readiness willingness and ability to transform their organizations the other relevant factors and points out unique ingredients within the situation that can really make a difference as a result the soq offers an excellent starting point to help leaders understand the situational outlook surrounding the
typically applied at end diastole displacement is then accrued as a phase shift during the time between position encoding and readout resulting in a time series of images with phase proportional to displacement cine dense allows for displacement encoding in any direction and or orthogonally encoded directions are the corresponding space be described by for a cine dense acquisition encoded in the direction the transverse magnetization after recalling the longitudinal magnetization is given by where is the longitudinal magnetization is the thermal equilibrium value of the longitudinal magnetization is the spin lattice relaxation time constant is the flip angle position encoding and the current time is the displacement encoding frequency the parameter describes the phase sensitivity to displacement the three terms of appear as three distinct echoes in space and are named the stimulated echo complex conjugate echo and gradient echo of relaxed magnetization these echoes are centered in space at and to the tissue displacement the stimulated echo has an inherently low snr as is evident in the factor in the other two echoes produce undesirable tag like artifacts and can be suppressed using a variety of techniques complimentary spatial modulation of magnetization is used here to suppress the gradient echo of relaxed magnetization as well as to improve the the complex conjugate echo is typically suppressed by using a value of that is large enough to ensure that the spatial frequency of this echo is greater than those detected during data sampling a series of reference images are acquired to compensate for phase shifts caused by background magnetic field inhomogeneities using cine dense for measuring displacement mm spatial resolution snr decays with time because of the dependence of the stimulated echo as well as artifacts arising due to growth of the gradient echo of relaxed magnetization as a result cine dense can reliably capture about two thirds of the cardiac cycle fig depicts typical features in a magnitude reconstructed short axis dense image of the heart fig shows displacement is encoded in a vertical direction and fig shows the corresponding phase reconstructed images where the phase of each pixel is proportional to the displacement of each pixel and where white represents radians and black represents radians since only the final phase accrual of the spins is measured mri phase is inherently confined to the range clock in the end systolic phase image in fig using manually defined lv contours and a variation of itoh s one dimensional phase unwrapping method the unwrapped images in fig are obtained this phase unwrapping method is not suited to automation as it is very sensitive to noise and it has to be initiated on a pixel with known absolute phase to displacement in the direction by the displacement encoding frequency vector combination of these unwrapped phase images with a corresponding set encoded in the direction yield the two dimensional displacement fields shown in fig these displacement fields lend themselves well to the derivation of lagrangian strain which can be computed by means of isoparametric formulation with quadrilateral elements this method of quantifying strain which uses regions of four neighboring displacement vectors phase unwrapping it is possible to set to be small enough to ensure that no phase wrapping occurs for physiological limits of cardiac motion although lowering the value of increases the snr it also has an associated decrease in sensitivity to displacement experience has shown that practical values of makes phase its roots in synthetic aperture radar and optics but has also found a number of applications in mri these include magnetic field mapping chemical shift mapping and phase contrast velocity encoding two dimensional phase unwrapping has been used previously for processing dense images this paper provides the first reported spatiotemporal phase where the operator is the congruence modulus this can also be represented as where is an integer chosen so that the phase unwrapping problem involves solving for each pixel phase unwrapping can be done along a particular path by integrating the differences of the locally unwrapped phases this is equivalent to integrating the phase gradient and is embodied in the line to lie between and to avoid aliasing and hence ensure correct unwrapping this unwrapping process can be implemented in two dimensions by using a region growing algorithm although phase unwrapping is conceptually straightforward it can in practice be difficult to implement errors introduced due to image noise are inclined to propagate with devastating results in cine dense images few pixels span the myocardial walls there are two main streams of phase unwrapping path following and minimum norm methods path following methods involve unwrapping the phase along a path that depends on some measure of phase consistency minimum norm methods apply a more global approach and seek to minimize the integral of the differences in an norm sense typically more robust than path following methods but are also more computationally expensive in the interest of efficiently unwrapping through time only the path following methods were investigated path following methods lend themselves well to cardiac images where the myocardium is a continuum and generally provides a reliable path of integration placing barriers known as branch cuts in such a manner that phase unwrapping is path independent if it does not cross a branch cut goldstein s method is ill suited to dense data since only a few pixels span the width of the myocardium making it likely that branch cuts will be placed transmurally and thus preventing portions of the myocardium from being phase unwrapped a more suitable branch a least squares sense unfortunately it is not straightforward to extend this latter branch cut algorithm to three dimensions which is necessitated by the cine dense application quality guided path following the quality guided path following phase unwrapping method in which a measure of phase quality is used to guide the path of unwrapping was chosen for this application a good of the partial derivatives in the and directions this is given by where for each sum the indexes range over
larger than a surface plasmons behave like the surface plasmon of a semi infinite system surface plasmon linewidth at jellium surfaces the actual self consistent surface response function img reduces in the long wavelength limit to equation so that long wavelength surface plasmons are expected to be infinitely long lived excitations at finite wave vectors however surface plasmons are damped and self consistent rpa calculations of the full width at half maximum s of the surface loss function img also shown in this figure are the corresponding linewidths that have been reported in from experimental electron energy loss spectra at different scattering angles this figure clearly shows that at real surfaces the surfaceplasmon peak is considerably wider than predicted by self consistent rpa jellium calculations especially at low wave vectors this additional broadening should be expected to be mainly caused by the presence of short range many body xc effects and interband transitions but also by scattering from defects and phonons many body xc effects on the surface plasmon linewidth of mg and al were incorporated in the framework of tddft with the use of the nonlocal momentum dependent static xc local field factor of equation these tddft calculations have been plotted in figure by solid lines with circles a comparison of these results with the corresponding rpa calculations shows that short range xc effects tend to increase the finite surface plasmon linewidth bringing the jellium calculations into nice agreement with the experiment at the largest values of nevertheless jellium calculations cannot possibly the measured surface plasmon linewidth at small which deviates from zero even at in the long wavelength limit surface plasmons are known to be dictated by bulk properties through a long wavelength bulk dielectric function as in equation hence the experimental surface plasmon widths s at should be approximately described by using in equation the measured bulk dielectric function table exhibits the relative widths s ss derived in this this way together with available surfaceloss measurements at since silver and mercury have partially occupied d bands a jellium model like the one leading to equation is not in principle appropriate to describe these surfaces however table shows that the surface plasmon width of these solid surfaces is very well described by introducing the measured bulk dielectric function into into equation nevertheless the surface plasmon widths of simple metals like and al with no d electrons are considerably larger than predicted in this simple this shows that an understanding of surface plasmon broadening mechanisms requires a careful analysis of the actual band structure of the solid approximate treatments of the impact of the band structure on the surface plasmon energy the surface plasmon energy dispersion and linewidth has been reported only in the case of the simple metal prototype surfaces mg and al these calculations will be discussed in section multipole surface plasmons in his attempt to incorporate the smoothly decreasing electron density profile at the surface bennett solved the equations of a simple found that in addition to ritchie s surface plasmon at s ss with a negative energy dispersion at low wave vectors there is an upper surface plasmon at higher energies this is the so called multipole surface plasmon which shows a positive wave vector dispersion even at small the possible existence and properties of multipole surface plasmons was later investigated in the framework of hydrodynamical models for various choices of the electron density profile according to these calculations higher multipole excitations could indeed exist for a sufficiently diffuse surface in addition to the usual surface plasmon at s ss however approximate quantum mechanical rpa calculations gave no evidence for the existence of multipole surface plasmons thereby leading to the speculation that multipole surface plasmons might be an artifact of the hydrodynamic approximation the first experimental sign for the existence of surface modes was established by schwartz and schaich in their theoretical analysis of the photoemission yield spectra that had been reported by levinson et al later on dobson and harris used a dft scheme to describe realistically the electron density response at a jellium surface to conclude that multipole surface plasmons should be expected to exist even for a high density metal such as al surface two years later direct experimental evidence of the existence of multipole surface plasmons was presented in inelastic reflection electron scattering experiments on smooth films of the low density metals na and cs the intensity of these multipole surface plasmons being in agreement with the dft calculations reported later by nazarov and nishigaki the al multipole surface plasmon has been detected only recently by means of angle resolved energy loss spectroscopy figure shows the loss spectra of the al surface as obtained by chiarello et al with an incident electron energy of ev and an incident angle of with respect to the surface normal the loss spectrum obtained in the specular geometry is characterized mainly by a single peak at the conventional surface plasmon energy ev for off specular scattering angles the conventional surface plasmon exhibits a clear energy dispersion and two other features arise in the loss spectra the multipole surface plasmon and the bulk plasmon the loss spectrum obtained at cs which corresponds to is represented again in figure but now together with the background substraction and gaussian fitting procedure reported in the peak at sp corresponds to the excitation of the al bulk plasmon and the multipole surface plasmon and measured energies and linewidths of long wavelength multipole surface plasmons in simple metals are given in table on the whole the ratio sm sp agrees with alda calculations good agreement between alda calculations and experiment is also obtained for the entire dispersion of multipole surface plasmons which is found to be approximately linear and positive this positive dispersion is originated in the fact that the centroid of the induced electron density which at s ss s ss is located outside the jellium edge is shifted into the metal at the multipole resonance frequency sm we also note that multipole surface plasmons have only been observed at wave vectors well
may be recalled that this variable applies to the discretion afforded in the manager s view to the largest occupational group in the establishment which may not be the same as for other employees moreover the variable to be explained here is the average discretion of employees jobs for these reasons the analysis of tdi at the individual level has been preferred to the analysis of tdimp at the establishment level nevertheless it will be reassuring for the main findings if the same or similar relationships are shown at the establishment level and with data from a different informant table presents the estimates of tdimp across establishments i which implies that the excluded instruments are correlated with organizational commitment in other words the equation is identified finally the cragg donald statistic was which implies that the instruments are not weak table shows that discretion is enhanced in establishments with home working arrangements and rises with the proportion of employees working with the employee discretion but in establishments where teams are explicitly said to allow for teams to jointly decide how work is to be done the teams are positively associated with individual discretion as perceived by managers the coefficient for this group is calculated as which is also found to be statistically different from zero in establishments where teams positively enhance discretion in line with the story told by the more optimistic perspective on teamworking the difference between this finding and the neutral finding using the individual level data may be due either to the differing level of analysis or to the differing informants about another distinctive finding from this establishment level analysis is evidence have substantially greater discretion than those in establishments where one or more targets are set the difference is estimated as in the iv estimates which amounts to just under a quarter of one standard deviation in tdimp this finding contrasts with that for the individual level analysis which found only a small and insignificant effect while one cannot be confident about the reasons for this difference in findings one possibility is set targets feel at the same time that they are limiting employees discretion even if the employees do not experience it as any more restrictive than a no target regime turning again to the central hypothesis of this article this establishment level analysis confirms that there is a strong association of organizational commitment is neither agreed nor disagreed with to a state where the manager strongly agrees that the employees are fully committed is associated with a rise in tdimp by which is per cent of the latter s standard deviation across establishments and more than the average difference in discretion associated with moving from an elementary occupation to also confirmed to be broadly positive as implied in the occupational rankings two further robustness checks were carried out first as an alternative to occupation as a measure of skill in the individual level analysis i entered the employees achieved qualification level this analysis showed that after conditioning hitherto in the analysis the level of discretion increases between qualification levels and however discretion is also higher at levels and than it is at levels and this finding reaffirms what the earlier analysis has shown that the relationship between discretion and skill is not necessarily unambiguously positive as is often assumed however the analysis also showed the pattern of other findings was not substantially altered by the inclusion of education rather than occupation in the analysis second in a further estimation the analysis was restricted to the employees who belonged to the log in the establishment this sample restriction has the advantage that variables that were intended to apply to the log would be in principle more accurately measured the disadvantage is that the it is reassuring to confirm that the pattern of findings remains largely unchanged from those obtained with the full sample of employees the central finding of a substantial impact of commitment on discretion is again found with a coefficient of which is not much different from the coefficient estimates shown in table the other conditioning variables follow the same pattern but with one exception for this restricted sample consistent with presence of a just in time production system is negatively associated with discretion and unlike for the full sample this coefficient is statistically significant at the per cent level the estimated coefficient is understanding discretion is the fundamental post fordist trade off between the positive effects of discretion on potential output per employee and the negative effects of greater leeway on work effort this contrasts with the more commonly posed trade off for employers between the benefits of greater work effort from close control and the increasing monitoring costs the post fordist trade off leads to the hypothesis that is highly dependent on workers preferences for supplying effort to the employer using data from the workplace employee relations survey the article finds that as expected task discretion is strongly associated with affective organizational commitment the loyal workers are the ones with greater autonomy at work the article also confirms that task discretion is associated with job skill it and professional jobs have above average discretion however there are some notable exceptions there are quite high skilled jobs that do not have high levels of discretion and some low skilled jobs where there appears to be some considerable autonomy the formal model has suggested an explanation for this ambiguity namely that in some high skilled jobs the costs of lower effort may be high and if in these jobs the benefits of discretion are opt to design jobs with little discretion this is not of course the only possible explanation for exceptions to the traditional association between discretion and skill an alternative explanation is that some traditionally termed low skilled jobs which may require few or no qualifications may nevertheless entail largely non routine activities in such cases it can be difficult for employers to closely specify work tasks the the skills of
pharmaceuticals authorization from thalidomide to the single market the history of pharmaceuticals regulation in europe began in the with the thalidomide catastrophe was widely distributed in germany by the grunenthal company as a highly effective but harmless sleeping pill it was often taken by women who suffered from insomnia during their pregnancy the result was a disaster it turned out that thalidomide was extremely injurious it stopped the growth of their extremities or even worse of their interior organs the newborn babies either died soon after birth or suffered from dangerous deformations that handicapped them for life even if germany was the main country affected by the scandal thalidomide was also distributed by grunenthal or its licensees in other countries where it in the united states successfully prevented the marketing of this medicine in its territory after experiencing the thalidomide scandal many european states followed the american example and established national regulatory regimes for pharmaceuticals pre marketing controls for the authorization of pharmaceuticals were introduced and independent regulatory authorities were set up to fulfil this task the development of european pharmaceuticals followed the first path of institutional development national regulatory authorities were set up in reaction to public pressure from consumers long before a european single market for these products was established parallel to the establishment of national regulatory authorities the eu began to harmonize the legal rules for pharmaceuticals in order to create the placed on the market unless it was authorized by the competent authority of the respective member state ten years later in the requirements for market authorizations were further additionally a so called multi state procedure was according to which the member states should have mutually recognized each others marketing authorizations this mutual recognition was facilitated by the committee for proprietary medicinal products which consisted representatives from the member states authorization bodies and provided scientific but legally non binding opinions on pharmaceuticals all in all the eu tried to establish a single market for pharmaceuticals without endangering the position of the national regulatory authorities this led to an increasing legalization of the regulatory policy area and took a first step towards establishing a european regulatory network for pharmaceuticals and the mutual recognition of member states authorizations proved insufficient to establish a single market for pharmaceuticals the authorization bodies of the member states widely rejected other member states authorizations even if these were based on the same substantive principles the results of independently conducted assessments were not at all uniform and consequently a single market did not emerge as the first the historical institutionalist argument assumes the authorization bodies used their strong position within the national regulatory regimes to veto the establishment of a single market for pharmaceuticals they took care not to endanger their influential position and there was little trust among them that regulatory competition would no longer be a threat to their regulatory standards at least for high innovative medicinal was established in a centralized authorization procedure applications for authorization have to be addressed directly to the emea within the emea the cpmp gives a scientific opinion about the product the commission formally decides about the authorization and in doing so it is controlled by a member state committee and the council the marketing authorizations for is subject to judicial review by the ecj and the court of first instance which may assess whether it is in line with the substantive authorization the interests of the national regulatory authorities are clearly reflected in the institutional design of the new supranational regulatory regime which confirms the second hypothesis they were not abolished but carried over into the emea and the cpmp which ensures their ongoing existence and strong regulatory goals were also carried over into the new regulatory regime and thereby the authorization process became legalized and subject to judicial review the network character and the legalization of the supranational regulatory regime have had positive effects on its functioning so far the strong regulatory network organized in the cpmp has led to political control of the authorization process becoming decisions up to december reflect one to one the scientific opinions of the cpmp within emea the emea clearly dominates the authorization process and is de facto an independent authorization body the control of the process has switched from the commission the member state committee and the council to the european courts the ecj and the court of first instance have already scrutinized the emea in some important the strong position of the organized within the emea and the cpmp as well as the strong judicial review reduce the potential for political influence this indicates a credible commitment of the member states to follow certain regulatory objectives food regulation from the single market to bse the history of the eu s food regulation is much longer than that of pharmaceuticals however there are at least two important differences between these regulations and those for pharmaceuticals first whereas in most member states regulatory authorities were set up for the authorization of pharmaceuticals this was not the case for the regulation of foodstuffs where powers remained in the hands of political bodies second food regulations followed an unsystematic ad hoc approach whereas pharmaceuticals authorization set of criteria foodstuff regulations have not established broader sets of rules but have simply reacted to specific problems associated with specific foods a disadvantage that still applies today in reaction to different regulatory measures within the member states the harmonization of the european food market ranked high on the agenda of the eu over time the eu followed different strategies to harmonize national harmonization according to which each type of food was subject to a harmonizing eu directive as the variation and number of different foods suggest this approach did not lead far towards the creation of a single market consequently with the famous cassis de dijon in and the single european act in the eu changed to the strategy of mutual recognition and partial harmonization accordingly each regulatory standards in one member
resident zack he went out into the hall drove around my chair and tried to break it and that was a no no if the guy s not in the chair you do nt fuck with the echno body subjects for both harry and zack when their bodies were separated from their wheelchairs there was a continuity of the self across biological and technological parts even though these parts were physically dispersed in space this suggests that where the body begins and ends is experienced in a fluid relationship where selves leak in and out of bodies and machines regardless of where they are located in space were much more common among the men than positive characterizations of ventilators bg i m interested in the fact that you re always attached to your ventilator does it feel like it s part of who you are or is it something that you use mike no it s annoying bg it s annoying mike pain in the butt ya cause now i m tired more than i used to be i have mike focuses here on the negative consequences of using a ventilator and conflates it with his breathing impairment now i m tired more in this respect it is perhaps akin to an organ that is taken for granted until something goes wrong the ventilator in this sense is also an extension of the body and self but is not imbued with the same high status as the wheelchair nick and alex s responses were somewhat more typical in conveying a sense of the embodiment of ventilation they discussed tracheostomy and ventilation as positive choices that they both wished they had initiated sooner nick i thought of it but i was scared to do it but when i got it it changed i opened my eyes it was like when i got it afterwards it was nothing like i should have done it a long time ago bg oh really so what were you worried about before that would look nick both bg and what do you think now nick i do nt really notice it sometimes alex i was nt used to my trach being moved around all the time and touched like that s what annoyed me at first but now i do nt even notice it s there anymore same thing when i got the trach i could feel it but then after a while i do nt even notice although these were typical stories there was a notable exception most frequent suctioning of the study participants had this to say bg can you tell me how you feel about the ventilator donald well it s good in that it lets me live longer and breathe better but there s a lot of difficulties associated with it just with the care and maintenance of the ventilator and the tracheostomy and suctioning most strongly expressed feelings of depression he rarely left his home and never went out alone much of the activity of his household focused around his care needs his video focused on providing advice to potential ventilator users about decision making the amount of work associated with ventilation in terms of suctioning care of equipment and the consequences such as difficulties with going out thus although for most of the participants wheelchairs and ventilators were their perceptions of body and self this was not a universal experience donald did not appear to have gotten used to it in the same way seemingly because of the burdens he foregrounded in his discussions these examples demonstrate how bodies and technologies are intimately intertwined in the production of disabilities and social exclusion or inclusion but we have only touched on how the organization of space is implicated in these of the participants micro geographies in order to further demonstrate this relationship with a more explicit focus on how disability is emplaced through this discussion we reveal how the participants were often marginalized and excluded from participating in their communities participants micro geographies the study participants personal micro geographies that is where when and how production of disablement both through the prevailing sociopolitical power relations and through the mundane everyday experiences of physical and cultural inclusion or exclusion how the men occupied and moved across space at the scale of their homes and neighborhoods demonstrates the complex relations between extraordinary bodies technologies and places in producing disabilities the men s day to day lives tended to revolve around three sets of activities care body solitary pursuits such as watching television listening to music or playing video games and excursions into the community although two of the men rarely left their homes except for medical appointments the remainder generally went out between two and five times per week in fair weather going out and being part of the community was a central occupation of their day to day lives depending on the length of the excursion going out could require considerable effort including coordinating excursions with meals and toileting needs dressing for the weather ensuring batteries are sufficiently charged and packing suctioning equipment these excursions were important in two senses first just getting up and out was important and linked with a sense of being part of the life of the community regardless of whether or not one met up with anyone second it was also important to facilitate interaction with friends and acquaintances participants excursions either to meet up with friends or with the expectation that they would likely run into someone for example in george s video there is a long scene where he looks out of his apartment window to see if any of his friends are outside and having spotted someone takes the viewer on an excursion into his neighborhood to meet up with friends and acquaintances some of the people he meets he knows well others he only greets and moves on what is notable is that this about two thirds of his seventy minute video the
order for his good health to be restored is a small dose of drug fortunately dr irwin happens to have an unlimited amount of this drug dr irwin can save his patient if he administers the necessary dosage at once is it morally permissible for dr irwin to give his patient the drug control david is driving a train when the brakes fail ahead of him five people are working on the track with their backs turned they cannot see or hear the fortunately david can switch the train to a side track which is completely clear if he acts immediately if david switches his train to the side track he will save the five people working on the track if he does not switch his train the train will run over the five people is it morally permissible for david to switch his train to the side track verspoor university of groningen in this article it is argued that language can be seen as a dynamic system ie a set of variables that interact over time and that language development can be seen as a dynamic process language development shows some of the core characteristics of dynamic systems sensitive dependence on initial conditions complete interconnectedness of subsystems the emergence of attractor states in development over time and variation both in and among the application of tools and instruments developed for the study of dynamic systems in other disciplines calls for different approaches to research which allow for the inclusion of both the social and the cognitive and the interaction between systems there is also a need for dense data bases on first and second language development to enhance our understanding of the fine grained patterns of change over time dynamic systems theory is proposed as a candidate for an overall language development introduction a major assumption underlying a great deal of acquisition research has been that the acquisition of a language has a clear beginning and end state and a somewhat linear path of development for each individual similarly in much sla research an learner no matter what his her is predicted to go through highly model on the other hand there have also been numerous linguistic and language acquisition studies that have not adhered to the linear view they have shown that language language acquisition and language attrition are much more intricate complex and even unpredictable than a linear position would allow linguistic theories such as cognitive linguistics and functional linguistics model recognize that there are many interdependent variables not only within the language system but also within the social environment and the psychological make up of an individual what these theories have in common is that they recognize the crucial role of interaction of a multitude of variables at different levels in communication in constructing meaning in learning a language and among the languages in the multilingual mind however even seem to recognize some overlap and compatibility between the different theories many of such theories still stand apart for lack of one overarching theory that allows to account for these ever interacting variables non linear behavior and sometimes unpredictable outcomes a theory that does not regard real life messy facts as noise but as part of the sound you get in real life issues could be such a theory the aim of this article is to explain how dst has developed what some of its main characteristics are how it has been applied to human and non human communication and how several common sla features could be reinterpreted from a dst perspective it is our claim that because dst takes into account both cognitive and social aspects of language development it can provide literature on the application of dst in sla is still fairly limited after the pioneering work by larsen freeman in it remained silent for five years until herdina and jessner published their book a dynamic model of multilingualism and larsen freeman added to her earlier work in inspired by this work and by paul van geert s work on acquisition we have de bot lowie and verspoor de bot and makoni for those unfamiliar with the theory we begin with a brief description of the theory and some examples of how it may apply to sla basic aspects of dst dst which developed as a branch of mathematics is originally about very simple systems such as the two when applied to a system that is by definition complex such as a society or a human being where innumerable variables may have degrees of freedom dst becomes the science of complex systems the major property of a ds is its change over time which is expressed in the fundamental equation for any function describing how a state at is transformed into a new state at time are not needed to grasp the general principles behind a dynamic system complex systems such as a learning person are sets of interacting variables dynamic systems are characterized by what is called complete interconnectedness all variables are interrelated and therefore changes in one variable will have an impact on all other variables that are can therefore not be calculated exactly not because we lack the right tools to measure it but because the variables that interact keep changing over time and the outcome of these interactions unless they take place in a very simple system cannot be solved analytically to follow a dynamic trajectory the system has to be simulated by doing the iterations for there is no sense that every system is always part of another system going from submolecular particles to the universe with the same dynamic principles operating at all levels as they develop over time dynamic sub systems appear to settle in specific states so called attractor states which are preferred but not necessarily predictable examples of attractor states are the two different ways horses may run they states that are clearly not preferred are so called repeller states attractors can be simple or complex
plans the firm does not only need advertising copy but also assistance in strategy formulation according to firms communication is an integral part of the marketing effort the firm may ask for the agency s help throughout the different phases of the marketing planning process the agency believes however that such a service is but an extra that is offered to the firm the relationship and may lead to conflicts of perceptions and hinder smooth the evolvement towards attainment of objectives incongruence about the nature of the agency responsibilities may lead to misunderstanding and to eventual break ups in the relationship the firm s role regarding the question of whether the firm is to play an active role in the process most respondents ascertain that the firm is considered to be a partner who is relationship the quality of the services calls for the client s collaboration the performance of an active role guarantees the development and the reinforcement of the relationship however differences between the frequencies related to roles performed by clients are quite important figure shows that difference is more important in the client s roles than in the agency s the fact that the firm is expected to play an important role in the relationship is role is defined differently by both groups of respondents while the firm believes that its role consists in following and monitoring the agency work the agency believes the firm would better focus on the information provider role the agency s work depends heavily on the quality and the quantity of the information provided by the firm s brief instead of following up the creation process the agencies think that firms should concentrate on communication objectives so as to help the the advertising campaign the analysis of the roles perceived by both players reveals a high degree of incongruence this problem is believed to arise normally throughout the early phases in the development of the relationship the definition of roles is a crucial step in the field of professional services like advertising if the role of one of the actors is not well defined quality of the service will suffer and eventually probability the determinants of success and failure in the relationship a quick look at the data reinforces the idea that determinants of success and failure are of two types determinants that are linked with agency behavior and determinants that are linked with the firm involvement the categories of meaning vary with the identity of the respondent and depend on whether the respondent belongs to the first or to the second type of actors ie according to whether he belongs to the agency or to the firm this is why the study of the perceptions each actor has about the success and failure determinants of the relationship and the analysis of similarities and differences between both groups perceptions are deemed appropriate the set of factors generated by the interviews is shown in figures and besides identification and clarification of roles other variables linked with the in perceptions are basically linked with the firm intervention table iii summarizes the success and failure determinants of the relationship as revealed in content analysis by order of importance on the basis of the table iii and analyses of the interview contents the following conclusions are warranted in the present study as in the majority of former studies creativity is a crucial chances for preserving long term relationships nonetheless two factors seem to have more importance for attaining successful relationships social distance between the agency and the firm and the attitude of benevolence that the former has on the latter these results reinforce kaynak et al and prendergast et al findings whereby client orientation and social exchange may have pre eminence over functional qualities like creativity in perceptions over the consulting role that the agency is supposed to play is reflected in the agreement over the importance of benevolence and proximity between partners an agency which plays adequately the consulting role is an agency that looks after the firm s interests and cares about its problems the provider needs to care about the firm and tries his best to understand its products its brands and its culture the relationship according to agencies the firm s help consists in providing information necessary for creation and for output evaluation as for firms they believe that they can just assist in advertising conception and creation this justifies the gap in the frequencies of appearance of the unit of meaning labelled assist in conception work the firm assists in the conception work because it is not quite confident with the agency and ascertains its involvement so as to make good results be attained the difference between firm and agency in importance attributed to confidence is also linked with the difference in importance attributed to communication as a matter of fact communication intensity between partners favors the development of trust in relationship building the categories of meaning have revealed factors that are extremely important hence table iii presents two types of factors which have to do with the behavior of each role player factors linked with the success level of the relationship and which are related to the agency behavior can be grouped in two categories the performance and the interpersonal factors the performance factor is multidimensional as demonstrated in previous research facets defining the performance creativity deadlines campaign results quality of the relationship between the agency and media intermediaries price agency size experience reactivity personnel turnover and pro activity the interpersonal factor encompasses facets linked with the quality of the agency personnel firm interactions here benevolence communication distance or proximity between the agency and professionalism trust and dignity of the internal policy and interpersonal relations internal policy encompasses all the variables linked with the way the client manages his internal structure it includes the degree of rigidity of its organization evaluation systems time management and the client s experience with agencies the required levels of performance the clarity of objectives
she got up and set about doing her work much later in the in sydney the sound of bundjalung reconnects langford ginibi to her drowned out memories to people places and her history it is national aborigines day and with the police band sitting behind her langford ginibi is surprised to hear and see her uncle jim morgan singing in bundjalung on the dais an eerie feeling in amongst the skyscrapers langford ginibi and uncle to see each other having not met since she was at school it was like meeting someone from your own town in another country this was to be their last meeting but even after his death uncle jim s voice continues to educate and reassure langford ginibi as she is able to listen to oral history recordings he made like musical forms languages change constantly and at quicker tempos when displacement and the entry of speakers of other languages contribute to their by crawford langford ginibi brett and their families carries traces of those distant languages these traces take many forms including the vocabulary searching strategies of a mediating child the presence of such traces does not render these language communities any less cohesive emplaced or effective than the monolingual australian superculture that some political authorities imagine and promote australian english like most languages clearly bears innumerable diverse but it is sometimes used as ian anderson points out to imply that its non anglo speakers represent unfortunate hybrids who belong nowhere and have no history in contrast with such views the texts and performances of crawford langford ginibi and brett represent language communities rural indigenous urban indigenous and urban jewish that improvise and expand possibilities for meaning suvendrini perera writes that langford ginibi s texts language communities rural indigenous urban indigenous and urban jewish that improvise and expand possibilities for meaning suvendrini perera writes that langford ginibi s texts represent an active process of negotiating with and surviving in a dominant culture that persistently devalues degrades and disappears her history the communities depicted suggests perera represent a resourceful energetic and vital culture that creates and copes makes do sydney s indigenous communities english becomes a dynamic adapted lingo langford ginibi s community around redfern was made up of people from many different language groups some like langford ginibi fluent only in english others more fluent in their first languages indigenous music in century sydney was created and performed by similarly diverse artists most singing in english in the and langford ginibi often attended events at the foundation for aboriginal her daughter dianne s wedding reception was held at the foundation in with mac silver and black lace playing silver died in shortly after the first recordings of his own work as well as creating significant moments in langford ginibi s memoir soundtrack silver exemplified inner sydney s diasporic indigenous adaptations of language silver moved to the redfern area from rural nsw in the he took over the foundation house band naming it the silver linings sydney s diasporic indigenous adaptations of language silver moved to the redfern area from rural nsw in the he took over the foundation house band naming it the silver linings at a time when indigenous australians were colloquially referred to as dark or darkies among other things by the the band was renamed black lace not only after the chains once clamped around aboriginal men s necks as crawford in but also after the sprawling social network from which the band drew its shifting members black lace s sound has been described as country rock with a latin tinge a joyous freeing sound like langford ginibi and the rest of her urban community black lace adapted a range of sounds to tell diasporic stories these stories articulated humor love and forms of unity while lamenting separation and loss inner sydney danced in george street whatever the empresses and emperors had imagined might be constructed in their names the empress hotel or big in redfern was to become the main meeting place for city kooris indigenous people of south eastern australia in the langford ginibi recalls for the kooris coming to the city it was a place where you could find out where all your relatives lived it was also where you could find out things you were nt in her case she learnt of her partner lance s infidelity there it was a site of gossip laughter dancing affairs fights commiseration and comfort after the death of alfie son of langford ginibi s friend neddy langford ginibi and neddy escaped to the empress to still their grief that night langford ginibi s old friend gerty turned up and met some of her relations there langford ginibi remembers the effects of hearing bundjalung which she had last heard at that night langford ginibi s old friend gerty turned up and met some of her relations there langford ginibi remembers the effects of hearing bundjalung which she had last heard at the age of spoken at the empress i could smell the smoke from the open fire in our place at stoney gully mission i saw mum pick me up and put me down again i felt her strong arms she was giving old man ord his tea and saying here nyathung i saw her grinning at dad when he came in the door eggs our chooks had laid in the long bladegrass under the railway culvert she reflects on the loss of fluency in one generation mum and dad were the last generation to speak bundjalung in our family despite this loss empress english articulates much that the queen s english might not including damaged ancestral links and the complex effects of colonization it is a site of cultural exchange a diasporic meeting place a related more mobile site of james came from tipperina mission in north western new south wales he often sang his ancestral song do wana nanarabi when he visited langford ginibi and her family her children learnt
prograde and retrograde textures are consistent with an path dominated by heating and cooling large changes in pressure along the path are considered unlikely as these would involve significant the best textural information is preserved in the stromatic migmatite samples and an anti clockwise path is inferred on the basis of these textures from the field relationships both garnet producing and orthopyroxene producing melting reactions occurred during prograde metamorphism indicated by both garnet bearing and orthopyroxene bearing leucosomes in the stromatic during heating which from fig most likely occurs prior to orthopyroxene stability inclusions of garnet in orthopyroxene are consistent with this interpretation with the stabilization of garnet having preceded the appearance of orthopyroxene though such inclusion relationships are generally ambiguous this inferred mineral assemblage pseudosections for and considering sample early garnet growth to a mode of ould have occurred in the cd bi ksppl liq trivariant field at kbar and following near isobaric heating to the rocks would have entered the opxcd divariant field with orthopyroxene forming mostly at the expense of and orthopyroxene modes at the expense of cordierite until reaching peak conditions at pressures above cordierite stability the evolution of would have been similar to along the inferred path in contrast in sample orthopyroxene would have formed predominantly via the consumption of biotite in the opxcd it corresponds to the textural relationships and can be used as a basis to account for the ree partitioning discussion the modelled peak conditions of kbar and for assemblages in the wuluma migmatites are consistent with previous estimates for the same rocks made by collins et al they are also consistent with the results of lafrance et al for the spatial relations between leucosome and ferromagnesian peritectic products is consistent with the observed leucosomes reflecting a series of multivariant biotite dehydration melting reactions there is no clear evidence for partial melting having been controlled by fluid ingress the interpretation of a subtle anticlockwise path can be used to enclosed by garnet aggregates the ree composition of orthopyroxene in the mignatites was apparently dependent on textural context for samples that involved coexisting garnet in the absence of garnet orthopyroxene shows depletion in the mree and enrichment in the hree for metapelitic migmatite samples with both garnet hree orthopyroxene remains depleted in the mree but has a variable pattern of depletion or subtle enrichment of hree dependent on textural setting orthopyroxene in mesosome is subtly enriched in hree whereas orthoproxene in garnet bearing leucosome is depleted in hree the degree of enrichment depletion of the using the lu dy ratio as a proxy for the behavior of the mree and hree in addition orthopyroxene in leucosomes shows enrichment in sm a feature lacking in orthopyroxene in mesosomes from the same sample the sequence of prograde mineral growth inferred from the pseudosections and kinetic aspects by small proportions of accessory minerals the systematic variations at wuluma hills are consistent with ree partitioning having been controlled by changes in the mode of major silicates large garnet and orthopyroxene grains enclosed by leucosome are consistent with melting reactions having been focussed around comparatively these complex spatial relationships now reflected in the leucosome mesosome structure could be used as a basis to imply a process whereby the rock was partitioned into two domains with distinct chemical evolutions however the formation of spatially focussed leucosomes required diffusion driven by chemical potential gradients between the now leucosome partitioning of the rock and necessitates some degree of chemical communication between the evolving leucosome and mesosome furthermore the similarity in major element composition of minerals common to the leucosome and mesosome despite in places their different assemblages is consistent with major element equilibration on a scale larger than that ree on the basis of orthopyroxene characteristics the following interpretation for the evolution of the stromatic migmatites is summarized in a cartoon in fig the formation of leucosome driven by major element partitioning and the elevated temperature conditions is interpreted to have formed a grain network larger than the scale that rees could hree enriched composition a subtle anticlockwise prograde path could have then led to orthopyroxene growth partially at the expense of garnet the growth of orthopyroxene along the inferred path is via a reaction between biotite and garnet as garnet is restricted at this stage to the leucosome and biotite to the mesosome diffusion of elements between the mesosome and leucosome however this diffusion did not occur with the rees instead orthopyroxene forming in the mesosome would grow with a typical ree pattern controlled largely by the breakdown of biotite as a result of comparatively sluggish diffusion of ree even at such elevated temperatures orthopyroxene forming in the leucosomes would have mimics the garnet trend the broad scatter in terms of degrees of enrichment in the hree shown by orthopyroxene could be explained by grain tograin variation consequent to orthopyroxene garnet distance the final textural relation involves prediction consequent to the interpretation presented above would be that these might show variations in ree composition as they are a comparatively late textural modification there is considerable scatter in the degree of mree and hree enrichment in garnet in some samples that might match this prediction however individual analyses would need to be collected more systematically hills involved the development of spatially complex mesoscopic and microscopic textures partial melting occurred via a series of biotite dehydration reactions which because of sparse garnet nucleation were spatially focussed around garnet porphyroblasts garnet initially a product of biotite dehydration melting became a reactant for orthopyroxene forming biotite elements on the scale of the existing mesosome leucosome pairs to form orthopyroxene in both the leucosome and mesosome in contrast ree compositions of orthopyroxene reflect local domainal compositions and diffusion on a scale smaller than that of mesosome leucosome pairs as such the ree compositions of orthopyroxene do not reflect the overall metamorphic reaction responsible of common elemental partitioning coefficients in spatially complex metamorphic rocks effects of thematic resolution on landscape pattern analysis
visual group were also rated higher for their performance by the audio and visual group no significant difference was found in the singers evaluations however when the performances were only heard for the adult violinists and children pianists results revealed that the performers who were rated more physically attractive were also given higher regardless of whether they were heard or seen and heard while several studies have examined solo performers physical appearance characteristics in regard to evaluations of their performances only two studies have investigated conductors physical appearance characteristics and the influence these may have on perceptions of their ensembles performance in the first vanweelden examined the relationship between conductor body type and of ensemble performance six female vanweelden mcgee the influence of music style and conductor race conductors representing either ectomorphic or endomorphic body types were videotaped conducting the same pre recorded musical excerpt college music majors rated each conductor s ensemble performance and the nonverbal body expressions of eye contact facial expression and posture results revealed no differences when conductors were grouped into ectomorphic and endomorphic body type categories however when conductors were examined individually two of the ectomorphic conductors ensemble performances were rated significantly higher these two conductors were also rated significantly higher on all three nonverbal body expressions in the second study vanweelden examined the influence of racially stereotyped music and conductor race on perceptions of ensemble performance six male conductors representing two racial groups african american or caucasian were videotaped conducting a pre recorded musical excerpt of a spiritual college music majors rated each conductor s ensemble performance and the nonverbal body expressions of eye contact facial expressions and posture results revealed that evaluators regardless of their gender or major rated the ensemble performances of the black conductor group significantly higher than the of the white conductor group even though the audio was the same for all conductors likewise higher body expression ratings were given to the black conductors music researchers have found performer and subject race to be important factors in preferences for and evaluations of a solo musician s performance careful selection of musical excerpt was also made by these researchers to represent music or music that was common to both races in regard to ensemble performance initial research has found subject gender and major did not significantly affect perceptions of performance however music style and conductor race did thus because these studies used either racially neutral or stereotypical music excerpts three major questions emerge in regard to conductors and their subsequent ensemble performances possibly be ascribed as being stereotypical to one or the other races represented by the conductors influence evaluations of their ensembles performances would the race of the evaluator influence evaluations of ensemble performance of conductors of the same race would style of music and conductor race influence evaluations of conductor eye contact facial expression and posture body expressions between one aspect of a conductor s physical appearance specifically race and two music styles on perceptions of ensemble and conductor performance method participants for this study were undergraduate music majors there was no stipulation as to major emphasis or gender of the participants but subject race was limited to either african american or caucasian the dependent variable was data taken from an evaluation form that had a small section asking the participants to indicate their major gender and race followed by seven questions pertaining to ensemble performance and three questions pertaining to conductor performance this form was adapted from measurement tools found in two choral music demonstrated validity to those procedures only the cumulative scores were used questions through asked the participants to rate each choral ensemble s performance within the following areas intonation tone quality attacks and releases phrasing dynamics balance and blend and diction the remaining three questions asked the participants to rate each conductor s nonverbal body expressions which included eye contact facial expression and posture all questions on the evaluation form used a five point likert type scale to rate ensemble and conductor performances operational definitions for the seven rating areas were not provided to participants since the goal of the survey instrument was to determine evaluator perceptions for which they necessarily constructed their own concepts participants were asked to complete one form for each conductor resulting in four per participant four male professional conductors served as models for the study these conductors represented two racial categories african american or caucasian each conductor was videotaped using a digital video camera conducting two pre recorded musical excerpts the excerpts chosen by the researcher were felix mendelssohn s when god commanded angels and william dawson s ezekiel saw de choral group both the excerpts were seconds in length and did not contain any perceived racially stereotypical diction the excerpts were chosen because they fit two music stylistic types either western art or spiritual conductors were videotaped in a performance hall creating the appearance of a live performance each conductor wore a black concert tuxedo no spectacles arranged their hair so facial be viewed clearly and memorized all excerpts so that eye contact remained exclusively with their ensembles additionally no music stand was used ensuring that each conductor s posture could be viewed clearly conductors were asked to conduct along with both the excerpts multiple times so that an example of their best conducting could be videotaped the researcher and two reliability observers viewed all videos examining the conductors body were most similar the three observers averaged reliability on ratings of body expressions on the chosen excerpts the chosen excerpts were digitally mastered using final cut pro software a high quality soundtrack was recorded over each video example to produce the same audio for each of the excerpts for all conductors four stimulus videotapes were produced from the chosen conducting excerpts by transferring the via a digitizer each videotape contained all four male conductors but differed in presentation order of conductors and style of music all videotapes contained a white conductor conducting the western art excerpt a white conductor
is different from this general information theoretic approach only in the sense that the authors have tried to place the essentially counting based metrical framework of briand et al in a probabilistic setting finally an earlier preliminary publication by us presents some metrics for doing the same our present work is a major overhaul upgrade and expansion of that earlier contribution the notion of modularity enunciation of the underlying principles modern software engineering dictates that a large body of software be organized into a set of modules according to parnas a module captures a set of design decisions interfaces in software engineering parlance a module groups a set of functions or subprograms and data structures and often implements one or more business concepts this grouping may take place on the basis of similarity of purpose or on the basis of commonality of goal the difference between the two is subtle but important an example of a module that represents the first type of types of containers for storing and manipulating on the other hand a module such as the java net package groups software entities on the basis of commonality of goal the goal being to provide support for networking the asymmetry between modules based on these two different notions of grouping is perhaps best exemplified by the fact that you are likely to use a java util class in a in either case modules promote encapsulation by separating the module s interface from its implementation the module interface expresses the elements that are provided by the module for use by other modules in a well organized system only the interface elements are visible to other modules on the other hand the implementation contains the working code as its api it is now widely accepted that the overall quality of a large body of software is enhanced when module interactions are restricted to take place through the published api s for the modules the various dimensions along which the quality of the software is improved by the encapsulation provided by modularization include understandability testability changeability were recently articulated by arevalo in the context of object oriented software design but they obviously apply to modularization in so if modularization is the panacea for the ills of disorganized software on what design principles should code modularization be based in what follows we will enunciate such principles and state what makes them purpose a module groups a set of data structures and functions that together offer a well defined service in other words the structures used for representing knowledge and any associated functions in the same module should cohere on the basis of similarity of service as opposed to say on the basis of function call dependencies obviously every service is related maximization of module coherence on the basis of similarity and singularity of purpose minimization of purpose dispersion maximization of module coherence on the basis of commonality of goals and minimization of goal dispersion principles related to module encapsulation as mentioned earlier encapsulating the implementation we now state the following modularization principles that capture these notions maximization of api based intermodule call traffic and minimization of non api based intermodule call traffic principle related to module compilability a common cause of intermodule compilation dependency is that a file from one module requires through import utilities to the developers it is all too easy for such interdependencies to become circular for obvious reasons such compilation interdependencies make it more difficult for modules to grow in parallel and for the modules to be tested independently therefore to the largest extent possible it must be possible to compile each module independently of the other modules can be oblivious to the evolution of internal details of any given module this notion is captured by the following principle maximization of the stand alone module compilability principle related to module extendibility one of the most significant reasons for object oriented software development is that the classes can be easily for a more organized approach to software development and maintenance since it allows for easier demarcation of code authorship and responsibility while module level compartmentalization of code does not lend itself to the types of software extension rules that are easy to enforce in object oriented approaches one nonetheless wishes for the modules to exhibit similar of code modularization maximization of the stand alone module extendibility module extendibility is a particularly important issue for very large software systems in which the modules are likely to be organized in horizontal layers this is an issue we will take up in section principle related to module testability testing is a major part of software development at the minimum to as requirements based testing but even more importantly testing must ensure that the software behaves as expected for a full range of inputs both correct and incorrect from all users and processes both at the level of the program logic in the individual functions and at the level of module interactions testing must take into account the full run into combinatorial problems when modules cannot be tested independently meaning that if each module is to be tested for inputs then two interdependent modules must be tested for inputs a modularization procedure must therefore strive to fulfill the following principle maximization of the stand alone testability of modules cyclic dependencies between the modules of a body of software cyclic dependencies directly negate many of the benefits of modularization it is obviously more challenging to foresee the consequences of changing a module if it both depends on and is depended upon by other modules cyclic dependencies become even more problematic when all the modules in a layer can only seek the services of the layers below we therefore state the following two principles principle of minimization of cyclic dependencies amongst modules and principle of maximization of unidirectionality of control flow in layered architectures principles related to module size in light of the the module sizes be roughly the same and equal to some prespecified magic number
both against the chauvinism of attributing all progress to christian or protestant grounds and against scapegoating jews for the ills of the work sparked a parallel debate over the rise of the modern sciences in century england a debate taken up again in the with a weberian attention to the material literary and social technologies of experimental sciences as well as the synergy or co production of rationalization and other arenas of legitimation of authority what is crucial here for the study of cultural forms is weber s insistence on understanding the cultural frames of reference of the motivations and intentions of actors even a concept such as power for weber is famously defined as the probability that an order given will be obeyed and therefore the strongest form of power is neither force nor economic monopoly but culturally domination thus religion as a central component of culture is often analyzed by weber not only as differentiated by social position but also as legitimating ritual structures for state formations especially for the ancient empires and their patrimonial utilizing the more detailed knowledge of century fieldwork or utilizing the questions raised by such an ethnographic sensibility include clifford geertz s account in religion of java of how class and status stratified religious and cultural formations in a decolonized modernizing new nation thompson s history of the english working class which albeit a more self described marxist account analyzes the cultural formation of work discipline role of the religiosity of the dissenting sects and joseph gusfield s symbolic crusade a study of the temperance movement in the united states that likewise illuminates the religious and class inflected antagonisms of small town elites feeling themselves losing political ground to catholic and urban immigrants all formulated through the language of cultural legitimacy culture and civilization carriers of comparative knowledge from which education and reason could devise progressively more humane efficient just and free societies germany and other nations on the periphery saw cultures in dialectical relationship to the french and english metropoles rather than only singular civilization german social theories would thus emphasize the plurality of cultures and even more importantly the dialectical relationship between first world cultures and second or third world ones beginning with marx s sensitivity to the contradictions of class positions and their cultural perspectives or dialectical abilities to develop political consciousness and also with his notes on the relation between labor in the colonies and conditions in england would put it in the marx was the model third world intellectual to be followed by many others moving to the metropole to study and strategize ways out of his homeland s subordinate position in a globalizing world paying particular attention to what would come to be called dual societies underdevelopment deskilling and proletarianization for colonial political leaders and social theorists the dialectical relationship between self and other between the conditions of the colonized and the colonizer could never be forgotten in a simple universalistic account laroui would emphasize a quintessential cultural dilemma in the crisis of the arab intellectual in the last quarter of the century one could adopt a marxian ideology and as in south yemen seize control of the state but then have to impose a tutelary dictatorship cultural perspective of the vanguard or one could attempt to mobilize change by utilizing the cultural language of the masses islam but then have to deal with a cultural language vulnerable to theocratic or fundamentalist capture the century terms culture and civilization became pluralized in the century and at the core of this pluralization in both cases were notions of cultural symbols histories as in islamic persian indian or chinese civilizations which each could contain numbers of cultures within culture is that relational complex whole sir tylor s second key contribution complementing the omnibus definition of culture was his paper pointing out the arbitrariness of victorian charts a general self congratulatory evolutionary paradigm through wwi it is crucial to recognize that the fight waged by anthropology on behalf of rationalism and empiricism against the dogmatism of the established church was part of a larger series of social struggles having to do with the various reform acts of century england including those which enfranchised more and more of the population reformed penal law and social policies for dealing and those that reformed marriage and family law anthropologists were often associated with the dissenting sects of the rising shopkeeper artisan and independent professional classes espousing individualism and self reliance and hostility to older relations of hierarchy status and ascribed rather than achieved position and some such as william robertson smith even on occasion lost their chairs for their outspokenness against the dogmas of the established became the new social theory in germany the rapid industrial revolution and state formation under bismarck would lead to recognition that the second industrial revolution required a social theory more integrative or institutional than a merely utilitarian dependence on the decisions of atomized individuals the four components of the relational culture concept that began to emerge in the the century engaged in england with the elaboration of utilitarianism both as a tool for rationalized social reform and as an ideology of victorian culture and on the european continent with the reformulation of cultural nationalisms and universal civilization including at least an intellectual engagement through philology and comparative religion with universal civilizations other than christendom and a professional culture within the various emergent forms of utilitarianism in england and elsewhere socialisms of both the marxian and fabian varieties were accommodated under the calculus of the greatest good for the greatest number and the social welfare of society this calculus left little explicit room for notions of culture except in the form of values and preferences that might be factors in utility curves yet the educational curriculum in public schools in preparation for colonial service and public administration at home was based more on classical humanities than on engineering or other practical skills culture was carefully constructed and enacted while being misrecognized as merely the best that
the third world is often revealed in great detail the more remote or exotic the place the more likely we are have full frontal views of the dead and dying the handling of this category of bodies raises the political meaning of discretion and tact there was a deliberate abstention from showing dead bodies at the towers the reasons for the taboo may therefore be traced to the history of images of suffering and the distinctive treatment of dead and violated bodies from the west even in the treatment of these bodies there are illuminating differences the bodies jumping from the towers signaled only the scale of the horror and loss these are bodies that are not held in a grid of biography and fellowship but bodies profoundly vulnerable and out of place images of vulnerable and injured bodies appear in the cape argus on september on page three which carried photographs of women with bloodied faces being carried from the building and on september the sunday argus showed people who had emerged from the buildings covered in industrial dust these not approximate the images of grievously injured bodies from asia or africa but they approach the interdiction on showing graphic suffering of western bodies the unspoken bounds on representing such suffering would have been fundamentally transgressed by the sight of the dead at the world trade center the proscription on the sight of bodies jumping from the buildings and on the streets below by the bounds of respect propriety and good taste may seen to secure the uniqueness and exemption of the united states sontag points out that the absences of images of the american dead obscures a host of concerns and anxieties about public order and public morale that cannot be named what cannot be named is the way in which death in these images resembles death the elsewhere and the human meanings of both among the most compelling photographs that appear as part of the story of september are laden a photograph of bin laden appeared immediately after the events of september in the cape argus on september with the caption no suspect osama bin laden bin laden s face can be read as part of a long history of representations of men of the east who are seen as a threat however within this history the face of osama bin laden is different bin laden is described as tall gaunt charismatic elusive also as quiet also as quiet and unimpressive by prince bandar the saudi ambassador to the united states in an interview on cnn cited in the film fahrenheit not many photographs of bin laden exist and in the coverage a small number of photographs and limited camera footage of bin laden circulated among numerous world media organs for instance the photograph that appears in the cape times on september on page seven is the same as that on the cover of time magazine on october similarly the photograph in the cape argus of september appears also in the saturday argus on september the photograph in the cape times on september is a shot from the waist up and shows details of the white turban and the white clothing of bin laden his beard is full and comes down to below his neck his gaze is directed away from the camera looking to the left the expression on his face conveys a sense of stillness in the page five of the cape argus on september bin laden is shown with his gaze directed at the camera yet in none of the representations is a sense of accessibility conveyed this face which has been expressly accused of the planning and execution of the attacks of september resists connection to meanings of horror and murder and demonstrates the way photographs always exceed the meanings attached to them the offence of its stillness is everywhere the insistent of photographs of bin laden is indicated in articles that refer to his mystique in contrast to the explicable face of saddam hussein for instance or the ayatollah khomeini the expression on the face of bin laden is neither stern nor threatening it seems to convey calmness most significantly the face does not signal reciprocity it always conveys a sense of containedness in filmed footage bin laden s gestures appear slow and careful there is nothing hurried about this face moreover the face of osama bin laden has an unsettling refusal to be singular it is almost average precisely its refusal to be exceptional complicates the ideological task of attaching meaning to his face it is a face that appears quiet and unthreatening yet because it refuses to have one meaning it is also unsettling the varied meanings of the face of osama bin laden have come to stand for the bewilderment and impossibility of islam itself bin laden a terrifying face of islam because his face refuses reciprocity what can be said and thought about islam the word crusade used by president bush on september to describe the war on terrorism derives from the medieval era when islam was christianity s defining enemy it has been possible to ignore history and context in discussing islam in one sense on september religion entered the public space in a fundamentally constricted way the scale of the challenge is assumed to pose a view of islam as irrevocably different irrational and posing an unprecedented challenge is itself a religious idea and has motivated a particular set of rhetorical legal and military responses by the united states and its allies after september it is argued that it is not possible to engage with islam through existing norms or through the discourse of the law this argument has been used to motivate the creation of a space by the united such a hindering apparatus does not apply a space that is outside of the territory of the united states not merely physically but also rhetorically and legally in addition even within the territory of
s future inconstancy to medea and to criticise him for taking colchis it is hardly surprising that both this and medea s lust for jason an undesirable quality in a fifteenth century wife are absent from the tornabuoni albizzi cycle medea s murder of her younger brother absystrus the deed that prompted jason to turn against his promised bride is also edited out of the paintings according to lefevre medea tore absystrus limb from limb and scattered his broken body in the wake of the argos to impede her father however other incidental episodes from colonne and lefevre s texts were included because they could be made respectable with greater ease such as medea and jason s rendez vous by diana s temple which is depicted in bartolomeo di giovanni s painting this is far from the illicit nocturnal visit of ovid and apollonius but resembles the day trip sanctioned by medea s father to help jason passer tamps in the paintings like the medieval texts show aeetes while his sorceress daughter has been transformed into a paragon of female virtue jason is only able to complete his tasks with the help of his friend hercules and in particular that of his future bride medea the paintings in accordance with florentine custom show man and wife capable of great deeds if they combine their resources under the husband s leadership the marital purpose of this cycle is made explicit in the last d antonio it depicts the betrothal of jason and medea in the company of both their families and friends the event closest to the heart of colonne and lefevre s although this is absent from the texts florentine visual precedents for it do exist a drawing in the middle of the trojan in the florentine picture chronicle illustrations attributed to baccio baldini and probably dating from the early shows jason and medea with a great cup their poses act of betrothal two engravings closely related to this drawing also survive in the oval format used by prints made to decorate boxes offered as love tokens or marriage gifts one which like the drawing is inscribed gianson and medea in biagio d antonio s painting jason and medea clasp each others hands inside the temple of apollo before their families and friends as well as the gods jupiter mercury hades and mars a statue of apollo the ceremony this is an adaptation of the florentine anellamento the physical recognition of the agreement reached by the couple s families which took place in public often on the steps of a in florence this event rather than marriage was legally jason is accompanied by hercules while medea s companions include her sister chalciope and brother absystrus coat of arms the palle is also displayed prominently on the shoulder of a youth who draws the viewer s attention to the betrothal this device is reminiscent of the omnipresent medici palle in botticelli s nastagio degli onesti series commissioned for the pucci bini marriage of also sponsored by lorenzo de jason s ship now bearing only the tornabuoni arms awaits bride and groom at the right in conclusion bartolomeo di giovanni s flanking panels of apollo and venus reinforce the final transformation of jason and medea s tempestuous history the presence of the goddess of love and peace and the god of the liberal arts is the final and most obvious signal that the marriage of jason with medea is made in heaven two most prestigious cultural value systems of late fifteenth century florence classical antiquity and chivalry this is demonstrated most explicitly in the series indebtedness to medieval chivalric retellings of an ancient story however it is shown additionally by the architectural settings and the costumes worn by the principal characters in the paintings at first glance these look convincingly all antica however they are more closely related to fifteenth century antiquity for example the colonnaded rotunda where jason and medea are betrothed is reminiscent of the generic classicized domed churches and chapels found in numerous domestic paintings rather than any actual jason and medea s costumes are imaginative reinterpretations of late fifteenth century dress and find an interesting parallel with those associated with the tournaments and other armed displays in which and in particular with the famous jousts sponsored by lorenzo and giuliano de medici in and jason wears a combination of all antica armour with red florentine hose recorded in paintings such as apollonio di giovanni s tournament in piazza santa medea s blue dress is styled alla ninfa like that used for other representations of ancient heroines including lucretia and it was also found for idealized or allegorical depictions florentine women such as the chaste lucrezia donati and simonetta vespucci the objects of the chivalric love of lorenzo de medici and his circle in the early as well as giovanna degli albizzi herself this examination of the tornabuoni jason and medea series has demonstrated the range of narrative sources that influenced their choice of subject in florence as in much of post classical europe stories like that of jason and subject to continual revision and reinterpretation using the framework of chivalric versions of this tale current in the late middle ages the paintings turn this patchwork of traditions into a seamless and convincing whole they are and look both all antica and chivalric classical and modern unlike many of their twentieth century historians renaissance florentines did not view these categories as incompatible and mutually exclusive indeed the youthful elite circles within which moved could be characterized by two interests manifested in his jason and medea paintings in ancient latin and particularly greek texts and in chivalric and courtly behavior exemplified by the burgundian dynasty moreover the paintings were not designed to show how fifteenth century florentines responded to ancient literature they had a distinct function servants and privileged guests like other spalliera paintings this series is therefore not simply a translation of highbrow literary sources into paint rather these
outline sharpness epoxy and halohydroxy propyl derivatives of diallylamine have also been reported in this regard cotton pretreated with these agents showed improved fastness properties for a number of direct dyes reactive group have also been used for the cationization of cellulose although these treatments enhanced the uptake of dye there are practical drawbacks to all these treatments including hue changes poor penetration into the fiber and light fastness limitations monofunctional cationic agents of monochlorotriazine direct dyes than does untreated yarn the stoichiometry of interaction of both acid and direct dyes with cotton modified with a reactive cationic agent was examined the results showed that the presence of the cationic sites enhanced the amount of dye taken up by diffuse adsorption recent developments revealed that cotton fabrics pretreated with mono and bis reactive neutral conditions in the absence of salt improved fastness was also achieved for this modified fiber when compared with untreated samples results also indicated that cotton pretreated with the bis reactive cationic agent showed higher degrees of dye exhaustion and fixation relative to cotton pretreated with mono reactive agent the dyeability of cationized cotton fabrics using ci acid red was found to be dependent on the cationic agent concentration and the appropriate mixture used more complex multifunctional structures have also been evaluated by exhaust applications and these gave effective enhancement of dye uptake polymeric quaternary ammonium salts these instances to interpret the precise mechanism of the interactions involved apart from the obvious participation of electrostatic forces between the dye anions and the basic groups in the polymer polyamide epichlorohydrin resin having azetidinium cation as the reactive group was applied to cotton with a neutral ph in the absence of salt selected highly reactive dyes gave good color yield and fixation but lower fixation values were obtained when dyes of low reactivity were applied to the pretreated cotton it was thought that better fixation of both high and low reactivity dyes might be achieved by introducing more highly nucleophilic sites into the cotton incorporation of thiourea and results obtained thiourea addition inhibits the cross linking of the resin leaving more nucleophilic nh groups as sites for dye reaction ethylenediamine promotes cross linking of the resin but itself provides extra nh groups as dye reactive sites derivatives of poly epichlorohydrin instead of epichlorohydrin were prepared and used as new cationic pretreatment of cotton with this agent not only reduced the amount of salt needed but also increased the exhaustion efficiency and perspiration fastness of direct dyes a commercial cationic fixing agent solfix was used to pretreat cotton prior to dyeing with six commercial direct pretreated fabrics also gave improved printability with pigment and anionic dyes the prints obtained on cationized cotton showed better overall fastness properties than prints obtained on untreated cotton three commercial cationic fixing agents namely matexil fc pn were used as pretreatments for cotton modification pretreatment was found to increase the color strength of the dyeings when dyeing had been carried out without electrolyte however when electrolyte was used the pretreated samples exhibited generally lower color strength than the standard dyeings the wash fastness of the dyeings almost remained unaffected by pretreatment while light the uptake of metal complex acid dyes by samples of cotton polyamide fabrics showed excellent dye uptake by the pretreated samples compared with the untreated samples the pretreatment using matexil fc er or a development cationic fixing agent gave the most uniform results homopolymer or copolymers of alkyl diallylamine with the epichlorohydrin have also been produced on cellulosic fibers pretreated with fixing agent and fixogene cxf with cationic polymers enhanced the light and wash fastness of acid and reactive dyes the subsequent application of syntan to the after treated dyeings enhanced the on cotton but the effect of syntan was both dye and fixing agent specific it has also been examined that wash fastness was noticeably better when these fixing agents were applied under alkaline conditions a new fiber modification technique based on a cationic acrylic copolymer has been established or acidic conditions recently poly has been investigated as a pretreatment for the salt free dyeing of cotton with reactive dyes dye fixation was found to be much higher than by conventional dyeing without pretreatment even in the presence of a large amount of salt dyed cotton pretreated with poly showed to the cellulosic fibers either as pretreatment or after treatment to improve the fastness properties of anionic dyes on cellulosic fibers these treatments enhanced the exhaustion fixation and wet fastness properties of anionic dyes on cellulose fibers kachkovsky abstract complex quantum chemical and spectral study of the features of the electron transitions and absorption spectra of the both oxystyryls and related merocyanines containing the pyridinium quinolinium indolium and benz d indolium end residues has been performed it was shown that the relative long wavelength absorption of the neutral merocyanines in comparison with the cationic dyes is caused by considerable redistribution of the electron density within the chromophore upon excitation not by equalizing of the carbonecarbon bond lengths as it was predicted in the framework of the conception cyanine limit the opposite sign change excitation not by equalizing of the carbonecarbon bond lengths as it was predicted in the framework of the conception cyanine limit the opposite sign change of the dipole momentum in the excited state in the cationic and neutral dyes depends noticeably on the basicity of the donor end groups and causes the opposite solvatochromism which increases additionally the distance between the absorption bands of these dyes of the different types typical high polarizable donore acceptor molecules which can be considered as neutral derivatives of cationic oxystyryls notwithstanding that these two related types of the linear conjugated systems differ from each other insignificantly in the chemical constitution first of all by a number of atoms bonded by s bonds and by hybridization of the oxygen atom they exhibit the there is a principal distinction between electron systems of the compound and which is connected with a total charge oxystyryls are charged conjugated systems
pledge its capacity to the intermediary conclusion furthermore advanced selling literature in services is often in the form of theoretical models empirical studies on this phenomenon is still largely absent this paper aims to illustrate service specific issues in the establishment of advanced selling channels for services through a case study it hopes that the present study could stimulate greater research in this area lower performing manufacturing firms in the uk roger brooksbank and david taylor abstract purpose to contrast the role and practical application of strategic marketing in higher and lower performing firms design methodology approach in depth personal interviews with senior marketing executives in three matched high low performing manufacturing firms in the uk were recorded transcribed and analysed the interview agenda was derived from the authors own previous research studies plus in the literature findings these are structured around four key strategic marketing activities previously found to be characteristic of higher performing firms they clearly show that such companies implement them with a far greater degree of skill sophistication and ingenuity than do their lower performing counterparts above all for the higher performers strategic marketing is a truly cross functional activity indicates a fruitful approach to further research aimed at extending and refining the findings and recommendations though details requiring methodological attention are identified originality value as an aid to marketing practitioners and educators alike these findings and conclusions identify and describes a number of specific applicable characteristics of successful strategic marketing important contribution of a number of textbook strategic marketing practices to the achievement of superior competitive performance indeed day and montgomery thomas and others have pointed to the importance of such research arguing that some of the most fundamental questions marketing academics should be continuously asking themselves relate to the extent to which practitioners actually practice textbook marketing as well as the degree to to which it has a positive influence on organizational performance yet one of the key weaknesses of many of the success studies reported over recent years is that they serve to answer only the question what in relation to high performance strategic marketing and effectively ignore the underlying how to gautier and november lament the fact that most marketing academic research to date provide little by way of practical insights or meaningful instruction for those who have to make the decisions it is therefore with these observations in mind that the research reported has two main aims first to make a qualitative assessment of some of the key textbook determinants of high performance strategic marketing in the specific case of uk medium sized manufacturing firms second and most importantly to identify and marketing as an aid to both marketing practitioners and educators to meet these twin objectives key marketing success factors relating to the expected differences between the strategic marketing practices of higher and lower performing firms are explored by means of personal interviews specifically this study builds upon the authors previous research findings and begins to examine in greater depth and from a practical perspective the true nature of high performance strategic it is important to note that this paper will report the latest stage of a longitudinal investigation of one group of medium sized manufacturing firms in the uk which has spanned almost two decades indeed it is only by virtue of the detailed information gained from this extended research programme in relation to firm performance in certain product and market situations that it was possible to identify three matched pairs of higher and lower performers that were competing head to head in specific markets information which otherwise would have been virtually impossible to elicit from other sources the findings reported here derive from personal interviews with six senior marketing executives one from each firm in the sample strategic marketing success factors previously identified made to the achievement of both short run and long run competitive success within a particular group of manufacturing firms in the uk our aim was to test a number of hypotheses about what practices might differentiate the higher from the lower performers these hypotheses were compiled on the basis of a comprehensive review of the reported empirical research although a few were not fully supported by the data and thereby drew into question the general applicability of certain tenets of successful marketing as applied to manufacturing firms a number of key marketing success factors were found to characterize the high performers over time four of those evergreen key success factors form the basis of this study that higher performing manufacturing companies do more and better marketing research carry out a more comprehensive strategic situation analysis on providing superior value to the customer and make greater use of marketing information systems research methodology over many years a variety of writers such as mintzberg gill and johnson and tapp have argued that the best way to study business practice is from the inside making it possible for the researcher to get closer to the action and thereby gain valuable insights into how companies actually go about doing what they reports the findings obtained from personal interviews conducted in summer with senior marketing executives in six uk based manufacturing companies the sample consisted of three matched pairs of competing firms operating within three separate product market contexts with one defined as high performing and one as low performing company in each pair the use of matched pairs as the basis for a comparative study was developed from a review of reported empirical research in the and was chosen because it is a model that clearly allows for the sharpest possible contrast to be drawn between the marketing activities of higher and lower performing firms competing with one another in the same market the six participant companies were selected from a database of information held on a total of that had responded to three previous mail surveys the final sample comprised those companies whose senior marketing executives immediately before the interviews that the nature of their main products
here it was only really in the second half of the century in the wake of the peace of westphalia and particularly the treaty of the pyrenees of that france started to fully order its putatively natural boundaries in the phrase of cardinal richelieu it is also important to note the language referring to the population mass volume density which hints at a mathematical calculative sense but also the way in which this is extended over the territory raising issues of spatial distribution as well as hinting at the mathematical determination of space as extension found in descartes in undertaking this historical analysis foucault offers three models of governmentality which he also calls the governmentalization of the state techniques perfected on a european scale after the treaties of westphalia the police it is therefore at the beginning of the lecture following governmentality that the true historical analysis promised begins starting here in securite territoire population but continuing in naissance de la biopolitique and presumably in subsequent and as yet unpublished courses before i discuss these three models it is noting two further things first the notion of governmentalization implies a process a mode of transition and becoming rather than a state of being this allows us to recognize the further temporal aspect to foucault s analysis second foucault s analysis is largely confined to western europe and often just to france the geographical specificity is therefore almost entirely lacking pastoral power of the pastoral has eastern origins in egypt assyria and mesopotamia but especially in hebrew understandings of the relation between god and man where the power is over the flock rather than over the land the power of the shepherd is exercised not so much over a fixed territory as over a multitude in movement toward a goal crucially and this is the point of foucault s et singulatim from october power is exercised over each individual as much as over the flock as a whole omnes et singulatim all and each a mechanism that is at once totalizing and individualizing in distinction to the greek god who is a territorial god a god intra muros within the walls of the polis tied to greek myths of autochthony the hebrew god is a god who marches displaces wanders foucault contends that the hebrew model is almost entirely separate from the greek polis or roman imperium as a model for political power although elements of the pastoral model can be found in some greek texts notably plato s statesman and some minor references in the critias republic and the laws although these analyses anticipate foucault s later return to greek and roman texts with considerably more nuance and though there are some on the range of other literature including homer s iliad and odyssey and beowulf he suggests there is something quite different in the idea of the pastor sovereign or shepherd magistrate in greek texts and the model imported from the east foucault notes that paul veyne s work is important here foucault notes that the paradox is that these religious civilizations are both the most creative conquering arrogant and bloody more interesting it seems to me is why foucault is so concerned with the christian model and particularly with the transitions in models of government in the and centuries the answer is in part biographical the second volume of the history of sexuality was intended to be on confession and on the christian distinction between the body and the flesh and indeed foucault had been reading much literature on this topic in anticipation of such a study the figures he would have treated there such as gregory the great john chrysostom saint cyprian jean cassian saint jerome saint benedict are analysed here and are returned to in the course du gouvernement du vivants notes in his chronology in dits et crits in january foucault was working on this second volume confession becomes important because of its aim of the government of souls what gregory of nazianzus called the oikonomia psuchon the economy or household of souls the pastorate thus forges the link to new ways to govern children family the domain and the and yet just as in the initial sketches presented in les anormaux lectures from his claims here are sometimes rather vague and general part of the problem is that he tries to cover a huge range of time from the and centuries after christ through to the he recognizes the changes over this millennia and a half and explicitly claims that they do not rest on the same invariant and fixed indeed he notes that it is not a question here of course of doing the history of this pastorate although he suggests that this is a story that has not adequately been told while there are histories of ecclesiastical institutions doctrines beliefs religious representations religious practices such as how people confess and take communion there has been much less attention to the techniques of their development application successive refining and so on the pastorate is described as the art of arts the science of sciences techne technon episteme epistemon an ensemble of techniques and pro cedures foucault uses this to trace a schism in the church that goes beyond theology the western sovereign is caesar and not christ the eastern pasteur is not caesar but christ the shift from the pastoral of souls to of men is thus a complicated story in political thought related to the english glorious revolution and to the counter reformation in europe more generally governmental practices build on the conduct of the self of children and of the family and we can see clearly here how this relates to the later work on technologies of self with the sixteenth century we enter into the age of conducts the age of direction the age of governments then foucault contends that we a have shift in political rationalities from ratio pastoralis to ratio gubernatorial to ratio status pastoral reason governmental reason reason of
fitness facilities whereas women may have preferred walking and aerobic classes the argument can also be made that regular exercisers prefer to live in areas that are near desired linear prediction of a true score from a direct estimate and several derived estimates shelby haberman jiahe qian educational testing service direct estimate and the covariates results yield an extension of kelley s formula for estimation of the true score to cases in which covariates are present the best linear predictor is a weighted average of the direct estimate and of the linear regression of the direct estimate onto the covariates the weights depend on the reliability of the direct estimate and on the multiple correlation of the true score with the covariates one application of the best linear predictor is to use essay features provided by computer analysis and an observed holistic score of an essay provided by a human rater to approximate the true score corresponding to the holistic score introduction statistical prediction of a true score on a test may involve both direct estimation of a true score and covariates related to the true score for example in a graduate admission test denoted by grad in this article a final essay score was estimate and essay features such as number of words in the essay error rates per word in grammar or usage and numerical measures of word diversity the essay features the covariates were determined by computer analysis of the essay the procedure in grad for essays employed an integer holistic score in the range to and an integer rater score between and generated from computer analysis normally the reported score was the average holistic score from the reader and of the rater score however an additional reader was employed if the reader score and rater score differed by more than the approach used in grad was not necessarily an optimal approach to assignment of a final score to an essay this remark applies even if the true essay score is regarded as the average holistic score an essay would receive if rated by an arbitrarily large number of raters work presented earlier the criterion of mean squared error is used to determine the best linear predictor of a true score based on a direct estimate and on covariates in section this predictor is considered under the assumption that all relevant population parameters are known in this ideal case the best linear predictor is shown to be a weighted average of two components the first component is the direct estimate estimate onto the covariates the weights assigned to the components depend on the reliability of the direct estimate and on the multiple correlation between the direct estimate and the covariates the mean squared error of the optimal linear predictor is shown to depend on the variance of the direct estimate reliability of the direct estimate and multiple correlation of the true score and the covariates results of this section can be regarded as a generalization of kelley s the case of covariates required arguments are familiar from treatments of linear prediction in classical test theory results are related to other efforts to combine information from several tests to provide improved estimation of the true scores for each of the tests or for a composite test as evident from the cited references arguments used here are to arguments used in bayesian inference in section estimation of the best linear predictor and of the mean squared error are considered estimation is described for a simple random sample of essays from a large population because reliability must be estimated it is assumed that at least for some essays more than one independently obtained holistic score is available in the sample this assumption has commonly been sample it is assumed that at least one holistic score and all covariates are observed given these data estimation of parameters is relatively straightforward at least for large samples standard treatments of classical test theory provide basic background as do classical treatments of statistical inference some readers may recognize relationships to empirical bayesian inference and are applied to essays from grad and from the test of english as a foreign language a notable feature of the analysis is the relatively low weight assigned to the holistic score provided by the reader this result reflects some limitations in the reliability of holistic scores and a relatively high multiple correlation of holistic scores and computer derived essay features as discussed in section results in this report suggest that scoring procedures in grad give considerably higher weight to computer generated essay features than has generally been the case policy issues may arise that involve public perceptions concerning the reduced weight given to the human rater and there is some question to consider concerning the effect on examinee performance if they are aware that a very large fraction of the grade on their essay is determined by a computer program linear predictor of the true score from a direct estimate and from the available covariates some elementary notation and a basic probability model are required let the true score be a random variable with the expectation and positive variance and let the direct estimate be a random variable such that the error in estimation of has expectation and positive variance let and be uncorrelated and variance and the covariance of and is the reliability coefficient under the assumptions made concerning the variances of the true score and the error the reliability coefficient must be positive and less than let d be a dimensional vector of covariates dj with mean d and positive definite covariance matrix d assume that the error is uncorrelated with the covariates dj let d denote the vector of covariances of the error and the covariates dj this information suffices to specify the best linear predictor of the true score based on the observed score and the vector d of covariates to describe the best linear predictor of the true score first consider the standard formula
world and he universal validity claim that commits western democracies to the procedure of democratic self determination and human rights as he writes is precisely the universalistic core of democracy and human rights that forbids their unilateral realization at maintaining peace and the global enforcement of human rights habermas emphasizes its paramount importance for today world he calls for confirmation and transformation of international law and its institutions in particular the un for promotion of a cosmopolitan order and for a new approach to the distribution of state authority hat refers back to the kantian as he concludes here is no sensible alternative to the a cosmopolitan order that offers an equal and reciprocal hearing for the voices of all those cosmopolitan democracy and the human right to peace many authors see the need for regulatory instruments at the supranational level and for global government however they mostly agree that this should not involve the simple transference of sovereignty to the supranational level and they try to find a balance between the of democracy into kant cosmopolitanism david held kenneth baynes james bohman daniele archibugi and patrick hayden among others refer to kant in sketching he cosmopolitan model of democracy cosmopolitan democracy offers an alternative to liberal internationalism while both address the themes of peace and human rights they differ significantly in their approach to these themes liberal international dominate discourse in the post old war world however they are limited in their approach by the existing framework of international order and by the economic status quo and us hegemony cosmopolitanism by contrast provides a fundamentally different normative focus to international political theory by placing the individual human the democratic deficit in the current international order and they have striven to develop a cosmopolitan democracy model for global governance their guiding principles are moral universalism which is rooted in kant philosophy and that promotes the idea that every human being is qualified for equal membership in the universal human community the juridification of basic rights as the process of basis for juridical norms and principles of cosmopolitan cosmopolitanism expands the ideas of human rights and peace into the concepts of human security and the human right to peace in response to the limitations of the traditional view of security cosmopolitanism provides the basis for a more expansive concept of human security defined as the protection and welfare of the individual its goal is the preservation of human well being its concern is not just for the citizens of a particular state but for all of the citizens of the it calls for shifts from power struggles and militarism toward dialogue and multilateral efforts aimed at eliminating war and providing conditions for peaceful and dignified human life of human rights it is possible to discuss the most serious consequences of war and other violent threats to human the guarantee of the protection of the right to peace is understood holistically this approach helps researchers in developing the comprehensive concept of peace which means not merely absence of fighting but a condition peace includes he capabilities approach which deals with those kentral human capabilities without which our life would not be it also deals with the quality and conditions of existence itself and includes the capabilities to survive and live a healthy life to enjoy a decent standard of living and to exercise civil and political the cosmopolitan perspective egards war as generally instances of warfare as genuinely humanitarian exceptions to an otherwise comprehensive interdiction of the use of military it emphasizes that such exceptions for human security crises should only be recognized as legitimate by a un security council resolution and not simply for the purpose of furthering ational interests hayden for one notices the emergence of regressive tendencies such as ilitary and rights terrorism which challenge the egalitarian and humanitarian principles of cosmopolitanism the cosmopolitan concept of human security and the right to peace de legitimizes war and organized violence as means for politics it offers an alternative to the traditional security dilemma and to the emocratic peace and ust war theories by stressing the emergence of global security structures guided by the humanitarian serve as a basis for developing a system of global governance and global civil society the basic steps in approximating kant cosmopolitan ideal including the project of a ederation of free states were marked by the development of international law and institutions including the league of nations in after world war i and later the foundation of the united nations in after world war ii the united nations membership open to the participation of every state that agreed on its principles and fulfilled the obligations assumed by them in accordance with the un charter it is tolerant of differences in forms of government and constitutions the united nations faced great perils during the cold war and now it is challenged by the emocratic peace and ust war project of a hegemonic world state today united nations is its many failures in protecting human rights show that a satisfactory global order of law has not yet been realized nevertheless it serves as an important mechanism for preventing war through cooperation among the major powers in the transitional stage from an international to a cosmopolitan order many philosophers view the current united nations as being in the process of growth and improvement through could on kantian terms entirely suitable for making possible the next phase in approximating the ideal order of peace and law founded on a federation of free the strengthening of international cooperation and the joint efforts of all nations in finding the solutions to war and other global problems could break the vicious circle of violence and pave the way toward the more peaceful development of instability in asia a macro food security perspective peter timmer and david dawe received april accepted november the present paper describes the benefits and costs in qualitative terms of managing food price instability in asia in the context of
in previous sdma proposals the time slots allocated per vehicle per second are specified as one slot per the duration of time period length the duration of the slot length thus the percent of bandwidth utilization in sdma per vehicle bsdma is equal to bsdma lc where is the length of the sensing range in cells lc is the number of lanes and is the time slot length for asdm the number of time slots that are allocated to each vehicle for a given time period is a function of the guard the headway in cells and the guard buffer the duration of the time period is longer than that in other sdmas thus the bandwidth utilization in asdm per vehicle for uniformly distributed traffic can be written as basdm min lc thus for large vehicle headways the performance improvement of asdm approaches its upper bound of the asdm buffer size in order to quantify the improvement yielded by asdm for small vehicle headways a range of typical following distances must be derived one study of driver following behavior found average headways ranging from to s with an average of s at speeds over km to examine time slot km are used to generate the range of typical following distances fig shows the asdm improvements for this range for small headways asdm is able to yield an improvement of between asdm buffer sizes ranging from to cells vi simulation of previous ivc protocols as noted earlier the dsrc protocols are the leading candidates in addition to this improvement the following section described an evaluation of the improvement that asdm in terms of message delivery guarantees by design asdm will deliver its messages given ideal radio propagation conditions the dsrc protocols on the other hand do not guarantee collision free transmissions and therefore may not be able to deliver all messages under asdm s theoretical performance the system simulates the dsrc protocols when allocated the bandwidth required by asdm a simulation system the simulation was comprised of both vehicular mobility generation and dsrc wireless network simulation vehicular mobility generation vehicle mobility data were generated for nonautomated highway and automated highway to generate realistic vehicle mobility for nonautomated highway scenarios corsim is the most widely used microscopic vehicle traffic simulation program in the us as a microscopic traffic simulation it tracks each individual vehicle the vehicle s mobility is determined by driver behavior vehicle performance characteristics and constraints imposed by the roadway geometry and surrounding vehicle densities likely to be in ahss these roadways will enable vehicles to be more tightly spaced than in a conventional highway the additional density of vehicles in these roadways naturally increases the competition for bandwidth the asdm and dsrc protocols are tested in a simulation of an ahs since the primary goal of these simulations is to test simple model of these highways in the simulation the section of the roadway has a fixed number of lanes and all vehicles travel at a fixed speed with a fixed headway the maximum density of the roadway is defined as wireless network simulation the dsrc ivc protocols are implemented in glomosim which is a widely used wireless simulation system developed at the university of california a simulation of the dsrc standard the following parameters were used in the glomosim simulations propagation limit dbm propagation pathloss two ray temperature radio type the model used here is an idealized model in that if the signalto noise ratio is greater than radio rx snr threshold the signal is received without error otherwise the packet is dropped radio rx snr threshold the chosen value corresponds to a transmission range of and equal to ie dbm radio antenna gain the value chosen represents an omnidirectional antenna ie db radio rx sensitivity dbm radio rx threshold dbm ieee data link layer protocol to include dsrc modifications the dsrc class extends the ieee media access layer modifications included changes to the values of the following characteristics the clear channel assessment time was changed from to gs the slot time was changed from to gs length changed due to the slot time and sifs changes from to gs the synchronization time needed for dsrc is significantly shorter than that needed for direct sequence spread spectrum in this characteristic was changed from to gs the ivc periodic message client creates the periodic ivc not forwarded and only vehicles within radio range of the sender will be able to receive them in order to avoid collisions with another client s periodic messages when the client is supposed to send a periodic message it delays the transmission by a random time chosen from the distribution where interval is the desired periodic message interdeparture time simulation scenarios the simulations were executed for four classes of traffic scenarios each scenario consisted of a km section of the roadway after a steady state in the vehicle simulation had been achieved a random s period was selected for simulation from the following scenarios normal highway traffic thirteen scenarios were generated the freeway service patrol evaluation project at the university of california berkeley the lane widths were specified as with a median width of based on traffic data that was collected via loop detectors for march a scenario was created for this roadway that models average traffic without high occupancy vehicle lanes a six lane highway slightly larger than km the maximum vehicle flow of vehicles was chosen because an empirical evaluation of corsim simulations on this network showed it to be the maximum input that yielded free flowing traffic to create additional congestion at the mark the highway was reduced from three lanes to one in addition the running at a capacity of ahs ten scenarios were generated based for an ahs running at a capacity of these simulations provide a range of vehicle densities under which the ivc architectures can be examined moreover the scenarios gauge the ability of the ivc architecture to migrate from an its enhanced highway environment to an ahs environment the
derivative science community the great service of bringing to it the non linear programming topic of sensitivity analysis with their publication their analysis is quite accessible to practitioners for example they utilize the rather intuitive implicit function theorem in their analysis it also remains the most popular tool for producing sensitivity analysis information in traffic equilibrium problems we illustrate through examples how their formula is however less applicable in several ways several ways moreover it relies on direct matrix calculations and therefore in general cannot be applied to large scale networks our sensitivity analysis problem is however quite structured and need not involve matrix calculations at all it amounts to solving a perturbed affine traffic equilibrium problem which is no more difficult to solve than the original one it is in fact easier than the original problem because the route set is fixed and the link cost and demand functions are we utilize the sensitivity analysis in order to create a heuristic solution methodology for a classic bilevel optimization model in transportation science the equilibrium network design problem apart from providing a description of how such a method can be devised with traffic equilibrium and sensitivity analysis instruments at hand our work on implementing and testing it has enabled us to reach some conclusions that may have a main importance for a larger class of bilevel optimization in the field for example our tests show that it is vital that the equilibrium solutions are determined accurately in order to ensure that the bilevel optimization method does not terminate too early the classic tool for traffic equilibrium the frank wolfe algorithm is definitely not up to par when used in tandem with this class of more general traffic models in comparisons with classic methods on known networks the new tool always wins the findings are illustrations only we do not we do not propose to actually use such an algorithm in practice as it ignores the possible non differentiability of an optimal solution to the bilevel problem our algorithm can however be extended such that it generate subgradients thus turning it into a subgradient bundle algorithm for the non differentiable problem at hand ordered pairs of nodes where node is an origin node is a destination and is a subset of n there is a transport demand which may be given by a function of the travel cost we assume that the network is strongly connected that is that at least one route joins each origin destination pair wardrop s user equilibrium principle states that for every od pair the travel costs of the routes by rpq the set of simple routes for od pair by hr the flow on route rpq and by cr the travel cost on the route as experienced by an individual user we introduce the parameter to be present in the sensitivity analysis it is denoted and is assumed to be of dimension d this parameter could be present in one or both of the travel cost and demand functions we assume that the travel cost function has the form rjrj given a value of where j  denotes j  denotes the total number of routes in the network further the demand function is given by rjcj in an application to od estimation is in the order of jcj while j holds in equilibrium network design pricing and control models we also introduce the matrix jcj which is the route od pair incidence matrix then demand feasibility is described by the conditions that rjrj and holds while the wardrop equilibrium conditions for the route flows are that where the value of ppq is the minimal route cost in od pair by the nonnegativity of the route flows the system can more compactly be written as the mixed complementarity problem as we are interested in the sensitivity of link flows we will assume that the route cost is additive for each link the travel cost has the form where r is the vector of link flows the route and link travel costs and flows are related through a route link incidence matrix j whose element k equals one if route utilizes link and zero otherwise route has an additive cost cr if it is the sum of the costs of using all the links defining it in other words cr vl in short then ktt also implicit in this relationship is the assumption that the pair is consistent in the sense that equals the sum of the route flows kh we shall use the representation in terms of as it is an entity for which we can introduce conditions ensuring that uniqueness holds at equilibrium as could be noted above the the link travel cost was assumed to be separable the same assumption is made with respect to the demand function which is supposed to be of the form pk in order to be able to work with an optimization formulation which furthermore admits a unique solution for the given value of and is such that we can apply sensitivity analysis theory we introduce the following assumption which is supposed to hold throughout the paper assumption for each the link travel cost function tl for each the demand function gk for future use let denote the polyhedral set of feasible solutions to in that is the variational inequality problem which characterizes the solution to this problem is stated as characterizes the wardrop conditions stated earlier in we notice that is equivalent to solving the following linear program its lp dual is to the condition is obtained as follows from and cth as is strictly convex therefore the solution in to and equivalently to the variational inequality and to the wardrop conditions is unique we see that from and also the dual entities are unique the basis for our sensitivity analysis is stated for a general variational inequality problem with a differentiable mapping rd rn rn in
the new deep level mines were constructed from older placer or outcrop mines despite increased spending on explosives and timbering these mines still had relatively fragile infrastructures that would not allow the use of large scale steam drills for fear of aggravating the problem of subsidence or cave hence many of the new deep level mines could only be worked by the ceaseless and attack of the rock face by large squads of non white workers with hammer and in turn this new work routine called for white workers who supervised the squads to remain underground for longer periods of time as a result they were compelled to cover a larger work area and thus increase their exposure to hazardous conditions and the likelihood of accidents greater mortality for the entire workforce was also aggravated at this point by management s reluctance to deep level mines that could only be worked with hammer and chisel and those that could sustain the use of drills even though these distinctions were common knowledge among the shocking increases in mortality and accident rates were the net result of a greater concentration of inexperienced workers at the more dangerous mines the introduction of indentured chinese workers and the breaking counter offensive that simultaneously sought to transform the bottom and top strata of the workforce this counter offensive which lasted until the rand rebellion and general strike of the white workers was crafted by the engineers and merely assented to by the mine labor shortage and preparing the ground for indentured chinese labor themselves created when they slashed the monthly wage of unskilled african william lincoln honnold and his close collaborator herbert hoover the future president of the united states who would preside over the beginning of the great depression achieved some notoriety as formidable enemies of south africa s black and white workers on the deep level gold mines during this honnold spent about thirteen years in south africa from to he left just after the the failed uprising of rural afrikaners who resented the prospect of fighting on the british side during world war i and who believed that they were literally losing ground to african peasant farmers despite the promulgation of the native land hoover spent much less time in south africa but his activities particularly his early involvement with the chinese engineering and mining company the powerfully affected the context and actual deployment of the indentured chinese laborers once they arrived in south the cyanide process and indentured chinese labor became the focal points of two distinct but related contributions to the transformation for deep level mining in south africa in both instances the objectives were to humble white labor without impeding the postwar state s reassertion of point of productive extraction of gold ore thousands of feet deeper in the earth the deskilling of white labor that arose out of the use of the cyanide process was a bit of a gamble but the decision to introduce indentured chinese labor into the mines was only made after much deliberation by however these contributions to the transformation of deep level gold mining coalesced around solving the mining industry s labor and hoover s activities gave this process greater focus their activities contrasted sharply with the apparently transparent public proceedings of the transvaal labor commission even the dissenting minority report of the labor commission which claimed that the gold mines needed far fewer workers than the majority report s gave no indication of where or how the requisite number of workers might be acquired the majority but no specific details behind the scenes though the real decision making process took on a different cast on june more than a year before the first chinese recruits sailed out of the port of hong kong honnold wrote a series of letters to influential engineers and bankers in the united states europe and south africa informing them of how the decision to use indentured chinese workers had been made a rickard the managing editor of the mining journal and an international expert on mining costs was honnold s principal correspondent in the united states honnold s letter began by saying cheap white labor from southern or eastern europe would have been preferable but impractical since the strength of organized white labor on the mines made it quite impossible to work whites and blacks together on the same task he went on to say that this element is very fortified although the unions are not it becomes more apparent everyday that we shall have much trouble from this source i feel that the white labor problem will ultimately cause us more trouble than the native honnold then turned to indentured chinese as the lesser of several evils that had been raised during the planning stages rickard and other prominent engineers in the united states had apparently urged honnold recruitment of african americans at an earlier point honnold used the june letter to explain why african americans were out of the question these remarks are not intended for publication but more to put you in touch with the situation as it appears to position out here it is quite impossible for those unfamiliar with local conditions whether it be yourself or your readers to see the matter in its true light there is too much danger of saying something misleading at home but attract either ridicule or resentment here with regard to american niggers they would be the very worst thing that could be introduced aside from the fact that we require cheaper labor than they would provide there is the much greater objection that they would tend to awake a spirit of insubordination among the ordinary natives the nigger at home is always looking for an opportunity to emphasize his idea of his equality with the comes out here as i have had occasion to note he becomes a great nuisance by reason of the distorted american ideas of liberty and equality which he is always
be considered in terms of future familiarity the structure of the rest of the paper is as and the process of its optimum configuration are described an initial carbs based analysis is made on the module student data set in section considering only the first six weeks activity of students towards their final performance in section further carbs analyses are made on different intermediate weeks of the module and in section performance analyses of withdrawn learning and the module data set learning implies education by means of digital media such as computers web pages video conferencing systems and cd roms and learning enabled via the internet the module in question is part of an undergraduate degree run by a uk university developed specifically for online delivery boards mail and virtual classrooms with module materials all held within individual online pages the students are able to access relevant pages on a week by week basis completing associated tasks and discussing the content with a tutor and fellow students hence it is in their interests to participate in each week s activities week these details are recorded by a virtual learning environment system and thereafter reported to the module tutor who has the opportunity to contact individual inactive students a total of students were analysed who fully completed the module a number of students were not included owing to their withdrawal while not used in the performance system in this study the pre preparation of the data set is simply the standardization of the weekly activity values of the students which removes any inherent scale effects of between week activity levels the standardization process simply infers the subtraction of the associated in table show different levels of activity of the online pages accessed over the different weeks as do the standard deviation values also reported are the minimum and maximum values associated with the each week s activity again supporting the variation in activity indeed it is this inherent variation in the utilization of the learning facilities by the students performance analysis the performance classification of the students considered here is based on their final module mark with the threshold defined between less than greater than or equal to described exclusively here as indifferent and good performance respectively technical description of the carbs system this section briefly describes the main classification technique used here namely the carbs system for a more in depth discussion see beynon when used as a carbs are based on dempster shafer theory which itself considers a finite set of elements op called a frame of discernment a mass value is a function such that and s any proper subset s of the frame of discernment within carbs the information from a characteristic value is quantified in a body of evidence denoted by where all assigned mass values sum to unity and there is no belief in the empty set moreover for a student j with ith week s activity ci an activity boe defined as mj has mass values mj and mj which and mj is the level of concomitant ignorance following safranek et al they are given by and ki yi ai and bi are incumbent control variables importantly if either mj or mj is negative they are set to zero and the respective mj is then calculated figure presents the progression from an activity level is first transformed into a confidence value from which it is de constructed into its activity boe made up of a triplet of mass values mj mj and mj the notion of ignorance here is a part of the ambiguity between where there is more certainty in the evidence supporting more or stage in a simplex plot that is a point pj exists within an equilateral triangle such that the least distances from pj to each of the sides of the equilateral triangle are in the same proportion as the values and in figure a number of boes are exhibited as points in the simplex plot which can be nc associated with the student j can be combined using dempster s combination rule into a student boe defined as mj moreover using mj and mj as two independent activity boes mj mj defines their combination given by this process is then used iteratively to combine the method of combination employed here the two example boes and are further considered with their combination to a boe denoted mc and evaluated to be mc and mc the combination process is graphically shown with the simplex coordinate representation of the combined boe mc is more than that associated with in the limit a final object boe will have a lower level of ignorance than that associated with the individual variable boes the configuration of a carbs system depends on the assignment of values to the incumbent control variables with the weekly activity levels standardized nce trigonometric differential evolution with the following operation parameters amplification control crossover constant is an objective function here a positive function that measures the misclassification of students from their known performance classification the equivalence classes and are sets of students known to be classified to and respectively for objects in and the optimum solution is to can attain and hence maximizing a difference value such as mj mj only indirectly affects the associated ignorance rather than making it a direct issue since the ob does not incorporate the respective mj mass values the division of elements of ob by takes account of unbalanced known indifferent and good students is made with the evaluation of average activity boes more formally partitioning the students into the equivalence classes and then the average activity boes defined as ami and ami respectively are given by where j is a student as boes they can be carbs performance classification of students based on the first six weeks activity the analysis here on the module student data set using the carbs system utilizes only the first six weeks activity of the students on the
is close to that of ethylidyne hydrogenation involves molecules weakly adsorbed on such a carbonaceous layer the latter was never observed under uhv conditions since in insensitivity of the reaction is therefore explained if it occurs on top of the carbonaceous layer the structure and the possible defects of the underlying substrate do not play a significant role these conclusions are supported also by a more recent investigation in which sfg surface vibrational spectroscopy was employed to monitor the adsorbate evolution under reaction pt and pt the partial pressure of the reactants during the experiment is torr for and torr of diluted in torr of he it is apparent that the relative concentrations of ethylidyne and di bonded ethylene are quite different for the two surfaces while their turnover rates are essentially for ethylene hydrogenation the most likely candidates are therefore weakly bound species such as bonded ethylene and ethyl unfortunately the only evidence for that is a shoulder at on both surfaces which is attributed by the authors to a fermi resonance of an ethyl species the surface sensitivity of the hydrogenation take home message can be given on this issue indeed at variance with the results shown in the previous paragraph we mention the work by doyle et al who compared the hydrogenation of ethene and trans pentene on well defined precovered model catalysts by varying the size of pd particles in a controlled way they found a strong particle size the integral alkane desorption signal for pd surface area as a function of particle size is shown in fig it is apparent that while the signal increases with increasing particle size and grows in a fashion similar to the concentration of terrace sites on the clusters the one is nearly constant the authors concluded then that pentene hydrogenation proceeds via a bonded intermediate the hydrogenation efficiency the mechanism for hydrogenation of ethene must be different to justify its structure insensitivity experimental and theoretical studies indicate bonded ethene converting to an ethyl group and then to ethane as the intermediate reaction from the brief overview given here it is already evident that even hydrogenation often given as a key example of surface insensitive reaction escapes any easy classification as demonstrated by the examples above recently other intriguing and possibly promising cases have been found eg acrolein hydrogenation becomes surface sensitive or more properly size sensitive for au particles smaller than nm for surface insensitive hydrogenation over a carbonaceous layer vice versa not all reactions involving a carbonaceous layer are surface insensitive after the clear cut demonstration that the carbonaceous overlayer plays a key role in ethylene hydrogenation investigations trying to describe its formation and its catalytic activity were performed such studies were reviewed already in showing that the surface depending on temperature as a general rule the higher the temperature the higher the degree of dehydrogenation of the layer which ultimately gives a graphitic layer the situation is entirely different for saturated hydrocarbons which yield carbonaceous residues having ratios in the range ie intermediate between values of polyacetylene and causing the deactivation of the surface of the catalyst this is not always the case since a number of beneficial effects of the carbonaceous layer have indeed been established with a possible increase in selectivity since this topic goes clearly beyond the scope of the present review we refer to for more details and for reference to the original pressure and for high excess of hydrogen pentane is the main reaction product at lower pressure and hydrogen pentyne concentration however hydrogenation proceeds slower and leads almost uniquely to pentene since in the very first stages of the reaction carbon dissolves in the near sub surface region and a pd surface phase forms the latter is clearly the active phase in the regime of selective hydrogenation of hydrogen from taking part in the reaction moreover total fragmentation of a significant fraction of the reactant alkynes molecules is required for the reactive site to form since different crystal facets have different efficiency in the dehydrogenation of the first molecules and in the lay down process different carbonaceous layers form this justifies the different selectivity of palladium catalyst in alkyne facets bulk dissolved hydrogen can easily emerge and shift the reaction selectivity toward alkane instead of alkene formation influence of defects on hydrocarbon trapping neopentane on pt the investigations of alkane dissociative chemisorption indicate that in general two different mechanisms are molecular beam experiments the direct mechanism dominates at high translational energies and is temperature independent the trapping mediated mechanism is dominant at low energy and is strongly affected by surface temperature a key example is shown in fig reporting the temperature dependence of the initial dissociation probability of neopentane on pt for e and e when in order to establish the relevance of defects experiments were performed on two different pt surfaces having concentration of defects of respectively such amounts were determined by co thermal desorption experiments exploiting the well known difference in the binding energy of co at pt defect sites and at closed packed terraces the dependence at e measured for the two surfaces is shown in fig the higher concentration of surface defects clearly enhances the reactivity of the surface for neopenthane dissociation this result was confirmed by measuring the sticking probability on a surface sputtered with ar ions prior to exposure which is increased by with respect to an ordered surface furthermore the difference in the activation energy of the two surfaces with different defect concentrations is close to the experimental error the authors model allowing dissociation at defects only and rapid migration of molecularly adsorbed species then they concluded that at low energy dissociative chemisorption of neopenthane occurs only at defect sites and molecules move along the surface until they find a defect where they can dissociate since they are trapped their lifetime decreases with increasing surface temperature a route to dissociation for molecules which are trapped thus not strongly distorted while moving across the surface the direct mechanism on the
coding of the sensory data with sparse codes and principal components discussed in this paper also makes important contact with the ideas discussed in if data rate is the bottle neck it would be useful to consider a coarser representation the price one pays is in detectability the paper introduces the use of coupled oscillators as decoders delays are important areas of design that are the subject of future research in the study of networks of mobile visual sensors olfati saber a fax and murray bconsensus and cooperation in networked multiagent systems multiagent systems that consist of many interacting units with low cost embedded sensing communication and computational devices appear in broad cooperative tasks in multiagents systems including flocking formation control rendezvous in space synchronization of coupled oscillators and information fusion in sensor networks the present paper provides an in depth survey of existing consensus algorithms and convergence and performance analysis for such algorithms in presence of variable network topology due to this paper uncovers a synergy among diverse fields of engineering and science such as control theory complex networks distributed computing spectral graph theory matrix theory and markov chains the paper illustrates the concept of bcooperation among dynamic systems via a detailed discussion of formation control for networked multivehicle systems the role of bsmall world wireless networks backbone of networked control systems oh schenato chen and sastry btracking and coordination of multiple agents using sensor networks system design algorithms and experiments part of the special issue discusses recent research on advanced wireless networks aimed at meeting the requirements of networked control systems in for pursuit evasion games with the aid of a large scale sensor network these arise from the inconsistency of sensor measurements due to packet loss communication delay and false detections and from the necessity of optimal coordination of a large number of agents novel algorithms based on multiple layers of data fusion and on a real time hierarchical coordination architecture are proposed b layering as optimization decomposition a mathematical theory of network architectures networked control systems in this special issue depend on the design of the underlying networks where architectural decisions are particularly important the b layered protocol stack is a key manifestation of modularized network this emerging framework and provides a unifying analytic foundation for layered network architectures conceptually it approaches the issue of distributed network resource allocation with modularized design through optimization theory and decomposition theory the mathematical methods surveyed in this paper consist of both those discussed in other papers of the special issue decompositions as with many of the other papers of the special issue there is also a discussion of the implications of the surveyed theory to practical communication networks a first principles approach to network design the paper illuminates a promising synergy between the control of networks and networked control reader to the field of networked control systems to provide a description of the papers that follow to mention some notable research topics that are not covered here and to describe important research directions you the reader will be the judge of whether we have been successful again it is stressed that not all aspects of current research have been covered and we apologize to the course of two years and it has been made possible primarily because of the significant time and effort the authors of its papers have invested we would like also to recognize the contributions of the reviewers who helped the authors refine and focus the ideas in the manuscripts without their help the issue would not have been the same finally we would like to thank the managing editor jim calder another look at provable security abstract we give an informal analysis and critique of several typical provable security results in some cases there are intuitive but convincing arguments for rejecting the conclusions suggested by the formal terminology and proofs whereas in other cases the formalism seems to be consistent with common sense we discuss the reasons why the search for mathematically convincing to support the security of public key systems has been an important theme of researchers however we argue that the theorem proof paradigm of theoretical mathematics is often of limited relevance here and frequently leads to papers that are confusing and misleading because our paper is aimed at the general mathematical public it is self contained and as jargon free as possible during online purchases maintain confidentiality of medical records or safeguard national security information how can she be sure that the system is secure what type of evidence could convince her that a malicious adversary could not somehow break into the system and learn her secret at first glance it seems that this question has a straightforward answer at the heart of any public key cryptosystem is a one way function a function for which it is computationally infeasible to find the inverse for example the system might be based on the function xe where is an integer whose prime factors are secret and is a constant exponent we decide to pad by putting a random number in front of it but since this does not take up the full bits we just fill in zero bits to the left of and when alice receives our ciphertext she decrypts it checks that it has the right form with zero bits at the left end if not she informs us that there was an error and asks us to resend and then deletes the zero bits and to obtain in that case bleichenbacher can break the system in the sense of finding the plaintext message by sending a series of carefully chosen ciphertexts and keeping a record of which ones are rejected because their eth root modulo is not of the proper prescribed number of zero bits in order to protect alice and her friends from clever adversaries who are out to steal their secrets we clearly need much more elaborate criteria for security than just
tangent the growth of arm like structures as a result regions with a reticular structure composed of narrow arms with parallel sides have very low energy under this model and are thus highly favored for certain ranges of parameters such regions are in fact energy minima the energy thus makes a very good prior for networks the likelihood energy e is also composed of three or in other words in which the road is brighter than its environment the second linear term incorporates a simple line detector filter measurement the third quadratic hoac term describes the joint behavior of the data at pairs of points on the contour given the geometry at the pair of points it favors situations in which pairs of nearby points with antiparallel opposite directions while pairs of nearby points with parallel tangent vectors lie on large image gradients that point in the same direction figures and show two results obtained using this model from a satellite image and an aerial image respectively two points are worth noting first the region occupied a rounded rectangle slightly smaller than the image was used for both the experiments the amount of prior knowledge included in the model means that no special initialization is necessary these results are satisfactory most of the network is extracted in each case however they are clearly not completely correct consider for instance the two images in the top row are shown in the bottom row clearly there are gaps in the extracted networks that do not correspond to gaps in the real road network rather they correspond to interruptions in the imaged network places where the luminance of the road changes abruptly and ceases to be different from its immediate surroundings these interruptions are caused by the presence of trees buildings and so on close to the or by casting shadows on the road some close up examples of such interruptions are shown in fig the presence of gaps in the extracted network caused by interruptions in the imaged network is the main failure mode of the model and is therefore the first point to address in any attempt to improve the model this is the subject of the next section in fact three reasons for the presence of gaps corresponding to interruptions two connected to the model and one connected to the gradient descent algorithm used to minimize the energy first the prior knowledge about geometry described by eg does not distinguish between two distant arms that each the contribution to the energy is the same thus the model as it stands does not capture our prior knowledge that road networks for example usually do not possess such gaps it does not describe what might be called the continuity of roads second the prior knowledge about the image to be expected from a given network described by e does not include expected normal to its sides these gradients are expected to be parallel on the same side of the road and antiparallel on opposite sides and the line detector is expected to respond strongly in the interior of the road all these expectations are violated by situations such as those shown in fig third the gradient descent algorithm may be unable to this is for two reasons first the configuration with a gap may lie at a local energy minimum created by contributions from both e and eg the likelihood term e contributes because at the edges of an interruption there are image gradients moving the extremities of the region off these gradients increasing e the prior term eg contributes because in order to prevent arms from appearing all over the image domain the parameters in eg are adjusted so that the energy per unit length of an arm is slightly positive this means that if the arms on either side of a gap were to extend towards one another eg would increase second a local energy maximum is created by eg when two extremities are less than a few arms in the network causes the extremities to repel one another like two magnetic north poles the top row of fig illustrates this behavior the figure shows the result of a purely geometric evolution using eg and starting from the leftmost image the two arms extend but repel one another resulting in a disconnected network the points made in this paragraph are all algorithmic issues they mean that once a gap has formed it is hard to close it not that gaps necessarily form for all interruptions sometimes the data configuration means that an interruption does not produce a gap each of these issues leads to a different approach to the gap closure problem the first suggests that we should modify we decrease the possibility of their occurring in the extracted network the second suggests that we should modify the likelihood term by allowing for the possibility that interruptions may occur this means introducing extra variables to model interruptions in principle both these approaches should be followed since they are both required by the phenomena we are trying to model in practice the second approach increases the complexity of the optimization problem significantly and consequently we will not pursue it in this work particularly since a modification of the prior term seems to be sufficient to solve the problem properties than gradient descent the other is to attempt to remove the local extremes created by the energy in conjunction with a modification of the prior term to increase the energy of configurations with gaps this should allow the gap to close in the course of normal gradient descent we opt for the second approach here a notion that will shortly be made more precise since the energy has to take into account the joint geometry at distant points of the contour it must necessarily be a hoac energy the minimal choice is a quadratic energy and this turns out to be sufficient the energy will increase with the separation between extremities up
punctures the surface of its textuality not unlike the uneasy correlation between parameter driven design techniques and built form in contemporary architecture what we encounter in this impossible house is a figure for a spatial dimension a topological figure that cannot find adequate representation in the forms of orthographic recording exhaustively inventoried by the novel but that still manages to exert an im mense impact as the very motor force driving both the host of recording technologies thematized in the novel and the recording technology that is the text itself this figural labor explicit at the moment when zampano compares the house to an actual icefall similar to the khumbu icefall at the base of mount everest where blue seracs and chasms change unexpectedly throughout the day and night navidson is the first one to discover how that place also seems to constantly change unlike the icefall however not even a single hairline fracture appears in those walls absolutely nothing visible to the eye provides a reason or even evidence of those terrifying can in a matter of moments reconstitute a simple path into an extremely complicated one here through its very difference from a physical entity we can see the house for what it is a flexible topological form capable of infinite and seamless modification a post visual figure immune to the laws governing the phenomenology of photography cinema and video a logic of transformation whose output is disproportionate to its input in this perspective the house is nothing a figure for the digital its paradoxical presence as the impossible absence at the core of the novel forms a provocation that as we shall see is analogous in its effects to the provocation of the digital that this analogy by effect surfaces most insistently at the point where the text s thematic concern with the digital coincides with its most extreme typographical deformation can hardly be fortuitous indeed this coincidence might be considered the culmination of the text s the digital the moment where this latter shades into a concern with the digital as a subterranean deformational force that threatens the integrity of the chapter recounts exploration in which the adventurer holloway and his team encounter further evidence of the house s warped expansions as well as the bestial growl that precisely by concretizing the unknown danger will wind up driving holloway out of his mind and ultimately to his the narration of this exploration and serving to interrupt its progression are a series of typological innovations upside down and horizontal footnotes that literally carve into the space of the text certainly the highlight of this experimentation is footnote a blue outlined frame set near the top of the page and containing a list of everything that is not in the house here the outside world punctures the closure of the fictional world in a manner since this list could be extended infinitely and the formal deformations to which it submits the novel put the latter s long standing stability as a storage technology into question not only does this list of what s not in the house run on through fourteen right hand pages of the manuscript but in its appearance on the left hand pages it presents the text in reverse as if the normally opaque text were suddenly rendered transparent or at the very least a see through or reflective portal this play with page layout and function culminates in a blank blue out lined box followed on the very next page by a solid blue box and on the next by a larger unframed box of blank white space imposed directly on and obscuring a single passage devoted to the capacity of digital technology to manipulate images thus while it playfully alludes to the capacity of text to mimic the effects of technical recording media this culmination also fore a deeper engagement of the text with digital technology made to coincide with a citation championing the improvements in real time orthographic recording technology the abrupt growth of the text box into an unwieldy blank field obstructing the text beneath hints at the potential disjunction between textuality and technical recording here we can see clearly how the novel s thematic interest in coupling orthographic recording with textual deformation is a pretext for a more concerning the rehabilitation of fiction in the wake of the digital that is why the just invoked passage championing improvements in orthographesis goes on to conclude with a consideration of how the digital differs categorically from low end that is analog technology rather than extending the scope of orthographic recording digital manipulation threatens to suspend the orthographic function of recording per se digital manipulation allows for the creation of almost imagination can come up with all in the safe confines of an editing suite what the digital here signifies is the wholesale substitution of the productive imagination for the registration of the real the triumph of fiction over documentation it is in this sense that the fictional house can and must be understood as a figure for the digital it challenges techniques of orthographic recording and by evading capture in any form reveals the digital to be a force as such to be the very force of fiction itself media much more than just a thematic focal point the impossible house that is literally larger inside than outside plays the role of catalyst for the events and actions that transpire within the novel and more than just a motor for narration it triggers a medial agon in which print s capacity to mimic technical orthographic recording attests not simply to its flexibility but far more significantly in my opin ion to its documenting the undocumentable impact of the digital even as it reconfigures the novel from story telling vehicle to interface onto a virtually limitless universe of information the thematization of mediation serves first and fore most to foreground the paradoxical privilege enjoyed by
and to provide design models for beech glulam an overview of the conducted work and research is given below regression equations were derived to predict the mechanical properties of long board sections and long finger joints the structural properties of a new calculation model consisting of a simulation programme and a finite element programme was developed this model is appropriate to numerically reproduce point bending tests according to full size beams with combined lay up having mechanical properties of beech glulam can be analysed in an experimental investigation point bending tests on full size tests and the numerical results is given to verify the calculation model point bending tests on finger joints taking into account visual and mechanical grading were conducted the results clarify the influence of the grading method on the strength of finger joints different visual and mechanical grading procedures partly suitable for practical application were the boards the numerical determination of bending strength of high beams considering the grading proposals provides a database making it possible to describe the laminating effect and to work out a design model for beech glulam modelling lamellae in longitudinal direction of the lamellae the following empirical equations were developed to determine the mechanical properties of lamellae discretized in the following equations an additional index denotes finger joints the extensive database describing the tension and compression tests on board sections and finger joints was provided by glos be found in and general concepts of simulating glulam beams in mechanical properties of board sections the regression equations to predict the mechanical properties of long board sections the moe is closely correlated with the strength hence the moe is modelled first and appears as independent variable when modelling the strength is the oven dry density of beech and is the moisture content mechanical properties of finger joints the regression equations and predict the mechanical properties of finger joints in the compression zone of the beam aicher et al carried out tensile tests on finger joints they found a correlation with the range in length the distance between the finger joint and the beginning of the range was mm the correlation indicates the use of the minimum dynamic moe edyn min as independent variable when predicting the mechanical properties in the tensile zone of the beam the equations and are used when modelling mechanical grading by measuring consider the moe as grading parameter of the boards hence connections between boards with a low and high moe are possible for this case the equations and applies and indicate the smallest and highest density respectively of the joined boards knot ratio and moisture content boards were examined to determine these properties three sawmills located in germany each delivered about one third of the testing material see table the gross density and the dynamic moe as grading parameter of each board were measured the measurement is described in the boards were and this allowed a combined lay up with lamellae of high stiffness in the outer zone of the test beams the knots were determined according to considering only the single knot with the deb value all the knots appearing in the boards were taken into account in order to reproducing their appearance while simulating the lamellae a typical feature of beech is the maximum deb value it is evident that the dynamic moe decreases with increasing maximum deb value the trend is independent of the source of the boards the linear relation is superposed by a strong residual scattering hence the following proposals for mechanical grading in section additionally consider the maximum deb value as a second grading the structural properties of the lamellae is based on random number generation taken from density functions these were fitted to the empirical data the fit was carried out for each of the grades in table and each structural property the advantage of this approach is a very exact simulation of the structural properties within a grade the lognormal and beta for each grade the grading influence on the statistics and on the shape of the density functions is evident fig exemplifies this for grades and the relation between the oven dry density of beech and the gross density at about content is given by equation the fraction of boards with knots decreases with higher grades mean and std deviation show a similar trend there are as shown in fig significant differences between the shape of the fitted beta density functions further deb values being smaller than the maximum deb value appearing along the board are simulated following the method developed this feature shows table fig displays the moderate influence of the grading technique according to table on the number of sections with knots the fitted density curves are quite similar the histogram and fitted lognormal density for the board length is shown in fig the distribution of the empirical data is irregular this is caused by the the board ends with regard to finger jointing causes a reduction up to hence a maximum range of about can be observed calculation model simulation programme the simulation programme is comparable to the real glulam production a continuous lamella is generated consisting of simulated boards and finger joints the mechanical properties are determined in steps variation are determined individually for each board here the effect of autocorrelation is taken into account the result are boards of low up to high quality the activation of different density functions enables the simulation of a grading process according to the method in table as well as the grading proposals in table with regard to practical application in general beams with combined there is as a minimum lamellae in the outer zone the dynamic moe is a dependent variable and the leading mechanically determined grading parameter in the simulation programme he is calculated from the stiffness properties of a simulated board with formula the common rule of serial connection of springs having different stiffness the factor of considers variable moe of a single section and is the
the search for isolated success stories or examples of best practice this can be achieved by developing research that attempts to understand the dynamics of food systems in regional economies the challenge for research is to make sense of the spatial and temporal dimensions of changing landscapes and changing patterns of land use and adaptation while understanding the ar cultural and science based understandings of the environment natural resources and livelihoods at international national regional and local levels acknowledgments the research on which this paper is based was sponsored by the natural resource management systems programme of the uk department for international development views expressed in this paper are those of the authors and of louvain to further develop analysis of remote sensing data we would also like to thank jane guyer for her assistance encouragement and help ew china s local and national fertility policies at the end of the twentieth century china s fertility decline is widely considered to be the product of a draconian undertaken instead for over two decades china s national fertility policy has been mostly referred to as a one child policy such a characterization originates from at least three sources first since china s fertility policy has required that a substantial segment of the chinese population follow a one child per couple rule second while important modifications have been made to the initial policy over the past two and half decades most such the local level which makes it difficult to summarize and accurately describe the policy at the national level the chinese government not wishing to appear to bow to international criticism of its birth planning program has done little to clarify its policy or to publicize policy modifications third a systematic depiction of china s fertility policy requires measurement and analysis of local level fertility policy data that survey variations in china s fertility policy as of the late in an attempt to describe local policy and the implications of the aggregation of local policies for national policy following a brief discussion of the politics of population policymaking in contemporary china we summarize fertility policy regulations within china s our survey illustrates the intricacies and complexities of the population control process in china of the policy stipulated fertility level in china based on local fertility policies using data collected on fertility policy for prefecture level units in china the administrative level below the province we estimate fertility levels that would obtain locally if all married couples had births at the levels permitted by local policy chinese birth control officials term this fertility level as policy fertility china s one child per couple policy was formulated in the wake of the cultural revolution as an emergency measure to slow rapid population growth and to facilitate modernization goals couples in rural china were allowed to have two children if they met certain criteria most notably if they lived in a poor area or had only a daughter exemptions to the one child rule often came with a spacing requirement stipulating a minimum of four or six years between the first and second birth as a result while the fertility of china s urban population with a no more than percent of the total population has remained near the level of one child per couple the majority of rural couples who have one child go on to have a second birth since the early days of the one child policy its implementation has varied from one locale to another often down to the level of rural villages scharping although population control remains basic state policy the central government has refrained from implementing a set of uniform policies across the country china s central legislative body the national people s congress struggled for two decades to draft and pass a national family planning law when china s first population and family planning law was finally enacted in september it advocated rather one child modifications to the state policy of population control have been left to each province under the general principle of slowing down population growth and encouraging only one child per couple localization of one of the country s most important national policies is by no means unprecedented in china s political process decentralization is a key feature of the chinese political system and a recurring governing strategy practice has become more prominent during the last two decades and more relevant to population control as the government s capacity to regulate population reproduction has been challenged by the increasing liberalization of economic production while past studies have documented the localized nature of policy implementation the localized nature of policymaking has rarely been studied to with the policy shift known as opening small holes in march of that year china s state family planning commission submitted a report to the central leadership of the chinese communist party appealing for a more realistic birth control policy the report suggested opening small holes by allowing more couples to have a second child and closing big holes by further limiting births of parity three and higher as well as unauthorized second came in the wake of mounting difficulties in enforcing a nationwide one child policy and a backlash against the sterilization and forced induced abortion campaigns of the report was approved by the ccp s central committee on april in the form of document no in addition to agreeing that more exceptions should be made to allow for a second child and appealing for less forceful methods of socioeconomic conditions across china and stipulated that regulations regarding birth control were to be made in accordance with local conditions and to be approved by the provincial standing committee of the people s congress and provincial level governments throughout the most provinces in china drafted their own birth control regulations lack of research on localized policies has resulted in much confusion even the general public know that china does not enforce a strict one child policy for all some observers have
in archaeological methods and thoughts with particular development of scientific techniques during the and development of interpretative techniques from with places now being pursued for exploration to discover how people had lived in some cases individuals from the past can be focused on given the right kind of scientific analysis matched against documentary linguistic and other kinds of research evidence nontraditional uses and users of places are being explored as are alternative lenses for the inter different perspectives in essence then there has been a three stage shift in the approach of archaeology to the study of the past from material culture to people and more recently from people to lifeways the widening of expertise and interpretative lenses used by archaeologists in this latter past environments are thus now being explored from particular points of view be they physical spatial or socio cultural designation documentation prepared by unesco nowhere else is it possible to identify any archaeological site that even remotely stands comparison with these two classical towns such a statement is based on the circumstances surrounding the almost instantaneous destruction of the city in and latterly professional form has had the opportunity to undertake systematic excavation and analysis on a huge scale hindered very little by the usual taphonomic processes that traditionally affect the preservation of archaeological remains although the ruins had been known about the mid century the king and queen of naples were the patrons of this salvage work and the royal collection of items taken from the site was catalogued in scientific excavation began at pompeii in the when giuseppe fiorelli excavated full buildings consolidated walls reroofed creating plaster casts of humans killed by the volcanic eruption which had been preserved as body shaped voids in the overlying ash and volcanic material further sustained and large scale excavations were subsequently undertaken in the early part of the century with the aim of uncovering and preserving specific named houses and other structures the town this type of area excavation has been more systematic in its research aims uncovering more of the history of the settlement prior to the volcanic eruption rather than on retrieval or recovery of high profile spot finds or individual structures the most recent excavations have seen the research agenda move on again and these are geared around understanding an area or by function as reported on by for example ellis and ellis and devore reconstruction of past environments both virtually using computer technology and physically using experimental archaeology techniques are now adding to archaeology s disciplinary development particularly in providing audiences for new interpretative networks were of critical importance to the romans the god jupiter was thought to watch over the ius hospitia in the roman empire the violation of hospitality was a great crime and impiety in rome the poet ovid in metamorphose highlighted this when he told the story of the gods jupiter and mercury who came to earth in cottage of baucis and philemon baucis and philemon had little to offer but generously shared what they had they were about to kill their only goose to feed their guests when the gods revealed themselves jupiter and mercury took baucis and philemon up the mountain to see the valley in which the homes of which they then became the priests private hospitality was established between individuals by mutual presents or by the mediation of a third person and hallowed by religion when hospitality was formed between two individuals they would divide between themselves a token called a tessera hospitalis by which afterwards they the image of jupiter emphasizing jupiter s divine protection of hospitality when this kind of hereditary hospitality was established it could not be dissolved except by a formal declaration and in this case the tessera hospitalis was broken into pieces although similar in nature to that of ancient greece private hospitality seems to have been roman by ties of hospitality was deemed even more sacred and to have greater claims upon the host than that of a person connected by blood or affinity the connection of hospitality with a foreigner imposed various obligations upon a roman among those obligations were to receive in accustomed to stay there were also duties of protection and in case of need to represent a guest as their patron in the courts of justice gorman notes that hospitality in rome was never exercised in an indiscriminate manner as it had been in the heroic age of ancient greece and that the custom of without any formal agreement between the parties and it was deemed an honourable duty to receive distinguished guests into the house public hospitality seems likewise to have existed at a very early period among the nations throughout the city the front gates of the houses were thrown open and all sorts of things placed for general use in these kind and generous acts of hospitality led to long lasting friendship between the host and the guests and it was from these personal bonds that the public ties of hospitality were later to be formed romans and hospitality the social act of hospitality provision and consumption is much harder to quantify the impacts of cultural artefacts such as buildings or the discovery of cooking implements on the formation of historical evidence in a tangible sense provide essential cornerstones on the how and the when of the puzzle they do not however not have the ability to experience actual roman hospitality events or sample exact food dishes and made in perfect measure in the correct conditions this frustration is compounded as contemporary romans do not consume much of the food that their ancestors had enjoyed although an examination of modern and popular mediterranean dishes indicates the survival of elements of the old cuisine modern interpretation of the writings of the of the times together with archaeological findings can however be used to help create a framework of consumption in order to attempt an analysis of the intangible why a structuralist approach is required which involves the extraction of meanings and the examination of individual lifestyle and consumption paradigms hospitality and the culinary arts were very
of the rankings obtained by the interval type fes with width variation plotted against the rankings obtained by the original type fes it can distribution of nonstationary fes rankings obtained with the addition of noise lower and upper bounds of interval type fes rankings obtained with the addition of noise distribution of nonstationary fes rankings obtained with the addition of noise lower and upper bounds of interval type fes rankings obtained with the addition of noise distribution of white noise lower and upper bounds of interval type fes rankings obtained with the addition of noise i best models of inter and intraexpert variation figs shows the graph of inter expert variation overlaid with the boundaries of rankings obtained for the interval type fes for a selection of different variation mechanisms and values of in the ideal situation the lower and upper boundaries observed however it is highly improbable that such a perfect match would ever be obtained in practice if the interval type fes boundaries collapsed to zero width then all expert variations would lie outside the boundaries if on the other hand the boundaries were expanded to the maximum then all expert variations would lie inside neither of these two extremes are appropriate for capturing a notion of figs and show the scatter of intraexpert variation overlaid with boundaries in variability of the best models of interexpert variability iv discussion all human beings including experts exhibit variation in when presented with the same data has been advocated as a key advantage of computerized expert systems in this paper a new type of fuzzy expert system termed a nonstationary fes has been presented in a case study in order to examine whether the inter and intraexpert variability found in a particular decision making domain can be successfully modelled using an fes in variation into an fes have been proposed and the effect of these mechanisms have been investigated by creating nonstationary fess to allow the distributions of outputs to be studied and by creating interval type fess to allow the lower and upper boundaries of outputs to be studied in the case study presented here it has been found that in the width of membership functions and intraexpert variability it can be observed from these trials that there is a direct relationship between the uncertainty in the membership functions used in the nonstationary fes and interval type fes not surprisingly as the variation in the membership functions is increased the variation in decision making is observed to increase however it is interesting to note that the nature of the variation in closely the elliptic envelope observed in the interexpert variability can be mimicked quite closely by the nonstationary fes it is not clear at the present time why variation in the center of membership functions apparently causes a much higher degree of variability than similar levels of variation in the width it may be tentatively suggested that the center point of the membership functions in an fes has more effect on the system than the widths of the membership functions however it may be that this observed effect is purely an artefact of the rules used in this particular system and is not a general finding but this would need to be explored further before general conclusions may be reached rather than the more common gaussian membership functions there is no specific reason for this other than they had been found in empirical studies to better match the experts opinions of what the membership functions should look like of course whether this is in any way relevant is a matter among other things as to whether the experts had with type interval sets based on sigmoidal primary membership functions have not been established here it is possible that in general the type inferencing used may not hold in all cases however the fact that the type system produced the same result as the type fes when the intervals were reduced to zero is a hopeful sign that the inference may be valid in general present we make two suggestions of scenarios in which we believe they may be useful in expert system validation expert systems might be validated using a form of turing test in which a panel of experts must differentiate between the expert system under validation and a group of their peers if an intelligent system cannot be differentiated from its human counterparts identified due to its lack of variability a nonstationary fes which exhibits the same variability as the human participants might be better placed to pass such a test in situations where a range of opinions is desirable in some situations a variety of alternative decisions might be useful whereas an average decision is less useful or even undesirable consider for example a situation where a driver ahead two decisions might be recommended to avoid the imminent collision turn left or turn right either is acceptable but the average decision is not nonstationary systems may be able to produce a range of alternative decisions from which the human decision maker may choose the best pardoxically almost many practical successes of fuzzy we believe that nonstationary fess may be a useful step in increasing the uptake of fuzzy methods in modelling human reasoning future work the research on understanding and modelling the dynamics of variation in human decision making is ongoing there are many avenues of investigation that may be explored the relationship between nonstationary fess and interval type fess boundaries of interval type fes decisions are theoretically identical to the limits of the nonstationary decisions it may be that there is a role for non stationary fess in being approximators to general type inferencing an non stationary fes is implemented as a type fes as mentioned in section iii it is trivial to use nonuniformly distributed random numbers in the variation of the membership were to be run times then statistics on the mean and standard deviation of for example the output centroid could easily
received from another household as table shows meals were consumed in households than the consumer s household scope measures the number of households with whom a focal household shares irrespective of how many meals were shared in toki the scope of sharing ranges from to with a mean of this means that on average a household was observed to share meals with about four of the seven other households in the village an average household gave meals times to other household members during the month sampling period five of the eight households not share meals with members of half of the other households in the village during the sampling period this does not necessarily mean that they did not transfer food rather no member of the other households was observed eating within the confines of their household balance like intensity can be viewed generally or specifically specific balance in meal sharing is the difference positive or negative between household dyads in general balance is the sum of meals given to all non household members less the sum of meals received from all other households figure is a histogram of specific balance between all unique household dyads mean specific balance is which means that the average household is receiving about two and a half more meals than it is returning the mode is zero indicating perfect balance in all six cases of perfect balance there was no meal sharing between the household dyads some measures of exchange are informative tests of the various models whereas others simply provide descriptive context a model of reciprocal altruism can be tested by correlating specific giving and receiving intensity between unique household dyads if household a gives a substantial amount to household then household should reciprocate by giving a similar amount to household a however since household size varies considerably and there are a relatively small number of meal we feel that measuring giving and receiving as a percentage of all such acts represents a more reliable test of reciprocal altruism if reciprocal altruism governs exchange relations between households one would also expect that exchange events between household dyads should be correlated if they were not then one household could be seen as exploiting the other a violation of reciprocal altruism as others have noted however costs and benefits are symmetric through time or for each member of the exchange dyad this is not always true since costs of production and benefits of consumption can vary for each dyad as a consequence of situational factors given the limitations of the data and the possibility that reciprocation can occur through trade we are hesitant to claim that balance is a strong test of reciprocal altruism in contrast to meal sharing trade occurs when different currencies are gurven marlowe for example one could reciprocate a meal with a food transfer or with labor assistance nevertheless we feel that balance is an important concept and we would expect that households that engage in high levels of exchange should have more balanced meal sharing relationships than households that do not to analyze balance more accurately we developed a method of calculating balance when the volume of exchange across household dyads varies greatly households with a lower total volume of exchange will almost invariably appear to be more balanced than those with a higher total volume of exchange hypothetical data in table depict this problem and its solution through a measure we call proportional balance the standard balance measurement seems to show that dyad a exhibits the however the volume of exchange is more than ten times greater in than in a while the balance figure is less than five times greater proportional balance normalizes the measurement of balance based on exchange volume and expresses the difference between the amounts given and received as a fraction of the total volume of exchange between two households this results in a closed interval of values from to a value of signifies perfect balance and other values ratio should have high levels of receiving intensity and correspondingly low levels of giving intensity therefore ratios should correlate negatively with and specific giving intensity and positively with receiving intensity in addition households with high ratios should exhibit high negative balances for kin selection models to be supported there should be positive correlations between relatedness and specific and general giving and receiving intensity that is close kin should both give more to each other than to distant kin and receive tolerate relatively high levels of imbalance in exchange a pattern documented in ye kwana garden labor exchange table scope of exchange or number of households with whom each household exchanged and number of meals shared figure histogram of specific exchange balance between all dyads table example of balance and the proportional measure of balance household gave and received meals from all other households in the village and the degree to which households are in balance these distributions of meal transfers were then associated with measures of household relatedness consumer to producer ratios and household propinquity given the nature of ye kwana households and the collaborative production and consumption of food the measurement of relatedness is analytically problematic was measured as the mean relatedness between all members of each household paired with members of every other household in the village this produced an half matrix this method is identical to the procedure followed by hames in a study of garden labor exchange other studies have measured relatedness as the closest relatedness between any two members of household dyads to our knowledge few been made to justify whether relatedness should be measured between families overall as we do here or between the two most closely related individuals in two families another feasible method would be to measure the relatedness between household heads nevertheless we use mean relatedness between households here because shared resources are usually a joint household production effort and reflect a cost that affects all members in the donor household and because members of a receiving
narrative sources were filtered and edited in order to conform to florentine marriage conventions in this case only the use of a framework derived from guido delle colonne s historia destructionis troiae as well as details from raoul lefevre s histoire de jason could make the story of jason and medea into an exemplary history with positive messages for both lorenzo tornabuoni and his bride one that has survived long after the end of the marriage it was designed to commemorate the paintings still vividly celebrate the complex interaction and mingling of classicism and chivalry that was such a salient but still underestimated characteristic of florentine culture in the vasarian golden age of the and peoples communities in bosnia by robert hayden depictions of the balkans conflicts in most western academic and journalistic writings are based on an unreal reading of life as those in the west do not want it while those of prewar bosnia manifest an imagination of a bosnian community not shared by many bosnians themselves international political actors insist on efforts to create a bosnia in accordance with their own images rather than accept that many of the people there view world and their fate far differently the result has been to hinder the reconstruction of the region and perhaps also to foreclose the possibility that the peoples of bosnia will draw on their own cultural knowledge to reforge their own interconnections the well intentioned and morally grounded antinationalist positions of most observers skew their observations in such a way as to hinder the understanding of nationalist conflict as a social phenomenon an anthropologist who studies post yugoslav space recently lamented the fact that anthropologists regardless of their own position see themselves forced to engage with the dominant mode of representation in the region nationalism that writer s fieldwork shows that the territorialization of national populations is the linchpin of a dominant mosaic mode of representation of also shared by the various international actors and agencies that have intervened in the affairs of the place since nationality is linked to territory and therefore a map of bosnia and herzegovina shows a mosaic of colors indicating the relative dominance of one or another group and leaving it a mosaic nonetheless in fact the web page of the office of the high representative the international civil servants who have been the effective central government for bosnia since the dayton agreement that ended the war in has links on its web page that show the color coded distributions of bosnia s populations just before the war at its close national sides in the bosnian war were to establish ethnically homogeneous territories and these efforts largely succeeded what is interesting about the article in question is that the main point of it is to urge that analysts take a critical distance from what the author himself describes as the dominant course anthropologists have almost always kept a critical distance from the beliefs of their informants evans pritchard after all did not share his azande informants views on the efficacy of their witchcraft and the distinction between folk and analytical models or between operationalized and recognized ones has long been basic to the anthropological apperception the task of the anthropologist was to understand how natives also a missionary challenging informants dominant modes of representation was not part of the enterprise here though the point of the analysis is to show that the natives are misguided in their beliefs as is anyone who accepts their views one engages with the dominant mode of representation only because one is forced to do most analyses of ex yugoslavia are critical of nationalism casualties and perhaps million refugees internally displaced persons from within croatia bosnia serbia and kosovo further the past two decades have seen the nearly hegemonic development of antiessentialism in anthropology and history and especially criticism of images of cultures as tightly bounded the american anthropological association is concerned whenever human difference is made the basis for a denial of basic human rights and the aaa s definition of human rights is broad reflecting a commitment to human rights consistent with international principles but not limited by them also as a matter of principle the aaa has adopted a statement and says that the worldwide scientific community has a responsibility to speak out against the use of purported scientific findings used to justify racial or ethnic superiority inferiority or stereotyping and used to justify racial ethnic and religious discrimination similarly the iuaes proposes a replacement statement for unesco that states that humanity cannot be classified into discrete geographic scientific knowledge concerning modern or past human populations there is no question but that basic human rights were violated in the former yugoslavia there is also no question but that the constitutional and electoral systems created at the demise of communism in the formerly yugoslav republics were premised on discrimination against minorities even genocide thus the moral case for condemnation of the politics of nationalism and the politicians who fostered them is sound yet the politicians who promoted nationalism in the former yugoslavia and its successor republics did so in order to win free and in the main fair elections which they did candidates supporting a civil society of equal citizens ran in every lost everywhere to those supporting ethnonationalism slovenia for slovenes croatia for croats serbia for serbs bosnia was a special case in that there was no single majority population that defined itself as a bosnian nation and therefore no party that could successfully mobilize on a platform of bosnia for bosnians so instead separate nationalist parties mobilized the muslims serbs and croats against each other thus the that have been accepted in democratic elections by the various peoples of ex yugoslavia and that they have fought to bring into existence are premised on the rejection of a community or equal citizens and instead are systems of constitutionalized discrimination against minorities this unfortunate fact of local political culture presumably accounts for the
to sla is that it provides us with a framework and the instrumentation that allows us to merge the social and the cognitive aspects of sla and shows how their interaction can lead to development we have argued that languages and accordingly second through iterations of simple procedures that are applied over and over again with the output of the preceding iteration as the input of the next complexity in language emerges the dance metaphor is used to make clear that cognitive social and environmental factors continuously interact resulting in co regulated interactions and the emergence of creative communicative behaviors the the system and the resources in both the cognitive system and the environment in the developmental process certain sub systems are precursors of other sub systems not all sub systems require an equal amount of energy because there are also connected growers as may be shown in the dispersion of growth in the lexicon and grammar a dst view entails that an individual s language systems will show a great deal of variation that small differences between individuals at a given point of time may have a great effect and that there is no such thing as an end state implicit in this view of language systems is that there is no need for a pre existing universal grammar in the mind of any individual but that a human disposition for language learning is required work with simple cause and effect models in which the outcome can be predicted but we must use case studies to discover relevant sub systems and simulate the processes as the papers in volumes like port and van gelder show many aspects of human cognition can be modelled according to dst principles provided we accept that subsystems can be studied more or less in isolation and we holistic and reductionist views on sla it recognizes the fact that all aspects of human behavior are connected and that the brain is not isolated and cognition is both embodied and situated as holisticists would argue but at the same time it does aim at the full quantification that is the ultimate goal of the reductionists if this view of language is appropriate it would individuals really have similar systems considering the strong interaction with cognitive social and environmental factors it is doubtful that their systems are as similar as we may have assumed thus far a dst approach would also predict that the cognitive and social skills apparent in the affect the learning process by looking at dense corpora we should also try to such information could help us improve our teaching techniques and help avoid early entrenchment of nontarget patterns we should also look more at these factors in the attrition process most importantly though we should look at our data with a more open mind traditional statistics is meant to reveal how a group performs as a whole and may be useful we should also look at the messy little details the first attempts the degree of variation at a developmental stage and the possible attrition it is very well possible that if we look closely enough we find that the general developmental stages that individuals go through are much less similar than we have assumed thus far university abstract the accessibility of video technology has made it possible to utilize both the auditory and visual channels to present listening texts in the second language classroom and on listening tests however there has been little research investigating the extent to which listeners actually watch the video monitor when presented with a listening video text the current study investigated test taker behavior on an video listening test thirty six testtakers videotaped while taking a listening test composed of six separate video texts and the amount of time test takers made eye contact with the video monitor was computed an analysis of the data indicated that the group of participants oriented to the video monitor the time while the video text was played in addition the study yielded valuable information concerning the consistency of the test takers viewing behavior listening tasks has been delivered by a teacher reading aloud a text for the students later as audio technology developed a text was recorded on audiotape and played for students however with the advent and dissemination in the of inexpensive reliable and high quality video recording equipment it became practical to deliver listening texts using video texts which involve both the auditory and visual channels subsequently the use of video to teach listening become more common in the classroom as nunan suggested in many aspects technology has become as effective as humans in delivering content for listening classrooms as the use of video to teach listening increased researchers became more cognizant of the role of nonverbal communication in listening ability a general consensus seems to have emerged among listening researchers that the non verbal components of spoken communication are an important component of listening ability and that listeners are able to more easily construct the meaning of a spoken text that includes non verbal input than a spoken text that does not include non verbal input the use of video texts allows listeners to utilize the non verbal components of communication that can assist them in processing and comprehending aural input in the majority listening situations the listener is able to see the speaker depending on the purpose of the test the inclusion of the non verbal components of spoken communication through the use of video texts on listening test tasks might be advantageous because not only would the tasks more closely simulate the characteristics of authentic spoken language but the inclusion of the channel in presenting the spoken input might lead to more construct relevant variance in the assessments allowing for more valid inferences to be made from the results of those assessments while numerous researchers have investigated how the use of on listening tests there does not seem to be any systematic research on listener
model these effects as monotonic relationships view of workload as an indicator of situational constraints are also very compelling specifically while other items that have been used in operationalizing constraints are consistently viewed as monotonic with regards to any behavioral indirect effects on motivation a considerable amount of the literature suggests that workload time may have a nonmonotonic based on parkinson s law which states that work expands so as to fill the time available for its completion parkinson explains the expansion of work to mean that individuals facing with a greater amount of time to accomplish a fixed amount of work will tend to spread that same amount of work across that amount of time without necessarily adding appreciable value in its or a shorter length of time with which to accomplish that work may be able to generate completed work of indistinguishable quality though operating at a markedly greater work pace later authors have attempted to elaborate on the rationale behind this general effect by attributing it to behavioral mechanisms specifically these shifts in work pace have been tied motivation can be positively influenced by the existence of challenges faced by workers such a phenomenon has been recently applied by linderman et al in their study of six sigma practices in specific support of the current discussion an increase in workload can be seen as a challenge and thus a motivational force for work parallel concepts such as the value of achievement however a large body of behavioral research suggests that motivation can also be negatively influenced by stress created by mismatches in the capabilities of a worker and the work environment most recently de treville and antonakis have also discussed such de motivational and anti productive effects due to suggest that situational effects on productivity are multifold and perhaps emblematic of non linearities such as inverted dynamics suggested by villanova and roman and more recently alluded to by elsass and van yperen and hagedoorn fig depicts this composite effect on outcome measurements such as motivation an inverted form with a characteristic motivational peak and a threshold beyond which negative effects on motivation dominate such a view is also synonymous with the classical yerkes dodson law which first formally suggested an inverted relationship between arousal and performance role of behavior in leading to results contrary to purely mechanistic conclusions hence a formal proposition regarding the non monotonic nature of the impact of workload on performance based on this combined effect would deviate from the view of workload as traditional constraint indicator such a specific factors traditionally interpreted as monotonic constraints such as workload can provide greater predictive strength when their impact on performance is modeled as non monotonic considerations for model design as argued by authors such as bobko more attention needs to be directed at modeling such nonmonotonic relationships to distinguish them from by peters et al etc unfortunately such considerations still remain underrepresented in modern research again risks to model validity due to such oversight may be particularly prevalent in constraint studies which have relied explicitly on indicators that are strongly theoretically associated with non monotonical of indicators relating to workload neither consistently fall into the category of situational constraints nor that of situational facilitators as conceptually distinguished by kane rather depending on their relative levels these situational variables transition between constraint and facilitator characterizations in order to distinguish this dynamics would be helpful though there may be less cumbersome terms available to delineate this category for the present we will suggest the term bipolar factors or bipoles fig depicts an extension of kane s categorization that takes the existence of these special variables into account furthermore the previous set of theoretical arguments would suggest that the performance effect model structure from that of situational constraints this structure is presented in fig and implies special attention should be applied to non linear and nonmonotonic relationships if the analysis of such models is to yield interpretable and managerially practical results proposition across a range of contexts under study dynamics is formally considered for integration in model analysis the importance of such a proposition is primarily in its ability to drive understanding and discussion of anticipated dynamics in specific operational settings the proposition itself should be testable through basic examinations of the equality of standardized slopes for specific ranges covered by variables used in performance suggests a clear deviation from traditional linear effect assumptions the assessment of models that include nonmonotonic elements need not be complex regression and path analysis can still be readily applied by researchers provided additional non monotonic transforms of specific variables are included the necessary caution that needs to be administered when constructing individual factors for use in model analysis the need to distinguish between indicators categorized as monotonic constraints and indicators that lead to fundamentally different effect forms is further emphasized by spector and j in particular this distinction has lead them to propose a separate scale designed to to measure workload while not formally discussing the analytical issue of consistent monotonicity they recognize that the two issues should remain separate as they fundamentally capture distinct effects on performance which should be expected to take on alternate dynamics and should be viewed as subject to alternate moderating and in empirical research empirical check on case dynamics to provide a quick check on whether an inverted relationship actually better describes the relationship between workload and productivity as described by the case a week s worth of work records for each of the case phases were extracted from the hospitals erp described in the case were conducted based on the combined data set of these three periods tests for normality showed no anomalies in either of these variable distributions at the level dummy variables for each period were included in these regressions to account for any externalities that might not have been apparent in the case examinations while a quadratic form of workload provided a significant increase in as anticipated the coefficient on this quadratic
male animals that are sacrificed which is echoed in the hofsta ir assemblage and by other occurring archaeologically in burials third the species that were sacrificed appear to have been domesticates though differentiation seems to have clearly existed for example at the uppsala and lejre ceremonies the animals mentioned dogs and horses are also those most common in burials though adam s text does mention males of every kind of animal a diversity of species domestic and wild is well attested at f in contrast to hofsta ir where there are domesticates principally cattle but also one sheep fourth and finally in adam of bremen s description whilst the heads are offered to the gods it is the bodies that are mentioned as hung for display not the heads and moreover on trees in a sacred grove not on the walls of the to try to make sense of these similarities and contrasts it helps to situate the rites at hofsta ir within a larger question what was their purpose it is generally to the gods to ensure fertility or generally to perpetuate the well being of the community anthropological theories of sacrifice have varied in their approach and in particular on the emphasis they place on different aspects of sacrificial acts sacrifices are traditionally seen as an offering or gift as tylor first suggested but the most famous study is that by hubert and mauss of robertson smith which argues for the importance of sacrifice as more generally a form of communion with the sacred hubert and mauss present a much more detailed and general theory of sacrifice than robertson smith emphasizing the significance of identification between the different parties sacrificer sacrifier and victim the main reason they argue for sacrifice is as a form of expiation that is the removal of sin or community so the sacrificial object or victim acts in effect as a vehicle for removing the sickness this idea is developed in a different way in girard s theory of sacrifice as a form of scapegoating which we discuss more later in the article however in two recent studies of sacrifice a rather different perspective is presented which focuses even more on the relational nature of sacrifice and in particular a form of consumption bloch examines sacrifice in terms of the typical ritual tripartite structure after van gennep and turner arguing that there are usually two moments in a sacrifice the first where the sacrificer is giving up a part of him herself so that part enters a transcendent or other world the second where that part returns to the sacrificer from this other world with new and greater power or vitality it is usually is marked by the actual act of violent killing and it is this second moment for bloch which is most important hence his theory of rebounding violence thus for example the sacrifice of cattle among the dinka involves prior identification with the cattle in order for it to become self sacrifice but once sacrificed the animal is then consumed and the power or vitality that accrues to the animal through the act of sacrifice passes back sacrificer bloch s theory thus emphasizes the third or final stage of the ritual process sacrifice as consumption unlike traditional theories which focus on the first sacrifice as an offering as originally noted by roberston smith the importance of feasting or consumption as a component of sacrificial acts cannot be ignored in any theory that attempts to understand sacrifice a similar focus on consumption occurs in the as part of a theory of shopping in modern society inspired by but also in reaction to the work of bataille miller interprets sacrifice as a form of legitimating consumption by subsuming it under an ideology of devotion that is by linking consumption to a sacrificial act of giving the purely utilitarian nature of consumption is contested and becomes secondary to a more relational act of devotion miller the timing acts of sacrifice tend to occur at the juncture between production and consumption which in agricultural societies means harvest or slaughtering times such first fruits sacrifice mediates the transition from the labor of production to the enjoyment of consumption by making the first acts of consumption also acts of giving other anthropologists have tended to argue against any general theory of sacrifice de heusch nonetheless what is particularly interesting in the works of both miller and bloch is the way in which sacrifice is interpreted not so much through the lens of religion but in connection to other practices which may have no immediately obvious link in doing so they have both brought out new aspects of the rite which have previously been overlooked regardless of whether one accepts the general nature of such approaches useful insight can still be gained from them the of feasting in viking ceremonies is well documented as it is for ancient greek rites for example where sacrifice has been interpreted in terms of its communal and political aspect rather than a religious one following this recent scholarship we would contend that it is the role of sacrifice as a form of relationship or communion binding people together that is of central importance to understanding the hofsta ir cattle sacrifices these may have been gods but they were equally critical to ensuring the solidarity of the community this explains why feasting and mass gathering were also such important components of these sacrificial rites the oblative nature of sacrifice takes its meaning from this rather than vice versa but we need to try to understand the cultural and historically specific meanings of sacrifice at hofsta ir the abstract importance of communion provides just a broad framework of animal sacrifice in viking age iceland to understand the nature of these sacrifices at hofsta ir it is critical to situate them in the context of the site as mentioned at the start of this article hofsta ir can be grouped within a class of
of variables that control for governance as well as for other variables interestingly the inclusion of governance variables is found to increase the significance of the results the results are quantitatively important although the magnitudes of the effects are sensitive to the specification and set included in the estimation we have found robust evidence of the negative effects of the vertical dimension of decentralization very much in line with our hypothesis the importance of the different channels through which these negative effects are working is difficult to be identified we have suggested several of such channels in our conceptual analysis in section but with our data it is not feasible to evaluate which of these channels the operation of the various mechanisms identified could be obtained with better availability of comparable cross country data as well as from individual case studies we have used a large set of governance variables as controls and still identified a significant negative effect of tiers although the inclusion of governance variables reduced the size of the effects of tiers this latter finding relates to the results of dreher who considers the effects of various indicators of the quality of governance he finds a negative effect of the number of government tiers on various measures of governance more specifically he finds a negative effect of the number of tiers on the rule of law as measured by the kaufman et al index these interdependencies point at potential endogeneity of several important variables in our analysis including not only the governance variables but potentially also the decentralization variables this for a modification of our econometric approach however there appear to be many channels through which tiers affect cba and it is not clear how to select among these and what an adequately specified multi equation model should look like as regards the potential endogeneity problems of our decentralization variables these are likely to differ between them our main variable of interest the number of government tiers is typically determined at the constitutional level further since the tiers variable is treated as constant and relates to the beginning of our sample period it can be regarded as exogenously given for our period under consideration for the case of fiscal decentralization the possibility of endogeneity is more important if the foreign investment generates substantial tax revenue and if this revenue accrues differently to the various levels of government compared to other tax revenues then the amount of fdi clearly affects the revenue ratio we may argue that the tax revenues stemming from a cba in a given year will only arise in later years and this implies that contemporaneous fiscal decentralization is exogenous to the number and the value of cba inflows however since we use past average fiscal decentralization our estimates do not suffer from this potential endogeneity problem the empirical analysis also showed that unlike vertical disintegration fiscal decentralization noted that they do not contradict our theoretical perspective but highlight that decentralization policy has several dimensions where the tiers variable is most suitable for measuring the vertical dimension fiscal decentralization measures may account for other effects they may relate more closely to the horizontal dimension of federalism and therefore can be seen for instance as measuring closeness of the government to firms and individuals we have not provided an explicit theoretical perspective on the potential aspects captured by the fiscal decentralization variables and an interpretation of the findings on the fiscal decentralization measures is of an exploratory nature however it is still feasible to link them to various theoretical arguments made in the literature and we can also square them with several empirical results that have been obtained by previous research first we can relate our findings on the research that has been carried direct relationship between decentralization and governance fisman and gatti and treisman have considered the effect of decentralization on corruption fisman and gatti consider the fiscal decentralization variables only and find that more fiscal decentralization reduces the level of corruption such potential positive effect of fiscal decentralization on governance in the host countries may be an additional channel that explains the positive findings of fiscal fdi conversely treisman considered federalism and did not find an effect on corruption dreher also finds a positive effect of revenue decentralization on governance variables this is in line with reduction in the magnitude of our estimated effects when governance variables are included but we should stress that fiscal decentralization still has significant effects when we control for the quality of governance the increased attractiveness to foreign investors caused by fiscal decentralization can be found in the argument of keen and marchand they suggested that competition between cities or regions will result in a distortion of the mix of public goods provided by the regions and cities in particular they will overinvest in infrastructure this effect is likely to be stronger if regions and cities have larger fiscal autonomy as measured by fiscal decentralization investors from such overinvestment in infrastructure and increase their investment potentially explaining the positive effect of fiscal decentralization this argument is also in line with the findings on the differential effect of expenditure and revenue decentralization since it essentially relies on expenditure decentralization given the nature of this infrastructure competition it is less likely in this case that fiscal decentralization is to the benefit of the country also point out that our results regarding tiers are derived on a cross sectional base only and are therefore sensitive to unobserved country differences that could be correlated with cbas and tiers this is a common problem of research addressing the effects of government architecture as variation over time is negligible compared to cross sectional differences and we do not have any a priori evidence for why such a correlation should exist but this caveat needs to be mentioned this caveat also holds with respect to our findings for fiscal decentralization nevertheless we see our results as a useful first step uncovering the effects of the various
sa monodomain can be seen for either of the deformation directions up to it has to be noted that the layer spacing d determined from the maximum of the radial intensity distribution in the small angle region remains constant for both stretching geometries with a length of simulation of the all trans length of the mesogenic group yields a similar length which the director furthermore the ratio of the small angle to the wide angle reflexes isa iwa determined by the area under the scattering curves remains constant upon deformation which also indicates no structural changes from the azimuthal intensity distribution in the wide angle region the order remains constant at to determine the correlation length of the smectic layers the small angle reflex of a radial scan is fitted with a pseudo voigt function which describes the broad diffraction peaks this function is a linear combination of a gaussian and a lorentzian peak function the correlation length calculated from the full width at half maximum the network up to luli to the enthalpy elasticity of the smectic layers with the compression modulus both systems are similar consequently cannot be the origin for the fundamental for our system the slope in the stress strain experiment also decreases but no structural changes occur first of all it has to be noted that our smectic a monodomain exhibits a lower order parameter at room temperature of compared to that of nishikawa s if we recall that this order parameter which is determined by defects of the smectic layers it can be assumed that the smectic a phase of our network is considerably distorted by defects this assumption is clearly supported by the low value of which unambiguously suggests a distorted these maxima are relatively weak and extremely broad and therefore represent poorly correlated structures the origin of these reflexes is unclear they might be attributed to a periodic arrangement of defects perpendicular to the smectic layer normal they do not change significantly upon stretching reflect the in plane fluidity of the smectic layers with the expected low modulus for entropy elasticity as given in the isotropic state of the network and the ratio of the moduli is small compared to nishikawa s system obviously a large does not always give rise to a reorientation the sample as found for stannarius system from these considerations we conclude that the distorted layered structure causes a significant impact on the response to external strain in figure a sketch of a smectic a phase containing defects is depicted for a deformation parallel to the director the experiments show that the macroscopic elongation is compensated by a uniformly ordered we have to assume that the number of layers has to grow if the sample exhibits many defects they just might glide past each other and compensate for the external strain without the need for reorientation as indicated in the crude sketch this process does not alter the number of defects nor the for the onset of a reorganization process ie the number of layers grows the origin for the defects still remains unclear a detailed analysis of the correlation length as a function of the concentration of the cross linker proved that decreases with increase in cross linking systems at constant cross linker concentration has to be investigated further conclusion the synthesis of a new type of sa lsce containing perfluorinated mesogenic moieties is described although mechanical deformation results in the macroscopic properties being seemingly anisotropic the microscopic lc monodomain phase structure remains unchanged on the experiments suggest that neither the layer compression modulus alone nor the modulus along the layers determine how a sample reacts on stretching the unexpected behavior can be explained by a simple picture which assumes that defects within the smectic layering are responsible for the mechanical response of the network this assumption is supported by considering the correlation length j and the order parameter s of the smectic phase evaluation of micromilled metal mold masters for the replication of microchip electrophoresis devices abstract high precision micromilling was assessed as a tool for the rapid fabrication of mold masters for replicating fabricated via micromilling specifically sidewall roughness and milling topology limitations were investigated numerical simulations were performed to determine the effects of additional volumes present on injection plugs due to curvature of the corners produced by micromilling elongation of the plug was not dramatic as compared to sharp corner injectors were necessary in order to obtain short sample plugs the sidewalls of the polymer microstructures were characterized by a maximum average roughness of nm and mean peak height of nm sidewall roughness had insignificant effects on the bulk eof as it was statistically the same for pmma microchannels with different were used for the separation of double stranded dna the plate numbers achieved in the micromilled based chips exceeded million and were comparable to the plate numbers obtained for the liga prepared devices of similar geometry such as increased speed of analysis high throughput multiplexing capabilities high levels of system integration portability and significantly lower cost of operation due to reduced amounts of samples reagents and solvents used in the assay all of these features are of great interest in the fields of genetic analyses clinical testing drug discovery food control ltas devices to provide high levels of automation and at the same time minimize contamination due to the closed architecture of these devices it is well recognized that in order to make microfluidics more widely available devices need to be produced in high volumes and at low unit costs significant cost advantages for massproducing polymer microdevices is offered by replication techniques which use a microfabricated master to produce unit can be significantly reduced replication techniques commonly used include casting hot embossing or injection molding the most elaborate and often expensive step in manufacturing microstructures through replication processes is fabrication of the mold master the quality of which determines the quality of the device there are physical dimensions of the microstructures and life expectancy of the mold
layers of the hmosaic architecture we now turn to a description of working memory working memory the ongoing stream of cognitive consciousness working memory consists of a collection of cognitive functions that is engaged whenever we are doing we read an article in the newspaper mentally rearrange the furniture in our living room to make room for a new sofa compare and contrast the attributes of several new cars before making a purchase give directions to our home or even make change at the grocery store we are using working memory another interesting for example personality intelligence or of course creativity working memory is also at work in the high level performances of experts in all fields because working memory in ericsson and kintsch refer to their approach to working memory as long term working cowan provided the following definition of working memory it is in close general agreement with definitions provided by other working memory theorists the key to understanding the cognitive processes of thought nearly all working memory theorists agree that the working memory components that accomplish this maintenance task include a central executive function and two slave functions a visuospatial sketchpad and a speech loop as an illustration of the functions of the components the operation of working memory this example will help lay the groundwork for the reader for our later analysis of einstein s autobiographical accounts first attentional control in reading and thinking about various newspaper articles is carried on by working memory s central executive functions attentional functions of the central executive supervise schedule and integrate information rehearsal processes for retaining appropriate visuospatial images and speech information that are needed for the on line comprehension decision making and thinking about the contents of the various newspaper articles to maintain information in a conscious on line state so that these mental tasks can be completed the central executive employs the going on it will be helpful to again make note that the leading argument of this article is that like the repetitive components of bodily movements it is the above repetitive actions and interactions of the components of working memory that are modeled in the cerebellum and subsequently fed back to working memory making its operations these working memory processes can be associated with various areas of both the cerebral cortex and the cerebellum therefore there is little doubt that whatever working memory accomplishes it does it through collaboration with the cerebellum place goldman rakic said the following of working memory the combination of moment to moment awareness and instant retrieval of archived information constitutes what is called working memory perhaps the most significant achievement of human evolution it enables humans to plan for the future and to string together thoughts and ideas which blackboard of the mind in this overall vein of advanced brain processes we believe working memory is also where creativity and innovation are born but the full story of working memory that makes it the most significant achievement of human evolution and explains creativity and innovation involves more than its traditional components we believe creativity and innovation in working memory cerebellum the cognitive functions of the cerebellum in the course of everyday repetitive mental physical activities a person becomes able to execute the required tasks more quickly and precisely and in novel ways the development of fast highly controlled problem solving expertise in all these increases in efficiency and adaptability are the result of control routines that are learned in the cerebellum and subsequently fed back to control improved timing and sequencing of the operations of the movement generating portions of the brain s cerebral cortex however they equally lead to the development of creative and innovative cerebellar control routines for the cerebral cortex more will be said below in the section on cerebellar role in manipulation of thought conscious and unconscious control in working memory of how these two seemingly contrary control outcomes idea that its functions are limited to motor control a number of newer and converging lines of research and theory especially those arising from neuroimaging studies demonstrate that the cerebellum provides a fast computational system for the timing sequencing and modeling aimed at the rapid manipulation of both motor and cognitive processes including houk wise haruno et al haruno wolpert kawato imamizu et al ito ivry leiner leiner leiner et al schmahmann early foundational arguments concerning cognitive functions of the cerebellum hominid evolution a decade and a half before klein et al proposed their somewhat detailed explanation of the selective evolution of memory leiner et al speculated that the cerebellum contributed to such mental skills in their foundational articles al the cerebellum enlarged by an astonishing three to four times and that the cerebro cerebellar system became more elaborately and extensively interconnected central to the arguments of the present article they also proposed that the cerebellum had during this evolutionary time become fourfold increase in the size of the cerebellum that occurred in the last million years of evolution if the selection pressure has been strong for more cerebellum in the human brain as well as for more cerebral cortex the interaction between the cerebellum and the cerebral cortex should provide some important advantages to humans a detailed examination of cerebellar circuitry of the association cortex and could assist this cortex in the performance of a variety of manipulative skills including the skill that is characteristic of anthropod apes and humans the skillful manipulation of ideas the skillful manipulation of ideas of course is precisely the job of working memory then in a follow up of language functions we conclude that the phylogenetically newest circuitry in the human cerebro cerebellar system enables the cerebellum to improve the speed and skill of cognitive and language performance particularly circuitry connected with brodmann areas and which constitute part of broca s language area in much the same way that the phylogenetically older al also proposed that decisional and search skills are learned in the cerebellum through its extensive feedback loop connections with the
no longer be free as they are now or would be under a second amendment reasonableness review to experiment with different levels of scrutiny and to seek for themselves the balance between safety and weapons scrutiny would raise separation of powers concerns strict scrutiny would not just disrupt settled state law it would also call into question a range of federal gun control laws congress has been regulating firearms for over seventy years and a skeptical and rigorous form of judicial scrutiny would threaten existing federal gun control recall that the ashcroft memorandum made plain the justice department s view that even all federal gun control laws remained constitutional if the court were to apply a standard with real bite and invalidate many of those laws the longstanding tradition of congressional authority to regulate weapons would be significantly curtailed profound questions of institutional competence also would attach to a supreme court decision to apply heightened review in his famous article on give full judicial protection to constitutional rights when judges feel themselves unable to prescribe workable standards of state conduct and devise measures to enforce them at the state level the right to bear arms is relatively under enforced by the judiciary and a second amendment right to bear arms would be a good candidate for similar treatment for one the questions of gun policy are complex and the adverse consequences the effectiveness of various forms of gun control are dense and the empirical data often conflicting leaving courts understandably reluctant to engage with them consider the influential study of economist john lott jr who found that concealed carry laws had a strong deterrent effect on crime lott s sophisticated regression analyses were rebutted by resounding criticism of his methodology and a wave of scholarship has challenged his analysis and conclusions judges do not want and are not especially competent to sort out such disputes and settle intensely debated issues of social science granted judges have stepped into other hotly contested empirically debatable areas of law but the consequences of erroneous judicial invalidation with regard to gun legislation are particularly undesirable as one commentator notes courts demand that legislators narrow gun regulations as traditionally when courts perceive that an erroneous judicial decision would pose substantial risks to public safety and security they tend to adopt a stance of deference rather than skepticism an example is deference to prison officials when they adopt regulations burdening inmates rights in the interest of prison safety in most instances the courts apply the deferential standard of turner which requires only that prison policies be objectives as the supreme court explained in that decision subjecting the day to day judgments of prison officials to an inflexible strict scrutiny analysis would seriously hamper their ability to anticipate security problems and to adopt innovative solutions to the intractable problems of prison administration substitute legislators for prison officials and gun safety for prison administration and the logic of turner s deference retains its persuasive force some degree of regulation but the problems of gun violence and crime have proven enormously difficult to solve even with legislative flexibility and room to experiment second amendment heightened review if applied aggressively could make finding those solutions even more difficult key to judicial deference in this area is the recognition that gun control that people seek from government an uninhibited right to bear arms without legislative limitations returns society to the state of nature in which each person fends for herself hobbes famously argued that it was precisely the dangers of such an environment that required people to form governments and laws in the first place one chief role of government therefore is to provide a collective measure of protection for all from violence and the threat of personal harm protection from guns and criminals using guns is part of this governmental obligation an individual right to bear arms means that government cannot achieve this goal through straightforward disarmament but must instead balance the individual s ability to defend herself against the collective need to protect all others achievement of that balance requires highly complex socioeconomic calculations regarding what kinds of weapons ought to be possessed those deemed untrustworthy or dangerous such complicated multi factor judgments require trade offs that courts are not institutionally equipped to make legislatures by contrast are structured to make precisely those kinds of determinations the structural dilemma posed by the sudden establishment of a federal rule of heightened scrutiny is only exacerbated by the fact that the supreme populated by experienced state legislatures state judiciaries and the congress most of the key issues in gun regulation have been the subject of state court rulings often by numerous states all ruling the exact same way for decades and in some instances centuries state lawmakers have been balancing the individual right to bear arms with the public safety concerns necessitating regulation a green court should not courts wisely tend to follow the path of other jurisdictions that have confronted the same issue especially when there is widespread agreement indeed state courts commonly cite the rejection of strict scrutiny by other state courts to justify their own decision to apply reasonableness review as the wisconsin supreme court explained in the cole decision find the precedents of other states favoring a reasonable arms the colorado supreme court observed that deferential review of weapons laws was in accordance with the vast majority of cases construing state constitutional provisions the state court tradition of deference is itself partially a function of institutional competence concerns all courts from state to supreme are properly hesitant to presume the unconstitutionality of laws in an area where there is a conceded need for governmental regulation and where iv the practice of reason while the analysis of text history and structure offered above pointed in the direction of a relatively deferential scrutiny it did not suggest any more precise contours of the appropriate standard for that the place to look is where the case law is rich with
course i m just talking generally the hotels get a pure price they do nt pay any sick benefit to this as we noted subcontracted recruitment through local employment agencies had become a more significant element in bi s strategy over the past few years two years ago a decision was made to outsource almost all the low wage room attendants a reliance on temporary staffing however may reduce the impact and effectiveness of managerial room attendants when after may one of the agencies that the hotel used stopped recruiting vietnamese men and replaced them with polish women nevertheless the managers still used stereotypical characteristics that were associated with nationality and gender and mapped them onto cleaning and catering occupations the ways in which the relationships between gender ethnicity skin color and interpellation vary within others we now turn to the voices of the employees and their sense of their workplace identities naming workers for specific tasks bi like all large hotel chains is divided practices different embodied requirements and consequently a particular and distinctive gender ethnic and national division of labor not only the skill requirements but also whether the work is front or back office and whether it involves direct contact with guests affect recruitment strategies and the embodied attributes that are demanded associated language skills but is correlated with skin color managerial positions are dominated by migrants from developed nations largely from western europe but also from southern africa and north america argued in their research in a hotel these skills are typically seen by managers as innate as natural as mark said if you have nt got it then you ca nt learn it classic associations between femininity and the presentation of self as available willing and pleasant that have been identified so many times in different servicesector occupations from flight attendants to selling banking services are key to managerial assessments of who is appropriate femininity is typically associated with in the hotel industry as a whole because front office managers were usually women affective intelligence is typically regarded by hoteliers as a feminine trait indeed mark s deputy sophia is an italian woman combining a women s touch with a latin temperament in mark s view one of the assumed and mark found that he was often called on to intervene in disputes i reiterate exactly what my female colleague has said we say exactly the same thing but they wo nt accept it from the assistant manager which is just complete and utter nonsense but there you are sophia suggested that people did not take told us that she thought that the women employees of bi are better at dealing with awkward guests women get away with more on reception than men in terms of when you for instance ca nt give someone a certain type of room you smile you make fun you have a joke and it s fine but if it s a man dealing with a man it gets a bit like and then the supervisor on a deferential performance as waldinger and lichter noted to get the job done one had to display the right face and maintaining the appropriate front required a willingness to serve or at least the ability to play the subordinate good naturedly rania from jordan for example confirmed the significance person to see and the smile is very important janelle a switchboard operator also noted that even when the interaction is disembodied they have to hear the smile in your voice when you answer a demand so difficult to achieve at timfes that i just have to run in the back and scream vent my emotions out of sight of the daily embodied performance that is required of the frontoffice staff as rania noted appearance is not the be all and end all but i think yeah we are on show at the end of the day we look at grooming it s a standard within bi you have to be groomed properly several other employees in this area also used the seldom associated with masculinity and rania with a series of gestures to her breasts and buttocks emphasized that the typical embodied attributes of femininity were a significant part of her success with guests even though she had to police the line between flirtation and harassment by guests as guerrier and adib found receptionists coworkers on the front desk the thing is that i have sometimes its girls problem with my beauty in addition to physical attributes slenderness and youth assumptions of appropriate jewelry clothes hairstyle and so forth are used as discriminators in judging between potential employees mark noted for example that open application to the hotel femininity bodily size and appearance are raced and classed as well as gendered in the hospitality industry in general and in bi in particular male and female employees from different class backgrounds and different nationalities are subject to different codes of judgment in their coworkers employers and the guests here the dual nature of interpellation within a hotel is important as managers make assumptions about what guests expect and guests treat people unequally on the basis of a series of stereotypical assumptions thus the expectations of for example white customers of a black asian or white female desk clerk based on ethnicity and skin color for instance sophia the assistant manager of the front office commented that sometimes guests get a little bit strange when it s perhaps how can i say international colleagues so if you are not european sometimes they can be a bit strange especially asians or if you are black or something implicit racist assumptions on his part as gabriel stated in the hospitality sector service workers not only have to sell their labor to employers but do so under the scrutiny of the customer who is paying to be served obeyed and entertained in her work adkins noted the lack of attractive for the predominantly white clientele further research that includes
heat generation from room temperature level rises almost uniformly by xc if adding a heat load of in dv the temperature increment at the height of is around xc per the temperature difference in the occupied zone increases to more than xc at a load of the floor temperature is approximately xc higher than the temperature the air figure shows the effectiveness of providing air movement at the head in dv increasing heat load from to makes the overall sensation increase linearly although a maximum thermal comfort exists implying a parabolic relationship in the case of a load of where the temperature at is around xc and the temperature difference is above xc the comfort level is that can be achieved when pv is combined with mv or dv a breathing ntm with body segments was developed by coupling cfd with a thermoregulation model both of which have been separately validated in previous studies a comprehensive validation of the simulation results has not been specifically performed but comparison with the experimental results a small portion of the application of this ntm is exhibited in the process of investigation of pv with the assumptions that the person is not moving and that the dynamic breathing process can be considered approximately as steady inhalation the following conclusions can be drawn but with caution dv provides better inhaled air quality than mv except in the situation the inhaled air quality but the degree of this improvement also depends on the room s average pollutant concentration level dv is more energy efficient than mv since it is only aimed at conditioning the occupied zone equipped with pv the whole body sensation and comfort are controlled not only by personalized air but also by the indoor temperature level air movement these conclusions have yet to be decided by human subject testing changes of symptoms tear film stability and eosinophilic cationic protein in nasal lavage fluid after re exposure to a damp office building with a history of flooding norb then all returned to the damp building and were re investigated after days we measured tear film break up time nasal patency biomarkers in nasal lavage and dynamic spirometry both buildings had low low levels of respirable particles and formaldehyde the flooded building had slightly higher levels of microbial volatile organic compounds after days of exposure there was an increase of ocular and eosinophilic cationic protein in nal increased slightly a separate test of the weekday effect showed slight improvements or no change of symptoms and signs from monday to wednesday building dampness had an increase of symptoms reduced tear film stability and signs of eosinophilic inflammation in the nasal mucosa after days of re exposure introduction there is evidence that exposure to damp buildings is related to an increase of asthma bronchiale and symptoms compatible with the sick building syndrome most of on building dampness in workplace buildings there are various exposures related to building dampness including house dust mite allergens molds and bacteria in addition building dampness may cause degradation of phthalate esters in polyvinyl chloride materials or water based floor glue causing an emission of ethyl hexanol eg octenol and methylfuran and it has been suggested that mvoc measurements in indoor air could be used as indicators of microbial activity in building materials as mvoc can be emitted from nonmicrobial sources the usefulness of mvoc as microbial indicators have been questioned one recent review concluded dott and it has been concluded that indoor concentration of mvoc in buildings is probably too low to cause health the effects water damage in the building construction caused by water leakage and flooding is a common indoor environment problem and health the effects of such exposure have previously been studied in one study in the the latest months exposure to building dampness was related to an increase of current asthma lung function impairment and increased blood eosinophil count health the effects of water leakage was studied in day care workers in espoo finland water leakage from the roofs had occurred in the buildings in another of the buildings visible mold in water damage in and flooding in the buildings most epidemiological studies in damp buildings have dealt with self reported symptoms and there is sparse information in the literature on physiological effects of building dampness some cross sectional studies indicate that microbial or chemical exposure related to myeloperoxidase and albumin in nasal lavage was observed in an office buildings with pronounced microbial growth in the construction including stachybotrys spp a decreased nasal patency measured by acoustic rhinometry and an increase of ecp and lysozyme in nal fluid was found at higher concentrations of total decreased nasal patency was found in hospital workers exposed to aspergillus fumigatus in indoor air in two geriatric hospitals dampness in the floor construction and presence of ethyl hexanol in indoor air was associated with an increase of lysozyme in nal fluid finally teachers in compared with unexposed controls the increased levels of biomarkers were normalized during summer vacation besides this study from finland there are few intervention studies available on changes of physiological signs after exposure to damp buildings the aim was to study changes of symptoms and physiological signs in subjects re exposed to a damp a doctor s administered questionnaire combined with a medical investigation including measurement of tear film break up time acoustic rhinometry nal and dynamic spirometry methods participants the study was performed in a major case book archives at the university hospital in the city of uppsala in covering the floor with cm of water the frontal part of the archive near the staircase had a linoleum floor which was removed the concrete floor was dried by means of large electrically heated fans in the frontal part of the archive after a short drying period a new linoleum floor was installed the distant part had an old wall to wall carpet covering partly removed in the autumn of one employee developed asthma and moved to another
the binomial coefficients this allows us to use operator polynomials such as where the x s are arbitrary constants note the property which holds for an arbitrary constant using the operator one can rewrite eq in the following form let us apply the operator the coefficient is known then we would have from the limit construction rule for the relation would allow us to obtain and from all past values of and thus determine the best predictor for in the case where is unknown one could use its appropriate estimate eg one obtained by the methods of expectation of is zero we can obtain a predictor for directly based on its past realizations without the need for inverting the innovations indeed let us replace by zero in the left hand side of this gives the equation which is nothing but a prediction of as a function of past realizations series in eq a fundamental problem in the nonlinear inversion that leads to is to determine under what conditions the product contains terms s with powers running from to where is the integer part of an obvious sufficient condition for the validity of is the term converges to for arbitrary values of when is not bounded from above by the situation is more subtle let us assume that the s are standard d gaussian random values we are going to show that in such a case the expectation of the absolute value of tends to infinity for any the moments of are the following to infinity for any positive it is perhaps possible to develop some regularization procedure of the process to taper its large values and thus providing convergence of the series in but this question requires more careful investigation thus the only known class of distributions so far that can guarantee convergence of is the class of distributions bounded from above this class bounded from above can model populations with seemingly heavy tail behavior such as earthquakes the third gumbel or the weibull distribution provides an example in the real of extreme value distributions thus the technique suggested in this appendix can be used with such distributions in genomic molecular biology can be addressed without analyzing data stored in them however these databases reside in many different locations and often use nonstandard data formats requiring specialized data parsers as a result integrating and comparing data from multiple biological databases is difficult and tedious genome databases offer solutions to this the intrinsic complexity of genome data exploiting the full power of these databases also has a considerable learning curve this is particularly true if one wants to query multiple genomic regions in an automated manner rather than simply analyze individual genes one at a time here using the university of california santa cruz genome database for illustration i describe tools some applications for which they are well suited the genome browsers at ucsc ensembl and the national center for biotechnology information as well as the model organism databases and mouse genome database have become essential tools for the analysis of genomic molecular biology data by enable the exploration of relationships among genomic data in ways that were previously not possible the power of this approach can be illustrated by a simple example we can imagine a scenario in which we have found a polymorphism in a human disease gene and want to check various properties of this polymorphism is it in the single nucleotide polymorphism a cpg island does it occur in any known expressed sequence tag is the more common variant at the polymorphism site conserved in other vertebrates it is of course possible to answer these questions without a genome browser however this approach requires identifying becoming familiar with and using multiple different resources dbsnp nih genetic sequence databank curves in contrast using one of the genome browsers all we need to do is to select the appropriate genome and genomic location select the browser annotation tracks for snps ests repeats cpg islands and interspecies conservation and view the results however for all its power and convenience interactive querying of genome databases does have limitations for which ones are already in dbsnp or are within cpg islands or are represented by ests or are at highly conserved sites would quickly become tedious time consuming and error prone even with an integrated genome browser similarly if one has identified hundreds or even thousands of genome locations of interest from a microarray experiment and wants to ask a set of biological questions batch querying many important biological questions cannot practically be addressed at all one might want to search for new genes by looking for regions where ests overlap gene predictions and also are highly conserved among related species or one might want to study exon evolution by searching for alu repeat sequences found in coding exons yet another example rna to inosine one effective method for identifying adar sites is by searching for genomic locations that code for an a while a has been observed at the corresponding location in an mrna or est such queries can be addressed in a straightforward manner by batch querying the consequently both the ucsc and ensembl genome browsers include tools for direct and automated batch querying of their underlying databases currently the ncbi mapviewer browser and the model organism databases do not offer integrated batch querying tools but ncbi is planning to introduce such tools for the mapviewer database in the future the aim of their features and capabilities and to indicate the types of applications for which they are useful the reader is assumed to be familiar with interactive use of at least one of the genome browsers no programming experience is required for performing basic batch querying procedures however for the more complex tasks described experience with some computer language is necessary for simplicity much of the discussion will be focused on a single database the ucsc browser database however comparable capabilities are available via ensembl interactive batch database querying
and sambirejo these all have planks fitted edge to edge with dowels and held together by lashings through perforated lugs left projecting from their inner surfaces but none of these boats has separate locked rectangular tenons of the dong xa yen bac or mediterranean type southern coastal china and jomon japan have several logboat finds with planks fastened but again there appear to be no separate locked tenons summarising the world view of locked mortise and tenon plank fastenings mcgrail concludes the case for the transmission by roman ships of the mortise and tenon locked joint to the indian ocean and beyond is not proven the medieval and later fastenings found there may be derived from an indigenous prototype the medieval and later fastenings referred to by mcgrail are from wando island al the keel piece was not a logboat but a piece of timber long with a shaped cross section flat on top cm across and cm deep the planks were attached edge toedge both by dowels and by separate rectangular tenons with peg holes just like those at dong xa and yen bac no signs of lashings were found the tenons were cm long and cm wide hence a little smaller than the vietnamese examples sieveking et al bac no signs of lashings were found the tenons were cm long and cm wide hence a little smaller than the vietnamese examples sieveking et al mentioned that a piece of wood from the keel piece was sent to an unnamed laboratory for analysis but they gave no result on checking this with ann sieveking early in it appears that the sample was sent to the british museum laboratory but not dated due they concluded on unclear grounds that the boat dated to ad a date accepted by mcgrail we suspect it was far older but we will never know for certain was the locked mortise and tenon technique introduced from classical sources through india into vietnam where it was blended with the indigenous logboat and plank lashing tradition everything related so far could suggest yes the technology is virtually identical the dates are right the are clear contact between the mediterranean india and northern vietnam did occur at around and after the time of christ even if in attenuated fashion for instance janse discussing the discoveries in eastern han tombs around lach truong in thanh hoa province suggested comparative studies in the more or less unique pieces seem to ar flung commercial and cultural relations with the indo iranian world and perhaps even with countries around the shores of the eastern mediterranean but there is something in the background that should make us cautious about simply accepting mediterranean influence and closing the books neolithic woodworking in china is not something that frequently receives exposure in the nautical literature most is settlement rather than boat related and much is very newly discovered kuahuqiao at respect to locked mortises and tenons but the story is very different for the sites of hemudu and luojiajiao also in zhejiang province and dating to the millennium bc hemudu has dowels mortises tenons and rabbeted plank edges all apparently associated with house construction even more importantly both sites have architectural tenons on the ends of scantlings that are actually locked by round dowel holes the locked associated with house construction even more importantly both sites have architectural tenons on the ends of scantlings that are actually locked by round dowel holes the locked mortise and tenon idea but apparently not the idea of a separate rectangular tenon or edge toedge plank fitting as at dong xa and yen bac was therefore known to chinese neolithic societies at least years before its first appearance in egypt and years before the phoenicians appear to have applied it to boat construction in the mediterranean this rather remarkable information must make the question of origins uncertain at face value the transmission of the locked mortise and tenon idea from the mediterranean through india to vietnam early in the first century bc at the beginning of the period of indo roman interaction with south east asia is certainly the most attractive hypothesis for the dong bac locked tenons it is certainly supported by the distribution of dated nautical discoveries and reasoning from what has actually been found is always preferable to reasoning from what one believes should be found but we can still wonder what an early chinese or vietnamese neolithic logboat with well preserved plank attachments will look like if and when it is eventually discovered figure drawing of the yen bac planks figure the dong xa boat after contents figure the dong xa boat looking towards the bow or stern figure the dong xa boat detail of the end portion figure plan and section of the dong xa boat the side section shows that the bottom of the boat has a longitudinal curvature and seems to be lifting slightly near the cut to rise to the other end figure a virtual reconstruction of the dong xa boat showing one of the created by michael deeble of the center for new media arts in anu this reconstruction clearly raises the possibility that the boat had a raised construction above the flat end but no direct evidence for its attachment has survived figure representation of a river boat incised on the side of a dong son situla found in the nanyue tomb guangzhou southern china the scene appears to captive taking and headhunting the warriors and artefacts appear to be on raised decking figure another very similar river boat on the side of a dong son bronze situla in the barbier mueller museum geneva this has similar representations of a captive and severed head as fig note the angular stern of the boat in front could the hull delineation with two decorated bands linked by rectangles be a schematic rendering of the use of rectangular tenons to fix the planks together figure a reconstruction of locked mortise and tenon construction
to specification basically users are required to guarantee the completeness of specification wrt those desired properties to be analyzed of a work ow concerned which is not an easy task however we do have some ways to help users to try to achieve this completeness firstly an important feature of cafeobj language is that cafeobj specification is executable users can is as expected which may help to examine whether certain aspects of the system are covered in the specification secondly model checking technique can also help to achieve the completeness through checking some testing properties we have been developing a translator called which can automatically translate cafeobj specifications of otss into corresponding maude ones maude this translation users can employ maude model checking facilities to check reachable state space as shown in whether the cafeobj specification satisfies some testing properties during which users can enjoy the ad vantages of automatic veri cation and counterexamples of model checking based on the above mentioned two ways we encourage a way of developing testing and executed in computer systems besides the executing to the property concerned will be used as rewrite rules as to the maintenance of equations used in veri cation the powerful module system supported by cafeobj system may help to relieve the difficulty a further issue is related to how to check con ict equations in the specific rules to two different terms that are non reducible one possible way to check con ict among equations is by using completion pro cedure which computes all possible critical pairs between equations oriented as rewrite rules until a con ict equation is found although cafeobj system does not have any completion procedure many tools supporting completion procedure are certain changes of the specifications to make them acceptable by the tools as future work we are going to implement our own tool for completion procedure or integrate others into the cafeobj system besides the future work mentioned above our other future work is as follows in the formalization of task dependencies we only considered ve basic building work will be formalizing these complex building blocks of work ow process as mentioned above model checking can help in several aspects the theorem proving technique to verify work flows combining the two techniques to do work ow veri work we prove a prekopa leindler type inequality for the sugeno integral more precisely if measurable functions on rn then rrn for any concave fuzzy measure also we derive a general brunn minkowski inequality for any homogeneous quasi concave fuzzy measure on rn form establish that if rn are non empty sets and is a real number then  bg and ag the inequality is a classical result in convex geometry and different ap of can be made through the prekopa leindler inequality which establish that for all nonnegative integrable functions verifying for all rn an equivalent and shorter way of stating inequality is to say that for every rn one has has been studied by many authors including work of ralescu and on some equivalent definitions of fuzzy integral roman flores et in level continuity of fuzzy integrals and wang and in a general theory of fuzzy measure and fuzzy integration the aim of this paper is to show some connections between sugeno integral and convex geometry on the one hand we will prove a prekopa leindler type inequality and on the other we will derive a general brunn minkowski type inequality below for any homogeneous and quasi concave fuzzy measure on rn preliminaries and basic results in the sequel as is usual a a a and imply in addition if fepg imply ep then we say that is lower continuous also if fepg imply a borelian fuzzy measure in the sequel will denote a borelian fuzzy measure space for details on fuzzy measures and integrals see ref definition a fuzzy measure on is called concave for any and for any two convex subsets such that if example if is the lebesgue measure in rn then the general brunn minkowski inequality which is a central result in convex geometry states that for all and all and nonempty bounded measurable sets in rn such that is also measurable in particular implies that is a concave fuzzy measure in the early seventies that a measure on rn is log concave if fm where is a nonnegative log concave function de ned in rn that is to say for every rn and if is a nonnegative extended real valued function de ned on rn we will denote by let be a fuzzy measure on if and a then the sugeno integral of on a with respect to the fuzzy measure is de ned as where denotes the operations sup and inf on respectively in particular if a rn then the following properties of the sugeno integral are well known and can be found ia if a and ia if a then iad if a is the characteristic function of a that is to say a if a and a if a then ad afd for any theorem if is a fuzzy measure and is an integrable function then where the integral in the right side of the last equation is the fuzzy integral of with respect to the lebesgue measure that the prekopa leindler inequality is not true for the sugeno integral as is showed in the following example example in consider x and z with supp if then in accordance with for checking p l inequality we can construct h on the other hand a straightforward calculus shows that rfdm rgdm and rhdm thus which implies that inequality is not veri ed by the sugeno integral for to present an exact version of the inequality in the fuzzy context we precise the following previous results lemma let be a fuzzy measure and two measurable functions viii
appeal of ad valorem network externalities the beneficial gohring effect that arises from access to more frequent flights to a wider set of might also travel time between two european capitals fell between and by minutes due to more extensive and frequent flights the time reduction was largest for the routes with the lowest initial densities with no gains for routes with traffic exceeding passengers per year most airlines however limit own ticket issues to routes covered by the airline for carbon taxes there may then be a case for taxing aviation fuel in order to correct underinvestment in and very little evidence on their quantitative importance the safest approach for policy design seems at least for the moment to be to suppose that they net out to zero iv tax rates revenues and incidence this section reports illustrative calculations of the rates at which internationally coordinated aviation taxes might optimally be set the these calculations is that of section in which there is assumed to be no cross border spillover of environmental harm the analysis is thus best thought of as corresponding to the case of globally coordinated tax design with all countries assumed to be identical left to future work for the purposes of these calculations the elasticity of demand is assumed to be constant taking alternative values of unity and that broadly reflect the estimates for leisure and business travel reported above the elasticity of substitution in production s is also taken to be constant with values of unity or and the factor share for aviation fuel a is assumed to be in the absence of aviation taxes the marginal cost of public funds d ranges from unity to a fairly moderate the appropriate value of marginal environmental damage remains an open question but the discussion above suggested a reasonable order of magnitude particularly in contexts like the european to be per gallon of aviation fuel and fuel tax rates for the case in which the elasticity of demand is unity the first two columns show ticket and fuel tax rates when both instruments are optimally deployed in this case the calculations are straightforward recalling and the optimal fuel tax is d while the optimal ticket tax is in this case simply d the results are thus easily anticipated but provide a useful reminder that the optimal fuel tax decreases of public funds taking the central case in which it decreases from around per cent when d is unity to per cent at d perhaps more interestingly the last three columns in table show optimal tax rates when only one tax instrument may be deployed and recognising too that in this case the optimal fuel tax depends on the elasticity of substitution in production as one would expect each tax in would be if the other tax were also available and the optimal stand alone fuel tax is higher at the lower elasticity of substitution beyond this three points stand out first the optimal stand alone fuel tax increases with the marginal cost of public funds reflecting the impact of an intensified revenue need second the optimal ticket tax becomes highly sensitive to the marginal social cost of public funds again taking the central case in which it increases from per cent when lump sum taxes are available in which case the ticket tax is being used only as an inferior corrective device to per cent when d third the elasticity of substitution in production matters halving it more than doubles the optimal stand alone fuel tax at the highest level of d the intuition evident from is that at higher levels of d the revenue motive becomes more dominant further emphasizing the role that table repeats the exercise for a demand elasticity of broadly the same qualitative pattern emerges with the tendency towards a higher rate associated with the ramsey component being evident except in the case of the fuel tax when both instruments are optimally deployed since that instrument is then independent of the elasticity of demand preferred when only one can be used as the discussion in section iii indicated the fuel tax is more likely to be preferred the lower is the marginal cost of public funds d and the higher is the marginal environmental damage less obviously the calculations also show that the issue is a real one in that neither tax dominates the other within the plausible range of parameter values at for example the fuel tax when lump sum taxes are available becomes inferior to the ticket tax when d rises to the quite moderate level of it also emerges that the choice between the instruments is potentially quite sensitive to the elasticity of substitution with the fuel tax more likely to be preferred the lower it is for the lower is s the less is the erosion of the tax base and hence the jeopardy to the revenue objective from taxing fuel using only one instrument rather than two and in then choosing the wrong one the first two columns suggest that there may be relatively little gain in using both instruments rather than only the better of the two the largest policy gain is under per cent of turnover the gain in of the single instruments tends to be somewhat larger but is still relatively modest when there is no environmental damage for example inappropriately deploying a fuel tax leads to a welfare loss of about per cent of expenditure these calculations thus suggest that there may be relatively little loss in using one instrument even if not the best choice available rather than two which a fuel tax alone is deployed and set at its average worldwide pigovian level this level is unknown but the considerations discussed at the end of section ii suggest it may be lower than the benchmark of taken in the simulations above suppose instead that the fuel tax were set at half this level corresponding roughly as noted earlier to the damage
such private banking activities were recorded at billion in of which sourced from hong kong investors and the rest from non hong kong investors asset management for private clients remains a minor financial activity in indonesia most pension funds continue to be held by the state or private employers although the growth of mutual funds should give rise to more professional management wealthy private individuals tend to hold substantial assets abroad especially in singapore according to the bank of korea assets in private banking accounts amounted to trillion at end or all household deposits wrap accounts which allow money managers to offer and manage a group of investments in stocks bonds and cash funds for a flat fee received regulatory approval in september only full service securities companies can handle wrap accounts which must have at least million per personal account and million per corporate account at least the assets in these accounts must be invested in high yield bonds cash management accounts a south korean version of us money market mutual funds pool funds from multiple investors investment in cmas through short term financing houses requires an initial minimum deposit of million according to morgan stanley research the fees of kookmin and hana banks came private banking in malaysia is mostly offered by the larger domestic banks or by foreign banks such as hsbc standard chartered bank and citibank it is usually a premium service providing current accounts safe deposit boxes and complimentary credit card memberships to selected customers major individual investors in malaysia still turn to financial institutions in more mature and more liberal financial markets such as singapore and hong kong to manage their assets foreign based banks in the philippines segment their individual clients to carve out high net worth individuals however as in other developing countries in the asian region where the law permits wealthy private individuals tend to hold a substantial part of their assets overseas the traditional activities of western style asset management firms targeting high net worth clients have not yet appeared in china however a number of foreign banking have taken stakes in chinese banks and securities firms presumably with a view to building the private client business as serious wealth develops in china in the years ahead private banking in china has mostly focused on the management of offshore accounts for chinese residents who have managed to establish a wealth position abroad much of the activity occurring in singapore hong kong and switzerland foreign private bankers alternatives abroad but stay clear of the actual expatriation of funds for fear of running afoul of strict chinese currency and tax regulations domestically chinese wealth management was highly underdeveloped in terms of private banking services asset allocation opportunities and limits on foreign investments given the wto induced liberalization of the activities of foreign banks in china at the end of major players such as ubs credit suisse hsbc and be able to accept deposits from wealthy individuals which can be channeled into higher margin investment products the banks offshore client base has provided a useful platform for developing their onshore business in china and to take advantage of the weak client information systems and service capabilities of the local banks though this should change before long due to joint ventures with foreign banks the size of the private banking market in china is estimated to rise from billion in to billion in nevertheless there appears a good deal of protectionist sentiment in china in favor of delaying the licensing of foreign private banks while domestic banks remain well behind in their ability to offer private client services vi some country specific attributes of asset to the restructuring of their banking systems and specifically disposal of non performing bank loans hong kong as a continuing regional leader hong kong has the largest concentration of international fund managers in asia according to the fund management activities survey by the securities and futures commission the aggregate amount of assets in the combined fund management business reported by licensed corporations and registered institutions amounted to billion at the end of institutional funds non sfc authorized funds and pension funds have been the major types of funds managed representing and the total aum of licensed corporations and registered institutions respectively sfc authorized funds private client funds and mandatory provident funds accounted for the remaining as shown in exhibit of services in managing clients portfolios of securities and or futures contracts incidental to client driven dealing in securities or derivatives by geographical origin non hong kong investors remained the major source of funds accounting for the advisory business the amount of assets advised in hong kong accounted for the total asian advisory business singapore as the leading asset management center in southeast asia in addition to the strength of private client asset management in singapore it appears that institutional clients continue to account for about assets under management with individuals and collective investment schemes each accounting for equities accounted for assets under management bonds for collective investment schemes for money market assets for and alternative the average aum of asset management entities was billion in there were asset management entities managing more than billion in assets accounting for total aum asset managers with less than billion in aum numbered in and accounted for total aum most of these managers are indigenous in indigenous asset management and discretionary aum and total employment of investment professionals respectively as of end total assets managed by singapore based financial institutions were reported to be billion with more than total aum sourced from abroad singapore retained its role as an international asset management center asia pacific countries remained the main markets for singapore based asset managers in accounting for total funds sourced sourced from europe the remaining from other markets new high growth markets have emerged funds sourced from the middle east and south asia grew per annum respectively in vii competitive dynamics in the asset
the comparative effects of positive versus negative emotions from a mood repairing perspective people in negative moods may be expected to choose risky options to give themselves a option may be more likely to be selected conversely positive emotions involve both heuristic processing and risk aversion and consequently result in the more probable choice of the safe option although previous research has provided a valuable empirical and theoretical base for the study of how emotion affects risk taking behavior an effective way to define rational behavior but may have only limited relevance to everyday choices which are made in the face of uncertainty and ambiguity this study adopts an approach that is based on that of hockey maule clough and bdzola of life scenarios to test our prediction that positive emotions lead to risk aversion that people in a negative emotional state will take higher risks than those in a positive emotional state study the effects of emotions on risk taking the purpose of this study is to test the impact of positive and negative emotional states on risk taking the emotional state of subjects was experimentally manipulated and its effect on the an age range of to enrolled in a marketing management course in taiwan their participation design half of the subjects were induced to feel happy and the other subjects were induced to feel sad the design was a simple one factor two level between subjects design and tversky and also used by mittal and ross and kuvaas and kaufmann the positive story described a student who was fortunate enough to become accepted in to medical school with a scholarship whereas the negative story described another student s struggle with leukemia according to mittal and ross and kuvaas and setting after reading the story subjects were asked how happy do you feel right now and how enjoyable was it to be in this situation to rate their current emotions on a scale of extremely unhappy bad to extremely happy good dependent variables a personal risk inventory that was developed life and to represent a wide range of situations the subjects were instructed to imagine how they would feel in each situation and to choose which of two actions they would take a was identified as a risky option and represented a safe option to obtain a more accurate this provided a spectrum of riskiness rather than a dichotomous index of risk choices higher values of riskiness refer to increased endorsement of the safe alternative finally the subjects completed sets of scenarios across a wide range of situations two examples of the scenarios are given in appendix in exchange for their time at the beginning of the experiment the subjects were required to read either a happy or a sad story and to complete two measures regarding their emotional state there was no visual or verbal contact among the subjects the subjects then completed kinds of scenarios of individual preferences in risk taking finally they felt happier than those in a negative emotional condition immediately after an emotion was induced this result confirmed the effectiveness of the emotional manipulation effects of emotional state in study we analyzed the relationship between emotion is more likely to precipitate risk averse behavior fifty four percent of the subjects on average chose the safe option regardless of whether they were in a positive or negative emotional condition as shown in table the subjects who were induced to experience a positive emotion chose the safe option across the sets of scenarios degree of commitment to the selected option was used to examine the tendency of subjects to engage in risk taking as table shows the subjects with negative emotions were significantly more likely than those with positive emotions to select the risky option across the sets of scenarios across the sets of in terms of tendency to select the risky option the findings show that the preference for the amount of risk taken may be influenced by emotion in addressing the study research question the results showed that the subjects in a negative emotional state were more likely to engage in risk taking behavior whereas those understand how emotional state influences consumer choice and specifically the purchase of tour commodities study the effects of emotion on purchasing a trip commodity study demonstrated that subjects who were induced to feel good tended to yield more risk averse behavior than those who were induced to feel bad in state with a greater risk aversion would purchase more prepackaged trips than those who were in a negative emotional state in terms of delivery there are two types of leisure travel services fully prepackaged which was assigned as the safe option and a represents the choice of buying a packaged tour and making one large difficult decision to avoid making smaller but more numerous difficult decisions although picking the wrong package might be costly most tourists would agree that the less risky alternative is the prepackaged plan in which all of the arrangements have already been made also found that mood shoppers differ people would prefer to purchase a fully packaged tour commodity thus we predict the following subjects in a positive emotional state will be more likely to choose a fully packaged tour commodity than subjects in a negative emotional state method pretest were asked to read a scenario and then to answer the question for both the fully prepackaged and the mix and match option how safe do you feel your chosen course of action to be the subjects were asked to indicate how risky they perceived their course of action to be by circling a number between and on a questionnaire where a higher number indicated greater safety no safety associated with it and circle if you feel that the option is very safe the results across the three categories showed that the fully prepackaged option was perceived to be safer than the mixed and match options with a statistically significant difference between the fully prepackaged and mix and match options subjects and procedure in study the prediction thatmore subjects in whom positive emotions have been induced will choose a fully packaged
result we have placed a more explicit emphasis on describing and providing behavioral guidelines for a mastery involving motivational climate in a newly evolved intervention called the mastery approach to coaching the effects of this intervention on motivational climate and performance anxiety are the focus of the present study cet principles for reducing performance anxiety and fear of failure in young athletes with discrepant results smith smoll and barnett assessed cet s effects on performance trait anxiety in male to year old baseball players who played for experimental and control group coaches outcome measures included the sport anxiety scale and the children s sport competition anxiety significant reductions in anxiety occurred in children who played for the cet trained coaches but not in a control condition in a more recent study conroy and coatsworth tested cet principles in a sample of seven coaches and male and female swimmers ranging in age from to years using the performance failure appraisal inventory which correlates with the sas as the outcome measure system to code the observed behaviors of coaches and thereby assess compliance with the cet behavioral guidelines although the four trained coaches observed behaviors were more consistent with cet guidelines than were those of the three control coaches no evidence for reduced fear of failure was found nor did sex of athlete affect the outcome correctly note their results constitute a failure to replicate the smith the et al results with a measure that taps a fear of failure construct that seems conceptually related to the sas and scat performance anxiety construct they concluded that this failure raises questions about the generality of intervention effects in athletic samples other than the male baseball population that has been the focus of previous cet studies for example no previous study has the effects of the coach intervention on girls teams it should be noted however that conroy and coatsworth s failure to replicate the findings of the previous cet study may have been the result of methodological shortcomings associated with the research design sample and measures conroy and coatsworth examined a heterogeneous sample of youth swimmers and a relatively small sample of seven coaches in addition of their scales developed with college students for the youngest children in their sample is unclear flesch kincaid readability scores on their five item scale were as high as grade which may affect the scale s validity for the younger portion of their sample thus a need exists for a more explicit study of intervention effects in young athletes using an age appropriate measure in the present study we assessed outcomes in basketball a different sport than previously and we compared intervention effects for a larger number of boys and girls teams and coaches a second important issue addressed in the present study is the unanswered question of how the coach intervention affects the somatic and cognitive components of performance anxiety previous motivational climate studies have shown possible relations to the cognitive components of anxiety although the sas contains separate scales for somatic anxiety worry and concentration disruption the three factor structure of the sas confirmed repeatedly in older samples was not replicated in smith the et al s to year old sample total sas score was therefore used as the outcome measure moreover the scat also used in that study measures only global anxiety motor performance cognitive processing and psychophysiological measures it is important to know which anxiety components are influenced by a given intervention for example were a coach intervention to influence some anxiety components but not others effects of the intervention on certain outcomes might be affected moreover it order to target unaffected components the ability to measure multidimensional trait anxiety in children is now possible because a revised measure the sport anxiety scale reproduces the somatic worry and concentration disruption factors in both child and adult populations on theoretical and empirical grounds described above we therefore predicted motivational climate we reasoned further that reduced fear of negative social evaluation lessened social comparison pressures and enhanced social support associated with a mastery involving climate would result in lower levels of both cognitive and somatic performance anxiety over the course of the season in athletes who played for trained coaches of and years who participated in community based basketball programs in a city in the western united states the mean age of the coaches was years and the mean number of years of basketball coaching experience was the mean age of the athletes was years and the mean number of years that they had played basketball for their current coach was might interact with and potentially share mac guidelines with the coaches in the control group we utilized a matched quasi experimental design so as to ensure the integrity of the intervention on the basis of us census bureau tract data we selected from among several possible catchment areas two youth sport programs that drew participants from households that were similar to one another in socioeconomic status and educational attainment the two programs were in separate community leagues and therefore did not compete against one another the programs had similar sex and age distributions across the to year age range and coaches in the two conditions did not differ on any of the background variables both programs had two hour long practices and one game per athletes exposure to the coaches the two programs were among six programs that participated in the development of a new age appropriate achievement goal orientation scale given the possibility that achievement goal orientation might affect responses to a motivational climate intervention we compared the children in the intervention and control conditions on the achievement goal scale foryouth sports modeling to appropriately assess intervention effects in fact all coaches in the intervention program chose to participate the intervention condition therefore comprised boys and girls teams and the control condition contained boys and girls teams teams in the two programs did not differ in mean won lost percentages during the season
stocks especially at longer lags for example based on lag six month returns the difference between winners and losers adjusted aggregate institutional demand is stocks in the smallest capitalization middle capitalization quintile and stocks in the largest capitalization quintile inconsistent with table however the results in panel of table reveal that aggregate institutional demand is positively related to lag annual returns for large capitalization stocks the results in the first five rows in panel of table explain why tables and differ with respect to lag annual returns in large capitalization stocks whereas table examines the lag return characteristics of the quintile of the quintile of large stocks institutions most heavily sell panel of table reveals that only of stocks are in the bottom performance quintile and top capitalization quintile given five capitalization groups and five lag return groups each cell should account for of the total observations if lag return and size are independent the positive correlation between current size and lag return means that very few large capitalization stocks demonstrates however that institutions in aggregate do sell the relatively few stocks that are in the extreme lag loser quintile but remain in the top capitalization quintile one concern with both tables and is that with so many tests some statistics are likely to be statistically significant simply by chance to ensure the results are not spurious i also calculate bonferronized values for both tables and that apply a probability to the entire table specifically tables and each the results also reveal that institutional momentum trading is the weakest in the very largest of stocks moreover the weaker relation between institutional demand and lag returns for large stocks is driven at least in part from the fact that few extreme lag losers remain large stocks lag returns and changes in portfolio weights products of the quarterly change in the institution s portfolio weight in the stock and the stock s lag market adjusted return where wi is institution s stock portfolio weight at the end of quarter and r is the market adjusted return for stock over the previous quarter six months or year as pointed out by grinblatt however a stock that increases in value over a quarter tends to have a larger portfolio weight at the end of the quarter than the beginning even if the institution does not trade it to eliminate such passive momentum i follow badrinath and wahal and compute beginning and end of quarter portfolio weights with the end of quarter prices the gtw measure has a straightforward interpretation gtwj is the difference in the lag quarter returns of the portfolio the end of quarter and the portfolio institution holds at the beginning of quarter with the either mutual fund data or data previous studies using the gtw measure find little evidence of institutional momentum trading similarly the gtw measure for the institution quarter observations in my sample based on one quarter six month and one year lag returns average and basis points respectively in in short regardless of the sample the gtw metric reveals no evidence of institutional momentum trading i begin to resolve the differences between the base case results and the gtw metric results by hypothesizing that gtw primarily measures momentum trading in large capitalization stocks because gtw is measured at the institution rather than the stock level institutions favor large capitalization stocks and the absolute value of changes in portfolio weights tends to the first portion of the gtw metric tends to be greater for large capitalization stocks as large stocks have larger portfolio weights to evaluate the relations between the gtw metric and firm size i disaggregate gtw at the institution level and examine each institution stock quarter observation s contribution to the gtw metric the statistics are based on the time series of the cross sectional means consistent with the average gtw results discussed above the results reveal no evidence of institutional momentum trading the average contribution does not differ significantly lag quarter or the lag six months and is negative when computed from lag annual returns to evaluate the role of large stocks in computing the average gtw partition the million manager stock quarter contributions reported in panel a of table by capitalization quintile in addition i compute the average absolute portfolio weight change by capitalization quintile results reported in the first column roughly half of the sample observations arise from stocks in the largest capitalization quintile in addition results reported in the second column reveal a monotonic positive relation between the absolute portfolio weight change and firm size the average absolute portfolio weight change in large capitalization stocks is nearly eight times greater than that for stocks in the smallest capitalization quintile thus holding lag returns large stock s contribution to the gtw metric averages over eight times that for a small stock in sum the analysis presented in the first two columns of panel in table reveals that the average gtw metric is primarily driven by large capitalization stocks the last three columns in panel of table report the mean contributions to the gtw metric by capitalization quintile and the associated statistics the results and indicate institutional momentum trading in all but the very largest stocks another potential reason for differences between the base case and the gtw metric is that the same trade can be classified as a buy by one measure and a sell by the other for example if an institution receives a net inflow of and invests in the existing portfolio and in a new stock the portfolio weights for all the positions held at the beginning of the quarter decline generally the trading of any the trading of any stock in a portfolio changes portfolio weights for all stocks in the portfolio including those that are not traded of the institution stock quarter positions in the data set the sign of the institution s portfolio weight change is inconsistent with the sign of the institution s trading in the observations
over a continuous range of phenotypes predictive adaptive responses can only be adaptive if the forecast is correct and will be maladaptive if it is not the retention of mechanisms underpinning such phenotypic memory will be advantageous provided that the prediction is generally more often correct than incorrect rate of environmental change relative to generation time modeling shows that these processes would be particularly valuable in allowing an organism to survive during a transient environmental shift indeed the same environmental cue may induce presumptively adaptive or disruptive responses depending on its magnitude for example maternal hyperglycemia may induce congenital heart defects a disruptive response or alterations in fetal growth with long term consequences that may be adaptive a developmental response to an endocrine disruptor may but although such interactions use physiological mechanisms they disrupt development and cannot be considered adaptive evaluating whether a response is adaptive or disruptive may be difficult in a given experimental situation for example is the reduction in nephron number in sheep after maternal exposure to very high doses of glucocorticoids in it part of some adaptive process mimicking a normal situation where the fetus responds to maternal glucocorticoids crossing the placenta under situations of maternal stress similarly is the continuous relationship between maternal vitamin a intake and nephron number in the rat a dose dependent disruptive effector does it have adaptive fetus of a malnourished mother may induce premature delivery which we can consider as providing advantage potentially benefiting both mother and fetus but it may also be part of a predictive response allowing the organism to cope better in a later environment perceived to be threatening phenotype showing obesity hyperphagia hyperinsulinemia and reduced activity in open field testing particularly if they are fed a high fat diet after weaning in this case the poor prenatal nutrition led to prediction of a poor postnatal environment but in reality the postnatal environment was nutritionally rich recent if prenatally undernourished rat pups are given leptin subcutaneously in the neonatal period they grow up even on a high fat diet with a metabolic phenotype identical to that of rats born to a normally nourished mother it appears that the neonatal rat pup has been tricked into perceiving that it is for metabolic physiology it is possible for the prenatal prediction to be changed from one of an adverse environment to one of an energy rich environment with the consequent alterations in physiology at a mechanistic level this may involve the synaptogenic actions of leptin or its peripheral actions for example is the importance of the interaction between the effect of the prenatal cues on the phenotype and its consequent effect on the response to the postnatal environment for example in rats the prenatal environment determines both peripheral and central sensitivity to high energy nutritional intake imposed after weaning al stoffers et al vickers et al wyrwoll et al by postnatal interventions indicating a window of physiological plasticity that extends beyond the intrauterine period in this discussion we have simplistically described only one developmental environment and only one mature environment but it would be more realistic interactions with the environment at the next stage and so on there is increasing evidence that predictive adaptive responses are underpinned by epigenetic changes these may be manifest as altered gene expression and consequent altered regulatory control or given the importance of epigenetic mechanisms to developmental biology as organizational change and altered tissue to methylation of dna and changes in chromatin structure affecting the expression of genes underlying the altered phenotype for example maternal behavior in rats can be manipulated to leave the offspring as adults with altered stress responses and behavior this is associated with alterations in the expression of the glucocorticoid receptor be reversed by chemical manipulation of histone acetylation one of the consequences of dna methylation in another experimental model the offspring of female rats exposed to a low protein diet show changes in expression of several genes including that for the glucocorticoid receptor in the liver heart muscle and fat we have preliminary evidence that the reversal of the effects of prenatal undernutrition by postnatal leptin treatment is accompanied by coordinated changes in expression and promotermethylation of key genes there is increasing interest in epigenetic in humans are poorly understood there is experimental evidence that developmental induction can be transmitted from the generation to the generation and beyond through the male and or female lines after hormonal or nutritional and this in turn may influence the size of her own progeny fig reversal of developmental induction by neonatal leptin treatment rat dams were fed ad libitum throughout pregnancy or undernourished throughout pregnancy pups from un mothers were cross fostered to ad mothers after birth to standardize postnatal feeding and all offspring were fed a high after weaning the neonates were treated with the either saline or recombinant rat leptin on postnatal days total body fat and metabolic profile as reflected by fasting plasma leptin insulin and peptide concentrations were measured in adult females untreated prenatally undernourished animals were obese hyperinsulinemic and hyperleptinemic as adults compared with control animals development of metabolic phenotype was prevented by neonatal leptin treatment values eight animals per group the dohad paradigm an adaptive perspective we have used the concept of predictive adaptive responses to explain the observations according to the environment it forecasts will exist after birth if the signals in the developmental phase suggest limited nutrient availability then the organism will adjust its developmental trajectory such that the mature individual has a metabolic homeostasis better adapted for survival in a sparse environment any association between such a model can explain the observed continuous associations between birth size and disease risk how disease risk may be independent of changes in birth size and how developmental induction can occur in other physiological systems an important feature of such a model is that the alterations in regulatory systems induced underpinning a specific trait in the adult and thus make the organism more or less susceptible to disease in an extreme postnatal environment
sociology is useful in giving us the general insight that consumption depends on cultural norms we need to be more specific what is the nature of those norms they can frequently oddly people have obligations to spend social history is full of the obligation to keep up appearances most wall street bankers for example do not live like mothers on welfare they do not want to but even if they did it would occasion gossip it is not what they should do history is replete with stories of the debt of aristocrats struggling to maintain their up with the joneses of the eighteenth century are considered a significant factor underlying the southern support of the american in addition to obligations to spend there are also entitlements the lost ticket paradox of amos tversky and daniel kahneman gives an illustration eighty eight percent of respondents to a questionnaire said they would contrast only percent said they would buy a new ticket in the same situation if they had lost a previously purchased ticket tversky and kahneman explain this difference by mental accounts but an explanation in terms of entitlements is equally valid tversky and kahneman say that those who have lost the bill do not connect that loss to the play account its cost is those with the lost ticket then tend to opt out because they see as too much to pay to see the play but the difference in behavior for those who lost the ticket and those who lost the bill could also have been interpreted in terms of entitlements most people want to think of themselves as responsible human beings we should also observe that it is not coincidental that the lost ticket paradox could be explained both by mental accounting and by norms formally any model of mental accounting can be translated into a model of norms just replace the rules of mental accounting as the norms that people think they should but even though norms and mental accounting or wrongly of being a heuristic for quick decisions such a heuristic will of course sometimes result in cognitive error whether rightly or wrongly most economists would dismiss cognitive error as unimportant why because in their view people are smart about what they want and their decisions are also very purposeful but norms cannot motivation of macroeconomics but it turns out that there is quite possibly a substantive difference between the two interpretations with the mental accounting interpretation the losers of the ticket could be induced to buy one if only a wise friend would make them aware of the logical problems of their reasoning in contrast with the norms interpretation the friend cannot the link of entitlements and obligations to current income it remains to relate current spending to current income norms may be complex but a web of evidence still reveals a strong association between current income and entitlements and obligations to spend such a link in turn produces the excess sensitivity of consumption on current income in keynes s budget constraint to expect their children to assume financial independence after their graduation from college they are indicating their belief in the norm that the child is entitled to spend what she earns is especially useful in our quest for a keynesian consumption function norms take many forms so their formal model is not but it does illustrate a possible link between consumption and current income in this model people have three separate mental accounts current income current assets and future income combined they incur a discontinuous penalty those penalties are psychological in nature this is a model of mental accounting and they take the form of a loss in corresponding to shefrin and thaler s assumptions regarding the nature of these costs as consumption rises consumers will first finance it wholly from current income then is an exact translation of such a model into one with norms regarding entitlements to consume the rules of mental accounting become the norms regarding how money should be spent the basic norm is that consumption should come from current income and the discontinuous penalties correspond to the losses of utility due to respective deviations from that norm in particular shefrin and thaler that means that current income can be considered as consumers entitlement to spend since any consumption that is less than current income entails no deviation at all from the norm regarding the account that should finance it shefrin and thaler give an impressive array of econometric facts in support of their model insofar as these facts support their spend those facts include differential savings out of windfall and current a less than one to one displacement of discretionary saving by employee pension contributions undersaving for and a marginal propensity to consume out of fully anticipated bonuses that is much greater than the marginal propensity to consume out of their assets shefrin and statman have viewed this as another form of mental accounting they also present considerable evidence regarding such behavior these are the results for females the men gave almost nothing so their differentials are irrelevant the women gave on average about percent of their earnings those who were asked to donate before the task gave twice a manuscript to be used in making an index shefrin and thaler themselves are explicit about the possibility of other models we should also note that the shefrin thaler model has elements not discussed in the text in general the discontinuous penalties from mental accounting are one reason why consumption might be at a corner solution in one of the three mental accounts shefrin and thaler have of lost utility the less people save the less of this costly willpower they need to expend this gives another reason why consumption might be on one of the boundaries of the mental accounts it is useful to remember that at one of the boundaries consumption will conform to current income summary plays a special role in those entitlements shefrin and thaler
fixing agents for improving the fastness properties of anionic dyes on cellulose fibers as far as fastness properties are concerned this review is restricted only to fastness to light washing and water treatments introduction that improve properties in respect of application and fastness properties of the dyeings cellulose fibers can be dyed with direct and reactive dyes the affinity of direct dyes for cotton is due to the linear and planar structure of the dye molecules which enables close alignment with chains of cellulose molecules resulting in significant hydrogen bonding this is particularly the case not only for many direct dyes but to a lesser extent for reactive dyes also although direct dyes possess inadequate wet fastness properties they are still widely used for their ease of application comparatively low cost and wide range of shades acid dyes which are primarily used for the dyeing of nitrogenous fibers such as wool silk and alignment with the molecular chains in cellulose which in turn prevents hydrogen bonding therefore these dyes are not substantive to cellulosic fibers however cationized cellulosic fibers can be dyed with acid dyes of both the non metallized and premetallized types this increase in substantivity is due to the interaction of anionic sulphonic groups in the dye molecules with the anionic dyes can be brought about by pretreatment or after treatment of textile fibers the use of pretreatments or after treatments to improve the fastness properties of dyeings has a long and prolific history various pretreatment and after treatment systems have been developed but at the moment most widely used are cationic fixing agents these chemicals function by quaternary ammonium phosphonium and tertiary sulphonium compounds can be used as dye fixing agents by far the most important type of cationic fixing agents used in textile processing is quaternary ammonium salt different quaternary ammonium salts have been applied to the fibers either as pretreatment or after treatment to improve the fixing agents in the last one and half decade these new developments during the period from to form the subject matter of this review article as far as the fastness properties are concerned this review is restricted only to fastness to light washing and water treatments general development a metal salt mordant before dyeing and after dyeing fixation with tannin the major growth and establishment of the synthetic dye industry was initiated with the discovery of congo red the first direct dye for cotton in although some early direct dyeings were claimed to be fast to soaping it was soon appreciated that fastness to light and wet treatments left much to be desired of cationic fixing agents began to be fully exploited the importance and use of these agents was greatly extended by the development of products rising from the condensation of cyanamide or similar compounds with formaldehyde these resin fixatives of which fibrofix was a classical example could be applied by a simple finishing technique to cellulosic fibers dyed or printed of agents based on the condensation products of formaldehyde with cyanamide derivatives which were suitable for after treatment of direct dyes on cellulose fibers later on the reaction products of cyanamide or cyanamide derivatives with monofunctional or polyfunctional amines and the condensates of these amines with formaldehyde or methylol derivatives were used as an after treatment developments in this area have already been reviewed in detail extensive research work has shown that formaldehyde based resin finished products release formaldehyde into the atmosphere directly or during processing handling garment manufacturing and subsequent wearing of textiles due to the hydrolysis of unreacted or partially cross linked methylol derivatives present on the fiber eyes nasal passages and respiratory tract while an unreacted or partially cross linked resin causes an allergenic response of the skin upon continuous handling of textiles for reasons of these health problems associated with formaldehyde there was an increasing demand for non formaldehyde fixing agents it has also been reported that formaldehyde containing fixing agents for direct performance properties of the finished goods selection of suitable non formaldehyde fixatives could actually produce better products than using the formaldehyde fixative nitrogenous based dye fixing agents have also been reported to improve overall fastness properties without affecting the tone and depth of shades of reactive dyes on cotton substrates the results indicated that nitrogenous based dye fixing agents after the discovery of reactive dyes dyeing with reactive dyes became the most versatile method for the coloration of cellulosic fabrics these dyes were used instead of after treated direct dyes however the fundamental problem of reactive dyeing is that the reaction of reactive dye with water competes with the formation of dye cannot react with the fiber it should be washed off thoroughly in order to achieve the desired superior wet fastness of the reactive dyeing this involves expensive washing off procedures and the treatment of the effluent thus reactive dyes have both the economic and environmental drawbacks because of high salt usage and insufficient fixation caused by hydrolysis leading to pollution of the effluent also gets fixed showing improved wet fastness therefore after treatment still remained an extremely useful way of improving the wet fastness properties of a deep dyeing that failed to meet the necessary standards developments taking place during the recent decade have enabled direct dyes to compete with reactive dyes in dye and fiber was a significant development these agents were used to after treat dyes on cellulosic polyamide and wool fibers during there was a great revival of interest in the techniques for enhancing the dyeability of cellulosic fibers with reactive or direct dyes by pretreatment with a great variety of cationic products usually based on nitrogen by introducing new cationic sites lewis and lei reviewed numerous chemicals that can be used to provide cationic charges to cotton fibers pretreatment of cellulosic fibers with cationic agents has been reported to enhance the uptake of anionic dyes and facilitate the fixation of reactive dyes in the absence of either salt or alkali the cationized fiber not only has improved the use of anionic dyes and cationic fixing
specification managers project specification managers primarily specialize in design and planning support these marketplaces provide tools to plan and manage complex projects processes for customers applications can range from designing a marketing brochure for a pharmaceutical company to optimizing a transportation network between a consumer products manufacturer and multiple retailers project specification managers represented percent of the marketplaces project specification managers help customers achieve financial results across most dimensions of the purchasing process they provide collaboration tools to help customers increase speed to market and improve decision making on product development ultimately improving potential revenues they also help reduce the invoice price of purchased goods and services by helping buyers determine what to buy they generally however play a minimal role in actually reducing the price paid for example most marketplaces in printing help multiple parties evaluate the marketing benefits of different options for a brochure but they play no role in helping the customer negotiate a reduced price with the printer finally project specification managers play an important role in helping customers reduce other operating costs in the printing example this includes reducing inventory by better matching print schedules to needs reducing errors and rework caused by poor communications and and reducing transaction costs of ongoing dialogues between marketing and purchasing departments and the printer supply consolidators supply consolidators identify the relevant supply base for a customer and conduct the purchasing transaction they also help customers design and plan the purchase and establish the terms of purchase these marketplaces bring together product offerings of many suppliers to increase the buyer s options supply cost and easy access to a fragmented base of suppliers that are either difficult to reach off line or are so numerous that individual online tools are ineffective this type of marketplace provides the resources to identify and in some cases qualify suppliers leading marketplaces provided in depth product information and parametric searches across suppliers to identify best options for the buyer supply consolidators represented percent of marketplaces supply consolidators generally have little impact on customer revenues as their service offerings focus less on product development and more on purchasing to support existing products like project specification managers supply consolidators provide information and tools that help customers reduce overall price by better determining what to buy not necessarily by lowering the price paid to a particular supplier for example a marketplace in electronic components helps engineers specifications across multiple components to evaluate potential substitutes for an input to a computer while the marketplace may not be directly involved in reducing the price of that component the information provided helps the engineer make more effective cost quality trade offs which in turn reduces the total invoice cost finally supply consolidators help customers reduce the transaction costs associated with searching through multiple paper based catalogs compare parameters across parameters across products and manage accounts with numerous suppliers liquidity creators liquidity creators establish the terms of the purchase these marketplaces create liquid dynamic markets for commodity products traded between many buyers and sellers where most effective they provide liquidity for products that were previously too low volume or non standard to warrant off line exchanges examples include spot markets for electronic components and trucking they provide suppliers with a ready market for their products and buyers with a steadier source of supply these marketplaces improve industry utilization and reduce costly broker networks liquidity creators represent percent of marketplaces interviewed by improving market efficiency liquidity creators can help customers to both reduce purchase price and decrease lost revenues to reduce purchase price liquidity a wide base of suppliers enabling customers to compare prices more effectively and more efficiently than previously possible liquidity creators particularly those that operate on the spot market also provide valuable tools for customers to access hard to find parts more efficiently for example one airline was able to reduce the days of grounded aircraft through more efficient access to repair and replacement parts through a marketplace the days of grounded aircraft by more than half saving over million in lost revenue aggregators aggregators primarily combine demand within and across buying enterprises and then use this combined market power to achieve lower prices from suppliers aggregators represented of market places interviewed aggregators are the most focused of marketplace models the primary role of aggregators is to help customers reduce the price paid on a product or service by a product or service by combining purchased volume across buyers and increasing competition among suppliers in general aggregators do not help buyers determine what to buy nor provide tools that reduce other operating costs aggregators have little impact on revenues of the buyer transaction facilitators transaction facilitators primarily transact and execute the actual purchase systems transaction facilitators represented of marketplaces interviewed transaction facilitators generally focus on reducing complex paper based transactions between buyers and sellers when tailored to a specific industry type of purchase these tools can be invaluable in reducing transaction costs dispute costs resulting from errors and other operating costs in general transaction facilitators or improving market efficiency and therefore have little financial impact linking the marketplace typology to value creation the value propositions of the five constellations developed from the interviews were each judged to be different with project specification managers delivering the most value and transaction facilitators delivering the least the rationale for this judgment is straightforward project specifications managers have the most impact on the thus they have the most impact on cost design time to market and other variables that influence overall company performance it is well established that design decisions determine roughly percent of the eventual total cost of a purchased item transaction facilitators in contrast only influence the efficiency of transactions whatever the value of transaction efficiency is it cannot be as great as the value created in getting a new product to market on time to market on time and on budget in between fall supply consolidators liquidity creators and aggregators these three marketplace models all have the potential to influence the
in chami s excavation of a limestone solution cave these he believes are the oldest known chicken remains in africa and since this species originated in south eastern asia the discovery implies very early trans oceanic traffic but the stratigraphy and dating of the cave layers as problematic moreover of the chicken bones recovered occur with mid late iron age pottery if necessary the specimens should be checked and ams tested for date sutton does not discuss clearly where the problem of stratigraphy lies one point suggested to me informally is that caves should be excavated using cm spits it is true that cm spits were used carefully in machaga cave and it can be shown that bones in a neolithic layer cm do not have any relationship with those appearing above cm of mid late iron age if that is what sutton meant by the problem of stratigraphy apart from that his criticism was taken care of when excavating kuumbi cave recently spits of cm were used and an international team including paul sinclair was invited to monitor the excavation process in trench a charcoal sample collected from cm below the surface has yielded a date of bp which millennium below this depth two chicken bones were collected from cm no other chicken bone was collected above that level in trench level with depth cm was dated to bp which is about at spits with depths cm the lowest level with cattle bones a date of bp was obtained this puts us in the fourth millennium between dated neolithic levels of trench chicken bones were association with six bones collected above cm in the period of late iron age the argument that the bones themselves should be dated in order to ascertain the dates has also been taken care of while dating the machaga and kuumbi caves chicken bones samples submitted to pretoria and uppsala laboratories were found to have no collagen several bones have also been submitted to uppsala laboratory to date cattle and other animals and all were found to have no collagen i think it is now safe to accept the date of the neolithic tradition on the coast and islands of east africa with dates obtained from carefully collected charcoal samples kuumbi cave dates certainly agree with those from machaga and other mafia caves reported above for a neolithic culture only that kuumbi provides a clear pre neolithic context not established before for the coast and islands the way to the nile valley it was discussed elsewhere that the leakeys found in the rift valley evidence of long distance trade dating from about in excavations in ngorongoro crator and njoro cave the cameroonian evidence for the banana phytoliths dating back to which supports the idea that contact between asia and africa occurred in neolithic times has been strictured by vansina in an old tradition of in african archaeology vansina has argued that the scientific evidence for banana phytoliths is not genuine but they are of ensete but a new discovery has been reported from uganda where banana phytoliths have been recovered in a context dating back to the third fourth millennium as the authors have discussed these recent findings support the zanzibar findings of early contact between asia and africa whole ancient scene where communication existed between africa and asia suggesting cultural items flowing in both directions other aspects such as gum copal found in the middle east probably traded there from east african coast dating to the third millennium have also been discussed elsewhere table dates from kuumbi cave conclusion africa it has been argued that archaeological cultural horizons should not be looked upon using a diffusionist model loaded with racial or ethnic biases this kind of a model attributes every african archaeological cultural horizon to immigrants it can be shown that the people who were smelting iron in sub saharan africa in about the first century a were not marauding communities of black people bantu with no inclination to settle and build and had a long history of building stable settlements and trading from neolithic times these were not an isolated biological unit only interested in forest life and its clearance but people who had been in contact with the rest of the ancient world controlling trade and sailing abroad to participate in the ancient world systems if the eiw people are accepted as bantu speakers then these people can be shown to have been period what is adopted here is a diffusionist model with no racial overtones the denials of new archaeological findings have been raised and countered i hope that a critical study of the new findings will be undertaken to provide a balanced assessment of the past and a re examination of diffusionist models and judith cameron school of archaeology and anthropology australian national university canberra act australia nguyen van viet center for southeast asian prehistory ngo hoang quoc viet cau giay hanoi vietnam bui van liem institute of archaeology phan chu trinh hanoi vietnam this paper describes two nautical discoveries buried years ago in the red river alluvial plain northern vietnam one is part of a logboat with a series of empty mortise and locking peg holes for plank attachment using loose rectangular tenons the other from an infant mortuary house is a series of re used long timbers with the exactly the same locked mortise and tenon technology both finds are interpreted as having belonged to river boats like those shown on the sides of heger bronze drums potentially related technologies from the mediterranean and china are also discussed in december the first phase of an archaeological fieldwork the sites of dong xa hung yen province and yen bac ha nam province the main purpose was to locate and excavate waterlogged burials of the dong son phase of late vietnamese prehistory in order to recover textile clothing and shrouds for conservation and analysis previous research at both sites by vietnamese archaeologists had revealed the excellent preservation of textiles in
shifting some manufacturing activities from the plant to warehouses in the example of postponement of labeling cans of product were manufactured without labels and shipped to a dc where they were labeled and shipped to a dc where they were labeled in this case some manufacturing activities were moved out of the plant and replicated at each dc each warehouse became a small manufacturing plant postponement by changing the sequence of activities might result in performing activities later in time closer to when the end customer places the order in which case postponement by changing involves time based postponement however it is important to recognize that time based postponement can be implemented without changing the design of the product the manufacturing processes or the supply chain network structure time based postponement time based postponement refers to the intentional delay of activities to a later time and it can be implemented without changing the sequence of activities time based postponement focuses on points and should include all decisions that increase the cash value of the product such as manufacturing and logistics figure i shows that as product moves forward in the supply chain its out of pocket value increases from a total supply chain viewpoint it is lower cost to hold inventory at the supplier tier where inventory is held at the supplier s variable manufacturing cost if it is held as raw materials at the next tier it is worth the purchase price plus acquisition the next tier it is worth the purchase price plus acquisition costs as shown in figure the cash value of a unit of finished goods inventory at the manufacturer wholesaler and retailer level is and respectively holding inventory at a lower value reduces the direct variable costs associated with inventory such as cost of capital for the assets employed but the costs associated with the risk of products becoming obsolete are also much lower if product does become obsolete it is better for the supply chain it is better for the supply chain to write off product at the lowest cost this means that products held by retailers usually will have a higher cost of obsolescence than products held by the manufacturer figure represents a supply chain with four potential tiers for locating decoupling points raw materials at the manufacturer finished goods at the manufacturer finished goods at distributors and finished goods at retailers a decoupling point is an inventory that acts as a buffer between between the downstream and the upstream portions of the supply chain mason there are two decisions to be made identify the locations of the decoupling points and determine the amount of decoupling inventory to be held at each location in the figure the decisions associated with time based postponement are represented with uppercase letters from a to moving the decoupling inventory from a to and from to is what it is referred to as inventory centralization if if the manufacturing activities can be delayed then the decoupling inventory or some portion of it would be moved from to in this case changes in form or identity would be delayed in time without changing the design of the product the design of the manufacturing processes or the supply chain network structure furthermore the decoupling inventories or some portion of it could be moved from to for example by delaying placement of orders with the supplier as suggested by buckle in summary time based postponement involves decisions that add cost to the product such as those related to manufacturing and logistics activities as well as decisions that add cost to the product but do not result in changes in form identity or location of the product such as delaying when ownership of inventory transfers from a supplier to a customer time based postponement does not require changing where the work is done that is the point is unchanged time based postponement should be used to decide the location and size of decoupling points usually the terms point of product differentiation and decoupling point are treated as synonyms however these are two distinct concepts in some situations the point of product differentiation and the decoupling point might be at the same location but in others they will not for example inventory centralization is about consolidating inventory from multiple dcs into a central location and the about consolidating inventory from multiple dcs into a central location and the decoupling point is moved upstream without changing the structure of the supply chain assuming that dcs are not closed down when considering inventory centralization the decoupling point is moved upstream while the point of product differentiation is unchanged time based postponement has the most potential when applied across organizations in the supply chain we refer to this as interorganizational time based postponement interorganizational time based postponement interorganizational time based postponement the accepted definition of postponement is to delay activities until a customer order is received however the key question is who is the customer if the customer is the next tier customer then postponement will reduce inventories for the manufacturer since little or no finished goods will be carried but rather undifferentiated materials parts or subassemblies at a lower cost but postponement should not be implemented without considering a lower cost but postponement should not be implemented without considering the impact on other members of the supply chain this is particularly important if the organizations involved in the postponement are not close to the end customer because inventory increases in value as it moves closer to the end customer and decisions made upstream may result in higher cost inventory being held downstream there are situations in which multiple members of the supply chain will be able to postpone until the end customer places the order this will require that all firms in the supply chain reduce lead times so that they can operate in a make to order environment and deliver within the time the customer is willing to wait
of successful automatic comprehension of wh questions at the position of the verb interestingly aphasic participants showed qualitatively different fixation patterns for trials eliciting correct and incorrect responses aphasic individuals looked first to the moved element picture and then to a competitor following the verb in the incorrect trials however they only showed looks to the moved moved element picture for the correct trials parallel to control participants furthermore aphasic individuals fixations during movement sentences were just as fast as control participants fixations these results are unexpected under slowed processing accounts of aphasic comprehension deficits in which the source of failed comprehension should be delayed application of the same processing routines used in successful comprehension this pattern is also unexpected if aphasic individuals different strategies than normals to comprehend such sentences as under impaired representation accounts of agrammatism instead it suggests that agrammatic aphasic individuals may process wh questions similarly to unimpaired individuals but that this process often fails to facilitate ov line comprehension of sentences with wh movement introduction a who did the boy kiss today at school it was the girl who the boy kissed today at school both structures involve wh movement the wh question word who in and the wh operator who in have moved to their surface positions with a trace occupying their basic position following the verb kiss this re ordering element receiving an agent role in standard picture matching or act out tasks used to test comprehension of these structures individuals with agrammatic aphasia often perform no better than chance for example many aphasic individuals would be equally likely to say that matched a picture in which a girl was kissing a boy as one in which the girl was being clearly something about relating the moved element in sentences to the trace position from which it is moved is difficult for many individuals with agrammatic broca s aphasia particularly when the moved element appears in non canonical position there is still considerable controversy regarding the source of this comprehension difficulty some accounts of sentences they posit that some part of the language processing system is severely slowed or weakened due to injury and that this slowdown creates particular problems for structures involving non canonical movement one influential version of this approach claims that slowed processing is what underlies aphasic individuals comprehension difficulties for example the activation of individual or the on line assembly of phrase structure may be slowed the architecture of the comprehension system is intact in aphasia under these approaches as is the grammatical representation of the sentences involved but one part of the system s operation is pathologically delayed the delay in successful processing of one component of people with aphasia should use the same processing routines to construct the same representations as people without aphasia but in a much slower manner for example when confronted with a movement sentence aphasic individuals compute the same syntactic dependency between a moved element and its underlying position in a sentence as unimpaired individuals just to comprehend a movement sentence it is because they have computed the relationship between the moved element and the subcategorizing verb too late for the information to be of use these impaired representation accounts of aphasic language deficits claim that brain injury has resulted in damage to some aspect of a sentence s grammatical representation which creates particular difficulty for comprehending and producing sentences with movement for example traces may be impaired or missing from a sentence s structure or the referential under these accounts one or more of the elements needed to compute a movement dependency is missing so aphasic individuals are unable to assign a complete grammatical structure to movement sentences as a result they may use extralinguistic heuristics or assign coreference at chance when they attempt to comprehend movement sentences for the first np of a sentence is an agent or actor under these approaches people with aphasia are doing something fundamentally different from typical individuals when they try to understand a movement sentence they are assigning different or incomplete syntactic representations to movement sentences these approaches therefore different from how people without aphasia comprehend them since they cannot assign the same syntactic structure to the sentence as unimpaired individuals aphasic individuals should not use the same syntax driven strategies that typical comprehenders do during comprehension of sentences with movement we will return to discuss these syntax driven strategies below for the fact that ov line comprehension of sentences with movement is impaired however ov line evidence alone is insufficient to decide between them as accounts of the comprehension impairment for such the two approaches do make distinctive predictions regarding the on line comprehension of movement sentences as noted above the slowed processing individuals comprehension of the same sentences and that their automatic comprehension should be slowest when comprehension fails the impaired representation account predicts that aphasic individuals automatic comprehension of movement sentences should be qualitatively different from typical individuals comprehension of such sentences even for cases of successful comprehension assigned by typical to date there has been relatively little evidence regarding real time comprehension of movement sentences in aphasia the existing evidence appears to favor slowed processing accounts dickey and thompson tested aphasic and unimpaired control participants in an auditory anomaly detection task in which participants listened to a the girl put on a shirt that her mother picked for her before church today the girl put on a shirt that her mother fried for her before church today aphasic participants who had been treated using treatment of underlying forms which non anomalous as did control participants this indicates that they had successfully associated the head of the relative clause came later on average than correct rejections by control participants this pattern is consistent with a slowed processing account of aphasic syntactic comprehension in which even successful computation of movement dependencies is slowed a parallel line of evidence from cross modal lexical a moved element with a trace but
rna in mammals and and rnas in drosophila previous analyses confirm theoretical expectations that the sex chromosomes contain specialized functional sets of genes in xx xy systems the male specific genes spend all of their evolutionary history in males and have evolved male specific functions chromosome genes are subject to competing evolutionary pressures although of their hemizygous exposure in males genes also spend twice as much of their evolutionary history in females as in males so that they may be under differential selection to be good for females the chromosome of drosophila has relatively few genes that are involved in male reproduction whereas in mammals the chromosome has accumulated because specialization of the gene content of the chromosome appears to occur in birds and could shift ratios of gene expression we also sought evidence for specialization of the chromosome results and discussion analysis of male female ratios of gene expression in spotted onto the arrays and used in the present analysis were classified as a and as ratios of expression were calculated from hybridization of male versus female samples in each of four tissues brain the ratio was significantly greater in genes compared with a genes moreover the distributions of ratios for versus a genes were significantly different two sample test liver for kidney we performed a gene by gene analysis to determine which genes showed a significant sex difference in expression of four genes were expressed more highly in females of the other genes expressed at a higher level in males were genes genes expressed at a significantly higher level in males were disproportionately found to be linked in all tissues except liver a result that increases the likelihood that these genes were not false positives the expression ratio of genes was correlated across the four tissues suggesting that the ratio was influenced by regulatory factors that operate in multiple tissues to confirm the result of the zebra finch microarray analysis linked genes in adult and brain all but one of the ratios measured using rt pcr were higher than those estimated using the microarray analysis and in adult brain all ratios were close to the lower ratios in the microarray analyses may be due to nonlinearity over the dynamic range of the signal intensities or to other factors global analysis of chick embryo gene expression is generalizable we performed a more global analysis of gene expression in a second bird species the chicken using affymetrix chicken genome microarrays which measure the expression of more than genes expression was analyzed in the brain liver and heart of chick embryos at day in the liver in the heart and in the brain the ratios for genes were clearly higher than for a genes in each tissue with in each case and the distributions of ratios of a and genes differed in each tissue the distributions of ratios of that for the chromosome the mean ratio was near for each autosome we used quantitative rt pcr to establish that ratios measured in the microarrays were accurate the results for chick tissues agree well were higher in males and were higher in females the proportion of genes expressed more strongly in males compared with females was higher among genes than among a genes the expression ratio of genes was correlated across the three tissues tissues in zebra finch and chicken bimodality could be evidence for the existence of two discrete populations of genes that are more or less dosage compensated however the data do not show strong bimodality because all of the distributions for zebra finches as expected from the ratios described above the mean a ratios for chicken brain liver and heart were consistently higher in males than females for each tissue with no overlap in the values the a ratio was higher in males than in females the a ratios are within the range of a ratios reported for mammals suggesting birds as in mammals although the balance is less effective in females than in males unlike the situation for a ratios in mammals the a ratio for brain is not higher than in other tissues we also analyzed previously published microarray expression studies utilizing a total of arrays in five studies on chicken spleen bursa a macrophage cell line embryonic mixed sex show mean a ratios of and in the same range as our results for embryonic tissues to determine whether these data show specialization of gene content on the chromosome in chickens we asked whether specific types of genes are concentrated on the chromosome compared with autosomes when liver genes were defined as those found in the filtered dataset for liver the chromosome than expected by chance of genes classed as liver according to this definition were on the less than the expected from the number of non liver genes on the relative to all non liver genes in contrast when liver genes were defined as genes found in all tissues but twofold higher in liver than in either of the other in this case of liver genes were more than the seven expected on the basis of the number of non liver genes on the relative to all non liver genes brain and heart genes defined according to either of these methods or several others showed no specific over or under representation on the chromosome these results indicate that not all definitions show that effect if concentration of male biased genes on the chromosome rather than the difference in genomic dose of genes is responsible for the significantly higher ratio of genes relative to a genes one would predict that housekeeping genes would not show the versus a difference in ratios housekeeping genes are important for function of by concentration of male biased genes on the chromosome to test this prediction we selected for analysis housekeeping ribosomal and or mitochondrial genes those that contained the term ribosomal and or mitochondrial in annotation of the probes on the affymetrix chicken microarray the set of ribosomal mitochondrial genes
this was developed incrementally in four stages from to and imposed the intensive use of the rms in wage negotiations the first stage was structured by the establishment of programmed of march relating to the increase for the second half of that year there was a break with the conventional system of aligning the rate of combined public sector pay rises with the rate of combined price rises at the end of each quarter of the calendar year on a sliding scale for the second half year the report of conclusions provided that uprating would take place according to preset rates as a function of the government s price growth objectives provided for a september clause adjusting the respective growth of prices and pay in the first half year as well as a january safeguard clause there was no longer any systematic annual alignment but a fixed date alignment the second budget vice directorate took responsibility for putting the agreements into practice and thus gave itself the possibility of spacing out the dates of public sector wage reevaluations clauses to examine the concrete situation of employees purchasing power this was the new official basis of the deindexing process criticized by the trade unions but imposed by the budget directorate in a favorable political and economic context the second stage in the use of the wages instrument imposed changes the system of preset increases was institutionalized and negotiated in exchange for guarantees in the form of safeguard clauses clauses providing for later meetings between state and trade unions to examine the concrete situation of employees purchasing power at stake in the way these clauses were worded was the imposition of the rms as the official method of calculation making use of the asymmetry of information in its favor and its the budget directorate imposed a calculation based on the wage bill as a reference tool for measuring wage growth in the course of just one year indexation of wages to prices had had its day and been replaced by two new low profile instruments a system of preset increases and the assessment of purchasing power on the basis of the wage bill public enterprises and the civil service the budget directorate manipulated its terms by determining the amount of the increase variable linked to glissement vieillesse technicite to be used in calculating the growth in public employees purchasing power the prime minister s wage circular of january written by bureau a apart from programming wage growth according to the government s inflation target it specified that the maintenance of purchasing power would be measured in relation not only to average increase in prices but also to three variables the carryover effect the effect of category increases and the effect of gvt the intellectual frameworks the effect of general increases the effect of category increases and the effect of individual increases corresponding to gvt and taking into account automatic wage growth caused by promotions in rank by seniority these frameworks for negotiation were presented as nonnegotiable elements by the budget directorate the official introduction of gvt into the calculation of the wage bill was imposed incrementally by initially gvt taking into account the real value of gvt could have prevented negotiations going ahead because the amount of the automatic increase in the wage bill caused by the gvt effect would have covered the whole price increase however the essential result was established the civil service salary point rose less quickly than prices and a seemingly significant inflationary mechanism the automatic readjustment of the civil service point year on year in order to prices was broken by introducing the gvt and carryover effects and by bringing category increases into the calculation the budget directorate imposed an automatic increase mechanism that proportionally diminished the part open to negotiation with the trade unions the general increases and the value of the civil service salary point it therefore restrained the amount that could be obtained bases for calculation and no agreement was negotiated in however this change in the method of calculating the growth in civil servants purchasing power was the lever for deindexation and it applied to all three branches of the civil service as well as to public enterprises the rms instrument was used more intensively this increased its deflationary effect and further reduced the amount of negotiable general increases there were two reasons for new manipulations of the instrument relating to a concern to rationalize the method of calculating the wage bill and to the political strategy of using gvt indisputable and therefore still more legitimate in negotiations there were numerous disagreements between state bodies budget directorate insee and cerc center d etudes sur les revenus et les couts about assessment of the wage bill in public enterprises and in the civil service notably because the method of calculation still remained largely uncertain and depended on sources of information the issue of wage bill comparability between public enterprises the civil service and the private sector was at stake in a context where the knock on effects generally from the public sector onto the private were great and so constituted a decisive mechanism in the battle against inflation in differences and anomalies rose up between figures from the budget directorate change its method of calculating gvt from onward to achieve a still more objective basis at the end of and especially in bureau a pleaded the case for an approach that calculated the bill for the present workforce removing the effects of departure and recruitment on the wage bill at the end of the budget directorate suggested that the use of gvt would no longer be based on the gvt account structural variations in the population studied but by looking at growth in the average pay of personnel in post over the period under consideration combining general and category increases with positive gvt positive gvt corresponded to a wage bill higher than the gvt balance because it was more stable this basis for bureau
with the relatively small number of companies involved in importing and or refining greatly facilitating indeed levying tax on fuel for international aviation might well facilitate administration since narrowing the tax differential between fuels used internationally and domestically would reduce the need to identify the use to which fuel is to be put ticket and departure taxes are both already commonplace more difficult than these technicalities is ensuring appropriate incentives for their collection if as recent proponents of aviation taxes have in proceeds do not accrue to the collecting country collection is in practice likely to be entrusted to participating countries rather than vested in a new supranational tax administration incentives to devote scarce resources to the such taxes are then clearly blunted this effect can be mitigated but not eliminated by allowing the collecting authorities to retain some proportion of the receipts moreover the same considerations of national self interest that are likely to lead countries to set inefficiently low levels of taxation in the absence of coordination give than otherwise countries that fear disadvantaging national carriers may be inclined to allow for lengthier payment periods for example or delay inflation adjusting specific taxes participation in such schemes may require that countries be assured that other participants will comply with the commonly agreed rules this has two implications first agreement may need to be reached on quite detailed tax but also its precise base the definition of taxpayers subject to it and rules on such matters as payment periods interest and penalties second countries may wish to have some direct means of verifying implementation by others this might take a number of forms such as participation in joint audit activities or the monitoring of aviation activity so as to derive independent estimates of the tax due the pressures for some such mutual as the set of participating countries widens since weaker relations of bilateral trust may be involved and the possibilities for directly observing each others actions reduced vi conclusions on pure tax policy grounds the case for increased indirect taxes on international aviation is strong the present low rates stand in marked contrast to the quite persuasive evidence of significant just as proper an object of indirect taxation as any other commodity and even leaving aside environmental issues there is potentially a coordination problem leading to inefficiently low taxes in practical terms such taxes are similar to ones that tax administrations and taxpayers are already well accustomed to certainly a novel set of practical issues would arise if the revenue were devoted to other than national purposes but these are those that any global tax would raise optimal aviation taxation is likely to involve a combination of both an excise on the use of aviation fuel or equivalent emissions charges and a ticket tax with the latter best taking the form of a argo which of the two is to be preferred if only one can be used is in general unclear for plausible parameter values but depends on the relative strengths of environmental and revenue concerns somewhat reassuringly however simulations suggest that there may be little loss in using only one instrument or in then choosing the wrong one between the two trip charges such as the departure taxes that have been the subject of recent being less capable of variation according to fuel use or the extent of consumption of aviation services there are legal obstacles to aviation fuel taxation in the chicago convention and especially under bilateral air service agreements one might argue that such restrictions dating from a time when encouraging international aviation travel was an object of policy have outlived their usefulness emissions trading schemes however face few legal difficulties international aviation fuel taxes or equivalent are ruled out the case for ticket taxes clearly becomes stronger to ensure that environmental costs are reflected in all travel decisions including business travel and cargo these should be in the form of a non creditable excise rather than or in addition to a vat that is better suited to raising revenue national carriers tourist industries and revenues would likely lead to inefficiently low tax rates some degree of coordination in the design and setting of aviation taxes would be required though since the tax base is less than perfectly mobile bunkering fuel in low tax jurisdictions is costly and many destinations have elements of uniqueness such taxes can clearly have effect even if levied on a regional basis rather than universally suggest that fuel taxes set at per gallon or per cent as a ticket tax corresponding to a fairly conservative estimate of the typical marginal environmental cost of international aviation would raise a little under billion if levied worldwide and a little under billion if levied in europe alone considerably more could be raised if aviation taxes were set not only with the environmental concerns in system many countries including high income countries with large shares of the aviation market and smaller low income countries heavily reliant on tourism have expressed strong opposition to indirect taxes on international aviation and clearly the present circumstance of high and uncertain future fuel prices with many airlines financially pressed do not make this the easiest moment to press the nevertheless the case for strengthening is strong enough to warrant continued attention and closer analysis external auditing managerial monitoring and firm valuation an empirical analysis for india saibal ghosh this article examines how external auditing and managerial affect firm value while internal monitoring by managers and external monitoring by auditors were viewed as substitutes or complements after controlling for the effect of exogenous variables the results reveal the existence of a substitution monitoring effect between auditors and the managerial group additionally firm valuation is found to be a significant determinant of managerial a complementary monitoring effect between auditors and managers especially for low leveraged firms summary the importance of external auditing as a mechanism for corporate governance has attracted considerable attention of late academics and policy makers in
states took the form of matching grants with matching rates that were inversely related to state per capita income but that insured that the federal government would pay at least half and in some cases nearly of state outlays for afdc and medicaid by lowering the relative price of supported activities matching grants give rise to substitution effects that are expected to increase their amount since prwora the federal government has maintained approximately the same level of overall support for state cash welfare benefits through but the structure of this support has changed the earlier system of open ended matching grants has been replaced by one in which grants are lump sum in nature so that state cash benefits through tanf are no longer subsidized at the margin continued federal support for state medicaid expenditures however in the form of open ended federal matching grants was not affected by prwora a number of analysts have drawn attention to this aspect of prwora and to its possible negative impact on welfare spending and caseloads an issue that has been relatively neglected in previous studies however is how matching matching grants for one type of public expenditures may affect other types of recipient government spending afdc tanf and medicaid are both means tested programs with overlapping beneficiary populations how do states choose the mix of cash and in kind benefits for their low income residents and how is this mix affected by changes in the level of federal government support for each our goal in the present paper is to analyze how changes in the structure of intergovernmental transfers can affect the mix or composition of state government expenditures using medicaid and afdc tanf as our leading cases of grant assisted programs and using the passage of prwora as a prime example of a policy change that substantially affects intergovernmental fiscal relations specifically in contrast to existing literature we present a theoretical model in which lower level offer both cash transfers and health care benefits for poor households and in which these expenditures are supported with grants from a higher level for medicaid and afdc tanf beneficiaries and presumably for the taxpaying populations that finance them the benefits that they offer are partial but not perfect substitutes section therefore presents a model in which a state s cash transfers augment the incomes of poor recipients while its in kind health benefits provide partial partial protection against their health risks in this model a state s equilibrium policy mix depends on the preferences of beneficiaries the preferences of taxpayers and the level and form of financial aid provided to the state by the federal government through its system of intergovernmental transfers in support of these two state programs section then undertakes a comparative statics analysis that shows how a change in how a change in intergovernmental transfers specifically a reduction in the matching rate for federal government assistance to a state s cash transfer program affects critical endogenous variables in accordance with previous analyses of intergovernmental transfers the analysis predicts that reduced federal matching grant support for cash transfers would reduce the generosity of state determined cash benefits more significantly the analysis also shows that such a change in transfers would create incentives for cross program substitution resulting in increased generosity of health benefits improved health for the poor and increased levels of total state government expenditures for health benefits this analysis is undertaken first for the case where the beneficiaries of cash and in kind transfers are unable to move from one state to another however interstate externalities arising from federal government grants in support of state level transfer programs section therefore extends the analysis to the case where the poor are freely mobile among states showing that the fundamental insights from the comparative statics analysis in section continue to hold even when mobility of the poor is taken into account section summarizes some main findings avenues for further empirical analysis and possible policy implications to help provide a concrete motivation for the theoretical analysis this section concludes with a brief review of some striking empirical trends first as can be seen from table total cash welfare benefits from afdc tanf constitute a diminishing share of combined afdctanf medicaid expenditures in the early until the early total medicaid spending initially slightly greater than afdc expenditures grew to about twice their size by the mid total medicaid spending was about times larger than afdc tanf since then the relative sizes of these programs measured in terms of expenditures have changed even more dramatically total medicaid benefits are now almost ten times larger than cash benefits through tanf the consequence of simultaneous increases in medicaid spending and decreases in tanf spending these changes in expenditures are associated with corresponding and even more pronounced changes in numbers of beneficiaries medicaid has grown in size not only relative to afdc tanf but relative to all state government spending as a proportion of total state government expenditures medicaid has approximately doubled during the quarter century between and rising from to while afdc tanf spending which stood at state spending at the beginning of this period is now only about the two together have thus increased from about to about a share of total state thus starting from a situation over years ago where expenditures on medicaid and afdc were approximately equal in amount medicaid has become by far the dominant program of means tested state government redistributive spending now dwarfing tanf this shift in relative size has been ongoing but has become particularly pronounced since the mid these two categories of means tested spending have been major and increasing components of state government budgets driven by rapid in medicaid spending especially since the mid while the welfare reform did not reduce federal fiscal assistance for state welfare spending it changed the form of this assistance in a way that dramatically raised the cost of such spending to state governments relative to medicaid spending the theoretical analysis that
anxiety depression lower self esteem lower life satisfaction lower levels of identity achievement and maladjustment in contrast peterson found that persistent inability to decide on one s career direction did not prevent adolescents from developing autonomy and good emotional health during the transition to adulthood furthermore many authors argued that career indecision is a necessary process of career development which might be developmentally appropriate and associated with positive outcomes generally research on adolescent career planning and confidence has been extremely limited and it has not resulted in consistent findings whereas some studies found that negative career expectations are associated with depression and anxiety others did not confirm the link between poor psychosocial adjustment and adolescent views on future careers a notable exception is a series of recent studies with australian adolescents led by peter creed and wendy pat ton using cross sectional and short term longitudinal designs these authors found consistent associations between career preparation related constructs such as career maturity focus indecision expectations planning and exploration on the one hand and multiple despite their limited cross cultural generalizability these findings provide convincing evidence of the extensive positive associations between various aspects of adolescent career preparation and adjustment however there is no clarity in regards to the issues of consistency and causality in those relationships whereas some studies that developing a positive career orientation can prevent maladaptive behavior in adolescents most of the observed associations have been interpreted as an effect of adjustment on career development processes for example creed et al concluded that problematic psychological well being can lead to lower career related confidence and poor work experience more recently however creed et al have suggested that the effect can be inverse and argued that there is a need for more comprehensive longitudinal studies to address the issues of causality most importantly even when career preparation has been found to predict later adjustment there has been no control over the baseline adjustment which would allow for a more compelling test of the causal effect an important issue in research on career preparation is one of continuity if adolescent accumulation of preparedness for a career and similarity in its effects on adjustment across different periods of development if it is discontinuous however early career development does not have to have consistent effects on later occupational behavior and the effects on adjustment can show considerable developmental variation whereas there is some evidence that adolescent career preparation has positive effects on adult careers there have been no consistent findings regarding the issue of continuity adolescent career preparation and exploration appear to be predictive of mid rather than early career success career development processes during adolescence do not seem to be directly related to establishing a successful career in young adulthood although crystallization of vocational preferences in high school appears to be a significant predictor of coping young adults likewise super did not and a consistent pattern in the relationships between adolescent and adult career development task accomplishments in his career patterns study and described commonly observed occupational foundering upon graduating from high school as a period of exploration and developmental discontinuity in occupational interests aspirations and preparation during the high school years but fail to address the issue of continuity upon high school graduation moreover whereas some authors conclude that there is a clear advancement in career maturity and decision making in high school others report discontinuities in career development and its relationships with adjustment approaching high school graduation as well as lack of progress in career decision making although very little is known about the long term effects of adolescent career development there is some evidence that selected aspects of adolescent career preparation can be predictive of later adjustment in young adulthood thus gribbons and lohnes found that vocational planning during adolescence was a predictor of coping with the transition to early adulthood a few years after completing high school clearly further longitudinal studies that link career preparation in high school with post high school outcomes are needed particularly because the effects of career development on well being may be especially strong during educational and career transitions including the transition from school to work therefore the goal of this study is to examine continuity and change in adolescent career preparation and its relationships with various indicators of adjustment including self actualization self esteem self efficacy life satisfaction social adaptation emotional stability depressive affect and anxiety the study hypotheses include career decidedness planning and confidence are interrelated indicators of the underlying preparation adolescent career preparation is characterized by continuity and consistent progress in high school and upon graduation adolescent career preparation is predictive of adjustment after graduating from high school relationships between career preparation and adjustment are consistent across different indicators of adjustment a period of years with an interval of approximately months between the times of measurement in the beginning of the study the participants were eleventh graders in high school with an average age of years by the end of the study the participants had earned a high school diploma whereas time the participants were characterized by various activities in regards to their major full time occupation thirty four percent were attending four year colleges four year colleges enrolled in community colleges and vocational schools working and neither working nor continuing their education a large part of the sample reported combining school and work the original sample was recruited from five high schools in hawaii chosen to represent a broad range of socio economic and ethnic groups in each school approximately the junior class participated the granted them a written permission to participate in the beginning of the study the participants obtained an extensive explanation of the study goals methods and design and expressed their consent to participate in writing the sample was highly diverse and included both sexes various socio economic statuses and ethnicities at each time of data collection the participants completed a survey comprised of standard psychometric scales and demographic questions to protect the confidentiality of
median and also the upper quartile this is as expected turning to the earnings changes we see negative coefficients at the median everywhere significant three out of six times but always small the final rows of the table also show the compression of earnings change in the poorer neighborhoods seen in household income above thus earning changes are giving a hint of a negative association with neighborhood disadvantage figure income trajectory and neighborhood narrow neighborhood of people broad neighborhood of people income trajectory residuals narrow table quantile regression of income trajectory on neighborhood disadvantage notes neighborhood disadvantage is the measure neighborhood disadvantage is the measure significant at significant at significant at unweighted regression starting age refers to age of individual on december of year first observed the residuals from a regression on squared maxquals gender and year dummies unweighted regression dependent variable whole window trajectory in household income unit of observation individual figure three cuts through the neighborhood distribution income level year income change year income change table quantile regression of earnings on neighborhood disadvantage significant at unweighted regression a dashed sign in place of the coefficient implies the coefficient could not be estimated note that the observations have zero earnings and the trajectories are zero neighborhood definitions we have used both local and broad definitions of neighborhoods above and seen that a household s broader neighborhood conditional on the immediate locale table presents results for estimating together the local and wider area characteristics however since they are highly correlated we reparameterize this as and to reduce multicollinearity the results show two things first the coefficients on are barely changed from the earlier tables second the additional impact of the wider area is essentially zero for growth while positive for the level of income we present some results on the interactions of area effects at different spatial scales taking individuals in neighborhoods of people at a particular disadvantage level we look at the effect of different disadvantage levels in the surrounding wider neighborhood of people the range of encompassing neighborhoods around very poor inner neighborhoods is rather restricted but otherwise sufficient for table provides the results of the quantile regressions the level of disadvantage of a household s wider area is generally negatively associated with household income conditional on being in a particular type of immediate local area the median coefficients were significant for households in bands from the centile these changes are not trivial and possibly reflect the spatial correlation of small areas nested within larger ones looking at these nested area effects for year and year income changes we find similar results to the previous sub sections an individual s wider area has no adverse effect on the distribution of her income changes at either the year or year horizon as shown by the insignificance of the slope of in the income change quantile regressions shown in table table quantile regression contribution of neighborhood disadvantage at nearest people significant at significant at significant at unweighted regression measuring neighborhood influence defining a measure of potential neighborhood influence is not straightforward either conceptually or practically our measure is unlikely to perfectly characterize the essence of living in a poor neighborhood and so we consider the importance of measurement error first in a static context and then in the dynamics in fact our use of principal components derived from different census variables means that we will capture the broad thrust of the data the first principal component used earlier explains the variation since the regressions we report are bivariate ones a simple correction can be applied for any potential degree of measurement error given an estimated slope coefficient on the neighborhood characteristic of a the true parameter can be recovered as a where is the reliability factor given by where is the variance of the measurement error and is the variance of the true neighborhood picking a value for allows one to calculate the degree of attenuation of our estimates the central point is that our estimated effects are so low in absolute quantitative terms that even doubling them does not produce an economically large effect turning to the dynamic effects over the decade covered by our sample an unmeasured way as we can only characterize them once at the census date of there are two factors that reduce the impact of this problem first the use of principal components minimises the problem since it averages out individual measures to produce an overall characterization if we were able to repeat this annually it would vary less than any one individual measure second we know from other research that areas in britain do not vary much over quite long horizons nonetheless we would expect some attenuation of the estimated effect over the period as our neighborhood measure becomes more out of date to check the scale of this we re ran the year income change quantile regressions separately for the two year tranches and the state of the neighborhood is measured correctly for the first tranche and not for the second the three quartiles for the first tranche are and for the second these can be compared to the whole period estimates of from table thus while the attenuation is apparent particularly at the median estimating for the period when the neighborhood attributes are best measured only produces a slightly higher number and still a positive one mis measured is that households will have been exposed to neighborhood influences for varying periods of time this clearly might matter an individual located with particular peer groups and role models for a year may be less likely to be affected than someone located there for longer but modelling the joint income and neighborhood mobility processes would require a set of structural assumptions that takes us away from the approach taken in this article way to gauge the likely impact is the following using the second year tranche instead of taking the neighborhood measure for the individual s location at as the independent variable we use
its poor remuneration reinforcing the view that these workers do not history of rounds of in migration into the united kingdom and greater london has produced a putative workforce marked by class gender national origin language ability and skin color it is evident from this study that the intersection of changing migration patterns into london past associations between imperial london reinforced by daily social relationsbips within the workplace produce a distinctively segmented labor force in bi in hotels where the deferential performance of services is the ideal attribute in most parts of the organization particular forms of embodiment are valorized in specific ways in different parts of the service whereas the managed emotion identified by hochschild preferably associated with an idealized form of femininity is the most highly valued in front office functions as newman showed in her study of work practices in a fast food outlet deference and servility are often attributes that are difficult for men especially young working class men performance may be acceptable employers often rule them out because they accept commonly held associations between masculinity youth and the lack of deference in this regard it seems clear that an association between indian nationality and deferential performance overrides stereotypical associations bi only in security the assumed attributes of middle class masculinity on the other hand come into their own when skill or authority are the key requirements of a task thus chefs specialist waiters and those in higher level managerial positions are coded masculine in different ways from those who perform the in interactive service work are sometimes turned on their head when night shifts or guard duties are involved in bi however black men were noticeable only by their absence but race racism and skin color are a problem within bi not only in the ways in which unstated assumptions lead to predominantly white front office and negative attitudes held by some staff on the basis of assumed national attributes and skin color if not actual racist attitudes and practices the new european workers for example exhibited negative attitudes toward their nonwhite coworkers these new workers from eastern europe come from predominantly bring associated advantages in the labor market thus several of the workers with whom we talked held views similar to those of stefan a hungarian man working in room service clearly expecting agreement from the interviewer stefan argued that this government gives too much power to other people who s not it s a kind of ethnic thing a lot of indian people there s a lot of indian people working there and they think they are gods and they can do everything when they want you have to stay shut up that s it you know one more thing i went to school for four years to learn this and they come in from out of nowhere they come in and they can do the same job okay then i was happy to get the job in this hotel but when i saw these people are coming here without anything they can have the same job as me stefan failed to realize we think that most of the indian employees are highly educated and on a management track several of the polish women room attendants also of labor was strengthened by the relative lack of contacts between different groups in the hotel who were employed on different terms and conditions clad in different uniforms and paid at different rates in all the areas of the hotel in which we observed and interviewed staff we found expectations in bi we found that resistance typically took the form of using the weapons of the weak extending smoking breaks colonizing the cutlery storage room as a place for chats and social interchange engaging in petty pilfering and using humor as a strategy to deflect harassment found in hotel employment in toronto in discussions almost no workers mentioned unionization as an appropriate way to address low pay and poor contractual conditions or forms of discrimination in daily life we found however that most workers were highly stereotypes about hard work or the lack of ambition to divide and differentiate between the workforce the employees of identity and maintaining a performance that they felt matched their daily tasks and so identified them as appropriate employees for their jobs however in some cases this conformity has the negative effect of reducing opportunities for promotion or of moving into different jobs as hughes argued because of more totalizing regimes of organizational domination in which employee identity becomes effectively subsumed within the workplace opportunities for resistance are greatly limited bi s own employees are encouraged to feel part of the bi family and are rewarded with gifts at christmas of interested in organizing within bi as numerous studies have shown traditional forms of resistance such as strikes or slowdowns have limited purchase in many contemporary work sites especially in the service sector nevertheless there is scope for resistance and for the development of be found in an uncynical collusion with corporate practices and as hughes found if workers are encouraged to bring their emotions to work they may be more able to make their own emotional demands that is to say in the name of how they feel at work or are treated by others they may also be able to make their own emotional demands in the workplace might their managers thus through interpersonal interactions dominant interpellations may perhaps be challenged and new workplace identities forged as houston and pulido argued and as we have contended here a focus on performance is necessary but not sufficient new economic geographies that combine an embodied performances of class gender and ethnicity in the workplace are both related to and constructed through material inequalities structural changes neoliberal institutions and policies and new patterns of migration despite an emerging labor geography that is alert to workers beliefs behaviors and strategies of resistance economic geographers in which explanations of global change and economic restructuring
shelf offshore of the mouths of muddy rivers is also gaining considerable attention purpose and scope advance that understanding that purpose has been approached by preparing two papers covering the present state of understanding on the mechanisms of fluid generation transport deposition and dewatering the present state of modeling these processes appropriate techniques for measuring the density structure and movement of fluid mud layers present technology for removal or in situ mediation of fluid mud paper covers the present state of knowledge concerning fluid mud processes it also recommends research to improve our understanding of fluid mud mechanisms a subsequent paper will present modeling measurement and management techniques fluid mud characteristics operationally the mud sand boundary may be based on alternate standard sieve sizes such as the micron size no sieve particle size in this context refers to the disaggregated constituent grains not the loosely bound aggregates flocs of mud that are likely to be present water content the amount of water in fluid mud varies with perspective in the in the context of naturally occurring fluid mud kg has been suggested as a lower limit for fluid mud concentration because this concentration often corresponds to the lutocline at the top of a fluid mud layer kirby and parker kineke et al and kg has been suggested as an upper limit as this marks the transition to a framework supported deposit which is much less likely to be mobile kirby for fluid mud with kg corresponds to a sediment induced density increase from to kg above that of clear water particle size and mineralogy for fluid mud with a low organic content clay sized particles typically make up the solids with silt content usually secondary to clay in energetic environments larger particles in the fine sand size fraction are occasionally entrained into fluid the sand component to less than a few percent of a fluid mud sample some example grain sizes of well studied fluid mud or deposits associated with fluid mud ordered from smallest to largest observed grain size are listed in table the mineralogy of fluid mud is usually dominated by platey cohesive minerals from the class of clays and micas with the specific minerals depending on the locale in the gironde for calcite granboulan et al among the mineral clays and micas in the gironde fluid mud about composed of smectites and illite with the remainder split among kaolinite and chlorite in the gironde seasonal river floods introduce new material to the fluid mud slightly increasing the mean diameter of fluid mud sediment as well as its quartz and feldspar content mineralogy of the dredged mud at mobile bay whereas illite and chlorite dominated at the james river dredge site nichols et al fluid mud deposits on the amapa mud banks brazil contain unequal quantities of smectite illite kaolinite and quartz with trace amounts of chlorite feldspar and iron minerals allison et al organic matter and contaminants maintaining the fluid state of the bed following occasional resuspension by waves in highly eutrophic lake apopka fla for example the solids component of the cm thick fluid mud layer covering the lake bed is organic matter in association with the accumulation of decomposing algae bachmann et al organic rich fluid muds characteristic of shallow eutrophic lakes in fla such as apopka and nitrogen schelske and kenney havens et al in comparison to the relatively quiescent organic rich fluid muds found in some lakes fluid muds in subaqueous deltas and estuaries and along high energy coasts tend to contain less organic matter this is partly because the loading of inorganic sediment relative to organic matter tends to be much higher at concentrations over kg for example amazon river suspended solids keil organic content of suspended solids at high concentration in other estuaries associated with fluid mud such as the yangtze and yellow river estuaries in china are similarly low cauwet and mackenzie likewise fluid mud deposits on the mid shelf off the eel river contain only about to matter leithold and hope at fluid mud concentrations in energetic the pure suspended materials the mineral associated organic matter may be either sorbed molecules and or fossil remains within the matrix of particles weathered from sediment rocks hedges and keil even when organic loading to energetic fluid mud environments is relatively high cyclic formation transport and resuspension of the fluidized sediment reduces the levels of organic matter repeatedly reoxidize fluid muds in energetic coastal settings allowing iron reduction to very effectively drive anaerobic decomposition aller et al abril et al organic carbon in tidally energetic estuaries and bays characterized by mobile fluid muds are likely to be remineralized at rates much higher than that which occurs in quiescient muddy environments with similar sediment accumulation so effectively drive organic matter respiration by bacteria remobilization of fluid muds in environments with significant organic loading can massively recycle remineralized nutrients and organic matter associated contaminants back to the water column cyclical mobilization of fluid muds has been documented to be a significant source of nitrogen and arsenic to the water column of the gironde associated with contamination in the scheldt estuary in the netherlands paucot and wollast if loading of organic matter to fluid mud is so great that it overwhelms bacterial respiration then resuspension of fluid mud into an overlying water column can lead to a spike in aerobic respiration near the sediment bed and associated depletion of oxygen for example intense suspension of fluid muds associated was observed to decrease dissolved oxygen above the former fluid mud layer to only saturation abril et al the increase in dissolved carbon dioxide notably increased the alkalinity of the estuary high organic matter and contaminant accumulation is more likely to be a problem in low energy fluid muds near population centers such as those commonly associated with nitrogen arsenic and zinc for example pieters et al although the levels are still below the critical value of the belgian criteria for disposal at sea suspension of fluid muds
by the scl natm method not open face shield excavation was performed by roadheader instead of backhoe and the primary tunnel lining was formed of sprayed concrete instead of expanded precast concrete segments also excavation the full width top heading was advanced ahead of the last complete ring and was followed by a invert advance which reduced the lead of the top heading to shotcrete of mm thickness was applied after each advance onto mesh primary lining and thus had no influence on construction induced ground movement ground movement observed at elizabeth house was associated with stress relief around the tunnel face and tunnel heading in the same manner as identified for the open face shield at st james s park this is component of the volume loss as identified above there was no shield used at elizabeth house of the volume loss identified above ground conditions at st james s park and elizabeth house the twin tunnels were bored through london clay however in the case of st james s park exploration boreholes to positioned across st james s park as shown in fig revealed that the tunnels passed through quite different divisions of london clay from south to north of the lake see fig the divisions of london clay are stiff very stiff fissured large vertical fissures towards base very stiff faintly laminated very silty frequent silt sand partings dustings pockets and lenses very stiff fissured faintly laminated silty clay very stiff becoming hard interbedded grey silty sandy clay with light visible fabric most significantly on both sides of the lake the westbound positioned adjacent to the waterloo side of the building is assumed to provide representative soil conditions for the the borehole log is presented schematically alongside the longitudinal section of the building and the tunnels in fig six meters of terrace gravels overlie of weathered london clay followed by of unweathered london clay the james s park the pore water pressure profile was almost hydrostatic to below tunnel level at elizabeth house it is likely that the pore pressure profile was somewhat lower than hydrostatic due to nearby existing tunnels two aquifers exist at st james s park the deep aquifer constituting the thanet sands which is below the depth of tunnelling at the site and a perched water table in the terrace gravels which is at elizabeth house the water table in the terrace gravels is affected by tidal fluctuations and was recorded as lying between and above the foundation slab level during the installation of the subsurface instrumentation beneath the instrumentation and subsurface ground movement mainly in a plane transverse to the tunnel the instrumentation is described extensively by most importantly in order to estimate the volume loss caused by particular phases of tunnel construction extensometer anchors were monitored frequently to measure the development of the transverse settlement profile close to the crown of both tunnels at the main instrumented section the twin tunnels of diameter were at depths to axis of and the westbound tunnel was bored approximately months before the eastbound tunnel a careful record of time was kept throughout monitoring so that the ground movement could be related to tunnel shield position other sections across final volume losses were recorded the instrumentation used to measure the effect of the twin diameter running tunnels at elizabeth house consisted mainly of precise levelling and taping within the building see fig but most significantly from the perspective of this study settlement was measured close to the crown of the eastbound tunnel by the extensometer in borehole vel the eastbound tunnel which is the northernmost of the two running tunnels was bored a few weeks after the westbound tunnel volume loss phase by phase measurement of volume loss at st james s park and beneath the elizabeth house extensometer measurements were used to estimate volume loss for two main phases of tunnel construction the first phase is associated with the second phase encompasses all volume loss that occurs thereafter associated with passage of the tunnel shield and construction of the expanded precast tunnel lining in the case of st james s park and with construction of the shotcrete lining beneath the elizabeth and above the crown of the westbound and eastbound tunnels respectively the volume loss for each phase of tunnel construction was estimated by summing the trapezoidal area of settlement enclosed by adjacent extensometer anchors positioned approximately to above and transverse to the tunnel crown for both was assumed in order to estimate volume loss the profiles of estimated volume loss relative to the position of the front of the tunnel shield are shown in fig and the components of volume loss are summarized in table the construction period associated with undrained volume loss was assumed to correspond to a length of approximately behind the front of the the eastbound tunnel provided a means of estimating the proportion of total volume loss for each phase of tunnel construction the total volume loss was estimated from the settlement profile measured for the long facades of elizabeth house which were observed to deform relatively if a constant trough width is assumed from first application of the sprayed concrete lining at the above the eastbound tunnel crown see fig the assumption of approximately constant trough width is supported by observations made by at st james s park the inferred components of volume loss beneath the elizabeth house are shown in table interpretation of volume loss at st james s park at st james s park volume loss of approximately south to north the volume loss was less than the unsupported heading length was reduced from used south of the lake to within the range as indicated in table the volume losses estimated largely by according to best fit gaussian profiles are recorded in table one reason for the increased volume loss south of the lake is settlement interaction which is evident from surface settlement the second driven however the additional volume loss observed south of the
small set to avoid this defect one should use an encryption function f that depends on a random integer as well as the message for example one called an rsa padding another reason for the development of probabilistic encryption was to avoid the problem pointed out by rivest that is people wanted to be able to prove reductionist security results that do not come back to bite us in the way that the equivalence between factoring and rabin decryption had done the key point here is that the introduction of randomness into encryption greatly reduces the power of a chosen such an adversary no longer gets alice to give him the complete solution to the problem of inverting the basic encryption function for example in rabin encryption if alice pads a message with random before squaring mod then the chosen ciphertext attacker learns only and not the full square root modulo which is the concatenation of and in the context of probabilistic encryption with a passive adversary goldwasser and micali were able to define two strong notions of security the first was that of semantic security this notion can also be carried over to the chosen ciphertext setting where informally speaking it means that the attacker is unable to obtain any information at all about the plaintext another security notion in is called indistinguishability this notion can be extended to cover chosen ciphertext attacks using ideas from and in that setting indistinguishability means that the attacker chooses two messages and one of which is then encrypted f which of the two messages was encrypted with significantly more than chance of success these two strong notions of security are closely related in fact in and they were proved to be equivalent against a passive adversary however for a long time it was not clear whether or not they are equivalent under active attacks it is quite surprising that the equivalence of semantic security and indistinguishability considered in the research literature until after all semantic security is really the natural notion of what one should strive for in public key encryption while indistinguishability is seemingly an artificial notion however in practice it has been much easier to prove a public key encryption scheme to be secure using indistinguishability than using the more natural definition and so all proofs in the literature use it the equivalence of indistinguishability and security under chosen ciphertext attacks has purportedly been proved in and if these proofs are correct then the matter has finally been settled the second important theoretical advance in the mid was the first work to give a definition of what it means for digital signatures to be secure that definition has stood the test of time and is still widely used today goldwasser et al replace chosen ciphertext by ssage and replace semantic security indistinguishability by the idea of an existential forger that is a signature scheme is said to be secure against chosen message attack by an existential forger if an adversary that has been allowed to request valid signatures for messages mi of its choosing is unable to produce a valid signature for any message that is different from all of the mi a typical reductionist security result for a signature scheme says that it is that certain assumptions hold the idea that emerged in the of systematically using reduction arguments to convince oneself of the security of encryption and signature schemes is elegant and powerful however it is important always to keep in mind the limitations of the method obviously it cannot guarantee resistance against attacks that are not the security definition in particular the usual security definitions do not account for attacks that are based on certain features of the physical implementation of a cryptographic protocol such side channel attacks utilize information leaked by the computing devices during the execution of private key operations such as decryption and signature generation the kind of information that can be exploited includes execution time power consumption electromagnetic induced errors and error messages finally we should mention two fundamental contributions in the to the theoretical study of security issues both by bellare and rogaway in they studied the use of the random oracle model for hash functions in reductionist security arguments the systematic use of the assumption that hash functions can be treated as random functions made it possible for security results to be obtained for many efficient and schemes we shall have more to say about the random oracle model in later sections in addition bellare and rogaway developed the notion of practice oriented provable security as a result of their work reductionist security arguments started to be translated into an exact quantitative form leading for example to specific recommendations about key lengths the objective of the work has been to move the subject away from its roots in highly theoretical closer to real world applications outline of the paper this paper was written with four objectives in mind to offer a point of view on provable security that differs from the prevailing one to make the case that this field is as much an art as a science non experts to an area that is usually impenetrable to outsiders the main body of the paper consists of informal descriptions and analyses of the reductionist security arguments for four important practical public key cryptographic systems two of them are encryption schemes and two are signature by presenting these constructions and results with as few technicalities as possible we hope to make them accessible to the broad mathematical public at the same time some of the conclusions we draw from our analyses are in sharp disagreement with prevailing views in section we discuss some recent work that purportedly undermines the random oracle model but which we argue actually supports it and in sections and we end technical conclusions and some informal remarks about whether proving security is an art or a science cramer shoup encryption we start by describing the basic elgamal encryption scheme let
mean tdi at establishment level for only those employees who belonged to the largest occupational group the mean establishment level estimate of the employees perception of discretion is measured imprecisely because of the limited and responded to the self completion questionnaire in the event the correlation coefficient between the mean establishment level tdi and the tdimp was significantly positive with a value of restricting the sample to those few establishments with at most employees and where more than per cent of employees responded on this question the correlation coefficient is somewhat higher at groups and across the education levels of the employee respondents as table shows the tdi and tdimp are both broadly related as one would expect with the major occupational groups managers and professionals and associate professionals typically seen as the high skilled groups report above average levels of discretion nevertheless aside from these groups there is less of a gradient of the tdi between traditional conceptions of table also brings out that there is a positive association between employee discretion and education levels nevertheless this association is shown only to apply within the upper levels of the education spectrum at level and below there is essentially no relationship between education and task discretion but there is a clear upward gradient between levels and the tdi is broadly in line with prior expectations marketing and sales managers for example have high levels of discretion as do production works and maintenance managers by contrast examples of occupations with low levels of discretion include call center operators and bus van and coach drivers one reason why elementary occupations do not all show especially low discretion levels despite their occupations that nevertheless require non routine processes cleaners and domestics for example have slightly above average discretion despite being classed as low skilled task discretion has been found in detailed case studies and in earlier empirical work to be related strongly to job satisfaction asks employees about seven separate domains of satisfied to very dissatisfied four of these domains pertain to intrinsic aspects of the job while the remaining three tap extrinsic aspects assigning values to to the response points i generated a simple additive index of intrinsic job satisfaction the questions asked respondents how far they agreed with the statements i share many of the values of my organization i feel loyal to my organization and i am proud to tell people who i work for the responses were against agree neither agree nor disagree disagree strongly disagree while the number of items is less than desirable they form the core of the notion of affective commitment essentially a measure of employee preferences concerning working for their the responses from these three items were averaged to generate an additive scale of organizational commitment ranging from to with a cronbach s scale reliability organizational commitment did the decline in task discretion through the identified by gallie et al persist in the present decade table presents some initial suggestive evidence to emerge on this issue it compares responses to identical questions on task direction in and only two domains are available for this exercise control over the pace of work and over how tasks are done with less than employees were excluded from the data the comparison is reliable to the extent that the employee samples are representative of the population in each year to help ensure this the responses have been as can be seen there has been little change in the extent of discretion over the period if anything there appears to have been a small increase in the and over how the work is done however these differences are not statistically significant and according to the managers reports for the largest occupational group in the establishments there has been a small decrease in discretion this stability contrasts with the earlier decline in in a similar way table compares organizational commitment over the two surveys according to gallie et al there was little change during in the british workforce a somewhat surprising finding in light of much rhetoric concerning the growth of the high commitment work organization looking over the more recent period table shows that there were small increases in each component of organizational commitment the mean level of the organizational commitment index increased significantly between and estimating the model of task discretion commitment and of other variables on task discretion with table giving the results for the employee level measure of discretion and table for the establishment level measure in order to be able to compare better the findings from the two levels of analysis the analysis in table is based only on employees in the non managerial occupation groups column of table gives the ols estimates while column presents organizational commitment and column presents fixed effects estimates which control for establishment wide unobserved effects on job design variables used as instruments for organizational commitment in column are as follows first two variables are included which capture management s report on whether employees in the establishment are led to expect long term employment in this organization one dummy variable is included disagree or strongly disagree second two variables are included which capture whether in the management s view employees here are fully committed to the values of the organization again one dummy variable captures strongly agree while another represents disagree or strongly disagree by using variables taken from the management questionnaire one can avoid potential common method bias that is the bias due to unobserved heterogeneity associated with both dependent and independent variables since presumably judgments made by manager respondents are not correlated with those made by individual employees using these variables as instruments depends on the assumption that they do not themselves affect job design for individual employees in the establishment except via the effect that they may have on the organizational commitment of individuals moreover in order to the instruments should also have a strong association with organizational commitment as usual in such cases these assumptions could
identification of of pointing within a s interval during a trial and for trials with pointing kappas for vocalizing looks to s face and looks to the stimulus on a s base were and respectively results infants pointed on average on the total trials the condition in which infants pointed first had no significant effect on their pointing in repeated pointing there was a similar pattern of results to that in the main experiment for the misunderstanding and joint attention conditions but this difference did not reach statistical significance tailed most likely because power was reduced compared to the main experiment due to the within subjects design with fewer trials per condition repetition of points a one tailed paired comparison on the mean number of points in trials with a point confirmed our prediction that infants pointed significantly more often within a trial in the misunderstanding than in the joint attention condition no further analyses on repeated point characteristics such as those done in the main experiment were conducted because too few infants repeated pointing looking behavior infants number and duration of looks to s face were not significantly different between conditions however there was a significant effect of order such that infants looked more often to s face when he had reacted to their first point with misunderstanding than with joint attention and respectively like in the the joint attention than in the misunderstanding condition s and s respectively the number of looks to the stimulus did not differ significantly between conditions discussion findings on infants point repetitions in this experiment are consistent with those of the main experiment infants pointed significantly more often to failed communication and redirect s attention to the correct referent in addition infants looked more to when he first reacted to their pointing in the misunderstanding condition presumably and in line with the main experiment because they found his reaction odd when reacted in joint attention infants looked longer to the stimulus again in line with the main experiment suggesting that they were less surprised or distracted by s reaction when he referred to the and so they sustained attention to the referent more other measures did not produce statistically significant differences between conditions most likely because power was lower than in the main experiment taken together both the experiments show that twelve month olds point referentially to direct a person s attentional state the current findings support the hypothesis that infant pointing at twelve months is already a full communicative act involving both reference and attitudes towards that referent while excluding several alternative hypotheses this suggests both a social cognitive understanding of other persons as agents with attentional states and attitudes and a motive to share experiences with others attitudes in the sense that an indication is about something and that it expresses psychological relations between interlocutors and referents to understand reference one has to understand others attentional relation to the environment it requires an understanding of others as intentionally perceiving and singling out entities in the environment not just behaviorally orienting in some direction in line with recent results and social referencing this study shows that twelve month olds understand what other people attend and refer to in addition it shows that infants actively direct others attention and even redirect others attention when they are mistakenly referring to an incorrect referent this message repair which was selective to the misunderstanding condition can be interpreted as the infant helping an interested partner in achieving the to understand a person s attitude one has to understand that person s psychological relations towards the referent moses et al have shown that twelve month olds when socially referencing link an adult s comment selectively to the object the adult is attending to recently it has been proposed that infants relate these comments only directly to the object as its valence but not to the sender as expressing his or her psychological to the object but the current study shows that infant pointing in this context does not involve requesting valence information about an object instead it is to share psychological relations with others about a referent results showed that when an adult reacted uninterestedly infants ceased pointing for him our interpretation is that infants understood s attitude about the referent as different from their own that is as not wanting to share their the referent perhaps this is because in this context infants already had their own pre determined attitude about the object whereas in social referencing situations the object is designed to be ambiguous to infants infant pointing thus enables social learning not only about the external environment but also about the psychological relations between other persons and the environment which properties infants point for various motives one such motive is to request help from adults in getting something done another motive is to provide help to adults by informing them of things they want or need to know here we have investigated infant proto declarative pointing and provided empirical and interest this motive is distinct because it is neither purely to inform nor purely to request instead it is an offer an invitation to jointly engage with a communicative partner and experience something together the current study thus demonstrates that preverbal infants intentional important ways infant declarative pointing at twelve months before language has emerged already is a full communicative act embodying two main components of adult linguistic speech acts reference and attitude about referents in addition it already has some of the collaborative structure of adult conversation as seen when infants repair their failed communications actively working to align their own this study thus provides further support for the social pragmatic account of language development demonstrating already in infants preverbal communication the presence of the same underlying abilities and motivations upon which language is built seoul national university of education using a discourse analytic approach from the work of hoey and a dual processing model from wray this paper compares the language produced
specific use and decision rights otherwise they would not be able to change and adapt organizational structures moreover to begin with they would not be able to experiment with the activity system in this sense the allocation of internal property rights has an impact on the solution of the outlined coordination problem as well if general management is assets may be seriously hampered proposition the business strategy of the firm and its corresponding activity system influences the level and speed of innovations an explorative business strategy tends to be organized as organic structures with weakly defined use and decision rights a business strategy focusing on on the problem of shirking and free riding of contracting parties or organizational members as discussed above the idea is that individuals do not put all their productive effort into collective activities but use their discretionary user rights for their own benefit but there are related forms of behaving in a non cooperative way one form is reports that percent of the firms included in the inc a list of young fast growing firms were founded by people who are marketing product ideas created by the previous firm that employed them this finding highlights the fact that many inventive firms are not able to test and exploit the profit opportunities they generate they create new knowledge market as a result the seeds for potential competitors are often sown in the established firm since the internal link between the creation and use of new knowledge is no longer a given but poses a persistent dynamic according to rajan and zingales complementary assets provide the economic link that glues the firm together and they enable the firm to firm specific assets complementary assets are the outcome of the specialization of individuals and other firms to the existing knowledge base of the firm this creates a quasi rent since the asset is worth less in other settings in this case the firm wields bargaining power over the legal ready to acquire firm specific assets if the long term rewards outweigh the costs this is especially the case if employees are given privileged access to a critical core resource that is valuable and in short supply examples of core resources include existing customer and client lists single options if they have the necessary complementary resources in place and are able to create new growth options faster than competitors in such a setting the incentives to leave the firm are small for employees since they would risk failure in direct competition moreover the expected rewards for being loyal would be high accordingly firms with a narrow saloner more focused firms not only provide the complementary assets to successfully market innovations but offer the potential to retain innovative leadership in their field since they build on their existing technological assets to exploit new technological employees have an incentive to leave the firm an attractive new employer if she is ready to pay higher wages this is possible if the competitor has a more valuable web of complementary assets in place the employee will then switch firms as long as the wages are higher even if the share of the captured surplus decreases in other words the employee shares relatively more of the generated they will receive higher wages in the future to start a new enterprise individuals must expect to produce a larger surplus by themselves than the surplus that they can capture by staying in their old firm or by switching to a competitor these constellations emerge if existing webs of complementary resources and capabilities fail of these new ideas radical innovations are often competence destroying or make new value networks and the corresponding activity system economically feasible because of this incumbent firms are not in a good position better off by leaving the firm and starting their own new venture the more radical an innovation the more new ventures will be started and the seeds of creative destruction will often be sown in the incumbent to conclude existing firms are webs of past investments that created complementarities around as argued above an essential managerial task is the strategic direction of investments into new complementary resources and of the associated learning processes to prevent the pre market appropriation of innovative rents and preserve the firm s competitive advantages this brings us back to the starting point of our discussion but it adds an important are often not deterministically given but are the outcome of past managerial decisions to create certain resources general management has therefore to make choices about which resources are critical to the firm s future success and to search for original possibilities to build complementarities around them for example architectural to sum up our analysis we offer the following propositions proposition if human capital is critical to the success of a business firms tend to invest more heavily into the search for and the creation of complementary assets to bind employees to the firm and to strengthen their bargaining positions proposition a firm with a narrow business of key personnel than a more diversified firm industry dynamics and the evolution of formal organizational structures complementary assets raise severe coordination and cooperative problems if firms want to exploit the economic benefits that the resource based view ascribes to them they have to grapple with these problems in one way or another as complementarities between assets to illustrate this and to elucidate some of the framework s implications we look at the evolution of formal organization structures during the industry life cycle to understand how formal organizational structures evolve it is useful to discuss a stylized pattern of industry evolution and to draw some basic which is a proxy for the intensity of competition it is a stylized fact that industries often evolve through stages of high growth into saturated stages of low growth while industry growth is external to the individual firm our second dimension the cumulativeness of new knowledge takes account of the internal innovative activities form
shown elsewhere members of ethnic indigenous communities of the prohibition of the brutal initiation rites for male children among the urapmin of papua new guinea than anthropologists have admitted for lack of a better term i shall call this attitude whereby anthropologists decide what their subjects should maintain of their traditional culture essentialism of the native perhaps this critique is not entirely new but robbins it should be mentioned of course that missionaries and religious institutions often share this approach to indigenous populations with regard to belief a promising approach would be to consider the nature not only of christian belief but also of christian unbelief as mary douglas has stated nonbelievers are not exclusive to christianity but refusal to recognize caro baroja has shown people who question the existence of god and the validity of the catholic church have long existed in mediterranean society where there is a deep strain of popular anticlericalism conversion to pentecostalism in mexico is often accompanied by the emergence of persons who say that they no longer belong to any religion at all as one totonac all nothing but lies these persons even show up in the official mexican census figures as persons who are not affiliated with any religion men and women indian and non indian rural and urban they are always more frequent where the percentage of evangelicals protestants and pentecostals is higher as indians abandoned their christian conversions to return to the ways of idolatry evangelical churches in mexico are plagued by second and third generation apostasy though in this case not a return to any idolatry but rather the abandonment of religion apostates do not exist in amerindian or african derived religions it is quite clearly an element of christianity robbins offers an interesting discussion of conversion apostasy a form of conversion that involves the rejection of monotheism and the religious practices of its followers robbins writes of the importance of understanding christian belief why not go a little a farther to examine the nonbelief of ex christians olivia harris department of anthropology london school of of the enormous influence they have had far beyond the confines of the christian and post christian world furthermore the temporal frames of anthropological thinking need to be made explicit i would wish both to modify the argument and to extend it first to write of christianity as a culture or christian cultures as robbins does begs many questions there is no doubt that fundamentalist evangelical protestantism world but to take it as the default position even for polemical purposes seems to me as problematic as projecting a particular understanding of islamic fundamentalism onto the variety of ways in which muslims practice their faith further to propose a particular feature of christianity as a heuristic for establishing whether a culture is christian or not incurs all the well known problems of imposing theological suggestion of the hope for salvation will do some people consider salvation unattainable given the way they live and still identify themselves as christian i would argue that what distinguishes christians as christian is conversion itself conversion as robbins and absolute nature of the break that is constitutive of a christian identity how that break is worked out and worked through in personal theological and cultural terms is another matter but the persistence of sin suggests that the pre christian past may return in uncontrollable ways what impact it has on people s understandings of the future is also a matter of rupture robbins is persuasive in his analysis of anthropology s ambivalence about the reality of christian conversion as a break of this kind and his reading of the comaroffs suggests that our profession is far more ready to posit other kinds of temporal rupture such as colonialism it may be that this ambivalence is as he suggests an effect of the culture concept but surely the play a historian as committed to continuity as fernand braudel invokes discontinuity in unexpected ways and conversely even those who have made a break with the past such as through conversion may find that it returns to haunt them it is not like normal forgetting since a conversion narrative requires the rejected past to be remembered at least as transgressive howell wheaton edu viii robbins here brings together some of his previously voiced themes regarding the anthropology of christianity with a fresh and important reading of time and belief as they inhibit the anthropological study of christianity qua christianity in the hope that this piece will not be primarily viewed as a critique of the comaroffs work i would point of christianity for example in the anthropology of latin american christianity most scholars have taken one of two directions some like the comaroffs have turned to themes of resistance syncretism and continuity especially in studies of catholicism and folk catholicism others largely in studies of questions of faith and conversion that dominate the thinking of these christians themselves the mayanist john watanabe noted this tendency among those writing about conversion among the maya when he said that they tended to treat it either in terms of larger cultural continuities in which little has really changed or in a globalizing transnational world in other words religion never changes it is only behavior discourse and identity that change and for reasons other than those expressed by converts themselves notable exceptions only make the prevailing tendencies more apparent christianity in north america and europe here anthropologists such as bramadat greenhouse peacock and tyson coleman frederick and harding manage to treat christianity as fully formed an internally and culturally integrated system even as they explore the same economic political linguistic and social elements such as those of harding stromberg and luhrmann seem to be able to take seriously the religious motives and convictions of christian subjects in ways that discomfit many encountering christianity outside these cultural spheres how have these anthropologists managed it robbins s implication is that they do not have to confront the question of
fetal health identification of fetal abnormalities where present exclusion of multiple pregnancies and determination of gender in addition worry and attachment to their baby to examine the reliability and validity of the instruments face validity was achieved by asking if items were ambiguous or confusing and seeking suggestions for improvement the fog value a measure of readability for the instruments was indicating that years of two expert midwifery researchers and a senior obstetrician minor amendments were made to improve clarity the pre ultrasound instrument was pilot tested for stability among a sample of women meeting the eligibility criteria using the test retest method for individual items the instrument was distributed to women in the pilot on two occasions weeks to data were analysed using the statistical package of the social sciences demographic data are expressed as mean and standard deviation differences in outcome for categorical data between two groups or variables were analysed using pearson analysis where the expected values were greater than and all values style response values reported throughout this paper relate to the number of valid responses to the specific item percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percentage point ethical considerations ethical approval was granted by the research ethics committee of the study site women were informed prejudice to care assurance of confidentiality and an offer to answer any of their questions regarding the study written consent was obtained from all women agreeing to participate in the study and data were collected processed and stored in accordance with the data protection act a copy of the study were multigravidae in the multigravidae group parity ranged from one to nine with most having had one previous delivery most women were aged between and years with a mean age at participation of years and mean gestation of the pregnancy weeks and was analysed by clinic attended to examine if having health insurance influenced either the method or availability of information when primigravidae and multigravidae were compared no differences were found in the availability of the leaflet or frequency of discussion regarding the reason for the ultrasound clinic than in the private or semi private clinic of the women who received the leaflet read it of the women who read it found it helpful found it very helpful and made no comment most of the women had accessed information about the routine uss from sources other than the clinic the most found between the source accessed and the clinic attended most women stated that the reason for the scan was not discussed with them at the clinic of those who said the reason for the scan was discussed at the clinic significantly fewer said that the limitations of the routine uss formed part of the discussion seventy five per cent of women thought that the routine uss could confirm if the baby was healthy viability gender and multiple pregnancy thirty per cent thought that uss knowledge between primigravidae and multigravidae was in relation to estimation of gestational age data were further examined to ascertain if there was any relationship between the methods of information provision and women s knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of the examination no statistically significant differences were found and expectations were examined in relation to the outcomes of obtaining a clear photo being less worried about fetal health confirmation of fetal health and being more or less attached after the scan no significant differences were found between the groups for the outcomes assessed before the examination and over each group expected no significant differences were found in expectations before and expectations met after the scan with the exception of receiving a clear photo where significantly more multigravidae than primigravidae reported that this expectation was met be present in any self report instrument that is completed with the knowledge of accompanying family or friends furthermore it cannot be assumed that women did not regard such influence as a valuable factor contributing to their opinions one of the main limitations of the study is that the data did not ascertain if women are aware of what the routine scan and an anatomical survey owing to the limited time available for women to complete the pre uss instrument it was not feasible to explore further what fetal anomalies the women thought the scan could detect or how women would react to being offered the choice of a detailed anatomical survey specifically health professionals and women as an abnormal prenatal diagnostic result has consequences for all involved and needs to be considered within the context of the options available to parents provision of pre ultrasound information this study supports findings that health professionals provide little information to women on than that provided by the health professional although the systematic review by connor et al concluded that decision aids had a positive role to play in facilitating patients to make more informed choices this study did not support the effectiveness of information leaflets in improving women s understanding of the examination and we concur the data cannot explain why the distribution of leaflets was higher in the public clinic than in the private clinic this may however be attributed to the fact that the public clinic is based in the main hospital campus with relative ease of access to where the information leaflets were stored stapleton et al have suggested that when pregnancy their effects are reduced others have suggested that factors affecting the readability of leaflets including bias in presentation of factors can affect their usefulness however this study showed that when received the information was read by most others have shown that alternative methods of information thus highlighting that information content rather than presentation alone is an important consideration although data about the precise content of the antenatal consultation were not available there is little evidence to support the fact that issues such as the specific purpose and limitations of the scan were addressed factor in successfully disseminating information to women and that staff education may be
solo the pale and the purple rose for example his independently added first oboe part creates parallel sixths with the voice pre existing parallel thirds given in the second resulting in a ex underlay at end of first section of final chorus in hail bright cecilia pindar s in lcm purcell s in bodleian library for boxed sections mark passages where pindar alters purcell s instrumental or vocal parts to eighteenth century norms although there are also examples of added accidentals such as at the end of the ritornello preceding the pale and the purple rose in of old when heroes where he adds a sharp to the to create a tierce de picardie even though the vocal solo begins immediately afterwards in the tonic other changes into these parts in comparison either with purcell s independent continuo part or with the vocal bass line where no separate part is provided his use of lower octaves results in awkward leaps within the continuo part and poor melodic shape pindar is reluctant to omit continuo where the bass voice is absent in choruses and at made up of various parts in soul of the world from hail bright cecilia he adds alto and tenor entries in the continuo before the bass some of the harmonic changes mentioned in section above result from alterations to the ex harmonic errors due to pindar s added oboe parts in the pale and the purple rose from of old when heroes all the pleasures pindar omits many of purcell s notational details particularly slurs and all ornaments most dynamics are included translated from english into italian but there are four examples of choruses incorporating sections for reduced forces where pindar does not indicate changes of texture in his score at fill ev ry heart in the first chorus of hail bright cecilia at with raptures in chorus in the opening ensemble section of welcome to all the pleasures and in the central section of then lift up your voices in the same ode in two places in hail bright cecilia pindar extends phrases by incorporating additional bars in wondrous machine he adds an extra repetition of the two bar ground for which he provides harmonically dubious new material for the two oboes and in the final chorus hail bright cecilia he creates a kind of staggered repeat of one bar stretching the parts across two bars instead in hail bright cecilia purcell includes short linking passages written in the continuo part only between hark each tree and tis nature s voice and between wondrous machine and the airy violin both of which pindar omits summary of pindar s arrangements pindar s reworkings and highlights the likelihood that the version of come ye sons of art to which we are all accustomed may be some way removed from the ode as it was performed in it is of course far easier to map the path from purcell s original sources to pindar s score than to work backwards from lcm to a missing autograph but the distinct patterns in pindar s in lcm purcell s printed score approach to hail bright cecilia welcome to all the pleasures and the yorkshire feast song provide vital clues to unlocking the mysteries of come ye sons of art and particularly of its scoring it is clear that pindar added instrumental parts principally in choruses and instrumental sections and that only minor changes tend to be found in solos and ensemble movements parts pindar added depending on purcell s original scoring so it may be possible to identify his extra parts in the ode his approach to repeats alerts us to the likelihood that minor differences between reiterated sections derive from his adaptations although they complicate our assessment of his rescoring since such variations are applied both to original and added parts and it is not always the original reading of a phrase that is given the first time a occurs his changes to text and underlay are more readily identifiable principally because of his poor ability to match the meter of the given text and because of his unmusical alterations to underlay examples of extra textual repetition however do not always disturb musical phraseology so these are less easily detected the inconsistent application of more minor changes also makes them relatively well hidden but pindar s clear harmonic incompetence confuse and chords to write inappropriate chords and to rely too heavily on parallel writing as well as his grammatical mistakes and his tendency to concentrate on making changes at cadences at least allow us to explain some of the more unlikely progressions in come ye sons of art the overriding impression given by pindar s arrangements of the three odes discussed result of his lack of ability that he adopts what we might describe as a cut and paste approach to hail bright cecilia welcome to all the pleasures and the yorkshire feast song where he adds instrumental parts they are chiefly taken from pre existing music assembled phrase by phrase juxtaposing different parts and given either at pitch or with octave transposition as can be seen in exx and where he amalgamates sections of ritornelli with phrases from solo movements in welcome to all the pleasures again he simply lifts parts from one section and places them alongside or on top of those from another as demonstrated by ex similarly he often adopts a block like approach to repeats pasting in different phrases from pre existing parts as shown in ex only rarely does pindar venture to add parts of his own composition and where he does they are usually incompetent and include copious scratchings in the manuscript suggesting that he had some difficulty completing them if we can identify similar features in parts of come ye sons of art it should be possible at least to approach a reconstruction of the ode pindar s alterations to come ye sons of art pindar s score
the household the appropriate levels for the collection and aggregation of evidence in the domains of social phenomena regions or categories of the population and scarce resources such as groundwater each demand aggregation at its own appropriate level there is also another imperative to spatial experimentation in anthropology if we are continue to work in longitudinal studies at all our older studies were framed in community and social systemic terms in which our within an area and amanor following migrant and other mobile populations across the landscape orientating interpretation increasingly to regional issues such as urban demand on the hinterland or different political interventions on two sides of a national border anthropological strategies for theorizing locations where power dynamics are focused on one event or nexus others are looking at margins both sociological and geographical comparable critical attention to fieldwork techniques is demanded in fieldwork translation problems can lead to significant misunderstandings about land use dynamics remote sensing thanks to specific wording of the questions some issues are simply intractable to verbal conceptual representation herding itineraries change every day and therefore the only response that a herder can make is vague even those that might seem to lend themselves to logical inference cannot be relied on one cannot predict the timing or pattern of herd one finds similar acknowledgement of complexity in several other works that try to take a synoptic view in yucatan the abrupt shifts in regional development initiatives over the past half century moved land change in different directions study of selective impoverishment through differential commodity price declines or farmer herder conflict or chieftaincy practices with respect to land distribution should not mean that we give up altogether on trying to corresponding to different social dynamics can at least be experimental if we can contextualize and extend the case material in an empirically based manner rather than being backed into making weak versions of circumstantial arguments about the locus of causations and the aggregation of effects how to move yet further in experimental directions while techniques of remote sensing can be part of the solution so threaded through the skepticism there emerged some agreement on the importance of five non teleological processes over the several decades of the case studies that echo the findings of berry in her landmark study primarily focused on the prior decades of the colonial period up to the mid century although the micro processes drivers of african land use change and therefore as imperative components of research on sustainable human ecologies everywhere there had been severally and in combination major changes in the crop repertoire and other natural resources that supply people s livelihoods either directly through self provisioning attention devoted to different crops by science and government that a recent series of publications has shone a spotlight on the many and varied lost crops of africa in our discussions as well there was skepticism that crop change could be glossed as diversification because in some cases the range of had been both changed and reduced at the same time over the past two decades this kind of crop change could result from price declines for exported primary products but only amanor and pabi pick up on the price question explicitly crop change in general however has been a classic means for land use and livelihood change in associated with change in several aspects of social organization over time the gender division of labor farm household and community organization and the religious underpinning of skilled knowledge and forms of collaboration so crop shifts are both the ecological and social changes in africa it is not the same unit that grows into new spaces whereas population growth has dominated theoretical work on the human environment inter relationship in our own cases absolute population growth was less clear a driver of either social or land use change than migration and even when generational replacement was from within a community through its children and grandchildren their styles of living working and guyer s study in nigeria in suggests that the overall population can be rising while the numbers directly involved in smallholder farming in a particular area stay pretty stable many children leave for cities and elsewhere those who move in are not necessarily farmers africa s populations are still very much on the move in ways that all of these studies grappled with landscapes seem to be patchworks for and class based groups with differing styles of relating to the land ethnic succession and the classic founder follower relationship of african history have been greatly complicated as the basis of social and productive relations by two significant types of movement inter regional migration of all kinds resource tenure ambiguity and related conflicts land law in africa is slowly shifting towards more private tenure but it is still quite unusual to hold freehold title especially in the peasant areas people s rights are nested in the institutions of customary law which varies from place a central characteristic seemed a more accurate and generalizable way of thinking about differentiation in all the sites than simply referring to social class the grounds for differentiation have fluctuated within any given area for example in brong ahafo in ghana the large farms were once state farms and then elite plantations eventually broken out into smallholder farms and farm large holdings may be the same whether the land is taken by the state for a national park or for the farms of the elite the footprint on the land and particularly on styles of forest use depends on the vigilance of policing and on localized exceptions made to the rules intensely powerful though intermittent political intervention redefine resource access in others the state s past and often failed interventions live on in their influence on the rural environment in cote d ivoire the state intervened to define pastoral corridors whose implications would then work out over time and through the local monitoring institutions and the herders drought but climate uncertainty has
several motivations supporting the ncex field program to assist in planning of instrument deployment and anticipate the arrival of scientifically existing systems for forecasting waves in the bight but the nrl system is the first full application of third generation wave models to realtime forecasting of combined wind sea and swell in the bight to get hands on knowledge and experience with modeling waves in realtime in a challenging environment the quantity of wave data in this region is probably the highest concentration anywhere in the us this is of great benefit to validation and for determining sources of model errors system description we created several competing wave nowcast forecast december since we compare different modeling methods in other sections using hindcasts we will present only one of the competing wave nowcast forecast systems here within this system there are three swan grids the second is nested within the first and the third is nested within the second the grid corresponds to the vicinity coordinate system table lists some details of the modeling system in this table the digit output locations are ndbc buoys locations the three digit output locations are locations of cdip instruments some cdip locations are referred to by three letter identifiers which are given in parentheses here boundary forcing for the outer swan grid was taken from realtime spectral output from that model was available from the ftp site of ncep at two locations near the boundary of corresponding to the locations of ndbc buoys and for the location of were applied to the north and west boundary of spectra for the location of were the analysis period and forecasts out to days at intervals wind forcing for the swan models were taken from fields provided byncep corresponding to the computational grid of the enp model these winds are from the ncep global forecast system as with the enp spectra the wind fields included forecasts out to days at intervals global winds were used rather than those from a regional model in all three grids directional bins are used and frequencies are used with logarithmic spacing from to hz to use a lowest frequency of hz may lead to problems when modeling the pacific basin so this was changed to for the hindcasts each day forecast computation for the grid would have taken an estimated in serial mode on the workstation used for the and computations clearly infeasible for a realtime system therefore the simulations were computed on a parallel computing platform utilizing the openmp modifications of the code made by campbell et al each seven day forecast typically use of the openmp capabilities of swan for realtime forecasting and is a strong demonstration of the expanded utility of the swan model for such purposes fields of wave height and peak direction were output for graphical display on a web site wave spectra were saved at locations where ndbc and cdip instruments were deployed the system was launched every individual and constraints since the system ran every there was and output at staggered intervals still a coarse interval but better than in the case of the model the output interval has only a very slight effect on computation time so a output interval was used the model used a min time step for computations all three swan by dr reilly was used for the grids bathymetry provided on the sio ncex website was used the latter bathymetry data set was developed specifically for the ncex experiment results for realtime comparison cdip data at the three an example time series plot similar to the ones displayed on the web page is shown in fig plots of fields of wave height and direction for each of the three grids for various forecast times were also shown on the webpage but are not reproduced here calculations of error with ndbc and cdip data as ground truth are given in table all dates are in the bias and of model output and data outages the error metrics are calculated for the analyses of each realtime swan simulation in the table we organize the instruments locations into three groups in order to better detect any correlation of error and location the three groups are a locations relatively unsheltered from swells and locations that fall within the and grids we give averages for each grouping and also an average of all locations in the averaging each location is weighted equally even though the duration of time intervals for comparisons are different in many cases when comparing model output to data we pass the data through a three hour running average type filter to put these numbers in context the magnitude of bias of be or lower and rms errors tend to be for energetic but enclosed areas rms error and negligible bias is possible in blindfold hindcasts idealized case impact of the stationary assumption in this section we present idealized cases the strategy is to of error is isolated from other sources of error also by including a test case for another environment insight is gained regarding how the error might vary with climate actual buoy data are used in the design of these idealized cases in canonical tests which follow the results are sensitive to the time scale of variation of input the boundary forced case is the magnitude of the wind thus we want the input to be as realistic as possible this is the primary motivation for using buoy data for forcing idealized tests simplified long duration simulations using stationary computations are conducted to study the impact of the stationary assumption wave height root mean square error is calculated over the entire model domain using simulations data thus with these tests we get an estimate of the typical levels of error under realistic forcing conditions the time period of the ncex experiment is used to get an idea of the impact of local wave climate we conduct tests using the climate for the gulf of maine as well as the southern california
points at the transition from one dynasty to another this approach is not without value the accession of the stuarts to the english throne in did bring anglo to a new prominence and they certainly helped shape english history over the next fifty seven years although less so during the subsequent history of the dynasty on the english throne similarly although william iii s reign had already led to concern about relations with the united provinces the accession of the house of hanover in brought the issue of relations with a foreign dominion to the fore in british politics and it played a prominent part until the hanoverian neutrality was finessed in into a british military commitment to prussia george iii s distancing himself from his grandfather s hanoverian commitments however ensured that when the alliance with prussia collapsed the relationship with the electorate did not come to the fore again at the same time there are problems with the notion of dynastic building blocs the role of hanoverian commitments was far less under george iii george iv and william iv than it had been i and george il and they were certainly less controversial useful revisionist work has underlined the interest that these monarchs still showed especially george iii in the and the continued importance of hanover but the electorate did not play as large a role as it had under george i and george ii furthermore its comparative importance has to be handled with care for george iii relations with the thirteen colonies were more important in the first quarter century of while as later for george iv ireland became more important from the late the hanoverian link was therefore important but not so dominant that it is inappropriate to look for continuities across dynastic divides these are apparent at both the ends of the period in many respects george i and george ii looked back to william iii an iconic figure a key statesman in protestant europe and a ruler who had also sought to balance british and continental commitments the healths drunk corporation s entertainment at penzance town hall in for the anniversary of george ii s accession included the glorious and immortal memory of king conversely william iv in many respects should be seen alongside victoria as a monarch who adapted to new domestic political circumstances while helping the monarchy to recover from the nadir of reputation it had fallen into under george iv such an emphasis on continuity at each end of the period of dynastic rule in a search for discontinuity during the course of the dynasty and the most apparent occurred in george ii was both the last of the dynasty to be bom in germany and the last of the monarchs to be born in the seventeenth century george iii began a period of english dominated british monarchy with hanover as an appendage albeit an important one in contrast george ii ended a cosmopolitan period that with the exception of the self consciously english anne had ii and james ii and vii both of whom had spent many of their formative years in foreign exile as well as being uncles to william iii and first cousins once removed to george i the period can therefore be seen as a bloc that repays study signs of a shift toward the characteristic features of the post period were already apparent with the conscious espousal of british patriotism in opposition to george ii by frederick prince of wales from the mid and of the post period were already apparent with the conscious espousal of british patriotism in opposition to george ii by frederick prince of wales from the mid and after his death in by his son the future george iii in george lyttelton an opposition whig mp who became secretary to frederick that year wrote that the prince would endeavor to deserve the good opinion of patriots indeed his doing so is the last response of this poor country and all his good intentions may not come too late to save us from destruction for virtue without power is as useless as power without virtue is hurtful to george ii in contrast continued in his later years to display earlier commitments and had little interest in appealing to the constituency that prided itself on british patriotism even if continuities are to be sought in the period there was a major political shift in with the removal of james ii the process was complete by but it was reopened not only by the accession of a new monarch but also by the need to define and adjust to the hanoverian commitment this therefore takes on importance not only within the history of british foreign policy but also as an important aspect of the development of constitutional practice the significance of the latter is underplayed by historians who are on the whole as disinclined to take opposition particularly tory constitutional aspects of the relationship with hanover seriously as they are ready to devote due weight to the critique over foreign policy yet these constitutional aspects were important to contemporaries both in the short and in the long term as far as the latter was concerned the union was to last five reigns years and to be dissolved only because of a lack of direct male descent there was no reason to believe that it would not be a permanent link and contemporary implications of multiple states were suffused with a sense of con cern about the threat they posed to liberty there was also the related danger of neglect as royal attention was focused on one part of the inheritance the case of scotland under the stuarts was not an encouraging example for hanover but there was also concern within britain that resources would be devoted to the electorate that george had responsibilities as elector did not mean that his espousal of hanoverian free from criticism within the electorate this was
finds a moderate correlation between the progressive party s vote share during the period and the democratic party s vote share during the fact that progressive faction epstein also finds some evidence that the younger progressive politicians in the urban areas were likely to join the democrats while the older progressive politicians in the rural areas were likely to join the republican party the period examined in this study is slightly after the period we are interested in and does not address the issue of whether the co optation of progressive policies the democratic party electoral support to test whether the democratic party did in fact attract electoral support in areas that traditionally favored left wing third parties we conduct an analysis similar to epstein s we study the entire united states however rather than just one state we also study a much longer time period to which left third parties in the pre new deal period with the electoral support for the democratic party in the new deal and post new deal period if the decline in third party support is due to the democratic party s co optation of the left then we would expect this correlation to be both substantively and statistically significant we classified all the third parties in this period as having either left or non left orientation the left third party electoral support is then measured by aggregating the votes for these left third parties across three offices president governor and senator and then dividing this by the total vote for all candidates across the three to estimate the correlation between the left and shares during and after the new deal we estimate the following linear model where indexes counties indexes states and indexes periods the term vit stands for the average vote share shares in the pre new deal period respectively if the claim is true then we would expect to be positive and significant when vit is the post new deal average democratic vote share we ran this regression for a short period to and a longer period from to table presents the results we only present the estimates for differences between and and and and and if the democratic party attracted left third party votes we would expect the difference between and to be small we would also expect the remaining three differences we report in table to be large since the democratic party would not necessarily attract votes but may attract votes from areas that support non left third parties in both the long and short periods the difference between the coefficients on previous democratic and left third party average vote shares in the pre new deal period is relatively small and statistically insignificant in contrast the difference between the coefficients on previous non left third party and third party vote share is significantly smaller when republican vote as opposed to democratic vote is the dependent variable similarly the coefficient on previous non left third party vote share is significantly larger when republican vote as opposed to democratic vote is the dependent variable these results are all consistent with the claim that the democratic democratic and left third party vote in the nonsouth versus the south we suspect that the south was different for at least two reasons first the analysis above and historical literature suggests that electoral laws likely had more influence on third party voting in southern versus nonsouthern states second as scholars have noted the democratic party in the south did not support all thus we expect a lower correlation between pre new deal left third party voting and post new deal democratic party voting in the south as compared to the nonsouth the results in table are consistent with the claim that the democratic party was not perceived as moving as far to the left in the south as compared to when post new deal democratic vote is the dependent variable however in the south this difference is large and statistically significant only the results for the nonsouth are consistent with what we would expect if the democratic party was perceived to have moved to the left during the new deal democratic and left third party vote the new deal or some other factor we examined whether the left and or the nonleft third party vote in the period to is correlated with the average major parties vote shares during the election focusing on the election allows us to separate the effect of the democratic party s leftward shift from the general rise in support for the democratic party and roosevelt s personality it was not until the election that he and the democratic party were viewed as clear advocates of left wing economic policies if the claim that the democratic party co opted the left third parties policy position during the new deal is true then we would expect the coefficient on pre new deal left third party vote to be substantially smaller than the coefficient on pre new deal than when the democratic vote in is the dependent variable which differs from the results when the average democratic vote in the post new deal period is the dependent variable comparing roosevelt to wilson and bryan prior to the new deal the democratic party was commonly perceived to be divided between its stalwart and attempted to co opt the populist position in with the nomination of the populist presidential candidate william jennings bryan the democratic party also made a move to the left in with the nomination of woodrow wilson who was also perceived to be a progressive candidate the question we address in this section is how unique was fdr relative to bryan and the relationship between the democratic vote and the left third party vote differed between bryan wilson and fdr for each democratic candidate we examined the correlation between the average left third party vote in elections eight years prior to the candidate s presidential nomination and the average democratic vote in the elections
the eu accession it is of utmost interest to point out especially the indirect costs of the process in order not only to passively take notice of them but to be control them and minimize their potentially negative impact expected benefits associated with the eu accession there is no doubt that the expected improvement in the tourism demand structure should not be exclusively conditional upon croatia s accession into the eu however there is strong evidence that the demand structure within a tourist destination is strongly positively correlated with its image in the international in this regard the following rule of thumb the better a certain country is integrated into international economy and politics the more it is attractive not only to an increased number of tourists but to market segments of a higher propensity to spend as well this is a direct consequence of a better accessability and perception of safety which makes such a country more interesting for indivudual visitors regardless of their primary visitation motives having in mind a not so positive image of croatia in the last fifteen years despite the fact that it has improved considerably since year the mere status of a eu candidate and especially the act of eu accession itself should multifold improve the international ranking of croatia as a tourist destination apart from this one time effect the eu membership will by means of various activities initiatives policies and eu presence worldwide contribute actively to croatian image over the long run this in should translate into increased visitation especially of the more wealthy market niches as a result of the improvement of overall country image hence it is to expect that the market share of individual travellers will gradually grow whereas the allotments and groups market shares should simultaneously decline further the eu accession implies harmonization in educational and skills as well as the access to job openings and working experience in other eu member countries as a combined result of the above the total quality of service in all means of tourism establishments should gradually level with the eu standards which should in turn have additional positive impact on the tourist visitation and tourism receipts in finally a higher quality of service will additionally contribute to an increase of confidence in croatia as a tourist destination to be repeatedly visited which implicitly translates into increasing confidence and willingness to buy various croatian tourist products tourist experiences since an increase in demand for visiting croatia as well as the improvement in the demand structure both ask for a pronounced diversification in the coutry s tourism offer not only in the terms of new product but in terms of value chain creation on the level of each microdestination the tourist season should gradually extend hence it is to be expected that the tourism demand will in future be much more evenly spread throughout the year due to the legal harmonization with the eu as well as to improved efficiency of the whole administative framework on the national and local levels one can expect considerable improvements in the sphere of spatial planning space utilization and space management over the long run in view of the existing decentralized decision making and high degree of local autonomy in the investment activity coupled with the expected improvements in the spatial planning process and a higher level of transparency in the project development and investment sphere more adequate means for effective land preservation controls will be established the same should hold for project evaluation yardsticks for various private sector s initiatives all these hence guarantee the avoidance of further devastation new should in their own right contribute to the overall attractiveness of the croatian tourism offer and the country s image on the world tourism market expected costs associated with the eu accession despite the fact that most people especially over the medium and long term relate croatia s process of eu accession mostly with numerous benefits one should nevertheless be aware of a several direct and indirect costs which will not be possible and despite the fact that it is sometimes cumbersome to clearly delineate ones from the other this article as previously stated differentiates between costs which can be attributed to the legal harmonization with the eu standards from costs which will arise predominantly from increased interest of foreign private persons and legal entities to either acquire property or conduct business on croatian territory it can be said that their impact is directly associated with the eu accession in this regard one can treat them as direct costs of eu accession however it is somewhat doubtful whether their individual and or combined impact represents a cost to croatia at all namely although these costs will negatively affect the performance of the croatian tourism industry and have an unfavorable impact on the standard of living in the short to medium term these costs should be regarded as investment into the future ie as investment into the long term related quality of life on the other hand although costs related to increased foreign interest to invest in croatia represent to a certain extent indirect costs associated with the eu accession their potential negative impact could by far be more harmful for the country costs associated with harmonization to eu legislature the first assocation that comes to mind is related to increased operational costs due to new much stricter regulations in the area of consumer protection workplace safety and environmental protection higher expected operational costs are only a logical consequence of inauguration of a series of additional controls of food hygiene and quality as well as of food origin and tracebility additionally due to stricter consumer protection workplace safety and security regulations new mandatory investment related neither to increases in revenue nor to profitability improvements will be required in order to remove various safety deficiencies and bottlenecks it is therefore to expect that a number of smaller tourism sector operators especially those running family businesses will be negatively
to which parents and children in the present study parents and children in the present study coordinated or attuned their vocal behaviors to the other will be discussed in the following section bi directional influence in parent child conversation tables contain the results of chi square analysis of times series regression for each of the dyad groups as shown evidence for mutual influence or significant interpersonal accommodation was observed more frequently for cws and their and their parents in mother cws dyads the duration of both the child s and the mother s simultaneous speech influenced the duration of these vocal states in the subsequent speech of their partner no significant mutual influence was observed in the interactions between cwdns and their mothers for any of the vocal states for father cws dyads significant bi directional accommodation was seen for both pause duration and the duration of speech while in cwdns father dyads mutual influence was observed for turn switching pause durations alone cwdns on the other hand exhibited no significant mutual accommodation with their mothers and significant unidirectional cit for only two vocal states while talking with their mothers switching pauses and noninterruptive simultaneous speech further these same children and their fathers engaged in mutual influence for switching pause durations and the children cit with their fathers for interruptive simultaneous speech this observation indicates that cwdns were influenced by the duration of interruptive simultaneous speech in their father s previous turn but not vice versa overall findings suggest that while talking with their mothers and fathers cws were more likely than cwdns to coordinate with or accommodate to the temporal patterns of their periods and that children who stutter and their parents are more likely to exert mutual influence mothers as previously discussed the cws in this study and their mothers exhibited mutual influence for both forms of simultaneous speech both noninterruptive and interruptive in addition as shown in table the mothers of cws exhibited significant cit for turn durations in other words as their children increased and or decreased the duration of their turns their suit in their subsequent turns in sum in mother cws conversations temporal synchrony or coordination of the duration of vocalizations switching pauses and turns was unidirectional in that either the children or mother was influenced by the other but not vice versa finally while there was no significant mutual influence in mother cwdns dyads the mothers of these children exhibited coordinated interpersonal timing for both interruptive simultaneous speech duration fathers the fathers of both cws and cwdns were influenced by different vocal states than the mothers specifically during conversation the fathers of cws coordinated the duration of their pauses with those of their child during previous conversational turns while the fathers of cwdns coordinated the duration of their noninterruptive simultaneous speech and switching pauses degree of coordinated interpersonal timing multiple analyses of variance revealed no significant differences in the degree to which cit was achieved for the duration of different vocal states across the two groups of children and two groups of parents however when the groups of children were combined anova results indicated that a significant effect for parent type was observed for vocalization duration both groups of children regardless of whether or were normally disfluent exhibited a greater degree of cit for vocalization durations during conversations with their fathers than with their mothers personality attributes of children comparison of children who do and do not stutter personality inventory for children the family relations withdrawal and social skills scales from the pic were examined because of previouswork suggesting that these or very similar constructs are related to cit the family relations scale measures family effectiveness and cohesion with regard to such factors as communication between parents parent participation in and expectations about child rearing and general home atmosphere elevated family relations scale scores reflect increased marital instability and conflict and decreased effectiveness in disciplining children in the home the withdrawal scale measures participation in social contact elevated scores reflect a child s increased social withdrawal and isolation highly elevated scores reflect more extreme withdrawal and isolation and also indicate social discomfort the social skills scale measures success in social activities with peers elevated social skill scores reflect a child s difficulty in making and keeping friends table shows the family relations social skills and withdrawal scale scores for the children who stutter and their nonstuttering peers respectively independent samples tests revealed significant between group differences for both family relations and social skills that is as a group the children who stutter obtained significantly higher scores for both family relations and social skills scales indicating that their homes were characterized by greater marital discord as compared to those of the children who do not stutter and they had more difficulty than the the nonstuttering children in making and maintaining friendships personality attributes of parents comparison of mothers and fathers of children who do and do not stutter personality attributes questionnaire and pf tables and show the competitiveness and expressiveness raw scores and warmth and dominance standard scores for the mothers and fathers of both groups of children respectively for both the competitiveness and expressiveness the paq a higher score in either reflects an increased tendency to exhibit that personality trait for the higher scores on the warmth scale reflect an outgoing nature and tendency to be more attentive to others while elevated dominance scores reflect a forceful and assertive personality independent samples tests revealed no significant differences between the two groups of mothers or the two groups of fathers in either competitiveness expressiveness warmth or dominance relationship between child personality factors and cit as an initial attempt to examine potential relationships between personality attributes of the children is this study and cit we conducted a stepwise multiple regression analysis using social skills and withdrawal as predictor variables of the cit coefficients separate multiple regression equations were calculated for each of the five vocal state durations and for turn duration resulting in separate regression equations two groups
more aggressive responses when the purpose of assessment was disclosed in either event this result although statistically significant purpose of study was to explore the necessity of indirect measurement when crts are used results indicate that compared with a control condition of participants who took the crt a under normal testing conditions disclosing the purpose of assessment impacted individuals abilities to see through the test and identify the keyed present themselves in the worst possible manner were able to readily identify the aggressive responses the effect size for this mean difference was quite large but not unexpected given recent meta analytic results that indicated that individuals tend to be quite successful at faking bad on personality inventories when instructed to do so similarly individuals who most logical solution also appeared to identify and actually endorse the aggressive responses although the effect size for this mean difference was quite small collectively these results underscore the problems associated with disclosing the purpose of the crt a basically revealing the true purpose of the crt a and instructing respondents to either identify the most logical in effect by divulging the purpose of assessment we took an indirect measure and turned it into a direct measure moreover as most direct measures have some degree of transparency the results from this study reiterate the susceptibility of such measurement systems to faking by demonstrating that scores were affected by disclosure of the purpose of assessment study offers support for the necessity item responses however this study does not test whether individuals can fake the crt a when indirect measurement is maintained study addresses this limitation by exploring whether the traditional indirect form the crt a can be faked when the purpose of the assessment is not disclosed study of instructions one set of instructions asked participants to complete the testing materials under normal testing conditions the other set of instructions asked participants to complete the materials as though they were applying for a job that they really wanted good manipulations often used in research and is more likely to be consistent with the manner in which job applicants might complete the test battery the test packets consisted of the crt a as well as self report measures of achievement motivation extroversion agreeableness conscientiousness emotional stability and aggression in general we expected higher mean scores on the self report surveys under job applicant instructions indirect nature of the crt a was maintained we expected no mean differences in crt a scores between the two sets of instructions observing mean differences in the self report surveys simply replicates previous research and thus the inclusion of the self report surveys in this study served as a manipulation check to make sure our faking manipulation was salient to the respondents stated formally our hypothesis is as follows scores obtained under normal testing instructions and those obtained by asking respondents to fake good on the crt a will not be significantly different from one another method participants a total of undergraduate students enrolled in psychology classes were invited to complete survey packets containing the crt a and self report surveys at two time points all participants received psychological association ethical guidelines similar to study we calculated a validity scale for the crt a by summing the number of illogical distractor responses endorsed under the normal test taking instructions and we removed participants with five or more illogical responses from the data analysis this resulted in participants being self report packet during one of the two administrations but did complete the crt a during both administrations thus this participant was included in the test of hypothesis but not in the manipulation check the final sample consisted of participants the majority of participants were currently employed and those who were employed worked an average of hr per two time points under two different sets of instructions in the control condition participants were informed that they were being asked to volunteer in a research study aimed at understanding how contextual factors impact the responses to psychological tests they then completed the packet containing an inductive reasoning test and self report surveys under normal conditions and instructions and because customer service jobs require dealing with the public in a friendly and helpful manner and doing so in a dedicated and detailed manner we decided to collect data using a measure of the big five personality traits we simply added the measures of achievement striving and aggression because we assumed on such jobs whereas individuals who were aggressive would perform worse on such jobs crt a the crt a was the same as that used in study the internal consistency reliabilities for the crt a all exceeded the minimum recommended faking condition self report measure of big five personality traits forty items designed to measure four of the big five personality traits were taken from the web site for the international personality item pool participants were asked to respond to each item using a point likert type scale ranging from strongly agree to strongly disagree in the current study items were used from the extroversion agreeableness conscientiousness internal consistency reliabilities in the control condition were and respectively internal consistency reliabilities in the fake good condition were and respectively items measuring openness to experience were not included in the analyses because we did not expect openness to be related to respondents perceptions concerning a customer service job specifically we used nonredundant achievement striving items including items corresponding to the six factor personality questionnaire achievement striving scale items corresponding to the multidimensional personality questionnaire achievement seeking scale and items corresponding to the respond to each item using a five point likert type scale ranging from strongly agree to strongly disagree the internal consistency reliabilities for this scale were and for the control condition and the fake good condition respectively self report measure of aggression self reported aggression was measured with the item scale from the jackson personality research form that ranged from strongly agree to strongly disagree the internal
in better formulating a basis from which to understand the move but also to show how writers frequently mismanage the move chronotopes of the cover letter genre and what the pedagogical and semantic implications of these generic errors might be in both academic and professional settings in addition to a description of the language used genre analysis is also an explanation of why language is used differently within specific cultures and a demarcating of this specific language into smaller elements called moves a move to swales is a text segment that consists of a package of various linguistic features such as lexicon syntax and illocutionary propositions which are responsible for providing the given segment a uniform orientation and signal the content of the discourse these moves can be inferred through context but they are mainly examined based on their linguistic clues further a move within a text can be considered any portion of that text that is either written or spoken and achieves a particular function within that text however not all elements of a text are obligatory and many elements such as certain moves can be considered optional moves are considered consequential because while the language of a genre as a whole is useful the specific language associated with the each move must also be considered if a writer is to be wholly accepted by the genre community as a heuristic device writers need to understand the premise behind each move and then decide what strategy can be used concerning the written application of that move this paper also assumes as connor precht and upton that genres have cultural expectations and when a writer moves between cultures with the same genre some relearning of the genre must take place in order to correctly negotiate the cultural differences within the same genre in this way writing for a new cultural group presupposes the need to relearn the genre within that cultural group the basic principle that underlies genre analysis then is that specific moves and structures the structure of certain genres with reference to their allowable move order move construction and linguistic features the ability to identify these key linguistic structures allows for a greater understanding of genres and further allows for this understanding to be passed on to others outside of the genre in order to assist in their understanding and eventual assimilation into the genre non native speakers of english was selected the applicants had applied to an aeronautical engineering firm and a hardware production company in the united twelve of the cover letters collected were written by while the remaining were written by writers cover letters were selected for this exploratory chronotopic analysis because of their wide use within the business community the plethora of prior research conducted on them and their relative simplicity less explored genres such as legal briefs academic writings or business compositions were avoided at this time because these genres and the past research conducted within them were not as accommodating to an initial investigation as cover letters were the intention of a cover letter is simple to obtain an interview this is done by candidates cover letters were initially examined by bhatia in his book analyzing genre language use in professional settings bhatia was able to explain the first seven moves found in a cover letter but his main concern was not to illuminate the purpose of the cover letter but rather to compare it to the structure of a sales promotion a more in depth analysis of cover letters was done later by henry and roseberry who analyzed a corpus of cover letters in order to identify the moves of cover letters the allowable move order and the strategies used to realize the moves in doing so they established obligatory and optional moves of the cover letters and then created a separate corpus for each move henry and roseberry identified eleven moves in their corpus of cover letters three of these moves were also common moves found in all business letters in his study of direct mail letters referred to as structural elements these include elements such as date lines address information salutations complimentary closes and signature information it appears that while structural elements are important to the framing of a cover letter their individual meaning is not so much dependent upon the writer s intention as much as upon their inclusion by the writer structural elements are for the most part standardized patterns rarely differ from one writer to another according to upton some structural elements are obligatory while others are optional obligatory and optional structural elements likely only affect the meaning of a cover letter when a writer neglects to include them for the purpose of this paper it is interesting to note that these structural elements are easily distinguished from other moves because of their lack of spatio temporal markers if if according to a theory of chronotopic move analysis a move is comprised of its spatio temporal markers then structural elements cannot be considered moves but rather as obligatory or voluntary structural arrangements that influence the meaning of the text and the purpose mainly through their inclusion or exclusion with this in mind this paper will not consider two of henry and roseberry s moves as moves at additionally henry and roseberry noted that in the cover letter as the emphasis changed so did the tense used they concluded however that cover letters did not seem to have any obvious linguistic markers of move boundaries their examples of tense constructions included the dependency on the past tense in stating how skills and abilities were obtained the use of simple present tense in listing relevant skills abilities and qualification and the use of in naming present jobs the research presented in this paper provides evidence that when these same temporal constructions are coalesced with their spatial equivalents a basis can be discerned for extricating move boundaries that is to say using the chronotope as a guide moves can
exp in the decomposition if i if the diagram is commutative the mapping nf is smooth and the action is hamiltonian with respect to the standard symplectic form on i the stratification local structure now we need to prove that our decomposition has good local behavior let be a point in the singular dimensional piece tf we want to construct a link of satisfying let cf be the complexification of the lie algebra rf the mapping restricted to cf gives rise to a moment mapping for the action of on cf the mapping is given by if consider nowthe hamiltonian action of the dimensional group induced by that of a moment mapping is then given by d where df hence is a cone let jf be the inclusion map consider the exact sequence where kf is the restriction to rf of the projection rd d define if fj by repeating the argument of proposition a continuous surjective mapping is defined by setting with vertex if is a dimensional face of containing then is a dimensional face of for each if we can find bj for each in the singular piece tf the space lf satisfies the first point of definition for a suitable proof let sf cf for recall that the decomposition in pieces of the space reflects the geometry of the polytope and is defined via the mapping the decompositions in pieces of both spaces and lf are defined via the mapping exactly in the same way and they are related accordingly to remark the arguments used in the proof of theorems and apply with no important symplectic in the case of consider for instance the singular pieces of lf each singular piece corresponds to a singular face of properly containing let be the dimension of we want to prove that the singular piece is a quasifold of dimension covered by one chart the polytope to be considered is now we can choose such that card and remark point there exists if ig such that having set bkahk the coefficient by we shall mean define the discrete groups if ig and lgf if ig in the following way the homeomorphism from the model if to lgf is induced by the continuous mapping with the proof that the mapping induces a homeomophism onto goes very similarly to that given for the mapping in the proof of theorem part i but since we deal now with the group the key result here is lemma the atlas obtained all of the charts corresponding to those i and satisfying the conditions specified above the mapping hf let be a singular face of dimension and let be a point in tf we prove that near our space is homeomorphic to the twisted product of an open subset of tf by a cone over the link lf let be such that gives a model for tf as constructed in the proof of theorem part ii in what follows we identify tf with this model the discrete i acts on the quotient and on the product i in the following way by making use of the explicit atlases it is straightforward to check that the quotient inherits the decomposition in strata of the product we want to choose now an and a invariant open subset of i such that i and the mapping hf from the twisted product to the open subset of given by the open neighborhood in tf homeomorphic to i the open subset is a submodel in tf choose now in such a way that for each we have with these choices the mapping hf is well defined continuous and injective it is easy to check via lemma that hf is surjective moreover a simple adaptation of the argument used in the proof of theorem step shows that the mapping hf is closed finally we observe that by construction the mapping mapping hf takes strata into strata and its restriction to each stratum is a diffeomorphism of quasifolds according to definition for each singular vertex the mapping is defined on the cone and satisfies all the required properties provided that is chosen in such a way that lemma let be a singular face of the convex polytope of the compact space lf defined in lemma is itself a stratification ie it satisfies the recursive definition let k be a sequence of singular faces of such that r with and such that there are no singular faces containing gk notice that for each now take a sequence of yr dgr and a sequence of in order to obtain according to remark a corresponding sequence of convex polytopes gr all gr all nonsimple but the last one choose an and a sequence of indices such that the following two conditions are verified the first is card for each for set where if then ranges in if igr the singular piece lgr of corresponding to the face gr the space lgr defined as in lemma for a point in the piece tgr is the candidate link of tr notice that lgk is a quasifold the proof of the theorem is complete if we can prove that for each such point tr with the space satisfies the first point of definition namely we need to prove that near tr the space is homeomorphic to the twisted product of an open open subset of lgr by a cone over the link lgr in order to do so define gr in analogy with consider now the discrete groups igr and igr such that igr as in the proof of lemma we choose an open neighborhood in invariant by the action of d such that is contained in gr and the quotient d and let kf ann d be the natural inclusion fix a point and denote by f the polytope f viewed in the subspace ann we have f now apply the construction described in sect to the polytope f with the choice of normals and quasi lattice
had had an affair with her the twist in the plot arises from what does not happen to io she is not killed in a sacrifice but is restored to imagine what it would have been like for io fully aware of her identity but unable to tell anyone who she was if she had been selected to be ritually slaughtered to fulfill juno s desire for in this light the gender of the sacrificial animal in ode on a grecian urn takes on a contextual necessity that coincides with from zeitlin s analysis of the masculine violence in keats s poem while the piety of ritual would seem furthest removed from the the first stanza and sacrificial death utterly antithetical to erotic passion the heifer victim connects the two in an associative subliminal bond of potential violence to which the feminine body is perpetually what still needs to be established is that in ode on a grecian urn keats opposed rather than supported an aesthetics based on sacrifice whatever the gender of the victims might be ceres under her rule innocent cattle do not become prey to human carnivores the opposition between the festivals of ceres and juno summarized in amores and grounds two different worlds one is the world variously known as the bucolic the idyllic and the pastoral the other based on hunting and killing is the heroic or epic world in ode on a grecian urn the former is the realm of the beautiful and the latter is under the dominion of the as a source the two scenes in ode on a grecian urn appear complementary the ready assumption has been that because they are in the same poem they are also depicted on the same greek vase despite the considerable contortions required to reconcile them with the each other if keats drew on different sources for the scenes the opposition between them comes more clearly into focus the fourth stanza is a drastic alternative to the happiness and joy of the lovers frolics the first three stanzas descends from the pastoral world of theocritus s first idyll human history has not yet reached the stage of separation between divine and mortal beings it is not yet possible to distinguish deities or mortals men or gods time will be frozen on the urn in a stasis of pure passion in drastic contrast the fourth stanza opens a rupture through which history to keats s own present with the introduction of juno epic displaces pastoral the freedom of dancing is replaced by the orders of the procession and the sacrifice unlimited happiness yields to violent desolation pastoral may seem cold when measured by the sublime energy of epic history the energy keeping the world green is gentle rather than urgent can the beautiful object resist the a relic that has avoided becoming a victim in the historical process as a still unravish d bride it has not yet shared juno s fate important in this regard are the political implications of the choice of the urn for ekphrasis unlike the shields of achilles and aeneas epic s paradigmatic objects for ekphrasis sublime in their cosmic imagery the urn has no military purpose or nor does it daphnis and apollo but there is a critical difference between the history of daphnis and that of juno daphnis will not be violated bold lover never never canst thou kiss though winning near the goal as an alternative to the sublime the urn must renounce the economy of sacrifice on which the progress of epic was founded the renunciation the sign must be annihilated so that the sign may become transcendental as a material object the urn will not be destroyed unlike the heifer at the end of the ritual the heifer all her silken flanks with garlands rest will no longer exist having been sublimated as a demonstration of fealty to the goddess by contrast the urn works as an aesthetic object preserved so that it may continue to produce its effects to the urn is a kind of energy drawing us out of ourselves constantly in the process of the urn cannot legitimate the economy of sacrifice in what and how it represents the beautiful does not result from suffering so there is no longer any need for keats to find ways to transform the pain of the sublime into the pleasure of the beautiful the urn produces meaning by converting the two ideals of truth and beauty back and forth in the dialectic makes beauty into truth truth into beauty beauty into truth and so on endlessly without sacrificing either for the other even the war between the sexes the dominant theme of the amores is no longer joined ideal love like the unheard melodies will be sweeter because it does not become part of the actual realm where lovers quarrel hurt each other and eventually die anonymous no real couple has been transformed into lifeless forms to serve the purposes of art by grounding beauty and truth reciprocally in each other keats establishes an alternative to the sublime economy the self sustaining economy of beauty as truth is based on the model of the unlimited energy of cosmic flux presented by ovid in the metamorphoses right after the denunciation of sacrifice into everything else nihil est toto quod perstet in orbo cuncta fluunt omnisque uagans formatur imago in other words the effort to grasp the world via ideal images is empty and immoral empty because both the world and the images continu ally shift immoral because matter is forcefully dominated by arbitrary forms the violent assault of forms on matter the violence of sacrifice disrupts the divine economy to produce what are supposed to be realities substantial presences but turn out to be deceptions since they exhaust the cosmic economy similarly violent deeds committed in epic struggle may produce a momentary sublime but they eventually lead to exhaustion beauty however creates an unlimited the excess
can detect a certain degree test statistically the null hypothesis stating that the directions of arrows in the network are assigned randomly and to contrast it to the alternative hypothesis stating that the degree of transitivity between the directions of arrows exceeds the chance level only if it is highly unlikely that the observed degree of partial transitivity is obtained by chance detecting changes in firing order as mentioned when neuronal activity is evoked by different stimulation conditions neurons can change their order of firing to detect such changes within large networks one needs a statistical test to investigate whether the phase offsets are obtained from networks with identical firing sequences be different akin to the commonly used non parametric tests such as the sign test or wilcoxon signed ranks test a non parametric test for changes in the firing order can be created by applying the present test of partial transitivity to a difference network if the network obtained under one stimulation condition is the reference and the one under the other condition is the target in the target from the corresponding magnitude of the delay in the reference network si note that the order of indexes needs to be matched because sqp hence if and represent matrices of delays in the reference and the target networks respectively the difference matrix is computed as the difference networks have the following interesting the networks will also be perfectly additive thus if the target and the reference networks originate from different firing sequences of the units the difference network should contain additive structural changes in the delays in contrast if the target and the reference originate from the same firing sequences the values in the difference network will result solely from the random variations in the in a random assignment of the directions of delays and thus in a lack of additivity the partial transitivity within the difference network should also not exceed the chance level therefore the previously postulated transitivity test can be also applied to difference networks to investigate whether these networks indicate transitive changes in the of random variations of the measurement errors it is important to note that transitivity of the difference network does not imply transitivity of the original networks two non transitive networks can produce a transitive difference therefore whenever investigating the transitivity of difference networks it is desirable to determine also the transitivity of the original networks are required first one needs to define an appropriate measure of the degree to which a particular network is partially transitive second probabilities need to be computed for obtaining the given degree of partial transitivity by chance measure of partial transitivity the measure of partial transitivity proposed here is based on the transitivity of sub networks larger than triples is investigated indirectly because as the proof in appendix shows if all of the triples of a given network are transitive then the entire network is also transitive thus the present measure assumes that the larger the number of transitive triples the larger the degree of partial transitivity the actual measure that is used here is expressed this number is always much smaller than the number of transitive triples and is thus easier to handle therefore for a network of nodes all the triples are tested and the count of the non transitive ones is used as an indicator of the degree to which the network is partially transitive provided for the probabilities that fully connected networks with zero and with one non transitive triple will arise by chance as these calculations were too complex for larger numbers of triples the remaining probabilities were obtained by simulations thus up to random networks were generated with sizes of up to nodes where the direction of each was then counted in every network and these counts were subsequently used to compute the probability distributions for observing a certain number of nontransitive triples in a random network of a given size the results are shown in fig for network sizes of up to nodes note the saw shaped distributions indicating that an even number of non transitive triples is slightly more likely non transitive triples that satisfies a certain criterion of statistical significance to this end the probability distributions were integrated into cumulative distributions and the critical counts of non transitive triples were determined at the left tails of the cumulative distributions the resulting counts from these results one can see that the critical number of nontransitive triples depends strongly on the network size for example transitivity within a network of nodes is significant at an alpha level of only if the network does not contain a single non transitive triple in contrast a network of nodes can contain up to non transitive triples as made applying the test to a sample dataset the present test was applied also to a sample dataset of nine units and six stimulation conditions obtained from the cat visual cortex this dataset was acquired by using similar methods to those reported previously in schneider and nikoli and in schneider et al the original cchs computed obtained after fitting gabor functions are shown in fig visual inspection of the networks in fig suggests both additivity of phase offsets and a change in the temporal structure across the stimulation conditions thus the present non parametric method was applied to investigate whether the partial transitivity of phase offsets in these networks exceeds the chance level their differences networks exceeds the chance level a network of nodes consists of triples and for the alpha levels of and the critical counts of non transitive triples are and respectively table shows the resulting counts of the non transitive triples in three stimulation conditions the count of non transitive triples was zero indicating that the non transitive triples did not exceed two thus the networks showed highly significant levels of partial transitivity in all six stimulation conditions indicating that the structures of the networks were highly additive these results are consistent with
from his long sleep and exerted himself and the day began a new avatar the brahman had never thought to be a brother of mankind as well as a child of thoreau where he says to use an obsolete latin word i might say ex oriente lux ex occidente frux from the east light from the west nevertheless thoreau could use strands of asian involvement such as the outward confucian ethic sufi egalitarianism and the ta paradigm of detached selfless action in walking a clear sense of this thrust from asia and america is present in his argument that to all the laws both of heaven and earth by virtue of his relation to the law maker that is active duty says the vishnu purana which is not for our bondage that is knowledge which is for our liberation all other duty is good only unto weariness all other knowledge is only the cleverness of an artist struggles at the end of the in came thoreau s walden and his lecture slavery in massachusetts followed by his involvement in the growing controversy over slavery in massachusetts and his strong personal support for the abolitionist activist john brown over the next few years here emerson s obituary comment on thoreau comes to mind so much knowledge of nature s secret and genius few others possessed none in a more large and religious stevenson considered that at walden thoreau had chosen to devote himself to oriental philosophers the study of nature and the work of self improvement meanwhile burroughs thought thoreau was probably the wildest civilized man this country has produced adding to the the hermit and woodsman the wildness of the poet and to the wildness of the poet the greater ferity and elusiveness of the thoreau himself had associated such strands as in his journal entry in that the fact is i am a mystic a transcendentalist and a natural philosopher to in such a vein of deep ecology thoreau could hold in a week that men nowhere elm willingly shadows man would desecrate it by his touch and so the beauty of the world remains veiled to him he needs not only to be spiritualized but naturalized on the soil of thoreau s sensitivity to nature could take him into the pre christian west of greek mythology where the great god pan is not dead perhaps of all the gods of new england and of ancient greece i am most constant at his shrine yet it could also take him east to india nothing is more gentle than nature this was why christy sawhowa common denominator of all that thoreau took from the hindus chinese and persians was a mystical love for whereas emerson s essay nature was still something of an external view thoreau s more personal exploration in a week and walden was an internal view living in and by nature in the midst of a range of supportive asian ideas and methods thoreau was that the oriental books were his daily bread at concord thoreau s use of oriental wisdom went beyond book admittedly thoreau was often dependent on translations of oriental texts made by european scholars however in walden thoreau was also ultimately skeptical should one be confined to books no matter how well selected compared with the discipline of looking always at what is to be seen will you be a reader a student merely or a seer read your fate see what is before you and walk on into futurity a futurity that in a week had earlier been described as the tempting but unexplored pacific ocean of futurity pointing to asian at walden he had indeed explored and walked along such asian paths thoreau s vision here overlaps with much of classical asian spirituality vis a they truly are to observe the still quiet moment as such this vision points forward to thoreau s subsequent adoption by western zen asian texts were themselves secondary where in thoreau s eyes the vedas and their angas are not so ancient as serene within the indian setting though there was plenty of emphasis on primary despite his use of oriental literature had not fully understood the philosophy of india which was centered for thoreau on contemplation the genius of those indeed he considered that western philosophers have not conceived of the significance of contemplation in their ie india s senses with reference to the spiritual discipline to which the brahmans subjected themselves and the wonderful power of abstraction to which his walden sojourn he could say i realized what the orientals mean by this view of asian wisdom was then ultimately an intensely if still practical spiritual vision it was in the light of his walden experiences and reflections that thoreau recognized walt whitman s emerging poetry as being wonderfully like the as west went east in the form of the forcible american opening up of japan to trade by the perry mission to japan in thoreau criticized this commercial imperialism the whole enterprise of this nation which is not an upward but a westward one toward oregon california japan etc is totally devoid of interest to me they may go to their manifest destiny which i trust is not mine what end do they propose to themselves beyond as west in the form of chinese workers along the pacific coast thoreau in the last year of his life could lament in life without principle the american materialistic profit drives manifested during the the gold rush to california is this the ground on which orientals and occidentals meet a grain of gold will gild a great surface but not so much a grain of wisdom thoreau s own ground of encounter had been a very where the inward dimension and a focus on the practical exploration of oriental wisdom was ex oriente lux for a very yankee sort of oriental here though a final further shift in thoreau s horizon can be suggested in america categorizations distinguishing between perceived polarities of west and east can be seen in thoreau
as blue shifted sag does not afford much flexibility since the epitaxial architecture is fixed in all components the soa and photodetector are forced to employ the same high confinement mqw structure as used in the laser resulting in low saturation power in both receiver components since sag exploits the contrast in surface kinetics of the growth constituents on the semiconductor and dielectric a high degree of calibration optimization must be an established and simple integration platform is based on the use of offset qws where the mqw active region is grown above a passive bulk wave guide the mqwis selectively etched in regions where gain is not required leaving the nonabsorbing waveguide as shown in fig although this process only requires a single blanket type regrowth it allows for only two band edges on a single chip the modal gain in the offset qw is offset from the mqw this scheme forces the use of bulk franz keldysh type eams which are not as efficient as qw eams utilizing the qcse in the dual qw platform as shown in fig an mqw is grown in the center of the bulk waveguide below the offset mqw such that a second qw band edge is defined on the single chip the dual platform does not provide additionally this scheme imposes a passive loss versus efficiency tradeoff the efficiency will increase as the waveguide mqw bandgap energy is decreased however this will also increase the passive loss since the waveguide wells are present throughout the device to manage this tradeoff longer eam lengths are used at the expense of bandwidth in the dual qw and offset qw either the mqw or the waveguide material as the absorber the relatively high confinement factor in the active mqw will result in low soa saturation power the high confinement factor structure is not an optimal architecture for high power high speed photodiodes in the asymmetric twin waveguide integration scheme selective removal of the upper active waveguide such that only the lower passive waveguide remains in regions where active functions are not required the optical power is coupled between the even and odd modes supported by the waveguide using carefully designed taper couplers this technique eliminates the need for regrowth only in applications where vertical current injection is wavelength agile pics although this platform can enable multiple functions on a single chip the nature of the vertical coupling into different epitaxial layers would create great difficulty when defining additional active component architectures beyond the two found in the laser modulator transmitters or the soa photodetector receivers devices reported in that is the atg platform does not appear fit for gain low confinement mqw active regions for high saturation power a high confinement blue shifted mqw for high efficiency eams and high saturation current photodetector structures such as the utc quantum well intermixing as shown in fig allows for the strategic post growth tuning of multiple qw band edges without introducing difficult growth steps or discontinuities a number of techniques that have evolved over the years to accomplish selective intermixing such as impurity induced disordering impurity free vacancy enhanced disordering photoabsorption induced disordering and implantation enhanced interdiffusion qwi enables the use of a mqw active region for maximized modal gain in lasers and blue shifted qws in the eams and offered by bjr and sag since multiple qw band edges can be defined on a single chip the passive and eam band edges can be independently optimized to avoid the passive loss versus efficiency tradeoff of the dual platform qwi does not change the average composition of the mqw such that there is a negligible index discontinuity at the interface between adjacent sections this eliminates parasitic here we employ a high flexibility integration method combining an impurity free implant enhanced qwi technique with simple blanket mocvd regrowth the qwi process uses a single implant to introduce point defects in an undoped inp buffer layer grown above the qws thermal propagation steps are used to diffuse the point defects through the desired band edge has been achieved this process allows for the realization of any number of band edges on a single chip as the number is determined only by the number of times the thermal processing is interrupted such that the buffer layer can be selectively removed in specified regions in fig the characteristic band edge shift versus anneal time is shown for implanted the process along with an overview of the pics fabricated using this technique can be found in although qwi provides a simple method to achieve multiple band edges on a single chip for high performance lasers and eams alone it does not provide the capability to integrate optimal architectures for high saturation power soas and specialized photodetectors by combining blanket mocvd regrowth state of the art lasers modulators soas and photodetectors on a single chip without bjr or sag the pic designer is not only free to control the band edge in the growth plane but now has the flexibility to control the band edge in the direction normal to the growth plane and to define unique architectures in the soas and photodetectors first qwi is used to define three unique bandgaps next simple blanket regrowth and wet etch steps are carried out to define a low confinement offset mqw for use in soas and utc photodiode structures a side view schematic of a single chip possessing the four state of the art architectures is shown in fig the key attribute of this high flexibility scheme is that it as does the butt joint method the slight discontinuities created in this scheme reside above the intermixed waveguide core such that only the tail of the propagating mode encounters them furthermore our process requires no complicating dielectric patterns to remain on the semiconductor surface to prevent deposition during growth as in the bjr or sag methods the widely tunable transmitters demonstrate over nm of tuning with db optical bandwidths up to ghz and
about the structure and the linearization procedure i have expanded a to include a and the root in these statements as noted general definitions concerning headedness and so on could be invoked in justifying specific outputs eg the head initial should determine as opposed to and so all other things being equal it is assumed that these statements are additive ie they are statements added to the representation in addition to the set of statements that define the hierarchical properties of this phrase marker as noted above in addition to what appears in there must be additional statements for the subparts of words the subwords the statements above define the ordering of the second step associated with imposes in the way described above continuing with the example based on this additional set of statements is as follows with string adjacency at the word level established by the statements in the rule for synthetic comparative formation is stated in terms of as in this rule replaces the initial formulation of local dislocation formulated in above which was stated in terms of is that all local dislocation operations are defined in terms of statements derived by the normal linearization mechanisms in particular in terms of concatenation statements like see embick for some discussion for the derivation of prouder than john there is a statement in the last line of that meets the environment for the effects of the application of are shown the rule transforms the ordering statement deg cmpr on the left hand side into the representation on the right where deg is a subword affixed to a a final question concerns the statement that is the output of the local dislocation rule and how it relates to other concatenation statements the complex head after the local dislocation ie the comparative adjective deg cmpr has to appear specify an ordering on the adjective prior to the application of the same relative ordering between proud a and proud must be maintained after deg has been affixed as a subword to the adjective one way to accomplish this is with reference to what the statements in contain in the first place while in the subword components of individual words are represented the rule that introduces is defined at the word level ie other words directly not by virtue of their subparts the internal structure of the words is irrelevant to these ordering statements as long as the individual words can be distinguished from one another no crucial reference to their internal structure must be made in the statements derived by the upshot of this is that the adjective has the same linearization status after affixation of deg as it does before that is when local dislocation object inherits or retains the linearization contraints imposed on perhaps it has the requirements of as well although this is only one the rules above account for synthetic formation in the case of normal comparatives in the case of metalinguistic comparatives there are two observations to be made first concerning linearization statements like those defined in terms of the adjective so that is not triggered recall the structure for john is more lazy than stupid repeated from above given the rules above the linearization procedure applied to this structure does not generate the linearization statement in assuming that degp is linearized to the left of ep just like it is with normal aps deg cmpr alazy only is generated in the absence of the local dislocation rule does not apply and cmpr is supported by mo just as it is in other cases in which it is not affected by local dislocation this first explanation relies on the idea that null elements like are counted in concatenation statements in the case at hand there is potentially a second reason for the absence of synthetic metalinguistic comparatives assuming that linearization and occur in phases and that ep is a phase deg is supported by mo at a stage in the derivation before it comes to be linearly adjacent to an adjective on the assumption that ep in is adverbial adjectival the idea behind cyclic spell out is that the phonology of deg has been taken care of inside of ep before deg comes to be in any sort of relationship with the ap containing lazy inside of ep the rules for analytic forms apply since there adjective is not present at this derivational stage such that more most surfaces this account of why synthetic comparative formation does not occur requires specific assumptions about how phases are defined in terms of category defining projections and in addition some assumptions about how adverbial like modifiers fit into this system that is different theories of phases make different predictions about when the degp should have been processed and these differences are of course this analysis distinguishing between the two explanations advanced above might be possible when other case studies are examined but i will not attempt to make such a distinction here to summarize when the structural properties of metalinguistic comparatives are examined closely the absence of synthetic comparative forms can be explained in this particular case there are in fact two coherent explanations for why the local each of which leads to further questions to be investigated empirically the solutions are stated in terms of explicit assumptions about how linear order is imposed on syntactic structures a number of additional questions concern how these linearization operations are interleaved with other operations particularly given further assumptions currently under discussion in the literature eg the idea that the construction of pf proceeds in parallel to much more could be said about movement and the status of unpronounced copies in such a system some questions of this type are studied in fox and pesetsky the adverb adjective cases the metalinguistic comparatives discussed above are an instance of potential surface adjacency without the formation of a synthetic form as demonstrated above this is not a problem for a view based on structure and adjacency like the one i
insiders in period over all firm quarters is sold this implies that a at the filing is associated with an increase of in the value of stock purchased by insiders thus the associations documented in table while highly significant in a statistical sense are less significant from an economic standpoint that insiders might not learn earnings precisely until shortly before the earnings announcement so that insiders are not informed about earnings until the latter part of period in contrast at the start of period insiders likely know how the earnings figure was achieved although this information may not be publicly revealed until the filing date hence insiders may know at the beginning of period whether there is likely some further reaction by investors around the to address this concern we reperform the analysis in specifications and of table after shortening the periods over which we examine trades from days to days the results reported in table are qualitatively unchanged when we focus on just the days before and the days after the announcement window also in table the coefficient estimates on the prior retp and ln mv are and zaman the coefficient estimate on bm is positive in panel a where the dependent variable is freqp in contrast in panel wherever the coefficient estimate is significantly different from zero it is negative so the value of insider net purchases decreases in the book to market ratio we note that rozeff and zaman s evidence is based on the proportion of trades that are purchases not on the value of trades market adjusted returns are replaced with raw returns in this and subsequent regressions the positive coefficient on aret fd in period is not a result of insiders trading on the post earnings announcement drift because the coefficient on aret fd is unaffected by the inclusion of the earnings surprise in the immediately preceding earnings announcement defined as the seasonal difference in earnings per share scaled by stock price at the end of fiscal quarter relative to quarter to alleviate the concern of cross sectional dependence of insider trades we also run a fama macbeth regression of specification of table by calendar year and draw similar inferences additional tests the generally insignificant relationships in period between insider trades and the earnings announcement documented in table may be due in part to the paucity of insider period as compared to trades in periods and across firm quarters the mean values of total insider trades in periods and are and respectively one cause of the lower frequency and value of trades in period may be the higher jeopardy that attaches to trades in this period however another explanation for fewer insider trades in period may be that all traders avoid trade in period to rule out alternative explanations for the relatively low amount of insider trades in period we consider reasons why particular groups of traders may avoid trade in period and trace out the implications applying the logic in foster and viswanathan s model of variation in interday trading volume chae suggests that uninformed traders avoid the period before the earnings announcement because informed traders who have advance knowledge of the announcement seek to profit from their private information at the expense of uninformed traders anticipating a decrease in uninformed trade market makers widen the bid ask spread and the sensitivity of price to order flow increases so trading costs are higher despite the heightened price sensitivity which is caused by the anticipation of informed trades informed traders nevertheless can profit from their private information about earnings by trading are announced at the expense of uninformed traders who do not have discretion over the timing of their trades thus if insiders were informed we might expect insiders to trade more intensely before the earnings are released than afterwards this is because some of the insiders information is dissipated by the earnings announcement on the other hand if insiders were liquidity reasons they might choose to trade after the earnings announcement when trading costs are lower for the same reasons and in the same proportion as traders in general in this case we might expect to see fewer insider trades in period and more insider trades in period but in proportion to total trading volume in periods and respectively park et al who study insider trades drawn from and document a significant decrease in days prior to an annual earnings announcements relative to the preceding days to summarize we see no reason for insider trading to be disproportionately greater in period than in period for periods and the mean values of insider trades in the firm quarter period as a fraction of all trade in that firmquarter period are respectively thus the fraction of trade that is due to insiders in period is more than period the fraction of trade that is due to insiders in period is almost four times the fraction in period these results are more consistent with the jeopardy hypothesis than the alternative explanations described above we use aret fd as a proxy for the private information contained in the sec filing that insiders use for their stock trades in period however formal models preempt part of the information content of forthcoming news releases empirical evidence is consistent with this prediction preemption by reducing the magnitude of abnormal return at the release weakens the associations we seek to document despite this we document a highly significant correlation between trade in period and the abnormal return at the filing the association between insider trades and aret fd in period we rerun the regression specification of table on the subset of observations that excludes firm quarters for which the trade disclosure date is after the filing date for more than half of the trades in the quarter and the complementary subset of observations that excludes firm quarters for which the trade disclosure date is before the filing date for more than half of the trades in the quarter in the period
concludes by discussing how these new approaches help widen the ideational research agenda and broaden our understanding of the fund research the how much problem the how much problem raises the issue of how researchers can isolate the causal effect of ideas on political outcomes and assign it causal weight existing studies generally rely solely on qualitative research designs to deal with this problem usually employing process tracing in conjunction with case comparison using the method of difference these research designs can produce matter indeed as parsons claims given solid evidence of differing preferences and careful verification that they actors face identical objective constraints this control for objective causes is as free from bias as qualitative observations can be however there are two weaknesses with these research designs ideas at the expense of efficient estimates of their effect although ensuring that actors face identical objective constraints may minimize the likelihood of a biased inference this strategy fails to consider that such an approach may introduce inefficiency this inefficiency is potentially introduced from the inclusion of irrelevant control variables that is factors related to ideas but not the outcome or related to the outcome but not ideas by limiting a study to the of cases that match on a large list of control variables researchers will generally have fewer observations to use in their analysis than if a shorter list was used yet existing methodological guidance implies that a large list is preferable because it minimizes the possibility of omitted variable bias however the small number of observations that results will lead to greater inefficiency in the estimate of the effect of ideas and thus less certainty about the can be made from that study as noted there is sometimes a trade off between bias and efficiency ideally researchers would like their estimates to have both properties but this might not always be possible both qualitative and quantitative researchers are often forced to choose between an estimate that is unbiased but less efficient and one that is to some extent biased but more efficient unfortunately it is not clear how one would perform such an evaluation using qualitative methods qualitative researchers should therefore exercise caution in deciding which objective conditions variables to control for and should not over emphasize the need for unbiased estimates at the expense of efficiency greater recognition of this issue and more care in crafting research designs can thus partially is to consider supplementing qualitative research designs with quantitative methods in general quantitative methods offer researchers facing the how much problem two benefits that offset the weaknesses that arise from relying solely on qualitative research designs as suggested one benefit is that these methods provide a formal assessment of the bias efficiency trade off through an estimate of the mse this statistic enables researchers to assess formally the bias and efficiency gains across various model specifications quantitative methods also offer the additional benefit of providing formal estimates of how much ideas matter relative to other factors via the parameter estimates by controlling in the model specification for variables opposing theories suggest and specifying the effect ideas exert on outcomes quantitative methods can serve as a powerful tool for overcoming the objections of are amenable to quantitative analysis while quantitative analysis is suited for dealing with the bias efficiency trade off and the how much problem it is not as valuable for tracing the processes of ideational diffusion and compliance ideational research thus provides an excellent opportunity for new multimethod research as it raises issues that are more fruitfully analyzed by both qualitative and quantitative methods by contrast designs either qualitative or quantitative fare less likely to provide adequate answers to these issues the how to problem the how to problem is simply the issue of crafting measurements of ideas in general ideational researchers have followed two different approaches one approach focuses on behavioral outcomes that is whether an actor s behavior complies with a set of ideas another approach focuses on what actors say codify record etc to justify defend or promote their actions the most productive attempts to develop a quantitative indicator thus far use some version of content analysis although effective in some instances a serious obstacle to relying on analysis is the problem of developing and identifying cross nationally equivalent indicators and texts for analysis another new approach to develop a quantitative indicator of ideas i focus on the individual level of analysis there are good ontological reasons for focusing on this level of analysis as there the rich multidisciplinary research on professional training provides a useful set of insights for developing a quantitative indicator of ideas across a range of professions this literature highlights how professional training can exert a significant influence on an individual s views about what may be considered appropriate content of an individual s professional training can shape an individual s preferences by promoting both implicitly and explicitly a particular set of causal beliefs and normative positions as finnemore and sikkink note professional training does more than simply transfer technical knowledge it actively socializes people to value certain things above a proxy for the ideas instilled in these individuals as a result of their professional training the working assumption being that professional training in particular organizations with the empirically documented ideational commitments will likely lead actors trained there to adopt similar ideas these individuals then act as carriers of these ideas bureaus of a nation s military share similar beliefs values or culture during a given time frame then it seems reasonable to presume that any individual emerging from these organizations training during that time frame a new ph or a new soldier will also likely share those views the key to developing a quantitative indicator of ideas then is to identify the critical individuals that are being inculcated with the ideas of interest and which once the key individuals and organizations are identified the researcher can then produce scores for the cases being analyzed these scores could be nominal ordinal or continuous there are no a
weak infrastructure and adverse disease environment communications and transportation more likely because poverty meant poor hygiene and sanitation most famine victims succumbed to infectious disease rather than famine proper the deadliness of any given famine depended mainly on the severity of a harvest shortfall private philanthropy and public action might mitigate but rarely overcame the ensuing niger focus of global media attention in is probably the poorest economy in the world while gdp per head in ethiopia and malawi also threatened by famine in the new millennium are in real terms less than half that of the united states two centuries ago five of the six countries most prone to food emergencies since the mid angola in the mid the sixth sudan was ranked moreover famines within countries are most severe and slowest to disappear in remoter densely populated and poorly diversified rural in ireland in the the correlation across administrative units between population loss and measures of prefamine backwardness such as housing population density were also highly in this context the extreme backwardness of china on the eve of the great leap forward famine bears noting in chinese gdp per head was less than that of any african country in with the exception of the democratic republic of the one fourth that of gdp per capita in poverty also helps explain why infectious disease still looms large in famine mortality in sub saharan africa today it makes the cost of medical care prohibitive more d s main remaining famine prone region infectious and parasitic diseases alone were responsible for nearly half of all deaths in the with diarrheal diseases accounting for nearly one quarter of those in such areas diseases endemic in normal times still account for much of the excess compounds the anachronistic character of present day famine much of sub saharan africa has yet to experience fully the epidemiological transition public health lags rather than leads medical science this is no longer because of ignorance of low cost primary health care such as immunization prophylactics and rehydration or even because of abroad to most effective use northwest england in the anhui and sichuan in china in the northwest finland in the north hamyong province in north korea in the using population data and mortality estimates in arup maharatna the associated elasticity is a combination of the two on the harvest although as will be shown in the following sections dramatic crop failures are neither a necessary nor a sufficient condition for famine even the man made famines in the soviet union in and in china in were due in part to crop failures a single year of drought and that is not enough to cause famine historically the worst famines have been the product of back to back shortfalls of the staple crop ireland offers a well known example had phytophthera infestans not struck the potato crop twice in a row in and there might have been no great irish famine deccan famine of the finnish and scottish famines of the late the berar famines of the the soviet famine of and the chinese famine of thus the probability of back toback poor harvests should provide some sense of the likelihood of famine in the past this suggests the strategy of identifying a shortfall and the likelihood of a back to back shortfall if such events were random the expected and actual incidence of repeat failures can then be compared back to back events could spring from natural or unnatural causes the former would include the effect of serial war how common were back to back poor harvests in the past agricultural output data offer some insight although such data are also scarce before the nineteenth century the renowned estate accounts of the medieval bishopric of winchester in southern england provide one straw in the wind on the assumption that yield ratios fifteen in and in both were due to excessive rains and flooding crop output data are preferable to crop yield data since the latter fail to take account of the likely impact of low yields on acreage sown in the following year table reports the outcome as those with shortfalls of over ten or twenty percent the results suggest that such back to back events are rare although more likely than might be expected on a random basis since the underlying patterns are unlikely to change much over time the results may be interpreted as tentative evidence that famines were less common in made it impossible to sustain population since most harvest shortfalls are caused by extreme weather meteorological evidence is also worth considering monthly mean temperature data are available for central england since temperature was subject to serial correlation running the annual average annual averages and when the focus is switched from average temperature to the coldest and the warmest months of each year the autocorrelation disappears for the mean minimum temperature the coefficient on the lagged term is for the mean maximum temperature the coefficient is moreover the ee degree polynomial and defining bad years as those deviating by more than ten percent from expected values gives the following probabilities and actual frequencies of back to back bad years of extreme cold or heat low high expected a similar story the frequencies of drought and flood years between and in both india as a whole and in the northwestern state of rajasthan are described in table along with the number of back toback extreme events in general all the and mitchell in in the wake of the black death corn seems to have been plentiful despite the low yields table extreme droughts and floods in india these two episodes might well be considered part of a single prolonged crisis the were a decade of hardship and famine in much of northwestern europe in and famines however in nineteenth century india and ireland for example concerns about moral hazard constrained famine relief and increased mortality wars have exacerbated famine throughout history to take a
they are in any sense sufficient certainly the historical record looks to be consistent with a contrary view it is the more affluent societies that have tended to establish well ordered liberal regimes it is the poorer societies that tend to be riven with conflict and governed by inadequate or corrupt regimes good order may secure affluence and it may provide some of the conditions necessary for ratcheting it up but that observation it being the case that at each stage in the historical process some prior accumulation of capital provides the support for the institutional consolidation so if wealth does not cause good institutions this does not mean that good institutions cause wealth to maintain either of these rarefied theses in abstraction from the other would i suggest be rather absurd so to say resources are not sufficient for wealth good order and justice is not ends nor is it to imply that some other variable such as good institutions could be sufficient however risse has a further objection against taking justice to require redistributive transfers of resources internationally which would apply even if we merely assume resources are insufficient not unnecessary for wealth the basis for a redistributive duty that pogge especially highlights is the uncompensated exclusion from use of natural resources in the use of a single natural resource base from whose benefits the worse off are largely and without compensation risse points out that an argument for redistribution based on this consideration presupposes a commitment to an egalitarian right to natural resources he then notes that this commitment gains its plausibility from the idea that there is a heap of natural resources to which each human being has an equal he draws attention to two salient points first strictly speaking raw materials become resources and thus obtain market value in virtue of their usefulness for human activities only through activities that require a social context crude oil say became important only after the invention of the motor engine second unlike biblical manna resources require work to become available oil must be extracted and refined minerals must be mined etc these two features capture to resources and while they may not entail much they do entail that it is not the case that any two individuals are equally situated with regard to all these are points i too have highlighted in a previous i fully accept with risse that materials become resources through being developed in activities that require social contexts contexts in which not all human beings participate equally however i think he is rather swift in concluding that we cannot think of the claims to them as being egalitarian in noticing the justification of inequalities in favor of those who valorize natural resources risse notices only half the story resources are made available or to put the point in other terms as i have proposed the aggregate available ecological space can be marginally increased through socioeconomic practices but resources or amounts of ecological space can also be made unavailable a key point is that there is a significant difference between generating inequalities by adding value to one s just portion of ecological space and annexing more than one s just portion of ecological space the normative logic of risse s position is that the world s bounty is up for grabs by whoever has the skill and industriousness to make use of it without any accompanying constraint of leaving enough and as good for others such even on a libertarian conception of justice i therefore do not think risse can sustain his charge against pogge that there is no case of justice to rectify a distribution of resources which leaves swathes of humanity without adequate access to them at this point i would turn to pogge however to propose that there is a stronger case for applying distributive justice to natural resources than he seeks to a friendly amendment framing the issue as one of ecological debt from an ecological perspective the affluent can be regarded as having a debt toward the global poor the world has finite resources for everyone to utilize resources at the rate the affluent currently do would require two or three additional planet earths there is only one planet earth the situation is therefore that some are drawing resources at a rate that effectively deprives others of the opportunity to draw resources even at a rate sufficient to meet their basic human needs such inequalities of opportunities for resource use can be condemned as unjust without recourse to fully fledged egalitarianism even if their rectification would look strongly most liberal standards the situation then is indeed much as pogge characterizes it the better off enjoy significant advantages in the use of a single natural resource base from whose benefits the worse off are largely and without compensation the significant advantages enjoyed by the better off correspond to disadvantages of the worse off this is not a completely zero sum game since increases of ecological productivity are possible but it is near enough to one for to recognize that in very significant measure the benefits enjoyed by the affluent are achieved at the expense of the poor having to forego benefits to the extent that this is the case then drawing of benefits by the affluent is itself unjust these benefits are drawn by using greater amounts of ecological space than the affluent have any justification for using the fact of benefiting is what is causing the harm the deprivation that should be ended it is not that we should the affluent doing a harm and then incidentally benefiting from it it is rather that in the process of drawing benefits the affluent are doing the harm pogge says that in benefiting the affluent are not necessarily doing wrong providing they compensate yet the appropriate compensation would be precisely to reduce the amount they benefit that excess benefit is unjust pogge says that the affluent should not be condemned and i
significant associations between viagra and or cialis use and the occurrence of naion however for patients with a history of myocardial infarction we did observe a strong and increased risk of naion a similar association was also observed for patients with a history of hypertension but it was of borderline statistical significance these results must be interpreted in light of several potential limitations the most apparent of which is the study s small sample size this provided limited statistical power to detect associations that were small and moderate in magnitude and yielded statistically significant association and another of borderline significance both associations suggest modest to strong associations yet despite the magnitude of these associations the lack of precision associated with these estimates provides little evidence regarding the true strength of the association should it truly exist not all of the eligible cases or controls opted to participate with respect to age or race between those who did and did not choose to participate and we have little reason to suspect selection bias with respect to the primary risk factor of interest information on viagra and cialis was obtained via telephone interview given recent media attention regarding a possible link between viagra and this issue reached the mainstream media therefore we do not believe bias explains the observed results we also have no reason to believe that any bias associated with failure to accurately recall or report the use of viagra or cialis is differential many of the existing case reports and series regarding viagra or cialis and naion have been able to isolate the exact timing of use relative to the onset of naion with this degree of precision difficult however when defining the primary exposure variable that is viagra and or cialis use we were able to define as exposed only those subjects who reported using viagra and or cialis before naion diagnosis this allowed us to minimise misclassification by limiting the definition of exposed to aetiologically relevant medication wherein such issues of temporality would be more easily addressed this is the first study to investigate the association between viagra and cialis and naion therefore placing the results in context is difficult the only evidence regarding this relation is in the form of case reports and series that by their nature do not explicitly test whether such an association might exist cases of naion that occurred shortly after viagra of interest is the fact that eight of these patients had a history of hypertension and six had history of elevated lipids only two had a history of coronary artery disease or myocardial infarction this provides support albeit indirect that should an association exist between viagra and naion it may be vascular insufficiency at the optic nerve head this insufficiency and the resulting ischaemia may be more frequent in those with certain anatomical characteristics viagra and cialis may cause damage to the optic nerve head via its ability to increase nitric oxide levels that in turn cause reduced perfusion however this does not insight regarding this issue can be gleaned from the fact that certain chronic medical conditions such as hypertension diabetes heart disease are thought to be risk factors for optic nerve head vascular therefore individuals with these conditions or specifically the pharmacological treatments for these conditions who may already be at increased risk of naion may have their issued a statement regarding reports of patients experiencing a sudden loss of vision attributed to naion after taking viagra cialis and this statement is clear that no link has been established between these medications and the occurrence of naion however it advises patients to stop taking these medicines and call a doctor or healthcare provider right away taking these products should inform their health care professionals if they have ever had severe loss of vision which might reflect a prior episode of naion such patients are at an increased risk of developing naion again similarly recent publications have suggested that ophthalmologists ask all men with naion about the use of sildenafil and that patients given the results of the current study patients with a history of myocardial infarction or hypertension who are prescribed viagra or cialis should be warned about the elevated risk of naion associated with the use of these medications though naion is a rare condition the large number of men using viagra or cialis suggests that should an association truly exist the incidence of naion could rise dramatically for laser beam propagation on km urbanized path an experiment of laser propagation was carried out at the urban terrain range of km during the period of march to may of the received intensity scintillations and atmosphere turbulence strength in complex urban atmosphere circumstance were simultaneously measured concentratively the results show the statistical characteristics of irradiance scintillation and atmosphere and link fade margin for urban free space optical links in recent years free space optical communication has been grew interest in the telecommunication community in the former case the fso is mainly considered for last mile links in urban areas where the deployment of fiber optics is more expensive and takes far more time for installation additional benefits ranging from lack of io frequency links make fso particularly however the fso performance can be seriously degraded by the cantonal atmospheric turbulence the experimental and theorical studies on atmospheric scintillation have been with purposes of filling gaps in the atmospheric propagation theory thus a few measurements have implemented at densely urban terrain the experiments were carried out of the received intensity scintillations and angle of arrival the experimental setup is shown in fig the path travels over a densely urban area and lies approximately above street level the transmitter is a single mode solid laser at gm with output power of mw the beam passes through a beam expander and mrad beam divergence the receiver antenna is a transmission telescope system in which diameter of receiving aperture is cm multiple of
presaged more of the same was unclear although nothing was said about in coker a type worry about the historically disproportionate use of the death penalty to punish black men for raping white women almost certainly motivated the court s moreover there are important strains of type review in the decision justice white s plurality opinion and especially justice powell s concurring opinion contain passages suggesting that it was only because coker s victim death was disproportionate the constitutionality of the death penalty for aggravated rape of a child was left coker was an easy case for another reason given how infrequent capricious and racially skewed death sentences for rape were they replicated all three of the competing views of the problem identified in the court s other significant decision of the period lockett to die for her role as a reluctant getaway driver in an armed robbery ending in an apparently unplanned her case addressed the constitutionality of a statute that restricted the mitigating factors the jury could consider ohio s statute did not treat as mitigating the defendant s limited mental functioning her modest role in the robbery or the fact that the ringleader of the robbery ohio were not required in all cases of aggravated murder its statute did not violate the first two of the july cases reasons for rejecting mandatory capital sentences history and a fear of unguided nullification ohio s limitation on the mitigating factors juries could consider did however implicate the july cases third rationale that individualization is necessary to assure an especially reliable determination that the punishment particular crime and criminal a statute that prevents the sentencer in all capital cases from giving independent mitigating weight to aspects of the defendant s character and record and to circumstances of the offense proffered in mitigation creates the risk that the death penalty will be imposed in spite of factors which may call for a less severe penalty when the choice is between life and death that risk is lockett made explicit three conclusions implicit in the mandatory death penalty cases first although death is not a per se unconstitutional sentence for aggravated murder neither is it per se constitutional rather for some but not all death eligible murders death is an unconstitutionally disproportionate sentence second disproportionality depends on the extent to which all of the aggravating circumstances of the state law are neutralized by all of the mitigating circumstances in the case at some point aggravation net of mitigation is low enough that the defendant has a constitutional right to a penalty less severe than third even a high risk of disproportionate death sentencing violates the the majority s decision to limit death sentences to a small number of wart stevens view that the constitution requires states to narrow death as divisive as the majority s conclusion was its method of enforcing the conclusion was unobtrusive the court did not undertake a systematic type analysis of ohio s sentencing pattern for murder and strike down the state s statute because death sentences did not congregate near the aggravated core nor did the court strike down sandra lockett s death sentence because a type case specific the aggravating and mitigating factors located her case too far away from the aggravated core of the capital circle instead the court imposed an type procedural requirement capital sentencers must be permitted to hear and consider evidence of any aspect of a defendant s character or record and any of the circumstances of the offense that the defendant proffers as a basis for a sentence less than this approach invalidated the ohio statute but only on the easily that it was procedurally flawed for lack of a mechanism for considering the full range of available mitigating evidence the lockett majority did not explain why it chose this form of review but whether ingeniously or accidentally the approach had a dramatic effect on the way constitutional decisions would thereafter be made in capital cases lockett turned every capital sentencing judge or jury into a determining whether the punishment of death was deserved under state criminal law with a new responsibility for determining whether the punishment of death was appropriate under federal constitutional law by assuring that death was proportionate to the amount of aggravation remaining after being discounted by available mitigation in place of the categorical type judgment the court evidently was deliberate murders the lockett majority concluded that the substantive constitutional question of the death penalty s proportionality had to be adjudicated on a type basis in each case the answer had to turn on an analysis of aggravation net of mitigation and states had to structure the penalty phase of capital trials so the verdict the jury reached embodied that type constitutional proportionality decision in each system of radically decentralized constitutional decision making via any mechanism other than type examination of penalty phase procedures would the court as in furman periodically conduct type constitutional review of the patterns of death sentences these miniconstitutional tribunals were generating to see if they conformed to the constitutional narrowing requirement or on the other hand revealed an core or still more intrusively would the court conduct its own d type constitutional review of the proportionality of particular capital verdicts the question then was whether the court would match its divisive substantive conclusions about which death sentences are constitutionally proportionate with similarly controversial modes of review taking on responsibility vigorously substantive inquiries of the categorical systematic and case specific constitutionality of death verdicts to determine the constitutional adequacy of the states specialized procedures for imposing death and to decide whether standard guilt phase constitutional protections had to be extended to the capital penalty phase the court thus suggested that the tough procedural requirements required were a prelude and aid to not a substitute for the court s own substantive review of capital outcomes and the court indeed began conducting its own substantive review in godfrey georgia the court reviewed a death sentence based
that arose either material or ideological to specific decontextualized propositions we argue that the meaning of any one issue was dependent upon its position relative to other issues in the overall sequence of questions consequently each decision changed the meaning of future issues and hence how actors understood where their commonalities of interest lay devoted to the task of rebuilding the institutions that constituted the national state delegates explicitly reshaped the board on which the understood where their commonalities of interest lay devoted to the task of rebuilding the institutions that constituted the national state delegates explicitly reshaped the board on which the political game would be played such that patterns of action within the convention had implications for patterns of action outside of the convention as each subsequent decision within the convention fixed a previous point of contention it also indirectly determined which issues would become viable conflict in the future by the end of the convention even before the first presidential election state delegations began to arrange themselves in a manner consonant with the outlines of the first party system this previously unrecognized finding only makes sense however in terms of a temporally contextualized model of political action most studies of political action examine relatively settled times actors may be in heated conflict yet the rules of how this conflict will by and large not open to question even powerful elites find their actions channeled by the structure of government organizations and by existing political divisions in some cases however the political structure that will guide future political action is created or altered through nothing other than political action itself rather than observing settled action we then have the opportunity to observe in the most extreme form we may find political actors grafting a new government structure and thereby forming a new state in this article we examine one of the most consequential moments of such concerted state formation the constitutional convention of that decided upon the basic political structure of the united states of america and attempt to explain patterns of voting by state delegations perhaps because the national level government of the united states was until the turn of the twentieth century sociologists have paid little attention to the constitutional convention as an instance of state formation historians and political scientists however have produced a substantial body of literature on the constitution most of which turns on questions of the nature of political action beginning with a heated debate over whether the constitution was the result of material interest or ideological principle and perhaps ending with a recognition that both were operating simultaneously this however overlooks the temporal dynamics of political action calvin jillson has suggested that the relative influence of material and ideological motivations was sequentially determined more specifically jillson argued different types of issues tapped into different types of motivations because debates shifted from one type of question to another it is possible to observe marked shifts in alliance structures across time this according to jillson is a reflection of a systematic oscillation between materially and ideologically motivated behaviors in light of existing accounts we do two things first we develop an alternative model of political action that can better account for the influence of second in order to demonstrate the viability of our theoretical model we argue for a methodological approach that more clearly demonstrates changes in the structure of interdelegation alignments across time it is only by virtue of the latter that we are able to empirically observe the seldom appreciated connection between state and party formation and it is only by virtue of the former that we are able to make sense of this relationship while we are sympathetic to the one explains a delegate s actions by imagining that the implications of any motion have only to do with the content of the motion and the preferences of the delegate the question then becomes which set of preferences matter and when we argue that this model is fundamentally inadequate because a consequential action in the convention was consequential not in terms of its immediate payoff but in terms of its implications for future actions fundamentally inadequate because a consequential action in the convention was consequential not in terms of its immediate payoff but in terms of its implications for future actions rather than treating all interests as fixed and linking issues to interests we find that the meaning of any one issue what it implied for alignments and oppositions between actors was conditional on how previous questions had been decided to some extent our is then fairly straightforward we provide an updated model of political action that is sensitive to temporal context and is thus better suited to interpret the types of cross time changes noted by jillson like a number of previous researchers we use formal methods to analyze the data on all votes our approach however remedies two significant methodological limitations in prior work first while narrative historians have stressed the importance of changing state time scholars using formal methods have tended to analyze all votes in the aggregate obscuring possible changes second where formal methods were used to address the issue of change over time changes in alignments were treated as the result of changes in the nature of the votes thus assuming a temporal invariance of the meaning of the issues any change in alignments between actors is a changes in the types of motions they were considering in contrast we follow changing patterns of alignment between states over time without making such assumptions more specifically we break the convention up into five periods and use multidimensional scaling to determine the logic of alignments and oppositions we find that decisions concerning the future structure of the federal government led to interpretable changes in the state delegations as some issues were settled provisional alignments over these issues fell apart thus at the very end of the convention the interest constellations within the convention were similar to those
placed on the table figure shows one example a mock up camera that is used to create a scene of interior layout simulation on the table when position and orientation of the mock up camera are recognized the system creates a vrml model of the scene and the scene appears on the wall screen computer with a cybercode tag on the augmented table then a camera mounted above the table recognize the notebook pc s id and the position on the table this recognition enables seamless information exchange between the notebook pc and the table as shown in figure the user can manipulate a cursor of the notebook pc across the boundary of computers the user can grab an object on physical objects when a notebook pc with an attached cybercode tag is recognized the system makes an ad hoc network connection between the pc and the table the table surface thereby becomes an extended workspace for the notebook pc for example a user can drag an item on the notebook pc and transfer it to the table to by moving the cursor across the boundary between can be extended into the physical space to enable these examples resolution of consumer level video cameras are not enough for cover the entire table surface we use the combination of two cameras for virtually achieving higher resolution of wider viewing area the first camera is a fixed camera that is always looking at the entire table surface this camera detects changes on the table by analyzing the difference between two consecutive video images it determines which area has been changed and sends an area changed sign to the second camera which is a computer controlled pan tilt camera that can zoom in on the changed area implementation in this section we describe the internal details of the augmented reality applications described in the previous section the cybercode recognition algorithm consists of two parts on that recognizes the id of a tag and one that determines the the cybercode tag id is recognized in the following five steps binarizing the image we are using an adaptive binarization method selecting the connected regions that have a specific second order moment these regions become candidate guide bars for the tag searching for the four corners of the marker region using the bitmap pattern in the tag using the positions of the corners of the marker the system estimates and compensates for the distortion effect caused by camera object tilting decoding the code bit pattern after checking for the error bits the system determines whether or not the image contains a correct cybercode position reconstruction algorithm the image plane it is possible to calculate a matrix representing the translation and rotation of the camera in a real world coordinate system we use the four corners of the cybercode tag as these reference points to ensure that the estimated coordinate system orthogonal the algorithm also minimizes the following constraint during estimation by using which is a vector normal to the matrix code plane we can replace with the above equation min we use the downhill simplex method to estimate the that minimizes once is calculated we can use it to recalculate vectors a point in the real world corresponds to the point where dist is the distance from the camera center to the center of the matrix code is a vector from the camera center to the center of the matrix code on the image plane and is a normalization function once the transformation matrix is known it is easy to overlay spatially correct annotation information and computer graphics on the real world video images it is also used to find a workstation class computer using two part cybercode recognition algorithm can recognize the code in real time a rate making feasible several of the composition applications described in the previous section on mobile pcs most of the processing time is devoted to simply transferring the video data to the memory and more than the half of the actual image processing time is consumed in labeling connected regions of pixels this implies that performance could be greatly improved by using a computer vision hardware a set of java classes to control cameras and cybercode recognition engine using java native method invocation mechanism these classes wrap low level image processing code and free application programmers from having to deal with the details of image processing many of the systems described in the applications section have been developed there are other possibilities than visual tagging system radio frequency tags are becoming popular and do not require line of sight detection these tags are not printable however so they cannot be used with paper documents table summarizes the features of various tagging technologies ean for product numbers and isbn for publishing thus if an application should handle a large number of existing products it would be better off using a barcode than a more exotic tagging technology for example we have developed a bulletin board system based on product barcodes this system called the thingsboard allows users to open a corresponding bulletin board of the hand held device with a barcode reader for retrieving price information from actual products a drawback of these alternatives however is that they require special reader devices in addition since these readers normally can only provide id information applications that need position information such as those illustrated in figures and should also use another sensing device cybercode movies we think this is an advantage for a tagging system using mobile devices which are subject to severe size and weight constraints some barcode readers emit a laser beam so that they can read codes that are not close to the reader this however makes difficult to use these devices in home environments visibility and social acceptance are other issues a system and a barcode makes a rather industrial impressions on users so it might not be suitable for consumer or home applications cybercode is between the two and some users recognize it as a real world icon
is not surprisingly a distinct characteristic of the coastal area as is the use of vegetable matter crushed stone in particular quartz was on the contrary used mainly in the river area at the coast this form of tempering became dominant only in the course to temper the clay wall decoration in the form of vertical lines was common at all the sites in the river area but rare at the coast a third distinguishing feature in the east is a rough outer wall created by smearing lumps of clay over it such pots with a turned down rim are related to the vorratsgefasse of the michelsberg culture in addition hazendonk assemblages in the river area comprise thin walled smooth or polished bowls and dishes of inspiration is still unclear the carinated profiles resemble those of the grimston bowls in england so the typological relations are more complex than a simple hazendonk michelsberg gradient the interregional differences show that the delfland potters had a certain independent status that allowed them to make their own technical and stylistic choices within a general earthenware differ only little from one another the rijswijk assemblage has a conspicuously low percentage of decoration whereas schipluiden stands out for the use of line decoration such differences may reflect limited contacts with the east differentiated according to site this pottery style is combined with a bipartite flint tradition in addition to a simple flake occupants used a toolkit made of flint imported from a distant source that bears a close resemblance to the toolkit of the michelsberg culture comprising triangular points spitzklinge sturdy scrapers and borers these tools were used for specific tasks in particular harvesting cereal making fire and manufacturing beads they had a special meaning for the people we also see the production of the first flint axes there do not seem to be any between the sites implying that the occupants all had access to the flint sources in the chalk zone in the south of the province of limburg hainault and pas de calais this imported flint amounted to between and a of the total amount of flint used the scores for the different sources vary quite a bit from one site to another which could mean that each local group had its own contact area though it should be added that it the different types of flint at all the sites and also at hazendonk the main types of stone used were sandstone quartz and quartzites whose sources are hard to identify the percentages of igneous and metamorphic rocks were remarkably high at schipluiden and ypenburg and differ very little from one another in the worked stone finds noteworthy finds are small nodules of pyrite which like one of the flint along the coastal cliffs of boulogne sur mer where they are still to be found today an alternative is a source in the ardennes jet and amber beads were made in delfland jet bead blanks found at schipluiden and wateringen show that the beads were produced at the sites themselves implying an innovation no such beads are known from the late mesolithic anywhere in the netherlands including hardinxveld but they are known from the swifterbant jet was relatively prominently represented at schipluiden amber at ypenburg in particular in the burials and this is an important difference between these two sites like the pyrite and one of the flint types the jet probably came from the coast near boulogne sur mer or it may have been washed up on beaches further north small pieces of amber could probably be picked up along the north sea beach to the north of delfland in several directions to obtain materials that were not to be found in their own region with the east specifically for stone with the chalk areas in the south of belgium for high quality flint and with the coast of pas de calais also for pyrite and jet on the one hand this indicates continuation of the lines of contact that had existed for more than two thousand years ever since the late mesolithic on the other the individual local hazendonk communities of delfland seem have had contacts with different areas a retrospective the above was an exercise to break the common archaeological custom of defining monolithic cultures bottom up with the sites being taken as the constituent elements by instead approaching things from the opposite direction and searching for differences between sites that resemble one another in many other respects in age and culture in landscape setting and function in order to obtain an understanding of the action of the local communities this we have been able to do thanks to the high quality of the evidence obtained in delfland the aspects that the individual sites have in common reflect the structure of the regional society while the differences between the sites show the local communities practices the choices they made to suit their needs in structural terms the community coincided with the transition from the mesolithic to the phase a period of change that covered a long time many centuries in the low countries those changes are clearly observable in many aspects of the society the individual contemporary sites which had all reached the same stage in the neolithization process however differ from one another in important social aspects the differences being quite substantial in some cases to a point the people followed their own course in the neolithization process the settlements vary from collective and site bound to mobile and open as far as subsistence is concerned one group had by this stage abandoned hunting and fishing and in the other we observe site bound preferences not so much in the basic subsistence system as in the hunting of fur bearing animals and birds and in fishing widely differing choices were made in the treatment of the dead too other social aspects show more subtle differences in particular sources of uncommon mineral raw materials an approach as adopted
techniques that are almost entirely in the latter regard the court noted that future dangerousness predictions were a prominent and explicitly approved feature of the texas statute it had upheld on its face in the july cases albeit in a case in which no expert testimony had been stephens the next two spring cases zant v stephens and barclay v florida also rejected e type capital specific constraints on aggravating factors stephens is particularly interesting because of its multiple possible meanings and transitional position between the court s expansive late decisions and the more buttoned down cases to come in stephens the georgia supreme court had ruled a statutory aggravating and it was permissible for the jury to consider the prior crimes evidence used to establish the vague factor as a nonstatutorily enumerated basis for a death sentence on certified question from the supreme court the georgia supreme court for the first time explained what was required to obtain a death sentence in georgia to justify death crimes had to cross three planes plane established by statutory aggravating factor and plane established by the jury in each case in its absolute discretion after hearing all the evidence in support of all aggravating and mitigating factors and deciding whether the evidence was sufficient to warrant georgia did not constrain the jury s plane discretion to impose although one might assume that in default of any other suggestion jurors would instinctively balance aggravation and mitigation and condemn prisoners only when aggravation was greater the georgia scheme created a risk that different juries would decide that question using the schema developed once malice murder moved a crime onto the circumference of the capital circle and a statutory aggravating factor had total discretion to impose death based on all the aggravation and mitigation absent any instructions about where within the circle the case had to be to justify a capital verdict the statute created a higher risk of death sentences outside the aggravated core than eddings and the enmund concurrence would seem to allow the risk the court was prepared to tolerate is highlighted by its rejection street reversed a conviction that because of unclear instructions a jury may have premised on conduct protected by the first amendment the court held the risk to first amendment values too great to permit the state court s affirmance of the conviction after concluding that the jury had probably found street guilty of only unpro tected conduct a retrial before a properly charged jury was required to avoid that noting how reliable woodson and lockett required to be stephens argued that the trial court s instruction to consider the invalid substantial history of assaultive behavior factor created a similarly intolerable risk that his crime was pushed across plane by the imprimatur the jury thought the statute gave to the invalid factor although acknowledging that the invalid instruction may have led the jury to give somewhat greater weight to stephens s prior criminal declining to take the type bait the court limited street to first amendment cases and accepted the georgia supreme court s view that the risk that the sentence was tainted by the invalid instruction was the court premised this conclusion on the georgia high court s assurance of specialized comparative review of sentencing patterns in factually similar offenses to avoid arbitrariness and to assure as newly interpreted by its high court in response to the supreme court s certified question ran afoul of furman itself georgia s new interpretation of its statute presented an especially difficult case under furman because of the state s unusually expansive definition of capital murder in georgia any malice murder was sufficient to cross plane in contrast virtually all other states defined first degree murder to require not only malice but also a killing in connection with a serious felony in georgia an accompanying serious felony was a statutory aggravating factor that moved the case across plane in this way georgia very nearly replicated the prevailing pre furman approach to death sentencing absolute life or death discretion upon a finding of what in most other states constituted only bare first degree felony murder the only differences between the modal statutes struck down in rgia s statute were that georgia bifurcated the guilt and sentencing trials and required the state high court to conduct comparative proportionality review on direct appeal because some of the discretionary statutes struck down in furman had likewise bifurcated the guilt and penalty the latter difference seemed to be the crucial one the supreme court rejected stephens s type challenge to procedures at the time of furman passing up a case specific explanation based on the aggravated nature of stephens s own the court focused on two features of georgia s scheme that the jury was required to find at least one valid statutory aggravating circumstance and that the state supreme court reviewed the record of every death penalty proceeding to determine whether the sentence was in the first regard the court emphasized the fundamental requirement that each statutory aggravating circumstance genuinely narrow the class of persons eligible for the death penalty and promised to invalidate allegedly aggravating behavior that is constitutionally protected irrelevant or as is noted above however stephens itself gave the narrowing requirement short shrift by permitting georgia factor that in virtually every other state was an element of death eligible murder itself in other words the court let georgia use a factor to place crimes inside the capital circle that in virtually all other states sufficed only to get the crime to the again therefore the single saving attribute of georgia s post furman statute was the obligation it gave the state supreme court to conduct back to and extended woodson s and lockett s radical de centralization of constitutional except that here state high courts not juries became surrogate constitutional decision makers this feature helps explain why justice stevens joined and wrote the decision in stephens though it validated a statute that required less narrowing than his less is better approach would
starting inverse basis basis for each new country to be tackled although a very large part of this work was completed george morton became interested in other topics and no publication ensued at the same time as working as a research assistant ailsa was also registered as a research student under george morton s supervision and worked on her phd project coke ovens both within the publicly owned british national coal board she was also becoming acquainted with but not yet having any access to electronic computers as her husband frank land was one of the early programmers with the lyons leo computer asmall group at lse was becoming interested in the obvious extension of lp to problems where the variables were to be restricted to integer or discrete values they had perceived and worked on the delivery problem called the laundry van problem until they discovered that the laundry van problem until they discovered that it had already been given a name the travelling salesman problem the ferranti company organized a symposium in london on lp run by dr prinz it was in connection with this conference that george morton and ailsa visited steven vajda at the admiralty and met also his assistant martin beale starting a continuing friendship and collaboration extending over many years alison doig an australian on her her travelling year became a research assistant at lse producing a bibliography of statistics with professor kendall but her master s project in melbourne had been on solving a practical paper trim problem so she was another at lse interested in lp and ilp branch and bound at the same time the bp oil company was busy developing computer lp models of refinery model and was now responsible for developing computer models in their london headquarters the team there included paula harris who later published some powerful simplex variants an obviously desirable development of refinery models was to build in to the model the shipment between crude sources refineries storage over time etc taking into account the minor complication of the discrete restrictions due to ship sizes storage tanks etc bp contracted to pay the salaries of alison doig and ailsa for salaries of alison doig and ailsa for one year to investigate this problem they soon realized that the project was beyond them unless and until one had a method of solving an lp model with discrete variables with the permission of bp they spent most of their time developing and testing what was subsequently described as branch and bb they were thinking in terms of the development of a computer algorithm but had in fact to simulate the procedure on desk calculators since they had no access to computers at that time ralph gomory had presented a very different method for solving ilp problems and dantzig published a paper on the significance of ilp in the may issue of econometrica their method appeared in the their method appeared in the following issue of econometrica cutting planes time passed alison doig became a lecturer in statistics at lse and eventually returned to australia ailsa became a lecturer at lse learned to program in fortran and to reproduce on lse s first computer an ibm the simplex drill learned on the diet problem susan powell was on one of the earliest in or at lse and then joined the transport network theory unit at lse she became a research officer and phd student and we began a collaboration in research and teaching that continues even since ailsa s retirement while branch and bound began to be built into computer codes the cutting plane approach was obviously more elegant and we spent a great deal of time experimenting with it as this effort we produced a lot of code for both bb and cutting planes which we published for use by other experimenters despite the elegance of the cutting plane approach the sad fact is that an accumulation of cutting planes on anything but a tiny problem inevitably leads to increasingly ill conditioned matrices and a failure to reach a solution it is disingenuous of balas making the comment that the literature of computational experience of cutting planes is scant to imply cutting planes is scant to imply that there was not a lot of work done in this area work was done but it was not published because as a method to solve problems branch and bound resoundingly won it is gratifying that the combination branch and cut is now often successful in dealing with real problems nato in for a nato advanced research institute we surveyed the computer codes both of the commercial code owners were willing to discuss their codes and some were even willing to run some test problems for us we found it very difficult to discover at that time anything about actual usage of the codes in retrospect given the lack of reporting on integer models in we are surprised that we were able to find any live integer models this observation supports martin beale s comment that integer programming was a loss leader for sciconic the mathematical programming system developed by scicon ltd system developed by scicon ltd ilp in practice survey in order to assess the change of usage of ilp models in operational practice we have conducted a small survey of the published literature we have taken three single volumes of interfaces and examined any project described therein that uses ilp the volumes we chose are and thereby spanning the years since our survey land and powell of course we recognize that these provide only very small very small samples and furthermore that they are biased samples in the sense that projects which failed for one reason or another are not likely to be published in interfaces we are interested in which of the tools are used in these projects what software and computing facilities are used and whether models are solved to optimality many of the authors of the
nuclear families of matrilocally married daughters junior families split from the larger joint family as their age eventually daughters in the newly formed household will attract husbands and a new joint family will be produced all households whether joint or stem have their own gardens which supply all daily calories the balance is supplied by hunted gathered and fished resources less than five percent of food consumed is non locally produced two published studies deal quantitatively with the exchange of services but not resources garden labor exchange among the ye kwana in the creation of gardens land is cleared jointly by groups of men on a serial basis the tasks of weeding planting and harvesting are cooperatively performed by groups of women for men all garden labor was allocated to gardens other than their own whereas for women it was garden labor exchange was significantly correlated with household higher frequencies of exchange than distantly related households in addition closely related households had greater imbalances of exchange than distantly related households which tended to have more balanced exchange relationships another study examined all parental care of infants and toddlers and found that the amount of time a woman spent caring a child was determined by her relatedness to the child as will be demonstrated below relatedness despite its documented importance in garden labor exchange and childcare is not a significant factor in meal sharing methods quantitative studies have measured food transfers in several ways the first involves the direct observation of weighed food portions a second method pioneered by kaplan and colleagues involves the use of instantaneous scan sampling whenever a person is observed eating the researcher notes the item consumed and asks the consumer who provided the food from such records the analyst can calculate the frequency that individuals were observed consuming foods given to them by other individuals or households finally other researchers use a variety of interview protocols in which receiving households are asked to rank the frequency with which other households or individuals in a settlement transferred food resources to them the method used to document food transfers in this study is a variant of the scan on economic and other behaviors hames noted the date time and location as well as the individual s behavior in the data set used here each record was a locationally differentiated observation of a person consuming an item of food when an individual was observed eating in a household other than his or her own this instance was scored as meal sharing with these data we produced a series of matrices quantifying the number of times members of different families were observed eating in their own or in one of the seven other households in the village if three members of a particular household were observed eating in another household this was counted as three observations of meal sharing this method is identical to the one used to measure garden labor exchange among the ye kwana there hames noted the number of times an individual worked in his own household s gardens compared with other household s gardens a benefit to them at some cost to members of the host household one could argue that this is not always the case if the guest had provided the host with food however the ye kwana do not bring food to other households and they expect to be fed immediately upon arrival we know from experience that guests were occasionally fed meals based in part on resources they had previously donated to the household its food resources and independently decides whom to provide with meals in nearly all cases guests were invited for the express purpose of sharing a meal and they were not fed simply because they happened to visit this method underestimates the actual intensity of sharing because food transferred to a household and consumed only by household members is not measured table intensity of meal sharing among households frequency of shared and unshared meals by resource type statistical description of ye kwana meal sharing the data presented here come from behavioral observations on residents of the ye kwana village of toki collected in over a month period a subset of these data on meal sharing were then analyzed by mccabe the entire behavioral and locational data base on the ye kwana is available on line the database can be queried on line though an interface developed by mccabe and many of the analyses presented here can be replicated a total of behavioral observations were made on ye kwana residents of toki of these were eating observations the distribution of meal types is presented in table less than all meals consumed were of store bought foods characterization of what the individual was eating at the instant they were observed is a bit problematic when recording the data hames used a variety of rules to determine the kind of meal consumed if someone was placing or about to place food in their mouth it was easy to code the general type of food if the person was pausing or conversing during the meal then the predominant food in the s hand in his eating utensil or in a serving basket was recorded in actuality most ye kwana meals consist of a several foods and casabe as mentioned above is by far the most common denominator in all meals there are a number of different ways to describe the flow of resources or services between households they have been defined as intensity scope and balance general giving intensity measures proportion of a household s total food budget that is contributed by all other households in a sense it is a measure of subsidy from the entire settlement specific giving intensity is the amount or proportion of meals given to a household from those who do not live in the household where the eating event occurred therefore specific intensity measures how much a household gave to or
categories of smiling therefore only the felt smile as defined by ekman and friesen was considered similar to the facs is the microanalysis of nonverbal behavior completed by davis and hadiks this multistage system is designed to reveal complicated represents a dilemma within deception and detection of deception research although the thorough analysis of an individual s behavior seems to be a challenging step within the arena of deception research these methods do not seem applicable in face to face interactions when an individual wishes to assess credibility of his or her counterpart immediately these microanalyses are only possible by using sophisticated technical equipment and investing very much time a conclusion therefore they are less suitable to meeting the goal of identifying reliable deception cues to train professionals whose work depends on assessing credibility on the spot perhaps the renewed emphasis on analyzing the very content of lies with more objective methods may be more promising in the long run research consumers should be warned however to pay attention only to those studies that demonstrate that their methods can be applied route on the many stony paths to truth people as resources recruitment and reciprocity in the freedom promoting approach to property abstract theorists usually explain and evaluate property regimes either through the lens of economics or by conceptions of personhood this article argues that the two approaches are intertwined in a way that is and recognizes and protects aspects of personhood it must do both because human beings are both resources for one another and the persons whose moral importance the legal system seeks to protect this article explores how property law has addressed this paradox in the past and how it might in the future two bodies of nineteenth century law highlighted this paradox the era the law struggled over how to balance recognition of laborers bodies as resources with regard for them as legal persons these jurisprudential problems tracked contemporary debates in political and economic thought about the nature of property in human beings both the legal debates and their broader counterparts responded to the underlying problem of designating a boundary between those respects in which people are to be regarded as resources and those in which their first disputes over this boundary are disputes over both claims on resources and the moral importance of human beings this analysis illuminates the stakes of two contemporary issues voluntary peer production in digital media and the entrance of women in developing countries into the paid workforce both demonstrate how legal technological and social changes in people s status as resources interact with changes in how they do or may value one are in the direction of greater reciprocity they may help to produce a more robust conception of personhood and a more egalitarian and attractive social life introduction how should we think about the law of property the law that distributes claims on the useful beautiful and pleasurable things in the world should we try to understand how it makes us rich and ask how it could make us even richer should we explore how it makes us change those identities or should we ask how it makes us free and how it could make us even freer i take the last approach choosing that approach raises several questions which this article addresses first setting out the freedom promoting approach requires explaining its relationship to other approaches particularly the ones concentrating on property s economic advantages and its connection which property regimes can advance them second the freedom promoting approach needs a working definition of freedom a multifarious concept that is a challenge to make analytically tractable third it needs an account of what property systems do that shows how promoting freedom is not just an attractive idea in general but an apt account of the activity of these legal regimes in particular with some current debates in property reform and here i take on the challenges i have just listed i show how property regimes in some of their central operations confront the fact that people are at once bearers of personhood and economic resources for one another neither the economic nor the personhood approach takes full account of this fact which spans and confounds their respective concerns by exploring political history i develop a description of property that takes account of both features of human beings i argue that property regimes come closest to reconciling these conflicting qualities when they maximize reciprocity among persons which makes it necessary to take others personhood into account even when seeking to treat them as resources for one s own purposes i argue further that a theory of regimes two approaches to understanding property regimes have dominated legal scholarship for decades the first the economic approach understands the function of property regimes as being the allocation of resources from this point of view property rights respond to certain basic facts about the social world people need resources from air water and land to technology ideas and the things that people want to control many of these resources are scarce not in the sense of being rare but in that there is competition over them that is they are not so abundant as to be effectively nonrivalrous these facts underlie the great gains to social coordination and productivity that property rights produce these benefits are conventionally designated as gains to static and dynamic efficiency static efficiency aligns the present allocation desire backed by purchasing power clear property rights enable potential purchasers to identify the present owners of resources they believe they desire and to trade around until all resources are in the hands of those who most value them dynamic efficiency maximizes the productivity of resources over time owners are assured of being able to capture the increase in value from the improvements they make and thus into fields sand into silicon chips and words into sonnets and the description of property as the law of resources has been important
new forms of visibilities of what was previously tangible but not represented in such a manner likewise the production of indicators accounts graphs text and pictures which seek to represent a corporation s impact on the natural environment creates new visibilities as does the use of the planet as viewed from space in ecological footprinting as that movement calls for a one planet economy all of these techniques a new visibility to risks impacts or events and in doing so create new possibilities for governing the associated actors and actions one could observe that the requirement for pension providers to report on whether or not they used an ethical screen on their investments created visibility about the practice of ethical investment of itself such a requirement for data would not create a regime of practices it does however form a part of a regime of governing and does so primarily via the creation of visibilities further these forms of visibility create and imply certain knowledge sets and this constitutes the second focus of the analytics of governance knowledge both forms and informs the act of governing and dean asks what forms of thought knowledge expertise strategies means of calculation or rationality governing create certain knowledge sets about states at a point in time activities which are taking place as well as outcomes from actions again csr reporting may be used to demonstrate this point corporate nonfinancial reporting provides knowledge about aspects of organizational life to the readers of those reports institutions for knowledge creation might include organizational committees management systems information gathering protocols and a firm in a similar manner stakeholder engagement processes have the possibility of creating knowledge for stakeholders with respect to organizations rationalities and priorities at the same time knowledge of the concerns preferences and motivations of stakeholders are generated from such processes in this way knowledge is created and flows in two directions furthermore external social audits and silent accounts create new sets of from a wide variety of perspectives these knowledge mechanisms also create new visibilities of impacts in this manner visibilities and knowledge sets are interdependent as they are with the third element of the analytics of government techniques and practices techniques and practices require consideration of the technical aspects of government by asking by what means mechanisms procedures instrument tactics techniques tech constituted and rule accomplished thus for example we see csr committees within organizations and board members with special responsibility for these matters there are job descriptions which include responsibilities for certain actions outcomes likewise although csr reporting creates visibilities the documents themselves have certain technical aspects to them although these mechanisms include technical elements they cannot be reduced to technical aspects alone rather techniques also create patterns of visibility and in turn will generate particular forms of knowledge of course the generation of knowledge and how particular forms of knowledge are more powerful than is a recurrent theme for foucault as the power of science to determine environmental knowledge this may be particularly pertinent when workers or communities have their own knowledge of health impacts which may sit in contrast to expert and or official knowledge of such things identity constitutes the final element in the regimes of governing framework and forms of individual and collective identity through which governing operates and which specific practices and programmes of government try to form examples abound in this area with respect to corporate activities and social environmental factors organizations often join green business networks and clubs as a way in which to affirm their identity as a good corporate citizen and to communicate that identity to others in some instances the identity is linked to certain actions which are measured in a particular manner membership of the index the dow jones sustainability index and participation in the business in corporate responsibility would be further examples of such identities dean notes that the four dimensions of government presuppose one another however they are not reducible to one another rather each element can be identified with the relationship between these elements also being crucial he also argues that transformations may take place along each or any of these axes and transformation along one axis may entail transformation in others may be useful to illustrate these points not only are organizations and individuals and their diverse forms of behavior subject to this regime of government products can also be understood in these terms there are a myriad of certification and assurance schemes which seek to label food and other products according to some criteria labels include organic produce fair trade goods sustainably harvested fish forestry products animal welfare friendly products and made from nonexploitative child labor these various schemes feed into the creation of an ethical consumer or an environmentally responsible consumer which is evidence in individual identities as well as collective identities in addition the presence of certification logos on products provides a visibility of the assurance process so that purchasers may know which products should be sitting behind the logos are extensive sets of technical practices which inter alia define what constitutes organic food detailed rules of when a farm can be certified organic and inspection processes to check that food reaches the specified standard with these technical aspects of government underlying consumer confidence in the credibility of the certification brand thus it mutually dependent and interlocking sets of characteristics around an area of government the goals of governance the final element of dean s notion of governmentality is that such activities have a strangely utopian element government is not only necessary but possible in the context of this paper governance which focuses on regulation of environmental such risks can be identified and controlled one underlying suggestion is that if processes of social learning based on new ways of working and new forms of technological know how could be encouraged then it would be possible to have more sustainable forms of development the world which would be
to be virtually ubiquitous within the consumer credit industry yet analysts of credit scoring present this not as a straightforward unhindered rational adoption by lenders on the contrary it is put forward as a narrative of the persuasive triumph of the unquestionable efficiency of risk presented as a straightforward quantitative superiority for example its discriminatory potential is estimated to be per cent better thus increasing the number of profitable customers accepted and decreasing the number of costly defaulters yet it is not only in elevated revenues and dampened costs that the use of risk is adjudged to prove its worth but in the wider efficiencies that it imparts to the lender s credit scoring is deemed transparent consistent uniform unbiased less labor intensive and automatable in addition it is time saving thus lowering the attrition levels of lost customers experienced while also providing a close calculable management control over lending policy yet scoring had not only to face the problem of effectively constituting individuals as risks it also had to gain the acceptance of the credit community in this account of the mercurial outsider statistical and operations research experts battled the regressive conservatism of lender managements historically wedded to judgmental decision making as the traditional means of sanctioning credit to convince them of the progressive for instance on the website of score modeller fair isaac noting milestones in the company s history one of the early events recorded in was when the company sends letter to the biggest american credit grantors asking for the opportunity to explain a new concept credit scoring only one replies yet that one reply from american investment corporation provided the humble of credit scoring but while a discourse of risk may have eventually triumphed over this managerial rear guardism to become the pre eminent means of conceptualizing consumers in relation to default the technologies through which risk itself is constituted are seen by experts to be subject to a permanent process of failure contestation and regeneration and the rivalrous claims of competing operational basis upon which scoring models are built and deployed is subject to a permanent reflexive analysis that seeks not to dissolve the framework of statistical scoring methods but on the contrary to improve their potential discriminatory power in practice by rendering more accurately the predictive risk determinations of particular cases of default that they attempt to formulate however failure is endemic to the government of assumption is one of indeterminism and irreducible stochasticity although certain regularities can be seen within the population the future actions of any one individual are not only not known but are inherently unknowable the effectiveness of a credit scoring model can thus be judged only macroscopically on how well it distinguishes at the level of the population of good and bad consumers yet a credit scoring model s efficacy at distinguishing these sub populations is seen itself to be subject to numerous risks which interfere in its effective constitution of default risk first methodological risks attach to specific techniques used in the particularly prone to analytical difficulties if the sample size is insufficient second procedural risks attach to the specific construction of a model most critical here also is seen to be the problem of sample bias a large creditor deploying a scoring model across a large cannot take into account regional economic characteristics and thus evident regional subpopulation differences therefore while the model may be predictive overall it records relatively inaccurate risk scores that is an inappropriate ranking for individuals between regions third temporal risks pose a threat to the integrity of a scoring model s risk of population drift the correlations calculated between variables used to make risk predictions are fixed within the model but change and alter over time in the real world of the population all these risks methodological in terms of the statistical technique to be a formulated credit scoring model to distinguish groups of good and bad borrowers deplete the accuracy of the risk assessment made at an individual level and degrade the efficiency of the lender at producing profit at any given threshold more costly defaulters will be accepted and more profitable consumers will be refused credit in response the experts who elucidate these risks simultaneously offer means for obviating them by formulating new accuracy establishing benchmarks for deriving representative samples detailing how multiple scorecards can be deployed to account for regional and population variations suggesting reject inference techniques to estimate the probabilistic fates of historically rejected consumers and advocating the implementation in association with lenders of practices of periodic model validation and revision therefore within credit is thus never taken for granted but must be constantly evaluated maintained and recreated in order to preserve the integrity and reliability of such constitution however in terms of the constitution of risk not only have statistical models been problematized but they have been challenged by alternative epistemologies that have found some application with the domain of consumer credit including decision tree and neural network systems nevertheless these competing alternatives do not engender a fundamental challenge to the discourse of risk around which the sanctioning systems of creditors are built in fact as gruenstein suggests any credit risk evaluation system is implicitly a statistical one each technology in practice seeks to know better the risk adhering to an individual applicant within the context of a population overall incidence of default endured by the creditor in essence the use of any one of these diverse techniques is assembled around the same ontological conception of what risk means although they differ by offering alternative avenues for knowing that risk they share a common objective which is to render it more accurately as an objectivized quality of the individual each too is concerned with the calculable effects of default not causes in every case default is as an inherent aspect of the group and individuals are persistently conceived as agglomerations of attributes that are historically probabilistically associated with a repayment outcome like more conventional statistical techniques
property would help him on his path to riches desirous to have a breed of negroes maverick compelled his male slave to have sex with the female will d she nill d she whether she wanted to or not and the story is clear maverick knew she did not want to he gave the orders to the slave man only after first seeing she would not yield by persuasions clearly he felt no shame about a woman to submit to rape since he himself told the story to josselyn a man he knew to be writing a report of his trip anyway even if she protested she was his property property that if forced to breed could make him money consider samuel maverick writing to john winthrop only two years after the rape concerned that a white female servant of his had acted inappropriately one ralfe greene and jonathan peirse each challinginge a promise of mariage from a maide servant left with me by mr babb beinge daughter unto a friend of his either of them desired my consent within a weeke one of the other but hearinge of the difference i gave consent to neither of them desiringe there might be an agreement first amongst themselves or by order from your worship the maide hath long tyme denied any promise made to was ever any contract made betwene them yett i once herd her say shee would have the said greene and desired my consent thereunto but it rather seems shee first promised peirse and still resolves to have him for her husband for the better clearinge of it i have sent all such of my peopell as can say any thinge to the premises and leave it to your wise determination conceivinge they all deserue a checke for theire manner of proceedinge i take leave and rest commaund samuel mavericke this is a different samuel maverick concerned about the propriety of a servant s engagement reluctant to let her commit to either man without a clearing of the matter such attention to details such obedience to custom did race make the difference in his consideration of sexual mores of course it did if ever there was a reminder of the inextricable linkage of gender and race here it is the seeming illogic of his varying degrees rational when maverick s ideological assumptions replace our his wife must have shared those beliefs responsible like most new england women for all domestic concerns it seems likely that mrs maverick would have had more contact than her husband with the slaves in their household had she ordered that the woman be raped had she suggested it did she know is it fair of me to wonder if she felt any sisterly bond with the woman under her roof her own quick second marriage suggests she may have seen relationships in practical terms on a frontier after all relatively few have time for romance that pragmatism may have expanded to include her slaves she must have understood her own marriage and her own status in the world at least partly in contrast to the position held by her slave women amias maverick could not be ordered to have sex with a man she was something different and so were her daughters and everyone on the island knew it thus is a social construction made real that reality was ugly imagine the first time the man came to perswade the woman to have sex with him perhaps he came under duress maverick after all held both their lives in his hands did the enslaved man understand his own safety to be contingent on his agreeing to harm the woman did they even speak the same language we know from josselyn s account that the woman refused even as she may have known that refusal was man suffered too having watched slavers abuse women in the same ways she had witnessed and experienced the slave man now found himself obligated perhaps against his conscience to use his own body to enact the same violence on an acquaintance resistance would have been pointless even had he run away maverick could have bought another slave to breed with the woman an impossible situation but maybe the man needed no threats and deserves no sympathy slavery could make impotent powerless if not literally certainly socially perhaps the man saw as irresistible the opportunity to reassert his masculinity no matter how low his race placed him in new england s power structure the woman s gender placed her a step lower still impregnating her may have seemed an excellent way to reassert the sense of self worth and autonomy his environment consistently denied him or maybe he was simply a violent man sold out of the west indies for the very made him willing to rape at his owner s request or maybe just maybe he thought making a child was resistance itself a thumb in the eye of a system determined to use africans until they died those questions can never be answered but even certainty about the man s motives would not change the outcome the woman was raped and she knew it was coming josselyn tells us that she had had her by force an extra form of torture the psychological before the physical enacting the future attack from memory in her mind before living it in reality even if she had been lucky enough to escape the experience herself she had undoubtedly seen and heard rapes of other women she knew what to expect in graphic detail alone scared isolated by race culture even language from those around her she had to wait the attack itself remains shadowy no amount of uncover that encounter i can only ask uncomfortable questions verging on prurience wondering how to reflect on the details of a rape without becoming what saidya hartman has cautioned us against a voyeur of pain and terror speaking of nineteenth century
pieces were substantially revised bruce wood in his edition of the ode for the purcell society did indeed identify some likely pindaric improvements places where the violin parts rise suspiciously high in comparison purcell s normal some bars of eccentric writing for second trumpet in the final a spurious bass line at the beginning of the day that such a blessing inconsistencies in repeats in the final problems with some individual notes and and of course the obviously eighteenth century figuring however he did not consider the possibility that might have added some of the instrumental parts himself and reworked aspects of the structure of some proof that pindar had tampered with the ode was provided in a recent article published by clare brown and peter holman in early music performer where they drew attention to a set of plates entitled fac similes of celebrated composers printed in concert room and orchestra anecdotes in by thomas busby a the plates seem to be lithographic reproductions of tracings from composers and include a short passage taken from come ye sons of art apparently copied from an autograph that is now lost both text and music hands are certainly convincing this brief extract is significant for a number of reasons not least because it raises the possibility that the source from which the plate was made may still survive most of purcell s autograph odes of the probably destroyed in the whitehall fire and the fact that at least part of this ode still existed in the early nineteenth century gives very real cause for hope unfortunately there is little evidence of what happened to the manuscript after brown and holman demonstrate that it probably belonged to the composer and antiquarian collector william shield at the time of busby s publication since most of the other extracts shield including two sources that still shield apparently left his library to his wife anne stokes shield at his death in and it is possible that the disposal of one of the extant manuscripts at a puttick and simpson auction on may resulted from her however as brown and holman note the catalogue for this sale does not suggest that it included other shield manuscripts and i have been unable to find evidence of a sale of shield s other surviving auction catalogues of the in any case shield seems to have given away many of his music manuscripts well before his death several were presented to vincent novello for example including the source for the extract from haydn s setting of dainty pl facsimile reproduced in thomas busby s concert room and orchestra anecdotes apparently traced from purcell s lost autograph of come ye sons of art reproduced by permission university of leeds davie in busby s facsimiles which is now in a private for the time being at least it seems that the trail begins and ends with shield despite the absence of the autograph itself busby s facsimile still provides one substantial clue about pindar s arrangement of the ode in lcm the extract shows the end of the the vocal entry is given for two undesignated instruments in clefs and one in clef in pindar s version however this introduction is copied on six staves for two oboes two violins viola and continuo and the section corresponding with the facsimile includes all these instruments busby s short fragment therefore provides conclusive proof that pindar did alter the instrumentation of come ye sons of art and sets us on the path to retrieving a version of the ode closer to the music purcell actually wrote to find further evidence of pindar s likely approach to come ye sons of art we need to look closely at the reworkings he made to the odes for which we do have authoritative sources pindar s arrangements the countertenor solo come ye sons of art lcm used by kind permission of the royal college of music these ceremonial pieces necessarily pindar s approach to each is slightly different as with the majority of purcell s early odes welcome to all the pleasures is written on a small scale and is scored for strings only whereas of old when heroes is purcell s first ode to use full baroque including two trumpets two oboes and two recorders as as the usual strings and continuo hail bright cecilia is his longest and most magnificent ode adding timpani to the scoring of the yorkshire feast clearly issues of scale are significant both in terms of the number of added instrumental parts and the overall length of the arrangements pindar expands welcome to all the pleasures through extra repetition and the fusion of solo or ensemble movements with their associated ritornelli but there are no such alterations made the two later odes despite these distinctions pindar s basic approach to reworking the odes relies on a relatively small number of techniques common to all three works which enable us to make judgements about his likely treatment of come ye sons of art his alterations fall into five main categories replacement of entire movements end of act iii of the indian from which he omits the trumpet part meaning that its missing independent entries in the canzona leave notable gaps in the texture there are two more significant observations to make about the substitution of this movement however first it was not because pindar s source lacked the original symphony that he replaced it the movement is repeated halfway through the yorkshire feast song and at this point in lcm pindar writes out the entire symphony from the ode virtually unaltered in relation to purcell s autograph second pindar obviously had access to a copy of at least some sections of the indian queen while he was copying lcm a fact that could be of some importance when we come to analyze the opening instrumental material for come ye sons of art scoring changes his additions affect choruses or instrumental sections
the fault as opposed to the top the likelihood of these small but deadly disasters increased on the central rand after the war once more stopes were cut with machinery and more outcrop mines reworked as deep level three of the largest mines on the rand in cinderella deep crown mines and east rand proprietary mines had originated as a series of smaller outcrop mines so had geldenhuis deep rose deep driefontein and durban deep mines that became notorious for their alarming number of accidents among african and white workers many deep level mines could not be opened by simply tracing the be hurled down an initial to foot vertical shaft without the certainty of ventilation or protection from underground water faulty cables and winding machines for elevators or the dangerous concentration of machinery at vulnerable spots contributed to the insecurity and of course there was the ever present danger of miners ph this is due to the accumulation of rock dust and lack of ventilation no near the randfontein estates in tube mills arrived at the gold mines on the heels of the indentured chinese workers in the mills concentrated chemically treated ore into a mud or sluice and sped it to the crushing machines by means of a metal tube thus raising the yield of gold per ton to as much as per cent in some cases re grinding and decantation of the mud in tubes as opposed the most successful application of this process at the calumet and hecla copper mines in houghton michigan a denny claimed that higher extraction could be had by re grinding ore just out of the earth as well as chemically treated sluices and tailings denny urged houghton and johannesburg to come together and compare once tube mills were installed the number of mining stamps also rose to though the mines with greatest number of stamps such as knights deep did not have tube mills ore from knights deep was not subjected to treatment by tube mills until early when the mine management at knights deep and simmer east combined their milling even so the size of a mine s physical plant was now defined by the number of tons of ore it could treat rather than the number of stamps in operation the previous absence of tube mills and the distance between the two work places meant that the work routines sped up dramatically in order to supply stamping machines with the enough still white labor s portion of the wage bill hovered between to per cent of working costs hence the introduction of new technology and indentured chinese labor had no immediate effect on lowering working costs even though it did remedy the apparent shortage of unskilled labor chinese were eventually placed on a piecework system piecework tended to underscore the position of a large percentage of the white workers as subcontractors and petty entrepreneurs since they were responsible for the written evidence confirming the daily output of the team and whether it was meeting the monthly if technical innovations and milling tended to be destructive of the white worker s or per cent of the unskilled workforce and their concentration at the most troublesome mines tended to reinforce mining on the rand was fraught with tragic outcomes particularly since working costs remained high and offloading more operating risks onto the workforce countenanced more unstable and dangerous circumstances the lack of timbering among the shafts work areas and hanging wall greatly increased the likelihood of fatal in february for example a horrifying accident took place at the south rose deep fifty african workers were drowned by water seeping in from the walls of the shaft they were opening the incident was a poignant illustration of the disparity between working conditions and expert opinion an editorial writer in the sunday times observed deep who swore on oath that it was not customary to so fix the top of the shaft in course of sinking that surface water could not descend and drown the workmen at the the dangerous working conditions that drove african workers away from many of the deep level mines persisted in july one observer admitted the transvaal list of accidents in the mines will be an extra long one this year new coolies do not know the dangers of treacherous hanging and in consequence quite a number are injured by falling rock nor are white men working underground over careful what the observer failed to mention was that african and chinese workers were urged to drill directly into the hanging or support structures and that this practice had become routine once the drives in the reef shifted to an east stopes inmost of the deep level mines also encouraged these dangerous practices in order to increase the area of extraction these practices were more frequently the cause of accidents than the shortcomings of the workforce replacing the gigantic stationary steam drills with smaller more mobile drills also threatened to increase the amount of time white drill men spent underground by increasing the number of rock drills operating in a given the number of africans and chinese working in a stope to increase from a previous maximum of fourteen to as many as forty yet there was no complimentary increase in the number of white workers supervising drill work drill operators were threatened with greater physical danger and drill sharpeners were threatened with redundancy once the number of portable rock drills during the difficult period between and a rising number of strikes mining disasters and an increasingly more violent set of confrontations between white and non white workers indentured chinese workers in the mines indentured chinese workers bought precious time for the rand s mine the so called chinese labor experiment enabled them to temporize about the industry s long term problems during this especially work in the deep level mines than their african counterparts by august chinese workers were responding in kind to the violence meted out to them by white officials and workers even though they
at common law and for which information can lie and the frequency of such publications is evidence of such wicked at the same time action had to be considered within a legal framework which as ryder noted created problems the very character of his advice reflected the position of the monarch within a society not only where there was a system of laws that constrained governmental power but also where there was an ideology of constitutional and legal observance george s generally robust both for the length of the reign and for the conduct of government during it in the former case it is instructive to consider the implications for british history anglo hanoverian relations and george ii s reputation had he died earlier and to appreciate that contemporaries had to consider these possibilities george lived from to only slightly longer than his paternal grandfather ernst august and shorter than his maternal grandfather george these possibilities george lived from to only slightly longer than his paternal grandfather ernst august and shorter than his maternal grandfather george william of celle but had he lived only as long as his father george i george ii would have died in leaving the throne free for frederick prince of wales it is instructive to put george ii s benign genetic inheritance also seen in the longevity of his sister sophia alongside the fate of his eight children only one his unmarried daughter amalie lived to be fifty and aside from george william who died as a baby the boys died in their forties frederick and william duke of cumberland and the girls more variously anne caroline mary and louisa william had already had a stroke in disease was not the sole factor to consider in noting george s such as that which affected his grandfather ernst august in his last years or his eldest grandson george iii would have led either to the earlier succession of his heir or to regency arrangements the latter would have had serious implications as an ill old man ernst august transferred the business of government to his eldest son the future george an equivalent transfer to frederick prince of wales in opposition from would have created major political latter might have matured into accepting his father s ministers that was done by george ii and by george iv as prince regent had george ii died soon after the death of frederick in the position would have been made more complex by the vocal public concern about the attitudes and intentions of his second son william duke of cumberland whose unfortunate reputation for ruthless ambition prefigured that of george iii s fifth son ernest duke of cumberland ensured that it was necessary to settle a regency after the death of frederick and the debates in on the regency bill the key legislation of the session are an instructive ret s comparison between frederick prince of wales and edward the black prince was risible the political centrality in of the civil list allowance for the prince of wales the wickedest scheme that ever is noteworthy edward weston commented that the matter engrosses everybody s attention so much that little time is employed upon foreign business while sir robert walpole wrote your lordship will not very much wonder that we have been behind hand of late in our considering how fully we have been employed in our domestic broils and contests the most troublesome i ever knew and from the great objects of division the most dangerous that could have been at public division within the royal family helped make its tensions more politically important and increased public interest in rumors about the court as with the dispute between george i and the future george ii then prince of wales in so with that between latter and frederick the denial of royal favor and access to those who opted for the heir and the attempt to make the latter break with opposition politicians made court sociability a key political issue access as an issue was dramatized in when george ii responded furiously to frederick s conduct over the birth of his first child in particular his moving the young princess and his wife from hampton court to st james s palace as a result george ordered frederick to leave st s palace until he broke with the opposition whigs more generally newspapers commented extensively on court activity a report from hanover in the whitehall evening post of june noting the court is extremely numerous german noblemen from all parts the failure to give due weight in discussion of the parliamentary and political history of the period to such issues and debates is seriously misleading but is indicative of a general approach that fails to appreciate the role and the centrality of the crown the role of the latter was made more complex by the dynamic relationship between king and king s ministers that was summarized as the crown this was seen for example in the government defense of the royal prerogative in foreign policy the power of making war is no power at all it is only the name of power be cause the king can raise no money to carry it on without the parliament the power of making peace is a real power of the to be as the secrecy and dispatch which are required in carrying on negotiations between several contending powers a power which ought to be lodged with the executive part of every sources have to be read with care to read unexpectedly in state papers domestic an instruction from the secretary of state with george in hanover his counterpart in london to complain to the spanish government beginning his majesty is so much concerned for the interests of his in the west is suggestive but it does not necessarily mean that george indeed was greatly concerned the emphasis on the king in diplomatic correspondence with british envoys however was far more than symbolic in newcastle
a partnership with the strategic objective of gaining competitive advantage through mutual access to low cost raw materials one outcome was the establishment in the uk of a small chemco facility on a large wheatco ployees the chemco facility was located next to the wheatco basics unit and linked by a bridge while a fence divided the two plants selected employees were able to pass between the two by means of swipe card access a chemco manager commented we are symbiotically linked if you take away the chemco and wheatco signs we re really one site we have a relationship and it s an umbilical cord paints and other compositions the feedstock used in the chemco process was supplied by the wheatco basics unit the manufacturing process of the additive generated a gaseous by product which was recycled back into the wheatco feedstock half of the additive made on the chemco site was sold to wheatco s rubber unit and the rest to other customers in europe and the usa the two firms thereby formed a closed loop supply chain whereby they were both customer of and supplier to each other the production processes operated on a round the clock basis and there was very little buffer stock within the supply loop if we have a problem then chemco has a problem seconds later this close interdependency of the processes meant that the operating teams were in contact on a hour basis there was a direct telephone link between wheatco and chemco operators to allow easy communication and instant warning of changes in either of the processes or to inform production stoppages the supply relationship was multifaceted with interactions taking place at many levels locally it included plant management engineers and operators in the usa an executive contact was appointed by each firm to manage the relationship at a strategic level this applied in particular to the global contract agreement which provided the commercial terms for the relationship a joint steering committee determined the local operational strategy for the relationship and provided guidelines provided guidelines to two other joint teams quality improvement and technical we began collecting data in august which was eight years after the supply relationship had started at that time the upstream wheatco process was recurrently unreliable there were also quality issues with the chemical additive supplied by chemco which impacted rubber production at the downstream wheatco unit in the early days of the relationship operators had been encouraged to socialize company events and plant visits this allowed a common language to be developed through interaction we may spend a day there they spend a day here and thus we did nt need to communicate where if something did go wrong they would automatically take care of it more recently the relationship had become arm s length indeed both partners were busy implementing internal programs which drew attention away from the local relationship at shop floor level less interaction and visits were allowed this was made worse by employee turnover as a consequence operators felt that they could no longer put a face to a name lack of interaction together with the recurring technical issues put a strain on the overall relationship recognizing that a blame culture had developed site management from wheatco and chemco decided to organize a team day to ensure that operators shift managers and engineers from the three manufacturing units could meet socialize and be trained on the specificities of the supply loop however the team day was cancelled due to a company wide workforce reduction plan announced by wheatco given the circumstances such a socialization event was seen as inappropriate findings we review the evidence we collected against each of the seven dimensions listed in the had been moved to shift manager positions which meant that chemco had to deal with a whole team of newly appointed wheatco tcs operators a cross training approach was introduced within the wheatco site at about the same time chemco operators perceived the new wheatco operators as lacking experience and were also frustrated at having to do with several interfaces during one shift our operators that the tcs plant is used as a kind of training ground for operators that then move on to the core wheatco competence places if they could keep their operators at the tcs plant for longer rather than move them on to other plants i think that is the biggest part for improvement the effect of people turnover on the supply relationship was summarized by one of the chemco operators to think yes they re good or they re telling you the whole facts then you get a bit more confident that when they say something s wrong as opposed to i do nt know what s going wrong sort of thing a direct link was established between the level of quality of the people that were assigned to work within the relationship and its performance we ve often been frustrated in the past with the lack of progress and i think it s mainly been management thus the quality of the people appointed to work on the relationship was linked to the level of priority allocated to it staffing was perceived as a practice driven by internal priorities i do nt think we specifically say he is exceptionally good so we should put him in this sort of relationship i do nt think we ve ever selected people and given any thought to the relationship to be frank to act as point of contact and manage the relationship with the partner job design one difficulty of working within this supply relationship was the lack of understanding of the other plant s internal work organization if you do nt understand you assume that the other company does things the same way as you do and it may not be the case thus the same job title could cover different job contents in both companies another wheatco being a unionized site job
put into the queue of authorization history and no authorization exists on sub processes and and no execution exists in the execution history executed are shown in table and table the sort sys denotes the universal state space of the ots and the sorts subject obj and quality denote subjects application forms and the qualities of application forms respectively these sorts and their corresponding variables have been declared be forehand and can be used here a comment starts with and terminates at the end of the line the commas before ah and eh are the data and execution history for example exe eh denotes the list of execution history obtained by adding the execution exe to the list eh operator in is the membership predicate of lists variable is used to represent the quality of the application form and it has two possible values good and bad the the state of mainpath is applied and and are in their initial states and and the demands for the authorization conditions from definition for rbac mechanism role manager should have been granted the privilege to execute task on the current application form and there exists a subject that belongs to role manager in addition from definition execute task should not have executed task apply and secondly the subject sub should not have executed task if defective condition is satis ed the execution of transition if otherwise and granting role secretary the privilege to execute task trans if good or granting role secretary the privilege to execute task notify if otherwise and adding execution exe to the list of execution history and adding authorization auth or auth to the list of authorization history according to the two possible values of note that is used to check whether the application to be dealt with is the correct application form also note that the states of mainpath pri and are not changed which are described using the ways introduced in sec at last if is not satis ed this transition will not be executed and thus will not change the state of the ots which is represented by the last line in table the method of verifying that a work ow modeled as an ots has safety and liveness properties and we use the sample work ow to demonstrate our veri cation method the informal descriptions of the safety and liveness properties of the sample work ow are as follows among which properties are safety properties and property is a liveness property role a manager cannot evaluate his her own application forms a secretary should not be allowed to transfer refund of his her own travel ex penses a manager cannot perform both the evaluate tasks in a same work ow instance the work ow can run successfully from the initial state to the where the rst four safety properties are described as invariant properties and the last liveness property is described as a leads to property note that in table only deals with the case task apply of property while the other four cases according to the remaining four tasks of the work ow are de ned in a similar way we describe how to verify that a work ow modeled as an ots has invariant properties by writing and executing proof scores which is shown in suppose that we prove a work ow has invariant properties the work ow is rst modeled as an ots which is described in cafeobj as a module workflow variables of corresponding sorts we rst write a module inv in which each predi is expressed as a cafeobj term as follows op bool op invn vn bool eq predi denotes predi in the module we also declare constants xi for vi in proof scores a constant that is not constrained is used for denoting an arbitrary object for the intended sort for example if we declare a constant for nat that is the visible sort for natural numbers in a proof score can be used to denote an arbitrary natural number such constants are constrained with the equations which make it possible to or the case suppose that the case is split into two one where equals and the other where does not namely that is greater than the former is expressed by declaring the equation eq and the latter is expressed by declaring the equation eq true we are going to describe mainly the proof score of the i th invariant a proof score is composed of proof passages a proof passage is a temporal cafeobj module as parameter and killed by the cafeobj command close in a proof passage a cafeobj reduction command red should be included which reduces a term denoting a proposition to its truth values and more generally to an exclusive or normal form let init denotes any initial state of the system under consideration all we have to do to show that predi holds in any initial state is to write the cafeobj which looks like open inv red invi close we next write a module istep in which we declare two constants s denoting any state and the successor state after applying a transition in the state and the predicates to prove in each inductive case the module istep is written as follows eq istep n invn implies invn in each inductive case the case is usually split into multiple subcases with basic predicates declared in the cafeobj specification suppose we prove that any transition denoted by a cafeobj action operator a preserves predi the case may have to be split into subcases casei preserves predi for casei looks like open istep declare constants denoting arbitrary objects declare equations denoting casei declare equations denoting facts if necessary close facts about data structures used such as those for natural numbers may be declared as well the equation with as its left hand side species that denotes the successor state after applying any
using liquid chromatography electrospray ionization quadrupole time of flight tandem mass spectrometry ms ms as described in the methods section the proteins go annotation we identified only proteins in the min ischemia fraction interestingly the kda band disappearing between and was reproducibly identified as the containing adaptor protein nck besides nck which represented the only signalling component of this fraction the other proteins and of blood proteins involved in transport these proteins were also found in the min reperfusion fraction suggesting that they may either represent contaminants or be constitutively tyrosine phosphorylated interestingly a larger data set of proteins was identified for the min reperfusion time point and blood proteins a large proportion of these proteins were involved in protein synthesis we also identified structural components of the cytoskeleton and proteins involved in nucleobase metabolism as well as unknown protein although the computational prediction of serine phosphorylation sites for the large majority of the proteins identified only of these proteins had been previously reported as tyrosine phosphorylated the alpha chain of tubulin vimentin and the ribosomal protein validation of nck tyrosine phosphorylation upon i the containing adaptor nck has been linked to consequently nck could represent a critical target during i as actin cytoskeleton was previously reported to be subjected to major structural changes in livers subjected to i four peptides were specifically attributed to nck in the min ischemia fraction the ms ms spectrum corresponding to a peptide specific nck could not be detected by coomassie blue staining of the anti py purified fractions after min of reperfusion nck was no longer identified in the anti py binding fraction after min of reperfusion thus suggesting that nck may be either specifically tyrosine phosphorylated during the ischemic phase or associated to a phosphotyrosine containing complex through response to treatment with growth factors but no information relative to the precise py site is yet available in the literature noteworthy the netphos software predicted four potential tyrosine phosphorylation sites within the nck sequence two of them being located within ms identified non phosphorylated peptides this was not due to major changes in the amount of nck protein immunoprecipitated as indicated by the blot using anti nck antibodies nck this result also validates both nck tyrosine phosphorylation as determined in our mass spectrometry analysis and the relevance of our approach to identify tyrosine phosphorylated proteins modulated during human liver transplantation nck expression and sub cellular localization in liver tissue upon i to further characterize the functional relevance of nck and reperfused livers using immunoblot analysis we observed an increased expression of nck during ischemia followed by a decrease during reperfusion we then investigated the in situ distribution localization of nck in liver during the different phases of the transplantation tissue biopsies were homogenized in the presence of mm kcl particulate fractions were fraction and interestingly nck showed a decreased association with the insoluble components during the course of ischemia whereas this pattern was reversed upon reperfusion this observation correlates with the detection of increased amounts of this protein in the soluble fractions upon ischemia followed by a decrease upon reperfusion this phenomenon appeared to be reversed upon reperfusion interestingly nck followed the same to downstream regulators of actin dynamics this protein may therefore serve to promote actin reorganization at hepatocytes periphery upon i determination of nck interacting partners upon i to better characterize the involvement of nck in actin remodelling in livers subjected to i we aimed at identifying nck interaction partners during the course of precleared with gst nck binders were eluted resolved by sds page and the bands visualized on coomassie blue stained sds page gels were processed for mass spectrometry analysis as represented in figure no significant changes in proteins binding to gst nck could be detected by coomassie blue staining however besides the bait proteins or although using this approach we did not find any of the proteins previously reported to interact directly with nck we identified actin as a major nck binding partner specific to the ischemic phase we believe that the absence of could then be masked by the presence of abundant liver metabolism proteins or by the fact that we are using an exogenous nck molecule instead of the endogenous as a trap the presence of actin in association with nck during the ischemic phase however correlates with our immunohistochemistry data and as a consequence strengthens the hypothesis of nck the success of liver transplantation such a complex and multifactorial cell response implies the concerted activation of major signalling cascades subsequently regulation of i injury must involve critical phosphorylation events even though few of them have been characterized to date protein tyrosine kinases and protein tyrosine phosphatases play a key role strongly validate the clinical relevance of the research carried out on tyrosine phosphorylation in various patho physiological contexts functional profiling of the tyrosine phosphoproteome during the course of liver transplantation should very likely lead to the identification of novel targets for drug discovery and provide the basis for novel subject since technical advances of mass spectrometry methodologies can now lead to the accurate identification of post translational modifications in a global and comprehensive manner however a major obstacle in the study of phosphorylated proteins is that they comprise only a small fraction of the total protein contained in a cell lysate nevertheless several studies based on anti py effective at enriching and identifying even low abundance tyrosine phosphorylated proteins using such an approach we identified proteins for the min ischemia and proteins for the min reperfusion protein extracts the fact that far fewer proteins were identified after min of ischemia can be explained by the depletion of cellular atp at this stage proteins identified following imac based enrichment was also lower during ischemia and ii using antiphospho specific antibodies we demonstrated that for all the proteins tested phosphorylation levels decreased upon ischemia and increased upon reperfusion this was indicative of the occurrence of events which could also be related to the depletion in high energy phosphate
a business djankov et al set up costs percent cost of starting business expressed as of host country gdp per capita djankov et al tiers count number of government based on imf government finance statistics sub national revenue share percent ratio of sub national government tax revenues to total government tax revenues average provided by nils herger based on imf government finance statistics accountability index score rating of voice and accountability in host country ranges from to with higher values indicating higher accountability kaufman et al corruption index score rating of the control of corruption in host country to with higher values indicating a better law kaufman et al government effectiveness index score rating of government effectiveness in host country to with higher values indicating higher effectiveness kaufman et al corporate tax rate percent statutory corporate jonas nordstro a department of economics umea university se umea sweden department of forest economics abstract the main objective of this paper is to examine how exogenous technological progress in terms of an and nitrogen oxide the aim of the paper is closely related to the discussion of what is termed the brebound effectq to neutralize the rebound effect we estimate the necessary change in tax ie the tax that keeps emissions at their initial level in addition we estimate how this will affect emissions of sulphur dioxide and nitrogen oxides the results indicate that an increase in energy efficiency of increase emissions of by approximately to emissions to their initial level the tax must be raised by this tax increase will reduce the emissions of sulphur dioxide to below their initial level but will leave the emissions of nitrogen oxides at a higher level than initially thus if marginal damages from sulphur dioxide and nitrogen dioxide are non constant additional policy instruments are needed in terms of an increase in energy efficiency affects consumption choice by swedish households and thereby emissions of carbon dioxide sulphur dioxide and nitrogen oxide the aim of the paper is closely related to the discussion of what is known as the brebound effectq briefly the rebound effect can be described as the direct and indirect effects such as substitution and income effects induced by a new energy saving technology this rebound effect partly or entirely offset the initial or direct energy saving resulting from a new technology as a consequence the effects on emissions become less clear cut a second objective is to estimate the change of the shadow price of emissions in a scenario where we have an exogenous change in energy efficiency and where we maintain emissions at their initial level a third objective is to estimate the effects on and nox emissions of a policy maintaining emissions at level the motivation for our paper is threefold the first can be traced to the existing literature on the rebound effect the re is usually discussed in connection with bnew energy saving technologyq a new energy saving technology essentially implies a lower energy bill which can be viewed as a reduction of the real price of energy services thus if petrol costs less per transport unit car use may increase which partially offsets the initial energy saving potential furthermore lower energy costs increase real income which leads to an increase in consumption of other goods this in turn offsets the emission reductions from the initial energy saving a third effect may be denoted general equilibrium effects since changes in aggregate consumption patterns may lead to structural change and changes in relative prices taken together these effects can be denoted the rebound related to this is the long standing discussion of how growth and affect the natural environment on one side the argument has been and remains that economic growth inevitably leads to more emissions and hence a degradation of the natural environment on the other side it has been suggested that the traditional view of the relationship between growth and the environment is too static with respect to technology and preferences and that the combination of economic growth and changes in preferences may lead environmental improvements as a country becomes wealthier the latter argument can be traced to a report by the world bank showing that low income countries have relatively low emissions and middle income countries high emissions but that high income countries have low emissions thus the relationship between income and emissions is in the shape of an inverted curve the conclusion would then be that emissions will decrease as a country becomes this ushaped curve is usually called the environmental kuznets curve a second motivation can be deduced from the swedish commitment to reduce emissions of greenhouse gases such as it should be evident that the policy necessary to fulfil such an objective may differ substantially depending on technological progress among other things thus it is of interest to estimate the shadow price or the necessary tax change of under a growth scenario a third motivation follows from the increasing energy saving efforts in sweden and elsewhere in europe to reduce emissions of greenhouse gases subsidies for such efforts may then according to the discussion above have a rebound effect that counteracts the direct emission reduction potential through higher energy efficiency by taking substitution and income effects into account we may shed empirical light on this issue our definition of efficiency improvements includes both new replaces the old capital stock and new technology that makes the present capital stock more efficient an example of the latter would be a new motor oil that improves the efficiency of an engine to achieve our objectives we formulate and estimate an econometric model for non durable consumer demand in sweden that utilizes macro data the system of demand equations is derived assuming cost minimising households the model employed here is essentially a three stage model with aggregate data from the swedish national accounts in the first stage it is assumed that the household determines how
for the same transitions in cl like ions including ti vi method of calculation whose angular momenta are coupled to form a total lisij in intermediate coupling the radial part of each orbital is expressed in analytic form as sums eq of normalized slater type orbitals eq the stos are chosen to satisfy the orthonormality condition with lsjp and corresponding eigen vectors give the ci coefficients ai in eq this upper bound property of the eigen values provides a set of variational principles to enable us to optimize the radial parameter in eq the wavefunctions for all ionic states have been constructed from a common set of radial functions in the calculations here we have constructed the wavefunctions for all lsjp symmetries of the states with the electron occupancy as well as and the optimized parameters of the radial functions are shown in table and the process of optimizing the radial functions is illustrated in table we have used hartree fock functions and orbitals of of ti vi by taking the exponents from the hartree fock orbitals of of ti vii we have taken as a spectroscopic orbital and optimized it on state as we are interested in the excited energy spectrum up to in our calculations similarly and orbitals are optimized as spectroscopic orbitals as shown in table for completeness we have optimized as shown in table can be included the configurations included in the ci calculations for each parity are shown in table they represent all the major internal semi internal and external correlation effects results and discussion for the level is less than since there is very less ci mixing and a clear cut assignment of a well defined label is present for those levels with a core the error in the calculated energies is within except for the levels and where the error is less than for those levels with a core the error is within while the error for the level is less than in our calculations in case of the levels with and cores a clear assignment of a well defined label for the level is not possible due to the strong mixing between these configurations we inferred that the levels where the composition is an additional over co related configuration for each of the levels a single configuration state function clearly dominates a more sensible pattern would occur if we were to reverse the levels associated between the levels belonging to the same parity same and this suggests an interchange of the two levels and in the nist table a similar interchange of the two levels and is also suggested hence these incompatibilities in the energy positions in our calculations and the nist tabulation for levels of ti vi oscillator strengths and lifetimes the oscillator strengths transition probabilities and lifetimes of electric dipole or intercombination or semi forbidden transitions and others between all levels listed in table are presented in tables and the transition energies shown are based on the theoretical energies and are used in the calculation of transition probabilities close to the observed ones so that the errors in the transition probabilities and hence the lifetimes are largely due to the calculation of the transition integrals the length and the velocity forms must agree for all the transitions which would be allowed in lsj coupling for the intercombination for allowed transitions except for ds for intercombination transitions a correction to the velocity operator is necessary for an agreement between the length and the velocity forms most of the intercombination transitions are weak in comparison with the allowed transitions for a few levels there is an appreciable strong mixing between quartets and doublets in such cases the intercombination transitions are velocity forms should still be in good agreement a few examples of this are the and transitions at and respectively in these transitions the length and the velocity values of oscillator strengths are in excellent agreement the mean lifetime of a level is the reciprocal of the sum negligible amount to the lifetime the lifetimes are determined almost entirely from the allowed and the strong lines for these the length and the velocity forms should be in good agreement since the level of agreement between the length and the velocity forms gives some measure of the accuracy of the calculations in the present calculations only the length form is correct as a relativistic correction we show the oscillator strengths transition probabilities and lifetimes of all allowed and intercombination transitions from to all possible even parity levels listed in table in table we show the transition energies oscillator strengths transition probabilities and lifetimes of all transitions between each of the odd parity level except the ground state have compared our results with others bie mont et al and berrington et al have calculated lifetimes only for the state for the transition from the ground state of chlorine like ions including ti vi we have calculated the gf values for the transitions the calculated lifetime of the state for the above mentioned transition is ns while the lifetimes as calculated by bie mont et al is ns and by berrington et al is ns experimentally the lifetime for the same case is ns while it is and ns as calculated by fawcett fawcett huang et al respectively thus our al and bie mont et al state to state vibrational relaxation and dissociation rates based on quasi classical calculations abstract interpolation formulas are presented to reproduce the rate coefficients for vibrational translational energy exchange and dissociation effect of molecular rotation the fitting procedure results are compared with original data and the related error is evaluated comparison with global experimental dissociation results is also presented introduction and heavy particle distribution functions which in general present strong deviations from the equilibrium distributions particular attention has been devoted to the calculation of non equilibrium vibrational distribution of which determines the behavior of the bulk properties of nitrogen containing plasmas due to the coupling of this distribution
solvable in linear space this shows that the time complexity upper bound of theorem cannot be improved without showing that p space is properly included in exp time the simulation gets as input a flat tree representing an input string and uses the value variable cella holds the nodes representing the tape cells that have an a value variable head holds the node representing the cell seen by the machine s head the machine s state is kept by additional value variables stateq for each state such that stateq is nonempty iff the machine is in state writing a letter in a cell moving the head left or right or changing state are accomplished by easy updates on the value variables which can be expressed by real path expressions choosing the right transition is done by a big if then else statement successive transitions are performed by recursively applying the simulating template rule until a halting state is reached remark a final remark is that our results imply that xslt is not closed under composition indeed building up a tree of doubly exponential size followed by the building up of a tree of exponential size if that would be possible by a single program then a dag representation of a triply exponentially large tree would be computable in singly exponential time it is well known however that a dag representation cannot be more than singly exponentially smaller than the tree it closure under composition is another sharp contrast between xslt and as the latter is indeed closed under composition as already noted recommendations such as the xslt specifications are no holy scriptures theoretical scrutinizing of work which is what we have done here can help in better understanding the possibilities and limitations of various newly proposed programming languages related to the web eventually leading to better proposals a formalization of the full xslt language with all the dirty details both something that should be done we believe our work gives a clear direction how this could be done note also that xslt contains a lot of redundancies for example foreach statements are eliminable as are call statements and the match attribute of template rules a formalization such as ours can provide a rigorous foundation to prove such redundancies or to prove correct various processing strategies or optimization techniques xslt implementations may use model denoted by tl in part inspired by xslt but still omitting many of its features has already been studied by maneth and his collaborators the tl model can be compiled into the earlier formalism of macro tree transducers it is certainly an interesting topic for further research to similarly translate our xslt formalization into macro tree transducers so that techniques already developed for these transducers can be applied types exact automated type checking is possible for compositions of macro tree transducers using the method of inverse type inference this method has various other applications such as deciding termination on all possible inputs being able to apply this method to our xslt formalism would improve existing analysis techniques which are not complete a formalization of xslt based on rewriting and used it to design an xslt interpreter in the elan programming language they follow essentially the same approach as us thus confirming the naturalness of our formalization kirchner et al s formalization is restricted to xslt and omits important features which we do formalize such as modes variables and call statements they also did not prove the confluence of their testing differential effects of computer based web based and paper based administration of questionnaire research instruments abstract translation of questionnaire instruments to digital administration systems differential effects of administrative methods in this study two university student samples were administered questionnaires across three separate administration conditions paper based computer based and web based outcomes of interest included data quality and participant affect overall few differences in data quality were observed between administration conditions despite some evidence in favor of paper based administration the pba over web and computer based administrations implications for research use of digital systems for data collection are discussed there is a robust literature on the effects of computer based testing and computer adaptive testing in support of the digitization of standardized tests from both scholarly and proprietary sources this literature includes psychological and psychoemotional constructs as they relate to test performance there is also a large body of research on the differential effects of various delivery modes for instruction however far less empirical research is available on the effects of digital administrations of psychological research instruments that assess affective and perceptual characteristics compared with delivery in paper based formats the purpose of this research was to investigate the potential for effects in questionnaires across three different administrative methods paper based computer based and web based administration outcomes of interest include data quality and participant affect background work related performance feedback these uses grow although there is evidence for responses biased by negative feedback because of computer anxiety or aversion there is also a lack of empirical studies on data quality and on the comparability of findings across administration methods researchers take advantage of the access provided by digital with little attention given to questions of their critical scientific underpinnings research is essential to understand the effects of translating questionnaire instruments to digital administration systems and to determine whether they produce accurate estimates of the distribution of characteristics in research populations focuses on three administration methods because they are in broad and burgeoning use by researchers and practitioners in spite of the lack of empirical support for data quality and comparability the characteristics of available administration systems vary widely and these characteristics are vital to understanding the research for these reasons we briefly identify the three methods of interest here to promote clarity of the that follows we detail the administration methods used in our study in the methods section pba is the traditional use of a printed questionnaire instrument in a stable
orchestral musician our research in contrast evidenced recognition of the difficulties ahead following the first year of study when questioned about shifts in their aspirations second third and fourth year students noted a profound realization we unearthed critical incidents which challenged self identity and direction the students below underscored how their na ve notions had been weathered by time i would still like to play but you become a bit more realistic you think about what you can and ca nt do you learn more about the general musical world you realize how many people are out there going for the odd performing job that comes up every couple of years i had a few bad experiences that made me think it s very a full time performer and realization has hit this year the competition is huge in my first year there was a guy in his fourth year he was an amazing player he walked straight into a job with a professional orchestra while he fig career aspiration shift was still a student now to a first year you see that and just think oh he s a fourth year by the time i m a fourth year i ll be that good i ll do that that s the norm then you get to your third year and you re i m nowhere near that standard since i ve been here no student has gone out and got a job in an orchestra then you get to your fourth year it s really quite scary corkhill s interviews of conservatoire students on orchestral careers revealed student perceived disadvantages included that there are nt many jobs and most qualified optimism with phrases of concern or caution it appeared for our interviewees that being a musician embrace an educational role in more extreme cases this represented dashed hopes i suppose they are forcing you to do pedagogical training at the college because the inevitable outcome is that there is nt a lot of work in a way teaching is a second choice for a lot of people indeed from year undergraduates were receptive to teaching playing a part in their future all regarded teaching as the most stable profession such a perspective need not to diversify personal aims however and this calls for additional research certainly for the conservatoire students that corkhill interviewed priorities did not include financial reward and a sociably amenable life many of our fig justifications for curbs on teaching research participants expressed boundaries regarding teaching these boundaries were expressed variously teaching would merely an occupational strand and or selective in terms of schools pupils ages and standards i m quite willing to become a private instrumental teacher i m less enthused about becoming a peripatetic instrumental teacher working in schools for a music service for me i would have come here to study as much as i can so that i do nt have to go and teach in a school i would want to teach privately and select my pupils that would be the ultimate goal if you give the to study their instrument they are not going to find themselves teaching six year olds i do nt think i would have come here if i d intended to become a schoolteacher these preferences were starkly incongruous with notions of classroom and music service provision for all children the labour government s recent music manifesto has vowed that every primary school child should have opportunities for sustained and progressive instrumental tuition offered free of a reduced rate should young musicians such as these find themselves entering a career in mainstream education perhaps thrown in because of a restricted labor market the realities might seem highly disenchanting year clearly marked the onset of a critical episode wherein priorities underwent revision these boundaries on how teaching might feature seemed intriguing though negative impressions of instrumental education in schools were cited as reasons for how teaching would feature in one s vocation some students felt there was a lack of real interest in music from children in schools edward for example reflected on his encounters in a secondary school i ve taught before at a school and i found it the most unpleasant experience you have a lot of people who do nt actually want to study music they are trying to get out of maths or whatever you have people knocking at the time making faces it s a really unpleasant environment i mean i really do feel for the people who teach in schools because it must be very very demoralizing students at the royal college of music have also stated that a disadvantage of music teaching is working with children who are poorly behaved or not interested routinely instrumental teaching in mainstream schools was ascribed with low whereas performing retained the highest status perhaps this stratification provided a window on underlying career desires the interviewees ideal future albeit occupational hopes often subdued in later college years i think a performer would be the highest status and then private instrumental teacher it s only my opinion but i think peripatetic instrumental teaching in state schools would probably be last school teaching is above that yeah i think so if you were a credit card people would say the status of a teacher is higher than a performer to me as a musician a performer is higher status you ca nt just fall into a performing career i think you can fall into teaching i have an awful lot of respect for teachers but someone can do a pgce and then become a teacher it s the same with peripatetic instrumental teaching in schools i would say that teaching is the lowest status profession in my mind and then then private teaching and then performing additionally working in education was perceived as a career trap for those students who desired to emerge chiefly as performers teaching would consume too much time thus impeding potential opportunities for
they stated that a new framework is needed for such sandy soils which do not behave in accordance with the general compression behavior described for other soils in the literature dixon et al denoted that sand decreases both disposals clay sand mixtures are also used in engineering practice for reclamation purposes where soft sediments are displaced fukue et al studied the interplay between the clay and sand fractions in defining soil behavior during site reclamation studies it was considered in that study that liquefaction risk of the cohesionless soils might be reduced by mixing it with the definition of the consolidation behavior of sand clay mixtures and for the classification of such materials further investigations about the microstructure of soils including two submatrices are therefore needed in order to gain insight regarding their influence on compression and stress strain behavior it may be expected for soils behavior of the dominant grain matrix the objective of the present study is to systematically investigate the compression behavior of clayey sands from the perspective of intergranular void ratio concept by defining the transition fines content and granular compression index parameters that are based on experimental evidence obtained during the interaction been studied by means of oedometer and direct shear tests performed on reconstituted kaolinite sand mixtures void ratio shear strength and texture of sandy soils the term volume of voids in the definition of void ratio refers to the space that is not occupied by the mineral grains when a sandy soil or a reconstituted mixture with some amount of fines is examined the in this study and voids due to finer grains similarly the grain matrix can also be categorized as coarser grain matrix and finer grain matrix these matrices are expected to influence each other and the overall macro behavior the relative volumes of clay mineral matrix and massive minerals it was also stated that when the volume of the massive mineral exceeds about the total volume of the mixtures the residual strength of the mixture is approximately equal to that of the massive mineral a change in shearing mechanism occurs yin also showed that angle of internal friction decreases with an increase in clay content for reconstituted hkmd soils skempton indicated for the clayey soils that if the clay fraction is less than about the soil behaves much like a sand or silt whereas residual strength is controlled almost entirely by sliding friction of the clay minerals to a fraction of clay does not significantly reduce the angle of shearing resistance of the granular component pitman et al stated that the location of steady state line appears to change with changes in the percentages and the plasticity of the fines and also stated that below content a sand dominated behavior is observed vallejo and is less than from the performed tests by salgado et al it was found that fines fully control soil response in terms of dilatancy and shear strength beyond content thevanayagam denoted that silty sand may be considered to behave as silt if the fines content is greater than about kumar and wood found that it is the clay matrix that governs the mechanical behavior vallejo on the other hand indicated for gravel sand mixtures based on the direct shear tests by glass beads that coarser grains control the shear strength of the mixtures if the finer grain concentration is less than the reasons why there exist several fractions of fines mentioned in the literature which mainly varies between ratio void ratio of the granular phase granular void ratio or skeleton void ratio all of which are actually the same concepts were pointed in some researches related with the shear strength of soils participate in sustaining the internal forces or their contribution is secondary if the size of the fines are too small with respect to the pore sizes of the coarser grain matrix and the amount of fines stays within a certain margin instead the coarser grain matrix is dominant in the transfer of contact frictional forces it is also considered that the exception to the case is if the fines are located at the contact points of the coarser grain matrix or they are trapped in the intergranular void spaces in a compacted manner there is also a possibility for the fines not being present entirely within the pores of coarser grains but also be lodged between previous laboratory experiences by many researchers have shown that complete dispersion of individual kaolinite particles cannot be readily achieved especially under tight packing conditions however assuming fine grains which are capable of rearranging their positions in the intergranular void spaces as a part of these spaces would still seems to be reasonable thus granular solids where vv vf vs are the volume of voids fines and sand respectively hence vv vf is the volume of intergranular void space materials and experimental program a uniform sand sample was used as coarser grain matrix the finer grain matrix was composed of kaolinite clay and was supplied by kalemaden co parameters of sand and kaolinite clay shown in table were determined by means of sieve hydrometer specific gravity and consistency limit tests these tests were performed in accordance with astm standards except the liquid limit test which was conducted using the fall cone method of british standards water contents corresponding since the fall cone method is mainly developed to determine the liquid limits of cohesive soils mm cone penetration depths for nonplastic samples are assumed as wd and shown with a dashed curve maximum void ratio of the sand was obtained by pluviation of the sand grains into a mold of known volume filled with water sand clay mixtures were prepared on dry weight refers to the percentage of fine grains in total weight of solids the host sand contains fraction therefore values as reported in the following test results include already present fine grains sand and kaolinite clay was mixed manually in a dry state the dry mixing
electrochemical reactions such as material dissolution can be locally controlled with a precision of several micrometers a different approach which allows for surface modifications on the nanometer scale was first demonstrated by avouris and co workers for the local oxidation of silicon electrochemical reactions were confined to a small in humid air kolb and co workers successfully deposited nanometer sized metal clusters for example of cu on a variety of metal surfaces by mechanical detachment from an stm tip which was continuously coated with cu by electrochemical other methods rely on the local generation of a reactive species by an electrochemical reaction schindler et al for the deposition of nanoscale magnetic the scanning electrochemical microscope was used for example for the etching of semiconductors by bromine generation at a similarly tian et al structured conductive and nonconductive surfaces by electrogeneration of an appropriate etchant at a three dimensional mold the presence of a methods with particular respect to electrochemical scanning probe methods are provided for example in refs in this minireview we discuss an additional electrochemical micromachining method which allows the well defined crafting of structures with very high precision in the nanometer range to avoid widespread electrochemical reactions we employ the localization of electrochemical reactions can be adjusted from several micrometers down to about nm principle of the method and experimental realization electrochemical micromachining with short voltage pulses is based on the charging time constant of the dl capacitance of electrode surfaces figure a shows a sketch of the equivalent circuit which describes the arrangement of a tool electrode in and disregard electrochemical reactions upon application of a voltage pulse between tool and surface the dl capacitances on both tool and workpiece have to be charged by current flowing via the electrolyte since the length of the current path through the electrolyte varies according to the local separation between the electrodes the corresponding electrolyte therefore the time constant for dl charging which is given by the product of electrolyte resistance and total dl capacitance varies over the electrode surface and corresponds to the local electrode separation as sketched in figure this leads to locally varying potential drops uc across the electrochemical dl of workpiece or tool during short pulses when the distance between the electrodes is sufficiently small the charging is slow with respect to the pulse duration and the potential drop across the dl is significantly lower on approximating the length of the current path by the and the total dl capacitance per unit area which consists of both workpiece and tool dl capacitance by employing typical specific electrolyte resistances and dl capacitances becomes ns at an electrode separation of mm in other words upon application of ns voltage pulses only those electrode areas on tool and workpiece whose local distance is electrochemical reactions are in general exponentially dependent on the voltage drop across the dl hence with suitable pulse polarity and pulse voltage electrochemical reactions such as the dissolution of workpiece material will be faster in strongly charged surface regions in addition to pulse voltage and pulse polarity electrochemical reactions on the workpiece or tool surfaces occurring that is the electrode potentials without application of the voltage pulses these potentials can be independently adjusted by use of a bipotentiostat in combination with a counter electrode and a reference electrode the realization of the experiment is sketched in figure since the baseline potentials should be unaffected by the applied pulses the reference and counter electrodes are arranged several out perturbations by the pulses to supply the short voltage pulses without deteriorations by long cables a pulse amplifier is mounted in the direct vicinity of the tool this amplifier electronically adds the voltage pulse to the baseline potential of the tool which is supplied by the bipotentiostat depending on the required machining precision pulse amplifiers with rise times down to ns and pulse currents pulse duration were coupled to the tool by use of passive high frequency impedance matching networks for mechanical positioning of the tool we used piezo elements which allowed the positioning to about nm precision and a maximum adjustable range of mm figure shows the result of a machining experiment in a cu sheet a mm diameter cylindrical pt wire was etched into herein negative pulse polarity corresponds to negative polarization of the tool that is positive polarization of the workpiece after drilling a hole the tool was fed laterally along a rectangular path similar to the machining path in a conventional mechanical milling machine machining of the complete structure took the workpiece surface the workpiece baseline potential was adjusted to the equilibrium redox potential of the baseline potential of the tool ftool was chosen more positive than fwp to avoid deposition of cu at the tool the machined trough was about mm wider than the tool diameter that is the gap between workpiece and tool adjusted to about mm reach up to the very edge of the trough this finding indicates strong exponentially sharp confinement of the electrochemical reactions within a few micrometers of the tool to allow a more detailed discussion of the evolution of the tool and workpiece potentials upon the application of the pulses the evolution of both potentials is sketched in figure a the potentials are referenced to the redox potential at their baseline potentials ftool and fwp upon application of a voltage pulse between tool and workpiece the dls at tool and workpiece are charged in the surface areas where the electrodes are close since the corresponding voltage drops across the dls are referenced toward the reference electrode in solution the dls at tool and workpiece become polarized with opposite polarity negatively polarized and the workpiece becomes positively polarized with respect to the baseline potentials this is indicated by the arrows and dashed lines in figure we assume equal capacitances of the dls of tool and workpiece and therefore about equal polarizations of both the electrodes by the voltage pulse the actual amounts of the polarization depends on
of the natural world has been a matter of survival practiced by the entire community living in and depending on its specific natural environment as a native educator trained in the science of the western world including doctoral studies in physics and mathematics i agree that because of the influence just as critical however after refocusing on physics as a science of verified facts and testable theories and reading more carefully the works of albert einstein david bohm and other theoretical physicists i have concluded that physics can be a great ally to any effort that attempts to bring the natural sciences in contact with traditional knowledge two systems of knowledge whose common domain is the natural world however tk carries sense into and does not separate the natural from the spiritual why not then expunge the biases and attitudes that dominate and drive much of the world of science and bring valid facts and theories into contact with indigenous metaphysics in order to reveal a unified world that includes realities from the indian world such an endeavor would help restore native wisdom dignity and honor while manifesting the very principles that science has always needed but scorned the main premise of this article is that the knowledge of native peoples should agree with the tested laws of the natural sciences physics in particular native peoples have long observed and lived in deference to the same universe as people in science who have meticulously recorded and measured information and formed it into laws the indian experience includes and extends beyond the natural sciences emphasizing skill and intuition rather than measurement i believe that the where the two systems of knowledge meet can become gateways to realms that are unfamiliar to the western world many physics concepts can be understood without mathematics it is true that the mathematics associated with physics makes it unattractive to many people nonetheless it is a science that is experienced daily for we are all familiar with such concepts as force energy matter light and gravity although experiencing physics is not the same as experiencing the natural world in the indian sense it is the most basic of the physical sciences connecting direct sense experiences with theory and forming them my focus is on modern physics relativity theory and quantum theory because it points to a cosmic order that is vastly different from the classical realm and corresponds closely to the conceptual and practical world of the american indian for this reason it essential to refer specifically to the work of einstein and bohm the meaning and implications of relativity as well as how the special and general theories were developed are important regarding quantum theory only bohm proposed an alternative approach based on the concept of undivided wholeness i believe that if bohm had lived longer he would have discovered this connection in science and also experienced within native traditions a practical question is whether we want to live an approximate existence that ignores these realities or a real one that connects us to the mysteries of the universe as individuals how realistic is our worldview the approach i have taken in this article is to describe relevant physics concepts of indian philosophy and experience is limited but this is true of all natives for each tribe has its own traditions however it is our premise that there is a metaphysics that is shared by most tribes my hope is that those indigenous elders and other readers who practice the traditions and know the stories of their own tribes will use the physics presented here to make deeper connections it cannot be overemphasized that if dialogue occurs physics both be represented authentically as native educators we need not distance ourselves from reputable western scientists while pointing out the prejudices that exist in science einstein and bohm were both reputable physicists whose disagreements with others were not due to arrogance or conformity einstein was proven wrong on two important points regarding quantum theory he openly admitted one of those errors his death came but he left a challenge that kept physicists busy for a long time even after his einstein s and bohm s work in principle utterly destroys mechanism and reductionism which i believe persist today only because of strong voices that practice them within a large community of scientists not because of their validity i can affirm without hesitation that modern physics provides strong evidence that theory and fact regarding what is key native concepts such as the following all things are imbued with spirit all things are related and connected and belong to a coherent whole the world is in constant flux ie change is constantly occurring matter is equivalent to vibrating energy natural law is preeminent the body of laws forming their own authority system for many years bohm expressed concerns about fragmentation in science and society asserting that a new non fragmentary worldview was needed in science he did not adhere to the conventional interpretation of quantum theory and formulated his own cosmology mathematically on the premise that the universe is a unified whole he referred to the natural world with terms like objective wholeness undivided universe the latter of which is the title of his last book which he completed just before his death in and includes all of the supportive mathematics his cosmology includes the following points that can be seen to merge with key native concepts the universe as an unbroken coherent whole physics the explicate enfolding into the implicate and vice versa with the two worlds co existing in ceaseless movement called the holomovement the inadequacy of modern languages to describe quantum processes and the adequacy of native languages to do the same the death of mechanism as a philosophy science and culture western science stems from a western epistemology however many scientists from this tradition including bohm recognize the constraints imposed by the scientific method and are calling for a new paradigm in science in contrast
be denoted by then analogously to equation the current closes through the resistive layer near the point hence according to equations where than the ion temperature so that the ions do not experience any significant ambipolar acceleration on their way through the divertor leg when there is no biasing and the plasma does not carry any current the plasma assumes a floating potential the set of equations describes an equivalent circuit shown in figure for a given potential difference between the biased and un biased flux tubes ie by the difference the other interesting parameter is the plasma potential well beyond the point which was measured experimentally as was mentioned at the beginning of the paper the point shear leads to an exponential decrease in the toroidally asymmetric part of the potential perturbations into the main sol whereas the toroidally symmetric part is not affected by the shear and does not change through the transition layer for equal widths of the positively and negatively charged flux tubes the toroidally symmetric part is just in the unperturbed case symm is obviously just equal to the floating potential eliminating the current density from equations normalizing all the potentials to te and introducing a dimensionless parameter all the external characteristics of the problem are encapsulated now in a single parameter using equations and one can represent it as where l is the ion gyro radius large values of would correspond to a high cross field electrical conductivity of the transition layer and a substantial reduction of compared with this case is illustrated by the curves with the neighboring flux tubes and accordingly in larger values of this regime is more favorable for enhancement of the cross field transport by induced convection for the parameters of mast and assuming that the adjustment factor is equal to one obtains ie is an odd function ie the absolute value of the cross field potential difference in the divertor leg does not depend on the sign of the biasing potential this result is in better agreement with the mast observations than the earlier model which predicted a much weaker effect for negative than for positive biasing and assumed that the biasing current flowed to the upper divertor note that the equivalent circuit shown in figure is different from that shown in there is no current in the un biased leg of the circuit therefore there is no direct transition between the results based on the circuits and in particular setting the parameter completely interrupts the current in the circuit ie produces a result that cannot be imitated by the circuit equations and also provide information about the change in average potential biasing experiment according to figure for the bias potential of and te ev one has symm ev in reasonable agreement with the experimental measurements note that the toroidally symmetric potential increase in the sol will drive some toroidally symmetric current to the upper divertor a more complete model must take this current into account this current is determined by the ohmic resistance of the plasma between the lower point and the upper divertor the sheath resistance in the upper divertor the following equation can be written for the corresponding current density here the dimensionless parameter is defined as with lconn being the connection length between the lower point and the upper divertor for large the current is limited by the ohmic resistance whereas for small it is limited by the sheath resistance for the parameters of the mast sol one finds that lconn for flux for flux surfaces near the separatrix lconn is large and the parameter exceeds unity whereas for flux surfaces far away from the separatrix it becomes smaller than unity so one can therefore expect that our results would somewhat change at flux surfaces situated far from the separatrix we ignore this circumstance in the present rough assessment a scoping analysis of the role of the parameter is presented in the appendix and shows that for the parameters of mast the leakage does not exceed so we neglect the leakage to the upper divertor in the rest of the paper and present a more detailed discussion of this effect in the appendix after the dependence of on is found one can also find the dependence of the current density on by virtue of equation which can be rewritten in the following form where as before is normalized to te and jsat the corresponding set of curves one finds that the best fit corresponds to this requires the adjustment parameter to be equal to the value that we have chosen for it in the earlier discussion for comparison we present also the curve corresponding to the simple model used in equation of one sees that the model developed in the present paper fits the experimental data much better and yields a reasonable value for the the parameter of course one should not overestimate the accuracy of our predictions our model contains some obvious uncertainties and is semi quantitative at best however it is good enough to produce a qualitatively correct picture in addition the value of the unknown parameter derived from the best fit to experimental data is quite reasonable associated with the biasing in the model where the ions approach the wall as a half maxwellian the energy flux to the wall can be easily evaluated as and in where subscripts and designate the biased and grounded ribs for positive biasing the energy flux to the biased rib is lower than to the grounded rib the difference between these two fluxes is presented in figure energy release in the sol according to the equivalent circuit of figure part of it is released in the region near the point where the cross field current flows the fraction ix point of the total heating power that is deposited in this region is obviously ix point the plot of this fraction versus the biasing voltage is presented in figure we see that for typical conditions about
achieve the recruitment targets and also to accommodate some gps who believed that their complex patients without prior hospitalization would benefit from the intervention patients were excluded if they were so medically or mentally impaired that they could not give informed consent complete survey forms or carry out trial related and december the scs visited the patients at home to enroll and randomize them and to conduct a assessment of those patients in the intervention group sample size cost modeling from historical data of representative samples matching the eligibility criteria for each project before recruitment indicated that preventable admissions accounted for percent of the cost of all hospital admissions sa healthplus aimed to reduce preventable admissions resultant reduction in overall admissions of percent epi info statcalc was used to determine the sample size based on the expected admission rate in the control group during the trial for example using a ratio of intervention to control of two to one and a percent admission rate in the controls the intervention sample size required to detect a percent reduction was if the admission rate in the controls was percent the intervention sample size required to detect a percent reduction in admissions was outcome measures health and well being two instruments were administered to intervention and control group patients in all subtrials at enrollment at twelve months and at the end of the trial which was a period of nineteen to twenty seven was used as a generic measure of self reported health and well being and had been validated in an australian population the work and social adjustment scale was used as a measure of disabilities and handicaps for all intervention and control groups the scale asks the client s perception of the impact of his or her main problem social leisure private leisure and family and relationships each area is measured on a scale of zero to eight though quick and easy to use and sensitive to change over time the scale had not been validated in a chronically medically ill population other specific measures not reported here were used for intervention and control group patients in four projects the assessment an a key measure of the patients and service coordinators perception of goal achievement over time service use enrolled patients consented to having their service use tracked for the two years before their enrollment and for the duration of the trial service use data were available for the major areas of service use medical visits services medications hospital admissions metropolitan domiciliary services daily living support home care and metropolitan home nursing care outpatient hospital data were usually not available owing to multiple incompatible information systems complicated by the large number of hospitals involved data on private allied health and community services also were not available between one and ninety patients per gp were recruited the analysis presented here is based on the regional subtrials as gps and service coordinators offered the intervention to more than one project in the region the central and southern subtrials were randomized by patient and the eyre and western subtrials dissatisfaction with the trial for a small proportion and other for percent many of the intervention patients in this category stated that they did not want the reason for withdrawal to be recorded as dissatisfaction when reconsent was required in july than intervention patients took the opportunity to withdraw sf data were available for percent of the intervention patients and percent of the control patients at baseline and for percent and percent respectively in december the trial s effects on patients had been worsening over the last five years problem statement shortness of breath being on oxygen sixteen hours per day and having to take medication at regular intervals mean that going out is a real hassle and therefore i have given up many of my activities rated on how much the problem affected his daily activities severe interference no interference goal statement to recommence attending calligraphy activities would be very difficult for this patient because of his dependence on oxygen and his social circumstances at the outset rated on progress toward achieving this goal no progress complete success this patient found that the problems and goals approach allowed him to express his desire to return to a vocational interest and served as a mechanism to reduce his dependency on oxygen to only overnight use important meaning that he was fully committed to achieving it the patient was also very involved in the care planning process which made him think about what was happening to his health and why this led to recognition of his priorities and increased his motivation this form of care planning also helped his general practitioner better understand what was important to managing the patient and advising an alternative way the sc was somebody else to talk to without feeling like he was causing a problem and the sc was also a significant resource for solving problems and planning appointments or visits outside his home as a result the patient was able to reduce the impact of his problem from to and completely achieved his goal these outcomes appear to have contributed to the patient s in his mental component summary score over time health and well being results the attrition of both intervention and control patients lowered the completion rates at the end of the trial to approximately half the patients who commenced the trial because patients who withdrew completed no further instruments intention to treat analysis was not possible for the sf little improvement was expected in self reported health status as enrolled in these trials were likely to decline rather than improve as reported previously however the intervention group in six projects showed significant improvements in at least one domain relative to the control group the southern and western respiratory projects showed improvements in mental health domains and eyre chronic and complex and southern aged care showed improvements in both physical and mental domains the significant differences in
to prove surjectivity of p take any element b with c by lemma we can choose an element x such that f with b and c in order to prove that p is closed we need to check that n is closed for each invariant closed subset let f be a sequence in n converging to which necessarily belongs to we prove that lies in by lemma the key fact here the elements am of can be decomposed as gm exp with r we can now choose a sequence ym r such that exp ym for each with ym converging to this leads to am kmbm with km and bm exp converging to exp by in particular the sequence um is convergent and its limit w is inc sincec is closed therefore we can deduce that universal covering now we compute the fundamental group of i denote by c for c and let card then when the quotient is a model when we construct a chart by taking the universal covering i of i and the discrete group i extension of i by as explained in remark we thus obtain a model homeomorphic to ui change of charts to prove that the charts constructed above are compatible we need to check that the changes of charts are diffeomorphisms of models more precisely i and in i suppose that the corresponding charts x and z have nonempty intersection we want to prove that the mapping is a diffeomorphism of models for simplicity we consider the case in which i and are both simply connected we adapt the proof given in thm let and then w is exactly connected open sets we pass to the universal coverings i and of i and respectively we have and where lj exp these are simply connected open sets acted on by the discrete groups and in the following manner given by the following mapping it is straightforward to check that this is a continuous injective mapping between open subsets of cn whose jacobian matrix has rank at every point therefore is a diffeomorphism now add all compatible charts to obtain a complete atlas the key point that allows us to construct the lift is the following we can choose for a point in ui uj two representatives one in the slice corresponding to the open neighborhood the slice corresponding to the open neighborhood uj the mapping expresses how to go from the first representative to the other by moving along the orbit that joins the two slices part ii singular strata singular strata are easier to describe as quasifolds since each of them is covered by one chart but let first take care of vertices for each singular vertex of the stratumt gc gc now let be a singular face of of dimension let be a vertex contained in and let be such that card the quotient is a quasifold covered by one chart defined in the following way consider the open subset of and the mapping with i it is also surjective and closed this can be easily proved by applying the same arguments of part i steps and the open set i is not simply connected therefore as we have done for some of the charts of the regular piece we have to consider its universal covering in order to have a proper chart we then add all compatible charts in order to obtain a complete atlas in particular the charts corresponding to those s in i satisfying the hypothesis of lemma are compatible part iii the decomposition it remains to check that the described pieces indexed by the singular faces of plus the open face give a decomposition of according to definition it is easy to verify that all pieces are locally closed and connected the set of indexes certainly satisfies point of definition point follows from proposition while point is a consequence of remark moreover the regular piece is open since the set of regular points in is open it is also dense since it contains the dense set remark each point in the space lies in a stratum therefore it follows from remark that there is a well defined discrete group attached to it remark a singular face has at most dimension therefore a singular piece has at most dimension remark the decomposition of is induced by the decomposition of given and the open subset of the quasifold structure of each piece tf is naturally induced by the smooth structure of fc the quasifold structure of is induced by the smooth structure of let be the projection we have the following theorem each piece tf of the decomposition restriction of the standard symplectic form of cd to the manifold fc proof consider the regular piece as in the classical reduction procedure the standard symplectic structure of cd induces a symplectic structure on each slice and therefore via pullback a symplectic structure i invariant on each open subset i cn the structure induced is the standard one and respects the changes of charts thus defining a symplectic structure on the quasifold quasifold the proof for the singular pieces goes in the same way theorem the restriction of the action and of the mapping to each piece of the space is smooth the action of is hamiltonian and a moment mapping is given by the restriction of proof we refer to for the definition of hamiltonian action of a quasitorus on a quasifold and for the definition of moment mapping with respect to this action to prove that is smooth and hamiltonian we have to prove that it is so when lifted to local models from proposition it then follows that the restriction of to each stratum is a moment mapping we consider first the regular stratum for each we have that the following diagram commutes moreover ni is a smooth mapping and the action is hamiltonian with respect to the standard symplectic form on i for each singular piece tf we proceed in the same exp stands for the first factor of
of the group centroids for each ethnic group the cultural value of self reliance was a better predictor of membership of the incoming outgroup than of historical ingroup membership was considered together the study found that in terms of discriminating between young consumer individuals most likely to choose personal banking services and those least likely to the most significant predictors were individual cultural values where established personal banking services such as atms and credit cards were concerned interestingly perceptual variables were found to be stronger predictors of consumer introduction electronic funds transfer at the point of sale in this study from the above the resulting discriminant function correctly classified percent of participant cases apart from the four variables shown in table ii above none of the remaining variables added significantly compared to the perceptual variables additional analysis of the functions representing the two groups of respondents suggests that respondents most likely to use this innovation can be distinguished essentially by their cultural orientation of being high on self reliance that is not wanting to be a burden on the family and who perceive automated tellers as being convenient for the malaysian sample the resulting discriminant function analysis correctly percent of participating cases apart from five variables in table iii none of the remaining seven variables showed significance in this case both perceptual and cultural variables were useful in predicting eftpos banking preferences even though perceptual variables were marginally better compared to the cultural factors additional analysis of the functions revealed that respondents most likely to use this innovation as risk free user friendly convenient and compatible with ingroup social identity and expectations those least likely to use the innovation view it as incongruent with long term virtues of frugality and perseverance for this sample the resulting discriminant function analysis correctly classified percent of cases apart from the six variables in table iv above none of the remaining six variables added significantly factors underlying the two individual level cultural constructs were found to be just as powerful as perceptions in predicting credit card banking preferences even though the findings are not statistically significant the direction of the results is important in terms of the hierarchical ordering of variables in table iv overall findings demonstrate there was significant correlation between certain such as horizontal individualism and horizontal collectivism and the preference or likelihood of choosing specific channels such as automated tellers and credit cards likewise there was some significant correlation between certain long term and short term orientation cultural values such as harmony and cultural for traditional ways of doing business and compliance with the reference group respectively to the use of banking services such as automated tellers these findings suggest that retail bank consumers individual cultural motivational profiles may provide bank managers with more powerful alternatives for a market segment development strategy than consumer perceptual profiles at least this appears to be the case with respect to relatively more established personal banking implications this study has shown that the reliance on cultural values and perceptual variables may have significant implications for marketing practice even where ecologically diverse members of the youth demographic are concerned given that channel banking services are designed essentially to suit individuals who prefer convenience quicker service more frequent and less face to face retail banking services one would expect that young consumers more likely to use these these banking services would be those who are socialized in more individualistic and consumption orientations however in this study we find that young consumers socialized in a non western setting can also be expected to use the services regularly due to motivational goals such as needing to be self reliant and as a means of demonstrating social identity with the reference group despite the overall findings from the study which suggest that respondents more significantly correlated individualistic value types with the likelihood of selecting an banking channel some collectivistic values were also found to show similar positive correlation with propensity to adopt an banking channel for instance there was significant correlation between preference for specific banking service channels and horizontal individualism which stresses self reliance however the take up of personal banking banking channels was also associated with some collectivistic cultural values such as vertical collectivism which represents a concern for a social identity and horizontal collectivism which represents a desire for a sense of belonging the association of collectivistic values with the e banking channel services of several kinds is contrary to prototypical expectations the overall implications for marketing practitioners especially financial services providers is that cultural values present a useful basis for segmentation provided the cultural situation and context of the acquisition is clearly understood a reliance on the prototypical cultural expectations may lead to erroneous marketing strategy formulation at the individual level the above mentioned values represent useful marketing opportunities however it the various values may be utilized individual motivational goals and marketing strategy implications for specific banking channels the triandis scale in relation to the outcomes of using the triandis et al individualistic collectivistic scale and unlike the prototypical view discussed earlier the study found that young consumers did not always behave in a strictly individualistic or collectivistic manner rather they are capable of when confronted with particular social situations or depending on their individual values associated with the context of acquisition of a product type this bi cultural tendency can be further explained as follows in the malaysian societal context which is predominantly collectivistic findings show that on a personal level a consumer may and not become a burden on their family likewise their interdependent social self may be stimulated to fulfil their sense of belonging to their in group by acquiring banking products from categories that are in keeping with group expectation and norms such as a local credit charge card the lesson being that the coexistence of two well developed selves is not necessarily is dependent on the cultural typology as to which self is sampled this generalization is equally applicable to the historical
method of pain relief and second in a survey of music therapists by michel and chesky this survey found that percent of therapists used music specifically for pain relief in their practice most often combining anxiolytic music with the patient s preferred music within the programme as alternative interventions for pain relief are however usually than suggested by health professionals an investigation of music listening patterns and perception of music as a useful aid for relief of the chronic pain experience appears necessary previous survey investigation of music listening and its perceived benefits has mostly centered around adolescents the findings by north the et al that one of the main factors in music is to fulfil emotional needs incorporating stress tension release and to get through difficult times are of interest when considering possible benefits to pain patients this highlights the fact that investigation of the effects of music listening on the pain experience must incorporate not only the pain sensation itself but also the possible wide ranging effects on a pain sufferer s quality of life quality of life in relation to health encompassing physical psychological social spiritual wellbeing is a relationship which has only recently been explored in pain research and remains an area of debate as it conveys the multidimensional effects chronic pain can have however it is recognized as an essential inclusion in pain assessment the survey reported in this article therefore develops the findings of the two previous experimental studies in a clinical context aiming specifically to reveal the music listening of chronic pain sufferers and relate these to experience of pain and quality of life and give an indication of the number of sufferers using music listening as part of their pain management and investigate their perceptions of the effects of the intervention method participants the questionnaire was mailed to patients who had registered within the previous year with a glasgow hospital pain clinic a multidisciplinary clinic specializing in treatment and management of chronic a total of completed questionnaires were returned a response rate of percent all responses were anonymous questionnaire design the questionnaire was structured into four sections demographics ascertained age gender marital status and educational attainment of respondents pain rating index of the mcgill pain questionnaire a widely used standardized scale ratings take the form of a total score and two main subscale scores measuring sensory and affective pain experience specifically short form world health organization quality of life scale provided a profile of areas of respondents quality of life the pain and discomfort facet of the whoqol has been shown to have high reliability and is particularly suitable for use with chronic pain sufferers due to its good association with the affective pain subscale of the mpq respondents were then asked to give an agreement rating between for reasons why they listen to music categories of to enjoy the adolescent music listening survey by north the et al respondents were then asked to give an agreement rating between for reasons why they listen to music categories of to enjoy the music to be creative use my imagination to relieve boredom to help me get through difficult times to express my feelings emotions and to reduce loneliness are also taken from north the et al to get me in a mood i want to be in to set the mood when i m with others and helps i would normally find boring are taken from gantz et al further pain related categories of helps me perform activities i would normally find difficult and to help with my physical pain were added the final questions in the music listening section of the survey then allowed respondents to comment freely on whether they feel that music has helped in coping with any other aspect of illness and whether pain has ever stopped their ability to play a musical procedure ethical permission for the survey was granted by west glasgow hospitals nhs trust ethics committee a list of names and addresses were then supplied from the pain clinic database a total of questionnaires were posted over a period of one month with stamped addressed envelopes for return and a letter of explanation attached all completed questionnaires were returned within four months results due to the substantial size of the full survey results this section will main findings on music listening behavior quality of life and the perceptions of the respondents of how music helps pain and illness demographics respondents were females and males a further six respondents did not specify their gender the mean age of the respondents was years with a range of years the mean age of female respondents was with a range of years and the mean age of males was years with a range of years the majority of respondents were married or single were educated to secondary school level and to college or university level pain intensity levels pri scores were calculated as total score sensory subscale score and affective subscale score the mean total pri score for all respondents was the mean sensory pain score was and the mean affective pain score was pearson product moment correlation tests found significant negative correlations between age and overall pri score and sensory pain subscale score no significant correlation was found between age and affective pain score the total and sensory ratings of pain were therefore greater in participants of a younger age a manova with three dependent was carried out on effect of gender marital status and education level a significant effect of gender on affective pain score was found quality of life ratings each of the individual questions on the whoqol scale was coded on a scale making the maximum total quality of life score of the mean whoqol score for all respondents was scores to a pearson test found a negative correlation approaching significance level between age and whoqol score correlation between pain intensity and quality of life pearson correlation tests found significant negative correlations between total pri score
series geodetic gps receivers in a dense built up area near the university of glamorgan in wales simultaneously a gps base station was set up on the roof of the school of computing to record base station data unfortunately the real time kinematic data were not available due to the poor coverage of the gps signal in the testing area which has very narrow streets with tall buildings on side all available satellites visible to both receivers were used in the position solution computation the number available varied throughout the route from none to eight dgps were computed and are assumed to be the truth it can be argued that the more accurate rtk positions should be used however at this initial stage of the experiment it is interesting to see how the performance of the real time simulation varies with inaccuracies in dgps positions there were a total of dgps points available throughout the route results are given in table test in order to test how differently the lidar and photogrammetry models perform in terms of los analysis high accuracy kinematic gps points were collected on the campus placing greater emphasis on photogrammetrically created building polygons the results are shown in table the analysis of the results almost satellites modelled correctly out of satellites therefore low resolution dsms should not be used in gps mission planning especially in dense built up areas since buildings close to the receiver are not adequately modelled the prediction accuracy of lidar data is quite satisfactory although errors exist in fact a perfect representation of urban areas is not possible as the errors caused by the laser instrument gps ins and coordinate transformation all propagate through into the final los results test also proved that real time satellite availability modelling can be done with a large number of known observation points over a very short time interval test aims to reveal how the two surveying techniques affect the los results differently as shown in table the simulated number of satellites matches up quite closely with that of the observed satellites it can be seen that there is one satellite difference between photogrammetry and lidar having carefully examined this one satellite difference visually it was seen that the building eaves measured by photogrammetry were responsible for blocking the los this can be explained by the fact that for that particular building the building eaves are overhanging by almost one meter and as such the building footprints cannot be seen on the stereo model this causes the error in the los analysis in practice for mapping users building eaves are usually classified as building footprints apart from this artifact the photogrammetric model lines up with the original lidar model quite closely in a vertical range of cm which indicates that both lidar and photogrammetry can offer a very high accuracy however digital photogrammetry is less productive than lidar due to the time and effort involved at the terrain data acquisition stage this is especially true for very large areas or where the heights of terrain features vary over a wide range table results for dgps points figure all gps positions used in test figure twenty kinematic gps points figure photogrammetry and lidar table results for kinematic points is to assist in gps mission planning for a very large area for example a mission planning scenario might require an answer to the question is gps a viable solution for a bus schedule and arrival information system in london viewsheds may be created from grid based or tin models of the terrain for this project a grid based model is used as grids lend themselves to particularly simple it is quite obvious from studying figures and that the viewshed computed from lidar is far more accurate and detailed than that of radar dsm in figure the areas highlighted in black indicate areas with less than four satellites visible more than three satellites can be seen in the other areas in figure radar dsm does not contain any building features so as to make all the satellites visible this is obviously not the case in cities especially tall buildings near the receiver that are likely to block the los to the satellites this fact is best proved and reflected on the lidar dsm in figure figure viewshed computed from lidar dsm furthermore it should be noted that although a minimum of four satellites are required to obtain a position the quality of the position may not necessarily be good due to the possible multipath the effect and poor satellite geometry values should also be computed in conjunction with the viewshed modelling uncertainty in los analysis using monte carlo method as presented in the previous sections lidar provided the most reliable results for the prediction of satellite visibility it is obvious that even with the most accurate lidar data there has to be some degree of uncertainty in the los due to the various error sources hence the above mentioned prediction results need not only to be presented but explained to understand the results produced by lidar monte carlo simulation is used to model sensitivity of los with respect to the terrain high precision gps points were collected on the campus of the university of glamorgan at s intervals in order to generate the in figure three gaussian random number generators are used to alter the and components of each observed receiver position to generate a further one thousand perturbed receiver positions that are randomly distributed with a zero mean and a standard deviation of cm subsequently the los calculation is performed between each perturbed point and the satellites to compute the sensitivity the sensitivity can be described as the likelihood of a change in the the interests here only focus on the satellites modelled as visible by the surface model that are actually blocked in reality in other words those receiver positions modelled as invisible by the surface model to the satellites are excluded from the experiment for example a sensitivity
own image dependent forces so long as the intersurface distance remained within a predefined range goldenberg et al proposed a similar coupled surfaces principle and developed are derived from a minimization problem and the implementation is based on a fast geodesic active contours approach for surface evolution that yields a geometrically consistent technique for improving the computation speed we want to clarify that the dual front active contour model is totally different with dual snakes or coupled simultaneously and some constraints between coupled curves are used to guide each curve s evolution but the dual front evolution is designed to find a single potential weighted minimal partition curve within an active region which is formed by the meeting points of the dual evolving curves by iteratively forming a new narrow active region based on current partition curve the narrow active region dual front active contours can find the boundary of the single desired object furthermore the principle of dual front evolution can be easily extended to multiple front evolution generally any number of independent initial contours may be used to initialize the same number of action maps each action map is defined by potentially different potentials and assigned a curve evolutions stop at the point of contact and determine the new boundary automatically the whole process stops when each point in an active region is assigned a final label finally to demonstrate the ability of dual front active contours to handle complex structures and topology changes we test this model on a image data set to extract the complex boundaries between three tissues gm stripping and nonbrain tissue removal we confine ourselves to the remaining brain region and use a dual front active contour to capture the csf boundary then we use a second dual front active contour to capture the boundary in each stage of this process we use the second label assignment method introduced in section for the dual front evolution processing the original volume directly the test image is available from brain web and was generated from the ms lesion brain database using modality slice thickness percent noise level and percent intensity nonuniformity setting the image size is the initialization for the hierarchical segmentation is a sphere mask centered at size value of points having the same label as the point the structuring element was a sphere mask in figs and we present the segmented outer and inner cortical surfaces in one slice of the simulated brain image and a zoom in of the extracted boundaries for this slice we also compare models of figs and show models of the outer and inner cortical surfaces obtained from our method while fig and show models using the corresponding ground truth data the experiments in this section were chosen primarily for their ability to illustrate a number of properties of the dual front active contour model robustness to both local and global image artifacts topology changes ease of segmentation of most medical images especially the complex brain cortex remains a challenging problem because of the variety and complexity of anatomical structures as such the best results are typically obtained on an application dependent basis by using additional preprocessing postprocessing and by applying sensible constraints furthermore this model combines advantages of level set methods and fast without gradients and is easy to extend to case comparison with other active contour models and segmentation results on various and real images illustrate that this novel model is a fast yet powerful technique for unsupervised image segmentation the fact that the dual front approach may be customer tailored to capture minimizers that are flexible in their and adapted in ways that other active contour models cannot this key point greatly extends the usefulness of this model to many important applications in computer vision especially medical imaging where user control and interaction is highly desirable future research work on dual front active contours includes combining this model with other powerful image searching for new methods of defining more appropriate active regions for improving the accuracy of the segmentation results and working on quantitative analysis of medical image segmentation a systematic review of software development previous work the review identifies software cost estimation papers in journals and classifies the papers according to research topic estimation approach research approach study context and data set a web based library of these cost estimation papers is provided to ease the identification of relevant estimation research results the review results combined with other knowledge provide support for recommendations for future software cost estimation research including breadth of the search for relevant studies search manually for relevant papers within a carefully selected set of journals when completeness is essential conduct more studies on estimation methods commonly used by the software industry and increase the awareness of how properties of the data sets impact the results when evaluating estimation methods introduction directing future estimation research our review differs from previous reviews with respect to the following elements different goal while the main goal of this review is to direct and support future estimation research the other reviews principally aim at introducing software practitioners or novice estimation researchers methods and does not include a comprehensive description of the different estimation methods more comprehensive and systematic review we base the analysis on a systematic search of journal papers which led to the identification of journal papers the review in is based on about that in on about and that in on about journal and classification of studies we classify the software development estimation papers with respect to estimation topics estimation approach research approach study context and data set we found no classification other than that with respect to estimation method in the other reviews based on what we believed were interesting issues to the software cost estimation research these research questions guided the design of the review process the remaining part of this paper is organized as follows section describes the review process section reports the review results section summarizes the main recommendations for future research on software
for this device were physicians especially those users and their tasks and to represent this understanding in a way that supports effective system development the ci consisted of of observations followed by of data analysis over months ten different physicians were observed in a variety of clinical settings from the observations the researchers generated over the user requirements document which was also reviewed with the clinical users to check that requirements had not been misunderstood or misinterpreted before design began the authors report that although the ci resulted in an extensive list of user requirements for the software it was challenging to translate these into a workable functional specification and that the repeated consultation with users used ci to identify user requirements for a new assistive device called cyberlink a brain body interface that aims to assist motor impaired people to communicate by converting eye and facial muscle movements and brain waves into computer inputs in the case of this device as well as being the recipient of the device treatment care the patient was also the operator as well as identifying user requirements the authors of this study report that the ci was effective at highlighting potential barriers to the adoption of the new device in both of these studies ci was used in conjunction with other research methods such as usability tests and focus groups this reflects of the views of many authors that best practice in user focused research and development is likely iso lin et al salvemini this issue will be discussed later on in this paper emphasizes the importance of including the real end user viewing frontline workers as integral to the design process due to the unique knowledge they have about their own work processes historically the most common application of ci has been to the design of computer development of office equipment such as fax machines and photocopiers and atm machines suggests that it could be used for a wider range of applications including medical devices ci can offer the medical device sector valuable context specific data obtained from real end users it is particularly appropriate at the beginning of the design process or and wider system it can be used to look at wider systemic human factors issues as well as equipment and device design ci may be particularly useful where current devices are clearly deficient providing designers with information about the particular ways in which the current devices are failing to meet user requirements however despite the value of ci outlined above there able to closely shadow and interview workers as they perform their everyday working activities and obtaining this type of access to physicians nurses patients and other users of medical devices may be difficult the relatively intrusive nature of this method may make it unsuitable for use in some health care settings particularly those which involve face to face interaction between patient and it may be dangerous distracting or inappropriate for the researcher to engage the device operator in the way that is required ci like all methods that use verbal protocols relies on the ability of the user to give accurate and comprehensive details of their actions and the reasons behind them hence developers should be aware of the limits of this type of are a number of ways to perform a task then the user may choose the way that is easiest to explain or which is closest to the textbook method in addition the simple addition of talking during a task may change it for example the speed at which a task is performed some processes may be difficult to describe verbally such as tasks that are dependent on perceptual motor skills in addition the ability of people to provide a concurrent account of their actions and the reasons for them ci is unlikely to access the users decision making protocols or the tacit knowledge subconsciously used to complete tasks cognitive task analysis cognitive task analysis a method for studying has highlighted the need for consideration of the psychological components of health care tasks militello compares the health care sector with other industries that have adopted cta and concludes that this technique may be useful in medical device development as nowhere is an increased cognitive task by mapping out the task identifying and prioritizing the critical decision points and investigating the strategies and cues used by users to complete the task successfully by identifying the cognitive skills and cues required for tasks cta can inform design resulting in devices that support the cognitive processes required to perform a task successfully device development when discussing the cognitive load placed on users of medical devices an example that is often cited is infusion pumps machines that are programmed to deliver drugs or nutrients at a certain rate and over a certain time period operator error when using infusion pumps has been identified as a major problem that can have serious implications for patient program an infusion pump to automatically deliver the drug over a period of time and this may involve navigating through and entering data into a number of different screens a common problem with this type of task is that the operator often has to remember everything they have previously entered which increases the load on the working memory and increases cognitive strain of that action the task is further analysed to identify factors such as task frequency and difficulty the importance of each of the actions within the task and to develop devices or systems to support users at these points as task analysis is concerned with observing behaviors in terms of actions and results it is more suited to the analysis of physical tasks this may be of particular use when designing assistive devices for the elderly or disabled usability tests garmer et al support this stating that if the usability of user interfaces was improved incidents and accidents could be reduced as could the required time to learn how to use new equipment
the second all the suspensions exhibited strong shear birefringence between crossed polars as was the case for the freeze dried sample redispersed in water the shear birefringence was more persistent for the higher concentration suspensions the suspension in dmso differed from the other and the suspension in dmso was showed a decrease in viscosity when shaken or stirred whereas the other suspensions did not all of the suspensions remained stable for months the reasons for the differences observed for dmso are not clear the colored appearance between crossed polars suggests interference colors which are a function of the mechanism is present in dmso evidence for nanocrystal aggregation ideally the redispersion of particles in the organic media should be complete the low yield after redispersion suggests that larger incompletely dispersed clumps of particles are removed by filtration some indication of the relative amount of aggregation is given by dynamic light scattering media is difficult but the apparent size in the organic media is evidently larger than in water suggesting some degree of association the very broad distribution and the suspended particles effect of water content the above suspensions were prepared with as received solvents as the aqueous suspensions are stabilized electrostatically the presence of water might be expected to play a key role in the stability of the nanocrystal suspensions in polar aprotic solvents the moisture content of the freeze dried conditions yielded a stable and well dispersed suspension as described above adding type molecular sieves during the redispersion process to remove water led to the formation of a white gelatinous precipitate this suggests that the presence of a small amount of water is needed for a stable dispersion moreover when the molecular sieves are removed from this gelatinous the suspension is not stabilized and a gelatinous precipitate forms slowly with time clearly the role of small quantities of water is important in suspension stability films cast from suspensions the ordering present in aqueous suspensions of cellulose nanocrystals can often be maintained in films cast from the suspensions because of the high boiling points of the solvents in the second method the suspensions were placed under vacuum at ambient temperature this was a more rapid process preparing the films determined their final structure as indicated by their texture viewed under crossed polars films obtained under vacuum exhibit a strongly birefringent texture resembling that of a locally oriented anisotropic glass the films prepared by slow evaporation show evidence of organization at much smaller length scales causing chiral nematic structure was detected conclusions it is possible to redisperse freeze dried cellulose nanocrystal in dipolar aprotic solvents containing small amounts of water the dilute suspensions show flow birefringence and may be cast into birefringent films the use of these solvents as suspending media may be useful for the chemical lignocellulosic fibers abstract the wetting and moisture up take behavior as well as the electrokinetic properties of various lignocellulosic fibers were characterized knowledge of surface and water uptake properties of this kind of materials will help to tailor their potential use in different end user applications the surface tension of the fibers was determined from wetting measurements using the capillary rise technique the wetting data were were used to determine the surface tension of the fibers our results show that the surface tension of the lignocellulosic fibers is a linear function of their cellulose content zeta potential measurements were exploited to characterize the surface chemistry of the fibers measuring the zeta potential as function of time enables the rapid assessment of the water up take ie the swelling behavior of the fibers the results obtained by the zeta potential measurements correlate with the exception of flax in a linear manner with exception of flax in a linear manner with the results obtained from conventional moisture uptake measurements even though all lignocellulosic fibers are very hydrophilic due to the presence of polar oxygen containing groups they have different grades of hydrophilicity which is also reflected in the different water uptake capabilities measured the wetting moisture uptake and electrokinetic properties of the lignocellulosic fibers are determined by the availability of the surface functional groups present which is usually consequence of the processes used functional groups present which is usually consequence of the processes used to separate and extract the fibers from the plant as well as any further processing used to improve the fiber quality introduction lignocellulosic fibers such as flax hemp and sisal however their high water absorption causes the fibers to swell and their low microbial resistance are some major disadvantages the high moisture uptake affects not only the fiber s properties but also the performance of their composites lignocellulosic fibers consist mainly of cellulose hemicelluloses and lignin but also minor amounts of free sugars starch proteins other organic compounds which can be extracted using organic fibrils which provide the stiffness to the plant are surrounded by a matrix composed of hemicellulose lignin and hollocelluloses such as starch and pectins very briefly hollocelluloses are polymers of simple sugars such as glucose mannose galactose xylose arabinose glucuronic acid and to lesser amounts rhamnose and fucose lignocellulosic fibers hemicelluloses are polysaccharide polymers containing mainly the sugars xylopyranose glucopyranose galactopyranose arabinofuranose mannopyranose and glucopyranosyluronic acid however the detailed structure of most plant hemicelluloses have not been determined hemicelluloses are lignins are amorphous but very complex polymers of phenyl propane units with a hydrophobic character lignin may be better understood as a bonding agent in the cellulose hemicellulose matrix which also provide thermal resistance identified glycine rich prolinerich and hydroxyproline rich proteins extractable organic compounds are of importance because they are mainly found attached to the surfaces of the plant cell walls they consists mainly of fats fatty acids fatty alcohols phenols terpenes steroids and waxes which exist as monomers dimers and polymers these substances these noncellulose compounds cause problems in many industrial processes such as poor absorbency and low reactivity with dyes or finishes as used in the textile industry the relative
collecting relics raised a protective barrier of sanctity against heresy rediscovering the relics of the christian past in the peninsula whether as ancient manuscripts or printed texts thus helped establish a direct link with spain s past and with the primitive faith of its ends as did holy bodies rescuing relics toward a ew identity initially the escorial s relic collection was intended as a way to safeguard the remains of various saints from an assured desecration at the hands of protestants who according to jose de siguenza waged a bloody war against them talking about the monarch s saintly zeal and pious covetousness which allowed for the entry of relics at the escorial siguenza recounts in martial language the miraculous the first transfer of holy remains during which the active participation of relics and the true presence of saints greatly contributed to the sacred shipment s safe arrival but the confessional tension truly comes to the fore in siguenza s vivid account of the epic odyssey of four relic chests traveling across snowy mountains and enemy valleys after a series of incredible adventures and miraculous ploys the holy convoy finally managed to leave protestant a thousand dangerous encounters with heretics over the course of its journey and the circling of a squadron of calvinist heretics to triumphally reach the escorial a few months later by then relics had transformed into actual spoils of war tokens of the catholic victory over heretics the same can be said about one of the first relics to enter the escorial at great cost by the spanish ambassador in paris frances de alava indeed the chapter of the church of saint peter in montpellier where it was jealously kept had twice denied the ambassador the trophy the sole survivor of the church s pillage by the huguenots however much the diplomat warned them that the heretics could come back any time to destroy whatever was left and however much he tried to convince them that the relic would be safer at the not part with their treasure after waging a protracted battle in a city reputed for its rebellious nature it was only thanks to alava s influential friends at court the aid of an archdeacon of the parish and a considerable sum of money that he finally managed to lay his hands on the coveted bone represented a great victory for the king of spain a few years later more relics came in from france this time from the city of tours where huguenot insurgents were allegedly burning the bones of saints in a narrative steeped in the climate of struggle for the defense of the catholic faith frances de alava draws eloquent parallels between the arab occupation of the iberian peninsula reformed iconoclasm and the ottoman threat according to him there existed a the churches of toledo and tours since the canons of the former had sought refuge in the latter after the muslim invasion of spain in memory of this ancient solidarity it seemed only natural for toledo to support its historical ally in the face of the protestant scourge in return for this assistance the canons of tours agreed to send to toledo the recently discovered relics of a disciple of saint remi said to have brought about several conversions in of his ministry in pagan spain the ambassador had hopes that this present received in the midst of the great morisco uprising in granada would help philip ii tame the alpujarras rebels and defeat the turks the expedition of the humanist ambrosio de morales encapsulates the return to origins through history and archaeology that was taking place in the spain of philip ii as royal chronicler morales contributed de espana by writing a dozen chapters on antiquity and the early middle ages as an antiquarian fascinated by the remains of the pagan as well as by the christian past of his country morales would publish a book entitled las antiguedades de las ciudades de espanas that made an inventory of ancient inscriptions and monuments mostly found in his native andalucia this work would help secure his authority within the learned community in the field in philip ii called on morales both as an official historian and as an experienced scholar to travel to northern spain in order to draw up a list and determine the authenticity of the relics royal tombs and manuscript books kept in the region s churches and monasteries with this mission the king reaffirmed the three symbolic foundations of his monarchy faith dynasty and knowledge upon his return to court morales submitted a detailed a series of recommendations regarding the collection of relics in the escorial advising the king among other things to respect local devotion and not to dispossess communities of their holy bodies this he said was an injustice that could prove to be a source of great distress even political upheaval as we shall see shortly philip ii was not always as scrupulous as his councilor would have wished despite this ambrosio de relics played in the process of shaping local and collective identity in sixteenth century spain the king s efforts to centralize the sacred however met with serious resistance from the local authorities city councils archbishops and monasteries who owned the relics and who had drawn a considerable amount of prestige and income from them a striking example is the conflict that arose around a relic of the head of saint lawrence philip ii for obvious reasons but it was jealously guarded by cloistered nuns in the santiago de compostela area and knowingly concealed by the local archbishop in his account to the king of his diocese s relics it was only thanks to ambrosio de morales s visit to the monastery that the monarch learned of the existence of this literally capital piece for his collection determined to purchase it philip first had to confront the devotion to the saint and its relic which had turned the monastery into an
exchanges there occurred another kind of exchange an often quiet occasionally strident struggle between the europeans and the the terms over which the two sides struggled in the long conversation had to do with the language of the encounter how it would unfold in space and what would count within it as knowledge and reasonable argument in the second volume they explore contests over proper ways of working dressing healing building homes and identifying oneself socially as other important upon however is the cultural content of christianity itself since readers are assured in the above quotation and repeatedly throughout both books that the tswana ignored it did not understand it resisted it or rejected it out of hand christianity as a system of meanings with a logic of its own seems to have played little role in the was ostensibly central sometimes the comaroffs suggest the lack of linguistic skills on the part of the missionaries rendered their preaching at best uninformative and at worst unintelligible at other times tswana were able to grasp the christian message but upon doing so immediately recognized that it was fundamentally antagonistic to their mode of existence and therefore understanding of religion rendered the tswana relatively uninterested in when not simply befuddled by the spiritual other worldly telos of protestant christianity thus on the side of tswana reception various factors working in concert conduced to put christianity out of play much more surprising than these rather common explanations the missionaries themselves hardly lived within or comprehended such a culture the missionaries were not the comaroffs tell us early on unduly concerned with theological issues indeed they had little formal religious education a fact in which they took some pride and in general they were men of practical religion whose evangelistic task had a practical theology at its core like the eighteenth century evangelists studied by rack whom the comaroffs reference for this point the evangelists to the tswana were more influenced by the language of practical reason than their espousal of scripture and supernaturalism dominant in the places from which the missionaries hailed it was this capitalist cultural logic that was fundamental to the ways they thought about the world not the christian one that they had never studied and rarely reflected upon and thus it is not surprising that it was this capitalist cultural logic into which they inducted the tswana through the often implicit the empirical story the comaroffs tell then is one of how poorly educated and practical minded missionaries men who had equal faith in the gospels of jesus and adam smith managed to convey only the latter gospel to a group of africans who practical minded themselves missed or rejected the former it is a story in which christianity as a cultural phenomenon plays very little role in this respect the possibility that the comaroffs tell the story of the tswana missionary encounter in the way they do because it represents what really happened this may be true as far as it goes for that subset of tswana whom they choose to examine but the comaroffs themselves would probably counsel suspicion in the face of a simple appeal to empirical adequacy to explain the shape a text takes weight it deserves in tswana history leaves out all of the work the comaroffs have had to do to make christianity largely disappear from the story they tell they have carried out this work on two levels one having to do with their selection of which tswana to focus on and the other closely tied to the theoretical approach they develop throughout their analysis that some tswana engaged deeply with the christian message often we are told these people were marginals and women we also learn in the second volume that very early on some tswana converts became assistant evangelists to their fellows then there is the report that some of these living at a distance from the mission itself were developing an orthodox christianity that people who rejected the missionaries but not their word or style of worship finally it is clear that once distinct classes began to develop among the tswana the mission church found many orthodox members among the elites despite these hints that some tswana were at least exploring the possibility of construing their lives in christian terms the logic of christianity is never described in detail sometimes the comaroffs explain away the christian character of their beliefs by arguing as anthropologists regularly do that no matter how interested they were in orthodox doctrine they could not help but indigenize it and turn it into something else alternatively those who too rigorously the comaroffs use to airbrush christianity out of the tswana picture however it is more important that we recognize the general labor of careful focusing and boundary drawing that has gone into producing the empirical picture of the non christian or only nominally christian tswana that dominates their account having considered the work the comaroffs do to produce findings at the heart of this theory is the claim that colonized people like the southern tswana frequently reject the message of the colonizers and yet are powerfully affected by its media this argument is based on a form content distinction that plays a prominent role throughout both volumes with media in this case representing form and the message representing content it can i find be content across instances of their use the distinction is in some cases straightforward enough as when the comaroffs exemplify it by pointing to the difference between knowledge and models of knowing but then in another context they treat both models of and models for as content in a way that confounds my sense of models as forms that people use to abstract from or shape contents an extremely capacious concept one that takes in for example the commodity form linguistic forms epistemological forms and such allied phenomena as conceptions of the person of labor of value and of rational argument in
there is also direct evidence reported in the personnel literature that cognitive ability tests are only employed by a small fraction of firms even though such tests have been linked to subsequent job performance report findings from the bureau of national affairs in that only surveyed employers used cognitive ability tests in the selection of workers they paint a picture of slow implementation of sophisticated hiring procedures due to budget and time constraints placed upon managers survey evidence from human resource managers documents both uncertainty about the predictive performance concerns are cited by about a third of managers these are founded in a belief that the use of cognitive ability tests might lead to charges of discrimination another reason that employers might be reluctant to administer tests such as the afqt lies in the high turnover of employees if employers can expect to lose young employees within a few months then it might be preferable to forgo testing on young employees there is ample evidence of individuals careers topel and ward for instance report that two thirds of all employment spells of young workers end within the first year there are thus a number of reasons not to dismiss out of hand the assumption that employers do not observe the afqt score the economic returns to administering cognitive ability tests are limited by the fast turnover during the early career and the speed of employer learning about the predictive power of cognitive ability test scores is another important reason that they are not more widely used in screening applicants this uncertainty was probably even higher in since much of the evidence on the predictive potential of cognitive ability tests has only become available during the eighties and nineties furthermore administering cognitive ability tests could require training human resource departments of employers the costs of incorporating testing into the selection procedures might therefore be significantly larger than simply the time costs required in administering and grading the tests substantial legal concerns may limit the use of cognitive testing in employee selection all of these are reasons that the afqt administered in to the cohort represents a measure of productivity available to researchers but iii the speed of employer learning a the employer learning model farber and gibbons formalized the employer learning model in a way that has since become standard in the empirical employer learning literature the model specifies individual s log productivity xi at experience to consist of a linear function of various variables describing the information available to employers and the variables s capture the information available to both the employers and researchers schooling is an example for such a variable the variables describe information available to employers but not contained in the data an example of these variables is information obtained through job interviews the employer learning literature also assumes that there are not to employers much of the literature assumes that the afqt score is such a correlate of productivity and i assume that as well finally the model denotes correlates of productivity neither available to employers nor in the data ash log productivity of individual at experience level can then be expressed as lz log productivity and experience maybe due to a process of investment over the life cycle the employer learning literature focuses on the variation of the experience gradient of log earnings with schooling and ability this variation in the experience gradient is interpreted as the outcome of an employer learning process about the assumption that does not depend on either education or the ability measure is crucial for this interpretation making this assumption allows us to concentrate on the problem faced by employers of predicting based on the variables and additional measures of that become available as workers spend time in the labor market to summarize log productivity depends linearly on a set of characteristics and a polynomial in experience employers observe examines the signal extraction problem faced by employers how this problem changes as more information becomes available and what the implications are for experience profiles assume that are jointly normally distributed an implication is that the expectation of conditional on the information available to firms is linear in z log productivity as a linear function of the information available to employers at time fs the process of employer learning is modeled by assuming that after each period the individual spends in the labor market a noisy measurement of becomes available to all employers t identically and normally distributed with variance at experience an dimensional vector of measurements yx has become available to employers because of the normality assumptions the process of updating employer expectations about has a very simple structure in each period the market observes a measure of individual log productivity the number of additional measures available in the market is equal to the experience of at experience the posterior distribution is normal with mean and precision rp where are fs and here is the variance of conditional on it is the variance of the initial expectation error the regression coefficients vx at each relative information content of initial information and subsequent measurements the regression coefficients vx and the parameter lie in the interval and vx converges to one as increases the speed at which it increases depends positively on the small erkis the less informative the new measures are relative at which employers learn depends positively on and in the remainder of the article i will refer to the parameter as the speed of employer learning the first major contribution of this article is to estimate using wage data from the nlsy the common employer learning model by farber and gibbons assumes that all employers have access to the same information labor productivity conditional on the available information exp the distribution of conditional on is normal therefore the conditional expected value of exp at experience is exp that the expectation error at period is independent of as well as of the realizations of yx this implies
to these were compared between groups satisfaction with consultation was assessed among students by the item satisfaction form with answers on a five point likert scale ranging from very unpleasant to very pleasant the evaluation form completed by the health physician nurse measured helpfulness and overall satisfaction with the session answers were on a five point likert scale with indicating the most positive evaluation indicators of quality of contents was compared between groups students rated whether they understood the contents of the assessment the fruit advice and the electronic health feedback the answers ranged from very difficult to very easy on a five point likert scale comparison between groups was possible except for the evaluation of the health fruit advice formatted on a five point likert scale ranging from strongly disagree to strongly agree finally two additional items addressed the physician s nurse s evaluations of whether the referral was legitimate and whether the information on referred students was correct analysis the school session and the scale score of the satisfaction form for consultation were determined through the student s t test mann whitney tests were used to assess data that were not normally distributed these included assessment of differences between the two groups in duration of consultation students evaluation of administration modes and all referral and correctness of information which were tested with logistic regression comparisons of attendance rates reading of the fruit advice were also tested with logistic regression characteristics of participants except for age were tested with the chi square test odds ratios were calculated for the spss version was used for all statistical analyses table ii characteristics of all participants and by groups results sample of the eligible students participated in the school session participated in the internet group and participated in the group registered reasons for absence were mainly unknown and illness and parents refused their due to missing values the number of student evaluation forms differed per analysis indicators of feasibility the percentage of students completing the health questionnaire did not differ significantly between the internet and groups the attendance at the consultation was higher in the internet group registered reasons for non attendance were mainly unknown or that the student was already under treatment in most sessions the students attended without a parent the completion times for the assessment did not differ significantly between the internet and the groups in significantly between the internet and groups most students using the internet reported having read one or more parts of the health feedback with the chq being read most often in both groups reported having read the fruit advice during the were found between the internet and groups students rated assessment via the internet as an easier mode than via the electronic fruit advice was a more pleasant mode to use than the preprinted advice students evaluated the electronic health feedback as an easy and pleasant mode to use the assessment and the fruit advice in both groups neutral positive but the internet tailored feedback on fruit consumption was evaluated as being more personally targeted and enjoyable than the preprinted generic advice students evaluated the electronic health feedback positively students were satisfied with the consultation and appreciated as neutral helpful and were satisfied with the overall session no differences between groups were found indicators of quality of contents in the internet group students were at health risk and three had self referred themselves in the group this was and six students respectively between groups the percentage of students referred did not differ significantly between groups to illustrate the reference dataset from showed be at health risk which was slightly lower than the proportion in the internet group and the group than the preprinted fruit advice reasons for illegitimate referrals or nts problems had already been solved before the consultation or the answers to the questionnaire did not match what was said during the consultation discussion duration reading of the feedback and administration mode and users were satisfied besides this the quality of the contents was adequate but the fruit advice may require some improvement other studies among adolescents conducted in primary preventive care settings in the united states also showed that computerized adolescent health promotion was feasible and positively evaluated health in combination with health behaviors and these studies did not apply a randomized control group to assess users satisfaction with the intervention the consultation in the internet group achieved a higher attendance rate compared with that in the group a review by edwards et al suggests that individualized risk information the internet group received positive evaluations from both students and physicians nurses previous research indicated that physician s nurse s behavior is an important determinant of adolescents satisfaction with their health care and that interactive health communication could improve patient satisfaction nevertheless in the current study the levels of the the group the students positively evaluated both internet administered adolescent health promotion and the current paper procedure with relatively few and small differences between modes given the multiple comparisons made only the differences with a value may be considered relevant on three items the internet version was somewhat more quality the tailored fruit advice was regarded as less credible than the generic paper version the latter difference was not seen for the almost identical fruit advice among adults although the current study confirms that adolescents enjoy computerized evaluation the literature also suggests that tailored advice is superior to generic instruction mode of administration interacted with gender ethnic background or school type showed that only gender significantly interacted with mode of administration regarding individualization and enjoyability of the fruit advice girls were more favorable toward internet tailored fruit advice compared with preprinted affect acceptability of the feedback such as upward or downward social comparisons by students when confronted with their own health or behavior rating compared with norms it is proposed to evaluate these pathways in more specific studies a few considerations should be made when interpreting the study results the attendance was may
and net purchases quarterly data tx is the newey west statistic of the statistic table holdings turnover and gross flows shares traded divided by market capitalization gross purchases and gross sales are divided by market capitalization gross flow and volume statistics are averages over is the mean and is the of and is the correlation of gross purchases and gross sales the model our model describes the stock market of a small open economy there are two types of investors nationality there are us based investors and local investors we assume that nationality does not lead to different behavior at the individual level us investors of type are identical to local investors of type however the aggregate trades of us investors will have distinctive properties if the composition of the us investor population differs from that of the local population analysis of the model naturally proceeds in two steps we describe the set up as one of and investors in section we introduce nationality and derive model statistics that involve us investors trades albuquerque et al international equity flows autocorrelogram of flows and cross correlogram of returns and flows is net purchases of the local asset by us investors rd is the current excess return on the local asset the shaded area is bounded by confidence bands infinitely lived investors a fraction hu of investors is unsophisticated and a fraction hu is sophisticated investors have identical expected utility preferences that exhibit constant absolute risk aversion at time an investor of type ranks contingent consumption plans ci according to and ii is the information set at time to be specified below investment opportunities two assets are available to all investors a risk free bond pays a constant gross rate of return of moreover all investors participate in the domestic stock market the single asset traded in this market is a claim to the dividend stream dt at date shares trade at a per share ex dividend price of pt and hence deliver a per share excess return of rd single share is traded every period a third asset is accessible to investors alone we refer to it as a private or off market investment opportunity and denote its simple excess return by rb dividends and asset returns are subject to both persistent and transitory shocks recall that fd expected return is correlated with the business cycle other fluctuations in the expected return rb are summarized by a state variable fb which is independent of fd and labelled the off market factor both fd and fb may depend on two lags of themselves letting ft that is serially uncorrelated and normally distributed with mean zero and diagonal covariance matrix the matrix is block diagonal information at date all investors know past and present stock prices and dividends that is iu investors not only know iu but also observe the off market factor fb as well as past and present returns on their private opportunities all investors observe the same signals and thus share the information set is pt dt rb fb investor at date is wi r ri where wi is beginning of period wealth and the vectors r and r denote holdings and returns on assets that are available to investor respectively in particular for investors rst chooses contingent plans for consumption ci and asset holdings r to maximize expected utility conditional on the information set ii and the budget constraint equilibrium a rational expectations equilibrium is a collection of stochastic processes cu cs and the domestic stock market clears hu cu cs heterogeneity based on investor nationality does not affect trading and the equilibrium properties it does however affect flows into and out of the us we return to this in section stationary equilibria to compare model predictions to data we focus on stationary equilibria that is stationary processes for consumption portfolios and the stock price that satisfy the a stationary equilibrium yields theoretical moments for trades and returns that are matched to the corresponding empirical moments as in wang the assumptions of normal shocks exponential utility and hierarchical information sets imply that stationary equilibria can be represented using a low dimensional state vector that contains only agents conditional expectations in particular we focus on equilibria in which the stock price is a linear function of these expectations ft ii denote investor s conditional expectation of the vector ft that drives persistent movements in fundamentals since iu is the law of iterated expectations implies ffut and put ffut theorem there exists a rational expectations equilibrium such that prices and stock holdings are stationary and take the form pt and ui the stationary equilibria have two important properties first equilibrium prices reveal neither the persistent components of dividends nor the expected return on private opportunities but only investors perceptions of these variables this is because no investor has full information about the state of the business cycle fd second equilibrium holdings and hence also trades of both and the persistent factors ffut indeed if the local asset demand of investors were to depend also on ffst then investors could learn more about ffst by comparing ffut and their own demand which would lead them to adjust ffut equilibrium expectations must therefore be such that holdings reflect only ffut it follows that trading volume captured by the present model from many noise trader models where agents must be forced by assumption not to condition on trading volume discussion of assumptions information and nationality our set up rules out any inherent advantage due to nationality at the individual level the sophisticated us investors know as much about the local economy as the sophisticated local investors this assumption accommodates the fact that both us and local investors can hire the best portfolio managers and is especially suited in developed country markets where investors share similar backgrounds moreover it makes the model parsimonious and easier to solve small
and africa have all emerged as stock rhetorical to be sure this vision of whites as vulnerable minorities systematically harmed by antidiscrimination law contradicted glazer s simultaneous contention that all groups competed more or less equally with the each other none especially advantaged nor burdened this antecedent claim lay at the heart of the depiction of blacks as white in moving to the conclusion that whites were black glazer began to return ethnicity to a group this time with whites in the subordinate position affirmative action became affirmative discrimination not just in the sense of relying on a racial classification but in the sense of constituting an invidious practice as we shall see in the logical jujitsu of reactionary colorblindness proclaiming that minorities no longer faced race specific structural impediments was not enough instead completely flipping the status of whites and blacks proved the key move formal race and culture race neil gotanda in his groundbreaking article a critique of our constitution is color blind systematically dissected the shifting conceptions of race employed by the contemporary supreme court in moving strongly toward an anticlassification gotanda recognized that debates over the nature of equality and the scope of equal protection inescapably turned on competing understandings of race and he suggested a framework that has since been for distinguishing four racial models variously deployed by the two in particular are relevant to this article formal race conceptualizing race as merely skin color or country of ancestral and culture race referring to the culture community and consciousness of racial i have argued that the rise of race as ethnicity rested on the following suppositions first race as such amounted to nothing more than superficial second ethnic groups nevertheless possessed distinctive cultures third racial domination lay defeated in the past and no permanent dominant or subordinate groups remained fourth conflicts over interests and cultures produced and explained relative group success fifth antidiscrimination law dispreferred and even victimized white ethnic minorities my first and second arguments roughly correspond to gotanda s notions respectively of formal race and culture this unity has important explanatory significance it is not that a skin color conception exists in opposition to a view of race as culturally significant but that these notions work hand in hand to produce a racial ideology capable of claiming that racism is a thing of the past that group inequality reflects cultural capacity and that whites are vulnerable minorities that is the ability of race as ethnicity to continually shift emphasis between points one that group inequality reflects cultural capacity and that whites are vulnerable minorities that is the ability of race as ethnicity to continually shift emphasis between points one and two constitutes a necessary prerequisite for claims three through five as neologisms formal race and culture race helpfully illustrate the way in which ethnicity combines opposing contentions nevertheless one should not see these elements as distinct understandings of race instead the power ace as ethnicity lies in its ability to simultaneously gesture in contradictory directions making blacks white and whites black bakke in regents of university of california bakke the supreme court split with four members for an anticlassification rule and four against and justice powell in the powell s opinion has emerged as the court s de facto ruling but not for this reason does it hold the greatest interest here rather powell s analysis merits attention because than the opinion of the four openly committed to prohibiting the remedial use of race it laid the ground work for contemporary reactionary colorblindness nevertheless before turning to powell s watershed opinion it bears examining the debate as framed by those for and against colorblindness a statutory colorblindness a clear case of racial discrimination if one understood discrimination to mean any distinction on the basis of race a position strenuously urged by four justices john paul stevens joined by warren burger william rehnquist and potter stewart argued that a supposed statutory prohibition against any state use of race governed the case and further suggested that prudential reasons cautioned against prematurely reaching the constitutional stevens likely favored state use of race governed the case and further suggested that prudential reasons cautioned against prematurely reaching the constitutional stevens likely favored statutory grounds though at least partly because in little space existed to argue that the constitution prohibited remedial uses of race from brown to swarm the supreme court had consistently rejected the premise that the fourteenth amendment barred all governmental use of race and as recently as which proscribed the use of federal funds to support segregated institutions provided more favorable terrain on which to campaign for colorblindness this ground provided some cover for he selectively culled from the thousands of pages of legislative history various snippets seeming to indicate an intention that all racial classifications be barred this argument s weakness becomes immediately manifest however in the thinness of the evidence marshaled to support it stevens argued of the legislation gave repeated assurances that the act would be colorblind in its application and then offered as proof just three quotes from the act s voluminous debates only one of which actually adverted to not to be deterred stevens insisted the meaning of the title vi ban is crystal clear race cannot be the basis of excluding anyone from participation in a federally funded like posner s deployment of surely stevens s of the title vi ban is crystal clear race cannot be the basis of excluding anyone from participation in a federally funded like posner s deployment of surely stevens s recourse to crystal clear in the context of scarce evidence indicates nothing so much as the feebleness of his thesis not to be outdone a year later rehnquist in united steelworkers weber would employ the same statutory argument and even more exaggerated rhetoric in claiming that title vii colorblindness as a political matter but they also confirm that as late as weber in no member of the court argued that the constitution required colorblindness
location overlooking the valley in which the prophesied resurrection would take place in netanyahu then israel s ambassador to the un declared to the annual convention of christian zionists that the latter s support for israel was a superior moral deed that night he became the blue eyed boy for all those who wished to burn the jews in hell unless they converted to christianity on judgement the churches were not content with words alone and established a special outfit that focused on helping israel inside the us which netanyahu made effective use of when he became prime while the pro israeli lobby concentrated its efforts on wooing the democratic party towards israel these christians turned the republican party into a sympathiser at the very least and one party were more inclined to accept the arabists point of view and support a pro american axis in the middle east built on friendly arab regimes but this position was neutralized towards the end of the twentieth century due to the immense power accumulated by the fundamentalists who by then were officially dubbed christian zionists it is noteworthy that the pro israeli lobby was established according to the declared aims of influence in the state department this particular mission was accomplished it seems not so much by the lobby s effort as by the successful endeavors of the christian zionists history quite often is an explosive fusion of discrete processes that produce events later considered to be formative and significant the reaganite foreign policy of the and the historical narrative that accompanied it which claimed that this american president were leading a hawkish west into decisive victory over the great satan in moscow reinforced christian zionism even more it was also fed by a tv revolution that bowdlerized the american value system and collapsed fundamentalist christianity into the dimensions of the small screen flamboyant men appeared as preachers and succeeded in the typical discourse of this shallow medium in conveying even more simplified messages world the communications revolution and the rise of the right to power in israel turned the jewish state s influence in the us into a formidable if not undefeatable fact of life jerry falwell s shows on tv epitomise this latest transformation in the fundamentalist experience in he said in one of his shows he who stands against israel stands against god in the same year he received the jabotinsky prize from menachem begin the various category of christian zionism won an unprecedented place in the israeli political system so despite vigorous opposition from the ultra orthodox jews in jerusalem to any missionary work in the city falwell and his friends shifted the focus of christian zionist activity to jerusalem ever since every few years the city has hosted the main convention of american christian zionists a body that has adopted a host of resolutions calling upon israel to pursue occupied territories and encouraging the us to wage continuous war against islam and the arab world these positions were taken long before the us was attacked by al qa ida the outcome is that today tens of millions of americans support israel unreservedly even expecting it to pursue a maximalist policy against the arab world and the palestinians this body of people brings with it the money that helped install george represented in all the important committees on capitol hill and in the american media ever since the outbreak of the second intifada most of the churches of this persuasion consider volunteering in israel as mandatory as if this were not enough since september this theology has also adopted a clear anti islamic line in his important work on the subject stephen sizer has revealed how christian zionists have constructed attitude to christianity throughout the ages as a kind of a genocidal campaign first against the jews and then against the hence what were once hailed as moments of human triumph in the middle east the islamic renaissance of the middle ages the golden era of the ottomans the emergence of arab independence and the end of european colonialism were recast as the satanic anti christian acts of heathens spear and islam their dragon the king crane legacy in the heart of ohio lies the town of oberlin at the beginning of the nineteenth century it was still a typical mid west american village surrounded by infinite cornfields away from the ivy towers of the east and west coasts a pastoral part of the world it would have escaped a place in the collective american memory had it not been for a unique theological a clergy very different from those already discussed its members were motivated by a commitment to peace and equality both in the us and in the world at large in its early years the college fought against racial segregation and discrimination against women in american academia there in the gothic like building of the college henry king taught for many years but as was common for researchers theological education then mathematics and finally philosophy in he became the college s president then during the first world war he left this comfortable position to become the head of the ymca in paris in the photo gallery of the college one can see a tall man with a groucho like moustache decorating his long face sitting next to a table made fit lean and long to the man s proportions this was taken at the paris ymca it was while there that king was president woodrow wilson to become involved in world politics the american president wished to exploit the results of the war by disintegrating the big colonial empires in the name of the right to independence and self determination in the wilsonian vision the arab peoples too were entitled to the national liberation denied them during years of ottoman rule wilson suspected that britain and france wanted to replace turkish imperialism the peace conference in versailles to send a commission of inquiry to the
to control for the experiment wise error rate a corrected alpha of was used the single best be the social skills score for children who stutter and the cit coefficient for noninterruptive simultaneous speech in conversations with their fathers when both family relations and withdrawal scores were added there was slightly more predictive value but less significance taken with the results of the between group comparisons which indicated that the cws who exhibited higher social skills scores these findings suggest that the more difficulty these children had with social activities the more they coordinated their noninterruptive simultaneous speech with their fathers discussion there were two principal findings from this study the first is that with few exceptions parents and their children do not differ in the durations of various vocal states while they talk with who participated in this study the second main finding is that children who stutter and their parents were more likely than nonstuttering children and their parents to show mutual accommodation during conversation that is cws and their parents were more likely than nonstuttering child parent dyads to be significantly influenced by the temporal characteristics of their partner s vocal timing during their subsequent conversational turns this is particularly the case for the simultaneous speech or what kelly and conture described in their studies of stuttering child parent interaction as simultalk in the present study there was evidence for mutual influence for both noninterruptive and interruptive simultaneous speech when the children who stutter engaged in separate conversations with their mothers and their fathers in general when fathers or mothers of the stuttering children interrupted their child the child was inclined to interrupt in the subsequent turn for a similar amount of time and vice versa finally results indicated that in general the cws were more likely to be influenced by the temporal characteristics of their father s as opposed to their mother s speech during conversational interaction the results from this study add a new dimension to our understanding of stuttering intervention approaches that focus on training parents to reduce various sources of communicative time pressure when talking with their children who stutter in particular present findings serve to move us away from the notion that the parents of children who stutter talk too fast or interrupt too much and toward an appreciation of how we might exploit the normal phenomenon of mutual accommodation in parent child conversations as a way to facilitate the child s fluent speech production that is taken together with the observation that parental use of shorter and slower and longer switching pauses can be fluency facilitating for some children who stutter findings from this study provide support for stuttering therapy approaches for children that emphasize parent manipulation and modeling of temporal characteristics of parent child interaction in addition these findings lend insight into why such approaches might be efficacious for example in a recent study two well known types of stuttering therapy for preschool children were compared to assess their effect on stuttering frequency and severity as well as the extent to which parents found the approach satisfactory both approaches are administered by the child s parents one program uses operant procedures which require parents to provide verbal contingencies during their child such that fluent productions are praised and disfluent speech is followed by a request to say the disfluent word fluently the second approach also known as the demands capacities model requires among other things parent modeling of shorter conversational turns characterized by a slow speech rate longer pauses and longer switching pauses results indicated that both the operant based and demands capacities approach resulted in in speech fluency for children to some extent findings from the presents study support the argument that one of the reasons why parent manipulation of certain temporal speech parameters is fluency enhancing is because some children who stutter may be more likely to attune the durations of their vocal state behaviors to those of their parents in conversation it is clear that future studies of turn by turn coordination or influence not just overall rate difference or interactions will help us to better understand the mechanisms by which parent and clinician modeling may affect fluency the children who stutter in the present study and their parents exhibited more pervasive coordinated interpersonal timing than did the nonstuttering children and their parents during conversation this observation can be attributed to any number of factors including the combined influence of both the child s and the parents level of sensitivity to external stimuli or behavior and the degree to which they perceive unpredictability in either the interaction or their relationship sensitivity it has been noted that conversational dyads marked by significant levels of cit typically contain at least one participant who is likely to exhibit behaviors consistent with a heightened sensitivity to both internal and external stimuli across temporal and sensory domains of late the contribution of temperament to the onset and development of stuttering in children has received attention in the literature early work in this area has shown that as a group young children who stutter tend to be described by their parents as highly sensitive to a number of internal and external variables and that this sensitivity was present during the time of stuttering onset ie ages three to four years more recently anderson et al used the behavioral style questionnaire to show that young children who stutter are more inclined than their nonstuttering counterparts to exhibit a temperamental profile characterized by hypervigilance nonadaptability to change and irregular biological functions while temperament per se was not assessed in the present study it seems reasonable speculate that the higher score on the social skills scale observed for the stuttering children might be related not only to difficulty in forming friendships with peers but also to a heightened sensitivity when interacting with peers and adults including their parents add to this the observation that children who stutter tend to be relatively slow to change behavior during new situations
is concave namely if is decreasing in for all remark note that in the case that has no density definition is still valid although the reversed hazard rate cannot be defined in addition a drhr random variable is absolutely continuous except at most at the left end point of its interval of support as in ifr case we assume that a nonnegative constant random variable is drhr which turns out to be coherent with the proof of theorem observe that there is no nonnegative random variable having an irhr distribution if a reversed hazard rate is increasing its interval of support must have a finite upper point next the concept of discrete reversed hazard rate is presented is decreasing in this is equivalent to the following two statements is increasing in or the next section is devoted to reliability classes preserved under renewal processes the nth the event that is constitute a set of independent and identically distributed nonnegative random variables with common distribution function in what follows we assume that the interarrival times cannot be concentrated at zero thus represents the number of events by time therefore reliability functions respectively for technical purposes we assume that gt has no common discontinuity points with the distribution functions corresponding to hence it can be proved that and therefore moreover it is also proved by means of a counterexample that is not possible for to be ifr without strengthening the hypotheses example in the case of being ifr or logconcave does not necessarily preserve such properties however the following results show that when the direction of the monotonicity is reversed inherits some aging properties of in particular the logconvexity and the dfr condition with density gt independent of if is logconvex then is discrete logconvex proof recall first that is the interval of support for logconvex distributions exercise let xn xn and be independent identically distributed random variables with common distribution let sn be as in and define in the above expressions consider that if applying the logconvexity of gt first and then the inequality az and a we have that for all and next calculations aim at obtaining a bound for the expression in by first taking the conditional expectation with respect to sn and and so taking expectations in the previous inequality leads to expressions in and yield n and the result in theorem holds the following result is concerned with the dfr property theorem let be a renewal process as defined in and a random variable independent from given in consider that the distribution function corresponding to if is dfr then is d dfr proof the assertion follows by induction on from it follows that is d dfr if and only if for all the following inequality is satisfied for the above inequality follows immediately from the fact that being holds for take supfx then note that t is a dfr distribution for all using first the induction hypothesis and then the cauchy schwartz inequality it follows that therefore the result in also holds for and the proof of theorem is complete that is ifra as far as we know the question of whether is ifra provided that is also ifra remains open it is shown in theorem that this property holds if are ordered in the likelihood ratio order next we recall the following definition of the likelihood ratio order or shaked and shanthikumar so that our results hold either in continuous discrete or more general conditions of the arrival definition let and be two absolutely continuous random variables with respect to some dominating measure with fx and fy its respective density functions is said to be smaller than in the likelihood ratio order if fy fx increases on the union of the supports of and in the foregoing definition the absolutely continuous case is obtained provided that is the lebesgue measure whereas the discrete case turns out by taking as the counting measure on the nonnegative integers remark from the previous definition it follows that if lr then for any that is not in the support of and that is less than the supremum of the support of it follows that is not in the support of this fact will be used in proof of the following theorem let be a renewal process as in and an increasing sequence in the likelihood ratio order consider a random variable independent of and assume that the distribution function of has no common discontinuity points with the distribution functions corresponding to if is ifra then is d ifra proof let us consider the ifra case according to the definition we will prove that n from now on we will assume that because condition is trivially verified otherwise let ln be such that implying that and therefore thatg observe first that implies that sn cannot be concentrated at the preliminary hypotheses showed that the interarrival times cannot be concentrated at zero so assume that and denote by the density function of sn thus therefore now define an and sup an denote by the indicator function of the set a and by ac its complementary since sn then sn and therefore on the other hand taking into account remark we also have if an then define from and along with the fact that is an increasing function we get the two factors inside the expectation always have opposite signs hence the last inequality holds and thus the proof of is completed finally and lead to mixed poisson model as a particular case since in this case the interarrival times are exponential random variables that have logconcave density functions theorem in shaked and shanthikumar yields this section is also concerned with the preservation of the ifr property being result follows from theorem in ross et al who showed this property for a more general definition of renewal process than that considered in dealing with this particular case we make use of the general definition for being ifr as well as the general
by auditioning i m not blonde it s very difficult for my agents they say to me i have a hard time getting you in and all i want is a shot although the most successful female actors and actors of color do not face a level playing field less established actors encounter even greater obstacles to finding good work gabrielle union declared after halle berry does her films and queen latifah does her fight over a couple of roles when the wave of low budget black romances faded despite being consistently profitable the leads of those films including union found work in racially integrated films to be scant and turned to lower status largely supporting roles on television statistical data confirm these anecdotal reports by female actors a study of the top one hundred films in by professor martha lauzen found that seventy seven percent of clearly identifiable protagonists were male and female screen actors guild data reveal that in male sag members worked almost twice as many days in lead roles as female sag members worked the gender disparity was actually slightly greater for supporting parts my independent analysis of the top three lead roles in all commercially released films during and that grossed at least million men as the lead in the films released in a gross overrepresentation of the american male population the gender disparity in for first leads was similar gender diversity increased as the importance of the role decreased for both and women secured the second billed roles which is often the love interest in they obtained and in such roles although sag does not track days worked or income earned by race of actor their casting reports reveal racial disparities according to sag s casting report on film lead roles broke down racially that year as follows white black latino asian and native american my analysis of films revealed similar results illustrating that nearly the lead actors those billed first in the film s credits were white blacks made up almost leads slightly less than their representation in the general population all other minority groups were significantly underrepresented among first leads based on us census bureau data latinos made up a mere such leads compared to the general population asians and asian americans made up compared to there were no native american leads multiracial actors were cast in more roles than either latinos notably many of these multiracial actors are perceived by many viewers as white the racial distribution of the supporting actors in my analysis was similar the data reveal similar patterns the first lead roles were distributed as follows white black latino asian multiracial and native americans accounted for african americans in the top three lead roles in and the picture is more mixed with respect to other people of color multiracial women were more likely to be cast in and than multiracial men latinas made up just latino a leads in but asian women made up the asian leads in but there were no asian female leads in latinas because the sample contains just two years there are significant variances between and and in general the numbers of asians and latinos are very small for instance may be more representative than because was unusual in that it included the asian female driven memoirs of a geisha professor lauzen s study remarked that in general moviegoers were just as likely to see a lead extra terrestrial despite the empirical limitations these numbers on gender may be read to confirm reports of black women having great difficulty obtaining lead roles particularly in big budget films and more recently losing roles to latinas because of prevailing stereotypes it also seems likely that multiracial women and to a somewhat lesser extent latinas and asian women are more likely to even when women and people of color secure roles they may be paid less for their work the industry creates hierarchical tracks and assigns individuals to the various tracks based on race and sex a handsome white male has access to the leading man track the most central and lucrative he can anchor action films with budgets of million or higher a lead in a big budget film can make million or more while a may make as little as the salary of the former younger women are likely to be assigned to the girlfriend track peripheral roles that pay much less a male star s salary may be to times that of his putative leading lady these actors are positioned on separate job tracks as such these actors cannot compete for any role they may desire in keeping with each actor is typically only considered for jobs that replicate his or her prior roles of course being locked into leading man roles in big budget films is not the same as being locked into black films or subsidiary love interest roles the former track ranks at the top of the film industry with status and pay that vastly exceed those of the lower rungs of the industry in this way the industry maintains a race and sex based caste system identity harms experience is identity harm actors of color in film rarely portray characters who just happen to be for instance native american or latino instead studios cast them specifically because of their race and expect them to perform it often in line with negative traits historically ascribed to their group minstrel performances on stage and in song which were exceptionally popular during the which early filmmakers drew the gross distortion of african american representations in early films shows up in their physicality white actors would play african american characters and black up by smearing burnt cork onto their faces typically leaving wide white circles around their lips to create caricatures of the fleshy lips associated with black people both the dark complexion and the americans yet the exaggerated version formed the prototype for future black roles birth of a nation the first blockbuster film illustrates race and sex othering in its crudest form the racial polemic featured white men playing looming bucks
thread therefore the read ports for all four threads are merged into a compact structure with shared read bitlines to reduce area and power the entries aspect ratio the dynamic sense amplifier is designed with a high trippoint for fast single ended sensing the receiver is sized with a highly skewed width ratio a half latch mpk holds the precharged value on the read bitline to overcome leakage from the wide or read port structure to further improve read performance the to and when is not selected it allows the data from the other column to propagate through without delay penalty save and restore operations are combined as a single swap request to eliminate swap blocking across threads the row decoder implements a three stage internal pipeline to handle back to back swap requests the design allows two consecutive swaps to overlap in time logic prevents conflicts between requests on the same thread it also limits swaps to only registers at a time to control peak power integrating flip flops and low phase transparent latches in the final decoder allows the three cycle swap operation to be orchestrated using locally staged save and restore signals these signals the predecoder to generate current window pointers and thread ids for the next swap request fig illustrates back to back swap requests across different threads in a conventional approach swap requests can only be fulfilled every two cycles there is also an increasing latency for each swap for example the second swap request will take three cycles to complete since it has to wait for the complete in contrast this internal decoder pipeline design achieves a single cycle throughput and maintains a fixed three cycle latency besides the gain in performance there is no need for additional external logic or instruction bubble to stall the other requests thereby saving both power and area additional power savings come from the static implementation of the decoder circuitry with the more relaxed self timed margins in read write and swap operations reducing sensitivity and risk due to process voltage and temperature variations special attention was paid to the array layout to ensure better manufacturability of the kb of nonrepairable memory cells across the eight irfs on the chip for instance the array construction includes a of dummy transistors at all interfaces of further reduce process variations interconnect crossbar a critical element in achieving high performance is the high bandwidth interconnect crossbar required to support communication with no starvation between the cores the banks the control register interface and the shared resources the crossbar operates at the core frequency of ghz providing a data bandwidth of gb s or a raw bandwidth of implemented to request arbitrate and transmit physically it is organized in two main blocks the processor to cache and cache to processor each of which is implemented with identical control and datapath structures a two entry queue is available per source destination pair being able to queue up to transactions each way the arbiter dispatches to destinations based on age to ensure with the eight cores on one side and the four banks the floating point unit and the control register interface on the other cpx buses are wide while pcx buses are wide the second challenge was timing keeping the interconnect delays uniform for all bits across all of the different source destination pairs the upper shaded block the two deep queues from the eight cores to of the cache a modular design based on standard cell macros and a semicustom route approach was selected to improve signal integrity and timing convergence these modules were then uniformly tiled to keep routing tracks aligned for maximum area efficiency and to maintain constant delays this ensures identical access times from any core to any one of the banks satisfy data requests from the eight cores the cache is divided into four symmetrical way set associative subsystems which are interleaved on a boundary high associativity allows the working sets of all threads to fit into the cache avoiding excessive conflict misses the independent kb subsystem communicates through the crossbar to transmit and receive requests from any of the threads in addition the dram controller and the system bus each subsystem consists of data and tag srams directory cams a valid used allocate dirty register file and control logic read and write operations support two cycle throughput and eightcycle latency providing an industry leading maximum data read bandwidth of gb s the cache arbiter prioritizes requests from the crossbar crossbar in stage the tag array is accessed in a single cycle to compare the tag information and generate the way select signal in stages and the way select signal is transmitted to the data bank along with the control address and data signals in stages the data bank reads out and transfers the data in stage error correction is performed in stage the final data are sent to manage coherency among the instruction and data caches across all the cores a reverse mapped directory scheme with cam arrays maintains system coherency since the number of lines is less than the number of lines storing cache tags in the cam based directory reduces both area and power physically each directory cam consists of four panels with rows eight of these custom design macros are then and the flops for the i data bits to save power the indexes are arranged such that only one of the eight directory cam macros is enabled each kb data bank is further divided into four subbanks one to all four subbanks can be accessed at a time reading out to of data the logical subbanks are further divided into three physical kb custom array macros each of which subbank to compose the full data bank instantiations of the kb macro along with the datapath block are placed and routed together three key design features in this custom macro allowed the use of automated tools to reduce design cycle matching upper level metals to
the soldering points where the cables are weakest another technique i developed for these applications was to bend the circuit boards by heating them to better follow the human body and painting them to match the design in in barcelona i built a second glove with a different visual appearance with the help of yolande harris the only way to get closer to the human body would be to connect directly to the and brain sensors can be put inside the body or on the skin measuring the small voltage changes of the nerve signals to the muscles at sonology we experimented with this type of interface as well fig the meta trumpet made for jonathan impett the hand in the web with many of these new instrument designs we were aiming for more continuous controls for manipulating sound molding it like clay or sonoputty in the early waisvisz with the concept of a spider s web flexible and with all elements linked we de fig sensorband playing the soundnet signed the web an aluminum frame in an octagonal shape with a diameter of and consisting of six radials and two circles made with nylon wire in of the resulting string parts the physical tension caused by the player was keyboard which would control in the most optimal case only three parameters as in traditional instruments these parameters are linked in a fixed configuration due to the web structure the instrument was difficult to play in a traditional way compared with for instance a keyboard hitting the web with say one finger in the middle would lead to a complex set of changes in many of the parameters of the sound hitting it again in exactly the same way would a keyboard hitting the web with say one finger in the middle would lead to a complex set of changes in many of the parameters of the sound hitting it again in exactly the same way would produce a slightly different set of changes it might seem that we had produced the ultimate useless controller giving a different output with the exactly the same input however there is no such thing as exactly the same input due to slight variations of the movement of the hand each time it hits does so slightly differently which is translated into slight changes in the sound for a human being it is impossible to make exactly the same gesture multiple times there will always be variation i think that the beauty of the sound of traditional instruments has partially to do with the sensitivity of these instruments to these very variations of the player the web still exists it is now part of steim s traveling exhibition touch but it now has so it is easier to play hybrid instruments musicians using traditional instruments often extended the instruments by mechanical means for instance preparations of the piano adding electronic elements to the instrument leads to hybrid instruments or hyperinstruments with these hybrid instruments the possibilities of electronic media can be explored while the instrumentalist can still apply the proficiency acquired after many years of training i have worked with jonathan impett on developing his electronically extended trumpet the meta trumpet using semicircular brass base plates on which to mount the electronics and sensors i made the additions look very much part of the original instrument another design consideration was that the additions should be easily removed so that impett could play baroque or classical music on it we added several switches on the top of the instrument on the outside of the piston tubes motion sensors inside the pistons mercury tilt switches an accelerometer and a ultrasound positioning system enabling the instrument to be played as a gestural controller generally the control parameters of the electronic extensions could be used independently of the original playing techniques with this instrument impett controls his algorithmic compositional computer system another example is the cello yolande harris for frances marie uitti in we made soft pads with switches sliders and sensors controlling processing in the computer from the intimate to the spatial inspired by the web the members of sensorband approached me in to help develop a web on an architectural scale the soundnet is about high and wide to be played by the ensemble by climbing on it to achieve this we string tension sensors to withstand a force of about newton the rest of the instrument consisted of an aluminum frame and shipping rope chosen for its feel and strength as the musicians climbed and bounced their way up and around the soundnet the sounds would change according to their actions the scale was further extended in the global string project developed with atau tanaka and kasper toeplitz from to in two locations we set up long stainless steel strings with various sensors played by the performers and connected to one another via the internet the network became part of the instrument its parameters influencing the sound discussion and conclusions in this paper i have discussed traditional musical instruments as well as new electronic instruments developed in the last decades they are examples of very occurs in an incremental evolutionary way for instance adolphe sax who invented the saxophone around in his workshop in dinant belgium was a renowned clarinet builder and developer of many wind instruments his goal was to develop an instrument that would sound more like a string instrument but without all the disadvantages present in string instruments at that time he did not need to start from scratch but based his designs on existing knowledge of instruments at the he made an instrument that enabled many techniques of expression beyond his knowledge sax could not possibly have had the music of eric dolphy or john coltrane in mind when he invented the saxophone likewise leo fender could not have predicted that jimi hendrix would play the stratocaster by the end of the left handed using acoustic feedback and other effects to
to the results on the wehrl entanglement degree which are presented here for the sake of comparison the applications discussed here show the power and the versatility of wehrl entropy and quantum entropy methods in attacking problems of quantum information theory this study reveals that the time dependent modulated function can be used for generating either entanglement decay or long lived entanglement depending on a proper manipulation of the initial state setting of the system on the mixedstate entanglement as expected the maximum value of the entanglement degree decreases with decreasing occupation probability of the upper atomic level we have found that in general the shape of revival envelopes is a direct reflection of the form of a continuous interpolation of the probability distribution in the particular case of a field initially in a coherent state this explains the appearance of a doublet structure in the revivals in of greatest populations it is of interest to remark that at a special choice of the time dependent coupling we have obtained long periodic entanglement as a result we have predicted the existence of entanglement decay due to the presence of the decoherence parameter we expect that the results of this paper can be of help for some problems especially for quantum computation or quantum information processing because the research in the dynamical properties of multi level atoms or ions locates completely in the field of quantum computation one of the insights provided by quantum information theory is that the von neumann entropy has an interpretation as a measure of the resources necessary to perform an information task thus we may say that in this communication we have covered one of the main important point which treat the effect of the trapped ion field interaction considered we have considered the density operator taking into account the dispersive limit the idea of using the concurrence as an entanglement measure offers many attractive features entanglement is measured via the concurrence currently used only for an arbitrary system of two qubits but a similar analysis can in principle be applied to other systems such as a bipartite system with arbitrary dimensions as we anticipated this system exhibits some novel features in comparison the single qubit system we have found that some different regimes occur depending on the actual initial state and the number of quanta our results indicate that it is perfectly possible to measure the entanglement degree in a general multi level system finally it should be mentioned that one can try to apply the strategy developed in this paper to the case in which multi qubit systems are considered abstract approximation based control is presented for a class of multi input multi output nonlinear systems in block triangular form with unknown state delays neural networks are utilized to approximate and compensate for unknown functions in the system dynamics including the unknown bounds of the functions of delayed states the use of a separation technique removes the need for any assumption on the function of delayed states and allows the multiple delays in each function of delayed states by combining the use of lyapunov krasovskii functionals and adaptive nn backstepping the proposed control guarantees that all closed loop signals remain bounded while the outputs converge to a neighborhood of the desired trajectories simulation results demonstrate the effectiveness of the proposed scheme introduction since they involve infinite dimensional functional differential equations which are more difficult to handle than finite dimensional ordinary differential equations on the practical front it is worth noting that time delay is frequently encountered in models of engineering systems natural phenomena and biological systems some of the useful tools in robust stability analysis for timedelay systems are based on the lyapunov s second method the lyapunov krasovskii theorem and the lyapunov razumikhin theorem these have been applied to time delay systems that richard sun hsieh yang as well those that are nonlinear following its success in stability analysis the utility of lyapunov krasovskii functionals in control design for timedelay systems was subsequently explored inwu linear systems with nonlinear functions of delayed states were considered a class of single input single output nonlinear time delay systems with known bounds on the functions of delayed states but it was commented that the results could not be constructively obtained the need for knowledge of system nonlinearities is removed with the use of adaptive neural network control in ge hong and lee the use of nussbaum type functions as the above mentioned works are essentially based on robust approaches restrictions have been imposed on the functions of delayed states to facilitate lyapunov synthesis which may limit the applicability of the approach to certain practical systems in this paper approximation based control is presented for unov krasovskii functionals and adaptive nn backstepping the proposed control guarantees that all closed loop signals remain bounded while output tracking is achieved using a separation technique we are able to decompose the norm of a general function of delayed states into a series of positive bounding functions of each delayed state this is obtained free of any restrictive al wu in which each function of delayed states carried a common delay and were assumed to be bounded by special functions the extension of results from siso to mimo systems is generally non trivial due to state and input interconnections found in mimo systems which tend to make the analysis much more complex to simplify analysis we consider the the subsystems thus avoiding the need for a decoupling matrix the difficulty is increased when time delays are present and there are currently only few results available in the literature directed at mimo timedelay systems we also show that for the special case whereby the bounds are known the information can be exploited to achieve better quantification of performance bounds furthermore hyperbolic tangent functions are used to handle the singularity problem encountered in lyapunov synthesis the properties of these functions are exploited to show that the nns approximate well defined functions and
actually to create a person who really did view the world by means of a television screen within the perimeter of his body for smythson to accomplish what he expected would be the annihilation of his opponents he thought the thing to do would be would enable him to watch television as he was not able to find an organic head strong enough to hold even a tiny television receiver it was necessary for smythson to create a metal one especially for ludwig a relatively simple task for a man of smythson s knowledge ability and access to funds which the importance of his work made him feel justified in misappropriating because might have supposed it would have to be in order to hold ludwig s brain and eyes as well as a tiny receiver upon which ludwig s eyes were firmly to be fixed smythson put ludwig in front of the receiver with what were now his eyes ordinary organic ones that smythson had found for him in a way that i would prefer not to reveal focused upon its screen to the artificial body that smythson now provided for him in such a way that afferent cables transmitted the impulses that would have moved the limbs of an ordinary organic body in fact moved the limbs of the half organic half artificial object ludwig now inhabited and ludwig was able to control this body s movements just as any other person controlled his organic body with and his command of the best technicians in the world smythson then set out to overcome the deficiencies of an ordinary television set two of which i shall mention among other shortcomings the screen of an ordinary television set is an inset within a background of ordinary veridical experience of things in the vicinity of the person watching it demarcated by mahogany sides from the reality a television receiver it is also impossible with an ordinary set for the viewer to control what he sees on it by means of muscles in the front of his head the first deficiency smythson overcame by first modifying ludwig s eyes so that they could see only objects extremely close to them and then positioning a minute screen so close to is eyes that he could see focus a camera which could be situated just in front of ludwig s screen on whatever it was in its vicinity that he wanted to see it must be said in smythson s defence against the charge of deceiving ludwig about what he was in fact seeing that what in ludwig s case he would have seen if he could have seen the things that surrounded the screen was not a sitting room which is what one usually sees but to ludwig and might have seriously upset him and as a result of smythson s supreme technological expertise the resemblance between the images that ludwig saw on his screen and what other people saw with eyes was so great that it might have been more appropriate to say that he saw things with his screen rather than that he saw things on it smythson s critics refused to acknowledge the apparently obvious conclusion that while a vast amount of knowledge from images on the surface of the television screen that he was now forced to watch for the whole of his waking life indeed since his television was a great improvement on eyes he was actually better off than those self styled realistic philosophers who claimed that they were in direct contact with things as they were ludwig had not over the years entirely lost the interest when he ceased to be subject to the demands of competitive athleticism since what he read was no longer confined to the narrow selection of books and articles to which smythson had been disposed to give him access he became familiar even with views which his mentor disapproved of about homunculi indeed he occupied the camp directly opposite to that held was on the surface of the retina or perhaps in the visual centers of the brain ludwig himself retained the same opposition to any form of representative theory that he had at the time when his experience when he was in his case was entirely hallucinatory he held that if people did not see things directly but saw only representations of them there would have to be a homunculus he thought could be more absurd use of heuristics insights from forecasting research tversky and kahneman originally discussed three main heuristics availability representativeness and anchoring and adjustment research on judgemental forecasting suggests that the type of information on which forecasts are based is the primary factor determining the type of heuristic that used when forecasts are based on information held in memory representativeness is important when the value of one variable is forecast from explicit information about the value of another variable and anchoring and adjustment is employed when the value of a variable is forecast from explicit information about previous values of that same variable although there has been increased emphasis on the adaptiveness of heuristics and increased interest in this way of structuring our knowledge about judgemental forecasting continues to be a useful one iuse it to frame discussion of some recent debates in the area daniel kahneman has made many contributions to the psychology of judgement and decision making his earliest date from the period and focus on the study of heuristics and biases in judgement here i shall be concerned with how the study of judgement in forecasting has innovative line of work much of the original research in the heuristics and biases programme was included in the influential volume edited by kahneman slovic and tversky there the notion that people use simple heuristics rather than complex algorithms was elaborated unlike algorithms heuristics do not provide an optimal way of making judgements and decisions instead they usually produce outcomes that are sufficiently accurate to be lead to
asset recognition contingent asset disclosure contingent liability recognition and contingent liability disclosure samples of the decision making scenarios are presented in the appendix each participant received two independent scenarios one involving the recognition of a contingent asset and another involving the disclosure of a contingent liability to control for any order effect the scenarios were crossed resulting in four versions of the research instrument no the differing presentation order of the scenarios table outlines the four versions of the questionnaire each participant was presented one recognition and one disclosure scenario although each participant responded to two scenarios this is actually a between subjects design where each subject can be viewed as participating in two experiments the recognition scenario tests the conservatism hypothesis while the disclosure scenario tests the secrecy hypothesis responses to the two recognition the two recognition scenarios were used to test the conservatism hypothesis for these scenarios participants were asked to decide whether to recognize an asset in the financial statements as well as how much they would recognize based on an estimated range of damages responses to the two disclosure scenarios were used to test the secrecy hypothesis for these scenarios participants were asked to decide whether to disclose a contingent asset in the notes to the in the notes to the financial statements a diagram outlining the research method and hypothesis testing procedures is presented in figure participants also were administered hofstede vsm questionnaire which was used to calculate indexes for each subject groups cultural the vsm was placed between the first and second financial reporting decisions to reduce the possibility of the first decision influencing the second finally participants respond to demographic questions background questions and attitudinal items related to accounting conservatism variables conservatism was operationalized as a decision to recognize or not recognize a contingent asset or liability in the financial statements the decision was made on a point scale numbered from they would report in the company financial statements within a range of million euros or us secrecy was operationalized as a decision to disclose or not disclose the existence of a contingent asset or liability in the notes to the financial statements again this decision was made on a point scale numbered from lawsuits represent the most common contingency reported in us companies annual reports therefore a lawsuit represented a familiar scenario to us accountants discussions with greek accountants and a review of greek annual reports revealed that lawsuits are a contingency situation faced by greek accountants as well accounting standard that they were asked to apply in making financial reporting decisions in two litigation scenarios the accounting standard was modelled after international accounting standard provisions contingent liabilities and contingent assets ias addresses both the measurement and disclosure of accounting information which makes it suitable for testing both the conservatism and secrecy hypotheses it is a standard that requires considerable judgment in order to apply ias accountants have to assess probability expressions such as irtually certain and robable based on the facts surrounding the contingency accountants must reach a decision on a proper accounting treatment with respect to the lawsuits in the decision potential damages as well as the status of the lawsuits as of the end of the accounting period the lawsuits in the decision scenarios are described in a way that makes it uncertain as to the ultimate outcome of the case this was done to establish ambiguity in the scenarios and force participants to apply the relevant part of ias when making their judgments influence accountants financial reporting decisions first to neutralize any priors associated with the participants home countries the instrument instructed them to assume that they are employed with a company headquartered in western europe to establish the equity market context in which the financial reporting decision was being made participants were informed that their company is publicly traded and that the stock exchange regulator requires the reporting being asked to apply in addition the instrument was imbued with controls for current accounting practice taxation and litigation risk which are discussed in more detail below both greece and the us have rules governing accounting for contingent however neither country rules have procedures for the recognition of contingent assets more importantly at the time data were gathered neither country required companies to follow ias therefore ias acted as a control for current a control for current accounting practice specifically participants were informed that stock exchange regulators require the use of the accounting standard this assisted in isolating the impact of culture on accountants financial reporting judgments independent of their country existing rules the greek tax records code prescribes the accounting records and related corporate income therefore participants also were instructed that there were no tax implications to their decision this acted as a control to discourage greek accountants from basing their decisions on potential tax consequences wingate reports that the us has a higher litigation index than greece to address this issue participants the company is based rarely are sued this was done primarily to discourage us accountants from basing their responses on litigation risk to avoid any extraneous accounting and risk concerns participants were informed that both parties to the lawsuit possess good management sound financial health stable performance over time and that all estimated amounts are material instrument pretesting was conducted using accountants in the us the pretests were used to ensure that the instrument was understandable to reveal errors in the design and to identify potentially inadequate controls pretesting with academic colleagues also was conducted to further refine the instrument based on pretesting feedback the wording of the scenarios was modified to highlight better the ambiguity inherent in the decisions after pretesting the english version was reviewed a native greek speaker familiar with business terminology translated the instrument the instrument into greek a second native greek speaker retranslated the instrument back into english and any discrepancies were carefully resolved in addition any us dollar estimates in the english language version were translated into euros in
old established traditions slip away into modernism as represented by jazz racial integration and religious skepticism the presence of saalburg s poster forces shuffleton s barbershop into this framework international war domestic invasion the possibility of future danger and the ghosts of soldiers smithsonian institution military history reproduced by permission rockwell still may have included a coded irony that perhaps only he alone was privy to even in a tranquil landscape like shuffleton s barbershop one can expect to encounter such distinctly rockwellian bits of witty visual dissonance coda their presences in these communities altered the small town climate they originally sought out bringing cosmopolitan attention to remote regions of new england rockwell with his saturday evening post covers which identified and parodied by dorothy canfield fisher in her play tourists accommodated the play is a collection of short vignettes about tourists from the cities who swarmed into arlington in the summer and was first published as part of the work of the dauntingly titled committee for the conservation of vermont the perceived lack of culture in vermont was a sore subject best exemplified by the character of the pretentious tourist whose condescension is mocked by fisher s over the top dialogue pretentious tourist influence in their lives how sad it must be for them when the summer people go away in the autumn and they are left to their sordid penny pinching existence with nothing to elevate their minds and broaden their fisher precedes this tourist s short monologue with a brief commentary country people in real life with the help of carl ruggles another urban immigrant a modest and rather occasional musical life had developed in arlington there was the arlington community chorus which used the local high school every so often to present concert versions of works such as dido and and perform recitals for one another the local high school had no fewer than five separate choirs further south in massachusetts professional music thrived there was the tanglewood music festival and williams college which in october sponsored productions of the first complete operas ever to have been staged in the area special artists that season in williamstown included the paganini quartet claudio arrau and richard dyer bennett but further north in southern vermont bennington college was the only regional center which offered a modest musical season concerts by the bennington community chorus as well as several local instrumental ensembles bennington was also a touring destination of by alan carter when the orchestra performed there in april a fairly opinionated arlington correspondent for the bennington evening banner offered this call to arms tickets possessions fine maple sugar superb morgan horses beautiful marbles and unrivalled scenery an excellent name for the advance we are making in musical lack of rich substantial classical music in vermont in an essay for a national magazine appropriately titled why i live where i live fisher debated with herself the value of living far away from the nation s great cultural institutions good much good music is to be heard outside of great centers of population occasionally a soloist once in a blue moon a quartet very very seldom any symphony orchestras and if the mood passes you can turn them off they are good so far as they go they are an immense solace yet it is no use to pretend that music at same dulling of the edge of my zest a couple of years ago we were in paris for the winter by easter i found that my pleasure was actually less than it but to polished performances of the classical western fisher aware of the scarcity of presentations of good music in vermont described the aforementioned performance of the holy city as a miraculous impossible act of creation and sent ruggles admiring bewondering amazed congratulations reserved for cosmopolitans like fisher but such performances of good music were rare in arlington and fisher in the essay excerpted above resigns herself to view rural solace and cultural prowess as irreconcilable this same tension between high and low culture operates in shuffleton s s music enlightens these utterly ordinary middle class surroundings by having the trio play a composition of a european cosmopolite rockwell has in a sense elevated the musical sensibilities of these amateur musicians who were previously the equivalents of fisher s village folk or the pretentious tourist s rustics making their music as country fiddlers or members of east arlington s did rockwell grants privileged cultural access to these small town amateur musicians and more generally to the wider middle class readership of the saturday evening post whose middle brow sensibilities were well reflected both on and inside the magazine s that this artistic elevation might involve adolf busch further enriches this cultural narrative after all busch s marlboro school was designed to help the amateur musician interact professionals alike and by focusing the school s attention on chamber music busch ambitiously sought to change and correct what he perceived as a cool reception to this repertoire from american audiences as rockwell writes i like to think that the best illustrators over the years somehow caught the true character of the world in which they lived and that world has been culture with three amateur chamber musicians contenting themselves with the act of making music playing for pleasure utterly without pretension in the humblest of surroundings busch surely would have approved disability technology and place social and ethical implications of long term dependency on medical devices life and or improve functionality but they can also contribute to stigmatization and social exclusion in this paper drawing from a study of ten men with duchenne muscular dystrophy we explore the complex social processes that mediate the lives of persons who are dependent on multiple medical and assistive technologies in doing so we consider the embodied and emplaced nature of disability and how life is lived through bodies coupled with technologies and experienced as techno body situ normative implications for theory and research
the spatial perspective of the move as being communicative with the specific intent being to obtain an interview the semantic field for this spatial perspective is comprised of lexica such as phone discuss qualification contact mail meet and interview which all showed significant differences in frequency when compared crosswise between the move and the entire corpus a both and writers shared common semantic fields in the writing of this move and no significant differences were noted between the words phone discussion meet interview or mail writers were again significantly more likely to discuss their qualifications than writers writers were significantly more likely to employ the word contact than writers as well temporal perspective constructing this move and both the effectively used modals to refer to the future possibility of conducting an interview with the employer as well as temporal cue words writers used the present tense and the past tense less often than writers but not significantly so writers also used modal aspects more often than writers but not significantly so were significantly more likely to use imperatives than writers can which they employed as politeness strategies but there was no significant difference in their use users were more likely to use the temporal cue word future but not significantly so i am excited about the opportunities that your company may hold and am eager to discuss how i may become a part of the team i hope i have a chance to interview with you so that you could get to know me better acknowledging appreciation spatial perspective of the phrase thank you for your time nevertheless the move does appear to have a unique chronotope with the spatial perspective being labeled a considerate space directed at the reader this is clearly seen in the use of the spatial markers consideration thank and time in the move which all showed significance in frequency differences when compared crosswise between the move and the entire corpus were noted between the use of the words thank and time a significant difference was noted in the use of the word consideration with writers being less likely to refer to the reader s consideration than writers temporal perspective the general temporal perspective of this move is the present both and writers a significant difference was noted in the use of the past tense is corpus writers were also significantly more likely to use the temporal cue word forward than writers in this corpus the imperative was not used examples from corpus and consideration thank you for your kind attention and hoping to hear from you soon discussion in view of the above analysis it appears that each move has a unique primary spatiotemporal perspective this perspective referred to as the move s chronotope seems to help shape the move and delimit the move s boundaries which separate the move from those that precede and follow it since all discourse is the result of a particular speaker occupying a particular time spatio temporal perspectives within cover letters seem to have an intrinsic function in portraying purpose and meaning in moves this approach toward embodiment of purpose serves to locate the writer in a specific time and space and presents the writer within this time and space in order to portray amodal communication as being more grounded in a temporal and spatial reality that can be better understood by the reader the use of bahktin s chronotope helps flesh out what these temporal and spatial perspectives are and how they are used within different moves to represent different intentions while the chronotopic perspectives discussed here demonstrate variation within the moves themselves primary temporal and spatial perspectives are apparent while the general semantic fields that structure spatial perspectives within moves were recognized and generally followed by both and writers there was in the use of temporal perspective than spatial perspectives across moves these deviations should not be indicative of weak chronotopic cohesion within moves but rather of supporting the idea that genres are living texts that change with the needs of the users and accept to a certain degree irregularity over time accordingly genres should not be seen as rigid formulas but permeable organizations of moves that are able to accept change on the chronotope this research also considered dissimilarities between writers and writers in their production of chronotopic moves while differences were documented between the two groups it should be noted that writers generally produced cover letters that adhered to the principles of a generic moves analysis in terms of the use of appropriate moves and the ordering of these moves most of the writers in this corpus seemed competent in producing cover the expected structural requirements a deeper analysis of these moves based on the chronotope revealed that although the writers followed the proper structure for producing a cover letter they were often unaware of the chronotopic syntactic and semantic expectations that occur within the moves themselves this analysis of cover letters reveals that while writers often keep to the primary spatial expectations of a move they may sometimes use lexicon that are not within the semantic fields constructed by writers additionally writers may not use accepted spatial markers to the same degree as writers the use of temporal perspectives however seems to be more problematic for writers who frequently assembled moves in this corpus based on a temporal perspective outside that which is ordinarily used by writers this includes significant differences in the use of the past tense in the move referring to job advertisement auxiliaries in the move stating reasons for applying the use of the past tense in the move promoting candidate the use of both the past tense and modal auxiliaries in the move enclosing documents the use of imperatives in the move requesting contact and the use of the past tense in the move acknowledging appreciation some of the differences in the use of modal auxiliaries can be attributed to the use of politeness strategies especially in the move stating
solve when covering planes were used and only seconds when the gomory facility was also used conclusions the principal conclusion has to be that in order to make a comprehensive assessment of the entirely devoted to case studies but of course there are other journals where case studies can be found such as omega european journal of operational research journal of the operational research society as well as other non or journals whose main focus is on an industrial context although there are a few non usa cases reported in our sample the international picture may be biased by our choice we would certainly be very interested to see a much more though we have not at present any intention of carrying it out ourselves within the limits of the foregoing caveat what can we say that our survey has shown us certainly we can say that it is apparent that ilp has reached a level of maturity that enables live management decision problems to be routinely solved this has been achieved by an enormous increase in computing power major improvements to the ilp solution codes and good formulation and a finer knowledge of the mathematical structure of some common formulation constructs the other growth this survey reveals is the use of modelling software the sophisticated features offered by such software mean that it is no longer or very rarely necessary to write an application specific matrix generator there is clearly an increasing use of ilp over time so we look forward to the model based quantification of the volatility of options at transaction level with the extended count regression models claudia czadoz and andreas kolbe summary in this paper we elaborate how poisson regression models of different complexity can be used in order to model absolute transaction price changes of an exchange traded security when combined with an adequate autoregressive conditional duration model our modelling approach can be used to construct a complete modelling framework for a security s absolute returns at transaction level and framework for a security s absolute returns at transaction level and thus for a model based quantification of intraday volatility and risk we apply our approach to absolute price changes of an option on the xetra dax index based on quote by quote data from the eurex exchange and find that within our bayesian framework a poisson generalized linear model with a latent ar process in the mean is the best model for our data according to the deviance information criterion while according to our modelling results the price development of the underlying the while according to our modelling results the price development of the underlying the intrinsic value of the option at the time of the trade the number of new quotations between two price changes the time between two price changes and the bid ask spread have significant effects on the size of the price changes this is not the case for the remaining time to maturity of the option introduction motivation and related research tra high frequency financial data has become a new focus of academic interest since quotation and transaction data provide detailed information about the trading and asset pricing process the books by bauwens and giot and dacorogna et al are two examples of publications covering various aspects related to this field of research an introduction to the econometric modelling of ultra high frequency financial data as well as a survey of current and future topics of research in this field is given by given by hautsch and pohlmeier one focus of current research is the further development of autoregressive conditional duration models based on the work of engle and russell while other publications are concerned with the adequate modelling of the price process at transaction level within a count data framework since transaction price changes of exchange traded securities are measured in multiples of a smallest possible incremental price change count data models which allow for the incorporation of other marks count data models which allow for the incorporation of other marks of the trading process as regressors are used if adequately combined with an acd model as eg in the recent acm acd model of engle and russell models for transaction price changes can be used to construct a complete modelling framework for a security s price process in continuous time rydberg and shephard decompose the price process at transaction level into three components another binary process on modelling the direction of the price move and a process on strictly positive integers modelling the absolute value of the price move liesenfeld and pohlmeier develop quite a similar model called integer count hurdle model where the two binary processes of the rydberg shephard model are incorporated into a price movement upwards or price movement downwards in both publications some explanatory variables are incorporated into the modelling and the models are applied to stocks traded at the nyse and the frankfurt stock exchange respectively in this paper we concentrate on the statistical modelling of the last component of the previously described approaches and consider only absolute non zero transaction price changes our modelling approach can then be combined with an adequate acd model in order then be combined with an adequate acd model in order to give a complete modelling framework for a security s absolute returns and thus for a model based quantification of intraday volatility and risk in the context of the modelling of asset price volatility the empirical process of absolute intraday returns have proven to be a good empirical measure for the asset s instantaneous volatility for example in order to estimate parameters in for example in order to estimate parameters in a stochastic volatility model one can observe the asset s absolute return or price change in a time interval dt and consider this empirical measure as a proxy for sdt and to quantify their influence while rydberg and shephard liesenfeld and pohlmeier as well as engle and russell use observation driven time series models
the coefficients on share do not become insignificant because their standard errors increase rather the coefficients on share become insignificant because very close to zero once we add country and year fixed effects the coefficients without fixed effects are also well outside the onfidence intervals for the coefficients with fixed effects table shows that even with country year observations the relationship between income inequality and mortality is not robust to including both country and year fixed effects this finding suggests that time series correlations between mortality in studies of only one or two rich countries may be inflated by unobserved factors that affect both inequality and mortality in many rich countries table presents several sensitivity tests columns and of table are identical to columns and of table columns and show that when we add to the basic specifications in columns and is significant for both life expectancy and infant mortality its sign indicates that the of additional gdp diminishes as gdp rises which is consistent with the cross sectional results in preston and deaton however including does not change our conclusions about the effect of income inequality the coefficient on share remains insignificant and the sign is now reversed for both life expectancy and infant mortality one potential objection to the results presented thus far is that the time series may actually of mortality changed dramatically over the course of the century and the effects of economic inequality could have changed as a result in england and wales for example infectious diseases accounted for all deaths in but only this epidemiologic transition which occurred throughout the developed world accounted for most of the increase in life expectancy between and once it was complete increases in and became largely dependent on progress in reducing mortality from degenerative conditions like heart disease and cancer if income inequality affected mortality from infectious and degenerative diseases differently combining data for these two periods could be misleading columns and drop the years prior to leaving only the country year observations between and because annual changes in life expectancy are smaller after than eq are both smaller and more precisely estimated than those in eq nonetheless the coefficient of share is still insignificant and still has the wrong sign nor does variation in the rate of growth in gdp have a significant effect on life expectancy after in these rich because we log the infant mortality rate its variance does not fall as the absolute rate approaches zero the coefficient of share when predicting infant mortality is larger in post sample than in the full sample but the point estimate still suggests that increases in income inequality are more likely to be associated with reductions in infant mortality than with increases and the confidence interval still includes zero gdp and are also still significant in short we find no clear evidence that the effect of either gdp or income inequality on either life expectancy or infant mortality looks different when we focus on the years since than look at a longer time period columns and include both public and private health the expenditures as well as the mean number of years of schooling completed by the adult population adding these potentially endogenous controls does reduce the absolute size of the coefficients on share especially when predicting life expectancy but since the confidence intervals of all the relevant coefficients include zero the most parsimonious explanation is that all these changes are due to the models in tables and treat the relationship between income inequality and mortality as if it were almost instantaneous although the literature on inequality and mortality often makes this assumption it is not entirely plausible some of the hypotheses we have discussed do suggest that the lag between a change in inequality and a change in mortality could be quite short if inequality were positively related to violent deaths for example the mortality effect might in the same year as the income change although any second order effects on levels could take longer to kill people likewise if rising inequality leads to a decline in the absolute income of the poor mortality might rise in the same year especially among but some of the hypotheses we have discussed suggest that the lag between a change in inequality and a change in mortality could be fairly long if inequality affects health by weakening the social fabric or by of relative deprivation for example these effects could take some years to influence mortality to assess the importance of lags we estimate a variant of eq that includes inequality lagged by years we estimate eq using various combinations of lags ranging from to years table presents and and year through year lagged inequality table repeats this exercise including lagged gdp and in each case we estimate the linear sum of the share coefficients which is a summary measure of the overall impact of lagged inequality on current mortality using only year lags we find no statistically significant relationship between inequality and mortality when we include multiple lagged terms specific lags are sometimes statistically significant but their implied effects are offset by the fact that other lags have the opposite sign summing year and year lags or year through year lags we found no significant relationship between inequality and mortality overall we find no robust relationship between changes in current mortality and changes in economic inequality over the past years the coefficients of the controls in contrast mostly accord with the expectations increases in gdp are associated with increases in life reductions in infant mortality both the effects diminish as gdp rises increases in public and private health spending are associated with lower mortality but the coefficients are not statistically some researchers have suggested that even if there is no relationship between inequality and overall mortality there may be a relationship between inequality and homicide argue for example that technological innovations tend to affect the uk about years later than the us however
swelling ratio of all the systems over the temperature range from to decreases with increasing temperature the hydrophilic interactions of the polymer networks by way of hydrogen bonds between the amide groups with water become exposed and this increases their hydrophobic interactions further leading to reduced intake of water molecules in previous results pure pnipaam has been shown to have an lcst of about however the sharp transition typical of pure pnipaam is not seen in figure is observed to show a gradual decrease until it becomes almost constant between before showing a slight decrease again between and a broadened transition is therefore observed for all the systems between and a similar broadened transition has been reported by leobandung et in the temperature sensitivity analysis of nanoparticles of poly isopropylacylamide co poly methacrylate in which they used were used to characterize the hydrogel network structure by determining the mesh size using methods previously using appropriate assumptions the mesh sizes in the swollen state at were determined to be approximately and a for the egdma tegdma and cross linked systems respectively the mesh sizes of these highly cross linked the particles within the networks furthermore no particle release was observed in the uv wash analysis the presence of wt magnetic nanoparticles did not show any significant effect on the equilibrium swelling ratios of these hydrogels synthesized at mol cross linking and they also did not affect the temperature sensitivity of the hydrogels as there nanoparticles in the hydrogel did not introduce any significant changes this is shown in figure for and wt magnetic nanoparticles in tegdma cross linked systems in addition initial studies have demonstrated that these systems can be heated above their transition temperature with a high frequency magnetic field and detailed studies of the swelling response as a result hydrogel composites have been synthesized with different molecular weight cross linking of pegndma these composites have been characterized by establishing their swelling responses as a function of cross linking type temperature and loading of magnetic particles the results indicate that the swelling rates and equilibrium volume swelling ratio increase the pegndma chains were shown to broaden the phase transition of pnipaam the presence of the magnetic nanoparticles and their concentration changes did not have any significant effect on the temperature sensitivity of the composites in summary magnetically responsive hydrogel networks based on composites of magnetic nanopar a foundation for the further development of these and similar nanocomposite systems these nanocomposites show great promise as active components of microscale and nanoscale devices and are expected to have a wide applicability in various biomedical applications simulations eliminates statistical noise and improves computational performance by orders of magnitude in this paper it is also shown that if a random timestep is used in place of a fixed timestep there is an additional improvement in performance this performance can be increased by using a timestep that samples a random variable with a high kurtosis probability density function as a simple example of the method the one dimensional diffusion equation with an exponentially simulated and a performance gain of approximately two is obtained applications to numerical simulations of fluids and plasmas are indicated introduction finite difference time domain fluid and particle in cell simulations use a fixed timestep dt to update the field quantities here i will discuss the advantages of using an exponentially distributed timestep because the timestep dt is random with an exponential distribution the exact time dt is not formally known the relevant time in a random timestep code is just the expectation value which is equivalent to the sure time for a fixed timestep code the motivation for using random timesteps in physics simulation codes is illustrated with a simple example based on the diffusion equation in general this random timestep method may be applicable to the wide range of simulation codes described by the fokker planck equation simulation monte carlo method is the principal computational method for fluids and rarefied flows involving gases and vapors having low density regions and boundary layers it also has application to the simulation of microelectromechanical systems such as micropumps microvalves and microturbines although the dsmc method is extensible to any process described by the fokker planck equation it is deficient as a computational tool since its error is inversely the square root of the sample size the slow convergence of the method necessitates the use of a large number of computational particles per grid cell hence dsmc may not be practical for a number of applications as a remedy some recent publications have proposed using the burnett equations or variance reduction techniques such as information preservation dsmc or molecular block themselves problematic for example at large knudsen number the burnett equations are not only quite complicated but also unstable to small wavelengths in addition results for the mb dsmc technique have been found to significantly disagree with those of classical dsmc the quickly converging simulation technique called quiet direct simulation monte carlo has been shown to have application to plasma and fluid flow and other processes described by the fokker fokker planck equation because it is based on high order deterministic sampling instead of random sampling no stochastic noise is generated in this paper the use of qdsmc with an exponential timestep is introduced it is shown that even for the simple example of one dimensional diffusion simulation times can be improved over qdsmc by at least a factor of two stochastic advance of a particle in phase space by a deterministic sampling chosen to preserve the low order moments of the normal random variable for example a normal update of a particle initially at a position is defined by where dt is a fixed timestep and is a normal random variable with zero mean and unit variance which the gaussian quadrature approximation becomes exact when the function is a linear combination of the polynomials the quantities q and w are known as gauss hermite parameters unlike lower order quadrature schemes like simpson s method which involve evaluating at evenly
diagnosed with and treated for asthma and experienced remission of all symptoms second locals now have trouble using their nerves in impression management to defend or to legitimate their behavior in the eyes of others the motives of a woman who complains of nerves are now suspect for example a women who claimed her bad nerves drove her to open a store was criticized not admitting her more pecuniary motives in the present economic climate of overt economic competition third any woman who complains of nerves today tends to be viewed as a chronic complainer with no real validity to her complaints such women are ridiculed as worrying over nothing and doing it just to get attention discourse about worry and living a hard life as a fishermen s wife is no longer a shared positive value in the community younger people to whom the road and all it the language of nerbes is a rebellion of youth against the values of stoic endurance self sacrifice and hard work that used to govern a mature woman s impression management and were integral parts of women s individual and collective high self esteem the notion that suffering builds character was not widely subscribed to by the young and middle aged women in medicalization of menopause the past in the no one knew what the word menopause meant if a woman the change of life she asked other village women who had gone or were going through it older women were viewed as the experts on this matter there was a strong tradition of shared knowledge and recognition of a great deal of situational and individual variation although women had heard of a physician who prescribed horse s piss for hot flashes they were extremely skeptical of the notion that medicine had much to offer a woman on the change of life albeit a natural phenomenon menopause was not seen as an especially easy one local women did believe it could last from to years and recognized and experienced most of the symptoms noted by biomedicine locals also told me that there were hardships encountered at every stage of life and that the kind of women who had problems on the change were the kind of women who were most likely to have problems all through their lives women urged each other to fight their symptoms not to give into them and lives as normal the worst that could happen because of the change was that a woman would stay at home and isolate herself from the public social life of the community in cases like this it was up to friends neighbors and kin to see that the woman got out and became involved in extra household activities the change of life was welcomed by many as the end of child rearing and flashes and heavy bleeding were regarded as good in that they burned away impurities that could the blood in the postmenstrual years older women thought that young mothers and children ought to have priority for medical care older women who had more emotional strength could cope on their own although the change of life was yet to be medicalized birth and birth control in the were topics of heated debate hospital births were universally approved of but medical forms of birth control including abortion were condemned by the middle aged women who held sway in the the pill was regarded as so easy it had to be sinful and young women who opted for tubal ligation after one or two children were thought to be doing irreparable damage to themselves every women s visit to the doctor was the topic of public speculation and debate over the nature and legitimacy of her complaints there was no recognized right to privacy in medical concerns the intentions and abilities of local physicians were largely suspect and a local woman with a nursing degree was considered to be way above herself since she was too young or untried by life to give health advice thus although medical technology and services were becoming more available the value and traditional belief systems of older women who continued to dominate the moral order of community life nevertheless provided the contexts for their assessment the present today menopause is called the menopause women going through the menopause today gave birth to their children in a have spent a lifetime on birth control or have had tubal ligations in their they learn about menopause from their physicians the mass media or from their daughters or granddaughters who have had high school and or college biology classes in the newfoundland women have accepted the western biomedical rhetoric of menopause but their perspective does remain somewhat idiosyncratic osteoporosis is not a noted concern nor is heart disease associated with menopause because viewed as a potential health problem for villagers of both sexes and all ages today locals do see menopause as a time of life when they will be under a doctor s care they medicalize menopause by associating it with womb dysfunctions and cancer menopause is now seen as a time for hysterectomy and subsequent hormone treatments or emotional difficulties that one may need to see a therapist about whatever decisions are made are private shared communication about medical treatment criticism of medical professionals or side effects and failures of treatment there is little personal revelation in these conversations as they focus on postoperative infections their last blood pressure readings or the names of drugs being taken three examples illustrate what has become the more private nature of health care concerns the first involves a woman in her mid forties who confided to me that she had been in constant communication with her physician over whether or not she hormones at menopause she said she did not want to have to take them and hoped to cope with any problems she might encounter by herself but if her physician recommended hormones she would take them
the chinese data set the test of sampling adequacy was acceptable with a kasier meyer olkin result of the model explained the total variance and the reliabilities that conducting factor analysis on these data is appropriate the results of the factor analysis with factor scores and their corresponding cronbach s alphas are presented in table the factors are labeled social bonds time and effort confidence service recovery emotional bonds alternatives benefits of staying and switching costs in fact almost identical across the two sets of results these are time and effort alternatives social bonds service recovery and emotional bonds two factors are similar across the two sets of results switching costs and confidence finally one factor in the chinese data is relatively unique and is labeled benefits of staying each of these factors are now examined more closely feel he or she is unable to switch service providers and is unwilling to take further action because of the perceived time and energy required to look for a new provider switch to a new provider learn about a new provider and then build a relationship with a new provider the reasons within this factor for both sets of results are identical and include time and effort involved in looking for a new provider time another time and effort involved in learning about the new provider and effort involved in establishing a new relationship with another service provider these results are similar to time and effort costs and search costs unearthed in previous research but very different in that this theme was alternatives customers may be reluctant to switch either because of the lack of attractive alternatives or because they do not know of any existing alternatives that would be better thus customers might have decided to stay because they were concerned that the alternatives may be worse they did not know of any alternatives or they did not think that the being no better off all providers are the same and being worse off devil you know versus the devil you do nt or the lesser of two evils again this factor was exactly the same in both sets of results this theme is again somewhat consistent with past research jones mothersbaugh and beatty and patterson and smith refer to the attractiveness better than the current provider this research highlights that the lack of knowledge of any alternatives and the fear of being worse off with an alternative are additional important elements the third factor that has a similar structure is social bonds respondents in both countries indicated that they stayed even after seriously considering switching because they had some sort of a relationship or rapport with their customers to their service providers the reasons that were common across the two factors were staff at their current service provider understand them they know the staff at their current provider they are recognized by the staff at their current provider and they get on well with the staff at their current provider the new zealand data have two friendly staff and current service provider has best interests at heart previous research has focused on relationships and friendships as a reason to stay but this research indicates that it is even more basic than this simply knowing staff and being recognized by staff at their current service provider are important reasons to stay two sets of results are service recovery and emotional bonds these are unique relative to previous research into staying reasons the service recovery factor relates to improvements that have been made or problems handled well these are incidents that convinced customers to stay after they considered leaving this factor relates to incidents where a complaint they made was handled well a offerings in terms of the emotional bonds factor customers stated they stayed because they were afraid that they would hurt the provider s feelings if they left they would be too embarrassed to tell their current provider that they were leaving and they felt a sense of loyalty to their service provider provider two other factors confidence and switching costs have the same name but the structures of the factors are slightly different across the two data sets in terms of confidence both factors in china and new zealand have the same name as they relate to a comfort or feeling of security experienced by customers as a result of an already established connection with their current service provider this factor feeling of comfort trust in their service provider satisfaction with their service provider familiarity with service provider a history with the current service provider and no critical incidents have occurred to prompt leaving as noted later the unearthing of the novel items of history and lack of a critical incident turn out to be very important factors which we label confidence and benefits of staying as seen in table importantly the concept of confidence as a reason to stay is a unique discovery of this research and is critical to our understanding of staying reasons as we discuss later the second factor that has a similar theme across data either positive or negative the reasons within the chinese results include the financial cost of switching specialized knowledge possessed by their current provider that would be difficult to get elsewhere other family members or friends also use their current provider and a previous bad switching experience deters moving again clearly consumers feel trapped to a certain extent by to it where the reasons are the financial cost of switching current service provider is convenient concerned about possible problems caused by switching and perceived future benefits of staying although the factors discovered between the chinese and the new zealand results were very similar cultural differences their current service provider relative importance of staying reasons another central objective of this study is to discover the relative importance of customers staying reasons table reveals the importance ranking for each of the factors within the three service industry types from the new zealand
it seems as if it were even if a presuppositionless inquiry were possible in every other respect the mere act of taking up such inquiry would itself constitute a kind of assumption namely i take it that this whatever it is is an appropriate way to begin but it appears that just that assumption is sufficient to scupper any pretensions to absolute systematicity hegel s paradox of beginning then is simply this any inquiry begins by making proper to philosophical inquiry that it begins without making an assumption of any kind a full account of how hegel sets about resolving this problem would require a deeply involved treatment of a large body of notoriously difficult work yet since as we shall see kierkegaard s criticisms are of a rather general nature a fairly schematic overview should suffice here the important question for our purposes is how hegel conceives a solution resolve it not whether he can in fact make good these ambitions and the essential structure of what i shall present as a two staged strategy is displayed by the following two procedural constraints on any inquiry which seeks an absolute beginning and which hegel seeks to respect begins with applies to the form or method of inquiry and regulates how the beginning is to be established and whereas uses the verb to begin in the sense of treating something as primitive or prior uses the verbal noun beginning in the sense of an ultimate justification or ground or rationale on the other hand immediacy and spontaneity are of course closely related these may be defined synonymously as freedom from external mediation or prior determination so requires that the inquiry begins with that which is free from the mediation of or prior determination by anything else and says that it must establish its own methodological foundations without the aid of any external or predetermined method hegel combines these two procedural constraints as an abstract beginning and so it may not presuppose anything must not be mediated by anything or have a ground rather it is to be itself the ground of the entire science consequently it must be purely and simply an immediacy or rather immediacy itself the motivation for and should already be fairly whatever the inquiry may not deploy any concepts it has not itself determined and whatever methodological requirements are invoked these must be justified in the course of the search since no constraints may simply be assumed ostensibly a procedure that satisfied both constraints would disarm the paradox of beginning they show us how to proceed if we want to make an absolute beginning but says precisely that an absolute beginning must not presuppose any methodological constraints it may appear therefore that is self stultifying that it is a constraint against all constraints a presupposition of presuppositionlessness results of his earlier work the phenomenology of the apparent self contradiction here is no doubt too apparent to be a slip and may well contain a clue to hegel s strategy for avoiding the danger of self stultification for hegel is surely inviting us to concur that by the time of writing the logic he had already demonstrated by means of an entirely free standing inquiry precisely the necessity of such searching in that case taking the results of the phenomenology for granted as he begins the logic whilst claiming in the wider context to have presupposed nothing whatsoever in broad outline the plan at work here may be reconstructed as follows suppose it were shown that it is only on a misguided view of the nature of philosophical inquiry that it is so much as a genuine possibility that such inquiry could proceed without conforming to and then it would have take and on trust but will nonetheless proceed in accordance with them since there simply is no other way to proceed and provided these things had been demonstrated in a way that did not itself presuppose any methodological norms or substantive doctrines it would thereby have been shown that and are spontaneously generated by a rational inquiry rather than being imposed own demands and so allows for its explicit invocation in further inquiry without danger of self stultification in this way hegel apparently envisaged his earlier work as performing a via negativa towards a properly philosophical form of inquiry by revealing the inadequacy of uncritical and non reflexive forms of thought and this is perhaps the sense in which the phenomenology furnishes an introduction ready to begin science proper the phenomenology would have us observe the incoherence of forms of thought that attempt to begin without conforming to and in short this prolegomenon to philosophical science would diagnose just what it is that goes wrong with any attempt to understand the world and our place in it in a way that falls short of a pure form of thought the results of which might also explain the tendency of impasse and this would then provide the necessary impetus to motivate and without simply assuming these in such as way as to contravene their own stipulations all this of course requires that the preliminary negatively oriented inquiry proceeds in a way that does not itself contravene for this reason it is of the utmost methodological importance that the phenomenology offers no more than an immanent critique of its targeted unsatisfactory by their own lights rather than according to some presupposed criterion of truth or adequacy or success note that in this light the notion of immanent critique appears less a kind of proof strategy as though tests for internal coherence were somehow the most valuable critical tools than a provision for ensuring that methodological requirements properly emerge in the very process of inquiring it simply to take for granted some norm of internal coherence it is clear however that hegel s preliminary inquiry does have a fixed and limited subject matter for it studies namely any starting point any formation of consciousness that violates the constraints on
squared errors so the optimization is simplified has a faster convergence and has proved to be independent from the starting parameter values parameters vs density models only a few micro mechanical models like the gibson model include the density effect for a more general description while phenomenological models which are more commonly used in numerical simulations are identified and used for single foam with a defined density the drawback on the practical use of the gibson model lies on the necessity to have information on the microstructure of the foam and select the corresponding relations the phenomenological models can be identified experimentally without any knowledge of the physical behavior and are extensively used in finite element codes the available experimental data can be utilized in order to account for density effect in phenomenological models for this aim the identified models have been further analysed in order to obtain the relationship between material density parameters and to develop mathematical formulations suitable to describe this dependence the range of density for which experimental data are available on different types of foams seems to be large enough to be used for the development of more general laws applicable to a wide variety of rigid foams in the case of the gibson model the parameters density relationships are an assumption of the model itself which have be eventually verified by comparison with the experimental gibson model the gibson model includes the density effect on parameters as a consequence of the micro mechanical deformation mechanisms which are the basis of the model itself therefore theoretically the experimental data are not necessary in order to quantify density effects this feature of the gibson model is useful when few experimental data on the density effect are available on the other hand the availability of some experimental data on foamed materials at different could be useful to better describe the real density effect for this aim the structure of the gibson parameters density laws was maintained but its parameters have been identified by means of the experimental data elastic modulus in case of open cell foams the variation of the elastic modulus with density is modelled by gibson with the following relation is made the density of the foam and rs the density of the solid material this equation indicates that the elastic modulus of the foam depends only on the density of the foam given the solid material and the relationship is known once a single parameter ce is identified although gibson and ashby obtained an estimate of the value of ce by theory identification of the ce parameter can also be performed on the basis of experimental data experimental data for each specimen the proposed relation identified by fitting these data and the original gibson relation are shown and compared in fig for each type of foam identified ce values are reported in the second column of table yield stress for open cell foams with plastic collapse behavior the variation of the plastic collapse stress with density is modelled by gibson with the following relation and sys the yield stress of the solid material as made for the elastic modulus the equation can be written in the following form the values of parameter cy can be identified by curve fitting the experimental data of the plastic collapse stress for each considered foam the plastic collapse stresses and the curves obtained with relations and are shown in fig for each type of foam identified cy values are reported in the third column of table for the densification strain parameter gibson proposes the equation this relationship is not derived directly from micro mechanical mechanisms it is defined with a semiempirical approach so that the value can be substituted by a constant to be identified the densification strains identified on the basis of the experimental data and the curves obtained with column of table density independent parameters the parameter and are considered density independent and gibson suggests the values and for the plastic collapse foams in this work a unique value of each parameter was identified directly from the experimental data of the whole set of tested foams of the same type the identified values for each kind of foam are shown in table modified gibson model density laws for the modified gibson model have been evaluated on the basis of the available experimental data obviously in this case a new parameter has been analysed the slope of the plateau the values of this latter parameter evaluated for the tested foams are highly dispersed at higher density values particularly for some types of foam in some cases they are even not significant this could be caused by the fact that the plateau region is very narrow for higher density to disappear from the model the evaluated value for epp specimen with density is nearly zero the model in this case shows a direct connection of the linear region with the densification region the same situation comes out for all ps foams where the plateau region is well fitted by the densification formula and the dedicated formula remains unused it is clear that for these cases the original and modified gibson models coincide because of this behavior a simple has been considered to account for the density dependence of this parameter the identified curves for each kind of foam are shown in fig while all the identified coefficients of the density dependence laws are reported in table rusch model in order to extend the applicability of the rusch model it is of interest to obtain relationships that can relationships are not based on micro mechanical considerations but are merely empirical for the rusch model applied to the epp foams the following laws for the a and parameters give a good correlation with the evaluated parameters power laws were previously checked in order to choose the most suitable values for the integer exponents the parameters and were then estimated with the least squares method on the basis of the previously
proxy explanation for the role of book to market fama and fama and french also argued that if there are book to market and size related factors in security returns there should also be corresponding factors in relation to fundamental performance consistent with this hypothesis their empirical analysis supported fundamental performance measures on the other hand the relationship between stock returns and future fundamental performance of the size and book to market factor mimicking portfolios was weak in relation to the size factor and statistically insignificant in relation to the book to market factor raising possible doubts about the rational basis of the book to market factor in stock beyond the size and book to market factors considered by fama and french us studies have suggested further possible risk factors linked to and share price momentum although it should be noted that empirical findings of share price momentum are particularly open to a stock mispricing rather than risk factor interpretation in the uk empirical analysis of the cross section of stock returns following a similar methodology to fama and french has generally found robust evidence in favor of book to market but at best weak evidence of a size effect the study by miles and timmerman also provided time series evidence that the three factors identified by fama and french were present in uk stock returns and a more recent study by al horani et al has provided evidence that a further factor based on research and development expenditure helps to explain the time series of stock returns taken together the findings of these studies provide substantial evidence in favor of book to market and capturing dimensions of risk in uk stock returns and some albeit weaker evidence in support of a size factor studies by liu et al and hon and tonks also suggest a role for momentum in explaining the cross section of returns of uk stock returns beyond the fama and french three factor model which as outlined earlier also posits that size and book to market are likely to be significant explanatory variables for explaining stock returns for any return generating process has been considered in us studies by pontiff and schall and biddle and hunt pontiff and schall postulated that book to market will be a better predictor of returns when the book value of equity is a better predictor of the future cash flows in their empirical analysis they found that a book value variable constructed for the index was a better indicator of future cash flows than a book value variable for the djia index they then provided evidence that consistent with the analysis of berk book to market performed better as a predictor of future returns for the index than the djia index biddle and hunt developed this approach further by examining alternative measures to proxy for the expected cash flows accrual net income cash flow from operations from operations and sales the results showed that the explanatory power of market value of equity improved with the inclusion of the proxies sales and cash flow from operations proving to be the most significant nevertheless the regression model where book value proxied for expected cash flow had the highest explanatory power suggesting that this variable explained the largest proportion of the variation in expected returns as far as we know there is no previous study based on uk data which focuses on the usefulness of the uk data which focuses on the usefulness of the fv perspective for explaining the cross section of stock returns the previous research reviewed in this section suggests that usefulness of book to market and size as explanatory variables for the cross section of expected stock returns could be explained either by a multidimensional risk argument or by a fundamental valuation perspective where book to market and size are viewed as risk proxies in the characteristics in the latter focusing on this issue the current paper makes two main contributions to the literature first we extend the fv perspective of berk by demonstrating how expectations of roe and future book to market play an additional role to current book to market in explaining the cross section of stock returns second we add to previous uk evidence on the cross section of stock returns by considering the role of both fundamental variables and risk proxy variables in explaining the cross section of uk stock returns our empirical results suggest that the fv variables taken together explain a significant part of the cross section of returns and that the fv variables remain highly statistically significant in cross sectional regressions which also include rp variables our analysis therefore highlights that the ability of financial variables to predict future to predict future stock returns is not restricted to their possible roles as risk proxies or indicators of market mispricing but can also be based on their ability to provide information on implied expected returns regardless of the process generating those expected returns may be usefully combined with risk proxy variables to explain the cross section of stock returns following vuolteenaho we first use an expression for the evolution of book to market over time when accounting earnings are measured on a clean surplus basis to highlight the role of roe and book to market expectations as explanatory variables for stock returns and interpret this role from a fundamental valuation perspective we both these fv variables and additional variables motivated by a multidimensional risk perspective expected change in book to market expected roe and stock returns as outlined in the introduction our fv regression model is based on an identity linking the ex div book to market ratio at time with the cum div book to market ratio at time given the assumption that the lean surplus relation holds for accounting earnings specifically writing csr as follows bt where bt denotes book value of equity at time xt denotes accounting earnings for period and dt denotes dividends paid at time it follows that
health spending suggests that the overall spread of health insurance between and can explain only a very small part of the six fold rise in real per capita health spending over this period manning et al newhouse the results of the same exercise using my estimated impact of may be able to explain half of the increase in health spending over this period of course important concerns about external validity suggest that the findings of each of these back of the envelope calculations should be viewed with considerable caution nonetheless at a broad level my findings raise the possibility that the spread of health insurance and the public policies that encouraged over the last half century than the current conventional wisdom suggests at the same however my findings are not inconsistent with the conventional wisdom that technological change is the primary cause of the rapid rise in health the expenditures the large impact of market wide changes in health insurance on health spending may stem in part from their impact on decisions to adopt new medical technologies as conjectured by a complete picture of the impact of an aggregate change in health insurance requires an understanding not only of its impact on the health care sector the subject of this paper but also of its benefits to consumers in related work finkelstein and mc knight explore these potential benefits we find that while the introduction of medicare appears to have had no impact on spending by the elderly the rest of the paper proceeds as follows section ii describes the data and empirical strategy section iii presents estimates of the effect of medicare on the hospital sector section iv shows that these estimates are substantially larger than what existing partial equilibrium estimates would have predicted it also presents some evidence in support of the likely explanations section for the contribution of the spread of health insurance to the growth of the health care sector over the last half century the last section concludes ii studying the impact of medicare approach and data ii a identifying the impact of medicare geographic variation in pre medicare insurance coverage medicare enacted july and implemented july covered and the reimbursement rates were very generous for the time somers and somers newhouse prior to medicare public health insurance coverage was practically nonexistent and meaningful private health insurance for the elderly was also relatively rare united states senate anderson and anderson epstein and murray stevens and stevens on the basis of data from the the elderly had meaningful private hospital upon the implementation of medicare hospital insurance coverage for the elderly rose virtually instantaneously to almost percent us hew the impact of medicare on elderly insurance coverage varied considerably across the country through a special request i obtained a version of the nhs that identifies in which of the for the elderly is higher in the north the east and north and lower in the south and west table i indicates that the proportion of the elderly without blue cross hospital insurance ranged from a low of percent in new england to a high of percent in the east south central united states the available data suggest that this geographic pattern was quite stable in the years prior to medicare for more information on the nhs see nchs i am extremely grateful to will dow for his work unearthing these the american hospital association annual survey i use twenty six years of hospital level data from the annual surveys of the american hospital association for every aha registered hospital in the us these data which are available in hard copy in the annual august issues of hospitals the journal of the american hospital association cover the years from to the sector however the historical data have been largely ignored i exclude the approximately percent of hospitals that are federally owned producing a sample of about hospitals per year the analysis centers on six hospital outcomes total expenditures payroll expenditures employment beds admissions and patient days utilization and bed data are exclusive the cpi hospital expenditures consist of expenditures on inputs and do not reflect hospital output prices employment and payroll expenditures exclude most physicians since they are not employed directly by the hospital the appendix provides a more detailed description of these variables and of the data quality figure i shows the national time series patterns for each over the entire sample period however beds and patient days began decreasing in the early as short term hospitals took over many of the functions previously performed by long term hospitals such as treatment of tuberculosis patients somers and somers prior to this decline long term hospitals constituted above percent of hospitals but half of beds and patient days average hospital outcomes were consistently higher in the north and northeast than in the south and west this is consistent with the evidence in the paper of an impact of insurance coverage on these outcomes but may also reflect other differences across regions sample size is minimum sample size for a subregion is figure i national time series patterns figure i graphs the national aggregates from the hospital level data described in the text axis scale is in millions except for expenditure variables for which it is in billions of constant dollars table ii exclude residents and interns expenditures are measured in thousands of dollars iii impact of medicare on hospital utilization inputs and spending iii a econometric model the empirical strategy is to compare changes in outcomes in regions of the country where medicare had a larger effect on the percentage of the elderly with health insurance to areas where it that operates via medicare s income effect it will underestimate the full impact of medicare of course private insurance rates prior to medicare are not randomly assigned data from the census indicate that differences in socio economic status can explain a substantial share of the variation in insurance coverage across subregions areas that differ in their socio
experiencing emotional maltreatment and percent experiencing sexual abuse although prior investigations have considered the role of physical maltreatment in the development of aggressive behavior the present investigation was most interested in the relative impact of physical abuse given the high degree of subtype overlap commonly found in maltreated samples any effort to select out pure maltreatment subtypes would result in an unnatural representation of maltreated children not to mention a considerably smaller sample instead maltreated subjects were categorized into two groups one group represented children with a history of any form of maltreatment other than physical abuse including percent who had experienced physical neglect percent who had experienced emotional maltreatment and percent who had experienced sexual abuse the other group represented children who had been physically abused in addition to any other maltreatment experience of those in the physical abuse group percent also experienced physical neglect percent also experienced emotional maltreatment and percent also experienced sexual abuse physical abuse and emotional maltreatment are two subtypes with a particularly high likelihood of being identified together and are often considered interdependent although the two maltreatment groups varied in the degree of emotional maltreatment we determined that any effort to parse out the effects of this particular form of maltreatment would result in an inaccurate representation of physically maltreated children thus we proceeded by investigating the two identified maltreatment groups as originally defined noting that the primary factor of distinction was the presence versus absence of physically abusive experiences a recreational summer camp prior to camp attendance parents also provided informed consent for their children to participate in research activities conducted at camp conducting research in a camp environment allows for convenient evaluation of a large number of children in a natural and ecologically valid setting furthermore it affords the opportunity for intensive observation of children s interactions with their peers in addition to providing an ideal setting for peers to another the structure and organization of the summer camps attended by children in each cohort were comparable all children attended camp daily from to for one week and were assigned to groups of approximately eight same sex children each within one year of another s age groups consisted of roughly equal ratios of maltreated to non maltreated children at the camp children a variety of group oriented and recreational activities additionally children were asked to complete a series of research measures during assessments and interviews with trained research assistants at the end of each week children completed a set of nominations on their peers while group counselors who were unaware of children s maltreatment status and study hypotheses completed a set of ratings on each of the children in their respective groups in order to assess the children s ability to interpret social cues accurately we administered to them a modified version of a measure of intention cue detection developed by dodge murphy and buchsbaum prior research has noted that deficits on this task are not attributable to intelligence or general cue detection ability the intention cue detection task was administered in a group format four research assistants responsible for overseeing two children research assistants were available to ensure that the measure was completed properly and to prevent any communication or observation between children simulating individual administration conditions children were presented with a series of videotaped vignettes in which two children are involved in a provocative situation one child is clearly identified as the provocateur by a colored and numbered shirt vignettes by the provocateur s intent with three vignettes of each of the following types hostile intent prosocial intent accidental intent or ambiguous intent following each vignette the tape was stopped and children were asked two questions first children were asked to indicate whether or not the intent of the provocateur in each vignette was either hostile prosocial or accidental based on the responses the proportion of hostile interpretations of ambiguous vignettes was calculated as a measure of hostile attributional bias the proportion of incorrect attributions of hostility or hostile interpretations of both prosocial and accidental vignettes was also calculated as a measure of errors in cue interpretation the second question asked children to describe in their own words what they would consistent with other work on response accessing categories were later collapsed into three more inclusive categories representing aggressive passive and competent responses aggressive responses involved either verbal or physical retaliation including requests for punishment from the teacher passive responses included crying in addition to a general failure to act or respond competent responses were identified as those geared toward as inviting the child to play asking questions about the incident or other attempts at prosocial interaction all responses were coded by independent raters with interrater agreement ranging from to any disagreements were recoded by an independent third rater the proportion of aggressive responses across all vignettes was then calculated to represent the tendency to access aggressive responses nominations were based on approximately hours of interaction coie and kupersmidt noted significant correlations between nominations made by familiar peers and unfamiliar peers based upon six playgroup sessions attesting to the validity of the current use of this measure specifically children were instructed to the most and the two peers they liked the least as well as to nominate one peer who best fit each of a set of items describing various behavioral characteristics including acts shy cooperative leader disruptive and starts fights coie and dodge reported a moderate degree of stability over four years for the behavioral description variables particularly for disruptive and starts fights children completed individually and were assured that their responses would be kept confidential the total number of nominations each child received from their peers was determined and converted to proportions of total possible nominations per category results were then standardized within each cohort examined a significant correlation was noted for scores on the disruptive and the starts fights variables scores for these variables were subsequently averaged to generate one overall aggressive disruptive behavior california child set
reservation price distributions systematically from each other each period these population specific responses govern the central tendency within each population in each period of time in the abait bbt zt or asait bst zt components for the buyers and sellers respectively such value changes over time may be due either to changes over time in the values of the ait summary hedonic variables or to the periodic variation in the bbt and bst ariables in the present ncreif application in which we are using each property s recent appraisal as the catch all hedonic variable the intercepts will reflect primarily only the difference each period between the central tendency of the appraisals and the central tendency of the transaction prices for period transactions are consummated when and only when the buyer s reservation price exceeds the seller s rpb condition do we observe a transaction price pit in other words consistent with rational investment decision making the observed transaction price must lie in the range between the buyer s and seller s reservation prices both of which are unobserved the exact price depends on the outcome of a negotiation and depends on the strategies and bargaining power of the two parties to produce demand and supply indices we follow fggh and equal the midpoint between the buyer s and seller s reservation using eq through eq and our midpoint price assumption we see that among sold assets the expected transaction price is the expectation of the sale price consists of three components the expected midpoint between the asset specific buyer and seller perceptions of value the the random error which is itself the midpoint between the buyer s and seller s random components among the parties that consummate transactions this last term is in general nonzero because of the condition that the buyer s reservation price must exceed the seller s reservation price in any observable consummated transaction we can measure pit by estimating eq via the following regression based onobserved transaction prices within the ncreif population as bt bbt bst and it it s it such a model will predict an estimated value bp it for each property in each period within the ncreif population as noted the stochastic error term in eq may have a nonzero mean because the observed transaction sample consists only of selected assets namely those for which rpb this will cause simple ols estimation of eq to have biased coefficients as described in fggh this sample selection bias problem can be corrected by the well known heckman procedure which involves estimation of a separate probit model of property sale probability in our context this sales model is useful not only in the heckman procedure to correct for sample selection bias in the value model but also to enable separate identification of the buyers and sellers case otherwise equation defines it to equal the difference between the buyer s and seller s reservation prices for the asset subtracting eq from eq as in eq yields following fggh define s ab as t normal probability distribution evaluated at the value inside the brackets based on ait and zt the probit model estimates the coefficients and residuals only up to a scale factor the estimated coefficients in eq are s and and the estimated error is bit where var it s it estimation of the price model which is thus modified from eq to include the inverse mills ratio fit as indicated in eq as eq is estimated based on a sample of transaction prices this model allows the construction of a transaction based index of the ncreif population of properties this can be done in at least two ways both of which begin with the price model s predicted value of each property each period based on a representative property property is characterized by a typical or average value of ait and of fit each period and also by a typical income flow then the index returns are based on the predicted value of property each period and property s cash flow each period thus in period the capital return for property construct an index is mass appraisal in this approach eq is used to produce an estimated value of each property in the npi database each period bp it the total return and capital return is then computed for each property each period in the same manner as above for the representative property then these individual property returns are aggregated across all properties in the in the case of the latter the index return is computed as in the former case it is simply where nt is the total number of properties in the npi in period because the underlying hedonic value model is a log value model the abovedescribed mass appraisal procedure will result in a slight bias in the estimated straight level values obtained from exponentiating the predicted log values of eq a slight error in the return these effects are very minor and may be corrected through well known mathematical adjustments note that the estimation of each individual property s value as of each period via eq not only enables the construction of a mass appraisal index but also allows provision of the transactions based estimated value of each property each period a owners the above described procedures based on the price model in eq provide transactions based versions of the ncreif index as noted above we use the representative property approach in our tbi as the hedonic variable is represented by the current appraised value of each property each period ait it is easy to see how this model incorporates all of the information available in the appraisals and adds to that any additional information conveyed by the current transaction prices of of properties sold from the npi during period the estimated value of each property is simply its appraised value plus the coefficient on the time dummy variable corresponding to the current quarter the time dummy coefficient reflects the difference
helping smes meet regulatory requirements while not overstretching regulatory third party regulatory surrogates also help break through sme resistance an appropriate third party might be a trade association or industry council or it might include professionals like bankers or accountants who have preexisting relationships with the smes such a third party could provide face to face information ongoing support and clear practical guidance to smes focusing on the ways in which good compliance practice is also good business practice the third party could facilitate self inspection audit by publishing key criteria and communicating information about best and acceptable practices given the right incentives an industry association for example could go further requiring self reporting establishing awards for high performers conducting audits and supporting a streamlined simple inexpensive and sme appropriate accreditation an additional possibility for increasing the public effect of regulatory approval of a particular best practice would be a reward program for compliance leaders under which they are permitted to use a revocable certification mark certification marks have gained real currency as it has been shown that they have value in the tripartite relationships may also be useful in the enforcement environment as the use of what one might call reform undertakings at the they seem to be a promising under a reform undertaking arrangement the regulator s enforcement staff and the firm enter into a settlement agreement relating to an action that enforcement has initiated for violation of the securities laws one term of the settlement agreement is that the firm shall retain at its own expense an independent third party monitor to oversee its compliance processes and procedures concluded that third party should have credibility and the right skill set and should be both independent and accountable the third party s role is to intervene in the firm over a more extended period of time identifying compliance failures and reasons for the alleged law violation it then reports back to the regulator on its findings recommendations and the steps taken by the firm in response to those recommendations reform undertaking provisions are principles based language giving the firm and third parties substantial scope to interpret what constitutes a reasonable or appropriate remedial recommendation in an ideal case a reform undertaking third party uses best practices learning in other contexts to ratchet up compliance performance in the subject firm it operates in a transparent reasoned problem solving manner and engages firm employees and officers in a dialogic process both as an information gathering part of challenging existing assumptions and forcing positive endogenous change returning to the model there is nothing about canadian jurisprudence that would preclude such creative remedies to the contrary similar remedies exist in multiple canadian regulatory arenas and are consistent with canadian approaches to public reform undertaking style remedies have already been used by the and market reform undertakings or something approximating the deferred prosecution agreement in the united states also are a clear possibility under the organizational sentencing provisions of the criminal in their recent treatise on risk management authors todd archibald kenneth jull and kent roach make a case for embedded auditors as a component of sentencing such sentencing orders would placed on site of the convicted corporation to monitor compliance for a period of thus reform undertaking style third party involvement already has roots in canadian soil regardless of the specific tripartite mechanism in question involving a third party in governance increases the scope of perspectives available to the regulator it also permits broader participation from stakeholders and others that typically do not have a voice in securities regulation notwithstanding importance of securities regulation to individuals and broader social interests the examples above involve third party expertise actors like compliance consultants and industry associations but depending on the context this does not necessarily represent the universe of potential third parties tripartism plays a role in providing transparency and enhancing accountability as examples from the larger world of corporate for example third party certified best or good practices affect consumers as forest practices certification has shown in the forestry entire corporate compliance and corporate social responsibility consultancy industries now exist and ethical investing funds and advocates pressure for triple bottom line other potential third parties include industry associations like the canadian bankers association nonprofit corporate the global reporting initiative or for profit firms like innovest or institutional shareholder services which operates the investor responsibility research shareholder representatives and major accounting firms could even play a role one should resist trying to identify the right third parties ex ante one should also resist dismissing any potentially suitable third party out of hand given the important role these actors could play in broadening the the dyadic conclusion principles based regulation and outcome oriented regulation are responses to a visceral recognition that traditional rule oriented legal regimes are limited in their ability to deal with some broader organizational and cultural problems resistance toward effective compliance and other forms of corporate cultural dysfunction are not easily dislodged principles based compliance processes that will best address their particular business risks and situation some version of outcome oriented regulation is a necessary correlative to principles based regulation in that it is a responsible way to force accountability into a system that leaves articulation of the content of those principles to on the ground actors securities regulators can do quite a bit to advance their vision of modern securities regulation bcsc to proceed with a principles based and outcome oriented regulatory approach despite the fact that bill has not come into force is a prime example of this option securities commissions have substantial discretion and extensive rule making powers the practice of securities regulation can continually improve notwithstanding its statutory architecture in the implementation phase principles based regulation is important primarily because it identifies more important than idealized statutory design a principles based and outcome oriented regulatory approach consistent with new governance like the model does not advocate simply removing rules leaving the capital markets to self regulation or subject
a selection so as not to be out of all proportion in my experience most often we have found more interesting looking metaphors in a given text than we can afford analyzing some readers also may ask whether we would misinterpret the meaning of the cases above if we had not used the three step metaphor analysis of be the silver bullet to the interpretation of narratives in any situation i should rather consider it an additional instrument side by side with other qualitative analytical tools in the context of a wider project guided by grounded theory or ethnographic methodology for example to carry out in depth observations of some particular cases of individual texts this combination in my opinion makes an effective tool for qualitative researchers the interviewing technique it became obvious in the cases presented here that our metaphor analysis requires some texts based on open communication consequently i would prefer to conduct some qualitative or even narrative interviews rather than strictly structured ones with direct questions that in the end just produce some fairly artificial metaphors in action and the italian global justice movement abstract in this article we explore the process of contamination in the development of the global justice movement in italy during the we focus on two specific organizational sectors of this labor organizations and associations for solidarity with the global south we concentrate on a stage of the protest cycle that has been overlooked in social movement studies namely the emergence of mobilization after a period of latency and shed light on the process through which individual and organizational networks actually facilitate mobilization and vice versa the process of contamination in action is presented as the combination of structural cognitive and affective it operates through both individual and organizational networks that together facilitate logistic coordination enable the emergence of tolerance and mutual trust and allow frame bridging and the transnationalization of identities certainly all these things have an impact on us cross fertilization is obvious banal normal and actually one should be contaminated it is the nice aspect of being together during the first meetings the acli said that they did not want to have any contact with the disobedients disobbedienti and that if they were there they would not participate the same was true for the disobedients now instead albeit with great effort the stop the war committee is composed of various people from the cisl to the leoncavallo etc and from there started a reflexive process let s try to include as many subjects as possible and see if front the concept of network is particularly relevant to the sociology of social movements social movements are defined as collective actors that hold conflictual orientations to clearly identified opponents are linked by dense informal networks share a distinct collective identity and privilege protest as a main form of action the presence of dense but informal networks distinguishes social movements from other collective actors who instead have clear organizational boundaries in social movements individuals and organizations while keeping their autonomous identities engage in sustained exchanges of resources oriented to the pursuit of a common goal the coordination of specific initiatives the regulation of individual actors conduct and the definition of strategies all depend on individuals and the organizations involved in collective action no single organized actor no matter how powerful can claim to represent a movement as a whole the capacity to form and sustain these networks is therefore an essential task of resource mobilization categorical traits are insufficient for collective action unless they are also supported by dense network ties tilly for example talks of category and network research on social movements has singled out networks as being simultaneously a precondition and a consequence of mobilization individual decisions to participate in social movements are greatly facilitated by personal and the more costly and risky the form of collective action the more the decision has to be sustained by strong and numerous ties in a parallel manner most movements grow through bloc recruitment the recruitment of already activated formal and informal groupings furthermore personal ties among activists help to sustain participation persistent activists are those with more personal ties within the movement movements are not only users of networks but they also actively produce and strengthen ties among participants mobilization in protest activities strengthens such as factory occupation or violent direct action facilitate the formation of a common identity made of shared values but also solidarity towards the comrades who share a certain commitment notwithstanding internal competition and factionalism especially during the rise and fall of protest cycles intra organizational ties developed in common campaigns improve reciprocal understanding and increase the chances of future as we shall observe in this article although much is known about the reciprocal impact of networks and mobilization less has been written on the mechanisms through which individual and organizational networks actually facilitate mobilization and by which mobilization strengthens networks in what follows we shall in particular investigate three types of mechanisms cognitive ones related to the construction of common and transnational identities affective ones which and mutual trust and structural ones referring to the creation of personal and organizational ties that favor common action networks work by socializing actors into new values facilitating the development of affective ties as well as endowing individuals and organizations with structural ties participation in some social networks has a cognitive function at the individual level bringing about the formation of a collective we and developing action and at the organizational level facilitating the bridging between different visions and values and enabling the construction of transnational identities social networks also have an affective function collaborative interactions between individuals belonging to different groups not only use but also produce tolerance and trust at the same time networks have a structural function since they provide the logistics for
they began it is difficult to believe that this pattern is so uniform across markets but such uniformity may result from the combination of using fixed factor weights national materials prices and only local labor rates while local labor rates vary widely time then the indices as constructed would indeed be very similar over time as well the pattern is also almost identical across the two property types the time series patterns for the dodge index show more variation across both market and property type in general office costs decline fairly steadily from between through for apartments there is less decline from one market san diego actually has a over this period in the five markets that do show declines there is also a tendency for costs to rise a bit in the early as they do with the means and ern indices however the pattern is not as pronounced or uniform the year to year variations in the dodge indices are also much greater than those of the means or ern indices unlike the means and ern data in several markets the dodge indices also almost half of the market property types studied this occurs for apartments in san diego phoenix denver and chicago and for offices in san diego as well by contrast the other indices continue to decline smoothly over the last few years elasticity of construction costs to building activity a central question in this paper is whether the yearly or cyclic movements in the related empirically to the volume of building activity methodologically the stationarity of the series is examined to see if regression analysis is appropriate or a co integration approach needs to be applied having determined the correct procedure the relationship between the two series is examined exhibit depicts two series for denver apartments the building activity series new office space are used denver is quite typical of the apartment market in that the cost index shows considerable small movement between years while building activity displays three large swings over the period studied most apartments were built in waves during the early mid and then most recently in between these periods construction was extremely low have a high degree of autocorrelation the coefficient on lagged costs ranges between and across the six markets the coefficient on lagged starts is a bit stronger ranging from to in every one of these cases if an equation is estimated between changes in costs or building activity and lagged levels of the variable the lagged level coefficient is statistically significant at the a model in either levels or differences mean reversion for both series using a simple dickey fuller test if the cost series are truly random walks then coefficients this far from unity would happen at most the time the findings indicate that this level too high thus the dickey fuller null is rejected even though this test is thought to have quite low power with only observations similarly this null is rejected in the case of construction both series display in all of the apartment markets examined this same conclusion holds the graph for the sample market is shown in appendix upon casual inspection of this graph there seems to be little evidence of an obvious relationship between the cost series and apartment building activity the graphs for all apartment markets are available from the authors upon request this time frame again in comparison with the cost index with offices there is even more clustering of development the mid saw enormous completions of space while the boom of the early was smaller in most markets recently there was another building boom although in some markets it has been more modest in comparison to that of the the statistical results are very similar to that of apartments in all six markets there is statistically the random walk model can be accepted for both completions and the construction cost index only at low confidence levels the graph for the sample washington office market is shown in appendix and again there appears to be no obvious connection between the two series with similar results on stationarity for the two series traditional regression costs and building activity if this relationship it thought of as embodying a supply curve it should be positive unless the industry as a whole is believed to display increasing returns in this case the relationship could conceivably be negative somerville has argued that the relationship between these two series could asset prices minus construction costs exceed some hurdle value as costs rise less development is undertaken and so the level of building activity would decrease at the micro economic level somerville provides some evidence of this but at the aggregate level others argue that the relationship between construction costs and building activity is purely a supply curve in principle some instrument costs which would allow the identification of any demand relationship similarly using an instrument for demand will allow identification of the supply relationship given that the interest here is in supply a simple correlation analysis between the two series will be employed followed by an instrumental variables identification to pick out the impact of purely demand induced building activity each market along with national interest rates and economy wide inflation will be used as instruments for apartments it seems plausible that bid costs would be impacted by the volume of activity at the time the bid is made that being approximately when the permit is issued for office space however only the date of building completion is known and it would seem reasonable to allow for a year of two lag hence if office building activity did impact impact costs it would be between costs at time and activity at time t in addition to testing for a simply bivariate relationship between costs and building activity tests also examined whether there were some more gradual adjustment process at work in which activity levels more slowly moved costs this was done by regressing costs against
bridge however this other seems not distant enough or exotic enough to serve as point of projection for the fantasies of the main characters because poland remains primarily a place on the structuring metaphors for the film the expanse of poland appears when ellen visits chris in the meeting that will initiate their affair ellen meets chris at the radio station where he works which is in the oderturm the oder tower we see this story skyscraper jutting straight up and out of the cityscape and experience in a real time scene a long elevator ride that emphasizes the height ellen remarks on the quality of the view and chris at his feet and indeed the camera moves to capture the panorama of the east outside his window through this gesture a gesture that occurs at the expense of poland we see him asserting a certain sovereignty and control absent in uwe the gesture ultimately proves attractive to ellen the quest for such sovereignty over space and self will motivate her through the film so that in the final shot of ellen she is looking for her own apartment the strongest of its visual metaphors are those that represent the border traffic we see the transit traffic frequently sometimes slightly elevated in low angle far shots or as a stream of trucks appearing in straight on shots from street level this traffic bisects kati s life in particular we have repeated shots of her on her way to work moving past endless lines of trucks she trudges forlornly across snowy parking frame s horizon waiting to get past her small booth where she reviews their papers lines of trucks bisect and trisect the film s frames meanwhile dwarfed by the roaring machines kati often looks the most vulnerable the most drowned out by the din of the life passing her by it is a massive and inhuman migration of goods from east to west the east does not appear simply as traffic into the west to be sure given of the border the film limited the possibilities of engagement with the polish but slubice on the other side of the river plays a specific role in facilitating the affair ellen and chris first have sex in a parked car under the bridge that crosses the oder he jumps into the bitter cold water as an act of silly bravado and playfulness to celebrate their consummated relationship eventually they begin to cross the bridge to the polish side from where we see a panorama of a looking back in on their lives they go to the other side however in search of a cheap hotel where they can pursue their affair it is on the other side of the river that we see the only significant polish character in the film the polish proprietor of a hotel who appears briefly in order to rent them a room she speaks excellent german and the fact that the signs are in german and polish seems to indicate that they are not the only a site of a form of sex tourism for the germans not cross border transnational sex simply a national romp we see two germans rolling in kitschy sateen sheets accompanied by cheap sparkling wine otherwise poles or eastern europeans in general remain outside the narrative s close focus on the couples and their immediate surroundings even if their trucks appear the truckers themselves never appear within frame we see a hand holding papers but poland s people in general remain unknown unseen ultimately all the characters reveal new resources and prove open to new possibilities within their own local horizon in particular kati who had been perhaps the least dynamic of the figures reveals some surprising strengths in the end she shows up one night when uwe is closing the imbiss he invites her in and they get drunk on shots of cheap schnapps they begin a talent show for each other during which kati belts out a haunting song in sorbian uwe does a card trick kati performs a doing the splits on a table uwe falls off a table later we find kati in a truck equipped with a mini kitchen a truck driver hands her a bowl of stew and she responds by thanking him in russian kati working on the edge of europe proves the most equipped to deal with the other side the hints of the east that permeate these scenes bring kati in line with the other across the border there is more to her than we have been out diminished figure proves to have the largest reserve of positive exotic resources in the end kati steers her moped with chris riding happily behind her chris who at the beginning would not relinquish his keys in the end gives up control and follows her directions chris once sovereign over poland beams from the back of kati s vespa as she steers them through traffic visually significant their moped ride passes through streets devoid of the transit traffic engage with the people on the other side the film nevertheless does important work in imagining frankfurt as a place of hope and happy ends not a funny nor a happy ending per se but a positive and hopeful one that indicates all the main characters are facing new potentials the little guy will survive life will go on and in fact there is every reason to believe in a principle of hope kati and chris are happily reunited ellen is discovering left alone and broken invites the hippies into his imbiss in the final scene the mood becomes festive uwe hands out beers business booms with the lively mood created by the music in a medium close frame we see how uwe looks out over his world on the stairs and the smiling faces the music begins to fade out into a vibrato distortion and the camera slows down sound and image go separate ways yet here
research self becomes the participant and other becomes the researcher or other constituents of a group in the case of a group consequently when user research is done in collectivistic high context culture and individualistic low context culture two tendencies can be expected as follows firstly a participant in collectivistic high context culture will tend to be considerate of researcher and other participants feelings and will attempt to maintain others face secondly a participant in individualistic low context culture will have a tendency to guard one s freedom and personal space the two tendencies above direction of this research and were explored by experiments relationship between cultural differences and user experience research methods user experience research methods heavily rely on the process of communication be tween the researchers and users therefore it is crucial to understand the attributes of user experience research methods regarding their communication patterns as well as its connection to cultural differences classification of user experience regarding communication patterns knowledge about user experience gained from a user research can be distinguished by possibility of observation and explicitness knowledge that can be spoken or thought about is explicit so it can be expressed in a language however if that knowledge is in the process of cognition or below that level such as in a dream it becomes tacit and latent sanders explains that in order to effectively observe knowledge at different levels must be applied according to the characteristics of that knowledge level say do and make framework reflects the way to communicate between the de signer and the user different communication characteristics of varying cultural back grounds will have an impact on user researcher communication during a user experience research not only that its effects will also differ according to the type of communication whether it be saying doing or making extraction of in order to find out what aspect of cultural difference has an influence on user research process and result some influential factors were extracted first characteristics of cultural difference regarding communication pattern was integrated and mapped to communication pattern of user research group activity was also mapped together to take into account some cases where the group constituent was one of the targets of face keeping thus the following shows the extraction four influential factors spontaneity of participation in individualistic low context culture where individual freedom is valued and spontaneous participation is widely accepted participants will think highly of their participation during user research nevertheless in collectivistic high context culture where others face is important and spontaneous participation will not be as frequent participants think of user research as a test or a task that is unwillingly done as the researcher this is deeply related to motivating the participant of user experience research thus will have a huge impact on self observation that gives very little control from the researcher uncertainty avoidance uncertainty avoidance in user research methods is defined as the anxiety that the participant of the user research feels due to the ambiguity of the task given to the participant uncertainty avoidance also has to do with the partici pant s attitude towards the user if the participant is from collectivistic high context culture thus sees his participation as a task or a test he may be worried that his response or action during user research will disappoint the researcher generative tools probe techniques and open ended questions aimed to awaken user s latent experience and obtain unexpected answers are all examples of research methods that can be affected by uncertainty avoidance tendency of problem criticism having tendency to is closely related to one s attitude towards the environment and one s speech westerners are non conformists and they tend to find problems and criticize when they believe that a product or a situation is not what they expected on the other hand oriental people are conformists and they believe that they have to adapt to a product or a situation even when they know that the puzzle does nt quite fit this tendency can be discovered during a usability test method where or a system is evaluated and problems are derived attitude within a group in an individualistic low context culture discussions and expressing one s own opinion within a group comes rather naturally on the contrary in collectivistic high context culture people feel uncomfortable to draw attention to themselves within a group unlike westerners oriental people are more inclined to agree with the majority and rely on others to speak up attitude within a group group interview generative workshop or generative group session experiment and result analysis experiment was designed to discover how four factors spontaneity of participation uncertainty avoidance tendency of problem criticism and attitude within a group affect user research process and result user research method selection as explained in extraction of influential factors it is expected that spontaneity of participation will show difference in self uncertainty avoidance will show difference in probe technique or generative tool tendency of problem criticism will show difference in usability test method and attitude within a group will show difference in focus group interview or generative group session therefore in this research probe usability test and focus group interview were selected to find out the effect of four factors mentioned above the experiment was designed to explore following questions in each probe will the different tendencies of participants from individualistic low context culture who are more of spontaneous participants and participants from collectivistic high context culture who see user research as a test or a task influence the level of diligence and motivation during the probe process will the different tendencies of participants from individualistic low context culture who do not mind uncertainty much and participants from collectivistic con text culture who are more likely to avoid uncertainty influence the feedback of probe s ambiguous questions usability test will the different tendencies of participants from individualistic low context culture
aspects of the presenter s perspective brennan and clark hypothesized that use of a single referring term includes commitment to a conceptualization for example identifying an object as a member of some category the conceptualization intended by the presenter of the conceptualization sufficient for their communicative purpose in their activity if the presenter s intended conceptualization is specified insufficiently or if a responder s understanding differs from the presenter s in a way that results in a conflict the presenter and other participant can engage in further exchanges that can result in mutual acceptance and understanding of a conceptualization constitutes a conceptual pact which tends to become part of their common ground for subsequent use including perspectives in accounts of conceptual understanding and conceptual growth in our efforts to understand conceptual understanding and based on a view of cognition that emphasizes perspectival understanding following fauconnier rommetveit tomasello and especially macwhinney we adopt as a framing assumption that cognition is inherently perspectival that is it always has a point of view and understanding the cognitive aspects of an activity requires taking its point of view into account a conception is their ability to construct perspectival understandings that are situated in activity and that are organized according to principles that are taken as defining the conception we define a perspectival understanding to be a cognitive arrangement of entities and some of their properties organized in relation to each with a point of view the viewer may be enmeshed in the perspective operating on the entities in the perspective construction of a perspectival understanding is a process of constraint the most general constraint we hypothesize is coherence in the sense developed by thagard more specifically understanding of a conception corresponds to satisfaction of constraints that constitute that conception s meaning understanding discourse that refer to the conception and to constraints that are constituents of its meaning or it may be implicit if actions are constrained and afforded by constituents of the conception s meaning without their being referred to in discourse taking our perspectival view we hypothesize that but also involve larger arrangements of information and meaning in this view a presentation which may be an item of information or an opinion or a proposal for action or a question presupposes a commitment to a perspective and aspects of that perspective that are relevant in the participants activity are part of the conceptual pact that the participants accept when they accept the presentation or some modification are problematized can provide especially valuable opportunities for conceptual growth such problematizing occurs when the perspective of a group s current common ground or of a proposed contribution is questioned or challenged and a contribution with a different perspective is proposed and considered pattern that organizes some aspects of a situation into an information structure as rumelhart wrote a schema is instantiated whenever a particular configuration of values is bound to a particular configuration of variables at a particular moment in time to consider a situation where a book is resting on a table asking whether the book exerts a force on the table and whether the table exerts a force on the book a mature physicist knows a schema to apply to such situations that at equilibrium forces are balanced so the answer to both questions is yes physics students however are likely to answer yes about the book s force on that before they learn a schema of equal and opposite forces students have learned a schema for the force of gravity pulling objects toward the earth and apply that schema to answer the question lacking the schema for equal and opposite forces how could a student learn to understand the situation of a book a book resting on a spring that was partially compressed by the book which is being pulled downward by the earth s gravitational force most students understood that the partially compressed spring exerted an upward force on the book then clement discussed the stiffness of the spring as a variable with the idea that a stiffer spring would be compressed less but still a very stiff spring compressed microscopically but still exerting an upward force equal to the force of the book pressing down we offer a perspectival account of clement s instructional use of a bridging analogy we hypothesize that the students initial perspective views the book and the table asymmetrically with the book pulled downward by the earth s gravity thereby exerting a force on the table but with the table simply for a more advanced physical understanding views the book and table as an interacting system exerting forces on each other to maintain their stable positions in space we hypothesize that the perspective involving interaction was induced by the spring analogy if the book was removed the spring would return to its greater length just as removal of the table supporting learners in constructing perspectival understandings that they need to learn new conceptions we recognize that the line between constructing a perspectival understanding and applying a schema can be hard to draw empirically at least in relatively simple cases such as clement s spring analogy it would be plausible to hypothesize that students have a schema involving agents book on a spring and learn to apply that schema to a situation with a book on a table the example we discuss in a later section involving an algebra problem is more definitive in this regard where we propose that the data rule out a hypothesis that the understanding that participants achieved resulted from their applying a single schema are perspectival that is they have points of view that result from their functions in activity we also hypothesize that if a person or group knows a schema that they can apply in the situation and they take to be relevant in their activity they will apply it if more than one applicable schema are recognized some negotiation will occur to settle on a perspective not learned or do
is no automatic mechanism that pushes societies to the proper balance between these contending forces in his analysis of normal accidents charles perrow introduced social scientists to the engineering distinction between tightly coupled and loosely coupled in a tightly coupled system any difficulty in one part of the mechanism is instantly transferred to the other parts while in a loosely coupled system there are significant buffers that diminish the probability of a cascade that could weaken or destroy the whole economies as loosely coupled systems with many buffers and a variety of backup mechanisms a catastrophic failure that spreads from one part of the economy to others is still possible but such events are unlikely and unusual the more typical pattern is that economic and political actors find ways to keep strains or difficulties in one part of the economic mechanism from having a dramatic impact elsewhere this the high cost to state officials of presiding over economic meltdowns moreover higher levels of economic development provide actors with more resources to manage these strains and thesis iii the interests of employers vary over time and space but they play a critical role in shaping the development of market societies on key political decisions yet precisely because the economy is loosely coupled and heavily reliant on governmental action there is considerable variability in the way that employers will perceive and pursue their interests peter swenson has recently made a comparable argument by criticizing the equivalency premise that runs through a great deal of work on comparative capitalisms time and across nations they then argue that historical differences are not the result of changes in interests but rather in the power resources and political opportunities that class actors have to realize their interests the alternative is to argue that even if employers almost always want to keep their business going and assure opportunities for future profitability both the formulation the rate of profit that a firm s leaders see as sufficient another is their time horizon it makes a huge difference whether the goal is to maximize profits over three years or finally the specific means that they use to generate profits can differ firms for example can follow high road strategies that raise employee skills or low road strategies that minimize wage and benefit costs tightly coupled actors within them have real choices as to how to pursue wealth swenson for example emphasizes that the structure of the nation s labor market can lead to sharply divergent strategies by employers for controlling labor and labor moreover changes in the global competitive environment can also precipitate shifts in national competitive strategies and a new view of employer interests the way that employers understand their interests specifically the strength of countermovements whether of the left or the right can profoundly influence the strategic calculations of employers the rise and fall of such movements can lead employers to make important changes in their political alliances thesis iv competition among nations within the world economy tends to pedigree it is implied by polanyi s discussion of the different ways that societies responded to the economic catastrophe of the but it is an important corrective to the peculiar variation on darwinian evolution that has become widespread in contemporary thinking about globalization the problematic idea is that because nations compete in the global market they are under constant pressure to adapt their institutions to that fail to adapt will fall further behind but those that successfully adapt will become increasingly similar as they copy practices of the more successful this formulation is an extension of the view of economies as tightly coupled systems given the tight interdependence of the different parts of the economy it follows naturally that successful adaptation would force nations to become progressively more homogenous in their key economic institutions the notion is that there is one best way to organize a modern economy and that competition will force everybody to come closer to that model theories of biological evolution however have exactly the opposite logic they argue that the struggle for survival creates ever greater diversity as species develop new ways to adapt to shifting environments however at a given time there are multiple strategies for maintaining or improving a nation s relative for example one society might invest heavily in scientific and engineering research another might put the money into new production facilities and a third might prioritize improving the quality of its labor force each path is likely to lead to institutional innovations that could increase the institutional variations among market used strategy new cycles of innovation could well preserve or even expand the existing level of institutional diversity when these four theses are taken together the consequence is an understanding of the trajectory of market societies as being fundamentally shaped by political conflicts and political hence the peculiarities of both european fascism or scandinavian social democracy start to make sense when as contingent countermovements of both the left and the right having the ability to use state power to make deep changes in the structure of the economy and the global economy providing multiple paths to successful economic adaptation does this theory contemplate any limits to the transformations that a particular political regime can impose on a market society the national socialist government its increasingly irrational and destructive ultimately it was only the military strength of other nations that placed limits on authoritarian regimes in germany and japan left wing movements on the other hand have generally exerted political power within parliamentary systems that preserve significant voice for business this continuing voice does place political limits on economic change time business can be persuaded to accept quite substantial narrowing in the privileges that are granted to property ownership in the however when the social democrats proposal for wage earner funds threatened a gradual socialization of ownership of the swedish economy business was able to mobilize to halt that initiative ultimately the question of whether there are any inherent limits to
important site of regional pilgrimage with all the economic benefits that this entailed swayed by their tears the prince agreed to leave them a piece or two of the relic so that they might continue their worship while offering them generous financial compensations for their loss and assuring them that he would always hold the affairs of their house close to his heart did the does it not often ask for a license to transport wood from the kingdom of castile surely this could be granted for several years and for unlimited quantities philip ii tried everything but the sisters simply would not budge it was only through the intervention of the archbishop of santiago and after many months of negotiation that the king finally managed to convince the nuns to take the money and give up the relic the head of saint hermenegildo from a female abbey in the province of huesca proved to be just as laborious and required as much caution flattery and gift giving spain s first ruler to convert to christianity martyred for having refused to return to his former arian beliefs and for holding strong in his new faith the visigothic king hermenegildo had become over the ages the patron saint of the spanish monarchy furthermore philip ii s the day of saint hermenegildo thus in the king s mind hermenegildo was the perfect emblem for his projected unification of spain through history religion and dynasty relics of the saint were essential to the mausoleum of the escorial god has preserved this relic so that it may end up in your hands claimed the bishop of vich who acted as the crown s go between in this transaction it is yours by right since it belongs to one of your ancestors it is the spain s continuous christian kingship beneath the obsequious language that ran through the correspondence between the king and the abbess surrounding the transfer of the relic all the weight of obligation showed through certain that serving him was the community s dearest wish philip ii subtly pointed out that this would be the perfect occasion for its members to show their zeal and assured them that he would show their sovereign that by taking the head of hermenegildo he deprived them of their most precious jewel and that without this relic a gift from their founder which had brought them rain in time of drought for centuries they would be left with nothing but in the end the sisters had no choice but to yield to the monarch s will thus granting his request and thereby placing themselves under his protection nevertheless they still managed to the relic would remain in their possession so they could carry on with their devotion and continue to celebrate the saint s feast curiously when philip ii demanded the foot of saint lawrence from the collegiate church of husillos near valladolid he met with absolutely no opposition on the contrary the abbot was delighted to be able to grant him this favor and spoke only of the natural obligation one owes to further proof that this was not the king s customary procedure thus philip ii turned the spontaneous and voluntary handover of relics which in certain cases resembled extortion more than anything else into a veritable act of allegiance to the royal person one of his subjects stated this in rather explicit terms feeling obliged by the loyalty of the vassal to inform the king of the existence in rome of a relic likely to relinquish their trophies knew how to command royal gratitude and how to profit from their gift by deftly manipulating the rhetoric of loyalty and favor as for the monarch he saw to it that the donors were always decently compensated since failing to do so would be tantamount to theft and would indicate as one of his emissaries once opportunely reminded him a lack of respect and devotion on his part each of these relics then created a bond between the king and his subjects thus the collection of the escorial can also be seen as the product of a network of obligations based on patronage and clientelism the long list of princes cardinals bishops and convents which offered relics to the king of spain whether as diplomatic gifts signs of gratitude tools of social promotion or simply out of duty therefore represents nothing less than the threads of the web of favor that philip ii wove throughout catholic europe for holiness and his desire to create a centralized state whenever philip ii felt that relics were necessary to stimulate a city s devotion he did not hesitate to share his sacred bones for instance he gave the city of cartagena some relics of local saints that he had purchased on another occasion in the andalucian town of andujar he enjoined the abbey that held the relics of saint eufrasio first bishop of the treasure that was rightfully hers provided of course this process remained under his close supervision and direct control the king intended relics to play an active part in the formation of civic identities and was encouraged to turn this potent source of symbolic power over to the cities and their bishops two pillars of the new tridentine organization whose role he clearly recognized indeed whenever relics tied to a city s history were discovered or recovered and brought spain philip ii demanded a type of tax or duty in the form of samples for his collection at the escorial but the relics belonged first and foremost to the king it was he who graciously agreed to turn over the holy body to a city or to its prelates not they who offered their monarch a piece of what was theirs this becomes quite clear from many ceremonies of relic translations most notably in avila where the body of saint segundo the town s first bishop had been of renovating a small hermitage years
to cn and a then its kth derivative dk belongs to the space lk of multilinear maps from copies of cn to cn for any such multilinear map we use the classical norm of course for analytic functions and coincide so called point estimates are quantities defined from norms of differential maps at a given point three such important quantities are used for simple zeros and a the first one namely helps control the function locally the third one is their product for a univariate function in order to deal with clusters of zeros counting multiplicities and multiple zeros of multiplicity the previous quantities are generalized as follows for any a natural convention together with these quantities the following auxiliary function comes naturally in short we shall also write for summary of our contributions we now present a summary of our main contributions section by section we explain how the paper is organized and how the results are connected approximation of simple zeros following the now classical a theory we provide a new synthetic shorter presentation of this theory the first properties of majorant series are recalled in the first subsection the next two subsections are respectively devoted to pellet s location criterion of simple zeros and to the calculation of upper bounds on a point estimate from the same estimate known at a close point that quantifies the convergence of newton s operator in a neighborhood of a simple zero from point estimates at the zero then we explain how these estimates can be approximated from the same estimates at any given point located sufficiently close to the zero the combination of the theorem with the location criterion thus leads us to a weak version of the a theorem by contrast with the ton s operator from estimates at the initial point of the newton iteration the a theorem is often more relevant to practical concerns a strong version of the a theorem is then established in the fifth subsection in the vein of kantorovich s analysis we generalize the a theorem given by wang and han in in order to show that if pellet s location criterion is satisfied at a given point then the newton iterates of this point a simple zero the first section ends with a quantitative version of the implicit function theorem that is a crucial ingredient to handle the univariate reduction in practice this result is not new it is a consequence of the a theorem and of the results given by dedieu et al in sec in appendix a we generalize the latter results to geometric majorant series more precisely we provide a sharper a sharper geometric series majoration of the compositional inverse map in cases where the derivative at the given point is different from identity these sharper results are not used outside this appendix but they are useful to tune the algorithms in practice reduction to one variable section gathers technical results needed by the location and the approximation algorithms for univariate maps and that generalizes pellet s criterion to clusters of zeros briefly speaking for a univariate function if am is sufficiently small then admits a cluster of zeros in a ball centered at a of radius of about in addition if a lies in the convex hull of this cluster then the diameter of the cluster is also about and vary in when is fixed the common archetype the reader may keep in mind is ym the diameter of the cluster of zeros of dl a point an estimate for the radius of a ball centered at this point and containing zeros of or a deflated map of and the radius of a zero free region beyond this ball our theorem generalizes the location criterion given in sec that restricts to univariate functions in addition theorem is more general than the location criterion of dedieu and shub presented in that but restricting to clusters containing two zeros let us summarize the main feature of theorem in an informal way let be a given point and let and given integers let denote the first integer such that the sole knowledge of point estimates of and and of this criterion is proved to be necessary for sufficiently small clusters when is sufficiently close to the cluster in addition the point estimates involved in theorem are computable for several classes of maps numerical experiments with theorem are provided in section for polynomial maps and such that and we wish to approximate a cluster with zeros of the l th deflated map by means of the l th deflated map the initial point of this approximation process will always be written this problem is solved in section when applied to it first computes such that is of order then it computes the schroder iterate of as depending on the location of with respect to the cluster of zeros of dl by nm stop close to the cluster of this criterion involves a third parameter gz the combination of the operator nm together with the stopping criterion is called the approximation algorithm in the sequel when using our algorithm with the computation of only requires the full deflated map our stopping criterion then allows one to stop this iteration close to the cluster of the original system these extreme cases motivate this unified presentation in terms of and is well defined and produces a sequence of iterates that converges quadratically to the cluster and that stops at a distance to the cluster which is of the order of magnitude of its diameter furthermore we precisely quantify what is meant by sufficiently close and by sufficiently small in terms of point estimates of and it relies strongly on the univariate approximation algorithm presented in theorem theorem can be seen as a generalization of the theorem to clusters of requires point estimates at the initial point in the last subsection of section with an algorithmic presentation we explain how one can achieve this goal in
an earlier retrieval of the and tourasia is the fact that a portion of the cruise capacity was used as a pledge anderson and weitz defined pledges as actions undertaken by channel members that demonstrate good faith and bind the channel members to the relationship pledges are more than simple declarations of commitments or promises to act in good faith they are specific actions binding a channel member to a relationship as a form of a pledge this was of paramount importance to tourasia to counter the threat of potential opportunistic behavior by asiatic and to ensure the return of the advances such a pledge was given to tourasia in exchange for tourasia s commitment of expending the marketing funds into the market to promote the asiatic s cruises with the pledge tourasia could be more the agent s investment accordingly rather than focus the firm s effort on reducing potential opportunism the focus of both cruise line and agent is now convergent and both have an incentive to work towards a joint surplus maximizing behavior of developing the market to its full potential formalization to control excess capacity to asiatic within a cut off period with formalization transacting parties are more assured of each other s behavior and such predictability fosters the relationship research has shown that formalization procedures reduce opportunism and increase the effectiveness of the relationship the pledged capacity was released back to the cruise line since the australian market often confirmed their travel arrangements more than two months before the onset of travel such an imposition created no problems to tourasia by doing so asiatic was able to put other potential customers on a waiting list and confirmed them with the capacity released by tourasia if they were unable to fill their capacity a guarantee of sale may risk potential excess capacity wait listing potential customers who would purchase capacity released after cut off date would substantially reduce that risk while still giving asiatic the benefits of the pledge finally both asiatic and tourasia were aware that new market development entailed a great deal of uncertainty and first it gave both parties the platform to develop the relationship such that the contract may become relational in character when parties participate in a more relational contract the process by which the exchange is facilitated is usually more flexible with parties preserving the spirit of the contract rather than the explicit terms second if the contract or the market does not walk out of the deal wiser and without recriminations finally should the market turn out better than expected no party would be able to hold up the other as the contract would have to be re negotiated the benefits of the relationship specific assets would have only been useful during the contract duration consequently asiatic and tourasia signed the contract in january service delivery as opposed to the distribution of service sales this difference may not be as relevant in goods since it is assumed that the selling and distribution of a tangible good can occur at the same time however the same cannot be assumed for services for the following reasons in advance as the consumers may wish to have the assurance that the service is available at the time they wish to consume there is therefore a meaningful time difference between selling and delivery furthermore the selling of a service in advance may be through an agent or sold directly through a firm since the sale of a promise that the service will be delivered at some future time complicating this promise is the fact that a service is perished immediately upon production and or consumption and the consumer would not be able to obtain the same service the advanced sale of the service therefore has serious transaction cost implications to the firm and a potential intermediary development of a service channel contract it showed that service intermediaries are not able to take inventory and is therefore unable to demonstrate their commitment consequently both parties would be unwilling to establish a contract this result is consistent with the findings of brouthers and brouthers in their study they showed that service firms making high asset this study demonstrates that commitment can be achieved through the intermediary investing in relationship specific assets such as marketing and promotional funds that could be recoverable subject to performance in other words the investment of such assets by the intermediary provides two benefits first it provides the service firm with a credible commitment from the intermediary second if the monetary within the contract duration the intermediary would not be at risk from the service firm s potential opportunism since the recovery is in the former s full control it also provides an incentive for the intermediary to be more aggressive in selling and obtaining an earlier recovery of its funds as for the service firm the intermediary s recovery of the specific assets serves also as a fulfillment of its obligations this area through the analysis of the deliberation process that took place in the institution of the contract our findings suggest that there is often more than meets the eye when analyzing written contracts and the analysis of written agreements should not be to the neglect of rich and insightful data that could be obtained from the deliberation process this case also uncovers an interesting aspect of service a service firm faces capacity constraint the threat of denying the intermediary the cruise at the time of consumption is real and credible furthermore the cruise that departs at that point in time is no longer saleable the agent therefore loses any opportunity to obtain revenue from a sale with a credible threat of capacity unavailability there is a real value attached to buying the service in advance for the specific asset investments in the channel however to provide the intermediary the assurance that it will not behave opportunistically the service firm has not only to invest in specific assets but also to
the following points should be noted for the first three items the between component is greater for the communality than for items professionalism and interests are very poorly explained by the factors at degree program level and the first factor at the degree program level is interpretable as a status factor whereas the second one is essentially related to the item consistency the factor scores at degree program level are represented in figure where the on earning and career whereas the points on the top denote a high satisfaction on consistency note that there are two degree programs in the lower left corner with low satisfaction on both dimensions the analysis could be deepened by adding some covariates but this is beyond if the model selection is influenced by the omission of the cluster level specific errors consists in fitting the same models as before except for treating the responses as continuous in such a case m plus avoids numerical integration so estimation takes only a few seconds two models on item scores are fitted and with the same factor structure as and respectively in both and the cluster level the lrt comparing these two models confirms that is better than subsequently the cluster level item specific errors are added to and denoting with and the resulting models the lrt comparing with leads to a less clear result therefore the choice of not decomposing the specificities may have unexpected consequences on the selection of wo level factor analysis with constrained thresholds in the search for a more parsimonious specification of the model it is interesting to consider the equal latent thresholds structure described earlier comparing model with a model having the same factor structure but constrained thresholds this structure cannot be easily imposed in m plus because the subject level item specific standard deviations are assumed to be equal across items and this point can be overcome in two ways first it is possible to add a set of fictitious factors each pointing to one item except for the reference item this allows definition of the item specific means and specificities however this solution is computationally inefficient as it increases by the number of latent variables and thus the dimension of the integration in the marginal likelihood second it is possible to impose nonlinear obtain the desired threshold structure as previously noted under the assumption that the thresholds are constant across items and hence written as the actual thresholds are tch for a total of free parameters in the m plus parametrization and are assumed to be constant across items so the threshold model for the ordinal variables is characterized by estimable thresholds therefore get the correct number of free parameters to this end note that the relation tch implies the following equal ties for any hence in the present case the required constraints on the actual thresholds could be for and and m plus is used to fit a model with the same factor structure of model but with the equal latent thresholds this leads to a model with parameters and nonlinear constraints on the thresholds the lrt statistic for the equal latent thresholds assumption is therefore with the data at hand the use of such structure is questionable although the consequences on the commonalities and factor scores are found to be modest fitting the models described in this article is the gllamm command of stata a highly flexible procedure that allows fitting of the two level factor model for ordinal variables both with unconstrained thresholds and with the equal latent thresholds in gllamm the equal latent thresholds structure is appealing as it is implemented through a special link the specificities the gllamm command performs ml using a newton raphson algorithm with adaptive gaussian quadrature in our application the results obtained with gllamm are similar to those yielded by m plus although the computational times are substantially longer concluding remarks major obstacle to a wide use of such models is software limitations to our knowledge the only widespread packages able to yield full information ml estimates for the models discussed here are m plus and the gllamm command of stata estimates under the usual mar assumption the techniques to obtain full information ml can be classified along two dimensions the method of numerical integration of the intractable integrals used to approximate the marginal likelihood and the type of algorithm used to maximize the approximate marginal likelihood in general the computational time of gaussian quadrature is roughly proportional to the product of the number of quadrature points for all the latent variables used so models with three or more factors per level may take too much time to be of practical use in such cases monte carlo integration may be more convenient there are promising attempts to improve the efficiency of numerical integration techniques the maximizing algorithm can perform the maximization directly on the marginal likelihood such as the newton raphson or indirectly on some variant of the likelihood such as the em further research is needed to assess the relative merits of newton raphson em and their numerous variants and to assess the interactions with the numerical integration techniques to the class of multilevel factor models an interesting example in this respect is the application of mazzolli concerning a multilevel structural equation model with ordinal variables moreover in the search for approximate but computationally efficient methods the development of limited information methods may be worthwhile variables in particular ansari and jedidi and goldstein and browne treated multilevel factor models with binary responses and fox and glas considered more general multilevel structural models although faster estimation algorithms can be developed the supplementary in terms of the quality of statistical inference a general answer is obviously not possible the results of muth and kaplan suggest that in standard factor models treating the ordinal variables as continuous is not severely harmful when the frequency distributions are unimodal with an internal mode however the use of a proper model is always a desirable feature of the analysis and the
small is or is unknown and difficult to know then the problem is a challenging then we are very likely to be out of business the above concepts are depicted in fig like hds each decision problem implicitly contains its actual domain potential domain and reachable domain if the dm when making decision often searches for alternatives only in the actual domain rather in the potential domain or reachable domain and very likely he she will have the decision blind that we can easily pay attention to is the alerted domain and the potential domain and reachable domain which we might be easily ignored can be deemed as unalerted domain the extra parameters we discussed in sec such as perception resources related players competence set expansion and even psychological states of the dms and players can exist in unalerted domains and changeable along the time we might get stuck in certain domain and cannot break through let us consider the following example example working horses for centuries many biologists paid their attention and worked hard to breed endurable mighty working horses so that the new horse could be durable controllable and did not have to eat to their great surprise their dream was realized by mechanists who invented a kind of working horse tractors the biologists what s wrong with the dm could we provide some suggestions for the dms to reduce their decision blind and help them jump out the decision trap first the decision problem is mistakenly defined only when we ask the right question can we get the right answer what is the real purpose of the decision it might be to breed a good horse or to create a working tool or to increase the supply of food or even to decrease the starvation settings provide different alternatives or in terms of the hd different actual domains activate different potential domains and reachable domains if the question is how to breed an endurable mighty working horse then the biologist s solution is reached if the question is how to create a good working tool the dm can search solutions in the mechanist s field if the question is how to increase the supply of food the genetic improvement of seeds might be considered the question is how to decrease the starvation then population control may be an approach by rethinking the objective and decomposition of the decision problems the decision trap can be likely avoided and we could end up with solutions without serious mistakes the following suggestions can serve as a checklist when facing non trivial decision problems suggestions are provided by traditional decision theory the spaces as our attention is paid to different suggestions our ad will change and expand the expansion could be of zero degree to second degree what are the vital alternatives what are the effective decision criteria what are the possible outcomes of a decision what is the preference structure of the decision making process how can a complex decision problem be decomposed into a number of sub problems and a number of stages so as to facilitate analysis of the problem who are the players and what are their various interests stakes and hds could the unknowns and or uncertainty involved in the decision process be clarified and coped with could the dm expand and or restructure the hd so as to increase decision could the perceived and acquired competence sets of the dms be expanded and enhanced so as to improve the confidence of decision making and decision quality could the final decisions be improved furthermore some very interesting discussions on decision traps can be found in ref competence analysis the challenging problems and even the problems out of business can become fuzzy problems or routine problems in this section we will introduce the concept of competence set analysis and methods for competence set expansion the research on competence set analysis began with yu as an application of hd theory defined competence set for a given problem as a collection of once the dm possesses the needed competence set for solving the decision problems he she can make the decisions confidently otherwise the dm might want to expand his her competence for solving the problem competence set analysis is a very important concept as evidenced by the fact that each year corporations and individuals invest so much time and money in job training and education to obtain necessary competence and schools and societies certify by issuing diplomas certificates and licenses to qualified people or organizations competence set analysis contains two inherent domains competence domain and problem domain as shown in fig there are two kinds of short term problems in csa given a problem or set of problems what is the needed competence set and how to acquire or obtain it some mathematical models can be found in refs kind of problems can be solves as to maximize the value of the competence the former problem is called the problem oriented competence set analysis and the latter is called the skill oriented competence set analysis in the long term we want to expand our competence set over time as to maximize the value of our individual live or maximize the value of the organization over its time of existence further discussion on competence set analysis could be found in are many methods for helping us to improve or expand our competence set and habitual domains from zero degree to second degree as to avoid decision traps we list some of them in tables and the interested reader is referred to refs and for more details competence innovation dynamics analysis that is given the acquired competence set and needed competence set for a specific decision problem how could we effectively expand the existing competence set to the needed competence set see refs and and quotes therein in businesses operations an equally important problem is skill oriented analysis that is given a set of competence what kind of
petri nets and then use a logical programming language to generate all possible execution chains of the work ows tan et al define a model for constrained work ows that includes several security constraints and establish conditions for the set of constraints that ensure a sound constrained work ow authorization schema the work mentioned above can be considered as examples that propose methods of in these methods the analysis of work ows is generally done by generating all possible assignments of users to tasks that are consistent with the security constraints however the computational overheads may be a problem especially for large business processes as more rigorous formal veri cation techniques theorem proving and model checking provide a reliable way for system veri to be limited in janssen et al use a graphical language to specify business processes and the specifications are then translated into promela the input language of the model checker spin desired properties described in ltl can then be model checked us ing spin in karamanolis et al propose the use of the tracta approach to modeling and analyzing the behavior of work ow systems in the tracta approach which are then specified using a language based on process algebra the specifications can then be model checked using the ltsa toolkit associated with tracta in the above two methods the formal veri cation technique model checking is used for work ow veri in this paper we propose the use of an equation based method the ots cafeobj method to model specify and verify work ows with rbac mechanism and sod constraints specifically a given work ow with rbac mechanism and sod constraints is modeled as an ots a kind of transition system that can be straightforwardly written in terms of generated by transitions of the ots and rbac mechanism and sod constraints are specified in effective conditions that are attached to each transition the ots is then written in cafeobj an algebraic specification language we express safety and liveness properties of the work x in y and verify that the rbac mechanism and sod constraints are correctly captured by the given work of specification and the veri cation of liveness properties ensures that the existence of rbac mechanism and sod constraints will not prevent completion of the execution of the work ow we use a case study on a sample work section outlines the ots cafeobj method section describes the sample work ow to be used throughout the remainder of the paper section describes how to model and specify work ow process rbac mechanism and sod constraints of work ows section describes how to express safety and liveness properties and their corresponding veri transition systems are the definitions of transition systems that can be straightforwardly written in terms of equations we assume that there exists a universal state space called we also assume that data types used including the equivalence relation for each data type have been de er from observer to observer given an ots and two states the equivalence between them wrt is defined as is the set of initial states such that a finite set of conditional transitions each is a function for each such that observers and transitions may be parameterized generally observers and transitions are denoted by and respectively provided that and there exist data types dk such that dk an execution of is an in a finite sequence of states satisfying there exists an in a finite number of indexes such that a state is called reachable wrt there exists an execution of in which appears let rs be the set of all reachable states wrt there are five basic properties wrt which are defined ensures rs leads to s holds if and only if this can be deduced by applying the following three deductive rules ensures s leads to properties since usually we describe the safety properties of work ows as invariant properties and liveness properties as leads to properties invariant properties mean that the predicate is true in any reachable state of let be all free variables except for one for states in we suppose that invariants is interpreted as in this paper ensures means that if reaches a state where holds then will eventually reach a state this is because ensures species that holds in the successor state after applying every transition in a state where holds and there exists a transition that makes true if is applied in a state where holds and such a transition is eventually applied thanks to fairness if also holds in a state where holds has already reached a state where holds although resembles ensures s does not necessarily keep holding until becomes true in leads to properties are transitive from definition but ensures properties are not description of otss in cafeobj an ots is described in cafeobj which can be used to specify abstract machines as well as abstract data types a visible sort denotes an abstract data type and a hidden sort the state space of an abstract machine there are two kinds of operators in hidden sorts action and observation operators an action operator can change can be used to observe the inside of an abstract machine declarations of observation and action operators start with bop or bops and those of other operators with op or ops operators are de ned in equations declarations of equations start with the eq and those of conditional equations with ceq the cafeobj system rewrites a given term by im is denoted by a cafeobj observation operator we assume that there exist visible sorts vk and denoting dk and where im the cafeobj observation operator is declared as bop vim any state in x is denoted by a constant say init which is declared as op init suppose that the initial value of is this is expressed by the following equation xim is a cafeobj variable
mission in teaching literacy as a complete assemblage the items recovered from the te puna cellar suggest austerity and a certain level of poverty at the mission house this is indicated by the small ceramic assemblage with a focus on the cheaper willow pattern and other seconds items as well as the utilitarian glass assemblage and the plain buttons from a photograph waimate mission house fig eliza white painted before her marriage to william white mangungu mission house hokianga harbor fig marianne williams undated hocken library dunedin new zealand fig thimbles te puna excavation march the replication of class and hierarchy the new territory of new zealand this was not necessarily the case with later settlers arriving after who may have been attempting to avoid poverty and the class system from which they originated marsden had deliberately chosen mechanics or working class tradesmen for his first mission at oihi believing that civilization should precede christianity all three of the first missionaries at oihi came with little education hall a carpenter and thomas kendall the son of a farmer who initially struggled to earn his living as a grocer and draper marsden whose father was a blacksmith and a small farmer in yorkshire came from similar beginnings himself the arrival of henry and marianne williams in followed by his brother william and william s wife jane signified a change within the bay of islands missions high profile mission families henry williams a retired naval lieutenant and william williams a graduate from oxford university a class above the usual mission family henry williams was the first effective leader of the cms in new zealand and their settlement at paihia changed the focus of missionary activity in the bay rangihoua and oihi were by now something of a backwater with paihia and kerikeri at the center of mission life rogers henry noted that henry s wife marianne came from a prosperous family prior to her marriage living in a household where domestic tasks were undertaken by servants marianne williams brought european servants with her to new zealand from australia and at paihia continued to have european as well as maori women who helped with domestic tasks and taught her daughters music events in the missionary world it is important to note that they arrived in the bay of islands as young women mostly aged only in their early twenties with values and sensibilities brought directly from english society their journals and letters leave a certain silence about hannah king perhaps most profound in the case of anne wilson and her husband john who arrived at paihia in april with their two small children anne wilson an educated member of gentry who had lived in country houses in england kept a regular journal for most of her missionary life in new zealand until her early death from breast cancer in at the age of wilson s numerous letters to her husband and women friends at other missions also form part of her archive anne and john wilson spent their first year in new zealand at te puna in the second mission house there recently vacated by james shepherd and his family the new puriri mission on the hauraki plains in anne wilson leaves only one journal entry for the year she and her husband spent at te puna living alongside the king family we have thus begun housekeeping in this savage land i have schools to attend to and girls under my charge besides my own children her husband was a little more articulate in his response to this alien environment writing in a letter accompanying his first report cms in britain such is the unsettled state of the mind in this benighted country that it is with much difficulty i am enabled to write at all very day brings its cares and anxieties peculiar to this land in a way which i confess i scarce calculated to meet john wilson s report documents the events at te puna that appeared to leave him in a state of shock he witnessed maori women cutting and scarring themselves for a dead person he rescued a young woman a slave from rangihoua pa from a chief who was determined to take her back hiding her in an underground part of their house and he countered further threats on the young woman s life by the time of the wilsons arrival at te puna john and hannah king were old hands in the missionary world having spent nearly twenty years in the bay of islands the kind of events that shocked john wilson may used to dealing in his introduction to the edited manuscript of her letters and journals armstrong makes the point that anne wilson would not have been on visiting terms with most of the other missionaries and their wives noting also that william williams had made comment that some lay missionaries were far above the station of many ordained after the move to puriri anne wilson expressed some of her social anxieties she about her children playing with the edwin fairburn younger brother of elizabeth whose mother sent her stays from puriri one of only two other european families at this isolated mission letters to and from other women such as anne chapman give the impression of a coterie sending affectionate messages and kisses to each other s children gossiping about those who were not liked and who might become one s neighbors as missionaries moved to new locations hannah king the wilsons close neighbor for that first year and no mention of her name at all the letters and journals of eliza white anne wilson and marianne and jane williams express nostalgia for their homes and families in england their voyages to new zealand forming a breaking point between past and future hannah king s origins differed from these women she was the daughter of a ship s captain and first traveled to the colony of port jackson in with her parents was aged about fifteen along with her older brother thomas
and lerman we can convert the argument given in eq into the marginal probability formula of the following form pit exp each airport coefficient is airport specific it is well known that when kh the nested logit model collapses to the joint logit model eq incorporates the two step aspect of airline choices but it assumes the one step decision process for airport choices by using the fotheringham approach again we incorporate the two step aspect of airport choices into our model by modifying eq as pit it where it is the airport choice set of traveler at time it hit and it is the probability that airport is in the choice set it as before by using the negative exponential function to specify the functional form of it we can re write eq as follows pit exp iht likelihood that an airport violates the minimum acceptable standard of traveler at time and dp is a non negative parameter the model we propose a nested logit model of airport airline choice whose marginal probability and conditional probability are given by eqs and respectively a unique aspect of our model is that it provides different behavioral implications depending on the values of dp and dl for example if dp and dl the model implies that travelers use the twostep the model implies that travelers use the twostep decision process for both the airport and airline choices if however dp and dl the model implies that travelers use the two step decision process only for airport choices but not for airline choices similarly if dp and dl the model implies that travelers use the two step decision process only for airline choices but not for airport choices our model may be viewed as a generic form of the standard multinomial logit and nested and nested logit models notice that when dp and dl the proposed model converges to the nested logit model further if kh and dp dl the model reduces to the multinomial logit model these conditions suggest that the multinomial logit and nested logit models may be considered as the special cases of the proposed model be noted that the calibration of the proposed model is straightforward because both the utility function and the penalty function are linear in the parameters assuming that there are no errors in the penalty variables lijht and piht we can calibrate the model by using a standard discrete choice software such as limdep and nlogit study area we calibrate the model by using the survey data collected in the service area of des moines international airport the area consists of counties of iowa that are within a ride from the des moines metropolitan area travelers in this area are generally concerned with high airfares for flying into and out of dsm many travelers use out of airports on a regular basis to avoid high airfares of dsm iowa department of transportation estimates that about the travelers in this area use out of region airports to take advantage of lower fares and or more convenient airline services according to the iowa department of transportation and dsm management the out of region airports which the study area travelers generally use are kansas city international minneapolis st paul international and omaha international airports international airports mci and oma are served by southwest airlines a major low cost carrier msp is a hub of northwest airlines the distances from des moines to mci msp and oma are approximately miles miles and miles respectively while in theory the study area travelers can also spill to other airports than mci msp or oma they seldom do so because these airports are either too far away from dsm or offer limited services frequencies the major airlines serving these four airports are american america west continental delta northwest southwest twa united and us air these nine major airlines account for approximately and the airport traffic in dsm mci msp and oma respectively given these conditions we will model travelers choice decisions within the above four airports and nine major airlines survey data to give information on the most recent us domestic trip that originated from each of the four candidate airports survey questions included such items as trip date trip destination the departure airport and the airline chosen for the trip surveys were distributed to the target travelers by using two methods the first is mail distribution in total surveys were mailed to the recent flyers in the study area the list of zip codes that encompass the study area the list of zip codes that encompass the study area was obtained from the iowa department of transportation the list of recent flyers in these zipcode areas was provided by a local travel agency in each mail a discount coupon usable at the dsm car parking lot was enclosed as an incentive of the surveys mailed out were returned with responses representing an overall response rate of approximately the second is the intercept survey conducted at the dsm main terminal building four college four college students worked on shifts for three weeks their shifts were carefully scheduled such that all days of the week and all times of the day were equally covered by the students only the travelers who lived in the study area were surveyed when a traveler agreed to participate in the survey the traveler was given the parking coupon the total number of surveys collected by this method was obtained via the two methods the number of collected trip data was indicating that an average of trip data were provided by each respondent of the collected trip data were found to be either incomplete or inadequate and were deleted further we eliminated the trip data that were too old for travelers to have accurate memories these screening processes reduced old these screening processes reduced the number of usable data to summary statistics of the survey data are reported in table measures airport and airline attributes like many other
arise or when there are major regulatory failures as reflective of the fire alarm perspective for legislative oversight this type of political accountability is potentially important in keeping regulatory excesses in check or in addressing gaps in regulatory provisions the failures of a system based approach are likely to come from repeated system breakdowns and the failures of performance based approaches are likely to come from systemic undesired outcomes experiences with newer regulatory regimes four experiences with variants of system based and performance based regulations are considered in what follows with attention to accountability issues as depicted in table the cases reflect different stages of development of system based and performance the cases were selected to consider accountability challenges that arise at the formative stages as well as at the more mature stage development of regulatory regimes the cases are necessarily selective as they have been chosen from regulatory situations for which accountability issues were notable although the cases illustrate the potential for accountability shortfalls in system based and performance based regimes they clearly do not such shortfalls are inevitable a topic that is addressed more fully in the conclusions except for the discussion of performance based approaches to building regulation in new zealand each of the experiences is within the usa the new zealand experience is especially noteworthy as it is the only case of a fully implemented performance based regime that spans a whole sector of regulation of the secondary published work was undertaken to identify the context for each regulatory reform governmental reports external reviews and the websites of relevant regulatory agencies provided a basis for describing the regulatory approaches and depicting implementation issues given the constraints of space and the continuing evolution of each regime the depictions that follow can only be considered limited snapshots food safety changed roles under system based regulation of food safety was propelled onto the american governmental agenda with the escherichia coli bacterial outbreak in jack in the box restaurants in the state of washington four children died and another people became ill this was not an isolated case relating to food safety from the early to the present there have been major recalls of contaminated meats in the usa a temporary ban by european countries on the import of british beef over fear of mad cow disease on importing suspect tainted beef from alberta and a temporary ban on import of poultry from belgium because of dioxin contaminated feed that these problems could arise in countries with well developed systems for regulating food safety was all the more shocking to an unaware public largely in response to the sensation created by the coli scare the clinton administration initiated an overhaul of the way in which meats and poultry are inspected in the a new state of the art science based inspection system this regulatory approach hazard analysis and critical control point requires meat and poultry processors to identify potential sources of contamination within processing plants to monitor those critical control points to institute additional controls that are aimed at preventing contamination and to test for the presence of coli and of salmonella the poke and sniff inspection regime dating to the meat of did not adequately target and reduce microbial pathogens and consequently was literally hit or miss after several years of rule making and commentary the haccp regulatory system for meat and poultry was introduced in with administration by the food safety and inspection service of the us department of agriculture as discussed by coglianese and lazer the haccp systems approach exemplifies this is the identification by firms of potential food safety hazards and critical control points in meat and poultry production and processing a critical control point is a step or procedure where controls can be used to prevent reduce to an acceptable level or eliminate food safety hazards as part of the haccp plan plants must establish critical limits of a hazard for each critical control point the haccp regulatory approach transforms the burden of to plant operators and substantially changes the role of inspectors two key accountability issues are raised by the experience to date one issue is the legal basis for assessing the quality of the system under haccp the adequacy of the system is certified by the firmas verified by fsis review and through ongoing monitoring of system performance testing for the presence of pathogens by plant personnel and others by the fsis is a primary bureaucratic control mechanism the of these tests as indicators of haccp system performance creates a potential gap in bureaucratic accountability in one key ruling concerning salmonella testing the fifth us circuit court of appeals ruled that testing for the presence of salmonella bacteria in raw meat could not be used to close plants that fail the tests the court found that such testing did not necessarily assess plant performance and thus the usda could not use the results as a basis for enforcement actions against meat producers this legal logic was also used in a preliminary injunction in by a federal district court to prevent the closure of a nebraska beef processor fearing an adverse final decision the department of agriculture decided to settle the processor and agreed to let the processor continue operations with increased oversight weakened bureaucratic control mechanisms for monitoring systems performance that in turn increases reliance on certification and monitoring of their systems fsis regulators have taken the position that the legal rulings simply put more emphasis on identifying defects in plant systems as a basis for corrective actions rather than on outcomes of those systems however as noted in a report by the us general accountability office fsis enforcement and failures of meat and poultry plant haccp system failures the latter stresses the second accountability issue involving the shift from bureaucratic to professional accountability this is most evident from the changed role of fsis inspectors from emphasizing bureaucratic accountability through detailed inspection to emphasizing professional accountability of firms not surprisingly the shift in roles
variability in performance needs to be reduced through performance management to improve the quality of work evidence based information about case managers work however little is known about what kind of data are most persuasive and how to develop and implement measures to demonstrate value report cards are one strategy but report cards are only intended to measure performance they have limitations when used for day to day management purposes they contain information on the quality of care access to and satisfaction with care and financial performance and are open to the the health plan employer data and information set by the national committee for quality assurance and the hospital performance report by the joint commission on accreditation of healthcare organizations healthcare professionals performance for example only percent of hospital leaders in california and percent in new york rated their state report very good or excellent in facilitating quality this happens mainly because the data are outdated not in real time and provide little information that can guide improvement card from those currently available for healthcare consumers this implies that hospitals need a more comprehensive and integrated view of performance to reflect rapidly changing healthcare systems report cards have evolved toward using a balanced scorecard approach where they are composed of multiple domains and emphasize a balance among those data among different disciplines it included information on hospitals utilization operational performance and clinical outcomes and helped this system identify opportunities for improvement by accelerating communication among different departments and cost reductions through coordination another example is the clinical value cost the concept of the balanced scorecard was selected to avoid the flaw of focusing only on one major domain an effective report card should be concise and contain only meaningful data within the limited number of data elements reflect the organization s mission and strategies provide concurrent and prospective information allow developed by kaplan and norton in and introduced in incorporated all five elements the scorecard is not just a performance measurement tool but also is a performance management tool whereas most report cards measure outcomes without process components the scorecard integrates both processes and outcomes financial customer internal business and learning and a financial perspective explains how an organization looks to its shareholders a customer perspective explains what brings about financial benefits an internal business perspective describes how people achieve outcomes and a learning and growth perspective implies a capability to support and industry focus on financial performance healthcare organizations often value clinical outcomes and patient satisfaction more than financial however in a cost driven healthcare environment a financial perspective becomes as important as a customer perspective striking the balance between financial and customer needs is challenging but narrowly are learning and growth measure processes that drive outcomes by including these two perspectives the scorecard can be used to effectively improve performance because it then shows how desirable outcomes can be reached outcome evaluation alone is not enough to support decision making when the quality of processes is separated which are lagged indicators do not allow prescriptive action early enough process evaluation using prospective and leading indicators help managers prepare for future real time interventions prevent undesired events from happening this saves avoidable costs and external and internal performance indicators furthermore the scorecard balances the outcomes the organization wants to achieve and the drivers of those outcomes a further principle is that strategy which is a set of thus the scorecard is defined as a holistic methodology that converts an organization s vision and strategy into a comprehensive set of linked performance and action measures that provide the basis for successful strategic measurement and the scorecard facilitates managers decision making because it includes performance indicators sensitive to the perspectives and their the scorecard should not be just a collection of performance indicators for example the financial perspective is at the top of a hierarchy supported by a customer perspective an internal business perspective and a learning and growth perspective without a clear understanding of the principles of the scorecard this is a problem because the reasons and further strategies for success or failure in achieving outcomes cannot be identified if the unique principles of the scorecard are not followed the resulting product would not be any better than most report cards and would not lead to performance improvement organizations for example the mayo clinic in rochester minnesota selected five domains clinical productivity and efficiency mutual respect and diversity social commitment external environmental assessment and patient characteristics as key to evaluating quality of care clinical outcomes and access to care are the core depending on an organization s specific mission not for profit organizations tend to place a customer perspective as the ultimate goal instead of a financial perspective because making financial profit is not their first an example of this is the scorecard used at the yale university school of although the basic goal of businesses is through stable financial capacity as their main mission each perspective of the scorecard is measured using a limited number of performance indicators that usually add up to a total between to specific although there are hundreds of specific performance data elements in healthcare a small number of critical factors that show of data can be overwhelming making interpretation of information difficult in healthcare organizations satisfaction has been the typical measure used to learn customers perspectives customers can be patients physicians or payers return on investment net income and cost per case are indicators of of healthcare indicators measuring an internal business perspective include a length of stay medication safety infection control patient and family education care coordination per visit duration clinical utilization and teaching an internal growth and learning perspective includes indicators such as employee capabilities information professional nurses competency and skill target scores target scores are set in relation to the objectives of the four perspectives and their performance indicators in order to have attainable goals target scores can be based on benchmarks or performance data external data of best achieved performance in
of the informal theory of sensation that characterizes sensation have as their model the predicates of physical objects in other words when the ryleans characterized these new episodes they did so by analogically transposing the predicates of the physical objects they already perceived impressions thus an impression is given a use which embedded in informal principles contributes to the explanation of the correlations of our perceptual responses with the environments to which we respond outer perception sensory states of consciousness are provoked by physical objects there is generated a pre epistemic cue for the theory of sensation to produce non inferentially an intuition which includes within it the empirical predicates red and rectangular now our non inferential intuitional response to physical objects includes predicates that have their origin in the physical objects that the perceptual experience response is provoked by non apperceived states of consciousness and because the predicates that we use in this response to objects originally come from the objects themselves we can say with assurance that our perceptual response to these physical objects is direct into a sufficiently complex conceptual or linguistic system as sellars says hile one does not have the concept of red until one has directly perceived something as red to be red the coming to see something as red is the culmination of a complicated process which is the slow building up of a multi dimensional pattern of linguistic responses the fruition of which as conceptual occurs when all these dimensions come into play in such direct perceptions as that this physical object over here is red spatial demonstratives and indexicals such that one can know that the object is over here rather than there to use a tensed language such that one can follow an object s existence through time and to use a language which includes the other color concepts we can add two other abilities that are implicit in the passage and will become important later on the ability to use the essential indexical i which allows one to separate out one s own experience from that which is experienced and the capacity to know when in general the normal functioning of these abilities is to be put in abeyance by abnormal perceptual circumstances when one acquires a conceptual system like this through learning a language one gains the ability to perceive phenomenal properties like shape and color but one also gains the ability to perceive an object s higher level causal properties and relations in some sense to understand a bit about sellars theory of content as early as he formulated and endorsed a particular type of conceptual role semantics in which the content of a concept is determined by its rule governed functional role rather than by its place within a representational system as brandom pointed out earlier concepts for sellars just are the nexuses to which and from which we are permitted to move by the formal and material important about this view for our purposes is that the material moves that we make from one nexus to another is so sellars thinks the basis of our synthetic knowledge about the world ur consciousness of the ways of things is a matter of the material moves of the language game in which we speak about the world know that all occasions of a kind a are occasions of kind is a matter of one s language containing the move from is a pp the permissible moves of our language gives us this information because the material rules of inference that partially make up our linguistic framework are the same as the laws that govern the behavior of objects in the world i it is a law of nature that if anything were a case of a it would be a thus inferrable from ax the generalized material implication ax bx can be asserted on the basis of a rule of language just as we incorporate the informal theory of sensation directly into our conceptual response to our own non apperceived states of consciousness we incorporate the formal and material rules of inference that constitute our language into our perceptual responsiveness to the perceived world as new through unconscious learning or through the conscious feedback of formal and informal theories our perceptual response to the world changes the reason why this is important for understanding perceptual experience is that if the concepts that make up our conceptual framework involve the laws of nature and are inconceivable without them then we already know in our of the perceived object and how it will counterfactually interact with other aspects of the environment this allows us from within perception to distinguish between a foreground and a background the foreground encompasses the propositional claim within perceptual experience made on analogy with an overtly linguistic episode this claim which is for a moment in the forefront of our consciousness interacts with certain background conditions concerning the object and its some of these background conditions for example the immediate ground against which the object stands out are perceived however there are other conditions that while part of the overall perceptual experience are not strictly speaking perceived as sellars puts it we see trees but of trees we do not see their opposite sides or their kind of bark and branches an inside of some kind of wood and endowed with some form of the causal properties characteristic of trees thus the sortal concept involved in the perceptual taking of an object carries with it generic or specific implications concerning that of the object which is not perceived inferential process akin to predication but is an intuitional state that uses the same sortal concept that would have been used in such a process as such the intuitional state involves at least potentially the generic and specific implications of that sortal concept these implications which again are not strictly speaking perceived stand as the background horizon of the foreground claim they stand ready to be either
in the and early and none with apaches and navajos nonetheless the consensus had its uses it provided a conceptual framework that finally seemed to promise unanimity of national purpose in coping with indian raiders burned out ranches and childless parents the new consensus also fueled anti americanism in advance of an increasingly likely war and finally the imagined conspiracy between norte americanos and indians helped northerners and national leaders alike escape a conceptual problem of their own making it had been emotionally and ideologically satisfying to speak of a miserable handful of fearful cannibals or of children of the desert yearning to be civilized but such talk bad required herculean self deception in the presence of several hundred indian raiders campaigning together with methodical precision across multiple states year after year so when in their hour of crisis mexicans started looking through indians and saw norte americanos on the other side dispensing weapons supplies and the necessary instruction the world made more sense than it had in a long time in a northern village an over portion of inhabitants every hut was crowded with men boys women and children sometimes northern mexicans confided in the norte americanos telling tales of perpetual insecurity lamenting dead or stolen kin and promising cooperation in return for protection from indians polk and his war planners had counted on this while the war would eventually end when us troops took mexico city and the hails of the montezumas initially the president intended to wage the war entirely in the north in those that had been devastated by indian raids polk and his advisors were anxious to obtain the friendship or at least neutrality of the northern mexicans who would fall under us occupation american generals had to worry about tens of thousands of civilians swelling the ranks of the mexican army about coordinated efforts to deny americans necessary supplies and perhaps most importantly about the possibility of a broad based guerrilla insurgency against the occupation such scenarios prompted polk and his subordinates to craft detailed instructions for commanders on the ground ordering them to exploit mexicans fears and dissatisfaction with their government indians would be central to this task it is our wish to see you liberated from despots general zachary taylor was to announce at each town conquered or surrendered to drive back the savage cumanches to prevent the renewal of their assaults and to compel them to restore to you from long lost wives and children general stephen kearny delivered a new mexican variant from the mexican government you have never received protection he proclaimed the apaches and the navajoes come down from the mountains and carry off your sheep and even your women whenever they please my government will correct all this given mexican assumptions about the causes of indian raiding we can imagine but help from hypocrites surely seemed better than no help at all because conflicts with indians would only intensify during the us mexican war in new mexico navajo headmen protested when american officers insisted that they stop raiding mexicans you have lately commenced a war against the same people the leader zacarillos largos observed you now turn upon us for attempting to do what you have done yourselves by american periodicals were reporting that raids in new mexico were worse than they had been in twenty years in chihuahua and sonora the war likewise coincided with an amplification of interethnic violence just months after the start of the us invasion scalp hunters funded by chihuahua s government assisted mexican townspeople in massacring at least apache men women and children who had come unarmed and at peace into the town of galeana an observer in chihuahua city recalled howling jollification copious amounts of tequila and and hats thrown into the air in wild exultation as the withered black scalps were paraded through town mangas coloradas and other apache leaders responded with waves of retributive violence that would crash down upon northwestern mexico throughout the war most consequentially comanches and kiowas continued sending huge raiding campaigns into mexico during the us mexican war doubtlessly they sought to events above the rio grande in southern comanche negotiators forged an alliance with mescalero apaches former enemies who frequented critical crossing points into mexico and who had previously hindered comanche raiding campaigns the peace likely put the mescaleros extensive knowledge about northern mexico at comanche disposal and may have led to joint raids moreover marked the end of a long stable period of greater than average rainfall in most of northern the southern plains the effects of the drought were exacerbated by long term over hunting for the hide trade and habitat destruction along critical watercourses combined these developments would do great damage to the southern bison herd by the us indian agent for texas reported widespread consumption of horses and mules in comanche camps and the kiowa calendar memorialized the winter of for its elaborate antelope drive something resorted to only in times of great scarcity disappointing hunts seem to have contributed to a series of tremendously destructive raiding campaigns into coabuila chihuahua durango zacatecas and san luis potosi during the us mexican war northern mexicans suffered grievously and to think that we owe all this raged the editors of the registro oficial to those infamous north american enemies who push the bloody hordes of savages upon us and direct their operations with unparalleled such are the methods through which a nation that styles itself enlightened and just wages war a british traveler passing through north central mexico in late glimpsed the effects of indian raids everywhere he went as far south as zacatecas city he found that los indios los indios was the theme of every conversation as he made his cautious way north he constantly heard tales of terror and dread expectation and saw the raiders work in settlement of crosses many of them thrown down or mutilated by indians a well belonging to chihuahua s governor choked with slaughtered animals vultures
in research may have a negative effect on earnings in the period studied there may be a significant and uncertain time lag between initial research spending and product revenue or profit in a similar study no significant relationship was found between research based innovation and revenues in the canadian biotechnology industry therefore innovation performance in biotechnology is often measured in terms of patents rather than profits there are strong associations among intensity and certain measures of innovation performance biotechnology the nature of the associations among intensity at the firm level innovation performance and the factors that influence innovation strategies in firms will be explored further in this study the questions to be addressed include what is the nature of the relationship between intensity and innovation performance in firms and how do intensity namely what factors do firms reporting high levels of innovation use to their individual advantages in order to achieve success in innovation performance data and methodology the data utilized in this study were collected through a large scale postal survey of biotechnology firms in the us the us biotechnology industry sample base a sample of us companies received questionnaires the survey yielded useable responses bringing the final response rate to percent a more recent study supported by national science foundation grant surveyed biotechnology firms in in areas where some of the differences in responses over time in most cases the data gathered subsequently reinforce the findings of the first survey the tables included in this paper however are based on the original data set only the primary measure of commitment to innovation employed by the study is intensity the applications domestic patent approvals and international patent approvals and production based innovation new product introductions new process introductions redesigned products and redesigned processes during the year study period firm performance measures utilized in this study are growth in sales revenues export revenues employment and net profits with a median value of percent for the remainder of this analysis firms reporting intensity greater than percent are considered high intensity firms and those reporting intensity of percent or lower are low intensity firms in the subsequent study firms report mean intensity of percent with a median value of percent the slightly lower mean and for each innovation measure are as follows number of domestic patent applications filed international patent applications filed domestic and international patent approvals new product introductions new process introductions and redesigned products and processes for cross tab analysis purposes later in this study firms reporting higher than mean levels of innovation are classified as high level innovation are classified as low level innovators results firm level characteristics table presents firm level characteristics of sample firms analyzed in terms of their relative intensity table demonstrates the relationships between intensity and research based and production based innovation table shows the relative intensity of shows the relationships between production based innovation and firm performance in tables and the relationships between the intensity and factors affecting research based and production based innovation strategies respectively of high level innovators are analyzed revenues rather than profits are used as an indicator of firm size and potential because the research product can extend to or years and in some cases never yield a profit table shows that percent of all sample firms report revenues of million or less seventy one percent of high intensity firms report revenues of million or less and percent of low intensity firms report revenues greater than million the concentration of firms combining lower revenues and a research based biotechnology firms study data are consistent with table results percent of all firms report revenues of million or less while a much larger percent of firms reporting revenues greater than million are low intensity firms while it seems logical that firms with less revenue would devote a smaller percentage irm s commitment to research based innovation however the sources of revenues among low and high intensity firms are more telling from table we see that firms devoting percent or less of revenues to are those focused primarily on earning revenues through product sales eighty two percent of low intensity firms draw their revenues from product sales compared to only percent of high from royalty and or licensing agreements or contract and or collaboration agreements the survey data corroborate this finding where percent of low intensity firms earn their revenues from product sales compared to only percent for high intensity firms so it seems that firms intensity may be related to the strategy behind their stage innovations in production marketing and distribution more than on earlier stage innovations such as basic research and product development as would be expected the focus of employment among low intensity firms is also on the production commercialization end of the spectrum with percent of employment in manufacturing and marketing while percent of employees are on average years younger than low intensity firms with a median year of establishment of indicating a propensity for firms in the earlier stages of development to concentrate resources on research product development licensing technology and collaborating to innovate in summary table shows that the characteristics of low intensity firms differ in several respects from the characteristics of however the differences in firm characteristics alone are not enough to explain the differences in innovation performance innovation performance must also be a product of individual firm level strategy intensity and innovation to test for and measure relationships between that intensity is positively correlated with the number of domestic patent applications filed number of international patent applications filed number of domestic patent approvals received and number of international patent approvals received when testing for new product introductions are negatively correlated the same negative relationships exist between intensity and the number of process introductions intensity and the number of redesigned products and intensity and the number of redesigned processes however years exists in the biotechnology an assumption that is supported in the literature this time lag is often the result of regulatory hurdles and sometimes the result of
corresponds to the endurance limit for steel reinforcing bars and wwr at the start of testing for this program the endurance limit was assumed to correspond to million cycles however per the advice offered by experts such as hawkins of the university of illinois and rabbat of pca the research team decided to change the longlife test results because specimens that survive million cycles are likely to survive million cycles as well also the greater life limit was felt to render more acceptable results to account for variability among wwr producers three producers referred to as suppliers a and provided the wwr for testing the work performed in nchrp fatigue properties for design purposes current wwr is produced with yield strengths in the range of ksi to ksi higher strength can be achieved by special order this study was conducted on wwr with a minimum yield strength of ksi stress strain diagrams were developed in this project to verify that the steel achieved that strength and strength was not taken as a variable parameter in the testing program the wire sizes chosen for this research were and representing the available range of wire sizes in the us market according to the wire reinforcement institute manual of standard note that the letter designates deformed wire and the number that follows with a cross sectional area of which is equal to a no reinforcing bar similarly is equal in diameter and area to a no bar these sizes may seem surprisingly large however they represent the state of the art in wwr production and have the ability to be used for bridge and other large reinforced concrete applications the testing system is shown in fig a sinusoidal constant axial stress was applied at a frequency of cycles per second wires with and without welded cross wires were tested cross wires had cross sectional areas that were those of the primary wires the gauge length in all tests was in only one cross wire per specimen was used the number of cycles required to fail the specimens was recorded the value of f was progressively increased until the endurance limit was reached the experience gained from testing and from previous work allowed the researchers to establish a conservative limit of ksi for the equation f for wires with cross welds and ksi for wires without cross fmin the three primary levels of fmin were taken as ksi ksi and ksi representing reasonable levels of dead load plus minimum live loads in actual applications it is possible with additional testing to increase the values of ksi and ksi to greater limits and still reach the endurance limit however the authors program analysis of results the research targeted development of a formula for wwr similar to the current formula for reinforcing that takes into account two conditions wires with no cross welds in the high tension zone and wires with cross welds in the high tension zone with deformed wires similar to eq the proposed formula is expressed as follows a bf min where f allowable stress range f min minimum live load stress combined with the more severe stress from either the permanent loads or the shrinkage and creep induced external loads positive if tension negative if compression range for the specimen is shown as a line connecting the two end values an arrow indicates when testing was stopped the specimen could have reached a greater number of cycles figure shows the same plot for wires without a cross weld figures and show plots of f versus number of cycles the data points are compared with ksi in fig for wires with cross welds and with is comparable to the values already used for bars the points on the left side of the graph that did not meet million cycles represent the results of the early trial and the adjustment process used to determine the appropriate range for the endurance limit the points below the million mark did not reach the endurance limit because the f value was too great it was believed to be reasonably conservative and consistent with the values for strands and bars also a previous study had suggested that the presence of cross wires in the high stress zone drops the fatigue resistance by one with the resistance of bars and wires without cross welds assumed to be ksi the resulting value for wires with cross welds is suppliers produced similar graphs except that their yield strengths were closer to ksi some tests resulted in yield strengths slightly less than ksi but were accepted for the purposes of fatigue testing in order to avoid repeating two years worth of fatigue testing to correct for a small difference in an insignificant fatigue parameter this experience to be available in design note that for higher than grade steel yield strength is defined as the strength at a strain of rather than the for grade steel conclusions and recommendations use of wwr in precast concrete products has substantially bridge girders when used for this purpose the cross wires are only located in the wwr in the top and bottom flanges so the welds are away from the high stress zones high strength concrete is increasingly being used in industry requiring a corresponding increase in steel strength wwr offers greater strength without a cost premium over grade concrete member cracking under service loads and a greater need for fatigue control of steel reinforcement the research reported herein has resulted in specific recommendations for design of wwr in situations where fatigue limits must be checked based on the test results the proposed fatigue equation for wwr with a cross weld in the high stress cross weld in the high stress region the proposed formula is in us customary units fwwr in ksi in si units fwwr in mpa the definition of the high stress region for application of eq and is for shear reinforcement in i beams box beams and similar members the clear web
announcement according to kelson and allen a well designed insider trading policy that is properly followed creates an effective prophylactic against inadvertent insider has occurred adoption and enforcement of a written insider trading policy also provide a method for the corporation to demonstrate that appropriate steps have been taken to prevent insider trading violations and to assert a defense against controlling person liability for trades made by its insiders under sections and of the securities exchange act of they further point out that only a minority of companies keep trading windows closed until after the filing of their qs and ks neither legislation nor sec rules require firms to restrict insider trades to particular periods or circumstances thus firm policies that prohibit or discourage trade at specific times are an endogenous and voluntary response by firms to the more fundamental risks that insiders and the corporation face we term these risks jeopardy jeopardy arises from the formal policing activities of the exchanges and the sec the resulting enforcement actions and precedents and the less formal disciplinary roles of the business press who publicizes certain insider trades and the plaintiffs bar who launches class action lawsuits given that the jeopardy an insider faces from trade varies over the fiscal quarter and in particular jeopardy is higher before the earnings announcement than in the period between the announcement and the or filing it is interesting to ask whether insider trade clusters in low jeopardy periods and whether such trades are profitable to insiders prior research has examined the connection between insider trading and a variety of information we believe our study is the first to examine insider trading around the filing of ks and qs as such it provides evidence on the specific nature of the private information related to proximate financial disclosures that insiders possess use in making their trading decisions the filing of a or is an important and interesting informational event because it occurs frequently and regularly the magnitude of the stock price response is sometimes large for the observations the abnormal return at the filing is less than and for the observations it is more than and compared to informed trade before an earnings announcement there to believe the jeopardy due to trade before the filing is lower johnson et al examine whether insider trading is a determinant of subsequent securities litigation they find that plaintiffs lawyers filings and allegations point to the level of insider stock sales as evidence of management s fraudulent intent our research question is different rather than asking if insider trading contributes to litigation we ask how the combined threats of sec scrutiny litigation and adverse publicity may discipline or limit insider trading we do this by contrasting insider trading decisions in firm and time specific situations where jeopardy is either high or low jagolinzer and roulstone examine the evolution of the distribution of insider trades around earnings announcements in the years over this year period they find that insider trades in the month after the earnings announcement as a fraction of their evidence also suggests a shift of insider trades to the period after the earnings announcement the shift is more pronounced at firms that have certain characteristics small market capitalizations low analyst following low institutional ownership more volatile earnings surprises and more volatile returns given a trend over time towards greater jeopardy for improper trade and assuming greater jeopardy at firms with those certain characteristics their time this study in identifying how jeopardy influences insiders trades corporate insiders profit from foreknowledge of price relevant information disclosures by selling before the disclosure of bad news or after the disclosure of good news some argue that instead of altering the time of trade to profit from information releases insiders may alter the time of the disclosure or the content of the along these lines beneish et al examine whether earnings precedes or follows insiders trades in our setting the time of disclosure of the or is fixed within narrow limits by regulation moreover many firms voluntarily disclose the date on which they plan to announce earnings the evidence in bagnoli et al is that by and large firms do announce earnings on the planned and disclosed this suggests that earnings announcement and filing dates are known in advance and sticky also the scope to modify the disclosure likely is limited by the facts that earnings are reported after either a review by public accountants in the case of qs an audit in the case of ks as a consequence the components of earnings have been fixed further consistency over time of the principles used in the preparation of financial reports is required by reporting standards filing is mandatory and deadlines are prescribed so the setting we examine is one in which insiders have discretion to time and quantity of their trades but are limited in their ability to alter the content or timing of their disclosures for investors our findings indicate that the informativeness of insider trades depends in part on when during the fiscal quarter the trade takes place and characteristics of the firm including the risk of litigation that the firm faces the link between jeopardy and the timing of insider trades may interest jurists studying how individuals actions change in statute case law and regulation these findings also have implications for regulatory choices for regulators seeking to limit the information rents gathered by informed insider traders an important question is how to balance the trading needs of top executives who receive substantial stock based compensation against the profitable trading opportunities created when insiders have private information and substantial trading discretion we provide a measure of insider trading to foreknowledge of the contents of and filings the paper is organized as follows section describes key features of the setting and the data section describes our empirical methods and presents our analysis of the distribution of insider trades over the fiscal quarter section documents how insider trades vary across firms in response
zero for each of the differences jca and nf a bootstrap distribution based on bootstrap data sets was generated keeping the size ratio between the object and sky class constant at its original value the endpoints of the confidence intervals for the confidence interval in the bc method especially adjusted values and were calculated and used bc confidence intervals are advantageous since they correct automatically for a bias of the statistical estimate moreover the bc method has the advantage that the errors in matching the true confidence interval approach zero at a rate reciprocal to the sample size overall of data points nevertheless since all tests are independent of each other no correction of the significance level is necessary results the results are visualized for all ten pairwise combinations between the uv and ir channels in fig in each diagram the longer wavelength is assigned to the each diagram contains two threshold lines the slope of the solid line is determined by maximizing given in eq and the slope of the dashed line by maximizing given in eq in both cases the offset of the line was chosen such that the number of misclassifications nf in the original data is minimal the optimal offsets for for spectral channels in which the two classes are strongly overlapping are not necessarily close to the projected centers of the distribution in each diagram twice the overall standard deviation of the sensor noise in the two channels is indicated by the dimensions of the inner rectangle on the lower right the outer square corresponds to as used to compute and for each of the five single channels are presented in fig the dual channel contrasts and the five channel contrast were obtained by maximizing and the class borders indicated by the solid lines are determined by minimizing the number of misclassified data points the histograms were produced by projecting each data point onto the vector the scalar quantity obtained an immediate visual impression of the quality of the separation with means and variances being directly related to the discriminant criterion in eq the optimal values and nf are given in table the bootstrapping method described in subsection reveals that most differences in and nf between the contrast measures to the three criteria and the significance levels are indicated by asterisks it is apparent that most differences that are not significant belong to contrasts with nearby ranks with few exceptions such as ir versus uv for all other differences are significant with at least a limit most of them even with thus we can generally quality of spectral contrasts for skyline detection a visual inspection of the data in fig reveals two major effects on the one hand increased distance between the wavelength of the two channels leads to increased separation between but also increased variance within the classes on the other hand the longer the even though the differences between the sensitivity maxima of the five channels are relatively large we observe only moderate quantitative changes between neighboring diagrams but no qualitative differences therefore we also do not expect any qualitatively different effects for combinations of channels with analysis is that the forked structure of the sky class with blue sky points lying mostly in the upper branch is prominent in the contrasts using uv but not in the other channel combinations the slope of the optimal class border is less than for each dual channel contrast both for the original data remaining sky points and the object points are primarily extending along the lines with unity slope thus we can assume that projecting the data along the unit slope line would make the data in each class maximally independent of the overall light intensity ideally data points for sky or for the same type of object would move only along the unity slope line when the overall the two classes but the image would remain widely unchanged in reality however projections will also vary in the perpendicular direction to the class border which would affect the contrast image whether an optimal classification result is preferable over maximal independence cameralike sensor our analysis focuses on optimal classification the values given in table show that dual channel contrasts with large differences in wavelength between the two channels are superior over those with only small differences from the upper right corner of the tables to the lower left corner the values of and nf generally get worse in peaks of the two channels it is apparent that there is a general tendency that larger differences between the peak wavelengths are related to better separation quality with respect to both and the contrast uv ir is the top ranking dual channel contrast for the analysis of the remaining dual channel contrasts it is useful to look at the diagonals running from the top row to the right border the diagonal below uv ir are the next best two contrasts and they do not differ significantly from each other in and according to however uv is not significantly different from the next best and ir contrasts and somewhat surprisingly also not from the ir contrast although with additional noise ir drastically drops in performance ir are not significantly different from each other in and and can be seen as the third league in performance they are followed by the fourth league in the lowest diagonal uv and ir which at least in are not significantly different from each other the good quality of the human visual contrasts and from uv was a surprise among the single channel classifications the uv channel performs best and the quality deterio rates drastically toward longer wavelengths however using uv alone does not reach the quality of the four dual channel contrasts involving uv thus including uv and one of the other channels in a dual channel contrast worse than each of the dual channel contrasts with noise the and ir contrasts shift downward into the ranks of the single
the firm survival and growth in dynamic a number of problems and necessary more sophisticated capabilities are required competencies in supervision of subordinates and delegation of authority and responsibility are required in short managers must have the ability to change the nature of their role studies in this perspective define the transition which is a refinement of the notion of crises and revolution implicit in the models of greiner and churchill and lewis assuming the ontological status of stages in order to move from one stage to the next organizations must undergo a transformation in their design characteristics enabling acquisition of new knowledge the origins of this problems perspective can be traced back to kazanjian whose work appears to mark a transition point between conceptualizations in terms of path dependent deterministic models of growth and development to a more cognitive approach that conceives of managers as thinkers with businesses face scott and bruce for example identified a series of key issues that managers must address in pursuit of business growth these include the role of top management management style organization structure product and market research systems and controls major sources of finance cash generation major investments and product market camp and tend to cluster into recognizable configurations these problem clusters define the stages that businesses must pass through if growth is to remain viable shim et al having classified hispanic owned businesses according to the five categories of the churchill entrepreneurial talent and marketing and sales diminished with growth while human resources management problems increased notably managing external environmental factors was found neither to increase nor diminish with growth yet was the most significant problem at each stage results relating to strategic management factors were our findings contradict insofar as small businesses are concerned much of the relevant literature that describes stages of the organizational life cycle in terms of the deterministic sets of problems that can be anticipated as an organization makes the transition from one stage to the next in fact support for a clearly identified set of is limited indeed not all scholars share the deterministic perspective instead they identify sets of problem areas to be managed in coping with continuous and unpredictable change nicholls nixon for example identified six categories of problem experienced by rapidly growing firms transitions in the firm s of the principal limitations of stages models at least as they pertain to the lives of organizations is that they seductively imply an inexorable positive progression through stages to a point of arrival with the each stage reflecting the operation of a latent mechanism that governs the formation growth transformation and maturity of stages best regarded either as metaphors to assist in conceptual discussions or as descriptive devices that represent emergent patterns or clusters of correlated characteristics factors or composite variables it is apparent that organizations are not organisms the organismic metaphor may have become an predictable managerial challenges or problems and to a view of growth related to the management of key transition points aldrich prefers the term life course to life cycle and eggers et al suggest that stages of growth is inappropriate and may be misleading in the following section we address these problems a states framework for firm growth levie and hay conclude that all the recent large scale empirical evidence indicates that firms do not develop according to a pre set sequence of stages rather they appear to evolve through their own unique series of stable and unstable states related to managerial states rather than stages we conceive this framework as having two dimensions related to the managerial problems that growing firms face tipping points the first dimension describes the problems faced by the firm the concept originates in epidemiological studies signifying a critical point in an evolving situation before utilize new knowledge to resolve successfully the challenges presented by tipping points in the states framework a firm s growth is not a predictable sequence of stages characterized by increasing size and age nor is it a predictable sequence of problems to be overcome instead it is more complex path dependent and unique to each firm though environmental changes and will depend on the specific context of the firm in its environment to continue growing a firm must successfully resolve the challenges presented by the tipping point to do this it must have the capability to find new knowledge suited to resolving the new challenges and the ability to implement this knowledge so that it succeeds in a competitive formalization of systems new market entry obtaining finance and operational improvement and consider organizational knowledge requirements to help navigate through these people management effective personnel management is a prerequisite skill that small businesses need to develop and improve as they grow yet in the implication of growth is that founders and owner managers move towards employment situations where tasks are delegated and people have to be managed including issues of delegation leadership recruitment and training compensation and workloads significantly similar challenges may be encountered when there are too many people to be managed in general hrm research has been undertaken in large bureaucratic highly structured companies the high growth smaller company is rarely the context for such studies however a little is known though the literature tends to be more conceptual and prescriptive than empirical this stream of work suggests that developing need to make the transition from owner micro management to larger scale professional structures and for firms that are expanding their existing management structure the generalizability of these studies to smaller firms is questionable aldrich and langton illustrate some of the difficulties in adopting good hrm practices frequently that there is a high level of similarity between the hr concerns of small and larger organizations hornsby and kuratko found that small businesses are concerned about the same hr issues regardless of their size and analyzing the frequency of use and efficiency of hr practices found them to be more frequently used as numbers of employees grew important for bigger companies
game space on the one hand the team needs to tap any potential fan market if it wants to survive in the twin cities area recall that the average mn lynx audience is small compared to the number of seats available at the arena pursuing conservative christian consumers i interviewed did not notice any change in the crowd during these games and a minority of interviewees had never heard of these special events and thus did not perceive any change in the game space on the other hand however this manoeuvre can be understood as a way to distance the mn lynx from associations with lesbianism that historically been unequivocally tied with social conservatism the narrowly defined faith and family night may be read as an aggressive reinscription of heteronormativity on a space where there is a sizable presence of lesbians by creating a forum to celebrate the conservative christian family and thus its accompanying social values the team situates is not a viable strategy for the wnba the mn lynx cannot afford in economic terms to alienate their key lesbian fan base consequently the mn lynx added a pride game in that includes a post game concert showcasing one or two local lesbian singers promotion of this event is similar to faith and family nights through much more narrowly targeted it is the post game show again it is necessary to be in the know and be familiar with the singers and their audiences to have a clear understanding of who is being targeted for such events indeed while advertisements say pride there is no reference to its connection with glbt people there is no mention of the word a seemingly inclusive strategy that nevertheless refuses to allow the arena space to be marked as homonormative thus the mn lynx produces a superficially ambiguous relationship between the team and its straight and lesbian fans that beneath the surface resists too apparent a connection to a lesbian audience corresponding media representations are gendered heterosexed and raced following massey and adams wnba spaces are not simply the stage upon which inequalities play out rather they help to structure them by attending to lesbian experiences in and perceptions of mn lynx game spaces heteronormative discourse and social are accepted disrupted and contested as lesbian fans havemultiple readings of mn lynx spaces and the practices within them among these readings are claims to and invocations of community which are significant given the active steps management takes to invite and yet deny the presence of lesbian fans though contradictory at first glance the use of creating safe spaces and ultimately a claim to agency that reflects the lack of explicitly welcoming spaces in the local urban environment spaces of lesbian community the presence of lesbians en masse at wnba games combined with a pride event showcasing local lesbian singers as post game entertainment are two components that drive the assumption that wnba spaces are synonymous with spaces audience she exclaimed i was kind of looking around and thinking this is like a veritable treasure trove of lesbians this is so cool in minneapolis st paul local gay press like lavender magazine has promoted this notion by depicting wnba spaces as queer friendly as number the best minnesota professional sports team the column read the lynx take top honors in this category for the third year in a row which will come as no surprise to their enthusiastic fans as the lynx have welcomed the glbt community with open arms given their annual presence at the twin cities pride festival and the ashley rukes pride parade plus though flawed in several ways one example of overstatement is that presence at the pride festival entailed literature at an empty table this enthusiastic portrayal is typical of how wnba teams are depicted in local gay publications as noted at the outset lesbian fans themselves describe wnba spaces in a the safety of the mn lynx games as compared to men s professional sport venues and the choice to attend women s athletic events she said in comparison to the nba men s professional basketball i would nt say that i would nt go to the nba game and kiss my girlfriend but i d be more aware of my surroundings there versus going to the many respondents commented on the unique audience make up in these spaces they pointed out that wnba games are among the few events where one could find a mix of lesbians and gay and straight families inger noted how game spaces feel distinctive and yet safe coming there s just none of that people are nt staring i feel like it s a peculiarly safe space actually and a cool integration of broader community i ve seen folks from my parents church who well my parents church is not safe space at all particularly for me as someone who has kids per cent of kids things are heterosexually dominated and a lot of queer culture is not kid friendly right bars and all that so the places that i can feel really comfortable as a queer mother are really few and the lynx game is one of those places even among lesbian fans who are critical of implicitly that these are community spaces albeit problematically so many respondents referred to various segments of the lesbian population that do not necessarily intermingle but are visible at mn lynx games one focus group brainstormed together to create a comprehensive list of subgroups that make up community present at the games talked about how mn lynx games bring such divergent groups together i definitely think it s a community builder my gut instinct would be that a lot of people go because they want to support women they want to support women s athletics and because they know it s a safe space and it s a great way to be able hang out with your friends do something a bar where it s smoky and people are drinkin in
of to zero judging from the fit indices listed in table fixing the variance of to zero did not significantly decrease the fit of the model the change in chi square was statistically insignificant from the estimates of this second parental accounted for the remaining the variance in marital conflict these results suggest that both genetics and the unique environment contribute to parents marital conflict thus confirming the need to study the consequences of marital conflict in a way that takes into account genetic selection effects and children s outcomes the variance of remained fixed at zero for all intergenerational models consequently the path could not be estimated the results of these models are summarized in the right columns of table model included the variances of a and as well as the paths a and the the path of variance accounted for suggests that the minimal child specific effect can be attributed to reporter bias the small magnitude of this effect is consistent with previous research that has found no significant effect of child specific exposure to marital conflict on the between level of model the estimated a problems may be attributable at least in part to genetic factors the path however was both smaller and not significantly different from zero suggesting that direct environmental exposure to marital conflict may play a smaller role in children s conduct problems the relative importance of the a and paths path and tested the consequent changes in model fit as can be seen in the indices of model fit in the top of table dropping the path in model resulted in marginal decreases in the bic and rmsea furthermore the chi square difference test was nonsignificant indicating that the path could be dropped the a path remained significantly different from zero model dropped the a path which increased the precision with which the path was estimated in contrast twins shared environment a component that includes demographic and family of origin features shared by twins does not significantly influence marital conflict differences between twins as mentioned previously there are no genes for arguing with one s spouse while these results demonstrate that the genotype ultimately influences marital conflict genetic influences are mediated through more proximate psychosocial variables such as personality temperament or psychopathology consequently the magnitude of genetic influences such as gender or culture for example because marital interactions involve culturally prescribed gender roles certain personality traits in women may be more strongly associated with marital conflict than in men just as certain personality traits in women are more strongly associated with divorce than in men to the extent that genetic genders similarly the psychosocial variables that may mediate the link between genotype and marital conflict in the australian sample may differ in other nationalities or ethnic groups as marital conflict is at least in part a culturally situated phenomenon genetic selection in the intergenerational association between marital conflict and conduct problems conduct problems is accounted for by children s inheritance of genetic liabilities common to their psychopathology and their parents conflict there was no association between marital conflict and conduct problems within the children of discordant twin pairs suggesting that genetic influences shared by twins better predict child conduct problems than twin specific variables the negligible variance in conduct problems accounted for by within nuclear family variation in exposure to marital conflict in conjunction with the failure to find a within twin pair effect suggests that the child specific effect reflects reporter bias rather than a causal effect of conflict on conduct problems or a reverse causal effect of child conduct problems on marital conflict marital conflict and child conduct problems are related to parental antisocial behavior this suggestion is mirrored in the literature on anti social behavior children with behavior problems are likely to grow into antisocial adults who then experience high levels of marital conflict and pass on their genetic adverse environmental experiences such as marital conflict the present model subsumes genetic differences in vulnerability to environmental risk under genetic main effects thus considerably oversimplifying the etiology of conduct problems moving beyond this oversimplification however to a more comprehensive model of the interplay between for the analysis of gene environment interaction entail the assumption that the measured environment is free of genetic influence as demonstrated in this paper this is not the case for marital conflict eaves and his colleagues have described markov chain monte carlo models capable of resolving future research on the interplay between genetics and aspects of the family environment such as marital conflict methodological considerations limitations in the measurement of marital conflict marital conflict is a multidimensional phenomenon various aspects of which may be related to child adjustment via different processes critical to a comprehensive understanding of the relation between conflict and child adjustment it is important to note then that significant relations between other cannot be generalized beyond marital conflict frequency another limitation of our measurement of marital conflict was our reliance on telephone interviews rather than potentially more reliable methods such as observation or diaries which are prohibitively difficult in a sample of this size we concede that retrospective reports of childhood experiences are has found children s retrospective reports of family conflict on a single survey item at age to be significantly associated with prior contemporaneous maternal ratings of family conflict second the large intraclass correlation among siblings reports of marital conflict frequency indicates that multiple independent adult reporters frequency into genetic and environmental components was performed on a latent variable representing that shared experience third despite the large age range of participants linear and quadratic effects of age predicted the variance in marital conflict reports finally even with inflated error variance due to a small number of commonly found in marital conflict research future research however should examine whether a significant relation between marital conflict and child conduct problems is evident when using more rigorous or reliable measurement strategies limitations in the children of twins design the children of twins design requires extremely
in an active region when using fast marching methods to implement the dual front evolution there is no need to solve eikonal equations shown in on the whole active region rn and then look for the set of pg the dual front evolution may be implemented by labeling initial curves with different labels and evolving the labeled a label the computational complexity of the dual front evolution is log n where is the number of grid points in rn in this paper in contrast with more classical minimal path techniques the dual front evolution scheme utilizes fast sweeping methods because of their lower complexity where n is the number of grid points in rn dual front active contours includes the dual front evolution and morphological maintained and the calculation of all minimal action maps can be finished simultaneously the complexity of the dual front evolution is still furthermore the complexity of morphological dilation is lower than and the boundary tracking process can be finished in finite iterations so the total complexity of dual front active contours is still where is the number of grid points be divided into two categories edge based approaches and region based approaches defining appropriate potentials is an essential task of dual front active contours here we consider potentials combining both region and edge information without loss of generality we assume an image domain i includes an object with boundary and background we also choose an initial contour in the t th iteration of to form an active region rn with two boundaries cin and cout and i is divided into five subsets three open subsets rin rout rn and their common boundaries cin cout this situation just looks like that shown in fig similar to the definitions in we also define two region descriptors kin and kout which are globally attached to their respective regions in and out and therefore depend on them fall in this class of region descriptors we also define boundary descriptors kb such as edge strength indicators used in many edge based active contour models which are typically functions of the image gradient r for dual front active contours therefore let us consider energy functionals the objective of dual front active contours is to make an initial contour evolve toward a final minimal partition of image i by minimizing e in and e out in t th iteration the minimal partition curve is the global minimum of the energ within the narrow active region rn enclosed by cin and cout according to and we may calculate gradient in and out are mean values of i and in and out are variances within the regions rin and rout in region and edge information is combined in the potentials for the dual front evolution in dual front active contours different functions and and different weights for the components of the potentials should be chosen for different segmentation objectives for example if the the edge descriptors otherwise if the desired objects have weak edges or the image is very noisy we should increase the weight on the region descriptors as with any segmentation algorithm the optimal set of parameters is very application dependent simple regularization terms in classical active contour models regularization forces the form of mean curvature flows while curvature based terms do not explicitly appear in our schemes we may still obtain regularity in the design of the potential functions we propose three solutions to control the regularity of the evolving fronts the dual front active contour model is motivated by they proved that given a potential defined on an image domain and the curvature magnitude along the geodesic minimizing s ds is bounded by according to this relationship we propose two solutions for ensuring smooth contours in the dual front evolution and show the different smoothing effects in dual front active contours by changing the coefficient in the potential from to where is the mean value of points having the same label as the point this fig illustrates that by increasing the constant added to the potential the smoothness of contours is increased in this figure the structuring element obtained after iterations the second solution is to decrease supd by smoothing the potentials instead of increasing the constant gibou and fedkiw developed a hybrid numerical technique for image segmentation that draws on the speed and simplicity of means procedures and the robustness of level set algorithms they suggested that a their method we take the isotropic nonlinear diffusion operator proposed by perona and malik for denoising an image while still keeping the image edges this nonlinear equation is where i defines the image intensity map at the voxel location and fictitious time is an edge stopping function and so that diffusion stops at the location of large gradients based on the original where is a threshold parameter tuning the edge stopping sensitivity on the image gradient and is a parameter controlling length scales the third solution is to use postprocessing operators to smooth results level set evolutions with curvature terms are good choices for smoothing curves in they combined fast matching evolutions with level set achieved by fast marching evolutions refined final results are received after a just a few iterations in dual front active contours we also can use level set evolutions to refine the obtained curves or surfaces in fig we give two examples to illustrate how the last two solutions control the smoothness of segmentation results the potential at a point was chosen as fig shows an original image with initializations fig shows the smoothed original image using isotropic nonlinear diffusion operator shown in with and after iterations fig shows the segmentation result from dual front active contours we also test the smoothness effect from the third solution by using postprocessing operator fig shows the smoothed original image using isotropic after iterations fig shows the segmentation result using dual front active contours fig shows the refined result after using iterations mean curvature flow evolution proposed in on the result in fig automatic evolution convergence
and to social worker counseling support assessment of patients and families needs is critical during all phases of disease and treatment including the period of recovery and long term survivorship and patients have reported high levels of family distress resulting from their disease and treatment future studies should be developed to identify and compare the types of distress experienced by patient survivors and families and to measure the intensity of distress they report future studies should also be designed to include assessment of both family and patient qol before treatment and at the same time intervals experiencing distress at similar times throughout the course of disease and survivorship specifically longitudinal studies are needed to monitor cancer and their families throughout the disease especially in the goal of these studies should include identifying the specific needs of patient survivors and families such as communication education counseling and caregiving which will require ongoing nursing assessment will provide important information regarding patient survivor and family interventions these interventions may need to change over time to reflect the stages and transitions experienced as a result of the patient survivors and families who are experiencing similar stressors should be monitored to determine whether these specifically those aimed at identifying the type intensity and timing of the stressors experienced by patients and families will provide nurses and other healthcare professionals with important information regarding the specific educational and support interventions that may be needed in addition information on the timing of these interventions is needed to provide patient survivors and their families with period of survivorship a cluster analysis to investigating nurses knowledge attitudes and skills regarding the clinical management system nurses knowledge attitudes and skills regarding the clinical management system are to may two step cluster analysis yielded two clusters the first cluster was labeled negative attitudes less skillful and average knowledge group the second cluster was labeled positive attitudes good knowledge but less skillful there was a positive correlation in cluster for nurses knowledge and attitudes more highly educated nurses generally held more positive attitudes to computerization whereas the attitudes among younger and less well educated nurses generally were more negative such findings should be used to formulate strategies to encourage nurses to resolve actual problems following computer training and to increase the depth and breadth of nurses computer knowledge decades the first hospital computer systems were developed in the late in the british health these systems were useful for administrative functions such as billing accounting and fiscal statistics in the hospital computer systems expanded to include clinical communications and storage of patients historical data these systems included physician in the integrated distributed networking and shared configurations were by using these integrated systems the healthcare team was able to share data improve efficiency and eliminate the growth of hospital information systems has had significant impacts on nursing practice the introduction of computers relieves nurses of time consuming computerization has the ability to facilitate nurses in the fulfillment of their multifaceted roles and consequently has enhanced the quality and efficiency of nursing the committee for nursing practice information infrastructure defined nursing informatics as a specialty that integrates nursing science computer science and information science and research and to expand nursing thus there is recognition of the importance of nursing informatics in nursing practice the successful implementation of computer systems in nursing practice is likely to be related directly to users views toward as the largest group of potential information system end users nurses may the prospect of computer the rapid expansion of such technology into every aspect of modern nursing suggests that the century nurse must establish and maintain computer in hong kong many hospitals are now replacing obsolete centralized mainframe computer systems with modern integrated clinical and administrative information as computer technology a unit the number of clinical personnel who must interact with the technology this expansion broadens the user base and adds to the need for wider system acceptance by hong kong s nursing personnel although research on physicians attitudes toward the computerization of clinical practice has been information on nurses views toward computerization are rare therefore a quantitative of nurses in hong kong conducted a systematic review to examine the kas of nurses regarding computerization and found little agreement regarding the level of the nurses kas studies showed that the age and skill of computer users were positively correlated with the attitudes of nurses regarding studies also suggested that grouping by education differentiated two groups than did the group with more all these studies have yielded inconsistent results with no clear evidence of differences in terms of nurses background factors and kas level it has been conjectured that although there may be significant differences in nurses characteristics it seems likely that differences in kas patterns are more related to all their computerization than did those who were less experienced but marasovic and found that less experienced nurses had more positive attitudes about computerization than did more experienced nurses because the environment for these characteristics is ever changing issues of kas demand our attention however many aspects of these phenomena or their characteristics cluster analysis was used as an exploratory tool for identifying these kas subtypes in light of the caveats noted the work of liu et was used as a guiding model for our selection of clustering and criterion variables purpose of the study meeting the healthcare needs of patients thus understanding nurses kas patterns related to such care is important for future professional development in hong kong research based investigations and studies on the subject are rare therefore the purpose of the current study was to determine whether nursing staff could be differentiated into subtypes based on nurses kas regarding computerization in hong kong two specific research objectives were formulated to identify profiles of nurses based on their demographic variables and their kas regarding the clinical management system in their clinical practices to explore the relationship between nurses kas regarding the clinical management system in their hospital authority
friendly game day or baton twirling another activity that attracts audience attention is watching video of athlete performance and audience participation on the large scoreboard hanging above the center of the court at various times during the game for instance the camera pans the audience and displays screaming kids or fans for example an athlete is highlighted such that she is videotaped sharing answers to personal questions like my favorite food is and my role model is following reality television format clip art and video clips are used to make these video shorts funny and personable even silly individually then these game day practices are whole however these routines are instrumental in the production of a particular kind of space family and kid friendly which translates in this context to signify heteronormative the audience at wnba games is made up primarily of heterosexual and lesbian couples children with parents groups of women and groups of the games both boys and girls with parents and as teams the racial make up of the crowd differs based on the population of the host city in minnesota the fan base is largely white as mentioned from the outset a substantial portion of the crowd may be characterized as lesbian women most women whom i interviewed perceived this as an opposing view contending that the lesbian presence at wnba games is a problem gintonio for example notes homophobic fretting expressed by a radio announcer after attending a phoenix mercury game likewise a column in the september women s monthly decries websites referring to the wnba as the lesbian welfare league the usa the wnba has professional marketers who try to create or expand the market for their cultural product the key of course is knowing just who does and can comprise that market in the wnba context the fan community is spatialized as it becomes linked experientially with social identity wnba marketers are aware of their lesbian viewers attract any interested fans including marginalized lesbian audiences and at the same time to not deter potential fans who do not support niche marketing the outcome is representations that characterize wnba spaces in exclusive terms in spite of drawing a diverse audience of women children and families according to race ethnicity sexuality and age from wnba marketing representations this is true even for the mn lynx who actively if quietly recruit a lesbian audience in doing so the wnba represents itself as family and fan friendly with racialized gendered heteronormative marketing discourses the wnba have bent over backwards to portray a family environment and family atmosphere and family is always a code word for straight therefore wnba spaces exemplify how different sporting places are imbued with heteronormative power relations and contain mn lynx this takes on a specific look children are the most frequent subjects of photos advertising the game experience as well as camera footage shown on the scoreboard screens that represents game space to audiences in the arena discourses that represent game space have a material consequence game spaces are the team chooses not to represent its core of lesbian fans erika for example stated even when they do like scan the audience they do nt pick the big dykes they show the cute kids or the dancing girls in their skimpy outfits even so while individual wnba teams the los angeles sparks for instance gained substantial press coverage in when the team took a bus to a lesbian identified club to encourage patrons to purchase season ticket packages the mn lynx also recruit lesbian patrons though in less overt ways the team advertises in local gay press and in local staff the result is that lesbian bodies abound at wnba games identified not only through holding hands with or kissing partners but also through symbols that lesbians read as indicative of another s lesbianism yet their presence largely remains an absence in the practices that occur in these spaces and in the ways these val ackerman the former president of the wnba claimed we welcome any fan who wants to come out and support our sport we have a very broad range of fans to the extent that members of the lesbian community are indicating their support i think that s terrific the marketing expert with the mn lynx additionally other institutional practices like inscribing heteronormativity on to game spaces signal the team s reservation toward demonstrating an obvious connection with its lesbian fan base as such lesbians are contained or in the case of advertising wnba players heterosexual marriages lesbians are constituted as the to the point of exclusion of the lesbian fan is also noticeable in post game shows that are free to fans who attend the basketball game the mn lynx utilize post game events like concerts to encourage or increase attendance at particular games because this team actively markets to a christian fan base one of their attract a range of types of faiths and families this is not the case instead by marketing to a particular subset of christians through outreach to specific churches and christian radio audiences this event reflects narrow recruitment of conservative evangelical christians the event itself includes for example popular christian is assembled in one section of the arena arena workers set up a stage and a mn lynx staff member emerges to greet the crowd and introduce the headlining act in past games a lynx player has also been part of the post game show in for instance erin buescher provided a formal introduction to the entertainers and described her relationship with to be aware of the christian content of the postgame entertainment marketing efforts to the niche audience are supplemented only by vague announcements at mn lynx games that give no indication to the content of the performance stay after the game and watch go fish is just such an example as a result it is possible to remain at the game venue to meet both in terms of the target market and how it affects
confidence measures individual words can be labeled as either correct or incorrect this additional information can be used in for example interactive transtype style machine translation systems two problems have to be solved in order to compute confidence measures first suitable confidence features have to be computed second a binary classifier has to be defined which decides whether a word is correct or not the word posterior probabilities introduced in section can be interpreted as the probability of a word being correct that is the probability can directly be used as a confidence measure for this purpose it is compared to a threshold all words that this threshold are tagged as correct and all others are tagged as incorrect translations thus the binary classifier is defined as the threshold is optimized on a distinct development set beforehand the question of how the correctness of a word in mt output is determined is not at all an easy one we will address this issue in section word graphs generated by an smt system several different models for the occurrence of a target word in a sentence will be defined and experimentally evaluated these are the models that proved most promising from a theoretical viewpoint and in the experimental evaluation target word occurs in position of the target sentence the calculation of word posterior probabilities over word graphs and is considered if it occurs in a window around the position t for some position the levenshtein alignments between the hypothesis under consideration and all other possible translations are determined the target word is taken into account if it is levenshtein aligned to itself is contained in the sentence at least times the smt system assigns to the translation hypothesis approach based on the fixed target position in this approach the word posterior probability is determined for word occurring in target position as shown in equation this variant requires the word to occur exactly in the given position hence a probability distribution over the pairs of target words and positions in the target sentence is obtained this type of word posterior probability was first introduced the concept of word posterior probabilities based on the fixed target position allows for easy calculation over word graphs and best lists however this concept is rather restrictive in practice the target position of a word varies between different translation alternatives the method presented here is a starting point for more flexible approaches that perform summation over a window of target positions posterior probabilities based on fixed target positions are calculated over word graphs and over best lists calculation using word graphs a word graph represents the most promising hypotheses generated by the translation system it has the advantage of being a compact representation of the translation hypothesis space which allows for efficient calculation of word posterior probabilities a word with vertex set and edge set it has one designated root node representing the beginning of the sentence each path through the word graph represents a translation candidate the nodes of the graph contain information such as the set of covered source positions and the language model history two hypotheses can be recombined if their information is identical recombination is carried out during decoding to accelerate the search process if two with respect to translation and language models they will be assigned the same probabilities by these models in the future therefore the outcome of the search is not altered but the processing time can be significantly decreased if only the more promising of the two hypotheses is considered for further expansion if no recombination were carried out the word graph would have the structure of a tree they contain weights representing the part of the probability that is assigned to each particular word as part of the target hypothesis when multiplying the scores along a path the probability of the corresponding hypothesis is obtained the sentence position of a word refers to the path length in the word graph consider an edge that is annotated with word if a path leading from source node into has edges then will be the th word in the corresponding sentence note that due to recombination this position is not unambiguous if two hypotheses of different lengths and are recombined in node then will be in position in the one resulting sentence and in in the other sentence for an example of a word graph see figure the source sentence is wir lonnen das machen and the reference translation is we can do that the leftmost node covered source positions and language model history in this example a trigram language model is applied that is all paths leading into a node share the last two words the translation alternatives contained in this word graph represent different reorderings of the words in the sentence the monotone translation that do as well as the correctly reordered sequence do that occur note that in order to limit the size of the graph and keep the presentation simple an example was chosen all target sentences have the same length the posterior probabilities of word in position can be computed by summing up the probabilities of all paths in the graph that contain an edge annotated with the e in position of the target sentence this summation is performed efficiently using the forward backward algorithm this algorithm also determines the total probability mass that is needed for normalization as shown in equation in we will present the exact equations for a word graph generated by the phrase based translation system described in section in such a word graph the first word of a target phrase is assigned the score for the whole phrase that is when translating a source phrase by a target phrase the full contribution of all sub models for this phrase is included for the first word all following words eik are assigned probability backward algorithm works as follows let qpm be the phrase model score of a
groups were the only effective defense against the difficulties resulting from to understand how epidemics shape social relationships the contemporary world offers a tragic example in which these processes can be observed the aids pandemic the available ethnographic descriptions indicate that at least in the most heavily impacted sub saharan africa the social responses to hiv aids are homogeneous rather than diverse in many countries new household compositions including child headed households emerge ways of belonging kinship and friendship and are built around new institutions and organizations including pentecostal and other churches as well as groups of people living with hiv aids similar changes in the ritual sphere and inheritance patterns can be observed across a range of different countries only by combining contemporary and historical evidence can we understand the relationship between was funded by the dfg under grant i thank julia pauli and david robichaux for many stimulating discussions about the structure and the development of the community in mexico thomas schweizer doug white russell bernard hartmut lang michael bollig and lothar krempel have shaped my thinking about the use of network analysis in anthropology an earlier version of this paper was presented at the annual meeting of the association in washington dc i thank the participants of this workshop for their perspective and their discussion three anonymous reviewers and lawrence guy straus have made very valuable comments and helped significantly to focus the arguments presented in the paper to all four i am deeply indebted he was aware of this and justified his focus with the argument that the economic domain was best understood in mesoamerican ethnography in one can also recognize a materialistic focus that figures prominently in most of wolf s work chance has shown that many questions relating to mesoamerica s past can only be solved if ethnological and historical methods and data are combined while this was clearly wolf s intent he did not contribute to it after and very few others have done so since barrios are very common in the research area they will not be included in this because they involve only the internal organization of the community results of an analysis of the barrio system are published in schnegg in some communities cargos can also be taken by women even where cargo ownership is restricted to men many of the ceremonial and organizational obligations are performed as a couple some political cargos last longer than one year dewalt smith the historical genesis of the european background has been described by lynch i thank iris schnegg for building this gis and for producing figure i thank david robichaux who discovered the two census reports in the archives of the state of tlaxcala and who provided me with copies for my analysis my argument focuses on the dyads between the compadres comadres this does not mean that the relationship between padrino padrina and ahijado ahijada lacks cultural significance however the people in belen put much more weight on the former relationship which entails a significantly wider range of obligations and meanings i would like to extend my thanks to robert mccaa for sharing this information with me the census is archived as arzobispado de mexico censo de agi varios root growth during the supraosseous eruptive phase abstract there is increasing focus on the relationship between root growth and the eruptive process in studies of primate dental development and the first permanent molar is regarded as a key tooth in many of these comparative studies in this modern human histological and radiographic data were compared rates of root extension were determined histologically in from individuals of known sex using data for daily incremental markings and the orientation of accentuated lines in root dentine mean values at the mesiobuccal enamel cervix were mm per day and then rose to a maximum of mm per day during the first mm of root growth before gradually declining again to mm per day towards apical closure a sample of orthopantomograms of children where were between the stages of alveolar eruption and complete eruption were then used to determine total mesial tooth height and mesial and distal root lengths at four successive stages of eruption at complete eruption mean values for mesial and distal root lengths were mm respectively expressed as a percentage total of mesial tooth height these averaged maximum rates of eruption occur just prior to gingival did not coincide with maximum rates of root extension in this study these results emphasize that rates of eruption and rates of root growth do not follow the same pattern of change during the supraosseous eruptive phase they highlight the need for greater consideration of the role of the eruptive process in explaining differences in gingival emergence times in comparative studies of modern humans and fossil hominins introduction studies of allman and hasenstaub kelley a lot more is now known about enamel growth and crown formation times in modern human molars but there are still questions about root growth that remain unclear more might be learned about dental development in fossil primates if better data existed for root growth in modern humans and in other living primates early hominin fossils such as the taung and laetoli juveniles are classic examples of better data existed for root growth in modern humans and in other living primates early hominin fossils such as the taung and laetoli juveniles are classic examples of specimens was close to the stage of gingival emergence at death but othersdfor example knm er from koobi fora or ng from sangiran dhave at or only just beyond alveolar emergence their age at death is much more difficult to estimate and predicting gingival emergence even more so the hope is that new data describing root formation will eventually improve the usefulness of many juvenile fossil specimens in revealing more details about hominin life
rite of passage to the cultural and economic tensions of historical materialism invoked at least temporary or imagined images of rupture after all marxism has provided its own arguments concerning continuity thinking and christianity fare when the ethnographic gaze is applied to western contexts is ethnographic tolerance of rupture more evident when examining informants who have long been aware of their own historicity or do other boundary marking devices come into play to define such christianity as an inauthentic object of inquiry guilty of seeing some ruptures as historical domesticated and therefore able to be acknowledged and others as more recent and more threatening robbins uses his fieldwork among the urapmin to provide a counterexample to the tswana allowing him to juxtapose the sudden conversion of the one with the extended conversation presented in the other the contrast is trenchantly welcomed more analysis of cases in which informants overtly dispute the extent nature and benefits of discontinuity as a project or social hierarchies militate against apparently sudden cultural shifts in locating trust such examples would perhaps illustrate more clearly the utility or otherwise of deploying continuity discontinuity are we to regard christianity as alone among the world religions in providing a suspicious vehicle for cultural rupture robbins is surely correct to identify protestant evangelical christianity as a prime focus for much contemporary anthropological attention a major task as he appreciates is to work out how the dimensions and debates of a much broader anthropology of christianity can incorporate evangelicalism and modernity it would be a further striking irony if his characteristically brilliant and bravura piece prompted in part precisely by the study of missionizing protestantism were to play an important role in the conversion of anthropology to a new way of thinking annelin eriksen department of social anthropology university of bergen anthropology cultural discontinuity it is not that we have not handled change before rather the argument has been that continuity is only apparent and change is an unavoidable part of history what then makes robbins s argument different first the previous anti continuity argument coming from what we might call the invention robbins does the opposite pointing to a culture wherein radical change is the ideology change is not hidden beneath the surface of continuity rather it is a dominant value of christian culture robbins shows us that christianity is based on messianic discontinuous time understanding christian culture then implies understanding these dimensions as part of the cultural the outline of a theory of christianity can then also be the outline of a theory of cultural discontinuity furthermore if we had an idea of what christian convert cultures are we might also come to understand their social manifestations although it may be too large an argument to bring up here i will briefly mention my own analysis of pentecostal anthropology is inclined to think of sociality as unfolding in a continuous motion based on our concept of linear time my experience with the evangelical christians in vanuatu has made me realize that the christian inclination toward discontinuity and change manifests itself not only in history conversion and eschatology but also in a vision of social order the value of change expressed powerfully gains significance also in people s imagining of a social order that must break fundamentally with the previous one this new social order is achieved not after the second coming but as a result of conversion itself when i asked people from a number of different evangelical churches during a recent field trip to port vila what signified conversion to christianity and most important one s view of society change is tied not only to individual change but also to the social system in vanuatu the social system which has to change in the belief of the christians is tied to all the apparatuses of the national state people say that independence which vanuatu gained in after having been part of a shared english and french colonial their national economy is based on foreign loans and donations the dominant churches at the time of the achievement of independence presbyterian anglican catholic and seventh day adventist had not converted people s hearts now however when people convert more and more to the evangelical pentecostal churches they become truly christians for them christianity is a social project dedicated to change and to pray for the salvation of the nation as a road to a really independent social existence this is to some extent comparable to robbins s own material from the urapmin whose colonial experience led them to challenge their preexisting cultural schemes they needed change they needed a cultural scheme that could make sense of the world they needed to believe in rupture argued is it the case that cultures based on a notion of fundamental change in both history conversion eschatology and social order really must change in the anthropological sense is there a difference between believing in change and really changing although this is an interesting question it should not get in the way of acknowledging change as a value in the world that are recognizable to the anthropologist as social and cultural change viii robbins s article is a fine contribution to the discussion of been diminishing lately one can still find colleagues who question the need to study converted indian peoples because they are not really ethnic indians any more the traditionalist sectors of communities have often been considered more worthy of attention as dow and sandstrom have noted this approach is now questionable partly because the indian population has converted in such large to repeat the criticism of the outdated tendency to fault religious converts as the root of community division and the penetration of foreign ideologies as robbins demonstrates it is time for anthropology to confront the changing face of religious affiliation of its subjects and attempt to understand it as he has
volatility of lease rates all else being equal results in a statistically reliable decrease in the number starts the number of building starts is also influenced by the competitive nature of the local commercial real estate market all else being equal more competition amongst local developers as measured by a correspondingly lower herfindahl ratio results in a greater number of building starts or equivalently a lower trigger point at which the option to develop is exercised furthermore consistent with grenadier s model we find evidence that delay is attenuated by greater competition in a particular market bulan mayer and sommerville also investigate the effects of competition on option values in commercial real estate in particular they examine condominium development in vancouver canada between and and find that increases in risk both systematic as well as unsystematic delay condominium investment they also find that an increase in competition measured by will be built nearby attenuates this relation our articles differ in more than how the degree of competition prevailing in a particular market is measured for example bulan mayer and sommerville look at only one market but over a longer period of time we by contrast consider a number of different markets over time which allows us to exploit these cross sectional data in testing the implications of the real the next section relies on grenadier s model to provide a framework in which to summarize the comparative statics of the trigger level at which commercial real estate investment will occur with respect to variables suggested by real option pricing models with competitive interactions the section data discusses the data and details the dependent and independent variables used to test the implications of these models the section empirical method and results puts forward our empirical and discusses our empirical results we conclude in the final section the comparative statics of a real option pricing model with competitive interactions in this section we briefly overview the implications of real option pricing models with competitive interactions for commercial real estate development we couch our discussion in the context of grenadier s model this model allows us to succinctly capture within a real options framework the effects of competition on a developer s decision to build many of these effects however are not unique to grenadier s model but characterize real option pricing models with competitive interactions in general a local real estate market is assumed to be oligopolistic and made up of identical developers who develop and lease identical office buildings to fix matters at time developer owns qi units of completed and rentable space framework is assumed at any point in time developers can develop new rentable units at a constant cost of per unit of space this investment decision is irreversible the model also abstracts from the issue of land use choice and concentrates only on determining the optimal size of the development the value of owning an office building arises from its underlying service flow the instantaneous lease rate is the price of the flow of these services it is in such a way as to clear this market at each point in time following dixit and pindyck the market inverse demand function is assumed given by where the price elasticity of demand and the demand shock itself evolves as a geometric brownian motion where is the instantaneous conditional expected percentage change in and is the instantaneous conditional standard deviation the risk free interest rate is assumed to be constant with to ensure convergence the cash flows are valued in a risk neutral framework that is the process for is assumed to be risk adjusted derives the corresponding symmetric nash equilibrium development strategy in particular he obtains the equilibrium value of each identical office building in closed form xq strategy for each developer is to develop an incremental unit whenever the state variable rises to the trigger level this solution implies that the equilibrium lease rate also follows a geometric brownian motion but with an upper reflecting barrier at vn when vn otherwise the lease rate will be fixed expression and developers will invest grenadier s model is sufficiently rich in its implications for commercial real estate investment to allow us to explore the role of various economic variables on the decision to develop additional office space in particular the model s implications regarding the trigger level x at which additional investment occurs can be derived in a straightforward fashion is a decreasing and convex function in the number of developers n increasing competition leads developers to develop sooner as the fear of preemption diminishes the value of their option to wait as a result we would expect to observe more building starts in the face of greater competition this conclusion however is also consistent with the standard microeconomic result a smaller quantity of a good than a corresponding firm in a purely competitive market empirical evidence is required to discriminate between these two alternatives the trigger level is a decreasing function of the expected rate of growth in the level of demand demand shock as in all option models without competitive interactions an increase in volatility delays the point at which an american option is exercised but volatility can influence the trigger level for reasons other than its effect on the value of a developer s option to wait in particular if volatility risk is priced in capital then an increase in volatility would raise the discount rate used to value projects as a result a risk flow model would also suggest fewer building starts in the face of higher volatility however distinct from a risk adjusted discounted cash flow model a real options model implies that this volatility effect is attenuated by the presence of competitors evidence consistent with the real option pricing model as opposed to the risk adjusted discounted cash flow model the effect of interest rates on the trigger level is ambiguous that is this result is
in some cases the term rivate equity is used to refer only to the buy out and buy in investment sector in other cases or example in europe but not the usi he term enture capital is used to cover all stages ie synonymous with rivate equity in the us enture capital refers only to investments in early stage and expanding companies private equity investing reached a peak during the technology bubble of the late and subsequently focused more on investment opportunities where the business has proven potential for realistic growth in an expanding market backed by a well researched and documented business plan and an experienced management team ideally including individuals who have started and run a successful business before private equity firms are especially active in restructuring situations where shifts in technologies international comparative advantage overcapacity bankruptcies and government policy changes have made existing businesses economically nonviable this includes privatizations and strategic divestitures by major corporations and conglomerates with substantial activity in this respect in countries like germany japan and china in this activity private equity firms which consider their core competence to be in industrial and financial expertise and relatively long investment periods have had to compete with hedge funds looking for pure financial plays in the following section we review the collective investment funds in china indonesia korea malaysia singapore philippines and thailand the rest of the asian economies either have no investment fund industries or are at the very initial of the fund industry in asia focusing on size and growth of the industry asset allocation of funds regulatory environment surrounding the fund industry and the state of internationalization of the fund management industry in these countries history of collective investment schemes in asia the collective investment funds in the countries that are the subject of this study were established as early as s, but most did not begin to grow until the mid s in the people s republic of china the first mutual fund was introduced in when local governments established two closed end funds with total assets of rmb million the first mutual fund listed on the shanghai stock exchange began trading in in hua fund management company became the first chinese asset manager to establish an open end fund and the number of open end funds reached in may by the number of open end funds in terms of assets under management and captured more than the mutual funds sector by value in korea collective investment schemes consist of investment trust companies securities investment companies and trust accounts of banks itcs and bank trust accounts handle contractual type products whereby investors purchase beneficiary certificates sics on the other hand handle corporate type closed end funds the securities investment trust business act was proulgated in and the first contractual type korean equity investment trust was introduced in in the summer of as part of korean financial market reforms investment trust companies were liberalized and the restrictions on their establishment were lifted the number of domestic fund management companies reached before the onset of the asian financial management industry shrank in size but began recovering after with the implementation of improved operations and systems including mark to market valuations better internal control standards external audit of trusts assets and other reforms at the end of the number of funds reached including companies with foreign shareholdings of over corporate type investment funds were utual funds at first only closed end funds were allowed sales of open end type mutual funds were permitted from january the first unit trust in malaysia was established in by the malayan unit trust ltd the malaysian government actively encouraged and sponsored the establishment of new funds during the initial years and between and new funds were established unit trust management companies in the form of in and investor interest in unit trusts increased substantially through active marketing and distribution via banks branch networks the period from to marked a rapid growth of the unit trust industry in terms of the number of new management companies established as well as assets under management unit trusts thus emerged as a key household savings product in malaysia the main types of mutual funds islamic unit trusts diversified unit trusts and specialty unit trusts depending on the types of assets held singapore hosts the most developed collective investment industry in the region with more than total aum sourced from abroad singapore is an international asset management center over total funds under management were sourced from the asia pacific countries as of the first mutual fund in thailand was introduced in until the thai was controlled by a single company which was an affiliate of the government owned industrial finance corporation of thailand in the mutual fund industry was liberalized triggering a rapid increase in the number of mutual funds both closed end and open end funds are available in thailand although there are many more open end than closed end funds compared to highly developed financial markets such as the us and europe as of end the net assets of the fund industry in the eight countries under review amounted to billion compared to a total of billion in the americas and billion in there are considerable differences in the relative sizes of the industry across individual countries in asia the three largest fund management industries in the region are japan singapore and korea and korea china malaysia thailand and indonesia have very small managed fund markets totaling to billion billion billion and billion respectively in the rest of the countries in asiai hich we do not cover in this studyi he mutual fund industry is either negligible or nonexistent in china there were closed end and open end mutual funds in operation which accounted for over rmb billion in assets under management mutual funds remain a very small part of the chinese financial system funds under management at the end of amounted to only about the assets of the country banking system in indonesia investment managers operated funds and total assets managed by investment funds amounted to rp trillion at
the has moved from a peak of about the eighths regime to virtually zero by the end of the sample period the statistic on imbalance has also gone from around at the start of the sample to considerably less than two towards the end we now turn to the interaction of day to day liquidity with market efficiency for parsimony we focus on dollar imbalances and the effective spread these are probably the more informative choices because oib provides the economic magnitude of the order imbalance and the effective spread is closer to the actual transaction costs incurred by traders fig plots the time series of the effective spread clearly espr has experienced three distinct regimes corresponding to subperiods for the eighth sixteenth and decimal minimum tick sizes moreover espr appears to be trending to some extent within each subperiod in order to examine the interaction of liquidity with return predictability we need to separate liquid periods from illiquid ones within each regime based on analyses by blume mackinlay and terker and cox and peterson and on experiences with specific events such as the ltcm crisis we surmise that the effect of illiquidity on trading activity is likely to be particularly pronounced during days of abnormally low liquidity we low liquidity days as those when the linearly detrended effective spread for that regime is at least one standard deviation above the mean table reports summary statistics for effective spreads on low and high liquidity days the numbers of illiquid days as a percentage of the total number of trading days are and in the eighth sixteenth and decimal regimes respectively and these proportions are reasonably close to each other the mean effective spread on illiquid days illiquid days is that on liquid days in the sixteenth regime and the corresponding ratio is the decimal regime however this ratio is only about the eighths regime possibly due to the fact that the larger tick sizes may have caused the measured effective spread to be higher than its true value due to the impact of leaving less scope for a significant upward movement of the spread on illiquid days relative to normal days to of liquidity on market efficiency a low liquidity dummy is interacted with the basic explanatory variable already used in the regressions of table thus the interaction variable oib equals oib on days with low liquidity and zero otherwise table presents the results of regressions that include the interaction variable for the portfolio that aggregates all sample firms the coefficients on oib are positive and significant in all subperiods on oib are significant in the two earlier regimes the coefficient estimates of oib have decreased steadily from in the eighths regime to in the decimal regime the significantly positive coefficients on oib suggest that the ability of lagged oib to predict returns increases during periods of illiquidity thus liquidity enhances efficiency indeed during the sixteenth and decimal subperiods the coefficients on oib are more than twice as large as those as those on oib alone hence in these later subperiods which are generally more efficient on average illiquidity has a relatively stronger inhibiting influence for instance during the eighths regime a one standard deviation increase in lagged oib causes a in returns when markets are liquid and a in returns when markets are illiquid during the decimal regime the impact on returns of a one standard deviation increase in lagged oib is illiquid periods a decline in the significance and explanatory power of the regressions in table accompanies the general improvement in liquidity over the sample period adjusted s drop across the three tick size regimes from around the eighths regime to less than the decimal regime overall the evidence suggests that the secular changes in spreads accompanying tick size reductions have been accompanied by a marked increase in the degree of market efficiency size based subsamples it is of interest to explore patterns in the liquidity efficiency relation across groups stratified by firm size table presents results for subsamples formed by ranking firms by market capitalization at the beginning of the year dividing the ranked firms into thirds and then calculating value weighted returns imbalances and detrended effective spreads within each tierce again the coefficients on oib and oib and significant in eight of the nine cases corresponding to the three firm size groups and the three tick size regimes the only exception is that for the large firms during the decimal regime when only the interactive variable is significant the coefficient estimates on lagged oib across the size groups for the eighths regime decline from for the large firms to for the small across the tick size regimes the coefficients for the large firms with the tick size as compared to the smaller firms the coefficient for the smaller size groups relative to those for the large caps is about two to ten times larger in the sixteenths and decimal regimes the coefficient patterns suggest that the efficiency of the large cap sector has increased with the reduction in minimum tick size and also imply that in the smaller tick size regimes the degree of market efficiency is greater for larger firms perhaps this finding is explained by the eighth tick size having been more binding on the larger firms thus the greater decrease in spreads for large firms accompanying tick size reductions may account for increased market efficiency in the decimal regimes for these firms robustness checks we now present the results of additional analyses that are intended to test the interpretation and reliability on oib and illiquidity one possible issue is that an exogenous shock might cause extreme order imbalances and simultaneously reduce liquidity we could be picking up the effect of the shock rather than capturing the role of liquidity in assisting the establishment of market efficiency to investigate this possibility we compute absolute order imbalances within liquid and illiquid periods for each of the three size groups across the tick size regimes in
research in security prices accounting data from compustat analyst forecast data from i and mutual data from cda spectrum we also examine firms prior mergers and acquisition activity taking a announcements from the sdc mergers and acquisition database data on business cycles are from the federal reserve and global insight we discuss the variables used in our analysis in the following section description of variables market timing and measures of information asymmetry which are unrelated to stock prices the variables we use to measure changes or levels in stock price are raw returns for the and months preceding the issue date market adjusted returns for the and months preceding the issue date the market to book ratio at the fiscal year end preceding the issue date and the industry adjusted market to book ratio at the fiscal year end preceding the issue date where the industry is determined using three digit sic codes we refer to these variables as the price variables to conserve space we present results with the raw returns and months prior to the issue date and the market to book ratio at the fiscal year end preceding the issue date results are robust to using alternative price variables these are available upon request time varying adverse selection and thus do not permit one to draw distinctions among the three hypotheses we discuss below the distinguishing measures we use for agreement overvaluation and information asymmetry as well as control variables although stock price is an obvious measure of agreement it is not a distinguishing measure so we examine two distinguishing measures of agreement the difference between a firm eps from the quarter prior to the issue and the mean analyst forecast of eps that occurs just prior to the actual eps disclosure divided by the actual eps the analyst forecast is no more than days prior to the actual eps we refer to this variable as actual forecast eps we interpret investors propensity to agree with the manager as increasing in the amount by which the firm eps exceeds the forecast the idea is that the greater the manager ability to deliver better than expected er ability to deliver better than expected earnings the less likely are investors to question the we predict that firms with higher actual forecast eps are more likely to issue equity because analyst forecasts may be biased we repeat much of our analysis controlling for potential biases richardson teoh and wysocki show higher market to book firms for larger firms and in periods of higher real gdp growth they also show that forecasts are more accurate for firms issuing equity but not if this is done following an earnings announcement elton gruber and gultekin show that these biases may be worse at fiscal year end we thus include the following variables the growth in gdp in the quarter of the forecast gdp growth a an earnings announcement days post eps and a dummy variable equal to one if the forecast is for the fiscal year end year end additionally we control for firm size and the market to book ratio the actual forecast eps examines the eps in the quarter prior to the equity issuance since performance over multiple quarters may affect the agreement parameter we also examine the number of consecutive quarters prior to we look at four quarters prior to the issue thus the variable number of quarters beat forecast eps will be between zero and four we predict that firms with higher values of this variable are more likely to issue equity the second distinguishing agreement proxy we use is the standard deviation of raw analysts forecasts in the quarter prior to the issuance investors assuming that agreement among analysts is highly correlated with agreement between management and investors we interpret higher dispersion to connote lower agreement thus this variable which we refer to as dispersion is a measure of the inverse of or and the prediction is that firms with low dispersion are more likely to issue with greater precision than the proxies we discuss above while we present results using these proxies we do not focus on them because data availability on these proxies is limited to a subset of our sample the first alternative proxy we use is the control premium for dual class stock dual class stock typically has two classes of stock with the equal cash flow rights at a premium the inferior stock has fewer voting rights and is widely held the control premium the difference in the prices of these two classes of stock should represent the level of agreement between investors at large and insiders in control with a smaller control premium denoting higher agreement we measure the control premium as the superior stock price minus the inferior month prior to the equity issuance to identify traded dual class stocks we first find firms with crsp pricing data for more than one class of we then use proxy statements to exclude any tracking stocks determine the voting rights and identify the superior stock there are firms in our sample with dual class stock prior to the issuance we predict that firms with higher dual class premia are less likely to issue equity is investors reaction to a previous management decision our model implies that the higher the agreement parameter the more positively the firm stock price will react to management decisions unfortunately most management decisions do not have identifiable announcement dates and price reactions may also be influenced by asymmetric information one event that permits us to avoid these two difficulties is an acquisition by the issuing firm an acquisition has an identifiable announcement date and it is less likely to be biased by asymmetric information induced price reactions since the acquirer and target have relatively strong incentives to disclose private information prior to the announcement we measure this proxy by finding announcements in which a sample firm was the acquirer in a successful acquisition during the months prior to the
of external knowledge poor external linkages and the inadequacies of their explorative activities in fact many smes are not particularly good at absorbing external knowledge through networks if left unaided lending credence to the view in terms of experiential learning while reinforcement of the known may create reliability in experience the absence of an explorative orientation results in failure to provide variety in knowledge resources capability maturity models can be used to benchmark an organization s competence in some particular function or as hillson has it moving from a na ve to a natural performer arnold and thuriaux describe four degrees of a firm s levels of knowledge relating to technological capability these degrees of mastery are conceived in terms of a series of boxes which progress from opaque by integrating absorptive capacity and tipping points into a maturity model we propose a series of possible learning states that growing firms may occupy the base state is ignorance the firm does not realize that it is facing important key issues this is followed by awareness of one or more key change this prototypical ordering of the knowledge states is for illustration it could be possible for a firm to skip one or more states eg awareness could be followed by commitment to a touted solution although understanding of the issue is largely lacking in any case the finding and using of new knowledge each of the tipping points if the tipping points are then assessed against the firm for immediacy this prioritizes one or more of the framework s axes the firm s needs for help stand out as the need to raise its absorptive capacity to the models intuitive appeal and putative utility in simplifying and categorizing complex organizational lives found several limitations in spite of subsequent empirical work challenging the implicit assumptions of the organismic metaphor the notion that organizations have life cycles and that they pass through stages maintained we propose an alternative conceptualization of firm growth this alternative discards the notion of stages and suggests that as firms grow they encounter a series of problems which at some critical or threshold level that we call tipping points must be successfully addressed if growth is to continue we make no assumptions of linearity which may be recrudescent noting that external knowledge is an important resource for addressing these problems we integrate absorptive capacity into a capability model and suggest that firms are differentially able to acquire assimilate transform and apply knowledge to navigate tipping points there are several limitations to our study and younger businesses and our conclusions should not be generalized beyond this population furthermore much of the literature reviewed is skewed towards fastgrowing high tech us based organizations however the absence of comparable studies of less glamorous sectors in other locations further limits the generalizability of our framework tipping point solutions provide a framework within which to examine the growth needs of firms while we have thus far treated tipping points as conceptually distinct the likelihood is for considerable empirical overlap without the ability to tap into external sources of knowledge and help issues are unlikely to be satisfactory outcome for a growing firm without the ability to incorporate external knowledge with existing operational knowledge and effectively apply the resultant combination the firm is once again likely to have to resort to relying on established practices however while the literature provides a rich source of ideas and empirical this observation has important implications for managers academics and policy agents charged with devising and sponsoring organizational change interventions and should prove to be a fruitful avenue for future research regarding absorptive capacity two mechanisms have been widely promulgated as validation of the effectiveness of such interventions these though are not the only mechanism and some scholars have identified internal factors that enhance an organization s absorptive capacity daghfous for instance suggests a number of actions based around communication culture and rewards issues of internal organization understanding of effective interventions and help determine the value and contribution of expert interventions organizational deficiencies in potential absorptive capacity can be addressed through the intervention of an external agent acting as a catalyst to facilitate the emergence of clusters and networks navdi s study is india dini describes a chilean programme consisting of public incentives which stimulated the establishment of approximately sme networks with significant results in terms of an increase in sme profitability and sales evidence of well performing sme clusters benefiting from strong networks has been extensively reported being able to associate the new ideas with what is already known so it is easier for knowledge to transfer from a source to a recipient when both have knowledge in common and where participants share similar knowledge experiential characteristics rogers calls this homophilitic learning learning heterophily the degree to which entities that interact are different in certain attributes is considered a barrier to learning heterophyllous organizations are less receptive to each others communications and therefore more immune to learning from each other lane and lubatkin extend these ideas uctures compensation policies and dominant logics this literature therefore suggests that homophilitic networks may possess advantages however the focus on learning process downplays learning content there is an important issue of whether or not it is best to construct networks from similar firms given that this potentially raises policy implications with regard to realized absorptive capacity the literature emphasizes the insertion of experts typically academics or consultants into firms to help in problem solution and implementation in a review of such schemes arnold and teather found evidence that best and worst firms could be distinguished arnold et al note that ireland the uk the netherlands sweden and finland all have schemes focusing on developing firm absorptive capacity through human capital placement in most cases where such schemes have been evaluated the findings were largely positive suggests that it has been mistakenly held that a barrier to implementation is individuals resistance to change as a counterpoint to that notion the idea of
were in debt with the average village debt reaching and yuan respectively village debts consist mainly of voe debts borrowing for public projects and unpaid the debt problem was most serious in agricultural provinces for example jingmen hubei held jurisdiction over villages in the average village debt tripled from to and then increased percent annually to yuan in among these debts voe debts made up percent followed by interest for borrowing running schools irrigation projects owed taxes fees constructing road and by their collective nature the responsibility of repaying village debts would ultimately fall on all the villagers adding to what the theory of group solidarity and frightening many households into moving out of the village in some regions repayment of debt replaced the levy of taxes fees as the top priority of village cadres work village debts do not just foreshadow a village s bleak economic prospects and discourage aspiring young cadres village debts can sometimes be turned into village cadres personal debts and ruin their life as reported by nanfang zhoumo a village rewards for his achievements but these achievements were built on massive debts that he owed on behalf of his village after he stepped down his successor refused to acknowledge these debts when creditors forced the old party secretary to repay the debts he committed similarly a village party secretary in jingmen told me that he had used his own money to pay village debts he spent most of his time dealing with creditors some of whom threatened to kill him if the debts repaid the new patterns of governance in rural villages from a micro political perspective the stability of china s rural political structure is built on the interdependence between township officials and village cadres township officials rely on village cadres for village administration and policy implementation and village cadres look to township officials for the rewards whose nature and amount are increasingly related to the township s fiscal combined with the loss of other control mechanisms has made village cadres less manageable village cadres on their own no longer wield formidable sanctions against unruly villagers the near breakdown in the two links of top down power transmission has not resulted from any change in administrative and organizational forms or challenges from antisystemic forces but rather from the marketization of china s organizational foundation of party state authority in rural society its impact on village politics varies any assessment of this impact however is complicated by village elections whose correlation with the decline of party power is a controversial issue to control for the village election variable one should first examine existing power arrangements in villages particularly power relations between the party branch and the villagers committee in at nearly the same time that village elections came into the limelight as village government replaced the village party branch in public discourses some observers suggested that village elections broke the power monopoly of the village party branch logically the more democratic village elections are the less able township officials should be to command the elected village head that is the chair of the villagers head is at best the second leader in the village with few exceptions the party secretary namely the chief of the village party branch remains dominant even in villages where elections are fairly in some villages the elected village head also serves as party an arrangement that appears more common in affluent provinces such as guangdong than in agricultural ones such as jingmen hubei or bazhong sichuan even where one person does not hold both positions the party secretary commands through the village party branch in general i found no exception to this pattern among all the villages i visited a village s highest decision making body is the joint meeting of the party branch and villagers committee one of the reasons for the use of the term village government most leading villagers committee members are concurrently the joint meeting is not much different from the party branch meeting if leading villagers committee members are not party branch members they usually defer to party branch members to show respect for the principle of party the party secretary in some villages will hold a party branch meeting first to discuss and decide on village affairs and then demand procedural approval by the joint meeting paradoxically village branch since elected village heads are usually less docile village elections in some areas strengthened the tendency of the township leadership to interfere in village affairs through vertical intraparty organizational channels this scenario suggests once again that the formal withdrawal of state power from the village need not bring down party power under china s exceedingly powerful party hegemony village elections like other administrative and legal may set a weak bridle on party cadres but have not broken their monopoly on political power yet while the party continues to dominate village politics the character of party control has changed and new patterns of governance appear to be emerging across rural china based on the performance of party cadres as the core of the village leadership and their changing positions of authority three patterns of governance in a village were visible in the more than between and the first pattern vacuum of authority this pattern prevails in poor villages the loss of power privileges and material benefits prompted many village cadres to resign in twenty nine villages of wuli within one year of village elections seven village heads all serving concurrently as deputy party secretaries resigned in some villages the head changed several times a thwarted by the difficulty of village cadres townships often had to send their own officials to run villages as an emergency in these villages political authority has nearly collapsed and village government is paralyzed where there are no other cohesive elements or alternative forces to fill in the power void the village tends to disintegrate as a social or administrative unit some villages simply emptied as the villagers had migrated care for
thrust of the whole undertaking was to be kept from april to july for example about fifteen scientists were sent to bulgaria greece or both naples and the institute of art history in florence also participated in the german culture campaign abroad these institutes were under the patronage of the ministry of foreign affairs which in handed over the direction to the above ministry last but not least party organizations like the archive administration of the mobilization echelon rosenberg and the ahnenerbe office of the reichsfuhrer research abroad whether planned or already under it is clear that since the early years of hitler s regime there were differences among these various institutions those differences were developed in the following years into power ambitions reflecting the profound antagonisms between the party and the state and the chaotic bureaucracy brought about by this dynamic too many services are working side by side usually without director of the cultural department of the ministry of foreign affairs fritz von twardowski in the pressure this situation exerted on the foreign ministry which bore the main responsibility for cultural policy abroad forced twardowski to plead desperately with several party organizations to avoiding any intrusion in the ministry s affairs because this would create conflicts that would eventually damage the nation s in the cultural desk of the foreign renamed the cultural political that change indicated the fact that foreign cultural policy had begun to be recognized by the nazis as a significant factor on the international political stage the year was the turning point in nazi germany s foreign cultural policy at the party s extravagant annual festivities in nuremberg hitler made his first speech about cultural policy in which he placed this kind of policy in should not be an authority macht without culture a power kraft without beauty the armament of a nation is morally justified only when its shield and sword have a higher mission therefore we do not aspire to the brutal force of a genghis khan but the affluent power to create a strong social and patronage community as a bearer and guardian of a higher how seriously hitler meant those words as hausmann remarks remains in question what is certain however is that the nazis echoed the weimar republic s conviction that germany had lost the war because the country lacked intellectual rather than material weapons we did not lose the war argued the minister of propaganda joseph goebbels because our cannons failed but rather because our intellectual weapons did not in joachim von ribbentrop was appointed as the new foreign minister and one year later fritz von twardowski became head of the cultural political cultural policy and propaganda present in the weimar republic was now abandoned despite twardowski s cultural propaganda was now used as a synonym of cultural policy and the ministry of propaganda itself tried anew to take the cultural affairs of the ministry of foreign affairs under its control the latter regarded the lighter muses as propaganda namely the concerts theater art and other exhibitions well as sports events and radio broadcasts were the only areas that eventually came under goebbels control and were sponsored by his furthermore the bilateral cultural societies like the german french society the german bulgarian society the german greek society and so forth which for decades had been supported by private funds were recruited by goebbels for propaganda however the most important issues namely german education language and scientific remained the responsibility of the foreign ministry in its cultural sector was further divided into eleven departments among them were the department kult which was responsible for the promotion of german science abroad ie congresses travel lectures and german books the department kult responsible for university affairs professors and students and their relation with other countries as well as scholarships and the kult i department in charge of the german the foreign ministry and in particular fritz von twardowski strongly and explicitly emphasized that propaganda and cultural policy had to remain separate for the sake of germany s influence abroad twardowski in his revealing and forceful speech in the meeting of cultural councillors on august made a clear distinction between propaganda cultural propaganda and cultural policy a country s public opinion in relation with an acute political economic or military situation propaganda works therefore in the short term there is also of course the cultural propaganda kulturpropaganda but this is for the big cultural nations only a repercussion of a hostile propaganda that denies our cultural achievements in addition exerting cultural policy means presenting and establishing an intellectual leading nations moreover it means achieving an enduring intellectual influence over a select intellectual elite of other nations and making it as far as possible dependent on the german warning about the damage a blunt cultural propaganda policy might cause to germany s influence twardowski stressed that the candidate country with which germany planned to develop cultural relations should decide of its own no political or economic pressure should be applied for the sake of cultural work of any kind equality and reciprocity no violence but dialogue cultural exchange at its broadest not one sided performance should be our principles in short we must exercise our cultural policy with soft gloves in the dean of the faculty of philosophy at the university of leipzig professor weickmann in his opening speech talked about a global post war trauma he stressed that germans wished not only economic but also cultural relations with countries that could understand the german spirit nevertheless the cultural exchange he argued further should have a national character and germany should try to promote its own to the young foreign scholars particularly to those supported by the reich s scholarship foundations namely the daad and the alexander von humboldt stiftung south east europe should have priority german in though when the war broke out germany s scientific communication with the english speaking world was interrupted the nazis turned to europe which they regarded
good textbook on dynamic programming using the sup norm metric it can be established that the set of continuous as such any cauchy row defined in cb has a limit with this general property in mind we define the mapping on that satisfies the bellman equation for any b we define w because is compact and the period reward function is continuous on the conditions of the general weierstrass existence theorem are fulfilled and the supremum of because traction mapping and has a unique fixed point a unique optimal value function exists that is continuous and bounded in the following section we further describe the structure of the optimal value function concavity and differentiability the concavity and differentiability of the function are useful properties for identifying the existence and structure of an optimal policy theorem the optimal value function is strictly concave on proof see appendix a using a similar approach as in the proof of theorem we can show that the optimal value function is strictly increasing in s now we show the optimal value function is differentiable on int the state space the structure of and the boundedness continuity strict concavity and differentiability of the period reward on int theorem with continuous compact and convex and bounded strictly concave and differentiable on int the optimal value function is differentiable on int and f proof see appendix a monotonicity of the optimal policy a number of comparative statics results can be derived firstly the value function is increasing in the experience level and the learning rate as such the cumulated discounted profit of the long term planner increases if the learning rate increases secondly the effect on the cumulated discounted profit of other experience depreciating factors can be analysed with the help of a small change of the system with a rate then st st pt as such the cumulated discounted profit of the long term planner decreases in the depreciation factor thirdly for the explicit unit production cost function it can be established that because the period reward function is decreasing in ca and the optimal value function shows the same behavior therefore the discounted profit of the planner decreases if process changes make more experience obsolete unit costs increase fourthly as for the period reward the behavior of the value function in is not monotone and depends on the experience level the process change level and with a production planning model and the same unit production cost function mazzola and mccardle find that the discounted long term profit is increasing in the difference is caused by the fact that here process changes cause a decrease of the experience level and as such si whereas the measure for production experience in the model of mazzola and mccardle is strictly increasing the optimal long term policy in this section the existence of a unique optimal long term policy is established and the properties of that policy are described within the recursive framework the analysis makes use of calculus and basic optimization theory the information that the planning horizon is infinite limits the set of policies policy will be stationary and of the form fp we represent the decision rules as point to set mappings the action correspondence gives the set of feasible actions of the decision maker and is defined by proposition a unique optimal policy fp exists proof see appendix a of the kuhn tucker conditions are still satisfied they can also provide information on the optimal policy for the long term planning problem using an induction argument and the previously used explicit unit production cost and unit revenue functions we can show proposition for very large and very small s can occur s values further analysis for that subset of the state space is not pursued for the subset of the state space for which s is larger than zero the analysis is continued the following paragraph describes the parametric monotonicity over the state space of the optimal policy function with the euler first order necessary condition for an interior optimum from the calculus of variations and the differentiability of the optimal value function the determine the sign of the partial derivatives of s if those signs are clear the behavior of the optimal policy function in the state variables is monotone the analysis is performed in this and the following paragraph the euler condition that int satisfies is kt st pt policy function is implicitly defined we use the implicit function theorem to determine the sign of the partial derivative of the optimal policy function with respect to and s diy kt st hi kt st kt st kt st kt st are well defined calculating the partial derivatives and determining the sign is tedious but not difficult we find that the optimal long term process change level is strictly decreasing in the level of effective capacity knowing that the optimal myopic level is submodular on int that is not surprising as for the parametric monotonicity of the period reward function in s we need an explicit unit production cost function to monotonicity we use the same explicit function as before for that unit production cost function the behavior of the optimal policy function in the experience level also echoes the myopic policy the optimal policy function is strictly increasing in the experience level this result is in accordance with terwiesch and xu for the previously used explicit unit revenue and unit production cost function and for a ca cb and figure illustrates the monotone structure of the optimal long term policy the figure indicates that the effect of effective capacity on is stronger than the effect of experience the explicit unit production cost function also helps us to describe the behavior of the optimal long term process change level in the parameters ca and the level is decreasing in ca and and increasing in as was the case for the optimal value function the behavior of the optimal long
responds giving noreen the floor she begins her turn on line and the uneven beginning of her utterance seems to alert baraba to an upcoming tease he interrupts her ongoing turn to reveal his own understanding of the context in response to baraba s savvy prediction noreen laughs aligning herself with the positioning that baraba has just provided someone who is about to say something nonserious she manages to finish her thought declaring that the shirt he is wearing is tight this prompts almasi to laugh a response in which he establishes himself as someone who finds humor in the tight fitting shirt as well next mbwilo turns his attention to almasi who is still in the dark about ngouabi mbwilo begins by referencing the clothing on line and then appears to get stuck perhaps realizing that describing the shirts themselves is not the best way to almasi with this indexical order noreen takes the opportunity in line to entextualize the end of mbwilo s previous turn through a repetition of his own words hayo makoti those coats but this time she follows up with a fashion critique in other words noreen entextualizes the talk about the clothing within the realm of fashion rather than in the realm of political history in spite of this competing indexical order mbwilo proceeds with his original he connects ngouabi with kenneth zambia s first leader after independence as a means of creating intersubjectivity with almasi the statement after ngouabi came kaunda is delivered with noticeable pauses and a sing song intonation and through the utterance mbwilo takes on a didactic quality this utterance positions almasi as someone who might have learned about the leaders of african socialism in a detached manner perhaps or history lessons in school mbwilo s efforts to create shared understanding here utilize the tactic of adequation in that ngouabi is identified with kaunda in order to make him recognizable to the other participants baraba is wearing what became known as the kaunda suit which was worn by people like ngouabi kaunda and julius nyerere tanzania s first president mbwilo does not state it directly but it is likely that his own memories of these political figures everyone in the office is highly knowledgeable about nyerere s political and economic contributions to the development of tanzania he is known as baba wa taifa father of the nation and photos of him wearing the kaunda suit can be found hanging on the walls of nearly every office in dar es salaam nyerere is particularly relevant to the lives of the journalists since he was the founding editor of the newspaper they write for which bears the traces of socialism through its status as a government run publication ngouabi and kaunda are less familiar to younger people such as almasi and noreen but through contextualizing baraba s clothing with african leaders of the mbwilo tries to establish ritualized links among them through indexical iconicity in truth ngouabi and kaunda may have less in common than is apparent in country congo brazzaville was ruled not by the english but by the french in spite of these facts however mbwilo treats almasi s recognition of kaunda as adequate for bringing the topic to a close almasi returns to his work and he appears satisfied with the information supplied by mbwilo thus far a failure to achieve intersubjectivity although mbwilo s explanation involving historical figures may appear to provide making sense of the talk produced so far noreen s continued participation indicates that she is sensitive to a different set of discourses she is not satisfied with a comparison of past political leaders in line she asks mbwilo why the coat has to be so form fitting her use of present tense and her disregard for the historical details provided by mbwilo show her perspective to be that of someone with a very contemporary vantage point in his mbwilo remains located in the past through his past tense verbs and the emphatic ndivyo indeed in ndivyo ilivyokuwa that s really how they were his words characterize him as someone who actively participated in the kaunda suit generation and as someone for whom fashion is unremarkable noreen s interests remain located in the present however and in lines she implies that baraba s shirt is tight because he has likely weight this comment reveals the larger assumptions that all the while were driving her interest in baraba s clothing as previously expressed by her turns in lines and her tone in lines expresses disbelief through sarcasm as she questions the likelihood of baraba s ability to maintain the same weight over a period of years noreen s use of hajaongezeka he has nt gained underscores her concern with baraba s present condition rather than with historical the verb is in its stative form a verb tense that can relate only to a present state of being achieving intersubjectivity through the tactic of shifting subjectivities up until this point in the talk mbwilo had been attending to historical information in order to bring about a shared context in the structure of a history lesson however in line mbwilo abandons his use of adequation and distinction tactics involving the indexical order of historical political figures and takes a new approach through taking up the tactic of denaturalization he skillfully activates the more contemporary discourses of watching one s weight to explain baraba s clothing using swahinglish mbwilo s entextualization of the topic of baraba s clothing into the realm of weight consciousness is an illustration of denaturalization for it is an act of dissonance that creates a rupture in baraba s ongoing identity the joke relates well to the case of denaturalization found in barrett s study of african american drag queens where the drag performers established their identities by juxtaposing stereotypically feminine behavior such as demure politeness with the use of expletives and explicitly sexual talk thus fracturing their female personas similarly mbwilo creates a rupture in
contexts the development and transfer of knowledge central components of learning by virtue of four practical consequences first the application of established knowledge structures such as schemata and scripts implies rapid and more economical information processing since the encoding has already been processed in accordance with the established algorithms second more complex information configurations can be condensed into more units by means of schema driven information processing third conclusions can be speeded up because information is assumed to be given and implicit and fourth the use of heuristics makes cognitive resources available for further additional information processing however transfer tends not to occur spontaneously which explains why notably in the educational context transfer between different disciplines or to new contexts is or else it requires a substantial effort of instruction but on what does the quality of transfer depend first the similarity of the learning and the transfer task is one important determinant of transfer performance in general achieving transfer is easier when similarity of surface features of the learning and transfer tasks is high similarity is low second transfer performance is to be expected if the knowledge units acquired during the learning phase ie the productions and problemsolving rules can be re used in the transfer phase finally there is a direct relation between transferability and the difficulty of the learning task moreover metacognitive strategies are also able to improve transfer performance the minimum cognitive prerequisite for transfer is the level of complete acquisition or mastery level thus a high level of mastering must precede successful transfer this observation tallies with the studies conducted by kotovsky and fallside which concluded that complete mental the problem is the main factor in the success of transfer processes we took this into account in our studies by having all subjects reach mastery level with the three disk and four disk tower of hanoi problem in the learning phase the toh problem is suitable for investigating proximal and distal transfer tasks because the recursive structure to be applied is fundamental to the solution of many cognitive tasks so far the extent to which positive or negative mood may lead to improved or reduced transfer performance has not been studied a single finding showed favorable effects of a positive mood for grasping metaphors furthermore if a positive mood as highlighted by isen et al leads to more flexible thinking this should be particularly favorable for detecting analogies between different transfer tasks with similar or dissimilar surface features but with substructure however the contrary may also be the case given the evidence that a negative mood leads to more systematic and analytical cognitive processing people in a sad mood may be more aware of the data available and therefore more easily detect a problem solving algorithm underlying the different transfer tasks in sum the issue of how mood influences transfer performance remains controversial to date the impact of mood on transfer effects is unclear ie it remains unanswered to what extent mood promotes the transfer of a previously acquired problem solving strategy to tasks with very similar and dissimilar surface features the main aim of the first study was therefore to test the hypothesis that mood has an effect on the transfer of a learning task to transfer tasks which have in common that they can be solved by means of the same recursive strategy method participants and design fifty four male students from the swiss corps of fortification guards took part in the study the average age was years the admission procedure used by this corps is such that persons studied could be assumed to form a homogeneous subject pool in respect of their professional cognitive and first of all the students had to develop a schema for solving the toh problem after acquiring the schema participants mood was manipulated so as to create a positive or a negative mood in the subsequent transfer phase all students solved one proximal and two distal transfer tasks and the impact of mood on transfer performance was evaluated material or sad and negative life event and then having them write about it for min earlier research had revealed that mood induction is only successful if participants are not aware that their mood is being manipulated and hence do not focus on it following schwarz mood induction was therefore introduced as an independent mock study aimed at creating a life event inventory thus the told that several separate investigations were being conducted at the same time as part of a large scale survey learning task three disk and four disk tower of hanoi in the learning phase participants were confronted with a toh with three and four disks the goal was to learn to solve the tower problem so efficiently that they achieved mastery level ie a high level of skill to do so they had to move a pyramid of variously disks from one peg to another only one disk could be transferred per move and it had to be smaller than the disk underneath it in the instructions it was explained that they had to solve the toh repeatedly until they had achieved mastery level this level was achieved if regardless of the number of repetitions both toh problems were solved twice with the minimum of moves transfer tasks the subsequent test phase the following three transfer tasks a five disk toh the missionary and cannibal problem and the katona card problem five disk toh compared with the learning tasks this toh problem has just one more disk and can be solved within moves in contrast to the learning phase the goal now was to solve the toh problem only once in as few moves as possible participants were allowed to correct their moves by moving one and the same disk several times however they were to go back to the beginning and start the problem all over again in the missionary and cannibal problem the goal is to get three cannibals and three missionaries across
regarding the height of the verb even so such facts rare especially in the input to children and so we might expect that not all speakers exposed to a head final language acquire the same grammar as far as raising is concerned indeed we present evidence here supporting this expectation from korean using data obtained from psycholinguistic experiments we show that there are two populations of korean speakers one with raising and one without this article is organized as follows in section we review the kind of evidence the linguistic literature to determine whether korean exhibits raising we consider evidence from null object constructions scrambling and coordination negative polarity item licensing and coordination of an untensed conjunct with a tensed one we show that in all these cases no firm conclusions can be drawn regarding the availability of raising in korean as all the data claimed to support a movement analysis are a non movement grammar and vice versa next we consider evidence involving the position of the verb with respect to negation and scope interactions between negation and quantified nps we show that while the evidence from scope interactions would be informative regarding the possibility of raising in korean the extant literature on this topic is plagued by contradictory conclusions giving the impression that syntacticians studying korean cannot agree on what the facts are since only facts involving negation and quantified nps hold the promise of settling the issue of whether korean is a raising language it becomes crucial that the relevant facts be determined as precisely as possible to achieve this goal we conducted two psycholinguistic experiments using the truth value judgment task a technique devised to elicit reliable interpretive judgments after findings in section we discuss their implications regarding the availability of raising in korean in section that french and english clauses have similar hierarchical structure and that often type adverbs are placed in the same position in both languages the word order in which the verb precedes the adverb is taken to be evidence for raising as in french and the order in which the verb follows the adverb is taken to be evidence for i as in english however in a head final language like korean with specifiers adjuncts on the left of the verb as in raising is hard to detect because there is no evidence from the string to support a raising analysis whether the verb raises or not it will occur to the right of such adverbial elements we thus need to resort to arguments other than those relying on the string order between the verb and a diagnostic element to settle the matter in what follows we arguments claimed in the literature to demonstrate that korean either does or does not exhibit raising the arguments presented in sections and were originally based on facts in japanese and we have duplicated them here using korean null object constructions otani and whitman argue that the sloppy reading in the null object construction in japanese is evidence for raising they propose that through raising the an empty vp analogous to vp ellipsis in english allowing a sloppy reading just as vp ellipsis in english does their argument can be duplicated using korean examples the korean noc in can have a sloppy reading just like the english vp ellipsis example in hoji however shows that the sloppylike readings in the noc are not the genuine sloppy reading attested in vp ellipsis constructions while english vp ellipsis examples generally have sloppy readings available the nocs do not always do so this point applies to korean nocs as well as illustrated in according to hoji sloppylike readings in nocs arise because of the way the content of the null argument is recovered from discourse the null argument can be either a definite or an indefinite applying this to korean in the null argument corresponds to indefinite letters which can be interpreted as john s letters or mary s letters in the null argument is definite and refers to john the most salient entity in the discourse allowing only the strict reading if hoji is correct noc examples with sloppylike readings have no bearing on the issue of raising kim also provides several arguments that show that the readings in nocs could not be evidence for overt raising in korean here we briefly discuss one of his arguments kim ellipsis that nevertheless has a sloppy reading is an example of a multiple accusative construction conveying a part whole relationship where the first accusative marked np refers to the whole and the second accusative marked np refers to the part in the part np remains within but even though no vp ellipsis site is available can have a sloppy reading this fact then suggests that a strategy other than vp ellipsis is responsible for the sloppy reading in korean and so they cannot have any bearing on the issue of raising scrambling and coordination using examples from coordination and scrambling and making the reasonable assumption that coordinate structures conjoin syntactic constituents of like categories koizumi argues that the verb raises all the way up to in japanese if we apply koizumi s arguments to korean examples then subject object and object verb coordinate structures are derived through subclauses with across the board raising at least to i this is illustrated in moreover subject object and subject object verb coordinate structures are derived through ip coordination with atb raising to as illustrated in crucially the coordinate structures can be scrambled supporting the claim that they form constituents however similar examples can be constructed where the material the two conjuncts contains more than just the verb as in this means that the atb extraposition can target not only verbs but also bigger constituents making the kind of example koizumi provides a subcase of a more general phenomenon not relevant to the issue of raising fukui and sakai provide several arguments against koizumi s string vacuous vraising in japanese here we present
suppliers have developed successful systems for use by one specialty but despite their best endeavors few have been able to replicate that success across other specialties for example suppliers of division of labor and patterns of information flow in the but that theory fails to explain why many successful hospital clinical systems such as those used in renal medicine maternity or cardiac surgery have not been adopted by other specialties exchanging records between and might use different internal codes this is illustrated by the project in england patients in england have a lifelong medical record which follows them when they move from one gp to another in an ideal world each patient s records would be sent electronically from their old practice to the new in a manner that minimises risk and avoids the need to reenter project s leaders recognized that it could be either the holy grail or a poisoned the jury is still out but there is optimism that the first live exchanges between two different systems suppliers will be achieved in early document sharing has low its content which has persistence and can be authenticated in addition cda release supports structured clinical data using the clinical statement model the barrier to entry is low because all cda documents can be rendered in a human readable way but coded data can also be included to provide a straightforward migration path cross enterprise document sharing which allows healthcare documents to be shared between different enterprises the key to xds is standard metadata in a central registry the registry keeps an index of each patient s documents with a link back to each document s repository an xds user creates a virtual patient record on the fly by retrieving documents technologies such as cda and xds can deliver images and narrative documents when and where they are needed but one of the main benefits of computers is to relieve humans of routine mental work such as performing innumerable checks to ensure patient safety this needs unambiguous structured data reverse engineering to reverse engineer existing applications or designs to create a conceptual design specification where none exists which can be explained to both users and implementers alike when reverse engineering an existing design particular care must be taken to avoid the temptation of following the implementation pattern the conceptual design specification needs to use the language of a whole pointers can be provided to technology specific artifacts to support traceability between deliverables from each stage of the life cycle conclusions many of the difficulties met in developing implementing and integrating healthcare computing systems stem ultimately from difficulties of human to human communication between users and developers they can become alienated developers make avoidable errors leading to delays and cost over runs the number of errors is a function of the complexity of the specification its length and the number of stakeholders involved the technical specification needs to be supplemented by stringent conceptual design specifications using uml diagrams that set out precisely what is easily than long lists or reports the conceptual design specification is a set of detailed uml class diagrams supporting data definitions and terminology it is platform independent comprehensive stringent coherent consistent composed from reusable elements and provides a computer readable rendering in xml no extra meaning should be added or subtracted during the subsequent development and implementation stages the approach presented here is an extension of conventional software engineering best practice and is relevant to a broad range of situations involving integration of federated systems interoperability data warehousing and data migration from legacy to new communication systems an approach building on practical experiences in three european hospitals abstract developed based on actual clinical experience in three european hospitals and tested in these environments the approach departs from a thorough analysis of the working procedures and information flows before implementation both descriptive and quantitative on the basis of this analysis quantitative objectives of the implementation are defined the implementation strategy is defined after comparison of various scenarios taking costs and effects for both the the transition phases into account the approach is supported by a comprehensive evaluation protocol and a software package the approach is demonstrated in this paper by applying it on a hypothetical pacs implementation for ct ultrasound and for the part of the radiology department serving icu the objectives of this pacs are to shorten the turn around time between the radiology department and icu from to min to save of film per year and personnel time in this case the pacs is introduced in three phases and completed after three years the cost analysis shows that if started in a financial break even point is reached after years when comparing costs for the film based system with those of the pacs experiences in the three sites show that the approach helps to harvest potential benefits allowing a cost effective implementation of pacs may start a new era of communication in radiology the promise of a filmless hospital made in the early eighties seems to become a real option now that technical barriers have been broken many hospitals have started installing partial pacs and many more are considering pacs as a result the question how to use the technology first experiences show that pacs may save time of personnel especially in activities related to film handling in the skejby university hospital full time equivalents could be saved while production increased a counter effect may occur as reporting from screen requires more available with pacs in the mdis project in the usa an increased throughput of the radiology department was observed also shortening of the retrieval time of medical images by pacs has been documented for instance in a small scale pacs it was found that pacs reduced retrieval times from and rain to min for
to say that a moderate textualist would trump text as strong purposivists historically have done rather he would look to text and textualist clues first and give them great weight if textualist tools point strongly in one direction this would render policy consequences and statutory purposes much less important indeed where textualist tools point strongly in one direction only the most powerful evidence of statutory purposes and policy consequences for example in cases of but where textualist tools do not point strongly either way purposivist tools would loom larger and might ultimately determine the outcome of the case an aggressive textualist might object to such efforts to permit judicial flexibility to flourish alongside legal constraint on the ground that judges may employ formal rules and flexible tools together this is to cabin judicial flexibility not to ignore it just as judicial flexibility has been bounded by legal constraints in administrative law so too can formal rules limit judicial flexibility in statutory interpretation beyond the administrative context moderate textualism would place enough weight on text and semantic cues to exclude some purposivist interpretations completely and to counsel strongly against others if moderate to produce clarity and eliminate judicial leeway they would at least be willing to rely on formal constraints to cabin that leeway and if some judges might abuse their flexibility rather than use it wisely this is a problem with any approach to indeed as noted above aggressive textualism is just as likely to fuel judicial abuse and aggrandizement as aggressive purposivism the best moderation and balance the value of cabining judicial discretion in constitutional law just as administrative law may teach statutory scholars to expand their traditional arsenal of tools it should also lead constitutional theorists to employ additional strategies even where constitutional theorists focus exclusively on limiting judicial intrusions into the political process the administrative law example suggests in their struggle with the countermajoritarian difficulty the discussion below explores how extreme versions of minimalism may inadvertently weaken an important check on judicial power vis a vis those other political actors that judicial discretion can be exercised in a way that aggravates as well as limits judicial intrusions into the political process is clear from the administrative law example consider the pre in that framework permitted judges to substitute their judgments for those of the same danger arose in procedural review where judges could use flexible procedural doctrines either to soften their substantive review and send matters back to agencies or else to ratchet up their review and invalidate agency actions more and recall that administrative law s judicial discretion chevron routinized the messy pre chevron approach to substantive and vermont yankee likewise imposed formal limits on judicial discretion in procedural constitutional theory poses similar risks of judicial overreaching and offers similar potential remedies as in administrative law unchecked judicial flexibility in constitutional review creates a risk of judicial overreaching even where it is accompanied by a background tread lightly proceed cautiously and exercise restraint and just as in administrative law the best way to handle this risk is by imposing some formal limits on judicial discretion in its extreme form contemporary minimalism sends the wrong message to judges when it suggests that they can reach their preferred outcomes in pending cases so long as they confine their minimalism and ignore the manner in which law constrains judges these scholars may inadvertently relieve judges of some of their traditional obligation to reconcile their decisions with the existing legal materials if we instead tell judges that they cannot reach those desired outcomes if they do not first justify their decisions based on existing legal materials we end up with an additional check on judicial power indeed been considered to be at odds with bickel s model of prudence and restraint highlighted how principle itself can be a source of restraint wechsler observed that in the absence of a principle to support their positions judges cannot interfere with government action no matter how lightly they tread or how much they leave when no sufficient reasons can be assigned for these choices must of course the legal constraints on judges may not seem as powerful today as they did in a pre realist age but they certainly retain some we can emphasize these constraints on judicial leeway or else ignore them overzealous advocacy of minimalism risks ignoring them and inadvertently removing an important protection against judicial the requirement that judges ground their what minimalists would impose and guards against the excesses of judicial discretion fortunately most of the scholars whom i label minimalist do not directly reject a balanced version of minimalism along the lines of the one i embrace here recall that cass sunstein for example distinguishes minimalism from reasonlessness and acknowledges some role for legal principle in constitutional judicial the sunstein lies in their willingness to underemphasize principle and to overlook its although they do not directly reject the importance of legal constraints on judges they do not often embrace those constraints in suggesting that scholars should follow the administrative law example and pay more attention to legal principles and formal constraints right to emphasize that prudence can play a role not only in the decision to accept a case but also in a court s handling of they are wrong to overlook bickel s emphasis on law minimalism s core mission of limiting judicial intrusions into the political sphere is by no means new and it is by no means incompatible with older more traditional theories that emphasize and legal theory and the case for limiting judicial intervention in the political process has always co existed with an emphasis on constraining judges whenever they do indeed bickel is not the only constitutional theorist ever to employ formal constraints as part of an argument for judicial restraint and i do not mean to elevate bickel s specific approach over others another possibility worth mentioning in part because it resembles is the model of constitutional judicial review advanced by james
the scene almost to the very end threatening to redirect the gravitational center of the composition towards itself that rival of a the true tonic is the lowest note of the two triads described before critical to mahler s tonal design is while these two triads eb a a are symmetrically generated around the over all tonal center of the work the composer does not employ them in mirror image instead mahler uses each triad cadentially with a downward pull in the course of the symphony we experience these tonalities largely as follows a eb for himself and also the cause of his ultimate artistic triumph for the triad a to leads away from the true tonic moreover it is an acoustically strong triad outlining a perfect fifth thus the lowest key center seems a very convincing place to rest too convincing in fact for comfort on the other hand the triad with which he descends to his true tonic a is outlined by a very equivocal interval the diminished fifth eb to a mahler must therefore go to extraordinary to find a way to make that final descending tonal arc convince us of the work s true tonality despite its tritonal outline which tends to do just the opposite to negate any strong definition of through the most meaningful of musical ironies that unstable and tonally ambiguous eb will prove the means by which mahler ultimately grounds his true tonic weakness will become a strength nor as this essay will later explain was this only a technical victory for these opposites weakness and strength were the dramatic substance of mahler s own life and perhaps never so keenly as in the years surrounding the composition of this very work many compositions have been put forth as direct ancestors of the sixth symphony including bruckner s surprisingly a work not been mentioned in the scholarly literature but which in terms of its bears the clearest signs of musical paternity is beethoven s seventh as did mahler later beethoven took extraordinary care to surround a tonal center of a with keys symmetrically arrayed at a third exactly the same keys and the british composer robert simpson noting this wrote of the wonderful new approach to tonality in the seventh symphony beethoven here colors the whole work with an uncomplicated but hitherto entirely unfamiliar attitude to the keys the main a major but as well as allowing the music to explore nominally related tonalities he makes startling systematic use of the foreign keys of major and major the indefinable character of the whole symphony is determined by beethoven s enormously powerful imagination in tackling this situation so dramatic and so cosmological in his opinion were the implications of this symmetrical use of tonality that simpson observes the three tonal protagonists a and seem more like dimensions than keys the presaging of mahler goes even further in beethoven s opus there is also a prominent structural use of the key of approached likewise not in the traditional manner as an immediate subdominant but as the deepest point in a falling cycle of thirds and while the key of eb is never established in the symphony the counterpose the pitch eb to that of the tonic is clearly present near the end of the work beethoven prominently marks by repeatedly insisting on it as the deepest of a two note bass register ostinato this sets up a long dominant pedal which leads just measures later to the symphony s joyous conclusive affirmation of its to my knowledge no earlier work by beethoven or for that matter haydn and mozart had featured the sharpened fourth so the bass so near to its ultimate cadence a tritone away beethoven took the tonal risk mahler as this essay implies raised the stakes hair raisingly higher by emphasizing the tritone while denying himself any significant structural use of the dominant mahler loved this symphony of beethoven he felt it had been misunderstood and championed it in fact he performed it on april just weeks before he abandoned the hurly burly of viennese concert life for the rural to begin work on his sixth all this is deeply and yet it is striking that technically akin as these symphonies are in their deep tonal logic their immediate moods are ever so contrasting one eventuating in dithyrambic joy the other in desolating tragedy mahler s fate motto and the meaning of aesthetic experience as famous as any moment in mahler is the fate motto of the sixth symphony it has become as nearly emblematic for him as opening of the fifth symphony is for beethoven every commentator has been impelled to describe that fate motto in terms of opposites the sudden juxtaposition of strength and weakness assertion and mutedness blunt immediacy and a mysterious swift motion into the distance is patent as is mahler s careful effort to have these opposing qualities arise out of each other seamlessly in terms of the hermeneutics of this motto we should remind ourselves that in western music theory major have long been implicitly to ideas of hardness and softness dur implying strength moll implying yieldingness a giving way every listener once he or she has a basic familiarity with the language of western symphonic music can feel the life equivalent of the acoustical situation mahler has created the sudden shock of strength turning to weakness the stark dichotomy of proud self assertion and the retreat into mutedness even shame as aesthetic realism the opposites are inevitable in any honest description of music because they are the philosophic bedrock of all possible and this the ontological meaning of opposites is the deepest context for the arts a context which precedes and transcends any particular historical or cultural thus in any century and on any continent musical form has depended on the conjunction of such matters as change and sameness unity and multiplicity foreground and background separation and junction nearness and distance and also by
increase sustainable development green energy eco friendly process etc in the transportation sector in developed countries there is a growing trend towards employing modern technologies and efficient bio energy conversion using a range of biofuels which are becoming cost wise competitive with fossil fuels advantages of bio fuels are the a considerable environmentally friendly potential there are many benefits the environment economy and consumers in using bio fuels and they are biodegradable and contribute to sustainability currently biomass converts to bio oil by fast pyrolysis and then the bio oil converts to hydrogen bio oil fraction produced from biomass undergoes reforming at present the amount of biomass derived bio oil available for reforming is rather limited but a viable way to increase the production of in a biomass based plant could be co reforming of biooil with natural gas if the purpose were to maximize the yield of liquid products resulting from maximize the yield of fuel gas resulting from biomass pyrolysis a high temperature low heating rate long gas residence time process would be preferred the fischer tropsch synthesis produces hydrocarbons of different length from a gas mixture of and co from biomass gasification called as bio syngas the fundamental reactions of is a process capable of producing liquid hydrocarbon fuels from bio syngas the large hydrocarbons can be hydrocracked to form mainly diesel of excellent quality the process for producing liquid fuels from biomass which integrates biomass gasification with fts converts a renewable feedstock into a clean fuel formed in minor quantities the product distribution obtained from fts includes the light hydrocarbons ethene and ethane lpg gasoline diesel fuel and light and waxes the distribution of the products depends on the catalyst and the process parameters such as temperature can be use when mixed with diesel fuels pure vegetable oil however cannot be used in direct injection diesel engines such as those regularly used in standard tractors since the vegetable oil cooking occurs after several hours of use conversion of the vegetable oils and animal fats into biodiesel has been undergoing further development over the past several mixture of mono alkyl esters of fatty acids most often obtained from extracted plant oils and or collected animal fats commonly accepted biodiesel raw materials include the oils from soy canola corn rapeseed and palm new plant oils that are under consideration include mustard seed peanut sunflower and cottonseed the most commonly considered animal fats include those fermented from sugars starches or from cellulosic biomass most commercial production of ethanol is from sugar cane or sugar beet as starches and cellulosic biomass usually require expensive pretreatment it is used as a renewable energy fuel source as well as being used for manufacture of cosmetics pharmaceuticals and also for the production of alcoholic beverages ethyl in an earlier study physiological effects of inhibitors on ethanol from lignocellulosic materials and fermentation strategies were comprehensively investigated global biofuel scenarios renewable resources are more evenly distributed than fossil and nuclear resources and energy flows from renewable resources are more than three economic and geopolitical concerns that have implications far into the future according to international energy agency scenarios developed for the usa and the eu indicate that near term targets of up to displacement of petroleum fuels with biofuels appear feasible using conventional biofuels given available cropland a of gasoline diesel requires usa cropland the eu the dwindling fossil fuel sources and the increasing dependency of the usa on imported crude oil have led to a major interest in expanding the use of bio energy the recent commitment by the usa government to increase bio energy three fold in years has added impetus to the search for viable bio fuels account for at least the market for gasoline and diesel sold as transport fuel by the end of increasing in stages to a minimum of the end of fig shows main biomass conversion processes fig shows resources of main liquid biofuels for automotives fig shows the shares of alternative fuels compared to the total automotive structural constituents and minor amounts of extractives which each pyrolyze at different rates and by different mechanisms and pathways all biomass materials can be converted to energy via thermochemical and biological processes biomass gasification has attracted the highest interest among the thermochemical conversion it is believed that as the reaction progresses the carbon becomes less reactive and forms stable chemical structures and consequently the activation energy increases as the conversion level of biomass increases biomass gasification can be considered as a form of pyrolysis which takes place in higher temperatures and produces a mixture of gases with by reforming of the syngas and fast pyrolysis followed by reforming of the carbohydrate fraction of the bio oil in each process water gas shift is used to convert the reformed gas into and pressure swing adsorption is used to purify the product power generation from gaseous products from biomass gasification is found to be the most clean fuel gases or synthesis gases the synthesis gas includes mainly and carbon monoxide which is also called as syngas bio syngas is a gas rich in co and obtained by gasification of biomass currently is most economically produced from natural gas the most studied technology for steam reacts with hydrocarbons in the feed to predominantly produce co and commonly called synthesis gas steam reforming can be applied various solid waste materials including municipal organic waste waste oil sewage sludge paper mill sludge black liquor refuse derived fuel and agricultural waste steam reforming of natural gas sometimes referred to as least expensive method of producing and used for about half of the world s production of production from carbonaceous solid wastes requires multiple catalytic reaction steps for the production of high purity the reforming of fuels is followed by two water gas shift reaction steps a final co purification and removal steam for production of co free has been investigated at various process conditions by choudhary and goodman the process consists of two steps involving the
separated by a greater interval of time in period the opposite implication applies given jeopardy is low it follows that informed trade frequency and value are greater in period when the abnormal return at the forthcoming filing is extreme likewise given jeopardy is lower in period trades motivated by liquidity or diversification needs are less likely to be impeded by the potential for an extreme return at the filing than in period also a consequence of avoiding trade in period when the magnitude of abnormal returns at the announcement is large may be to shift trades to period hence trade value and frequency should be greater in period when the abnormal return at the preceding announcement is extreme finally to the extent insiders delay trades into period trade value and frequency in period should greater when the returns at the filing and announcement are extreme the following tobit regressions offer evidence on the hypothesized link between trade frequency and value and the magnitude of the price reaction at the announcement and filing sum freq p is the number of insider stock transactions in the period firm quarter sum value p defined as the total value of insider stock transactions in the period firm quarter and abs and abs are the absolute values of aret ea and aret fd respectively regressions control for calendar year quarter and fiscal quarter fixed effects association in period between the frequency and value of insider trades and the magnitudes of the abnormal returns at the announcement and the filing after controlling for variation in firms prior returns market capitalizations and book to market ratios conversely lower jeopardy implies a positive association in periods and between the frequency and value of insider trades and the magnitudes of the abnormal returns at the and the filing results in table are consistent with our predictions except that in panel the sign on abs in period and on abs in period are insignificantly different overall the results support the notion that insider trading frequency and value are lower in periods of high jeopardy when the forthcoming news is extreme this suggests that insiders eschew some but not all trades in periods of high jeopardy specifically they foresee zero or small price responses to forthcoming announcements and avoid trades when they foresee large price movements thus insider trades shortly before an earnings announcement are on average an indication that the price reaction at the announcement and filing will be small effects of news type and past trading on insider trades in this section we examine two questions regarding determinants of insider trades in on trade and whether past insider trading affects current insider trading to conduct these analyses the basic regression for period from table pooling across all quarters is revised to more precisely identify the relationship between insider trades and the forthcoming filing results are reported in table news type forthcoming good news and bad news at the filing on insider trades in anticipation of that news can be examined separately aret fd is replaced by ind aret fd which is an indicator variable equal to if the abnormal return at the filing is positive and zero otherwise pos aret fd which is defined to be max and neg aret fd which is defined to be min in panel a the coefficient on ind aret fd reflecting an intercept shift in is positive and significant implying that insiders buy more shares before good news disclosures than bad news disclosures the coefficient estimate on pos aret fd is significantly different from zero indicating that more positive news at the filing implies more insider purchases while the coefficient estimate on neg aret fd is not significantly different from zero neither is it significantly different from the coefficient estimate on pos aret fd this indicates marginal effect of a more positive return at the filing is indistinguishable from the marginal effect of a more negative return in other words the associations between insider trading and the subsequent filing return magnitude are comparable for good and bad news in panel the coefficient estimate on neg aret fd is significantly different from at the but indistinguishable from the coefficient estimate on pos aret fd we conclude that there foreknowledge of good news has a larger or smaller marginal effect on insider trading than foreknowledge of bad news table tobit regressions of unsigned frequency and unsigned value of insider trade on absolute event return for the regressions in panel a the dependent variable is sum freq p defined as the number of insider stock transactions in the period firm quarter for the regressions in panel the dependent variable is sum value p defined as total value of insider stock transactions in the period firm quarter the absolute values of aret and prior retp are abs and abs respectively other variables are as defined in table except that ln is the natural logarithm of mv regressions control for calendar year quarter and fiscal quarter fixed effects significance levels of and based on two tailed tests are denoted by and respectively past trading the next question we address is whether past insider trades affect current insider trades autocorrelation in insider trading may be induced by the short swing profit recovery rules of section of the securities exchange act of which requires an insider to disgorge any profits received from any purchase and sale transactions that occur within the same six month period if an insider has purchased stock within the past six months and increased then he may purchase more stock without violating the rule but a sale would trigger disgorgement another possibility is that insiders may trade repeatedly on the same long lived private information as outlined by huddart et al to examine this potential serial dependence we include in the regression lag freq this variable is computed like freq p except that the period over which lag freq is computed begins
to capturing conditional correlations which may or may not be indicative of causation al harley arguably single equation ordinary least squares studies do pick up much that is sensible about real world relationships yet unobserved heterogeneity is a ubiquitous issue throughout quantitative industrial relations research in this case a potential problem arises in that a key rhs variable commitment is a measure of self reported preferences while the dependent variable is a self reported measure of work design if both self reports are affected by unobserved personality traits which could increase the likelihood of more positive responses to both commitment and discretion the estimate of will be upward biased the risk of bias is compounded by the possibility that reverse causation is also present designing jobs with high levels of discretion may be one way of generating affective organizational commitment since worker autonomy is a major determinant worker is more likely to develop preferences favorable to the organization and indeed several studies report correlations between job satisfaction and organizational commitment it will therefore be necessary to account for potential biases in the estimates of a through the use of suitable instruments to be discussed in the next section the assumptions of the model imply the following hypotheses hypothesis ambiguous for s otherwise these hypotheses can be tested using a variety of assumptions about the covariance of the error structures in addition i shall also consider in section whether certain management policies or technological organizational characteristics captured in zj or job characteristics captured in xi have the expected association with task discretion these include teamworking work practices forms of work monitoring and trade union membership data to investigate these issues i make use of a recent matched establishment employee dataset the workplace employment relations survey which is a nationally representative multi part survey of people at work represents a continuation of earlier surveys of british industrial relations although only the and surveys have contained provides a mapping of employment relations practices across establishments and time the management survey in gives measures of workplace characteristics as well as rich details of human resource practices and representation and communication mechanisms in the sample was drawn from establishments with five or more workers a stratified sampling strategy was pursued in order to obtain sufficient cases of establishments with many employees normally weighted by the sampling weights provided in order to obtain unbiased estimates of the target population across britain the true response rate among eligible establishments was per cent for the survey of employees questionnaires were distributed by management to up to potential respondents in each establishment in the case of for larger establishments employees were chosen using a random selection process in about per cent of establishments where a manager was interviewed no employee questionnaires were returned largely because the forms failed to be distributed among those where at least one questionnaire was returned the employee response rate was per cent the non response together with the survey design selection probabilities was details of the differential non response rates can be found in the technical report along with the data at the uk data archive in what follows it is implicitly assumed that any unobserved factors affecting response propensities are not correlated with the variables of interest in the analyses use is also made of the equivalent employee survey in to examine the discretion and commitment in what follows the analysis is confined to the private findings measuring task discretion and organizational commitment the measure of task discretion was derived from responses to five questions that began with the common stem in general how much influence do you have over the following the questions then referred to what tasks were done the pace of work how the work was done the order in which tasks the start and finish of the working day against each of these domains of control respondents replied on a four point scale their responses are shown in table it can be seen that a substantial majority of respondents perceived that they had at least some influence in four of the domains but that only a half of respondents felt that they had at least some control of when they started and finished work a third were control at all for the subsequent analysis i computed a single measure capturing the overall level of task discretion in the job assigning cardinal values respectively to the responses none to a lot an additive scale is obtained entitled the task discretion index by averaging the values of all five variables yielding a range from to and a mean of cronbach s alpha statistic measuring scale reliability for this measure is which implies a level of reliability alternative indices can also be used in order to test the robustness of the findings one alternative is to generate scores from a factor analysis the principal factor method was used and this extracted only one factor in another alternative the fifth domain was excluded from the scale since its correlation with the other domains was the lowest in what follows a broadly similar using any of these alternatives so only the findings from the additive scale are presented complementing employees estimates of their own task discretion managers were also asked three questions about the individual task discretion involved in the jobs of employees managers were asked to what extent would you say that individuals have discretion over how they do their work having control over the pace at which they do their work and involvement in decisions over how their work is organized respondents could answer a lot some little or none the responses to these questions were averaged to generate a separate additive scale to be entitled the task discretion index managers perception again ranging from to earlier studies and employees perceptions of task discretion nevertheless it is of interest to examine the extent to which the tdi and the tdimp scales are correlated in the data for this purpose i computed the
algorithm the gn algorithm the algorithm whenever applicable results on a small yeast protein interaction network before diving into the entire complex network we first decomposed a small yeast transcription network with proteins and interactions where known protein interaction modules can be inferred from the annotations of well studied proteins figure displays a hierarchical decomposition tree by the bcd algorithm note that there is no decomposition tree for the mcl algorithm the proposed definition of protein interaction module works well for both the gn and bcd algorithms because almost all proteins within the same computed protein module do indeed belong to the same known protein complex decomposition trees obtained using the algorithm and the algorithm excess number of singletons this suggests that the purely local metric used in the ecc algorithm is not effective additional data file also shows good results for both the gn and bcd algorithms that combine global and local metrics they clearly produce more consistent and robust results the bcd algorithm revealed functional modules all proteins within known protein complexes are also structure buried in complex protein interaction networks the mcl algorithm predicts only clusters from this small yeast transcription network several functional modules are grouped together the three rna dependent rna polymerases and the rna polymerase ii mediator complex are merged into one cluster the histone acetyltransferase complex the the saga histone acetyltransferase complex and the tfiid complex are grouped into one cluster and the compass complex and the mrna cleavage and polyadenylation specificity complex are grouped into one cluster apparently the mcl algorithm is inefficient in discovering boundaries between functionally related protein complexes and tends to group them together the quality of transcription factor iia tfiid nuclear pore associated and a new one predicted by the bcd algorithm are misplaced the ecc algorithm has the same tendency to separate peripheral members of the same known protein complex into incorrect protein modules for instance in the transcription network the ecc algorithm disjoins phase of the decomposition process causing those derived singletons to be separated from most functional modules singletons do not provide useful information for inferring the function of any module therefore the number of singletons generated by an algorithm is an additional indicator of that algorithm s performance an excess number of singletons indicates poor performance of a and gn algorithms produce and singletons respectively while the difference between the ecc algorithm and the bcd algorithm is only four singletons those ecc singletons lose their connections with other modules as they are isolated at a much earlier stage of the decomposition process although the gn algorithm produces the least number of singletons in the we also note that the original algorithm performs more poorly than the algorithm with our commonality index from now on we will not discuss the original algorithm when we refer to the ecc algorithm we mean the ecc algorithm using our commonality index hand curated protein complex data we first studied the decomposition processes by the three algorithms as curves in figure each curve displays the size of the current network on which an algorithm acts versus the number of productive cuts thus far we consider the tendency of network fragmentation due to different algorithms as measured by the number of productive cuts note that most a productive cut is defined as a removal of an edge resulting in two separate subnetworks on the original dataset the bcd gn and ecc algorithms require and productive cuts to split the largest connected component of nodes into smaller pieces which means on average the algorithms separate and nodes respectively from the largest cuts to split the largest connected component of nodes into smaller pieces which means on average the algorithms separate and nodes respectively from the largest connected component in each productive cut the more productive cuts made the more fragmented the network and the more singletons generated as shown in table as stated earlier a large number of singletons is an the bcd algorithm produces the fewest singletons of the three partitioning type algorithms the size distributions of predicted protein complexes for each algorithm including the mcl algorithm on both datasets are shown in figure the pattern of predicted complexes generated by all three methods is similar to that of hand curated mips complexes suggesting that the proposed protein module definition we use modularity which is a measure of a community structure in a network measuring the difference between the number of edges falling within groups and the expected number in an equivalent network with the edges placed at random basically the higher the modularity the better the separation the best clusters are given at the point when the modularity is maximal previous studies stopped the decomposition resulting clusters as communities applying the modularity criteria on protein interaction networks in this study however we found that protein modules obtained in this way tend to be dominated by several very large examples nonetheless the maximal modularity is an objective measure which is useful for comparing the performance of different algorithms table lists the maximal the highest values for both the transcription network and the unfiltered global network and is very close to the highest value of the gn algorithm on the filtered data suggesting that the bcd algorithm is best in terms of maximal modularity in particular on the noisy original data the maximal modularity value by the bcd algorithm is significantly higher than the values by the other algorithms overlap with mips complexes we validated the biological significance of our predicted protein modules by comparing the hand curated protein complexes in the mips database with the predicted modules for each predicted module we found a best matching mips complex using the method of spirin and mirny which finds two complexes with the least probability of random network and are the sizes of two complexes and is the number of common nodes table presents the overlap between predicted and mips complexes in terms of the absolute number of clusters that overlap mips
with a cover letter sent by staff at the respective case study sites an sae was enclosed for return to the research team ethical clearance for the study to proceed was both nurses and patients were assured of the anonymity and confidentiality of the data results response rate phase of the nurse questionnaires distributed a total of were returned of these respondents had qualified as nurse prescribers but were not actively prescribing at the time of the survey giving a total of completed questionnaires available for nurse practitioners most others were employed in relatively senior grade nurse positions such as sister team lead nurse specialist and nurse manager matron most of the sample were also working in primary or community care settings most commonly describing their area of practice as general practice asked about concordance competencies in their prescribing practice findings are shown in table table shows that the vast majority of nurses believed that they were practicing concordance and related principles in practice ninety nine per cent either agreed or strongly agreed that they were able to establish a relationship with patients based on and agreed or strongly agreed that they apply the principles of concordance no nurses expressed disagreement with any of these statements concordance competencies in observations of practice phase across the case study sites the practice of prescribing nurses was observed and a total of two senior nurses within a walk in center a community macmillan community nurse specialist and an ophthalmology nurse consultant the prescriptions issued covered a range of medicines and clinical conditions listed in the npef including for example creams and emollients for skin conditions eye drops contraception antibiotics for urinary tract infections using are shown in table table shows that in over three quarters of prescribing consultations nurses gave clear instructions to patients on how to take their medicines in almost three quarters of consultations nurses checked patients understanding and commitment to their treatment in two thirds of cases nurses explained the diagnosis to patients and explained medication side effects to patients or explained the risks and benefits of treatment options to patients patients were assisted in making an informed choice about the management of their health problem in of prescribing consultations observed patients views of concordance a total of patients completed post consultation ninety three patients returned postal questionnaires from a total of distributed across the study sites a number of items in the postconsultation questionnaire asked patients to reflect on their experience of concordance related elements of the interaction that was observed by the research team table shows the findings from these items their consultation with the nurse nearly all respondents felt that they had been able to fully explain their symptoms to the nurse considered that the nurse had discussed ways in which the problem could be treated and nearly three quarters of the sample considered that the decision made about the prescribed medicine was a the nurse about their medicine felt that they had been given enough information and only reported that they would have liked more information about the medicine that they had been prescribed most patients also believed that the information given to them was easy to understand and follow both groups of patients and nurses practice which found that concordance is not yet entirely borne out by findings from the observation of practice in this study the incongruence between nurses espoused theory that to which one claims an allegiance and theory in use in nurses health promotion practice has been noted elsewhere benson and latter comment that nursing students often claim an easy allegiance to principles of new paradigm health it is encouraging that in at least two thirds of the prescribing consultations observed nurses were judged to have listened to and understood the patient s beliefs and expectations explained the nature of the condition diagnosis and the rationale behind it and checked the patient s understanding and commitment to their treatment these are all considered fundamental components perspectives and share information with them this may be interpreted as a reflection of the success of policy and education on concordance approaches to medicine taking however other principles of concordance were less frequently observed as features of nurses prescribing practice in particular nurses were not always giving patients information about possible side effects of the or assisting patients in making informed choices about the management of their health problem information about side effects of medicines was reported not to have been received by a relatively large proportion of the sample of patients who completed questionnaires these findings suggest that there was less negotiation and information sharing about issues that would enable the patient to this finding is consistent with previous research examining nurses communication patterns about medicines it is also consistent with research into patients views about medication information recent research by nair et al found that although patients wanted information about side effects they expressed frustration about not getting as much information about side effects and risks as they would like interestingly nair et al also found that physicians and pharmacists in their study questioned the amount of safety and side effect information patients wanted and thought that too much information might deter patients from taking their medications in the study reported those most frequently observed in practice the name frequency timing and method of administration of the prescribed medicine taken in conjunction with the finding that information about side effects and medication interactions was less frequently received by patients this could be interpreted as being consistent with a compliance approach to practice with nurses giving and withholding information that may lead to patients making informed decisions not to take their medicines further research is required into concordance and nurses prescribing practice before it is possible to interpret whether the findings from this study are indicative of a more general move towards the integration of concordance into practice or whether the specific mixed picture of practice patients perceptions of a number of key concordance principles
nervous about having to sing in class along with music she admitted i only sing along with my music when it s playing real loud i do nt want to hear myself as a child she and her siblings were encouraged to participate in musical activities her mother and father used to sing around the house and encourage their kids to sing along she recalled enjoying those experiences because they were so much fun she later added that it was different from other experiences singing because she was not melanie had no memory of anyone ever commenting upon or providing her with feedback regarding her singing as a young child it was in early adolescence that she became aware of what she described as a lack of musical ability her first memory of someone judging her singing happened as a fifth grader auditioning for the school choir in many ways her story resembled melissa s she described her experience out i remember that i went into the room to sing for the two music teachers who were sitting at a desk with clipboards after i sang something i do nt even remember what it was i kinda knew i did nt do well i just remember them cutting me off and saying thank you like the old cliche i remember the day they posted the list on the board with all the parts and people s names i ran up to the sheet there were a lot of people already there and my here i was heartbroken it really hurt my self esteem regarding my musical ability of course i wanted to be in the group with my friends too that was the first time i ever even thought of being judged in music after all those years i am going to be judged again and i m pretty stressed about it she joined the band in high school but recalls struggling to keep pace with her peers i could nt keep up i just could nt get the beat and play the rhythms i struggled so much singing has proven as challenging a skill of her singing at present she said when the recorded music stops i realize i must be tone deaf or something because i ca nt sing the sound is awful i would love to get better but do nt know what to do with my voice i think it s hopeless her lack of successful experiences making music has contributed to her anxiety surrounding the methods course the singing itself was not the cause of her anxiety it was the knowledge that she would be formally judged based on her ability to sing she explained i have always been a straight a student and i fear that my problems with music are going to seriously affect my grade in this class i have major anxiety over not being able to do well on any of our projects or assignments that involve making music especially singing it all seems so overwhelming i know that no matter what i do or how hard i try i wo nt be able to do it it s not like another course where i can study and know the material better the mere thought of singing before her peers and in front of someone evaluating her for a grade was enough to produce sweaty palms it seemed to be a combination of factors affecting melanie first off she believed that she had no control in being able to sing this was compounded by the fact that a musical expert would her singing and a grade would be assigned i suspect that the peer group was less of a contributing factor for melanie than it was for melissa she shared her thoughts on musical ability the ability to make music is something that comes to you when you are really young you just have it or you do nt it s not like other subjects in school because way it s an inborn thing i think teachers can help people with talent get better but if you do nt have the raw materials they ca nt do much for you toward the end of the term before her song teaching assignment i asked melanie to describe the things she was doing to prepare she described this process i get all worked up about it and get pretty frustrated because i do nt think i m getting friend listen to me and give me a few comments a few of the things i ve learned in class have helped but it s still a mystery how to get my voice to sound better i try so hard i m using the rubric created to guide students in the methods course to ensure i cover all my bases with the assignment that helps a little because there are certain things i know i can do like memorize the words it lets me rest a little easier i never asked her to reveal her age but i estimated she was in her mid to upper fifties as a mother of three and grandmother of two she was enrolled at the university to live out her dream of becoming an elementary school teacher she enrolled in the music methods course which she described as her greatest obstacle in the curriculum in the last term before her graduation joan admittedly postponed enrollment as long as possible and about the possibility of exemption from the course in anticipation of the course requirements she sought information from peers who had already completed the course once they informed her that singing was required she began to experience somatic symptoms of anxiety i spent a few restless nights just thinking about it over and over of the first class meeting she said i went to the restroom right before class and was so embarrassed i had hives all over my neck i we would have to sing or something on several occasions when the class was singing i noticed red splotches on her neck and her eyes fixated on the ground
by modification of the dyeing procedure the dye in the cotton our values were after dyeing a factor of and after extraction a factor of larger than those values reported in for a reactive disperse dye with the same reactive group cosolvents aid to reduce the stripping of the pretreatment solvent from the cotton by assuring the swelling of the fiber and the accessibility moreover when the cotton is saturated increasing the mobility of the cellulose chains and therefore the rate of dye diffusion a relation between tg and the polar contribution was described by chirkova and kreitus they observed that the tg value of cellulose after being swelled with water was while with methanol tg was which is much lower than a tg of measured when the natural moisture dye to the fiber and facilitating the diffusion of the dye through the fiber the cosolvents aid solvation of the dye molecules in the and they also improve the affinity of the dye to the fiber a disadvantage however was observed using this method for protic solvents with hydroxyl groups the dye reacts with the cosolvent becoming incapable of reaction with the cotton a kinetic study of the dichlorotriazine room temperature the rate constants are a factor for and for lower than at therefore preparing the dye solution at room temperature and using it immediately for dyeing will reduce this side reaction another possibility is applying cosolvents that cannot react with the dye such as aprotic solvents however the aprotic solvents should be hydrogen bond acceptors to form so they were applied and compared with the protic solvents methanol and ethanol although methanol and ethanol are very similar solvents with regard to solubility parameters ethanol did not show any improvement compared to the dry dye powder method from the aprotic solvents acetone did not work either as pretreatment or as cosolvent the low bonding ability undoubtedly dmso provided the best coloration of cotton dmso is not only an extremely good swelling agent but also an excellent dye carrier the of dmso is not as high as that of ethanol and methanol but its is of the same order as that of water which can explain its excellent swelling power despite its good properties to penetrate in the fibers the related to a side reaction since dmso is unable to react with the dye the orientation of the dmso molecules within the cellulose chains may play a role the oxygen of the dmso is hydrogen bonded to the oh groups of cellulose as a result the orientation of the methyl groups of dmso creates an alkyl layer around the cellulose chains this alkyl layer gives a non polar character to the cotton of cotton at the same time however this alkyl layer reduces the accessibility of the cotton reactive sites to the dye due to steric hindrance dmso provides very good results as pretreatment nevertheless its demand of a rinsing step after dyeing made protic solvents a better choice as pretreatment agents as a dye carrier dmso was excellent so to increase the dye fixation ratio of wt respectively less coloration was observed but the amount of dye fixed to the cotton after extraction increased the cosolvent mixture dmso methanol gave the best value after extraction however it is lower than that observed when only methanol was used as cosolvent since the cotton was not pretreated with dmso steric hindrance on the the solvent molecules around the reaction position of dye molecules which is the cl bond in the triazinyl ring a schematic representation of these orientations is shown in figure the partial positive charge of the atom of the dmso is oriented alongside the chloride atom therefore the methyl groups create a strong steric hindrance around the with the atom chloride as a result the methyl group is positioned far from the reaction position facilitating the reaction variations on dyeing times were studied using the cosolvent mixture dmso methanol and dye rapidly diffused through the cotton increasing the dyeing time up to minutes clearly improved the fixation this indicates that the reaction of the dye and the textile the increase of the fixation after hours dyeing is in accordance with the reaction kinetics studied in our previous research the nucleophilic substitution of the first chloride with oh groups determined by showed a fourfold decreased when the reaction was done in in this study a method to enhance the dyeability of the cotton in has been found from all the investigated the use of cosolvents during the dyeing process greatly improves the coloration and fixation the cosolvent mixture dmso methanol increased the coloration of the fabric and the fixation can be improved by increasing dyeing time considering the good fixation values observed when methanol was used as cosolvent longer dyeing time should also be tested a better fixation is a method has been developed to enhance the dyeability of cotton in without chemical modification of the fabric but through physical interactions with the cotton presoaking in methanol and addition of extra cosolvent were both found to be necessary to improve coloration and fixation dissolution of the dye in a solvent before dyeing greatly increased the color strength of the dye on the cotton ineffective for fixation methanol provided a lower initial coloration but a higher total amount of dye fixed a rinse step of the fabric is not required either after the pretreatment or the dyeing for removing any trace of solvents hence the pretreatment and dyeing of cotton can be performed in the same equipment in one batch process are used for the modification of pp fibers that are aimed at improving the dyeability by dyeing fibers in a bath this causes changes in the melting and crystallization process that affect the creation of the morphological structure in blended pp pet fibers as well as the content of the crystalline phase of the pp matrix the thermal properties of modified pp fibers were evaluated by the dsc method some thermal
specified for message profile for truthful reporting to be a nash equilibrium in each state it must be that p and combining these inequalities yields pll the set of implementable value functions for the setting of ex post renegotiation the opportunity to renegotiate at date specifically following out of equilibrium message profiles causes a refinement in the set of implementable values relative to the case of interim renegotiation in both the seller effort and buyer effort versions of the example there are values of for which efficiency requires that effort be exerted yet there is no mechanism that reaches this goal that specifies no adoption when the report profile is will be renegotiated in the state one can alter the mechanism so that the renegotiated outcome is specified for without affecting the incentive conditions recall also that adoption of the advertisement package is efficient in state ex post renegotiation and trade actions as options from forcing contracts and instead use trade actions as options suppose that at date the parties write the following contract if the buyer adopts the advertisement then he must pay to the seller if the buyer does not adopt then he pays furthermore the external enforcer is instructed to ignore messages sent at date for this is not a forcing contract that is it neither compels the buyer to adopt the advertisement in both states nor buyer to not adopt the advertisement in both states instead this is an option contract but one that uses the buyer s trade action rather than the buyer s message as the way to exercise the option with the buyer has the incentive to adopt the advertisement in state and not to adopt in state from date this contract yields a payoff vector of in state and in state because the contract leads to the efficient it would not be renegotiated at either date or date the contract thus implements value in state and in state by using the trade action as an option the parties are able to reduce the detrimental effect of renegotiation at date because the trading opportunity is nondurable there is no way for the parties to reverse it through renegotiation after date the parties could use a more complicated contract that both trade actions and messages however in this example more complicated contracts cannot improve on the scope of the simple option scheme previously thus the set of implementable value functions in the case of ex post renegotiation is f do so to see this note that when one selects on the other hand in the version of the model in which the buyer makes the investment there are still values of under which the buyer cannot be given the incentive to exert effort one can easily verify this by considering date messages calculating the most severe punishment values to use for the message profiles and and using lemma for the message particular we have minz and so implementation is constrained by implying insights from the example the example shows that public action models can fail to characterize the set of implementable value functions in settings with individual trade actions considering ex post renegotiation a comparison of expressions and indicates not all implementable value functions can be implemented with forcing contracts so the public action model does not identify all of the implementable value functions when there is ex post renegotiation there then arises the question of whether the example is a proper application of a model with the ex post renegotiation it might seem that in settings with nondurable trading opportunities and that this is not the case because in the example we have ep functions with the ex post renegotiation requires nonforcing contracts general inclusion results the following result generalizes the weak inclusion relationships that the example exhibits theorem we have ep proof the relation ep follows from lemmas and and that in lemma implies condition in lemma furthermore condition in lemma implies condition in lemma because the maximum joint value exists in every state thus the conditions of lemma imply those of lemma and as a result ep finally i is clear from lemma as noted in the previous section applicability of the public action model for settings with the ex post renegotiation turns on whether ep paper with two straightforward results that give conditions under which the inclusion relationships are strict these results are intended as a bridge to future work on the properties of specific trading technologies first consider the issue of whether forcing contracts are sufficient for the analysis of settings with the ex post renegotiation that is whether public action and individual action models are equivalent in the context of ex post renegotiation forcing contracts if ep theorem we have ep if and only if for every pair of states and every there is an ex post renegotiation outcome z such that proof under the hypothesis of the theorem condition of lemma implies condition of lemma proving ep this and theorem a particular message profile with this outcome must deter player from declaring in state and it must deter player from declaring in state the punishment value is lower punishment values support a greater range of value functions next consider conditions under which the setting of ex post renegotiation and the setting of interim renegotiation imply the same set of action model with the ex post renegotiation is equivalent to the public action model with interim renegotiation theorem we have ep if and only if for all and every there is an ex post renegotiation outcome such that proof by lemmas and we can assume that in the interim renegotiation implementation condition for any given message profile the conditions for implementation with the ex post renegotiation imply the conditions for implementation with interim renegotiation proving ep this and theorem yield the result conclusion the modeling exercise presented here demonstrates the usefulness of explicitly accounting for
and cultured manners conform to the morality and attitudes of the ruling class and are themselves rooted in political domination economic exploitation and private appropriation of the land the most serious menace to the static superseded world view of the aristocratic society embodied by fairfax does not come from the of the diggers but from the dynamic meritocratic forces of bourgeois individualism captain gladman whom steel wrongly sees as a classless functions as a carrier of the new capitalist values that began to take hold in england in the wake of the civil from the beginning gladman is characterized in an extremely negative manner by other characters and by his own actions and statements symbolizing the extreme inhumanity of a system based upon private this ruthless social upstart denounces social consciousness and ideals as the luxury of the privileged and rejects conventional morality religious beliefs and the norms and values of the old order his allegiances lie neither with the governing classes nor with the plebeian masses he frankly expresses his hatred for the members of the elite whose power and influence rest solely on their inherited status at birth wealth and ownership of land disapproving of winstanley s in man s natural goodness gladman an ardent admirer of machiavelli shares hobbes pessimistic view of man and sees egoism as the underlying truth of human conduct driven by vitalist materialist instincts he unashamedly worships the principles of self interest wealth and power as his prime motives his callous inhumanity reaches its peak when he kills a child without any scruples or moral qualms a deed that even his closest allies condemn for its cruelty and brutality mirrors the pillars of society disclosing the intricate relationship between political economic and clerical power the lord of the manor francis drake does not make a single personal appearance in the novel but looms large behind the scenes ned sutton a free holding cattle farmer and john taylor a tenant and bailiff who represents the class biased judicial system also act more in the background the main focus rests on parson platt a puritan fanatic with intelligence and sincerity a staunch proponent of the theory of divine right this fine specimen of the hired clergy which disfigures and perverts religion believes in the sanctity of private property and the divinely ordained nature of the prevailing social order th is precludes the right of the lower classes to resist their rulers and however tyrannical these may be demands absolute obedience and submission to the authorities although he stands by his role to reinforce particular class interests obfuscate the crimes of the rulers teach the poor submission and deflect attention from social conflicts by preaching the belief in a hereaft er his allies consider him a failure in both his private life as a husband and his professional life as a priest the waning influence of the church on the life of the community discredits him just as much as his inability to exert his patriarchal power over his wife who openly sympathizes with and financially the diggers and to worsen the situation has a strong sexual longing for winstanley platt is sincerely upset about gladman s murder of an eight year old boy and opposes violent raids on the commune and a trading ban though he must own that rather than following an inner conviction he fears a scandal in case his wife s involvement with the diggers should become public platt appears briefly to reflect seriously on the happenings and admit that diff erent ways may lead to god but at long last he remains entrapped in the corset of political religious and social conventions and immediately dismisses his doubts like fairfax he proclaims the responsibility of the ruling class and the rich for the poor while simultaneously refusing them any legal entitlement to welfare rights and the ability to govern themselves having considered the establishment side of the conflict it is time to redirect our attention to the digger movement which turns out to be internally flawed not just externally thwarted diff erent social backgrounds political orientations and character dispositions of the colonists cause serious problems and play a decisive role in the eventual failure of their experiment in terms of social composition the diggers are extremely heterogeneous including in their midst socially uprooted members of the lower classes discharged soldiers of the new model army former leveller agitators impoverished members of the bourgeoisie eccentrics criminals who both the endanger their coherence within and bring them into disrepute among outside society the reasons which induced them to join the commune are as diverse as their origins winstanley seeks to reconstruct the whole social order on rationalist principles and intends to create the center of a new world an island of charity in the ocean of greed to use the words of the digger poet robert coster in practicing the anarchist communist rule that each contribute as he could and receive what he required he wants to break down the barriers of individualism and self help th is highly idealistic aim and the harsh realities of communal life presuppose a distinct political social and moral consciousness and a resolute will to reform oneself along the lines of superior ethical norms which many settlers do not possess refuting winstanley s basic assumption that the individual has a good or benign essence an increasing them find it hard to live up to his ambitious creed and put their individual concerns above the interests of the collective motivated by egoism and greed they do not work or else try to do as little as possible hoping to get more out of the colony than they are prepared to put in ironically it is the poorest and most deprived people who negate the communist principle hold on to the spirit of possessive individualism and generally of thinking and behavior tom haydon and john coulton demonstrate how even seriously committed members of the commune unconsciously reproduce and
these two key parameters and their relationship are crucial to understand the evolution of life histories it remains however to be empirically established how life span fecundity and population dynamics are linked in different organism groups we conducted a comparative study based on demographic data sets of populations of perennial herbs for which structured demographic models and among year natural variation in demographic attributes were available life span estimated by using an algorithm was inversely correlated with the deviance of the population growth rate from equilibrium as well as with among year population fluctuations temporal variability was greater for short lived species than for the long lived ones because fecundity was more variable than survival and relatively more important for population dynamics for the short lived species the relationship between life span and population stability suggests that selection for have played an important role in the life history evolution of plants because of its ability to buffer temporal fluctuations in population size life span is a central aspect of life history diversification and plants have the largest variation and the absolute record in longevity of all organisms from a few weeks to thousands of years life span depends on the organism s survival schedule and is these two complementary fitness components constitutes the basis for understanding the evolution of life histories the theory of and selection originally coined in a demographic context to describe different density dependent types of selection predicts that life histories can evolve toward short or long life spans as a result of variation in ecological factors impose trade offs between different fitness components that are expected to translate into different demographic patterns for example as life span increases the importance of fecundity for overall population dynamics is progressively replaced by that of survival accordingly life history variation has rate slow development and long life span at the slow end given that survival and fecundity are the two basic components of demography a strong correlation between life span and population dynamics is intuitively expected previous manuscript received july revision accepted november quintana ascencio jordano olesen rezende thompson zuidema and members of the evoca and ieg groups improved an earlier draft of the manuscript with their comments and suggestions this research was funded by two projects from the spanish ministry of science and culture author for correspondence however and it remains to be empirically established how life span and population dynamics are linked in different organism groups the aim of this study was to explore the relationship between life span and population growth rate temporal variation in population size and the relative importance and variability of survival and fecundity to this end we used available demographic included among year variation data matrix population models were used to compute population growth rate life span and the demographic importance of survival and fecundity for population growth rates we addressed the following questions is a longer life span correlated with more stable population dynamics if so to variances responsible for this relationship materials and methods the plant database we gathered data from plant demographic studies of perennial herbs published up to based on either size or stage structured matrix models we only used studies encompassing at least three yr transition due to fluctuations in environmental conditions and not to perturbations such as fire or experimental treatments like clipping overall populations of herbaceous species included in the study represented families and different habitats although they were predominantly from temperate areas of the northern hemisphere species represented by single and multiple populations were evenly distributed over the using the algorithm reported in cochran and ellner as the maximum value of conditional total life span or mean age at death conditional on reaching a given stage minus one this time invariant method is suitable for situations where environmental variability is not driven by strong stochastic disturbances a common situation in this study to reduce the influence of each particular year s survival pattern life span was estimated from the over years for each population if studies provided data for more than one population we averaged values across populations to derive one specific value life span is not a fixed specific value but depends on mortality rates that vary over space and time our estimates of life span thus include a sampling error we are however confident that they are properly ranked across species first our estimates for the shortest lived and longest lived species estimates from monitoring and real age recordings in addition ehrlen and lehtil a found in a larger database that such estimates agreed well with the estimates derived from other sources moreover we computed specific life spans in this study from matrices that averaged at least three different years and often from different populations effect of extreme environmental conditions population growth rates and temporal variability because we dealt with a sequence of years for each population the deterministic population growth rate was computed from the resulting matrix for each temporal series as each series represents a real sequence of matrices a more realistic situation than the mean matrix or the average of deterministic the resulting from unity was used to explore how far the population dynamics was from equilibrium the deviance was calculated as the absolute value of for each population for exploring population trends at the specific level when more than one population is involved mean deviance is more informative than mean mm because the average for increasing and decreasing populations could result in ff values close to than using the analytical variance of yearly deterministic t because the former was considered more relevant to the actual dynamics of populations an initial population vector containing thousands of individuals in each class was consecutively multiplied by a matrix randomly selected from the particular set of matrices from the population the resulting population size after each multiplication was used to calculate the t ratios whose variance was computed as an estimate of fluctuation in population size the seed bank was included in
of monotonic loading in a sagging moment at a point close to the reversal point a and this returning point does does depend on loading in the first half cycle variations of neutral axis depth the variation of neutral axis depth dn for sections undergoing reversed cyclic loading is more complex because of the alternation between tension and compression regardless of the sign of bending moment applied the neutral axis depth dn denotes the distance between the top concrete fiber and the neutral axis whether the area above the neutral axis is compressive or tensile depends on the curvature if the curvature if the strain of the section is entirely compressive or tensile the theoretical neutral axis is obtained from extrapolation as the location where the strain is zero for the special case of zero curvature the neutral axis depth will be undefined when the curvature changes sign the neutral axis depth dn normally alternates between positive and negative infinity the variation of neutral axis depth dn for sections in table with in situ concrete compressive under reverse cyclic loading is plotted in figure in particular the phase of loading after the first full cycle is shown by a dashed line and it normally approaches the curve if the section is loaded monotonically in the sagging moment from the beginning the maximum curvature of radian is sufficient to bring the section to the post peak stage of loading the movement of the neutral axis is different for under and over reinforced sections for example in the first half cycle the neutral axis in an under reinforced section continues going up until the sagging curvature becomes hogging whereas that in an over reinforced section tends to come down some parts of the curves are outside the range which implies that the neutral axis is outside the section and hence the strain of the section is entirely compressive or tensile even though there is no net axial force the situation of each section after going through a complete cycle is indicated by a by a dot on path d for both cases and which are under reinforced the dot is outside the range indicating overall residual tensile strains over the whole section after going through a complete cycle encroaching upon the post peak stages this is caused by the substantial residual strains in both top and bottom reinforcement it also confirms the strain measurements obtained from beams undergoing cyclic loading which tend to become increasingly tensile this phenomenon is not as significant in the over reinforced section in case because of the smaller plastic strains in steel steel stresses and the bauschinger effect to investigate the variations of steel stresses and the influence of the bauschinger effect on sections under reversed cyclic loading attention is paid particularly to the second half cycle figure shows the steel stresses of sections in table with in situ concrete strength mpa under reversed cyclic loading in loading in general reversed cyclic loading induces tensile and compressive stresses in the steel reinforcement alternately as expected only the tension reinforcement in cases and which are under reinforced yields in tension in the sagging half cycle in the over reinforced sections in case the stresses in tension reinforcement in the sagging half cycles remain elastic and are largely governed by the concurrent concrete compression which explains their resemblance to the the stress strain curve of concrete in the hogging half cycle of all three cases the compression reinforcement yields in tension as all are under reinforced in the hogging moment however in none of the cases does the tension reinforcement yield in compression this is a curious paradox for the symmetrically reinforced section in case by examining the left of figure in conjunction with figure one can infer that because of the residual tensile strain of the tension tension reinforcement after the first half cycle the tension reinforcement actually carries compressive stress with a net tensile strain in the second half cycle and therefore it cannot reach yielding in compression figure shows the moment curvature relationship of sections in table with in situ concrete strength of mpa under reversed cyclic loading in which the results obtained when the bauschinger effect is taken into account and ignored are respectively denoted by solid and dashed lines the variations of the corresponding steel stresses are shown in figure in all of the cases examined the bauschinger effect reduces the steel stresses and hence the moment that a section carries when it is loaded in reversed curvature however when the reversed curvature is further increased well into the post peak stage the moment and steel stresses approach those obtained by the bilinear stress strain model for steel which ignores the bauschinger effect the curves the curves shown by the dashed line can therefore be regarded as envelopes and in some cases the lines serve as asymptotes to the solid curve taking into account the bauschinger effect conclusions the complete nonlinear behavior of rc beams under non reversed and reversed cyclic loading is investigated special attention has been paid to the moment curvature relationship that covers both the pre peak and post peak stages the complete moment curvature curves under monotonic loading in sagging and hogging moments give the envelope for cyclic response it confirms that the moment curvature relationship under complex cyclic loading is path dependent however when the load reversal continues into the post peak stage the response approaches that of the monotonic envelope the variation of neutral axis depth during cyclic loading depends on whether the section is under or over reinforced reversed cyclic loading generally creates overall residual tensile strains in rc rc sections and this is especially significant in under reinforced sections the bauschinger effect of steel is insignificant to sections undergoing non reversed cyclic loading but it becomes notable for reversed cyclic loading the tension stiffening of concrete is notable only at the service stage and is more notable for under reinforced sections vs construction oriented sdesa ming
to change the volume of the sample decreased the coefficients of consolidation compressibility and the permeability were calculated according to head further increase the density the permeability of the material decreased as the load increased because the pores within the soil skeleton reduced fig hence the coefficient of compressibility had a greater effect on the permeability than the rate at which it consolidated alcoa s untreated bauxite residue mud had previously recorded a permeability of approximately s cooling consolidation tests with a global digital system instruments triaxial apparatus without side drains it was found that the side drains used in these tests affected the coefficient of compressibility resulting in the discrepancy between the results the bitterns mud was found to be the most permeable material and hence should consolidate well the consolidation parameters because different loads were applied to the samples for each stage these values suggest that as loading increased the permeability of the soil structure decreased for the carbonated and untreated samples which is in accordance with the findings of press density measurements and mud deposit efficiencies a major factor in the selection of a viable method of neutralizing volume will be required fig illustrates the reduction in voids ratio of the different mud types as overburden material was added previous testing performed by cooling and elias suggested a logarithmic relationship could be used to compare the material density to overburden pressure in this project correlation coefficients ranging from to layers varying from the surface level to depth kpa overburden pressure as the experimental data in general was limited to this range although the curves for the bitterns and untreated material follow a similar profile indicating both samples consolidated at a similar rate there was a significant difference in the voids ratio of bit terns to untreated mud the bitterns material contained approximately possible for bitterns mud to reach similar densities to the other samples if the height of the stack was increased but an accurate measurement of the stability and strength of the material at depth was required to confirm this the lower deposit density for a bitterns treated mud is a significant drawback as greater volumes are needed to store equivalent tonnages of mud the carbonated samples had similar initial densities to the bitterns the voids ratio results indicated that the carbonated mud eventually reached a similar final density to the untreated mud table summarizes the density parameters for the three different mud samples a relationship between the moisture content and the undrained shear strength su was determined from the cu triaxial tests fig an exponential relationship was again used to fit the the unconsolidated undrained triaxial tests allowing additional points to be plotted on the lower region of the curves fig illustrates the long term strength gain caused by a density increase in the mud the results obtained for the untreated and carbonated residue mud are similar to those obtained from the field trials during the in situ winter trials the bitterns mud did not however the laboratory consolidation tests indicated that there was a strong correlation between the two properties the bitterns material showed an initial rapid gain in strength presumably due to the chemical change of the red mud but will also gain strength due to density increase the results indicated that the bond was strong enough to prevent evaporative suction from winter weather conditions but permeability characteristics of a full deposit there may also be scope to improve the deposit efficiency of carbonated and bitterns mud by optimizing the process to mix the bitterns and carbon dioxide into the mud to improve the initial mud density optimizing the relative amounts of bit terns and carbonation may also lead to improved rheological characteristics and drainage of liquor through mud layers were investigated upon for three different material types namely the untreated mud carbonated mud and bitterns mud the following conclusions may be based on the findings of this study the carbonated mud gained strength more rapidly than the untreated mud in the summer trials the average strength of within the same time frame so a longer drying period would be needed before a new mud layer could be laid above it safely for the winter trials the rate of density increase was highest for the untreated mud followed by the carbonated mud with the bitterns mud having a negligible rate of moisture loss to either initial consolidated drainage or evaporation the bitterns mud had solids content almost than the untreated and untreated samples during winter vary considerably from the summer characteristics winter untreated and carbonated samples took twice as long to reach similar solids contents as the summer samples a relationship between the moisture content and shear strength for the different mud types was derived and this monitoring material strength progressively over the duration of a drying cycle the lines of regression from the mohr circle plots had relatively similar slopes ranging from for the carbonated and untreated samples to for the bitterns sample the cohesion values are insignificant kpa for all samples and the angle of friction is large when compared to other soils the evaporated to achieve high strengths the cycle times required for both the carbonated and bitterns mud during the summer will be less than for the untreated mud of constructed comparison of pulse velocity and impact echo findings to properties of thin disks from a fire damaged slab in situ nondestructive evaluation nde techniques and laboratory testing of specimens taken from cores extracted from the fire damaged slab this paper discusses and compares results of in situ pulse velocity and impact echo testing with dynamic elastic modulus and air permeability index test results of mm in thick disks sawed from concrete cores removed from selected areas of the damaged slab both the nde techniques and the laboratory testing of thin disks identified the presence of damage as a result of the fire analysis of the relatively thin concrete specimens permitted assessment of the presence and degree of
assembly sector handling sector and storage sector the coordination by the fmc manager computer the hierarchical structure implemented in the fmc is shown in fig messages cannot be sent from a higher hierarchical layer to an inferior layer without passing the intermediate layers in the fmc three communication types were used ethernet in the manufacturing sector and storage sector in the assembly sector and usb in the handling sector shown in fig if necessary it is possible to develop new applications using other communication types the layered level of the proposed architecture has inherent benefits this hierarchical structure allows adding new sectors in the fmc in an easy and efficient way the new sectors can also use several equipments from different manufacturers for this we only need to add a computer in the fourth layer and to develop software for a new sector we can use several software developed and presented in sections iii after that we need to update the software in the central computer a manufacturing sector the manufacturing sector is controlled by software developed in builder and has the following functions buffer as shown in fig control of the abb robot is carried out by win ethernet robot control control of the mill and lathe is carried out by dnc and the robotics interfaces were used as redundancy fig shows the developed software for controlling the manufacturing sector this software has a server that allows remote control of the manufacturing sector and an assembly table responsibility for the control and coordination of this sector falls on as shown in fig in this sector we used the presented in section iii handling sector control of the handling sector is carried out through the and of a usb kit as shown in fig the usb kit the usb kit fig shows the developed software that controls the handling sector this software has a server application to allow remote control of the handling sector through the ethernet storage sector control of the storage sector is carried out by as shown in fig fig shows the developed software to control this control of the abb robot is carried out by win ethernet robot control functions procedures and events fmc manager the central computer controls all of the fmc production connecting the various computers and data communication networks which allows real time control and supervision of the operations collecting and processing information flow from the various resources fig presents the pc in this pc the first three layers of the hierarchical structure presented in fig are implemented engineering planning and scheduling all the sectors in the developed fmc have a supervision task and the fmc manager pc has a main supervision task for example the has the supervision task for the manufacturing sector has the supervision task for the assembly sector and guaranteeing tolerance of failures we developed one supervision task for each sector because the sectors are independent and if some problem happens in one sector the others do not need to stop completely for example if one machine in the manufacturing sector fails the needs to say that immediately because the abb robot cannot load or unload the main supervision task in the fmc manager pc and this task activates one alarm to call the operator to restore the normality in the manufacturing sector in this situation the manufacturing sector does not need to stop completely because the other machine can work this is one example of guaranteeing tolerance of failures and safety in the manufacturing layer planning and scheduling activities as shown in fig the first layer contains the engineering and product design where the product is designed and developed with cad cam software the outputs of this layer are the drawings and the bill of materials the second layer is process planning here the process plans obtain these nc code also with cad cam software after that we put the product design process plan nc code and so on of each job in the products database see fig whenever we have a new product it is necessary to put all the information about this job in the products database fig shows part of the nc code of the selected job in fig if we select this job to be manufactured in the fmc the fmc manager pc needs to the machine the third layer is scheduling the process plans together with the drawing the bill of materials and the customer orders are the input to scheduling the output of scheduling is the release of the order to the manufacturing floor we used genetic algorithms to solve scheduling problems in the fmc some scheduling problems are very difficult to solve but the scheduling problems studied and implemented in fmc were single machine scheduling problem flow shop scheduling problem and job shop scheduling problem we classify scheduling problems according to four parameters the parameter is the number of jobs is the number of machines describes the flow pattern and describes the performance measure a software tool called hybrid and flexible genetic algorithm to solve scheduling problems in the fmc the hybflexga was coded in language and fig shows its architecture its architecture is composed of three modules interface preprocessing and scheduling module the interface module with the user is very important for the jobs and so forth this interface allows the connection between the user and the scheduling module facilitating data entry and the visualization of the solutions for the scheduling module fig shows the interface window the inputs of the preprocessing module are the problem type and the scheduling parameters the instance of the scheduling fig this module preprocesses the input information and then sends the data to the next module the scheduling module in scheduling module we implemented the ga shown in fig the objective of the scheduling module is to give the optimal solution of any scheduling problem if the optimal solution is not found the ga gives the best solution found the engineering layer production plans assemblies and product tests the planning
when many due iterations have to be performed we observe that by reducing the ga network design solutions the ga solution procedure uses a smaller sample size because of the computational time involved in arriving at the high capacity network design solutions within a pre specified number of generations to determine the quality of the solutions obtained for the rndp using the ga approach we propose an near optimal capacity values we test this new capacity added network on a larger sample size of samples to determine the expected value and standard deviation of the tstt the intuition behind doing this evaluation is to test how well the rndp solution obtained in table performs at a higher sample size and compare the differences the improvements from ga perform very well on a higher sample size in terms of the expected travel time and the standard deviation of the travel time however this insight cannot be generalized for all transportation networks because of network specific characteristics and the sample size used to perform the evaluation tractable model formulations solution methodologies and advanced computational techniques are critical for developing effective robust network solutions the model formulation and solution approach presented in this article provide a means for accounting for uncertainty in network design decisions and supporting explicit decisions on the trade off between expected costs against risk multi objective model where the planner s objective is to minimize the weighted objective of the expected value and the standard deviation of the network total travel time and the user s route choice is dependent on user equilibrium under finite scenarios of uncertain demand an efficient solution approach using agais proposed for solving the rndp the key concept of the solution process as demonstrated the proposed approach can produce optimal solutions with a reasonable computational time and overhead cost the main contribution of this work is in formulating the rndp and in proposing an evolutionary structure for solving the problem in a mathematical programming framework furthermore the problem has been solved by adjusting suitable system node link network the ga method produces similar results to the deterministic continuous ndp results obtained by enumeration furthermore in the link example network of harker and friesz the ga approach produced very close results as compared to the results in the literature second for the nguyen dupius network the solution of the rndp using a ga heuristic time variability the computational time was however high and it is difficult to solve large networks with the proposed approach for the improvement of the rndp models this issue requires further research in incorporating a variety of real life networks in the future in addition efficient approximation procedures such as sampling procedures and the single point approximations as a test parameter lithium nitrite s corrosion inhibiting effect was nondestructively monitored by embedding a corrosion sensor in each specimen the result of this study came out that the minimum effective dosage of lithium nitrite is in terms of no cl sensor corrosion occurs when the ratio of the measured sensor resistance to the initial sensor resistance increases from to and the onset time and degree of corrosion in reinforcement bar can be non destructively monitored by measuring the resistance using the sensor for the correlation between and the percentage of the corrosion area carbonation not only curtails their service lives but also entails considerable repair cost to repair the defects appropriate measures to prevent structures from corrosion are therefore necessary for the health of these structures calcium nitrite and lithium nitrite are generally used as corrosion inhibitors for ready mixed concrete and repair materials respectively in the construction industry unlike calcium nitrite particularly known to be suitable for corrosion inhibiting characteristics in resisting carbonation and chloride attack when accelerating hardening process was not used and when a high concentration of more cement was added by weight however the study on the corrosion inhibiting properties of lithium nitrite have not been sufficiently conducted determination of its adequate dosage its practical application meanwhile the effect of these materials on the corrosion of reinforcement bars has been evaluated using destructive methods in which concrete specimens are placed to accelerated corrosion and cleft to measure the degree of reinforcement corrosion however it is extremely difficult to measure the effect of corrosion inhibitors in actual structures their electrical resistance due to the corrosion in iron have recently been developed these sensors may enable the non destructive evaluation on the effect of corrosion inhibitors by embedding those in concrete structures for monitoring the corrosion induced changes in the electrical resistance in this study accelerated corrosion tests on reinforcement of lithium nitrite corrosion inhibitors which are anticipated to produce the high performance of corrosion inhibiting effect on reinforced concrete structures the molar ratio of nitrite ions to chloride ions was employed as a test parameter also a new non destructive test method evaluating the effect of lithium nitrite corrosion inhibitors which corrosion sensors were embedded in shows the composition of specimens which contains test parameters and levels mortar specimens containing different chloride contents and nitrite chloride ion molar ratios were tabulated to evaluate chloride induced reinforcement corrosion and the effect of a lithium nitrite corrosion inhibitor in the table materials and mortar proportioning by weight and water cement ratio was first grade sodium chloride was used as the chloride and lithium nitrite was used as the corrosion inhibitor respectively sr round bars of mm in diameter and mm in length were used as the reinforcement bars fig shows photographs representing the shape of corrosion sensors and their sizes of which size of mm mm mm was prepared with a round bar of mm in diameter that was embedded in the center of the specimen as shown in fig both the ends of a round bar by mm in each length were coated with the epoxy to prevent those from corrosion a corrosion sensor was embedded in each specimen at a distance of mm from the surface of the reinforcement bar
not to mention those that trigger in the beholder a sense of the life cycle poles and inspired ecstatic ones that would suddenly erupt throwing the calm surface of supreme cultural productions into turmoil obsessed with problems in cultural memory warburg early in the twentieth century spent a lifetime building a library that would bear out his beliefs a collection whose passions and commitments continue to intrigue thinkers in the twenty first it would be difficult to the connoisseur berenson with whom we began than the cultural historian warburg nevertheless in their writings and lectures both in very different ways were motivated by the sorrows of loss about what we do not know what we cannot understand the kind of historical attitude satirized with justification by nietzsche but given psychological understanding with justification by riegl understanding met its match in a world that denied access to its secrets in or about december human character changed if death was still an exotic member of late nineteenth century thinking as thomas harrison noted by it had received full citizen s rights henceforth in that tortured age if anything was to be explained by its philosophers and historians they had to go underground so kinds of narratives were at work in their fascination with ruins death and time gone by the romantics had gestured toward the existence of melancholy but its scientific grounding came with the work of freud at that historical moment viennese freudianism and the warburg library in hamburg together embodied a new field of cultural inquiry it was not easy however for the intelligent proponents of renunciation took place and that s where melancholy who might have been expected to exit the stage of art history as science makes an entrance into my argument once again this privileged aspect of freudian and post freudian psychoanalysis i hope might help us think about what was and is at stake in the evolution of our discipline to art history it is my intention to think one thing with another as nietzsche might say because these two fields of knowledge developed at the same time and their evolution along parallel tracks can intimate if not reveal possible ways of thinking about shared understandings it makes sense to consider these cultural discourses in tandem what might psychoanalytic thinking art historical thought that has always run alongside it as a historiographer of art history i am interested as much in the discipline s renunciations displacements fantasies and oblivions as in its intellectual history proper while some scholars have written an art history of psychoanalysis mine is not an essay the scrim through which the writing of art history must pass before it is crisply visible on center stage i invoke a particular strain of psychoanalysis only to lend me words and concepts that can help to make apparent the sources of the poetry and perhaps the joys and sorrows of my own was the crucial conundrum that the therapist must penetrate mourning over the loss of something that we have loved or admired seems so natural to the layman that he regards it as self evident but to psychologists mourning is a great riddle one of those phenomena which cannot themselves be explained but to which other obscurities can be traced back provoked by the devastation our high opinion of the riches of civilization has lost nothing from our discovery of their fragility although freud would not hesitate to alter or modify ideas during his long career his fundamental interest in the ways the past can cause pain in the present was a stable component of his psycho analysis not long before his beloved daughter sophie died in an influenza he is intent on distinguishing two reactions to the loss of the object either in actuality or in fantasy objecthood of course can be conferred on an actual person who has died but it also can refer to a phantasmatic thing an abstraction in the suffering individual mournings regularly the reaction to the loss of a loved person or to the loss of some abstraction which has taken the place of one such as one s country the one left behind according to freud is normal natural nonpathological the survivor of necessity works through the anguish and emerges on the other side a changed and sorrowful person certainly but not a self tortured one on the other hand the distinguishing mental features of melancholia are in some way related to an object loss which is withdrawn loss that is unconscious in mourning it is the world which has become poor and empty in melancholia it is the ego itself the hurt that the crushed state of melancholia inflicts on its victim cannot help but diminish his or her connectedness to the world outside once the shadow of the object fell upon the ego all is lost the person in melancholy is lost to himself or herself the work of melancholy is to preserve oneself as lost as not worthy of being found according to karl abraham freud s fellow explorer in mapping this uncharted psychic topography melancholy is an archaic kind of mourning the melancholic is no longer a romantic figure entrapped in narcissistic regression he or she resists any consolation and inhabits a surround devoid of affect and feeling other than that of a compulsive desire to repeat the the dynamics of the life instincts at the very beginning of consciousness a permanent division is inscribed in the psyche and an eternal yearning is put into play one group of instincts thanatos moves fonvard so as to reach the final aim of life as quickly as possible but when a particular stage in the advance has been reached the other group eros jerks back to a certain point freudian theory mourning follows a loss that has really occurred asserts agamben in melancholia not only is it unclear what object has been lost self or other it is uncertain that one can speak of a loss at all as freud graphically and disturbingly asserts the complex of melancholia behaves like an open wound
reflected recruitment of motor units with progressively higher firing rates the rapid increases in motor unit firing rates these findings were very similar to the results from previous studies that have used intramuscular emg electrodes to examine the motor control strategy that is used to increase isometric torque in the biceps brachii muscle in addition it has been suggested that decreases in mmg during a sustained isometric units collectively the results from these studies indicated that the frequency content of the mmg signal provides information regarding the global motor unit firing rate furthermore elderly subjects and individuals with a neuromuscular disease demonstrate lower frequency mmg signals could potentially influencemmg frequency by directly reducing motor unit firing rates and or interfering with the processes of muscle fiber contraction and relaxation resulting in fusion of motor unit twitches at lower firing rates there are also studies that have suggested that mmg frequency is not influenced by changes in motor unit firing and or intramuscular fluid pressure could influence any relationship between mmg mpf and motor unit firing rates in addition mmg mpf does not always increase with velocity during maximal concentric or eccentric isokinetic muscle actions and it has been suggested that the fiber type composition of the muscle being investigated may influence supports the contention that the mmg power density spectrum contains information regarding motor unit firing rates this information must be interpreted with caution however because there are many issues regarding the relationship between mmg frequency and motor unit firing rates that have yet to be identified furthermore there are also limitations due to the intrinsic mechanical nature of the mmg signal a summation of the mechanical activities from the unfused activated motor units this summation is nonlinear however throughout most of the range of motor unit firing rates as well as during voluntary isometric muscle actions at relatively low torque levels therefore the contribution of an individual motor unit to the surface mmg is influenced by the degree to which its the mmg signal have suggested that any information in the frequency domain regarding motor unit firing rates is probably qualitative rather than quantitative in nature and likely reflects the global motor unit firing rate rather than the firing rate of one particular motor unit since the frequency domain of the mmg signal seems to regard has proven difficult based on the existing literature however future studies may be able to target two general areas to elucidate the relationship between mmg frequency and motor unit firing rates modeling the mmg signal and additional indirect studies that examine the mmg patterns of response under various physiological conditions for example studies by farina et al signal that has provided useful insight into the abilities and limitations of surface emg similar work with the mmg signal may be equally valuable in contrast examining the mmg frequency domain responses under physiological conditions that are known to affect motor unit firing rates may continue to provide valuable evidence for example administering of the mmg signal and motor unit firing rates furthermore increasingly sophisticated signal processing techniques such as the continuous wavelet transform may provide more precision when tracking frequency changes in the mmg signal thus continually reassessing the time and frequency domains of the mmg signal may be necessary not only for modeling purposes these investigations will be useful not only for identifying the exact origin of the mmg signal but also for assessing the uses limitations of mmg diagnostic imaging guideline for musculoskeletal complaints in adults an evidence based approach part upper extremity disorders practice guidelines to assist chiropractors and other primary care providers in decision making for the appropriate use of diagnostic imaging for upper extremity disorders methods a comprehensive search of the english and french language literature was conducted using a combination of subject headings and keywords the quality of the citations was assessed using the quality of diagnostic accuracy studies the appraisal of guidelines research and evaluation and the stroke prevention and educational awareness diffusion evaluation tools the referral guidelines for imaging coordinated by the european commission served as the initial template the first draft was sent for an external review a delphi panel composed of international experts on the topic of musculoskeletal disorders in chiropractic radiology clinical sciences and research was invited to review and propose recommendations on the indications for the guidelines were pilot tested and peer reviewed by practicing chiropractors and by chiropractic and medical specialists recommendations were graded according to the strength of the evidence dissemination and implementation strategies are discussed results recommendations for diagnostic imaging guidelines of adult upper extremity disorders are provided supported by over primary and secondary citations the overall quality of available literature is low however delphi panelists completed of rounds reaching over on all recommendations peer review by specialists reflected high levels of agreement and perceived ease of use of guidelines and implementation feasibility conclusions the guidelines are intended to be used in conjunction with sound clinical judgment and experience and should be updated regularly future research is needed to validate their content literature search independent literature assessment public website second external review final draft and grading of the recommendations and dissemination and implementation details of this study are published focus these diagnostic imaging guidelines concern adult current and future health care providers to make appropriate use of imaging studies providing indications for the need of imaging studies according to current literature and expert consensus and assisting in optimizing the utilization of limited available resources these proposed guidelines are intended to reduce unnecessary radiation exposure and the of care target users setting intended users of the guidelines are chiropractors and other primary health care providers prescribing diagnostic imaging studies the setting in which these guidelines may be used include private clinics outpatient clinics and hospital emergency departments pregnant patients are excluded from these guideline recommendations developers the proposed guidelines are developed from the results of distinct phases overseen by a research team composed of the investigators with postgraduate education from independent teaching institutions the guidelines
is less a matter of who they are than what they do that is a notion which hinges on a separation between private and public and which refuses integration moreover it also accounts for the very possibility of coming out after all a quite ridiculous concept in most other forms of oppression this is what enables homosexuals to pass as straight with an ease that is extraordinarily rare for other oppressed groups this is so it is not surprising that those students whose developing sexual orientation falls outside the norm will tend to avoid a queer label when invited to represent their identity in art and design they are unlikely for example to deploy symbols of same sex couples and alternative family structures whereas students who feel comfortable despite its rhetoric of self expression to parade a queer identity would seem courageous some might say foolhardy just so in the wider community of the school where gay lesbian bisexual and transgender students and staff are subject to harassment including taunts ridicule censorship even physical assault a risk to normative values in a others but at risk from others another possible school refuser or suicide given this scenario evasion or denial would seem a more comfortable strategy for students and teachers a ritualistic performance of heteronormativity leaving the onlooker none the wiser and yet within the framework of freedom yet to deny an identity that others consider both the essential and peculiar unwitting yet willful is somehow not to play the game especially within a confessional culture where accountability is a prime virtue why should this be so foucault and the confessional discourses during the seventeenth century despite new discretions and expurgations the priest s duty was to unveil not just the sexual acts of the penitent but also their desires and in this way there was a proliferation of discourses on sex everything was to be recorded in the form of speech which transformed through this process into which to survey and regulate their desires saying it all was to take on different forms as europe developed towards secularized bourgeois governance in the eighteenth century for example rationalists found ways to accommodate sex within the emerging and consolidating discourses of enlightenment sex was not something one by analytical in other words sex from childhood to old age was now objectified and policed not just for the salvation of the soul but for the public good it was as much an economic and political imperative as it was a moral one it was therefore necessary to establish and perform sufficiently serious public and pedagogic those sexualities that did not conform to the procreative practices of heterosexual marriage to the strict economy of reproduction were often denied or marginalized hidden within spaces where illegitimate or perverse voices could be heard and studied scientifically or used for profit however as a discourse of illicit pleasures and a culture of sexual heterogeneities the visual arts were one site where these codifications took place where the diversity of human sexuality was recorded and named from illustrations in the early nineteenth century of the polymorphously perverse fantasies of de sade to the photographic record of hysterics at the st saltpetriere clinic within the european academies the patriarchal bastions of national and bourgeois morality the study of the female nude gradually supplanted the male to become the form that signalled the highest purest most disinterested practice a usurpation in which any sexual significance was disavowed this status was immediately questioned by artists from both within and outside the academy s walls as of the demi monde the harem and the brothel depictions not of modesty or propriety but of excess concupiscence and degeneration towards the end of the nineteenth century the supposed destruction wrought by such women on the morals and health of the youth of the day was joined by the predatory menace of the newly named homosexual who unlike his vigorous into public consciousness it should be remembered that before the it was not the person that is a homosexual whose sexual identity was illegal it was the doing of so called bestial or depraved acts and these could be practiced by any person only with the coming of sexology as foucault reveals were these acts deemed inherent to a particular of physical exercise already instigated in schools mid century to counter the unhealthy energies of pubescent desire were intensified for boys and the image of the athlete joined with that of the gentleman as the role model to which to aspire for girls a different regime was in place where they were largely educated at home for a role in preparation for private and speaking and making visible thus valorising the power knowledge relations that both proscribe and produce pleasure the pleasure that comes of exercising a power that questions monitors watches spies searches out palpates brings to light and on the other hand the pleasure that kindles at having to evade this power flee from it fool it or travesty it the power that lets pleasure of showing off scandalizing or resisting here then is the game the to ing and fro ing between secrecy and revelation fear and trust ridicule and reciprocity it should be remembered that in freudian terms perversion constitutes the norm the base line of the pleasure seeking individual who only gradually muses theorists such as foucault wish to have their cake and eat it foucault espousing both an opposition to oppression and a paean to the pleasures of power no doubt a such a diagram could represent both a utopian and dystopian perspective on some of the sacred processes artefacts of art education at secondary level so that depending on your hermeneutic position the very same phenomenon could be viewed as positive negative or ambivalent for example the sketchbook a place within specific social situations to put it another way an identity is something these identities fluctuate in relation to space from the familial through the local to the global and in relation to time from infancy to death producing a
to information risk due to changes in their operations and business environment using the fama french three factor model augmented by an ir factor timing of change in the factor loadings of the ir factor our analysis indicates that the shift in the ir factor loadings occurs months prior to dividend initiation announcements and months prior to dividend decrease announcements this is consistent with investors anticipating the dividend change and the change in firms financial reporting quality we then adopt a firm specific regression increase firms experience a distinct drop in their ir factor loadings this result suggests that the pricing of information risk for these firms has decreased similarly we find that dividend decrease firms experience a distinct increase in their ir factor loadings because firms underlying operations likely have changed surrounding dividend changes it is important to control for such operating risk changes smb to capture this operating risk however to the extent that the fama french three factors do not fully capture the risk associated with firms operations such changes could be reflected in the ir factor returns formed on aq to address this issue we add an additional control for underlying operating risk by forming portfolio returns based on cash flow volatility measured using quarterly data and use these mimicking portfolio returns both as for operating risk in our time series tests in addition we also add a further control for growth using hedge portfolio returns formed on the basis of the earnings to price ratio our results are largely robust to these procedures despite the above controls there still exists the possibility that the aq based information risk measure is confounded by the changes to underlying information risk based on a different earnings quality metric vr in place of the aq based ir factor in our asset pricing regressions value relevance is less correlated with cash flow volatility but still reasonably approximates our conceptual construct of the precision of publicly available accounting information results are robust to this procedure in addition to the above tests we also provide corroborating evidence increase and dividend initiation observations we present descriptive evidence that the detrended aq metric decreases for dividend increase and initiation firms in addition we document a decrease in pin an alternative information quality measure for dividend initiation and increase firms and an increase in vr for dividend initiation firms we also find that the dispersion in analyst earnings and long term growth forecasts both decrease for dividend increase and and increase substantially for dividend decrease firms similar results are obtained on the standard deviation of returns the changes in standard deviations of cash flows returns on assets and sales are all of the predicted direction but not always significant however we hasten to add that since this descriptive evidence is also consistent with potential changes in firms operating risks such evidence cannot be meaningfully interpreted in combination with the results on our other tests that seek to control for operating risk changes overall our results suggest that the market perception of firms information risk changes around dividend changes however such a shift occurs months before the dividend announcements these findings together with the existing controversy over whether dividends convey information about future earnings are associated with decreases in the pricing of information risk in addition to other systematic risk changes enhances our understanding of the circumstances that accompany dividend changes however the dividend change setting offers us both a unique opportunity as well as a unique challenge in testing for changes in information risk the challenge is that operating risk and information risk are inherently intertwined and operating risk likely changes surrounding dividend changes events in addition our understanding of what drives operating the smb and hml factors in the fama french three factor model are empirically driven and not theoretically based thus despite all our efforts to rule out the possibility that changes surrounding the loadings on our ir factor returns are attributable to operating risk changes we cannot completely rule out the possibility that our ir factor returns are capturing changes in the operating risks of dividend change firms we thus urge readers to use caution in interpreting our results future research examining other change events for example changes in accounting policy and restatements which are less confounded with operating risk of information risks the research on the relation between accounting quality and expected returns a nontrivial contentious undertaking is in its infancy stage most papers in this research area use easley and ara as their theoretical base other researchers have started to build alternative theoretical models exploring the impact of accounting information on firms cost of capital more theoretical research can achieve a better understanding of the link between accounting information information risk and the cost of capital the usefulness of book to market and roe expectations for explaining uk stock returns flows discounted at the expected return and book value proxies for future cash flows building on this perspective we develop a log linear model which includes expectations of future bm and roe in addition to current bm as explanatory variables for future stock returns we show that these three variables explain a significant part of uk cross sectional stock returns and that they remain highly statistically significant after including additional risk proxy variables this supports relevance of fundamental valuation based firm characteristics for explaining stock returns and fundamental valuation based firm characteristics for explaining stock returns and indicates their potential usefulness for predicting future stock returns introduction the finding of fama and french that size and book to market had greater explanatory power for future security returns than estimates of capm beta has stimulated a large literature concerned with the role of financial and accounting based ratios as predictors of security return performance explanations for the role of book to market the role of book to market and size as predictors of stock returns have focused on a risk proxy argument and a market mis pricing argument in addition a further
was as current years ago as it is now as artists and theorists still struggle to develop truly interactive rather than only participatory narratives a glance back to the days of the bauhaus the forthcoming interactive installation polyalphabet takes seriously moholynagy s suggestions to create an interactive polycinema which will explore john cage s an alphabet a text consisting of short scenes constructed of spoken words originally organized according audio visual version of cage s an alphabet through associational play following literary visual or aural themes and motifs this project will test the ideas advanced above and enable a clearer identification of those features of moholynagy s polycinema that qualify it as a precursor to and viable inspiration for new kinds of contemporary social changes in the paris metropolis abstract the category of gentrification has only recently began to be used for the study of french cities the process through which working class neighborhoods became areas of upper middle class residence was earlier discussed as embourgeoisement largely referred to as state intervention and seen as the effect of the permanent preference for central locations of higher categories the detailed empirical the paris metropolis shows that such changes have indeed been occurring steadily over the last decades but that the largest number of neighborhoods experiencing that change of social profile are to be found in the first ring of banlieues and not in the central city the analysis of the social profile of gentrifiers shows that it differs substantially between areas three main types of processes are identified the first is the expansion of upper class areas into adjacent working with an influx mainly of private sector professionals managers and engineers the second is upward social mobility of working class areas spatially and socially distinct from upper class ones and the third which is found in a minority of cases only resembles more the dominant model of gentrification with a substantial contribution of professionals in public scientific media and artistic occupations an abundant literature about gentrification but contributions on french cities are quite scarce the word itself has no translation in french and the english word has only been used in the last ten years often with accompanying health warnings and sandwiched between quotation marks this does not mean that the issue of upper and middle classes replacing the many researchers have stressed the significant social change that was under way with the constantly increasing weight of upper class categories in the population of central paris and the decrease of that of blue collar workers the first work of reference on the subject has been that of coing which plays a similar landmark role to that of glass for london although it is a monograph of one neighborhood only subsequently various other process of the social restructuring of the paris metrop olis as characterized by an embourgeoisement of the central part of the city social movements in and after protested against the renovation deportation of the working class and lefebvre captured that spirit in his advocacy for the right to the city it is the case however that the detailed analysis of social change and practices in developed as widely as it has for british and north american cities the most often cited book after coing s is chalvon demersey s work on the neighborhood around rue daguerre in the arrondissement of paris but it is bidou reflecting on her own similar work on the aligre neighborhood in the arrondissement then on the old center of amiens who first explicitly took up the themes and vocabulary of gentrification a piece by neil smith in her edited book on retours en ville is this more limited attention paid to the issue of gentrification in french urban research a sign of its underestimation as donzelot has argued or of a different way of dealing with it are the schemas of analysis of gentrification developed in the uk usa or canada relevant for the understanding of social changes in the paris metropolis what is the scope of processes corresponding to gentrification the significant differences the answers to these questions are discussed in this paper on the basis of the results of a detailed empirical analysis of urban social changes in the paris metropolis during the the state embourgeoisement and gentrification the processes through which upper and upper middle classes have come to live in particularly public authorities invested heavy resources juridical financial technical to demolish large decaying housing areas some of them designated as slums to be cleared since the beginning of the century and to replace them with modern housing neighborhoods with good infrastructure and then let private developers take advantage of those dramatic changes to offer housing for middle class and upper class customers lojkine topalov these analyses predate the rent gap theory developed by smith with a key difference being the more central role played by the state the cases of urban improvement programmes whether they focused on historical areas like marais or were simply housing improvement were analyzed in a similar perspective french researchers have given a key role to the state when english or american ones saw first of all a market dynamic whether they favored a supply side approach like smith or a demand side one based on cultural transformations like zukin or ley it has to be noted however that there was a significant difference of period and conjuncture the aforementioned works on paris were part of the neo marxist wave of urban research which developed in the late a time when the state was seen as the key actor in capitalist urban policies anglo american research on gentrification developed more in the at a time when neoliberal policies took the lead in the usa with reagan and in the uk with thatcher and when the market was promoted as the central process at the same time france had elected a socialist president the rise of neoliberalism was delayed and slower
are slightly regressive those taxes constitute about one third of tax revenue in those countries because france and the united kingdom have very small local taxes this exclusion of indirect taxes from our analysis is comparable to excluding the local and state taxes in the us case which are also seen as slightly regressive estimates for france were computed using tax law and did not take into account the new income tax cuts recently announced by the french government international and historical comparison of tax rates sources computations based on income tax return statistics united kingdom computations based on atkinson notes see piketty and saez for complete details on methodology note that the top group in the united kingdom is us numbers growth french numbers are based on tax law applied to incomes numbers are based on tax law applied to incomes and french computations exclude the corporate income tax figure tax rates in france the united kingdom and the united states in and today tax rates in france and the united kingdom include individual income taxes payroll taxes and estate and wealth taxes but exclude corporate income taxes in the united kingdom the two top groups are and conclusion this paper has discussed the progressivity of the us federal tax system its of the us federal tax system at the top of the income distribution has declined dramatically since the for example the top percent of earners paid over percent of their income in federal taxes in while they paid only about percent of their income in average federal tax rates for the middle class have remained roughly constant over time this dramatic drop in progressivity at the upper end of the income distribution is to a lesser extent estate and gift taxes both of which fall on capital income combined with a sharp change in the composition of top incomes away from capital income and toward labor income the reduction in top marginal individual income tax rates has contributed only marginally to the decline of progressivity of the federal tax system because with various deductions and exemptions along with favored treatment for capital gains levels has changed much less over time than the top marginal rates large reductions in tax progressivity since the took place primarily during two periods the reagan presidency in the and the bush administration in the early the only significant increase in tax progressivity since took place in the early during the first clinton administration second the most dramatic changes in federal tax system progressivity almost top percent of income earners with relatively small changes occurring below the top percentile for example many of the recent tax provisions that are currently hotly debated in congress such as whether there should be a permanent reduction in tax rates for capital gains and dividends or whether the estate tax should be repealed affect primarily the top percentile of the distribution or even just an upper slice of the top percentile this pattern strongly the standard political economy model the progressivity of the current tax system is not being shaped by the self interest of the median third international comparisons confirm that is it critical to take into account other taxes than the individual income tax to assess properly the extent of overall tax progressivity both for time trends and for cross country comparisons we hope that the preliminary international comparisons presented in this paper will help to systematic comparative research in this area permanent reductions in dividend and capital gains combined with a repeal in the estate tax would certainly reduce the current progressivity of federal taxes and favor large wealth holders the alternative mininum tax which is not indexed for inflation and hits more and more tax filers will mostly increase tax burdens on the upper middle class but will not affect much the top percent long run evidence from a panel of countries a social policy evaluation analysis and research center research school of social sciences australian national university australia malcolm wiener center for social policy kennedy school of government harvard university united states received may received in revised form july accepted july available online september economic inequality affect mortality in rich countries to answer this question we use a new source of data on income inequality tax data on the share of pretax income going to the richest the population in australia canada france germany ireland the netherlands new zealand spain sweden switzerland the uk and the us between and although this measure is not a good proxy for inequality within the bottom half of the income distribution it is a good in the top half of the distribution and for the gini coefficient in the absence of country and year fixed effects the income share of the top decile is negatively related to life expectancy and positively related to infant mortality however in our preferred fixed effects specification these relationships are weak statistically insignificant and likely to change their sign nor do our data suggest that changes in the income share of the richest introduction do changes in economic inequality lead to changes in mortality rates more than articles on this question have been published over the past two decades but no consensus has emerged one major reason has been the paucity of reliable historical data on income inequality as a result most studies have examined the relationship between inequality and mortality at a single point in time because income inequality and mortality are likely to have that cannot all be measured the cross sectional relationship between inequality and mortality is unlikely to provide an unbiased estimate of how changes in income inequality affect mortality we investigate this issue using a new source of data on economic inequality the share of personal income received by the richest adults in australia canada france germany ireland the netherlands new zealand spain sweden switzerland the uk and the us we covering an average of years per country as a result
we also audio taped our impressions of the interview and the conditions under which we we took notes and often conducted preliminary analyses immediately after completing each interview then at a later time the interviews and our notes were transcribed to text in their entirety and subjected to in depth analysis finally in an additional effort to ensure the factual accuracy that is to say descriptive validity we returned the transcribed interviews to our informants for their inspection several of our informants provided additional made corrections as a further concern for the descriptive validity of our research the analysis and interpretation of documents and interview based narratives occurred within the social context cultural values and historical experiences that are characteristic of slovenia knowledge concerning such matters was readily at hand because two of the three authors are intimately familiar with the economic cultural and political conditions in former yugoslavia one author is a by birth and life long resident of ljubljana slovenia a second author is by origin a yugoslav a former resident of sarajevo bosnia herzegovina now an australian citizen residing in sydney both authors have personal experiences of the yugoslav self management system and have also conducted research into the use and effects of information systems in yugoslav companies interviews after studying annual reports and various internal documents and later on interview transcripts we tried to grasp how actors perceived and affected changes in their environment as well as changes because of sava s privatization as we collected more empirical material and established a meaningful dialogue with company informants we were able to connect the dots and construct our own descriptions of changing economic and conditions as well as sava s emergence as a successful player under free market conditions next we focused on deliberate managerial actions to develop a learning organization as well as the emerging practices of organizational learning and informants accounts of the use of various it systems thus our understanding of the subjects interpretations was based on and validated against the historical background of the broader social economic and political changes the iterative nature of these processes we went through several hermeneutic circles before arriving at a satisfactory understanding understanding subjects interpretations was as often happens intertwined with our theoretical interpretations that is we viewed the findings within the theoretical lens of the single double and triple loop learning model this effort made organizational learning phenomena sharp focus enabling their bracketing inspecting dissecting uncovering defining and analyzing their characteristics and structures and relationships with it building on bracketing processes we then extended the organizational learning model so as to be able to differentiate between learning processes at the individual group and organizational levels and to investigate the specifics of it support the theoretical interpretation of and the role of it thus constructed were contextualized in sava s social milieu and the informants experiences of transition this contextualization brings the phenomenon alive in the worlds of interacting individuals through contextualization we aimed to demonstrate how lived experiences shape the specific nature of particular organizational learning processes which in turn determine the type of it support and the meaning of it use in these learning processes theoretical interpretation emerged while going through yet another series of hermeneutic circles back and forth between empirical findings and our own provisional theoretical interpretations finally we addressed the inevitable question of generalizability that is to say can the lessons learned from sava s case study be relevant and inspiring to other companies in transition economies our primary motivation to study the sava company was to develop in depth understanding of organizational learning and its relationship with it in a real life context we conclude that our interpretations of the sava case including a theoretical understanding of organizational learning and it can make sense in other companies and situations for instance a different company in be interested to compare its development with sava s development as a learning organization including the emergence of specific learning processes and the use and role of it we suggest that the study of sava s organizational learning has potential to make an important contribution to knowledge precisely because of sava s particular experiences with radical economic social and political changes furthermore we suggest that its strategy of it supported organizational contributed greatly to its successful transition to a free market economy the sava company sava a diversified manufacturer of automobile and other tires and specialty rubber products was founded in in the city of kranj slovenia the company weathered several difficult critical periods german occupation during wwii post war economic rebuilding secession from the former yugoslavia and privatization sava privatized in by transferring the restitution fund the pension fund and the development fund the remaining placed on the market in accordance to the law on privatization of this law required that enterprises contemplating privatization had to transfer the stock to the workers the restitution fund to the pension fund and the development fund of the republic of slovenia the remaining be sold to insiders or placed on the stock market through private bidding public offering auction or the voucher method sava designed and produced innovative and high quality rubber tires for automobiles motorcycles scooters and bicycles as well as other rubber products after slovenia s seceding from the former yugoslavia sava no longer enjoyed a protected position and access to its traditional domestic market the company was forced to penetrate foreign markets first in germany and eastern europe moreover because automobile tires are a global product the company found it difficult to compete against major automobile tire producers such as bf goodrich bridge stone goodyear michelin and pirelli the recognition that sava could not compete effectively in the global environment motivated members of top management to seek a joint venture with one of its competitors as sava s president explained fewer than players in the world s car tire market they have the market on account of the very large development costs for tires we
but does not completely allay the concern that deliberative democratic commitments to legitimation and constitutionalism seem to conflict with the autonomy of the people in the constitutional democracy other paradoxes also come up in the deliberative democrats work but these two are centrally important because they recur and because they privilege a certain set of problems that define the deliberative project as such how to develop a democratic theory that can get beyond mere majoritarianism and how to reconcile universal equality and democratic particularity the two prongs of the paradoxes looked at here are sometimes personified by deliberativists who cast them as conflicts between kant and rousseau or as conflicts internal to each of these thinkers habermas says idea of human rights and the principle of popular sovereignty would mutually interpret one another nevertheless these two authors also did not succeeed in integrating the two concepts in an evenly balanced manner for deliberativists the goal is to get the balance right once that is done the paradoxes they worry about will be be transcended through proper procedures or mitigated through practices of iteration or constitutional tapping that conjoin in practice the contradictory poles of the paradox absent such efforts it is said absent some reasoned justification procedure or practice for dispelling or managing the paradox democratic theory is unable decisionism is one of the names given by deliberativists to the position of those of their critics who work in the wakes of friedrich nietzsche carl schmitt and sometimes jacques derrida decisionists deliberativists argue cannot give valid justifications for the principles they champion deliberativist claims regarding decisionism s dangers are made easy by schmitt who valorized the friend enemy distinction as the defining feature of the political joined the nazi party and became their legal jurist endless talk all this is properly noted in the deliberativist literature and also by other democratic theorists no contemporary democratic theorists however embrace an unreconstructed schmittian position us see how they conflict and the dangers the dominance of liberal logic can bring to the exercise of democracy but rather than follow schmitt to his conclusion that the conflict between liberalism and democracy is a contradiction that is bound to lead liberal democracy to self destruction and rather than follow the deliberativists in claiming that the conflict between liberalism tension that cannot be resolved but can be exploited by articulating the two poles of the binary which she calls the democratic logic demands that we constitute the people by inscribing rights and equality into practice and the liberal logic allows us to challenge through reference to humanity and the polemical use of human people for mouffe perhaps the most persistent of deliberative democratic theory s critics the tension between liberalism and democracy can only be temporarily stabilized through pragmatic negotiations between political forces which always establish the hegemony of one of them over the other this hegemony is often overlooked it is and tappings as merely pragmatic but mouffe insists those who overlook hegemony or fail properly to diagnose it do so because they like most of us are fooled by its false self presentation as a true reconciliation of the two conflicting logics be to note the overlap in these approaches their shared lens of binary paradox in place of the choice offered deliberation or decision we might instead contribute to new thinking on these issues by switching the question we might ask what is left out of consideration by deliberativist versus decisionist mappings of the options by way of neo schmittian paradoxes that of democratic legitimation we might ask what problem might the focus on that paradox be solving for deliberative democratic theory instead of is the paradox of constitutional democracy real or illusory we might wonder why do we keep returning to this paradox does this paradox solve certain problems for democratic theory if so at what cost and constitutionalism engage the readings of contemporary and canonical texts that give rise to them and assess the implications for democratic theory of the deliberativist construal of them if we loosen the grip of the deliberation versus decision binary and dispel the power of the paradoxes analyzed here we might think differently about democratic theory s who may be called into being when called on in democratic politics to decide albeit not necessarily decisionistically on matters of importance for their past present and future together the paradox of politics to democratic theory these alternatives are accessible by way of a different paradox one more fundamental than the two aforementioned and possessed of a different structure the paradox of politics first theorized by rousseau since commented on by many and developed in more detail here the paradox of politics nor with a binarily structured combat between or within rousseau and kant instead the paradox of politics catches us in a chicken and egg circle that presses us to begin the work of democratic politics in medias res in a terrain grounded neither in the sort of universal principled justification embraced by deliberative democrats nor in to as a paradox of founding it is more than that for it is alive at every moment of political life and not just at the origins of a regime rousseau does at first see the problem as one of origins in the social contract in order for a nascent people to appreciate sound political maxims and follow the fundamental was founded would have to preside over the founding itself and before the creation of the laws men would have to be what they should become by means of those same laws in order for there to be a people well formed enough for good law making there must be good law for how else will the people be well formed the problem is where would that good law come from absent chicken and egg problem of founding by introducing a lawgiver a good man prior to good law an objective or virtuous figure who can found the polity unfortunately
variables deserve begun to address them furthermore much previous research has shown the importance of cross functional teams throughout the npd process up to and through the launch phase management must consider all of these elements and the interactions among them when planning the launch of its new products as seen in cluster good strategy poor execution on these points is associated with lower performance in cluster even though a skimming price is used there as well the reason for the difference we infer is that cluster is better at executing other activities that are consistent with and support a skimming strategy leading up to launch to summarize management needs to think in limitations and directions for future research we note several limitations of the present study the response rate is relatively low comparison of the sample to the pdma practitioner sampling frame however suggests that the sample is representative of the pdma practitioner membership one may question whether the pdma membership is representative of product managers in their npd processes or may over represent the best new product firms the sample may be more representative of best practice in npd than of npd in general and these firms might on average be better at making pricing and related decisions to support product launch a logical next step would be to determine launch practices across a wide spectrum of firms including pdma differences in launch strategy further research could specifically examine a given industry to determine if there are industry specific pricing and related launch strategies that tend to be related to success second and third limitations of the study are the use of the requires respondents to provide their perceptions on each of the scale items including those on performance since the data are collected retrospectively some halo effect bias may exist since the true outcome of each npd project was known prior to filling out the questionnaire some respondents may have biased their was generally not found to be a problem the key informant method has occasionally been criticized as information is obtained from only a single individual who might be insufficiently knowledgeable we believe we have minimized the possible drawbacks of the key informant method by carefully selecting respondents who were highly involved in new product launch and therefore were very furthermore some recent studies of senior managers have found that the key informant method provides reliable and valid data on strategic decisions and performance the study is also limited by the nature of the sample non us managers are not well represented nor are managers involved in consumer in these different launch settings a measure for christmas spirit abstract purpose the purpose of this research is to show that christmas spirit is often given as a reason or excuse for the goodwill generosity and altruism associated with the celebration of christmas despite the influence of the occasion on cultural financial and economic issues there has been no specific empirical attention toward the structure or measurement of the concept of christmas spirit the concept of christmas spirit research into this popular topic is important timely and has universal appeal design methodology approach defining the structure of christmas spirit drew upon previous academic research about feelings and evaluations this research employed a process of exploratory factor analysis correlations a confirmatory analysis and path analysis that combined the associated constructs the required information was gathered via a self administered survey method the respondents fell within a sample frame of a parent with at least one child between the ages of three and eight years a questionnaire package containing two instruments instructions and a self addressed return envelope was delivered to five participating schools and seven kindergartens for children to take home to their parents as a result acceptable cases were available for analysis findings overall the singular finding confirmed that the multi ti dimensional feelings evaluation model as outlined in this study is a valid measurement of christmas spirit practical implications future research that incorporates this measure has implications for consumer behavior theory and the motivation toward christmas festivities the findings have consequences for content and themes of advertising and the scope of brand promotion by owners promoters and retailers of brands and the associated business activity originality value christmas a complex amalgam of motives strategies attitudes rituals behaviors and relationships christmas spirit is an important topic of deep interest to consumer behavior researchers being an often used but ambiguous term there is a need for theoretical clarification therefore it is timely to explore and develop behavioral theory related to the celebration because of the festivity s economic and social impacts on society are the terms that the sociological literature uses to generally describe the concept of christmas spirit and it is often given as a reason or excuse for the christmas season and its intrinsic consumption activities yet there has been no specific empirical attention toward the structure or measurement of the concept of christmas spirit the aim of this paper is to for research into the intangible antecedent variables to the gift giving process while gift giving to children is a strong feature of christmas it is a unique multifaceted ritualistic consumption occasion that suggests the season is the peak of consumption in western cultures and the embodiment of a gift giving culture that endorses hedonistic behavior as a traditional christmas ritual the preparation and enjoyment of the christmas period furthermore otnes et al suggest that nearly all of the advertising expenditures for the most popularly requested toys occur in the september quarter therefore if the level of consumer spending is a measure of christmas activity then the christmas period is an important occasion not just for business but for those positive feelings and judgments about christmas would have a high level of christmas spirit that genuinely influences the conduct of christmas activities in a happy and cheerful manner a more in depth understanding of the structure of christmas spirit will increase theoretical knowledge related to
stronger oswald spengler was a german philosopher best known for his book the decline of the west which combined a cyclical conception of the rise and decline of a cultural pessimism although he voted for the nazis in and hung a swastika flag on his house and although the nazis took him as a precursor he refused the nazi racial ideology thought hitler vulgar and finally his hour of decision got him expelled from the party his name is often used as an iconic marker for cultural pessimism martin heidegger was a philosopher in germany who became entangled in criticized by humanists the vienna circle the frankfurt school and surrealists such as bataille and breton as irrational and easily appropriable for political mischief apparently a mesmerizing teacher he claimed to refound philosophy on ontology rather than metaphysics and epistemology his first major work was on being and his later work was on framing and the poetics of thought after wwii french intellectuals incorporated him as a major predecessor although much of their work using his attentiveness to poetics serves as a sharp critique of his work he was appointed rector of freiburg university by the nazis in during which time there were book burnings and forced resignations of jewish professors his inaugural address continues to draw negative comment he resigned a year later but he never resigned from the nazi party his views on modernity and technology are fairly standard reactionary conservatism but were given some heightened notoriety after the war by his analogizing the gas chambers to industrial agriculture by which of course he meant to criticize the latter but the context was his continued refusal to in anyway apologize for his role in the nazi period some people find his notion that nature is turned by technological society into a standing reserve be appropriated by mathematizing calculation innovative rather than fairly obvious or a standard antimodernist complaint his removal of the dedication of sein und zeit to his teacher husserl who as a jew was forced to resign from freiburg was in part reciprocated by husserl s late work on the crisis in the european sciences in it husserl introduced a concept of the life world as a counter to er s ahistoricism two of the best introductions to the frankfurt school still remain martin jay and david held one often makes a distinction between the prewar frankfurt school the dispersal of that group of scholars mainly to the united the postwar return of adorno and his troubled relationship with the radical students of germany s new left on the one hand and the postwar generation of scholars led and influenced by habermas who proved a strong voice for open democracy and against normalizing the nazi period on the other hand emic and etic were short hand terms introduced by the linguist kenneth pike from the linguistic terms phoneme and phonetics phonemes are the sounds selected in a given language as from the range of phonetic sounds that the human voice could make thus bit and pit are differentiated in english by the phonemes us whereas the german phoneme ch is not recognized and is hard for many english speakers to say analogously then it was proposed that there might be many semantic fields in which there was an objective natural grid against which cultural terms could be measured and compared across languages such as colors against the spectrum i take this paragraph from chapter of my emergent forms of life where i use it to explore ethnic autobiographies and multiple alternatives that narrators such as maxine hong kingston explore in efforts to articulate the fragments of talk stories that go into the formation of their identities for a moment the interest in james joyce by lacan derrida and others in france seemed to dovetail with the explosion of salman rushdie s midnight s children and the use of a that expanded english with the elements from other languages cultural perspectives and presuppositions similar expansions were happening to other world languages including arabic but this potential as a vehicle for multilingual cultural studies waned although there was talk about starting journals that would simultaneously publish in say chinese japanese and english to draw their audiences into the possibilities of enriched cross cultural discourses the allusions here to fleck and emily martin on immunology and to foucault and deleuze s notions of modernist disciplinary societies now being transformed into more diffusely and pervasively forms organized by codes and flows the liquidity created by derivatives and similar financial instruments is a powerful concrete example of flows that depend on the mathematical abstraction of different kinds of risk and classificatory processes wikipedia and web refer to tools that allow collaboration and sharing of information ward cunningham the inventor of the wiki which was a constituent tool used to create wikipedia is credited with pushing the idea of moving to the edge of your purpose derek powazek uses the metaphor of company towns for web sites such as the well salon and such gaming derived sites as building buzz in contrast web sites such as technorati boing boing myspace youtube blogads com and sina com aggregate and rank links and use robot spiders and crawlers as accountants they thereby can position themselves as thought leaders or places to which people come to find other links or services the butterfly effect is the popular tag for the feature of dynamical systems that occurs when initial conditions are slightly changed and the subsequent large effects can be propagated over generations the tag is associated with the edward lorenz although the idea is older and is now important in chaos theory and the study of complex systems it includes what is now called the lorenz attractor which derived from atmospheric convection equations takes the shape under certain values when the plots are drawn of butterfly wings or under some values of a torus knot for its attempts both to have and to control the internet a veritable test
excessive for rape and other nonhomicidal crimes as well as for homicides the defendant did not personally commit and as to the trend of the states and juries treatment of mentally retarded and sixteen and seventeen year old offenders led the court to approve the death penalty for but in and after being informed differently by changing patterns of legislation and jury verdicts the court held the death penalty disproportionate for both categories of as for deliberate homicides the court still informed by the states reversed a third of the new statutes outright and parts of most others most crucially death could not be mandatory the penalty instead was constitutional only when a jury pronounced it proportionate under the circumstances by finding enough aggravation net of mitigation to warrant backup appellate review was also required minimally this called for appellate courts to reassess aggravation net of mitigation in each case comparative proportionality review of the sentence at hand to identify the state s going rate for imposing death sentences in recurring over time such systems could hone in on the state s communal definition of evil and extenuation and thus of proportionality and cruel and unusual punishment the state statute could then be refined accordingly and outlier death sentences could be reversed for example have documented the impossibility of justice white s proposal to increase the death penalty s use enough to give it a clear retributive and deterrent although some states flirted with this approach during the the approach hit a brick wall in high exoneration and capital error rates made clear that the cost of high rates of capital punishment was a high risk of executing that otherwise might in reaction public support for the death penalty declined as did the number of death verdicts and the logic of the court s system of shared constitutional responsibility also entailed and the court intermittently exercised its own backup review in cases such as coker enmund adkins and simmons the court used the aggregate of all state legislative judgments about the offenders to help it decide when death was constitutionally excessive and on that basis invalidate outlier the court also reviewed state capital sentencing procedures and overturned those that did not generate reliable case by case proportionality judgments by jurors imbued with a sense of responsibility the court sometimes made its own case specific proportionality judgments as in godfrey eddings enmund and parker mitigation so great that the death sentence was the system also entailed comparative review as in furman this review was meant to identify death sentencing patterns that were unacceptably linked to race or insufficiently tied to aggravation net of mitigation and to supervise state appellate review to be sure it was effectively disposing of outlying at its limit such review would use the aggregate and proportionality to identify outlying aggravating factors the states may not use in lying mitigating factors they must and common groups of factors as to which the national going rate excludes the death penalty informed by each state s jurisprudence of death the court could craft its own helping to tame the unruly cruel and unusual punishment clause most importantly by providing a democratic basis for abolishing the rest the court s system of shared constitutional responsibilities could help domesticate the painful dissonance created by the court s inescapable role in a crude and jurispathic kind of violence but the court lost heart still tormented by the face to face encounters with state violence that its supervisory and residual justificatory roles required the court renounced its procedural dictates monitoring generating it denied its authority to make its own categorical proportionality judgments informed by state legislative judgments and instead simply counted legislative heads it allowed states to use factors applicable to nearly all murders to narrow the range of death eligible murders to instruct jurors to give mitigating factors only a small proportion of their extenuating value to order jurors to impose death when no net and to diminish jurors sense of responsibility by saying that the governor could clean up their mistakes via a clemency power governors almost never exercise it vowed never again to examine case specific proportionality it jettisoned the requirement of comparative proportionality review by state appellate courts in favor of toothless harmless error review applicable only to errors involving aggravating factors and only then in a subset of states it refused review of capital sentencing patterns after attempting it in mccleskey finding racial influences and allowing them to stand because the only known palliative was to insist on a high degree of aggravation net of mitigation overall the court surrendered the capacity that might have been supplied by its occasional review of the proportionality of individual death sentences and by comparisons of states sentencing patterns and capital common laws to generate its own jurisprudence these rulings destroyed the reliability of the court s system of shared constitutional decision making they generated a set of contradictory doctrines that veered wildly between justice stewart s proportionality based justification for the death penalty and justice white s contradictory retribution and deterrence based justification as a direct consequence the pattern of death verdicts the court s modern jurisprudence has generated is nearly identical to the pattern it in its most powerful and generative justificatory exercise in furman georgia in yet for all its backtracking the court remained tormented by the need but inability to justify the death these circumstances give the court a clear choice remain in the limbo created by its chronic inability to ignore or justify the death penalty s among the options no longer realistically open is complete deregulation even before the public and committed lawyers came to expect the court to regulate the death penalty the court s members felt that obligation themselves even soliciting petitions to sitting atop the pyramid of courts that impose and order the taking of life the court could not avoid responsibility for subjecting the penalty to law and trying to the court are
real estate plus present value of operating leases as a proportion of total real estate the leasing propensity of firms that report only freehold real estate is zero while the leasing propensity of companies that report only leased real estate in the form of either leasehold or operating leases is equal to the remaining companies are classified into quintiles according to the level we compare the financial characteristics of these groups and assess the extent to which companies create value by leasing rather than owning their real estate assets the results show that companies lease their real estate to reduce their debt to finance their growth prospects and to conserve liquidity namely cash these findings suggest that the decision to lease real estate is driven by strategic considerations we also find that leasing allows companies to use their real estate more efficiently as firms that lease hold a lower inventory than companies that report only freehold real estate we also report that the market appears to value the benefits of leasing real estate in particular companies that report percent leased real estate are found to generate higher returns to their shareholders than companies that report only freehold real estate however these percent leased real estate companies do not generate the highest the relationship between firm value as measured market to book and leasing propensity is curve linear after accounting for firm size leverage industry and other relevant factors this donaldsons lasfer curve is optimized when the leasing propensity is at about percent these results are strong to alternative measures of firm value or leasing and suggest that the market takes into account the costs of leasing real estate such as the loss of collateral and increase in bankruptcy the results also indicate that there has been a substantial increase in the proportion of companies in the uk that lease real estate the propensity to lease varies by industry size and growth prospects although large companies are more likely to lease our results suggest that leasing allows companies to grow faster in addition companies that have a higher propensity to lease have a lower financial gearing implying that by leasing companies reduce their reported part of the leasing is off balance sheet liquidity ratios are higher in companies that lease real estate companies that lease appear to hold more cash and have better cash conversion periods than freehold companies suggesting that companies that lease manage their operating cycles more efficiently we also find that freehold based companies hold high inventories implying that leasing allows companies to use more efficiently their real estate assets namely warehouses finally the results indicate that the corporation tax liability of companies that lease is not significantly lower than those that report freehold real estate suggesting that companies do not necessarily lease their real estate because they cannot claim tax allowances overall the results are consistent with the hypotheses that companies lease their real estate assets to avoid reporting high leverage to mitigate the agency conflicts and do not provide support for the tax hypothesis the market appears to value both the costs and benefits of leasing to our knowledge there is no other study that dealt directly with the economic impact of leasing real estate the comparison of these results with studies that focused on the leasing of plant and machinery reveals interesting differences for example lasfer and levis report that large companies lease more to reduce their tax liability the differences in leasing plant and machinery and leasing real estate can result from the characteristics of these two assets as small firms are likely to lease their plant and machinery but to own freehold real estate to minimize their costs of borrowing as real estate unlike depreciable assets can be used as loan collateral the paper proceeds as follows section provides the theoretical background section describes the data and the methodology section reports the results and the in section theoretical background previous studies have identified agency costs debt capacity and taxation as the main motives for leasing assets in this section these motives are summarized and a new hypothesis relating to the efficiency gains through leasing of real estate assets is introduced leasing and agency costs substitution problem which arises from the possibility that the borrowed funds may be used to finance other more risky projects or to be distributed as dividends to shareholders and can lead to the underinvestment problem that may result from the fact that lenders are likely to refrain from financing some positive npv projects that are difficult to monitor because contacts or covenants cannot cover all contingencies leasing an mitigate the lessor stulz and johnson developed a model which predicts that under the agency framework some profitable projects will not be undertaken by a firm which can use only equity or unsecured debt to finance them but will be undertaken if they can be financed with secured debt or leasing smith and wakeman identified other cases where leasing reduces agency costs they suggest that under the agency framework leasing is more likely to not specialized to the firm and or if the lessor has market power and a comparative advantage in asset disposal similar conclusions are reached by williamson who concludes that assets that are easily redeployable ie assets with resale value and not firm specific are likely to be leased empirically finucane and krishnan and moyer find that leasing activity in the us is more prevalent in certain industries such as transportation services and wholesale retail trade because the assets leased in these industries such as aircraft and retail space are easily redeployable moreover finucane shows that firms with mortgage secured notes or bonds are more likely to use leasing this suggests that firms with assets that make good collateral are also likely to have assets conductive to leasing moreover barclay and smith find that in the usa firms with greater growth opportunities as measured by book to market ratio rely heavily on lease financing because under the agency
weiss and then caldwell greater interests elsewhere in asia thoreau s clear interest in yogic discipline may also for others have blurred the line between buddhism and it was the latter avenue of hindu bards and gods which was seen in by fellow transcendentalist orestes brownson as the focus of the emerging american interest in oriental thought from thoreau s awareness and readiness to use hindu materials is well seems to have had a sense of deep ancient wisdom coming from india as expressed for example in walden where the oldest hindoo philosopher raised a corner of the veil and i gaze upon as fresh a glory as he did since it was i in him that was then so bold and it is he in me that now reviews the such mutual identity across time is a theme encountered elsewhere as shall be seen one feature at play was thoreau s readiness to use hindu materials out of their immediate context for his own this was illustrated in walking where the hindu myth was retold of how the hindus dreamed that the earth rested on an elephant and the elephant on a tortoise which then led to his mention that a fossil tortoise has lately been discovered in asia large enough to support an elephant and the admission i confess thati am partial to these wild fancies which transcend the order of time and however the same myth was used rather differently in life principle as a metaphor for hollow and ineffectual ordinary conversation where no man stood on truth they were merely banded together as usual one leaning and all together on nothing as the hindoos made the world rest on an it is well known that thoreau particularly esteemed the laws of manu and the bhagavad gita but further comments on these can be made september shows the impact of the laws of manu on him sentiments also appearing in a week it the laws of manu seems to have been uttered from some eastern summit with a sober morning prescience and is as superior to criticism as the himmaleh mountains journal with that rare kind of wisdom which comes to us as refined as the porcelain i is true for the widest horizon as it proceeds from so it addresses what is deepest and most abiding in in from such interior depths thoreau then anchored this hindu text for his american audience by using exterior motifs from nature whereby it belongs to the noontide of the day the midsummer of the year and after the snows have melted and the waters evaporated in the spring still its truth speaks freshly to our experience it helps the sun to shine and his rays fall on its page to illustrate it it spends the mornings and the evenings and makes such an impression us overnight as to awaken us before dawn and its influence lingers around us like a fragrance late into the day it conveys a new gloss to the meadows and the depths of the wood and its spirit like a more subtile ether sweeps along with the prevailing winds of a country held up to the sky which is the only impartial and incorruptible ordeal they are of a piece with its depth and serenity hey will have a place and significance as long as to test them what is striking throughout this extended eulogy is the sustained intertwining of nature with the text reflecting the oreau s own yankee leaning to nature as well as the incoming indian material another sign of thoreau s active yet selective use of materials in a week was his however this did not mean that thoreau supported brahminic caste supremacy as legitimized in the laws of manu instead he could feel thank god no hindoo tyranny prevailed at the framing of the world but we are freemen of the universe and not sentenced to any consequently in his ninety verse selections of the laws of menu for the dial in january thoreau had not presented its detailed parts on caste and gender restrictions but had focused and ethical areas this contrasts with the much more critical review carried out by whelpley of the laws of menu in the american whig review for may a second hindu source that particularly struck thoreau as it did emerson was the bhagavad gita the song of the lord of which a copy had reached emerson at concord in thoreau considered the ta to be wonderfully sustained and developed and scriptures that he was aware the ta s impact on the transcendentalists has been well noted in academic suffice it to reemphasize three nuances first although no extracts from the ta were presented in the dial substantial extracts appeared in thoreau s journal during june july and then publicly in a week monday following his comment that the reader is nowhere raised and sustained in the bhagvat second comes the often cited passage from walden it appears that the sweltering inhabitants of charleston and new orleans of madras and bombay and calcutta drink at my well in the morning i bathe my intellect in the stupendous and cosmogonal philosophy of the bhagvat geeta since whose composition years of the gods have elapsed and in comparison with which our modern world and its literature seem puny and trivial and i doubt if that philosophy not to be referred to a previous state of existence so remote is its sublimity from our conceptions i lay down the book and go to my well for water and lo there i meet the servant of the brahmin priest of brahma and vishnu and indra who still sits in his temple on the ganges reading the vedas or dwells at the root of a tree with his crust and water jug the pure walden water is mingled with the sacred water of the is how the external world of nature was woven into asian last was his selectivity citing ta strands on selfless detached action and yogic training of the mind and body rather than
s weighty interest in fetal life and the woman s permits procedural regulations that stop short of substantially burdening the right courts can similarly accommodate both speech and equality in the casting context by creating minor procedural hurdles that create space for decision makers to consider the race and or sex designation carefully and reflect on alternative casting options prior to making their ultimate decision ian ayres and jennifer gerarda brown have proposed a similar they suggest that organizations who wish to discriminate based on sexual orientation such as the boy scouts should have to disclose and obtain consent from potential members in order to claim constitutional protection the goal of both proposals is to prevent reflexive discrimination that is discrimination not preceded by a period of critical reflection a ban on discriminatory casting breakdowns would nonetheless render it more difficult and costly for casting directors to which in disrupting established exclusionary practices might create a potential first amendment burden the costs would differ depending on the breadth of the ban in this section i consider two alternatives and their attendants costs and benefits a flat ban on race and sex based breakdowns would have the virtue of clarity and simplicity breakdowns could never express race and sex preferences the ban would require about characters identity and audience perceptions and thus erode reflexive discrimination in general it seems likely that opening casting calls to previously excluded actors will result in meaningful access for some outsiders and cause decision makers to rethink their assumptions in a subset of cases an actor s impressive performance might prompt the director to reconsider and pursue casting the applicant which could include accommodate the applicant s race and or sex by bringing to the attention of the decision makers talented and potentially suitable actors who would have been arbitrarily excluded title vii would confer a benefit on studios that to some extent would offset its costs to the extent that audiences are receptive to more diverse casting but the studio s narrow assumptions would otherwise preclude it the studio would benefit in the end of course it is difficult to predict how the costs will net out in the aggregate or with respect to any particular film despite the ban on discriminatory breakdowns the final casting decision would continue to be largely insulated from legal scrutiny studios with legitimate reasons for taking race and or sex into account thus could hold fast to their preferences in making the final casting decisions but they would first have to wade through a number of actors who do not fit their when the studio wants to cast a white actor because the majority of working actors in hollywood are white the cost would entail considering a small percentage of actors of color alongside the larger share of white actors with respect to roles intended for an actor of color the burden would be greater without the use of a breakdown to narrow the pool of actors the studio would have to consider a large number of white actors in order to gain access to the few actors color perceived to be suitable for the role similarly a flat ban on sex based breakdowns would impose considerable costs in that even where a role was legitimately designated as male the studio would presumably have to consider about fifty females for every fifty male actors thus casting decision makers might feel that at least in certain contexts a flat ban would require them to waste time and money considering actors who will never be cast these defendants would have defense if title vii were applied without reference to storyline and related first amendment concerns an alternative proposal seeks to fold the first amendment concerns into the title vii analysis by effectively creating a first amendment based bfoq for casting only when race or sex is integral to the narrative this proposal would ease the burden on the studios that have legitimate reasons for casting a person of color or an actor of a specific sex recognizing the first amendment defense when race and or sex are integral to the narrative this proposed rule would permit the use of a discriminatory breakdown only when casting an actor of a non preferred race and or sex would create a substantial burden on the narrative this proposal would require studios in the first instance and ultimately judges in the subset of cases that end up in court to decide whether there would be a substantial a film narrative and determine the artistic impact of race and sex they might argue that inserting judges into the casting process would create a first amendment burden however federal judges are already required to make artistic judgments on a regular basis primarily in cases involving federal intellectual property rights in addition they sometimes make such artistic determinations in right of publicity cases contract decisions courts have compared two musical or visual artistic works in order to determine whether they are substantially similar in a leading intellectual property case the supreme court passed artistic judgment in determining whether rap group live crew s sexually explicit revision of the roy orbison song oh pretty woman was a parody or a satire for the purposes of a fair use analysis the courts regularly engage in qualitative critique that the type of inquiry casting discrimination lawsuits would require falls outside the realm of judicial competence or appropriate functioning some commentators have criticized flawed judicial assessments of art in particular cases such artistic judgments however need not and should not rest solely on the judge s individual perceptions in numerous opinions judges have relied heavily on art film or music in mgm american honda motor co the court drew on expert opinions from a university of southern california school of cinema television professor who had taught a course on james bond films and a film critic who had written articles about and reviews of bond films in order to determine that a
with stroke suffer from significant motor and cognitive impairments such as visual spatial impairments aphasia hemi neglect dyspraxia gait postural control is found to be a prerequisite for regaining independence in activities of daily living unfortunately there is no generally accepted definition of the term postural control however the definition of pollock and colleagues is frequently used they described postural control as the act of maintaining achieving or restoring a state of balance during any posture or activity in hemiplegic sway and asymmetrical weight distribution with a shift in the average position of the body s center of pressure towards the unaffected side current research concerning balance deficits in hemiplegic patients focuses on differential components such as postural sway and symmetry of weight distribution the use of force plate feedback in stroke rehabilitation has been examined in a number of these studies of patient s postural sway or weight distribution between the paretic and non paretic lower limb the interest in force plate feedback as a rehabilitation instrument was positively influenced by the development of the balance master tm this computerized force plate provides continuous visual feedback on the position of the center of gravity giving a new tool for training the feedback therapy only one recent review has systematically evaluated the effectiveness of this therapy on promoting the recovery of postural control after stroke barclay goddard et al concluded after systematic reviewing randomized controlled trials that force plate feedback improved stance symmetry after stroke but they could not establish effects on postural sway or systematic review was to examine the effects of the additional vft on postural control in bilateral standing in subjects suffering from stroke the primary aim of this review was to establish whether vft reduces postural sway and improves symmetry of weight distribution in bilateral standing after stroke compared with conventional treatment in addition the effects of vft on study identification a computer aided literature search was performed in the following electronic databases pubmed cochrane central register of controlled trials cinahl physiotherapy evidence database and doc online only articles published in the period up to april and written in english german or dutch were included all references presented in relevant studies were also examined the hemiplegia paresis or stroke rehabilitation posture symmetry balance postural control musculoskeletal equilibrium or weight bearing force plates force platforms or feedback and randomized controlled trial controlled clinical trial comparative study or trial the complete study identification was performed by independent that was formulated in pubmed and adapted to the other databases the full search strategy is available on request from the first author the abstracts of the publications retrieved from the computer aided literature search were selected on basis of the following inclusion criteria the studies involved adult subjects suffering from stroke the defined as a focal neurological impairment of sudden onset and lasting more than hours and of presumed vascular origin effects of vft on postural control in bilateral standing were evaluated the feedback had to provide visual representations of the individual s center of gravity or weight distribution between the paretic and non paretic leg in the present review feedback is defined to gain voluntary control over processes or functions that are primarily under autonomic control the studies were rct or controlled clinical trials methodological quality assessment the methodological quality of the selected rcts and ccts was rated using the pedro scale by independent reviewers reviewers were not blinded to author institution or validity and the other items assess the internal and statistical validity of the studies these items were used to calculate the pedro score all items were scored binary which could result in a maximum score of points agreement regarding each item was evaluated by calculating a kappa statistic disagreements regarding items were solved by discussion between the reviewers if disagreement persisted a third reviewer analysis of the results was performed separately for each study when the interventions patient characteristics and outcome measures were comparable statistical pooling was performed the data were re analysed by pooling the individual effect sizes using hedges model in this model the difference between mean changes in the experimental group and in the control group during the therapy period subsequently unbiased effect sizes were calculated for each study after adjusting for the number of degrees of freedom the impact of sample size was addressed by calculating a weighting factor for each study and assigning larger effect weights to studies with larger samples subsequently gu s of individual studies were averaged resulting in a weighted summary effect size whereas the weights of each study ses the fixed effects model was used to decide whether a ses was statistically significant if significant between study variation existed a random effects model was applied post hoc sensitivity analysis for study design was performed if significant heterogeneity was found between individual effect sizes for all outcome variables the critical value for rejecting was after screening identified studies were found to be relevant for further analysis the study of engardt et al was excluded because the patients in this study received postural control therapy with auditory instead of visual feedback a total of studies involving patients met all the inclusion criteria the patients the study of walker and colleagues therefore the study of grant was only used for outcomes not investigated by the study of walker and colleagues six studies were classified as rcts and as ccts table i shows the main characteristics of the eligible studies included in the systematic review all studies were performed within the first months assessment the methodological quality of the included studies is presented in table i therefore quality items were scored initially the reviewers disagreed on of the quality items this resulted in an average cohen s kappa score for all items of the median pedro score was ranging from to points intention to treat analysis in study the observers were blinded to treatment allocation quantitative analysis pooling of outcomes was possible for weight distribution and postural sway while bilateral standing berg
the aid of appropriate software this approach has enabled us to run quantitative statistical analyses that have strengthened our results and underlined the explanatory power of our model more than customary qualitative research techniques might have allowed theoretical insights aside cvcs and pcs benefit most from this investigation for its results have practical implications for the way they do business cvcs and pcs must give priority to relational aspects and the potential for knowledge transfer before entering a long term relationship the best technology of a young pc and the incomparable resources of a major corporation are unlikely to yield radical innovation if relational misfits prevent the partners from jointly exploring and exploiting their different knowledge bases this conclusion applies to both parties to pcs in their search for a strategic investor from whom they can expect financing relevant and valuable knowledge and other complementary resources and to cvcs in their pcs that will ultimately facilitate radical rather than just moderate innovation comparison of the behavior of the three superconductors ybco bi and in different environmental conditions studied for their stability under different environmental conditions such as uv radiation various relative humidity conditions salt spraying temperature water environment it resulted that bi is a stable compound while ybco is greatly affected by moisture and is affected by increasing temperature all three superconductors were decomposed almost immediately after immersion in water or sea water introduction applications they should present stability during processing so as their properties should not deteriorate due to decomposition reasons among the superconducting compounds and are of great interest in the scientific community for their future technological application and they have been extensively studied for their superconducting properties as far as mainly been investigated for their reaction with water at various temperatures and it was found that both materials decompose when submerged into water losing their superconducting properties has also been soaked into de ionized water where it gradually degraded to a non superconducting material and it has been exposed to highly humid air as well in both cases the formation of was observed size and the quality of the material play an important role to the rate of degradation in this paper a systematic investigation of the stability of the three superconductors in different environmental conditions is carried out more specifically powders and electrophoretically produced coatings of these materials were exposed at different relative humidity conditions uv radiation laboratory environment water and salt the phase identification was performed by ray diffraction analysis while microstructural observation was carried out by scanning electron microscopy coupled with an energy dispersion ray spectrometer the surface morphology of coatings was observed by optical microscopy experimental was acetone a while the substrates were si au wafers commercial ni and stainless steel plates apparatus and instrumentation the xrd characterization was performed with a siemens diffractometer using the cu radiation with a graphite monochromator counting time at s the patterns were evaluated by optical microscopy with a zeiss axiotech hd light microscope the microstructure and the stoichiometry of the samples were measured with sem coupled with the edx analytical procedure ybco and powders were pressed into pellets the electrophoretically production of ybco bi and at conditions of different relative humidity which were accomplished through the production of koh and kcl saturated solutions respectively more specifically the salt solutions were put in a vessel and the superconductors were hanging cm over the surface of the solution and the whole vessel was closed the humidity was constantly measured with a hanging over the solution hygrometer similar samples were exposed at uv radiation with a in a dark room laboratory environment and at a temperature range of the samples were observed after day days and month the exposure to these conditions furthermore and bi samples were submerged into de ionized water and into sea water as well while ybco coatings were inserted into a salt ybco has been systematically investigated by other authors for its behavior in water results and discussion effect of different relative humidity as referred above the initial samples were of different purities the initial sample was of high purity and no parasitic phases were apparent in the xrd spectrum in the ybco sample the main phase was with the co existence of to the fact that the commercial ybco powder was not of analytical grade in the bismuth superconductor the main phase was bi with the co existence of the bi phase nio is formed during the heat treatment of the coating and it does not affect the superconducting properties of the coating after month of exposure of the three superconducting samples cu were observed soaked in water it is worth to be mentioned that the sample had swollen and its color had become dark blue after week exposure under these conditions from all these findings it results that bi and are stable in moisture conditions while ybco is sensitive and unstable when relative humidity exceeds about effect of laboratory environment the uv radiation all samples remained unaffected under these conditions after month of exposure to uv radiation effect of elevated temperatures bi was not affected in the temperature range tested for the investigated period of month ybco was stable as well for the same period since humidity was at a small level was stable when the temperature was up to about the xrd diagram of after at is presented and it can be seen the presence of the parasitic phase the same phase was formed when was exposed at for effect of sea water and salt spraying ybco was affected by salt spraying after remaining in the salt spraying apparatus the peaks of the phase observed that the grain size and the surface morphology has also been affected by salt spraying reacted also with sea water according to the xrd spectrum the only phases present were compounds such as and coming from the reaction of the superconductor with sea water fig presents the sem micrograph of the initial coating
are projects which are distinguished not only by the promise of reward they but also by the risk and uncertainty that accompanies sic their potential outcome one way for corporations to achieve such radical innovation and subsequently competitive advantage is by leveraging interorganizational relationships to acquire transfer exploit and explore external knowledge from young technology based firms corporate venture capital units which invest in highly innovative new ventures constitute one form of interorganizational relationship because of the technological innovativeness of such ventures they are characterized by uncertainty risk potential high growth rates and outstanding potential for technological breakthrough they provide the strategic opportunity to develop new business units and to gain large market share as well as supernormal returns from the knowledge based perspective knowledge is also a source of sustainable competitive generating and transferring knowledge is particularly important for innovation driven corporates and technology based ventures because such companies demand a continuous regeneration of knowledge research has also shown that additionally acquired relevant knowledge sharpens an organization s ability to gain competitive advantage an antecedent of improved organizational performance other dimensions promoting successful knowledge acquisition or transfer are knowledge relatedness and knowledge sharing routines knowledge relatedness means that an organization s existing knowledge is related to the new knowledge to be assimilated knowledge relatedness thereby describes the degree of similarity and compatibility of knowledge between two organizations lane and lubatkin show that a firm s capacity to recognize assimilate and exploit external knowledge partly depends on the similarity between the exchange partners knowledge bases organizational systems and dominant logics another factor shown to be critical to the success of technology based firms is social capital social capital in a relationship enables the partners to tap into each thereby increase the depth and efficiency of mutual knowledge exchange which is considered a predominantly social process these factors influencing knowledge acquisition and transfer are analyzed and discussed separately in the literature we argue however that both the level of social capital embedded in the relationships and their knowledge relatedness affect the degree to which cvcs and portfolio can use their respective partners external knowledge and learn with those partners hence effective knowledge acquisition and transfer requires social capital and knowledge relatedness alike how these combined factors which we refer to as relational fit affect the interorganizational knowledge transfer between cvc and pc and ultimately the performance of pcs has not yet been investigated and empirically tested given the high number of cvcs dropping out of the market we analyze the relational fit factors triggering the combined success or failure of cvc and pc in this article we extend social capital theory by explaining two hitherto unconsidered aspects of social capital conative fit and affective fit second we social capital theory with the knowledge based view of the firm and thereby demonstrate the interrelatedness and combined importance of the two concepts the unit of analysis of this article is the exchange relationship between the cvc and its pcs we use qualitative information from different cvc pc relationships to provide initial exploratory evidence for our conceptual model of relational fit as an antecedent of knowledge transfer and creation relational fit who is the right partner to achieve radical innovation in a cvc pc relationship though seemingly straightforward this key question all but defies quick answers partly because some aspects important for answering it have not yet received due attention the related discussion in cvc research touches on strategic fit the relatedness of activities and structural congruence but between the partners are only seldom mentioned this gap is precisely what we wish to help bridge with the following analysis of relational fit and its impact on knowledge transfer in this section we discuss three published articles that address issues relevant to our line of reasoning the first of them is the well known and frequently cited article by nahapiet and ghoshal which comes close to our social capital they have developed a theoretical framework to explain how social capital may facilitate value creation by firms identify three dimensions of social capital structural relational and cognitive the structural dimension includes the ties of the social network and the location of an actor s contacts within the social structure of interaction in other words it deals with the presence or absence and kind of networks involved with the issues of who you how you reach them the relational dimension focuses on the particular quality of relations that an actor has specifically those relations that influence his or her behavior it is through these ongoing personal relationships that people abide by agreed rules and cooperate and act in the common interest among the key facets of this relational dimension are trust and norms to those resources providing shared representations interpretations and systems of meaning among parties an empirical test of this model shows that social interaction as a manifestation of the structural dimension of social capital and trust as a manifestation of its relational dimension are significantly related to the extent of interunit resource exchange which in turn had a significant effect on product innovation gemu nden et al further add to our understanding of the subject by introducing the concept of interorganizational fits which we expand on in our model gemu nden et al analyze the impact that the starting conditions of european multipartner research projects have on the progress and success of those projects in their conceptual model the fit between the partners consists of social fit resource fit the proposition of the researchers is that the better the goal fit or goal complementarity the better the projects progress and succeed their data analysis confirmed all hypotheses most of the identified starting conditions showed a positive substantial and significant correlation with most of the success measures to complement the concepts of fit introduced by gemu nden et al we draw on an fit by scholl who explored and described two new relevant types of fit taking a psychological point of view scholl develops a basic model of
factors the amplitude of the perturbation applied to every normal mode was based on the conservation of the secondary structure and the presence of steric clashes evaluated with procheck the relative movement interactive simulations of hcv used the structure reported by yao et al as described previously the fully solvated system was equilibrated for ns to simulate the system at the speed necessary for interaction several simplifications were required only water molecules and residues in a radius of a around the cooh terminus were included in the simulation the number of water molecules cooh terminus along its movement the simplified system contained atoms of which were free to move the interactive simulations used the force field the system was maintained at a temperature of through langevin damping with a coefficient of ps and the nonbonded interactions were simulated with cutoff four interactive simulations were helicase over of real time all interactive simulations were run on a sgi onix using processors results and discussion dengue model we were able to generate a model for the denv protein based on the reported structure for the full length polypeptide of hcv overall our model shows a different interface compared denv the adopted refinement strategy allowed interface optimization by side chain readjustment and optimization of the relative orientation between the functional domains of the whole model is composed of residues organized in five sub domains the interdomain chain has a random coil conformation with the contact regions involving domains is composed with residues of the serine protease and residues of the rna helicase the local interactions on the interface are mainly hydrophobic with the presence of six hydrogen bonds with residues from the adjacent domains we evaluated the stability of the model over a long md simulation the rmsd variation in fig shows that after sampled conformations along the trajectory is a with the higher mobility regions associated to residues present in loops indicating the stability of the secondary structure molecular dynamics simulation of and a ns md simulation was carried out for the to find mobility differences caused by the interaction between the protease and the helicase domains to achieve this we sampled conformations along the md simulation and calculated their rmsd fig presents a plot of the rmsd for the ca traces of the and structures along the simulation as shown almost all of these residues fall in two loops located between subdomains and of note that the ribbon trace has a very small radius at most parts of the protein showing the overall stability of the secondary structure together these data suggest that the presence of the serin which includes many of the residues involved in the binding and hydrolysis of ntps in addition the md simulation of the coordinates provides important structural information about the behavior in solution of the carboxy terminus of the helicase domain from the trajectory data analyzed it is possible to observe that the length of the last a helix increases as the simulation their data and he centers of mass from the moving and fixed domains previously reported structures for the isolated helicase domain however all structures reported to date for the have missing carboxy terminal residues due to the high mobility of this region our data support the hypothesis that upon release of the carboxy terminus from part of the residues residues remain in an extended state allowing them to form again the interface with in agreement with this in a recent study wang et al proposed that the conservation of the invariable residue instead of the optimal residue at the carboxy terminus of x is needed to prevent subsequent product inhibition of in to analyze the dynamic properties of full length we carried out an nma of the hcv model the use of elnemo allowed us to analyze the all atoms models with one residue at each rtb previous work from tama et al has shown that the use of this approximation has little impact on the calculated modes of the nma of we will here discuss the three lowest frequency normal modes the screw axis is almost perpendicular to the interface between both regions this and involves bending segments with a screw axis perpendicular to the first one the interface between the protease and the subdomain of the hcv helicase is not disrupted for the chosen amplitudes however most of the interface is involved in the flexible regions that couple movement between both supp material again subdomains and of the helicase form a quasi rigid unit in this normal mode the screw axis associated to the opening closure of the protease is almost parallel to its interface with the helicase moreover the movement of the protease is coupled to a reorientation of the subdomain of however this movement is more limited than the reorientation present in not disrupted for the chosen amplitudes and most of the hinge residues belong to this region according to our data the protease movements described in the normal modes and are coupled to the helicase by the residues at the interface between them in particular we found three regions and that lie in close proximity to the screw axis in both modes are of great importance as mechanical hinges coupling the movements of the protease domain to the helicase subdomain normal mode describes a closure movement between the subdomains and of while the protease domain in conjunction with the first subdomain of behaves as a quasi rigid unit in as well as subdomain normal mode analysis in denv next we analyzed the dynamic behavior of the denv full length model in order to compare the dynamic properties of this model with those of the hcv full length table shows the features of all domain motions associated to the normal modes analyzed not surprisingly denv shows a this protein lacks the contacts present in the carboxy terminus of the hcv model it is expected that a greater number of high collectivity movements will be present since the protease
jordan and the a coastal plain abuts the eastern edge of the mediterranean narrowing as it heads north into lebanon to its east a hilly zone rises as high as before sloping back down into the jordan valley in the jordan valley elevations plunge far below sea level nearly below at the dead sea finally the topography slopes down into the syrian and arabian deserts much of the syrian and northern arabian desert region is in fact steppic as is much of the jordan valley south of lake tiberias the truly desertic negev and sinai occupy the southernmost levant however most of the perennially inhabited parts of there are competing chronologies the southern levantine neolithic is most commonly divided according to a system initially created by kathleen kenyon and since refined by various scholars in this scheme the neolithic is divided into two general subperiods the pre pottery and the pottery neolithics the former is and the pre pottery neolithic which is also called the final ppnb the ensuing pottery neolithic or late neolithic is also often subdivided but this is problematic because the era is characterized by an assortment of often poorly dated and sometimes contemporaneous regional once presented as an evolutionary advance that would be embraced the development of agriculture was subsequently presented as a terrible blow to human well being adopted only as a last the shift from foraging to farming is now recognized as a tremendously complex undertaking that provided both important the character and variability of neolithic subsistence is therefore arguably the era s dominant research topic agriculture entails the establishment of permanent communities as well as the expansion and elaboration of social life the nature of social organization in the neolithic is therefore also of major interest topics of these categories encompass questions such as when were some people first employed in activities other than food production when did private households become more socioeconomically important than the broader community and was social inequality institutionalized during the neolithic and headless burials it provides a rich data set for investigating prehistoric symbolism and religion some archeologists such as concentrate on the ideology reflected in neolithic art architecture and burial practices others such as stress the functional aspects of neolithic to be a major interruption in an otherwise consistent pattern of evolutionary progress whereas the early neolithic is characterized by a reasonably steady increase in material and cultural complexity a profound cultural upheaval occurs in the mid neolithic reflected in a general downsizing of settlements and an apparent simplification decades related to all of these issues is the question of the interplay between neolithic developments and environmental changes paleoclimatic studies indicate that the neolithic occurred largely during a good climatic regime of year round rainfall and relatively warm winters the beginning of the neolithic coincided with that of the holocene climatic optimum although a cold dry period on the whole the southern levant during the early holocene was slightly warmer and wetter than it is today midway through the neolithic however there was a cool dry episode spanning perhaps two to four centuries the exact dating of the near east become available more archeologists are studying interactions within and between regions including the directions and pace of cultural and technological spread and even the implications of the new information regarding the validity of caprines cattle pigs and the transport of these animals across perhaps km of open ocean strongly suggests a high degree of human management that is not otherwise archeologically visible this inspires reconsideration of the importance of cultural control over animals before their physical domestication levant was far from isolated during the neolithic archaeology of the neolithic pre pottery neolithic a bc the beginnings of the southern levantine neolithic approximately years ago coincide roughly with the advent of the holocene climatic optimum the last epipaleolithic ter gatherers had been forced to adapt to the harshly cold and dry younger dryas the origins of the neolithic are thus associated with a marked climatic amelioration the southern levantine neolithic is clearly an indigenous development as there are strong elements of continuity from the natufian into the neolithic natufian into the neolithic the khiamian existed for only a brief span preceding the better known while others suggest the two may have been alternative functional adaptations or the products of access to different raw i cover a hectare or more and are up to eight times larger than any settlements in the preceding natufian in contrast iraq ed dubb nahal oren and others encompass at most only a few hundred square it is possible that these differences reflect the regional beginnings of a settlement but it is also possible that the variation is in the jordan valley or damascus basin while most of the smaller ones are in more variable and more peripherally located southern levantine ppna architecture is almost all domestic with the stunning exception of a wall and tower at jericho the houses are circular or oval meters in diameter mudbrick which would become the dominant near eastern building material most houses are semi subterranean although some are free standing and while some were made into two room units most houses consist of only a single room houses were typically placed irregularly around open areas with small features such as silos and ppna communal architecture is limited to a single spectacular example the massive jericho stone wall and tower the tower stood approximately meters high and had a diameter of meters at its base a narrow internal stairway provided access to its top the tower was placed inside the wall which itself was in a dramatic departure from ppna mortuary custom twelve adult skeletons were into a hole cut into a wall of the tower approximately five hundred years after its construction they remained there undisturbed despite the ppna tradition of postinterment of neither plant cultivation nor animal domestication rather this is the first period in which there is evidence of significant reliance on cultigens there is
a buyer meet at time to consider a project the project will certainly fail unless both parties invest in it though it may still fail even if both invest if the parties do not reach agreement and trade the seller s investment is wasted that is her investment is fully relation specific or it may benefit the seller even if the parties do not reach a deal for example the seller may benefit by learning more about the nature of demand for capital inputs in the mining industry even if the parties conclude that grinding machines will not sell the parties cannot contract on their project at because it is too complex in particular the project can take many forms and there are we assume in only one of the possible ex post states in that unique state the level of demand the financing and production cost structure are such that the parties can profitably produce one of the possible grinding machine types when both the set of possible project types and the set of possible ex post states are large and the parties do not know at the outset which of the possible project the project nevertheless the parties can agree at on the nature of the project on what each party broadly speaking is to do and on timing decisions after these initial investments there are two investment regimes in the first the parties agree to invest simultaneously in the second the parties agree that one party will invest first and the other will wait a period and then invest each party knows the distribution of costs from which the other s investment will be drawn and can observe the results of the investment but the precise timing and level of actual investment is private information in creating a set of plans the buyer ultimately can observe whether the seller created the plans however the buyer cannot know when the seller began to work or the level of the seller s investment that creating the plans turned out to require these assumptions are motivated by realism when parties are in different industries or trades it is difficult for each of them to observe the other s cost function each party believes however that if a court a fraction of the costs of her own completed investment for the reasons just given this fraction also is private information and so is not contractible in both investment regimes the parties learn which of the possible project types if any would be profitable to produce after time has passed and at least one party has invested in the grinding machine example the seller s research may reveal that no new grinding machine that only one machine type could sell in the actual ex post state investment and the resolution of uncertainty thus play two roles they reveal whether a project would be profitable and they make profitable projects sufficiently tangible to be realized in final contracts the parties cannot write a final contract before the ex post state of the world is revealed although ex ante contracting has been shown to ex ante contracting cannot encourage efficient investment in the contexts we describe even when parties cannot contract directly on investment behavior the ex ante contract could induce efficient investment if it could appropriately allocate the expected surplus that the contemplated transaction would yield for example if one party must incur the larger share of the investment cost of the expected surplus the preliminary agreements we study cannot affect investment behavior in this way however we assume consistent with the common view that it is difficult to contract directly on expected profits or costs si that parties can observe but cannot verify to a court the expected surplus from the complex projects that we model when a court cannot observe a project s surplus it cannot enforce a contract that attempts to allocate that surplus each party to choose the efficient investment level the inability to contract on surplus directly would not be fatal however if the parties either could commit not to renegotiate their ex ante contract or could specify in that contract the project type the parties hoped later to produce and trade regarding the possibility of renegotiation suppose that only the seller is to invest the ex ante the investment stage is over the seller will then make an offer awarding to her the full surplus that trade will generate anticipating this payoff the seller will invest efficiently that is she will invest to increase expected surplus until the marginal gain from further investment equals the marginal cost contracts that allocate bargaining power to a seller in this way cannot work however if buyer can refuse the seller s take it or leave it offer and propose a new division of the surplus then the seller s choice will be to bargain over the division to renegotiate the ex ante contract or to forgo gains because parties are reluctant to leave money on the table the seller would renegotiate and she seldom could bargain to capture the entire gain but any seller who anticipated not being able to appropriate the full value from her investment in a project would underinvest the expected gain because parties cannot commit not to renegotiate under current law the proposed contract or variants of it for cases in which both parties must invest cannot induce efficient investment specifying the project type through specific performance contracts would also be ineffective in the contexts we consider parties can if the parties know in advance that they will either trade a particular grinding machine or not trade their ex ante contract can require the seller to deliver that machine at a fixed price if the state of the world turns out to be favorable if a court would enforce this contract specifically and if the price were appropriately chosen the contract could induce efficient investment however even if the parties in our model the parties could not specify in advance just what project type they would later want to trade because there are
rate it was found that with the increase of strain rate the elastic region decreased the first significant nonlinearly behavior occurred after the elastic region as a result of microbuckling and some matrix microcracking around peak load elastic region and nonlinear behavior but it was different from in plane direction because the loading pressed in the longitudinal direction not in the transverse direction because there are some yarns in out of plane direction the elastic behavior was affected by the yarns and the other yarns in any region there existed some relative damage modes hsr loading compressive behavior of hsr tests were conducted using a modified shpb samples were subjected to impact loading in in plane fill direction in plane warp direction and out of plane direction quasi static tests were conducted to compare the results with hsr loading following conclusions were drawn from the study peak stress and stiffness were higher for dynamic loading as the sample had considerable time for deformation and load redistribution under static loading the strains were higher strain at peak stress was found to be about and times higher in case of static loading as compared to dynamic loaded samples in the in pane warp fill direction and out of plane direction the peak stress and modulus increased with the increase when the samples were loaded in the fill as compared to the warp direction loading the failure strain in through the thickness direction was far higher than in in plane warp and fill direction dynamic studies of polypropylene nonwovens in environmental materials under different conditions the dynamic experiments of water wetting oil sorption and loading deformation of polypropylene nonwovens in the esem were studied in this paper water wetting tests were performed by controlling the temperature of the specimens and chamber pressure in favor of water condensation at humidity the wetting by oil was made using a micro injector to add oil droplets onto specimens being observed the esem observations revealed the contrast in the wetting behavior of the pp nonwovens towards water and oil tensile testing experiments in the wetting behavior of the pp nonwovens towards water and oil tensile testing experiments were performed in the esem using a tensile stage the dynamic studies gave new insight into microscopic behavior of pp nonwovens introduction of applications in many industries such as agricultural automotive building and construction medical and hygiene packaging protective clothing sportswear transport defence leisure and safety one of the most important factors fuelling the growth of nonwovens is the development and application of man made fibers dominated by characteristic properties the characterization of a nonwoven material under varying or dynamic conditions is of importance in understanding how the particular structure of the material is engineered and therefore how it relates to the properties of the product microscopy technology has provided the tools for the observation analysis and explanation in these studies however the high vacuum and the imaging process in sems impose special requirements for specimen preparation specimens that are not naturally conductive must be coated with a thin layer of a conductive material to bleed off any charge on the specimens imposed by the incident electron beam one major disadvantage of the sem scanning electron microscopy is a newer development in microscope technology which is specifically suited to dynamic experimentation on the micron scale the philips esem was used for the dynamic experiments of water wetting oil sorption and tensile deformation of polypropylene nonwovens in this study the details are listed in table esem esem represents several important advances in scanning electron microscopy as it is able to image uncoated and hydrated samples by means of a differential pumping system and a gaseous secondary electron detector a differential pumping system allows the vacuum pressure limiting apertures allow the electron beam to pass through but minimise the leakage of gases between zones pumped at different rates the esem has a unique gsed which is based on the principle of gas ionization when the primary electron beam hits the specimen it causes the specimen to emit secondary electrons the electrons collide with the gas molecules in the chamber resulting in emission of more electrons and ionization of the gas molecules this increase in the amount of electrons effectively amplifies the original secondary electron signal the positively charged gas ions are attracted to the negatively biased specimen and offset charging effects therefore an esem is able to micron scale and below esem technology allows for dynamic experiments at a range of pressures temperatures and under a variety of gases fluids some accessories can also be added into an esem to expand its observation capacity a micro injector can be installed in the specimen chamber for applying liquids during examination a specimen heating system is available and a further analysis using image software dynamic experiments wetting by water in the esem specimens can be hydrated or dehydrated by controlling the temperature of the specimens and chamber pressure in favor of water condensation or evaporation at different relative humidity in water wetting experiments the specimen was pp is not good it is more convenient to pre set the temperature and to adjust the relative humidity by changing the pressure within the chamber images were acquired at a temperature of as this minimised the risk of accidental freezing as relative humidity reached water condensed onto the surface of the sample observations on water droplets on the oil in this experiment light oil with a viscosity of cp was used as the fluid medium the specimen was placed on the specimen holder and the oil was added onto the specimen in the esem chamber using a micro injector mounted on the chamber the injection needle of the micro injector was just above the specimen and the injection rate was set at the dynamic tensile behavior of materials in this examination the specimen was cm cm cut in the machine direction and was placed on the tensile stage which was fixed in the esem chamber the load
of around is clear from the fact that is a regular level hypersurface of moreover because is orthogonal to the metric ahas the form with smooth positive functions on our neighborhood this means that by replacing ain this neighborhood with the product metric we do not perturb the flow lines of therefore our assumption is in no way restrictive morse smale function such that for m we have except in a small tubular neighborhood with respect to this parametrization let be a morse smale function with a regular value for every morse smale function with a and every d there exists an splitting of along the morse complexes of a splitting of along let ph be the chain map defined by the split injections the algebraic mapping cone of ph is the morse complex of a splitting the cokernel of ph is the algebraic mapping cone of with j the natural projection multiplying with a sufficiently small constant we may assume that the image of belongs to with such that a let by using lemmas for each ct a morse smale function of along such that agrees with outside applying lemma to the two cobordisms and and lemma to the cobordism in particular is a linear combination of the form an appropriate function with a similar linear combination is valid inside to understand the pasting between the cobordism and for example notice that on we we have cobordisms having as high end this allows the pasting to occur by simply using in the formula above defined on a larger interval say and using the same formula to define on both sides of for a generic choice of the function is already morse smale with respect to the metric a in general to obtain a function assume that the construction has been made such that and by adjusting the various relevant constants we see that is a splitting of along with the required properties immediate from the definition and construction of a splitting assembly of the morse complex given the algebraic data extracted from a splitting of a morse smale function composite chain map to be a good approximation of the attaching chain map definition a morse smale function is morse smale with a for any for any crit and any function for any splitting of along with sufficiently small there exists a chain homotopy defining a simple isomorphism there exist morse smale functions if at then there exist splittings of along with equivalently we have the equality or explicitly appeared in the literature however a closely related result is that of laudenbach and has been extended to valued functions by hutchings to see the relation with these results notice that in the situation of proposition the based free module chain complex is the morse complex of a morse smale function of laudenbach describe the modifications occurring in the morse complex after the birth of two mutually annihilating critical points of successive indexes by applying iteratively his result when cancelling all such pairs of critical points of that belong to one obtains a function whose morse complex does equal moreover this function may be assumed to be close to therefore this argument together with the rigidity theorem prove the point of the theorem on the other hand this is not enough to show the point the reason is that cancelling of critical points is a non unique operation and there is no way to insure in general that the function obtained at the end of this process is close to and has therefore a morse complex identical to that of because of this we shall prove the whole theorem immediate by using morse cobordisms other constructions related to the gluing formula appear in pajitnov the role of our formula is played there by an analysis of the intersections of stable and unstable manifolds of with the stable and unstable manifolds of is small enough then is sufficiently close to such that and we may construct such that it restricts to linear cobordisms with a product metric on and on we use the notations in proposition denote by the chain map induced function we obtain an adapted is verified in particular this means that crit we either have wuf we then modify such as to perturb the stable manifolds wgs to render them transverse to wuf for all pairs this modification is performed successively for of increasing indexes and it may be achieved without modifying those unstable manifolds we also have that wgs is transversal to wgu this means that if wgs intersects wuf in a point which belongs also to wgu then wgs is already transversal to wuf at this point we also need to modify our function such as to make wgu transversal to the stable manifolds of obviously we need to insure that condition in definition is preserved and therefore the critical points such that wgu follows that wgu is transverse to these stable manifolds and no modification of wgu is needed in case indg that wgu we then perturb wgu be satisfied it is useful to note that one can obtain in this way an adapted that is arbitrarily close in norm to the function that was given initially we now assume that recall the functions constructed in the proof of proposition we shall work below with functions properties of the adapted the function is morse smale with respect to a therefore is itself a splitting and we will show below that any such splitting with sufficiently small verifies the conclusion by inspecting the construction in we see that in each point of and for this we start with a linear cobordism of morse smale functions between and with fixed we assume we denote by deformation parameter of we may also assume that in a neighborhood m function has the form we shall identify below and and outside of the function is smooth because outside of and it is clear gradient of
his classic study of life in an elementary classroom philip jackson showed how integral authority is to the daily routines of classroom culture he coined the term hidden curriculum to characterize the unofficial three s rules routines and regulations constituting the implicit lessons that shore up authority from jackson we learn that hidden curriculum does not necessarily further intellectual development its impact on socializing students to the norms values and purposes of schooling is profound we also learn that maintaining order is the top priority as teachers respond not only to their own concerns but also to those of their superiors jackson s up close examination emphasized the consistencies of classroom life but he did not take full account of the especially important fact teacher student authority relations are highly negotiable social constructions that shape life in classrooms the generalizations that jackson made do not always hold in the midst of the myriad influences shaping these relations metz emphasized this fact in her pioneering ethnographic study of two desegregated junior high schools conducted in the late she framed her research in terms of social theories that define authority as a social relationship in legitimacy as leaders others accept more subordinate roles and everyone owes allegiance to a moral order but as metz made clear there was major conflict over the negotiation of authority in the two schools both of which served a large cadre of students from white upper middle class families and a population of poorer mostly black children although each school was typical in structure and curriculum there was notable variation in authority relations inside and outside classrooms metz showed that inside influences included teachers own conceptions of learning and teaching the types of authority roles they enacted and the resources and strategies they used to gain control they also included students orientations to schooling their academic abilities and sociocultural characteristics especially their race and social class institutional influences included tracking faculty culture administrative leadership and local community and national factors were vital the schools were located in a university town at the forefront of the social and political rebellions of the late and these conflicts were manifested in classroom authority relations metz did generalize about the approaches of different teachers which she characterized as incorporative and developmental incorporative teachers the transmission of standardized content consisting of tried and true knowledge skills values and norms some invoked the traditional model of in loco parentis authority in which they insisted that students obey simply because they were told to obey others relied on legal rational forms of authority in which students were expected to follow the orders of a boss developmental teachers were younger and more liberal they interpreted the moral order as the development of the whole their curriculum was open ended rather than fixed and they identified students prior knowledge experiences and interests to make education more personally relevant they enacted the roles of facilitators and expert professionals and responded to students challenges by explaining how their commands would help them learn and realize their individual potential although jackson and metz examined authority within the confines studied alternative high schools that deliberately eliminated formal authority group high a free school that enrolled mostly white middle class students and ethnic high which served racially diverse low income and working class students faculty members and administrators in both schools embraced the progressive position that teacher domination and student subordination interfere with meaningful instruction and the realization of a just democratic society rather than giving or asserting professional expertise teachers relied on their personal influence and prestige acknowledged their vulnerabilities and used other appeals for cooperation in the hopes of forging closer bonds with students although this trade off gave students more freedom to express themselves and participate in democratic decision making it also put teachers into highly tenuous situations the result of giving up authority swidler explained was to put a tremendous premium on a teacher s ability to make himself charming interesting or glamorous enough so that intimacy would be an enticing reward although egalitarian relations made the schools more comfortable for students such relations incited resistance especially at ethnic high where students felt that their easygoing teachers were not doing their jobs they wanted teachers to exercise authority many teachers ended up quitting out of sheer exhaustion on variations in the character of relations between teachers and students the ways these relations are negotiated and the powerful influences of internal and external factors metz s and swidler s studies are particularly important in their analytical applications of social theory and recognition of political and ideological influences they also laid the empirical groundwork for exploring how paradoxical tensions of schooling they did not include case studies of individual classrooms although metz captured the variations of authority roles and relations that existed she did not show how these types often become blended in individual classrooms nor how the character of authority relations within one classroom can fluctuate over time studies of high schools in the resolve the demands of educating diverse student bodies within the inhospitable factory like structures of schools many of them win the cooperation of adolescent students with many different interests and needs through bargains treaties compromises and other tactics good grades are often exchanged for cooperative behavior and cooperation or striking bargains whereby teachers receive less grief if they ease their demands often these tactics entail the lowering of academic standards especially as teachers feel pressured to accommodate and keep the peace with a racially socioeconomically and academically heterogeneous clientele powell et al emphasized the values of diversity and individualism that pervade the shopping mall high school and suggested that these values understandings of the common good page s analysis went further in explaining the cultural paradox of egalitarianism in service to the common good in which students are to be treated the same and on the other hand individualism in which students are to be treated differently according to their different needs this contradictory
degree of damage in thin layers and provided important and useful data on concrete properties for engineering assessment which was not available from nde alone compressive strength results were consistent with the results of other tests but largely inconclusive by themselves impact echo testing was able to identify the presence of a severely deteriorated concrete layer but could not identify the extent or depth of damage or clearly identify less damaged areas a distressed layer of concrete was found by subsequent laboratory testing to be limited to a near surface zone in some areas as suggested by the pulse velocity evaluation but pulse velocity based analysis resulted in an overestimate of the depth of the damage the findings highlighted a shortcoming of using conventional strength testing alone on investigations involving relatively thin layers of of damage and pointed out several key limitations in the use and interpretation of nondestructive evaluation and associated analysis in a field assessment project introduction a fire occurred in a steel framed industrial building with a concrete slab on grade destroying the steel superstructure and visibly damaging portions of the concrete slab the warehouse had contained rubber materials and fossil fuels which contributed days for the fire to be extinguished completely the remnants of the steel frame were demolished and removed from the site following the fire an engineering assessment was conducted to evaluate the potential for reusing the concrete slab in a warehouse application with heavy fork lift traffic the concrete slab on grade had a specified compressive damaged plant structure the picture was taken from the distressed warehouse slab on grade after removal of the steel frame visible distress in the form of spalling and pink discoloration in spalled areas was noted in some areas of the exposed slab fig the engineering assessment included on site nondestructive evaluation nde using pulse velocity and impact echo techniques young s modulus ed and the air permeability index api of mm in thick disks disks were sawed from cores removed from selected areas of the slab conventional compressive strength of cores was also determined the capability of analyzing concrete disks in relatively shallow mm in depths enabled evaluation of both the depth and the extent of fire damage to the concrete based on quantitative evaluation using important of concrete nondestructive evaluation nde of the concrete slab was performed in selected areas using pulse velocity and impact echo techniques both of these techniques use pressure waves in concrete the apparent velocity of which is affected by the presence of defects deterioration damage or cracks in the concrete pulse velocity equipment used in the field assessment consisted of a commercially available pulse velocity meter with a digital readout cm in diameter transducers with a frequency of khz shielded coaxial connection cables and a reference bar for calibration a commercially available watersoluble gel was used as the acoustic coupling agent between the transducers and concrete fig by chung and law this method provides an estimate of the depth of a fire damaged surface layer which has a lower wave speed than the underlying sound concrete the technique requires determining the time of travel of a pressure wave to different points along a straight line measurements are taken on the surface of the slab as the distance between the transducers is increased faster wave through the underlying sound concrete will arrive at the transducer first a change in slope in the distance time plot occurs when the pulse travel time in the top damaged concrete layer is greater than the pulse travel time through the underlying sound concrete the depth of the distressed layer is estimated based on the change in slope of the plot of transducer distance against pulse travel time naik and malhotra or aci committee report nondestructive test methods for evaluation of concrete in structures aci aci where d estimated depth of the damaged layer from the top surface from the origin to the point of change in slope vs apparent velocity in the sound concrete and vd apparent velocity in the damaged concrete be in consistent units impact echo nondestructive evaluation of selected areas was performed using the impact echo technique in general accordance with astm standard test method for measuring the wave speed and the thickness of concrete plates using the impact echo method astm fig the impact echo technique is based on stress wave propagation and commonly used on concrete members the boundaries of the member the frequency of the reflected waves from the bottom or from any existing internal flaw or discontinuities can be used to determine the depth to the bottom of the slab or to internal discontinuities voids delaminations or other discrete flaws such as cracks within the slab signal analysis is conducted in the frequency domain the frequency domain is converted from the time domain using fast a waveform data sequence consisting of in data points to be analyzed for this study data points were selected the ability to identify features depends primarily on reflections due to discrete differences in the acoustic impedance of the layers such as between a concrete slab and the subgrade or discontinuities such as air in large voids delaminations or cracks the impact echo technique may not be able to detect layers when or gradual as would occur with reasonably well bonded layers with relatively small differences in elastic modulus with depth this condition could be expected in a fire damaged slab which has not delaminated or in the presence of a damage gradient without discrete cracking the purpose of the supplemental impact echo testing was not concrete as suggested by kesner et al kesner et al report that signal attenuation can be used with impact echo testing to help assess the extent of damage to concrete the energy lost by the pressure wave as it moves through damaged regions is a function of the amount of damage in that region signal attenuation was reported to be proportional to extent of damage the presence or extent
either increasing sales volume or securing productivity improvements and our previous research had suggested that the higher performing firms were more likely to prioritise the adoption of an aggressive strategy based on the pursuit of increased sales however the interviews revealed little difference between the two groups in this respect even though most of the marketing executives initially insisted that a major priority was to raise sales volume almost within the same breath they were quick to point out that in a competitive industrial environment simultaneous productivity improvements in the factory were of at least equal importance upon further questioning it was evident pursuit of productivity improvements not so much as a cost cutting exercise as the ongoing development of a distinctive competence which would enhance their firm s ability to compete by being a low cost producer with regard to the firm s choice of target customers the direction of discussion surrounding this topic was essentially always the same whereas the respondents in the lower performers were seeking to broaden it two remarks illustrate this polarity of approach our strategy has been to concentrate on certain specialist markets with highly specialist products and services that are better than anyone else s and it s working compared with it s not so much a strategy as a never ending challenge for us to produce the product with performers were concentrating their efforts on providing selected large corporate customers with increasingly specialized and customized products and services and seeking to build deeply embedded long term relationships with these customers the lower performers were looking to expand their market coverage accordingly the descriptions of target customers given by were far more detailed indeed two of those were able to refer to written strategy statements that profiled their firm s target customers and one commented we have a clearly written strategy for each of our markets it specifies the sales and cost targets for the year as well as target customers and the competitive platform upon which we wish to compete it s our blueprint for all managerial decision making another was even able to provide a document that he called a hit list of list of target businesses with whom his firm was aiming to do business by the end of the year he remarked that there s actually a different strategy for every customer because every customer wants something different the trick is to target the right customers in the first place further unlike their counterparts from the lower performing firms the these respondents emphasized that their competitive advantage was based on the provision their target customers attached to high product quality when asked to define what that meant the higher performers explained it in terms of what the customer wanted rather than technical excellence alone as one put it we aim to offer world class solutions for customers in our little pocket of the market which in turn helps them to offer world class solutions to their customers and so on it s a kind of in relation to the achievement of high product quality the impression was that the higher performing companies paid much more attention to the strategic aspects of their and manufacturing capability all three respondents explaining that their companies had seen fit to re equip their factories completely over the previous ten years indeed they all alluded to the growing importance of securing new process innovations and manufacturing methods for the explicit purpose of enhancing and the ability to adapt and respond to differing target customer requirements they asserted that their marketing strategies were being facilitated and to some extent driven by rapid technological advancements in their manufacturing processes this is consistent with findings of other studies further discussion revealed that the development of increasingly customized new of marketing strategy for the higher performers discussion often centered around a number of methods by which they sought to work more closely with their customers suppliers and distributors and other influential parties in the channel such as finance companies industry experts consultants and advisors many of these initiatives were described as coming about through the deliberate cultivation of personal networks although one commonly mentioned approach this process was what one respondent described as team selling he was describing a process in which a particular salesperson is made responsible for overseeing the interface between one or more specific customer accounts and a hand picked team of specialist members of the company s staff the aim is to build interpersonal links with key members of each customer s decision making unit in order to cross fertilize relationships and all for the purpose of customizing their products and in ways that would achieve maximum customer satisfaction indeed the interviews suggested that among the higher performers a focus on serving selected large corporate customers with innovative and highly customized products and services was becoming increasingly important as an ideas driver itself as one respondent observed our main sources of ideas are our customers if something matters to them it matters to us but then of course we only find out about these ideas because we we re constantly in a dialogue with them listening to them and working with them however this highly customer specific approach to innovation was not spoken of as customer partnering or forming strategic alliances in any strict or formalized sense in fact the higher performing firms viewed their independence and consequent strategic flexibility as being of paramount importance high performers make greater use of marketing information systems respondents were asked to detail the nature and extent of their use of marketing information systems as well as their marketing intelligence gathering and marketing control activities their responses suggested that by far the most important mechanism for marketing intelligence gathering was sales force reporting recalling the discussions of the role of market research in this respect however the higher performing companies once again differed from information covered and its detail their salespeople collected feedback information in all key areas typically via daily and or
was influential in the creation of all subsequent design concepts numerous initial visual ideas were explored based on the photograph of a stained window the repeating pattern was developed from an initial concept using this motif by bernath the poppy motif was scanned and manipulated by bernath to bottom over the window pattern a mutual decision was made that this design would not repeat between the selvedges but would be developed as a large scale design refinement of the motif was aided through the use of precision measurement and copying tools in the software and the repeating unit devised to flow perfectly within the hand render when equivalent complex tonal imagery is used the intention was to explore the potential of digital ink jet printing to provide tonal and color gamut on fabric that would be difficult if not impossible to achieve via analogue print processes the opportunity to share the developing imagery via the website and receive feedback through regular email and telephone conversations assisted the decision the poppy design and imagery was translated between the evolving ideas the necessity to upload artwork and pause the creative process while awaiting a response from the collaborator provided opportunity for periods of reflection on the emergent design sch describes how iterative periods of reflection are fundamental to creative practice and are used to inform future actions be quickly modified to create multiple options for further exploration findings from the research indicate that the subsequent decision making process can be exhausting for the artist in non digital practice the hand rendering process takes time and provides periods of reflection in parallel to fabrication of the artwork sternberg and tardiff contend that to develop and critical aesthetic decisions to be considered the digital crafting process has been observed to encourage non reflective thinking findings from this investigation indicate that the punctuated collaborative working process enables reflection to occur when work is exchanged and forces appraisal of the developing concept the reflective periods also stimulate changes in color scale and repeat pattern construction can be applied and visualized with the ease when working digitally each iterative stage in development can be saved and earlier renditions of a design reinstated if the subsequent changes do not work research cited by amabile has found that extrinsic factors such as fear and risk can have a detrimental effect on creative thinking the fear of ruining hours of and risk taking enhanced this marks a considerable change when compared to non digital practice benefiting innovative thinking in the development stage of product or artifact verification and sampling at various stages in the investigation work in progress was digitally ink jet sampled either on paper by the designer or on fabric by the researcher the facility to digitally share this is a great advantage compared to hand rendered artwork where usually only one original copy exists nevertheless there are also significant difficulties concerning the communication of color across networks and media for those visual arts practitioners working outside industry with no access to commercial calibration tools this impacts creative practice in are regarded in a positive way and considered to be potential avenues for further exploitation campbell and polvinen confirm these findings recommending that color management difficulties be approached empirically campbell gives a thorough assessment of these issues accuracy in color data transfer across networks and between digital monitors peripherals and printing devices is a major design project accuracy in color calibration was not considered a primary concern although some color matching was attempted using paper hardcopy as a creative tool the facility to rapidly modify color hue tone and saturation proved invaluable in the design development stage color plays a vital role in the coordination of design concepts and digital tools were used to agreed at the outset of the investigation provided certain fixed criteria for the selection of successful design ideas and provided direction for appropriate development decision making was guided by the practitioners tacit knowledge of designing for apparel fabrics and knowledge that both collaborators had a proven track record of designing for industry although certain objectives had been set at the and refrain from restricting the visual characteristics to any preconceived solution in the end product the final verification stage of design development took the form of prototype sampling onto a variety of woven substrates using a mimaki digital ink jet printer photographs of the printed samples were emailed to the designer to provide rapid feedback prior to the mailing of before the final lengths of fabric were printed the digital process enabled selection from a far wider variety of choices in design solutions than would have been available using analogue design methods to create a variety of prototype fabric samples via traditional processes would have been both costly and time consuming concept generation through to design development and verification the subsequent section summarizes findings arising from the investigations highlighting issues that impact on distributed collaborative digital creative practice shared skills and values dormer describes the creative process as the interplay between what we see now and how we interpret investigations the opportunity to digitally exploit visual imagery collected with the collaborators during the case study visits proved invaluable in the origination of concepts the visits were also fundamental to the mutual understanding of common values and skills commonalities in definition and description of aesthetic characteristics and values were identified and alignment of ideals and goals was utilize complementary as well as shared skills and knowledge combining professional experiences of both practitioners the united intention of both practitioners to make work that evolved from the shared experience and memory provided clear end goal focus and added momentum to the project in each investigation critical aesthetic judgments were successful creative collaborative practice was identified in data obtained from a post investigation feedback questionnaire all three practitioners cited trust and empathy as being essential attributes for successful collaboration the shared physical experience of the case study interview enabled this trust to be established and an empathic relationship to
values range data analysis differences in butterfly and diurnal moth communities study conditions and environmental variables between the intersections and control areas were tested with the non parametric mann whitney test only variables measured on interval or ratio scale were tested to account for the possible lack of area were used consequently a comparison of lepidoptera abundances between sites censused in and was conducted to rule out the possibility of bias caused by the different weather conditions during the two seasons differences in species assemblages were analysed by ordination using detrended correspondence analysis on their similarities in species composition all program defaults were used no data transformations were conducted and all species were included in the analyses differences in the species assemblages of the two groups were further studied with a non parametric multi response permutation procedure using a euclidean distance measure multiple regressions were conducted to characterize environmental variables that affect the species richness and abundance of butterflies and diurnal moths within intersections the analyses were performed using the mixed procedure of the sas statistical package the same intersection the dependent variables in the regression analyses included the total number of species and individuals the number of meadow butterfly species and individuals and the number of meadow moth species and individuals due to many significant correlations among the environmental variables measured principal components analysis was used to reduce the data to a interpretable gradient were selected as possible explanatory variables in the multiple regressions and the intersection was included as a random effect parameter prior to any analyses dependent variables were inspected for normality and skewness and were transformed where appropriate by either logarithmic or squareroot transformation results recorded the species richness and abundance was generally higher in control sites except in the case of moth individuals the most significant differences occurred in the species richness and the abundance of forest edge and field butterflies nevertheless some study sites located in intersections had high numbers of both moth and butterfly individuals as indicated by outliers in fig and abundance in control sites compared to intersections intersection line median box first and third quartiles whiskers largest and smallest observations falling within a distance of times the box size from the nearest quartile circles outliers observations with values between and box lengths from the upper or lower edge of the box stars extreme cases observations with values box lengths from the upper or lower edge of the box means and statistical between the two groups are given the majority of butterfly species recorded were typical of forest edges and clearings and meadows in general there were more meadow and less forest edge butterfly species in the intersection sites and control sites data included three endangered species in finland the butterflies euphydryas aurinia and lycaena dispar and a geometrid moth scopula rubiginata all recorded in control sites only species assemblages in intersections and control sites differed forest edges meadows and fields were located separately along axes and meadow species had higher values and forest species lower values along axis whereas field species had higher values along axis such a pattern was not observed among diurnal moths according to mrpp the two habitat groups differed significantly in both butterfly species assemblages for intersections namely lythria cruentaria euclidia glyphica and cerapteryx graminis whereas a total of butterflies and moths were indicative there were no differences in the total lepidoptera abundance butterfly abundance or diurnal moth abundance between the ordination of butterflies included vegetation height soil moisture the proportion of forests in the surrounding landscape the number of nectar plant species and age the only variable with a strong correlation to axis was the proportion of cultivated areas in the surrounding landscape between the age and axis and the vegetation height the number of plant species negatively indicating traditional biotopes soil moisture and soil sandiness with axis fig dca ordination illustrating the differences between butterfly and forests is also shown environmental variables associated with intersections rich in butterflies and moths principal components analysis of the environmental data of intersections produced six independent factors with an eigen value the first five were regarded as interpretable representing the variance in the data the first component represented a gradient from sites of old age high vegetation and nectar plant richness to artificial of the vegetation the second component represented a gradient from sandy soil to moist soil and the third component a gradient of the proportion of cultivated areas in the surrounding environment the fourth component most likely represented a gradient of the proportion of uncultivated open areas in the surrounding environment and the fifth component represented the mowing intensity was the only significant predictor for the total species richness and the relationship was negative ie the older the site and the higher the plant species richness with less artificial vegetation the more species were recorded none of the principal components were significant for meadow species richness on the other hand the second and fifth principal components mowing intensity the higher the number of individuals recorded the principal component representing the soil moisture was significant in explaining the meadow butterfly abundance whereas none explained the diurnal moth abundance table descriptive statistics and differences in environmental conditions between intersection mann whitney test table variable loadings in pca of components with the explainable gradients and their correlations with the environmental variables table principal components explaining species and individuals richness of all lepidoptera meadow butterflies and meadow moths discussion intersections as lepidoptera habitats our results suggest that the majority of intersections under however the butterfly species richness of best intersections was as high as in the average control sites butterfly species other than those typical to meadows clearly favored the control sites most likely due to the higher proportion of forests and cultivated open areas near these transects although the differences in the surrounding landscape were not significant for example some traditional biotopes had clumps edge of a forest a forest edge has a positive sheltering and diversifying effect on butterfly species
for each task was also computed the percentages ranged from as low as for the skunk task to a high of the david and amy task in addition the mean percentage of time participants oriented to the monitor for the three dialogue tasks and for the three lecturette tasks was computed finally the mean percentage of time to the monitor for the first two tasks combined and the final two tasks combined was computed these figures can be seen in table test whether there was a difference in the percentage of time the participants oriented to the video monitor for the different types of texts a repeated measures t test was conducted it was found that the set of participants oriented to the video monitor at a higher rate for the dialogue texts than for the lecturette texts and this difference was statistically significant these figures are summarized in table test whether there was a difference in the percentage of time the participants oriented to the video monitor for the beginning of the test and for the final portion of the test another repeated measures t test was conducted it was found that the participants oriented to the video a higher percentage of the time for the final two tasks than for the initial two tasks although this difference was not statistically significant these figures are summarized in table question how do listening test takers interact with a video text to what extent do they orient to the video monitor while the video text is playing video text was playing these results suggest that the test takers interacted extensively with the video text orienting to the video monitor over two thirds of the time this finding itself seems important because there has been no systematic and quantitative investigation of whether test takers even watch the video when taking an listening test because there is no figure to compare the results of this with it is difficult to say if this figure of more or less however in light of anecdotal accounts of observations of test takers by researchers who have commented that the video might not be useful for test takers because they do not even watch the video monitor this finding does seem to be important in that it indicates that the test takers in this study did indeed orient to the video monitor for a large portion of the time while the text was being played noted that while the mean orienting rate for the set of test takers was there was a great range of orienting behavior as was seen in figure in fact of the test takers oriented to the video monitor at least the time while of the test takers oriented to the video monitor less than the time thus rather than interpreting the mean as indicative of the orienting rate for each of the individual test takers it can be interpreted as indicating that orienting rate varied widely as a group the test takers did tend to orient to the video while the text was played the issue of attention is relevant here listeners because of their lack of linguistic knowledge and limited processing capacity quite often can experience information overload the test instrument used in the current study was probably perceived as a cognitively demanding task by many of the test takers they had to listen to six fairly in a foreign language that were spoken at normal speeds with natural language the test takers had to read the comprehension questions and remember these questions while listening to the text they had to remember the answers to the questions and write the correct answers however the results of this study indicated that even when faced with test tasks that might be causing the test takers to reach the point of cognitive overload testtakers still tended to orient additional input source the video monitor with the video texts the test takers had the choice of where to devote their attentional resources if they felt that it would be more efficient and worthwhile to allocate their attentional resources to process both the visual and the aural input they were able to do this if they felt that it was more efficient and worthwhile to ignore the visual input completely they were able to do this the test takers were able to focus their in whichever manner they felt was most advantageous for them to comprehend the text this is similar to the target language use domain where listeners are generally able to focus their attentional resources in the manner most advantageous to comprehension research question is the test takers orienting behavior affected by the type of text that is being played in other words do the test takers orient to the video monitor at a higher rate for a particular text type the statistical analysis indicated that the percentage of time test takers oriented to the video monitor for the three dialogue texts was higher than the percentage of time they oriented to the three lecturette texts while this difference was statistically significant at the level the practical significance of this finding is less clear it was anticipated that the test takers would watch the dialogue texts a larger percentage of the time because test takers would find these texts inherently more interesting while the lecturette texts are on fairly academic subjects the dialogue texts are more oriented to interpersonal communication with two speakers discussing events that i had hypothesized would mirror the interests of the test takers the bob and julie text has one of the speakers complaining about his grade in a class the david and amy text has one of the speakers recounting a funny incident that happened in class the laura and jimmy text has one of the speakers complaining about another student in his group project the test takers were observed laughing and smiling a number of times while they were watching and listening to these texts which was not
active zone a site specific seismic hazards assessment was carried out to assess various close out measures for the tailings impoundment the analysis determined that a maximum credible earthquake event of magnitude corresponding to a per annum probability of occurrence would result in a median peak ground acceleration of and a mean peak ground acceleration and flowslide over the retention dams because of the elevation of these slimes in their present location the soil of interest in the present context is the very fine deposits found in the backwater areas an example of a cpt sounding in the backwater area is shown in fig the basic measured cpt data are plotted as well as the two dimensionless standard ratios for the silt of particular interest lies between and below the surface and it can be readily identified by the extremely high bq values induced during cpt sounding the tip resistance during sounding was very low less than mpa for the entire silt layer the friction ratio was typical of silt and fluctuated quite tightly around tip stress even allowing that uc and qt are measured at different locations values of bq much above are unlikely it can be seen that bq is certainly close to but the numeric value is susceptible to transducer accuracy and digital discretization the silt has a downward seepage regime being drained by the underlying tailings sands and alluvial foundation in situ from a number of multilevel standpipe monitoring wells in the impoundment installed to investigate water quality the silts remain saturated as the surface water resupply rate exceeds the underdrainage this is further confirmed by the extremely high bq which could only occur with a saturated soil the cpt data were processed to give the soil type index a in the log term and hence differs slightly from that defined in jefferies and davies as might be anticipated from the very high bq the silt classifies on a soil behavior type basis as very soft clay to organic soil robertson and wride adopted an alternate definition of ic which neglects the pore pressure it is this simplified ic referred to subsequently as ic rw that is used in the nceer this silt on the boundary between soft clay and organic soil both versions of ic are compared in fig the cpt used at the site was a seismic cone and the shear wave velocity was measured at depth intervals these data converted to shear modulus are also shown in fig the shear modulus is surprisingly high for such a soft soil ranging from about mpa at the top of the silt to corresponds to a constant dimensionless rigidity ir for the estimated in situ geostatic stress ratio this value of rigidity and its lack of depth dependence is not atypical of the finer grained tailings at the site as shown in fig the investigation of the site also included a limited number of borings one boring was put down close to the cpt saturation and are also plotted in fig the void ratio averages about and any trend for decrease with depth is obscured by local variability in the data it should be noted that the samples were disturbed and may have increased or decreased in water content because of this disturbance correspondingly these estimates of void ratio are somewhat approximate this is illustrated in fig for erksak sand in this example the critical state parameters and mtc are obtained from the moist tamped sample the water pluviated triaxial sample is then fitted keeping all three critical state parameters constant vary with fabric but this was not necessary for the fits in fig with the effect of fabric on the stress strain response being well captured by plastic hardening only in the following analyses laboratory testing was carried out to determine the critical state parameters and mtc of the fine tailings the tested soil was prepared from a mixture of several samples that were estimated to be representative material properties is not uncommon tailings are typically highly stratified making it difficult to obtain homogeneous samples that are large enough for testing the samples were dried and then combined to create a bulk sample for the testing program the specific gravity was determined using procedures following astm standard to of lead zinc ore tailings minimum and maximum void ratios of and were determined following astm standards and respectively however the high fines contents of the silt tailings are greater than the dry mass limit recommended in these standards hence these limit values have only been determined as an estimate of the these silts a total of four isotropically consolidated triaxial tests were undertaken on reconstituted samples prepared by the moist tamping method two being undrained and two drained moist tamping was required to produce contractive samples that will reach a clear critical state within the strain limits of the triaxial equipment although the homogeneity of moist tamped samples has been questioned treatment initial saturation with de aired water and final back pressure saturation voids in the moist sample this is followed by an initial saturation stage in which de aired water under very low pres sure head is allowed to flow into the base of the sample and continued until the flow returns through the top of the sample and pore pressure lines the last step is back pressure saturation and value testing carried out with cell pressure increments of between and kpa during each cell pressure value samples were considered saturated with a value greater than following this saturation stage the samples were then isotropically consolidated to the desired test consolidation stress during consolidation volume changes were recorded to continue to track void ratio in determining the critical state line the main concern for critical state the final sample void ratio was determined using the total sample freezing method this method allows for accurate final void ratio determination at the critical state determining the final void ratio by freezing allows for a check on the void
national regulation are many in the field of insolvency law three predominate the economic leverage of international credit institutions and sovereign states the power of persuasion by international institutions as models for nation states we shall observe that the engagement of the global and local is complex contested and contingent on many factors including the balance of power between the local and global and the proximity of the global to the local cycles as a further stimulus for lawmaking just as law on the books must be explained as well as be followed into action reform cycles have beginnings while underlying problems in social practice or contradictions and tensions may build up pressure for change of state law the changes themselves frequently require some kind of triggering event a tragedy or scandal or crisis to precipitate lawmaking at a given moment cycles also have endings when contradictions are consensus is reached settling occurs or an underlying cause fades away cycles also end when exogenous pressure is removed an oppositional party runs out of resources political attention shifts to other issues or all parties are exhausted cycles of rapid and regular adjustments of formal law and practice will slow and reach some point of practice continues and a de facto law may consolidate shift and change lawmaking cycles frequently cluster in recursive episodes with discernible beginnings and endings a new episode may not recur for decades in the history of us bankruptcy law such episodes can be observed in the late the and the late and through the in a global context national lawmaking frequently influences global ifi lawyers and economists the participation of national lawmakers on the committees and panels of international organizations and the role of professionals who move regularly between local and global venues actors such as banks unsecured creditors trade creditors such as suppliers workers the state the courts government agencies and insolvency related professions these groups have the capacity to widen or narrow the gap between the letter of the law and law in practice through and the like the lawmaking side involves parties capable of legal and political mobilization these may be private parties such as banks professionals or various state actors officials politicians judges while bankruptcy law characteristically involves only market and state actors other areas of law reform often involve groups within civil society such as ngos or international civil society such as reform groups private ally with local actors in the global arena an external class of actors appears these approximate at the suprastate level the state market and civil society actors within national politics international institutions such as ifis or international governance organizations such as the united nations use a variety of mechanisms to press for lawmaking that conforms to international and lobbies and international associations of professions among other market groups align themselves with global and national state and civil society actors in the service of or opposition to national change international civil society groups and networks mix into this complex web of influence and negotiation and lying behind them all may be powerful sovereign states such as the united states which often seek to orchestrate nation states mechanisms cycles of national lawmaking are driven by at least four primary mechanisms that hold each side of the recursive loop in dynamic tension these are the indeterminacy of the law contradictions diagnostic struggles and actor mismatch the indeterminacy of law all statutes court opinions and regulations has argued law inherently is ambiguous and subject to interpretive confusion or maneuver this view has recently been reinforced by scholarship on law and finance that champions the precision of property rights as a prerequisite for economic development the more diverse and less integrated its implementing agencies and courts the greater variation will occur in its application and the for creative misapplication or redirection of statutes and regulations in unexpected directions and to unimagined purposes moreover indeterminacy may be compounded by institutional pathologies such as judicial corruption or incompetence the occurrence of indeterminacy and unintended consequences regularly drives a turn of the reform cycle as original crafters of law seek to remedy its deficiencies in order to achieve their original react to unwanted outcomes or courts seek to settle meanings and more contentious lawmaking is likely to result in vague ambiguous law that will produce inconsistency in application and provide ample opportunity for creative compliance contradictions cycles of lawmaking and implementation frequently are driven by contradictions that are internalized within the law when lawmakers cannot definitively resolve underlying economic political they settle for partial or temporary solutions such unstable resolutions within the law make it vulnerable to subsequent disturbances or triggering events that precipitate another round of attempted solutions contradictions often express clashes of underlying ideologies for instance the washington consensus stresses openness to global trade lowering lead to more investment and greater economic growth yet many developing and transitional countries confront that ideology with one of national sovereignty that is they resist losing the flagships of industrial sectors to footloose foreign owners with much less interest in the country for its own sake bankruptcy lawmaking catches lawmakers between these countervailing ideologies and they will likely make their policy decisions partly to satisfy what may be an inherently unstable settlement contradictions may also be structural when implementation is parceled out among rival executive agencies or when work is allocated to contesting or ill prepared occupations and professions diagnostic struggles since legal professionals are so has been applied to professional work more generally diagnosis involves the identification of a problem the application to that problem of various rules of relevance for a given reform and relating the problem so construed to a way of classifying problems for purposes of law reform diagnosis in law reforms takes the form of a social construction of how a problem is to be understood and classified it usually contains an implicit theory of relations between parts of a society market and government more important diagnosis is a field of contestation
indeed one can make art works whose detection requires picking up on contextual cues art which needs an institutional context to be seen asking testadura to fetch these works performance as art that is what they know for sure and will bet money on what else could be going on but art the trouble is that they are told that it is music though they detect other hand indeed there is most of those who possess the concept of art have little idea what makes something art they defer to experts concepts of arts such as music dance and painting are not in the same boat as the concept of art because we do not defer to the same degree to experts to the authority of experts about what it is to be a song a dance or a sketch if this hypothesis is plausible enough to compete with the received story whose archetype is the tale of testadura then the premise of the objection is not warranted meanwhile the objection has a second false preise setting aside the reflections above suppose that we grant the hypothesis that the hard cases are baffling because they comprise the concept of art there is no reason to insist that theory of art is needed to secure the concept of art against the hard cases a theory of art is one tool that we might use to alleviate our bafflement but having a concept does not always consist of knowing a theory the buck passing theory of art might be married to an explication of the concept of art as knowledge of a theory as facility with a narrative as matching to prototypes or as perception of family resemblances none of this is to deny the value of carroll s project of sturdying our concept of art the project does not however require a buck stopping theory of art as carroll sees perfectly well the buck passing theory is not yet in trouble beardsley recommended that a theory of art should engineer the foundations of empirical art studies contrary to appearances however there is no empirical study of art per se while there are empirical studies of the concept of art they do no implicate a theory of art neither do philosophical hypotheses about the reception of the hard cases during the past few decades all in all the prospects for the buck passing theory of art look rosy provided that theories of art decouple from the concept of art the most interesting and powerful case against decoupling comes from contemporary social science where it is held that art and the concept of art cannon or should not be severed this stance derives partly from and appreciation that it is often fruitful to attempt to view words of art in a cultural setting from an internal perspective by using the concept of art endemic in the setting taking this perspective may reveal features of art words that would be missed otherwise to take a historical example and awareness of the impact of the imitation theory of art on capability brown s landscape design highlights its representational character which otherwise is hard to miss added to this is a concern that the only alternative to taking an internal perspective is using a concept of art from an alien setting which may be distorting at best and oppressive at worst the sensitivity is at its highest in anthropological writing on so called primitive art as the worry is often expressed by calling them works of art i imply that the people who make and use these objects have the same or very similar attitudes and beliefs involved in the english meaning of work of art so it is commonly held that to study art in a cultural setting one ought to study art only as it is conceptualized in that setting the methodological norm embodied in these reflections is frequently supported by a claim about the relationship between words of art and the concept of art that is endemic in a cultural setting the methodological norm embodied in these reflections is frequently supported by a claim about the relationship between works of art and the concept of art that is endemic in a cultural setting the claim posits a dependence of the former on the latter and it is most striking in arguments from the empirical observation that member of c lact a concept of art to the conclusion that they have nor at members of c have no concept of art there are works of art in c only if members of c have a concept of art so there are no works of art in c nowadays this argument is articulated in order to protect and respect the conceptual autonomy of members of other cultures following a discussion of baule attitudes to their carvings david novitz concludes that the words occupy a very different social location from the location occupied by works of art in our culture and as a result of this it would be at best misleading at worst inaccurate to describe them as works of art the anthropologist susan vogel similarly writes that although baule art is important in the western view of african art the people who made and used these objects do not conceive of them as art art in our sense does not exist in baule villages interestingly philosophers who have taken issue with the reasoning from to simply reverse its direction keeping as a fulcrum they object to the imposition of overly stringent criteria for attributing the concept of art as a lead up to consider the standard that members of c have no concept of art unless there is a word in their language that is synonymous with art this is certainly too demanding a standard for attributing a concept of art it allows one to infer from the fact that shakespeare and his european contemporaries had no word synonymous with art the false conclusion that king lear is no an art work
such as watersheds or regular sampling grids related to the technology or methodology used to acquire or store the data the center for ecology and hydrology land cover map of great britain for example uses a grid based on landsat thematic mapper satellite resolution natural and social science data the underlying message from much of the literature appears to be well i would nt start from here a number of researchers have inverted the problem of the bsu identification and advocate the development of base units derived from the distribution of the underlying dataset more recently openshaw and rao argue that census users should abandon official zones and reengineer the data and relationship they were investigating whilst this would result in the optimal solution with regard to data representation for a more pragmatic policy maker orientated dataset this option does not hold the same attraction in deciding on the base unit for the secra study we took account of the main purpose of the dataset its target user groups includes policy makers and practitioners working at regional government offices countryside and environment agencies and government departments academic users can use the data for direct analysis or for typology development to inform sampling strategies for rural research the selection of a bsu related to an administrative boundary was seen as the most versatile for this range of users on considering also the spatial resolution of the coarsest information deemed essential for inclusion we decided to use lower layer super output areas as our base units soas were designed by the uk ons and constitute the new official small scale population census geography for england and they are roughly consistent in population size and each contains on average households and residents they have the advantage that they are smaller than administrative wards but big enough to allow the release of data that for reasons of confidentiality are unavailable at smaller area output levels for england and wales lower layer soas were created by merging census output areas taking account of measures of population size mutual proximity and social their formation is currently constrained by administrative ward boundaries but a key principle of soas is that they will not be subjected to the frequent boundary changes that cause problems when using electoral wards to present statistics other administrative levels as appropriate variables derived from census counts map directly onto soas as do the english indices of deprivation however one important disadvantage is that the size of soas varies with population density and has no relation to the physical environment or people s linkages to the environment rural soas range in size from to with a mean of and this has important implications for the some types of data at soa level counts of post offices for example need to be calculated per unit area or per head of the human population if they are to be useful for comparison between soas another example occurs when considering how pollution data modelled on km square grid cells can be mapped on to soas some soas cover hundreds of grid cells while others cover only a single cell if the maximum and minimum pollution values found within each soa are calculated a is likely to be found in the larger soas this is an example of the modifiable areal unit problem where changing the scale of an areal unit can alter the values of quantitative measures technical reasons relating to variation in the format of the population census of population output and to country differences in the collection and availability of data the scope of our study was defining what constitutes a rural area is not straightforward urban settlements have typically been characterized by size population density and occupation structure and rural areas defined as those that are not urban more subtle definitions of what it means to be rural involve examining the context of settlements for example an urban center located in a rural hinterland could be contradictorily described as a rural town rural areas have also been terms of their economic linkage to agriculture and land based activities as the primary sources of wealth generation in addition environmental definitions of rural typically refer to the land use activity present at a location for the secra scoping study we used the new official definition of urban and rural areas in england and wales produced for lower layer soas by the the definition whose income is derived from traditionally defined non rural activities from being classed as rural it is based on an underlying hectare grid in which each square is assigned to one of nine morphological categories for example small town village or hamlet a score is also calculated for each square on the basis of its sparsity measured in terms of the drop off in population density at a range of distances away from its center a combination of morphology and sparsity has used by the ons to classify the rural lower layer soas in england as sparse or less sparse rural towns or sparse or less sparse villages and dispersed dwellings files metadata and an introductory guide outlining features and limitations of the classification are available at www statistics gov uk geography nrudp asp this site also provides a detailed report on the methodology used for the classification together with a validation spatial representation and the distribution of data the problems of geographic aggregation to a common base unit are well known and different techniques are needed to characterize and minimize potential errors in matching different kinds of data onto soas there was no single one size fits all solution some information selected for the secra dataset already existed in a form that directly onto soas this included for example the domains subdomains and indicators of the english indices of deprivation created at soa level for other data however choices had to be made about the assignation of values to soas using techniques chosen to minimize error these choices depended on the size
were to help out neighbors and relatives and to make ends meet this is important because it suggests that motivations for participation in informal work are not strictly economic or strictly social but a combination thereof this contention is supported by other popular reasons cited by respondents for including there are nt enough good jobs around here so you can set your own hours so you can be your own boss and so you can work at home interesting differences emerge when the motivations of lower and higher income households are compared on average lower income households report their engagement in informal work as more important than do those with higher incomes to make ends meet informal work among lower income households while to help out neighbors and relatives was most common among higher income households lower income households were significantly more likely than higher income households to cite to make ends meet there are nt enough good jobs and so you can work at home as important reasons for engaging in informal work informal work by household income significant differences do exist in terms of the reasons motivating the pursuit of such activities in particular these results suggest that economic concerns may factor more heavily in the calculus of those of lesser means the combination of formal and informal work was the most common livelihood strategy reported second few report participating in the informal economy exclusively these results suggest the participation in the informal economy is widespread but is rarely pursued in the absence of formal labor market participation participation in informal work in the analysis that follows i use logistic regression to model participation in informal work generally and participation in informal work done for money barter and savings specifically the objective is to shed light on the following questions what is the relationship between formal informal work what is the relationship between household composition and informal work what is the relationship between social capital and informal work and how do the correlates differ for informal work pursued primarily to generate income versus informal work pursued primarily for savings or self provisioning to address these questions a series of independent variables are introduced to the models these two headings formal livelihood strategies and household characteristics each set of independent variables is outlined in greater detail below formal livelihood strategies formal labor market attachment is measured by four variables a variable measuring formal household labor supply was created by summing the number of full time formal workers and part time formal workers of adults since the literature suggests that those with the least attachment to the supply squared was included in the models to test for the possibility of a curvilinear relationship dummy variables for whether any member of the household ran a formal home business and whether any member of the household held multiple formal jobs were also included dummy variables that measure whether any member of the household received public assistance in the past year and whether any member of the considered household characteristics dummy variables for five categories of annual household income were included in the models with those reporting annual household incomes of less than serving as the reference group a dummy variable for missing income was also included so that cases for which information on household income was either refused or unknown could be retained in the analysis dummy individuals and whether the only adult residing in a household was female were also included variables measuring the percentage of adults with more than a high school education the percentage of household members under years of age and household size were also considered two measures of social capital adopted from morton the social capital private index residence and distance to results table presents logistic regression coefficients for models estimating participation in any type of informal work participation in informal work for money or barter and participation in informal work for savings respectively these models reveal a number of significant covariates perhaps equally important is what these models do not show of formal labor market attachment that reaches statistical significance is the presence of a multiple jobholder which shows a significant positive relationship this suggests that households in which individuals undertake multiple formal jobs are more inclined to seek out informal work as well perhaps reflecting industriousness or marginal formal sector employment or some combination thereof the model also reveals a significant positive relationship with participation programs other than public assistance while difficult to interpret this might reflect that households with the wherewithal to seek out support programs with the exception of public assistance are also those who take the initiative to seek out informal opportunities as well given the income effects to be discussed next it does not seem this relationship reflects low income status and the descriptive results the income dummies show no statistically significant relationship with participation in informal work while informal work may be more important to the ability of low income households to make ends meet the poor are no more likely to participate in informal work than are those of greater means intuitive sense the negative relationship between elderly only households and participation in informal work suggests that when we think of people as being of economically active age this applies to the activity in the formal and informal economies alike the negative relationship between single female headship and participation in informal work suggests that the hardships endured by this household type in the formal labor market carry over into the both the social capital private index and the social capital public index show significant positive relationships with participation in informal work this suggests that households that possess strong social networks and norms of reciprocity are more inclined to participate in informal work as are those who are more involved in their local communities while compelling theoretical arguments have been made support these notions this is the first time survey data have demonstrated this relationship quantitatively these findings provide further
was a smoker were compared with those of households in which the father was not a smoker in households where the father was a smoker children were younger the level of both paternal and maternal education was lower the proportion of households with individuals eating from the same kitchen was higher and the mean weekly non smoker the prevalence of child wasting was the prevalence of wasting within categories of specific household related risk factors was compared risk factors associated with child wasting included child s age in the month age category male gender lower maternal and paternal education maternal and paternal non smoking and lower weekly mean household were not significantly associated with wasting in a univariate model and a multivariate model adjusting for child gender and child age and in a final model adjusting for child gender child age maternal age maternal education and weekly per capita household expenditure paternal smoking was associated with a lower risk of child household related risk factors was compared risk factors that were associated with the child being underweight included older child age female gender older maternal age lower maternal and paternal education lower per capita weekly household expenditure and individuals sharing the same kitchen in a univariate model and in multivariate models maternal education and weekly per capita household expenditure paternal smoking was not associated with the child being underweight the prevalence of child stunting was the prevalence of stunting within categories of specific household related risk factors was compared risk factors that were associated with child stunting capita weekly household expenditure and individuals sharing the same kitchen in a univariate model a multivariate model adjusting for child gender and child age and a final model adjusting for child gender child age maternal age maternal education and weekly per capita household expenditure paternal smoking was significantly also characterized the prevalence of severe wasting severe underweight and severe stunting was and respectively using a similar approach for wasting underweight and stunting as above in multivariate models adjusting for child gender child age maternal age of severe wasting interval and severe stunting and a smaller proportion was spent on foods such as animal foods vegetables and fruits rice and other staples snacks and baby food sugar and oil and instant noodles than in households in which the father was not a smoker discussion children notably severe wasting and severe stunting paternal smoking was most strongly associated with stunting but not risk of underweight among children and this may be due to the more chronic effect of a lower quality diet in households where the father was a smoker the proportion of weekly per capita household expenditures on quality foods such as smoking and wasting may be a chance finding as paternal smoking was associated with a significantly increased risk of severe wasting these findings suggest that the adverse effects of tobacco use include increasing the risk of malnutrition among young children of the household as a large observations from bangladesh that in poor families in which the father smoked a large proportion of weekly income was spent on tobacco diverting money that might be spent on these findings also corroborate findings from the national family health survey ii in india of households in which household tobacco use increased the risk of malnutrition among total expenditures in to total expenditures in in the present study cigarettes accounted for an average of weekly per capita household expenditures in poor urban households where the father was a smoker the mean weekly per capita household expenditure in poor urban households was us thus an estimated us of weekly per capita of poor families in bangladesh which showed if money were not spent on cigarettes and were used for food and other necessities over money would be available to purchase food for the among poor urban households in indonesia nearly three quarters of fathers were smokers the high prevalence of smoking among men in this study is comparable to cambodia malaysia and the philippines the overall male smoking prevalence in this region is the highest in the in contrast only women in the present study reported that they smoked cigarettes which is also consistent with a relatively low prevalence of smoking among women in other countries in southeast this study are the detailed data collection on demographic factors anthropometry and household expenditures on cigarettes types of food and other items in a large number of households the inferences from this study are limited to the urban poor in indonesia as rural households were not included and the proportion of household expenditures may be different in wealthier in rural households and to corroborate these findings in other settings in southeast asia the results from the present study support the growing belief that tobacco control poverty alleviation and child health promotion should not be looked upon as mutually exclusive the who has presented three main ways by which tobacco exacerbates poverty on the second smoking leads to increased health care needs lost productivity and premature death of wage earners and third those employed in tobacco related work experience particularly low wages and high health in the hand rolled kretek sector employment has remained relatively stable but the work is labor intensive and wages are only average manufacturing sector would improve if the money spent on cigarettes were instead spent on the present study corroborates and extends these arguments by showing that paternal smoking is associated with increased child malnutrition in indonesia kretek cigarettes which contain about two thirds tobacco one third cloves and various additives and flavors account for nearly the and they are particularly accessible to the indonesian and multinational tobacco companies advertise heavily on billboards television cinemas and at sporting events with tobacco ranked among the largest advertising spending categories in the there are few restrictions on the tobacco industry s conduct advertising and promotion in and indonesia which would require implementation of advertising limitations and the banning of tobacco sales to in addition relatively weak tobacco control
to take into account stoichiometric in the same vein earthworms depend on the quality of soil organic matter and particularly on its nitrogen content however a recent study showed that they also depend in some cases on the availability of carbon it would be informative to take into account the possibility of colimitation by carbon and nitrogen considering third the model considers that the long term properties of an ecosystem are its properties at equilibrium this is not fully realistic as compartments of all ecosystems are known to be subject to temporal variations much of this variation may be due to short term fluctuations and interactions within compartments that would have the same properties as the equilibrium of our differential equations many ecosystems are also known to be far from equilibrium because they have been disturbed too recently to have reached a new equilibrium or because some nutrients fluxes change gradually numerical the assessment of the model parameters or at least fixing realistic intervals for them such numerical simulations would also allow the assessment of the robustness of our predictions to short term variability and to test the effect of more realistic functions for nutrient fluxes fourth our model does not explicitly expose all urea is excreted by earthworms on their body surface and ammonia is excreted through the gut with the casts mucus produced by the body surface is incorporated into burrow walls while mucus produced by the intestine is incorporated in the casts this mucus also contains nitrogen our model does not explicitly account for not in the decomposing earthworm bodies these fluxes can be considered as being lumped within the trophic recycling loop which only implies that the corresponding leaching and uptake rates are averaged along the excretion and earthworm decomposition pathways alternatively taking these fluxes into account only requires adding another the way they increase or decrease the balance of nutrient input output for the ecosystem in the same vein microbial populations are not explicit in the models although they play a critical role in the different recycling pathways they are probably involved in the assimilation of organic matter in earthworm guts earthworm engineering can sequester nutrients mineralized through earthworm trophic and nontrophic activities all these processes modify the rapidity and efficiency of nutrient recycling and we consider them to be summarized by the model parameters answering specific questions about the influence of microbe earthworm interactions on plant growth would require taking these processes explicitly a solution is to compare plots without earthworms and plots that have been invaded by earthworms as in north american forests studies have shown that earthworms increased leaching of nitrates but in this case the soils were unlikely to be in equilibrium with the earthworm populations that were currently invading the studied forests a second and monitoring all inputs and outputs of nitrates while this would not allow assessment of our model parameters it would permit the testing of its main prediction earthworms increase primary production in the long term if and only if they increase the efficiency of nutrient cycling to our knowledge no experiments have lasted more outputs of nutrients given the scarcity of appropriate long term experiments it would be interesting to use our model to predict long term effects of earthworms on plant production using short term measurements of nutrient fluxes this implies measuring the uptake and leaching rates of mineral nutrients resulting from the decomposition of plant litter without earthworms the decomposition in this last case nutrients should be mostly inside earthworm casts as discussed above earthworms could decrease leaching rates through the physical protection of nutrients in their casts they may also increase the absorption rate by plants of the nutrients they help mineralize because they increase the short term mineralization in localized soil patches also been demonstrated to increase leaching through their galleries and to increase denitrification which also leads to nutrient losses for ecosystems it is thus not possible to predict the net result of these potential positive and negative effects on the nutrient input output balance here it would be necessary to mark in different experimental units and in the presence of a plant but without living earthworms earthworm dead bodies soil organic matter and the organic matter contained in earthworm casts the quantities of labelled nitrogen in the leachates and in the plants would then allow assessment of the measuring these efficiencies would also help assess the relative importance of the different mechanisms invoked to explain earthworm positive effect on plant growth which has seldom been accomplished could be an artefact of short term microcosm experiments alternatively this effect could mainly be due to other mechanisms such as the production of molecules are released in soils in the presence of earthworms and they do increase plant growth however the quantitative impact of such processes has yet to be determined in the field of elevational species richness patterns of bats by examining both regional and local climatic factors spatial constraints sampling and interpolation based on these results i propose the first climatic model for elevational gradients in species richness and test it using preliminary bat data for two previously unexamined mountains location global data set of bat species richness along elevational gradients from latitude methods bat elevational studies were found through an extensive literature search use was made only of studies sampling the elevational gradient without significant sampling biases or strong anthropogenic disturbance undersampling and interpolation were explicitly examined with three levels of error analyses the influence of spatial constraints was tested with a monte carlo simulation program mid domain null preliminary bat species richness data sets for two mountains were compiled from specimen records from us museum collections results equal support was found for decreasing species richness with the elevation and mid elevation peaks patterns were robust to substantial amounts of error and did not appear to be a consequence of spatial constraints bat elevational richness patterns were related to local climatic gradients species richness was highest where both temperature and
concentration hold true over the entire life cycle of the industry however the relative concentration will decrease in the initial phases of an industry at some point the market reaches saturation and the industry matures the eventual decline discussed in earlier sections of this paper sets in a shake out firms are forced to exit the industry but where are the firms located who are forced to exit the answer according to our hypothesis is that the decentralized firms will have a higher probability of exit this can be explained by the simple fact that in a declining market the firms with the best locations will have an advantage over firms with less than optimal locations this advantage may not lead to exit in a growing market with supernormal declining market competitive advantage in the form of location becomes an important factor in determining the survival or exit of the individual firm if this explanation is true then we should be able to detect a specific development pattern of geographical concentration in the hotel industry what has happened to the geographical concentration of the swiss hotel industry over the past decade in order to answer this question we have constructed lorenz curves for the choice of this short time frame is the result of available data we intend to extend the analysis once more data are made available in electronic format the construction of these lorenz curves involves cumulating the ordered percentages of hotels per municipality for reminders if the lorenz curves were straight diagonal lines this would indicate hotels to be equally distributed among the municipalities in other words each municipality would have an equal number of hotels what the lorenz curve for in figure shows is that the hotel industry is highly concentrated with half of the swiss hotel industry concentrated in a mere per cent of the municipalities furthermore and even more interestingly this concentration appears to be growing this can be seen in figure which contains the lorenz curves for both and over the last decade the swiss hotel industry has been noticeably concentrating itself while the industry in total has seen loss of hotels in the period studied these hotels have not been randomly closed down across the country but rather have been lost in specific areas namely in outlying regions unfortunately these tend to be the areas which were already not tourism intensive in a sense the areas already suffering from a withdrawal of tourism activities have continued to suffer the outlying regions which often turn to tourism as a potential have seen this booster fail another way of illustrating the concentration effect is to calculate a measure of relative entropy mathematically xi sxi ln xi sxi ln where is the number of hotels in municipality and is the total number of municipalities when the entropy measure falls this indicates a growing concentration or diminishing very good correlation between the number of hotels and the geographical concentration as measured by the relative entropy our analysis unfortunately covers only the final phases of the hotel industry life cycle we are therefore able to present only partial evidence to support hypothesis however we are certainly not able to refute the hypothesis based on our evidence an economic phenomenon is not entirely new the last wave of globalization took place in the century leading up to the first world war and there are in fact similarities between this older wave of globalization and the current one however the extent of the effects of the recent globalization on travel and tourism has most certainly been greater than previously it would therefore be tempting to assume that this globalization should have the travel and tourism industries in general and the hotel industry in particular for instance it could be thought that our conclusions concerning the importance of clusters and of location would be irrelevant in a global world where firms are free to locate anywhere and where information technology makes it possible to work and produce flexibly however this is not at all clear as has been pointed out by a number of scholars the advent of the internet and globalization the contrary to have strengthened the agglomeration forces present in these clusters there would therefore not seem to be any evidence that globalization has reduced the importance of location globalization has most certainly had some effects on customers in our case on tourists it has also had its influence on the global travel and tourism market on the one hand it is easier than ever to travel great distances which should encourage on the other hand the fact that we can travel the internet from our armchair might have some influence on our willingness to travel in person the question of virtual tourism substituting for real tourism has been dealt with by scholars like john urry on the one hand the ease with which modern man is able to travel around the world has led to a change in his perception of time and space on the other it has opened new possibilities in terms of organizing and and leisure creating global citizens virtual communities have arisen and a new form of inequality has developed the divide between those who travel and consider it their right and those who do not crucial to our analysis of the effects of these changes on the arguments presented in this paper is the observation that physical proximity remains a vital factor for both business and leisure travellers the need for corporeal mobility has not in any because of globalization tourists travel differently today than they have in the past a close investigation of the swiss case for instance reveals that the average number of nights spent during a visit to switzerland has for most types of tourists gone down over the past decade or more people would seem to travel more often but make shorter stays the influence of this change on the industry life cycle is difficult to evaluate however
a useful starting point is to compare earlier web based applications with the emerging features of the social web which can be seen as more student centered open and democratic flexibility in web greater levels of participation agency and democracy are possible in the social web where users act simultaneously as readers the rigidity of web directory systems is improved by the facility to formulate folksonomies fluid and flexible categorizations uniquely created by each interest group to provide quicker more relevant access to practice specific knowledge the notion of stickiness can also be challenged content in web environments is pre eminence of content creation over content consumption information is liberated from corporative control allowing anyone to create assemble organize locate and share content to meet their own needs or the needs of clients courtesy of the emergence of new flexible content increased user contribution leads to the growth of collective intelligence and re usable dynamic content such engagement with content promotes a sense of community empowerment and ownership for users there are several instances of amateur knowledge surpassing professional when the right kind of systems and tools are available of these more interaction between users a feature that many theorists argue is vital in elearning interaction encourages deeper and more active learning engagement builds communities of and enables feedback from tutors to in recent studies associations have been reported between tutor student interaction potential roles in health and health care education a growing spectrum of applications barsky and others enumerate several emerging technologies and applications under the web platform these include rss wikis blogs and the user comment functionality found in various websites examples of the latter include british medical journal rapid responses patient co uk readers can also rate existing patient experience entries and report any unsuitable or offensive entries they might come across the list of web technologies and applications goes on to comprise web and desktop personalization video sharing streaming media podcasting and files social networking software social bookmarking user driven ratings open access content and ajax and api programming a number of web applications can be added including next generation web based office social writing applications which facilitate shareable spreadsheets http docs google com microsoft office live http officelive microsoft com and social calendars like http upcoming org the collaborative concepts underpinning these web applications are very similar to the notion of web based shareable and distributed electronic health patient records patients and clinicians can collaboration among clinicians and between them and their patients to potentially improve clinical outcomes and cost reduction recent advances in peer to peer networking and grid computing technologies have also made it possible to provide services that interconnect large communities without centralized infrastructures for data and computation sharing which is necessary for a comprehensive list of web applications with selected examples see software development of the real world best of the best web are good examples of social writing software a wiki is a collaborative software that allows users to add content but also allows that content to be edited by wikis and their combination in boulos et al wikis can be used for sharing knowledge eg wiki surgery and or running community projects a good example of the latter is openstreetmap the free wiki world map a collaborative project to create free maps using data from portable gps about the progress of the national programme for it in england set up their own public wiki to track media reports and act as a resource for nhs it they used editth the is info service a site where anyone can create a free wiki an interesting enterprise wiki socialtext similarly blogs and other web projects are now available in multiple non european languages eg this arabic language news blog about diabetes diaries or online they are published chronologically with links and commentary on various issues of interest frequently blogs are networked between several users who post thoughts that often focus upon a common trackback is a powerful mechanism for communication between blogs if a blogger writes can notify the other blog with a trackback ping the receiving blog will typically display summaries of and links to all the commenting entries below the original entry this allows for conversations spanning several blogs that readers can easily blogs are easy to create and contribute to using netcipia allow the creation of blogs with wiki support the founder of wikipedia is now offering open serving another service featuring free tools for building community sites blog search engines also exist eg technorati icerocket and google blog search are emerging with some star bloggers commanding audiences numbering tens of nearly online users under say they regularly visit blogs creating their kevin kelly writing in wired million blogs as of october reporting that around active ie updated at least every months technorati ranks a blog depending on how many sites link to it the blogging elite defined by technorati as those having more than other blogs linking to them number about in october technorati also reported that every splogs fake blogs used for promotion of affiliated according to the same technorati report english and japanese remain the two most popular languages in the blogosphere despite anti web democracy problems for bloggers in china and chinese remains at number three and farsi has moved into medical health related eg the drugscope drug data the trip database and the dlnet blog for health librarians and trainers in the uk but a significant proportion of health related blogs are fueled by lay users podcasts have great impact potential in several american universities including drexel and duke have recently distributed ipods to their students and have experimented health care podcasts are also being used to communicate with tech savvy seniors in the usa podcast search engines also exist including yahoo podcast search podscope and odeo listeners lines will
choose a particular model from the model class this study addresses the problem of estimating the optimal values of the parameter set using the measured modal data the problem of identifying the optimal model class from a set of alternative model increasing order of structural model complexity with different number of degrees of freedom is not considered in this study however it can be addressed by extending the proposed bayesian statistical framework let for f where nd is the number of model dof be the predictions of the modal frequencies and mode shapes obtained for a particular value of the parameter set by solving the eigen value problem mass and stiffness matrices and respectively the objective in a modal based structural identification methodology is to estimate the values of the parameter set so that the modal data for f mg predicted by the linear class of models best matches in some sense the experimentally obtained modal data in for this the measured modal properties are grouped into groups each group contains one or more modal properties for the i th group a is introduced to measure the residuals of the difference between the measured values of the modal properties involved in the group and the corresponding modal values predicted from the model class for a particular value of the parameter set this difference is due to modelling and measurement errors always present in structural identification problems modal grouping schemes fit jn are usually based on user preference specifically let be the measures of fit between the nd measured set of modal data and the model predicted modal data for the r th modal frequency and mode shape components respectively where z is the usual euclidian norm and predicted by the particular value of the matrix is an observation matrix comprised of zeros and ones that maps the nd model dofs to the observed dofs among the various grouping schemes available the following are considered for illustration purposes a grouping scheme a may be defined so that each group contains one modal property the modal frequency or the mode shape for each mode in this case there are measures of fit given by and jm a special case of grouping is to consider only the first groups measuring the fit between the modal frequencies ignoring the fit in the mode shapes more general grouping schemes can be defined by forming groups with the each group containing a number of modal properties the modal properties assigned to each group are selected by the user according to their type and the purpose of the analysis in particular a grouping scheme can modal properties into two groups as follows the first group contains all modal frequencies with the measure of fit selected to represent the difference between the measured and the model predicted frequencies for all modes while the second group contains the mode shape components for all modes with the measure of fit selected to represent the difference between the measured and the model predicted mode shape components for all modes specifically the two measures of given by formulation as multi objective identification problem the problem of identifying the model parameter values that give the best fit in all groups of modal properties can be formulated as a multi objective optimization problem stated as follows find the values of the structural parameter set that simultaneously minimises the objectives where is the parameter vector is the parameter space is the is the objective space for conflicting objectives jn there is no single optimal solution but rather a set of alternative solutions known as pareto optimal solutions that are optimal in the sense that no other solutions in the parameter space are superior to them when all objectives are considered such alternative solutions trade off the fit in different modal properties specifically using the grouping various modal frequencies and mode shapes are obtained using the grouping scheme all optimal models that trade off the overall fit in modal frequencies with the overall fit in the mode shapes are estimated using multi objective terminology the pareto optimal solutions are the non dominating vectors in the parameter space defined mathematically as follows a vector is said to be non dominated regarding the set if and only if there is no vector in which dominates a is said to dominate a vector if and only if the set of objective vectors corresponding to the set of pareto optimal solutions is called pareto optimal front the characteristics of the pareto solutions are that the modal residuals cannot be improved in any modal group without deteriorating the modal residuals in at least one other modal group it should be noted that the multiple pareto optimal solutions are due to modelling and measurement errors this can be considering the ideal case for which the model and measurement errors do not exist in this case there is a value of the parameter set for which the model based modal frequencies and mode shape components match exactly the corresponding measured modal properties thus all objective functions jn take the value of zero and consequently the pareto front consists of a single point at the origin of the objective space the pareto optimal structural models may vary considerably in the parameter space in order to understand the factors that affect the variability of the pareto optimal models figs and depict the pareto solutions in the objective and the parameter space respectively for two objectives and one parameter the variation of the objective functions and with respect to are also plotted in fig let and be the optimal values of the parameter that minimise functions and respectively the pareto points and shown in fig determine the location of the boundaries of the pareto front in the objective space the size of the pareto front is defined as the distance between the points and in the and directions given by and respectively all values of in the interval shown in fig are pareto optimal solutions
valid on proof it is straightforward to check these relations by using the definitions then on note also that by maps a to a neighborhood of a boundary circle of as needed in the following definition definition we define m where is induced by the identifications given by for and a by an abuse of notation we will identify mj with its image in under the identification the standard these identifications handles are attached to and is an oriented closed surface of genus using and it is straightforward to check that and respect the identifications and induce diffeomorphisms of which we will denote by the same symbols moreover we have the following lemma and are of order on they commute with the each other and and are still valid on definitions and definition we denote by the group of diffeomorphisms of generated by and we call the group of symmetries of standard and transition regions we proceed to define carefully the various regions on in the usual fashion of in the following definitions we are motivated by the definition of later in which is used recall that has almost spherical regions of which are account the identifications induced by we can number the almost spherical regions by the off central almost spherical regions by and the transition regions by where in the following definition each is a standard region and an almost spherical region in the terminology of similarly each is a transition region or alternatively a neck each is an extended standard region or an extended spherical region and is the union of with its adjacent transition regions is called the central almost spherical region and is the region where the fusion of the constituent tori occurs is the transition region furthest away from the central almost spherical region the and are common boundary circles of a standard region and an adjacent transition region is the waist of of through the constant controls the size of the standard and transition regions we use subscripts and to modify the usual sizes and boundary circles in particular each sx is a neighborhood of while sx is with an appropriate neighborhood of its boundary excised definition for n as in we define small enough when we drop the subscripts and refer simply to we also write nx for nx note that and are invariant under while the other regions are invariant only under and except for nx which is also invariant under the regions where and provide a decomposition which satisfy the symmetries we first observe that given suitable immersions of and the cylinder we can use the symmetries to generate an immersion of lemma given an immersion satisfying on and an immersion a mp such that there is a unique immersion satisfying and such that proof we first extend to by defining by it is straightforward then to check that satisfies the symmetries in and then factors through which also satisfies and the other required conditions to construct the desired immersions a we intend to apply with simply the inclusion map and an appropriate are satisfied first we need to reparametrize to accommodate for the dependence of on we define by the following lemma specifies the symmetries of and the appropriate sliding and twisting required by lemma satisfies the symmetries proof the symmetries follow from definition and the symmetries by and the commutation laws in we conclude the proof follows from the definition of note that implies that at the gluing annulus agl the maps and agree up to parametrization implies that the map which is obtained by sliding further by and twisting by satisfies the required symmetry as discussed right after this motivates where join is defined by this definition we have the transition from to happens in two stages first on transits to which is translated by and twisted by second on the latter transits to note that he second transition is equivalent up to an element of su to a transition from to an reparametrized by define a by applying lemma with the inclusion map to be the restriction of remarks on the geometry and the lagrangian angle of a we define maps on which can be interpreted in a sense made precise in as limits of a as definition arguing as in the proof of we define a map by requiring the inclusion map on and it equals on for as in we define by n lemma for and as in we have the following is a diffeomorphism from onto a domain of and for large enough in terms of a given we have where the maps are considered as valued result follows when by we have since depends smoothly on and and it gives when the result follows where for the last inequality we use as well before we discuss the metrics we will be using we define a cut off function we will need as follows definition a vanishes on each mj and note that and form a partition of unity subordinate to mj also that is invariant under the action of in the next definition we define metrics and on and we will be using in the estimates of the paper is the induced metric by the immersion in consideration and is a metric conformal to under which the necks are isometric to cylinders recall for and for the definition of the coordinate definition we define on and ng on we define and where on mj clearly then and on depend smoothly on a while and on we have finally on the spherical regions sx all the metrics in consideration are uniformly equivalent as can be seen by applying and by uniformly equivalent here we mean that if and are any two such metrics then where depends only on and we study now the lagrangian angle induced on by a we first a c gluing is supported on and c twisting is supported on the complement of and the necks c dislocation is due to the mismatch
more powerful and precise two sophisticated technologies are already in widespread use the global positioning system and wireless telephone networks like traditional beepers these technologies use radio waves to establish a connection between devices at unknown locations and devices at known locations the newer technologies however have two critical advantages over beepers unlike a beeper which must remain within a certain distance of its tracking receiver gps and wireless phone tracking devices are linked to an extensive permanent network of transceivers this allows police to track suspects from a remote stationary location thus eliminating the need for mobile physical surveillance second because gps devices and wireless phones can send data to and receive data from multiple network nodes simultaneously the suspect s precise location can be determined a beeper s location can only be inferred imprecisely by gauging the strength of its signal the gps network consists of at least two dozen satellites which are owned by the united states government and were initially used for exclusively military purposes and are now freely available for a variety of civilian navigational uses gps devices can determine location with a great deal of precision depending on the equipment used distances covered and other variables they can currently location to within a few meters the accuracy of gps tracking has improved steadily over the years and further improvement is expected police may either surreptitiously install gps receivers on suspects vehicles or possessions or obtain real time or historical data generated by commercial gps devices such as those installed in vehicles and wireless phones tracking devices even when they are not equipped with gps devices whenever they are turned on wireless phones automatically and periodically communicate with a network of base and switching stations these communications which are carried on a dedicated channel separate from the voice and data communications sent or received by the phone s user connect the phone to the network and allow it to switch channels when non gps wireless phone tracking varies widely depending on a number of factors including the sophistication of the technology and the number of stations within range of the phone many contemporary systems can determine location to within fifty meters and future systems will undoubtedly be even more precise as with gps tracking police for pen register supp at fcc service darren handler an island of chaos surrounded by a sea of confusion the wireless device location initiative va tech phillips supra note at the united states congress has also required wireless service providers to facilitate law enforcement by ensuring that their systems can record the location of the antenna tower the beginning and end of each call see us telecom third report order in the matter of communications assistance for law enforcement act hereinafter third report order notably however the federal communications commission rejected the argument that providers must also be able to pinpoint the phone s location throughout a call s duration order rec at to date canadian regulators have not imposed specific requirements for wireless location tracking other than to require new providers to meet the capacities of established ones see gordon gow public safety telecommunications in canada regulatory intervention in the development of wireless can comm consequently canada has lagged behind the united states in the development of wireless and wireless and wireline service providers have voluntarily cooperated to develop systems few providers are currently able to transmit precise location information to emergency operators see colin bennett lori crowe report to the privacy commissioner of canada location based services and the surveillance of mobility an analysis of privacy risks in canada service providers are required to be capable of recording the most accurate location information available to them this obligation stems from unpublished licensing conditions see solicitor general s enforcement standards for lawful interception of telecommunications imposed by ministerial fiat pursuant to of the canada radiocommunication act ch see indus can spectrum management and telecommunications policy for cellular and incumbent personal communications services on the air telephone tracking are also being spurred by commercial marketing strategies including the placement of advertising and other content tied to profiles and real time locations on consumers phones see stephen henderson learning front all fifty states how to apply the fourth amendment and its state analogs to protect third party information from unreasonable search cath rev phillips supra note at laurie thomas lee can police track calls call location information and privacy law cardozo arts ent in the united states however wireless carriers may not provide personally identifiable location information to commercial third parties in the absence of customers explicit consent see wireless communications and public safety act of usc may obtain wireless telephone location data in real time or from historical records maintained by service they may also use commercial wireless networks to track devices surreptitiously placed on vehicles or other objects the question then is whether courts should find that these second generation radio tracking systems invade a reasonable expectation of privacy as in the case of infrared searches the conventional morally grounded approach is not particularly helpful consider first the public exposure doctrine by definition people who venture into public spaces highways voluntarily subject their movements and behaviors to observation it can be argued that it is unreasonable to expect one s public activities to remain private indeed at least one court has relied on this argument in concluding that cell phone tracking does not trigger fourth amendment protection as many commentators have pointed out however the public enjoy in public spaces while we necessarily take the risk that our public behavior will be observed by others these observations are typically sporadic and fleeting as i discuss in more detail below gps and wireless telephone tracking
exhibit shows one of the symptoms of this migration at the global level with capital market growth substantially more rapid during the period the assets generated as a result of this disproportionate growth must have been the basis for an equally disproportionate growth in the asset management industry during this period exhibit decomposes this growth into the principal asset classes for the period from to and estimated to the global stock of financial assets comprising bank deposits government debt securities non government debt securities the shares of the four components of global financial assets in selected regions is depicted in exhibit this shows the us share of global bank deposits and government debt securities declining substantially between and while the us share of non government debt securities and equities increased the european share of global bank deposits equities and private debt securities increased while all asset classes declined in japan except for government china accounts for a significant increase in global bank deposits which is also the case of the rest of the world primarily emerging market countries the fact that emerging markets are not immune from financial disintermediation can be shown in the example of mexico exhibit depicts the change in the allocation of household financial assets in mexico from the end of to and demonstrates a reduction in saving deposits from from in mutual funds from in pension investments from this period while total household financial assets grew from to trillion pesos managed pension and non pension assets grew from the total this change in the structure of mexico financial assets suggests the importance of pension funds in financial disintermediation alongside a strong maturation of the country financial for investors and financing alternatives for private sector borrowers these shifting patterns of growth in the various asset classes reflect very different states of play in the process of financial intermediation in various parts of the world this is made clear in exhibit regions with the more highly developed financial markets the us the and the euro zone have the smallest share of bank deposits and the largest share of equities and private debt securities as asset as asset classes the reverse of key developing countries korea is an exception with a large private sector debt market that stands in contrast to the government dominated debt markets in most emerging market countries exhibit suggests that asian countries rely predominantly on bank financing which severely limits the volume of securities available for investment by asset managers in exhibit residing in advanced financial systems increasingly use the fixed income and equity markets directly and through fiduciaries which through vastly improved technology are able to provide substantially the same functionality as classic banking relationships immediate access to liquidity transparency safety and so on to a higher rate of return the one thing they cannot guarantee is settlement at par which in is mitigated by portfolio constraints mandating high quality short maturity financial instruments ultimate users of capital located on the left side of exhibit have benefited from enhanced access to financial markets across a broad spectrum of maturity and credit quality using conventional and structured financial instruments although availability and financing cost normally depend on the current can be easily provided at the same time a broad spectrum of derivatives overlays the markets making it possible to tailor financial products to the needs of end users with increasing granularity further expanding the availability and reducing the cost of financing on the one hand and promoting portfolio optimization on the other and as the end users have themselves been forced to become more performance oriented it has become increasingly difficult to justify departures from highly disciplined financial behavior on the part of corporations public authorities and institutional investors in the process two additional important and related differences are encountered in this generic financial flow transformation intermediation shifts in the first place from book value to market value accounting and in the second place from more intensively generally requiring less oversight and less capital for financial institutions and a greater emphasis on financial market practices both have clear implications for the efficiency properties of financial systems and for their transparency safety and soundness iii contours of the asset management industry sector in the years ahead as of the global total of assets under management was estimated at close to trillion and expected to grow substantially going forward the underlying drivers of the market for institutional asset management are well understood they include the following vehicles the growing recognition that most government sponsored pension systems many of which were created wholly or partially on a pay as you go basis have become fundamentally untenable under demographic projections that appear virtually certain to materialize and must be progressively replaced by asset pools that will throw off the kinds of returns necessary to meet the needs of growing numbers of longer living retirees traditional defined benefit public and private sector pension programs backed by assets contributed by employers and working individuals under the pressure of the evolving demographics rising administrative costs and shifts in risk allocation by a variety of defined contribution schemes reallocation of portfolios that have for regulatory tax or institutional reasons been overweight domestic financial instruments toward a greater role for equities and non domestic asset classes which not only promise higher returns but also may reduce the beneficiaries exposure to risk due to portfolio diversification across both asset classes and economic and financial environments that are less than perfectly total investment returns the growth implied by the first four of these factors combined with the asset allocation shifts implied by the last of the above factors will tend to drive the dynamics and the competitive structure of the global institutional asset management industry in the years ahead the asset management services that are the focus of this paper are depicted in exhibit such as banks or by purchasing securities from retail sales forces of broker dealers possibly with the help of fee based financial
interaction a this problem can turning now to false positives we can consider the situation depicted in fig consisting of two high positive curvature pieces of contour close to one another such road pieces might attract one another join and produce a crossroads under a purely geometric evolution using eg egap and starting from this configuration however this is not the the two pieces of road straighten and move apart indeed we have never observed this type of false positive gap closure and while it is hard to guarantee that it will never happen it is straightforward to see that it is very unlikely simply because it is almost impossible for there to be a significant number of points on the curves with curvature that exceeds the threshold in egap the threshold will in general be we used a threshold of in our experiments while a for the roads in our images while it is difficult for even a very tight curve to have an average curvature of more than in fact this information is included in the prior model eg the quadratic prior term says among other things that we expect roads to be straight over distances of the order of at least and therefore that their curvatures will be significantly occur when a road really does stop for a certain length before continuing in the same direction to distinguish such situations from gaps that should be closed requires much greater knowledge of context than is included in the current model however it is the very fact that such situations occur infrequently and that most gaps correspond to occlusions or shadows that motivates summary conclusions and future work when attempting to extract line networks from images and in particular road networks from remote sensing images one of the key difficulties is created by the presence of interruptions in the imaged network due to occlusions cast shadows and other effects such interruptions can lead to gaps in the extracted network that do not correspond to gaps in higher order active contours a previously proposed higher order active contour model for the extraction of line networks in general successful but it was unable to surmount the problem of interruptions building on this model we have defined a quadratic gap closure energy that penalizes network configurations containing nearby opposing extremities in attract one another to move together and to join thereby closing the gap we note that the new energy is inherently higher order it involves the long range interaction of two different extremities ie of widely separated points on the contour it thereby demonstrates the ability of higher order active contours to include sophisticated prior morphological containing higher derivatives these require special attention if instabilities are to be avoided working within the level set framework we have developed techniques to ameliorate the numerical difficulties caused by these force terms experiments on real remote sensing images demonstrate that with the exception of very long interruptions the new energy succeeds difficulties that remain with the method are its failure to close very long gaps and the computation time which is long as discussed in sect obvious solution to the first difficulty increasing the range of a does not work very well in practice two other solutions suggest themselves the first is to develop a more a multiscale approach the latter is interesting in its own right and should also help with the computation time problem as follows the computation time is long because of the need to calculate the force arising from the nonlocal terms in principle the force acting at each point of the contour involves an integral over the contour and thus to compute the force on the whole contour pixels in the image one therefore expects the computation time per iteration to scale like in practice the integrations can be limited to those segments of the contour that lie within the range of the interaction functions and a which reduces the computation is clear that a multiscale approach by reducing long range interactions to short range ones can aid in addressing this problem although we have focused on the extraction of road networks from remote sensing images as emphasized in sect diverse line networks in different imagery types have much in common the prior knowledge captured by the model described in this paper is thus also relevant to other from remote sensing images or vascular and other networks from medical and biological images analysis of the domain interactions between the protease and helicase of in dengue and hepatitis virus rosales leo ortega lule ruiz ordaz el the activities present in have proved to be critical for viral replication the replicative cycle of flaviviridae requires coordinated regulation of all the activities present in the full length protein however the exact nature of these interactions remains unclear the present work aimed to determine common structural features between of dengue and hepatitis viruses and to characterize residues involved in the regulation of the interdomain motions between and analysis of the root mean square variation shows that increases the stability of subdomain of the rna helicase moreover the dynamic behavior of the carboxy terminus of supports the hypothesis that upon release of the carboxy terminus from the residues involved in this interaction are folded back into the last a helix using normal mode analysis we characterized slow collective motions of and observed that the two lowest frequency normal modes are are enough to describe reorientations of relative to these movements induced an increment in the exposure of the active site of that can be important during the proteolytic processing of the viral polyprotein the third low frequency normal mode was correlated to subdomain reorientations of similar to those proposed during ntp hydrolysis and dsrna unwinding based on these data we support a dynamic model in which the domain movements between and in the regulation of its activities introduction the flavivirus non structural protein is a multifunctional protein involved in polyprotein processing and viral replication
internal restraint of impulses ones and viswesvaran suggested that it could be the most important trait that needs to be systematically measured among job applicants but they carefully added a question mark the evidence in favor of a and es murphy and lee found little support for the hypothesis that explains the validity of integrity tests in predicting job performance in a meta analytic study in addition a number of primary studies found that integrity tests correlated substantially specific facets of ffm dimensions within the same factors suggesting that the construct measured by integrity tests may be sought at the level below the big five rather than above the dimensions furthermore relationships between counterproductive behavior and ffm dimensions are low with general counterproductive behavior ranged from to in salgado s study more recently berry et al reported values up to between a and interpersonal deviance and between and organizational deviance respectively though most correlations were substantially lower integrity test score ffm relations are not much higher whereas the vast majority of the previous research on personality foundations of integrity tests focused level the hexaco model points to an explanation not covered within the five factorial space hexaco is an acronym for six not just five factors of personality whereby the latter five dimensions relatively closely resemble the content of the big five whereas the first factor honesty humility adds an essentially fair sincere or loyal versus greedy conceited pretentious and sly is typically modestly related to the ffm dimensions of a and and can be empirically and conceptually clearly distinguished from those dimensions as opposed to task related traits like organization or self discipline defining ffm primarily refers to moral conscience as compared with ffm a is more machiavellianism which describe tendencies toward socially problematic egotistic behaviors and attitudes and does not generally include content related to hostility or toughness the hexaco model differs from other models proposing a personality first it was derived with the same approach as was the original big five framework using factoring comprehensive sets of trait descriptive adjectives found in natural languages studies with a wide variety of cultures converged on the conclusion that six semantically consistent factors emerged from sets of trait adjectives in natural languages including english and german which are spoken by participants second applied studies by lee ashton and de vries and lee ashton and shin showed that the additional factor of was at least as strongly related as any of the ffm dimensions to counterproductive behavior across five samples from four different countries bears more than just a semantic relationship to integrity tests consequently lee ashton and de vries and lee ashton and shin suggested that may be an important addition for understanding integrity test scores it is noteworthy however that lee ashton and de vries limited this suggestion to the overt type of integrity tests although there between overt and personality based integrity tests is now a commonplace framework for research on this topic roughly speaking overt tests contain relatively transparent items often directly related to counterproductive behavior personality based tests are composed of items often adopted from traditional personality which to the criterion is not always obvious but empirically supported because of these differences personality based integrity tests tend to be more broadly related to the domains covered in traditional personality inventories in which the ffm structure can often be recovered overt integrity tests by contrast have no immediate roots in the personality assessment tradition but were associated by leading test authors with theories of attitude behavior relationships consistent with these different traditions integrity test score ffm relations were consistently though not substantially stronger for personality moreover integrity test ffm relations tend to rise if personality is measured with inventories originally designed to measure ffm dimensions in line with these meta analytic findings a head to head comparison of one overt and one personality based integrity test as related to the neo pi version of the ffm found that a substantially larger proportion of personality based than that score variance was accounted for by a linear composite of ffm facets none of the studies cited in the previous paragraph has included a measure of the dimension however recall that the only two studies to date that investigated relationships between integrity tests and the hexaco model found looked at overt integrity tests only given these findings combined with the evidence of comparatively weak relationships between traditional ffm dimensions and overt integrity tests and the moral evaluative nature of the construct which corresponds to the content of overt integrity tests tapping into evaluations of morally questionable behaviors it seems plausible to assume that will be particularly relevant for this type of integrity from which and overt integrity tests emerged the strong emphasis on morality appears to provide for a stronger conceptual link between with overt integrity tests than for any ffm dimension in the absence of evidence on personality based tests as a standard of comparison this must remain a speculative statement to summarize previous research has shown that some ffm dimensions are moderately related to counterproductive behaviors there is a similar pattern of modest relationships between ffm dimensions and integrity test scores these latter relationships tend to be stronger for personality based than for overt integrity tests and the relationship between and overt integrity test scores tends to be stronger than for the to indicate that at the level of broad personality dimensions personality based integrity tests may derive their validity from personality factors other than whereas is of additional relevance especially for overt integrity tests however this assumption is based on independent lines of research which were never tested comprehensively in one data set the major but not the only purpose of the present research is to fill this gap in the literature and tie loose ends together our specific hypotheses and research strategy are outlined in the following section present study our first major objective in the present research was to address the issue of the sources
experience with the internet or with commerce was related to withholding information in contrast to past commerce research participants likelihood related to internet experience or to commerce experience however participants overall amount of lying was positively related to commerce experience and marginally related to internet experience finally results show no relationship between either internet experience or commerce experience and seeking information from the website s privacy results generally support the four hypotheses with regard to the research questions there was some evidence that a sizable percentage of participants falsified their personal information and that some participants sought information from privacy policies as a means to protect their privacy although not to a great extent on the other hand there was very little evidence that gender level of privacy concern or online experience have much impact on disclosure and information seeking commerce context discussion this study shows that consumers manage their privacy online through their decisions to reveal or conceal information about themselves to online retailers in particular this study examines information withholding deception and seeking as online privacy management strategies the research also provides insight into factors including gender past online and commerce experience concern about online and the specific language used in etailers privacy policies that may or may not influence decisions to disclose or withhold information results inform past work on disclosure and interpersonal relationships that served as the basis for this study findings demonstrate that similar kinds of balancing dynamics appear to operate in the web environment as they do in face to face situations thus extending cpm into the domain of cmc and commerce relationships online consumers use strategies predicted by cpm theory including information withholding deception and to a lesser extent information seeking is confirmed in this research the study suggests that online consumers erect boundaries around personal information and form rules to decide when to reveal information to etailers as predicted by cpm theory for example the results confirm that as in interpersonal communication people disclose more sensitive information within commerce contexts in cpm terms online consumers may regulate access to personal information by making the boundaries around different types of information more or less permeable depending on the degree of perceived risk involved in revealing more or less sensitive information the boundary coordination processes observed in this study similarly illuminate how online consumers may use risk decide what to disclose within commerce relationships specifically the fact that disclosure was higher in the strong privacy policy condition compared to the weak condition suggests that participants may have used policy information to coordinate boundaries to see if there was a match between their own and the etailer s privacy expectations given that participants privacy concerns were generally quite high a more likely to be found by those in the strong policy condition compared to the weak conditions the strong privacy assurances may have lowered participants perceived risk of disclosure and encouraged greater boundary permeability than those in the weak policy condition in which boundary expectations may have been felt to be uncoordinated between the participant and the etailer of course future research is needed to test this interpretation directly to extend cpm theory s predictions of how boundary turbulence may impact disclosure decisions to commerce contexts this is most evident in the open ended questionnaire responses such as whenever i give my information i get a lot of spam or i ve had bad luck with giving out information about myself these responses indicate that prior negative experiences with online disclosure in commerce contexts may be a primary reason for withholding showing greater deception for those with more commerce experience also imply that boundary turbulence in past commerce relationships may play a role in people s future online disclosure decisions this is consistent with research showing that experienced internet users were nearly two times more likely to provide false information to websites compared to less experienced users in more systematic ways than have been attempted before cpm theory predicts many aspects of the online behavior observed in this research and thus offers a first step toward building a theory of online privacy management at the same time however this study suggests that cpm must not be applied without accommodation for fundamental differences in the online context compared to face to face settings for example there was no evidence that the basis of gender or general online privacy concerns which is somewhat surprising given past findings in the interpersonal and commerce research literatures one reason why gender was less important in this study than in interpersonal relationships might be that the nature of disclosure in commerce contexts is quite different from that in most interpersonal relationships research on disclosure within interpersonal relationships finds that females tend to disclose more emotional information than do men the lack of gender differences for withholding information found in this study might be explained by the fact that commerce transactions require disclosure of factual and largely non emotional information the results of this study agree with some prior commerce research that failed to find a relationship between gender and online deception in spite of studies showing that women are more concerned about their privacy online than are men an explanation for the lack of findings with regard to concern for privacy in this study is the existence of a privacy paradox when it comes to online disclosure recent research finds that despite expressing high levels of concern about privacy and security online consumers are still willing to provide personal information to commercial websites as giveaways lower prices greater selection the convenience of online shopping and consumers feelings of powerlessness to protect their personal data on the web have all been advanced as explanations for this paradox and may have been operating in this study furthermore this is not dissimilar to studies using cpm that have observed that people are sometimes willing to give up privacy when they seek security in other words that dialectical tensions rivacy disclosure to privacy security a
society from the church had made great strides in conquering the established urban middle and upper classes and though its hierarchy compromised with the regime anti liberal sentiments predominated at grass roots level traditionalist catholics decried the modern world and called for a return to an idealized rendition of the middle ages most integrated into the carlist movement which had between and taken up arms against the liberal another sector of the church wanted to work within the restoration and make their doctrines compatible with the new industrial age but still harboured antiliberal beliefs in catalonia they were particularly influential in their writings they rejected liberal centralization and the modern parliamentary regime fiercely criticized the parasitic political class bemoaned the loss of authority and spread of cosmopolitan and revolutionary ideas consequent upon the enlightenment revolution and called for a corporative political system and a reconstitution of the medieval guilds in order to make the new world compatible with order and hierarchy the saw many of these catholics embrace social catholicism but this did not represent an ideological break they retained their anti liberal roots and in contrast to the recommendations of pope leo xiii s encyclical rerum novarum remained wary of state intervention preferring to beneficent associations both ideologically and institutionally the catalan church also developed close links with the business community much of which in the late nineteenth century adopted a productivist language critical of the parliamentary regime and political the lliga was born within this milieu after the disaster of crystallized anti regime feeling regionalist sentiment was already apparent within catholic more overtly catalan nationalist ideas being developed within sectors of the intelligentsia the lliga leadership tried to move these groups in a more liberal reformist direction but found this an onerous task this difficulty could be seen in several areas while the lliga assumed a democratic discourse the break with the restoration parties exacerbated business s productivist language similarly in church circles regenerationist rhetoric was often simply a convenient with which to beat liberalism there were also implicit tensions over relations with labor unions the lliga was in practical terms anti union but the party s leader francesc cambo did at least theoretically favor collective bargaining combined with social legislation as a means of stabilizing industrial relations on the other hand among industrialists there was wide ranging opposition to independent union organization and to spain s first labor laws in addition the catholic corporatist ideas could be seen in attempts to promote catholic unions under ultimate employer control and talk of the need for workers and employers unions to fuse thereby recreating the old guilds in a modern to be sure such tensions tended to remain below the surface until the restoration began to totter in fierce criticism of the political elite could cover discrepancies over what exactly the regime should be replaced with no clear ideology but there were also elements that could be channelled in a right wing direction during the restoration the military had become increasingly cut off from civil society and despite low pay the officers espoused an aristocratic disdain for the civilian population and saw themselves as the embodiment of the values of honour and chivalry the institution s nineteenth century experience of political interventionism and its deployment against internal republicans and now increasingly the working class left and against colonial insurrectionaries also meant that it viewed itself as representing the national interest and defending the integrity of the nation furthermore the defeat of and anger at what was seen as attempts by the political elite to pin the blame on the military encouraged the growth of a regenerationist discourse within the officer corps wing political agitation between and led to a growing fear that law and order were breaking down and that they faced an increasingly serious revolutionary threat it was a concern shared in broader middle class circles moreover the army was outraged by the rise of catalanism which it saw as jeopardizing national unity such sentiment was intensified because even in the barcelona garrison within the officer corps native catalans were very scarce on the the events of made such fears seem all the more real the lliga was opposed to the general strike and quickly distanced itself but the conservative government of eduardo dato tried to capitalize on the situation by claiming that because the lliga had unleashed the summer s political unrest it was the moral author of the strike and was somehow implicated in it and there is reason to believe some of the lliga s more bourgeois backers harboured similar sentiments as the rightwing and landowner gustavo peyra advised antonio maura those socially conservative catalanists are nervous regarding the course of the boat which they have in the aftermath of the strike such attitudes were apparent in a letter the major catalan business association the foment del treball nacional sent dato congratulating him on the government s well chosen actions in defence of the perturbed social order moreover the city s key business cultural associations opened subscriptions for those killed and wounded combating the strike raising the substantial sum of over pesetas business and the military embraced when faced with a perceived subversive fear within conservative circles was further intensified by the october revolution in russia for the right it brought home the fact that social revolution was not a utopian dream and in subsequent years it became common practice within both right and left wing circles to draw parallels between spain and russia elements to the right of the lliga tried to take advantage of this fear by forming a coalition of order in opposition to the lliga in the municipal elections of november most notable was the support of the count of caralt president of the ftn this was indicative of a shift to the right within the organization between and its presidents had been lliga sympathizers and in it nationalist however caralt a liberal monarchist took over in after the ftn was attacked by its
the industry average in the post period and they have a higher market to book ratio and are smaller than the industry average when they restate for accounting policy and revisions reasons using models from prior literature we find evidence that earnings restatements are value relevant two types of dependent variables the results specifically earnings restatements are generally found to be negatively associated with month raw returns measured to months after balance date and with next period earnings changes excluding extraordinary items our strongest evidence of value relevance is for restatements that occur before a period when firms could elect to restate their comparatives we find a negative coefficient regressions in this period but only the coefficient for errors and unknown sample is significant this is consistent with previous results in the usa furthermore we find that the restatement amount is significantly associated with future earnings suggesting that earnings restatement is value relevant in both contemporaneous and intertemporal settings the relevant literature and hypotheses development earnings restatement is defined and accounting for restatements briefly covered in section section describes the data and outlines the methodology findings from the empirical tests are presented in section and section concludes the paper review of literature using us data mostly examine restatements due to accounting irregularities and do not supplement market value tests with non market value tests firm characteristics an early study by kinney and mcdaniel examines characteristics of firms filing corrections to quarterly earnings they find that restating firms are smaller less profitable slower growing more highly levered and received more qualified audit opinions than their industry counterparts defond and jiambalvo also report that restating firms have lower earnings growth that they have more diffuse ownership and fewer incidences of audit committees than their control counterparts however a more recent study by richardson et al who use a sample of firms that restated earnings during the period finds that restatement firms tend to be high growth firms that are under pressure to inflate earnings to meet or beat analysts forecasts they did restatement firms and non restatement firms with regard to profitability and size most studies provide evidence consistent with restating firms being smaller and in poorer financial condition than their control counterparts one might conjecture that restatements because of reasons other than errors are primarily a function of inferior accounting systems and practices and a similar relation is expected for firms with these types of restatements however it can also be conjectured that firms use restatements to signal changed conditions rather than mask poor performance and that this might be more prevalent in larger firms there is no previous evidence on temporal changes in the characteristics of restating firms because we have no strong foundation for expecting a particular relation with respect to differences because of restatement reasons or over time our first hypothesis formally stated is characteristics of restating firms and non restating firms value relevance kinney and mcdaniel also assess the market reaction to restatement announcements because of errors and find an overall negative share return between the issuance of the erroneous quarterly reports and their corrections wallace finds a negative share market reaction to restatements because of investigations and fraud more recent studies extend kinney and mcdaniel by types of restatement owers et al examine nine categories of restatement and find the most negative market reaction for restatements because of accounting issues interestingly they also find a positive market reaction to restatements because of revisions in estimates of previously announced legal issues suggesting that the market initially overreacts to restatements palmrose et al the market reaction to earnings restatements they find a negative market reaction of approximately per cent and that more negative abnormal returns are associated with more negative restatements those that involve fraud that decrease earnings and where the restatement is not quantified in a more recent study palmrose and scholz examine the association between certain earnings restatements and company characteristics with the likelihood of company management and board of directors they report a negative market reaction to restatement announcements it is evident that a firm earnings restatement generally has adverse market consequences for the previous research treats all restatements as potentially bad signals for investors and other financial statement users callen et al argue that accounting errors are of concern to the firm stakeholders and to regulators such as the the usa changes in accounting policy that lead to restatement are less likely to be problematic for two reasons first many if not most changes in accounting policy arise out of a legitimate need to disclose changing circumstances that might affect the firm performance second even if changes in accounting policy are used to manage the firm earnings earnings management is not necessarily pernicious because it might the firm future prospects more generally restatements might provide useful information about the historical earnings trend thereby improving forecasting and about the direct effects on future earnings for example lev and zarowin contend that restatement of accounting information is a partial solution to improving declining earnings value relevance they state that a within which to evaluate its current as new information comes to hand revision of prior period accounting information improves this context and enables better decision making by account users the capitalization and amortization of previously expensed in process and reversals of asset impairments are offered as two examples of their contention additionally lundholm argues for mandatory disclosures this he claims will not only inform about the historical context but also provide an incentive for accurate reporting in the current period according to him firms are more likely to expand disclosure of higher quality information under such a reporting requirement whether restatements caused by accounting policy changes and revisions in estimates reasons are also treated negatively by the market is an untested empirical question that this study addresses based on the collective body of us evidence and conjectures made by some we examine the value relevance of earnings restatements via the following formally stated hypotheses there is
surrender and sound silence these dyads are not necessarily construed as internally antithetical in satyananda and grounding is not seen as the fundamental opposite of expansion rather the one is often seen to contain or even facilitate the other and their mediated balance undoubtedly the most important objective in satyananda yoga practice gives rise to a third possibility another mode of embodied being that is construed as conducive to the evolution of self ties with this community ever since from the time of fieldwork the community has undergone significant organizational restructuring and cultural change but the philosophies and practices that define the satyananda school of yoga have remained the same and it is these that are in focus here satyananda yoga in australia is part of a worldwide network of ashrams and practitioners two major residential satyananda yoga ashrams are located in australia one at mangrove mountain in new south wales and one at rocklyn in victoria and smaller satyananda teaching centers are found in most australian metropolitan centers and in some regional centers most of these operate as incorporated associations that are affiliated with a centralized regulatory body the satyananda yoga academy which oversees teacher training their regular teaching activities at these centers satyananda teachers conduct yoga classes in a range of other locales such as prisons drug and alcohol clinics hospitals palliative care centers retirement villages workplaces schools and evening colleges swami satyananda saraswati is the founder of satyananda yoga also known as the international yoga fellowship movement of bihar this became the base from which he spent years working on his proclaimed mission to spread yoga from door to door and shore tos hore in the late he began to travel the globe to convey his particular interpretation of yoga which contained a strong emphasis on tantric elements often regarded as a revolutionary strand among indian traditions an approach he saw as appropriate to the swami satyananda began to attract disciples from all over the world including australia where a small but dynamic community began to flourish in the early the community peaked in the mid after which it went into decline only to regain momentum in the late today the community is relatively consolidated and energetic gaining a considerable reputation in australia yoga differs from many other yoga schools in australia with its emphasis on yoga as a complete and highly intricate path that incorporates all aspects of life and the human personality and that has clear philosophical and spiritual underpinnings although asanas are the predominant mode of yoga taught in australian yoga schools satyananda yoga integrates several traditional laya yoga kundalini yoga and nada yoga and it places a strong emphasis on sadhana service meditation and ritual philosophically it draws on a range of indian traditions such as yoga tantra and vedanta and from several ancient indian texts particularly the bhagavad gita the upanishads and patanjali s yoga sutras a practice seen as essential in classical yogic and tantric texts and also in satyananda publications most of them written by swami satyananda and his successor swami niranjanananda saraswati who is recognized as the current leader of satyananda yoga worldwide swami niranjanananda is based in india but visits australia regularly and many of his australian disciples make another link between guru and disciples is established through initiation into sannyasa which is understood as a path of self knowledge and service rather than as the term s literal translation implies one of renunciation those who are initiated into sannyasa become part of the shaivite parampara of the two gurus and the saraswati order to which they belong there are various levels take up the path of yoga as a permanent way of life and become known as swamis the satyananda yoga community in australia can best be described as a community of practice that is a community with certain sets of relations and certain patterns of action and reproduction of knowledge participation in such communities however occurs coherently structured as each member makes the culture of practice theirs on the basis of their particular biography and circumstances although participation in the community unquestionably shapes certain behavior and ideas among the satyananda yogis as individuals they believe many different things hold opposing views pursue disparate aims and trajectories sense of being part of a group or tradition and of themselves as coinitiates they endorse the indian emphasis on sanga the importance of community when one is on a spiritual path what seems to hold the yogis together is precisely this shared commitment to some form of self evolution through the practice of yoga whatever that may mean to each of them individually and one its breath and its energies ecstasis dys appearance and intermediate modes in the absent body drew leder distinguishes between what he sees as two principal modes of embodiment he defines one ecstasis as a mode of habitual and instrumental engagement with the world in which a person acts or projects outward from his or her body to an object or thus in this mode a person s body tends to assume an ancillary role as it disappears into a neutral background that supports and enables a wider field of perception and action consequently in the ecstatic mode the body is largely absent from explicit awareness and comes to constitute a transparency through which the world is engaged and inhabited leder in this mode of embodiment leder writes i no world at such times a person no longer acts from the body but toward it seeking to relieve the pain or incorporate a new although the idea that bodies are intermittently present to or absent from awareness makes sense phenomenologically the two modes leder proposes need not be construed as opposite or exclusive on the basis of the ethnographic constellations of presence absence separation and fusion in the practice of meditation for instance a certain ecstatic awareness may coincide with an introjected rather than outwardly projected perception likewise in asana practice a thematized body does not necessarily give rise to
days of colonialism which they illustrated by telling me about his dismay when a long standing rule to speak only english in the newspaper office was no longer enforced by a new editor in the when i asked baraba about the use of english in the office he reported that he thought most of the journalists english was poor to be the medium of communication in the office resulting in the mixing of swahili and english a circumstance he lamented the journalists views of baraba provide additional insights into the humor in mbwilo s statement baraba s lack of change contrasts directly with the phenomenon of maintaining one s figure a phenomenon fairly new to tanzania that embodies change in a parallel fashion the hybrid swahili english expression blends indexing resistance to discourses of western modernity the practice of dieting has become popular quite recently as the growing number of advertisements for sliming sic food attest however it is important to point out that the imported ideology of slim body size remains contested in tanzania despite its apparent hegemony among the younger generation in the journalists articles covering beauty pageants the young opportunities to pay for higher education and receive job training however the conversation among the journalists and the retrospective interviews helped me to see mbwilo s use of ana maintain figure as a possible critique of this cultural development in the context of discussing baraba the phrase creates a rupture in the practice of watching one s weight as a common sense activity through the tactic of denaturalization the of baraba with the female gender is transposed dialectically onto the incongruity of the western practice of watching one s weight and participating in beauty contests for cash prizes and fame among tanzanians thus through this th order first order indexicality these western practices become equally denaturalized the conversational data led me to seek out other texts that contained references watching one s weight i was curious to know if additional critical perspectives toward beauty pageants and the practices of losing weight were available as texts to residents of dar es salaam i found that the phrase ku maintain figure was not uncommon as the cartoon in figure shows the caption reads when a swahili decides to maintain figure and in the cartoon the woman on the right is saying mwenzio nimeamua kumenten figa au vipi shoga my i ve decided to maintain my figure what do you think this cartoon was published in a popular monthly magazine kingo whose livelihood depends on entertaining its young adult readers and therefore it is useful to see what larger discourses these readers are expected to link the cartoon with in order to find it humorous according to the cartoonist the humor here is meant to be ironic maintain her figure but in the sense of keeping her weight at its present level while the cartoons in kingo often poke fun at the behavior of the swahili people this cartoon displays a rejection of western values that have been imposed on african standards of beauty in conversations about this cartoon that i had with a variety of tanzanians the ironic humor was always identified and in many cases the cartoon motivated my informants to tell me about the existence an a beauty pageant whose purpose was to praise the beauty of what they called authentic tanzanian women those whose full figures challenge the typical beauty pageant aesthetic it was clear from these conversations that jimama was a response to the onslaught of american style beauty pageants in tanzania and from this comparison i was able to see what orders of indexicality they had created to interpret the cartoon as well through the tactic discourses from the west that promote slim figures as beautiful the cartoon in figure also from kingo illustrates this dichotomy while simultaneously displaying a rejection of the modern and a preference for the traditional again through the tactic of distinction the cartoon clearly demonstrates a preference for traditional ideologies of female beauty a dichotomy is established through hairstyles clothing bathing suit skin color and footwear the different ideologies of physical beauty are also apparent in the physical positioning of the women the full figured woman s backside is the focus of attention while the slender woman is presented frontally the men in the audience are clearly drawn to the woman who embodies the traditions and her full figure is one of the factors that make her more desirable this together with the other texts that rely on the phrase ku maintain figure reveals that western values and ideologies are present but are not always successful among tanzanians all of these data show how the tactics of distinction and denaturalization can be powerful means for enacting the tactic of authorization thus establishing legitimacy through contesting the natural order of westernization by distinguishing western and african these texts display a use of power to legitimate certain social identities as culturally intelligible the analysis of conversation provides insights into the entextualization processes speakers use to attain intersubjectivity with their co conversationalists the example of mbwilo s joke reveals how speakers continually attend to one another s utterances and in order to achieve shared meaning one tactic they can to shift their own subjectivities so that they overlap with those of their co participants in the above data we see that mbwilo skillfully shifts tactics to overlap with the discourses available to the younger generation thereby creating the opportunity for mutual understanding of course not all participants are equally willing to shift their own subjectivities to accommodate others while mbwilo s conversational moves transformed the talk to an interaction that might orders noreen s tactics remained largely fixed finally this article has implications for research on english in a postcolonial context where entextualizations are historically linked to discourses of the other the journalists orientations to the concept of watching one s weight reveal the ongoing tensions between tradition and globalizing modernity as the phrase ku maintain
back angrily and obliquely at his past both his frustration with the fate that imprisoned of marginality and his determination to transcend that condition for cioran writing of the kind that drives the artist s own designs towards his self s objectives as william carlos williams put it in his autobiography was possible only from the center of cioran of course shares this linguistic and artistic dilemma with other marginal writers though the historical circumstances of their marginality may a marginal writer who like cioran found the center necessary though hateful to his writing naipaul paul theroux s memoir documenting his failed friendship with naipaul sir vidia s shadow is strikingly apposite to the issues with which i am dealing here but i am fully aware that the thrust of theroux s book is damaging and prejudicial to naipaul so i distance myself from their personal quarrel although theroux quotes naipaul with the every intention we can assume that naipaul did utter the words reported since they come in the context of a public literary debate at a literary festival in hay on wye in naipaul is reported to have said to the moderator bill buford for the new yorker of a dialogue between himself and theroux in the nineteen fifties if you were writing in english there was only one place where you could be a writer it was here but to write am always aware of writing in a vacuum almost always for myself why could you not return to trinidad the moderator asked you cannot beat books out on a drum vidia cried it s as simple as that what would i have done who would have published my books who would have read them who would have reviewed them who would have bought them who would have paid you for drum symbol of inarticulateness of chaotic lyricism the instrument of a primitive culture lacking all the necessary cultural institutions the press the reviewers the educated public without which the practice of writing makes no sense the famous french cioran posing as a wise old moraliste would have probably smiled with wry amusement at naipaul s acid irritation yet he out on a drum parallels cioran s question comment peut on etre roumain and stems from a similar frustration one cannot be a romanian writer for the very phrase is in cioran s eyes an oxymoron to write in romanian is the equivalent of beating books out on a drum or not writing at all however there was a time when the young cioran before his conversion that was all blood tears and fire his first authorial voice was the lyrical voice of a young barbarian from the margins of europe and i maintain that the drum is still rumbling in subdued dark tones in the background of cioran s sophisticated civilized prose naipaul s comment also points to another paradox familiar to those who like him or cioran write at the center but do not belong to it by birthright the center but at the same time your condition of marginality is reinforced you are an exotic as naipaul calls it or an exile cioran s favorite term but here the experience of the two starts to differ just as the terms they chose to describe themselves are similar yet very different for naipaul the exotic though published paid read and reviewed also complains of writing in a vacuum almost always for myself unable to find a public who can share naipaul we sense feels misunderstood deplores a loss of self in the process of cultural mistranslation and displacement though he writes in english he writes in english as a trinidadian who can no longer go back to trinidad cioran by contrast turns exile and self renunciation into an apotheosis of the creative self in an essay called avantages de exile advantages of il consent a tout abandonner sauf son nom mais son nom comment imposera il alors qu il ecrit dans une langue que les civilises ignorent ou he who has lost everything retains as a last recourse the hope of glory or literary scandal he agrees to abandon everything but his name but his name how can he impose it if he writes in a language of which civilized people are ignorant or misinformed so we come back to the name the obsession self assertion is even greater in exile where the writer has nothing left but his name cioran does not want to be himself that emil cioran who writes in a language that civilized people ignore or despise no he wants to be a famous other for cioran the price of self assertion is a depersonalized eviscerated dried up self an adopted language another s name grafted on his own iii man of letters a writer in two languages straddling two cultures whose prose is an intertextual web ranging from rewritings of his own texts to rewritings of a whole range of literature from medieval mystics to eighteenth century french moralistes to dostoevsky schopenhauer kierkegaard and nietzsche he is part of a pan european movement from mysticism to postmodernism and therefore eminently comparable and comparative as social movements he belongs to a complex chapter in modern european intellectual history the names of martin heidegger or paul de man come to mind first now but one also thinks of eliot ezra pound and jean paul sartre among others but beyond his obvious comparatist attractions i see in cioran and in the progress of my research on him part of an arc in an academic career the united states at present i did not embrace the cioran biographical project arbitrarily and indifferently or even by way of the typical academic progression evident in my first book which grew from a good seminar paper on hugo to an article to the kernel of a thesis to a instead i came to cioran by way of my translation work for which i was amply prepared by
give a random value or pair of random values except that the same value of must be given if the forger asks for twice note that since gs the random choice of s implies a random choice of have to restart the whole procedure the same applies if we answered an earlier query for a signature of the same message by giving with gs equal to but however the probability of either unfortunate coincidence occurring is negligible let qh be a bound on the number of pairs we give both forgers the public key gx the same sequence of random bits and the same random answers to their queries for hash function values and they both ask for at that point we give two independent random answers to the hash function query and from then on use different sequences of random bits and different random function values if they do not then we start over again if and then almost certainly as before once we have two congruences with immediately find we need to know that there is a non negligible probability that this will all work as hoped let denote the set of all possible sequences of random bits and random function values during the course of the above procedure and let for each a forgery of the j th message by assumption ej where denotes the forger s probability of success we now use the splitting lemma let a be the set of possible sequences of random bits and random function values that take the forgers up to the point where they ask for and let be the set of possible random bits and random function values after that suppose that there are a elements in a and elements in then s the forger produces a valid signature for applying the splitting lemma we can say that there are at least elements of a that have the following property the remaining part of the forgery algorithm has probability at least ej of leading to a signature for for each such element of a the probability that both copies of the forger lead to signatures for is at least in summary the an element of a will lead to two different signatures for is at least since is chosen uniformly at random from it follows that the probability that the above procedure leads to two signatures of the same message is at least the procedure is at least qh if we repeat the procedure times the probability that we fail to find the discrete logarithm of is at most which approaches zero this concludes the argument tightness in order to arrive at a practice oriented interpretation of the above result in the sense is not tight at all namely let denote the running time of the forger program and let be a lower bound on the amount of time we believe it takes to solve the discrete logarithm problem in the group if we have to run the forger program times in order to find the discrete logarithm then we set kt to get an estimate for the follows that we should set for simplicity let us suppose that is not very small for example in that case we can neglect the term when making a rough estimate of the magnitude of setting qh and we get the practical consequence is that to get a guarantee of bits of security we would have to choose and in schnorr s signature scheme large enough so that the discrete log problem in requires time roughly in pointcheval and stern give a tighter reduction we state their result when qh that is to get bits of security and must be chosen so that according to current estimates of the amount of time required to solve the discrete log problem in a generic group of elements and in the multiplicative group of the field of elements using the best available algorithms we have to choose roughly a bit and a bit such sizes would be too inefficient to be used in practice on the other hand if we insist on efficiency and use bit pand bit then what does the pointcheval stern argument give us with these bitlengths of and we have this means that which is a totally useless level of security so if we do not want the schnorr scheme to lose its advantage of short signatures and rapid computation we probably have to put aside any thought of getting a provable security guarantee is generally missing from papers that argue for a new protocol on the basis of a proof of its security typically authors of such papers trumpet the advantage that their protocol has over competing ones that lack a proof of security then give a non tight reductionist argument and at the end give key length recommendations that would make sense if their proof had been tight they fail to inform the of their protocol of the true security level that is guaranteed by the proof if say a bit prime is used it seems to us that cryptographers should be consistent if one really believes that reductionist security arguments are very important then one should give recommendations for parameter sizes based on an honest analysis of the security argument even if it means admitting that efficiency must be sacrificed finally returning to the question of reductions chnorr type signatures we note that goh and jarecki recently proposed a signature scheme for which they gave a tight reduction from the computational diffie hellman problem generally speaking this is not as good as a scheme whose security is closely tied to the discrete log problem which is a more natural and possibly harder problem however maurer and wolf have proved that the two problems in certain groups if the goh jarecki signature scheme is implemented in such groups then its security is more tightly bound to the hardness of the discrete logarithm problem than is the schnorr signature scheme under
saturation astm the sample is saturated by slowly sliding it into the wetting fluid at approximately a while allowing the fluid to soak more effective than simply soaking or even soaking followed by vacuuming the sample is submerged in the fluid for about min wet run once the geotextile sample has been saturated with the wetting fluid the wet run procedure is identical to the dry run procedure with one exception during the wet run the readings of the manometer will fall dramatically as fluid is expelled from the sample as fluid is expelled the pressure difference across the decreases data should not be recorded as the manometer level decreases this is because the airflow rate through the sample and the corresponding pressure buildup across the sample are needed to correctly calculate the pore sizes when the pressure drops due to the opening of a pore from the release wetting fluid the indicated pressure is no longer the true pressure that corresponds to the airflow the airflow the highest previous level before data are recorded data analysis pore diameter pore size is determined from the washburn equation described in astm astm and by bechhold thewashburn equation describes the equilibrium of a fluid under a pressure gradient in a porous medium with circular openings in this case the geotextile pore openings of diameter d pore size is sample thus where d diameter at pressure mm surface tension of the wetting fluid capillary constant see astm equilibrium contact angle pressure difference across the sample pa when the contact angle is zero and with constants and unit conversions the equation becomes based on the rotometer number and the value read the true flow is calculated with the formula where flow in min flow in min pb reading from backpressure gage in psig the flow rate versus pore size is plotted on a semi log scale for both the dry and wet runs from this graph wet and dry flow rates are read at given pore sizes min airflow from the dry run min finally the results are presented as a semi log graph of the percent finer versus the pore size the entire process of sample preparation dry and wet run tests and data reduction can be accomplished in approximately consistency of the bpt on each of these geotextiles are shown in fig figure shows that the bpt apparatus provides consistent results for multiple runs on different geotextiles as other examples will show the bpt apparatus is consistent in describing porous material accuracy of the bpt to assess the accuracy of the bpt apparatus tests were performed respectively are shown in fig the results from a round hole screen mm diameter are shown in fig figures and show that the pore size distributions down to the level agree well with the actual pore diameter of the screens fischer notes a similar trend the largest discrepancy between the bpt measured and actual screen hole sizes is about mm for the no screen the than the actual screen size the no screen and the round hole screen have approximately the same size holes and they have very similar bpt pore size distributions this suggests that the washburn equation assumption of round holes is a valid assumption for pore sizes near the mm hole size that is within the range of geotextile pore sizes measured in this study the bpt measurements are more accurate the increased accuracy of the no screen tests suggest that the application of the washburn equation for geotextiles which do not have round or square holes may be appropriate with increased accuracy for smaller pores in addition consistency is observed for all cases results comparing theaos and the bpt are shown in figs and the bpt results are much more consistent in describing the pore sizes than the aos results the bpt test results consistently give smaller pore sizes compared to theaos results in both figs and the bpt values value of which the pores are smaller than are about mm smaller than the aos test fischer note that values from the bpt test were similar to a not measuring pore sizes in the same way referring to figs and the bpt values are shown to be approximately to mm larger than the actual pore sizes this information coupled with the problems associated with theaos test indicates that the value given by the bpt is likely to be more accurate than the value given by the aos test identical however the rest of the distribution is different indicating that these two geotextiles will behave differently as filters an aos test performed on these two geotextiles would not reveal this difference and would describe the two as being similar when they are actually quite different astm the bpt apparatus gives consistent results repeated tests on several geotextiles gave very similar results the bpt apparatus accurately predicts the hole sizes in screens with holes near mm that is within the range of sizes found in many nonwoven geotextiles the bpt measured hole diameters were about only mm larger than the actual hole diameters for a no for similar sized screens even though the screens differed in hole shape one with round holes one with square holes this suggests thewashburn equation assumption of round holes is a valid assumption for pore sizes of different shapes near the mm hole size bpt testing of geotextiles shows less variability than comparable aos testing bpt a candidate to replace the aos method of obtaining values the ability of the bpt to cost effectively describe pore sizes other than the creates the potential for new more accurate filter design criteria based on the pore size distribution of the geotextile and the grain size distribution of the soil perhaps similar to that suggested by fischer et al the inlet pipe should be equal for even airflow pressure distribution across the sample the diameters of the sample holder and the outlet pipe should be equal for even airflow pressure distribution across
after interactions with members of their social networks thus culture can be shared but only metaphorically intis s objectives this decades old tradition of scholarship based on the findings of cognitive science and centered around the collection of cultural data should be considered before the reinvention of the wheel the flight from reasoning in psychology from a theoretical unification with other social sciences social psychology in particular has gone through cycles of repression denying itself the opportunity to see the calculating element in human interaction a closer alignment with theories of evolution and theories of interpersonal games would bring strategic reasoning back into the focus of research judges this state of affairs to be scandalous his argument is that if there are so many incompatible paradigms many of them must be wrong this may be so but it does not represent the worst possible state of affairs as long as some of these paradigms are correct if the many paradigms were replaced by a single one and that one turned out to be false the damage would be he best heuristic that recombines paradigm fragments that have proven empirically useful and that are compatible with one another this will not amount to a true scientific revolution sensu kuhn because that would require an entirely new look at the whole field and an overthrow of the dearest theoretical assumptions across the board as a psychologist i agree with gintis s claim that psychology to avoid the topic of thinking is no way to resolve the rationality question every generation of psychologists seems to reclaim the irrelevance of reasoning using the tools of the day first came the idea that if rats and pigeons can be trained to perform complex behaviors parsimony demands that complex human behaviors be explained by animal learning models then came the idea that social behavior the idea that higher reasoning can be dismissed because some critical behavior can be elicited in the laboratory without the participant s awareness is the logical fallacy of affirming the consequent finally the current rush toward neuroscience is yet another flight from reasoning despite its undeniable scientific interest and importance brain imagery can reveal only correlates of reasoning not reasoning one consideration is that strategic reasoning implies the ability to outthink and deceive others the capacity of research participants to be one step ahead mentally is always a concern in the laboratory to allay this concern experimenters seek ways to circumvent strategic reasoning and then mistake what is left for the whole of psychology a related consideration is a common misunderstanding of the relationship between to be unpredictable when so desired yet when determinism is taken to entail predictability unpredictable behavior seems undetermined and therefore either random or freely willed the implication of free will and the reference to intentions or desires seems like a throwback to aristotelian thinking according to which the apple falls to the ground because it wants to perhaps such reasoning is unpredictable in principle much like the nonlinear mathematics of chaos theory or it is just sufficiently unpredictable by those conspecifics it is designed to deceive if it is the latter its purpose is served and we can get on with the task of modeling it likewise intentions need not be mere by products created by brains that are really only in the business of generating fitted with prosthetic devices that receive neural signals associated with conscious intentions and translate them into motor behavior in his effort to build a comprehensive model of individual human behavior gintis has surprisingly little to say about how strategic reasoning can retake center stage as he notes however the study of rationalizability is one place to begin what is needed is a compass that helps chart a course between unprincipled post hoc rationalization and the equally barren strategy of demonstrating irrationality with the experimental designs that equate any significant finding with the presence of a bias or an error many social psychological phenomena that presumably illustrate finding of bystander apathy the more potential helpers there are the less likely is an individual to assist a person in need orthodox social psychological analysis focuses on victims facing life and death the emergencies and bystanders who have little to lose by helping however a full model requires the bystanders costs and benefits as well as the number of dilemma a person caught in this dilemma hopes that others will bear the cost of intervening but would intervene herself if she knew that no one else will according to one solution a bystander will help with a probability of maximizes the expected value for the bystander incidentally this solution also predicts darley and latane s finding that a victim becomes slightly more likely to receive aid from someone as the group becomes larger other classic and contemporary findings can be rationalized along similar lines gintis s emphasis on the evolutionary rationality gintis may not amount to a kuhnian revolution it may turn out to be a decisive first step to overcome disciplinarian parochialism we can begin today by reading at least from time to time one another s journals the limitations of unification theory as a unified theory of the behavioral sciences first there may not be a single explanatory framework suitable for explaining psychological processing second even if there is such a framework game theory is too limited because it focuses selectively on decision making to the exclusion of other crucial cognitive processes can the behavioral sciences be unified the target article phenomena across the behavioral sciences and to develop new questions the article correctly notes that when any science defines its theoretical constructs narrowly with respect to particular phenomena it may miss key generalizations across situations chemistry would be limited indeed if it had separate theories for each element within psychology there has often been a tendency categorization decision making and to develop separate theories for each therefore the call to look across phenomena to
link within the area under its control and communicates these grants to all the msss within the hop range the grant messages contain parameters for predetermined algorithms that are run by the msss to compute their individual schedules even in practical cellular networks that do have a regular hexagonal topology frequency reuse is an np hard problem commonly solved by graph coloring in multihop networks the frequency reuse issue in channel allocation is much more difficult and therefore challenging this is largely because alternate msss can be selected as relays in for frequency reuse is an interesting future item whereas apa does not significantly improve system performance in pmp mode in mesh mode apa could play an important role in spatial reuse of frequency between mss to mss links by lowering interference to the neighborhood this possibility will many network resources will be consumed by the signaling overhead to provide local status to the central controller in a timely manner this overhead as well as the computational load of the central scheduler grow with network size making centralized scheduling not scalable thus it is preferred to adopt scalable distributed scheduling techniques so that the such scalable networks is attracting much research interest qos and fairness for multiple service classes as the major service shifts from voice to multimedia the scheduler needs to account for the diverse bandwidth link quality and delay requirements of different classes of service thus it is increasingly challenging to come up connection admission control and capacity planning connection admission control in cellular wireless networks the utilization of system resources by new calls is often kept below a threshold level to accommodate handoff connections because service providers are obligated to provide a minimum qos to subscribers even by the new bs than new calls originating in the cell even with resource reservation connections can still be dropped due to fluctuations in the received snrs at the mobile sss especially for those located near the edges of cells in the case of ofdma mesh wmans cac becomes interesting due to the possibility of setting up a new the connection can be further handed off from the relay mss to the bs the use of mhr can improve both resource utilization and qos mhr is known to reduce overall power utilization in the system although efficient channel allocation remains to be addressed the qos improves because the improved efficiency of resource utilization increases the capability of two cac schemes for such networks one scheme sets a threshold level on the number of ongoing connections a new connection is accepted as long as the total number of connections after admission does not exceed the threshold level the second cac scheme admits a connection with a certain probability based on the queue status in packet dropping probability according to this framework a new connection request submits its qos requirements to the nearest bs the nearest bs sends connection initiation requests to bss along possible paths of the connection these bss schedule subcarrier assignment for the new connection in a distributed fashion and send allocated metric the bs grants the connection capacity planning in general capacity planning is intended to dimension network resources based on longterm traffic demands to satisfy call level qos requirements such as connection blocking probability and handoff dropping probability there are several issues that must be considered in dimensioning studies handoff arrival processes have commonly been simplified as stationary or piecewise stationary processes in addition the mmpp model which gives a more accurate representation of the nonstationary nature of handoff arrivals has been shown to yield call blocking nature of bulk arrivals which are commonly observed in mass transportation systems in which handoffs from a group of active users may occur at the same time even though mmpp more closely reflects the nonstationary nature of an arrival process by nature it is a counting process that cannot have more than one arrival in a given epoch users can experience because of the randomness of user mobility behavior the average channel gain of a targeted group of users in a wireless network changes over time causing the average snr of the user group to continuously fluctuate since the maximum achievable transmit rate is bounded by the snr ongoing connections may in the system therefore it is necessary to take the fluctuating nature of snr into account when performing cp several different optimization criteria have been used for cp such as the average connection blocking probability average delay and utilization of bandwidth resources several issues on cp in ofdma are discussed optimistic on the other hand it is clear that cp based on group mobility analysis overestimates qos in general dropping an ongoing call causes more unfavorable impacts on user satisfaction than blocking a new call although service providers would prefer to increase bandwidth utilization by optimistically admitting more calls they are obliged call queuing methods have been proposed to address these requirements therefore cp must take into account these call level qos requirements as well as the mobility patterns of users which affect the rate of handoff call arrivals as group mobility could result in a large increase in handoff arrivals over a short time period the possible adverse impacts of group for group mobility users presented in there are various types of cp formulations the cp can be formulated as an optimization problem where the objective is to minimize the outage probability on ongoing connections subject to the constraint that the excess idle capacity ratio is not greater than a certain bound the outage probability is defined as the ratio is defined as the average fraction of the available capacity that is not utilized by user connections over the same time frame let po and ps denote the outage probability and idle capacity ratio respectively both of these are functions of nonnegative integer which represents the number of connections let zs be the upper bound on the idle capacity ratio strictly increasing and the idle capacity ratio is
shown also by the symbiotic them clearly belong to different cultures these industries seem to be genetically linked to the industries of central europe particularly indicative in this respect is the site of korpach mys characterized by a combination of szeletoid and aurignacoid elements it contains some mladech type points however a series of nine dates obtained since then have pointed to the relatively young age of this site from to bp even if one considers the dates of ka bp too young the main series gives a dispersion from to ka bp and most of them clearly gravitate to range from to bp two more symbiotic industries representing other cultural traditions are close in age to the lower limit of the series of dates obtained for brynzeny klimautsy lower layer years and korpach layer iv years old though according to their technological and typological characteristics they should be ascribed to the eup of course one cannot rule out the possibility that further investigations will change this understanding but it is possible that it reflects the real situation the latter would mean that at least in a part of the southwestern region the formation of the sites in the former region still there is one exception the multilayer site of stinka its discoverer and excavator anisyutkin classifies its lower layer as pre szeletian and the upper one as the szeletoid tc at the same time he notes the presence of a number of aurignacoid elements including carinated endscrapers and dufour data anisyutkin tends to connect the lower layer of stinka with the cold arid stadial of the early pleniglacial ois the layer defined as szeletoid can without any doubts be dated to the middle rm it is interesting that while with this the researcher notes in light of new data two groups of the earliest upper paleolithic have been established for the balkans central and eastern europe they can be classified as aurignacoid and szeletoid tc the first of them is pure upper paleolithic the second reveals a number of pronounced mousteroid traits the industry of stinka belongs to the latter therefore at the the role of the oldest upper paleolithic industry in the southwestern part of eastern europe however to confirm or reject this supposition new data first of all absolute dates are needed which is impossible without resuming excavations at the site in its general characteristics this industry can be included into the wide range of symbiotic industries of primary importance to bifacial foliates or moldovian aurignacian the oldest upper paleolithic assemblage known in volyn podolia belongs to the aurignacoid tc the industry of this layer as well as those of the overlying layers i and ii is based on a laminar flaking technology aimed at the production typical levallois points and cores such a combination is not characteristic of the typical aurignacian but both the tools and the techniques of their manufacture quite conform to the definition of the aurignacoid tc the to this tc have different genesis in the present case the hypothesis of a connection between the aurignacoid industries of volyn with the bohunician of central europe appears to be quite plausible in the areas east of volyn some aurignacoid dates point to a younger age the upper layer of zhornov dates probably to the final stage of the middle valdai megainterstadial whereas radomyshl is of late valdai age further to the east in the desna basin the local middle paleolithic industries also are separated from the oldest upper paleolithic sites such as khotylevo any cultural continuity between the middle and upper paleolithic in this region in the black sea and azov sea basins including the lower reaches of the dnieper the don and the dniester the upper paleolithic sites predating ka bp are very rare in a cultural respect they are connected to the adjacent regions the streletskian assemblages of biryuchya balka are connected zelenyi khutor and can be dated only by intuition the series of radiocarbon ams dates obtained for the sites of biryuchya balka shows that the age of their mousterian layers is about ka bp the streletskian layers of these sites first of all biryuchya balka have dates of ca and ka bp matyukhin case at all the crimean peninsula represents the most specificant region of the upper paleolithic formation a neanderthal refuge according to the latest data the middle paleolithic industries survived there until ka bp of course these dates demand further verification but they should by no means be rejected various upper paleolithic cultural traditions periodically appeared in this region and then vanished without exerting any discernable influence on the local population it was only in the late glacial time that the middle paleolithic traditions disappeared being replaced by full fledged upper paleolithic industries no links between the former and the latter can be detected new trends in stone and bone working technologies did not penetrate into this region for a long time after the middle paleolithic industries were replaced by upper paleolithic ones in the neighboring franco cantabria and further to the east the youngest middle paleolithic sites of this region are believed to date to ca ka bp and maybe even later no evidence that the be conjectured that in the extreme west of europe the middle to upper paleolithic transition occurred later than in other regions there are even some grounds to suppose that in the west of the iberian peninsula on the territory of portugal the upper paleolithic industries appeared as late as ka bp in the transcaucasia a similar age is reported for the mousterian materials of ortvale klde judging by a single radiocarbon date the age of the lowermost upper paleolithic layer of mezmaiskaya is ca ka bp a date of bp was obtained for layer of apiancha numeral refers to the site number whereas the second numeral denotes the cultural layer this system was first introduced by a rogachev in the late for sites of the kostenki borschevo region since then
claim rewards of valour might have to come forward as was the case at cartagena or with the soldier scaevius who personally presented centurion in the majority of cases it seems that officers were expected to note brave conduct and ensure individuals were appropriately rewarded indeed plutarch points out that caesar witnessed scaevius actions firsthand and the general s presence may have provided strong encouragement to the legionary to perform the reported deeds this potential kit was sufficiently different or eye catching as polybius implies however with the exception of polybius comment about the choice of head protection by velites there is very little commentary in the literary sources on distinctive equipment worn by those of lower status florus does report on the bizarre contraption worn by one centurion in the early imperial wars fought in moesia this consisted of a fire pan attached his body sent out flames from his head the historian is rather scathing of the centurion suggesting this was stupid and comparing him to the barbarian enemy but he admits that the effect terrorized the enemy however such details are rare and far more information can be obtained from archaeological evidence most of which dates to the imperial period although significant numbers of plain undecorated personalized and individually distinctive pieces of military equipment have survived indicating that for some at least there was a need or a desire to stand out indeed the huge variety in terms of style and decoration is further evidence against the concept of uniformity of equipment in the roman army although some of the most decoratively varied items of equipment most notably sword belts and their attachments and well have been the case that all equipment was subject to similar levels of self display is not the only reason for the personalization of equipment easy recognition of one s own equipment and the availability of easily portable wealth no doubt also encouraged soldiers to decorate their gear with gilt and enamel however as already indicated helmets would have been the most visible part of a soldier in show considerable variation in decoration and identifying features as was noted by the literary sources of the republican period of the more distinctive helmets in robinson s catalogue one is an iron helmet from heddernheim decorated with bronze fixtures displaying embossed wavy hair on the brow and cheek pieces and snakes on the bowl the helmet is topped by a large bronze knob which served as a again iron with a great deal of bronze decoration attached including embossed eagles and highly decorated or expensive equipment has sometimes been interpreted as having belonged to officers solely on the grounds of its impressive appearance but ownership inscriptions indicate that this is not so a significant number of helmets with such inscriptions show that they belonged to ordinary soldiers and design in tinned brass with the embossed decoration and an eagle for a crest has previously been claimed to have belonged to an however punctim inscriptions indicate that the visually striking helmet had several owners at least one of whom was an ordinary trooper and not an officer at all in emulation of their officers and for exactly the same reasons ordinary soldiers may have provided themselves with and peers and subsequent rewarding of courageous actions though robinson suggests that subunits such as cohorts and centuries might have identified themselves by such means there is no reason why individuals might not have done so as well wearing distinctive equipment was intended partly to ensure that an individual whatever his status was visible on the battlefield just as some restricted by team colors and design in both cases such choice of attire acts as a silent visual challenge boasting of the wearer s skills and status as warrior or sportsman the gauls in livy s narratives of single combats with romans are noted for the quality of their equipment worn as an advertisement of their military prowess such claims may have encouraged an opponent to take up a challenge from the warrior or seek an engagement with him because own reputation and the resultant spoils would be worth more in terms of either financial reward or for a roman the kudos to be obtained from the display of impressive trophies in his home indeed this is implied by livy in the rhetoric he attributes to the roman generals in the wars against the samnites and in his description of telamon polybius states quite clearly his belief that while up by the prospect of gaining valuable booty it seems entirely likely that the reverse also happened that roman soldiers and officers used their appearance and equipment to boast of their own military prowess and in so doing set themselves up as potentially more valuable targets in battle but also gave themselves a greater opportunity to be noticed and honoured for their bravery to roman soldiers promotions financial rewards and the resultant possibility of social advancement public recognition and for the elite the possibility of enhanced political opportunities and military decorations which provided the most public declaration of courage these awards came in a physical form coronae or crowns for particularly courageous actions torques armillae and phalerae for lesser actions and were worn on the and perhaps the other decorations too might be displayed in the recipient s house as further advertisement of his such awards were clearly valued very highly by the recipient as illustrated by the dispute at cartagena mentioned above and their prominence on the tombstones of the early principate the decorations the ancient equivalent of the medals awarded in modern armies were worth far more than the simple monetary value of the or silver valerius maximus reports one of scipio africanus cavalrymen preferring silver armillae to a more valuable gold monetary reward because he could then have a permanent display of his courage polybius considered the romans to be obsessed with military decorations along with punishments and believed this went a long way to explaining
spatiotemporal positionality and directionality of lived bodies here there and near far being the primary dyads of differentiation followed by above below right left and before behind depth casey argues is the most primal of dimensions yet the implaced bodies in his and invariably away from themselves but never in horizons and depths seem to lie beyond lived bodies not within indeed casey s conception of nearness farness would be enriched if he spoke of an inward depth of place or an inside outside dimension and the relations and exchanges that may take place across it inherent in many of its practices is a concern with the intake and output of energies and substances with absorption digestion osmosis deflection protection and expulsion on a contemplative level this inside outside dimension is explored and articulated in satyananda yoga through concepts of space spacing out and spacing in intimate immensity sky jimi hendrix among the satyananda yogis experiences and feelings are conveyed by means of spatial metaphors some of which have their origin in sixties drug jargon the most versatile is the term space itself which is used to indicate both desirable states for example being in a good space or coming from one s heart space as well as undesirable states for can mean different things generally it implies an absence of a sense of grounding a disconnection from an embodied now implacement in the present moment has been superseded by a more diffuse dislodged state of drifting thoughts worries or daydreams a spaced out person is not really with it mirabai defined this experience as a kind of disappearing explaining that when i space out i the use of space to denote various feeling states is part of contemporary colloquialism rather than intrinsic to satyananda yoga the phenomenology of yoga practice can still be understood by means of such concepts primarily because the satyananda yogis often give them a specifically yogic to the yogis spacing out can also betoken an agreeable and senses and gone deep within or transcended physical limitations in some way mirabai said that although spacing out can be a blissful experience it entails an absence of focus which is contrary to the recognized objective of meditation you are out there in the ether as she put it but space does not exclusively signify an unfocused spacing out indeed space is overwhelmingly the emblematic movement from gross to subtle in yoga practice the satyananda yogis maintain that heightened awareness is accompanied by a sense of expansion and spaciousness they usually explain this phenomenon with reference to the koshas the sheaths or bodies that are thought to make up a human being a person is said to normally operate within the grosser koshas annamaya kosha and vijnanamaya kosha they enter a dimension of themselves described as vaster more expansive and unconstrained by the limitations and particularities of their everyday body mind the sanskrit word for space is akasha one of the five the yogis maintain that akasha is the least dense of the elements vibrating with the subtlest of energies and is thus the element closest to an unmanifest universal consciousness as such it is also the element of the subtlest kosha anandamaya kosha the so called bliss body hence moving into subtler dimensions of being is conceived as a movement toward a kind of spacious quality silence and stillness purportedly contained within the physical body yet unrestrained by it as swami satyananda puts it akasha is space that permeates every atom of your physical and mental being space that is not within and that is not without but that is everywhere nonetheless three regions of space are located in a physical body chidakasha the experienced inside the heart and daharakasha the space of pranic and psychic experiences situated approximately in the pelvic the first two akashas are the most commonly engaged in satyananda yoga practice often as general points of focus in meditation there are also specific akasha meditations for example chidakasha dharana in which awareness of the a more general inner space or antarakasha is also recognized it encompasses the whole interior space of a body in the meditation practice of antarakasha dharana the satyananda yogis aspire to experience this infinite space within the physical frame a strong belief infuses the yoga community that everyone by mean sof various yoga practices personal boundaries are in the yogis view temporarily made irrelevant or ambiguous the ultimate aim of course is to realize the inherent oneness of the particular and the universal to realize that the infinite is contained in the seemingly finite here space is construed as a vehicle space finds resonance in bachelard s expression intimate immensity which carries the idea that a sense of space or vastness can reconcile contraries and create possibilities of concord communion and coexistence bachelard suggests that immensity is attached to a sort of expansion of being that life curbs and caution arrests space vast space hemuses is the friend in quiet contemplation an intimate depth that opens being to the world through sheer correspondence the perceived immensity of inner space connects being with the immensity of world space thus transcending the contradiction of small and large in such moments of profound presence the two immensities touch and become identical evokes calm peace and serenity it expresses a vital intimate conviction it transmits to our ears the echo of the secret recesses of our being for it is a word that brings calm and unity it opens up unlimited space it also teaches us to breathe with the air that rests on the horizon far from the walls of the chimerical prisons that are the cause of our anguish had lived at the mangrove mountain ashram for the past ten years intimacy is to be very open within yoga you can feel that you have surrendered into something or that you form a part of something that is bigger than you i find that intimate to be able to feel completely open completely vulnerable but yet completely powerful
right wing labor confederation in catalonia the sindicatos libres in western europe the appearance of radical right wing tendencies among groups most famously mussolini had belonged to the left of the socialist party and a number of former syndicalists played a key role in the articulation of the new fascist unions this would be unthinkable within the catalan cnt its leadership was made up of working class autodidacts who were above all union leaders unlike the case of italian syndicalism there was no layer of autonomous intellectuals with tenuous links to the union movement who might re think their ideology as the political crisis deepened rather the challenge to the cnt came from within proletarianized carlist circles some of these carlists were unionized and integrated into the cnt as it grew to affiliate much of the working class however they quickly rebelled against its anarchist syndicalist tenets resolving to set up their own organization yet in order to found this union they needed help from the outside young in the liga patriotica and it was then it appears that they developed contacts with the military garrison some officers saw the value of working class carlists in undermining the cnt captain bartolome rosello made a first apparently unsuccessful attempt to organize the libres in february they were finally founded in october with the indications are military involvement over the following year they were also supported by some employers keen to break the hold of the cnt on their the libres growth was modest during their position was made particularly difficult because cnt gunmen began to target them given the requetes violent disposition it will be no surprise to learn that they formed their own teams of gunmen to strike back but until early november they faced an uphill struggle their luck was then to change from may a new conservative government under eduardo dato had once again tried to incorporate cnt into state run arbitration boards yet after several months of heavy repression segui was unable to control the gunmen in the organization s ranks and this allowed its enemies successfully to demand a return to repression on this occasion there would be no holds barred the man chosen to take over as civil governor was the commander of the barcelona garrison severiano martinez anido now regarded by the business community as their savior in a veteran of the colonial wars he wanted sweeping measures to be taken as he bluntly stated on taking up his post i have worked in cuba and the philippines i should have been in africa the government decided to send me to barcelona and i will act as though i were on active the implication was that cnt activists were to be treated like anti colonial rebels this attitude very much presaged that adopted by francisco and within a much more limited geographical and temporal space parallels can be seen between the assault on the cnt between and and that on the working class left in general during the civil war and in the mass detentions along with the closure of union headquarters began as soon as he took over large numbers were then sent to prisons in remote towns and villages and under the chief of police general arlegui torture was used in police cells simultaneously gave wholesale backing to the libre gunmen who were to prove much more effective than bravo portillo s gang of toughs they were provided with licences to carry arms by the police funding by industrialists and given information on cnt activists through the sometent s office for special services some to maintain their cover were integrated into the sometent between november and june cnt activists were trying for escape they attempted to strike back most spectacularly on march a cnt hit squad assassinated the spanish prime minister eduardo dato but they were massively outgunned from july with the cnt largely dismantled the level of violence subsided martinez anido could now claim that he had brought peace to the streets of barcelona but it was at the cost of further undermining spain s liberal constitutional system catalonia now a separate authoritarian ambit under de facto military this was also apparent in the field of labor relations martinez anido maintained that he did not oppose honourable unions and worked with the libres in the autumn of with the help of his advisors he produced a blueprint for a system of arbitration boards which would operate in barcelona province legally constituted unions would be integrated into the boards but they lost the right to deadlock an agreement could be imposed by the ministry of labour had the scheme gone ahead martinez anido would in some ways have anticipated mussolini in trying to build a neutered union movement dependent on the in fact the prime minister antonio maura who had formed a new coalition government after the july annual disaster rejected the proposal favoring were undercutting these plans the libres were increasingly aware that to consolidate their growing working class base they would need to more effectively represent workers interests this was made possible by the ministry of labour s delegate in catalonia pere rosello a close advisor of martinez anido who began setting up trade wide arbitration boards and frequently backed the libres demands martinez anido no doubt peeved by rosello to present a more liberal proposal to the authorities which both included the right to strike and would effectively consolidate the libres these developments occurred in a context in which collaboration within the right wing camp was breaking down during the libres had radicalized their language and began calling strikes the confluence of their carlist heritage and trade union practice produced an exotic ideological hybrid which combined a of the political class the defence of catholic values virulent antisocialism and a populist social programme whose aim its leaders claimed was to transcend bourgeois society with one of workers technicians intellectuals and artists as colin winston has pointed out this represented
alternative method which they call the sombrer mixte or mixed darkening this compromise unites the qualities of voix sombree and voix blanche by somehow combining or fusing their mechanisms following the path of previous sections it is presented as a logical consequence of the earlier discussion however the descriptions offered are vague and confirmation in the opera house is almost non existent the tenor giovanni is mentioned as presenting a variety of qualities at once but the authors stop short of identifying him as an embodiment of their new method in a startling turn the me moire concludes with dire predictions about the fate of voix sombree and the singers who use it the exertion the timbre requires is damaging not only to the voice but to the health of the singer generally and diday and petrequin offer a melodramatic narrative of failure and collapse since the breath must be more forceful to compensate for the low larynx the lungs are distended unnaturally this distension the authors write gradually causes slowness in the renewing of fluids sluggish blood blockage of the arteries etc one can imagine the fatigue that results from this for the singer this is end permanent damage to the venous circulation and capillaries will follow infailliblement leading to the troubles divers of visceral lesions the damage to the voice is described in an overwrought present tense first a burning sensation behind the sternum then fatigue and loss of vocal power finally total vocal collapse like the reference to rubini for sombrer mixte the authors confirm their assertion using a famous opera this star is never named this conclusion is a rigorous consequence of everything that has been said about voix sombree s mode of production the voix sombree employed regularly and without mixing will survive only for a limited period this proposition the validity of which was recently confirmed by a great example will we venture to predict be confirmed by more than one case in the future le mode de production de la voix sombre la voix sombree souvent excercee et donnee sans melange a qu une duree tres limitee cette proposition dont un grand example a pas tarde a de montrer la justesse recevra encore nous osons le pre dire plus d une confirmation nouvelle and absurd myths that swirl around the voix sombree and none was more bizarre than that of the great singer brought to his death by madness and the shift in tone and rhetoric in the final section of the me moire is a direct result of the essay s two goals the two revolutions it seeks to address the impartial observational tone of the earlier sections giving way to a more opinionated prescriptive voice the dual nature of the me moire also reflects the different concerns and temperaments of its creators at the time of his death diday was best known for his work on venereal disease his treatise on neo natal syphilis was a standard in the later in life this interest led him into the realm of social polemic as in his publication the venereal peril within the family or the fiercely anti clerical medical investigation into the miracles of however in the words of a posthumous tribute to diday the author was also a veritable artist a dilettante not only of syphilis but also of music and fine in particular he had a lifelong love of opera in an autobiographical essay written towards the end of his life he described his life as an impoverished medical student in paris in where because he spent all his money on tickets to the the a tre italien he was reduced to eating he did share with his friend a wide ranging interest in belles lettres publishing essays on french poetry and classical philology as well as a massive translation with commentary of the works of as a doctor his fields of specialization were diverse his oeuvre includes major works on ophthalmology audiology and obstetrics particularly important is his ambitious systematic study of human anatomy and physiology the massive traite d anatomie topographique the book with its emphasis on the importance of observation and experimentation of the living organism offers many parallels in method and style with the more dispassionate sections of the me moire the differences between the two authors result in an essay providing two perspectives throughout on the one hand the me moire proceeds from a set of reflects petrequin s orientation and addresses the revolution in the life sciences generally indeed when petrequin cites the me moire in his traite d anatomie he only mentions the theory of sons files the most abstract passage of the me moire and the one that most closely conforms to the ideals of experimental pathology the overwrought prose and predictions about the fate of singers on the other hand reflect diday s forays into social criticism the to change the course of a musical revolution already in progress contrasts sharply with the relatively dry physiological arguments both perspectives are present throughout the essay and for most of its length remain more or less balanced even reinforcing each other at points only in the final section does polemic takes over old analogy between voice and instrument only to conclude that it is no longer possible to settle on a single answer the voix blanche is like an oboe the voix sombree a trumpet or horn the mobile larynx changes the length of the resonating tube like an oboist s fingers the throat with fixed larynx is like the natural horn with its tube of fixed length the authors had begun with the assumption that the length of the larynx could affect their observations on the voix sombree however by the end of the essay voix sombree has challenged what had been the fundamental core of the debate about the vocal tract where doctors had once asked if the vocal tract affected pitch duprez s singing suggested that it could but sometimes
value whatsoever a more faithful representation might take cases where the solicited ahp ratio comparing lv and lv achieves the maximum possible and allow lv in some cases since the intent is to examine consistency of results under variations such faithfulness was sacrificed for simplicity of calculation we must also consider the effect of possible variations in trade offs this is the least intuitive part of the calculation the vehicle for variation is the parameter s in eq although s indicates a weighted sum aggregation in eq this does not correspond to the ahp calculation a more sensible way to randomize it is to consider the distribution of trade offs expected when importance of the preferences is described by the ratio of the weights xi both quantities are essential to capture the complete trade off the relative importance is treated directly by ahp and needs only to be randomized as described above ahp as noted offers no guidance as to the level of compensation which will need to be randomized directly in the absence of detailed studies on chosen more or less arbitrarily in this paper a uniform distribution with support is used which corresponds to the author s anecdotal experience in the example presented in sect heterodox ahp certainties obtained with the assumption that s is uniformly distributed on will be compared results obtained using other assumptions about the distribution of ahp certainty the procedure is again monte carlo simulation for a given set of solicited values gv is over criteria xv and alternatives ai possible true underlying values are calculated from the assumed distribution that could produce the solicited values the frequency with which ai aj is the level of heterodox certainty is reduced using the usual ahp eigen vector analysis the heuristic consistency ratio must be acceptable the calculated comparison ratios become the midpoints of uniform distributions with support gv the cases gv and gv gv are used to generate distributions for lv for all as outlined above there is no need to apply an analogous procedure to i values for all lv are randomly selected from the appropriate distributions a trade off value s is randomly selected from the appropriate distribution times to achieve a desired accuracy with an acceptable computational burden the following section applies the procedure to an example in order to illustrate the calculations example here both orthodox and heterodox certainties are calculated for a simple example with two criteria and and three alternatives and enough have been solicited in an ahp analysis equations and for criterion and eqs and for criterion may be expressed in ahp matrix form as for criterion the ahp eigen vector calculation the calculated ratios are because there are only two criteria ic is the overall ahp ranking can now be calculated the calculated ahp comparison ratios are thus intervals are by performing an ahp comparison on the endpoints of the intervals we can determine if any pairwise comparison always favors one of the two options this case requires at most ahp calculations which is trivial to compute the number can be considerably reduced by considering only endpoints which favor ai and for all endpoints and in the cases thus the orthodoxy certainty is for both and over and preliminary indications are that may be preferred to to continue the calculation of orthodox certainty we select one value randomly from each uniform distribution and perform the entire calculation above repeating this process many times to repeat the process this is equivalent to an orthodoxy certainty of that an orthodox certainty of would indicate that the two options are indistinguishable in this case it seems that and should not be distinguished by ahp the calculation of the heterodox certainty is also a monte carlo simulation we perform one iteration in equation indicates that and no further randomization is required for it each of the remaining sets and generates a set of uniform distributions li considering eqs for instance the ranked order with respect to is is calculated from similarly an identical procedure is followed to generate random values of and because the preferences li are generated randomly and independently their ratios will not always fall within the bounds given by the original ahp inputs in this example calculated under the assumption that ahp fails to capture all trade offs it remains only to generate a random value of s on the interval say s and to perform the aggregation calculation for each ai as follows the overall scores and give the order of preference of alternatives repeating the we arrive at the following heterodox certainties these results are similar to the orthodox certainty results the certainties are somewhat sensitive to the distribution chosen for the compensation parameter s as shown below there are no clear trends in these data the more compensating normal distribution centered at uniform distribution on certainty for over is rather than probably because of the consideration of the highly compensating values of s values of s are anecdotally rare in the author s experience the differences in certainty for different assumed distributions of s indicate that further research is required be used interchangeably inherent in concept selection using the decision support tool ahp the method draws upon ideas from statistics where confidence in propositions is quantified based upon assumptions of the underlying probability distributions of the processes involved the challenge in applying similar ideas to quantifying uncertainty in concept selection is to define and assume reasonable distributions of the certainty of an ahp decision are presented in this paper the first called orthodox uncertainty quantifies how well ahp delivers what it purports to deliver under strict assumptions that its approach is philosophically correct the second called heterodox uncertainty considers ahp s incomplete characterization of trade offs among attributes and quantifies the uncertainty in the quantification of uncertainty requires us to make assumptions about the uncertainty of information that is offered by participants in ahp as well as uncertainty in parameters controlling the level of compensation inherent in the decision
of context and language comprehension the ability to comprehend spoken language to the far left latent constructs defining phonological coding ability and visual coding ability given that learning to read in alphabetically based orthographies entails visual recoding of language in the form of alphabetic characters representing speech segments and given that both phonological and visual coding are involved to some extent in language acquisition and language processing we suggest that these two abilities are among the most basic of underlie the ability to learn to read phonological coding is defined as the ability to use speech coding mechanisms to encode information linguistically it aids in storing and retrieving linguistic units in analyzing and synthesizing these units and in establishing connective bonds between them and the entities they represent thus in addition to its demonstrated importance in vocabulary depicted in figure through direct links to the semantic component of the model phonological coding is presumed to be critically important to success in learning to read by virtue of the direct and indirect contributions it makes to the acquisition of facility in speech segmentation alphabetic mapping spelling and writing and word identification empirical evidence that comprehension of spoken language depends in some measure on one s ability to use speech coding mechanisms to hold linguistic units in working memory prior to assembling them into meaningful propositions thus phonological coding is assumed to have a significant influence on both syntactic processing and general language comprehension and language comprehension respectively visual coding is defined as the ability to encode store and retrieve visual information its ultimate contribution to reading development is to facilitate visual word recognition but because of the constraints on visual memory imposed by an alphabetic writing system we assume that visual coding is mediated in part by an analytic process we call visual analysis visual analysis aids memory by facilitating detection of visual patterns it facilitates reading development primarily by virtue of the contribution it makes to letter and word discrimination to the detection and encoding of redundant spelling patterns and to the learning of letter sound relationships however given the likelihood that the learning of letter sound relationships comes primarily through one s experience in discriminating identifying and spelling written hypothesized to contribute directly to context free word identification and spelling but only indirectly to phonological decoding finally we assume that visual analysis mediates the relationship between visual coding and semantic knowledge phonological awareness is defined as explicit awareness and conceptual grasp of the idea that spoken words consist of speech segments we assume along with shankweiler torgesen that phonological awareness and at least rudimentary facility in phoneme segmentation are basic prerequisites for success in beginning reading because it is in learning to segment speech that the child begins to concretize and make functional use of the alphabetic principle thus phonological awareness is presumed to influence the acquisition of skill in reading by virtue of the direct effects it has on spelling and phonological effects it has on context free word identification in the present context semantic knowledge is defined as vocabulary knowledge and verbal concept development syntactic knowledge is defined as implicit knowledge of grammatical rules for ordering coreferencing and inflecting the words in sentences both types of knowledge are presumed to contribute directly to language comprehension given the importance in sentence comprehension semantic knowledge is also presumed to contribute directly to the acquisition of syntactic knowledge because acquiring facility in word identification depends in part on the child s knowledge of the meanings of the words he or she is learning to identify semantic knowledge is also presumed to contribute directly to context free word identification between the basic cognitive abilities underlying reading ability and the three reading ability are spelling and phonological decoding spelling is the productive ordering of the letters that specifically define a word phonological decoding is the ability to map alphabetic characters to sound and thus to use letter sound analysis as a vehicle for identifying printed words both are presumed to have direct effects on context free word identification the direct effects of phonological decoding inhere in the child s growing ability to use sound out printed words that are not immediately identified the direct effects of spelling inhere in the potential it holds for fostering structural analysis of the type that facilitates precision in encoding the letters in printed words the order in which they occur and word specific spellings in general spelling is also presumed to have a direct effect on phonological decoding because it is in part through early experience in using letter sounds to aid spelling acquire functional use of the alphabetic code and becomes increasingly familiar with the orthographic and morphological regularities and irregularities inherent in written english because academic learning provides the child with many opportunities to increase vocabulary knowledge through spelling and writing we assume a direct contribution to the semantic component of language finally context free word identification and language comprehension are both presumed to make direct and independent contributions to reading comprehension in accord with the theoretical arguments presented earlier we expected that context freeword identification along with the phonological skills and abilities more strongly related to reading comprehension in younger readers than in older more advanced readers conversely we expected that language comprehension and the semantic and syntactic abilities that underlie language comprehension would be more strongly related to reading comprehension in older more advanced readers than in younger readers we also expected that language based skills especially phonological skills would mediate causal relationships between visual skills and reading given the load on visual memory imposed by the alphabetic properties of written english figure convergent skills model of reading development younger older groups note coefficients for the younger group are always listed above those for the older group standard coefficients are in parentheses method participants a total of children participated in the study in the younger group and in the older group all came from schools located in middle class to upper middle class
measure of information risk by forming factor mimicking portfolio returns based on another proxy for firms earnings quality value relevance has the advantage of being the earnings quality measure that is least correlated with cash flow volatility but can still reasonably approximate the underlying conceptual construct we are trying to capture the precision accounting information these additional procedures yield results that are consistent with changes in the market pricing of information risks surrounding dividend change events in the predicted directions however while these additional tests help mitigate concerns with the alternative operating risk change explanation we caution the reader that we cannot definitively rule out this alternative explanation for the observed the timing of the changes in the ir factor loadings we employ an statistic approach advanced by andrews and andrews and ploberger in testing for structural change with an unknown change point our structural break tests on the ir factor loadings indicate that the weight on the ir factor changes months prior to dividend initiation announcements and months prior to dividend decrease announcements dividend initiation firms experience a significant decrease in their ir factor loadings surrounding the identified structural break points in ir factor loadings and also in tests of break points based on the dividend announcement month that the pricing of information risk changes in advance of the dividend change announcement month suggests that the market anticipates the dividend changes and also the changes in characteristics of the firms to further validate that the change in the loadings on the ir factor returns reflects changes in the pricing of the dividend change firms information risk we examine changes in the underlying information characteristics of the dividend change firms we document a decrease in the metric information quality and a reduction in analyst forecast dispersion and stock return volatility for dividend increase and initiation firms we observe changes in the opposite direction for dividend decrease firms taken together our results suggest that firms experience significant changes in their information environment and the pricing of accrual quality information risk surrounding their dividend change announcements first we provide triangulating and corroborating evidence on the pricing of information risk and on the growing literature on earnings quality and information risk francis et al investigate the relation between earnings quality and the cost of capital for a large sample of firms over the period they predict and find that firms with lower quality accruals have higher costs of capital as evidenced by larger realized costs of debt lower debt ratings larger and positive loadings on an accruals quality factor added to one factor and three factor asset pricing regressions aboody et al also lend empirical support to the prediction that information risk is priced by the capital market by simultaneously examining the pricing of information risk and concomitant information based trading by insiders we build upon this literature by examining the joint hypothesis that information risk is dividend payout experience changes in the pricing of information risk the dividend change setting allows us to make specific directional predictions depending on whether dividends are increased or decreased and the interrupted time series setting allows us to align our observations in event time and enables us to design tests that are less subject to correlated omitted variable problems as in cross sectional tests in francis et al and aboody et al and extends research on dividend changes from a risk perspective we document that firms that change dividends experience systematic changes in their ir factor loadings in addition to changes in other systematic risks similar to results on other systematic risk characteristics we find that the ir factor loading changes before dividend announcements largely lagging the market anticipation of such alternatively stated firms announcement of dividend changes occurs after the changes in firm operating and information characteristics further while nissim focuses on only dividend decreases we examine a much larger sample that encompasses dividend initiations dividend increases and dividend thus the interpretation of our findings is applicable to a the rest of the paper is organized as follows in section we review relevant literature and develop our empirical predictions in section we describe our empirical design section presents our empirical results and section concludes relevant literature and hypothesis development aboody et al these empirical investigations are premised on recent theoretical research which demonstrates that information risk is nondiversifiable and priced by the market easley and ara argue that accounting information among other things affects the information structure surrounding a company stock and consequently equilibrium returns ara suggests that firms accounting treatment of earnings and disclosure policy will affect returns in equilibrium easley and ara advance the notion that uninformed traders require a premium to invest in risky assets in a multi risky asset market with both informed and uninformed traders in their model informed traders are better able to adjust their portfolio weights in response to new information some of which is private to them as a result uninformed traders face nondiversifiable information risk and will require a premium for bearing demonstrates that in equilibrium both the quantity and the quality of information affect asset prices two implications of their model are the required risk premium increases with the fraction of private information relative to total information and the required risk premium decreases with the precision of public and private information easley and ara further note that their findings suggest an important role for the accuracy of accounting accounting information in asset pricing and that greater precision directly lowers a company cost of capital because it reduces the riskiness of the asset to the uninformed leuz and verecchia take a different approach and argue that higher information quality or reporting precision reduces the firm cost of capital because higher information quality improves the coordination between firms and investors with respect to capital investment decisions in ow quality financial reporting increases the risk of inefficient risk allocation and high quality financial reporting by reducing the uncertainty in earnings as an informative signal about the payoff structure reduces the cost of
a dissenting opinion that argued the law was overbroad given that there are more than substances in the list of controlled substances in the controlled substances act and that each of these on an individual it would seem elementary that congress must specify the particular substances whose use may cause particular damages and injuries to an individual sufficient to deprive that individual of his constitutional rights under the second amendment the dissent continued to have a narrowly tailored restriction on second amendment rights congress must specify the frequency of use of a deemed to have a continuing effect on an individual yet the majority disagreed and was willing to uphold the conviction even proponents of heightened review for the second amendment right to bear arms reject the notion that all or even most forms of gun control and other weapons regulation would be unconstitutional nelson lund for example argues that even if heightened review is applied most existing forms of gun control would survive such scrutiny because they are sufficiently tailored to achieve sufficiently worthy government purposes massey who argues for semi strict scrutiny contends that a great deal of regulation of such an individual right can and should be permitted according to donald dowd the reason gun control legislation would survive even strict scrutiny is the overwhelming public safety concern in the context of this strict scrutiny the court would most likely find that public and legislation would pass muster on this count thus it is fair to predict that strict scrutiny in the context of gun regulation will not be overwhelmingly fatal and might even permit most if not all gun control laws to survive judicial review in that case many of the reasons that counsel against applying strict scrutiny are mitigated still there would be unwelcome costs to applying strict scrutiny to gun laws if that standard writing about a different area of law eugene volokh has articulated sound reasons for courts to avoid applying what they call strict scrutiny to areas of law where the standard is truly not very strict first there is a risk of confusion as some courts might import the strongly rights protective traditional strict scrutiny doctrine into this other area of law where it does not belong here right to bear arms cases second courts might export the watered down version of strict scrutiny from one area into other cases or less directly weaken strict scrutiny in these other cases by diluting its formerly forceful symbolism third promising strict scrutiny with its historical connotation of extreme skepticism concerning the government action but delivering something considerably weaker diminishes courts credibility to this we might add that legislatures may be hesitant to undertake their duty to enhance public safety of fear that strict scrutiny will in fact be fatal even if legislatures know that some laws survive second amendment strict scrutiny the expected benefits of gun control would be discounted by the probability of judicial invalidation if the review is not rigorous courts should not claim to apply strict scrutiny a brief note on intermediate scrutiny important governmental ends and a substantial fit an intermediate level of review however would likely lead to only marginally different results than either strict scrutiny or even the reasonable regulation standard first the governmental ends prong of the analysis would not change public safety is already a compelling government interest sufficient to satisfy second with regard to means there may be little distinction in practice between narrow tailoring and something like substantial relationship the fit is never going to be very precise in gun control and courts will need to accept a large measure of over inclusiveness and under inclusiveness no matter what formal standard is applied no law of any sort will make the public perfectly safe and any gun control measure could go further to make guns a law requiring safe storage could do more and require safety locks a law requiring licensing for concealed carry could go further and ban laser sights and silencers as dowd recognizes ost legislation will assert broad safety concerns and broad gun control measures to match covering both good and bad gun possessors and good and bad guns such legislation cannot be narrowly tailored to the intensity of public opinion on guns legislation is inevitably the result of hard fought compromise in the political branches to expect such legislation to reflect a tight fit between ends and means is unrealistic given that most laws might be expected to survive even strict scrutiny it is hard to imagine which cases would come out differently under an intermediate standard if the difference between the expected outcomes under reasonable regulation and strict scrutiny is already small there is not much of a baby to split intermediate scrutiny might in time simply morph into one of the extreme standards becoming either deferential reasonableness review or slightly more demanding strict scrutiny indeed one might argue that the handful of federal decisions from the fifth circuit purporting to apply some aspect of strict scrutiny are really applying nothing more rigorous than intermediate scrutiny already certainly those cases do not require fit between ends and means the state cases also support the inference that intermediate scrutiny will ultimately prove to be little more than the reasonable regulation standard the small handful of decisions invalidating gun laws might arguably be seen as applying a form of heightened scrutiny as noted however such judicial skepticism does not last long and courts in the end fall back to their usual stance of deference to it comes to matters of public safety and firearms if deferential review is as one might suspect from this pattern an equilibrium point then second amendment heightened review seems likely to end up in the same place reasonable regulations on the right to bear arms will be upheld as constitutionally permissible conclusion arms the standard he would choose a individual second amendment right should be subject to reasonable government regulation the state experience indicates that the right to
in hemodynamic and autonomic functioning associated with depression recent meta analyses have demonstrated small to and cortisol responses specifically symptoms of depression appear to be related to exaggerated heart rate blood pressure and vascular resistance responses but blunted reactivity and impaired recovery of cortisol studies that have examined other acute biological stress responses have been less consistent for example women with high normal scores on but not norepinephrine following the trier social stress test in contrast greater plasma norepinephrine levels were demonstrated immediately following a speech task in women with higher depressive symptoms in clinically depressed women a small increase in reactive protein was observed immediately following the test while kanel et al an important aspect of psychosocial influence on acute responsivity is the nature of the acute psychological demands and this may partly explain some of the inconsistencies in the literature a match between acute demands and the nature of the underlying mood state of participants may stimulate heightened responsivity therefore it is possible that in physiological response however research to date that has examined the effects of depressive symptoms on psychobiological responses has employed non specific stressors that have not been designed to induce specific mood states therefore we examined the effects of depressive symptoms on cardiovascular and catecholamine responses to two separate speech tasks that were designed to response we also measured background stress levels which were included in analyses as a covariate catecholamine responses were assessed from salivary methoxy phenylglycol the major metabolite of norepinephrine that closely reflects plasma metabolite levels mhpg increases acutely in response to sympathetic activation such as we hypothesized that both tasks would induce subjective and physiological activation additionally we predicted that the individuals who have higher depression symptoms measured with the ces would demonstrate greater cardiovascular and mhpg responses to the induction of acute differential responses to anger induction methods participants fifty five healthy men and women who were free from any medication were recruited from a student population all participants gave full informed consent to participate in the study and ethical approval was obtained from the ucl graduate school committee on the ethics of human research psychophysiological testing am or in the afternoon beginning at pm participants were requested to refrain from vigorous exercise smoking and food caffeine and alcohol intake for prior to testing at the beginning of the session weight and height were recorded for the calculation of body mass index and participants completed a series of questionnaires relating to demographic details and medical history after a further min acclimatization for min using a finometer instrument the finometer device provides measures of arterial pressure stroke volume and cardiac output based on the volume clamp method and the modelflow modelling method that have been previously validated following the baseline period participants were required to complete two separate psychologically min using a counterbalanced design during the two speech tasks participants were instructed to speak into a video camera about two separate life events that had caused them to feel depressed and angry some examples of such life events were presented to the participants whilst they were given task instructions and then a min the min speech the tasks were separated by a min recovery period during which participants were allowed to read at the end of each task the participant rated feelings of stress depression and anger on a seven point scale from low to high these ratings were also obtained at baseline cardiovascular function was monitored throughout the speech tasks and for a min recovery period immediately afterwards saliva samples for the assessment of mhpg were taken at immediately after the tasks and then at min post task using cotton dental rolls questionnaires depression was assessed using the center for epidemiological studies depression scale a item self report instrument that is a valid and reliable measure for assessing level of depressive symptoms the ces score is a measure of chronically depressed state that contrasts with which is a reflection of transient acute mood state based on the conventional cut off score of participants were placed into either high depression or low depression symptom groups recent life stress was measured with the undergraduate stress questionnaire this originally comprised of items that are relevant to the experience of university students in the present study the item version of the usq was employed and the frequency of each stressor s occurrence in the last weeks as either yes or no and the severity of the stressor as not at all stressful to very stressful overall scores for the usq ranged from to for event frequency and to for event severity analysis by yajima et al the assay demonstrated good precision as judged from the agreement between duplicates which typically showed coefficients of variation of mean values for blood pressure heart rate and cardiac output were computed for the last min of the baseline period the speech tasks and min recovery periods total peripheral resistance was computed using the formula mean arterial pressure cardiac output change scores were calculated subtracting values during speech tasks from the baseline values responses to tasks were analysed with repeated measures analysis of variance with two within subject factors and one between subjects factor we also performed a series of multiple linear regression analyses to examine the impact of depressive symptoms on the various physiological stress making adjustments for age gender bmi usq scores test time and task order significance is reported at results the participants were aged years on average with bmi of twenty three participants apart from the greater ces and usq scores of the high depression group the assignment of task order was also not different between depressive symptom groups manipulation check there were significant increases in ratings of stress depression and anger during both tasks however changes in acute depression and anger mood states ratings of depression compared with at and at induced significantly higher ratings of anger compared with dt although there were no differences between tasks in ratings of stress there was
digital imaging are needed in order to better understand arrangement of the coarse and fine grain matrices with respect to each other and to model the compression behavior of clayey sands along with resulting effects of grain rearrangement on the in the earth s crust abstract an analogue experiment was carried out to model melt segregation from the solid rock matrix and its subsequent transport carbon dioxide gas and sand were used as analogue materials of crustal partial melt and host rock respectively the analogue model displays the diffusional transport mode at low flux rates and the transition to the ballistical mode as the response of the system to a higher gas flux the ballistical mode is the ballistical mode is characterized by discontinuous transport and extraction of the gas phase in separate batches which leads to the development of power law batch size distribution in the system the gas is extracted preferentially in large batches and does not influence the state of the system and size distribution of remaining batches the implications of the analogue model to real magmatic processes are supported by power law leucosome width distributions measured in several the emergence of fractality and power spectrum of system fluctuations provide evidence of possible self organized critical nature of melt segregation processes introduction the processes of liquid phase generation its segregation from the solid matrix and subsequent accumulation and transport occur in many natural systems such as partial source rock is the main way of magma generation in the earth s crust the length scales of magma formation processes cover more than twenty orders of magnitude starting initially at the micrometer level deep in the crust and finally forming large magma bodies several cubic kilometers in volume near the surface however the particular nature of magma one of the manifestations of partial melting in the earth s crust represent just the end product of magma formation or a snapshot of the magmatic system right before solidification as the traces of previous processes and melt transportation pathways are rare there is little evidence of the melting stage where the migmatite has been solidified or of magma volume a migmatitic system observation of a melting episode in progress could thus provide valuable information for understanding the dynamics of melt generation however re creation of the melting processes at similar extreme physical conditions and long geological time scales as they occur in the crust is quite complicated and sets limits to the experimentation with normal conditions and therefore makes the real time monitoring of the experiment possible certainly when evaluating the results of the experiment the somewhat different behavior of analogue materials must be considered the analogue model introduced in this paper is one example of an artificially set up system where natural is a good descriptive tool in the studies of the problematic aspects of partial melting and magma formation melt generation in the crust although difficult to apply in real time studies of mesoscale melt generation processes melting experiments with crustal rocks have been performed to investigate melt behavior at the microscale the formation of a three dimensional melt network and overcoming the melt percolation threshold and less on the melt fraction in the rock according to the melt composition percolation thresholds of or melt have been predicted for crustal partial melting however the distance of magma transport by percolation through the microscopical melt network is limited due to the interaction volumes melt escape from the local system and magma transfer over larger distances will be possible if the cohesion between mineral grains is lost due to the high melt content in the rock it has been proposed that melt volume is needed to overcome this melt escape threshold many authors support paths feed larger melt channels and which stay conductive over a relatively long time on the other hand bons et al argued that neither a connected melt network nor reaching any threshold is required to accomplish magma segregation and magma extraction and transport can take place at very low bulk melt fractions according to their conceptual model magma is transported discontinuously the batches in this case melt is rather inhomogeneously distributed in the rock which allows overcoming melt percolation and escaping thresholds locally in limited space compared to percolation melt transport in batches can be several orders of magnitude faster which as a result allows magma displacement over longer distances effective on melt concentration which results in melt segregation into low stress regions that are oriented to a plane at a high angle or perpendicular to compression gradients in the normal stress field or noncoaxial forces as a simple shear component affect the mobility of melt along melt rich domains and enhance additional gradients in the melt pressure field and cause melt redistribution within the system high mobility of melt during crustal anatexis becomes evident from the internal structure of leucosomes as well as from the presence of discordant dykes that cross cut the migmatitic banding the tank was filled with fine grained quartz sand and sugar water and yeast mixture by settling the sand through the liquid column so that the pore space between sand grains was completely saturated by the solution the life activity of yeast bacteria results in the formation of alcohol and carbon dioxide gas being included in the sugar solution the yeast was presumably homogeneously uniform the production and redistribution of the gas phase was considered as the analogue of magma generation during crustal anatexis with gas batches formed by the accumulation and transport processes representing the melt rich domains or leucosomes in migmatites the sand column as the solid phase represented the crustal block that undergoes partial melting extra normal stress or a simple was the only deformational force that could influence gas segregation the analogue materials used allowed the experiment to be performed at room temperature the original idea of this kind of analogue model is from bons van millingen although focussed on different aspects at
south africa limitations sexual behaviors other than condom use was related to attitudes subjective norms or self efficacy to use condoms hence these variables cannot explain the relations we observed between the theory of planned behavior predictors and outcomes still longitudinal studies are needed to confirm the relationships observed in the present study between theory of planned behavior variables and condom use the participants were university students accordingly the results may not other populations in addition the study relied on self reported behavior which can be inaccurate the possibility that results might be different in other populations must be pursued in future studies that utilize a longitudinal design and that include outcomes that do not rely on self reports conclusions considering the important risks of stis including hiv among university students the theory of planned behavior may provide a model for the development of effective interventions with such students future research must investigate why attitudes and subjective norms were more predictive among american students whereas self efficacy was more predictive among south african students expanding the moral community or of massachusetts amherst advocates of educational accountability policies say that the policies are intended to use the state s authority to ensure equal educational opportunity opponents make essentially the opposite claim that expanded state power is intended to disempower local communities and to single them out for blame in response to larger political and economic imperatives this article analyzes the enactment of educational accountability policies in four us states drawing upon legislative documents hearing and debate transcripts where available and press coverage the analysis concludes that policy makers did intend to make the public education system more equitable however the results of the policies as implemented show a significant gap between aspirations and results this gap increases the accountability policy critics credibility since the middle of the century reformers have enacted a series of from one level of government to another much of the movement of power has been toward the center with increased federal and state authority over funding curriculum and assessment advocates of this centralization say that they intend to use the state s authority to ensure equal educational opportunity they work from a definition of community in which all residents of a state have an interest in ensuring the educational achievement of all the state s students regardless where they live opponents make essentially the opposite claim that expanded state power is intended to disempower local communities and to single them out for blame examination of the legislative debates about and subsequent implementation of state accountability sanctions shows that both interpretations are partially correct there is little evidence of ill intentions for the policy but a significant gap between aspirations and results educational accountability policies which increased state authorities power in four us states after introductory sections presenting data method and background information the next section of the article analyzes legislative debates on state mandated graduation tests a similar analysis follows of policies that empowered state authorities to intervene in schools or school districts both of these sections emphasize legislators intentions for the policies which according to available records appears to have been to make the public education system more equitable a briefer final section of the article addresses why the implementation of these policies has not lived up to policy makers egalitarian aspirations data the analysis in this article focuses on the enactment of strong accountability sanctions in connecticut massachusetts new jersey and vermont all sanctions include requiring students to pass a state test to earn a high school diploma as well as empowering the state to take administrative control of or replace staff in schools or school districts the four states all debated accountability policy and enacted different combinations of sanctions prior to federal enactment of the no child left behind act of which required states to have specific kinds of of receiving federal funds for compensatory education the analysis here is of the states pre nclb policies rather than their response to the new federal requirements state accountability policies enacted in the and paved the way for nclb by providing models for members of congress the expanded federal power embodied by the nclb largely operates through the state departments of education local activities by when the us congress began debating nlcb states had enacted laws or regulations requiring graduation tests states had the power to replace staff in close or reconstitute schools and states had the power to take over school districts although not all of these policies had yet been the four states in this study were chosen because of the range despite this variation the states share a long history of local control in education because of this history an expansion of state authority would presumably have provoked extensive debate over why any change was needed the data sources for this article include legislative documents hearing and debate transcripts where available and press coverage where necessary to fill in gaps in the documentary record oral history interviews were also conducted with participants more sources appears in the appendix table variation in state accountability policies method the study employed historical case study methodology with the unit of analysis being the state each of the four states development of its particular set of accountability policies was treated as a case with the beginning and ending dates of the study determined by when the major policy enactments took place table shows the relevant years and policy debates for each state the enactment case studies were historical in two senses the first concerns data because the study is of events that had already taken place rather than ongoing events the data do not include direct observation the documents studied include legislative records state agency reports documents produced by groups attempting to influence state policy and newspaper fill gaps in the documentary record the second sense in which the case studies are historical is the project s theoretical aspirations social scientists often undertake case studies to identify broadly
reminded of when listening that is our personal memories and the music this wider perspective has led to increased awareness in particular of how we use music deliberately to bring about desired emotional change some everyday goals of music for emotional self regulation found in a study by denora were calming down getting in the mood for an activity and getting out of a bad mood with participants appearing fully aware of which music they ne in different situations music may then be unique in the way we use it as self administered emotional therapy the second potential mechanism in the efficacy of music listening for pain relief is our perceived control over the experience the belief in the ability to respond in a way which will decrease the aversiveness of the event research findings now link perception of control to wide ranging aspects of adjustment and quality of life in patients such as lower level of disability and disruption of activity and decreased mood disturbance having an intervention such as music listening that can be used at any time to distract from pain and relieve anxiety therefore may alter the meaning of the sensation and promote a sense of independence and coping ability this may be particularly useful within the unfamiliar hospital environment and has been likened in effect to patient controlled analgesia despite the recent growth in the number of clinical research studies investigating audioanalgesia however results to date appear to be mixed the majority of such studies have presented music chosen in advance by researchers for its presumed pain relieving and relaxing qualities known as anxiolytic music nilsson et al for example found instrumental music played varicose vein patients undergoing surgery to correspond with lower pain intensity but with no related effects on nausea fatigue and anxiety cadigan et al further found minutes of relaxing music to reduce blood pressure respiration rate and psychological distress but with no corresponding reduction in pain perception as discussed however our level of involvement with a piece of music is dependent upon complex interaction between many personal social and been asked to listen to their own preferred music suggested to enhance involvement and emotional engagement with the stimulus koch et al firstly found use of patient controlled analgesia and sedatives during urologic procedures to be reduced when accompanied by preferred music listening macdonald et al then found foot surgery patients to feel significantly less anxiety when listening to preferred music but with with no by preferred music listening macdonald et al then found foot surgery patients to feel significantly less anxiety when listening to preferred music but with with no corresponding effect on pain intensity ratings hysterectomy patients despite having undergone a more complex medical procedure often involving more severe and lasting pain reported no differences in anxiety or pain it was suggested that a social bond arose from the similarity within this group of have revealed methodological flaws incomplete reporting of theory and methods and a lack of objective measurement decreasing confidence in many of the findings the literature as a whole remains fragmented with studies covering a broad spectrum of clinical conditions that appear to be of an opportunistic nature rather than building up to form a comprehensive picture the role of individual differences such as gender in potential efficacy of the intervention despite being a major an opportunistic nature rather than building up to form a comprehensive picture the role of individual differences such as gender in potential efficacy of the intervention despite being a major focus of pain research during the past decade has further been largely unacknowledged in previous research the current work therefore began with controlled experimental trials using standardized methodology and measurement in order to provide a firm basis for clinical application in future in laboratory induced cold pressor pain was used as a method suggested to mimic effectively the effects of chronic conditions in the first study participants preferred choice of music from their own collection was compared to a white noise control and to a pre selected anxiolytic piece previously rated as most relaxing in a pilot study when listening to their preferred music both male and female participants tolerated the for significantly longer and reported feeling significantly more perceived control over the pain than in both white noise and anxiolytic music conditions interestingly anxiolytic music did not significantly increase tolerance when compared to control it was only in female participants however that ratings of pain intensity were found to be significantly lower in the preferred music condition than both other conditions a second study then compared to distracting stimuli found effective in the previous work mental arithmetic as a cognitive distraction and a humorous audiotape as an emotionally engaging distraction this study found preferred music listening in both males and females to result in significantly increased tolerance of the painful stimulation than the mental arithmetic task and significantly greater perceived control rating than humor ratings of pain intensity did not significantly differ between listening to a favorite choice of music appeared the most effective strategy in combining distraction with the enhanced perceived control the positive effects of preferred music listening on tolerance perceived intensity of pain and perception of control over the experience reported in the two current experimental studies bring into question whether these effects would be present in pain of long term duration for example if the distracting effect of music would still be perceived a useful intervention in pain that is constant as short term experimental pain in healthy participants is unable to mimic the complexity of the experience of chronic pain a study of the perceptions of pain sufferers would furthermore give an indication of possible wider ranging effects of music which should form part of future research perceptions of the usefulness of music listening as a treatment for pain have only been included in two previous studies first in a to hospitalized cancer patients by fritz who found music to be suggested as an effective non invasive
fig this latter method is based on the appearance of a speckle pattern arising from fixed concentration fluctuations when the system becomes non ergodic above the gel point since the time and length scales intrinsic to this method are larger than for nmr it was not surprising that it detects gelation somewhat earlier it should however be noted that the investigations could gelation reactions important conclusions can be drawn from the independence of the network formation rate on concentration as well as from the final analysis of the proton mq data of the fully reacted gels it was found that about the polymer contributes only to the formation of elastically inactive microgels loops or dangling chains the remaining polymer is either highly surprisingly the average rdc is also independent of concentration all these observations are in good agreement with or complementary to those from detailed mechanical and dls studies of this system the concentration independence of the gel formation rate and the final cross link density indicate that in summary it is seen that a large spectrum of useful partly unique insights can be gained from the application of mq spectroscopy to gelling systems further work will have to show how the approach has to be adapted to the case of long entangled pre polymers that exhibit significant entanglement induced residual dipolar couplings even when no cross links are present one might envision entanglement induced residual couplings are a strong function of temperature an extended protocol might necessitate a study at different temperatures cohen addad has discussed other possible approaches along these lines based on proton transverse relaxation properties the application of mq spectroscopy to this type of system is underway mobile polymer systems while the concept and the pulse sequence appear of course somewhat involved its implementation is robust the set up is easy and it can be run in an automated fashion even on cost efficient low field equipment the main advantage over more traditional nmr methods such as hahn echo and signal loss due to motion induced relaxation by means of monitoring the dq build up as well as a reference intensity the sum of dq and reference intensities represents a fully dipolar refocussed intensity function irmq the decay of which is largely dominated by dipolar relaxation in permanently cross linked networks a point by point division of the dq build up by irmq yields a normalized it can be analyzed in terms of distributions of residual dipolar couplings and a number of applications to different types of elastomers bimodal pdms networks filled sbr nr and filled pdms has been presented a particularly important finding is that all chemically uniform single component rubbers are found to display surprisingly narrow almost unimodal coupling the nmr response as well as the mechanical and swelling behavior via the conformational entropy where gaussian statistics is assumed for the end to end separation of subchains this distribution should lead to a broad gamma distribution of couplings and this is not observed in our experiments additional cooperative contributions to local chain order for instance describable in terms of an orientational dynamics simulations as well as site resolved dq build up curves and spectra we have developed molecular models for the quantitative interpretation of the measured rdcs in terms of a polymer backbone order parameter for the cases of nr cis br and pdms a comparison of the resulting nmr determined cross link densities with swelling results indicates satisfactory agreement trapped entanglements still remain unclear experiments on swollen rubbers indicate a significant broadening of the rdc distribution that was attributed to swelling heterogeneities the behavior is strongly subaffine with only a small part of the chains being stretched significantly it can be explained in terms of competing desinterspersion and stretching processes where the former dynamics in elastomers the relaxation of overall intensity in the proton mq experiment thus also the incoherent contribution to the decay of transverse magnetization in hahn echo experiments is shown to be solely governed by fast segmental processes ie rouse modes that afford the averaging of the effective static limit reference coupling down to the plateau value given by the excluded on the basis of our data in linear entangled melts reptation of course takes the role of the slow process that causes a further loss of residual orientation correlation a comparison of networks and a long chain melt showed that the overall intensity loss in the melt is still governed by the fast modes while reptation has a decisive influence on the reduction of the apparent to detect an rdc that corresponds to the entanglement level this explains earlier findings of unexpectedly high order parameters at lower temperatures and exemplifies the non trivial and as yet not well understood relationship between the true chain fluctuation statistics the rheologically determined timescales of polymer dynamics and the data determined by nmr more theoretical work will have to be for entangled chains which should ultimately feature fitting parameters that can be related to classic theories of polymer dynamics miscellaneous applications include the dynamic state of chains grafted at one or two ends in block copolymers and to silica surfaces in the first case the confinement is found to increase chain order and to effectively suppress reptation case the role of heterogeneity is apparent in build up curves with two maxima reflecting strongly absorbed and more freely mobile chains in the outer layer a decisive layering with increasing but well defined mobility was also found for molecularly thin pdms layers in high surface porous materials finally proton mq nmr has been demonstrated to provide unique insights into the gelation process of polymers in the bulk or those from rheological and light scattering studies and indicate spatially inhomogeneous gelation processes in both solution and bulk in conclusion mq nmr will continue to improve our understanding of polymer chain dynamics where the large variety of new opportunities ranges from industrial screening applications of elastomers to very basic questions concerning mq nmr which is the reliable separation of
the traditional bathroom are used by both genders the use of these spaces is rather personal this zone is an individual sphere a degree of privacy is expected the female zone this zone accommodates a number of spaces that serve different functions the female family mem bers who practice different types of activities within this zone dominate its use some of the spaces are exclusively used by women it is the most se cluded regard to the male stranger while the male family members who are aware of the female dominance of the zone are expected to give some sort of sign upon entering this zone accommodation and space use we shall now look more closely at the accommodation and the use of each domain after examining the sub divisions of the interior attention should be turned to the relation between the house and the street consideration will be given to the a public sphere and the house as a private sphere as represented by the two primary domains the argument for including and discussing the exterior is based on the fact that it represents the third comer of the triangle of spatial spheres which reflects the three main categories of users the data used in this study combine architectural drawings with personal observations the male zone each house in the sample accommodates certain spaces defined as male because they are used by male inhabitants and their male guests who visit for varying periods of time in the observations we found that this domain has two types of use as a simple reception area or guest room and or as an area inhabited daily by the male members of the family this distinction is applied to the entire sample this domain is where the head of the family spends all or most of his time the men of the family or visitors who are welcome any always surround him in all cases this domain functions as a formal reception area consisting of the aali the houdjrat or the douira it is richly furnished and decorated the female zone the gender division provides freedom for the women to practice both domestic and private activities as stated before the female members of the household dominate the family domain yet there are certain spaces set aside exclusively for the use of women who perform different types of activities space all the family gathering spaces are considered as female zones but not all the spaces of the female zone belong to the family gathering zone some spaces are labelled according to the gender of the user while others are labelled according to the gender associated with the specific activities that occur in them however it appears that there are certain spaces that are consistently designated as female the kitchen the tisifri and the stah the family gathering zone it clear that there is more than one space where the family may gather the principal gathering spaces are the ammas addart on the ground floor and the ikoumar or arched portico and the tigharghart on the first floor in all cases the ammas addart is considered the main gathering space for members of the family most of the inhabitants will identify these spaces as gathering areas the personal individual zone this zone consists mainly of two spaces the bedrooms and the toilets traditi the bedrooms are used at night though some of the activities associated with bedrooms such as relaxing napping and sleeping also take place at other points throughout the dwelling analytical procedure in the first stage of the analysis we shall consider three domains the exterior domain of the stranger and the two interior domains of the house represented by the family and by the men the the relevant spaces including transition spaces that are located within it a syntactic analysis of each house will be conducted the justified graphs illustrate the suggested models of the zabite house the justified graphs of each house display the identified spheres and domains the various spaces are numbered as follows exterior skifa taskift or chicane intermediate space room dahlis or cellar ammas taddart or center of the house tisifri or women s living room inayene or kitchen ajmir or toilets lamghassal or traditional bathroom tazeka el aoulet or storage room ikoumar or arched portico tazeka or room tigharghart or upper courtyard aali or first floor male reception room tazdit or animal room and method space syntax is a set of techniques used for the representation and quantification of spatial patterns of buildings the main proposition of the theory is that social relations and events express themselves through spatial configuration configuration is the relationship between two spaces taking into ac count all other spaces in the building hillier et al explain spatial configuration is thus a more complex idea than spatial relationship which need than a pair of related spaces the primary form of space syntax analysis proceeds from a technique of mapping buildings into a spatial structure using the external entry points as a base the building plan is translated into a structural diagram of how life is framed within it the linear structure is a string of spatial segments in sequence known in architecture as the enfilade there is no choice of pathway from one segment to another the cyclical or ringy structure is the as it connects segments to each other in a network with multiple choices of pathway a branching structure controls access to a range of spaces from a single segment such as a hallway or corridor in practice nearly all buildings are structured in combinations of these basic syntactic structures analytical tools convex space the convex map was developed by hillier and hanson to identify spaces of a system where two dimensional organization could be identified taking the convex spaces that have the best area perimeter ratio that is the fattest then the next fattest then the next until the surface is completely covered a convex space is segmented according to its
were linked to administrative data which provide complete records of physician visits and hospitalizations avisit based measure of continuity of care was derived using a majority of care definition whereby individuals who made all their visits to family physicians to the same fp high continuity of care and those with less than their visits to the same fp as having low continuity of care whether individuals were hospitalized was also determined from administrative records results high continuity of care was associated with reduced odds of ambulatory care sensitive hospitalizations controlling for demographic and health related measures it was not related to hospitalizations for all conditions however conclusions the study highlights the importance of continuity of primary care in reducing potentially avoidable hospitalizations introduction continuity of care can be defined as a long term care have been documented extensively particularly well supported is the relation between continuity of care and preventive health care including cancer and vaccination among both and continuity of care has also been shown to be related to reduced physician visits and emergency department important issue given the high costs of acute care if some hospitalizations can be avoided through better continuity of primary care this would provide further support for the importance of fostering continuity of care the findings of the few existing studies have not led to any firm conclusions in this regard as two studies have shown that continuity of care was related to reduced a study conducted in the us with medicaid clients continuity of care was also not related to hospitalization for ambulatory care sensitive that is conditions for which timely and effective ambulatory care could presumably have reduced the risk of hospitalization by preventing the onset of an illness or condition controlling an acute episodic illness or hospitalizations for ambulatory caresensitive conditions would be precisely the ones that could be reduced through better continuity of care whereas hospitalizations in general might not given that many conditions are not under the control of family physicians further examination of whether continuity of care is both for all conditions and for ambulatory caresensitive conditions in a sample of older adults in manitoba a mid western canadian province primary health care in manitoba provides the first level of contact with the health care system most primary health care is currently provided by general or family practitioners the majority of whom work seek care from any fp of their choosing there is nonenrolment requirement during the study period in the physician supply in the province remained stable with fps per population in compared with per population in this is comparable to other provinces with manitoba ranking sixth among canadian provinces and territories in terms of database the survey component was derived from the aging in manitoba study which is the largest and longest running study on older adults in canada separate representative samples of older adults living in manitoba were interviewed in and respectively and the interview focused on a wide range of topics with a core set of questions related to health and functioning included in all waves responses to the and aim waves were used in the present study as they involved relatively large representative samples of older adults the final sample size used in the analyses given exclusionary criteria which provides the opportunity to examine self reported measures in relation to health care use administrative files contain anonymized data on all health care encounters of the population of manitoba the administrative databases have been used extensively for research and have been shown to be administrative physician billing data which include claims from both physicians working on a fee forservice basis who constitute the majority of physicians in the province as well as evaluation claims submitted by physicians receiving alternative types of remuneration physician use patterns of aim participants were examined based on ambulatory visits to fps over two a variety of ways in the literature and there is currently no universally accepted definition following previous research we used a majority of care whereby patients were classified as having high continuity of care if they made at least their total fp visits to the same fp over a two year period those who made fewer of their visits to the same among seniors it meaningfully differentiates between individuals who essentially make all their visits to the same fp versus those who do not the total visits used to derive the continuity of care measure included only those to fps thus visits to specialists did not affect the continuity of care profile only those individuals with four or more fp visits in total were included in the socio demographic variables were included in all regression models they included age gender years of education and marital status these measures were taken from the aim survey descriptive statistics the same postal code over the two years classified as not having moved while those with two or more postal codes were classified as having moved self reported health related measures self reported health related measures were also controlled for in the analyses the measures were taken from the aim survey and included self rated health that it is a strong predictor of health care use and the question asked individuals to rate their health as bad poor fair good or excellent the measure was subsequently recoded such that the bad poor and fair categories and the good and excellent categories respectively were combined high blood pressure heart attack stroke arthritis or rheumatism palsy eye trouble not relieved by glasses ear trouble dental problems chest problems stomach trouble kidney trouble diabetes foot trouble nerve trouble and cancer affirmative responses were then summed into a self reported chronic condition index and instrumental activities of daily living without help or whether they needed assistance the adl scale included the following items going up and down the stairs getting about the house getting in and out of bed washing or bathing or grooming dressing and putting shoes on cutting toenails eating taking medication or
than that of the bottom section if the blend of sbs and asphalt is unstable table iii shows the storage stability of sbsmodified asphalt under the same blending conditions in the softening points between the top and bottom sections and this means good storage stability however the endhydroxyl group cannot reduce the difference in the softening points obviously and makes few contributions to the improvement of the storage stability these results suggest that the attachment of amino and carboxylic acid group to sbs could improve the storage of sbs modified commonly asphalt consists of saturates aromatics resins and asphaltenes on the dsc curves of sbs modified asphalt the absorbing peaks of these components overlap to form broad peaks generally pma with large absorbing peaks on dsc curves will have more components conducting phase transmission in the designated range of temperatures and this means blends have smooth dsc curves and the area of the absorbing peaks is relatively small at the same time by comparing the areas of the absorbing peaks at the top and bottom sections of sbs modified asphalt we can estimate the storage stability of pma the dsc curves of end functionalized and nonfunctionalized sbs modified asphalt in the temperature nonfunctionalized sbs however the curve of the end hydroxyl groupsbs modified asphalt is still rough similar to that of nonfunctionalized sbs both the softening point and dsc analysis suggest that the attachment of amino and carboxylic acid groups to the end of sbs could improve the storage stability of pma however the end hydroxyl group at was prepared with and epoxy ethane as the capping agents respectively because the end groups were attached to sbs by an in situ anionic polymerization method it could attract widespread commercial and academic interest the introduction of end groups did not alter the structure and composition of sbs dynamic mechanical correspondingly a tem image of end functionalized sbs suggested that the shape of the ps domains changed from uniform spheres in sbs to disordered incompact strips in end functionalized sbs by comparing the softening points and dsc curves of end functionalized and nonfunctionalized sbsmodified asphalt we concluded that end amino and carboxylic acid were useful in improving the storage dynamic loading on pore size of needlepunched nonwoven geotextiles abstract nonwoven geotextiles are widely employed in civil engineering applications for the functions of separation filtration drainage and protection these functions are highly dependent upon pore size as it is one of their major requirements and it becomes more critical when geotextile is subjected to a compressional load in this study the effect of loading cycles on the compressional characteristics has been investigated by two parameters ie compressional and recovery and recovery the effect of process parameters ie feed rate depth of needle penetration and stroke frequency on the pore size has also been reported furthermore the relationship between fabric area density and pore size has been discussed filtration drainage and protection these functions are highly dependent upon pore size as it not only ensures the free flow of liquid through the geotextile but also meets the requirement of clogging the effect of pore size distribution becomes more critical when geotextile is subjected to any kind of compressional load the compressional load can on geotextiles the nonwoven structure is required to absorb energy and should ideally maintain its structural characteristics after recovery van wyk carried out a pioneering work on the compressibility of random fibrous assemblies based upon the number of contacts later the theory for calculating the number of fiber contacts per unit volume was modified fiber contacts were not validated experimentally the compression deformation of general fibrous assemblies was predicted based upon these theories the authors have claimed that these theories can be applied to any kind of textile material ranging from sliver yarn to fabrics nevertheless during compression these numbers of contact points strongly influence the free loading kothari and das described the compressional behavior of various nonwoven structures in terms of two parameters ie compressional and recovery these compressional and recovery parameters are dimensionless constants that indicate the compression and recovery behavior of fabrics for example a lower value of means lesser compressibility and a higher value of deduced by formulating the relationship between pressure and thickness of the nonwoven fabrics in the uncompressed and compressed states as shown in equations and where and tf are the initial and final thicknesses and and pf are the initial and final pressures respectively here final thickness represents the thickness in the compressed state obtained after predefined cycles of loading stabilize after five or six cycles of loading and there is no change in thickness this has suggested that there is no change in the pore size of the nonwoven structures after five or six cycles of loading using the relationship between thickness and pore size as shown in equation have also revealed similar results of variation in thickness with cyclic loading it was reported that the thickness loss increases with the increase in the cycles of dynamic loading up to a certain limit and subsequently there is no change in the thickness in this study the pore or opening sizes of needlepunched nonwoven structures have been measured under cyclic loading ie compressional and recovery furthermore the effect of needlepunching parameters including feed rate to carding machine stroke frequency and depth of needle penetration has been analysed experimental six cross laid samples of needlepunched nonwoven needlepunched nonwovens the pore sizes of the nonwoven fabrics were determined by capillary flow porometer based on the principle of liquid extrusion porosimetry technique in this method a specimen of cm in diameter is saturated with wetting liquid of low surface tension and it is then placed between the two that it can migrate on the other side the air pressure on one side of the specimen is increased in small incremental steps an increase in air pressure causes the bubble to escape from the largest pore initially and further increase in air pressure results in
just how difficult it is to believe that individual moral autonomy can serve as the operative basis of legal judgment ex post facto or political choice ex ante the relevant fact is that after the militant opposition to fascism in germany primarily the communists and socialists had been destroyed there was little room left for any morally uncompromised behavior other than kant s proverbial resignation of one s post that is complete abandonment of the political while arendt did believe that the category of guilt must be applied to actors in the nazi state and that eichmann for one was guilty and deserved to die the judgment she finally speaks in the book s epilogue is fatalistically empirical let us assume for the sake of argument that it was nothing more than misfortune that made you eichmann a willing instrument in the organization of mass murder there still remains the fact that you have carried out and therefore actively supported a policy of mass murder the wide berth that she leaves to accident or fate in her judgment is depressing indeed for then it seems the response to genocide must always be ex post facto unless that is we fatalism as something that might be better understood by institutional juridical rather than moral juridical categories here we see then how the tension between politics and justice comes to the fore in the other focus of the book the institutionalization of law in the state for justice if it cannot safely be entrusted to the moral intuition of the individual must be institutionalized in the communal life of the state the as the discussion of the schmittian conception of justice indicates what kind of state the implication of fate in arendt s judgment of eichmann seems to be that an individual must take responsibility not only for his or her individual actions but more fundamentally for the state in which his or her individuality will either thrive in justice or wilt in moral dependency thus jirgen habermas believes that only a liberal democratic state can legitimize justice whereas for schmitt or a left leaning philosopher such as richard rorty a state inevitably must be ethnocentric the relevant question for justice only being how broadly or narrowly to ignore the state and its capacity to institutionalize positive justice is to turn humanity over to the very fate that recklessly mishandled both the eichmann and the millions whose murder he abetted one is left only with a dull lesson in the ineradicable evil of mankind arendt herself fears this as the chief legacy of the trial a fear that is not allayed by subsequent developments either in discussions of the holocaust or in the attempts to criminalize genocide the eichmann trial arendt predicts will not serve as a valid pre cedent for future trials of such crimes if we are content like the state prosecution and more ethnoreligious commentators such as elie wiesel or irving greenberg with the holocaust serving as an example of revealed fate an accident that is nt one like a miracle or sacral character consists in its ontological status as pure singularity then we need have no further concern for the precedents the trial failed to set arendt by contrast suggests grimly but with ultimately hopeful pragmatism that the unprecedented in the form of a crime once it has appeared may become a precedent for the future if genocide is an actual possibility of the future then no people on earth can feel reasonably sure of its continued existence help and the protection of international law success or failure in dealing with the hitherto unprecedented can lie only in the extent to which this dealing may serve as a valid precedent on the road to international penal law the state through the dictatorial formation of legislative will can precede justice for the worse by preempting liberal criteria of guilt as we see in arendt s analysis of totalitarianism the state can also enable justice for the better as her regret over the missed judicial legislative opportunity of the eichmann trial what this dependent justice finally is does not concern arendt her report on the trial as she states in the postscript she wrote in the aftermath of the bitter controversy that the book generated in the early does not aim at a speculative theory of justice but at a detailed description of a trial and its immediate implications yet importantly it was one of the book s chief merits that it generate controversy about the political conditions of justice in at least this one very important instance because arendt did not settle the case s questions with absolute versions of justice or politics moral philosophy or democratic institutional theory she was also not ready to draw vast holocaust lessons she pointed rather to the ambiguities that such an extreme crime coupled with such an ordinary criminal raise for the foundations of identities between states and citizens eichmann in the cold war and beyond because it was the ordinariness of eichmann that most haunted or threatened arendt s commentators it is worth looking at our own legal and political normalcy today in light of developments since the eichmann trial in particular i want to consider what different cold war responses to the precedent set by the eichmann trial reveal about it especially because the trial s opening coincided with two symbolic moments of the cold war yuri gagarin s manned space flight and the cia sponsored bay of pigs invasion and its closing coincided with the building of the berlin wall in the trial s subsequent political vicissitudes just as in the courtroom itself issues that might have had very general implications for international law or politics ended up being decided on the basis of more parochial institutional interests while a narrow interest in state sovereignty often guides actual policy what makes the eichmann case so distinctive in this respect is that however parochial the legal and political
the number of solid elements which is always constant the number of fluid elements may decrease increase during the consolidation swelling process fluid elements that are adjacent to the top and bottom boundaries at time are designated as mt and mb respectively calculates stresses pore pressure fluid flow and settlement on these aspects and only a brief review is provided here all quantities vary only in as the consolidation model is one dimensional the vertical total stress at node is calculated from the overburden stress on the layer and the self weight of overlying elements as where a series of versus data points that similar to fig are entered by the user to define the time sequence of loading vertical effective stress is calculated from ej by interpolation between data points in fig a if ej flow between contiguous solid elements is calculated using the darcy gersevanov law gersevanov schiffman et al which accounts for the relative motion of fluid and solid phases the relative discharge velocity positive upward between nodes and fig a is at the top and bottom boundaries of the layer if the top boundary is undrained and if the bottom boundary is undrained once the relative discharge velocities are known a new height is calculated for each solid element using the net fluid outflow over time increment corresponding to consolidation the final void ratio distribution and hence sult can be calculated at the beginning of a simulation if the final data point in the qt loading sequence is the highest value otherwise unloading will occur sult will not be known a priori and values are not calculated during the course of a simulation the above method ensures that the weight of solids contained berles thus solid particles do not cross from one solid element to the next and solid element interfaces as well as the nodes can be considered as embedded in the soil skeleton as such the method follows the motion of the solid phase and consideration of relative discharge velocity between contiguous solid elements is sufficient to ensure mass balance eq fox and berles and fox showed that analytical and numerical solutions obtained using material coordinates gibson et al schiffman et al and the moving boundary approach of lee and sills the advantage of the piecewise linear method is that complex effects eg unload reload general constitutive relationships material self weight and heterogeneity and layer accretion can be taken into account relatively easily this same advantage permits the incorporation of effects into advection of fluid elements similar to the treatment of solid elements a lagrangian framework is adopted to follow the motion of fluid elements and hence provide a rigorous method to track solute advection under conditions of varying porosity and seepage velocity we recall that the original fluid elements have initial fluid volume vfo during advection the volume of fluid is adjacent to a drainage boundary in which case the element will gain or lose fluid in response to flow across the boundary a fluid element is eliminated from the top or bottom of the layer when its volume is fully depleted at an outflow drainage boundary likewise a new fluid element is created at an inflow drainage boundary when the existing boundary fluid element is filled to capacity the capacity of each original fluid element is added at the bottom of the layer have a capacity equal to that of the lowermost original fluid element any new fluid elements added at the top of the layer have a capacity equal to that of the uppermost original fluid element vfo thus for a simulation with upward flow across the layer it is possible for all of the original fluid elements to leave the system and for each remaining fluid element to calculate fluid element advection qb is defined as the total ie cumulative volumetric fluid flow across the bottom boundary of one column of solid elements if qb then the coordinate for the lowermost fluid element is mb and the fluid volume contained in that element is vf and mb and so forth known heights and porosities of the solid elements are then used to calculate lf and mt and hence the geometry for all fluid elements at each time step the procedure also includes necessary provisions to correctly account for fluid element advection in response to general flow reversals at drainage advection changes to steady advection governed by an external hydraulic gradient implicit in the previous treatment of advection is the assumption that total porosity is equal to effective porosity effective porosity is the soil volume fraction that conducts flow with reported values ranging from to total porosity edil accounting for mobile and immobile pore fluid would require and solute exchange between the two fluid masses which is intriguing but beyond the scope of this paper the assumption of equivalent effective and total porosities may be more reasonable for consolidation conditions than for rigid media because the consolidation process preferentially collapses large voids and ruptures large clay particle aggregates delage and lefebvre griffiths and joshi hicher et al and thus would be total porosity solute transport solute transport occurs by advection of fluid elements dispersion between contiguous fluid elements and sorption onto solid elements that are also moving in response to the consolidation process the dual lagrangian framework of automatically accounts for advection transport in the fluid phase and sorption transport on the solid phase dispersion transport is calculated in the associated solid elements taken into account mass transport through solid particles by solid phase diffusion is neglected transverse dispersion transverse dispersion is the spreading of solute in directions normal to the direction of advection for rigid porous media with advective flow in the direction the transverse dispersion mass flow rate is calculated as coefficient apparent tortuosity factor shackelford and daniel do free solution diffusion coefficient transverse dispersivity vs seepage velocity and a cross sectional area the value of can be measured using diffusion tests perkins
to reinforce the idea of community ashort distance north of tell abraq there is a third millennium site close to the site of ed dur the site recorded as south the ed dur can justifiably be described as a shell middden because of the quantity and density of shells found there the excavation of a part a small amount of animal bones near the northern end of the coastline at shimal in ras al khaimah two umm an nar tombs have been excavated but no direct evidence for a third millennium settlement has yet been found the absence of a third millennium settlement at shimal is surprising given the great number of that there is a substantial site yet to be found there as for the other tombs and settlements that have been referred to above it is possible that a hierarchy of sites can be defined this would consist of a sites characterized by the presence of tombs and substantial architectural remains this includes al sufouh and mowaihat sites where no tombs are present and the only evidence for settlement is indicated by an area of sherd scatter and hearths this includes abu dhabi airport ghanadha island and south the ed dur to this list of possibilities i would add the following remarks fig due to deflation it was described above how at mowaihat the in situ features of the settlement were associated with the layer deposits and in many places this had been completely deflated leaving behind the heavier sherd and shell deposits as a veneer on top of the layer deposits however had there been any substantial stone buildings at the site at least the raw material would be left behind in the same that all such stone would have been removed at a later date and therefore these settlements most likely comprised buildings constructed from poor quality mud brick or as seems most probable barasti arish type structures it is likely that deflation has removed similar evidence from sites such as abu dhabi airport ghanadha island and south the ed dur however indicate differing degrees of mobility a and would suggest a higher degree of sedentism than sites such as ghanadha island and south the ed dur might even be satellites of a and type sites the presence of fine wares and imported pottery is not restricted to any one type of site fine red on black painted umm al nar pottery is present there is no reason why this diversity of third millennium sites should be confined to coastal areas in the inland areas of southeast arabia sites where umm an nar tombs are found close to contemporary settlements with substantial architectural remains are well known in contrast with this at asimah where a number of tombs have been apart from the remains of a simple stone building only hearths and isolated post holes as shown in the sketch plan of five selected asimah north the excavation trenches have been found and the excavator likened the results to those from ghanadha island conclusion in areas of southeast arabia there is often a lack of mowaihat have clearly not survived as well as the more durable and frequently monumental funerary structures intended to house their deceased inhabitants this might be a result of the fabric of the buildings at some sites and subsequent erosion and deflation processes even so more excavation needs to be focused on this problem in order to confirm or oceania box gully new evidence for aboriginal occupation of australia south of the murray river prior to the last glacial maximum thomas richards christina pavlides keryn walshe harry webber and rochelle johnston keywords box gully aboriginal late pleistocene pre last glacial maximum south the eastern australia abstract recent archaeological investigation at box gully located on the calbp aboriginal occupation of the extensive area between the murray river and the tasmanian highlands the remains of repeated small scale camping episodes were uncovered in a palaeosol capping a buried pelletal clay lunette five new radiocarbon determinations on charcoal associated with cultural material in the palaeosol range from ca calbp near the bottom to ca calbp near the top and obtained independently during geomorphic investigations of box gully hearth features stone artefacts and the remains of bettong hare wallaby shingle backed lizard emu and fresh water mussel were present within the palaeosol review of the late pleistocene archaeological record of the western murray basin allows the finds at box gully to be placed in a human occupation context of adaptation to severe after ca calbp lacustrine localities including the willandra lakes lake tandou and the lower darling were much less heavily frequented than previously or like lake tyrrell abandoned at the same time sustained occupation of the murray river valley occurred as did the initial occupation of rockshelters in the highlands of southern victoria the australian aboriginal archaeological record of the pre interest for decades due to its association with the first peopling of and initial adaptation to the continent recent discoveries coupled with advances in dating and controversy over the age claims for certain sites highlight the relatively small size and patchy distribution of the known record for this period however the prehistory of the large area south of the murray river and north of tasmania is virtually unknown during this period indeed twenty five years ago ross proposed that most of the ca bp and this model has persisted in the literature investigation in late at box gully located in a clay lunette at the northern end of lake tyrell victoria occurred as part of a field school designed to provide archaeological and cultural heritage management investigations suggested the presence of aboriginal occupation deposits in sediments ca radiocarbon years old an impression supported by archaeological field inspections in and however this possible site had never been investigated by archaeological excavation the major research question the box gully investigation prior to the lgm the goal was to evaluate whether aboriginal occupation evidence could be retrieved from
democracies and they increasingly react like classical nation states trying to assimilate their immigrants it is an unfortunate historical coincidence that the wars in yugoslavia occurred when romantic multiculturalism was in vogue particularly among well meaning western intellectuals who regarded bosnia as a model for how their societies should be their utopian multiculturalism the west engages in symbolic action as hayden brilliantly demonstrates with the example of the misplaced symbolism of the reconstructed old bridge in mostar an important message for anthropologists is that history matters and that an unbiased look at history can help avoid idealistic perceptions and misguided ideologies for anyone familiar with the balkans this is of course a truism in bosnia hungarian and yugoslav past the histories of peoples that were always integrated into larger multiethnic empires or states the recent civil war in bosnia is part of these histories and therefore there is no returning to a multicultural harmony that never was in emphasizing the power of historical social demographic political and economic hard facts and criticizing constructivist maria todorova one of the facts in southeast europe is not only its history of hegemonial domination but also its practices of indirect resistance which the bosnians will use to oppose the community imagined for them and not by them finally in stressing the impact of informal constraints and of forbidden thinking hayden goes to the core of anthropological methodology and ethics pleading for the unbiased the level of detail of his argument makes it clear how strongly he has to argue against established moral visions in the discipline hayden s arguments are sound and correspond largely to my findings in other balkan countries my criticism apart from the fact that only literature in english is used and that nation and nationalism are used but hayden s ideas about this native model remain rather vague the interdependence between anthropological research and politics should have been discussed more explicitly in view of bosnia s desire to join the eu western politicians certainly have the right to interfere but their interference and i read hayden this way should be informed by unbiased historical and ethnological analysis shown the need to reemphasize some others and i am grateful to them for doing so further a pattern of themes in the responses provides additional evidence in support of my argument in that a majority of them decry the lack of more traditional ethnography or the use of data from elections censuses and public opinion polls many also seem to this is a missionary stance not a scientific one the discounting of statistical evidence is particularly striking because the three discussants who do so simply recite the current dogma that as borneman puts it nothing is stable about these electoral or census preferences and this makes an election unreliable as a forecast for identity they ignore not only has been a strong congruence between census results election results the ethnic character of the dominant political parties and the breakdown at times of the population into warring sides and this under imperial royalist fascist socialist and postsocialist regimes make a fundamental error in presenting the chronology of events in the past years contrary to the assertions of both borneman and jansen the breakdown of the population of bosnia mainly into separate mutually antagonistic self and other defining national groups was not a result of the war but rather the very social and political process that brought it about as noted by experts on the region doing real time woodward burg and shoup saying as jansen does that we must engage with the retrospective privileging of nationality statistics is itself a retrospective rereading that misses the point the bosnian peoples privileged their separate national identities in as they have consistently done since at least the eastern crisis that ended ottoman rule there and acted and this is true even when they have had other options in the free and fair elections given the chance to vote for a nonethnic party that stood for a civil society of equal citizens about the electorate did so thus jansen s slighting dismissal of the supposed surrealism of polls is bizarre surrealism it may be to observers but the very real patterns of social action by most ethnography would have added to the analysis but not necessarily in the ways envisioned by borneman hann and jansen hann s reference to sorabji s work is quite selective in reporting her conclusions she indeed notes changes in bosniaks perceptions of serbs but these appear to make it even harder for bosniaks to accept serbs back into sarajevo and the final sentence of her article jansen or would regard the current political arrangements in bosnia as illegitimate is not the question instead it is whether the population of bosnia self divided mainly into separate peoples think they are or rather whether it seems likely that enough of them do so to create a viable state that rests on the consent of the governed would more traditional ethnography be useful to answer itself likely to be compounded by observer bias and reliable conclusions may be harder to draw from ethnographic descriptions than from congruence between sets of statistical data for example hann refers to as yet unpublished ethnographic work in mostar by a german doctoral student as indicating that externally initiated institution building can promote interaction and the development of new forms the success of a mixed bosnian soccer team in international competition might help build citizenship but in mostar in june one person was seriously hurt and six wounded in ethnic rioting after brazil beat croatia in the world cup the bosniaks it seems supported brazil and the croats also at the time of the world cup bosnian serbs reacted bitterly when the bosnian state can recall that they used to live in a country in which shared history was stressed there was intercommunal cooperation in the distribution of state funds the army and the police were fully integrated and the
ignored trials also entail generating a different response on the present trial than on the immediately previous one accordingly because anterior differences between ignored and selected trials emerged only on no go responses simple the results in a related vein because the present work found stronger evidence of no go effects when participants withheld responding to a recently selected cue than when they withheld responding to a recently ignored cue these results do not appear to reflect only an absence of overlapping motor potentials on no go relative to go trials both no go selected and no go ignored responses absence of overlapping motor potentials but only the former response elicited a robust no go effect consistent with a response control account of the no go itmight appear simplest methodologically to study only go no go responses and to examine responses to particular stimuli that serve conflicting roles on successive trials thus examining only go no go trials as a function of whether response cues for the same stimulus are the same or different across consecutive trials would conflate effects of local context with effects of how one recently responded to a particular cue by a response always is generated and a go no go task the present design ensures that an active response precedes every go no go response thus the present task holds constant the local context of generating versus withholding responses while varying only whether particular cues have been selected or ignored no go nogo and component processes of response control the amplitude of their no go responses the present results support interpreting no go responses as related functionally to response control thus far however we have discussed response control in broad terms moreover it is well established that relative to go responses no go responses often produce a whether reflecting pure response inhibition or rather the detection of conflict between the generation versus suppression of a particular response the often observed in go no go tasks appears to relate functionally to response control accordingly on the bases of the presently reported findings and of previous findings one important functional distinction appears to be that no go effects are more likely than no go effects to emerge when the go response already has begun to be enacted by the time the participant is cognizant of the no go cue supporting this general interpretation lateralized but not the no go suggesting the sensitivity of the no go but not the no go to the actual beginnings of the enactment of erroneous responses further informative are comparisons between singleresponse and choice based go no go tasks participants are less likely to begin responding before receiving no go cues in choice based presentation than in single response tasks smid and colleagues manipulated whether go responses required choice or not and found markedly smaller no go effects in the two choice condition relative to the no choice condition similarly in the present study we observed no differences between go and no go responses on a four choice go no go task thus the no go but not the no go appears to be diminished greatly when choice is inserted into the go response such that beginning to execute the go response prior to receiving the no go cue is less likely whereas no go responsesmay relate broadly to signaling that erroneous responses already have been set in motion no go conflicting response related information go no go responses require categorical processing irrespective of whether they culminate in go or a no go decisions importantly however on no go trials exclusively the actor must resist generating the go response in order to allow this processing to run its course when situational or retrieved cues press for conflicting response stave off responding until an action decision is reached in the present experimental design for example withholding responding to a no go cue for which one recently generated a response requires abstaining from responding while integrating conflicting information from different sources accordingly whereas as a function of the extent of cognitive processing needed to form a categorical decision anterior responses on go no go tasks may reflect the additional recruitment of frontal brain structures that monitor and forestall generating the go response until categorical decision processes to previous studies of response priming in go no go tasks in which stimuli compatible with the go response are presented to participants prior to the actual go no go cue kopp and colleagues showed that priminggo responses increased the size of the no go but not the no go seemingly in direct contrast bruin wijers and van stavern found that priming go responses increased to response control should be particularly evident when task demands for response control are particularly high each of these findings was presented as evidence against attributing a response control function to the particular component not impacted by go priming in each particular that consisted of the same symbols that served as the go cues whereas in the bruin et al study the primes were morphologically distinct from the go signals moreover in the bruin et al study the primes disappeared ms prior to onset of the go no go signal whereas in the kopp et al study the flanker primes were presented just before et al study may have experienced the task as a stop signal task in that they may have begun generating a response to the first symbol but then have had to rescind the response if a no go signal appeared consistent with this interpretation a large also emerged on go trials in which the flankers were incompatible with the go signal much as a large typically is elicited in stop signal tasks when the subject already has committed to executing a response and then is signaled not to do so following these considerations one can hypothesize that response priming will enhance the no go when such priming biases the actor toward subsequently categorizing cues as events requiring a response such that the participant needs to forestall generating the go response until the conflicting information can be evaluated conclusion in summary the present study found evidence of a no go effect of higher amplitude anterior responses on no go than diminished when participants were cued by a
found in a monophonic form can hardly be deemed of any significance given the scale of the sample however internal evidence from helas tant vi de mal eure reinforces the view that the two songs may not share the same attitude to the independence and escurel as can be seen from example a single passage occurs four times in the piece at two different levels of transposition important here is the question of the hierarchy of voices and the fact that one of the two paired passages is unlike its fellow shared between two different voices one of which is the middle one this may well suggest that unlike the halle rondeaux there is no sense in which the middle voice has it shares some of its melodic material with one of those other voices given the fact that it is also written in a higher tessitura the topmost voice takes on adifferent status from the lower two and in so doing the song distances itself again from escurel and halle this is not to suggest that the three voices in helas tant vi de mal eure constitute cantus voices sharing material but it does argue for at least the lower two voices being conceived together in a way that is not seen in escurel or halle in doing so it prompts comparison with the first rondeau by machaut doulz viaire the second half of the piece begins with the repetition of a melodic phrase copied from cantus to tenor and then to triplum the difference between doulz viaire in the former although it is difficult to ignore the clear imitative sense in the second part of helas tant vi de mal eure explicit in the second section of the escurel s single rondeau and the two rondeaux in pn picardie together deserve significantly more attention than they have so far received in the context of what is known about the functioning and date of the rondeaux of adam de la halle and of guillaume de the conventional position that the rondeaux in pn picardie like halle s are mere ciphers of those of machaut or just less sophisticated than escurel s single attempt helas tant vi de mal eure and ai desir de veoir exhibit a large number of competing characteristics that argue for a discrete phase of polyphonic rondeau composition in the generation before machaut s were apparently first composed that is rich and varied poetic structure text declamation duration vocal scoring and hierarchy of voices the rondeaux in pn picardie consistently mark themselves out from those of halle and with the exception of the presence of the subsectional medial cadence also exhibit features more in common with later styles even machaut than with escurel given that the physical evidence is ambiguous the poetry contemporary with escurel s single example and therefore contribute to a broader glimpse of the polyphonic rondeau tradition before machaut turned his hand to that particular branch of composition bringing the history of the polyphonic rondeau before under review in the light of the evidence provided by the songs in songs but also points to a number of musical and poetic parameters that are of value in the interpretation of the entire repertory from halle to machaut and probably beyond the relationship between poetic declamation and foreground middleground rhythm is an important subject for the investigation of halle s rondeaux and the comparative study of vocal scoring is one that is of consequence for the entire repertory however raise the spectre of their serving as crude teleologies to underpin questionable diachronic histories the fact for example that sub sectional cadences are the norm in machaut and never found in halle cannot be taken to mean that the presence of such cadences in escurel and their absence in the songs in pn picardie points to earlier date for the latter and a later one for the former a claim on the other hand and this has been the article s central task it does argue very strongly for considering the songs in pn picardie as key witnesses in the history of the polyphonic rondeau before alongside what has hitherto been considered a unique specimen escurel s a vous douce debonaire century some represent the imaginative avant garde while others continue older traditions coupled to gradual change around composers of polyphony were entering a land as foreign as the terre estrainge into which the hero of halle s rondeau in this foreign land of the trouve res with the learned polyphony of the motet clausula and cauda and in a world where the motets of vitry machaut and their anonymous colleagues co existed with the copying and quite possibly recomposition of much older types and in much older notations the more intricate view of the emergence of polyphonic song prompted by a consideration of the songs in pn picardie the contribution of anthropometric factors to individual differences in the perception of rhythm abstract in a sample of human subjects aged between and years two distinct measurement procedures were carried out a psychophysical procedure to determine preferred beat rate and standard anthropometry to determine mass and skeletal dimensions additionally the factors of sex age and musicianship carried out with preferred beat rate as the dependent variable and each of the anthropometric variables as between subjects factors partitioned into two levels defined by the percentile significant effects were obtained for age anthropometric factors and the interaction between age and sex totalling about the explainable variance no significant main effects of sex or musicianship were obtained pattern when listening to regular temporal sequences is fundamental to rhythm perception for any sequence that is sufficiently regular to induce a beat percept most aspects of the processing and coding of the sequence are strongly determined by the listener s choice of beat much work in rhythm perception over the last few years has therefore been devoted to trying to understand the process of beat induction and aside from purely there have
heads and they are ones that make no claim to the accuracy statements on which much anthropological discussion of culture is based if we borrow smith s argument about the inappropriateness of defining religion in terms of propositional belief and apply it to the tendency to define culture in these terms we can suggest that such definitions are problematic because as is the case in the religious domain so too as regards culture primarily to be engaged in believing that certain propositions are true about the world more often as with the early christians in smith s account people have been involved in believing in certain gods values etc and thereby committing themselves to them and ordering their lives or parts of their lives around of course but it is worth noting that among those anthropologists and other comparativists who have carefully considered none see it as a cross culturally valid concept while some do see the believe in concept or something like it translating quite well this is certainly true in urapmin where the tok pisin term bilip is widely used whenever i asked people what they meant by this term they spoke of trusting god to do what a shirt i trust that you will do that tellingly when they spoke of being convinced during the period of conversion of the fact that god existed they talked in terms not of coming to believe that he existed but of knowing or seeing that he existed for them christian belief is about trusting god and acting accordingly it is not about mentally assenting to a set of propositions those who have noted that the fact that this model renders the expression of true belief a central aspect of religious practice presupposes notions of sincerity that are most often found in cultures influenced by modern post reformation christianity and are not universally present in others people in many places find it difficult to imagine because their traditional language ideologies do not allow for this kind of practice many recently converted protestants struggle with the christian demand that they do so and find this a hard part of their new religion to understand they are inclined in keeping with the believe in framework to imagine that people s truth commitments will be most reliably expressed an extension of asad s argument that anthropologists have looked for belief in the wrong places by virtue of their tendency to assume that belief that statements are the most important part of culture but what does all of this have to do with how anthropologists understand christian convert cultures the answer has to do with the way anthropologists tend to handle what we might call situations of mixed belief it then becomes natural in situations of cultural change such as conversion to ask which propositions are new and which are old when anthropologists ask this of the cultures of recent converts they invariably find that in spite of needham is the exception to this generalization since he aims to banish belief from the anthropological lexicon he plays up the deconstructive possibilities inherent in these two broad meanings of the which one might be more broadly applicable across cultures valeri offers brief but useful critical readings of both needham and smith people s claims to be christian many of their propositional beliefs are demonstrably old moreover people can be shown to be interpreting at least some propositions that look new in old ways given their disciplinary drive to stress continuity anthropologists tend to regard these as situations in which people are not best studied as christian put otherwise belief that models of religions and cultures lend themselves to continuity thinking they do this by encouraging those who use them to treat religions and cultures as made up of a wide assortment of different propositions to since such wholesale elimination of older propositions rarely or perhaps never occurs it is not difficult from the point of view of these models to find continuity lurking in almost all cases of apparent change what i have just tried to do is reframe quite standard ways of handling syncretism in terms of the kind of propositional belief logic that often underlies them arguments about the traditional depths that support them are too familiar to require further remark here what my argument suggests is that this line of thinking might be productively rethought from the point of view of the other belief logic i have introduced the one that imagines that belief in notions are more fundamental than belief that ones in trying to identify what people are up to culturally of the things they were most fundamentally trying to do was achieve salvation in christian terms not everything they do has to have christian salvation as its proximate goal it is enough that some of their actions do and that they can and do locate other of their actions in relation to this goal such a shift in perspective would allow us to discover and analyze discontinuity even in be helpful in clarifying the approach to syncretism that i am suggesting we take although as i discussed earlier the urapmin narrate their history as one of radical change in which the new postconversion revival era is discontinuous with that of the past there is one traditional ritual they still regularly practice that ritual is pig sacrifice to the nature spirits who make people sick although urapmin to see these sacrifices as christian rituals should we then suggest the urapmin are not really christian the answer in their case is no because they themselves recognize sacrifice as a deviation from a ritual life they see as primarily aimed at achieving their paramount religious goal of christian salvation and because through prayer and discussion and the involvement of female christian ritual specialists in the sacrificial their christian commitments in the overall logic of their religious life their belief in the efficacy of sacrifice is clearly subordinated to their belief in the salvational
as a case in this sense realist evaluation shares some elements of grounded theory in which data relating to a certain area are collected and analysed and the findings are used to generate or modify theory similar approaches are advocated in terms of building theory from case study research captured adequately through measurement realist evaluation however proceeds from theory to data collection with a focus on explanation this provides a sound basis for the use of mixed method designs scriven discussed traditional approaches to evaluation as black box strategies where evaluators concentrate on attempts scriven s white box evaluation which not only addresses the effects but also the inner workings and operations of the components of a programme and how they are connected it is well known that the outcomes and effects of complex social interventions are difficult to capture and realist evaluation provides no outcomes and effects quantitatively and some qualitatively for example as sanderson pointed out one potentially important aspect of social exclusion that is difficult to measure is the degree of support provided by family friends and local communities realist evaluation may be better able to assess and explain these types of effects through its that there have been beneficial changes for participants in a programme as compared with non participants it is often difficult to distinguish between correlation and causation realist evaluation attempts to deal with this problem by concentrating on explanation and by its process of context mechanism outcome configuration a programme can produce outcomes in particular contexts moreover this focus on context and trying to identify what works for whom in what circumstances helps in the difficult task of attributing outcomes and effects to the programmes themselves in the context of poverty and social exclusion for example walker emphasized the need to identify incidence of poverty is comparatively rare evaluation of related programmes must therefore seek to disentangle the effects of personal and structural factors and construct theories that span micro and macro explanations the fundamental problem with the experimental approach to evaluation is that put it programmes work when they provide appropriate forms of help which address the needs and circumstances of individuals in the particular prevailing contextual conditions realist evaluation explicitly seeks to identify these contextual conditions and which programme mechanisms work for whom in which conditions or whether they are the result of changes in contextual conditions the limits of realist evaluation also need to be taken into consideration pawson and tilley recognized that social programmes are embedded within a wider set of macro and micro forces and as described above these cannot always be captured in a tilley s approach to realist evaluation consequently a more balanced account of quasi experimental designs and the ways in which they can be adapted to contribute to a realist evaluation approach may be necessary statistical analysis cannot stand alone as a formal representation of a mechanism but it can be used to provide evaluation in sport and leisure have in fact recognized the importance of realist principles although such recognition is implicit for example patriksson stated sport like most activities is not a priori good or bad but has the potential of producing both positive and negative outcomes questions like what conditions are necessary produced need to be examined more recently coalter concluded any monitoring and evaluation of intermediate or strategic outcomes must include an analysis of the associated processes and experiences which underpin successful initiatives thus he advocated an approach to evaluation that examines the underlying a framework in which the evaluation of individual projects can contribute to both theory development and improvements in social programmes long and sanderson noted that one of the impediments to evaluation is the feeling that small scale evaluations cannot provide robust evidence to support a causal link configuration focusing this is particularly appropriate for sport based projects given the multiple outcomes and effects that sport is presumed to have bovaird et al provided a theoretical model that demonstrated the interrelationships between various outcomes resulting from sport for example if participation absenteeism realist evaluation can contribute to this kind of theory development by building up a series of context mechanism outcome configurations around sport for example if one evaluation study determined that in certain contextual conditions sports participation led to increased school attendance researchers this realist approach to evaluation and theory building in which the results from individual evaluations can contribute to the evaluation of other similar projects is particularly well suited to the evaluation of complex initiatives where a number of projects share a similar goal to be achieved through a range of activities should be employed in social work practice and health work while making a similar case for the use of realist evaluation in assessing football based projects this article also argues that the links between these different fields should be made more a principle that also underlies many football based social inclusion projects the objectives of football based projects such as promotion of tolerance reduction of youth offending avoidance of drugs and alcohol also coincide with those of specific social work and health work interventions moreover when referring to nursing practice mcevoy and richards argued that the identification of mechanisms and contexts is highly relevant to frontline services since the influence of contextual factors needs to be properly understood if evidence based interventions are to be effectively translated into practice likewise for evaluating football based projects are however limited in comparison to those available for social work and health work interventions this might be partly explained by the absence of a culture of evaluation among staff on football based projects as nichols and crow pointed out sport based more rigorous evaluation coalter argued that to address the current information deficit will require the development of a culture in which output and outcome definition monitoring and evaluation are regarded as central components of planning management and service delivery cross fertilization between realist evaluation would reinforce these links create more inter disciplinary research and improve the design and delivery of
and leads to a value equal to the envelope this method is then the most accurate with the given the results obtained by the convex analysis a monte carlo simulation is conducted to compare the distribution of the results with the previous boundaries in this case the fundamental frequency of the system is chosen with a uniform law between the interval boundaries and the excitation is defined by in the form bu with being a random vector this leads to in fig the boundary corresponding to the convex analysis is represented as a solid line and the probabilistic distribution is illustrated by the colored surface these results prove that the envelope encompasses the monte carlo simulations but also illustrates that even if a combination of parameters leads to a classical probabilistic method unless a very high number of drawings in the monte carlo simulations as a result the monte carlo simulations needs a prohibitive calculation cost to obtain a reliable upper limit of the damage without any guarantee that this limit is absolute if the objective is to determine this absolute upper limit the convex analysis is then perfectly appropriate in terms of reliability into account stiffness degradation in the previous section the structural response was assumed not to exceed the appropriate linear threshold in this section the influence of the damage to the structure in the dynamic response is studied with the help of the previous convex approach exposed previously in this work the chosen structure is a heavily reinforced this wall is depicted in fig previous studies have demonstrated that the maximum top displacement can be given as the damage variable xmax moreover these studies have proved that the shear wall can be considered as a dof dynamic system this is why a simplified model was proposed by brun et al based on changes in fundamental frequency with these considerations the non linearity linked to the damage is associated to an evolutive linear behavior of the system equation of motion can then be written the convex analysis presented in this paper is applied to this structure however the evolutive linear behavior introduced by the varying fundamental frequency cannot be directly introduced which is why we choose to introduce this results fundamental frequency is assumed to be in the interval hz this approach is interesting because it does not require exact determination of the fall of the fundamental frequency which is very uncertain and can only be determined experimentally or with complex time integration simulations the limits are sufficient to determine validate the hypothesis the numerical simulations are conducted by a temporal resolution with updated for each time step moreover excitations are chosen in the form bu as in section fig illustrates the distribution of the maximum final displacement for random drawings this distribution illustrates that some values of the displacement have a very in fig the temporal probabilistic distribution of displacement and the temporal envelope are drawn we can observe that the envelope obtained by convex analysis encompasses results obtained by non linear resolutions it justifies the hypothesis conducted in convex analysis and based on the fact that the frequency evolution is slow enough and continue with respect to xmax which is directly linked to the initial damage on the final maximum displacement which corresponds to the final damage results are plotted in figs and structures with initial damage lower than are not damaged more by maximum displacement during the considered excitations the results obtained in this section demonstrate that system indeed the envelope calculated with an uncertain linear system encompasses the results obtained with a non linear resolution extension of the method to mdof structures in the previous sections we have considered sdof structures only but in case of structures whose eigen frequencies are close the simplification consisting in approximating the response with only the first mode is not extend the previous results to multi degrees of freedom systems such an extension is achieved by decomposing the motion of the system on its modal basis in the following we consider a system with degrees of freedom with its equation of motion written in the form we note ui the eigen vector associated to the eigen frequency the equation of motion is transformed into or with in this paper seismic excitations are considered it means that the structure is excited by a base acceleration and has the form where is a vector of ones of length with the same hi which is constructed by replacing by in with these notations we obtain the same result as eq and so we have finally or this notation with depending linearly on allows us to apply the same algorithm as in the case of the sdof system by considering each element of the vector successively the maximum displacement of each node of a portal frame for this category of architecture the damage is directly related to the inter story drift an application of the convex method previously presented on the relative displacement of a floor regarding the previous one allows the determination of the extreme possible damage the example presented in the following consists of a two stories portal frame as illustrated in fig this structure considered here the traction compression behavior of the elements of the structure is neglected it implies that only two degrees of freedom are considered the horizontal displacement of each floor the methodology is applied on this structure to determine the extreme shearing of each floor for the first floor and for the second floor only the results concerning are the same as in section by noting j the j th component of the eigen vector associated to we have first floor second floor the convex bounds for the relative displacement of each floor are then calculated by replacing z in the lagrange function of eq by pn the second floor is always higher than the displacement of the first floor it means that the second floor is more deformed and consequently more damaged the result of
result involve technical economic and legal considerations when carried to the fullest extent it is likely to cover five sets of issues but there is no assurance that the outcome will bring about greater attention to safety in designing products or processes the first set of issues likely to be considered deals with intrinsic hazards of the product in question and their potential for causing harm eg does the product have intrinsically hazardous features which may cause harm over the course of its life cycle under normal conditions and reasonably foreseeable special circumstances similarly does the process have hazardous features which may harm under normal operating conditions and foreseeable special circumstances are we sufficiently knowledgeable about these matters or is further testing or risk assessment needed to meet legal requirements about the level of risk knowledge we are supposed to have what types of harms may occur and for each type what is its likelihood incidence magnitude and temporal features bystanders neighbors company assets private and public properties environmental quality natural resources what regulatory requirements for minimizing the harms need to be met in order to lawfully sell the product or build and operate the process in question are we in conformance with industry practice the company will be found responsible and liable pursuant to tort law and other liability doctrines for the harms likely to occur even though regulatory requirements have been met eg which harms are legally actionable under negligence and strict and specialliability doctrines who is eligible to bring a lawsuit to secure compensation for such harms to what extent are these eligible parties likely to bring such or courts to what extent will claimants be capable of proving what is legally required to establish liability what defences are available to the company and how effective are they likely to be to what extent have lawsuits involving the same or similar products or processes and out of court the third set of issues pertains to estimating the company s potential losses eg what are the likely number of damage awards and out of court settlements their amounts and attendant transaction costs and their distribution over time what losses would be caused if product recall is necessary to what extent is the company financially capable of bearing these liabilities and costs to what extent would such damage awards and harm the company s reputation competitive position investor and shareholder interests and future insurance coverage and cause recall of products process shutdown or other business interruptions to what extent would such damage awards prompt government investigation regulations new reporting and compliance burdens and provoke government prosecution morally responsible firm will next examine the technical and economic feasibility of making safety enhancing harm reducing changes in the design distribution and marketing of the product at issue or the planning siting design management and operational features of the process at issue however other firms driven by cost benefit analysis an approach which subordinates safety and harm to economic considerations may instead choose to next address methods of mitigating which do not necessitate risk and harm reduction the former type of firm will therefore consider the fourthset of issues below prior to considering the fifth set of issues which then follow whereas the latter type of firm is more likely to consider the fifth set of issues prior to addressing the fourth set of issues the fourth set of issues deals with company options for mitigating loss by reducing the risks posed by the product or process eg use instructions prevent the risks harms and losses posed by the product or to what extent will worker training personal protective equipment and enhanced management practices prevent the risks harms and losses posed by the process within parameters of technical and economic feasibility to what extent will change in the design of the product or the process prevent the residual risks harms and losses warnings training etc are undertaken if either option or a combination of the options is chosen will the safer product or process generate the desired business outcomes the fifth set of issues deal with company options for mitigating or deflecting the losses without reducing the risks posed by the product or process eg to what extent is adequate and affordable insurance available to cover the transaction costs of defending the company and the liability awards and it may incur for potentially huge losses is securitization of the risk or another form of alternative risk transfer feasible would the company be able to have any other parties joined as co defendants in the lawsuits brought by the injured persons to share liability or be able to separately sue in contracts assure that such losses will be recovered from or transferred to other parties such as product design consultants testing labs suppliers of components and materials distributors downstream purchasers and users or process facility architects and engineering consultants construction contractors materials suppliers toll contractors maintenance firms and subcontractors competitive position the goal and outcome of such a deliberative process or an abbreviated version is the selection of the most cost effective set of options for mitigating the potential loss posed by the product or process and may not include a safer design which is often a more costly option in other words design change is often no more than one of many options for addressing the company s main goal of minimizing economic loss sold without design change despite numerous lawsuits and dangerous processes may continue operation without design change despite accidents and liability awards until regulatory action is taken or liability and other losses become overwhelming or the marketplace or public outrage forces the company to respond with a safer design thus the hypothesis that tort liability promotes safer design needs to be replaced with the more hesitant hypothesis that it promotes company mitigating loss which may under certain circumstances lead to design of a safer product or process conclusion this paper has presented some of the main features of tort law in the usa and eu domains noted key differences
data on boiling heat transfer of nanofluids are limited however conflicting results were observed from these limited data as far as the effect of nanoparticles on the boiling heat transfer performance is concerned the inconsistencies indicate that our understanding of the thermal behavior of nanofluids related necessary for us to understand the phenomena of boiling of nanofluids as we know the pool boiling will be affected by the surface properties such as surface roughness surface wettability and surface contamination in the reviewed studies however only the surface roughness is the most often considered parameter they systematic studies should have been carried out to include the interaction between theoretical investigations mechanisms of nanofluids the conventional understanding of the effective thermal conductivity of mixtures originates from continuum formulations which typically involve only the particle size shape and volume fraction and assume diffusive heat transfer in both fluid and solid phases this method can give a good prediction for micrometer or lager size solid fluid systems but it fails to explain to explain the reasons for the anomalous increase of the thermal conductivity in nanofluids keblinski et al and eastman et al proposed four possible mechanisms eg brownian motion of the nanoparticles molecular level layering of the liquid at the liquid particle interface the nature of heat transport in the nanoparticles and the effects of nanoparticle clustering which are schematically shown in fig they postulated contribution of thermal diffusion is much greater than brownian diffusion however they only examined the cases of stationary nanofluids wang et al argued that the thermal conductivities of nanofluids should be dependent on the microscopic motion and particle structure xuan and li also discussed four possible reasons the increased thermal conductivity of the fluid the interaction and collision among particles the intensified mixing fluctuation and turbulence of the fluid and the dispersion of nanoparticles many researchers used the concept of liquid solid interfacial layer to explain the anomalous improvement of the thermal conductivity in nanofluids yu and choi suggested models however a study of xue et al using molecular dynamics simulation showed that simple monatomic liquids had no effect on the heat transfer characteristics both normal and parallel to the surface this means that thermal transport in layered liquid may not be adequate to explain the increased thermal conductivity of suspensions of nanoparticles presence of the dispersive elements in the core region did not affect the heat transfer rate however the corresponding dispersive elements resulted in of nusselt number for a uniform tube supplied by a fixed heat flux as compared to the uniform distribution for the dispersive elements these results provide a possible explanation for the increased thermal conductivity of nanofluids which may studied the effect of particle migration on heat transfer characteristics in nanofluids flowing through mini channels theoretically they studied the effect of shear induced and viscosity gradient induced particle migration and the self diffusion due to brownian motion their results indicated a significant non uniformity in particle concentration and thermal conductivity over the tube cross section the non uniform distribution caused by particle migration induced a higher nusselt number koo and kleinstreuer discussed the effects of brownian thermo phoretic and osmo phoretic motions on the effective thermal conductivities they found that the role of brownian motion is much more important than the thermo phoretic and osmo phoretic motions furthermore the particle interaction not been validated by experiment yet recently evans et al suggested that the contribution of brownian motion to the thermal conductivity of the nanofluid is very small and cannot be responsible for the extraordinary thermal transport properties of nanofluids they also supported their argument using the molecular dynamics simulations and the effective medium theory however they just limited than brownian motion liquid layering phonon transport and agglomeration lee et al experimentally investigated the effect of surface charge state of the nanoparticle in suspension on the thermal conductivity they showed that the ph value of the nanofluid strongly affected the thermal performance of the fluid with farther diverged ph value from the isoelectric point of the particles the nanoparticles in the suspension may partially explain the disparities between different experimental data since many researchers used surfactants in nanofluids but with insufficient descriptions by adopting a variation of the classical heat conduction method in porous media to the problem of heat conduction in nanofluids on the other hand vadasz demonstrated that the transient heat conduction process in nanofluids may provide a valid explanation for the are no general mechanisms to rule the strange behavior of nanofluids including the highly improved effective thermal conductivity although many possible factors have been considered including brownian motion liquid solid interface layer ballistic phonon transport and surface charge state however there are still some other possible macro scale explanations such as heat conduction particle driven natural thermal conductivity currently there is no reliable theory to predict the anomalous thermal conductivity of nanofluids from the experimental results of many researchers it is known that the thermal conductivity of nanofluids depends on parameters including the thermal conductivities of the base fluid and the nanoparticles the volume fraction the surface area and the shape of conductivity of nanofluids satisfactorily however there exist several semi empirical correlations to calculate the apparent conductivity of two phase mixtures they are mainly based on the following definition of the effective thermal conductivity of a two component mixture for particle fluid mixtures numerous theoretical studies relatively large particles is good for low solid concentrations the effective thermal conductivity keff is given by where kp is the thermal conductivity of the particle kb is the thermal conductivity of the base fluid and is the particle volume fraction of the suspension maxwell s formula shows that the effective thermal conductivity of nanofluids relies on the bruggeman proposed a model to analyze the interactions among randomly distributed particles for a binary mixture of homogeneous spherical inclusions the bruggeman this model can be applied to spherical particles with no limitations on the concentration of inclusions for low solid concentrations the bruggeman
is generally accepted that the decoupling point needs to be moved closer to the end customer however in our numerical analysis a portion of the inventories held at the decoupling points was moved upstream in the supply chain rather than downstream in both the existing and the optimized situations the the point of product differentiation was at the manufacturing location and there were decoupling points located at manufacturer the dc and the retail store opportunities for future research the concept of postponement was introduced more than years ago and a considerable body of literature bas been dedicated to it interorganizational time based postponement contributes to understanding how postponement can be used as a supply chain wide initiative while this research the study of postponement beyond the dyad there are a number of opportunities for future research our numerical analysis was based on a portion of the supply chain from the end customer to the products manufacturers an extension of this research would be to include the manufacturers suppliers however the results for the portion of the supply chain we studied are unlikely to change significantly because the inventory costs of the manufacturers suppliers are low relative to the the manufacturers cost and the suppliers have many product options for using those raw materials which should mean thai they have lower inventory obsolescence costs for this reason it seems appropriate for the suppliers to speculate by holding inventory if this results in lower inventories for the manufacturers but this should be tested in the supply chain used in this research the products studied were made exclusively for the interorganizational time based postponement to supply chains where the same products are sold to multiple distributors and multiple retail customers may result in additional inventory reduction opportunities however because of the increased number of organizations involved the implementation could be more challenging interorganizational time based postponement does not require any structural change the sizes and locations of decoupling points can be changed based on the customer service strategy the the uncertainty of the demand and the risk of product obsolescence or the cost of markdowns ballou asserted that a different configuration of the supply chain network could be more economical for each phase of the life cycle of a product pagh and cooper suggested that the characteristics of each phase of the life cycle of a product are key factors in determining the postponement speculation strategy the focus on the introduction and growth phases of the product lifecycle is on on customer service thus speculation may be appropriate the focus during maturity and decline phases is on minimizing risk and cost and more postponement is appropriate there is an opportunity to test this in an actual supply chain the concepts of decoupling points and points of product differentiation offer another set of research opportunities including in what situations are both points at the same location and when set before setting the decoupling points it appears to be so because relocating the point of product differentiation might require changing the design of the product the manufacturing processes or the structure of the supply chain as shown in this research determining the locations and sizes of the decoupling points does not require structural reconfiguration deliberate delay of changes in form identity or location of inventory across the supply chain we tested interorganizational time based postponement in a supply chain formed by four independent organizations arranged in three tiers two manufacturers one distributor and a retailer our findings show thai when one organization implements postponement without considering the impact on other organizations in the supply chain there is the potential for the supply chain as a whole to hold more inventory at higher cost ihat is other members of the supply chain will be forced to use at higher cost ihat is other members of the supply chain will be forced to use more speculation as bucklin said postponement and speculation are a combined concept ln a supply chain context it is also important to identify to what extent each member should postpone or speculate in order to improve the performance of the entire supply chain interorganizational time based postponement can be implemented regardless ot the sequence in which activities are performed because delaying activities in time enables managers to observe performed because delaying activities in time enables managers to observe key information from customers reducing uncertainty and to adjust the amount of decoupling inventories postponement should be viewed as an opportunity to learn from the demand and other environmental factors in order to coordinate the inventory deployment strategy with key customers and suppliers in this research no organization was required to change how activities were performed or the time it took to complete activities this makes implementation of time based took to complete activities this makes implementation of time based postponement relatively low cost to the firms involved but it is important for the firms involved to equitably share costs and benefits so that all parties have an incentive to improve the performance of the supply chain as a whole in summary postponement and speculation should be treated as a combined concept and should be studied and implemented in a supply chain context it is necessary to go beyond the seller dyad and a finn s internal operations failure to do so has the potential to lead to significant suboptimization and a competitive disadvantage for the supply chain as a whole as well as profit erosion for member organizations increasingly corporate success will require management to adopt a holistic view of the supply chain and focus on achieving cross functional integration within the finn and with key members of the supply chain do it yourself portalets for developing business solutions for small and medium enterprises abstract purpose to propose and develop a cost effective approach to developing and implementing customized electronic business solutions in a do it yourself fashion design methodology approach the proposed diy approach is based on the concept
sets where the secondary membership is an interval set the computational complexity to this end we have developed a new approach to the representation of fuzzy sets based on computational geometry although motivated by our type research the approach also works with the type case in a much simpler way the rest of the paper is structured as follows section ii discusses our representational approach to fuzzy sets section iii type case as a precursor to section vi which investigates the generalized type case through what we call the partially discrete case in type fuzzy sets section vii concludes this work by identifying the key ideas in this paper and suggesting areas for future work ii representation of fuzzy sets accuracy and execution speed this paper extends our previous work in which we treat fuzzy sets as geometric objects the effect of this is to reduce the need for discretization and with certain limitations to effectively eliminate the need for discretization in this section we describe how type and type fuzzy a type fuzzy sets the typical approach to representing type fuzzy sets in a computer system is to discretize the sets by maintaining an array of pairs of domain values and their associated membership grades this inevitably leads to inaccuracies and speed problems in large systems some fuzzy practitioners have already made limited use of points between each discrete domain point with a line segment these membership functions are piecewise linear functions with the equidistant points defining the function this effectively gives a continuous domain and allows logical operations to be performed in a similar way to those presented in sections iii a and iii here we call this the nrc representation programming language miranda in that work plfs were used to give the membership functions of the fuzzy sets each linear portion of a membership function can then be manipulated as a linear function the code used to implement the implication operators exploits functional programming techniques and so does not relate directly to the algorithmic solutions presented in this work we this paper presents novel techniques that enrich this previous work like van den broek we represent a type fuzzy set over a continuous domain as a set of connected straight line segments that need not be equally spaced across the domain this is effectively a piece wise linear function where the dimension represents the domain and the dimension represents the membership grade the model that is typically to represent a type fuzzy set as a two dimensional geometric object fig provides an example visual comparison of the three representations discussed the ability of each representation to capture a portion of a type gaussian membership function with six points is shown to contrast the effects of the models table i provides a comparison of the centroids of the three representations depicted centroid as the output from the center of area centroid of the discrete representation using one hundred discrete points it is clear from these figures and the table that all the representations lose information compared to the theoretical ideal however when used carefully the geometric representation loses less information than the discrete and nrc representations so this geometric representation offers improvements in accuracy sets as described in the following section type fuzzy sets the type fuzzy set model makes use of an extra third dimension again these sets are typically implemented as points stored in an array most implementations following the vertical slice model this is where each point in a discrete domain has an associated discrete type fuzzy number in known as a secondary membership function in we introduced the potential for significant speed improvements in the inferencing process partially discrete type fuzzy sets use the geometric representation of a type fuzzy set to represent the secondary membership functions at each point in the domain a partially discrete type fuzzy set is depicted in fig along with the discrete equivalent in fig can represent this by the following function at point this representation tackles the accuracy issue in the inferencing stage but the defuzzification issue is still to be resolved we are exploring this problem but further research is required this section has given the geometric representation of fuzzy sets that uses a plf to represent a fuzzy set furthermore it has we have also shown how this representation can be adapted for type fuzzy sets this representation is a truly geometric approach the novelty in our work is in the exploitation of the geometry to make inference operations more efficient the next section shows how methods from computational geometry can be used to find the and of two geometric fuzzy sets for the logical operations for this geometric representation the methods presented in this section borrow heavily from the field of computational geometry a weiler atherton clipping and the fuzzy and a well known problem in computer visualization is how to handle intersecting objects in a given scene importantly from a fuzzy set viewpoint the computer graphics community have a tree is in front a house in this case the polygons associated with the house must be clipped to the polygons associated with the tree this process is called hidden surface removal in terms of fuzzy logic if the tree and house were fuzzy sets then the removed hidden surface represents the fuzzy and operation fig depicts this analogy for type fuzzy logic the results presented in this section and the next only hold when minimum and maximum are used for the norms and conorms we believe this limitation is not a significant problem as many applications already use minimum and maximum of the many clipping methods available the weiler atherton algorithm best suits the problem of clipping purely geometric objects the first step in the clipping the method we recommend for doing this the plane sweep algorithm is discussed in section iii like the plane sweep algorithm this relatively simple clipping algorithm can be performed on any number of polygons at once for simplicity we
of the proposed optimally weighted modal residuals methodology for model updating remains to be explored with real measurement data the methodology can readily be applied to alternative modal proposed in the literature to measure the fit between experimental and model predicted modal data also it can be extended to identify the structural parameters of linear and non linear models using measured acceleration time histories instead of modal properties noise excitation is presented it is based on the well known stochastic linearization technique which substitutes the original non linear system with an equivalent linear one whose coefficients evaluated by minimizing the mean square error depend on the statistics of the response process in contrast with the gaussian stochastic linearization which is based on the gaussian assumption of the response process in order to approximate the coefficients of the equivalent linear the proposed method allows us to take into account the non gaussian character of the response this goal is pursued by assuming a modified a type gram charlier series approximation of the probability density function the proposed non gaussian stochastic linearization method allows improving the results derived from the gaussian stochastic linearization conducted at a first stage by simply solving at a second stage a set of linear equations whose unknowns are the series coefficients system is obtained by taking advantage from the markovianity of the response process and by using the reduced fokker planck kolmogorov equation associated with the stochastic dynamic problem four examples show the performance of the method introduction the stochastic linearization is the most used stochastic structural dynamic problems often characterized by a large number of degrees of freedom and by complex mathematical models to represent adequately the non linear structural behavior booton kazakov and caughey have independently introduced the method around the middle of the last century the basic idea is to replace the original nonlinear in some statistical sense the sl method exhibits different forms based on the adopted probability density function for the evaluation of the coefficients that appear in the linearized system the gaussian stochastic linearization is based on the hypothesis of gaussianity of the response process and it allows approximating the second order moments of the the evaluation of its gaussian properties against relatively little numerical efforts unfortunately the gsl method gives accurate results for weakly non linear systems only this drawback is due to the inadequacy of the gaussian assumption to represent the non gaussian characteristic of the response for systems that exhibit strong non linear behavior are evaluated by the exact probability density function of the response the true stochastic linearization leads to the exact results in terms of response covariances recently falsone extended the kozin results to the case of non linear systems excited by parametric excitations starting from these observations alternative approaches beaman and hedrick improved the accuracy of the gsl method by using the classical gram charlier series expansion of the unknown probability density function of the response which includes up to fourth order terms the coefficients of the series expansion are approximately evaluated by solving the non linear system of the moment equations up to fourth order pradlwarter proposed requiring non linear transformations in order to consider the non gaussian properties of the stochastic response in the non gaussian linearization method proposed by chang the non gaussian density is constructed as the weighted sum of undetermined gaussian densities the undetermined gaussian parameters are then derived through solving a set of nonlinear performing a non gaussian closure scheme based on the abridged edgeworth series expansion of the probability density of the response hurtado and barbat proposed an improved non gaussian stochastic linearization for the bouc wen baber hysteretic model by using mixed discrete continuous gaussian distributions recently crandall proposed the use of non gaussian distributions for the stochastic linearization of the used the classical a type gram charlier series expansion of the probability density function in conjunction with the moment equation approach and a quasi moment closure scheme in order to well approximate the equivalent coefficients in this paper a new non gaussian stochastic linearization method is proposed where the probability density function of the response process is approximated by a modified method is performed and the obtained gaussian covariance matrix is assumed as a first approximation in a second step a coordinate transformation is developed toward a space of uncorrelated random processes with unit variance in this space it is possible to evaluate in a simple way the coefficients of the modified gram charlier series expansion which are the unknowns of a system of linear kker planck kolmogorov equation in this way it is possible to improve the results obtained by the gsl method with a reasonably small increase of computational effort in the following first the gsl method is described then the proposed ngsl method is introduced and finally four examples are presented showing the effectiveness and the accuracy of the method are recalled let us consider a non linear structural system whose dynamic behavior is governed by the following system of first order differential equations where is the time dependent vector of the state variables a is an n matrix is the vector collecting the non linear terms is an matrix is the vector of the random actions on the structure vector process starting from the knowledge of the probabilistic characterization of the input process in the case of a gaussian white noise input process this problem can be approached by means of the theory of markov processes that allows us to obtain the joint probability density function of the response process as the solution of the fokker planck kolmogorov equation then simpler approximate methods are used such as the sl method in order to illustrate this method we suppose that the external random excitations are zero mean gaussian white noises fully characterized by the second order correlation functions wt where jk jk jk is a constant representing the strengths of the white noise processes while jk is the cross power spectral density it is
unmistakably a single house site that was used for the duration of at most three a to years this does not necessarily mean that the occupants deliberately chose to use the site for such a relatively short period of time they simply wo nt have foreseen the rise in water level when they settled here the dune will have seemed to afford a high and dry place for them to live the house need not have been entirely isolated either it may well have formed part of a settlement along with other houses on similar dunes nearby this option is the sites in wateringse veld where four similar dunes were used by humans but not as settlement sites fig ypenburg schematic plans phases d and scale a the cemetery cannot be dated to any of the phases redrawn after koot et al fig ypenburg schematic plans phases d and is quite a bit larger than wateringen and the individual concentrations of ypenburg the site has a very high density of features covering the entire dune area but especially the highest part in the course of the occupation period but above all in the earliest a lesser extent in other parts of the dune at some stage the occupants enclosed their entire settlement with a fence erected precisely at the boundary between their site and the surrounding aquatic deposits this fence was replaced by a new structure on two occasions each time a little higher up the slope due to the rising water level on the basis of the posthole concentrations and the distribution of finds in the adjacent long refuse zone and the continuity in the that refuse throughout the four distinguished phases it is assumed that the site represents the permanent settlement of four or five households over a period of roughly years the fact that no unmistakable house plans can be made out in the posthole concentrations is assumed to be attributable to long term use of the same house sites fig schipluiden features of one of the fence enclosures after louwe kooijmans jongste is one and a half times that found at ypenburg and thirteen times the number at wateringen this agrees well with the differences in intensity of use schipluiden had four to five times as many households as wateringen and was occupied for a period three to four times as long it also agrees with the view that ypenburg was occupied by three or four households in two phases that will together not have exceeded the period of occupation of schipluiden so in these respects the a consistent picture and the three sites do not seem to differ materially from one another the greater number of postholes at schipluiden however cannot be attributed to such factors as differences in preservation or the employed excavation methods it must imply a considerably greater number of structures at this settlement most probably fences there are some substantial differences in the ratios of the different categories of finds and for example in comparison with schipluiden a relatively large amount of pottery was found at wateringen this can be attributed to differences in deposition and erosion between the two sites at both sites the pottery was concentrated around the settlements this was particularly evident at wateringen at schipluiden the distribution pattern had been severely disturbed by the erosion of the top part of the dune which led to the disappearance of many remains when we add to this the effect of trampling during the intensive occupation of schipluiden the differences between the sites are largely explained the ratios of the flint and stone objects will have suffered less disturbance because erosion and trampling will have had a much lesser impact in the case of these categories structure and agency it would seem that we may regard wateringen ypenburg and schipluiden as representing we assume that the local community consisted of a number of cooperating households that chose to settle on the dunes in the beach plain on the large dune of ypenburg there was enough space for d clearly distinct yards we assume that wateringen was not an isolated settlement but that the small dunes in that area led to the establishment of separate farmsteads on the individual dunes the occurrence of house remains the ranges of artefacts and the semi agricultural subsistence system together allow little room for doubt concerning the permanent character of the settlements for a period of more than one house generation so in this respect they are purely neolithic and comparable with what is known from other countries from this period schipluiden clearly presents a different picture here four or five households settled at a site that did at the other sites why this site s occupants made this choice is not clear especially as there was a much larger dune immediately to the north of the site that was only extensively used from the rijswijk hoekpolder site we however know that the territory of another group lay only a short distance away so maybe the occupants of schipluiden did not have that much choice after all whatever the case the schipluiden group developed a much greater collectivity than the other two in the first occupation phases the sources of freshwater for the entire community were concentrated in one area on the northwest side of the dune later in the two last phases the entire settlement was enclosed by a fence which was kept up this upkeep was clearly a collective action of the entire community in the context of the tentative neolithization of the plain to the north of the loess belt this is quite remarkable it represents the physical isolation of a domestic space from surroundings carried out by a collective group and not an individual household the fence most probably had a practical function for example to keep the livestock out of the settlement and its erection may also have been partly prompted by the wetter conditions in the site s surroundings and the occupants
from the tropics to the temperate zone although the phyllostomidae was not a significant result latitudinal trends in elevational richness were not found for the other less diverse bat families vespertilionids differed significantly from the overall bat pattern all but one elevational richness in contrast the tropical and subtropical phyllostomids showed the same richness pattern as the overall elevational pattern for bats regardless of latitude thus the peaks in species richness for the vespertilionids were significantly higher than those of the tropical phyllostomid family only the insectivorous clade of bats showed the strong latitudinal trend in elevation of peak richness that are mainly tropical in distribution showed no trends in elevational species richness with latitude as most richness peaks were towards the lower elevations on all correlated positively with species richness except for three philippine islands which had high levels of deforestation several of the correlations were not significant because they were based on few sampling points abundance declined with the elevation except for some of the philippine islands and utah where the highest abundances were at mid elevations most abundance was calculated by the authors or in some cases by me if the data was provided in the manuscript as the number of individuals captured per site divided by a standardized sampling effort climate model all studies found that temperature decreased linearly with sites sampled based on the data or citations temperature decreased with the each increase in elevation by in peru in ecuador in colombia and in mexico these were in accordance with data for the old world tropical mountains although all studies on and do not always account for horizontal precipitation from low lying clouds all of the tropical mountains occurred on wet slopes thus rainfall was high at low to mid elevations even if slightly higher rainfall was noted at mid slope in contrast all of the temperate and two of the mexican mountains had arid or seasonal drought conditions at rainfall was very low at the base the threshold temperature for bat activity was documented to be such a strong temperature constraint was noted at the coldest temperatures as no bats were found above some limit between and on the various mountains the temperate data sets and two elevational gradients from mid slope this trend appears to be correlated with water availability the highest water availability on these temperate or subtropical mountains is at mid slope where higher rainfall is paired with runoff from steep slopes and shallow soils at the highest elevations where most precipitation is in the form of ice and snow on these mountains most streams are seasonal and intermittent at the lowest bat elevational species richness appears to be responding to two contrasting gradients up mountain slopes the temperature gradient and moisture availability gradient the proposed shape of the water availability curve reflects not just trends in rainfall but what is known about evapotranspiration and runoff because exact rainfall trends are unknown as of yet i propose that for a water availability is high rainfall may peak mid slope or above but runoff to lower elevations tends to even out water availability at these elevations and at the highest elevations water availability declines as precipitation declines runoff is highest due to the steepest slopes and shallowest soils and seasonal snow and ice are inaccessible water resources water availability along a gradient with an arid base high evapotranspiration thus on mountains with arid conditions at the mountain base bat richness should be highest at the mid elevation point where temperature and water availability are highest and decline at the highest elevations due to extreme cold temperatures however on mountains with wet warm conditions at the base you and secondarily as water availability declines there are direct predictions of this model mountains with arid conditions at the base regardless of latitude are predicted to have the highest bat species richness mid slope whereas warm wet mountains even at high latitudes should have the highest bat species richness at or near the base two candidate test mountains would be the western slope of the andes in peru of the olympics in the pacific northwest of washington state elevational studies of the bat fauna on these mountains do not exist but specimen records from the last years have been collected in these regions a preliminary analysis of these bat richness patterns shows strong support for the proposed climate model species richness appears to be highest at mid slope of the western slope of the peruvian andes extensively sampled to detail an elevational richness pattern but all species occurring on the mountain were present at the lowest elevations thus species richness is either decreasing with the elevation or has a low elevation plateau both of which support the predictions of the climate model discussion tropical elevational gradients and peaked at mid elevation on temperate gradients elevational species richness of phyllostomids other tropical bat families and the insectivore guild directly mirrored the overall species richness patterns the vespertilionids which dominate temperate communities consistently demonstrated mid elevational peaks although shifted towards lower error analyses demonstrate the patterns are not likely to be a consequence of undersampling or interpolation null model analyses reveal that bat elevational species richness is not responding simply to spatial constraints climatic mechanisms acting at both regional and local scales appear to be the important drivers of elevational richness of bats meta analyses pinpoint i will discuss undersampling and interpolation spatial constraints regional and local climate and their influence on elevational richness of bats sequentially sampling and interpolation all empirical studies have sampling limitations due to the very nature of field studies limitations in time and money personnel trapping methodologies and taxonomic variation in capture to address sampling concerns first for the quantitative analyses i considered only those data sets without obvious sampling biases or disturbance trends second for the remaining studies i explicitly examined the influence of general undersampling and interpolation with various least realistic with uniform undersampling to most realistic
the nasal side without blinking using sterile plastic forceps with soft plastic covered tips the right lens was moved gently to the conjunctiva and then removed on removal the lens was placed immediately in a labelled bijou bottle containing ml of sterile any microorganisms adhering to the lens surface after vortexing the contact lens was removed from the bijou bottle with sterile plastic forceps and returned to the subject the lens extract in the bijou bottle was used for microbiological culture the solution in the contact lens case was poured away and the right chamber of the lens case was case was transferred into another bijou bottle and labelled appropriately this bottle of case extract was used for microbiological culture a ml sample was poured from the solution bottle that the subject had brought in to our clinic and was transferred directly into a labelled universal bottle containing ml of dey engley broth for analysis microbiological examination within min of collection organisms were cultured on blood agar chocolate agar sabouraud s dextrose agar and neomycin blood agar all culture media were purchased from oxoid laboratories ltd basingstoke uk small volumes of each collected specimen were inoculated onto cho plates were incubated at for with neo plates were incubated at for under anaerobic conditions for cultures showing growth the predominant organisms were noted and the colonial morphology was recorded positive cultures were isolated gramstained and identified to the genus level using biochemical tests these tests included the oxidase and rapid nf plus system which are commercial kits incorporating arrays of biochemical tests were used for the identification of contaminants which could not be identified with the above tests statistical analyses statistical analysis was performed using chi square test forward likelihood ratio was performed analyses were carried out using spss computer statistical software where appropriate odds ratios and intervals were also calculated to indicate relative risks results satisfied with their contact lenses and their lens care system most subjects understood the use of their lens care solutions and with few exceptions all could disinfect their contact lenses properly exceptions included two subjects who used only saline to soak their contact lenses one of these was a daily disposable lens wearer who did not dispose of her contact lenses after wear but soaked a monthly disposable lens wearer who did not know the difference between multipurpose solution and saline and used saline to soak her contact lenses overnight she admitted that she learned how to clean and disinfect her contact lenses from her friends and not from a qualified contact lens practitioner a further subject did not pour away used mps in the lens case after lens disinfection but reused it disinfecting power of mps would be strong enough for multiple usages another subject did not close the wells of her lens case during lens disinfection because she did not want to buy a new lens case after losing the caps of her lens case the risks of serious complications with improper use and care of contact lenses were explained to these subjects and they were re educated regarding the proper use and a total of lens extracts case extracts and solution samples were tested at least one tested item from each of of contact lens wearers was contaminated all microorganisms isolated were bacteria no fungal cultures yielded growth lens habits that would increase potential risk and reduce the safety of contact lens wear in the following analyses only items yielding ocular pathogenic microorganisms were considered contaminated microorganisms that were considered non pathogenic to the ocular surface were neisseria spp micrococci flavo bacterium spp coagulase negative microorganisms one item and two contaminated items no subject had all three items contaminated for the samples tested lens extracts case extracts and solutions were contaminated with ocular pathogenic microorganisms showing that lens cases were most likely to be contaminated comparisons of contamination rates between new users and more likely to be contaminated in occasional users the effect of contact lens usage on microbial contamination statistical analyses were performed to investigate the association between contact lens experience lens wearing after excluding those wearing daily disposable lens wearers or those unable to provide accurate information a significant association was found between lens wearing schedules and contamination of lens extract those subjects wearing lenses for fewer days a week were more likely to have contaminated lens extracts those with longer contact lens experience were initially found to be significantly more likely to be contaminated but multivariate analysis indicated that this was not significant no significant differences in contact lens experience and lens wearing time were found between subjects with and lens cases between subjects with and without contaminated lens extract or case extract the effect of contact lens care habits on microbial contamination differences among lens care habits between contact lens wearers with or without contamination were analysed the four daily disposable lens wearers being excluded saline mps to rinse lenses before use no statistically significant differences were found between lens contamination rates of subjects using hydrogen peroxide or chemical disinfecting regimens similarly no statistically significant difference was found between lens contamination rates of contamination rates did not alter with the use of cleaner and enzymatic protein removal case extracts contamination rates of case extracts were not affected by the types of disinfecting regimen used a significant difference in the contamination rate of case extracts was found between subjects with or without contaminated lens extracts also had contaminated case extracts solution samples the solution contamination rate of subjects with contaminated case extracts was significantly different from subjects without contaminated case extracts but no such difference was found between subjects with or without contaminated lens extracts but this difference was not significant under multivariate analysis the contamination rate of lens care solutions did not differ between subjects who did or did not regularly check the expiry dates of their lens care solutions isolated contaminants a total of different species of bacteria were isolated from case extracts and nine from lens care
robust and efficient segmentation algorithms is still a very challenging research topic such as segmentation and feature extraction image registration shape analysis and modeling and visual tracking the original snake model was formulated to minimize the energy functional where and are real positive weighting constants is a parameterized curve and is a potential curve toward the desired boundary normally the potential depends on the gradient of the processed image as is well known the original snake models were dependent upon an arbitrary parameterization of the curve and had difficulty dealing with topology changes a geometric active contour models such as where introduced shortly afterward based on curve evolution implemented using level set methods proposed by osher and sethian the geometric active contour model most closely related to the original snake model is probably the geodesic active contour model which has the form where is the curvature is the inward unit normal to the as well as geodesic active contours however are prone to getting trapped by extraneous edges due to image noise or texture yielding many undesirable local minima of their corresponding energy functionals as a result initializations must be chosen carefully this is a common trait of variational active contour models which typically designed to find local drive it toward a desirable local minimum rather than an undesirable configuration due to the noise or complex image structure devising new implementation algorithms for active contours that attempt to capture more global minimizers of already proposed image based energies would allow us to choose an energy that makes sense for a particular image feature without concern over its which captures the global minimum of a contour energy between two fixed user defined end points in their technique an image is defined as an oriented graph characterized by its cost function thus the boundary segmentation problem becomes an optimal path search problem between two user defined points in the graph their technique leads to a global user supplied end points to be located precisely on the desired boundary a topology based saddle search routine is needed to extended their technique to closed curve extraction the original minimal path technique can be used for tree structured object extraction but not for general surface extraction ardon and cohen proposed a more general scheme for surface extraction be located precisely on the desired boundary other implementations have also been proposed for capturing more global minimizers by restricting the search space one method with restricted search space was proposed by gunn and nixon via dual snakes in their method the desired object and contracts the two snakes are interlinked by arc length and reach the inner and outer boundaries of the desired object respectively similar methods were also proposed by giraldi et al and georgoulas et al aboutanos et al and erdem et al restrict their search spaces by considering normals lengths to an initial contour dawood instead contour as a means to restrict the search space while these methods may find more desirable minima for some images they have several disadvantages one is about the choice of search space ie the desired boundary should be included in the search space second these methods are restricted to detection of objects with simple topologies finally not all of these methods are tool of graph cuts they used morphological dilation to restrict the search space for graph cuts segmentation their method may provide more global results and lead to smooth contours however some drawbacks exist first the computational cost is higher because a graph with appropriate pixel connectivity and edge weights needs to be prebuilt second if an initial boundary is far from the actual problem of classical snakes and geodesic active contours finally their method cannot be used for segmentation of multiple objects simultaneously all of the methods discussed so far have come to be known collectively as edge based models in many important applications however strong edge information is not always present along the entire boundary of the objects to be the design of complex region based energy functionals that are less likely to yield undesirable local minima when compared to simpler edge based energy functionals in general region based models utilize image information not only near the evolving contour but image statistics inside and outside the contour as well in order to yield more robust by zhu and yuille unfortunately most of these more robust region based energy functionals assume highly constrained models for pixel intensities within each region and require a priori knowledge of the number of region types these functionals are applicable to a much narrower class of imagery compared to typical edge based energies due to techniques there has clearly been much research in efforts to yield active contour models which capture more global minimizers it should be pointed out however that sometimes a minimum that is too global may be just as undesirable as a minimum that is too local one example is illustrated in fig finally there is the issue of computational cost geometric narrow band techniques fast marching methods were proposed for monotonically evolving fronts which are much faster however since the front can only move monotonically it is prone to passing over the true boundary these methods are also unable to incorporate curvature based terms to control the smoothness of the evolving front and it is difficult to design automated stopping criteria to end advantages of level set methods and fast marching methods is an very interesting topic how to initialize freely formulate potentials and determine stopping criteria are also very important for the design of fast yet powerful curve evolution methods in this paper we propose a novel fast and flexible dual front implementation of active contours motivated by minima with variable degrees of localness and globalness the degree of global or local minima can be controlled in a graceful manner by adjusting the width of the active regions used to propagate the contour this ability to gracefully move from capturing minima that are more local to minima that are more global makes it global this model is an iterative process
demonstrated only db gain rolloff for wavelengths ranging from to nm for increased saturation power the ctl thickness could be increased as we have demonstrated dbm saturation output power with slightly different soa designs the frequency response of the and gm long utc probes for impedance matching the device to the test set to avoid electrical reflections within the rf cables the result of this matching load is an effective termination load of on the photodiode fig presents the response of the detectors with a reverse bias and an average photocurrent level of ma as can be seen in the figure the photodetectors demonstrate only db of rolloff at ghz an error in the absorption coefficient used in the design simulations led to the choice of a nonoptimal absorber thickness by increasing the thickness from to nm or above the optical confinement in the absorber would be increased such that the quantum efficiencies would reach the range to demonstrate high speed receiver functionality eye to the noise floor in the bert at longer word lengths a gb signal was fed through a band pass filter optical attenuator and polarization controller before entering the input waveguide where it was then amplified in the soa and detected in the utc photodiode again the input signal was set to the te polarization state for optimum performance the output signal from the utc passed through a bias tee that was of the receiver employing a gm long mqw gain section followed by a mqw gain section and a gm long utc photodiode were found to be in the mqw section in the mqw section and a reverse bias of on the detector the receiver output eye diagrams presented in fig are clear and open demonstrating up to a mv amplitude if the sensitivity a chip coupled sensitivity dbm as shown in the gb results of fig the optimal bias points for the receiver using a gm long mqw gain section followed by a gm mqw gain section and a gm long utc photodiode were found to be in the mqw soa section in the mqw soa section and a reverse bias of on the detector the emission with current density the receiver output eye diagrams presented in fig are clear and open demonstrating up to mv amplitude over the termination the chip coupled sensitivity of this receiver design was dbm as shown in fig the improved sensitivity of this receiver is due to the increased gain and quantum efficiency these impressive devices demonstrated a gb s sensitivity dbm amaximum output amplitude of and required bjr if an estimated db coupling loss is subtracted from the chip coupled sensitivity for the receivers reported here we arrive at a sensitivity of dbm only slightly lower than that in however the devices reported here can provide a greater output amplitude of mv and are integrated with db increase in the utc photodiode quantum efficiency by using a nm absorber the sensitivity will be significantly improved gb s wavelength conversion with the ability to transmit and receive data at gb s the single chip transceivers were tested as wavelength converters a gb s nrz input signal with a prbs of was coupled into the soa utc receiver for amplification and photodetection and then fed through a bias tee a db gain rf amplifier a or db electrical attenuator a second bias tee and into the eam using a probe the eam modulated the output wavelength from the widely tunable dbr laser resulting in wavelength conversion the output optical signal was then fed through a variable optical attenuator and into a preamplified receiver before entering the bert or wavelength converted gb s eye diagrams are shown in fig for a device making use of the dual section soa design with a gm long mqw section followed by a gm long mqw section and a gmlong photodiode in the receiver and a gm long eam in the transmitter the wavelength converted extinction ratios ranged from to db for conversion from to are shown in fig as shown in the figure error free gb s wavelength conversion is achieved the device demonstrates between db of power penalty for conversion from nm to wavelengths of nm the optimal bias points for the wavelength conversion experiments were as follows chip coupled input powers of to dbm the gm long high gain gm long laser gain section biased at the output soa biased at the eam reverse biased between and the photodiode reverse biased at these operating conditions resulted in a fiber coupled output power of between and dbm assuming a db per facet coupling loss the device provided db of optical chip gain the low optimal current density applied to the output estimated electrical loss of db in the two bias tees and two rf cables the total off chip electrical gain is estimated to be db when a db attenuator was used and db when a db attenuator was used this gain is in the vicinity of the loss associated with the low quantum efficiency of the utc photodiodes since a internal quantum efficiency yields db of electrical loss over the case of the off chip amplifier can be eliminated vii conclusion we demonstrate the first single chip transceivers the devices integrate dbr lasers eams low confinement soas and utc photodiodes these unique component structures represent extremely advanced technologies for their respective functions a high flexibility integration platform combining qwi and mocvd regrowth was used for device avoid regrowth interfaces in the core of the optical waveguide and the use of a dielectric mask pattern on the growth surface the dbr lasers demonstrate a tuning range of over nm and an output power of the eams provided up to ghz optical bandwidth and required only a vp top drive to achieve nearly db of extinction the low drive voltage widely tunable eam transmitters exhibit bjr the receiver
rather badly and not in proportion to what they believed to be their contribution to the further while they on proportional representation they wanted to preserve their states control over their legislators in sum two things had changed in the overall alignment of states the first is that connecticut abandoned its tactical position of maximal distance from everyone else its purpose having been served even though it was connecticut s particular position that more than introduced a second dimension to the dispersal of states in figure this delegation s subsequent movement did not cause state alignments to collapse into a one dimensional space thus the second major change in this period was the emergence of two divides as seen in figure within what were the left and right hand areas of figure first new jersey and new york were more virulently opposed to the stronger union than were the other small states indeed the majority of york s representatives left in disgust at this point before the compromise was even second the large states became increasingly divided over the issue of slavery all in all the division of states in this period was most closely related to the issue of representation this knit together interests based on size but also on the degree of support for a strong federal government in the end the tensions underlying the structure of the decision space in this period were defused via the connecticut compromise once the issue of representation was settled new commonalities of interest formed as other problems came to the fore period the breakdown of madison coalition we closed our discussion of the second period by noting that the issue of representation seemed resolved because slave trade compromise discussed below the other votes following the connecticut compromise are harder to discuss without a simple clearly patterned conflict to frame the narrative popular accounts of the convention tend to outline descriptions of the period after the connecticut compromise in terms of topics such as the executive branch slavery finance and western lands as opposed to adhering to a strict temporal sequence although scholars note that previously established alignments broke down after the connecticut compromise there is no agreed upon logic for the subsequent certainly we do see some continuity in terms of states positions though the correlation of distances between periods and is relatively small most importantly figure demonstrates that there is no longer any clear divide between madison s original coalition and his opponents the substance of what was discussed the nature of the executive had very little relation to the previous distribution of interests especially those that brought the south together it be that the difficulty of dealing with this issue led to more complexity than there was in previous periods delegations floundered over questions related to the executive branch as proposal after proposal was made to no avail figure distribution of state positions third period despite this confusion some interpretable patterns emerge for one we see georgia and standing opposed to virginia the first two states were the only remaining major importers of slaves and had an interest in maintaining the slave trade virginia was actually a net exporter and would profit from an end to importation georgia and south carolina were continually wary of any accord that would appease the opposition by sacrificing the atlantic slave trade at various times delegates from south carolina explicitly to allow an actor to carry out a straightforward calculus of maximum utility as is the case in many multiplayer games it is a reasonable alternative to seek to occupy a position that allows one to reach other advantageous positions in the future when questions of representation were on the table it made sense for states such as south carolina and georgia to align with madison s coalition the establishment of proportional representation would give them a better chance of fighting for slavery in the future in contrast issues related to executive selection eligibility and term length offered little in the way of natural guidance by switching to a set of positions more closely associated with government south carolina and georgia could be certain that they would not unintentionally undermine the institution of slavery by painting themselves into a corner questions as we argued above cannot easily be analytically divided into types precisely because their meaning is context dependent if a distinction can be made between questions it can only be made on substantive grounds it was the substantive rather than the analytical the executive question as it was proposed at this time that made it so difficult for states to act in a coherent manner once other issues slavery among them had been resolved states were better able to address the executive question purposefully it is not that the issue of the slave trade was decided in this period but rather in the wake of the breakdown of representation based alignments we observe a closeness between georgia and south carolina precisely because the issue of was not yet settled as we will see resolving this ambiguity fractured the alignment between these two southern states period the slave trade compromise and other trans regional accords by july the convention had worked its way through the outline of the virginia plan a committee of detail assembled to transform the resolutions agreed to in the first half of the convention into a cohesive document bearing some resemblance to a constitution in addition to reworking existing provisions the committee also developed an extensive list of enumerated powers to be potentially exercised by the nascent government many of the debates in the fourth period focused on how these powers were to be distributed across the branches of the federal government the most important issues raised during this period were tied to questions regarding the scope of the government for example there was substantial debate over military power treason debt and the incorporation of new states conflict arose over the government s capacity to regulate navigation and the
primary oscillator in this system two genes are transcribed into mrna and this process is the origin of the following chemical dynamics transcription by gene occurs when site is unoccupied its state is given by a random variable so that rate these molecules undergo first order decay with a rate constant the mrna molecules are translated into protein which decays at rate constant forms homodimers at rate and forms heterodimers with proteins from a third gene with a rate constant the homodimer binds to site and thereby activates site is empty and if site is occupied by transcription of gene and translation of its mrna into protein which forms homodimer which in turn feeds back to inhibit gene in addition the molecules decay with a certain half life these linked reactions generate a tto for an appropriate choice of parameters the parameters used in our subsequent and gene being activated by homodimer this is the mechanism leading to primary oscillations we denote by r pi di the concentrations of the mrna the translated protein and the homodimer produced by site the above scenario is then summarized in the following system of stochastic differential equations the last two terms in the second equation reflect the combination of proteins and to form the heterodimer oscillator is given by a nearly identical set of equations except that the periods of the oscillations are slightly different this can of course be achieved by changing the parameters in many ways but the simplest method is to have the two ttos identical in nature but with different time scales to do this we simply multiply each right hand side by a fixed constant where is read the parameters chosen reflect where available reasonable choices of known molecular processes the critical ones for establishing the periods of the primary oscillators are the decay times of the mrnas and proteins for the former a half life of minutes and for the latter minutes generate ultradian oscillations in the model in each oscillator is of course provided by the random variables xi yi the times for which these random variables stay constant are assumed to be exponentially distributed for example in while convenience to exploit the fact that the binding and unbinding of the homodimers occurs on a faster time scale than the remaining processes the constants and s measure relative to the scale the average times for which the sites will remain occupied as this is an internal parameter of the site it should not depend on the states of the rest of the system to the binding sites on the relevant genes experimental work has shown that the second order rate constant for the binding of transcription regulating proteins to dna can be to times greater than the maximum rate predicted for three dimensional diffusion with transcription regulating protein concentrations measured in molecules and assuming that a small eukaryotic nucleus has an effective volume of its total volume this suggests a value for of seconds this can be interpreted as the time required for a binding event when dl or is present at molecule nucleus at higher concentrations this time will shorten proportionately the average free time of the binding site for but will change with the homodimer concentration similar interpretations apply for and and the random variables associated with the second primary oscillator we have used the value sec for producing most of the numerical simulations in our numerical tests section below however as shown in figures and an of times greater value are independent of the state of the system in contrast the free times are inversely proportional to the concentration of the attaching homodimer in one of our average of binding events per hour we shall see that the corresponding stochastic simulation compares well with a limiting scenario for which before we describe this limiting scenario in detail we present the remaining equations making up the complete oscillatory system as stated earlier the protein products and of the first of a fifth gene and activates it for transcription transcription translation and dimerization of the protein product of gene yields the product which is the primary circadian output results the corresponding system is and the time averaged deterministic model we employ renewal reward theory to derive a system of ordinary differential equations which replaces by a time averaged system in the limit to this end note first that if were independent of time the time average of over macroscopic time intervals implies that this intuition is mathematically accurate specifically define a cycle to consist of a period of unoccupied time followed by a period of occupied time the cycle ends with detachment the period of unoccupied time is exponentially distributed with mean suppose in the language of renewal reward theory that no reward is received during this time the following occupied associated with this period is exactly equal to the amount of occupied time then by renewal reward theory the long term average reward is with probability equal to where is the expected reward during a cycle and is the expected length of a cycle in the case under consideration to emphasize the dependence on this time average will hold over any time interval over which is constant or changes sufficiently slowly in this time averaged system eqns then become variables are random variables with time fluctuations at time scale in particular and experience stochastic fluctuations in their third derivatives the integration process involved in the computation of di will average out these fluctuations so that di will indeed vary more slowly than a mathematical proof to this end we denote by etc the solution of for some and given initial values and denote by etc the solution of eqns ff for the same initial values we prove proposition almost surely for all by etc of the initial value problem ff with the given fixed initial data the resulting functions all remain bounded and have bounded first derivatives on by the arzela ascoli theorem there is a
its affiliates in industry wide strikes during which it often in particular groups of gunmen linked to the organization targeted recalcitrant workers foremen and employers its new found power was dramatically demonstrated in mid february when it launched a strike against the ebro power and irrigation company popularly known as la canadenca which at one point plunged barcelona into darkness and brought industry to a february of the city s moribund employers federation and the reconstruction from barcelona of the spanish employers confederation these events some authors have claimed revealed a lack of unity among employers fernando del rey reguillo has argued that while more substantial employers were integrated within the old ftn the employers federation recruited among both rey reguillo and magda selles maintain that while the ftn took a more moderate negotiating stance the employers federation wished totally to destroy the in my view such a perspective exaggerates the distance between the two organizations the ftn s statutes did not allow it to negotiate directly with labor and its main role was to influence the political elite this was a task best undertaken by industrialists at the pinnacle of barcelona s so called good s on the other hand those at the forefront of the employers federation were what one might call the business middle class who were in fact involved in many of the hardest fought strikes with the cnt hence they were very much integrated within the world of capitalist industry the great host of lilliputian manufacturers who worked alone or with an assistant or two lived in a social and cultural world separate from the major social the employers federation in the spring of when the former discussed the possibility of extending its remit to industrial disputes but this pretension was subsequently dropped henceforth they would to a large degree operate in tandem with the employers federation taking on the cnt in the street and the ftn using its leaders social and political capital to influence government policy as we shall see only in the autumn of a softer line with respect to the cnt thereafter they both constantly demanded the authorities take drastic action against what they maintained was a terrorist body which presented a dire revolutionary threat to spanish the cnt challenge also prompted a re think in employer attitudes towards unions although anti union currents were still very strong at grass roots level business leaders now realized that they would have in some shape or form to was how they could do this while retaining considerable power on the shop floor proposed solutions tended to be rooted in catholic corporatist thought the natural harmony of the productive process had been undermined by liberalism and the dissolution of the guilds the question was how to restore it in a modern setting industrialists cherished the belief that the cnt leadership comprised a handful and terror once they were removed the genuine working class would step the most elaborate proposal which enjoyed the support of the ftn and of francesc cambo the latter seemingly compromising his earlier backing for independent labor confederations was put forward by the barcelona chamber of industry in february the idea was that all workers and employers would form part of local craft and industrial unions which would tribunals hence the scheme was baptised compulsory unionization this entailed concessions heretofore industrialists had opposed state interference in their affairs and they would now have to accept union elections but the idea had several advantages they would not have to face any over arching labor confederation bargaining would take place at local level and strikes could not be the employers federation subsequently put forward similar proposals some employer spokesmen went further suggesting that workers should be unionized rather than form unions and emphasizing that all the elements in the productive process would work together closely on the arbitration these ideas were not properly elaborated but they seem to hark back to notions of joint worker and employer unions put forward in the late nineteenth century such unions were also championed by the pro business far right italian nationalist association in both cases the attempt was made to adapt anti liberal catholic corporatism to a modern industrial setting but unlike the ina the proposals elaborated by the major catalan business associations combined a corporatist statist framework with at least some independent power for labor representatives hence their proposals may be seen as representing a half way house right wing corporatism which aimed to subordinate labor and a new corporatism which embraced bargaining with independent unions under state the military was similarly alarmed by the rise of the cnt in december joaquin milans del bosch the captain general of barcelona called for the suspension of constitutional guarantees in the territory to deal with the syndicalist and la correspondencia militar warned that it might be necessary to hand control over to the military to extinguish the bolshevik syndicalist in fact constitutional guarantees were finally suspended in barcelona on january following a riotous meeting of the barcelona officers after which they informed the captain general that they would no longer tolerate catalanist however the liberal government of count romanones then proceeded to round up large numbers of cnt union organizers to employer demands for compulsory unionization asking the institute for social reforms to report on its feasibility and it saw undermining the cnt as a first it was shocked by the cnt s response by launching the la canadenca strike the organization demonstrated that it was far more powerful than the government had assumed afraid that the situation would spiral out of control romanones responded by bringing in a new civil governor and chief of police to begin negotiations finally forcing the employers to accept a solution favorable to the workers this was typical of the totally inconsistent attitude that the restoration parties would pursue towards the catalan labor wars between and confounded by this turn of events the employers accused the authorities of weakness their anger was
purchase price of products and services the value of this influence is unlikely to be more important than design decisions but certainly has higher potential than transaction efficiency it is important to note that the service offerings of project specification managers domain knowledge acquisition costs and may not produce an immediate cash flow for the marketplace service offerings by supply consolidators liquidity creators and aggregators may be more easily developed resulting in the marketplace becoming liquid more quickly as a result it is important that buyers and suppliers evaluate potential marketplaces with a cautions eye towards not only the short term value that they deliver today but also the deliver and the associated risk from attempting to deliver this long term value the next section examines marketplaces that are developing and compares these marketplaces to the marketplace leaders do the developing markets match the market leaders current services in the effort potential customers of marketplaces typically do not want to outsource the whole purchasing process but are looking for help in particular areas that correspond to the five constellations the five constellations are mixes of services in the various quantities that are needed to meet a particular need it is important for marketplaces to decide which of these market niches they are trying to serve and to focus their service offerings accordingly too few services could be just as fatal as not providing the right mix of services recall that the five constellations were derived from interviews with the e marketplaces that were judged to be leaders in delivering value to their customers of these marketplaces are still in business have been acquired by or merged with another company while only eight have gone completely out of business this survival rate attests to the market leading positions of these marketplaces thus the thus the constellations of these markets can serve as benchmarks against which to judge the developing marketplaces included in the web mail survey the service offerings of the developing marketplaces were examined to determine if they exhibited the same constellations of service offerings as the market leading marketplaces several conclusions may be drawn from this analysis first only about percent of the developing marketplaces offered a constellation of services that matched the market leaders the remainder did not reach this benchmark however of the first group percent offered multiple constellations this suggests that they either were targeting multiple market niches had a lack of focus or had over developed some services for the niche they were trying to reach targeting multiple niches sounds appealing but given the challenge of gaining suggests the lack of a good business model and a relatively poor allocation of resources finally overdevelopment of services implies unneeded expenditures all of these factors could be detrimental to the long run survival of an marketplace only seven of the developing markets reported developing a service offering with the exactly the right mix of services the prudent customer of an marketplace should weigh their requirements against the functionality found across the broad set of marketplaces as well as against the constellations of functionality developed in this research only after a careful assessment of needs can companies make rational decisions about rational decisions about how to effectively use marketplaces correspondingly marketplaces should assess the needs of the buying community and decide which of these needs they will attempt to satisfy their long term sustainability and competitiveness depends on matching customer needs and the constellation of services to be provided it appears the vast majority of marketplaces are not selecting a market niche but are developing service offerings to market needs the wisdom of this approach is questionable given the success of the focused leaders future research in many marketplaces were put to an unexpected and abrupt test of their financial liquidity unfortunately this test of liquidity came at a time when marketplaces regardless of business model were starved for cash an exploration of which marketplaces failed and why should be conducted some might argue that the with the greatest value creating potential this certainly seems to be the case with the leading markets alternatively others might argue that only those marketplaces with less differentiating lower long term value creating capabilities may have experienced diminished liquidity problems and may have been more likely to survive the answer to this question will help us to more completely understand the marketplace landscape as it exists today exists today interorganizational time based postponement in the supply chain by sehasti garcia dastugue and douglas lamhert the objective of postponement is to delay changes in the form and identity of products to the latest possible point in the supply chain and to delay forward movement of products to the latest possible point in time postponement was described by alderson as an analytical tool that could be used to determine the most efficient manner to make products available to the end customer the final efficient manner to make products available to the end customer the final outcome of this analysis is the arrangement of the steps in the most effective sequence each step has been postponed to the latest feasible point in the sequence additionally he asserted changes in inventory location occur at the latest possible point in time however over time alderson s two views of postponement have been renamed in the literature changing the sequence of activities to delay changes in form or identity has been renamed manufacturing postponement this has resulted in a stream of research called design of product and processes for postponement postponement by changing the sequence of activities requires changing the design of the product and the manufacturing processes and might require changing the location where activities activities are performed in the supply chain lee billington and carter zinn and bowersox the delay of forward movement of products has been referred to as geographic postponement logistics postponement pagh and cooper and time postponement this view of postponement resulted in a stream of re search on inventory
was impeding their performance as a center the director of the heart center stated in terms of these performance indicators that will be coming up from our point of view we ve are they undertaking best practice whether it s length of stay or the treatment process discussion our analysis and synthesis of the findings contributed to the development of an illustrative framework for mapping the nature of relationships using the final themes that emerged from our analysis plotted against a continuum of cooperation partnership our illustrative framework draws on and brings together the views and perspectives of the major stakeholders involved in the provision and delivery of healthcare we suggest that this framework encourages the application of a stakeholder theoretical perspective in the analysis of the nature of relations between purchaser and provider within a public healthcare context what becomes apparent from figure is the appearance of the purchaser provider stakeholder relationship dealing with the reality of transitioning from the competitive healthcare provision and delivery it clearly demonstrates a marked difference between a propensity to cooperate mindset and a capacity to cooperate reality we suggest that both provider and purchaser share a cooperative relationship mindset in that they understand that their own success is tied to the success of the other they have common objectives in terms of relevant health outcomes and both parties are highly committed to the relationship this interpretation is supported by propensity capacity to cooperate theme however our findings indicate that the purchaser provider stakeholder relationship has elements of both cooperation and non cooperation specifically the remaining three final themes in figure shows elements of both cooperative and non cooperative orientations suggesting a dichotomy between propensity and capacity to cooperate these findings are not surprising given that many post merger integration problems can be attributed to poor there are a number of implications of framing our research findings using this illustrative framework we suggest that in this public healthcare setting both purchasers and providers should carefully consider those organizational and management issues pertaining to the four themes that emerged from our analysis that are necessary to move stakeholder relationships from a non cooperative orientation to one of cooperation a fundamental question for both stakeholders stakeholders is to establish what measures in each stakeholder s context are necessary to facilitate changes in relationship orientation the emergent themes provide some starting points for each purchaser provider stakeholder to signal to the other that it seeks to improve the relationship for example recall that the provider stakeholder is comprised of a number of smaller stakeholder groups thus achieving overall consensus amongst these internal stakeholders would signal to the purchaser stakeholder a desire to take the relationship to one that embodies both a capacity as well as a propensity to cooperate based upon an in depth study of stakeholder collaboration within a health economics research context rod and paliwoda developed a set of guiding principles that appeared to be embraced by those organizations involved in the collaborative effort and that characterized the nature of them highlighting our main finding that there was a propensity to cooperate but not a capacity to do so the application of these guiding principles suggests a number specific recommendations for improving stakeholder cooperation there should be an acknowledgement by both stakeholders that there is a need to work together cooperatively and that cooperation cannot simply be imposed upon stakeholders through a government mandate aware of issues that have been identified as being problematic and then agree on their relative importance there should be an appreciation that all stakeholders bring something to the relationship that each stakeholder has a right to be involved and that they are capable of contributing something of value there should be an awareness and understanding of the environment in which stakeholders should support and encourage each other s contribution to the relationship and there should be mutual promotion of participation stakeholder should share the same overall vision ie improving patient health and well being and individual organizational stakeholder goals should be managed and pursued without compromising the overall shared vision that comprise both sides of the larger purchaser provider stakeholder dyad there should be reassurances that realistic milestones can be achieved defined expectations can be met and progress is being made towards achieving the overall shared vision context in an effort to assist stakeholders in managing cooperation and improving a partnership mentality specifically the case site investigation presented in this paper was carried out with the purpose of examining stakeholder relationships in a public healthcare setting the emergent themes helping to describe perceptions of the various stakeholders are consistent with theoretical and empirical research cited in the relations in addition focus on stakeholders subjective experiences and the richness of the case enhance our understanding of the critical issues related to the stakeholders understanding and perception of their relationship we did not set out with a pre determined construct of successful cooperation to test in this case study rather from our findings we looked for themes and presented an illustrative framework for mapping the state of stakeholder relationships followed by a set of guiding recommendations for improving the nature of cooperation in the case of the uk government policy of joined up thinking between providers and across purchasers and providers is intended to improve service encounter experience and efficiency of provision we believe the stakeholder cooperation approach advocated in this paper can make a legitimate contribution to this improvement in addition we suggest that the results of our analysis can incorporated into an illustrative framework that assists managers in identifying the current state of their stakeholder relations the further suggestion of a number of guiding recommendations should encourage managers to think strategically about how to maintain and enhance the nature of their interorganizational relationships the use of retrospective accounts and perceptions of stakeholders can also present limitations although the use of recall and retrospective inevitable in some sense it was nevertheless appropriate given the desire to explore the thoughts and thinking
approximation that is highlighted in it is especially valuable when the limit state function is implicit example a seven dimensional series problem consider the frame in fig which presents five plastic plastic hinges and two random loads obeying a type i largest distribution the flexural resistance are lognormal random variables with properties shown in table together with those of the loads this is a classical example that has been studied in among others the limit state functions of the collapse mechanisms are as follows where the importance sampling analysis was carried out with a normal density placed on the point of coordinates taken from the covariance matrix was composed with the standard deviations of the basic variables with no cross moments as in the previous examples use was made of a polynomial kernel of degree the probability of failure calculated with importance samples is while that obtained with the support vector classifier trained with solver calls selected with the proposed algorithm is representing a fairly good agreement it is important to quote the number of function calls used in this very problem with the same or similar data sets in in in also a similar problem with a single limit state and four random variables reported in required function calls table summarizes the main results of the three examples seemingly there is no evident increase of the number of function calls on the failure probability this is indeed a desirable result which can be explained by by the fact that the computational effort employed by solver surrogate methods in general is not related to such a probability as they do not have a probabilistic formulation despite the number of solver calls required by importance sampling is somewhat dependent on the probability the number of solver calls in the proposed approach is controlled only by the support vector margin and therefore it is is independent of pf the design point and the importance sampling density in the above examples use was made of a multivariate normal density function with variances equal to those of the given basic variables for generating the importance samples the function was placed on a design point this is a conventional method widely applied in the examples use was made of design points indicated in different papers where the same cases have been calculated with other methods for the sake of for the sake of completeness a method for calculating this point is now proposed then follows a discussion on the selection of the importance sampling density as such that justifies the use of the conventional is technique since the importance region is that having the highest probability mass in the failure region the design point should ideally be that showing the highest density value in that set it can be found by modifying the markov chain monte carlo method proposed in for the optimal is density function in this method samples obeying the optimal density in the failure region are generated with a modified metropolis algorithm the reader is referred to section for the details the modification introduced herein for the only assessment of the design point is to accept only those states of the markov chain implying an ascent in the probability density value the performance function of a sample having a density value less than that of the the previous state of the chain are not evaluated fig shows a markov chain obtained for example no starting at point the design point which is close to the point used in the example was obtained after steps these samples together with some in the safe region selected at random can also be employed for the first fitting of the support vector machine in the third step of the algorithm svm is the covariance matrix of the is density defines the amplitude of the sample space for further updatings of the classifier a benchmark study on importance sampling techniques was reported in since that time some methods using kernel techniques for estimating the optimal is density have appeared a rapid review of all is techniques indicates that they can be classified into two main groups methods using the normal density in various forms placed on the design point which is the target of previous calculations methods oriented to build an approximation of the optimal is density function with all its parameters at once the method used in this paper for which an algorithm to find the design point has been proposed belongs to the first class this preference is supported on the fact that the building of an approximation of a probability density is a task seriously affected by the curse of dimensionality meaning that the number of samples required to reach a similar of accuracy grows exponentially with the dimensionality this perhaps explains why the coefficient of variation of the failure probability estimates in the examples of the kernel method of which have a moderate number of dimensions are in general larger than those of methods of the first group for a similar number of samples as reported by engelund and rackwitz thus a practical approach is to avoid non parametric is density estimation with the initial exploring samples and to use and to use them instead to determine the design point in order to place a parametric density on top of it in the method proposed herein these samples are also used for the first assessment of the svm classifier which allows a drastic increase of the efficiency of importance sampling techniques conclusions and support vector machines are highly useful for selecting the samples of monte carlo simulation techniques that are worth processing with a numerical solver in probabilistic structural analysis the parsimonious on line training of support vector machines with samples generated with the importance sampling simulation technique allows both the estimation of the failure probability and the approximation of the limit state function strictly in those regions where there is a higher higher concentration of failure probability mass conversely the importance sampling
does not diminish the efficient allocation of police resources and does not produce a ratchet effect on the profiled population unfortunately the data does not allow us determine directly whether highway profiling meets these conditions however drawing from other data sources harcourt argues that it probably does not minority drivers likely have slightly lower elasticities of offending to policing than white drivers as well as slightly higher natural offending rates as a consequence racial profiling is likely to both increase the crime rate and cause a ratchet effect in as harcourt notes this increase in negative contacts with police will aggravate the disproportional representation of minorities in the correctional population more unevenly distribute criminal records supervision and post punitive collateral consequences and significantly boost the public perception that minorities are drug users traffickers and couriers is neither the only nor the most direct means of combating discriminatory profiling however it is very difficult to mitigate profiling directly proving bias in any individual case is challenging to say the least and evidence of statistical disproportion cannot in itself prove that any particular search is illegitimate one of the most effective ways to diminish discriminatory profiling discussed if a court finds that an investigative technique does not invade a reasonable expectation of privacy then the technique is not a search and police may use it without restriction in applying the reasonable expectation of privacy test to a novel search technique courts should therefore consider the extent to which the technique is likely to be used in a discriminatory manner people against unreasonable governmental searches and seizures these provisions of course are not the only sources of such protection in both countries legislatures regulate search powers exercised by executive authorities and those authorities regulate themselves with various non legal mechanisms including official policies and informal norms microeconomic analysis and its public law offshoot public choice undertake such regulation cost benefit calculations are made by self interested decision makers with imperfect information judges share these imperfections but they have some capacity to develop rules that take their own and others weaknesses into account identifying the biases and information gathering deficits of courts legislatures and police should reduce the frequency and magnitude of the errors that the reasonable expectation of privacy test inevitably generates the deficits of the police are obvious while they may face pressure to avoid egregious privacy intrusions the incentives bearing on them tilt heavily against investigative restraint as individuals and institutions police are rewarded primarily for minimizing crime and the benefits of intrusive search techniques in achieving this objective are clear in contrast apart from budgetary constraints the social costs of surveillance such as externalized accordingly police have little incentive to either discover or take them into account in exercising discretionary investigative powers police also lack the institutional means to perform the kind of comprehensive cost benefit analysis that the reasonable expectation of privacy test entails consequently while crime control interests must obviously be considered in applying the reasonable expectation of privacy test courts should not deference to police assessments of the need for a search technique therefore the legislatures and courts are primarily responsible for attaining an optimal balance between privacy and crime control the key question for judges in applying the reasonable expectation of privacy test then is to what extent they should defer to legislative decisions to regulate or decline to regulate a particular investigative technique to accurate decision making in this area this information comes in two varieties first unlike judges legislators are politically accountable and are thus in a better position to gauge citizens preferences for privacy and crime control second legislatures have better access to information on the nature and effects of investigative methods this advantage is especially apparent in the context of novel technologically sophisticated matters legislatures typically seek input from a variety of sources including not only law enforcement agencies but also industry organizations advocacy groups academics technical experts and the general public by contrast the ability of courts to obtain expert assistance and canvass the views of diverse stakeholders is much more limited legislatures are also typically able to deal with new technologies more quickly than courts most judicial rule making is performed by which usually encounter novel search technologies many years after they are put into use and even then only if relevant cases are tried and appealed by this time the factual record undergirding the rule making process may be outdated legislation is also often overtaken by technological developments but here as well legislatures are better equipped to respond fiexibly to changing circumstances unlike courts periodically reviewed courts in contrast are constrained by stare decisis and in the realm of constitutional interpretation courts also impose constraints on legislative action all of this suggests that courts should be reluctant to usurp the legislature s capacity to regulate the use of novel search technologies as it sees fit public choice scholarship teaches us however that the legislative groups consequently the interests of groups disproportionately harmed by legislation may be systematically discounted it is often asserted for example that the legislative process operates as a one way ratchet in the criminal sphere according to this view legislatures respond robustly to demands for greater investigative powers and harsher sanctions from police prosecutors victims and the crime fearing public while ignoring calls from defense lawyers civil libertarians and academics for greater police regulation and punitive restraint some commentators have argued that this may often be true of search and seizure laws which as we have seen sometimes impose disproportionate costs on politically marginal groups it would be a mistake to assume however that legislatures are always incapable of tempering demands for intrusive search substantial costs on a broad or politically powerful segment of the population the legislature will often be pressured to regulate it indeed in most cases congress has regulated new search technologies long before the courts have encountered them and in cases where the supreme court has found that a technology does not invade
the dividend increase sample and negative for the dividend decrease sample opposite to the expectation if the factor returns formed on ep proxy for growth similar to hml factor returns most importantly the changes in the ir factor ej are positive for dividend both dividend initiation and increase firms all significant at better than the using the ep factor in place of or as opposed to in addition to or yields similar results thus our basic results remain robust to these additional control procedures for potential operating risk change and growth formed on the basis of value relevance recall that our goal is to employ an alternative earnings quality measure that is less associated with cash flow volatility but can still reasonably approximate our construct of the precision of publicly available accounting information our estimation results are presented in table the results show that after controlling for the fama french three factors rm rf smb and hml as well as adding further control on operating risk in panel a and growth in panel dividend initiation and increase firms still exhibit decreases in the loading on vr the change in the loadings on vr for dividend decreases although positive is not significant in panel a though it is significantly positive at panel taken together we interpret these results as largely consistent with those obtained in tables surrounding dividend events if the market perception of firms information risk changes surrounding dividend change announcements as reflected in changes on the factor loadings of the ir factor then we should observe systematic changes in firms information characteristics as well in table we provide corroborating descriptive evidence on the change in information first an alternative measure of information quality that largely captures the information asymmetry between informed and noninformed traders we adjust aq and pin for time trend but present the results on vr without adjusting for time second we examine the dispersion of one year ahead analyst earnings forecasts and the dispersion of analysts long term growth forecasts measured as the standard forecast we expect greater forecast dispersion to indicate greater uncertainty related to firms future earnings and growth prospects in addition we also examine the standard deviation of stock returns the standard deviation of operating cash flows the standard deviation of sales and the standard deviation of return on assets a higher standard deviation reflects higher volatility and greater uncertainty in the underlying the information characteristics of dividend change firms before and after the ir factor loading structural break points results using the dividend change announcement month as the break points are qualitatively similar we compare the detrended aq metric estimated over the five years prior to and five years after the structural break point year for each dividend change sample we compare vr and the detrended pin one for and displtg we examine dispersion in analyst forecasts three years before and three years after the structural change point for sd ret we examine the differences between the standard deviation of monthly returns calculated from months before and months after the month of structural change finally we compare the differences in sd cfo sales and sd roa by comparing the standard deviations calculated in the period from quarter the period from quarter quarter where quarter is the quarter of structural change we test the mean differences using paired two sample tests the results in table on the detrended aq indicate that both dividend initiation and dividend increase firms experience a significant decline in the detrended aq metric after the dividend event consistent with a corresponding flows and hence an increase in the precision of earnings information the mean change in aq for dividend decrease firms is positive but not significant we observe a significant increase in the vr metric for dividend initiation firms but the changes for dividend increase and decrease firms are not significant this is not surprising given that this measure is obtained using firm specific rolling year windows implying the change test is not a very powerful test we significant decreases in the pin measure for both the dividend initiation and increase firms though the change on the dividend decrease sample is not significant nevertheless finding similar results using an alternative information quality variable lends more credence to our inference that information risks change around dividend change events our results on analyst forecast dispersion indicate that both dispersion suggesting the uncertainty surrounding future earnings and growth prospects for dividend initiation and increase firms decreases after the structural break point in contrast and as expected for dividend decrease firms both analyst forecast dispersion measures increase substantially in the three years following the structural break point suggesting regard to future earnings and long term growth for firms that decrease dividends in addition stock return volatility decreases for dividend initiations and dividend increases and increases for dividend decrease firms in the years following the dividend change dividend initiation firms also experience a decrease in cash flow volatility return on assets volatility and sales volatility the changes in these three volatility are insignificant though they are all of the expected direction the volatility of cash flows and the volatility of sales are among the innate factors identified by dechow dichev as economic fundamentals driving the accruals earnings quality overall our evidence on the information characteristics together with our regression results after controlling for potential changes in operating risks is consistent with a reduction in information uncertainty increase and dividend initiation firms and with an increase in information uncertainty for dividend decrease firms conclusion we test whether accrual earnings quality is a priced ir factor in a dividend change setting after controlling for changes in operating risk we define information risk as the probability that firm specific financial statement information pertinent to investment decisions is of low precision under the informed following existing literature we use factor mimicking portfolio returns formed on accruals quality to capture this ir factor we conjecture that dividend change firms exhibit changes in information characteristics and their exposure
s experience of menopause must be viewed as neither linear nor direct but dialectic this dialectic however is articulated as a series of hypothesized tautological interrelations among symptom experience symptom reports and wider systems of cultural meaning as reflected upon or noted by either ethnographer or informant moreover no matter how complex their cultural analysis becomes they never stray far from the centralizing topic of menopause therefore giving it a decontextualized prominence that would not necessarily be reflected in women s everyday experiences in contrast my cultural analysis focuses far less on symptoms and women s experience of culturally or bioculturally constructed internal states because talk about the body in newfoundland was once talk about everything else my analysis also strays far away from the centralizing concerns of most menopause studies my aim is to view changing cultural constructions of the body in terms of their social consequences for the everyday lived experiences of women who reside in a single newfoundland community in the discussion that follows i hope to capture different but also dynamic active dimensions of menopause as embedded in or subsumed by sus private conceptualizations of the body i do so by focusing on what early has termed culture in action or kirmayer describes as how the body presents itself in substance and action rather than being simply an implement for reflection and imagination by conducting daily participant observation among middle aged women for a year in the i was exposed to and became a part of the face to face dynamics by which women in this small community employed discourse of blood not just to reflect on the nature of their bodily experiences but also for impression management and for the active negotiation of interpersonal relations in their daily lives in hindsight it is only through revisiting the community years later during dramatically changed circumstances that i have come to appreciate the unbounded public nature of the body that characterized discourse on blood and nerves and how closely it was tied to the socioeconomic circumstances of blood and nerves revisited in order to capture the essence of changes that have taken place in grey rock harbour the task at hand is not only to describe the transitions of folk models of menopause into biomedical ones but to also frame my analysis of newfoundland women s experience of menopause in terms of the changing dynamics of interpersonal relations in the sections that follow i address three major nerves related changes i see as having occurred in grey rock harbour during absence first nerves have been trivialized folk idioms of nerves and blood that once linked soma psyche and tradition are now treated with scorn and have been superseded by biomedical models second menopause has been medicalized biomedical professionals television magazines and school teachers have replaced shared experiences and communications among the community s middle aged women as the major sources of information or advice on health matters third i argue that it is simply the hegemonic nature of medical discourse but also the changing nature of interpersonal relations within the local community that continues to hold a primary key to understanding the decline of nerves discourse the net effect of these changes has been that women s bodies have become privatized and bodily metaphors that once linked women in complex collective and individual assessments of moral character have lost their dominance in village life trivialization worried nerves barbecued nerves i have chosen some key features to guide my discussion of nerves in the these include the prevalence and predominance of nerves in local discourse the polysemic nature of nerves or way in which talk of nerves was talk about everything else the character of nerves in relation to local considerations of status and self esteem and nerves as a language of protest or everyday resistance the past in the nerves dominated the daily discourse i soon learned not to ask women directly about menopause but to ask them what happened to their blood or nerves on the change of life over percent of the women i interviewed who were between the ages of and complained of nerves women would mention their nerves hundreds of times in a single day conversations would be politely initiated by inquiries into the state of one s nerves nerves although collectively recognized were highly individualized in terms of thus mary s nerves becoming unstrung and betty s nerves becoming unstrung could connote quite different phenomena this level of ambiguity or seeming contradiction posed no difficulty for local women because all the harbour women were familiar with the details of each other s daily health the nature and character of each other s nerves the person not the complaint per se gave meaning to each case of nerves in a sense each woman was the expert on and interpreter of her own body the fact that the rhetoric of nerves as applied to one s own aches and pains and stresses and strains was highly individualistic and not only kept the discourse on nerves lively but gave a strong sense of validation to the importance of one s existence as a physical emotional and social being the widespread and salient discourse about nerves in grey rock harbour was simultaneously a celebration of respect for each person s unique a strong force for social conformity in the talk about menopause as talk about nerves and blood was talk about everything else these complex idioms could be used in the most casual conversations or employed to communicate one s most private intimate and personal concerns nerves and blood figured in all discourse about female health and encapsulated the very heart and depth of the meaning of the newfoundland self moreover these complex polysemic idioms interlinked the and expression of somatic and psychological states with the expressions of local character personal history and occupational and collective community identity women s talk about menopause was thus encoded in folk versions of history
both in the case of capital gains and in the case of interest income we do not attempt such a correction here federal taxes represent about two thirds of all us taxes and the remaining third are state and local taxes state and local taxes in the united states are primarily of three types first state income taxes tend to be progressive and are about percent of state and local tax revenues on second property income taxes primarily on residential real estate are about percent of state and local tax primarily on property owners but become regressive if they are shifted onto rents third sales and excise taxes which are regressive as lower income families spend a larger fraction of their income on taxed consumption goods are about percent of state revenue overall state and local taxes are believed to be somewhat regressive but this depends on the assumed incidence of the property tax if the property tax is shows that state and local taxes are very close to being proportional to income across income groups in that case ignoring state and local states would be of no consequence when assessing overall tax progressivity the increased openness of the us economy might have shifted the corporate tax more toward labor income which would accentuate the trends we document here similarly our income measure excludes contributions to employer pensions but we do include employer pensions when they are received thus our pension income measure like our measure of capital gains can be viewed as based on realization rather than accrual capital gains are never realized on individual tax returns if the assets are transferred at death or through intervivos gifts poterba and weisbenner estimate that in such capital gains on transferred assets represent about percent of the value of gross estates estate tax returns the fraction of never realized gains passed at death for financial assets is small relative to realized capital gains reported on individual tax returns and is ignored in this study state income taxes can be deducted as an itemized deduction from income for federal income tax purposes as we do not include state taxes in our analysis we have also not deducted state taxes in our individual income tax taxsim computations to examine the evolution of us federal tax progressivity over time it is necessary to look at the patterns of how the tax code has evolved over time and how sources and size of income especially for the very top of the income distribution have evolved over time federal tax rates over time figure displays the average federal tax rate paid in and for various until year we report tax rates based on tax law applied to incomes reported in and adjusted for nominal and real growth the federal tax system is clearly progressive in the average tax rate increases smoothly with income from less than percent in the second quintile to around percent at the very top in that year the average tax rate increases only modestly from percent in the bottom half of the top to percent at the very top suggesting that the current federal tax system is relatively close to a flat tax rate within the top percent the figure also shows how the total federal tax rate is decomposed into individual income tax payroll tax corporate income tax and estate tax average rates the individual income tax is the main component driving progressivity in actually negative at the bottom of the income distribution and increases to an average rate of over percent at the very top the progressivity of the federal income tax is due to the increasing structure of marginal tax rates coupled with the exemptions and credits which benefit lower incomes disproportionately the average tax rate however remains substantially below the top marginal tax rate of percent even at the very top because of lower tax rates on long term capital gains and dividends and to a lesser extent deductions for mortgage interest payments and charitable contributions the corporate income tax and the estate tax are also progressive in they increase from a combined average rate of less than percent at the bottom of the income distribution to about percent at the very top but are small relative to the individual income tax those two taxes are capital income is concentrated at the top of the income distribution the estate tax also has a very progressive structure coupled with very large exemptions so that less than percent of adults who die are liable to pay any estate tax finally the payroll tax is regressive involving an average tax rate of about percent of total income below the top decile and declining to about percent at the very top this result is due to the cap in the social security payroll tax and the fact that labor income is a smaller fraction of total income at the top than in the middle of the distribution the contrast between the progressivity of federal taxes in and in is striking as shown in figure in the federal tax system imposed higher average tax rates on those with low incomes then lower rates on a middle group up to the percentile and much higher rates within the top percent of the income distribution especially very top groups the lower tax burden in for the middle groups is largely due to the fact that the payroll tax which falls primarily on the groups from to was much smaller in than today the federal tax system was very progressive even within the top percentile with an average tax rate of around percent in the bottom half of the top percentile to over percent in the top percent this finding illustrates the theme that it is of the income distribution into very small groups to capture the progressivity of a tax system although very top groups contain few taxpayers they account for a substantial share of income earned and an even larger share of taxes paid
is an important topic in marketing research we believe that emotional states may influence an individual s preference for risk taking and the results of study demonstrate that subjects with negative emotions are more likely to take risks and those with positive emotions are more likely to exhibit risk averse behavior the results of studies indicate that provocative conceptual and theoretical implications for the understanding of the relationship between emotions and consumer decisions the results of study support the first hypothesis that emotional states influence risk taking in the sense that people in a negative emotional state will take greater risks than the second is the motivational perspective the latter postulates that people in a positive mood wish to maintain their mood whereas those in a negative mood are motivated to escape that mood according to this perspective people who are feeling positive emotions are motivated to choose a safe option to maintain that positive the information processing perspective postulates that people in a negative emotional state process information more systematically and more intelligently whereas people who are in a positive emotional state process information more heuristically previous studies have found that people with negative thus information processing may be used to explain the results in this study in contrast to the motivational and information processing perspectives mano found that increased risk taking under a negative affect is largely due to the arousal that is associated with the affective state he asserted that the heightened arousal level that is based on the decrease in cognitive capacity that occurs with heightened arousal rather than a motivation to preserve a positive mood state or mitigate a negative mood state because study found that positive emotions lead to risk averse behavior and negative emotions to risk taking behavior the results of study demonstrate that subjects in a positive study demonstrated that subjects in a negative emotional condition as risk takers are likely to choose a mixed option because it provides some hope of mitigating their negative emotions whereas subjects in positive emotional condition being risk averse are less likely to choose the mixed option with previous studies in general the purchasing decisions of consumers are affected by sales promotions previous research has suggested that consumers often switch to higher quality brands when they are offered price promotions in a negative emotional condition when considering commodities that were offered at a discount from the motivational perspective it is probable that the subjects who were in a positive emotional state were less likely to take the risks of switching from their initial selected option to maintain their positive emotion but that to repair their negative emotion thus study found that the subjects in a positive emotional condition did not risk switching from their initial selected options whereas the subjects in a negative emotional condition were prepared to take that risk implications for understanding consumer decisions sad although many of the factors that affect the mood of consumers are beyond the control of marketers mood can still be greatly influenced by small factors such as the smile of a salesperson or a long wait in a queue for example if a seller intends to promote a tour product that has average performance attributes then the selling strategy that is implied by the to encourage them to choose the product that is being promoted as the all average option our investigations have various limitations the first limitation is the use of students as subjects however some of the justification for using student samples comes from the research objective of aiming to understand the effect of issues is appropriate the second limitation of the work is the methodology in that the emotions of the subjects were induced the inducement of mood through the reading of a story limits the robustness of our theoretical framework and future research should investigate other elements of consumer decision making in the light of emotion relate to an individual s travel experience achievement motives uniqueness knowledge culture convenience cost and preference for certain types of products locations or short haul versus long haul may affect an individual s risk perception and thus moderate results first previous research has found that the different needs for cognition among individuals may influence their degree of risk taking and thus would be worth investigating the extent to which individual differences such as nfc influence the relationship between emotional state and consumer decisions second to inconsistent conclusions about the relationship between emotional state and consumer decisions eventually in addition to valence the role of arousal should be considered when examining consumer decisions repeat visitors an exploratory investigation of responses by many places are substitutable successfully differentiating a destination at decision time is arguably the greatest challenge faced by destination marketing organizations in the emerging literature relating to place branding there has been little attention given to issues such as visitor loyalty destination switching repeat visitation and customer relationship management underpinned by the proposition that communicating with previous visitors will be a more efficient use of resources than traditional advertising this paper reports an exploratory investigation into the extent that regional tourism organizations in queensland australia are encouraging repeat visitors from their largest market while there was a general recognition of the potential for visitor relationship management none of the rtos had yet been able to develop a formal approach to stay in touch with previous visitors destination marketers face a unique set of challenges and relative to marketers of other products and services the term firefighting is a useful metaphor to highlight what will inhibit vrm development by these rtos for some time to come more research is required to assist destination marketers address the issue of how to initiate meaningful dialogue at the right time with the hundreds of thousands of potential repeat visitors with whom they do not have direct contact proposition for this paper occurred in while i was the ceo of a leading new zealand regional tourism organization my tenure took place during a period of crisis for the destination and research
the political left and the social workers in sweden but this alliance was dissolved during the due to the political consequences of the extensive war on drugs and the battle for a drug free society in norway the professional discourse and the more important legal discourse mainly led in the same direction delimiting the legal foundation of coercion compared to valid laws at the time however welfare professionals played an active role pressing for compulsory measures and professional groups have been of limited importance in the legal processes thus there is no reason to claim that the acts in this field of social policy represent a kind of welfare professional self producing social policy and differences in social law cannot be explained within the scope of the professional discourse emphasizing the liberal principle of autonomy is largely confirmed this is not to say that basic legal principles necessarily are in opposition to the use of coercion only that considerations about the liberal values of the rechtsstaat and legal security result in certain restrictions in such legal measures the swedish case shows however that some legal actors may be influenced by the general political opinion the expansion of the lvm was supported by several the courts of law and even if legal principles have their foundation in the legal discourse they are not necessarily expressed by legal actors such values may also be addressed by politicians welfare professionals or other actors like the danish association of counties as far as they are considered to be in line with the opinions interests of these actors and the policy options to alter proliferation incentives we evaluate a variety of explanations in two stages of nuclear proliferation the presence of nuclear weapons production programs and the actual possession of nuclear weapons we examine proliferation quantitatively using data collected by the authors on national latent nuclear weapons production capability and several other variables while controlling for the conditionality of nuclear weapons possession based on by the authors on national latent nuclear weapons production capability and several other variables while controlling for the conditionality of nuclear weapons possession based on the presence of a nuclear weapons program we find that security concerns and technological capabilities are important determinants of whether states form nuclear weapons programs while security concerns economic capabilities and domestic politics help to explain the possession of nuclear weapons the treaty on the non proliferation of nuclear weapons are less likely to initiate nuclear weapons programs but the npt has not deterred proliferation at the system level publication abstract headnote nuclear weapons proliferation is a topic of intense interest and concern among both academics and policy makers diverse opinions exist about the determinants of proliferation and the policy options to alter proliferation incentives we evaluate a variety of explanations stages of nuclear proliferation the presence of nuclear weapons production programs and the actual possession of nuclear weapons we examine proliferation quantitatively using data collected by the authors on national latent nuclear weapons production capability and several other variables while controlling for the conditionality of nuclear weapons possession based on the presence of a nuclear weapons program we find that security concerns and technological capabilities are whether states form nuclear weapons programs while security concerns economic capabilities and domestic politics help to explain the possession of nuclear weapons signatories to the treaty on the non proliferation of nuclear weapons are less likely to initiate nuclear weapons programs but the npt has not deterred proliferation at the system level keywords nuclear proliferation counter proliferation nuclear weapons security nuclear nonproliferation treaty case based relatively few attempts have been made to apply statistical analysis to the subject given a diversity of theoretical claims and the complex contingent nature of the topic we view multivariate regression as an essential part of better understanding and cumulative knowledge of nuclear proliferation we begin by pointing out that there are two related but also distinct stages of nuclear proliferation the presence of nuclear weapons programs and the possession of nuclear we begin by pointing out that there are two related but also distinct stages of nuclear proliferation the presence of nuclear weapons programs and the possession of nuclear weapons a nuclear weapons production program does not necessarily lead to the possession of nuclear weapons factors that help to explain the decision to develop a nuclear weapons program may not be as relevant in deciding whether to produce nuclear weapons similarly policies designed to address the effect of domestic and international conditions on states decisions to pursue nuclear weapons production programs and to produce actual nuclear weapons none of the existing nuclear weapons states obtained their arsenals except through the instrumental step of a nuclear weapons development program while it is conceivable that weapons may be purchased or stolen in the future we are not able to apply meaningful empirical tests to such claims in explaining the possession of while it is conceivable that weapons may be purchased or stolen in the future we are not able to apply meaningful empirical tests to such claims in explaining the possession of nuclear weapons in the current nonproliferation regime therefore we introduce a censored model for the second stage where the possession of nuclear weapons is contingent on the presence of a nuclear production program we also juxtapose a noncensored model and the censored model of nuclear the comparison between the censored model and the noncensored model reveals that assessing the causes of nuclear proliferation without addressing the interaction between the two stages of nuclear proliferation may invite erroneous conclusions a simple conceptual framework we can think of the determinants of nuclear proliferation in terms of opportunity and willingness nuclear opportunity refers to environmental constraints and also the potential for a to manufacture nuclear weapons considering that no state has ever imported or had operational use over nuclear weapons deployed by another we treat the capability to build nuclear weapons as comparable to a state s opportunity for nuclear weapons proliferation nuclear willingness refers to a
two crystallizations was mainly the different methods used hydrolytic degradation for degradation study electrospun pbs nanofiber specimens were immersed in naoh solution at xc for and hours respectively the specimens were dried in a drying oven and then observed through sem photography figures and revealed their sem images of the fibers after hydrolytic degradation for and hours respectively the effect of hydrolytic degradation on pbs nanofibers was indistinct in an hour as time passed the nanofibers degraded rapidly and some fibers were the specimens were dried in a drying oven and then observed through sem photography figures and revealed their sem images of the fibers after hydrolytic degradation for and hours respectively the effect of hydrolytic degradation on pbs nanofibers was indistinct in an hour as time passed the nanofibers degraded rapidly and some fibers were broken down after hours all of the nanofibers were broken down completely the reason for the fast degradation might be that the nanofibers had a higher ratio of surface to volume than fibers with larger dimensions the crystallization also played an important role in the polymer hydrolytic degradation which happened in the amorphous region at an earlier stage be that the nanofibers had a higher ratio of surface to volume than fibers with larger dimensions the crystallization also played an important role in the polymer hydrolytic degradation which happened in the amorphous region at an earlier stage conclusions four weight concentration pbs cf solutions wt and three diameters of the needle orifice mm mm mm have been used to investigate the morphology of the pbs fibers via electrospinning the electrospinning electrospinning process was very difficult and the efficiency was very low when the weight concentration was below the products were some balls besides a few fibers the fibers are in the majority when the weight concentration is equal to or over the morphology of the fibers became more uniform when the diameter of the needle became larger the thermal properties of the electrospun pbs nanofibers were similar to those of pbs pellets the crystallization of electrospun pbs nanofibers was by waxd the speed of hydrolytic degradation of electrospun pbs nanofibers was rapid and all the fibers were broken down after hours in naoh solution by waxd the speed of hydrolytic degradation of electrospun pbs nanofibers was rapid and all the fibers were broken down after hours in naoh solution ournal of clothing science and basic garment pattern generation using geometric modeling method sungmin kim seeks to present a new methodology to generate basic patterns of various sizes and styles using three dimensional geometric modeling method design methodology approach the geometry of a garment is divided into fit zone and fashion zone the geometry of fit zone is prepared from body scan data and can be resized parametrically the fashion zone is modeled using various parameters characterizing the aesthetic appearance of garments finally the garment model is projected into corresponding flat panels considering the flat panels considering the physical properties of the base material as well as the producibility of the garment findings the main findings were geometric modeling and flat pattern generation method for various garments originality value parametrically deformable garment models enable the design of garments with various size and silhouette so that designers can obtain flat patterns of complex garments before determined automatically considering the physical property of fabric introduction three dimensional computer aided design has become one of the most indispensable elements in modern industries it is very difficult to find any design process that is not aided by cad systems in traditional manufacturing processes of machinery aircraft and watercraft and most engineers take it for granted nowadays of course such a trend is steadily spreading over garment industries however cad systems however cad systems are still prevalent and therefore design of garment is difficult this is partly because of the difficulties in mathematical modeling of the fabric material that however a more significant problem is that designers and pattern makers do not think the cad method to be better than the conventional manual method although such a phenomenon has always been with the initial development period of other purpose cad systems it is more serious as well as natural as well as natural in garment industry because the quality evaluation of the product depends more on human aesthetic sense than on the optimum physical performance certainly there are garments that need functionality more than the aesthetic appearance such as tight fitting underwear or protective garments cad systems will be powerful tools in designing and manufacturing such mass customized high functional garments design one is the flat pattern process where patterns are designed two dimensionally and the other is the draping method where a flat fabric is directly formed into a garment on a mannequin although it is more difficult to get garment patterns by the latter method it is more appropriate to make well fit patterns than the former method and recent studies on automatic pattern generation have focused on the latter method in if the garment has undevelopable patches mccartney et al tried to develop surfaces using darts and to implement such techniques into pattern generation however full human body data were not easily accessible then that it was difficult to make practical garment patterns recently due to the advancement in non contact measurement technology body data became made on this topic kim et al tried to generate garment patterns by combining the data of body and garment model they also developed an interactive pattern design system using a parametrically deformable body model made from the body scan data however there have been some problems that it is difficult to get the and only the basic patterns can be obtained in this study a garment is divided into two zones one for fit zone and the other for fashion zone the fit zone is modeled by digitizing the body scan data so that it can provide optimum fit as well as the ideal shape of the garment the
the profile and that not all individuals in the same way when we use differing learning approaches and processes in a course and point them out to our students as to how they match with the differing learning styles students can see how we are attempting to address their individual needs when individual students schedule course meetings with us or are struggling to understand an issue in class knowledge of the student s particular learning style modes and preferences helps us respond to them by choosing explanatory approaches and materials tailored to their learning style preferences finally knowledge of the overall learning style profile of classes allows us to make adjustments to our learning approaches as the profile changes from course to course and across semesters we believe that student performance improves as a result of our use of the learning style instruments although we have no empirical data of our own to support that it is clear from the review of the six learning style models we have presented above that their authors believe using learning style instruments to inform the choice of learning activities and approaches will enhance the effectiveness and quality of learning for students our experiences with learning style instruments would reinforce that belief we would therefore offer five propositions diagnostic use of one or more learning style instruments and the subsequent matching learning activities should result in higher levels of adult student satisfaction with the learning in a course diagnostic use of one or more learning style instruments and the subsequent use of matching learning activities should result in higher levels of academic performance by adult students in a course diagnostic use of one or more learning style instruments and the subsequent learning in a course and beyond the course diagnostic use of one or more learning style instruments and the subsequent use of matching learning activities should result in an increase in the ability of adult students to learn in different ways in a course and beyond the course diagnostic use of two or more learning style instruments and the subsequent use of matching learning activities should result in higher levels of of just one learning style instrument we have already suggested coupling learning style instruments to extend the diagnostic range available to both faculty and students we would also like to draw on our extensive use of the gsd since to report on the learning style profile of our evening mba students overall our students favor the cs style followed by cr as and for ar there are only small differences between males and females for three but the men and the women are ar because both authors test strongly for the cs and cr styles we have had more challenges with the ar learners than the others however giving extra attention to conversing with ar learners about their difficulties and what would work for them has made it easier to find ways to connect with them in the larger picture keeping in mind that we need to offer alternative and to use differing learning approaches and activities in class as well as when students use office hour time to clarify issues several examples might be useful we have found that visual learners like to have things written on the board both as text and as diagrams or flow charts we reinforce what we put on the board by speaking it out loud so that the aural learners are satisfied discussions also help the aural learners sequential learners like to work through analyses on a step by by step basis however random or global learners need to see the whole picture before they can see how the steps or parts fit together so presenting an example that illustrates the entire process helps them this includes describing what will happen for the entire semester for the course at the beginning of the course or providing sample articles abstract learners like to see a formula and how to connect the formula to the numbers whereas we have found that concrete learners will the formula and go directly to the numbers which are concrete to them administration of the learning style instruments should take place as close to the beginning of the semester as possible preferably during the first class session for purchased and printed instruments in situations where the faculty member can effectively communicate with the students before the beginning of classes and where web based instruments are chosen faculty should strongly encourage instruments prior to the first class and bring the printed results to class to share with the instructor faculty should also take the instruments share their results and the composite class profile with the students in the course and discuss the results with the students and finally faculty have an opportunity to make a case at their institutions for institution wide administration and use of learning style instruments and information this would allow all faculty to ask provide the results from taking the learning style instruments future research and recommendations we have reviewed and attempted to synthesize only five prominent learning style models and one approaches to studying model in this article there are other learning style models available one avenue for future investigation therefore would be to expand this review to include other learning style models another would be further research on the reliability and validity of the instruments we also believe that the contexts in which learning occurs is important those contexts are within the institution and outside of the institution those two contexts should include the interaction among individuals in the course as well as the interaction of the course and instructor with policies and resources for the program the department and the institution the physical environment and the historical cultural and political background of the country how do these interact with the individual learning style characteristics to enhance or hinder learning individual learning styles are likely to be important but not in isolation of other factors in our review of
benefits of punishing subjects punish more when they are angry however int does not necessitate that blind rage inhibit rational thought processes indeed it is consistent with greater activation in the prefrontal and orbitofrontal cortex in the contrast between punishment in regimes i and ii for however angry a the costs of punishment if the latter comes at a price furthermore does not have to ascribe a causal role to anger as fehr holds it does it could support a number of hypotheses regarding other causes of punishment possibilities include the following a sense of justice motivates subjects to punish with whom might interact in the future causes punishment punishment might be caused by a combination of these factors none of them excludes the possibility that punishment confers satisfaction on a but none necessitates that the conferral of satisfaction be the motive for punishing on the contrary subjects might experience satisfaction as a side effect of punishing while something else causes the punishment because they allow for the possibility that subjects punish for reasons other than considerations of utility for instance if as in iv a desire to benefit others is the cause of a s punishment a s act is altruistic let us pursue this last thought and inquire into its implications if as in possibility iv a s punishment is caused by his desire to benefit doing so might be tempered by the intentions a has toward the person punished for if as case iv assumes a desires to benefit others his desire to punish or harm would give us a mixed act altruistic vis a vis third parties but not toward but if we bracket a s intentions toward let us ask whether it vitiates the altruistic status of a s act if he derives satisfaction from benefiting third parties the answer is no derive this satisfaction that is a must be motivated by the desire to benefit others and not by the desire to feel satisfaction the fact that a derives satisfaction from his act of punishment is not alone sufficient to compromise the altruistic status of the act on this point agrees an action can be altruistic yet increase the subjective utility of the actor a point of this note in fehr writes any voluntary intended act of altruism will have this property fehr thus cannot conceive of actions that do not increase the actor s utility this follows from his view of human motivation that holds that only preferences motivate action and preference based choices always increase altruism in fehr s work but a psychological necessity he ascribes to human beings by conceiving of human motivation thus fehr excludes the possibility of counter preferential choices that is of choices not motivated by preferences and leading to an increase in the actor s subjective utility but of choices motivated by reasons that can override considerations of utility fehr allows for a notion of sympathy that is cases in which one s own welfare for helping others whose welfare affects one s own increases the latter but fehr s view of human motivation excludes commitment that is cases in which one is motivated to act regardless of one s own utility there is however nothing in fehr s experimental data that rules out the idea of counter preferential that excludes the possibility this discussion leads us back to methodological issues in experimental economics for it raises questions about the isolation of causal factors fehr s experimental designs ensure that punishers do not gain financially from punishing and in most cases they ensure that punishment carries a cost for the punisher proponents of the selfishness axiom cannot therefore challenge fehr s work on the ground that punishers are motivated by the financial gain yet fehr cannot exclude other selfish motives for punishing in particular the desire for satisfaction associated with punishing indeed he embraces an explanation of punishment consistent with punishers selfishness this raises the question of whether fehr poses a challenge to the selfishness axiom he poses such a challenge only by ascribing to that axiom a particular content namely that and he convincingly shows that many individuals behave in ways that do not lead to a maximization of personal material gain however if fehr wishes to challenge the model of the self regarding actor he falls short of his goal because he posits a self regarding motive as an explanation of punishment indeed fehr provides a neurological foundation for the model of the self regarding actor which is characteristic of orthodox economics conclusion if fehr s research has shown anything unambiguous it is that people under experimental conditions give up financial remuneration to cooperate with and or to punish others these findings are sufficient to refute the selfishness axiom but only as fehr formulates it the significance of this refutation depends on the significance one accords to the selfishness axiom if discipline adhere to the view that human beings are maximizers of monetary payoffs then fehr s work urges a reconsideration of this view if however one holds as many economists do that human beings are maximizers of expected utility then fehr s work leaves this claim unsullied indeed his work provides neurological second wind to a view that economists have long held self interest for as points out if one cares about other people it may be self interested to sacrifice on their behalf even though it is manifestly non self regarding to do so but whether fehr s work refutes the model of the self regarding human actor depends on one s interpretation of self regard if one interprets self regard as i did in section then it entails that people intentionally act from a regard to themselves are those in which the actor intentionally acts from a regard to others fehr s behavioral approach relegates the import of intentions and hence other regarding actions according to him need involve no intentions on the part of the actor toward others whom the actor s action
we further define definition a tree transformation is called computable if the string function string string is computable in the classical sense up to now we have assumed from our xpath abstraction only the availability of assume the availability of a few more very simple expressions also present in real xpath for any tree variable evaluates to the root of the tree assigned to evaluates to the sequence of all nodes in the store child evaluates to the first child of the context item following sibling evaluates to the immediate right sibling of the context node has no right siblings the constant expression and the expressions and for any value variable which should consist of a single counter if has the maximal counter value then need not be defined and if has value then need not be defined the test yields any nonempty sequence for true and the empty sequence for false and the empty sequence otherwise evaluates to the empty sequence we establish theorem every computable tree transformation can be realized by a program proof we can naturally represent any string s over some finite alphabet as a flat data tree over the same alphabet we denote this flat tree by flattree its root is labeled doc and has children where is the length of s such that the labels of the children spell out the string s there are no other nodes consists of three parts program the transformation flattree show that every turing machine can be simulated by some program working on the flattree representation of strings program the transformation flattree the theorem then follows by composing these three steps where we simulate a turing to pass the intermediate results and using modes to keep the rules from the different programs separate the programs for steps and are shown in figs and figure is given for an alphabet consisting of two letters a and and fig is given for an alphabet consisting of a single letter a it is obvious how to generalize the programs to larger alphabets the real xslt versions are given in the appendix we point out these programs are actually programs so it is only for step of the proof that we need xslt a real xslt implementation of step is provided on the web here we describe the main ideas we can represent a configuration of a turing machine a by two temporary trees left and right at each step variable right holds the content of the tape starting at the head position and ending in the last tape cell variable left holds the reverse of the tape portion left of the head position to keep track of the current state of the machine we use value variables for each state of a such that at each step precisely one of these is nonempty changing the symbol under the head to an a amounts to assigning a new content to right by putting in cons a followed by copies of the nodes in the current content of right where we skip the first one moving the to left by putting in a node labeled with the current symbol followed by copies of the nodes in the current content of left we also assign a new content to right in the now obvious way if we were at the end of the tape we add a new node labeled blank moving the head a cell to the left is simulated analogously the only expressions we need here are the ones we have assumed to be available the transition to be performed and performs that transition we may assume b is programmed in such a way that the final output is produced starting from a designated state in this way we can build up the final output string in a fresh temporary tree and pass it to step computational power of xslt fundamental difference between xslt and is that in expressions are input only defined as follows definition let be a context let the input tree in be then we call input only if every value appearing in is already a value over the store and also is like that by we mean the context so equals where we have input only if for any input only context for which eval is defined we have eval eval and this must be a value over s input tree only in other words input only expressions are oblivious to the temporary trees in the store they only see the input tree we further define definition an input only expression is called polynomial if for each input only definition a program is called if it only uses input only polynomial expressions essentially programs cannot do anything with temporary trees except copy them using t copy statements we note that real xpath expressions are indeed input only and polynomial actually real xpath is much more restricted than that but for our purpose we do not need to assume anything more in order to establish an exponential upper bound on the time complexity of we cannot use an explicit representation of the output tree indeed programs can produce result trees of size doubly exponential in the size of the input tree for example using subsets of input nodes ordered lexicographically as depth counters we can produce a full binary tree of depth from an input tree with nodes obviously a doubly exponentially long output could never be computed in singly exponential time well known trick that is also used in tree transduction and that has recently found new applications in xml formally a dag representation is a collection of trees where trees in can have special leafs which are not labeled and from which a pointer departs to the root of another tree in on condition that the resulting pointer graph is acyclic starting from a designated root tree in we can naturally obtain a tree by unfolding along the pointers an illustration shown in fig we establish theorem let be an
hand if instruction aims at making learners learn rules without awareness but by exposure to examples then the instruction is considered implicit procedures of implicit instruction vary considerably in classrooms for example one method consists of sentence pattern drills without any explicit focus on rules and another presents a given structure in input so that learners will be exposed to the target structure in a meaningful adopt a cognitive approach however implicit instruction typically takes the form of directions to memorize a set of example sentences memorization of exemplars is expected to bring about implicit learning the process of implicit learning through memorization of exemplars can be accounted for in terms of associative learning it is assumed that rules gradually emerge from associations made between co occurring elements in a stock in this view language learning is primarily implicit the above statement on implicit instruction learning however does not deny the role of explicit instruction learning according to ellis implicit learning is an incremental cumulative process that requires learners to experience an enormous number of exemplars repetitively limited it is unlikely that sufficient exemplars can be provided to enable successful implicit learning besides it is possible that implicit learning mechanisms are unavailable for adult learning dekeyser shows that unless adult achieve near native competence he states that the adult learners with implicit learning mechanisms unavailable may have exploited explicit learning mechanisms to induce rules and that only those with high aptitude may have succeeded in doing so thus one can safely state that implicit instruction alone is not efficient or sufficient in efl classrooms for japanese junior high school students who can be regarded as linguistic adults explicit instruction is necessary the issue of how explicit instruction facilitates interlanguage development is often discussed from the perspective of noticing as ellis and schmidt and frota claim explicit instruction contributes indirectly to sll by facilitating noticing which is considered to be a necessary process for learning learners are better able to notice features in the input if they are equipped with the explicit knowledge obtained through instruction long term studies norris and ortega s conclusion that explicit instruction is more effective than implicit instruction has to be interpreted with caution in terms of durability since many of the studies synthesized in their meta analysis are short term studies one cannot definitively say that explicit instruction offers schachter the initial effects of explicit instruction might be lost although long term studies conducted so far are very limited in number several canadian studies in elementary and secondary schools have dealt with the issue of long term effects of instruction and their results are mixed let us review some of them investigated the effect of explicit instruction designed to provide opportunities for immersion learners of french to note the target strutcure the conditional in input and produce it in meaningful situations the results showed that the effectiveness was maintained in the explicit group in a follow up test weeks after the treatment spada and lightbown examined the effect of form focused instruction and corrective feedback on the development of in the oral performance of francophone learners in elementary schools who had little contact with the english outside the classroom in addition to the pretest and two post tests a long term follow up test was given six months after the instructional period the result showed that groups receiving explicit instruction and corrective feedback maintained gains appearing in the immediate post test six months later based on classroom spada and lightbown argue that drawing the learners attention to errors consistently within the context of sustained interaction over an extended time period may have contributed to the maintenance of the effectiveness on the other hand harley and white report discouraging results harley examined the effect of a functional approach to grammar teaching in immersion schools with respect to the learning of the french imparfait and pass compos experimental classes were provided with focused input to raise awareness of the form function relations on the target structures and with opportunities to produce them in meaningful contexts findings indicated that outperformed the control classes immediately after the treatment but that the differences between the two groups disappeared three months later white conducted an experimental study on the effectiveness of explicit instruction of adverb placement with francophone learners of english who had little contact with the english outside the classroom results showed that explicit instruction with provision of negative evidence was effective until at while provision of positive input alone was insufficient the follow up test one year later however revealed that the effectiveness of explicit instruction was not preserved although we cannot offer a definitive explanation for the mixed results of the above studies it seems reasonable to suppose that the durability issue may depend on whether learners are exposed to further exemplars after the treatment the two studies of francophone learners of english discussed above spada and lightbown and white differ markedly in terms of sustained explicit instruction and error correction in white s study the subjects did not receive subsequent explicit instruction or error correction on the target structure after the treatment white infers that this lack of follow up instruction may have caused the failure to retain the effect of instruction in her study on the other hand spada and lightbown conducted a one year longitudinal study with francophone learners of english living in quebec communities where there are few opportunities for contact with the english learners output in terms of frequency and accuracy of ing the oral data from the learners were obtained three times from grade to grade the data show that a dramatic decline in frequency and accuracy of the use of ing was observed between the first data collection and the second and that the learner s performance of ing did not
irradiation while desorption is a secondary effect due to collision of hot atoms against ad molecules in this case considering the experimentally observed ev threshold it seems indeed that oxygen organizes on pt in superoxo clusters with molecules in the peroxo state located at their perimeter apparently photodepletion proceeds from the cluster edges thus suggesting that only the minority peroxide species is photochemically active while the superoxo moiety is depleted indirectly the former oxygen moiety should be continuously electrons of the molecules the alternative indirect process is substrate mediated this model suggests that pt electrons are excited into the lowest empty states this new electronic distribution is not thermalized and creates a temporary anion such a complex has a different bond length and a shorter surface distance with respect to the neutral molecule so it the neutral molecule may find itself in a repulsive region of the potential energy surface and thus undergo desorption or dissociation the indirect substrate mediated mechanism seems to be supported by results on photodesorption from pt induced by femtosecond laser pulses and by co photo oxidation experiments performed with polarized the photodepletion process indeed tripa and yates do not offer a unique interpretation to their data but several different pictures which may explain them as a general consideration they underline that chemisorbed at the steps has a higher binding energy with respect to at planes and it is thus expected to have also a different structure closer to a peroxo species this assumption for step by hreels to be compared to the one of of terrace and the one of measured for peroxide for analogy with the photochemistry on pt step would have therefore a higher probability to dissociate since it resembles more the photoactive peroxide state three different possible explanations for the enhancement of photodepletion in presence of steps are suggested and depletion at step sites due to the weakened bond an indirect substrate mediated process may favor charge transfer at step molecules due to the stronger adsorbate metal coupling at the defect the special electronic structure of the steps favors a longer lifetime of excited electrons thus enhancing the photodepletion efficiency through an indirect mechanism involving hot electrons that for the system were obtained also on the far less reactive ag surfaces for which we demonstrated that the presence of steps opens up little or non activated dissociative adsorption channels furthermore for open steps we found easy access to subsurface sites and intense spectroscopic signals related to subsurface oxygen which for its very nature is particularly difficult subsurface interstitials was performed mainly by comparison between spectroscopy and dft results oxygen interaction with ag surfaces was investigated thoroughly in the past searching for the moiety active in the ethylene epoxidation reaction such process is catalysed by ag powders with a unique selectivity with respect to the alternative channel of total combustion and occurs routinely in under controlled uhv conditions its elementary steps are still unclear and the active oxygen species has escaped identification so far most likely some kind of atomic oxygen is involved in the reaction since ethylene epoxide is produced also in absence of molecular oxygen and since selectivity levels higher than the limit expected if were the only reactive species were reported in this frame osub was oxygen adatoms with the ethylene indeed subsurface species were often suggested to be responsible for the activation of catalyst surfaces for particular reactions and ag is intriguing in this respect since oxygen permeates easily through ag crystals besides ethylene epoxidation osub is invoked in several other catalytic processes eg in the partial oxidation of methanol to formaldehyde and in the the active role of subsurface and or of dissolved oxygen in ethylene epoxide production has recently been questioned but the contrasting literature on this topic demonstrates that the issue is highly controversial in this frame the role of defects for the interaction is particularly intriguing since the system is known to be structure and to favor surface relaxation leading to subsurface migration of the atoms oxygen interaction with stepped ag surfaces was investigated by our group combining several techniques the adsorption dynamics was studied using the king and wells method while the final adsorption state was characterized by hreels and xps after a thorough investigation of the consist respectively of and atom row wide nanoterraces alternated to like monoatomic step rises and show therefore an open step profile with a of under coordinated sites the choice of such geometry was guided by the suggestion gained in previous adsorption experiments on flat and sputtered ag that kinks are indeed the active sites for dissociation moreover ag upon massive exposure ie it is expected to be closer to the real surface structure under atmospheric conditions more recently also ag consisting of alternated and nanoterraces was investigated to highlight the difference between open and closed packed steps finally we mention that some induced faceting was reported also for vicinal ag surfaces at rt for a review on the the dynamics of oxygen adsorption as a first striking indication of the role of open steps in the adsorption process at low we show in fig the outcome of two kw experiments performed exposing the ag surface at to an smb with the e ev in both cases the beam hits the terraces at but it impinges normal and grazing under identical conditions and indicate that on ag the reactivity is increased at steps and strongly reduced at terraces while the higher step reactivity is expected due to the smaller coordination of step atoms the reduced activity at terrace sites or their poisoning close to the step edges assuming for the terrace atoms and weighting the difference between the two curves of fig with respect to the projected area of terraces and steps seen by the beam we obtain for molecules impinging normally against the step heights for a more systematic analysis of the adsorption dynamics surfaces at panel shows for normal and grazing incidence on the step heights on
execution phases show a good learning rate the cause of failures is only related to learning the use of the prosthetic hand and it does not seem to depend on the achille interface as a final remark it is worth observing that the execution times of the experimental trials are compatible with the time required for the execution of the same tasks by able bodied persons in normal conditions and with their own as the most advanced interface currently available for limb prostheses in clinical applications the results obtained with ten able bodied subjects show that the effectiveness of the foot interface is typically higher than the emg based control the most evident result however is that the foot interface is much easier to learn emg based control requires an accurate calibration for setting the proper force levels to associate selected muscle contractions to hand functions in the experimental trials presented here only three subjects out of ten could complete the learning phase with the emg based control on the other side the prototype of foot interface validated here does not require previous adaptation to the subject all subjects could complete the training phase successfully and could choose the best association of the switches select successfully the eight possible switch configurations in conclusion all the technical requirements have been achieved and validated further investigation on the proposed foot interface will include the complete assessment of more subjective factors like usability acceptability pleasure of use and cognitive issues related to the use of such interfaces the application of the same foot interface for the control of other of heat and mass two phase flow in converging and diverging microchannels with bubbles produced by chemical reactions abstract the present study investigates experimentally the evolution of two phase flow pattern and pressure drop in the converging and diverging silicon based microchannels with mean hydraulic diameter of lm and bubbles produced by chemical reactions of sulfuric acid and sodium bicarbonate three different concentrations of and mol of each reactant at the inlet before mixing and different flow rates from to are studied flow visualization is made possible by using a high speed digital camera it is found that the present design of the microchannel with the inlet chamber results in much more intensive chemical reactions in the diverging microchannel than that in the converging one the void fractions at the exit regions and pressure drop through the channel are also measured the results reveals that the presence of small void fraction channel irrespective of the channel is converging or diverging indicating the agitation effects of bubbly flow in the microchannel the increase of inlet concentration of reactants does not increase the pressure drop in the converging microchannel significantly while the inlet concentration presents significant but mild effects on the pressure drop in but mild effects on the pressure drop in the diverging microchannel the two phase frictional multiplier may be positively correlated with the mean void fraction in the channel linearly and the data agree well with predictions from the correlations in the literature introduction of methanol in the anode area will however inevitably generate carbon dioxide and the removal of bubbles is of critical concern for the development of a micro dmfc the bubbles may result in the blockage of the anode structure and significantly influence the performance of a micro dmfc studied air water two phase flow pressure drop in minichannels triplett et al investigated air water two phase flow patterns void fraction and two phase flow pressure drop in minichannels chen et al investigated experimentally nitrogen water twophase flow pattern bubble speed and void fraction in a glass capillary using a high speed video measured the void fraction can be determined accurately according to its basic definition stanley et al studied two phase flow of water and gas in rectangular microchannels serizawa et al explored air water two phase flow in circular tubes of and lm several distinctive flow patterns were reported and the flow pattern was found to be sensitive on water nitrogen two phase flow in circular microchannels of and lm diameters fu and pan explored experimentally the two phase flow with bubbles generated by the chemical reactions of sulfuric acid and sodium bicarbonate in a rectangular microchannel with uniform cross section the flow pattern transition instability between bubbly slug due to acceleration or deceleration effects transport of bubbles in a converging or diverging microchannel may be significantly different from that in a microchannel with uniform cross section lin et al reported the bubble movement in a short diverging microchannel they attributed the movement of the bubble to a large cross section to the interfacial tension force hwang et al explored the twophase mean hydraulic diameters of and lm respectively two phase flow patterns and pressure drop in converging and diverging microchannels were investigated they found that the acceleration effect and so the steep pressure gradient in a converging microchannel may result in the elongation of bubbles in slug flow while the deceleration effect and so the possible pressure microchannel the collision and merger of two consecutive bubbles may take place and result in twisting of bubbles following the work of hwang et al the present study investigates experimentally the two phase flow characteristics in a converging or diverging microchannel with bubbles generated by chemical reactions of sulfuric acid and sodium bicarbonate the transport phenomena of bubble in a micro dmfc than that of hwang et al meng et al employed the same chemical reaction to produce bubbles in a stagnant system to study the removal of bubbles the chemical reaction will take place in the microchannel while the reactant solutions flow through it and results influence on the two phase flow characteristics in the converging or diverging microchannel may result in interesting two phase flow phenomena such two phase flow phenomena with volumetric generation of bubble formation may have significant implication for the bubble transport in a micro dmfc moreover the difference in chemical
is we can say that therefore the final state can be written in the following form disentangled state rft where note that t represents the atomic inversion as one can see it is unlikely to express the sums in the above equations in a closed form however for reasonably large value of ni direct numerical evaluations can be performed rigorous derivation in the previous section we derived the two level model with nonlinear medium applying jr jf idmn for however in the present section we rigorously derive the degree of entanglement due to mutual entropy in the two level system without the above approximation under the assumptions and the final state can be written as follows where where then the von neumann entropy for the reduced state rft is computed by where lf are the solutions of in eq and are matrices having the following elements on the other hand the final state of the atomic system is given by taking partial trace over the field system of entanglement from and three level case the results obtained in section will be applied in this section to derive the entanglement degree for a single three level system without using the diagonal approximation method adapted in ref if we consider the atomic initial state is given by the total system is given by taking the partial trace over the atomic system we obtain where we have used the initial condition for the atomic state we use these results to discuss various aspects of the subject then the von neumann entropy for the reduced state rft is computed by state of the atomic system is given by taking partial trace over the field system where ii are given by and yi are given by where exp ite nm ij exp it then the von neumann entropy for the reduced state rat is computed by allows us to study the entanglement degree of the system and convert from pure states into mixed states which is crucial for many applications in quantum optics physics and computing as one can see it is unlikely to express the sums in the above equations in a closed form however for reasonably large value of direct numerical evaluations can be performed it should be noted that at a special choice of the parameters bi such as in the upper state the final state of the system becomes the pure entangled state therefore it is sufficient to use von neumann entropy in order to measure the degree of entanglement for the above cases then entanglement degree takes just twice the reduced von neumann entropy ie ie rat rft rat entanglement in the present model thus our initial setting enable us to discuss the variation of the entanglement degree for different values of the parameter of the initial atomic system we find that the maximum value of the entanglement in this case is given by ie rat rft a physical resource is available on the condition that the entanglement could keep long enough so that we can accomplish some task for example in order to generate the entanglement atomic state the entanglement between the ion and the laser field must survive long enough at this point the increasingly longer period entanglement has some advantages although some authors use another method to prepare multi particle entanglement the longer period entanglement is available a in bi therefore dramatically alters the entanglement it should be noted that at a special choice of the ion field coupling the situation becomes interesting in this case we find that the nonlinear three level system with an initially coherent fields exhibits superstructures instead of the first order revivals resembling those manifested by the standard three level system level system three level system when the system starts from its mixed state this result could be utilized to be used for any level system in this case eq can be generalized as to go a step further towards a deterministic quantum mutual entropy we note a peculiar effect in the present paper we get more correlations with increasing here we focus on the time development of the quantum mutual entropy for some special cases such as three four and five level atoms in fig we plot the function ie rat rft which describes the quantum mutual entropy in the case when the field is initially in a coherent state with a mean photon number and the mixed state parameters in this case we see that ie rat rft oscillates around values nearly can say that the maximum value of ie rat rft is increased as the number of levels is increased nevertheless the minimum values lie within the region between the two maximum values occurring in a similar way for different number of levels such that with higher the minimum values of the quantum mutual entropy occur at earlier times in fact for some higher values of there were no persisting periods found to lie between the maximum and minimum values these results that the higher number of levels give higher mutual entropy as well as more oscillations in fig we consider the quantum mutual entropy as a function of the scaled time with the field initially in a fock state the fock state of the electromagnetic field is very difficult to produce in experiments nevertheless these states are very important in quantum optics because of their intrinsic quantum nature this case is quite interesting because the quantum mutual entropy function oscillates around the maximum and minimum values as time goes on we have shown here a new phenomena where the periodic oscillations occur irrespective of number of atomic levels involved this reflects the various influences of the initial states of the field a slight change in therefore dramatically alters the quantum mutual entropy it should be noted that for a special choice of the initial state setting the situation becomes interesting where we find that a higher multi interacting with an initially coherent field
the cases very small probabilities were obtained for multitraffic environment cell residence rates of r and for voice data and multimedia traffic are considered in figs and the state of the cell under both low and high mobility conditions is given by ni for voice data and multimedia traffic respectively as expected it can be seen from the figures that as the new call igher priority value needs to be assigned to handoff calls in order to adhere to the blocking probability alternatively the cell residence rate can be increased so that more channels become available thereby reducing the combined blocking probability conclusions valuable insight into the development of ngmn a lot of work is still necessary in areas of open research these include energy efficient multimode terminal development session and personal mobility consideration alongside terminal mobility dimensioning of both the radio and the core network within the ngmn framework standardization of the interworking introduced into the existing systems and promote interoperability within the hierarchical framework independent and simultaneous monitoring of chromatic and polarization mode dispersion in ook and dpsk transmission abstract we propose and demonstrate a novel technique for a simultaneous chromatic and first order polarization mode dispersion monitoring method using a partial bit delay mach zehnder interferometer with radio frequency clock tone monitoring rf clock tones at the output of the two branches of the mzi behave oppositely with increasing chromatic dispersion which improves the tone methods by a factor of two for a nonreturn to zero intensity modulation format and a factor of five for a differential phase shift keying modulation format the accuracy of pmd monitoring is also enhanced moreover the partial bit delay allows the signal to pass through the constructive branch of the mzi with no observable degradation of the signal quality allowing it to be normally sources of signal degradations is a laudable goal for stable and robust optical communication systems such optical performance monitoring could enable networks to efficiently diagnose and compensate deleterious effects key degrading effects that a network operator may want to monitor include chromatic dispersion and polarization mode dispersion several approaches have been proposed in the literature to monitor cd and to monitor cd cd monitoring technique based on phase sensitive detection using a dispersion biased radio frequency clock tone to monitor cd using an optical delay and add filter to monitor cd and using equalized carrier sideband filtering to monitor degree of polarization based pmd cd regenerated clock tone fading for pmd monitoring however all of these techniques either some reports have presented both cd and pmd monitoring using polarization modulation and asynchronous amplitude histogram evaluation but require more than one monitoring technique one simple and cost effective approach for performance monitoring is to measure the rf power in the clock tone using a narrowband electrical filter and a power meter this method can be used to track accumulation of either cd or pmd monitoring given that both the effects will have an influence on the clock tone power we propose and demonstrate a technique that simultaneously monitors and isolates cd and first oder pmd for nonreturn to zero on off keying and differential phase shiftkeying signals we monitor the rf clock tone power at the output ports of an unbalanced mach zehnder delay line interferometer of the dli grows with an increase in cd and with a decrease in pmd whereas the clock power from the destructive port grows with a decrease in both cd and pmd by appropriately adding and subtracting the constructive and destructive clock powers we can simultaneously derive the individual contributions of cd and first order pmd while increasing the sensitivity to db for ook and by db for dpsk over standard clock tone monitoring we also demonstrate cd insensitive pmd monitoring over ps with an average sensitivity of db ps for both ook and dpsk ii background theory we use a dli similar to that in from itf laboratories in the constructive deconstructive arm and both dli outputs are utilized in the monitoring process as illustrated in fig the response in the constructive port is essentially transparent to the signal due to the high free spectral range the destructive output of the dli is a return to zero signal with a strong rf clock tone present inside the dli the for the other of the bit period resulting in rz pulses as illustrated in fig the bit time value was chosen as a reasonable tradeoff between constructive port penalty for data detection and destructive port pulse carving for monitoring as illustrated in fig the clock tones on the two outputs of the bit delay dli are dependent on dispersion and cd spreads the input pulses in time thereby lowering the peak power in the output rz pulses and therefore the clock tone power the dephasing effect of pmd on the clock tone reduces its intensity utilization of this feature allows isolation and simultaneous measurement of cd and pmd the monitoring can be loosely conceptualized by the two functions power at the destructive arm which decreases with both cd and pmd the inverse relationship allows for removal of the pmd in the subtraction and cd in the addition thereby isolating both the effects this also has the added property of increasing the sensitivity of the cd measurement unfortunately this method is not appropriate for rz type formats since they already have strong clock tone power and do not benefit from experimental demonstration was performed using the setup of fig optical fibers were used to vary dispersion and a pmd emulator to vary dgd the transmission peak of the interferometer was easily adjusted by maximizing power in the constructive arm or minimizing power in the destructive arm figs and illustrate simulation and experimental results of the change in clock tone power versus dispersion at the constructive two
term in the utility function of the rich is that they separately care about the health of the poor either because they are specific altruists who attach special significance to the health of the poor perhaps because of a paternalistic concern that does not respect the preferences of the poor themselves externalities related to public health provide another possible rationale for the inclusion of the health status of the poor in the utility function of the rich our general specification allows for any combination of these considerations in any case the utility of the rich household depends indirectly on the state s policy parameters since these determine indirectly its own consumption of the private good the expected utility of the poor and their health status state and federal fiscal policies and health benefits for the poor represented by the policy parameters it incurs expenditures for both of these programs which may be partially compensated by transfers from the federal government its expenditures net of such transfers must be financed from taxes on the rich household let denote any lump sum transfers from the the federal to the state government in support of either program and let gb and gm represent the proportions of state cash and health benefit outlays paid by the federal government through matching grants the state government budget constraint can then be written kn pmm ts the federal government finances its transfers to states subject to this constraint how are these policies the first is that the state policies are selected so as to maximize the utility of the rich household for example because taxpayers are more numerous and are decisive in electoral competitions that is the state government chooses to maximize ur substituting from the state government budget constraint into the budget constraint of the rich household this means that the state government solves the problem max xr eup subject to xr wr tf kn pmm as an alternative we could postulate that the public policies chosen by a state reflect the interests of different groups including the poor as well as the rich the rich may exhibit no general altruism toward the poor at all caring only about their own private good consumption as well as any public health the externalities associated with the health status of the poor any model of the political process that produces policies that maximize a function that depends positively on the variables for instance many probabilistic voting models in which contending politicians maximize their probability of election or their expected plurality would be formally isomorphic to one in which policies are chosen to maximize the welfare of a rich household with general and specific altruism toward the poor and their health so that equilibrium policies can be characterized as solutions to the constrained optimization problem to economize on words the discussion to follow does not explicitly refer to this second interpretation but statements about the preferences of the rich household could be rephrased in terms of the as if preferences of politicians induced by a probabilistic voting model to the formal analysis it is important to note that if the rich household only cares about the welfare of the poor and not about their health there will be no special benefit attached to the provision of health care benefits whereas the converse is true if the rich household does not care at all about the welfare of the poor under either of these specifications only one type of transfer program would exist in equilibrium and the model cannot be used to analyze an economy in which both types of programs exist comparative statics analysis there are two levels of comparative statics analysis that we must consider the first concerns the response of poor households to changes in state level cash and health benefits policies these impacts must be analyzed because they enter into the determination of state level policies as described by problem above the second level of comparative statics concerns the response of state policies the the choices of the policy parameters to changes in intergovernmental fiscal transfers on the part of the federal government the details of the comparative statics analysis are largely relegated to appendix a the main results are summarized here in order to focus on the role of relative price changes facing consumers and state policymakers some of the main results below are derived under the assumption that households have quasi linear preferences so that perverse income effects can be ruled out the effect of state policies on poor households the state policy parameter affects all poor households both those that are healthy and those that are sick because cash transfers are not conditioned on health status on the other hand the generosity of state health benefits represented by the parameter only affects those households who have poor health since for healthy households the following results which follow from standard consumer theory are used in the sequel proposition if the all purpose good and health status are non inferior goods then an increase in cash benefits increases consumption of the all purpose good by all poor households and of health care by the sick and increases the expected utility of the poor an increase in reduces consumption of health care by sick households and the expected utility of all poor households the policy parameter determines the relative price of health care for the poor since sick households are worse off than healthy ones poor households face risk in particular subsidized health care for the poor not only increases their consumption of health care by lowering its relative price it also transfers resources to the poor households who are least well off and in this way it serves an important insurance function in order to clarify the intuition of the results to follow it is follow it is sometimes helpful to focus on a limiting case the preferences of poor households are quasi linear in consumption of the all purpose good up xp where is strictly
represent a minor part of overall trading activity as the calibrations induce significant information revelation impulse responses to one shocks in fd and fb pt is the euf is investors forecast error on the business cycle factor cu is net purchases of the local stocks by investors rd is the local excess stock return and eu rd is investors time expectation of the time local excess stock return for the model to account for return chasing and for the observed trading volume consider a positive realization of fb investors expected off market returns increase and with asset substitutability investors sell the local stock depressing its price there is another induced effect indeed as price fall they believe that fd may have moved and end up underestimating the state of the business cycle a lower expectation of dividends induces them to sell and puts further downward pressure on the price the price response to an off market shock is thus clearly negative for quantities the risksharing trades generated by the asset substitutability override the disagreement trades the latter are smaller since the shock does not generate a lot of disagreement but contribute volume nonetheless figure shows that investors forecast error is small while investors forecast error is equal to zero since they observe the shock overall the off market shock leads investors to sell as stock prices fall thus working against return chasing as the shock persists and fb increases investors learn the nature of the shock and the forecast error is reduced however flows as investors buy following low returns the shock also generates negative covariance of lagged returns and flows momentum in the expected off market return is necessary in order to quantitatively match flow persistence in most of the countries to explore this issue we have re calibrated france with an ar process for the off market factor with the same first order serial correlation as in the original calibration is still positive but significantly below the estimate from the data at the same time the model can qualitatively generate flow momentum even when the off market factor is not present at all this is illustrated by the case of japan where bb for the case of italy the model matches persistence quantitatively even though bb is small the variance decomposition of cov an increase in dividends is thus as likely to have come from a persistent business cycle shock as from a transitory dividend shock as a result there is a lot of imperfect information in the italian market that entails persistent forecast errors however trades driven by a transitory shock are as investors correct their forecast errors since transitory shocks generate negative serial correlation in flows too large a contribution from these shocks would prevent the model from matching persistence this is why our calibration procedure finds the other two shocks to be relatively more important reversal of trades also generates positive correlation of net purchases with lagged returns while we do not target this moment directly in the calibration the limited role shocks is important for the success of our model along this dimension transitory links in the baseline model discussed so far we have maintained the assumption that transitory shocks to off market returns and dividends are uncorrelated that is there are no transitory links the results show that dependence of expected off market returns on the business cycle or bd is sufficient for generating the stylized facts however the baseline model generates too return chasing for france the contemporaneous correlation is too high in this section we show that the model performance can be improved further with transitory links in particular however we also show that correlation of persistent shocks is necessary a model with only transitory links cannot generate the stylized facts to assess the contribution of transitory links we recalibrate the model for france using the contemporaneous correlation of an additional target we obtain population parameters hu and and the return parameters satisfy bd fd bb fb and at these parameter values the model replicates the results in table but also yields a significant improvement the main qualitative difference to the baseline investors to quickly infer the nature of shocks the response to any shock thus becomes more persistent since learning only gradually resolves disagreement this is the key to improved quantitative performance indeed in the baseline calibration persistence must be explained to a much greater extent by risk sharing trades following a business cycle shock but such trades are accompanied by pay off effects that generate a lot of return chasing with transitory links the of off market expected returns on the business cycle is weaker bd fd drops to in the new calibration disagreement trades ensure that the model can still account for persistence but return chasing is now much lower are transitory links enough to check whether transitory links are sufficient for generating the stylized facts we again recalibrate the model for france in addition to allowing off market returns on the business cycle bd we also assume that investors observe the local business cycle factor fd in terms of information and correlation of shocks the set up now mimics that in wang however in contrast to wang s model we retain the distribution of fundamentals from our baseline model so that the transitory links model can match observed the calibration procedure targets the same moments as in the baseline case however we to find bd but instead seek to determine the new free parameter the transitory links model can account for us holdings in france the volatility of us investors net purchases and flow persistence however it cannot match observed trading volume jointly with those three moments at any parameter values we focus on the parameter vector that generates the highest mean volume which is still only mean gross purchases are then are hu and whereas the parameters of the off market return process are bb fb for the non calibrated moments we have and the transitory
on the first point the way the bcsc uses industry learning both connects its regulatory agenda with and distinguishes its regulatory agenda from compatible compliance generating forces beyond regulation according to sandy jakab manager of policy for the capital markets division of the mandatory in fact the bcsc prefers the term good practices to best practices mindful that the latter can be misunderstood in the context of a light touch regulatory approach jakab notes that in the context of the bcsc s role in setting minimum standards good practices are those methods that work to achieve the minimum standard most consistently most efficiently and with minimal risk jakab emphasizes that if in a particular firm s practices automatically translated into a heightened process based regulatory expectation across the board a pure best practices approach would also fall prey to potentially adverse firm on firm competitive effects according to jakab the bcsc s view is that one size will not fit all in setting regulatory standards and that regulators must be sensitive to the costs of any new regulatory words the most state of the art and highest and perhaps the most comprehensive and elaborate practices being used by industry leadersfis available to be put forward by other stakeholders such as industry associations and trade councils according to jakab industry councils and trade associations have a central role to play in articulating best practices standards but it is not the place of the regulator to rank practices as sharing information on those practices that have been shown to work in achieving regulatory significantly by reconciling light touch regulation and the desire for effective and improving standards the notion of best practices becomes bifurcated between regulator and other third parties the bcsc explicitly recognizes the role of other forces social reputational economic and legal that go into ensuring that firms remain law abiding stry based good or best practices experience to disseminate learning about effective means for achieving regulatory goals the bcsc is neither the overseer nor the repository for all industry by tying its approach to industry best practices and establishing an ongoing dialogic relationship between its regulatory requirements and other standard setting bodies regulatory action becomes an organic piece of constantly moving innovating industry action bcsc s industry derived information on best practices may appear in guidance but not in actual rules the account supervision case also illustrates the connection between rolling good or best practices and outcome oriented administrative action that is the more basic reason that best practices are not the subject of official notice and comment rule making is that an outcome based system practice the model s principles based and outcome oriented approach seeks by definition to avoid prescribing process indeed for this reason an outcome based regulatory approach is the essential underpinning for making use of good or best practices in principles based regulation outcome oriented practice presumes that there may be more than one path to an acceptable compliance goal thereby reconciling its best practices approach with its lighttouch outstanding questions british columbia has claimed that its principles based and outcome oriented approach is more flexible more capable of learning from experience and better at safeguarding investor interests all while still minimizing unnecessary costs to industry with respect to compliance for example the aim has been to move away from a technical and literal checklist style approach to regulatory mandates toward something more underlying regulatory goals the idea behind outcome oriented regulation is that the securities regulator should not be policing technical rule violations and industry should not be primarily concerned with technical compliance both regulator and industry should be focused on achieving good regulatory results on important issues in the most efficient manner even an optimist would agree however that challenges exist the governance approaches to regulation and public service provision as such cautionary tales from other new governance style experiments such as the ones emerging from the no child left behind act in the united states are the decentralized pragmatic information based and participatory structures that new governance uses to produce continually ratcheting standards of performance are vulnerable to many familiar regulatory of credible enforcement and a potential misfit between means and ends in the same way making principles based securities regulation in british columbia work and enabling it to leverage all the advantages of a new governance regime means paying careful attention to context the model is promising and noteworthy because new governance style securities regulation opens the possibility of thoroughgoing relationship between regulator and industry however making those changes stick requires that catalysts for change be embedded in institutional arrangements there is more work to be done before one should venture to say whether principles based and outcome oriented securities regulation in general and the model in particular operates on the ground in a way that can move industry compliance forward in for pursuing those questions as part of a broader research agenda the following sections flag two issues in particular that deserve closer attention first firm incentives to innovate in compliance practices and second the problem of varied firm capacity to operate effectively under a principles based regime with special attention to using a hybrid rules and principles approach cope provisional responses to these challenges including a proposal for regulatory tripartism are developed below a firm incentives to innovate according to stephen bland director for small firms at the fsa his agency is approached with some frequency to sign off under its principles based approach on a firm s assessment of the compliance bona fides of new business products the wholesale market in particular is a sector that to issue innovative products and business practices the banks and private firms that regularly develop new structured finance products for sale into the wholesale market are likely to be among the most sophisticated of market players they are the market actors most likely to have the capacity to work effectively within a principles based system to seek the competitive advantages offered
and forms and a set of values that support this these frameworks stand in contrast to the hierarchical norms embodied in statutory organizations and in some cases a combination of hierarchical and flat organizational forms has developed due to the shift towards partnership working hybridization occurs when different organizations collaborate on projects such as hiv or community safety work the projects and the inter agency forged around these issues seem to develop their own organizational culture this seems to consist typically of a mixture of professional norms drawn from players experiences of working in statutory or voluntary agencies and radical pluralist or liberal norms concerning sexuality and gender for example in one case the community safety forum was more radical concerning sexuality than any of the statutory agencies that methods of working this forum worked with the police the local authority and the general public in organizing conferences and the mardi gras the institutional field that developed was different to anything previously found in that locality one community member described the changes as amazing whilst a police contributor discussed a turnaround in the attitudes of community members from hostile to collaborative this process does not closely coupled norms as the norms of the two groups were initially different and in conflict hybridization in the area of sexualities equalities governance seems to center overall around the development of shared norms concerning support for lgb people and communities notions of inclusion and equality and the professionalization of community activism it appears to be a useful complement to the new institutionalist concepts of institutional norms fields coupling decoupling however there are some difficulties associated with the notion of hybridization some of these relate to broader issues concerning partnership working as described in the literature ruchmer and pallis describe difficulties with the blurring of boundaries in partnership working while malley in a study of community engagement in partnerships found that there was a complex interaction partnership working davies in a study of regeneration partnerships found that partnerships are unstable ensembles where values clash interests differ state centered hierarchies persist similarly one of my interviewees referred to the irregular heartbeat of the partnership she was involved in as new institutional frameworks were negotiated across organizational boundaries and cultures findings these difficulties a few community members discussed difficulties with staff attrition and restructuring in the statutory sector which meant that the partnerships were unstable and importantly one of the norms of inter agency working appeared to be implicit acknowledgement of power differentials conflicts tended to be brushed over when they erupted as in the case of one london borough where requests from the community members were made via a community subdued by framing them as inappropriate and outside the remit of the forum overall the idea of institutional hybridization could lend itself to a homogenized model of institutional cultures whereas in reality a range of organizational fields overlap coalesce and fragment institutional hybridization appears to be related to close coupling between norms including those held by individuals where there are divergences in grouping or network takes place or work is blocked for instance in one authority a lgb forum was successful in bringing about some changes in the local authority stance and provision hybridization was apparent in the joint approach to different issues taken by the lgb forum for instance the forum tackled another agency because they withheld a large amount of hiv designated funding from the gay community this involved a shared sense of the validity this forum was attended by a councillor who was proactive concerning lgb equalities his values concerning lgb equality matched those of the community members fairly closely when he was replaced by a councillor who was uncomfortable with lgb issues the effect of the forum was minimized in another case conflicts emerged in a mardi gras committee due to concerns about the council s stance and local business support for the event usually appears to assume that organizations are discrete entities with distinct of networks and inter agency partnerships could appear to pose difficulties for notions of organizational boundaries however an examination of the data indicates that a number of aspects of new institutionalism have considerable purchase in relation to theorizing networks and partnerships templates and providing in some cases the glue that holds governance systems together the idea of templates as opposed to different organizations or professional bodies provides a way of analyzing the diffuse network based systems that are characteristic of governance templates can be used to explain why certain organizations collaborate effectively and others conflict and the ways in which players act strategically to lock their or influence the new institutionalist models of conflict and change also appear to have relevance to the field of governance notions of the loose and tight coupling of templates as a factor affecting change are supported by the data however the use of new institutionalism in understanding governance must be tempered by the use of other types of analysis particularly those that more directly address the power dynamics and inequalities misattribution in virtual groups the effects of member distribution on self serving bias and partner blame joseph natalya interest in virtual groups has focused on attribution biases due to the collocation or distribution of partners no previous research examines self attributions in virtual groups yet self attributions the acknowledgment of personal responsibility or its deflection potentially determines learning and improvement this study reviews this study reviews research on attributions in virtual groups and the effects of distance on members proclivity to blame others or themselves an experiment involved groups whose members were geographically collocated distributed or mixed working over weeks exclusively using asynchronous computer mediated communication attributions for participants own poor performance reflected a self serving bias in completely distributed groups whose members blamed their partners more than in collocated groups mixed groups results help distinguish among competing theoretical perspectives moreover an externally imposed observational goal mitigated attributional bias among distributed members by raising awareness of the sociotechnical effects of communication
compare samples with the same grain size in many cases the mudstone and sandstone samples from this study show near to identical end values on either matter and fe mn oxyhydroxides absorb dissolved nd from the ambient sea water and therefore have nd isotopic compositions that reflect equilibration with sea water consequently samples with a high proportion of authigenic material will have nd isotopic compositions unrepresentative of the bulk sediment preventing extraction in ferromanganese for this study samples were first leached using hcl to remove the biogenic authigenic fractions a minor authigenic component organic matter and authigenic opal may remain in the residues but the modal ce ce an index of authigenic sediment proportion defined as where cen lan and prn are normalized values are all close to unity when normalized to mean continental crustal values together this evidence shows that any contribution from authigenic nd must be low tectonic setting source evolution and and upper miocene to quaternary samples from the ying qiong basin plot in the passive continental margin field in contrast samples from the oligocene to middle miocene plot in the field of active continental margins in this study for sedimentary provenance samples from the nanxiong basin and upper miocene to pleistocene samples of the ying qiong basin plot in the quartzose sedimentary provenance whilst samples from oligocene to middle miocene of the ying qiong basin plot in the felsic igneous provenance to quartzose sedimentary provenance discrimination diagrams and geochemical signatures such as th sc la sc th cr th co and eu eu ratios of the clays in the nanxiong basin have typical continental signatures and show a similar range of values across the depositional age ranging from late cretaceous to early eocene in contrast the oligocene to pleistocene sedimentary during the miocene the ratios of the oligocene yacheng formation lower part of meishan formation sedimentary rocks are higher than those of the upper part of meishan formation pleistocene ledong sedimentary rocks suggesting a higher proportion of felsic material in their source area in addition to a marked shift in element ratios and changes in source indicated by the miocene as discussed earlier whilst chemically immobile high field stress element ratios of clastic sediments can be used as tracers of sediment source the method is limited by potential effects from non chemical processes such as hydraulic sorting for the coarse sedimentary rocks in the ying qiong basin this might lead to a unaffected by grain size differences clift et al and li et al recently reported nd isotopic analyses for samples at odp site which is located on the distal passive margin of south china these nd isotopic results are slightly different from similar age samples measured in this study from nearby but different basins the china block sources in contrast the study of li et al shows an abrupt change in nd isotopic results between ca and ma considered to represent a switch in source from the south west to a northern source from ca ma onwards the ratios reported by clift et al are ca analysed the bulk aluminosilicate fraction li et al attributed these differences to the analysis of different sediment size fractions and the relative proportion of authigenic clay in the analysed fractions the results from the ying qiong basin show a similar pattern to that reported by clift et al and li et al aluminosilicate fraction results reported by li et al but are also higher than the clay fraction results reported by clift et al the higher ratios measured in this study cannot be explained by analysis of different sediment size fractions instead it seems more probable that the data reflect a major change in block supplied by the pearl river drainage system in contrast the sedimentary rocks in the ying qiong basin are probably a mixture of south china block and indochina block sources supplied by both the pearl river and red river it is likely therefore that the differences in nd isotopic signatures seen in this study reflect changes in provenance nd isotopic provenance analysis the nd isotopic ratios for sediments supplied to the south china sea are shown in fig similar low end values are found in the ying qiong basin modern mekong river and in sediments from offshore se indochina that indicates a dominant values than those derived from either the south china terrane or indochina block because higher end values are associated with crustal blocks incorporating material more recently extracted from the mantle there are two possible factors to explain the relatively high end values seen in the oligocene to middle miocene sedimentary rocks either there was significant addition of volcanic detritus can significantly increase the ratio of sediment but this scenario is unlikely early cenozoic volcanism on the northern margin of the south china sea is restricted ar ar and ar dating indicates that incipient volcanism in the north margin of the south china sea occurred in the late oligocene and gradually increased is the main cause for the relatively high end values the upper miocene to quaternary sedimentary rocks should have higher ratios than the oligocene to middle miocene sedimentary rocks in addition the oligocene to middle miocene sedimentary rocks have relatively high th sc la sc th cr and th co ratios diagnostic of intermediate to silicic igneous sample petrography reveals predominantly granitic lithic material with only subordinate amounts of volcanic detritus samples with higher end values often show higher granite lithic contents according to chen jahn large areas of granite with the end values ranging from to are exposed in south china such as hong kong from oligocene to middle miocene sedimentary rocks mainly reflect a major contribution of intermediate silicic plutonic rocks with younger tdm tectonic controls on provenance changes in basin sediment provenance are related to evolution of the north margin of the south china sea during the late cretaceous to early eocene numerous small rifts developed along palaeozoic sedimentary rocks were the main basin sediment source during the oligocene
of those boomerang fellers they d be goin just like they had the shakes and they could keep it up for hours corroboree clap sticks one big flat one and one little round one were also fellers they d be goin just like they had the shakes and they could keep it up for hours corroboree clap sticks one big flat one and one little round one were also specially crafted it was just like runnin the scales on a piano if they tapped from one end of the flat stick to the other it was the special wood they used and the way they made em these sounds in their ancestral place remained with crawford as she moved around on and off throughout her long working life for her baarkanji land retained its special qualities despite the ruptures and complications of colonialism and displacement mootawingee especially stayed a very special place to crawford throughout her life for langford ginibi sydney would become home but the town of bonalbo remained her belongin place in she returned to bonalbo for her school s anniversary langford ginibi recalls the drive into song s lyrics to events in her personal history making ruby the song s subject and bemoaning her own past decisions i turned on a high black mama voice and patted my chest i took my love to town too many times and burst out laughing this song revives bittersweet memories of langford ginibi s loves won and lost and the women exchange looks laugh and fall silent for example to the line if i could move i d get my gun and put her in the ground langford ginibi responded with a low pitched you just try it and laughter on the drive to bonalbo the sight of mt lindsay through the van windows evokes old uncle roy a timber getting mate of the sisters father uncle roy used to sing to the in the lingo about mt lindsay and now the remembered sound of his voice interrupts both kenny rogers and the sisters reflective silence this is the sound of the bundjalung and githebul area to which the women belong and return however it also evokes the effects of colonialism to support their families uncle roy and the sisters father had to cut down trees in their own country in the taloome scrub where the timber was so very tall the sound of axes much part of langford ginibi s childhood as the sounds of the elders voices the cows and horses the baker s caged crow calling there s blackfellers in the shop and richard tauber singing on the gramophone on mt lindsay highway in langford ginibi s thoughts are interrupted by the state border crossing and tick gate further signs of a colonialism unaware of and indifferent to indigenous boundaries then the woodenbong road brings back different memories year old langford ginibi had saved her first child s infant life only to see him die when he reached himself she describes her sense of futility as she passes that place and her response to sing loudly to peggy lee s i m a woman which happens to be on her sister s tape these moments in the van with her sisters on the road home trace some of langford ginibi s entangled memories despite apparent incongruities in remembered and reproduced sounds in vocalized and in the van with her sisters on the road home trace some of langford ginibi s entangled memories despite apparent incongruities in remembered and reproduced sounds in vocalized and silent modes of remembrance all her memories are interlinked they all relate to her survival of colonization as a bundjalung woman and they recognize links between places and lives despite the relocation of some cultural meanings although colonialism led to langford ginibi s father cutting the taloome scrub and mt lindsay live on while her bundjalung songs have been broken and langford ginibi is better able to sing the words of century superculture the voices of some ancestors such as uncle roy still resonate languages and transpositions in the texts of langford ginibi crawford and brett different voices intersect and compete for space as langford ginibi is silenced by the memory of uncle roy s voice so crawford recalls the very very of her fellow horse tailer in old jimmy galton who had been trained since childhood in corroboree singing similarly brett is mesmerized by the big rabbi groner s voice he is speaking arrived like the rising dust on the mission claypan the rabbi s presence is a momentary reminder of sites of escape from the sense of impotence imposed by other authorities his powerful voice refuses to grant english the excessive airspace it usually demands likewise crawford s wankamurrah speaking granny learnt all her in laws languages and spoke english only to white people her voice was big and everyone listened when she talked the sound of the hebrew mourner s prayer inspires hope in the midst of grief as the smoke of the baarkanji mourner s fire comforts and protects for langford ginibi too her parents language the bundjalung lingo is a source of reassurance excitement and hope on hearing bundjalung spoken again after around years langford ginibi describes the strangest feeling an evocation of long forgotten smells images and sensations one string of images and sounds recalled by relates to the role of bundjalung in uncle ernie s healing of a sick mrs breckenridge at box ridge i watched him go to his tin trunk and take out an old tobacco tin where he kept the hair of his dead father he warmed it on the fire bucket by rubbing his hands together i saw him put his hand with the hair on it to her forehead he sang and chanted in the lingo and stayed there for about an hour when he came out he told us to be quiet she was sleeping she slept for a few then
of the scandinavian societies and a flexibly coordinated model more characteristic of the germanic countries there has been subsequent convergence on a single flexibly coordinated model the countries closest to the ideal typical liberal number of european societies and is not fully clear whether others are to be understood as less pure examples of the dominant classification or as reflecting the logic of a rather different ideal type that has yet to be fully elaborated important examples of this problem of conceptual assimilation are the cases of france centrality of the employers role placed themselves in conscious opposition to a rival approach that had held the field in comparative analyses of european social structure this earlier approach sought to account for variations in institutional structures in terms of a power resources perspective which emphasized the relative organizational class formation and class conflict but it gave the tradition a distinctive twist through its emphasis on the way in which democratic institutions could provide a nonviolent channel for class forces to modify capitalist social structure perhaps the most systematic development of this approach was by korpi although it informed a a potentially attractive feature of production regime theory is that it provides an account of the interlinkages of many different institutional characteristics affecting diverse spheres of social interaction the nature of a country s production regime is held managers subcontracting relations product and innovation strategies industrial relations and welfare regimes this review however focuses on one specific argument derived from the wider theory that the nature of the production regime affects several aspects of work experience that are critical for the quality of employment and that particularly important with respect to skill level the degree of job control participation at work and job security the argument is most systematically presented by soskice many of the factors crucial for employee well being are held to be substantially better in coordinated market economies to begin with countries with this type of production experienced employees there will be a need to foster through strong initial vocational training systems specialized skills across the broad spectrum of the workforce such skills will combine both industry specific technological knowledge and company specific knowledge of organization a higher quality of employment complex products favor the devolution of decision making responsibilities to employees devolved responsibility will be reinforced by new forms of work organization this type of production requires its skilled employees to work in ways that are costly for management work organization employees themselves possess key problem solving knowledge has major implications for industrial relations unilateral control over decisions is less efficient than consensus based approaches to decision making the process of production in coordinated market economies requires cooperative company level industrial relations in company decision making there will be effective works councils within the company linked to industry unions outside it that themselves play an important part in the industrial relations system finally skill specificity will make employers reluctant to casually hire and fire employees also require the ability of companies to commit to long term relations with the employees and hence are conducive to greater employment security employment security is reinforced by the fact that reliance on more specialized skills is thought to have implications for welfare systems the need to encourage investment in industry specific iversen soskice mares iversen in most respects liberal market economies are held to provide a mirror image of the employment conditions of the coordinated economies although in early formulations of the theory these were described as societies based on a low skill equilibrium more recent discussions characterize them in terms level means that lower level workers have especially weakly developed skills but given that this production system is more oriented to internationally competitive service provision and innovative development of complex systems the liberal market economy also requires significant numbers of highly trained and mobile professionals and the consequent marginalization of unions while the need to take advantage at short notice of new skills on the labor market requires a regulative system that allows employers to hire and fire employees at low cost at the time that the theory of production systems was initially formulated there of national evidence largely relating to the formal character of institutional arrangements more recently with the growth of cross national surveys primarily funded by the european union we are in a much better position to assess whether the work experiences of employees in different countries are indeed differentiated in the way fail to illuminate broad patterns in the evidence their utility must be in some doubt skills and training differences in systems of skill formation and their implications for the distribution of skills are given central explanatory place in the argument coordinated market economies should be characterized by two features a on the importance of vocational training in generating higher skills but a notable feature of the discussion is that it focuses almost entirely around initial vocational training this contrasts with the growing concern in many countries with the issue of lifetime skill renewal and hence with the strength of continuing vocational out by the national institute of economic and social research initially under the direction of sig these studies argued powerfully for the much better quality of training of skilled manual workers and manual supervisors in countries such as germany and france which had more developed apprenticeship schemes matched case studies in mechanical this was the case for only one in six of their british equivalents comparisons with france germany and japan showed that britain was much less likely to train both specialized engineers and craftsman indeed compared with germany britain fell behind in all skilled categories the training deficit twice as likely to have craft level qualifications than those in britain in the retail sector the numbers attaining qualifications each year as salespersons in france were about nine times greater than in britain moreover recognized vocational qualifications in britain would have been regarded as prevocational were the skill profiles much more weighted to highly
awareness of difference and strangeness in his works is recorded by the critic bernard scharlitt like nietzsche in the untimely meditations mahler contrasts his own lack of fit with the audiences taste only when i have shaken the dust of the earth from me will justice be done to me for to speak with nietzsche i am an untimely person this is connected above all to the nature of my creation the truly timely one is richard strauss that is why he enjoys immortality while still on in contrast to strauss mahler sees his dislocation from prevalent dissociation or difference the contrasts in mahler s compositional technique like irony and sharp discontinuities of tone are similar to nietzsche s linguistic polarities and are used to frame his moral agenda through a radical reinterpretation of values mahler had become familiar with nietzsche s abrupt switches of manner from poetic wistfulness to irony through his contact with a sense of dislocation from the present pushed both nietzsche and mahler back to the past or more accurately to an imaginative recreation and reinterpretation of the past for nietzsche to re examine the opposing tensions of classical tragedy personified as apollo and dionysos in the birth of tragedy from the spirit of music and for mahler in his songs and symphonies to conjure up the contrasting especially the kindertotenlieder are the intersection between two sets of domains in one set they form the connection between outer nature the physical world and inner nature the landscape of the heart in the other images interlock the chain links of time between experience and memory as in proust such images are evocative of and often filled with anguish or cht in the third symphony angrily ordering his fianc alma to burn her set of nietzsche s complete works but mahler had not only been influenced by the sharply contrasted perspectives of nietzsche s style but he also shared similar strategies of functional reinterpretation with the creator of zarathustra these strategies can be broadly delineated in the areas of expressive and structural processes to expand expressive means mahler drew on like marches and ndler and reworked them as symphonic movements also within symphonic movements he reconfigured their forms as if challenging their existing criteria by juxtaposing contrasted or non congruent material which he underscored by the inventive use of instrumental sonorities in addition to these techniques mahler used distinctive timbres like strings and harps as sonic images to create moods and used these across different but it was in structural process where the range of developmental procedures form radical and at times conflicting narratives that these techniques can be understood as predicated on a larger concept of how to frame the movement or work not so much as to how the movement initially presents its prime material and establishes its expressive persona but how at different levels of the movement or work it ends stops or dissolves away what we might call the modalities of closure such a re evaluation is less problematic in mahler s works with emphatic confirming closure following the model of beethoven s triumphalism like the end of mahler s second and eighth symphonies of the interpolated events bifurcates the event stream into two or more temporal lines where the interpolation eclipses or holds in suspension the event segment it has on from the point of view of looking back after the original event group has resumed our revised perception retrospectively rewrites the preceding history of the section in some ways subtle and in others radical in the light of that adjustment it can cast a different meaning on the section or movement if not the entire work or surprise haydn demonstrates his assured mastery of the technique in the first movement development of the drumroll symphony no in major where a series of sequential steps is deflected into major by an interrupted cadence the surprise harmonic movement underscored by pizzicato cellos and basses after six and a half measures in as the cellos and basses resume playing arco the tonal anticipation of the a more complex example as a derivation of the interrupted cadence occurs at the end of the exposition in the finale of beethoven s appassionata sonata op the closing section of the exposition is an emphatic sixteen measure unit in minor made up of eight measures of sixteenth note figuration and eight of a strongly reiterated closing figure whose eighth note sforzando upbeat drives the anticipated resolution onto the first inversion of minor the direction is dislocated by a fortissimo diminished seventh on the same intrusive dissonance hammered out thirteen times that opens the movement this powerful chord breaks into a rocketing sixteenth note ascent then sweeping down five octaves it propels directly into the development the bass falls to and leads into minor in the development but over delaying yet again full closure which would put a brake on the fierce forward momentum of the movement while both the haydn and beethoven examples take place within clearly delineated formal designs these frameworks subsequently weakened later in the nineteenth century in two ways by looser more episodic forms as in schumann s piano cycles and liszt s symphonic and by attenuated tonality especially in wagner where or bypasses while attenuated tonality is most evident in the adagio of mahler s ninth symphony with its almost mannerist wrenching of line and chromatic saturation his musical language as constantin floros notes was essentially especially in the bilderwelt of marches and waltzes that characterize his works and expand the formal and expressive range of the symphony it was in the symphony which mahler compared to the world that understanding of those elements take place if we look for precedents of innovative reinterpretation of the symphony then the most powerful model was beethoven especially the finale of the ninth symphony but altered retrospective meaning in mahler may also stem from berlioz a composer whose innovative symphonic procedures were similar to mahler both berlioz and
should thus be added to au let us investigate whether activity has incoming unavoidable resource arcs at only activity is active with the set of activities with z contains only activity with so the left hand side of equation is equal to max which is greater than this means that a feasible resource allocation for activity is possible without extra unavoidable resource arcs the complete set of unavoidable resource arcs for the schedule in figure is equal to au of course we are only interested in resource arcs between activities that were precedence unrelated in the original project network let ta denote the set of transitive arcs of the original project network then the set of unavoidable resource arcs between precedence unrelated activities is equal to ip based algorithms as was mentioned previously problem p is an np hard problem in this section we describe three heuristic algorithms based on alternative linear integer programming formulations that aim at avoiding the use of stochastic variables minimize the number of extra arcs extra precedence relations imposed by resource flows will lead to resource flow networks that are generally more stable the mixed integer programming model presented in this section aims at minimizing the number of extra arcs imposed by the resource allocation decisions we define a binary integer variable taking the value if there is a precedence relationship between activities and otherwise minimizing the sum of these variables is number of additional precedence relations this results in problem minea subject to the objective function minimizes the number of extra arcs imposed by the resource allocation decisions constraints and are again the flow feasibility constraints shown earlier as equations and equation with a sufficiently large integer imposes extra arcs linking nodes and when needed as ijk takes a value strictly larger than zero the corresponding variable is set equal to this constraint is defined for every activity pair in the set of possible extra arcs this set consists of all pairs of activities except those pairs that are already directly or indirectly precedence related in or the pairs that can never be precedence related due to their starting times in the baseline schedule note that the use of the of unavoidable arcs makes the set pea smaller one can verify that in our example instance of figure pea finally equation defines the decision variables while equation imposes integrality conditions on the flow variables maximize the sum of pairwise floats project network we define for all pairs of activities with j the pairwise float as the time difference between the start of activity and the end of activity we then define mspfij as the minimal sum of pairwise floats on all paths from activity to activity this gives us the maximum amount of time by which the end of activity may be delayed without delaying the start of activity for instance in the resource flow network presented in figure there are three paths from activity to activity there is the path with the sum of pairwise floats equal to the path with the sum of pairwise floats equal to and the path with sum of pairwise floats equal to hence min this means that the end of activity can be delayed for one time unit without affecting the start clearly high mspfij values will result in a more stable resource flow network we define the set as the set of all activity pairs for which a positive resource flow from activity to activity is possible we then formulate problem maxpf as follows inequality j equations are the flow and extra arc constraints which we already explained in the previous section in equations we calculate the minimal sum of pairwise floats in a recursive way equation splits off one arc where activity is either a direct successor of activity or an unavoidable resource successor of activity the remaining pairwise float mspfkj is calculated recursively equation does is a possible extra successor of activity pea if the possible extra arc is not present in the current solution the variable x will be equal to zero and the corresponding equation will not be binding if for a certain pair of activities and all mspfij constraints are not binding then these activities are both precedence and resource independent in the current resource flow network and the mspfij variable will maximum value as enforced by equation being a positive constant high values of will result in an approach in which we try to maximize the number of resource and precedence independent activities low values of will result in an approach in which we are willing to sacrifice the independency of a pair of activities if this results in a total increase of other mspfij values this increase should then at least be equal to in our experiments we set makes certain the recursion ends and equations are the binary and integrality constraints to see how the objective function evaluates different resource flow networks let us take another look at figures and note that and will have a different value in both resource flow networks while the value of all other mspfij variables will be the same in figure while activity is resource independent activities and yielding in figure activity is resource and precedence independent of activities and thus however activity is now resource dependent of activities and and only one time unit separates the end of activity from the start of activity so we get because the resource flow network in figure will be preferred over the resource flow network in figure a logical choice because a float of five time units will be sufficient to absorb most disturbances coming from activities and while the single time unit of float will not always suffice to absorb disturbances coming from activities and this is already an improvement over our previous model which was unable to distinguish between the networks in figures and aimed at generating robust resource allocations by maximizing the sum of the pairwise floats
larger than the reason for this inaccuracy is that the entering air flows during the conventional operation heating case are between and hence the estimated parameters are only applicable to this input data range as mentioned before the damper positions otherwise when the online measurements only represent a narrow range of the damper position such as during the heating season when the air flow is at its minimum the estimated parameters are only applicable to the input data range this is also the reason that causes the estimated parameters from the conventional operation heating case to be different from the estimated problem can be solved by estimating the parameters from data that cover the full range of damper positions and by using the obtained parameters from full range estimation if it is known that the online measurements only represent a narrow range of the damper position a vav unit that has a hydronic reheat coil compared with previous model the new model employs only variables that are measured commonly in a commercial building the model combines both zone and vav unit effects for the zone temperature and accommodates unknown solar and thermal zone loads four validation experiments which cover most of the situations that a building zone and vav unit would using the estimated parameters the estimation results indicate that the estimated parameters do not show large variations after an estimation time period of about the estimated parameters from different experiments are in the same range using the estimated parameters the zone temperature predictions are close to the measurements for min prediction the differences between a quadratic vav damper model that utilizes the damper characteristics and that relates the entering air volumetric flow with the vav damper position is established there are three unknown parameters that need to be estimated three validation experiments are used to validate the model when the air flow range is similar the estimated parameters from the experiments are similar the estimated parameters are only applicable to the experiments is less than for all experiments for both and min prediction periods the online models can be further used for control supervisory control and fault detection purposes one such application where the online models described here are utilized as part of a prediction model to optimize hvac operation from an energy efficiency view point is the subject of a future paper in office environments in this paper the importance of human productivity to air conditioning control in office environments is discussed a case study was conducted to compare the performance of two control methods conventional setpoint control and predicted mean vote based control in an office environment the comparison was based on three factors human comfort energy consumption and human productivity the setpoint control the setpoint control was only concerned with the first two factors while the pmv control considered human productivity as well computer simulation techniques were employed to obtain the thermal environments created by the two control methods the simulation results led to comparison of human comfort and energy consumption for human productivity a financial analysis was developed the financial loss due to reduction in productivity under the simulated environment was estimated more represented poorer performance in productivity it was found that the conventional control caused significant reduction in human productivity even when an acceptable thermal comfort level was achieved severe financial loss resulted accounting for a in net profit on the other hand the pmv control performed well for both human comfort and human productivity only a drop was observed that compensated the extra energy consumption much better yielded therefore it is strongly recommended to consider human productivity in the design of future air conditioning control as well as human comfort and energy consumption introduction air conditioning is very common in modern buildings its original purpose was to maintain thermally comfortable environments for people inside while keeping energy consumption as low as possible so far human thermal comfort and energy consumption are the only two criteria control and operation of a system however human productivity is becoming more and more important particularly in a commercial office employers urge their staff to achieve higher productivity to generate more profits for the companies while employees themselves want to perform better for reward it is reasonable to expect that air conditioning control should consider human productivity as well as human comfort and energy consumption research on human productivity has long been conducted dating back to the new york state commission on ventilation conducted a series of experiments to evaluate various effects on human performance in four of the experiments male subjects and female subjects wearing the same clothing were invited to perform mental tasks and typewriting under controlled thermal environments their performances were measured under two different temperature settings xc and xc the conclusion drawn at that time was that human performance not affected by heat stress several decades later several researchers obtained an opposite finding when they carried out performance tests under conditions with and without moderate heat stress the tests were normal schoolwork such as reading and comprehension they all agreed that such heat stress lowered the performance of children in these tests in wyon wyon validated this finding by re analyzing the previous experimental results from the new york state commission on ventilation he applied the wilcoxon matched pairs signed ranks test to find out the difference of performance in typing conducted by the test subjects under the two temperature settings the test had not yet been invented in the when the commission analyzed the data it was designed for the comparison of measurements of a single sample which created heat stress for the same clothing condition this matched with the finding of pepler and warner holmberg and wyon and johansson and lofstedt in another study wyon et al claimed that testing subjects with different clothing same mental performance as well as the same level of thermal comfort two groups of subjects wore two sets of clothing
as defined here affective and an acceptance of an organization s goals and a willingness to exert considerable effort on the organization s behalf with a strong desire to see their organizations succeed committed employees internalize work related problems as their own and show a willingness to exceed duty s call their organization s fate it is plausible to consider a theoretical model in which affective commitment with its characteristic emotional attachment and engagement is directly influenced by the extent to which individuals identify with their employing organization thus among survey respondents be noted that early work incorporated varying degrees of overlap in the use of the terms organizational identification and organizational commitment addressing this issue mael and ashforth point out that organizational identification has a cognitive self definitional component that distinguishes it from constructs such as affective commitment and organization whereas identification is seen as a deeper and more existential connection eliciting a sense of oneness with an organization corroborating this conceptual distinction van kippenberg reports findings from a confirmatory factor analysis that show identification as substantiated using mael and ashforth s eyer s affective commitment scale moreover a recent metaanalysis by riketta indicates that the two concepts have different bases and consequences further suggesting that they are distinct psychological constructs figure also posits a direct link between affective commitment and job satisfaction in support of to be with overall job satisfaction job satisfaction may be viewed as a general attitude reflecting one s overall global feeling about one s job it follows from the definition of affective commitment that an absence of emotional attachment and active engagement in achieving an organization s goals may leave employees feeling discontented with to the extent that decreased levels of affective commitment erode job satisfaction we may expect that the perceived desirability of turning over and migrating to avoid participating in a dissatisfying work situation would increase accordingly figure also posits a direct satisfaction intended turnover path supporting with the estimated effect of job satisfaction on turnover intentions ranging from to thus among survey respondents hypothesis higher levels of affective commitment will be positively related to the strength of respondents job satisfaction hypothesis lower levels of job satisfaction will the extent to which the cynicism expressed by colleagues i spoke with at the academy of management meeting might be more broadly shared by all those on the program the sample for this study consisted of the us based terminally qualified faculty members who were listed as program participants for reasons explained with an educational institution located in the united states with these restrictions in mind and the assistance of the academy s home office i was able to determine the exact number of sampling units comprising the target population data for hypothesis testing were collected program s alphabetized participant index the index lists participant names and their mail addresses participants whose mail addresses ended in a non us extension or commercial domain name were omitted from the sampling frame assuming that the alphabetized order of the participants last names is unrelated simple random sampling and thus leads to greater sampling reproducibility the result was an initial sampling frame of program participants affiliated with universities a two stage sampling plan incorporating recommended principles for conducting web surveys was used in data collection of the surveys posted replies were received from respondents yielding a rate sample used for the following analysis thus consisted of faculty respondents or of the effective base sample the final sample was predominantly male and caucasian with an average age of years respondents average tenure with their current university was years and the average number of years since receiving their highest degree was percentages reported being in the three principal academic ranks a more complete description of the final sample including a breakdown by primary academy of management division affiliation is presented in table adjust for the small number of otherwise missing values bentler and chou recommend a minimum ratio of between sample size and the number of parameters to be estimated for this study the sample to parameters ratio was and thus deemed sufficient for obtaining accurate parameter estimates and appropriate standard outlying data points sample to population comparisons were not possible given an absence of archival data chi square comparisons between early and late respondents for chronological age education level academic rank gender length of service with current university number of years since awarding of highest degree size of university student body tenure status institutional a larger proportion of female than male respondents returned the survey late given that there is a of finding one or more significant differences in ten tests these results provide some evidence against the confounding of results due to nonresponse error content valid scores whereas there are existing measures of work related cynicism none has been derived following clearly articulated and documented validation procedures thus a three phase process was followed in developing a cynicism measure that would yield meaningful scores in the initial phase a pool of candidate items was generated to represent the full range of the cynicism potential survey respondents evaluation of existing cynicism measures and personal experience attention was directed at avoiding overlap between items as well as redundancy with other concepts items were worded based on the notion that employees view the actions of an organization s general representatives as the actions of the organization phrased in both a positive and negative direction on the one hand there is a concern that negative wording has the potential to be inflammatory on the other it has been suggested that it is important that items tapping cynicism be negatively worded as positive wording does not resonate with cynics care was taken to clearly delineate the focal content domain by explicitly defining cynicism as redundant offensive ambiguous or poorly worded a total of items were retained on the basis of interpretability and being evaluated by all five judges as best reflecting the demarcated content domain one new item was generated based
alternatives and that their acceptable standards may be quite high be quite high parameter estimates of the two step nested logit model as well as those of the benchmark models are shown in table we see that all the estimated parameters are intuitively sound and generally significant all the three models imply that everything else being equal a traveler tends to choose the airport that is close from home and has been used by the traveler in the past traveler in the past similarly a traveler tends to choose the airline that offers lower fares provides frequent services to the traveler s destination and for which the traveler is an active ffp member these results are consistent with those of previous airport and airline choice studies the two step nested logit model indicates that dp is statistically insignificant while dl is highly significant this pattern suggests that travelers may eliminate only the airlines only the airlines but not airports during the screening phase of their decision making process behaviorally travelers may first screen airlines at each airport to reduce the number of choice alternatives per airport and then evaluate all the remaining alternatives by using the utility maximization rule our results therefore imply that travelers may not eliminate any not eliminate any airport from their final choice sets we see from table that all the inclusive value parameters lie within the expected range fixing these parameters to significantly reduces the fit for both models we therefore reject the hypothesis that the airport airline choice can be modeled by a multinomial logit model across all combinations of and airlines in other words the independence of irrelevant alternatives property is rejected this finding is consistent with that of pels et al with regard to the goodness of fit the two step nested logit model appears to outperform the benchmark models log likelihood values show that the two step model gives the better overall fit than the benchmark models and adjusted values indicate that the fit of the two step model after adjusting for the number of estimated parameters is better than those of the benchmark parameters is better than those of the benchmark models the hit rates imply that the two step model can predict the travelers observed choices better than the benchmark the likelihood ratio tests yield highly significant results for all comparisons involving the two step model which suggests that the two step model fits the data significantly better than the benchmark models the above results however are necessary but not sufficient conditions to conclude that the to conclude that the two step nested logit model is truly the best fitting model often the best fitting model is found to behave badly outside the data range truly the best model not only provides the best fit to the calibration sample but also provides the best prediction of actual choices in the sample not used for model calibration to test the external validity of the proposed model we reestimate all the three models by using sample observations which are randomly selected from from the study samples and utilize the estimated models to predict the actual choices in the remaining observations results indicate that the two step nested logit model provides the best fit to both the calibration sample and the forecasting sample these results imply that the conventional one step choice models may not capture the portion of data variance that is explained by the travelers product elimination behaviors behaviors while the two step nested logit model may correctly capture such variance conclusions and limitations this paper has estimated a nested logit model of airport airline choice that considers the twostep choice process of air travelers the underlying assumption is that since the number of choice alternatives available to a traveler can be quite large when airport and airline choices are made simultaneously the traveler may not evaluate all the choice alternatives carefully by carefully by using the rigorous utility maximization rule but may instead employ a simpler two step decision rule in which only the pre screened choice alternatives are evaluated by the utility maximization rule the two step process was tested separately for airport and airline choices the most important findings of this study are as follows first travelers may use the two step decision process for airline choices but not for airport choices behaviorally it implies that travelers first screen airlines at each airport to reduce the number of choice alternatives per airport and then evaluate all the remaining alternatives by using the utility maximization rule second the proposed two step model fits and predicts the observed data substantially better than the conventional multinomial logit and nested logit specifications this condition implies that the traditional one step choice models may not capture data variance that is explained by the travelers product elimination behaviors readers should note however that these findings may not be generalizable as our study was conducted only in a single region with a limited number of airports and airlines data analysis for more regions is required in the future the study has its limitations first we assumed that travelers are homogeneous with respect to minimum acceptable standards our model assumes that travelers facing exactly the same choice travelers facing exactly the same choice situation must have identical acceptable standards in all attributes this condition implies that our model may miss the portion of data variance that is explained by the individual heterogeneities of acceptable standards future research may address this issue by developing a method of estimating the minimum acceptable standard for each individual traveler by attribute second we did not distinguish between business and leisure travelers ideally the model should the model should be estimated separately for business and leisure travelers because these two types of travelers often show different behavioral patterns we nevertheless did not take this approach because our sample size was not large enough to do so if sufficient samples are available future research may estimate the model separately for business
and learning new skills present a physical and psychological challenge for family members who are already dealing with the emotional upheaval of having a loved one with a life threatening illness in addition the illness may represent a financial burden for some families due to expenses not covered by insurance as well as lost opportunity for income due to the caregiving daily patterns of as they try to reorganize their usual routines reassign tasks and compensate in other ways for changes in the patient s physical psychological and emotional well being oncology nurses have often observed that a patient s diagnosis of cancer generally results in changes in family function in terms of restructuring or reprioritization in addition patients themselves changes are one of the major stressors experienced by family members of cancer and often result in decreased qol for both the patient and his or her family research on the impact of cancer on families often focuses on the time frame immediately surrounding diagnosis and treatment when patients and families must make many changes in their usual roles and routines to deal with the change as a result of the diagnosis and treatment of cancer but comparisons of the degree of impact and the timing of the changes experienced by patients and families have been essentially unexplored patient and family experiences may be similar or quite and their experiences may be out of sync with one roles and and adapt to the physical or emotional changes that may have resulted from the diagnosis and treatment of the disease this may prove difficult for patients and families who are attempting to move forward with their lives and to reestablish routine family functioning exactly how the process of recovery and returning to normal occurs for patients and qol has been accepted as an appropriate outcome for evaluating patients responses to cancer and cancer treatment recent research although limited has addressed the impact of cancer and cancer treatment on the family s qol however perceptions of family distress as reported by patients have not been addressed directly and may provide information valuable in planning future studies of family distress as reported by long term cancer survivors in reviewing qol questionnaires it was noted that the qol questionnaires developed at the city of hope for bone marrow transplant patients and for cancer survivors included an item on family distress as part of the social well being dimension these questionnaires had been used at the university of as reported by patients a pub med search using the keywords city of hope and quality of life revealed references from through of which were combined with the unmc studies and reported in this article along with a separate article regarding a study utilizing the coh the remaining articles identified through pubmed did not report single item scores not included the single item identified on both qol questionnaires was how distressing has your illness been for your family each of the questionnaires contains this item methods conceptual framework of coh qol questionnaires the conceptual framework for the development of these to be interrelated one of the domains social well being includes aspects of the patient in relation to roles and relationships this is where the item related to family distress is located an impact in one domain such as physical well being is likely to impact the other domains as city of hope national medical tested from to by grant et al at the coh national medical center psychometric analysis of the first version of this instrument demonstrated content validity test retest reliability total score internal consistency and subscale alphas of to with evaluation by multiple regression analysis factor analysis illness been for your family on a likert scale ranging from to city of hope national medical center quality of life of patient cancer survivor the coh qol survivors instrument was developed by grant et al and was revised for use in survivorship studies by hassey dow and ferrell psychometric analysis revealed overall test retest reliability was with and spiritual a second measure of reliability internal consistency was estimated using cronbach alpha coefficient a measure of agreement between items and subscales this analysis revealed an overall and subscale alphas ranged from for spiritual for physical for social and for psychological well this questionnaire also contains the item how using a likert scale ranging from to review of studies the following studies are reviewed and compared regarding family distress to illness as reported by patients who are longterm cancer survivors all studies were reviewed by their respective institutional review boards and used mailed surveys of recalled data three of the studies used the coh version study at unmc lynch et conducted a cross sectional survey of nonyhodgkin s lymphoma survivors who had been treated on a nebraska lymphoma study group protocol between and the study quality of life in nhl survivors had the following objectives assessing qol medical late effects and psychosocial function and examining the relationship of patient disease and treatment of nhl survivors treated on an lsg protocol to those treated with autologous hematopoietic stem cell transplant the instruments used in this study included the medical outcomes survey short form the functional assessment of cancer therapy general the coh qol and demographic eight hundred forty five patients were identified as potentially follow up death inactive physician participation in lsg or refusal to permit patient contact participation in other qol studies or otherwise considered to be a poor candidate of the patients who were eligible responded respondents had a mean age of years at the time of treatment and a mean of months poststart of treatment fifty six percent family was the third most stressful item reported overall in the coh qol cs questionnaire and the most stressful item reported in the social concerns subscale only items indicated more distress and were from the psychological well being subscale distress due to initial diagnosis was the lowest score and distress due to cancer treatment at unmc by
it support and motivated the search for and adoption of new it systems however the major contribution of this study is a deeper understanding of the intricacies of the relationship between organizational learning and it support by investigating organizational learning in the context of changing work processes and ongoing transformation of organizational practices we suggest that the role of it varies depending on the nature of the learning the range of relationships between organizational learning and it investigated in our case company are systematized in table in this table we applied an chak s framework that combines on one dimension types of learning and on another dimension the level or focus of learning the use of this framework to analyze and systematize organizational learning and its relationship with it at sava illustrates how it may be useful in other cases and contexts in single loop learning where learning processes are typically well the role and tasks of it systems can be defined in advance and often realized with off the shelf software products the use of such it systems however becomes so embedded in work processes that they become an integral and indispensable part of the learning loop so much so that the breakdown of the it system interrupts both working and learning sava s experience also single loop learning depends on workers skills and their training in the it systems use double loop learning is as we have seen less structured and a much more complex learning process while we saw that double loop learning is also embedded in the working processes the cycle of learning is much longer and more diffused than in single loop learning consequently we saw more variety in the roles and tasks that it systems played we saw the generic need for organizational members to be well informed to communicate and share their assumptions views and mental maps such needs can be fulfilled by traditional management and executive information system and electronic communication systems in double loop learning the needs of actors may also be idiosyncratic dependent on the nature of the business organizational culture the specific nature of the learning and the expectations of participants this was the case with the a thousand ideas for a better tomorrow campaign which required an it system to support submitting managing evaluating and implementing proposals for innovation and change with both types of it support for double loop learning generic and specific the role of the it system is a supporting one it systems may improve learning and make it more efficient and effective as was the case at sava but the essence of learning remains dependent on human creativity cooperative relationships socially shared knowledge and collective meaning making based on our interpretation of empirical evidence from sava we would agree with jones that it systems contribution to learning comes not from their retention of specific organizational descriptions as the viewpoint of argyris schein suggests but from their effect on the general ongoing process of interpretation through which individuals construct and interpersonal milieu the role of it systems in triple loop learning is even more complex and subtle visionary risk taking responsible and reflective leaders were required for successfully identifying obstacles to learning in the past promoting the culture of learning and inventing new structures modes and strategies of learning evidence from sava s successful transformation confirms what many authors emphasized that company leaders play role in both double and triple loop learning sava leaders critically appraised old values business assumptions and the company s ability to deal with global markets and develop and promote new values assumptions and a corporate vision but more importantly sava s leaders opened new channels for collective knowledge sharing established new structures the link between triple loop leaning and it applications in sava can be seen from two perspectives it applications broadly support triple loop learning sava s top management is generally informed by various it systems that contribute to their awareness and understanding of organizational problems and increase their sensitivity to specific learning issues and it applications are envisaged as part of new structures for organizational learning for instance when the a thousand ideas for a better tomorrow campaign was introduced it opened a new channel for double loop learning that required a new it system to support it when implemented the system also assisted top managers in comprehending the emergence of learning processes in appreciating the nature of engagement and the extent of employees participation and it helped them understand the emergence and proliferation of new mental maps throughout the company finally an unexpected implication of our study concerns the controversial issue of workplace democracy participative policy making and egalitarian power structure that is intrinsic to the notion of a learning organization such a utopian view is contrasted with foucaultian gloom where only the powerful learn and win while others are no more than their hands first we found that some form of workplace democracy participative policy making and egalitarian power structure that remained from sava s socialist past was conducive to and provided a fertile soil for the development of a learning organization second we found that the development of organizational learning and especially the practice of double and triple loop learning established and strengthened top management s power position while relying on participation therefore sava s case seems to support neither view utopian or foucaultian rather one might argue sava found its own way in balancing the contradicting demands of a learning organization and profit maximization analogy as a tool for communicating however many innovations never make it through the development process due to the difficulty inherent in communicating new ideas to others this article discusses the obstacles to innovation that occur during the development process and how these obstacles can be overcome through the use of analogy described is an empirically derived sevenstep process for constructing suitable analogies for communicating about innovations the use of the seven step processes to develop an analogy to an
he feels about and how he added of the metaphor analysis to my interpretation of managers narratives it is of course not very difficult to find out from many other aspects of the interview that apel was angry or even frustrated moreover the interview also gives a detailed picture of the restructuring process of the company and the complex tasks for the firm s top managers the metaphor analysis however helps us understand apel s frustration the referee metaphor helps us decipher his tacit self concept with its roots dating back several years by applying the metaphor we become aware that this story is not just about apel s anger or frustration but that some deeper beliefs of justice and revenge and of his own mission are touched case study the first mate axel fiedler made a quick and impressive career at contool a traditional a traditional manufacturer of machine tools very early after the turn in he realized the challenges of finances and accounting and took the chance to change the department two years later he was the commercial director of the company metaphor identification and selection during the interview some accounts were repeated regularly these can be conceptualized around the metaphor of the company is a ship the most important experience of the last years was that during this worldwide recession especially in the equipment industry we managed to govern newcomer enterprise our ship passing the rocky breakers i am the top commercial manager and when i recognize that the course of the ship becomes awkward i have to get rid of ballast on the side where it is wrong if not the rest of the crew will sink and this symbol i took for a sign and i said of course there always has to be a crew which keeps the ship moving it wo nt help me having a ship that does not sink but is drifting serious doubts that we will reach the safe harbor with the current higher management with reference to the criteria mentioned in the previous section there are several reasons to consider this metaphor interesting and promising for further analysis it was repeated continuously throughout the interview it is well elaborated including different aspects and different situations it is obviously related to some key topics of the interview the company through the transformation process and it was elaborated in some fairly surprising forms that are in sharp contrast to the surrounding narrative general metaphor analysis the ship metaphor is not unusual especially in companies that go as contool through crises some comparisons can be made with the metaphor of the mountaineering team or a football team both characterized by fairly developed personal interdependencies the existence of danger of hierarchy the metaphor s functions seem to be somewhat ambiguous here the company staff for example is differently conceptualized in the same account as crew and as ballast this may be an indicator for a clear distinction moreover it can be asked whether an organizational conflict is reflected herein and how far it has spread in the company the third account above for example seems to point to conflicts according to the metaphor s dimensions it is obvious that the indicators of a crisis are very vivid here we see that fiedler identified the reason for the company s problems both outside and inside the firm against this background fiedler perceives himself to be in the position of the first mate who in the end is responsible for the whole ship and who is forced to put through decisions in it is necessary as in case to include more information and to go deeper into the context of the metaphor text immanent metaphor analysis for many years axel fiedler has been an employee in the department of investment planning of contool with his change of department and especially with his fast career to the top of the firm he had to state increasing distance to the company s basis and even to the workforce to which he a certain sense of pride as i became a member of the higher management a certain distance between workforce and management arose whatever may have caused that at the same time as commercial director fiedler was the direct superior of the personnel manager so he had to endeavor to stay in contact with people at the workplace level however the account in which he points to this remains somewhat ambiguous on one hand the repetition of the word actually of the statement on the other hand fiedler seems to mix different approaches to personnel management here namely a materialistic interactive and paternalistic concept the exchange with people actually is the most wonderful thing that exists and i actually am very proud to be entrusted with the whole personnel it s true but always reflecting i work with the most valued equipment equipment to be seen in quotation marks please and therefore i have to take this into account i have to speak with this person i have to tell him the reasons anyway if he accepts them or not but i have to endeavor to communicate moreover fiedler declared that the old team spirit would continue in his close personal environment here again however we are left with some gift for the boss really a gesture of team spirit these doubts are reinforced by several statements of interviewees from fiedler s environment who commented on the fairly distrustful climate of the department nevertheless you can see this here this is not by chance i had my birthday a few days ago my team has honored my birthday not because i am the boss but just like this and in fact i am actually happy about this that there is still a certain team spirit of fiedler seemed to show conflict on one hand fiedler criticized the lack of independent thinking of the workforce on the other hand he wished to see more interventions of the management and a stronger following of the workers this was clearly expressed through some further concise
of wolves and rabbits mentioned earlier also have the the above novelty related principle of highly skilled rapid preliminary mental processing of alternative scenarios is precisely what is elaborated we believe by the responsibility predictor properties of multiple paired models in the hmosaic cerebellar architecture in addition we believe it is what is elaborated on in the long term working this contention ericsson has strongly emphasized the finding that the essence of expert performance is a generalized skill at successfully meeting the demands of new situations and rapidly adapting to changing conditions ericsson and kintsch and ericsson and lehmann found that this generalized moreover ericsson and his colleagues have found that the above expert performance is mediated by complex modifiable representations that allow experts to exhibit faster speed superior selection of actions and more precise motor execution all of the behavioral and cognitive capabilities of experts and exceptional performers from the long term collaboration of working memory and the cerebellum as described by the mosaic and hmosaic cerebellar architectures described earlier we hypothesize that it is likely then that the evolution leiner et al represent the foundational bases of creativity and innovation whenever a person confronts a novel problem whether it be in the context of ancient era survival situations a series of novel problems facing edison as he worked on the telephone or the electric light or an expert working through the incremental long term steps of acquiring exceptional mastery exploratory sources of creative and innovative solutions the coadaptive evolution of the phenomenology of the three components of working memory the dynamic relationships among the three components of working memory were no doubt importantly modified by selective pressures of language evolution that occurred during pleistocene hominid evolution because the visuospatial sketchpad it seems that language was likely selected because it allowed more useful sharing of visuospatial imagery that we have in common with prehuman species in attempting to understand the relationship between the evolution of the visuospatial sketchpad and the speech loop then it seems that the origins and nature of the image structure operation of the speech loop the structure of visuospatial speech imagery and its relationship to language evolution the important thing about the central executive s use of the activities of visuospatial sketchpad and the speech loop is the phenomenal imagery that is produced and kept in a readily accessible state and because this imagery appears also to be the source of stimulus independent thought it must be understood if we are to make sense of einstein s contemplative accounts of the discovery working memory why should working memory play any role in the phenomenology of imagery baddeley has proposed that working memory plays a central role in the processes underlying consciousness and that it has evolved as a means of allowing the organism to consider simultaneously a range of sources of information about the world and uses these processes to set up mental models emphasis action consider for example the task of a hunter gatherer who recollects that as this time of year a tree bears fruit near a waterfall in potentially hostile territory in order to reach the tree safely he may need to use remembered spatial cues together with the sound of the waterfall and the shape of the tree while listening and looking for signs of potential enemies a dynamic image that is capable of representing a planning aid of considerable evolutionary value the important point here is that working memory s control of phenomenal imagery sets up and provides later access to mental models of the meaningfulness of things for example a tree bears fruit near a waterfall in potentially hostile territory and so on it is important to note here that the term mental model in by ito see baddeley and footnote of this article but how does the central executive of working memory decide what is meaningful in terms of survival and therefore should be built into pertinent models of phenomenal imagery it cannot reliably obtain this information through the activity of its slave systems because it supervises integrates and schedules does the central executive acquire its original rules for constructing phenomenal imagery about what is meaningful working in the area of early conceptual development in infancy mandler proposed that perceptual analytic processes occurring during infancy redescribe perceptual information into conceptual primitives which provides a handy synopsis of the tenets of her position the theory proposes that perceptual analysis redescribes perceptual information into meanings emphasis added that form the basis of an accessible conceptual system these early meanings are represented in the form of image schemas that abstract certain aspects of the spatial structure of objects and their movements in space image it is proposed that this form of representation serves a number of functions including providing a vehicle for simple inferential and analogical thought enabling the imitation of actions of others and providing a conceptual basis for the acquisition of the relational aspects of language the critical feature of mandler s theory is perceptual that is extracted by the process within the theory perceptual meaning analysis redescribes perceptual information into spatial meanings and thus initiates the beginnings of concept formation mandler further proposed that the redescription process begins whenever the infant attentively notices in a simplified form of information that is of less detail but of distilled meaning this expression sounds as if the repetitive perceptual analytic process creates cerebellar models and we believe it does however mandler did not propose brain mechanisms which might account for the redescription process or how the distilled meanings come about position on the conceptual foundations of an infant s mind included three major points first although image schemas themselves are not conscious they provide the infant with a basis for an accessible conceptual system of imagery that is conscious second image schemas provide structure and meaning to the phenomenal imagery of our thought processes usefully interpreted as a picture of the evolution and early operation of the phenomenology of working memory
contention of this paper that this position has another powerful proponent in wilfrid and that there is no more basic form of knowledge than seeing physical objects and seeing that they are for example red and triangular on this side this commonsensical position is opposed by a theory of perception in which there is a more basic form of visual knowledge than seeing physical objects and their properties classically this theory of perception came about from the case that in any perceptual situation one can be in error as to how things are being in error must be phenomenologically indistinguishable from a situation in which we perceive how things actually are for if the deceptive case were distinguishable it would no longer be deceptive but if we cannot phenomenologically distinguish between a perception of how things really are and a perception of how things seem it is reasonable to infer that what is being in both cases how are we to account for this sameness many have taken it that in both cases what we are experiencing is a mental state that either resembles the object or in some sense possesses the features that the object appears to have in this case what we are aware of in perception what the immediate object of our perception is is an inner mental item here we arrive at the act object model of perception in not is mediated by a prior awareness of an inner object ie a sense datum sensation appearance or look since it is this item that we directly experience when we have an external object in view we can no longer say that it is physical objects that we really and directly perceive in sellars view this undermines the realist principle that underlies his this is because the existence and character of a perceived object are now an inference from the direct awareness of an internal mental item since an inference is in principle defeasible this picture of perception allows for the fact that things could be even in standard conditions not what they seem to be consequently even in standard perceptual situations situations in which illusions and other perceptual be a disjunction between our perceptual taking and the object perceived as we shall see for sellars this classical picture of perception is committed to the myth of the given and so must be discarded he does that by arguing that our perceptual experience is not an inference from an inner item at all but if our perceptual relatedness to an object is not secured through an of while sensations provide perception with its intrinsic character the employment of concepts in a perceptual judgment allows it to refer beyond itself to a physical object here we have the recognizably kantian view that perceptual intentionality is made possible by the utilization of both concepts and intuitions sellars marks the fact that he is committed to this picture by calling his view a critical direct however we shall see that while sellars takes perceptual experience to be irreducibly conceptual he has a notion of perceptual experience that is not judgmental for sellars concept use in a judgment is modelled on the inferential moves that one makes in the space of reasons hence we can characterize what is distinctive about his critical direct realism in this way although the content of a perceptual experience is not actively conferred through inference conceptual ie still stands albeit passively within the space of reasons sellars thinks that this refinement allows him to explain how perceptual experience and knowledge can be direct the burden of this paper will be to demonstrate how sellars elaborates and defends this delicate position philosophical idea of givenness or to use the hegelian term immediacy has intended to deny that there is a difference between inferring that something is the case and for example seeing it to be the case those that do not he feels that he must preserve this place because most positions that attack the notion of givenness equate it with an attack on non inferential episodes tout in contrast sellars is trying to keep open the possibility that the given is not to be simply equated with the non inferential while episodes of the given are non inferential there are non inferential episodes that are not species must say a bit about the structure of the given episodes of the given are particular matters of fact which can not only be non inferentially known to be the case but presuppose no other knowledge either of particular matter of fact or of general truths sellars points out what is most salient in this characterization but as presupposing no knowledge of other matter of fact whether particular or general it might be thought that this is a redundancy that knowledge which logically presupposes knowledge of other facts must be inferential this however is itself an episode in the myth that it cannot presuppose other knowledge of facts or more broadly the concepts that make up these potential facts in other words it is posited that a knowing agent must be able to have non inferential knowledge without already having in place a conceptual background which affords a prior knowledge of facts this however is a very stringent condition on knowledge insofar as it requires conceptual atomism bits of the given are atoms which can be taken to have by a knowing agent without those bits being tied into a previously acquired conceptual repertoire this conclusion is not so much argued for as taken for granted it is taken for granted because it is thought obvious that knowledge that presupposes knowledge of other facts is knowledge that is inferentially tied to those other facts if one takes this thesis to be obvious then by simple contraposition we gain the redundancy we non inferential must be non presuppostional let us spell out the underlying logic because knowledge that presupposes other knowledge is necessarily inferential it is obvious that non inferential
in one option resulted in an increase in its choice share the impact of increasing the price of the specialized of the higher priced option a and an increase in the share of the higher priced option in this context the increase in the choice share of the all in one option was significantly greater than the increase in the share of the specialized options lending further support for the experimental predictions in one option is likely to be greater when this option is priced at a premium relative to specialized options than when it is priced at parity more important the increase in the perceived attribute performance associated with premium pricing was greater for the all in one option than for specialized options this asymmetric nature of the impact of price on performance ratings in the absence of devaluation of the all in one option it is difficult to account for the asymmetric increase in the attractiveness of the all in one versus the specialized options overall this data pattern is consistent with the proposition that increasing the price of the all in one option introduces a dimension on which this option is deficient which in turn eliminates the raised by the pricing manipulation is that the dispersion of options prices might have changed the nature of the trade offs made by respondents indeed when all options are priced at parity and option is perceived to be inferior on the attributes dominated by specialized options consumers are faced with a trade off between maximizing the performance on a particular attribute in contrast when the all in one option is priced at a premium it will be perceived as combining the good features of the specialized options which then eliminates the need for trading off the two performance related attributes instead the decision now involves a trade off between performance and consumer preference for performance over price in this context choosing the all in one alternative eliminates the need to trade off two performance related attributes and instead positions the all in one option as the price based compromise it is important to note however the all in one options are identical the proposition that varying price might have changed the nature of the trade offs is meaningful only in the presence of compensatory inferences general discussion this research examines consumer reactions to two common positioning strategies a specialized strategy in which an option is differentiated by a single feature and an allin from sets comprising both specialized and all inone options consumers are likely to adopt a zero sum heuristic in which they equate the overall attractiveness of choice alternatives and evaluate ambiguous information in a compensatory fashion two empirical studies reported in this article demonstrate that the perceived attractiveness of the attributes differentiating in one option to a set made up of specialized options tends to polarize the perceived performance of these options it enhances the attractiveness of the attributes differentiating each of the specialized options while devaluing the performance of these options on their secondary nonfeatured attributes these compensatory enhancement and devaluation effects were shown to be a function of options perceived performance the options performance on unobservable attributes was inferred to be inconsistent with their performance on the readily observed attributes to account for the reported effects this research introduced the zero sum heuristic as a general mechanism for drawing compensatory evaluations in choice here the zerosum heuristic is defined as a context based inference strategy consumers belief that options in a given choice set are balanced such that advantages on one dimension are likely to be compensated for by disadvantages on another as a result when an all in one alternative is embedded among specialized options its attribute performance is likely to be devalued so that it matches the overall performance of these options similarly the performance of specialized options devalued so that their overall performance matches that of the all in one option research reported in this article contributes to the decision literature by applying the notion of compensatory inferences to explain the devaluation and enhancement effects associated with the evaluating specialized and all in one options building on the findings reported by chernev and carpenter a different type of compensatory inference that is not necessarily contingent on the availability of price information indeed because drawing inferences about overall value is difficult in the absence of price information the availability of price information is a necessary condition for market efficiency intuitions to occur in contrast the zero sum heuristic reported in this research offers a more general decision pricing information documenting the existence of compensatory reasoning without explicitly available pricing information is an important contribution to the research on consumer decision making and choice it is important to note that the observed effect of adding an all in one option to a set comprising specialized options is conceptually different from the range indeed in the case of range effects adding an option to the choice set changes the attribute value scale describing choice al ternatives in contrast in the case of the compensatory effects reported in this research adding either a specialized or an all in one option does not change the scale describing choice alternatives because both the specialized and the allin in this research also imply that the widely used strategy of pricing specialized and all in one options at parity might in fact be suboptimal thus the data show that the choice share of the all in one option is likely to be greater when this option is priced higher than when it is priced at parity with the specialized options it is important to note however that this increase in the share on a variety of other factors such as the price sensitivity of consumers thus even though increasing the price of the all in one option might mitigate the devaluation effect in cases when consumer price sensitivity is high the overall choice share might nevertheless decrease an important issue raised
deposit cm deep in contrast to thicknesses of cm recorded at profile and cm at profile this probably represents localized movements of the tephra deposit during or soon after initial deposition as there is a minimal admixture of silt even small amounts of silt are visible against the white pumice and these deposits lack any staining the tributary gully is cut into the overlying beds of re and lenses of either hekla or hekla tephra within the scalloped top surface show that stabilization only occurred in the very late seventeenth or eighteenth century one profile was recorded on the hill slopes west of stong in the outfields outside the immediate area of settlement and home fields an erosional surface cuts into prehistoric tephra layers accumulation above this hiatus commences with reworked deposits of hekla but this accumulation is mixed as tephra does not form a discrete layer and stability only resumed in the late fifteenth century with the deposition of katla as a discrete un mixed layer discussion these new data provide a mixed picture of landscape change from landnam through the occupation of the thjorsardalur farms to the present day aeolian sediment accumulation rates increase by an order of magnitude at landnam this could be in response to changes in both the depositional and erosional environment surface vegetation cover produced by settlement could locally change sediment deposition by reducing the ability of some areas to trap fallout in addition new sources of aeolian sediment could have been created by woodland clearance and localized breaches of vegetation cover local sediment sources can significantly increase nearby accumulation rates one factor contributing to in sediment accumulation rates after settlement could be the thickness of the landnam tephra layer and its proximity to the surface it was deposited and stabilized only a few years before the settlement of the valley and the first introduction of grazing mammals consequently the tephra would have formed a cm deep layer of unconsolidated silt sand sized sediment with little cohesion and very susceptible to erosion just under the land surface this layer could have been mobilized as a result of woodland clearance and the introduction of sheep goats cattle horses and especially pigs once triggered erosion scars probably become an enduring feature of this landscape after the deposition of tephra in a some areas saw a rapid stabilization of the airfall indicating a deep vegetation cover that continued to grow through at least of pumice other areas were affected by erosion cutting into that the subsequent tephra fall of hekla in a resulted in stabilization of land surfaces indicates processes other than geomorphic change were at work this is especially notable given the general increase of landscape degradation in iceland associated with the period of changing climate known as the little ice age stabilization of shifting sinface deposits of tephra simply through the addition of more tephra seems at first sight to be rather as the little ice age stabilization of shifting sinface deposits of tephra simply through the addition of more tephra seems at first sight to be rather improbable a geomorphological equivalent of putting out fires with petrol one indirect way in which additional tephra deposition could explain the geomorphic change is through its effect on human activity it could be that human impact continued after a effectively delaying ecological recovery fall but in the immediate aftermath of the a eruption this ceased most probably this occurred because of a major reduction or removal of grazing pressin it is notable that even in areas where erosion had taken place in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries once stabilization had been achieved in the aftermath of the a eruption uninterrupted sediment accumulation has been taking piece to the modern day as this period includes the most iconic example of volcanic impact environmental destruction and farm abandonment it is notable that it is an area where significant woodland survives despite being an ecologically marginal location for birch trees pubescens recent work on fuel utilization and woodland management in iceland has highlighted the importance of in early modern times as a woodland reserve and the soitrce of almost all the charcoal for several hundred households on southern plain at the end of the sixteenth century there were still extensive birch forests in thjorsardalur mostly owned by the bishop of skalholt who was also the principal landowner in the region the bishop s tenants in large tracts of the mostly treeless county of arnessysla had the right to make charcoal for household needs in the thjorsardalur woods at this time the valley floor was probably already denuded but the hillsides were still for household needs in the thjorsardalur woods at this time the valley floor was probably already denuded but the hillsides were still largely covered in wood suggesting that the valley was not as completely devastated in the middle ages as has traditionally been imagined and we propose that an abandonment of the valley in the thirteenth century would accord well with the rise of the bishop of skalholt as the major landowner in the if the valley farms were in a decline due to volcanic impacts and environmental degradation it may have made them all the more vulnerable to the encroachments of major landowners in whose interests it might have been to clear the farms to protect the woodlands for the lowland tenants a similar situation of farm abandonment related to woodland conservation seems to have occurred in thorsmork in south iceland there landnam farms hulk of the surviving woodland in the region as lowland forest clearance to create pasture and mid valley timber exploitation to produce charcoal had cleared woodland from areas down valley of thorsmork itself it is probable that the final clearance of farms from thorsmork occurred in order to protect the surviving woodland as a charcoal resource for the lowland farms in both thorsmork and a similar general pattern can be seen with land use change and the protect the surviving woodland as
proportions of partial melting metasediments and felsic orthogneiss polyphase metamorphism and deformation in the smc occurred in two main phases two penetrative layer parallel foliations formed during low granulite facies metamorphism at ma during the early strangways event or ongeva tectonic phase of collins and kbar the effects of subsequent deformation included the development of kilometer scale coaxial sheath folds early in the ma late strangways event called the pfitzner tectonic phase by collins shaw deformation is inferred to have been ma wuluma granite occurred late in the pfitzner tectonic phase the main pluton is elongate in an hourglass shape with two subcircular bulges connecting a thin neck hosted by felsic migmatites that show transitional contacts with the granite complex field and chemical relationships between the granite and host migmatites indicate a mineral assemblages in steeply dipping granite sheets and adjacent metapelitic migmatites indicates metamorphic conditions of and kbar sawyer et al described the principal morphological and geochemical characteristics of migmatites and inferred conditions of kbar and mehnert and brown the terms leucosome mesosome and melanosome are used to describe migmatite components with light medium grey and dark color respectively the effects of four deformation events are preserved in the gorge compositional layering is preserved by mafic layers up to in width occurring as discontinuous layers in diatexite and psammitic gneiss units by aligned biotite and cordierite grains is correlated with the metamorphic event of norman clarke and is deformed by folds evidence for and is mostly obliterated in migmatites and diatexites because of the combined effects of later recrystallization and high mode of post leucosome however and are well preserved in of the gorge dominated by psammitic gneiss isoclinal folds occur as successive trending synforms and antiforms that are correlated with the regional sheath folds in stromatic migmatite and are partially defined by delicate leucosome appearing to have utilized the foliation planes as local conduits during is inferred to have been synchronous with the onset of extensive partial melting during the pfitzner tectonic phase biotite and cordierite in stromatic migmatite define indistinct foliations that are commonly sub parallel to weakly transgressive to leucosome that defines the foliations are inferred to be relics of and transposed into parallelism to meter scale migration of mobilisate some pegmatite locally cuts centimeter scale leucosome that defines subtly oblique such relationships are clear along the boundaries of diatexite and psammitic gneiss at the southern side of the gorge and consistent with appreciable melt migration late in extensive partial melting late in disrupted lithological layering and led to the pooling a large volume of mobilisate melanocratic selvedges that developed adjacent to pegmatites may define or folds such relationships are consistent with having occurred over an extensive period with the later stages of having accompanied cooling of the terrane a shear zone obliquely cuts across migmatite is the most common unit in the gorge the unit shows a compositional gradation from metamorphosed semi pelite in the north to metamorphosed pelite in the south pelitic migmatites are mostly formed from garnet cordierite plagioclase feldspar quartz biotite magnetite and ilmenite whereas the semi pelitic migmatite comprises garnet which is the main fabric forming element rounded garnet grains up to cm in diameter occur with fine grained biotite and cordierite in leucosome hosted by pelitic gneiss in semi pelitic migmatites sub rounded orthopyroxene grains up to cm in diameter are more common in the leucosomes than garnet these leucosomes or orthoproxene enclosed by fine grained garnet most leucosome is granitic in texture and up to cm in width although some have a pegmatitic texture and a width of cm or more mesosome is mostly composed of fine grained plagioclase feldspar biotite and cordierite with or without orthopyroxene and or rare garnet interlayering of leucosome and mesosome mesosome is marked by an abrupt change of mineralogy and grain size and in rare cases a narrow melanosome such melanosomes rarely exceed cm in thickness and cm in length they comprise cordierite and biotite with or without rare orthopyroxene contacts between pegmatite and leucosome are also commonly enclosed by a biotitequartz rich melanosome which is finely layered with alternating orthopyroxene rich and orthopyroxene poor layers biotite is rare in leucosome of the stromatic migmatite where present it occurs as elongated grains mm in length biotite is commonly overgrown by large euhedral to subhedral garnet and or orthopyroxene scattered randomly oriented biotite inferred to be retrograde occurs preferentially in leucosomes clots of finegrained biotite and rare chlorite partially to completely replace othopyroxene and less commonly garnet in some samples and are also inferred to be retrograde inclusions in garnet are common and include magnetite ilmenite biotite and rare spinel orthopyroxene grains are euhedral mm across mesosome assemblages are markedly finer grained than those of the leucosomes mesosome grain size rarely exceeds mm quartz and feldspar grains are mostly anhedral to subhedral mm in length and are weakly aligned with leucosomes biotite flakes mm or less in diameter define and form the mesosomes cordierite grains up to diatexite displays a random schlieric structure being composed of chaotic patches with high proportions of leucosome and pegmatite mixed with patches of stromatic migmatite psammitic gneiss blocks and melanocratic cordierite layers pegmatite is generally aligned with and forms dykes and pods of various sizes centimeter scale leucosomes in enclosed blocks by pegmatite to define a flow banding pegmatitic leucosome forms in excess of of the diatexite outcrop many of these irregularly shaped bodies define folds and enclose metatexite blocks of stromatic migmatite and psammitic gneiss the metatexite blocks commonly preserve a foliation discordant to in surrounding leucosome and pegmatite range between and a few centimeters in width pegmatites comprise coarse grained feldspar and garnet quartz intergrowths that are commonly retrogressed to biotite garnet is commonly concentrated along the margins of pegmatite bodies where they are in contact with stromatic migmatite melanosome in diatexites comprises dark layers of they generally form discontinuous layers contained within pegmatitic veins and define a schlieric flow banding mafic layers up to in width
the assumption that social cognitive variables might not impact motor skill learning directly we did not find the association between situational interest and skill and knowledge gains this lack of association is consistent with hidi and anderson s measures its impact on learning might be mediated by students cognitive involvement and recognition previous research in physical education has revealed that students recognition of situational interest was associated with their physical engagement high situational interest in the learning task is likely to lead to a high physical engagement regardless of students skill this connection in this study we attributed this result to the low demand of physical movements in softball successful movement in softball may depend not on physical effort hut on tactics of play that demand for high cognitive understanding of the game unlike other team sports physical movement in softball is often in the form of short bursts after a long waiting period this scenario is especially true for beginning learners tasks were situationally interesting the opportunity for students to actually partake in the activity with high physical engagement was not sufficient conclusion overall the findings in this article suggest achievement goals and interest may be integrated into a holistic framework to explain learning and motivational behavior in physical education the idea that the integrated approach to achievement motivation can provide us with a relatively comprehensive picture of motivation is supported physical educators need to consider different functions of motivators in relation to learning process and achievement variables for developing effective motivational strategies in future studies they need to further explore the impact of different motivation constructs on learning in a variety of physical education settings abstract objective the author s purpose in this study was to assess perceptions of recreational physical aclivity facilities on a iinivcrsily campus participants four hundred and sixtyseven undergraduate students participated in this study results the author found a significant percentage difference between women and men concerning the availability found a significant percentage difference between women and men s perceptions concerning lhe availability of tennis courts twenty seven percent of women were unaware or did not know tennis courts were available for pa in comparison with of men awareness of recreational facilities revealed significant differences between freshmen and upperclassmen freshmen perceived campus conclusion more efforts to increase awareness of pa facilities are needed on university campuses college students are at a risk for a variety of risky health behaviors and are in a position to begin to learn how to control their lifestyle but unfortunately have not learned to develop many healthy behaviors these years may have an important role in establishing patterns of about how the design of university infrastructures and the placement of recreational facilities can influence the physical activity patterns of college students understanding how undergraduate men and women perceive the role of their environment and its association with pa could lead to changes in a range of built and external environments on college campuses throughout the united states encourages regular participation in vigorous and mt dei ute intensity pa to receive health benefits yet many college students remain inactive physical inactivity has been reported to contribute to more than preventable deaths a year in the united and has been described as a complex health behavior that is extremely difficult to modify when using traditional the proportion of students receiving information from their university on a variety of risky health behaviors regular participation in pa is a primary health behavior identified in this document although promoting pa has emerged as a public health priority identifying the external environment s influence on pa remains difficult of the pa determinants recognized from an ecological perspective studying physical and external environments with respect to the impact on activity patterns awareness accessibility opportunities to be active and aesthetic attributes are all environmental supports identified in the literature appearing to be related to pa behavior recent environmental interventions promoting walking biking and other recreational pa behaviors decision to use an exercise facility reed ainsworth wilson mixon and recently examined trail use behavior in a large southeastern community of the united states and found a low agreement between awareness and presence of walking trails french story and jeffery revealed in a national survey that adult respondents reported that having national college health risk survey revealed that approximately students were overweight and were not engaging in the recommended daily doses of pa only college students reported engaging in vigorous or moderate intensity pa respectively according to the national college health assessment conducted in male and female college students available data imply that convenient access to pa facilities encourages individuals to be physically active and supports ecological models of pa behavior ecological models include intra individual and extra individual influences on pa by assuming multiple levels of influence the designing of university infrastructure including the placement of recreational pa may influence the pa behavior of men and women differently perhaps the location and accessibility of recreational pa facilities influences the pa patterns of under and upperclassmen as well year in school is a criterion variable strongly considered by university officials when deciding where to house undergraduate students throughout the country awareness that increase the availability and awareness of university recreational facilities might be related to the pa behavior of students learning more about how individuals perceive the role of their environment and its influence on their pa patterns could lead to changes in built environments on university campuses during the past decades the number of individuals identified by the national center for educational statistics had some type of college experience the number of women attending higher education has also increased significantly in the enrollment rate of women aged to years was by this number had increased two fold women unfortunately lend to be insufficiently active to obtain health pa regularly equally alarming is the fact that physical inactivity is more common among women than it is among men the increases in enrollment rates of
improve by may of grade lightbown accounts for this result by exposed to at that time before the first data collection they had received intensive instruction on the progressive on the other hand in the time period preceding the second data collection in grade the learners received little input including ing instead verb forms practiced in grade had been limited to the simple present lightbown attributes the deterioration in ing to the biased input exposure that is that is she infers that intensive exposure to the target form without any contrast to the other form may have made it difficult to differentiate between the two in terms of any other structures along structural syllabi might prevent learners from incorporating target features into their il systems the learning teaching of the copula be the target form of the present study the copula be is a problematic item for japanese junior high school students to learn tode showed that more than half of the grade and grade students who had studied english for one year and two years respectively failed to supply be in obligatory contexts that that is in copular sentences and overused it in the context of the simple present full verb in other words the students had not succeeded in distinguishing the subject be predicative sentence pattern from the subject verb object sentence pattern correctly this phenomenon indicates that these students did not know the rule concerning where to supply the copula be that is the rule a linking verb that connects the subject and the subject predicative expressing the semantic role as attribute this may be ascribed to the difficulty in becoming aware of the semantic structure of the cs and the role of the copula be in it the concept of the cs is not easy for the teacher to explain in a way that junior high school learners can understand in addition structural differences between the english cs and the japanese cs since the japanese copula is attached to the end of the predicative it is difficult for the learner to understand its role as a word that links the subject to the predicative additionally some japanese css do not have a copula on the surface thus the suppliance rule of the copula be of english is not easy to teach explicitly to japanese junior high school learners of japanese css as a stepping stone to the understanding of the english cs tode examined differences between successful and unsuccessful learning of the english copula be by japanese learners in terms of their native language awareness of css the results revealed a relationship between success in the learning of the english copula be and nl awareness of css participants who were successful in learning be were also able to recognize japanese css although those who had the nl awareness had not necessarily succeeded in learning the english copula be the study shows that raising learners consciousness of japanese css may contribute to the understanding of the relationship between the subject and the subject predicative and the role of be in the english cs effective in the long run as well as junior high schools is based basically on grammatical syllabi and that the auxiliary be used in the progressive is not usually presented until the end of grade while the copula be and the simple present fv are presented early in grade thus even if explicit instruction of the role of the copula be succeeds in preventing overuses of be in the context of the simple present fv it is possible that the subsequent introduction of the auxiliary fv causes confusion and overuse of be in the simple present fv context this prediction seems reasonable considering lightbown s finding that sequential presentation of grammatical forms without any contrast with other forms caused confusion it is necessary therefore to examine if the learning from the proposed explicit instruction of the copula be is sustained beyond the introduction of the progressive treatment implicit instruction and explicit instruction to facilitate the learning of the cs and the simple present fv sentence the former instruction directs the learners to memorize exemplars without any focus on the target structures and the latter raises awareness of a distinction between the two types of structure through raising nl awareness the effect of each instruction is investigated before and after the posed do explicit instruction and implicit instruction have positive effects on japanese junior high school learners suppliance of the copula be in obligatory contexts before the auxiliary be is introduced what are their relative effects effects do the effects of explicit and implicit instruction in hold after the auxiliary be is introduced do the effects of explicit and implicit instruction in hold after the auxiliary be is introduced english teaching begins as an academic subject in the first year of junior high school one academic year consists of weeks typically three minute english lessons per week are offered outside the classroom students have few opportunities to communicate in thus exemplars to which they are exposed are extremely limited in quantity although the current course of study defines the goal of english teaching in junior high school as developing the students basic practical communication abilities and tries to shift the emphasis from the structural to the communicative aspect of language the syllabi used in classrooms are basically of the structural type in other words grammatical items to be taught are order in which they are to be taught these items are taught separately assuming that synthesis is totally the learner s job as in the context
having to be inscribed in the text in tune with lakoff and johnson lakoff s case language and seem to be based on introspective data invented data or data elicited from informants moreover most of the sentence examples with metaphors in lakoff have pronouns as subjects just as in she erupted but in the whole of the bank of english the majority of the instances of erupted do not have as with the million word newspaper corpus the overwhelming majority of instances of erupted in the whole of the bank of english relate not to volcanoes but to negative human phenomena and human phenomena represented lexically rather than human beings represented through subject pronouns the phraseological approach as afforded through corpus techniques of investigation shows up the problems with concocting examples as well as those arising from failing to consider erupt police open fire as soweto erupts again i move on to looking at the present tense form erupts as this is the form in the headline since the results are similar to those for erupted my coverage here will be briefer than in section erupts has collocates in common with erupted with the highest co occurrence for erupts being violence as with erupted there is a strong semantic there are instances of volcano collocating with erupts but the score is at borderline significance at there are instances of erupt in the present tense of these instances occur in headlines in hard news in contrast erupted occurs in only two headlines and neither of these is from hard news texts volcano makes up per cent of the total lexical collocates of erupt in hard news text bodies per cent of the total lexical collocates of erupt in headlines this figure is still only per cent collocates of erupt in headlines overwhelmingly have a semantic preference for human phenomena such as disputes the prosody is usually a negative one as with erupted in sum and similar to the evidence for erupted corpus evidence suggests erupts in the soweto headline is not likely to be associated with volcanoes for for regular readers of the hard news register to obtain a better sense of phraseological behavior of the lemma erupt let me now go a little further and compare the results for erupt and erupted with those for the noun form eruption in the million word newspaper corpus interestingly collocates for eruption are overwhelmingly connected with volcanoes or related geological phenomena lava scientists tremors violent eruptions volcanic earthquakes ash violence volcano volcanoes the relatively high frequencies and scores for volcanic provide evidence that eruption is much more likely to have meanings associated with volcanoes in news than erupted and erupt i looked more generally across the million word bank of english which also contains academic texts amongst two book subcorpora with this wider exploration i found that eruption either in hard news or academic texts is predominantly used to refer to volcanoes here is one example from an academic source potassium has been given the symbol from the arabic kali it is one of the commoner elements in the earth s crust and indeed in our own bodies overall in contrast to erupt and erupted there is a much greater tendency for eruption to have meanings associated with volcanoes and in a way which would appear to be not so register specific it would seem also that in hard news the semantic extension of eruption is is much more restricted than for erupted and erupts this is also reflected in only two instances of a positive meaning for eruption that of applause in other words delexicalization of eruption in collocation is less likely to happen in hard news than with erupt and erupted this has an interesting corollary if the writer of the soweto text had chosen eruption in describing soweto then the corpus evidence suggests that volcanic meanings would be more likely to be associated with soweto then have chimed with lee s interpretation swept through police with automatic rifles and in camouflage uniform headed the marchers off after they had swept through a roadblock had swept through lee interprets swept through as metaphorising the sowetan marchers as a natural force like a river with the agentive element but in another sense it is not in line with this book since lee takes a lakoffian johnsonian approach i would expect him to generate a macro inference to a source domain perhaps brooms or cleaning equipment or something else which is connected to sweeping there are instances of had swept through in the whole of the bank of english there is only one instance of the broom meaning of swept through of swept are delexicalized that is there are no associations of brooms cleaning equipment etc including eight instances that occur in the hard news register swept through is something akin to a phrasal verb with a phrasal meaning of rapid movement in earlier sections it was found that has been simmering erupted and erupt collocate with negative human phenomena in grammatical subject position what was not found in significant numbers were human agents as common collocates however in five of the instances for had swept through in hard news human agents collocate with had swept through here are two such co texts that handed the whole of the key takhar province including the taliban s main garrison town of taloqan to the alliance but the alliance army had swept through other provinces as each fell mountain ranges near the tajikistan border for a last stand on sunday morning serbian special forces wearing white jumpsuits and black masks that showed only their eyes had swept through this kosovo village breaking down doors and demanding to see the young men eight of the men they found were marched hands on heads into a narrow gully in the piney woods is a human agent it must be said however that for had swept through there are only a small number of instances in the bank of english and so there is a danger of generalising too far beyond this data
directive in spite of the attempts to safeguard their safety in the months after september there were hundreds of other incidents against people descent several of the reported incidents were perpetuated by white people and people of color within these communities of color demonstrations of grief anger backlash and patriotism entailed a reworking of allegiance and implication to the very state that imprisons them wearing the bindi fits into a range of other bodily marked ways such as the adorning flag pins and scarves that were used to display patriotism safety and differ other scales people and nations were being organized into us and them geography both internally within the united states as well as externally was rearranged this rearranging of geography rested on a particular understanding of time whereby potential threats needed to be identified monitored and policed justifying an entire range of preemptive measures national security through this doctrine of the preemptive strike was redefined so that the measures taken secure the future these negotiations of internal and external threat through particular discourses of time and space in the united states find resonance with the hindu right in india in the next section i examine two instances the first of external threat where the indian parliament was attacked by armed men from two extremist organizations originating in pakistan and the second of the doctrine of internal threat in the construction of muslim minorities in india as the nation by the hindu right in the second instance i examine discourses justifying a brutal pogrom against muslims in the western state of gujarat in both these instances the hindu right crafts an image of the muslim perpetrator as unchanging through history this understanding of history then justifies the recrafting of geography in the subcontinent geopolitical alliance among neoconservatives the prime minister of india atal bihari vajpayee said i have assured president bush that we stand ready to cooperate with him in the investigations into this crime and to strengthen our partnership in leading international efforts to ensure that terrorism never succeeds again since september the alliance between india and the united states has been growing stronger for the united states india is a geographically strategic location with proximity to china and the middle east for the hindu right wing bjp led coalition government in its attempt to position itself along with the united states it was framed as being on the same side as the united states fighting a common muslim extremist enemy this was a deliberate political and geographical maneuver that served the hindu right s agenda of crafting a pure hindu nation by dismantling the place of pakistan and muslim minorities in the subcontinent its external threat to security since independence in india and pakistan have fought three wars in and the most recent in in kargil where both countries came closest to nuclear exchange the bjp s political maneuvers with the united states were in effort to use the strategic alliance in order to gain advantage over pakistan for instance in vajpayee s address to the nation he remarked for years we in india have been alerting others to the fact a scourge for all of humanity that what happens in mumbai one day is bound to happen elsewhere tomorrow that the poison that propels mercenaries and terrorists to kill and maim in jammu and kashmir will impel the same sort to blow up people elsewhere following the tenor of bajpayee s address the deputy prime minister of india lal krishna advani offered the help of indian intelligence agencies in capturing terrorists both in afghanistan and in pakistan the coupling of deliberate and colin powell s response acknowledged the maneuver by agreeing that the war against terror included terrorists in the embattled region of jammu and kashmir he said as president bush has made clear we are going after terrorism in a comprehensive way not just in the present instance of al qaeda and osama bin laden but terrorism as it affects nations around the world to include the kind of terrorism that affects india if pakistan embodies an external threat to national security indian muslims who constitute approximately the population and are the third largest concentration of muslims in the world are deemed by the hindu right as an internal threat to the sovereignty of the nation since september the discourse on terrorism that inter twines terror with muslims and islam influenced particularly by the united states was used by the hindu right to further bolster its claims of pakistan and the muslim minority in india praful bidwai a popular indian columnist articulates the implications of the us discourse on terror for india since september terrorism strictly of the non state and preferably islamic variety has become a powerful shibboleth which is not easy to attack given today s islam ophobic climate particularly in the united states many indians who would have preferred to be fence sitters on the issue of now sympathize with the view that there is an organic link between islam and terrorism and that indian muslims are partial to jihad attack on the parliament building on december the indian parliament house was attacked by a small group of armed men in the attack six indian security personnel were killed and twelve others were injured and all the armed men were killed before it was even known who was responsible speculation was flooded with references to islamic to bolster the speculation in an already islamaphobic climate the deputy prime minister advani alleged that the group of armed men were of afghan origin because they did not have indian faces a discourse of chromatic and inherent differences between us and them is a persistent lexicon of the hindu right in distin guishing hindus from muslims however the ability to make public statements that those responsible were afghani relied on the global after september linking afghans and muslims with terrorism the similarity between the attack on the indian parliament and the september attacks on the world
the effects attributable to individual programme components cannot be partitioned possible sources of effects include exercise increased medical nursing or allied healthercise only trials were available for pooling in this review and therefore it is difficult to draw conclusions regarding the effects of exercise alone in future trials it may be of benefit to identify which patients derive most benefit from multidisciplinary or exercise intervention during hospitalization conflicts of interest intervention and the role of theory empiricism and experience in children with motor impairment abstract purpose this paper presents a framework for examining the different approaches to intervention in children with motor impairment such that more informed decisions are made by researchers and clinicians in their respective fields method studies are examined using a framework employing theoretical empirical and experiential evidence a range experiential evidence a range of interventions are analysed and are applied to the conditions of cerebral palsy and developmental coordination disorder the theoretical empirical and experiential evidence is analysed by an examination of such methods as constraint induced therapy bobath techniques bimanual coordination methods sensory integration therapy and functional task approaches all set within a development and learning context results the results show that evidence three parts of the framework namely theoretical empirical and experiential are often in conflict with the each other and it is not surprising that there is confusion in the field about the efficacy of the various methods conclusions first it is recommended that more complete information is required on the methods employed from the three areas of our framework secondly researchers clinicians and other practitioners should examine the evidence from these needs of their research or practice before embarking on action introduction the field of motor impairment covers a wide range of conditions that attracts researchers and clinicians from a variety of professional and academic backgrounds such as health psychology and education it is both logical and practical for colleagues in these fields to be interested in the intervention process and grown up as various professionals have developed their different approaches to intervention disagreements have emerged over the most appropriate methods the aim of this article is to provide a framework for debate while examining some of these methods addressing the two conditions of cerebral palsy and developmental coordination disorder to intervention the proposal is to mirror the aim espoused by john morton in his book understanding developmental disorders when he notes that he is providing a tool to think about developmental disorders or in this case the different approaches to intervention in children with motor impairment the analysis of selected methods is most appropriate in their respective fields when examining developmental disorders morton uses the framework of biology cognition and behavior as his guide for example using this to describe autism he shows biology to include genetic and brain differences that would also involve familial connections cognitive differences would conventions not acquired behavioral differences are manifested through for example socially strange behavior no pretend play and delay in language acquisition by displaying this type of model morton provides a way to examine the various causal attributes assigned to autistic individuals enabling logical comparisons to be made across both clinical and research settings impairment namely those with the conditions of cp and dcd the aim promotes comparisons across studies and clinical settings and enables decisions to be made according to individual situations the manner in which this is being proposed is to examine approaches from theoretical empirical and experiential perspectives it is argued that these are made on inappropriate evidence it is recognized that the approaches examined here do not represent the full range of methods of intervention it is also recognized that the approaches very often do not have sufficient information across all three criteria however indicative examples have been chosen to illustrate how analysis of approaches can be undertaken require elaboration the new shorter oxford english dictionary provides the following definitions theory the knowledge or exposition of the general principles or methods of an art or science especially as distinguished from the practice of it systematic conception of something based on general principles independent of the things to been developed through observation thought and indeed empirical evidence theoretical explanations have also been borrowed from other cognate disciplines that are relevant to the field empiricism guided by or employing observation and experiment rather than theory empiricism usually incorporates formal experimentation as experimentation to a greater or lesser degree experience actual observation of or practical acquaintance with facts or events considered as a sources of knowledge by the very nature of experience being based in the practical field and probably characterized by informal observation makes it difficult to assess but it is important to examine this observing and listening to are employing although these are set out as discrete distinct entities overlaps do occur and later it will be shown that placing evidence in these categories can be difficult in some instances however this does not detract from the overall point that it is an appropriate framework to assist in the evaluation of the various approaches development and learning both cp and dcd the definition includes the childhood developmental period in addition an understanding of the learning process is seen as a precursor to providing cues for teaching new skills for example the condition of dcd is usually defined as involving children whose performance in daily activities requiring motor coordination is substantially below that expected from it is also implicit that the condition has involved some faulty learning similarly cp is a non progressive but not unchanging disorder of movement and or posture due to an insult to or anomaly of the developing brain which impacts on developmental progression and the learning of new skills it can be asked of both conditions how much based upon principles of learning if the disorder is a breakdown in learning and it follows in some way a developmental progression or occurs during the developmental period the logic is that we utilize these two
who do not like to conform to standards and participants from collectivistic high context culture who are more likely to be conformists influence the willingness to find a product s problems during the usability test focus group interview will the of participants from individualistic low context culture who emphasize their freedom and self centrism and participants from collectivistic high context culture who emphasize others face and collaboration influence the participants attitude to express opinions during focus group interview participants in this study selecting people who can well represent individualistic low context culture and collectivistic high context culture was very important in addition variables except the cultural difference must be kept under control first of all we selected the netherlands as an individualistic low context culture and korea as a collectivistic high context culture according to the individualism figure from one of hofstede s cultural dimensions then from each country six university students who are in their and are studying engineering were selected in both countries male to was one to one and none of the participants had previous experience with any of the tests experiment design three methods were selected to conduct the user experience research in two different cultures discoveries of the research process and result was qualitatively compared and analyzed design of next generation s portable media device was selected as the topic of the experiment for the purpose of applying three methods and also due to the perception on technology trend in order to observe answers to four questions stated above each user research was designed as follows probe in this experiment gaver s cultural probe that emphasizes ambiguity and freedom was selected and the format of sensitizing workbook which is a part of context mapping study was borrowed in order not to compromise diligence the task con sisted of days of workbook and days of photography to observe how participants of korea and the to ambiguous and open ended tasks during workbook writing and photographing we provided very expandable and self interpretable tasks that can highly reflect an individual s own experiences the following are examples of the workbook tasks day when and what matching game that connects the type of media and its context must also add explanation day media diary record each media related activity on a timeline stickers are provided day my list of things one wishes to include in a favorite box and write reasons for it stickers are provided moreover concrete terms were avoided but more comprehensive terms that could be interpreted in several different ways were used in the workbook we provided the workbook with a plenty of white spaces to escape from formality of writing to see how well participants can make use of the free form usability test to observe participants eagerness to find problems during the the participants were allowed to talk about the product s problems while and after using it for given tasks to ensure that the product itself or the nature of the task was not affected by the difference in culture we gave out seven different tasks such as menu navigation setup media player control and others on two kinds of products focus group interview focus group interview was selected to discover how comfortable a participant is about experiences and thoughts in a group in the experiment the type of focus group interview for the product concept development stage was used results user experience research was done once in the netherlands and once in korea the first experiment was performed in delft the netherlands at delft university of technology and the second experiment was performed in daejeon korea at korea advanced institute of science and technology after the experiment the feedback and results were compared and analyzed focusing on each user experience research method probe participant s feedback during probe period which is the procedural aspect and sufficiency of workbook writing and photography which is the result aspect were analyzed participant s feedback even though both dutch participants and korean participants felt the ambiguity of terms on the workbook they attempted to interpret those ambiguous terms on their own to complete the task without any help wrote in the workbook almost everyday but korean participants revealed through the comments page of the workbook that they had trouble writing in the workbook everyday so sometimes they wrote several days of work all at once sufficiency we compared and analyzed dutch and korean participants workbooks and photographs in order to discover how sufficient each group was in expressing their experiences in the workbook and how diligent they were in taking photographs dutch participants sufficiency was higher than that of korean participants in terms of workbook task and photography instead of giving detailed answers korean partici pants gave short answers to workbook questions not only that they were also poorer in applying various forms such as drawing and applying provided stickers to the work book tasks usability test for the usability test protocol analysis was used on verbal comments and behaviors of participants in order to compare criticize a problem and attitude towards participation frequency of product criticism including both discovering a problem with a product and strength of a product tendency towards self criticism and non user role behavior were set as the coding scheme and measured eagerness of usability test criticism of fig shows that dutch participants criticized the products more actively dutch participants more frequently discovered a product s weakness and also its strength self criticism dutch participants believed that most problems that occurred during the test were due to the problem with the product however relatively speaking korean participants believed that problems that occurred during the test were due to their mistakes however it varied greatly from individual to individual discrediting the conclusion that korean participants have more tendency towards self criticism presumably the well educated engineering students thus they were comfortable with the
measures estimation the direct phrase based confidence measure and the count based confidence measure calculated over best lists show the best performance the confidence measures based on ibm model normally perform worse than the system based or direct phrase based methods the reason for this is that the ibm model is a very simple model that does not consider the context of a target word at all confidence measure yields better confidence estimation performance than the best single feature however the word posterior probabilities proposed here proved to be strong stand alone features rescoring with confidence measures was shown to improve translation quality the smt system investigated here was the one that was ranked with confidence measures children s socialization into cleaning practices a cross cultural perspective abstract focusing on everyday hygiene and household cleaning tasks this study examines the socialization practices and parenting strategies that foster familial and cultural values such as autonomy interdependence and responsibility through the micro analysis of videotaped family interaction and rome this article looks at actual practices and activity trajectories to reveal the ways in which families organize themselves attach values to different aspects of activities and build diverse perspectives on authoritativeness the comparative analysis points to differences across cultures families and activities in the style and amount of parental control over cleaning tasks and the number of options given to children in the process of diverse parenting and conversational strategies reveal how particular practices may lead to the construction or limitation of children s agency introduction hygiene and household cleaning are central to the organization of family groups like many other activities in the home the organization and accomplishment of cleaning tasks through interaction and practices contributes to the social order of a family through everyday communicative practices and activities children processes of cleaning and simultaneously into particular family interaction styles and moral understandings this article argues that cleaning and hygiene tasks are crossroads where socialization and organizational practices meet parents often encourage children to perform tasks not only for organizational purposes but also for the socialization into certain skills and values as its own goal socialization goals that parents may feel are important to foster in their such as responsibility interdependence or autonomy are often imbued with cultural and familial ideologies and assumptions this article explores children s socialization into cleaning practices in eight families from los angeles and eight families from rome to illuminate the ways in which families organize themselves within a household create family social order and pass onto children cultural and familial values it examines diverse parenting and conversational and household cleaning tasks and the possible implications of various strategies and practices particularly focusing on the construction and limitation of children s agency anthropological reflections on cleanliness and organization of the immediate material world show that such practices are related to a sense of moral cognitive and material order the saw heightened scholarly attention to notions of cleanliness greatly due to mary douglas publication purity and danger and its success in both the anthropological and the sociological arenas douglas work rendered cleanliness inseparable from ideas of cognitive and ritual order according to douglas things are not considered dirty in and of themselves but because of where they stand in a system of categories classifying something as dirt helps to bring order and establishes boundaries for a given culture she suggests that things that exist at the borders of society society or on the boundaries between categories threaten social order because they do not fit neatly into a society s classification of the world though it emerged from observations in religion the model proposed in purity and danger was quickly applied to many other domains and the connection between rituals of purification and social order soon saturated discourse on cleanliness while notions of cleanliness in the scientific community have often gotten lost in meanings and symbols this article turns the lens back on the place of its origins the home and the person taking a fresh look at cleaning as a set of practices the study presented here returns the issue of cleaning back to the household space by drawing on a two site study of children s apprenticeship into hygiene and household cleaning tasks of different cultural backgrounds and countries of residence deal with cleaning cues us to questions concerning perspectives on socialization social organization and hierarchies of values and socialization goals in various families and communities echoing neff examinations of parenting practices can illuminate the various ways parents meet multiple socialization goals such goals as independence and autonomy and connectedness in parent child relationships are often mutually supportive rather than mutually exclusive elements of different values and goals can be interwoven through various practices and even into one activity or interaction certain values can and often do carry more weight in a community however instead of focusing on the relative emphasis of autonomy and interdependence in different cultures this article argues that it is more useful identify the practices that foster ideologies and socialization goals within and across families here we would also like to note that parenting strategies such as exerting parental control over tasks or offering options to children varies not only across communities and families but also depending on different tasks and activity domains according to social domain theory as articulated by psychologists conventional reasoning is based on concerns for cultural and familial rules routines tradition and authority that facilitate and maintain social organization the the prudential domain pertains to safety and health prudential rules regulate acts that have negative physical consequences to the self finally the personal domain includes actions that pertain only to oneself and falls beyond the realm of social and moral regulation instead of being subject to right or wrong these issues call for preference and choice in studies examining white middle class mothers and their children nucci and weber and nucci and smetana found that personal choice and freedom are often viewed by
sex number of partners in the past year drug use and drug injection should be negatively associated with condom knowing that condoms reduce hiv and or std transmission awareness of this function of condoms may increase acquiring the disease more vivid and might thereby increase condom use as might the experience of being tested for hiv having had an std prior to survey if individuals learn from experience acquiring a sexually transmitted disease should increase subsequent condom use by making the threat of acquiring an std through unprotected sex more immediate be more likely to use condoms in encounters with women out of habit or a desire to protect their partners locality our data distinguish three types of survey sites moscow st petersburg other urban areas and rural settlements we expect condom use to decline across these three categories because russia s historic capitals are the most exposed to modern norms and culture and lower for sexual encounters within relationships that are closer and more enduring these relationships are more likely to be monogamous and trust between the partners should be higher we expect the lowest level of condom use in relationships where the partner is a spouse or cohabiting partner higher use where the partner is a friend still higher where the partner is an acquaintance who meet in random environments such as in the street or at a bar than with acquaintances who meet in more habitual places such as in the workplace or at a friend s home because trust is likely to be greater between acquaintances who meet in familiar environments we also interpret missing values for partners characteristics such as age nature and duration of relationship and because most missing values stem from hard to say responses partner s age if younger respondents use condoms more frequently so would younger partners consumption of alcohol immediately prior to sex event alcohol consumption might decrease condom use because it can lower risk aversion duration of relationship condom use might be higher partners as the duration of a relationship increases so should trust and commitment thus condom use should does the respondent s partner have other partners or use injection drugs condom use should be higher for sex events with nonmonogamous partners and drug injectors because such events pose a greater risk of exposure to hiv aids and other infections either more likely or less likely to use condoms in extramarital encounters we measure this likelihood using a dummy variable for encounters in which the respondent is married but the partner is someone other than his her spouse methods of analysis we estimate binary logistic regressions for the probability of condom use in a particular sex event involving individual is an intercept is a shift parameter allowing the baseline odds to change from to xikt denote individual characteristics that are constant across sex events within a year but can vary across years denote characteristics of the sex event that can vary within individuals and year and is a residual for simplicity we treat locality type as an xikt variable because the sampling location impossible and these crude measures of locality are time invariant because multiple sex events are observed for the same individual the observations are not independent and unobserved characteristics of individuals that affect condom use must be controlled therefore we estimate our main models in three ways first we apply standard maximum likelihood estimation with robust standard stata software second we estimate random effects models as follows the terms in are identical to those in except is decomposed into a person specific time invariant component and a stochastic event specific component third in order to verify that within person variation accounts for at least some of the effects we estimate control for all between person variation they are estimated on the sample of events drawn from respondents who report at least two events and exhibit variation both in condom use and in at least one event level characteristic across events otherwise the person level fixed effect perfectly predicts condom use and the corresponding events are omitted this feature makes the fixed effects estimates much less have data for few events per person we provide the fixed estimates solely as a check on the random effects estimates and as a test for whether within person across event variation is linked to the event level characteristics evident in our we run all models on males and females separately because the pattern of effects is likely to differ by sex event level variables we also estimate an expanded model on the subset of sex events reported in by respondents who were observed in this approach lets us incorporate covariates that were assessed only in as well prevent transmission of hiv aids and other stds results and discussion in table we present descriptive statistics by survey round for sexually active male and female rlms respondents aged the sample distributions are reasonable for all the variables and the distributions are generally stable across waves despite the replacement of some these sample characteristics cannot include only those who report having experienced at least one sex event during the previous year this sampling restriction might explain why the proportion of never married women is smaller than the proportion of never married men in the analysis samples never married women may have been less likely than never married men to have had sex in the year prior to the women to smoke to drink frequently and to use injection drugs the large proportions of men and women who have been tested for hiv infection reflect russia s extensive testing policy several statistically significant changes across waves within sex are noteworthy most importantly we observe an increase in the proportion of males who report using a as the increase among the male respondents who were interviewed both in and comparing the males interviewed only in with the males interviewed only in the increase is more modest and not significant this finding provides some indication that
the category of exact inference algorithms and the boyen koller algorithm a parameterized procedure that depending on the parameters provided may return exact as well as approximate in the radyban tool the user can select either the jt or the bk implementation the radyban tool tool functionalities the main features of radyban allow the user to edit a bn and draw inferences on it edit a dft and automatically convert a dft into the corresponding dbn on which both predictive and diagnostic inference can then be drawn items and are described below item depicted in fig editing a dbn bns can be directly used as a reliability modeling and analysis tool in this case the reliability engineer can design the model by resorting to the basic formalism features in particular for dbns for each system component a variable is introduced at inter slice dependencies are finally modeled by connecting variables at the anterior layer with those variables at the ulterior layer depending on them and by properly quantifying such a dependence for example if the modeling follows a combinatorial style like in fts the second point may possibly result in and may then be involved if one has to model dynamic aspects of system functionalities like those represented by the dynamic gates of a dft by means of the tool s gui which has been built relying on the drawnet graphical tool the user is allowed to directly draw the desired dbn structure by labeling nodes arcs to identify temporal related copies of the same variable the cpts can be easily inserted relying on a user friendly functionality in which every row is automatically completed by calculating the last entry as the difference between and the sum of the other values additionally it is possible to identify query nodes and to provide a stream of observations each one labeled with its observation time when the network has been fully characterized the user can choose to perform a filtering and prediction inference or a smoothing inference by setting the desired time horizon and the desired time step up to time every time instants notice that is conceptually different from this means that if the system components have an exponential failure rate given in fault hour and and then if the anterior layer while the results will presented as results at time results at time results at time etc of course the difference between a filtering and a smoothing inference relies on the fact that in the former case while computing the probability at time ptpt only the evidence gathered up to time is considered on the contrary in the case of smoothing the whole evidence clear that the specific task of prediction can be obtained by asking for a time horizon greater than the last time point considered for an observation the classical computation of the unreliability of the te is a special case of filtering with an empty stream of observations smoothing may be for instance exploited in order to in the radyban tool algorithms for filtering and smoothing on dbn have been implemented by resorting to intel pnl a set of open source libraries to which we have provided some minor adjustments editing a dft modeling the failure mode of a system as a dbn might dft becomes a high level formalism allowing the user to express in a straightforward way the relations between the components of the system whose modeling in terms of dbn primitives would be less comfortable the dft editor allows the modeler to resort to standard dft constructs as well as to specify additional properties for the analysis in fact the a given time point on the dft the user can also specify the analysis time step as well as the mission time and the inference algorithm to be adopted on the corresponding dbn for the required analysis this information is directly inherited by the correspon ding dbn when translation is required in this way the through which all the needed data for dbn inference can be given in input particularly important from the quantitative analysis point of view is another parameter that the user can set on the dft the discretization step since dbn is a discrete time formalism a suitable discretization step must be defined in case failure specification on the system components lc given a discretization step we can characterize the failure probability of as failed at time tjc working at time lcd in terms of the corresponding dbn represents the amount of time separating the anterior layer from the ulterior layer there is a trade off between the approximation provided to the continuous case computation but greater is the time horizon required for the analysis in fact if failure rates are given as fault hour and we set a mission time of hours a discretization step will require analysis up to step while a discretization step will only require analysis up to step because a smaller number of time slices have to be considered graphical interface description fig shows a screenshot of the graphical interface of our tool it is mainly composed by three windows the main window allows the user to draw the dft model while in the window named property page of the main window the user can run the conversion and the analysis of the dft model at the end of such process the obtained results are displayed in the window called solver execution translating dynamic gates in this section we present the conversion of the wsp gate in the corresponding dbn the rules for converting the other in which the same pool of spares is shared across a set of wsp in this case each primary component is allowed to request the items in the pool in a precise order if more than one is still dormant as an example let us consider a situation where two components a and can be substituted by two spares sa and sb in particular sa is a s spare and
variables for the canadian and german samples separately it is evident that all integrity tests showed consistently substantial relationships with both criteria of the personality dimensions and were almost as highly related to criteria as were integrity tests whereas bivariate criterion related validities of the remaining factors ranged from negligibly small to moderate with the american overt test the gap between convergent and divergent correlations with other integrity measures was larger the two overt integrity measures correlated at a very high of whereas the american overt and german personality based integrity tests correlated at overall these findings american integrity tests across countries and the pattern of convergent and divergent relations supports the validity of the distinction between types of integrity tests in addition to bivariate analyses we performed a simple omnibus test of structural equivalence between the two countries using multisample structural equations modeling imposing equality constraints on correlations between those variables that were uniformly measured in the canadian supported the equivalence of the two matrices although model was statistically significant with this relatively large sample the ratio as well as other applicable fit indices indicated good to excellent fit separate tests of structural equivalence for the two former parts of germany closer fit of correlation matrices between canadian and west german samples rmsea remaining indices between and than between east and west german samples rmsea other indices between and because multisample comparisons indicated acceptable to good fit for the assumption of equivalence on one hand but some variation in two culture comparisons on the other countries and for canadian west german and east german participants separately criterion related validity comparisons across integrity tests as outlined previously we employed a hierarchical multiple regressions approach to test our hypotheses on the different sources of integrity counter productivity relationships within the personality sphere across types of integrity tests we expected that the big five add more to the prediction of criteria beyond the overt than beyond the personality based test and we expected to find the opposite pattern for in each analysis demographic controls were entered first followed by integrity at step followed by the big five at step or alternatively at step we also report data on analyses with all personality dimensions entered in the final step test and each criterion separately but collapsed across samples we report three different types of effect sizes adjusted and and an index labeled relative increment of explained below adjusted takes into account possible effects of differences in sample size and number of predictors across analyses which is important because we partially compare the single construct of with a combination of the big five cohen s on the other hand controls for possible biases in attributable to the fact that incremental validities in hierarchical regression depend in part on how much criterion variance was already explained in previous steps and thus on the order in which variables are entered integrity tests than in this situation one may find no support for hypotheses and at the same time overestimate support for hypothesis given the overall expected pattern of differences holds to control for this possible effect we computed a relative index based on sets of four effect sizes which is computed in the following way we took the difference between the incremental effect sizes of and test and from that result we subtracted the corresponding difference with regard to the overt integrity test in the adjacent column to the left for example in the first comparison reported in table we computed the difference between adjusted of models and in the second data column and subtracted the corresponding difference in the first data column which gives an overall relative increment of if our hold the resulting overall increment should become positive effectively this measure estimates the joint effects of the differences between types of integrity tests specified in our hypotheses while holding average differences between ffm dimensions and constant integrity test scores largely on the most conservative estimates of adjusted that is we compare the adjusted of ffm dimensions beyond overt and personality based integrity tests in adjacent columns to test hypothesis and do the same for to test hypothesis the remaining effect sizes are reported cursorily in the tables because of their distinctive features notably inspection of these additional effect sizes does not stronger effects than adjusted we scaled all outcomes such that a positive sign indicates support for our hypotheses as results in table are in part based on different samples and on integrity tests developed in different countries and languages the comparability of findings varies within the table most directly comparable are results between the german overt and personality samples and the same origin of the integrity tests the two american integrity tests share the same cultural origin but the samples do not overlap we focus on these two comparisons in order to keep the number of alternative explanations at a minimum and had trivial effects in this group details are available from the first author the expected pattern as specified in hypotheses and emerged in all cases but one specifically the big five added more to the prediction of both work and academic counterproductive behavior beyond the overt than beyond the personality based german integrity test whereas had lower incremental personality based integrity measure for both work and academic counterproductive behaviors similarly the big five accounted for more variance in the work counterproductive behavior criterion beyond the overt american integrity test than beyond the personality based measure and this pattern was reversed when was added instead of ffm dimensions in contrast patterns contrary to our hypotheses the american integrity tests predicting cab the adjusted of the ffm dimensions was larger beyond personality based than beyond overt integrity but the reverse pattern was observed for averaged across comparisons however both hypothesis and were supported the mean adjusted of ffm dimensions was larger beyond overt than beyond personality based or and the opposite was found when was added to integrity tests especially when sample size was
a more complex process than previously believed it was also becoming increasingly clear from the study of historically recorded volcanic that their impact was rarely fatal to settlements and if so only on a small scale and for a short period in vilhjalmur orn vilhjalmsson started a re excavation of stong the most celebrated site from the expedition with the aim to test s dating of the site s abandonment vilhjalmsson felt that the artifactual evidence from stong including a sherd of grimston ware from the thirteenth century did not accord well with the a date in his trenches evidence of the hekla eruption underneath archaeological deposits which were stratigraphically below the layers of pumice removed in the excavation vilhjalmsson s explanation for this is that the pumice infilling the ruins and thus post dating them was the a tephra but redeposited due to wind erosion long after the actual eruption vilhjalmsson s hypothesis is thus that stong and by implication the in the valley was not ruined by the a eruption but survived into the early or mid thirteenth century their abandonment at that date was however due to environmental degradation to which the a eruption as well as subsequent hekla eruptions in a a and a had contributed in no small way vilhjalmsson s hypothesis has not gained general acceptance no doubt primarily because he failed to have his tephra identifications ratified by scholars continue to attribute the abandonment of the valley to a catastrophic eruption of hekla in a figure the location study area showing the fallout from hekla and the location of research questions the dating of landscape change and settlement of jorsdrdalur remains an important issue in icelandic archaeology firstly the valley contains a critical mass of archaeological sites more than a third of all excavated viking age sites in iceland making the dating of these remains a critical issue for typological dating of structures and artifacts secondly jorsardalur has a central place in the debate about the nature of human interaction in iceland it is of crucial importance to understand the processes that led to settlement and landscape change in i jorsardaliu and fresh insights into this issue will have implications far outside the limits of the valley a key concept here is the notion of a farm by this do we mean a set of buildings or a discrete area of land the distinction is important since although a building may be abandoned the surrounding land may continue to be either a similar or different way than before in pjorsardalur several quite different situations may have developed across the valley as a whole settlement sites may have been abandoned in the aftermath of the a eruption and land use may also have changed with a substantial reduction of grazing the abandonment of home fields and other fodder producing areas and a change in woodland utilization alternatively although permanent occupation of farm houses may have have been some continued episodic and casual occupation of the buildings until they fell into complete disrepair and collapsed land use may have continued essentially unaltered another possibility is that in addition to temporary use some form of permanent occupation could have also continued the important point is that between the extremes of continuity and abandonment there are a number of different possibilities and key information exists in the landscape as well as on that can be a used to address these questions the central issue we wish to explore concerns the nature of landscape change in the aftermath of the a eruption of hekla and we hope to establish the rate and extent of land surface stabilization after the tephra fall in the absence of continued grazing pressure we could expect surface stabilization in areas with pre existing soil and vegetation on timescales of years to decades especially where the pre existing vegetation and shrubs in contrast long periods of surface instability are likely to indicate continued disturbance by animals approaches and methods tephrochronology has provided valuable if at times debated dating control for excavated sites in but it has not been extended into the surrounding landscape to determine patterns of past environmental changes even though this is one of the great strengths of tephrochronology originally highlighted by porarinsson iceland this development has provided key insights lies close to an ancient routeway through pjorsadalur on the edge of deflated areas of black sand and surrounded by surviving patches of soils grasslands and patches of scrub woodland geomorphological mapping provides the spatial context data from seven soil profiles were used that contained a total of identified tephra deposits and were recorded at altitudes between asl around the gully system in addition an profile at on the edge of nearby woodland was recorded that contains a further eleven identified tephras also a short sequence often tephras and related stratigraphy was recorded near to stong exposed sections of stratigraphy approximately cm in width were created and layers were logged to a resolution of mm with samples of key tephra layers collected for chemical analysis the tephrochronological framework is based on the work of orarinsson with some key on later studies by gronvold et al halflisason et al larsen larsen and larsen dugmore and newton and zielinski et al soil sections were chosen to assess change in specific parts of the landscape individual tephra isochrones were traced across the area to consider land surfaces at particular times with the geometry of layers used to infer the shape of past land surfaces multiple isochrones were to assess change during specific time intervals and determine rates of aeolian sediment accumulation reworked tephras were assessed as tracers to constrain the nature and duration of past environmental processes erosional and depositional breaks highlighted by tephra stratigraphy were also noted as another key indicator of change figure the topography and geomorphology of the study area showing the location of the soil profiles in figure tephrochronology of the gully system results of selected geochemical analysis are shown in
might be questionably acceptable with farms the usual daily request would approach nearer to the average but a reserve for weather and holidays is still needed and so be acceptable in humid areas with frequent rainfall more reserve may be essential to provide for simultaneous startup requests stream s would be requested a wide range however with the developing country situation with farms with an average farms per day there would be low probability that or would request water on any day the acceptable level of congestion affects the needed reservoir storage and system capacity the canal turnout peak capacity for the united states example is either three or four streams lps would be acceptable for flexibility allowing for the probability that not all four farms would simultaneously take peak flow a flow of lps could be acceptable but would it really save much on meter charges over the lps capacity a pipe cost study would show very little difference in annual costs so use the larger one a basis for comparison is presented in table for a lateral pipeline taking off from a canal to deliver water to distributor lines for the ha farms this table shows for congestion farms per day but for daytime only and then for day but allowing up to in a ten day irrigation cycle the flow rates and relative pipe diameters needed at the beginning and at a service area reservoir the congestion allows some flexibility in frequency but not for rate and duration though that can be arranged this is commonly done in the united states with durations this restricted rigid rate and duration arranged schedule is not a good one but is simple for illustration purposes overnight unused flow will be absorbed in the canal or a reservoir or operation and duration show that to provide for congestions moderate flexibility in frequency lateral capacity is increased from to lps a pipe diameter is increased from to only an if pipe costs are about comparable to diameter an in lateral not distribution pipe costs may be anticipated if lateral pipe costs alone are about total project costs an appreciable degree about increase in project costs and corresponding water charges in table a good flexible limited rate arranged demand schedule with allowing moderate flexibility in frequency with up to a over average flow rate and durations as needed to match soil intakes and farm conditions is illustrated without and with a mid area service reservoir arranged scheduling will limit deliveries to only farms on any or permit night time irrigation the illustration of a satisfactory flexible schedule of adequate frequency rate and duration in table shows that without a service area reservoir with all the flexibility supplied by the main canal for daytime only usage that for the lps increase in off take capacity only a in initial pipe diameter would be required be absorbed by the reservoir this will also permit the main canal to have very steady flows and appreciably reduce its cost this alternate by using the upper portion of the service area lateral per day rather than as in table reduces the capacity to lps and the pipe diameter to its entire length in the upper half some practical modifications are necessary on farm benefits from flexibility without appreciably changing the usual canal operations even with silt this makes upgrading of many existing systems possible and greatly reduces canal operation problems costs and operational spillage the cost of the reservoir even with retaining some silt is compensated for by reduced pipe costs and the many on farm benefits the farm and the project are one financial unit and storage reservoir and canal storage where a service area lateral pipeline an automated elevated level top canal may be cheaper on very nearly level ground can be closely connected to the project supply reservoir or equivalent flexibility can be obtained by having adequate capacity in the lateral pipeline or level top canal without a supplemental reservoir as in table but the supply canal will have large day to to be large enough in the upper initial reaches to supply all anticipated streams from the introductory illustration in the united states similar to table this would be four lps streams reducing to three and then two near the lower end and one in the last reach it would be used essentially only in the daytime it would utilize the existing in canal storage capacity or used it would be a fully automated system as used on the orange cove irrigation district chandler et al with appreciable but acceptable canal fluctuations using a service area reservoir if the ha united states illustration was not located near the storage reservoir but did take off from a main or branch canal on which it was desired to maintain a nearly stable rate a service as presented in table the conceptual illustration of operation under a flexible schedule with a rigid daytime only supply shows the value of a service area reservoir with the midpoint location the stream size in the upper portion would average streams full flow rate needed for a run desired to stabilize canal flow rather than the full stream needed for the overnight unused flow at this same flow needed the next day in the lower area in practice the probability is that in the united states example three and occasionally four lps streams daytime only could be needed at times in the total area this would increase the required practical design capacity to two streams rather than the average flow rate it would be limited by arrangement to only two each in the with many outlets for the developing country illustration the incremental upper half increase would be less additionally since the variable farm turnout flow rates in practice are usually taken for less than the actual rate must be larger than the average flow rate illustrated though the needed volume remains about the same this practical condition requires
or several predetermined groups where the given items are placed the respondent has freedom to place items into the groups or to leave some items aside a practical application could would buy and undesirable alternatively a selection of descriptive words can be offered as items to be combined with two to four product pictures which can be either prototypes or finalized products finally grouping can be arranged in a scale form which resembles the semantic differential method two opposing verbal definitions are set on two ends of the screen gained is more precise compared with the combining version of grouping the semantic differential method in the traditional form can also be used visually the respondent is asked to set one to three pictures of for example products on a scale between a pair of words this method is particularly useful when more accurate multiple choice can be used with words or with pictures verbal questions can be used for example in collecting background information free text is used mainly as a supportive method and could be used in other forms such as in a story telling method which might be seen as a useful additional research method in some cases to briefly illustrate the application of the methods short being used throughout the development process to improve the package the furniture company case a finnish furniture company has a large variety of products one of their important product lines is sofas to gain further information of their market position and different consumer groups taste they wanted to do research on their and competitors products by grouping in addition new product prototypes under a finnish wood processing company had invented a unique automated cutting mechanism which enables all kinds of forms to be shaped from wood as a challenging test product the company decided to try producing a set of wooden cutlery the visual research package was used to study what are the general attitudes towards wood as a material for cutlery and how wood associates plastic and what are the ideal user environments study of emotions linked to the bathroom ido bathrooms produces bathroom furnishing the company was interested in finding out about real and dreamt emotions people link to their bathrooms this information is intended to assist the designer in his design process the results will be part of his design brief the study took two approaches one which texture that are meant to match with the emotions linked to the bathroom and another which aims at arising emotions through pictures presenting situations and actions presentation of results the results that are produced are presented in a form that is visual and easy to approach and work with each picture can be enlarged on the result screens a package that is visual flexible and use in their visual work as opposed to the traditional verbal or numerical research results interviews with designers have confirmed a need for these features the first screen of results from the grouping task is presented as a confusion matrix it simply shows how often each example has been grouped with the each other example the confusion matrix is an easy way to gain an overall picture of the a more accurate view of general meanings behind groupings and meanings connected to individual groups after viewing the confusion matrix the researcher has a choice of proceeding to either a two dimensional plot formed when the confusion matrix is subjected to a multidimensional scaling analysis or a network view that presents interlinkages between different items in the two dimensional plot the dimensions are miller and kalviainen did in their study of chairs the constrained sort can be analysed in the same way the visual scale shows small thumbnail pictures of the items studied explaining words or codes can be added to the thumbnails the results are read from the distances to other items and the dimensions the results can also be presented as a network display of the display items which were frequently grouped with that one will appear clustered round it with less frequently chosen items a little further away selecting any item will move it to the middle of the screen with an appropriate rearrangement of the others the same presentation can be used for the words used to describe the groupings results from the traditional form of semantic differential can be can be combined to form a two dimensional graphic where the items are presented as thumbnails generally the results can be read in a flexible way clicking any of the items in the result screens can fetch access to individual explanations also access to individual questionnaires or other results concerning each item can be opened directly from the different screens everyone using the results of a certain research personal file the visual research package aims to be a conceptual and exploratory tool that supports the work of designers and marketing people in a company in addition the results can aid discussion between designers managers and clients during the product development process conclusions content presented here may change during the process commercial and cooperative company cases are being used throughout the project some interesting cases are product development for a multinational corporation the development project for a new travelling vehicle and an image study of the kuopio soccer team corporate identity the guiding idea in developing the package is that whenever users visual package could be applied measuring the emotions elicited by office chairs abstract the general experience of comfort the general experience of comfort experienced when using a chair is not only influenced by the ergonomic fit but also by the emotional fit ie an emotional response that is desired by the user in this paper a study is reported that was designed to measure emotional responses evoked by office chair appearance the study was part of a bigger project concerning attractive and comfortable office chairs the measured with the emocard method
those required for the birthday ode celebrate this festival and for the ode for the duke of gloucester who can from joy and reconstruction of purcell s original scoring for come ye sons of art s movement purcell s scoring pindar s scoring symphony different symphony ritornello come ye sons of art s no change come ye sons of art repeat of ritornello and come ye sons chor strike the viol no change ritornello the day that such a blessing no change the day that such a blessing bid the virtues no change abbreviations bass s soprano continuo tenor counter tenor timp kettledrum chor chorus tpt trumpet fl flute va viola ob oboe vn violin to the shore family of trumpeters in the counter tenor duet sound the trumpet you make the listening shores rebound is given in the plural and therefore implies the presence of at least two on the other hand purcell conceivably found himself unable to write for two trumpets since court documents record that the most likely second trumpet player william shore had his trumpet stolen in flanders the replacement being delivered only in march purcell had already started writing his music for come ye sons of art by this stage he might well have omitted a second trumpet for prudential reasons in the absence of the lost autograph for the ode we will probably never know for certain how many trumpet parts purcell included the other scoring changes however can be determined with some certainty thanks to busby s facsimile fragment and the patterns of pindar s additions given in table minor alterations and changes to text and underlay while pindar s large scale additions to scoring in come ye sons of art have been overlooked until now many of his more minor improvements have been identified largely as a result of their obviously dubious there is of course no need to duplicate here those features that have already been discovered by others and obviously we cannot assume that pindar incorporated all the types of alteration found in the other three odes into come ye sons of however there are some details of this work that display signs of pindar s revision techniques not previously subjected to scrutiny and the aim of this section is to draw attention to these it is virtually impossible to determine whether pindar substituted sections of text in the pleasures and there are no lines of text with conspicuously poor scansion in the ode it is likely that the text of come ye sons of art as preserved in lcm is broadly the text that purcell nevertheless alteration of individual words is more likely and we cannot help but notice that the facsimile fragment shown in pl gives the opening phrase of the ode as come ye arts in the plural so it is possible that the title by which we have all come to know the ode may in fact be incorrect pindar writes art in the singular at every occurrence of this phrase in the opening counter tenor solo and chorus however which would show an unusual level of consistency if he had altered this word in contrast the disparity in the setting of with charming harmony unite in the duet see nature rejoicing and its following chorus where the phrase is given as in charming harmony unite suggests a pindaric substitution the word in being the most likely original version similarly the fact that this duet begins with see where every other occurrence of this phrase in both that movement and the following chorus gives thus may be significant although there is some syntactical logic to the use of see followed by shifting of text and there are several examples of this type of reworking in come ye sons of art that are identified by wood in the purcell society edition most notably the obviously erroneous setting of replying hill in the duet see nature there is an additional problematic phrase however where wood seems to me to have been unduly cautious both the bass solo and the chorus the day that such a blessing conclude with the line let it have the a jubilee pindar writes out the repeat of the second half of the bass solo and sets the underlay differently on the repeat where he sets the same music for chorus he uses repeat markings giving only the second version of the solo setting wood makes an alteration to the pindar s misreading of what he takes to have been purcell s original first and second time bars in the chorus which means pindar conflates the first time version with the second time underlay and final bar in the vocal wood therefore provides a first time reading based on the initial version in the bass and a second time version taken from the ending in pindar s chorus there are however two significant factors suggesting that pindar made a and deliberate reworking here not only does he alter a notated repeat in the solo but the given text also ends with a dactylic stress on jubilee which appears first with a natural rhythm ending on the third beat of the bar and is then changed so that the final syllable occurs rather clumsily on the first beat of the bar there is an obvious and straightforward parallel with his treatment of the word harmony shown in ex and it seems clear that purcell s must have used the underlay given in pindar s bars both in the bass s second phrase and in the chorus since purcell almost certainly did not include string accompaniment in the chorus there are no consequent problems in the segue between solo and chorus in the first violin the original reading of the string parts fitting neatly in place of pindar s version there are two additional minor observations to be made about this chorus first the repetition of that such a blessing gave on a single pitch in 
across the members of the navigation team how this distributed cognition is different from individual cognition and how the meaning of messages pertaining to an understanding of the situation is negotiated among the members to achieve a navigation goal hutchins argued that his findings are valid for any type of hospital the implementers changed a cpoe system designed for physician medication order entry by facilitating nursing input they restored the distributed way of manual medication ordering in which these nurses had always played a pivotal role in a study about order creation and communication in an icu hazlehurst et al showed how complex the interactions and the flows of information is carried out as desired the number of studies about the complexity of order creation and communication are still very limited but the studies mentioned above suggest that the models of medical work underlying cpoe may be too focused on the individual cognition and behavior of clinicians order entry rather has to be conceptualized as the result of a process in which the distributed workflow in the routing of the medical order many different professionals are involved including nurses pharmacists physiotherapists radiologists and lab technicians this routing includes the order creation and communication process and also the processing of the order at the receiving end and the returning of the results of an order result for example a physician order will be returned in the form of a medication sheet for the nurse and a prepared dose for dispensing to the patient similar routings can be identified for other types of medical orders such a lab orders health it applications such as cpoe systems will typically support such routings through conceptualizing these steps as part of a workflow a linear sequence of circumscribed for the next step in the workflow both the concepts of professional collaboration and workflow have the notion of the involvement of multiple individuals but the first emphasizes the synchronous and interactive aspect of getting work done in a study about the effects of cpoe on icu workflow cheng et al showed how the actual workflow with many feedback medical orders and that a pharmacist modification often results in a second medication sheet printed at the nursing station in addition only parts of the medical order workflow are supported by cpoe systems other parts such as drug dispensing by pharmacy and drug administration by nursing are often supported by systems that are sometimes connected to cpoe systems by interface protocols becoming more common however these machines are not always integrated with cpoe systems this means that in the overall medical ordering routings many hand offs still pose a risk for the quality of the ordering process in the words of brown and duguid workflow in health care is not a linear step by step process with clear cut inputs and outputs and sharply targeted information their owners that in reality are not sharply demarcated at all quality of care implementation of cpoe has been recommended to reduce medical errors and increase the quality of care evaluation studies of cpoe implementation in hospitals in the and showed economic savings and also better patient outcomes in terms of reduction in length of patient stay and later studies were fully focused on medication errors and adverse drug events kaushal et al reviewed the effects of cpoe and clinical decision support systems on medication safety and concluded that cpoe significantly decreased medication error rates but the evidence is based on a limited set of clinical studies administration and then prescribing several strategies have been recommended to reduce errors such as the use of bar coding technology and automated dispensing systems however oren et al show that the evidence that these technologies reduce medi is a risk that technological solutions to increase patient safety may be focused too much on individual behavior and they may ignore organizational behavior several studies suggest that physicians in particular are not aware of the systemic nature and size of the problem there is anecdotal evidence that physicians often blame each other about making mistakes and assert that it does not apply aware of it the issues raised in the three previous paragraphs suggest that efforts to improve patient safety and the quality of care should also focus on occasions that may disrupt the fine fabric of professional collaboration and the work flow involving many different professionals november the first author conducted semi structured interviews with experts involved in cpoe implementations the experts were partly selected from the participants in the first consensus meeting on the success ful implementation of cpoe in which the first and second authors participated the interviewees represented users implementers vendors and researchers the first author also years and interviewed an it project leader a hospital management executive and two physicians together in all the interviewees represented different organizations which included five academic medical centers three community hospitals a va medical center a health maintenance organization and a vendor the high level of knowledge of the interviewees offered the authors an opportunity to explore and lasted on average the respondents received by mail a brief note that explained the purpose of the study and listed six topics that would be addressed during the interview they were the description of the cpoe system in use and history of the implementation the users of cpoe and their involvement topics were meant to provide the context of the involvement of respondents with cpoe systems the last three topics were central to the research questions details about the interviewed experts their backgrounds and key topics discussed are listed in table the interview transcripts were analyzed with the help of atlas a software application for qualitative text analysis using the last three board of oregon health science university as part of the physician order entry field study of success factors results the interviews resulted in typewritten pages we will now briefly highlight some findings from the interviews focusing on context professional collaboration workflow and quality of care the context
could be reduced into three underlying causal factors that firms attempted to leverage to enhance future performance while the specific causal attributions provided insight into their sample the development of the underlying causal factors allow for a greater understanding of corporate performance attribution theory indicates that an individual s psychological state is a weiner et al weiner states that one dominant psychological consequence of causal factors is expectancy of success a variable that is cognitive in nature theory suggests that when an individual identifies the causal factors of success he she believes that he she can successfully act upon these factors and increase his her probability of success strong research support exists for the influence of causal factors on psychological consequences for example johnston and kim in a study of company sales representatives found that sales representatives attributed past performance to identifiable causal factors and adjusted their expectations of future performance accordingly similarly bettman and weitz found managerial expectation of firm performance to be directly attributable to each behavioral consequence is influenced by a cognitive psychological consequence weiner indicates that expectations of success have a direct influence on behavior higher expectations of success are derived from an individual s belief in his her ability to successfully capitalize on the underlying causal factors that he she has identified as influencing his her success the expectancy success motivates an individual to leverage causal factors through his her behaviors resulting in higher levels of success hypothesis development internationalization is the process through which a firm moves from operating solely in its domestic marketplace to international markets the firm s international success increases it increases its penetration into the international marketplace moving from selling solely in its domestic marketplace to exportation to foreign direct investment however an achievement oriented model of firm success at the manager level drives the internationalization process at the firm level firm s current situation to develop new strategies in order to increase the firm s competitive positioning and performance once a manager is able to achieve firm success at one level of the internationalization process they begin adapting their acquired skills and apply them to new and more challenging endeavors the factors leading to the firm s past successes for example farrell et al in a study of service firms found that if an initial internationalization attempt was deemed unsuccessful the firm either withdrew from the market or became inactive ie managers perceived that they were not capable of driving firm internationalization success alternatively if the firm considered the experience a success they became more active in the market ie ie managers perceived that they were capable of driving firm internationalization success a manager s identification and evaluation of past firm performance sets expectations and influences future managerial behaviors driving firm action the underlying premise of attribution theory is the cognitive process involved with the determination of causal factors leading to performance evaluations this assumed rational process involves managers reasoning backward from the event to the cause that led to the outcome the influence of causal factors on cognitive psychological consequence the model shown in figure is in no way intended to represent a complete causal nexus of the internationalization process rather it is intended to provide a foundation through which to examine the appropriateness of attribution theory for understanding the managerial cognitive aspects driving firm internationalization have identified a number of factors leading to successful internationalization research in this area has developed primarily in the manufacturing sector with the extensions to services relying on both manufacturing and service literature theorizes the application of manufacturing literature ector three variables identified by managers as being important causal factors to firm internationalization success are employed in this study transferability of offerings financial resources and competitive pricing transferability of offering transferability of offering is defined by the degree of product service customization necessary for each specific marketplace those offerings high while those offerings low in transferability requiring extensive adaptation when entering new markets for example an architecture design for a specific client is unique to that client and therefore low in transferability whereas computer software that can function on similar systems across markets would be deemed to have high transferability the increased need for adaptation of low transferable offerings increases the risks associated with achieving international success as success of adaptation of an offering is determined by a manager s knowledge of the local market which firms and managers beginning the internationalizing process typically lack hence low transferability of offering decreases a manager s expectations of international success therefore a manager s perception of the uniqueness of the firm s market offering and his her expectations of international success is theorized to exist more formally stated a manager s perception of the uniqueness of the firm s offering is negatively related to his her expectation of international success financial resources a firm s ability to commit resources to the market also leads to successful farrell et al contend that the transition from initial presence to subsequent market development is costly and difficult they indicate that market development extends beyond infrastructure to developing intimate knowledge of new markets on an on going basis this suggests that as firms increase its financial base thus increasing its resource investment in developing local market knowledge its ability to be successful in international markets will increase as firms domestic borders they require larger resource commitments to effectively compete additional resources are necessary for effective competition as a result of the need to absorb the risks associated with internationalization managers understand that firms with greater financial resources at their disposal are able to achieve a competitive advantage in entering new markets when compared to those firms with smaller resources therefore we theorize a positive relationship between a manager s perceptions of the financial resources of a firm and his her expectations of international success more formally a manager s perceptions that the firm s ability to commit financial resources to internationalization is positively related to his her expectations
slightly more than two years only percent of these contracts were indexed but even when such indexation occurs their form violates the condition that they were struck with only real considerations in mind for an imperfect index such as the but it will always be symmetric for positive and negative deviations of inflation from a threshold but cola adjustments are only positive wn where is the nominal threshold thus the form of the contract violates optimality in practice this violation is also biting for example in roughly one third of a large canadian sample of indexed contracts inflation was always below the threshold thus the form of indexed contracts when they exist shows that union wage negotiators think that cola adjustments indeed wage setters have notions regarding what nominal wage increases should or should not be this of course is just one of many anomalies in the form of indexed contracts prices we have just seen that employees norms regarding nominal wages may affect bargained real wages and therefore cause trade offs between long run inflation and long run unemployment indeed models by katsuhito iwai julio rotemberg and andrew caplin and john leahy all have long run trade offs between inflation and unemployment each of these models assumes that there are real costs to nominal price changes if instead there were real costs to real price changes the assumptions of natural rate theory would still be real costs from nominal price changes iwai rotemberg and caplin and leahy all respectively assume that there is a menu cost in making these changes but the physical costs of making such changes as in the printing of new menus are trivially small norms regarding price changes however give an alternative reason why these costs firms should not raise prices in that case price increases are likely to induce angry customers to search for alternative suppliers at higher steady state inflation firms will be changing their nominal prices more and therefore will face more elastic demands for their product producers natural just as sticky money wages indicated that employees have norms regarding wage change similarly sticky prices indicate that customers have norms regarding price change thus the extensive evidence on price stickiness reveals violation of the assumptions of natural rate theory and also the existence of norms regarding price change like wage changes price changes furthermore prices seem to be especially sticky in customer markets alan kackmeister has compared price changes at the end of the nineteenth century to such changes a bit more than a century later price changes of specific goods at retail stores were recorded from june to september kackmeister revisited the same times more frequent than a century earlier furthermore in the nineteenth century the average spell of constant price for an individual good was very long it was approximately such constancy of prices can easily be explained by customer norms regarding price change the customers have a notion of the price that they ought to pay at one factor responsible for greater frequency of price change today emi nakamura and jo steinsson give an economic reason why customers would have such a norm that firms should not change prices they view consumer purchases as habit forming thus by buying a particular brand or patronizing a particular store consumers are firms then make an implicit contract with their customers they will not change their prices unjustifiably since such an implicit contract is easier to make regarding nominal prices than real prices the implicit guarantee is in nominal terms nakamura and steinsson have also discovered a phenomenon that suggests strikingly that firms when the sale ends their nominal price returns to the exact same level such behavior is consistent with the view that consumers think that prices should not change and that they are also likely to retaliate when prices do change i should also remark that in countries where low are eroded at high inflation thus while norms concerning prices give a negative long run trade off between inflation and unemployment at low inflation at high inflation that trade off could very well be reversed marika karanassou hector sala and dennis snower find considerable long run trade off between he finds that in the nineteenth century only percent of items changed their prices per month this means that the average spell of constant prices would have been months but that is a biased statistic for the average length of time between price changes for an item on the shelf the difference between the average spell of employment or unemployment and the average spell a rule of thumb suggests that the spell between price changes averaged over the individual items on the shelf would be months summary to summarize there is considerable evidence of violation of the assumptions and predictions of natural rate theory wages and prices are nominally rigid there were no deflationary spirals in the great depression and questionnaire and customers have views on what wages and prices should be the reflection of such views in utility functions produces trade offs between inflation and unemployment those trade offs have significant implications for economic policy on the one hand central banks should avoid very low targets for inflation on the other hand they should rational expectations piggybacks on our previous discussion of the natural rate according to rational expectations theory insofar as the central bank changes the money supply systematically in response to employment conditions the public will foresee that response and change prices and wages exactly to compensate the public s anticipation will one is rational expectations to some rational expectations regarding the effects of the money supply on prices and wages would seem to be beyond the sophistication of most wage and price takers and also of most wage and price setters even in the case where all those involved in buying and selling goods and labor services of either wages or prices the previous descriptions of the ways in which nominal wages and prices enter into preference functions
the other does diffidence acli arci these but then people met each other on some issues the anti war campaign is quoted by all interviewees as a moment of contamination through the increase of reciprocal trust in the words of a volunteer from un ponte per our association was present from the very beginning in the stop the war committee which is in my opinion a very interesting milieu because it is an open space in the sense that if you do not participate for a while there is no problem to have had positive effects in terms of knowledge and mutual trust as the interviewee adds it is not easy but during this year and a half through this development we have also got to know each other and to soften some attitudes and there is trust and respect for every representation within the committee frame bridging and transnational identities well as participation in coalitions of organizations have been seen as preconditions for the spreading of innovative ideas participation in protest campaigns is reflected in the bridging of several issues we suggest that common campaigns facilitate the linking of different issues according to the president of the acea we took part in networks following the avoid a hyper specialization that delocalizes them our principle is that they must relocalize and root themselves in their own cities in their own territory be loved by the people around them build contacts etc participation in the networks of the gjm facilitates the link between labor and other issues the fiom representative described both the mobilization against the genoa summit anti war demonstrations the european social forum in florence as well the discussion of international issues such as the israeli palestinian conflict as the most important campaigns for his organization peace and labor issues are defined as strictly linked companies expand outside italy and locate themselves in those countries where rights are denied almost always the instrument for denying rights is internal oppression or the international oppression of international institutions such as the international monetary fund and if the rules of not respected the military intervention arrives the bridging of democracy in the factory and democracy at the transnational level is considered by the fiom representative as a main motivation of his organization s involvement in the gjm since its very beginning democracy in the workplace but more generally democracy as the only possible chance to change this society this is one of the reasons that determined democracy not only in the factory but also at a transnational level eight countries cannot decide for six billion people so concern with democracy in the choices of participating in a global international level was a key element the issue of democracy in the division of wealth at the international level and going further down the issue of democracy in the workplace through a commitment to political consumerism in the words of the cisl representative today more than in the or to put it as a slogan you change the world both as a worker but also as a consumer certainly today for better or worse the consumer has definitely greater impact than in previous years one question is in fact the struggle in favor of the consumer generally as a consumer the concept of political consumerism activists with multiple memberships are therefore perceived as importing new sensitivities into the union world the acknowledgment of the multiple memberships of union members is according to a union activist at the basis of an interest in different issues such as those related with consumption one should pay attention to an increasingly transnational model of unionism but also to the role ie to the consumers network thanks to the pact for peace and to the cisl of milan we are becoming more active on these issues this is also a new way to represent needs and interests also in the solidarity field contamination between the main fields of intervention of different organizations is recognized as being promoted by the overlapping membership of the associates according to the president of the chico mendes cooperative this is joined the cooperative were already active either in the church or in a trade union or in organizations involved on some kind of special aid and found in fair trade a more concrete thing to do i think about our associates and i know that they participate actively in this movement so there is contamination on all these levels and it is precisely what we want as mentioned previously traditional solidarity organizations such as arci acli projects where various issues are bridged including anti war campaigns in the words of the acli representative pact for peace was founded after genoa s anti counter summit and aims at providing a basis for confrontation on the issues of peace international cooperation the environment and globalization the pact aims at being a place of dialogue debate and growth between organizations groups and trade unions working with other actors an interest in other issues the lilliput network is engaged in the bridging of different issues as one lilliput activist puts it what is now most important is the effort of linking various issues according to one participant in the fcc frame bridging develops through the emphasis on what unites the relationship develops by stressing what we have in common not what ground engaging also in the initiatives of other groups that you would not have planned but would anyhow support even groups such as the leoncavallo one of the most important social centers in italy are now less closed they focus on issues like life styles that would have never been considered part of their activities before in a scale shift process during transnational campaigns activists begin to identify themselves as part of a european or even global subject from this perspective the sin cobas representative reminded us that the desire of our organization for a transnational projection was already clear in the sin cobas symbol which contains
loop results following the standard method as described eg in result however the unavoidable presence of threshold corrections does not allow a significant distinction between the two cases in fact a th split into a su triplet th split into a su triplet of mass mdi and a su doublet of mass mli gives a further one loop threshold correction there is furthermore a two loop contribution from itself dominated by the uv ie numerically the mssm has two other cp even fields both their masses and compositions depend on all the various parameters of the nmssm nevertheless none of them is coupled to vv mixing of with and can help increase the mass of after the mixing and acquire coupling to vv and become subject to lep searches as we are going to see these mixing cannot be consistency with lep as such one can analyze individually their additive effects without making any significant error we can then consider a simplified mixing between and the lightest among the two states not coupled to zz thus we consider a mass matrix with a fixed mh and arbitrary mh and close to the upper bounds on mh without or with the extra matter respectively in absence of mixing only the latter case would be compatible with lep data with mixing however which is generally present the situation may change in figures we describe the effect of mixing with in the two cases in the plane of the two mass eigen values from which we can uniquely reconstruct and the sm higgs boson coupling from the data of ref this allows to determine in the same plane the bound from the non observation of the lightest state assumed to decay in with sm branching ratio for later purposes we also consider the decay in with a branching ratio close to given the actual numbers a quick way to understand from these figures the compatibility with lep data is to see if there are values of the heaviest mass above and and simultaneously allowed by the bound on the lightest state the conclusions are quite clear with an unmixed value of mh and a this means that with a moderate stop mass and a small at term the nmssm without extra matter and with standard higgs boson decays can perhaps be accommodated with lep data if at all only in a small corner of its parameter space this may explain the interest of considering the decay of the lightest state into which is experimentally less constrained on the other hand the mh case is obviously compatible with lep data for small enough mixing more important is that some mixing effects will inevitably be present which can push the heavier state even further up with a somewhat reduced coupling to the zz while keeping consistency with the lep data for the lower state this can be a characteristic feature of the nmssm with the extra matter contributing to the rge running of the coupling constants and is the phenomenological pattern to which we want to draw to which we want to draw attention an explicit example based on an approximate peccei quinn symmetry pq susy the lagrangian and the allowed parameter space an independent motivation for the nmssm is that it may provide a simple solution of the so called problem the supersymmetric superpotential mass term gets replaced by and all the mass terms in the lagrangian originate from supersymmetry breaking this possible solution of the problem invites a symmetry explanation of the a symmetry explanation of the absence of mass terms in the superpotential such symmetries can be a continuous rinvariance and or a peccei quinn symmetry in this paper we choose a pq symmetry since it removes the coupling thereby helping to maximize at the weak scale ii it can reduce the number of parameters in the supersymmetry breaking lagrangian nmssm which we call pq susy has a minimal number of parameters and contains a light pseudo goldstone boson for earlier considerations of nmssm in the pq limit see up to the small breaking of the pq symmetry the lagrangian is uniquely fixed by the superpotential term by the soft non supersymmetric piece of the scalar potential and by the gaugino mass terms which we shall take large relative to hsi will have to be present however we assume them to be small enough only to give mass to the otherwise massless pseudo goldstone boson without significantly affecting any of the remaining properties of the model we have checked that this is a consistent approximation when it exists the cp conserving su breaking vacuum is related to the lagrangian parameters by and a we trade for and tan a useful way to represent the various results which we shall follow is to show them in the plane for fixed values of tan in particular the vacuum in eqs is indeed the true minimum of the overall potential only in a portion of this parameter values from figure we see that a has a maximal and minimal allowed value for each ms in an interval is required by the global stability the upper limit on a comes from imposing that via eq below the constraint of local local stability does not further restrict the parameter space higgs boson and higgsino spectra the spectrum of the higgs boson sector is straightforwardly obtained by expanding around the above minimum for the single charged boson one finds out of the two neutral cp odd states one is massless in this approximation where it has the form note as anticipated that note also that one of the mixing terms between and the two other scalars is always small whereas the other is essentially controlled by the lightest scalar mass is below the lep limit its dominant decay mode is into pq pseudo goldstones gg from figure we see that for the lep constraint on the coupling to zz is satisfied in most of the parameter space allowed by
strengthened spaziano s suggestion that the determinations the court demanded in capital cases are not analogous to the elemental factfindings on which criminal convictions turn or the purely moral judgments to which pre furman capital aspired and instead are quasi constitutional conclusions that judges are well equipped to by treating clemons s reweighing requirement and enmund bullock s minimum culpability requirement as procedural not substantive the court immunized federal courts from reviewing those determinations de novo the question for the federal courts was not whether the new balance of aggravation and mitigation warranted death nor whether required by the constitution to warrant death but whether the appropriate state appellate court had expressly undertaken to make the requisite perfectly meshing its delegated proportionality review and insulation principles the court read the constitution to impose an type procedural requirement on state juries and appellate judges to conduct substantive type review of the constitutional proportionality of death the type procedures without itself making the type substantive judgments it deemed constitutionally necessary but problems remained the court was plagued by the question whether state sentencing procedures qualified as weighing or nonweighing when they in fact populated the full range of possib ilities in between the two and in weighing states as implicitly in clemons itself the harmless error analysis required state reviewing supreme court itself to decide whether even absent the admission of otherwise inadmissible evidence a jury instruction identifying an invalid aggravating factor as a consideration important in the sentencing balance put a thumb on death s side of the scale thus creat ing the risk of treat ing the defendant as more deserving of the death penalty than the aggravation in the case actually warranted sanders undertook to simplify its doctrine in a way that made it irrelevant whether reference to an invalid aggravating factor may have prejudicially contributed to the imposition of a death sentence not warranted by actual aggravation net of jettisoning the weighing nonweighing distinction the court made its holding in stephens the law across the board a jury s reliance on an invalid aggravating factor violates consider facts and circumstances that would not otherwise have been before if however as in stephens and sanders the evidence admitted under the invalid factor was also admissible in support of one of the other valid sentencing factors there is never a constitutional this is true the court ruled no matter how much special emphasis was placed on the evidence in the jury instructions and closing arguments by the fact later held harmless error analysis thus may no longer consider whether instructions or argument gave undue emphasis to aggravating evidence a judgment that begs substantive analysis of whether there was enough valid aggravation to warrant the death penalty instead harmless error analysis may focus only on the question whether improperly admitted evidence was cumulative of or added something significant to evidence properly in rs s focus on whether aggravating evidence was properly before the jury is consistent with the principle of delegated proportionality judgments the more accurate evidence the jury has to evaluate in assessing aggravation net of mitigation the more reliable its judgment will be a combination of stasis and insulation explains the court s refusal to consider the real possibility that a jury might be unreliably special force because it satisfied a statutory sentencing factor later held invalid the sole reason the court gave for ignoring the possibility of unreliable death sentences imposed under the influence of special emphasis on factors later deemed invalid was that stephens had ignored that same albeit in the context of a nonweighing statute and under the silly assumption largely repudiated by sanders that mitigating factors would somehow find something to do with the factors besides weighing the only apparent explanation for so mechanistic a decision is that it insulated the supreme court from substantive judgments about whether the aggravating evidence in the case was strong enough to justify a death sentence apart from undue special emphasis on the invalid factor to this extent stasis and insulation again trumped lapses despite its best efforts the court s blockade against substantive review responsibility was not impenetrable twice in the early the court let its guard down even one of its most notoriously callous decisions revealed the power of the demand for some logic in decisions to take life mitigation in parker justice connor used to object in the angry spirit of his godfrey dissent in parker a jury had recommended a life sentence for each of parker s two murders finding five aggravating factors in the first killing six in the second and no statutory mitigating factors and not mentioning parker s nonstatutory mitigating evidence that he was under the influence of large amounts of alcohol and various drugs during the murders the trial judge overrode the life recommendation as to the second because no mitigating circumstances outweigh the aggravating after overturning two of the six aggravating factors the florida high court reimposed death for the second murder because he trial court found no mitigating circumstances to balance against the aggravating factors of which four were properly the court reversed it did so based on a concededly unusual effort record justice white fretted the likes of which has rarely been performed in this it must be the court said that the trial court had silently found nonstatutory mitigating factors because the evidence warranted such a finding every court to have reviewed the record here has determined that the evidence supported that finding and the judge s acceptance of a life verdict as to the only slightly less nonstatutory mitigat ing evidence directed to both true when the florida high court reweighed based on four valid factors it made a determination of historical fact due substantial federal court deference that the trial court had found no mitigating but the court refused to defer because the finding was not fairly supported by the because the florida high court had ignored the extant mitigation its reweighing review at all
occurred in the regression of anxiety scores on time as a function of intervention or control conditions motivational climate manipulation check coach initiated motivational climate separate multilevel models were computed for mastery and ego climate scores on the mcsys because motivational climate was measured only at the end of the season the level component of the model was the athletes who were in turn nested within teams and teams within conditions condition was treated as a fixed effect and the regression coefficient was entered as a random variable and allowed to vary at the the team the estimated means for the perceived motivational climate created by the coaches were consistent with our a priori hypothesis that the intervention would result in higher mastery scores and lower ego scores multilevel analyses revealed that athletes who played for mac trained coaches reported significantly higher levels of mastery climate coaching behaviors and lower levels of ego climate behaviors for the mac condition the estimated mean for mastery climate was significantly higher than in the control condition were lower than the control group coaches but this difference did not attain significance one tailed thus the intervention was associated with a stronger mastery climate and less of an ego climate although only the former difference was significant it should be it should be noted however that coaches in both conditions created motivational climates that were on average more mastery oriented than ego oriented intervention effects on athletes performance anxiety preliminary multilevel analyses of baseline scores indicated that the intervention and control conditions did not differ significantly in sas total score or on any given that trained coaches created a stronger mastery climate achievement goal theory and previous research would predict lower anxiety in the intervention condition moreover the mcsys ego scale contains several items concerning use of mistake contingent punishment by coaches which is contrary to mac guidelines multilevel analyses were carried out to test this hypothesis as indicated in table a significant effect was found for time for sas worry and total score overall tendency for trait anxiety to increase from preseason to the second administration prior to league playoffs when competitive pressures were higher intervention effects were formally tested by the time conditions interactions in table these interactions were significant for sas total score and for each of its subscales the interactions involving the expected means generated by the multilevel analyses for each subscale are illustrated in figure shows divergent patterns of change in the intervention and control groups athletes who played for the control coaches exhibited higher scores late in the season than at the beginning whereas athletes who played for coaches who underwent the mac intervention exhibited decreases in anxiety scores from preseason to late season separate tests of time differences within each condition were performed using increases in anxiety in the control condition were not predicted on an a priori basis in the control condition significance was assessed using two tailed tests these analyses of time differences revealed that athletes in the control condition increased significantly in sas total score and on the somatic anxiety and concentration disruption means for the intervention and control conditions on the somatic anxiety concentration disruption and worry subscales of the sport anxiety scale somatic anxiety and concentration disruption scales but the increase on the worry scale was not significant xtent that the mac program was successful in establishing a stronger mastery oriented motivational climate youngsters would be expected to manifest lower levels of performance anxiety as a result of their season long athletic experience the late season manipulation check of motivational climate revealed that athletes that athletes in the intervention group reported a significantly higher coach initiated mastery climate than did the control group coaches in the intervention condition also had lower ego climate scores than the control group coaches but this difference was not statistically significant thus the climate initiating behaviors of the two groups of coaches were perceived differently by their athletes reduction on both the sas total score and on the scat it was not possible to assess intervention effects on the somatic and cognitive anxiety components the recent development of the age appropriate sas allowed us to assess the cognitive and somatic components of anxiety as well as global anxiety the statistically significant time condition interactions indicate different patterns of anxiety responses in the intervention and control conditions for all whereas the control condition yielded higher scores on all subscales and on total score late in the season than they had at the beginning athletes in the intervention condition decreased on all sas scores and demonstrated significant reductions on sas total score somatic anxiety and worry the decrease in the concentration disruption score was not significant but even here there is evidence of a protective effect of the intervention in that concentration disruption not increase significantly as in the control group we did not anticipate the significant increase in trait anxiety that occurred in the control group as this was not observed in the smith the et al study the difference between studies might be attributable to the timing of the second administration of the anxiety scale in the smith the et al study the second measurement occurred after the end of the season when the athletes were no longer exposed in the present study the second administration occurred late in the season while teams were still competing for positions in the postseason championship playoffs which could account for higher anxiety scores in the control condition changes in coaching behaviors prompted by the intervention may have had a palliative influence on the athletes who played for the trained coaches research has focused almost entirely on male samples leaving it unclear how programs like cet and mac would affect female athletes a notable exception is a study by coatsworth and conroy who found positive intervention effects for low self esteem girls but not for boys in our study the nonsignificant sex time condition interaction suggest that the mac intervention
high counts being attained the pollen diagram was produced using tilia and tilia graph and subjectively divided into local pollen assemblage are presented as a percentage of total pollen the category of other taxa in the selected taxa pollen diagram comprise those pollen grains and spores presently unidentifiable due to being corroded amorphous broken or folded and those taxa of minor importance to the this study eg escallonia euphorbiaceae malvaceae and are presented on the pollen diagram as a percentage of total pollen it should be noted that pollen analysis was also attempted on the pedo sedimentary sequence uncovered within the terrace this would have possibly provided important additional information on the local vegetation cover and those cultivars grown on the terrace surface unfortunately no pollen grains or spores were preserved analytic inc usa and waikato radiocarbon dating laboratory new zealand sub samples from the terrace section for radiocarbon dating were placed on a large sheet of clean aluminium foil inside a laminar flow cabinet within this ultra clean environment the sub samples were then sorted with clean fine forceps and fragments of charcoal isolated weighed and then stored in clean glass vials each reflected light although minute amounts of charcoal were isolated in most samples only the ah and bah horizons contained significant quantities samples of charcoal from a single depth within the palaeosol a horizon were submitted to the nerc radiocarbon laboratory east kilbride for ams dating to minimise potential inaccuracies every effort was made to ensure that charcoal submitted for dating remains a possibility that heartwood was submitted all radiocarbon results were calibrated using procedures outlined in stuiver et al and bronk ramsey geoarchaeology of the tocotoccasa terrace the profile comprises a surface soil at the current terrace surface and two underlying palaeosols with clearly defined bah horizons marking the original sloping land surface top of the subsoil horizon of the original sloping soil support for the second palaeosol marking a previous terrace surface rather than a natural stabilized surface following deposition of slope material is provided by evidence for an earlier truncated terrace wall foundation immediately in front of and running parallel to its successor sandor and eash noted a similar the distinction between them several authors have emphasized the difficulties of dating the construction or reconstruction of agricultural terraces due to re working of pottery and charcoal within terrace fills at tocotoccasa the only pottery found in the terrace section was of late late intermediate age fifteen sherds phase of terrace construction the only other sherd found in the horizon of the upper palaeosol conceivably translocated downward or became incorporated during reconstruction of the terrace and hence does not reflect the age of the first phase of terrace construction the radiocarbon dating provides possible support for this interpretation although it was not possible to of ad suggests that provided the charcoal is in situ the first terrace surface was established by the early part of the middle horizon in terms of the bulk analytical properties of the tocotoccasa profile ph is lowest in the ah horizon with a progressive increase with depth reflecting the superimposition of a contemporary leaching profile across the palaeosols peaks in the and horizons total phosphate and plant available phosphate contents are highest in the ah and horizons whilst the horizon registers only background values this pattern might reflect the effects of manuring on the two agricultural surfaces and its absence in the original natural soil since it is generally assumed that the fertility of these terrace soils was maintained the geoarchaeological investigation of the tocotoccasa terrace has recorded two stages of terrace construction early middle horizon and late late intermediate period however it is unclear whether the later reconstruction of the terrace was an ad hoc event or part of a more systematic regional programme of terrace development following indicate that any abandonment if it occurred was unlikely to be due to soil fertility exhaustion other factors such as climate or social economic change may have been responsible table field description of the tocotoccasa terrace profile fig tocotoccasa terrace profile results of the organic carbon ph total phosphate and available phosphate table mire basin mineral rich sediment accumulation in the basin started before bc and was characterized by the deposition of silty sand impeded drainage due to localized colluviation which caused blockage of the basin outlet seems the most likely cause the pollen record at this time indicates a vegetation cover dominated by poaceae and asteroideae cardueae suggesting the formation of grassland and from to bc indicates the creation of semi terrestrial wetland conditions the onset of peat formation coincided with the colonization of chenopodiaceae amaranthaceae on surrounding dry land peat accumulation was interrupted by a period of mineral rich sediment accumulation probably brought about by destabilization of the surrounding slopes and transportation of that this event corresponded once again to the development of grassland and shrubland with areas of disturbed ground the renewal of peat growth reflects a period of landscape stability between bc and ad which coincided with the expansion of grassland and the colonization of the mire surface by cyperaceae the basin culminating in the accumulation of a thick unit of sandy clay indicative of significant erosion of the adjacent catchment the increased input of mineral matter into the basin undoubtedly contributed to the formation of open water on the mire surface which according to the pollen data formed suitable habitats for the growth of potamogeton whilst the basin margin may also abundant including plantago sp whilst dominating the dryland vegetation were asteroideae cardueae and chenopodiaceae amaranthaceae pollen stratigraphic indicators of human activity are present in the record for this period eg zea mays and therefore it is tempting to suggest that the mineral sedimentation and pollen stratigraphic changes may be due burning by the wari people in the valley during the middle horizon peat formation at ad indicates the renewal of semi terrestrial conditions on the basin surface and the stabilization of vegetation cover on surrounding
national nursing home survey of the us national center for health statistics there were million nursing home beds available of which million were occupied that is an occupancy rate of or a bed vacancy rate of in the year reported on in the nnhs there were million nursing home beds of which million were occupied or an occupancy rate of the vacancy rate of nursing home beds rose from to when the number of occupants began to level off the vacancy rate of empty beds at nursing homes rose by five percentage points between and the data show that the number of people in institutional healthcare in hospitals and nursing homes is falling in absolute numbers even as the population increases and ages in there were million community hospital beds and or in patients add that to the million in nursing homes and that is about million people in health institutions in by the number of people in health institutions had declined to million excess supply as documented above coexists with apparent excess demand from under pricing at health insurers and price regulation one explanation is that providers receive similar rates from public and private insurers and other third party payers regardless of quality the healthcare sector effectively operates as a price regulated industry there is an incentive to carry excess capacity of capital and operating budgets leads to added construction even if unnecessary or redundant hospitals and other facilities were reimbursed on a cost plus basis from medicare until providing incentives to build expensive facilities since then the incentives have changed to reimburse based on cash operating costs cash operating costs are relatively high for older more obsolete facilities that are located in rural or inner city they are low for located in suburban areas a third explanation is that excess capacity is a convenience option with value that allows patients and providers to have staff and hospital beds available at any time and location rising excess capacity is a result of this standby convenience option for well people to gain access to health facilities when needed since hospitals can only charge those admitted sick people via their insurers pay for well people s convenience option issue arises with the suburbanization of the population associated with the falling user cost of housing between and that lower cost of housing has led to a dispersion of metropolitan population toward outlying areas creating a demand for hospital services near where people live in suburban areas hence hospital bed availability which had declined for a quarter century began to rise after supply in healthcare demand conditions include stay restrictions gate keeping long term care shifts and seasonality restrictions by stay requirement are under guidelines determined by medicare medicaid and private insurers hospital admission requires admitting or gate keeping privileges by doctors as patients cannot check themselves in long term care has shifted from hospitals to nursing homes furthermore hospitals must build for peak capacity agency in management and locational dispersion of attractive patients hospital construction is regulated by certificates of need by more than states thus limiting supply but construction is often financed by municipal bonds even if hospitals are managed by private concerns this municipal bond subsidy is in conflict with con ownership by nonprofits and management by for profits can create agency conflicts if the management is paid on revenue the appropriate incentives are to compensate management companies based on net income a procedure being used in the hospital market that compensation structure is being used in healthcare where there is resistance as in other real estate markets such as in retail apartment and office demographic shifts are creating population growth pockets outer suburban areas are attractive to hospitals inner cities have concentrations of the poor without insurance and rural areas have relatively older clienteles with chronic conditions relying on medicare and medicaid rather than private insurance these conditions indicate addition of capacity in outer suburban areas there is also functional obsolescence leading to the need for construction and renovation in inner city and rural areas an integrated vertical delivery system hospitals treat all diseases while doctors and insurers determine admissions and therefore expenses where there are specialty hospitals management operation is frequently controlled by doctors in that field leading to problems of self referral a driving force is technology which has increased the quality and lowered the cost of healthcare there is evidence of the efficacy of gene therapy and biomaterials in brain tumors drilling can be through the nose rather than with a craniotomy a procedure that reduces length of stay to two days from as much as six weeks including recuperation customization and chip technology are increasingly able to simulate the functioning of organs to encourage use of individual health plans cutler proposes a refundable tax credit of up to per the coverage is for nationally mandated definitions premiums paid receive a tax credit providers are paid on a risk adjustment or a for performance basis rather than uniformly risk adjusted pricing establishes procedures for disease treatments such as retinal damage and foot ulceration with diabetes to be tested by family practitioners patients are monitored on a point scale and providers paid accordingly providers having better outcomes receive higher compensation drugs that have an effect on the particular a higher cost share to deal with incorrect prescription better risk adjustments such as pointing out better caregivers may attract more sick patients an adverse selection in insurance as with pensions employers have begun to switch from defined benefit healthcare plans to defined contribution plans since consumers make the decisions this switch reduces the need for function benefit managers at medical delivery firms and at standards those standards could be enforced separately by public by consumers making their own decisions eventually costs are claimed to decline the research results indicate that any performance gain at for profit hospitals is achieved not by cost efficiency but by higher prices any economies of scale passed through to patients appear to be
this leads the productivity augmenting effect of schooling to exceed fs as approaches fs from below at this the signaling contribution fs becomes negative a result that is clearly nonsensical in order for the signaling model to apply we need to restrict to those values that result in positive contributions of signaling if then required vi conclusion in this article i present a structural model of how employers learn about learning using the coefficients on variables that are easy and hard for employers to observe employers learn quickly their initial expectation errors decline on average by one half within the first years in a second contribution i use the estimated speed of learning to evaluate the importance of job market signaling for schooling decisions i show that the contribution of signaling to the gains from schooling is not identified identify an upper bound on the contribution of signaling if i have access to an estimate of the costs of schooling i estimate the costs of schooling using the opportunity costs of schooling and average tuition the upper bound on signaling obtained is sensitive to variation in the discount rate on labor earnings and in the estimated speed of learning for a wide range of parameter values the bound on the contribution of less than but if the speed of employer learning is very slow and the discount rate is low then it is possible that up to of the gains from schooling are due to signaling my preferred parameter values set the speed of employer learning equal to the point estimate and the discount rate to this discount rate would set the rate of returns to investments in human capital approximately with these parameter values the contribution of signaling to the gain from an additional year of schooling is less than appendix the data used in this study stem from the waves of the nlsy the nlsy was administered to respondents annually from to from on the nlsy moved to a biannual sampling scheme the nlsy consists of three samples the main or cross sectional sample women between the ages of and at the time of the first interview in the supplemental sample of youths oversamples the hispanic black or disadvantaged white population the military sample consists of youths aged who were enlisted in the military in september i restrict the analysis to the nonblack respondents from the cross sectional the only reported observations occur prior to graduation next i drop all observation years in which individuals do not work for pay or earn wages less than or more than this leaves me with individuals and observations with increasing experience the sample size declines rapidly a large part of this is due to the biannual sampling scheme after and the young age of respondents at the onset of the study i drop fewer than respondents this limits the analysis to those observations with an experience less than this results in the loss of another respondents and observations the total remaining sample consists of individuals with observations all statistics in the article are unweighted table contains summary statistics for the main variables used in this study the wage is calculated as the real average hourly rate of pay delivers the same results the afqt was administered to the sample population in thus different cohorts took it at different ages to eliminate age effects i standardize the afqt score within each cohort statistics are based on the unweighted cross sectional sample described in the appendix the sample consists of individuals with observations in the years olitical economy the effect of file sharing on record sales an empirical analysis felix oberholzer gee for intellectual property the internet provides a natural crucible to assess the implications of reduced protection because it drastically lowers the cost of copying information in this paper we analyze whether file sharing has reduced the legal sales of music while this question is receiving considerable attention in academia industry and congress we are the first to study the phenomenon employing to us sales data for a large number of albums to establish causality we instrument for downloads using data on international school holidays downloads have an effect on sales that is statistically indistinguishable from zero our estimates are inconsistent with claims that file sharing is the primary reason for the decline in music sales during our study period introduction each month a figure that has grown by over percent in the last two years sharing files is largely nonrivalrous because the original owner retains his or her copy of a downloaded file the low cost of sharing and significant network externalities are key reasons for the dramatic growth in file sharing while few participated prior to the founding year of napster in there were about million peer to peer networks because physical distance is largely irrelevant in file sharing individuals from virtually every country in the world participate there is great interest in understanding the economic effects of file sharing in part because the music industry was quick to blame the phenomenon for the recent decline in sales between and the number of compact discs shipped in the united states fell by claiming that file sharing was the culprit the recording industry started suing thousands of individuals who share files the industry also asked the supreme court to rule on the legality of file sharing services a question that critically hinges on the market harm caused by the new technology congress is currently considering a number of measures designed to counter the perceived threat of file sharing on record sales and industry profits is ambiguous participants could substitute downloads for legal purchases thus reducing sales the inferior sound quality of downloads and the lack of features such as liner notes or cover art perhaps limit such substitution alternatively file sharing allows users to learn about music they would not browse the files of others and discuss music in file server chat rooms this learning may promote new
is sufficiently long to allow for further oxidation and for the formation of carbonate groups remaining on the surface dft demonstrates that induces oxygen accumulation in the subsurface region and stabilizes this species more efficiently the mev vibration in the hreel spectrum moves to mev in presence of and this frequency is best reproduced by theory if two oocta for each molecule are present this is attributed to a concerted motion of the two subsurface oxygen atoms a maximum of six oocta pro was determined from quantitative analysis of the xps data and the trend was confirmed up to three oocta by dft that the large majority of supersurface sites is still free for adsorption of other reactants from the gas phase this finding might help in clarifying some effects so far unexplained eg the activation of polycrystalline ag films for ethylene epoxidation by pre treatment with co and mixtures in the mbar range and the high activity of ag powders under no xps identification of osub could be performed for ag since the binding energies of both sub and supersurface oxygen have very close values giving rise to a single peak around ev oxygen adsorption at cu adsorbate induced reconstruction and surface oxide formation the adsorbate induced reconstruction of transition and hence on the catalytic properties for hmi surfaces with closed packed terraces oriented oxygen adsorption was demonstrated to cause a transition from monoatomic to double steps on various metals on the contrary for more open stepped surfaces showing eg or oriented terraces oxygen induced faceting occurs the effect was surfaces compared to the relatively large chemisorption energy of oxygen which binds mainly at steps among the systems cited above the structural consequences of oxygen adsorption at cu surfaces were investigated in the greatest detail a second reason for the interest in the interaction with cu surfaces is the attempt to clarify the mechanism underlying promising for applications to photovoltaic cells moreover particular attention to copper oxides has been stimulated by recent progress in the metal oxide based high temperature superconductors whose basic units are cu chains or layers finally is an efficient catalyst for the partial oxidation of propylene to acrolein while cuo is used in gas sensors the recent synthesis of this material due to the focus on oxide formation investigations of the cu system extended to the high coverage regime induced reconstruction of vicinal cu surfaces in analogy with the ag system the vicinal surface is the energetically most stable geometry also for cu but thanks to the higher reactivity of this metal the oxygen exposure required to induce faceting is much lower to produce smaller facets the process is complete after exposure to of at rt and subsequent annealing to but the first effects are present already after of exposure cu is therefore the most natural candidate to start our analysis with stm studies of cu at rt show a step fuzziness which disappears when the steps are decorated by oxygen atoms as expected for kinked step edges and that the latter are stabilized by oxygen adatoms contrary to the majority of stepped surfaces cu is very well ordered allowing for a precise structural analysis and it is very stable it was therefore used as a model to try to understand the structure forming on cu at ml therein the most recent model elaborated by vlieg and coworkers and based on ray diffraction experiments and dft calculations is reported in fig at ml adatoms occupy two non equivalent sites at the bottom of the step and in the four fold hollow in the middle of the terrace of the undistorted cu surface thus forming a mesh this model is implicit xpd investigation by thompson and fadley on the contrary at low coverage adsorption at two fold sites at the top of the step edges is suggested several hmi cu surfaces are prone to facet into terraces when exposed to mentioned above the formation of facets upon exposure on cu on the other hand cu and cu vicinal and facets the geometry of the third side is then determined by the necessity of maintaining the macroscopic orientation and is therefore like for cu and like for cu the dynamics and the temperature dependence of the faceting transition is well described by stm measurements by reinecke and taglauer fig reports the stm images corresponding the facet edges varies between nm and nm and the facet area is larger for higher temperature or lower pressure a similar dependence was observed for cu admitting an arrhenius like temperature dependence for the facet density on cu and for the facet linear density on cu the authors estimated the energy barrier responsible ev since the facet densities for the two surfaces can be related by a factor of applies for comparison of the apparent activation energies therefore these values are practically identical and demonstrate that the energy cost for the formation of cu chains is essentially independent of the initial step density the general conclusion is that the driving mechanism inducing cu rows at their borders the special energetic stability of cu with respect to the other hmi faces must then be related to the particular step periodicity and terrace structure an exception with respect to cu vicinal surfaces is given by cu for which faceting does not occur indeed leed analysis of this surface proved that adsorption at causes an added row reconstruction with extending in the direction a scheme of this structure as resulting from the best fit of experimental data is reported in fig while the best fit parameters are reported in table adatoms are present in the long bridge sites slightly deeper than the topmost cu atoms and the first three surface layers relax a different highly stable reconstruction is observed upon oxygen exposure on stepped cu surfaces exhibiting cu was performed by witte and coworkers they demonstrated that no faceting occurs even at large exposures but that two other regimes are present depending on the oxygen dose
a tool to produce a particular desirable result we may conclude that whereas the information processing model looks at communication as a linear binary sequence of events the dynamic systems model looks at the relation between behaviors and how the whole configuration changes over time the information processing approach is linked to terms like signal and response sending and receiving encoding and dst approach is based on terms like engagement and disengagement synchrony and discord breakdown and repair in interaction and the properties that emerge from it creativity in language the ip model is often associated with a ug approach to language which set itself off against behaviorism by assuming that creativity in language use cannot be whereas the information processing paradigm sees creativity as a property of the language system itself dynamic systems theory views creativity as a property of agents behavior in co regulated interactions however several attempts have been made to explore the compatibility between dst and a ug approach to language an early contribution to fields of attraction and argues that a dst perspective can explain the emergence of complexity in phonological development cooper s view is in line with mohanan s work in that he sees universal aspects as attractors resulting from random processes rather than constraining development or change he introduces dst notions in his study of diachronic is that it is possible to set up an attractor grammar with grammar rules seen as the basins of attraction a more traditional ug based approach is used in a series of articles by nowak and his colleagues in which the necessity of ug is supported with evidence from formal language theory learning theory the fact that individuals are able to select the right language by assuming a dynamic interaction between among other factors the communicative payoff of using a language structure the fitness of a particular language and a learning algorithm referring to deterministic population dynamics they argue that a succession of ug s has evolved from a system of early animal communication to the ug of human beings the hypothesis space in acquisition is not by definition rejected in a dst approach a dst approach does not require innate linguistic properties as a necessary condition for language acquisition because in dst complexity and therefore creativity emerges from the iterations as smith kirby and brighton argue language acquisition is may be seen as part of the initial condition of the developing dynamic language system agrees that the two perspectives are complementary and could exist side by side with their own research traditions and communities however she argues for the application of dst to accommodate both social and cognitive approaches to sla because in dst development is seen as a process that own view on nativism when she refers extensively to hopper s emergentist views grammar is regarded as epiphenomenal a by product of a communication process it is not a collection of rules and target forms to be acquired by language learners language or grammar is not about having it is about doing participating in social experiences use on representation grammar is usage and usage is also leading dst researchers such as thelen and smith leave little room for nativist ideas on language acquisition shanker and king s view of language is even less traditional we are not concerned here with what might or might not have gone on inside kanzi s head that enabled him to develop viewed as a particular type of reflexive activity in which kanzi was enculturated reflexive is used in the sense that language is not an abstract autonomous entity itself but is used to communicate in a real world and addresses real wants and needs of participants language as a reflexive activity who present an overview of research on the interaction between information provided by adults in synchronous bimodal presentation of objects and their names and the infant s reaction to that there is clear evidence of self regulating processes of word acquisition in the child and dove tailing in the reactions and anticipations of adults in that process the child s perceptual skills and memory development appear to be dynamically related by the child lead to affordances by the adult for example by naming objects the child is holding or pointing to and that adult bimodal pairing of words and objects such as moving an object and synchronously naming it allow the child to associate the two and remember that link the interaction is dynamic in the sense that the adult reacts to the child and the child in the interactional patterns in the early stages the adult synchronous bimodal presentation is needed for such pairing to take place while in later stages the child appears to guess the relation between words and objects even when not presented synchronously not only the interaction between caretaker and child but also the interaction between hearing a word and perceptual properties is found in an acquisition study by yoshida and smith in teaching english perceptual cues to japanese children the authors show the following by teaching associations between words and perceptual properties one will change not only what is known about the words but also what is known about the correlations among the perceptual properties or just another type of behavior while in the mentalist tradition language is seen as a special and probably uniquely human facility the different approach to language presented above leaves little room for such a special position for language and we tend to agree with cowan when he claims that language comprehension and production function more problem solving skills we may ask how young immature minds can ever solve language puzzles for this shanker and king refer to a hypothesis put forward by newport and elaborated on by deacon which can be summarized as less is more language must have evolved in such a way that the immature brain can acquire it and deacon provides the following evolutionary argument to support this because languages that are more easily acquired at an early
mobility can also be an explanation for inter regional correlations regions vary substantially in size so we may need to correct for heteroskedasticity we thus need to correct our standard error estimates for valid policy inferences and hypothesis testing in particular we use the robust covariance matrix estimator described on page of wooldridge although wooldridge s discussion on that page is motivated by the approach applies to the correction of not only the contemporaneous correlation among error terms within same years but heteroskedasticity as well second the public and private housing investment variables sometimes exhibit zero which implies that censored regression might be necessary for example crowding out would have occurred with a large magnitude but the private investment cannot go below zero for the censored nature of data along with the standard regression we also conduct tobit maximum likelihood estimation with a lower bound at zero another specification as a robustness check along with the specification mentioned above we also consider a slightly different specification for the following reason panel data estimation cannot be perfectly free of the usual estimation problems encountered in time series analyses eg non stationarity in some variables the non stationarity problem vanishes asymptotically as the number of goes to infinity but it would be a concern in small samples among the approaches to deal with that the literature uses the detrending or differencing method popularly in the level specification shown above controlling for year dummy variables helped us deal with potential non stationarity by detrending so it would be useful to examine the first difference estimation results as a robustness the fact that differencing in autoregressive models can induce can induce a simultaneity problem is well known from the conventional time series literature and has been explored in a panel data context the usual solution is to employ iv estimation while there may be many types of instruments we choose them based on the following usual identification condition and criterion first the error term is uncorrelated with all past values of the variables in eq and other regressors including the region specific and fixed effects for all s use the latest lagged variables only because weak instruments would lead to a severe bias toward ols estimates data and the sample the data are collected from various sources of administrative records related to housing from the ministry of construction and it collects not only the total housing investment statistics but also the levels of rental housing investment conducted by the government sponsored public enterprises and private companies for each region over time from to regional gdp is obtained from the national statistical the census data contain the housing availability ratio across regions by year as well as the overall nationwide the government classification of regions we collect information about regions covering all the cities and provinces as the primary units among the regions are observed during the sample period while ulsan and gyungnam have been separately observable since when ulsan became an independent unit from the resulting sample size is table provides regional housing market conditions and the recent public housing construction regions vary substantially in population size and housing availability ratio as well reading the table across columns we can see that public housing construction seems to respond not only to availability and quality of housing condition but also to other factors such as suppressing the excessive agglomeration in the seoul metropolitan area for instance public housing construction in gyunggi is far greater than that in the national city of seoul while the housing availability ratio is higher in gyunggi province than in seoul similarly public housing construction is still carried out in the context of boosting housing welfare in non metropolitan areas even if the housing availability ratio is over empirical results nationwide aggregate public and private investment tend to move in a similar direction until the mid after then this comovement becomes weaker and in the later years of the sample we see an oppositely moving tendency suggesting an increasing crowding out the following subsection attempts to provide econometric explanations about the time trend observed in fig level regression results of year and region specific dummies are used a multi collinearity problem arises so we drop the year dummy variable for the earliest sample period from now conventionally a lag length of two is used for annual data and this convention is supported in our case by the akaike and schwarz information criteria the resulting samples used in estimation are thus table reports the level regression results first the wald test results strongly support a tobit mle is to deal with the left censored observations with the two columns present empirical evidence that lagged values of public rental housing investment do not appear to granger cause the private investment the coefficients of the lagged variables are small and weak in statistical significance a similar pattern applies to the case where public investment is the dependent variable and the lagged values of public and private investment are used as regressors and we find that the interaction terms turn out highly statistically significant in column of table the estimated coefficients for pubit and hrit pubit the two year earlier public investment level interacted with hrit are statistically significant at the also the private the public investment with some time lags it responds more negatively to the two period earlier public investment than to the previous period counterpart the estimated results suggest that the public investment effects are dependent on the housing availability ratio with a housing availability ratio over the gls model the crowding out effect begins to emerge below that threshold ratio we find rather that the public the so called filling in a bit different pattern emerges from the public investment equation interaction terms are a bit less significant and their small magnitude implies that at a typical housing availability rate public investment responds weakly positively to private investment at all meanwhile for all specifications the tobit mle
departs from its prototype by transforming the maja in the tapestry cartoon the butt of goya s satire is the petimeter in the etching the artist chiefly attacks the female characters however it cannot be denied that in both works men bear more or less responsibility for their mistreatment by women in spite of the similarities between the two works they inevitably depart and the differences finally triumph the trajectory that is traced here from harmless satire to cynicism parallels a trend seen in much of goya s oeuvre as the aging artist seemingly becomes more disillusioned with the world around him found in translation the two lives of cioran or how can one be a comparatist ilinca zarifopol johnston comment peut on etre persan asks a startled parisian in montesquieu s but poignantly reversed by cioran in his la tentation d exister the temptation to exist of comment peut on etre roumain how can one be a romanian he asks frustrated in his struggles to make his way in that same capital of world culture montesquieu s question is a challenge to perceived marginality from a position of self assured identity and cultural centrality in cioran s question its own cultural identity to it i would add as a student of cioran my own question how can one be a comparatist by asking it i mean to challenge some of the career norms in the practice of comparative literature in american academia today for i find i cannot focus exclusively on my object of study cioran and his two lives without including the facts of my own life as a romanian living in the united states the experiences are an integral part of my quest for that object in translating cioran s process of translating himself from romanian into french i realized i had opened up not simply a new biographical project but discovered a new autobiographical self as well bringing the romanian cioran into english as i was brought from romania to america but who exactly is cioran on one level the answer is easy he la tentation d exister de inconvenient d etre ne la chute dans le temps histoire et utopie and syllogismes de armertume among several other books he was a good friend of henri michaux as well as of samuel beckett benjamin fondane paul celan and eugene ionesco writer to honor our language since the death of paul valery a modern socrates and the most distinguished figure in the tradition of kierkegaard nietzsche and wittgenstein when he died in paris in his death triggered an avalanche of articles in major french newspapers michel as the library of congress mistakenly lists him but simply for as in forster cioran deliberately turned the first two letters of his first name into initials to allude to that well known english author by thus modifying his given name into a pen name cioran revealed both his ambitions as an author and his biographical ambiguities he had in fact two lives two identities two authorial voices the romanian cioran a mystical revolutionary imbued with the ideals of political romanticism and the french cioran who in left romania willing himself into exile in paris on the eve of his first publication in france in the young cioran an from the margins of europe found inside his romanian name the elements to prefigure his wider fame at the epicenter of european culture two ordinary letters raised to the status of famous initials there are no other connections between cioran and forster embedded in the new name was cioran s sense of his own greatness soon gratifyingly confirmed by favorable reviews of his first book precis de decomposition in the french thus through a new baptism of anointment by the french press the barbarian was transfigured transformed beyond recognition remade into a french author he had successfully escaped his marginal condition i have translated two of cioran s early romanian books pe culmile dispera rii on the heights of despair and lacrimi s mi sfint mci tears and saints what did i find in translating a famous french author s romanian writings into english i french romanian english because i am sure the university of chicago press would never have asked me to translate the romanian cioran had he not already become the french cioran duly translated into english by the eminent poet translator richard howard thanks to my translations i was led into a new project an intellectual biography tentatively titled cioran portrait of the philosopher as a of self creation between and during which cioran proceeded by trial and error over peaks of mystical intensity through sloughs of suicidal despair and with the extreme political attachments along the way whose shifts can be charted in his texts of the period i seek to determine how this obscure young romanian made himself into the ironic moralist and elegant stylist so admired in france today course of translating has been as important to me as the result the find of the discovery itself paradoxically the discovery process finding something new something more began with my cutting reducing cioran s works his words the cuts were made with cioran s permission in fact at his urging he was still alive at the time and by way of helping me he gave me a copy of the french version of lacrimi s sfint des as a model he had helped his french translator sanda stolojan translate lacrimi s sfint into french which became such a radically pruned version of the original that it is a substantially different work madame simone boue cioran s lifelong companion told me that madame stolojan actually cried as cioran mercilessly chopped the romanian text to make it fit the french mold he had cut out in the french version but after a while i too became frustrated with this compulsive cutting my task was as i conceived it to accurately and fully translate his romanian original not his french
with specific combinations of values for the key variables reveal grounds for both optimism and pessimism regarding the future trajectory of the hiv aids epidemic and they have several implications for improving the effectiveness of programs promoting condom use our findings for russia indicate the need to incorporate heterogeneity in condom use into models rate of condom use per sex act but the heterogeneity that our results reveal is so great that such a summary measure would offer limited insight into how condoms can shape the course of hiv in russia and potentially elsewhere as well prior research on russia condom use and percent said they seldom or never use condoms in a survey of st petersburg high school students percent of sexually active respondents said they consistently use condoms a survey of muscovites younger than found that percent report consistent condom use high risk for hiv aids such as idus and men who have sex with men although they are informative the results of these prior studies cannot be generalized from their small specialized and or nonrandom samples to the russian population moreover apart from basic bivariate analyses they do not analyze heterogeneity in condom use despite about hiv influence the use of condoms the sex event approach in examining the correlates of condom use our unit of analysis is the sex event rather than the individual the decision to use a condom is inherently contextual the same individual may use a condom during one sex event but not another this variation may be related systematically to characteristics specific to the context of each and whether alcohol was consumed be fore the event to capture the influence of these contextual factors it is necessary to analyze condom use in specific events of sexual intercourse and to include variables characterizing both individuals and sex event context by contrast prior studies of condom use in russia analyze average use as reported by the respondent periods of time and on their subjective translation of an estimated number of events into a likert scale measure of frequency such measures therefore are more prone to error than event specific measures presumably respondents differ much less in their understanding of what it means to have used a condom during a specific sexual encounter than they differ in interpretations potential measurement error and offers superior potential for relating condom use to the spread of hiv furthermore average use analyses cannot capture how contraceptive practice varies systematically by characteristics of sex event context therefore they cannot address key questions about the mechanisms behind correlations between individual characteristics and condom of interpretation in the absence of a sex event level approach event level analyses are especially useful for understanding the effects of variables that can operate at multiple levels consider for example alcohol consumption widely found to correlate negatively with individuals condom use this correlation could result from a proximate effect whereby drinking alternatively individuals who drink frequently may be more predisposed than those who do not to take risks thus the correlation between drinking and condom use may stem from their joint association with risk taking orientation an event level analysis can assess these alternative explanations by controlling simultaneously for the individual s average drinking behavior and for alcohol consumption prior to distal effect of average drinking behavior but not a proximate effect of drinking prior to the event another example involves the effect of being married married people report lower levels of condom use that difference could reflect either less frequent use of condoms during sex events among married partners or a greater preference for not using condoms among people analyzing both marital and extramarital sex events involving married people most importantly without an event specific measure we cannot know whether married people are more or less likely to use a condom when they have extramarital sexual encounters this question is crucial from an epidemiological perspective because low condom use in marital sexual encounters implies that the probability of condoms when they have extramarital encounters the transmission rate of stds will be greatly reduced a desire to protect a spouse from stds may serve as a strong motive for using condoms married people may be less likely to use condoms in extramarital encounters however whether because they grow accustomed to having sex without condoms in their oriented to risk taking which in turn reduces their probability of using condoms an event level analysis permits us to test empirically which of these scenarios applies data variables and methods the russian longitudinal monitoring survey is a panel survey implemented almost annually since by researchers researchers the rlms employs a multistage sample design first counties are divided into strata on the basis of geographic variables urbanization and ethnicity after excluding prohibitively remote regions and war torn chechnya moscow city moscow province and st petersburg are included as self representing primary sampling units one psu is selected are based on villages in rural areas and census enumeration districts voting districts or residential postal zones in urban areas within ssus dwellings are enumerated and randomly sampled and a single household in each dwelling is selected for the survey in subsequent rounds interviewers return to the sampled dwelling to conduct interviews with the currently residing household even if rates have always exceeded percent in and the rlms administered special batteries on sexual behavior and contraceptive use to respondents aged in both waves respondents who had had intercourse at least once within the past year were asked questions about the most recent occasion of male female sexual intercourse with their partners from the preceding year these questions do not yield a random sample of sex events in russia so we cannot use the rlms to estimate the rate of condom use per sex event they do however provide information about multiple sex events for respondents and a rich set of variables characterizing respondents and sex events enabling us to model heterogeneity in condom use of condom use sex events during which respondents did not
variety of cases to discern if there is a contingent relationship between the global and national that produces predictable variants understanding of what precipitates a recursive episode and what brings it to a close this leads to two sets of questions about the scope of the theory does it apply in non global law related contexts and does it apply to areas of law and society research other than bankruptcy the first question can be answered decisively because a limited version of the theory has weak or non existent in most fields of law before the late recursive processes of reform can be found that are mostly however we expect that the more proximate are nation states to global institutions and norms and the more susceptible they are to external influences the more likely that legal change will require a recursive theory that embraces both the exogenous and endogenous about fields other than the empirical case studied here evidence from diverse areas of law and society research indicates that recursivity is either implied in or required to amplify several theories legal consciousness how is it possible to explain turns from private responses to harms such as worker injuries or sexual harassment regulation what mechanisms drive successively more elaborate approximations by agents of state or suprastate regulation to cope with partial or creative or noncompliance by the subjects of regulation why do the subjects of regulation not comply as prohibition drug control and crimes against humanity procedural justice do people obey the law in part because of the legitimacy of lawmaking its consistency with public beliefs and its clarity of formulation indeed we propose that any sociolegal issue that involves implementation globalization of a neoliberal market ideology also points to promising directions for research on globalization to the world polity school of globalization theory the case of corporate bankruptcy reveals a set of processes by which global norms are generated how a division of labor and diversity of products and legitimation warrants can be melded into a single universal standard and how these global to the world systems theory of globalization this study confirms that international institutions can exert a powerful influence on developing countries especially during times of financial stress however that influence can be over stated law on the books and law in action are two quite different things implementation shifts the battleground in favor of nation states and even weak states have many ways of foiling global hegemons law distinction between law on the books and law in action especially in a dynamic framework of recursivity exposes a means by which weapons of the weak can forestall the seemingly overwhelming power of ifis and the united states this article reinforces the findings of postcolonial studies on law that the field of law can be both highly instrumental as for instance in the aspirations of global elites and highly globalization of corporate insolvency regimes conservative as in the inertial local resistance to exogenous forces although it must be said that instrumentalism can arise locally and inertia can reside in global institutions globalization of many kinds relies upon law whether in the establishment of global legal norms or the institutionalization national practices in sum lawmaking belongs firmly on the agenda for the sociology of law by dropping lawmaking from its agenda law and society scholarship impoverishes the explanation of the phenomenon the gap between law on the books and law in action at the core of its enterprise the nature of any current gap almost certainly bears a connection to prior cycles of lawmaking lawmaking can be integrated back into the sociolegal nexus a model of the recursivity of law several strands of work in the field have implicitly pointed to such a model without specifying it conceptually research on global insolvency reforms indicates that much of the conventional sociolegal problem to be explained depends on the sociology of a particular lawmaking episode how much can only be understood by attending to the structures and processes that contributed to the formalization of law and some of the the shape of the explanation itself depends on patterns established in longer term trajectories of multiple lawmaking cycles in many respects the best of law and society scholarship has done this however the recursive perspective builds systematic approaches to sociolegal explanation directly into the frame itself and opens up a set of questions largely implicit in conventional analysis in the highly instrumental of law provides an integrative framework to build on the classical foundations of the sociology of law while elaborating theoretical structures that are more robust and better suited to law and society in a global context political action and party formation in the united states constitutional convention or ideological to specific decontextualized propositions we argue that the meaning of any one issue was dependent upon its position relative to other issues in the overall sequence of questions consequently each decision changed the meaning of future issues and hence how actors understood where their commonalities of interest lay devoted to the task of rebuilding the institutions that constituted the national state delegates explicitly reshaped the board on which the their commonalities of interest lay devoted to the task of rebuilding the institutions that constituted the national state delegates explicitly reshaped the board on which the political game would be played such that patterns of action within the convention had implications for patterns of action outside of the convention as each subsequent decision within the convention fixed a previous point of contention it also indirectly determined which issues would become viable of conflict in the future by the end of the convention even before the first presidential election state delegations began to arrange themselves in a manner consonant with the outlines of the first party system this previously unrecognized finding only makes sense however in terms of a temporally contextualized model of political action publication abstract headnote using data on state voting patterns we examine the positions taken by state delegations on questions
portals the avignon porch frescoes can be understood as linked they do not express the sequence of universal human judgement and salvation but the stages of stefaneschi s individual towards the sight of god through his devotion to the virgin through his desired sight of the incarnate christ the lux mundi towards his hoped for sight of the redeemer but is there still more in this scheme that enlarges this apparent theme of seeing the porch frescoes as a whole the other paintings that were once part of the whole composition namely the have attracted very little interest however given the theme of sight and seeing that is proposed for the surviving frescoes it is intriguing to reconsider them in this light the south wall to the right of the portal offers no connection with this theme of vision but does offer a connection with stefaneschi having once carried an image of st george and the dragon it is thought that the basic composition of this fresco is recorded in a drawing now in the biblioteca the while there can be no certainty about the date or the original appearance of this now destroyed an image of st george would have been eminently appropriate in a project commissioned by stefaneschi whose cardinal church was giorgio in velabro the connection with stefaneschi is enhanced by a verse inscription known to have been composed by the cardinal found beneath the but more fruitful in terms of a connection with a theme of sight and seeing this wall is the one part of the porch for which there is no surviving visual evidence it has never been discussed therefore as part of the overall project beyond note being taken of its basic subject matter this is partly because a basic knowledge of its subject matter adds nothing to the prevalent discussions about northern european or italian style and visual sources however when considered the light of the suggestion that sight and seeing is at issue in the frescoes that were on the entrance wall its subject matter seems potentially more significant apparently the north wall once bore an image of a miracle concerning the healing of a blind man reputed to have taken place in this very location in the porch of the cathedral of avignon by the seventeenth century the fresco on this wall had vanished but was at that time associated with the florentine carmelite and was remembered as having been painted on the wall of the cathedral porch the two vitae of the saint both record the avignonese miracle however some of the more recent scholarly sources on andrea corsini suggest that corsini was never in which casts doubt on whether a miracle concerning andrea corsini would have formed part of stefaneschi s fresco ensemble but a fresco recording a local healing miracle in interest to stefaneschi regardless of the actual identity of the miracle s protagonist given that the image recorded as having been on the south wall was so clearly connected with stefaneschi it seems likely that the description of the image on the north wall might also refer to something that was part of stefaneschi s monument to himself the obvious resonances between the subject of the remembered fresco and the concerns with seeing showing and revealing in the virgin and child also suggest that a fresco depicting the healing of a blind man whoever the protagonists might have been would have been an appropriate part of the original ensemble of imagery decorating the cathedral porch the subject matter of the frescoes which are recorded as having decorated the side walls of the avignon porch having been considered the project as a whole can now be re assessed like the different levels of the french sculpted portals the as forming a linked series that may be read together moving inwards and upwards from the recent past to the distant future first the side walls closest to the outside of the porch appear to have depicted the miraculous healing of real physical blindness which had reputedly taken place in that very space with the image of stefaneschi s patron saint george opposite then there is an intermediate zone moving inwards from the where cardinal stefaneschi is seen in the company of the virgin and the incarnate christ petitioning for the virgin s care and intercession and for a sight of the christ child finally the upper zone shows the resurrected glorified redeemer whom stefaneschi will see on the completion of his soul s progress towards salvation salvation and the sight of god a concern with sight and seeing in the frescoes might in one sense be understood to vision and visuality and to the role of the visual in devotion and vision was increasingly regarded as having a redemptive role and the intersection of vision and redemption was of great interest to medieval thinkers philosophers and theologians the avignon frescoes offer a three stage depicted ascent from the physical vision of the mortal embodied eye through a vision of the incarnate christ obtained by the cardinal to the awaited vision of god to be by the cleansed soul of stefaneschi all this could well be understood as part of the standard repertory of medieval thought regarding multi layered allegorical and anagogical thinking about the ascent from the visible and worldly to the invisible transcendent and heavenly more specifically it could be seen in the context of the currency of augustinian ideas about corporal spiritual and intellectual vision however i would also suggest that these ideas about sight and seeing the frescoes might have been encouraged by the specific historical and theological context in which stefaneschi had been living and working these frescoes were being carried out at some time during the late and early in the wake of the recently renewed and only very recently settled controversy about the beatific vision a theological debate about when the dead see god that had been raging in avignon and the
in the country or local region for nearly all tropical forest sites multidecade records solar radiation cloud cover soil moisture atmospheric deposition of nitrogen pesticides or other pollutants soil nutrients tropospheric ozone and uv there is also still quite limited understanding of the physiological responses of tropical forest plants to these environmental factors many fundamental questions are currently how respiration responses of roots stems and leaves vary with soil fertility how do tropospheric ozone levels affect photosynthetic rates how much of the photosynthetically fixed carbon is currently being lost due to temperature sensitive emissions of isoprene and other volatile organic compounds stages of the same species tropical plants capacities to acclimate photosynthesis and respiration to increasing temperatures are poorly studied their ability to acclimate could decline abruptly at certain threshold conditions and may already be quite limited changes in plant performance over the change a quantitative and broadly generalizable grasp of all these aspects of the physiological responses of tropical forest plants particularly canopy trees is needed for improving the realism of global ecosystem process models data transparency access given the globally significant implications of any directional changes in tropical forests a particular forest researchers to overcome the cultural barriers and emulate the human genome project for strong science full documentation and transparency are needed to enable informed peer evaluation of research findings accessibility of the data to the broader community is also likely to produce new ways of learning from the field observations can now make their field data and associated metadata freely available as downloadable files on public websites the ci team initiative for tropical biodiversity monitoring will put all data and metadata on the web without restrictions within yr of the field measurements the ctfs plot network is currently implementing web based open access to all plot data taken publish their datasets in the ecological society of america s peer reviewed data journal ecological archives contribute them to public websites based data archives or post them on personal websites published papers that present original findings should now as a matter of course include electronic appendices including all all these steps will strengthen efforts to detect trends in tropical forests challenge tangled threads of causation if a tropical forest is found to be changing a particularly tough nut to crack will be correctly identifying the why of the changes in addition to the possibility that study sites are continuing to respond to historical influences as discussed above other factors will complicate attempts section focuses on these additional layers of complexity and then illustrates a number of them with two case studies a fundamental difficulty is caused by the simultaneous changes in climatic and atmospheric factors for example recent strong el nino events brought both intensified drought stress and peak temperatures to se asia and parts of the neotropics similarly canopy leaf photosynthetic rates in an amazonian forest carbon uptake in a costa rican forest declined in periods with both higher temperatures and greater leaf water stress in these examples the co occurring factors were both stressors but were they coequal in effect or was one dominating or were they synergistic when there is also change in a factor such as increasing atmospheric with potentially opposite effect distinguishing ecosystem process models may be the most effective way to estimate the relative contributions of such simultaneous changes secondly context can greatly influence outcomes for example the effect of a given set of environmental conditions on a tropical forest could be expected to vary depending on preceding climatic history although similar sharp peaks in pan tropical temperatures temperatures may have had stronger negative impacts because of their greater contrast with those of the preceding decade a second example is given by tropical elevational gradients global warming is an intensifying stress on the already warm forests in the lowlands but it may enhance productivity of tropical forests at higher elevations at least for a while al in the case of water stress for example forest responses may be more strongly linked to soil moisture minima or the number of consecutive days without rain than to annual or monthly rainfall totals mean monthly air temperature commonly used to indicate site conditions may correlate less with observed plant responses than other temperature metrics when a plant response is photosynthesis driven for example a more relevant with temperatures above some threshold for solar radiation valuable metrics might be the direct and diffuse radiation accumulated when vapor pressure deficit is below some critical value discerning the most appropriate climatic indicators may require creative exploratory analyses or iterative process level modeling biotic responses to environmental factors can involve hysteresis change such as the conversion of forest to grassland or savanna in the drier parts of the amazon when sufficiently intense drought and or high temperatures occur the occurrence of a given forest response at one time can preclude a similar response later an example is the die off of most very large trees in a borneo forest in the el nino the extreme off because the very large trees had been lost and insufficient time had passed for them to be replaced similarly a strong mass flowering event of asian dipterocarp trees in yr can preclude a big masting in the following year regardless of whether the appropriate environmental conditions or trigger reoccur in the case of floristic responses to intensifying stressors if there is a progressive shift toward more resistant species due to mortality of the forest level responses to the stressor may diminish or disappear a distinct effect is interannual carryover for example elevated tree mortality in one climatically extreme year might continue into the next year even though those conditions have abated such temporal complexities can obviate simple correlations between time series of forest function and time series of environmental factors even when there is a strong causal link of ongoing change in tropical forests other key ingredients include consistent long term monitoring ongoing development of new kinds of information as understanding deepens the use of
the money was ever delivered to the deprived citizens of israel the money went to the israeli state and from there immediately back to the us directly into aipac s account in newsweek it was written that the investigation exposed the aipac lobby as one of the most effective networks of foreign influence model everything was done to ensure that he would not be re elected anyone standing against him was financed and supported from that time to this the road to the capitol has been scattered with candidates from the elite of american politics whose careers have been similarly torpedoed by aipac in this manner aipac impacted on congress policy with such successful results that successor john kennedy either but did not dare say so publicly because of the latter s immense popularity kennedy disappointed because he did not introduce any significant change to his predecessor s policy but kennedy s vice president lyndon johnson was a different story altogether he was attentive to israel and its needs when kennedy was assassinated and johnson became president kenen said we lost a good friend israel s founding the game had come out in the open over a huge advertisement published in the new york times scores of senators and members of the house of representatives vowed allegiance to israel s national agenda jewish immigration to israel from the soviet union unlimited arms from the us and tough anti palestinian policies by the un when nixon spelled out his doctrine for safeguarding the american national interest it included a total reliance on israel as the main pillar of us policy in the middle east aipac s mission on the face of it had been accomplished the state department had been neutralized and it looked as if only the jewish electoral voice would be heard when crucial decisions were taken pertaining to israel s fate or even to somewhat different during the administrations of ford reagan and bush sr aipac lost out at crucial junctures in the history of the region the reason for this was that that well oiled mechanism which included a membership of more than had invested so much effort in terrorizing potential anti zionist candidates that it allowed some of the actual policy making in congress to pass unnoticed provide unconditional support to israel were deposed one can in fact pick any year since and find similar victims of aipac s campaign in aipac succeeded in ending the political career of paul findley a member of the house since and one of the few critics of israel s policy in the occupied territories more recently the african american members earl hilliard and cynthia mckinney of the democrats have been aipac s carriage every now and then when the lobby was overdoing its business some of its members were engaged in real espionage work for israel jonathan pollard was convicted of doing so in and in the fbi investigated others who were charged with spying inside the pentagon larry franklin a former senior analyst on the pentagon s iran desk received a prison sentence of nearly thirteen years for passing worked for aipac at the these debacles have not as yet changed the overall picture the senior members of the present bush administration who are involved in formulating policy towards israel and the middle east are all in one way or another connected to aipac and particularly to its think tank the institute for near east policy the most conspicuous among them are secretary of defense donald rumsfeld and vice glamorous event in the american capital the aipac convention each such meeting expresses unconditional support for israel s policy towards the palestinians and anyone opposing this policy is immediately considered by aipac to be its in the us today one cannot ignore the level of integration of jews into the heights of american financial cultural and academic power live outside the society as they did in the anti semitism that feeds on among other things the alienation of the jewish experience did not take root in the us on the other hand the exploitation of the fruits of successful integration into american society for the benefit of a foreign country could itself be the pretext for a new surge of anti semitism in the future ever since chaim weizmann wrote angrily in of the rich el s satisfaction at the affluence of american jewry testifies that much of its capital is intended to maintain american policy in its pro israeli the five sisters legacy there have been those who have argued that if the principal natural resource of the middle east had been bananas the region would not have attracted the interest of various american administrations but it is oil not bananas and this cannot be changed the americans began to be interested in the oilfields of arab world in the and four companies standard oil of california standard oil of new jersey standard oil of newyork and texaco won the first concessions to look for oil in saudi arabia in the first half of the twentieth century in they discovered it there and in bahrain a fifth company gulf oil found oil a few months later in kuwait since then the oil wells have become a principal source for financing air conditioning of all life systems at unprecedented and unmatched levels of energy waste controlling the oil flow on the one hand and extracting earnings from its production on the other became the double goal of american policy in the arab world the emergence of arab nationalism in the middle east foiled the second goal it was iranians who first nationalized oil production cia did not stop the trend the next in line was iraq which nationalized its oil in in the arabian peninsula oil royalties gushed more into the local banks than the bank accounts of the five sisters but oil flowed to the us even if the dividends were now more evenly divided between arab regimes and
personal social networks of urban dwellers in toronto demonstrated that although most people were embedded in well functioning solidarity networks these networks did not overlap and form a single community wellman s approach bridged a lengthy ongoing debate he did not conceptualize the community as primarily a territorially defined group but instead focused on social relationships and the networks in which they are subsequent to his pioneering work it is hard to imagine the study of urban life without the concept of networks and network analysis this is especially true in the context of migration given these extremely valuable contributions in neighboring disciplines it debate about rural communities schweizer and ziker and schnegg are among the few authors who have used network models to study ethnographic cases in a comparative manner for mexico nutini and bell cohen and monaghan have put social relations and exchange on the agenda of mesoamerican community studies although these authors do not use network analysis explicitly their focus a demand for concepts that can deal with social relations systematically the social organization of mesoamerican communities kinship compadrazgo and the cargo system have been identified as the three building blocks of social organization in mesoamerican communities the cargo system is a local hierarchy which incorporates both political and religious offices cargos are held by community members mostly men for one typical responsibilities of the are the organization of religious celebrations for local saints and the administration of the church examples of political offices are the local governor and the local arbitrator or judge most cargos are honorary the person who holds a cargo does not receive monetary payment in fact many cargos are very costly to the officeholder because they require an office hierarchy because individual cargos differ in their culturally attached importance ideally they are assigned in a prescribed order young men begin with relatively insignificant cargos and attempt to work their way up the hierarchical ladder the most important offices are typically held by community members who have reached years of age the cargo serves as a sign of the individual s and to some extent also chance the cargo system has stimulated the development of a number of interpretations discussions center around the question of how resources are exchanged through the system and the effects this exchange has on the social structure of the community nash and wolf originally suggested that the cargo system acts to level internal economic differences and protects the community against the interferences of the colonial state and the church cancian was the that in zinacant significant economic differences existed while the cargo system was flourishing this stratification was so pronounced that economic ranks were inherited from one generation to the next many authors agree that the cargo system in mesoamerican communities is changing it is often suggested that with modernization political integration into the nation state occupational diversification and population significance and in some cases even disappears a closer look reveals at least two major tendencies a lower degree of participation in the cargo system and the separation of the religious from the political branch the compadrazgo system of ritual kinship was one of the first latin american in as curious and quite novel to the englishman of the present day he went on to observe that a man who might betray his own father would never cheat on his compadre a century later foster made compadrazgo relationships dyadic contracts the basis for his analysis of social organization the latin american compadrazgo system is a syncretic transformation of the european catholic practice to appoint godparents is accepted as a member of the religious during the early colonial period these godparenting relationships transformed and became co parenting relationships at the end of this process the relationship between the godparent and the child lost its importance while the relationship between the godparents and the parents the latin american compadrazgo system differs significantly in a second respect from its european roots the events for which spiritual sponsors are required go far beyond the catholic rituals of baptism and confirmation they include all sacraments and important secular rites de passage of a couple s children examples of secular events are the third birthday graduation from primary school and a girl s fifteenth birthday the terms compadre comadre replace the kinship terms or any other term that people may have used in the past to address one another compadres are expected to greet each other when they meet they are supposed to avoid any tension or conflict and they are expected to help or assist each other socially and materially in times of need some studies indicate that compadrazgo relationships tend to be vertical linking parents and godparents of status foster has argued that vertical links connect the community to the outside including the parish center and commercial market places compadrazgo relationships last for a lifetime and cannot be terminated moreover they reach far beyond the dyad that links two families they form a network of ties that provide the individuals with indirect access to a wide range of this brief review of the main characteristics of the compadrazgo system indicates the complexity and variability of the institution i have dealt with some of these characteristics elsewhere my primary focus in this context will be the historical dynamics of the institution a dimension that has been largely neglected in the literature kinship has long been neglected in the study of mesoamerican communities nutini identified three reasons for this disregard the kinship systems of many ethnic groups were quickly identified as a transformation of the spanish bilateral system this classification discouraged many anthropologists from studying it in more detail most kinship models were developed for systems that are based on clearly stated rules in the absence of such rules scholars were not inclined to consider them the territorial unit was the primary focus of analysis and little attention has been paid to the social aspects of community organization in this paper i will
first to mexico and then to china has less to do with international business than it has to do with how products are marketed bought and sold in the domestic american market place the offshoring phenomenon is really about the purposeful weakening of america s industrial structure brought about as by a particular set of american business enterprises the move of american producers overseas is not so much an effort to seek new markets and new opportunities as it is a defensive response to power tactics these enterprises employ recent investment in china for example has been explained in a number of ways with billion people it is the world s largest potential market firms are rushing in hoping to capitalize on an emerging middle class of million consumers average average manufacturing pay of less than one dollar an hour also makes it an attractive option for firms desiring lower wage rates finally in some industries china offers distinctive skills and expertise that are superior to those found in the usa for example chinese engineers are on the cutting edge of developing technologies in the wireless chip and software industries while these observations are factually correct they tell only a part of the story american firms are being pulled overseas by the allure of potential profits and cheap labor the ability to hire software engineers in india at less than half the cost of their american counterparts and the impressive though inexpensive capabilities of china s flexible manufacturing capabilities produce a siren like enchantment to western managers however the vast majority of the us companies are also being pushed into china literally forced to make huge investments in that country whether they want to or not this coercive push is being driven by something that is much more proximate to our domestic industrial structure than the desire for new markets lower labor costs or greater efficiencies in sourcing it is rooted in the mass marketing approach wrongly undertaken by many us firms although it is ubiquitous the connection of this force to american outsourcing and business dysfunction has gone largely unnoticed corporate avarice which is driving large percentages of manufacturing out of the usa nor is it the desire for the cheapest price on the part of consumers what is forcing thousands of companies to close the us operations and layoff workers is an imbalance in the sales and distribution model that has evolved over the past four decades supported by the myths of mass marketing it occurs when the distribution scheme is turned on its head and distributors wrest manufacturers in order to capture a disproportionate share of the value of the supplying firm s products in this scenario the mega distributors end up profiting at the expense of their vendors whereas manufacturers earn little or nothing on the sale of their own products as a result the compulsive embrace of offshoring by the us firms is not the result of internally generated goals and objectives but is instead driven by the sheer demands of corporate ii producers sought to control every aspect of the goods that rolled out of their factories manufacturers viscerally understood that it was blood sweat investment and risk taking that brought their creations to the public industrialists purposefully exerted as much control as possible over the distribution and sale of their products by exercising power over downstream value chain activities manufacturers carefully safeguarded their own interests during the second half of the nineteenth century has been variously characterized as hierarchical capitalism managerial capitalism and internalization here vertically integrated companies created large production facilities which could take advantage of scale and scope while at the same time developing marketing distribution and purchasing networks for specific products manufacturers integrated marketing sales and distribution as they achieved a product volume that was sufficient to overcome cost advantages previously enjoyed by wholesalers and other intermediaries producers developed their own distribution capabilities including marketing sales installation service the provision of credit and other ancillaries appropriate to particular product offerings the ability to control distribution allowed firms to monitor and understand their markets and helped them to create economies of scale as a result distribution became the most valuable means of gaining and holding market share for the new industrial giants of the twentieth century companies that offered products with few if any intangible ancillaries continued to work through wholesalers but only for the purpose of the physical distribution of their products gamble colgate and davis fielded their own sales forces while utilizing wholesalers as essentially shipping agents for the manufacturers by the end of firms that manufactured branded packaged goods expanded into international markets and into related product lines based largely on marketing and distributional capabilities while almost all efforts directed toward marketing and distribution by american to wholesaling rather than retailing some firms organized their marketing and sales operations so that they could reach customers directly remington national cash register and eastman kodak were among a select number of producers that created networks of retail stores in america s cities for example in newly developed malting processes improved quality and speed in the brewing of beer this combined with new temperature controlled tank cars businesses to extend their reach nationally by pabst had branches throughout the us which warehoused marketed and distributed its beer while the firm used wholesalers in some markets most sales resulted directly through these branch offices from the earliest days of the second industrial revolution manufacturers were in charge of the distribution and sales of their products and targeted their marketing while seldom acting as retailers america s industrialists used vertical integration coupled with the ability to constrain the operational boundaries of middle men and shop owners to one of logistics and product delivery this resulted in an industrial structure in which powerful manufacturers were able to capture the lion s share of the economic value that their products created mass marketing strategy as blunder have a vested stake in their companies to control
fig the link power budget is also related to the optical channel loss and the optical power penalty as well as the link budget margin from the transceiver design point of view the channel characteristics especially the channel loss and optical power penalty determine the specifications of optoelectronic link budget transmit power receive sensitivity or optical link budget channel loss power penalty margin channel fiber l splitter splicing n splicing connector n connector where fiber and are the attenuation and the length of the fiber respectively the splitter loss is given by n splicing and connector n connector are the unit attenuation and number of the splice and connectors used along the fiber cable respectively table ii shows the channel insertion losses for the nm upstream and the and nm downstream digital and analog channels it is noted that the splitting loss is dominant over other losses in the up and downstream pon link budget nm whereas the downstream nm has the lowest the power penalties are caused by a variety of factors related to the laser transmitter the interaction between the transmitter and the transmission fiber and the properties of the fiber some of these factors are laser relative intensity noises group velocity dispersion multipath interference mode partition noise nm wavelength for rf video is added a nonlinearity induced penalty is also an important factor since there are several different types of links for pon systems depending on the bit rates splitting ratio and reaches the impact of each aforementioned power penalties may differ below is a brief review for the power penalty factors relevant to pon systems gvd the material and waveguide properties of the optical width and finite rise time of the transmitter leads to pulse broadening and causes intersymbol interference the power penalty is approximately given in the mode partitioning noise effect gives rise to the additional noise in the receiver because of the group velocity dispersion we have is the fiber group dispersion parameter is the length of the fiber and is the spectral width of the transmitter bwr is the db electrical bandwidth of the receiver we calculated the dispersion induced power penalty by using standard and typical parameters for pon as listed in table iii the results are depicted in fig it is noted that a severe dispersion induced penalty exists for the epon and this reason the narrow line width dfb lasers are required to reduce the dispersion induced penalty except for the upstream epon in which the ld with a line width as narrow as nm may be acceptable rin the fluctuations in the output intensity of the laser even when a constant bias is applied induce the rin penalty in the link this is the quantum nature of an amplified spontaneous the rin induced power penalty is expressed as where mrin is the noise deviation caused by the rin is a scaling factor and is the db electrical bandwidth which is dependent on the laser line width the transmitter bandwidth the group velocity dispersion of the optical fiber and the receiver bandwidth a more comprehensive treatment of the is presented in by using the standard parameters for gpon and epon as listed in tables iii and iv we estimated the rin induced penalty as shown in table it is concluded that the rin induced power penalty is about db which is not significant for a typical pon system mpn the mpn is the result of mode hopping in the coupled into the dispersive fiber travel with different velocities and result in signal distortion at the receiver the mpn penalty is shown to be where and are the bit rate the group velocity dispersion of the optical fiber and the transmission distance respectively the parameter is the laser mode partition factor the parameter is the laser line width note that the mpn noise is present a single longitudinal mode laser such as the dfb laser does not suffer from this noise fig shows the power penalty due to the mpn as a function of line width for the upstream epon and gpon the distance is assumed to be and km respectively the laser partition factor is and the parameters being used are the same as those listed in tables iii and iv it is seen that the conventional gb s mpi the mpi refers to the reflections between connectors or splitters two reflection points will form a fabry perot interferometer which converts the laser transmitter phase noise fluctuations to intensity noise the mpi induced power penalty is expressed by where is the transmittance between the adjacent reflection than db the mpi induced power penalty is very small in a lossy transmission system as shown in fig the connector loss is assumed to be db and the total number of connectors is nonlinearity effects the received power of dbm is required to guarantee a clear picture in video link consequently a dbm optical power output for the transmitter is self phase modulation as well as cross phase modulation due to the co propagating signal stimulated brillouin scattering is usually a limiting factor for launching power and should be suppressed to guarantee the video quality the xpm and four wave mixing exist in all wdm systems and the xpm impairments dominate the fwm configurations are given the data rates and link power budgets put constraints on the transmitter output power and receiver sensitivity in gpon the receiver is only required to tolerate an optical path penalty not exceeding db an increase in the optical path penalty over db has to be compensated by an increase of the minimum transmitted launch power or an the ieee standards burst mode operation consideration one of the unique features of the pon is the burst mode operation for the upstream transmission in which the received packets at the olt receiver from different ont transmitters may have quite different amplitudes and asynchronous clocks this means that the burst mode transmitter at the ont and the receiver at the olt have to adjust itself quickly to match the definitions for the different timing parameters in
cooperation may have been triggered by initially considering donations to charities and its mellowing influence on subsequent choices none of the three groups showed a significant difference with respect to the and group affiliation neither for a single game and role nor for a game with aggregation of the two roles nor for the aggregate of all choices the fact that group affiliation was irrelevant is not surprising as explained above it sheds no light on the minimal group paradigm but reflects the fact that the individual signal crowds out the social signal hence this observation participants understood their decision tasks quite well table cooperation rates of groups with different donation shares d table shows the cooperation rates for all participants in relation to the donation shares of the decision maker and his or her partner not surprisingly low donors had the lowest overall cooperation rate middle donors were more cooperative than high donors since high donors seemed to be donation shares across all participants the cooperation rate increased with the donation share of the partner from for low donors and middle donors up to high donors clearly participants were on average nice to nice people if we disaggregate and analyze different games and roles we sometimes find significant differences that do not surface at the aggregate level of table or the always show the direction indicated by table the following general picture emerges if we consider the aggregate behavior of all participants there is no significant discrimination between low and middle donors while high donors are treated significantly nicer than the other groups low donors cooperation rates toward different groups do not differ significantly middle and high donors their treatment of their own group cannot be distinguished from their treatment of either of the other groups in contrast the behavior of high donors toward any two different groups is significantly different they cooperate at a rate of only low donors middle donors and a record rate of their own kind thus it is mostly high donors that are responsible for the aggregate tendency of if we analyze disaggregate behavior two main facts emerge first whenever high donors show no significant difference of behavior none of the other groups nor the group of all participants does either second all significant differences are consistent with being nicer to nicer people also the number of significant differences is much higher in tg than in pd this suggests that the two games are perceived quite differently by the participants when we compare the behavior of participants for different games we find that the cooperation rate is significantly higher in tg than in pd results for comparisons between roles are less clear cut while there are no significant differences between roles a and in pd role a in tg invites cooperation significantly less often than role sadanand and weber and camerer although the low and high endowment group showed no significant differences in donation behavior there are some differences in cooperation rates while members low endowment group respectively it seems that a higher endowment leads to more discriminative behavior those with high endowments cooperated significantly less often than those with low endowments did with middle donors and especially with low donors situations for which a strategy had to be chosen thus in principle a participant could have used a different strategy in each situation however this did not happen overall of the participants always chose the same strategy toward the and the group in an otherwise identical situation in general however participants did vary only participants used the same strategy in each situation of these ten always defected whereas six constantly cooperated throughout the experiment two participants always used ddc one always dcc concerning strategy variation we can distinguish two groups participants used three different strategies or less the other participants used up to six different strategies the aggregate strategy choices of the latter group did a uniform distribution suggesting choices that are indistinguishable from randomness specifically their strategy choices were non monotonic as compared to the other group whose aggregate strategy choices differed markedly from a uniform distribution those who used more than three strategies might not have understood the instructions as well as the the tendency of being nicer to nicer people on the level of strategy choices appears to be weaker than when looking at cooperation rates since being nicer to nicer people on the strategy level requires a measure of moral consistency nevertheless moral strategy choices are in fact rather frequent with they occur almost twice as often as would be necessary to explain the aggregate tendency of being nicer to nicer strategies participants used only moral strategies and participants used both the rest used a non monotonic strategy at least once thirty nine participants were nicer to nicer people on average implying that their cooperation rates were strictly higher with high donors than with low donors while their cooperation rates with middle donors were in between however of these participants used a non monotonic strategy at least once and therefore were inconsistent in the sense that they were less nice to nicer people at least once of course some randomness or inconsistency in behavior is to be expected we therefore consider the behavior of the inconsistent participants in more detail two related observations suggest a classification first as already explained being nicer to nicer people on average does not require the share of moral strategies in the group of all participants is in the group of the inconsistent participants all but participants used moral strategies more often second in the group of all participants the cooperation rate rose from with low donors to group of the inconsistent participants all but participants showed a higher ie more both observations single out the same participants who were not only inconsistent but used moral strategies less often than the average participant and showed a weaker tendency to be nicer to nicer people than the group of all participants the other inconsistent participants
inescapable conclusion is that the rational adoptability of a local plan that it have a higher expected value than all its competitors the problem is that local plans can have rich structures and can pursue multiple goals and as such they are indefinitely extendable we can almost always construct competing plans with higher expected values by adding subplans pursuing new goals thus there is no way to define optimality so that it is reasonable to expect there to be optimal plans hence simple plan based decision theory plans i have heard it suggested that this problem does not arise for state space planners eg markov decision process planning however there are two ways of viewing state space planning we could think of the entire world as a single state space and try to produce a single universal plan governing the agent s actions for all time however that problem is completely intractable see the next section alternatively we might use state space planning techniques to by separating out toy problems but here the preceding difficulty recurs you can compare the plans produced for a single toy problem in terms of their expected values but if you expand the problem and consider more sources of value more possible actions etc in effect looking at a bigger toy problem an optimal policy for the larger problem may not contain the optimal policy for the subproblem thus the problem recurs it arises independently of the kind of employed universal plans there is a way of trying to save simple plan based decision theory from the preceding objection the argument that led to the conclusion that plans cannot be selected for adoption just by comparing their expected values turned upon its always being possible to extend a plan by merging it with a subplan for achieving an additional goal for local plans this assumption is unproblematic however there is one way of avoiding the argument consider only universal plans these are plans prescribing what the agent should do for all the rest of its existence universal plans cannot be extended by adding subplans for new goals because universal plans include complete prescriptions of what to do for the rest of the agent s existence any two universal plans will make different prescriptions and so will strongly compete it seems initially quite plausible to suppose that universal plans can be compared in terms expected values and that a universal plan is rationally adoptable if it is optimal ie if no other universal plan has a higher expected value savage toys with the idea that rational decisions should be between universal plans but he rejects it for the obvious reason the real world is too complex no agent with realistic computational limitations could possibly construct a universal plan prescribing the optimal action for every possible state of the world to illustrate of this problem consider a cognitively challenged agent that can only take account of independent properties of situations obviously the number of properties human beings take into account in the real world is orders of magnitude greater but even for such a cognitively challenged agent there will be possible situations that it can distinguish between and must plan for a universal plan must prescribe the for each of these possible situations is an immense number approximately equal to to appreciate just how large this number is it has been estimated that the number of elementary particles in the universe is so this would require choosing optimal actions for orders of magnitude more possible world states than there are elementary particles in the universe and this is for just properties of course if the world is particularly may be possible to give general descriptions of optimal actions in large classes of world states rather than making explicit prescriptions for each world state however it is preposterous to suppose that even that will enable a real agent to find a universal plan for dealing with the every possible world state it may encounter in the real world real agents will not be able to find universal plans it is to be emphasized that the preceding remarks are aimed at agents with fairly sophisticated aspirations if one wants to build a very simple planning agent that is only able to perform a very narrow range of tasks then one might solve the problem by being very selective about the properties considered and the agent might be able to construct a universal plan this might work for a mail delivery robot but it cannot possibly work for an agent as complex as a planetary explorer or at least not a good one and it is interesting how easily the problem can arise even in quite restrictive domains consider the following problem which generalizes kushmerick hanks and weld s slippery gripper problem we are presented with a table on which there are numbered blocks and a panel of correspondingly numbered buttons pushing a button activates a robot arm which attempts to pick up the corresponding block and remove it from the table we get dollars for each block that is removed pushing a two dollars the hitch is that some of the blocks are greasy if a block is not greasy pushing the button will result in its being removed from the table with probability but if it is greasy the probability is only the probability of any given block being greasy is we are given chances to either push a button or do nothing in between we are given the opportunity to look at the table which costs one dollar looking will reveal what blocks are still on the but will not reveal directly whether a block is greasy what should we do humans find this problem terribly easy everyone i have tried this upon has quickly produced the optimal plan push each button once and do not bother to look at the table on the other hand i surveyed existing decision theoretic planners a few years ago and
the provision of a club good the profit for the actors involved increases if further actors join the group as the costs can be shared by more actors the larger the group that sticks to such an institution the less likely it is that the institution will be replaced by a new one second actors cannot abolish or reform a regulatory institution if it is this might happen if actors cooperate in a lasting decision making system where they decide with unanimity and where the exit option is either closed or at least very expensive in such a case institutions that were once set up by all actors are difficult to change because they establish a new status quo that can only be changed by unanimity difficult as long as some of the actors still have an interest in the old institution here the actors are committed to the old institution in an imperative sense because the option of institutional change is blocked by the decision making rules of a broader institution namely the lasting decision making system the different institutions are interlocked with the each other like russian dolls a change of a minor institution would also require a change of the broader institution and hence would be very expensive consequently institutional change becomes more unlikely different paths of development the major consequence of the persistence of institutions and the resulting path dependency is that the specific patterns of timing and sequence matter it is not only important that critical junctures occur but also at which stage of the development this happens if previously existing it is important to know which institutions are set up first and which thereafter there exist two possible paths of institutional development towards a supranational regime for risk regulation and these are illustrated in figure both developments start with low regulated national markets the first possible path is that a public scandal which leads to national regulatory authorities occurs first and is later followed by the establishment the second possible path is that a single market is established first and a public scandal occurs after that the question is whether both paths end at the same destination namely at the same form of a supranational regulatory regime if path dependencies matter this is unlikely it can be expected that different developmental paths matter on two levels path dependencies the likely answer to a crisis of consumer confidence is different depending on the fact whether this happened before or after the establishment of a single market and the creation of a single market is strongly influenced by the existence or non existence of national regulatory authorities that have likely been set up in consequence of a regulatory scandal second the different paths of development might be reflected in the current institutional design of regimes if national regulatory authorities exist they might be included in such a supranational regime and if the creation of a single market met the resistance of national regulatory authorities against a decline of regulatory standards this might be reflected in the rules that govern a supranational regulatory regime national regulatory authorities as stakeholders in institutional change a single market is established it is likely that strong national regulatory institutions such as regulatory authorities are set up as a consequence of a public scandal consumers will build up pressure to establish strong regulatory policies and authorities as long as the european market is not integrated the addressee of this demand is the national level and once national regulatory authorities are established they develop some power of the interests of the affected groups of society because they might lead to increasing returns regulatory authorities bear huge set up costs because consumers and producers have to adapt their behavior but once they are established they are strengthened by the learning and coordination effects of consumers and producers and second they might be difficult to change or abolish if they are locked into a joint decision trap groups are able to veto their reform thus making the regulatory authorities more stable if national regulatory authorities develop some power of persistence they become stakeholders in the institutional development once a single market is created and have to be integrated into the supranational regime thereby they have two fundamental interests they want to ensure their ongoing existence and they try to make sure that their own regulatory goals and standards are not these goals legitimize their own policy making because of its de regulatory impact a single market endangers both interests once they are set up national regulatory authorities are unnecessary or even disturbing because they might constitute non tariff barriers of trade and if a single market is established by mutual recognition the danger of regulatory competition threatens the regulatory goals and standards of the national regulatory that national regulatory authorities act against market integration because this endangers their existence and legitimacy the first consequence of the resistance of national regulatory authorities is that it proves more difficult to establish a single market national regulatory authorities will set up regulations that build up non tariff barriers of trade it is surely more difficult to integrate a highly regulated market than a nonregulated commitment the national regulatory authorities express if regulatory policies cannot simply be overruled by political bodies because the regulatory authorities might enjoy independence from political influence the national regulatory authorities themselves are able to act as veto players against institutional change which can prevent the creation of a single market this leads to the second consequence of the existence of national regulatory authorities namely that their to be taken into account once a single market is created only in this way can their resistance be overcome and their veto prevented the existence and legitimacy of national regulatory authorities must not be threatened in order to allow them to agree to market integration consequently it is likely that the new supranational regulatory regime will require the same strong commitment of the member states to pursue certain regulatory goals
powerfully constrains attitudes towards european integration a party s orientation to european issues can be predicted fairly accurately if one knows where that party stands on an economic left right dimension and a noneconomic or new politics dimension but how these dimensions relate to a may change though slowly in response to changes in the eu and how these intersect with the domestic structure of conflict hence as the european union has mutated from a trade regime to a federal type polity partisan and public attitudes have shifted in the early decades of european integration was rooted in opposition to market taken on an additional dimension defense of the national community change in the character of european integration may also affect domestic contexts differently extensive european authority in market regulation looks more attractive to market liberals in social democratic regimes than to their ideological allies in market liberal regimes likewise strengthening supra with some collective conceptions of national identity than with others hence this view argues that economic interest and identity shape the views of political parties but that the causal weight and the direction of these factors vary across time and space the latter view opens up the possibility that parties may shift positions on europe as they go in and out of government scent electoral gain and use europe as a lever to exploit dissent in their opponents or as a strategy to alter the political agenda each of these views is nuanced the bottom up view focuses on voters as long as a minority of voters have structured views parties may be able to pick up a signal from a noisy background but the issue must be salient enough for a minority of voters top down theory views parties as sources of information for voters if parties send weak or mixed signals either because they wish to avoid competing on an issue or because they are internally divided this should reduce their cueing capacity are interdependent one purpose of this special issue is to bring these two topics together and to spur both contributors and readers to rethink their conclusions about the dynamics of politicization in the european union overview of the special issue produced contradictory answers to both questions the contributions in this special issue advance a variety of methods to probe these questions marco steenbergen erica edwards and catherine de vries develop a model that investigates the relative strength of top down and bottom up cueing their conceptual point of departure is that these types of cueing are complementary and that their relative strength depends on characteristics of and party supporters contrary to popular perceptions the authors find scant evidence that political elites are out of touch with citizens or with the eu policies that said there are clear differences among parties extremist parties appear the strongest cuers and mainstream parties the weakest the reason the authors claim is that mainstream parties attract relatively few opinion leaders and when opinion leadership is weak so are bottom up as well as top down linkages modeling conditional reciprocal causation poses problems of endogeneity and estimation the authors tackle these by means of an instrumental variable approach embedded in dynamic simultaneous equations models to estimate bottom up and top down effects over a time span of almost two decades affects european integration they argue that these parties send out multiple cues rather than a single cue a major source of this divergent party cueing is internal party dissent internal bickering creates incentives for party supporters to filter cue taking it frees party supporters from adhering to a single party line and invites them to use their own beliefs to select among diverse party cues the argument builds on john zaller s insight that where diverge citizens accept cues consistent with their interests values and political predispositions parties are not unitary actors yet being divided does not necessarily deprive them of influence this argument provides a neat explanation for the apparent disconnect between pro eu parties and euroskeptic followers in say constitutional referendums and electoral strategic opportunity as ben crum shows the dilemma is severe for mainstream opposition parties whose ideology leads them to support hooghe what drives euroskepticism european integration but whose opposition status induces them to fight the government crum finds that parties gave more weight to ideology than to however collusion with the government cost opposition parties dearly in that it undermined their ability to cue party supporters one reason for this is factionalism an argument consistent with gabel and scheve factionalism alone though cannot explain the depth of the party voter disconnect crum suggests that voters approach european integration primarily as a second order issue that is to say as a strategic test ground for national government popularity that opposition parties to argue a yes vote for the constitutional treaty on ideological grounds since it is a government project hence where opposition parties do not play the standard opposition game they may invite their supporters to turn to protest parties which exploit the eu issue for their own strategic purposes influencing the salience and direction of party positioning on european integration in six west european countries austria france germany the netherlands switzerland and the uk kriesi finds considerably more support for ideology than for government opposition dynamics euroskepticism he argues is part and parcel of a broader new cultural cleavage that pits the losers from globalization against the winners however european integration varies across countries the linkage is strongest in the uk and switzerland where euroskepticism resonates with deep seated national cultural anxieties and where the european issue has consequently become central in restructuring the party system it is too early to tell whether european integration will become the universal battleground for winners and losers of globalization seth jolly sets his sights on a peculiar subgroup of fringe parties namely regionalist parties non mainstream or fringe parties are often considered to be the kernel of euroskepticism and there are good ideological and electoral strategic reasons
qt satisfies for and with for we prove only the continuity of qt in since all the other conditions are easily verified let and be two solutions of with prove the continuity of qt we first prove the following claim claim for any and there exist and an integer such that whenever vi vi for we first consider the case where for in this case we have for all let then if then for any there are and an integer such that if wi such that suppose that vi and for hence vi this proves the claim above for any nr we have qt thus qt is uniformly continuous for nr which implies that qt is uniformly continuous for on any bounded interval it follows that qt is continuous in cw next we consider the case where by the discrete fourier transform as value wk we obtain where as argued for the case we see that for any and there exist and an integer such that if wi then on thus qt is uniformly continuous for on any bounded interval and hence qt is continuous in cw consider the linearized equation of at note that it follows that if is a solution of then is a let mt be the solution map at time of system then qt mt for any moreover mt satisfies the assumptions on in section now let us consider the linear system with parameter for any there is a such that if then for all for each let be the unique solution of the linear delay equation with it is easy to see that wj with which implies that bt a cooperative and irreducible delay equation it follows that its characteristic equation gb f admits a real root that is greater than the real parts of all other roots define by clearly ft then we have then assumes its minimum at some finite value by theorem it follows that the spreading speed for the continuous time semiflow is inf let then and dc define gb and there is some and such that wi then wi for and as the consequences of theorem with remark and theorems and we have the following results theorem let be a solution of with wi for any then the following statements are valid if wi for and is outside a bounded interval then for then limt tc wi for any n increasing in s and and moreover for any has no traveling wave connecting to note that the spreading speed and the existence of traveling waves with wave of the traveling wave with wave speed and the nonexistence of traveling waves with wave speed onotone traveling waves we remark that monotone traveling waves in the monostable case have been studied for the discrete fisher s equation discrete quasi linear equations and lattice delay differential equations the asymptotic equations can be established by appealing to the theory developed in sections through in particular it can be shown that the spreading speed coincides with the minimal wave speed under appropriate conditions a reaction diffusion equation in a cylinder we consider a reaction diffusion equation in a cylinder and there is such that let be the principal eigen value of the elliptic eigen value problem assume that by theorem it then follows that the reaction diffusion equation admits a unique positive steady state this implies that equation has two equilibrium solutions and and there is no other independent equilibrium equation let be the green s function of the equation then it is easy to verify that is the green s function of equation that is the solution of with initial value can be expressed as define it then follows that is a linear semigroup on the space with respect to the compact open topology for any a and a it is easy to verify that a is a family of equicontinuous functions now we write subject to as an integral equation t ds where ug using the standard linear semigroup theory we see that for any has a unique solution with the semigroup and we can show that qt is a subhomogeneous semiflow on moreover qt satisfies hypotheses and for each hence qt has a spreading speed let mt be the solution semiflow associated with the linear equation there is a such that qt for any and it is easy to see that if is a solution of the linear equation then gx is a solution of let be the principal eigen value of the elliptic eigen value problem it follows that is the principal eigen value of the where is the since we see that assumes its minimum at thus theorem implies that note that if is a solution of with and then as the consequences of theorems and with remark we have following two statements are valid if for and outside a bounded interval then for any limt tc uniformly for if then for any limt tc uniformly for theorem for any has a traveling wave solution for any arabolic equations in cylinders as illustrated in the above example it is also possible to use the theory developed above to obtain the asymptotic speeds of spread for these equations this paper studies the estimation of dynamic discrete games of incomplete information two main econometric issues appear in the estimation of these models the indeterminacy problem associated with the existence of multiple equilibria and the computational burden in the solution of the game we propose a class of pseudo maximum likelihood estimators that deals with these problems and we study the asymptotic and finite sample properties of several estimators in this class we first we first focus on two step pml estimators which although they are attractive for their computational simplicity have some important limitations they are seriously biased in small samples they require consistent nonparametric estimators of players choice probabilities in the first step which are not always available and they are asymptotically inefficient second we show that a
grandparents and parents worked so hard to get us to this point they re going to bring it down again the comparison between the time when there were no mexican immigrants coming to garden city and today exacerbates garden city respondents fears about the fragility of their image without them we would nt be where we are mexican americans also perceive significant benefits owing to the substantial mexican immigrant population just as a prevailing nativist ideology structures the us response to mexican immigration an ideology of multiculturalism diversity create a more welcoming context of reception for mexican immigrants as alba and nee point out federal legislation passed in the imposing stiff penalties for racial and ethnic discrimination has forced many firms and organizations to adopt strategies to demonstrate compliance the responses to these legal changes have created an institutionalized consensus on the value of diversity that pervades however superficially in contemporary because of the value of diversity and the ideology of multiculturalism from which it springs us institutions are in some ways more welcoming of mexican immigrants although racial and ethnic differences produce unequal outcomes generally respondents believe that their ethnic identity yields some advantages in an era of multiculturalism the youngest respondents are especially apt to see the world through the multicultural lens because the ideology has prevailed throughout their lives immigrant driven growth and the demand for racial and ethnic representation despite fears about mexican immigrants creating a poor image of mexican americans respondents believe that immigrants have a positive influence on their social position they opine that the ascendancy of mexican americans into the core institutions in garden city and santa maria would not be possible if not for the presence of a large mexican immigrant population prevalent in local politics in an era when racial and ethnic representation is a valued component of democratic principles it is often to mexican americans that voters and public officials turn for mexican representation well aware of this fact many mexican americans see immigration as a benefit to their political clout both garden city and santa maria have a substantial number of mexican origin elected public officials during my fieldwork three of city commission and three of the five city council members including the mayor were of mexican respondents fully recognize the institutionalized demand for such representation and cite the role of mexican immigrants in creating this demand as hank pacheco a year old law enforcement officer in santa maria told me legislature but like our city council has a lot more hispanics or mexicans now i think part of it is the increase in mexican population that s definitely one of them and actually knowing what mexican american politicians are talking about and getting enough people to listen and then by doing that it makes other groups of people in the area kind of open their eyes and take notice a little bit i think it s been a really positive thing the large presence of mexican immigrants benefits their employment opportunities especially for those who are bilingual the looming financial penalties stemming from anti discrimination laws motivate many businesses to hire a diverse workforce in order to promote the principles of multiculturalism and to demonstrate legal compliance however the cost of discriminating against mexican immigrants in as it does from legal sanction since mexican immigrants make up such a large proportion of the population in each city businesses that discriminate or exclude them will lose out on a substantial source of potential revenue as a result businesses have worked to accommodate and attract immigrant clientele most notably through the presence of bilingual employees found in banks grocery stores restaurants gas stations and retail are among the primary beneficiaries of the strategy that firms utilize to attract and accommodate immigrant customers mexican americans are often seen as highly valuable employees because they have a keen familiarity with us institutions and culture and they possess the ability to communicate effectively with spanish speaking clientele consider the case of aaron brisen a year old high school student whose grandfather taught him to speak spanish communicate with spanish speaking customers made him desirable as an employee at a local grocery store if somebody asks me do you know spanish and i ll tell them if i can speak it yeah i do that s one of the reasons i got a job at the grocery store a lot of hispanic people live on that side of town and they tend to shop at that store and i put on my application that i was a good translator and sometimes people back in pharmacy or grocery department need me to and i do that similarly several respondents noted that their employer provides additional pay to workers who speak spanish a reward for bilingualism that only exists because of the large mexican immigrant population mexican americans are not the only potential beneficiaries of bilingual pay since one need not be of mexican origin to speak spanish yet for those mexican americans who grew up speaking spanish it is seen as a part of a reward in the labor market these rewards are especially clear for respondents already in or likely to enter professional occupations young college graduates or college bound respondents readily recognize that the immigrant driven growth of the mexican origin population yields benefits in an era of multiculturalism which has become a taken for granted part of today s ideological landscape as rolando fernandez plus than any minus especially in california like i said not to be exploitative but i m going to definitely at some point use my name and use my background to advance myself not just obviously for partially selfish goals but at the same time because i feel that the higher status i can reach like i was saying earlier i can bring somebody along with me professional mexican americans class position allows them to more easily point out as being a cost of immigration and their professional
latter model in majority of cases is rather acceptable however some limitations exist for its application as is shown above in the example with two degree of freedom in addition the determination of natural frequencies and modes in the case of large mechanical systems can be rather laborious exceeding labor inputs corresponding to the new model alternative models of seismic hazard evaluation along the jordan dead sea transform eid al tarazia and eric sandvolb three models were used to produce three probabilistic hazard maps for the jordan dead sea transform dst no seismic source zones were proposed models i and ii are based on spatially smoothed historical and instrumentally recorded earthquakes model i used the data with magnitudes greater than with the magnitude range between and for the time period to a model iii is the weighted model that is based on characteristic earthquakes that occurred along each major fault in the last years to assess the peak ground acceleration pga three different attenuation equations were used the resulting hazard maps represent of being exceeded in years which corresponds to a return period of years the maximum for the northernmost part of the dst namely between latitudes and and the southwestern part of cyprus in the regions of maximum expected ground motion there is general agreement between the results of this study and those of previous studies that used the seismic source zones however peak ground accelerations predicted in this study are typically than those of previous studies we believe this for the region in addition to the updated input data we believe that by integrating three models a more robust estimate of the hazard is provided introduction earthquake awareness was significantly heightened in the countries bordering the dead sea transform dst after the gulf of aqaba earthquake of november this mw event was the largest earthquake on the dst during the twentieth century klinger et al dziewonski et al several previous probabilistic seismic probabilistic seismic hazard maps have been published for the dst such as arieh and rabinowitz al tarazi and grunthal et al the published maps predict ground motions with of exceedance pe in and years corresponding to return times of and years respectively the previous published hazard maps were the basis for design values for buildings in the dst area historic and recent seismicity to directly calculate probabilistic hazard frankel frankel et al in this study we combine results of three modeling approaches to characterize hazard the first two models are based on the instrumentally recorded earthquakes and historical seismicity respectively this differs from the traditional approach where area source zones are estimated based on seismicity or tectonic province boundaries cornell considered as one of earth s major continental transforms it extends from the gulf of aqaba eilat in the south through wadi araba the dead sea basin and continues northward through yammouneh and ghab faults that intersect with the arabia eurasia collision zone in southern turkey figure the present day dst resulted from the late cenozoic rifting of arabia from africa hempton garfunkel and ben avraham this fault system has a trend similar to the direction of plate motion with approximately km left lateral displacement quennell freund et al the internal structure of the dst is dominated by left lateral en echelon strike slip faults figure quennell garfunkel et al these en echelon faults have produced several pull apart basins rhomb grabens that have formed deep basins the largest of these are the dead sea basin and the basins that make up the gulf of aqaba eilat ben avraham the pull apart basins are bordered by by extensions of major strike slip faults garfunkel and ben avraham because of the en echelon arrangement of the strike slip faults their trends deviate from the overall strike of the transform figure therefore the motion along these faults leads to some separation between the edges of the transform which is augmented by the normal faulting along the transform valley margins as a result minor transverse displacement has taken place the transform and seems to have increased with time garfunkel et al one of the motivations for using the smoothed historical seismicity is to reduce subjectivity involved with inferring seismic source zones in a region where the causative structures of seismicity are not well constrained such as in the dst region this approach was utilized for the eastern central and western united states by frankel et al and frankel are illustrated in figure the hazard was modeled for earthquakes magnitude was chosen as the threshold based on the observation that smaller earthquakes do not usually cause damage to structures in the countries around the dst al tarazi et al recent earthquakes of have caused some damage near the epicenter as exemplified by the earthquake of february located at the northeastern part of the dead sea al tarazi et al further building code considers the earthquakes above magnitude to be capable of affecting adobe constructions distributed along the jordan valley of the dst kahhaleh et al al tarazi two alternative models of hazard are used for this magnitude range models i and ii figure the two models are based on spatially smoothed values here a is the activity level in the gutenberg richter equation log a bm where is the number equal to for model i the values are derived from the magnitude and larger earthquakes since the incompleteness of data is discussed later in this model the events are assumed to illuminate areas of faulting that can produce destructive events for the hazard maps we are attempting to assess the relative likelihood of moderate earthquakes ml for about the next years looking over the past years we see that moderate earthquakes generally occur in areas there have been significant numbers of magnitude events therefore these magnitude events appear to be a reasonable guide to where moderate earthquakes are likely to occur over the next years this is the motivation for model i models ii and iii represent alternative approaches to hazard assessment
he says hayden has a strong record of drawing our attention to inconvenient facts concerning the former yugoslavia and bosnia in particular an earlier work made use of the western balkans have long identified themselves primarily in ethnonational terms here he adds evidence from opinion polls and a discussion that ranges from a neat juxtaposition of bosnia s most famous bridges to a footnote on cell phone pricing practices throughout he relies on a large literature and numerous web sources rather than on more traditional forms of have shown rural bosnia was probably never multicultural in the way that some contemporary theorists would like it to be rates of intermarriage were higher in the towns but even here the community boundaries remained salient we should therefore not delude ourselves that it will be easy to restore the degree of mixing that once prevailed as hayden suggests it seems morally dubious to spend large sums of money promoting to invest in health care and infrastructure hayden s analysis has resonance with my own work in southeast poland in the poles and ukrainians were slaughtering each other in much the same horrific ways as serbs and croats the memories of this violence were largely suppressed in the socialist decades but they erupted vigorously into the public sphere in the however the violence its ethnic cleansing punctually in the the eastern and western slavs who had previously overlapped and intermingled were forcibly separated by stalin s new frontier socialist policies then promoted national homogeneity and it seems that this policy worked there has been a lot of assimilation it prevents the recurrence of tragedies of the kind that engulfed bosnia in the bosnia might also be compared however with transylvania another region of mixed population which experienced conflict but not ethnic cleansing in the but which has managed to remain largely free of violence since brubaker and his colleagues have sought to account for their ethnography is not always convincing but surely this is the level at which anthropologists can provide what hayden calls more accurate analyses of social situations unfortunately in this article he does not provide such materials sorabji s work on the problems that bosniaks in sarajevo now experience in terms of memory management is about as close as we get to expertise that ethnic serbs but also emphasizes the flux and complexity of interethnic perceptions i doubt that she would endorse hayden s implication that the present political arrangements in bosnia are fundamentally illegitimate in any case what would be the possible alternative as hayden concedes the majority of citizens evidently consent to live within the state as currently constituted and this in the german university of administrative sciences speyer in mostar suggests that externally initiated institution building can promote interaction collective action and the development of new forms of citizenship in which ethnicity is no longer so dominant few states have had to overcome cleavages as dramatic as those of bosnia herzegovina is it the job of the anthropologist to preempt the possibility of internalizing new myths with more attention in classrooms to shared history more intercommunal cooperation in the distribution of state funds and perhaps a series of successes by a mixed soccer team in the next major international competition bosnian citizenship might soon cease to differ radically the boasian moral high ground but boas himself went out into the streets to protest against the nazi regime which came to power after a relatively free election and enjoyed strong support among a large portion of the natives certainly it is always a key part of the anthropologist s task to report and understand local points of view i am not sure that hayden does so adequately in this that should not inhibit the scholar from demonstrating the contingency of this process by exploring the factors behind it and taking a position for or against a review of the post anthropological literature on nations and nationalism inevitably supports hayden s statement anthropologists often avoid describing and analyzing the ugly aspects of ethnic tensions and extreme nationalisms and propose instead civic readings of ethnic relations and ethnic belonging that indigenous people do not espouse despite the fact that this behavior contradicts both scientists commitment to objectivity and anthropologists commitment to take into account the etic views of their informants several factors push them towards the invention of a conflict free indigenous tradition that by playing down the essential ethnic differences interethnic conflicts will be more easily avoided the will to protect their informants from negative western judgements and the fear that the anthropologist s explanation of conflicts will be taken for an excuse and become a catalyst for further local claims and conflicts hayden s merit in this article is to have had the courage of conflicts and the access of indigenous people to anthropological writings have increased anthropologists responsibility in the real world how can they describe without evaluating judging how can they analyze without prescribing how can they remain disengaged when their writings can be read by and may influence both international peacekeeping rights through the bosnian case hayden reminds us that neither the old debate between cultural relativism and universal values nor the question of the engagement of anthropologists in the evaluation of field realities has been settled despite the codes of ethics of anthropologists associations from an epistemological point of circumstances revisiting them becomes urgent hayden urges anthropologists to seek new ways of positioning themselves and their science in the world his revelation of the presuppositions and prejudices underlying the western mass media s and anthropologists attitude towards the conflicts in the former yugoslavia makes his proposal for an objective and nonemotional description of field realities communities and trusts that this will bring more viable solutions would the result be embarrassingly disappointing and morally questionable from a western point of view as the interethnic killing was should we take the risk of waiting to see on the sensitive ground of pros and cons regarding anthropologists
may be over funded or under funded they may thus be tapped by the employer from time to time purposes or they may have to be topped up from the employer own resources defined benefit plans may be insured either in the private market or by government agencies and are usually subject to strict regulationi in the united states under erisa which is administered by the department of labor form the basis for pension benefits under defined contribution pension plans the employee share in the fund tends to vest after a number of years of employment and may be managed by the employer or placed with various asset managers under portfolio constraints intended serve the best interests of the beneficiaries the employee responsibility for asset allocation can vary from none at all to virtually full discretion employees may for example be allowed to select from among a range of approved investment vehicles notably mutual funds based on individual risk return preferences most countries have several types of pension arrangement operating simultaneouslyi or example a base level payg system supplemented by state sponsored or privately sponsored defined benefit plans and defined contribution plans sponsored by employers mandated by the state or undertaken voluntarily by individuals heavy reliance on the part of many countries on payg approaches is at the heart of the pension problem and forms the basis for the future growth of asset management the conventional wisdom is that the pension problems that are today centered in europe and japan will eventually spread to the rest of the world they will have to be resolved and there are only a limited number of options in dealing with the issue increasing pension obligations under payg systems this is problematic especially in countries that already have high fiscal burdens and increasing pressure for avoidance and evasion a similar problem confronts major increases in general taxation levels or government borrowing to top up eroding trust funds or finance payg benefits on a continuing basis to social welfare is illustrated by the fact that just limiting the growth in pension expenditures to the projected rate of economic growth from onward would reduce income replacement rates from a period of years leaving those among the elderly without adequate personal resources in relative poverty incapacitated by ill health this is not a palatable solution in many countries that have been subject to pressure for reduced retirement age compounded by chronically high unemployment especially in europe which has been widely used as a justification for earlier retirements undertake significant pension reforms to progressively move away from the the netherlands and denmark these differ in detail but all involve the creation of large asset pools that are reasonably actuarially sound given the relatively bleak outlook for the first several of these alternatives it seems inevitable that increasing reliance will be placed on the last of these options the fact is that future generations can no longer count on the present value of benefits exceeding the present value of contributions and social charges inevitably turn against them in the presence of clear fiscal constraints facing governments this bodes well for the future growth of the asset management industry emanating from the pension sector whereas there are wide differences among countries in their reliance on payg pension systems and in the degree of demographic and financial pressure to build actuarially viable pension asset pools there are equally wide differences in how us and the have relied quite heavily on domestic equities the same is true in the although pension pools in many of the other european countries and japan have relied more heavily of fixed income securities similar differences exist among emerging market countries the dramatic shift from defined benefit to defined contribution pension plans and mutual funds numerous mutual fundsi otably in the equities sectori pre strongly influenced by and other pension inflows at the end of about mutual fund assets represented retirement accounts of various types in the us some total retirement assets were invested in mutual funds up from about this is reflected in the structure of the pension fund management industry in the us fund trustees often relies on consultants company sponsored retirement plans often seek advice from pension investment consultants before awarding pension mandates or to include particular mutual funds or fund families in the menu they offer to employees in plans consultants are particularly useful in formal reviews of pension fund managers the frequency of which is depicted in exhibit fund management companies may and sometimes do provide fee or expense expense reimbursement to consultants a practice that has increased in recent years in the case of pension funds the investment manager quotes a single all in expense to be charged for services which is sufficient to cover expenses and the manager profit pension fund trustees are able to apply the fund bargaining power to the process to summarize with respect to the pension component of growth in the asset management industry there is no single magic bullet solution to supporting the retirement of the bulge of baby boomers moving through population structures countries that are taking action are using a multi pronged approach consisting of increase working populations immigration and increased labor force participation rates help but cannot solve the problem some perverse incentive structures impede labor force participation rate improvements the burden of global aging however productivity growth is difficult if not impossible to predict and aging countries cannot rely on it change the promise although it is politically difficult countries are changing the minimum retirement age modifying benefit levels and making it more tax advantageous for the elderly to work as individuals realize that the benefit reductions already enacted and the future reductions will affect their retirement their savings change the funding those countries with healthy funded private pension funds are in a better position to support their elderly population than those that rely on unfunded payg systems some countries are establishing funded pension trusts or using the proceeds of privatizations to establish trust funds for future generations others are
affected affirmative action way racial discrimination according to brennan the difference lay only in that it did not stigmatize brennan s invocation of brown is no accident for in he still drew on the racial model used by warren in it is liberal race theory where race is nothing but skin color that carries no social significance that pictures distinctions on the basis of race as arbitrary surprise it formed the dominant racial ideology of the time the delicacy of the historical and constitutional moment probably precluded a more thoroughgoing critique of white racism and the posture of the case required the court to assume equal facilities thus pushing toward a psychological rather than material understanding of racial harms but brennan could employ a similar understanding only by ignoring the lessons of the sixties and seventies the south s massive resistance the over busing and neighborhood integration in the north the urban uprisings and militancy by minorities across the country all demonstrated that race in our society allocated and justified privilege and disadvantage that racism did not reduce to individual prejudice but rather rose to the level of systemic practice and that the harms of racial subordination far exceeded stigmatization encompassing dehumanization and immiseration these central racial lessons were broadcast over level of systemic practice and that the harms of racial subordination far exceeded stigmatization encompassing dehumanization and immiseration these central racial lessons were broadcast over the nightly news through the analysis of the kerner commission report in the exhortations of martin luther king jr and in mainstream and insurgent race scholarship yet brennan in bakke focused on discrimination as a derogation of meritocratic norms brennan would move toward a structural did not ground his bakke opinion on subordination because such a conception while available intellectually seemed unworkable judicially for either doctrinal or political reasons maybe but it is important not to overstate the degree of constraint especially given loving and its emphasis on white supremacy as a precedent and the fact that brennan in bakke failed to assemble a majority at any rate note too the heavy emphasis on black oppression in marshall s opinion as well white supremacy as a precedent and the fact that brennan in bakke failed to assemble a majority at any rate note too the heavy emphasis on black oppression in marshall s opinion as well as brennan s own acknowledgement of the unique history of discrimination against african americans suggesting that this analysis was available and not illegitimate brennan ought not to be criticized for missing a particular theory of racial oppression or for neglecting to elaborate a complete but my complaint is much more basic brennan failed to explain why affirmative action and pernicious discrimination were stigma excepted qualitatively different phenomena the explanation at its simplest the insight that racism reflected a dynamic of systemic oppression and affirmative action an effort to undo such subordination was in both obvious and readily available john hart ely and paul brest liberal race theory relied on in elite liberal law professors kept him intellectual company they too ignored the evidence that race and racism constituted a structural system in detailing his concerns about affirmative action in the ujo decision brennan cited to three law review articles including john kaplan s highly equivocal engagement with preferential admissions in addition brennan cited harvard law professor john hart ely s article in the university of chicago law the constitutionality of reverse discrimination and stanford law professor paul brest s in defense of the antidiscrimination principle published as the foreword to harvard law review s prestigious supreme court issue in ely and brest had come down solidly for the constitutionality of affirmative action but in manners that buttressed rather than repudiated the comparison of affirmative action to segregation ely began his constitutional defense of race conscious efforts by preferential treatment seems to be countenancing the most flagrant double standards because such programs must mean denying opportunities to some people solely because they were born nevertheless ely defended the constitutionality of what he termed reverse racial he suggested in a harbinger of process defect theory that it is not suspect in a constitutional sense for a majority any majority to discriminate against for ely the central he suggested in a harbinger of process defect theory that it is not suspect in a constitutional sense for a majority any majority to discriminate against for ely the central issue came down to cognitive accuracy he speculated that in general majorities would be prone both to overvalue their own interests and systematically to miscomprehend the interests of he supposed therefore that whites would be unlikely to slight themselves in designing a program disadvantaged whites but advantaged in his pithy summary hether or not it is more blessed to give than to receive it is surely less this depressingly tepid defense of affirmative action by nodding toward cognitive error skewed attention from the reparative and distributive concerns that strongly support race conscious remedies but focus instead on the fact that in defending affirmative action ely too depicted racism in a way that blurred the line and remedial discrimination ely s process theory made no distinction between the discrimination in jim crow laws and in affirmative action except that in the former a majority targeted a minority and so risked cognitive mistake whereas in the latter a majority harmed itself and so was less likely to err no wonder ely so readily described raceconscious remedies as reverse racial discrimination quite troubling a wrenching moral issue and as countenancing the that ely writing in thought that racism resulted from mistaken judgments but consider the following quote racial segregation may have been based on a feeling that blacks were different and therefore had a different place in the proper scheme of things coupled with an unfeeling assumption that because we are nt bothered by segregation they wo nt be ely presented racial segregation as rooted in erroneous judgments about what we value and about how feel which
the united defects that may spontaneously self correct to more severe potentially life threatening defects that require several surgical interventions some children born with complex chd have only one functional ventricle which pumps to both pulmonary and systemic circulations thus the term single ventricle is used to describe a functional sv regardless of in the last years advances in treatment of chd have enabled approximately million us children with significant heart defects to survive into at the present time there are as many adults with chd as there are children with this therefore a new specialized adult population with chronic disease has emerged and is the first specialized center in the united states to treat adults with chd is the ucla adult congenital heart disease center founded in specialized centers provide medical care focused on the natural sequelae or residual effects after surgery and long term health care needs of patients with other issues that present challenges to this and fontan procedure over the past two decades life expectancy for children with sv chd has increased significantly this is related to advancements in surgical technique and perioperative care sv chd generally requires three or more staged palliative heart surgeries at various developmental stages the goal of surgical thereby relieving cyanosis and volume overload of the sv the fontan procedure is the final staged palliative surgery which usually provides complete separation of the two circulations the fontan operation was first described by fontan and for the repair of tricuspid atresia the underlying principle of fontan circulation is that the pulmonary circulation can be perfused the pulmonary circulation receives passive nonpulsatile blood directly from the superior and inferior vena cavae through direct anastamosis or the use of synthetic graft material the original fontan procedure has undergone various modifications and can be applied to all types of sv for late cardiac failure exercise intolerance and arrhythmias a portion of the population who have undergone the fontan procedure may ultimately require heart transplantation related to long term postoperative morbidities associated with sv differentiation between one s life it is a dynamic concept affected by one s ability to adapt to discrepancies between expected verses experienced well as well as one s ability to maintain a level of functioning that allows the individual to pursue life hrqol differs from qol in that the summary evaluation of attributes that characterize one s as a subjective outcome that reflects the person s perception of his or her health status and has been defined as the specific impact of an illness or injury medical treatment or health care policy on an individual s qol in addition the rand medical outcome study defined hrqol as the extent to which health impacts an individual s recently defined qol as the degree of overall life satisfaction that is positively or negatively influenced by individuals perception of certain aspects of life important to them including matters both related and unrelated to health this definition argues the notion that health status hrqol or functional status cannot be substituted for qol the such as health social function or emotional function are all determinants of in this respect qol is viewed as a unidimensional construct that is influenced by multiple factors although qol experts view this construct as multidimensional most are evaluating determinants of qol and not direct indicators these definitions emphasize that the major difference lacks a universally accepted definition of hrqol and qol yet there are some areas of conceptual agreement namely most would agree that hrqol is a multidimensional subjectively perceived concept influenced by health illness or disease and viewed as a continuous life evaluation or process that changes with the population who have undergone the fontan operation has been summarized in chronologic order in table i despite the medical and surgical advancements in the population who have undergone the fontan operation most conclude that sv chd continues to affect the daily life of the growing child into adulthood therefore research in hrqol and qol has amplified resulting in an the procedure during the last decade have not reached an appropriate age to contribute meaningful data on this phenomenon most published data on hrqol or qol in sv chd are by appraisals of proxy respondents primarily parents furthermore earlier studies of hrqol focus more on specific functional determinants such as exercise ability and neurodevelopmental or cognitive outcomes functional status outcomes from the the sv chd research primarily addressed functional status and functional outcomes the increased survival and parent reported deficits in physical activity prompted functional status testing in this population the functional status literature used a variety of objective measures such testing using aerobic capacity measurements of maximum to quantify functional furthermore on the basis of these data assumptions were made on hrqol or qol without confirmation subsequently child and parent proxy report questionnaires were instituted to assess functional status either alone or in conjunction with objective measures these are related but distinct concepts that should not be used the functional status research in the population who have undergone the fontan operation has reported that despite an apparent healthy appearance when challenged with the exercise testing functional limitations are some studies patients who have undergone the fontan operation reported an nyha class i or patients who have undergone the fontan operation with nyha classification iii or iv were associated with longer duration of follow up a prior atrial septectomy and prior main pulmonary artery ascending aorta anastomosis overall the patient who has undergone that contribute to reduced functional outcomes are abnormal heart rate and rhythm oxygen desaturation during exercise testing and the inability to improve stroke volume related to impaired sv one study demonstrated no correlation between exercise capacity and the type of sv or type of fontan cognitive outcomes after the fontan operation the population who have undergone the fontan operation has significant risk factors for neurodevelopmental deficits such as congenital brain abnormalities heart failure cyanosis failure to thrive sequelae from multiple staged surgical palliations with cardiopulmonary bypass and deep
closer to the suburbanization of upper middle classes as a whole we see that there is a predominant logic in the location of gentrifying iris which is the expansion of compact upper and middle mixed areas into adjacent minority which is of scattered neighborhoods creating new small poles of upper class and upper middle class concentration in predominantly middle mixed and working class areas the first logic is found mostly in those parts of the metropolis in which are concentrated the largest share of upper and upper middle categories and also the largest share of their growth these areas are mainly in paris hauts de seine and yvelines all three being de l apartements which have in common that the growth of upper class and upper middle class categories takes place there not in gentrifying working class areas but in neighborhoods of the upper and middle mixed types this logic of the expansion of dense concentrations of upper class and upper middle class categories is not homogenous however because the areas in the upper group of clusters are not homogenous my analysis has shown that there are three modalities which present substantial the relative weight of the detailed upper categories one subgroup has a clear dominance of upper categories linked to private firms and liberal professions and can be considered as the real spaces of the bourgeoisie from a spatial point of view the expansion of those spaces can thus be correctly named as embourgeoisement a second subgroup has some predominance of the private business categories and liberal professions are very present too the expansion of these areas is less clearly embourgeoisement in the classic sense the third subgroup has more intellectual categories and categories in the media artistic and entertainment activities a smaller presence of private firm professionals and managers and more people with casual jobs the expansion of these areas is closer to the classic culture led gentrification and could certainly not be called embourgeoise mentono real bourgeois would even envisage a residence in areas like belleville or la goutte d or or montreuil again this is from a spatial point of view considering the dominant profile of the upper status areas into which those gentrifying neighbor hoods are being integrated i will return to this discussion later from a social point of view by discussing the social profile of the gentrifiers in the location of gentrifying neighborhoods with a smaller weight than the former is quite different since it is that of scattered neighborhoods representing isolated spots of gentrification in predominantly working class and middle mixed areas with no upper areas close by a few of these neighborhoods are to be found in the northeast of paris but most are in the suburbs they represent a scattered process of social upgrading of these areas which again from a spatial view seems to have little to do with the either embourgeoisement or culture led gentrification some of them being in the outer areas of the urban region with a low density are clearly cases of suburbanization of upper middle classes but they are not very numerous social housing against gentrification in the analysis of gentrification processes the dynamics of housing markets play an formerly middle class residences in bad condition able to provide large apartments with architectural and historical qualities when renovated or of industrial buildings or warehouses that can be converted into lofts is often seen as a positive factor in the more cultural demand side interpretation brownfield areas which can be emptied to build entirely new neighborhoods are positive factors of a different kind corresponding more to the supply side interpretation but also to a different kind of cultural orientation for the customers there are no databases on the qualities of the housing stock or on use of land that would allow a statistical exploration of those factors which can be seen at work only through qualitative studies of local processes there are however data on another aspect of the housing stock the distribution of social housing which can be considered a priori regarding potential gentrification since it stabilizes the presence of modest income or low income groups furthermore the image of social housing is often associated with poverty unemployment and immigration a stigmatizing vision not very attractive for gentrifiers table gives the distribution of neighborhoods which have seen a strong increase of upper and upper middle categories according to the share of the resident population seine saint denis and much smaller in the second ring of suburbs this is not surprising since in the outer de l apartements such neighborhoods can hardly be attractive for upper and upper middle classes consider ing the stigmatizing image of public housing and the often low quality of the urban environment and urban landscape in which it has been built in contrast inside paris and to a lesser degree in the first ring of suburbs especially in the municipalities close the location advantages or potential qualities of the urban environment can be strong enough to allow gentrification in a number of areas despite the dominant presence of social housing it should be added that in the more central urban locations a substantial part of the public housing stock has a more mixed population and does not carry such a negative image in that central part of the metropolis if the predominant weight of social housing those in upper middle categories in artistic and intellectual occupations with high cultural resources and interests but average or low incomes who would find interesting and cheap spaces for housing and for developing cultural activities in working class areas relatively close to the central part of the city whose history and traditional neighbor hood culture they would also value positively their increasing presence and investment would then result in a physical and symbolic the neighborhood making it progressively attractive for other upper middle and upper occupation groups which are less culture oriented but have higher incomes first as consumers of trendy bars restaurants art galleries and music
this feud between the laras and the acunas tavera also believed in consensual marriage and the importance of free will in the matter of free will was ultimately what secured the elopement between manrique and luisa tavera was also mindful of the service provided by the najera clan reminding charles of the lara s request for merced a request that was merited on the basis of their military when the council of castile sent manrique to jail the duchess of najera changed their minds about the arranged marriage between manrique and aldonza because they wanted their son to be free moreover this new marriage alliance would bring much more wealth than the previous marriage deal between manrique and the daughter of the count of aranda their son s decision had been a better one than the duchess plan for her son which backfired and caused a new rift between her husband s family the manrique clan and the family of her sister the countess of aranda the count aranda lope ximenez de urrea kept the pressure on seeking the assistance of his allies the constable of castile and the admiral of castile the alliance among the urrea haro and enriquez clans further antagonized the aristocracy which had already been fractured along the rift between the lara and the haro the haro clan also had the support of the osorio and pimentel clans but this case turned less on court on legal procedure even with such aristocratic support the father of aldonza de urrea the count of aranda was dependent on the crown and its jurists for they would decide the case and it was therefore up to the plaintiffs to influence the legal process aldonza s father considered the so called nuptials between manrique and luisa as burla a travesty of justice and a dishonor to all jurisdiction in by fernando of aragon probably as compensation for the marriage negotiations handled by the count of aranda s father lope ximenez de urrea to obtain papal dispensation of fernando of aragon s and isabel of castile s own elopement in dona aldonza s father was lord of multiple towns in castile and aragon and served as knight of the order of santiago the count of aranda too had forged a with the haro clan as well as with the powerful marquise of villena diego lopez pacheco by marrying his son to the marquis of villena s although late medieval castile was a clan based society in which the prerogatives of the family overruled all other principles the consensual precept of marriage as enshrined in canon law ultimately carried the most weight this canonical principle also had the additional force of loyalty to the monarchy and royal service in najera s defense of the habsburg claim to the spanish crowns the monarchical state certainly required the aristocracy for its military capacity but it was also dependent on the intercessory role of the archbishops who presided over government councils and institutions and who monopolized the power of religion to enforce behavior standards and in particular the sacrament of the marriage while undermining familial on the grounds that the arranged marriage between manrique and aldonza had been imposed by their parents when they were young children the council of castile and the archbishop of toledo nullified the marriage between them the archbishop of toledo declared aldonza and manrique s marriage invalid because of the lack of mutual consent manrique ignored his mother s wishes and celebrated the rite of marriage in private and in the presence of the archbishop of seville who using canon law affirmed that only mutual consent of the the marriage valid president tavera and the council of castile also privileged consensual desire over parental arrangements in choosing marriage partners to maintain law and order the state meditated internal conflicts by relying on the power of religion to mitigate the potential unruliness of aristocratic interests the spanish state required a police force to discipline the aristocracy especially when some nobles contested government decisions the count of valencia crossed the line when he solicited help from his illegitimate son jorge de portugal who took possession of the town of valencia de don immediately president tavera ordered the sheriff of the chancery of valladolid to disband the gang under jorge de portugal while tavera disciplined jorge de portugal charles punished manrique s family namely the archbishop of seville who helped manrique break into the convent and toledo died charles nominated juan tavera to the vacancy instead of the archbishop of seville manrique de lara s uncle who had administered the in manrique s case his entire family became willing to end the marriage they had arranged for him but the aranda family and the count of valencia took additional legal measures to invalidate the union between manrique and luisa hoping to win the count of valencia launched luisa into the marriage market by daughter to the empress s court in in normal circumstances he would have seen manrique as a very good catch for his daughter but because manrique was already married to a woman who was pregnant the count of valencia believed that his daughter and his own wife were breaking the rules of an appropriate marriage and the good name of his aristocratic daughter was traded for the sexual desires of a boy incapable of living up to patriarchal standards and traditional christian the count of valencia stood firmly with the aranda family that the marriage brokered between the strong willed mothers of manrique and aldonza was yet despite his efforts the count s campaign to disinherit luisa fell short in when he aldonza pregnant with manrique s unborn child joined in the chorus of fury over the decision by the archbishop of toledo because he had confirmed the marriage between manrique and aldonza lost her appeal against toledo s decision to invalidate her just prior to the death of the count of valencia the duke of najera sought to influence
only the first form of our exact sequence using the final form of the sequence we also show that the kernel of multiplication by a is generated as a km results of without reproducing them here most of the mathematics used in this paper was developed in the spring of when all three authors were at harvard in its present form the paper was written while the authors were members of the institute for advanced study in princeton we would like to thank both institutions for their support an is defined as the tensor product where ai is the norm form in the quadratic extension denote by qa the projective quadric of dimension defined by the form qa an this quadric is called the small pfister quadric or the norm quadric associated with the symbol a denote by the function be a field of characteristic zero then for any sequence of invertible elements the following sequence of abelian groups is exact the proof goes as follows we first construct two exact sequences of the form and then construct an isomorphism i such that and that faces and degeneracy morphisms are given by partial projections and diagonal embeddings respectively we will use repeatedly the following lemma which is an immediate corollary of lemma and cor lemma for any smooth scheme proof the computation of motivic cohomology of weight shows that the nontrivial element together with multiplication morphism defines a morphism the beilinson lichtenbaum conjecture implies immediately the following result lemma the morphism extends to a distinguished triangle in dmeff morphisms in the triangulated category of motives from the motive of to the distinguished triangle it starts as by lemma there are isomorphisms hn hn km on the other hand since hn is a homotopy invariant sheaf with transfers proposition let us now construct the exact sequence denote the standard simplicial scheme by xa recall that we have a distinguished triangle of the form ma is a direct summand of the motive of the quadric qa denote the composition therefore multiplication with by definition ma is a direct summand of the motive of the smooth projective variety qa of dimension therefore the group is trivial by lemma and using this fact we obtain the following exact sequence by definition the morphism is given by the composition on qa under the isomorphism on the other hand by lemma the homomorphism an exact sequence for defined by the first arrow in is an isomorphism this implies immediately that the exact sequence defines an exact sequence of the form by lemma there is an isomorphism map and the map hi defined by the fundamental cycle corresponds in this description to the map this finishes the proof of proposition we are going to show now that the map km glues km modules of the form km km consider cohomological operations introduced in the composition qn defines a homomorphism of lemma the homomorphism d is injective proof we have to show that the composition of operations is injective let a be the simplicial cone of the morphism xa spec which we consider as a pointed simplicial scheme the long exact sequence of cohomology defined by the cofibration sequence together with the fact that hp for therefore it is sufficient to prove injectivity of the composition qn on motivic cohomology groups of the form to show that qn is a monomorphism it is sufficient to check that the operation qi acts monomorphically on the group lemma implies that for we have hp which proves the lemma denote by the element of hn which corresponds to the symbol a under the embedding into km to prove that is surjective and that the composition is multiplication with a we use the the cohomological operation d sends by lemma d is injective therefore the element d iz nonzero on the other hand sequence shows that and is a generator of this group therefore d lemma the homomorphism d is surjective of km modules it is sufficient to check the condition for the generator km and the later follows from lemma and the definition of this finishes the proof of theorem the following statement which is easily deduced from the exact sequence is the key to many applications for any field and any nonzero exist a field and a pure symbol a is a nonzero pure symbol of km proof let al where ai are pure symbols corresponding to sequences ai let qabe the norm quadric corresponding to the symbol ai for any covered by km thus we have e reduction to points of degree in this section we prove the following result theorem let be a field such that char and be a smooth result theorem let be a field of characteristic zero and a sequence of invertible elements of then the sequence is exact theorem together with the well known result of bass and tate implies the following theorem let is generated as a module over km by the kernel of the homomorphism km km let us start the proof of theorem with the following two lemmas lemma let be an extension of statement for let be an invertible element of since dimke we have vth therefore is a quotient of two elements of lemma let be an infinite field and a closed separable point in pnk such that the map of the residue fields kp is an isomorphism let be a coordinate system starting with since the restriction of to is an isomorphism the inverse gives a collection of regular functions on each of these functions has a lemma let be any quadric over if has a rational point then theorem for holds for obvious reasons therefore we may assume that has no points of odd degree it is well known we may assume that is infinite by the theorem of springer for finite extension of odd degree the quadric qf is isotropic if and only if qe is hence we can assume that is separable let point
moulton also observes the optionality of pronouncing in words of vciv as or and notes that one important factor for this free variation is speech rate namely is more common in fast speech than in slow speech for purposes of this article i do not discuss the lexically determined speaker dependent variation referred to above and therefore my analysis is not intended to capture it the transcriptions of the data presented in section below with reflect the same style of speech as data presented in section hence the blockage of gf discussed in the latter section cannot be attributed to speech style in section i discuss the same data set presented in section and show that in casual rates of speech can be realized as in certain environments in which gf is blocked at the rate of speech typical of the citation forms in section eg aktuell aktu el current impressionistically there do not seem to be as many words containing as opposed to those with in the environments discussed below and what is more and contrast in some pairs eg jaguar ja gu of and in german stands in complementary distribution with short in such a way that surfaces when adjacent to a vowel and the environments for are listed in in all other contexts occurs eg before a consonant and word finally after a consonant observe that long in words like dia di a slide can occur in pre vocalic a hall examples in illustrate contexts respectively there are some co occurrence restrictions between this and the following vowel which are not important for the present treatment and will therefore not be dealt stress is transcribed in the examples presented in this section to show that this is not a factor in the sense that can be situated to the left or to the right of a primarily stressed syllable only a few examples have been given of the words are far less frequent than the ones in the in the final example in illustrates the process of vocalization whereby coda vocalizes to obligatorily after long vowels but only optionally after short vowels see mangold hall and wiese for discussion on vocalization mangold consistently transcribe such words like materie in with an intervocalic r with consonantal eg mate rj that source transcribes the vocalized as hence formangold words like materie have onsets since the present author has yet to encounter a native speaker with this for german this point is important because rj will be shown to be one of the specific constraints i posit below in section the dialect of german described in sections and is otherwise consistent with the citation forms for standard german in mangold in i have not included examples in which occurs after a word initial consonant eg piano pja no piano because there appear to be fewer common internal cj sequence as in this omission does not affect the analysis below an ot treatment of gf in this section i posit a basic ot analysis in which gf in words like the ones in is interpreted as the conflict between onset and a markedness constraint which penalizes cj onsets also show how my analysis is able to tautosyllabify these word internal cj sequences the syllabification of word internal cj is important because it plays a role in section a hall i hold that the complementary distribution between and described in the previous section requires that this derive from by a process of gf the present analysis therefore follows the usual assumption in earlier approaches to german phonology see for example wurzel kloeke hall yu wiese and hamann examples of underlying and surface representations for two representative words i follow the uncontroversial view that and are featurally identical and that these two segments differ only in terms of syllable structure underlying and surface representations for panel studies my assumption is that all vowels in underlying representations like the ones that this assumption is not crucial because my treatment will also select the correct output forms given an input with a the phonetic forms for words like the ones in fall out from the interaction between the markedness constraints onset which is familiar from the ot literature and cj the latter constraint is posited by casali kiparsky and van de vijver on the basis of data from the benue congo language emai gothic and dutch respectively in section i will argue that cj is simply a convenient abbreviation for several individual constraints in which the portion corresponds to the various categories in the sonority hierarchy i posit below eg nj and oj a third constraint to consider is the syllable contact law the scl has been discussed in pre ot terms and within ot an important difference between the languages discussed by these authors and german is that the former ones display various alternations which are triggered as strategies repairing the scl violations and german does not however raffelsiefen argues that the distribution of schwa in german can only be fully understood by positing that the scl plays a role in specific ranking which ensures that gf is optimal is presented in constraints and rankings for gf a onset syllables have onsets cj a sequence of consonant plus in onset position is disallowed syllable contact law in the sonority of a is greater than the sonority of d onset scl cj to an input and in the second one it corresponds to the reasons why the winner in contains a tautosyllabified cj sequence and not a heterosyllabified cj will be discussed below in the first tableau we can observe that the winner in can be selected over the faithful form in if onset is ranked higher than candidate differs from in that the cj sequence is heterosyllabified in the former one the heterosyllabic form in is not harmonic as the one with the tautosyllabic parse in if the scl outranks the second tableau in illustrates that the same outcome obtains
a positive impact on the overall new product performance it is satisfaction with the pic formulation process that will mediate the relationship will have significantly higher levels of satisfaction with their pic formulation process than noninnovative firms satisfaction with the pic formulation process will positively mediate the relationship between the content specificity of a pic and a firm s new product performance the research method selected from the roster of the product development and management association the managers were originally contacted by phone and asked to participate in the study all agreed subject to reviewing the faxed questionnaire a series of two follow up phone calls produced a final response sample of completed questionnaires from the original survey nonresponse bias was assessed by study s results using a t test revealed no apparent significant nonresponse bias in the sample it is acknowledged however that there may be a possible sampling bias due to the choice of the sampling frame since the sampling frame was exclusively pdma membership the study s sample might contain a disproportionate number of firms and individuals who are especially interested in new product development consequently the study s sample may include a higher percentage of best practice type companies than would have been found at random among the population of new product managers directors and vice presidents readers should take this into consideration when assessing the findings a frequency analysis showed that the responses to the survey came from three different groups senior a company s middle management it was a concern though that the responses received might somehow be biased as a result of who was responding and from what organizational level the decision was made to test for this bias by performing a one way analysis of variance for each of the study s variables response bias also given the small sample size and the method of sample selection no claims as to the representativeness of the sample can be made however by north american standards all of the firms surveyed would be considered above industry average corporations in terms of growth measures pic content specificity the content and characteristics of product innovation charters were operationalized by reviewing both the prior mission statement and new product strategy literatures and or components were eventually identified and are specified in table among others for example concern for satisfying customers needs and wants concern for employees welfare in the organization concern for shareholders with respect to npd initiatives concern for suppliers in the npd process and concern for society when bringing new products to was clearly specified more specifically the individual pic components were measured by asking managers to indicate on a three point scale the degree to which each component was specified in their firm s formal written policies at all specified clearly specified although it is recognized that that actual specification of pic components may vary significantly the overarching principles and ideas associated with pics the decision also was made to employ a standard data reduction technique exploratory factor analysis using principle component analysis on the pic content specificity variables using four macro pic factors emerged with the eigen values greater than accounting for the variance a solution with four factors mission for new products product vision strategic directives and presence and perspectives the first factor grouped those variables having a common underlying dimension which were named the mission for new products those variables explaining and loading heavily on this factor appeared to mission statements the second factor contained the pic content variables one clear goal purpose new product vision values and the distinctive competence of the company to be leveraged in creating the new product this second factor was termed product vision and the third factor was labeled strategic directives because it contained pic components specifying and business definition finally the fourth factor presence and perspective was composed of specific statements on technology product and market areas to avoid product identity and location satisfaction with the pic formulation process to measure satisfaction with the pic formulation process three perceptual statements of point scales the degree to which they were satisfied with their organization s choice of pic components the degree to which they were satisfied with the clarity of their organization s pic components and the degree to which they were satisfied with the overall process used to create their solution using principle component analysis accounting for the variance new product performance there is little consensus between firms and academics as to which measures of new product performance are most useful for gauging success a review and meta analysis of articles within conclusion that it is very hard for a firm to determine whether or not its new products are in reality successful in terms of the perceptual performance outcome measures used for this study a point scale was developed in which respondents were asked to indicate the degree to which they were satisfied with winners this measure attempts to capture the firm s overall new product performance at a program level rather than at a project level it can be argued however that the perceptual performance measure developed for this research investigation is fairly broad but as an initial exploratory study it is neither unusual nor inconsistent additionally the correlation between actual new product performance was and significant at thus the subjective measure of new product performance appears to be a good proxy for reality or at least for the performance outcome actual sales percentage it may even be more appropriate though since managers typically take many factors into account other than straight numbers and they instinctively control for extraneous variables when making their judgments reliability and validity of the measures content validity was established by pretesting the questionnaire with managers and academics prior to collection of data for their understanding of the questions pretesting then convergent validity and reliability were measured on the data collected convergent validity was checked by performing exploratory factor analysis for the components contained within each of the four macro pic factors mission vision strategic directives and position and presence as well as for the pic
that the ann structure proposed here leaves unexplained only the percent of the total variability in the air permeability data thus offering a five times better result than the respective percent of the linear regression approach an error pattern apparent in all lower plots of figures associates looser fabric types with the error values higher than the respective error values for dense fabrics for loose fabrics the pores are bigger so the yarn mobility is higher thus the pore dimensions become bigger because of the deformation during the airflow on the contrary dense fabrics have very small pores and high resistance to airflow and can preserve their compactness during airflow air permeability and vacuum drying performance the next step in the process is to exploit air permeability values in order to predict vacuum drying performance for a given fabric type although there certainly exists a relation between these two quantities this is again of a complex form owing to this relation however the air permeability prediction error propagates to the water content prediction value since the relation is not available in experimental vacuum drying tests where the remaining water content is measured after drying are necessary in order to study the error propagation the tests are performed in a laboratory scaled vacuum drying unit that was designed and constructed for the purposes of this study pre drying tests using the vacuum drying principle are performed at a constant pump power of kw for all fabric samples each one of the five different samples of every one of the fabric section undergoes the following processing the fabric is first immersed in a water bath and then dried using the vacuum drying procedure the water content of the fabric type is extracted by averaging across the five sample water content measurements of this type in order to reduce non systematic measurement errors in the water content values these averages for each fabric type are tabulated in table corresponding averages of air permeability measurements i are repeated in table for convenience figure shows graphically the correlation between the two sets of averaged measurements of the respective quantities along with a fitted curve based on the least squares principle this experimental correlation indicates a structured relation of the two quantities the fitted curve in figure shows that the relation is nonlinear as a result of the put into an analytic form it would offer a viable alternative for the estimation of the water content thus bypassing the industrious and non standard porosity calculation for the purposes of the present study rather than seeking to formulate an analytic relation we adopt the experimental relation defined by the graphical fitted curve in figure as a mapping from air permeability to water content values for each one of the fabric types we thus obtain a set of water content prediction values from the air permeability values from the air permeability prediction values produced by the grnn these are given in table figure shows the experimental correlation between predicted and measured water content values the fitted line lies on the diagonal of the plane showing that the relation between them is identity moreover scatter around the diagonal is limited showing that the air permeability prediction the water content prediction values these satisfactory experimental results allow us to argue that it is indeed both meaningful and viable to predict fabric performance during vacuum drying through air permeability prediction on the basis of an ann modeling tool trained on a few basic structural parameters of the fabrics such as the warp and weft density and mass per unit area of the vacuum drying water extraction process is primarily affected by the air permeability of the fabric in order to estimate the vacuum extraction efficiency we propose to predict air permeability of the fabric based on three basic structural parameters of the fabric namely the warp density weft density and mass per unit area an ann of the generalized regression type is proposed and employed to approximate air permeability values when fed in the input with the structural parameter structural parameter values of a given fabric type the performance of the proposed neural network is tested on real field data with very satisfactory results specifically the neural network prediction error is shown to be five times lower than the corresponding error produced by a multiple linear regression applied on the same data furthermore the proposed method has been employed for the prediction of the vacuum drying process efficiency vacuum drying with the equally satisfactory results the practical implication of both the above results is that the behavior of a specific fabric type in the vacuum dryer and therefore the expected energy consumption during this stage of the fabric production process can be accurately predicted in the fabric design phase before actual production takes place thus allowing for optimized production planning styrene butadiene styrene copolymers and their application in modified asphalt abstract end amino carboxylic acid and hydroxyl functionalized styrene butadiene styrene triblock copolymers were prepared with carbon dioxide and epoxy ethane as capping agents respectively the effects of the end polar groups on the morphology microscopy images suggested that the group at the end of the polystyrene segment made the morphology of the ps domains disordered and incompact dynamic mechanical results showed that the storage and loss modulus increased after sbs was end functionalized end amino and carboxylic acid groups improved the compatibility and storage stability of sbs modified asphalt however the effect of the end hydroxyl group on the improvement of asphalt was not obvious the differential scanning calorimetry analysis of sbsmodified asphalt further showed that the compatibility and storage stability of sbs modified asphalt were improved by the attachment of amino or carboxylic acid groups through the anionic polymerization method addition of sbs exhibits a two phase morphology consisting of glassy polystyrene domains and rubber polybutadiene when the temperature is between the glass transmission temperatures of the polybutadiene segments and the polystyrene segments therefore sbs exhibits
and amlo s decision to skip the first presidential debate on april spelled doom for race extremely close lopez obrador eventually responded by talking less about his past accomplishments and more about the specific benefits that voters could expect from his presidency he also used his appearance in the second debate on june to begin a massive and effective negative campaign of his own against calderon s clean hands reputation the central allegation was that while calderon had been energy secretary no indictments came down and indeed no evidence of wrongdoing ever surfaced zavala did obtain government contracts but not on his relative s watch amlo s attacks however resonated with an electorate still vividly conscious of pri corruption and wary of anything that smacked of nepotism and crony capitalism in the circles around fox with all the negative appeals from both major contenders day found citizens polarized and that a razor thin margin in the context of such a young democracy was seen as contestable by the losers perhaps the most important question stemming from the election is whether the protest led by amlo is based on a major loss of citizen trust in the country s democratic institutions or whether it is more of a short term elite driven strategy designed to rouse support for a restructuring in order to answer this question we will look more closely at the respective support bases of calderon and amlo as these emerged on election day and then turn to an analysis of the reasons behind the postelectoral protest what shaped the presidential vote the probability of voting for each candidate of a number of different possible determinants these included social and demographic correlates retrospective evaluations of the fox administration s performance party identification ideological orientation whether the voter received aid from government social programs and a summary measure of voter s opinions regarding the two a substantial north south divide with northwestern states clearly favorable to calderon and unfavorable to amlo the prd contender s very strong showing in the federal district is properly explained by left wing ideology prd partisanship and the degree to which amlo s mayoralty cemented his personal appeal all of which were significant nationwide and major influences in mexico city after we controlled for mexico city residency we found that the elderly were less likely to vote for amlo and more likely to support the pri a finding consistent with previous but counterintuitive if we consider that amlo campaigned heavily on the economic benefits that he promised to deliver to the elderly he apparently was unable to make this being an independent increased the probability of voting for calderon by percent and the probability of voting for amlo by percent while decreasing the likelihood of voting for madrazo by percent calderon balanced this relative disadvantage against amlo with significant support from pan partisans and those on the ideological right as well as those who approved of fox s performance and who the country s economy as a whole an effect unseen in mexico s presidential elections since interestingly amlo did not seem to capture the support of those dissatisfied with fox instead the lion s share of what one might call the fed up with fox vote went to madrazo of the pri the pri moreover most of the factors that helped calderon hurt madrazo voters who were independents from mexico city approved of fox s administration and positively evaluated the economy turned against madrazo interestingly neither recipients of the seguro popular a health benefits program for uninsured mexicans inaugurated by fox nor recipients of oportunidades the internationally recognized conditional cash transfer ten years ago and which now reaches one in every five families in mexico seemed decisively to support calderon over the alternatives the north south divide however must not be overstated neither income nor education nor religion nor rural status made a difference in the vote between amlo and calderon this was not an election of rich against poor catholic against secular or urban against rural indeed the the rural vote the north south distinction is better understood as representing an increasingly prominent left versus right debate over economic policy that cuts across all segments of the electorate there is indeed a higher level of support for the left in the southern part of the country for reasons related both to the history of the various parties organizational development and to differing levels of economic development retrospective evaluations and partisanship the model captures a strong candidate centered effect on the vote both amlo and calderon s campaigns successfully exploited voters partisan predispositions intensifying opinions about both the favored candidate and his opponent in each partisan base those who wanted to vote for amlo were biased to pay attention to those messages that reinforced the issue or issues the competitor and vice the negative nature of the campaign and the fact that it was a close race until the very end further strengthened this effect and in a three party election in which the pri represented the centrist alternative to the incumbent a more moderate campaign approach by either amlo or calderon probably would not have made only with regard to voter preferences and the closely related opinions that people held of the various candidates but also extended to views about how the campaign had unfolded about what had happened on election day and about the postelection conflict the type of discourse that dominated the campaign raised the potential for protest to such a height that the credibility of various authorities and voters favorable opinions concerning dissuasive power once amlo determined on a course of political mobilization the importance of losers consent a recent addition to the growing literature on losers consent argues that in newer democracies individuals tend to lack sufficient political experience to help them handle the idea is that election losers are more likely to engage in political protest and that this elections as the authors of this analysis put it
more specific initiators are more commonly described so although different aspects of northfield s work certainly illustrated all of the foci berry described as a portfolio of study hamilton could see a cohering theme that drove northfield s work teaching northfield s commitment to teachers and researchers illuminated his queries into teaching and his desire to take these issues into the public arena his work addressed the relationship between current theory regarding teaching and the action of practice over the course of his career northfield re examined the development of professional practice therefore although instances of being a living contradiction may well be at the heart of beginning a self study it is this overarching desire to better align theory and practice to be more fully informed about the nature of a knowledge of practice and to explore and build on these learnings in public ways that appears and a more general purpose for self study is clearly evident in the work of many self study researchers what these accounts offer are strong examples of how valuable it can be to find an appropriate balance in reporting between the specific and the general and how in so doing the as northfield s intentions for self study the value of recognizing and responding to the relationship between current theory regarding teaching and the action of practice stands out as an important feature of self study that in many ways is best able to be understood when being studied and reported from a practitioner s in the alternative perspectives of those excited by and those dubious about self study in so doing the question arises what does it really mean to do self study therefore carefully considering methodology is an important issue in better understanding the nature of self study of teaching and teacher education practices one way or correct way of doing self study rather how a self study might be done depends on what is sought to be better understood therefore in considering how to approach doing self study it is important to be cognizant of the continual interplay between research and practice within the practice setting the manner in which this complementarity between research and practice is played out is an important aspect of self study research as it offers insights into how the focus of the self study may become refined and therefore affect views and expectations about the type of data to be as the many reasons epistemological pedagogical and moral ethical political for the methodology of self study however central to these arguments is the recognition that self study by its very nature defines validity as a validation process based in trustworthiness as per mishler across the many and varied debates creating a platform from which data sets learnings and conclusions might be critiqued and questioned to establish the significance and legitimacy of the outcomes being claimed if sufficient attention is not paid to trustworthiness in self study then regardless of the outcomes for the individual the value of the work for the community laboskey described as the political aspect of self study that is enmeshed in issues of methodology one component of the political is self study s ability to give more voice to the professionals engaged in the practice of teaching in both higher education and the schools and this matters because those who are supposed to have acquire and employ the however this political edge is not meant to suggest that in creating opportunities for these voices to be heard that expectations of rigor in method and analysis need to somehow be diminished to create a different space for these voices to be heard in fact just as more traditional research paradigms have developed elf study laboskey explained this through four methodological features of self study that include the requirement of evidence of reframing and transformation of practice need for interactions with colleagues students educational literature to continually question developing understandings in order to interrogate assumptions perspectives on the educational processes under investigation demand that self study work is formalized so that it is available to the professional community for deliberation further testing and judgment therefore in considering self study as a methodology it is clear that there are important features central to the work that need to be clear in any the way in which the methods are available for scrutiny and critique self study certainly has established methodological expectations that when carefully and appropriately applied illustrate the hallmarks of quality research however as noted earlier using the label self study is not the same as rigorously applying a self study not the private and personal affair that the label might suggest self study relies on interaction with close colleagues who can listen actively and constructively self study also relies on ideas and perspectives presented by others and then taken into one s personal teaching and research contexts for exploration of their meanings and consequences as russell noted acting on the problems issues or concerns that attract attention in teaching and learning about teaching requires an acceptance of the need to seek alternative perspectives and to seek data that is outside of the self and it is in the reporting of self study that the complexities and interrelationships between research and practice can inadvertently reporting on self study kroll demonstrated this point well when reporting on her attempt to make inquiry a habit of mind with her student teachers her report makes clear the theoretical perspectives that shaped her study the methodology context data sources and analysis and leaves no doubt that she approached her research in a rigorous and critical friendship influenced how the study was conducted and framed creates an expectation in the reader of a need to know how the self study itself affected the participants in so doing kroll captured the essence of the tensions and contradictions of self study while also demonstrating a scholarship of practice central to the is based in such a way as to demonstrate
more likely to result in reduced organizational identification when faculty view depend on which identity hat they are wearing along these lines feldman has suggested that individuals may adopt a local identity when their attempts to be professionally active get thwarted and conversely individuals may become more cosmopolitan in orientation in response to frustrating encounters with their organizations future research prevailing career advice calls for aspiring academics to develop a cosmopolitan rather a local identity experience suggests that the visibility esteem and career mobility derived from the national recognition enjoyed by cosmopolitans provides a measure of local independence and thus protection from seeking national acclaim can give rise to increased cynicism and in line with the present findings initiate the sequence of events depicted in figure as predicted in hypothesis higher levels of affective commitment were positively related to job satisfaction this finding reinforces emotionally attached to their universities they are more likely to experience greater job dissatisfaction furthermore this result underscores the role of job satisfaction as one of the most salient elements in a relationship between a university and its faculty in the context of the proposed conceptual scheme the sequential chain of variables leading in train the relationship between workers and workplaces in general is a complex function of one s appraisal of the degree to which the various elements of a work environment fulfill one s needs hypothesis is confirmed by the negative relationship between job satisfaction and turnover intentions this finding supports theories given behavior is determined by one s intention to perform that behavior in doing so it once again reinforces the notion that job dissatisfaction leads to an increased desire to seek employment elsewhere to the extent that individual faculty experience dissatisfaction that originates in cynicism it can be expected that their interest hensel advises the well being of a university depends on its ability to recruit and retain a talented professorate thus it would be important to not only do something about increased levels of cynicism but also to determine which faculty may be the most affected if the latter group includes a university s most talented and heightened cynicism would be especially helpful such research would provide insights into means for addressing cynicism s knock on effects from an individual perspective an emphasis on retention thus argues for investigating intent to those instances where faculty members are dissatisfied with their jobs but are unable to find or seek employment elsewhere as expressed by one faculty member i hate where i am but feel constrained to relocate and hence i m not looking for another job unfortunately to the detriment of one s university as well as one s colleagues and students such situations faculty we all know as names on a door spending no more time on campus than required to teach their classes in my own experience these are often faculty who at one time were emotionally involved in their work but over time have come to doubt their university s motives actions and values eventually the resulting mental scar tissue from such doubt seems to have simply often too these faculty members hang in there realizing that because upper level administrators come and go there may be hope for the future there is also the thought that things may be no better elsewhere practical implications the most obvious implication derived from these results is that universities that engender high levels and ultimately increased turnover among their faculty beyond this however there are less obvious implications first cynicism may in fact carry with it certain advantages from an individual perspective cynicism may be a safety valve or social mechanism for coping with frustrating situations indeed rouillard by unkept promises and false claims building on this point and echoing sternberg s advice above dean brandes and dharwadkar have suggested that cynicism plays a role in preventing employees from being preyed upon by organizations that lack integrity they note however that cynicism can also benefit organizations to assume self interested behavior will go undetected thus in line with the neutral definition that i have proposed dean brandes and dharwadkar conclude that cynicism should not be seen as either an unalloyed good or an unalloyed evil for organizations a second implication that may likewise be less obvious is that to the extent mood transfer occurs may have advantages for both faculty and their universities it no less behooves university administrators to be alert to faculty cynicism in this regard it is important for university administrators to view all top down decisions from a faculty perspective the success of executive edicts have been repeatedly shown to depend on avoiding a values conflict between the when such conflict does occur mounting cynicism among faculty about their university s motives actions and values may be an inevitable result to the degree that research has shown that emotions prompted by such attitudes as cynicism may be contagious and influence a university s affective tone and decision making abilities exist with respect to an organization as a whole to a specific work group or team or to a particular individual such as a supervisor or peer these different targets and the variations in attitude that they elicit are especially reflected in the comments of various respondents i think very highly of my department and college and love my job on the other hand i am very are so distant on a day to day basis i have significant problems with the area chair who has created a hostile work environment by hoarding all the resources and making decisions without consultation this person has his own self interests above all else faculty comments even suggest that feelings directed at various referents might interact one respondent reported feeling department and immediate colleagues than i do about college and university officials hence i have mixed feelings about the institution as a whole another expressed an opposite sentiment my difficulties are at the departmental level though those certainly have an effect on
in atosc using galactosidase reporter constructs carrying the appropriate promoters patodaeb patos patoc in addition a selection of synthetic polyamine analogues have been synthesized and tested for their effectiveness in inducing the expression of atoc az the product of which plays a pivotal role in the feedback inhibition of putrescine biosynthesis and the transcriptional regulation of the ato operon the effects of these compounds were also determined on the ato operon expression the the polyamine analogues were also tested for their effect on the activity of ornithine decarboxylase the key enzyme of polyamine biosynthesis and on the growth of polyamine deficient coli conclusion polyamines which have been reported to induce the protein levels of atoc az in coli act at the transcriptional level since they cause activation of the atoc transcription in addition a series of polyamine analogues were studied on the transcription of atoc gene and odc background polyamines are indispensable cellular components implicated in many physiological functions such as dna replication and repair transcription protein synthesis and post translational protein modifications together with magnesium ions polyamines account for the majority of the intracellular cationic charges and they are essential for the normal cell growth and viability of relatively narrow limits in order to both the ensure optimal cell growth and avoid potential toxic effects arising from the presence of high concentrations of these polycations polyamine homeostasis involves a combination of several sensitive feedback systems regulating their synthesis degradation and transport regulation of polyamine biosynthesis is complex and the key biosynthetic enzyme and or its activity are modulated at the transcriptional translational and post translational levels the post translational regulation of odc is mainly mediated by polyamine inducible non competitive protein inhibitor termed antizymes the mammalian antizyme has also been found to promote the ubiquitin independent degradation of odc by the modulated both at the level of transcription as well as posttranslationally the post translational regulation of polyamine biosynthesis takes place either directly by feedback inhibition of odc activity by polyamines or indirectly by polyamine inducible protein inhibitors the coli antizyme has been identified as a noncompetitive coli az gene disclosed unexpectedly that az might also have a second function as the transcriptional regulator of a two component system family indeed it was shown that az is identical to the gene product of atoc which is a positive transcriptional regulator of the atodaeb operon genes encoding enzymes involved in short chain fatty acid and post translational regulator tcss are usually composed of an inner membrane sensor histidine kinase and a cognate response regulator which frequently is a transcriptional activator recent work from our laboratory has provided biochemical evidence that atos is indeed a membrane bound sensor histidine kinase that phosphorylates the response regulator atoc albeit at a very low rate has also been demonstrated in a recent global analysis of coli tcss the in vitro trans phosphorylation of the atoc az by a truncated form of its cognate atos kinase where both proteins were expressed as recombinant his tagged fusions has also been demonstrated by our group acetoacetate is the only inducer of the atos atoc tcs essential for the transcriptional activation of the atodaeb operon the products of which are essential for the catabolism of short chain fatty acids recent global analyses of the coli tcss have revealed that the atos atoc tcs might not affect solely atodaeb regulation but it could be involved in a number of additional processes such as flagella synthesis chemotaxis and sodium but not potassium sensitivity the cross regulation between atos and tcss has been also reported as mutations in the latter tcs affect expression of atoc according to our data the atos atoc tcs also acts directly on the atodaeb operon transcription to enhance poly hydroxy butyrate biosynthesis in coli the az levels are induced when polyamine levels rise which is expected for a protein which elicits its effects by the mammalian antizyme levels are mainly regulated at the level of translation by polyamine inducible programmed ribosomal frameshifting whereas the levels of the coli antizyme like proteins and are regulated at the transcriptional level although the levels of the coli atoc az have been found to increase upon cell exposure to high polyamine concentrations was to elucidate the mechanism of polyamine mediated induction of atoc az in coli polyamine analogues have been developed and used as probes in an effort to clarify the functions of natural polyamines as well as potential cancer chemotherapeutic agents and in treating several parasitic diseases here we used newly synthesized polyamine gene transcription affect transcription of other genes that share a topological and or functional relevance with atoc ie the neighboring atos gene encoding the atos kinase of the atos atoc tcs and the atodaeb operon which is regulated by atoc az and alter the activity of odc the key enzyme for polyamine biosynthesis carrying lacz fused to either of the promoters of the atosc two component system or to its regulated genes to respond to polyamines was evaluated in three coli strains the isogenic coli strains and that either carry the wild type atosc or a deletion of the atosc genomic fig initially polyamines were added in the growth medium as a mixture of putrescine and spermidine at the final concentrations of and mm each the ability of the reporter constructs to respond to polyamines was determined in all three coli strains by assaying galactosidase expression as shown in fig polyamines caused activation demonstrated through the lack of activation upon polyamine addition of either the ato operon promoter when atoa lacz or lacz constructs were used or atos for all three coli strains tested in the transcriptional activation of the atoc gene the experiments were repeated in the presence of increasing concentrations of each polyamine specifically coli carrying the reporter plasmid were grown in the presence of each of the polyamines diaminopropane putrescine spermidine or spermine alone the activation of the atoc gene in contrast spermidine and spermine not only failed to induce atoc but they slightly inhibited its expression effect of polyamine analogues on the
set the watchdog flags and compute the current set points for the next time interval case the role of the leader and of the follower are exchanged so that the computed current set points are written when the clock tick of the new leader arrives this implies that the previous leader loses the reference only for one time interval which is insignificant particular solutions must be adopted for handling singular cases for example when the clocks of the leader and the follower are almost aligned out to monitor the system and prevent damage this includes setting and checking joint limits maximum joint velocities maximum instantaneous currents maximum sustained currents and maximum forces and torques two different approaches can be taken when one of these checks fails to stop the robot immediately by invoking a special emergency routine or to set an error flag to exit from a complete reboot of the system the latter approach gives a delay of one sampling period but leads the system to a less critical state that does not require a complete reboot the best policy is to base the decision on the particular safety check that failed for example if one of the motor currents exceeded its maximum sustained value an immediate stop is not allow the computation of the direct kinematics and their jacobians the inverse kinematics are computed by means of clik algorithms the damped least squares inverse jacobian is adopted to cope with singularity problems several utility functions are available eg for converting the units of the joint variables for angle axis quaternion the kinematic library is still under development and will include modules for redundancy resolution and inverse kinematics for dual arm systems the robot control functions implement decentralized joint control as well as centralized control and include inverse dynamics and resolved acceleration in the task space interaction control strategies there are software modules that realize loose and tight cooperation new control schemes can easily be programmed by modifying the control module of a template program file and this includes the api library of replics to implement trajectory planning there is a set of functions profile there is also a function to generate a path in the joint space or task space via specified points special functions ensure synchronization of the two robots at the trajectory planning level and generate smooth trajectories when the target is not known in advance for example in visual servo control applications serial and parallel communications allow the controller to and parallel ports a set of functions have been developed to control the two grippers and the belt conveyor through the smartlab interface board special functions of the api library manage the storage of significant variables to record their time history in a given experiment because of the real time constraints these values are saved in the ram memory of the pc along with an can be guided by facilities within user applications software finally the real time module of replics includes functions for files and console these functions cannot be executed while the robot control is active because they may cause a watchdog alarm a special monitor application within replics suspends these instructions and allows their execution only in the absence of real time constraints to the real time kernel of the operating system since the user needs to interact with the robot there are communication channels between the kernel space and the user space from the user space it is possible for example to send the drive on off command or change the joint limits and the other safety checks or open or close the grippers the real time replics module can receive information about the desired of the robot s internal variables in this way it is possible to move the robots by a virtual teach pendant or to display the internal variables on the screen while the robots are moving replics user applications the software applications in the user space essentially assist the human user to communicate with the dual arm robotic in the same graphical page the window on the top left of figure which is also shown in figure is the main replics gui which facilitates the most important operations on the system in particular using the menu bar or toolbar it is possible to select one or both robots select the operating mode send drive on off commands select the type of motion during task execution and can be user to dynamically change the point of view and zoom setting and the graphical window is continuously updated during task execution from the main window it is also possible to compile and execute the user written control modules the console input output of the control modules is realized through the monitor window on the middle right rpl has been developed and an rpl interpreter has been produced the rpl instructions are input through the console of the replics main window or grouped in script files that are executed as batch programs these instructions also program synchronized tasks for the two arms of the cell the grippers and the belt conveyor further details on the rpl language and on is a software environment that manages a multicamera visual system for pose estimation of moving objects with known geometry it is structured as a low level driver written entirely in the and in languages with a gui for the windows nt operating system this visual system may be used to perform both position based this paper the vision system estimates the pose of a target object with respect to a reference frame and the estimate is then passed to a pose controller the two main operations are pose control and pose estimation pose estimation is a computationally demanding task that involves processing the measurements of geometric features loop in the best case the pose estimation can be performed at camera frame rate figure shows a schematic diagram of the position based visual servoing algorithm implemented in the experimental setup the pose control
different zones occupied by certain users identified with a specific gender the consideration of these differences opens up questions about the relation between spatial order and social relations the theory of space syntax offers a conceptual and methodological framework in which houses by virtue of the arrange ment of space and the resulting pattern are seen to engender different patterns of movement and encounter fields with respect to different social groups the houses in the mzab are invariably built around the ammas taddart a largely female space plan drawings indicate considerable irregularities among building layouts and inconsistencies in house size and shape it is difficult to discern how such variation affects the internal spatial arrange ment of the dwelling seen from above however the subtle organism of the courtyard dwellings becomes clear on all but the south facing slopes of the sar houses are open at the top a central courtyard diminishing in area through two or three stories to a small roof light over the lowest floor the next floor provides a more open living area with arcades around a central court on the southern slopes of the sar the walls which usually surround the terrace on all four sides are left open to the south the arcades are effective in cutting off the vertical rays of the summer sun while ad mitt the low winter sun general description in plan de sauvegarde et de promotion du sar de berriane phase i the urbat an institution charged with protection of the settlement of berriane de scribes the zabite house as a sacred space which constitutes women s world par excellence it is designed for her comfort its architecture is pure and rigorously functional the following description is based on the examination of the plans of houses drawn from the five access from the street to the house is always through the skifa or chicane which plays an important role in the functioning of the house opposite the front door a wall protects the ammas taddart from the view of possible visitors the door leading to the ammas taddart is set off from the axis of the front door and that front door gives direct access to the male reception quarter in most examined a morphological feature may be noted two separate pathways exist to the interior the first or family path leads to the ammas taddart the large living space surrounded by small rooms a staircase links the ground floor to the first floor which consists of multi functional rooms the ikoumar and the tigharghart or upper courtyard another staircase links the upper floor to the stah or the terrace the second pathway the chicane through another staircase to the aali a separate quarter reserved for the male visitors the aali which is richly furnished and decorated consists of one large room usually with a small window looking out onto the street sometimes a bedroom is annexed to this male reception room the ammas taddart as noted above is by no means the largest space in the house moreover there is no furniture here apart from the loom the built in shelves for the cooking utensils an oven that occupies one side of the room the tlsifri gives onto the ammas taddart it is used for female visitors and it is in this room that women stay after giving birth the other rooms that give onto the ammas taddart do not have a specific function the dimensions of the rooms are modest the toilets are usually located in a remote corner off the ammas tadda in addition the house is normally equipped with a traditional bathroom from the ammas taddart a staircase leads up to the first floor which consists of the emess enej or upper center surrounded by small rooms the ceiling height is very modest less than meters and in some of the older houses less than meters on the first floor the whole family uses the ikoumar for sleeping at night during the summer it is here that the women do their and take their afternoon coffee or tea alone or with their female visitors in most of the houses that were analyzed the ikoumar or arched portico faces towards the south or southwest another staircase leads up from the emess enej to the stah or terrace where access is reserved exclusively for women zones gender and space the zabite house is usually divided into certain domains or zones which are occupied and dominated by specific users male female and or family members of both genders the inhabitants themselves like to name the spaces according to the user s gender rather than function or use for instance the term tisifri is used to denote female residence while aali houdjrat or douira all embody the notion of a demarcated male visitors zone the first section describes one of the main spatial features of the zabite house gender division and the use of domestic space though this may have little resonance in the planning in the west it is one of the imperatives of arab muslim societies domestic space and gender the division between male and female in different aspects of life and particularly in the domestic environment has been the subject of debate among researchers from different disciplines and back grounds around the world many re searchers argue that although this feature for many different reasons is not as prominent five or six decades ago it still manifests itself in many ways inside the house some researchers have studied the relevance of certain spaces for each gender others have investigated the length of occupation of various domestic spaces by each gender and or the types of activities both genders were performing in the same room over the same period in the arab muslim world gender division is clear and indisputable this division is cultural constraints rather than religious prescription but the rigor with which it is applied varies from one country
their ancestors were entrepreneurs it does not mean they should be i mean years service however in contrast john merton is extensively praised for his entrepreneurial skills and his drive to achieve success for mcgahey sons indeed such is the recognition of john s charismatic entrepreneurial flair that such commendations also come from current family members neil mcgahey argues interestingly in this case positive perceptions of managerial skills are most often alluded to in relation to the limited or weak abilities of mcgahey family owners the finding of a link between the perceptions of entrepreneurial skill of owners and managers and the extent to which management control is viewed as rational and legitimate is partly to subsequent family generations indeed while the reasons for family business failure are numerous and complex individual factors play an important contributing role an issue linked to the above is that of the astute management of power within the firm extended a way that centralized power on john merton with the objective of maintaining a weberian rational and legitimate management control in this regard john merton appeared especially active and able although a gamut of tactics were employed two areas seem especially worthy of discussion first is power attained from positioning management past successes and directly compare these to owner manager failures in this sense management gain perceived legitimacy as the experts who have saved the firm and were able to ensure ongoing success second power was centralized with top management by controlling information available to both subordinates and the board of matters the really important things are decided beforehand and the board simply informed after the event and later i set the board agenda for the chairman he s got other things to worry about john merton general manager years service thus through controlling the agenda and limiting the information available to the board and to power has many sources in the current study management purposefully emphasize and arguably inflate their positions as expert strategy and decision makers similarly through astutely controlling the flow of information setting board agendas and occasionally leaking relevant data the above factors are related to perceptions of management success in controlling the firm john merton is widely recognized as the individual that saved the firm from almost certain collapse indeed at branch level saved the company and is now growing us at the speed of light what more can anyone ask of the man a real example to us all branch manager years service since taking over de facto control of mcgahey sons profit figures have improved dramatically while sales growth has burgeoned greatly aided by new branch openings that have seen the perception that the current management of the firm encapsulated by john merton is highly competent and extremely successful such interpretations by already unconfident owners appear a key driving force in their willingness to allow managers to continue to exert de facto control over mcgahey sons this finding mirrors existing research into the continuance of strategy been perceived as successful lastly the study of mcgahey sons finds that the management of symbols also facilitates the management control of a closely held firm that legally should be controlled by its owners consistent with the classification of dandridge et al top management of the firm used a mcgahey family members interestingly verbal symbols tended to be used negatively to reduce the perceived legitimacy of mcgahey management in particular johnmerton and his team took every opportunity privately to ridicule the achievements and inflate the failures of working references to neil mcgahey as a weak minded failed thespian further he was consistently described as having a very important job similarly mark mcgahey was often labelled our little yachtsman who headed our favorite by top management in a positive manner designed to emphasize the view of management control as logical and legitimate thus although certain mcgahey family members are paid to visit branches on an annual basis interestingly each visit was preceded by a personal visit by a member of the top management team and also by i guess we get a visit from a mcgahey every now and again i think it s something they like to do to make them feel useful from my point of view it s a bloody pain to have some guy wandering around not really doing anything still john always lets you know when to expect them you always get a telephone chat before hand we all know who s running the was directed by a member of the top management team who orchestrated events so that family members were in effect marginalized while john merton was introduced as the man with all the answers during the event family members were introduced to branch managers five minutes prior to a working lunch during which the family were separated from managers so that they could john merton the impact of such symbolism was widely acknowledged throughout the firm briefly deriding owners was perceived as legitimate while john merton was widely viewed as the most logical figurehead of the firm the effect of such perception was such that current family members of the third generation sons appears to fulfil energy controlling and systems maintenance functions wherein management employ symbols in an effort to control direction this process is reminiscent of what pfeffer refers to as the acquisition of authority through symbolic and political maneuvering de facto control is merely a function of the proportion of ownership this study aimed to explore this assumption through a longitudinal case study of a closely held family firm the results of this exercise facto control rested with the general manager furthermore the study uncovered a series of owner family characteristics and a range of management attributes that appeared linked to the extent to which management exerted de facto control while the findings of this study are interesting and illuminating there is a question of whether see berle burnham as was highlighted in the methodology section there is considerable evidence to suggest that
conclusion that a formalized market model does not exist in china does not warrant the policy recommendation of defining property rights if economic theory assumes that clearly defined property rights and a lack of negotiating an efficient solution it does not follow that if you make one assumption of the formalized model true the reality will follow the model i will discuss property rights further after looking at the empirical evidence provided to support the claim concerning the existence of a land market the difference between things and knowledge and relationship to languages puzzled me when i used to teach chinese students once i asked students to compare the merits of the concentric zone the sector model a student answered in the second model forests can be developed into parks my attempt to clarify the difference between properties and statements by showing a picture of rene magritte s painting this is not a pipe was greeted with a hysterical laugh give institutions a chance the third problem in the studies stating that the land and real estate markets have emerged in china is a shortage of convincing empirical evidence some scholars simply follow the western path some others make conclusions without adequate empirical evidence dowall s evidence is his impression of new thinking among chinese urban administrators and planners he writes that urban administrators are discovering that the country s housing problems crowding limited supply of new units poor condition of older stock overall consumer dissatisfaction can best be solved through a commodity system of housing delivery in which enterprises purchase units from real estate corporations and that chinese planners are discovering that the administrative mechanisms in place for allocating land and property rights are ill suited to the enormous task posed by such restructuring there is no information about the urban planners and administrators interviewed where they were interviewed and when dowall compares two cities tianjin with its rigid planning system and guangzhou with however his conclusions are based on general claims concerning the drawbacks of administrative allocation rather than empirical studies of these two cities zhu concludes the existence of a local development state and a coalition between local bureaucracy and developers from the assumptions that localities compete for favorable market positions and mobilize resources to promote local development the same claim was made in zhu because of the competition local government has to be pro enterprise and supportive in formulating local development strategies in the interest of localities a coalition between local government and local industries is thus formed in this circumstance the claim is repeated again in zhu ambiguous rights over state assets are pursued and administrated by the local developmental state that aims to capture state assets as much as possible for the advantage of localities growth coalitions are formed between the local developmental state and danwei enterprises in china s urban politics ambiguous property rights are the key mechanism in the operation of growth coalitions the statements that local governments compete and that there exists a coalition promoting growth and mobilizing resources require empirical evidence showing when and where the coalition existed the existence of a coalition competition or local development state does not the decision to decentralize decision making empirical evidence is not only needed to give us a reason to believe the statements are true but also comparative institutional analysis is useful in revealing underlying normative premises and values an excursion into european history will show that relations began to develop in england the spread of leasehold tenures and the process of enclosure entailed a hardening of property rights over the land the ambiguities of custom were gradually washed out by the powerful certainties of ownership and contract during the second half of the seventeenth century properties were concentrated and estates grew larger large estates were managed by professional stewards landowners who preferred the amenity and urban and in particular metropolitan society lived in london and managed their estates at a distance absentee landowners were not interested in agriculture however and were reasonable enough to realize that their own interests would be served by having tenants of reasonably sized farms who felt secure enough to make improvements so that they could farm successfully for the market it was a peculiarly english compromise europe land development took different paths while english lords who resided in london did not scorn to check the businesses of their stewards among spanish nobles it was a point of honour not to challenge their steward s accounts for the continental nobility england was the example they envied and admired they tried to follow the english model not always with success in france the state tried to encourage enclosures commercial companies and some large landowners took advantage of the opportunities to enclose however many nobles were too poor to afford the capital investment others as in the neighborhood of lyons placed a higher value on their hunting rights and many lords in the central provinces and dauphin preferred to retain their rents from peasants for the use of common in the north and east of europe development took different paths again in denmark where the peasantry had been far more oppressed than they were in the rest of scandinavia a transition was made from serfdom to state supported freehold farming the ancient village community was gradually destroyed as peasants were encouraged to move out of the old nucleated villages into their own homes on enclosed farms the eldest son inherited the whole estate this guaranteed the continuation of the system of large estates some scholars argue that the different patterns we find in europe are the result of class struggle in most parts of continental europe the peasants won in england the lords maintained their grip on the land and peasants remained tenants the differences concerned property law primogeniture freedom of disposition and the expropriation of there was the institution of small peasant family properties but not in england macfarlane explains this english puzzle by arguing that something happened
balance scale timed up go test and gait speed a homogeneous non significant ses was found for studies rcts and cct evaluating weight distribution with vft in bilateral standing compared with conventional treatment winstein et al presented the weight distribution in percentage body weight on the paretic side grant et al a post hoc sensitivity analysis for study design was performed subsequently when the cct of winstein et al was excluded from the analysis the post hoc analysis resulted in a nonsignificant ses between vft in bilateral standing and conventional therapy investigated the effects of vft on postural sway in bilateral standing with the eyes open two of these studies presented the postural sway in percentage of the theoretic limits of stability and studies presented this outcome in displacement values despite the differences regarding postural sway measurement all data were included in the present meta analysis after intervention the data in the rct of shumway cook and colleagues were presented in interquartile ranges and standard error measurements the means of the pre and post treatment data were analysed and sem was converted to standard deviations excluding the cct of winstein et al a post hoc sensitivity analysis for ci two rcts measured the effects of vft on postural sway with the eyes closed in bilateral standing in both studies the postural sway data were presented in percentage limits of stability the meta analysis resulted in a non significant homogeneous ses for postural sway in bilateral standing comparing vft and conventional evaluated the effects of vft while bilateral standing on balance measured with the bbs a non significant homogeneous ses was found for bbs timed up go test the tug is evaluated in rcts the effects of vft in bilateral standing on the outcome measure tug are gait speed two studies rct and cct evaluated the effects of vft while bilateral standing on gait speed a non significant heterogeneous ses was found for gait speed when comparing vft with conventional therapy the balance and gait performance tests symmetry of weight distribution in bilateral standing postural sway balance control measured with bbs number of included studies the findings presented in this systematic review correspond to a large extent with those of barclay goddard et al who reviewed studies that also included non stroke victims improving symmetry of weight distribution while bilateral standing is one of the main treatment goals in the rehabilitation independence furthermore the transfer of weight distribution is seen as an indicator for walking performance it has been documented that patients with stroke shift the body weight to the non paretic limb however the question is how this asymmetry in weight distribution while standing is related to balance control and with that to the safety when they keep their postural control as soon as the center of pressure is successfully shifted above the unaffected limb this finding suggests that the asymmetrical stance of people with hemiparesis may be a compensatory strategy to overcome muscle weakness delayed muscle activation synergistic dependent activation patterns of muscles and existing perceptual deficits transfer does not necessarily imply that the subjects are more unstable and less able to control their balance in order to prevent falling in other words asymmetry does not necessarily imply a decreased postural control and higher risks for falling unfortunately almost none of the studies except that of cheng et al did measure the impact of vft on the incidence of falling or near the absence of valid outcome measures that represents more appropriate the strategy to obtain postural control while bilateral standing on force plates for example de haart et al stated that the speed and imprecision by asking patients well controlled weight shifts in the frontal plane could provide additional information about their measures of outcome in addition it might be hypothesized that in stroke patients different strategies are used for maintaining upright position during quiet bilateral standing for example stabilogram analysis revealed that delaying time intervals of open loop control mechanisms as well as inappropriate timing of descending commands to postural muscles may be important factors that contribute safety a further understanding of these changes as well as the adaptive mechanisms underlying the functional organization of postural control is needed to conceptualize the effects of hemiplegia on postural instability in patients with stroke subsequently new treatment programs need to be developed aiming to improve postural control in stroke instead of restoring gait and gait related activities these results are of great clinical value indicating that training of postural control should preferably be applied while performing the gait related tasks itself it should be noted however that the bbs is sensitive to ceilings effects and may have prevented the detection of significant effects for example in the study of walker et al future position to performance of gait and to establish how recovery of symmetry in standing balance is related to improvements in gait and gait related activities unfortunately in the present review not all outcomes could be pooled for example the adl outcomes of sackley lincoln and chen et al were too diverse to be pooled the studies reported significant effects on the nottingham notice that these positive effects are in contrast to the findings of the present meta analysis however only limited evidence could be attributed to the individual results of these studies additionally the data of the balance master tm outcome dynamic stability were not defined in the individual studies as a consequence it was unclear how to interpret these outcomes in terms of improvement in postural control of shortcomings we may have missed relevant studies not published in scientific journals or published in other languages than english german or dutch these shortcomings emphasize the need for more high quality and larger rcts in stroke rehabilitation studies in the future spinal cord compression abstract we determined whether directed rehabilitation affected survival pain depression independence and satisfaction with life for veterans who were nonambulatory after spinal epidural metastasis treatment we compared consecutive paraplegic veterans who
behavior between converging and diverging experimental setup a schematic diagram of the experimental setup consisting of the test section with a converging or diverging microchannel syringe pump flow visualization system and pressure measurement system is shown in fig the syringe pump with two syringe tubes drove the two solutions each at a flow rate given by the setting with flowing in the central tube and in the annulus the two fluids meet at the bottom of the inlet chamber and certain degrees of mixing may take place there the exhausted fluids from the test section were drained to a container on an electronic balance which might provide calibration of flow rate of each solution before an experiment the pressure taps are located near much larger then the test channel therefore the pressure loss through them may be neglected the differential pressure transducer used in the present work is with a short response time of s and the sampling rate for pressure drop measurement was set at hz the geometric data of the test section are illustrated in fig and for the converging and diverging microchannels respectively lm and from lm to lm for the diverging one resulting a converging or diverging angle of the length and depth for both types of microchannel were mm and lm respectively the mean hydraulic diameter for both kinds of microchannel was the same of lm the flow visualization system included a high speed digital and converging microchannels moreover an mechanism was installed with the test module to hold the lens and provide accurate position on the test plane and focusing fabrication of the test section the test section was a mm mm silicon stripe which was made of type orientation wafer the at the inlet and the exit before and after the channel were etched by using deep reactive ion etching subsequently the direct writing of excimer laser micromachining technology was applied for the through hole under the mixing regions to enable flow visualization the top surface was covered with pyrex glass through anodic bonding both reactant solutions were driven by syringe pump at the same flow rate the volume flow rates for both solutions were controlled ranging from to three concentrations of both reactants at the inlet before mixing of and mol were investigated the solution of sulfuric acid at a specific concentration was prepared by using of deionized water for example the concentration of mol of the sodium bicarbonate solution was prepared by mole of pure chemical compound dissolved in the de ionized water to liter the employment of the same concentration for both reactants might consume thoroughly sodium bicarbonate in the channel and help the estimation the production rate of the formula were totally consumed the volume flow rate of produced would be to to to respectively at the channel exit corresponding to and mol depending on flow rate these estimates were based on being an ideal gas at atm and the evolution of two phase flow patterns high speed video camera the typical frame rate used was frames s and the exposure time was s a fiber optic illuminator was used as the light source the projected area of bubbles on the bottom wall in each frame may be determined by edge detection manually of the boundary of bubbles and subsequently using image pro to obtain the area the void fractions in the inlet and of fifty frames randomly selected divided by the bottom surface area of the region the void fraction was determined implicitly assumed that the bubble completely fill the volume of the projected area measurement uncertainty the measurement uncertainties for flow rate in the diverging and converging microchannels after calibration results and discussion evolution of two phase flow pattern channel profile reactants concentration at the inlet flow rate and inlet geometry have significant effects on the evolution of two phase flow pattern along the microchannel the volume flow rates for both solutions were controlled ranging from to the residence time of both fluids in the microchannel is estimated to be from to s as for is estimated to be from to s based on the mean velocity in the chamber therefore the total residence time for the fluids passing the inlet chamber and microchannel is from to s which is believed to be much longer than the reaction time of the solutions of sulfuric acid and sodium bicarbonate and the effect of chemical reaction kinetics is reaction should have been completed by the time of fluid enters the microchannel however the mixing in the inlet chamber is far from complete therefore significant chemical reactions occur in the channel especially for the diverging one fig and illustrate the development of two phase flow pattern in the converging and diverging flow rates in these figures regions and are right next to the inlet or right before the outlet chamber respectively and regions and are located at about one third and two thirds of the axial distance from the channel inlet these figures clearly demonstrate much more intensive chemical reactions in the diverging microchannel than that in the converging microchannel for qh qn there is no bubble produced in the converging microchannel for those cases the concentration is too low and the flow rate is too high considering the accelerating effect to allow enough chemical reactions to produce a bubble it should also be noted that the solubility of in the is relatively high and a small amount of produced may dissolve in water and is s at the channel inlet and s at the exit in the converging microchannel large spherical bubbles are generated in the regions near the entrance for high concentrations and low flow rates due to the accumulation of produced in the upstream regions and the acceleration effect the flow evolves to slug flow in region and region this is consistent a mean hydraulic diameter of lm without chemical reactions significantly bubbles tend to be generated in the boundary layer near the wall at which the
with phylogeny rather than ontogeny indeed children and adults seem to organize their production in terms of sufficient dispersion and focalization in the acoustic perceptual space regarding rounding a low focalization and lip protrusion seem to be part of the target target which results in the tongue body having to be more fronted for the child compared to the adult this provides a very strong indication that focalization is indeed part of the perceptual goal for speech production we propose that this goal is related to the fact that just as and define the limit of the vowel space and define the extreme limits of the and space producing is in that case defining one limit of the perceptual system recovers this pattern in adult speech and uses it to control the speaker s production the guiding template is a spectral prominence pattern defined by focalization of and below bark conclusion the aim of the present paper was to describe some production perception relationships observed in the adjacent formants is produced by the speakers and hence seems to be part of their goal simulations with the vlam articulatory to acoustic model revealed that for young children an adaptive articulatory strategy is required in order to reach focalization namely a fronting of the tongue body this pattern however results in the production of less intelligible vowels for the year old speaker this feature is thus realized at the cost of intelligibility these results have implications in the framework of the production perception relationships during growth and suggest further investigation in the field of speech motor control development of humor in business a double edged sword a study of humor and style shifting in intercultural business meetings present in all meetings but the frequency and tone of the humor varies with the style of the meetings indeed shifts in style between formality and informality are a common feature of the meetings and humor is one of several interactive strategies which cluster together to mark these shifts towards greater informality it appears that these style shifts and the humor within them can be used strategically to show solidarity and power particularly by the dominant in group of western male participants it is suggested that in these meetings humor acts as a double edged sword being used to both positive and negative effect facilitating on the one hand collaboration and inclusion and on the other collusion and exclusion introduction lewis or at least cultural variations in its use and realization certainly in the intercultural literature humor is seen generally as an aspect of intercultural communication which should be handled with care with frequent references to the difficulty of transporting humor across national or cultural boundaries more specifically in business interactions sociocultural differences in the use of humor have tromenaars and hampden turner tannen for instance tannen describes gender differences in the style and frequency of humor in business contexts claiming that women will sometimes adopt a more masculine ballsy kind of style of humor to be seen as one of the lads in a male dominated workplace similarly holmes studies of new zealand workplace communication show that although women may use at least as much humor as men the style of humor in meetings with female participants tends to be more supportive and collaborative national preferences for styles of humor and when they are used have similarly been described by mulholland who states for instance that joking teasing or leg pulling between australians in business interactions can make asians very uncomfortable mulholland suggests that the use of humor in such contexts may be seen as too individualistic detracting from the collective efforts of the group in a similar vein marsh claims that showing too much feeling can offend asian codes of business behavior especially to the japanese lewis also makes various cultural comparisons about the use of humor in business contexts suggesting that although some types of humor such as slapstick are possibly international there are national styles of humor there seems little doubt that the use of humor in verbal communication is a phenomenon that common however how humor is used in business contexts is less clear and while there is some anecdotal and research based evidence to suggest that it may be an issue in intercultural business contexts there is limited interaction based evidence there is a considerable body of research into the use of humor in spoken language from the fields of pragmatics discourse and interactional analysis most contemporary linguistic based research into humor has centered on the semantic pragmatic of humor although research is also appearing in the critical discourse conversation analysis and ethnographic traditions some of which relates specifically to workplace communication and some to intercultural communication this paper reports on a study which aims to contribute to the interaction based research on particular this study looks at how humor as one of several interactive strategies contributes to the powerplay in business meetings in intercultural contexts i look first at anecdotal and research evidence on the use of humor in business discourse and then summarize findings from my own study illustrating how humor can be used to both positive and negative effect in such contexts arguing that humor can be used strategically either to include or exclude meeting participants finally finally i consider briefly some implications of these findings for future research and for training functions of humor in business research suggests that humor can fulfil a wide range of functions in discourse but frequently its most central role is seen as expressing solidarity and creating a positive self image by amusing an audience and showing a shared idea of what is funny this function relates to brown brown and levinson s description of humor as a positive face strategy signalling shared or common ground hay claims that this solidarity based function is the general function of humor at least in friendship groups but points out that solidarity often entails power in the sense that it involves constructing a
intrigue among the indians then ceremony the narrator records how a indian prophet seeing my brother kiss his wife came running and kissed me after this they kissed one another and made it a very great jest it being so novel here the novelty of the kiss prompts its repetition and the repetition of the kiss commemorates its novelty un repeated the kiss would be not a novelty but an anomaly that which is impossible to assimilate and quickly forgotten and as the kiss slides from novelty to custom they never before used or known the ritual that destroys newness cements the cultural memory of it the indians will never forget how to kiss nor that at one point they did not know how yet if the new must be seen to be appreciated the act of seeing something as new reinforces that novelty is a matter of perspective the ceremony new only for the indians and not the colonists pays tribute to the fact that novelty is interpreted not intrinsic novelty is defined by the beholder so that without an audience it does not exist while every kiss the indians exchange draws them further from the novelty of that first one their displays repeatedly recreate the potential for the kiss to be seen as novel by some future audience so it is that the indians are not the only ones to find novelty in this encounter certain indian rituals strike the colonists in their tum as spectacularly exotic in particular the horrifically mutilated indian war captains with their noses and lips provoke general curiosity though oroonoko especially marvel s much at their faces and desires to learn the source of these frightful marks of rage or malice the wounds tum out to be not marks of rage or malice at all but self inflicted symbols of courage results of a competitive series of self mutilations designed to prove that the captains possess the necessary stoicism and bravery to lead an army unlike the kissing terms a display of passive valour is not a custom we expect to see repeated oroonoko esteems the captains but considers this sort of courage too brutal to be applauded but as readers will remember the narrative is littered with references to mutilation and dismemberment oroonoko slits imoinda s throat then unnecessarily decapitates her severing her yet smiling face from that delicate body pregnant as it was with the fruits of tenderest love by the colonists oroonoko s engages in forms of self mutilation that constitute as charlotte sussman and margaret ferguson have discussed an uncanny repetition of his earlier deed oroonoko turns his knife from his wife s neck to his own cutting a piece of flesh from his own throat to throw at the colonists and replays the violence done to his unborn fetus by ripping up his own belly and aking his bowels and pull ing them out he is put back together by the colonists only to be taken apart once more the novel concludes with the scene of his execution by dismemberment the executioner came and first cut off his members after that they cut his ears and his nose then they hacked off one of his arms after death oroonoko is further dissected into quarters which are then sent to several chief plantations the sequence irate at the new dutch colonists ravage the abandoned british colony and cut a footman that the narrator left behind all in joints and nailed him to trees by the time we get to these final acts of mutilation the circulated body parts of oroonoko and the nailed joints of the british footman the violence and the rage and malice it stands for are nothing new but these images are prefaced by the spectacles that characters in the novel learn to reassess and repeat as forms of to quote the narrator again passive valour the rituals of self mutilation anything but novel for the war captains who practice them are rendered new again by the slave prince who re enacts them and by the audience of colonists who then visually experience this repetition as a representation of the new and different the previously incomprehensible as oroonoko repeats the spectacle of self mutilation that he found at first too to the colonists that however horrid it first appeared eventually registers as brave and just on one hand the documented re evaluation of these spectacles highlights both the novelty and mastery of a foreign concept whereas familiar symbols signify meaning consistently the novelty of these spectacles to a foreign audience is demonstrated by the way in which they are read and re enacted if oroonoko and the colonists first read the war captains wounds as signs of rage and malice later they read them more correctly we are told as signs of courage if the corpse of imoinda first represents a deed that is horrid and cruel it later represents a deed brave and just the narrative endorses this process of reassessment and application as leaming leamed a good or the right lesson given the cyclic nature of this self mutilation readers usually recognize how oroonoko implements the indians techniques yet unlike the colonists or narrator who finally read his actions as courageous readers tend to remain resistant to this assessment in a society where valor means bravery in the face of present and pressing danger passive valour seems just too oxymoronic students are quick to point out how the war die by their own hands before they can prove the bravery that would permit them to lead an army and how oroonoko s self mutilation makes him too weak to perpetrate his revenge even the murder of imoinda is read as another self reflexive injury that causes our hero to suffer instead of adding to the suffering of others oroonoko situated as it is towards the end of an early modem preoccupation as uncomfortable students may wish indeed mary beth rose reads oroonoko within a literary history
a non uniform thermal environment around the occupant this makes the application of the traditional and widely used thermal comfort tool ie is derived by regarding the whole human body as a heat node in order to tackle this problem heated thermal manikins are used to evaluate the local heat loss at body segments which can predict thermal comfort indirectly a breathing thermal manikin with an artificial lung can also tell us the real quality of the air inhaled considering the effect of the thermal plume around the body in this study we have tried to advance the understanding of pv by realizing the function of a heated and breathing thermal manikin numerically our premise is that a well validated ntm method is able to extend experimental studies which are time consuming and expensive this study aims to investigate the performance of pv when it is applied in conjunction with two different totalvolume overall thermal comfort are examined by coupling a novel thermal comfort model developed at the university of california berkeley with cfd founded on a series of experiments on subjects the cbe model predicts thermal sensation and comfort for the whole body as well as local body parts in non uniform and transient thermal environments it and uses these temperatures to predict sensation and comfort in this model the ashrae point scale is extended to a point sensation scale adding very cold and very hot the point comfort scale is defined from very uncomfortable to very comfortable with representing the transition from discomfort to comfort more information can be found in ashrae standard limits the vertical air temperature difference between head and ankle levels no more than xc however studies have revealed that the operative temperature provides a stronger stimulation of discomfort than thermal stratification and a higher temperature difference up to xc is then acceptable it is believed that thermal discomfort is mainly aroused by by cooling the head via personalized air thus the operative temperature level and the vertical temperature difference can be increased suggesting energy savings methods in the simulations we used a breathing ntm with nose and mouth the ntm was obtained by scanning a thermal manikin made in denmark all the body features are represented by this ntm the geometry parameters with the dimensions of two types of ventilation systems were installed ie mixing ventilation and displacement ventilation systems with dv a large wallmounted diffuser was located at the floor level to supply cool air at a low speed and an exhaust at the ceiling level for mv an inlet diffuser with small opening was simplicity only the circular air terminal device with a diameter of was taken into account in the set up the total heat released from the window computer the vertical heat source and the human body was about corresponding to a heat load of pm the total amount of air supplied to the room via the pv plus the dv or mv systems maintained constant at ps and ps the supply air temperature was and for pv dv and mv respectively in order to study the effect of vertical thermal stratification the heat source power was varied in all cases were simulated the navier stokes equations were solved with a commercial code based on a finite volume method the performed before we reviewed these studies and discussed some related issues such as body geometry grids generation boundary conditions and turbulence models perhaps the most important of all is the selection of turbulence models although some advanced modelling methods for example large eddy simulation have been developed due to the limitation of the the fact that they have many deficiencies such as inaccurate prediction of turbulence kinetic energy and adverse pressure gradient flows low reynolds number models are helpful for capturing the characteristics of transitional flows and convective heat transfer from solid surfaces however a large number of grids should be generated and they may come across convergence problems in the situation with complex of air velocity and temperature are reasonably acceptable cfd assessment of thermal comfort with personalized ventilation requires the coupling of thermoregulation of the human body and room air flow field which means transferring the air condition data into the thermoregulation model to obtain skin surface temperature heat flux and sweat loss the iteration this numerical method create a ntm with the geometry of a real human body set up a thermoregulation model with multi node function establish thermal sensation and comfort models for a non uniform environment obtain the environment parameters such as temperature velocity and pollutant concentration using cfd the thermoregulation model used here was also developed at the university of california berkeley based on stolwijk s node model of human thermal regulation this model allows an unlimited number of body segments each of which consists of four body layers and a clothing layer the body temperature distribution local sweat rates detail and the coupling method has been validated before by the authors an additional governing equation of tracer gas with the same physical property as that of air at a standard condition was solved in the testing of the indoor air quality three plane sources of pollutants were considered the ceiling the floor and the and dust was generated from the floor the contaminant concentration was normalized by the value calculated in the exhaust air model validation in the frame of the pmv model a comfort zone is defined as pmv corresponding to for the whole body in the cbe comfort model the comfortable temperature range is defined as no appearance xc this could be attributed to the fact that although the scales used are different the neutral point is set on the heat balance of the body in a steady condition the two models are in good agreement on the cool side but the cbe model predicts a much higher thermal sensation than the pmv model shrinking the comfortable range xc at the warm side it is impractical to expect the value directly
between pastoralists over rangelands they avoid each other however the fulani have for a long time crossed their zebus with the these crossings took place following a pastoral catastrophe in order to rapidly reconstitute herds or during a period of political domination when the fulani were little more than subjects of a dominant group they crossed their cattle with those of their masters more recent crossings and even changes in cattle breeds have followed the great droughts of the and the primary motivations of these interventions are social and hesitate to cross their cattle because they are always dealing with zebu breeds however the different breeds do not resemble one another in terms of their bodily traits and behavior at the beginning of the crossing the fulani do not view the cattle as true fulani cattle eventually they reshape the animal and end up appropriating it other sahelian pastoralists do not cross their cattle with fulani zebu which are widely viewed as being difficult towards other zebu species is thus a trait specific to the fulani the second type of crossbreeding involves the crossing of fulani zebu with taurin cattle as practiced in bondoukui this cattle breeding practice is also widespread across west africa from senegal to western nigeria it is encountered in the more humid savanna region to the south of the fulani semi arid cultural area a large number of the crossing of zebu with taurins is a more difficult undenaking for the fulani because of the negative view they hold towards taurin cattle the fulani identify themselves with the more or less large humped back zebu taurin cattle are scomed as being the animals of fanners in nigeria non fulani farmers view the crossing of taurin with zebu cattle as counter to their religious values the zebu is tied to the values and practices that constitute a specific code of fulani conduct known as pulaaku the notion of pulaaku is complex and difficult to define but fulani pastoralists often use it to distinguish themselves from others pulaaku encompasses many fundamental qualities that are also characteristic of their cattle notably the mbororooji this animal is thus seen as embodying ideal fulani a role model for good fulani conduct despite these cultural values the fulani entering the humid savannas breed their zebu cattle with taurin cattle to better adapt their herds to the new ecological context livestock veterinary services recommend crossings resulting in animals that perform well in the realms of agricultural work and meat production however the fulani do not crossbreed animals for these reasons their main concerns are shaping herds that are adapted to the new ecological conditions of the savanna but these crossbred animals are not always stable most of the time crossings are made by bringing together a zebu bull and a humpless cow or an already crossbred female this practice is known to have limited and slow effects in intercrossing it takes only a few crossings of this type to reproduce bovine animals quite similar to the zebu stock this is perhaps a sign of the prudence of the fulani for experts in animal crossing reflects a strategy to produce animals of good size that attract better prices in cattle markets perhaps there is also a strategy to keep the crossbred cattle as near as possible to the zebus most fulani pastoralists do not forget that the zebus are their ancient and specific cattle breed conclusion animal patrimony and pastoral mobility breeds in order to adapt to new ecological or socio political situations fulani say that they like the cattle breed to be a good one for each local environment these strategies of adaptation and adjustment of cattle seem to be in opposition to strategies of conservation of a heritage sometimes a cattle breed does not thrive in a local environment but the herders keep it because they are attached to it they are ready to a breed that is their true heritage at the extreme when a cattle breed risks being lost for ecological or economic reasons but it is still maintained by pastoralists it acquires a true heritage value for them one could argue that the greater the misfit between an environment or an economic context and a cattle breed the higher its value as a heritage pastoralists are passionate about cattle breeds although this passion general public is knowledgeable about cattle breeds the valorization of cattle breeds in africa seems to be more an affair of specialists the cattle breeds studied may be classified in terms of the breeds of settled herders and those of mobile pastoralists in each of the study areas the breed of settled livestock is not the same it is either the gudaali or the mereeji if the cattle breeds are different in one the cattle breeds are indicators of both livestock systems and pastoral societies many crossings are made in favor of a settled breed this is indicative of a general evolution of pastoral systems in africa but political events such as insecurity war and flight may restrict this evolution in fact this is the new context of large pastoralist areas in many african countries facing more and more insecurity it may be possible that their breeds thus manipulation of the cattle breeds does not always take place in a linear evolutionary manner in the long term and at the local scale fulani pastoralism reveals two fundamental logics a great value is placed on zebu cattle and a spatial dynamic leads them to value mobility the first is essentially patrimonial the second reflects a territorial strategy these two logics are intimately related it is to satisfy the forage needs of their zebu that always exploring new grazing areas however these goals can sometimes become contradictory this is the case when fulani enter a new ecological setting that threatens the survival of the cattle breed to which they are strongly attached faced with few alternatives many pastoralists decide to break their animal patrimony by crossing it with
of the might be either that it had known weights invariant weights or excessive weights the following sections examine each of these three meanings and the extent to which the opinions suggest that the meanings are part of the individualized consideration inquiry subpart then discusses how these three meanings fit together i quantified racial preferences many scholars have read the or places severe limits on the use of a point system in which universities assign race a numerical value this section will examine the extent to which the court meant to proscribe quantified admissions programs chief justice rehnquist s opinion for the court in gratz frequently and disparagingly referred to the point system used hy the college but most of specific to the point system employed hy the college indeed there are only two places in which chief justice rehnquist might be said to attack the point system qua point system directly first he stated the following the current lsa policy does not provide such individualized consideration the lsa s policy automatically distributes points to every single applicant from an underrepresented minority group this distribution of points is a factual review of an application to determine whether an individual is a member of one of these minority groups this critique can be read as an attack on the point system itself in that it found fault with the lack of consideration that accompanied the distribution of points for race it can also be read however as an attack on the lack of differentiation in the point system perhaps if consideration of other factors accompanied the points for race the point system would not he as problematic in the other place in which chief justice rehnquist might be said to have attacked the point system qua point system he asserted that he admissions program justice powell described did not contemplate that any single characteristic automatically ensured a specific and identifiable contribution to a university s diversity insofar as point systems by their race any point system may not have passed muster for chief justice rehnquist chief justice rehnquist may however have allowed a more nuanced point system that assigned points not on the basis of race alone but rather on the basis of how race interacted with other characteristics such a system would not assign a specific and identifiable number of points to a single characteristic and therefore may pass constitutional muster thus chief justice rehnquist was court prohibits quantification or merely requires differentiation in her concurrence in gratz justice connor argued more forcefully against the point system qua point system she stated that the selection index by setting up automatic predetermined point allocations for the soft variables ensures that the diversity contributions of applicants cannot be individually assessed furthermore she noted that this mechanized the admissions decision for each applicant the selection index thus precludes admissions counselors from conducting the type of individualized consideration the court s opinion in grutter requires justice connor s majority opinion in grutter also condemned the mechanical nature of the point system she noted that ujnlike the program at issue in gratz bollinger the law school awards no mechanical predetermined stating a s justice powell made clear in bakke truly individualized consideration demands that race be used in a flexible nonmechanical way like chief justice rehnquist s critique justice connor s critiques in grutter and gratz can be read either as critiques of the gratz admissions system s quantification or as critiques of the gratz admissions system s lack of differentiation thus when read together the opinions make clear that at the very least was suspicious of simple point systems like the one used by the college whether the court objected to these point systems because of their quantification or because of their lack of differentiation is less clear either way it is clear that the court was bothered by quantification and we will argue in subpart that the court adopted an approach of subjecting is more rigorous than the scrutiny to which it will subject unquantified systems the discussion so far in this section has addressed possible concerns the court may have had with quantified admissions programs but do the court s concerns extend also to quantifiable admissions programs imagine for example that a statistician collected information about the applicants to the law school and came up with a formula for predicting whether applicants test scores gpas residency status race strength of recommendations extracurricular activities and so on if the statistician could perform a regression that fit the data well the regression would demonstrate that the program quantified the admissions process albeit implicitly to satisfy a not quantifiable meaning of the individualized under this reading would require a statistical badness of fit if a statistician after the fact could extract the true size and form of the racial preferences relative to other factors this might be enough to subject an affirmative action program to higher scrutiny the regression we conducted on the law school data was a better fit to the data than the regression we conducted on the college data the pseudo despite using no explicit formula it appears that the law school may have been more formulaic than the college the pseudo squared statistics suggest that the variance in the law school admission decisions could be explained by race gpa test scores residency status and year while only the undergraduate decisions could be explained by the same factors in grutter the court did not inquire into whether the law school s implicit admissions algorithm could be recovered after the fact by statistical analysis and the constitutionality of the law school s admission process was not jeopardized by the facts that it was possibly more formulaic than the college s and gave more weight to race than the college in that it produced a larger proportion of admits who were but for as measured in gpa points or similar units quantifiable but unquantified programs may sail under the radar screen of constitutional review
my various interactions business experience and exposure to different kinds of people however i do also believe that there are different character traits in people that will predispose them to this approach to networking individuals with an agreeable and kind personality develop also deter amiability among employees the amiability capability is especially well suited to the following role demands in a management job where there is an explicit focus on relationship building when there is a need to read body language and other subtle forms of communication to assess what is going on when there is a need to obtain social support from friends and well wishers managers who are good at the amiability capability often play the role of confidante and are effective at strengthening the morale of a team or organization developing the amiability capability enquire about the family and personal interests of colleagues when it is appropriate try to develop interests outside of the workplace with co workers those who are rated highly in the capability report that their best friends are also close colleagues at work reduce formality and hierarchical differences in your workplace if you insist on pulling rank these kinds of settings foster informality and a more personal touch design events for sharing emotions these can be small scale and fun rituals such as a birthday party or festive celebrations or a team building event conclusions complicated to map accurately in any given situation effective networking instead very much depends on your behavioral capabilities and the context of outcomes that you want to achieve our research has identified four behavioral capabilities that underpin consummate networking seeking the kingpin matchmaking specific role demands within an organization ask yourself which of these capabilities you seem to be good at and to what it extent it is due to your personality rather than the demands of your role it is also important to consider what kinds of outcomes you would like to achieve given the demands of your current role and especially barney the crucial research question is what kinds of corporate and recent contributions have attempted to recast the analysis in dynamic terms by explicitly taking account of industry dynamics and innovations following schumpeter innovations are understood as the key drivers of market change and firms have to constantly adapt to a changing environment evolutionary economics has long stressed the the differing corporate resource bases are a constant source for innovations subsequently the new products are tested in the market place as in the resource based view the firm s crucial task is to exploit its existing resources and capabilities while simultaneously developing new corporate assets for future business opportunities as well as opportunities to innovate and imitate they differ in their potential strategic paths established firms are constantly confronted by new threats to the value of their assets schumpeter termed this the process of creative destruction to be able to survive creative destruction and to exploit future business opportunities firms have only diminish the value of technological assets while leaving the potential value of complementary assets untouched according to teece s definition complementary assets raise the value of a firm s technological innovations examples for complementary assets include marketing capabilities regulatory knowledge client list and so on since given that complementary assets are often not affected by technological innovations they insulate established firms against the gale of creative destruction their resource bases include critical complementary assets and they therefore have the potential to negate early mover advantages of technological leaders firms should hence vertically integrate complementary of schumpeterian rents as they constitute important barriers to imitation in the resource based view dierickx and cool highlight this important role of complementary assets in explaining sustainable competitive advantages by pointing to the interconnectedness of assets that prevent imitation correspondingly gaining access to complementary harrison et al wernerfelt already emphasizes that complementary assets can foster the successful entry into new product markets more recently the empirical study of klepper and simons and the theoretical work of helfat and lieberman stress the importance of complementary assets for explaining entry and innovations and industry evolution the management of complementary assets has received only limited attention the need to actively manage the creation and usage of complementary assets is often acknowledged but the corresponding coordination and cooperation problems that have to be addressed are rarely analyzed of course it an awkward situation for a strategic theory of the firm while the creation and usage of complementary assets are asserted to be of crucial importance for the understanding of corporate strategy the corresponding management challenges often remain a black box moreover relying on this kind of reasoning would mean giving up the hope of predicting the lack of consideration in managerial problems associated with the creation and usage of complementary assets is especially puzzling if one turns to contract based theories of the firm like transaction costs economics or the incomplete contracting framework these contributions point to important incentive on the larger issues of competitive advantage innovations and industry evolution their value as a conceptual foundation for a strategic theory of the firm is problematic in this paper we clarify some of the ideas developed in the contract based theories and try to integrate their insights into a resource based theory of the firm thereby a deeper understanding our paper is organized as follows in the next section we offer a general definition of complementarity and identify the coordination problems associated with the deployment and development of complementary assets a discussion of incentive problems follows in the third section complementary assets magnify internal incentive problems and their management has an impact on the innovativeness internal appropriation of rents in the fifth section we relate our key propositions to the industry life cycle a sixth section concludes strategic direction complementary assets and problems of coordination complementarity defined while complementarity seems to be a crucial concept if the marginal return of an activity increases in the level of the other activity in other words
city just along the road are mumbai s hanging gardens again brilliant views and home to many giant snails the guide was very good and spoke very sound english on our return journey to colaba we briefly stopped to see the site where all the dirty washing in mumbai is washed it was a huge many people were hard at work a bit like widow twankies the main thing i took from the tour was that so much architecture influence the majority of buildings are pre wwii and as such the city bares a great resemblance to many parts of central london rob s story focuses on the city s buildings and architecture rob takes great interest in the english influence on the architecture in mumbai figure shows a map of his story the conclusion mumbai is a very interesting place negative visitor emic interpretation of mumbai report by shakirah and erik visitor experience in a visit to mumbai or bombay nightmares as this was not our most enjoyable stop first we endured a hours overnight bus ride from goa not nice our room was located next to the side of a rubbish dump in an alleyway so a funky smell came seeping through the ac and all kinds of bugs were crawling through the sink nuff said after we both started to get a bit sick physically and mentally we spent some extra bucks on another room we had a some good and bad experiences during our day stop in bombay bad first the pollution was extreme and there was no way of taking one deep breathe it was just filthy there were rats the size of small pigs crawling the side streets and worst of all the poverty really hit home good we hit a few good bars and clubs in the suburbs including a club called seijo and the was a mixture of japanese western and live drumbeats and the interior walls were painted with large sized manga characters we also celebrated holi a hindu festival which involved spreading the lurrve through paint see pics we partied in the street with some local indians and ended up being bigger attractions than the gateway of india in this case the travelers have an unpleasant hours bus ride upon arrival shakirah and erik find negative visual and olfactory stimuli to compound their misery the ongoing exposure to pollution poverty and vermin resulted in the conclusion that mumbai is not an enjoyable stop seoul seoul is south korea s capital as well as the country s center for business south korea s first city is located in the northwest region of the country on the han river seoul is old city that has been a capital city since the fourteenth century although seoul is a modern city visitors interested in historical sites and museums have a number of options seoul s south gate is a good place to start it used to be the main entrance to the city today it is surrounded by modern architecture showing an interesting contrast of traditional architecture in jongno ward of seoul there are a number of historical sites for example gyeongbokgung palace is worth a visit it was the main palace during the joseon dynasty near gyeongbokgung palace is insa dong at insa dong visitors can visit numerous galleries and see traditional crafts and goods south of jongno is the jung ward and namsangol hanok village this village is the location of myeong dong a shopper s paradise myeong dong hosts a number of brand name shops and department stores that sell high quality merchandise helen percival s positive visitor emic interpretations of seoul helen provides the following information about her visit to seoul after a day of teaching children i reflect upon my months here in south korea i have just recovered from a day of white water rafting where the water was ankle deep the most unusual whitewater rafting trip i have experience a lot of walking and lifting the raft but we got too see beautiful river side rock formations but not a lot of wildlife the monsoon has arrived but the spring time has been great with pleasant days and beautiful spring blossoms i climbed to the top of a mountain in seoul to get a view of the city which was amazing and looked like a toy town seoul is enormous and is surrounded by a belt of mountains everyone over the age of mountains even in sweltering degree heat you can find groups of woman and men kitted in the most up to date winter walking gear you can imagine the looks of surprise when i walked with my flip flops my most recent school trip was to a race course with the children a surprise location but it proved to be very peaceful and a pleasant day out of the classroom helen is enamored with the natural beauty of seoul from her vantage point on the top helen is amazed by the enormity of the city and the belt of mountains surrounding it her whitewater rafting experience also provides an opportunity to view beautiful rock formations finally she remarks at the beauty of spring flowers in bloom in the area figure shows helen s positive experience in seoul positive visitor emic interpretations of seoul by carrie neilands carrie neilands provides the following positive travel experience s probably a good thing that i do nt live there though i d dress great but i d live in a box in an alley somewhere soooo sic expensive anyway while we were there we visited a palace and a folk village complete with buddhist temple and of course we checked out the night life i sic posted some of the more picturesque pictures enjoy carrie s travel experience combines seoul s traditional and modern attributes she from her pictures it appears that carrie is most impressed with the buddhist temple the modernity of seoul also impresses this visitor she
the end of the retrace phase that typically were larger than the cm interline separation the retrace movement is a fast movement and is unlikely to be closely visually guided resulting in larger than the cm interline separation the retrace movement is a fast movement and is unlikely to be closely visually guided resulting in position errors which are only detected and corrected at the end of the retrace when close visual guidance is again engaged before reading the next line for normally sighted participants using hand magnifiers neve also reported a greater number of pauses and corrections at the start of a new line or end of the line our magnifier movement recordings show clear evidence that some participants had difficulty finding the start of the next line it is possible that retrace performance could be improved by skills training to use specific retrace or by using additional devices such as a finger placed at the start of the line just a typoscope placed the objective measures of page navigation performance given that participants reported missing a line sometimes or frequently when reading and at least some difficulty with retrace we expected to find more evidence of page navigation difficulties from the magnifier movement recordings in fact only a minority of participants made a large number of navigation errors and there were very few missed or repeated lines there are a number of reasons why this the case participants based their ratings of perceived difficulty on their experience of using the magnifier at home these ratings were made before the reading test so it is possible that difficulty estimates might have been lower if based on the passages and reading environment used in the study participants probably read more carefully under the experimental conditions than they would at home therefore fewer navigation errors might have been recorded than would normally occur our data analysis methods may have been insensitive to evaluating relevant page navigation skills eg it is possible that our passages were too short to properly evaluate navigation problems on the other hand it is not surprising that some visually impaired people may overestimate the difficulties they encounter when using their magnifiers previous studies have demonstrated that subjective responses do not necessarily agree with the objective the discrepancies encounter when using their magnifiers previous studies have demonstrated that subjective responses do not necessarily agree with the objective the discrepancies between self reported and measured functions may be due to different underlying expectations and clinical experience suggests that many patients may have unrealistic expectations about reading with magnifiers and become frustrated by the slow reading speeds short working distances and and vision measures were more strongly associated with forward navigation performance than retrace navigation performance reflecting the greater degree of visual and cognitive processing that occurs when reading along a line than the minimal processing that occurs during retrace although horizontal field of view was related to navigation times especially forward navigation time it was unrelated to either during retrace although horizontal field of view was related to navigation times especially forward navigation time it was unrelated to either forward or retrace navigation errors in general navigation errors were not well predicted by any of the vision or magnifier measures we evaluated we did find a modest correlation between vertical field of view and retrace errors suggesting that the vertical important in the retrace phase of navigation however vertical field was measured for only of the participants navigation errors might be better predicted by other factors that we did not evaluate in this study in particular motor skills including hand eye coordination and manual the relationships among visual impairment manipulative skills hand eye coordination and page navigation skills is an important area for future investigations contrary to our neither experience nor frequency of magnifier use had any significant association with magnifier movement patterns magnifier movement parameters or navigation errors page navigation skills might develop rapidly in the first few weeks after a magnifier is but we had only four participants whose magnifier had been prescribed within the previous weeks so we could not assess this in our sample a longitudinal study following participants from the time when the magnifier movements from a relatively large sample of older visually impaired patients using optical magnifiers we were able to quantify page navigation strategies difficulties with page navigation and the ability of patients to hold a hand magnifier at a constant distance from the page in the clinical setting it would not be practical to record magnifier movements however we suggest that in addition to assessing reading speed low vision practitioners should routinely observe how it would not be practical to record magnifier movements however we suggest that in addition to assessing reading speed low vision practitioners should routinely observe how patients move their magnifier when reading a short paragraph although we used experimental conditions that approximated real world reading conditions and participants who represent the majority of elderly visually impaired people our findings are limited to one set of reading conditions reading hand or stand magnifiers nevertheless this study provides a strong basis for future investigations including changes in navigation skills after a magnifier is first prescribed the impact of training specific navigation strategies the use of devices to aid navigation and the relationship between motor skills and navigation pulsed near infrared laser diode excitation system allen and paul beard a pulsed laser diode system operating at nm has been developed for the generation of photoacoustic signals in tissue it was evaluated by measuring the photoacoustic waveforms generated in a blood vessel phantom comprising three dye filled tubes of diameters immersed to a maximum depth of in a turbid liquid s the system was then combined with a cylindrical scanning system to obtain two dimensional images of a tissue phantom the signal to noise ratio of the detected signals in both cases and the image contrast in the latter suggest that such a system could provide a compact and inexpensive alternative
regional and structural programmes and limited the growth of the agricultural budget as a broad package it would have to be approved by the european council in the autumn of the coam discussed the commission s proposal but before the copenhagen summit of december that in turn failed to produce agreement on the package in particular because the agricultural issue remained unresolved the issue then returned to the coam in which the german presidency came close to a deal but it was then left to the european council to make the final decision at the brussels summit in february quotas in despite the fact that the european council had debated cap reform at a series of summits from november onwards this reform was part of a broader european council negotiation on the budget involving a dispute over the british contribution according to our hypothesis we would have expected farm ministers to have passed the final decision to the european council but in the end coam at first glance this invalidates our hypothesis however a possible explanation of the institutional location of the milk quota reform can be attributed to the president of the coam french farm minister michel rocard who had political aspirations which went beyond the farm minister s portfolio and thus a constituency much broader than the farming community further being a long standing rival of president mitterrand he had strong incentives to broker demonstrate political leadership once the european council in brussels on march chaired by mitterrand had failed to reach agreement on dairy policy mitterrand was no longer in a position to undercut rocard s efforts conclusion the broader political context of eu agricultural policy making changed as a result of the uraawhich made agricultural trade subject to stricter rules and however the change of the international context of the cap cannot in itself explain the nature of cap reform the eu institutional setting within which reform is negotiated and settled also plays a crucial role contrary to conventional wisdom the coam seems to be a more conducive setting than the european council in which to broker substantial reform the two most substantial reforms of the cap the macsharry and fischler reforms were decided by reform was adopted by the european council an important reason why the european council is unable to adopt substantial reforms of the cap is that the reform issue is likely to become subordinated to the quest for a broad political agreement on a number of issues on the european council agenda we suggest that an important motivation of the choice of institutional setting for the final reform decision is the desire of farm ministers and of heads of state or government to avoid unpopular decisions thus when cap reform is an integral part of a broader package farm ministers pass the final decision on to the european council and when cap reform is defined as a separate issue the european council avoids involvement our findings question the view of the literature on cap reform which more or less explicitly assumes that the compartmentalization of agricultural the reform process from an institutional location friendly to special interests to one in which other interests dominate would facilitate policy change there are many studies supporting this hypothesis since it does not appear to apply to cap reform we may need to rethink whether theories on policy change originally designed to explain institutional architecture of the eu might limit the applicability of such theories the mexican standoff taught to protest learning to lose even before it culminated in an intense political drama that made headlines around the world the mexican presidential election of july was arousing keen interest the prospect of a left wing government taking office as a result of the vote was a real one such a turn of events would have meant both a first in the country s twelve year old democratic history and a major addition to an alleged leftward trend in instead the election result turned out to be a razor thin plurality victory for center right candidate felipe calderon of the national action party which had ousted the long ruling institutional revolutionary party in the previous presidential election six years earlier calderon s main rival mexico city mayor andres manuel lopez obrador of the party of the on september by the electoral tribunal of the federal judiciary the country s highest institutional arbiter regarding all electoral matters amlo had finished with a tally of percent of the vote as compared to calderon s percent a margin of votes out of more than million ballots cast in a nation of more than million people do well in the congressional races held concurrently to renew the totality of the seat chamber of deputies and member senate the pri legislation without great trouble most likely with the support of new alliance the green party and most of the pri pass constitutional reforms which will strengthen the bargaining power of the smaller parties and implicitly of their senior coalition partners an additional challenge for calderon is the extent to which pan legislators will respond to his own priorities the close run contest and its bitter aftermath revived mexico s supposedly history with crowds in the capital at one point topping a third of a million people scholars concerned with the phenomenon of losers consent and political protest suddenly have an unexpected case to study one that highlights how even in the presence of massive institutional investments and a fairly successful electoral experience stretching over more than a decade leadership incentives and partisanship can still prompt key novelties in the race for president open candidate selection procedures have been a rarity in mexican politics before when the pri used
theorem theorem suppose that satisfies hypotheses and let be the asymptotic speed of spread of then for any qt satisfies hypotheses and let be the asymptotic speed of spread of then for any qt has wave connecting to such that is continuous and nonincreasing in s proof by theorem it follows that for each tc is the asymptotic speed of spread of the map qt let be fixed in the case where the proof is similar to that of theorem suppose that wt is the traveling wave of qt first we prove the equicontinuity of wt note that wt ntc qnt wt qnt ntc wt for any there is an integer such that nt and wt ntc qnt wt n ntc wt by assumption is a family of equicontinuous functions and so is wt moreover we can choose wt such that wi thus there is a sequence of integers r such that converges to with respect qt for every fraction whose denominator is a power of let be an arbitrary positive number and be any positive integer then can be written as rm where km is a positive integer and rm thus we have qt qrm qt for any moreover since are nonincreasing in so is since qt we obtain qt qt in view of wi wi wi dr with dr let dr since is a countable set and for each dr for all sufficiently large we can find a subsequence r such that wri converges to uniformly for and since wri is nonincreasing in so is note that if r then wri we claim that ux does not depend on in fact implies that qd thus we have for all d define ux then qt note that since is dense in and is nonincreasing on it follows that is also nonincreasing in s hence connecting to we conclude our presentation of the theory of spreading speeds and traveling waves with a general remark which will be used in the next section and may be of its own interest remark all results in sections through are still valid provided that the interval is replaced with a compact metric space and that hypotheses and are replaced with and respectively through to a functional differential equation with diffusion a nonlocal and time delayed lattice differential system and a reaction diffusion equation in a cylinder a functional differential equation with diffusion let be fixed and we consider a general autonomous functional differential equation with diffusion on where d is a functional and for each ut denotes to get concrete examples of we need to specify the functional for example letting with all r and we obtain a local reaction diffusion equation with finitely many delays letting function by we need the following assumptions on to study the spreading speed and traveling waves for for some constant has no zero in and for each the derivative d of can be represented as a for all small by lemma is quasi monotone on in the sense that whenever in and using the semigroup generated by the heat equation and cor we can show that generates a monotone semiflow qt defined by qt ut let be the restriction of qt to it is easy to see that is the solution semiflow generated by the following functional differential equation du dt the semiflow admits a strongly monotone full orbit connecting to thus assumption holds for each map qt define the linear operator by the relation clearly for define qt by the smoothing property of the semigroup associated with the heat equation it then follows that qt satisfies for and with for now it is easy to see that for each the solution map qt of satisfies all assumptions by theorems and we then have the following result theorem let and hold and let be the asymptotic speed of spread of the solution map of then the following statements are valid for any if with and for outside is subhomogeneous on then can be chosen to be independent of for any has a traveling wave solution such that is continuous and nonincreasing in s and ct connecting to in order to estimate the spreading speed we impose the following additional condition on for all and for any there exists such that a for all equation with diffusion d lut let mt be the solution map associated with and bt be defined by mt as in section by the above observation it is easy to see that bt is just the solution map of the linear functional differential equation on since is a cooperative and irreducible delay equation it follows that its characteristic parts of all other roots define by clearly ft then we have bt ft thus ft is the principal eigen value of bt with positive eigen function evidently a similar analysis can be made for by theorem it then follows that in sections through can also be employed to study the spreading speeds and traveling waves for both systems of functional differential equations with diffusions and nonlocal reaction diffusion equations with time delays for an integral equations approach to scalar nonlocal and delayed reaction diffusion equations we refer to a nonlocal lattice differential system and are all positive real numbers moreover the continuous function satisfies the following conditions d and for is strictly increasing on for some and gb dw has a unique solution was derived in to model the growth of a single mature population by lemma we have the following conclusions in section for any cw system has a unique global solution with wi and wi let and be two solutions of with vi vi for all then vi vi for all note that if is a solution of of with and at time of system that is qt cw define the linear operator cw cw by the relation on qt proposition for each qt satisfies hypotheses moreover qt is a semiflow on cw proof define qt it then follows that
foreign policy the us military became overextended and lost tens of thousands of lives waging an unnecessary war that served only to weaken the us international position moreover the war kept the united states from negotiating a trilateral understanding with the europe and japan that would have allowed the united states influence at a much lower cost in resources and the final transformation was the political mobilization of african americans other ethnic minorities and women all groups who had been marginalized or excluded from the new deal settlement these groups campaigned for economic political and cultural inclusion and these demands came into direct conflict with deeply established patterns of neighborhood and family life and yet these interests could have reinvigorated the democratic coalition and allowed it to restore its electoral dominance but as the vietnam war escalated the johnson administration was forced to choose between its foreign engagement and a project of domestic reform and it opted for the former this in turn made it impossible to respond to the underlying economic problems so that employment related concessions to african synergistic solutions there were synergistic failures that led to an escalation of political polarization and while most of the nations of western europe also went through comparable periods of turmoil and transition in the late and early they had the enormous advantage of having only a marginal involvement in the vietnam conflict without the added budgetary and cultural strains of a deeply unpopular war weather the transition in a way that sustained the continued support of employers for keynesian welfare state measures there was also no equivalent in europe to the panicky response of the us business community because european businesses had decades of experience contending with challenges from an anticapitalist left of the new deal legacy and one of the most skillful politicians of his generation his crushing defeat of goldwater s challenge in represented the high water mark of business support for the democratic party so his failure to be able to hold the political center and respond effectively to these transformations worked to magnify the disillusionment with the new deal tradition among business people nixon who shared his history as an extremely effective politician in comparison to later republicans nixon was a big government conservative he had no hesitation about enhancing the government s power and institutional reach in domestic policy his administration created the environmental protection agency and the occupational safety and health administration used wage and price controls to contain inflation dramatically increased the generosity of supplemental social insurance program to federalize government assistance to the disabled nixon famously declared we are all keynesians for this reason nixon s rapprochement with china could have been a metaphor for his entire administration in the manner of disraeli he could have reinvigorated american conservatism by developing a series of responses to the triple transformations based on the premise that government could solve social facade of conservative rhetoric that would allow the republican coalition to incorporate millions of previously democratic voters yet nixon also failed spectacularly his economic policies were just a series of improvisations that lacked any long term vision he toyed with the idea of far reaching reforms in relation to poverty with his tepid support for moynihan s family assistance plan but he was unwilling to invest the political in foreign policy he and kissinger had elements of a bold vision but it was undermined by their inability to accept the reality of the us defeat in vietnam and of course nixon crowned these failures by the systematic abuse of executive power it is difficult to exaggerate the cumulative impact on business of the political missteps by johnson and nixon between and the fact that neither against the multiple problems that the united states faced led to an agonizing reassessment of their assumptions about us politics they decided in short that the vital center could not hold and that they needed to move away from their support for big government politicians of both parties this disillusionment coincided with the collapse of the bipartisan foreign policy period to be sure much of us foreign policy in the and remained bipartisan but it was no longer linked in the same way with a cohesive foreign policy establishment with the erosion of these bridging institutions business leaders were now free to form new political coalitions in the early a resurgent free market right was in place to capitalize failures of both johnson and nixon they were both incarnations of a statist ideology that rejected the fundamental truth that the path to prosperity and freedom was through greater reliance on market forces whether the issue was energy policy welfare policy the crisis of bretton woods or domestic inflation the free market right had a powerful story that saw the current crises as an inevitable consequence of failed liberal assumptions policies that restored the natural order of self regulating the business community s fears further increased the attraction of the right s arguments the radicalization of the had created broad distrust of business and the consumerist and environmentalist critiques of standard business practices were becoming increasingly influential the mcgovern wing of the democratic party was perceived as antibusiness and likely to unleash new it ever achieved power in hence corporate liberalism experienced a spectacular decline and most of the business community entered enthusiastically into an alliance with the republican right that promised tax cuts deregulation and smaller government but what is striking about the rhetoric of business conservatism from the onward is the unrelenting refusal to take responsibility for any of society s problems rigid government regulators rapacious unions and a culture that fails to understand the heroic sacrifices of those who toiled to make profits but just when business leaders were almost unanimously adopting this rhetoric it was apparent that many of the largest us corporations had become rigidly bureaucratic significantly overstaffed and unable to respond swiftly to changes in the the poster child of this weakness was the
known both on and off campus according to an article s description of the fourth year students at university of toronto miss madge robertson is perhaps the best known of the ladies she is a nice looking brunette and quite young in appearance her talents are most versatile in modern languages she has stood well since her first year outside her course she is best known for her blue stocking proclivities exist examples remain of her journalistic offerings both opinion pieces and poetry in an article entitled the higher education published in the campus newspaper greta wrote to defend women s participation in post secondary institutions she was responding to an article published in an earlier issue of the varsity where a male student had satirically presented female students as frivolous and flirtatious arguing that women had no place on campus it is somewhat unusual she of the varsity where a male student had satirically presented female students as frivolous and flirtatious arguing that women had no place on campus it is somewhat unusual she began to offer views on co education but i flatter myself i have some original theories to advance and for such i may be pardoned robertson s retort is one of the earliest examples of her support for the women s movement and a clear indication of the new woman principles that informed experiences in the heated exchange robertson was not only defending higher education for women but she was justifying her own place on campus while she was a student at the university of toronto robertson was heavily involved in the modern languages club members of the club made a deliberate attempt to develop a distinctly canadian literature and literary culture by encouraging one another to be original in their compositions rather than imitative touting the importance home grown canadian creative efforts proponents of this view told readers of the varsity if canada is ever going to have a national literature our topics should be canadian and our treatment of them individual and characteristic let us be ourselves and not europe or realizing this goal would be complicated because many aspiring canadian writers sojourned instead to the united states after graduation robertson worked as a writer for numerous periodicals both in the united states in at the age of within just two years of her graduation robertson assumed the editorship of the pictorial weekly a toronto based women s interest magazine with a circulation of over copies per week the publication included features on marriage child rearing religion homemaking cooking literature leisure society news and health issues from february until july robertson vetted other journalists work and also wrote her own weekly feature articles for the paper robertson exerted control over the content and tone of the ladies pictorial weekly which translated into a great deal of cultural influence for a young female professional in canada as journalists women could essentially write about any topic they wished and this provided them a certain degree of freedom whether their work was published however usually depended entirely on the male editors who evaluated their writing a woman editing a periodical robertson was fortunate to bypass male censorship seemingly robertson had a high degree of freedom in editing the pictorial but to ensure the survival of the publication she also had to consider factors such as raising funds through the sale of copies and advertisement space because not all of her readers were new women robertson recognized that her own beliefs and those of some of her readers were not the same meaning that she had to write and edit she wanted to present her own ideas without offending more conservative readers the same may be said of those who advertised with the magazine robertson likely realized that they advertised within women s interest magazines because they recognized that females were the primary consumers within canadian households and wanted to reach that target market not because they wanted to support women s rights given these business considerations robertson had to assume an air of victorian in effect robertson s work as editor was a delicate balancing act where she was careful to edit and write articles for the pictorial which incorporated her own new woman ideas yet still reflected victorian gender norms this tension between her own convictions and some readers more conservative preferences is clearly demonstrated in articles from the pictorial and the globe pertaining to three themes higher education for women women and work and love and marriage women and in the varsity as she firmly stated that women belonged in institutions of higher education she also argued that it was inexcusable that modern women be expected to put household duties above education is a human being then merely a machine whose chief use is to mend clothing and sew buttons shall a bit of mending be exalted before a thousand other duties privileges or opportunities of life there are plenty of other things to be done by an intelligent girl to sew buttons shall a bit of mending be exalted before a thousand other duties privileges or opportunities of life there are plenty of other things to be done by an intelligent girl to further substantiate her argument robertson claimed that have fallen on times when the force of educated women is largely needed in the higher ministrations of life she must become a home keeper not a house keeper there is a vast difference or if she is the life of art or professions or her best strength must go to her especial work significantly robertson argued for higher education for women while asserting an apparent contradiction namely that women s place in life should lie primarily within the home an idea which would likely please her more conservative readers yet by listing various possible vocations for women outside the home robertson could also extend the pictorial s appeal to new woman readers as ann ardis has suggested many new woman writers robertson
place in a business context where safety measures must be evaluated as to their technical feasibility and their costs and benefits thus the likelihood of risk harm liability and other loss consequences needs to be considered the company in conjunction with other factors such as the availability of affordable insurance investor interests competitive pressures productivity and profitability some of these factors may outweigh or blunt the safety forcing effect of liability on product and process design in the business decision context with this in mind we now discuss the uncertainties and vagaries of tort liability some national differences and subsequently review the competing considerations in the business decision process liability and injurious products negligence negligence theory has been invoked in a multitude of cases across many nations in which workers and consumers were harmed as a consequence of using a product as the manufacturer intended or harmed as bystanders to another person s use of the product in addition courts increasingly find that harm arising from misuse of a product is also compensable when the type of misuse was common and known to the company on the other hand courts frequently deny the claimant if the harm was caused by a product whose dangerous feature is common knowledge and was obvious to the user all cases in which a manufacturer of an injurious product has been held liable for harm due to negligence in both the usa and the eu have been based on the finding that the injurious because it was defectively manufactured or defectively designed or defectively presented to customers and users in that it lacked the warnings and instructions needed to assure its safe use for its intended purpose a defectively made product is generally one that the manufacturer sells without realizing that the product fails to meet its own design specifications the injured claimant will need to prove negligence in the manufacturing process such as inadvertent use of material or components a flaw in production or assemblage or inadequate quality control a defectively designed product is a more complex concept and there is probably no simple and succinct way of defining it generally one can say that it pertains to a product with a design feature that makes the product unsafe for its intended function during its when used under foreseeable circumstances the design feature may relate for example to its operational or functional characteristics the quality of the materials or components specified by the maker its controls or its safeguards against misuse a technologically sophisticated product presents the most difficulty for the claimant because it calls for considerable and costly expertise to prove that any of such features were designed by the manufacturer with insufficient the safety of users or bystanders and that such a feature was the main cause of the injurious result thus it must be proven that the manufacturer s conceptualization of the product embodied in its design specifications was flawed in a manner which was not sufficiently mitigated by the warnings and safe use instructions it provided to purchasers and users to prevent superficial or excessive claims of design defect many courts now require that an alternative design of functional equivalence was available to the manufacturer was technically and economically feasible for the company to make would have attracted the same purchasers and would have avoided the harm a defectively presented product is generally one that cannot be safely used as intended because it is not accompanied by sufficient warnings to the foreseeable user about its hazardous store and dispose of the product it is by far the most common type of product liability claim because it is easy to make and courts have been quite receptive to arguments that the warnings and instructions that had been provided by the manufacturer were insufficiently informative or failed to attract the user s attention with the increase in migrants to developed nations who are not literate in the national language courts increasingly find a company s warnings or for not being presented in universal symbols or multiple languages when it was foreseeable that such persons were at risk and could only be effectively informed by these means it is generally assumed that manufacturers prefer to address a hazardous product problem by amplifying warnings and instructions rather than by doing more costly design change in order to prevent harms and liability claims claiming harm from using or being exposed to an injurious product the majority of state tort law systems in the usa have adopted section of the restatement of torts which provides that one who sells a product in a defective condition unreasonably dangerous to the user or consumer or to his property is subject to liability for physical harm thereby caused to the ultimate user or consumer or to his property and that this rule applies even if the seller has exercised the preparation and sale of his product and the user or consumer has not bought the product from or entered into any contractual relation with the seller many state courts have extended the rule to bystanders and have developed other modifications including some however which create exceptions or defences to the disadvantage of the claimant thus strict liability focuses on the dangerous condition of the product and does not require that the claimant prove behavioral the manufacturer in the eu the directive on liability for defective products requires that member nations bring their laws into conformity with this directive s mandate for strict liability a harmonization process which is still ongoing articles i iv and vi of the directive provide for strict liability the producer shall be liable for damage caused by a defect in his product the injured person shall be required to prove the damage the defect and defect and damage and a product is defective when it does not provide the safety which a person is entitled to expect taking all circumstances into account but the directive precludes strict liability for product defects that were not discoverable due to the state of scientific and technical knowledge when the product was sold and for product defects that were due to company compliance with mandatory government regulations
the transformation of the way artists rose to fame in the nineteenth century and also have imposed questions on the succeeding story in the twentieth century an era in which art institutions developed to the point of dominating the was there any relationship between these new art institutions and the mechanisms of achieving fame moreover as the publishing industry is still a predominant topic in art institutional discourse a research gap is evident in relation to other categories of art institutions such as art galleries museums exhibitions art schools and art clubs in comparison to the efficiency of the publishing did there emerge any new more powerful art institution in the twentieth century this research makes use of the art school which has attracted limited scholarly attention as a new medium within which to explore these questions it looks at the first half of the history of the shanghai art school the most important private art school in the republican period and focuses on the school s engagement with mechanisms of creating artistic it argues played a significant role in effectively and rapidly creating a group of famous artists and thus contributed to the development of artistic fame in the shanghai art world this argument is to be supported by evidence in two aspects the first section shows that the school provided effective short cuts towards the achievement of celebrity such as promoting the upward social mobility of artists with its education and reputation increasing artists group effect the second section casts light on the transformation of artistic criteria in chinese painting as concomitant to that of the meaning of fame to further demonstrate the powerful influence of the school in its engagement with fostering artistic celebrity the short cuts toward celebrity the paths modern art institutions provided for artists to achieve fame in a group which created an impression of a community however the efficiency of the path offered by the publishing industry can be dwarfed dramatically by that provided by the shanghai art school during the republican period the following text will demonstrate the influence of the school with descriptions of three short cuts to celebrity upward social mobility was a new path towards celebrity created by within the existing paths of public exposure and the group effect all three testify to the school as a new and powerful agent in creating artistic celebrities one major short cut offered by the School was the promotion of artists upward social mobility with the school s education and reputation this was first created by the school s particular geographic location in shanghai a city at the center of the chinese art world as marie writes the growth of the great coastal cities resulted essentially from people the towns from the countryside the newly prospering city of shanghai opened up new horizons for the influx of people from other provinces among whom were artists they were able to achieve national celebrity if they could establish themselves in the shanghai art scene huang shiquan observed in the late nineteenth century the calligraphers and painters from different provinces who have gained a reputation from their art in shanghai numbered upwards continued in the first half of the twentieth century li ximou an official in the shanghai education bureau wrote in the preface to the art year book shanghai with its convenient traffic is attracting modern intellectuals she holds the leading position in culture education science politics and commerce in the field of art different painting clans and theories are flourishing in shanghai the influence of origin of new art in china artists who come from other provinces with artistic skills all achieve their fame and gain recognition in the market this situation is really similar to that in rome as the capital of italy and paris as the capital of shanghai meant both hope and opportunity for ambitious artists throughout students when he finished teaching some of his guangzhou students followed him to shanghai because shanghai is the cultural center of china the environment for art studies is far better than that in secondly upward social mobility is one effect caused by school education and this was also true with the shanghai art as the oldest and biggest art school in shanghai any relationship with the school teaching the school can be observed through cases of both students and teachers a certificate from the school was a solid foundation for students to start their art related careers and was also a stepping stone toward being accepted by the art world this was particularly true for non local students who wished to find a job in their hometowns according to chen baoyi when the school was first established the students were a mixture of both local shanghai students and those from provinces in most students in the school came from inland china to study western style painting or art education the majority of them went back to take up art teaching posts in middle schools in addition some graduates founded their own art schools for example liu qiuren a zhejiang student who graduated from the school set up his private zhejiang art school in hangzhou which existed for three their hometowns suggesting that they were accepted as members by the local art circle wang yachen recorded several art exhibitions of this kind in the early one was the second young artists exhibition in jiangsu showing eighteen graduates works the other was held by the association of fellow provincials from wuxi exhibiting around sixty paintings career because its high reputation assisted graduates in pursuing further studies in other art schools in china or foreign countries when zhou duo a student in the research institute of the school and later a member of the storm society decided to continue his studies in japan the school delivered a letter to the education ministry other students such as yan liang and ma duanyu with the assistance of the school also gained overseas study ministry the school also helped students to contact foreign consuls one letter signed by the acting principal
variety of existing paths and provided adequate opportunities for artists to gain public exposure in the twentieth century this short cut was first caused by the inter dependent relationship school and its artists since the school s reputation relied heavily upon the qualifications of its teaching staff it was important on the one hand for the school to employ well known artists so that it could attract prosperous students this meant that even if its employees were anonymous as explained in the first section it had to make them look famous on the other hand when the school advertised these artists for its the school instructors names were mentioned in its advertisements simply such as instructors in the early a brief introduction of their academic background was given such as li chaoshi who returned from france jiang xin zhou qinhao graduated from the tokyo art later advertisements included more information to introduce artists for instance one piece of news about li yishi read li yishi arrived at the school to take up the post li studied at glasgow university for many years upon his return he was appointed as a professor at peking university and director of the western painting department at the beijing art school another piece of news about fan xinqiong read the shanghai art school recently engaged the female artist fan and lyon art academy her works were exhibited many times in paris at international art exhibitions winning high commendations in europe in when teng gu was awarded a ph degree in germany the shanghai art school actively advertised this news according to the school diary the news about teng was mailed to the chief editors of several newspapers in the school journal of yishu xunkan the article teng gu is awarded the art ex professor at the shanghai art school teng gu went to europe to study art history in he passed the oral defense conducted by experts from different fields such as philosophy art history archeology and history and was recently formally awarded the doctoral degree the general grade is distinction berlin university has a rather strict examination system for art history and archeology ph programs usually after five to six or even students are still ph candidates while it only took dr teng two to three years to gain the degree moreover this is an unprecedented international honor for china dr teng has decided to come back to china and will continue his teaching at the shanghai art school the school also helped artists to publish their paintings and announce their prices to the public according to the school diary in the principal s office in the school invited celebrities onto its board such as wang yiting jing ziyuan chen shuren and wu tie cheng to jointly introduce their new art teacher liang and this news was sent to the newspaper for in addition the school regularly issued press advertisements regarding internal issues in which artists names frequently appeared such as the name list of the teaching staff for summer school courses the authors in the latest issue of the school journal participants in the school exhibition and the school s commencements in contrast to the single medium of the publication industry the school provided various modem media to expose artists names to the public such as exhibitions publications and art club activities upon joining the school both teachers and students works were naturally admitted to various art exhibitions including the school achievement art exhibitions each semester outdoor life drawing trip exhibitions and school anniversary exhibitions for instance it was reported that the outdoor life drawing trip exhibition in displayed eighteen oil paintings by li chaoshi zhou qinhao cheng xubai and qian ding and about ten watercolor paintings by liu haisu wang yachen and wang moreover as a famous school in the art center of shanghai the school was often invited to attend art exhibitions outside shanghai for instance during the four months three art exhibition invitations from other provinces one letter praised the school s achievements and invited its teachers and students to exhibit their works in the tianjin art another letter from an art exhibition for flood relief in northern jiangsu province read the excellence of the artworks in your school is well known if you could attend this exhibition your works would be widely acclaimed by the the school also received accolades for its education from the national education exhibition which also invited the school to participate in the exhibition by promising a special room to display facilities and artworks of the shanghai art school new graduates such as wan guchan and ni yide and young teachers like xu weibang wu renwen gu jiuhong and zhu zhijian exhibited their artworks at the tianjin furthermore artists were also given the opportunity to show their in the world expo in philadelphia in the school sent fourteen artists works oversees most of which were guohua paintings among them were four ink paintings of chrysanthemums lotus loquats and plantains by xie gongzhan pan tianshou a young artist who at that time had only worked for one year at the school submitted three finger paintings sometimes the school would send school artworks to international institutions as gifts in for example twenty paintings were sent to international chinese library in by taking advantage of these paths artists were able to exhibit their art and promote their names to an international audience which in turn enhanced their reputations in addition to exhibitions publishing was another important path that the school offered for artists to gain frequent public exposure as school art education was a new and untouched research field in the early republican articles on their research although they differed in depth as academic writings they were all helpful in the sense that the artists fame was promoted one student s letter to zheng wuchang praised zheng highly as a master of both new and classical literary fields as well as that of painting
article is that there are important detrimental neighborhood effects that is that otherwise identical people living in different areas have different prospects the core problem in this literature is the identification of such a causal relationship given the selection mechanisms operating to assign poor people to poor neighborhoods our principal aim is to test whether the data are any influence of neighborhood while making as few parametric assumptions as possible and no exclusion restrictions in the context of a large scale representative observational study this article offers a number of significant advances relative to the literature first we exploit a data that is representative for britain that is longitudinal and has very local neighborhood characteristics people our neighborhoods are very local and are more likely to correspond to real neighborhoods than the ward or census tract units commonly used in other analyses this combination of attributes makes the data set extremely powerful we detail all this as our measure of neighborhood characteristics we follow the long tradition of using measures of disadvantage of the neighborhood population we analyze income trajectories over and year windows thus we address the extent to which future prospects are related to the nature of the individual s local neighborhood the panel gives us years of data for individuals and thus allows us to take dynamics more seriously than previous studies in this context our focus is on adults and the level and change in household income are our main outcome variables household income is of significant interest in its own net household income is the basis for standard measures of poverty and the relationship between poverty and place is the subject of a long standing research tradition but income also serves as a catch all for other neighborhood influences an individual s environment may influence her employment health marital status number of children and so on if present these influences are all likely to be reflected in income we do not condition on these intermediate factors so as to allow neighborhood the maximum influence thus we capture the total effect of area on an individual s prospects third rather than simply analyzing the mean income growth by neighborhood type we analyze the whole distribution and so can track large gainers and losers as well as average outcomes we use graphical procedures and quantile regression to characterize any changes in this distribution across neighborhood characteristics fourth we consider the appropriate definition of our data allow us to construct bespoke neighborhoods around individuals and to consider different spatial scales we compare the influence of characteristics of a very local definition of neighborhood with a broader definition this is usually ignored in other quantitative studies as neighborhood is defined just by the available data we also investigate the impact of neighboring neighborhoods on outcomes so for example what are the outcomes for a poor area nested within a better off area compared to those in a poor area in a wider poor area this appears to be a new contribution dietz notes that the standard neighborhood model assumes that no interaction occurs among neighborhoods thus neighborhoods with identical characteristics but dissimilar neighboring neighborhoods are considered equivalent we find a strong negative contemporaneous correlation between the level of income and the disadvantage of the neighborhood thus at least one of two mechanisms causality or sorting is working to generate this pattern moving on to the dynamic results our findings show no evidence of a negative relationship between neighborhood and subsequent income growth this is true for and year changes for almost all population groups and at different parts of the income growth distribution if anything the results show that the distribution of income growth is shifted up somewhat for individuals starting in poorer neighborhoods the modelling framework highlights the role of two factors in interpreting neighborhood influences the dynamic adjustment of income and the nature of the housing finance system particularly in responding to temporary income shocks in summary we argue that our results are not consistent with a substantial detrimental neighborhood effect framework section discusses the data in detail and section presents the results the final section offers some conclusions this is the british household panel survey the combination of the bhps with the neighborhood data has been used before by buck but he does not exploit the longitudinal element of the data that is key to our approach literature the excellent survey of the literature on neighborhood effects available in durlauf provide a lengthy overview instead we summarize durlauf s findings and highlight some of the issues most relevant to this article we also discuss in more detail some recent papers using similar data to ours for britain durlauf credits the work of wilson with a significant role in the resurgence of interest in neighborhoods manski also alludes by poverty and race and ethnicity the recognition of the long run persistence of spatially concentrated areas of poverty has also been important as has been the refinement of techniques theoretical analyses of neighborhood influences most relevant to this article are largely based on models of social interactions these are based on role model effects or peer group influences or in manski s interactions of expectations or preferences in our context this would mean that the observation of individuals with particular income growth paths changes the views of others on what was feasible in their current situation and that observation of individuals motivated by hard work and financial success or the reverse inspires similar preferences among others on neighborhood influences by the research methodology used the quasi experimental evidence provided principally by the gautreaux programme and the moving to opportunity demonstration is very useful in side stepping some of the identification problems associated with observational studies rosenbaum and others for gautreaux and katz et al ludwig et al and goering et al among others for mto detail the results similarly oreopoulos exploits the random assignment of children to housing projects in toronto durlauf notes that even the quasi experimental
the university of san marcos alonso de huerta the parish priest of huancabamba in the province of tarma juan de castromonte also from hua nuco and the seasoned preacher and extirpator of idolatries fernando de avendan among others vindicated the central quechua long discredited by the urged linguistic reforms toward creating a new standard that might integrate the dialectical diversity of the sierra through detailed archival research of missionary chinchaysuyu alan durston has documented the varying degrees of central lexicon and morphology in the quechua writings of these authors focusing primarily on castromonte s unpublished ritual romano en la lengua general quichua a pastoral guide for the language of the central sierra in the absence of an existing lexicon or grammar of the chinchaysuyu language the reformist texts adhered mainly to the terminology and syntax of the third council variant but incorporated new vocabulary and orthographical changes to create a southern central amalgam more attuned to the speech of their target audience as chief linguist at san marcos huerta published arte de la lengua quechua general which included a lesson chinchaysuyu to compensate for the lack of teaching materials in the central most striking is durston s discovery of certificates in quechua proficiency that reflect the grammarian s broadminded interpretation of the conciliar language requirement in for example huerta approved three priests for andean ministry not according to the candidates knowledge of the cuzco standard but for having demonstrated the custom and indians similar backing for central quechua appeared in works published outside the university in the prologue of his spanish quechua sermones de los misterios de nuestra santa fe cato lica avendan summed up the position of huerta and others of this quechua speaking clerical faction it is my position that in this archbishopric preaching should be done principally this is the most genuine and up to date translation not the language of cuzco that the learned have introduced with the result that the people do not understand them such views confirmed the testimonies of indigenous officials in clear opposition to the statements of the learned but ultimately misinformed lawmakers of the viceregal capital in similar fashion the heated debate over the rights of european descendants and other dignitarial offices of the church hinged upon the divisive issue of language practice in the lima archdiocese according to bernard lavalle the andean parish was a principal site of spanish creole conflict a key factor of this discord being the affinity of quechua speaking creoles with the indigenous peoples and the discrimination that peruvian born clerics experienced from spanish peninsulares who often blocked their appointments to diocesan posts statements of american letrados of lima s secular government administration add weight to lavalle s contention throughout the seventeenth century lawyers of the royal audiencia and chanciller a of lima juan ortiz de cervantes gutierre velazquez de ovando zarate and pedro de bolvar de la redonda to name a few directed memoriales to the spanish crown that affirmed the superiority of in as procurador general of peru at the court of king philip iii the lima native ortiz de cervantes argued in favor of creole parish appointments attributing the survival of native idolatries in his home district to the problem of linguistic ignorance no one can compete with the american born clergy because the ones native to the lima region know the languages and customs of the indians their rites and the ancient idolatries which had been concealed from the bishops and priests in the province of lima have now been discovered by the ecclesiastics who were born there and the visitadores who go there regularly to preach the letrado s call for an improved clergy invoked the dangers of traditional native religiosity but for reasons different from those articulated at the third provincial council a stunning implication of ortiz de cervantes s that now at the start of the metropolitan see s unyielding anti idolatry crusade the breakdown of evangelization could be traced to the spanish priests lack of schooling in the language and customs of the central highlands to rephrase this argument in linguistic terms the chinchaysuyu alternative did not fuel the practice of ancient superstitions but instead offered a potential solution to the threats they posed advocacy of central quechua by priests and audiencia officials or implicit did not lead to the creation of a solely chinchaysuyu catechism or raise the variant s status to the category of lingua franca as evidenced by the publication history of contemporary native language literature books of religious instruction in cuzco based quechua proliferated at the start of villago mez s tenure as the archbishop of lima and the trilingual catechisms of the third council remained the principal authorized books of indoctrination in viceroyalty through the eighteenth however the emergence of church and viceregal authorities whose reformist ideas on language dovetailed with the testimonies of native officials tempers a flawed yet enduring image of colonial religious history one of european priests joined in hostile conflict with headstrong natives spanish and indigenous views on language were neither harmonious nor absolute but the exchange between clergymen secular and native assistants signals a mutual dependency that furthered the re evaluation of existing language policies indigenous witnesses statements confirm the profound resonance of specific clerical and royal concerns about the conduct of missionary activity and help us to recognize the fissure within the church establishment on the central issue of language practice in the central highland region pleading one s case before the archive parishioners due primarily to the clergy s lack of competency in the regional forms of quechua consider for example guaman poma s mocking diatribes against the ruinous state of native language religious instruction in one satirical rendering of a priest s quechua homily the andean writer alleged he knows only four words bring the horse do nt eat go see the priest where are the single women where are the girls bring them to ayala as can be gathered from this portrait
per eq they represent the actual observations that are compared with the cutoff values as the number of samples and the significance level remain the same for all cases the cutoff is determined at throughout having all an actual difference in the total hourly cost caused by the residual value the values in table indicate the probability of obtaining a test statistic at least as extreme as the actual one if the null hypothesis were true in other words values as small as the calculated ones indicate that it consistently is highly unlikely that the null hypothesis no difference due to residual value were true the significance level and in all cases is smaller than in summary statistical evidence has been found that for all examined cases and equipment types the residual value alone has a significant impact on the total owning and operating costs when all other input values are left equal conclusion been identified as being assessed with rules of thumb whose overly simplifying assumptions do not consider any potentially influential factors beyond equipment age residual value has been found to play a measurable role in the owning and operating cost calculation for different types of heavy construction equipment among the types examined were articulated trucks medium dozers small excavators and track loaders in minimum costs between considering residual value versus not considering it and can have an even stronger influence on the annual use and age at which such minimum costs occur a statistical test was performed on all cases for the examined equipment types all differences were found to be statistically significant it is therefore recommended to always consider residual value at the best possible level of knowledge when operating construction equipment currently equipment managers should use historical data of their own company s fleet or contact the distributors of the respective equipment manufacturers for relevant information further research into the exact nature and behavior of the residual value and its possible determinants such as eg equipment may provide a residual value prediction model based on actual market data comparison of physical properties between treated and untreated bauxite residue mud abstract dry stacking is an improved method of storing bauxite residue mud a by product of the bayer process in the alumina industry stability of the residue deposit reducing the costs associated with the construction of impoundment areas minimizing the land area exposed to the residue mud also reduces the possibility of groundwater contamination the stored residue is alkaline and carries the potential for environmental impacts over the long term carbonation is being evaluated at alcoa world alumina australia s alcoa s kwinana refinery in western australia as a means of neutralizing residue alkalinity this paper details the physical characteristics exhibited by bauxite residue following treatment with carbonation and or the addition of bitterns the impact of residue carbonation and bitterns addition on the initial drainage and drying behavior of bauxite residues was evaluated the long term consolidation properties of the residues and the impact of these chemical treatments on the overall stability of the deposit was also determined australia produces approximately two tons of residue to every ton of alumina when processed the residue consists of a sand sized fraction and a mud fraction with a nominal split between the two size fractions of the large volumes of residue to be stored require a considerable area of land and incur significant costs through the construction not effective as bauxite residue is alkaline conventional wet tailings storage has been replaced over the last years by a process developed by alcoa called dry stacking fig the sand fraction of the residue is used to construct perimeter walls and is also included at the base of the deposit to aid drainage of the stacked material the mud fraction is thickened to produce dense slurry which is distributed as a thin layer drainage and solar drying the residue stockpile can be constructed as a progressive stack avoiding the need for full perimeter dykes cooling and elias benefits of dry stacking include an increase in overall deposit density decreasing total deposit volume and the ability to increase the deposit height without compromising the overall structural integrity of the deposit as dry stacking requires less land contamination improved drainage within the stack also significantly reduces the risk of groundwater contamination rehabilitation of the completed stack is easier due to the increased stability of the deposit a major objective of any residue operation is to minimize the time a layer of slurry requires to reach a minimum strength as this minimizes both the area required for the overall deposition were extensively tested for a number of years after the introduction of dry stacking cooling and elias and these data have been used during this investigation to compare with and validate the current results alcoa has also investigated a range of methods of neutralizing the alkaline bauxite residue mud to further reduce environmental risks associated with its storage carbonation the addition of carbon however tests undertaken at alcoa s kwinana refinery in cooling et al have shown that solid forms of the alkalinity are not fully treated by carbonation resulting in a higher than desirable hydrogen ion concentration ph in the final mud deposit alcoa has also investigated the addition of a seawater concentrate bitterns to the slurry after carbonation magnesium salts in the bitterns help buffer the alkalinity associated helping to maintain a lower residue ph early tests completed by alcoa showed that additives used to neutralize the bauxite residue mud have an impact on the physical properties of the material carbonated mud samples mm thick were shown to develop yield strength sufficient to support an overlying layer in half the time of untreated mud however these experiments did not reflect normal stacking processes occur in a full scale dry stacking operation as part of the assessment of the different treatment processes being evaluated by long term consolidation and drainage properties must be assessed to select
and of the continua appear in figure sibilant continuum the usual approach for synthesizing a s continuum is to vary formant frequencies for example to shift from a value typical for to a higher value that is typical of the lowest frication excited resonance of s however the the contrast in formant amplitudes results from a difference in the formants that are affiliated with the front cavity and the back cavity acoustic theory predicts that the lowest front cavity resonance for will be while the lowest front cavity resonance for s will be used to synthesize our s continuum was to vary formant amplitudes rather than formant frequencies in the first stage of sibilant synthesis segments were synthesized to match the sibilant portions of the natural utterances said and shed the klatt formant synthesizer was used again because the sound source was the frication source the synthesizer was used in parallel mode in that mode formant amplitude is controlled by the formants the synthesized sibilants s and were matched to the natural sibilants by adjusting the formant frequency and amplitude values until the experimenter judged that the power spectrum of the synthesized sibilant was a good match to that of the natural the natural sibilants in the second stage of sibilant synthesis the synthesizer parameters for s and were adjusted to create endpoint stimuli that differed only in this adjustment involved changing to have the same values for both sibilants only minor adjustments were necessary and informal listening tests confirmed that by interpolating the amplitudes of that is the parameters seven intermediate stimuli were created the step size between stimuli was not linear for two reasons first the synthesizer required integer values for the parameters therefore a strictly linear interpolation was not possible second pilot tests showed that normal hearing participants perceived more than half the stimuli as s therefore half the stimuli as s and half as in addition to the seven intermediate stimuli two additional stimuli were added at each end of the continuum to extend beyond the parameter values of s and for some of the formants the step sizes used for these additional stimuli were significantly larger than those used for the intermediate stimuli in order for them used are summarized in table in the last stage of sibilant synthesis a final ed was excised from one of the natural tokens of said and shed and that single segment was concatenated with all of the stimuli of the sibilant continuum to create the said shed continuum this concatenation into the following vowel furthermore there is usually a transition region with very low amplitude between unvoiced sibilants and a following vowel so there were no issues of waveform discontinuities in addition the use of the same formant frequencies for both s and simplified the matchup between the synthesized sibilants and the natural vowel informal listening speech perception in their speech production we have presented stimuli derived from a female speaker to female participants and stimuli derived from a male speaker to the male participants we did this in order to approximate the conditions of self hearing associated with implant users produced contrasts we found that contrast when produced we have continued the practice of gender matching in the labeling discrimination and goodness rating tasks in the present study participant tasks seven cochlear implant users served individually in sessions conducted approximately month after activation processor activation and initial tuning year was judged sufficiently long after activation to observe effects of prosthesis use based on our prior studies with vowels and sibilants only one time sample was elicited from the normal hearing controls tasks with natural stimuli and finally at year post activation the normal hearing speakers also took the test once the details of method and results have been given elsewhere briefly listeners were asked to choose the syllable they heard by clicking on an orthographic version displayed on a computer monitor the program then proceeded to present the next stimulus implant in the session prior to implant activation but in the sessions at month and year post activation they used only their cochlear implants their vowel recognition scores averaged pre implant and year post implant consonant recognition scores were respectively pre and post hearing and hearing impaired participants also labeled because the tasks in this experiment were accompanied in each experimental session by other tasks for other experiments they were often spread out over more than one session in the month time sample implant users typically completed these three tasks and phoneme recognition in two sessions days apart in the year sample the tasks were completed in a computer monitor and mouse to register whether the stimulus presented was boot or beet when labeling stimuli from the vowel continuum or said or shed when labeling the sibilant stimuli in each labeling session the participant heard repetitions of each of the stimuli in a continuum arranged in random order the presentation of the j th ant s labeling function and the slope of the function was determined in the region of the stimulus number closest to the was labeled the category boundary discrimination a nabx paradigm was used to measure implant users within category discrimination after year s experience with their prostheses two step comparisons and three step comparisons each of these comparisons was presented in four sequences to illustrate using stimuli and the interstimulus interval was s and the program awaited the listener s response before presenting the next triad after each triad was presented the participant used the computer mouse to indicate whether the third stimulus for the illustrative example just cited the correct responses would be respectively a and a there were repetitions of each triad in quasi random order with the restriction to reduce context effects that the last stimulus in a triad was never the same as the first stimulus in the following triad the vowel and sibilant discrimination tasks were conducted in separate sessions triads involving that participant s category boundary stimulus were converted to d following the procedure of macmillan and creelman then these values of d were pooled over one two
sense disadvantage these studies seem to provide experimental support to the theoretically motivated differentiation of lexical ambiguity into homonymy and polysemy nevertheless a further distinction of polysemy based on theoretical linguistics is possible in particular polysemy is further divided into two types which are basically motivated by two distinct figures of speech namely metonymy in metaphor a relation of analogy holds between the senses of the word and the basic sense is literal whereas the secondary sense is figurative for example the ambiguous word lip has the literal basic sense organ of the body and the figurative secondary sense edge of a vessel in metonymy a relation of contiguity or connectedness holds between the senses of the word it is claimed that metonymically motivated polysemy respects the usual notion of which is the ability of a word to have several distinct but related meanings in metonymic polysemy both the basic and the secondary senses are literal for example the ambiguous word rabbit has the literal basic sense referring to the animal and the literal secondary sense of the meat of that animal drawing on the observation that homonymy and polysemy are relative concepts it seems that some types of metaphorically motivated polysemy are on the other hand metonymically motivated polysemy is a step further away from homonymy thus polysemy is distinguished into regular and irregular a formal definition of regular polysemy holds that polysemy of a word a with the meanings ai and aj is called regular if in the given language there exists at least one other word with the meanings bi and bj which are semantically each other in exactly the same way as ai and aj and if ai and bi aj and bj are nonsynonymous for example nouns with the meaning container also have the meaning content like bottle in the sentences john broke the bottle and john drank the whole bottle on the other hand polysemy is irregular if the distinction of the meaning between ai and aj is not attested in any other word of the language for example the word star in the sentences our a star and madonna is a star this is also attested in sets of words like body parts that can be used to refer to objects the relations are not predictable so the metaphorical sense of mouth for example cannot be predicted on the basis of the knowledge that the metaphorical sense of hand refers to a part of a clock or watch regularity thus seems to be a feature of metonymical transfers whereas irregular polysemy is more typical however the distinction between homonymy and polysemy is not clear cut rather it seems to be a matter of a continuum from pure homonymy to pure polysemy consistent with the observation that homonymy and polysemy are relative concepts metaphorical polysemy seems to be somewhere in the middle between pure homonymy and pure polysemy there is only a single study to date that distinction within polysemy and directly compared homonymous and polysemous words in context investigating their processing and representation patterns the three types of ambiguous words were used in a cross modal lexical decision task klepousniotou presented sentences auditorily that biased either the dominant or the of homonymous and polysemous words immediately following the sentence primes a target was visually presented for lexical decision targets were either homonymous or polysemous words unrelated control words or non words differences were found among the three types of ambiguous words in particular polysemous words with metonymic extensions demonstrated stronger facilitation effects and were processed significantly faster than homonymous words while with metaphorical extensions fell somewhere between metonymy and homonymy and did not differ statistically from either based on these results klepousniotou suggested that the processing differences could indicate representational differences depending on the type of ambiguity that the words exhibit homonymous words showed longer reaction times possibly because their multiple unrelated meanings were competing thus slowing the activation process could be seen as having several distinct mental representations in the mental lexicon polysemous words on the other hand and in particular metonymies were processed significantly faster presumably because there was no meaning competition this finding could indicate that for metonymous words there is only a single mental representation specified for the basic sense of the word assigning it a general semantic value in this investigation then the processing advantage was confined words with multiple closely related senses these findings provide preliminary evidence that homonymy and polysemy rely on distinct underlying processing mechanisms that probably reflect differences in their representation homonymy seems to rely on the process of sense selection whereby the different meanings of the word are activated by being chosen from a pre existing exhaustive list of senses polysemy on the other hand seems to rely on the activation of a basic sense from which the extended senses are created possibly by means of lexical rules given these findings that reveal processing differences among homonymy metaphorical polysemy and metonymic polysemy in sentential contexts it is important to investigate their processing in isolation in order to explore further the effects of multiple unrelated meanings versus those of multiple related senses in the processing of study the present study thus aims to identify further and clarify the source of the processing advantage found in previous lexical decision studies for words with multiple meanings based on the hypothesis that sense relatedness drives the processing advantage in word recognition the present study using two simple lexical decision experiments addressed the if sense relatedness produces the processing advantage is this advantage found for both types of polysemy based on the hypothesis that sense relatedness produces the processing advantage observed for ambiguous words it was predicted that in general ambiguous words with multiple related senses would be processed faster than unambiguous control words matched for frequency nevertheless it was expected that between metonymy and metaphor in particular metonymous words were expected to show a more robust processing advantage relative to unambiguous control words than metaphorical words although
behavior and more generally to the behavioral modernity debate archaeological context the open air middle paleolithic site of molodova i forms part of a cluster of mousterian sites along the southern bank of the dnestr river in the ukraine there are few published dates for molodova but layer iv from the site has been dated by radiocarbon to more than bp molodova i was direction of the late a chernysch from the s through the s these excavations resulted in large horizontal exposures of mousterian artifacts and faunal remains in layer iv of molodova i for instance approximately square meters were exposed this excavation strategy facilitates the study of activity synchrony and hominin use of space which may have been more complex during the middle speth it should be noted that while no neanderthal remains have been found at molodova i it is assumed that these hominins were the occupants of the site and responsible for the mousterian assemblages uncovered there layer iv is best known for its traces of dwelling structures in this layer are several large rings constructed mainly of mammoth bones that are thought dense concentrations of artifacts and faunal remains and contain hearths the exact nature of these structures remains controversial however as they have been interpreted in numerous ways including natural accumulations as the result of slope wash hunting blinds similar to ones documented in ethnographic contexts wind breaks terrestrial nests and as centrifugal living structures kolen uses the term centrifugal because he believes they are constructed from the inside outward by pushing piles of debris out of the center toward the sides to make spaces to live in living because neanderthals are not just sleeping in these spaces which distinguishes them from nests including chimpanzee like day nests and structures because they are more permanent than nests he argues that these structures are never finished but that they are constantly modified and remodeled stringer and gamble further argue that the molodova structures lack a symbolic dimension and thus differ fundamentally from habitation features found at upper paleolithic open air village complexes for example at kostenki i in russia excavators uncovered two rows of hearths running down the center of a circle of semi subterranean dwelling structures numerous storage pits were associated with these dwellings several of the pits contained ochre and carved these researchers suggest that it was not until the upper paleolithic that architecture embodied cultural symbolic behavior rather than purely expedient survival behavior while the nature and meaning of the mammoth bone rings at molodova i remain equivocal it is possible that other evidence for neanderthal symboling behavior exists at this site it is within this context that we initiated a study of putative symbolic artifacts from layer iv location of middle paleolithic site molodova fig historic photograph of excavators working at molodova layer iv fig historic photograph of excavations at molodova layer iv methodology each specimen was examined with a reflecting light microscope in order to check its state of preservation and identify anthropogenic and natural traces of rbs resin were observed with a scanning electron microscope transparent replicas obtained using the same replication technique were also observed and photographed digitally with a nikon coolpix camera in transmitted light through a wild stereomicroscope the faunal collection from molodova i layer iv two to three thousand faunal remains were collected from layer iv and thus molodova i as klein notes is often described as a source of evidence for early symboling behavior among neanderthals we were unable to examine the entire faunal collection from layer iv as portions of it are distributed among a number of museums throughout the ukraine in plaster while other pieces have been inadvertently lost or discarded it is also important to note that many of the remains from smaller species were not recovered during the excavation this situation may have resulted in a significant overrepresentation of mammoth bones in the assemblage we examined identifiable pieces from layer iv including all bones that of the excavated assemblage in our sample mammoth remains comprise the bone assemblage while horses account for roughly bison the remaining accounted for by several species including reindeer in terms of skeletal elements ribs account for our sample long bones pelves it should be noted that we did not record the minimum number of skeletal units therefore the percentage of ribs in our the faunal sample available to us we were able to identify at least four factors that influenced the character of the faunal assemblage from layer iv first some of the bones were affected by erosional processes many of the bones were heavily weathered and our sample exhibited root marks second some of the markings on the bone were the result of carnivore activity specifically the bones bear traces of carnivore pitting puncturing and a few exhibited crenulated edges as a result of carnivore gnawing it is clear from our observations that large carnivores probably wolves were involved in at least the displacement if not the accumulation of the bone assemblage from layer iv third up to the bones have hominin cutmarks on them interestingly individual bones exhibited either cutmarks or carnivore traces or no traces at all but never both cutmarks and gnaw marks on the same by plant roots on bone from faunal assemblage at molodova fig example of marks left on a mammoth femoral head by carnivore gnawing known as scoring large carnivores played a significant role in the displacement and possibly the accumulation of faunal remains at molodova i fourth the faunal collection exhibits other examples of excavation induced trauma for instance more than half of the bones exhibit shovel marks the surface of the bones it is possible that the bones may have been just below the excavated surface and that excavators walked over them during the process of excavation furthermore close to the remains in our sample have post depositional breaks while only breaks that were made when the bone was fresh other post depositional transformations to the bone include the use of
of agreement which is the cumulative abnormal return in response to a cash acquisition announcement in the months prior to the equity issue with a higher return signifying greater in columns through we present our results using this proxy the coefficient on car from a is consistently positive but only significant in two of the three specifications the lack of significance is due in part to the significant correlation between this variable and the control variable firm size when we is positive and significant at the in all specifications the second set of ne sided tests we perform uses measures of agreement that may capture overvaluation but are clearly divorced from manager investor agreement we use two such measures employed in other studies breadth and turnover although our focus is on we include the control variables used in tables and vi but do not present results to conserve space the first three columns include breadth alone and columns and each include this and an additional measure of agreement in all specifications except column breadth is insignificant in column it is positive and significant since the overvaluation these results provide no support for overvaluation based market timing further in columns and we include breadth with two measures of agreement and show that our previous results hold even after controlling for breadth the last five columns present results using turnover these results indicate that when turnover is high firms are more likely to issue equity if it is overvaluation that however as discussed earlier high turnover may simply be driven intertemporally by a sequence of high returns or cross sectionally by liquidity differences thus the inference from high turnover is unclear nonetheless columns and show that support for our predictions persists despite the inclusion of turnover finally we test our theory against overvaluation and timing using wo and this alternative interpretation with diametrically opposite predictions thus these measures are an excellent way to differentiate the first measure is dispersion as we show in table vi lower dispersion increases the likelihood of an equity issuance which supports our theory and contradicts the predictions of the optimistic valuation interpretation of agreement the second measure we use is dual class premium our theory agreement means a lower premium and a higher likelihood of equity issuance however if disagreement among investors leads to more overpricing then market timing implies that a larger premium leads to a higher likelihood of equity issuance we present results using this measure in the last three columns of table vii despite the low power of this test the results support our predictions one could argue that our agreement proxies may be correlated with information asymmetry to more convincingly distinguish our theory and time varying adverse selection we first examine how the business cycle and stock market run ups impact the issuance decision this test is motivated by choe et al who document that more firms issue equity after an economic expansion because adverse selection costs are likely to be lower then and also after a stock market run up that may be may be indicative of momentum effects to see if agreement has incremental explanatory power after accounting for these effects we introduce as control variables three measures of the business cycle and a momentum variable that measures the market run up during the months prior to the issuance in addition to our agreement we present the results including these variables in table ix following choe et al we first present results agreement and only these time series variables and do not include accounting controls in this specification we do not scale dispersion by book equity since there is no control for firm size and book equity is highly correlated with firm size which means that scaling would cloud the effect of dispersion the results show that even after the business cycle and momentum effects are taken into account our agreement proxy remains incremental explanatory power further the time series specification results support the findings of choe et al and show that firms are more likely to issue equity after a period of expansion as measured by industrial production growth and after a stock market run up as measured by momentum we also present results including the cross sectional accounting controls used in the previous tables and scaling dispersion by book equity these results are presented in columns columns to measure agreement and in columns scaled by book equity to measure agreement we find that the firm stock return dominates the impact of momentum thus consistent with previous findings firms are more likely to issue equity after a stock price run up relative to the return on the market we further control for information asymmetry in table by including measures the first two measures are in panel a the first measure is from korajczyk et al who argue that equity issues are more likely after a credible information announcement because these are periods of less information asymmetry in the first three columns we include a dummy variable that is equal to one if the issuance occurs within days following an eps announcement the results is significant even after controlling for this variable however surprisingly we find that firms are less likely to issue equity immediately following an eps announcement in untabulated tests we repeat the analysis with a day and day dummy and find similar results at first blush this appears to conflict with korajczyk et al however one should be cautious in one interpretation korajczyk et al show that there are more equity issues eps announcement than there are later in the quarter and focus only on equity issuances by contrast our analysis compares equity and debt issuances thus our finding should be interpreted as showing that firms are more likely to issue debt than equity following an eps announcement rather than as showing that no equity issuance follows an eps announcement additionally our sample period begins in whereas korajczyk et al the literature has documented that there is often
a larger region of north central china numerous more impressionistic accounts corroborate own index of weather conditions on the basis of retrospective interviews their econometric results are quite sensitive to this index using official chinese weather proxies instead reduces the impact of their policy variables to insignificance their claim that official data may have been tampered with in order to agricultural statistics be deemed satisfactory but not meteorological data the precise impact of the weather on output requires further study in the meantime kueh claims that a simple weather index can account for percent of the yield shortfall in and percent of the shortfall in moreover south west and anhui in center east accounted for nearly half of all deaths but only one sixth of the prefamine these considerations suggest roles for regional income and proportionate crop loss in accounting for the toll of the glf famine indeed measures of regional output and of proportionate crop loss across twenty four of china s provinces in this suggests that economic backwardness and bad weather mattered we reldr and respectively the outcome suggests a crisis as readily explained by geography and history as by politics the likely role of adverse weather and economic backwardness does not absolve the chinese leadership of blame however the authorities might have saved millions of lives by acknowledging the extent of the disaster in given the demands made on the countryside during the glf there would have been problems even if the weather had been normal little is known about the mechanics of mortality in the relative economic backwardness of china where diseases such as typhoid fever scarlet fever typhus and tuberculosis were rife before would becker by implication the glf famine was in terms of our earlier discussion a modern famine however on the eve of the famine life expectancy was low and infant mortality high could the post campaigns to improve water quality and personal hygiene have had such a dramatic the famine remarkable for the lack of grain riots peasant rebellion grain hoarding and sales of women and children all normal occurrences during earlier chinese famines he also notes that the disaster never threatened the authorities ability to maintain law and order cold war accounts tend to ignore or deny the data in nai ruenn chen on anhui see bernstein becker the underlying regional output and excess mortality data were taken from national bureau of statistics and macfarquhar respectively replaying ypop by agriculture s share of gdp in also yields very similar results the excess mortality is defined as the excess death historical supplement the evidence for dramatic improvements in the early in cameron campbell is striking but refers to the beijing region only conclusion in later editions of the essay on and finland in france and in ireland highlight the importance of famine in early modern europe elsewhere with the possible exception of the new world famines seem to have been more common although the demographic record is prolonged famine anywhere is conceivable only in contexts of endemic warfare or blockade compared to the persistent effects of hiv aids on the population of sub saharan africa the damage wrought by famine is minimal moreover given that throughout most of history land hunger has show that in both asia and latin america food production has grown much faster than population since the in sub saharan africa the balance has been much closer although the problem there has been very rapid population growth rather than sluggish food output growth moreover some african countries such as ina s performance since the late with population growth tapering off and the rate of food output growth accelerating is particularly striking the few remaining countries still vulnerable to textbook malthusian famine have experienced considerable improvements in life expectancy in recent decades about second highest is a striking example a key issue is how the fertility transition scarcely yet underway unfolds in such vulnerable economies the experience of posttransition economies worldwide is that declines in fertility were preceded by declines in mortality however the length of the lag and the more rapid in latecomers than in africa s laggard fertility transition itself a function of economic underdevelopment has increased its share of global population from only percent in to percent today it is set to reach percent by even though a drop in the annual growth rate from percent during the past half century as niger uganda and when coupled with the problem of global warming which is likely to impact disproportionately on the productivity of arid lands limited to a short growing season the implied threat to living standards is clear a few decades ago economies sustaining but unless civil strife intervenes it can prevent harvest deficits from producing mass mortality the term famine is an emotive one to be used cautiously on the one hand preemptive action requires agreement on famine s early warning signs the very declaration of a famine may prevent it from becoming a famine have included events and processes which would not qualify as famine in the catastrophic biblical sense the last such biblical famine was probably the ethiopian famine of more recent famines have been smaller events more restricted in place and time most have been man made rather than the such changes have prompted john seaman to describe the likelihood of major famine today even in sub saharan africa as vanishingly small all the more reason for making famine history table life expectancy in selected african countries and fogel s claim based on english data assumes that not disproportionate his measure provides an upperbound estimate of famine mortality france yields as somewhat different outcome thus data culled from the shu chi ch eng eg years of drought between the founding of the ang and the end of the ming dynasties are to forget famines in the more distant past thus the volume of the cambridge history of india covering the period contains a four page chronology of famines while that covering the previous
that is not necessarily what i think as much as people are what they are and sometimes that can be held against them unreasonably and unfairly and disadvantaged and i do nt think that is right we have to do whatever we can whatever people s particular handicap level as possible the ways in which lgb work is framed in local government provides a reflection on wider debates in the equalities arena especially those concerning equal opportunities and diversity approaches to equalities work and the perceived appropriateness of state intervention in addressing discrimination diversity as for example when an officer said we do nt talk about equality our thing is valuing diversity my interpretation of diversity is that it is looking at everyone as unique that all have different things to bring forward a recognition of people s right to be different the focus is widened with respect to excluded groups so that bisexual and the term lgbt as a catchall phrase that reflects the council s commitment to sexual diversity diversity is seen as including everyone even those who hold greater social privilege the diversities approach was described by some contributors as less effective in tackling inequalities because it was individualistic and failed to address structural group based inequalities a finding that is supported by the literature another change in the work is framed concerns the notion of service responsiveness which is part and parcel of best value and other local authority frameworks and which constructs service users in terms of need as well as consumption several contributors discussed responsiveness to everybody s needs a notion which includes lesbians and gay men a further change concerns the business template where lgbt equality is framed in terms of the pink organizational fields concerning lgbt work are evident in local authorities particularly in areas that concern the visibility of same sex desire public sex is problematic for authorities the norms of certain sections of gay culture where public sex is seen as desirable and part of the gay scene clash with the dominant norms concerning privacy one officer discussed publicizing adoption and said she would have to avoid the one with the dildos in as this would be unacceptable to local authority players here the norms associated with some sections of the lesbian scene clash uncomfortably with the asexual heterosexist way that parenthood is constructed that we can see the ways in which organizational fields fail to mesh such instances exemplify organizational decoupling where public sex initiatives are successful it has entailed police officers and others working with the gay communities to overcome the disjunctions between the different frameworks the police become somewhat queered by going to gay clubs and condoning consensual return for help in dealing with issues such as teenage prostitution isomorphism another concept provided by sociological new institutionalist theory is termed isomorphism this is concerned with the symbolic dimensions of organizations so that institutions are systems of meaning and their behavior and the behavior of individuals within them depend on the meanings incorporated and the symbols manipulated organizations meanings associated with them by copying other organizations powell and dimaggio claim that this process leads to inertia and homogenization because conformist institutional environments tend to be more common than those which challenge the status quo they identify three types of isomorphism which is linked to the development of new rules and to professional networks this article will address only mimetic isomorphism a more in depth the examination of isomorphism in local government is provided by bowerman research findings provide limited support for the use of notions of isomorphism in the field of sexualities work in local government they sometimes took a routinized administrative approach drawing on the work of other organizations utilizing relevant legislation such as the crime and disorder act and the local inclusion diversity equality need and community safety although there was some level of tendency towards standardization there was also a considerable amount of diversity research findings indicated that both the types of framework adopted equalities versus diversity and the location and form of initiatives varied quite widely across authorities there was a certain amount of cross fertilization between proactive authorities where good practice from other authorities and copy it or where examples of authorities that are seen as progressive are used by actors as a way of shaming their own authority into action but this did not seem to be very common the lack of mimetic isomorphism may be related to a relative absence of formal norms concerning sexualities equalities work and a related lack of normative isomorphism it appears that initiatives in the legislative imperatives which encourage a certain amount of uniformity across authorities in addition it may be linked with the need for the normative decoupling that followed the labelling of left wing councils who conducted lesbian and gay equalities work in the as looney the norms concerning lesbian and gay equalities work became a political liability for these councils and for others who sought to do work in the have dealt with this problem by framing sexualities work in other ways as discussed above and by seeking to avoid copying the approaches and norms of the partnerships and inter agency working new institutionalist theory clearly has some general purchase in the analysis of sexualities work in local government how can it be applied to partnership and inter agency working concerning sexualities equality overall the this growth was apparent in the sexualities equalities arena with several research contributors saying that there has been an increase in inter agency and multiagency sexualities work during the the most substantial amount of sexualities work took place via partnerships or fora the areas where interagency work was most apparent were health specifically safer sex promotion and hiv services lesbian and gay adoption and fostering there is a range of documentary evidence supporting the existence of partnerships which affect the field of sexualities work alliances can be developed between unusual partners manchester city council the local police the
cross validation simulation results are as follows stochastic models such as ssdp hist and ssdp esp perform better than ddp ave therefore explicit inclusion of inflow uncertainty increases the utility of these models for establishing operational policy since ssdp esp is superior to ssdp hist updating operational policy as new monthly esp forecasts are available is daecheong dam in the beginning of the drawdown period is very low and the storage volume of yongdam dam in the beginning of the drawdown period ranges from to million daecheong dam should maintain at least el in the beginning of the drawdown period october to avoid significant increases in the downstream water shortages and a performance comparison of ssdp esp using two representative but differ considerably in forecast accuracy indicates that forecasting accuracy may result in considerable effects on joint reservoir operations this paper contains the final results of the year project attempting to increase the utility of models establishing operational policy of the geum river multireservoir system this project has been extended an additional years so as to further refine the more accurately represent real operations dp models developed in this study address the combined weights of three operational objectives which allow tradeoffs be tween the objectives in real operations the downstream water supply objective is so extremely important that opportunities for tradeoffs between multiple objectives are often meaningless for example an operating rule that results in no downstream water of hydroelectric energy an operating rule that produces only a very small amount of downstream water shortage may not be selected even if it generates the largest amount of hydroelectric energy therefore continued efforts should incorporate this aspect into the ssdp algorithm second transition probabilities between esp forecasts and historical scenarios may be employed in the calculates the current value function bt using the monthly esp forecasts while it obtains the future value function ft opt from the ssdp hist model which is derived from historical scenarios no linkage is currently considered between these two value functions although they are closely related simulation methods are oriented to the estimation of the probability integral over the failure domain while solver surrogate methods are intended to approximate such a domain before carrying out the simulation a method combining these two purposes at a time and intended to obtain a drastic reduction of the computational labor implied by simulation techniques is proposed the method is based on the concept that linear or nonlinear transformations of the performance function that do not affect do not affect the boundary between safe and failure classes lead to the same failure probability than the original function useful transformations that imply reducing the number of performance function calls can be built with several kinds of squashing functions a most practical of them is provided by the pattern recognition technique known as support vector machines an algorithm for estimating the failure probability combining this method with importance sampling is developed the method takes advantage of the guidance offered by the main principles of each of these techniques to assist the other the illustrative examples show that the method is very powerful for instance a classical series problem solved with importance sampling solver calls by several authors is solved in this paper with less than calls with similar accuracy starts from the determination of the probability of failure under the presence of random parameters such as elasticity or plasticity moduli loads dimensions etc normally it is to the probability of exceeding a specified threshold to be specific let be the vector of random parameters known as basic variables px its multivariate probability density function and a function defining the critical threshold known as the performance or limit state function limit state function such that fx and fx represent the safe and failure sets respectively the probability of failure pf of a structural system is therefore defined as which can be formulated equivalently in the form where d is the number of dimensions of the problem and i is an indicator function which equals if the implied condition is true and if it is false synthetic techniques the first are aimed at the estimation of the failure probability using as much analytical information on function as possible especially its gradient and curvatures the second collectively known as monte carlo methods are based on a collection of samples of the random variables with the aid of which the structural response is calculated in such a way that pf is estimated as the fraction of samples leading to failure failure the basic monte carlo method yields the following estimate of the probability of failure where is the number of samples generated with the given joint density function it is known that the method requires samples several techniques have been proposed to reduce this large figure such as importance sampling directional simulation conditional simulation antithetic variates paper is based on the simple transformation where is an auxiliary density function intended to produce samples in the region that contributes most to the integral this transformation implies that the estimate of the failure probability becomes where the samples xi are now drawn from learning tools such as neural networks and support vector which are gaining increasing application in reliability analysis and probabilistic mechanics in general a thorough examination of the applicability of these techniques in this context can be found in a recent monograph by the author in all these cases there is a need of having a set of input output data for calculating the parameters of the solver surrogate after training the solver surrogate can be used henceforth to estimate the failure probability using carlo techniques moreover the derived hypersurface can also be analyzed under a geometric viewpoint like in form and sorm techniques due to the simplicity of the approximating function from this discussion it becomes apparent that while variance reduction monte carlo methods are purported to estimate the integral solver surrogate methods are only aimed at an approximation of the contours of the failure
families reinforces the expectation to succeed while discouraging inappropriate relationships is not so wide if society genuinely wants looked after children to do well at school the state needs to match some of these middle class strategies in fact it has been argued that england has one of the worst records for intergenerational social mobility in the developed world and it has deteriorated further but researchers conclude that income redistribution alone will only partly redress the problem and additional social and educational policy measures are important such as early year education improving schools in poor communities educational maintenance grants and financial support for students in further and higher education it has often been those with fewer disadvantages who have been helped the most indeed while average educational attainment overall has been improving the lowest difficult and young people without educational qualifications are increasingly marginalized with the decline of traditional industrial and craft occupations there is therefore greater potential for social inequality for teenagers not continuing in education unemployment remains high and for those in work low pay is prevalent contrary to general opinion teenage pregnancy rates in the uk have not increased but have not decreased as they have elsewhere in europe overall family background is important early on but the social trajectory is influenced mainly via educational qualifications which determine subsequent employment and income considered this question and analysed the impact of contrasting welfare approaches in four countries england belgium norway and spain an attempt was made to control for the severity of need of samples weyts concluded that there was no discernible variation in educational outcomes for young people in the four countries possibly the different systems and services were equally effective or the problems of children separated from home were too fundamental for the social work interventions an explanation for this last point might be the were recorded as having neglect or abuse as the main category of need responsible for others it may have been present but not the main factor it was seen earlier how parental involvement influences children s educational progress and this certainly includes those parents who neglect or abuse an overview of mainly at much greater risk of academic failure even when controlling for social class and other background factors however it would be difficult to demonstrate a causal relationship and it is more useful instead to think once again of risk indicators although neuropsychiatrists have argued that the structure of the brain children who suffered early physical abuse demonstrate more aggressive and uncooperative behavior while neglected preschool children have been found to be more withdrawn research has shown that the earlier children were harmed the more likely they were to show problems in early adolescence retrospective reports of physical abuse have home are more likely to suffer depression and anxiety low self esteem and to be bullied at school although it may not have been based on a representative group the social exclusion unit estimated that of looked after young people consulted reported being bullied at school compared with all pupils the research review concluded that professionals well and importantly much of the poor school performance of looked after children may be explained by histories of maltreatment this view would be corroborated by an early small study by heath et al of children in long term the neglected and abused group did not improve educationally over time and the impact appeared to be long lasting the authors concluded that in order to combat this exceptional educational inputs were required probably the only research in the uk that has investigated the educational attainment of children in care by examining in detail the interplay between disadvantaged this drew on the cohort study of everyone born in britain in a week in much has obviously changed in the care and educational systems in the past years or more those in the cohort who had only ever been in foster care achieved levels while in full time education comparable to people from a similar socio economic background who background and parents low educational levels predicted only about half of their poorer attainment instead particularly for those who entered the care system late these young people tended to have more behavioral problems including juvenile offending which could have jeopardized their care histories and times more likely to have parents who showed little or no interest in their education compared with the fostered or non care groups a quarter when young were not regularly read to by their parents compared with only the other two groups achievement for the cohort overall was strongly associated with parental interest the subsequent implications from this discussion fall into three broad and related categories one concerns theoretical approaches in child welfare research the second is the political context of current services and the third which illustrates these issues and is a significant social problem in itself is whether or not being looked after constitutes an educational risk factor social work issues however it has been argued here that child welfare research tends to be rather narrow and that this inhibits the analysis of complex social problems including the low educational attainment of children in care social work services in england for children and families have strong historical political and social control dimensions and taken little account of sociological and social policy perspectives the sociology of education and related literature discussed here have outlined how these approaches are highly relevant to understanding and responding to this issue linked to this is the second conclusion and unless researchers are cautious they may otherwise subscribe to a certain political approach to children s global privatization of welfare government has introduced major social policy initiatives for example concerning child poverty and early years yet it has been reluctant to acknowledge broader social inequalities from which problems stem consequently it has been argued that new labour is unsympathetic to mechanistic an evidence based practice approach and assuming that the overriding or even sole task of social research
attempt to force the view of that camp on the palestinians until the israeli labour party was that camp then until the moderate wing of the likud won the title while it was in power in the days of israeli unity governments which lasted with a few breaks until it was not a party so much as a collection of political figures that in the eyes of the american experts represented the has embodied this camp for the americans as today does the party he established kadima the latter is a dream party for any american mediator who wishes to implement the second guideline in peace making and the management of conflicts management according to the neorealists means maintaining the conflict as a low intensity confrontation which means the loss of local human lives without any the areas it occupied in helped of course to consolidate this guideline it created the false impression of a genuine debate between a peace camp and a war camp since the realist approach did not allow engagements with marginal groups it focused on the israeli labour party so when the latter selected the jordanians as the only partners for negotiations gaza strip the american peace plan was exclusively based on the jordanian option henry kissinger was sent to convince the jordanians to accept the israeli peace plans but these offered too little space for the hashemite leader to be induced to take part in the process yet these plans which offered to leave a sizeable part of the west bank in israel and enclave the gaza strip as an open air prison have remained the or american road maps to peace as long as the plo was too weak to prevent a jordanian monopoly over the peace plan american diplomats followed kissinger and tried to build an israeli hashemite alliance at the expense of the palestinians but in the people of the west bank and the gaza strip deposed the pro hashemite leadership in democratic elections and replaced it with one that identified with the plo the americans peace and accepted israel s image of the organization as a terrorist outfit in the service of the ussr rather than a liberation movement thus the realist approach connected with the perceptions of the american christian right israel s image as the front line fighter in the holy war against the soviet anti christ continued to dominate american policy in the area later the anti christ was substituted and became the realm at the very front of the battlefield this approach distanced the americans even further from the palestinian point of view and from the historical un attempt to solve the conflict the palestinians insisted that the conflict with israel did not break out in but stemmed from the ethnic cleansing that israel committed in they also tried with little success to convey to the americans a different narrative of the plo s origins and essence refugees in order to facilitate their return there seemed also little point in highlighting for american policy makers the transformation in fatah s position in this was when the movement consented to the creation of a palestinian mini state on the territories israel occupied in provided the right of return would be retained and peace would reign the basic misunderstanding of palestinian conditions to the fatal course taken later within the framework of the oslo accord and the shaky peace proposals that followed in the wake of its demise the third guideline is that the peace process has no history every attempt begins afresh from a starting point that assumes that there have never been such attempts in the past such an approach disables a process of learning crucial for anyone facing complex human the interests of those who led the zionist peace camp in israel thus when the us returned to the politics of palestine in the zionist peace camp s understanding that was the day the conflict broke out became rooted in the american conscience and due to the second guideline their position became seen as the outline for the whole peace process therefore the peace process became an effort excluded from the peace agenda and with it the palestinians were pushed out as claimants to be replaced by the hashemites of jordan only in when the hashemite dynasty seemed to have had enough of waiting for a deal and had probably also noticed the strengthening of a collective palestinian identity in the occupied territories was a new realist jordan a new israeli and in turn new american approach developed the collapse of the soviet union weakened in any case the image of the plo as a soviet agent and eased the onset of plo american negotiations these started in tunis that year the israeli peace movement declared that it was now willing to enter negotiations with the plo again there was a fusion of discrete historical processes which relations academics been given such a free hand in engineering a peace process as dennis ross and his friends during the clinton days the disastrous fruits of the theoretical games they played with our lives here in palestine and israel are still with us the three guidelines were put to the test the peace camp was now the rabin labour government the bargain was the same israel was the plo it was asked to accept not only part of the territories but also only part of the authority in them in addition it was asked to give up the refugees right of return or a claim to jerusalem meanwhile the reality in the occupied territories changed as well the settlement project expanded to such proportions that it simply accentuated the humiliating nature of the new israeli proposal for peace could have listed a number of achievements in the realm of israeli bilateral relations with jordan and egypt ironically these peace treaties were concluded because of minimal american involvement in the negotiations the formula for their success if the cold
among actors for whom the definition of the problem and its subsequent classification will influence a role analogous to agenda setting in legislative it sets constraints filters information and orients perceptions that point toward one set of putative treatments rather than the contest among actors in diagnosis will often carry over into conflicts over treatment however if the politics that surround diagnosis lead to clear victory of one diagnosis the advocates of the rejected diagnosis may be excluded from the formulation thus fight against their exclusion in later stages those actors who were successful in gaining acceptance for their diagnosis will usually also get to prescribe the legal solution some of the contest over treatment turns on how measurable will be the results since measurability allows closer monitoring and so favors commitments asymmetries of power between national actors and the global institutions leads to considerable cross national variation in the ability of external actors to impose their diagnoses and treatments lawmaking in a global context often occurs through the mediation of professionals so that struggles break out among the professionals within the ifis as well as among professions pit diagnosticians from international institutions against diagnosticians in the nation state in lawmaking diagnosis and prescription is undertaken not only by professionals but by all other collective actors for whom lawmaking has relevance contests over diagnosis and prescription can have equally broad ramifications yet it is a common strategy of professionals to seek technical diagnoses and specialized treatments in order to encapsulate a their own professional jurisdiction as a result contention occurs on either side of the recursive loop the effect is to produce a strong recursive momentum between diagnosis and prescription these are sometimes driven by changes in diagnosis often they are driven by experimentation with prescriptions precisely because actors confront problems that are highly complex and defy ready diagnosis sometimes this diagnostic challenge is solved by the application to which supporting evidence is actor mismatch almost always a mismatch occurs between parties in practice and actors in lawmaking in bankruptcy politics for instance corporations or debtors are always actors in practice but scarcely ever actors in lawmaking in bankruptcy lawmaking international institutions or state officials may be primary actors in setting up a regime but play mitigate mismatch are critically important in the recursivity of law for they set in play numbers of subsidiary adjustments actors in lawmaking who rely on a diagnosis that excluded key practice groups may find their remedies faultily designed actors in practice who are excluded from lawmaking can use their control of implementation to undermine and subvert legal changes prescribed by reforms actors in practice who fail to participate in lawmaking through to recognize their own interests or who display an inability to mobilize often find that legal reforms crystallize their interests and help mobilize their members mismatch issues are particularly acute for professionals since that group sits astride the implementation process but is not always integral to statutory lawmaking on the one hand a failure to incorporate professionals into lawmaking provokes them to fight they dominate on the other hand by professionalizing lawmaking where technical authority trumps the balancing of interests by all parties the mismatch is likely to engender a backlash from excluded parties either in implementation or in a further round of reforms in sum each side of the recursive loop has a contingent relationship or illegitimate some parties in practice may react in practice by avoidance or resistance parties defeated in lawmaking may make the site of practice another battleground to fight again the battle they lost during enactment what is notable in these scenarios is that implementation cannot be adequately understood without awareness of its lawmaking antecedents noncompliance or creative compliance with the law implicitly and often explicitly points to the prospect of corrective formal adjustments that will narrow the gap between legislative or regulatory intent and its outworking in practice lawmaking involves the mobilization of actors usually a biased subset of those who are engaged in practice different forms of state law there are several implications of this analysis for a theory of recursivity any given act of lawmaking or any given cycle has a sequential and constrained logic since it is partially dependent on the outcomes of prior cycles further the variety of cycles that can occur between practice and lawmaking even in the same issue area suggests that contradictions may occur within the law itself as for instance when define the law in conflicting ways lawmaking in national arenas reform cycles in three asian nations we elaborate the process of recursivity with three cases of national insolvency lawmaking in a global context china indonesia and korea we selected these cases because they exemplify a variety of international interventions following the asian financial crisis which began in late so much as to illustrate its usefulness through substantively important applications in each case there were rapid reform cycles often driven by ifis we distinguish between insolvency law and insolvency regimes the former refers to conventional substantive and statutory law in the global arena however lawmaking in advanced developing and transitional countries is directed to the construction or reconstruction of insolvency substantive law procedural law courts administrative agencies out of court mechanisms in the shadow of the law and expert professions to administer the law the countries are arrayed along two dimensions the first dimension concerns the economic and geopolitical status of the country itself a will likely be most vulnerable to the pressures of ifis especially during a crisis a rich developing country is likely to be less vulnerable and a large transitional economy with geopolitical significance will be least vulnerable the circumstances of its involvement with ifis will also matter countries in financial crisis and therefore highly dependent on infusions of capital from multilateral institutions ifis than countries in a stable and robust financial situation the second dimension relates to the type of influence that can be brought to bear on national lawmakers by international institutions there are
is to set the simulation parameters both of which are accomplished by using the yacsim engine optical packet simulation one is called the head event and the other is called the tail event every time an optical packet is ready to be injected into the network the two events are automatically generated the optical packet is injected into the network with some attributes such as signal strength of the laser and the wavelength associated with the transmitter port the head event immediately sets the path from the source to the destination consider fig which simulation methodology this consists of four tunable transmitters and four fixed receivers each transmitter is associated with multiple wavelengths so that it can reach any of the receivers consider the packet transmission from transmitter to receiver on wavelength as shown in fig the head identified as uses the nextmodule function embedded in each component to trace to the next component the head from tx traces the route through coupler coupler demultiplexer waveguide and receiver at each component the head event accrues several attributes of the component such as length of the component attenuation due to the component and routing due to the component in addition the head of the packet embeds the packet sequence number into the channel specified by the component when the head of the packet from tx reaches the coupler the head event first checks and then embeds the sequence number of the channel associated with the component additional features embedded into the functionality of the component are executed when the head reaches the particular component for example consider a splitter that splits the input signal into all its outputs here the head event needs to re create multiple instances of the packets with similar attributes and restart the simulation for each of the newly generated packets once the head event reaches the receiver port it is terminated after the tail event is created and identified as it is immediately delayed for the transmission latency and held in the transmitter port the transmission latency is obtained by dividing the packet size with the bit rate of the transmitter figure shows the mid flits identified as of the packet transmitted by tx having reached the receiver in addition other head events from tx tx and tx have reached their respective receivers the tail event then retraces the same path as the head of the optical packet and further delays for the propagation latency the tail event checks each component that it traces whether the packet s sequence number exists if the sequence number exists at the correct wavelength then the tail erases the sequence number thereby tears down the path as shown in fig for tx this embedding of the sequence the validity of the proposed model moreover once it reaches the receiver port it delays for receiver latency in detecting the packet power modeling of optical interconnects power consumption of an optical link is becoming as critical as its speed in hpc system design in this subsection we provide an analytical framework to capture power consumption that can be incorporated into the system modeling design through power configuration files an optical link consists the transmitter the receiver and the channel considering a passive channel the total power consumption of an optical link depends on the transmitter and the receiver power transmitter power is consumed at the laser and laser driver modulator whereas the receiver power is consumed at the photodetector transimpedance amplifier and clock and data recovery circuitry multiple quantum wells with the external are suitable candidates for laser sources mqw needs an external laser source to generate light where as for vcsel the light is generated on chip itself for the receiver two designs are incorporated low impedance resistive receiver and tia based receiver design below we evaluate the power dissipated in an optoelectronic link based on different transmitters and receiver designs the total power consumed by an entire optoelectronic the laser driver is a set of cascaded inverters and the size of each inverter is larger than the previous one by a constant factor this superbuffer stage will be used for both the mqw and vcsel based designs the total power dissipated in the driver stages is calculated as where is the switching factor cl is the total load capacitance of the superbuffers where cload is the load capacitance of the inverter chain and cin and cout are the input and output capacitances of the minimum sized inverters in mqw based modulators light is received from the external mode locked laser the modulator performance is characterized by its contrast ratio insertion loss at its optimal bias voltage vbias and the voltage swing required the power given as where pl is the average optical power required at the receiver input and link is the optical system efficiency for a vcsel based system we adopt a complementary metal oxide semiconductor driver design from where the driver circuitry consists of two type metal oxide semiconductor transistors providing the threshold and modulation currents and a superbuffer driving the gate that delivers the modulation current the vcsel power consumed given as pvcsel the total current is the sum of threshold ith and modulation currents times the switching factor the total voltage is the sum of the vcsel threshold voltage vth the voltage drop across the series resistance rs and the minimum source drain voltage vdd vtn to ensure the gate that delivers the modulation current is in saturation for the tia based receiver design we determine the power consumed by the photodetector and the tia this is modeled similar to which consists of the photodetector as a current source id im and a common source amplifier connected by a feedback resistance rf id is the dark current is the vcsel efficiency in a and is the detector efficiency in a the input capacitance to the amplifier cin cd cg where cd is the diode capacitance and cg coxwl is
to take and to implement decisions and both often have to face massive criticism nevertheless one can ask why this picture was used here and which associations may occur with this what kind of game do they play and who are the players is the restructuring process seen as a game and apel as the referee what does the penalty mean and against whom is it imposed is has to be considered in the categories of guilt and atonement we should further consider the referee metaphor because various other metaphors describing self assertion and the situation of putting someone through unpleasant things exist however with all these alternatives the dimension of punishment in these last examples is less outstanding than here where it is placed right in general metaphor analysis alone we will not be able to answer these questions it will be necessary to take a closer look at the context especially at the firm s background and apel s biography text immanent metaphor analysis before apel was a higher executive of a smaller enterprise that was part of a large state owned equipment industry conglomerate in the vis vis the conglomerate s mother firm a situation that caused apel long lasting anger it was like this it the mother firm had a turnover of about millions and a loss of about millions gdr marks per annum everybody put a coat of silence over this it had to be like this thus in other words the smaller firms in the environment working on a cost level of less had to pull this colossus through for the staff of the mother firm this was normal and right thought about it they said it is as it is well you could never do anything like this in a smaller firm you would have been discharged at the first opportunity because one counted every penny but not in the right place the transformation process after brought massive changes including a new assessment of the different firms and their performance this resulted in a bitter situation for the former mother firm and apel stated with some satisfaction changed suddenly this firm was not the most important anymore this alone made an essential difference in spring the top executive positions of the former mother firm were newly filled by publicly advertising apel applied and became technical director of the firm that was renamed texcon he found himself at the top of the formerly unpopular mother firm here he got an intimate view of the difficult economic situation that he had known in the past only from an er s position what i experienced then was worse than i suspected because in comparison with the smaller independent firms i worked for in the past all this here made an impression of a monster all this was huge endlessly far and very pumped up for apel his task was clear he restructured and downsized the firm by closing or selling several sites in addition to imposing massive layoffs with critical questions about his strategy moreover during a long period of time he also legitimated all the losses that arose the fact that texcon continued to exist was sufficient proof of his success and it turned out that and this is in fact the greatest success that the firm still exists today four years later and that the way in general was right that we are not able to be so successful at the moment has a lot of causes but is apel felt lucky not to be connected with the firm s past consequently he felt no need to identify himself with the company and especially not with the company s past but i ca nt help having inherited production plants being in such a bad condition they the staff of texcon must attribute this status to me with this background the metaphor of the referee clarifies a lot the referee against the team caused by continuous fouling in the past especially before the turn in the rules of the new market economy served as a legitimating foundation the persons affected cannot complain about anything because they are guilty of having committed fouls and now are punished according to the existing commonly accepted rules own perspective his own self concept concerning his biography as well as his current position and task summarized and communicated in the referee metaphor prevented him even in the long run from identifying himself with his new company texcon and from being integrated in the company s community and culture what kind of problems do those people the employees of texcon have with me in fact fairly attributed to me well i am not sure if you know the expression unapproachable consequently contacts with the persons in his environment became increasingly problematic and apel was often treated with massive hostility if you speak with somebody you normally have three or four more persons around you most often the content of these conversations is immediately transferred to the works council well and then this will be taken out of and so i had because my colleagues advised me do nt let yourself be provoked think about what you say when you are downstairs in the production plant at the end of with the privatization of texcon apel left the firm it is obvious that the qualitative research literature s claim for a reflexive feedback to the interviewee is difficult to fulfill in this situation however by chance i had the particular opportunity to validate this a few years later in another research project i talked to a man who turned out to be a former colleague and according to his own statement a close friend of erich apel at the end of the interview i decided to tell him about my interview with apel about the referee metaphor and about my interpretation and i asked him for a comment on that the answer came spontaneously yes that s him that s the way
more and more sales and distribution activities under the banner of mass marketing producers were responding to the exhortations of management theorists who preached a doctrine of business transformation that emphasized resources capabilities innovation technology and operational effectiveness companies that had once been in control of all aspects of product development marketing sales and service were slowly convinced by leading business thinkers to focus exclusively on core competencies and get rid of everything else consequently big companies began to divest themselves of activities that were not perceived as value adding while at the same time embracing operational paradigms that emphasized total quality management materials requirement planning just in time inventory control and lean manufacturing all under the guise of a new mass marketing approach that was volume driven stick to the knitting paid off and firm boundaries underwent dramatic changes companies that had previously exercised power over their value chains were now outsourcing almost everything except those activities which they considered to be unique to their bases of sustainable competitive advantage with rising pressure from perceived higher quality japanese companies american manufacturers ended up spinning off not only business functions unrelated to their but also valuable distribution and sales capabilities consider what happened to goodyear in goodyear then the largest tire company in the world underwent an organization wide change effort to adopt the principles of tqm and mass marketing like thousands of other firms that embraced tqm goodyear s operations logistics procurement and research and development were retooled with the goal of making defect free products targeted marketing always been the lynchpin of goodyear s success were relegated to a secondary status because tqm focused almost exclusively on the manufacturing process inevitably cracks began to form between the manufacturing people and individuals working in sales and distribution resources to support the highly successful existing the us dealer network which had taken nearly a century to build and perfect were reallocated to operations with cannibalize its existing distribution arrangement wholesalers were turned into dealers and vice versa multiple sales outlets began to appear in towns where there had been one or two exclusive goodyear dealers for years consequently goodyear s control over the sales and distribution of its products began to erode although goodyear started using alternate distribution channels in the shift tires to sears and walmart as a direct result the firm went from being the largest tire company in the world with a global network of loyal and faithful dealers and strong brand loyalty to the manufacturer of essentially a commodity that could be purchased at an ever growing number of outlets for a lower and lower price for the consumers of goodyear s products this was a boon customers suddenly could have aquatreads or eagles mounted on their cars while they shopped at the mall or purchased dry goods at big box stores retailers also benefited unlike the old system the new retail outlets were not exclusive dealers they placed goodyear tires on their shelves next to competing brands and as a result could offer more choice to their customers additionally the prices of goodyear tires to consumers fell precipitously with a larger number of outlets now competing for the same customer base price wars became inevitable a slow degeneration of the company began unable to raise its prices through a compromised distribution network where the lowest prices never seemed low enough goodyear was faced with the inevitable the removal of costly manufacturing centers within the usa over the next several years the company would close plants in the us in favor of cheaper labor overseas this was done in order to compensate for losses resulting from the firm s ill conceived not surprising a substantial number of goodyear s tires almost percent are now made in china recognizing the transformation of the new american marketing approach was the genius of sam walton he and a raft of imitators stepped into fill the power vacuum that the strategy gurus had helped to create the result was the formation of massive distributors who drove the sales and distribution of manufacturers products in the usa under the umbrella of mass of consumer products are sold distributed and controlled by entities other than the actual manufacturers today thousands of us manufacturers have little or no control over the distribution and sales of products in their home market they do not even have control over the price they can charge for their products this is evidenced by mandates from mega distributors imposing yearly price reductions on manufactured goods while at the same high standards of quality and service walmart s ability to squeeze its suppliers is legendary and no wonder with percent of the us market for household staples such as toothpaste shampoo and paper products and over percent of all cd dvd and video sales vendors have no choice but to tow the line such market power allows the mega distributor to hone in on every aspect of a supplier s operation which products get developed what they are in rubbermaid finally bent to the overwhelming pressure of walmart its biggest us customer to cut its prices precipitously at the same time a new contract for future business was being announced between the two companies rubbermaid s wooster ohio plant was being closed and a new plant broke ground outside of shanghai moreover nobody was really surprised when walmart announced in june the board for fiscal year by at least another percent walmart is not the only company that has gained strategic advantage as a result of the core capability thinking of the us manufacturers consider home depot s dealings with american standard a firm that employs people at factories around the world including two factories in the usa and one in canada this company sells more than million in bath and kitchen products to home depot american standard does not make any money selling to home depot owing to the distributor s size american
the talk about baraba removing him from a discourse dependent on serious male dominated political life and entextualizing him into a more superficial discourse that centers on body image this entextualization is humorous because it requires that baraba be treated as a person who watches his weight a relatively new practice that is growing in popularity among young women in dar es salaam while the discourse of body image is relatively new to africans in general in urban tanzania i observed that the majority of people still find a few extra pounds attractive in you have gotten fatter is freely spoken to women and men because it is treated as a compliment rather than a criticism the joke also reveals how the interactive nature of deixis can alter relevancy structure for interactants thus inspiring them to shift tactics to achieve intersubjectivity until line mbwilo s relevancy structure for which referents did and did not matter for making sense of baraba s shirt were constrained history however because he failed to achieve any reciprocity of perspectives with his younger colleagues he seems to have been motivated to shift tactics to take on the relevancy structures they were assuming it is imaginable that in other contexts where reciprocity is not desired by one or more participants speakers would adhere to their original and competing tactics or they might even shift to a different tactic in order to invoke a discordant relevancy structure the indexical orders and language mixing my own impression of the joke on line was that the humorous effect came from the english in mbwilo s utterance as a nonnative of tanzania i always notice language alternation because i learned swahili in a foreign language classroom where the use of english was evaluated as a sign of linguistic incompetence consequently although i have learned that language alternation among an analyst is to attribute meaning to it when i transcribed the data i too thought that the joke was funny and i assumed that the use of ana maintain figure inspired the laughter because this mostly english expression is associated with women at least in my american home culture as i saw later in retrospective interviews my interpretation was on the right track however these interviews uncovered additional explanations for the comedic effect of mbwilo s utterance that for mbwilo socialism recollections of the early days of independence in africa and gender differences in attitudes about one s weight were all indexed through the joke but not necessarily because of the use of english on its own for noreen almasi and frankie a different albeit overlapping indexical order was relevant their retrospective interviews revealed that their response came from a from more modern developments in tanzania from mbwilo i learned that the english usage was not particularly noticeable because of the medium of expression in dar es salaam the use of anamaintain figure is the only available expression that relates to the practice of watching one s weight i discovered that a purely swahili expression was not part of the linguistic repertoire of dar es salaam residents mbwilo s comment that umbo figure shape is not used in dar es salaam for speakers residing in the large urban area the swahinglish phrase is a choice that marks those who are cosmopolitan from those who are not mwanza is tanzania s second largest city but often people from that region are still considered washamba hillbillies by residents of dar es salaam in comparing my own pure swahili to the speech of tanzanians from mwanza mbwilo s comment that unmixed swahili sounds like a hick reveals the demographic swahili english mixing his comment cast doubt on my initial understanding of the role of gender in the humor since the typical way to say to watch one s weight in dar es salaam is to use the mixed expression ku maintain figure the use of english words did not index gender in and of itself instead it was the practice of watching one s weight that was gendered but they gave different reasons for the humor noreen expressed that old men cannot have figures an idea new to me frankie s comments demonstrate an indexical linkage between watching one s weight and the practice of beauty pageants he explained that the practice of actively maintaining one s weight was related to something else relatively new in tanzania beauty pageants revealing the pageant world as the first indexical order for ku maintain figure the comedic effect has been brought about the utterance elicits laughter because it attempts to entexualize baraba s actions into a world that could not be further from baraba s actual practices in uttering his line mbwilo evokes the myriad of cultural transformations that tanzanians have been experiencing from the onset of colonization to the present stage of globalization the success of mbwilo s joke makes it clear that text of maintaining one s figure and all the discourses that are evoked through uttering the swahili english phrase additional interview data with the journalists made it clear that baraba was considered to be someone affiliated with the colonial era as well as the ensuing period of socialism in tanzania among all the or so journalists baraba is indeed the eldest and he is unique for having experienced primary school prior to independence and prior to the promotion of swahili as national language of primary education interviews with the journalists revealed that nearly all of them believed that english had lost its association with the colonial period however it was remarkable how often people would tell me to talk to baraba about the issue because he would be in the best position to answer my questions june a journalist in her twenties indicated that baraba had experienced colonization at a personal level on the whole the journalists comments framed as someone associated with old fashioned ideas which corresponds with his out of date clothing several journalists told me that baraba is sentimental about the
clause the embedded clause or both clauses are negated similar ambiguity arises in john did nt eat the meal because he would have to clean the dishes or john did nt eat the meal and clean the dishes as spelled out in and with the untensed conjuncts analyzed as adjunct clauses the verb in the tensed clause can combine with inflections through raising as well as i lowering therefore coordination of an untensed conjunct with a tensed one does not have any bearing on the issue of raising in sum it turns out that all of the data used to argue for movement are consistent with a non movement grammar and all of the data used to argue lack of movement are consistent with a movement grammar thus none of the data that have been used to argue for or against movement have any bearing on the issue evidence from the scope of negation we will now consider one of the standard diagnostics for movement negation placement with respect to the verb and how it applies to korean after discussing the two types of negation in korean and their syntactic status within clause structure we will establish that scope negation and argument qps can be used as evidence for or against raising evidence from negation one of the standard types of evidence for raising comes from negation in french the word order in which the finite verb precedes negation is taken as evidence that the verb moves to i an example and the corresponding structure are given in and in contrast english main verbs require do support with negation as in this fact has been as evidence that the verb does not move to i in english see we can now ask if the position of the verb relative to negation could be informative in determining whether korean exhibits raising korean has two forms of negation a long form and a short form long negation is postverbal and requires ha support which is equivalent to english do support in contrast short negation is preverbal and does not require ha support the obligatory ha support in sentences with negation indicates that long negation is a head that projects a negation phrase and blocks raising however the existence of ha support in sentences with the negative form ani does not tell us whether raising is generally blocked for example it is possible that verbs raise generally but fail to raise only when the head of negp is filled this leaves us with short negation one possibility is that short negation has a different syntactic status from long negation being a or an adjunct as illustrated in alternatively short negation might have the same syntactic status as long negation being a head of negp as illustrated in if is the correct structure then we still do not know whether korean exhibits raising if is the correct structure then we can conclude that korean does exhibit raising assuming that for some reason short negation unlike its long counterpart does not block raising unfortunately we have reasons to believe that short negation is in a position distinct from long negation with the representation importantly a sentence can contain both short and long negation as in suggesting that is the correct structure for short negation however even if is the right structure for short negation we can make use of short negation to determine the height of by exploring scope interactions between negation and quantified objects exploring scope interactions between negation and object qps as evidence for using scope interactions between negation and object qps as a diagnostic for vraising we present three background facts about korean frozen scope object raising and the clitic status of negation first it has been widely observed that in korean as in japanese argument qps exhibit with canonical sov word order with subject and object qps the only reading available is the one in which the subject takes scope over the object the inverse scope is possible only if the object scrambles over the subject as in second some adverbs such as cal well must follow the object np in transitive sentences as illustrated in assuming that this type of adverb is vp adjoined the examples in provide support view that objects raise from a vp internal position to a functional projection higher in the clause structure another argument comes from binding in english is grammatical indicating that the object her does not command into the adjunct clause hence that mary does not violate principle this kind of example can be applied to korean to determine the height of the object np it is generally agreed that in korean long distance scrambling is a type ofa movement and therefore a constituent that has undergone long distance scrambling can undergo reconstruction what this means is that if the scrambled object originated from an a position that can command into the adjunct clause then a korean example corresponding to with long distance object scrambling would be degraded because it would contain a principle violation this prediction is borne out as shown in third short negation has status of a clitic as in many romance languages and is treated as a unit with the verb in overt syntax short negation an must occur immediately before the verb in adult korean nothing can intervene between short negation and the verb and in coordinate vp structures short negation cannot stand alone in the first conjunct because of this tight relationship between short negation and the verb some researchers have argued that short negation is a prefixal bound morpheme on the verb and cannot host an independent syntactic projection however the fact that children sometimes fail to put together short negation and the verb as shown in undermines the prefixal bound morpheme approach to short negation this type of acquisition data supports an analysis of short negation as an independent lexical item a projection of its own if short negation is the clitic head of a
neighborhood disadvantage is the measure neighborhood disadvantage is the measure significant at significant at significant at conditional year changes were obtained as the residuals from a regression on squared maxquals gender and year dummies unweighted regression income changes were capped at of a small number of very large outliers dependent variable year change in household income unit of observation individual year medium run changes we now consider year and year changes in income while year growth neighborhood influences these time spans cover significant periods of people s lives sample sizes are now smaller as each individual can now appear at most twice in the year analysis and once in the year figure repeats our standard graph for the quartiles of year percentage income changes against neighborhood disadvantage at the smaller sample size per centile results in result is apparent the distribution of income change is about the same at all levels of neighborhood disadvantage the lower quartile is approximately to the median is approximately and the upper quartile is around again this is true at different spatial scales the quantile regressions in table confirm the visual impression that the distribution of year changes is shifting up and increasing in variance as the is positive and statistically significant at the for all three quartiles and the upper quartile has a larger slope than the other quartiles indicative of a fanning out of the distribution of income changes in poorer areas as before the results using the broader definition give similar but slightly smaller coefficients the quantitative significance of the estimates is also in line with the short run changes the effect at the median from a one sd in neighborhood disadvantage can be contrasted with a distribution of year changes with mean and sd of this positive relationship between income growth and area deprivation is not what would be expected from the selection biases usually assumed we interpret this result below using our model in terms of temporary shocks to income and location it is interesting to note that a recent study using mto data similarly finds a non selection biases controlling for the same fixed characteristics gives the same pattern as the unconditional year change data these are shown in the bottom panel of figure and in table and confirm the unconditional data they show that the distribution of medium run income increases slightly with area disadvantage at all quartiles controlling for age gender and individual human capital the smaller sample size limits what inference can be made from analyses of the year changes by area type for each of the different household composition types and tenure types but we again find differences between the older group and single parents on the one hand and couples on the other we now utilize the full longitudinal capability of the bhps and look at income change over the entire sample window since we did not want to restrict the sample to some a year difference for others etc we estimate trend income growth for each individual separately from a regression of income against time individual by individual we plot the distribution of this coefficient across neighborhoods so there is one observation per person while different in one regard the pattern is similar to the year changes pattern figure and the quantile regressions in table show that the lower quartile and the median are increasing as area worsens but now the upper quartile decreases one result of this is that the variance of the year changes is much lower for those starting in poorer areas as before the results using the broader area definition and conditioning on our set of fixed characteristics are largely unchanged the size of the coefficients also are small a one sd change in the neighborhood factor is associated with a of at the compared to a mean trajectory of and a sd of it would clearly be of relevance to ask how long individuals have lived in their starting neighborhoods this raises two problems however first the data on this in the bhps is rather noisy and not always consistent between years second since elapsed time in the present area is clearly an endogenous variable modelling this takes us away from our aim of imposing minimal structure defined for date figure year income change and neighborhood narrow neighborhood of people broad neighborhood of people income change residuals narrow neighborhood of people table quantile regression of year income change on neighborhood disadvantage notes significant at significant at unweighted regression conditional year changes were obtained as the residuals from a regression on squared maxquals gender and year dummies unweighted regression income changes were capped at of a small number of very large outliers dependent variable year change in household income unit of observation individual year the units here are the same as for the level of income namely namely deflated equivalized pounds a specific illustration we can illustrate these national results by focusing on three cuts through the distribution of neighborhood types we take observations in the following ranges percentiles of percentiles and the percentiles for each range we estimate kernel densities of income level and the year and year income change these are presented in figure they illustrate very clearly that while very strongly related to neighborhood type income growth is not at all related earnings one key component of household income is earnings we report in table the results of repeating our earlier analyses on individual earnings this is not meant as a neighborhoods based analysis of earnings as that would clearly require taking account of local labor markets but it complements the tables for household income as earnings may be seen as a prime channel through which operate we use individual earnings as the dependent variable and do not correct for within household earnings correlation we retain zero earning observations as zero not missing since changes between positive and zero earnings reflect real we see a strong correlation between neighborhood disadvantage and the level of earnings at the
brief or fragmentary responses engaged in clearly interpretive talk in fact there was little or no translation language or off task talk the students in the small groups surface level linguistic features of the poem moreover we discovered that the students notions of understanding the poem were influenced by the treatment condition the students in group a tended to associate understanding the poem with being able to discuss it and make connections with their own perspectives and experiences the students able to translate all the words into the in of the groups the students went so far as to recite their own translated versions of the poem working through the poem line by line independently or with others in their groups one group treated the poem as a pronunciation exercise reciting passages from the poem to one another during them as translation talk language talk interpretive talk and off task talk we combined translation talk and language talk because it gave us a clearer visualization of how many utterances related to language in general although there was some variation among the groups the totals for each category indicate that the students engaged lation language talk far exceeded interpretive talk the students in three of the groups did not engage in any kind of interpretive talk students in two groups engaged equally in interpretive and translation language talk group was a noteworthy exception with interpretive utterances and only utterances in the small groups language talk and translation talk interfered with attempts to engage in interpretive talk to illustrate this tendency we have selected two excerpts from small group discussions one that privileges translation talk and one that privileges language talk excerpt from group the group we called lost in translation what is do you all know what ces rois patients means something about their kings what something about their kings their patient kings probably the summits of silence mmm hmm and what is that that s and there s the next three lines they re the ones that i still let s describe what we find most striking and interesting about this poem what do you find most interesting or striking about this poem i do nt know i think it has a really sad tone kind of despondent that it s deep as the conversation begins is completely action formation from interpretation to translation as he silently reviews the poem line by line asks his fellow group members to act as translators rather than discussants is complicit in this endeavor responding to each of s prompts with an appropriate translated response translating enables him to get or to understand the poem foreign language as a tool that can help him access the ideas and emotions presented in the poem views the foreign language as an obstacle to his understanding of the poem his vocal insistence on translation prevents the group from engaging in interpretive tasks interrupts the translation talk exchange between oup s focus from translation to interpretation this group is ultimately unsuccessful in maintaining interpretive talk because the group s initial action formation emphasized translation instead of interpretation they have difficulty changing their focus to engage in interpretive talk instead they return time and again to their initial action formation perpetuating the small groups engaged in translation talk they also engaged in conversations about the foreign language itself or language talk excerpt from group the group we called i love french illustrates how language talk can also interfere with the interpretive mode in a small group setting laughs and yeahs i think even when you do nt understand it though it s just beautiful to hear the words it flows really really well and um memories like she does nt you ca nt really get away from them i do nt know because memory is always like there it s always a part of your life and like i do nt know well it seems like at one time she had like dreams and hopes because it said with my broken hopes like she had these like aspirations or something but it s really beautiful you can tell right away it s well written even though it s in a different language that we do nt yeah it is a more sadder sic nature or a more brutal topic it s still pretty although the students in this group had been engaging in interpretive talk in contemplating questions of memory and representation at the beginning of this excerpt suddenly shifts gears and says that the poem makes me want to be able to read french really well so i can read and yeahs shifting the group s focus from the assigned tasks then picks up on s comment noting even when you do nt understand it though it s just beautiful to hear the words then successfully reintroduces the subject of memory to the group memories like she does nt you ca nt really get away from them and elicits an interpretive response toward language talk perhaps uncomfortable engaging in the complexities and ambiguities of interpretive talk she performs her own self repair shifting the conversation back to the comfort and familiarity of language talk her comment you can tell right away it s well written even though it s in a different language that we do nt that we drawing the group discussion back to language talk which continues to dominate their discussion preventing the group from completing the interpretive tasks the excerpts from the lost in translation and i love french groups demonstrate the impact of interpersonal dynamics on small group discussions in both instances group members were successful and language talk in addition to these two dominant kinds of talk there were instances of general off task talk in all of the small group sections although the off task talk often had a french connection excerpt highlights how the students in the teacher moderated condition discussed this final line of the poem excerpt teacher moderated discussion
of a firm which may be explicit in the form of databases or documents or tacit expressed by an ontological approach can be used to elaborate the organizational knowledge by defining the semantics to capture the meaning of the terms and axioms to enhance and encapsulate the way of reusing the knowledge based system in a collaborative manner within a production the novelties of this work are twofold first the development of a manufacturing know how data structure which has been constructed as part of an organizational knowledge framework using an ontological approach toward capturing and reusing manufacturing knowledge secondly this work has also exploited the application of web based technologies for managing and coordinating the use of captured knowledge and the utilization of a web centric product data management enterprise in particular product development and manufacturing within an enterprise captured knowledge can then be converted into an extensible markup language formatted file and shared within a pdm system to support the product development process as the use of pdm systems for product design and development is becoming more widespread throughout the global manufacturing sector the application of knowledge sharing capturing and reuse using pdm systems is the global enterprise of the future knowledge based systems and ontology background to knowledge based systems a knowledge based system may employ any number of techniques for knowledge representation and extraction of the knowledge that is to be re used some of the common approaches are rule based systems which capture knowledge in the form of structured if then adapt them to solve new and similar problems model based reasoning systems which use software models to capture knowledge or to emulate real processes neural nets which are a network of nodes and connections used to capture knowledge they can learn by using examples fuzzy logic which is used to represent and manipulate knowledge that is incomplete or imprecise ontologies combined with knowledge based systems which can be used for storing and share knowledge across a domain ontology in knowledge based systems introduction to ontology in information technology an ontology is the working model of entities and interactions in some particular domain of knowledge or practices such as electronic commerce or the activity of in artificial intelligence according to specialists at stanford university ontologies can to express a set of concepts such as things events and relations that are specified in some way in order to create an agreed vocabulary for exchanging information in particular over the world wide web apart from providing a common understanding author valarakos et also states that ontologies can be used to facilitate dissemination and reuse of information and knowledge the main technologies used to derive ontology are the process specification based technologies the standards of web based technologies are extensible markup language resource description framework web ontology language and xml metadata interchange format using ontologies in knowledge based systems given that ontology has the potential to improve knowledge capturing organization sharing and re use it was the obvious choice that this research is to exploit and organization knowledge framework furthermore using ontologies in organizational knowledge framework can provide the following advantages sharing knowledge domains across the www not relying on a set of rule based techniques being capable of handling complex and disparate information however modeling organizational knowledge is a very complex task often requiring a combination of different types of ontology techniques to support in product development the following ontology techniques are considered as being important domain ontology which organizes concepts relations and instances that occur as well the activities that take place into a top level generic upper level ontology which organizes generic domain independent concepts and relations explicating important semantic application ontology which consists of the knowledge of a particular ontology based applications there is an increasing volume of research in ontology based applications of knowledge management and information sharing and retrieval the list of applications presented here is not exhaustive but it highlights some of the more interesting work from different areas of the ontology based research and development community an intelligent broker service for knowledge component reuse on the www is an ontological based knowledge the objective of to develop intelligent brokers that are able to configure reusable components into workable knowledge systems through the www in the knowledge engineering discipline the on to project has developed practical methods and tools based on an ontological approach to facilitate knowledge management as a means to share and reuse knowledge the otk tools help knowledge workers who are not it specialists to access company wide information repositories in an efficient intuitive way the otk project applies ontologies to electronically available information to improve the quality of knowledge management in large and distributed organizations production d interfaces a base de connaissances pour des services en ligne is an information integration system for knowledge sources that are distributed and possibly heterogeneous the approach taken was to define an information server as a knowledge based mediator between users and existing sources relative to a single application domain is a reasoning engine with semantic information integration capabilities from ontoprise gmbh data integration is done via several connectors import and export formats and built in functions for example importing data schemas from existing databases mapping to ontologies and connecting to search engines and applications is a knowledge retrieval platform that combines semantic technologies with retrieval approaches it is designed as client server architecture and provides information retrieval from various data sources the semanticminer server which is a specialized ontobroker system provides the interface to the data sources as well as an inference engine to retrieve implicit knowledge the proposed system the above research provided the foundations for the work described in particular reuse it in the www which has been developed in a manufacturing context figure illustrates the overall boundaries of the proposed system in relation to product life cycle from design to manufacturing the principal research hypothesis is that at present there is a disconnection in the early stages
especially in the in fact it suffers for the overweighted influence of the high density foam data and vice versa underweighs the low density foam data this is due to the fact that the gaps between experimental stress and model predicted stress of the low density foams have always little entity if compared with the gaps of the higher density foams considering that the second kind of objective function evaluation is obtained through the minimization of the sum of the square errors of all foam it is clear that the variation of the total sum due to the variation of the parameters of the low density foams is very little compared to the variation of the total sum due to the same relative variation of the parameters of the high density foams the objective function evaluation based on plain sum of the square errors is too loose for low density foams at low strain therefore the fitting procedure has been performed by weighting the deviations with the experimentally measured stress hence the sum of the normalized squared errors snse to be minimised is where ssper and smod are the values of the experimental stress and the model stress respectively at the same strain value the differences between the rusch model curves identified with the classical least squares method and with the normalized least squares method are shown in fig where for one case with the exemplification purpose the the model predicted curves in both cases five different densities of epp foams have been considered at the same time the normalized least squares minimization procedure leads to a better fit of the elastic and plateau regions although a slightly worse fit is obtained in the densification region the choice of the normalized lest squares method is also justified by practical considerations on the application of foams in impact absorption and by statistical considerations in the foam should absorb a defined quantity of energy in defined maximum displacement and stress level this goal can be achieved by taking advantage of the linear and plateau region from a design point of view the prediction of the energy involved in this region has a primary role the densification region of the foam is used only in few cases because the foam would absorb energy with rising stress entity and quickly rising slope of stress vs strain moreover different the same type of foam could result in large differences of the plateau stress which is the most relevant region for energy absorption applications consequently in the global identification of all model curves it is advantageous to have the deviations between the experimental curves and the model predicted curves proportional to the stress level of each curve from a statistical point of view the lack of fit of the model must be evaluated weighting the effect of the variance of the confidence interval of the experimental stress values as function of the strain was calculated by means of three repetitions of a test on the same foam the width of the confidence interval is shown in fig for a onfidence level the resulting quality of the experimental tests is remarkable in the elastic and plateau region but it decreases in the densification region the normalized least squares method is advantageous because takes into account the rising interval width in the densification region evaluation of models performance even if all the considered models show good correlation coefficients and fit adequately the experimental curves the new proposed model shows better performance because of the choice of the normalized least squares the squared errors se are higher for the higher density foams but this behavior does not affect the correlation coefficients which do not decrease consistently with foam density tables contain the sums of the squared errors sse the sums of the normalized squared errors snse and the correlation coefficients for the four analysed models and for each tested foam the last line of each table contains the total sums of the squared errors of all foam densities and the average values of the correlation coefficients the four figures from figs to show examples of the fit results for the same foam epp with the exemplification purpose each figure is obtained using one of the four considered models the right diagram of each figure shows also the associated model prediction error as a function of strain again the quality of the fit is remarkable in the elastic and plateau region and decreases in the densification region the quality of the fit is essentially well comparable between the four cases although the modified gibson model appears to be a little bit better than the others fitting capability of the models can be performed by means of the total sums of the normalized square errors for each kind of foam they are shown with histograms in fig the proposed new model shows always the best fitting because of the good fitting capabilities of all models the other characteristics acquire importance on the choice of the most suitable model in particular the convergence of the optimization methods used for is strongly influenced by the model formulation the optimal parameters solution of the gibson model and its modified version showed to be dependent on the parameters values used as starting point for the optimization procedure this dependence was not noted with the rusch model and the new proposed model and it seems to be caused by the subdivision of the model in three different formulations one for each of the three regions of the stress strain curve probably in cases the optimization procedure assigns a plateau stress value which is lower than the stress given by the densification formulation and the plateau region disappears from the stress strain model curve thus the plateau stress value does not influence the sum of the squared errors and the optimization algorithm does not change its value all parameters of the rusch model and of the new proposed model have always a certain effect on the sum of
bad expressions of the bad character of the sadist exhibited by the pleasure he gets from his illusory wrongs the deluded sadist is intrinsically terrible his imagined behavior evil whether or not the that view production of bad does nt matter it is important to note that the point i am making her differs from the point that moore intended to make and smart s rejection of that moore simply intended to show that pleasure could not be the only intrinsic good but my view is that internalist must have another response to this case since the sadist is expressing bad character he is acting wrongly even if there is no actual production of pain hold that the sadist is acting badly or wrongly if the internalist denies this then what is the alternative at least for an internalist like slote one could argue that the deluded sadist is not acting badly but still displays a bad character similarly someone in a dream who believes he is torturing others and delights in their torture is nt doing anything wrong but does reveal a bad character alice s having a non dreaming perceptual experience of slapping bob on the other hand is quite a good indicator that she has slapped bob this is one way to spell out the systematic connection which is crucial the externalist could adopt this approach given that what one dreams reveals one s tendencies to act feel badly then we have an explanation of the epistemic what occurs in the world iv problems for the externalist this does nt mean that either the externalist or the mixed theorist is free of problems systematic is quite slippery suppose that ralph is deluded and thinks that he is killing alice but he is paralyzed and actually unable to move his arms to shoot it seems as though he is still blameworthy even though what he thinks he is kill alice and he believes that he is pointing a gun at her and shooting then the account works but if we build in to the description that he is paralyzed then there s a problem since that kind of behavior will not systematically result in a bad outcome this is really why i think that the view that there is dream immorality is not completely absurd indeed there is no conceptual i sketch here if the world somehow changed and if dreams began to track reality our opinion of dream immorality would change as well i think that the internalist needs to accept dream immorality or reject the view that dreams reveal good or bad character to avoid an actual inconsistency it may be that is the best way to go indeed one line the internalist could pursue is familiar to the externalist does occur however our intuitions of the absurdity of dream immorality are simply due to its rarity it normally does not occur because the right conditions are often not present in a dream however this diagnosis does nt seem compatible with some of our common sense responses suppose i thought with good reason that bob would dream of harming his boss tonight should i keep the end my view is that the dream should be viewed as another and very different context without systematic positive or negative effects they have no actual moral significance as thoreau s intuition suggests dream immorality may have epistemic significance as a sign of something wrong with a person but there is no dream immorality per se and the same carries over to the other non veridical contexts would we punish the paralyzed person who tried to press the button he thinks will kill his enemy who believes he has done so and who revels in it no and delusion is only morally significant on the internalist view if it points to irrationality but it certainly need nt he s not irrational just in the grip of an illusion that would affect the very best reasoner consider someone who also wants to harm his enemy and in he proceeds to stick pins into the doll believing that this will cause harm to his enemy he is wrong about this but imagine also that he is living in a culture in which voodoo is routinely considered effective in inflicting harm on one s enemies he may be wrong about the power of voodoo but he s not unreasonable it may be that my disagreement with the internalist will just boil hold that it is truth and without meeting this success condition even reasonable belief fails to capture the ring i want to say something like this about moral evaluation success just is nt being morally reasonable the good must be accomplished without this we end up with a kind of moral solipsism okay the world out there may exist and things may happen but that does nt really matter after all all cosmopolitans hold at least this set of beliefs human beings are ultimate units of moral concern families tribes nations cultures and so on can become units of concern only indirectly the status as an ultimate unit of moral concern extends to all human beings equally human beings should be treated as ultimate units of concern by of distributive justice apply to the global order on one hand and to the main social and political institutions of the modern state on the other this discrepancy in moral assessment pogge avers looks arbitrary why should our moral duties constraining what economic order we may impose upon one another be so different in the two of the cosmopolitan premises with which we began more specifically i will defend the idea that equality is a demand of only among citizens i mean any conception of socioeconomic justice that aims to limit the range of permissible social residents of a state this is not because states are directly coercive of individuals in a way that the international or global institutional is not the fact that
underrepresentation of poorly educated participants however have been shown to have negligible effects on behavioral genetic analyses of conduct disorder overall the genetics of alcoholism between and investigators contacted a selected subsample of the interview sample s offspring selection targeted offspring considered at risk for conduct disorder depressive disorder alcohol dependence and or divorce as well as a control group considered to be at low risk in total of the children of twins came from nuclear families in which the twin parent did not have a history of psychopathology or divorce and nuclear families in which neither the twin parent nor the co twin had a history of psychopathology or divorce the intact families sub sample was restricted to the was younger than years old this subsample was constructed because children who did not reside with their parents until the age of were not interviewed regarding their parents marital conflict the intact families sub sample excluded some children whose siblings were included because siblings did not necessarily agree on whether they lived it may have been due to the timing of the parental divorce death sibling disagreement however was rare only of the nuclear families in the children of twins sample had discrepant reporting restriction to intact families co twin s family was included in total children of twins comprised the intact families sub sample the number of children per nuclear family ranged from one to six the mean number of siblings per nuclear family was approximately two the children s age at assessment ranged from to years the complete twin pairs sample was constructed for analyses requiring information on both twins in total it was composed of children of twin pairs as discussed below the subsample utilized in our primary analyses was the intact families sub sample in addition the complete twin determined by questionnaire responses concerning physical similarity and frequency of occasions where twins were mistaken for each other when there was disagreement between co twins about zygosity or when zygosity assignment was otherwise ambiguous further information including photographs was requested comparisons of these zygosity assignments with multilocus genotyping final zygosity assignments from questionnaire responses demonstrated perfect agreement with zygosity assignment based on dna typing of eight polymorphic markers in a subsample of twin pairs marital conflict frequency and offspring conduct problems were assessed using the semi structured assessment for the genetics of alcoholism oz twin telephone the ssaga is derived from the national institutes of mental health diagnostic interview schedule the structured clinical interview for diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders ed revised the schedule for affective disorders and and the helper interview interrater reliability of the ssaga for assessment of conduct disorder is good in addition the ssaga s test retest reliability for retrospective lifetime diagnoses of conduct disorder is good interviews psychologist all interviews were audiotaped and a randomly selected the interviews were reviewed for quality control and check of coding inconsistencies the children of twins reported on their parents marital conflict answering two questions how much conflict and tension was there between your parents in your household when you were to scored on a point ordinal scale where higher scores indicated more frequent marital conflict the polychoric correlation between responses to the two items was very frequent conflict was somewhat rare offspring reported none or a little conflict and tension and offspring reported some or a lot of conflict and tension and that their parents often or always argued in front of them are roughly consistent with previous research suggesting that approximately a community sample can be qualitatively characterized as discordant marital conflict scores for each child were obtained by summing his scores children in the same nuclear family agreed moderately well on their parents marital conflict the linear and quadratic effects of age accounted for the variance in marital conflict reports the effects of age and gender on marital conflict reports up to age years children answered questions such as the following did you ever run away from home overnight or did you ever start fires with the intention of causing damage one symptom forcing another in sexual intercourse did not figure into the analysis because ranged from to out of a maximum possible offspring conduct problem scores were obtained by counting the number of endorsed symptoms and for the purposes of structural equation modeling transforming to rank scores as suggested by the preponderance of zero symptoms counts clinical level pathology was infrequent approximately population based behavior genetic samples in the united states and in finland accordingly symptom counts were used in lieu of clinical diagnoses in order to reflect the full range of outcomes in the general population siblings were less similar in conduct problems dz children children s conduct problems were modestly but significantly correlated with their reports of tension and arguments the effects of gender and age were partialed out of offspring conduct scores before data analysis the linear and quadratic effects of age accounted for the our primary analyses however similar to many genetic epidemiological studies the intact families sub sample is a product of deliberate selection on stratification variables in conjunction with potentially nonrandom self selection without addressing this sample selection problem our analyses may be biased in general present in selected twins and their families accordingly sample selection may be considered within rubin s theory of missing data missingness is considered ignorable not only when participants are a random sample from the general population as detailed above the intact families sub sample is derived from a larger population representative twin sample in which multiple sociodemographic and psychiatric characteristics including the deliberate selection variables were observed for both selected s procedure for developing and testing models of nonresponse in sar data multiple logistic regression was used to identify predictors of whether or not a twin pair from the genetics of alcoholism twin sample participated in the intact families sub sample pair wise participation rather than individual twin participation was predicted because ssaga oz were used as predictors
is that the rewriting may be nonterminating the second reason is that the rewriting may abort because the evaluation of an expression is undefined or the tree variable in a t copy statement is not defined in the store this second reason can easily be avoided a type system on as already mentioned in remark together with scoping rules to keep track of which variables are visible in the xslt program and which variables are used in the expressions such scoping rules are entirely standard and indeed are implemented in the xslt processor saxon in the same vein we have simplified the parameter passing mechanism of xslt parameter passing we have also omitted global variables otherwise our formalization covers all programming constructs of the real programming language xslt in fact our mechanism for choosing the rule to apply is more powerful than the one provided by xslt as ours is context dependent it is actually easier to define that way as already mentioned at the beginning of sect none of our technical results depend on the modifications we we note that the xslt processor saxon evaluates variable definitions lazily whereas we simply evaluate them eagerly again lazy evaluation could have been easily incorporated in our formalism some programs may terminate on some inputs lazily while they do not terminate eagerly but for programs that use all the variables they define there is no difference confluence to then there exists such that we can further rewrite both and into confluence guarantees that all terminating runs from a common configuration also end in a common configuration since for our rewrite relation either all runs on some input are nonterminating or none is the following theorem implies that the same final result of a program on an input if defined at all will be obtained regardless of the order in which we our rewrite relation is confluent proof the proof is a very easy application of a basic theorem of rosen about subtree replacement systems a subtree replacement system is a set of pairs of the form where and are descriptions up to isomorphism of ordered node labeled trees where the node labels come from some set let us refer to such trees as trees such a system naturally on trees we have t if there exists a node of and a pair in such that the subtree is isomorphic to and is isomorphic to here we use the notation for the subtree of rooted at and the notation for the tree obtained from by replacing by a fresh copy of rosen s theorem states that ifris unequivocal and closed then is confluent unequivocal means that the definition of being closed is a bit more complicated to state it we need the notion of a residue map from to this is a mapping from the nonroot nodes of to sets of nonroot nodes of such that for the subtrees and are isomorphic moreover if and are independent then all nodes in must also be independent of all nodes in now being closed means that we can assign a in in such a way that for any in and any node of if there exists a pair in then the pair is also in by denoting the latter pair by we must moreover as trees where statements here statements is the set of all possible syntactic forms of statements so given a configuration we take the syntax tree of the underlying template and label every inactive node by its corresponding statement and every active node by its corresponding statement and its context in the configuration system consisting of all pairs for which as defined by our semantics where consists of a single statement and the active statement being processed to get is a direct child of since our semantics always substitutes siblings for siblings it is clear that then coincides with our rewrite relation since the processing of every individual statement is always deterministic the node being processed is shown in black the subtemplates to the left and right are left untouched referring to the notation used in fig the newly substituted subtemplate new is such that if new if at the end of every processing step itself does not contain any active if statements we define as follows for nodes in left or right we put where is the corresponding node in for the black node we put to see that the main condition for closedness is satisfied we consider the various consequently by definition of there is no in with and thus we can put if is in left then is the result of applying at in we must show that is in thereto it suffices to observe that is of processing of a the closedness condition on s is also satisfied because both and will set to the case where is the processing of a foreach statement is depicted in fig this case is analogous to the previous one the only difference is that the black node now has descendants however because the init function always leaves descendants of a foreach node inactive and we can put for all of them the case where is the processing of a val statement is depicted in fig since all nodes in the update set are inactive by definition we can again put for all nodes in the update set the case of a tree statement is similar now the black node again has descendants but again these are all inactive the case where is again analogous computational power of xslt as defined in definition an xslt program expresses a partial function from data trees to data forests where the output forest is represented by a tree by affixing a root node labeled doc on top the output is defined up to isomorphism only and does not distinguish between isomorphic inputs this leads us to the following definition data trees with root labeled doc mapping isomorphic trees to isomorphic trees using the string representation of data trees defined in sect
professionals could work to document and advocate for organizational and institutional guidelines for racial harassment in schools and work settings a more specific characterization of the experience of or racial harassment can be used to help clients cope and grasp their experience more clearly in addition workshops for organizations might be developed to help them understand and recognize the hidden and subtle forms of acts of avoidance aversive hostility and hostile racism research implications and the role of racism in the development of ptsd researchers might work to develop instruments for measuring specific types of racism many studies used a few items to measure discrimination it would be of value to assess the impact of discrimination in particular developmental periods to determine the relative impact of such experiences on the developmental process some studies indicated that families adolescents clear if the experiences of one s life are cumulative or if the experiences are distinct given one s level of maturity researchers might consider how race related stress and trauma are connected many measures of discrimination and race related stress use lifetime and past year as time periods for documenting the stress of racism additional instruments are needed that use more recent encounters with racism to assess stress and trauma the model experiences as discrimination harassment and discriminatory harassment might lead to research on the specific mental or health the effects of each thus helping to document the relative impact of the various types of experiences also it would aid the assessment of race based traumatic stress if an instrument were available to assess how specific encounters with racism become traumatic on racism stress trauma discrimination racial identity and coping was presented and a new strategy for assessing and recognizing race based traumatic stress injury was introduced it has been argued that specific forms or classes of racism racial discrimination racial harassment and discriminatory harassment be used to understand people s race based experiences and to determine the relative mental health the effects of each race based traumatic a nonpathological category to be used by mental health professionals to identify and assess people of color s encounters with racism that produce stress and trauma mental health scholars and practitioners have neglected the experience of race based traumatic stress in the lives of people of color and thus it is argued that a race specific mental health standard be used considers the helping professional and client in a racial and historical context that is interactive and mutually influencing at the same time within racial group psychological variability is a critical aspect of how researchers and professionals assess people s racial experiences it is imperative that the psychological and emotional experience of racism not be overlooked even if there is considerable effort in our between the three types of racism and the nonpathological category is important for mental health professionals because they may be consulted by people of color for help in coping with or to redress race based violation the recursivity of law global norm making and national lawmaking in the globalization of corporate insolvency been underway in many areas of global commerce this article shows that leading global institutions such as the world bank imf and united nations are building an international financial architecture with law including corporate bankruptcy law as its foundation building on research on international institutions and three national cases the authors propose a new framework for legal change in the globalization of bankruptcy law has proceeded through three cycles at the national level through recursive cycles of lawmaking at the global level through iterative cycles of norm making and at the nexus of the two recursive cycles are driven by driven by four mechanisms the indeterminacy of law contradictions diagnostic struggles and actor mismatch thus the recursivity of law both offers a basis for an integrated theory of globalization and law sociological studies of globalization largely neglect law whereas research has been extensive in such global arenas as finance business culture religion and population it has been almost entirely absent for law this this research was funded by the american bar foundation and national science and gibb pritchard we have benefited from participants in seminars at the american bar foundation new york law school the neglect is apparent on both sides of the law and globalization equation the sociology of law has remained overwhelmingly focused on the nation state despite strong theoretical traditions that are attentive to transnational developments furthermore globalization studies with important whatever globalization process is the object of inquiry we offer a way forward not only for the sociology of law and globalization respectively but also for their rapprochement we do so by confronting a particular problem in current global legal and economic change how is it possible to explain global convergence in the enactment of corporate bankruptcy laws over the past decade while there remains significant to solve this problem we offer an integrated theory of legal change in a global context that seeks to answer three questions what explains cycles of national lawmaking in a globalizing field of law where do the global norms originate and more precisely how does a single global standard emerge and how does national lawmaking engage global norms and institutions and vice versa international financial architecture with law as a principal foundation economic globalization according to the ideology of international institutions demands and reflects a normative framework that delivers the effective operation of laws and rules as a result law has emerged in the last decade as a primary instrument and significant outcome of global change the global legal framework for markets domestic bankruptcy law enables economic darwinism a means of selecting out of the market those firms no longer able to compete within it whereas a socialist economy conventionally does not permit enterprises to go out of existence it is a defining characteristic of a market economy that firms fail and that poorly managed assets be taken away from one set of managers and placed in
in effect reasoned as if this end state even now existed race was ostensibly already irrelevant to the life chances of minorities in america in this context not only was affirmative action unnecessary but it threatened the american existed race was ostensibly already irrelevant to the life chances of minorities in america in this context not only was affirmative action unnecessary but it threatened the american racial paradise by victimizing whites making them the new minority in its first firm instantiation as equal protection law colorblindness drew heavily on the redescription of race constitutionally pioneered by powell in bakke positing whites as black to justify heightened review but blacks as justify reactionary colorblindness was initially articulated by persons who had supported the civil rights movement in toppling de jure segregation but who opposed the campaign to challenge through race conscious means the de facto racial hierarchy that permeated american society though i use the term neoconservatives it is important not to lose sight of the liberal credentials of figures such as glazer and especially moynihan who became a stalwart of the democratic party expertise on issues of welfare and urban poverty in the rise of ethnicity as a countervailing narrative of american race relations there s something of a nixon to china dynamic for it was liberal northern elites rather than the post brown southern converts to colorblindness who laid the groundwork for the current court s embrace of reactionary colorblindness but what of those liberals who favored affirmative action after all the great weight of elite opinion supported race groundwork for the current court s embrace of reactionary colorblindness but what of those liberals who favored affirmative action after all the great weight of elite opinion supported race conscious remedies in the early in retrospect liberal support for remedial uses of race did little to impede the development of reactionary colorblindness indeed the language and logic of some of affirmative action s most outspoken legal defenders sounded little different than that of action s colorblind critics a william brennan justice brennan supported race conscious remedies but he did so ambivalently in bakke brennan portrayed preferential treatment as a threat to liberal notions of merit and also warned that race conscious remedies engendered risks of minority stigmatization and racial separatism state programs designed ostensibly to ameliorate the effects of past racial discrimination obviously create the hazard of stigma since they may promote racial separatism and reinforce the views of those who believe that members of racial minorities are inherently incapable of succeeding on their in these comments brennan summarized concerns he had elaborated at length in ujo where he had spent three pages raising various objections to affirmative action from the fear that plans purportedly favoring minorities might in fact disguise policies aimed at hurting them to the concern that many whites saw preferential treatment as to respond to the equation of affirmative action and noxious discrimination in bakke at two junctures brennan moved toward the recognition that race constituted a system of subordination at the outset of his opinion when he detailed the sorry history of black exclusion from legal and near the end when he recounted how rom the inception of our national life negroes have been subjected to unique legal disabilities impairing access to equal educational ultimately however brennan did not offer an account of race grounded in subjugation instead he proffered the following assessment race like gender and illegitimacy is an immutable characteristic which its possessors are powerless to escape or set aside such divisions are contrary to our deep belief that legal burdens should bear some relationship to individual responsibility or set aside the problematic claim that race gender and illegitimacy are focus instead on brennan s reliance on liberal individualism brennan described racism s central harm as he had the harm of sexism in frontiero as a derogation of individuality for brennan as late as to make a distinction on the basis of race or gender harmed the individual by treating him or her differently based on a characteristic over which the individual had no control thereby to make a distinction on the basis of race or gender harmed the individual by treating him or her differently based on a characteristic over which the individual had no control thereby impinging upon liberal notions of meritocracy and moral desert brennan was surely correct that racism and sexism take into account aspects of identity over which persons exercise little or no volition nevertheless describing this as the central harm wreaked by these illegitimate hierarchies missed their dynamic racism and sexism gain social meaning and destructive power from the ubiquitous deployment of force violence degradation coercion and dominance not merely through the tendency to make distinctions on the basis of criteria outside individual control brennan s focus on capricious mistreatment virtually invited an equation of invidious and benign discrimination alan bakke could argue in effect that because of his race an immutable characteristic he was powerless to escape on the basis of factors beyond individual control say age place of birth or familial wealth while affording no heightened constitutional protection he might have added that arbitrary mistreatment did not rise even remotely to the level of the group subordination the court had begun to address in its racial jurisprudence and that by no stretch of the imagination could the costs of affirmative action be equated with the brutality of white supremacy but brennan failed to offer these racial jurisprudence and that by no stretch of the imagination could the costs of affirmative action be equated with the brutality of white supremacy but brennan failed to offer these rejoinders instead to distinguish benign from invidious discrimination brennan resorted to the notion of stigma he wrote in bakke there is absolutely no basis for concluding that bakke s rejection as a result of davis s use of racial preference will affect him throughout his life in the same way as segregation of the negro schoolchildren in brown i would have
the less modernized cork region may account for the relative lack of local market towns cork unlike dublin lacked waterborne access via canals too much of its region and its elite lacked comparable two factors may have prevented cork from exercising the urban shadow effect of depressing the number of middle level centers in its region the fact that cork city lies virtually on the normal value contour line in figure seems consistent with this hypothesis the nine regions that are not named in table would fall into intermediate positions if we added a medium inequality row and a partially developed column and their central place systems not surprisingly tendencies toward particular types of connectivity conclusion this exercise in exploratory data analysis offers an empirical approach to the problem of identifying the hybrid forms of colonialism suggested by howe as a way of conceptualizing the impact of medieval and early modern colonization on the economic social and political structures of ireland since the eighteenth century we hope that irish economic historians in particular empirical research to characterize and explain the structures of dominance in nineteenth century ireland on a regional basis more fully and authoritatively than has been possible in this exploratory exercise for a wider range of historians of modern ireland our work raises a number of interpretive questions concerning the formation of identities of ethnoreligious for example that the zone of classic central place connectivity between dublin and cork was also the area of highest mass attendance in pre famine ireland invites further investigation of the role of the prosperous rural catholic elite of this area in the formation of an essentially communal catholic nationalism in post famine ireland indeed one can understand the spatial patterns we have found as supportive of three alternative candidates to replace the ascendancy in post famine ireland a largely presbyterian industrial elite in and around belfast a modestly well off catholic elite in the southeast and a largely protestant mercantile and administrative elite in dublin to which catholics were gradually admitted to formulate the situation in this way is to reintroduce contingency into a scenario that is often viewed through a teleological lens of nationalism and or sectarianism we intend in another the spatial structures we have delineated in this essay for interpreting the course of irish history in the post famine era for social scientists in several disciplines interested in issues of develop ment and stratification in a wider arena than irish history our analysis suggests methodologies for operationalizing a body of theory that has been occasionally cited but rarely applied for example even among those countries whose experience of domination in the most literal a colonial power is considerably more recent and unambiguous than that of ireland there may be considerable diversity our own expectation would be that in many cases what appears to be a simple core periphery relationship between an imperial metropolis and a remote colonial territory will be found on examination to be spatially much more complex africa s deep level gold mines john higginson summary economists and historians have identified the period between and as one marked by the movement of capital and labor across the globe at unprecedented speed the accompanying spread of the gold standard and industrial techniques contained volatile and ambiguous implications for workers everywhere industrial engineers made new machinery and industrial techniques the measure of south africa s deep level gold mines in the era following the anglo provides a powerful example of just how lethal the new benchmarks of human effort could be when by close to africans refused to return to the mines mining policy began to coalesce around solving the labor shortage problem and dramatically reducing working costs engineers especially american engineers rapidly gained the confidence of the companies that of the far east rand by bringing morethan indentured chinese workers to the mines to make up for the postwar shortfall in unskilled labor in late but the dangerous working conditions that drove african workers away from many of the deep level mines persisted three years later in their persistence provoked a bitter strike by white drill men introduction imperialism and its discontents hes lines and a large part of the official duty of these cabinets is to keep an eye on each other s wash and grab what they can of it as opportunity offers all the territorial possessions of all the political establishments of the earth including america of course consist of pilferings from other people s wash mark twain the money that will be required here in south africa is startling in its amounts feel that organized capital will have great opportunities honnold to robert goering july i do nt think that robinson crusoe was much of an engineer until he had friday to help him henry a colleague of honnold markets especially labor markets give off ambiguous signals about what is the modern roots of this ambiguity can be found in the dramatic mobility of capital and labor between and not until the present era have either been so industrial capitalism drew the world together as never before during this period the new proximity contained immense implications for the laboring masses of the industrial and colonial countries few of them were hundreds of thousands of africans amerindians hauled off to labor on sugar plantations in the caribbean peru south africa mauritius and hawaii they built railroads in places as removed from each other as california and uganda they dug precious and base metals and coal out of the earth in indonesia malaya south africa china and brazil none were freely contracted their time of laboring was something just short of bondage the industrial powers including japan created a climate in which the european labor became appallingly cheap and apparently military enclosure of most of the non western world and the subsequent demand that the colonies pay for themselves hastened the advent of a second servitude based on the indentured labor of non white peoples from the colonial and semi colonial countries this second servitude bore a
topographical properties defined by physical elements for instance walls doorways windows and columns as well as social settings like gathering areas rest areas and halls that do not always have physical bound aries in situations where people relate their social a particular area of space convexity is established without physical settings but with people s movements and activity hence in this study the concept of convexity is expanded to embrace three dimensional arrangements where a sense of rooms within a room prevails justified graph the justified graph or graph is used as the basis for structural and syntactic analysis it reveals a permeability structure by graph representation where every convex space in the system is to its relation to every other space or the relational logic of parts to the whole hillier describes the characteristics of a justified graph as follows in this we imagine that we are in a space which we call the root or base of the graph and represent this asa circle with a cross inscribed then representing spaces as circles and relations of access as lines connecting them we align immediately above the root all spaces which are directly connected to the and draw in the connections these are the spaces at depth one from the root then an equal distance above the depth one row we align the spaces that connect directly to first row spaces forming the line of depth two spaces and connect these to the depth one spaces and so on the justified graph however is more than a simple illustrative tool used to clarify space configuration in buildings where space syntax is concerned the configurational variables depth and rings turn out to of architectural space configuration and also the means by which architecture can carry culture justified graphs are the link between representation and quantitative analysis results the permeability maps show that in nine cases there is one internal link between the male domain and that of the family a ringy structure and spaces from the male domain lie on a ring the presence of a ring illustrates the property of choice and the degree to which the relationship between domains is controlled hanson explains it is these spatial potentials which are used to make a culturally intelligible pattern of space within the domestic interior it is notable here that the ringy structures permit the head of the family or other male members to choose to enter the aali through the family domain this choice offers easy and direct accessibility between the two domains yet movement is still controlled by social codes in the zabite houses the distinction between the two domains is sharp and mobility is more controlled in one case there is more than one option connecting the two domains here the head of the family or other male members of the family as well as their male visitors can choose to enter the houdjrat the exterior domain or through the skifa to the upper level in the case of one internal permeability link results demonstrate that in most cases the link is made through either the ikoumar or the tigharghart has a separate access to the outside world the remaining houses in the sample have a single exit to the exterior where the two domains have the same access to the outside world through the skifa a look at the dwellings as a configuration of spatial user zones rather than functions reveals interesting findings one of them shows that the family zone is more integrated than the male zone these findings suggest that the the house as composed of two user domains is one of the parameters that needs to be considered in relation to the traditional zabite house the analysis also reveals that the female zone which includes a number of function spaces is not a segregated sphere as many scholars have claimed in fact the male zone comes out as more segregated than the female zones it would seem therefore that the female sphere is best thought of as a multi functional space each with its own needs a general overview of the house of this mzab sample suggests a basic model that defines the house as a collection of domains this model is built on sociocultural norms the houses tend to be divided into two separate domains one exclusively used by the inhabit ants and the other reserved for receiving male guests thus the configuration appears to modulate the social dynamics of the occupants by distancing the hosts from immediate contact with male guests the analyzed a tree like structure as characteristic of the zabite home however in some cases the houses appear to be rooted to their sites by a ring or cycle that passes through either the ikoumar or the tigharghart the ring from the skifa through the aali to the ikoumar or the tigharghart permits a degree of fine tuning of the host guest relation within the houses compared to other berber houses in northern algeria it would seem then that the spatial configuration of the mzab is the a conservative attitude that does not allow for variation by the opening up of routes a second spatial type of the houses is deep and ringy and can be considered as the most obvious manifestation of the fine tuning of configuration to modulate the social dynamics of the house occupants guests hosts and men women the remaining houses can be characterized as shallow and ringy a configuration that offers the residents a choice of routes hanson et al in relation to the exterior both domains are shallow and tend to be located close to the exterior however they differ in relation to each other the front is surprisingly for the family female domain and the back is for the male domain the findings also suggest which create formal and regulated encounters space is structured in the image of the relations between male and female solidarities which appears
hence it has a very abstract and schematic meaning basic meaning as an infinitive marker to does not have a more basic meaning in physical space as in there are daily flights to boston contextual meaning versus basic meaning if we consider to as an infinitive marker the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning if we consider the lexeme to as a whole the contextual meaning contrasts with the basic spatial meaning of the preposition to however we have not found a way in which the contextual meaning can be understood by comparison with the basic meaning contextual meaning in this context convince means to persuade a large number of people to change their views about sonia ghandi s suitability as a political leader basic meaning the verb convince does not have a different more basic meaning contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning those who have the right to vote in elections basic meaning the basic meaning of indians is all inhabitants of india contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning does not significantly contrast with the basic meaning and in any case is not understood by comparison with the more general meaning metaphorically used no that it introduces the direct object complement of the verb to convince hence it has a very abstract and schematic meaning basic meaning as a complementizer subordinating conjunction that does not have a more basic meaning if we consider the lexeme that as a whole the demonstrative pronoun determiner that has the basic physical meaning of indicating that a particular referent can be identified as being spatially distant from the by the text as in give me that hammer contextual meaning versus basic meaning if we consider that as a complementizer subordinating conjunction the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning if we consider the lexeme that as a whole the contextual meaning contrasts with a more basic meaning however we have not found a way in which the contextual meaning can be understood by comparison with the basic meaning she indicates a female referent who is uniquely identifiable in the situation evoked by the text basic meaning the pronoun she does not have a more basic meaning contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning metaphorically used no is copular linking verb to be does not have a different more basic meaning if we consider the lexeme to be as a whole the verb also has the meaning of indicating existence however this meaning is rather formal in contemporary english and cannot easily be regarded as the basic meaning of the verb contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning is the play a particular role it therefore refers to personal qualities such as leadership integrity talent independence and so on basic meaning the adjective fit has a different meaning to do with being healthy and physically strong as in running around after the children keeps me fit we note that the suitability meaning is historically older than the healthy meaning the shorter oxford english dictionary on historical principles meaning as from medieval english and used in shakespeare whereas the earliest record of the sport meaning is however we decided that the healthy meaning can be considered as more basic because it refers to what is directly physically experienced contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning contrasts terms of physical health and strength metaphorically used yes to contextual meaning in this context to has the purely grammatical function of signaling the infinitive form of the verb hence it has a very abstract and schematic meaning basic meaning as an infinitive marker to does not have a more basic meaning as a preposition to has the more basic meaning of introducing the end point or boston contextual meaning versus basic meaning if we consider to as an infinitive marker the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning if we consider the lexeme to as a whole the contextual meaning contrasts with the basic spatial meaning of the preposition to however we have not found a way in which the contextual meaning can be understood by comparison with the basic meaning metaphorically used no expression wear the mantle means to have a leading role within a family whose members have recently occupied positions of high office in a particular democratic system the contextual meaning of wear is have or bear and the contextual meaning of mantle is the familial responsibility basic meaning the basic meaning of wear in wear the mantle is defined as the first sense of the word in the macmillan dictionary as follows to have something on your body as clothing decoration or the soedhp indicates that this meaning is also historically prior contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning contrasts with the basic meaning and can be understood by comparison with it we can understand the process of following family members in having a prominent political role in terms of physically wearing the item of clothing that symbolizes royal power metaphorically used yes the has the grammatical function of indicating definite reference basic meaning the definite article the does not have a more basic meaning contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning is the same as the basic meaning metaphorically used no mantle of clothing now usually only worn by people in power such as monarchs as a symbol of their position contextual meaning versus basic meaning the contextual meaning contrasts with the basic meaning and can be understood by comparison with it we can understand the role of political leadership that someone may take on in a democracy after other members of their family in terms of the garment that is traditionally worn by a monarch in this context the preposition of has the abstract grammatical meaning of indicating a relationship between two entities in the situation evoked by the text basic meaning
a mean density of kg the depth of fluidization and effective stress with time were computed unfortunately the tests were too short to attain equilibrium depth although they show an exponential shape of the fluidization depth with time an increasing time required for fluidization with depth below the interface was also noticed mud from hillsboro bay fla four pairs of miniature pore and total pressure transducers were used to continuously monitor the stress levels in the sediment subjected to progressive nonbreaking waves in a wave flume water depth cm mud depth cm wave height cm period s by tracking a very small effective stress level the fluid mud bed interface defined as the point of zero effective structural breakdown of the bed and consequent fluid mud formation can occur from wave induced stresses in the bed fluid mud transport transport of fluid mud occurs by vertical entrainment current advection gravity flow down slopes and by wave induced mass transport settling was described in the preceding section vertical transport by entrainment entrained by the accelerating currents after the intervening slack water however in the lower energy conditions prevalent during neap tides the fluid mud that forms is typically not completely re entrained instead the lutoclines rise in the water column during accelerating currents and then resettle during decelerating currents this finding by kirby emphasizes two modes of entrainment of fluid mud entrainment of the high density suspension upon the surface of stationary suspended layers leading to stripping of eddy sized masses of sediment from the surface kirby and transport into the overlying water column and entrainment of the fluid mud in mass as was observed by kirby to occur during neap tides in the severn estuary and also reported by mehta specifically mehta found that the motion of the entire fluid mud high density suspension due to shear stresses imposed by the flow for the first mode of entrainment the mechanical shear strength of the suspension s aggregate network will determine at least in part whether or not the suspension will be entrained if the shear strength of the aggregate network is greater than the shear imposed by the turbulent eddies at the interface then the suspension will not be entrained kato and phillips defined an ue where ue entrainment rate dh dt and friction velocity at the fluid mud water column interface they found that decreased with increasing stratification which follows from the increasing degree of turbulence suppression with increasing measure of stratification found by among others trowbridge and kineke they also found an inverse relation between entrainment reference density and average depth of the upper low concentration layer specifically r ross and mehta defined the entrainment coefficient in terms of the mean velocity in the upper layer the relationship they found was ue riu where riu wind waves on the water surface agitate the sediment bed enough to resuspend it throughout the water column once suspended in the water sediment can be easily transported by currents mehta and mcanally indicate that the horizontal transport strongly depends upon the vertical transport mechanisms and hence it is important to identify the vertical fluxes to calculate the sediment load entrainment depends upon the turbulent boundary layer and carried above the lutocline by turbulent diffusion the transport of fluid mud increases with the flow induced shear stresses as the fraction of deposited material decreases fluid mud streaming occurs in some locations when nonbreaking surface wind waves fluidize the top layers of the bed and move it as a near bottom fluid mud layer in the same direction as been ob served in the shelf sediment west of atchafalaya bay la and along the southwest coast of india rodriguez and mehta there is no evidence that shear flows over fluid mud cause it to flow while retaining the characteristics of fluid mud at flows large enough to exert flow inducing surface drag entrainment into the water column and transport in suspension is known to flows are flows consisting of sediment or a sediment fluid mixture moving under the action of gravity benjamin usually also identified as density current the proper term to refer to the type of current of interest in sediment transport is turbidity current density current refers to any current in a fluid that is kept in motion by the force of gravity acting on small differences in density turbidity currents denote density currents the presence of suspended solids bagnold migniot cohesive beds after they are fluidized by waves or currents can move on a bottom slope by gravity as turbidity currents filling the low areas turbidity currents are also generated when water with a high concentration of suspended sediment discharges into marine or fresh water or a cloud of cohesive sediments settles after a bulk erosion event generates a fluid mud lens that slowly the suspended sediment in the incoming water causes a density contrast between that and the ambient fluid and the turbidity current will flow down the density slope usually remaining near the bottom turbidity currents are also caused by catastrophic failure along a shallow to steep slope eg by seismic shock or storm waves fluid mud flows as sediment gravity flows exhibit complex waves and currents wright et al used a richardson number criteria to show that at up to moderately high concentrations kg turbulent and laminar fluid mud gravity flows are distinguished by a critical bed slope such that if the slope is too gentle the fluid mud flow cannot generate sufficient internal shear to overcome its inherently stable density anomaly in order to generate turbulence by sin crit where slope of the bed cd is the bottom drag coefficient and ricrit is the critical gradient richardson number this yields a typical critical slope of about to or equivalently about the scaling of wright et al suggests that in the absence of ambient waves or currents fluid mud on a slope greater than about will accelerate downhill internal shear to become turbulent fluid mud turbidity
people until kim informed her that the woman was called lucy the defendant thought lucy was with her boyfriend but now believes the other male present to between kim and lucy and the male adopted an aggressive stance she believed the male to be called andy the defendant did not take part in the argument but stood close by once announced as an alibi the account called for further evidence the alibi witness linda s account needed the support of the friend who accompanied her would kim confirm the account the secondary disclosure delivered some surprising evidence kim when the prime suspect heavily incriminated our client the defence seemed trapped it was bound to the repetitively stated alibi and at the same time exposed by the only alibi witness the only plus kim s evidence was not admissible in court since she was at that point interviewed and pressurized as a suspect modes of transformation something is uttered in the procedural course in other words not every communication enters and matters as procedural history it makes a difference whether kim in the third story delivers her alibi in the witness box at the police or in the law firm or think of steve striker in the first story what happened to his answer i was not finished yet given to the police officer what would have happened if the jury received the same answer simply via the protocol how was it possible to cut back the police protocol that represented tim blue s account of what happened that night in his friend s in the following i elaborate a range of modes of transformation in accordance with the three case studies there are i argue three different ways and courses to transform utterances into discursive facts the differences have their bearing on how the procedural past is present at a given moment only by including all three modes the analysis of legal discourse can explicate how contributions are bound to prior stages the three modes alter generally the analytical status of the two concepts launched at the outset of this paper of the procedural history and of the field of presence this table shall introduce the three modes of transformation statements do not arise as foucault implies from direct transformations of discursive an archive that remembers everything said during the procedure as luhmann implies as the table suggests the transformation of utterances into statements takes place at different sites in different temporalizations and with various effects depending on the chosen mode case representation is understood differently speech may refer to the very event itself to a whole array of related iterations or to rehearsed and coached in the following i spell out the three modes in light of the above cases each mode i suggest in the conclusion entails safeguards that shield the participants from the strong procedural dynamics staging the first mode is commonly conceived as the major one the theatrical metaphor is applied to criminal trials within a wide range of sociolegal these may sociolegal in the mode of staging utterances are turned into statements right away the immediate transformation makes it impossible to clearly separate one from the other the mode of immediacy fosters the impression that utterances were in fact statements per se they are within this mode only identical with the embodied and staged but how is this possible in order to understand this mode one has to study the provides the defined arena for the cases to materialize the court defines speech positions the focus of attention and the relevant audience it grants a voice to the few and excludes the noise of the many it introduces a multiplicity and hierarchy of participants bystanders in the public gallery mobile service personnel on the site seated assistants in the center appointed decision makers in prominent ranks competent asking in the inner circle and the called and answering contributors in the stand the court frames a centered but complex social the crown court is a discourse the court demarcates who speaks when to whom from where etc the speech exchanges are governed by observable traffic rules some of these rules witnesses do not talk to the jury directly they answer the barristers questions only from the witness box and as a witness one is address the the jury is supposed to receive the cases solely from inside court meaning from the exchanges between barrister and witness and from the closing speeches all these rules are in place independent from the cases issues participants etc this is true not despite but because of strictly defined the general frame processes countless cases and remains in place as the same the general automat is inevitably co enacted as factual hearing the automat constitutes framed interactions for all practical purposes it may well be called a political machine that ritualises and standardises proximity the traffic rules introduce an alien kind of interaction everything seems slower repeated explicated explained the resulting rule bound performance makes it interestingly enough easier to follow the matters than a pub talk or a table talk how does the many hearings passing it the courtroom displays a center of attention the positioning of voices does signify defined relevancies the automat eases the reception of the dealings the individual set up of the hearing is freed from case related discourse ethical deliberations the inflexibility facilitates the immediate and pertinent discoursivation only here embodied utterances are turned into discursive facts right away one point is often forgotten and important for our concern of discursive transformation the automat is not only crucial as a general format it gives room for stable expectations as well it enables preparation and provides an orientation point to weigh the cases during the plea bargaining the court provides a stable frame of orientation for both the defending and the prosecuting party this is how a utterance can be disarmed this is how a weak defence can be measured in advance this is how future demands can
for the emperor secondly and no less significantly the fact that antagonisms within the ruling family were evidently sharp around the first part of the also says something about the support which nikephoros diogenes was able to attract for his own conspiracy not long afterwards some of his success in gathering those around him must have come from his ability to exploit the differences among the elite in byzantium as we have seen some of those making up nikephoros supporters were members of the senate and were high ranking military figures and while some may have nursed grievances about alexios reign zonaras is deeply critical of the emperor s failure to consult or reward the senate adequately others it and appear not to have been confined solely to michael taronites the alexiad drops several hints that hostility to alexios was not confined to taronites alone within the imperial family and that other members of the family had leant their support to nikephoros diogenes for example anna komnene pointedly states that when the emperor called together all his intimates to consider what should be done once of his family and kinship group as well as the family retainers who were truly loyal to him who attended an important and revealing nuance the same distinction again shortly after noting that the emperor took up position in the imperial tent only with those of his intimates who had not been polluted by the poison of the conspiracy that is to say then that some of those closest to him had betrayed him suspicion naturally falls on adrian komnenos here for several reasons undermine his nephew john and his own brother isaac and implicit in his doing so of course was a wider subversion of komnenian rule and of the authority of one of his other brothers the emperor as adrian s scheming served as a pointed challenge to alexios authority seeking to play him off against other members within the imperial family more telling however and more convincing than this rather plans well before these became known to the emperor as a result therefore when alexios called his brother to his tent to tell him about the forthcoming plot against him and to ask him for his help in uncovering the plot and defusing a highly delicate situation it was clear that the megas domestikos was already aware of what was going on it which may explain why he was full of despair when he left his brother to speak with diogenes the possibility of adrian s complicity is further raised by the candid talk which he had with diogenes soon after it is striking to note for example that one of the topics of discussion was a previous attempt on the emperor s life which had taken place following a polo match apart have been behind this earlier assassination attempt the fact that adrian both knew about it and chose to speak about it with diogenes should cause us to raise our eyebrows for while anna komnene also uses the recollection of the polo playing incident to show how alexios enjoyed divine protection it does not take much to read between the lines here to understand that nikephoros had indeed been responsible for the failed assault on had not only known that diogenes had planned this as had been widely rumoured but also that alexios brother had known the relevant details of this plot too there is of course yet another reason to suspect that adrian might have thrown his lot in with diogenes he was after all married to brother in law against his own brother this would reveal some crucial insights into the workings of komnenian government and of the stranglehold which alexios and his immediate family had supposedly established over the machinery of the state in late eleventh century byzantium in particular it would force us to re evaluate the concept of power in this period and also of the received view based on zonaras interest groups receiving and retaining authority at the expense of all others if the possibility of adrian supporting diogenes serves as one example of the subversion of this image therefore so too does the fact that in a neat twist it was nikephoros and not alexios i who had carefully chosen the megas domestikos as his brother in law and not the other way round their understanding of the way in which alexios was able to dominate byzantium the fact that senior members of the imperial family were targeted from without by ambitious magnates by rivals and by those opposed to the emperor s reign at that should go not only some way towards requiring a fundamental reassessment both of what power actually meant in his period and also about the ways in which and above all the true extent the empire at least in the first decade or decade and a half of alexios rule naturally by the middle of the twelfth century and specifically during the reign of manuel i komnenos alexios grandson marriage policy and the reliance on the immediate and the wider family were both the elements which were well established as the basis of komnenian byzantium characterize komnenian rule in the twelfth century immediately after his accession the reality however is that his policies his establishment of a power base and indeed his own position within the empire were simply not as secure or even as planned as authors such as zonaras and even anna komnene state and imply respectively it is no coincidence therefore that both these commentators were writing in the middle or even at the end of the twelfth century and certainly after more sixty years of uninterrupted komnenian rule as such therefore there is a key and legitimate question to consider as to just how far these authors views of alexios reign and especially the early years were influenced and distorted by what was to follow it is therefore worthwhile combing over the diogenes conspiracy
plausibility given that the bae and the fbaen are the only two methods shown to be influenced by the ebta effect we submit that the magnitude of east asian self enhancement using these methods would be more accurately estimated if we adjusted these methods the bae and fbaen in a preliminary effort to address this question hamamura heine and takemoto sought to test whether self enhancement effects in studies employing the bae and fbaen methods are artificially inflated by the ebta effect in two studies japanese and canadians were asked to evaluate themselves and the average other with respect to a list of positively valenced traits as well as to estimate their likelihood of experiencing a number of negative life events replicating the findings of the meta analyses in both studies all cultural groups showed significant self enhancement in both methods however hamamura et al also asked participants to make comparable evaluations than the average other when the ebta effect was circumvented however japanese were no longer self enhancing but were significantly self critical that is they evaluated themselves less positively than the random other the european canadians were also less self enhancing when the ebta effect was circumvented than when it was not however to self enhance more for important compared with unimportant traits those studies that employ the bae methodology find evidence that there is a positive correlation between the importance of a trait and the degree to which east asians self enhanced see heine kitayama hamamura in press hamamura et al also tested whether the positive correlations between importance and self enhancement found in bae studies were driven by the ebta effect their reasoning was that to the extent people view specific others as better than average because of the ebta effect they should rate specific others as better than average especially for those most afforded by traits that are especially valenced and this suggests that the ebta effect should be especially pronounced for the most positive traits in support of this reasoning hamamura et al found that although there was a positive correlation between trait importance and self enhancement in bae studies it was significantly reduced when the ebta after the ebta effect was controlled but the japanese correlation was no longer significant general discussion the question of whether people self enhance to a similar extent across cultures is an important one for any theory regarding why people are motivated to view themselves positively the extent of this cultural variation is striking of studies in the present metaanalysis for those comparisons the cultural differences emerged across all of the different methods except for an implicit measure of self esteem using the implicit associations test although the magnitude of the within culture effects varied enormously across method the magnitude of the effect for east asians was strongly correlated clear evidence for east asian self enhancement emerged in only two of the methods that that east asian self enhancement emerged only in the bae and the fbaen methods and not in other designs suggests that the effects might not be because of self enhancing motivations as both of these methods have been shown to be confounded by a significant cognitive component namely the ebta effect found no cultural difference in the extent to which japanese and americans evaluated their best friends relative to other students and endo heine and lehman found that japanese and canadians view the quality of their relationships with their families and friends in equally positive terms these findings are somewhat consistent with self enhancement these two analyses do not reveal that the westerners were more self enhancing than the east asians however a number of other studies find that westerners enhance their groups significantly more than do east asians heine and lehman found that canadians viewed their family members universities and social groups more positively than did japanese snibbe kitayama markus school s football teams whereas japanese did not endo et al found that canadians viewed the quality of their romantic relationships more positively than did japanese and evaluated their family members friends and romantic partners more positively than did japanese as well crocker luhtanen blaine and broadnax found that americans of european descent had higher collective displayed a more pronounced group serving bias for sex typed behaviors than did chinese kitayama palm masuda karasawa and carroll found that japanese viewed their own cities to be more vulnerable to earthquakes than a neighboring city whereas the opposite pattern was found for americans stevenson and stigler found that east asian parents were national pride find that americans have more positive views of their country than do east asians we do not know of any studies that find evidence that east asians enhance their groups significantly more than westerners in sum east asians sometimes show evidence for however in some studies east asians show evidence for critical views of their groups in contrast to the consistent group enhancing pattern seen among westerners furthermore the most common pattern to emerge from cross cultural studies is that east asian group enhancing tendencies appear to be at best mixed and does not provide much evidence in support of this alternative hypothesis do east asians self enhance in domains that are especially important to them a second alternative account that warrants consideration is the possibility that east asian self enhancement might appear to be weaker than that of westerners because the studies do not focus on that are especially important to them for example with respect to interdependent or collectivistic traits a number of articles raise this as an alternative explanation of the identified cultural differences in self enhancement in particular sedikides et al recently conducted a metaanalysis interdependent domains and for traits that they view to be especially important meta analyses often allow for clear conclusions to be drawn and theirs is a compelling claim however the inclusion criteria of the sedikides et al meta analysis apparently omits a number of relevant studies and thus we have doubts about
of strong implied properties notably that a small open economy cannot produce a greater number of goods than it has factor types indeed for the stolper amuelson theorem to hold it has to produce the same number of goods as it has factors both before and after a trade shock consequently if we are modelling the effects of trade on returns to just two sectorally mobile factors for this purpose we aggregate together the sectors in official statistics into two broad sectors for all our models for our other model formulations we make the minimal number of changes to this basic framework in the specific factors model we have three factors capital skilled labor and unskilled labor though capital versions we reallocate capital income from our database to the other two factors proportionately by sector so the simplified model just has two factors the heckscher hlin model differs from the partial mobility one in that and s are set to zero calibration based on this assumption means assuming a long run equilibrium in the economy whereas with set at a non zero level we economy is at a short run equilibrium only the latter treatment means that the adjustment process for the unskilled factor reflects an outcome influenced by short run adjustment costs in all three models calibrated here both goods are fully tradable and perfect substitutes for foreign goods consequently if we assume the uk is a small open economy prices of the two goods are determined on global markets and can be taken as exogenous a consequence of these assumptions is that the production and factor demand side of the economy can be treated as separable from the goods demand side we can simply treat world prices as given with no need to model domestic goods demand import and export volumes one potential problem with the above trade formulations and we assume values for the differential between skilled and unskilled wages in the expanding and declining sectors and note that for our central case we assume an elasticity of substitution between factors in production and the unknowns at this stage are the model parameters for each sector and each time period data we use data for the uk for and for our model analyses similar to those used by abrego and whalley they used data on skilled and unskilled employment and wages for two broad categories of industry taken from the uk labour force a per cent fall in the relative price of unskilled intensive imports between and based on an estimate for the same aggregate sectors as above derived by abrego and whalley from neven and wyplosz as two of our models have only two factors against the three in abrego and whalley we reallocate income accruing to the fixed factor in whalley value added is rounded to equal gross output again this is done to keep the model as close as possible to the schematic formulation of the heckscher hlin amuelson theory which does not take account of intermediate inputs a summary version of the and uk data we use is shown in price and wage data are in real terms an important feature of the data used is the marked difference in skilled unskilled labor usage skilled to unskilled workers is more than twice as great in sector as in sector in both years the rise in the average real wage of unskilled labor was approximately percent between and reflecting an increase in the premium for skilled over unskilled wage rates from percent in to over percent in this occurs despite the ratio of skilled to unskilled labor inputs rising in both sectors while there is an increase in total production both sectors show rising output the change in industrial structure in the data is therefore a relatively minor factor compared with what a heckscher ohlin model would usually be expected to produce in response to the assumed percent fall in the relative goods the unskilled labor mobility cost reflects studies which tend to indicate that unskilled labor may be less mobile between sectors than periods in the usa are generally longer for unskilled than skilled workers which in terms of our model might suggest a higher threshold wage differential for the unskilled before they start to move between sectors this is borne out by the uk study of haynes et al which suggests that those with lower skills experience longer unemployment duration we have chosen for simplicity to assume that only unskilled labor and we use afigure of percent for an pper end estimate of mobility costs in later sensitivity analysis we also evaluate models with lower values model results we use three calibrations to the and data one involving the long run two factor model in which all factors are able to move freely in response to price and technology shocks a second short run model differentials exceed a threshold assumed to be percent of wages and a third using a three factor model with sectorally fixed capital we concentrate initially on the case where the elasticity of substitution between factors of production is in both sectors components of the decomposition the model laid out in section uses a relatively flexible functional form calibrated to the data for and consequently we are able to decompose the observed change in wage inequality between and between the effects of changing each of a number of sets of parameters with reference to the production function in equation in particular these are world prices the change in pe pm sector biased technology the relative changes in ae and am parameters and factor quality changes in au and as factor endowments changes in and results tables outlines our decomposition results for observed changes in relative wages of skilled and unskilled labor between and using these three calibrated models the contribution of various causal factors to the observed change in the average skilled to unskilled wage by the contribution of each causal factor as a percentage of the total
possible weights while obeying restrictions and respect this procedure may as in melyn and moesen be labeled benefit of the doubt weighting this procedure has also been used in cherchye et al ii a cii in this section we implement our endogenous weight method to construct a cii that combines three composite sub indexes that capture different domains of national performance growth competitiveness environmental sustainability and governance these three domains may represent substitutes in the sense that of one may entail some sacrifice in terms of performance in one or the other dimensions hence each dimension can contribute differently in terms of its relative impact in determining the overall performance ranking of nations our method of aggregation recognizes this potential substitutability when forming the cii and it allows that a different policy mix involving the three domains can yield the same of level of overall performance below we describe each of to form the cii growth competitiveness the domain of economic performance is measured by the value of the wef s this composite index is made up of three sub indices that are intended by the wef to reveal the extent to which a nation s technological capabilities public institutions and macroeconomic environment are supportive of growth in gdp per capita the wef calculates its gci as a weighted average of these three sub indices values of the gci range with being the highest level of performance environmental sustainability performance in the area of environmental sustainability is captured by the values of the environmental sustainability index developed as a collaboration between the wef the yale center for environmental law and policy and the center for international earth science information the esi summarizes underlying primitive variables grouped into five sub indices that capture environmental sustainability environmental systems reducing stress reducing human vulnerability social and institutional capacity and global stewardship the values of the esi we use in constructing our cii are those directly presented by the authors of this index values of the esi range from to governance performance in the area of governance is measured by the values of the governance the gi is built up from six sub indices voice and accountability political stability and absence of violence government effectiveness regulatory quality rule of law and control of corruption values of the gi range from approximately to since each of the three indices use a different measurement scale some the given values of each index to lie on a to scale using linear interpolation as mentioned in the previous section upper and lower bound restrictions on the weights we construct are needed to insure that each of three sub indices contribute at least something to the value of the cii and that no one sub index completely dominates in its contribution to the value of the cii in this regard we specify that each sub index should contribute at least percent to the value of the that no index should contribute more than percent formally these upper and lower bound restrictions for country can be written implementation of restriction is made by including it along with restrictions and when determining the weights that maximize the value of a country s an important advantage of using endogenous weights when constructing a composite index that encompasses as does the cii diverse dimensions is that it is then free from dictatorship that is each country s own relative performance on each dimension determines how the individual dimensions will be weighted rather than the judgments of the developers of an index in particular when a diverse set of domains are to be combined the agenda of the creators of the composite index may choose weights that others might deem either too low or too high on the various dimensions that is whether one accepts the results based on the index reflect one s own value judgment regarding the relative importance of the underlying dimensions as such it is unlikely that the indicator would gain widespread acceptance in contrast when endogenous weights are used debate about inappropriate weights is muted since the source of a country s high or low score is that country s own relative performance on the various dimensions hence attention is directly focused on a ranking among peers and those dimensions where a country does or does not do well a second advantage of our procedure is that rather than attempting to capture alternative domains using vast amounts of primitive data that are then aggregated into a single index we instead use as data input only the composite index values that already purport to capture the dimension of interest the advantage of this is that the implications of a country s emphasis on one dimension versus another are clearly indicated by the weights assigned to dimension hence the weight that a country assigns to alternative dimensions is easily observed and is not obscured by a process that may aggregate perhaps hundreds of primitive variables for a given dimension iii results table i resents the results of calculating the cii for each country the countries are ranked in the highest ranked country finland for comparison the value of the cii that results when equal weights are instead used for each country and the rank of each country based on such values is shown in the third and fourth columns table i the last three columns in table i under the heading weight priority levels indicate on which sub component of the cii a country showed its highest performance and on which component it looking first at the cii values there appears to be a clear differentiation among countries the first four countries perform similarly the next seven countries form a second cluster while the next three countries may be seen as a third cluster likewise a fourth cluster contains those countries ranked to while a fifth cluster comprises italy and greece in terms of dispersion the cii generates significantly more dispersion in index values across countries than does for example the
for sentencing standards to provide a rational basis for patterns of jury verdicts identifying the many allowed to live and the few selected to judgment day came on the third try the judgment however was not the one the court had been reaching out to make since justice goldberg issued his request for proposals for constitutional review according most states wanted the death penalty and wanted it in the discretionary and standardless form that compassionate considerations had seemingly reaching out to reject a per se substantive or type challenge to death sentencing that the petitioners had not made harlan took a strongly hands off or a type stance in light of history experience and the present limitations of human knowledge we the jury the power to pronounce life or death in capital cases is offensive to anything in the constitution including assumedly the cruel and unusual punishment in a concurring opinion justice black likewise rejected all constitutional challenges to the death penalty given the due process clauses textual approval of the the court also held that neither the defendant s right not to testify sentencing required states to separate the guilt and sentencing aspects of capital still in an a type mode justice harlan concluded that it was not the court s role to guarantee trial procedures that are the best of all worlds or that accord with the most enlightened ideas of students of the infant science of criminology or even those that measure up to the individual predilections of members of this court but only to assure that the of defendants justice harlan s analysis was unconvincing in places in finding no constitutional requirement of death sentencing standards harlan concluded that identify before the fact those characteristics of criminal homicides and their perpetrators which call for the death penalty and to express these characteristics in language which can be fairly understood and applied by the sentencing authority appear to be tasks which are beyond present human ability this conclusion gave surprisingly short shrift to standards herbert wechsler had included in the model penal and harlan gave no explanation for his faith that a most human of institutions juries could intuitively make the necessary distinctions in each by dismissing mcgautha s arguments as based only on the peculiar poignancy of the position of a man whose life is at stake harlan also devalued the high stakes that he and the court had for special constitutional protections in death nonetheless it is hardly surprising that the court reached harlan s and black s a type bottom line that the constitution gives judges no leeway to constrain a penalty that the document itself contemplates that american history had both blessed and compassionately modulated and that the states and legislatures were best able to evaluate the puzzle of to an obvious conclusion why had the court opened the issue of capital constitutional lawmaking only to avoid it repeatedly in witherspoon boykin and maxwell and close it predictably in mcgautha two months later the court posed a still more perplexing question by granting review in four cases limited to the question whether the imposition and carrying out of the death penalty in this case all four cases had been held up in the court for nearly two years awaiting the decisions in maxwell and iv taking responsibility gingerly a furman dicta and concurring opinions aside mcgautha s due process decision did not foreclose the cruel and unusual punishment issue the court undertook to review in furman georgia and three companion moreover mcgautha s obeisance to history s negative verdict on its own negative verdict on the possibility that standards could meaningfully constrain discretion meant that a persuasive eighth amendment attack on the only remaining option wholly discretionary capital sentencing would seal the punishment s fate on its face the court s decision in furman was a blockbuster overturning every death sentence and capital statute in the nation on the grounds that discretionary death sentencing procedures violated the described its effect on the root principles of stare decisis federalism judicial restraint and most importantly separation of powers as the case also shattered the court which produced no majority view and nine separate opinions it divided some justices within themselves chief justice burger noted in dissent that we were possessed of legislative power i would either for all crimes or at the very least restrict the use of capital punishment to a small category of the most heinous only by divorc ing the constitutional inquiry from his personal feelings as to the morality and efficacy of the death penalty could he conclude that the penalty passed constitutional justice powell regret ted the failure of some legislative bodies to address the capital punishment issue went further cases such as these provide for me an excruciating agony of the spirit i yield to no one in the depth of my distaste antipathy and indeed abhorrence for the death penalty with all its aspects of physical distress and fear and of moral judgment exercised by finite minds that distaste is buttressed by a belief that capital punishment serves no useful purpose that can be demonstrated is not compatible with the philosophical convictions i have been able to develop it is antagonistic to any sense of reverence for life were i a legislator i would vote against the death penalty but it is here on the legislative branch and secondarily on the executive branch where the authority and responsibility for this kind of action lies the authority should not be taken over by the judiciary in the modern practical impact and divisiveness furman was a doctrinal underachiever it was of a piece with the anticlimactic decisions in witherspoon boykin maxwell and mcgautha the trouble began with the limited question the court granted certiorari to decide does the imposition and carrying out of the death penalty in these cases constitute cruel and unusual punishment in violation of the eighth and type whether death was a cruel and unusual punishment for
data probably because they focus their attention predict that this tendency would be even more amplified if comorbidity were completely liberalized the final effect would be the divorce of clinical practice from the dsm classification rules although the last would prescribe to diagnose all the disorders fulfilling diagnostic criteria without any exclusion what is new is the tentative movement to reconsider the comorbidity problem in a larger context because of its fundamental psychiatric comorbidity was here discussed within the context of kuhn s philosophical theory of scientific revolutions the comorbidity problem was reconceived as a possible scientific anomaly it was shown that reframing the discussion on comorbidity in this way can be methodologically fruitful because if comorbidity is conceived as an anomaly then researchers compare possible alternatives based on their ability to solve anomalies accordingly the present discussion treated comorbidity as if it were an anomaly focusing on the dsm characteristics responsible for its emergence and on the waited impact of possible intraparadigmatic strategies on the crisis of the classification system the fundamental the dsm iii tried to handle comorbidity by adding hierarchical exclusion rules and the reasons that led the authors of subsequent dsm revisions to eliminate many of them as noted the direct effect was the current explosion of comorbidity rates that transformed comorbidity from an opportunity to a serious anomaly pushing the dsm exclusion rules and complete liberalization of comorbidity it was stressed that the first two could have quite possibly resolved the problem nevertheless they are unlikely to be pursued mainly because they would bring with themselves a conventionalist approach that is currently perceived as unsustainable on the on psychiatric classification as an empirically grounded system however at the pragmatic level the final result would be a further dramatic elevation of comorbidity rates and this would amplify problems such as dissatisfaction among clinicians unwieldy over information and finally lack of credibility of the classification system this would this context it soon becomes clear why lilienfeld and waldman linked their radical liberalization of comorbidity to a discussion of the dimensional diagnosis in line with this kuhnian analysis of the debate on spectrum dimensional diagnosis dimensional diagnosis are two of the most frequently discussed alternatives to the categorical dsm system of classification and stressed that to be seriously considered as the possible psychiatric classification system of the new era any revolutionary alternative should demonstrate its superiority over the dsm in resolving that the evaluation of new systems should be performed at various levels and that the ability to solve the comorbidity anomaly is only one of the requested features as a consequence the following predictions focused on the comorbidity problem are the logical conclusions of this paper but should not be intended as a global judgment on the alternative of the dsm axes charney et al comorbidity would be normalized and it would return to its original medical conceptualization however the major problem of this classification is feasibility do we already know enough about the genetic etiology of mental pathologies to use this knowledge as the foundation of the entire be anyway in its most used sense the spectrum diagnosis entails a lumping approach in which similar disorders are linked together in a larger and less rigid category with fuzzy boundaries with a similar approach disorders showing frequent comorbidity are joined together and this should let comorbidity rates decrease however multiform criteria used to include disorders within the spectrum finally in the case of the dimensional diagnosis with this approach the single case would no more be subsumed under a category but in any subject a number of predetermined dimensions would be measured notion of comorbidity would become nonsensical indeed the co occurrence of several dimensions in the same subject is the normal waited result arising from the use of a dimensional model accordingly in this context the position of comorbidity would be analogous to the epicycles of ptolemaic theory other limits may counterbalance this in conclusion in this paper the problem of comorbidity was reframed in accordance with the kuhnian philosophy of science its major achievement was to show that if comorbidity is considered as a kuhnian anomaly then this new point of view may help to evaluate more clearly the waited democracy and transcendence abstract socialism utilitarianism and democracy are according to nietzsche secularised versions of christianity they have continued the monomaniac onesidedness of the christian idea of what a human being is and should be and they have even strengthened this monomania through its immanentization the article shows that this immanentization is of crucial importance for the disappeared christian faith is not only a more radical rupture from the religious past but also a re interpretation or recreation of the notion of transcendence implied in that faith it may sound dangerous to present nietzsche s thoughts on this precious good that we call democracy nietzsche s extremely derogatory remarks on democracy are well not only a form of the decay of political organization but a form of the decay namely the diminution of man making him mediocre and lowering his value democracy is according to nietzsche one of the symptoms of declining life and in twilight of the idols he writes the man who has become free and how much more the mind that has become free spurns the contemptible sort of well being dreamed of by shopkeepers women englishmen and other democrats even if it was only through the obvious abuse of his thinking that the nazis could link themselves to him we must admit that nietzsche s writings also with regard to democracy at least allowed for this abuse it therefore not only sounds but is dangerous to read nietzsche on democracy and yet or by that very token it might be important to confront ourselves with nietzsche s critique of democracy not only for but also in order to test our own democratic convictions as well as to acknowledge and to understand better our possible unease with some features of contemporary nietzsche
the model could be thought of representing the behavior of an nd floor shear type building the nominal model of the structure is assumed to have mass and stiffness properties that are uniformly distributed along the chain ie ki and mind the values of and are the lowest modal frequency of the structure is equal to hz for demonstration purposes measured modal data and are simulated by computing the modal frequencies or nom and mode shape components f nom from the nominal model and then adding gaussian noise in order to simulate the effects of measurement noise and modelling error this added noise is simulated for the r th modal frequency and mode shape from the normal distributions f respectively where i is the identity matrix the magnitude of the model error and measurement noise is controlled by the values of the mean mor and the standard deviation parameters or and f multiple sets of measured modal data are simulated by repeating the previous process using the same nominal model with different samples of the gaussian noise two dof model of the structure has uniform mass distribution ie and stiffness distribution based on the parameterization where the single parameter is used to scale the spring stiffness constants for illustration purposes results are presented for the modal grouping scheme a and for measured modal frequencies only this case involves two objectives and allowing one to graphically demonstrate the pareto of the proposed methodology results are presented for model error levels corresponding to and for four values of the values of and are purposely chosen to simulate model error such that no model in the model class can exactly fit the measured data for both modes simultaneously the number of modal data sets is taken to be nd the optimal values yopt s of the model parameter and the corresponding the prediction error parameters computed using the algorithms i and ii are given in table for various values of the model error according to algorithm ii the optimal residual errors joi equal the optimal value of the prediction error parameters si that is s this relation is asymptotically correct for the results of algorithm i the normalized pdf of the structural model parameter computed using eq is shown in fig figure the pareto optimal parameter values computed using an exhaustive search method are also shown for example the pareto optimal values for for all si vary in the range the corresponding pareto front in the objective space is shown in figs and for the cases of respectively each point along the pareto front corresponds to a particular value of parameters s or due to eq to a particular value of the weights in eq the residual errors joi s that each pareto optimal model s provides to the measured modal frequencies differs as one moves along the pareto front the pdf of the prediction error parameter values along the pareto front is readily computed using eq and is drawn in figs and along the pareto front the peak of along the pareto front occur at the most probable values s of the prediction error parameters computed from algorithm i and correspond to the points pp alg i shown along the pareto front the most probable pareto optimal points pp alg ii also shown in these figures correspond to the optimal prediction error parameters s computed from algorithm ii using eq it is observed from the results in table and in estimates from the two algorithms i and ii are almost identical furthermore for the cases the in fig and the results in table reveal that there are two locally most probable optima models at and close to the edge points of the pareto optimal points for the optimum at is the global optimum yopt while the local optimum at corresponds to slightly lower probability the models in the two different regions in the parameter space fit the data almost equally well both optimal structural models correspond to two different pareto points along the pareto front that are almost equally probable as seen by the most probable values of the pdf in fig for optimum at is the global optimum and dominates the other local optimum at since cases there is only one optimum at yopt that corresponds to a single most probable pareto point along the pareto front shown in fig for the case for all cases considered the pareto optimal models at and differ by the fit they provide to the two modal frequencies specifically the pareto optimal model provides a very good fit to the first modal frequency with small residual while the residual error for the second modal frequency is relatively high corresponding to in contrast the pareto optimal model provides a very good fit to the second modal frequency with small residual error while the residual error for the first modal frequency is relatively high corresponding to from the results in is worth noting that among the structural models and the most probable structural model yopt is chosen as the one that provides a better fit to the modal frequency that contains the least scatter in the measured value of that frequency specifically for the optimal model yopt provides the best fit to the first modal frequency since for the provides the best fit to the second modal frequency since for comparison purposes the optimal value and the corresponding probability of the structural model parameter computed from conventional approaches for fixed value are also reported in table and shown with a circle in the parameter and objective spaces in figs and respectively note that the optimal value x and it differs from the probable values yopt or computed at the optimal s from the results in fig the probability of the optimal value as predicted by the proposed methodology is small compared to the probability of opt similarly as reported in table the pareto optimal points for correspond to residual errors ranging
inmates advanced in the july cases discretion to impose or not to impose the death penalty assures that it will be imposed discriminatorily wantonly and freakishly and so infrequently that any death sentence is cruel and the statutory criteria the post furman statutes adopted from the model penal code are so vague and thus in as discriminatory standardless and rare a manner as therefore death sentences produced by the new criteria are justice white rejected this syllogism in a concurring opinion in the lead july case gregg georgia which upheld georgia s guided discretion in doing so white deemed unproven as of the premise drawn from a premise white had endorsed when standards might indeed turn out to be meaningless white was no longer willing to assume they would be instead their adoption by a large number of states in the wake of furman left him cautiously optimistic that standards could work georgia has tried to guide the jury in the exercise of its discretion while at the same time permitting the jury to dispense mercy on the basis of factors too intangible to write into a statute and i effort is bound to on the contrary as aggravating factors limit the types of murders for which the death penalty may be imposed it becomes reasonable to expect that juries will impose death often enough to avoid freakish or infrequent moreover the georgia legislature was not satisfied with a system of standards which might but also might not turn out in practice to certain serious the legislature additionally required the georgia supreme court to decide whether in fact the death penalty was being administered for any given class of crime in a discriminatory standardless or rare fashion by comparing each death sentence imposed to penalties imposed in similar cases to determine whether the penalty is excessive or absent an attempt to high court would there is he repeated reason to expect that georgia s current system would escape the infirmities which invalidated its previous system under optimism aside however justice white clearly implied that the court would remain open at the least to type challenges to sentencing patterns the georgia statute generated and type challenges to particular standards and appellate review procedures to provide the promised guidance and proportionality the plurality opinion jointly written by justices stewart powell and stevens gave a similarly question begging answer to the type query as to whether georgia s new guided discretion statute was constitutional yes on its face the plurality seemed to say but only given the availability of future type adjudication to determine the propriety or necessity of each ite s opinion the plurality s began by attributing to an unnamed some a suggest ion that justice stewart himself had joined in making in mcgautha standards to guide a capital jury s sentencing deliberations are impossible to the plurality turned this suggestion aside based on the obvious fact that such standards have been developed by the drafters of the model penal by necessity somewhat it gave as an example georgia s statutory aggravating factor that the murder was outrageously or wantonly vile horrible or inhuman in that it involved torture depravity of mind or an aggravated battery a factor arguably present in any murder the problem was not fatal however because the language need not be construed in this way and there is no reason to assume that the supreme court of the court noted that there is no claim that the jury in this case relied upon a vague or overbroad provision to establish the existence of a statutory aggravating circumstance and that light of the limited grant of certiorari we review statutory aggravating circumstances only to consider whether their imprecision renders this capital sentencing scheme impliedly a jury s actual reliance on an open ended circumstance basis for reviewing the factor s application in particular cases to see if it indeed unconstitutionally failed to guide the jury s sentencing discretion and if so for overturning the through a remarkable succession of double negatives in its closing paragraphs the plurality hinted that short of a type attack on the constitutionality of death for any and all deliberate murders every challenge pattern focused review considerations of federalism as well as respect for the ability of a legislature to evaluate the moral consensus concerning the death penalty and its social utility as a sanction require us to conclude in the absence of more convincing evidence that the infliction of death as a punishment for murder is not without justification and thus is not unconstitutionally deliberately by the offender inviting type categorical review of the death penalty for other offenses we cannot say that the punishment is invariably disproportionate to the crime inviting type case by case review of the proportionality of death in particular deliberate murder cases it is an extreme sanction suitable to the most extreme crimes same we hold that the death penalty is not a form of punishment that may never be imposed regardless of the offense or of the character of the offender same and regardless of the procedure followed in reaching the decision to impose it inviting and type the court did however reject the petitioners broadest type claims that death as a punishment is unconstitutional in all cases or at least when imposed using standards and procedures that permit sentencing discretion in doing so the court fell back on a type arguments for to abstain from addressing the death penalty in the first place and might well justify it in recoiling from further adjudication in the future the penalty is endorsed in the text of the constitution itself executions have long been an accepted part of the nation s criminal justice systems precedents repeatedly recognize that capital punishment is not invalid and courts have a limited role to play in reviewing this and other punishments given both validity attached to legislation adopted and revisable through normal democratic processes and the difference between act ing as judges and
direct causal relationship between inputs and outputs and delicate post war environments are embedded in a larger highly volatile global political may impact differentially onto contending groups within a particular domestic environment the northern ireland case presents an example of a deliberate attempt by policy makers to address esteem issues and an example in which the participants in the conflict were explicit in their adoption of the language of esteem often these esteem competitions are more deeply embedded in the discourse is that the parity of esteem lens may have more general applicability to the management of intergroup conflict drawing on social identity theory this article suggested four options open to communities suffering from status anxiety in the context of intergroup competition individual mobility attempts to alter the elements of the intergroup comparative framework more strenuous intergroup competition and violence against the out group peace process and belfast agreement were deliberate attempts to alter the elements of the intergroup comparative framework to a certain extent they have failed politicians and their electorates remain wedded to traditional intergroup nationalist competition and intergroup competition has been reinvigorated the esteem competition rubric provides a useful lens with which to attempting to manage difference thirdly the indicators of parity disparity of esteem presented here are highly context specific in another case study in south africa we find a similar disparity emerging and measure it with survey research items that show that more than of whites in concur with the statement that affirmative action measures reduce white men to second class esteem that is very specific to a particular peace process the challenge for comparative research is to develop functionally equivalent measures for assessing changes to relative group status that allow us to gain insights in widely differing contexts future research also needs to develop a comparative framework with which to assess creative nonviolent responses by groups who sense that they face an imminent loss of practitioners of peace processes understanding the diverging trajectories of the united states and western europe a neo polanyian analysis this article proposes a neo polanyian theoretical framework for understanding the dynamics within contemporary market societies it uses this framework to analyze the divergence between the united states and other developed societies that has become more pronounced in the first years of the twenty first century the the argument emphasizes the shifting political alliances of the business community in the united states and suggests that from onward business lost power in the right wing coalition to its religious right allies the growing power of a religious based social movement is a critical ingredient in the unilateralist turn in the bush administration s foreign policy make sense of the contemporary world more and more scholarly books are now festooned with relevant quotes from polanyi especially from his masterpiece the great transformation but the usefulness of his insights suggests the value of moving beyond this strategic deployment of his eloquence the urgent task is to elaborate the implicit social theory that accounts for polanyi s insights specific and pressing contemporary the trajectories of market societies in the united states and western europe have been diverging over the last twenty five or more years the issue has been addressed explicitly by scholars working in the varieties of capitalism tradition who have identified significant divergences on the two sides of the atlantic in the way business firms are organized and governed in the relative role of banks and stock markets in the institutionalized role of organized labor and in the way that public provision is scholars from a range of theoretical perspectives have suggested that these divergences should decline over time since there are powerful pressures within the world economy toward and yet particularly over the first six years of the twenty first century there are significant indications that the divergence is growing more dramatic rather than less exemplified and exacerbated by significant policy disagreements between europe and the united states over iraq and the proper way to fight global terrorism the political cultural and social divisions appear to be is this just a brief interruption in a general tendency toward convergence or is it a reflection of the fact that the united states is on a quite different trajectory from other developed market societies empirical puzzle because it effectively identifies some of the key mechanisms that drive the developmental trajectories of contemporary market societies specifically it allows us to construct a historical account of the united states that places central emphasis on the changing political orientations of its business community and the changing role of the political countermovements that market led development has generated and europe the analysis here focuses almost exclusively on the united states the broad argument is that european development is continuing along the same trend line that began in the and while the united states made a dramatic turn starting in the it would obviously be better to elaborate the european side of the analysis with greater detail but space considerations make that impossible a new theoretical position by contrasting the new theory with already familiar theories but this risks building a straw opponent or a caricatured version of existing theories that the theory s proponents are not able to recognize or defend the alternative approach taken here is to lay out the neo polanyian theory in terms of four specific theses when these theses are added together they cumulate into a framework that the reader should recognize while this framework is rooted in a careful reading of polanyi s work the prefix neo is used because this is not about developing the correct and definitive interpretation of polanyi s writing the goal is to draw on polanyi to construct a framework that stands on its own and generates useful insights this is not an attempt to create a polanyian orthodoxy such an effort would be doomed to failure since the writings of important social theorists are open to multiple thesis i market economies are always and everywhere this formulation
over all pairs of activities satisfying j the heuristic described in this section attempts to minimize the propagation impact of the estimated disruptions by being more selective in the selection of pairwise floats activities for which the baseline starting time is close to the project makespan will have a higher probability of being disrupted than activities that are to the start of the project because disruptions will be propagated and accumulated throughout the network resulting in a kind of snowball effect therefore we should give higher value to float occurring at the end of the schedule compared to an equal amount of float occurring early in the schedule because the former float is more likely to be used by a delayed activity to obtain this more informed selection of pairwise floats we simplify our simplified problem to optimality the simplified version of makes use of the following two assumptions assumption only one activity duration disruption di will occur during the execution of the project with known and equal to di the deterministic duration of activity assumption each activity has an equal probability of being subjected to this disruption times of activities when scheduled according to railway execution mode in a certain disturbance scenario this railway execution mode implies that activities will not start earlier than their planned start time in the baseline schedule the formulation for problem mined looks as follows subject to disruption equal to dl for each such scenario we sum the weighted realized start times of activities applying the railway execution policy in the current resource flow network equations are again the flow conservation and extra arc constraints which we described earlier equations then calculate the realized activity start times according to the railway execution mode equations and ensure that duration disruption with a magnitude equal to its deterministic duration equations and are only binding in the presence of the associated possible extra arc imposing an additional precedence constraint finally equations and are the integrality constraints associated with the realized activity start times and the resource flows while equation indicates the binary constraints associated with the variables baseline starting times close to the project makespan will be disrupted in more scenarios than activities starting in the first time periods of the baseline schedule the formulation will automatically emphasize the preservation of extra float between activities starting at later time periods in the baseline schedule also while our previous heuristics optimized a certain characteristic of robust resource flow networks the objective function resembles the original more closely moreover the objective function allows for a very natural integration of activity weights we hope that all this will result in a better approximation of the stability objective a constructive resource allocation procedure in this section we present a constructive resource allocation procedure which we call mabo the procedure is myopic allocation for an activity unlike most existing resource allocation procedures mabo is activity based rather than resource based mabo consists of three steps that must be executed for each activity step examines whether the current predecessors of activity may release sufficient resource units to satisfy the resource requirements of activity if not extra predecessors are added in a next step with a minimal impact on stability step then defines resource flows ijk ijk from predecessor activities to activity the detailed steps of the procedure are presented in algorithm in the initialization step the set of resource arcs ar is initialized to the set of unavoidable arcs au for each resource type the number of resource units that may be transferred from the dummy start activity is initialized to the resource availability the project activities are placed in a list in increasing order of their stability cost contribution ci as tie break rule these values ci are calculated as follows for each activity we calculate the average delay si in its start time due to activity duration disruptions of its predecessors in the network by means of simulation then we apply the railway execution policy to all transitive successors of activity in the network when activity has a realized start time si si si duration di di given these realized start times we set the value of ci to the sum of all weighted start time deviations of the transitive successors of activity this value of ci gives us a measure of the contribution of an activity to the total stability cost in step of mabo we calculate the amount of resource units currently allocated to the predecessors of activity in if this amount of available resource units is not sufficient we need to find additional sources for that particular resource type resulting in new precedence constraints that have to be added to ar this is what we do in step we define the set h of all possible arcs between a possible resource source of the current activity and itself by solving a small recursion problem we can find the subset of hj that accounts for the missing resource requirements of for any resource type at a minimum stability cost stability cost the stability cost stability cost is the average stability cost j computed through simulation of executions of the schedule keeping the resource flows fixed and respecting the additional precedence constraints that were not present in the original project network diagram the set of arcs is added to ar such that the updated jk and the resource allocation problem for solved myopically in step we allocate the actual resource flows ijk to the predecessors of in and we update the number of resource items allocated at time sj to each activity as in the previous section z denotes the the set of activities that have a baseline starting time z summing up n might result in a total number of allocated resource units that is smaller than ak we have to decide which predecessors account for the resource flows we try to do this in an intelligent way because a greedy algorithm would even reinforce the myopic character of mabo imposed in step the predecessors are sorted by number of their not yet started successors with rlk because these successors might count on these resources
as in human all too human it is because of this expectation he expects the spreading democratization to get rid of respectful former identifications and to be thirst ing for innovations and greedy for experiments nietzsche seems to be full of hope with regard to the irresistible democratization of europe he calls it a link in the chain of those tremendous prophylactic measures through which we separate ourselves from the middle ages a foundation on which a new future can safely be built a collective preparation for the horticulture this clearly implies a future character who will apply himself to his real task only when these preparations among which europe s democratization have been fully carried out this future is still far away but it is opened up by these preparations it is even so far away that we should not blame those who are not able to view beyond their horizon and interpret wrongly their preparation as if it were the actual creation means and end we must not hold it too much against those who are working on the present day if they loudly decree that the wall and the trellis are the end and final goal since no one indeed can yet see the gardener or the fruit trees for whose sake the trellis exist when nietzsche does not criticize democracy he views it as only an intermezzo an opening up of and a transition to new possibilities democratization does not view itself as an intermezzo it rather considers itself the apotheosis of the whole development the end of history in this framework secularization is an extra threat because now the self glorification of the human being has lost its relativizing religious perspective when nietzsche already in human all too human calls modern democracy the historical form of the decay of the state it is for this reason the a divine order and destination in this early text nietzsche still considers the decay of the state as a possibility for the future from on however it becomes ever more obvious for nietzsche that democracy is in fact closing off this future in modern democracy the christian interpretation of the human being is continued and concluded there is nothing left by which it be relativized for this reason in beyond good and evil nietzsche calls the democratic movement not only a form of the decay of political organization but a form of the decay namely the diminution of man making him mediocre and lowering his value democracy for nietzsche is one of those figures in which the human being after the death of god canonizes itself eternalizes its present form and makes it impossible for such a critique for which the loss of religion functions at the same time as a condition of possibility for opening up new possibilities and closing off these very new openings the remedy can only be as paradoxical as the of course nietzsche does not advocate the return of religion but more than anything he does criticize the definite self determination self identification or self fixation of the human being on the one hand the proclamation of the death of god heralds the end of every beyond there is nothing left but the here and now of immanence and zarathustra preaches unconditional loyalty to the earth on the other hand nietzsche is a philosopher of continuous self overcoming ie of continuous transcending of every immanence i will conclude by suggesting four closely related ways in which we may view a glimpse of nietzsche s alternative for democracy four figures of this unreligious or at may be only negative and certainly one that remains immanent without losing its transcendence the first two might be found in the style of his writing i mention two features that characterize his style in general which we also find with regard to democracy first the hyperbolic polemical sometimes irritating but always challenging wording he chooses when he calls europe s democratic movement a tremendous physiological similar to each other nietzsche replaces equality with similarity and turns the conceited self consciousness of the democrats upside down the apostles of modern ideas who deem themselves emancipated and emancipating are gradually developing themselves and their masses into useful industrious handy multi purpose herd animal s the democratization of europe leads to the production of a type that is prepared for slavery widely spread opinions is a way to challenge the common sense and attack petrified interpretations what we think we do could indeed be different even the opposite of what we think it is the same happens when he predicts completely unexpected consequences of this democratic movement the democratization of europe is an involuntary arrangement for the cultivation of tyrants i read texts like these not primarily as a prediction of what will undermining a commonly accepted belief that is as an effort to open up the interpretative nature of what threatens to become the final truth a second feature of his style gives an extra reason for this way of reading nietzsche s polemical exaggerations if we look for texts in which nietzsche formulates his alternative we very often find extremely open formulations he does not really replace the criticized ideology with a well defined alternative or has no other characteristics than its being other different over against the criticized situation he places other possibilities over against the current apostles of democracy these levelers these falsely so called free spirits eloquent and prolifically scribbling slaves of the democratic taste nietzsche poses more authentically free spirits but the only way in which he characterizes them is by opposition to the men are antipodes and moreover these so vaguely indicated people turn out to be only pointers to further futures these we are people that hope for new philosophers who might be able to make a start with a revaluation of values even when he makes the impression of replacing democracy with some kind of tyranny we find an aphoristic echo of
rate of motor unit activation and the contractile properties of the muscle fibers other studies however have reported that mmg mean power frequency does not always follow the expected pattern of firing rate modulation in addition there are several factors that may affect the frequency content of the mmg signal during a voluntary muscle action independent of changes in motor unit firing rates despite the potential influences of these factors most of the evidence has suggested that the frequency domain of the mmg signal contains some information regarding motor unit firing rates it is however that this information is qualitative rather than quantitative in nature and reflects the global motor unit firing rate rather than the firing rates of a particular group of motor units background as early as the scientists were aware that contracting and research in the area was limited primarily by the inability to adequately detect the signal and describe its properties the advent of electronic sensors and digital computers in the early greatly improved the ability to record quantify and process the muscle sound signal and a number of studies were different muscles under a variety of conditions eventually the term mechanomyography was adopted to adequately describe the mechanical nature of muscle sound and avoid confusion regarding the various terminologies such as soundmyography phonomyography acousticmyography and vibromyography that had been used in previous studies mmg signal barry and frangioni et al were among the first investigators to demonstrate that during an electrically stimulated isometric twitch isolated frog gastrocnemius muscle oscillates laterally in directions perpendicular to its long axis additional research indicated that the first oscillation was usually the largest in amplitude followed by progressively extended these results to in vivo skeletal muscle and reported that when stimulated to contract the whole muscle oscillates laterally as a single unit these findings confirmed that during electrically stimulated twitches of both isolated and intact skeletal muscle the mmg signal is generated by two primary mechanisms a slow bulk movement of the muscle at the initiation of the contraction and the muscle under voluntary conditions however the asynchronous motor unit activities generate pressure waves that contribute to the muscle surface oscillations underlying the mmg signal in particular orizio et al reported that the mechanical activities of individual motor units are summated at the skin surface over the muscle and therefore the surface mmg can be considered have provided support for this hypothesis by demonstrating that individual motor units can be extracted from the mmg signal recorded during a voluntary isometric muscle action the contribution of each motor unit appears however to be influenced by the degree to which its twitches are fused specifically bichler reported that no mmg signal is observed during a fully fused tetanic may decrease as its twitches become more fused collectively these findings have indicated that during voluntary muscle actions the mmg signal is generated by the mechanical activities of the unfused activated motor units and therefore may contain information regarding motor control strategies for example the frequency content of the surface emg signal contains very limited information regarding motor unit firing rates beyond hz the emg power density spectrum is influenced primarily the mpf mean power frequency of the emg is influenced strongly by the shape of the action potential because the power is greater and frequency content is higher compared with those of the firing rate the mmg power spectrum is also related to the shape of the elementary mmg due to single mus motor units and the firing rate of the recruited mus the duration of the elementary mmg components of the mmg are considered to overlap each other in the power spectrum thus it is possible that the mpf is indicative of the firing rate of the mus in addition although previous studies have examined motor unit firing rates by measuring interspike intervals with indwelling emg electrodes there are drawbacks to using this technique during maximal muscle actions such as the potential when used to measure interspike intervals intramuscular emg provides information regarding the activity of only a few motor units at most bellemare et al indicated that motor unit firing rates ranged from to hz for the biceps brachii during an isometric maximum voluntary contraction of the forearm flexors and gaard et al reported firing rates thus it is unlikely that all motor units are firing at the same frequency even during an isometric muscle action at a steady torque level in addition the fact that indwelling electrodes are typically used to record the activities of just a few motor units has important implications for experiments in which the intramuscular emg and surface mmg signals are recorded simultaneously namely it is unit firing rates particularly at high torque levels when many motor units are active for example barry et al reported a close relationship between the intramuscular emg and surface mmg signals from the vastus lateralis muscle but only at very low torque levels when a single motor unit could be identified in both signals furthermore orizio et al in the surface mmg when one motor unit was stimulated at hz and the other motor unit was stimulated at hz when the motor units were stimulated at and hz however their mechanical activities were summated nonlinearly indicating that the resulting mmg signal was not the sum of two separate mmg signals generated by motor units that were acting separately minimi and first dorsal interosseous the mechanical activities from individual motor units were summated nonlinearly even when the muscle actions were performed at relatively low torque levels approximately the maximum voluntary contraction there is also evidence to suggest that the timing of the mechanical activities from separate motor units could affect mmg frequency specifically shape of the mmg power density spectrum by increasing the amount of power present in the mmg signal at frequencies below approximately hz collectively these findings suggested that during most voluntary muscle actions the frequency content of the mmg signal does not reflect the activity of just one
and as such was a desirable item to obtain as spoils a critical situation at alesia and such displays may have brought dismay to the enemy or alternatively encouraged them and marked out the general as a target being seen and recognized by his troops indeed military display both on a personal level and beyond was clearly something pompey was well aware of and during his career he employed a variety of methods to ensure this though not always with the to impress sulla when he first met him as an ally during the civil war and in africa he got into the habit of fighting from horseback without a helmet so that his soldiers could see him plutarch claims probably untruthfully that he started doing this when his own side nearly killed him when he was slow with the password and they did not recognize him in reality pompey s custom perhaps in his men knew their general was fighting with them and would be able to reward any brave actions and perhaps as a gesture of bravado aimed at both his own men and the enemy later in spain he rode a horse equipped with golden cheek bosses and rich caparisons again perhaps to ensure he would be recognized and to encourage his army but the plan backfired and his obvious importance meant he became a target for the enemy capturing the richly equipped horse than its rider so pompey was able to escape after pharsalus pompey swiftly discarded the clothes that he wore for the battle because they marked him out as the commander and his paludamentum would surely have been the key garment to abandon to ensure his safe escape as with generals the presence of officers of all ranks on the battlefield through their very presence and their role in witnessing courageous actions and ensuring they were rewarded in addition some officers had important tactical roles and so like standards they needed to be visible and their movements apparent to their men livy s mention of the military tribune decius in bc wearing a common soldier s cloak and ordering his centurions to dress as common soldiers officers might wear distinctive clothing associated with rank tribunes are likely to have been distinguished by items such as a muscled cuirass and leather pteruges but there is very little direct evidence for differences between the military dress of centurions and that of ordinary soldiers in the republican period when personal wealth probably affected dress and equipment as much as the easiest was through the wearing of a distinctive helmet tiberius gracchus had such a helmet that he used in battle which was finely decorated and more significantly here was easily distinguishable from a distance we have already seen that helmet crests were used to add the illusion of height to infantrymen and sculptural and archaeological evidence attests to a wide variety in the type of crests sides of helmet plumes had a number of possible roles beyond the psychological noted by polybius robinson observes the potential of crests to advertise group identity suggesting that different cohorts or even centuries might wear crests of different design or crests might also be used to mark out rank though the transverse crest on the centurion s helmet is the only known specific example centurion s recognition by his men and such crests are illustrated in a small number of funerary the role of the centurion was to lead from the front and although centuries had standard bearers with standards the crested helmet could also act as a focus for soldiers ensure swift recognition of an officer and ensure that their orders and movements would be followed the high profile of centurions in through both their actions and their appearance officers needed to be visible to their men to lead them effectively and literary sources indicate that soldiers gained confidence and encouragement to fight more bravely if they could see that their officers were with them or watching them with their dress and equipment to ensure they stood out on the battlefield the roman army was not a monolithic uniform institution but one that evolved from the warrior bands of the regal period and the early republic aspects of the warrior mentality remained along with the expectations and pressures of the militarized society that early rome evolved into sallust complains that the elite youth of his day were more interested in wine and women than claiming the reason they had once been more interested in flashy armour than flashy women was that they competed eagerly among themselves to win honour each man seeking to be the first to engage the enemy to scale a rampart and while performing such a deed to be seen in spite of sallust s moralizing tone about the debasement of society in the late republic the literary tradition of heroic actions in war by individuals and their desire to other evidence competition for honour drove war in the republic and the best way for an elite roman to attract attention was to earn public recognition for virtus in war and the military decorations for valour which could be shown off in public in his those who had won the corona civica for saving a fellow citizen s life in battle were among those recruited to fill the ranks of the senate after to acquire a reputation for courage and so to be visible on the battlefield to ensure such actions were witnessed nor was this desire to be seen being brave limited to the elite as illustrated by the emphasis epitaphs and funerary sculpture placed on military decorations awarded to soldiers of all some inscriptions go further and display enormous pride at the military achievements being commemorated least some ordinary soldiers were also in fierce competition with the each other for recognition for bravery and the opportunities for promotion and social advancement that came from public recognition of although in some instances soldiers who wished to
most functional models to date for making scientific advances embedded in the notion of academic freedom disciplinary and scientific self regulation are fundamental to the privileges we have enjoyed in the liberal science system in the united states these freedoms often taken for granted require scholarly vigilance to maintain the research mccarthy inquisitions has been perilously inattentive to the role academic freedom plays in professional self determination and disciplinary contributions to science academic freedom attentiveness in the discipline of nursing although the first independent collegiate school of nursing was established at the yale nursing research was chartered in earnest attention to scientific inquiry did not occur until the early with doctoral programs in nursing not beginning to flourish until the the demographic composition of nursing and widespread perception of nurses as diffident apolitical physician monitored subversives during this period detailed historical accounts during the mc carthy era do not implicate nursing faculty as being directly subjected to formal university or huac investigations in the thus as an academic discipline we appear to lack a historical consciousness of the damage that occurs when academic freedoms are provides some insight into issues dominating the intellectual focus of a discipline at any given time a search of the term academic freedom in the chronicle of higher education yielded published articles addressing academic freedom in some way over the past years a clear sign there is vigorous discourse articles in the general science database in the social science database and in the humanities database in contrast since publications were found when searching for academic freedom and nursing using cinahl and pubmed of these were dissertations and only concentrated and was the only author to address its relationship to nursing research subsequent publications specific to academic freedom examined conflicts between faculty and the misinterpretation of academic freedom in and grading written student work in relation to national codes of professional we disagree with this interpretation academic freedom does not allow one to claim impositions on this freedom because decisions made by the scientific community do not support your view scientific approach or area of research interest rather with academic freedom comes academic the duty to argue persuasively advancing science in your field this includes building an empirically valid case for why your research should be supported given the overall goal of improving health many agencies funding nursing research in were composed of members of the nursing science community today nurse researchers are seeking and as such self regulation is operating as it should in the full spirit of academic freedom current challenges to academic freedom unlike challenges to academic freedom in the past which were overt and generally began outside the university current challenges are more subtle and come from inside as well as outside academia many of scope of what liberal means political manipulation of science with regard to self regulation as a collective process undertaken by and predominantly regulated by members of scientific communities contemporary efforts by political entities are threatening not only academic freedom but also the health and welfare of the distortion suppression and altering of scientific information and interference with nih externally funded scientific projects alone each of these tactics poses a threat to scientific integrity and academic freedom together they threaten the very existence of the liberal science system each of these tactics and the and or ignoring of scientific committees and advisory panels has received the greatest attention from the scientific community politicians and the public at large one of the most egregious examples of this tactic involves emergency contraception although a expert scientific panel of the food and drug administration unanimously prerequisite scientific expertise have repeatedly blocked ec over the counter when the fda rejected its own panel s recommendations that assured the safety of ec and in required further study for over the counter sales to minors the fda s top scientist on women s health issues evidence ideology is also usurping the law which requires that federal committees should be fairly balanced in terms of the points of view represented and not be inappropriately influenced by the appointing authority or by any special it is evident from the ec process that not only is this law being disregarded but the health and the second tactic the distortion suppression and altering of scientific information has also garnered the attention of the scientific community politicians the press and the general public one visible example is the controversy surrounding stem cell research and the number of stem cell lines available for study in president bush banned sufficient for future research efforts this claim was false scientists in the field reported that there were fewer than lines available at the time of the ban with current estimates suggesting that as few as are actually available to the research research involving the use of fetal tissue although valuable scientifically has become increasingly scientific merit or medical in addition to political intrusion corporate interests pose similar dangers to the role of academic science in a recent text describes numerous accounts whereby corporate interests have severely compromised research ethics progress and the fundamental mission adopted by universities and the consequences for higher education and science given the observations to date both political and corporate agendas are placing liberal science directly in harm s way the third tactic interference with nih externally funded scientific projects is of greatest threat to the vitality of congress personally considered provocative there were more than grants from more than senior investigators on the list the subject areas of the grants addressed hiv aids human sexuality and risk taking since all of these studies successfully competed in the nih peer review process it is clearly the subject review of the research contacting individual investigators and sending a ripple of fear and intimidation throughout the scientific the interference of a political body into the domain of the scientific process threatens the role of the disciplinary community in setting its scientific agenda and more ominously the scientific enterprise aspects of liberal
but been protected from the effects of drought the oussouye sacred grove contains at least species of trees and bushes that are characteristic of most swampy forests of west africa however at least nine species in it are not found north of the gambia accessibility plays a forest which is highly accessible has remained intact infractions against the prohibitions surrounding sacred forests are punishable with illness or even death the immediate area around each shrine in a sacred forest is cleared of weeds each year but no other portion of the vegetation in the sacred grove can be felled or burned women cannot collect the dead the rainfall conserved in the sacred forest plays a crucial role in the highly intricate irrigated system of intensive permanently cropped rice growing and fish raising that has continued to be practiced through the decades long drought social research is not yet making use of the full potential of gis remote sensing techniques to triangulate land use do become clearly detectable from space new high temporal frequency but coarse spatial resolution satellite sensors allow tracking of rapidly evolving ecosystem changes related to drought floods fires and phenology so unusual features on the ground technique we should also experiment with very recent and current changes over much shorter time frames and work harder on the successions which might suggest principles for their aggregation and intersection with the mid and long term time frames one obvious application is to landscapes marked by extraction rather than or as well as cultivation and enough to the earth s surface to leave a clear mark there are some frontiers in the use of multiple methods and extrapolations that beckon new approaches for linking household survey data with remote sensing data at the pixel level may open up applications to the other social groupings we identify in the papers issues of design flexibility and research ethics a strict hypothetical model for research can turn into a straightjacket temporality implies causal and interactive sequences but it can be problematic to try to identify them unambiguously ahead of time for example how indicators for institutional shifts such as changes in the enforceability of respect for public goods or legal ownership could be differentiated in advance from the one should avoid the dangers of imputing generic causes such as resource competition when proximate causes for conflict as people themselves see them might include long histories of interpersonal battles the challenge then is how to optimize the potentials of remote sensing and hypothetical thinking without too narrow and closed a definition of the problem and without an exclusive the sense of scientific distance that is provided by remote sensing technology can conceal the fact that gathering evidence of this kind at finer and finer levels is itself an intimate political engagement the technical possibility of tracing large trees one by one and of identifying paths through fences raises surveillance of poachers to an entirely new against intrusion but against the creation of another authoritative objectivized account of their lives that does not acknowledge its own hesitations and limitations or even the tolerant blind eye that allows activities that are technically illegal ethical concerns may be an incentive as well as a caution to research in the context of the condition of the continent new anthropological work is landscape or any overall system poverty is a profound concern the presence of large state and corporate actors is another the intricacies of food supply and the religious framing of lives under pressure or in distress are others can the disciplinary practices work together to illuminate and ameliorate the conditions under which people make a in and the challenges they now face the papers each paper reflects the authors own research written up in light of our exchanges we did not attempt to integrate them further so they are not strictly comparative each includes both field work and remote sensing each engages in the authors own fragmentation and livelihood change as african rural populations re inhabit their landscape over time the following paragraphs offer a brief guide to the papers and begin but by no means exhaust the search for resonances amongst them walker and peters writing on malawi take the most temporally intensive view there is a century long history of post colonial governments against this backdrop the authors concentrate attention around policy change since about when president hastings banda instituted greater land appropriation and the long and shifting history of social differentiation since then there have been multiple changes in land and agricultural price policy as well as democratization and the beginning of the hiv aids a case such as this where none of the classic teleological processes has time to play out before another intervention intersects with it theirs is a particularly searching examination of what may and may not be achieved with different techniques of study cliggett colson scudder unruh and hay summarize over fifty years of closely documented change among the new areas it is with the authority of an unbroken record of social and demographic evidence that the authors can show how uncertainty has generated differentiation but through recurrence rather than any simple progression at each juncture people have seized the new opportunities only to see them dissipate for one reason or another policy change declines in infrastructure antagonism between generations between maternal and paternal kin and evangelical conversion all affect the way that local institutions mediate resources and income access without a viable mode of intensification on their land people s efforts at livelihood diversification have taken the form of successive migrations to new land each time the pioneers have an advantage over the later comers and there that this progressive strategy will surely have its limits as long as policy interventions remain so undependable and cyclic booms and busts constitute people s only experience of economic life the authors argue that land degradation is due more to people jumping at chances as they pass than to systematic soil mining
the person is fully immersed in an activity that involves processes such as interpretation memory retrieval and flow of interaction is largely applied in the field of game design since any game that can provide flow to the user will by definition be successful as the user will feel being attached to products our previous study also contributes to this account participants who shared their experiences involving affective memory recall with the beloved products were specially attached to them products that contain affective memories are irreplaceable and people would handle them more clean them more often and even avoid its use mugge et al propose that designers can influence the attachment between con sumers and product by encouraging the memories associated with a product they propose two strategies to encourage product related memories to implement odors that bring back memories and making sure that a product ages with dignity a fact that eases the design of products that contain memory although not with the same attachment is the case of products that remind of other products one may love to use an antique pasta machine because it reminds him her of the afternoons spent making pasta at grandmother s house with a similar machine symbolic meaning i love to use my ipod nano i must say i do nt even know exactly how it works but i love it it is such a cool gadget when i am in the train i feel so hip when i take it from my pocket unroll the wires put the headphones take the cover off and turn it on i notice that people around me specially the ones who are using regular players always look when i perform this ritual the idea that people look for products that already have an identity and that by owning this product these qualities are expected to be and the fact that people want to communicate their identity intrinsic values and beliefs through products to design for these scenarios may not be an easy task since designers should trans late intangible concepts into recognizable visual material features however govers have demonstrated that consumers can recognize these concepts in product fea tures and that some people s behaviors can be used as strategies for example one who wants to be perceived as someone who is trusting and reliable would most likely give preference to products that are perceived as having the same characteristics shared moral values i love to use this hair comb from the body shop i like products from the body shop because they make responsible products i know that for example no forest was destroyed in the making of this comb or any other product they was injured with animal testing consumerism is a social movement based on the impact of purchasing decisions on the environment and the consumer s health and life in general the main motivation to consume ethically is certainly the pleasure people get from it conscious consuming leads to ideological pleasures an abstract form of pleasure that is experienced when a product embodies such values and conveys a sense of environmental responsibility to the user one who ethical products is surrounded by a rewarding feeling of being the one who contributes to a better world it is a sense of being good to other people and to their selves it enhances people s personal values conscious consumers are aware of the things they buy products should be made ethically without harm or exploitation of humans animals or the natural environment they favor ethical products be they fair trade cruelty free organic recycled or produced locally products the input of such values the preference for designs and materials that do not pollute or exploit the environment that can be recycled or re used or products that are produced in a more transparent way may lead to gratifying experiences pleasant physical interaction i love to play tennis with this racket i love it because i do nt feel it when it is with me it is light and i can feel the grip some rackets are really when you hit the ball you can feel it resonating in your bones this one has the right size for my hands pleasant physical interaction refers to product s tactual proper ties according to sonneveld the tactual properties of products can be considered as properties related to five domains of tactual experiences the substance of the object s material its structure or geometrical aspect of its surface and its moving parts to design for tactual experiences of interaction sonneveld see developed a designer s guide which consists in six maps that allows and supports designer s associative way of thinking discussion and conclusion although the principles of love were observed through the stories other researchers have also been aware of these elements of experiences and have come across principles in a more spontaneous manner in the case of surprise the analysis of products in the market revealed the apparent information incongruence between vision and touch and that these products were likely to be a source of surprise experience love the principles presented are not expected to act altogether products can be loved by obeying to only one of these principles although the love experienced seemed stronger and more frequent when at least two or three of these principles worked jointly despite of their importance just designing for these principles may not be enough to evoke the experience of love although the principles are the essence the core elements that represent the experience of love may not distinguish love from other experiences it is still not known what makes one loves a mobile phone because of its fluent interaction and another does not since certain principles may be more appealing to certain people than others in addition certain principles may be evoked by specific types of products in specific love stages by a specific gender
med inform fleming morbidity registration and the fourth general practice morbidity survey in england and wales scand prim health care pearson brien thomas ewings gallier bussey a collecting morbidity data in general practice the somerset morbidity project br med davis office encounters in general practice in the district i social class patterns among employed males med davis office encounters in general practice in the hamilton health district ii ethnic group patterns among employed males med davis office encounters in general practice in the hamilton health district iii social class patterns among females med davis office encounters in general practice in the hamilton health social class and ethnic group patterns among children med davis office encounters in general practice in the hamilton health district iv ethnic group patterns among females med mcavoy davis raymont a gribben the waikato medical care survey med supplement part raymont a lay yee davis scott a family doctors methodology and description of the private gps the national primary medical care survey report wellington ministry of health crampton lay lee davis the national primary medical care survey report primary care in community governed non profits the work of doctors and nurses wellington ministry of health namcs accessed march crampton davis lay yee raymont a forrest comparison of private for profit with private community governed not for profit primary care services in new zealand footnotes a note rounding errors of up to may apply note rounding errors of up to may apply projects require close collaboration between users and developers but this is particularly difficult where there are multiple specialties organizations and system suppliers users become alienated if they are not consulted but consultation is meaningless if they cannot understand the specifications showing exactly what is proposed we need stringent specifications and cost over runs the number of errors is a function of the likelihood of misunderstanding any part of the specification the number of individuals involved and the number of choices or options one way to reduce these problems is to provide a conceptual design specification comprising detailed unified modelling language class and activity to be straightforward to understand and use transparent and unambiguous people find structured diagrams such as maps charts and blueprints easier to use than reports or tables other desirable properties include being technology independent comprehensive stringent coherent consistent composed from reusable elements and a formal contract between the stakeholders no extra meaning should be added during the later stages of the project life cycle introduction despite years of effort we seem little closer than we were years ago to delivering joined up healthcare information systems providing access for patients and clinicians to healthcare information whenever care providers are now better understood and foremost among these is the human factor users need to be consulted at every stage of design development and consultation with users about complex information technology projects is difficult because users need to understand precisely what is proposed at a level of detail that they can check review a longitudinal survey of doctors views about the national programme for it in the english national health service demonstrates the size of the gap between doctors wish to be consulted and their perception that consultation is inadequate user domain better than the technology similarly the term developer includes analysts programmers and integration engineers who understand the technology better than the user domain users and developers need a common shared vision of what they are trying to do but they do not speak the same language without a common language we have a tower of babel problems lie on both sides the physical requirement to move pieces of paper they do not understand the development life cycle and insist on new features late in the developers try to shoehorn users needs to fit their existing system or pattern thinking that it will be quicker and cheaper to reuse what already exists they often lack the domain knowledge to understand the business process and what the users want until the moment comes when the user tries to use the product for the first time sometimes users join the design teams but then the risk is that they go native working and thinking as developers rather than representing their constituency communication between one user and one developer is difficult enough but both sides can sit round a achieving shared understanding becomes much harder in large projects where users across many specialties and locations need to work with developers from different suppliers the communication paths increase exponentially with the number of participants figure shows the number of paths between just three users and two developers each additional reduce productivity and hit profits errors multiply according to the relationship where misunderstanding errors increase with the probability of misunderstanding of any part of the specification caused by the complexity of the language used or the real world business process relative to the participant s technical or domain knowledge errors increase with the number of choices that each individual needs to make the total number of options allowed this explains why complex lengthy specifications that have to be implemented many times are far more expensive to implement than simple short specifications only implemented once there is nothing new in this these issues have been recognized in makes it later this was primarily a consequence of the need to increase person to person communication between members of the team and the time taken to learn about the also relevant to this discussion brooks suggests devoting one third of the schedule for any software task to planning half to testing but only one sixth for that conceptual integrity is the most important consideration in system design and that ease of use dictates unity of design conceptual integrity systems need to be straightforward simplicity is good but not at the expense of being awkward structured documents such as templates spreadsheets and tabular lists ad hoc diagrams and sketches formal diagrams such as maps engineering blueprints and uml
a the less efficient competitors will exit the industry the price of goods will diminish more slowly towards the end of the growth of the industry and may even stabilize and increase as the market becomes a niche and the number of competitors goes down an interesting phenomenon is that innovation activity will continue throughout the life of the product constant product improvement and productivity gains will characterize the industry even if the nature of this innovation will the most drastic innovations occur at the beginning of the life of the industry in terms of firm survival it appears that firms that have been present in the industry for a long time are also those that have the highest probability of surviving in the industry newer entrants on the other hand appear to run a higher exit risk perhaps this may be explained by the existence of economies of scale of advantages linked to experience or capabilities customers may more locked in than in the initial phases of the life cycle of the industry based on the life cycle model outlined above we can formulate a first series of hypotheses to be tested in this paper as follows hypothesis the evolution of an industry exhibits non monotonic growth over time in the number of firms such that for an initial period there is mass entry followed by mass exit as the industry reaches maturity eventually the hypothesis the evolution of an industry exhibits non monotonic growth over time in output such that for an initial period output growth is positive but decelerating until it eventually reaches zero eventually the output may drop as the products sold are replaced by new substitutes hypothesis the evolution of an industry exhibits non monotonic growth over time in the average price charged for its products the price declines with end of the life cycle we will now attempt to verify this series of hypotheses for the swiss hotel industry early history of the swiss hotel the origins of tourism in switzerland may be found as early as the century in the early years of that century it became fashionable for the swiss upper class to send their young ones on a trip through their own country in order to experience their cultural heritage gain perspective and perhaps toughen them this was also the time english tradition of the grand tour was spreading and became a must for young educated men who wished to be considered gentlemen the young men travelled for anywhere between a few months and several years during this time they toured the great sights of europe and italy particularly attracted many visitors by the middle of the century a majority of these visitors included switzerland in their grand tour towards the this travelling activity increased radically and in particular was largely dominated by the english during the later part of the century a number of prominent french german and english writers and poets visited switzerland and wrote important works praising the country and its mountains at the height of romantic writing the peaks were as yet though mainly admired from a distance standing majestically over lake geneva or at some distance from zu rich with the century came a renewed interest in the climbers converged on the alps in a bid to beat each other to the summits the inhabitants of the alps were by no means well off in fact during the first half of the century many villages saw their children abandon the traditional farming to go to the cities or even overseas for better jobs in about two thirds of the working population were active in the primary sector with only per cent in the secondary and per cent in the tertiary sectors the canton of valais had no more than industrial workers synonymous with a lack of industrial development in a mountainous region dominated by the traditional way of the alps were in many ways dying in the middle of the century the growth of tourism would however soon counter this trend inns had existed since at least the middle ages in switzerland the status of inn keepers century staying in switzerland was considered expensive the quality of the swiss inns was also noted as being superior thermal baths were developed quite early and low lying places like interlaken and luzern saw the opening of many boarding houses in the early century sizeable inns which could be called the first hotels were operating profitably in cities like zu rich by this time the first half of the century also saw the creation of railways across europe was a necessary step needed for mass tourism to be even remotely possible before the railways travelling to switzerland from england and even from germany france or italy was an uncomfortable slow and expensive process in fact the transportation costs by far outweighed the actual cost of staying in switzerland but this new technology would soon revolutionize travel in europe and most importantly allow the middle class to travel and in particular the development of tourism in the alps were characterized by the kind of entrepreneurial spirit which one now erroneously often associates only with high tech industries there were real pioneers of tourism such as johannes flugi and the badrutt family of st moritz alexander seiler of zermatt or the durrer family these were men who had a vision for the development of their respective villages they were motivated by the pursuit of profit and did not hesitate invest everything they owned in the building of the first grand hotels of switzerland they knew that they could attract the upper class english who had a high willingness to pay but also expected high standards therefore the swiss hotels were very early on built as palaces filled with antiques purchased in france and italy catering for the rich and famous royalty and political heads streamed to the mountains to enjoy the majestic scenery and the luxuries offered to them growth investments
rowbotham shows a concern about consistent performance of firms with small firms there is a danger that heavy workloads sudden illness or employee turnover could cause to flounder in a large firm a project could be pushed aside to make way to service large or sudden priority projects he argues that it does not necessarily matter if firm is large or small firms should provide adequate competent and experienced resources to ensure prompt and good quality services freytag and hollensen state that benchmarking involves measurement of business performance against the best and makes continuous effort in reviewing lau and idris concludes from the literature review that total quality management is a proven system approach for improvement of organizational performance including quality of products or services benchmarking is a critical part of tqm and can therefore improve performance quality based on the literature review there should be positive causal relationships between performance and quality practices but no relationship between performance and fee be summarized by a function as follows output service quality research method and context of study the triangulation methodology was adopted to examine the relationship between output performance quality and input competition and management factors there has been a lack of comprehensive research on the collective impact of quality practices on housing services this is found to be the case after an extensive literature search over the past years the triangulation process involved three data points which cross checked the validity of one another namely a literature review a qualitative interview study and a quantitative regression analysis such a methodology could achieve high levels of authenticity and generalization and most importantly objectivity both the qualitative conducted on the hkha which provided and managed housing services for more than flats the hkha has been privatizing its professional housing maintenance and management services by phases since its practice and experience in outsourcing of the professional services can therefore constitute a representative study case for this research hypotheses were generated by the literature review and were then compared with consultant management practitioners of the hkha to establish final hypotheses these hypotheses were further tested by a quantitative regression analysis using data from outsourced maintenance consultancies of the hkha the practitioners constituted per cent of the population of consultant management staff the maintenance consultancies were randomly chosen from the consultancy contracts completed between and ie per cent of the population it was hypothesized that there was a positive correlation between output performance and input quality factors this main hypothesis was transformed into six sub hypotheses competition level has a positive co relation with output service quality past performance in similar consultancies has a positive correlation with output service quality project leader assessment system leads to selection of competent leaders and its quality presence of quality benchmarking system amongst performance of consultants associates with better output service quality size of firm has a positive correlation with output service quality fee level has no correlation with output service quality these hypothetical relationships were cross checked by a qualitative study and were then tested by a regression analysis which provides a powerful tool for developing bell regression is one of the most efficient methods to analyze and predict the relationship between the result and various types of influencing factors in fact multiple regression model has been used in a number of empirical cases to study the relationship between output quality of services or products and input qaulity practices in the production process after the above sub hypotheses have been confirmed by the quality study a multiple linear regression model was formulated as shown in table i the dependent variable was the consultant s output service quality and it had six predictor variables which considered the relationships as stated in the sub hypotheses namely competition level past performance project leader assessment system quality benchmarking system size of firm and fee level coakes and steed stipulate that the number of cases for regression analysis is at least six times more than the number of predictor variables there were six predictor variables in the model and the minimum number of cases was therefore the consultancy contracts chosen for regression analysis constituted percent of the population and should be sufficient for the study as shown in table i the dependent and predicator variables were operationlized as follows tant s quarterly performance appraisal scores in the consultancy competition level number of bidders in the consultancy tendering past performance an average of the consultant s performance in all previous maintenance consultancies of the past two years project leader assessment system dummy variable for absence of the system and for existence of the system for absence of the system and for existence of the system fee level tendered fee percentage discussion of the qualitative interview results descriptive analysis was conducted to obtain qualitative views of the consultant management practitioners so as to explore whether they agreed that the individual input factors of competition level past performance project leadership and quality benchmarking fee level and size of firm would significantly influence the output for each factor the qualitative views of all informants were analyzed to determine an overall coherent view on the causal relationship the results generally confirmed the sub hypotheses developed from the literature review there should be significant positive relationships between output service quality and input factors of competition level past performance project leadership and quality benchmarking the hypotheses that output service quality had a correlation with size of firm and that it had no correlation with fee level were kept unchanged for quantitative testing because the qualitative results on these two factors were inconclusive in addition all informants agreed that performance monitoring was necessary to the amount of monitoring resources because the effectiveness of performance monitoring was dependent on competence of individual monitoring staff in particular the communication and co ordination skills this finding is in line with the empirical study conducted by rynning on management firms and clients in norway rynning found that although monitoring control could have a positive
loyalty aside josselyn embarked on his voyage to america keenly aware that puritans were gaining england and that the rank and privileges his father had once taken for granted were threatened new england turned out to be no better puritans dominated the new settlements and josselyn found them less than cordial he was undoubtedly relieved to stay with samuel maverick a fellow anglican and a staunch thorn in the side of massachusetts bay colony leaders landing in boston july josselyn went immediately ashore upon noddles island to mr samuel maverick the man in all the country giving entertainment to all comers gratis the only hospitable man witness the words of a disgruntled anglican wandering the wilds of the city on a hill john josselyn was thirty years old when he met maverick and the enslaved woman he apparently spent the first part of his life attaining the education appropriate for an impoverished gentleman s son which clearly included some scientific training such training africans with a more objective eye than most certainly josselyn s dedication of his two voyages to new england to the right honourable and most illustrious fellows of the royal society suggests he hoped to interest readers espousing the new scientific world view the work is filled with asides regarding josselyn s accumulated scientific knowledge he noted for example that though many men believed that the blackness of the negroes proceeded from the curse upon cham s posterity he knew that africans simply had an extra layer of skin like that of a snake josselyn had discovered this extra layer before coming to new england while conducting an experiment on a barbarie moor whose finger became infected from a puncture wound josselyn in attempting to cure the man lanced the finger probed the wound and discovered that the moor had one skin more than englishmen the fate of the patient s multiskinned finger remains unknown still the clarify what jossleyn thought of the woman when she came crying to his window visibly upset even within her snakelike skin josselyn made his transatlantic voyage on the well armed new supply alias the nicholas of london a ship of good force of tuns man d with sailers carrying passengers men women and children the young traveler enjoyed his trip two days out of gravesend passengers dined on fresh flounder josselyn noted that he had never tasted of a delicater fish in all his life before six days later the gastronome tasted porpice called also a marsovious or sea hogg which sailors cut into pieces and fried josselyn thought it tasted like rusty bacon or hung beef if not worse but the liver boiled and soused sometime in vinegar is more grateful to the pallat an innocent abroad this josselyn delighted at the novelty of food and travel but delighted innocence is only part of his story a part that masks josselyn s origins in a class and a society deeply invested in the maintenance of a strictly stratified social order when martin ivy servant to one of josselyn s companions and only a child a stripling was whipt naked at the cap stern with a cat with nine tails for filching great lemons out of the chirurgeons cabin josselyn expressed no sympathy only amazement that the boy had managed to eat the nine lemons rinds and all in less than an hours time similar the violent ducking of another servant for being drunk with his masters strong waters which he stole josselyn was interested enough to note these occurrences and gentleman enough to consider them normal this same attitude greeted the enslaved woman when she chose to complain his journal notes her complaint but then quickly moves on the very next sentence describes his first encounter with north american wasps although at first resolved to intreat maverick on her behalf josselyn ultimately did nothing to help the woman samuel maverick found his visitor an enjoyable guest when josselyn s ship suffered delays before embarking on a trip up the coast maverick refused to let his guest sleep on the boat when i was come to mr mavericks josselyn noted he would not let me go aboard no more until the ship was ready to set sail perhaps maverick enjoyed having a sympathetic soul around someone who shared his religion and background after all josselyn felt in touring new england were experienced daily by his host samuel maverick also the son of an english gentleman had settled in new england sometime around loosely attached to the gorges colonization plan like josselyn s brother maverick had title to lands in maine he and another englishman david thompson settled further south and built fortified houses around what would become boston they were the first europeans to settle in the area but their settlement was neither peaceful nor secure maverick s house was fortified with a pillizado palisade and fflankers and gunnes both belowe and above in them which awed the indians who at that time had a mind to cutt off the english indians did attack the fort but receiving a repulse never attempted it more although they repented it when about yeares after they saw so many english come over thompson and maverick were men determined to make money while perched on the edge of an unfriendly continent we might admire their grit were it not for the ruthlessness it engendered maverick had acquired a wife more land and a new house probably equally fortified by the time the enslaved woman arrived for the death of david thompson offered him opportunities he could ill afford to miss maverick s marriage to thompson s widow sometime around when he would have been twenty six gained him control of including the very fruitful noddle s island more than one thousand acres in the middle of boston harbor and the site of the rape the island was easier to defend than mainland settlements since reaching it required crossing a long expanse of water in
the programmes of the portuguese section and notably that of the journalist a lvaro morna correspondent to several portuguese newspapers in the public television sector with the exception of mosa lques devoted to immigrant life in france no other programme endured on the portuguese side in november because of the financial culture in france marie christine volovitch tavares and dominique stoenesco issn young people animated by antonio cardoso launched the television channel clp tv in paris with specifications scheduling broadcasts in french and portuguese cinema literature and the plastic arts portuguese immigration in france was to inspire director manuel madeira who has lived in france since the produced two films that he himself qualifies as anthropological cinema a short film prese pio portugue s in and a full length film cronica de emigrados in both broadcast on french television a number of palma s first feature length film entitled sans elle produced in or the work of other young film directors shown during the october festival regards compare s identite s franc maises et immigrations sponsored by the comite du film ethnographique in during one could also see the films of young portuguese born film directors jean philippe neiva s entre deux reves and those of pierre primetens himself author of un voyage au portugal produced for the project immigration produced by young franco portuguese who have attempted to reconstitute the itineraries of their before certain publishers in france began publishing the works of portuguese immigrant or emigrant authors in the late there were a few author financed publications that had already come out in poetry the first publication of this genre had been the bilingual poetry anthology contains around poems culled from associative bulletins and newspapers or else gathered from school competitions poetry recitals or festivals in in the framework of a radio alfa transmission regularly devoted to poetry the cercle des poe tes lusophones de paris was created the authors of this anthology had the excellent idea to publish biographical texts on each poet facing their poems the sum total of these individual career notices constitutes a collective memory of immense richness making this compendium not only a book of poetry but also a book of life histories and of history years later in this publisher also started to publish french translations of portuguese works by the great classical and modern authors including portuguese speaking authors residing in in this publishing house organized the second salon du livres et du disques lusophones publish before their departure the political and social context of their home country came to influence their writings to a large extent with the evocation of their homeland and its landscapes their uprooting and solitude childhood memories spleen fate or destiny love and religious faith serving as their most recurrent and literature joaquim alexandrino a poet obliged to leave school early to work as a herdsman on the plains of ribatejo arriving in france in as a public works laborer antonio caetano who wrote several of his poems in the jails of the secret police later these authors would recite their work on portuguese radio in paris jose augusto seabra which he defended at the sorbonne in antonio barbosa topa a poet sought exile in france in to escape the colonial war alice machado in caused quite a stir in the moroseness of portuguese creativity in france with her first novel portugal anne es a ombre des montagnes oublie es her texts are written in her mother tongue when she expresses her most intimate feelings and in french when she evokes aspects of everyday life in her country of adoption altina ribeiro author of an autobiographical narrative le fado pour seul bagage portuguese immigrants and portuguese culture in france her case is unique having arrived in france at the age of seven and having been distanced from the portuguese community she attempted at the age of forty five to reconstitute her personal history and ended her narrative by totally denying her dual cultural other authors navigating between two languages and two countries in their works written between the portuguese of his parents and the french learned at school at times uncomfortably positioned he became the translator of the major portuguese speaking author antonio lobo antunes and published his own first novel le poulailler in in which he wrings the neck of the smooth image of portuguese immigration assimilated almost the universite de paris iv sorbonne who has written several novels and two books of poetry and manuela degerine also professor of portuguese who among these writers is the most successful in recreating the universe of the portuguese domiciled in france lastly we must mention the name of eduardo lourenc mo portuguese essayist who has lived in nice for fifty years and by those french readers interested in portugal the presence and creativity of portuguese plastic artists in france is important and longstanding in at the age of twenty maria helena vieira da silva arrived in this country and in installed herself in the villa des came lias studio in paris where she encountered other artists such as braque picasso utrillo modigliani the legion of honor in the painter manuel cargaleiro also came to set himself up in france his work above all inspired by the azulejos in the manuel cargaleiro foundation museum was inaugurated dedicated to the ceramic arts numerous other portuguese artists have lived or remain in france over these many years among them the painters antonio dacosta and isabel meyrelles and the designer brito the sculptors in french galleries or at the calouste gulbenkian cultural music and song as for the other artists we wish to distinguish essentially two situations confronting those artists within the domain of music and song those coming to france after being chased out of portugal by the dictatorship and those born in with his record portugal angola chants de lutte recorded in paris in cilia denounced the colonial war in the second case we
for historians models and methods many historians have some familiarity with central place theory as represented in diagrams arraying towns and villages in hexagonal patterns on the hypothetical flat featureless plain imagined by walter christaller especially relatively few historians and other social scientists however have engaged the ideas advanced by a johnson and carol a smith which offer alternatives to the christaller models by taking into account the effects of physical isolation primitive transport and manipulation of the market by both local and cosmopolitan elites although this literature has gained some attention in relevant social on the macroeconomic study of modernization and marginalization seems to have been quite limited probably because the geo graphic microanalysis on which it depends is not easy to apply in a global context for example daron acemoglu et al make no reference to this literature and operationalize geography by characterizing whole countries as to distance from the equator soil quality and natural resources central places on the basis insofar as possible of the range of retail and service functions they provided according to an commercial directory this hierarchy contains some towns that were omitted by the commercial directory but that we added to the fourth or fifth level on the strength of aggregate census data on total population and nonagricultural economic activity we also observed a class of small settlements especially in connaught that lacked a corps of permanent resident tradespeople but nevertheless maintained weekly public markets and we decided to include these centers in the bottom level in this process we tried to avoid privileging any particular spatial arrangement of central places at different levels of commercial complexity so that we could then legitimately test for alternative spatial patterns the commercial hierarchy thus constructed consists of national metropolis provincial cities regional cities central market towns and local market towns we supplemented this commercial hierarchy with a parallel administrative hierarchy based on the police command structure we also developed methods for detecting and visualizing spatial patterns in the commercial hierarchy so that we might explore the possibility that a than to another but what different parts of the country here we have chosen to follow the method developed by skinner in his study of late imperial china the delineation of a set of internally differentiated regions with relatively rich lowland cores and less fertile upland peripheries the rationale for thus dividing territory mainly along major watersheds is that prior to mechanized overland transport natural waterways and of bulky goods while rugged terrain was a significant obstacle figure delineates the resulting set of we aggregated several variables originally collected for units smaller than the county so that we could characterize the local economy of each of the regions an analysis of these data yielded results suggesting that two factors which we interpret as reflecting the degree of modernization and inequality are especially useful in characterizing each region we were interested in possible relationships between the inequality factor and measures characterizing the central place hierarchy at the regional level as a means of assessing how a colonial model might be useful in understanding pre famine society in various parts of ireland furthermore the factor analysis enabled us to group the regions into macroregions centered on dublin belfast and cork that analysis also confirms that the regions generally core in the east to a less developed national periphery in the west the concept of colonialism as it is used in recent academic discourse embraces not only the relationship between a colonial power and a colonized society in this case england and ireland respectively but also the relationship between local elites who may be regarded as tools of the colonial power and the general population we begin by addressing the first of these the administrative structures of the state in ireland we divide our treatment of the role of local elites into agrarian and nonagrarian sections the agrarian regime was dominated by a landed aristocracy and gentry known since the late eighteenth century as the protestant ascendancy though recent historiography has stressed the continued presence of a catholic agrarian elite despite the penal laws of the eighteenth century rural unrest as a simple conflict between peasants and landlords is also contested among irish historians who sometimes find more complex disturbances that pitted laborers against tenant farmers rather than being targeted against the landlords or their minions we have tried to accommodate at least some of this complexity in our analysis although the ascendancy had once shared authority urban elites emerged as contenders with the landed elite for economic and political power in a section headed nonagrarian elites we analyze the system of towns with a view to understanding how the urban sector may have contributed to the dysfunctions that are blamed on colonialism administrative structures under the act of union the irish parliament had been merged in with to be carried out by separate government departments in dublin as in england the executive tried to rely on local gentry to bear much of the burden of administration but because of the scarcity of gentlemen in many parts of the country that model of governance was increasingly regarded as unworkable the formation of a nationwide constabulary beginning in was one of several steps by which the dublin administration assumed constabulary in had some local police posts district headquarters and county headquarters there had until recently been two provincial inspectors general who maintained offices in belfast and cork respectively and there was a national headquarters in dublin castle figure depicts the geographic distribution of the towns in the top four levels of this administrative hierarchy intensively in the national periphery than in the core to maintain its authority skinner has shown that in late imperial china towns in the macroregional peripheries tended to be found higher in the administrative hierarchy than would be predicted from their places in the commercial central place hierarchy to see whether a similar pattern might have been present in pre famine ireland we created a contour map of
blackhearts cool roxette and these are just songs with the pure title i want you i decided to disregard those which made less austere or absolute demands i want you around i want you bad i want you back i want you back baby i want you back again i want you free i want you more i want you now i want you dead i want you to love me i want you to need me i want you to rock me i want you to want me i want your love i want your mother i also did some digging into the linguistic and literary history of i want you more of that later on including plato who turns out to be responsible for the whole thing but i want to have my say first about elvis costello s song which has some striking and i think symptomatic features the first eight lines of the song are musically distinct from the rest and sung with a kind of breathy sincerity i take this opening to be an ironic s but it is a complicated irony because the darkness into which the song then plunges already infects the vocabulary and intonation with which costello delivers these apparently vacuous sentiments when the first line oh my baby baby is repeated it is followed not by the anodyne disclaimer i love you more than i can tell but by the more disturbing i want you so it scares me to death whereupon i love you more than i can tell is itself recast as i ca nt say any more than i love you everything else is a waste of breath everything else includes the rest of the song a waste of breath in which all the waste products of the introduction are recycled phrases decay and mutate it scares me to death for example can be heard in line young man i do believe you re dyin in line it scares you witless but in time you see things clear and stark and line i know i m goin to feel this way until you kill it in any case the singer is wasting his breath trying to get through as he realizes in line i might as well be useless for all it means to you from the outset then costello seems interested not just in an emotional state but in the language conventionally employed to represent it of the song in line the phrase i love you makes an effort to return but it s a doomed attempt that s the last we hear of it on the other hand i want you appears another thirty two times in a song which at line clearly remembers elizabeth barrett browning s sonnet how do i love thee let me count the ways this numerical superiority is telling a shift from generosity to greed from self sacrifice to selfishness god loves you the devil wants you of course things are a lot more complicated than that as the linguistic history will show nevertheless the phrase i want you does not necessarily imply i love you and if the phrase i love you implies i want you it usually does so in a benign sense costello sets the phrase in an alternating pattern in which for the first connected to the surrounding sentences except at line where it appears in quotation marks and is attributed to the singer s rival the two voices in the poem one discursive and variable the other monotonously lyric only interact in the sixth and final section in lines every night when i go off to bed and when i wake up i want you i m goin to say it once again til i instil it otherwise the two voices are segregated though they collude with the each s work which would be incomplete without the contribution each of them makes the meaning of i want you is colored by what surrounds it simultaneously costello suggests that all other ways of expressing jealous self pitying rage boil down to this of course the repetition itself is meaningful it s a feature of many if not all songs called i want you as though the most fertile aspect of the phrase was self replication saying i still there s a difference in the pronunciation of the phrase which does nt come out on the page but which is obvious when you hear the song performed costello has two ways of singing it i want you and i want you and this division has at least a partial structural function the phrase i want you marks the beginning of a section this is the case with lines and the beginning of the second third fourth and fifth sections of the song again the sixth and final section is different beginning at line with i want you sung twice and then shifting to i want you the only time it happens this way round such reversals function as clues to the audience that a poem or song is coming to an end and that s probably the reason for it what do these two ways of saying the phrase connote i want you implies a preference what linguists call contrastive stress and it is also a famous first world war recruiting poster which has uncle sam s pointing finger but also the word you in larger i want you on the other hand points inward draws attention to the feeling itself and by implication to the person expressing it i want you takes the act of wanting for granted i want you asks us to dwell on what it means to want someone as far as the you is concerned both forms of the phrase prompt the other question of what it so in different ways to feel that it is you that is wanted is not quite the same certainly not necessarily the same as to
firms since executive compensation and the value of executive stock and option strongly positively correlated with firm size firm size could be used in place of insider stockholdings as a measure of non information based motives for trade to preserve sample size we adopt this approach findings in prior research also suggest that the coefficient estimate on mv should be negative in all periods because insiders purchase less stock at large firms for this reason we expect that mv is negatively related to freqp and valuep in each period controls for the effect documented by rozeff and zaman that insider buying climbs as stocks change from growth to value categories accordingly the coefficient estimate on bm is predicted to be positive panel of table presents descriptive statistics on the explanatory variables the distributions of and are very similar because they are computed over similar periods our data are drawn from the years period until the third quarter of prices generally rose in the following period prices generally fell despite the retreat that began in from june to december the period over which prior returns are computed the index and the nas nms composite index both rose by more than implying that the median six month returns of between in table are consistent with overall market movements the median observation has a market at the beginning of the fiscal year of million and the mean mv is nearly times greater because mv is highly skewed we report regression results for ln which is the natural logarithm of mv the book to market ratio bm over sample firm quarters has mean and median values of and respectively specifically seyhun documents that the absolute value of stock trades by insiders is negatively firm size analysis of trade over time finding that the net number of insider purchases freqp is positively correlated with the abnormal return associated with a forthcoming announcement means that insiders are more likely to buy stock before good news is released and more likely to sell stock before bad news is released for a given price reaction to an announcement by a firm insiders profits are proportional to the value of stock traded the value of stock traded increases in the magnitude of the abnormal return at the announcement means the value of insider trades and hence insider trading profits increase when their information advantage is to test for these associations we regress freqp and valuep on the information content of the announcements and the filings as proxied by the abnormal returns at these ln mvfq fq and valuepfq ln mvfq fq separate regressions are run for each of the periods these regressions pool data across firms and quarters the chief interests in these regressions are the coefficient estimates on aret fd and aret ea ie and regressions control for firm calendar year quarter and fiscal quarter fixed periods and are days long in every case because some firms file ks or qs shortly after announcing earnings period is less than days in some to control for the possibility that either or is correlated with the number of days in period the set of explanatory variables for period is augmented with indicator we analyze interim and fourth quarter observations separately because it is possible that the relation between insider trade and the abnormal returns at the announcement and the filing may differ across quarters for at least four reasons first the time between an interim earnings announcements and the filing of the is shorter than the time between the fourth quarter earnings announcement and the filing of the on average the elapsed announcement window and the filing window for these events are and calendar days second salamon and stober find that the stock price response to earnings surprises is greater at interim earnings announcements than at fourth quarter announcements third griffin finds that the price response to filings is greater on average than the price response to filings finally for both announcements and filings two sample wilcoxon rank sum indicate significant differences in the distributions of absolute abnormal returns for the fourth quarter compared to interim quarters these differences in price reactions and time between information events could lead insiders to adopt different trading strategies across interim and fourth quarter disclosures however the signs magnitudes and significance levels of coefficient estimates are quite and the three quarterly qs relative to the value measure the signed frequency measure equally weights the insider s trading decisions if high value insider trades are more likely to be motivated by liquidity needs or a desire to diversify or are subject to greater scrutiny by regulators then an equal weighting of trades may better capture the informed component of insider trade over the first three fiscal quarters of the firm the median mean and minimum number of calendar days between the announcement window and the filing window are and days respectively for the observations there are or fewer days between the announcement window and the filing window for the fourth fiscal quarter the gap between the earnings announcement date and the filing date is longer the median mean and minimum number of days between the announcement window and the filing window are and specifically indicator variables dn for are created let be the length of period in calendar days for an observation for firm in quarter where the indicator variable dnfq is equal to otherwise it is zero recall that for the years we study the sec requires qs to be filed no later than days after the end of the quarter while ks must be filed no later than days after the end of the quarter in the sample qs on are filed days after the quarter s end while ks are filed on average days after the fiscal yearend predicted associations of trade with announcement and filing returns if trades are prompted by an insider s desire to actively exploit foreknowledge of the content of either the earnings announcement or the regulatory filing
bar the third row shows the response of a rightward moving energy detector built by squaring and summing the outputs of two spatiotemporally oriented filters phase dependent a rightward motion leads to a nonoscillating positive response regardless of whether the bar is light or dark a leftward motion gives no response finally the last row shows the response of an opponent energy detector which takes the difference between rightward and leftward energy responses a rightward motion produces a positive response whereas is independent of the polarity of the bar extracting velocity although stimulus polarity will not effect the response of a motion energy detector stimulus contrast will a given detector will give a weak response if the stimulus is of low contrast or if the stimulus energy happens to fall outside the detector s region of sensitivity this means that velocity is confounded with contrast figure suggests a scheme in which velocity is derived by comparing the outputs of several channels within the same spatial frequency band the three gaussian like curves in fig represent the sensitivities of a leftward sensitive will stimulate the channels in ratios that are determined by the relative sensitivities of the three channels to the grating s spatial and temporal frequency if the grating s contrast is changed the absolute value of the responses will change but the ratios between them will remain fixed as long as each channel s response grows in proportion to the contrast of the input deviations contrast the velocity situation may be likened to that in color vision in which overlapping cone spectral responses can give color the ratio can become quite small and so the velocity estimate will blow up or become unreliable the visual system must have some means of tagging the velocity estimate with a confidence measure the simplest approach would be to use the output of the static channel as it stands high velocities or low contrasts would then lead to low confidence measures for the cause it to receive a relatively low weight in determining the final motion percept applications of spatiotemporal energy models we have described a type of spatiotemporal energy model for an individual motion channel that is a channel tuned to a particular band of spatial frequencies a complete motion percept will be the result of the combined responses of many the perception of moving stimuli since we cannot yet offer a thoroughly elaborated model we will restrict ourselves to considering the responses of individual channels in this section we show that the spatiotemporal energy channels do have many of the basic properties needed for building models of human motion perception the pictures that follow are computer simulations of the a motion detecting system of course is that it should be able to respond appropriately to ordinary continuous motion figure shows the stimulus that was used in fig figures and show the energy extracted by motion channels sensitive to rightward and leftward motion figure shows the difference between the rightward and the leftward responses ie the output of an motion negative for leftward motion and zero for stationary or blank regions the output of a stationary channel is shown in fig a measure of velocity can be derived by comparing the outputs of the stationary and the motion channels thus the system has the basic qualities that we need rightward leftward opponent motion and stationary channels for this sampled input the dominant response is the same as it was for continuous motion note however that the motion responses are not entirely smooth but fluctuate in synchrony with the frame rate the static channel shows a similar fluctuation and is stimulated in the midst of the motion this is consistent with the oral motion extraction reveals the essential properties of the motion percept that we would like a model to explain leftward and rightward motions give rise to leftward and rightward responses and this occurs by the same mechanism whether the motion is continuous or sampled if the sampling rate is too slow the motion will not appear perfectly continuous rather a rapid variation will moved to the right in steps it appears not surprisingly to be moving to the right if on the other hand the polarity of the bars is changed on each step so that black bars become white and the white bars become black then the perceived motion may be reversed it will now look as if the pattern were moving to the lower spatial frequencies really are moving backward the phenomenon can be better understood if one plots the space time diagrams of the normal and reverse phi stimuli figure shows the case of normal sampled motion fig shows the reverse phi case it is clear from glancing at the patterns that the normal case has a great deal of rightward motion energy whereas the reverse phi case has a great deal by moving the contrast reversing pattern to the right figures and show the outputs of a motion detector for the two patterns not surprisingly fig is light indicating rightward motion whereas fig is dark indicating leftward motion note that the response in fig is actually rather complex different amounts of leftward motion are signaled in different the stimulus in fig different regions should give motion responses of different strengths also note that the motion regions themselves move along to the right even though the regions contain leftward energy these response properties are roughly consistent with what one often sees when looking at a reverse phi stimulus again the full motion percept of the reverse phi stimulus will be the combined result the output of a single channel cannot be used to give a full prediction of the appearance of the motion but the spatiotemporal energy approach does handle the basic phenomenon of direction reversal quite easily fluted square wave illusion if a square wave jumps to the right in steps that are deg of its period then it is seen to be form appears to be jumping to
a cascade fashion an alternative approach that integrates match scores at level and level in a parallel fashion was also proposed in where min max normalization and sum rule were employed to fuse the two match scores although the latter is a more commonly used and straight forward approach it is more time consuming since matching at both level and level has to be scheme and fusion rule on the other hand the proposed hierarchical matcher enables us to control the level of information or features to be used at different stages of fingerprint matching experimental results to our knowledge there is no ppi resolution fingerprint database available in the public domain hence we collected four impressions resulting in fingerprint images in our database experiments are carried out to estimate the performance gain of utilizing level features in a hierarchical matching system and more importantly across two different fingerprint image quality types the average time of feature a pc with of ram and a pentium cpu all programs are currently implemented in matlab and we expect the computational costs to be significantly reduced after optimization in the first experiment we compare the matching performance of the proposed hierarchical matcher to that of the individual level and level matchers and their score level fusion across the entire database for each respectively note that we exclude symmetric matches of the same pair as well as matches between the same image as shown in fig the proposed hierarchical matcher results in a relative performance gain of percent in terms of eer over the level matcher it also consistently outperforms the score level fusion of individual level and level matchers information to level features and can significantly improve the current afis matching performance when combined with level features using the proposed hierarchical structure in the second experiment our aim was to test whether the performance gain of the proposed hierarchical matcher is consistently observed across different image quality we divided the entire database into two equal sized groups and applied both level matcher and the proposed hierarchical matcher to each group exclusively the average number of genuine and impostor matches for each quality group respectively are and the fingerprint image quality measure we employ is based on spatial coherence as proposed in note that this quality measure also favors large sized fingerprints gain of the proposed hierarchical matcher over the level matcher is observed across different image quality groups this result contradicts the general assertion that level features should only be used when the fingerprint image is of high quality in fact high quality fingerprint images typically contain a sufficiently large number of level features for accurate identification it is size that gain the most from matching using level features in general our experiments show significant performance improvement when we combine level and level features in a hierarchical fashion it is demonstrated that level features do provide additional discriminative information and should be used in combination with level features the practical and beneficial summary and conclusions we have presented an automated fingerprint matching system that utilizes fingerprint features in ppi images at all three levels to obtain discriminatory information at level we introduced algorithms based on gabor filters and wavelet transform to automatically extract pores and ridge contours a modified icp algorithm was employed be examined to refine the establishment of minutia correspondences provided at level more importantly consistent performance gains were also observed in both high quality and low quality images suggesting that automatically extracted level features can be informative and robust especially when the fingerprint region or the number of level features is small the potential of improving afis matching investigated currently we are in the process of optimizing our algorithm and acquiring a larger database for testing we are also exploring automatic extraction of additional level feature types api based and information theoretic modularization of a non object oriented software system we have proposed a set of design principles to capture the notion of modularity and defined metrics centered around these principles these metrics characterize the software from a variety of perspectives structural architectural and notions such as the similarity of purpose and commonality of goals we employ the notion of api as the basis for our structural metrics the rest of the metrics we present are in support of those that are based on api some of the important support metrics include those that characterize each module on the basis of the similarity of purpose of the services offered by the module these metrics are based on information theoretic principles we tested our metrics on some popular open and some large legacy code business applications to validate the metrics we compared the results obtained on human modularized versions of the software with those obtained on randomized versions of the code for randomized versions the assignment of the individual functions to modules was randomized introduction any attempt at code reorganization is the division of the software into modules publication of the api for the modules and then requiring that the modules access each other s resources only through the published interfaces our ongoing effort from which we draw the work reported here is focused on the case of reorganization of begin with we can think of the problem as reorganization of millions of lines of code residing in thousands of files in hundreds of directories into modules where each module is formed by grouping a set of entities such as files functions data structures and variables into a logically cohesive unit furthermore each module makes itself available to the other modules modules on the basis of the cohesiveness of the service provided by each module ideally while containing all of would also contain all of the ancillary functions and the data structures if they are only needed in that module capturing these cohesive services and ancillary support criteria into a set of metrics is an important goal of our research the work that we report here is a step in that
between two polarizable atoms furthermore studying the interaction of atoms prepared in excited energy eigen states showed that the contributions to the force which arise from real resonant transitions can be attractive or repulsive similar extensions have been accomplished regarding the interaction of atoms and higher order multipole atomic moments were included in the interaction of ground state atoms with perfectly conducting plates and extensions of the image charge method to the interaction of ground state and atoms in excited energy eigen states with planar dielectric bodies were given the method can be further improved by describing the atom and the body on an in terms of electrostatic linear response of the two systems this was first demonstrated for a ground state atom interacting with a realistic half space exhibiting non local properties the approach was demonstrated to lead to a finite value of the interaction potential in the limit for sufficiently large values of the potential for an atom in front of a half space can be given by an asymptotic power series in a dipole polarizability of the atom local permittivity of the half space where the leading order term corresponds to an attractive force and coincides with the perfect conductor result in the limit of infinite permittivity next order corrections are due to the atomic quadrupole polarizability on the one hand and the leading order non local dielectric response on the other hand the response function approach has been used to study the ground state objects with half spaces of different kinds such as the forces on an ion and a permanently polarized atom in front of a metal half space an anisotropic molecule in front of an electric half space as well as the interaction of two atoms in front of a metal and an electric half space extensions include the interaction of an atom in an excited energy eigen state with an electric and a birefringent dielectric half space on perturbative effects effects due to a constant external magnetic field and the interaction of single groundstate atoms molecules with bodies of various shapes where perfectly conducting nonlocal metallic and electric spheres non local metallic and electric cylinders perfectly conducting planar and non local metallic spherical cavities have been considered pairwise summation over the microscopic london potentials between the atoms constituting the bodies yielding an attractive force between two dielectric half spaces though applicable to bodies of various shapes the method could only yield approximate results due to the restriction to two atom interactions by modeling the body atoms by harmonic oscillators the interaction energy of the bodies could be shown to sum of all possible many atom interaction potentials applications to the interaction of two half spaces and two spheres were studied microscopic calculations of the dispersion interaction between bodies were soon realized to be very cumbersome in particular for more involved geometries in an alternative approach based on macroscopic electrostatics the interaction energy can be derived from the eigen modes of the electrostatic coulomb potential which are subject the boundary conditions imposed by the surfaces of discontinuity the method was used to calculate casimir forces between electric spheres electric spherical cavities metal half spaces exhibiting non local properties rough electric half spaces and electrolytic half spaces separated by a dielectric even though electrostatic methods have been developed into a sophisticated theory forces they can only render approximate results valid in the non retarded limit where the object separations are sufficiently small so that the influence of the transverse electromagnetic field can be disregarded this was first demonstrated by casimir and polder using a normal mode expansion of the quantized electromagnetic field inside a planar cavity bounded by perfectly conducting plates they showed that the force between the plates can be derived from the total energy of the modes the difficulty that this energy is divergent was overcome by subtracting the respective diverging energy corresponding to infinite plate separation the finite result implying a force per unit area in a similar way they obtained the force on an atom near one of such plates and the force eqs and and found that in the retarded limit the atom atom and atom plate potentials are given by and respectively which correspond to attractive and forces that decrease more rapidly than the ones in the non retarded limit casimir and polder had thus developed a unified theory to describe dispersion interactions over a large range of distances normal mode techniques have since been widely used to study dispersion interactions has been confirmed in various ways inter alia by basing the calculations on the multipolar coupling scheme in place of the minimal coupling scheme originally used by casimir and polder and relativistic corrections have been considered extensions include the interaction of three or more atoms the influence of higher order multipole moments and permanent dipole moments on the two atom force the interaction between anisotropically polarizable atoms and that between a polarizable and a magnetizable atom in particular it was found that in the retarded limit the force between a polarizable and a magnetizable atom is repulsive as in the non retarded limit but follows the same power law as that between two polarizable atoms furthermore the interaction of atoms in excited energy eigen states and the influence of external conditions finite temperature applied electromagnetic fields or additional bodies on the atom atom interaction have been studied in particular when the interatomic separation exceeds the thermal wavelength the force decreases more slowly in the zero temperature limit similarly the casimir polder result for the atom plate interaction has been confirmed atoms that carry permanent electric dipole moments have been considered and the influence of finite temperature as well as force fluctuations has been studied in close analogy to the atom atom interaction it was found that the interaction between a magnetizable atom and a perfectly conducting plate is repulsive and that the force decreases more slowly in the zero temperature limit as soon as the atom plate separation exceeds the thermal wavelength in
the drink about and we drink it aw for about clock and then we ve got two hours to sober up a bit then i just shout to ma big sister and she lets me i go straight to bed or sometimes i stay with ma pal laughs i just go in the hoose get changed and say mum i m dead tired i m away tae ma bed and she goes awright then i do nt go up tae her so she cannae smell ma breath hangovers might also have to be concealed from parents if i ve got a hangover i just say that i m tired cause it s the weekend and if it s a sunday it s a lazy day so i just go back into ma bed and just lie there despite the fact that many of the children appeared to be aware of their vulnerability when under the influence of alcohol only a minority reported any attempt at harm avoidance some said that they tried to limit the amount they consumed and it appeared that sometimes they succeeded in achieving this frequently however the best of intentions would be subverted by the effects of the alcohol and they would drink more than they had intended sometimes a group of children would arrange for a member or members to remain relatively sober so that they could look after those who were drinking more heavily however as the following extract illustrates these precautions could break down all too easily and they could find themselves dependent upon friends who were invariably as intoxicated as they were themselves she a friend was meant tae be looking after kirsty and me and no tae drink a lot but she just got steamin as well finally the locations in which their drinking took place tended to compound the risks that the children faced occasionally they would drink indoors in one of the children s homes but as that increased the risk of getting caught it was not the preferred venue the most popular settings were secluded and often isolated locations where they were unlikely to be detected or observed these locations clearly increase the dangers the children should something go wrong conclusion this study has reported on the alcohol related experiences of a relatively small number of pre teenage children there is we believe a clear need for more research of both a qualitative and a quantitative nature to explore more fully the nature extent and social context of drinking within this particular age group for example there is a need to undertake more detailed research to better understand why children of this age to be a desirable state and the ways in which they perceive and attempt to manage the risks associated with drinking most pre teenage children do not drink alcohol on a regular or even occasional basis having said that the findings that we have reported suggest that those children who do are exposing themselves to a variety of risks for regular or occasional drinkers getting intoxicated was a common occurrence and for most of them it was their main reason for some of the children recognized the dangers involved in getting drunk and took steps to avoid them however while these attempts could be successful they also tended to be unreliable as we saw a number of the children had already got themselves into serious situations on the basis of the amounts they consumed the combinations of alcoholic drinks involved and the frequency with which they drank many more of them were obviously at considerable risk associated with the initial use of alcohol outside the home where the fact that they had no experience of drinking increased the likelihood that novices would become drunk several of the children described being drunk and incapable on their first serious encounter with alcohol the fact that their drinking usually takes place in secluded locations well out of the gaze of adults increases the potential for harm should something go wrong the children s accounts of their drinking their parents were likely to have little or no idea of what was going on various subterfuges were used to conceal the fact that they had been drinking from their parents and most of the time these appeared to succeed the initial use of alcohol appeared to be motivated by a combination of curiosity peer influence peer pressure and a desire to be accepted by the group the role played by peers in the that the continuing emphasis in schools on the development of life skills including the ability to deal effectively with unwelcome pressure is appropriate and important according to the children s accounts peer pressure appeared to be much less significant as far as occasional or regular drinking was concerned consistent with the findings of studies of older youths the main reason they gave for continuing to drink was that they enjoyed it a proportion of them also claimed that boredom played a part in encouraging them to drink this suggests that there is a need to ensure that young people have sufficient opportunities to occupy their time in enjoyable and fulfilling ways without resorting to the use of alcohol there is no doubt that boredom and a lack of structured activities is a major problem for many young people in contemporary britain the need for investment in alternative activities is recognized by the uk government which amongst other things is about to invest billion per annum over next two years to improve sports facilities partly in an effort to divert young people from undesirable activities while addressing the lack of facilities available to young people is an important part of the solution we also recognize that there may be a role for education in advising on how to use their leisure time more constructively another major influence on the children s drinking patterns was taste a dislike of the taste of alcohol was the main reason that the
dual wheels without wire entanglement a symmetric loading of its two motors which leads to an enhanced load carrying capacity and d reduced uniform tire wear a dwt unit consists of two identical epicyclic trains at different levels with a common planet carrier the planets are connected to the wheels via universal joints such a unit has three degrees of freedom which are the independent rotations of the the planet carrier with respect to the robot platform a previous design shown in fig was reported in tang and angeles designed another version of the dwt unit and proposed a mobile platform driven by three such units in order to achieve a high transmission performance we propose here a design based on cam roller pairs instead of gear pairs cam profiles an algorithm modifying the cam profile was given in to reduce the vibration during high speed transmission wang et al introduced a planetary indexing cam mechanism however the pitch curve of their cam inevitably has self intersection points the cam mechanism studied here is derived from speed cam soc which was designed based on the synthesis paradigm proposed a fixed frame the spatial cam profile is determined under nonslip conditions by means of the three dimensional aronhold kennedy theorem thereby reducing the power losses caused by friction the novel mechanical transmissions offer features such as low backlash high efficiency high reduction ratio and high stiffness as compared to conventional transmissions such as gears harmonic drives etc on the kinematic design dual wheel transmission the dwt consists of two epicyclic gear trains egts with a common planet carrier as shown in fig one egt is composed of one input gear two sun gears and and one planet gear while the other egt comprises one input gear two sun gears and and one planet gear two motors are mounted on a common platform as shown in fig motion is transmitted and the two coupling joints since cam roller pairs require conjugate cams to transmit motion and force continuously the total thickness of the array of cams and follower disk is significantly bigger around three times than that of its egt counterpart replacing the four different levels of the gear pairs in fig with speed cam transmissions directly would lead to a much taller unit which will unavoidably for cam roller transmissions as shown in fig where the meshing representation of fig has been kept with regard to fig we have two epicyclic cam trains with one common planet carrier one train is composed of one input cam one ring cam and one planet roller follower while another train comprises one input cam one ring cam and one planet roller follower this layout has only two meshing levels this layout avoids the need of two coaxial shafts separated by one needle roller bearing as is the case in the dwt of fig the needle roller bearing unnecessarily increases the size of the unit and leads to a lower load carrying capacity contact ratio g and t already have come into engagement this overlap is desirable a measure of such overlap action in gear transmissions is the contact ratio which is defined as the ratio of the angle of action to the pitch angle therefore the contact ratio in one gear pair is given by where is the pitch angle and is the angle of action it is good design practice to maintain a contact ratio of or all tolerances at their worst case values a gear contact ratio between and means that part of the time two pairs of teeth are in contact during the remaining time one single pair is in contact we can apply the foregoing definition directly to the case of soc figure shows the geometry of a planar soc the angle of action can be defined with respect to the input angle and the are the angle of action and the pitch angle of the input a and being those of the output since socs are constant ratio speed reducers we must have generalized transmission index the main objective of mechanisms is to transmit motion from the input joint to the output joint as a result the load applied at the output joint is transmitted to the input joint the internal wrench arising because of the load is not necessary to evaluate the quality of a transmission we focus only on the transmission wrench screw tws introduced by sutherland and roth the virtual coefficient between the tws s and the output twist screw ots s is given by where pw and pt are the pitches of s and s respectively transmission index gti developed here follow this definition the only difference among the three indices lies in the definition of the maximum value of the virtual coefficient sutherland and roth introduced the characteristic point to find the putative maximum value of the virtual coefficient this point is defined as the point on the tws axis closest to the axis of the feasible twist screw fts of the floating joint on the the characteristic length was defined as the distance from the characteristic point to the ots among all possible twss with a constant pitch pw and passing through for a given ots the maximum virtual coefficient is given by an expression that will be clarified presently defined if the pair is prismatic spherical or planar furthermore since pw and are not constant in general the ti cannot match the virtual coefficient by representing the floating joint on the output link as a screw sutherland and roth encountered the problems we have mentioned moreover their length may be far from the actual size of a mechanism and hence may yield an unreasonable ti therefore the floating joint on the output link is represented as the point of application a of the wrench transmitted as shown in fig this point is defined as the centroid of the contact region in the physical joint more specifically the point a of a
to be the dominant force shaping space the results here suggest that the position that many researchers adopt when describing the spatial sphere of the female inhabitants of the muslim house as secluded and segregated needs to be re examined for instance petherbridge has pointed to the dominant emphasis of the of the female inhabitants of the muslim house as secluded and segregated needs to be re examined for instance petherbridge has pointed to the dominant emphasis of the muslim house on privacy on the one hand and the seclusion and segregation of women on the other in his discussion he treats these as two parallel features although he does not describe the spatial aspect of female seclusion nor does he distinguish between culture and religion in addition as we the study sample illustrate the complexity of human habitation and suggest ways in which houses can carry cultural information in their material form and space configuration in the disposition of artifacts within the domestic interior it is proposed follow ing hillier and hanson that the analysis of domestic space configuration can provide the link be tween the design of houses and their social consequences in a discussion of the way in which dwellings can be tailored to suit of domestic space configuration can provide the link be tween the design of houses and their social consequences in a discussion of the way in which dwellings can be tailored to suit the particular requirements of the individual while at the same time satisfying agreed upon criteria alexander made a distinction between mass and fine adaptation in the case of the mzab houses a common solution is found at the level of fine adaptation the interiors are literally suit the individual family this is achieved partly by carving out a variety of storage alcoves from thick walls as well as by taking advantage of the speed with which partition walls can be dismantled and rebuilt within the same basic plan scholars who have studied the mzab houses however stress the fact that these shells present hardly any physical changes from the initial layout etherton has remarked the individual house plan reflects a pattern of life which has since the lbadhites first settled in the mzab an austere and secret life proud of their early hardship and achievements and highly regulated in every detail the size offamily determined the size of house and public buildings were no more than a number of typical houses joined together to provide extra space there must be a difference in lifestyles the historical evidence points to the centralized largely female space in berber architecture as a modem adaptation of the physi cal forms points to similar features hence the current adaptation of lifestyles does not contradict the rigid traditionalism of life but on the contrary preserves it and makes it possible the extent to which traditional domestic spaces can accommodate change is significant as in any historic study it is not easy to infer how the houses were used when built despite the valuable surveys undertaken in recent years zabite houses have hardly been studied in any depth indeed before no stranger had set foot in the mzab today the introduction of contemporary house furniture alongside the relatively old ones patterns of space use within the same basic layout the fact that when first built the dwellings were shells for extended families while today the nuclear family seems to prevail as the basic social unit means that modem social practice and lifestyle have had to adapt to the physical limitations imposed by the original plans while the house plans studied here represent a number of different typological layouts and the number of domestic spaces for each domain and zone are there is a pattern of sorts in the configurational properties within and between the zones throughout the sample it is also clear that the spatial domination of the female is well integrated in the house this paper has raised a number of issues that call for a reassessment of the received view of design strategy suggesting an agenda for the development of research in the area of changing lifestyles related to domestic form and space of all trades or master of one product differentiation and compensatory reasoning in consumer choice alexander chernev this research examines consumer reactions to two common positioning strategies a specialized positioning strategy in which an option is described by a single feature and an all in one strategy in which an option is described by a combination of features the empirical data reported in this article demonstrate that a product be superior on that attribute relative to an all in one option even when this attribute is exactly the same for both options it is further shown that the observed devaluation of the all in one option can be mitigated by introducing another attribute on which the all in one option is inferior to the specialized option a single attribute and a broader all in one positioning in which products are described by a combination of attributes to illustrate era is positioned by procter and gamble as the detergent with powerful stain removal cheer promises to help protect against fading gain offers great cleaning power and finally tide combines all of the above features combining these positioning strategies raises the question ll in one option and vice versa from a conceptual standpoint combining specialized and all in one options raises several issues whether and how the perceived performance of the attributes differentiating an all in one option would change in the presence of options specialized on each of these attributes and whether and how the perceived performance of nondifferentiating attributes of a specialized option would change in of cheer in the presence of tide despite their conceptual importance and practical relevance these issues have not been explicitly addressed in the marketing literature this research examines consumer reactions to specialized and all in one product positioning strategies in particular
sole income from performing within western classical tenets are conservatoire degree programmes and realistic career opportunities odd bedfellows for conservatoires to engage their students fully in preparation for a varied career boundaries between performance and other spheres of musical study must be transcended future research might explore the extent to which this is an international phenomenon indeed of pedagogical training in year the undergraduates became more receptive to a future role in education there was also a desire for increased levels of hands on experience strong links developed between the rncm and the music services of adjacent boroughs such as bolton stockport and salford are highly beneficial therefore the service in salford presently employs graduates from the school of wind and percussion it seems right to question the amount of teacher salford are highly beneficial therefore the service in salford presently employs graduates from the school of wind and percussion it seems right to question the amount of teacher shadowing that occurs however typically the undergraduates experience only two observation sessions of between two and four hours undergraduates also placed unrealistic restrictions we felt on how teaching might feature in their career this might best be addressed through further experience march the rncm was awarded a substantial grant from the higher education funding council for england to become a recognized center for excellence in teaching and learning this has major implications one of three specialist areas chosen for development is the training of specialist instrumental teachers a center for young musicians will be established and a junior wind and percussion project forged in partnership with local music services perhaps the swp should continue to a center for young musicians will be established and a junior wind and percussion project forged in partnership with local music services perhaps the swp should continue to move resolutely in the direction of engaging students in practical experience with children this bearing could also embrace planning and implementing music lessons in accordance with national curriculum directives and federation of music services guidelines the intention of latter is to provide a framework for a broad and balanced curriculum this would be especially helpful for graduates who become class music teachers or instrumental specialists in schools the office for standards in education noted that good instrumental teachers know how to set their teaching into the broader context of pupils music learning including the national curriculum our research served as an interesting exploratory study which opened a window swp undergraduates training and career aims it provided a useful insider s perspective which could inform curriculum planning within the faculty at the start of this article we stated that findings from such a small sample cannot be generalized more widely the study does raise questions even so and bids further exploration a future biographical investigation of conservatoire students could explore a larger cohort cover a wider range of issues a finer grained analysis of the identity shifts across training those who administer and teach in conservatoires should review their philosophy purpose and place in the wider world of higher education it seems reasonable to state that conservatoires should as an ongoing process look at the relationship between students aspirations their programmes and the vocational world of music the pathological voice of gilbert abstract the tenor gilbert louis duprez is today remembered for his invention of the from the chest first presented to parisian audiences in this has retrospectively been mythologized as the origin point of modern tenor technique though recent research has thrown the exact nature and significance of duprez s achievement into doubt nonetheless one context in which duprez was understood as revolutionary was in the scientific work of two diday and joseph petrequin whose essay me moire sur une nouvelle espe ce de voix chante offers a unique perspective not only on what duprez sounded like but also on developments in the understanding of the physiological phenomenon of singing itself placing this work in the context of earlier medical writings on the voice and of the authors subsequent debate with the singing teacher manuel garcia jr suggests that the late were a period of flux in the history of of singing one in which long held certainties were being questioned duprez thus arrived in paris at a unique moment the changing conceptual background shaped the understanding of duprez s voice even as the tenor was used by the doctors as a living experiment to reach conclusions about the function of the voice generally the first page with an article under the general heading physiologie experimentale the gazette usually had one long article per issue typically on a topic related to clinical practice and so a significant portion of the paper s readership less interested in abstract physiological research than in practical surgical technique may have stopped reading before they even got to the title those who read the me moire sur une nouvelle espe ce de voix chante by paul diday and joseph petrequin would have found an ambitious and almost unique project an attempt by two doctors not only to account for musical phenomena using the tools of science but also to reach general conclusions about human physiology specifically the role during singing of the position of the larynx the of air from the lungs based on observations made in the opera the new species of voice is a tenor voice primarily identified with gilbert louis duprez though the authors claim that duprez had already spawned a crowd of imitators three years before the me moire appeared in april the tenor had caused a sensation at the paris opera as arnold in rossini s guillaume tell hehad inherited the role from its creator adolphe nourrit and the conflict between the mythologized and remythologized ever since as recently as a new york times article about a crop of new tenors retold the story as nothing less than an origin myth of the modern tenor voice as the practice of altering pre pubescent boys
probably began conceiving of shuffleton s barbershop perhaps she visited the busch her to be a trustee of the fisher also attended the busch quartet s final performance on september in manchester vermont she vividly wrote about the event in a letter to irene serkin two years later describing the pulsations of busch s powerful personality and masterly playing in the performance of the beethoven razumovsky dorothy canfield fisher papers at the university of vermont all letters postdate shuffleton s barbershop but they provide a glimpse into the close relationship the two families shared any time irene serkin wrote that you would care to come we would be happy to have you and mr fisher up here and i am sure that rudi would love to make some music too if you would like amid updates on rudolf s career and the marlboro for the fishers to know you both and to be permitted to love and admire you is one of the great gifts we thank for today and irene and rudolf were avid readers of fisher s books and fisher in turn would be sent free recordings of rudolf s performances in fisher suggested that irene serkin write a biography of nearly forty years later in the compilation adolf busch letters pictures memories from which i have frequently cited here fisher writes you know how much i always admired your greatest pity if his children and grandchildren and great grandchildren did nt know in detail about what sort of man he was but i also think the world at large brattleboro or might fisher have even introduced the busch family to the rockwells all it would have taken was a busch serkin trip to arlington to visit the fishers and meet their friends as john serkin writes adolf and my parents became friends with the author dorothy canfield fisher who lived in arlington although the details of whatever encounter may have taken place but dorothy canfield fisher seems the most compelling link between rockwell and busch and in lieu of any unearthed document explicitly associating the two she seems the most likely way that rockwell would have encountered busch s op the geographic coincidences are already surprising and the fisher connection makes my proposed solution to this musical iconographical riddle verifiable whether one believes a busch and rockwell link will depend upon one s tolerance for such coincidences we will probably never know for sure but the odds are compelling the highly diverse keys are traversed in a quasi symmetrical manner while tempi alternate between tranquillo and vivace the structure of this ten minute piece is summarized in figure though the symmetrical enharmonic shifts necessitate some chromatically unusual modulations the form of deutsche ta lnze is unmistakably classical there are of course countless examples from the classical three six or among the collections of such dances in groups of six with which busch may have been familiar are those by haydn mozart beethoven and schubert busch s deutsche ta lnze is but a further extension of this germanic tradition heavily indebted to his composition teacher max reger one of the few composers after brahms whose music busch regarded highly and regularly reger s densely chromatic music greatly influenced busch s early compositions especially his works for large though in a much less complex fashion the influence even trickles down to the passages of harmonic unsteadiness in playful works like deutsche ta lnze composed just five years after s death busch s individual waltz melodies are charming and simple probably based on or inspired by folk melodies and it is through these chromatic sections that the piece modulates fluidly through its disparate keys chromaticism undermines the opening harmony particularly in the third waltz in sharp major which will serve as a fine representation of the sort of music encountered within this composition the waltz begins in the third waltz and beginning of the fourth waltz copyright by breitkopf ha lrtel wiesbaden leipzig reproduced by permission of the waltz destabilizes into extended hemiolas so too does the harmony moving far from the opening sharp major by proceeding through a sequential pattern of rising pairs of falling fifths the last key serves as the dominant of our sharp tonic and we return to the harmonic simplicity of the opening via its dominant despite these chromatic modulations the deutsche ta lnze are not difficult pieces by any means nor are they difficult to rather the waltzes seem to fit comfortably within the genre of hausmusik as the very title of busch s opus suggests many of busch s compositions for chamber ensemble were intended for private social gatherings written for friends family and students to lnze dorette zwiauer was irene s godmother s daughter whose family took care of irene while her parents were off performing this again suggests the social intimacy for which the waltzes were conceived how appropriate then to hear if only in our imaginations busch s hausmusik ll s head hangs a poster whose bright blues and reds catch the eye amidst the faded browns and yellows of the barbershop it depicts a tattered but triumphant american flag with a patriotic exhortation below it this was in fact a real world war ii poster painted by allen saalburg and distributed by the office of war information shortly after the bombing of pearl harbor but would understand the symbolism at play here world war ii was part of america s recent collective memory in and the juxtaposition of this memory with the rehearsal of german music gives the otherwise unironic painting a distinctly rockwellian flair a clash of cultures is a common trope throughout for sale or the african american children moving into white suburbia or perhaps most famously the tough minded teenagers peering quizzically as a grandmother and grandson say a blessing though our initial reaction may be to chuckle at the cleverness of such images there are dark and uncomfortable elements anxiety over a changing world as
dangerous offenders means that safety considerations must be paramount in their clinical management on the other hand although the government promises that any unjustified intrusions by conditions applying to them will be avoided with special should be detainable against their will to protect the public despite warnings that up to people may have to be detained to prevent one homicide this suggestion reflects a clear shift away from liberal individualism towards utilitarian thinking and has attracted the greatest deal of criticism from many different mental health lobby groups it is a been overridden by the value of public safety this means that the individual rights of the patient and potentially his or her best interest can be overruled by considerations of public safety or in other words the best interest of the public the problem with this proposal is not so much the shift itself since that is a legitimate political decision but the practicalities of it the most reliable predictor of violence in a person who has never been violent is at best unreliable and contradicts all evidence that has been gathered on the prediction of violence thus it is possible that people can loose their right to freedom to the best interest of the public without ever having been a danger it is that potential that should concern even supporters of the utilitarianist model because the consequence of which would be a very unsatisfactory outcome the amendments introduce new safeguards for informal patients with long term incapacity who cannot consent to treatment but are not resisting it and are therefore de facto detained this strengthens the rights of these patients who were previously detained in their best interest but without legal safeguards to check whether the not a shift in principle but a legal strengthening of safeguard by legal means a very broad single definition of a mental disorder is introduced in the new bill which means that all patients will be considered against the same set of conditions there will therefore be no need to distinguish between mental impairment mental disorder and psychopathic shift towards more utilitarian thinking the fact that detention will not any longer be possible to prevent deterioration of health but only when there is risk appears to make detention more difficult but in fact it removes the very criterion that has the patient s best interest at heart in favor of a broader best interest of society and the management of risk from a pool of mental health professionals with a defined minimum number of years experience in mental health this will include psychologists social workers and psychiatric nurses research suggests that this may include professionals with a more potentially hostile view towards formal detention as long as they are not party to the process temporarily to an approach that favors individual rights the tribunals will have order making powers to reduce the time before a patient is seen by the mhrt this will increase patients rights and make current legislation comparable with article of the human rights act an analysis of the proposed changes shows that some changes are moving into a more utilitarian or consequential to enable compulsory treatment in the community is a clear move towards more utilitarian approaches so is the broad single definition of mental disorder because they both favor public safety considerations over individual rights the detention of patients with severe personality disorders clearly points towards a more utilitarian thinking even though the evidence as to whether this is going such that the government in its own words states safety considerations must be paramount in clinical management safeguards for patients with long term incapacity move towards a more rights focused approach as do tribunals being held within a tight time frame mental health tribunals without psychiatrists on the panel as will be commonplace under the rights this can be seen as utilitarian or rights focused but the consequences are still very unclear in summary there is a clear ethical shift towards more consequentialist thinking or in other words outcome oriented thinking away from rights focused approaches the consequences community orders exist in a third of countries in the european union but very little research exists that would allow an analysis of their effectiveness in the european context it is very unlikely that the proposed legislation will reduce violence by mentally ill offenders society is likely to feel equally unsafe because of media coverage regardless of and which may have an adverse effect on recruitment there is a high likelihood of increased stigmatization of mental illness due to the legislation rather than the intended reduction of stigma discussion in summary the proposed legislation changes mean an ethical shift away from rights focused approaches to more desirable if there were overwhelming benefits to society any ethical analysis needs to be based on the overall premises and consequences need to logically follow from the premises currently the consequences do not follow logically from their premises therefore the proposed changes to the mental the premises themselves are little supported by evidence this is an ethically unacceptable approach and should be resisted on ethical grounds until premises and consequences can be more reliably analysed competing interests the author declare that they have no competing interest the context of kuhn s theory of scientific revolutions a conceptual analysis is carried out to clarify the role of those philosophical implicit positions that influence the empirical problems related to comorbidity psychiatric comorbidity is an artifactual byproduct of the diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders classification because exclusion rules but many exclusion rules were deleted in subsequent dsm revisions for philosophical reasons the consequent explosion of comorbidity rates led the dsm toward a scientific crisis three possible intra paradigmatic solution strategies are considered would exacerbate the crisis of the dsm pressing for a revolutionary solution finally the waited effect on comorbidity of three alternative models is briefly considered and researchers were solicited to contribute to the literature basis that dsm planners should use for the
rape or so did six members of the court justices brennan and marshall pronounced the death penalty unconstitutional for all chief justice burger and justices blackmun powell and rehnquist hewed to mcgautha s a type hands off in fact the question referred to the death penalty in this case and crime or case to the question thus invited the lesser form of review that the three plurality justices douglas stewart and white actually justice white s opinion best describes the type analysis each justice applied to the death sentencing patterns that each had observed over years of almost daily exposure to the facts and circumstances of hundreds and hundreds of parts of justice douglas s opinion also suggested a type conclusion that the particular crimes and criminals did not warrant death and that other illegitimate factors drove the and the justices attacks on untrammeled discretion suggested an e type concern for fair capital sentencing the plurality s dodging of the ultimate question that a majority of the court would decide could not be anchored as firmly as justice stewart thought on the prudential value of deciding as little as possible the passive virtues hardly justified a decision wiping out hundreds of judgments and scores of state and federal statutes and forcing states to adopt new laws while obliging them to await further pronouncements from the court that might render the effort a colossal waste of time nor was it clear what was gained by temporizing given how frequently and thoroughly the court had considered the death penalty s years and given the clarity of the available options mandatory wholly discretionary guided or no death moreover sidestepping the central question required the court to make new constitutional law by its terms the cruel and unusual punishment clause requires substantive and facial analysis of punishments at least when applied to given the court had to break on something other than the attributes of death as a punishment and murder as a crime such as racial patterns in the imposition of the penalty or how aggravated a particular murder was or the fairness of the procedures used to mete out the sanction the plurality s turn toward procedural analysis was particularly odd given mcgautha s rejection of all pressing procedural justice douglas could call his mcgautha dissent and furman opinion consistent but he aptly questioned how justices stewart and white who were imprisoned in the mcgautha holding could justify their procedural tack in most peculiarly the furman plurality reached a conclusion that appeared to establish the death penalty s unconstitutionality as a whole and discretionary mcgautha ruled out the first two sentencing options mandatory given history s negative and legally guided because it could not be humanly though furman may have done nothing else it clearly ruled out the remaining discretionary method all that needed to be done to declare the penalty unconstitutional therefore was to draw a deductively obvious conclusion not the virtue of passivity it was nearly the opposite forcing states to engage in an onerous legislative redrafting exercise might generate information the court could use to improve its own constitutional decision making a chief abolitionist argument in boykin mcgautha and furman was that the death penalty was so rarely carried out and so evidently on its way to extinction that the evolving standards of decency furman tested this argument using state legislatures prosecuting offices and juries as the laboratory if states wanted the death penalty they could prove it by drafting and applying new more careful and more costly if most failed to reinstate they thereby would bless the alleged abolitionist trend and enable the court thereafter if called on to invalidate a small number of vestigial statutes to share the plurality justices experiment in furman was not one the abolitionists had suggested and it did not prove their thesis within months congress and thirty five of the pre furman capital states reinstated the death a substantial minority bucked the historical trend that had overwhelmed death sentencing in the nineteenth century and adopted mandatory death sentences for capital murders a smaller minority prosecutors had sought juries had imposed and state high courts had affirmed numerous new style death verdicts and dozens of condemned defendants were on the court s doorstep seeking review in deciding what to do next the court closely followed the returns on the nationwide referendum it had the july cases its word one might have expected the court to defer deciding the type constitutionality per se question until the new statutes generated enough of a track record to allow type pattern focused analysis of their application but furman itself made that route impractical waiting for sentencing patterns to develop would have required the court either to grant stays indefinitely extending the moratorium on executions for onset of harm that later or type rulings could not repair the court had no choice but to postpone the lesser type question and address only the petitioners type challenges to the death penalty in the abstract likewise in addressing the petitioners type attacks on the new sentencing procedures and standards the court limited its ruling to strictly facial review of the statutes reversing the usual order the court put off any challenge to the statutes application in the particular cases before guided discretion affirmed the court decided the five cases on friday july thirteen years after justice goldberg first posed the type question and nine years after the court first took certiorari to answer it the court issued a decision claiming to do so the answer the court gave however was a question the question the court supposedly had resolved in in deciding whether the the court said maybe the death penalty may be constitutional if upon future consideration it turns out that standards of the sort the court in mcgautha rejected as inevitably ineffective but which georgia florida and texas adopted after furman provide a workable way to distinguish criminals who deserve to die from those who do not something slightly more than this question was necessary however the july cases recall the furman mcgautha syllogism the death sentenced
for the rectus femoris muscle decreased in the high force group and increased in the low force group in addition beck et al found stable from approximately increased from approximately and then decreased from mvc it was suggested that the increase in mmg mpf from approximately may have reflected recruitment of fast twitch motor units and or increases in motor unit firing rates the decrease in mmg mpf from however may have been due muscle stiffness is primarily a function of the number of attached cross bridges and intramuscular fluid pressure increases with isometric torque thus it is possible that at high levels of isometric torque production muscle stiffness and or intramuscular fluid pressure could impair the lateral muscle fiber oscillations that generate the mmg signal thereby influencing in mmg mpf during isometric muscle actions of the first dorsal interosseous from the authors hypothesized that in addition to motor control strategies the frequency content of the mmg signal may also be influenced by the fiber type composition of the muscle being investigated thus the results from these studies suggested muscle stiffness and or intramuscular fluid pressure could interfere with a potential relationship between mmg frequency and the global motor unit firing rate and or the global motor unit firing rate may not always increase with isometric torque however several studies have reported increases in motor unit firing rates with isometric torque and there is evidence to support a thus it is more likely that in some cases factors such as muscle stiffness and or intramuscular fluid pressure could potentially impair the lateral muscle fiber oscillations that generate the surface mmg signal thereby interfering with a relationship between mmg frequency and the global motor unit firing rate mmg mpf does not always increase with velocity isokinetic muscle actions there is a velocity related shift in the contributions of slow twitch muscle fibers to torque production specifically at low velocities both slow and fast twitch muscle fibers contribute to the torque that is produced by the muscle increases in velocity however slow twitch muscle fibers become unloaded because they with increases in velocity the contributions of slow twitch motor units to the mmg signal decrease potentially resulting in greater mmgmpf values cramer et al provided tentative support for this hypothesis by demonstrating that during maximal concentric isokinetic leg extensions mmg mpf for the rectus femoris vastus lateralis and vastus medialis muscles was greater at s than at and isokinetic leg extensions at velocities ranging from s there were velocity related increases inmmgmpf for both the rectus femoris and vastus lateralis but not for the vastus medialis it was suggested that the muscle specific differences in the mmg mpf responses may have been due to potential differences in fiber type composition among the rectus femoris vastus lateralis isokinetic leg extensions there was no change inmmgmpf for the vastus lateralis muscle with an increase in velocity from to s thus it is unclear if movement velocity has a significant effect onmmgmpf during maximal concentric isokinetic muscle actions it is possible however that any potential influence could be related to muscle fiber type composition of fast twitch motor units with increases in velocity during eccentric muscle actions theoretically this could also result in a velocity related increase inmmgmpf evetovich et al however reported that during maximal eccentric isokinetic muscle actions of the leg extensors at velocities of and s there were no changes rectus femoris vastus lateralis and vastus medialis actually decreased approximately an increase in velocity from to s during maximal eccentric isokinetic muscle actions of the leg extensors in addition there was no change in mmg mpf with an increase in velocity from to s it was suggested that during maximal eccentric isokinetic muscle actions the velocity related thus the results from the studies that have examined the mmg mpf responses during maximal concentric or eccentric isokinetic muscle actions indicated that there is not always a velocity related increase in the global motor unit firing rate during maximal isokinetic muscle actions and or there is a velocity related mmg mpf the possibility for slowtwitch muscle fibers to become unloaded during concentric muscle actions or even de recruited during eccentric muscle actions suggested however that in some cases mmg mpf may not be influenced by changes in the global motor unit firing rate as hypothesized by cramer et al it is possible that any potential relationship between summary and conclusions the results from the studies that were examined in the present review generally supported the hypothesis that the frequency content of the surface mmg signal is related to motor unit firing rates although the details of this relationship cannot be determined at the present time the available evidence does allow some basic conclusions to be drawn signal is generated by the motor unit mechanical responses to electrical activation and its frequency is very similar to the stimulation rate but only when the twitches are not completely fused during voluntary muscle actions however the motor units are typically not activated simultaneously and the contribution of any particular motor unit to the mmg signal is influenced by many factors muscle the thickness of the tissue between the muscle and the mmg sensor as well as muscle stiffness and intramuscular fluid pressure furthermore the results from studies that have examined the mmg frequency domain responses from various muscles during voluntary muscle actions suggest that mmg frequency is influenced by fiber type composition specifically muscles with a large frequencies than those from muscles composed primarily of slow twitch fibers this is important because fast twitch motor units have higher firing rates than slow twitch motor units and require greater stimulation rates to achieve complete fusion of motor unit twitches in addition the argument that the surface mmg signal torque relationships during isometric and dynamic muscle actions as well as during fatiguing activities for example orizio et al suggested that increases in mmg mpf for the biceps brachii during isometric muscle actions of the forearm flexors from approximately may have
or no effect because teams are managerially driven and or teams do not constitute a major change in hierarchical establishments where either none or all of the establishment s largest occupational group are in a team and with further restrictions this means that only a minority of employees in are included in the analysis moreover harley includes only one category of team in his analysis here i include both teams that appoint their own leaders and those that do not and both teams which according to managers jointly decide how work is done and those variables are each interacted with an index of the proportion of the largest group that is working in teams it can be seen from table that the impact of teamworking on discretion is significant but differentiated consider first teams where members do not jointly decide how work is done comparing establishments with no team working in the largest occupational group with the establishments where there is per cent teamworking discretion is lower consistent with the critical accounts of teamwork however for those teams where team members jointly decide about work the negative impact of teams is almost exactly neutralized the joint impact is and statistically insignificant for these employees the essence of harley s neutral finding is reproduced here finally whether the team is self led or otherwise appears to have no significant effect on these findings imply that while the critical accounts of teamwork s effect on employees find support for about half of employees there is a need to distinguish between team types in order to capture heterogeneity in their effects on work organization also expected to have a positive association with individual discretion is where the firm introduces various flexible hours policies one can sometimes of the employee i expected the former to be associated with higher perceived discretion the data which is derived from the management questionnaire allow us to identify whether each flexible working time arrangement is applied to some workers in the establishment and not whether any given employee can access that arrangement presumed that in many establishments the policies are generalized to all or most workers the pattern of coefficient estimates implies that task discretion for employees is raised where there is a flexitime policy in place this finding is as expected and serves if nothing else to confirm the reliability of workers perceptions of discretion conversely discretion is lowered in establishments where there shifts and the coefficient estimates for a zero hours policy and for annualized work hours are negative although insignificant these types of flexibility policies help employers to call on workers to work when employers want them to where managers report having direct systems of quality monitoring might also be expected to have a negative bearing on workers task discretion as they used including direct supervisor manager monitoring monitoring by separate inspectors self monitoring records of faults and complaints customer surveys and other unspecified methods most establishments use managers and supervisors to directly monitor quality and this form of monitoring carries a negative coefficient however with a value of the coefficient is not quite significant at conventional levels the impacts on discretion of other forms of monitoring were negligible a further set of establishment characteristics concerns the use of targets it was hypothesized by gallie et al that the growing use of targets to control production may have been one of the causes of the observed reductions in employee discretion during the the idea is that where targets are in force line managers might need to control work more closely for employees precisely in situations where monitoring is costly responding managers were asked to state whether they had to meet any targets over a range of input and performance variables a dummy variable was constructed to indicate whether or not any targets were used in the establishment only per cent of employees worked in establishments with no targets while the point ets is positive it is not statistically significant this finding suggests that a rising use of targets is unlikely to have been a major explanation for declining discretion during the although it is conceivable the explanation would be more relevant in the public sector person level and establishment level controls were also added to account for otherwise unspecified factors that might influence job design it is found non whites discretion is set significantly lower for trade union members a finding which has a straightforward interpretation if employers fear that trade union members are more likely to behave in their own interests or those of the union rather than the employer they are likely to design jobs that afford workers less control over their actions alternatively it could be that workers in low discretion jobs are more easily organized have included standard errors adjusted for clustering within establishments they do not allow for the possible unobserved effects of establishment characteristics on individual job design some of which might be correlated with individual characteristics and hence generating biased estimates by definition these establishment specific characteristics are unobserved but i take them to include both the effects of management culture and the particular production function of both of which might be correlated with variables that are observed the estimation shown in column seeks to address this possibility it shows the establishment fixed effects estimates as can be seen there is little change from the magnitude of the coefficients given in columns and which implies that any unobserved fixed effects are largely orthogonal to the individual observed effects nevertheless it is also the case that the value is from to suggesting that a notable amount of the variance of discretion can be accounted for by between establishment variance the test of the null hypothesis that the additions of establishment fixed effects does not account for additional variance is rejected at the level with statistic critical value robustness checks to utilize as independent variable the establishment level index of task discretion derived from the reports of managers tdimp it
provocative acts from others with ambiguous intent might easily be these children regardless physically abused children demonstrated a distinct sensitivity to perceiving hostility even when it was apparent that the provocateur held no malicious intent this propensity for actually misperceiving aggression from others represents a considerable error in social information processing which at least partially explains the heightened risk for aggressive and disruptive behavior in physically abused children these results suggest that violence may lead physically abused children to distort the meaning of even non threatening cues in the environment a perceptual style which may have developed as a protective mechanism against future hostility although the data cannot provide confirmation this notion has also been suggested by previous research aspects of emotional development were also included in this study due to the and aggression as well as the important role that parent child interactions play in emotional development given that children in maltreating families are the recipients of frequently inconsistent and or insensitive parenting these children are considered less likely to form an appropriate understanding of emotion and emotional expression and are at increased risk for the development the failure of caregivers to respond sensitively to children s emotional needs and to serve as appropriate models for emotional expression and coping with arousal is also likely to contribute to significant disruptions in emotional development particularly in terms of children s capacity for emotional self regulation although it was expected than any maltreatment experience of emotion regulation only physically abused children were found to be at significant risk in the current investigation because children with a history of maltreatment subtypes other than physical abuse did not exhibit significantly more aggression and disruptive behavior than any nonmaltreated children further examinations of the factors underlying the development of aggressive and disruptive behavior problems focused on physically abused children physical abuse was significantly associated with an increased likelihood for misperceiving hostility from others easy access to aggressive responses to conflict and poorer emotion regulation only misperceived hostility and poor emotion regulation however were found to significantly predict children s aggressive and disruptive behavior furthermore both of these variables at least partially accounted for the relationship between physical abuse and aggressive and problems although maltreated children who had not been physically abused did not appear to be more aggressive and disruptive than the non maltreated comparison group an indirect effects analysis was conducted to determine whether or not the same cognitive and emotional factors accounting for the behavior problems evident in physically abused children were also operative in explaining acting out behavior in other maltreated children the results indicated that social information variables were not related to aggressive and disruptive behavior in maltreated children who had not been physically abused however the behavior problems evident in these children were to a certain extent the result of the deleterious impact that maltreatment experiences had on their ability to effectively regulate their emotions thus general emotion regulation deficits appear to confer a risk for behavioral difficulties in all maltreated intentions as hostile on the other hand serves as a risk factor for aggressive behavior that is distinctly associated with the experience of physical abuse the present investigation confirms the findings of shields and colleagues which indicate the considerable importance of emotional processes in the etiology of behavioral dysregulation the current study also extends the work of shields et al by indicating that the negative expectations that maltreated children develop about others hold differential importance for behavioral outcomes based upon the type of maltreatment experienced whereas negative representations and hypervigilance to threat may lead to reactive aggression in physically abused children they may lead to other defensive reactions such as fearful avoidance in other maltreated children who have not been physically abused future research should investigate this hypothesis as well as attempt to clarify the specific cognitive and emotional processes underlying this phenomenon the results of the current study are consistent with investigations noting that maladaptation in both the cognitive as well as affective domains makes unique contributions to the development of problematic relationships with peers and emphasize the importance of considering multiple domains of functioning in efforts geared toward improving the understanding of the processes development these findings highlight the diversity of impact that the experience of child maltreatment can have on various developmental processes indicating that maladaptation varies across maltreatment subtypes furthermore the present investigation underscores the need to consider not only the iniquities inherent to the experience of maltreatment itself but also the differential effects that maladaptation in multiple functioning may have in mediating the varied pathways leading from disruptions in the early caregiving environment to later maladjustment it is important to note that there are some limitations to the current study one limitation involves the measurement of errors in social cognition in this study we examined two of the six stages outlined by dodge and his colleagues in their description of the social information processing model of peer relations this may explain the relatively minor role of social information processing patterns found in mediating the relationship between physical abuse and aggressive and disruptive behavior if we had included other aspects of information processing such as expectations of positive outcomes of aggression or the encoding of social cues aggressive patterns of processing might have been more influential in explaining the development of behavior problems in physically abused children limitation of this study is the manner in which emotion regulation was measured the sort method employed in the present investigation did not allow for an examination of distinct patterns of emotion regulation difficulty research investigating patterns of emotion dysregulation as overcontrolled or undercontrolled with a closer examination of particular aspects of affective regulation might extend the findings of the present study by examining how aspects of social cognition and emotion processes may interact in accounting for the problematic behavior demonstrated interactions the findings presented in this study make a significant contribution toward improving the understanding of the processes linking early aversive experiences to later maladaptation and
a second laser and different types of optical feedback the simplest optical feedback scheme is conventional optical feedback where the laser receives feedback from a normal mirror however other other types of feedback are also possible including optical feedback from two different mirrors incoherent feedback phase conjugate feedback and optoelectronic feedback in this paper we consider a semiconductor laser subject to filtered optical feedback where the reflected light is spectrally filtered before it reenters the laser this coherent optical feedback system which is known as the fof laser has recently been the subject of a number and theoretical studies as in any optical feedback system important parameters are the delay time and the feedback rate moreover for coherent feedback there is also a feedback phase that controls the phase of the incident light the interest in the fof laser is due to the fact that filtering of the reflected light allows additional control over the behavior of the laser by means of choosing the filter detuning and the filter width a particular motivation for the bifurcation analysis performed here was the discovery by fischer et al of a new type of oscillations these the so called frequency oscillations are characterized by oscillations of the optical frequency of the laser while its intensity remains practically constant mathematically this means that the dynamics of the laser takes place in a very small neighborhood a cylinder in phase space the existence of fos is remarkable for several reasons first pure fos are unusual for semiconductor lasers due to the strong amplitude phase coupling in these lasers second the period of the fos is on the order of the delay time of the fof system while one would normally expect the undamping of the characteristic relaxation oscillations to be the first instability to be encountered in semiconductor lasers note that ros are a well known feature of feature of laser dynamics specifically they are a periodic exchange of energy between the optical field and the population inversion of the laser they have a characteristic frequency that depends on the laser and its operating conditions and is on the order of ghz we present here a detailed bifurcation study where we identify the stability regions of s and the different types of bifurcating oscillations ros and fos laser systems involving optical feedback such as the fof laser considered here are quite challenging to analyze because they need to be modeled by delay differential equations which feature an infinite dimensional phase space in this work we use numerical continuation software for ddes namely the packages dde biftool and pdde cont to find and follow efms and periodic ros and to determine their stability and bifurcations we present this information in the plane of feedback strength versus feedback phase for different values of the filter detuning this amounts to a study of a physically relevant part of a three dimensional parameter space we finish this introduction with a brief review of the literature on the fof laser experimental studies in comparison with results from numerical integration of the governing rate as was mentioned fos were first found in an experiment reported in a characterization of the fos in comparison with a measurement is presented in our short paper which also contains a single stability diagram the connection between fof and optical injection is the subject of while considers different limits of the fof laser equations a reduced model for weak fof is derived analyzed and compared with the full model in and hopf bifurcation curves giving rise to ros and fos are identified all of these papers consider the case of a filter with a single maximum in its reflectivity a filter with a minimum at its center frequency is the subject of where continuous wave solutions and bifurcating periodic orbits are a rate equation model this paper is organized as follows in section we present details of the fof laser and in particular the governing dde model section presents the stability of the efms which includes a detailed analysis of how the stability region splits into two parts when the filter is detuned in section we characterize ros and fos and determine their stability regions in the plane of feedback strength versus feedback for different values of the detuning finally we summarize and point to future work in section the fof laser system there are a number of ways to set up a frequency selective element in optics including michealson interferometers optical gratings or fabry erot cavities figure shows a looped set up that has been used in experiments a fraction of the laser s emission travels through a fabry erot filter before the light is fed back into the laser optical isolators ensure that there are no unwanted reflections the fof laser can be modeled by rate equations for the complex valued optical field of the laser the real valued population inversion of the laser and the complex valued optical field of the filter in dimensionless form these equations can be written as here the material properties of the laser are given by the linewidth the enhancement factor and the electron life time while is the pump rate the laser is coupled to the filter in via the coupling term ef where is the is the feedback rate equation for the complex envelope of the filter field is derived by assuming a single lorentzian approximation for the fabry erot filter see for example for details here is the delay time that arises from the finite propagation time of the light in the external feedback loop the feedback phase cp in measures the exact phase relationship between the laser and the filter fields whereas is the detuning between the filter center and the solitary frequency of the laser that is finally the parameter is the filter width the parameters and cp are our main bifurcation parameters that is we consider the bifurcation diagram in the plane furthermore we study how the bifurcation diagram changes with the
we must recognize that it carries its own notions and expectations about itself and its members one of these is the suddenness of conversion a notion supported by an array of related tropes and conceptions i suggest that the most important of these is not the notion of time but the notion of the person and of what it means to be a convert these notions are conceived differently by different types wrought by god that creates a new person conversion is said to be a new birth a kind of circumcision or even a kind of death of the old self such notions are supported by the practice of baptism by immersion though in the revivalist tradition the ritual of baptism merely marks an event that has already happened within children the ritual itself takes precedence and is not held to be as personally transformative the accompanying rhetoric focuses not on the gift of a new person but on the outpouring of the gift of god s grace in such cases there is room for more gradualness in the conversion process conversion stories i once collected from thai buddhists to build their conversion stories around a particular transformative point where they had been changed for good in these stories the acquisition of belief was partly an act of obedience and partly a gift from god a few had become converts in lutheran churches however and these converts stories were less likely to have dramatic climaxes instead building up to eventual instruction for baptism thus the expectation of radical change is itself a product converts as an empirical entity however conversion has both continuous and discontinuous aspects as robbins notes anthropologists have tended to highlight the continuities while protestant christians privilege the discontinuities where there is a shared experience of sudden change as of it is not surprising that all related changes might be ascribed to a single event however suddenness is not necessary for changes to be profound as was suggested some time ago by rita kipp the sociological impact of changes can be significant even when they are grounded in nondramatic nonemotional events belief but acceptance of particular authoritative sources of teaching and templates for behavior some of these may be conveyed through particular leaders and communities but some are also translocal in origin thus it is that changes at the sociocultural level can be significant even when the individual participants are uncertain about their that is acquired through conversion is not entirely reducible to the practices and orientations of individuals i therefore applaud robbins s advocacy of christianity as cultural material worth the exploring in its own right and of taking discontinuity claims seriously that the discontinuity claims are made at all suggests the incorporation of christian perspectives on personal and collective pasts at the same always absolute and sudden it is still interesting to discuss the ways in which they are talked about and performed reply i thank everyone for writing such thoughtful and constructive responses i find them quite rich in themselves even before considering their relationships to my arguments and i am cheered by the extent to which they can be read as talking to that call for a direct response on my part in general i see three such critical concerns that appear in several responses and i will organize my reply around them placing my comments on other issues the respondents raise within the structure they provide otherness and continuity peel and keller both argue quite pointedly against my claim that continuity thinking motivates neglect should be laid squarely at the feet of the anthropological drive to study other cultures it is because anthropologists are committed to this he writes that they have tended no neglect the religious tradition which has been the cultural cradle of their own society on keller s account it is cultural particularism that deserves the blame for christianity s poor showing to which peel refers renders anthropologists inclined to assume that when people encounter christianity they are destined always to dissolve it without remainder in the unique solution of their traditional culture coleman who does not phrase his point as a critical one per se makes a further quite imaginative addition to this line of argument when he suggests that part about the spatial confining of culture by bursting the territorial boundaries of the sacred to the extent that anthropological notions of differences are tied up with deep seated assumptions about the territorial boundedness of cultural groups christianity s frequent lack of respect for territorial divisions enhances the threat it poses to the otherness anthropologists i have elsewhere made a related claim drawing on harding s important piece to suggest that part of what makes christianity so difficult follows not simply from the fact that it is too familiar to most anthropologists but also from the fact that of things that are too familiar it is also the most strange as such christianity is as coleman puts it an anthropological the side of the same nor on that of the other this anomalous status and its threat to the self other binary that has been so important to the constitution of anthropology is one reason christianity has continued to fare poorly even as other homogenizing difference attenuating components of global culture such as capitalism have managed to land themselves at the forefront of the anthropological profoundly shaped its approach to christianity but even as i am happy to register the importance of the argument that the disciplinary interest in difference and cultural particularity has played a part in driving anthropologists away from christianity i am not willing to concede that one concerning the disciplinary interest in continuity thinking is not crucial to this explaining this phenomenon as well in glossing the one based on differences as an argument about the culture of anthropology and the one based on continuity thinking as an argument about the deep structure of anthropological theory i further suggested that the theoretical impediments
cause the competing decay the above mentioned sine sine correlation ie a build up curve that is dominated by spin pair double quantum coherences but also that the same experiment provides access to a fully dipolar refocussed multiple quantum decay function which can be used to independently analyze the effect of dynamics on the measured data in networks where large scale chain dynamics ild up signal such that a temperature independent normalized build up function can be obtained that solely depends on the network structure in this way reliable information on the distribution of residual couplings and thus on semi local dynamic heterogeneity becomes accessible this review is concerned with the foundations and recent applications of proton mq spectroscopy to a variety confined polymer melts and chains tethered to copolymer blocks and surfaces it should be emphasized however that the central concepts and advantages of mq spectroscopy in particular the distribution analysis in networks and the separation of structural and dynamic information is directly and without any change in the experimental strategy applicable to deuterium the absence of complications nmr studies will help to further extend our understanding of polymer dynamics basic principles multiscale chain dynamics and residual dipolar couplings the phenomenological starting point for the understanding of the relationship between polymer chain dynamics and nmr detected local order is the orientation dependence of the dipolar coupling axis with respect to the magnetic field which fluctuates rapidly and thus mirrors the segmental dynamics in order to simplify the treatment one can subsume local and very fast conformational rearrangements on the ps scale into a pre averaged dipolar tensor the joint number of monomer units that take part in this pre averaging can be referred to as an nmr submolecule the statistical or kuhn chain segment and the analysis of motions within such a kuhn segment is the domain of relaxometry and rotational isomeric states models to be adopted importantly then takes on the meaning of the orientation of the local symmetry axis of motion rather than an individual bond or internuclear vector orientation and this symmetry axis can safely be assumed to be along the polymer backbone the time dependence therefore monitors orientation fluctuations of the can be quantified in terms of a uniaxial order parameter the characteristics of the uniaxial dynamics of is most conveniently described by the autocorrelation function of the second legendre polynomial basically gives the probability of finding a chain segment a knowledge of this function fig gives a schematic representation of the orientation acf for the case of long chain polymer melts and networks the first decay is associated with rouse type chain motions this type of dynamics is ultimately constrained by entanglements or permanent cross links whereby a more or less developed plateau arises in permanently end tethered chains reptation or arm retraction respectively provide effective mechanisms for further loss of correlation the exact shape of the acf depends on the complex hierarchy of free constrained and cooperative motions different models and approximations for the acf many of them based on the rouse reptation or tube models have been discussed in the context of different given by the square of what is here defined as the order parameter of the polymer backbone where dres is the residual dipolar coupling that results as a time average over the fluctuations of the dipolar tensor covering the time until the plateau region is reached the constant describes the averaging due to very fast intra segmental motions as indicated by the right hand side constraints to its average unperturbed melt state value and to the number of statistical segments between the constraints the latter provides the link to entanglement theories or theories of rubber elasticity swelling and stress optical properties of elastomers the relationship is very well supported by a variety of easily accessible in polymer melts or lowly cross linked systems while a model free determination of dres is feasible for the case of elastomers in this case it is possible to fully remove the effect of dynamics from the experimental observables whereby reliable information even on the distribution of dres is attainable the fitted quantity always represents an average over multiple interand obtained it is often given in terms of the related second moment thus when we include the pre averaging by local conformational rearrangements in an effective rather than static rigid lattice second moment this as well as deff dstat is of course a model dependent as well as the corresponding spectra is demonstrated in fig generally distributions of dres lead to a disappearance of characteristic oscillations but it is important to realize that intermediate timescale motions and the resulting intensity relaxation have the same qualitative effect such that a reliable differentiation between the two is not straightforwardly possible in been analyzed in terms of a gaussian distribution of endto end distances between cross links in terms of the normalized is given by gaussian statistics is a cornerstone assumption in most theories of polymer dynamics and it is important to appreciate its potential effect on the measured data using eq the distribution of dres is easily obtained as its standard deviation res it should be kept in mind that neglects any influence of a potentially serious network chain polydispersity the solid line in the inset of fig may be referred to as super lorentzian and its observation in deuterium spectra of elastomers was interpreted as a confirmation of the relevance of gaussian statistics the static multiple quantum experiment basic principles the pulse sequences of the experiments to be discussed in the following are schematically depicted in fig and details are given in the cited literature many of the results reported herein have been obtained using simple low field equipment which was shown to yield data of almost the same quality as a modern high field spectrometer ield independent and the loss of chemical resolution due to the low field or the absence of mas does not pose a serious restriction when single component systems or
color conscious to prevent discrimination being perpetuated and to undo the effects of past discrimination the criterion is the relevancy of color to a legitimate governmental wisdom recognized the necessity of measuring the of colorblindness against the uses of race ostensibly proscribed where the goal was integration he concluded color conscious means were both constitutional and necessary isestablishing segregation among students distributing the better teachers equitably equalizing facilities selecting appropriate locations for schools and avoiding resegregation must necessarily be based on race the supreme court added its voice to the rejection of colorblindness in in county school board and again twice in the swann cases in green a unanimous court rejected as inadequate a voluntary integration plan emphatically insisting that brown did not simply prohibit discrimination school boards were clearly charged with the affirmative duty to take whatever steps might be necessary to convert to a unitary system in which racial discrimination would be eliminated root and in in swann charlotte mecklenburg board of education the reiterated its conclusion that the constitution required the actual dismantling of inequality through race conscious means if necessary and explicitly repudiated the school board s contention that the constitution permitted only color blind then in a related case the court again unanimously rejected north carolina s legislative effort to craft a color blind limit on the state use of race to remedy segregation he statute exploits an apparently neutral control school assignment plans by directing that they be color blind that requirement against the background of segregation would render illusory the promise of brown board of education just as the race of students must be considered in determining whether a constitutional violation has occurred so also must race be considered in formulating a remedy to forbid at this stage all assignments made on the basis of race would deprive school authorities of the one tool fulfillment of their constitutional obligation to eliminate existing dual school systems the unanimous court could not have more clearly rejected an anticlassification reading of the constitution by the end of the colorblindness had become a favored argument among those attempting to protect segregation simultaneously it had lost much of its attractiveness to those striving for racial progress partly the colorblindness argument pushed by marshall in sipuel and proved unnecessary to the defeat of jim crow laws meanwhile by the mid congress had taken up the challenge of racial stratification culminating in a series of civil rights acts addressing a range of social spheres from the housing market to the workplace to education more importantly racial activists increasingly perceived a need for race conscious means to respond effectively to racial inequality and also saw the reactionary potential of colorblindness by the mid proponents of racial justice had largely dropped objections to racial classification per se and instead focused on the core fact of racial hierarchy while those who sought to preserve the racial status quo increasingly proclaimed a new fealty to colorblindness to restate the most recent antecedent to contemporary colorblindness is not the anticlassification advocacy of thurgood marshall and the civil rights movement but reactionary strategizing by the dedicated defenders of white that burdened blacks and other minorities hardly seemed explicable as merely a matter of prejudice and reforming attitudes seemingly promised at best only a partial salve to subordination race conscious results oriented efforts to undo the legacy of centuries of racial hierarchy struck many as obvious necessities and in the mid to the nation s political leadership began to pass numerous laws intended to end racial domination ranging from antidiscrimination social welfare legislation in retrospect however the window for fundamental change opened just slightly before blowing shut again in the face of a quickly gathering backlash that backlash took multiple forms including angry opposition to affirmative action and busing and involved not just persons with commitments to old style supremacist politics but also those who counted themselves as staunch liberal supporters of civil rights among these neoconservatives liberal defenders of persons with commitments to old style supremacist politics but also those who counted themselves as staunch liberal supporters of civil rights among these neoconservatives liberal defenders of formal rights who nevertheless broke with the civil rights movement over race conscious remedies nathan glazer and patrick moynihan proved early leaders contemporary colorblindness has its origins in this era not so much in its brash use by the recalcitrant south but in the efforts by northern affirmative action to craft a conception of racial dynamics in the united states that simultaneously embraced the moral necessity of ending de jure discrimination and yet rejected race conscious remedies a structural racism charles hamilton took square aim at the notion that racism in the united states reduced solely to the action of individuals instead they insisted racism also formed part of the daily operation of established and respected forces in the providing a tragic example to drive their meaning home when white terrorists bomb a black church and kill five black children that is an act of individual racism widely deplored by most segments of the society but when in city birmingham alabama five hundred black babies die each year because of the lack of proper food shelter and medical facilities and thousands more are destroyed and maimed physically emotionally and intellectually because of conditions of poverty and discrimination in the black community that is a function of institutional racism one did not need to read black power however to hear echoes of the emerging structural view of race indeed in one could scarcely avoid that the country from los angeles in to chicago in to newark in the report famously warned that the united states was moving toward two societies one black one white separate and buttressing this claim the report detailed the punishing reality confronting african americans compiling over five hundred pages of evidence on the extreme material hardships of overt discrimination segregated and inferior schooling inadequate housing lack of access to systemic police violence and labor market more than
number of sections along the discretised lamella if the value of the dynamic moe calculated in a loop is within the limits of the desired grade the board is included in the simulated beam all the mechanical properties are stored in a two dimensional array for later use in the finite element programme additionally the simulation the beam bending strength and moe are calculated using the finite element programme ansys version figure shows the mechanical model instead of a load a stepwise displacement is applied in the middle of the loading equipment the load in the vertical compression members is stored after each step for later determination of the maximum load the in the compressive zone ideal elastoplasticity and in the tensile zone ideal elasticity until failure is assumed afailure in the outermost lamination generally stops the calculation failure occur if the tension stress in the center of an element lies in between a range the tensile strength of the board section element failure in the tensile zone outside deactivated during the calculation by multiplying their stiffness by a severe reduction factor bending tests on beech glulam beams test beams were produced and tested according to differing from table the boards coming from nordhessen and sch lonbuch were graded in up to grades see table the range of variation concerning grade the beams are divided into series differing in terms of beam height and grade of lamellae beam lay up strength classes and beam heights were realized see table figure and table give details of the beam lay up the total amount of boards was used to produce the beams this confirms the economical aspect of the proposed grading system in table are given in table the following conclusions can be drawn the grade of the lamellae obviously affects the bending strength and the moe of the tested beams the strength depends on the height the strength values belonging to the strength classes high and very high exceed the lower limit of the percentile strength value bending tests on finger joints manufactured from visually graded boards were performed see table a further tests were carried out to study the influence of mechanical grading on the bending strength of finger joints see table these specimens were manufactured in the laboratory from the undamaged parts of tested beams it was possible to assign the specimens with a span of times the height the flexural mode obtained by vibration methods is the reference parameter see fig and visual grading of boards the relation between bending strength and flexural moe is shown in fig the regression lines confirm the influence of stiffness on the bending strength the percentile is in case of visual grading fig the mean and percentile value of bending strength comparing the different grades it is remarkable that no increase of bending strength between grades and can be proved the percentile value of the specimens belonging to grades and both amount to in terms of technical feasibility mechanical grading of grades the calculation model taking into account the lay up and the distribution of the structural properties of the laminated boards simulations were conducted per series the percentile value of the tensile strength of finger joints was predicted using equation the values are and the moderate increase of tensile considering the small sample size of test specimens in grades and it is still plausible to assume higher values in grade figure compares the test results and the simulations the test results are situated mainly in the range mean value std deviation of the simulation the dependence of the strength on the height and the influence of board grade on the bending strength is glulam design proposals for beech glulam grading methods the design proposals were determined numerically for that grading methods as shown in table were developed having different influence on the tensile strength of the boards the data of the boards were used to determine the appropriate density functions of the structural properties these density functions strength was calculated for each of the models to study the influence of the boards tensile strength on the glulam bending strength thereby the characteristic tensile strength of the finger joints varied from to in steps of in this way calculations were performed per step within a single grading method the simulated beams have non parametric method laminating effect laminating effect in terms of simulated strength values of long sections the curves in fig point out the relation between the characteristic glulam bending strength and the variable characteristic tensile strength of finger joints the maximum characteristic bending strength for each of the grades is bending strength and the finger joint tensile strength see equation the gradient of this line is independent of the grading method or the tensile strength of boards respectively and applies until the trend becomes non linear the unit of strength values in the equations is strength of the boards was determined using the calculation model this is as expected and caused by the more homogeneous material properties in higher grades hence the laminating effect disappears as reported by falk and colling for the case of softwood the simulation results as described in section were be noted that the strength values of the independent variables refer to sections the coefficient of correlation amounts to laminating effect in terms of strength values derived from standard test methods equation will be transformed with the intention to replace the independent variables with strength values derived from tests according to first a relation al performed multiple tensile tests on long finger joints and bending tests on finger joints according to they proposed the relation in equation here fm is the characteristic bending strength of finger joints colling et al proposed a quite similar factor of for softwood transforming the characteristic tensile strength of sections and the characteristic that the test method affects more the measured strength values in case of lower lamination quality than in case of higher quality a linear relation was derived as equation the intercept
invariably very small whereas the total number of individuals known is several orders of magnitude larger other intermediate grouping sizes have also been identified in a recent analysis zhou et al were able to show that these various grouping levels form a hierarchically clustered sequence with a consistent scaling ratio of in effect an individual sits in the center of a personal social network that has the form of a series of concentric circles of acquaintanceship containing roughly with their circles reflecting successively declining emotional closeness and frequency of contact this consistency raises the question of what limits network size at any given level despite the consistency of this patterning in network sizes there is considerable individual variation in network size at any given level for example at the larger scale in an individual s social the mean size consistently averages about but individual values can range between and similarly on the smaller scale of regular contacts the average is typically but the range varies between and while there are certainly ecological limits on the both human and primate social groupings our concern here is rather with individual differences in network size the latter are more likely to be due to intrinsic factors among these life events such as divorce illness or old age and gender have been explored in some detail considerably less attention has been given to psychological factors such traits or cognitive capacities individual differences in core cognitive abilities seem a likely candidate in this respect given the evidence in support of the social brain hypothesis which identifies differences in neocortex size as the principal explanation for species differences in social group size among the primates social group size is limited by the organism s ability to manage its social relations at the cognitive level an obvious explanation for the variance in social network size among individuals lies in differences in social cognition theory of mind is the ability to attribute states of mind to others and it is widely thought to be crucial to the human capacity our complex social world although its ontogeny has been extensively studied over the past two decades relatively little is known about its subsequent development after early childhood to date only one study has attempted to explore the limits of mentalising in normal adults moreover while the social costs of the absence of mind reading skills are well understood from clinical studies we know almost nothing about how individual the social cognitive abilities of normal adults affect their capacity to negotiate their way through the undoubted complexities of the adult social world an alternative explanation for these individual differences in social network size would be some aspect of memory capacity while it is unlikely that sheer memory for faces is likely to be a constraint it could well be that the ability to integrate and maintain an updated mental database of the social relationships among the members of a network may impose limits on the number of individuals that can be maintained as part of a coherent personal social network this could reflect some very basic property of memory or it might involve more complex aspects of memory that and updating a mental database describing the dyadic and polyadic relationships between the members of the network in this paper we aim to do two things first we explore the range of individual variation in social network size at the two smaller scales and second we ask whether this variation in network size is related to individuals ability to manage their socialworld for these purposes we consider a simple index of an individual s socialworld namely the size of the more intimate layers of their social network we target these because there is evidence from comparative studies across primates to suggest that the size of these innermost layers may impose limits on the size of social groups that can be maintained and they may themselves be limited by relative neocortex size we then test between two that might explain individual differences in social network size namely the capacity to remember facts about the world and the ability to take social perspective mentalising capacity is commonly viewed in terms of intentional states intentionality so defined forms a naturally reflexive hierarchy that corresponds to increasingly embedded mind reading kinderman et al showed that not only is there a natural upper limit to the number of levels of intentionality that normal adults can handle but also that there is considerable inter individual variation in the highest achievable levels of intentionality and that individual differences in this respect correlate with an index of causal attribution it thus provides us with a natural metric for at least some relevant aspects of social cognition methods participants declining social engagement in old age participants were restricted to the age range years participants were first asked to complete a questionnaire about their recent social relationships and were then tested on a series of intentionality tasks participants were debriefed after the experimental session in all participants were tested four were subsequently removed as they had filled in one or both of the questionnaires incorrectly the final data set consisted of male and female materials and method cognitive competences the design was similar to that used by kinderman et al except that subjects were tested on their own rather than in groups a series of seven short stories depicting a social situation was read out to the subject five of the stories were the same as or based on those used in the kinderman the remaining two stories contained extra levels of intentionality and were included to ensure that all participants reached the upper limit on their performance after each story had been read out the participants answered questions about the story for each story a separate booklet was prepared containing a randomly assorted series of questions that differed in level of intentionality interspersed with an equal number of factual recall questions each question contained two statements one true and the other
ad hoc batch jobs enable textbooks to preserve irrelevance as the idealized world foundation for payout policy analysis which they generally follow with an equally ad hoc laundry list of factors such as signalling or clientele effects which are at best second order explanations for real world payout policies is it any wonder that textbooks typically relegate their dividend analyses to later chapters or that students get the strong impression that payout policy is an economically trivial issue in fact this pedagogical approach sends students into the world believing that in an idealized setting all managers need to do is to select investments with maximal largely ignore payout policy this approach does a major disservice to our students many of whom take just one corporate finance class and simply do not have the training in economic models to question mm irrelevance proof although many do intuit that payouts are important to investors in the real world if our students thoroughly absorb the lessons we teach then who knows how many corporate managers and directors have over the last years treated payout policy as important and who knows the damage done to stockholders by this flawed understanding at the end of the day our students will be best served if we stop hammering the fundamentally misleading and ultimately incorrect irrelevance point as the central ake away about payout policy in frictionless markets instead we should make sure that they leave their basic principles class with a clear understanding that in an idealized world managers need to do two things to make their stockholders as well stockholders as well off as possible select an investment programme with maximum attainable npv and distribute to investors the full pv of the f generated by investment policy over the life of the enterprise government and its influence on states are investing sizable sums on government as a means of enhancing managerial effectiveness and improving outreach to the citizenry this article examines the perceptions of city managers in regard to government impact on managerial effectiveness in cities in two states namely florida and texas further it explores the factors that promote the use of government as an adjunct to municipal administration for if government does not have significant impact on management city managers may wish to curtail its future development government for the purposes of this study is the delivery of government information and services through the internet hours a day seven days per week other scholars have argued that this is a rather narrow definition of government since it does not discuss the transformative nature of this technology on governance in addition the definition used in this on the use of internet technologies and does not consider non internet technologies government could represent the use of information and communication technologies for external purposes as examined in this study however the use of icts from a back office point of view for employees could also be examined the former approach studies the use of the internet for the dissemination of information and for interacting with citizens and businesses while the latter seeks to study internal organizational arrangements that are not or are partially visible to the public back office initiatives using icts could create noticeable changes in managerial effectiveness but are not the focus of this article the definition of government used in this study was chosen in order to examine the impact of internet technologies on city management the businesses this definition is also found in other surveys using the international city county management association datasets on government in local governments in the united states the influence of government on management effectiveness has been identified in previous studies as an important factor that leads to successful brown and brudney ho and smith and garson the literature demonstrates that government may promote more effective management and should lead to increased government adoption using government as a tool for management fits well into the existing literature on it and management and can be represented in this study by the following research question what are the main factors that predict whether government will have an impact on managerial effectiveness for city managers this study focuses on cities in texas and florida because they are large states with census bureau population estimates in of million for texas and million for florida in addition both states have a diverse population with or latino for texas and florida in addition the digital cities survey conducted by the center for digital government indicates that corpus christi texas and tampa florida were in the top ten for digital government lastly texas and florida are gegastates perceived to be bellwethers of citizen preferences and government policies elsewhere in the united states given their demographics economics and politics thus texas and florida are appropriate locales for research on government and its municipal application existing survey work on government in local governments to determine where this study fits into the literature this study provides a conceptual model of factors that are likely to explain government and managerial effectiveness this is followed by a translation of the conceptual model into six testable hypotheses the survey data collection methods and descriptive characteristics of city managers surveyed and their perceptions on government effectiveness this is followed by a presentation of the findings of the models that are predicted to explain government and managerial effectiveness the discussion and conclusion of this article show how the results are consistent or inconsistent with the hypotheses this study focuses on possible government factors that would influence perceptions of city managers of using this as a tool to become more effective in local governments examines the icma datasets there is also other survey research that examines local governments in iowa and larger sized cities in the united states in addition there are surveys done by the center for digital government that ranks city government websites this study is different from these in that it focuses managers views on government by contrast the examination of
indicate that the normalized radial displacement at the tunnel face is which compares well with suggested by panet and guenot nevertheless the differences with the other equations are indeed small arguably within numerical errors figure replots the data shown in fig but only for points ahead of the tunnel face the normalized numerical results indicate that the data can be adequately represented as a geometric function of the normalized axial distance equation is a bestfit of the fem data obtained from regression analysis of the numerical results ahead of tunnel face the correlation coefficient is the equation indicates that at the tunnel face the normalized radial displacement is and far from the tunnel face the radial displacements are very small the normalized radial displacements decrease very quickly with distance from the face at one radius distance the displacements are about the maximum radial displacements or about one third of the radial displacements at the face radii the displacements are only the maximum thus radial displacements along an unsupported deep circular tunnel can be adequately represented as a sigmoidal curve the rate of displacement change is very large close to the tunnel face the maximum radial displacement ur max occurs at approximately tunnel radii behind the tunnel face the displacements are negligible at approximately tunnel radii ahead of the face numerical model in saturated ground the cases consider a wide range of tunnel geometries tunnel depth ground water table and ground properties as with the dry case the young s modulus of the ground and poisson s ratio are kept constant note that the saturated unit weight is included in the table cases have the same tunnel radius and are used to explore the effects of ground effective stress and pore pressures cases have the same unit weight and different radius and thus are used to investigate the effect of the size of the tunnel in this series the ground below the water table is saturated and there is seepage flow towards the tunnel the results of the simulations correspond to steady state conditions figure is used to illustrate the similarities and differences in a tunnel in dry ground and in saturated ground with steady state drainage case is same geometry ground properties and total unit weight the figure indicates that the normalized radial displacements behind the tunnel face are similar substantial differences occur at the face and ahead of the tunnel face it is important to note that even though normalized displacements behind the face are similar the actual magnitudes of the displacements may be very different since the value of ur max changes with dry or saturated ground as indicated the tunnel face the tunnel below the water table has much larger radial displacements than the tunnel in dry ground this is caused by the seepage forces in the ground towards the tunnel and by the large volume of ground affected by changes in pore pressures in deep tunnels in dry ground the normalized radial displacements at the tunnel face are between the maximum radial displacements provides the best fit of the numerical results the correlation up to equation indicates that with no pore pressures the uw ratio is zero and the result for dry conditions is recovered as the pore pressures increase over the effective stresses the normalized radial displacements slowly increase asymptotically reaching a value of about of the tunnel radius pore pressure effects on ground displacements are more dramatic ahead of the displacements for each case the figure indicates that the area of influence of the excavation ahead of the tunnel face increases with the pore pressure effective stress ratio for dry ground the area of influence extends to about tunnel radii while for saturated ground with drainage towards the tunnel the area of influence depending on the magnitude of the pore pressure effective stress ratio can be times the the normalized displacements do not change much from dry to saturated ground we propose to modify past formulations given by eqs and to include the change of normalized radial displacements at the tunnel face with pore pressures thus for and figure shows a comparison between normalized results obtained from numerical analysis and from eqs and only two cases have been investigated case and case both cases have the same geometry and depth but the pore pressure effective vertical stress ratio is much larger in case than in case because of the larger ratio the zone of influence ahead of the tunnel face is much larger in case than in case behind the tunnel face as already the differences between the two cases are small the predictions from the proposed equations compare reasonably well with the numerical results behind the tunnel face the results from eqs and are indistinguishable ahead of the tunnel face predictions from eq also compare well with numerical results the agreement is good with a correlation coefficient circular tunnels have been investigated in an elastic and homogeneous ground with isotropic far field stresses a number of axi symmetric tunnels with and without ground water have been modeled with the finite element program pentagon the cases investigated cover a range of tunnel radii effective vertical stresses and pore pressures including dry ground conditions the ground young s modulus has not been changed since the solution is inversely proportional to the ground stiffness and stiffness and normalized radial displacements are independent of the young s modulus poisson s ratio effects have not been investigated in the present work their effects are deemed small compared to other factors the results of the analysis for dry ground conditions confirm previous formulations which provide normalized radial displacements at locations behind the tunnel face determined by their axial distance from the face divided by the tunnel radius a the normalized displacements ahead of the tunnel face also as a function of the normalized axial distance the results indicate that the normalized radial displacements can be approximated by a sigmoidal curve at the tunnel face the normalized radial displacements are about then the
most relevant for interactions between asian states and the rest of the world the findings show that analysts can rely neither on beliefs that asia is sui generis nor on purely realist models as guides to asian security issues kantian and realist theories are both relevant the results also indicate that some common assumptions of analysts especially regarding the importance of alliances and institutions are not in accord with the regularities of conflict and peace in introduction do the liberal peace propositions apply to asia a large number of quantitative studies show that three kantian variables democracy international organizations and law and international economic interdependence are strongly and causally associated with peaceful interstate relations the effects of these variables with roots international system but other recent quantitative research on the sources of international conflict and war clearly shows regional differences in both the level of militarized in variables relevant to the liberal peace propositions and found important regional differences such research builds on a number of other works exploring the possibility of significant regional variations in the causes and patterns of conflict and other aspects of international relations the results have implications for general understandings of international conflict as a simple task and no definition has achieved a consensus in this study i use a broad definition both for practical and conceptual reasons practically the more states included in my sample the more reliable my statistical results analyzing rare events are likely to be using a broad definition specific but unmeasured factors that affect a relatively small number of states but nevertheless have a significant impact in a small geographically limited sample in such a sample generally valid effects might be overshadowed by anomalous influences or omitted variable bias if supposedly universal theories like the liberal peace propositions the more conceptual reason for including a broad area under the heading of asia is that security issues across the wide geographical space stretching approximately from india to japan and north korea to australia do seem to be linked i follow the logic of a number of analysts on this count acharya moving beyond the question of defining asia debates over asian security issues can be roughly categorized as focusing on whether power dynamics prevail meaning that conflict institutions substantially mitigate conflict among asian states the first of these schools of thought clearly is connected to realist theories of international relations while the latter has liberal roots few analysts focus on the role of democracy in the region of some analysts is that the international politics of asia are different from those in other parts of the world especially the west culture and history combine in a path dependent process of course not all analysts of asian security cited here use group of states to include i have also run the analyses excluding all states of oceania the results are very similar for asian dyads in both the and periods and none of the conclusions change all sovereign states as categorized by the correlates of war project in these geographic areas are included these are all states with country codes from to or to create sui generis and empirically meaningful patterns of behavior and conflict this contradicts the assumption of international relations generalists who commonly use pooled data for all states to test general hypotheses if the effects of important influences on peace and conflict can be shown to differ significantly in asia this will support normative arguments is that asian states relations with other asian states will somehow qualitatively differ from relations between asian and non asian states such expectations follow from arguments based on shared asian values which inform foreign policy and create expectations about the proper norms of behavior within asian dyads several authors and placing a high value on both peaceful conflict resolution and strict respect for noninterference in internal affairs as an example of such a set of norms among those specialists taking a realist perspective friedberg argues that huxley similarly dismisses the importance of regional institutions and economic interdependence and argues that relative military power is much more important to asian security tow gray argue that power balancing in asia is the key to stability with regional security regimes not yet likely to be effective characteristics although they may differ on specific issues or the relative importance of one relationship or another authors in this school agree on the importance of factors of military power and the relative unimportance of institutions economic links or regime type these studies is the idea that international organizations in asia are indeed effective constraints on conflict even though they often lack the strong institutionalization of western style organizations such as the european union or nato thus kivimaki locates the cause of a long peace in southeast asia in the norms and organization s reliance on consensual and informal decision making according to chiang s study of the asia pacific economic cooperation forum the apec way owes its effectiveness to the noninstitutionalized cooperation regime embodied in the organization for example berger argues that asian states intra regional interdependence has pushed up considerably the costs of military conflict making such conflict less likely chan argues for a pacifying effect of greater levels of democracy in asia along the lines of the general democratic peace literature even if democratization continuing relevance in asia liberal peace theorists also expect that power related factors will retain importance for conflict acharya comes closest to questioning this assumption by asserting that relations between asean states increasingly resemble those of a security community interdependence have much significance and even among liberal and constructivist asia analysts few expect that regime type will have much of an effect but proponents of the liberal peace propositions as general effects in international relations have allowed for no such regional exceptions relevance of liberal theory to the region data and methods the unit of analysis for this study is the dyad year using all dyads in the international system the asian subsystem or
have been closing down throughout switzerland at the same time tourism has begun to play a much lesser role in the economy this decline is to some extent forecast by the so called product or industry life cycle model this model however tells us little about where geographically the decline would take place it is the aim of this paper to propose a link between the life cycle model and geographical concentration of models have been developed in the past to try to explain the evolution of a competitive industry these studies typically claim the existence of a so called product or industry life cycle and have in common a number of stylized facts to describe the evolution of an industry over its life cycle the idea of the product life cycle may be traced all the way back to kuznets who studied the time series of output and a number of products most famous though is vernon s seminal paper in some ways product life cycle theory has evolved towards a theory of endogenous evolution embedded in the industry life cycle an important paper by michael gort and stephen klepper generated a number of stylized facts for the industry life cycle later work has added a number of additional ideas but in the present analysis we will limit ourselves to examining the original these facts are very well summarized in jovanovic but before recalling these let us briefly examine the various stages in the life cycle of an industry the evolution of a product in a competitive industry is said to go through a number of stages from invention and early development to decline and eventual death the stages may be examined both in terms of sales and output and in terms of the number of firms operating within the industry or product another measure of interest notably for the economic geographer could be the number of workers in that industry over the past years or so scholars describing the industry life cycle have been keenest on examining the number of firms and the net entry if we examine the number of producers in any given industry we may break the evolution of that industry down into five distinct stages this is illustrated in figure in stage i following the invention of the product a small number of producers exist within the industry stage ii illustrates the time when the industry finds itself in a high growth phase during this phase abnormal profits will tend to attract new firms into the industry and output will also exhibit high growth stage iii is a period where the number of firms stabilizes before falling off again in stage iv stage is one where net entry stabilizes until some fundamental disturbance hits the industry it need not be assumed that any given product must pass through each of the five stages during its lifetime indeed empirical studies have shown that the duration of each of the stages is variable the duration should logically depend on the specific competitive environment of the given market and the nature of the product or industry in question within the tourism geography literature the product life cycle has evolved into a theory of the tourist area life cycle the concept is essentially the same as the product or industry life cycle except that the object of study is no longer a single product or industry but rather an area or destination we are not concerned in this paper with a single destination but a whole industry limited only by the national borders of switzerland in this sense our analysis covers all tourist areas within the country summarizes some of the stylized facts of the industry life cycle as being sales and output grow at a rate declining with the product s age and converging to zero product price declines steadily but at a slowing rate with the product s age after product birth a rapid entry of new firms precedes a mass exit followed by a stabilization innovation in general does not seem to decline with the age of the product but the innovations is greater than that of later ones in the product s life any given firm s exit risk declines with its own age any given firm s exit risk rises with the age of the industry the evolution of a competitive industry therefore seems to follow some clear path variations sometimes important may exist but every industry is said more or less to go through these clear stages the life of the industry or product of the product and its introduction into the market this last distinction is important the product life cycle can commence only once the new product is marketed an initial supplier is willing and able to supply the product to one or more customers if the product meets some demand on the market an industry is born in as much as the industry takes off the initial firm producing the product will benefit from abnormal profits due to its situation as a monopoly if there or no barriers to entry the abnormal profits of the producing firm will attract other firms to enter the market these entrants in turn will contribute to develop the market for the product and will attempt to differentiate themselves through innovation this innovation activity will lead to the creation of new profits which again will attract more entrants the price of the good will rapidly decrease reflecting the movement from monopoly to oligopoly to monopolistic competition to perfect competition the industry growth of sales and output will therefore initially be very high and rising however the rate of growth will quickly slow down as the rate of entry becomes greater than the growth rate of profits eventually the nature of innovations and of competition in the industry will change in such a way that the growth rate of sales and output stabilize and will converge to zero or even negative growth at this point
focusing on the kherlen river basin which occupies approximately one third of eastern project concrete objectives were twofold to clarify the characteristics of isotopic variation in precipitation over eastern mongolia and to understand the mechanisms of the variation in terms of the continentalscale atmospheric water cycle the following subsections summarize previous studies on the atmospheric water cycle the isotopic monitoring and meteorological data set utilized for the analysis fundamental characteristics of isotopes in precipitation over eastern mongolia presents the fundamental features of the observed results and in application of a rayleigh type model involving temperature and amount effects a model to investigate isotopic variability and atmospheric hydrology in detail is proposed and tested finally ons previous studies on atmospheric moisture transport and recycling in northeastern eurasia trenberth has presented seasonal mean fields of vertically integrated water vapor flux over the globe according to these zonal moisture transport is dominant throughout the year with strong westward components in the tropics and eastward components in the mid latitudes whereas a in june july and august by the asian summer monsoon simmonds et al has decomposed the total summer moisture flux into mean and transient eddy components and it was found that northward transport due to transient eddies is remarkable over northeastern eurasia in other words atmospheric moisture transported by the mean flow from the northern indian eastern mongolia is clearly in the range of the transient moisture flux from the south although the magnitude of the flux is less than that of the mean westerly flux across the eurasian continent numaguti has assessed the origin of precipitating water over the eurasian continent using an atmospheric the northwestern pacific the northern atlantic and the northern indian ocean while they experience a recycling process two or more times on average during jja it is noteworthy that the annual mean ratio of precipitating water supplied similar results for the continental recycling ratio have been obtained from another agcm and a simpler tagged water transport model driven by external meteorological forcing assuming a vertically well mixed atmosphere however bosilovich has shown that the vertical distributions of local and remote and total precipitable water can also be different these findings indicate not only the limitation of the well mixed assumption but also the strong dependence of estimates against parameterization schemes in gcms such as cumulus convection consequently atmospheric moisture transport over northeastern eurasia seems to be very complicated because the ocean such as the semi arid grasslands of central asia the boreal forest of siberia and the rice paddy fields of southeast china previous studies on isotopes in precipitation over northeastern eurasia stable hydrogen and oxygen isotopes in precipitation have been used for tracing the atmospheric water cycle the major advantage of this approach is the capability of bringing uncertainties to characterize the isotopic variability in precipitation global network for isotopes in precipitation has been established by the international atomic energy agency in corporation with the world meteorological organization the gnip database comprises monthly data from in mongolia however there is no station having at least one full year record as a basis for the present study we will summarize several isotopic studies in adjacent regions yamanaka et al have classified the annual pattern variations in the isotopic composition of precipitation at gnip stations in china into three types summer depression the southern parts indicating strong influences due to the asian summer monsoons in contrast the winter depression type which occurs in the northern part is dominated by the temperature effect suggesting a weak contribution of monsoonal rains kurita et al have investigated the spatial and temporal variation in isotopic composition of precipitation based on a monthly data set collected at transport from the atlantic ocean in winter and the recycled water from the continent in summer daily isotope data are linked more directly with atmospheric moisture dynamics than the monthly data set kurita et al have clarified that in eastern siberia short term isotopic variability can be explained by the rayleigh distillation process and the westerly component of the atmospheric moisture flux they drew an inference that the summer precipitation is a composite of isotopically heavier waters from the west and lighter waters from other sources for instance evapotranspiration flux from thaw water yoshimura et al have developed a global one layer isotope circulation model including short term isotopic variability in precipitation in southeast asia demonstrating that the isotopic compositions of precipitation reflect the transport and mixing processes of air masses on the other hand using deuterium excess which is a parameter deduced from both hydrogen and oxygen isotopic compositions yamanaka et al have north china plain suggesting that water vapors originating from their adjacent ocean areas are the main ingredients of precipitation stable hydrogen and oxygen isotopes are not only promising tracers for investigating atmospheric hydrology but also good proxies for reconstructing climatic change for example schotterer et al have attempted to reconstruct past hydrometeorological conditions over several morley et al investigated late glacial and holocene environmental change using oxygen isotopes of biogenic diatom silica which are sensitive to isotopic input in sediment cores from lake baikal in the north of mongolia thus an understanding of the factors determining the isotopic composition of precipitation over in northeastern eurasia of which strong a continental setting is very rare in the world materials and methods isotopic monitoring precipitation samples were collected at seven sites covering the kherlen river basin monthly samples were collected throughout the year from october to september and daily samples were collected for the warm period a funnel with a ping pong ball to prevent evaporation snow samples were collected using a vat installed on the ground and then melted in an airtight container at room temperature rain and melted snow samples were transferred into ml polyethylene bottles for monthly samples and ml glass bottles for daily samples all the samples were analyzed for dd and using a mass spectrometer at the university of tsukuba hydrogen gas equilibration using a platinum catalyst for six
a lot of productive potential in bringing those two bodies of work into proximity and contact to do this regulation a paradox perhaps especially evident in the uk in current debates about the night time economy and alcohol licensing by thinking about these kinds of issues along with philosophical discussions of the meanings uses and limits of hospitable relations informed by the writings of jacques derrida have provided a much needed rethink of how to understand hospitality as a way of relating as an ethics and as a politics these discussions have centered mainly on the relationship between the idea of hospitality and the reception and treatment of immigrants refugees and asylum seekers and the various ways in which hospitality is conditioned or rendered conditional the limits and restrictions that frame the possibility of hospitality being given and received within this work there have often take a different tack by considering a form of hospitality relationship usually seen as conditional to the point of instrumentality as narrowly and straightforwardly economic and therefore as hopelessly restricted the sphere of commercial hospitality the domain of the hospitality industry i want to argue that what we might call a centered on the experience of consumption spaces and used as a place promotion device this idea of the hospitable city has become important to the promotion of regenerating postindustrial cities selling themselves as spaces of leisure and pleasure as well as welcoming the immigrant or the refugee food and drink the entertainment economy in its various forms may be dismissed as merely economic exchanges even if window dressed as culture but i want to argue that a particular mode of hospitality is at work here a mode moreover that has been progressively woven into regeneration scripts and schemes as cities attempt to draw in money and people so called culture led regeneration has tried footloose capital here too the discourses of cosmopolitanism and multiculturalism are positively valued and branded along with commercial hospitality spaces thinking the ways in which hospitality is mobilized in regeneration schemes through the lens of philosophies of hospitality can oach places to eat and drink have in fact come to occupy a central role in the production of new forms of city living associated with the revitalization of previously deindustrialized and rundown urban districts as well as with forms of so called cultural tourism including gastro tourism and what we might call party tourism or alco tourism of white collar work but also in terms of access to consumption cultural and leisure amenities thereby revitalizing neighborhoods previously affected by the move towards suburban and ex urban relocation of housing shopping and working city center eating and drinking have thus become important components but before the paper moves to discuss commercial hospitality spaces i want briefly to sketch current theoretical and philosophical discussions of hospitality ii rethinking the spaces of hospitality a resurgence of interest in the philosophies of hospitality has found its way into geography reinvigorating theoretical and philosophical debate about ways of relating about hosts and guests his discussions are an important frame for this paper not least because of their influence across a range of disciplines concerned with the ethics and politics of the host guest relationship at the heart of derrida s thinking is or reparation an openness to giving to the absolute unknown anonymous other to be the perfect host is to offer hospitality unconditionally unreservedly unendingly thus the theorizing of hospitality here is closely related to derrida s work on the philosophy of the gift with its freight of obligations is locked in a non dialectizable antinomy with the conditional form which he calls hospitality by rights or hospitality in the ordinary sense commenting on this lineage of philosophical thought friese agrees that the concept of hospitality is situated within a constellation marked by distinct ambivalences exclusion the obligation of reciprocity in particular marks the compromises and conditions at the heart of hospitality except in its idealized unconditional absolute form moreover for both host and guest there are subtle rules of etiquette how much to offer how much to accept how long to stay engagement hosts and guest are moreover mutually constitutive of each other and thus relational and shifting the whole business is fraught with ambiguity and uncertainty and the weight of all that uncertainty means for friese that the diverse practices of hospitality have to be understood as processes which this ordering means making choices about whom to host whom to permit to be a guest conditional hospitality involves the choosing electing filtering selecting of invitees visitors or guests as well as attempting to agree the contract or the terms and conditions through which hospitality will be given and received unconditional hospitality friese notes that obligations must be noticed and noted for hospitality to come into being and subsist the asymmetry of absolute hospitality unbalances rights and obligations upsetting the social codes that make hospitality possible at all because of the uneven distribution of power on the two sides the giver the host holds nevertheless a number of writers have focused on derrida s rethinking of hospitality as a potent political imperative and as a useful critical tool to think with tregoning for example sees hospitality as offering ways of being with others which are inaccessible through community and therefore as politically the context of this paper in that tregoning puts the philosophy of hospitality to productive work in terms of postcolonial theory to show how it can open up thinking about ways of relating in this aim and in others his work directly mirrors my intentions here by using hospitality as a conceptual tool he unlocks an area that had largely cast aside in theorizations of hospitality seen as narrowly instrumental and calculative tregoning also traces the hostility latent within hospitality in terms of the tacit limitations placed on the guest by the host and the slippage between host and hostage in terms of host s capacity to offer hospitality embodied in
as a way of being its sum but as a way of making or generating it as michael friedman has shown the operations we use to capture such relations are expressively stronger than anything that can be represented within the traditional idea that we need to represent two different kinds of relations to the sum concept and are inputs to the operation and the magnitude is its output for kant the explicit representation of such generating comes via intuition eg through the process of mathematical construction the first two points together rest on a third the strong reciprocity be as i noted the genus species character of the way of being relation tracks this feature and within the resulting framework there is a unique way of building up each concept out of its component marks in the case of the way of making relation however conceptual content and extension come apart because there can be wholly different ways of generating the same thing using different com and deploy different inputs making up their content they nonetheless overlap in extension since both apply to the same magnitude the broad way of being way of making distinction indicates that kant s underlying point has application well beyond his specific attack on wolff a wide variety of ordinary and scientific concepts fall into the way of making class and the resulting asymmetry between content and extension which analytic representation can run in both directions across the way of making relation to stick with simple minded examples i can make the same cake in two different ways eg by substituting baking soda and cream of tartar for the baking powder in the original recipe conversely by varying my method of preparation i can make two quite different sauces a marchand de vin sauce from the same input the ubiquity of such way of making relations in our representational toolbox indicates that we can hope to capture the structure of experience only via a theory that includes essentially synthetic truths in particular kant is keen to emphasize the important role played in any account of nature by causal judgments capturing the way of making or producing a given effect and to hold them claims since we clearly cannot do without such judgments the rationalist dream of an expressively adequate but strictly analytic system of metaphysics is doomed the expressive limitations of the analytic concept hierarchy which kant identified in his philosophy of mathematics are connected to a widely recognized and obvious limitation in the apparatus of the traditional logic viz the lack of any explicit device for the representation of logic focused on categorical judgment which attributes a one place predicate to a subject no special forms were introduced to capture relations among distinct objects of the sort that become salient when we want to con sider the relations of inputs and outputs instead relational structures woe simply compressed into complex one place predicates for instance every saint is a friend of god would be analyzed as the attribution to saints of the concept god rather than as the expression of a relation between saints and given a standard metaphysics of substances and attributes this logical apparatus expresses exactly what is definitively real viz the possession of intrinsic attributes by substances indeed in the tradition founded by leibniz and wolff relations were often treated as merely an imperfect way of looking at a basic underlying reality of independent substances a reality fully expressible in categorical propositions the distinctively wolffian commitment to the ideal of an expressively adequate analytic hierarchy makes this last metaphysical position unavoidable and exposes the significance of the lack of dedicated tools for represent ing relations the hierarchy s only device for representing a relation between individuals would be a concept contained in both relata which given the could only be a common genus or intrinsic property many relations cannot be handled in this fashion because the rules of division inter fere with the standard traditional strategy for compressing relations into one place predicates consider a proposition like antoine arnauld the great theologian was the son of antoine arnauld the lawyer on the standard approach the judgment attributes the predicate note that predicate s important logical features depend on its composition out of the relational concept and the individual concept only that composition would have any hope of explaining why it should follow from our model proposition that also contains concepts like etc such composition however cannot be represented in the analytic hierarchy for reasons parallel those we saw above just as and contribute to the content of as inputs not generic marks so the individual concept is an input toward not a generic mark of the complex concept as we saw the one dimensional analytic hierarchy can only represent generic mark relations it cannot simultaneously express the composition of complex concepts like in the con text of the special restrictions proper to an analytic hierarchy then the monadic character of the traditional logic leads to expressive limitations that are quite severe indeed extending even to expressive failures involving the very simplest relational concepts like and the like is only a fragment even of the traditional logic because the requirements imposed by the rules of di vision prevent the formation of certain inferences treated in syllogistic logic beyond the first figure and in modes other than barbara nevertheless this fragment of the traditional logic is of central theoretical interest due to the important role of the concept hierarchy the eighteenth century rationalist understanding of a proper metaphysical system the expressive limitations identified in kant s philosophy of mathematics are devastating for the wolffian program after all wolff presented elementary mathematics as the paradigm case of strictly logical conceptual knowledge with which the rest of science was supposed to be brought into line as the true metaphysics was achieved kant shows that the wolffian program fails it claims expressive power for the pure intellectual faculties
second language learners process filler gap dependencies in real time however while their lexical subcategorizers when processing wh dependencies in the the results from a reading time study by marinis et al suggest that even highly proficient learners of english process such dependencies differently from english native speakers marinis et al investigated the processing of long distance wh dependencies speakers and advanced adult learners of english from different language backgrounds for the native speakers filler integration at the embedded verb angered was found to be facilitated by the availability of an intermediate syntactic gap at the clause boundary in compared to sentences of the same length that did not contain an intermediate gap such as no such facilitation whether or not the subjacency constraint was operative in their native language this finding indicates that intermediate gaps do not form part of the mental representations constructed during processing note that the learners had no particular difficulty understanding sentences such as above however and that their reading profiles showed evidence of filler integration at the point at which they encountered the subcategorizing process long distance wh dependencies in accordance with the dah but not the trh the absence of any intermediate gap effects in marinis et al s data supports the hypothesis that the grammatical representations constructed during processing are shallower than those built during comprehension and lack abstract elements such as empty syntactic categories as regards the processing of that although learners may be able to keep a fronted constituent in short term memory and semantically associate it with an appropriate lexical head further downstream filler integration will not be mediated by any structurally defined gaps note that the results from marinis et al s reading time study have provided only indirect evidence for the presence of syntactic gaps non adjacent to the subcategorizing processing the present study aims to test the above prediction more directly by investigating antecedent reactivation effects at structural gap positions during the processing of indirect object dependencies in english using a cross modal priming task potential effects of individual working memory differences on processing will also be examined dislocated constituents are mentally reactivated at particular structural positions in this task participants are required to make a word based decision to visually presented targets while listening to stimulus words or sentences spoken at normal speed if dislocated constituents are reactivated at gap positions then participants responses to targets semantically related or identical to the antecedent the point of a gap relative to non gap positions this prediction is based on the well documented phenomenon of automatic priming the observation that the processing of visual targets is facilitated if they are presented immediately after the auditory presentation of an identical or semantically related word or prime nicol swinney and zurif love and swinney clahsen and featherston nakano et al and monolingual children nicol and swinney for example report the results from a cross modal priming experiment investigating how mature native speakers of english processed wh dependencies in sentences such as participants response times to target words semantically related to boy were shorter than response times to unrelated ones at the test position immediately following the subcategorizing verb accused but not at an earlier control position the antecedent priming effect observed at the point of the gap indicates that the antecedent was retrieved from short term memory or reactivated at its canonical dah and the trh however they do not provide any unequivocal evidence for trace based reactivation one possible way of dissociating lexically based and structurally based reactivation effects is to examine the processing of filler gap dependencies in head final languages cross modal priming studies on languages such as japanese or german have found evidence for structurally based antecedent reactivation even long distance object scrambling sentences in japanese nakano et al for example found antecedent priming effects at the preverbal object gap but not at an earlier control position and clahsen and featherston report similar results for object scrambling constructions in german antecedent reactivation effects have also been observed at the end of sentences suggesting that some memory representation of the antecedent is and is re accessed during end of sentence interpretation processes as the memory cost incurred by temporarily storing a dislocated constituent in wm is thought to increase with distance we may expect antecedent reactivation to be affected by individual wm differences there is some evidence from processing studies that this is indeed the case in nakano et al s study only participants with a the gap low span participants on the other hand seemed unable to retain the filler in working memory for long enough to be able to retrieve it at the gap site working memory effects were also observed in roberts et al s study with the english speaking adults and children using a cross modal picture priming task roberts et al investigated antecedent reactivation penguin gave the nice birthday present in the garden last weekend participants were asked to make an alive not alive decision to picture targets presented either at the gap site or at an earlier control position as the participants performance in this task was influenced by individual wm differences and low span participants according to their median scores in the wm a summary of the four participant groups results in the cross modal priming task is provided in table for both high span children and adults reaction times to identical targets were faster than those to unrelated targets at the gap position whereas there was no advantage at all for identical targets at the earlier control position this rt pattern is expected if the aliveness decision is facilitated by the presence of a wh gap at the later test point but not during the processing of other sentence regions low span participants on the other hand did not show any facilitation for identical targets at either of the two test points the low span children actually showed a lexical interference effect with rts to identical targets being longer than
is some correlation with increased anisotropy over normal subjects randen has developed a series of three dimensional texture of common texture techniques into such as laws masks and co occurrence matrices for example lang and ip and lam the importance of texture in mri has been the focus of some researchers notably lerksi and schad and a cost european group was established for this purpose texture analysis has been used with mixed success in mri such as for and in cns imaging to detect macroscopic lesions and microscopic abnormalities such as for quantifying contralateral differences in epilepsy subjects to aid the automatic delineation of cerebellar volumes to estimate effects of age and gender in brain asymmetry and to characterize spinal cord pathology in multiple sclerosis solid texture fig shows three examples of volumetric data with textured regions our volumetric study can be regarded as volume based that is we consider no change in the observation conditions throughout this paper we consider volumetric data represented as a function that assigns a gray tone to each triplet of levels iv feature extraction subband filtering using an orientation pyramid certain characteristics of signals in the spatial domain such as periodicity are quite distinctive in the frequency or fourier domain if the data contain textures that vary in orientation and frequency then certain filter subbands will contain more energy than others the principle of subband filtering can equally be operations that subdivide the frequency domain of an image into smaller regions by the use of two operators quadrant and center surround by combining these operators it is possible to construct different tessellations of the space one of which is the orientation pyramid a band limited filter based on truncated gaussians is used to approximate the finite prolate spheroidal sequences transform of a real signal is symmetric it is only necessary to use a half plane or a half volume to measure subband energies a description of the subband filtering with the op method follows any given volume whose centered fourier transform is can be subdivided into a set of nonoverlapping regions of dimensions filters for the high pass region and one for the low pass fig the th filter in the fourier domain is related to the th subdivision of the frequency domain as where describes a gaussian function with parameters the center of the region and is the co variance matrix that will provide a cutoff of at the limit of the band see that the results of the divisions are always integer values to illustrate the op on a textured image a example is presented in fig feature selection using the bhattacharyya space the subband filtering of the textured data produces a series of measurements that belong to a measurement space whether this space corresponds to the results of filters features of the that compose the original data besides the discrimination power that some measurements have there is an issue of complexity related to the number of measurements used each extra texture feature may enrich the measurement space but will also further burden any subsequent classifier another advantage of selecting a subset of the space is that it can provide a better understanding is the wrapper approach this approach uses the error rate of the classifier itself as the criterion to evaluate the features selected using a greedy selection either hill climbing or best first and treats the measurements as a search space organization a representation where each state is a measurement it is important to bear in mind two issues one is that hill climbing the classifier in the selection process instead of other evaluation functions is at the same time its weakness since the classification process can be slow the bhattacharyya space is presented as a method that provides a ranking for the measurements based on the discrimination of a set of training data this ranking process provides a single evaluation route and therefore the number of classifications a quantitative measure of class separability a distance measure is required with the assumption about the underlying distributions a probabilistic distance can be easily extracted from some parameters of the data kailath compared the bhattacharyya distance and the divergence and observed that bhattacharyya distance yields better results in some cases while in other cases they euclidean kullback leibler fisher for texture discrimination and concluded that the bhattacharyya distance is the most effective texture discriminant for subband filtering schemes in its simplest formulation the bhattacharyya distance between two classes can be calculated from the variance and mean of each class in the following way the mahalanobis distance is a particular case of the bhattacharyya distance when the variances of the two classes are equal this eliminates the first term of the distance that depends solely on the variances of the distribution if the variances are equal this term will be zero and grows as the variances differ the second term on the other hand will be zero if the means are equal and is inversely proportional to the variances as where each class pair between classes at measurement will have a bhattacharyya distance and will produce a bhattacharyya space of dimensions and the domains of the bhattacharyya space are and where is the order of the op in the volumetric case remains the same and thus will indicate how discriminant a certain subband op filter is over the whole combination of class pairs whereas the marginal sums the bhattacharyya distances for a particular pair of classes over the whole measurement space and reveals the discrimination potential of particular pairs of classes when multiple classes are present fig fig shows the bhattacharyya space for of order and fig marginal these graphs yield useful information toward the selection of the features for classification a certain periodicity is revealed in the measurement space have the lowest values the feature measurements and the low pass features provide the lowest discrimination power the most discriminant features for the training data presented are which correspond to the order statistic
of one specific intervention a hypothetical lawsuit by an actor against a studio s use of race and sex classifications in hiring breakdowns i then analyze several defenses that the studio would likely assert an affirmative statutory defense that the race and or sex breakdowns constitute a bona fide occupational qualification or bfoq exempted under the guidelines a first economic burden and a creative freedom first amendment defense part concludes although the first amendment requires treating casting decisions with a degree of deference that title vii would not ordinarily afford employers our constitutional commitment to free speech does not exact a wholesale abandonment of antidiscrimination requirements the courts can draw reasonable lines in regulating hiring in the entertainment industry to speech ideals simultaneously for example a court could determine that title vii prohibits industry decision makers from using race sex based breakdowns except where a ban would impose a substantial burden on the narrative alternatively a court might ban race and or sex classifications in all breakdowns but recognize that the first amendment protects the ultimate casting decision although i explore the costs and benefits of both of these a ban on discriminatory breakdowns with the exceptions where a ban would impose a substantial burden on the narrative reducing or eliminating race and sex classifications as complete bars to consideration for certain roles would expand the pool of actors given the opportunity to audition thereby broadening employment opportunity for excluded groups courts can respect both the equality and artistic freedom by creating procedural obstacles to think critically about whether and where in the process such discrimination is necessary while preserving substantial creative discretion in the ultimate casting decision some judges and some readers may resist treating race and sex based breakdowns as illegal discrimination we can expect judges and the public to be particularly skeptical about banning sex based breakdowns the industry s use of sex based breakdowns is more pervasive than race in likely to be integral to the storyline moreover title vii reflects social and legal uncertainty about the legitimacy of taking sex into account the special bfoq exception applies to sex discrimination but not race even when the bfoq has not been at issue courts enforcing title vii have vacillated from firmly rebuking all disparate treatment of women to authorizing certain gender conventions that the court viewed as harmless this judicial ambivalence reveals the vii s broad promise of equal employment opportunity and the reality of continuing differential treatment that has become naturalized and goes largely unchallenged indeed when it comes to casting an entire industry effectively disregards title vii this examination of casting discrimination therefore provides a reminder that society s tastes for certain race and gender based conventions such as the expectation that women but not men appear frontally nude in film vii s capacious language and confine its impact in this article i present one potential intervention that could help equalize opportunity in hollywood i do not mean to suggest that this kind of title vii individual disparate treatment lawsuit which would focus on banning discriminatory breakdowns is the only strategy for diversifying employment and the representations we see in film for instance one could imagine a proposal that the government subsidize underrepresented filmmakers or those of any race whose films will tell stories centered on women and people of color in addition one might explore ways of putting greater pressure on hollywood studios to hire more diverse executives in hopes that these decision makers would in turn increase employment opportunities for underrepresented groups further in addition to the disparate treatment lawsuit focused on breakdowns actors might obtain these strategies would of course entail various costs and benefits which i will not explore in depth here but a clear virtue of the proposal i put forward is that it builds on the most overt and vulnerable evidence of discrimination race and sex specific breakdowns moreover it works within the boundaries of current law namely title vii and the first amendment as such it requires neither congress to pass additional reach particular outcomes i the casting process a casting decision makers the collaborative nature and multiiayered interdependent structure of casting can obscure the source of discriminatory hiring decisions in the entertainment industry the decision makers in a typical studio developed and financed film include the following ranging from most infiuential to least studio executives producers director and casting the term casting director misleads because this position confers little ultimate decision making authority the casting director a position with secretarial origins assembles the pool of actors from which the roles will be cast and coordinates communications among the various decision makers by contrast the entity providing the film s financing typically a studio ultimately makes the decisions any person in this decision making chain might exclude an actor or an entire actors based on race or sex based considerations yet this discrimination would normally remain concealed from the excluded applicants and the public for instance a casting director might say that she submitted an asian american actor but a producer or executive vetoed her consequently to the extent that discrimination influenced the casting decision an outsider might find it very difficult to locate the origin of that discrimination except where the face of the breakdown the race and sex classifications in the breakdown usually stem from someone who does not formally make casting decisions the writer writers often specify the character s sex and race in the script particularly for the lead roles the terms of the standard industry contract give the writer no power over casting and enable the casting decision makers to depart from his description of a character still many casting decision character description absent a strong justification for rejecting it this presumption may be a root cause of the lack of diversity in casting the writers guild of america s report found that women made up just film writers people of color accounted for about the writers compared with the presentday general population hence
angry in eddings chief justice burger agonized in godfrey justice white thought the court had no business conducting calibrator of depravity demarcating for a watching world the various gradations of dementia that lead men and women to kill their in his anger however justice white did just what he said could not legitimately be done he conducted his own type review and found that godfrey got just what he deserved white recited the facts of the crime three times after the ma jority had done so once he described in detail what he acknowledged could only be described in unpleasant terms how godfrey in a cold blooded executioner s style murdered his wife and his motherin law and in passing struck his young daughter on the head with the barrel of his gun his use of a weapon a shotgun that is hardly known for the surgical precision with which it perforates its target and the precise damage the weapon caused to the body parts of both victims and in turn the floor fixtures and furniture of the cramped quarters where the ho among us justice white concluded can honestly say that mrs wilkerson did not feel torture in her last sentient moments her daughter an instant ago a living being sitting across the table from mrs wilkerson lay prone on the floor a bloodied and mutilated corpse the seconds ticked by enough time for her son in law to reload his gun to enter the home and to take a gratuitous swipe at his daughter what her daughter s hideous demise and then came to terms with the imminence of her chief justice burger s dissent in eddings was as mild as justice white s in godfrey was enraged but in its way it revealed as much discomfort burger noted that the majority s type opinion makes clear that some justices who join it would not have imposed the death penalty had they sat as the sentencing authority but admitted he was unsure he most painful of our duties to pass on capital cases and the more so in a case such as this however there comes a time in every case when a court must bite the bullet it must look beyond whether sentences imposed by state courts are sentences we consider appropriate and decide whether they are constitutional under the eighth chief justice burger s dissent in eddings is no less at war with itself a remand for resentencing was wasteful because it had little hope of achieving a different outcome and that the court should not in any event be concerned about the appropriate outcome chief justice burger was at pains not only to voice the majority s unstated belief that the appropriate outcome of a second proceeding should differ from that of the first but also to suggest that he agreed he made this suggestion in favorem vitae only on capital judgment by letting death sentences stand discomfort caused by substantive review may also be inferred from proposals to raise the procedural ante if capital sentencing procedures were so exacting that states would impose death only when it was clearly proportioned to net aggravation the court would no longer have to conduct substantive review concurring in eddings and prisoner sentenced to be executed is afforded process that will guarantee as much as is humanly possible that the sentence was not imposed out of in this view reversal was required whenever a state s procedures or those used in a particular case created an appreciable risk that death was imposed in spite of factors which might call for a less severe this rule made eddings and enmund law and considered eddings s background and enmund s limited participation the modest risk that they had not required similarly in an opinion on denial of certiorari in smith north carolina justice stevens proposed a beyond a reasonable doubt test to reduce the risk of executing the undeserving and assure reliability in the determination that death is the appropriate punishment in a specific to accept three propositions beyond a reasonable doubt that at least one aggravating circumstance was present that aggravation outweighed mitigation and that the aggravating circumstances after being discounted by whatever mitigating factors exist are sufficiently serious to warrant the extreme in other words a jury could impose death only if it was convinced beyond a reasonable doubt that net aggravated core of the state s death eligible offenses demanding procedures that left the sentencer and court without any doubt that death was proportionate to net aggravation might avoid uncomfortable substantive review duties but it risked demanding the impossible a perfect procedure for deciding in which cases governmental authority should be used to impose death a procedure with such high trial and retrial costs that few death sentences would result the court only increased the costs of this proceduralist tack when it held in justice stevens s type majority opinion in beck alabama that guilt phase procedures had to be more reliable in capital than in other and in three type decisions extended yet more guilt phase constitutional protections to the capital sentencing perfectionism of his own hoping he said to rub the court s nose in the responsibility its perfectionism bore for the dearth of coleman s conviction for methodically murdering six members of a family had been affirmed by a succession of state courts prompting coleman s certiorari justice marshall dissented from the denial of certiorari on coleman s claim that the jurors seated at for the exercise of our discretionary in keeping with the court s general refusal to grant certiorari following state post conviction proceedings and with the court s preference for leaving such matters to federal habeas for just that reason justice rehnquist facetiously argued the court should grant review deny coleman s claims and in that way preclude subsequent proceedings and hasten coleman s the result would be a stalemate in the administration of federal constitutional law although this court has determined
parameter the motion equations of this kind of system are non linear restoring forces is the vector collecting the storey displacements is the influence forcing vector and ug are the damping the circular frequency and the displacement of the ground respectively which is modelled like a linear filter subjected to a stationary gaussian white noise introducing the vector in eq are assuming non linear behavior the elastic restoring forces are related to the interstorey displacements by non linear relationships introducing the lateral stiffness of the th storey the storey stiffness is assumed as have been assumed kg the damping matrix has been evaluated for a classically damped system setting the modal damping ratios the parameters selected for the tajimi kanai like filter are as in the previous example in a first step the gsl method has been developed and then the proposed ngsl method has orders chosen have been which implied the solution of a system of and linear equations respectively for the evaluation of the coefficients two analyses have been performed characterized by two different levels of non linearity in the interstorey shear restoring forces the results have been compared with the in tables and the variances of the reference and approximated displacements and velocities are listed respectively for the two cases analysed moreover the corresponding percentage errors and the global percentage errors relative to the covariance matrix of the structural response only are reported note that the proposed ngsl method improves the results given by the gsl even if a low the covariances that are affected by higher errors from the values of the global error the tendency of the convergence of the covariance matrix to the exact solution is evident conclusions in this paper an ngsl method for the analysis of mdof non linear systems under white noise excitation is presented in the proposed procedure the probability density function of the results derived from the gsl the method is based on the following steps a classical gsl method is performed and the derived gaussian covariance matrix is assumed as a first approximation a coordinate transformation is developed toward a space of uncorrelated random processes with unit variance by using the fpk equation and for assigned truncation order the linear algebraic equations by using the computed coefficients a better approximation of the averages appearing in the coefficients of the equivalent linear system is obtained it follows that the ngsl method improves the covariance matrix of the response resulting from the gsl by simply solving a system of linear equations that in the case of polynomial non linearities as in the proposed examples the convergence to the exact solution seems to be ensured the gram charlier series expansion being able to represent the exact probability density function of the response however a considerable improvement with respect to the gsl results is obtained for lower truncation order of the series expansion also abstract in this paper the modern biomass based transportation fuels such as fuels from fischer tropsch synthesis bioethanol fatty acid ethylester biomethanol and biohydrogen are briefly reviewed here the term biofuel is referred to as liquid or gaseous fuels for the transport sector that are predominantly produced from biomass there are several reasons for biofuels to be considered as relevant technologies by both developing and industrialized countries security reasons environmental concerns foreign exchange savings and socioeconomic issues related to the rural sector the term modern biomass is generally used to describe the traditional biomass use through the efficient and clean combustion technologies and sustained supply of biomass resources environmentally sound and competitive fuels heat and electricity using modern conversion technologies modern biomass can be used for the generation of electricity and heat biodiesel as well as diesel produced from biomass by fischer tropsch synthesis are the most modern biomass based transportation fuels bio ethanol is a petrol additive substitute it is possible that wood straw and even household wastes may be economically converted to bio ethanol bio ethanol is derived from alcoholic fermentation of sucrose or simple sugars which are produced from biomass by hydrolysis process currently crops generating starch sugar or oil are the transport fuel production there has been renewed interest in the use of vegetable oils for making biodiesel due to its less polluting and renewable nature as against the conventional petroleum diesel fuel biodiesel is a renewable replacement to petroleum based diesel biomass energy conversion facilities are important for obtaining bio oil pyrolysis is the most important process among the thermal conversion processes of biomass brief summaries of the basic concepts involved in the of biomass fuels are presented the percentage share of biomass was the total renewable energy sources in the reduction of greenhouse gases pollution is the main advantage of utilizing biomass energy introduction emissions regional development social structure and agriculture security of supply worldwide energy consumption has increased fold in the last century and emissions of and nox from fossil fuel combustion are primary causes of atmospheric pollution known petroleum reserves are estimated to be depleted in less than bio energy conversion using a range of biofuels which are becoming cost wise competitive with fossil fuels biomass has been recognized as a major world renewable energy source to supplement declining fossil fuel resources biomass appears to be an attractive feedstock for three main reasons first it is a renewable resource that could be sustainably net releases of carbon dioxide and very low sulfur content third it appears to have significant economic potential provided that fossil fuel prices increase in the future lignocellulosic bio methanol have such low emissions because the carbon content of the alcohol is primarily derived from carbon that was sequestered gasoline liquefied petroleum gas and compressed natural gas this sector is likely to suffer badly because of following reasons prices of petroleum in global market are raising trend petroleum reserves are limited and it is monopoly of some oil importing countries and rest of the world depends on them number of vehicles based on petroleum fuels is on
experience similar emotions they likely than control participants to experience exactly the same emotion as the character separate analyses by gender were performed on overall ec scores finding that within each gender group participants with cd had significantly lower ec scores than control participants although more work must be done to establish any firm conclusions both of these studies found reduced affective empathy in clinically aggressive adolescents the strayer study is superior for several reasons a larger sample size a research validated empathy task and clinical assessments that ensured the validity of the group classification even if we discount the study by kaplan and arbuthnot due to significant problems in these areas we are left with a tentative conclusion that aggressive adolescents exhibit lower levels of affective empathy on behavioral measures self report measures of empathy child participants studies have investigated the empathy aggression relationship in children using self report measures of affective empathy all of these studies used bryant s empathic tendency index a item questionnaire based on mehrabian and epstein s affective empathy scale with appropriate adjustments made for children although bryant did not report factor analyses or similar information the scale is generally be unidimensional and only a total score is used the earliest of the four studies is one of bryant s initial construct validation analyses bryant correlated scores on the empathic tendency index with the teacher rated aggressiveness of students in first fourth and seventh grades aggressiveness was measured using feshbach s nine item likert type scale significant negative correlations between the two measures were found in first and fourth grade boys but not or fourth grade girls or in seventh graders macquiddy maise and hamilton completed an investigation similar to bryant s but compared two groups rather than examining aggression as a continuous variable macquiddy and colleagues compared boys with behavior problems to boys without in addition to ecbi scores boys with and without behavior problems were distinguished by the recruitment procedures used to find them all boys were between and years of age there was not a significant difference between the two groups scores on the empathic tendency index gonzalez field lasko lagreca and lahey studied boys placed in classrooms for em children an aggressive behavior score from the teacher report form was used to measure aggression teachers ratings of students aggressive behavior did not correlate significantly with students self reported empathic tendency index finally de wied et al compared to year old boys with disruptive behavior disorders to a control group of boys matched by age the disruptive behavior disorder group obtained significantly lower scores on the empathic tendency index than the control group in addition parent ratings of aggressive disruptive behavior showed a significant correlation with the empathy scores although teacher ratings did not these four studies produced mixed findings both between studies and even within some of the studies despite all of the studies using the same means of measuring empathy two studies did not find a relationship between empathy and aggression one study found a significant overall negative relationship and one study found a negative relationship in three groups of participants but not in three others no consistent differences across the demographic characteristics of the sample or the measurement of aggression appear to account for this disagreement self report measures of empathy adolescent participants six studies have investigated the empathy aggression relationship in adolescents using self report measures of empathy in the first study of this type kaplan and arbuthnot compared nondelinquent rural ohio eighth graders with delinquent adolescents likert type empathy measure the participants ranged in age from to years old no significant differences between the two groups were found comparisons were not performed separately for each gender but no interaction was found between gender and delinquency status lee and prentice compared adolescent delinquent males residing in a juvenile correctional facility with nondelinquent males from a nearby urban area nondelinquency was verified records and personal interviews two rating scales were used to classify the delinquent participants into three subtypes psychopathic neurotic and subcultural the interpersonal reactivity index and the questionnaire measure of emotional empathy were used as affective empathy measures an analysis of variance found no differences among the four group means but inspection the means revealed that contrary to the investigators hypotheses the nondelinquent group had the lowest iri scores and the second lowest qmee scores the study conducted by cohen and strayer mentioned previously in the behavioral measures section compared adolescents with formal diagnoses of cd to control participants in addition to a behavioral measure of empathy cohen and strayer used the empathic concern subscale from the iri and bryant s empathic tendency index participants in the cd group had significantly lower mean scores on both of these measures lesure lester examined the empathy aggression relation in forty adolescents living in a group home for abused children the participants completed a recent rating scale of empathy the balanced emotional empathy scale while two group home staff members rated each participant s aggression toward peers and aggression towards staff members on a point likert the rating scale of aggression was routinely used by the county s protective services agency as an index of home residents behavioral appropriateness significant negative correlations were found between empathy and both types of aggression in another study burke compared adolescent sex offenders from an outpatient treatment program to matched control participants chosen from a nearby public high school the only empathy measure in this study was the iri and burke found offender group had significantly less overall empathy as well as significantly lower scores on the empathic concern subscale most recently endresen and olweus obtained responses from norwegian sixth to ninth graders on a measure of empathy designed by the researchers as well as two measures of aggression one measuring the degree to which participants had a positive attitude toward bullying and the other a self bullying behavior the empathy measure was similar to bryant s scale and included subscales measuring empathic
later added karasek and theorell advocate that a redesign of jobs in terms of demand control and social support is likely to result in a better health status for employees effort reward imbalance during the extended to job satisfaction representing the relationship between motivation and performance according to expectancy theory effort and reward are subjective measures that determine the contribution of the individual the balance between efforts and rewards will result in the accomplishment of the task and job satisfaction porter and lawler mentioned two levels of expectations the expectancy of reward based on performance and the performance based on effort similarly siegrist proposed an effort reward imbalance model to assess psychological hazards at work siegrist combined elements from the person environment fit and the demand control models to explain stress as a result of imbalance between costs and gains siegrist differentiates between extrinsic effort given by the demands of the job and intrinsic effort given by internal control or coping balance theory smith and sainfort provided a theory merging efforts in job design and job stress theories job design comprises efforts in human relations participation at work job enrichment socio technical systems and social democracy job stress theories include biological theories person environment fit perceptual theories and workplace theories according to the balance model working conditions produce a stress load on the person that might be influenced by individual a physiological load or psychological load produces stress if it exceeds the available resources they assert that physiological and psychological loads are intrinsically related through various elements of the work system technology person organization task and environment smith and sainfort s theory helps to establish a relationship between job demands and work environment variables critical assessment the six different theories explain the interaction between the person environment as summarized in table previous models introduce some of the six elements representing the interaction between the person and the environment even though all models are job design oriented different approaches have resulted in a variety of constructs to explain the human at work system a comparison of those models renders some areas of commonality and difference across the models areas of commonality in all six models the interaction between the person and is a dynamic process that seeks to restructure the system until it reaches a state of balance such a balance state refers to the point in which the person and the environment function together as a whole resulting in optimum performance each model expresses such relationship in different terms balance between environmental factors and satisfaction balance between motivating potential and individual growth balance supply and demands balance between psychological demands and decision latitude and balance between effort and reward in general the state of the system can be measured by the degree of balance between the environment and the person three models describe the intended effect of the environment and the resultant effect perceived by the person job characteristics theory labels as an objective measure and individual growth need as a subjective measure person environment fit works with subjective and objective fits as different levels of supplies and demands effort reward imbalance identifies two different levels of effort extrinsic and intrinsic overall the state of the system is determined by an objective effect that is transformed into a subjective effect based on individual characteristics and perceptions of the all models point out that the lack of fitness results in stress and physical illness in motivation hygiene theory hygiene factors can potentially produce stress or physical illness in person environment fit a difference between environment supplies and demands results in strain in the demand control model a high level of demand and low level of control increases the risk of psychological strain and physical illness in the effort reward model a high level of effort with a low reward results in distress poor health is associated with a low level of congruence among the system elements areas of difference not all the models provide a categorization of the factors that constitute the human at work system the job characteristics theory identifies eight core elements of the work environment skill variety task identification task significance autonomy feedback meaningfulness responsibility and knowledge the demand control model adds two more control and support the motivation hygiene theory introduces two categories of factors but does not provide a hierarchy of elements most of the other models work with the environment as a whole without a definition of the elements that constitute the work environment the outcomes of the human at work system are not clearly defined while almost every single model identifies health as a personal outcome some of them include organizational outcomes the job includes productivity as an outcome of the organization the demand control model works with productivity as a work outcome the goal of the human at work system cannot be limited to human health but needs to be extended to organizational outputs such as quantity quality and cost the most diverging area is the use of quantitative methods to measure the state of the system motivation hygiene theory and effort reward imbalance denote a statistical association that can be in terms of likelihood deterministic models use a linear score a multiplicative score or a function model regardless of the approach there are two missing components a method to combine scores across different factors and a method to provide the intervention level required that is whether immediate action or incremental improvements are necessary to improve the system the work compatibility model beer s measures of achievement has not yet been established the next step in job design is to develop a measure that quantifies the current state of the system what can be done under the current design and what are the ideal conditions because the human at work system consists of multiple variables and relationships research has found it difficult to validate complex constructs of work environment conditions because the human at work system consists of multiple variables and relationships research
reported to be more likely to resolve whereas coexisting speech sound and language disorders are pervasive and are also reported to be associated with poorer academic outcomes arndt and healy surveyed slps about children on their caseloads who stuttered forty four percent of the children were reported to have at least one nippold highlighted that this was possible because slps were more likely to recommend children who stuttered and had an additional disorder for treatment nippold suggested that caseload surveys may overestimate the rate of additional disorders in children who stutter and that more rigorous methods are needed to accurately report the rate of co existing disorders context of the current study the role of slps in assisting students with communication disorders in schools has been widely documented however within australia school systems are not a principle employer of slps sw where the present study was undertaken few slps are employed in the education sector whether in public or private schools the majority are employed in the health sector thus the present investigation into the prevalence of children with communication disorders in nsw australia provides a unique insight into the identification of and provisions made for children with speech for appropriate education rests within the education department the majority of support for these children is provided by classroom and special education teachers within the education system and not by slps a catholic diocese in sydney australia in collaboration with the first author undertook extensive data collection between and in order to assist schools to focus their support for students and properly allocate school resources the special needs survey was developed to facilitate identification of all students requiring additional support there were four waves of data collection the data collected during the were focused on broad priority areas of need including communication disorders specific learning disabilities intellectual disability vision impairment hearing impairment and early achievers advanced learners these areas were identified by the diocesan special needs consultant in consultation with the three special needs advisors data collected in the under the heading of communication disorders included difficulty with understanding language producing oral and written language social communication articulation voice and or fluent speech the final wave of data collection focused on children with disorders who did not attract educational funding from government agencies including children who stuttered or had a voice or speech sound disorder thus this phase of data collection provided a unique opportunity to examine the prevalence of stuttering teachers and confirmed by speech language pathology report consequently the aims of the present investigation were threefold to report australian teachers estimates of the prevalence of three speech disorders in primary schools in one catholic diocese in sydney australia in to consider the correspondence between the and socioeconomic status and to describe australian teachers perceptions concerning the level of support and planning that is provided to children with speech disorders it is recognized that the prevalence figures of these speech disorders as identified by teachers will be different from the prevalence figures that were generated from studies employing initial identification by slps nonetheless with limited australian no slps directly available to the nsw education system to conduct such a study the estimates generated provide a conservative estimate for agencies that are attempting to provide support services for children with speech disorders they also provide data for international comparison of teachers estimates of children with communication disorders method in the present investigation there were males and females the children ranged from kindergarten to grade the socio economic index for areas scale was used to determine ses for the schools attended by each student this scale is a composite that is calculated from the educational attainment income employment census in this article the seifa scale was categorized into six quantiles top next next next next and lowest there were no schools in the lowest two categories of seifa in this study procedure a four stage process was used to identify students who stuttered or students the first of the four stage process was an information session that was conducted by the special needs advisors for every principal and learning support teacher within the school district to train them in the data collection process a descriptors booklet provided descriptions of the various areas of special need of interest to the diocesan school office the descriptors for the speech and learning support teachers trained every teacher within the schools about the purposes and identification methods of the study during a staff meeting in the second term of the school year the teachers were supplied with the descriptors booklet and class survey sheet within week the teachers were required to identify all students in their class who warranted identification gender special learning need level of learning support provided curriculum adaptations made whether an individualized education plan was in place outside agencies that were consulted for the student and the teacher s perception of the student s support needs to be included in the classroom the teachers involved in the identification of children with candidates in need of intervention the procedures adopted for this study sensitized classroom teachers to the identification of children with speech disorders and consequently initiated support mechanisms for interventions to be enacted the following definitions from the descriptors booklet were used by the teachers to identify a repetition or prolongation of syllables sounds and speech postures voice disorders students have a consistently hoarse or husky voice with some periods of voice loss voice has a nasal quality voice is too soft loud high low articulation articulation disorders are those characterized by substitution omission or distortion of speech sounds eg sound production poor saliva control and muscle coordination it is acknowledged that the identification of stuttering included only those children who stuttered at school no parent report was sought during the identification process thus it was possible that the prevalence of stuttering may have been underidentified the because differentiation between different speech sound disorders is controversial even within the speech language pathology profession ninety eight children were identified as having an articulation
some maintain a mere re working of what malevich had figured out in russia at the beginning of the twentieth century but apart from the beginning of post modernism is placed in the mid some place the moment with robert venturi s complexity and contradiction in architecture but others think it has more to do with artists who felt free to draw from whatever sources they wanted artists who knew the language of all kinds of artistic styles and further knew that they were all at their fingertips and available to them at will whichever interpretation one chooses the results are much the same the linear patriarchal overthrow in the name of progress had ended this is the important point the notion of progress presupposed in the avant garde had ended artists and architects could mix and match styles all styles were equally valuable and even more what was now valuable was the mixing of those styles or they could re cycle styles neo was one of the most frequent prefixes in aesthetic dialogue neo expressionism neo pop etc an artist would choose his or her associated eg if one wanted to be emotional and angst ridden one went for expressionism if one wanted to avoid such emotionalism and lean toward the smart one went for conceptual etc the conveyor belt of history was fluid and fast relativism in post modernism much like the quotation that is part of mannerism post modernism adopts an implicit commitment to intellectual decision making the interesting argument behind this is that intellectual and hence conscious choices to the mere brays of peer pressure we do nt in other words have to follow just whatever the crowd of the moment is doing we can sit back and think about which language we like and deliberately choose the baggage that comes with that choice as i said if one goes for emotionalism and the gut wrenching then one would choose neo expressionism if we like dadaism then we do the new version in conceptual art if we like russian constructivism then we do its new version in street art it was like shopping in a big mall you got to choose which store you went into the epistemological point of view that underlies this is relativism there is no absolute right or wrong post modernism promises free no obligation combinations to mate toe to mat toe no reason to choose one point of view is ultimately as good as another it just depends on your taste what all of this gives us is a discarding of idealism not in the philosophical sense of a theory that over matter but in the ordinary sense of the word that claims an allegiance to higher aspirations and goals post modernism was creating a history of art that was multi faceted and written in parallel histories instead of the linear history that modernism had offered the notion of objective and universal truth was relinquished in favor of multiple versions of truth truth is abandoned in favor of a tolerance for a diversity of opinions how that is an instance of might not be obvious at first glance but upon reflection it becomes clear if anything goes then standards and criterion are discarded because there is no clear and absolute standard to which we are wedded there are many ways to do things many standards of judgment that can be adopted many viewpoints are tolerated all things are relative to a point of view not to an objective standard the consequence of this is that there are no absolute wrongs but this also takes the ultimate notion of progress for progress is a non relative term we all agree that certain things constitute a move forward in other words the notion of progress presupposes the notion of truth but relativism can give no such absolutist promise art as knowledge what then is the role of art and what is its relation to truth the idealists though fuzzy in their metaphysics at least have a sense of the value of art though their notion is that it is an exemplification of the mental which is far more real than the material but there have been a few notable non idealists in the recent history of aesthetics who have argued that art is knowledge art gives us wittgenstein argues not merely a warm bath feeling it also gives us substantial ideas we learn when we look at art ludwig wittgenstein nelson goodman and richard wollheim were only a few of those in the twentieth century to also argue each in their own specific ways that art is something more than pleasure and decoration and it seems to me like a good argument i do nt just get a cosy feeling when i look at art i actually walk away thinking something different about life and about myself because i have looked at the world through someone else s eyes looking at the world else s eyes is a kind of knowledge transfer i have learned something sometimes something profound but we are now faced with a conundrum for if we grant that relativism is our epistemological framework what kind of knowledge can simultaneously be granted within that framework do nt we then merely have competing opinions and never genuine knowledge for the latter presupposes something close to universal consent and in relativism there is no so where are we in the era of modernism with its conjoined beliefs in progress and truth art served as the protest voice the voice of dissent and truth against the forces of obsolescence and deceit when the standard point of view became too entrenched and no longer accurately expressed the world as it was art stepped in to explode the falsity of the old and replace it with a shiny new truth art was the brave voice the shaman as it were opposed at first only to at last the avant garde was like a market corrective
despite their similarities it is also possible to show by treating the poems individually how each epic is trying in its own way to deepen the audience s conception of divine justice for while each poem reflects what might call the simple view namely that human wrongs will be punished more or less immediately by the gods they also explore the complexities and problems inherent in such an account of divine justice part iii traces similar patterns of divine and human interaction in the wider hexameter corpus of hesiod the epic cycle and the homeric hymns where the gods self interest and clashing wills function within the overarching system of zeus s kullmann is perhaps the fullest exposition thus far of the iliad and odyssey s alleged differences in their depiction of the relationships between gods and mortals he seeks to establish the incompatibility of the religious conceptions of the two epics the pres ent article however argues not only for their compatibility but also for their essential similarity rosen rightly notes that the works and days is not unique in its concern with in the the iliad and odyssey tell one grand story about how dike operates throughout all stages of human relations from the interpersonal to the international however he does not show how this works in any detail in the texts iliad versus odyssey it remains a standard view of the homeric epics that the gods of the iliad in contrast to those of the odyssey are little interested in human morality a recent treatment of the homeric gods speaks of ethical considerations which ordinary sense of the word s yet as we shall see close attention to the text shows that the gods are intimately concerned with matters of right and wrong throughout the iliad dodds famously found no indication in the narrative of the iliad that zeus is concerned with justice as however despite lloyd jones s compelling criticisms of this the opposition between divine frivolity and concern for justice persists the central aim of this paper is such a dichotomy is mistaken since it neglects the ways in which the narrative of the iliad itself displays a basic pattern of justice and conversely exaggerates the extent to which the gods of the odyssey embody a more advanced theodicy a closer analysis reveals a single and consistent form of divine justice shared by both the epics yet far from endorsing a which the gods of the odyssey embody a more advanced theodicy a closer analysis reveals a single and consistent form of divine justice shared by both the epics yet far from endorsing a simple model of justice where the good are rewarded and the wicked punished each poem shows a more complex system of norms and punishments in action and explores its disturbing implications for the human agents involved both the iliad and the odyssey are the poems is simultaneous ly cosmic and personal cosmic in that it embraces divine as well as human society and is connected to the maintenance of order on both levels personal in that it is intended to control individual conduct and self interest and depends for its ultimate sanction on the personal authority of zeus himself trojan wrongs though the iliad poet is less prone to moral judgements than the narrator of the he nevertheless shapes his narrative so that a clear pattern of norms and consequences emerges he deliberately includes scenes which emphasize the trojans in starting and prolonging the war and their culpable misjudgments during it yet unlike the odyssey where only one of the suitors amphinomus is presented in any detail as a sympathetic figure below the trojan people are seen to suffer disproportionately for the errors of their leaders making their expression of divine justice the more disturbing the first of such scenes comes just after the duel between paris and menelaus as helen and paris go to bed with the each other paris recalls their first sexual encounter but come let us take our pleasure in the bed of love for never before has desire so enfolded my mind not even when i first snatched you away from lovely lacedaemon and sailed off with you in my seafaring ships and slept with you in the bed of love on the island of cranae that was nothing to how i desire you now and sweet longing seizes me the original offence the abduction of helen is re enacted within the narrative menelaus links this crime to eventual destruction of the trojans nor is it solely the greeks who disapprove of paris actions hector as worthy of stoning and wishes he would die at once while the narrator describes the ships that took paris to sparta as the source of evils for all the trojans and for himself since he knew nothing of the gods decrees the iliad s pattern of reciprocal justice is seen most clearly in the poet s decision to include and to elaborate at great length the account of the oath breaking in book and priam s disastrous reaction to it in book as the head of his community priam swears the oath on the trojans behalf following a solemn sacrifice both the achaeans and the trojans call upon zeus to punish the side that breaks the oath yet despite the truce ratified by the oath the trojan pandarus attempts to kill menelaus and his crime serves as a recapitulation of trojan guilt of course athena and hera have promoted this goal with zeus s consent epic principle of double motivation means that pandarus liability is not diminished he is tempted not compelled to shoot his arrow at menelaus he is foolish nor does it efface the guilt of the trojans which is underlined by the decision of pandarus comrades to hide him with their shields from the eyes of the greeks as he pre pares to shoot when agamemnon says that troy will
angle its wave vector along the grating surface has magnitude where represents the grating constant and hence the linear dispersion relation of free light changes into a set of parallel straight lines which can match the acoustic plasmon dispersion relation as shown in figure for a well defined acoustic surface plasmon in be to be observed the wave number than forq equation with yields a grating constant acoustic surface plasmons of energy s ev could be excited in this way although a grating period of a few nanometers sounds unrealistic with present technology the possible control of vicinal surfaces with high indices could provide appropriate grating periods in the near future a wide spectrum of studies ranging from condensed matter and surface physics to electrochemistry wetting biosensing scanning tunnelling microscopy the ejection of ions from surfaces nanoparticle growth surface plasmon microscopy and surface plasmon resonance technology renewed interest in surface plasmons has come from recent advances in the investigation of the optical properties of nanostructured one of the most attractive aspects of these collective excitations now being their use to concentrate light in subwavelength structures and to enhance transmission through periodic arrays of subwavelength holes in optically thick metallic films as well as the possible fabrication of nanoscale photonic circuits operating at optical frequencies and their use as mediators in the transfer of energy from donor to acceptor molecules on opposite sides of metal films two distinct applications of collective electronic excitations at metal surfaces the role that surface plasmons play in particle surface interactions and the new emerging field called plasmonics particle surface interactions energy loss let us consider a recoilless fast point particle of charge moving in an arbitrary inhomogeneous many electron system at a given impact vector with nonrelativistic velocity using fermi s golden rule of time dependent perturbation theory the lowest order probability for the probe particle to transfer momentum to the medium is given by the following expression where and a represent the normalization length and area respectively and is the double fourier transform of the screened interaction of equation imaginary part of the self energy in the gw approximation of many body theory and replacing the probe particle green function by that of a non interacting recoilless particle one finds where pi represents the probe particle initial state of energy and the sum is extended over a complete set of final states pf of energy describing the probe particle initial and ie where represents the position vector perpendicular to the projectile velocity one finds that the decay rate of equation reduces indeed to a sum over the probability of equation ie being a normalization time classical particle loses per unit time as follows where ind is the potential induced by the probe particle at position and time which to first order in the external perturbation yields with is simply the energy transferred by our recoilless probe particle to the medium planar surface in the case of a plane bounded electron gas that is translationally invariant in two directions which we take to be normal to the axis equations yield the following expression for the energy that the probe particle loses per unit time where is a wave vector in the plane of the surface represents the component of the represents the position of the projectile relative to the surface and is the fourier transform of in the simplest possible model of a bounded semi infinite electron gas in vacuum in which the screened interaction is given by the classical expression equation with being the drude dielectric function of equation and explicit expressions can be found for the energy lost per unit path length by probe particles that move along a trajectory that is either parallel or normal to the surface parallel trajectory in the case of a probe particle moving with constant velocity at a fixed distance from the surface introduction of equation into equation yields where is the zero order modified bessel function and kc denotes the magnitude equation reproduces the classical expression of echenique and pendry which was found to describe correctly eels experiments and which was extended to include relativistic corrections for particle trajectories inside the solid equation reproduces the result first obtained by nunez et al outside the solid the energy loss is dominated by the excitation of surface plasmons at ss when the particle moves inside the solid the effect of the boundary is to cause a decrease in loss at the bulk plasma frequency sp which in an infinite electron gas would be pln and an additional loss at the surface plasma frequency ss nonlocal effects that are absent in the classical equation were incorporated approximately by several authors in the framework of the hydrodynamic approach and the and alda calculations of the energy loss spectra of charged particles moving near a jellium surface were carried out within the self consistent scheme described in section at high velocities and for charged particles moving far from the surface into the vacuum the actual energy loss was found to converge with the classical limit dictated by the first line of equation however at low and intermediate velocities substantial changes in the energy loss loss were observed as a realistic description of the surface response was considered corrections to the energy loss of charged particles due to the finite width of the surface plasmon resonance that is not present in principle in jellium self consistent calculations have been discussed recently these corrections have been included to investigate the energy loss of highly charged ions undergoing distant collisions at grazing incidence incidence angles with the internal surface of microcapillary materials and it has been suggested that the correlation between the angular distribution and the energy loss of transmitted ions can be used to probe the dielectric properties of the capillary material for a more realistic description of the energy loss of charged particles moving near a cu surface the kohn sham potential used in the self consistent jellium calculations
level of experience or knowledge is still a difficult issue as in carrillo and gaimon the period of implementation of a process change can also be the subject knowledge based standard progress measurement for integrated cost and schedule performance control abstract though the progress of construction projects is most often used as a critical index for effective project management the method structure data and accuracy of detailed progress measurement may vary depending on specific characteristics of a project this to misinterpretation of the project status especially under a multiproject management environment it is also a daunting task for the inexperienced engineers to formulate and monitor the project specific work packages at the same time maintaining very detailed and highly accurate progress information requires excessive managerial efforts in order to address this issue this study proposes the concept of standard progress measurement package issues for standardization of the work that can embody distinct characteristics of different construction projects are investigated the proposed methodology facilitates automated formulating of work packages by using a historical database and also automates the gathering of progress information through the use of standardized methods and tools a case study project is evaluated in order to examine the practicability of the proposed system introduction construction project performance accordingly integration of cost and schedule control systems has been an issue of great concern for researchers and practitioners as these two important control systems are closely interrelated sharing numerous common data rasdorf and abudayyeh jung and gibson jung and woo in their controlling processes technology have been widely adapted the earned value management system evms which integrates cost and schedule control is a good example two important features of evms are the combination of two different construction business functions ie cost and schedule into a unified perspective and the provision of highly detailed standard methods and procedures so as to compulsorily maintain data integrity among many different earned value is key information in the integrated cost and schedule control as it provides a baseline for comparison with the planned schedule and or actual costs however the method structure data and accuracy of detailed progress measurements may vary depending on the characteristics of a project organization or location regardless of the variation in the methods utilized in terms of accuracy ideally the progress nevertheless the excessive workload required to manipulate very detailed progress data is also a critical issue deng and hung rasdorf and abudayyeh jung and woo for effective cost and schedule control no previous research or professional practice has comprehensively addressed the issues of standard progress measurement methodology in terms of its practicability accuracy efficiency an effective progress measurement system utilizing standard progress measurement packages spmps as depicted in fig a prime objective of developing spmps is to identify manageable work packages with reliable progress measurement enhancing accuracy even though those are not addressed in detail this study also discusses applying standard measures and procedures to as many work breakdown structure wbs formulation by using a prestructured historical database alleviating workload and accommodating self evolving features of standard packages by analyzing the changes of managerial policy under an ever changing business environment sustaining adaptability a case study is used throughout this paper in order to illustrate is basically comprised of an eleven story office building two stories underground and nine stories above ground and a laboratory specifics of the project include of total floor area month project duration a general contractor s viewpoint as a case company is applied in this case study and the architectural work alone is analyzed excluding earthwork mechanical and electrical details of the case project are summarized in definition progress refers to the advance toward a specific end the degree of advance for a construction project can be determined in many different ways in their study for measuring construction productivity thomas and mathews assert that the progress in terms of work unit completed and the associated cost in terms of man hours or dollars are typically tracked in order to measure productivity for the purpose of construction percentages of direct cost incurred plus a portion of overhead and profit stokes from the viewpoints of cost engineers or scheduling engineers somewhat different considerations for progress may also be inferred nevertheless the most commonly perceived concept of progress implies the work completed and the associated cost earned value or budgeted cost for work performed bcwp in evms progress in earned value management benefits from integrating cost and schedule control evms have been asserted by numerous researchers and practitioners since this idea was first promoted in the the basic concept utilizes the focal point for the integration of scope cost and scheduling rasdorf and abudayyeh fleming and koppleman ansi for evms a control account ca as the focal point acts for a management control point at which budgets and actual costs are accumulated and compared to earned value for management control purposes eia the progress earned value or bcwp is used as a baseline to which the planned schedule budgeted cost for work scheduled bcws and the actual cost actual cost of work performed the results of performance variances and indices are used for further analysis including estimating cost at completion identifying latent risks and replanning for remaining work packages the level of progress measurement packages is a critical issue in terms of the workload ie manageability required to maintain the control system and the accuracy of the packages jung any project however this situation may require an excess of managerial effort with limited usage of the data at the same time it is very likely that less detailed packages would provide more inaccurate information in order to address this issue the level of detail for progress measurement should be carefully selected as a trade off between the workload and accuracy incorporating strategy objectives and most significant part of workload is collecting and maintaining data that is generated throughout the project life cycle in particular evms requires more complex data structures and additional
too small a stream to be very efficient and a larger stream should be made available soil intake rates and methods permitting two streams arranged for a half day each but farms for two days may be practical for some soils this might be arranged under the arranged demand schedule let the farmer operate the flexible system flexibly project benefits are appreciable for example the orange cove irrigation district calif reduced its field crew by one half chandler et al merriam et al system costs needs to be increased the increased costs are invariably more than compensated for by on farm tangible and intangible benefits such as reduced and more convenient labor increased yields more efficient irrigation and water conservation reduced potential drainage and salinity and reduced inter farmer top ender low ender conflicts three streams and for mm for streams to double from a small stream for to daytime only would cost more for pipe with twice the flow rate to make possible the use of two large daytime only streams with low congestion on a distributor using tapered size would increase distributor pipe cost about lateral costs would increase less and the major project costs might decrease annual costs the to obtain an optimum flexible distribution would only be about project cost and the resulting increased water charges would be easily compensated by the many benefits the lateral would be negligibly more see table not needing to be increased in the upper portion flexible operation capacities the branch canal can function either with upstream or downstream control the canal must provide through operation or in canal storage for the rejected overnight flow for the lesser changes caused by on farm irrigation operations such as initial and cutback furrows flows or early or late turn on and turnoffs different set sizes etc this is difficult on a project scale except for very large canals or with operational spillage but is practical merriam for distributor deliveries of two streams the upper reach should be longer than half lengths to allow for the probability that two streams would be needed in the lower half such need could be constrained by arrangement it is more desirable to extend the double capacity of the upper part of the pipeline to of the length to provide better service with less congestion also since specific area and not to a day of availability it may vary from the unit farm stream size the design flow rate may cautiously be reconsidered where main or branch canals have inadequate capabilities to handle the major changes resulting from the flexible schedules additional storage capacity must be developed the service area reservoir is usually the most practical procedure with such a open or semiclosed pipeline or a sloping existing canal if offtakes have adequate head to function the lateral capacity in the upper half above the reservoir need only be a bit larger than the average flow rate this is one of the benefits derived from having a service area reservoir if the lateral were operated in downstream control mode without storage the lateral must have more than twice full capacity to supply pipe capacity design illustrations flow rate and unit farm stream for illustration of reservoir and pipeline capacities assume et is mm day ipd on a ha area served by a lateral and efficiency then for this illustration the daily volume average would be per day ha day day days to mm per day days the average continuous supply flow rate to the ha service area at efficiency for a rotation schedule ha lps cfs steady flow for a delivery the rate would be twice as great lps a day irrigation cycle applying mm at mm the average flow rate for a farm turnout would be ha s lps cfs this average rate is too small to be practical for or shorter sets and an increase for on farm variations the practical flow rate limit for the initial stream unit farm stream might be lps cfs which could be cutback for a day rate is lps so the design limit might better be lps unit farm stream this limiting figure is a key value and must be set with judgment as not all farmers will use it with increased labor nighttime hours can be used but should be avoided the engineer must learn to think like an educated farmer evaluation experience is very helpful the actual soil intake rate and needed duration are basic stream for on ha applies cm an mm soil moisture deficiency at requires a cm irrigation to apply this to ha in requires basic stream lps number of farms per day in the united states the representative average number of ha unit farms per day for a day cycle in a farms ha a developing country with ha unit farms ha days farms day the supply and conveyance capacity and the needed reservoir capacity to operate this area with a flexible schedule and acceptable congestion is related to probability and an economically acceptable congestion the degree of assurance of delivering water on the date first requested under a limited rate arranged demand lps varied as desired for as long as needed on that day what capacity will be needed these limiting conditions must be determined with great care to not appreciably restrict on farm operations for this illustration in the usa the average of the farms would be either two or three unit streams with a flexible schedule four or one or even none might be arranged with three which is rather restrictive of the choice of day it probably will not stress the crop flexibility involves both frequency congestion and volume of water with four streams it would be could cover the farms in six days out of a ten day cycle which is adequate reserve consider using four streams for a developing country with many small units to be covered an ongestion level resulting in irrigating up to farms per day
solved for the least squares estimate of the five compliance terms by multi linear regression analysis the advantage of this approach is that all strain measurements are taken into account when determining the compliance terms furthermore the method can be extended to more than three specimens critical stress states peak strength in addition to these stress values the corresponding axial and radial strains are also recorded the tensile strength is defined as the ultimate tensile stress capacity of any indirect tensile test and specifically here from the compressive load of the indirect brazilian test the corresponding axial and radial strains cannot be defined from the results of the indirect and the specimen length the crack initiation stress is defined as the stress level where the crack volumetric strain deviates from zero the crack volumetric strain is calculated by subtracting the elastic deformations of the rock matrix from the measured total volumetric strain the elastic volumetric strain is defined by stresses after subtracting the elastic volumetric strain from the total volumetric strain the crack volumetric strain curve is shifted so that the maximum value is zero the determination of the crack initiation stress state is not always clear therefore the first guess for sci is determined as the last point having a crack volumeric strain visually is at the intersection of the horizontal line and the extension of the increasing crack volume the crack damage stress is defined in the uniaxial test as the reversal of the volumetric strain curve at this point the total volume of the specimen changes from compaction to dilation the total volumetric strain is approximated from the measured axial stress acoustic emission the critical stress states of crack initiation and crack damage were also defined from cumulative ae count results in an ideal ae result for mica gneiss the following can be separated the emission caused by load application the elastic region the initiation of microcracking the onset of stable microcracking interpreted as being directly associated with the crack initiation stress but if the microcracking starts irregularly being minor then the onset of stable microcracking is used instead the beginning of unstable microcracking where the cumulative count axial stress relation changes from linear to exponential is defined as the crack damage stress subjective in order to see the strength of ae events the cumulative count result is also divided into bands according to maximum amplitude test specimens the following section describes the whole specimenhandling procedure from the core drilling to loading in the laboratory selection of samples a diameter of mm was drilled in the winter of the main rock types encountered in ol are migmatitic mica gneiss granite and tonalite the long borehole ol with a diameter of mm was drilled in the spring of the main rock types encountered in ol are migmatitic mica gneiss granite and tonalite the diameter of the drilled core the outdoor temperature storage of the geological survey of finland at loppi after detailed geological inspection the core samples for this study were selected by jorma palmen and matti hakala and transferred to the laboratory of rock engineering at helsinki university of technology specimens where the before selection of the core samples for specimen preparation the cores of both depth regions were carefully inspected visually to avoid preexisting joints no color penetration examination was used before the specimen preparation the core samples were stored in warm storage room conditions with an average temperature of and with humidity procedure during the development and specification of laboratory tests a procedure for specimen handling was introduced this procedure was improved based on experience with the testing of olkiluoto mica gneiss romuvaara tonalite gneiss kivetty granite kivetty porphyritic granodiorite and ha stholmen pyterlite in the following text descriptions of the different handling stages are given at the normal procedure in the core sample selection phase at geological survey of finland s loppi storage the bottom and top end of each core sample were marked before specimen preparation the core samples were stored in sample boxes specimen preparation begins with measurement of the length of each continuous core sample part then the specimen identifiers and the upper depth of the specimen within one centimeter accuracy eg the cut levels and the downward arrows were also marked on the remaining parts of the cores a file form was opened for each specimen the specimens were cut from the core samples with a diameter diamond saw during the sawing the fulfill the isrm recommended procedure the prepared specimens were then photographed and stored in a sample box in warm storage room conditions with a mean temperature of and humidity until testing normally testing is done with fully saturated specimens but here normal room conditions were used because of strain gage gluing on a day before testing the length diameter mass perpendicularity strain gage rosettes were glued all length dimensions were measured to within accuracy and the mass to within accuracy the perpendicularity of the specimen ends and the straightness of the sample sides were taken as the maximum difference a technique for specifying the specimen sidewall flatness was drafted because no generally accepted defining and loading rate were recorded also the gap between the circumferential extensometer jaws was recorded as an essential value in calculating the radial strain from the measured circumferential displacement the test instrumentation was reported to the mts testing system diary the tests were conducted according to the suggested test procedures introduced later on in sections all the were recorded in the specimen file form after each test the observed failure surfaces were marked on the specimen and photographed the tested specimens are stored in sample boxes at lre hut until they were finally returned to posiva test configurations and procedures of a load cell extensometers for strain measurements load frame hydraulic power supply test controller test processor and pc micro computer strain gage measuring system deformations were measured with strain gages and extensometers a pc based multi channel electronic measurement system was used
at the end of the section the notion of a splitting of a real valued morse function has an obvious analogue for circle valued morse functions as in the real valued case there is no restriction to assume that aequals the product metric in a tubular neighborhood of with splitting of a morse smale function along a morse smale function with a is a morse smale function such that for a convenient interval except in a small tubular neighborhood the construction is that by contrast to the novikov complex of the novikov complex of a splitting is very simple because the flow lines of the corresponding lift are never longer than one fundamental domain indeed the only way a flow line of can cross is by joining inside critical point contained in to one in restricts to a linear cobordism on leads to a simple description for the for any such splitting we may identify the interval with and if we denote then the cobordism equals clearly is diffeomorphic to the cobordism with module chain complexes and chain maps by analogy with proposition proposition let be a morse smale function with a regular value for every morse smale function splitting of along the novikov complex of a splitting of along module chain complex defined by proof as for the morse complex of in the setting of proposition define a based free module chain complex by the role of this complex is to eliminate in a purely algebraic way the contribution of from the novikov complex of the splitting clearly this suggests that complexes and isomorphisms in this result are understood to belong to the category of module chain complexes definition an isomorphism of based free modules is simple if the result below is the analogue of the rigidity theorem and the gluing theorem retract of cnov in particular the simple isomorphism type of the novikov complex of is independent of the choice of a for any splitting of along a morse smale function for any for each basis element remark the complex behaves as if it were the novikov complex cnov of a morse smale function obtained from a splitting by cancelling the pairs of critical points added to those of in the construction of with indeed as in the real valued case such a function does exist such that it is close to using point of the theorem and the existence of such an is sufficient to prove but again as in the real valued case it is not enough for in the following we shall prove the whole statement independently of bifurcation considerations the theorem uses the adaptation to the valued case of the techniques developed in the first three sections of this paper these methods will produce certain morphisms relating the various chain complexes involved showing that these morphisms are isomorphisms is less immediate than in the valued case but it will always follow from the fact that our morphisms satisfy the assumptions of the rather obvious lemma below set an module endomorphism such that for each is an r simple automorphism proof write s with x the matrix of has entries in r of the form with aij the augmentation sends to an upper triangular matrix of the form which is clearly invertible the matrix defined by has entries in z thus itself is invertible with inverse defined over r we now return to the proof of theorem the first remark is that the definitions and apply ad literam to the case of valued maps because the relevant conditions are local in nature similarly the statements in proposition and proposition remain valid if we replace the relevant morse complexes by the corresponding morse novikov complexes with one exception the argument given for the proof of only shows that fm is a chain map in care is necessary for the constructions of morse cobordisms lemma let be two morse smale functions with closed suppose that and are homotopic then there exists and a simple morse cobordism proof the difference between proving this statement and the constructions in sect comes from the fact that the formulas for the homotopies given there are no longer applicable in this case let be given by we also use the following convention dt is the standard volume form on and for an valued function we let dg may assume that is flat at the ends of the cobordism in the sense that there are collared neighborhoods ui of small such that for ui we have because is compact there exists such that for all be as is flat close to to verify that is a morse cobordism we only need to notice that has no critical points in this happens because in this set it is obvious that there are metrics a let an increasing function with we let be a smooth homotopy of and that is defined by finally we define as before we take on metric a is easy to verify that given these two lemmas item of theorem follows exactly by the same argument as item of theorem more precisely assume that are homotopic morse smale functions such that is close to then there exists a homotopy of to which is close to the constant in lemma to be as small as desired we now construct morse cobordisms relating and for small constants and that are similar to those in lemma and the argument in lemma applied to the lifts of to implies that the resulting chain maps have the property that satisfies the assumptions of lemma and is again the proof here consists of adapting the proof of theorem to the valued case we shall use the notations introduced in definition in particular and only differ in the interior of a small tubular neighborhood and on this set if we identify the interval with a small arc function as close to the function as desired therefore we may find a small constant such that rigidity and gluing for morse and novikov complexes we then construct by the methods in lemma a morse function which is of the form with and recalling that actually the image of is in we rewrite as this shows that extends to a function which is equal
catcht greene did not however become a jest book the genre s contradictions remained prominent because greene retained elements of the earnest moralizing common in the earlier cony catching pamphlets supplementing the light hearted debate with a sombre tale of a penitent whore the tension between the titillating and moralizing impulses of the pamphlets is articulated most clearly in greene s last cony catching pamphlet the black bookes messenger whose readers were instructed like judge as you ned browne slipping between elaborate penitence and cheerful insistence that his story must entertain personifies the genre s duality he repeatedly warns others not to follow in his footsteps and condemns his own and others villainies he wishes to forwarne of such base companions as he has but ned also suggests a different function for his text since sorrow cannot helpe to save me he proposes discoursing to you methode of my knaveries which if you hear without laughing then after my death call me base knave and never have me in all ned s tales are merry or pleasant and he undermines his penitence by insisting that as i have ever lived lewdly so i meane to end my life as resolutely and not by a cowardly confession to attempt the hope of a anticipating dekker s the moralizing in lanthorne and candle light ned remarks on the inconsistencies in his text but what should i stand heere preaching i lived wantonly and therefore let me end merrily and tel you two or three of my mad pranks and so bid you merriness does not sit easily with preaching in these pamphlets the sense that entertainment squeezes out rather than supplements their failure to function as claimed although the rogues are reportedly furious that greene has exposed their tricks they seeke not a newe meanes of life but a newe methode how to fetch in their connies and to play their the tricks get more and more complicated to compensate for the connies increased watchfulness as in the story of a farmer who boasts that he is too smart to allow his pocket dudgion that they should be put down by a pesant and deciding by a generall consent to bend all their wits to bee possessers of this farmers boung samuel rowlands s pamphlet greenes ghost haunting cony catchers raises more serious questions about the function of rogue texts earlier writers had insisted that their works would not teach people how to become rogues rowlands however likened his pamphlet to lancing a plague sore all men that looke on insteed of learning to avoid it should be most dangerously infected with he warned his readers against using the book in this way if any with the spider here seeke to sucke poison let such a one take heed lest in practising his villainy he chance commence bachelor in whittington colledge that is end up in rowlands s concerns that once people had learned the tricks they would practice them were echoed elsewhere in the later the cony catchers commonly have a strict rule of silence which according to dekker they broke only in order to train jorny man greene still boasting about the dangerous privileges afforded by his degenerate youth claimed that he knew more about priggers than he could responsibly reveal least i shoulde give to great a light to other to practice such lewd dekker pinched greene s line in his own section on the priggers the secrets of which fit in print to be discovered least laying open the abuse i should teach some how to practice cuthbert cunny catcher encounters farmers who accuse one of their number of trying to cheat them assuming he has learned his tricks from a cony catching pamphlet what neighbor will you play the cony catcher with us no no wee haue read the booke as well as dekker s play with the authorial voice in lanthorne and candle light raises similar doubts about the pamphlet it shimmers with possibilities is it intended for the delight of devils or the edification of london like greene dekker did not commit to one at the expense of the other leaving these two aspects of the text unreconciled and the pamphlet deeply ambivalent doubts about the benefits of this kind of cheap print are enhanced in the later cony catching works by the careful figuration of pamphleteering as catching tricks to their victims is one of the rogues favorite ploys and of course this is precisely what the pamphlets the recurrent motif of an oblique warning to the victim usually by telling him the method of the trick apparently protecting him from it is one of greene s clearest signals to his own victims like the rogues he warns his readers before he snares them in his revelation of the rogues and implicitly the black bookes messenger entitled how ned browne let fall a key indicates how greene does this it starts with a trick in which a dropped key causes a scuffle during which a purse is picked this is the model for ned s subsequent dropping of keys explaining other greene is distracting his readers with tales while he picks their the analogy between pamphleteers and rogues is articulated within the that peevish scholler that thought with his conny catching bookes to have crosbyt our cuthbert cunny catcher asked what if i should prove you a conny catcher maister later as we have seen john taylor developed the analogy between books themselves and rogues in his dekker focused particularly on the role of language and print in deception he was fond of reminding his readers that language paints things in fair colors disguising their true nature a point that greene also made about cant the secret language of the rogues a series of tricks in lanthorne and candle light depend on writing one rogue exploits the current conditions of textual production taking advantage of the order to manipulate systems of literary patronage he persuades
were not more or less frequent than larger dytiscids finally there was no relationship between rarity and community species richness or between tl and community species richness phylogenetic structure in dytiscid communities while nti displayed a normal distribution with a mean of our data show surprising results in how these values of nri differed from those expected by chance over the dytiscid communities had nri values significantly greater than expected by chance whereas no lakes harboured dytiscid communities with nri values significantly lower than expected by chance results for clustering and lakes showing phylogenetic overdispersion because randomly assembled communities are expected to have mean values for nri and or nti not significantly different from zero we find dytiscid communities to be strongly clustered in phylogenetic is significantly different greater than zero the fact that our results with nri are reduces our ability to detect patterns of phylogenetic clustering or overdispersion near the tips of the phylogeny community species richness body size and phylogenetic community structure the phylogenetic structure of dytiscid communities was extremely variable among lakes higher variance in nri and nti values tended to be found in lakes with lower species richness there is no directional change in nri or nti as log transformed community species richness increases thus species rich and species poor lakes contain dytiscids that are more closely related than expected by chance we calculated the mean tl of coexisting dytiscids to be between mm and mm of nri implying that these communities include species that are more likely to show phylogenetic attraction the majority of lake communities contained small dytiscids which resulted in high nri values in these cases with increasing tlcomm the relatedness of coexisting dytiscids decreases in whole tree relatedness and terminal relatedness and nti these patterns indicate that increased phylogenetic attraction in a community is are already removed from nri and nti because null communities are created with the equivalent community species richness because there is an underlying negative relationship between nri and nti and body size a strong positive relationship between pdc and body size was also observed finally we found little value of the fifth distance class being found to be significantly different from zero notably there was no evidence for positive spatial autocorrelation among sites separated by shorter distances similar in body size additionally we found that frequency of occurrence is dissimilar between closely related species indeed we find that closely related species are more divergent in their occurrence frequency than expected by chance whereas smaller dytiscids have been found to be more common in nonphylogenetic analyses we find no relationships between body length and frequency of occurrence especially community species richness and body size thus we find that dytiscids in alberta lakes present an exception to the general relationship between small body size and abundance consistent with other studies on european dytiscids phylogenetic community ecology more often than expected by chance performing an analysis that included real dytiscid assemblages showed that closely related species were found more often than expected by chance these results suggest that habitat use is a highly conserved trait within lake dwelling dytiscids a finding consistent with previous ecological studies that have implicated habitat traits such as water body permanence shading acidity and vegetation composition et al jeffries as important factors influencing the presence of individual species to our knowledge this is the first study of dytiscid community structure to incorporate phylogenetic relationships dytiscid communities were on average composed of related species and related genera implying that the traits that allow dytiscid species to persist in water bodies with a variety of environmental niche conservatism this suggestion of strong habitat filtering further demonstrates the potential importance of dytiscidae as bioindicators of aquatic ecosystems our findings also suggest that competition may not be as critical in structuring dytiscid communities as may be the case considering that environmental filtering has been found to be stronger than competition in plant assemblages this suggests the possibility that the relative effects of environmental filtering and competition vary with trophic level competition may be weaker in aquatic communities than in other communities studied because physiological tolerances to environmental variables may override response to competition for resources or enemy free space alternatively interactions with higher trophic persist in a lake and effective defensive traits for a particular predator may be phylogenetically conserved competition may also be weak in water beetles due to the wide variation in their preferred microhabitats some species are primarily sediment associated some typically cling to vegetation and others swim frequently in open water another possible interpretation is that competition is stronger more dissimilar species than do smaller dytiscids dytiscids are generalist benthic predators that overlap in dietary preferences but resource requirements are predicted to be reduced for smaller species because large dytiscids are concentrated in a few clades rooted one large species is present a potential ecological mechanism however may be that larger dytiscid species prey on smaller dytiscid species and this plays a prevalent role in dytiscid diversity and composition the diversity of smaller dytiscids was observed to increase in the absence of larger species leading to communities of smaller dytiscids that were phylogenetically clustered because of larger competitors in aquatic systems influences the diversity and abundance of smaller counterparts considerations for future studies our understanding of the factors that structure diving beetle communities could be improved in a number of ways first future studies should widen the scope of analysis to a variety of habitats we excluding those in rivers streams creeks ephemeral ponds and marshes species richness of dytiscid assemblages may be lower in permanent lakes than in temporary water bodies and species that are rare in lakes may be common in more ephemeral habitats we could not assess in our analysis whether the presence of high numbers of one species decreased the numerical abundance thus a frequently observed species was found in many lakes across alberta whereas rare species were found at few sites although they may have been numerically abundant within those
compelling depiction of what the gods stand for in relation to humanity but continuity in this respect with the wider tradition of early greek epic ii the odyssey a new divine world it is still widely believed that the divine world of the odyssey is substantially different from that of the thus studies of the odyssey abound with such claims as the nature of the gods has a transformation that is often said to result in a purer conception of this theological difference is in turn frequently presented as being most the sphere of divine justice since it is alleged the gods of the odyssey are more moralistic in their attitude to human even lloyd jones who otherwise stresses the continuity of religious and moral ideas throughout early greek literature endorses the standard view of the odyssey name ly that its theology is in some important ways different from that of the by contrast the foremost aim of this section is to challenge the orthodox view firstly by name ly that its theology is in some important ways different from that of the by contrast the foremost aim of this section is to challenge the orthodox view firstly by showing that for all its characteristic themes and ideas the odyssey does not differ substantially from the iliad in its presentation of the gods or their interest in justice and secondly by complicating the familiar picture of the odyssey as a tale of clear cut crime and punishment through a close zeus s opening speech and by focusing on the of divine rivalry and anger reciprocal justice and the will of zeus this section aims to show the essential continuity of religious attitudes and social values in the homeric for just as scholars continue to underestimate the extent to which the iliad depicts a pattern of norms and punishments so they still exaggerate the moral simplicity of the odyssey present does not mean that the theology of the odyssey is in any way differ ent from that which dominates the iliad both poems explore the problems inherent in divine justice and while the odyssey often foregrounds a straightforward vision of the gods concern for moral it also presents the reality of divine intervention in a manner no less disturbing than the iliad the homeric epics inhabit the same moral and theological world and both ask similar questions of the gods to which their actions are connected to social norms of justice the odyssey a new moral world zeus s opening speech in book of the odyssey is regularly interpreted as constituting a radical shift from the divine attitudes displayed in the this shift is furthermore said to be an ethical one as if zeus s assertion that humans are responsible for their own sufferings represented a moral idea alien to the zeus s speech is certainly programmatic for follows in the work but that it represents an ethical transformation of the is demonstrably false let us first consider zeus s actual words recalling aegisthus death at the hands of orestes zeus addresses the other gods oh how these mortals blame the gods they say their troubles come and yet they too them selves through their own reckless acts have sorrows beyond their destined share as does aegisthus zeus criticizes mortals for failing to recognize that their suffering is compounded by their own outrageous behavior this is certainly a strong condemnation of human folly but it should not be taken to imply that responsibility for human suffering lies with humanity alone or that the gods of the odyssey will be more concerned with human behavior per se than are the gods of the iliad scholars are certainly right to stress the importance of zeus s complaint since reckless behavior and its punishment will be central to the narrative but no less significant for the theology of the poem as a whole is zeus s acknowledgement that much of humanity s suffering is due to the in other words while zeus foregrounds human disregard of divine the makes clear the of the gods as a source of human suffering and on poseidon and and since these are both central aspects of the interaction of gods and mortals in the iliad as well it is misleading to speak of a radical shift in the theodicy of the odyssey divine rivalry and anger those who detect a different theology at work in the odyssey often elide the rule of divine rivalry and anger both as a catalyst of the poem s plot and as a of the gods attitudes to one another and to yet the focus in the second half of the poem on odysseus punishment of the suitors which is uncontested at the divine level does not annul the clash of divine wills that dominates the first half athena takes advantage of poseidon s absence from the divine assembly on olympus in order to raise the issue of odysseus delayed return when poseidon realizes what has been done behind his back he even angrier for athena has in effect exploited his absence in order to undermine the concomitants of his superior status thus she later defends her tardy assistance by saying to odysseus but you see i was unwilling to fight poseidon my father s brother and it is only after securing zeus s approval for odysseus homecoming that athena acts to bring it in short as athena s plans must operate within a divine society whose rivalries and hierarchies produce not only tensions but also a structure of authority it is often claimed that the gods of the odyssey have changed their yet although fewer gods are individualized in the narrative it is clear that they retain their typical characteristics of which the most prominent are their loyalties to human favorites or family and poseidon s persecution of odysseus is motivated by kinship and personal vengeance not by any abstract
on her first voyage to new zealand both her parents also sailed on board the active as well as thomas who settled at oihi alongside the mission and subsequently moved to te puna at about the same time as the kings hannah king s mother hannah hansen remained at oihi after the active left in march and she would have been with her daughter at the birth of thomas holloway king in hannah hansen visited oihi during the following years and her daughter hannah traveled with her to port jackson in it is unlikely that hannah king felt the nostalgia expressed by the later missionary arrivals for their english homeland while she had such close antipodean connections these connections also worked against her and may explain the silences of the time as it provoked the trade in muskets and encouraged prostitution in samuel marsden had accused thomas hansen of seducing the sister of a chief of rangihoua probably wrongly according to the evidence given to the inquiry that was held to investigate the claim of such according to marsden criminal conduct twenty eight year old thomas may have found himself in the pilley some twenty years later and in he returned to port jackson to find a wife there he met and married elizabeth tollis born illegitimately in in to a convict mother and a soldier in the corps thomas and elizabeth hansen returned to the bay of islands to establish a thriving clan of eleven children living initially at oihi and then at te puna from about the missionary establishment in the thomas hansen and no doubt did not like the convict antecedents of his wife elizabeth in july when the cms were still debating the closure of the oihi mission james stack noted in his submission to the cms in england the giving up of rangihoua would most likely rid the island of tommy anson mr king s brother in law an idle fellow who is in a fair way to leave a large family upon the new zealand which he ought is well able to do samuel marsden was just as explicit about his attitude towards hannah king s mother in march writing to the secretary of the cms about his dismissal of the captain of the active the previous year he stated the last time the active went the voyage proved very unfortunate the master who is an aged man and a good sailor behaved very ill after otaheite tahiti with the missionaries belonging to the london the captain took his wife with him in the vessel directly contrary to my written instructions she is a very infamous drunken woman and completely master of her husband to please her as i was informed he stood in to the north cape of zealand so close to land for his wife to trade with the natives that he got the active aground twice her false keel was knocked off and before they got to the society islands she became very leaky and was afterwards obliged to be hove down upon one of the islands the master he gave himself up to drunkenness along with his drunken wife martin compiler of a history of the hansens in new zealand notes that in hannah hansen then aged was convicted of having guns in her possession that belonged to the crown and was sentenced to seven years in prison a sentence she does not appear to have served also evident in the relationship documented between the closely related king and hansen families living only several hundred meters apart at te puna from and prior to that both families living at oihi according to martin the kings were considered superior to the hansens the hansen children were illiterate and not able to attend the mission school at oihi or te puna virtually no mention of hannah king williams chatters about social engagements and drinking tea with other families in the bay noting amongst other events mrs dudley mrs selwyn wife of the bishop and mrs martin wife of judge martin most pleasant company there is mention of the arrival of john king at paihia from time to time on mission business occasionally in the company of one of his sons or daughters but no note of hannah until november hutton visitors to the williams at paihia wanted to visit te puna henry and marianne s sons henry and john joined the party which was led by henry senior on their return henry senior left for kororareka to bring mrs martin on a visit but had to turn back because of bad weather while he was away the young men very merry john came in dressed up in cap and gown and plumped likeness a lady giantess to puzzle his father when he came back with guessing what lady had been here mr cotton very entertaining with his remarks upon tepuna unfortunately williams does not enlighten the reader with details of mr cotton s entertaining remarks upon tepuna but the image of john williams cross dressing in cap and gown provides some insight into forms of entertainment in the closed missionary circle hannah king the butt of mimicry during the birth of her son at oihi was also the object of derision amongst the williams if not other missionary brethren this demonstrates some of the social dynamics of the small christian community in the bay of islands where class played an important role in the emerging classless new zealand society conclusion this case study of the role of a missionary wife in early nineteenth century time and the social position hannah king was relegated to according to her background on the remote shores of the bay of islands the ideology of the cult of true womanhood was played out the role of material culture in the replication of this ideology is demonstrated and the efforts made to apply this tomaori it is ironic that clothing in particular cap and gown used to signify identity respectability and the
is not a political being whatever else he may be men in the plural that is men in so far as they live and move and act in this world can experience meaningfulness only because they can talk with and make sense to each other and to that eichmann does not at all escape the cliched language of nazi bureaucracy however means that he falls short of the specifically political de mands of the vita activa he remains passive as prosecutor sarcastically charges with the limited meaning he does find in social life coming from the cliches offered him by both petty bourgeois life and nazi national ideology this language is at times so ordinary as in eichmann s stilted invocation of funeral oratory at his own execution that it becomes a source of the book s most bitter satire of the human condition for it is his passivity as a human actor and not his individual motivation and conscious responsibility that makes empirical crime seems fully separate from rational intention in addition to her pessimistic anthropology of the empirical moral mind arendt s book is also shaped by her distinct and more historical reflection on what she calls the challenge of the unprecedented this challenge phrased as it is in the terminology of criminal law refers not only to the monstrous injustice of nazi actions but also ironically to the positive challenge to the israeli set a precedent that would describe a supranational crime subject to an international jurisdiction a precedent that would serve decisively to criminalize the newly emerged technologically enabled barbarism of genocide to do this either the israeli state would have had to insist that eichmann now in its hands be tried by an inter national tribunal capable of judging a supranational crime or the judges themselves would have had to become de facto legislators and because every custom has its origin in some single act according to nuremberg justice robert jackson would themselves have had to institute customs that would develop into future international law eichmann s captors fail in this pathbreaking respect choosing to prosecute eichmann on the same basis as the nationally based nuremberg successor trials in poland russia czechoslovakia and elsewhere rather than the charges of a crime against humanity the israeli prosecution focuses on what it considers its national jurisdiction and elaborates primarily eichmann s crimes against the jewish people the new and specific crime of genocide is thus left largely undefined by the eichmann trial and hence uncriminalized israel s decision to focus on national jurisdiction according to arendt was motivated as much by a scrupulous concern to remain as it was by a strictly statist agenda of what in the foreign policy rhetoric of today we call nation building the prosecution in spite of insistent objections by the court thus collected procedurally irrelevant but morally har rowing testimony on the final solution that it then redeemed in the elaboration of one of israel s founding myths the jewish ability to deliver retribution on the authority not just of law but of raison d etat thus arises a central philosophical arendt does not address as such but that her discussion of the trial put on the agenda and whose relevance international police actions of today renew by yoking the precedents of the nuremberg successor trials to the creation of a new ethnic state israel opted clearly for a concept of law based on state enforceability that is on the explicit threat of national violence in the sense developed by schmitt and echoed in the leftist language of walter law in this draws its force neither from rational universal norms nor common law precedent but from ethnic polemos a solidaristic conception of self versus other that schmitt saw as underlying the concept of the political and the legal notions of sovereignty derivative from it again the legal terms involved here were not radical the court having adopted them because of clear precedents but the situation determined by both the new crime and the newly emergent state prosecuting it lent the trial the implication of the court s claim to represent all wronged jews as diasporaic subjects awaiting justice in the symbolic return of jurisdiction to israel meant generally that ethnic minorities within nation states could only ultimately have their security guaranteed by a state that could claim their interests as its own and thus respond to any infraction against them with traditional jus ad bellum the state here represents the possibility of law as coterminous of ethnic military one way to make this implication of the eichmann case clear would be to imagine how questions of jurisdiction would have been different had a binational palestine been established in on the territory of the former british mandate for arendt in any case the national emphasis on state sovereignty meant that the eichmann trial never even sought either on the basis of natural law or the positive law of some international to set a precedent for the crime of genocide these two empirical focuses of arendt s report moral psychological and juridical institutional come together in the unresolved conceptual tension between the primacy of justice and that of politics both of which might serve as the underlying term for exploring the psychological and juridical questions of the trial her admiration for re served and unworldly justice is clearly articulated in the first chapter of justice the words beth hamishpath are the words that open both the book and the proceedings against eichmann and for that matter are the first clear words of sivan s film after an evocative babble of languages stating the charges against eichmann with this verbal introduction of both justice and its concrete institutional setting arendt sets the stage of her book as a contest between the state of israel represented by the attorney general gideon hausner in a provocative echo of the accused does his best his very best to obey his master and justice itself represented by judge
financial hurdles to be overcome by innovating firms in an industry where turnaround time can extend well beyond years the effect of spending may be seen primarily on the patent in this industry is better measured by research based than by production based innovation in addition these data should not be interpreted to mean that intensity has adverse effects on product or process introduction rather that regulatory procedures and financial constraints may slow the recognition of commercial output associated with efforts table presents a analysis of the relationship between the results indicate that high levels of intensity are associated with high levels of domestic patent applications international patent applications domestic patent approvals and international patent approvals for example over one third of all high one fourth of high intensity firms report high levels of international patent approvals in contrast only to percent of low intensity firms report high levels of research based innovation a large number of low intensity firms report high levels of production based innovation for example percent of low intensity firms report high levels of and percent report high levels of redesigned processes table shows that the effects of spending maybe be seen primarily on the patent protection of innovations that have not yet been brought to market if the relative intensity of just those firms reporting high levels of both research based intensity firms report the highest levels of research based innovation while the highest levels of production based innovation are reported by firms with low intensity this divides firms into two distinct categories of high level innovators those focused on spending and research based innovation and those focused less on spending and more on production based table shows the magnitude of the difference between firms focusing on the earlier stages of innovation and the later stages of innovation in biotechnology innovation and firm performance while positive relationships can be identified between firms reporting high levels of new product and process introductions also reported growth in firm performance measures table shows the relationships between the level of new product and process introduction and firm performance measures of product sales export revenues employment and pre tax profit a large percentage of firms reporting employment and pretax profit it should be noted that many firms reporting low levels of new products and processes did report business performance growth however the percentage of high high firms was much larger for example and percent of firms reporting low levels of new product and process introductions report growth in sales exports of new product and process introductions report growth in those performance measures table reinforces the previous finding that firms earning revenues from product sales may be focused on later stage innovations in production marketing and distribution more than on earlier stage innovations in basic research and product development and that a significant time lag may exist between innovation performance while tables and show that high intensity firms report the highest levels of research based innovation and low intensity firms report the highest levels of production based innovation different factors are reported by firms in the two groups as important to success in innovation performance tables and present analyses of the relationships between intensity and factors of just those firms reporting high levels of innovation these analyses should help managers discover or recognize the firm level strategies that successful innovators in the industry are employing in each stage of the innovation process sample firms were asked to rank the relative importance of factors influencing their innovation performance on a scale of one to five with one minor importance to innovation or performance three indicating that the factor has an important influence on innovation or performance four indicating that the factor has a very important influence on innovation or performance and five indicating that the factor has a critically important influence on innovation or performance the factors are categorized as either research based or production based not important and factors receiving rankings of three through five are considered important for cross tab analysis tables and show that certain research based factors were significantly more important to high rather than low intensity firms while certain production based factors were significantly more important to low rather than high intensity capability their access to university research their ability to enter into collaborations with universities firms in related industries and with other biotechnology companies the ability to license their technology access to venture capital government support for internal research and government support for technical training of personnel as factors influencing innovation performance these it is evident from table that the factors that are significantly more important to high intensity firms are those associated with research based innovation a firm s internal research capability is critical to basic research and product development in the early stages of innovation that is patent based innovation similarly high intensity firms place significantly higher levels of other biotech firms and firms in related industries the connection of these factors is logical firms that devote a significant amount of resources to research and product development while focusing on their internal research capability would utilize university ties and collaborations with universities and other firms in order to advance their research based innovation access and access to physical resources albeit this would make this factor partially dependent on location firms and universities often share human and physical resources as well as technology moreover although human resources and certain types of technology are portable or easily transferable high technology professionals are the most valuable of these resources the importance to university other biotech firm and other industrial firm collaboration than low intensity firms other factors that are significantly more important to high intensity firms are related to the support or funding of research programs high intensity firms report that the ability to license their technology and access to venture capital were critically important to their in addition government support which can be understood as funding for research and technical training is critically important to high intensity firms in
experimental investigations so far we have shown that even though scope interactions between negation and quantified impossible for us to draw any firm conclusions conceivably this disagreement in judgments was caused by the method used to elicit judgments from the native speakers that is insufficient discourse context may have limited the availability of possible readings for some speakers to avoid this problem we obtained scope judgments from speakers of korean using the truth value judgment task because this method reduces the role of performance factors speakers intuitions and holds discourse context constant experimentation using this method should provide data that accurately reflect the participants grammars the tvjt involves two experimenters one experimenter acts out short scenarios in front of the participant using small toys and props the other experimenter plays the role of a puppet who watches the scenario alongside the participant at the end of the story a statement about what he thinks happened in the story the participant s task is to determine whether the puppet told the truth or not for instance to test how speakers of english would interpret a negative sentence with a quantified subject such as every horse did nt jump over the fence an experimenter enacts a scenario in which two toy horses jump over a toy fence but a third toy horse does not in this situation every horse did nt jump over the fence is true on the negation takes scope over the subject qp but false if the subject qp is interpreted outside the scope of negation a detailed context for this scenario is given in and a screen shot of the resulting scenario is shown in figure example context one day three horses were playing in the field and they decided to jump over some to try jumping over the fence two of them were very excited about jumping over the fence but the third was nt sure whether he could the first one jumped over the fence hey that was fun he said you try it then the second horse also jumped over the fence the third one came up to fence and considered jumping but he said that he had hurt his foot the day before and so decided not to jump mickey who is asked to describe what happened then makes the following statement puppet statement hmm that was an interesting story about horses playing in the field i can tell you something about the story every horse did nt jump over the fence am i right the participant s task is to determine whether mickey s statement is true or false if a participant judges the statement to be true then we can conclude that the participant s grammar makes reading on which negation takes scope over the quantified np if a participant judges the statement to be false then we can conclude that the participant s grammar makes only the narrow scope reading of negation available and does not generate the other reading an important part of the reasoning behind this method is that participants will always assent when the experimenter says at least one thing that is true in other words the method relies on listeners the benefit of the doubt hence if anything that the speaker says is true then participants respond by saying that the speaker did in fact speak truthfully thus when we present a statement that is true on one reading but false on another and the participant rejects the statement as false we conclude that the other reading is not available the tvjt method provides rich discourse contexts eliminating the role of performance factors and controlling for discourse factors in participants responses the method has been shown to work in several languages and to work both with adults and with children as young as our experiments were designed for three purposes to determine experimentally what the facts are concerning adult korean speakers scope judgments on sentences containing negation and quantified argument nps to korean has raising and to test predictions regarding children s grammar made on the basis of the data we obtained from adults to pursue these goals we conducted two experiments one with adults and the other with year olds since the puppet s statements on critical trials are potentially ambiguous we chose to treat the scope condition as a between participants factor instead of a within participants factor in order to avoid potential contaminating effects two possible readings that is once participants become aware of one of the possible interpretations for these statements they may later find it difficult to assign a similar statement a different interpretation in other words the initial interpretation that participants assign to statements containing a qp and negation may influence the way they interpret subsequent statements containing the same elements materials we constructed two versions of each scenario one version the neg reading and the other version testing the neg reading there were four different types of test sentence for each reading subject qp and long negation as in subject qp and short negation as in object qp and long negation as in and object qp and short negation as in in the scenario that tests the neg reading on the basis of and three horses are playing together two horses jump over the fence but the third one is nt at the end of the story mickey mouse says in korean i know what happened and states either or depending on what condition is being tested in the scenario that tests the neg reading none of the horses jump over the fence mickey mouse then describes the situation using either or in the scenario that tests the neg reading on the basis of and cookie monster then describes the situation using or depending on the condition in the scenario that tests the neg reading cookie monster eats none of the cookies and then mickey mouse describes the situation using or each participant was given four test trials the statements
a polarization of attribute values of the specialized options a and in this context compensatory inferences can be represented as having a threefold effect first the all in one option is likely to be devalued such that the perceived performance of the attributes differentiating an all in one option will decrease in and in fig in addition to discounting the performance of the all inone option consumers might also draw inferences about the specialized options a and such that the perceived performance of the attributes of a specialized option will become more polarized in the presence of an all in one option in particular the perceived performance of the differentiating denoted by and in fig at the same time consumers might also discount the performance of specialized options a and on their secondary attributes in the presence of an all in one option leading to a downshift in their perceived performance an important assumption of the zero sum heuristic is that alternatives is constant and all attribute values are readily available this assumption raises the question of how the presence of attributes on which options performance is not readily observable influences compensatory reasoning generally speaking there are two possibilities first consumers might infer that all options have equal values on the unobservable zero sum heuristic the second possibility is that consumers infer that options vary in their performance on the unobservable attribute in this case the strength of the zero sum heuristic is likely to be a function of the pattern of these inferences it should be stronger when the inferred values are consistent with the readily available dispersion of attribute values and should be weaker values of the readily available attributes to illustrate consider the earlier scenario involving three shaving creams one emphasizing the moisturizing effect the second promoting skin protection effectiveness and the third claiming to be effective for both skin moisturizing and skin protection now imagine that an additional attribute these options in this context it can be argued that the options performance on the two differentiating attributes is likely to be a function of their perceived performance on the attribute on which the options performance is unobservable in particular consumers who perceive the all in one option to be inferior on the unobservable attribute perceive option to dominate the others on the unobservable attribute overall this research posits that when evaluating choice sets comprising both all in one and specialized alternatives consumers are likely to adopt a zero sum heuristic which equates the overall attractiveness of choice alternatives and evaluates the available information in a compensatory fashion perceived performance of the all in one option and compensatory polarization which enhances the perceived performance of the specialized option on the differentiating attribute while detracting from its performance on the secondary attribute it is further proposed that the strength of the compensatory inferences across the attributes differentiating choice alternatives is a function of the presence of thus in the presence of a salient attribute on which options values are unobservable compensatory inferences are predicted to be less pronounced than in the case when options values on all salient attributes are readily observable furthermore when consumers are explicitly asked to make inferences about options performance on unobservable attributes compensatory effects are predicted these predictions are tested in the following experiment experiment the goal of this experiment was to empirically examine how attribute performance of an all in one option is influenced by the presence of specialized options and vice versa the specifics of the experimental stimuli and research design are presented in more detail in the following sections making and were informed that the choice task involved making hypothetical purchase decisions five product categories were used as stimuli laundry detergent toothpaste shaving cream cold relief medicine and vitamin supplements similar categories have been successfully used in prior research choice sets consisted of either two or three options two attributes as shown in the appendix table for all product categories options a and were described by a single attribute and option was described by a combination of features describing options a and choice alternatives were organized into four scenarios a and each respondent was given five choice problems one per product category for each problem respondents were shown the alternatives and were asked to rate their attribute performance to illustrate in the toothpaste category respondents were first asked to rate the performance of the options in the set on the first attribute all ratings were collected using a nine point scale following the rating task respondents were asked to make two choices conditional on one of the attributes having primary importance to illustrate respondents were first you choose if your primary concern is cavity protection and then to make a choice assuming that teeth whitening was the more important attribute in addition to varying the composition of the choice set this experiment also manipulated the salience of options pricing for that purpose prior to evaluating the options attribute performance some of the respondents were asked a particular option was more expensive than the others or that all options were equally priced the entire procedure took minutes on average at the end of the experiment respondents were debriefed and paid for participating results overview the performance of each option on both attributes which yielded six attribute specific ratings for each trinary set abc and four attribute specific ratings for each of the binary sets ab ac and bc thus the total number of attribute ratings was respondents in each of the four scenarios were further nonprice attributes others were given the attribute rating task without being asked to compare the options on price based on a random assignment there were respondents in the first condition and in the second of the responses indicated that the all in one option was likely to be priced higher than the other option while the remaining to be higher priced or that all options were likely to be at price parity this assignment of respondents
used with nurses and medical professionals for basic life support training since the the popularity and positive learning outcomes noted from the use of such an education tool stimulated through to technologically advanced medium to high fidelity human patient simulators part task trainers refers to modelled segments of the body eg the pelvis or knee designed to teach specific skills such as intra articular injection scopic surgical procedures or pelvic examinations medium to high fidelity human patient simulators are full body the high fidelity mannequin is linked to a computer system that drives physical changes in the mannequin such as respiratory rate and opening of eyes as well as physiological responses displayed on the patient monitor such as heart rate blood pressure and oxygenation this technology allows medical educators to simulate patient cases and provide students with the opportunity simulation education into medical curricula has been shown to facilitate the acquisition of technical skills such as resuscitation and invasive procedures as well as development of higher level processes such as cognitive analysis clinical decision making self efficacy and communication skills in medical in more recent years the exponential increase in interest in simulation has not been confined to the medical profession there are increasing numbers of studies that report positively on the potential for simulation to prepare nursing and allied health students with high level cognitive psychomotor and procedural skills to meet the demands of increasingly complex patient presentations and health care system those responsible for education are finding that traditional educational models involving extensive clinical time are not sustainable and health organizations professions council of australia yet there are significant healthcare workforce recruitment and retention issues driving an increase in the number of students requiring training in health professional fields the physiotherapy profession is not immune to these challenges and has stated widely that there is a clinical education crisis the burgeoning number of the profession that the constrained health care sector cannot continue to deliver an appropriate level of experience to provide safe and effective graduates positive clinical exposure contributes to the development of a sound knowledge base improved professional socialization enhanced clinical decision making skills and effective clinician client relationships there is the potential for greater opportunities in allows educators to create an environment for repeated practice of both skills and decision making with support and guidance where the learner is the complete focus of attention in the clinical setting the patient must remain the focus at all times with the potential result a limited learning experience for students this is particularly evident in areas where education is occurring with the support of specifically in the emergency department and critical care unit the tendency of clinicians supervising students in these areas is to limit the amount of practice students undertake in order to limit the potential for serious adverse events simulation would allow student experience and learning whilst maintaining safety and reducing the potential for adverse events as practice does not occur on beginning practitioners and high fidelity simulation may help to achieve this requirement for all students another advantage of simulation is that patient scenarios can be produced on demand giving students guaranteed exposure to a wide variety of clinical situations this overcomes some of the limitations of the clinical setting where training is dependant on which patient cases literally students reach competency on the simulator students can then proceed to establish competency on real patients in the clinical environment potentially reducing the number of hands on clinical hours required to achieve competency in light of the current clinical education challenges faced by the profession and educational institutes and given now time to consider embracing and evaluating some of the new technology in the area of cardiorespiratory training highly realistic acute care environments can be created using the medium high fidelity human patient simulators developed for medical education these simulators can be intubated ventilated have a multitude of invasive lines inserted and are ideally suited options for physiotherapy training are currently limited to a small number of part task trainers these devices could be coupled with standardized patients to create a high fidelity environment whereby the student can practice not only the skill associated with the part task trainer but also the interview the clinical needed to become a competent clinician it is very likely that more technology will be developed as the need for devices relevant to physiotherapy practice becomes apparent there is potential to create mannequins that mimic spasticity allow palpation of joints and testing of joint movement and ligamentous stability and eventually cervical thoracic or lumbar manipulation simulation has been found to enhance the learning experience in professional development courses there is also enormous potential for simulation training to facilitate the process of extended scope and physiotherapy consultancy part task trainers and full body mannequins are already available to teach techniques such as intra articular injection bronchoscopy and blood sampling practice encompass these techniques in the future limitations to high fidelity simulation the first potential limitation is that the mannequin used in simulation can never replace a human being and the participant is essentially learning in an artificial environment transfer of skill from the simulated environment to the clinical setting cannot yet within physiotherapy at present it is recommended that to facilitate learning and transfer of skills it is necessary to enhance the realism of the scenario with physical props and psychosocial interactions and to allow a reflective group debrief at the conclusion of the simulation video replay of the scenario may also facilitate learning giving limitation is human behavior during the simulation learners know that they are practising on a simulator and this can lead to behavioral changes that would otherwise not occur in the clinical setting some learners become hypervigilant that is they anticipate an adverse response and are overly cautious with their actions a comprehensive orientation to the simulation environment genuine team interactions plausible social cues such as pagers and phone calls and verbally cuing the students to any additional plausible
conductor group when conducting the same pre recorded western art music excerpt likewise the black conductor group was rated higher than the white conductor group when conducting the same pre recorded spiritual music excerpt these results indicate that evaluators may have stereotyped the western art excerpt as a white song and the spiritual excerpt as a black song and thus rated the ensemble performances higher for those conductors who stereotypically fit the same schemata similar results have been found in the area of social psychology for example there is considerable evidence that stereotypical trait information can be automatically activated when people are exposed merely to of social groups such as white and black and terms related to the stereotype of those social groups such as blacks and athletic or slavery because automatic responses involve rapid spontaneous activation of some set of associations and do not require conscious effort or attention researchers believe stereotype activations affect subsequent ratings of different social groups therefore evaluators in this study may have automatically associated stereotypical trait information by inferring labels through the visual and aural cues of the conductors and music styles thus resulting in differences between the ensemble ratings for the different conductors when theoretically there should have been none conductors play a very important role within music education performance is a major component of the music vanweelden mcgee the influence of music style and conductor race education curriculum in the usa and conductors can be found within general music classrooms as well as performance ensembles the type of conducting and performing merely who was to conduct elementary children at a school function that included both western art and spiritual music would be evaluated differently than a secondary or collegiate music teacher working primarily within an ensemble setting under similar conditions because the additional label of conductor often accompanies a music educator when they teach ensembles at the secondary and collegiate level future research may want to explore this topic to determine if labels within our profession play a role in evaluations of performance additionally many secondary music educators involve their ensembles in contest like festivals that are evaluated by other music teachers while in many instances some formal assessment training is involved to become an adjudicator evaluator at such events little is known as to whether stereotypes such as those found within this study are discussed within this training investigation of this topic would seem to be very ultimately the students within the ensembles could be penalized or rewarded for what their conductor looks like in relation to the music styles they perform it was also interesting to find that conductor race combined with music style resulted in higher ratings of performance by evaluators since both styles of music chosen for this study have been a part of the curriculum within the usa for decades the question of whether this is strictly a cultural phenomenon within country or if similar results would be found in other parts of the world has yet to be examined additionally because choral music is global and there has been an increase of world music within the curriculum in the usa further investigation could explore whether stereotypes of what a conductor should look like influence evaluations of ensemble when repertoire indicative of a particular culture is performed outside the usa race of the evaluator was not a significant factor in evaluations of ensemble performance both black and white evaluators rated the white conductor group s ensemble performance higher when conducting the western art excerpt and the black conductor group higher when conducting the spiritual excerpt these results differ from previous research in which both black and white students preferred race performers when seen and heard and black students gave higher ratings to performers they perceived were of the same race as themselves a possible explanation for the difference could be the age of the evaluators in the current study compared to those in previous research undergraduate college music majors were the target subject age for the current study whereas middle school age students were the subjects for perhaps maturity of the evaluator diminished evaluator partiality for conductors of the same race as themselves though not likely it is possible that the relative lack of expertise on the part of the evaluators in the current study as compared to in service music educators or professional musicians contributed to their race based decisions making them more vulnerable to non musical bases for judgment however such a theory would require focused study in future research to determine its actual influence a third possibility could be that racially stereotyped associations of certain music styles conducted by certain conductors are generally accepted by persons despite their race conductors regardless of race may have the skills to conduct each type of music equally effectively yet may be perceived differently through their ensembles performances higher eye contact facial expression and posture ratings were given to the white conductor group than the black conductor group when conducting the western art excerpt similarly the black conductor group was rated higher than the white perceptions of conducting effectiveness the results of this study also indicate these body expressions to be important in perceptions of conducting effectiveness however since all conductors exhibited high levels of each expression with average reliability of body expressions results indicate that evaluators perceived that certain levels of effectiveness within these expressions were dependent upon which conductor and style of music they were seeing and hearing at the time thus it appears that as with the ratings for the ensemble performances evaluators may have stereotyped the western art excerpt as a white song and the spiritual excerpt as a black song and rated the body expressions higher for those conductors who stereotypically fit the same schemata and while these body expressions may be improved through systematic practice results of this study imply that practice alone may not be the only factor needed to project effectiveness these results could also present an interesting dilemma for
of these instance sets are summarized the makespan minimizing branch and bound algorithm of demeulemeester and herroelen heuristic baseline schedules for the and instance sets have been obtained by the combined crossover algorithm by debels and vanhoucke all computational results have been obtained on a personal computer equipped with an intel pentium iv the algorithm by artigues chaining and the mabo procedure and the lower bounds have been coded in the iterative sampling procedures and optimize for the flexibility metric for each instance resource flow networks are generated by the heuristic chaining operators and the one with the highest flexibility is withheld problems minea maxpf and mined are solved using the callable libraries of ilog s cplex for every problem instance the mip solver was given a maximum computation time per problem if necessary we aborted after seconds with the current best solution the weights wj for each nondummy activity are drawn from a discrete triangular distribution with this distribution results in a higher occurrence probability for low weights and in an average weight wavg the weight wn of the dummy end activity denotes project due date and is fixed at wavg for an extensive evaluation of the impact of the activity weights we refer to van de vonder et al and van de vonder demeulemeester herroelen and leus for each activity the actual simulated realized activity duration is drawn from a right skewed beta distribution with parameters and and an expected times and times the expected activity duration respectively for each instance and procedure simulation runs have been made for the evaluation of the stability objective the results obtained on the instance set are presented in table the second column with the header stability lists the average stability cost problem instances of the psplib because neither artigues et al nor policella et al take into account the activity weights wj in making the resource allocation decisions we also show in the third column the average stability cost results obtained with all activity weights wj set to that is the fifth column shows the number of instances that only relevant for the integer programming heuristics the basic chaining procedure shows the worst performance for both stability measures this is according to expectations because the procedure allocates resources to activities in a completely random fashion one thing that draws our attention is the fact that the procedure by artigues et al which only aims at producing a feasible resource flow network without any stability objective outperforms well as the ishflex procedure the reason for this lies in the fact that the procedure by artigues will always consider activities that supply resources to a given activity in the same order hence the resource suppliers for a certain activity are more likely to be similar for different resource types by contrast the basic chaining and ishflex procedures select the first resource supplier for a given activity and resource type general will lead when multiple resource types are considered to more resource dependencies between activities the flex procedure is the only procedure developed by policella that outperforms the procedure by artigues for exactly that reason the randomness is reduced by applying a policy where predecessors are preferred as resource suppliers for a given activity also predecessors in the original project network incur no extra stability cost on the stability objective of the heuristics developed in this article mined performs the best on this instance set followed by mabo and maxpf note that the results of mined for the unweighted stability objective are pretty close to the lower bound indicating that the resulting resource flow network is a very good solution with respect to the unweighted stability objective finally the minea heuristic does not perform very well when compared to mined maxpf and mabo but it still but it still yields better results than the procedures developed by artigues and policella the reason for this moderate performance of the minea heuristic can be found in the coarse approximation of the stability objective and in the fact that the heuristic is unable to make an informed choice between two resource flow networks with an equal number of extra arcs as for computation times we can see that the ip heuristics have an average almost all problems could be solved to optimality within the given time limit finally we note that the mabo procedure obtains results on the stability objective that are slightly better than the maxpf heuristic while its computation time is on average times shorter to determine whether these conclusions also hold for larger problem instances let us consider table presenting the results on the problems of the is not the lower bound presented in the previous section but a weaker version of it because the number of combinations of subsets jk can grow very large we limit the number of stability cost increasing activities in such manner that no more than subset combinations have to be evaluated of course this seriously reduces the tightness of the lower bound we notice that none of policella s heuristics outperform the procedure by this can be attributed to the fact that policella s algorithms sometimes make very different resource allocation decisions between the different resource types when looking at the computation times we can see that the ip heuristics need much more time than on the instance set the average computation time for these heuristics is now about seconds per problem and the number of problems we were able to solve to optimality drops to less than half of the performance of the ip heuristics degrades and ourmabo procedure now obtains results which are very comparable to those of our best ip heuristic mined however if we provide the mined model with the output of the mabo procedure as a starting solution the results reported for the weighted stability can be improved from to while the unweighted stability can be reduced from to furthermore the average computation time we can apply the mined model as a kind of
pointed in section fitting the time horizon and minimizing the routing costs may be opposed objectives in the general case it is unlikely that both can be simultaneously attained on one hand if high overtime values are admitted solutions with smaller values are admitted solutions with smaller cost may be found on the other hand if the admitted overtime is small some customers may have to be relocated in order to shorten some of the longest routes but increasing the total cost adaptive memory programming for the vehicle routing problem with multiple trips which each vehicle may perform several routes in the same planning period in this paper an adaptive memory algorithm to solve this problem is proposed computational experience is reported over a set of benchmark problem instances introduction many variations have been subject of research during the last four decades some well studied characteristics include the existence of demands time windows and heterogeneous vehicles however some aspects that arise in real applications have not received much attention in the operations research literature for instance it usually assumed that each vehicle may perform at most one route in the same planning period and in many cases the number of available vehicles is supposed to be unlimited in many practical applications this assumptions are unrealistic when the vehicle capacity to be unlimited in many practical applications this assumptions are unrealistic when the vehicle capacity is small or when the planning period is large performing more than one route per vehicle may be the only practical solution in urban areas where travel times are rather small it is often the case that after performing short tours vehicles are reloaded and used again the vehicle routing problem with multiple trips overcomes the mentioned limitations the classic vrp constraints solving the vrpmt not only implies the design of a set of routes but the assignment of those routes to the available vehicles this makes the vrpmt a very practical problem specially at an operational level in which daily driver schedules must be designed for a fixed vehicle fleet in this paper we describe a heuristic to solve the vrpmt which is based on the adaptive memory procedure proposed by rochat and taillard a definition of the vrpmt is given in section section as well as a literature review the proposed algorithm is described in section computational behavior of the algorithm is reported and analyzed in section while conclusions and future work are considered in section the routing costs given by taillard et al are in all cases the smallest however the total overtime values obtained by our algorithm are lower this is not surprising since taillard et al assign routes to while our amp modifies the assignment at every iteration while taillard et al obtain low cost routes that are hard to pack in working days our amp produces solutions with slightly higher costs but which are dramatically better in terms of feasibility overall in terms of pc values solutions obtained by the amp algorithm are slightly outperformed by taillard et al and brandao and mercer when however the good compromise between infeasibility and cost obtained by the amp is captured when using higher values of cost obtained by the amp is captured when using higher values of table provides information about running times in seconds for each base problem the average running time is given under the amp column the last three columns give the average running times reported by taillard et al brandao and mercer and petch and salhi respectively mhz respectively on average the amp ran and times faster than the algorithms by taillard et al brandao and mercer and petch and salhi respectively however a fair comparison of the approaches in terms of running times is extremely difficult to attain given the big difference between the amp running environment and the others problem with multiple trips an important extension of the classic vrp the algorithm was ran over a set of benchmark problems and the solutions obtained were compared with those reported for three previously proposed algorithms our algorithm obtained more feasible solutions than the previous approaches further analysis shows that a good compromise between routing cost and overtime violation is achieved for highly constrained instances the proposed algorithm can be extended to solve more realistic problems for instance minor changes extended to solve more realistic problems for instance minor changes in the way that routes are assigned to vehicles may allow to handle heterogeneous fleet problems it must be noticed however that incorporating time windows is a harder problem since the assignment of routes to vehicles cannot be solved via a bin packing problem alternatives aimed at achieving diversification should be tested regarding the population management it would be interesting to implement a mechanism to favor the diversity of the routes stored in the adaptive to favor the diversity of the routes stored in the adaptive memory because it may help to avoid premature converge finally it would be useful to design an algorithm which efficiently solved the model presented in section over a restricted set of routes such an algorithm could be used in a final post optimization step of the amp as it is done in petal algorithms the vrp with multiple trips is the set of arcs if then it is possible to travel from to incurring in a cost and a travel time node represents a depot where a fleet of identical vehicles is based each vehicle has a limited capacity the nodes in represent customers each one having a demand qi finally there exists a time horizon denoted by which establishes the duration of a working day it is assumed that qi and are nonnegative integers vrpmt calls for the determination of a set of routes and an assignment of each route to one vehicle which minimizes the total routing costs and satisfies the following conditions each route starts and ends at the depot each customer is visited by exactly one route the
thayer more than a century thayer s approach to constitutional review is quite similar to the standard of review that prevails today in administrative law under chevron just as chevron instructs courts to overrule agency interpretations that violate clear statutory instructions but to defer to reasonable interpretations of ambiguous statutes so to strike down clearly unconstitutional statutes but to defer to those that are through a formal but deferential rule of constitutional review thayer sought to check judicial power over the political branches i do not mean to weigh in on the specific question of how scholars should incorporate formal constraints into contemporary minimalist but if the comparison to administrative law cannot give constitutional scholars a specific roadmap for blending formal constraints and judicial flexibility it strongly suggests that they should alter their current course and pursue this path just as in administrative law and statutory interpretation the best course in constitutional law is a moderate one that relies on judicial flexibility and parallel problems that scholars confront in statutory interpretation administrative law and constitutional theory one would expect to find parallel solutions as well yet when we examine these three sets of literature we find vastly different rhetoric scholars of statutory interpretation use formal rules to solve principal agent problems constitutional theorists employ discretionary of a hybrid between the two this article has criticized the one sided approaches embraced by formalists in statutory interpretation and minimalists in constitutional theory embracing instead the more balanced approach found in adminis trative law although solutions must be tailored to each context any coherent response to the counter majoritarian difficulty in any of these three fields must address both principal agent and agent agent relationships and must incorporate both formal judicial flexibility this article suggests that statutory and constitutional scholars have been too narrow in their focus scholars in both fields should broaden their conception of the problem of judicial power and consider a wider range of potential solutions is appropriate for entrepreneurial firms these firms are characterized by a dependence on an owner manager who is essential to the firm and must be given incentive through an ownership stake to maximize the value of the project in a relationship lending environment the banks that fund entrepreneurs cannot capture the gains from providing the entrepreneur with this stake and this leaves the entrepreneur emerging from bankruptcy with a larger debt burden than is socially efficient in this setting a fresh start bankruptcy policy provides greater debt relief than the bank would approve voluntarily and this generates greater social surplus the results suggest the value of separate procedures for small business bankruptcies that allow some mandatory debt relief to preserve ex post incentives introduction a key principle underlying corporate bankruptcy scholarship is that contractually in practice this principle is embodied in the absolute priority rule which frames the bargaining process in chapter apr gives senior creditors the right to insist on full repayment before junior creditors and equity holders can retain value prior theoretical research on optimal bankruptcy laws has identified several ex ante benefits arising from the creditor protection apr provides including greater access to credit for these reasons scholars have suggested reform proposals that would result in strict adherence to priority in this article suggests that existing analysis of corporate bankruptcy is incomplete in that it leaves out a cost of apr that is particularly relevant for owner managed preserving the value of creditors claims may also weaken the prospects of a reorganized firm by reducing an owner manager s incentive to succeed after bankruptcy while this postbankruptcy incentive effect of debt is not often recognized in business bankruptcy contexts it figures prominently in the justification for the fresh start emphasis in personal bankruptcy law which allows debtors to obtain relief from debt despite this motivation for bankruptcy law in the well known local loan hunt case us the bankruptcy law gives to the honest but unfortunate debtor a new opportunity in life and a clear field for future effort unhampered by the pressure and discouragement of preexisting debt when such incentives are important a natural trade off exists between the postbankruptcy benefits and the prebankruptcy costs of debt relief which has not yet been analyzed formally in this article i consider the effects of bankruptcy laws in an environment that is specific to entrepreneurial firms these firms are defined by an ongoing dependence on a liquidity constrained owner manager whose effort is essential to the firm s value the entrepreneur s effort choice in turn depends on his her stake in the firm s future output their lenders i find that entrepreneurial firms may be ill suited for a bankruptcy law that contains apr while lenders might provide some debt relief voluntarily the model suggests that bankruptcy bargaining backed by apr produces less debt relief than is socially efficient instead the results of the model confirm the benefits of a policy that provides entrepreneurs with a fresh start defined as a lower level of debt than banks would voluntarily accept in bankruptcy negotiations moreover entrepreneurs and banks would not reach this outcome through private contracting alone this implies that the law must be mandatory to be effective i consider a three period principal agent model in which bankruptcy becomes a factor in the second period if the firm s project fails initially at ante competitive banking sector in contrast to the standard competitive model normally assumed in the bankruptcy literature however the bank chosen at time zero will acquire private information about the entrepreneur s quality due to its ongoing relationship as in sharpe and rajan this informational advantage will give the relationship lender market power over the course of the lending relationship the importance of relationships considerable empirical support will have important implications for bankruptcy law design although a relationship bank may be willing to offer a contract that includes a fresh start for the entrepreneur as of period it cannot commit to avoid exploiting its interim market power by denying the fresh
evolutionary arguments make expected utility theory the default case bentley objects that in the beliefs preferences and constraints model the assumption that human decisions have an optimal value neglects how many behaviors are highly culturally dependent and individually variable this is not correct in the target article i show existence of a utility function that represents the agent s choices of course this utility function will be culturally dependent and individually variable continuing in the same vein bentley asserts that complex choices can be fundamentally different from simple two choice scenarios bpc would seem to work best in cases where the complexity of choices is but neither can anything else on the other hand the bpc model suggests general ways such choices might react to parameter shifts for example no matter how complex the choice situation an increase in the cost of taking one option should decrease the probability that that option is taken so we can obtain a quantitatively accurate elasticity of response to the cost in question the value lafreniere note that gintis mentions that his model can explain pathological behaviors such as drug addiction unsafe sex and unhealthy diet however evolutionists have addressed such diseases of civilization effectively without recourse to decision making concepts i argued that they have addressed these issues ineffectively precisely because without the control i made this point clearly in my discussion of drug addiction in the target article showing that the bpc model allows us to carry out effectiveness studies of various alternative policies evolutionists who reject the bpc model have little to contribute to social policy analysis because ultimate causality does not reveal confusion still reigns concerning the use of the terms rational and maximize price brown curry price et al argue that individuals are adaptation executers whereas the bpc model portrays individuals as rational actors who choose the available course of action that they expect will maximize their fitness however as i made clear in the target article being a rational the notion that i suggested in the target article that individuals make choices that they expect will maximize their fitness is a bizarre and outlandish attribution indeed acting to maximize fitness does not explain much human behavior can the bpc model deal with intergenomic conflict suppressed by rival psychological mechanisms they conclude from this that bpc is not up to the task of uniting the social and natural sic sciences especially in the age of genomics however the framework i offer does not consist of the beliefs preferences and constraints model alone it includes evolutionary biology in general and gene culture coevolution in particular which allows us using the bpc apparatus does brain modularity imply non rational behavior tooby cosmides argue that natural selection favors building special assumptions innate content and domain specific problem solving strategies into the proprietary logic of neural devices these decision making the target article for abandoning the classical normative standards in favor of the principles of consistency on which the beliefs preferences and constraints model depends the bpc model emerges unscathed in summary i believe that an idiosyncratic or traditional version of the rational actor model has drawn objections from several commentators here rather than my version objections to some version of the rational actor model but not to my version the version i outlined in the target article appears to have survived attack i am encouraged that the bpc model can remain among the basic analytical tools capable of bridging the various disciplines critique of gene culture coevolutionary theory obeys the same structural equations as genetic evolution and human culture is a strong environmental influence on genetic evolution accounting for human prosocial emotions other regarding preferences and principled behavior brown brown offer their own work on selective investment theory which is an example of how other regarding preferences of selection is the gene not the group the species or even the individual he gene centered view of evolution can and does support other regarding preferences there is no need to buy into the less parsimonious and more controversial notion of group selection in section i offered a second account to explain how a gene centered account is not different from an individual centered or simply alternative accounting frameworks for explaining the same phenomenon as soon as brown brown extend other regarding preferences to genetically unrelated coalition partners they are implicitly moving to an accounting framework above the gene level selective and the willingness of individuals to engage in costly longterm investment in such relationships the context for such relationships is generally kin and family where the larger set of cultural institutions can be taken as given and the assertion of gene centered evolution has at least a semblance of plausibility although here as well family includes unrelated mates at least and long term at any rate geneculture coevolution applies to a much broader set of human behaviors propensities and institutions than does selective investment theory critique of strong reciprocity as an example of the synergistic interaction of the various elements of my framework for unification i referred to work by myself and colleagues on strong reciprocity at personal cost even when these costs cannot be repaid no commentary author disputes the existence of strong reciprocity but several question my evolutionary interpretation of the phenomenon brown brown assert that my colleagues and i subscribe to views of evolution and other regarding preferences that are themselves steeped in controversy two years later and has drawn the attention of the behavioral science community only in the recent past brown brown characterize our position as a situation in which helpers sacrifice inclusive fitness for the good of the group this is an incorrect interpretation of our models strong reciprocity may involve the sacrifice of individual fitness on not evolve moreover there are signaling models of strong reciprocity in which strong reciprocity is individually fitness maximizing or are part of an inseparable behavioral program that is individually fitness maximizing burgess molenaar claim that kin selection and are still
the uncritical defence of major public works programmes and the relentless support for the further consolidation of the hydraulic project for spain only from onwards would a more critical and socially engaging style gradually begin to emerge although the steel and concrete and their workforce in spain galvanizing the nation propaganda and hydraulic works as in germany and italy in franco s spain too sophisticated propaganda machinery was quickly put in place after the fascist victory the tried tactic of controlling and censoring the press was implemented swiftly together with cultural success of cinema no do produced news and general interest film reels that were obligatorily screened in the country s cinemas highly subsidized this propaganda instrument served to celebrate the regime personalized by franco galvanize the enthusiasm of the people for the regime s efforts extol the virtues of spanish when no do was finally abolished about documentary reels were produced until it was the main cinematographic information source available to the wider public in his analysis of the content of no do s reels rodr guez points out that above all inaugurations filled the screens a symbiotic relationship was systematically no do publicized widely franco s procession of inaugurations and the spectacle was also covered in great hagiographic detail in magazines newspapers and in the specialist engineering and professional journals on each occasion franco was presented as the victorious caudillo of spain welcomed by the grateful and admiring masses that celebrated is symptomatic of such exaggerated exaltation the caudillo of spain who during the hours of the war led our troops to victory is also the soul of this labor of reconstruction with which spain heals its wounded saving spain from all the difficulties that the current international circumstances pose against her inaugurations the deployment of the regime s a festival of laudatory images and commentaries inaugurated dams became the most iconic image associated with franco who oversaw the new hydraulic landscape listened to the adulations of his entourage and received graciously the ovations of the grateful masses franco s frequent public appearances suggested a nchez biosca no do s newsreels conveyed an image of inauguration sites and rites as geographical symbols of and material referents to the unmitigated success of the fascist project embodiments of a technocratic developmentalism and emblems of the beauty newspapers and other print media were equally marshalled to espouse the virtues of the regime and its achievements on a daily basis the press would report ecstatically about yet another great speech from the caudillo as yet another sublime achievement was inaugurated the quote below offers a sample from a typical speech by franco to visit your province to inaugurate various important works and with this to satisfy the thirst of your fields to regulate your irrigations which shall increase your welfare and multiply production the whole of spain has to be redeemed sealing the brotherhood between the land and the men of spain this heroic mission thus visualized and narrated was spread throughout the country through print media and cinema galvanizing the hearts and minds of the spanish people and urging them to embrace the remaking of the fatherland and thus widen the networks of interests that would solidify a century has passed since a great and brave nation begun under the leadership of a soldier statesman its heroic and successful campaign to repel for ever all the roots of communism i am referring to spain our friend and ally and its leader and chief of state generalissimo franco a strictly regulated market frozen wages and the control of the labor force were the response to spain s imposed international isolation because of franco s war time support for the axis powers the regime turned this isolationism into virtue self reliant development and international trade restrictions were seen and mobilizing spain s national hydropower potential were considered to be absolutely vital however absence of materials energy equipment and above all capital made progress in constructing the desired autarchic landscape excruciatingly slow electricity blackouts were rampant until the mid madrid suffered from a disastrous new dam constructions was far below expectations food was rationed peasants became even poorer and migrated the average income per capita fell from index in to in the only commodity not in short supply was labor power salaries were only a fraction of what they had been before the war and any kind of protest were held as political prisoners in concentration camps and forcibly put to work primarily in public works for example for the construction of the canal del bajo guadalquivir in andalucia over political prisoners were mobilized between and established during the franco period also used political prisoners table iii summarizes the available information on the mobilization of political prisoners in the realization of franco s wet dream for spain however spain s autarchic political economic model did not generate canals and built dams lack of capital proved a major stumbling block for that the regime had to turn elsewhere and re arrange the coordinates of its geo political spatial imagination its networks of interests and its scalar articulation yankee dollars weapons and dams by the early the rhetoric of national autarchy sounded increasingly hollow as the country s and economic elites realized that opening up new spatial links and pursuing the geo political insertion of spain into the western alliance was vital in order to secure not only the modernization of spain but also the longer term sustainability of the dictatorial regime strategically re scaling the networks of interests on which the regime rested geo political order choreographed by cold war strategies and looked towards the us whose geo political gaze also gradually turned to spain as a possible ally in their geo political strategizing indeed between and the institutionalization of the cold war permitted a rapprochement between the us and spain the us chose to forget in spain scored its first international diplomatic victory when she was admitted to unesco in december spain entered the
in most cases however the vacuum of authority does not mean that the village has no formal leadership but rather that village leaders are powerless some village cadres choose to stay for reasons not necessarily related to a disposition for corruption these cadres are typically old aged poorly educated and have a long political career behind them they remain loyal to traditional values and ideology as self proclaimed vanguards or role models they enjoy a sense of superiority over the masses or they may retain affection for the party to which they owe a debt of gratitude for past glory such individuals may also respond if the township leadership threatens to expel them from the party if they resign as village officials at wuli for example township officials threatened to audit village cadres fiscal accounts if any resigned during tax collecting on top of that after working for the party for decades village cadres found that they lacked required training or expertise for any other job derided as muddling along caretakers these cadres depend on fellow villagers personal favors or mercy for levying taxes fees or fulfilling other state assigned tasks traditional relations of control have been reversed cadres fear the villagers more than vice versa true village cadres in this kind of vacuum of authority still have some room powers that they still retain cadres decide on land reallocation but they must use this power cautiously as land reallocation is formally illegal cadres also grant approval when villagers want to build houses on collective land although again villagers will sue if cadres do not approve according to legal formulae cadres are responsible for levying surcharge surtax and fines mediating order and providing some public goods such as irrigation projects and pest control if a village has not totally exhausted its collective fund cadres can also decide who benefits from it and how much villagers sometimes need certificates of various kinds from the village and cadres can often provide government connections and services to villagers who hope to develop private these functions may justify the government s need to keep village cadres however small generated by performing them can make the village s leadership posts not entirely unattractive to the people who lack market power but these functions are far too negligible in the context of rapid marketization to constitute authority through which cadres can coerce or control villagers if cadres do not play by the rule of the game they could get into villagers rarely met or kept in touch except when taxes fees were levied approximately to percent of the workforce earned their living outside the village while the remaining villagers concentrated on growing crops such as rice wheat and rape in their farmland during the two month nongmang season during other months villagers grew trees fruits and tea or worked on animal husbandry and fishery some managed cars for transportation village cadres and their powers were almost entirely irrelevant to the villagers everyday life party secretaries did not mind at all what the villagers were doing provided that they paid their taxes and fees villagers had little respect for cadres because cadres could not offer any substantial help nor did they hate the cadres who were not notorious for power abuse villagers complained about fiscal burdens but knew they were imposed from above in these villagers did not feel the existence of the party branch or party authority a silence that will become even more audible perhaps after the tff reform and the repeal of the agricultural tax cuts the workload of village cadres by up to percent in agricultural provinces village cadres now will no longer have to humbly request the villagers for help in levying taxes and fees nor do they care about their responsibility for the provision of public goods cadres have no hard power resources the power void may be filled by soft power the power of persuasion and admonishment guo mingliang party secretary of the taoyuan village in northern jiangsu complained that his party branch possessed no control mechanisms at all over the villagers but he still could prevent his village from falling apart because fellow villagers respected and listened to him thanks to his clean image guo had served as the village party secretary for two decades and had apparently accumulated a considerable amount of capital of human affection with some medical training he opened a small clinic in the village to earn a living he often saw patients for free or charged them a discounted fee although the prestige that stemmed from their gratitude helped him in levying taxes fees it did not provide a solid foundation for power if you are a nice man he said your will respect you and buy your face but it does not mean that you have real authority over them observers in other villages have reported similar examples where village cadres won fellow villagers support by helping them get like max weber s charismatic domination this soft power cannot be institutionalized to the extent it works its source is not the cadres political appointments but their personal characters many village cadres take their offices as tools for maximizing personal benefits they are often called private gain seekers by villagers as noted village cadres retain some authority for performing their assigned duties though weak this authority can be used for self serving purposes by corrupt cadres in addition despite the disincentives of the position village cadres still enjoy a few privileges even in the poorest villages including easy access to township officials salary and bonus exemption from taxes fees and tuitions if their children attend village run schools invitation to dinner parties for higher officials kickbacks from collective projects and some chances of receiving payments in gratitude or for village cadres more privileges mean more opportunities for corruption the second pattern is common in villages that are neither very rich nor very or village affluence in poorer villages as in the first pattern cadres have little
transactions results suggest that specific elements of cpm migrate well to the commerce environment and that the notion of boundary management has theoretical traction when applied to this context this research also highlights similarities and differences between interpersonal relationships and online commercial transactions suggesting that information disclosure and veracity in commerce are somewhat a function of the type of information past commerce experience and the specific language used in privacy policies together findings from this study serve as a basis for more directed theory construction in this arena performance analysis of multi innovation gradient type identification we extend the sg algorithm from the viewpoint of innovation modification and present multi innovation gradient type identification algorithms including a multi innovation stochastic gradient algorithm and a multi innovation forgetting gradient algorithm because the multi innovation gradient type algorithms use not only the current data but also the past data at each iteration parameter estimation accuracy can be improved finally the performance analysis results show that the proposed misg and mifg algorithms have faster convergence rates and better tracking performance than their corresponding sg algorithms introduction let us begin with considering a time invariant stochastic system described by a linear regression model where is the system output and rn is rn is the parameter vector to be identified the superscript denotes the matrix transpose assume that and for is the available measurement data for convenience we suppose that is the current time then and are called the current data and called the past data for the time invariant system in defining and minimizing and using the stochastic gradient search principle we may obtain a recursive identification algorithm here denotes the expectation operator the norm of the matrix is defined by x represents the estimate of at time and is called the convergence factor or step size the main reasons lie in the following the error system corresponding to the parameter estimation error equation has eigen values on the unit circle only one eigen value inside the unit circle in fact defining the parameter estimation error vector and using and it follows that where i stands for an identity matrix of appropriate sizes for time varying systems of the form rn rn if all eigen values of ht are close to zero or with magnitude smaller than then can converge to zero otherwise if some eigen values of ht are on the unit circle then has a slow convergence rate the algorithm does not make sufficient use of the available and does not use the past data therefore a natural question is how to extend the algorithm to achieve a fast convergence rate this is the focus of this work since the quantity in eq is called the innovation and scalar valued extends the single innovation identification algorithm and presents multiinnovation identification methods the proposed approaches use not only the current data but also the past data and the matrix of the resulting estimation error equations has all eigen values inside the unit disc and thus achieving fast convergence rates and are different from the identification methods of multi variable systems see the discussion in section it is well known that the recursive least squares algorithm is based on all previous data thus has faster convergence rate than the algorithm but the algorithm requires less computational effort than the rls algorithm in order to enhance the convergence rate of the algorithm finite previous data ie the misg approaches use not only the current data but also the past data at each iteration thus parameter estimation accuracy can be improved the misg algorithms have advantages of the sg and rls algorithms this is a tradeoff between the two algorithms ie the misg algorithms have faster convergence rate than the algorithms and less computational burden than the rls exists ljung analyzed consistency of the rls algorithm based on the assumptions that the noise is an independent and identically distributed random sequence with finite fourth order moments and the input and output signals have finite non zero power also lai and wei obtained the convergence rate of the rls parameter estimation by assuming that higher order moments of the noises made such assumptions eg lai and wei wei ren and kumar guo and kumar recently ding and chen and ding shi and chen studied in details the convergence properties of the rls algorithms for time invariant systems and for non stationary arma processes but do not assume that the process noise is an iid sequence or higher order moments exist the noise is a second moment process with zero mean in the literature of time varying systems guo and ljung discussed the exponential stability of the averaged equations corresponding to the homogeneous equations of the parameter estimation error systems of the rls algorithms with a forgetting factor and further guo and ljung used the stochastic matrix of the rffls algorithms by assuming that the measured error and the parameter drift are of white noise character recently ding and chen derived in details the upper and lower bounds of the parameter estimation of the rffls algorithms and showed that only for deterministic systems the rffls algorithms are exponentially convergent in this paper we present a sg algorithm and analyze their parameter estimation error bounds the rest of the paper is organized as follows section derives a misg identification algorithm by extending the innovation modification technique sections analyzes the convergence properties of the sg and misg algorithms to show the advantages of the proposed misg algorithm section presents the misg algorithm with a forgetting factor in order multi variable version of the multi innovation algorithms section presents several illustrative examples for the results in this paper finally concluding remarks are given in section the misg algorithm in this section we derive a misg identification algorithm the basic idea is to expand the scalar innovation to an innovation vector in general one thinks that the estimate at time is closer to than at time thus the innovation vector
promoting economic growth and poverty reduction to improve food security the experience of asian governments in actual practice with price stabilization is discussed in the context of to market mediated food security recent experience in indonesia where a sharp increase in rice prices pushed million people into poverty provides continued motivation for the analytical story in this paper i introduction response to market forces improved food security stems directly from a set of government policies that integrates the food economy into a development strategy that seeks rapid economic growth with improved income distribution with such policies economic growth and food security mutually reinforce each other countries in east and southeast asia offer evidence that poor countries using this strategy can escape from hunger in decades or less that is in the space of a single generation the focus here is on food security as an objective of national policy there are many definitions of food security and the us position paper for the world food conference provides a standard one food security exists when all people at all times have physical and economic access to sufficient food to meet their dietary needs for a productive and healthy life food security has three dimensions of food of appropriate quality supplied through domestic production or imports access by households and individuals to adequate resources to acquire appropriate foods for a nutritious diet and utilization of food through adequate diet water sanitation and health care the emphasis in the present paper is on the vailability dimension of food at the eicro level can gain access to food on a reliable basis through self motivated interactions with local markets and home resources therefore the perspective taken is primarily an economic one at first glance food security strategies in asia would seem to have been little influenced by economics the dominance of rice in the diets of most asians from the world price this clear violation of the border price paradigm and the accompanying restrictions on openness to trade seems to have escaped many advocates of the east asian miracle who saw the region rapid growth as evidence in support of free trade in fact the asian countries that have been most successful at providing food security to their citizens have based their strategies on two elements of their domestic food system over which they have some degree of degree of policy control the sectoral composition of income growth and stability of food prices much has been written recently about the sectoral dimensions of pro poor growth but the role of stable food prices in food security has been largely ignored by the development profession the recent experience in indonesia where a sharp increase in rice prices during caused by a ban on rice imports pushed million people below the poverty line provides clear motivation for the main contribution of this paper which is to put food price stability back on the research and policy agenda ii food security market outcomes or government action the modern escape from hunger to food security would not have been possible without the institutional and technological innovations that are at the heart of modern economic growth however the record of economic in countries with relatively low levels of per capita income government interventions to enhance food security can lift the threat of hunger and famine the countries most successful at this task are in east and southeast asia although the experience in south asia has been instructive as well food security and public action because they are poor and devote a high share of their budget to food consumers continued hunger and vulnerability to shocks that set off famines still several poor countries have taken public action to improve their food security the typical approach reduces the numbers of the population facing daily hunger by raising the incomes of the poor while simultaneously managing the food economy in ways that minimize the shocks that might trigger a famine shocks that are usually some of them quite poor have managed the same scape from hunger that fogel documents for europe during the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries stabilizing domestic food prices was a key part of their strategy in particular asian governments sought to stabilize rice prices engel law ensures that success in generating rapid economic growth that includes the poor is the long run solution to food security in the language of dreze and sen rowth mediated security in the meantime stabilization of food prices in asia ensured that short run fluctuations and shocks did not make the poor even more vulnerable to inadequate food intake than their low incomes required most economists are highly dubious that such food price stability is financially feasible or economically desirable an attitude clearly expressed by kym march when he argued that rice instability is your friend price stabilization is not a key element of the support led security measures outlined by dreze and sen in a review of food security and the stochastic aspects of poverty anderson and roumasset essentially dismiss efforts to stabilize food prices using government interventions given the high costs of national price stabilization schemes and wright and their effectiveness in stabilizing prices in rural areas alternative policies decreasing local price instability need to be considered the most cost effective method for increasing price stability probably is to remove destabilizing government distortions government efforts to nationalize grain markets and to regulate prices across both space and time have the effect of government efforts should be aimed at enhancing private markets through improving transportation enforcing standards and measures in grain transactions and implementing small scale storage technology although this condemnation of national price stabilization schemes might well be appropriate for much of the developing world it badly misinterprets both the design and implementation of interventions to stabilize rice prices in several asian countries have stabilized domestic rice prices while allowing the private sector to procure and distribute percent of the crop the growth benefits of indonesia rice price stabilization program
is the most accurate way to measure the relative differences between two samples the uncorrected color bias eliminates this benefit fortunately scatterplot smoothing or loess mitigates the effect of differential dye effects by using a locally weighted linear regression to therefore well suited for a regression approach a first degree polynomial least squares regression or a second degree polynomial fit closely approximates the correlated nature of the relationship between the fluorescence intensity and the deviation of the color channels from one another the selection of algorithm use loess and a designer error model within their feature extraction software to produce a robust set of measurements agilent recommends no background subtraction because of the stringency of their wash steps and the correspondingly low background fluorescence the software does provide a measure of the raw mean median subtracted a single channel platform using shadowmasking lithography to synthesize probes on a custom silica based surface each round of synthesis is approximately incomplete probes are physically capped preserving the correct probe sequence but yielding a mixture of fulland partial length probes for a given gene its expression level is measured by a set of probe pairs typically each probe probe each pm probe contains an identical short oligonucleotide sequences that match a segment of the transcript for a given gene of interest the mm probe contains oligonucleotide sequence identical to the pm probe except for a single nucleotide at the center of the sequence affymetrix relies on mismatch probes to accommodate ectopic hybridization and other noise the debate continues whether bases allows sufficient selectivity to distinguish highly related genes such as those in the cytochrome family many more normalization methods have been developed for the affymetrix technology than agilent but both do require a systematic analysis of noise and bias to obtain the best data some normalization techniques for affymetrix include rma gc rma dchip ls some algorithm implementation can be found in bioconductor both affymetrix and agilent utilize fixed probe lengths which creates a distribution of nonoptimal hybridization temperatures because the tm of every probe rarely matches the actual temperature of hybridization agilent and affymetrix accommodate the nonoptimal hybridization conditions by using mismatch probes replication positive and negative measure and adjust for thermodynamic biases these techniques are quite mature and have proved sufficient to the task of exploring the dynamic nature of the transcriptome in a variety of biological contexts precision is so good for currently available arrays that reasonably accurate prediction of cancer outcome recurrence and drug resistance is commonplace and different technologies to improve the noise reduction methods to such an extent that technical imprecision is low enough to ensure adequately precise and sensitive measurements in the context of the same array type issues are still present that prevent perfect concordance between measurements of the same gene from in the supplemental section we discussed some promising technologies by nimblegen maskless array synthesis combimatrix cmos like technology and illumina bead based arrays we also reviewed some related normalization methods such as and lowess normalization algorithms expression measurements for expression profiling numerous methods account for and correct the intrinsic uncertainty or technical biases in the signals that make up expression array data much of the credit must be laid at the feet of those researchers who constantly battled to improve the quality of self spotted cdna data during the time when high imprecision was routine variance continues to stem from sources that scanner variation various types of background fluorescence from different array surfaces and substrates probe design and increasingly important ectopic failed hybridization differential mrna degradation rna integrity and biological variability for both cdna and oligo based expression arrays quality control is a major issue although the details differ choice of intensity measurement or ratio measurement to understanding the full range of the peculiarities and performance issues of each array platform ratio measurements are commonly used in two color cdna arrays as well as the agilent expression system ratio measurements have been shown to be very precise and accurate because of the kinetics of competitive hybridization measuring two mrna species at the same time in the same hybridization solution control expression intensities from single color data provide a semidirect assay of transcript abundance which is common practice for experimental designs that look at hundreds or thousands of conditions even the traditional agilent two channel oligo array which has benefited from the increased accuracy that results from competitive hybridization now development of an expression platform containing the whole human transcriptome both affymetrix and agilent have fallen prey to a situation where certain probes are precise when measuring a defined set of tissues but highly unpredictable when exposed to a different set of samples routinely probes from otherwise highly precise cdna and oligo arrays may show unexpected variance when measuring some tissues but not both affymetrix and agilent s human are on revision two major revisions to these companies expression products are rare but are often the result of an accumulation of probes that warrant replacement based on supporting evidence that they do not identify either a real gene or a gene s mrna abundance correctly the reasons for the unusual thermodynamic behavior of these problematic probes are rarely discussed principally that could correct for expression bias and probe variability might be the construction of a full library of human transcripts given this resource one can spike a series of dilutions into a series of complex mixtures of mrna such as diseased and health tissues developmental tissue highly specific or multi purpose tissue cell lines pooled samples etc this method would allow one to measure the endpoint sensitivity for competition or the rna environment for accurate transcripts number measurement rather than global error model to entire set of probes in a more realistic scenario genomic dna can be used as a reference to measure the fluorescence that results from the binding of a known concentration of target in this case the known concentration of target would be from a single pair of molecules the genomic
to a process of equalization through which unionist symbols would be removed the list of nationalist cultural grievances was extensive ranging from the status of the irish language to the iconography displayed by statutory bodies and not surprisingly many unionists saw politician jeffrey donaldson regarded parity of esteem as a political ruse for arguing for the creation of all ireland or north south institutions when nationalists talk about parity of esteem it is in fact about the diminution of the british identity of northern ireland another unionist politician voiced suspicions that the nationalist cultural agenda aimed to supplant unionism s dominant position whereby the political rights of a minority to determine the political identity of the state is an accepted principle one issue more than any other served to politicize the term parity of esteem politico religious parades such parades mainly but not exclusively by protestant unionist organizations had a long history of causing communal tension by the mid the parading issue and specifically protestant unionist through mainly catholic residential areas had become a contentious issue in the context of a delicate peace process the peace process meant that the main political groupings adopted a zero sum approach to an ever increasing range of issues and were convinced of the necessity to contest seemingly peripheral symbolic issues lest this transmit a signal of weakness to opponents with paramilitary ceasefires declared and largely the street became more visible and the parading issue seemed to morph into a microcosm of the northern ireland conflict while much of the catholic nationalist opposition to loyalist parades originated from growing confidence of catholics and their movement into areas traditionally regarded as protestant there was little doubt that sinn fein sought to exploit the issue sinn fein s attempt to parity of esteem and associated terminology prompted many unionists to regard the parity agenda as a trojan horse for a wider political project yet despite the politicization of the notion of parity of esteem and the skepticism of many northern ireland politicians towards the notion the chief architects of the belfast agreement attempted to promote the agreement as a win win package the notion of an intercommunal balance of and that the agreement was an opportunity to transcend zero sum politics have been constant themes in pronouncements for the british and irish governments on the day the belfast agreement was reached british prime minister tony blair told the world s media the idea that if one side wins something in northern ireland the other or mutually assured destruction this is because the package is based on balanced principles put this agreement into practice and we all do win the ideas of balance mutuality and reciprocity have been repeated by all post agreement northern ireland secretaries of state with john reid noting how mutuality of gains could be guaranteed by a new regime of rights all parts of the community not as nationalists or unionists republicans or loyalists but above all as citizens who mutually benefit from the establishment of basic rights if we are to challenge confrontational politics we have to challenge the notion that there must always be victors and losers that every move involves victory for one side and defeat for the other unworkable if the traditional dominance of one group over the other was merely reversed instead he noted that the equality provisions of the agreement transcend the traditional political model in northern ireland which in the past always operated through a zero sum prism of winners and losers constituencies that any concessions would be negated by gains northern ireland s unionists traditionally occupied a dominant status position and many had to be convinced that any new political dispensation would result in a gain for their community module funded in and by the economic and social research council under its devolution and constitutional change programme the first named author of this article was the principal investigator of the political attitudes module and drew up the questionnaire in concert with colleagues at nilt the survey is a joint initiative from the university of ulster and the queen s university of belfast and the fieldwork is conducted by a private firm in the autumn of each year adults are interviewed face to face and issued with an additional self completion questionnaire response rates have averaged at the period a figure that compares well with similar attitudinal surveys in england scotland and wales addresses are selected from the postcode address file interviewers select one adult for interview at each address via a kish grid method carried out using computer assisted personal interviewing a pilot survey is conducted prior to the main survey to assist questionnaire design the sensitivities of conducting public attitudes research in deeply divided societies is discussed elsewhere between self identification as protestant and unionist and catholic and nationalist although a substantial number of catholic and protestant respondents refuse to identify themselves as nationalists or unionists the use of the religious labels thus yields a higher response rate indeed the use of religious identity as a virtual proxy for political or national identity is further legitimized as the survey repeatedly reveals the salience of northern eland s sectarian differential as the key fault line in society in selecting specific survey items as indicators or perceptions of collective esteem the following considerations applied firstly following horowitz we deduce status rankings from the extent to which groups assign social standing to themselves within the public domain and at the same time deny it to their rivals secondly the relevant standards of value against which contending groups measure one another in this process are context specific and have to be identified in the context of a post accord post violence era where communal rivalry persists within a new democratic regime the assumption is that certain mutually exclusive status rankings be left behind rankings reflecting the antagonistic conflict relationship of super and subordination and the challenges to such rank ordering through status hierarchies are embodied in categorizations as
medium among those for whom the goal was successfully induced they may be completely collocated yet entirely online completely geographically distributed or geographically mixed such forms are becoming increasingly common in dispersed organizations educational settings and other ventures in addition to the challenges facing traditional groups virtual groups must adjust to temporal delays in information exchange maintain difficulties in order to work and relate effectively research suggests that over time virtual groups often adapt to these challenges resulting in relatively successful operations however short term virtual groups make these adjustments less often as a result they are notorious for suboptimal performance lower satisfaction and internal hostility the failure to adapt may result in negative interpersonal judgments among the sociotechnical challenges of distributed work research exploring the bases of virtual group behavior is beginning to consider the independent and interactive effects of computer mediation and members relative geographic locations whereas mixed and distributed virtual groups entail both mediation and some geographic dispersion understanding the effects of geographic distribution requires virtual groups recent research has focused on how attributions judgments about the causes of members behavior may be systematically biased in virtual groups based on the effects of collocation or distribution of group members such research has focused on the attributions members make about their partners behavior in contrast the present research focuses primarily on the attributions virtual group members make about themselves and their tendency to as the situational causes of their own actions self attributions may be no less influenced by collocation or dispersion of partners relative location differences may affect the rationalizations individuals offer for their own negative behavior in virtual groups in ways that theoretically illuminate intransigent practical problems in virtual groups due to member distribution effects few empirical studies have explored this issue and those that have drew inconsistent one perspective suggests that the lack of mutual knowledge across geographically distributed sites affects judgments about remote partners not knowing others respectively local contexts and their situational influences on others behavior has been alleged to lead to biased attributions during intersite conflict in distributed groups a social identification approach in contrast focuses on intergroup identifications between disparate sites with implications for mixed distributed in particular whether or not these perspectives account for purely collocated or distributed virtual groups attributional dynamics remains to be seen therefore a self attribution focus on virtual groups offers a unique test for derivations of previously unconnected theoretical principles whereas much attribution research has focused on noninteractive settings less has examined self attributions or explored this phenomenon in group behavior this approach also with which to overcome the biased attributions to which distributed groups are prone attributions in virtual groups research indicates that a variety of sociotechnical accommodations are required for effective virtual teamwork cmc affects the rate of discussion and failure to adapt expectations and participation hinders sufficient information exchange deters from trust and liking and negatively affects group performance when this occurs and when some partners are geographically distributed from others frustration tends to be directed at remote members in a recent descriptive study cramton suggested that the dynamic underlying such perceptions is the fundamental attribution error the tendency to blame another s disposition or personality for what is actually a situationally stimulated behavior this bias is alleged to judgments about remote members because of an individual s unfamiliarity with others local contexts and the situational influences on their behavior shared place in contrast proffers assumed similarity leading collocated members to regard one another with less uncertainty than they regard remote partners cramton s inductive analysis of conflicts in virtual groups reflected biased attributions toward remote group members failed to support the fundamental attribution error hypothesis lack of common location did not inflate dispositional attributions in virtual groups on the contrary collocated members made greater dispositional judgments about partners compared to those of distributed groups these inconsistencies are not altogether surprising because the virtual group setting stretches attribution theory beyond its typical of communication with targets the mediated nature of observations and particularly the active participation rather than passive observation of the observer with the target are uncommon in traditional attribution research self attributions social interaction and group distribution some attribution research has focused on conditions in which individuals do interact offers particular promise for understanding attributional problems in virtual groups what if interactions with relatively unknown distant partners systematically bias perceptions of our own behavior rather than the judgments we make about our partners it has long been recognized that in order to maintain and enhance self esteem individuals cite situational explanations for their own actions just as they tend to overlook situational factors that shape others in social interaction however there are at least two potential situational influences on one s behavior the effect of social partner as well as the general situational environment robins et al found that participants believed their own behavior was shaped by their partner drawing attention away from both situation and self the external environment was not perceived as in robins et al s study because presumably in social interaction partners and their actions are more salient and provide more pertinent cues than the environment although valence was not manipulated in robins et al s study this trend may be particularly prominent in self explanations for negative actions enacting the self serving bias through reference to external partner based attributions partner blame may become the favored antidote to negative dispositional self construals this attributional approach resembles the process of scapegoating a familiar concept but rarely studied in group settings aside from therapy or family groups among the few exceptions in the sociology of collective and small group behavior the scapegoat is the product of emotional and logical oversimplifications which are the result of situations perceived as negative according to bonazzi is consistent with making partner based self attributions for one s own behavior scapegoats are created by others who are anxious to attach blame and absolve their personal responsibilities the scapegoating process helps explain how the biased
regulate major corporate bankruptcies across national frontiers insol drafted the principles in the call for laws to prevent international financial crises insol s most notable contribution to the global insolvency field is its effort to convert the london approach to out of court corporate restructurings multi creditor while insol leaders have fanned out across the world to present the merits of this approach its most effective efforts have been to integrate the principles into global templates of organizations with sanctioning power and to attempt a similar feat with the legislative guide currently developed by uncitral each of the major initiatives undertaken relationships are a way of appropriating the concentration of expertise within insol effectively harnessing its human resources in part however the ifi s also recognize that their reform programs require implementation on the ground and this may be more readily effected when the support and cooperation of practitioners associations are already assured since their representatives participated in both an expert and legitimating value to the international organizations for they provide a veneer of professional neutrality best practice and efficiency while insol brings together several professions with a common specialty in insolvency the international bar association s committee on creditor rights brings together an international network of lawyers who specialize in insolvency law committee has had high aspirations iba produced a model law and a cross border insolvency concordat its current impact however has been felt principally through its participation in other multilateral organizations most notably uncitral where its delegates have worked more closely than any other international expert organization with the secretariat in drafting the new legislative guide on insolvency the iba has the not insignificant benefit that it consults closely with the us state shown considerable interest in a global insolvency guide that would advance us interests while the iba is not a creature of the us government its association with the strongest single state engaged in uncitral gives the lawyers association an influence that might otherwise be overshadowed by insol the international section of business law of the american bar association works in close partnership reciprocal interests join financial and professional institutions while ifis benefit from professional expertise indeed could scarcely proceed without it the professional associations strive to have their particular norms frameworks or templates institutionalized in ifi products insol has been singularly successful in doing so with its principles for out of court workouts the lawyers have also been successful in keeping courts by ifis or uncitral significantly both global peak organizations recognized fairly early in the global negotiations that neither of them could prevail entirely against the other their backup strategy has been to keep options either for both types of professionals in any context and to worry about jurisdictional rights at the point where it really matters national lawmaking authority on economic power or on technical expertise uncitral offers itself as a deliberative forum much like a national legislature the commission functions through working groups and every working group includes nations that are elected by the un general legal systems the working groups develop treaty conventions model laws or legislative guides and submit them to the uncitral commission for adoption in australia proposed that in light of the recent regional and global financial crises there was a need to strengthen the international facilitating rapid and orderly workouts from excessive by accepting this charge with the strong concurrence of the imf and the grudging agreement of the world bank uncitral officials understood the symbolic and legitimatory significance of their move in part it proceeded from the manifest deficit in the legitimacy of other efforts according to a senior uncitral official the world bank has a problem to be the work of a few experts and there is always the feeling that washington might be cramming things down the throats of others this does nt go down well with policy makers in countries when they sit down to reform their laws as for the professional associations insol and the iba are similarly prejudiced insol is mostly insolvency practitioners the iba is mostly lawyers these are people who charge fees and are key ministries and they have no effective way of getting things implemented furthermore the adb and the ebrd have a regional focus so that limits their global impact quite about from uncitral s successful record of creating model laws its principal distinction lay in its truly universal representation the representation of delegates from all countries makes a difference in the acceptability of the product iterative norm making uncitral labored from to in order to produce its legislative guide on insolvency through one to two week long meetings twice a year in vienna and new york with small expert meetings in between and through widely circulated drafts of its guide uncitral s methodology was highly participatory the formal meetings themselves brought together national delegates from some to nations as well as the leading from ifis such as the imf world bank and adb the legislative guide combines two kinds of normative material most precise are specific statutory recommendations many of which are drafted in statutory language supporting these is a commentary that explains the importance of a topic discusses various approaches to it across jurisdictions and explains why uncitral has taken the decision it recommends global norm making in this field has been the remarkable degree of consensus that has been forged among delegates and expert organizations from different legal families levels of economic development and differences in economic interests with very few exceptions the guide recommends a single option or no more than two alternatives for every topic it the previous five years all the ifis and professional associations have been drawn inside the uncitral process so it may concomitantly build on their prior normative products and reach for a higher level of consensus and precision through a universal deliberative metropolitan nation states the world in its experience with reorganization of corporations through bankruptcy law and its philosophy of corporate rehabilitation has been incorporated in
at the pole of greatest leverage since they can exert enormous pressure on countries particularly during financial crises to adopt norms as a condition of access to multilateral loans and sovereign and private lending of less direct but influence lie clubs of advanced economies most notably the and whose policy directives and even prescriptions influence the ifis in particular the oecd has played a more regional and less obtrusive role as a disseminator of reforms in the middle of the continuum lie organizations such as the united nations and especially its commission on international trade law whose products carry an intrinsic suasion of their own since they are legitimated by at the pole of least leverage lie the international professional associations that can provide technical expertise but have no powers to compel compliance the most prominent metropolitan power the united states has not formulated normative standards itself but exerts its influence indirectly and broadly through clubs of nations ifis the cycle of global norm making was precipitated by clubs of rich nations in the wake of the asian financial crisis the latter demonstrated to the leaders of the global economy how vulnerable it was to regional and possibly global collapse around the time of the asian crisis the already had charged the world bank to begin looking into the importance of bankruptcy regimes to the developing economies in the a mandate to develop global frameworks principles or foundations for substantive law and legal institutions that would prevent financial the working group on international financial crises issued a policy statement about insolvency and debtor creditor regimes which might reduce the scope of crises and facilitate swift workouts of indebtedness the working group repeatedly stressed the importance and debtor creditor regimes for solving the financial difficulties of firms in addition to strong laws strong insolvency regimes and necessary frameworks the called for effective enforcement apparatuses such as courts and tribunals which are staffed by competent professionals in addition there should be incentives and appropriate frameworks or forums for working out or restructuring corporate indebtedness outside courts or government and launched global norm making at the other end of the process that of implementation lies the organization of economic cooperation and development a paris based international organization of mostly rich countries that has committed itself principally to dissemination and the oecd neither developed its own standards nor diagnostic instruments but in the wake of the asian financial invited asian nations to a series of forums on asian insolvency reforms to disseminate norms and cross fertilize accomplishments in lawmaking and implementation successively held in sydney bali bangkok seoul and new delhi each forum has a theme that highlights a particular component of an insolvency system and discreetly places the country in which the forum is held global norms without standards or instruments of its own and without financial leverage the oecd forums function distinctively to offer a relatively neutral arena in which major international organizations and nation states can exchange ideas and experiences as putative equals its intent however is clear to drive forward the cycles of reform across the region in adherence to the global norms that are advocated during the forums international financial institutions responded to the call by creating normative templates for national lawmaking but they did so in quite different ways a significant difference among them relates to a key feature of iterative norm development cycles of legal change always presuppose two intervening processes diagnosis and prescription the global norm making of ifis varies by the relative weight given to the diagnostic or prescriptive sides of the lawmaking cycles and capacity to balance the two for the european bank for reconstruction and development the emphasis has been entirely on diagnosis for the imf the emphasis has been principally on prescription while the asian development bank and world bank hold both in roughly equal balance the key issue of whose diagnoses or prescriptions will dominate remain only partially resolved as elements of international institutions ebrd the youngest of the ifis pioneered assessment instruments for insolvency regimes founded in the ebrd was created to enable economic and political development in the countries of the former soviet union and central and eastern europe in its legal transition team launched a legal indicators survey to cover all ebrd countries of operation such as insolvency the ebrd sought to evaluate the extensiveness of law or how well a country covered the breadth of areas which should be characteristic of bankruptcy law in a developed country and the effectiveness of law a judgment that legal rules are clear and accessible and adequately implemented administratively and judicially in other words it judged the quality of law on of substantive law and implementation these comparisons of all countries were published in annual scorecards curiously the ebrd undertook the survey without publicizing a detailed set of standards or the precise evaluation criteria its publications include two very general sets of norms of no more than two to three pages in effect the ebrd began with the diagnostic side of the reform cycle did not provide its own normative template it preferred rather to acknowledge a division of labor in which initiatives by the imf and world bank would come to fill that void after adb first into the arena with a systematic normative template was the adb it shifted from case by case technical assistance projects to a project initiated extensive checklist of questions and enlisted country specialists to respond while the report began to lay out the broad brush strokes of essential elements of rescue and the basic elements of informal workout processes the final report takes the bold step of establishing good practice standards that cover core topics of bankruptcy on each standard a table rates all countries on a three point scale by whether that applied applied in part or not applied countries are therefore explicitly compared to each other comparisons that are made even more explicit in commentary that praises and criticizes individual countries for
europe and of mid latitude central and western europe such a pattern of homogeneity actually extended as far as the near east there is remarkable similarity between the proto aurignacian and the early ahmarian not only in technology but also in typology and index fossils the so called el wad points of the early thing as the font yves points of the proto aurignacian also in both regions a similar aurignacian i with split based points and carinated scrapers cores follows the early ahmarian proto aurignacian because these two technocomplexes both date to ka bp and because the cultural roots of the early ahmarian are found in the near eastern iup it does make sense to construe the proto aurignacian as the spilling off of near developments into adjacent europe in connection with the penecontemporaneous dispersal of modern humans into the continent and the coincident disappearance of neanderthals from the fossil record it is also conceivable however that the process involved is one of diffusion not migration or a combination of both for instance neanderthal groups establishing contact with moderns in the near east might have found that the early ahmarian proto aurignacian s improved lithic barbs and points was a beneficial technological development consequently they might have decided to adopt the system further spreading it across their own exchange networks in this way the lithic technology of the proto aurignacian could have expanded into remote parts of the neanderthal world well in advance of the actual arrival of anatomically modern people in those areas conversely it is no less conceivable that the proto aurignacian was invented among neanderthals once contact between the two populations occurred followed by regular exchanges was eventually adopted by near east moderns under the guise of the early ahmarian thus it is perfectly possible that the proto aurignacian was made by the oase moderns in romania by the grandchildren of the sidr on neanderthals in cantabrian spain and by variously mixed modern neanderthal populations in intermediate regions and radiometric evidence suggests that the ch atelperronian and contemporaneous earlier upper paleolithic technocomplexes of southern central and eastern europe are the cultural product of anatomically neanderthal populations the early aurignacian and the evolved aurignacian are the cultural product of anatomically modern populations and the proto aurignacian is related to the early ahmarian and dates to the time of contact be tween neanderthals and moderns of europe given the potential complexity of the cultural and biological interactions that may have been involved in the phenomenon and the fossil evidence for extensive admixture in at least some parts of europe at the time of contact between neanderthals and moderns the biological affinities of the people who manufactured the proto aurignacian cannot at present be resolved in simple dichotomic terms key early upper paleolithic stratified sequences of europe and the near east fig key sites documenting the archaeological associations of late neanderthals and early european moderns above latest reliably dated ch atelperronian late micoquian and uluzzian sites sites with neanderthal remains reliably directly dated to ka bp sites with neanderthal remains in ch atelperronian late micoquian szeletian uluzzian or late grotte reliably dated proto aurignacian and early ahmarian sites sites with modern human remains reliably directly sites sites with modern human remains reliably directly dated to within five millennia of the time of contact sites with modern human remains in evolved aurignacian and early ahmarian archaeological contexts lagar velho morin isturitz les rois and la quina esquicho grapaou riparo mochi krems hundsteig mlade muierii and oase ksar akil kebara boker a ornaments before the the earliest personal ornaments are those found in bachokirian uluzzian altm uhlian and ch atelperronian contexts ie given the above among late neanderthals where the bachokirian is concerned three items were recovered in level of the type site a spindle shaped bone pendant oval in cross section and grooved at the narrow end and fragments of two pierced teeth from unidentified species in southern europe the evidence comes from sites in italy the uluzzian level of the klisoura sequence in greece yielded more than two dozen dentalium beads belonging to two different species in italy only the grotta del cavallo in the southern region of apulia yielded ornaments all were tubular fragments of dentalium in the lowermost uluzzian but perforated cyclonassa neritea and columbella rustica shells also were recovered in the uppermost uluzzian because clear aurignacian intrusions have been identified among the lithics of cavallo level it is quite possible that these perforated gastropods likewise represent an aurignacian contamination and that as in greece dentalium tubes were the only shell ornaments of the italian uluzzian in central europe the evidence is restricted to the perforated shell of a fossil gastropod of the long multilevel open air loess site of willendorf ii this level is overlain by charcoal lenses dated to bp and features a clear upper paleolithic but non aurignacian blade debitage thus this level probably relates to the contemporary transitional entities documented in the nearby regions of moravia the altm uhlian level of the cave site of ilsenhohle ranis in eastern germany yielded a needle like bone point and most importantly an ivory disc with a central hole that may have been worn as a pendant in belgium a broken ivory ring found in the century excavations of the trou magrite in all likelihood belongs to this northern european late neanderthal tradition of ivory working the excavations produced a mixed collection least three different components can be recognized in the framework of the widespread notion that any ornaments found in ois contexts must be aurignacian by default the trou magrite ring has been generally considered to be of that age however its size manufacture technique and cross section are quite similar to those of french ch atelperronian the bulk of the evidence concerning personal ornamentation among late neanderthals comes from the french ch atelperronian and was reviewed by d errico et al and zilh ao and d
the expectation is that the rate of per capita consumption of s products should be higher in a than in and that as a s preference grows stronger the disparity between the two societies consumption of s goods should broaden in other words the typical individual s consumption related to the intensity of the sentiment and attachment that he or she feels toward those products if however the average income levels of our societies differ such that a consumer in has vastly more income at his or her disposal than his or her counterpart in a then the expected relationship may no longer hold indeed per capita consumption of s products may even be higher in than in a despite a s preferences consumption brought about by alterations in income levels the ra expresses a society s degree of consumption as a proportion of its income unexceptional variations in income therefore should not alter the propensity of a society s consumers to acquire the products of a preferred nation it also should be noted that the ra is a relative measure the ratio of the share of the target nation s income devoted to british a neutral market where british exporters did not have any special advantages however because no market is completely neutral no single market can be used in all circumstances what matters in this context is that the market or markets chosen as the comparator demonstrate no signiacant advantage for the products of british manufacturers in this article the denominator chosen is europe in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries france germany belgium and the netherlands in these markets no widespread preference or advantage for british products has been reported on the contrary protectionism and the strength of domestic industry in these countries ensured that they would largely continue to be challenging markets for the british since sales could be secured only by remaining price competitive or by guaranteeing a superior product resulting indices it is important to bear in mind that the observed outcomes may in some cases be more indicative of european rather global forces nonetheless the proxy for neutrality adopted herein imperfect as it may be has undeniable value enabling insights on the nature of british trade to be gleaned from the taking the weighted average of four nations also has the advantage single nation the value of expressing the ra as a ratio is that it permits a distinction between those alterations in consumption behavior that are due to changes common to all markets such as a depreciation or a decline in price competitiveness relative to one s rivals and those that can be attributed to circumstances unique to the market under investigation the latter category of changes ought to increase the value of that the ra is above one the greater is the advantage for british products in the market in essence the value of the ra is driven by everything internally and externally that makes the proportion of one country s income devoted to british exports different from another s many factors enter into consideration each of which is evaluated from a comparative perspective for example the scale of british investment afanity felt for britain the britishness of consumers dards that favored british goods the frequency of shipping links to britain and elsewhere and the extent to which local import substitution was possible these factors have often been adduced as sources of british advantage in both the empire and former channels and brand name loyalties in the commonwealth the even into the this observation demonstrates that the advantages afforded by imperial connections were not simply a product of official policies and that they could endure even after formal political ties had been severed our deanition of imperial advantage is thus necessarily both relative by nature and inclusive in the sense that it embraces that inouenced britain s ability to sell in a particular location given this deanition and the aim of this article to determine the overall net contribution of these relative advantages to the growth of british exports to the empire the design of the ra would appear particularly well suited to the task at hand at any rate since many of the factors cited herein are clearly collinear by is problematical as has been noted with regard to the gravity equation a composite index therefore sidesteps many of these problems while recognizing both the relativity and the interconnectedness of the advantages under consideration take for example the tariff rates borne by british exporters in empire markets relative both to those paid by their competitors in those same markets and those levied on british of commercial policy to domestic factors alone the fact is that if british products received preference in empire markets at rates that did not match those levied elsewhere they did so only because of imperial or commonwealth connections from the british perspective these tariff rate differentials whether due to the actions of empire or non empire governments represented such as in the interwar period allowing the rates on british imports to rise less precipi a relative advantage a high ra for british imports may also stem from a strong need for the products in which britain happens to have a comparative advantage on the face of it this reason does not appear to sit comfortably with those that are said to have afforded british exporters preferential treatment in empire markets after all such an of british yet before coming to this conclusion we should consider two questions why the need for these products existed in the arst place and whether the desired items actually had close non british substitutes scotch whisky and english milk chocolate for example held a unique fondness in the hearts of british emigrants throughout the empire especially arst generation emigrants in the provision of such goods though this advantage was based more on their cultural distinctiveness than their low costs of production indeed national tastes for confectionery clearly explain a good part of
air permeability in was measured via the standard method using the shirley fx air permeability tester for each one of the fabric types constructed the air permeability measurement was repeated across five different samples of the given fabric type thus producing a total of measurements the five measurements of each fabric type were then averaged to produce an average air permeability value in permeability value in order to reduce non systematic measurement errors in it the structural fabric parameters the respective air permeability values and the standard deviation of the measurements are given in the table i as it can be seen in table i air permeability values decreases when warp and weft yarn densities increase this is a reasonable behavior because the dimensions of the looser towards tighter fabric types where resistance to the airflow is higher linear approach multiple linear regression model although the relation under investigation is clearly nonlinear due to the complex dynamics involved in the underlying physical phenomena a multiple linear regression is still worth as a first attempt in order to arrive to a crude linear approximation of the relation sought and chosen parameters within this relation the results of a multiple linear regression analysis of the data in table i are given in table ii data in columns contain weft densities warp densities and mass per unit area data respectively while column contains average air permeability values in table ii the value in the analysis of variance section is less than showing dependent variable and the three independent variables selected here the value is percent showing that percent of the variability in the air permeability data is explained by the linear combination of the specific three independent variables this percentage is high enough to indicate that a linear relation could certainly be used as a crude approximation of the true relation and at the same time low enough to justify the investigation of nonlinear alternatives that might explain the remaining variability in the data linear approach modified multiple linear regression model under a closer examination sequential sum of squares analysis of variance shows that variable alone explains a or a percent of the variability in the air permeability values while variable if incorporated in the linear combination along with contributes a further or a percent further incorporation of the variable does not contribute significantly to the linear combination that already contains variables and this result prompts the modification of the multiple linear regression in order to exclude warp density from the set of the independent variables the results of the modified multiple linear regression on the data of table i are given in table iii data in contain weft densities and warp densities respectively while column contains average air permeability values in table iii the value in the analysis of variance section remains less than showing that this modified regression is still significant even without warp density in the model the value is in the same level as before which means that the exclusion of warp densities did not impair the model note however that three regression coefficients in the predictor section are now fairly lower than the corresponding values in table ii this means that the modified regression with two independent variables yields a more reliable and robust model in either case there still remains a percent of the variability in the air permeability data that are not linearly explicable seeking an enhanced model explicit or implicit that will capture the nonlinear aspects of the relation under question we propose here to investigate ann as one of possible alternatives nonlinear approach artificial neural networks anns are algorithmic structures derived from a simplified concept of the human brain structure their various types have already been successfully employed in a wide variety of application fields their major functionalities are function approximators this functionality is exploited in system input output pattern recognition classification problems under their function approximator form anns have served as a powerful modeling tool able to capture and represent almost any type of input output relation either linear or nonlinear the shortcoming of such an ann based modeling solution is that the model is implicit indeed rather than formulating an explicit input output analytic expression either linear or nonlinear an ann processes and outputs to capture and store knowledge on the system it can subsequently simulate the system or predict output values yet it cannot offer a closed form description of the system internally an ann contains a number of nodes called neurons organized in layers and interconnected into a net like structure neurons can perform parallel computation for data processing and knowledge representation weighted averaging followed by linear or nonlinear operations with operations with the possibility of feedback between layers constitutes the main processing operation in an ann the acquired knowledge is stored as the weight values of the nodes the architecture of a single layer of nodes for a sample ann is shown in figure there exist nodes in this layer in the th node is computed a linear combination of a vector of inputs pr weighted by weights wir and a produced undergoes a transformation by a generally nonlinear function to yield the corresponding th output for all sigmoid log sigmoid hard limiter or even linear types of functions are employed resulting in accordingly varying properties of the network generally the ann architecture is characterized by a large number of simple neuron like processing elements store the knowledge of the network the adaptive adjustment of these weight values while sliding down an error surface constitutes the learning process of the network highly parallel and distributed control an emphasis on learning internal system representations automatically an ann model is specified by its topology node characteristics and training rules adapted to improve the performance of the network by minimizing the error between actual and ideal outputs when the network is presented with a set of known inputs a variety of different network models have already been proposed and used in practical applications such
circuit are clearly visible on the diagrams of fig figure shows the shape of the signal from the pre amp output the useful khz signal is modulated by a parasitic lf component because of variation of the dc component as the scanning element and the sensor the output of the preamp would make its operation unstable ie it would cause pulse dropout or the appearance of false pulses of various widths and frequencies this is clearly seen in fig since the level of the lf component can reach the actuating level of the threshold device at certain instants in order to eliminate this phenomenon a band pass the signal shape at the output of the band pass amplifier is shown in fig as can be seen from the diagram the signal is symmetric relative to the zero level in the absence of an lf component and its phase may or may not coincide with the phase of the signal from the pre amp output since the threshold device is in fact a null detector the actuating threshold is close to zero the time position of the the signal in amplitude the signal shape at the output of the threshold device is shown in fig in the experiments the pulse shaper ensured reliable operation of the entire device with no dropouts of the main pulses and with no false pulses thus by combining a suitably chosen technology for developing sensor disks namely the imposition of a pattern a compact photoelectric sync pulse sensor was able to be created with fairly high reliability that is independent of the mechanical wobbles that unavoidably accompany the operation of a scanner spectral contrasts for landmark navigation thomas kollmeier frank roben wolfram schenck and ralf moller a black skyline of objects in front of a white sky can be obtained from dual channel spectral contrast measures light from sky and natural objects under different conditions of illumination was analyzed by five spectral channels ultraviolet blue green red and near infrared linear discriminant analysis was applied to determine the optimal linear separation between sky and object points a statistical comparison shows that contrasts with large differences in the wavelength of channels specifically ultraviolet infrared blue infrared and ultraviolet red yield the best separation within a single channel the best separation was obtained for ultraviolet light the gain in separation quality when all five channels were included is relatively small introduction and local homing is a process of moving such that the currently perceived image becomes more similar to the memorized snapshot these local methods have a natural extension to long range navigation in the form of topological snapshot based methods relate images to each other that have not only been taken at different locations but also at different may vary over several orders of magnitude in an earlier we suggested that reducing the visual scene to a dark skyline of landmarks in the foreground contrasting with the bright sky blue or cloud covered in the background could be a method to make the landmark information independent of the conditions of illumination the appearance of the landmarks surrounding in the sky are not reliable visual features either thus one may conjecture that the distinction between landmarks and sky is essentially binary with all terrestrial objects appearing as black silhouettes regardless of their actual brightness while the sky provides a white background independent of sun position and cloud cover this leads to the question of what type of be strongest in the uv part of the spectrum since the sky is uv bright while terrestrial materials like soil minerals and vegetation reflect only a small portion of uv radiation uv receptors are virtually blind for differences in the illumination of terrestrial objects whereas those differences are most pronounced in the long wavelength diffuse skylight the curves were obtained from the numerical tool using reflectance measurements from the united states geological survey we see that if the viewing direction moves toward background is increasing in the uv range but decreasing in the ir range with the sun in the back the logarithmic ratio between the irradiance of the blue sky and the reflection from the vegetation is approximately decades in the uv range sun the ratio increases to approximately decades in the uv and is inverted in the ir these relations are also qualitatively confirmed by our measurements thus as will also become clear from our analysis only differences in the uv range are sufficient all wavelengths are easy to separate from the usually much brighter sky even in a single spectral channel the low reflectivity of most materials in the uv range would also allow us to distinguish between the sky and objects even if the objects have a high reflectivity in the human visual range however as we have shown a thresholding operation within the uv range alone may not be sufficient still cases where brightly illuminated objects appear brighter than the sky resulting in a confusion between the two classes moreover changes in the overall light intensity would require a presumably complex mechanism for adapting the threshold since our previous study was striving to explain insect visual homing abilities we suggested a color opponent opponent coding between two channels with logarithmic response amounts to a subtraction of the corresponding signals and is known to remove the overall light intensity from the signal the same principle is also at work in the polarization vision of and was successfully employed on mobile in vertebrates this type of opponent mechanism may have the best separation between the two classes may be accomplished by using two channels with a large distance in thus for robot navigation it might prove to be useful to further increase the wavelength of the second channel beyond the green range to investigate the effect of wavelength distance on the quality of the separation the present study while we are particularly interested in contrasts between uv and a long wavelength channel we will also analyze contrast measures between all pairs
antimicrobials should include the fluoroquinolones and generation cephalosporins for salmonella spp and other enterobacteriaceae the fluoroquinolones and macrolides for campylobacter spp and glycopeptides oxazolidinones and streptogramins for gram positive bacteria such as enterococcus spp by contrast qra models suggest that fluoroquinolones risk to human health eg less than one qaly lost per year for fluoroquinolones and macrolides combined for campylobacter spp and nation virginiamycin for the entire us population a draft qra for virginiamycin completed by fda cvm similarly suggests that quantitative human health risks are may yield quite different results from qra models making it important to decide how to choose between them when they differ this raises the following key empirical question how good are human judgments including expert judgments as guides to effective risk management actions if the proposed alternative to formal quantitative qra calculations is a less formal and less quantitative then it is important to understand how well such processes perform in identifying risk management actions that produce desired consequences similar critical evaluations have already been conducted for stakeholder based decisions with generally reassuring results but not yet for concern driven risk management decisions implemented through expert judgment and consensus human judgment on a variety of prediction and choice tasks under uncertainty has been studied extensively for several decades leading to some striking but very well supported conclusions in general the performance of individual judgments and judgment based decisions compares poorly to the performance of even very simple predicting what will probably happen next in many situations and predicting the probable consequences of alternative actions or interventions hundreds of studies have confirmed this pattern not only in contrived psychological experiments but also for real judgments and decisions with important consequences in business cases human judgment performs relatively poorly compared to even simple quantitative models and methods indeed this effect is so strong that even fitting a simple quantitative model to one s own judgments typically yields predictions that outperform them in psychology the situation has been described as experts who combine a wide array of information using unaided human judgment indeed to date there is no replicable counterexample to this empirical generalization this superiority of sprs statistical prediction rules over clinical judgment has been attributed to two complementary sources the desirable mathematical properties of sprs and the cognitive limitations and biases of human judgment constructing post hoc explanations that sacrifice historical truth for narrative truth all of these biases as well as many others can contribute to a poor use of information especially relative to sprs available evidence suggests that unaided human judgment cannot compete with a more mechanical process that involves of disciplines when provided with identical information sprs tend to achieve greater empirical accuracy than do professionals this remains true when one provides professionals with information not available to the spr and even when one provides the results of the spr itself in which case professionals identify too many exceptions to the rule procedure to several sources many individuals unwavering belief in the efficacy of their own judgment or in the importance of their preferred theoretical identification is a potent stumbling block it is noteworthy that clinical judgments and even less so holistic claims are rarely tolerated when large sums of money are at stake for making is the norm much of the explanation for the relatively poor performance of nonquantitative and judgment based methods can be grouped into the following three areas individual judgments are sensitive to logically irrelevant details of how information is presented for example decisions may be affected by giving probabilities of survival instead of logically equivalent probabilities of mortality by presenting cost information before versus after other information by disaggregating columns within a table or sequences of repeated choices and by including versus excluding information on inferior al schwartz chapman for medical decisions in some circumstances individuals seek out and use logically irrelevant information to make decisions many human judgments tend to overemphasize the importance of human actions compared to other events and conditions in bringing about undesirable consequences served well in furthering the evolution of cooperation in small hunter gatherer societies yet have limited value in improving risk management decisions individual judgments are often insufficiently sensitive to relevant information this can be due to confirmation bias inwhich information is sought to support or confirm already formed plous it also arises when decision makers pay attention to only a few attributes of a complex decision problem in deciding what to do even though these factors do not suffice to predict outcomes or to distinguish between good and bad choices for achieving desired ends human judgments also often suffer from overconfidence with uncertainty around best judgments or guesses being systematically underestimated information is often combined and used ineffectively decisions is disregarded or underweighted decision makers often consider components of portfolios independently neglecting the portfolio in which they are embedded similarly they may inappropriately evaluate in isolation choices made within sequential plans decisions based on presentation et al table i summarizes some well studied cognitive heuristics and biases that affect how information is processed and used in human judgment and decision making in the absence of formal qra and decision analysis these heuristics and biases affect lay and expert judgments about causality and risk are strongly biased by prior beliefs and by envisioned causal mechanisms these biases can lead to severe underweighting of empirical evidence and excessive resistance to new evidence and data ineffective decisions again even relatively simple quantitative models often provide more useful and reliable insights and conclusions than expert judgment based approaches performance of consensus judgments should make the required judgments thus the question arises of how well these team based expert decision processes can be expected to perform group decision processes have been studied extensively over the past several decades like individuals groups due in large part to confirmation bias but also to poor sharing and use of individual information within the group unlike individuals groups can also be subject to strategic misrepresentation of knowledge and beliefs by group members empirically
along the path therefore every pair of information systems in the associated two clusters is semantically interoperable via this sequence of ontology mappings any length of mapping sequence between two nodes is acceptable because certain amount of information can flow from one node to another via this path in practice a long sequence of ontology mappings may lead to large information loss and computing overhead in data mapping and processing however as we will see in sec in small world phenomenon nodes are usually connected with a short chain of edges the small world phenomenon is separation ie typically only six edges between two connected nodes in a massive network lemma if the ontology network is fully connected every pair of information systems in the system network is semantically interoperable and the whole information system network has fluidity proof if the ontology network is fully connected every pair of ontologies in the ontology network is connected according to lemma every pair of associated in the system network is semantically interoperable via a sequence of ontology mappings that means every pair of systems from any two clusters is semantically interoperable via a sequence of ontology mappings since all systems within the same cluster commit to the same ontology they are semantically interoperable with the each other therefore every pair of systems in the system network is semantically interoperable with or without ontology mappings some interesting questions remain assuming that global ontology mapping activities can be well organized what is the minimum effort to get the ontology graph fully connected without loops conversely what is the worst case to get the ontology graph fully connected lemma in an ontology network with ontologies at least ontology mappings and at most network proof for a graph with vertices straightforwardly at least edges are needed to get the graph fully connected for example link these vertices with a line conversely in the worst case it could take edges to get a graph with vertices fully connected ie vertices are fully meshed before a new edge is added to get the last isolated vertex connected according system network has fluidity if is a very large number it could take significant amount of work to build ontology mappings and get the whole information system network connected it seems probable however that in practice there will be dominant ontologies in a network that are much more popular than others most information systems may use these ontologies to describe their data and these ontologies have large network therefore even if we only build ontology mappings between these dominant ontologies the information system network could still achieve great information fluidity for example if system nodes use the same dominant ontologies to describe their data according to lemma we only need to build mappings to get these dominant nodes fully connected and the whole information system network could still obtain in a small network ontology mapping activities could be well organized as discussed in sec with a careful design of minimal mappings to obtain maximal fluidity in reality however it seems more likely that ontology network may grow over time with clusters forming around ontologies built for a specific purpose and later mappings being developed to provide greater interoperability among those being widely used thus new ontology nodes are added to the network new ontology mappings are built between existing nodes incrementally given the distributed nature and scale of the semanticweb eventually it may grow to a massive network with no truly dominant nodes due to its scale and complexity it is not realistic to organize this network rigorously instead the ontology network is more likely to grow based on a market driven approach with much reuse of existing ontologies and growing between those popular for example if an ontology is very popular among information systems other ontologies are more likely to build mappings with this ontology in order to achieve better information fluidity as a consequence this ontology may even become more popular recently it has been demonstrated that many large networks share certain universal characteristics that can be described by so called the power law barabasi et that a power law degree distribution and small world phenomenon emerges naturally from a stochastic growth process in which new vertices link to existing ones with a probability proportional to the degree of the target vertex chung and analyzed random graphs with general expected degree distributions and special emphasis is given to spare graphs with average degree a small constant in this section we introduce their complex graph theory first and then we apply their arket driven network model built for the ontology network random graph theory assume that a random graph has nodes and a given expected degree sequences the vertex vi is assigned with a vertex weight wi that is the expected degree of this node the edges are chosen independently and randomly according to the vertex weights as follows the probability that there is an edge between vi and vj is proportional to the product wiwj where and are not be distinct there are possible loops at vi with probability proportional to ie this assumption ensures that for all and according to eq for a node its expected degree is wi here we denote a random graph with a given expected degree sequence by the expected average degree of a random graph is defined to be d ie vol vi wi in particular the volume of vol of is just wi with regard to a random graph like this chung and proved the following theorem here almost surely means that the following results hold with probability one theorem for a random graph with a given expected degree sequence having average degree d almost surely is almost surely at least if d the volume of the unique giant component is almost surely at least model and parameters in our model we assume that the system network has nodes and the ontology network has nodes as discussed in sec every information
the starting point for tomorrow s innovations and that today s innovative firms are more likely to innovate in the future in specific technologies and along specific technologies a low degree of cumulativeness therefore indicates a more radical innovation in this case firms in table new industries are often created by radical innovations that constitute new technological paradigms in the exploratory stage major product innovations are taking place which eventually consolidated into a dominant design while market volume is low growth rates are which is characterized by high growth later an industry shakeout and consolidation signals the transition to the mature stage with lower growth rates in the fourth stage the stagnant phase two challenges for established firms are of interest for our discussion first since further growth opportunities are low in the stagnant market established firms will look second there is a threat that new entrants who attempt to redefine the industry via architectural or radical innovations erode the competitive advantages of incumbents both of these challenges have in common that product diversification and the threat of innovative entrants are often characterized by low degrees of cumulativeness innovative new entrants we discuss each stage in turn and ask how complementary activities are coordinated how the internal use and decision rights are structured how the pre market appropriation problem is dealt with we offer propositions for each stage of the industry life cycle and the corresponding technological capabilities are key areas for organizational learning as outlined above strategic direction is needed to coordinate the complementary investments and learning processes to these assets and to guide the initial search for a consistent activity system strategic direction allows to rapidly change learning lower level managers and other employees behavior are loosely defined and open to constant revision through strategic direction since there is a constant need to experiment with the evolving activity system formal rules only play a minor role in coordinating complementary activities therefore the organization relies on strategic placed on learning and experimenting subsequently the organizational structure is organic the employees scope for discretionary action is broad implying a low degree of internal division of labor the above mentioned objectives and the corresponding use and decision rights to achieve them channel the behavior of the employees learn and to prevent critical employees from leaving the firm since a web of complementary resources is just beginning to be developed the internal appropriation problem is a serious threat to an innovative firm surplus sharing may mitigate the appropriation problem above that a crucial task for general management is the rapid buildup or acquire them externally through mergers or acquisitions complementary assets do not only guard the firm against internal appropriation but they are an important early barrier to imitation and a first step toward a sustainable competitive advantage proposition a business in the exploratory bind key employees growth stage during the growth stage the degree of cumulativeness of new knowledge increases with the establishment of a dominant design product innovations are becoming relatively more incremental the creation of knowledge is still dominant but the areas of the firm s learning activities shift from product have already been identified building on their experimentations during the exploratory stage early movers have established elementary consistent activity systems only if the firm changes its business strategy and corresponding activity system will the full need for strategic direction come up again formal rules and specific well defined more easily accomplished correspondingly learning processes multiply and accelerate and become more decentralized and incremental changes in the internal allocation of use and decision rights reflect this shift toward more incremental learning processes residual use and decision rights become more specified market conditions contracts are becoming more complete and the room for employees discretion narrows the organization is therefore in a transitory stage towards a more mechanistic structure the complementary resources of the firm are still developing but they already provide an important competitive advantage for early but must also experiment with an activity system since early movers have already established elementary activity systems experimenting and learning is more expensive for late movers this appears to be one of the reasons why early movers often outperform later entrants furthermore the internal appropriation problem is becoming important challenge the static internal rent appropriation through high wages begins to be the more serious threat and firms are more reluctant to establish organizational schemes for surplus sharing for later employees proposition a business in the growth stage tends to be characterized by a lower intensity of strategic direction and a more stable the firm mature stage in the mature stage market growth slows and price competition often intensifies product innovations are incremental and directed toward product differentiation the efficient usage of existing resources becomes increasingly important as technological opportunities and of labor is high with a heavy reliance on formal rules a deep and highly differentiated vertical structure and inactive strategic direction the level of incremental organizational learning depends on the exact nature of the industry but it will usually be smaller than in the earlier stages of industry evolution new resources respectively use and decision rights are narrowly defined and well specified and often require no revision the transition toward a more mechanistic structure is thus completed during the mature stage the textbook principal agent theory can be fruitfully applied here concerning appropriation the problem of of the surplus generated by their employees proposition a business in the mature stage tends to be characterized by a very low intensity of strategic direction and a highly differentiated organizational structure a mechanistic organization and strong complementary assets stagnant stage incumbent firms have sustainable competitive advantages over new firms architectural or radical innovations by new entrants may erode competitive advantages as they change the complementarities among activities and in the case of radical innovations require new resources as well an adapted activity system is needed to successfully it is only after developing new resources that they begin to adjust their activity systems established firms are
than other groups environmental benefits were considered slightly less important than the social benefits mentioned these functions of green areas were however more important to women retirees and residents who had lived in helsinki more increased with age residents appreciated relatively sparsely built and green city structure in suburbs and infilling the existing housing areas was strongly disapproved of the infill of the current city structure is most strongly opposed by new comers and families with small children the respondents agreed that forests are an inseparable part of the image of housing areas in the suburbs expected and appreciated rural landscapes existing in the area were also highly appreciated although specially designed and constructed parks were present in the study area they were generally considered to be less important than other types of more natural green areas planned parks were relatively desired more by retired people and lower educated residents and winter in summer over of respondents visit their areas at least two to three times a week while this number falls to winter a third use green areas daily in summer and a fifth in winter the most active users are residents between and years of age and families with small children students and school children use the green areas less than other groups especially during winter areas at least relatively well and that they knew their local green areas very well less than a quarter knew the areas relatively poorly negative values were identified less often within the planning area than positive the most frequently identified positive values were opportunities for activity and beautiful landscape furthermore places for freedom and space culture and attractive park values were least often identified from the relatively small number of ca nt say answers it can probably be concluded that respondents generally understood the social values presented to them and thus identified green area qualities on the map a thematic map for each quality was plotted from the votes different ideas of the kind of environments in which these values can be found for example respondents indicated areas with the feeling of a forest a fifth stated however that woodlands in the case study area do not provide the experience of being in a forest environment typically the feeling of forest is found in larger natural forest areas with natural ground vegetation the tree stands are mature and relatively probably owing to the scarcity of larger mature forest areas within the study area half open areas with pine forests were also pointed out as places experienced as a forest about two thirds had experienced peace and quiet somewhere in the case study area a fifth considered that the and where large roads are situated further away the landscape types are a mixture of open landscapes and diverse forest vegetation with mature tree stands a synthesis map revealing the highlights of the area is based on the areas scoring highest suggested as regionally valuable areas and acknowledged by many users these are large natural ones with open landscapes and diverse forest these the areas also provide a lot of landscape variation an allotment plot area an attractive pasture area recalling historical land use and high cliffs to climb and watch the scenery from the network and connections between them is probably a key to their appreciation although the whole environment and neighboring land use types influence the general appreciation of these areas the problems and claims were written in the comments part of the questionnaire dissatisfaction with green areas is usually caused by untidiness in particular litter and dog faeces but vandalism and noise also decrease the experienced social quality of areas on the one hand some respondents felt that unmanaged areas with abundant understorey vegetation were unpleasant and in some cases positive and negative qualities were found to a certain extent in the same area in addition lack of management causes irritation and the areas are seen as neglected and uncontrolled the most problematic areas are located mostly along main roads with noise problems and some areas within the suburb of kontula which has acquired the image of a lower status housing residents identified a favorite place within the study area this was typically situated within a kilometer of home the most important being a former horse pasture and two high open rock outcrops with old pine stands the descriptors most used to describe favorite places were peacefulness the feeling of forest naturalness and functionality these qualities the suburbs consequently people appreciated peaceful relatively large natural areas as well as open landscapes with a rural sense of space favourite areas however were not necessarily the most used in this study area one reason perhaps being that high landmarks with steep slopes are not easily accessible moreover since one of the main expectations of residents is to find peace and quiet places nor are they necessarily situated very close to residential areas but are still an important part of the scenery the mindscape and the geographical identity of the area the relatively low attractiveness of green areas within the study area is highlighted by the fact that two thirds of respondents named a favorite place outside the study area against the named one within it most often mentioned was the close to the study area in the north east moreover forested recreation areas near the baltic located further south were also popular these areas got all the votes discussion this study area comprised several housing areas some of which experience social problems such as high unemployment and a low quality built environment the results confirm previous al a household survey in the whole of eastern helsinki also reported that local people consider urban nature and daily outdoor recreation opportunities to be the main factors enhancing their everyday well being although green areas seem to be important to all income classes allowing construction on existing green areas is however better off areas residents in the study area appreciated the relatively sparsely built city structure
feasting on a roadside corpse with an arrow buried in its face therefore when northern mexicans spoke of the enemy in and they as often meant indios as nortcamericanos the ruinous legacy of fifteen years of raiding and the ongoing threat of indian violence left large segments of northern mexico s and probably unwilling to resist the us army in the northeast for example state officials were ordered to muster all males between the ages of sixteen and fifty against the americans while the orders exempted those places most exposed to raids many local authorities still demurred insisting that their communities needed the men to patrol against indians occasionally this scenario un folded on a grand scale in late santa anna labored to amass a huge army and defeat taylor mexico city called upon the states to raise men but recognizing the troubles that the north faced from both indians and americans insisted on contributions from only three northern states chihuahua durango and zacatecas suspicious of santa anna and more importantly facing acute threats from apaches and comanches none of the three sent any men in february the mexican army lost the battle of buena vista by the narrowest of margins had zacatecas met their quotas santa anna s force would have been increased by one fifth perhaps enough to win the battle and shift the entire dynamic of the war finally the legacy and ongoing reality of indian raiding inhibited the emergence of a popular insurgency against the us occupation in the north while northerners did organize against the invaders most notably in new mexico and california guerrilla activity in the north never seriously threatened taylor s insurgent attacks on stragglers and the occasional mule train and even responded to such acts by inflicting severe collective punishments upon mexican settlements but cooler heads recognized that the insurgency was but a shadow of what it could be traveling with the us army josiah gregg observed that the key northern insurgent bad fewer than a thousand or even a hundred men although northeastern mexico should have been able to produce a to wage irregular warfare against american troops had it materialized such an insurgency would likely have made it militarily and politically impossible for polk to open up the decisive campaign into central mex but taylor s occupation did not come under serious guerrilla threat polk did send general winfield scott to central mexico in early and the americans did even complicity with the invader durango s editors assailed those who accused the state s population of treason why because we have not fielded armies that have been impossible to raise because they need be composed of men paid in cash and our brothers have been assassinated by the barbarians or else fled far away from their fury chihuahua s representatives likewise tried to defend their honor they reminded their compatriots that chihuahua had been afflicted and desolated fifteen years by the savages drowned in the blood of the men and in the lamentations of the widows and the orphans an ideal theater in which to showcase the power of the united states subtract the irony and expansionists in washington would have agreed to their way of thinking chihuahua and the rest of northern mexico was not only an ideal showcase for us power but a land in desperate need of it by the time senators began openly debating how much territory to demand from expansionists could draw on more than a decade of observations to describe a mexican north the empty of meaningful mexican history and by all appearances increasingly empty of mexicans themselves so it was that senator edward hannegan could defend taking half of mexico s territory simply by characterizing it as empty essential to us useless to her a wilderness uninhabited save by bands of roving savages senator robert hunter said that he did not believe it practicable to people from overspreading that country the mexican people are now receding before the indian and this affords a new argument in favor of our occupation of the territory which would otherwise fall into the occupation of the savage these perceptions should be taken seriously us leaders turned to tales of indians attacking mexicans for more than just rhetorical cover congressmen editors and administration officials pointed to mexico s ruinous war with frontier indians compelling and to their minds honest evidence that mexicans were incapable of developing their northern lands this is not to say that everyone subscribing to this view also wanted to acquire mexican territory politicians ambivalent about or even opposed to the war also talked about raiding but they incorporated indians into arguments against a cession for example invoking the well known fact that raiders had encroached upon and broken up many of the settlements of the in the north leaving behind mainly indigenous mexicans unfit for american political life in other words rhetoric about mexico s indian war was not so much part of a calculated expansionist argument as it was indicative of assumptions that by had become common across the political spectrum indeed one of the men who spoke most earnestly about indians was often at odds with the expansionist program john calhoun abstained from the initial vote on resident s machinations and thought that acquiring significant territory below the rio grande which is what polk and some of his cabinet privately advocated would hurt the slave states so at two different moments when he feared that events might shift in favor of a larger cession calhoun made speeches in support of having us forces unilaterally withdraw to the rio grande and keeping everything above first he justified taking new mexico and california in part by pointing s singular failure with the indians it was a remarkable fact in the history of this continent he said that for the first time the aborigines had been pressing upon the population of european extraction a year later calhoun added an argument about defense well the whole
three and two units are transferred from the end of the dummy start activity to the start of and respectively at time two resource units are released by activity and transferred to the start of its immediate successor activity at time activity releases its resources three resource units are transferred to the start of its successor activity of the remaining two resource units one unit is transferred to the start of activity and another to the start of activity these resource flows and impose two extra resource arcs indicated by the dotted arcs and these arcs induce extra zero lag finish start precedence constraints that were not present in the original project network in the same way resource flows and impose two extra precedence relations and note that the resource flow does not result in an extra precedence constraint indeed activity was already a transitive successor of activity in the original project network also also the precedence arcs and are not used to transfer any resources figure shows an alternative flow network and as a result an alternative resource allocation for the same minimal makespan schedule shown in figure in this flow network the resource arc has disappeared and is replaced by an arc carrying a flow activity disruptions and stability decisions for the same baseline schedule each represented by a different resource flow network the possibility of generating different resource flows for the same baseline schedule may have a serious impact on the robustness of the corresponding reactive scheduling procedure in this article we assume that uncertainty stems from activity duration variability when information becomes known about durations dj that take on a realization in this schedule revision process we require the resource allocation to remain constant that is the same resource flow is maintained such a reactive policy is preferred when specialist resources cannot be transferred between activities at short notice for instance in a multiproject environment in which it is necessary to book key staff or scarce equipment with high learning requirements or setup costs in advance to guarantee their availability which makes last minute changes in resource allocation unachievable refer again to the resource flow networks shown in figures and the project manager can only obtain four of the five required resource units from activity s immediate predecessor activity in figure activity receives its fifth resource unit from activity whereas in figure it gets it from activity to end at time while activity is scheduled to end at time the resource flow network in figure is probably the better choice indeed activity has to undergo a delay of at least six time units before it will affect the start of activity while a delay of two time units of the end of activity suffices to delay the start of activity start times sn our objective is to generate the resource flows ijk such that the stability of the baseline schedule is maximized formally problem subject to the objective function in equation is to maximize schedule stability that is to minimize the weighted expected deviation between planned and realized a feasible resource flow network equation specifies the railway scheduling reactive policy j the realized start time of activity should be the maximum of the planned start time j in the baseline schedule and the maximum finish time of the predecessors predj of activity in the network equation imposes integrality on the flow variables problem has been shown to be ordinarily np hard by leus for of a number of machine scheduling problems with stability objective we refer to leus and herroelen algorithms for stable resource allocation literature overview generating feasible resource flows artigues et al present a simple method to generate a feasible resource flow by extending a parallel schedule generation scheme to derive the flows during scheduling the algorithm iteratively reroutes flow quantities until a feasible can easily be decoupled from the schedule generation for all resource types flow is initialized with value x while all other flows are set to recall that is defined as the set of time instances in the input schedule that correspond with activity start times t j the remaining steps of the procedure are described in algorithm this algorithm attempts to generate a feasible resource flow network without attempting to maximize schedule stability or any other measure of performance it will be used as the worst case benchmark in the computational experiment described later on branch and bound leus and leus and herroelen propose a branch and bound model for resource allocation for projects with variable activity durations the allocation is required to be compatible with a deterministic baseline schedule and the objective is the stability objective given by equation constraint propagation is search to accelerate the algorithm the authors obtain computational results on a set of randomly generated networks however they restrict their attention to a single resource type and assume exponential activity disruption lengths extension to multiple resource types would require a revision of the branching decisions taken by the branch and bound procedure and the consistency tests involved in the constraint propagation policella oddi smith cesta proposes a procedure referred to as chaining for constructing a chained partial order schedule from a given precedence and resource feasible baseline schedule the author defines a partial order schedule as a set of solutions for the rcpsp that can be compactly represented by a temporal graph which is an extension of the precedence graph where denotes the set of nodes with a set of additional arcs ar introduced to remove the so called minimal forbidden sets a minimal forbidden set is defined for an rcpsp instance as the minimal set of precedence unrelated activities that cannot be scheduled together due to the resource constraints the chained pos generated by the chaining procedure has the property that its earliest start schedule corresponds to the baseline generation of a chained pos is presented in algorithm the first step sorts all activities in increasing order of their starting times in the baseline schedule
then rearranging hence we derive alternatively we can rearrange equation to derive ui and yi competition to unit costs and cross multiplying these equations for industries and gives us hence we can derive the ratio ws in this formulation ws is higher the larger is pe or ae and the smaller is pm or am an increase in au as will reduce ws this is the same result as in davis and reeve and haskel and slaughter changes in the ces share parameters however note following johnson in the ces case specialization can occur for relatively small changes in goods prices if specialization does occur beyond this point traded goods prices do not affect relative wages though changes in factor supplies will have an influence in this framework prices of all goods are set on the world markets and consumer demand at home does not affect prices or output if we assume the economy is small and open this means that the production and consumption sides of the economy are separable and given our focus on the determination of relative wage change we can concentrate on modelling the production side alone the same argument applies for the short run model to which of trade and wages we formulate a short run trade and wages model similar to the long run model above but in which labor cannot move costlessly between sectors due to adjustment costs these may be search costs transportation or removal costs transaction costs in housing markets or even psychological costs and preference for location in the model we assume these transaction costs create a wedge between the wage needed to be offered in another sector in order for a worker to move wage rates in sectors which are expanding following an international price shock to the economy are thus higher than those in contracting sectors where labor shedding occurs we start out by looking at the theoretical properties of this model in the model factor will only move from a declining sector to an ie if and likewise for factor if it also faces adjustment costs this means that a sector can in principle fall into one of three potential categories it can be an expanding sector where employers pay a high wage it can be a declining sector where the wage is lower but adjustment costs are lower or it can be a static sector in the latter case the sector does not find it attractive to move to another sector once adjustment costs are taken into account but not so high that it attracts labor from the other sector in expanding sectors we define the wage gross of adjustment costs as wg wg ue the wage net of adjustment costs is then wn same as the wage in expanding sectors ue net of adjustment costs which in turn equals wg potentially there ue wage paid by employers wug as lui this allows us to characterize the difference in sectoral wage rates as follows in expanding sectors lui disadvantaged sectors benchmark levels of employment of and in each sector as and the levels of employment if nobody leaves the sector in a declining sector adjustment costs mean that the the sector is eclining the adjustment costs borne by those factors which move are given by if adjustment costs are denominated in units of labor this reduces effective economy wide endowments now less mobile in response to a price or other shock in particular there is a range of traded goods prices over which factors will not move and this is wider the larger are and s following neary reduced mobility reduces the effects of product price changes on relative wage changes in both sectors because of the effects of the adjustment costs on factor movements and relative wages the specialization effects in a classical heckscher less likely to occur the modified model is easier to reconcile with observed data where extreme changes to specialization are not observed if we assume that in the long run and s are zero a price change will have larger effects on output employment and wages in the long run than over the short run the long run model is simply the short run model with the parameters and s set to zero a nested ces function to combine three factors unskilled labor skilled labor and capital skilled and unskilled labor are mobile across sectors with a common wage ws or wu respectively while capital is sector specific set at a level ki a ces nesting structure is used in which the two types of labor used in each sector are combined to form aggregate labor li using a ces aggregation this is then combined with capital in a cobb ouglas sectoral output yi the ces aggregation function for the sectoral labor aggregate li is of the same form as equation if we define an aggregate labor wage wi as an average of skilled and unskilled wages for each sector then the first order conditions for employment of each type of labor in a competitive market can be written as dli and dsi we can obtain dli dui and rearrange this to express the two wages wu and ws in terms of wi li ui and si which implies that the aggregate labor wage wi can be normalized to equal the average of skilled and unskilled wages in the sector the cobb douglas aggregation of li and ki to form yi is given by yi to use these models in decomposition experiments to assess the relative importance of trade surges and technological change for changes in wage inequality we calibrate each to observed data for and for the uk since our aim is to compare the effects of different trade model structures upon decomposition and since one of the central structures which we wish to investigate is the heckscher hlin framework our the heckscher ohlin model has a series
then there should be a positive association between either the number or value of purchase transactions and a prior information release thus if insiders trade actively to profit from private information in a period then the coefficient estimate on the abnormal returns at a disclosure that follows the period should be positive if insiders trade passively to profit from private information in a period then the coefficient estimate on the abnormal returns at a disclosure that precedes the period should be negative prior research reports mixed evidence on the association between insider trades before the earnings announcement and the announcement accordingly we predict no association between the trade measures and aret ea in period because jeopardy is high before the announcement we further predict no association between the trade measures and aret fd in period given the lower jeopardy insiders face for active trade after the earnings announcement we predict positive associations between the trade measures and aret fd in period negative associations between the trade measures and period and negative associations between the trade measures and both aret ea and aret fd in period table regressions of signed frequency and signed value of insider trade on signed event returns for the regressions in panel a the dependent variable is freqp for the regressions corresponding to period for the regressions in panel the dependent variable is valuep for the regressions corresponding to period all variables are as defined in tables and ln is the natural logarithm of mv regressions control for firm calendar year quarter and fiscal quarter fixed effects cook s distance statistic is used to eliminate influential observations significance levels of and based on two tailed tests are denoted by and respectively active and passive trading within periods and main tests follow from the discussion above for each of the three periods in table specifications correspond to period to period and to period thus the dependent variable is in panel a and in panel in specifications it is in panel a and in panel in specifications and the dependent variable is in panel a and in panel in specifications in the specifications results are presented for all quarters pooled in the and specifications results are reported for the interim quarters and the fourth quarters separately regarding period table indicates that associations between insider trades and the forthcoming announcement and filing are insignificant with the exception of a positive coefficient estimate on aret ea in specifications and of panel a where the coefficient estimate is at the using a two tailed test thus there is some evidence that insiders buy more often before good news earnings announcements in quarters but no evidence of this in quarter and no evidence that the value of shares traded varies with the abnormal return at the announcement the lack of any significant association with aret fd in period suggests that the value of insiders trades in period is not increased by the desire to information in the filing not conveyed by the earnings the results for period are sharply different the pattern of insider trades in this period suggests that insiders use their private information to derive both active and passive profits consistent with the realization of active profits insider trades measured in panel a by the signed frequency of trade is positively associated at better than the with the abnormal return of the filing note from panel a that the coefficient estimates for period on aret fd in specifications and are more than times the coefficient on aret ea in specifications and which implies that for a given abnormal return at the disclosure the effect on insider trades is more than times greater in period compared to period the significantly positive coefficient estimate on aret fd in period implies that insiders buy before filings interpreted by market as good news and sell before filings interpreted as bad we turn next to panel where the dependent variable is the signed value of shares traded when all quarters are pooled the coefficient estimate on aret fd is significantly positive at the using a two tailed test thus there is evidence that the value of shares purchased by insiders is higher before a good news filing when the observations for quarters are analyzed separately the sign and magnitude of the coefficient estimates on aret fd is similar but the relationship is insignificant consistent with the realization of passive profits insider trades measured either by the signed frequency or signed value of trade is negatively associated at the with the abnormal return at the preceding announcement the significantly negative coefficient estimate on aret ea in period is consistent with the notion that after announcements interpreted by the market as good news and buy after announcements interpreted as bad for period the coefficient estimates on the abnormal returns at the preceding filing and announcement both are significantly negative which is consistent with trade in period being driven in part by insiders passive use of private information such an association with past news strategy under which insiders condition their trades on past stock price movements so that they buy after bad news events and sell after good news events we control partially for the possibility of contrarian trading by including in the regressions prior retp the return over the six months before the beginning of period despite this contrarian trading with respect to the past filing or earnings announcement cannot be ruled out in specification of table have an economic interpretation for instance the coefficient estimate of on aret fd in panel a specification implies that an abnormal return of the filing increases the net number of insider purchases in period by an average of this coefficient implies that if firms experience abnormal returns at the filing of at one of those firms there would be one more insider purchase an abnormal return of the filing implies that the that firm quarter increases by on average from table the mean value of the net stock trades by firm
tax income and a dummy variable equal to firms that reported in their financial statements tax loss carry forward to proxy for the inability of the firm to take full advantage of the tax benefits of ownership these two measures are found to be significant suggesting that capitalized leases are used more heavily by us firms for which the tax benefits of ownership appear low graham et al compute the marginal effective corporate tax rates of a sample of us companies they show that a change in the marginal tax rate from to percent will on average result in percent decrease in the firm s ratio of operating leases to firm value in contrast capital leases are unrelated to before financing tax rates using uk data lasfer and levis report that taxes affect the leasing decision of large companies only unlike small companies the tax rates of large lessee companies are substantially lower than the non lessee large companies in contrast small companies of their leasing level graham however argues that any relationship between leasing and taxes is likely to be spurious because leasing endogenously reduces the effective tax rate of the lessee as leasing expense is tax deductible and the definition of leases in the financial statements is not the same as that of the tax authority these particular problems make the testing of the impact of taxes on leasing complicated an attempt to solve these complications scope of this paper we nevertheless expect lessee companies to have a lower effective tax rate and tax loss recoverable than non lessee companies if leasing is driven by tax considerations leasing and efficiency in general real estate is the largest asset type in the balance sheet according to bootle uk private sector commercial real estate is worth other fixed assets real estate is not depreciable and usually reported in the balance sheet at revaluation value if the real estate is leased the rental payment in the profit and loss account for the interest and the capital repayments however if the real estate is owned by the company on freehold basis they do not incur any expenses apart from the maintenance and repairs as a result companies that own freehold real estate may not consider it as a costly asset and they are less use it efficiently for example bootle shows that companies that lease their real estate use it more efficiently as they save up to percent on space per employee at company level data on the occupancy rate is not instead we test the hypothesis that companies that lease their real estate are more likely to be more efficient by for example holding a lower amount of inventory of raw materials and finished goods in contrast companies will hold large inventory if their real estate is considered as non cost asset this issue has not been tested in the previous literature and will highlight the extent to which leasing leads to operating efficiency the market valuation of leasing the analysis above suggests that there are costs and benefits of leasing which are likely to be more pronounced for the real estate given its importance in firm s balance estate to save in taxes to increase their efficiency to reduce their leverage when real estate is reported off balance sheet and to use cash that would have been tied up in freehold real estate to finance good investment projects however companies are likely to benefit from owning freehold real estate as they can use it as collateral for their loans sell it in case of bankruptcy to pay back debt holders and shareholders use it as a buffer stock in when necessary and use it as a hedge against inflation in addition companies that own freehold real estate will not be committed to rent payments and rent increases will benefit from real estate capital appreciation and they will be able to inflate their earnings as freehold real estate is not depreciable given these costs and benefits it is an empirical question as to whether leasing creates or destroys value previous studies provide an indirect evidence of the market valuation of real estate through the analysis of the share price behavior around the announcement of sales and leaseback for example slovin et al show that on the announcement date share prices increase abnormally by percent suggesting that financial market participants view the sales and leaseback of real estate as a positive event given that sales and leaseback is similar to raising debt perception is even higher as the abnormal returns are negative when companies raise debt thus companies gain significantly by opting for sales and leaseback of their real estate rather than the borrow and buy alternative in addition this positive market valuation implies that the market views the benefits of leasing more highly than the costs in other words the loss of collateral and the potential increase in the cost of debt that follow after the real than counteracted by the benefits of generating cash to use in other parts of the business and becoming more efficient in the use of leased real estate while these event studies focus on the short term market reaction the question still remains as to whether in the long run companies that lease create more value than freehold companies we therefore expect the market valuation of companies that lease their real estate assets to be higher than that of companies that own their freehold if the benefits of leasing outweigh the costs data and methodology we first select all quoted companies in the london stock exchange with year ends spanning from january when the accounting standards for leasing became effective to december financial companies are excluded because of their specific characteristics to avoid survivorship bias companies that are currently trading as well as companies that were delisted over the sample period after becoming or being taken over are included in the sample the final sample includes a total of uk quoted companies resulting in pooled
which also embody uncertainty and so must be addressed to enable critical appreciation of the results there are several important methodological decisions that need to be made when creating indices one important distinction is between aggregate indices where the constituent parts are not recognisable and composite indices where they are the indices here combine both approaches the final index is an aggregate figure but this is made up of a number of indicator choice and weighting both indices are theory driven that is the indicators have been selected to capture theoretical determinants of adaptive capacity based on literature and expert judgement weights have also been applied to both indices both in the calculation of the composite sub indices and the final aggregate indices reflecting the relative importance of each each index thus the outcome gives a ranking of relative adaptive capacity rather than an absolute current status of adaptive capacity an important factor to note is that the final indices refer to the current status of adaptive capacity the timescale element is a particular cause of uncertainty when trying to determine adaptive capacity as outlined above adaptive is impossible to represent the inter relationships between different determinants or driving processes that interact in different ways according to the temporal and spatial scale of analysis thus to reduce further uncertainty in predicting the future status both indices present current snapshots of adaptive capacity clearly there is some contradiction in using a change in government could dramatically alter the status of a number of determinants of adaptive capacity one study has embraced the use of socio economic scenarios in an attempt to capture how adaptive capacity might change over time but the results of this merely compound uncertainty in climate projections to give an unwieldy range which has little practical application using the the means of increasing future adaptive capacity in addition to questions about how the driving forces will change over time using current adaptive capacity also raises questions over how to validate the effectiveness of indicators one of the main reasons for this uncertainty is not being able to validate the effectiveness of the indicators to capture intangible processes some indicators assess their validity through correlations with past disaster data but this method is less than ideal as it too is working across timescales linking current vulnerability to past events another element of uncertainty that must therefore be understood with relation to capacity based on existing insights elements of uncertainty in the national level and household level indices considering the choices and assumptions made in the methodology of index construction thus incorporates elements of uncertainty that are common to both indices the naci relies on national level data from international organizations demographic structure institutional stability and wellbeing global interconnectivity fig outlines the structure of the naci showing the composite subindices and their component indicators the naci uses a theory driven approach where relevant indicators are deduced based on hypothesized links between development environment and resilience hence the major uncertainty issue is that of construct validity the key challenge is to derive simple and easily comprehensible uncontroversial in capturing the underlying determinant of adaptive capacity in the case of the economic wellbeing and stability sub index for example many have cautioned against assuming a direct relationship between gdp and vulnerability however whilst there is widespread acceptance of the complexity and contested nature of the environmental risk and hazard exposure both pre event through enabling anticipatory coping strategies and post event in responding to a shock the use of other indicators in the index is more contested for example that relating to natural resource dependence a measure of dependence on water resources is critical for adaptive capacity as all human populations of dependence on water resources is to examine the proportion of the population dependent on water for their productive livelihoods the constraint of only using internationally reputable data sources means that percentage rural population is the most suitable proxy this choice of indicator assumes that rural populations largely rely on primary industries and hence are dependent on natural resources whose that rural populations are dependent on activities such as agriculture whilst once widely accepted that substantial proportions of rural african income was derived from the land up to percent this is now a contested area concurrent with the trend for diversification has come de agrarianization or a long term process of occupational adjustment income earning agriculturally based modes of livelihoods nothing in these debates on the changing nature of livelihoods in rural africa suggests however that populations are any less exposed or sensitive to climate change impacts over time as discussed in the section above for the most contested areas there is in addition to uncertainty in the construct with the global interconnectivity sub index in fig for example the indicator is the trade balance of a country globalization scholars argue that while experiences are diverse economic liberalization and integration into the global economy tends to exploit particular sectors of society and in turn reinforce existing inequalities in the global economy creating winners and losers at a variety of the poor performance of african economies and the relationship to external factors or domestic policy is a controversial area the debate comes down to the relative importance of geography and institutions in explaining recent growth patterns collier and gunning and others argue that while external policy issues associated corruption and democratic governance an alternative explanation focuses on so called destiny factors external exogenous factors such as whether a country is land locked and can access global markets and the waves of globalization and domestic destiny associated with disease incidence unreliable rainfall and related factors wealth arises from social physical and and others argue that more fundamentally even the nature of institutions has historical and geographical explanations thus deriving relevant indicators of adaptive capacity related to integration into the world economy involves collapsing complex forward the naci in table assumes that those national economies with a negative trade balance are locked into external
one woman to do it to another woman the correct meaning for patlache is the lesbian but through the description in the text one deduces there was confusion between the concept of lesbian and by focusing on translation we might suggest that the notion of patlachuia confusion but rather from a particular gendered performance the image presents the woman standing in a sexualized manner with her breasts exposed the standing figure is speaking to the seated woman the image does not repeat the dual gendered person signified by the text nor does she appear to be ambiguously performance here remains unknowable to us but nothing in it would allow us to assert any modern sexual identity myths and gods finally i return to the text that shocked me when i read it tezcatlipoca one of the most important gods in the nahua universe himself a paragon of masculinity was according to sahagun a puto the image of tezcatlipoca in figure comes from the florentine codex so we might presume that sahagun s comment represents a colonial appropriation and denigration of nahua masculinity but in fact the reality is much more complex as the history of spanish colonialism intersects with preconquest nahua notions of the places of homosexuality in ritual and myth tezcatlipoca indeed is a complex figure who in many senses signifies both masculinity and femininity the nahua viewed him as a trickster fundamental bisexuality of tezcatlipoca she states that his masculine comportment in nahua ideology never conflicted with certain sexual ambiguities thus his masculine status as a warrior god was compatible with an androgynous beauty portrayed in certain nonetheless the nahua saw him as male and masculine and they do not suggest that tezcatlipoca had a sexual identity similar to that of the puto the nahuatl text says that a cuiloni some gods were simply more powerful than others and tezcatlipoca was among the most powerful warrior gods titlacauan was less powerful he was one of tezca tlipoca s many identities and he was linked with the more powerful insulting him would not be the same thing as insulting tezcatlipoca in his picture in the florentine codex titlacauan is shown wearing only a loincloth sandals and an extensive knotted rope that appears to ensnare him he blows on what is intended to be a traditional nahua flute the flower signified his eroticism the snare was connected with sexual transgressions and with the intestines themselves associated with the flute intentionally phallic signified both penance and communication with the gods perhaps most important titlacauan is not pictured as a warrior in the attire of someone like tezcatlipoca he is shown in the broader set so titlacauan himself is not seen in this image and other imagery as so powerful yet another myth presents titlacauan as one who tricks others in order to seduce mythologically therefore to call titlacauan a cuiloni would be seen as an insult but not one that was completely out of bounds moreover in order for this insult to be performed in the nahuatl text the author had to discuss titlacauan not his more powerful counterpart for erotic activity and the structure of the myth shows simply that the tables were turned on him so how does tezcatlipoca become a puto sahagun transposes the names of the gods and then appropriates the term puto to stand in for cuiloni this is entirely appropriate given sahagun s own filters after all tezcatlipoca was a supreme nahua god one whom sahagun calls diablo on several occasions why not denigrate him perhaps even destroy him it is hardly so clear as this since the gods themselves overlapped and tezcatlipoca and titlacauan could be two gods inside one creating history from myth and metaphor just as the friars worked to reconceptualize indigenous religion as idolatry the various homosexualities that had existed in preconquest nahua society were to be categorized as sodomy and sin hence sahagun was able to use his filters and his agenda to turn a myth into a tool that could aid in the indigenous religion if a high ranking god could be turned into a measly puto nahua cosmology would be in trouble of course we cannot say that the nahua believed that tezcatlipoca was a puto hence we have come to the crux of the problem for sahagun the spiritual conquest was failing nonetheless by reading the florentine codex in a new way we can uncover the preconquest nahua institutionalization of the xochihua and details about the concept behind the term patlachuia the inclusion of the category in the codex remains intriguing by using an innovative methodology and sifting through authorial filters we will learn more about pre and postconquest nahua sexualities to return to questions of translation we need to understand the translations proffered by modern scholars as interpretations based on notions a particular psychological notion differentiating normalcy from perversion we find no evidence that the nahua viewed the xochihua as a deviation from a norm quite the contrary no norm is asserted in these texts with regard to sexual desires when kimball translates the same term as the homosexual and then proceeds to translate patlache as homosexual woman he promotes a modern sexual identity that does not appear to have nahua discourse the evidence presents xochihua as related to cross dressing and to the signifier of the flower and patlachuia as a sexual performance that we cannot comprehend from the documents translation is a political project and unless modern interpreters take great care they will assert a transcultural and transhistorical continuity that does epistemic violence to the conceptual universe of the nahua codex tudela and the various presences in the florentine codex all signify the violent and often unconscious mixture of moral frameworks promoted by the hybrid colonial discourse indeed the colonialist maneuver represses difference in order to recategorize the very existences of the colonized peoples still we can detect and decode this act and we find that the ways the nahua performed gender and sexuality do
an absolute beginning as terry pinkard reconstructs the beginning of the phenomenology since we must start somewhere it seems that we must have and subject them to some kind of internal happily this means that hegel s preliminary inquiry is itself free from the burden of having to make an absolute beginning in the sense of constraint above for it simply observes what happens when other forms of inquiry do not and it may be taken in this way to serve as a kind of phenomenology of philosophy itself an expose of the ways in which various unexamined presuppositions lead to status as such if successful and sufficiently comprehensive it would show that properly philosophical searching is impossible in the absence of an absolute beginning fortunately the details of how the phenomenology is actually supposed to accomplish these tasks need not detain us here we can simply take it on trust that hegel has provided an incisive comprehensive and properly internal critique of putatively philosophical investigations that fail to make but the question remains how philosophy should begin if it cannot so much as determine its proper domain in advance of the process of inquiring how does the immanent science of self determining determinacy get underway once it has been shown via negativa to be necessary the idea of a form of thought that does not deploy any conceptual material the content of which has been determined independently of that very form of thought by contrast my thought that grass is green for instance deploys concepts that are determined by numerous other concepts the concepts color and plant and so on and we may suppose that the content of my thought that grass is green is further determined by sensory experience to take up an inquiry above ie to begin with that which is immediate would therefore be to treat as primitive to the inquiry that which whatever it is is not already mediated or determined in any way at all this clearly rules out beginning with any concepts the grasp of which beginning with any concepts whatsoever inasmuch as all concepts have intensional and extensional properties that stand in complex relations of mutual hegel however evidently thinks there is indeed a form of thinking that does not deploy any determinate concepts whatsoever to see what this is we need first to understand how hegel thinks it is achieved for immediate thinking as hegel conceives it is the terminus and telos of a this basically amounts to a procedure of abstraction in the sense of selective suppose i were to abstract from each and every aspect of the determinate conceptual content of my thought that grass is green there is for hegel a real question about what would remain after this kind of reduction and abstracting from the determinate content of a concept would isolate its pure form on the grounds that form and content are inseparable of course it could not be that the remainder is comprised of determinate conceptual content for ex hypothesi all such content is out of court but here hegel makes a startling move for he suggests that what would remain after a process of abstracting from the determinate content of thoughts is a kind of indeterminate content calls immediacy itself and which he goes on to equate with pure being very roughly the idea here appears to be this in order to execute a thorough going abstraction from the determinate content of my thought that grass is green for example i would plainly have to jettison the concepts grass and green and any other concepts upon which these depend what i would not however have to jettison is arguably the pure relational structure is a place holder for is left entirely unspecified this remainder may appropriately be called immediacy itself inasmuch as what would remain on this characterization is the mere abstract thought of relatedness as such where this does not determine what is related or any the remainder may also appropriately be called pure being inasmuch as the schema is represents the merely abstract relation of being where the thought of this relation is supposed not to deploy any conception of what there is or of what it is to be why then is this characterization of indeterminate content supposed to in one way or another each and every thought deploys the concept of being and being can be said and thought in many different ways but suppose we abstract away from all the possible ways there are of determining the content being we would then surely be left according to this line of thought with nothing but the pure concept of being itself wholly independent of any more positive characterization note however that in terms of the structure a concept of such and such since what we are left with is precisely not supposed to be a determinate concept of being but rather with whatever content of thought is conceptualized by any determinate concept of being something similar might then be said about the alternative characterization of the remainder after abstraction in terms of immediacy itself for on the supposition that that the content of each and every structure hegel may argue that to abstract from the determinate content of this structure to abstract from each and every way in which terms may be mediated or related is to isolate a relation of pure immediacy it appears that hegel s programme in the logic is then to begin with this problem as it arises the inquiry might then gradually accumulate ever richer and more complex conceptual material proceeding towards a complete and fully satisfying articulation and the inquiry would terminate at just the point at which it generates a form of thinking that no longer gives rise to any aporiai whatsoever the discovery as they say that gives philosophy peace but the crucial point here is that if hegel s strategy succeeds none of the conceptual in this process will have been
governance portfolios and corporate governance scores central to these studies has been to employ an index of governance where auditing enters as one of the variables in the construction of the governance index explicitly exploring the impact the studies and this becomes a major concern of the article in order to formulate a coherent empirical framework it is argued that external auditing managerial ownership and tobin are jointly determined and accordingly is modelled within a three equation system of equations chung and jo for instance find empirical support in impacted by the percentage of insider ownership borrowing from these findings it seems likely that external auditing managerial ownership and firm valuation are simultaneously determined the argument is represented in figure judged thus the present study expands on the extant literature by investigating the interaction among alternative not an important consideration until the adoption of the economic reforms programme in india in with gradual integration with global markets and an increasing number of indian corporations accessing global markets and being listed on overseas exchanges public concerns have become more focused on the effective protection of investors interests the corporate sector there are presently three distinct though mutually reinforcing avenues through which the active act central to these amendments has been the move to revamp the board of directors to make them more responsive to the interests of shareholders since the board is the focal point of the decision making process in india company boards are typically single tiered comprising a chairman and managing director that inflicted losses on small investors and undermined investor interests in capital markets accordingly several in its totality following the recommendations of these committees sebi made certain mandatory provisions for listed companies through a listing agreement from accordingly it was stipulated that a half of board members should be non executive directors the board of a company should set up a qualified and independent audit committee be well versed in financial and accounting in addition companies were directed to constitute different sub committees like audit and remuneration committees and report the remuneration of the ceo as part of their corporate governance report the activities of the stock market are regulated by the securities and exchange board of india to protect the interests of investors in securities and to promote the development of and regulate the securities market before the act all issues of capital by indian companies were controlled by a government agency the controller of capital issues which regulated both the terms as well as the pricing of the issue under the sebi types of business requirements in order to ensure that promoters interests are closely integrated with those of minority shareholders sebi guidelines also contain a stipulation as to minimum promoters contribution and lock in period the market for corporate control has been rather inactive in india the first attempts at regulating a company by any person who sought to acquire more of the voting rights of the company current regulations by making the disclosure of substantial acquisitions mandatory have sought to ensure that the equity of a firm does not covertly change hands between the acquirer and the promoters at present the acquisition of shares voting rights triggers a minimum position through the provision of reeping takeover up to shares without attracting the mandatory public offer requirement however takeover defence mechanisms as poison pills for incumbent management as prevalent in the us and uk are not permitted under current regulations while the alignment of managerial and control rights of insiders particularly those of company promoters are disproportionately more than their cash flow rights this is an important feature of corporate ownership structure in india as it is in many other countries where family owned business groups are prevalent accounting aspects in an expert committee was constituted to examine the scheme of an autonomous association of accountants in india which led to the enactment of the chartered accountantsact and the establishment of the institute of chartered accountants of india in the same year the chartered accountants act governs the accountancy profession in india a couple of years primarily in the wake of the accounting irregularities in the us towards this end the chartered accountants bill has been prepared which seeks to reconfigure the current regulatory regime and the disciplinary arrangements in relation to the accounting the companies act governs the form and disclosure of financial statements and an audit of all companies by a member in practice certified by the icai schedule vi of the act prescribes the form content and minimum disclosure requirements of financial statements the act has been amended several times most recently in the amendment requires all companies to comply subsequent amendments most notably in and included among others incorporation of directors responsibility statements in the board report to highlight the accountability of directors in good corporate governance prescribe voting through postal ballot and delimiting the number of companies in which a person can hold large international firm networks audit approximately the top listed the icai reports that about audit firms operate in india including members affiliates of most of the international networks of accounting firms about firms audit at least one economically significant enterprise and about of the largest firms audit more than the top and medium sized firms apparently because of the unremunerative fee scales prescribed for these engagements in most cases the regulator or the office of the comptroller and auditor general of india mandates joint auditors for state owned enterprises a panel of firms qualified to undertake audits of state owned enterprises is updated annually audit which includes the number of partners in the firm number of employees and trainees experience of the firm and the term of association of the partners with the firm the board of directors of state owned enterprises determines the professional fee of the auditor on the basis of guidelines issued by cag and subsequently approved by the shareholders of enterprises that are incorporated under specific acts have associated rules with respect
between the value indication implied by current transactions minus that implied by the appraisal to the extent that transaction prices are more current than these appraised values the value model will capture that it is important to note that the result up to here provides what can accurately be described as a variable liquidity index that is while the index accurately represents typical transaction prices prevailing among consummated deals in the market each quarter such prices reflect varying ease or ability to sell properties across time in other words the index reflects varying transaction volume or turnover and hence varying liquidity over time this is ned this is because liquidity as indicated by trading volume or transaction frequency varies over time in the commercial real estate investment market furthermore this variation is systematic and pro cyclical with greater liquidity during up markets and less during down elaborating from fggh the above described variable liquidity valuation and returns estimates can be adjusted to reflect constant liquidity over time time on the market as described below this procedure also allows the separate identification of indices of demand side and supply side valuations and market movements over time indeed the index of movements on the demand side of the market is the constant liquidity we begin by recalling that eq provides a model of observed equilibrium as reflected in the sale probability of a given asset each of these equations reflects the movements in the demand and supply sides of the property market but in different ways this enables these two models to be treated simultaneously to identify explicit demand and supply side indices for the market as follows first consider the demand side of the market based on eq the central tendency by movements in the buyers reservation price distribution in log differences these changes are given estimates of the buyers coefficients ab and can be derived as follows first estimation of eq yields and bb and from eq we see that can be obtained from eqs and as described in fggh such an estimate of buyers valuations can be interpreted as a constant liquidity value estimate for property the demand side valuation estimate in eq can be used to produce a constant liquidity transaction based index of capital value changes or of total returns using the same procedure described above in eqs only for constant liquidity values and returns instead of variable liquidity values and returns based on bvb it instead of bp it to produce the supply side index the same type of simultaneous solution of eqs and reveals that the supply side reservation price value estimate for property in period is then underlies the variable liquidity transactions based index including the extension to create demand and supply indices in this section we describe at a more detailed level the ncreif database and the specific estimation and index construction procedures we have employed since its inception in the national council of real estate investment fiduciaries has been collecting quarterly income and value reports for all the properties held for tax exempt investors on the part of ncreif s data contributing member firms which include almost all of the core real estate investment managers for pension funds in the us this database is used to construct the ncreif property index the only property level benchmark index of regular institutional commercial real estate investment performance in the us the index reports quarterly total returns and capital appreciation and income return components when the index begins in it includes properties worth a total of by the starting date of the transactions index the npi includes properties worth almost billion by the npi covers properties worth in the aggregate about billion the database is well diversified by property type and property type sub indices are reported the four major property types include office industrial apartment and retail and retail in general properties enter the index when they are at least and then remain in the index until they are properties are generally reappraised at least once per year on a staggered basis so that some properties are reappraised every quarter property values are reported into the database every quarter for every property but commonly value reports between reappraisals simply carry over the previous valuation when properties are sold their last value reported in the database is the disposition sales transaction the tbi begins in because prior to then there was insufficient transaction frequency to form a reliable transactions based since that time the npi database has included over different properties of which over have been sold of these we are able to use sale transactions in estimating the hedonic model altogether we have observations of property quarters counting each property times each quarter it is in the database including properties in quarters when they are not sold this pooled database is the source of our estimation of the probit sales model as well as the tbi the first step in building the tbi is to estimate the selection corrected hedonic price model specified in eq based on the sold property sample in the npi database before turning to estimation of this model at the quarterly frequency we first estimate it at the annual frequency the results of estimating this annual model provide necessary information for our econometric procedure for dealing with we have on average about price observations per period this model is estimated simultaneously for all properties and for each of the four property types using a stacked specification with property type dummy variables estimated on all transactions based on experience from previous studies the dependent variable has been defined as the log price per square foot of building area as noted in theory and methodology the anchor explanatory variable is based on an extension of the the clapp and giacotto assessed value method however unlike clapp and giacotto s assessed values our appraised values are updated regularly such that we are able to use appraisals just prior to the transaction sales as our
represented as forces that determine the strength the experienced by a person about to act based on unpublished results it appears that the matrix and vector based solution approaches provide different perspectives to the improvement of the human at work system work is continuing on a comparative assessment of the two approaches system checkland defines control in terms of effectiveness efficacy and efficiency as an engineering application the wcm is not limited to measurement to apply this method to organizations one needs to adapt to changes in the work environment as stated by senge s laws of organizational learning accordingly the wcm needs to identify potential weaknesses and failures to ensure sustained improvement in the work environment the principle of requisite variety stated that for a system to maintain control the variety of responses must be equal to or greater than the disturbances that challenge its survival klein proposes an integrated control model of work motivation the system focuses on self regulation and on the cognitive mechanisms of motivation the model applies principles of control theory starting from external influences on the individual to self regulation and organizational response salem et al proposed a decision framework to implement the wcm first the organization has to define yield and efficiency targets target setting those target values need to account for contextual variables such as business priorities and workforce turnover next the company measures the for the business unit current assessment the results identify low performing areas that require corrective actions for this purpose genaidy et al have suggested a set of guidelines that provide general solutions based on business priorities those solutions or corrective actions are adapted and implemented by the company the effectiveness of the implementation should be verified by measuring the yield and efficiency values after the intervention discussion early on psychology efforts have emphasized the need to understand job satisfaction as the basis of well being it was only with the hawthorne studies that the implications for organizational performance were clearly seen after the introduction of models such as motivation hygiene job characteristics and person environment fit there was a trend to conduct extensive studies of job attitudes and performance without emphasizing a common theoretical foundation isolated and person environment fit there was a trend to conduct extensive studies of job attitudes and performance without emphasizing a common theoretical foundation isolated findings have been difficult to combine into a common body of knowledge since each study works with different elements and relationships as stated by porter and lawler there is still a need for organizations to relate job satisfaction to performance levels the wcm is a serious attempt to break paradigm using a systemic approach to human work it is possible to embed organizational and human dimensions into a single construct that ensures tangible benefits for organizations the wcm is a bottom up approach that seeks the best conditions for individual performance as an aggregate result as well as the best conditions for the organizational performance figure summarizes the roots of the wcm ingrained in prior theories of human performance the wcm moves beyond a theoretical construct of the work environment to develop an applied tool for workplace measurement additional tools are required to represent the multi dimensional nature of the work environment in particular the hierarchy of factors that constitute the work environment has been a concern of workload assessment methods used in ergonomics the wcm has integrated models such as the paq the aet and nasa tlx into a common hierarchy of twelve main categories acting compatibility and experienced compatibility the wcm provides two solutions to measure the state of the system the matrix solution works with the expert rules that compare demand and energizer levels to determine whether work conditions are close to optimum conditions the vector solution uses vectors to represent the spread and magnitude of work factors according to the demand and energizer levels in this case the state of the system expressed in terms of the yield of and the efficiency of work factors the vector solution can be used to measure the performance of a group of respondents based on mean scores both models suggest an immediate or long term level of action based on the distribution of work factors the wcm definition the hierarchy of work elements and the measurement methods provide a static model of the human at work system in reality the human at work system is influenced by and employee expectations the wcm needs to be introduced into a control system that is able to adapt and improve for that purpose the work compatibility principles suggest some general considerations that can be translated into immediate actions and incremental improvements in the system once the immediate changes have taken place a new measure of the wcm should determine the success or failure of the intervention and re start the strategic cycle it is postulated that by the lean enterprise or the synchronized organization sought by the balanced scorecard they belong to a common socio technical structure in which human and technological elements contribute jointly to business performance however the wcm is not just another tool introduced into a saturated market of business models the advancement of the human at work system is lagging behind the pace of al however the wcm is not just another tool introduced into a saturated market of business models the advancement of the human at work system is lagging behind the pace of technological and organizational changes separate approaches to organizational performance and individual well being do not lead to better conditions and ultimately reduce the capabilities of the workforce motivation productivity quality and health are highly interrelated variables is the introduction of a body of knowledge based on the application of the wcm in manufacturing enterprises in terms of the wcif as an integrated system for assessing improving and sustaining human and organizational performance from health productivity and quality standpoints traditionally since the inception of taylor s engineering approach to improving human
access within the organization shrinks in a number of companies that we are very familiar with in europe the us south africa and the business physical location is the single biggest predictor of networking patterns being ensconced in the corporate headquarters cuts senior executives out from their factories and markets where all the information of changing business conditions resides for example given their external orientation and busy become more selective and homogenous consequently they are more impaired in their ability to accurately convey what is going on executives who are good at access networking keep direct lines of communication open in all active parts of a company they avoid being held hostage to a small network s view of the world around them in interacting with one s customers and other business partners and modelling trustworthiness candor and openness to all forms of information managers who are good at the access capability are able to receive more up to date and accurate information as a result their decisions are often of higher quality given access to better and timely information networkers use to build this access capability focus on the following build a list of your network contacts use information in your personal organizer mail program and correspondence files to list the names of critical contacts a number of our informants reiterated that just the act of making a list makes them aware of who is missing and what kinds of people and information before attending organizational or industry events study the participant list and make plans to meet people you need to know such research time pays off in a richer connection with the people you meet schedule formal times to reach out and touch birthdays anniversaries of sending christmas cards to business contacts to increase access in his network he commented i took out my organizer and started selecting names of people i wanted to send a card to in the first year i made a list of forty mostly those in india and some outside the firm in london by the third year the list had swelled to over effort to meet with or talk to the people in my list after meeting a new person who has made a deep impression on me i make a mental note to add them to my list thanks to the christmas card list i had become quite well connected the well known networking expert keith ferrazzi suggests birthdays as an occasion for keeping marriage new baby etc for more critical contacts schedule periodic informal meetings or calls if you do not see these individuals often our governmental affairs director s approach is illustrative through his work in louisiana he has gotten to know television it will be a casual conversation with no reference to business the pilot is also the head of the local tanker pilots association they move ships into gas terminals the coast guard looks to the pilots for the safety of the ship traffic and for facility design our networker explains you cannot move a ship up the berth designs you get to know them if you do not build a relationship it can get your projects in trouble the pilots are well connected in the state capital they are part of the economic fabric of the area they are smart and honest if you have a good dialogue with them you might learn something if you work in a remote ties to one or more of the insiders networking capability interact amiably with others those who are skilled at being amiable leave others with the impression that they always have the time of the day to lend an ear to the concerns of others they focus on the context of their interactions as well as the content they are alive not only to the news but also to the manner and appearance of the messenger following marshall mcluhan s dictum they believe that the medium is the message by doing so good networkers create an ambience that is conducive to the sharing of sensitive news and information and consequently they learn more out their interactions with others amiability find it easy to make new contacts they tend to be central players in informal friendship networks that develop in and around organizations peter quinn the former ceo of fedics foodservice group oversaw a company that margins quinn believes that keeping the workplace sociable is critical to spirit of the company in the face of a business environment that exerts a great deal of pressure on its employees to be cold efficient and instrumental quinn promoted amiability by presiding over a number of rituals that were designed to share emotions stories as department hosted a breakfast buffet that was designed to outdo the previous one in terms of creativity and eccentricity after the festivities quinn took time to announce important initiatives and changes within the company the rituals were cascaded down the organization so that the spirit of amiability was preserved whether he has difficulty in making and communicating tough decisions he replied without hesitating being amiable is not an open door to the lowering of respect or performance expectations i worked hard to ensure that my style of networking allowed the coexistence of amiability and high standards of business performance current firm with a reputation for brilliant analysis of semiconductor firms while people flocked to him initially they found him overbearing and arrogant subsequently although people acknowledged that he was very bright his reputation was such that no one in their right minds would sit besides christoph on an airplane even if the flight was only an on him i was trying to impress others with how knowledgeable and important i was however most of the important contacts that i had to make were in asia where a softer more humble manner was preferred when i toned down my style i found more people volunteering information which was critical to making it was honed over time through
the collected data the survey did not carry any personally identifying information other than a self assigned character code used to match longitudinal data collected on different occasions during the last three waves of the study the surveys were were administered in the schools after classes ended at each school group sessions were set up in the school cafeteria or library to accommodate the schedules of the participating students each session took about upon completing the survey students were paid in reimbursement for their time and effort at time the surveys were sent to the participants and returned via mail upon receiving the completed surveys the project stav separated the envelopes and other about individual identities from the surveys and the data were stored in an anonymous database measures measures of career development career indecision was measured with the career decision scale extensive research on the cds has established strong evidence in support of its good psychometric properties in research with adolescents and young adults career planning and career confidence were measured with a questionnaire developed in the course of this study the participants were asked to answer a set of questions about their expected future occupations and careers using a likert type response scale with seven response options the career planning five questions such as i have a plan for where i want to be in my career ten years from now i have discussed with other people what i want for an occupation and i know what to do in order to accomplish my occupational goals in this study the reliability of the scale assessed with an alpha coefficient was acceptable the career confidence scale was comprised occupational plans and pursue a satisfying career such as i feel confident that i can do well in my chosen occupation in the future and i feel that my occupational plans may be impossible to accomplish the alpha coefficient for this sample was the construct validity of the career planning and career confidence scales was assessed using a discriminant convergent validation approach at each time of measurement career and negatively with career indecision considering that each of the above are indicators of career preparation the observed associations confirm convergent validity of these scales furthermore there were theoretically expected correlations between the career preparation variables and identity dimensions measured with the numeric subscales of the enhanced objective measure of ego identity status thus at time was positively associated with identity achievement and negatively associated with identity moratorium and identity diffusion there was no association with identity foreclosure career confidence was positively but not as strongly as career planning associated with identity achievement and negatively associated with moratorium and diffusion also there was a weak but significant negative association between career and identity foreclosure overall the above pattern of associations confirms the construct validity of the career planning and confidence scales used in this study measures of adjustment self esteem was assessed with the rosenberg self esteem scale one of the most popular and well researched measures of self esteem which has life satisfaction was measured with the satisfaction with life scale the swls has been found to possess excellent reliability and validity as well as applicability to research on adolescence self efficacy scale the scale has been extensively studied and validated in different countries the scale reliability in different samples ranged from to and the homogeneity of the underlying construct was confirmed via confirmatory factor analysis corresponding subscales of the english language version of the positive mental health scale an instrument developed on the basis of a cross culturally validated construct of positive mental health although there has been no extensive research on the psychometric properties of the pmhs the authors reported adequate construct validity tested with a confirmatory factor analysis in the present study the alpha coefficients measured at were for emotionality for social adaptation and for self actualization in accord with the theoretical models of positive mental health the self actualization and social adaptation scores were strongly positively correlated with the each other and moderately correlated with the emotional stability scale additionally theoretically expected associations were found between the subscales of the pmhs and eomeis a popular of identity status dimensions thus self actualization social adaptation and emotional stability were positively correlated with identity achievement and negatively correlated with identity moratorium in contrast there were no significant associations between any of the pmhs sub scales and the identity foreclosure dimension of the eomeis numerous studies attest to the psychometric properties of this scale depression was measured with the center for epidemiological studies depression scale results means standard errors and standard deviations for the career preparation variables at each time of measurement are shown in table during the course of the study there has been a considerable consistent decline in career indecision marked by a significant drop in the level of indecision at however although there has been a steady growth in confidence the changes occurred slowly and there were no significant differences between the scores obtained on any two consecutive occasions in contrast there was no which increased slightly from time to time but decreased at time correlations among the career preparation variables studied are shown in table at each time of measurement there was a positive association between career planning and career confidence and both of those correlated negatively with career indecision over the course of the study the above associations have consistently and considerably strengthened as evidenced by an increase in the values of the coefficients additionally at each time of measurement each of the three career preparation variables was moderately correlated with both preceding and subsequent measures of the other two variables which is characteristic of completely reciprocal relationships each variable also showed moderately strong autocorrelations in the range across the four times of data collection tested with lisrel using the structural equations modeling approach a completely continuous longitudinal model shown in fig was an excellent wt to the theoretical construct of career preparation in contrast
if doing an activity the marginal benefits of doing a complementary activity for example when a manufacturer raises the reliability of its product by investing into better quality controls it total being more than the sum of the parts on the other hand activities may be substitutes if doing more of an activity lowers the marginal benefit of an activity thus to reap the full potential of corporate activities managers have to take account of complements and substitutes among activities a failure to recognize the substitutability of activities a detailed analysis of organizational substitutes see siggelkow not taking account of complementarities leads to a loss in value creation revenues and ultimately in profits for the firm because it fails to realize its full potential for example a firm that invests in product reliability but does not change its warranty policy at the same time partly gives up the ability to investments into product reliability if it chooses not to change its warranty policy furthermore extending the warranty without increasing product reliability might even be damaging to its competitive position thus there seems to be two consistent or coherent ways to coordinate the two activities either of the companies increases product only one of the complementary activities we can exemplify this crucial aspect of complementarity and consistency between activities by way of a very simple formal two activities and may be set either low or high with denoting their joint performance the activities are complementary if y high while x low and systems the choices x high and x low are inconsistent delivering a lower overall performance porter offers the classic example of a consistent system with many activities southwest airlines pursues a successful cost leadership strategy that relies on complementary activities and has built a consistent activity system that aims to minimize no offering of meals no assigned seats and no premium class of service additionally southwest employs automated ticketing to bypass travel agents the fleet has been standardized by aircraft thereby minimizing maintenance costs an effective selection of destinations rounds out the strategy is apparent since the added value of one resource depends on the use of other resources and their individual deployment has to be consistent in organization science this basic coordination problem has long been acknowledged by thompson and simon simon argues that complementarities increase the complexity are established to reduce the complexity for bounded rational planers milgrom and roberts have readdressed this problem of coordinating complementary activities in game theoretic their starting point is the empirical observation that the adoption of modern manufacturing technologies was followed by widespread changes in organizational structures a new system of production for example technologies like computer aided design and computer aided manufacturing made the production process much more flexible with less specialized equipment it was possible to offer more varieties of major products and to update the product line more frequently thereby forms of classifications reduced inventory stocks and put a higher emphasis on speed in order processing production and delivery milgrom and roberts explain this new organizational arrangement by arguing that the various activities are mutually complementary and consequently tend to be adopted together often not enough to exploit these benefits since local search processes often fail to fully take account of the interdependencies in game theoretic terms complementarities lead to coordination for example if new flexible machines are installed in the production department marketing managers may fail to identify and staffing policy thus general management s active central direction is necessary to induce and coordinate the appropriate changes across departments central direction means that general management tells lower level managers what activities to engage in and advises them on the general level of each activity while leaving general management brings about the consistency of the various activities performed by the firm for example in the case of southwest airlines the general management s task was to decide on the standardization of the fleet on whether to eschew the hub and spoke concept or frequent flier programs and on the retail channels these choices possibly resulting in an inconsistent activity system strategic direction is knowledge intensive and time consuming for general managers their capability to actively direct the different activities of the firm is therefore limited demsetz argues that the larger the firm and the more complex it is the more severe are the problems of greater are the task interdependencies involved in the firm s production and the more specialized is the knowledge needed to take these interdependencies into account but these very conditions place limits on the size of the efficient organization consequently the need to strategically direct the firm s diverse activities puts an upper bound on an alternative mechanism to coordinate complementarity activities is the setting of appropriate objectives and organizational rules that delineate decision and control rights by general management thereby providing lower level managers with a stable formal organizational structure the organizational rules restrict the behavior of lower level within the limits set by the organizational rules lower level managers are free to concentrate on their objectives without having to worry about activities in other parts of the organization it is a sign of inconsistent coordination of complementary activities if lower level managers feel they cannot accomplish their goals resolve conflicts and adapt the organizational structure to remedy this situation proposition strategic direction and the setting of organizational rules and objectives by general management represent alternative mechanisms to manage organizational complementarities and to bring about consistent systems of activities organizations that rely more on a coordinating the creation of new assets so far we have treated the firm s assets as given and implicitly assumed that an organization can carry out any possible activity this does not have to be the case from a resource based perspective besides organizing their activities in such a way as to exploit their current corporate assets firms to perform certain activities are usually the outcome of specific investments and individual learning processes these individual learning processes are themselves interdependent and require
of race is reflected in how one thinks about her or his racial group membership the defined as his or her racial identity ego status which is one s psychological orientation to race racial group members psychological orientation to their race may vary among people within and between particular racial groups research on racial identity has shown over the past years that how one understands or experiences racism is associated with a person s psychologically status also one s racial identity is experienced in relation to his or her gender ethnicity social status religion age and other factors or unwanted and negative then if the appraisal is that the stressor is unwanted and negative some action to cope and adapt is needed when coping and adaptation fail one experiences stress reactions although trauma is a form of stress it is distinct in that it is a more severe form of stress understood terms of both the nature of the stressor and the type of reaction to the stressor thus trauma has been defined in two ways as ptsd and as traumatic stress according to the most recent edition of the diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders ptsd and related severe stress reactions such as adjustment and acute stress disorders result from an event that involves actual or threatened death or serious injury or threat to one s physical integrity the person s response must involve intense fear helplessness or horror in addition for the event or reaction to be characterized as ptsd the response must specifically lead to symptoms of avoidance reexperiencing negative and out of one s control and that result in primary symptom clusters that include avoidance arousal and intrusion as well as other reactions discussion of racism and stress practiced and experienced for centuries and is well understood by those who are subjugated by it the term racism was not formally used or accepted until the late the word was first used and widely circulated when it appeared in the kerner commission report on civil unrest thus the term and the concepts associated with racism are less than years old the kerner commission stated the following which has been accumulating in our cities since the end of world war ii among the ingredients are pervasive discrimination and segregation in employment education and housing black in migration and white exodus creating a crisis in deteriorating facilities and services and unmet needs in the lack ghettos were segregation and poverty converge to destroy opportunity and enforce failure been used and defined in many ways jones analyzed some definitions of racism from scholars representing several disciplines such as sociology anthropology history and social psychology drawing from his analyses the various definitions that have been proffered over time reflect several different perspectives on racism some definitions or conceptualizations of racism have emphasized that serve to justify the superiority of the dominant racial group while deemphasizing its systemic characteristics and sociohistorical context some definitions characterize racism as attitudes and beliefs that rob minorities of their dignity and access to resources whereas other definitions emphasize the role of racial group membership categories and invoke group based self interest and political processes still systemic and structural nature of racism and emphasize the sociohistorical context and the changing nature of racism over time few existing definitions offer a link between specific types of racism and the psychological and emotional impacts these acts have on targets the ahistorical conceptualization of racism as a set of rational and logical an example of this particular understanding of the term racism and its reliance on rational process is illustrated by the definition of modern racism as a belief that discrimination is a thing of the past because blacks and other minority groups have freedom to compete in the market place blacks are pushing too hard and too fast into places where they are not wanted these tactics and demands are unfair therefore recent gains are underserved them more attention and status than they deserve aversive racism has been defined as ambivalence based on the conflict between dealings and beliefs associated with a sincere egalitarian value system and unacknowledged negative feelings and beliefs about blacks jones observed that these definitions reflect feelings of antagonism and ambivalence about race and thus they rest on a form of justification that is grounded in american values and beliefs in equality the definitions point to the failure of minority groups to meet standards of conduct and social participation and these perceptions and feelings seem to be justified through rational and logical analyses according to jones a key notion associated with these definitions of racism is the emphasis on personal character rather than on systemic processes yet as jones noted these definitions overlook the fact that the group in power defines what is acceptable and what is not the group in power determines what values behaviors and beliefs are considered to be proper in this way they determine when and if a group or its members fail to meet the standards of good character or appropriate behavior thus the rational approach to racism makes it easy to maintain one s superior status without opening one s self to accusations of racism nevertheless these definitions focus on whites beliefs about their social status and their perspective that blacks and other minorities must earn their social status and should do so without preference there is little in the rational and logical definitions of racism that adds to the understanding of the relation between racism and mental health a sociohistorical context for example bulhan defined racism as a form of oppression that is based on racial categories and systems of domination that designate one group superior and the other inferior the superior group then uses these imagined differences to justify inequity exclusion or domination bulhan suggested in a general way though not in specific terms that blacks and people of color are harmed by such treatment because oppression is a he also argued that the violence of
uses remote sensing techniques to attempt to locate these changes spatially over time we also attempt to examine the remote sensing research at the local level in recent years a number of detailed local level case studies on african agrarian systems have shown the complex adaptive strategies and responses of farmers to social economic and ecological change keeley and scoones argue that policy knowledge is often embedded in institutional and organizational persist in the face of counter evidence the narratives are often used to justify the technical interventions and mandates of development programs lambin et al argue that models for land use and land cover change need to be informed by a better understanding of the causes of change and move beyond the dominant myths that influence environmental and change based on technical or population control measures for example the linking of high rates of deforestation with population growth poverty and shifting agriculture lambin et al argue that tropical deforestation is largely driven by changing economic opportunities linked to social political and infrastructural change evidence from some case studies tiffen et al however low population areas can also be associated with deforestation resulting from development interventions to induce intensive agriculture some of the factors that lambin et al identify as repeatedly being associated with deforestation include weak state economies in forest frontiers institutions in transition induced innovation and intensification new economic and inappropriate development interventions in ghanaian agricultural policy many of these simplified models tend to predominate these characterize indigenous farming systems as based on outmoded models of shifting cultivation which have failed to adapt to contemporary conditions and which promote deforestation and environmental degradation the current food and agriculture sector crisis narratives the productivity of most agricultural lands in ghana is declining at an alarming rate due to widespread land degradation caused by soil erosion deforestation soil nutrient mining uncontrolled bush burning and other poor management practices mofa ministry of food and agriculture will create awareness and train farming communities to adopt sound land and water mixed farming use of agro forestry systems and effective use of organic and inorganic fertilisers mainstream development policy sees development as the product of the transformation of existing indigenous farming systems which either move along an evolutionary sequence transforming themselves to conform to western notions of agricultural intensification or which spiral new scientific technology however much farming practice in africa is modern in that it is a response to modern conditions commodification and change the evidence from many detailed case studies of african farming suggests that extensive agriculture with long fallow is not only a function of low population densities but also a strategy for managing difficult and unpredictable ecologies equally declining they can equally be associated with improvement and deterioration of agroecological conditions innovations in many african farming systems have often been associated with the transformation of crops and the management of crop mixtures and cropping sequences rather than in a movement towards intensification through more permanent cultivation feeding rapidly increasing urban populations in spite of constraints of transport storage and lack of securities markets this achievement involves a complex interplay of factors and influences including the ability of farmers to mediate a multitude of institutions and innovations rooted in state organizations capital investment and local practice through which they we argue that african agriculture is not characterized by a differentiation between modernization and traditional farming practices but consists of a series of differentiated farming belts and socially differentiated farming strategies which are the product of processes of modernization and commodification change in these farming systems is complex and multidirectional this cultivation under systems characterized by rotational bush fallowing in the transition zone of brong ahafo in central ghana it examines the history of the now defunct wenchi and branam state farms the areas immediately surrounding them in which there was a large uptake of mechanized input farming and the adjacent areas where mechanized agriculture failed to penetrate and farmers continue to cultivate and the yam belt around mansie and weila the patterns of change within these different farming systems are rooted within the development of the regional and national economy methodology this study tracks changes in farming systems and landscape from the to the present in the northern brong ahafo transition zone this area became the setting for a project in involved the promotion of privatized estate agriculture around the state farms and the development of associated agricultural services by the mid mechanized agricultural services and extension services promoting new seeds and fertilizers were disseminating these new technologies to smallholder cultivators by the early the state farms were no longer and subsidies and credit support programs were removed the majority of aspiring agricultural capitalists have since moved out of mechanized food production they are now moving into plantation development of exotic fruits for export including cashew and mango and teak for electricity poles and timber the social and remote sensing components of this study innovative strategies for natural resource management in the forest agricultural interface in ghana the remote sensing research was commissioned by the natural resource management programme to provide an overview of the impact of agricultural systems on forest resources in the transition zone the present study is an land use and land cover change the social and historical reconstruction is based on a number of formal questionnaire surveys and informal surveys in the area including questionnaires administered to farmers in seven settlements in and to farmers in six settlements in and informal surveys and group discussions with tractor drivers and questionnaires enabling changes in farming systems to be documented the interviews with the employees of state farms and tractor drivers enabled the history of agricultural mechanization and its influences on surrounding farmers to be reconstructed these patterns of change are related to historical policy interventions and complex configurations among policies socioeconomic sensing compared satellite images for and the use of only two dates was conditioned by financial constraints and the original research program under which the imagery was
saving infant lives as modern medicaid spending one way to make comparisons with the targeted programs consider the infant population which is much easier to measure than the population at risk of homicides or suicides given that people of all ages were experiencing significant problems during the depression a relatively small percentage of the relief spending was likely to have been devoted to infants in an october census of relief families conducted by the fera and in the overall cities with more than people since relief administrators based the amount of relief on deficits in household budgets we can reasonably assume that infants were allocated roughly the relief dollars multiplying this hare by relief dollars spent per infant life saved suggests that of the million to million in relief associated with saving an per death prevented notes values for all but the estimate for non infant deaths are statistically significant at the in two tailed tests see tables and for the statistics of the coefficients on which the estimates are based the estimates are based on coefficients from specifications that include correlates and fixed effects see the text for a discussion of the methods underlying the calculations the relief costs are insensitive population size the relief costs for infant deaths are sensitive to changes in the ratio of women aged to to the population and the general fertility rate the coefficients were estimated with monetary values based on the cpi with as the base year dollar values were converted to values by multiplying by the values can be converted to values by dividing by market values of life are from moore and viscusi with adjustments to year using the gdp deflator general fertility rates the drastic declines in economic activity during the early coincided with a drop below trend in the general fertility rate both in figure and in the averages for the cities in the sample because the drop in fertility in the early coincided with a sharp drop in marriage rates to return to their normal fertility decisions than it was to give incentives to single women to have the bottom two rows of table show the results from the series of estimation procedures for the general fertility although the rise in relief spending coincided with an increase in the general fertility rate at the national level the baseline ols coefficient with no correlates suggests a spending and the general fertility rate appears to be causing this negative relationship once we control for city and year fixed effects the relief effect is positive and statistically significant at the but has little explanatory power an osd change in per capita relief only raises the general fertility rate by standard deviations the coefficients are statistically significant and a standard deviation increase in the general fertility rate the impact of more relief spending on the general fertility rate is likely operating through the same channel as an improvement in general economic activity osd changes in per capita retail sales shown at the bottom of table also reveal a large and positive effect on the general fertility rate ranging between and standard safety net contributed significantly to the leveling off of the fertility rate in the late the sharp increase in the relief coefficient in moving from fixed effects to is likely driven in part by two negative endogeneity biases in the ols fixed effects estimates first as was the case for the death rates the absence of good measures for the impact of the depression on the unmeasured negative shocks to the poor were likely to lead to lower birth rates at the same time as they would lead to more relief spending second the saw rapid growth in the family planning movement many of the obstacles to birth control and family planning were eliminated by the end of the and the number of family planning clinics nationwide rose from in to by the one difference in the specifications between the infant mortality and general fertility equations was the exclusion of the democratic governor from the instrument set in all cases when the democratic governor was included the hausman test rejected the hypothesis that the was uncorrelated with the instruments when the governor variable was excluded the hausman test no longer rejected the hypothesis concluding remarks the great depression of the with its unusually high unemployment rates might well have become a demographic disaster with rising infant mortality and noninfant death rates and declining fertility throughout the the mid before continuing on a downward trend the non infant death rate stayed on trend through the early and then rose above trend in the late while the general fertility rate fell below trend in the early before leveling out in the late what can explain these puzzling patterns a key factor in the explanation of all three patterns is the the unemployed and the poor in essence federal relief spending provided a safety net for the unemployed and the poor that contributed to a continuation of the long term decline in mortality rates for infants under age one the population most vulnerable to the effects of economic downturns increased relief spending had little effect on the overall non infant death rate but contributed to reductions in and possibly homicides the relief costs associated with saving a life were similar to modern estimates of the value of life in labor markets and the cost of saving lives through medicaid the effect of fluctuations in economic activity during the mimicked a pattern found by ruhm for the modern us economy the overall non infant death rate all displayed procyclical patterns falling when the economy plunged and rising during the recoveries a key exception during the and the modern era was the suicide rate which tended to be counter cyclical the differences in how most of the specific death rates responded to increases in relief and in general activity are indicative of the different channels through which relief and general given that relief was targeted at
water flowing through trapezoidal channels with hydraulic diameters ranging from x to z the reynolds numbers were lower than and the flow was kept well within the laminar flow regime the experimental results were compared with numerical analysis results based on conventional fluid mechanics the conventional theory was found to be able to predict and li studied flow characteristics of water flowing through stainless steel and fused silica microtubes with diameters ranging from to lm the mean roughness height was lm which was provided by the manufacturers the authors did not provide the shape and the distribution of the roughness elements for small reynolds numbers ie re the experimental data the friction factor was significantly higher than the predictions by the conventional theory the authors proposed two possible explanations one is earlier transition from laminar to turbulent flow and the other is the surface roughness effect qu et al conducted experiments to investigate frictional pressure drop of water flowing through trapezoidal microchannels with hydraulic diameters ranging from glass covers the cover was very smooth with an average surface roughness on the order of nm but the silicon channel had an averaged roughness ranging from to lm the measured friction factors in the microchannels were higher than those given by the conventional flow theory a roughness viscosity model was proposed to interpret the experimental a depth ranging from to lm and a fixed width of cm pressure drops were measured within the channel itself to exclude entrance and exit losses and transitions to turbulence were observed with flow visualization the experimental results suggest higher friction factors in laminar flow than the classical values the transitions from laminar to turbulent flow occurred at reynolds numbers al used the pressure drop data to characterize the friction factor for channel diameters in the range lm and over a reynolds number range the microchannels had round and square cross section geometries the authors found that error bounds are dominated by measurement of the diameter the re data revealed no distinguishable deviation from macroscale stokes flow conducted experiments to measure the friction factor of laminar flow of deionized water in silicon microchannels of trapezoidal cross section with hydraulic diameters in the range of lm the relative roughness of all the channels was measured to be no more than the experimental data agreed within the analytical solution based on the stokes triangular or trapezoidal cross section with dh lm the review of the literature exhibits large scatter and even contradictions in the experimental results for flow friction in microchannels as has been pointed out by pfund et al the inconsistency in the reported results can be attributed to several factors such as channel size of silicon and glass is the principal method for microchannel fabrication part of the discrepancy may be attributed to the lack of well controlled surface structure during the bonding process in addition most of the studies did not measure pressures within the microchannel but instead measured the pressure upstream it is still unknown whether these correlations can be used in microchannels furthermore some investigators measured friction factors over a channel length of only about a hundred hydraulic diameters which may not be sufficient length to allow for a fully developed flow nevertheless there is a general agreement in the literature that surface roughness is a very important factor for at almost the same reynolds number as the conventional results according to choi et al and yu et al however they reported friction factors in both the laminar and the turbulent region lower than the conventional results the lower friction factor in the laminar and turbulent region may be due to the errors in tube diameter measurement rough enough earlier transition and discrepancies from the conventional laminar friction factors were observed therefore it is expected that the conventional correlations could be reproduced in microchannels providing the channel is smooth and the experiments are well controlled flockhart and dhariwal reported such a result for not report the surface roughness in order to better understand the flow behavior in microchannels there is a need to perform extensive experiments with a larger range of reynolds numbers channel size and shape and most importantly with a wide range of surface roughness the experimental results in the smoothest channels will provide a basis from which other basis kandlikar et al investigated the effect of channel roughness on flow friction in two tubes of mm and mm in diameter the roughness of the inside tube surface was changed by etching it with an acid solution they found that ra of which may be considered smooth for tubes larger than mm increased the friction factor and heat transfer the transition to turbulence also reveals that there is a lack of single phase friction factor studies in microchannels for the following two topics friction factors in rectangular microchannels peng et al used rectangular microchannels but their results were dramatically different from other data as well as the conventional correlation predictions it is not clear from the open literature whether the or less than it also not clear what is the effect of aspect ratio on the laminar flow friction factor and the critical reynolds number most of the studies such as flockhart and dhariwal mala and li qu et al judy et al and wu and cheng focused most on the flow friction factor in the laminar the above two issues by measuring the frictional pressure drop of liquid and vapor flowing through five rectangular channels with hydraulic diameters varying from to lm and aspect ratios changing from to the frictional pressure drops were measured within the channel away from the entrance and the exit the same test section was tested under both liquid and vapor state experimental reynolds number range to re test section five microchannel test sections with hydraulic diameters varying from to lm and with aspect ratios changing from to were designed and manufactured for single phase investigation these test sections were also used in the adiabatic two phase pressure drop
further twists intensify the referential void at the novel s center in his introduction to the manuscript truant gives voice to his own suspicions that the film does not in fact exist as i fast discovered zampano s entire project is about a film which does nt exist you can look i have but no matter how long you search you will never find the navidson record in theaters or video stores furthermore most of what s said by famous people has been made up i tried contacting all of them those that took the time to respond told me they had of performing the job of mediation he has allegedly performed finally jumping up a logical level it has recently been suggested that zampano s identity as the main character in fellini s la strada makes him a fictional character within the fictional world of the novel a fiction to the second in the wake of this imbrication of the fictional and the real any effort to mark their separation is simply for reasons of principle impossible far more important than the epistemological hurdles these twists introduce is the ontological indifference underlying them and the definitive departure that it signals away from the tired postmodern agonies bound up with the figure of simulation it is as if mediation has become so ubiquitous and inexorable in the world of the novel as simply to be reality to be the bedrock upon which our investment and belief in the real can be built see truant announces with the embodied hindsight the irony is it makes no difference that the documentary at the heart of this book is fiction zampano knew from the get go that what s real or is nt real does nt matter here the consequences are the same far from an invitation to wax poetic about the simulacral pseudofoundation of contemporary media culture what this deceptively flippant maxim betrays is a disturbing willingness on truant s part to accept the waning of the orthographic function of as the reader soon discovers this willingness far from betokening a curiosity stemming from truant s psychological profile is simply a necessary consequence of the novel s play with mediation and undermining of any sacred text from truant s sustained alterations of the text to the reported interventions of the unidentified editors from zampano s impossible perceptual acts to truant s mother pelafina s unreliability as a conveyer of her own voice the novel the futility of any effort to anchor the events it recounts in a stable recorded form while the deployment of these and other characters as figures for the end of orthography certainly presages a shift away from traditional realism and psychological characterization the novel s challenge to generate belief without objective basis becomes acute only when the role of the reader is taken into account for as danielewski explains in an interview the novel s true protagonist is interpretation which is to say the act of reading or even perhaps the reader herself let us say there is no sacred text here that notion of authenticity or originality is constantly refuted the novel does nt allow the reader to ever say oh i see this is the authentic original text exactly how it looked what it always had to say that s the irony of truant s mother s letters which are included as an appendix to the novel at first you probably just assume that this is the real thing but then the artifice of the way they look starts to undercut everything so you re not sure pretty soon you begin to notice that at every level in the novel some act of interpretation is going on the question is why well there are many reasons but the most important one is that everything we encounter involves an act of interpretation on our part and this does nt just apply to what we encounter in books but to what we respond to in life oh we live is that everything we encounter involves an act of interpretation on our part and this does nt just apply to what we encounter in books but to what we respond to in life oh we live comfortably because we create these sacred domains in our head where we believe that we have a specific history a certain set of experiences we believe that our memories keep us in direct touch with what has happened but memory never puts us in touch with anything directly it s always dynamics the oscillation among various focalizers and so on is in the end subordinated to the task of posing the challenge of interpretation to the reader the novel works on the far side of orthographic recording not by capturing a world but by triggering the projection of a world an imaginary world out of the reader s interpretive interventions and accumulating memorial sedimentations literally meaning straight writing the orthographic function of recording designates capacity of various technologies to register the past as past to inscribe the past in a way that allows for its exact repetition despite its etymology this function is neither limited to nor best exemplified by writing and indeed assumes its purest form in the technical domain in the phenomenology of photography it is roland barthes who pinpoints this elective affinity between photography and orthography when in camera lucida he champions the specificity of photography as that capable of bringing together reality and the past i call photographic referent not the optionally real thing to which an image or a sign refers but the necessarily real thing which has been placed before the lens without which there would be no photograph painting can feign reality without having seen it discourse combines signs which have referents of course but these referents can be and are most often chimeras contrary to these
earn good money however as students progress in their studies and have more work experience as trainees in the industry their perception of tourism related jobs in a negative way this finding is in agreement with those of previous studies which shows that the role of experience in forming perceptions is important the individual commitment of the students is another factor that shapes the image of the tourism industry in a positive way a desire to study tourism at the university and willingness to work in graduation contribute positively to the overall image of the industry this finding is in agreement with those of aksu and koksal the general perception of tourism employment as lower prestige work still prevails many tourism jobs are often seen as low skilled and therefore are regarded as demeaning as indicated above only a quarter of the respondents agreed with the statement tourism related jobs are more respected than the other jobs in spite of the diversity of the poor image of some occupations automatically transfers to all tourism related jobs after irregular working hours which is one of the well known negative characteristics of tourism employment job security seems to be an important concern for the students of course feeling secure and confident about the future of one s job is an important aspect of employment quality however in today s global world as a result of the fast pace of technological change and labor flexibility has increased and consequently job security became a problem in almost every sector labour flexibility has always been a major problem in the tourism industry and nowadays there is an even greater tendency towards irregular working hours and a lack of job security conclusion this research focused on the description of the undergraduate tourism students perceptions of tourism as a profession based on the survey at three different universities in turkey in contrast findings of the previous research the results of this survey indicated that the general notion of tourism employment appears to be neither positive nor negative even if new students start with a more optimistic view of the industry after the internship period and part time work experience they develop a less favorable perception this may be explained by a lack of sophistication in human resource policies and practices in many tourism businesses in general reluctant to encourage empowerment to participate in the decision making process and to motivate the workforce indeed the common complaint of the bogazici university students at the end of their summer training period is the same they are not given the opportunity to demonstrate their career potential but are instead used as cheap labor to do trivial work however in spite of the effect of generally unfavorable working conditions on the respondents perceptions their tourism and commitment to work in the industry after graduation compensate for the unfavorable picture of tourism careers when students are really interested in studying tourism and pursuing a career in the industry they tend to have a more realistic view of the nature of tourism related jobs which means more sensible expectations it is known that high career expectations when they are not met can create disappointment and consequently less job satisfaction and high staff therefore if students who are strong minded about attending a four year programme of tourism are given the chance to do so there will probably be less frustration in terms of their career prospects unfortunately within the current education system students have to take a rigorous central exam given by the higher educational council to enter university and are then placed at different universities according to their success in the exam results as a result they often do not have to study what they really want this is one of the major problems of the turkish higher education system in general and to provide solutions is beyond the scope of this study however even if it is true that most of the career problems occur because of the special characteristics of employment in the tourism industry improving working conditions in the tourism businesses is easier to achieve as indicated one of the reasons for the negative image of the industry is the use of outmoded styles of human resource management high quality professional human resources would help to improve the quality of work experience and as a consequence potentially improve the image of the industry in the long term the general employment conditions in the industry could be improved to enable today s students with formal qualifications to become the effective managers of tomorrow therefore it can be one of the ways of increasing the share of direct employment in tourism is to increase the supply of well educated manpower the american manager neither ugly nor sore cross cultural differences as explanations individuals perceive think about and evaluate the world themselves and others many concepts that influence work behaviors and work environments are rooted in cultural values and norms the meanings attached to and the application of these concepts vary from one culture to another such differences have a profound influence on managerial behavior this paper examines how these cultural differences may sometimes affect mutual other cultural milieus it also explains american managers missteps when facing different cultural situations the managerial implications of these differences are presented in this paper managerial concepts such as motivation superior subordinate relationships authority leadership and control are rooted in cultural values of managers and subordinates are different across cultures though cultures differ from one another cultural differences between traditional and modern societies are more noticeable in international business many norms of modern societies either do not have equivalents in traditional cultures or they are totally in variance with them the concept of time for example as a tangible commodity that modern societies have much more differentiation and compartmentalization of various facets of daily interaction in traditional societies however most aspects of daily life blend together business transactions for example are combined with interpersonal relationships such
summary factors significantly more important to high intensity firms than to low intensity firms are those that support research based innovation as per table firms with low levels of intensity were significantly more important for low intensity firms were access to domestic markets access to international markets the firm s marketing capabilities and learning from customers in addition low intensity firms place great importance on proximity to major customers while high intensity firms place low importance on this factor the survey from customers and incorporate user feedback in the innovation process clearly the factors that are identified in table as significantly more important to low intensity firms than to high intensity firms are those that focus on the marketing and distribution functions of the biotechnology firm access to domestic as well as international markets is important to firms that have products on the seem should not be critically important in the information age may be critical when customers are actively involved or interested in new product development marketing capability and learning from customers are critical to firms actively serving customers and markets in summary factors that are significantly more important to low intensity firms than to high intensity and the marketing and distribution functions of the firm discussion and conclusions the questions posed in this study are what is the nature of the relationship between intensity and innovation performance in firms and how do the factors influencing performance differ between firms that exhibit high or low levels of intensity in addition the factors to which question significant relationships are found between high levels of intensity and high levels of research based innovation and between low levels of intensity and high levels of production based innovation these results make sense theoretically as it has been shown that a life cycle pattern exists in the innovation process in biotechnology and other industries in biotechnology the and product development leading to what is termed in this study as research based innovation in the form of patent applications and approvals and later stage which includes commercialization of a product or process leading to what is termed in this study as production based innovation in the form of new and redesigned products and processes factors the common thread among these factors is that they strategically link the biotech firm to the complementary assets necessary to advance innovation as was described in the literature review firms with strong internal research capabilities are more likely to collaborate because they can bring skills and technologies to the table making them desirable collaborative university researchers other firms in the industry and with firms in related industries that possess complementary technologies this strategy of alignment in the industry an industry that encompasses university government and privately funded research and development allows firms access to government funds and venture capital and provides firms the opportunity to license their technologies one that leads to production commercialization and distribution of a product or process firms reporting the highest level of production based innovation attribute their success in the later stage of innovation to their product pipeline distribution channels and their connectedness to their target market and customers their strategies include keeping up with the competitiveness the results of this study suggest that innovation performance is a function of firm level characteristics as well as specific innovation strategies depending on the stages of innovation firms focus on although the biotechnology industry has grown and changed over the past decade the basic structure of the industry the measures of innovation performance and the based on the findings in this study one can conclude that there are strong relationships among innovation and performance in the us biotechnology industry expenditure drives research based innovation collaboration is a strategy for advancing innovation by providing the complementary assets and technologies firms need to achieve success a combination based innovation can lead to market success and positive market performance in firms it is evident from the literature and from the results of this study that firms need well crafted strategic plans regarding the development acquisition and commercialization stages of innovation both scientific advancement and market forces are at play throughout the innovation a combination of internal research and development and external production and distribution activities long term success in the biotechnology industry may require that firms have access to and command of the full range of complementary assets necessary to discover develop and commercialize new technologies include articulating a scientific vision and strategy having a skilled and reputable staff securing an intellectual property web accessing first class facilities and equipment possessing a range of business expertise obtaining seamless funding establishing collaborative partnerships addressing ethical issues and expertly managing regulatory requirements our study has identified most of the same multiple innovation cycles within a firm and integrate competencies inside and outside organizational boundaries successful managers of innovation in biotechnology must possess an acute knowledge and understanding of the industry s dynamics and must be able to exploit this knowledge by identifying areas where the firms resources would be best invested and integration of new technologies throughout the innovation cycle provide firms with a competitive edge firm managers should learn from and follow the strategies of industry leaders and firms excelling in the areas of innovation or performance in which the firm wishes to be positioned to present an open architecture for real time sensory feedback control of a dual arm industrial robotic cell the setup is composed of two industrial robot manipulators equipped with force torque sensors and pneumatic grippers a vision system and a belt conveyor design methodology approach the original industrial robot controllers have been replaced by a single pc with software running under a real time variant of the linux operative system findings the new control architecture control schemes to be developed and tested for the single robots and for the dual arm robotic cell including force control and visual servoing tasks originality value an advanced user interface and a simulation environment have been developed which permit fast safe and reliable
contemporary airport choice studies we use the following airport attributes access time to the airport and past experience of using the airport similarly based on the empirical findings of the previous airline choice studies we use the following airline attributes airfare service frequency and frequent flyer program membership detailed descriptions of the variables are as follows access time to airport the airport access time is measured by the amount of time it takes for a traveler to reach a candidate airport from the traveler s residence airport experience used a candidate airport in the past the variable is coded if traveler has used airport prior to trip occasion and coded otherwise airfare since respondents had poor memories of actual airfares the perceived fares are used it is a binary variable that is coded if a traveler considers an airline to be offering lower fares than the industry average and coded the variable therefore may also be viewed as the perceived carrier type of respondents service frequency this variable represents the number of scheduled flight services offered by a carrier from each candidate airport to the destination airport of traveler at time we use official airline guide to obtain this variable frequent flyer program membership active participant of mileage plans the ffp variable of traveler for airline at time is coded if satisfies the following two conditions simultaneously at trip occasion and is coded otherwise traveler has been an ffp member of the airline for two or more years and traveler has used the airline at least once within the last two years penalty variables s product elimination behavior disjunctive and conjunctive methods the disjunctive method assumes that a consumer s choice set contains only the alternatives that meet the consumer s minimum acceptable standard in at least one attribute the conjunctive method assumes that a consumer s choice set contains only the alternatives that meet the consumer s minimum acceptable standard attributes we use these concepts to construct lijht and piht specifically under the disjunctive method a choice alternative will have a chance of being included in a traveler s choice set if the alternative meets the traveler s acceptable standard in at least one attribute but will have a lower chance otherwise under the conjunctive method in contrast a choice alternative will have a choice set if the alternative has the largest number of attributes that are acceptable to the the largest number of attributes that are acceptable to the traveler but will have a lower chance we test both the disjunctive and conjunctive methods of choice set generation empirically and select the one that gives the higher fit details of how lijht and piht variables are actually calculated under the disjunctive and conjunctive methods are discussed in appendix a to traveler in airport at trip occasion by pooling only the airlines that have at least shares in the route from to the destination of traveler at time and carry at least passengers per month in this route all other airlines are not considered as choice alternatives for traveler at airport at time as they provide rather limited services third we determine hit the set of all the airports available to traveler at trip occasion by pooling only the airports that have at least one traveler at trip occasion by pooling only the airports that have at least one available airline for traveler at time on average the consideration set of our sample travelers included airports and airlines per airport approximating acceptable standards since a traveler s acceptable standard for each product attribute is either unknown or unobservable standards and select the one giving the highest fit to the data the first definition is the best value under this definition only the choice alternative that has the most attractive value of a given attribute for a traveler is considered as meeting the traveler s acceptable standard for that attribute for example if airline has the most frequent service to the destination of traveler from airport at time the airline is considered as the only airline is considered as the only carrier that meets the acceptable standard of traveler in airport at time for the service frequency attribute the second definition is the second best value under this definition the alternatives that have either the best or the second best value of an attribute are considered as meeting the traveler s acceptable standard for that attribute the third definition is the third best value under this definition the alternatives having the best second best or best second best or third best value of a given attribute are considered as meeting the traveler s acceptable standard for that attribute parameter estimation as discussed previously we calibrate both the proposed model and the more traditional multinomial logit and nested logit models for comparison purposes we calibrate all the three models by using the full information maximum likelihood procedure by using the full information maximum likelihood procedure specifically all the parameters are estimated simultaneously by numerically maximizing the following log likelihood function using the newton s algorithm where is a code such that if chooses the combination at time since our sample size is not large we delete during model calibration those variables that fail to attain statistical significance at the confidence level to gain degrees of freedom confidence level to gain degrees of freedom only after removing such insignificant variables we contrast the models by the goodness of fit and interpret the estimated parameters results table shows the fit of the two step nested logit model by the method of choice set generation scaled conjunctive method and the best value from now on we will consider this best fitting model as the two step nested logit model we see in table that in general the conjunctive method gives the better fit than the disjunctive method and the higher the acceptable standard the better the fit this pattern implies that travelers may be using a conjunctive type method to pre screen their choice
known among such nonmodern populations as the late neanderthals of europe in the following calendar dates derived from the oceanic or ice cap records or obtained by thermoluminescence electromagnetic spin resonance and uranium thorium methods are given in years or thousands of years bp and radiocarbon dates are expressed in years or thousands of years bp the recognition that oscillations in the production of atmospheric at this time were not as dramatic as once thought makes preliminary calibration possible and it is now well established that in this time range radiocarbon underestimates true calendar ages by three to five millennia because the relative ordering of the events is not affected and to keep the discussion of chronological issues within reasonable limits only uncalibrated ages are used here for the ka bp interval geographical patterns africa as shown by different authors many of the innovations traditionally associated with the european upper paleolithic are now known to appear significantly earlier in africa this is the case in particular with bone tools but it also applies to such features of lithic technology as the manufacture of geometrics and the production of bladelets from prismatic cores enough reliable dating evidence is now available to place these developments before ka bp and in some cases even before ka bp however these innovations did not form a package of co occurring traits and did not become a stable feature of human culture once they instead for many thousands of years thereafter they were abandoned as piecemeal and suddenly as they were first introduced and the same applies to ornaments and abstract markings where the latter are concerned the key evidence comes from the seaside cave site of blombos southern cape this site features a sequence where the uppermost level belongs to the still bay culture characterized by foliate points and is separated from the surficial late stone age deposits by a thick sterile sand dune this stratigraphic configuration precludes contamination from overlying later occupations as an explanation for the presence of personal ornaments and decorated pieces of ochre in level dated to ka bp by optically stimulated luminescence and to ka bp by tl the number of utilized pieces of ochre is in excess of and two of bear unequivocal abstract designs on one of the facets level also yielded personal ornaments all perforated shells of the marine mollusk nassarius kraussianus forty one such items have been described so far all were found in clusters of beads showing similar size color wear and perforation type suggesting that each cluster may correspond to a single beadwork item in the south african culture stratigraphic scheme the still is replaced by the howieson s poort industry which tribolo et al tl dated to ka bp at klasies river mouth and to ka bp at diepkloof these results are consistent with the aar and esr ages in the ka bp interval obtained for the corresponding levels of the border cave sequence northern kwazulu natal by miller et al gr un and beaumont and gr un et al the latter the possibility that the securely provenanced human remains found in this cave the near complete infant skeleton and the largely complete lower jaw could represent intrusions of later pleistocene or even holocene age indeed direct esr dating of an enamel fragment from yielded a result of ka bp which is consistent with similar results for faunal samples from the same levels this evidence in turn strengthens the hypothesis that the pit is reported to have been entirely cut into the underlying msa deposits and to have had its lip lying below an ash horizon at the very base of the howieson s poort levels also was in situ given its stratigraphic position and accompanying dating evidence it is thus quite possible that this burial was broadly contemporary with the still bay occupation of blombos a perforated conus bairstowi sea shell was reportedly associated with the skeleton and may have the dead infant in which case border cave would add a further ritual dimension to the use of personal ornaments at this time for the next years however no similar finds are known in either howieson s poort or post howieson s poort later msa contexts secure evidence for ornaments turns up again only in eastern africa where the rockshelter of enkapune ya muto kenya yielded ostrich eggshell beads in an early lsa context with fragments from bead manufacture to ka bp mcbrearty and brooks s review of the african evidence mentions similar finds in boomplaas in association with statistically identical dates on charcoal but in an msa not lsa context as is also the case at the recently reported but as yet undated tanzanian site of loiyangalani an ostrich eggshell fragment was found in the burial pit containing skeleton from nazlet khater in dated on associated charcoal to ka bp these sites are all located far from the coast which could explain the absence of marine shell beads in the inventories however at least where boomplaas is concerned the distance in question is identical to that which separates border cave from the sea the scant evidence available indicates that only perforated marine shells were in use ka bp and only ostrich eggshell beads were in use bp thus changes through time in mobility patterns exchange systems or cultural preferences also may have been involved fig african personal ornaments modern nassarius kraussianus shell kraussianus shell bead from msa of blombos ostrich eggshell bead from the msa site of loiyangalani marine shells used as ornaments in the iup and the early ahmarian of the near east gibbosula beads from layer of ag izli in a secure howieson s poort context from diepkloof parkington et al found abstract markings on small fragments of ostrich eggshells thought to have been used as water flasks they noted that although the fainter marks could result from use wear the deeper ones were clearly intentional and in a few cases formed compositions akin to the abstract designs made on the blombos
journals were not considered appropriate for inclusion given the academic we realize there are many other high quality and reputable logistics journals as well as journals in other disciplines publishing quality logistics and supply chain research article inclusion to be included in our analysis of logistics research an article had to meet the following criteria the article was not an editorial a book review an introduction to a special the article had to have a direct research orientation this eliminated articles that perhaps contributed to the field in general but did not directly contribute to research for example articles were omitted from the pool that primarily focused on teaching or curriculum and primarily focused on snapshots of activities in the logistics field itself in general the method of the study involved classifying the logistics research articles of the and issues of the three journals into the framework during those three years there was a total of logistics research articles contained in the three journals as shown in table i the articles were evenly distributed across the three journals and three years to classify the research method approach we performed a content analysis of all articles the content analysis is discussed in the following three sub sections overview of content analysis the process for conducting the content analysis which was adapted from weber and neuendorf is shown in figure to achieve reliable results the content analysis was designed to guard against threats to reliability neuendorf described the key threats to reliability and therefore the confidence that may be placed in the results as a poorly executed coding scheme inadequate coder training coder fatigue and was addressed in both phases the rogue coder threat was not an issue due to extensive coder training which took place by conducting several practice rounds prior to the actual coding of the research data each of the two phases of the content analysis is discussed below content analysis phase phase of the content analysis involved variable definition pilot testing and coder training we used and from all three journals during this phase of the study we created a codebook that specified the coding criteria and developed a coding form in microsoft excel the coding form not only contained areas to record coder choices but also allowed the coder to flag any article that required discussion as the two coders we each then independently classified articles from one half of the issues of for each of the three journals of the pilot was complete agreements and disagreements were tabulated and intercoder crude agreement was calculated we agreed percent of the time relative to the natural artificial dimension coding and percent of the time on the rational existential dimension coding during the first round we then discussed the disagreements and any articles flagged during the independent classifications based on the discussions we then our coding criteria and performed another round of the pilot study on the second half of the issues of on the three journals during the second round of the pilot we agreed percent of the time relative to the natural artificial dimension coding and percent of the time on the rational existential dimension coding we again tabulated the intercoder crude agreement and then discussed the disagreements and any articles flagged during the process was repeated on one half of the issues in thus resulting in three rounds of pilot testing during the third round of the pilot we agreed percent of the time relative to the natural artificial dimension coding and percent of the time on the rational existential dimension coding in general we improved relative to agreement each round of the pilot with the exception of the third round along the rational existential dimension despite this one despite this one drop in agreement we again revised our coding criteria and felt comfortable that we would again improve on agreement along both of the dimensions phase involved a great deal of discussion but resulted in a useful codebook and an easy to use coding form as a result subsequent to phase we became comfortable with our ability to classify articles along the dimensions of the meredith the et al framework we then proceeded to phase of the study phase in phase we proceeded by independently classifying all of the articles included in the sample along both dimensions of the meredith the et al framework during phase a total of articles were examined which encompasses the entire sample of articles for the years reviewed upon completion agreements and disagreements were tabulated intercoder crude agreement and intercoder reliability using cohen s calculated it should be noted that the reliability measures were calculated prior to discussing disagreements as mandated by weber we then resolved any disagreements resulting in a final classification of the articles during phase the coder fatigue threat to reliability discussed earlier was indeed an issue the coding process involved a thorough analysis of each of the articles the analysis involved more than a quick glance at an abstract or keywords as we that abstracts and keywords were either not very informative or were sometimes misleading we avoided the potential impact of fatigue on our results by performing the coding process in multiple sessions and during times of the day where fatigue was less likely to be an issue and intercoder reliability using cohen s as mandated by neuendorf intercoder agreement and reliability are reported separately for each variable rather than aggregating the results to a single measure we agreed percent of the time relative to the natural artificial dimension coding and percent of the time on the rational existential dimension coding although there are no widely accepted levels of crude agreement states that crude agreement of or above is acceptable to all crude agreement does not consider the fact that there is a probability that the coders may agree by chance we therefore present our results using cohen s which corrects for the possibility of chance agreement our intercoder reliabilities were and for the rational
cannot make it clear to him that it was she who saved him from drowning when he awoke on the beach the mermaid had hidden behind a rock a girl looking like her coming however not from the him making him believe that she was the one he owed his life to and she is the princess whom he more or less mistakenly marries in the end from her very first sacrifice which enables her to rise to the human world the result is already given the condition that makes it possible for her to come close to the prince at the same time makes it impossible for her to be recognized for her true identity and be loved by the one whose love her second sacrifice appears to be the condition for her final change of shape on the night of the prince s wedding she must return unsuccessful to her original element but her sisters surface on the ocean and present her with a knife which they have received from the sea witch the mermaid has a new choice she can kill the prince in the arms of his bride and then return to the ocean be a mermaid again and live for years like her becoming mere foam on the water but again she chooses to act against her original nature by throwing the knife overboard thus sacrificing herself in other words she chooses to commit suicide instead of saving herself at the expense of the prince she drowns herself and in doing so her body is dissolved into foam where the knife hits the water some bloodstains appear these are the signs of the mermaid s suicide she has killed her own element her own only apparently bloodstains night is turning into morning darkness is replaced by the first daylight what seems to be blood in reality turns out to be the very first beams of the rising sun mirrored in the surface of the ocean death then seems only a transient phenomenon not an ultimate reality the mermaid is once again given a new shape going through her the so called daughters of the air parallel and counterpart to the mermaids there she shall live for years qualifying for the long desired immortality is this a fairy tale or not in the sense of the folk tale it is certainly not a fairy tale a true fairy tale should have a happy ending the mermaid should marry the prince and they should live happily ever after that is their animated film the little mermaid honestly enough presented as only being inspired by andersen not based on his story has a protagonist the mermaid and an adversary the sea witch she reshapes herself into a young attractive woman who by deception tries to gain the love of the prince but who as the evil person she is is defeated in the end all ends well the former mermaid marries the prince any fairy tale or in children s literature in general however noble and unselfish the motive for a suicide may be the fact that she is passing through death into resurrection is not enough to calm the childish mind and have it believe in a happy ending and numerous children have cried for the poor little mermaid paying little attention to andersen s assurance about the bliss of a life after death among stories in a children s magazine it is a story not generally accessible even to most modern minded adults whether christian or not if we take a deliberately religious reading what exactly is going on here in the final description of the mermaid s journey from darkness towards the light from the bottom of the sea right up to the realm of the air and a life giving sun what is taking place here is certainly not in conformity with a sunday sermon of today s danish lutheran first of all what is this realm of the daughters of the air where the transfigured mermaid arrives after her suicide andersen never indicates a definite concept but often refers to it his older friend and literary mentor the poet ingemann who in several central religious views agreed with andersen had a more precise concept for it in a book called tankebreve fra en afdod he called it you might also call it a kind of purgatory without the medieval catholic notion of burning the soul free of its earthly sins and desires much more in accord with the ideas of perpetual development so predominant in the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries it embodies the idea of the soul being on an eternal journey towards its true identity developing in life and still developing after death the intermediate the chance of improving of a further development just as we see it in goethe s faust part ii where mephisto finally thinks that he has won the game can claim his bet and take faust s soul but faust is saved because of his perpetual striving and his immortal part rises gradually towards heaven or more precisely towards the divine female archetype andersen s mermaid enters the same intermediate state of development and to which he refers in some of his poems in his debut prose work travel on foot and in his novel only a fiddler just to mention a few examples second the idea of qualification is completely banned from today s danish lutheran church in its strict interpretation of luther it is based on soren kierkegaard s theology kierkegaard being a younger contemporary of andersen but in many respects totally dissenting from and is too much of a modern personality and author to be a disciple of goethe on this specific matter he nevertheless shares goethe s and his period s idea of the perpetual striving and development of the soul as for the mermaid andersen s modernity is demonstrated here in the fact that striving is not a simple growth
level the log of the initial income share of the poor also enters negatively and significantly the lowest quintile is more likely to enjoy greater income gains than average in countries where the initial income share of the poor is very low the coefficient estimates suggest that financial development has an economically substantive impact on the poorest income quintile take the example of brazil and canada with private credit of respectively had brazil had the same level of private credit as canada over the period the income share quintile would have fallen only by year rather than the actual which would have resulted in an income share of the lowest income quintile rather than the actual robustness tests confirm that financial development positively and significantly boosts the share of income received by the poorest quintile private credit continues to enter positively and significantly when controlling for trade openness inflation significantly and negatively suggesting that monetary instability hurts the lowest income quintile more than the average person in an economy schooling and openness to trade do not enter significantly we further tested the robustness of the findings by including the growth rate of schooling and trade openness rather than including the level of schooling and trade as reported in column when including the growth rates private credit continues to enter positively but neither the growth rate of schooling nor the growth of trade enters significantly this does not suggest that trade openness and schooling are unimportant for the share of the lowest income quintile rather this result suggests that trade openness and schooling do not have distributional effects when controlling for the level of financial development and the initial income share of the poor non linearities as shown in column gdp per capita growth does not enter significantly and it does not alter the positive relationship between privatecredit and the growth in the lowest income share furthermore we do not find a non linear relationship between gdp per capita growth and growth of the lowest income share the interaction term between initial income share and gdp per capita growth does not enter significantly and including this term does not affect the estimated private credit furthermore we consider an alternative measure of financial development use a different estimation period and test for the possible effects of outliers we argued above that private credit is a superior measure of financial development to commercial central bank which equals the ratio of deposit money banks claims on the domestic economy to the sum of deposit money and central bank claims on the domestic analyses with commercial central bank because dollar and kraay use this measure of financial development in their examination of income of the poor the results in column confirm finding that financial development disproportionately helps the poor commercial central bank is positively associated with the growth rate of the poorest quintile when conditioning on gdp per capita growth initial income share of the poor initial schooling trade er s results also hold when limiting the estimation to the period finally we identify and assess the potential impact of outliers by following the methodology of besley kuh and welsch the procedure identifies guatemala hong kong nepal singapore sierra leone switzerland tanzania turkey and uganda as influential observations the results hold however when excluding these countries from the analysis financial development and growth of lowest income share depends on the level of economic development or the level of educational attainment based on insights by greenwood and jovanovic and galor moav we included the interaction term of financial development and the level of economic development and the interaction term of financial development and educational attainment these interaction terms do not enter significantly thus we found no evidence relationship between financial development and income growth of the poor varies with the level of gdp per capita or the level of educational attainment we also explored alternative dynamic structures for the gini coefficient following ravallion specifically we allowed for a trend in inequality that depends on the initial distribution of income distribution however we did not find any evidence for a time trend in the gini coefficient in our sample square of gdp per capita growth also does not affect the parameter estimate on private credit in table we also present results using the dynamic panel estimator that employs instrumental variables to control for potential endogeneity and omitted country specific traits as shown in column we continue to find that financial development exerts a disproportionately positive impact on the growth of the income share of the poorest quintile private credit enters with a value of while conditioning on initial income share of the poor initial schooling trade openness and inflation the larger coefficient on private credit in this panel regression relative to the ols regressions primarily reflects the use of higher frequency data in the panel context neither of the specification tests second order autocorrelation and sargan tests is rejected supporting the validity of the instrumental variable panel estimator about the overall effect of financial intermediary development on income growth of the poor in the ols specification and an even larger fraction in the panel estimation as discussed above income growth of the poorest income quintile can be decomposed into average income growth and growth in the income share of the lowest quintile regressions and in table replicate standard gdp per capita growth regressions private credit a coefficient of this estimate is consistent with the findings of a large literature on finance and aggregate growth to compare the growth the effect of private credit with the distribution effect we compare regression where private credit enters the growth of the lowest income share specification with a coefficient of with regression where private credit enters the per capita gdp growth regression with a coefficient of this implies of the overall effect of private credit on the income growth of the lowest quintile is due to distributional changes in favor of the poorest quintile and the remaining is due to the overall
typically disproportionate it is prometheus trick but all men suffer for it moreover when zeus ends prometheus torment he does so not out of pity but to boost the kleos of his son heracles cf clay it is precisely dike daughter of zeus and zeus s gift to mankind that renders the than both the races of bronze and silver that preceded them in the hymn to aphrodite permanent virginity is granted to athena artemis and hestia as their father zeus s control over his daughters athena and artemis is implicit while hestia is presented as requesting such an exceptional status as a privilege from zeus acknowledging his control even over the sexual lives of his sisters cf hermes challenge is accepted iv work on such cultural transmission from the perspective of a near eastern specialist see bryce west haubold offers a useful critique of the unreflective methodology of hellenists who merely catalogue parallels that are said to speak for themselves yet while he praises archaeologists who have long appreciated the eastern mediterranean as a connected landscape of mutual influences he himself offers no account of how such influences are meant to operate indeed it may be more helpful to think in terms of interaction rather than influence wherein interaction refers to a continuous process of cultural contact and borrowing that operates in both directions and over a long period of time though burkert continues to speak of the eighth and seventh centuries as the high point of the orientalizing revolution he also contacts of all sorts were continuous it is likely that many oriental features may have dated from earlier periods since observes throughout this period ie from the late bronze age to the eighth century there was regular commercial and political contact between the greek and near eastern worlds moreover evidence of such early cultural interaction is growing the most spectacular recent discovery being a cuneiform letter from the king of the ahhiyawa to the hittite king hattusili iii in this letter the king of the ahhiyawa supports his claim to some disputed islands in the northern aegean by asserting that his ancestor received the islands from the king of assuwa as part of a marriage alliance cf latacz kelly of course this letter attest to political rather than literary contacts yet although we do not possess mycenaean greek texts or mythological traditions of the near east it is not unlikely that myths story patterns and other ideas were carried via trading routes diplomatic channels and the migration from the late bronze age onwards of healers seers and singers or poets who compares od for bronze age bards in greece cf west morris for the akkadian atrahasis and homer s deception of zeus cf burkert for the homeric epics cf west bryce george presents a detailed literary history of the epic of gilgamesh from the third millennium onwards csapo offers an illuminating analysis of the greek and hittite myths of divine succession tabulating the main parallels between them but also asking fundamental questions about what such parallels actually show in addition though tabulating the main parallels between them but also asking fundamental questions about what such parallels actually show in addition though literary interaction could occur caution is required when comparing similar phenomena in different cultures especially with regard to chronology most for example analyses the alleged near eastern sources of hesiod s five races of men noting that in fact we do not possess any oriental sources older than hesiod from which he could have derived his version he goes on to ask how much of the whole myth of the races in the works and days could have been derived from a thorough familiarity with the tradition of greek epic the answer is a surprisingly large amount van de mieroop favors the twelfth century though dalley finds such a date too late the end of the twentieth where zeus s election takes place only after the olympian gods have defeated the titans in the sumerian story of cosmic order by contrast enki organizes the universe and assigns the gods their powers but derives the authority to do so from enlil who remains the chief god cf black et al burkert consider for example how zeus ends inter generational conflict through his self interested methods cf black et al burkert consider for example how zeus ends inter generational conflict through his self interested methods of family planning and female control cf ii it is notable that the basic pattern of a chief god who learns from the mistakes of the divine succession before him as zeus does is in itself a further novel and distinctive aspect of the greek model for example when west remarks it hardly going too far to say that the whole picture of the gods in the iliad is oriental the individuality of the greek world order is unfortunately elided cf poki see the odyssey as a morally more advanced text it is prima facie unlikely that any major epic would endorse the simple model of good always rewarded and sinner always punished for this would not be a particularly useful or credible theodicy since it is obviously contrary to what one might presume the case in the actual world of the audience adkins the importance of socially created forms of value in the epics is often neglected even by classically trained philosophers who still present a rather narrow view both of homeric society and its ethical conceptions cf eg lucas the concept of responsibility is one that has developed and grown over the ages we take it for granted but the homeric heroes had little use for that concept vocabulary on merit and kudos instead a stochastic model of waste management with on and off site storage luiz freitas amitrajeet a batabyal department of economics rochester institute of technology lomb memorial drive rochester ny usa this paper is
has been employed by lo et al to prepare cu based nanofluids with different dielectric liquids such as de ionized water with solutions of ethylene glycol and pure ethylene glycol they found that the thermal conductivity of the dielectric liquids cuo and cu based nanofluids also can be prepared by this technique efficiently an advantage of the one step technique is that nanoparticle agglomeration is minimized while the disadvantage is that only low vapor pressure fluids are compatible with such a process recently a ni nanomagnetic fluid was also produced by lo et al using the considering the available commercial nanopowders supplied by several companies in this method nanoparticles was first produced and then dispersed the base fluids generally ultrasonic equipment is used to intensively disperse the particles and reduce the agglomeration of particles for example eastman et al lee et al and wang et al used this method to produce nanofluids also murshed reported in the literature are gold silver silica and carbon nanotubes as compared to the single step method the two step technique works well for oxide nanoparticles while it is less successful with metallic particles except for the use of ultrasonic equipment some other techniques such as control of ph or addition of surface active surface properties of the suspended particles and thus suppress the tendency to form particle clusters it should be noted that the selection of surfactants should depend mainly on the properties of the solutions and particles xuan and li chose salt and oleic acid as the dispersant to enhance the stability of transformer oil cu and water cu nanofluids respectively and proper dispersion of water nanofluids sodium dodecyl sulfate was used by hwang et al during the preparation of water based mwcnt nanofluids since the fibers are entangled in the aqueous suspension in general methods such as change of ph value addition of dispersant and ultrasonic vibration aim at changing the surface properties of suspended particles and suppressing formation of can affect the heat transfer performance of the nanofluids especially at high temperature experimental investigations measurement of thermal conductivity since thermal conductivity is the most important parameter responsible for enhanced heat transfer many experimental works been reported on this aspect the transient hot wire method the steady state parallel plate technique and thermal conductivity of nanofluids among them the transient hot wire method has been used most extensively because in general nanofluids are electrically conductive it is difficult to apply the ordinary transient hot wire technique directly a modified hot wire cell and electrical system was proposed by nagasaka and nagashima by coating the hot wire with an epoxy adhesive which has excellent electrical insulation of ions of the conducting fluids around the hot wire may affect the accuracy of such experimental results the oscillation method was proposed by roetzel et al and further developed by czarnetski and roetzel this method is purely thermal and the electrical components of the apparatus are removed from the test sample hence ion movement should not affect the measurement researchers in their experimental investigations all the experimental results have demonstrated the enhancement of the thermal conductivity by addition of nanoparticles eastman et al measured the thermal conductivity of nanofluids containing cuo and cu nanoparticles with two different base fluids water and he oil a of the thermal conductivity was that the use of cu nanoparticles results in larger improvements than that of cuo lee et al suspended cuo and with two different base fluids water and ethylene glycol and obtained four combinations of nanofluids cuo in water cuo in eg in than the same liquids without nanoparticles the cuo eg mixture showed enhancement of more than nanoparticles in the low volume fraction range vacuum pump oil and engine oil contained suspended and cuo nanoparticles of and nm of average diameters respectively experimental results demonstrated that the thermal conductivities of all nanofluids were higher than those of their base fluids also nanofluids increases with decreasing particles size results demonstrated of the effective thermal conductivity at nanoparticles as compared to reported by masuda et al and by lee et al at the same volume fraction of particles xuan and li enhanced the thermal conductivity of water using cu particles of comparatively large size a appropriate selection dispersants may improve the stability of the suspension they used oleic acid for transformer oil cu nanofluids and laurate salt for water cu suspension in their study and found that cu particles in transformer oil had superior characteristics to the suspension of cu particles in water xie et al investigated the effects of the ph value of the solid phase and the thermal conductivity of the base fluid on the thermal conductivity of nanofluids they found that the increase in the difference between the ph value and isoelectric point of resulted in enhancement of the effective thermal conductivity also the thermal conductivity enhancements were highly dependent on not appear to have any obvious effect on the thermal conductivity of the suspensions eastman et al used pure cu nanoparticles of less than nm size and achieved in thermal conductivity for only fraction of the solid dispersed in ethylene glycol they indicated that the increased ratio of surface to volume with decreasing size should be an important factor also effective thermal conductivity a fe nanofluid was prepared by hong and yang with ethylene glycol fe nanoparticles with mean size of nm were produced by chemical vapor condensation process they found that fe nanofluids exhibited higher enhancement of thermal conductivity than cu nanofluids their result indicated that the material with high thermal conductivity is not always the they concluded that the thermal conductivity of nanofluids increased non linearly with the solid volume fraction hong et al also investigated the effect of the clustering of fe nanoparticles on the thermal conductivity of nanofluids they found that the thermal conductivity of nanofluids is directly related to the agglomeration of fe nanoparticles which caused the nonlinear relation between the in condensed nanofluids murshed et al investigated nanoparticles in
growing attention and have been widely studied by scientists of ridgeology a fundamental and essential resource for latent print examiners it has been claimed that shapes and relative positions of sweat pores and shapes of ridge considerable weight to the conclusion of identification fingerprint formation human fingers are known to display friction ridge skin that consists of a series of ridges and furrows generally referred to as fingerprints the frs is made of two major layers dermis and epidermis the ridges emerge on the epidermis to increase the friction ridges per centimeter while a female has ridges per centimeter it is suggested that friction ridges are composed of small ridge units each with a pore and the number of ridge units and their locations on the ridge are randomly established as a result the shape size alignment of ridge units and their fusion with an adjacent ridge unit are unique for each person independent ridge units still exist on the skin pores on the other hand penetrate into the dermis starting from the epidermis they are defined as the openings of subcutaneous sweat glands that are placed on epidermis the study in showed that the first sweat gland formations are observed in the fifth month of gestation while the epidermal ridges are not constructed until the sixth month this implies dermis development is completed and are immutable once the ridge formation is completed due to the fact that each ridge unit contains one sweat gland pores are often considered evenly distributed along ridges and the spatial distance between pores frequently appears to be in proportion to the breadth of the ridge which on an average is approximately mm a pore can be visualized as pore is entirely enclosed by a ridge while an open pore intersects with the valley lying between two ridges one should not expect to find two separate prints of the same pore to be exactly alike as a pore may be open in one and closed in the other print occasionally narrow and often fragmented ridges also known as incipient ridges may appear between normal mature at the time of differentiation when primary ridge formation stopped because pores are formed during the early growth of the ridges it is observed that some incipient ridges also have pore formations it has also been observed that incipient ridges occur in about percent of the people and percent of the fingers the incipient ridges are also permanent and repeatable friction ridge characteristics and characteristics of fingerprints from a microvascular point of view it has been found that the regular disposition of capillaries on the palmar side of a finger sharply followed the cutaneous sulci of the fingerprint reproducing an identical vascular fingerprint with the same individual architecture of the cutaneous area the capillaries around the sweat glands also formed a very from the palmar to the dorsal side of the finger this study provides further scientific evidence of the uniqueness of fingerprints fingerprint sensing technology there are many different sensing methods to obtain the ridge and valley pattern of finger skin or fingerprint historically in law enforcement applications fingerprints were mainly acquired offline nowadays most commercial the finger surface with a fingerprint sensor based on optical solid state ultrasonic and other imaging technologies the earliest known images of fingerprints were impressions in clay and later in wax starting in the late century and throughout the century the acquisition of fingerprint images was mainly performed by using the so called ink technique the subject s finger is the card was then scanned producing the digital image this kind of process is referred to as rolled offline fingerprint sensing which is still being used in forensic applications and background checks of applicants for sensitive jobs direct sensing of fingerprints as electronic signals started with optical live scan sensors with frustrated total internal reflection principle when the finger a diffused light while the fingerprint valleys that do not touch the glass platen reflect the light ridges that touch the platen absorb the light this differential property of light reflection allows the ridges to be discriminated from the valleys solid state fingerprint sensing technique uses silicon based direct contact sensors to convert the physical information electric field radio frequency and other principles the capacitive sensor consists of an integrated two dimensional array of metal electrodes each metal electrode acts as one capacitor plate and the contacting finger acts as the second plate a passivation layer on the surface of the device forms the dielectric between these two plates a finger pressed against some solid state sensors can deal with nonideal skin conditions and are suited for use in a wide range of climates however the surface of solid state sensors needs to be cleaned regularly to prevent the grease and dirt from compromising the image quality newfingerprint sensing technologies are constantly being explored and developed for example multispectral fingerprint sensors msi devices scan the subsurface of the skin by using different wavelengths of light nm and nm the fundamental idea is that different features of skin cause different absorbing and scattering actions depending on the wavelength of light fingerprint images acquired using the msi technology appear to be of significantly have also been shown to be useful for spoof detection another new fingerprint sensing technology based on multicamera system known as touchless imaging has been introduced by tbs inc as suggested by the name touchless imaging avoids direct contact between the sensor and the skin and thus consistently preserves the fingerprint ground truth without introducing skin deformation during mitsubishi one of the most essential characteristics of a digital fingerprint image is its resolution which indicates the number of dots or pixels per inch generally to ppi is the minimum resolution that allows the feature extraction algorithms to locate minutiae in a fingerprint image fbi compliant sensors must satisfy the ppi of image is needed although it is not yet practical to design solid state sensors with such a high resolution due to the cost
this study is the fact that the sample sizes within each study group may not have been large enough to detect additional statistical associations thus lack of associations in this study should be interpreted with caution peer counseling intervention studies are needed to further understand ebf barriers in different ethnic groups in the united states genomics for health in preconception and prenatal periods siobhan dolan janis biermann karla damus and counseling are needed to understand genomic information and provide guidance in interpreting this information and making decisions the factors that influence decision making about testing and acting on test results constitute a complex process that has not been well studied family history is an important tool for obtaining genomic information and can assist women and families in understanding risk preconceptionally and prenatally genomic research has enhanced understanding the mechanisms of birth defects such as neural tube defect and will likely provide research opportunities to better understand complex perinatal outcomes such as preterm birth conclusions research education advocacy and anticipatory guidance are needed as women and families obtain more genetic and genomic information before and during pregnancy all nurses will be involved in helping patients use genetic and genomic information to understand risk and to develop strategies to modify and in translating the expanding array of genomic information to improve birth outcomes promoting optimal pregnancy outcomes is a key strategy to enhance health throughout life being born on time of normal birth weight and without birth defects is associated with lower rates of mortality and morbidity for infants children and adults in the past decades however the rapid pace of these developments has created unique challenges for healthcare professionals and has introduced a host of new ethical legal social and policy concerns many nurses are on the front line interacting with women and families about reproductive health and working with families in assessing risk and implementing risk reduction strategies to improve birth outcomes nurses frequently in ways that are culturally sensitive and appropriate for the health literacy and age of a woman and her family nurses often provide anticipatory guidance through the complicated decision making maze of genetic and genomic information including counseling screening and testing research is needed to better define risks and benefits and how to most effectively communicate this information cannot assure that every baby will be born healthy but advances in genomics provide more information for decision making this article is focused on the preconception and prenatal periods each period requires slightly different but related information and presents unique challenges to nurses women and families have information that will allow them to navigate the preconception and prenatal periods in ways that are right for them background as genetics moves to genomics its purview in perinatal care expands from considering single genes and their effects to the functions and interactions of all the genes in the genome nurses in practice guide decision making and clinical care during preconception and prenatal periods the challenges are great because not only one genome is at play but rather the interaction of maternal paternal and fetal genomes thus perinatalomics is here ie understanding the functions and interactions of all the genes in the three genomes that preconception interconception and prenatal periods have evolved from an option for a few women to look for rare and often serious diseases that run in their families to an option for almost every woman to understand her fetus s risk for a variety of common conditions and possible birth outcomes family history is an important genomic tool that can be used for assessing risk nurses can use family history to find evidence of in implementing risk factor reduction strategies the importance of family history in understanding risk has been increasingly studied during the entire continuum of reproductive health including emphasis on preconception care in improving birth outcomes national recommendations for preconception care have been published and include the concept of the continuum of the reproductive years screening and genetic testing many single gene conditions such as cystic fibrosis follow autosomal recessive inheritance patterns guidelines for screening women with risk factors often include a positive family history of a particular condition or a certain racial ethnic or ancestral background because appropriate candidates for screening is an increasing challenge requiring nursing participation and research carrier screening for cf is now being offered to individuals with a family history of cf reproductive partners of individuals who have cf and couples in whom one or both partners are caucasian and are planning a pregnancy genotype phenotype correlation for some known mutations or variants although genotyping is becoming cheaper and more efficient the ability to predict severity of clinical disease based on genotype is getting more complicated as gene variants of uncertain significance are found in addition to the over one thousand known diseasecausing mutations therefore nurses may find themselves at the same time a nurse might play a key role in communicating these uncertain implications to women and their families in the preconception and prenatal period as part of the information that must be integrated for decision making another aspect of broader population based screening is identifying genetic variants associated with phenotypes the appropriateness of screening for morbidity is a complicated aspect of population based screening one of the basic historical tenets of screening is that the conditions being screened for must be serious chronic sinusitis for example might not meet that criterion on the other hand understanding the predisposition to chronic sinusitis that genetic screening assisted reproductive technology includes additional options for families affected with known genetic disorders preimplantation genetic diagnosis can be used to screen embryos at risk for known conditions nurses have major responsibilities in educating the family offering anticipatory guidance and assisting with decision making reproductive options including adoption donor gametes or not having use of art once a couple understands this information nurses provide much needed support to make and execute decisions with key nursing diagnoses and interventions made throughout the process donor gametes and adoption
received weeks of directed who did not receive rehabilitation the rehabilitation program emphasized transfers bowel and bladder care incentive spirometry nutrition and skin care the outcome measures were survival independence pain levels depression and satisfaction with life patients receiving rehabilitation had longer median survivals fewer deaths from myelopathic complications in addition among the patients who received rehabilitation eight became independent for transfers and nine returned home we conclude that directed rehabilitation reduced patients pain levels and increased their mobility survival and life satisfaction introduction spinal column and to percent of people with cancer develop a symptomatic sem sems are present in the autopsies of one third of patients with cancer the annual incidence of sem in the united states increased from in to in among patients with spinal cord injury died of myelopathic complications such as pneumonia infected pressure sores and urosepsis which are the leading causes of death in the first year after traumatic sci several factors may contribute to the higher mortality rate of nonambulatory sem patients compared with patients with traumatic sci patients can die from direct complications of systemic cancer in addition the likelihood the mean age of patients with sem was about years older than that of patients with traumatic sci furthermore the coexistence of systemic cancer resulting in a catabolic state may increase the likelihood of complications of immobility and death patient age and the presence of cancer are two factors that are not alterable however a third factor that is not to patients who develop sci due to systemic cancer we performed a prospective evaluation of consecutive male veterans who developed sem and were unable to walk after completion of sem treatment spinal cord medicine rehabilitation programs for people with traumatic sci improve independence self perceived quality of life and survival we developed a week incentive spirometry here we report the outcomes of these patients compared with a historical control group of the nonambulatory patients from the aforementioned study of sem the historical control group did not receive directed spinal cord rehabilitation we examined patient survival pain control depression mobility independence frequency of returning home and self reported for people with paraplegia due to sem methods from july to september we prospectively evaluated consecutive patients who presented to the louis stokes cleveland department of veterans affairs medical center with sem and were unable to walk after completion of sem treatment details of previously described the rt protocol and dexamethasone dose were the same for all subjects reported here the sem treatment protocol was similar to the protocols used in several prior studies of sem patients were considered ambulatory if they could walk without human assistance at least feet without stopping the nonambulatory patients were offered the opportunity to engage in this study was approved and continuously reviewed by the quality assurance committee of the neurology department of case western reserve university the lscvamc quality assurance service the lscvamc clinical executive committee and the lscvamc institutional review board rehabilitation training the week inpatient rehabilitation program emphasized days a week each treatment day patients received hours of occupational therapy and hours of training by a nurse that focused on transfers wheelchair use personal hygiene incentive spirometry skin care and bowel and bladder management in addition patients received minutes of physical therapy days a week to maintain range of motion of to traumatic sci patients entered the rehabilitation program within day of completing rt incentive spirometry each patient s nurse provided a minute training in the use of incentive spirometry the nurses encouraged the patients to increase their expiratory volumes and trained the caregivers to reinforce and when needed help patients perform incentive spirometry four times a day therapy was devoted to transfer training and unweighting techniques when a patient was unable to independently transfer from bed to chair and chair to commode we trained the caregiver to use a lift to transfer the patient skin care and bladder and bowel management occupational therapists trained patients to use mirrors to facilitate skin inspection patients and caregivers care and the transfer techniques learned in occupational therapy nurses taught patients and caregivers intermittent bladder catheterization techniques bowel care consisted of combined medication and mechanical techniques that facilitated bowel evacuation three times a week patients typically received mg of docusate sodium three times a day to soften their stool to administer a minienema containing mg of docusate sodium along with digital stimulation to facilitate bowel evacuation the patients who could sit unassisted learned to complete bowel care on a raised commode seat that could be located above a conventional toilet nurses taught the caregivers of the other two patients to complete bowel care in bed the in bed bowel patient and caregiver in the rehab group received two instructional sessions with a dietician to learn dietary manipulations to combat catabolism and to develop a diet that supported the patient s bowel management program historical control group the rehab group was compared with a historical walk after sem treatment the subjects in the no rehab group did not receive spinal cord rehabilitation but did receive physical therapy hours a week for at least weeks the physical therapy focused on range of limb motion and strengthening of residual lower limb motor function measures of pain after completion of sem treatment depression severity the study and control groups are shown in table patients in both groups had had detailed neurological physical examinations before starting sem treatment the examinations included classification of the severity and level of the myelopathy according to the american spinal injury association classification system briefly this classification system includes the following with most tested muscles graded at and no motor or sensory deficit patients in both groups were followed until their deaths after discharge from inpatient care patients were followed by telephone contacts every month and outpatient visits every months patients who had had similar sem treatments the inclusion criteria were an sem that was producing myelopathy and an inability to walk after sem treatment the exclusion criteria were
pension funds in indonesia dominate investments in the national bond market by investing in corporate bonds and bank indonesia bills the rest of their funds are invested in the stock market pension funds can invest only affiliated companies they are permitted to invest in commercial paper and bonds with a maturity of more than one year but they can invest no more than companies or bonds listed for less than three years and cannot lend firms however a pension fund can invest its funds in shares of companies that have been listed for three years or more the national pension corporation in korea had million subscribers and trillion in total assets and trillion under management as of end september in the npc launched an in house fund management unit with a group of professional managers hired into three asset classes public sector financial and welfare the principal public sector investment consist of treasury bonds while financial sector instruments include the public and private bonds stocks beneficiary certificates trust funds and other types of securities assets in the welfare sector are establishment and operation of welfare facilities and loans to pension beneficiaries and for construction of welfare facilities end september trillion or of npf funds under management were allocated to public and welfare projects and trillion were invested in financial market instruments of various kinds some trillion or were invested in fixed income securities and another invested in stocks the npc commissions a group of asset management firms and investment advisors public asset management more efficient the ministry of budget and planning launched an nvestment pool management committee in the committee which consists of private and public sector experts selects professional fund managers to operate public funds under outsourcing contracts and monitors their performance as of end november some firms were under outsourcing contracts to manage about billion in public funds invested in the financial markets a december amendment to to the national pension act lifted a ban on investment in foreign securities venture capital and exchange traded derivatives there are no aggregate data for the private pension plans for korea the combined balance of occupational pension funds in insurance accounts and trust accounts stood at over trillion at end june as of end there were provident and pension funds in malaysia which billion competition in the malaysian pension fund market is very limited overall there were million contributors to the provident and pension funds as of end the employees provident fund and sosco held a near duopoly in pension fund management with million contributors between them the epf held billion in of the total assets in the industry epf was also the largest institutional investor in malaysia owning around the total capitalization of the national stock marketi pnd one of the largest pension funds in the world the epf maintains a on investments in malaysian government bonds and in both the equities and non malaysian assets as a result the epf mainly invests in government securities of its billion in investments in billion or invested in government securities billion in of malaysian bonds billion or equities billion or money market instruments and billion or real estate the fund also allocated billion to private equity investments million of which was invested in eight companies as of end september the employee provident fund act of allows epf participants to invest some of their via mutual funds unit trusts the government has appointed malaysian financial institutions as designated fund managers to handle these investments the investment option which is limited to contributors by employees younger than with savings exceeding allows withdrawals of a maximum any surplus exceeding for capital market investment in the epf allocated million to external fund managers billion each year for exhibit the epf is also an active investor in the country economic infrastructure it was the single largest financier of the billion kuala lumpur international airport to enable it to finance private sector activity the epf act was liberalized in to allow the epf to channel up to its annual investable funds into private securities the epf can invest overseas finance in june the epf appointed aberdeen asset management the first foreign fund manager to receive a license to operate in malaysia to manage its overseas investments and in october it was seeking approval to invest as much as billion in private equity funds and fixed income securities overseas private pension funds are very small in malaysia combined assets of private fund members as of mid with a total balance of billion in their accounts under the cpf investment scheme members can invest their ordinary account and special account savings under cpfis ordinary account members can invest up to savings in shares corporate bonds and property funds while total cpf balances were invested in stocks and bonds insurance policies and unit trusts cpf members earn a market based interest rate on their savings subject to a minimum rate of funds in the medisave special and retirement funds earn an additional or per annum the interest rate is a weighted average of the fixed deposit rate and saving rates at major banks the weights are restrictions on investing in overseas markets were eliminated in the potential for international diversification is available only through unit trusts in thailand the investment guidelines for the oapf must comply with the regulations of the social security subcommittee on investment the subcommittee consists of employers employees government representatives and investment experts and provides recommendations to the sso who then request approval security committee in compliance with the ministry of finance guidelines in december size of the oapf was about tbt billion the assets of the oapf are invested mainly in thai bonds only the fund was invested in equities and invested in state owned enterprise equities the major holdings are state enterprises and commercial banks government and government guaranteed bonds state enterprise bonds and must invest at least its portfolio in low risk assets and high risk assets there is a on stocks warrants and
clear expectation of starting and finishing times a request for an unscheduled task or meeting could bring the familiar response i do nt have the time for it similarly monochronic people spend their or at home save or set aside time for family gatherings and waste time waiting if their expectations are met monochronic people enjoy their time and have a good time otherwise they are having a hard time or a lousy time monochronic cultures emphasize punctuality and promptness to be late for a meeting or to not to finish a task on time cause considerable people consider unscheduled meetings and events as a normal part of social interactions where business and non business activities intermingle such differences in time perspectives for punctuality and strict adherence to timetables and schedules could create problems for international managers in traditional societies a combination of polychronic attitudes and concern for interpersonal relationships might result in in the middle east for example changing work schedules and appointments to fit regular visits by clients friends and relatives is very common a northern european or an american manager unfamiliar with the cultural values of middle easterners might interpret such practices as lack of concern for the business at hand similarly a latin american may be late for a business appointment due to a preference for of interest in or commitment to a business deal attitudes towards age and gender attitudes toward age and gender vary across cultures and societies the united nations has two different measures that gauge the status of women these are the gender related development index and a gender empowerment measure that evaluates the relative significance of women s participation in political and professional arenas tures the distribution of resources in key dimensions such as education health and income between men and women the latter gem measure has three components the share of women s earned income relative to that of men the percentage of women among administrative and professional workers and the proportion of parliamentary seats held by women quintile on gender inequality and by extension the highest on women s status in society by contrast countries like afghanistan egypt guatemala iran chile paraguay and argentina placed in the highest quintile on gender inequality among these afghanistan egypt and guatemala had the lowest status for women in the study sample the gender inequality index was also positively related to two dummy variables the muslim and the second to whether the particular country was located in latin america these relationships reflect cultural and institutional legacies prevalent in muslim and to a lesser extent in latin american societies the level of economic development has been found to have a significant impact on the status of women as measured by gdi their status was higher in wealthier nations than in poorer ones is likely to be accompanied by higher levels of status measured in terms of gdi americans have a great admiration for youth and females are gaining exist equalization attempts are paying dividends the laws have made it clear that there should be no discrimination between sexes in business practices the american cultural values still favor males however both sexes are usually treated similarly unlike in traditional societies where females play a subservient role american females consider themselves equal to males and societal values are changing in that direction females except for a few western societies in the rest of the world females are not granted the same opportunities as males and do not enjoy the same privileges by all accounts japanese society is still a male dominated society females are not given prominent roles in business and government fe males who hold a job before they are married are expected to quit after marriage the same is true for other countries in asia africa and even the most basic rights such as holding a job outside the home voting in the political process or even driving a car in saudi arabia or kuwait for example females do not have the right to drive a car they can only be passengers in a car in many orthodox moslem countries females are supposed to adhere to a very rigid code of conduct and personal appearance they should not be seen in public in any fashion that draws attention to them males and and consequently have different rights while we are aware of the low positions of females in other cultures it may surprise us to learn that the admiration for youth and youthfulness is not universal either the united states is a very young country the vigor and strength of youth made this country expand and prosper unlike the old world there were no restrictions and limitations on how and strength of youth consequently americans came to admire youthfulness and considered young age a favorable characteristic in other nations old age is a sign of experience and wisdom and youth is synonymous with naivet and a lack of sophistication in many asian countries senior citizens are highly respected and there is a clear ascending order of status according to age older people the government and they often are it is highly unusual to see younger people occupying high offices american mncs that ignore these cultural values and send the most qualified younger or female managers on assignments to contrasting cultures abroad may not evoke a favorable reception the assignment of a young person or a female may be interpreted as an indication of the lack of interest and commitment or the place a higher value on seniority rather than performance in choosing a person to fill a position in the preceding sections we have discussed differences that exist across societies on numerous cultural dimensions undeniably there are significant cultural differences that exist even within societies and nations for example even within the us there are marked differences between the west coast culture and the northeast on many cultural us regions like the south and the midwest exhibit unique and different cultural traits however in
follows suggests that such a restructuring of fiscal assistance may help to explain the observed recent shifts in state expenditures note that there are many other factors that have contributed to the changes in state expenditures in these programs these include both demand and supply side factors including rising health care costs changes in health care technology changes in mandated program eligibility rules changes in state administration of programs demographic shifts and changes in morbidity and mortality in the recipient population these are not explicitly modeled in the following discussion although they would very plausibly be included in any satisfactory empirical analysis our analysis is intended partly to instigate interest in but not to answer the empirical question of whether the several fold reduction in the relative cost to states of in kind transfers may be an important determinant of the growth of medicaid spending to our knowledge no empirical analysis of the growth of medicaid spending has taken into account the possibility of cross program substitution induced by the welfare reform the following analysis highlights this possibility in a stark manner by omitting many other potentially important determinants of medicaid spending the model in order to assess how federal assistance to state governments affects their policy choices it we present a very simple and stylized model in which state policy choices reflect the interests of just two types of households those who are the beneficiaries of state cash and health insurance programs and those whose taxes pay for these benefits to simplify the analysis this section abstracts from the potential interstate mobility of either rich or poor households and thus focuses on a single state considered in isolation from all other let number of poor households the number of rich households is normalized at households of each type are endowed with labor and possibly other resources all of which are assumed to be inelastically supplied so that the incomes of each poor and rich household denoted by wp and wr respectively are exogenously determined poor households the income of a poor household may be augmented by a cash transfer of this income is and health care the relative price of which is pm the state government pays for a fraction of the health care costs of the poor where the policy parameter lies between and letting xp and denote the consumption of all purpose good and of health care the budget constraint for a poor household can be written as xp cpmm wp like medicaid alter the prices that beneficiaries face for health care services in the above specification the policy parameter is like a coinsurance rate for the poor it should be viewed as an average across many types of health care of the fraction of costs that beneficiaries must pay the value of for some types of care might be while for others might be the introduction of medicaid or or a change in its coverage affects the prices that recipients pay for specific types of medical services to which recipients respond by altering the bundle of medical services that they consume and their expenditures on medical services as a second to justify the assumption that poor households do not purchase private health insurance we may appeal to the possibility of adverse selection furthermore government health benefits would in any case completely crowd out actuarially fair private health insurance in this model so that in equilibrium poor households would depend only on government provided insurance as in the utility of a poor household depends on its consumption of the all purpose good and on its health status with probability a household let denote good health and let denote the loss in health due to illness assume that health care has no effect on the health status of a healthy household for whom but that each unit of health care raises the health of a sick household by one unit for whom health care is purchased subsequent to the realization of health status so that a healthy household and spends its entire income on consumption of all purpose good its realized level of utility is thus up a household in poor health chooses to maximize up subject to let denote the demand functions for the all purpose good and for health care for a household in poor health and let denote its realized level of utility the expected utility of a poor household is thus given by kv as is clear from a state s cash and health care benefits affect the utility of poor households through their effects on the incomes of the poor and on the net price of health care in the following analysis the preference structures of the poor households are assumed to be either risk averse is strictly concave or in some cases to have preferences that are xp with which implies both risk neutrality and a zero income elasticity of demand for health status the choice of health care consumption by a poor household is discussed further in section after completing the description of the model rich households the rich household is assumed always to enjoy good health and it thus consumes of this household the rich household also pays taxes to the federal government its budget constraint therefore takes the form xr wr ts tf the utility of the rich household depends not only on its consumption of the private good but upon the welfare of the poor and separately upon the health of the poor quite generally the utility function of a rich household takes the form ur where we allow as special cases the possibilities that the first derivatives are zero zero for either the second term the third term or both a possible rationale for the second term in this utility function is that the rich are general altruists toward the poor in the sense that they care non paternalistically about the welfare of the poor as measured by their expected utility one possible rationale for the third
spy is the only character in the strip who always has it her way and her victories over the black and world or win the girl her presence emasculates and delegitimates the male spies around her thus rendering them completely inapt to advance the traditional action hero narrative or romantically emplot the cold war conflict the gray spy has her own version of a dual identity her grayness is a derisive mark of in betweenness that points to a pseudo dualism the super power needed to defeat her opponents by defeating her opponents she performs her public persona and playfully saves the world from danger her female charms and seductive gestures help her prevail over her bird brained male opponents while her provocative costume enhances her power by revealing just enough of her figure to make her lethal she wears a large brimmed knee length dress large cape and sunglasses her costume is in tune with fashion and her actions punish both the black and the white spies for their inability to save the world and their inadequacy within their popular culture genre if the spy vs spy strip is read as a satiric counter narrative to the romantic triumph of good vs evil in which the cold war discourse and its popular culture emplotment are grounded then the gray spy s appearance within the political conflict s polarity by emphasizing that the conflict s protagonists are equally incompetent and irrational regardless of the mode romantic or satiric in which we read the narrative the solution out of the conflict can only reside in the various shades of gray that problematize ideologies and frustrate expectations narrative form a few editorial comments that introduce the spies and their dealings the strip rarely uses any words in relation to the conflict between the main protagonists on the one hand this preference for images to the detriment of words facilitated mad s avoidance of censorship on the other hand the preference can be interpreted as an ironic take on the stereotype that spies and action heroes need few words to make themselves to be taken at face value by letting their actions do the talking the absence of any verbal dialogue between the heroes draws attention to the few words that are present the words outside the panels especially at the beginning of the series draw in the socio political and popular culture context of the the comic strip is thus connected ironic remarks about various prominent names gen mark clark was born in citah del or i ca nt for the life of me remember which magazines henry luce made his fortune on but give me a little time and i ll think of them well known slogans or we knew tarzan before he became a monkey s uncle these side comments call for an association of the mock heroic mad strip with real life situations that must have been very familiar to the readers of the early panels is particularly interesting the words are almost always printed sideways or upside down thus forcing the readers to interact more with the printed page by having to change their own position or that of the text in order to read the words this mock interaction could be interpreted as a parodic deconstruction of the conventions of the spy action hero genres in which the protagonist must consider more than ironically however the protagonist here is the reader not the fictional heroes within the story one could therefore argue that the peripheral story parodies the centrally positioned narrative and calls attention to the fact that the main narrative is only part of the context of the printed page therefore it is itself marginal within the the reader from the spy war and highlights the margin of the text where another type of narrative takes place the positioning of the reader as one of the protagonists of the spy story also introduces a certain reflexivity of the reading act as well as another layer of narration in which an interesting textual and metatextual relation between author and reader is established the textual reading unmasks through the introduction of the side remarks the of the spy vs spy story by pointing to the real life context the meta textual reading however introduces a spy narrative that involves only the reader and the author and encompasses the black gray and white spy feud this meta textual spy story is underscored by the presence of an almost unnoticeable message that discloses the name of the author proh as the words by proh as which always follow usefulness in identifying the name of the artist they may not seem to be worth much attention in the development of a spy story the presence of the words may seem insignificant but their expression in morse code and positioning in the middle of the printed page are not their presence in each strip and the secret code in which they are transmitted help develop a spy story in which the reader and the comic strip takes the form of a mock radio transmission by means of which the author secretly informs the reader of the most recent development in the conflict between two spies thus the spy story is simultaneously debunked and reinforced a peripheral remark the words by proh as helps develop a central narrative and a conspiratorial atmosphere that only the reader and the author are allowed to relish this interpretation is significant because if the white gray and black spies are read as a mock heroic narrative that debunks the cold war then the reader creator relationship by undermining the black white gray spy story undermines yet again and positioned within the printed page through which the story is transmitted the strip s narrative form is a significant part of mad s strategy of fragmenting officially validated cultural expressions by continuously frustrating expectations the strategy works to debunk the linearity of previously established popular culture conventions while also
knowledge is painful for many firms in addition the introduction of new technology sometimes requires adopting new theoretical knowledge and the workforce struggles with the application of theoretical knowledge brought from to this dissemination of knowledge is costly time consuming and causes initial production unit costs to be high and only falling as the stock of applied knowledge increases as is common in discrete time economic growth models it is assumed that the increase of experience is a constant proportion of the present level s that assumption is made for analytical purposes and is a linear approximation of an increasing concave phenomenon the second event stock of experience is the implementation of a process change project due to changes of the process specifications some of the accumulated applied knowledge becomes obsolete for example procedures developed to perform activities prescribed in the process specifications are no longer relevant the replacement of manufacturing equipment with the equipment of a new technological vintage can even make some of the present theoretical knowledge irrelevant analytically the obsolescence of applied or theoretical knowledge can be described as a decrease of the stock of relevant experience as proposed by terwiesch and xu the loss is proportional to the size of the process change can be interpreted as a coefficient that translates the effect of the process change project on the accumulated experience complex production processes with multiple feedback loops are sensitive to process changes the smooth introduction of a process change in such a difficult considering all the interrelations for those types of processes will be high if we assume that a process change is implemented directly after the decision is taken the loss effect is instantaneous if at decision epoch management chooses a process change of size pt a proportional decrease of the experience level is observed production starts after the implementation of the process change and the workforce starts learning again the experience level at the next decision epoch is st st pt to ease the notational burden in the following paragraphs we use s s due to this formulation and the fact that a negative experience level has no meaning the upper bound of must be equal to or less than it will become clear that this apparently artificial formulation does not affect the structure of the solution the loss of experience due to process change implementations is one of the causes of the more general dep gained through training and learning by doing another well known cause is employee turnover one way to include employee turnover or other sources of knowledge depreciation in the model is to adjust as in section in this way the effect of a knowledge depreciation factor is included as in li and rajagopalan and rgensen and kort li and rajagopalan analyze the role of knowledge depreciation in production planning and pricing in depth the process change project on the performance of the production process is measured by the effective capacity of the production system as the implementation is assumed to be instantaneous so also is the jump in effective capacity as such the size of the process change project can be interpreted as the amount by which the effective capacity of the production system increases the effective capacity level at the beginning of the next period is reward function can be interpreted as the profit after one period it is the difference between revenues and costs the total revenue from an effective capacity level is where is the unit revenue function we assume that is twice continuously differentiable to include the economical phenomenon of decreasing marginal returns from investment in the effective capacity we assume that the total revenue function is strictly concave in decrease in production unit costs occurs at a decreasing rate strictly convex and twice continuously differentiable the cost per unit of process change is is a strictly convex twice continuously differentiable increasing function and and limp a similar assumption is made in terwiesch and xu and carrillo and gaimon increasing the level of process change requires shifting a higher level resource from production activities to process change activities this causes resource shortages in production which increases the process change cost to obtain the period profit function kt st pt we first subtract the unit production cost st pt from the unit revenue kt pt and multiply kt pt then we subtract the total cost of process change activities kt st pt kt pt st pt kt pt optimization problem for let pi s and let be a policy with associated reward function is defined as sup subject to st a policy is an optimal policy if the generated payoff from any initial state is the supremum over all possible payoffs from that state in this formulation no salvage value for the stock of experience and effective capacity is included the effect of attaching a salvage value is analysed in dorroh the long term planner invests more in process change activities if the salvage value per unit of effective capacity increases the exclusion of salvage values from the model also excludes transient behavior towards the end of the planning horizon if further the planning horizon is sufficiently long the optimal solution of the finite horizon problem approaches the optimal solution of the infinite horizon problem that allows us to use an infinite are expressed in economic terms it makes sense to use a discounted optimality criterion as such we use a discounted reward optimality criterion over an infinite horizon that implies the optimality of stationary policies and gives us the opportunity to distinguish the fundamental properties of the model from transient behavior we can determine long term process change effort furthermore we can inquire into the steady state behavior of the stock of effective capacity and experience the criterion is also used in the well cited process improvement models of fine and porteus and marcellus and dada the recursive formulation of the problem for an
research ethics hayden advances his argument and not as anthropologists would like it to be as old and obvious this prescription seems to many anthropologists hayden s empirical evidence from the writings of anthropologists of the former yugoslavia and from the actions of international peace making forces in bosnia herzegovina shows that the encounter with field realities renders it difficult to follow but hayden s ethical position could be seen as insufficient would find it the reflection of naive positivism arguing that an objective description is an illusion and that simply denouncing anthropologists moral disapprobation as the cause of distorted analysis will not bring about objectivity after all an anthropologist may be ethically neutral but scientifically blind thus while the debate opened by this article is extremely valuable are strong it does not really tell us how to attain the desired ethical position of an anthropologist in order to go farther we would need a less rhetorical and less rigid distinction between facts and values hayden quotes geertz values are indeed values and facts alas indeed facts in order to draw the line between anthropologists moral values and field facts preserve professional credibility but anthropologists values are also context dependent they adapt to the indigenous facts observed and values stated and are influenced by them thus they cannot be simply analysed once and for all identified as potentially biasing factors and set aside anthropologists moral positions are continuously being generated by the encounter with others values and ethic indeed to force them out of those positions stef jansen department of social anthropology university of manchester room roscoe building oxford rd manchester uk viii one great quality of hayden s impressive oeuvre on post yugoslav affairs is his own dedication to the task he sets to disregard local realities in bosnia herzegovina ethnographers working there have of course first hand experience of national segregation and discontent with coexistence but hayden raises a legitimate question do our moral political frameworks lead us to play down nationalism i welcome his invitation to engage in this frank discussion which interestingly runs along similar lines to respectively i shall ask three sets of counter questions epistemologically hayden s subjects appear under the unqualified term peoples clearly essentialized categories like serbs and swedes are continuously reproduced in everyday interaction but as in the anthropology of face taking their social life seriously does not mean accepting their primordial epistemological validity as basic analytical units everyday ways in which such national essentializations are generated and function what my article actually says we are forced to engage with is the retrospective privileging of nationality statistics as independent variables over all other social differentiation inequality far from reflecting the hegemony of the neocolonial company hayden confines me to it questions both nationalist and melting pot ontological primacy to peoples or to bosnia will hayden not recognize the possibility of such antiessentialist epistemological grounds empirically hayden s counter hegemonic case ultimately rests on such hegemonic decontextualized deployments of national numbers resolutely nonethnographic he summons survey electoral data as his primary evidence social contradictions that are omitted from the unidimensional national focus it would investigate not assume the possible causality of resurfacing world war ii memories it would question seemingly straightforward statements that local culture produced the violence and ask when and where even those who did bear arms did or did not fight primarily to prevent coexistence in bosnia herzegovina national self homogenization clientelism transition and self perpetuating military violence including the crucial role of not so local serbian montenegrin and croatian governments hayden s poll based alternative is weakened by what it omits elegant references to anthropology s great and good to bridges and to novels cannot disguise the paucity of ethnographic text and informal constraints does a lack of ethnographic fieldwork experience in bosnia herzegovina exempt hayden from the latter more important are poll figures superior evidence should not the degree to which a ticked poll option constitutes a performative utterance be ethnographically investigated in context particularly if the poll uses categories implicated in the conflict it claim that bosnia herzegovina is an undesired configuration even if we follow his unidimensional national focus which reflects the dayton protectorate s own tendency to ignore all other possible political debate what are the implications of his argument does his insistence on bosnia herzegovina s illegitimacy imply that given the moral currency he grants peoples get on with it democratically on their own territories many of the world s states are ultimately such national democratic raifications of ethnic cleansing but whose democracy would be served by division of bosnia herzegovina if an imposed bosnia herzegovina causes misery by forcing victims into unwanted political units even by hayden s own figures the alternative would majorities produced through the murder or expulsion of almost all national others with decisive involvement of the serbian montenegrin and croatian governments in fact even if we disregard the constitutive links between majorities territories and the violence that produced them hayden s quantitative claim displays remarkable slippage as to how many bosnians would quotes indicate that only a minority of any national group does so this would contradict even his democratic argument which surely requires an anti bosnia herzegovina majority perhaps of course he believes with me that such uncontextualized poll data are not good enough anthropological material in themselves would that not undermine his entire line of a different and stronger form had he uncovered discomforting knowledge through the imperfect realism of ethnography amongst people in bosnia rather than through the perfect surrealism of opinion polls and their attribution to essentialized peoples of bosnia la szlo ku lrti european association of social anthropologists university and national identity topics in vogue these day by discussing the old bridge of mostar as a symbol of nationhood religion and war hayden provides an argument against what anthropologists believe that they know best about how natives think he relies on jansen and calls for an engagement against to know how anthropologists think about
practice in birmingham alabama and matched to controls without a history of naion self reported information regarding past and current use of viagra and or cialis was a telephone questionnaire from interviewers who were not blind to case status results overall males with naion were no more likely to report a history of viagra or cialis use compared to similarly aged controls onfidence interval to and or significant association was observed conclusions for men with a history of myocardial infarction or hypertension the use of viagra or cialis may increase the risk of naion physicians prescribing these medications to patients with these conditions should warn them about the potential risk of naion adults in the united an estimated people develop naion of which one in four patients will go on to experience naion in the fellow naion manifests as acute painless monocular vision loss optic disc oedema and a relative afferent pupillary defect presenting visual acuity is worse than in about patients and may subsequently improve there have been several case reports suggesting a link between certain phosphodiesterase inhibitor erectile dysfunction medications and cialis and visual side effects associated with these medications are well documented but these effects which have been traced to the fact that phosphodiesterase in the rod and cone cells appear to be transient in however the mechanism by which these medications might damage the optic nerve is not as well understood it has been theorized that sildenafil which works through the nitric oxidecyclic gmp pathway may alter the perfusion of the optic nerve head by modifying nitric oxide given their unfortunately to date there is no empirical evidence for or against an association between sildenafil or tadalafil and naion the only published studies have been case reports and which by their nature do not provide a comparison group therefore we conducted a retrospective matched case control study to investigate the association between naion and the self reported use of these from the university of alabama at birmingham department of ophthalmology clinic located at the callahan eye foundation hospital in birmingham alabama usa this facility constitutes the most popular tertiary referral center for people suspected of having a neuro ophthalmological disorder in the state of alabama code during the time period january to february medical record abstraction was then performed in order to confirm the diagnosis of naion our inclusion criteria for the diagnosis of naion are as follows history of sudden painless monocular loss of vision optic disc oedema noted on ophthalmological examination the level of the optic nerve head lack of findings on examination suggesting another disorder that could be causing the symptoms exclusion of arteritic anterior ischaemic optic neuropathy by clinical history examination and erythrocyte sedimentation rate subjects were not eligible if a previous diagnosis of optic neuropathy of any aetiology was listed in a previous visit s naion during the same time period used to select cases cases and controls were matched based on age and sex eighty eight individuals with a diagnosis of naion were initially identified as eligible and contacted for participation in the study of whom were ultimately enrolled the remaining individuals refused to was randomly identified and contacted for participation in the study if the first randomly selected control did not choose to participate in the study another control was randomly selected in total people as potential controls were contacted of whom refused to participate given this study s interest in ed medications females were excluded from the analysis thereby leaving cases and controls the study design and procedures data collection a telephone survey was designed to collect information regarding sociodemographic health behavior and medical characteristics a research interviewer trained in the administration of medical telephone questionnaires administered the survey the interviewer was not masked to the status of the subject as a case or control sociodemographic information health behaviors were assessed with questions concerning cigarette smoking and alcohol consumption medical characteristics were obtained with questions regarding whether the respondent had ever been diagnosed with various chronic conditions and if they were currently taking medications for these conditions male and cilais specifically subjects were queried as to the date they first used each of the medications and their frequency of use since that time for the purposes of this study only the medication use that occurred before the naion diagnosis date was considered for controls the diagnosis date of the matched control was used to similarly truncate medication use paired tests and mcnemar s test for continuous and categorical variables respectively conditional logistic regression was used to calculated odds ratios and intervals for the association between naion and the use of ed medications values of were considered statistically significant majority of both groups being white the prevalence of smoking and alcohol consumption also did not differ between cases and controls cases were more likely to report a history of hypertension coronary artery disease myocardial infarction and high cholesterol although the only significant difference was observed for myocardial infarction diabetes was more common among controls but and or cialis while the ors suggested an approximately risk of naion associated with the use of either or both of these medications none of the associations were statistically significant given the similarly of the estimates for viagra and cialis a single variable representing use of either medication was created and used in subsequent analyses myocardial infarction and hypertension compared to individuals reporting neither viagra and or cialis use nor a history of myocardial infarction those who reported both using viagra and or cialis and a history of myocardial infarction were times more likely to have naion whereas no association was observed among those who also reported those with a history of myocardial infarction who did not report use of viagra and or cialis demonstrated an increased risk of naion but the association was not statistically significant with respect to hypertension for those who also reported viagra and or cialis use a nearly sevenfold and respectively discussion overall we observed positive yet not statistically
potential political and psychological advantages overqra however it is not clear that concerndriven successfully protect human health or achieve other desired consequences to the contrary there are strong empirical and theoretical reasons to expect that judgment based risk management in response to concerns conducted without formal qra may lead to worse decisions and outcomes than would more quantitative models and methods therefore to show that their recommended alternatives truly outperform qra we do not suggest that concerns are unimportant or that they should not be addressed in risk management decision making rather concern over a current situation while perhaps motivating a formal qra should not substitute for it for purposes of assessing the probable consequences of alternative specific action that we suggest can be improved upon by qra by replacing let s take action with let s assess the probable consequences of alternative possible actions or interventions and then implement the one that has the most desirable probable consequences even when these two approaches lead to the same recommended information and clearly articulated value judgments to causally link current actions to desired consequences approaches that do not do this run the risk of driving actions that will not produce intended results sydney is consistently less competitive than that for the bachelor of economics and bachelor of commerce programs given that students in the bagrec program undertake units in common with students in the bec and bcomm programs it is of interest to examine the importance of school performance and first year university in the determination of success at university this paper takes information for nine cohorts of bagrec students and tests their performance in first year core subjects against the university entrance ranking school english and mathematics marks gender and type of school the paper then uses the same information to predict which student characteristics at entry level are likely to lead to students completing the degree program the implications of the analysis are explored introduction a year degree program at the university of sydney from to the paper uses data for students of the bagrec degree program in the faculty of agriculture food and natural resources at the university of sydney to identify factors which at the time of entry to the program contribute to their success in first year subjects and in completing the degree program entry to the bagrec is less competitive than for the bachelor of economics counterparts offered by the faculty of economics and business therefore the students in the feb degrees are generally expected to be academically stronger on the basis of secondary school results approximately per cent of the units taken by students in the bagrec degree program are taught in the feb the bagrec students must compete on an equal footing with students in the feb section will provide the background to the study sections and will estimation procedures and data and the empirical results will be presented in section the implications of the analysis will be explored in section followed by concluding comments in section background one of the central areas of interest in the economics education literature is test and more particularly the mathematics component of the sat are significant predictors of success in tertiary economics however rothstein argues that because of the acknowledged correlation between sat scores and student socioeconomic status the significance of sat scores in predicting success tends to be overstated there are a number of other factors that are highlighted in the literature as to predict success in first year economics there is consensus that a mathematics background that includes some calculus is significant ballard and johnson also suggest that a tested ability to carry out some very simple mathematical operations is important in the usa it has been found that male students perform better in economics than do female students some of the conventional wisdom in this area of the published work seems to be outdated but gender does appear to be an issue in australia it appears that female students perform better than male students across most areas of university education however acer has found that nationally on average catholic school students achieve an enter that is six marks higher than that for government school students independent school students are a further six points higher most previous studies deal with a period of only or years owen ballard and johnson dancer and fiebig the current paper will examine trends over a longer period tertiary entrance in new south wales is determined on the basis of the universities admission index which depends on the marks achieved by students in the new south wales higher school certificate this is an external examination set by the nsw board of studies the hsc is taken it is not an aptitude test and subjects studied during the final year of school are examined most subjects consist of two units but students can also elect to take more advanced units such as unit and unit mathematics students complete between and units the results from the best units are selected and scaled according to their perceived level of difficulty by the university admissions center to calculate the uai students program on the basis of supply and demand and the uai is the rationing device demand for bec and bcomm degree programs is consistently higher than for the bagrec degree program and the published uai cut off for the latter has been since on average per cent lower than that for the bcomm and per cent lower than that for the bec as can be cut off marks for the two feb degree programs have been generally rising over that period the cut off mark for the bagrec degree program has been declining the admissions process also provides for limited numbers of special entry admissions these admissions have been increasing and figure shows that whereas the mean uai for the students in the sample declined only slightly from to the minimum uai declined more dramatically for example students were admitted to the
outlining the dialectical relationship present in hegel s understanding of god s relationship to humanity i shall therefore especially scrutinize hegel s his the concept of religion hegel looks to the experiences of living beings on earth and immediately separates human experience from animal experience because humans think it is a universal and ancient preconception that human beings are thinking beings and that by thinking and thinking alone they distinguish themselves from the beasts animals have feelings but only feelings human beings think and they alone have religion from this it is to be its inmost seat in thought no doubt it can subsequently be felt as we shall show later in our discussion we also express this process thus when human beings think of god they elevate themselves above the sensible the external the hegel s treatment of the differentiation between animal feeling and human with the basic outline of hegel s argument for the time being however one observes that hegel understands human beings as thinking beings who are the only world beings capable of religion and religion according to hegel is a process through which human beings think of god thinking of god claims hegel is not something of which animals are capable external to human subjectivity kif we take the human being as our point of departure in that we presupposed the subject and begin from ourselves because our immediate initial knowledge is knowledge of ourselves and if we ask how we arrive at this distinction or at the knowledge of an object and to be more exact in this case at the knowledge of god then in general the answer has already been given it is precisely because we are thinking in and for itself and thought makes the universal in and for itself into its hegel s assertion that there exists a moment in which human subjectivity discovers a universal object also appears to act as the moment that his subjectivity differs from the substance of pure spinozism and the moment at which hegel s argument professes the concept of god as a concept which may be concretized as an object for human consciousness according to essential particularities that are parts of absolute substance yet they have the power within their very understanding of god as an object which exists apart from their own subjectivities to concretize god from the abstract to the actual what enters into consciousness in the beginning is the simple the abstract in this initial simplicity we have god as substance but we do the foundation kwe express the beginning thus as a content within us an object for diagrams and here represent visualizations of the initial distinction made between hegel s concept of god and the concept of god as represented in diagram first stage of hegel s dialectical relationship between substance and spirit in this first stage of hegel s dialectical relationship between substance and subjectivity hegel s idea of form of the content at the beginning unfolds and the existence of human subjectivity as apart from substance is acknowledged thus we arrive at the standpoint for which god in this general indeterminateness is object of consciousness here for the first time we have two elements god and the consciousness for which god as visualized in diagram spinoza s concept contains subjectivity within substance never allowing for clear separation of the two later in the argument mapped out here in a moment hegel s ontology offers a concept of human subjectivity as both separated from and circumscribed by absolute substance a concept which distances itself even further from spinoza s to mediate between human spirit and concept of god god as absolute substanceall phenomena in the world including human spirit and human consciousness having distinguished his argument for god from spinoza s hegel next spends much of the first part of his lectures in an examination of differing types of knowledge of god these types include immediate knowledge feeling representation and finally thought hegel does not wish to dismiss knowledge as irrelevant in fact he discusses the importance that each form plays in the process of acquiring an overall knowledge of god ultimately however hegel wishes to focus his attention on thought s ability to achieve an absolute knowledge of god what now holds our closer interest is thinking the stage at which what is him but we also have this certainty in thought and here we call it conviction conviction involves grounds and these grounds essentially exist only in thought while acknowledging the importance of these other forms of knowledge the study here directs most of its attention on hegel s concept of human thought as expressed earlier hegel s understanding of human consciousness or of thought is an understanding of a special tool that acts to mediate substance or perhaps more clearly stated to mediate world from ideas this quality of mediation does not characterize these other three forms of knowledge of looking again to the two diagrams set forth above human subjectivity mediated by human consciousness clearly seems other than absolute substance yet how does mere separation of world and idea as such allow for absolute knowledge of god rene descartes had famously arrived at the and object well before hegel s time additionally immanuel kant asserted that human beings could never know any one object including the object of god as it exists in itself hegel s creation of a dialectical system effectively reevaluates this relationship between subject and object his system attempts at overriding these earlier philosophies which either negated human comprehension of god or understood such comprehension as a limited one which could never fully god exists in himself this study therefore now turns to an understanding of how a human subjectivity that has god as its object may according to hegel know that object in part i of hegel s lectures of religious knowledge as elevation to god hegel sets forth the true dialectical method through which substance existing as an object for subjectivity reunites with that subjectivity the hegelian unification of substance and subjectivity however differs from that found in the pantheism of spinoza for
denial in the art room when art teachers ask students at key stage to explore their identities their initial assumption that this celebratory approach will build both self esteem and tolerant and positive relations the vehicle for this strategy is frequently self portraiture a genre through which students represent aspects of their appearance and in so doing supposedly reveal an understanding of both selfhood but also how she or he would symbolic attributes complement the appearance of the depicted subject but in art and design the meaning of this iconography is often overlooked in favor of the technical and formal procedures that constitute style in order to relate their appearance to the stylistic features of canonic exemplars and to a sense of themselves as gendered and a ubiquitous discourse through which they are constructed as desiring consumers students tend to assemble around or within the central figure those essentialist signifiers provided by the mass media and or historical art these processes of appropriation and accumulation invite students to redeploy what may amount formal procedures divorced from any conscious meaning making encourages students to avoid critical and investigative work so that primary markers of identity such as religion and culture nationality and race may become conflated as may gender role and sexual identity at the same time any notion of sexuality as an aspect of self can be accommodated because their normative status and ubiquity hides their sexual basis this is not surprising given that the developmental period known as adolescence especially in educational research is predominantly delicate and possibly risky whenever there is risk caution and avoidance are the preferred strategies both from teachers and students themselves however in the general certificate of secondary education art and design specification personal response enshrined in the assessment objective is the guiding principle often the theme which acts dali freud khalo klimt keefe picasso are particular favorites and it is therefore not surprising that sexuality figures in these responses albeit hidden within the formal signifiers of a specific style in this way the sexual significance of the image is partially masked distanced from the students desires and subjectivity and they therefore come to learn how to represent surprising for in looking at the self there are real dangers after all the majority of students following gcse are under the age of consent the visibility of their own sexual practices is therefore strongly self regulated depending on context it follows that any sexual identity falling outside heterosexual relations is difficult to accommodate the law homosexual identities are a case in point despite students understandable repression or disavowal of their sexuality in the formal school context they are also aware of prevailing counter discourses that unlike the production of the false desires aimed at by advertising aim to expose the realities of contemporary living these discourses vampire slayer and two the culture of confession that permeates live tv it is against these popular forms that students measure and discuss their emerging sexualities for as allen finds students do discuss sexuality among themselves these discourses provide a parallel more illicit model ideal of normative relations the monogamous heterosexual union of reproductive marriage is reinforced through its absence students however rarely mimic the confessional idiom of tv in adult facilitated forums avoiding conscious representations of sexuality unless inclusive programme teachers therefore have to grapple with representations in which the image is deployed to maintain stereotypical relations and thereby reveal the injustices that the images mask however despite the move towards critical studies in recent years as i have argued student production often demonstrates an acritical acceptance can be interpreted and evaluated but in many art departments a culture of working against the clock to meet attainment targets militates against interpretative practices and thereby ensures that one of the strengths of art education the process of self exploration within a social interactive space is overlooked on clear outcomes replicated through exemplification and prototypes later in a student s school career it is difficult to break the cycle of dependency that this process encourages but both in general and specifically in relation to the focus of this article this orthodoxy could be challenged by engaging students in discussion and investigative practices in this instance with the signs such signs can refer to a whole range of biological social and cultural categories some seemingly self evident some problematic indeed such categories can accumulate in relation to any one person depending upon who is doing the naming and when and in what context it is taking place consider for example identities based on age class disability ethnicity gender and within any one person there may be contradictions and tensions as hall argues identities are never unified and in late modern times increasingly fragmented and fractured never singular but multiply constructed across different often intersecting and antagonistic discourses practices and is rarely questioned in secondary art and design if it were identity would be explored not as an essence or a social cultural designation but as a resource affording the owner the opportunity to identify with or to adopt and perform identities when and where they think fit but the processes implied here those of adoption appropriation multiplication humanist ideals respectively of the soul and the true self because of this enduring legacy and despite the call for self affirmation examination or unfolding in schools some identities seem not to fit well or comfortably gay and lesbian identities in school it needs no name a muteness that affords its adherents the right to primary identities that are not sexual once assigned to a student or a teacher any sexual orientation other than heterosexuality is somehow imagined at the very core of that person although define a person s very subjectivity must overwhelm and subsume all other characteristics in other words a gay or lesbian student before being a young man or woman a christian or a jew is quintessentially queer but as elizabeth grosz points out in the case of homosexuals i believe it
processes there was sufficient connectivity through the fracture system to permit a number of convection cells to develop in the confined aquifer assuming that the modern geothermal gradient pertained at that time there would have been a temperature differential of about on the basis of these arguments the thermal water flow system is likely to be some ma old although the locations of the individual modern springs are more recent as they result from the downcutting of the river valleys during the late pleistocene about ka ago it is unlikely that extensive karst like dissolution and the waters circulating in closed cells would have become rapidly saturated with respect to carbonate minerals thus preventing further dissolution the meteoric recharge to the new system however would have provided fresh solvent resulting in some enlargement although once again limited by the temperature it is concluded therefore that the majority the buxton spring flows out of enlarged fractures at the rockhead and it is thought that once the upward flow reaches the karstic part of the aquifer the thermal water is contained within such enlarged conduits measurements at buxton show that the pressure head of the thermal water is greater than that of the non thermal groundwater and is attributed to that carry the thermal flow thereby minimizing the possibility of mixing the thermal water flow system can be thought of as a normal gravity system that receives a significant boost to the upward limb derived from the density differences between the warmed water and the non thermal groundwater circulation through which it ascends the flow of the upward flow feeding into a small number of far larger conduits that carry the water to the surface through the upper or so of the karst enhanced limestone aquifer evidence for downward migrating groundwater in the rocks of the derbyshire dome is provided by temperature measurements made by richardson oxburgh in the eyam borehole shown in figure the borehole was a depth of that those researchers attributed to downward groundwater flow in the strata penetrated by the lower section of the borehole the conceptual model presented here is shown diagrammatically in figure as a sketch section from the cheshire plain in the west through the white peak area to the nottinghamshire coal field in the east downing a deep eastward flow of thermal water through the carboniferous limestone aquifer feeding an upward seepage though mesozoic sediments extending as far as the east coast part of the deep groundwater does not travel eastward and flow rises to the surface to form the thermal springs on the eastern margin of the derbyshire dome the proposed conceptual model assumes that the thermal water circulation as the lask edge fault system that is associated with the goyt syncline and the major red rock fault that forms the eastern boundary to the triassic cheshire basin discussion and conclusions a year record of continuous flow records of the buxton spring has shown that a discharge of thermal water demonstrated to be some years old and with variations in mixing neither the temperature nor the chemistry would remain constant these conclusions are echoed in observations of transferred loading pressure effects in different types of confined aquifers by workers in canada and new zealand however the carboniferous limestone aquifer of the white peak transfers these pressures through together with the local hydrogeology has provided a conjectured explanation for the genesis of the present day thermal springs the limestone aquifer is in a regional dome structure that has been disrupted by faulting and includes a series of tilt blocks that provided a number of separate deep compartments such anisotropy combined with a large temperature difference through the limestone would have been on the outer part of the dome structure provides an explanation for the modern distribution of the thermal springs each thermal cell produces water with a chemistry that differs from both the other springs and the non thermal groundwater within the limestone aquifer this proposed conceptual model implies that without the establishment of the would not have occurred a comparison of the thermal water temperature with the geothermal gradient shows that the depth of thermal circulation is considerable and could extend to km or more the fact that the thermal water is easily distinguished from the non thermal groundwaters in terms of the temperature and chemistry indicates that the two is through the primary fracture network and the thermal water flows in karst enhanced conduits only for the last part of its rise to the surface where the additional head provided by the density differences prevents the nonthermal groundwater from entering the conduit the time taken for the thermal water to return to the surface is indicated by the year age of the buxton cells could be as old as ma the first thermal springs could have first flowed out of the newly exposed limestone about ma ago although subsequent glacial erosion is expected to have modified their locations however it can be concluded that the springs in their present general form and locations have existed since the end of glacial activity in the area and the subsequent about ka acknowledgements i am grateful to high peak borough council for permission to publish this paper and to coffey strategic director for his encouragement throughout the project i am also indebted to the buxton mineral water company and finlayson of zenith international for allowing me to use data on the buxton spring of the manuscript thanks are also due to brassington for help with several figures the opinions expressed in this paper are my own and not necessarily those of the organizations listed above radial deformations induced by groundwater ground support interaction and ground behavior thus it is important to determine the effects of different parameters on ground deformations to accurately and effectively evaluate what contributes to ground and support behavior observed during excavation this paper investigates one such relation the effects of seepage on radial deformations a number of numerical analyses have been
across intervals and years the first phase of the analysis assesses the predictive direction and magnitude of change of future realized volatility over a more distant term structure for specific months nearby term structure for the nearby interval the implied forward volatilities are extracted from options traded on the day two months before the beginning of each interval ie two months before the expiration based on a total of options of which calls and puts on average there are thirty one options per interval and the existence of five two and three month intervals in each of the fifteen years results in seventy five total forward volatility intervals the predictive performance is examined using volatilities contain information about subsequent realized volatility an efficient or unbiased forecast is often characterized by and is tested using a standard differences in accuracy of the volatility forecasts are also evaluated using mean absolute percentage errors and mean test the procedure specifies a cost of error function of the forecast errors and tests pairwise the null hypothesis of equality of forecast performance the test statistic is compared to critical values from the distribution with degrees of freedom and is computed for one step ahead forecasts by when testing for differences in the mapes of two forecasts and are the absolute percent forecast error of method and method and dt is the difference between the respective absolute percent forecast errors at time harvey leybourne and newbold show that the size of the forecasts are often correlated and occasional large errors can occur the mdm test also does not rely on an assumption of forecast unbiasedness and is applicable to a variety of cost of error functions harvey leybourne and newbold assert that the mdm test is the best available method for determining differences in competing develop an extended forecast of the pattern of future volatility in effect the boundaries of the intervals are defined by the first trade day in each interval after the expiration of the previous option figure displays the implied forward volatilities and the corresponding realized volatilities for the five option maturities where is a binary variable that is if the the next and otherwise and is the total number of directional predictions the sign and magnitude of the coefficient are estimated using a logit framework a significant positive implies predictive ability of the directional change of future realized volatility realized and forecasted volatilities from one interval to the next then the regression equation assesses whether large increases in the forecasted volatilities correspond to large increases in realized volatilities the coefficients and tests can be interpreted similar to those from equation but reflect for the five intervals show the anticipated corn futures market april june and june august intervals that cover the heart of the growing cycle and where the weather effect is most pronounced display the largest volatilities the average realized volatility during the growing period exceeds the average volatility vs during the growing cycle weather tends to cause more uncertainty during the june august interval than during the april june interval because it contains more critical periods for crop development the differences in volatility between growing and nongrowing intervals and within the growing cycle confirm volatilities are also reflected in the nearby implied forward volatilities market participants appear to incorporate the larger impact of weather on corn futures prices during the growing period than during the nongrowing period the standard deviation of the implied forward volatilities for the growing period is also august interval are also larger than those for the april june interval providing further evidence that the nonuniform patterns of uncertainty within the critical growing periods are incorporated in option prices table presents the results from equation and the mdm the implied the joint hypothesis and is rejected by an test for the alternative forecasts indicating bias but not for the implied forward volatility forecast errors for the alternative forecasts as measured by the mape and mspe are also larger than for the implied forward volatility significant differences are found for both the error functions between three year moving averages are not significant suggesting that larger differences in forecast ability emerge when less past information is incorporated in the historical forecasts for january and august the forecast ability of implied forward volatilities for more distant horizons of the term structure is analyzed the term structure extracted on the first the accuracies of the implied forward predictions of the directions of realized volatility changes between these intervals are and for august the implied term structure extracted on the first trading day extends over the harvest interval the first and second storage interval and the first growing interval the implied forward fore between these intervals table provides the predictive performance of the directional change of the three forecasts using equation for august the estimates of are significantly different than zero except for the naa la ve forecast all forecasts perform better in january than in august because of the more consistent volatility pattern august where the volatility pattern extending over the nongrowing period is less regular the forecasts are less accurate overall the three forecasts predict the direction of change rather well but based on the percentage accuracy of the predictions and values the implied forward volatilities and the three year moving average term is insignificant but is significantly positive implying that the forecasts contain meaningful information on the magnitude of change in future volatility however the joint hypothesis and is rejected by the naa la ve forecast in january and the implied forward volatility in august for january the findings displayed in table are fairly consistent with this expectation except for the naa forecast in august the three year moving average performs most effectively with significant differences between the implied forward volatility and the three year moving average the decline in the predictive and the reduced number of options traded as implied by the smaller number of observations for this month fewer transactions reflect lower informational content in the market
than that being considered by the bel model which included only one thick tear film layer behind the contact lens the tear films have zero oxygen consumption but they do add an additional oxygen diffusion resistance in front of the cornea surface because the tear layer thickness is thin compared with the rest of our model lens and the tear film layers is effectively independent of their relative order thus the flux entering the anterior epithelial surface will be independent of the relative ordering of these nonconsuming layers if the relative tear film thickness becomes significant compared with other elements of the model geometry this assumption may no longer be valid for example if a gap exists between the contact lens and eye tear film fluxes would also be different that other elements of the model geometry this assumption may no longer be valid for example if a gap exists between the contact lens and eye tear film fluxes would also be different that particular case would represent an opportunity for model refinement the type of equivalent resistance model which we use herein is appropriate for layers where there is no consumption within the thus this layer model is sufficient to model the system although running the simulation with layers would have been possible the computation time would have been greatly increased with little or no benefit comsol has an additional module that would enable femlab to treat the thin tear layer as a shell this would allow the finite element model to incorporate separate tear films in their proper position without an inordinate increase in computational time this capability can be implemented in the future if the study of the tear film becomes critical the lateral from the limbal blood vessels near the cornea sclera junction was a new feature that had to be addressed in our model to effectively model this area we set the at the cornea sclera boundary to the constant level of mm oxygen partial pressure found in the bloodstream in reality the tissue will be mm hg because diffusion of oxygen from the bloodstream is impeded by the oxygen resistance of the vessel wall and surrounding tissue because the cornea sclera has been set to a specific tension this fea is valid only in the corneal tissue and not within the scleral tissue the at the external surface of the sclera not covered by the contact lens is modeled using mm for the open eye condition and mm hg for the closed eye the regions of the sclera covered with the eyelid during open eye wear are not considered at this time a default model mesh needs elements resulting in degrees of freedom meshing routine in femlab is used with some modifications the maximum element size is reduced in the epithelium and contact lens increasing the overall number of elements to and degrees of freedom to the mesh size is important to the solution accuracy and must be balanced against the solution time as the mesh size increases the solution time will greatly however as the element size approaches zero the solution will analytical solution for the system this particular model took several hours to solve unique contact lens simulations while running on a dual processor pc running under windows xp the solution time could have been reduced by using shell elements for the tear film layer the open central and peripheral eye flux results and the closed central and peripheral eye flux results of this axisymetric fem are depicted for lenses a range of oxygen permeability even at dk barrers a significant limbal region of corneal hypoxia can be observed for this lens when one is considering a contact lens with a dk of the oxygen partial pressure results throughout the axisymmetric corneal tissue geometry are shown with contours to indicate isobars in figures and indeed a region of hypoxia is still predicted even for a hypertransmissible lens of dk when the bel used as we discussed earlier previously published models including the bel model considered only the central region of the cornea thus for the considered geometry the central cornea is the best case scenario position for contact lenses the limbal hypoxia observed herein could have been predicted if the earlier models had been applied to this region where the total oxygen demand is greatest and the contact lens transmissibility is near minimum unexpected result lens geometry the plots of the flux along rays through the fea model of the cornea show that the flux at the back surface of the contact lens is slightly greater than that at the front of the contact lens at first glance one might conclude that oxygen is diffusing transversely within the contract lens however the apparent increase in flux is not caused by an increase in the amount of oxygen flowing through the lens but is actually another consequence of the of the system because the lens and the cornea are sections of a generally spherical shell the front surface area of a segment cut through the lens will be larger than the corresponding surface area on the back of the segment therefore the flux through the back will be larger because the same amount of oxygen is being funneled through a smaller area this will cause the local on the back of the lens to be higher than predicted by the models the result of focusing of oxygen is interesting from a fea and design perspective yet it is not significant enough to increase the oxygen content of the deficient areas of the cornea results we showed that a finite element analysis of corneal oxygen flux can achieve results that are equivalent to those of previously published models particularly those findings of the bel when the same inputs and assumptions are used this does not imply that we have validated that finding rather a point of reference for evaluating the implications of previous work and a starting point for the development of an improved
because larger industry actors with greater capacity to innovate are rewarded in such a system one option for responding to smaller firms more limited capacity is entail either some sort of midpoint between two approaches or a system that gives industry actors a choice between principles based and rules based alternatives the latter would effectively locate principles based regulation adjacent to rather than in lieu of existing regulatory rules such that firms that lack the desire or the capacity to innovate in compliance systems could rely on detailed preexisting rules this is the approach adopted by comply or explain regime for corporate and the fsa s approach the us commodity futures trading commission is also moving along what it calls a hybrid rules and principles spectrum which includes the statutory core principles in the commodity futures modernization under the fsa model which is probably the most fully developed firms have the option of either abiding by the safe harbor of established rules or applying innovative the fsa s principles based regulatory guidelines if a firm chooses to use the principles rather than the rules it must convince the fsa that its alternative mechanism is likely to achieve the same regulatory goal if the firm succeeds the fsa uses its exemptive authority to deactivate the operative rule while giving effect to the operative principle and the firm s proposed innovation in theory it has the advantage of sharing with the regulators on the ground information about potential emerging best practices in real time regulators can then disseminate information about those best practices to other industry actors including smaller or less well resourced ones who can benefit from the innovations without having to reinvent the wheel this approach also to a compliance rule as it learns about what a hybrid rules and principles system may also allay industry fears about regulatory discretion and overreaching under a purely principles based as the fsa example demonstrates the shift to a principles based system in practice is more evolutionary than it is revolutionary preexisting rules continue to provide a baseline and change happens at the margins it may be subject to being gamed specifically noncompliant industry actors could choose to rely strategically on existing detailed rules whenever they had a colorable basis for arguing that they were in compliance with the rule regardless of whether their actions were in keeping with the underlying principle the firm could selectively look for loopholes in the rules falling back on principles only if and when the regulator decided to the innovations for which principles based regulatory approval would be sought in advance would be limited to those that were obviously impermissible under existing firms would avoid the delay cost and risk of seeking regulatory approval for innovations that could somehow be shoehorned into existing rules this in turn would cut the regulator out of the learning loop in effect the rules versus principles choice would devolve to rules wherever based regulation would be reduced to the service of last recourses and ex post justifications the response is as follows first while a principles based regulatory approach may use existing detailed rules as prophylactic rules it must be clear that industry actors are expected to abide by regulatory principles as well rules based and principles based regulatory expectations must operate serially not in parallel an enforcement response should be swift and be using a loophole in detailed rules to avoid abiding by a regulatory principle and enforcement sanction must be available for violation of principles second separate from the enforcement context the regulator should be conscious of the need to maintain an ongoing dialogue with firms about their practices where a firm has shown an historical propensity to operate close to the line or to abide by the letter rather than the spirit of the law that firm should be supervised more closely firms that have demonstrated bona fides may be granted more under this approach the regulator may seek to enhance struggling firms capacity by providing examples of others good practices and refrain from pursuing formal enforcement where firms are engaged in a bona fide effort to abide by regulatory again a renewed relationship between regulator and industry based on trust and and maintenance of an ongoing regular and collaborative dialogue between the regulator s compliance function and industry actors could mitigate any relative delay cost and risk associated with seeking principles based regulatory approval a partial proposal tripartism the bcsc already recognizes a particular role for third party industry maintaining an explicit light touch regulatory more ambitiously ian ayres and john braithwaite have advocated for what they call tripartism as a form of responsive regulation ayres and braithwaite describe regulatory tripartism as a regulatory policy that fosters the participation of third party public interest groups in three ways by giving third parties access to all the information the regulator possesses by giving them a seat at the negotiating table and the same standing to sue or prosecute that the regulator has ayres and braithwaite suggest that a strategy of meaningful tripartite dialogue can facilitate attainment of regulatory goals prevent corruption and prevent the kind of agency capture that is harmful to the public good and regulatory goals at the same time it encourages helpful capture in which the regulator saves enforcement resources by overlooking minor or its resources on meeting the underlying goals of the regulation including even making extralegal beyond compliance efforts rather than meeting the literal rules of the the notion of tripartism also has been advanced in the work of neil gunningham and darren sinclair with respect to smes in the environmental regulatory gunningham and sinclair propose that where government s capacity to regulate smes is limited regulators may harness play a surrogate regulatory role regulatory surrogacy through trusted third parties may be particularly important in an environment like british columbia which is characterized by many small firms and junior cap issuers third party intervention is useful in this context as a means of
to ratchet up what would otherwise be relatively deferential review under chevron but it went a long way toward alleviating that problem rather than relying on flexible tools or formal rules alone administrative law doctrine employs one to combat the excesses constitutional theory the administrative law example casts a different light on the divergent trends in statutory interpretation and constitutional theory if statutory and constitutional scholars are right to emphasize different aspects of the counter majoritarian difficulty and to emphasize different judicial strategies as well their focus in recent years has become too narrow in statutory interpretation constitutional problems and agent agent relations both loom large and in all three fields formal rules and flexible tools both have a role to play different emphases and different balances may be appropriate in different contexts but i suggest that balance is critical in all three fields the discussion below points out that statutory and constitutional scholars have not simply missed an opportunity by focusing on just frame the problem and seek to solve it may inadvertently aggrandize judicial power and aggravate rather than alleviate the counter majoritarian difficulty that they are trying to solve a toward a broader conception of the problem statutory scholars may be right to focus on principal agent relationships and constitutional theorists may be right to emphasize to overlook the importance of the other relationships involved the discussion below faults both sets of scholars for their narrow focus and urges them to follow the administrative law model and expand their conceptions of the problem at hand relationships among agents in statutory interpretation administrative law s willingness to consider both principal agent faithful agent theory administrative statutes are not the only statutes with long enough lives to create worries about judicial power over other agents to be sure the apa is akin to a constitutional document insofar as it governs ongoing relationships among political actors and between political actors and the courts moreover many of the substantive statutes that administrative agencies implement are designed to be flexible enough to last for generations with agencies their meaning to accommodate changed circumstances but there certainly are non administrative statutes implemented by private actors and government officials alike that can have similarly long life spans take for example the sherman the interpretation of which is entrusted to courts rather than administrative chevron does not apply to the sherman act and so judicial interpretations of it are binding on courts private parties government officials or private parties initiate lawsuits against alleged violators as they have been doing for more than a century they must look to judicial decisions to understand what the act prohibits a non administrative statute of such lasting impact highlights the importance not only of the principal agent relationship between congress and the courts but also of the power that courts have to bind subsequent courts s interpretation is entrusted to courts rather than agencies formalism s static approach to interpretation has counter majoritarian implications if judges make a mistake in an early decision or if earlier decisions turn out to be politically unpopular some amount of flexibility may be required to undo the mistake or at least assuage its problems empowering judges to fix statutory meaning political administrations renders the law less responsive to popular will and societal change in criticizing textualism for its narrow focus i do not mean to suggest that agent agent problems are entirely lost on formalists in statutory interpretation justice scalia for one has explored these problems quite elegantly in weighing the value of formal rules versus judicial flexibility in the context of judge made law he explains in a democratic system the general rule law as contrasted with judicial discretion or flexibility has special claim to preference since it is the normal product of that branch of government most responsive to the people but that particular value of having a general rule is beside the point within the narrow context of law that is made by the assuming that democracy is relevant to the principal agent relationship over another justice scalia proceeds to defend rule formalism over judicial flexibility nonetheless he thinks it desirable that earlier courts should bind later ones so as to establish predictability in law and to ensure that similarly situated citizens are treated what justice scalia neglects to mention is that in statutory interpretation cases and even common law cases a judge s ability to bind private citizens and government officials as well does have implications for democracy though the implications may be stronger in constitutional interpretation where judicial decisions establish constitutional boundaries on political power the minimalist argument for flexibility is not entirely out of place in the statutory context indeed the statutory scholars who have argued the dynamic interpretive approaches embraced by scholars like guido william alexander and peter take into account both the power of an enacting congress to control subsequent law application and the continuing evolution of statutory meaning long after statutory words are enacted into law allowing some flexibility to update statutory interpretation over time is desirable but also because it permits the law to accommodate social and political change an emphasis on flexibility helps to prevent one set of judges appointed by one generation of political actors to freeze the law for all time indeed flexibility arguably is more important in the interpretation of non administrative statutes than it is in the interpretation of of room to update their interpretations as times change the deference built into chevron s formal framework frees agencies not just to interpret statutes but also to reinterpret them as political administrations in non administrative matters that fall beyond chevron s rule in contrast formalism lacks this flexible outlet and tends to freeze statutory interpretation under a static approach to interpretation quite difficult to change when we compare scholarship on statutory interpretation outside the administrative state with scholarship on administrative law we find that textualism s case for static interpretation fails to appreciate the democratic implications of the agent agent problems that
have been strengthened by a considerable body of empirical evidence that qualifies the berle and means thesis indeed the berle and means study has both pitelis and sugden and later leech contend that the analysis of berle and means was static and ahistorical this leads pitelis and sugden to forward direct and indirect evidence that supports their view that a very small subset of owners may control a firm while leech argues that the often quoted owners and managers as stated earlier the rationale for this study is partly premised on the argument that the dynamic relationship between owners and managers may affect strategic decision making and control byrd et al examine the relationship between managers as agents on the one hand and stockholders as principals on the other this attention first is the potential clash in expectations regarding management effort based on jensen and meckling s conclusion that the incentive for management to shirk was linked to the extent of their shareholding and jensen and murphy s finding that typical ceos own a tiny fraction of the firm byrd et al argue that byrd et al argue that stockholders have a longer time horizon whereas managers are frequently oriented toward shorter timescales third conflict between owners and managers can also occur because of differences in relation to risk since the careers and earning capacities of managers are tied to their employing firm they are understandably more argue that owners and managers may conflict regarding asset use since managers do not bear the full costs of their actions managers may have the incentive to misuse assets to consume what stockholders could view as excessive benefits this managerialist view is supported by evidence of disproportionate ceo compensation stewardship theorists offer alternative conceptualizations of organizational governance specifically this socio psychological approach to governance suggests that managers are trustworthy organization serving people whose interests is still in its infancy recent theorizing in this field suggests that rather than view managerialist and non managerialist positions on corporate governance as diametrically opposed positions researchers should seek to uncover the areas where the stewardship and agency perspectives converge and to examine have suggested that the inherent characteristics of family firms reduces the occurrence of many agency problems that are frequently identified in the literature for example it is commonly argued that family firms are high trust organizations in which affective rather than rational utilitarian and calculative relationships are more common indeed an their counterparts on a range of measures however this is not to suggest that there are no agency problems in family businesses indeed a number of factors reduce the viability of such assumptions of particular significance is that family businesses are not homogenous entities and they do not always have owners with badham individual family owners may engage in self serving political behaviors which may undermine the management of the businesses concerned such findings are more likely in businesses that have survived multiple generations as such companies are commonly owned by people with the extended family ties similarly it has terms restricts the pool of labor and consequently the quality of managerial agents available to such businesses such selection problems are cited as not only having performance implications but are also said to impact on the effectiveness with which managerial agents can be controlled in family businesses and or by precisely specifying performance measures and evaluating them carefully and periodically in summary managerialists argue that a separation of ownership and control leads to management that the interests of owners and managers are or can be made parallel aside from differences in the consequences of divorced ownership and control both positions are premised on the untested assumption that closely held ownership equates to de facto as well as to legal control by owners however this position ignores the effects of the preceding review of literature indicates a widely prevailing assumption that closely held ownership equates to de facto control by owners however this review also notes that some commentators have highlighted that such an assumption fails adequately to reflect owner manager dynamics this study aims to focus explicitly on the evaluation of this assumption the primary objective of this study is to explore and evaluate the nature and dynamics of de facto control in a context where ownership is closely held and where key senior managers are not members of the owning family thus research objectives include the generation of insights into the divergence of owner and manager de facto control as well as the while the extent of holdings by owners can be calculated easily the extent to which owners or managers exert de facto strategic or operational control requires in depth contextual insights rather than rely on the simple mathematical division of ownership or a statistical evaluation of owner numbers and percentages medium sized family firm where ownership is concentrated in the hands of a single family there is a need to explore and analyze the idiosyncratic circumstances in which such control exists as well as the context peculiar manner in which such control is exerted furthermore the inclusion of such contextual insights and information provides a means to enable the only develops deep and meaningful insights into complex phenomena but also examines such issues over time although the majority of existing studies survey multiple organizations and apply quantitative analyses understanding the dynamics of de facto control ownership and control a genuine understanding of de facto control is difficult without in depth case study analysis this view is supported by a series of contemporary commentators who have noted that ownership and control issues require careful a case study approach is needed to account for contextual factors in this regard a review of approach to data collection indicates that a case study approach can provide a deeper understanding fuller contextual sense of the studied phenomena and an a single case company mcgahey sons the adoption of a single case design is grounded in the conceptual and practical logic of dyer and wilkins who reject
to move only their eyes not their head if possible following the initial calibration and a brief verbal explanation of the procedure participants performed a practice trial this trial was one of the filler trials described follows first a blank white screen appeared on the computer monitor for then the blank screen was replaced by a panel and an accompanying story began to play over the loudspeaker once the story was complete there was a beep followed after by a comprehension probe participants then responded aloud to the comprehension probe while an experimenter recorded their answer his responses by pointing or nodding and shaking his head once they had responded participants either pressed the space bar on a keyboard in front of the monitor or the experimenter did it for them to advance to the next trial the next trial then began with a blank screen as described above the experiment terminated automatically after trials data analysis and reliability responses to comprehension probes were recorded online by the experimenter for all aphasic participants a second experimenter present during the experiment verified the first experimenter s recording of the responses reliability for these response checks was above for all aphasic participants the responses were scored following the question object cleft and yes no question was calculated the scoring for each aphasic participant was checked by the first author either yes correct or true was counted as a correct response for the clefts and yes no questions while either the intended answer or a synonym was counted as correct for the wh questions all other responses including i do nt know and non responses were counted as incorrect in the panel during the comprehension probe the comprehension probe was divided into four different regions for analysis as shown in table fixations occurring prior to the subject of the verb were not included in the analysis the most critical analysis regions for examining automatic processing of movement were the verb and trace regions as can be seen in table the onset of the noun describing the location of the event visual evidence of automatically associating the moved element with the verb or trace in the wh movement sentences was expected to appear in these regions in the form of more fixations to the object compared to the subject compared to other regions in the sentence intuitively when participants hear upon hearing the verb kiss which signals a trace and assigns a thematic role to the moved element who and stop looking at other elements in the display in addition to the main sentence regions described above there was a further post offset analysis region this region comprised all fixations made between the offset of the comprehension probe and the participant s response aphasic participants should appear here further as is standard practice in studies of this kind the temporal boundaries of each sentence region were shifted downstream for the purposes of analysis this practice compensates for the time required to program and execute a saccade in order to fixate on an object associated with a word done on ninety sentences for each of these sentences the four segments described above were measured for a total of sets of measurements all of these measurements were reviewed by a native speaker who was linguistically trained intercoder cases of disagreement the first author reviewed the measurement in question and resolved the conflict fixation proportions were calculated for each participant individually and then averaged across participants for each participant fixation proportions were calculated separately for each sentence region the proportion of fixations to each panel object out of the total fixations for each distractor elements on the screen but also to the fixation cross in the center of the panel as well as fixations to elements outside the screen a participant had to fixate on the same position for four consecutive samples for it to count as a fixation this limit is above the ms and is approximately twice as long as the sample used in other eyetracking while listening studies fixations were calculated automatically for each participant by eyenal analysis software the fixation proportions for each sentence region were calculated using excel and were checked by hand for each participant by either the first or the second author followed by results for object clefts since the former results are most directly comparable to sussman and sedivy s results for young unimpaired participants in all statistical analyses reported below the fixation proportions and proportions of correct responses have been corrected using an arcsin transformation this transform corrects for the non normal properties of proportion data otherwise noted comprehension probes control participants exhibited good comprehension of both object wh questions and yes no questions they were in their responses to yes no questions and in their answers to wh questions overall the aphasic participants comprehension of the probes was very similar to what has been higher accuracy and less variability in their responses to yes no questions than in their responses to object wh questions yes no questions elicited a higher proportion of correct responses than wh questions while their accuracy participants performance for wh questions was also significantly worse than controls thus aphasic participants had more difficulty understanding questions with wh movement than yes no questions without movement in this for analysis recall that the temporal boundaries of each sentence region were shifted downstream for the purposes of analysis interestingly this ms offset appeared to be sufficient for not only the control participants but the aphasic participants thus the aphasic participants also looked to the expected objects with roughly the same speed as the unimpaired control participants this result is somewhat in aphasia below only fixations on the subject and object are presented this is because there were very few looks to the inanimate distractor and even fewer looks to the location findings that non argument prepositional phrases generally draw few looks from young unimpaired listeners the former finding is perhaps not surprising either since the distractor was never
mating tests weeks after castration intromissions and ejaculations were eliminated of intact orchx gonad intact furthermore anogenital investigation decreased to min during min not surprisingly when paired with a receptive female none of the orchx males mated and preference for the stimulus female was unchanged in subsequent partner preference testing orchx males spent an average of min with the stimulus female and min with the stimulus male there was a significant effect on partner preference for the sex of the stimulus animal but no effect of time and no interaction after weeks of testosterone exposure orchx males averaged min with the stimulus female vs min with the stimulus male for a mean preference score min however and ejaculations even weeks of testosterone exposure increased the proportion of males expressing copulatory behaviors and ejaculated by anova there was a significant effect for the sex of the stimulus animal and an effect of bulbectomy but no interaction before olfactory bulbectomy all males preferred the stimulus female hamsters spent an average of min with the stimulus female vs min with the stimulus male for an average preference score s the stimulus female and the mean preference score decreased vnox despite bilateral removal of the vomeronasal organs all vnox males expressed a preference for the stimulus female in partner preference tests vnox males averaged min with the stimulus female and min with the stimulus male vnox males spent an average of min in anogenital investigation every vnox male mated to ejaculation mounts averaged min with intromissions and ejaculations per min when partner preference was retested following mating and min with the male hamster accordingly as determined by anova vnox males demonstrated a significant effect for sex of the stimulus animal but there was no effect of sexual experience and no interaction discussion this study compared partner preference and mating on sexual motivation the results demonstrate that male hamsters do not require sexual experience to express a partner preference for females in addition partner preference develops even when contact with the stimulus animals is prevented suggesting that the combination of visual auditory and volatile chemosensory cues from an estrous female are attractive to males indeed partner preference was reduced removal furthermore the present study supports previous findings that testosterone stimulates both appetitive and consummatory aspects of sexual behavior in particular sexual motivation may be even more dependent on testosterone than sexual behavior in this regard partner preference was attenuated within weeks after castration yet weeks of testosterone replacement did not restore partner weeks after castration and returned after weeks of testosterone replacement these results indicate that hamsters possess some flexibility with regard to sensory cues for sexual motivation but have a strong reliance on gonadal steroids male sexual behavior includes both appetitive and consummatory behaviors appetitive behaviors both sexual motivation and copulation are modified by gonadal steroids sensory stimuli from females and learned associations in contrast to male rats mating in male hamsters is considered to be relatively less flexible more dependent on chemosensory cues less sensitive to prior sexual experience partner preference is well established method to study sexual with a receptive female over a stimulus male partner preference requires that the male identify interpret and respond to cues from the stimulus animals and has been shown to depend on hormonal cues and prior experience at least in rats importantly partner preference has not previously been demonstrated in male hamsters with a stimulus light to gain access to a female this paradigm has been used to demonstrate the importance of gonadal steroid hormones however extensive training of the test subject is necessary which makes this method unsuitable for sexually naive animals level changing in a bilevel chamber is another popular model for sexual motivation mendelson and pfaus showed that of a receptive female but not when presented with a non receptive female this model takes advantage of the high motor activity of both male and female rats during mating by contrast female hamsters are largely stationary during copulation hence the bilevel chamber is not well suited to the typical pattern of mating behavior in hamsters rats prefer urine from estrous females over diestrous urine sexually inexperienced rats do not furthermore sexually naive male rats do not prefer estrous urine over water matuszczyk larsson extended these observations to show that sexually naive male rats alternate preference for the stimulus male and female sexual experience made the preference for the female rat male hamsters are more sensitive to specific environmental and hormonal signals previous studies have shown that sexually naive male hamsters prefer fhvs to other odors our study supports these observations by showing that gonad intact male syrian hamsters prefer estrous females over gonad intact males even without sexual experience partner preference was not enhanced the concept that learning and experience play a relatively minor role in hamster sexual motivation the recognition of sexually relevant chemosensory cues appears to be major component of learned responses for mating at least in male rats volatile and non volatile chemosensory cues are transduced in the olfactory mucosa and vomeronasal organ which project to the main and a preference for female urine removal of the olfactory bulbs significantly impairs copulation however sexually experienced bulbx male rats continue to copulate by contrast hamsters depend on chemosensory cues for mating anosmia eliminates copulation even in sexually experienced males bulbx also substantially reduces preference for odors from of fhvs detected in the vomeronasal organ although vnox was not verified histologically here our behavioral results are consistent with previous work earlier studies have found it difficult to eliminate the entire vomeronasal organ whether by electrocautery or surgical ablation importantly pfeiffer and johnston found no correlation between the extent of of the vno and investigation of vaginal secretions and partner preference is unimpaired similarly our results suggest that the vomeronasal organ may not be necessary for attraction to females instead male hamsters may rely on a combination of visual auditory and volatile odor cues in support of this conclusion work by pfeiffer johnston demonstrated that
a species species richness patterns between point samples in the local scale analyses with regional analyses local samples were interpolated interpolation aids in overcoming some limitations of undersampling but may also inflate species richness estimates at mid elevations i explicitly examined the influence of undersampling and interpolation with an error analysis by range augmentation for each not beyond them thus adding range segments simulates interpolation beyond the current sampling sites i increased range sizes using three different procedures uniform augmentation for all ranges uniform range augmentation by size categories and probability simulations with randomized range augmentation for each range size class all range augmentations are percentages of the total length of the half to the upper range limit until the base or top of the mountain was reached the augmentations by size category assume that smaller ranges are more likely to be undersampled therefore they have larger amounts of error the range size categories are small simulations add an additional element of realism by assuming that not all species ranges are undersampled but varying those that are randomly four levels of uniform range augmentation were applied to all ranges four levels of size specific uniform range augmentation were applied with augmentation decreasing from small to medium to large ranges error with range size and decreasing percentages of augmentation with size for each probability and percentage error combination i used simulations to calculate confidence intervals to test the influence of geographical boundaries species mccain this procedure simulates species richness curves using empirical range sizes within a bounded domain based on analytical stochastic models simulation boundaries were mountain summit and lowest elevation for the range sizes were used to assess the impact of spatial constraints on the elevational richness gradients regressions of the empirical values on predicted values based on the average of the simulations gave sets for western peru and the olympic mountains wa were compiled from bat specimen records from us museum collections in the manis database the elevation of each specimen was based on the data base information or was estimated from the collecting locality through maps digital elevation models and or gazetteers for western peru all data from western departments the lowlands of other departments that are mostly desert or desert scrub for the olympic mountains bat specimens were included from the four counties that encompass the mountain range and surrounding coastal counties the bat classifications were based on those of wilson and reeder results included in the publication four presented only the richness curve two discussed general elevational species richness in a region and one presented generalized elevational range data in a mountainous region of the studies that did nt provide raw data several sampled thus in discussions of species richness patterns only tamsitt and navarro leon paniagua are included herein with the studies with data study effort on bats was concentrated where bats are most diverse the tropics and continental mountains all island studies were from the old world tropics specifically the philippines and new guinea peaked mid slope whereas demonstrated a decreasing pattern and one revealed a low elevation plateau in species richness the elevational gradients with data are detailed in fig the number of mid elevation peaks is inflated here by studies with low sampling effort sampling effort highly skewed towards a few elevations sampling less than the low elevation human disturbance carrera s transect from the eastern slopes of ecuador also sampled less than the slope but the unsampled area occurred towards the mountain top where species richness had already been shown to be declining for for this reason ecuador was included in sampling effort for bats in the philippine islands was noted by the authors the areas of strongest human disturbance are depicted in fig by grey shading the authors pointed out that within undisturbed forest bat species richness declined with the elevation because of the strong influences of human disturbance these quantitative analyses similarly two studies with decreasing species richness patterns had low sampling effort or too little methodological description and therefore were not considered further in the analyses thus when considering only those data sets without large sampling effects or influences of human disturbance half of and half decreased with the elevation these citations and study details are listed in table and appendix in supplementary material the sampling effort varied among these studies and some have higher probabilities of sampling error than others the error analyses show that substantial material decreasing richness patterns become low elevation plateaus with moderate to high levels of range augmentation the exception is colombia which had mid elevation peaks in a few high error regimes error analyses ranges from mid elevation peaks also needed high amounts of error to become a low elevation plateau most error levels able to change the mid elevation peaks of mazateca and jalisco while only very high levels of error changed white inyo and utah to low elevation plateaus ecuador was the least robust to error becoming low plateau with uniform error scenarios see appendix in supplementary material therefore adding a uniform percentage to large ranges quickly expands most ranges to the mountain base on average for mid elevation peaks to become low plateaus species ranges need to be undersampled by of the montane gradient in the various error scenarios only calculated for data sets without sampling effects or disturbance effects fits to the null model varied widely values ranged from to with an average of there were only three data sets all temperate with unimodal patterns that show decreasing unimodal two of three data sets from a tropical temperate transition in western mexico show unimodal richness patterns alpha and gamma species richness demonstrated equal numbers of decreasing and unimodal richness patterns two unimodal patterns were alpha transects one in the temperate zone and one in mexico the other two alpha peak elevational species richness of bats demonstrated a positive trend with latitude species richness of all bat communities declined dramatically above a threshold elevation and the threshold increased monotonically
had been part of the protest cycle of the and organizations for international cooperation that arose during the international crises of the and new groups active on the issues of fair trade and alternative lifestyles the group on critical consumerism and the lilliput network some of the old solidarity associations had been founded in the nineteenth century tradition of sharing a philanthropic and charitable orientation they developed more political stances during the protests of the late the representative of the acli we interviewed actually identifies the as the turning point with a strong fracture and distancing from the linkages the christian democracy and also with the church similarly manitese underwent a refoundation in the as a movement with a leftist catholic stamp in the same decade an interest in the transnational dimension of solidarity developed and then strengthened during the antiwar movement of the sensitizing these groups to the issues of globalization as its representative recalls the arci has always had an starting with chile vietnam etc so it was no big effort to accept the challenge and engage in the territory of a different globalization the gjm pushed these organizations to return to the territory of protest to reconsider their own organizational models and to reshape their own identity moreover the also marked the emergence of groups focusing on new organizational formulas issues action the protests against the first gulf war and then the war in former yugoslavia contributed to the founding of organizations that operate specifically on development and cooperation issues as one volunteer recalls un ponte per was created in and has been part of the movement since participating in the prague counter summit that year by remobilizing people who came from a political background dating back to emergency was founded some years later with a view to bringing medical surgery health assistance which at the beginning was mainly urgent surgery for war victims direct victims and even more indirect victims of poverty or while in afghanistan now we also pursue projects concerning the health of prisoners new active networks on political consumerism and lifestyles issues emerged in economy which unites a number of secular and catholic associations environmentalist and charity groups active in the fields of international cooperation and voluntary service with the objective of merging into one voice our multiple forms of resistance to the economic choices that concentrate power in the hands of a few and privilege the logic of profit and consumerism to the protection of life human dignity health and the environment similar to the the patto per la pace pact for peace emerged as a new network linking various pacifist and environmentalist organizations as the arci representative puts it it was created around a manifesto produced through a long process of participation in this area in the different groups came into contact with the each other especially during the anti war campaigns these split the traditional peace bloc with the center left parties supporting what as humanitarian intervention and the solidarity groups mainly opposing it the anti war protests were indeed characterized by coordinatory committees that managed to hold together very different groups from the catholics to the social centers protest campaigns both before and after seattle have reactivated traditional forms of protest and created new forms of action if during the moderation and a taste for direct action which spread during the protest cycle of the new millennium during the protests some of their frames and strategies found resonance in traditional unions both actors would later be influenced by their encounter with new emerging organizations similarly many organizations committed to transnational solidarity have since the reactivated on global issues spreading forms of action based on alternative lifestyles participatory formulas and transnational solidarity they have also been influenced by organizations that emerged in the and that developed with consensual decision making strategies of political consumerism and a discourse of global justice this evolution is not confined to italy since the mid labor protests became visible in the public sector in great britain france such as street blockades were often employed during the mobilizations against industrial restructuring also in other countries new organizations active in the field of transnational solidarity experimented with forms of action based on the practice of alternative life styles in order to show the possibility of a completely alternative economy that escapes the imperatives of the neo liberal model if the organizations active on solidarity were able to win support for their non violent methods they also joined in acts of civil disobedience and direct action from an organizational point of view the new protests were called for by groups that stressed participation from below in neo corporatist countries transformations mainly involved certain trade unions in the public sector in those with a pluralistic italy new radical unions emerged criticizing the bureaucratization of traditional trade unions and stressing community action solidarity organizations have also been constantly confronted with the issue of democracy and this generates more or less significant organizational changes it is indeed especially in this area that new forms of participatory democracy with with an emphasis on dialogue individual commitment and decentralization the campaign is presented by activists of the forum on critical consumerism as the main working modality of networks active on solidarity issues since the characteristic of the campaigns is being organized together even though during the and the movements visible evolution was oriented towards specialization on single issues some more general frames developed the discussion on global social unionism testifies to this alter mondialist frames emerged for example in france during the december wave of strikes in the public sector and in the peace movement organizations a passage from single issue frames to multi issue frames has been emphasized the poor workers unions have played a particularly important role in linking the the working place with the defence of public services and the welfare state jobs and justice in parallel solidarity became linked to a political not only charitable approach to the problem
strategies including marketing mix decisions are some limitations inherent in this methodology that will be discussed later it is relatively common in npd research a mail survey was developed for data collection respondents were requested to provide detailed five years ago that could be considered to be characteristic of their firm at the time of launch a characteristic new product was defined for the respondents as one that is typical in that it required no unusual or new to the firm skills or resources the survey was mailed to all practitioner members of the pdma pdma practitioner members were chosen as the a follow up telephone call and second mailing were used to increase response rates a key informant method was used for data collection this procedure is frequently used in npd research respondents were experienced practicing managers in the area of product development and were the most knowledgeable sources of information on the were included among the respondents a total of usable questionnaires were returned which represented a response rate of percent demographics of the sample were compared to the demographics of the pdma membership and the sample was very representative of the sampling frame this scale required respondents to state level of agreement with statements regarding penetration pricing skimming pricing pricing to encourage early adoption pricing to encourage channel acceptance and alignment of price with a differentiation strategy marketing mix strategy a set of seven scale items relating to marketing mix strategy at this scale asked respondents to rate the quality of several elements of marketing mix strategy at the time of launch selling effort advertising promotion service and technical support product availability product distribution and price levels firm resources and skills seven scale items on firm resources and skills pertaining to than adequate for the selected product launch marketing research sales force distribution advertising and promotion engineering and manufacturing work group structure a six item scale was developed from the literature and pretested this scale required respondents to state the extent to which cross functional teams made decisions concerning manufacturing logistics and marketing strategies and the logistics and inventory strategy a new scale was developed and pretested based on the relevant literature it contained scale items some of these required respondents to assess the extent to which logistics strategy focused on reducing the number of facilities suppliers products stock keeping units and so on with the objective of increasing efficiency other questions probed the response or efficient customer response programs flexible manufacturing and integration of logistics with other functional areas market research testing and planning this item scale was taken from the project newprod studies and assesses how well several market related activities were undertaken these included customer selection in use testing with customers test marketing finalizing marketing feedback sales force training planning and testing advertising executing advertising strategy and managing distribution channel activities market orientation a item scale of market orientation was adapted from the scales used by narver and slater in their research into market orientation and further validated in studies by song and parry a firm may consider a new product a success if it say captures significant market share even if it is not highly profitable therefore seven items capturing several dimensions of success relative to the business unit s measured on likert type scales ranging from to pretesting the questionnaire was pretested by practicing managers participating in a university executive training program and by classes of evening mba students the pretest ensured that all questions were clear and that the scale items adequately represented the desired constructs only minor corrections results identification of price strategy clusters the spss based means clustering procedure was used to group the new product launches into clusters according to their responses to the five scale items on strategic pricing which are our firm launched the new product with a low introductory price a prime motivator in setting price we charged a premium price for our new product as shown in table ii three distinct clusters emerged which are briefly described below the three clusters contained and cases respectively all usable cases were classified into one of the three clusters the three clusters are then compared to determine if there etc analysis of variance was used on the cluster means followed by post hoc multiple range tests table ii presents all test results the last column in table ii shows all cases in which multiple range tests indicated significant differences between clusters cluster these products were launched at low introductory channel acceptance cluster is conscientious about market research testing and planning activities and could have been called good research low names however it is outperformed in terms of several timing variables by cluster cluster these products were launched with premium prices little consideration was placed however on the likely acceptance of the new product by the channel or on encouragement of early adoption note that there were no significant differences among the clusters in terms of differentiation strategy one might have expected cluster to be more likely to set premium prices in order to pursue a differentiation strategy cluster this cluster uses a pricing strategy intermediate to that of adoption however it is less likely than cluster to set a premium price interestingly though cluster sets price with attention to channel acceptance the difference between clusters and on this scale item is only significant at the level cluster is very similar to cluster in performing market research testing and planning activities but outperforms cluster on several comprises low introductory price launches cluster comprises launches where premium skimming prices are used but with little concern for early adoption or channel acceptance and cluster comprises moderately high price launches which account for likely channel acceptance since for cluster neither channel acceptance nor differentiation are strong motivators in setting of the effects on demand or through the channel for a fuller understanding of the firms launch strategies the clusters were then compared on all other scale items inter cluster differences cluster means were
most frequent type of wordplay in the nm competition humor can be made from the nm settings without sexual allusiveness the examples in table show that non sexual wordplay can be humorous perhaps by avoiding the usual run of the mill penis puns entrants who devise these are attempting to be more clever or witty what is deemed but in requiring more effort to construct and to interpret these captions do seem to be on a slightly elevated level the full mountie caption is a clever play on the movie title the full monty which revolved around male striptease episode s runner up caption involves a clever construction around the word locomotive the drawn setting featured a train hence the term loco s motive makes a nice connection to the drawing and variety episode features a clever limerick without any direct sexual allusiveness thus making humor in the pure pleasure of a well constructed limerick the runner up caption from episode adopts another strategy in referring to tom brown and flashman it requires the reader s familiarity with thomas hughes classic british school novel tom brown s school days in the process adding double meaning to the school bully character flashman at the very least these types of entries inject some variety into the competition and show just how inventive people can be in their wordplay reflexive play with sexual allusion one can presume that entrants to the competition monitored each week s published captions so becoming well aware of the predominance of double entendres consequently inventive entrants were able to reflexively play with a good example is provided in episode see figure below introduced with the editor s guiding statement this week naked man has an arresting moment at the frontier surely it s a case of mistaken identity the winning caption was with a sinking feeling dick realized he was going to find out what well hung really meant well hung is a well known vernacular term for a large penis and because this term is so well known and nm features so many of these kinds of terms the is able to play upon this meaning that is naked man s well hung ness is going to be that he is hung by the neck until dead thus the caption simultaneously plays with two levels of meaning of well hung significantly contributing to a humorous effect the nm competition does not feature any direct visual puns as it relies on the interplay between image and caption but i would like to suggest that it does contain near visual puns from time to time there are elements of the humor that are more dependent on getting readers to visualize aspects of the good example occurs in episode figure the winning caption for this episode was once again the ensemble did not require a metronome the caption relies on readers to make the inference of similarity between a metronome and a penis in the absence of a metronome a swinging penis might do the same job as readers work albeit momentarily to interpret this caption to make humor there is a distinct visual element to the solving activity it is a near visual pun a risqu element but it is also i think a more clever offering as it offers something over and above the run of the mill double entendre the fact that it was adjudged the winning caption reinforces this assertion drawing dependent captions some captions rely very heavily on the details of the drawn setting they make no direct wordplay but pick up on aspects of the drawing to make something funny episode s runner up caption at last rupert felt among friends he had no foot charles had a glass eye and now he d met harold who had no lips the humor of this caption cannot be comprehended without a close inspection of the drawn setting reproduced in figure discussion a naturalized convention that when a man pulls down his pants the this that is focused on is his penis when we are presented with settings where nm is the only one naked the implicit instruction is to make fun with the penis that is known to be there he is after all a man thus it is understandable that puns on the penis and double entendres dominate the caption entries to the competition here i would like to suggest that while it is a very interesting phenomenon when i talk to many people about nm they can see some humor in it but find it relatively trivial this common reaction makes the longevity and popularity of nm all the more notable is it not remarkable that in the place where it began melbourne the competition still runs eight years later that is an awful lot of dick jokes granted the competition lasted for just over a newspaper to put out a nm christmas calendar nm shirts and for the editors to talk of a naked man fan club whose members subsequently complained about nm s unexplained disappearance so how can we understand the popularity and longevity of nm humor depends on economy to begin we need to note the remarkable economy of the competition it is a good example of the way a simple form can generate diverse content nippert eng s point and is worth brief outline she defines boundary play as the visible imaginative manipulation of shared cultural cognitive categories for the purpose of amusement her particular focus is the definition and use of space for boundary play and she provides an example of children playing in a dog crate she details how a year old and two year olds play inside a large dog crate gaining much pleasure in pretending to be dogs suggesting that the children s fun en s fun stems in large part from the fact that the crate manifests any of a number of categorical boundaries this includes the lines dividing such meaningful cultural pairings as
currents moving down a constant slope can be conservative autosuspending or dissipative parsons et al conservative turbidity currents do not interact with their boundaries and their speed and depth averaged and depth integrated concentrations remain constant as they propagate although theoretically attractive due to their simplicity dissipative autosuspending turbidity currents produce enough bed stress to increase their sediment load by bed erosion such that density and speed increase with run out distance parker et al at the other extreme purely dissipative turbidity currents slow down as they lose sediment upward via interfacial mixing many turbidity currents likely have aspects of both autosuspension and dissipation as they simultaneously gain column whether they accelerate or decelerate with distance depends on which mechanism is dominant strictly speaking the above classification of turbidity currents does not require sediment concentrations to be high enough to qualify as fluid mud whether or not turbidity currents are fluid mud will depend on whether concentration is high enough and sediment grain size continental shelf or in the along channel direction in estuaries then in the absence of sufficiently strong ambient currents or waves fluid mud gravity currents will remain laminar fluid mud on steeper slopes can also remain laminar during their acceleration phase before they reach a steady state velocity that generates shear instability at higher slopes extremely high concentration several hundred kg steady state very high viscosity for this latter case fluid muds may have a finite yield strength that must be overcome before the onset of flow such very high concentration fluid muds have strongly non newtonian properties williams that affect the mudflow if a fluid mud gravity flow moves down a constant slope of about one degree or less then in the absence of externally imposed as sediment slowly settles as the mud slowly settles the speed of the downslope flow will decrease with run out distance and the gravity flow will eventually extinguish itself wright et al this scenario has been observed off the mouth of the yellow river where laminar fluid mud gravity flows are released at slack tide and move a finite distance seaward across the shallowly sloping bed of the mouth of the yellow river at maximum tidal flow they do not move as rapidly down the gentle slope at that time because the turbulent eddy viscosity induced by the tidal shear enhances frictional resistance wright et al the presence of significant ambient waves or currents dramatically changes the nature of fluid mud gravity flows first the presence of ambient currents increases frictional resistance to the the presence of waves or currents simultaneously allows the fluid mud suspension to persist since ambient shear is available to keep the fluid mud in suspension kineke et al inferred this to be the case for tidally suspended fluid mud gravity flows on the amazon shelf where the bed slope is less than this phenomenon was conclusively observed during high wave conditions off the eel river in northern calif where fluid mud gravity layer reached a wave averaged downslope speed of cm over a bed slope of scully et al there are many specific environments where gravity flows are important to fluid mud transport wave supported fluid mud gravity flows have been observed offshore of the mouth of the po river italy traykovski et al and have been inferred off the mouth of many other rivers including the waiapu new the amazon and yellow rivers tidally suspended fluid mud gravity flows have been observed or inferred off of the fly river new guinea walsh and nittrouer and are likely to be found off the mouths of other tidally energetic estuaries fluid mud trapped by estuarine salt fronts is thought to be regularly released as gravity flows off the amazon and off the sepik river new guinea kineke et al fluid mud gravity estuaries over shorter distances favoring fluid mud movement toward the deepest parts of estuaries including deep navigation channels created and maintained by dredging van kessel et al direct discharge of fluid mud as a gravity flow into lower energy receiving waters occurs with hyperpycnal flow from extremely high concentration rivers mulder and syvitski and in discharge to seasonally return fluid mud seaward offshore of extensive mudbanks along the southwest coast of india mathew et al wave induced transport wave dissipation over fluid mud long wave paradigm strong mud induced wave dissipation has been known for centuries mudbanks along the la coast have been long used as shelters from waves eg gade tubman and suhayda effects on wave refraction and other wave properties but also on transport of the mud rodriguez and mehta the peculiarities of cohesive sediment environments stand out during highly energetic events for example during hurricane camille seabed failure of catastrophic proportion was recorded on the inner shelf of the gulf of mexico by sterling and strohbeck sandy beach physics which could be called the long wave paradigm lwp its basic assumptions are simple waves interact with the bottom directly and while the bottom is soft capable to dissipate wave energy its properties do not change significantly changes of water column properties due to wave activity are also assumed negligible the corollary is that only long waves with nonnegligible ie mud flow can be influenced by both long waves and short waves coupling of wave fluid mud motion short wave problem wave dissipation is a process of energy draining from the surface motion to the soft sea bed in the lwp based approach energy is transferred from the surface long wave to the bottom through a direct friction like interaction the flux of dissipated energy is that mechanisms other than the postulated lwp direct interaction may become active due to sediment reworking resulting in a strong spectrumwide coupling between wave and sediment dynamics the surface to bottom path followed by the energy flux in this case is poorly understood and deserves further research significant contributions of three wave interactions to energy the spectrum so called sum and difference interactions the energy flux
the formula pq observe that the system level loi is impacted by both the interlayer calls and the skipping of layers in the interlayer calls also larger the cycles lower is the value of loi clearly the loi metric characterizes software according to the principle of maximization of the unidirectionality of control flow in layered architectures and strongly discourages the existence of cycle across multiple layers this section horizontal layering is the least organization one would want to impose on the modules of large and complex software a desirable property of such an architecture is that the modules in the lower layer be more stable in relation to the modules in the upper layers and that any changes made to the overall software be more confined to the upper layers and to the since it is difficult to anticipate a priori whether a given module is likely to change as changes often depend on some unpredictable external situations such as market pressures and customer requests to develop a similar metric for non object oriented systems we call this metric the module interaction the modules to the different layers and be the layer where resides furthermore in the stack of layers let and lp be the highest and the lowest layers respectively we now rankorder the layers with the operator defined as lp and lj for a given module let fanin be the set of modules jfanin jfanout let sd fanout be the set of stable modules with respect to defined as sd fanout the above equation states that sd are only those modules that depends on that are more stable than and that reside in layers lower than the layer of the module on modules which are more stable and reside in lower layers hence for a well modularized system jfanout and misi clearly if a system has a high misi index any changes or extensions made to the system will affect only a small number of modules in the upper layers of the system the metric conforms to the principle of maximization of stand alone module extendibility other modules would be easier to so it is useful to measure the extent to which modules depend on one another with regard to testability note that just because a module calls an api function of module does not imply that depends on from the standpoint of testability a testability dependence is created if the assessment of the correctness of the input output of another module that is if the testing of module requires another module to produce intermediate results that then get used in module we have a testability dependence between the two modules we measure the extent of such testability dependencies with the help of the normalized testability dependency metric ntdm that is defined as described dependency count as tdc where is the total number of modules in the system we now define our ntdm metric to be note that tdc varies from to m on the extent of testability dependencies between the modules the upper limit is reached when a module depends on every other module with regard to its the standpoint of testability the value of ntdm will be when the modules are independently testable and it will be when every module depends on every other module for its testability this metric obviously characterizes the software according to the principle of maximization of the stand alone testability of modules of a function or the names of some of the variables used in the function or the comments associated with a function hold some clue to the purpose of the function inside the module and to the purpose of the module itself for example this could be the case for a module devoted to interest calculations in banking software the word interest either fully or in behind such clues because it makes for easier reading of the software and for its we can refer to these clues as with regard to software characterization we may then use the concepts to assess whether or not the software adheres to the principles that are based on the semantics of the module contents metrics proposed in this section are based on the synonyms in the body of the code let cng denote a set of n concepts for a given system also assume that the system consists of set of functions ff functions distributed over modules mmg in the rest of this section we will also use the symbol as denoting the set of all functions that are in module mi for each function we first search the number of occurrences of each let us denote the concept frequency as hf to be the frequency of occurrence of the concept for a given function as an illustration of the concept content of a body of software consider the apache http sources that contain concepts such as authentication caching protocol logging and so on table shows the frequencies of some of the main concepts and their frequency distribution of these concepts it may so happen that a particular concept occurs more frequently than other concepts across all functions thereby causing apparent skewing of the distribution in order to avoid that we first find the global maximum of concept frequency let hmax the concepts in the module will be peaked at the concept corresponding to the purpose of the module so we can say that the more nonuniform the probability distribution of the concepts in a module the more likely that the module conforms to the singularity of purpose the concept domination metric gives us a measure of this non uniformity of the probability distribution of the expected to go to zero a convenient measure from probability theory that has such properties is the kullback leibler divergence we will now show this divergence can be adapted for a metric suited to our purpose we start by creating a normalized concept
convertible debentures and a on single company stock warrants and debentures like other thai based investors the oapf is not able to invest abroad directly at the end the provident fund covered million employees in enterprises with total fund size of tbt billion as of november the net asset value of provident funds was almost billion fund managers in thailand provide a number of retirement mutual funds with various risk profiles and the investor can switch assets between funds as of december total rmf funds were tbt billion private in real estate mutual funds geared toward financial institution restructuring property and loan funds as well as derivatives investment in each of these types of funds is limited to the fund net asset value and total investment in all such funds must not exceed nav the thai finance ministry has announced plans to convert the existing framework of efforts to encourage retirement savings and would provide additional coverage for low wage earners details of the new system were expected to be announced in april with implementation set for later in summary pension assets and the adequacy of old age provisioning in the developing countries develop pre funded pension schemes without some of the friction burdens of countries with much older populations second they are much less reliant on payg pension systems with high and possibly unsustainable promises to pension beneficiaries most systems are defined contribution and therefore pre funded with systems like the singapore cpf among the exemplars globally though all such systems are prone to investment returns that may not meet expectations the state and offer only limited portfolio discretion for pension plan participants limited management by private asset managers and limited choice of asset classes given that defined contribution pension systems represent key pools of investible assets in these countries increased choice and competition among asset managers ps well as increased choice among asset classes make a significant contribution both to the soundness of pension contours of the asset management industry private clients one of the largest segments of institutionally managed assets globally is related to high net worth individuals and families generally grouped under the heading of rivate clients total funds under management have been estimated at over trillion insignificantly exceeding the size of the global pension asset pool because of very different investment objectives and service requirements private client wealth is usually segmented according to investible assets under management as shown in exhibit mass affluent emerging wealthy and established wealthy categories are broken out separately with the first category accounting for about two thirds of global aum mass affluent investors assets are usually deployed in bank deposits certificates of deposit traded financial instruments and to the extent they are managed on a fiduciary basis they tend to be found in the mutual funds and pension funds sectors discussed earlier true private client aum is therefore found in the segments denoted as merging wealthy and stablished wealthy in exhibit pc counting for anywhere between and trillion globally depending on the data and aum segments it should be noted that data in this area are notoriously unreliable since there collection effort worldwide consequently published data tends to be aggregated from small samples based on various assumptions bearing that caveat in mind exhibit provides a rough estimate of the geographic location of global private wealth almost half arising in the americas and about one quarter each in europe and asia although growth is expected to be proportionately higher in the latter region especially non japan private client asset pools in that case including real estate for and according to these estimates about investments are allocated to bonds bank deposits equities and alternative investments like hedge finds and private equities the asset management industry would be active in all except the banking domain private client asset management objectives are an amalgam of preferences across yield security tax efficiency confidentiality and service level are paramount each of these plays a distinctive role capital preservation and yield traditional private clients have been concerned with wealth preservation in the face of antagonistic government policies and fickle asset markets clients usually demand the utmost in discretion from their private bankers with whom they sometimes maintain lifelong relationships to some degree given way to more active and sophisticated individuals aware of opportunity costs and often exposed to high marginal tax rates they considered net after tax yield to be far more relevant than the security and focus on capital preservation traditionally sought by high net worth individuals they may prefer gains to accrue in the form of capital appreciation rather than interest or dividend income and tend to have a much more active response to changes rate of return security the environment faced by high net worth investors is arguably more stable today than it has been in the past the probability of revolution war and expropriation has declined over the years in europe north america the far east and latin america nevertheless a large segment of the private banking market remains highly security conscious such clients are generally prepared to trade off yield for stability safety and capital tax efficiency like everyone else high net worth clients are highly sensitive to taxation perhaps more so as cash strapped politicians target he rich in a constant search for fiscal revenues international financial markets have traditionally provided plenty of tax avoidance and tax evasion opportunities ranging from offshore tax havens to private banking services able to sidestep even sophisticated efforts to claim the state share private banking secrecy required for personal reasons for business reasons for tax reasons and for legal or political reasons confidentiality in this sense is a product that is bought and sold as part of private asset management business through secrecy and blocking statutes on the part of countries and high levels of discretion on the part of financial institutions the value of this product depends on the in the form of lower portfolio returns higher fees sub optimum asset allocation or
master for example photolithographically patterned photoresists are commonly used for casting poly devices making the fabrication process very inexpensive and easy to perform in any laboratory we etched both photoresist and silicon are not practical however for high pressure high temperature molding processes such as hot embossing or injection molding due to their low thermal and mechanical strength an attractive material for replication processes are metals as they offer both high thermal and mechanical strength and high thermal conductivity required for fast heating and have been established over recent years the majority of these are based on the combination of standard lithographic processes to define the microstructures and metal electroplating as the last step to produce a mold master these methods involve master fabrication include conventional machining techniques such as electro discharge machining and high precision micromilling these methods do not involve lithographic steps and thus do not require clean room environments making the fabrication of exquisite structures more accessible to researchers who do not have access to techniques for preparing mold masters for example only three fabrication steps are required design cnc milling and finishing as compared to steps required for ray liga or steps for uv lithography based techniques although micromilling can not achieve the fine resolution or minimum feature size of most lithographic techniques it is of lm with aspect ratios and inter structure spacings that are easily obtainable using micromilling in addition micromilling offers the potential of fabricating multilevel structures during the same milling cycle at minimal additional cost as compared to repeating nearly all of the fabrication steps for each additional level when using lithographic choose a non standard mold insert size or shape in comparison lithography based techniques are limited to metals that can be easily electroplated thus excluding for example stainless steel and to mold sizes which are usually limited by standard lithographic processing equipment used precision micromilling with a custom made lm diameter milling bit for the direct fabrication of deep ray lithography masks the authors were able to produce the gold mask absorber features with a minimum width of lm at an accuracy of lm schaller and coworkers used home made ground hard metal end mills to cut length cut whereas brass showed no significant tool wear madou et al manufactured stainless steel mold inserts for molding cd type bioanalytical platforms takacs et al micromilled an array of lm posts with aspect ratios of designed for injection molding cell culturing devices zhao et al used high precision milling to fabricate microchannels the device contained capillary electrophoresis columns arranged in a standard microplate format in order to simplify liquid handling micromilling for mold master fabrication for example chen et al used micromilling to fabricate a mold master for hot embossing polycarbonate microdevices for electrokinetically synchronized pcr the device employed microchannels that were lm wide and lm deep situma et al used a mold master micromilled in brass for casting of pdms stencils inserts for hot embossing microelectrophoresis devices in pmma a few limitations of micromilling as a method for the fabrication of mold masters have been noted in the literature these include larger wall roughness factors of the microstructures as compared to lithography based techniques and the inability of micromilling to produce et al the intrinsic qualities of micromilling may impose some operational limitations on the use of these masters for replicating parts in certain application areas for example in the case of microelectrophoresis wall roughness has been shown to be detrimental to plate numbers produced with the electrokinetically driven separations the size and shape of a sample plug injected into the separation microchannel is an extremely important factor that can affect the separation efficiency floating injection with pull back voltages pinched injection for small plug formation and gated injection more sophisticated control schemes have also been proposed zhang and manz have shown that through proper geometric design of the injector highly reproducible and well controlled injections can be made using simple floating conditions this approach significantly simplifies the device in this paper we describe and characterize brass molding masters fabricated via high precision micromilling we used numerical simulations to evaluate the effects of the non sharp intersections of micromilled cross injectors on the size and shape of electrokinetically injected sample plugs we also discuss the sources and possible effects of increased sidewall roughness of microfluidic microchip electrophoresis devices finally we compare a pmma microchip electophoretic device fabricated using micromilled brass masters to liga prepared masters in terms of separation performance of double stranded dna via gel electrophoresis experimental kern micround feinwerktechnik gmbh co kg germany according to manufacturer specifications the micromilling machine is capable of achieving positional and repetition accuracy lm the milling machine was fitted with a laser measuring system for automatic determination of tool length and radius and an optical lm diameter solid carbide milling bits were used in this study micromilling was carried out at rpm at feed rates that were optimized for maximum machining speed and quality of the microstructures feed rates were dependent on the size of the milling bit and were typically in the range of mm of a pre cut of the entire surface with a lm milling bit to ensure parallelism between both faces of the brass plate and uniform height of the final milled microstructures over the entire pattern a rough milling of the microstructures using a lm milling bit and a finishing cut with a smaller diameter milling bit in the final step of mold fabrication burrs produced at the top of the microstructures the total time required for fabrication of each mold master of the device layout described herein was less than hot embossing and assembly of pmma microdevices pmma sheets were cut into mm diameter the microchannel pattern was hot embossed into the pmma wafers using a commercial hydraulic press a home built vacuum chamber was installed into the press to remove air so complete filling of the mold master could take place the embossing was performed at a force of were
are provided by typically qualified professionals having a recognized identity in related disciplines and their offering is nature focused on problem solving and usually commissioned on an on going management or ad hoc project basis previous research in the uk the usa and other countries has identified improving quality and cost benefits through contracting systems and ensuring fair competition as three main outcomes of contracting out of services nonetheless there is a lack of empirical works and hence a conceptual framework to arrive at these three prescriptions pottinger confirms that such problem does exist in the property services sector in the uk the audit commission advocates and emphasizes that social housing services should be measured and monitored to ensure value for money services however the audit commission only lists what should be measured in performance output but does not mention what fundamental competition and management factors should be adopted to improve the service quality service quality to satisfy the ever increasing customer expectations of value for money services in order to survive and to achieve a successful business a substantial body of literature has attempted to identify quality practices to improve performance including employing early design focusing strategy and total quality management but much of it is theoretically based as revealed by lee et al and longenecker and scazzero in manufacturing ting and chen reiterate such deficiency and calls for research to investigate the actual extent of impact of quality attributes on performance there is a knowledge gap in empirical testing to confirm the validity of performance quality theories in the context of outsourced housing services this study focuses to investigate the actual impact of quality practices on performance of the professional housing maintenance services so that critical factors performance quality and hence value for money of services through outsourcing this will benefit housing organizations and their customers whilst the findings of this study are related to the outsourced maintenance services of the hong kong housing authority the correlation between performance and quality practices forms a conceptual baseline from which further research can build to provide a regression model in many other public and private sector settings housing services consequently effective competition and management factors can be identified to strike the best service quality for customers the impact of competition on performance use of market and competition for delivery of public services is primarily founded on the theory of public choice the theory suggests that if public officials monopolize service delivery the result is oversupply and inefficiency on the contrary if services competitive market can improve the performance quality and cost with regard to private sector in a survey of around manufacturing companies in the uk nickell found that direct competition as measured by the number of competitors had a significant positive correlation with the rates of total factor productivity growth including improvement of product quality nickell explained how the efficiency and performance quality were improved competition he argued that market competition could drive better performance from managers and workers and allow ways of doing things to be tried out before selecting the best something a monopoly would find it hard to replicate in a questionnaire survey of client organizations engaging construction professional services to assess the consultant service quality upon the impact of would not be influenced by fee level in competitive tendering construction professionals had not allowed fee competition to compromise their professionalism instead of inputting fewer resources into projects consultants would minimize costs by improving organizational structure and working methods as well as using better production equipment and technology as previously explained by boyne and walsh in the uk public sector but in the context of hong kong housing sector the insignificant relationship between performance quality and fee level needs to be further examined in order to address the concern of construction and property service professionals about the negative impact of fee level on performance complexity and uncertainty of the housing maintenance works are generally high for examples structural repairs and replacement of underground pipes are technically complicated and have an uncertainty in the scope and extent of works the service level agreement in the consultancy contract is really difficult to be precise because of this uncertainty and bounded rationality stringent monitoring is necessary for preparing contracts compiling qualified tenderers monitoring contract terms and opportunistic behavior of consultants in other words performance monitoring should be done at the procurement and contract implementation stages past behavior is considered to be the best predictor of future behavior performance according to the theory of selection psychology hogan et al s recent meta analytic research suggests that performance in many jobs should in principle be predictable using good measures performance including being responsive to client s needs being persistent and taking initiatives many studies show that past performance or reputation is an important criterion for selection of construction consultants particularly for complex projects leadership was found to be a critical factor influencing performance quality by terziovski and dean they consider that management commitment and true leadership are the cornerstones of good service quality in a regression study of medium to large australian service organizations to determine the effect of quality management practices on service quality outcomes terziovski and dean found that there was a significant association between performance outcomes and quality management practices which comprised including quality in the strategic planning customer involvement empowerment of the workforce and including quality performance as a key performance indicator all these management practices were driven by the project leaders in the hkha project leadership is used as a key selection criterion to procure the professional housing services the assessment of project leaders is based on their post qualification experience experience in similar projects and time commitment to the consultancy of firm rizzo argues that large engineering companies have resources of technical expertise databases and branch of offices they can tackle projects quickly and handle piles of documentation however smaller firms often have a higher degree of specialization and can assign senior staff to projects
calls it in every connection the most difficult piece for his part julian johnson detects a process of desubstantialization in op no wherein only the nuance of dynamics and bowing allows each fragmented gesture to suggest a less graspable sound which thus becomes background johnson does not mention temporal inflection as a shaping force in the perception of form but otherwise his comments serve as a reminder of the manuscript sources and the composer s successive attempts to fix details of tempo dynamics and tone color once more however the pervasive effects of surface fragmentation are made to coalesce on account six wedge structures in five different transpositions correspond notably to the bar structure successive wedge structures occupy and in fact op no develops the treatment of sequencing and vertical density found at the opening of both the third and fifth bagatelles wherein components of two or more dyads heard simultaneously are either preceded or succeeded by their dyadic completions stated successively sequencing for all six wedge structures is summarized graphically in fig in the first wedge formation dyad sounds and are heard successively followed by their respective completions realized simultaneously finally components of the remaining dyads sound simultaneously followed by their successive completions in the second wedge structure the vertical density increases to four notes giving rise to a telescoped intrinsic order presentation the third wedge structure reverts to conventional nesting which reflects the intrinsic symmetry of the wedge fourth wedge structure combines both this structure marks the high point of the bagatelle and pp suddenly give way to and ff sul ponticello tremolos and the only semiquaver figure in the movement the degree of rhetorical emphasis is reflected in the extent to which both sequencing and registration become convoluted at this this wedge structure together with that which follows are the only two passages to involve all twelve tones throughout op they also represent extremes of dynamic intensity the sudden storm in bar dies away as suddenly as it sprang up after which comes the most reposeful and lyrical moment to be found in this concluding bagatelle webern in fact employs the same wedge transposition in both cases so the contrast is unified at one level the impression of resolution is likewise reflected in the sequencing now made far more diaphanous at the beginning and end of the structure respectively while dyads and are nested and dyad is played together with a single component of dyad before entering into detailed discussion of the concluding wedge structure the site of webern s wholesale revision i should like to pause momentarily to address a complementary process at work in this bagatelle namely the by a fracturing of the unitary symmetry maintained up to that point this proliferation conceptually similar to yet more complex than the dual axes found in op no is one of the defining characteristics of op no and serves to explain the seven contiguous pitch class repetitions to which a unique dyadic relation cannot be ascribed three of these involve upper trill notes the others and in bar and in bar regina busch considers the ways in which these pitch class repetitions have been perceived by several analysts as anomalous to webern s style before concluding that while octaves can no longer be taken for granted is an inadequate observation that they can no longer occur is going too far yet if the notion of repetition is defined in relation to a given wedge structure then these an integral part of a process fig webern op no sequencing and verticalities bars bars bars bar analogous to refraction which can be seen to culminate in the simultaneous octave eos in the final bar exs and respectively summarize the first second and fifth wedge fig continued bars drei stucke no bars bars occurs an octave lower than absolute registral symmetry would permit and an octave and a half below the lowest note heard to this point this fracturing of the symmetry is emphasized by the articulation which webern employs furthermore the consequent registral gap is compensated for by a balancing expansion upwards thus the of the remaining dyad by involves a transposition one octave higher than full registral symmetry would allow this tendency continues over the course of the second wedge structure woven around the straightforward intrinsic order sequencing shown in fig is a more involved registral procedure as ex shows the with the first wedge structure define two axes of symmetry ex webern op no bars ex webern op no bars ex webern op no bars form refracted dyads either with axis or sound one octave lower admittedly this account seems somewhat convoluted all the same the procedure can be charted clearly throughout the remainder of the piece intensifying up to and including the dynamic high point of the bagatelle in bar before dropping out almost entirely over the final two wedge structures thus in the third wedge structure dyads and are registrally nested as are dyads and an octave lower while dyads and are displaced above and below respectively in the fourth structure the dramatic high point only two dyads are nested with the remaining four being displaced by varying degrees ex shows how in the fifth structure dyads and are nested while and are stacked the stacking of dyads to is in addition almost symmetrical the correct is displaced downwards by an octave exploiting the cello s open fourth string in order to mark the end of the refraction process just as the first violin s was employed in bar to point up the start of it in the final wedge structure registral nesting is almost complete only one pitch class is displaced the of dyad bar ex illustrates the ending of the earlier version in short score together with analysis of registration and ex webern drei stucke no bars sequencing in terms of wedge structures it should be noted that one bar is unavoidably missing between bar and the beginning of the in addition i
attributable to underlying group differences in religious commitment and general epistemological sophistication third howare variations in epistemological belief across ages schools and controversies related to educational practices at religious and general schools respectively method participants general pupils were matched to religious pupils by gender and grade all schools were located in middle class predominantly jewish neighborhoods the public school system in israel includes a hebrew sector serving the majority jewish population and an arabic sector serving the minority moslem christian and druze populations the hebrew sector is further subdivided into two main streams general schools are nominally secular provide no instruction and are targeted at the majority nonreligious and traditional segments of the jewish israeli population religious schools are targeted specifically at the religious zionist or modern orthodox community which constitutes approximately israel s jewish population religious schools combine the subjects taught at general schools with an extensive religious pupils from religious schools thus differ from pupils at general schools with respect to both their family religious backgrounds and their exposure to organized religious instruction participants were divided into three age groups with mean ages as follows graders graders and graders individual semi structured interviews using a combination of direct and indirect questioning the interview protocol was similar to that used by kuhn and king and kitchener however the wording of prompts was more open ended and participants epistemological beliefs were diagnosed on the basis of their overall patterns of response over the course of the interview rather than on the basis of their responses to one or two specific questions in particular attention paid not only to participants explicit statements about such things as expertise and certainty but also to the epistemological assumptions implicit in the strategies they employed in practice to defend attack and evaluate the claims under consideration participants were presented with two scenarios in which two people holding opposing views are engaged in an argument in one scenario the topic under discussion in the other it is whether children should be punished when they misbehave after being presented with the scenario participants were asked which of the opposing points of view they most agreed with and why they were then asked how they would attempt to persuade someone holding a point of view opposed to their own what counter arguments such a person might present against their own point of view and how they would rebut these counter arguments persuasive strategies counter arguments and rebuttals they were prompted to reflect on the epistemological status of claims they had made or mentioned in addition many participants expressed implicit epistemological assumptions in their choices of argumentative strategies complemented with more direct questioning over the course of the interview these latter direct questions focused on the certainty and provability of the knowledge claims under consideration interviews lasted between and min and presentation of the controversies was counterbalanced to control for any sequence effect structural similarity to the god controversy in three key respects it is an ill structured problem that can be framed as a choice between two opposed beliefs which participants may endorse or reject with varying degrees of intensity it is a controversy that children and adolescents are familiar with and that they feel able to argue about without any specialized knowledge and it is a controversy justified on either empirical or nonempirical grounds it is important to emphasize however that any two topics will differ from each other in a variety of idiosyncratic ways and that undoubtedly the god and punishment controversies differ from each other in more ways than that one is about a religious question and the other about a nonreligious question one should bear in mind therefore that the aim of cross topic comparisons in this study is not to prove that in general from their nonreligious thinking rather it is to provide a control measure against which to evaluate group differences in epistemological beliefs about the nature of religious claims questionnaire immediately after the interview each participant completed or her religious background all items were adapted from instruments used in previous studies of the religious beliefs values and practices of israeli jews coding and reliability interviews were audiotaped and transcribed verbatim coding categories were derived age and background of the interviewees removed and copies distributed to a pair of coders each coder was required to analyze the transcripts independently and devise a set of categories sufficient to account for the epistemological beliefs contained therein after completing their initial coding the coders met to compare categories and construct a coding scheme on which they could both agree each then employed this new coding scheme to code independently a new set of randomly selected transcripts they then met again to compare their results and further refine the coding scheme after a third iteration with an selected transcripts the coding scheme was tested formally for intercoder reliability this iterative inductive procedure was employed to address difficulties experienced in initial attempts to code the interview data using categories employed in previous studies of epistemic development these studies tend to characterize middle a period during which individuals begin the move from objectivism to subjectivism it was expected therefore that the responses of participants in this study would be classifiable using some such categories of epistemological belief this expectation was not met the epistemological beliefs that participants expressed at different points in the interview were surprisingly eclectic participants combined apparently objectivist responses to some questions evaluativist responses to others moreover this eclecticism was not attributable to any particular subset of interview questions but was a general feature of responses to all of the epistemological questions included in the interview consider for example the following excerpt from an interview with yoni a grade boy at a religious school yoni no one can prove that there is a god and no one can prove that there is nt there s no way to prove it because it s always possible to provide an alternative explanation even if there were some voice that you could nt explain then perhaps it s the messiah
figure for a two holes surface we have created the correct oriented topological contour the difficulty is to create a coherent contour which represents the correct topology of the target surface because this contour will lead the initial control problem we have chosen to start the topological contour from control point that therefore becomes then becomes and becomes and then a question occurs does the topological contour have to continue on or even if this question seems trivial for a plane object it becomes when we walk along it the triangulated surface remains on the same side hence our solutions are the following first we consider the limit positions of and and we project them on the patch boundaries thus we obtain we extract a triangle from the previous path this is a triangle adjacent to the boundary polyline linking limit positions of and we then extract triangles edges as impassable from to and by applying the dijkstra algorithm on triangles of the target patch the shortest path gives us the correct control point to integrate on the topological contour is quite simple we consider the potential edge associated with the smallest score sc and we cut the contour along this edge creating two sub contours this algorithm is repeated recursively on sub contours until it remains only plane contours then for each plane contour we check its convexity if it is convex we create a hertel and mehlhorn by assembling created facets we obtain our initial polyhedron of which limit surface represents in most case a quite good approximation of the original surface patch this algorithm for topology reconstruction and subdivision surface initialization is simple but gives quite good results even on coarse anisotropic triangulations whose first two vectors fd of the squared distance of a point at to the surface is given by where and are the coordinates of with respect to the frame and is the curvature radius at corresponding to the curvature direction the minimization of this point to surface distance thus our algorithm is the following the curvature is calculated for each vertex of the target surface several sample points sk are chosen on the subdivision surface they correspond to vertices of the subdivided polyhedron at a finer level the associated footpoints sample points sk can be computed as linear combinations of the initial control points matrices associated with our subdivision rules for all sk local quadratic approximants of the squared distances to the target surface are expressed according to the frame at the corresponding footpoints the minimization of their sum gives the new positions of the control points or until the approximation error reaches a queried value the approximation error is defined as the mean euclidian distance between the sample points sk on the subdivision surface and their respective footpoints on the target surface concerning the choice of the number of sample points sk we have chosen refinements for all examples in this about sixteen times the number of unknowns that ensures a stable solution when solving equation in the least squares sense enrichment and connectivity optimization in this section we present how to modify the connectivity of our control polyhedron we have two mechanisms to consider an enrichment of the mesh consisting in the addition of newcontrol points and an optimization of the connectivity is the better possible regarding the resulting error this mechanism is quite complex to implement therefore since the connectivity has been optimized by adapting to the target surface anisotropy in the initialization step we will just try to limit its departure hence we have integrated these two mechanisms into a single algorithm which considers the error distribution the first step of this algorithm is the principal error field extraction the goal is to extract not only the maximum error point but also an area corresponding to the error field in order to be able to analyze the error distribution for this purpose we consider sample points sk on the subdivision surface and associated distances dk to the corresponding projections on the target we extract and add to our error set the sample point corresponding to the maximum error dmax and every sample points corresponding to a similar error and connected to another point of the error point set this extraction is shown for a case in figure once we have the principal error field we study its dispersion to modify the control mesh we distinguish two a local error hence if several control faces fk are concerned by the error field it means that the topology in this region is not correct hence we merge these faces and then add a point in the resulting face and connect it with its neighbors the position of this new point is the barycenter of its neighbors figure in red corresponding faces have been merged before adding a new control point the error field is diffuse hence there is no precise error center the error field corresponds rather to a lack of degrees of freedom thus every concerned face fk is enriched a point is added at the center and connected to its neighbors if two faces are adjacent we also cut this mechanism also concerns cases were there exist one principal error but the error field already contains a control point this means that the control point does not bring enough freedom to model the target surface hence we enrich every face of the field we detect these two cases simply by considering the percentage thus the error set is considered as a gaussian like distribution associated with a local error otherwise the error set is considered as a plateau like distribution this quite simple algorithm has given satisfying results in our experiments whole optimization algorithm our algorithm for the optimization of local subdivision surfaces a threshold value toward the target surface by minimizing a sum of quadratic distances then in order to limit the number of iterations for the geometry
what were the most relevant features of the tourism sector before obtaining the eu candidate status were there any changes shifts in the tourism development strategy that took place during the pre accession period and as a result of the changes that the eu membership imply and providing there were shifts in the tourism development strategy have malta tourism development on is characterized by a classical development cycle namely following modest results in the initiation phase and gradual growth in the ties during which tourism had not been treated as a particularly important sector for the national economy the ties and ties have been marked by dynamic growth in tourist arrivals and overnights this growth has been associated mostly with mass attendance high seasonality orientation on product sun and sea and competing through low finally the phase of dynamic growth rates with all attributes of low quality mass tourism switched places with stagnation and decreasing interest for malta as a tourist destination as a conclusion it can be stated that the tourism sector development in malta prior to obtaining the eu candidate status had been characterized by the following features dependance on only the sun and sea pronounced dominance of big international tour operators on the demand side low prices as means of a competing strategy dynamic growth of accommodation capacity undeveloped value chain at the destination level low service quality the malta tourism authority a special state institution has been established its aim was to repostition the maltese tourism on the international market and to make is more internationally competitive further in view of the ever increasing attacks on the scarce primary space in which the newly built holiday homes had swallowed more space than hotels and other commercial ecological aspects and sustainable tourism key building blocks of the new development strategy the new strategy of the tourism sector relied heavily on active participation of all the key stakeholders finally with the intent to permanently depart from the image of a cheap summer particularly on protection of the primary tourist space from uncontrolled construction quality fewer number of visitors higher propensity to consume new product development new vision of the tourism sector new positioning and new image of malta as a tourist destination new approach to destination marketing eu accession process showed very encouraging results namely despite of the gradual decline in the overall number of international tourist arrivals overnights growth rate and on some occasions even in their decline in absolute terms tourism receipts have been growing steadily as opposed to the period during which the number of international visitors grew at a rate of annum with million international arrivals in year the was characterized by a growth rate of only annum with million international arrivals in year also the number of international overnights in year did not differ by much in comparison to year further total number of beds in hotels and similar establishments in year declined in comparison to year the same being the case in achieved occupancy however the shift is reflected in tourism receipts department namely in comparison to the period in which total tourism receipts stagnated at a yearly level of around million usd in year maltese tourism receipts exceeded million usd in other words during the period despite the stagnation in international tourism arrivals and overnights and regardless of the decline in available commercial tourism receipts grew on average at a rate of annum following the division of cyprus into two entities in year as opposed to the turkish part of the island which became relatively isolated for international tourism the demand for the greek part of the island intensified dramatically mostly due to global changes in international demand trends as a result of such movements tourism receipts amounted to billion usd year moreover more than local population had been directly employed in the hotel however such uncontrolled tourism development dictated predominantly by international demand resulted in a situation very much similar to the maltesian one in the late ties namely more than the tourism in the greek part of the island had been controlled by a single tour operator whereas the traditional sun and sea product became by the problem of accommodation capacity over construction which translated into declining average daily growing dissatisfaction with such unfavorable trends nevertheless initiated awareness in the local community about the social cost of uncontrolled tourism expansion among the most pronounced problems one should mention in particular the following commercial and residential property shortages of potable water in the peak summer season traffic congestion and noise due to the above stated problems and related loss of image in the eyes of the international market the number of international tourist arrivals to cyprus from year onwards started to decline year after year namely in year registered tourist arrivals were than in year in year as compared to whereas in year than in year this negative trend has been finally stopped in year simultaneously with the process of legal harmonization in the eu preaccession phase and with intention to put an end to negative trends in international tourist arrivals and receipts the cyprus tourism organization in line with the eu legislative framework started to implement much stricter ecological standards and the cto formulated a new tourism development strategy based on maximum adherence to and implementation of the sustainable development principles market repositioning product diversification and product development as well as a switch in the tourism image of cyprus the new strategic document targeted an increase in tourist arrivals at an average rate od annum with the intention to double tourist receipts by year such ambitious development goals should be accomplished by means of development of a new generation of accommodation units in which small cosy and individualized accommodation would prevail accommodation capacity in hotels and similar establishments in the period in comparison to the period does not differ by much it should be stressed that the growth had been rapidly deteriorating in the last years of the period this largely
of poverty generally speaking the process of neo liberal globalization has become a reference point for a definition of the group s identity in many cases the identity of radical unions as well as solidarity organizations has been modelled in opposition to neo acts of war the nets in the movement mobilization in the campaigns on issues like the flexibilization of labor and the opposition to war was facilitated by both individual and organizational networks which we will address separately the individual level overlapping memberships the global justice movement mobilized activists endowed with initiatives support this observation the table shows participation in the movements of members of various organizations from social centers to religious groups from ecologists to unions from feminists to political parties our interviews testify to the awareness among the representatives of social movement organizations of the overlapping memberships of their rank and file activists and represents an important precondition to the emergence of the movement multiple membership is mentioned in the case of cobas school which activists from the social centers joined at the end of the as one representative of cobas remembers it is not the school union that pushes but some of the cobas in the health sector or areas that were formed in the social centers and that refer to the cobas concerning labor that convince the militant or activist the former cobas school the movement intervenes in these processes already through actions that affect hybridization between trade unionists and actors with the experiences in other types of social conflict according to the cobas representative it is through these interactions that a more general political awareness developed beyond your job in your working field you must face the great transformations of society i do not believe that the cobas have changed objectives with their proper working fields but they have been influenced by some elements some social actors not strictly related to labor refer to the cobas not because they are teachers workers etc but precisely for their political position the cobas are not just the cobas school or the cobas healthcare or something else but they are the cobas that organize demonstrations against the war the cobas that are involved in the processes not only do non workers join trade union associations but the latter also discover the multiple memberships of their activists overlapping membership was mentioned by the sin cobas representative who during a critical mass demonstration by noticed the unexpected presence of people from his same organization similarly the cisl interviewee talks about the membership in voluntary associations of cisl supporters in the cisl in milan and we found out that of members at least are active in voluntary associations for such activities they do not refer to the cisl but rather to associations with more visibility like emergency arci acli etc and that from seattle on have developed greater sensitivity and initiative on globalization issues one of the reasons why we thought let s start acting directly is because we understood that absolute values are part of associations in which these activities these good practices are developed the organizational level networks of organizations during these waves of protest the effect of individual overlapping memberships is increased by organizational dynamics in particular in this movement of movements we noticed a large number of organizations of organizations of activists social movement organizations are frequently embedded in various networks coordinations that cover a plurality of topics action strategies organizational modalities and methods of decision making a content analysis carried out in the course of the demos project on the founding documents of organizations active in the gjm in france germany great britain italy spain switzerland and at the transnational level has indicated a high presence of network organizations about half of the sampled cases are single organizations while the other half are either networks federations or ad hoc umbrella organizations almost half of the groups allow for collective membership in addition as many as per cent of the organizations mention collaboration networking with national organizations and about the same percentage with transnational organizations in their founding documents also significantly among those who mention this information about one third point to the relevance of collaboration with groups working on other issues than their own core ones table organizational affiliations of participants in transnational protest events table networking in gjm organizations the movement activists see these networks as deliberative spaces where different groups converge this is the case especially relevant for the solidarity area of the tavola della that brings together on the basis of opposition to the war and in support of non violent conflict resolution traditional labor organizations and solidarity associations the round table perceives itself as an original space for the meeting of associations voluntary services and local agencies that fully respect their different roles with the purpose of developing the ability of the different the civil society to act in the network by emphasizing their sensitivity competences and as mentioned previously the european marches against unemployment worked in a similar way in the area of labor issues as the sin cobas representative stated participation in transnational events like the euromarches enabled us to have contacts with other social movements not only trade unions there was also that afterwards founded the disobedients you need to go out of the workplace and therefore take into account also the transnational dimension and in this perspective the european one was the most immediate that was being constructed the construction of organizations of organizations continued throughout the protest of the local social forums also helped the development of other networks born from the ashes of the milan social forum the formation of the pact for peace is so described by the arci representative we wrote a manifesto called globalizing rights focused on the issues addressed in porto alegre war the environment the economy etc it was meant to build relations between networks able to produce a more meaningful cisl and subsequently the cgil which did not participate
still a bit higher than average rates in summary the review of the empirical research on ptsd demonstrates that a small proportion of those who are exposed to potentially traumatic life events develop psychological symptoms the rates in the general population for developing ptsd after exposure to a potentially stressful event are between people of color experienced rates beyond the to stressful events veterans of color had rates twice to three times the average for whites which was not explained by exposure to combat studies of the general population showed similar patterns in that people of color often had higher rates of ptsd than the average individual in a recent review of research that involved some disaster victims differences that people of color had an elevated risk for ptsd and that explanations offered by scholars were not complete regarding people of color and their high rates of ptsd compared with whites norris friedman watson et al stated the following their historical marginalization may have affected their psychological functioning in ways that were not captured well by measures collected at important aspects of people of color s experiences are not assessed in the majority of studies they implicated racism as a possible and plausible factor in the higher rates of ptsd for people of color in the general and veteran population studies although there does appear to be evidence establishing a relation between stressful life events and psychological distress critics have argued that stressful influence the validity of some of the findings criticism has included a concern for a lack of clear definitions of a stressful life event as well as lack of clarity regarding the impact of chronic versus singular stressful events critics identify the role of memory recall and the self report nature of most of the life event inventories as particularly problematic areas of ptsd research the stated concerns notwithstanding there is connects life events and trauma exposure to various forms of psychological distress for whites and people of color although the use of strict ptsd criteria to recognize and assess race based traumatic stress is not adequate the studies do suggest that it is reasonable to argue that race related experience can and do contribute to the development of stress increased attention in the psychological literature is the impact of discrimination and race related stress on mental health an examination of the role of racial group membership as direct evidence of racism s mental health and health the effects is warranted before a more complete understanding of the psychological impact of racism can be achieved event exposure and suggested that the high rates of ptsd for people of color might be associated with racism and race related experiences but ptsd and life event researchers did not consider racism directly as a factor in traumatic reactions scholars and researchers have studied the health and mental health the effects of discrimination and race related stress on racial groups and this body of research offers direct evidence of the effects of discrimination cases this research suggests that the effects experienced by targets approach the symptoms described by traumatic stress researchers such as carlson scholars have called for an examination of stress and its impacts on racial groups and have argued that being a member of certain oppressed and stigmatized groups could be a type of stress that has been ignored in social science theory and research slavin et al and smith have observed that racial and minority statuses are sources of stress clark et al presented a psychophysiological model of racism as a stressor they argued that environmental stimuli rooted in either personal or structural aspects of racism exert a deleterious effect on opportunities and access for blacks or people of color these stimuli act as stressors and any social barrier can produce reactions trace that could establish a recurring recall of race related experiences moreover these scholars argued that while the stress process associated with racism is influenced by contextual factors such as socioeconomic status and individual psychological makeup it ultimately influences physical and mental health negatively the science and social science literature researchers have investigated the frequency of discrimination and have studied the psychological physical and emotional effects in experiments naturalistic settings and survey research various studies conducted with racially diverse samples have found that the incidence and frequency of racial discrimination tend to be high for people of color and that exposure to such incidents of racism is associated with lower levels of physical and psychological well being these studies have indicated that lower levels of physical health can be a contributing factor in psychological distress and stress reactions as high blood pressure risk for heart disease and increased vulnerability to a variety of negative health outcomes that can contribute to greater psychological and emotional distress with regards to physiological reactions to racism a review of the experimental literature revealed that direct encounters with discriminatory events contribute to negative health outcomes harrell et al found individual acts of racism change physiological functioning moreover physiological investigators have found that anxiety and worry are often immediate reactions to racism that prompt people to rehearse defensive and aggressive responses as ways to cope and adapt women who delivered preterm or low birth weight infants they found women reporting higher levels of racial discrimination were almost five times more likely than women reporting no racial discrimination to deliver low birth weight infants and that black women exposed to discrimination were more likely to deliver very lbw infants when compared with white and black women who did not deliver lbw children concluded that lifetime exposure to interpersonal discrimination is explicitly included as a chronic stressor another outcome of biology physical appearance and skin color or one s phenotype is that it also serves as a marker for racial group membership people who are darker in skin color are seen as members of denigrated racial groups and as such may be exposed to greater levels of racism than found that dark skinned black
of decorated serving dishes during the conchas phase the range of rim diameters of decorated serving dishes varied between village and elite middens the size of decorated serving rim diameters from elite conchas contexts show a clear bimodal distribution approximately half of the serving vessels from elite middens are smaller than cm and the other half are larger a third size range could be designated for vessels from this assemblage that are larger than cm but relatively few vessels are included in this size range that measured cm in diameter as mentioned above the presence of larger vessels for serving larger groups of people corresponds to the pattern described ethnographically for feasting assemblages this difference in the distribution of decorated dish sizes provides another measure that documents serving to cooking vessels fig size of decorated and undecorated tecomates fig proportion of serving dishes the sawtoothed pattern evident in fig is not the result of a measurement bias but is a real pattern that i have documented in the conchas phase assemblage at san mart as well such standardized vessel sizes approximately cm difference may have a functional purpose related to the volume of vessel contents alternatively other and this may have facilitated transport such possibilities will be explored in a future study summary the jocotal to conchas phase transition does not indicate significant changes in patterns of food presentation from village midden contexts there were similar proportions of serving to cooking vessels similar differences in the average size between slipped and dishes deposited in conchas village middens than during the preceding jocotal phase so while serving practices remained the same the elite may have been able to monopolize them to a degree not previously known differences between artifact assemblages from conchas phase village and elite middens are distinct and consistent with the expectations of more slipped tecomates were considerably smaller there were a higher proportion of decorated serving dishes and these dishes were made according to distinct size classes these lines of evidence are quite suggestive on their own but the distinct nature of elite activities is further supported by a lower level of domestic activity in the middens south of mound as documented in and the elite midden south of mound food consumption food preparation tools reflect production food presentation vessels reveal distribution patterns and the remains of the foods actually eaten document consumption patterns isotope evidence indicates that maize was being consumed in higher proportions during the this period prevent us from exploring intra site variability in diet based on isotope signatures of human remains below i evaluate differential consumption of meat between elite and non elite contexts at cuauhtemoc based on faunal remains results the mammalian remains from conchas phase contexts at cuauhtemoc were deer and dog however in contrast to remains from village middens where these animals contributed roughly equivalent proportions over of the mni from elite conchas phase contexts were from dog remains compared to under deer of course even with a lower is that in relative terms considerably more dog was being deposited in elite midden contexts than in village midden contexts during the conchas phase this is true when measured as the relative proportion of mni as documented in fig and also when dog remains mni or nisp are standardized by excavated volume further the these contexts were more broken up than dog remains from village middens higher nisp in relation to mni might be expected if dog was being slaughtered at feasts in elite contexts and being deposited more quickly that in other contexts at cuauhtemoc fig relative proportion of classes of mammal remains from village midden and the elite midden south of mound table these patterns must be approached with some caution however faunal data from la blanca are similar in regard to the higher proportion of dog versus deer of the total vertebrate mni of reported from la blanca were dog and were deer the la blanca faunal assemblage is from three of the largest house la blanca for comparison but new work currently underway by michael love should remedy this dogs were an extremely important source of food across mesoamerica during the formative period after documenting that dog remains were the most abundant terrestrial species present at four sites on the gulf coast wing proposed dogs have been documented as a feasting delicacy in other areas of the world as well the cuauhtemoc data document that during the conchas phase there was a higher proportion of dog remains recovered from elite trash than from village as a controlled and intensifiable species dog populations could have been raised and eaten at feasts sponsored by village elites summary the collapse of mazat political centers centers of power during the cuadros and jocotal phases however these sites were located within a few hours walk of each other what transpired with the jocotal to conchas transition was different the mazat region was abandoned and the la blanca polity emerged at the opposite end of the fertile land between the two large soconusco swamps changes such changes include a narrowing of mammals exploited with a focus mostly on dog and deer as well as a reliance on maize as a staple crop for the first time an overall increase in the use of ground stone as well as the fact that mortars and pestles were significantly replaced by manos and metates indicates an increase in grinding activities however same as from the earlier jocotal phase the proportion of plain tecomates and the proportion of serving to cooking vessels was also the same in village middens during the jocotal and conchas phases cuauhtemoc was occupied as a local center for many centuries prior to the establishment of the la blanca polity in this paper i have presented artifact associated with the ground stone tools that were being used to process increasing quantities of maize however comparisons between village and elite middens at cuauhtemoc demonstrate distinctive patterns during the conchas phase
the american experience i have referred to several realities as being hidden because few people seem to be aware of important concepts from modern physics living according to the classical order is at least in a conceptual sense living an illusion quantum theory modern physics and other areas is that they add objectivity to the general acknowledgment that native peoples had already arrived at the same or similar conclusions without the tools of conventional science i am not motivated by a perceived need to prove anything in order to support native beliefs rather it is the honorable thing to do in view of widespread attitudes and ignorance a traditional indian person trained in science one must enter into the other s conceptual world in order to interpret things differently i personally see several evidences that connect with indigenous metaphysics but to a non indian scientist i expect that what i see needs to be pointed out in my own mind physics is not limited to the material universe for i contemplate insights having read the work of physicists like einstein and bohm and learned about heisenberg schrodinger planck de broglie bohr and others i perceive that their discoveries involved a certain amount of instinct and inspiration not just scientific method along with their intellectual abilities the facts they uncovered are relevant to indian thought for they prompt questions about the validity of experience consciousness reality time and space the enfolding and of energy and matter and its relationship to the seen and unseen world the relationship of energy to spirit and so on the invisible transformations that are constantly occurring at the quantum level of reality surely need to be pondered for whatever they imply in my opinion not only facts but also philosophical questions raised are of reality are unavoidable in quantum theory but i have also concluded after extensive reading and personal interactions that physicists make up their own minds they perceive the same realities differently the same information can lead one physicist in a spiritual path and another in the opposite direction one such physicist at the cutting edge of research on quantum gravity is lee smolin who writes this is not to exclude religion or mysticism for these sources of inspiration for those who seek them but if we wish to understand what the universe is and how it came to be that way we need to seek answers to questions about the things we see when we look around us his point is that because the universe is by definition a closed system one cannot explain things in it by looking outside for outside does not exist obviously he does not see what indians are able to see inside the the western approach to the mysterious is to look outside because supernatural means outside of nature which is separate from spirit even bohm who proposed a fully substantiated alternative approach to quantum theory that removes the paradoxes in the conventional interpretation and which corresponds closely with indigenous traditions moved physics into the indian circle of reality and probably did not realize it so we must not assume that spiritual insight stems brilliance just as people need listening ears to hear they need eyes to perceive the spirit discoveries are often the result of inspiration or something related to it max planck s discovery of the quantum in the year was a stroke of luck so to speak it was already known that the radiation emitted by an object is related to its temperature in taking the quantum leap physicist fred wolfe writes planck was astonished to find that matter absorbed heat emitted light energy discontinuously until the light from heated bodies could not be explained using the mechanical and continuous theory of light that theory wrongly predicted that a hot poker would give off its electromagnetic energy at frequencies beyond the ultraviolet range planck s discovery about the lumps of energy that is quanta was completely unexpected a lucky guess his crackpot idea had no a mechanical universe it related the energy given to the wave by the oscillating material to the frequency of that wave this meant that light waves do not behave like mechanical waves it meant that this very small constant and therefore the quantum world is incredibly small the discovery also meant that fractional quanta of energy are not possible energy has to be emitted in whole packets theory applies to the physics of the large quantum theory deals with the physics of the small and reveals even stranger phenomena wholeness for this concept bohm s work is particularly relevant and important because of the voluminous and comprehensive record he left in support of the concept that he calls objective wholeness which he says characterizes the entire universe not just the small quantum world wholeness arises from quantum theory and relativity in at least four different possess absolutely definable boundaries and consist of individual parts that exist independently of each other at the quantum level atoms can change from one state to another without passing through intermediate states implying that motion is indivisible particles can encounter each other in such a way as to always remain linked to each other regardless of where they may appear later in the universe implying nonlocal connectedness level the observer affects the observed so that both form a single system implying an intimate relationship between the scientist and the events being studied intuitively speaking several aspects of wholeness come to mind wholeness implies connectedness and relatedness something that is whole is undivided as opposed to being fragmented to illustrate this bohm gave the example of a functioning watch which i will paraphrase and somewhat embellish if the watch is taken apart piece by piece it can be put back together because each component connects precisely to its connecting neighbor the watch will work again as a unity however if it is shattered with a hammer the result will be a pile of disconnected and
in studies examining ambiguity resolution investigating the processing of ambiguous relative clauses in greek papadopoulou and clahsen for example found that in the absence of relevant lexical from different backgrounds consistently failed to show any disambiguation preferences at all even though greek nss ambiguity resolution preferences were the same as those attested in the participants similar results were obtained by felser et al for english by way of providing a unified account of these findings clahsen and felser suggested that learners typically perform partial or representations that lack deep hierarchical structure and abstract elements of phrase structure such as movement traces the concept of shallow parsing is familiar from computational approaches to language processing and refers to the task of recovering only a limited amount of syntactic structure from natural language sentences according to hammerton et al shallow parsing typically involves input string into meaningful chunks and determining what relations these chunks bear to the main verb depending on comprehension goals or task demands assigning a full hierarchical representation to an input string may often be unnecessary there is evidence from processing studies suggesting that native speakers sometimes rely on lexically or meaning based comprehension heuristics that are just good enough for the purpose at hand sentences that express highly implausible propositions for example such as the passive sentence the dog was bitten by the man are frequently misinterpreted by adult nss suggesting that interfering pragmatic information may override the parser s syntactic analysis or even prevent it from being carried out in full evidence from strongly plausible predicate argument combinations may lead the parser to pursue an incorrect syntactic analysis and native speakers misinterpretations of certain types of garden path sentence indicate that thematic roles once assigned tend to persist these observations are in line with processing models that assume that comprehension normally involves analyses and indicate that highly plausible and or strong canonical meaning or form patterns may sometimes block correct syntax derived interpretations according to the shallow structure hypothesis for processing late learners differ from native speakers in that they are largely restricted to shallow parsing while learners to carry out full syntactic analyses in real time to be reflected for example in non native like processing of unbounded dependencies learners apparent failure to postulate syntactic gaps observed in both marinis et al s and the current study confirm this prediction and indicate that learners do not recover complete configurational structures from the input one possible reason so may be that their grammatical knowledge is of a form that makes it unsuitable for use in real time parsing that is it may be explicit rather than implicit knowledge as a result learners may be forced to rely on lexical and pragmatic information to a larger extent than nss in comprehension learners sensitivity to argument structure thematic and plausibility information during sentence processing is well juffs and harrington frenck mestre and pynte juffs williams et al felser et al papadopoulou and clahsen felser and roberts and may help compensate for their reduced ability to parse the input in a native like way alternatively it is conceivable that learners resort to shallow processing because they lack sufficient wm resources to carry out full syntactic this question was not addressed in marinis et al s study and few published studies exist that have examined the possible influence of wm differences on sentence processing although juffs found some indication that digit span but not reading span affected learners processing of temporarily ambiguous sentences in the juffs did not find any reliable influence of either of these fit with our observation that reading span did not affect the participants performance in the cross modal priming task either antecedent priming in native speakers on the other hand has been found to be influenced by individual wm differences while the results from roberts et al s low span group are difficult to interpret the results from the high span nss provide evidence for structurally determined differed from both the high span and the low span nss patterns the learners shorter rts to identical pictures at both test points suggests that they were able to keep the filler active in short term memory but without reactivating it at the gap site independently of individual wm capacity as measured by harrington and sawyer s reading span test syntactic gaps during the processing of long distance wh dependencies our results support the hypothesis that the representations constructed during processing lack such abstract grammatical ingredients as movement traces contrary to nss advanced greek speaking learners showed evidence of maintained activation but not of structurally determined antecedent reactivation the lack of any interactions with traces during real time processing cannot be attributed to a shortage of wm resources in both marinis et al s and in the current study the learners had no obvious difficulty understanding complex sentences of the types under investigation however we argued that this observation can be accounted for by assuming that learners are able to compensate for their relatively shallower grammatical analyses of the cues to interpretation reference and attitude in infant pointing ulf liszkowski malinda carpenter and michael tomasello max planck institute for evolutionary anthropology department of developmental and comparative psychology leipzig germany abstract we investigated two main components of infant declarative pointing of these infants by attending to an incorrect referent infants repeated pointing within trials to redirect s attention showing an understanding of s reference and active message repair in contrast when identified infants referent correctly but displayed a disinterested attitude infants did not repeat pointing within trials and pointed overall in fewer trials showing an when attended to infants intended referent and shared interest in it infants were most satisfied showing no message repair within trials and pointing overall in more trials these results suggest that by twelve months of age infant declarative pointing is a full communicative act aimed at sharing with others both attention to a referent and a specific attitude about that referent objects one reason they
founded in and encompasses southeast asia saarc founded in includes the states of south asia and apec founded in includes east asia and of asian international institutions apec is also seen as weakly institutionalized but moderately effective saarc does not have a reputation as very effective in reducing conflict however bearce has shown that even apparently ineffective and it does appear that asean membership reduces the likelihood of militarized conflict in both asean includes dyads for indonesia malaysia singapore the philippines thailand brunei vietnam laos myanmar and cambodia australia brunei canada indonesia japan republic of korea malaysia new zealand the philippines singapore thailand united states people s republic of china taiwan mexico papua new guinea chile peru russian federation and in these multivariate tests there is no statistically reliable effect on fatal disputes and the coefficient is positive for the later period taking a closer look there is some bivariate evidence that ietnam thailand myanmar thailand of dyad years while there were conflict years among the relevant southeast asian states before they joined the organization there can be no doubt that this is a significant bivariate difference even if the multivariate results on such rare events remain inconclusive while others have disputed this characterization arguing that asian institutions are different but moderately effective the results here may help clarify this debate while it does not seem that the institutional gruel is much thinner in asia it does impact on conflict but others apparently ineffective or even counterproductive democracy there are asian states in the data that are fully fledged democracies for at least one year these include countries with relatively brief periods as democracies such as bangladesh fully democratic dyad years in asia of the jointly democratic dyads have enjoyed at least ten years of joint democracy among these are for example japan philippines india pakistan india myanmar india sri lanka india malaysia and australia papua new guinea equal democratic dyads should still be significantly associated with reduced conflict however there is not much evidence that this is so in asia as was true for igos this kantian variable asia and joint democracy the coefficients for the lower democracy asia variable at each level of conflict are positive and of nearly equal magnitude to the baseline negative effect of lower democracy they also do approach conventional levels of statistical significance implying that the substantive pacific effect of joint democracy terms are insignificant and inconsistent in the earlier period and positive and the effect on fatal conflict is indeed negative but very small and statistically invisible however this masks a pattern of a negative influence on fatal conflict and war until and then a positive it appears that joint democracy makes war between asian states significantly more likely in the period while significant effects on such rare events as wars need to be interpreted with caution of the dyad years of war in this period in asia seven are accounted for by the india pakistan conflict but it falls dramatically to a polity rating of in it is important to note that general musharraf s coup ousting the elected sharif government a strong argument can be made that this conflict up to and including the kargil crisis might be coded as a war between two democracies while the significant effect is driven by a single dyad s conflict it is not obvious that this conflict is anomalous or miscoded and it is certainly an important issue in asian security as that for igos but still small compared to other variables thus it is not obviously it is not the simple pacific effect that liberal theorists would expect the relatively weak evidence that does exist points to an inconsistent effect and one that could be dangerous asian democracies free from cold war constraints and risks might be more dangerous than other regime types in the present both total trade and trade dependence are considerably higher among asian dyads than the global average those analysts who have argued that this high degree of trade interdependence is good for peace in asia appear to be vindicated by the results here in that trade dependence is robustly associated with lower conflict of total trade trade dependence is the central economic variable of interest for liberal analysts but it is also of note that we find little consistent or significant effect of total trade on fatal mids or war in asia in either period this contradicts some realist expectations that trade may facilitate conflict by increasing the frequency and intensity of interactions there is no evidence of this effect at more serious levels of conflict consistently positive for all mids but negative for fatal mids and war in almost all models in tables i and ii and the effect of trade dependence when only asian dyads are analysed is consistent across both time periods for all levels of conflict the effects are period as well among the three liberal factors this is the one clear and robust effect found in asia trade interdependence is associated with peace especially when peace is defined as the absence of deadly conflict apparently to a greater degree than in the rest of the world the substantive effect of a one standarddeviation although globally this effect has been questioned and shown to be contingent on other factors in asia overall the liberal expectation of pacific trading states finds strong support consistent with the region s high levels of trade simultaneous trade reducing effects of conflict itself are controlled by the structural model used mixed dyads when asian states interact with the rest of the world one might expect liberal peace effects to be more similar to those found globally there is some evidence of this although not as robust as liberals might however neither of the other two liberal factors is significant and trade dependence has a positive sign if asian security dynamics differed before and after then it would make sense to examine asian relations with outside states in these two periods separately as well when this is done the effect of lower democracy fatal conflict in but negatively so in in neither case reaching conventional levels of significance the
moderate degree of suspicion if congress determined that the social costs of gps and wireless telephone tracking justified the use of the probable cause standard it would be free to legislate accordingly such a decision would be the product of a richer infonnation environment than is generally available to courts this is essentially the approach by the supreme court of canada in wise however that decision considered first generation tracking technology the question that canadian courts now face is whether the legislative response to wise which authorizes tracking warrants on reasonable suspicion complies with of the charter when applied to gps and wireless telephone tracking as the argument presented above suggests the answer to this question should be yes while gps and impose greater costs on society than the beepers considered in wise they also have greater benefits requiring warrants even on the modest standard of reasonable suspicion severely limits the risk of widespread stereotyping and discrimination with this protection in place the task of estimating the costs and benefits of tracking technologies and choosing an appropriate scheme to regulate them is best left to parliament not require a radical overhaul courts have cast it as a rough cost benefit calculus and have generally crafted reasonable compromises between privacy and crime control interests the test can undoubtedly be improved however and economic analysis can play an important role in this process especially as emerging technologies threaten the vitality of traditional conceptions of privacy based on secrecy and intimacy the chief contribution of economics in this area is to provide a more productive alternative to the moral conception of privacy that courts have conventionally relied on in making reasonable expectation of privacy decisions unlike the moral approach the economic approach does not justify protecting privacy for its own sake but rather because privacy often enhances social welfare by diminishing avoidance defensive and suboptimal enforcement costs economic analysis also suggests however privacy when doing so would generate few of these costs but would significantly enhance deterrence economics and public choice theory can also reduce decision making error by identifying the circumstances in which courts should be especially deferential to legislative choice such as where a search technology is novel technically complex and undergoing rapid change and its costs are borne by a broad swath of the population a reasonable expectation of privacy they provide police with a powerful investigative tool thereby enhancing the deterrence of crime without producing the costs associated with the avoidance of productive activity the prevention of privacy intrusions the enforcement of inefficient criminal prohibitions or the profiling of vulnerable minorities the economic approach confirms that the supreme court of canada in tessling court in kyllo correctly concluded that warrantless infrared searches are constitutional it also suggests that courts should defer to legislatures in deciding whether and how to regulate future potentially more intrusive infrared technologies so long as these technologies do not disproportionately harm minorities the case for recognizing a reasonable expectation of privacy in relation to gps and wireless telephone tracking is much stronger the technologies are substantially greater than for infrared searches location tracking has the potential to produce substantial avoidance and defensive costs it may also increase the risk of discriminatory profiling in addition the case for legislative deference is weaker for gps and wireless telephone tracking than for infrared searches the complexity and rapid development of tracking technologies militate in for disproportionate impacts on minority suspects the best solution may therefore be for courts to recognize a minimal expectation of privacy that would require warrants based on reasonable suspicion this would provide considerable protection against discriminatory profiling without usurping the legislature s capacity to determine the need for more extensive regulation and public policy abstract this research considers accountability issues for new forms of regulation that shift the emphasis from prescribing actions to regulating systems or regulating for results shortfalls at various levels of accountability are identified from experiences with these regimes in the regulation of building and fire safety food safety and nuclear power plant safety these how accountability shortfalls can undermine regulatory performance and introduce a potential for subtle forms of regulatory capture these concerns underscore the importance of finding the right fit between regulatory circumstances and the design of regulatory regimes introduction like many aspects of governmental functions that have undergone reform over the past innovations these include voluntary approaches under which regulators work with industry associations in developing codes of practice self auditing that entails assessments of compliance by regulated entities or third parties management based systems that entail firm responsibility for adhering to plans that limit regulated harms and performance based approaches that emphasize regulation for results rather of specific actions or technologies none of these reforms has wholly or even widely supplanted traditional regulation that emphasizes enforcement of rules by governmental agencies and penalties for noncompliance with the rules nonetheless widespread interest in the new approaches is evidenced by the adoption by various governments of one or more of these innovations as part of the regulation of air and water quality building and fire safety safety energy efficiency food safety forest practices nuclear power plant safety pipeline safety railroad safety and worker safety although much of the academic commentary about these approaches has focused on their rationale and design a more basic set of issues concerns the implications of regulatory innovations for governance in particular a central feature of the newer approaches is a shift in key regulatory responsibilities from governmental regulators to nongovernmental actors this shift in turn raises fundamental issues concerning regulatory accountability accountability is a key concept for democratic governance broadly concerned with holding officials responsible for their actions at issue is how that accountability is achieved when assume important roles in regulatory regimes this article addresses accountability issues for system and performance based regulatory regimes as with prescriptive regulation the newer regimes invoke aspects of legal bureaucratic professional and political accountability however they differ in their emphasis
hong kong electronic toy and plastics industries literature review the notion of modularity in product architecture has been widely suggested as a strategic decision to deal with this issue product design accounts for total product in product design it is a scheme of defining and arranging functional elements of a product into the physical attributes and a plan for designing interaction across these attributes product modularity may be the most important part determining how to configure the product architecture for modules while products with low modularity facilitate optimization of product components to the particular product in addition pine strongly suggests that firms have to use modular components that can be configured into a wide variety of end products and services to achieve mass customization products modular products also support component standardization that increases product variety without adversely affecting cost baldwin and clark suggest that product modularity is very useful in dealing with complex products by limiting the scope of interaction between elements or tasks thereby reducing the shorter life cycle of the product with lower development cost reviewing recent literature in modularity garud et al argue that modularity is a critical issue to product process and organizational designs across technological social and strategic domains existing literature defines product modularity using various terminologies ulrich and tung physical components and similarity of physical and functional product architecture sanchez and mahoney argue the notion that product modularity is defined as the independency or loose coupling of the product components schilling starr also states that a product is highly modularized if the product components can be transferred or reused in a large range of products to maximize product variety since most product components can be more or less separated specified and transferred in a product system all products may probably have some degree of product modularity if a product is product functions against physical elements of the subsystems are well specified and commonly one product function is mapped to one physical element the product components can also be transferred to or reused by existing product lines or progressive product development projects conversely if a product is integral the product components are highly one product component can seriously affect other product components also the product components cannot easily be reused by other product development projects competitive capabilities different terminologies have been used to describe the concept of competitive capabilities in operations management studies in general they are used interchangeably lack precision and overlap with each other this research adopts one prominent definition which is commonly used in operations management literature to define the term competitive capabilities competitive al rosenzweig and roth ketokivi and schroeder roth in other words competitive capabilities refer to the firm s ability to provide products with certain performance which can win orders from competitors for example product quality as one competitive capability refers to a firm s ability to provide manufacturing manufacturers require competitive capabilities to sustain in the global market some firms find that they can perform well when they are able to make products faster and some firms declare that they perform well once they can make products of a high quality at a low price others argue that the technical support and broad distribution of the product add value to the physical product as customer behavior is extremely difficult to predict and the market is highly dynamic many researchers view the capability for flexible designing and commercializing of new products as critical to a firm s success the traditional view of competitive capabilities argues that firms have to make trade offs across improvements in one capability may cause another to deteriorate zangwill suggests that low price and time to market are tradeoffs as both require different capabilities of production processes and product design activities hossein et al found that cost and quality cost and delivery and quality and delivery could be capabilities require different infrastructural and structural assets it is important to select and implement these assets for particular competitive capabilities nevertheless based on the experience of japanese manufacturing some firms can simultaneously achieve multiple competitive capabilities by the ferdows and de meyer nakane the empirical result suggests that competitive capabilities are cumulative in the rover group case study tennant and robert report that the time to market and total lead time can be instantly improved when appropriate capabilities including quality cost flexibility and dependability thus firms can improve multiple competitive capabilities by implementing specific organizational structures and infrastructures it is not easy to resolve the debate about the trade off model and cumulative model but both models above average performance in line with this idea this paper proposes that modular product design is an appropriate design activity to improve a firm s competitive capability which enhances product performance as there are many types of competitive capabilities concerned in operations management literature low price in every industry there is usually a segment of the product market focusing on low price to successfully compete in this market firms need to offer low price products low price products are typically commodity products of which customers cannot distinguish the products of one firm from those of another in terms of functionality and and low cost development processes in low selling price for example japanese automobile companies have developed low cost development and manufacturing capabilities to win lower price market segments product quality products tend to dissatisfy customers and lose sales product quality is measured by quality of conformance quality of design and reliability quality of conformance is the degree to which the product meets product design and operating specifications it is similar to the assessment of manufacturing conformance to features styling and so on refers to the value of the product that matches customers in the marketplace reliability refers to the consistency of performance over time and the rate of failure delivery the ability to deliver products quicker than competitors is critical fast delivery refers to delivering products quicker than competitors dependable delivery refers to a firm s ability to supply
of september the distinctiveness of the united states was overtly reclaimed and policed both in official utterances and in the media the uniqueness of the transgression and its suffering were emphasized and similarity disavowed during coverage of the war in afghanistan cnn chair walter isaacson issued a directive that all the deaths of civilians in afghanistan resulting from us bombing were to be concluded with a reminder about the deaths of americans on september in the context of a terrorist attack that caused enormous suffering in the united states the subversive possibility that civilian deaths in both countries were tragedies of equal dimension was curtailed and the pre eminence of american deaths was reclaimed moment of impact the newspapers revisited again and again images of destroyed buildings most frequently of the twin towers the photographs of the remains of the twin towers are in stark contrast to the conventional image of skyscrapers and the crisp closely packed grid of manhattan island its city skyline characterized by right angles and straight lines of buildings in close regarding photographs of the atrocities carried out by general franco during the spanish civil war sontag observes a bomb has torn open the side of a house to be sure a cityscape is not made of flesh still sheared off buildings are almost as eloquent as body parts this is confirmed in images of the aftermath of september where the remnants of the two towers articulate a striking sense of fragility they seem torn open and bones or skeletons yet contemplating a delicate filigree of steel structures all that remains of the south tower even this metaphor of flesh and bone seems too heavy for these fragments in their lightness the remains seem not so much organic as resembling a fragile latticework barely more tangible than the surrounding emptiness the sights are disjunctive yet some of them are eerily beautiful as sontag noted to verbalize that association was taboo to acknowledge the beauty of photographs of the world trade center ruins in the months following the attack seemed frivolous sacrilegious textures not usually associated with buildings were highlighted in unexpected combinations the usually crisply modern manhattan skyline with its angled collection of skyscrapers crowded together on the southern portion of the island has in a photograph on page eighteen of the cape argus on september the unexpected characteristics of dust and softness many photographs focus on this compelling interplay of concrete and smoke whether in long shots taken from helicopters or more intimately from the ground or other buildings these photographs convey the sense of the building as vulnerable almost body like and the striking connotation that that body has been broken open and entered the remains of the buildings convey a sense of the personal violation of the body of the state in the newspaper images the news photographs of faces and bodies of mourners in the united states during this time attained an almost structural scale and symbolism such faces appeared in extreme close up creating a monumental effect an example appears on page three of the sunday argus of september which has a large photograph of a woman s face itself magnified into intimate detail the face is presented sculpturally with the texture of shadows and the tear on her highlighting the shape of the nose and the eye although the close up focuses attention on this one person the effect is not to see her as an individual but instead as representative because of close cropping one cannot see her hair clothing or other distinguishing characteristics even her weeping identified in the caption as being caused by her inability to find a missing relative is presented visually in a generalized way reaching beyond individual loss to stand for the on the front page of the saturday argus of september a large photograph shows a white hand holding a black hand between them they clasp a small united states flag through such treatment using extreme close ups and symbolic gestures parts of the body attain to the monumental in this way bodies and buildings seem to have been inverted exchanging qualities and meanings the abstract treatment given to the face of the woman above is in sharp contrast to the way in people who died on that day are shown a conscious attempt was made to individualize them through the use of photographs and short biographies on the front page of the cape argus on september a collection of such photographs from personal or family albums showing them in casual or smiling expressions appeared on the same page a photograph of one of the suspected hijackers mohammed atta appears though it is also an individual photograph of his face this one is different to collection above it is a photograph from an identity document showing a serious unsmiling face decidedly not casual it is a face inscribed within a legal framework a suspected face below i contrast this suspected face with the face of the prime suspect osama bin laden in addition to these images of the victims and perpetrators of the attacks the cape argus presented photographs of south africans accompanying the report of their views in an article titled capetonians in american s war against terrorism the individuality of the faces portrayed confirmed the insistence on a sympathetic yet distinctive national response in the article the portrayal of the bodies of those who died in the buildings and planes was an especially strong taboo after september while there are evocative photographs of people who are jumping from the buildings including those who are holding hands and jumping together their are not shown and there are no pictures of the impact of those bodies and none of the bodies on the ground sontag points out that while the western media is oriented towards attention to violence in an often sensationalist manner there is extreme discretion in dealing with violence enacted on first world people in contrast violence acted on people in
distant intervals the early year options predict the direction and magnitude of future volatility changes about as well as the three year moving average is commonly estimated using both backward or forward looking methods backward looking methods develop volatility estimates using time series volatility measures such as the standard deviation of an asset s returns and arch type and stochastic volatility models while these procedures often provide accurate predictions of short term generally revert to the unconditional mean forward looking approaches estimate future volatility as the implied volatility obtained from observed option premiums by inverting a theoretical option pricing model because market participants possess all available recent empirical studies that have focused primarily on financial assets support this view forward looking methods are typically based on theoretical pricing models related to the black and scholes option pricing model for european options black s the life of the option however empirical research shows that the volatility of asset returns varies over time to incorporate time varying volatility the black and scholes model was generalized and alternative option pricing models developed test the based on volatility quotes on pound mark yen and swiss franc options from december to august they are generally unable to reject the expectations hypothesis current differences between long dated and short dated volatility quotes also predict the direction of future short rate and long rate changes correctly predict realized volatilities or their direction of change in addition the analysis was performed on markets characterized by direct volatility quotes with a fixed time between expiration dates which is atypical of most options markets where premiums not volatilities are quoted and the term structure depends on the maturities of the options ne month and two month maturity american options on the ftse index they compare the implied forward volatility between the two expiration dates with the realized volatility their implied forward volatilities forecast poorly consistently overstating realized volatility but the usefulness of these findings for assessing the predictive ability of on contracts traded from january to december and daily corn futures settlement prices from february to november obtained from the chicago board of contracts in the corn futures market expire five times a year and the corresponding options contracts mature about one month prior the structure of expiration s some about two months and others about three months the intervals over which the implied forward volatilities are computed are essentially fixed because corn futures and options contracts mature at the same time each year as a result five forward intervals can be constructed february april april june june august august november forward volatilities for the two month and three month intervals permit a continuous term structure of approximately six to twelve months into the future an advantage of using a commodity such as corn to evaluate the forecast ability of implied forward volatilities is the repeating pattern of volatility in agricultural futures markets where periods of volatility follow the crops growing cycles using corn futures data from to goodwin and schnepf also observe variance peaks and identify crop growing conditions as the most influential factor in explaining price volatility corn is a determinant crop which means that the plant grows according to an internal clock and cannot to crop development are typically characterized by high price volatility because critical periods repeat annually market participants know the approximate periods of greater price volatility and the implied forward volatilities should reflect the expected weather impacts on crop development description of options premiums as the discounted expected future payoffs against a risk neutral valuation measure to characterize the price distribution of the underlying asset current premiums of european call and put options are given by density function of the underlying asset price ft at maturity if is lognormal the relationship represents the black scholes option pricing model the observed option premiums and the current discount rate can be used to recover the implied rnvm the return distribution of the underlying asset price and here vc and vp are the observed options premiums xi and xj are the respective call or put strike prices and and are the number of different call and put strikes traded on a given day solving equation for a specific options maturity yields a parameter vector for a particular distribution containing the implied futures first it does not impose restrictions on the asset distribution s underlying mean such as the mean must equal the current asset price or be a function of the underlying asset price the only assumption needed is that no arbitrage conditions prevail second in contrast to using only the option closest to being at the money information contained in the rnvm by the lognormal distribution that has worked reasonably well for obtaining the implied volatilities in the soybean and other agricultural options markets the discount factor is calculated by compounding the corresponding three month a premium smaller than the call option with the next lower strike price sets of options consisting entirely of calls or puts are excluded as these sets frequently lead to results inconsistent with the notion that total forecast volatility increases at more distant horizons the remaining options in each set are equally implied volatilities can be recovered for different intervals to expiration for example on a specific day the options expiring at te and te reflect volatilities for two different intervals and under time additive variance and denoting te te as the number of trading days in the interval the implied volatilities are used to calculate the market s expectation of the average volatility that will occur during this future interval the corresponding realized price volatility is based on the futures contract underlying the options with the longer time to maturity and is calculated on daily log returns assuming a mean of zero by a three year moving average of past realized volatilities during the respective intervals and a naa la ve forecast defined as the volatility realized during the interval last all volatility measures are annualized to make the volatilities comparable
which have both different models of the management of spatial distributions and different ways of dealing with the aleatory and the problem of normalization foucault s three examples of town planning food scarcity and epidemics or the road grain contagion are thus outlined interesting in themselves the spaces of security the aleatory normalization and the emergence of issue of population it is clear that whatever foucault says about territory he is not suggesting that security is aspatial rather it operates on a different strategy that requires a sociospatial ordering of resources and the means for their distribution and circulation nonetheless foucault contends that the emergence of a that a new problematic has emerged no longer the surety of the prince and of his territory but the security of the population population the notion of population is important in this period not only in political thought but also in the procedures of government foucault argues that population moved from being the negative of depopulation that is repopulation following an epidemic a war or famine where the aim is to repopulate a territory become barren de sert to a term in itself population is key to other issues such as agriculture manufacture and the productive force and other forces of the state this is a shift to a new political technology the government of populations populations are not simply the sum of individuals inhabiting a territory but subject to variance on a number of factors including materials commerce and circulation of wealth marriage laws the treatment of girls rights of primogeniture the way children are brought up nature and geography foucault therefore suggests that his object of analysis is the series mechanisms of security population government and the opening of the field that is called politics three models of governmentality on govern mentality an overture of where his researches are going rather than a culmination of analyses already undertaken in part machiavelli is the focus or more particularly the focus is on the way in which machiavelli was received for foucault machiavelli trades on a middle ages century model where sovereignty is not exercised on things but above all on a territory and it in contrast he then reads guillaume de la perrie re s miroir politique where he notes that you will notice that the definition of government in no way refers to territory one governs things this is a complex of men and things of which the qualities of territory might be important but not in themselves the issue of the qualities of territory will be returned below but the key issue for foucault is population and its various attributes de la perrie re is but one of foucault s examples of the way in which governmental strategies develop in the second half of the century this is tied to the progressive development of the administrative apparatuses of the territorial monarchies but also to the invention and refinement of statistics meaning the science of the state the calculative statistics are also crucial to the emergence of the new science of political economy which arises out of the perception of new networks of continuous and multiple relations between population territory and wealth over time this can be traced as the transition from an art of government to political science and from sovereignty to techniques of government both of which hinge on population and the birth of political economy foucault is however careful to note that this is not a straightforward linear development such as might be assumed from the passage from a society of sovereignty to a disciplinary society to a society of government rather he proposes a triangle of sovereignty discipline government whose primary target is population whose principle form of knowledge is political economy and whose essential mechanism or technical means of operating are security conceiving of these three societies not on a linear model but rather as a space of political action allows us to inject historical and geographical specificity into foucault s narrative as geographers have long realized foucault s work needs to be continually contextualized particularly if we wish his ideas to travel different places and different times might be closer to one node or is a generally useful and transferable model of analysis indeed this is precisely the reason why foucault suggests that the course title security territory population is replaced with history of governmentality at the very close of the governmentality lecture foucault sketches out the transitions between the great forms the great economies of power in the west that all the state of justice born in the feudal type of territorial regime which broadly corresponds to the society of laws either customs or written laws involving a whole reciprocal play of obligation and litigation second the administrative state born in the frontier de type frontalier territoriality of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries and corresponding to a society of regulation and discipline and finally a governmental state essentially longer in terms of its territoriality of its surface area but in terms of the mass the mass of its population with its volume and density and indeed also with the territory over which it is extended although this figures here only as one among its component elements this state of government which bears essentially on population and both refers itself to and makes use of the instrumentation of economic savoir could be seen as corresponding to a type of society controlled by security this passage bears some close examination foucault is interested principally in the development between the second and third forms of these economies of power but there is an important shift between the first and second forms which is seemingly underplayed foucault recognizes that there are two types of state that accord a privilege to territoriality the feudal and the frontier this is a peculiarly french conception in that the state or kingdom was better organized and internally ordered than most others in europe during the and centuries but even
of the bell inequality the three level system provides in this context a much smaller level of noise rydberg atoms which cross superconductive cavities are an almost ideal system to generate entangled states and to perform small scale quantum information processing and in this context entanglement generation of three level quantum systems was reported the scope of this paper is to review the state of the art of the theoretical investigations and of the experimental observations concerning the dynamical features of the coupling the physical situations which we shall refer to belong to the experimental domains of cavity quantum electrodynamics and of trapped ion physics the relative simplicity of the ion trap model and the ease with which it can be extended through analytic expressions or numerical computation continues to motivate attention the physical scenario relative to the problems we shall be faced involves two or three level trapped ions interacting with a laser field the work reported here was by several connections between quantum entanglement and quantum information theory in fact a large experimental effort over the last years has enabled cavity quantum electrodynamics to work at the level of single atoms or trapped ions and single photons where only two electronic energy states participate in the exchange of a photon with the cavity this enables cavity quantum electrodynamics technology not only to be the potential responsible by the first realizable computer but also for a large amount of interesting experiments showing the decoherence phenomenon and nonlocal entanglement of quantum systems this review intends to describe the theory from the foundations up to the current research front the derivation of many key results differentiates this review from the usual presentation in that they are shown to follow logically from one crucial property of entropy and entanglement within the review theoretical proposals for quantum entropy and entanglement with a multi level system is discussed with the reliance in the processing of quantum information on a maximally entangled pure mixed state resource combined with the trapped ion field interaction we look at various entanglement measures of recovering the pure mixed entangled states some applications are provided and discussed in detail bringing to light the feasibility and the wide potentiality of the different forms measures it is not possible in one review to cover all the interesting theories and experiments which have been developed for analyzing entanglement phenomena it is perhaps more appropriate to view this article as a progress report including an extensive review of the accumulated knowledge on both phenomenology and theoretical techniques inevitably the discussion has emphasized techniques that have provided some answers to some main problems states are rather a result of a particular method of construction of states basis entering in a compound system due to an interaction subsystems properties are entangled and lose their individuality while we manipulate with systems as a wholeness its entangled structure is preserved in a coherent way and never shows up however as soon as a compound system breaks down we have absolutely different situation now each be considered as an independent one described by its own state vector an existence of possible initial correlations between subsystems properties is a result of conservation rules fulfilling in any case rather than quantum ones pure states in pure state quantum mechanics the state of the system is usually represented by a onto this state ie in such a way that jc ihc jc ihc jc ihc t and tr in the theory of open system or the reduction theory one often considers two and represented by hilbert space let hi state spaces also the state space in the composite system the following decomposed it is almost impossible to decompose the states in composite system like the above that is the following states exist and the above states which cannot be described by product states of two subsystem are called entangled states also a quantum state is disentangled if and only if is a mixture of product states on a product state then if a state is not disentangled it is said to be an entangled state in order to scientifically treat such entangled states we need a measure for the degree of mixture mixed states a mixed state instead is defined by the class of states which satisfy the inequality nonclassical effects the set of disentangled states is usually considered as the set of all states which can be written as convex combinations of pure tensor states for example mixing two entangled pure states could result in a mixed state with entanglement much less than the average entanglement of the states mixed ie where and this is mixed state since we cannot write it as a product of consists of hermitian positive matrices of size normalized by the trace condition it is a compact convex set of dimensionality any density matrix may be diagonalized by a unitary rotation where is a diagonal matrix of eigen values due to the trace condition they satisfy especially the so called two qubit werner states they form a family of one parameter states where all the vectors appearing here are bell states in the present scenario alice and bob share two pairs of qubits in that state a werner state wf is entangled if and only if experimental physics at the moment is the practical implementation of quantum communication and quantum computation protocols therefrom also a lot of questions in cavity qed have been raised each single qubit necessary to build a quantum computer can be stored in an internal electronic state of a two level ion the ground state corresponds to the logic value and the excited state to the value entanglement can be brought into the system by using the interaction of the via the cavity field more general schemes for the preparation of quantum systems in nonclassical states are of fundamental interest as such states display some of the most intriguing features of quantum mechanics the spectacular experimental results of the last few years in
of political separatism from and defiance towards the hearing world as ruby explains ruby i prefer to be with deaf people i would say i hate being with hearing people interviewer can you tell me a bit about why really get angry about it and i have to go get rid of it by talking to my mum in contrast to hubbard s characterization of lesbian and gay communities then deaf people have privacy namely the power to exclude oral communicators but not publicity in terms of the power to freely access the wider public sphere while there are many positive aspects to such critically exclusive spaces such an insular form of politics also bring its own dangers notably diminish deaf people s ability to communicate with hearing people and therefore access education employment and health rights in the hearing world and so further their socio economic marginalization dani describes how their ability to communicate with hearing people has declined dani i felt good being among the deaf people felt like i was one of them yeah felt good and being in college you know being around deaf people all the time from hearing people i was spending more time you know with with deaf people so the more time i spent in college i think you know i almost lost my erm ability to sort of speak so well with hearing people so some i struggle more now than i ever did with hearing people cos i ve spent so much of my time with deaf people you know there s so many deaf people here particular aspects of identities can also generate exclusions as earlier quotations in this paper have already described deaf people who are oral communicators and those from ethnic minority groups commonly experience marginalization within the deaf community and are thus trapped in a space of inbetweeness belonging neither in the hearing or deaf worlds deaf people in parallel with other cultural groups have a stronger sense of allegiance to and identification with their own cultural group within the nation than with the nation at large sassen has suggested that such practices represent denationalized citizenship however unlike many cultural minorities within the nation deaf people do not necessarily see the nation state as a normative frame of reference for their community rather they share a political identification and belonging that goes beyond the nation language and non state spaces of identity despite the very exclusive nature of deaf clubs in the uk there is a growing sense of international consciousness and traffic between deaf communities around the world in particular the internet has opened up the world for deaf people by enabling them to access information and a means to communicate with the each other on a national and international scale the telephone as such deaf people are increasingly taking advantage of the internet to facilitate their international travel and to develop personal global connections as well as to organize politically and self represent their communities indeed while sign languages vary both within as well as between nations there are strong grammatical similarities between sign languages of the world gestural languages are also more flexible and easily adapted to enable cross communication than oral languages and therefore offer more possibilities for creating what sassen has described as nonstate spaces of cultural identity as stuart explains stuart it s very easy for deaf people because we do nt really have to learn a completely different language it s like an english person going to germany has got to learn some german which is completely different we just go over and we we sign and we you know each make adjustments and pick it up from each in this sense sign language potentially enables deaf people s political practices to go beyond the nation moreover deaf people are unusual because they are a linguistic group that has a community in every country in the world ladd explains hey deaf people know that in every country in the world in every tribe in the farthest flung amazonian rainforests there are people like themselves they know that if they met any of those people they could despite their sign languages fall into conversation and learn about each others cultures and ways of life as viewed from the inside outwards in some deep almost unfathomable way they deaf people are linked to each other as citizens of a global deaf community that is now coming to style itself as a global deaf nation as this quote implies deaf people are one example of a community for whom in the terms of miller the state is no the sole frame of citizenship rather the notion of deaf nation captures the global vision of a common deaf political identity predicated on sign language this is based on an affective connection that is established through deaf people s shared deep sense of injustice at their experiences as indigenous people of marginalization or assimilation within oralist states for deaf people oralism is the deaf holocaust and the uniquely global possibilities of to each other through gestural language ladd explains it is from this vista of awareness that deaf people come to take a global perspective of the scale and magnitude of what has been visited upon them they see indeed they know all too well from their own experiences exactly what it feels like for a deaf person in russia the united states australia japan argentina south africa india and china to have undergone this experience they count up the hundreds of perhaps even millions subjected to the oralist regime over that years this recognition that the oppression of deaf people is a process that is not contained within national boundaries opens up the possibility for a politics that links the sub national spaces of deaf clubs and communities in new forms of citizenship practices in this context deaf people around the globe are drawing on the discourse of human rights a non national frame of reference
if the culprit is in the lineup an appearance change instruction could very well lower the decision criterion because it implies to the eyewitness that the culprit might not evoke much ecphoric similarity due to an appearance change if the appearance change instruction lowers eyewitnesses expectations regarding how much ecphoric similarity to expect eyewitnesses might lower their decision criterion if so we would expect an choosing for both culprit present as well as culprit absent lineups could the appearance change instruction also affect ecphoric similarity this is amore complex issue ecphoric similarity is the extent to which a stimulus resembles one s memory for the stimulus in a lineup task this is usually thought of as the extent to which a lineup member s appearance in the lineup resembles the eyewitness s memory of the culprit clearly the appearance change instruction cannot affect the lineup member s actual appearance and we do not think it plausible to suggest that the appearance change instruction affects the eyewitness s memory of the culprit so it seems odd to suggest that the appearance change instruction could affect ecphoric similarity however one of the possible consequences of the appearance change instruction is to lead witnesses to engage in various mental mutations to the appearance of the various lineup members our speculation about mental mutations in part from the simulation heuristic originally put forth by kahneman and tversky which describes how people can take a factual event and imagine alternative values for different aspects of the event hence eyewitnesses could mentally alter the hair add a beard or imagine the culprit at a heavier weight the mental image resulting from this mutation could then become a new stimulus that is used to make judgments of ecphoric similarity because the number of these mutated mental images is limited only by the imagination of the witness it is highly likely that at least one of them will resemble the witness s memory of the culprit more than the actual photo resembles the witness s memory of the culprit thus by encouraging these mental mutations the appearance change instruction can in effect increase ecphoric similarity by changing the stimulus to which one s memory of the culprit is compared or not the net result of the appearance change instruction is an increase in accurate identification rates without an increase in mistaken identifications presumably these mutations would be applied to all lineup members with the net result perhaps being an increase in ecphoric similarity for every lineup member if so then we might expect an increase in the overall rate of identifications but not elevates identifications of the perpetrator in fact for culprit absent lineups increases in ecphoric similarity are not desirable because such increases are likely to lead to increased chances of misidentification hence the issue is whether increased ecphoric similarity is selective to the culprit or whether the increase also applies to innocent lineup members we will call the former process a selective increase in ecphoric similarity and the latter a general similarity we think that it is plausible that the appearance change instruction could produce a selective increase in ecphoric similarity or at least a relatively greater increase in apparent ecphoric similarity for the culprit than for innocent lineup members it is after all the culprit s face that the witness originally encoded and it is the culprit s face that has undergone some change in appearance therefore these mental mutations could make the culprit closer to the witness s than would these same mutations to innocent lineup members resulting in a selective increase in ecphoric similarity despite the plausibility of this account there are two main reasons why we did not predict a selective increase in ecphoric similarity from the appearance change instruction first it seems to us that a selective increase in ecphoric similarity depends in part on the witness knowing what kind of appearance change the culprit has undergone if any furthermore we view the mental mutation process as a form of hypothesis testing and we know that people generally test hypotheses in a confirmation biased manner hence we would expect witnesses in culprit absent conditions to routinely mutate hair age weight and other changeable characteristics of the lineup members in the direction of their memory for the culprit this in turn should lead to increases in ecphoric similarity for the innocent lineup members as well as the resulting in a general increase in ecphoric similarity because there is no prior research on the appearance change instruction with lineups the primary goal of this research was restricted to finding out whether the net effect of the instruction was to increase identifications of the culprit without also increasing the rate of identifications for innocent lineup members although we have described three theoretical processes that could affect the results we cannot necessarily distinguish between these process explanations depending on the results for example if choosing rates increase for both the culprit present and culprit absent conditions with no net increase in accuracy then this could be due to either a general increase in ecphoric similarity or a lowered response criterion in that case we will have ruled out only one process a selective increase in ecphoric similarity if on the other hand the increase in choosing rates is uniquely elevated for the culprit and not for the innocent lineup members then we can rule out a general increase in ecphoric similarity and a lowered response criterion also note that although a selective increase in ecphoric similarity and a general increase in ecphoric similarity are mutually exclusive processes either one of these processes can occur in conjunction with a lowered criterion thus evidence for a change in ecphoric similarity should not necessarily be interpreted as evidence against a lowered decision criterion any test of the appearance change instruction clearly requires that there be culprits that vary in appearance change accordingly we used a video crime in which there were four culprits whose lineup photos resembled their appearance in the
places then as dwellers and simultaneously making it attractive to developers interested in exploiting the rent gap through upgrading and marketing the housing stock characterization of the actors involved is fuzzy and fluctuates from one case to the other i will attempt here to specify the contribution of the various upper and upper middle categories according to the nomenclature of cs presented before the analysis of the overall change in the sociospatial structure of the paris metrop olis shows that managers and executives in private firms and engineers and most to the polarization trend increasing the social distance between upper status areas and working class areas this is a general result and does not necessarily apply to those working class neighborhoods i am considering here table shows the absolute variation between and for each category by departement for all the neighborhoods under discussion for all the neigh upper middle categories and in the whole metropolis the subgroup of working class neighborhoods with a strong growth of upper and upper middle categories accounts for the total growth of those categories in the paris metropolis and shows a distribution of the variations across categories which is slightly different from the whole group of neighborhoods experiencing a similar change categories with the strongest absolute increase are also executives in private firms and engineers and technical professionals in private firms but in relative terms of the share of total variation in the group is highest for managers in the civil service and professors and those in literary and scientific professions and even more for professionals in the media artistic and entertainment activities this slight inflexion is not sufficient to validate the current commonly held narrative of gentrification artists and culture oriented professionals since the corresponding categories only account for the total growth of upper categories in the subgroup of neighborhoods against engineers and private firm professionals this is particularly clear for professionals in the media artistic and entertainment activities supposed to be the core of gentrification pioneers they decrease in numbers and increase in number only in the subgroup of working class ones but that represents only persons only the growth of upper and upper middle categories in those places this result is fragile however because the figures relate only to those with a stable job whereas that category is known for a strong incidence of casualization of labor in active persons classified as professionals in the media artistic and a casual job against professors and those in literary and scientific professions managers in the civil service and engineers and private firm professionals for the whole metropolis persons in with a stable job decreased and whereas those with a casual job increased those unemployed increased for statistical reasons stable and casual jobs cannot be distinguished at the units departements municipalities arrondissements and quartiers of paris the share of casual jobs among all casual jobs is the whole metropolis going up to paris followed by seine saint denis seine et marne val de marne and hauts de seine for the metropolis then my general result is confirmed the total growth of public only about half that of engineers and private firm professionals but the very uneven distribution of the different categories and of their growth among the various parts of the persons in with a job live in paris and in hauts de seine calls for a more detailed spatial analysis inside paris the total growth of public sector intellectual artistic and entertainment professionals can be estimated to between and if all casual belonged to whereas the total growth of engineers and private firm professionals is about showing therefore a slight predominance of the first group in the central city by contrast in the departement of hauts de seine the second group has a much stronger growth than the first and the same is true for all other departements except seine saint denis where the growth of the two groups is similar but with much smaller figures in hauts de seine and in the rest of the banlieue departements with a profile similar to hauts de seine but with much to examine in more detail these social contrasts between neighborhoods i have compared the distribution in the growth of the various in the working class neighborhoods which experienced a strong growth of the categories as a whole the result is a clustering into four classes table gives the profile of each class measured by the percentage distribution of change over the various class a gathers neighborhoods with the strongest growth of professionals in the media artistic and entertainment activities and professors and those in literary and scientific professions plus professionals with casual jobs which for a large part belong to the first category as i discussed before the number of engineers and private firm professionals has grown slightly less than average in class we find neighborhoods with the strongest growth of the liberal professions and a very strong increase close to that in of professionals in the media artistic and entertainment activities neighborhoods in class show the strongest growth of managers and executives in private firms and managers in the civil service class gathers neighbor hoods with the strongest increase of engineers and the weakest increase of professionals in the media artistic and entertainment activities the relative profiles are thus quite contrasted however the importance of the variations of professionals and engineers in private firms being much superior the distribution of absolute variations between the four classes shows differences in shades rather than marked oppositions the results for class a confirm what we saw for all of the working class areas of paris although that group of neighborhoods exhibits the strongest growth in numbers of professionals in public scientific media and artistic occupations this relative is not sufficient to make them the largest part of the increase the absolute numbers for engineers and professionals in private firms being of the same magnitude and in all the
the first motions the delegates from new hampshire did not arrive in philadelphia until july and hence do not appear until vote after new york had left when votes are missing for a period in which a state was present we impute them based on other observed while it was previously considered more methodologically rigorous and conservative to simply eliminate all cases with missing values than to tendentiously make up data both mathematical derivations and numerical investigations demonstrate that listwise deletion is quite likely to introduce biases at the same time new and more rigorous techniques of imputation have been developed here we impute missing data using an expectation is quite likely to introduce biases at the same time new and more rigorous techniques of imputation have been developed here we impute missing data using an expectation maximization algorithm that produces maximum likelihood estimates of missing data values by using available nonmissing data from relevant predictive variables in our case other votes from the same period we also tried two other ways of treating missing values overly conservative and one probably overly liberal and this did not make a difference to the we constrain the predictions to fall in the range through truncation the stochastic nature of the imputation process means that different imputed data sets will vary to some extent we therefore repeated the imputation procedure five times and compared the results while any individual number retrieved does of course change the is robust and hence our conclusions do not seem to be due to the particularities of the imputation in most cases there is only minor movement of positions where this is not the case we note which positions may be sensitive to missing data finally to avoid artificially introducing variation into our data we do not impute values for states whose delegations did not vote on issues that were otherwise unanimous while a missing state may have changed the nature of the vote had it present a more likely counterfactual is that this absent state would have joined the rest in unanimity and it is the ability to make visible complex patterns in the data that is the strength of multidimensional scaling there are two points worth stressing here first the dimensions produced need not be interpretable as dimensions all that matters is that we can adequately arrange objects so that their distances are consistent for example a set of three equidistant objects requires a dimensional solution although these dimensions do not necessarily have any intrinsic meaning in some cases however such a meaning can be tentatively attributed on the basis of an inspection of the data second insofar as we imagine action to be continuous across time our diagrams are snapshots of actors in motion rather than see these alignments as coalitions we must remember that there was a continuously shifting array of positions to maximize the comparability of different periods we use a procrustean transformation of the coordinates for all but the first period in essence this allows the space of one period to be rotated or flipped so that it is maximally comparable to that of an earlier period the relative distances themselves are not changed we use the observed values of the first period to anchor the transformed values of the second values of the second period to anchor the transformed values of the third and so on this merely saves the reader the task of turning the pages upside down or holding them up to the light and looking at the reverse side we suppress any numerical indices on the axes because the overall scale of each solution depends in part on the number of data points and necessarily changes as a result of the procrustean transformation hence numerical scales would be misleading in using these solutions to discuss the evolution of states positions we also use the distances to quantify relations between periods in two ways first we can assess the extent to which states relative positioning changes over time by computing a pair wise correlation of the distance between state pairs at different points in time if the distances between pairs in one period are significantly correlated with the distances between pairs in another period then we may conclude that a basic similarity between the structures of positions produced in each period second we use the distances to determine which states are most mobile with respect to the others between any two periods positions and change the articles of confederation ought to be so corrected and enlarged as to accomplish the objects proposed by their institution namely common defence sic security of liberty and general welfare although the motion began with this nod to correcting the confederation it quickly became clear that a substantially new governmental structure a truly national government was being proposed when the question of suffrage in the legislature was raised under the articles of confederation decisions were made through a unicameral legislature in which each state was given an equal vote the virginia plan proposed a bicameral legislature with proportional representation states with larger populations would have more legislators and hence larger states would have more influence under the new system fearing that they would be essentially overrun by the large states the small states connecticut new jersey delaware and jensen rossiter figure which plots the states in terms of likeness certainly highlights an opposition between the small and northern states and the larger or southern states there are however obvious departures from the simple large small dichotomy that others have noted first new york clearly appears in the midst of the small states this is not due to a regional logic new york is have noted first new york clearly appears in the midst of the small states this is not due to a regional logic new york is far from its neighbors pennsylvania and massachusetts which are reasonably with other large states it is not that new york was a small state at the time it
and that these effects may not reflect a pathological process rather racism violates one s rights such that a person should be able to sue to recover for damages it is proposed that psychological and emotional pain or injury is part of a nonpathological set of reactions that have associated with them symptom clusters and reactions that can impair a person s functioning the assessment category of race based stress or trauma can be used to identify reactions that integrate the situational and dispositional elements in the context of an individual s life history and experiences there still is inadequate information for mental health professionals to use when assessing how someone is affected by racism however two studies did find that in general the emotional and psychological effects reported by respondents were consistent with carlson s model of traumatic stress in addition the results revealed that there are differences in the reactions they encounter the class of experiences that constitute racial harassment and racial discrimination the studies found that each class or type has a somewhat different emotional impact therefore the symptom clusters varied it is important to note that the vast majority of the participants in carter forsyth mazzula et al s and carter forsyth williams et al s studies did not experience an actual or an experience to qualify as a traumatic reaction it needs to be perceived as negative be sudden and uncontrollable in the section on stress it was noted that events experienced as negative out of one s control sudden ambiguous and repeated increase an individual s stress response in turn these events deepen emotional pain and can lead to traumatic responses this fact coupled with the addition of the slavin racial cultural stress process suggests that important aspects of a people of color s lives are permeated with stress reactions and assessments participants in the carter et al and essed studies as well as the feagin and sikes study reported experiences of racism that were perceived as negative out of their control and from their descriptions unexpected in addition racial discrimination racial harassment and or through symbols or coded language as illustrated by these investigations each type or class of racism that has been presented and reported by the participants in numerous studies qualifies as having the potential to produce traumatic reactions as noted the symptom manifestations of race based traumatic stress and increased arousal or vigilance in the case of racial discrimination racial harassment or discriminatory harassment the client s subjective appraisal of the experience is valid it is also possible that this verification can be used to file and succeed with organizational and court complaints and lawsuits with a last straw encounter or experience that increases the level of stress to the threshold of trauma in another instance racial avoidance aversion or hostility may be communicated indirectly by use of symbols or coded language or actions for example feagin and mckinney reported that in a us court of appeals for the federal circuit found that whites in reference to black coworkers constituted racially coded and discriminatory language that created a hostile work environment in a society characterized by racism such as the united states symbolic language and images exist that can communicate threat to subordinated racial group members without making overt reference to race in addition many people of color have knowledge and experience of these events and practices as part of their life experienced through symbols and coded language may not be understood by many whites for instance many whites are not targets of racism and may attach different meaning to the subtle language and symbols used to communicate racial messages consequently actions that may not appear threatening to a dominant group member may appear so to members of the threatened group overt race specific physical and psychological with unspoken and accepted racial beliefs and stereotypes racial beliefs and attitudes are often embodied in symbols as well as coded and demeaning language such as the use of the word or reference to boy at risk inner city and so forth language symbols or attitudes and actions directed at people of color are disregard individual characteristics and are attached to someone based exclusively on physical markers of racial group membership this type of thinking has led to policies that are used to justify actions like racial profiling also subtle racism is reflected in actions that involve treating a person on the basis of a stereotype or as if he or she a unique person is invisible these acts stress racial trauma the notion that racism is associated with trauma has been proposed by many scholars for instance loo et al s study of ptsd among asian veterans found that race related stress was a strong and significant predictor of ptsd they stated that the stressful effects of exposure to combat and additive and that cumulative racism can be experienced as traumatic their findings are consistent with the body of research previously cited regarding the relation between discrimination and psychological symptoms and they extend the effects of racism beyond african americans comas diaz and jacobsen argued that behavioral exhaustion and physiological distress it wounds healthy narcissism and impairs coping because racism often causes confusion disillusionment and racial mistrust scurfield and mackey argued exposure to race related trauma structural circumstances such as poverty and residential segregation work related experiences assault and life event stress however they point out that stressors vary in severity frequency and onset of exposure severity of exposure to racism was discussed by scurfield and mackey who proposed that severity could range from life threatening physical them the most severe acts would be physical violence while moderately severe acts are related to direct exposure to race based stressors in the form of verbal abuse or interpersonal racial encounters milder acts were described as those that were indirect and stemmed from stereotypes thus the most severe race based stressors are physical in nature which is consistent with the parameters for ptsd mackey
with asthma respiratory problems were more thoroughly assessed by applying the eight item validated and widely used and fruit consumption students indicated the smoking behavior that resembled them the most on an eight level scale ranging from i smoke at least once a day to i have never smoked not even one puff and rated the number of cigarettes smoked in total another item assessed intention to quit smoking students intending to quit completed validated measure from bogers et al and several determinants were based on oenema and brug further items on age gender and countries of birth of respondent and parents to determine ethnic background assessed socio demographic characteristics in addition students registered their starting and finishing time of completing the advice on fruit intake feedback on the reported health for each topic including smoking and additionally a referral if relevant the fruit advice was derived from the web based tailored food advice for adults from oenema and brug with adjustments made for students this advice is based on weinstein s precaution adoption process intake the fruit advice applied personalized and normative feedback as proposed by weinstein s model students were encouraged to make a printout of their personal fruit advice furthermore students were invited to click further to see their status for each topic that was assessed by the questionnaire students with a score feedback table i shows the risk feedback topics criteria and cutoff points and the number of students who received riskfeedback a score indicating good health or health behavior would lead to positive feedback a score in between the cutoff points for risk feedback and positive feedback would generate feedback pointing to possible elf esteem and general health cutoff points for each chq scale were based on existing reference datasets of the chq among adolescents the lowest each chq scale in the reference data indicated a score for each chq scale and this score was used as the cutoff point for riskfeedback referrals included an appointment to see the physician nurse for students at risk with the reason mentioned if students were not referred based on their assessment they could check a box for a self referral the details on time and place of consultation were sent by mail table i number of students in the internet group who received a higher score indicating more health criterion for risk feedback is scoring one or more of the scales with a risk score physical functioning ior mental health self esteem or general health bcriterion for risk feedback is having the complaint but not being checked by a physician for the complaint ccriterion for risk feedback is if patient ever had last year had wheezing and last year had dry cough or last year had wheezing during exercise and last year had dry cough and not being checked by a physician for asthma dcriterion for risk feedback is at least smoking once in a while and not already quitting smoking ecriterion for risk feedback is eating pieces each day students in the group received generic appropriate a referral was sent by mail all students in the group had been offered the opportunity to self refer themselves already in the assessment on health health behavior in both groups the criteria for referral were being at risk for one or more of the selected chq scales or having self referred english and changed from color to gray scale each star resembles your personal score for a specific health aspect a score in the light gray area indicates good health in the middle gray area indicates some potential problems and in the dark area indicates that you may have a risk for that aspect for an explanation of each health aspect you can click on the star intervention contents of consultation as mentioned previously the physician nurse received each referred student prior to consultation via a different mode for each group for referred students in the internet group the physician nurse received via the internet a printable summary of the self reported health risks and problems the physician nurse also had access to the complete electronic feedback for students as well as to all individual items in a printed health behavior questionnaires and a printed spss output summarizing the students health risks and problems consultation was the same for both groups namely a medical examination going into specific risk areas and referring students to other professionals when necessary javascript access to the questionnaire was password protected with the student s name not being recorded and only identifiable by the researcher and physician nurse data were sent to the server in a scrambled format the screen displaying the questionnaire used two separate frames the left one displaying a list of topics and the right one only permitted after answering all items each physician nurse received a personal login code from the researcher to access the internet tool evaluation of intervention indicators of feasibility the following aspects determined the feasibility of the intervention attendance reach the percentage of students completing of the consultation which was compared between the internet and groups duration the completion times of the assessment and separately the consultation were compared between groups in addition a researcher registered after the school sessions whether the class finished the whole of the feedback they had read two four months later students were asked whether they had referred to the fruit advice after the session the reading of the fruit advice was compared between groups administration modes students evaluated the ease and pleasantness of the administration modes for the assessment fruit advice and electronic advice except for the electronic advice indicators of acceptability users assessed various aspects of acceptability of the intervention comparisons between groups were made between the students evaluations of individualization and enjoyability of the fruit advice formatted on a found interesting was measured with answers from not interesting to very interesting on a five point likert scale in both modes students rated the whole session on a scale from
of enjoying learning experiences the result of this study supports that notion the moderate correlation between mastery goals and situational interest and the significant coefficient in the regression analysis suggest that mastery goals had a strong influence on the recognition of situational interest in class the students with high mastery goals in the softball unit were more likely to recognize the interest of learning tasks than were their counterparts with lower mastery we confirm that mastery goals are likely to be associated with students affective involvement in physical education we did not expect the weak but significant correlation between performance avoidance goals and situational interest in the study the significant coefficients in the regression analysis support the finding that the performance avoidance goal was also a positive predictor of students situational interest it was likely enjoyed the learning experiences but at the same time wanted to avoid performing poorly in such a visible and public context the students relatively high score in performance avoidance goal and the moderate correlation between mastery goals and performance avoidance goals seemed to support our postulation in physical education students individual interest in an activity may strengthen we expected that the students individual interest in softball was associated with situational interest the correlation analysis revealed a weak but significant correlation between individual interest and situational interest furthermore the regression analysis indicated that individual interest in softball was a positive indicator of situational interest the findings are congruent with chen and darst s results that students with a high individual interest in an activity to view the activity as more interesting and attractive influence of achievement goals on learning the correlation between mastery goals and knowledge gain suggests that a mastery goal orientation is related with knowledge acquisition in the softball unit furthermore the results from the regression analyses lend additional support that students mastery goals are a significant predictor of their knowledge learning it is likely that students mastery goals in learning have played a role of enhancing students cognitive learning to a certain extent high mastery goals may result in a better knowledge achievement however we did not find correlations between mastery goals and steps taken in class or between mastery goals and skill gain the results in the corresponding regression analyses also indicate that mastery goals were not a significant predictor of skill gain and steps the results support the notion that a general motivation construct may have limited influence on students skill learning and physical engagement in physical education researchers have suggested in classroom based studies that performance approach goals are likely to have positive associations with learning achievement performance avoidance goal often has deleterious consequences for performance however did not support that as shown in tables and we did not find performance approach and avoidance goals associated with knowledge and skill gains the inconsistency of our results with those from classroom research support the motivation specificity phenomenon as charness and schultetus argued each domain or subject has a different set of demands that directly determine how best to quantify performance and what types of tasks would the specificity of content domains as an important organizational framework has a significant function on an individual s motivation we suspect that compared with classroom based content the content and context specificity of physical education may influence the effectiveness of the achievement goal construct on learning in school physical education there are multiple objectives under such circumstances it is reasonable to assume that students pursuing those other goals may dramatically attenuate the function of performance goals on learning in the students high situational interest and relatively low performance approach goal seemed to support this assumption we did not expect to fmd that performance avoidance goals usually defined as a negative orientation for learning in classroom research correlated to a small extent with students steps taken in the classes the significant coefficient in regression supported the view that performance avoidance goals were associated with physical engagement given the fact that there was a positive correlation between performance avoidance goals and mastery goals but no connection between performance avoidance goals and learning achievement measures we suspected that there was a social goal at work in the softball unit it is likely that pursuing a social bonding and avoiding peer rejection might have influenced students to accept performance avoidance goals in order to work for a socialization need the results are consistent with guan mcbride and xiang and seem to indicate that pursuing competence based goals and pursuing other than competence based goals can be nested harmoniously within students motivation in physical education in terms of the importance of social goals on students learning and engagement in school and physical activity engagement future studies are needed to further determine the nature of the social goal and its impact on student learning in physical education influence of interest on learning in contrast to achievement goals individual interest in softball had a significant influence on knowledge and skill gains the contribution of individual interest to the knowledge and skill gain as shown in the regression models suggests that individual interest as an indicator of motivation specificity had a significant influence on learning in the softball unit this finding supports the view that the learners individual interest has an independent role in their cognitive learning as the result of high individual interest in a subject students cognitive involvement during learning is more likely to be effortful and planned worthy of note is that the regression model of individual interest and achievement goals on skill gain accounted only for the variance indicating a weak overall contribution of individual interest and achievement goals we suspected this result might be associated with the specialty of motor skill learning researchers have documented that motor skill and knowledge learning are highly related but also have different characteristics as opposed to cognitive understanding of the movement motor skill learning in significantly dependent on individual differences in strength coordination and experience the findings revealed in this study support
in goal orientations in physical education settings treasure and roberts who investigated students disposition toward mastery and performance achievement goal orientations in a british adolescent population difference associated with the dispositional goal orientation although most of the studies in physical education have reported that the mastery goal orientation is predictive of intrinsic motivation the motivational effects of the dual goal construct on learning remain to be seen some researchers have found that achievement goals may have very limited direct impact on learning in physical in the berlant and weiss study the association of achievement goal orientations with students visual recognition and recall of correct tennis forehand groundstroke skill was weak students learning badminton multigame units and fitness have produced consistent results there has been significant development in achievement goal theory in recent as branches of performance goals individuals with performance approach goals focus on seeking favorable judgments of competence relative to others individuals with performance avoidance goals focus on avoiding unfavorable judgments of competence researchers believe that a better understanding of achievement goals with performance approach performance avoidance and the motivational function of achievement goals on learning on the basis of emerging evidence in classroom research using the trichotomous framework researchers have demonstrated that this framework may better explain students motivation and learning than does the dual goal construct physical education the content of physical education is characterized by the competitive nature of sports and physical activities in this setting students learn through physical training that is often experienced in front of their peers although most students enjoy physical activity and sport experiences they are likely in this performance centered environment to fear the embarrassment that may derive from doing a task wrong or this context we believe creates an opportunity for researchers to examine the trichotomous framework in relation to students learning in physical education interest in the interest based motivation theory researchers suggest that interest arises as individuals interact with the environment interest motivates interest has been conceptualized as individual interest and situational interest individual interest is an individual s relatively enduring predisposition of preference for certain objects events and activities situational interest is the momentary appealing effect of an activity on an individual in a particular context and at a particular moment interest researchers have found that individual interest is developed person s constant and consistent interaction with certain activities interest is based on increased knowledge positive emotions and increased value in these activities situational interest however is generated by certain stimulus characteristics in an activity and tends to be shared among individuals its motivation effect is generally short lived in learning situational interest results from learners recognition features associated with a specific learning task adopting the theoretical framework of interest chen revealed that students situational interest is dependent on a diverse personal interpretation of meanings in the activities and learning tasks after further testing the construct chen darst and pangrazi reported that those physical activities that provide new information demand high level attention can generate high situational interest in middle school students researchers have demonstrated with more recent data that situational intere st is directly associated with physical activity intensity measured in steps taken in the lessons whereas individual interest is associated with students knowledge and skill performance the researchers suggested on the basis of those findings that situational interest may have strong motivation on students engagement in the learning process but one must to develop the students individual interest to enhance learning achievement motivation is a complex process involving many factors such as interest and goals that influence behavioral responses although interest research in physical education has provided limited data showing the connection between individual and situational interest and various learning outcomes not as strong as theoretically predicted it stands to reason that a single motivation construct may hardly provide a plausible explanation for students motivation and learning in an achievement setting as complex as school we believe that studying motivation processes by tapping into two or more motivation constructs may potentially help us to better understand motivated learning research questions adopting the integrated perspective we examined the influence of trichotomous achievement goals and interests on learning in physical education in addition because learning in physical education should take place in a physically active manner for students to receive health benefits while learning knowledge and skills we also explored whether the motivational constructs could influence students in class physical activity the specific research questions were as follows to what extents do achievement goals and individual interest influence students recognition of situational interest to what extent do achievement goals and interest predict learning achievements to what extent do achievement goals and interest influence in class physical activity significant in that we attempt to explore the direct link between the trichotomous achievement goal framework interest and measurable learning achievements in physical education this effort may help extend our understanding about the effects of different motivation constructs on learning the information will facilitate physical educators to design appropriate motivational strategies to enhance students learning in physical education study were sixth graders selected from three middle schools in the baltimore and washington metropolitan areas all three schools used a min block day rotating schedule students had a physical education class on every day among the students were unable to complete all the measures because of absences and other reasons the final sample consisted of students we received forms and student assent forms before data collection content we chose a softball unit offered in all three schools as the learning content for two reasons first softball is a physical activity that involves both cognitive and physical tasks in order to achieve the learning goals second softball is one of the popular activities offered in middle school physical education curriculum in this area the study of softball is likely to have broad implications for teaching in middle school physical education the softball unit was weeks long in all three schools the class size ranged from students the teacher taught the unit
can be seen that increasing the pre factor predicts a slower decay of the particle number concentration this is expected because according to equation a larger pre factor implies a smaller radius of gyration and also smaller collision and mobility radii of an aggregate figure indicates that the value of kg has a considerable effect on the simulation result comparing figures and it can be found that the variation of the calculated particle number evolution as kg varying from to is even more than that as df varying from to results in figures indicate the dependence of the simulation to the value of kg used for the fly ash provided that the models for the acoustic mechanisms can describe the agglomeration phenomena a df was obtained by setting kg while it is if kg and about if kg nevertheless the df values obtained here for two kinds of particles are both in the range of reported in the literature for the aggregates formed under various mechanisms taken for the accuracy of these values fitted from the simulations it should be noted that the above simulations were performed with the fractal dimension and the pre factor fixed while in practice the morphology of the aggregates may evolve during the agglomeration process in brownian coagulation di stasio et al observed that the in flame soot aggregates then gradually increasing to a higher value kostoglou and konstandopoulos found that the mean fractal dimension of the aggregates gradually decreased to an equilibrium value when simulating the agglomeration starting from the aggregates with a certain df in acoustic agglomeration the morphology evolution of the aggregates is expected to occur particularly in the agglomeration starting from the primary particles just as the of the aggregates formed may be related to complex mechanisms including collision agglomeration re arrangement and breakage of the aggregates because of the strong interactions under acoustic treatment all these mechanisms may play a role in the evolution of the aggregate morphology as well as the mean fractal dimension for example sarabia et al observed two types of soot aggregates formed in ultrasonic agglomeration the aggregates of fine particles clustered about a central part obviously the latter has a fractal dimension larger than the former the formation of the more compacted aggregates may be attributed to the aggregate structure rearrangement or to the strong ballistic collision in sound waves however until now there is still lack of quantitative data of the morphology and its evolution of the aggregates of the complex mechanisms involved in the morphology evolution therefore in the present work we assume the fixed fractal parameters while focus the study to examine the effect of the aggregate structure on the acoustic agglomeration process nevertheless such an assumption may affect the accuracy of the simulation considering a larger df at between primary particles the predicted particle number concentrations should be higher than those shown in figures therefore quantitative study is necessary and important to explore the structure evolution of the aggregates formed in sound field in order to accurately describe the acoustic agglomeration process of solid particles the modelling developed here need be improved to include more detailed the mechanisms and the for two kinds of particles also need be validated with the experimental result evolution of particle size distribution during acoustic agglomeration the evolution of particle size distribution in acoustic agglomeration is also important the predicted particle size distributions of fly ash and particles at successive times are presented in figure for fly ash it can be seen in figure that from to rapidly many particles larger than gm and even some lager than gm are formed with the treatment time increasing more agglomerations occur consequently the smaller particle number decreases and the growth of larger particles continues the particle size distribution is gradually turning from a lognormal to a bimodal distribution although the large sized mode is flatter and much lower than the small sized one because of the wide particle size difference the prediction with the polydispersity yields a faster agglomeration rate during the early stages than that with the mono disperse assumption the predicted evolutions of the mass mean particle diameter for two cases are compared in figure it can be seen that in both cases qualitatively the calculated mass mean diameters increase to reach a maximum value and then gradually during the late stages is mainly due to the wall deposition of larger particles however quantitatively the calculated profiles in two cases are significantly different although the prediction of using monodisperse assumption finally catches the calculated value of its counterpart after about s it predicts a much slower increase during the early stages and a much smaller peak value achieved the evolution of the number mean particle diameter figure also demonstrates a significant difference between two cases considering the polydispersity predicts a gradual decrease of the number mean particle diameter with time while applying the mono disperse assumption yields a gradual increase of the one this difference is explained as follows the small particles agglomerate to form larger particles size particles however the increase in the number concentration of these larger particles is always slower than the decrease in the number concentration of smaller particles as a result with the initial polydispersity considered the number mean particle size gradually decreases along the process although the corresponding mass mean particle size increases particularly during the early stages in contrast size is the minimum particle agglomeration always leads to the growth of all particles and consequently the gradual increase of the number mean particle diameter in the system although this increase is slower when compared to that of the mass mean size besides the mean sizes the predicted evolutions of the standard deviation with time are also different between two cases of to a maximum of more than at about seconds and then gradually decreases to at the end of the process using the monodisperse assumption the predicted size distribution is always narrower than that predicted by its counterpart the standard
to developing an anthropology of christianity might be the most difficult ones to overcome in the long run even as i continue to admit that the culture reluctance to jettison it is based on several observations first none of those who argue that the anthropological interest in difference is fundamental explain why taking this to be the case demands that we must also see continuity thinking as unimportant second it is fairly obvious that for better or for worse otherness has long since started to loosen its grip on the anthropological imagination to stress discontinuity over continuity where the anthropological disinclination to look discontinuity in the eye it is also true that historians have not traditionally shared anthropologists determination to study otherness and this too surely contributes to their openness to studying christianity but the fact that approaches to otherness and approaches to discontinuity in time appear to vary in step with one another between the disciplines indicates the depth of their imbrication and speaks to the difficulty of arguing that logy s neglect of christianity along with arguing that the commitment to otherness more than that to discontinuity has shaped the anthropological avoidance of christianity peel keller and coleman further suggest that if anthropology has had trouble with discontinuity it also should have found it hard to engage other world religions such as islam and buddhism that also on these world religions then continuity thinking must not be as important a factor as i claim it is this is a provocative point one way i am inclined to answer it is to note that on my reading which is admittedly not as thorough as that of specialists in these areas the anthropologies of islam and buddhism have not much stressed discontinuity issues i see the for example and i see some of the ways the little great tradition divide has been handled in the anthropology of buddhism as framing buddhism s potentially discontinuous relations with local cultures in ways that do not prevent them from studying people as buddhists and making comparisons across cases furthermore as launay has recently argued for africanist anthropology such as islam as a strong force for discontinuity they are in fact likely to avoid focusing upon it there is certainly room for more comparative work to be done looking at trends in the handling of discontinuity time and change in various branches of the anthropology of religion but until we have an argument on the table that demonstrates that discontinuity has been central to work on other world religions i do not in producing the absence of an anthropology of christianity a final critical point directed at the prominent place i give to continuity thinking is keller s observation that since anthropologists working in various places have studied all manner of time concepts discontinuous models of time should not be unfamiliar or difficult for them to handle the literature models of time i would note though that in my experience discussions of such models are not thick on the ground gell s brilliant reanalysis of both leach s discussion of alternating time and barnes s critique of leach in the name of cyclical time shows that both of these exotic models of time are based on the same kinds of ideas of linear progressive time similar analysis showing that they do not confront us with the problems of discontinuity that christian models put so much to the fore furthermore following bloch s influential work on how models of time are distributed across cultural domains anthropologists studying time have also been able to cordon off exotic models of time in the parts of their accounts that deal with ritual and needs to when studying christian concepts of discontinuous time although keller s reminder that anthropologists have not shied away from looking at time cross culturally remains a valuable one for these reasons i do not think it proves that discontinuity has not in the past presented a problem for anthropologists the study of some kinds of cultural change for barker continuity and change are too broad and ambiguous as categories to be useful harris argues that surely the play of continuity and discontinuity is part of everyone s temporal experience a point echoed by peel and maxwell as well schieffelin adds that an anthropology of christianity should be a productive context for i anticipated some objections along the lines that continuity and discontinuity are both the ever present and hence it is inappropriate to focus on discontinuity i answered such bald criticisms there by noting that i was responding to an existing anthropological bias toward continuity and that until that bias becomes less prevalent anthropologists will have to stress discontinuity if they i have just culled from the responses go in the direction of such bald criticism rather i read them as taking up one of the broadest ambitions i had in writing the article which was to push us toward formulating more precise and varied models of cultural change than we currently have models that can comprehend discontinuity but that can also give us nontrivial would not only identify the presence of both continuous and discontinuous elements in any cultural situation but allow us to explain why specific cultural elements persist or change they would problematize continuity as well as discontinuity rather than treating the former as in need of no explanation i sketch a model designed to accomplish some of this work in the section of the article cultural change in these terms that come up in the course of the responses luhrmann addresses the model of change i present directly and very elegantly develops a socially informed cognitive and developmentalist framework that brings some psychological realism to an argument i presented in wholly culturalist terms her conception of change as the socialization of interpretive in people s believe in orientations to the world my cultural approach to these matters becomes crucial at the point at which she writes about studying the social
members art this argument also implies conceptual dependence dutton for instance gives an argument to show that a concept of art is part of the common heritage of human culture assume that baule carvings are art this assumption will be backed by a theory of art a statement of what makes some items works of art dutton proposes that artworks are items that have some sufficient subset of the following traits they evoke sensuous pleasure in experience express emotion or feeling afford intense imaginative attention belong to or react against a traditional style are skillfully made or performed or symbolize or represent baule carvings are art because they have all or many of these traits since there is no baule art unless some baule have a concept of art some baule have a concept of art arguments like this positive arguments arrive at the thesis that some members of a given culture have a concept of art via the claim that there is art abstracting from the case of the baule and from the specifics of dutton s theory of art leaves us with this argument form an item is a work of art if is some artefacts in culture are so there is art in cd there is art in only if some members of have a concept of art so some members of have a concept of art from another as regards the theory of art negative arguments differ from each other as regards the possession conditions of the concept of art whereas positive arguments have an empirical premise about the existence of art in a culture negative arguments have an empirical premise about members of a culture having a concept of art and whereas positive arguments reach a conclusion about possession of the concept of art negative arguments reach a conclusion since negative and positive arguments both imply the price of denying in reply to the negative arguments is to break the positive arguments thus anyone who accepts a positive argument will leave unchallenged in the negative arguments iv arguments for concept dependence what motivates conceptual dependence is obvious enough if it is false then a culture where art is made and yet nobody has a concept of art art making is a complex and involved business which could not be conducted by anyone lacking a conception of the business however to see what these intuitions amount to an argument is needed here are two neither is conclusive institutional theories of art imply on such theories an item is a work of art just in case it counts as art in context different institutional theories according to george dickie s version of an institutional theory an item counts as art only if it is an artefact made by an artist who intends it for presentation as art to an art world public whose members recognize that it is so presented hence nothing is a work of art unless its maker presents it as art and it is a short step from this result to moreover this is not a special feature of dickie s version of an institutional it is a general rule that the attitude we take towards a social phenomenon is partly constitutive of the phenomenon if everybody stops believing that things like the coins in my pocket are money then they cease to be money all institutional theories of art imply that art is partly constituted by attitudes which involve the very concept of art though different theories characterize the attitudes differently of art is true and all institutional theories of art imply is true the trouble with this argument is that institutional theories of art are controversial a case for that hinges on any such theory is not at the moment terribly convincing more importantly not everyone who subscribes to is sympathetic to institutional theories of art davies is mildly sympathetic dutton is not a better argument for would exploits the thought that art making is an intentional activity making art necessarily involves an intention to make art but one cannot intend to make art unless one has a concept of art so any culture with art is a culture whose members have a concept of art call this the argument from intentions the argument is valid but there is reason to think it unsound the premise that one cannot intend to make an unless one has a concept of fs however there is reason to doubt the premise that making art necessarily involves an intention to make art true enough art making is a necessarily intentional activity works of art are artefacts and artefacts are items made intentionally nevertheless it does not follow that they are made with the specific intention to make art they might be made define making accidentally as follows accidentally makes an just in case intends to make a an is not a fails to make a and in failing to make a makes an intending to make a loaf of bread i blunder and make a doorstop instead intending to make a whats it i blunder and make an artwork instead i might pull off this feat without having a concept of art ultimately this does not impeach the argument from intentions there is the art in a culture if there is quite a bit of it is made by accident given a choice between the hypothesis that a culture outputs thousands of artworks per year purely by accident and the hypothesis that members of the culture intend to make art reason directs accepting that they are intended to be art compare brazilians may loudly protest that they kick balls around in a way that conforms to the rules of association football purely by but their kicking balls around in that way is despite their protestations good reason to attribute to them the intention to play football the possibility of accidental art only shows that the negative and positive arguments require an amended version of cd there is
are usually isotropic on rather short timescales such that no observable dipolar coupling remains these parts are therefore detected only to be successful and to observe a intensity plateau for indq it is necessary to remove these contributions by suitable fitting and subtraction of the tails tails are also observed in relaxation curves they are schematically shown in fig multicomponent fits of transverse relaxation data are always subject to potentially uncontrolled interdependencies are unknown the mq experiment has some features that provide a more reliable separation of different components in the case of permanent elastomers singly exponential tails as observed in our work on dry and swollen pdms networks are easily identified by straight lines in a semi logarithmic plot of irmq see fig notably the amount of the mobile contributions larger fractions of such chains appear isotropically mobile when the entanglement effect on their ends is reduced by arm retraction processes fitting and subtracting them and using eq leads to indq curves such as the ones in fig that are temperature independent over the whole investigated range in the case of styrene butadiene rubber and sometimes since these polymers are less mobile this component may be associated with dangling chains while the long time tail is attributed to low molecular weight sol components the associated value of is usually long enough to be reliably fitted and subtracted due to the similarity of its apparent to the long time a second exponential tail the trick to solve this problem is based on the notion that idq iref in the longtime limit as shown in fig the fraction is more reliably identified and fitted in a semi logarithmic plot of iref vs sdq where the interval over which the component decays linearly is substantially chains respectively the fraction a of network chains is easily obtained as a when iref is normalized to for sdq it should be mentioned that the amplitudes and to a larger extent the apparent relaxation times of the contributions and are affected by the long time performance of the pulse sequence which in turn depends on the rf ng chain contributions cannot be separated in the case of pdms where the apparent is long and these effects dominate this is also why quantitative interpretations of long values should be avoided given all ambiguities however the initial rise of indq is only weakly affected even when the mobile contributions are not modelled and subtracted precisely contributions can also removed by appending a second fixed dq excitation reconversion sequence block before the actual incremented dq pulse sequence the nested phase cycle is constructed such that dq coherences are selected by the first block while the second block is used to probe either idq or iref the success of this procedure is during which spin exchange may occur the dq pre selection of course excites segments associated with different orientations of the rdc tensor with respect to with different efficiency which means that the isotropic powder average needed for an unambiguous analysis of the final build up curve is broken this effect is demonstrated in fig for the case of sz in re equilibration note that for experiments with short sz it is important to construct the phase cycle such that only coherences of order are retained during this interval a powerful experimental strategy yet to be used in actual applications is to monitor the recovery of the isotropic slow reorientations of the rdc tensor are possible processes explaining the behavior and temperature dependent studies can be used to differentiate between the two scenarios considering that slow reorientations are probably absent in permanent elastomers spin diffusion is the most likely candidate thus using spin diffusion coefficients that can be or the size of regions of different cross link density in heterogeneous rubbers limitations of transverse relaxometry as mentioned hahn echo experiments are a popular alternative to mq experiments in rubber applications in the framework of the andersen weiss theory the echo intensity iecho can be evaluated from eqs and on the basis of a slow motion model for the rdc tensor in fig with a decay time of ss is explicitly considered this yields a three parameter fitting function for the network component should phenomenologically parametrize the influence of the initial fast decay of the correlation function and is often neglected as will be unambiguously proven in section the slow motion model is incorrect yet since it using proton hahn echo experiments at proton frequency in combination with the eq luo et al have studied residual dipolar couplings in a series of styrene butadiene rubber filled with different amounts of carbon black and silica in agreement with the earlier work in the field their data was interpreted as indicating a substantial increase of the effective cross link density with increasing resulting from parameter interdependencies which is directly proven by the observation of a contradictory trend when the same samples are investigated at mhz and analyzed in the same way therefore slight field dependent changes in the shape of the relaxation curves which are of course not covered by the model underlying eq bias the fitting results in combination with susceptibility contrast around nanoscopic void spaces appears to be a possible candidate in fact the rubber matrix turned out to be virtually unaffected by the presence of filler as clearly corroborated by proton mq experiments conducted on the same sample series at mhz see fig in this graph both the average rdc from a regularization analysis and results the values differ due to the way the average is taken notably as shown in fig fitting the mhz data with the static limit fitting function eq yields the same results the corresponding fits are of course only poor representations of the actual data but they do provide a stable average over the existing elastomers another even more subtle artifact in rdc determinations arises when elastomers with different chemical functionalities are investigated by proton hahn echo relaxometry at high
i would like to consider two compelling the central sierra that present views of language practice at variance with those of the cacique principal rupaychagua s as the following testimonies of indios ladinos reveal there was nothing transparent about the standardized medium through which they were to communicate christian doctrine in during an idolatry prosecution in the town of san pedro de acas in the following declaration which reveals the simultaneous use of two types of quechua by the local native villagers in the aforesaid town the witness heard night time proclamations to abstain from salt and pepper before the feast of san juan and corpus and thought the criers did not speak his general language of the inca but used their maternal language instead the indian men and women told this witness in the general language of the that the elders and leaders of the kin groups said to abstain from salt and pepper and that it was time to pray to their ancestors the linguistic information conveyed is incomplete but it appears that the native residents of san pedro de acas were familiar enough with the standardized quechua spoken by chaupis yauri to inform him of the night time proclamations of local however the parish assistant did not understand the maternal quechua of his informants the speech he used to carry out his religious tasks approximated the southern form instituted for evangelization two years earlier in the andean ethnic lords of chav de pariarca in the district of hua nuco filed legal charges against the priest francisco de guevara citing among his many pastoral failings the problem of linguistic incompetence to support the litigants called the indio ladino and parish cantor juan malqui to testify before the presiding ecclesiastical judge according to malqui the priest could not confess the parishioners even though he was well skilled in ecclesiastical quechua the aforesaid priest does not know the general language of the village well and for this reason many indians do not receive confession since he does not know the to confess them the priest does not know this language the general language of the newly converted indians but he knows the other general language of the inca quite well and here one understands only the language of the newly converted indians malqui identified two forms of quechua coexisting in chav de pariarca on the one hand la lengua general and on the other la language known to the parish priest it was common for missionary clergy like guevara though trained for pastoral ministry in the ecclesiastical language to encounter difficulties in the field even in townships where quechua was the maternal tongue despite his command of cuzco based quechua the pastor could not carry out his basic sacramental duties the statement of juan malqui offers unique insight into what andean officials of mean malqui departed from the official definition of lengua general adopted by the third council which identified the language of cuzco as the one and only lingua franca disseminated since inca times and instead granted the quechua of his village the favored status of general language his classification of the linguistic variant of hua nuco as lengua general may reflect knowledge of what the administrative language of tawantinsuyu actually was thereby raising new questions true language of inca administration equally significant malqui s appropriation of the term conferred status to a linguistic form of the central region that conciliar authorities had censured for its corrupt sonority and lexicon the language of chinchaysuyu in this sense the codified language of the clergy made little impression upon native parishioners living far from the former inca capital central quechua was for them the language of prestige the third council produced a certain degree of linguistic homogenization and influenced it considerably as a written language with minor variations quechua devotional literature published after the provincial council reflected the same orthographic and lexical norms as did the few extant sources of quechua writing produced outside the ecclesiastical establishment such as the correspondence of the andean anonymous manuscript of huarochir furthermore idolatry trial documentation shows that missionary activity introduced southern peruvian quechua to central mountain regions where the language had not existed previously and generated local native speech practices that displayed features of the cuzco based dialect beyond religious communication the church sponsored southern variant also became a medium for commercial ethnic lords and spaniards in northern and southern provinces nevertheless andean subjects who were called upon to mediate the new language entered into a quagmire of conflicting opinions about language use and in their testimony to the visitadores they documented language practices that clashed with missionary norms parish assistants largely questioned ecclesiastical definitions of the authoritativeness of the lengua general del ynga indios ladinos asserted the indigenous values of cultural variability that defined tawantinsuyu and exposed in the process the church s imperfect control over the models of linguistic expression it sought to introduce according to these officials the multiple languages of the region manifested far from linguistic corruption an ancient history of linguistic pluralism that continued to prosper in colonial chinchaysuyu quechua an alternative approach to evangelization the testimony of indios ladinos on the limited inroads of ecclesiastical quechua stirred tensions between third council policies and new models of evangelization that began to develop in the seventeenth century andean church officials alerted ecclesiastical inspectors to the embarrassing fact that the native parishioners could language of the basic catechism their courtroom declarations show that the artificiality of standardized quechua rendered its usage highly unstable especially in the central provinces acknowledging the gap between the ecclesiastical language and the speech of local native communities a group of clerics many of them peruvian born and native speakers of quechua began to question the tried and tested policies emanating from the metropolitan see following the attitude of the diego de molina who questioned the effectiveness of cuzco speech in the lima archdiocese creole linguists such as the native huanuquen and distinguished chair of quechua at
of factor sensitivities and risk premia for the arbitrage pricing theory economic forces and the stock market market and industry factors in stock price behavior the journal of business supplement on security prices combining geographic information as an alternative to resolving the difficulty in the traditional modelling of locational influence on property values in a particular area the objective of this paper was to compare the relative performance of models that apply locational value residual surface and the traditional multiple regression models in the prediction of residential property values a controlled sample of single and double storey it was found that models applying lvrs were marginally better than the traditional models in predicting property values introduction real estate is a multi dimensional heterogeneous commodity characterized by durability and structural inflexibility as well as spatial immobility it has a unique bundle of attributes such as accessibility to work transport amenities physical characteristics neighborhood and environmental quality many of these attributes are spatially related in the form of popularly known as location location location hierarchy real estate is spatially unique in which location is an intrinsic attribute that directly determines the quality and market value of the property however modelling the locational factors in property valuation has proved difficult because of the wide which may or may not affect value at a particular time and location furthermore there is little literature consensus as to the best proxy for locational factor measurement multiple regression models are considered a classical and primary technique for explaining and predicting property values whereby locational factors can potentially be taken into account in particular mra has been used to estimate and in the since the it was also applied in other countries such as australia new zealand and singapore but has yet to be widely practiced in malaysia in applying mra valuers identify the data to be specified and measured in quantitative form this task becomes more complicated when the locational influence on property values need to be explicitly identified and modelled of property values has either ignored detailed location analysis or just dealt with it only in a very general sense some researchers have even simply omitted the locational variables an interview with the local valuation based firms and government offices such as rahim co jurunilai bersekutu william talhar raja hamzah ismail co zaki partners aziz disclosed that valuers infer a substantial amount of information about a property from its location based on their local knowledge and experience this article discusses the use of locational value residual surface generated using the combination of geographical information system and multiple regression analysis in a hybrid predictive model that utilizes lvrs to create a locational adjustment factor traditional approaches to modelling location followed by a discussion on value residual surface a brief description of the study area is discussed in the third section data and analysis procedure are discussed in the fourth section section of results and discussion follows then the final part of this paper concludes the study accessibility to shopping employment educational and leisure facilities exposure to adverse environmental effects such as traffic noise and hazard neighborhood amenity perceived levels of neighborhood security from these two key components of location can be isolated ie neighborhood quality and accessibility few however are capable of numeric measurement but be valid representation of the influence especially because of the complex interaction of value factors for example the common approach to examining locational influence on property values is to include a distance variable from the central business district assuming homocentric locations this is based on the traditional location theory that examines the role of accessibility to central locations on property prices there are also theories of multiple nuclei model incorporating the concentric pattern that are more appropriate for analyzing locational influence on property values for example pattern of property values may reflect the influence of satellite towns rather than that of regional centers on the basis of analyzed by using locational dummy variables essentially this is to subdivide a particular geographic area into realistic sub markets or neighborhoods however this could pose modelling constraint in terms of data representativeness when some neighborhoods with too few transactions give rise to small sample problems in the statistical estimation time taken per trip and transportation cost table shows some of the traditional locational proxy variables used in previous regression models as the table shows the above locational factors are represented by discrete neighborhood variables a problem commonly faced in the use of discrete neighborhood variables is the requirement for subjective judgments about the boundaries of each geographic unit and the numeric indicator for geographic problem some researchers have simply asked local valuers or local experts to rank the neighborhood quality there is little consensus however on which variables are the best proxy for neighborhood quality measurement based on actual house price or property physical characteristic or housing quality or ward boundary or should be defined in spatial terms therefore neighborhood quality is when an overarching model is adopted such decisions may lead to disparities or inconsistencies where properties adjoin or close to neighborhood boundaries a hard edge may be implied at such boundaries whereas in reality the varying influence of location may operate far more smoothly and the spatial trends occur as opposed to distinct areas of homogeneous property subsets and highly complex process of discrete measurement of location have encouraged researchers to search for alternative approaches to derive locational compensation factors locational influence within an area can be established through an analysis of value residuals from a location blind model the residuals or the discrepancies between the actual and estimated
single large displacement peak as shown in the time history of section it can also be seen that the vertical dynamic displacement responses due to the moving trains look like the static influence line this is mainly because the bridge is relatively long and the by moving weights from previous discussions one may see that by combining the information on strain response from strain gauges with the information on displacement response from the level sensing stations full interaction between the trains and the bridge can be described the corresponding field measurement results and information can be used for the verification of the numerical model of coupled trainbridge of wind and structural responses recorded by the washms installed in the tsing ma suspension bridge in hong kong during typhoon york on september have been analyzed in this study four particular cases were identified for the purpose of verification of the analytical model for predicting dynamic response of long suspension bridges to high winds and running trains the four cases identified include with two trains running in opposite directions and the bridge with three running trains for each case wind characteristics bridge acceleration responses and bridge displacement responses were analyzed using the measurement data from anemometers accelerometers and level sensing systems respectively the number of trains running on the bridge train speed and train location were identified using the measurement natural frequencies mode shapes and modal damping ratios of the bridge were also discussed the measurement results obtained in this paper will be used to verify the analytical model developed by the authors in the companion paper the field measurement results also clearly demonstrate the dynamic behavior of the bridge and the full interaction between trains and bridge in cross winds bending based on second order eccentricity bonet romero a fernandez and miguel the present paper proposes a simplified method to design slender rectangular reinforced concrete columns with doubly symmetric reinforcement the proposal is based on the computation of the second order eccentricity method from the eurocode it is valid for columns subjected to combined axial loads and either uniaxial or biaxial bending short time and sustained loads and also for normal and high strength concretes it is only suitable for columns with the equal effective buckling lengths in the two principal bending planes it is an extension for biaxial bending of the column model method the current paper is the second part of a research study conducted by the current authors the method was compared with experimental tests from the literature and a high degree of accuracy was obtained precision for sustained loads and biaxial bending was improved in comparison with the method proposed by eurocode the method allows slender reinforced concrete columns to be both checked and designed with sufficient accuracy for engineering practice introduction the utilization of high strength concrete for civil and columns this reduction produces an increase in the slenderness that has to be considered properly in the analysis the design of slender reinforced concrete columns is difficult because the nonlinear behavior of the materials and the equilibrium of the structure in the deformed shape must both be taken into account of no use for everyday design because they require previous knowledge of certain data which are initially unknown and also they are computationally intensive since they require solving many coupled nonlinear equations many a number of authors are therefore interested in simplified most design codes suggest the utilization of simplified the current methods in the codes were developed for normal strength concretes generally most european codes such as bael and design the cross section for a total eccentricity obtained as the addition of the first order eccentricity and the second order eccentricity which takes into account the second order effects the of the axial load the second order eccentricity is proportional to the nominal curvature and the square of the effective buckling length of the column the nominal curvature depends on different factors such as the cracking the creep and the nonlinear behavior of the materials over the past years numerous proposals propose to calculate the nominal curvature as the product of a base curvature and a correction factor which depends on the forces on the column and the long term effects for the draft of the eurocode ec and the mc and for sections with symmetric reinforcement concentrated at the top and the bottom the base curvature denotes the initial yielding state of the column of the compression and tension reinforcement bars of the section nevertheless for the french code bael and the the base curvature denotes for the same type of sections the strain state where simultaneous yielding of the most highly tensioned reinforced bar is produced and the concrete reaches the ultimate strain following that is valid for both normal and high strength concretes moreover many reinforced concrete columns are subjected to biaxial bending and axial loads as a result of their position in the structure the shape of the cross section or the source of the external loads for those cases and for rectangular circular or elliptical columns the draft of the ec computes the second order the load contour method by where mrd mrdz are the moment resistance in the direction and axes respectively med medz are the design moments that are applied in the critical cross section of the support including a nominal second order moment and a is the axial load contour exponent for circular or elliptical sections a and for fcd ac as fyd design axial resistance of section ac as are the gross area of the concrete sections and the longitudinal reinforcement and fcd fyd represents the design strength of concrete and steel according to bonet et this method can give rise to unsafe situations for axial load levels close to the ultimate axial load of the column if the most s this problem is owing to the fact that the load contour method does not take into account the interaction that both curvatures produce in the
short defense facilities an international atomic energy agency database includes incidents of trafficking of nuclear and radioactive material from that have been confirmed by a country s government of these involved nuclear material and involved weapons grade uranium or plutonium with sophisticated technology non weapons grade nuclear material can be processed to material can be used with conventional explosives to build a radiological dispersal device ie a dirty bomb the majority of the incidents involved smugglers seeking to sell the illicit material weapons grade material has been seized by authorities in russia germany the czech republic lithuania bulgaria kyrgyzstan georgia greece and france and in the majority some incidents involved kilograms of material some others involving smaller quantities actually represented samples of stolen material or material at risk of being stolen this clearly points to the vulnerability of russia s first line of defense us efforts to assist the fsu in improving russia s first line of defense are ongoing these mpc a efforts are critically material that existed in russia at the beginning of the seems impossible the sld program seeks to reduce the risk of illicit trafficking of nuclear material through airports seaports and border crossings in russia and other key transit states with the program s initial efforts in the fsu the first sld sensor installation was at moscow s sheremetyevo international and smuggling of nuclear material and to detect and therefore prevent actual smuggling attempts in this paper we describe two types of stochastic network interdiction models that can be used to select the sites to install sensors to minimize the probability a smuggler can travel through a transportation network undetected our two basic models are distinguished with respect to whether our first model in which the smuggler and interdictor have identical perceptions of the network has been developed in collaboration with the los alamos national laboratory sld team and has been implemented for decision support for the sld program our second model in which the interdictor and smuggler can have differing perceptions is an important extension the primary emphasis in this paper is on modeling affect our ability to solve these problems and so important parts of the development are devoted to precisely these issues furthermore we describe and motivate from a modeling perspective a class of valid inequalities that strengthen our simplest model finally in developing our basic model we provide an outline of some of the techniques that have been successfully employed to while there are earlier references the study of network interdiction in operations research began in earnest in the during the vietnam war deterministic mathematical programs to disrupt flow of enemy troops and supplies were developed the problem of maximizing an adversary s shortest path is considered in fulkerson in an adversary s pert network when these are linear programs the interdictor can continuously increase the length of an arc subject to a budget constraint a discrete version of maximizing the shortest path removes an interdicted arc from the network and when the budget constraint is simply a cardinality constraint this the most vital arcs problem are considered in isreali and wood the interdiction problem of removing arcs to minimize flow in an adversary s maximum flow network is considered in wollmer and wood see washburn and wood for game theoretic approaches to related network interdiction problems chern and lin for an interdiction model on a minimum cost flow are deterministic in the following senses first the arc lengths in the shortest path and pert problems and the arc capacities in the maximum flow problem are known with certainty second when increasing the length of an arc in the former problems or when removing or decreasing the capacity of an arc in the latter problem these modifications are deterministic ie with et al to allow for both random arc capacities and interdiction successes an interdiction model with uncertain network topology is developed in hemmecke et al a stochastic interdiction model in which the adversary s response is modeled via a markov decision process is considered in bailey et al the remainder of this paper is organized as follows mixed integer program this model exhibits a min max structure which does not lend itself to computation and so we formulate an equivalent stochastic linear mip that can be solved eg by commercial branch and bound solvers for integer programming we then turn our attention in section to an important special case of snip that arose in our work on the sld program mip can be simplified in this special case the resulting model is called bisnip for bipartite stochastic network interdiction problem because it may be viewed as an interdiction problem on a bipartite network section generalizes snip and bisnip to models we call psnip and bipsnip respectively here the addition of to the snip and our emphasis here is on the simpler bipsnip case in section we describe a class of valid inequalities that we call step inequalities to tighten the mip formulation of bisnip and we present computational results when using these inequalities we conclude the paper in section snip on a general network evader travels in the deterministic version of our model the evader starts at a source node s and wishes to reach a terminal node the model is deterministic in that this origin destination pair is known the probability that the evader can traverse arc a undetected is if the interdictor has not installed a sensor on arc and this probability is if the interdictor detection equipment and so probability of traversing the network without being detected with limited resources the interdictor must select arcs on which to install sensors in order to minimize this evasion identity of the evader is unknown when the interdictor installs the sensors in our basic snip model an evader s identity is uniquely specified by an origin destination pair which is assumed to be governed by a known probability mass function the probability that evader s traverses the network undetected is then a sum of evasion probabilities each weighted basic model equates evader identity
then the activities are incrementally allocated to the different chains where an activity requires more than one unit of one or more resource types it will be allocated to a number of chains equal to the overall number of required resource units it chooses for each activity the first available chain of its required resource type is not greater than the start time of activity assuming that the schedule of figure is taken as input the sorting step will yield the sequence of activities presented in table the procedure takes activity as the first activity on the list and randomly selects five chains to fulfill its resource requirement the only chains available are those belonging to activity so five chains will be created these are chains through in figure activity is then the last activity on these chains the next two activities in the list activities and are treated in a similar way activity is assigned to chains through and activity is assigned to chains and for activity the next activity in the list only the list only two chains are eligible chains and adding activity to these chains we get two chains the procedure continues in this way adding activities to random eligible chains finally yielding the chained pos shown in figure note that resource flow networks and chained poss are related concepts a resource flow network is determined globally for all resource types whereas policella s chains are computed separately for every resource type a closer look at figure because of the randomness in the basic chaining procedure activity is allocated to chains belonging to three different activities this will tie together the execution of activity and and activity and two pairs of previously unrelated activities such interdependencies or synchronization points tend to degrade the stability of the schedule to reduce the number of such synchronization points policella et al develop two additional heuristics ish and ish tries to favor the allocation of activities to common chains by allocating an activity according to the following four steps an initial chain is randomly selected from among those available for activity and the constraint last is imposed if activity requires more than one resource unit then the remaining set of available chains is split into two subsets the set of chains that has last and the set of chains which does not last to satisfy all remaining resource requirements activity is allocated first to chains belonging to the first subset clast and in case this set is not sufficient the remaining units of activity are then randomly allocated to the first available chains of the second subset figure randomly selects the seventh chain imposing the constraint as activity requires more than one resource unit the set of available chains is split into two subsets and and activity is allocated to the first available chain in that is chain as this action empties the set the remaining two resource units will have to be supplied by chains belonging to in our example chains and are selected for activity figure shows the complete chained pos generated by the ish procedure while the ish procedure has reduced the number of resource predecessors of activity from three to two a second type of synchronization point emerges in figure activities and are allocated on different chains but their precedence relation makes the execution of chain dependent of the execution of chain tries to minimize this kind of interdependencies by replacing the first step ish with a more informed choice that takes into account existing ordering relations with those activities already allocated in the chaining process more precisely step of ish is replaced by the following sequence of steps the chains for which their last element last is already ordered with respect to activity are collected in the set pj if pj a chain pj is randomly picked otherwise a chain is last is imposed application of on the problem instance of figure may proceed as follows first activities and will be allocated to the available chains activity will be allocated to chains and because there is no other option the next activity in our list is activity consists of chains through so a random chain will be selected from this set and a will be imposed the remaining two resource units will be obtained by selecting two other chains with last something similar happens to activity the next activity in the list the algorithm will first try to assign this activity to chains with last the immediate predecessor of activity figure presents the complete chained pos generated by the procedure the synchronization point caused by activities and being allocated to different chains disappeared policella et al measure schedule robustness using two metrics fluidity and flexibility the fluidity metric is taken from cesta oddi and smith and defined as follows where h is the project horizon of the problem is the number of activities and float is the width of the allowed distance a solution that is the ability to absorb temporal variation in the execution of activities the hope is that the higher the value of fldt the less the risk of a domino effect that affects the project completion date with ps as the set of the activities that are in progress at time j and the set of activities that have a baseline starting time sz the left hand to activity at time j from other activities than activity if this number is smaller than r there is an unavoidable resource flow between and the exact amount and resource type of the flows on the unavoidable resource arc are irrelevant at this time we are only interested in the fact that an arc must be included in the set of unavoidable resource arcs au the schedule in figure requires an unavoidable resource arc from activity only activity is in progress with because is obviously void and the left hand side of equation evaluates to which is less than the arc should thus be added to au let us investigate
finally it was shown that the self locking method listed last in table i does not yield any information on the lef and should consequently not be used to that end it is difficult to recommend any particular method from and below threshold seems the most reliable as this technique does not require any additional parameters nor is it sensitive to temperature changes the fm am method produced consistent results for all bias currents and seems reliable although the behavior of the nonlinear gain component departed from expectations finally the self mixing scheme is very attractive because it is despite their popularity no methods based on fiber dispersion have been tested the important group of gain and refractive index measurements which were discussed in section vii are also absent such techniques should be included in a complete comparison furthermore several different laser structures should be used these issues will be addressed in the exhaustive lef experiments planned within the cost during the experiments reported on in this paper it is recommended that should similar comparisons be performed in the future a well known dfb laser with the excellent single mode characteristics be included in the tests on one hand this would probably maximize the number of usable techniques for that particular laser and on the other hand it could help explain why some of the techniques fail on gb s widely tunable transceivers abstract we present the first monolithic widely tunable gb s transceivers the devices integrate sampled grating distributed bragg reflector lasers quantum well electroabsorption modulators low confinement semiconductor optical amplifiers and uni traveling carrier high flexibility fabrication scheme combining quantum well intermixing and blanket metal organic chemical vapor deposition regrowth was used to integrate components with performance rivaling optimized discrete devices the eam transmitters demonstrate nm of tuning ghz bandwidth low drive voltage and low power penalty gb s transmission through km dbm of chipcoupled sensitivity at gb s by connecting the transmitters and receivers off chip we demonstrate gb s wavelength conversion i introduction and motivation the monolithic integration of highly optimized photonic devices onto a single chip could revolutionize lightwave communications as it is perhaps the only way to truly revitalize on a single chip allows for a new generation of high functionality photonic integrated circuits with reduced cost size and power dissipation since fiber is not required for light transfer between components pics do not suffer from the device to device coupling problem of systems comprised of discrete components the removal of the coupling loss allows for a reduction and from the device fewer packages are necessary since multiple components can be housed within a single enclosure device reliability is improved from the elimination of possible mechanical movements among the optical elements and from the reduced drive current requirements the potential benefits of monolithic integration fueled the demonstration of distributed feedback laser modulators highly functional balanced heterodyne receivers and integrated mode converters despite this early progress the pic has failed to scale at the same moore s law rate of the integrated circuit this can be largely attributed to the difficulty associated with optimizing the diverse components required in high functionality will necessitate more exotic structures for efficient high speed operation low threshold current high output power diode lasers benefit from maximized modal gain within the active section by placing quantum wells in the center of a symmetric waveguide the optical confinement factor and hence the modal gain can be maximized within the laser the electroabsorption bandwidth and high efficiency to achieve negative chirp along with high modulation efficiency from relatively short devices for gb s operation qw absorber regions are required to exploit the quantum confined stark effect low optical confinement active regions are a popular choice for use in semiconductor optical amplifiers requiring high saturation powers since powers of dbm have been demonstrated the uni traveling carrier photodiode has been developed specifically to eliminate the influence of hole transport on the operation of the photodetector such that the classic space charge effect plaguing the performance of conventional detectors can be avoided since the carrier transport properties are dominated by electrons saturation enabling high power high speed operation defining these unique components on a single chip to realize a high performance transceiver is a demanding task due to the common two dimensional growth and processing platforms used for device fabrication simple integration schemes limit design flexibility imposing a performance penalty within the pic complex schemes with increased flexibility can lead of pics to win out over discrete devices the integrationmust be accomplished in a manner as to provide high device yield and repeatability at low cost ii background methods of monolithic integration in fig we present several integration platforms used for high functionality pic fabrication the butt joint regrowth method in fig offers a high degree of versatility this um well active region followed by the nonplanar selective regrowth of an alternative material structure with the desired band edge in the core of the waveguide the bjr process enables the use of a centered mqw active region for maximized modal gain in the laser and allows each integrated component to possess a unique band edge and or epitaxial structure the drawback to this method is the avoid reflections and losses in the core of the optical waveguide furthermore this method relies on a dielectric mask to prevent deposition in specified areas during growth as the pic functionality is increased to the transceiver level where more active architectures are required the complexity of bjr process is compounded with additional bjr steps single wafer in one growth step in this method a dielectric mask is patterned on the wafer which is then subjected to metalorganic chemical vapor deposition growth growth is limited to regions between the dielectric mask where the thickness and the composition of the growing layers are modified based on the mask pattern this technique allows for the definition of mqw active regions on the same chip
the deed as much more trivial than the accounts that the barrister used to delimit the client s hopes to advice the plea and to attend the plea bargaining session the police protocol interestingly was involved in all these encounters it animated them oriented them and assisted the defence ensemble to weigh up its case bound to his early account the client turns into its its appendix the case the exhaustion of the early defence the first account in this case was more promising again pressing questions were asked by the police the police interview however was only served months later the defence could not work with the protocol but with the co present solicitor s notes according to the solicitor s report the police officer accused her client of having punched a man in front of his house throwing stones at him and even attacking him with a knife just before the interview the complainant selected linda in an identification parade the police had consequently good reasons to choose and prosecute linda as the prime suspect according to the solicitor s notes the police officer opened the interrogation by asking the following question is there anything that you would now like to tell us following that identification parade and following that identification the solicitor reports the following i think it was kim s sister who wanted some cigarettes and so we went to get some i remember that we went back across the wooden gate it was on our way back to her mum s home that we passed a woman and a lad kim told me that the woman was called lucy and that she was having problems with her i thought that the lad with lucy was her boyfriend he was carrying some shopping next to the wooden gate i remember that there is a sort of stony road i do nt know leads as i did nt go up it kim me and the other girl who was about stood at the end of the stony road whilst lucy and the lad were a bit further up it kim and lucy started to argue the lad who i heard was called andy dropped his shopping he seemed to be aggressive i did not join in the argument but stood close to kim i noticed that whilst the argument was going on a police van was stopped at the end of argument lasted i did not join in and i did not in anyway threaten andy or lucy or use any form of violence against them following the argument we went straight back to kim s mother s home the defence work started from this basis presupposing that the prosecution side would come back to these answers next the defence ensemble had to enter an official to disclose all material available that refers to it the deadline for disclosure ahead the solicitor intensified the information flow towards the barrister s office he handed over a bundle comprising the printed and drafted alibi story next to the copied official indictment and the self made summary of the police interview in the instructions the solicitor promoted kim s account as the core of our case would the barrister consent to this high ranking two weeks before the notice the notice of alibi was to be disclosed the solicitor wrote in his instructions to barrister she was interviewed at village police station in the presence of from instructing solicitors she confirmed that she had been in village and met her friend kim and that they had been to kim s house and they then went out with her little sister to buy some cigarettes she stated that they came across a male and female and an argument ensued between that male and female and kim and her sister she stated that the male involved took an aggressive stance she denied that there had been any violence whatsoever between her and the male she believed the male to be called andy and counsel will have noted the aggrieved in this allegation is andy colin who on the november was staying with his sister who lives at kings street village that is on the main counsel housing estate in village and our client has indicated she would not go onto that estate willingly because she has has an ex boyfriend who lives on the estate and would not wish to bump into him what happened here the correspondence did not just strive to deliver necessary information the letter furthermore took the chance to test the story in a protected and friendly environment consequently the solicitor highlights functions and relevancies of the account for instance he points out that the aggressive male in linda s version is identical with the aggrieved solicitor and barrister manage to synchronize their views on the case the instructions allowed the lawyers to refer to and work on a shared object within a protected sphere solicitor and barrister could on this basis deliberate strategic as well as tactical questions once chosen as being at the heart of the case the story imposed some practical steps to take the barrister receives the following report report we have asked our client whether she can provide us with any information that might assist us in tracing kim to see if she was prepared to give a statement we appreciate her assistance is perhaps unlikely but in any event client has not provided any information which could lead to tracing her three months later and without any such witness recruited the account turns into the official defence case it provides the basis for the defence statement disclosed to the prosecution and the court to trigger the secondary disclosure the defendant states that this would be about minutes after they had left the house to buy the cigarettes they came across these people having just crossed a wooden gate on the way back to street the defendant did not know the other two
slopes with the expansion of poaceae further erosion of the surrounding slopes however occurred prior for the construction or reconstruction of irrigated terraces during the late intermediate period the pollen stratigraphy provides support for this interpretation with a temporary phase of zea mays cultivation occurring during a period of renewed peat accumulation between cm this event also corresponds to an increase in disturbed ground indicators namely plantago sp a shallow freshwater this development may have been the consequence of abandonment albeit temporary of the late intermediate period irrigated terrace agricultural system causing reduced interception of surface water and increased water depth within the basin or short term climate change to wetter conditions following lake drainage peat accumulation has continued in the basin to the present day though interspersed the poor pollen preservation between and cm restricts the ability to build upon the sedimentological data succeeding this period the pollen data record an expansion of asteroideae cardueae followed by the colonization of poaceae cyperaceae and plantago sp during a period of renewed peat formation and a temporary phase of zea mays cultivation prior to the onset of the late horizon the presence of mineral sediment which resulted in an increase in the representation of poaceae asteroideae cardueae and cyperaceae and coincided with a phase of zea mays cultivation sometime after ad in conclusion the litho and pollen stratigraphic records indicate three significant phases of landscape instability each characterized by the deposition of mineral rich sediment or reasons for these events remain uncertain although the overwhelming evidence for widespread human occupation of the chicha soras valley during the middle horizon late intermediate period and colonial period clearly suggests that human activities such as agricultural terrace construction would clearly have had a marked impact on the landscape late intermediate period and colonial period presumably on terraces surrounding the mire basin fig radiocarbon dated pollen stratigraphy organic matter content and microscopic charred particles for the mire basin table summary of the pollen stratigraphic data from the mire basin discussion and conclusions marked sub regional variations in their sedimentological and vegetation histories key factors that account for these variations include fluctuations in the nature of dominant weather systems across the andes and also the influence of localized variations in altitude and aspect soil status and geology and for the late holocene in particular human activity andes using predominantly sedimentological and pollen data from mire basins is problematical therefore especially in those areas with a long history of human occupation at those sites where this approach has been successful the absence of direct archaeological evidence for human activity in the area during the period of the climatic event undoubtedly permitted a positive by the ice core records in contrast the long history of human occupation and landscape disturbance in the chicha soras valley may explain the difficulties in recognising an unequivocal signal of shortterm climate change in the mire despite having radiocarbondated palaeoenvironmental records at this site the multiple wetness dryness cannot be confidently correlated with known climatic variations recorded in ice cores and the other palaeoenvironmental archives indeed the evidence provided by the mire basin records suggest a stronger correlation between known periods of human activity based on the archaeological record and phases of landscape stability instability and cultivation based on the palaeoecological records in particular the small settlements located adjacent to terraces suggests that human impact on the surrounding landscape was both intensive and extensive from the middle horizon onwards this does not negate the possibility however of a linkage between stages of agricultural terrace construction abandonment and or reconstruction and short term climate change however the evidence from both the mire basin and geoarchaeological study the evidence for any climatic induced agricultural crises is circumstantial and cannot be correlated with certainty to a post wari period of terrace abandonment in the colca valley of southern peru indeed confidently linking the multiple phases of sedimentological and vegetation change in the mire and stages of terrace construction abandonment and or reconstruction with the wider archaeological the valley as a whole this will enable an integrated cultural and landscape model for the chicha soras valley to be truly assessed in terms of regional events such as demographic changes due to political social and economic factors nevertheless integration of the pedo sedimentary record from the tocotoccasa terrace and the sedimentological and vegetation records from the adjacent mire basin has permitted construction of the tocotoccasa terrace occurred during the early middle horizon with reconstruction taking place during the late late intermediate period this history is in agreement with the mire basin archive which records landscape disturbance and cultivation during the middle horizon and a further period of landscape disturbance ad and ad however the absence of maize pollen in the mire record at other times should not negate the possibility that different crops were being cultivated in the chicha soras valley eg chenopodiaceae amaranthaceae and solanaceae it is unclear however whether abandonment of the terraces occurred prior to reconstruction and if so the reasons involved similar ion was the terrace abandoned soon after reconstruction or were other crops grown and the terrace continued in use albeit possibly in a less intensive episodic manner until the spanish arrived there is certainly clear evidence in the mire basin for landscape disturbance during the late late intermediate and inca periods which continued cultivation finally there remains a possibility that because of the sub sampling resolution adopted in this study maize pollen may be present in other horizons of the mire basin sequence which would suggest greater continuity of cultivation examination of further terrace sections and mire cores in the chicha soras valley is under way to test the tentative linkages identified in this pilot project in particular since it is an ad hoc repair during usage rather than a more systematic regional restoration following a period of abandonment or de intensification it will be important to establish whether its pedo sedimentary record can be replicated in other terrace sections
myocardial strain in these images for the cine dense technique we modified the pulse sequence to acquire two identical pairs of cspamm images and the resulting value of the mean first principle strain was used as an indication of strain noise the principle strains were calculated from the lagrangian strain tensors using eigen vector decomposition phantom validation the rotating phantom comprised a plexiglass cylinder filled with agarose gel and was rotated about the longitudinal axis the cine dense sequence was gated using a notched disc attached to the drive shaft of the phantom and a photodiode photoreceptor circuit the center of rotation of the phantom was estimated from the dense reference images since they inherently have a higher snr than the dense magnitude images a means clustering algorithm was used to separate the phantom from the background the center of rotation this point provided the reference for simulated trajectories which were compared to the measured trajectories to give an indication of tracking accuracy baseline strain noise measurements were also calculated iv results a phase unwrapping image that differ from a neighbor by more than radians unwrapping errors are likely to have occurred within regions isolated by the combined map both the fully automated and the semi automated phase unwrapping algorithms were applied to sets of cine dense images each with view shared frames and displacement encoding applied in the and directions no myocardial quality and discontinuity maps were used to aid a visual inspection of unwrapping errors in the lv if a single error was encountered then the image was deemed incorrectly unwrapped using these measures the fully automated method correctly unwrapped out of the images and the semi automated method correctly unwrapped out of the images analyzed the semi automated method gnitude reconstructed end systolic images for a single volunteer with varying values of are shown in fig the snr becomes significantly lower in the inferior lv wall and the majority of the rv as is increased this signal loss is attributed to intravoxel dephasing and is observed in dense because incomplete intravoxel rephasing occurs when tissue deforms this effect is more pronounced for higher values of the the motion of blood to cause significant intravoxel dephasing during the displacement encoding period the signal in the blood for cycles mm only washes out during diastole the phase unwrapping errors as a function of for both semi automated and fully automated phase unwrapping methods are shown in fig the percentage of incorrectly unwrapped frames increases dramatically for tracking raw and fitted trajectories obtained for selected starting pixel centers on the rotating phantom data are shown in fig the raw trajectories portray a decrease in accuracy with time this is due to decay of the stimulated echo as well as the decrease in interpolation accuracy that accompanies increasing dense displacement vector lengths since a small done using least squares and not the discrete fourier transform approach described above the fitted trajectories provide a clear improvement particularly for the latter frames the unfitted rotating phantom trajectories were compared to their theoretical counterparts yielding a tracking accuracy of pixels these figures were derived using physiological velocity and displacement limits of phantom and a maximum rotation angle of radians no significant improvement is evident for the fitted trajectories because the measured accuracy approaches the mechanical tolerance of the rotating phantom assembly the improvement becomes more pronounced when noise is added to the space data of the phantom multiples of the standard deviation of a added separately to the real and imaginary components of the space data fig demonstrates this where tracking error is reduced for fitted data compared to raw data as the amount of added noise increases strain analysis the effects of tissue tracking and temporal fitting on end systolic circumferential and radial strain were investigated fitting the results for non view shared and view shared sets of data are presented in table i all temporal fitting was done using fifth order fourier basis functions fig shows end systolic maps of a patient with an infarct centered at seven clock in the images note that end systole occurs roughly at where is the total number of frames the strains in fig and were derived from raw the ability of the temporal fitting to extract useful strain information noise was added to the space data of this patient as described above fig shows the results for of noise added to both the cine dense and reference data the infarct which is nearly indistinguishable in fig becomes clearly apparent after the temporal fitting fig adding more than of noise makes the become apparent the histograms of the two infarct patients are shown before and after fitting in fig here temporal fitting reduces the standard deviation of from to the regions of infarct with contractile dysfunction are in these examples evident as a distinct peak in fig strain time curves for typical cardiac segments were obtained shows a few and strain time curves before and after temporal fitting for a normal volunteer fig shows the corresponding curves for a patient with an anteroseptal infarct both and are significantly impaired in the segment containing the infarct the curves for strain obtained from the fitted trajectories look more realistic than those from the original trajectories a similar improvement was noted in the strain time curves from the principle strain noise for the phantom was measured to be at increasing to ms later due to growth of the gradient echo of relaxed magnetization similar phantom studies using single phase dense measured a strain noise level of adjusting the strain noise level for comparison using simply the square root of the acquisition times reduces this than cine dense and a higher strain noise is thus expected for cine dense using the raw trajectories the first principle strain noise in vivo was measured to be at end diastole at end systole and in middiastole after temporal fitting the strain noise was reduced to at end diastole at end systole and in mid
of lightbown s study the input to which the learners are exposed is controlled so that only one new item is presented at a time and practiced intensively that is to say a target form is presented and practiced intensively in one unit but when another form is introduced in the following former target form are dramatically decreased the participants were students at grade from three intact classes in a municipal junior high school the three classes were taught by the same teacher one class was provided with the explicit instruction of the copula be another class was provided with implicit instruction and the third was given no special one way analyses of variance were run to determine comparability of the three groups on the pretest scores showing ability to supply be in css and on the scores showing ability to produce fv sentences no significant differences for each ability among the groups were revealed ns for suppliance ability and ns for non overuse ability before they received the experimental treatments the participants of each group had hours of instruction of the copula be and ten hours of instruction of fv the focus of the copula be instruction they had received was on agreement with the subject in number and person and on inversion rather than on suppliance concerning the suppliance rule they had been expected to learn it implicitly and had not received any focused instruction the auxiliary be had not been introduced yet session of regular classes for each group by the regular teacher in december immediately following the class in which the pretest had been conducted in the next class the participants took post test and three weeks later post test after that the participants of each group received intensive lessons on the present progressive in the same way over three weeks from the same durability problems with the explicit instruction in an efl context teacher following the textbook syllabus immediately after the present progressive lessons were completed post test was given in order to see if the effects of the treatments on the copula be held without confusion with the auxiliary be further in order to follow the participants performance of the and were given three months and four months after post test respectively the participants did not receive further instruction focused on the copula be between post test and post test the experimental procedures are summarized in figure materials the help of the japanese translation the missing elements that the participants were required to fill in were the subject the verb and the object or the predicative of the sentence all the words that the participants were to use except be were given as hints at the side of the test sentences so as to prevent them from failing to respond because of limited vocabulary thus the participants were tested on their knowledge of suppliance of the word order note here that items with the progressive were not included figure experimental procedures test to other students of the same school all pearson correlations among the six forms were over indicating that the forms were equivalent scoring was done using the following procedures for cs items suppliance of be in the correct position was regarded as correct even if the subject verb agreement in number and person was wrong the subject verb agreement errors were also overlooked for fv items if responses were correct was no overuse of be total scores were obtained separately for the two types of items the scoring method in fv items may raise questions about the relevance of word order to the learning of the copula be in this study correct word order was considered to be a prerequisite for the learning of the copula be considering that learning the suppliance rule of the copula be involves making a distinction between the subject be predicative pattern and the svo pattern accuracy in word order as well as accuracy in suppliance or non suppliance of be were employed as criteria for the distinction in addition as far as the participants responses in fv items are concerned it should be noted that there were no uses of the progressive form in the simple present fv context that is all overuses of be observed in their responses were of the be simple present fv type an identification phase and a writing phase in the first phase the teacher presented two css and one fv sentence in japanese and explained form meaning relations in them then she presented english equivalents of those three sentences and explained the role of be in the second phase the teacher presented new exemplars in japanese and required the participants to identify them as css or not in the last phase the participants were required to translate these sentences into english it should be noted that the explicit instruction mentioned above is not a return to the grammar translation method while translation itself is the end in the grammar translation method the use of the participants nl in this study is considered a means to raising awareness of the form meaning relation of the english cs which is difficult to become aware of in other words a stepping stone to learning the english copula be in the implicit instruction the teacher presented the same english exemplars used in the explicit instruction with their japanese translations the participants practiced pronouncing those sentences repeatedly in chorus in pairs and individually to memorize them then the participants wrote down the sentences they memorized on worksheets no explanation on the role of be durability problems with the explicit instruction in an efl context table descriptive statistics full verb scores explicit sd implicit sd control sd note highest possible score pr
as a bifurcate division between the acceptably and the unacceptably risky however in a competitive consumer market propelled by profit this simple division gives way under such techniques as risk pricing to an inclusionary impulse as with profit scoring actively engaged with the attribution of risk serving not to locate and divide but to define and price in a sense there are no longer bad risks only un entrepreneurial lenders with inferior or badly leveraged risk technologies resigned to the saturated low profit prime markets the expansion of capital thus leads to an increased downward targeting of consumers with more and more being integrated on differential terms leaving only a residuum of excluded non consumers as with the problematizations and potentials presented by the targeting of profitability risk pricing cannot simply be reduced to some unilinear rationalizing process of actuarialism or even the manifestation of a practical response to a capitalistic profit motive on the part of lenders rather risk pricing coalesces from the articulation of new forms of expertise and profit with new ways within which individuals as consumers can be understood and new potential the identification of risk comes to be used to adjust the price of credit to the particular discrete self governing potential of all consumers so that the availability of choice wrought by credit is restricted to their calculated ability to uphold the freedom to choose risk pricing ensures that the individual is made culpable for the costs of their own risk and those who share it through a segmented pooling of the similarly risky they are thus made their own capacity as consumers for the consuming costs and horizons of opportunity implicit in their individualized projects of consumption deserving consumers pay less while by implication undeserving consumers pay more like malley s conception of the new prudential individual who under newly contrived governmental arrangements must exercise their own careful individualized unemployment that were formerly distributed across the social body the contemporary credit consumer is made responsible for the risk that they themselves represent for the condition of their own life and the choices that they have made in the past determining their credit consuming potential in the present not in a position to aspire to the seductions of commodities the unemployed the incompetent the criminal and the dispossessed they are denied access to the seductions of the market excluded from circuits of credit consumption through their paltry or blackened credit record and the manifestation of personal attributes occupation income neighborhood same thing their inability to manage themselves for them the second tier financial services await the pawnbroker the payday lender and the rent to own center which envelop the unselfgovernable within more coercive mechanisms that ensure their governability the pledge of collateral the holding of a customer s post dated guaranteed cheque or the scheduling of incremental rental contracts that mask the rights of peterson conclusion against the backdrop of the post war consumption boom of the a new form of mass consumer credit developed in the credit card unconnected for the first time with any specific form of consumption its profitability was inherently bound to its own perpetuation within generalized consumption implying new forms of population management by lenders as well as a greater such plastic credit in expanding the scope and reach of credit within the everyday lives of consumers regularized a more or less permanent state of indebtedness at the level of the state a new economic policy of keynesianism elevated collective mass consumption over production as the critical lever of economic growth deficit spending echoing personal indebtedness in the promotion of consumption at this time statistical techniques with the legislative support of the state began to give a novel articulation to the problem of identifying non payers and reducing the costs associated with default across a lender s population of consumers credit scoring the analysis of statistical relationships between variables and default outcomes within a population thus became applied to the governing of sanctioning decisions by these mass lenders rendering credit applicants visible and governable in new ways as risks disperse through the consumer credit industry according to their own interminable logic as more rational more efficient means of governing consumers crucially the systematic statistical constitution of default risk is itself perceived by its experts as being beset by a perpetual array of risks which require the constant reappraisal of methods and procedures and the periodic renewal of models within which risk assessments are created at the same time though the very success of a generalized technology in conceiving and governing the problem of default has led to the imaginative investment of its technologies in new ways and in new areas within the operations of lenders fragmenting its cohesiveness by re articulating it through an unbinding of time a broader more continuous reach across the population and a penetration into other areas of contingent consumer management the calculation of individual default risk has also a higher order of risk conceived and systematized around the governance of uncertainty and loss experienced at the level of an entire portfolio of consumers and their contracted debts yet not only are systems of risk open to risks and continuous re evaluation and the concept of risk subject to fragmentation through its application to new practices but the risk determinations constructed within models are themselves invoked by experts and lenders in new and shifting ways within credit this has taken one form through the incorporation of default risk within a statistical determination of the profitable credit consumer here the subtext of risk changes from that which is potentially dangerous and to be avoided to that which is too safe and unconducive to financial return elsewhere the centrality of default risk to the government of credit consumers persists but in a form which increasingly responsibilizes the individual for the costs of their own self government through the adjustment of interest rates and other terms to the specific identification of risk here the idea of a
activities that require students to verbalize their thinking the presence of an audience may provide some benefit from what has been variously referred to as the audience effect and social facilitation for example in a review of social facilitation studies zajonc concluded that the presence of others might have positive motivational effects although a number of studies have investigated the explaining to others with no intentional feedback many involve a preparation stage making it impossible to partial out the effect of a listener being present from that of preparing to teach an important implication of explaining to an interactive learner is that the process is of communication rather than simply transmission in a review of peer interaction studies webb found that elaborative explanations were positively associated with achievement significantly the suggested reasons for the beneficial effects are a direct result of an interaction between the explainer and explainee the distributed nature of learning in interactive situations however makes it a difficult task to isolate the contributions of learning partners however one context that provides some insight into this complex relationship is peer tutoring in a study involving unskilled tutors graesser person and magliano found a rather limited set of interaction in normal tutoring situations these included anchoring learning in specific examples collaborative problem solving and question answering and deep explanatory reasoning other previously identified components that were deficient or absent included active student learning sophisticated pedagogical strategies convergence towards shared meanings feedback error diagnosis and remediation and affect and emotion be drawn from this work is that the learning gains achieved by tutors are not a function of developing shared meanings or diagnosing student misconceptions the benefit for the tutor seems to be more related to generating explanations based on the tutor s notion of what needs to be taught therefore from a tutoring perspective the benefits of explaining to a live partner do not seem to depend as much on the specific feedback that an explainee might provide as simply having the goal to teach virtual worlds that support software agents as avatars open up new possibilities for interactive learning partners theories on persuasion suggest that learners will more likely accept and incorporate into their own thinking arguments from partners who are more credible and understandable therefore it is expected that software agents in the form of avatars will be more effective in helping students learn about explanations than although research is limited there is some evidence that animated agents can be more influential than text and lead to greater understanding when acting as discussion partners methods at the core of this study was the interaction between students their learning partners and the explanation resources a main goal was to determine whether the presence of an animated software programmed to provide advice through conversational dialog about generating elaborative explanations this form of receiving learning resources was compared to similar information provided in a text based format in order to support and capture the students interactions a browser based chat environment known as active worlds was used the virtual world has several advantages udent generated explanations and store them for later conversion into summary reports second active worlds supports programmed software agents that in this case act as learning advisors or coaches who provide information and suggestions for making effective explanations third the virtual world provides a controlled space where many students can complete the same interactive learning module in parallel finally previous pilot work has demonstrated that students find working in be an exciting and motivating experience fig active worlds view and chat windows participants and location participants consisted of approximately fifth grade students from a private school in a southeastern city the school was considered appropriate for this study because the computer technology required was readily available and had been tested in two prior pilot studies it should be noted however that the software itself does not require especially powerful or computers the experiment was conducted in a science classroom that was setup for small group work the students were assigned laptop computers which had wireless connections to a central hub the learning activity the learning activity was situated within an active worlds environment that simulated important able to walk around the environment chat with their learning partner and perform various problem solving tasks all students worked through a set of two modules in the domain of ecology in each module the task was to help solve a problem such as determining whether a river was polluted and to generate explanations for several scientific concepts along the way it was intended that the material be novel for most students was constrained by two factors first the look and feel of the agents was pre determined by the environment because the agents used existing active worlds avatar forms this constraint meant that it was not possible to control certain random expressions that the standard avatars perform these include head turning arm gestures and other physical movements that exist to help make the avatars appear more life like these characteristics were shared by the avatars used by the well the second constraint on the agent design was the scripting software that was used to control the agents actions and dialog the software enabled the agents to respond to chat messages and other events within the virtual world such as a student clicking on a sign but was limited in terms of providing sophisticated artificial intelligence the agents were limited to identifying keywords and responding to specific actions by the students depending on the condition the goal was to place the agent in the role of an explanation advisor or an advisor and learning partner when acting only as an advisor the agent would simply provide suggestions for how to prompt for and generate an effective explanation based on the strategies outlined in the next section the agent would also model an explanation when positioned as a learning partner as well the agent became a full participant in the explanation exercise
age will tend to replicate more rapidly and with greater fidelity from generation to generation than those that take more time or neurological maturity to be mastered to summarize this section a dst approach to communication is incompatible with an information account for the creativity in language use from a dst perspective language acquisition emerges through interaction with other human beings within a social context for example kirby and his colleagues who have developed the iterated learning model have been able to model the process by which the output of one individual s learning becomes the input of which means that learning as an iterative process works both within the individual and between individuals at the social level in this view language learning is both individual learning and learning through interaction in the next section we will examine dst and the language learning process in more detail dst and language learning with dst however for our discussion of sla we will take a model as developed by van geert as our starting point to describe what constitutes language learning in this model of learning growth is defined as follows a process is called growth if it is concerned with the increase or decrease of one or more properties for growth to take place there are a number of requirements a system has to meet there must be something that can grow van geert calls this the minimal structural growth condition there must be resources to keep the process of growth going a distinction is made between internal resources resources within the learning external resources resources outside the learning individual spatial environments to explore time invested by the environment to support learning external informational resources such as the language used by the environment motivational resources such as reinforcement by the environment and material resources such as books and tv s resources memory capacity is limited as is the time available to spend on learning the available knowledge and the amount of motivation to learn the same goes for external resources both the number of different types of environments to which the child is exposed and the caretaker s willingness to invest time and energy in learning support are limited the resources must or motivation there will be no learning at the same time there are compensatory relations between different types of resources effort can compensate for lack of time or motivation can compensate for limited input from the environment because resources both internal and external are part of an interlinked dynamic structure a growth in a child s informational resources will lead to a environments such a change in the interaction with the environment is evident from for example findings by hirsh pasek golinkoff and hollich using their coalition model as a base they examine the major transitions in development assuming that a process of distributional learning guides language acquisition they find that infants are differentially biased to attend to particular stimuli over life babies learn to segment prosodic and phonological information which allows them to recognize words however these sound segments do not start out as symbols that stand for what they represent but are mere sound object associations also the cues on which they rely to associate these sounds and objects differ according to age whereas at about months such as eye gaze in sum the primes that feed into word learning are the immature word learning principles associated with the phonological forms that have emerged from the prior phase of phonological and prosodic analysis there is also evidence that children begin learning grammar when armed at least with the developmental primes of grammatical morphemes and not all subsystems require equal amounts of resources some connected growers as van geert calls them support each other s growth an example could be the relation between the lexical development and the development of listening comprehension with increased listening comprehension words are understood and interpreted more easily stimulating development of lexical skills need fewer resources than two growers that are unconnected on the other hand conditions also need to be right for development to take place some conditions of growth and development are simply unsuccessful not because de developmental mechanisms are not operating or because the growth rates are too low but because the mechanisms themselves create conditions that lead particularly relevant for sla since growth is resource dependent and resources are limited growth is by definition limited the carrying capacity refers to the state of knowledge that can be attained in a given child s interlinked structure of resources referred to as the cognitive ecosystem for example the emergence of the multi word sentence used to develop the lexicon through the linking of different types of sensory information in the next phase more and maybe different resources are needed to develop the grammatical system that governs the functional distribution of information in multiple word utterances one empirical study to support this view was done by daily recordings the total number of words acquired during the weeks was established a logistic function appeared to describe the developmental curve best after a slow start there is a spurt between weeks and which then levels off as figure illustrates for the grammatical development as measured by mlu data the developmental curve is quite different from to months there were basically only one word mlu another measure was the proportion of plurals used in obligatory contexts again there was hardly any growth till week and then a very rapid incline between weeks and using a dst approach robinson and mervis then tried to link the two variables for the month period the correlation between mlu and vocabulary size was low the proportion of plurals in obligatory contexts and vocabulary size a plot of the number of new words per week and proportion of plurals showed an interesting relation between the two developmental processes robinson and mervis s figure shows a nearly perfect negative relation between vocabulary growth and plural use to combine there are two variables a
associated with making early transitions as well as the consequences of those transitions were missing for any variable except primary caregiver education and per capita household income for these two variables approximately the data were missing because they were obtained from the parental questionnaire which was not administered in all households missing cases were replaced with imputed values using the expectation types of adversity such as poor physical health unemployment and harsh family relationships depressive symptoms were indexed as the mean of seven items collected at waves and for example respondents were asked if during the last week they were bothered by things that usually do nt bother you or felt that you could not shake off the or all of the time with high scores signifying more depressive symptoms the depressive symptoms scale had an a of for wave and for wave in an effort to capture both level and change in depressive symptoms we classified individuals as being high in depressive symptoms if they scored in and and they were coded if they were high in depression at wave but not at wave indicating a decline in depressive symptomology second individuals were coded if they scored low in depressive symptoms at both waves and and if they were low in depressive symptoms at wave but high at wave signifying an increase in symptomology population meet the criteria for clinically significant mental health problems involving depression symptoms including mood disorders major depression dysthymic disorder and bipolar disorder other cutoff points and ways of constructing the depressive symptoms variable were they or their partner had had a pregnancy then respondents were asked next please indicate the outcome of this pregnancy by selecting the appropriate response we restricted our focus to live first births in wave of add health respondents were asked about their pregnancies and cohabitations and marriages that had been reported in an earlier section of the interview as a result add health s fertility history is incomplete we used the household roster to check for incompleteness and to add births to the history that had been omitted a detailed description of the procedure that was used to correct the fertility history is available from the authors in or outside either type of relationship to assess cohabitation respondents were asked have you ever lived with someone in a marriage like relationship for one month or more responses were coded no never and yes at least once because cohabitations tend to be of short duration and because we expected that relationship instability would answer to the question are you still living together marriage was derived from the question how many times have you been married responses ranged from to the number of individuals who had been married more than once was less than so we recoded this variable to never married and married at least once given that the total number of marital disruptions ethnicity were included in every regression age was indexed as a continuous variable measured at wave ethnicity consisted of four categorical variables with white as the reference category family per capita income was obtained from the parent questionnaire by taking the total household responses ranged from never went to school to professional training beyond a year college or university family structure was obtained from a household roster at wave and coded as a dichotomous variable where two biological parents and one or no biological parents mother offspring relationship quality was to strongly disagree to rate how strongly they agreed or disagreed with statements describing their experiences the scale is coded so that high values signify a positive mother child relationship and cronbach s a was vocabulary skill was measured using the add health picture vocabulary test which was adapted from the peabody picture vocabulary at your school items were coded so that higher values indicate higher levels of school attachment and cronbach s a was delinquency was measured using a item measure on which respondents were asked to rate how often they engaged in the past months in a range of activities as a function of control family background and risk or protective factors conducting separate analyses for women and men in these analyses we used event history person year files in which each individual separate person year files were constructed for first birth first cohabitation and first marriage the resulting sample consisted of cases from to person years for the birth file person years for cohabitation and person years for the marriage file event history analysis involves measuring a continuous two factors whether the individual had a family formation transition or not and the timing of the transition results are shown in table with respect to the control variables we found that those who became a parent or married by wave were older furthermore compared to whites blacks were less likely to marry and cohabit in addition were less likely than whites to cohabit or marry turning to family background characteristics those who made early family role transitions were more likely to come from low income families with the exception of men who married those who made early transitions were more likely to have parents with lower levels of education and risk and protective factors also were related to family formation in emerging adulthood first women who had poor relationships with their mothers in adolescence were more likely to cohabit but mother child relationship quality had no association with becoming a parent or with marriage with the exception of men who were more likely to cohabit but only the women were more likely to become parents both men and women who had reported high levels of delinquency in adolescence were more likely to cohabit and become parents but only the men were more likely to marry interaction terms were computed for all of the predictor variables of all gender differences reported in table five were statistically significant with respect to factors that influenced family transition decisions women who had a poor relationship with their mother were
sensitivity problem in our notation let and cr if and cr and rqt and is therefore not repeated the sensitivity problem is closely related to the original model two main differences are notable the link cost and demand functions are replaced by their linearizations and the sign restrictions on are replaced by individual restrictions on the route flow perturbations that depend on whether the route in question was used at equilibrium or not cf the set although the appearance of depends on the the choice of route flow solution it is an interesting fact that the possible choices of in does not this is a general consequence of aggregation which was also utilized in patriksson and rockafellar and patriksson as well as in several previous papers on the subject their relations to the present analysis is analyzed in detail in patriksson in summary the sensitivity problem can be solved using similar to those for the original traffic equilibrium model provided of course that route flow information can be extracted this paper describes such a software the main theoretical result of this paper is the application of the result in the previous section this result states that the sensitivity problem provides directional derivatives provided that the solution is unique so under what circumstances will the optimal solution to be unique similarly which entities in the the solution to the problem have directional derivatives clearly we cannot apply the theory of the previous section to the problem stated in since is not unique as is unique we could project the problem onto this space this is simply accomplished by redefining cproj with cg the problem is only valid thanks to the particular relationships between the link and route flows our projection is the same as eliminating through an affine transformation normally a projection such as the one above does not preserve the regularity properties we are utilizing as we are also interested in the sensitivity of the travel costs we will for the first time introduce yet another modification we introduce a dummy variable which will take on the value of the link travel cost at equilibrium and likewise a dummy variable rjcj to take on the value d of the equilibrium od travel costs link and od travel cost perturbation respectively the problem which will be analyzed is the following in let b in c the reason for introducing the last two rows of the problem that is the extra variables is that by doing so we have direct access to the sensitivity of the travel costs through the corresponding elements of the sensitivity problem has the form of with that is the cost perturbations are given by a kind of chain rule what we are going to establish is that this chain rule provides uniquely given values of even when is not unique theorem let assumption hold and consider an arbitrary vector rd then the solution to is unique and so are the travel cost entities s in the solution to the travel cost perturbations are unique therefore the values rqt are the directional derivatives of respectively the equilibrium link and od travel costs at in the direction of assume that the link travel cost function link flow and demand perturbation and are unique therefore the value is the directional derivative of the equilibrium link flow at in the direction of proof that is unique follows from the strict convexity of the objective function in and the convexity of the feasible set since is therefore convex and since the set is polyhedral the sensitivity problem is a convex differentiable program the gradient of the objective function in is as given in the first two rows of the last two rows are essentially a repetition of the first two by a result in burke and ferris the value of then is unique in in particular is unique the interpretation of this tuple as a directional derivative then follows from under the additional assumptions the objective function in is strictly convex in and therefore is unique at the solution the rest follows as in by referring to note that the second order condition is equivalent to the condition that onk is not needed in the case when we consider fixed demands an interesting aspect of this result is that the cost perturbations which are related to the perturbations through a kind of chain rule are not dependent on the perturbations to be unique this is in contrast to the type of analysis offered by tobin and friesz see also bell and iida where the sensitivity of the costs is considered an implication of that of the and demands a perhaps even more striking aspect of this result is that it is not possible to immediately apply it when the link travel cost is described by the use of the fourth order polynomials known as the bpr functions if a link has zero flow then its cost derivative is also zero so the condition is not satisfied illustrative examples in this section however complement them first by being simpler and thus possible to analyze in greater detail and second by showing exactly when the sensitivity analysis works and when it does not according to the theory just presented the braess network the network of braess is classic in the analysis of system optimal solutions we utilize it providing a test example of an equilibrium network design problem for this problem has a travel cost that is deliberately chosen so that one of the routes is not used even though it has minimum cost we have the data given in table the data corresponds to an instance of the fixed demand traffic equilibrium problem which can be written as that to demand traffic equilibrium problem with we obtain the link flow solution the cost of the three routes and are in
in theory problematic in practice indeed in a search for examples of real world best practice for a special issue about crm for dmos destination marketing newsletter eclipse suggested only one nto employed a specialist crm senior executive however a case can be made for discussions with stakeholders to stimulate vrm initiatives by individual businesses and collectives three immediate challenges confront the rtos first is the difficulty in obtaining quality customer data from service providers over which they have no direct control the organization charged with controlling the marketing communications for the destination rarely comes into contact with any visitors contact details of previous visitors will only be held by private sector accommodation operators who would likely share such business information if privacy legislation permitted except for intercept surveys and encounters at visitor information centers the destination marketer has no direct means of tracking repeat visitation levels however including a repeat visitation indicator commercial visitor monitors such as rtam would increase the input required from participating accommodation operators who would need to be convinced of the rationale for the additional commitment this is be a significant challenge given the difficulty faced by a number of the rtos in recruiting accommodation operators such an indicator would be valuable in providing additional insights about repeat visitation patterns as well as provide a measure to track the effectiveness of any campaigns targeting repeat visitors the second obstacle facing the rtos is a lack of resources available relative to other priorities for the development of a visitor database and or communication many rtos already have existing secondary data such as through requests for brochures which is untapped third destinations are often dealing with hundreds of thousands if not millions of annual visitors thus even if the development of a database was possible how is it possible to engage in meaningful dialogue with so many individuals while this research reports views from australia the interpretation is in keeping strategies they concluded the dominant paradigm in use was transactional and not relational marketing activities are designed to attract new visitors which might not necessarily be appropriate for potential repeat visitors no efforts or budget is planned for development of an ongoing relationship database marketing is rarely being practiced there has been a lack of research attention in the tourism literature relating to the issues of destination and vrm traditional destination marketing has focused on attracting the attention of consumer travellers either at the prior to leaving stage or en route in the case of auto travellers opportunities exist to extend marketing efforts to influence decision making including loyalty after arriving at the destination as well as after returning home i conclude with this question which begs more research to destination marketers to initiate meaningful dialogue at the right time with the hundreds of thousands of potential repeat visitors to their destination with whom they do not have any direct contact the epidemiology of tuberculosis among primary refugee is home to one of the highest number of refugees in the united states the primary objective of this study was to evaluate the prevalence of latent and active tuberculosis infection in primary refugee arrivals to mn secondary objectives were to determine the association of tb infection with gender age and ethnicity of the refugees methods a retrospective study of primary refugee arrivals to mn between january and december logistic regression analyses were used to assess the association of tb infection with gender age and ethnicity results of the refugees who had mantoux test results had a positive test a positive test was more common in men odds ratio in africans and increased with year age intervals a total of refugees received treatment for active tb active tb was more common in men african ethnicity has reemerged in multidrug resistant forms and is one of the leading infectious causes of death worldwide it can manifest itself years after migration and is the most commonly diagnosed infectious disease among immigrants wanting permanent stay in the united states in the foreign born tb rate was times that the united states most refugees to the state come from areas of high tb prevalence and incidence and many endure poor living conditions in refugee camps including inadequate housing health care nutrition water sanitation social services and education in a study by hadzibegovic and coworkers refugees were at a seven times higher risk of tb than number of refugees in the united states between and over refugees resettled in mn this increase in refugees has contributed to significant changes in the epidemiology of disease in the state especially that of infectious diseases in approximately all mn tb cases were foreign born compared to a national despite this change in epidemiology there is limited knowledge among providers about tb in refugees at the time of arrival to the state in addition to its influence on individual and public health this knowledge is important in policy making and in the development of cost effective screening programs were to determine the association of tb infection with refugee gender age and continent of origin methods and subjects refugees are defined as persons who are outside their country and cannot return owing to a well founded fear of persecution because of their race religion nationality political opinion or membership in a particular social group mandatory all refugees and immigrants to detect patients with communicable diseases of public health significance physical or mental disorders or drug abuse prior to entry to the united states the overseas visa medical examination includes a medical history physical examination chest radiography and laboratory examinations for human immunodeficiency smear examinations to detect acid fast bacilli individuals with infectious tb are treated before being allowed into the united states or they are allowed to apply for a waiver all refugees to the united states are encouraged to obtain a health assessment at local public health departments within days of arrival the visit includes respectively in addition immunizations are updated and a complete blood count with differential cell count
russian males increasing condom use reflects behavioral change rather the proportion of muslim respondents declined over time in both male and female samples entirely the result of attrition and replacement the proportions are identical across waves for reinterviewed respondents and only percent changed values between waves the decline the russian federation in table we present descriptive statistics for characteristics of the sex event context separately because events not respondents are the units of analysis characteristics of the sex event sample are not estimates of the entire universe of sex events of russians during the prior year by design only one sex event per partner and to weight each event by the total number of events reported with that partner during the past year even that estimate would contain some error if condom use varies across sex events with a given partner also it would exclude some sex events for those with more than three partners in the past year in light of the nonrepresentative nature of our sample of sex events the sex are informative because the same sampling design applies across these dimensions twenty nine percent of the male reported encounters involved the use of a condom compared with percent for female reported encounters condom use is as expected higher for nonmarital sex events particularly reported condom use over time for events reported by males both overall and for nonmarital events but not for events reported by females again in both cases the male reported increases are significant only for events reported by reinterviewees rather than behavioral change this pattern could reflect sample selection bias or changes in sample composition and event type over time our multivariate models give us some leverage to control for the last named possible source of the apparent increase in male shown indicate no significant effect of condom use in on attrition in the nonreporting explanation begs the question as to why social desirability of condoms would increase for male but not for female respondents the low levels of responses attributing condom nonuse to cost unavailability and partner s objection suggest that cost and access are not substantial barriers in russia nonuse of condoms may be misleading but clearly the most common reasons for nonuse for both sexes are dislike of condoms and the perception that they were unnecessary pending alternative data suggesting that access and partner pressure represent important barriers we should question whether they are major factors impeding condom use in encounters if coital frequency is higher in marital cohabiting relationships the survey design overstates the relative number of nonmarital encounters sex events with friends were the next most common type for both sexes male respondents more commonly reported sex events with acquaintances than did female respondents the exchange of money for sex was rare especially as reported by women males most encounters reported involved longer term partners although enough encounters with new partners were reported to test for higher condom use in such events respondents suspect that their partner has other partners in about one of five events reported and for another fifth they are not sure predictably partner s mean age is greater for women than for men with few exceptions parameter estimates and the pattern of significant effects are similar for the models with cluster corrected robust standard errors and the random effects models as expected age has a negative effect younger russians are more likely to use condoms during any particular sex this age effect probably stems from improvement in the quality of condoms beginning in the late and the the age effect weakens but remains significant when event level variables are controlled married males are much less likely to use condoms than never married the main effect of being married is not significant net of relationship to partner and other event level variables condom use is much lower in marital encounters than in nonmarital encounters males use condoms less frequently in extramarital encounters than do unmarried males in their sexual encounters being married is associated with lower condom use among russian males even when they have extramarital sex the evidence that university educated men are more likely to use condoms is ambiguous the effect of education effect of education is clearly not significant when sex event characteristics are controlled any effect of education therefore is mediated by education based differences in the type of sex events experienced student status and muslim religion have no significant effects as expected residents of moscow and st petersburg use condoms more often than otherwise in all models multivariate models confirm what we saw by comparing means in tables and the use of condoms by russian males increased between and the measures of risk taking orientation generally have negative effects smoking drinking and earlier age at first sex all reduce the probability of condom use with the last effect attaining significance only when the event level model but nonsignificant and negative net of event level variables like education it operates via type of sex event russian men with multiple partners experience different types of sex events than those with fewer partners relationship to partner has clear and predictable effects the closer the relationship the lower the probability the two interactions involving acquaintances are significant however and have the expected sign men are more likely to use condoms with casual acquaintances whom they meet at public places of entertainment or on the street than with those met in more familiar settings presumably they place less trust in partners met whom they exchange money for sex or whom they cannot or will not describe as fitting any of the given categories russian men are significantly more likely to use a condom when having sex with a new partner condom use is lower in encounters involving relationships of one to months and lower still in encounters involving the level of trust between partners grows and partners who initially used condoms stop doing so as their trust grows partner s age has the expected negative effect implying
fig shows the effect of hook type variation it is the influence of hook slippage finally fig shows stress curve variations depending on bond distribution it should be noted that the stress curves contain additional information with respect to the sole values in table representing simultaneously the effect of parameter influence on response and of their relative variability in fact comparing one input parameter indicated as max and indicated as min in fig not only the two curves are shifted but the latter curve s slope is higher because the variation of one of the parameters is set to zero since model input variables have been characterized with normal pdf the steel stress is also normally distributed and the stress curve represents the related cumulated distribution function in table the main parameters describing steel stress pdf as well as are reported for crack width classes and mm these parameter values correspond to the stress of variation for the input variables if one of the input variables may be detected for example the distance of two consecutive cracks it is theoretically possible to improve steel stress characterization in tables and the same parameters as in table are reported assuming and in smooth rebars of the critical regions of frames the numerical evaluation relates the steel stress to crack width and it only needs information on material properties and geometry these data are generally requested in the current assessment of existing structures in addition due to the large number of parameter uncertainties affecting the s relationship a probabilistic approach has been implemented it levels of steel stress s as a crack width level is observed for practical purposes also parameters describing these stress curves are derived in the sample application in particular mm diameter bars crack widths ranging from mm to mm and constant steel stress are considered but other conditions may simply be analysed structural testing has been discussed it represents a promising example of integration of numerical and experimental knowledge useful to consider the use of structural monitoring systems not only to investigate global features of the constructions but also local relevant parameters experimental deployment of a large instrumented cylinder of variable nose geometry and center of mass offset in free fall in realistic environment data on four tests series in the gulf of mexico are presented and analyzed statistically the stochastic nature of the problem of the cylinder free falling through water is outlined and described as an input to the subsequent impact burial prediction package the release conditions on trajectory is discussed and found to affect the behavior of the cylinders only in the first of free fall in water beyond this depth quasi stable conditions are achieved effects of three different nose shapes blunt hemispherical and chamfered on cylinder behavior are analyzed and found to have a pronounced influence on the fall trajectory the blunt nose shape appears to be hydrodynamically in motions of all cylinders were noted and were found to be the function of the cmo and nose shape primarily implications of these and other findings on modeling and impact burial predictions are discussed i introduction the main objective of this paper is to collect systematically amount of burial of cylindrical objects in soft seafloor marine sediments and depends on our ability to quantify two main categories of data one category includes accurate description of the characteristics of the bottom sediments pertaining to the high strain and high strain rate deformation this knowledge also needs to reflect the natural variability of these parameters in both spatial and temporal domains information on the linear and angular falling cylinder at the point of impact with the sediment surface represents the second category of the input information required for the prediction of the penetration burial behavior of cylindrical bodies during free fall has been modeled in the past more recent developments involving improved and more realistic approaches have been reported accurate numerical modeling depends in large on the ability free fall and requires proper accounting for all the forces acting on the falling cylinder under ideal conditions the water column is usually represented as a semi infinite space with isotropic and constant properties these properties typically include temperature salinity and density under these conditions it has been shown that an idealized cylindrical body free falling through the distribution of mass a range of trajectories can be expected several distinct patterns have been experimentally observed and were identified as straight spiral flip flat and seesaw a single trajectory may consist of a single pattern or any number and any combination of these motions each one of these patterns appears to be stable and if the cylinder enters a particular pattern it will remain in for the first time a full scale instrumented cylinder has been released in a realistic field setting the instrument data is used to characterize the statistics of the dynamic behavior exhibited by this cylinder in section ii we describe the instrumented cylinder and its deployment then in section iii we present the statistical characterization of the observational data these with oscillations about a mean finally in section iv we discuss the implications for impact burial prediction and in section we summarize our findings it is important to underline that the overall goal is to be able to predict the amount of burial of the cylindrical bodies in soft seafloor sediments thus the accurate description of the conditions of the cylinder at the point of initial contact with the sediment the amount of penetration actual modeling of the mechanisms of the cylinder free fall through water and penetration into the sediment is beyond the scope of this paper ii experimental setup equipment and procedures a instrumented cylinder data acquisition and data processing the instrumented cylinder measures in diameter and kn the cylinder designed for this paper had an adjustable position of the center of mass relative to the center of volume along its main axis two configurations of the center of mass offset ratio were tested
of the prepared mcc scanning electron microscopy fig shows sem graphs of the different mcc samples as seen from the figure showing hydrolysis of bleached pulps shortening of fibers occurred and rod shaped mcc formed there is no difference seen in case of cotton stalks mcc the source of this debris is the fine pith core of cotton stalks no significant differences were observed between samples prepared using different kind of acids was found some strands of cellulosic microfibers were observed in the different mcc samples prepared bulk and tapping densities samples as shown in the table cotton stalks mcc had significantly higher tapping and bulk densities than the other samples this may be due to the presence of the large amounts of pith non fibrous materials as shown in the sem micrographs no significant effect of the kind of acid used on the density of the different mcc samples was observed the density of rice straw and bagasse mcc is generally comparable distribution the results of particle size analysis of the different mcc samples are summarized in table as shown in the table the mean particle size of all prepared samples are compara ble except for rice straw mcc prepared using hcl which had smaller particle size and consequently higher specific surface area than the others all prepared samples had slightly lower particle size than avicell mcc but with wider particle size in case of mcc prepared from bagasse in case of cotton stalks and rice straw mcc samples with larger particle size was obtained in case of using in the hydrolysis of the prepared mcc samples thermogravimetric analysis thermal stability of the different microcrystalline cellulose samples was studied using thermogravimetric analysis using and cotton stalks mcc prepared using fig shows the tg curves of these samples and table gives the data obtained from these curves as shown in the figures the degradation of the different mcc samples involves two main degradation stages the onset degradation of cellulose is believed to be due to the evolution of non combustible gases such as carbon and evolution of combustible gases as shown in fig there is no significant difference between the tg curve of bagasse mcc prepared using and that of bagasse mcc prepared using hcl both samples had nearly the same onset degradation temperatures for the two stages and also the same maximum weight loss temperatures of the two stages splitting of the sulfate groups during mcc thermal degradation may be the reason for the higher rate of degradation via weight loss higher onset degradation temperature and maximum weight loss temperature for both degradation stages than bagasse and rice straw mcc samples also complete degradation of cotton stalks occurred at higher temperature than bagasse and rice straw mcc samples the tg curve of rice straw mcc shows its high ash content which is rich in silica in terms of tableting technology the material is described as a filler binder in that it is usually added to formulations to enhance compactibility although the preparation of mcc from agricultural residues and their physical properties have been reported as mentioned above the mechanical properties of tablets pressed from mcc of these agricultural residues have not been studied failure and hardness were measured the results are given in table one important aspect of pharmaceutical mechanical testing is to prepare and test samples using the same protocols additionally it is essential that compacts of comparable density are prepared since porosity has a marked effect on strength as shown in the table tablets made from the prepared graphs a lot of pith was found in case of cotton stalks mcc the pith is non fibrous and its existence leads to higher density and at the same time weaker mechanical properties usually higher density mcc tablets have higher mechanical properties but in case of cotton stalks the presence of pith decreases the fiber fiber bonding and thereby the mechanical properties spite of the high silica content of the former silica presents in rice straw fibers are impeded in the fiber lumen and do not affect the fiber fiber bonding tensile strength is often used to describe the strength of a compact however this measurement does not fully reflect inter and intraparticle cohesion within a compact the cohesion the hardness of bagasse and rice straw mcc tablets were close to each other regarding the effect of kind of acid used tablets made from mcc prepared using had generally higher mechanical properties than tablets made from mcc prepared using hcl this may be attributed to the presence of sulfate groups on mcc particles prepared using this phenomenon is due to hornification as a result of wetting and drying of cellulose tablets were made from bagasse and rice straw mcc of mcc samples produced tablets with higher density than those made from mcc before wet granulation the tensile strength of the tablets did not significantly affected by the wet granulation but the energy of failure remarkably decreased a slight decrease in the hardness occurred as a result of the wet granulation the decrease in the energy of failure was the is the presence of high percent of silica in rice straw mcc ie rice straw mcc is naturally in situ silicified the presence of silica within the mcc particles reduced the negative effect of the wet granulation on cohesiveness of tablets ie on the energy of failure tablets made from wet granulated avicell mcc showed also significant decrease in their mechanical properties as a result of wet the wet granulated mcc samples using rice straw pulp to prepare in situ silicified mcc rice straw pulp is characterized by high silica content the high silica content may be an obstacle in using mcc prepared from rice straw in pharmaceuticals on the other hand as mentioned before silicification of mcc with silicon dioxide or silicic acid leads to deposition has some advantages over mcc such as better tablet strength better performance in direct compaction and retaining of tensile strength of tablets after wet
of alternating dual front evolution and active region relocation which is robust to noise and poor initialization initializations can be chosen freely there by requiring limited or no user interaction the dual front evolution forms a new global minimal partition curve within a narrow active region which also guarantees the smoothness automatically the algorithm implementation combines advantages of level set methods and fast marching methods while avoiding some of their disadvantages the computational complexity which is reduced significantly is where is the number of grid points involved in evolutions multiple objects can be segmented simultaneously just by one initial curve and the model is easily path technique in this section we briefly review the minimal path technique proposed by cohen et al their technique is a boundary extraction approach which detects the global minimum of a contour energy between two user supplied points located on the desired boundary thereby avoiding local minima arising from the sensitivity to initializations in snakes or geodesic active contours contrary minimization model without the second derivative term where s represents the arc length parameter on a defined domain irn represents a curve represents the energy along curve is the potential associated to image features is a real positive constant and in this model energy includes the internal regularization a potential that takes lower values near the desired boundary the objective of the minimal path technique is to look for a path along which the integral of is minimal a minimal action map is defined as the minimal energy integrated along a path between a starting point and any point the minimal energy integrated along a path starting from point to point so the minimal path between point and point can be easily deduced by calculating the action map and then sliding back from point to point on this action map according to the gradient descent they also proposed that if given a minimal action map pg inf they defined a saddle point as the first point that and meet each other which means that satisfies and simultaneously the minimal path between points and may also be determined by calculating and and then respectively sliding back from the saddle point on to point and from the saddle point on in order to compute they formulated a pde equation to describe the set of contours in time where represent heights of the level sets of and values of energy is an arbitrary parameter and is the normal to the closed curve these curves correspond to the set of points and the values of on these points are equal to equation represents that a front starting from an velocity until each point inside the image domain is assigned a value for in fact the minimal action map is also the potential weighted distance map because the action map has only one minimum value at the starting point and increases from outward it can be easily determined by solving the eikonal equation a rectangular grid these three algorithms utilize level set methods shape from shading methods and fast marching methods they favored fast marching methods to calculate because of their lower complexity compared to the other two algorithms principle of dual front active contours boundary of choose one point and another point from then we define a velocity taking lower values near the boundary and define two minimal action maps and according to contrary to just considering the saddle point which satisfies simultaneously we consider the set of points pe which satisfy pe at these points pe the level a partition curve which divides i into two regions this partition is also a velocity weighted voronoi diagram the region containing will be referred to as while the other region containing will be referred to as all points in are closer to than to and all points in are closer to than to in terms of and because the action maps are defined as the potential weighted distance maps is called curve the level sets of and represent the evolving fronts and the front evolving velocity takes lower values near when an evolving front arrives at the actual boundary it evolves very slowly and therefore takes a long time to across by choosing appropriate potentials when defining and we may cause the partition curve and define a minimal action map ux as the minimal energy integrated along a path between a starting point and any point according to all points satisfying uxi form a partition boundary and divide uxi into two regions one region contains xi and the other region contains xj because uxi and uxj are the potential weighted distance maps is a potential weighted minimal partition of i with appropriate potentials it is also possible is exactly the actual boundary of and curve within an active region this principle is shown in fig in fig an initial contour separates image i to two regions rin and rout in fig a narrow active region rn is formed by extending the initial curve for example it may be formed by dilating with morphological dilation rn has an inner boundary cin and an outer boundary cout as shown in ucin and ucout these minimal action maps ucin and ucout are defined by different potentials pin and pout respectively based on when the level sets of ucin and ucout meet each other the meeting points form a potential weighted minimal partition curve cnew in active region rn the evolution of curves cin and cout and their meeting locations pg can also be obtained to find the global minimal partition curve only within an active region not in the whole image the degree of this globalness may be changed flexibly by adjusting the size of active regions we now outline the complete dual front active contour model it is an iterative process including the dual front evolution and the active region relocation it may be inner and outer boundaries identify separated boundaries with different labels according to certain conditions and define potentials for the labeled contours use the dual front evolution to propagate
progressing from the north east to the south west as illustrated by the light gray on the right hand side of figure black on the left side a correlation between the timing of sewer pipe construction and development is apparent we calculated the average lag time between interceptor construction and residential construction to be six years in the study area exceptions to this overall pattern were a few locations on the western edge that were developed in the early these locations were most likely developed using septic systems which are not considered in the simulation model because out sewers has not in general been permitted since the early these locations are also outside the urban growth boundary that was created in the historical density pattern appears to be fairly uniform across the study area the exception to this even distribution is a higher density band that stretches diagonally from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the study area this band of higher densities occurs in areas that started to be developed in the late which is logically consistent with the growth management policies of the portland metro area which seek an increased development density over time also this band is positioned close to major roadways the historical development in the study area has a mean development density of lots per acre with a variance of table contains the mean and variance for the densities generated in each scenario the patterns are so similar to the development timing patterns this similarity occurs because home sale prices are in current dollars and thus correlate with timing although the sales price patterns are not presented for any of the scenarios an analysis using nonspatial descriptive statistics is presented later in this section scenario representative pattern of the random allocation model verification the year built and density representative patterns as generated by the method described earlier are presented in figures and the resulting pattern appearing in figure is strikingly different from the historical pattern as expected the random allocation does not reconstruct the historical pattern it lacks the east to west progression that historically occurred and the times of neighboring developments differ greatly from one another whereas the shows adjacent developments of similar timing also there is no apparent correlation between sewer construction and time of development in these results similar to the year built pattern the randomly assigned development density shown in figure is strikingly different from the historical pattern the randomly assigned pattern shows abrupt transitions between high and low density overall this assign ment yields higher density as evidenced by the increased amount of that remains at the end of shown as white space in the thematic maps the pattern in figure does not have a band of higher densities along major roadways as in the historical pattern scenario representative pattern when early extensions were allowed the second set of runs allowed the land developer to bid for land from the landowner developers could extend the interceptor sewer network ahead of the sewerage provider s of extension cost and still profit from the development the pattern in figure again differs from the historical development pattern the east to west development progression does not appear and is replaced by clustered developments which tend to grow around nuclei from one time period to another this tendency occurs because the model locates development on the basis of the largest difference between the landowner s and the developer s net present revenues the present revenues occur in neighborhoods with the existing develop ment therefore the model will tend to locate developments around existing developments the neighboring development sites tend to be within a few years of each other unlike the results of the random assignment scenario which verifies that the model can produce results logically consistent with the development rules used in the scenario the development density pattern shown in figure is similar to the historical development density however the band of high density apparent in the historical density pattern does not appear in comparison to the random pattern the pattern generated by allowing early extensions to the sewer interceptor network does not have large clusters of high density the simulation of this scenario results in a mean density of lots acre with a variance of and standard deviation of which are closer to the historical values than the values produced by the random scenario representative pattern when early extensions were not allowed the development timing and development density patterns produced when early extensions to the planned network were not allowed are shown in figures and the development timing pattern in figure has an east to west development progression similar to the historical pattern in this scenario development begins in the upper right corner and sweeps across the study area model prevented development without sewer access the early development that occurred in the far northwestern and central western edge of the study area in the historical pattern is not present without these development nuclei the model did not place development in this region until the planned pipes reached the western edge of the study area we also see that the timing between sewer extension and development is shorter than that in the historical pattern instead of an average six ix year lag between sewer construction and development in this scenario development appears to take place within a year or two of access to a sewer this is most evident on the west side of the study area the development density pattern shown in figure is a closer approximation to the historical pattern than the random assignment and is similar to the second scenario however the pattern does not have the diagonal band of higher density shown in the increase in density over time as can be inferred from the historical pattern the mean development density is lots acre with a variance of and standard deviation of similar to the statistics for the historical development density distribution in scenario less land
